Kele Building Automation Catalog 2014-2015

30
th
AN
VE I N
A S R
D E Y
O ITI
450 SERIES PG 1352
231RS S E R I E S PG 1045
888.397.KELE (5353)
Kele.com
WORLDWIDE
DISTRIBUTOR
MILLION
IN-STOCK
OF
10
HUNDREDS
for of
BUILDING
AUTOMATION
and
HVAC/R MANUFACTURERS
BBC-SD PG 724
E N G E N IU S PG 913
PRODUCTS
$10 Million...ready to ship 60,000 SKUs on demand We carry almost EVERY SKU from almost EVERY manufacturer. If you dont see what you need, just ask Same-day shipping available Adding in-stock inventory year-round Expertly trained sales team Technical assitance for product selection and installation troubleshooting Experienced project scheduling and logistics UL -Approved Panel Shop to save time and money on your installation Custom tagging available for almost any need FREE valve assembly FREE calibration Partner with us from bidding to completion Proven solutions to common BAS challenges Lower overall LARGE project costs by using our experts to source and coordinate your job Pre-sale and post-sale support Total package solution
SERVICES
SOLUTIONS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

SECTION 1 PAGES 1-64
Dampers, Direct Coupled Actuators, Damper Accessories
NETWORK & WIRELESS

Wireless Sensors, Transmitters, Receivers, Repeaters and Gateways, LON Sensors, N2 Sensors
ALARMS & INDICATION

Loop Powered Indicators, Tower Lights , Alarm Indication Stations, Strobes and Horns, Emergency Operator Stations, Runtime Accumulator
PANEL FABRICATION
Fuses, Switches, Terminal Blocks, Pilot Lights, Wire Duct, Wire Ties, Bridle Rings, J-Hooks, Beam Clamps,
CONTROL VALVES
Ball, Buttery, Solenoid, Globe, Zone
PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS

Valve Actuators, Damper Actuators, Thermostats, Tubing, Fittings, EP Valves , Pressure Reducing Devices
ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS

Flexible Conduit, Conduit Fittings, Boxes, Covers, Weatherproof Boxes, Hangers, Wire, Terminals, Tape, Markers, Switches, Receptacles, Plugs, Safety Switches
POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION

Current and Potential Transformers, Current Switches, Current Transducers, Voltage Monitors, Phase Loss, Power Factor, Power Monitors
ENCLOSURES
General Purpose, NEMA 1, 3R, 12, 4 and 4X, Perforated and Solid Panels
POWER SUPPLIES
Control Transformers, Linear, Switching, DIN Rail, DC Power Supplies, Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)
FLOW
Transmitters, Sensors, Switches, BTU Meters, Flow Totalizers, Flow Devices for Air, Water, and Steam
PRESSURE
Transmitters, Differential Transmitters, Switches, Gauges, Room Pressure Sensors, Snubbers
PSI
GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS

Carbon Dioxide, Carbon Monoxide, Conductivity pH, Refrigerant, Toxic and Combustible Gas, IAQ, Weather Instruments
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

Plug-In, Power, Multi-Voltage, Time Delay, Alternating, Contactors, Enclosed Relays
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Controls, Explosionproof Enclosures, Intrinsic Safety Barriers, Intrinsically Safe and Explosionproof Sensors, Transmitters, Switches, Strobes, Accessories
TEMPERATURE
Thermistors, RTDs, Transmitters, Infrared, Accessories
HUMIDITY
RH, Dew Point, Wet Bulb, Enthalpy, Room, Duct, OSA
THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS

Thermostats, Electronic Controls, Setpoint Controllers
70
LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION

Fluid Level Switches, Ultrasonic Level Switches and Transmitters, Water Detectors
TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT

Signal Generators, Temperature Meters, Humidity Meters, Carbon Dioxide Meters, Multimeters, Data Loggers, Calibration Devices
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Lighting Control Panels, Occupancy Sensors, Light Level Transmitters and Switches, Time Switches, Contactors, Relays
TRANSDUCERS
Isolation, Multiplexers, Pneumatic, Resistance, Sequencers, Voltage and Current Conversion, Rescalers, Converters, Expanders
MOTOR CONTROLS
Variable Frequency Drives and Bypasses, Motor Starters, Motor Disconnects KELE www.kele.com
2014 Kele, Inc. All Rights Reserved. The Kele name and logo are registered trademarks of Kele, Inc.
888-397-5353
ON-SITE
CUSTOM
Kele has been building panels for 30 years. In 2013, the Kele Panel Shop assembled over 5,000 custom panels. Were here to help you with any of your panel assembly needs. All custom panel assembly is done in-house. Since Keles headquarters, distribution center, and Panel Shop are all strategically located in Memphis, TN, we can immediately source panel fabrication components to use in custom panel jobs directly from our distribution center. This saves on lead time and costs, because we have all of the expertise and products needed to build your custom panel in one location.
UL
PANEL
SHOP
Listed & Assembled in the USA
Kele
Performs Quality Control Testing We dont just build from specifications, we always test finished panels to make sure all components work in your application.
Custom Panels, Repeat Panels & Insta-Panels Available We make it easy for our customers, all you have to do is submit the panel specifications and drawing. We then review and assemble your panels. Standard Two-Week Lead Time With Keles process and on-site inventory we can stay flexible and work to meet your deadline. Keles standard lead time is 2 weeks, but requests can be expedited.
For more information, contact our Panel Shop. Call 888.397.5353 or email us at panels@kele.com
A2
CUSTOM
VALVE ASSEMBLY
Because we have our own production shop Kele can ship you product that is ready to install, saving you time and keeping your projects on track. Our custom valves are assembled and shipped the same day you place your order. A free service to you from the experts at Kele.
PERSONALIZED
TAGGING
& LABELING
Many of our customers have discovered our ability to furnish custom products. With our computerized label engraver we can produce engraved labels and logos. We often get orders for custom stainless steel plates with devices mounted. If you need a digital display, some push-buttons and pilot lights mounted on a stainless steel plate, we can do it. We can even have the whole building silkscreened on a plate to put on the enclosure front. A3
Kele, Inc. is an American company and we are proud to support the American workforce. In an effort to unite our customers with some of the very best that American manufacturing has to offer the building automation and HVAC/R industry, were proud to present our new BUY AMERICAN collection.
KELE MAKES IT EASY FOR YOU TO BUY AMERICAN. Please visit kele.com/buyamerican to shop a variety of American-assembled products, sorted by section.
A4
WE BELIEVE in the POWER OF ONE

ONE PRODUCT SOURCE: 60,000 SKUs from over 300 manufacturers ONE SOURCE for AVAILABILITY: Over $10 Million in inventory ready to ship same-day ONE-CALL TECHNICAL SUPPORT: One of the most responsive and experienced technical sales team in the industry
CALL PURCHASE ORDER SHIPMENT

Make Kele your ONE SOURCE SOLUTION for all of your building automation and HVAC/R needs.
A6
A7
TERMS OF SALE
1. SALES POLICY: All orders must be single release for immediate shipment to a single destination. Unless instructed otherwise, partial shipments will be made. Freight and handling fees will be added to each shipment. 2. PRICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE: In the event of a price change, the unshipped portion of any order could be billed at the new price. Our minimum billing is $25.00 plus freight charges. 3. NONSTOCK AND NONCATALOG ITEMS: Products not listed in the current price list or listed as nonstock items are considered to be special order items and may be subject to minimum order quantities, special handling charges, and/or other conditions stipulated by our supplier. Shipments will be made as soon as the items are received from our supplier. Special order items may carry cancellation charges once an order is placed and may also be subject to a restricted return policy. 4. SHIPPING INFORMATION: United States Options for material from stock: A. UPS Surface One to six days anywhere in the continental United States B. Federal Express Express Saver Three-day service in the continental United States C. UPS Blue and Federal Express Economy Two-day service D. UPS Three-day Select Three-day service anywhere in the continental United States E. Federal Express Standard Overnight Delivery by 3:00 p.m. the next business day ** F. UPS Red Label and Federal Express Priority One Overnight Delivery by 10:30 a.m. the next business day ** Freight plus a handling fee of up to $5.00 will be added to each shipment.. Orders for in-stock items entered by 5:00 p.m. Central time will ship same day. Other shipping arrangements are available. Please consult your Kele Sales Associate for special requests. **Delivery times may vary in some areas. Consult your UPS or Federal Express representative for details. International Options for material from stock: A. Federal Express International Services B. UPS Other carriers available upon request. Freight plus a $10.00 handling fee will be added to each shipment. Orders for in-stock items entered by 1:30 p.m. Central time will ship that day for open account customers pending original invoice requirements. International shipments may be sent freight collect at consignees discretion. Note that all freight collect shipments require the customers account number with the selected forwarder. Any freight collect charges billed back to Kele will be invoiced to the customers Kele account. Other shipping arrangements are available. Please consult your international sales contact for special requests. **Delivery times may vary by country and city locations. Consult your Federal Express or UPS representative for details. 5. FREIGHT: Customer is responsible for all shipping and handling charges. All domestic shipments are FOB destination. All international shipments are Ex Works. Claims for loss or damage in transit must be made with the carrier by the customer. All shipments should be unpacked and inspected immediately upon receipt. If damage does not become apparent until shipment is unpacked, customer must make a request for inspection by the carriers agent and file with the carrier. Any external evidence of loss or damage must be noted on the freight bill or carriers receipt and signed by the carriers agent. Failure to do this will result in the carriers refusal to honor the claim. 6. PAYMENT TERMS: United States and Canada A. New accounts: prepayment by a company check or credit card (Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, ACH, Wire) A certified check or credit card is required if the total order amount is $1,000.00 or more. A credit application must be submitted for open account consideration. B. Established accounts: Net 30 days with a past due finance charge rate of 18% per annum. In the event that it is necessary for seller to employ a collection agent or an attorney, or both, to obtain payment of any amounts due on the buyers account, the buyer agrees to pay all of sellers collection cost. C. The customer is responsible for all fees associated with wires including banking fees and intermediary fees. Each performa and invoice will have a line item wire fee of $25.00 (domestic) and $50.00 (international). D. There is a $25.00 return check fee charge. E. Accounts with balances exceeding 30 days past due will be subject to credit card terms F. Accounts with balances exceeding 60 days past due will be subject to restricted shipments G. Accounts with balances exceeding 90 days past due will be subject to 3rd party collection and/or legal actions at customers expense. International Payment terms: Export orders are accepted on the basis of payment in advance of shipment by check in U.S. funds, wire transfer, international money order, credit card (Visa, MasterCard, or American Express, Discover) or letter of credit. A. Open Accounts: Will be considered upon receipt of a credit application. B-G. (See above) H. Letter of Credit: Payment may be made by irrevocable confirmed L/C provided that the total invoice value of the export order is more than U.S. $10,000.00. Large multi-line L/C orders must allow for two partial shipments and be valid for a period of at least one hundred and fifty (150) days. Payments will be made in U.S. dollars. A $500 or .05% of L/C (whichever is greater) fee will be charged for L/Cs. I. Duties and taxes for international shipments are the responsibility of the consignee. Duties and taxes inadvertently charged to Kele will be invoiced to the customers Kele account.
KELE www.kele.com
A8
888-397-5353
TERMS OF SALE
continued
7. CREDITS: It is Keles Credit Apply Policy to leave credits on account up to 60 days. Customer is to apply credits and notify dlcredit@kele.com immediately upon receipt of credit. If credit is over 60 days old, a customer refund will be issued unless requested otherwise. 8. NEW/UNUSED RETURNS: Any material returned must have a return authorization number to be considered for credit. Material returned for credit is subject to: A. 15% restocking charge or $25.00, whichever is greater, if the product is unopened and returned within 90 days of shipment, or B. 25% or $35.00, whichever is greater, if opened or returned over 90 days from shipment. Returns resulting from errors by the seller will not be subject to these charges. Shipments not covered by a valid RMA number may be subject to refusal of delivery. New and used returned product shall be received in original packaging. No returns allowed on product over 180 days (six months from shipment date). Custom products are not returnable for credit. Freight or other costs incurred in restocking will be deducted from the product credit memo. Return of nonstocked items is subject to manufacturers acceptance. Returned material must be shipped prepaid. 9. WARRANTY RETURNS: Warranty periods vary on products sold and period for each may be found under specifications on catalog page or Kele website. Any material returned must have a return authorization number. Returned material is to be shipped prepaid. Product returned may either be repaired, replaced or credited under warranty. An advance replacement may also be requested. Advance replacements will be billed for. Upon receipt, product will be returned to manufacturer for warranty evaluation. Standard lead time for warranty evaluation is 2-4 weeks from date manufacturer has received product back. Replacement/credit to be issued upon confirmation product is covered under warranty. Any product found to not be covered under warranty (customer damaged/no problem found) can either be returned to customer as is or scrapped. 10. WARRANTY: Kele, seller of the products described in this catalog, believes that technical information, specifications, test results, and recommendations herein are correct, but does not guarantee their accuracy or completeness. The seller provides no warranties beyond those offered by the manufacturer. The seller will provide repaired or replacement material as directed by the manufacturer. Since the seller, Kele, does not control the use of its products, there are no express warranties that extend beyond the description contained herein. SELLER DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Since the seller cannot control the manner of use of its products after their sale, seller will not be responsible for any consequential or indirect damages. Since seller is only acting as a distributor of products manufactured by other companies, liability for breach of warranty claims shall be limited to the manufacturer. No manufacturers warranty will apply to products which are in any way altered or modified after delivery by seller. Terms of Buyers or Users purchase order shall not supersede this disclaimer and no warranty, expressed or implied, other than stated herein, shall be effective unless contained in an agreement signed by an officer of Kele. 11. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES: The seller shall not be liable for any consequential, contingent, or incidental damages whatsoever. 12. DISCLAIMER: This Catalog comprises a general overview of the products described herein. It is solely for information purposes. Users must independently evaluate the suitability of, and test each product for their application. Kele, Inc. makes no warranties or guarantees as to the accuracy or completeness of the information in this Catalog and disclaims any liability resulting from its use. Product dimensions in this catalog are nominal and are provided for the convenience of our customers. Kele, Inc. reserves the right to make product changes from time to time, without prior notification, which may change the dimensions shown. We therefore recommend the customer checks each product before using for customer projects or product development and specification. Kele, Inc.s only obligations are those in our Standard Terms and Conditions ofSale and in no case will Kele, Inc. be liable for any incidental, indirect, or consequential damages arising from the sale, resale, use, or misuse of its products. No products should be used, alone, or in conjunction with others, in any product, for a safety related purpose. Kele, Inc. shall have no obligation or responsibility to approve the sale of materials by distributors to customers, it being the sole responsibility of the distributor or customer to determine if the intended use involves product safety issues. The customer understands and acknowledges that dangers of personal injury are inherent in the event these products are used in violation of the warning set forth herein and customer expressly and voluntarily assumes all risk for injury or death sustained in the event these products are used in violation of the warning set forth herein. Customer indemnifies and holds Kele, Inc. harmless from any claim, loss or damage resulting there from, including Keles reasonable attorneys fees. The terms of this warning are incorporated by reference in all future purchase orders. Kele, Inc. reserves the right to change or update, without notice, any information contained in this Catalog. We may change, without notice, the design, construction, materials, processing, or specification of any products; and to discontinue or limit production or distribution of any products. For any items not manufactured by Kele or Kele Precision Manufacturing, please consult the manufacturers customer service line or website for the most up to date information and product details. 13. RIGHT TO SUBSTITUTE: The seller reserves the right to substitute materials used in construction of equipment sold, provided said substitution does not modify the operational characteristics of the equipment sold. 14. HOURS OF OPERATION: Central Time Zone: Sales Office 6:30 AM - 7:00 PM - Business Office 8:00 AM - 5:00 PM Fax/E-Mail/Web Orders: 24 hours a day - Orders will be acknowledged during normal hours of operation. Voice mail messaging is available after normal hours.
THESE TERMS OF SALE MAY BE MODIFIED WITHOUT NOTICE. THE TERMS OF SALE AT THE TIME OF SALE SHALL APPLY. THE SELLER AS REFERRED TO IN THE TERMS OF SALE IS KELE, INC.
KELE www.kele.com
A9
888-397-5353
Application
APPLICATION INDEX
Pages Application
Pages
Accumulator/Consumption Display................................ 102 Actuator............................................................................1-64 Actuator Accessories....................................................7-8 Direct Coupled Actuator.......................................1-2, 9-45 Fail-Safe.................................................................. 43-47 Fire and Smoke.........................................................48-56 Non Spring Return.......................................1, 9-12, 17-27 Spring Return........................................................2, 28-42 Rectangular Dampers...............................................61-64 Round Dampers........................................................57-60 Air Compressor Accessories Filters.....................................................899-900, 903-909 Regulators..............................................899-900, 903-909 Air Differential Gauges.......................1101-1102, 1106-1108 Air Differential Switches............................. 1070-1088, 1108 Air Flow Stations.......................................................273-275 Air Pressure Switches.......................................... 1084, 1091 Air Velocity Instruments.................................... 276, 278-285 Alarm Audible......................................................................67-69 Beacon......................................................................69-75 Status Indicator.........................................................76-83 Visual Signal.......................................................67-68, 74 Alarm Dialer...............................................................750-751 Alarm Indication Station...............................................65-66 Averaging Sensors................................................1230-1244 BACnet.................. 609-617, 713-730, 734-735, 739-747, 752, 756-758, 761-762, 766, 770, 774-775, 792-793, 812, 917-918 BACnet IP......................717-720, 727-730, 761-762, 813-815 BTU Monitor................................................299-300, 316-319 BTU Transmitter................................................. 299, 312-313 Barometric Pressure.................................................432-433 Beam Clamps............................................................ 226, 229 Bridle Rings.............................................................. 226, 229 Bulb Wells................................. 1204, 1210, 1229, 1293-1294 Butterfly Valves..........................................................193-205 Bypass Valve Assemblies.............................................. 1053 CANbus......................................................................813-815 Cable Clamps / Ties.......................................................... 229 Cable Hangers.......................................................... 226, 229 Calibration Equipment..........................................1393-1394 Calibration Kit............................................................436-437 Carbon Dioxide.....345-368,772-773,810-812, 836-837, 1400 Carbon Monoxide.... 369-377, 380-381, 386-387, 1039, 1405 Circuit Breaker...........................................................855-856 Combustible Gas Monitor..........382-385, 388-397, 400-401, 411, 413, 420,1403-1404 Condensate Pumps.......................................................... 326 Conductivity Measurement............................... 422-423, 425 Connectors (Crimp)...................................................227-228 Contactors...............................................664-665, 1151-1152 Control Cabinets............................................................... 248 Control Mounting Panels..........................................239-269 Control Transformers............................. 8, 977-982, 984-986 Controller (Setpoint)...........................1359-1360, 1363-1364 Current................................................. 913-919, 921-924, 950 Current Switches....................................939-948, 953-954 Current Transducers.......................941, 948-949, 951-955 Isolation.............................................................1445-1446 Limiter...............................................................1295-1296
Transformers.........................................................932-938 Dampers.........................................................................57-64 Position Indication.........................................................3-8 Rectangular Dampers.......................................61-64, 891 Round Dampers........................................................57-60 Dataline Surge Protection................................................ 966 Data Logger.............................................. 913-917, 920, 1395 Dewpoint Transmitter.................................552-533, 555-556 Differential Pressure...................................................... 1070 Gauges.................................1101-1102, 1106-1107, 1111 Switches...............................1070-1083, 1085-1088, 1108 Transmitters (Air)....... 1009-1010, 1012-1034, 1092-1093, 1095-1096, 1099-1100 Transmitters (Water)..........................................1039-1052 Disconnect................................................................ 845, 934 Electric / Pneumatic Valves Air (EP)........................891-898 Electrical Boxes and Covers.......... 218-221, 383, 389, 1100 Electrical Tapes and Wire Markers...........................230-232 Electronic/pneumatic transducer............... 1433-1436, 1454 Emergency Lighting Control....................................666-671 Emergency Operator Stations......................................84-91 EnOcean......................................................813-815, 817-838 Enclosures.................................................................233-272 Accessories...........................................................270-271 Aspirated.......................................................254-255, 567 Control Cabinets.......................................................... 248 Explosionproof .....................................................481-487 Flush Mount..........................................................246-247 General Purpose.................................................. 263, 269 NEMA 1..........................................239, 241-247, 249-251 NEMA 12...............................................................266-268 NEMA 12 Concept....................................................... 267 NEMA 3R..............................................................252-255 NEMA 4.................................................256, 258, 267-268 NEMA 4X ..............................................260-262, 264-265 NEMA 4X (Stainless)........................................... 257, 259 Non-metallic...........................................260-262, 264-267 Perf Panel..................................................................... 240 Prefabricated.................................................234, 237-238 Screw Cover................................................................. 244 Window Kits................................................................. 269 Enthalpy / Wet Bulb Measurement...........................552-554 Ethernet........ 717-718, 720, 727, 726-738, 748-749, 759-764, 813-815, 921 Ethernet Switches.....................................................736-738 Explosion Proof/Intrinsically Safe Products...........441-496 Filters, Pneumatic............................................................ 900 Fittings........................................................................903-909 Conduit..........................................................214-217, 272 Float Switches...........................................................587-594 Flow............................................................................273-344 Impeller Flow Sensors...........................................289-290 Magnetic................................................................303-306 Mass Flow.............................................................286-288 Meter.....................................................................335-340 Monitor..................................................................299-300 Switches........................................................320-325, 462 Target Meters........................................................310-311 Totalizers......... 297-298, 301-306, 309, 316-319, 327-334
A10
Application
APPLICATION INDEX
Pages Application
Pages
Transmitters.................... 282-285, 289, 296-298, 312-313 Ultrasonic............................... 301-302, 316-319, 327-330 Vortex....................................................................307-309 Water.....................................................................335-336 Flow Measurement.....................................273-319, 327-343 Airflow Stations.....................................................273-275 Natural Gas...........................................................286-288 Totalizers......... 297-298, 301-306, 309, 316-319, 327-334 Transmitters.................... 282-285, 289, 296-298, 312-313 Velocity..................................................................278-285 Water....................... 289-295, 301-311, 314-319, 327-340 Freezestats.............................................................1243-1244 Fuse Holders...............................................844-846, 851-854 Fuses................................................................................. 854 Gas Monitor / Transmitter......345-440, 466-467, 1401-1405, 1413 Gauges................................................................... 1101-1111 Goof Plate........................................................................ 1391 HMI Graphic Display Panel.......................................725-726 Handheld Thermometer................................................. 1397 Hazardous Level...............................................455, 460-461, 463-464 Pressure................................................................456-459 Hook-up Wire.................................................................... 213 Humidity......................................................447-449, 497-568 Aspirated Enclosures................................................... 567 Dewpoint................................................505-506, 552-556 Enthalpy................................................................552-554 Explosion Proof Transmitters.................................447-449 Humidistats...................................................557-563, 566 Meters, Handheld............................................ 1398, 1400 RH Transmitters (1%, 2%, 3%, 5%)....497-551, 557-563 Washdown.................................................................... 527 Wet Bulb................................................................552-554 Immersion Wells....................................................1205-1208 Indoor Air Quality (IAQ).........................364-368, 1305-1309 Infrared Temperature Transmitter.........................1289-1290 Infrared Thermometer.................................................... 1399 Intrinsic Safety Barriers............................................474-477 Key Selector Switch......................................................... 865 LCD Displays......................................................... 93, 97-102 LED Displays....................................................................... 96 Labels................................................................................ 872 Lamps (Panel)............................................................862-864 Leak Detection...........................................................573-581 Light Level Sensors and Switches................................ 625, 627-630, 643-651, 672-673 Lighting......................................................................609-680 Contactor...............................................................664-665 Controllers / Panels...............................................609-623 Daylighting.............. 613-617, 643-644, 650-651, 668-669 Emergency Light Control.......................................666-671 Light Level Sensors and Switches..................611-612, 625, 627-630, 643-651, 672-673 Occupancy Sensors..............................624-630, 633-636, 638-640, 654 Relays.................................... 660-663, 668-671, 679-680 Switches................................. 647-649, 652-657, 676-680 Zone Control......................... 611-612, 615-619, 627-628, 640, 643-644, 650-651
Lightning Arresters.......................................................... 969 Liquid Differential Pressure Switches.................1085-1088 Liquid Differential Pressure Transmitters...........1043-1052 Liquid Level Control.......................................... 582-584, 592 Liquid Level Switches........................ 572, 582-583, 585-595 Liquid Level Transmitters..........................582-583, 596-606 Leak Detection.......................569-571, 580-581, 587, 589 Lonworks......................273-274, 312-313, 622-623, 717-718, 733, 763-764, 774-775, 812, 913-918, 925-926, 930-931, 1139-1140, 1310-1320 Thermostat........................................................1310-1320 Loop-powered Indicators................................... 97, 100, 101 Magnehelic Gauges..................................... 1106-1107, 1108 Magnetic Flowmeter..................................................303-306 Manual Override Boards................................................ 1470 Mass Flow..................................................................286-288 Mesh Network..............................766-769, 776-777, 780-793 Modbus........................................286-288, 299-300, 303-306, 312-319, 327-330, 367-368, 392-397, 406-407, 466-467, 575577, 622-623, 704-706, 713-720, 725-726, 734-735, 742-743, 770, 792-793, 810-812, 814-815, 831, 913-918, 921, 925-931 Modulating Electric Loads....................................1361-1362 Motor Controls...........................................................681-712 Motor Disconnects........................................689, 692-694 Motor Starters........................................681-688, 690-694 Variable Frequency Drives.....................695-697, 702-706 Variable Frequency Drives with Bypass.698-701, 707-709 N2............312-313, 622-623, 704-706, 713-714, 812, 913-918 Network Devices........................................................713-840 I/O Module......................................739-741, 745-747, 816 Protocol Translation...............................................713-714 Repeater............................... 731-733, 778-779, 794-795, 817-819, 821, 824, 833 Router....................................................727-732, 810-811 Terminator.............................................................734-735 Occupancy Sensors.................................. 624-630, 633-636, 638-640, 654, 817-818, 1372-1375 Oxygen Sensor.............382-383. 390-393, 408-409, 466-467 Panels.........................................................................223-272 pH Measurement.............................................. 424-425, 1395 Phase Loss Monitoring..............................927-929, 956-961 Photo Cell (Light Sensitive Resistor)......................643-646 Photohelic Gauges....................................................... 1108 Pilot Lights..................................................862-865, 870-871 Pitot Tubes......................................................................... 277 Pneumatic. 873-912, 1417-1420, 1425-1428, 1430-1436, 1453 Actuators for Dampers...........................883-884, 887-890 Actuators for Valves................ 879-880, 881-882, 885-886 Filters........................................................................... 900 Fittings...................................................................903-909 Pressure Regulators.................................................... 899 Thermostats..................................................873-878, 910 Transducers...... 1417-1420, 1425-1428, 1430-1436, 1453 Tubing............................................................901-902, 907 VAV Kit...................................................883-884, 891-894 Potential Transformers...................................... 913, 927-928 Potentiometer........................................ 870-872, 1363-1364, 1443-1444, 1449-1452, 1456-1465 Power / Watts...........................................925-926, 1435-1436 Power Control Stations...................................................... 92
A11
Application
APPLICATION INDEX
Pages Application
Pages
Power Monitor Interface............................................913-920 Power Supplies........................................................977-1008 Pressure.................................................................1009-1120 Bypass Valve Assembly............................................. 1053 Controllers...............................................1092-1093, 1119 Differential Switches (Air)........................1070-1083, 1108 Differential Switches (Liquid).............................1085-1088 Differential Transmitters (Air).........1009-1011, 1016-1019, 1023-1026, 1030-1034 Differential Transmitters (Liquid)........................1039-1052 Gauges..............................................................1101-1111 Manifolds.................................................................... 1054 Regulators.................................................................... 899 Transmitters.................... 456-458, 1103-1104, 1016-1068 Protocol Translation..................................................713-714 Pulse Divider................................................................... 1471 Push Buttons..................................................... 864, 868-891 RTD Sensors............................442-447, 493-494, 1169-1270 Radio Frequency (RF)...............................................770-773 Rain / Snow Sensor...................................................434-435 Rainfall Transmitter...................................................432-433 Receptacles and Switches........................................222-225 Refrigerant Sensors......................................................... 438 Regulators..................................................................899-900 Relays.....................................................................1121-1168 Alternating.................................................................. 1155 LON............................................................................ 1139 Latching...................................................................... 1137 Lighting.......................1133-1136, 1145-1146, 1148, 1150 Motor Starter Interface............................................... 1167 Multi-voltage............................................1143-1144, 1147 Plug-in.......................................... 1129, 1155, 1160, 1161 Power.................................1129, 1132, 1133, 1135-1150, 1155-1164 Pulse Initiators.......................................................658-659 Sockets................................1123-1124, 1127-1128, 1131 Solid-State.........................................................1153-1154 Time Delay...........................1156-1158, 1160, 1162-1166 Resistance Output Transducers.................................... 1455 Room Pressure Monitor.............................. 1097, 1099-1100 SNMP.......................... 575, 578, 715, 719, 720, 748, 792, 812 Sequencers.................................................. 1456-1465, 1468 Setpoint Controllers 4-20 mA................... 1119, 1359, 1360, 1363, 1364 Signal Generator....................................................1393-1394 Smoke Detectors................................ 411-414, 418-421, 440 Snow Sensor..............................................................434-435 Snubbers......................................................................... 1112 Solar Compensator........................................................ 1299 Spiralite (Wire Wrap)........................................................ 860 Standalone Control................ 382, 390,872,1305,1350,1351 Static Pressure Switches.................. 1070-1074, 1076-1078, 1080, 1083, 1113 Steam Flow Meter....................................... 182, 301,309-311 Strap-on Pipe Sensor / Bracket.................. 1251-1258, 1366 Subpanels (Perf Panel)............................... 240, 256,257,267 Surge / Transient Protection......................957-968, 974-976 Switches Controllers.................. 724, 739-747, 752-758, 1350-1366 EP Switch......................................................895-896, 911
Emergency.................84-91,103,104, 480, 609, 610, 614, 666-671, 868, 870 Engraved Plates................................................... 867, 872 Lighting..........................834, 819-821, 826, 830, 834, 835 Occupancy............................................615-616, 624, 640 Override Assembly..................................................... 1470 PE Switch................................................................... 1084 Pushbutton.............................................568-587, 864-865 Selector (Rotary)....................................864-867, 869-871 Time..................................................................... 676, 677 Toggle......................... 218, 219, 221, 222, 861, 866, 1300 Temperature......................................................1291-1252 Controllers..... 30, 119, 426, 450, 578, 581, 615, 616, 643, 650, 689, 704, 725, 745, 755, 768, 770, 814-817, 826, 832, 840, 891, 892, 894, 911, 976, 999, 1005-1008, 1093, 1110, 1117, 1132, 1305-1392, 1416, 1445, 1466 Limit Controls..........................................1354-1358, 1385 Temperature Sensors / Transmitters Duct Sensor......................................445-449, 1186-1187, 1188-1190, 1195-1204, 1224-1229 Duct Transmitters.........508, 522, 1195-1201, 1226, 1228, 1230, 1232, 1234, 1236, 1237, 1244, 1272, 1320 Explosion Proof.....................................................443-449 High Temperature Probe............................................ 1266 Immersion Sensor.............................................1209-1216 Immersion Transmitters..................1277-1282, 1286-1287 Immersion Wells................................................1293-1294 Infared........................................................................ 1399 OSA Sensor..................................1186-1187, 1189-1190, 1204, 1216, 1224-1229 OSA Transmitters...........................1277-1282, 1286-1287 Room Sensor............................................442, 1169-1194 RTD Sensors.............................................442, 1169-1170 RTD Transmitters..............................443-446, 1277-1283 Room Transmitters............................................1271-1276 Sensor Accessories..........................................1295-1300 Sensor Option...................................................1295-1300 Strap-on Pipe Sensor / Bracket............. 1186, 1194, 1204, 1245-1258, 1260, 1262-1263, 1268, 1270 Terminal Blocks.........................................................841-850 Test Instruments....................................................1393-1414 Thermal Conducting Compound................................... 1298 Thermal Ribbon.............................................................. 1268 Thermistors.................................................... 442, 1169-1170 Thermometers (Digital)............................ 1296, 1396, 1397 Thermostats...........................................................1305-1392 Bulb or Sensor Probe...... 453, 507, 509, 785, 1211, 1294, 1378, 1379 Communicating.............615, 930, 1310-1314, 1316, 1320 Electronic Controller......................................... 1352, 1433 Explosion Proof.................................................... 452, 454 Goof Plate............................................ 1331, 1335, 1391 Guards............................... 1311, 1314, 1326, 1329, 1392 Line Voltage.... 1307, 1311, 1314, 1326, 1329, 1341, 1392 Multistage....1312-1314, 1323, 1327-1329, 1342, 1358, 1460, 1462, 1464, 1466 Pneumatic.............................................................873-878 Programmable........... 1305-1309, 1312-1320, 1323-1347, 1373-1374
A12
Application
APPLICATION INDEX
Pages Application
Pages
Proportional...................................1365-1366, 1370, 1377 1305-1314, 1321-1329, 1332, 1334-1346, Remote Sensor. 1348-1349, 1363, 1365-1366, 1370-1377 Room................1305, 1310-1349, 1363, 1365-1377, 1389 Tri-state (Floating)...................................................... 1370 Thermowell............................... 1204, 1210, 1229, 1293-1294 Time Clocks - Electronic...........................................674-675 Time Switches - Manual............................................676-678 Timers...................................677-678, 1156-1159, 1162-1163 Timing Relays.....................................1160-1161, 1164-1166 Toggle Switches............................................................... 866 Totalizer Display............................................................... 102 Toxic Gas Sensors............. 345-411, 413, 418, 420, 436-438, 1403-1404 Track (DIN Rail Mount)................. 474, 841-846, 1121, 1123, 1125, 1127-1132, 1432, 1434 Transducers...........................................................1417-1472 Analog Input to Analog Output.................................. 1455 Analog to Floating Point............................................. 1455 Averaging..........................................................1447-1448 Current / Voltage to Current / Voltage......1441-1444, 1447 Current / Voltage to Pressure............................1417-1428 Current / Voltage to Resistance.........................1449-1452 Current Isolation................................................1445-1446 Math Module.....................................................1447-1448 PWM to Current / Voltage..............1426-1428, 1453, 1455 PWM to Pressure...........................1419-1424, 1426-1428 PWM to Resistance.................................1449-1452, 1455 Signal Selector (Hi/Lo)......................................1447-1448 Square Root Extraction.....................................1447-1448 Tri-state to Analog Transducers.........................1437-1440 Tri-state to Current / Voltage..............................1437-1440 Tri-state to Pressure................................1417, 1419-1428 Transformers..................................................................... 983 Control...................................................................977-991 Current..........................................................932, 934-937 Isolation.................................................................985-986 Power (120V)............................................................... 981 Tri-State to Analog Transducers...........................1437-1440 Tri-State to Pressure Transducers.............. 1417, 1419-1428 Tubing (Pneumatic-Plastic)......................................901-902 Ultrasonic Flow Meter................................301-302, 316-319 Ultrasonic Level Transmitter / Switch...... 582-583, 585-586, 596-600 Valves................... 105-107, 127-132, 145-151, 167, 181, 193 ASCO....................................................................123-124 Air (EP Switch)......................................................896-898 Ball Valves.....................................................127-150, 162 Belimo...................................................................133-137 Butterfly Valves......................................................193-205 Danfoss Solenoid..................................................125-126 Erie.........................................................105-106, 119-122 Globe Valves..........................................156-161, 164-192 High Performance Rotary..............................145-150, 193 Honeywell............................... 117-118, 140-144, 164-166 Johnson Controls................... 138-139, 160-162, 178-181 Kele Electric Zone Valves......................................107-110 NEMA 4.................................................................193-205 Pressure Regulating..............................................151-155 Solenoid Valves.....................................................123-126
Spartan Zone Valves.............................................113-116 Stainless Steel......................................................136-137 Zone Valves...........................................................105-122 Varistors............................................................................ 970 Vibration.....................................................................430-431 Switches.................................................428-431, 470-473 Transmitters............................................426-429, 470-473 Voltage................................................................ 917-924, 930 Measurement Transducers.....................913-917, 930-931 Monitor................... 913-917, 930, 956-963, 966-967, 969 Output Transducers.... 1417-1432, 1437-1442, 1456-1471 Power Transducer...................................913-917, 930-931 Transformers.........................................................977-991 Vortex Flow Meter......................................................307-309 Water Detector.................... 569-573, 575-579, 581, 587, 589 Watt Transducers.......................................................930-931 Weather Instruments.................................................432-433 Web Server...................... 727, 736, 742, 748-749, 1305-1308 Wells......................................... 1204, 1210, 1229, 1293-1294 Wet Bulb Sensor........................................................552-553 Whisker Switch.................................................. 3-4, 478, 897 Wind Direction...........................................................432-433 Wind Speed................................................................432-433 Wire Duct....................................................................857-860 Wire Nuts.....................................................222-223, 228-229 Wire Terminals.................................... 226-229, 841-842, 853 Wire Ties.....................................................................226-229 Wire Communications & Control.............................209-213 Wire Panel Hook-up.......................................................... 213 Wireless.........679-680, 748, 759-838, 1141-1142, 1305-1308 ZigBee.........................................................................813-816
A13
Manufacturer
MANUFACTURER INDEX
Pages Manufacturer Pages
Connect Air International ...............212 ContaClip ........................................ 848 Contemporary Controls .........727, 737 Continental Control Systems, LLC .... 925-926 Control Solutions, Inc............ 719-720, 742-744 Cooper..............................474-477, 1397 Danfoss, Inc.................... 125-126, 1065 Deltrol Controls............1148-1149, 1155 Det-tronics................................468-469 DITEK.........................................962-965 Dongan Electric MFG Co................ 984 Dwyer.... 277, 449, 459, 465, 593, 1080, 1106-1108, 1411-1412 Dynacon, Inc.................................. 1384 Dynasonics................ 301-302, 316-319 E Instruments.............1396, 1401-1402, 1406-1410, 1413 E.J. Brooks...................................... 934 E+E Elektronik Corp....... 282, 501-502, 505-506, 564-565, 810-811 EDC International, Inc............ 326, 572 EDCO.........................................966-967 Edwards Signaling..........67, 69-81, 479 EE Controls, Inc...... 687-688, 690-694, 1152 EGS Electrical Group...... 216-221, 226, 272, 488 Electromagnetic Industries....935-937 Emco Flow System.................. 307-309 Extech Instruments... 1398-1399, 1405 Filtersoft........................................... 900 Flowline.....460-461, 463-464, 582-583, 585-586, 592, 596-604 Fluid Air Division of Memphis....... 899 Fox Thermal Instruments........286-288 Franklin Electrofluid....................... 896 Fuji Electric........................... 1359-1360 Functional Devices Inc.................. 670671, 679-680, 941, 946-947, 953-954, 983, 985-986, 988-991, 993, 1133-1142, 1145-1146 Gentex Corporation.......................... 68 Grasslin............................................ 675 Greystone Energy Systems.........1173, 1242, 1270 Hecheng Electrical......................... 1151 Hoffman Enclosures Co.......... 241-247, 252, 254, 256-257, 260-261, 266-267, 269-270
Manufacturer Pages
3M...............................230-232, 378-381 ABB, Inc.. 664, 681-686, 689, 842-845, 855, 858, 870-871, 968, 1432 ACI............................. 497-498, 519-520, 538-539, 549-550, 774-791, 942-945, 952, 1180, 1194, 1201, 1213, 1221, 1238, 1256, 1453-1455 Advantech...........725-726, 738, 745-747 AEG................................................... 665 AIC Wireless............................. 759-765 Air Draulics Engineering................ 899 Air Products & Controls, Inc... 411-414, 417, 420, 987, 1143-1144, 1147 Akron Foundry Co...................482-483 Altech Corp. .................... 263, 850, 856 American Auto-Matrix.................... 724 Amphenol Advanced Sensors ..... 347348, 357-358, 515-516, 527, 543-544, 547-548, 552-553, 555-556, 661-662, 1051-1052, 1034, 1113, 1400 Appleton .......................................... 489 Artisan Controls Corp.......... 1156-1157 ASCO .........................................123-124 Aschroft, Inc. ....... 456-458, 1023-1027, 1047-1048, 1068, 1111 Aura, Inc................................ 1293-1294 Bacharach ............... 384-385, 390-391, 398-399, 410, 436, 1403-1404 Badger Meter .......... 289-296, 299-300, 303-306, 312-315, 327-340 Balmac .......................426-429, 470-473 BAPI ..................362-365, 377, 523-524, 540-541, 794-809, 1028-1029, 1181, 1202-1203, 1214-1215, 1222-1223, 1239-1240, 1257-1258, 1262-1265 Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc............. 1-2, 11-12, 30-33, 43-47, 55-56, 133-137, 151-155, 167-172, 202-205, 487, 13541358 Bellofram.........................................1431 Blue Ridge Technologies.609-612, 655 Burkert Contromatic Corp..... 422-425 Burton Wire & Cable ...................... 209 Caleffi North America .............320-321 Carlton-Bates Company ................ 478 Circuit Breakers Industries, Inc.... 856 Clark Solutions ............................. 1053 Cleveland Controls, Inc.......1071-1072, 1075-1079 Columbus Electric........................ 1367 Comptus, Inc............................432-433
Honeywell....... 1-2, 17-18, 25-27, 34-35, 53-54, 57-58, 117-118, 140-144, 162-166, 210-211, 351-352, 452, 695-709, 873874, 879-880, 887-888, 930-931, 980, 1305-1309, 1315-1320, 1330-1337, 13461351, 1382-1383, 1388 Honeywell Analytics............................. 366-368, 375-376, 394-397, 400-401, 406-407, 466-467 Hubbell..............................620-621, 653 I.C. Innovations, Inc...................... 1300 Iboco Corporation....................859-860 Ideal Industries, Inc.........................812 IDEC Corporation.... 863-865, 867-869, 1000-1001, 1121-1124, 1132, 1153-1154, 1158-1159 IFM Efector............430-431, 1089-1090, 1291-1292 Intelligent Lighting Control....622-623, 652, 663 Illumra........................................ 817-829 Industrial Control Communications... 713-714 Industrial Electronic............... 102, 862 Industrial Sales Company...... 450-451, 488, 854 Innovative Solutions LLC....... 587-588, 590-591 Intec Controls...........................386-387 Integra Enclosures...................264-265 Intermatic.......................... 647-648, 674 Interstate Wire Company.................213 Invensys........................................... 900 Johnson Controls................................. 1-2, 7-8, 21-22, 39-40, 63-64, 138-139, 160-161, 173-181, 324-325, 453, 566, 875-876, 881-882, 889, 897-898, 1081, 1084, 1087, 1186-1187, 1352-1353, 13681369, 1378-1381, 1391 Kele...................................... 1-2, 6, 9-10, 28-29, 65-66, 93, 96-101, 105-106, 109110, 156-159, 206, 237-240, 273-276, 278-279, 280, 283, 297-298, 322-323, 345-346, 349-350, 359-361, 369-374, 382-383, 388-389, 392-393, 402-405, 408-409, 434-436, 509-514, 528-533, 545-546, 567, 567, 570-571, 587, 589, 624-625, 645-646, 658-659, 672-673, 752-755, 766-769, 872, 895, 913-919, 939-940, 948-951, 979, 982, 994-997, 999, 1009-1013, 1039-1040, 1055-1060,
A14
Manufacturer
MANUFACTURER INDEX
Pages Manufacturer Pages
RLE Technologies........... 573-581, 595, 715-716, 792-793 Rotronics..................................503-504 Ruskin Manufacturing.................59-62 Saginaw Control & Engineering... 249250, 253, 255, 258-259, 268, 271 Schneider Electric................... 1-2, 7-8, 23-24, 41-42, 119-122, 182-192, 484486, 566, 813-816, 877-878, 885-886, 890, 900, 903-904, 909, 1129-1131, 1162-1163, 1389 Sensaphone...............................748-749 SenseAir....................................355-356 Sensocon........................................ 1110 Sensor Switch..........633-639, 654, 678 Setra.......525-526, 542, 551, 1014-1022, 1041-1046, 1061-1062, 1094-1100 Siemens Bldg Technologies, Inc... 1-2, 19-20, 36-38, 48-52, 111-112, 127-132, 251 Sirena............................................ 82-83 Sola Hevi-Duty................ 981, 992, 998, 1002-1003 Sontay....................................... 770-773 Spartan Peripheral Devices..... 113-116 SSAC, Inc............. 1160-1161, 1164-1166 Stahlin Enclosures.......................... 262 Switchlab, Inc.................................. 849 SymCom Inc....................957-961, 1155 System Sensor .. 415-416, 418-419, 421 Thermoken................................830-838 Thomas & Betts................................... 3 Time Mark........................................ 956 TPI Corp...............454, 1073-1074, 1385 United Electric.. 1085-1086, 1088, 1091 Vaisala........353-354, 499-500, 517-518, 534-537, 554, 1398 Value Line.................. 841, 857, 977-978 Valve Solutions.......... 145-150, 193-201 Vector Controls........................558-563 Veris........................................... 927-929 Viconics Electronics.... 557, 1310-1314, 1321-1322, 1327-1329, 1361-1362 Visonic....................................... 750-751 Vynckier Enclosure Systems......... 263 Wago......................................... 228, 736 Waterline Controls.......................... 584 Wattstopper..............613-619, 626-632, 641-642, 649, 656-657, 660, 666-669 Weidmuller....................................... 846 WESCO..............................................214
Manufacturer Pages
1066-1067, 1092-1093, 1054, 1070, 1011-1102, 1112, 1167, 1169-1170, 11761177, 1182-1183, 1188, 1191, 1195-1196, 1199-1200, 1204-1206, 1209-1210, 1216, 1219-1220, 1224-1227, 1245-1246, 1249, 1251-1252, 1271-1274, 1277-1283, 1288, 1363-1366, 1393-1394, 1397, 1417-1429, 1433-1434, 1437-1452, 1456-1471 KMC Controls........13-16, 281, 756-758, 883-884, 891-894, 1430 KNS Associates.............................. 999 Kunhung Electric Co........................... 3 Lascar Electronics.............94-95, 1395 Leviton Manufacturing Co..............214, 222-225, 229 Littlefuse, Inc................................... 854 Loytec ......... 717-718, 721-723, 728-732, 734-735, 739-741 Magenepull..................................... 1414 Magnelab...........................932-933, 938 Mamac Systems.1030-1031, 1035-1038, 1049-1050, 1241, 1435-1436 Marathon Special Products...........847, 851-853 Marktime.................................. 640, 676 MARS Motors and Armatures........ 225 McDonnell & Miller.................. 462, 481 Mercury Displacement.... 4-5, 591, 594 Meritek Electronics......................... 970 MH Rhodes...................................... 677 Minco..441, 443-448, 507-508, 521-522, 1189-1190, 1232-1233, 1236-1237, 12431244, 1266-1269, 1275-1276, 1284-1287 Neilsen-Kuljian................................ 955 733 Neurologic Research Corporation. Newark Electronics................... 68, 866 Niagara Meters..........................310-311 NORCO, Inc...................................... 436 Omron Electronic Components LLC.. 1125-1128, 1150 Paragon..................................... 341-343 Parker Hannifin Corp...............905-907 PECO, Inc........... 1342-1343, 1370-1377, 1386-1387 Performance Pipe.................... 901-902 Pilla Electrical Products, Inc......90-92, 480 PLC-Multipoint, Inc..643-644, 650-651 Poteau Panel Shop.......................... 248 Power & Telephone Supply............ 969 PSL............................................920-924
White Rodgers... 1323-1326, 1338-1341, 1344-1345 Wika..................................284-285, 455, 605-606, 1032-1033, 1063-1064, 1069, 1082-1083, 1103-1105, 1109 Winters............................................ 1111 Yamatake Sensing Control, LTD.......... 1289-1290
A15
MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX

Indicates New Products Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page 045 SENSEAIR SERIES. . . . . 355-356 050 SENSEAIR SERIES. . . . . 355-356 1.5KE56CA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970 100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849 10316H2176 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 105XBRM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 105XBRI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 76-77 107XBR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 72-73 110A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733 111.10 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105 111.12 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105 116EXMST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 125STR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 89STR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 869STR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 869 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 868STR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 868 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 125XBR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 125XBRI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 78-79 1309K SERIES GAS CALIBRATION KITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 140T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426-427 140T- HAZARDOUS . . . . . . . . 472-473 14121-000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 160 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 1900-5-MR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080 1910 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080 1950G SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 1C SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 1F72 SERIES THERMOSTATS. . . . . . 1344-1345 1E78 SERIES THERMOSTATS. . . . . . 1344-1345 1F78 SERIES THERMOSTATS. . . . . . 1344-1345 1F80 SERIES THERMOSTATS. . . . . . 1338-1341 1F95 SERIES THERMOSTATS. . . . . . 1323-1326 1F95EZ SERIES THERMOSTATS. . . . . . 1323-1326 1F97 SERIES THERMOSTATS. . . . . . 1323-1326 200 CLASS CLEARVIEW. . . . . . 80-81 200 SERIES OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . 290 2000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1106-1107 201A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957 20307 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155 209 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061-1062 209PF, U3889. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934 21121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1113 2151 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 22/07-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1432 2200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877-878 2200, 3100 SERIES. . . . . . . . 307-308 220B, 220SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 222 SERIES LEVER NUTS . . . . . . 228 225B SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 226B SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 226SS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 228B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 228C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 228SS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 228PV SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 231 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043-1044 231RS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1045-1046 232.34 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109 233.34 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109 24-013. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085-1086 24-014. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085-1086 250A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958 250B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 251 SERIES PICO FUSE . . . . . . . . 854 258, 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956 25W100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111 260 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018-1019 269 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022 2R7CDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 2R9CDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 30-3003D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468-469 3000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108 3000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299-300 3050 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299-300 310 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 33 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 340 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312-313 35 VINYL COLOR-CODING TAPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 355 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 35A SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896 380 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314-315 392-SVSR2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969 3M SCOTCHCODE TAPE DISPENSER STD . . . . . . . . . . 231 3M SCOTCHCODE WRITE ON DISPENSERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 42000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676 42540. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1399 42E SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 438USA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156-1157 438USA-INT . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156-1157 455 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960 460 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961 475-FM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411 47B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112 47S-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112 747B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112 747S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112 490 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412 4BRT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 4BX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 4CTV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948-949 4CMA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948-949 5 ROOM SENSORS. . . . . . . . . . . 1188 5 UNIVERSAL DUCT, IMMERSION, OSA. . . . . . . . . 1204 50 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063-1064 50000 CONDUCTIVITY SERIES . . 423 50000 PH AND ORP SERIES... 424-425 500T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935 501T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935 51XBR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428-429 550-X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470-471 567 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 57 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 58-G1 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 58-N-1101 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 599 BALL VALVE SERIES. . . . 127-132 599 ZONE VALVE SERIES. . . 111-112 600T, 601T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936 60101-0201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399 60681. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1113 626600A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320-321 691 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979 691-U100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979 694 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982 6G38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847 6M30 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852 6N1-ISO SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454 6SC30 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 6SM30 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 6W30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853 70-781D5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131 70-782D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131 70-783D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131 70-784D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131 7001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1400 77 ROOM SENSORS. . . . . . . . . . 1188 77 UNIVERSAL DUCT, IMMERSION, OSA. . . . . . . . . 1204 78 ROOM SENSORS. . . . . . . . . . 1188 78 UNIVERSAL DUCT, IMMERSION, OSA. . . . . . . . . 1204 781 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129-1130 782 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129-1130 783 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129-1130 784 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129-1130 8041. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347-348 8210 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123-124 821TD10H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162-1163 852 ETHERNET SWITCH. . . . . . . . 736 878EX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 879EX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 8BX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 9002. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555-556 93000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 94 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 A SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864 A SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683-686 A-ALP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 A-BLP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 A-HCLO SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 A-LP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 A-SSLP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 A/ACS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 942-943
AA16 A16

Indicates New Products Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page A/ASCS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 942-943 A/CS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942-943 A/SCS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 942-943 A/CR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 942-943 A/CT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 A/SCT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 A/MCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944-945 A/MSCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944-945 A/MCS-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944-945 A/MSCS-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944-945 A/RH1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 497-498 A/RH2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 519-520 A/RH3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 538-539 A/RH5 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 549-550 A11 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380 A19 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378-1379 A28 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378-1379 A319 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1378-1379 A419 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1378-1379 A19AUC-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 A2G-05 SERIES . . . . . . . . . 1103-1104 A2G-10 SERIES . . . . . . . . . 1103-1104 A2G-15 SERIES . . . . . . . . . 1103-1104 A2G-20 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 284-285 A2G-40 SERIES . . . . . . . . . 1082-1083 A2G-50 SERIES . . . . . . . . . 1032-1033 A300 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113 A70 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432-433 A70 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381 AAR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454 ABB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858 ABB EOT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 ABW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868 AC1A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 AC1F01A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 ACI AVERAGING SERIES . . . . . . 1238 ACI BULLET/BUTTON SERIES . . 1194 ACI DUCT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1201 ACI IMMERSION SERIES. . . . . . . 1213 ACI OSA SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221 ACI ROOM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1180 ACI STRAP-ON SERIES. . . . . . . . 1256 ACK6F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 AF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33 AF16 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 AFE SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 AFP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 AFS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1071-1072 AGM-SZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 AIC900E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759-760 AIM1 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 AIM2 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 ALD-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 AM-24830A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 AMI300 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413 AMP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 AOW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868 APW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863 AQ100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 AQ200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 AQS00660. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 AQS00661. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 ARM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454 AS ROOM, DUCT, OSA, AND IMMERSION SENSORS.1189-1190 AS10 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267 AS103759. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243-1244 ASG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393 ASW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 AT150F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 AT175F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 ATL SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454 AUD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454 AVS-200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 AXJ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482-483 ACTUATOR ACCESSORIES. . . . . . 7-8 ADDME SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743 B114 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 B2 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133-135 B3 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133-135 B SERIES AND WINDOW KITS. . . 269 B SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903-904 BA / AVERAGING SERIES. 1239-1240 BA / DUCT SERIES. . . . . . . 1202-1203 BA / IMMERSION SERIES. 1214-1215 BA / OSA SERIES. . . . . . . . 1222-1223 BA / ROOM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1181 BA / STRAP-ON SERIES . . 1257-1258 BA / *-TB SERIES. . . . . . . . 1264-1265 BA / *-TB SERIES-OLD. . . . 1264-1265 BA / *RPFEP SERIES. . . . . 1262-1263 BA / 420CO SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 377 BA / BS2-WT(H) . . . . . . . . . . . 804-805 BA / BS3XXC SERIES . . . . . . 362-363 BA / BS3XXV SERIES. . . . . . . 364-365 BA / COM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808-809 BA/ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808-809 BA/RYOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808-809 BA/RYOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808-809 BA/SOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808-809 BA/VOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808-809 BA/H200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 523-524 BA/H300 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 540-541 BA/RCV-EZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794-795 BA/RPT-EZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794-795 BA/WAI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 796-797 BA/WDI,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796-797 BA/WTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796-797 BA/WT(H)-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798-799 BA/WT-I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800-801 BA/WT-O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806-807 BA/WTH-O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806-807 BA/WT-RPP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802-803 BAM1000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 BAS-3000BC SERIES. . . . . . . 745-747 BASRT-B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727 BBC-SD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724 BC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 BCXLS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 690-691 BDR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 BKA / 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848 BLD7800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400 BR200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398 BTU1100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402 BVA-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053 BZ-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641-642 BABEL BUSTER SERIES. . . . 719-720 C-SD CONCEPT SERIES. . . . . . . . 267 C-SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905-907 C7232 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 351-352 CBL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 CD-A SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 349-350 CD40 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-62 CD50 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-62 CD60 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61-62 CDRS25 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 59-60 CDU4N-G SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841 CH SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 CAT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 CI-200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627-628 CI-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 CL WIRE RETAINERS. . . . . . . . . . .859 CL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870-871 CLLV-SW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655 CM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633-634 CM-E1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378-379 CM6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380-381 CMRB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 CO10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405 CORE VFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695-697 CORE VFD WITH BYPASS. . . 698-701 CP-8500 SERIES . . . . . . . . 1433-1434 CS1A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939-940 CS1150A-LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . 939-940 SCS1.5A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939-940 SCS1150A-LED. . . . . . . . . . . . 939-940 CSC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891-894 CT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165 CT100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409 CVC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1394 CX-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627-628 CX SERIES COMMERCIAL LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS. . . . . 620-621 CX SERIES (CURRENT) . . . . . . . . 950 CX SERIES (VOLTAGE) . . . . . . . . . 951 CXJ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 CXLDP SERIES . . . . . . . . . 1023-1024 CALIBRATION KITS . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 CALIBRATION GASES. . . . . . . . . . 437 COMPRESSION TERMINALS AND SPLICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 CUSTOM SERVICES/PANEL SHOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233-234 D-3000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889 D-4000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
AA17 A17

Indicates New Products Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page D4120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418-419 D4120 SERIES REMOTE ACCESSORIES. . . . . . . . 415-416 D690 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-58 DCP-1.5-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995 DCP-250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 DCP-524. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 DCPA-1.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 DDP-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078 DE / DB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 316-319 DFS-221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079 DIN-L1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429 DIN 3F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 DL-125C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750-751 DL10 SERIES ECHOPOD. . . . . . . . 596 DL14 SERIES ECHOPOD. . . . 582-583 DL24 SERIES ECHOPOD. . . . 582-583 DL34 SERIES ECHOPOD. . . . 582-583 DLM SERIES DIGITAL LIGHTING MANAGEMENT. . . . . . . . 615-617 DM7600 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 57-58 DP4A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552-553 DPA II SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 1012-1013 DPA SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011 DPA-M SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011 DPC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151 DPFS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 DPL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1009-1010 DPW-3VLV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 DPW-692 SERIES. . . . . . . . 1039-1040 DRN 4 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 DRN3.1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1455 DRS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966 DS-2B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434-435 DT-1K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397 DT-300 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 629-630 DT13E SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1445-1446 DT2630. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786-787 DTFXL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 301-302 DTK-120HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962 DTK-120SR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963-964 DTK-2MHLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963-964 DTK-120SRD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965 DTK-2LVLP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962 DTK-MRJ11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962 DTK-TSS4D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965 DW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631-632 DXLDP SERIES . . . . . . . . . 1025-1026 DXN SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327-330 DURADRIVE SERIES. . . . . . . 188-190 ESB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84-85 ESM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86-87 ESP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88-89 E100E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 E150E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 E300E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 E500E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 E31 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501-502 E3R-R04FP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 822 E3T-C2AWH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 E3T-MDCCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829 E3T-RXX-2INTP SERIES . . . . . . . . 823 E3T-S2H SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 E3T-SLICP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826 E3T-SXA SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828 E3T-SXE SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826 E3X-DXXFP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 819 E3X-MRCFP SERIES. . . . . . . 817-818 E3X-RXX-3HOTP SERIES . . . . . . . 820 E3X-RXX-5IBTP SERIES. . . . . . . . 821 E3X-RXX-REPTP SERIES. . . . . . . 824 E3X-TXX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 E3X-X12GP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 818 E50 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927-929 EDC CONDENSATE PUMPS. . . . . 326 EE23 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 505-506 EE240 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 810-811 EE46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564-565 EE65 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 EE66 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 EFP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453 EHRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 EIBA SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737 EKI SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738 EL SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 EL-USB SERIES DATA LOGGER..1395 ELCU-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666-667 ELCU-200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668-669 ELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463-464 EM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 EMT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 ENG-485. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918 EN4A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552-553 EP-311 / 313 SERIES. . . . . 1435-1436 EP3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 EPC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453 EPETD8S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 EPW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453 ESR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670-671 ET SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 ET SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367 ETH-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 EVSI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125-126 EYM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 EASYSENS INPUT MODULES. . . . 838 EASYSENS RECEIVER GATEWAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 EASYSENS REPEATER. . . . . . . . . 833 EASYSENS ROOM SENSORS . . . 836 EASYSENS SRC RECEIVER CONTROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . 832 EASYSENS SPECIALTY WIRELESS TRANSMITTERS. . . . . . . . . . . 835 EASYSENS SWITCHES. . . . . . . . . 834 EASYSENS TEMPERATURE SENSORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837 EASYSENS THANOS. . . . . . . . . . . 830 ECHOSAFE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460-461 EF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33 ENGENIUS - PATENT PENDING. . . . . . . . . . . . . 913-917 ENGENIUS ACCESSORIES. . . . . . 919 EWK SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 F-1000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904 F-1000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 908-909 F01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 F2B-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294 F2N-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294 F2S-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294 F6 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-205 F7 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202-205 F61 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324-325 F7 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 F8-SSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 FASTEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967 FC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 FCS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 FCXLS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 692-694 FE-1000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 FE-1050 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 342-343 FGD WEB SERIES. . . . . . . . . 748-749 FILN05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 FLEX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 FLM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854 FLQ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854 FNQ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854 FM_D SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 FS1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322-323 FS7 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 FS7-4E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 FSLF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-56 FSNF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-56 FSAF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-56 FT2A SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 286-288 FXP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 FIXED AND HINGED WINDOW KITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 FLEXSTAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756-758 FORTA SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 191-192 G2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167-169 G3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167-169 G2R-S SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1125-1126 G7L SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150 GAP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20 GBB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20 GC51 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068 GC52 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1047-1048 GCA SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-38 GD-2B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378-379 GD6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380-381 GDC150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384-385 GDC350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390-391 GDD SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388-389 GDE SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20 GDN SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392-393 GDS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382-383 GEB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20
AA18 A18

Indicates New Products Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page GEH2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 515-516 GEH3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 543-544 GEH5 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 547-548 GF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854 GGD SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-52 GIB SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20 GLB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-20 GK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-45 GMA SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-38 GMD20 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 353-354 GMW21 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 353-354 GND SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-52 GNP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-38 GRT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 GENESIS WIRING . . . . . . . . . 210-211 GQD SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-38 G SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264-265 H-LP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 H-SSLP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 H-SERIES CLASS 500 SUBMETERS. . . . . . . . . . 930-931 H SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264-265 HBX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 HC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 HC-101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 HC-201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 HD-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378-379 HD100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407 HD31K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532-533 HD400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405 HDR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 HF5 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503-504 HGM-MZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 HGM-SZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 HHT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 HL600 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 HLT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 HM40A1AB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398 HMD / S / W8XD / H / W SERIES. . 554 HMD42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536-537 HMD53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536-537 HMD60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517-518 HMD70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517-518 HMK41K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517-518 HMW80 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 534-535 HMW90 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 499-500 HO31K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532-533 HS-100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 HS-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656-657 HS-150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656-657 HS20K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 513-514 HSP-121BT1RU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967 HT2D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521-522 HT2O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521-522 HT2S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521-522 HT829. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507-508 HT839. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507-508 HT880 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 447-448 HTCCV SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 136-137 HW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869 HW-76B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 HW31K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532-533 HZLIM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 450-451 H_20K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 511-512 H_30K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 530-531 IAQ-A SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 IAQ-N SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 367-368 IAQPT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 IL10 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 ILC APPRENTICE II . . . . . . . . 622-623 IP300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430 IR-F9 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 406-407 IXLDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457-458 I.CANDOIT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 742 J21K SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 J54 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 K SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647-648 K-332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900, 903-909 K-383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899-900 K-384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899-900 K-387. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899-900 K1 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455-456 K2000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 1101-1102 K235 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854 KA-44 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 KA-88 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 KA-175 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 KA-301 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 KAS-27 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-29 KAS-44 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-29 KAS-88 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-29 KAS-175 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-29 KB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 KCD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345-346 KCFS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 KCO SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369-370 KCO2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 KCOC SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 373-374 KCOP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 371-372 KDPS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070 KE375 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1148-1149 KE900 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1148-1149 KH2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509-510 KH3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528-529 KH5 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545-546 KIP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 KLK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854 KLNJ-A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 KMS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275-276 KOAMS SERIES. . . . . . . 273-274, 281 KOV SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 206 KRDB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166 KRDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164 KSDB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166 KT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870-871 KTA* SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1205-1206 KTB* SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191 KTD* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1195-1196 KTEC ZONING SYSTEM . . . . 752-755 KTES* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1176-1177 KTM* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1245-1246 KTMR* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1245-1246 KTM*S SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251 KTM*SC SERIES . . . . . . . . 1251-1252 KTMP* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249 KTO* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216 KTOSA* SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1219-1220 KTOS* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1224-1225 KTP* SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1182-1183 KTR* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1169-1170 KTS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360-361 KTU* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1226-1227 KTUS* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1224-1225 KTV* SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1999-1200 KTW* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1209-1210 KVC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109-110 KZ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105-106 L-IOB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 739-741 L-IP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728-730 L-SWITCH SERIES. . . . . . . . . 731-732 L-TERM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 734-735 L-VIS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 721-723 L4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 L4000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862 L480 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1382-1383 L8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 LABELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872 LATCHES, LOCKS, VENTILATION, HEATING, COOLING.260-261, 271 LB SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865 LC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647-648 LC8 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618-619 LD1-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572 LD1500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 LD2100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575-577 LD31 SERIES DELTASPAN. . . 601-602 LD32 SERIES DELTASPAN. . . 601-602 LD310 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574 LD34 SERIES DELTASPAN. . . 603-604 LD35 SERIES DELTASPAN. . . 603-604 LD5200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578-579 LDIM2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672-673 LDRA6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 LF SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33 LGATE-9XX SERIES. . . . . . . . 717-718 LH-10 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 605-606 LMCP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 613-614 LOCKS, LATCHES, VENTILATION, HEATING, COOLING . . . . . . . 270 LPI-1C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 LPI-1C-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 LPI-1C-G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 LPI-1C-R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 LPI-3C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 LPI-3C-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 LPI-3C-G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 LPI-3C-R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
AA19 A19

Indicates New Products Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page LPI-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 LPI-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 LS-10 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 605-606 LS-PB-C SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 LS45M91B11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 4 LS7K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 LU2 SERIES ECHOSONIC. . . 597-598 LU77 / 78 SERIES ECHOSWITCH. . . . . . . . . 585-586 LU80 / 81 / 83 / 84 SERIES ECHOSPAN. . . . . . . . . . . 599-600 LV SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 LV100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408 LV41 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 LV42 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 LX-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 LX-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 LY SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125-1126 M SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870-871 M SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908-909 M-2000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 303-306 M10 / 16SFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844-845 M230 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1041-1042 M230-3VLV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 M264 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1014-1015 M265 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1016-1017 M267-MR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020-1021 M4 / 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842 M4 / 6SNBT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844-845 M4 / 8SF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844-845 M6 / 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842 M9100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-22 M9200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-40 MA SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-42 MA8 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484-486 MAGNEPULL XP1000 SERIES . . 1414 MAS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650-651 MBS 1900. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065 MC6 / 7 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 484-486 MCP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883-884 MEP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 MF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-42 MF4 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-24 MK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125-1126 MK-2690 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 885-886 MK-46XX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 885-886 MK-6XXX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 885-886 MK-3000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890 MK-7100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890 MK7-B SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 643-644 ML SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164-166 ML61XX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-27 ML71XX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-27 MLS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587-588 MN SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-18 MNST SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 MOB-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470 MOB-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470 MOD9200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774-775 MP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870-871 MP100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410 MP200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410 MP6 / 7 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 484-486 MP800 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 881-882 MP918A SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 887-888 MP918B SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 887-888 MP920B SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 887-888 MP953 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 879-880 MR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143-1144 MRMS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094 MS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 MS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-35 MS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41-42 MS4 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-24 MS4XXX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 53-54 MS81XX SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-54 MST1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 MTL5000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 474-477 MTL7000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 474-477 MTL7700 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 474-477 MVN SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162-163 MODEL ALT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155 MODEL IOG SERIES . . . . . . . 331-334 N SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 NEMA 1 LARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 NEMA 1 MEDIUM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 NEMA 1 SMALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 NEMA / IP RATINGS. . . . . . . . 235-236 NF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33 NFCXLS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 692-694 NFP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310-311 NG2DW1500B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 NKQ SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-47 NS2-0000-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 NSTA SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 237-238 OS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408-409 OVR DIN SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968 P SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 P10 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084 P2RF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1127-1128 P32 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081 P51 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055-1056 P74 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087 PAM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147 PAM-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147 PC642C SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966 PCA3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1403-1404 PCM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1092-1093 PDK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 PF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127-1128 PG SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111 PICCV SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 151-155 PIL-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658-659 PIL-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167 PK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089-1090 PLG50 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 POLYPRO SERIES . . . . . . . 260-261 PQUBE DC SENSORS. . . . . . . . . . 924 PQUBE DC VOLTAGE MONITORS. 924 PQUBE ETHERNET MODULES. . . 921 PQUBE SCN SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 922 PQUBE SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920 PQUBE WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . 923 PQUBE TH SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 924 PQUBE XCT CT MODULES. . . . . . 921 PR264 SERIES . . . . . . . . . 1035-1036 PR274 / 275 SERIES . . . . . 1030-1031 PR276 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1037-1038 PR282 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049 PRK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861 PS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 PS5R SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1000-1001 PSB40AB10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988 PSB100AB10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988 PSC40AB10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988 PSC100AB10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988 PSD-30 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069 PSH SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989-990 PSH200A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 PSH300A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 PSH500A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 PSH550-UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993 PSMN300A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 PSMN500A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 PSR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681-682 PSR-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645-646 PSR-1-T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645-646 PSS2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1057-1058 PT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112 PT-NTL-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918 PTA SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1453, 1455 PTA2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1453, 1455 PTF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1127-1128 PTS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678 PTX1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1059-1060 PV600 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899 PVI-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066-1067 PVI-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066-1067 PW2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 PWA SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1437-1440 PXR4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359-1360 PERF PANEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 PLATE PAL SERIES . . . . . . 1300-1301 PRESTIGE 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . 1305-1309 PRESTIGE IAQ. . . . . . . . . . 1305-1309 PW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631-632 QL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856 R-3710. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903-904 R-LP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 R820 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1361-1362 RAD-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 RBTS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866 RCDL COMPOUND SERIES . 335-336 RCDL NUTATING DISC. . . . . . 337-338 RCDL TURBO SERIES. . . . . . 339-340 RCT-1800 SERIES . . . . . . . . . 932-933 RES-1E SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1449-1452
AA20 A20

Indicates New Products Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page RET SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239, 247 RF-RR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 RF-RS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 RF-RX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 770-771 RF-RXS WIRELESS NETWORK RECEIVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 RFS-4001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076 RH SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121-1122 RH-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073-1074 RH-3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073-1074 RIB M SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 1145-1146 RIB TR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 985-986 RIB PILOT SERIES. . . . . . . 1133-1134 RIBT PILOT SERIES. . . . . . 1133-1134 RIB POWER SERIES. . . . . 1135-1136 RIBT POWER SERIES. . . . 1135-1136 RIB01 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138 RIB02 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138 RIBL LATCHING SERIES. . . . . . . 1137 RIBTW SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139 RIBTW2401B-BC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140 RIBW SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1141-1142 RIBX SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946-947 RIBX-V SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 953-954 RIBXG SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 RIBXK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 RIBXK420 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 RIG SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216-217 RJ SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121-1122 RJ SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 RL SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937 RLD-134A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404-405 RLD-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402-403 RM2402D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776-777 RM2432D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776-777 RP BASIC SERIES. . . . . . . . . 609-610 RR-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661-662 RR-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661-662 RR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121-1122 RR2552. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778-779 RSS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077 RSSDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153-1154 RT2602. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780-781 RT2620. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780-781 RT2630 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 782-783 RTC-2P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365-1366 RTE SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1158-1159 RV8H SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132 RAPTOR PROTOCOL CONVERTER. . . . . . . . . . 715-716 REFRIGERANT VERIFICATION KITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 RPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113 R SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222-224 S SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222-224 S-SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909 S101144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268-1269 S1K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 S200U-K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855 S241HC, TT111H-0800 . . . . . . . . 1266 S469 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268-1269 S665PDY48BC . . . . . . . . . . 1268-1269 S667PDY40BC . . . . . . . . . . 1268-1269 SAK4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 SAK6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 SC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 SC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 SC-C SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 SC-SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 SC-H SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 SCE SERIES LARGE. . . . . . . . . . . 250 SCE SERIES SMALL . . . . . . . . . . . 249 SCT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932 SCX SERIES (CURRENT) . . . . . . . 950 SCX SERIES (VOLTAGE). . . . . . . . 951 SD-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113 SD-RO1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 SDI SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 SDN-C COMPACT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002-1003 SDN-P SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 SDU SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 SGD-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94-95 SGD-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94-95 SGVL RETROFIT SERIES. . . 170-172 SH SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123-1124 SJ SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123-1124 SL-2000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 413-414 SL100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406 SL200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406 SLS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 SM-501 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 411-412 SMARTVFD HVAC . . . . . . . . . 704-706 SMARTVFD HVAC WITH BYPASS ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . 707-709 SPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872 SPC3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 386-387 SPODM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 SPXCD SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 466-467 SR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123-1124 SRCM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1095-1096 SRH12 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 525-526 SRH13 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 SRH15 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 SRIM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097 SRMD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098 SRPM SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 1099-1100 SS / SP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 SSD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 SSS-1000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 SST2630. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784-785 ST SUPPORT BRACKETS. . . . . . . 860 ST-A* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1207-1208 ST-AV81H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236 ST-AV85H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236 ST-AV81R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232-1233 ST-AV85R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232-1233 ST-AV91R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232-1233 ST-AV91H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237 ST-B* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192 ST-BP SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193 ST-D* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1197-1198 ST-FZ* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1234-1235 ST-FZR SERIES . . . . . . . . . 1230-1231 ST-L* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1260-1261 ST-MP* SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250 ST-O* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1217-1218 ST-R* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248 ST-R*R SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248 ST-R*S SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1253-1254 ST-R*SC SERIES . . . . . . . . 1253-1254 ST-S* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1184-1185 ST-S*E SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1171-1172 ST-S*EW SERIES. . . . . . . . 1171-1172 ST-S*K SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1174-1175 ST-S*P SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1178-1179 ST-STP* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255 ST-T90 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1271-1272 ST-T91 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1273-1274 ST-TS* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259 ST-U* SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1228-1229 ST-W* SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 1211-1213 ST-X SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 ST120 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 STB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 STB-H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 STS SUPPORT BRACKETS. . . . . . 860 SW SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 SWBX SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 SAFETY EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . 437 SENSOR MOUNTING ACCESSORIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1391 SENSOR OPTIONS . . . . . . 1295-1296 SENTRY 200-A SERIES. . . . . . . . . 955 SERIES A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110 SMARTDRIVE COMPACT VFD. 702-703 SMARTSTRUXURE LITE MPM-GW SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 SMARTSTRUXURE LITE MPM-UN SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814 SMARTSTRUXURE LITE MPM-VA SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 SMARTSTRUXURE LITE SEC SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816 SUPER 33 AND 88 BLACK VINYL ELECTRICAL TAPE. . . . . . . . . 232 SURGE PROTECTION CHART . . . 974 SYSTEM 450. . . . . . . . . . . . 1352-1353 T-100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 901-902 T-141 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 901-902 T-1000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431 T-4000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 875-876 T-PB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 T1 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859 T1E SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859 T155 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1376-1377 T167 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1376-1377
AA21 A21

Indicates New Products Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page T158 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1370-1371 T168 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1370-1371 T170 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1372-1373 T180 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1374-1375 T22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368-1369 T25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368-1369 T26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368-1369 T46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368-1369 T30 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 T30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152 T40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152 T4000 SERIES THERMOSTATS. . . . . . 1342-1343 T60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152 T8000 SERIES THERMOSTATS. . . . . . 1342-1343 T90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152 T12000 SERIES THERMOSTATS. . . . . . 1342-1343 T5100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347-348 T5U SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283 T6051B1006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 T631F / G SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1388 T63U SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283 T71U SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282 T7350 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 1315-1320 T775 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1350-1351 T8000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 357-358 T81PNR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 T81U SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281 T85PNR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 T85U SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1279-1280 T87 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330-1331 T90PNR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 T91H SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1277-1278 T91L SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1277-1278 T91U SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1277-1278 TA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165 TB6575 SUITEPRO SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346-1347 TB6980 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1348-1349 TB7100A100 MULTIPRO SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332-1333 TB7980 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1348-1349 TB8575 SUITEPRO SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346-1347 TC-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385 TC-105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385 TC-1100 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389 TCI SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562-563 TCY-BH SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 560-561 TDC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558-559 TDRSOXP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162-1163 TDRSRXP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162-1163 TDUB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166 TE-6300 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1186-1187 TE200AD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173 TE200FDC SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 1242 TE200G SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270 TE707C SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241 TEC COMPACT STARTERS. . 687-688 TEMFLEX 1700 BLACK VINYL ELECTRICAL TAPE. . . . . . . . . 230 TF SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33 TF115 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 1386-1387 TF142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384 TH109 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1386-1387 TH3000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1330-1331 TH4000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1330-1331 TH5000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1334-1335 TH6000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1334-1335 TB7000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1334-1335 TH8000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1336-1337 TB8220 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1336-1337 TK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291-1292 TK100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396 TK-1000 THRU TK-5000 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877-878 TL SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 TM99A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397 TMV8000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164 TOOL-95-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 TP1-M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375-376 TP970 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 873-874 TRF115 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1386-1387 TRU SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1160-1161 TS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850 TS-470 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 TS-475 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 TSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1384 TT-470 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 TT211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443-444 TT801 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 1284-1285 TT807 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 1284-1285 TT809 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . 1286-1287 TT859 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275-1276 TT881 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445-446 TWS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82-83 TY7321A1009. . . . . . . . . . . 1289-1290 TARTAN 3939 DUCT TAPE. . . . . . . 232 TEMPERATURE SENSOR ACCESSORIES. . . . . . 1297-1299 TESTING DEVICES AND TOOLS. 1390 THERMOSTAT REMOTE SENSOR ACCESORIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1391 THERMOSTAT GUARDS . . . . . . . 1392 TRANSDUCER SELECTION CHART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1472 TW155 / 255 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1388 TX-6-AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380-381 TX-6-HS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380-381 TX-6-ND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380-381 UAT-1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1441-1442 UAT-2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 1441-1442 UCK UNIVERSAL CALIBRATION KIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 UCM-420A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363-1364 UCO-44 OPTIONS . . . . . . . 1423-1424 UCO-44T OPTIONS . . . . . . 1423-1424 UCP-242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417-1418 UCP-422 SERIES. . . . . . . . 1419-1420 UCP-422 SERIES F, V OPTIONS.1422 UCP-422 SERIES M OPTION. . . . 1421 UCP-722 SERIES. . . . . . . . 1425-1426 UCP-822A SERIES. . . . . . . 1427-1428 UCS-121 SERIES. . . . . . . . 1456-1457 UCS-221E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458-1459 UCS-421E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460-1461 UCS-621E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1462-1463 UCS-821E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464-1465 UCT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938 UFT-1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 297-298 UGVL RETROFIT SERIES. . . 170-172 UMM-1 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1447-1448 UMM-2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1447-1448 UMX-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466-1469 UMX-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1466-1469 UPD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471 US TRANSFORMERS. . . . . . . . . . . 983 UT8001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367 UW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631-632 V-3000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 881-882 V-BAR 700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 V-BALL SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . 145-150 V11 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897-898 V130LA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970 V39ZA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970 V47ZA1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970 V200 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113-116 V300 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113-116 V4-2-U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 V5011 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 156-157 V5013 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 156-157 V5860 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 117-118 VA-4233 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 178-181 VA-7000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 178-181 VA301C-DLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396-397 VA301EM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394-395 VASQN8X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400-401 VB SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182-187 VBN2 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 140-144 VBN3 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 140-144 VD SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857 VD-1300 SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 63-64 VG1000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 138-139 VG2000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 173-177 VG7000 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 160-161 VGF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158-159 VH7200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 VK SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430-431 VM SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119-120 VPI SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 VR SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 VS-120R1R9L-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 VT SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121-122 VT100 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408 VT200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408
AA22 A22

Indicates New Products Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page Model / Series No. Page VT7200 COMMUNICATING..1310-1311 VT7300 COMMUNICATING..1310-1311 VT7200 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1321-1322 VT7300 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1321-1322 VT7600 COMMUNICATING .1312-1314 VT7600 SERIES. . . . . . . . . 1327-1329 VTI SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443-1444 VALUPOINT VP4-23 SERIES. . . . . 744 VERSA-CAB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 VICONICS WIRELESS. . . . . . 766-769 W181P SERIES.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 W221P SERIES.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 W241P SERIES.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 W30 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1051-1052 W30-3VLV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 W43A-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 W7350 SERIES. . . . . . . . . . 1315-1320 WALL PLATE ADAPTERS. . . . . . . 1391 WB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293 WB4A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552-553 WBT900. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761-762 WBT900-IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761-762 WBX SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 WD-1B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 WD-2-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570-571 WEBOP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . 725-726 WEL-B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294 WEL-S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294 WF SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 WGVL RETROFIT SERIES. . . 170-172 WH2630. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788-789 WI-MGR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792-793 WIRE NUTS, TIES, ACCESSORIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 229 WLC SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 WLT900. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763-764 WNC SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 925-926 WPS SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 WS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293 WSD SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 WSX SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 WT2630. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790-791 WV SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 WWS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . 679-680 XFMR SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 977-978 XJAT SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482-483 XLDP SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 XLTR-1000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 Z200 / Z300 SERIES. . . . . . . . 107-108 ZC BASIC SERIES. . . . . . . . . 611-612 ZIP ECONOMIZER SERIES.1354-1358 ZPS SERIES. . . . . . . . . . . . 1028-1029 ZS-260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 ZS4 SERIES DISCONNECT SWITCH AND FUSE HOLDERS. . . . . . . 845 ZS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843 ZS10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
CUSTOMIZED
CALIBRATION
Because we have our own production shop Kele can ship you product that is ready to install, saving you time and keeping your projects on track. We use precision calibration equipment to set your specified signal ranges and engineering units. Our custom calibration is a free service from our technical experts. Most orders are calibrated and shipped to you the same day. AA23 A23
A24
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

A C T U AT O R S & DAMPERS
Kele Carries All of the Major Manufacturers, Including Fire and Smoke Solutions.
ML61xx | p. 25
KAS Series | p. 28
LMB, NMB, AMB, | p. 11 GMB Series
GMA/GCA Series | p. 36
CDRS25 Series | p. 59
TS-470 Series | p. 4
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

A C T U AT O R S & DAMPERS
Products manufactured in the United States
MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Accessories KLNJ-A2 Whisker Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS45M91B11 Whisker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TS-470 Series Damper Position Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TS-475 Series Non-Mercury Damper Position Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TT-470 Series Solid State Tilt Transducer for Damper / Valve Position Feedback .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Actuator Accessories Mechanical and Electrical Accessories .. . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 4 5 6 7
Products that are new to the catalog
Fire/Smoke GND, GGD Series Fire and Smoke Damper Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 MS4xxx, MS81xx Series Fire and Smoke Damper Actuators. . . . . . . . . . . . 53 FSLF, FSNF, FSAF Series Fire and Smoke Damper Actuators . . . . . . . . . . 55
GND Series | p. 48
Non-Spring Return Actuators KA-44, KA-88, KA-175, KA-301 Series Kele Revolution Direct Coupled Actuators Non-spring return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB Direct Coupled Actuators Non-Spring Return. . . . . 11 MN Series Direct Coupled Actuators Non-Spring Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 GBB, GDE, GEB, GIB, GLB, GAP Series Direct Coupled Actuators NonSpring Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 M9100 Series Direct Coupled Actuators Non-Spring Return. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 MF4, MS4 Series Direct Coupled Actuators Non-Spring Return. . . . . . . . . . 23 ML61xx, ML71xx Series Direct Coupled Actuators Non-Spring Return. . . . 25 Rectangular Dampers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 CD40, CD50, CD60 Series Rectangular Dampers VD-1300 Series Rectangular Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Round Dampers D690 Series Round Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 CDRS25 Series Round Control Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Spring Return Actuator MEP Series KMC Actuators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KAS-27, KAS-44, KAS-88, KAS-175 Series Kele Revolution Direct Coupled Actuators Spring Return. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TF, LF, NF, AF, EF Series Direct Coupled Actuators Spring Return.. . . . . . MS Series Direct Coupled Actuators Spring Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GMA, GCA, GQD, GNP Series Direct Coupled Actuators Spring Return. . . M9200 Series Direct Coupled Actuators Spring Return.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MA, MF, MS Series Direct Coupled Actuators Spring Return. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GK Series Direct Coupled Actuators Fail-Safe NKQ Series Fast-Acting Fail Safe Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
KA-44 Series | p. 9
13 28 30 34 36 39 41 43 46
VD-1300 Series | p. 63
kele.com
NEW!
Brand Torque Supply Voltage Kele Honeywell Johnson Johnson Siemens Schneider Schneider Belimo Kele Honeywell Johnson Johnson Siemens Schneider Belimo Kele Honeywell Johnson Siemens Schneider Belimo Kele Honeywell Johnson Siemens Schneider Belimo Kele Honeywell Johnson Siemens Schneider Belimo Kele Honeywell Johnson Siemens Siemens Schneider Belimo Kele Honeywell Johnson Johnson Schneider Belimo Kele Honeywell Johnson Johnson Siemens Schneider Belimo 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 45 in-lb, (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 45 in-lb, (5 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 140 in-lb (16 Nm) 132 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 140 in-lb (16 Nm) 132 in-lb (15 Nm) 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 301 in-lb (34 Nm) 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 210 in-lb (24 Nm) 280 in-lb (32 Nm) 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 301 in-lb (34 Nm) 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 210 in-lb (24 Nm) 280 in-lb (32 Nm) 310 in-lb (35 Nm) 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

Damper Area (ft2) KA-44-2T Two-position, oating 6.3 MN6105A1011 Two-position, oating 6.3 M9104-AGA-2S Two-position, oating 5.0 M9106-AGA-2 Two-position, oating 7.6 GDE131.1P Two-position, oating 6.3 MF4E-60430-100 Two-position, oating 5.0 MF41-6043 Two-position, oating 5.0 LMB24-3 Two-position, oating 6.4 KA-44-M Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA, two-pos., oating 6.3 MN7505A2001 Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA 6.3 M9104-GGA-2S Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 5.0 M9106-GGA-2 Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 7.6 GDE161.1P Proportional 0 to 10 VDC 6.3 MS41-6043 Proportional 0-10 VDC 5.0 LMB24-SR Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 6.4 KA-88-2T Two-position, oating 12.6 MN6110A1003 Two-position, oating 12.6 M9108-AGA-2 Two-position, oating 10.0 GLB131.1P Two-position, oating 12.6 MF41-6083 Two-position, oating 10.0 NMB24-3 Two-position, oating 12.9 KA-88-M Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA, two-pos., oating 12.6 MN7510A2001 Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA 12.6 M9108-GGA-2 Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 10.0 GLB161.1P Proportional 0 to 10 VDC 12.6 MS41-6083 Proportional 0-10 VDC 10.0 NMB24-SR Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 12.9 KA-175-2T Two-position, oating 25.0 MN6120A1002 Two-position, oating 25.0 M9116-AGA-2 Two-position, oating 20.0 GEB131.1P Two-position, oating 18.9 MF41-6153 Two-position, oating 19.0 AMB24-3 Two-position, oating 25.7 KA-175-P Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA, two-pos., oating 25.0 MN7220A2007 Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA 25.0 M9116-GGA-2 Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 20.0 GEB161.1P Proportional 0 to 10 VDC 18.9 GBB161.1P Proportional 0 to 10 VDC 25.3 MS41-6153 Proportional 0/2-10 VDC 19.0 AMB24-SR Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 25.7 KA-301-2T Two-position, oating 43.0 MN6134A1003 Two-position, oating 42.9 M9124-AGA-2 Two-position, oating 30.0 M9132-AGA-2 Two-position, oating 40.0 MF41-6343 Two-position, oating 42.9 GMB24-3 Two-position, oating 51.4 KA-301-P Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA, two-pos., oating 43.0 MN7234A2008 Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA 42.9 M9124-GGA-2 Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 30.0 M9132-GGA-2 Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 40.0 GIB161.1P Proportional 0 to 10 VDC 44.3 MS41-6343 Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 42.9 GMB24-SR Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 51.4 Control Signal Model
DIRECT-COUPLED ACTUATORS TORQUE AND DAMPER AREA RATINGS DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATOR CROSS REFERENCE CHART NON-SPRING RETURN
21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
*Maximum damper area assuming 7 in-lb/sq. ft damper torque March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
DIRECT-COUPLED ACTUATORS TORQUE AND DAMPER AREA RATINGS DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATOR CROSS REFERENCE CHART SPRING RETURN
Brand Torque 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 18 in-lb (2 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 18 in-lb (2 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 18 in-lb (2 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 70 in-lb (80 Nm) 89 in-lb (10 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 70 in-lb (80 Nm) 89 in-lb (10 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 70 in-lb (80 Nm) 89 in-lb (10 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm) Supply Voltage 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 21-27 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 21-27 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 21-27 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 21-27 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 24 VAC 20%, 22 to 30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 24 VAC 20%, 22 to 30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-26 VDC 24 VAC 20%, 22 to 30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Control Signal
Kele Honeywell Honeywell Johnson Schneider Belimo Belimo Kele Honeywell Honeywell Johnson Schneider Belimo Belimo Johnson Schneider Belimo Belimo Kele Honeywell Johnson Johnson Siemens Schneider Belimo Kele Honeywell Johnson Johnson Siemens Schneider Belimo Johnson Johnson Siemens Siemens Schneider Belimo Kele Honeywell Johnson Siemens Schneider Schneider Belimo Kele Honeywell Johnson Siemens Schneider Schneider Belimo Johnson Siemens Siemens Schneider Schneider
Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Tri-state, two-position Floating Floating Floating Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Floating Floating Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC Prop. 0-10 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Two-position, oating Floating Floating Floating Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. 0-10 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
NEW!
Model KAS-44-2 MS8103A1130 MS8105A1030 M9203-BGA-2 MA40-7043 TF24 LF24 KAS-44-M MS7503A2030 MS7505A2030 M9203-AGA-2Z MF40-7043 TF24-3 LF24-3 M9203-GGA-2Z MS40-7043 TF24-SR LF24-SR KAS-88-2 MS8110A1008 M9208-BGA-2 M9210-BGA-3 GMA121.1P MA41-7073 NFB24 KAS-88-M MS7510A2008 M9208-AGA-2 M9210-AGA-3 GMA131.1P MF41-7073 NFB24-MFT M9208-GGA-2 M9210-GGA-3 GMA151.1P GMA161.1P MS41-7073 NFB24-SR KAS-175-2 MS8120A1007 M9220-BGA-3 GCA121.1P MA41-7153 MA40-7173 AFB24 KAS-175-M MS7520A2007 M9220-AGA-3 GCA131.1P MF41-7153 MF40-7173 AFB24-MFT M9220-GGA-3 GCA161.1P GCA151.1P MS41-7153 MS40-7173
Damper Area (ft2) 6.3 3.6 6.3 3.6 5.0 2.6 5.0 6.3 3.6 6.3 3.6 5.0 2.6 5.0 3.6 5.0 2.6 5.0 12.6 12.6 10.0 12.7 8.9 8.6 12.9 12.6 12.6 10.0 12.7 8.9 8.6 12.9 10.0 12.7 8.9 8.9 8.6 12.9 25.0 25.0 25.3 20.3 19.0 21.4 25.7 25.0 25.0 25.3 20.3 19.0 21.4 25.7 25.3 20.3 20.3 19.0 21.4
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
*Maximum damper area assuming 7 in-lb/sq. ft damper torque
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Plastic coated spring-rod whisker for long life Captive wiring cover screws to save time Heavy duty 10A @ 120 VAC contacts
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

WHISKER SWITCH KLNJ-A2
The KLNJ-A2 whisker switch is a high-quality, multidirectional contact switch with a plastic coated spring-rod whisker. It is perfect for sensing damper blade position and can be used to provide position status of valve linkages or other mechanical devices. KLNJ-A2
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Screw terminals 1/2" NPT 10A @ 24 VAC, 10A @ 120 VAC, 6A @ 24 VDC Contact Arrangement 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. Switch Angle 15 make, 6 reset Operating Temperature -13 to 131F (-25 to 55C) Dimensions 8.0"H x 1.6"W x 1.7"D (20 x 4.0 x 4.2 cm) 0.5 lb (0.2 kg) Weight IP67 Enclosure Rating Approvals CE, cUL recognized, NRNT8. E117960 Warranty 1 year Wiring Terminations Conduit Connection Contact Rating
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 0.25" (0.65)
8.0" (20.3)
2.3" (5.9)
5.5" (14.0)
ORDERING INFORMATION
1.2" (3.0) 1.6" (4.0) M6x15 1.1" 1.7" (2.9) (4.2)
MODEL KLNJ-A2
DESCRIPTION Whisker switch with coated spring-rod and 10A @ 120 VAC contacts
.20" (.52)
WHISKER SWITCH LS45M91B11

DESCRIPTION
The LS45M91B11 whisker switch is a multidirectional, metal limit switch. This spring rod whisker version allows exibility when applying to damper, valve, and other HVAC applications that need position sensing. LS45M91B11
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.05 (0.13) 0.275 (0.7) 0.63 (1.60)
SPECIFICATIONS
Screw terminals 1/2" NPT 10A @ 24 VAC, 5A @ 120 VAC, 2.8A @ 24 VDC Contact Arrangement 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. Switch Angle 14 make, 6 reset Operating Temperature -13 to 158F (-25 to 70C) Dimensions 7.9"H x 1.6"W x 1.8"D (20 x 4.0 x 4.5 cm) Weight 0.5 lb (0.2 kg) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X Approvals CE, UL Listed, CSA Warranty 1 year Wiring Terminations Conduit Connection Contact Rating
5.12 (130) 7.87 (200)
3.15 (8.0)
MODEL LS45M91B11
1.58 (4.0) 1.77 (4.5)
DESCRIPTION Whisker switch with steel spring-rod and 5A @ 120 VAC contacts
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DAMPER POSITION SWITCHES TS-470 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
The TS-470 Series damper position switches consist of an encapsulated mercury switch mounted on a 1/2" (1.3 cm) damper shaft crank arm. The TS1-470 Series includes the same switch, mounted on a 1" (2.5 cm) crank arm. They are mounted on a horizontal damper shaft to provide opened/ closed indication. Switch contacts are normal when the cable end of the switch is horizontal or above, and makes when the cable end drops more than 15 below horizontal. FEATURES Easy to install Easily adjustable
NEW!
TS-470-2 TS1-470
SPECIFICATIONS
Wiring TS(1)-470 TS(1)-470-2 TS(1)-470-P Switch Type 3' length, AWG 18, 3-conductor cable; green = common, black = N.C., white = N.O. 3' length, AWG 18, two 3-conductor cables; green = common, black = N.C., white = N.O. 3' length, plenum AWG 18, 3-conductor cable; black = common, blue = N.C., red = N.O. Encapsulated mercury switch, contains 0.03 cc mercury
WIRING / DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1/2 0.5 dia (1.27) 1 1.0 dia (2.54) 1 1/2 5.5 4.375 (11.11) (13.97)
Contact Rating Non-plenum SPDT; 2A @ 120 VAC, 1A @ 240 VAC -P models SPDT; 1A @ 120 VAC, 240 VAC Switch Angle Makes at 15 below horizontal Operating Temperature -30 to 130F (-34 to 54C) Dimensions TS- 1.4"H x 1.0"W x 4.4"L (3.6 x 2.5 x 11.1 cm) TS1- 1.5"H x 1.8"W x 5.5"L (3.8 x 4.5 x 14.0 cm) Weight TS- 0.46 lb (0.21 kg) TS1- 0.8 lb (0.36 kg) Mounting TS- 1/2" (1.3 cm) damper shaft TS1- 1" (2.5 cm) damper shaft Warranty 1 year
TS-470
Cord 3' (91.4) 1/2 1.0 (2.54) 1 1.75 (4.45)
MODEL TS-470 TS-470-2 TS-470-P TS1-470 TS1-470-2 TS1-470-P KLNJ-A2 LS45M91B11 TS-475 TT-470 TT1-470 DESCRIPTION Damper position switch with SPDT switch, for 1/2" shaft Damper position switch with two SPDT switches, for 1/2" shaft Damper position switch with SPDT switch, for 1/2" shaft, stainless steel housing, and plenum-rated cable Damper position switch with SPDT switch, for 1" shaft Damper position switch with two SPDT switches, for 1" shaft Damper position switch with SPDT switch, for 1" shaft, stainless steel housing and plenum-rated cable RELATED PRODUCTS Whisker switch with coated spring-rod and 10A @ 120 VAC contacts Whisker switch with steel spring-rod and 5A @ 120 VAC contacts Non-mercury damper position switch, SPDT, for 1/2" damper shaft Tilt transducer with 1/2-in crank arm, 4-20 mA loop powered Tilt transducer with 1-in crank arm PAGE 3 3 5 6 6
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
Wiring
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

NON-MERCURY DAMPER POSITION SWITCH TS-475 SERIES
The TS-475 Series damper position switches use a roller ball and mechanical switch to provide open/closed damper position status. The TS-475 Series offers a non-mercury alternative for applications and for projects which do not allow mercury.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
3' length, AWG 18, 3-conductor plenum-rated cable; black = common, white = N.C., red = N.O. Switch Type Mechanical roller ball, SPDT Contact Rating 5A @ 120/250 VAC Switch Angle N.O. makes at 20 above horizontal, breaks at 15 below horizontal Operating Temperature -30 to 130F (-34 to 54C) Dimensions TS- 1.5"H x 1.5"W x 4.4"L (3.8 x 3.8 x 11.1 cm) TS1- 1.8"H x 1.5"W x 5.5"L (4.5 x 3.8 x 14.0 cm) Weight TS- 0.4 lb (0.2 kg) TS1- 0.7 lb (0.3 kg) Mounting TS- 1/2" (1.3 cm) damper shaft TS1- 1" (2.5 cm) damper shaft Enclosure Rating UL 94V-0 ammability rating Warranty 1 year
TS-475
MODEL TS-475 TS1-475 DESCRIPTION Non-mercury damper position switch, SPDT, for 1/2" damper shaft Non-mercury damper position switch, SPDT, for 1" damper shaft
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DESCRIPTION
SOLID STATE TILT TRANSDUCER FOR DAMPER/VALVE POSITION FEEDBACK TT-470 SERIES
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
The TT-470 Series solid state tilt transducer is a programmable, 2-wire, 4-20 mA loop-powered device specically designed to provide positive feedback of damper or valve position to a building automation system. The transducer is quickly and easily eld programmed, using an integral pushbutton, to span any shaft rotational range between 10 and 360 (one full rotation). The TT-470 contains no mercury or other hazardous substances and meets or exceeds all current RoHS environmental standards. The transducer includes an integral crankarm style mounting bracket and is available in 2 models; the TT-470 ts a 1/2" shaft and the TT1-470 ts a 1" shaft. The transducer must be mounted on a horizontal shaft, typically a damper shaft or a globe valve linkage shaft (for example the Honeywell Q5020 linkage).
NEW!
TT-470
SPECIFICATIONS
9 to 40 VDC 30" plenum-rated cable, 2-conductor 16 AWG unshielded Sensor Measurement Range Programmable from 10 to 360 rotation Sensing Technology Solid state orientation sensor Signal Output 4-20 mA, 2-wire loop powered Output Resolution 0.8 mA @ 90 rotation, 0.2 mA @ 360 rotation, 0.1 mA Maximum Output Impedance 1000 @ 24 VDC Lamps Red LED for programming Operating Temperature -20 to 150F (-29 to 66C) Dimensions TT-470 1.4"H x 1.0"W x 4.4" L (3.4 x 2.5 x 11.1 cm) TT1-470 1.4"H x 1.8"W x 5.5" L (3.4 x 4.4 x 13.9 cm) Weight TT-470 0.5 lb (0.2 kg) TT1-470 0.8 lb (0.4 kg) Installation TT-470 1/2" round shaft TT1-470 1" round shaft Enclosure Rating Indoors only, not suitable for outdoor installation RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year Supply Voltage Wiring
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
TT-470 TT1-470 0.5 dia 1.0 dia (2.5) (1.2) TT-470 TT1-470 5.5 4.375 (13.9) (11.1)
Note: Transducer must be oriented in the snap-in clip as shown in the drawing; the TT-470 text must be visible.
TT-470
Cable 30" (76) TT-470 1.0 (2.5) TT1-470 1.75 (4.4)
WIRING
Black Red
4-20 mA Signal
LED
30" Cable
Note: The calibration button is near the LED, concealed under the exible plastic end cap. DO NOT REMOVE THE END CAP.
9-40 VDC Power Supply
DCP-1.5-W MODEL TT-470 TT1-470 DESCRIPTION Tilt transducer with 1/2-in crank arm Tilt transducer with 1-in crank arm RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT PAGE 995 March 2014
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Model Description DAMPER ACTUATOR WEATHER SHIELDS ZS-100 ZS-150 DAMPER SHAFT CRANK ARMS KH6-K KH8-K CA-1 205830A BALL JOINTS BJ-809-K KG8-K DAMPER BLADE CRANK ARMS ZG-DC1-K ZG-DC2-K DMPRKC054 Universal damper blade crank arm, 3-1/2" length Universal damper blade crank arm, 6" length Damper blade crank arm for JCI CD1300 dampers SHAFT EXTENSIONS AV10-18-K ZG-NMSA1-K DMPRKC008 DMPRKC005-K ESK050-K DMPRKC003 March 2014 Shaft extension for 1/2" diameter shaft, 2" length
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES ACTUATOR ACCESSORIES
1
ZS-100 ZS-150
Galvanized weather shield for Belimo AFB/NFB/LF/TF/GMB/AMB/NMB/LMB Polycarbonate weather shield for Belimo AFB/NFB/LF/TF/GMB/AMB/NMB/LMB
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Crank arm for 3/4" shaft, 3-1/2" length, use with BJ-809-K ball joint Crank arm for 3/4" shaft, 3-1/2" length, use with KG8-K ball joint KH6-K Crank arm for 1" shaft, 3-1/2" length, use with BJ-809-K ball joint Crank arm/ball joint kit for KA-44, KA-88 actuators
KH8-K 205830A
CA-1
KC1403S-K Crank arm for 3/8" shaft, 2-7/8" length, use with BJ-809-K ball joint KC1405L-K Crank arm for 1/2" shaft, 4-3/4" length, use with BJ-809-K ball joint
KC-1403S-K
KC-1405L-K
Ball joint, straight, use with 5/16" diameter pushrod Ball joint, 90 angle, use with 5/16" diameter pushrod BJ-809-K
KG8-K
ZG-DC1-K ZG-DC2-K DMPR-KC054
AV10-18-K
Shaft extension for 3/8" to 9/16" diameter shafts, 9-1/2" length ZG-NMSA-1-K
Shaft extension for JCI damper square shaft, 7" length Shaft extension for 1/2" shafts, 4 5/8" length w/coupler Ruskin damper shaft extension kit Shaft extension for 1/2" shafts, 7" length
DMPR-KC008 DMPR-KC003 (shaft only)
ESK050-K DMPR-KC005-K
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES ACTUATOR ACCESSORIES
Model
Description
PUSH RODS PR-24 PR-48 5/16" dia. 24" (.61m) length push rod 5/16" dia., 48" (1.2m) length push rod
NEW!
PR-24 PR-48 ZG-103 50001194-001 ZG-107 ZG-108 ZG-104 ZG-112 ZG-101 ZG-100 DMPR-KC255 ZG-102
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
FLOOR MOUNT BRACKETS 50001194Universal surface mount bracket with crank arm and 1/2" shaft 001 ZG-103 ZG-104 ZG-107 ZG-108 ZG-112 Right angle horizontal mounting bracket for Belimo GMB, NMB, AMB Right angle vertical mounting bracket for Belimo GMB, NMB, AMB Floor mounting bracket, horizontal, for AF actuators Floor mounting bracket, vertical, for AF actuators Floor mount bracket, vertical, for LF actuators
DAMPER MOUNT BRACKETS ZG-100 ZG-101 ZG-102 DMPRKC255 Right angle mounting bracket for AFB/NFB and AMB/GMB actuators Right angle oor mount bracket for AFB/NFB and AMB/GMB actuators Tandem actuator mounting bracket for AF/AFB/GMB actuators Internal-mount bracket for JCI M9000 actuators
POWER AND SIGNAL ACCESSORIES ZG-R01 691-K0A 500, 1/2W, 1% resistor Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 691-KOA ZG-R01
691-U100 Class 2 control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 96 VA SGF24 SGA24 Remote control dial, proportional, ush mount Remote control dial, proportional, surface mount
691-U100
SGF24
SGA24 March 2014
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
KELE REVOLUTION DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN KA-44, KA-88, KA-175, KA-301 SERIES
The Kele Revolution KA-44, KA-88, KA-175, and KA-301 Series actuators are designed and tested to provide reliable non-spring return control for dampers and valves. They are powered by 24 VAC/VDC and accept tri-state/two-position and proportional control signals.
Switchable drive direction Service/Off switch (tri-state/two-position models) Auto-adapt switch (proportional models) Manual override Self-centering, reversible hub Adjustable mechanical rotation stops Dual SPDT auxiliary switches available 60,000 cycles nominal
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
KA-175-P (KA-301 Higher torque)
KA-44-M (KA-88 Higher torque)
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Motor Wiring Action Rotation Drive Time Manual Override 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC (VAC only for KA-175-2T, KA-301-2T) Synchronous with magnetic clutch (2-pos, oating), Brushless DC (proportional) Enclosed terminals Switch selectable direct/reverse acting 95 3 95 seconds @ 60Hz Disengage button Noise -44, -88 <35 db @ 3' (1m) -175, -301 <40 db @ 3' (1m) Resolution 400 steps Life Expectancy 60,000 cycles, 1.5 million repositions Operating Temperature -5 to 140F (-20 to 60C) 5 to 95% RH Operating Humidity Approvals cULus, CE, C-tick, plenum rated, E4436/E179109 Warranty 5 years
INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model KA-44-2T KA-44-M KA-88-2T KA-88-M Torque 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) Supply VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 6.0 VA 6.0 VA 9.0 VA 8.0 VA Control Signal Two-position, oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Two-position, oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Two-position, oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Two-position, oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Input Impedance Feedback None 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA 0/2-10 VDC None 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA 0/2-10 VDC None 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA 0/2-10 VDC None 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA 0/2-10 VDC Auxiliary Switch None None None None SW2 accessory SW2 accessory SW2 accessory SW2 accessory
KA-175-2T 175 in-lb (20 Nm) KA-175-P 175 in-lb (20 Nm)
KA-301-2T 301 in-lb (34 Nm) KA-301-P 301 in-lb (34 Nm)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIMENSIONS
KELE REVOLUTION DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN KA-44, KA-88, KA-175, KA-301 SERIES
Model KA-44-2T KA-44-M KA-88-2T KA-88-M
Torque 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm)
Maximum Shaft Minimum Shaft Diameter Length 2.4"H x 2.6"W x 5.3"L (6.2 x 6.6 x 13.4 cm) 0.6" (1.6 cm) 1.6" (4.1 cm) Dimensions 2.4"H x 2.6"W x 5.3"L (6.2 x 6.6 x 13.4 cm) 2.4"H x 2.6"W x 5.3"L (6.2 x 6.6 x 13.4 cm) 2.4"H x 2.6"W x 5.3"L (6.2 x 6.6 x 13.4 cm) 0.6" (1.6 cm) 0.6" (1.6 cm) 0.6" (1.6 cm) 1.6" (4.1 cm) 1.6" (4.1 cm) 1.6" (4.1 cm)
NEW!
Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 (IP54) NEMA 2 (IP54) NEMA 2 (IP54) NEMA 2 (IP54) 1.06 in (2.7 cm) 1.06 in (2.7 cm) 1.06 in (2.7 cm) 1.06 in (2.7 cm) 0.87 in (2.2 cm) 0.87 in (2.2 cm) 0.87 in (2.2 cm) 0.87 in (2.2 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) NEMA 2 (IP54) NEMA 2 (IP54) NEMA 2 (IP54)
Control Switch
Weight
1.0 lb (0.4 kg) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
KA-175-2T 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 3.9"H x 3.6"W x 8.8"L (10.0 x 9.2 x 22.3 cm) KA-175-P KA-301-P 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 3.9"H x 3.6"W x 8.8"L (10.0 x 9.2 x 22.3 cm) 301 in-lb (34 Nm) 3.9"H x 3.6"W x 8.8"L (10.0 x 9.2 x 22.3 cm) KA-301-2T 301 in-lb (34 Nm) 3.9"H x 3.6"W x 8.8"L (10.0 x 9.2 x 22.3 cm)
WIRING
Control Switch
Dir
Dir Service/Off Re v
2 3 4
24 VAC/VDC
Service/Off Re v
2 3 4
24 VAC/VDC
Floating controller
Service used for manual adjust
KA-44-2T, KA-88-2T, KA-175-2T, KA-301-2T Two-position Control

2. .. 10 V 0. .. 10 V Dir Service/Off Rev 10. .. 0 V 10. .. 2 V
KA-44-2T, KA-88-2T, KA-44-M, KA-88-M, KA-175-2T, KA-301-2T Floating Control S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 C N.C. N.O. C N.C. N.O. CCW switch CW switch
1 2 3 4 5
0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA, * 500 resistor 0/2-10 VDC Feedback
24 VAC/VDC
KA-44-M, KA-88-M, KA-175-P, KA-301-P Proportional Control 0 or 2-10 VDC / 0 or 4-20 mA Signal (500 resistor required)
SW2 Auxiliary Switch Kit Switch ratings: Adjustable between 5 and 85 degrees, 24 VAC/VDC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive
MODEL KA-44-2T KA-44-M KA-88-2T KA-88-M KA-175-2T KA-175-P KA-301-2T KA-301-P 32004254-003 50000407-001 50001194-001 SW2 ZG-R01 DESCRIPTION Non-spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position or tri-state (oating) control Non-spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), proportional, two-position or tri-state (oating) control Non-spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position or tri-state (oating) control Non-spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), proportional, two-position or tri-state (oating) control Non-spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position or tri-state (oating) control Non-spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), proportional, two-position or tri-state (oating) control Non-spring return, 301 in-lb (34 Nm), two-position or tri-state (oating) control Non-spring return, 301 in-lb (34 Nm), proportional, two-position or tri-state (oating) control ACCESSORIES Replacement shaft coupler for KA-301, MNxx34 Tandem mount bracket for KAS-175 actuators Universal surface mount bracket with crank arm and 1/2" shaft 2X/SPDT/AUX SWTCH/KA/KAS/1000-X 500 , 1/2W, 1% resistor
10
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Manual override for testing and verication Reversing switch for control exibility UL, CSA, and CE approved for worldwide application Plenum-rated housing and cable connections NEMA 4 models available for outdoor locations
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB SERIES
The Belimo LMB, NMB, AMB, and GMB Series direct coupled actuators provide control of dampers and valves for non-spring return applications. They come in two-position, tri-state (oating), proportional, and Multi-Function Technology (MFT) models. All actuators include a manual release mechanism for manual override.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB Series
Supply Voltage Input Impedance Motor Wiring Action Rotation Manual Override
24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA (-SR and -MFT models) Brushless DC 3-foot plenum cable, 18 AWG, terminals Non-spring return 95 degrees Pushbutton disengage
Noise Resolution Life Expectancy Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Approvals RoHS Statement Warranty
<45 db @ 3' (1m); <35 db @ 3' (1m) (LMB models) 100 steps 100,000 cycles, 1 million repositions -22 to 122F (-30 to 50C) 5 to 95% RH cULus, CE, plenum rated Yes 5 years
Model LMB24-3 LMB24-3-S LMB24-SR LMB24-MFT NMB24-3 NMB24-SR NMB24-MFT AMB24-3 AMB24-3-S AMB24-SR AMB24-MFT GMB24-3 GMB24-SR GMB24-MFT Torque 45 in-lb, (5 Nm) 45 in-lb, (5 Nm) 45 in-lb, (5 Nm) 45 in-lb, (5 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) Supply VA 2 VA 2 VA 3 VA 5 VA 4 VA 5 VA 6 VA 5.5 VA 5.5 VA 5 VA 6 VA 6 VA 6.5 VA 7 VA Control Signal Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) Two-position, oating Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position, oating Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) Feedback P1000A (1 k option) P1000A (1 k option) 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC P1000A (1 k option) 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC P1000A (1 k option) P1000A (1 k option) 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC P1000A (1 k option) 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC Auxiliary Switch S1A or S2A (option) 1 SPDT, 3A @ 250V S1A or S2A (option) S1A or S2A (option) S1A or S2A (option) S1A or S2A (option) S1A or S2A (option) S1A or S2A (option) 1 SPDT, 3A @ 250V S1A or S2A (option) S1A or S2A (option) S1A or S2A (option) S1A or S2A (option) S1A or S2A (option) Drive Time 95 seconds 95 seconds 95 seconds 150 seconds 95 seconds 95 seconds 150 seconds 95 seconds 95 seconds 95 seconds 150 seconds 95 seconds 95 seconds 150 seconds
DIMENSIONS
Model LMB NMB NMB-N4 AMB AMB-N4 GMB March 2014 Torque 45 in-lb, (5 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 180 in-lb (20 Nm) Dimensions 2.3"H x 2.6"W x 7.4"L (5.9 x 6.6 x 18.9 cm) 2.4"H x 3.2"W x 7.7"L (6.1 x 8.0 x 19.6 cm) 4.9"H x 5.3"W x 10.7"L (12.4 x 13.4 x 27.1 cm) 2.5"H x 3.5"W x 8.3"L (6.3 x 8.8 x 21.1 cm) Maximum Shaft Minimum Shaft Diameter Length 0.75 in (1.9 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.8" (4.5 cm) 2.4" (6.0 cm) 2.4" (6.0 cm) 2.2" (5.6 cm) 2.2" (5.6 cm) 2.4" (6.0 cm) Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 (IP54) UL94-5V NEMA 2 (IP54) UL94-5V NEMA 4/4X (IP66/IP67) NEMA 2 (IP54) UL94-5V NEMA 4/4X (IP66/IP67) NEMA 2 (IP54) UL94-5V Weight 1.0 lb (0.5 kg) 1.65 lb (.75 kg) 3.8 lb (1.7 kg) 2.2 lb (1.0 kg) 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) 3.0 lb (1.1kg)
160 in-lb (18 Nm) 4.9"H x 5.3"W x 10.7"L (12.4 x 13.4 x 27.1 cm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 2.9"H x 4.6"W x 9.0"L (7.3 x 11.9 x 23.0 cm)
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
11
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

WIRING
24 VAC Transformer
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB SERIES
Line voltage
1 Blk
Common + Hot
4-20 mA control signal
() (+)
500
2 Red
3 Wht 4 Gr n
L R
Input 2-10V Output
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
*Resistor is 500, 1/4 watt ZG-R01, required for 4-20 mA, leave out for 2-10 VDC
COM
LMB24-SR, NMB24-SR, AMB24-SR, GMB24-SR 4-20 mA, 2-10 VDC

24 VAC/VDC Signal common 2-10 VDC signal
1 2 3
Y Y
LMB24-3, AMB24-3, GMB24-3 Two-position
LMB24-3, AMB24-3, GMB24-3 Tri-state
Code A01 A02 A07 A09 A16 A17
Signal 2-10 VDC 0-10 VDC 0-5 VDC 5-10 VDC 2-6 VDC 6-10 VDC PWM 0.59 - 2.95 sec PWM 0.02 - 5.00 sec Floating Two-positon
Feedback 2-10 VDC 0-10 VDC 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC
P1 P2 P3
COM
() 2-10 VDC feedback signal (+)
NEW!
24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC
() (+)

() (+)
Control switch
Tri-state control
Wire number
Wire number
S1
1 k 1W potentiometer
S2 S3 S4
N.C.
S1A and S2A
Wire number
N.O. N.C. S2A only
COM
~ ~
10
P1000A
1
S5 S6
COM
Slave
W01 W02 F01 J2
Parallel connection of four motors is possible. No more than 2 GMB motors on the same shaft.
2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC
Meets cULus and CSA requirements without the need of an electrical ground connection.
N.O.
S1A/S2A
AMB24-SR, GMB24-SR Modulating (2-10 VDC) with slave actuator
MFT Function Codes
P1000A/S1A/S2A for GM, AM, NM, and LM Motors (add-on auxiliary functions)
MODEL LMB24-3 LMB24-3-S LMB24-3-T LMB24-MFT LMB24-MFT-C LMB24-SR LMB24-SR-T NMB24-3 NMB24-3-T-N4 NMB24-MFT NMB24-MFT-C NMB24-SR NMB24-SR-T-N4 AMB24-3 AMB24-3-S AMB24-3-T-N4 AMB24-3-T-N4H AMB24-MFT AMB24-MFT-C AMB24-SR AMB24-SR-T-N4 AMB24-SR-T-N4H GMB24-3 GMB24-MFT GMB24-MFT-C GMB24-SR P1000A S1A S2A ZG-LMSA ZG-NMSA-1-K ZG-R01 DESCRIPTION Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control, aux. switch Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control, terminals Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), congurable control Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), congurable control, pre-congured Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control Non-spring return 45 in-lb (5 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control, terminals Non-spring return 90 in-lb (10 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control Non-spring return 90 in-lb (10 Nm), congurable control Non-spring return 90 in-lb (10 Nm), congurable control, pre-congured Non-spring return 90 in-lb (10 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional, terminals, NEMA 4 enclosure Non-spring return 180 in-lb (20 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control Non-spring return 180 in-lb (20 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control, aux. switch Non-spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-pos./tri-state, NEMA 4 enclosure Non-spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-pos./tri-state, NEMA 4 encl. w/heater Non-spring return 180 in-lb (20 Nm), congurable control Non-spring return 180 in-lb (20 Nm), congurable control, pre-congured Non-spring return 180 in-lb (20 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control Non-spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control, NEMA 4 enclosure Non-spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control, NEMA 4 encl. w/heater Non-spring return 360 in-lb (40 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position/tri-state control Non-spring return 360 in-lb (40 Nm), congurable control Non-spring return 360 in-lb (40 Nm), congurable control, pre-congured Non-spring return 360 in-lb (40 Nm), 2-10 VDC proportional control RELATED PRODUCTS Optional 1000 feedback pot for LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB Optional SPDT auxiliary switch for LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB Optional dual SPDT auxiliary switch for LMB, NMB, AMB, GMB Shaft extension for 1/2" diameter shafts, 3.8" length, for LMB actuators Shaft extension for 1/2" diameter shaft, 2" length 500 , 1/2W, 1% resistor
12
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES SPECIFICATIONS
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

KMC ACTUATORS MEP SERIES
The MEP-4000 Series are compact but powerful direct-coupled actuators which provide tri-state or proportional control for small dampers or valves in HVAC systems. A minimum torque of 40 (MEP-40xx) or 80 (MEP-48xx) in-lbs. is available over the 95 angular rotation. The MEP-7000 Series are powerful, efcient, durable, direct-coupled actuators which also provide tri-state or proportional control for large control air dampers or valves in HVAC systems. A minimum torque of 120, 180, or 320 in-lbs. is available over the 94 angular rotation. Capacitor-driven fail-safe models provide efcient operation with switch-selectable fail direction.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Proportional models include anti-jitter circuitry Switch-selectable feedback on selected models Fully adjustable, built-in auxiliary switch on selected models Removable terminals and removable 1/2" NPS conduit tting (except the MEP-4003) Direct mounting to standard shaft sizes Gear disengagement button Adjustable mechanical end stop Valve body quick-mount option on MEP- 4002V/4003V A patent-pending noise reducer provides whisper-quiet operation on the MEP-4201, 4501, 4901 series Fast rotationless than 35 seconds for 90 with 25 or 45 in-lb. of torque or less than 45 seconds with 90 in-lb. torque on the MEP-4201, 4501, 4901 series
MEP-4252
MEP-7852
Supply Voltage MEP-4xx5 Series 100 to 240 VAC MEP-4000 (all others) 24 VDC/VAC (+20%/15%), Class 2 only MEP-7000 Series 24 VDC/VAC (+20%/15%), Class 2 only or 22-35 VDC Supply VA MEP-4000 Series 2 VA Tri-state models, 4 VA Proportional models MEP-750X Series 6 VA MEP-755X Series 8 VA MEP-780X Series 8 VA MEP-785X Series 10 VA Control Signal Floating, Proportional, 2-Position Wiring 14-22 AWG, 12-26 AWG Wiring Terminations Screw Terminals, Cable Pigtail Conduit Connection Yes, dual Enclosure Flame-retardant plastic Operating Torque 25 in-lbs to 320 in-lbs 95 degrees Rotation Drive Time 25 to 90 seconds Operating Temperature -22 to 131F (-30 to 55C) Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing Maximum Shaft Diameter MEP-4000 Series 1/4" to 5/8" round, 1/4" to 7/16" square MEP-7000 Series 3/8" to 1.05" round, 5/16" to 5/8" square Noise Level Less than 45 dbA maximum at 1 meter
Approvals MEP-4000 Series MEP-7000 Series Dimensions MEP-4003
SASO PCP Registration KSA R-103260; UL 873 Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment; FCC Class B, Part 15, Subpart B and complies with Canadian ICES-003 Class B (MEP-4xx4 models only are Class A) UL 873 Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment; FCC Class B, Part 15
5.3"H x 2.6"W x 1.8"D (13.5 x 6.6 x 4.6 cm) MEP-4003V 5.3"H (w/o handle extended) x 2.6"W x 2.59"D (13.5 x 6.6 x 6.6 cm) MEP-4002V 5.3"H (w/o handle extended) x 2.6"W x 3.28"D (13.5 x 6.6 x 8.32 cm) MEP-4201, 4501, 4901 6.0"H x 2.8"W x 3.4"D (15.2 x 7.14 x 8.65 cm) MEP-4000 (all others) 5.3"H x 2.6"W x 2.5"D (13.5 x 6.6 x 6.35 cm) MEP-7000 Series 10.1"H x 5"W x 3"D (25.7 x 12.7x 7.6 cm) Weight MEP-4000 Series 1.1 lb (0.49 kg) MEP-7x0x 5 lb (2.27 kg) MEP-7x5x 5.4 lb (2.45 kg) Warranty 5 years
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
13
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

WIRING
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
STRAIN RELIEF
POWER SUPPLY
MEP-7xx2 Wiring (Proportional)

24 VAC/VDC Power In
MEP-4003 (Only) Wiring Detail
CW Feedback Potentiometer (MEP-7xx3 only)
CCW
MEP-7x01/7x03 Wiring (Tri-State, Non-Fail-Safe)
POWER
SUPPLY ~
FEEDBACK POT: COM (MEP-4013/4813 ONLY) CCW
CW
CW 24 VAC/VDC Power In
Feedback Potentiometer (MEP-7xx3 only)
CCW
MEP-4x01/4x13/4x21 Wiring Detail
MEP-7x51/7x53 (Normal) Wiring (Tri-State, Fail-Safe)

24 VAC/VDC Power In Switch/Contact Jumper 1 2 1 2 Feedback Potentiometer (MEP-7xx3 only)
POWER ~ SUPPLY CONTROL SIGNAL +
+ FEEDBACK OUT
MEP-4x02/4x22 Wiring Detail
MEP-7x51/7x53 Two-Position Wiring (Tri-State, Fail-Safe)

March 2014
14
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
(MEP-7x52 Only)
NEW!
24 VAC/VDC Power In Control Signal Common 010 VDC Control Signal 420 mA Control Signal
05 or 010 VDC Feedback Signal
NEW!
WIRING (continued)
210 IN (White) OUT (Green) COM (Black) ~24 V (Red)
12 Switch Position
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

COM
~24 V
CCW
COM
12
Feedback Output 15 or 210 VDC
~/+ Power Supply 24 VAC/VDC
~24 V
CCW
Switch Position CW
1
CW
MEP-4xx2 Proportional Control
COM
COM (Black)
~24 V
CCW
Switch Position CW 12
(L1) Neutral (Black)
(L2) Line (Red)
~24 V (Red)
Control Signal + 210 VDC
Contact Position: Open = CW Rotation Closed = CCW Rotation
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
MEP-4x51 Tri-State Floating Point Control
MEP-4x51 2-Position Control, CCW Leg
Contact Position: Open = CCW Rotation Closed = CW Rotation
NOTE: Double Insulated. Meets UL requirements without the need of an electrical ground connection.
MEP-4x51 2-Position Control, CW Leg
MODEL MEP-4001 MEP-4002 MEP-4003 MEP-4013 MEP-4021 MEP-4022 MEP-4201 MEP-4501 MEP-4801 MEP-4802 MEP-4813 MEP-4821 MEP-4822 MEP-4901 MEP-7501 MEP-7502 MEP-7503 MEP-7801 MEP-7802 MEP-7803
MEP-4xx4 Two-Position 24 VAC/VDC
ORDERING INFORMATION, NON-FAIL-SAFE MODELS

DESCRIPTION Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state 90 second no cover Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/potentiometer Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/auxilliary switch Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional w/auxilliary switch Non-Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 24 VAC/VDC Tri-state or 2 position Non-Failsafe, 40 in-lb, 24 VAC/VDC Tri-state or 2 position Non-Failsafe, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state Non-Failsafe, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional Non-Failsafe, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/potentiometer Non-Failsafe, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/ auxilliary switch Non-Failsafe, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional w/ auxilliary switch Non-Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state or 2 position Non-Failsafe, 180 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state Non-Failsafe, 180 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional Non-Failsafe, 180 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/potentiometer Non-Failsafe, 320 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state Non-Failsafe, 320 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional Non-Failsafe, 320 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/potentiometer
Line/Hot Neutral
100240 VAC Power
MEP-4xx5 Two-Position 100240 VAC
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
15
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ORDERING INFORMATION, ELECTRONIC FAIL-SAFE MODELS
MODEL MEP-4251 MEP-4252 MEP-4254 MEP-4255 MEP-4272 MEP-4274 MEP-4275 MEP-4551 MEP-4552 MEP-4554 MEP-4555 MEP-4572 MEP-4574 MEP-4575 MEP-4951 MEP-4952 MEP-4954 MEP-4955 MEP-4972 MEP-4974 MEP-4975 MEP-7551 MEP-7552 MEP-7553 MEP-7851 MEP-7852 MEP-7853
DESCRIPTION Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 24 VAC, 2-position Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 100-240 VAC, 2-position Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional w/auxilliary switch Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 24 VAC, 2-position w/auxilliary switch Failsafe, 25 in-lb, 100-240 VAC2-position w/auxilliary switch Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 24 VAC, 2-position Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 100-240 VAC, 2-position Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional w/auxilliary switch Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 24 VAC, 2-position w/auxilliary switch Failsafe, 45 in-lb, 100-240 VAC, 2-position w/auxilliary switch Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 24 VAC, 2-position Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 100-240 VAC, 2-position Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional w/2 auxilliary switches Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 24 VAC, 2-position w/2 auxilliary switches Failsafe, 90 in-lb, 100-240 VAC, 2-position w/2 auxilliary switches Failsafe, 180 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state Failsafe, 180 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional Failsafe, 180 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/potentiometer Failsafe, 320 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state Failsafe, 320 in-lb, 24 VAC, Proportional Failsafe, 320 in-lb, 24 VAC, Tri-state w/potentiometer
NEW!
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
MODEL CTE-5202 HLO-4001 HCO-1151 HMO-4001 HMO-4002 HMO-4004 HPO-5074 HPO-5073 CME-7001 CME-7002 HCO-1152 HLO-1020 HMO-4535 HMO-4536
ACCESSORIES DESCRIPTION Proportional thermostat (MEP-4000 series) Crank arm kit (MEP-4000 series) Weather shield kit (MEP-4000 series) non-rotation t bracket (MEP-4000 series) Replacement non-rotation bracket (MEP-4000 series) Non-rotation bracket kit for VEB series ball valves (MEP-4000 series) Ball valve to actuator quick mount kit for MEP-400xv only Ball valve to actuator repair kit for standard (MEP-4000 series) Rotary auxilliary cam switch-single (MEP-7000 series) Rotary auxilliary cam switch-double (MEP-7000 series) Weather shield kit (MEP-7000 series) Crank arm kit (MEP-7000 series) Replacement non-rotation bracket (MEP-7000 series) Adjustable end stop kit (MEP-7000 series)
16
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Adjustable mechanical range stops Auto adapt on modulating models Internal or eld-installable auxiliary switches Signal mode switch Adjustable zero and span Mechanical override declutch Detachable wiring cover Consistent wiring
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN MN SERIES
The MN Series actuators are non-spring return direct coupled actuators from Honeywell. They are designed and tested to provide reliable non-spring return control for dampers and valves that require up to 300 in-lb (34 Nm) of torque. The MN Series is powered by 24 VAC/VDC and has an excellent feature set that combines exibility and simplicity.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
MN6105A1011, 44 in-lb MN7510A2209, 88 in-lb
MN6120A1002, 175 in-lb MN7234A2008, 300 in-lb
Supply Voltage Motor Wiring Rotation Drive Time Manual Override 21-27 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC (except MN6120, MN6134) Brushless DC; Synchronous with magnetic clutch (oating 175, 300 in-lb) Enclosed terminals 95 3 95 seconds Disengage button Noise 44, 88 in-lb <35 dB @ 3' (1m); 175, 300 in-lb <40 dB @ 3' (1m) Resolution 400 steps Life Expectancy 60,000 cycles, 1 million repositions Operating Temperature -5 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH Approvals UL, cUL, CE, C-tick, plenum rated, E4996 Warranty 5 years
Model MN6105A1011 MN6105A1201 MN7505A2001 MN7505A2209 MN6110A1003 MN6110A1201 MN7510A2001 MN7510A2209 MN6120A1002 MN6120A1200 MN7220A2007 MN7220A2205 MN6134A1003 MN7234A2008 March 2014 Torque 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 300 in-lb (34 Nm) Supply VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 6.0 VA 6.0 VA 6.0 VA 6.0 VA 9.0 VA 8.0 VA Control Signal Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA Two-position, oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA Input Impedance Feedback None None 0/2-10 VDC 0/2-10 VDC None None 0/2-10 VDC 0/2-10 VDC None None 0/2-10 VDC 0/2-10 VDC None 0/2-10 VDC Auxiliary Switch SW2 add-on Internal, dual SPDT, class II only SW2 add-on Internal, dual SPDT, class II only SW2 add-on Internal, dual SPDT, class II only SW2 add-on Internal, dual SPDT, class II only SW2 add-on Internal, dual SPDT, class II only SW2 add-on Internal, dual SPDT, class II only SW2 add-on SW2 add-on
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
17
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIMENSIONS
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN MN SERIES
Model MNxx05 MNxx10 MNxx20
Torque 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 300 in-lb (34 Nm)
Dimensions
2.4"H x 2.6"W x 5.3"L (6.2 x 6.6 x 13.4 cm)
2.4"H x 2.6"W x 5.3"L (6.2 x 6.6 x 13.4 cm)
3.9"H x 3.6"W x 8.8"L (10.0 x 9.2 x 22.3 cm) 3.9"H x 3.6"W x 8.8"L (10.0 x 9.2 x 22.3 cm)
NEW!
Maximum Shaft Diameter 0.63" (1.6 cm) Minimum Shaft Length 1.62" (4.1 cm) Weight 0.63" (1.6 cm) 1.62" (4.1 cm) 1.06 in (2.7 cm) 1.06 in (2.7 cm) 0.87" (2.2 cm) 0.87" (2.2 cm)
Dir Service/Off Rev
1.0 lb (0.4 kg) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg)
3.2 lb (1.45 kg) 3.2 lb (1.45 kg)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
MNxx34
WIRING
2 + 3
4
Dir Service/Off Rev
24 VAC/VDC
2 + 3 + 4
24 VAC/VDC Floating controller
MN61xx Two-position Control

2... 10 V 0... 10 V Dir Service/Off Rev 10... 0 V 10... 2 V
MN61xx, MN75xx Floating Control 24 VAC/VDC
+ 1 2
3 5
0 or 2-10 VDC or 0 or 4-20 mA with 500 resistor 0 or 2-10 VDC Feedback
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
C N.C. N.O. C N.C. N.O.
CCW switch
CW switch
MN75xx/72xx Proportional Control 0 or 2-10 VDC or 0 or 4-20 mA Signal* (ZG-R01 500 resistor required for 4-20 mA signal)
SW2 Auxiliary Switch Kit Switch ratings: Adjustable between 5 and 85 degrees, 24 VAC/VDC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive Models with internal switches have same contact ratings
MODEL MN6105A1011 MN6105A1201 MN7505A2001 MN7505A2209 MN6110A1003 MN6110A1201 MN7510A2001 MN7510A2209 MN6120A1002 MN6120A1200 MN7220A2007 MN7220A2205 MN6134A1003 MN7234A2008 32004254-003 50001194-001 SW2 ZG-R01 DESCRIPTION Non-spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position/tri-state control Non-spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position/tri-state, aux switches Non-spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), proportional/two-pos/tri-state control Non-spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), proportional/two-pos/tri-state, aux sw. Non-spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position and tri-state control Non-spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position/tri-state, aux switches Non-spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), proportional/two-pos/tri-state control Non-spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), proportional/two-pos/tri-state control, aux sw. Non-spring return, 175 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position and tri-state control Non-spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position/tri-state control, aux switches Non-spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), proportional/two-pos/tri-state control Non-spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), proportional/two-pos/tri-state, aux sw. Non-spring return, 300 in-lb (34 Nm), two-position and tri-state control Non-spring return, 300 in-lb (34 Nm), proportional control ACCESSORIES Replacement shaft coupler for KA-301, MNxx34 Universal surface mount bracket with crank arm and 1/2" shaft 2X/SPDT/AUX SWTCH/KA/KAS/1000-X 500 , 1/2W, 1% resistor March 2014
18
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Self-centering shaft coupling Brushless motor technology on all models Rugged, lightweight housing
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN GBB, GDE, GEB, GIB, GLB, GAP SERIES
Siemens GDE, GLB, GEB, GBB, GIB, and GAP Series direct coupled, non-spring return actuators provide actuation for a complete range of HVAC non-spring return damper applications, from terminal units to inlet vane dampers and more. They range in torque from 44 in-lb (5 Nm), handling approximately 11 sq ft of damper area, to 310 in-lb (35 Nm), handling approximately 77 sq ft of damper area. These actuators are available in all standard control signal types and offer a wide variety of options and accessories.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
GBB
GEB
GDE
Supply Voltage GAP Series Motor Wiring Action Rotation Manual Override 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz 24 VAC/VDC, 20%, 50/60 Hz Brushless DC 3" (0.9 m) AWG 18 plenum-rated cable DA/RA wire connections (2-pos, oating), DA/RA switch selectable (proportional) 95 Disengage button <45 db @ 3" (1m), (except GAP Series) Life Expectancy 60,000 cycles, 1.5 million repositions GAP Series 100,000 full stroke cycles, 7,000,000 repositions Operating Temperature -25 to 130F (-32 to 55C) GAP Series 0 to 122F (-18 to 50C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing Approvals UL, cUL, CE, plenum rated, E35198 RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 2 years Noise
Model GDE131.1P GDE161.1P GAP191.1P GLB131.1P GLB161.1P GEB131.1P GEB161.1P GBB131.1P GBB161.1P GIB131.1P GIB161.1P March 2014 Torque 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 132 in-lb (15 Nm) 132 in-lb (15 Nm) 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 310 in-lb (35 Nm) 310 in-lb (35 Nm) Supply VA 2.3 VA 3.3 VA 28 VA 2.3 VA 3.3 VA 3.3 VA 5.0 VA 7.0 VA 8.0 VA 7.0 VA 8.0 VA Control Signal Two-position, oating Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Two-position, oating, proportional 0/2-10 VDC Two-position, oating Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Two-position, oating Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Two-position, oating Proportional 0 to 10 VDC Two-position, oating Proportional 0 to 10 VDC 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k 100 k Input Impedance Feedback None, order GDE132.1P None 0-10 VDC None, order GLB132.1P None None, order GEB132.1U None None, order GBB132.1P None None, order GIB132.1P None Auxiliary Switch None, order GDE136.1P None, order GDE166.1P None, order GAP196.1P None, order GLB136.1P None, order GLB166.1P None, order GEB136.1P None, order GEB164.1P None, order GBB136.1P None, order GBB166.1P None, order GIB136.1P None, order GIB166.1P Drive Time 90 seconds 90 seconds 2 seconds 125 seconds 125 seconds 125 seconds 125 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
19
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIMENSIONS
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN GBB, GDE, GEB, GIB, GLB, GAP SERIES
Model GDE GAP GLB
Torque 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 132 in-lb (15 Nm) 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 310 in-lb (35 Nm)
Dimensions 2.4H x 2.8W x 5.4L (6.0 x 7.0 x 13.7 cm) 2.4H x 3.3W x 8.4L (6.0 x 8.3 x 21.2 cm) 2.4H x 2.8W x 5.4L (6.0 x 7.0 x 13.7 cm) 2.4H x 3.3W x 8.4L (6.0 x 8.3 x 21.2 cm) 2.8H x 3.9W x 11.8L (7.2 x 10.0 x 30.0 cm) 2.8H x 3.9W x 11.8L (7.2 x 10.0 x 30.0 cm)
Maximum Shaft Minimum Shaft Diameter Length 0.63 (1.6 cm) 0.75 (2.0 cm)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
GEB GBB GIB
NEW!
Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 (IP54) 0.75 (2.0 cm) 0.75 (2.0 cm) NEMA 1 (IP54) 0.63 (1.6 cm) 0.75 (2.0 cm) NEMA 2 (IP54) 0.75 (2.0 cm) 1.0 (2.6 cm) 1.0 (2.6 cm) 0.75 (2.0 cm) NEMA 1 (IP54) 0.75 (2.0 cm) 0.75 (2.0 cm) NEMA 2 (IP40) NEMA 2 (IP40)
L1 L2 6 (violet) 24 VAC 1 (red) Y1 G Y2 M
Isolation Class 2 24 VAC transformer. Isolate secondary from ground.
Weight
1.0 lb (0.4 kg) 3.4 lb (1.5 kg) 1.0 lb (0.4 kg) 2.8 lb (1.3 kg) 4.8 lb (2.2 kg) 4.8 lb (2.2 kg)
WIRING
6 (violet) 24 VAC 1
Floating controller
L1 L2
Y1 G Y2 M
(red)
7 (orange)
Two-position switch open = full clockwise closed = full counterclockwise
7 (orange)
GDE13x, GLB13x, GBB13x, GIB13x Floating Control
GBB17x, GIB17x Two-position Control with Floating Control Actuator
L1 L2
1 24 VAC +
Analog controller 0-10 VDC feedback
(red) (black) (gray) (pink)
G GO Y U M
24 VAC 24 VDC
OR
1 2
(red) (black)
G GO Y1 Y2 M
2 8 9
7 (orange) 8
Floating controller
(gray)
GDE16x, GLB16x, GBB16x, GIB16x, GAP19x 0-10 VDC Control
GAP19x 2-Position Floating Control (for 2-position, eliminate connection 8 (gray))
MODEL GDE131.1P GDE161.1P GAP191.1P GLB131.1P GLB161.1P GEB131.1U GEB161.1P GBB131.1P GBB161.1P GIB131.1P GIB161.1P DESCRIPTION Non-spring return 44 in-lb (5 Nm), tri-state control Non-spring return 44 in-lb (5 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control Non-spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm), 2-position, oating or proportional control Non-spring return 88 in-lb (10 Nm), tri-state control Non-spring return 88 in-lb (10 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control Non-spring return 132 in-lb (15 Nm), tri-state control Non-spring return 132 in-lb (15 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control Non-spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), tri-state control Non-spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control Non-spring return 310 in-lb (20 Nm), tri-state control Non-spring return 310 in-lb (35 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control
ASC77.2U ASK71.11 ASK71.1U ASK71.2U ASK71.4 ASK71.6 ASK75.1U ASK75.3U ASK76.1U ZG-R01
ACCESSORIES PAGE Auxiliary switch kit (DPDT) for GIB, GBB, GEB actuators Combined foot mount/frame mount kit for GEB/GMA actuators Floor mount kit for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators Frame mount kit for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators Linear stroke kit for GEB/GMA actuators Universal mounting kit w/ball joints and crank arm, for GDE, GLB Weather shield for GBB/GIB/GCA actuators Weather shield for GEB/GMA actuators 1/2" conduit adapter for GDE, GLB 500 , 1/2W, 1% resistor 8
20
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Manual override Electronic stall detection Travel indicator
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN M9100 SERIES
Johnson Controls M9100 Series non-spring return actuators offer consistent designs and operating features to make installation easy, and they have many built-in features to minimize the need for add-on options. Manufactured in an ISO-9001 facility, these actuators are high quality, reliable, and long lasting.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
M9104
M9106 M9108, M9116, M9124, M9132
Supply Voltage Motor M9104, 06 M9108, 16, 24 32 Wiring M9104 M9106 M9108, 16, 24, 32 Action Rotation 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Synchronous with magnetic clutch Brushless DC 48" (1.2 m) plenum leads 0.25" (6 mm) spade terminals Screw teminals 22-14 AWG DA/RA wiring connections (2-pos., oating); Jumper selection (proportional) 90 Manual Override Noise M9104, 06 M9108, 16, 24, 32 Life Expectancy Disengage button
<35 dB @ 3" (1m) <45 dB @ 3" (1m) 100,000 cycles, 2.5 million repositions Operating Temperature -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH CE, cULus, C-tick, CSA (varies by Approvals model) Warranty 5 years
Model M9104-AGA-2S M9104-GGA-2S M9106-AGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9108-AGA-2 M9108-GGA-2 M9116-AGA-2 M9116-GGA-2 M9124-AGA-2 M9124-GGA-2 M9132-AGA-2 M9132-GGA-2 March 2014 Torque 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 140 in-lb (16 Nm) 140 in-lb (16 Nm) 210 in-lb (24 Nm) 210 in-lb (24 Nm) 280 in-lb (32 Nm) 280 in-lb (32 Nm) Supply VA 2.1 VA 3.6 VA 2.5 VA 3.2 VA 6.5 VA 7.5 VA 6.5 VA 7.5 VA 6.5 VA 7.5 VA 6.5 VA 7.5 VA Control Signal Two-position, oating Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position, oating Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position, oating Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position, oating Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position, oating Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position, oating Prop. 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 100k (VDC input); 500 (mA input) 100k (VDC input); 500 (mA input) 100k (VDC input); 500 (mA input) 100k (VDC input); 500 (mA input) 100k (VDC input); 500 (mA input) 100k (VDC input); 500 (mA input) Input Impedance Feedback None None None 0/2-10 VDC No, order -ACD, -AGE 0/2-10 VDC No, order -ACD, -AGE 0/2-10 VDC No, order -ACD, -AGE 0/2-10 VDC None 0/2-10 VDC Auxiliary Switch None None No, order -AGC model None No, order -AGC model No, order -GGC model No, order -AGC model None Drive Time 60 seconds 60 seconds 60 seconds 60 seconds 25-50 seconds 25-50 seconds 70-115 seconds 70-115 seconds
No, order -AGC 115-175 seconds model No, order -GGC 115-175 seconds model None None 115-205 seconds 115-205 seconds
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
21
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIMENSIONS
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN M9100 SERIES
Model M9104-AGA M9104-GGA M9106 M9108
Torque 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 140 in-lb (16 Nm) 210 in-lb (24 Nm) 280 in-lb (32 Nm)
Dimensions
2.6"H x 4.2"W x 5.9"L (6.7 x 10.7 x 15.0 cm) 2.5"H x 3.9"W x 7.1"L (6.5 x 10.0 x 18.0 cm) 2.5"H x 3.9"W x 7.1"L (6.5 x 10.0 x 18.0 cm) 2.5"H x 3.9"W x 7.1"L (6.5 x 10.0 x 18.0 cm) 2.5"H x 3.9"W x 7.1"L (6.5 x 10.0 x 18.0 cm)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
M9116 M9124 M9132
NEW!
Maximum Shaft Diameter 0.5" (1.3 cm) 0.5" (1.3 cm) 0.5" (1.3 cm) Minimum Shaft Length 1.25" (3.2 cm) 1.25" (3.2 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) 2.25" (5.7 cm) Weight 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 2.25" (5.7 cm) 2.25" (5.7 cm) 2.25" (5.7 cm)
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 COM N/C COM
24 VAC/VDC
2.9 lb (1.3 kg) 2.9 lb (1.3 kg) 2.9 lb (1.3 kg)
WIRING
COM CW CCW CCW C FB VDC 24V COM
ORG GRY RED BLK
24V
CW
VDC FB + 24 mA COM
CCW COM
CW FB
0-10V 0-20 mA 24 VAC
0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC
BLK
RED ORG
CW CCW
0-10 VDC 24 VAC 0-10 VDC 24 VAC
0-20 mA, 4-20 mA 0-20 VDC, 2-20 VDC 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC
FB
*
24 VAC/VDC
Terminal 4 5 6
Description Current input Voltage input Feedback * Provide constant power to terminal 2 for two-position control.
M9104-AGA-2S Tri-state
M9104-GGA-2S Proportional
M9106-AGA Tri-state
M9106-GGA Proportional
M9108 M9116, M9124, M9132 (GGA) Proportional
M9108 M9116, M9124, M9132 (AGA) Tri-state/ Two-position
MODEL M9104-AGA-2S M9104-GGA-2S M9106-AGA-2 M9106-AGC-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9108-AGA-2 M9108-AGC-2 M9108-AGD-2 M9108-AGE-2 M9108-GGA-2 M9108-GGC-2 M9116-AGA-2 M9116-AGC-2 M9116-AGD-2 M9116-AGE-2 M9116-GGA-2 M9124-AGA-2 M9124-AGC-2 M9124-AGD-2 M9124-AGE-2 M9124-GGA-2 M9124-GGC-2 M9132-GGA-2 M9132-AGA-2 DESCRIPTION Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), two-position and tri-state control Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control Non-spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm), two-position and tri-state control Non-spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, aux. switches Non-spring return 53 in-lb (6 Nm), 0-10VDC proportional control Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, aux. switches Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 135 feedback Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 1000 feedback Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control, aux. switches Non-spring return 140 in-lb (16 Nm), two-position and tri-state control Non-spring return 140 in-lb (16 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, aux. switches Non-spring return 140 in-lb (16 Nm), two-position/tri-state, aux. switches, 135 feedback Non-spring return 140 in-lb (16 Nm), two-position/tri-state, aux. switches, 1000 feedback Non-spring return 140 in-lb (16 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control Non-spring return 210 in-lb (24 Nm), two-position and tri-state control Non-spring return 210 in-lb (24 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, aux. switches Non-spring return 210 in-lb (24 Nm), two-position/tri-state, aux. switches, 135 feedback Non-spring return 210 in-lb (24 Nm), two-position/tri-state, aux. switches, 1000 feedback Non-spring return 210 in-lb (24 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control Non-spring return 210 in-lb (24 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control, aux. switches Non-spring return 280 in-lb (32 Nm), 0-10 VDC proportional control Non-spring return 280 in-lb (32 Nm), two-position and tri-state control
M9000-103 M9000-151 M9000-154 M9000-158 ZG-R01
ACCESSORIES PAGE 120/24 VAC, 14 VA inline transformer Floor mount linkage kit Jackshaft coupler, 1", for M9100 actuators Tandem mount kit for M9132/M9220 actuators 500 , 1/2W, 1% resistor 8
22
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Direct mount to round or square shaft Manual override on all models Compact, lightweight design Tri-state and proportional control models
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN MF4, MS4 SERIES
The MF4 and MS4 Series DuraDrive direct coupled, non-spring return actuators are designed to accept tri-state or proportional control signals from a DDC system or a thermostat for HVAC damper applications. Typical applications include air handling unit dampers and inlet vanes, VAV boxes, and unitary equipment. The actuators range in torque from 35 to 300 in-lb (4 to 34 Nm).
1
MF41-6343 MF4E-60830
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
MS41-6043
Supply Voltage 21-28 VAC 50/60 Hz MS41-6340 120 VAC 50/60 Hz Wiring MF4E Screw terminals All others 24 (0.6 m) pigtails, 18 AWG Rotation 90 Manual Override 35, 70 in-lb Disengage button 133, 300 in-lb Crank Resolution Operating Temperature MF4E All others Operating Humidity Approvals Warranty 100 steps -22 to 140F (-30 to 60C) -25 to 130F (-32 to 55C) 5 to 95% RH cULus, CE, C-tick (varies by model) 5 years
Model MF4E-60430-100 MF41-6043 MS41-6043 MF4E-60830-100 MF41-6083 MS41-6083 MF41-6153 MS41-6153 MF41-6343 MS41-6343 MS41-6340 March 2014 Torque 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 300 in-lb (34 Nm) 300 in-lb (34 Nm) Supply VA 2.0 VA 2.3 VA 3.3 VA 2.0 VA 2.3 VA 3.3 VA 3.0 VA 5.0 VA 7.0 VA 7.1 VA 7.1 VA Control Signal Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Two-position, oating Two-position, oating 10 k (2-10 VDC), 500 (4-20 mA) 10 k (2-10 VDC), 500 (4-20 mA) 100 k 100 k 100 k Input Impedance Drive Time 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 125 seconds 125 seconds 125 seconds 125 seconds 145 seconds 145 seconds 145 seconds
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
23
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIMENSIONS
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN MF4, MS4 SERIES
Model MF4E-XXXX Mx41-6043
Torque 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 70 in-lb (8 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 300 in-lb (34 Nm)
Dimensions 2.6"H x 3.5"W x 5.8"L (6.9 x 8.9 x 14.8 cm) 2.4"H x 2.7"W x 5.4"L (6.1 x 6.9 x 13.7 cm) 2.4"H x 2.7"W x 5.4"L (6.1 x 6.9 x 13.7 cm) 2.4"H x 3.25"W x 8.4"L (6.1 x 16. 0 x 21.3 cm) 4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L (10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm) 4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L (10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm)
Maximum Shaft Minimum Shaft Diameter Length 0.5" (1.3 cm) 2.0" (5.1 cm) 2.0" (5.1 cm) 2.0" (5.1 cm)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Mx41-6083 Mx41-6153 Mx41-6343
NEW!
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1 (IP30) NEMA 2 (IP54) NEMA 2 (IP54) 0.63" (1.58 cm) 0.63" (1.58 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 1.0" (2.5 cm) 1.0" (2.5 cm) 2.8" (7.0 cm) 4.7" (11.9 cm) 4.7" (11.9 cm) NEMA 1 (IP54) NEMA 4 (IP56) NEMA 4 (IP56)
24 VAC transformer Line voltage
0-10 V controller
Weight
10.5 lb (4.8 kg) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg)
MS41-6340 300 in-lb (34 Nm)
WIRING
24 VAC transformer Line voltage (red) (violet) (orange) Floating controller (black) CW and CCW as looking at the top of the actuator. (white) (yellow/red)
MF41-6043 (35 in.-lb) MF41-6083 (70 in.-lb) MF41-6153 (133 in.-lb)

1 Supply 6 CW 7 CCW
MF4E (35 in.-lb)

1 COM 2 CW 3 CCW
MS41-6043 (35 in.-lb) MS41-6083 (70 in.-lb) MS41-6153 (133 in.-lb)

(red) (black) (gray) 1 Supply 2 Neutral 8 0-10 VDC
MF41-6343 (300 in.-lb)

1 COM 2 CW 3 CCW DA/RA switchable
Floating Control
0-10 VDC Control

(white) 4-20 mA (red) (black) 24 VAC transformer Line Voltage Line voltage 3 +In 500 COM
MS41-6343
2-10 VDC controller (+) ()
MS41-6343
Unused (wire nut) (red) 500 (white) (black) (+) In () Common (black) (black/blue) Ground
24 VAC Transformer
(black) (black/blue)
24H 24G
(green/yellow) Ground
Select DA/RA by mounting (turn motor over)
MS41-6343 (300 in.-lb) 2-10 VDC Control
Select DA/RA by mounting (turn motor over)
MS41-6343 (300 in.-lb) 4-20 mA Control
MODEL MF4E-60430-100 MF41-6043 MS41-6043 MF4E-60830-100 MF41-6083 MS41-6083 MF41-6153 MS41-6153 MF41-6343 MS41-6343 MS41-6340 DESCRIPTION Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), two-position, oating, terminals Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), tri-state control Non-spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), proportional control Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), tri-state control, terminals Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), tri-state control Non-spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), proportional control Non-spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), tri-state control Non-spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), proportional control Non-spring return 300 in-lb (34 Nm), tri-state control Non-spring return 300 in-lb (34 Nm), proportional control Non-spring return 300 in-lb (34 Nm), proportional control, 120 VAC
AM-756
ACCESSORIES Metric to 1/2" NPT conduit adapter for damper actuators
24
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Control Signal Auxiliary Switch Action Torque Rotation Noise Input Signal 1.50 0.2 VDC 2.00 0.2 VDC 3.00 0.2 VDC 10.70 0.7 VDC 10.00 0.7 VDC 8.50 0.6 VDC
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN ML61XX, ML71XX SERIES
The Honeywell ML6161 and ML7161 actuators have 35 in-lb (4 Nm) torque ratings and the ML6174 and ML7174 have 70 in-lb (8 Nm) of torque. These non-spring return actuator families are designed to control VAV terminal unit dampers, or Honeywell ball valves. The ML61xx models take an SPDT/ oating control signal and the ML71xx models take a 2-10 VDC (or 4-20 mA, with a 500 ohm resistor) control signal.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Superior A/C synchronous submotor for consistent timing and long life Manual declutch lever for override Two minimum position setscrews included Perfect for Honeywell D690 Round Dampers Square shaft input only
ML6161
24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz Two-position, oating, proportional 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA NO or NC, 50 VA, 24 VAC, Differential: 3 angular degree minimum Non-spring return 35 in-lb, 70 in-lb CW and CCW 45-60 dBA at 1 meter maximum
Operating Temperature 20 to 125F (-18 to 50C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH noncondensing Stroke Selectable: 45 degree, 60 degree, 90 degree Approvals UL Recognized: File # E4436; Guide No. XAPX2, UL 94-5V: meets plenum requirements, CE (select models only) Weight 1.3 lb (0.59 kg)
INPUT SIGNAL/ACTUATOR DRIVE RELATIONSHIP

Actuator Drive Relationship Actuator drives to extreme CCW position Actuator remains at CCW position Actuator leaves CCW position Actuator drives to extreme CW position Actuator remains at CW position Actuator leaves CW position
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
25
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

WIRING
2 EXTERNAL SWITCH ML6161, ML6174 R8222 RED COM
BLUE CW WHITE CCW
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
1 L1 (HOT) L2
T87F W R Y
NEW!
L1 (HOT) 1 ML7161, ML7174 T1 T2 L2 + + mA +V 2-10 VDC CONTROLLER
ML6161 or ML6174 used with T87F in heating-only or cooling-only application NOTE: See below for the 201052B Auxiliary Switch wiring.
ML7161 or ML7174 used with 2-10 VDC control
L1 (HOT)
L1 (HOT) L2 1 ML6161, ML6174 201052B SPDT CONTROL ON/OFF CONTROL 4 3 RED 2 COM
ML7161, ML7174 T1 T2 + mA +V 4-20 mA CONTROLLER
L2
BLUE CW
+
WHITE CCW
201052B Auxiliary Switch wiring

INSTALLATION NOTES:
1 2 3 4
ML7161 or ML7174 used with 4-20 mA control
Power supply. Provide disconnect means and overload protection as required. Set switch to close when stroke reaches full CW position. Set switch to close when stroke reaches full CCW position. On-off control requires an R8222 SPDT relay in place of the SPDT control.
APPLICATION NOTES: Auxiliary Switches: The 201052A or B Auxiliary Switch is used in conjunction with the actuator. It allows for control of equipment external to the actuator (for example, electric reheat coils and fan) at an adjustable point in the stroke (0 to 90) of the actuator. The 201052A and B Auxiliary Switches are field-addable. For mounting instructions, see form 63-2218, provided with the device. IMPORTANT: When operating an ML6161 or ML6174 from a two-position controller, a 201052B Auxiliary Switch is required for proper operation.
26
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MODEL ML6161A2009 ML6161A2017 ML6161B2024 ML6161B2032 ML6161B2073 ML6174B2019 ML7161A2008 ML7174A2001 ML6161C2015 ML6174A2002 ML6161D2006 ML6161C2007 ML6174D2009 ML6174A2010 ML6161A2025 201052A 201052B 7640Qw
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DESCRIPTION Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC oating 90 second stroke time with potentiometer option Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC oating 7 minute stroke time with potentiometer option Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC oating 90 second stroke time set point switch Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC oating 7 minute stroke time with set point switch Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC oating 3 minute stroke time with set point switch Non-spring return 70 in-lb 24 VAC oating 90 second stroke time with set point switch Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC proportional 90 second stroke time with potentiometer option Non-spring return 70 in-lb 24 VAC proportional 90 second stroke time with set point switch Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC oating 7 minute stroke time Non-spring return 70 in-lb 24 VAC oating 90 second stroke time with potentiometer option Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC oating 90 second stroke time with set point Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC oating 90 second stroke time Non-spring return 70 in-lb 24 VAC oating 90 second stroke time with set point switch Non-spring return 70 in-lb 24 VAC oating 3 minute stroke time with potentiometer option Non-spring return 35 in-lb 24 VAC oating 3 minute stroke time with potentiometer option PAGE
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
ACCESSORIES Auxiliary switch (1 SPDT) for ML6161/ML7161/KA-35 actuators Auxiliary switch (2 SPDT) for ML6161/ML7161/KA-35 actuators Metal enclosure for attaching conduit to ML61xx, ML71xx
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
27
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DESCRIPTION
KELE REVOLUTION DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN KAS-27, KAS-44, KAS-88, KAS-175 SERIES
The Kele Revolution KAS-27, KAS-44, KAS-88, and KAS175 Series actuators are designed and tested to provide accurate and reliable spring return control for dampers and valves. They accept two-position or modulating (tri-state and proportional in one actuator) control signals. FEATURES Auto-adapt feature for automatic stroke setting Signal mode switch for installation exibility Self-centering hub for accurate control Built-in indicator shows position at a distance 60,000 cycles, 1.5 million repositions for long life
NEW!
KAS-27-M-15 KAS-175-M
Spring Return Time 27, 44 in-lb 25 seconds 88, 175 in-lb 20 seconds Manual Override Crank (88, 175 in-lb only) Noise <60 db @ 3' (1m) Life Expectancy 60,000 cycles, 1.5 million repositions Operating Temperature KAS-27-2, -44-2 -22 to 150F (-30 to 65C) KAS-27-M, -44-M -40 to 150F (-40 to 65C) KAS-88, -175 -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 (IP54) Approvals cULus, CE, C-tick, plenum rated, E179109 Warranty 5 years
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Input Impedance Motor 2-position Modulating Wiring Action 2-pos./oat Proportional Rotation Drive Time 2-position Modulating 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA DC with brushes Brushless DC Enclosed terminals Mounting orientation direct/reverse acting Switch selectable direct/reverse acting 95, 3 45 seconds 90 seconds
Model KAS-27-2 KAS-27-2-15 KAS-27-2120-15 KAS-27-M KAS-27-M-15 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-2-15 KAS-44-120 KAS-44-12015 KAS-44-M KAS-44-M-15 KAS-88-2 KAS-88-120 KAS-88-M KAS-175-2 Torque 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) Supply Voltage 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC Supply VA 7 VA 7 VA 10 VA 10 VA 7 VA 7 VA 8 VA 8 VA 11 VA 11 VA 8 VA 8 VA 30 VA 45 VA 14 VA 40 VA 60 VA 16 VA Control Signal Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Two-position Two-position Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Two-position Two-position Prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, two-pos., oating Feedback None None None None 0/2-10 VDC 0/2-10 VDC None None None None 0/2-10 VDC 0/2-10 VDC None None 0/2-10 VDC None None 0/2-10 VDC Auxiliary Switch None One SPDT, 250 VAC, 8A res., 3A ind. None One SPDT, 250 VAC, 8A res., 3A ind. None One SPDT, 250 VAC, 8A res., 3A ind. None One SPDT, 250 VAC, 8A res., 3A ind. None One SPDT, 250 VAC, 8A res., 3A ind. None One SPDT, 250 VAC, 8A res., 3A ind. Optional add-on SW2, DPDT Optional add-on SW2, DPDT Optional add-on SW2, DPDT Optional add-on SW2, DPDT Optional add-on SW2, DPDT Optional add-on SW2, DPDT March 2014
KAS-27-2-120 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm)
175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
KAS-175-120 175 in-lb (20 Nm) KAS-175-M
175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC
28
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
Model Dimensions KAS-27, KAS-44 KAS-88, KAS-175
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
KELE REVOLUTION DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN KAS-27, KAS-44, KAS-88, KAS-175 SERIES
Maximum Shaft Diameter 0.6" (1.6 cm) 1.06" (2.7 cm)
Minimum Shaft Length 1.0" (2.5 cm) 1.0" (2.5 cm)
Weight 3.5 lb (1.6 kg) 7.0 lb (3.2 kg)
3.2"H x 3.9"W x 7.0"L (8.0 x 10.0 x 17.7 cm)
2.9"H x 3.9"W x 9.8"L (7.5 x 10.0 x 25.0 cm)
WIRING
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Relay contact or switch
1 2
2-10 VDC 10-2 VDC 0-10 VDC 10-0 VDC Floating forward Floating reverse
+ 1 2 3 4 5
24 VAC/VDC Floating Controller
KAS-27-2, KAS-44-2, KAS-88-2, KAS-88-120, KAS-175-120 Two-position Control S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 C N.C. N.O. C N.C. N.O.
1 Set switch to floating KAS-27-M, KAS-44-M, KAS-88-M, KAS-175-M Floating Point
1 CCW switch
3
2 3 4 5
24 VAC/VDC 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA 0/2-10 VDC Feedback
S3
S2
S1
CW switch
Internal Auxiliary Switch Switch adjustable from 0 to 95 500 uA resistive at 5 VDC (minimum) 250 VAC, 8A resistive, 3A inductive Only available on models with -15 suffix
SW2 Auxiliary Switch Kit Switch ratings: Adjustable between 5 and 85, 24 VAC/VDC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive
* 500, 1/2W or greater resistor required when control signal is 0/4-20 mA

3
Set switch to modulating
KAS-27-M, KAS-44-M, KAS-88-M, KAS-175-M Proportional Control
MODEL KAS-27-2 KAS-27-2-15 KAS-27-2-120 KAS-27-2-120-15 KAS-27-M KAS-27-M-15 KAS-44-2 KAS-44-2-15 KAS-44-120 KAS-44-120-15 KAS-44-M KAS-44-M-15 KAS-88-2 KAS-88-120 KAS-88-M KAS-175-2 KAS-175-120 KAS-175-M DESCRIPTION Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, two-wire control Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, two-wire control, SPDT aux Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control, SPDT aux Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), modulating control (proportional and tri-state), 24 VAC Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), modulating control (proportional and tri-state), 24 VAC, SPDT aux Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, two-wire control Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, two-wire control, SPDT aux Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control, SPDT aux Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), modulating control (proportional and tri-state), 24 VAC/VDC Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), modulating control (prop./tri-state), 24 VAC/VDC, SPDT aux Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, two-wire control Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), modulating control (proportional and tri-state), 24 VAC/VDC Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC/VDC, two-wire control Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), modulating control (proportional and tri-state), 24 VAC/VDC ACCESSORIES PAGE Replacement shaft coupler for KAS-88, -175 Tandem mount bracket for KAS-175 actuators Universal surface mount bracket with crank arm and 1/2" shaft 8 Auxiliary switch kit for KA-175/301 and KAS-88/175 500 , 1/2W, 1% resistor 8
32004254-002 50000407-001 50001194-001 SW2 ZG-R01
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
29
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN TF, LF, NF, AF, EF SERIES
DESCRIPTION
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
The Belimo TF, LF, NF, AF, and EF Series direct coupled actuators provide control of dampers and valves for spring return applications. They come in two-position, tri-state, proportional, and Multi-Function Technology (MFT) models. All include a spring return to drive the damper or valve to a normal position when power is lost. Unique universal power supply models work with 24 to 240 VAC or 24 to 125 VDC. The new EF Series is true spring return with a high 270 in-lb torque output and most models are available with optional NEMA 4 housing. Dual-mount EF actuators on one shaft is possible, for a total of 540 in-lb.
NEW!
LF24 NFB24 AFB24 EFB24
TF24
FEATURES
Symmetrical, reversible rotation design for installation exibility ISO 9001 manufacturing facility assures high quality New EF Series delivers 270 in-lb of spring return power Some models with NEMA 4 enclosure rating for outdoor locations Low power consumption for high efciency and smaller transformer sizing MFT models offer exibility to customize and adapt a single actuator to various controllers and applications
Input Impedance -SR models 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA -MFT models 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA; 1500 @ PWM, oat, on/off Brushless DC Motor Wiring TF, LF 3' (0.9 m) cable, 18 AWG, plenum rated NF, AF, EF 3' (0.9 m) appliance cable, 18 AWG NEMA 4 Terminal blocks inside housing Conduit Connection W/cables 1/2" NPT NEMA 4 Four knockouts for waterproof conduit ttings Feedback 2-10 VDC (-SR and -MFT models only) Auxiliary Switch TF, LF (-S) 1 SPDT, 3A @ 250V NF, AF, EF (-S) 2 SPDT, 3A @ 250V Action 2-position CW/CCW reversible mounting Float/prop. DA/RA switch, CW/CCW rev. mt. Rotation 95 Manual Override Manual crank (except TF) Noise TF, LF, NF <62 db AF <45 db EF <71.4 db Resolution 100 steps Life Expectancy 2-position 60,000 cycles Float/prop. 60,000 cycles; 500,000 repositions Operating Temperature -22 to 122F (-30 to 50C); NEMA 4 models with heater option can go down to -40F (-40C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH Enclosure Rating TF NEMA 2 (IP42) LF, NF, AF, EF NEMA 2 (IP54) NEMA 4 NEMA 4 (IP66) Approvals cULus, CE, RoHS Warranty 5 years
30
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Model TF24 Torque Supply Voltage 22 in-lb (2.5 Nm) 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 120 VAC 50/60 Hz TF120 22 in-lb (2.5 Nm) 22 in-lb (2.5 Nm) TF24-3 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% TF24-SR TF24-MFT LF24 LF120 LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24-MFT NFB24 NFBUP NFB24-SR 22 in-lb (2.5 Nm) 22 in-lb (2.5 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24-240 VAC, 24-125 VDC 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% NFB24-MFT 90 in-lb (10 Nm) AFBUP 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 24-240 VAC, 24-125 VDC 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC +20%/-10% 100-240 VAC +10%/-20% 50/60 Hz 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC +20%/-10% 24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC +20%/-10% AFB24-MFT 180 in-lb (20 Nm) AFB24MFT95 EFB24 EFB120 EFB24-SR 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 270 in-lb (30 Nm) 270 in-lb (30 Nm) 270 in-lb (30 Nm)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

Supply VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 4.0 VA 4.0 VA 4.0 VA 7.0 VA 7.5 VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 5.0 VA 8.5 VA
Control Signal Two-position Two-position Floating Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) Two-position Two-position Floating Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) Two-position Two-position Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) Two-position Prop. (default 2-10 VDC) Prop. (default 0-135 ohms) Two-position Two-position Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. (default 2-10 VDC)
Feedback
Drive Time 75 seconds 75 seconds 95 seconds
Spring Return Time <60 seconds <60 seconds
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
<60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds <60 seconds
2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC
95 seconds 150 seconds 40-75 seconds 40-75 seconds 150 seconds
2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC
150 seconds 150 seconds 75 seconds 75 seconds
6.5 VA @ 120 VAC 6.0 VA 9.0 VA 8.5 VA @ 120 VAC 10 VA 10 VA 16 VA 21 VA 14 VA 16 VA
2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC
95 seconds 150 seconds 75 seconds
2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC
150 seconds 150 seconds 75 seconds 75 seconds
2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC
95 seconds 150 seconds
EFB24-MFT 270 in-lb (30 Nm)
For models not shown please contact Kele for more information.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
31
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIMENSIONS
Model TF LF
Torque 22 in-lb (2.5 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 90 in-lb (10 Nm) 180 in-lb (20 Nm) 270 in-lb (30 Nm)
Dimensions
3.3H x 3.0W x 6.3L (8.4 x 7.6 x 15.9 cm) 3.2H x 3.9W x 7.7L (8.1 x 9.8 x 19.5 cm)
NEW!
Maximum Shaft Diameter 0.5 (1.3 cm) 0.5 (1.3 cm) Minimum Shaft Length 3.5 (8.9 cm) Weight 3.5 (8.9 cm) 1.05 (2.7 cm) 1.05 (2.7 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 3.5 (8.9 cm) 3.5 (8.9 cm) 3.5" (8.9 cm)
() (+)
1.4 lb (0.64 kg) 3.4 lb (1.5 kg)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
NFB AFB EFB
3.4H x 3.9W x 9.7L (8.7 x 9.8 x 24.6 cm) 3.4H x 3.9W x 9.7L (8.7 x 9.8 x 24.6 cm) 4.7"H x 5.4"W x 13.1"L (12.1 x 13.8 x 33.3 cm)
4.1 lb (1.8 kg) 4.2 lb (1.9 kg) 9.8 lb (4.5 kg)
WIRING
24 VAC/VDC or (120 VAC)
() (+) 1 2
24 VAC/VDC Tri-state contact or triac control
Wire number Control switch

1
COM
Wire Number
CCW
*For two-position control, tie 2 and 3 together, connect 4 to switch or relay contact (SPST)
CW
Parallel connection of several actuators is possible.
COM
(See Note 1) 24 VAC/VDC

() (+)
TF24, AFB24, NFB24, LF24, EFB24 TF120, LF120, NF120, AF120, EFB120 Two-position
Code Signal 2-10 VDC 0-10 VDC 0-5 VDC 5-10 VDC 2-6 VDC 6-10 VDC PWM 0.59 - 2.95 sec PWM 0.02 - 5.00 sec Floating Two-position
For each direction of rotation left or right selection switch, arrows on actuator show rotation selected.
TF24-3, LF24-3 Tri-state (may also be wired two-position)

Feedback 2-10 VDC 0-10 VDC 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC
Wire # 1
COM
24 VAC/VDC
() (+)
Signal common 2-10 VDC signal* 2-10 VDC feedback

1
COM
A01 A02 A07 A09 A16 A17 W01 W02 F01 J2
Tri-state or floating controller 2-10 VDC Feedback
3
Y1 Y2
5 Wire Number
U
(except TF24-SR)
4
CCW CW
5
U
Y1 Y2
Parallel connection of up to four motors is possible. Power consumption and polarity must be observed.
TF24-SR, NFB24-SR, LF24-SR, EFB24-SR 2-10 VDC

*4-20 mA signal with 500 resistor across terminals 1 and 3.
MFT Code = F1 (Pre-programmed at Kele)
Note 1: See new Belimo NFB//AFB/EFB literature for complete wiring information on those models.
MFT Function Codes
(See Note 1)
NFB24-MFT, AFB24-MFT, EFB24-MFT Tri-state
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
N.C.
Line Volts
24 VAC Transformer
H1 HTR H2 T Common + Hot
N.O. N.C.
N.O.
Auxiliary Switch Wiring 3 A @ 250V maximum load
Heater Wiring - NEMA 4 models with heater
32
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
EF B 24
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ORDERING INFORMATION MODEL TORQUE EF 270 in-lbs (30 Nm) AF 180 in-lbs (20 Nm) NF 90 in-lbs (10 Nm) LF 35 in-lbs (4 Nm) TF 22 in-lbs (2.5 Nm) CONFIGURATION OPTIONS Blank L Models Only B Basic X Customizable POWER SUPPLY 24 24 VAC/DC 120 120 VAC* 230 230 VAC UP 24 to 240 VAC or 24 to 125 VDC ** CONTROL TYPE Blank On/Off -SR 2-10 VDC -3 Floating Point -PC 0-20 Volt (Phasecut) -ECON-R03 3K ohm NTC Type 10 Thermistor -MFT Multifunction (Pcode required) -MFT95 0 to 135K ohm -MFT-20 6 to 9 VDC, 20 VDC Power Supply*** OPTIONAL AUXILLIARY -S Built In Auxilliary NEMA OPTION -N4 NEMA 4 Rated**** -N4H NEMA 4 Rated w/Internal Heater**** -SR -S -N4 Example: EFB24-SR-S-N4
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
* EF, LF and TF Models only. Use UP option for AF and NF to get 120 VAC. EF and TF models have 100 to 240 Nominal Power Supply ** Only available on AF and NF models *** Only available on LF models **** Only available on certain AF, EF, NF models
NOTES: 1) All functions and options are not available with all versions 2) Most models available with internal auxiliary switches; order with -S sufx (N4 models are shown with -S included). 3) MFT models can be ordered pre-congured at Kele if other than default conguration is needed; add -C sufx and specify custom conguration parameters or MFT code.
AV6-20 AV8-25 KH-AFB KH-LF ZG-100 ZG-102 ZG-112 ZG-113 ZG-118 ZG-JSL ZG-R01
ACCESSORIES PAGE Shaft extension for 1/4" to 3/4" diameter shafts, 6.7" length, for LF/TF actuators Shaft extension for 5/16" to 1" diameter shafts, 9.8" length, for LF, NFB, AFB actuators Crank arm for shafts to 3/4", for AFB/NFB actuators Crank arm for shafts to 1/2", for LF actuators Right angle mounting bracket for AFB/NFB and AMB/GMB actuators 8 Tandem actuator mounting bracket for AF/AFB/GMB actuators 8 Floor mount bracket, vertical, for LF actuators 8 Floor mount bracket for TF actuators Channel mounting bracket for NFB/AFB actuators Jackshaft linkage for AFB/NFB and AMB/NMB 500 , 1/2W, 1% resistor 8
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
33
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN MS SERIES
DESCRIPTION The MS Series high-performance spring return direct coupled actuators from Honeywell are designed and tested to provide reliable spring return control for dampers and valves. The MS Series has an excellent feature set that combines exibility and simplicity. FEATURES Self-centering shaft adapter for steady operation Auto adapt on modulating models for stroke precision Selector switch for proportional or oating control Detachable wiring cover
NEW!
MS7510 MS8103A
Spring Return Time 27, 44 in-lb 88, 175 in-lb Manual Override Noise Life Expectancy Operating Temperature MSxx03, xx05 2-pos. MSxx03, xx05 Mod. MXxx10, xx20 Operating Humidity Enclosure Rating Approvals Warranty 25 seconds 20 seconds Manual crank (88, 175 in-lb only) <50 db @ 3' (1m) 60,000 cycles, 1.5 million repositions -22 to 150F (-30 to 65C) -40 to 150F (-40 to 65C) -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) 5 to 95% RH NEMA 2 (IP54) cULus, CE, C-tick, plenum rated 5 years
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Input Impedance Motor 2-position Modulating Wiring Action 2-position Modulating Rotation Drive Time 2-position Modulating 100 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA DC with brushes Brushless DC Enclosed terminals Mounting orientation direct/reverse acting Switch selectable direct/reverse acting 95 3 45 seconds 90 seconds
Model MS8103A1030 MS8103A1130 MS4103A1030 MS4103A1130 MS7503A2030 MS7503A2130 MS8105A1030 MS8105A1130 MS4105A1030 MS4105A1130 MS7505A2030 MS7505A2130 MS8110A1008 MS8110A1206 MS4110A1002 MS4110A1200 MS7510A2008 MS7510A2206 Torque 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) 44 in-lb (5 Nm) Supply Voltage Supply VA 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 7 VA 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 7 VA 10 VA 10 VA 7 VA 7 VA 8 VA 8 VA 11 VA 11 VA 8 VA 8 VA 30 VA 30 VA 45 VA 45 VA 14 VA 14 VA 40 VA 40 VA 60 VA 60 VA 16 VA 16 VA Control Signal Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Feedback Auxiliary Switch None None None None None One SPDT None One SPDT None One SPDT None One SPDT None One SPDT None One SPDT None Two SPDT None Two SPDT None Two SPDT None Two SPDT None Two SPDT None Two SPDT March 2014
Prop. VDC/mA, 2-pos., oating 0/2-10 VDC Prop. VDC/mA, 2-pos., oating 0/2-10 VDC Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position None None None None
88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 88 in-lb (10 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC
MS8120A1007 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC MS8120A1205 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC MS4120A1001 175 in-lb (20 Nm) MS4120A1209 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
MS7520A2007 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC MS7520A2205 175 in-lb (20 Nm) 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC
Prop. VDC/mA, 2-pos., oating 0/2-10 VDC Prop. VDC/mA, 2-pos., oating 0/2-10 VDC
34
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
Model Dimensions MSxx03, MSxx05 MSxx10, MSxx20
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN MS SERIES
Maximum Shaft Diameter 0.6" (1.6 cm) 1.06" (2.7 cm)
Minimum Shaft Length 1.0" (2.5 cm) 1.0" (2.5 cm)
Weight 3.5 lb (1.6 kg) 7.0 lb (3.2 kg)
WIRING
+ 1
1
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
+ 1 2
2 3 4 5
1
24 VAC/VDC
Floating Controller
Set switch to floating
MS81xx, MS41xx Two-position Control

+ 1
2
MS75xx Floating Control

+ 1
2 3 4 5
2
24 VAC/VDC
3
2 3 4 5
24 VAC/VDC
0 or 2-10 VDC or 0 or 4-20 mA
0 or 2-10 VDC Feedback

3
Set switch to floating
*ZG-R01 500, 1/2W or greater resistor required when control signal is 0/4-20 mA
Set switch to modulating
MS75xx Two-position Control

7 85
MS75xx Proportional Control

C NC NO C NC NO CCW Switch
CW Switch
The SW2 is a field-adaptable auxiliary switch kit that fits only the 88 and 175 in-lb actuators
S1 S2 S3
S4 S5 S6
Internal Auxiliary Switch Dual shown; 27 and 44 in-lb models have only one auxiliary switch. Switch ratings: 250 VAC, 5A resistive, must use same power source on both contact sets
SW2 Auxiliary Switch Kit Switch ratings: Adjustable between 5 and 85 degrees, 24 VAC/VDC, 5A resistive, 3A inductive
MODEL MS8103A1030 MS8103A1130 MS4103A1030 MS4103A1130 MS7503A2030 MS7503A2130 MS8105A1030 MS8105A1130 MS4105A1030 MS4105A1130 MS7505A2030 MS7505A2130 MS8110A1008 MS8110A1206 MS4110A1002 MS4110A1200 MS7510A2008 MS7510A2206 MS8120A1007 MS8120A1205 MS4120A1001 MS4120A1209 MS7520A2007 MS7520A2205 DESCRIPTION Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire, 1 aux sw. Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire, 1 aux sw. Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), modulating control (proportional or tri-state) Spring return, 27 in-lb (3 Nm), modulating control (prop/tri-state), 1 aux sw. Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire, 1 aux sw. Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire, 1 aux sw. Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), modulating control (proportional or tri-state) Spring return, 44 in-lb (5 Nm), modulating control (prop/tri-state), 1 aux sw. Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire, 2 aux sw. Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire, 2 aux sw. Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), modulating control (proportional or tri-state) Spring return, 88 in-lb (10 Nm), modulating control (prop/tri-state), 2 aux sw. Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire, 2 aux sw. Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire, 2 aux sw. Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), modulating control (proportional or tri-state) Spring return, 175 in-lb (20 Nm), modulating control (prop/tri-state), 2 aux sw.
ACCESSORIES PAGE Replacement shaft coupler for KAS-88, -175 Tandem mount bracket for KAS-175 actuators Universal surface mount bracket with crank arm and 1/2" shaft Auxiliary switch kit for KA-175/301 and KAS-88/175 500 , 1/2W, 1% resistor 8
32004254-002 50000407-001 50001194-001 SW2 ZG-R01
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
35
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN GMA, GCA, GQD, GNP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Siemens GMA, GCA, GQD and GNP Series direct coupled spring return actuators provide control for a complete range of HVAC damper applications. These actuators are available in all standard control signal types and offer a wide variety of options and accessories. FEATURES
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Self-centering shaft coupling Brushless DC motor technology Rugged, lightweight housings Manual override on GMA, GCA models Conduit connection on GMA, GCA models
NEW!
GCA, GMA, GQD Series Motor Wiring Brushless DC 3 ft (1.0 m), 18 AWG plenum cable (.1P models), 3 ft (1.0 m), 18 AWG standard cable (.1U models) Input Impedance 100k @ 0/2-10VDC 500 @ 4-20ma Approvals cULus, CE, plenum rated, E35198 Warranty 2 years
Feedback Drive Time
30 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 2 seconds 2 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds
Manual crank (except GQD), Disengage button (GNP) Life Expectancy 60,000 cycles, 100,000 full stroke cycles, 7,000,000 repositions (GNP) Rotation 95 Operating Temperature -25 to 130F (-32 to 55C), 0 to 122F (-18 to 50C) (GNP) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing Manual Override
Model
GQD121.1P GQD126.1P GQD131.1P GQD136.1P GQD151.1P GQD156.1P GQD221.1U GQD226.1U GNP191.1P GNP196.1P GMA121.1P GMA121.1U GMA126.1U GMA131.1P GMA151.1P GMA161.1P GMA161.1U GMA166.1U GMA221.1U GMA226.1U GCA121.1P GCA126.1P GCA131.1P GCA151.1P GCA151.1U GCA161.1P GCA161.1U GCA166.1U GCA221.1U GCA226.1U
Torque
20 in-lb (2 Nm) 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 160 in-lb (18 Nm) 160 in-lb (18 Nm)
Supply Voltage
24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 120 VAC
Supply VA
6.5 VA 6.5 VA 4 VA 4.5 VA 10 VA 10 VA 6.5 VA 6.5 VA 20 VA 20 VA 5 VA 5 VA 5 VA 5 VA 5 VA 5 VA 5 VA 5 VA 5 VA 5 VA 8 VA 8 VA 8 VA 9 VA 9 VA 9 VA 9 VA 9 VA 9 VA 9 VA
Control Signal
Input Resistance
Spring Return Time

15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds Fail-Safe* 2 seconds Fail-Safe* 2 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds
Built-in Auxiliary Switches

X X X X X
Two-position None Two-position None Floating None Floating None Prop. 2-10 VDC >100k 2-10 VDC Prop. 2-10 VDC >100k 2-10 VDC Two-position None Two-position None Universal-Selectable >100k 0-10 VDC Universal-Selectable >100k 0-10 VDC Two-position None Two-position None Two-position None Floating None Prop. 2-10 VDC >100k 2-10 VDC Prop. 0-10 VDC >100k 0-10 VDC Prop. 0-10 VDC >100k 0-10 VDC Prop. 0-10 VDC >100k 0-10 VDC Two-position None Two-position None Two-position None Two-position None Floating None Prop. 0/2-10 VDC >100k 0-10 VDC Prop. 0/2-10 VDC >100k 0-10 VDC Prop. 0-10 VDC >100k 0-10 VDC Prop. 0-10 VDC >100k 0-10 VDC Prop. 0-10 VDC >100k 0-10 VDC Two-position None Two-position None *Fail Safe = capacitor, no physical spring
X X X
X X
36
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
Model Torque Dimensions GQD GNP 20 in-lb (2 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) GMA GCA 62 in-lb (7 Nm) 160 in-lb (18 Nm)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

Maximum Shaft Diameter 0.5 (1.3 cm) 0.75 (2.0 cm) 0.75 (2.0 cm) 1.0 (2.6 cm)
Minimum Shaft Length 0.75 (2.0 cm) 0.75 (2.0 cm) 0.75 (2.0 cm) 0.75 (2.0 cm)
Enclosure Rating NEMA 1 (IP40) NEMA 1 (IP54) NEMA 1 (IP54) NEMA 2 (IP54)
Weight 1.06 lb (.48 kg) 3.4 lb (1.5 kg) 2.9 lb (1.3 kg) 4.8 lb (2.2 kg)
2.5H x 2.8W x 4.8L (6.3 x 6.9 x 12.0 cm) 2.4H x 3.3W x 8.4L (6.0 x 8.3 x 21.2 cm) 2.7H x 3.3W x 8.4L (6.8 x 8.3 x 21.2 cm)
2.9H x 4.8W x 12.0L (7.3 x 12.1 x 30.5 cm)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
WIRING
L1 L2
1 24 VAC 2
(red) (black)
G GO
L1 M L2
1 24 VAC +
G GO Y U M
2 8 9
Earth ground class 2 24 VAC transformer
GQD12x, GMA12x, GCA12x 24 VAC Two-position control

L N 3 120 VAC (black) L N
GMA16x, GCA16x, GNP19x 0-10 VDC control

M
4 (white)
GMA22x, GCA22x 120 VAC Two-position control

L1 L1 L2 1 24 VAC +
1 24 VAC 2
(red) (black)
G GO Y1 Y2 M
G GO Y U M
L2
2 8 9
Earth ground class 2 24 VAC transformer Floating controller
6 (violet) 7 (orange)
External 500 resistor
GQD15x, GMA15x, GCA15x 4-20 mA control
GMA13x, GCA13x Floating control
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
37
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
MODEL GQD121.1P GQD126.1P GQD131.1P GQD136.1P GQD151.1P GQD156.1P GQD221.1P GQD226.1P GNP191.1P GNP196.1P GMA121.1P GMA121.1U GMA126.1U GMA131.1P GMA151.1P GMA161.1P GMA161.1U GMA221.1U GMA166.1U GMA226.1U GCA121.1P GCA131.1P GCA151.1P GCA151.1U GCA161.1P GCA161.1U GCA221.1U GCA226.1U GCA126.1P GCA166.1U ASC77.2U ASK71.11 ASK71.1U ASK71.2U ASK71.4 ASK75.1U ASK75.3U
DESCRIPTION Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, plenum cable Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, plenum cable, aux. sw. Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, oating control, plenum cable Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, oating control, plenum cable, aux. sw. Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 2-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 2-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable, aux. sw. Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 120 VAC, 2-position, standard cable Spring return 20 in-lb (2 Nm), 120 VAC, 2-position, standard cable, aux. sw. Fail-safe (capacitor) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC, universal selectable control signals, 0-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable Fail-safe (capacitor) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 24 VAC/VDC, universal selectable control signals, 0-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable, aux. sw. Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, plenum cable Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, standard cable Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, standard cable, auxillary switches Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), oating control, plenum cable Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 2-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 0-10 VDC, 0-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 0-10 VDC, 0-10 VDC feedback, standard cable Spring return 62 in-lb (7 Nm), 120 VAC, 2-position, standard cable Spring return 62 lb-in (7 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 0-10 VDC, 0-10 VDC feedback, standard cable, aux. sw. Spring return 62 lb-in (7 Nm), 120 VAC, 2-position, standard cable, auxillary switches Spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, plenum cable Spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), oating control, plenum cable Spring return 160 lb-in (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 0/2-10 VDC, 0-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable Spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), prop. 0/2-10 VDC, 0-1K ohm feedback, standard cable Spring return 160 lb-in (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 0-10 VDC, 0-10 VDC feedback, plenum cable Spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), prop. 0-10 VDC, 0-1K ohm feedback, standard cable Spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 120 VAC, 2-position, standard cable Spring return 160 in-lb (18 Nm), 120 VAC, 2-position, aux. switches, standard cable Spring return 160 lb0in (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, 2-position, plenum cable, auxillary switches Spring return 160 lb-in (18 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC, proportional 0-10 VDC, 0-10 VDC feedback, standard cable ACCESSORIES Auxiliary switch kit (DPDT) for GIB, GBB, GEB actuators Combined foot mount/frame mount kit for GEB/GMA actuators Floor mount kit for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators Frame mount kit for GCA/GBB/GIB actuators Linear stroke kit for GEB/GMA actuators Weather shield for GBB/GIB/GCA actuators Weather shield for GEB/GMA actuators
NEW!
38
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Input Impedance Motor Wiring Conduit Connection Action Rotation Manual Override
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN M9200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION Johnson Controls M9200 Series spring return actuators are designed to position return air, exhaust air, or outside air dampers. Torques range from 27 to 177 in-lbs and available control signals are two-position (on/off), tri-state (oating), and proportional. FEATURES Reversible mounting design Electronic stall detection Models with auxiliary switches available (i.e. -AGC, -GGC, etc.) Minimum 60,000 cycles life expectancy M9203
M9208
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
M9210, M9220
200 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA Brushless DC 18 AWG, 120" (3m), plenum leads (-2 models); 18 AWG, 48" (1.2m), appliance cable (-3 models) 1/2" conduit connectors (M9203 only); Integral 3/8" ex connectors (all others) Select by wiring (2-pos./oating); Switch or hub re-position (proportional) 95 (M9203, M9208); 93 (M9210, M9220) Manual crank (M9210, M9220 only)
Noise Resolution Life Expectancy Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Enclosure Rating Approvals Warranty
<55 db (M9203); <52 db (M9208); <40 db (M9210/M9220 2-pos.); <66 db (M9210/M9220 oating/prop.) 120 steps 60,000 cycles, 1.5 million repositions -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) (M9203, M9208); -40 to 131F (-40 to 55C) (M9210, M9220) 0 to 95% RH NEMA 2 (IP54) cULus, CE (M9203, M9208); UL, CE, CSA, C-tick (M9210, M9220) 5 years
Model M9203-AGA-2Z M9203-BGA-2 M9203-GGA-2Z M9208-AGA-x M9208-BGA-x M9208-GGA-x M9210-AGA-3 M9210-BAA-3 Torque 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 27 in-lb (3 Nm) 70 in-lb (80 Nm) 70 in-lb (80 Nm) 70 in-lb (80 Nm) 89 in-lb (10 Nm) Supply Voltage 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 25%, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% Supply VA Control Signal Feedback Drive Time 4.7 VA 5.0 VA 5.1 VA 7.9 VA 6.1 VA 7.9 VA 9.6 VA 25 VA 17.7 VA 9.6 VA 9.6 VA 15.5 VA 25 VA 24.6 VA 15.5 VA 15.5 VA Tri-state, twoposition Two-position Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position, oating Two-position Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position, oating Two-position Two-position Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Floating Two-position, oating Two-position Two-position Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Floating None None 0/2-10 VDC None None 0/2-10 VDC None None None 0/2-10 VDC None None None None 0/2-10 VDC None 90 seconds 75 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds 75 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds 24 to 57 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds 24 to 57 seconds 24 to 57 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds Spring Return Time 25 seconds 25 seconds 25 seconds 18 to 24 seconds 13 to 26 seconds 18 to 24 seconds 26 seconds 11 to 15 seconds 11 to 15 seconds 26 seconds 26 seconds 20 seconds 11 to 15 seconds 11 to 15 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds
89 in-lb (10 Nm) 120 VAC, +10%/-15%, 60 Hz
24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 M9210-BGA-3 89 in-lb (10 Nm) VDC 10% 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 M9210-GGA-3 89 in-lb (10 Nm) VDC 10% 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 M9210-HGA-3 89 in-lb (10 Nm) VDC 10% 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 M9220-AGA-3 177 in-lb (20 Nm) VDC 10% M9220-BAA-3 177 in-lb (20 Nm) 120 VAC, +10%/-15%, 60 Hz 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 M9220-BGA-3 177 in-lb (20 Nm) VDC 10% 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 M9220-GGA-3 177 in-lb (20 Nm) VDC 10% 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 M9220-HGA-3 177 in-lb (20 Nm) VDC 10% March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
39
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN M9200 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
Model M9203 M9208 M9210/M9220, 24V M9210/M9220, 120V
Dimensions 3.2"H x 3.2"W x 6.4"L (7.6 x 3.3 x 21.1 cm) 3.2"H x 3.2"W x 6.4"L (7.6 x 3.3 x 21.1 cm) 3.3"H x 4.0"W x 10.3"L (8.4 x 10.2 x 26.2 cm) 3.3"H x 4.0"W x 10.3"L (8.4 x 10.2 x 26.2 cm)
NEW!
Maximum Shaft Diameter 0.63" (1.6 cm) 0.63" (1.6 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) Minimum Shaft Length 1.7" (5.2 cm) 1.7" (5.2 cm) 1.2" (3.0 cm) 1.2" (3.0 cm) Weight
YEL WHT
COM
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
WIRING
WHT/ RED RED WHT/ BRN BRN
1 2 3 4 5 6
WHT
COM
YEL*
WHT
COM
YEL
24 VAC/VDC
CW CCW
COM
24 VAC/VDC
24 VAC/VDC *For AGA models, this wire color is BRN.
4-20 mA 6-9V, 0 or 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA* 6-9V, 0 or 2-10 VDC
24 VAC/VDC
0-10 VDC 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA* 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC
TERMINAL DESCRIPTION 3 4 5 6 Calibration Out Current Input Voltage Input Feedback

*500 resistor required
M9206-, M9210-, M9220BGA/AGA Two-position
*500 resistor required
M9206-, M9210-, M9220-GGA Proportional
M9206-, M9210-, M9220-AGA Tri-state/ Two-position
Proportional
MODEL M9203-AGA-2Z M9203-BGA-2 M9203-GGA-2Z M9208-AGA-2 M9208-AGA-3 M9208-BGA-2 M9208-BGA-3 M9208-GGA-2 M9208-GGA-3 M9210-AGA-3 M9210-BAA-3 M9210-BGA-3 M9210-GGA-3 M9210-HGA-3 M9220-AGA-3 M9220-BAA-3 M9220-BGA-3 M9220-GGA-3 M9220-HGA-3
M9000-115 M9000-158 M9000-171 M9000-321 M9220-600 M9220-603
DESCRIPTION Spring return 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 10 ft. plenum cable Spring return 27 in-lb (3 Nm), two-position control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 27 in-lb (3 Nm), 0/2-10 VDC proportional control, 10 ft. plenum cable Spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 10 ft. plenum cable Spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position control, 10 ft. plenum cable Spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), two-position control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 0/2-10 VDC proportional control, 10 ft. plenum cable Spring return 70 in-lb (8 Nm), 0/2-10 VDC proportional control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 89 in-lb (10 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 89 in-lb (10 Nm), 120 VAC two-position, two-wire control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 89 in-lb (10 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position, two-wire control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 89 in-lb (10 Nm), 0/2-10 VDC proportional control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 89 in-lb (10 Nm), adjustable 0/2-10 VDC control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), two-position and tri-state control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), 120 VAC two-position, two-wire control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), 24 VAC/VDC two-position, two-wire control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), 0/2-10 VDC proportional control, 4 ft. cable Spring return 177 in-lb (20 Nm), adjustable 0/2-10 VDC control, 4 ft. cable
Universal mounting kit for M9203 includes crankarm Tandem mount kit for M9132/M9220 actuators Floor mount linkage kit for M9210 and M9220 actuators Weathershield kit for M9203 and M9208 actuators on damper applications Jackshaft coupler, 1", for M9210 and M9220 Adjustable stop kit for M9210 and M9220 proportional control actuators
ACCESSORIES
40
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Direct mount to round or square shaft NEMA 4 models available Overload protection on all models
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN MA, MF, MS SERIES
The Schneider Electric DuraDrive Series direct coupled, spring return actuators accept two-position, tri-state, or proportional control signals from a DDC control system or a thermostat and are designed to provide years of trouble-free control for HVAC dampers.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
150 in-lb
60/133 in-lb
35 in-lb
Input Impedance Motor Wiring Conduit Connection Action Rotation 80 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA (proportional models) DC with brushes (MA40-70xx, MA4170xx, MF40-70xx, MF41-70xx); Brushless DC (all others) 3-foot cable, 18 AWG 1/2" FNPT Mounting orientation direct/reverse acting 95 5 Manual Override Crank (MA41, MF41, MS41 models) Resolution 100 steps Operating Temperature -22 to 140F (-30 to 60C) Operating Humidity 15 to 95% RH NEMA 2 (IP54) (35, 60, 133 in-lb Enclosure Rating models), NEMA 4 (IP56) (150 in-lb models) Approvals UL, CE, cUL (varies by model) Warranty 5 years
Model MA40-7043 MA40-7040 MF40-7043 MS40-7043 MA41-7073 MA41-7070 MF41-7073 MS41-7073 MA41-7153 MA41-7150 MF41-7153 MS41-7153 MA40-7173 MA40-7170 MF40-7173 MS40-7173 MS40-7170 March 2014 Torque 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm) Supply Voltage 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 24 VAC 20%, 22 to 30 VDC 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 24 VAC 20%, 22 to 30 VDC 24 VAC 20%, 22 to 30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 20-28 VAC 50/60 Hz, 22-30 VDC 120 VAC 50/60 Hz Supply VA 4.4 VA 4.3 VA 5.9 VA 5.9 VA 4.8 VA 5.6 VA 6.2 VA 5.8 VA 9.7 VA 10.0 VA 9.7 VA 9.7 VA 9.6 VA 11.4 VA 10.0 VA 9.4 VA Control Signal Two-position Two-position Floating Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position Two-position Floating Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position Two-position Floating Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Two-position Two-position Floating Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Feedback None None None 2-10 VDC None None None 2-10 VDC None None None 2-10 VDC None None None None None Drive Time 50 seconds 50 seconds Spring Return Time 26 seconds 26 seconds
130 seconds 25 seconds 130 seconds 25 seconds 80 seconds 80 seconds 40 seconds 40 seconds
195 seconds 30 seconds 195 seconds 30 seconds 190 seconds 30 seconds 190 seconds 30 seconds 190 seconds 30 seconds 190 seconds 30 seconds 145 seconds 75 seconds 145 seconds 75 seconds 145 seconds 75 seconds 145 seconds 75 seconds 145 seconds 75 seconds
11.1 VA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
41
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS SPRING RETURN MA, MF, MS SERIES
DIMENSIONS
Model MA40-7043 MA40-7040 MF40-7043 MS40-7043 MA41-7073 MA41-7070 MF41-7073 MS41-7073 MA41-7153 MA41-7150 MF41-7153 MS41-7153 MA40-7173 MA40-7170 MF40-7173 MS40-7173 MS40-7170
Torque 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 35 in-lb (4 Nm) 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 60 in-lb (7 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm) 150 in-lb (17 Nm)
Dimensions
3.5"H x 4.0"W x 6.8"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 17.2 cm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 6.8"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 17.2 cm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 6.8"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 17.2 cm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 6.8"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 17.2 cm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 3.5"H x 4.0"W x 10.5"L (8.8 x 10.1 x 26.7 cm) 4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L (10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm) 4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L (10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm) 4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L (10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm) 4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L (10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm) 4.0"H x 4.0"W x 10.8"L (10.2 x 10.2 x 27.5 cm)
NEW!
Maximum Shaft Diameter 0.63" (1.6 cm) 0.63" (1.6 cm) 0.63" (1.6 cm) 0.63" (1.6 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 1.05" (1.7 cm) 1.05" (1.7 cm) 1.05" (1.7 cm) 1.05" (1.7 cm) 1.05" (1.7 cm) Minimum Shaft Length 3.75" (9.5 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 3.75" (9.5 cm) 3.5" (8.9 cm) 3.5" (8.9 cm) 3.5" (8.9 cm) 3.5" (8.9 cm) 3.5" (8.9 cm) Weight
1 24 VAC transformer (black) (red) (blue) Common Hot Drive open Line Voltage MF4x-7043/7 073 7153/7173 (yellow/black) Drive closed Typical floating controller (green/yellow)
4.5 lb (2.0 kg) 4.5 lb (2.0 kg) 4.5 lb (2.0 kg) 4.5 lb (2.0 kg) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg) 10.5 lb (4.8 kg)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
WIRING
Neutral (1) Hot (2) (green/yellow) SPST control contact
Power source 24 VAC or 120 VAC
MA40-7000 (35 or 150 in-lb) MA41-7000 (60 or 133 in-lb) Two-position Control
MF40-7000 (35 or 150 in-lb) MF41-7000 (60 or 133 in-lb) Floating Control
500 + IN Actuator + 2-10 VDC unused (wire nut) + IN 500 Common Actuator
+ 4-20 mA
unused (wire nut)
500 Common
1
Power Source 24 VAC or 120 VAC

1
Neutral Hot Ground

1
Power Source 24 VAC or 120 VAC

Connected in 24 VAC units only
Neutral Hot (green/yellow) Ground
Connected in 24 VAC units only
MS40-7000 (35 or 150 in-lb) MS41-7000 (60 or 133 in-lb) 4-20 mA Control
MS40-7000 (35 or 150 in-lb) MS41-7000 (60 or 133 in-lb) 2-10 VDC Control
MODEL MA40-7043 MA40-7040 MF40-7043 MS40-7043 MA41-7073 MA41-7070 MF41-7073 MS41-7073 MA41-7153 MA41-7150 MF41-7153 MS41-7153 MA40-7173 MA40-7170 MF40-7173 MS40-7173 MS40-7170 DESCRIPTION Spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control Spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control Spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), oating, 24 VAC Spring return 35 in-lb (4 Nm), proportional control, 24 VAC Spring return 60 in-lb (7 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control Spring return 60 in-lb (7 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control Spring return 60 in-lb (7 Nm), tri-state control, 24 VAC Spring return 60 in-lb (7 Nm), proportional control, 24 VAC Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), tri-state control, 24 VAC Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), proportional control, 24 VAC Spring return 150 in-lb (17 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control Spring return 150 in-lb (17 Nm), two-position, 120 VAC, two-wire control Spring return 150 in-lb (17 Nm), oating, 24 VAC Spring return 150 in-lb (17 Nm), proportional control, 24 VAC Spring return 150 in-lb (17 Nm), proportional control, 120 VAC
42
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Control Signal INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS MODEL
GKB24-3 GKB24-3-T N4 GKB24-3-T N4H GKB24-MFT-T N4H GKB24-SR GKB24-SR-T N4 GKB24-SR-T N4H
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATORS FAIL-SAFE GK SERIES
The Belimo GK Series fail-safe actuators provide 360 in-lb of torque for operation of dampers up to approximately 90 square feet. The direction of rotation is reversible, the failsafe position is adjustable and a manual override button is standard. Add-on eld mount auxiliary switches and feedback potentiometers are available.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Fail-safe operation upon power loss for positive damper or valve positioning 360 in-lb is more power than spring return models
GKX24-MFT
24 VAC 20% 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 10% Two-position, oating, Proportional 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
Operating Humidity Approvals Warranty
5 to 95% RH UL, CE, cUL 5 years
TORQUE
360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm)
SUPPLY VA
21 VA 21 VA 21 VA 21 VA 21 VA 21 VA 21 VA
CONTROL SIGNAL
On/Off or Floating On/Off or Floating On/Off or Floating Proportional (2 to 10 VDC default) Proportional 2 to 10 VDC (4 to 20 mA) Proportional 2 to 10 VDC (4 to 20 mA) Proportional 2 to 10 VDC (4 to 20 mA)
FEEDBACK
None None None Variable (2 to 10 VDC default) 2 to 10 VDC 2 to 10 VDC 2 to 10 VDC
AUXILIARY
SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) (@ 250 VAC SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) (@ 250 VAC SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) (@ 250 VAC SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) (@ 250 VAC SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) (@ 250 VAC SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) (@ 250 VAC SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) (@ 250 VAC
DRIVE TIME
150 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds 90 to 150 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds 150 seconds
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
43
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

WIRING
GKB-24-3 / GKX24-3 SERIES (Includes Nema 4)
NEW!
GKB-24-SR / GKX24-SR-T SERIES (Includes Nema 4) VDC/4-20 mA INSTALLATION NOTES
1 2 Provide overload protection and disconnect as required. CAUTION EQUIPMENT DAMAGE! Actuators may be connected in parallel if not mechanically mounted to the same shaft. Power consumption and input impedance must be observed. Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC. Position feedback cannot be used with Triac sink controller. The actuator internal common reference is not compatible. Control signal may be pulsed from either the Hot (source) or the Common (sink) 24 VAC line. Contact closures A & B also can be triacs. A & B should both be closed for triac source and open for triac sink. For triac sink the common connection from the actuator must be connected to the hot connection of the controller. 3 4 5 8 9
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
On/Off control
Floating Point control APPLICATION NOTES

Meets UL requirements without the need for an electrical ground connection. The ZG-R01 500 resistor may be used.
WARNING: LIVE ELECTRICAL COMPENENTS
During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualifi ed licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury.
44
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS MODEL TORQUE
GKB24-3 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) 360 in-lb (40 Nm) GKB24-3-T N4 GKB24-3-T N4H GKB24-MFT-T N4H GKB24-SR GKB24-SR-T N4 GKB24-SR-T N4H
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIMENSIONS
MAXIMUM SHAFT MINIMUM ENCLOSURE DIAMETER SHAFT LENGTH RATING

1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.05" (2.7 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) 1.75" (4.5 cm) NEMA 2 NEMA 4 NEMA 4 NEMA 2 NEMA 2 NEMA 4 NEMA 4
WEIGHT
3.85 lb (1.75 kg) 8.95 lb (4.05 kg) 9.45 lb (4.3 kg) 3.85 lb (1.75 kg) 3.85 lb (1.75 kg) 8.95 lb (4.05 kg) 9.45 lb (4.3 kg)
3.4"H x 4.5"W x 8.3"L (8.6 x 11.43 x 21.08 cm) 12.99"H x 6.77"W x 6.42"L (33 x 17.2 x 16.3 cm) 12.99"H x 6.77"W x 6.42"L (33 x 17.2 x 16.3 cm) 12.99"H x 6.77"W x 6.42"L (33 x 17.2 x 16.3 cm) 3.4"H x 4.5"W x 8.3"L (8.6 x 11.43 x 21.08 cm) 12.99"H x 6.77"W x 6.42"L (33 x 17.2 x 16.3 cm) 12.99"H x 6.77"W x 6.42"L (33 x 17.2 x 16.3 cm)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
MODEL GKB24-3 GKB24-3-T N4 GKB24-3-T N4H GKB24-MFT-T N4H GKB24-SR GKB24-SR-T N4 GKB24-SR-T N4H GKX24-3 GKX24-3-T N4 GKX24-MFT GKX24-MFT-T N4 GKX24-SR GKX24-SR-T N4 DESCRIPTION Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC on-off or oating control Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC on-off or oating control Nema 4 Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC on-off or oating control Nema 4 w/heater Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC MFT proportional control Nema 4 w/heater Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC 2-10VDC proportional control Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC 2-10VDC proportional control Nema 4 Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC 2-10VDC proportional control Nema 4 w/heater Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC on-off or oating control w/custom option Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC on-off or oating control w/custom option Nema 4 Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC MFT proportional control w/custom option Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC MFT proportional control w/custom option Nema 4 Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC 2-10VDC proportional control w/custom option Electronic fail-safe 360 in-lb 24 VAC/VDC 2-10VDC proportional control w/custom option Nema 4
K-GM20 P370 S1A ZG-102 ZG-GMA ZS-100 ZS-150 ZS-260
ACCESSORIES PAGE 0.75" (1.91 cm) shaft clamp Shaft mount auxilliary switch Optional SPDT auxiliary switch for LM, NM, AM, GM, GK, NK Tandem actuator mounting bracket for AF/AFB/GMB actuators 8 Crank arm adapter kit Galvanized weather shield for Belimo AFB/NFB/LF/TF/GMB/AMB/NMB/LMB 7 Polycarbonate weather shield for Belimo AFB/NFB/LF/TF/GMB/AMB/NMB/LMB 7 Explosion proof housing 487
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
45
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

FAST-ACTING FAIL SAFE ACTUATORS NKQ SERIES
DESCRIPTION
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
The Belimo NKQ Series actuators are electronic, fail safe, fast acting actuators. They are designed to deliver 4 to 10 second (4 second is standard) fail safe return. They are not spring return, but rather they are driven by a super capacitor which allows a very fast return to the normal or fail safe position desired. The basic models come in both ON/OFF and 2-10VDC options. Auxillary switches and feedback options are available on the NKQB24-1 model. The NKQB24-SR comes with a feedback of 2-10 VDC standard and the auxillary switch is an optional add-on. For more customized control, the NKQx-MFT models can be custom ordered based on the options available.
NEW!
NQK Series
FEEDBACK None Proportional (2-10 VDC) Proportional (2-10 VDC) AUXILIARY SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) @ 250 VAC SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) @ 250 VAC SPDT 3A (0.5A inductive) @ 250 VAC DRIVE TIME 4 seconds 4 seconds 4 seconds MINIMUM SHAFT LENGTH 1.75" (4.5 cm) ENCLOSURE RATING NEMA2 / IP54 UL enclosure type 2 WEIGHT 2.4 lb (1.0 kg)
FEATURES
Standard 4 second run time Standard 1/2" to 1.05" clamp 3' plenum rated cable with conduit connnector 24VAC/DC power supply Direct coupled 5 year warranty
MODEL NKQB24-1 NKQB24-SR NKQX24-MFT* TORQUE 54 in-lb (6 Nm) 54 in-lb (6 Nm) 54 in-lb (6 Nm) SUPPLY VA 22 VA 22 VA 22 VA CONTROL SIGNAL On/Off Proportional 2 to 10 VDC (4-20 mA) Proportional 2 to 10 VDC (4-20 mA)
*Custom multi-function technology option. Default is 2 to 10 VDC.
DIMENSIONS
TORQUE 54 in-lb (6 Nm) DIMENSIONS 3.9"H x 3.0"W x 7.25"L (9.9x7.6x19.3 cm) MAXIMUM SHAFT DIAMETER 1.05" (2.7 cm)
MODEL NKQB24-1 NKQB24-SR NKQX24-MFT K-AM25 P370 S1A ZG-102 ZG-NMA ZS-100 ZS-150 ZS-260 DESCRIPTION Electronic failsafe actuator, 54 in-lb, 24 VAC/VDC, On/Off Electronic failsafe actuator, 54 in-lb, 24 VAC/VDC, 2-10 VDC proportional (4-20 mA) Electronic failsafe actuator, 54 in-lb, 24 VAC/VDC, 2-10 VDC proportional (4-20 mA) w/ MFT technology ACCESSORIES PAGE 0.75" (1.91 cm) shaft clamp Shaft mount auxilliary switch Optional SPDT auxiliary switch for LM, NM, AM, GM, GK, NK Tandem actuator mounting bracket for AF/AFB/GMB actuators 8 Crank arm adapter kit for AMB, NMB Galvanized weather shield for Belimo AFB/NFB/LF/TF/GMB/AMB/NMB/LMB 7 Polycarbonate weather shield for Belimo AFB/NFB/LF/TF/GMB/AMB/NMB/LMB 7 Explosion proof housing 487
46
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
NKQ SERIES VDC/4-20 mA INSTALLATION NOTES
1 2 3 4 5 8 9 Actuators may also be powered by 24 VDC.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

FAST-ACTING FAIL SAFE ACTUATORS NKQ SERIES
NKQX24-MFT SERIES
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Proportional / 4-20 mA
Provide overload protection and disconnect as required. CAUTION EQUIPMENT DAMAGE! Actuators may be connected in parallel if not mechanically mounted to the same shaft. Power consumption and input impedance must be observed.
Position feedback cannot be used with Triac sink controller. The actuator internal common reference is not compatible. Control signal may be pulsed from either the Hot (source) or the Common (sink) 24 VAC line. Contact closures A & B also can be triacs. A & B should both be closed for triac source and open for triac sink. For triac sink the common connection from the actuator must be connected to the hot connection of the controller.
PWM
APPLICATION NOTES
Meets UL requirements without the need for an electrical ground connection. The ZG-R01 500 resistor may be used. WARNING: LIVE ELECTRICAL COMPENENTS During installation, testing, servicing and troubleshooting of this product, it may be necessary to work with live electrical components. Have a qualified licensed electrician or other individual who has been properly trained in handling live electrical components perform these tasks. Failure to follow all electrical safety precautions when exposed to live electrical components could result in death or serious injury.
On/Off control
Floating Point control
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
47
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS GND, GGD SERIES
DESCRIPTION
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Siemens re/smoke damper actuators are spring return, 2-position, 15 second actuators designed to operate UL Listed smoke control dampers and combination re/smoke dampers. The GND Series has 53 in-lb (6 Nm) of torque and the more powerful GGD Series has 142 in-lb (16 Nm) of torque. These actuators have patented built-in electronic fusible links; there is no need to buy/install separate parts to perform that function.
NEW!
GGD221.1U GND221.1U
CONTROL SIGNAL Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position DRIVE TIME 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds SPRING RETURN TIME 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds WEIGHT 7 lb (3.2 kg) 7 lb (3.2 kg) 7 lb (3.2 kg) 7 lb (3.2 kg) 7 lb (3.2 kg) 7 lb (3.2 kg) 7 lb (3.2 kg) 7 lb (3.2 kg) 4 lb (1.8 kg) 4 lb (1.8 kg) 4 lb (1.8 kg) 4 lb (1.8 kg) 4 lb (1.8 kg) 4 lb (1.8 kg) Two-position Two Position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position
FEATURES
Reversible fail-safe spring return for CCW, CW rotation in the same actuator Patented built-in electronic fusible link Fast, 15-second operation 2 year warranty
MODEL GGD121.1U GGD121.3U GGD126.1U GGD221.1U GGD221.3U GGD226.1U GGD321.1U GGD326.1U GND121.1U GND126.1U GND221.1U GND226.1U GND321.1U GND326.1U TORQUE 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) SUPPLY VOLTAGE 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC 20 VA running, 9 VA holding 20 VA running, 8 VA holding SUPPLY VA 150 VA running, 10 VA holding
Add /B for bulk pack (GGD Series is 8 per pack; GND is 10 per pack) Add/F for fusible link (GND Series only)
48
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
GGD SPECIFICATIONS GND SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Voltage
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

Operating Voltage 24 VAC 20%, 115 VAC 15% Power Supply 230 VAC 10% Frequency 50/60 Hz Power Consumption Running 150 VA Holding 10 VA Running Torque 142 lb-in (16 Nm) Spring Return Torque 108 lb-in (12 Nm) Minimum Stall Torque 350 lb-in (39 Nm) Torque Reduction at Elevated Temperature Less than 10% Runtime for 90 Operating with Motor at 60 Hz 15 seconds nominal Closing (On Power Loss) with Spring Return 15 seconds maximum Life Expectancy Minimum 35,000 stroke cycles
Damper Shaft Size Standard Oversize Enclosure Housing Material Ambient Temperature Operation
3/8" to 1" (8 to 25.6 mm) 1.05 inch maximum (26.6 mm) NEMA 1 Die cast aluminum alloy
0 to 130F (-18 to 55C) One time 350F (177C) for 1/2 hour (per UL555S) Storage and Transport -25 to 158F (-32 to 70C) Agency Certication UL listed to UL873, cUL certied to Canadian standard C22.2 No. 24-93 Pre-Cabled Connection 18 AWG Dimensions See dimensions table Weight 7 lbs. (3.2 kg) Eight pack 56 lbs. (25.4 kg)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
24 VAC/VDC 20%, 230 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz 120 VAC 10%, 60 Hz only Power Consumption 24 VAC/VDC Running 20 VA/12W Holding 8 VA/6W Power Consumption 120 VAC/230 VDC Running 20 VA Holding 9 VA Running Torque 53 lb-in (6 Nm) (minimum) Stall Torque (Minimum) 160 lb-in (18 Nm) Torque reduction at elevated temperature Less than 10% Runtime for 90 15 seconds nominal Closing (on power loss) with spring return 15 seconds maximum Nominal angle of rotation 95 Life Expectancy Minimum 35,000 full stroke cycles Damper Shaft Size 0.5" (12.7 mm) round Damper Shaft Length, Minimum 1.4" (36 mm) Enclosure NEMA 1 Housing Material Die cast aluminum alloy
0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) one time 350F (177C) Storage and Transport -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Humidity (Non-condensing) Maximum 95% RH non-condensing Teon Cable 400F (200C) Fixed Dual End Switches AC Rating 24 VAC to 250 VAC, 24 VDC 6A resistive/ 2 FLA/12 LRA Temperature Rating 350F (177C) Agency Certication UL873 , cUL C22.2 No. 24-93 , AS/ NZS 2064 1/2:1997; conforms to CE requirements for the EMC and low voltage directives; Australian Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) per AS/NZS 4251.1/2:1999 (C-tick) Pre-Cabled Connection Type FEP Teon jacketed Length 3 ft (0.9m), 19/30 strand 18 GA Country of Origin USA Dimensions See dimensions table Weight 4 lb (1.8 kg) Ten pack 40 lb (18 kg)
Ambient Conditions Operation
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
49
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

DIMENSIONS
MODEL TORQUE 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 142 in-lb (16 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) 53 in-lb (6 Nm) DIMENSIONS 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm) 3.25"H x 3.9"W x 11"L (8.26 x 9.9 x 27.9 cm)
MAXIMUM SHAFT DIAMETER 1" (2.54 cm)
GGD121.1U GGD121.3U GGD126.1U
1.05" (26.6mm) 1" (2.54 cm)
NEW!
MINIMUM SHAFT LENGTH 3/4" (1.9 cm) ENCLOSURE RATING Nema 1 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Nema 1 Nema 1 Nema 1 Nema 1 Nema 1 Nema 1 Nema 1 Nema 1 Nema 1 Nema 1 Nema 1 Nema 1
WEIGHT 4.8 (2.2 kg)
4.8 (2.2 kg)t 4.8 (2.2 kg) 4.8 (2.2 kg) 4.8 (2.2 kg) 4.8 (2.2 kg) 4.8 (2.2 kg) 4.8 (2.2 kg) 2.9 (1.3 kg) 2.9 (1.3 kg) 2.9 (1.3 kg) 2.9 (1.3 kg) 2.9 (1.3 kg) 2.9 (1.3 kg)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
GGD221.1U GGD221.3U GGD226.1U GGD321.1U GGD326.1U GND121.1U GND126.1U GND221.1U GND226.1U GND321.1U GND326.1U
1" (2.54 cm) 1.05" (26.6mm) 1" (2.54 cm) 1" (2.54 cm) 1" (2.54 cm) 1" (2.54 cm) 1" (2.54 cm) 1" (2.54 cm) 1" (2.54 cm) 1" (2.54 cm) 1" (2.54 cm)
50
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

Wire Designations
RED (G)
24 VAC
Function Supply (SP) Neutral (SN) Ground
Color Red Black Green
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
BLACK (G0) GREEN (GND)
BLACK (L)
115 VAC
Function Line Neutral Ground

GREEN (GND)
Color Black White Green
WHITE (N)
BROWN (L)
230 VAC
Function Line Neutral Ground

GREEN (GND)
Color Brown Blue Green
BLUE (N)
All wiring must conform to NEC and local codes and regulations.
CAUTION: The actuator must be wired with a 230 VAC line with respect to neutral and the ground lead must be connected for proper protection of the actuator. Any other connection, such as phase to phase, can damage the actuator.
GND, GGD Actuators
85
Fixed Dual End Switches

YELLOW GRAY
Switch Wire Color Switch Makes Switch Breaks 5 Gray <5 >5 85 Yellow >85 <85
NOTE: Both sets of contacts are open when actuator is between 5 and 85.
CAUTION: Mixed switch operation to the switching outputs of both dual end switches (5 and 85) is not permitted. Either AC line voltage from the same phase must be applied to all four outputs of the fixed dual end switches, or UL-Class 2 voltage must be applied to all four outputs.
GND Actuators ONLY

March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
51
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
MODEL GGD121.1U GGD121.3U GGD126.1U GGD221.1U GGD221.3U GGD226.1U GGD321.1U GGD326.1U GND121.1U GND126.1U GND221.1U GND226.1U GND321.1U GND326.1U
DESCRIPTION F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 24 VAC, 15-second return F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 24 VAC, 15-second return, oversize shaft adapter F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 24 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 120 VAC, 15-second return F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 120 VAC, 15-second return, oversize shaft adapter F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 120 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 230 VAC, 15-second return F/S, 142 in-lb, 2-position, 230 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches F/S, 53 in-lb, 2-position, 24 VAC, 15-second return F/S, 53 in-lb, 2-position, 24 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches F/S, 53 in-lb, 2-position, 120 VAC, 15-second return F/S, 53 in-lb, 2-position, 120 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches F/S, 53 in-lb, 2-position, 230 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches F/S, 53 in-lb, 2-position, 230 VAC, 15-second return, auxiliary switches
NEW!
NOTES: Add /B for bulk pack (GGD Series is 8 per pack; GND is 10 per pack) Add/F for fusible link (GND Series only) Standard shaft adapter is 3/8 to 1 in (8 to 25.6mm) Oversize shaft adapter is 1.05 in maximum (26.6mm) - (GGD series only)
ACCESSORIES GND SERIES ASK79.165 Electronic fusible link 165F, 74C ASK79.212 Electronic fusible link 212F, 100C ASK79.250 Electronic fusible link 250F, 121C ASK79.350 Electronic fusible link 350F, 177C GGD SERIES 985-006 985-004 ASK74.1 985-035P25 985-008P20 Anti-rotation bracket Self centering adapater Oversized shaft adapter up to 1.05 in (26.6mm) Conduit adapter male (box of 25 only) Conduit adapter female 1/2 in (12mm) (box of 20 only)
52
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS MS4XXX, MS81XX SERIES
Honeywell re and smoke damper actuators are designed to meet both UL-555 and UL-555S 350F safety requirements for combined re and smoke applications. The fast-acting actuators close dampers in 15-20 seconds, and the integral spring return ensures the consistent, proper level of torque.
Designed to meet UL-555 and UL-555S requirements Robust die-cast aluminum housing for protection and long service life Maximum spring return timing of 15-20 seconds Reliably built by the industry leader Energy-saving patented design No audible noise during holding
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
APPLICATION
Fire and Smoke actuator replacement must be installed correctly, per local codes, and approved by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Honeywell recommends following all local, state and national codes for periodic testing of the entire smoke control system. Refer to National
MS4104F1210
MS4120F1006
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Fire Codes NFPA90A, NFPA92A, and NFPA92B for the application. NFPA recommends periodic examination of each re/smoke damper (annually or semi-annually) to ensure proper performance.
Control Signal Motor Wiring MS4xxx MS8xxx Action Two-position DC with brushes 32" leads, 18 AWG and 7/8" knockout holes for conduit ttings 39" leads, 18 AWG and 7/8" knockout holes for conduit ttings CW/CCW mounting method 95 3, mechanically limited Rotation Noise Driving Open 80 dBA @ 3' (1.0 m) Holding 20 dBA @ 3' (1.0 m) no audible noise Life Expectancy 30,000 cycles Operating Temperature 0 to 130F (-18 to 55C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing Approvals CE, C-TICK, cULus,UL873, NEMA1 Warranty 5 years
DIMENSIONS
Model MS4xxx MS8xxx MSxx20 Torque 30 in-lb (3.4 Nm) 80 in-lb (9 Nm) 175 in-lb (20 Nm) Dimensions 8.94"H x 5.125"W x 3.25"D (22.7 x 13.0 x 8.3 cm) 10.7"H x 2.9"W x 3.9"D (2.71 x 7.5 x 10.0 cm) Maximum Shaft Diameter 0.5 (1.3 cm) 1.03 (2.6 cm) Minimum Shaft Length 2" (5.1 cm) 1.0 (2.5 cm) Weight 5.0 lb (2.3 kg) 7.0 lb (3.2 kg) Enclosure Rating NEMA 1 (IP40) NEMA 2 (IP54)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
53
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS MS4XXX, MS81XX SERIES
Model MS8104F1010 MS8104F1210 MS4104F1010 MS4104F1210 MS4604F1010 MS4604F1210 MS8109F1010 MS8109F1210 MS4109F1010 MS4109F1210 MS4609F1010 MS4609F1210 MS8109F1010 MS8109F1210 MS8120F1002 MS8120F1200 MS4120F1006 MS4120F1204
Torque
Supply Voltage
Supply Current
24 VAC +20%, -10%, 50/60 Hz
16 VA running, 8 VA holding
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
30 in-lb (3.4 Nm)
120 VAC +10%, 60 Hz
0.18A running, 0.11A holding
NEW!
Auxiliary Switch
None
Drive Time
Spring Return Time
2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC None
230 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz
0.13A running, 0.10A holding 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC None 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC None 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC None 2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC None 15 seconds 15 seconds
24 VAC +20%, -10%, 50/60 Hz
23VA running, 8VA holding
80 in-lb (9 Nm)
120 VAC 10%, 50/60Hz
230 VAC 10%, 50/60Hz
24 VAC +20%, -10%, 50/60 Hz
2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC None 0.35A running, 0.15A holding
175 in-lb (20 Nm)
120 VAC +10%, 60 Hz
230 VAC +10%, 50/60 Hz
2 SPST, 5A res., 3A ind. @ 250 VAC
MODEL MS4104F1010 MS4104F1210 MS4604F1010 MS4604F1210 MS8104F1010 MS8104F1210 MS4109F1010 MS4109F1210 MS4609F1010 MS4609F1210 MS8109F1010 MS8109F1210 MS8120F1002 MS8120F1200 MS4120F1006 MS4120F1204 201391 205649 32003532-005 DESCRIPTION Fire/smoke actuator, 30 in-lb, 120 VAC Fire/smoke actuator, 30 in-lb, 120 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches Fire/smoke actuator, 30 in-lb, 230 VAC Fire/smoke actuator, 30 in-lb, 230 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches Fire/smoke actuator, 30 in-lb, 24 VAC Fire/smoke actuator, 30 in-lb, 24 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches Fire/smoke actuator, 80 in-lb, 120 VAC Fire/smoke actuator, 80 in-lb, 120 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches Fire/smoke actuator, 80 in-lb, 230 VAC Fire/smoke actuator, 80 in-lb, 230 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches Fire/smoke actuator, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC Fire/smoke actuator, 80 in-lb, 24 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches Fire/smoke actuator, 175 in-lb, 24 VAC Fire/smoke actuator, 175 in-lb, 24 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches Fire/smoke actuator, 175 in-lb, 120 VAC Fire/smoke actuator, 175 in-lb, 120 VAC, w/ 2 aux. switches ACCESSORIES Shaft adapter for 3/8" shafts Surface mounting bracket (not supplied with actuator) for MLxx15, MSxx09 Auxiliary switch, dual SPDT, for MLxx15, MSxx09 fire/smoke actuators
54
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS FSLF, FSNF, FSAF SERIES
Belimos broad product line of re and smoke damper actuators covers the established range of system applications including active smoke control for stairwell, under-oor and other pressurization applications.
ISO 9001 Certied Quality Control and a 5-year warranty assure reliable operation 24, 120 and 230 VAC availibility to meet various installation requirements 24 VDC model (FSAF only) with 2-position and proportional control for DC power applications Unique FSAF24-BAL actuator allows duct balancing capabilities in re and smoke dampers UL555 and UL555S listed with U.S. damper manufacturers
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
FSLF120 FSAF24
Motor Wiring Feedback Action Rotation Manual Override Noise Life Expectancy Brushless DC 3-foot leads, 18 AWG, 1/2" NPT conduit connection 2-10 VDC (FSAF24-SR only) CW/CCW mounting method 95 3 mm hex crank (FSAF only) 40 db drive, 62 db spring 20,000 cycles per UL555S Operating Temperature FSLF, FSNF 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) normal duty; 3 on/off cycles after 30 minutes at ambient temperature of 350F (177C) safety duty; FSAF -22 to 122F (-30 to 50C) normal duty; 3 on/off cycles after 30 minutes at ambient temperature of 250F (121C) safety duty 5 to 95% RH Operating Humidity Approvals cULus Warranty 5 years
ORDERING INFORMATION AND INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS

Model FSLF24 FSLF120 FSLF230 FSNF24 FSNF120 FSNF230 FSAF24 FSAF120 FSAF230 FSAF24-SR Torque 30 in-lb (3.5 Nm) 30 in-lb (3.5 Nm) 30 in-lb (3.5 Nm) 70 in-lb (7.8 Nm) 70 in-lb (7.8 Nm) 70 in-lb (7.8 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) Supply Voltage 24 VAC 120 VAC 230 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 230 VAC 24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 230 VAC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC Supply VA 5 VA 18 VA 17 VA 27 VA 27 VA 27 VA 10 VA 11 VA 11 VA 11 VA 10 VA 9 VA Control Signal Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Two-position Proportional 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Floating/3-position, builtin potentiometer Proportional, 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Drive Time 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 75 seconds 75 seconds 75 seconds 75 seconds 75 seconds 75 seconds Spring Return Time 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds Weight 3.4 lb (1.5 kg) 4.0 lb (1.8 kg) 4.0 lb (1.8 kg) 6.0 lb (2.7 kg) 6.1 lb (2.8 kg) 6.1 lb (2.8 kg) 5.7 lb (2.6 kg) 6.1 lb (2.8 kg) 6.1 lb (2.8 kg) 5.7 lb (2.6 kg) 5.7 lb (2.6 kg) 4.6 lb (2.1 kg)
FSAF24-BAL 133 in-lb (15 Nm) FSAFB24-SR 180 in-lb (20Nm)
Note: Add -S sufx to model number for models with auxiliary contacts: 2 SPST, 3A (0.5 A inductive) @ 125/250 VAC Note: FSAFB24-SR model available with shorter 8" connection cable. Add -SC to the end of the model number.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
55
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS FSLF, FSNF, FSAF SERIES
WIRING
NEW!
CAUTION Equipment Damage!
FSxF24
Actuators may be connected in parallel. Power consumption and input impedance must be observed. Actuator may also be powered by 24 VDC. No ground connection required for AF models. Double insulated.
Provide overload protection and disconnect as required.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Line Voltage FSxF120, FSxF230

6 6
Only connect common to neg. () leg of control circuits. The ZG-R01-500 resistor converts a 4 to 20 mA control signal to 2 to 10 VDC. AF models meet cULus or UL and CSA Standard requirments without the need of an electrical ground connection. LF and NF high voltage models require ground.
FSAF24-SR, Proportional
FSLF, FSNF, FSAF, 2-position
NOTE: Refer to Belimo FS Actuators Guide for complete wiring information.
AUXILIARY SWITCH WIRING
10 5 10
85
30 to 90
85
FSAF24R-SR-S
FSNFxx-S
FSAFxx-S
FSLFxx-S
NOTE: Refer to Belimo FS Actuators Guide for complete wiring information. IMPORTANT: In most jurisdictions, replacement is considered a normal repair and no permit is required. A record must be kept on site per NFPA 105. UL expects instructions to be used. See www.belimo.com/resmoke. Conrm with Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
APPLICATION WIRING
Thermal sensor application
Smoke detector or relay from area smoke detection system HOT 120 or 24 VAC F & S Damper 165F N or COM
Fusible link and shaft spring application

Smoke detector or relay from area smoke detection system HOT 120 or 24 VAC F & S Damper
N or COM
To alarm system
BELIMO FSxx ACTUATOR
To alarm system
BELIMO FSxx ACTUATOR
56
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION APPLICATION SPECIFICATIONS
Size
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ROUND DAMPERS D690 SERIES
The D690 Series round control dampers are low-leakage, single blade dampers designed for use in conventional air handling system round ductwork. They come standard with an actuator mounting bracket that accommodates the Honeywell ML6161/ML7161/MN6105/MN7505 and the Kele KA-35/ KA-44 direct-coupled actuators. The dampers are available for standard same-day shipping from Kele with or without an actuator pre-mounted. FEATURES Neoprene seal for tight closing and low leakage Oilite bearings for long life Optional Honeywell or Kele actuator pre-mounted
D690A1044
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
D690A1044/KA-35-VAV
ZONE DAMPER APPLICATION
The D690 Series is intended to be used in commercial zoning systems as an individual zone damper controlled by a zone thermostat, or as a bypass damper controlled by a duct static pressure sensor/controller.
ZONE 1 ZONE CONTROLLER
RETURN AIR SUPPLY AIR
FROM ADDITIONAL ZONES TO ADDITIONAL ZONES
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
PRESSURE DROP AND FLOW RATE

Model Pressure drop "WC (kPa) 0.05 (0.012) 0.075 (0.019) 0.10 (0.025) 0.05 (0.012) D690A1010 0.075 (0.019) 0.10 (0.025) 0.05 (0.012) D690A1028 0.075 (0.019) 0.10 (0.025) 0.05 (0.012) D690A1036 0.075 (0.019) 0.10 (0.025) 0.05 (0.012) D690A1044 0.075 (0.019) 0.10 (0.025) 0.05 (0.012) D690A1051 0.075 (0.019) 0.10 (0.025) Flow rate CFM 180 210 240 410 485 580 693 849 980 1200 1460 1600 1336 1636 1890 1690 2080 2400
6" round through 16" round (even sizes) Round, single-blade, 90 rotation Type Shaft 1/2" (1.3 cm) diameter shaft, 3.9" (9.9 cm) length Actuator Bracket Pre-drilled holes to t Honeywell or Kele 35 in-lb or 44 in-lb actuators Less than 35 in-lb (4 Nm) Operating Torque Maximum Static Pressure 4" WC (1.0 kPa) Maximum Velocity 2500 ft/min (17.8 m/s) 12.5 cfm per sq. ft. @ 1" WC Leakage Class 17.6 cfm per sq. ft. @ 2" WC 21.6 cfm per sq. ft. @ 3" WC 25.0 cfm per sq. ft. @ 4" WC Frame 6" through 10" Mill galvanized, 24 gauge, sleevetype, spiral duct, crimped on downstream side 12" through 16" Mill galvanized, 22 gauge, sleevetype, spiral duct, crimped on downstream side Bearings Flanged bronze oilite, pressed onto frame Blade Design 16 gauge galvanized steel blade with closed-cell neoprene seal Operating Temperature 32 to 130F (0 to 54C) Warranty 1 year
D690A1002
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
57
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ROUND DAMPERS D690 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
Model
Dimensions D690A1002 D690A1010 D690A1028 D690A1036 D690A1044
6 diameter, 12 length 8 diameter, 12 length
10 diameter, 12 length 12 diameter, 13 length 14 diameter, 15 length 16 diameter, 17 length
NEW!
Weight 3.0 lb (1.36 kg) 4.0 lb (1.81 kg) 5.0 lb (2.27 kg) 6.0 lb (2.72 kg) 8.0 lb (3.63 kg) 10.0 lb (4.54 kg)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
D690A1051
Note: Add the following weights when ordering with actuator: KA-35-P or ML7161A2008 1.3 lb (.59 kg) KA-35-VAV or ML6161A2009 1.1 lb (.50 kg)
MODEL D690A1002 D690A1010 D690A1028 D690A1036 D690A1044 D690A1051 D690A1002/KA-35-P D690A1010/KA-35-P D690A1028/KA-35-P D690A1036/KA-35-P D690A1044/KA-35-P D690A1051/KA-35-P D690A1002/KA-35-VAV D690A1010/KA-35-VAV D690A1028/KA-35-VAV D690A1036/KA-35-VAV D690A1044/KA-35-VAV D690A1051/KA-35-VAV D690A1002/ML7161A2008 D690A1010/ML7161A2008 D690A1028/ML7161A2008 D690A1036/ML7161A2008 D690A1044/ML7161A2008 D690A1051/ML7161A2008 D690A1002/ML6161A2009 D690A1010/ML6161A2009 D690A1028/ML6161A2009 D690A1036/ML6161A2009 D690A1044/ML6161A2009 D690A1051/ML6161A2009 DESCRIPTION 6" round damper with actuator mounting plate, 12" spiral duct length 8" round damper with actuator mounting plate, 12" spiral duct length 10" round damper with actuator mounting plate, 12" spiral duct length 12" round damper with actuator mounting plate, 13" spiral duct length 14" round damper with actuator mounting plate, 15" spiral duct length 16" round damper with actuator mounting plate, 17" spiral duct length 6" D690A1002 with Kele non-spring return proportional actuator 8" D690A1010 with Kele non-spring return proportional actuator 10" D690A1028 with Kele non-spring return proportional actuator 12" D690A1036 with Kele non-spring return proportional actuator 14" D690A1044 with Kele non-spring return proportional actuator 16" D690A1051 with Kele non-spring return proportional actuator 6" D690A1002 with Kele non-spring return oating actuator 8" D690A1010 with Kele non-spring return oating actuator 10" D690A1028 with Kele non-spring return oating actuator 12" D690A1036 with Kele non-spring return oating actuator 14" D690A1044 with Kele non-spring return oating actuator 16" D690A1051 with Kele non-spring return oating actuator 6" D690A1002 with Honeywell non-spring return proportional actuator 8" D690A1010 with Honeywell non-spring return proportional actuator 10" D690A1028 with Honeywell non-spring return proportional actuator 12" D690A1036 with Honeywell non-spring return proportional actuator 14" D690A1044 with Honeywell non-spring return proportional actuator 16" D690A1051 with Honeywell non-spring return proportional actuator 6" D690A1002 with Honeywell non-spring return oating actuator 8" D690A1010 with Honeywell non-spring return oating actuator 10" D690A1028 with Honeywell non-spring return oating actuator 12" D690A1036 with Honeywell non-spring return oating actuator 14" D690A1044 with Honeywell non-spring return oating actuator 16" D690A1051 with Honeywell non-spring return oating actuator
201052A TT-470
RELATED PRODUCTS Auxiliary switch (1 SPDT) for ML6161/ML7161/KA-35 actuators Tilt transducer with 1/2-in crank arm, 4-20 mA loop powered
PAGE 6
58
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES OPERATION
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ROUND CONTROL DAMPERS CDRS25 SERIES
CDRS25 Series round damper frames are made of 20-gauge welded, galvanized steel, 7" in length. Blades are doubleskin galvanized steel, strength-equivalent to 14-gauge steel but lighter to handle. Shaft extensions are half-inch diameter with stainless steel bearings for long life damper actuation. Standard neoprene blade edge seals offer superior lowleakage performance. Optional aluminum or stainless steel construction is available, as well as an actuator mounting bracket.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Round sizes from 4" to 24" Velocities up to 4000 FPM Neoprene blade seal standard 20-gauge frame Two-ply blade, strength equivalent to 14-gauge steel OPTIONS Edge seals (none, silicon, EPDM, Viton) Stainless steel construction Aluminum construction Actuator mounting bracket
The CDRS25 is ideal for exhaust air modulation, supply air volume control, zone temperature control, minimum outdoor air intake control, and many other applications in both highvelocity and high-pressure systems. Made specically for easy installation in spiral ductwork, stiffener beads allow for easy sealing of duct connections.
SPECIFICATIONS
Size Type Shaft 4", 5", 6", 7", 8", 9", 10" to 24" (even) Round, single-blade, 90 rotation 1/2" (1.3 cm) diameter shaft, 7" (17.8 cm) length Actuator Bracket Optional, galvanized or stainless steel, 5.5"W x 9.3"L (to shaft center) Operating Torque (4xD") + 20 in-lb (with seals); (1.5xD") + 20 in-lb (without seals) Maximum Static Pressure 10" WC (4" to 6") 8" WC (7" to 12") 6" WC (>12") Maximum Velocity 4000 ft/min (28.5 m/s) AMCA Class 1 (with seals); 1.4% Leakage Class to 5.5% of maximum ow (without seals) Frame Bearings Blade Design Galvanized 20-gauge steel Stainless steel Riveted double-layer galvanized steel, full blade neoprene seals (standard, others optional) Operating Temperature -50 to 250F (-46 to 121C) Dimensions 4" through 24" diameter, 7" frame length Weight Approximately 1 lb per inch diameter RoHS Statement Yes 1 year Warranty
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
59
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ROUND CONTROL DAMPERS CDRS25 SERIES
INSTALLATION
7 (17.8)
Sheet metal screw (outside bead)
in (cm)
NEW!
Pressure/ Class
1A 1 2 3
PERFORMANCE REFERENCE STANDARD PER AMCA
Leakage, FT /MIN/FT (L/S/M )

3 2 2
1" (0.25 kPa) 3 (15.2) 4 (20.3) 10 (50.8) 40 (203)
Required Rating
4" (1.0 kPa) 8 (40.6) 8 (40.6) 20 (102) 80 (406)
Extended Ranges (Opt.)

8" (2.0 kPa) 11 (55.9) 11 (55.9) 28 (142) 112 (569) 12" (3.0 kPa) 14 (71.1) 14 (71.1) 35 (178) 140 (711)
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
D - Diameter
Spiral Duct
Damper Stiffener bead
Spiral Duct
MODEL CDRS25G CDRS25A CDRS25S DESCRIPTION Round galvanized steel control damper Round aluminum control damper Round 304* stainless steel control damper BLADE SEAL OPTIONS N Standard neoprene seals, AMCA Class 1 leakage X No blade seals, no leakage class, approximate leakage 1.4% to 5.5% of maximum flow at 4" W.C., not recommended for OSA intake E EPDM blade seals, AMCA Class 1 leakage S Silicone blade seals, 400F (204C), AMCA Class 1 leakage V Viton blade seals, AMCA Class 1 leakage AXLE CONSTRUCTION 1 Standard galvanized steel axle, 1/2" diameter, extending 5.5" outside damper 2 Stainless steel axle, 1/2" diameter, extending 5.5" outside damper (Note: used on all stainless steel dampers) MOTOR MOUNTING OPTIONS X No mounting bracket, with 5.5" shaft extension B Galvanized steel actuator mounting plate, 16 AWG, 5.5"W x 12"L, with 4" shaft extension SSB Stainless steel actuator mounting plate, 16 AWG, 5.5"W x 12"L, with 4" shaft extension SIZE (OUTSIDE DIAMETER IN INCHES) (OD) Duct outside diameter (4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24) inches available Note: All units are furnished approximately 1/8" smaller than the outside diameter dimension to facilitate spiral duct connection. Example: CDRS25N1B(12) CDRS25 round steel control damper, with seals and actuator mounting plate, 12" diameter. * 316 stainless steel also available as special order, call Kele
TS-470 TS-470-2 TS-470-P TS-475 TT-470
ACCESSORIES PAGE Damper position switch with SPDT switch, for 1/2" shaft 4 Damper position switch with two SPDT switches, for 1/2" shaft 4 Damper position switch with SPDT switch, for 1/2" shaft, stainless steel housing, and plenum-rated cable 4 Non-mercury damper position switch, SPDT, for 1/2" damper shaft 5 Tilt transducer with 1/2-in crank arm, 4-20 mA loop powered 6
60
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION COMMON SPECIFICATIONS
Type Shaft Frame Bearings Blade Design
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

RECTANGULAR DAMPERS CD40, CD50, CD60 SERIES
Ruskin parallel and opposed-blade HVAC control dampers are custom made-to-order. The damper frames are made of galvanized steel in a channel frame construction, offering an equivalent 13-gauge metal strength. The CD40 Series has 6" wide V-groove blades that are made of 16-gauge galvanized steel with synthetic bearings. The CD50 has aluminum airfoil blades with synthetic bearings. CD60 dampers offer 14-gauge blades. CD44 Basic control damper, approximately 4% leakage CD45 Standard control damper, AMCA Class 3 CD46 Low leakage control damper, AMCA Class 2 CD50 Aluminum frame air foil, ultra-low AMCA Class 1A CD60 Steel air foil, ultra-low AMCA Class 1A
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
CD-46
Parallel or opposed blade 6"L x 0.5" Dia. (15.2 x 1.3 cm) located on linkage side Equivalent 13 gauge galvanized (CD 50 aluminum); 5" face-to-face dimension Synthetic 6" galvanized steel for CD40, CD60; 6" aluminum for CD50; blade pins 0.5" steel hex
Side Seals Linkage Available Options Weight RoHS Statement Warranty
Self-adjusting steel (CD45, 46, 50, 60) Concealed in frame Flanges (front and/or rear) 7 lbs/sq. ft (shipping weight estimate) Yes 1 year
CD44 Blades Jamb seals Blade seals Leakage (% of maximum ow) AMCA Class Operating Temperature Maximum Velocity Torque required March 2014 16-gauge V-groove None None 2.7 to 4.3% @ 1" WC differential pressure Not classied -40 to 240F (-40 to 116C) 2000 fpm @ 2.5" WC 2.5 in-lb/sq. ft. CD45 16-gauge V-groove Flexible steel Foam 0.7 to 1.1% @ 1" WC differential pressure Class 3 -25 to 180F (-32 to 83C) 2000 fpm @ 2.5" WC 5 in-lb/sq. ft. CD46 16-gauge V-groove Flexible steel PVC coated polyester 0.4 to 0.5% @ 1" WC differential pressure Class 2 -25 to 180F (-32 to 83C) 2000 fpm @ 2.5" WC 7 in-lb/sq. ft. CD50 Aluminum airfoil Flexible steel Ruskiprene <8 cfm/sq. ft. @ 4 WC differential pressure Class 1A -72 to 275F (-58 to 135C) 3000 fpm @ 3.5" WC 7 in-lb/sq. ft. CD60 14-gauge steel airfoil Flexible steel Ruskiprene <3 cfm/sq. ft. @ 1 WC differential pressure Class 1A -72 to 275F (-58 to 135C) 3000 fpm @ 3.5" WC 7 in-lb/sq. ft.
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
61
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

RECTANGULAR DAMPERS CD40, CD50, CD60 SERIES
DAMPER OPTION DIAGRAMS
1
Lexan Bearing
Frame Linkage Assembly Truarc Ring E-25
Jackshaft bracket as needed
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Idler Axle
1/2" shaft Crossover Tiebar Drive Shaft (Blade axle)
NEW!
1.5 (3.8)
in (cm)
T-FLANGE
Jackshaft bracket as needed
Jackshaft bracket as needed 1/2" for < 12.5 sq ft 1" for > 12.5 sq ft
1 3/8" (35)
1 3/8" (35)
1 3/8" (35)
H
Blade Clip Blade
Overtravel Stop (All axles are drive blades)
Outboard Bracket Extended Shaft Spring Clip Supplied with Damper Blade Stop
3.13 (7.9) Tiebar
F Linkage Assembly Truarc Ring E-25
1.5 (3.8)
W No flange Depth = 5 (12.7)
Opposed Blade Action, Front Flange
Parallel Blade Action, Rear Flange
Parallel Blade Action, Double Flange
1 3/8" (35) TYP W
Note: All flanges are outside W x H damper dimensions.
CD40, CD60, CD50 Dampers
MODEL CD44 CD45 CD46 CD50 CD60 DESCRIPTION Steel control damper without jamb or blade seals. No leakage class, 4% of maximum flow approximate leakage at 4" W.C., not recommended for OSA intake Steel control damper with flexible stainless steel jamb seals and foam blade seals. AMCA Class 3 leakage, 40 CFM/ft2 at 1" W.C. Steel control damper with flexible stainless steel jamb seals and PVC blade seals. Very low AMCA Class 2 leakage, 10 CFM/ft2 at 1" W.C. Aluminum control damper with flexible stainless steel jamb seals and Ruskiprene blade seals. Ultra-low AMCA Class 1A leakage, 3 CFM/ft2 at 1" W.C. Steel control damper with flexible stainless steel jamb seals and Ruskiprene blade seals. Ultra-low AMCA Class 1A leakage, 3 CFM/ft2 at 1" W.C.) BLADE CONFIGURATION OB Opposed blade (damper must have two blades minimum) PB Parallel blade (single blade available) MOUNTING OPTIONS 0 No flange 1* Flange on front of damper, opposite side of jack shaft (if jack shaft included) 2* Flange on back of damper, same side as jack shaft (if jack shaft included) 3* Flanges both front and back 4* T-flange frame option for wafer-style mounting with increased free area (see T-Flange Frame drawing) SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION X Horizontal blade mounting, no special construction T** Vertical blade mounting configuration (includes thrust bearings)** SIZE - WIDTH*** by HEIGHT in INCHES (0.01" INCREMENTS), PLEASE OBSERVE LIMITS IN THIS TABLE Model and mounting
CD4x models horizontal blade: CD4x models vertical blade:
Blade style
Opposed Parallel Opposed Parallel Opposed Parallel Opposed Parallel Opposed Parallel Opposed Parallel
Single section Minimum

5" x 10" 5" x 5" 5" x 10" 5" x 5" 6" x 9" 6" x 8" 6" x 9" 6" x 8" 8" x 11" 8" x 10" 8" x 11" 8" x 10"
Multi-section Minimum
48" x 72.01" 48" x 72.01"
Maximum
48" x 72" 48" x 72" 36" x 48" 36" x 48" 60" x 72" 60" x 72" 36" x 48" 36" x 48" 60" x 72" 60" x 72" 36" x 48" 36" x 48"
Maximum
Unlimited Unlimited
Special construction -- call Kele 48" x 72.01" 48" x 72.01" Unlimited Unlimited
(W*** x H)
CD50 models horizontal blade: CD50 models vertical blade: CD60 models horizontal blade: CD60 models vertical blade:
Special construction -- call Kele 48" x 72.01" 48" x 72.01" Unlimited Unlimited
Special construction -- call Kele
* All flanges are outside the ordered damper dimension (W x H). See damper option diagrams for flange dimensions. ** Vertical blade construction *** Damper width is defined as the outside dimension parallel to the blade(s), regardless of vertical or horizontal orientation. Jackshaft is included in all multi-section dampers. Crank arm is not included. All single-section dampers have 1/2" drive shaft Example: CD46-OB-0X-12X18 CD46 steel control damper, opposed blade, no flange, standard horizontal construction, 12"W x 18"H
62
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Three-day construction standard 24-hour fast track shipping available Tested to over 100,000 cycles Self-compensating, stainless steel side seals Blade rotation stops Square blade pins for non-slip pivoting
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

RECTANGULAR DAMPERS VD-1300 SERIES
Johnson Controls VD-1300 Series parallel/oppposed blade HVAC control dampers are custom made to size requirements. Damper frames are constructed of formed 13-gauge galvanized sheet metal mechanically joined with dual linkage concealed in the side channels to eliminate noise and friction. Compressible spring stainless steel side seals and acetal or bronze bearings are also available. Dampers are available in Class I, II, and III leakage performance grades.
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Leakage Resistance VD-1310 17 cfm/sq ft maximum at 1 in. static pressure 45 cfm/sq ft maximum at 4 in. static pressure VD-1320 3.4 cfm/sq ft maximum at 1 in. static pressure 6.0 cfm/sq ft maximum at 4 in. static pressure VD-1330 2.2 cfm/sq ft maximum at 1 in. static pressure 3.7 cfm/sq ft maximum at 4 in. static pressure GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Type Shaft Frame Bearings Frame Blade Design Linkage Blade pins Bearings Drive shaft Parallel or opposed blade 7"L x 0.5" Dia. (17.8 x 1.3 cm) with holding clip 13 gauge galvanized steel; 3.1" faceto-face dimension Acetal (bronze optional) 13-gauge galvanized steel steel Single 16-gauge galvanized 1/8" zinc-plated rolled steel (VD-1310); double 22-gauge galvanized (VD-1320); 1/16" 3/8" square steel, zinc-plated extruded aluminum airfoil (VD-1330); Acetal (bronze optional) blade pins 3/8" square 7.0"L x 0.5"D (17.78 x zinc-plated 1.27 cm) steel; Santoprene blade seals (silicon with holding clip
TABLE 1. LEAKAGE RESISTANCE CLASSES1 Static Pressure (inches water) Class 1 4 8 12 IA 3 ---I 4 8 11 14 II 10 20 28 35 III 40 80 112 140 1. Maximum allowable leakable in cfm/sq ft is m3/s x 196) for all sizes.
optional for VD-1320) Side Seals Self-adjusting stainless steel Linkage 1/8" zinc-plated rolled steel Operating Temperature -40 to 200F (-40 to 93C); high temperature option with bronze bearings, silicon seals up to 250F Santoprene (silicone option VD-1320) Blade seals (121C) Self-adjusting stainless steelweight estimate) Side seals Weight 7 lbs/sq. ft (shipping RoHS Statement Yes (-40 to 93C) -40 to 200F Ambient temp Warranty 3 years -40 to 250F (-40 to 121C) Hi temp option Requires bronze bearings and silicon seals
VD-1310 Class III Leakage (see Table 1 above) Single 16-gauge Blade construction galvanized steel 6" wide nominal Operating torque @ 4.25 in-lb 0.5" W.C. (100 fpm) 5.25 in-lb 1" W.C. (1000 fpm) Velocity/Pressure limits for specified performance 4500 fpm @ 6" W.C. Damper 24"W (60.96 cm) 1500 fpm @ 3" W.C. Damper 48"W (121.9 cm) VD-1320 Class I Double 22-gauge galvanized steel 4.5 in-lb 5.5 in-lb 6000 fpm@ 8" W.C. 2000 fpm @ 8" W.C. VD-1330 Class IA 1/16" airfoil extruded aluminum 4.5 in-lb 5.5 in-lb 8000 fpm @ 10" W.C. 4000 fpm @ 8" W.C.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
63
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

RECTANGULAR DAMPERS VD-1300 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions notes 1) Unit furnished approximately 1/4" (0.6 cm) undercut for proper t in duct. If no undercut wanted, order "E" Option code. 2) Dimensions shown are from the outside edges of the damper frame
Table 2. Damper Section Sizes (1" increments) Single Section Dimension 8" to 36" (20 to 91 cm) 8" to 48" (20 to 122 cm)
NEW!
in (cm)
Four holes 0.19 (0.48) diameter top and bottom channel
Air w Flo
ACTUATORS & DAMPERS
Width (VD-1310) Width (VD-1320, -1330) Height (VD-1310, -1320, -1330) Multi-section Width (VD-1310) Width (VD-1320, -1330) Height (VD-1310) Height (VD-1320, -1330)
Varies with damper height top and bottom

Height
6" to 76" (15 to 193 cm) Dimension 36" to 108" (91 to 274 cm) 48" to 192" (124 to 488 cm) 6" to 76" (15 to 193 cm) 6" to 228" (15 to 732 cm)
3.1 (7.9) 2.8 (7.2) 3.1 (7.9) Holding Clip Approximately 6 (15) Drive Shaft included (DMPR-KC003)
Table 3. Option Codes E F G H J Exact, whole inch size, no undercut 1.5" ange on entering side 1.5" ange on leaving side 1.5" ange on both sides Jackshaft, eld-installed (must specify if needed, not automatically included with multi-section dampers)
Width 3.1 (7.9)
VD-1330 Class I Blade
VD-1320 Class II Blade
VD-1310 Class III Blade
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION V Product family BLADE OPERATION O Opposed P Parallel BLADE TYPE A Class I VD-1330 airfoil design P Class II VD-1320 double piece design V Class III VD-1310 with seals single piece design (not recommended for outside air) BEARING/SEAL TYPE E Extended - bronze/santoprene H High - bronze/silicone S Standard - acetal/santoprene ACTUATOR N None (integral actuators available, special order, contact Kele) WIDTH W W W See Table 2 above for limitations (1" increments), use all 3 digits HEIGHT HHH See Table 2 above for limitations (1" increments), use all 3 digits OPTIONS (LIMIT TWO) See Table 3 above
WWW
HHH
Option Code Number
Example: VOVSN-024-025 Opposed blade Class III damper 24" x 25", with standard bearings/seal. Note: The jackshaft components and dampers will be shipped as separate panels a maximum of 48"W and 76"H. The required jackshafts, coupling kits, and support bars must be field-assembled.
64
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
ALARMS & INDICATION
HA U M D LA RIM SI T &Y I N D I C AT I O N
Kele Offers Custom Assemblies and FREE Display Calibrations.
RAD-1 | p. 66
AIS | p. 65
869/869STR | p. 67
51XBR Series | p. 69
MNST/MST1 | p. 92 Series
ST120 Series | p. 90
Pilla
Electrical Products, Inc.
Pilla Electrical Products, Inc.
ALARMS & INDICATION

MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Alarm and Indication Stations AIS Kele Alarm Indication Station .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 RAD-1 Kele Remote Alarm Indication Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Emergency Operator Stations E-Stop ESB Series Operator Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-Stop ESM Series Emergency Operator Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-Stop ESP Series Emergency Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST120 Series Operator Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WPS Series Plate Mounted Operator Stations .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MNST and MST1 Series Power Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARMS & I N D I C AT I O N
84 86 88 90 91 92
200 Class | p. 80 ClearView
Loop Powered Indicators VPI Series 3-1/2 Digit LCD Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 SGD-24, -28 PanelPilot Smart Graphical Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 BDR Series Kele Big Display Readout, 3-1/2 Digit LED, Red / Blue / Green . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 LPI-1C 3-1/2 Digit LCD Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 LPI-1C-A, LPI-1C-G, LPI-1C-R 3-1/2 Digit LCD Amber / Green / Red Panel Display .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 LPI-3C, LPI-3C-A, LPI-3C-G or LPI-3C-R 4-1/2 Digit Black / Amber / Green / Red Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 LPI-4 Kele 3-1/2 Digit Large Black / Red / Green / Amber Panel Display.. . 100 LPI-5 Kele 3-1/2 Digit Small Black / Red Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Multi-Status Indicators 105XBRi Series XTRA-BRITE LED Multi-Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 125XBRi Series XTRA-BRITE LED Multi-Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Run Time Accumulator ALD-1 Pulse or Run-time Accumulator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Strobes and Horns 125STR, 89STR, 869STR, 869, 868STR, 868 Strobes & Horns . . . . . . . . . . SC-Series Alarm Horn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STB, STB-H Wall-Mounted Strobe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51XBR Series XTRA-BRITE LED Beacon with Horn .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Series Polaris Class LED Beacon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Series Polaris Class LED Beacon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107XBR Series XTRA-BRITE LED Hazardous Location Beacon . . . . . . . . . 105XBRM Series XTRA-BRITE LED Adverse Location Visual Signals. . . . . 125XBR Series XTRA-BRITE LED Beacons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ESM Series | p. 86
ESP Series | p. 88
67 68 68 69 70 71 72 74 75
Tower Lights 200 Class ClearView LED Stacklight .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 TWS Series 75 mm Tower Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
ALARMS & INDICATION

KELE ALARM INDICATION STATION
The Model AIS Alarm Indication Station features an indication light, alarm horn and an alarm horn silence switch.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Upon an alarm contact closure, the LED indicator will light, and the horn will sound. The horn can be silenced through the alarm silence switch, while the visual indication will continue to be lighted until the alarm condition has been corrected. A power interruption or open alarm contact will reset the AIS.
FEATURES

Long lasting, red LED indication Distinct continuous audible tone Horn silence switch Compact and rugged design Available in 24 VDC, 24 VAC, or 120 VAC Bright yellow panel face
ALARMS & INDICATION
APPLICATION
Refrigerant leak alarm indication Water level alarm indication Pressure alarm indication High/Low temperature limits Gas leak indication Humidity limit alarm indication Vibration limit Voltage/Current level limit Any contact closure alarm application
WIRING
Four-wire connection
1 2 3
Power supply 24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC Remote alarm device Alarm initiated by contact closure N.C. A power interrupt or open alarm contact will reset the AIS to normal. N.C.=no connection
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Contact Rating AIS-24D AIS-24A AIS-120A Alarm Horn Dimensions Mounting Enclosure Approvals Weight Warranty 24 VAC/ VDC, 120 VAC, 100 mA max 24 VDC, 50 mA min 24 VAC, 90 mA min 120 VAC, 70 mA min 80 db 7.09"H x 4.33"W x 3.54"D (18.0 x 11.0 x 9.0 cm) Four screws through back Polystyrene, impact resistant, knock-outs RoHS 1.1 lb (0.5 kg) 1 year
4 5
AIS internal terminal strip
Two-wire connection
1 2 3 4 5
N.C. AIS internal terminal strip N.C. N.C. Power supply 24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC A power interrupt or open alarm contact will reset the AIS to normal. Remote alarm device Alarm initiated by N.C.=no connection contact closure
MODEL DESCRIPTION AIS Alarm indication station 12VD 12 VDC powered 24D 24 VDC powered 24A 24 VAC powered 120A 120 VAC powered AIS 24A Example: AIS-24A 24 VAC powered alarm indication station
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
65
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
ALARMS & INDICATION
KELE REMOTE ALARM INDICATION STATION RAD-1
The RAD-1 is a wall mounted remote alarm indication station mounted on a stainless steel plate. Any contact closure alarm initiating device that can switch 24 VAC or DC can be used with the RAD-1.
ALARMS & INDICATION
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION When 24 VAC or VDC is applied to the RAD-1 through an alarm-initiating device, the red alarm LED will light, the horn will sound, and the alarm status relay will energize. If an initial alarm delay has been set, when 24 VAC or VDC is applied, the red alarm LED will blink until the delay period has expired. Then it will light continuously, the horn will sound continuously, and the relay will energize. If power is interrupted, the RAD-1 will reset to normal state. During an alarm (24V applied to the RAD-1), the horn may be silenced by momentarily pressing the silence switch. The alarm LED will remain lighted, and the alarm status relay will remain energized when the horn is silenced until the alarm condition is cleared (24V removed). If an alarm repeat after silence time has been set, the horn will re-sound at the end of the repeat time. If the relay-follows-horn jumper is installed, the alarm status relay will de-energize when the horn is silenced and re-energize when the horn sounds at the end of the repeat-after-silence time. If a pulsed (instead of continuous tone) horn is desired, the horn-pulsed jumper may be installed. If both the horn pulsed jumper and the relay-follow-horn jumper are installed, the alarm status relay will energize and de-energize with the pulsed horn.
WIRING
HORN PULSED REPEAT TIME x10 DLY TIME x10
Alarm Repeat after Silence Time* SW6SW8 OFF = No delay SW6 ON = 1 minute SW7 ON = 2 minutes SW8 ON = 4 minutes Initial Alarm Delay Time* SW1SW5 OFF = No delay SW1 ON = 1 second SW2 ON = 2 seconds SW3 ON = 4 seconds SW4 ON = 8 seconds SW5 ON = 16 seconds
No jumper
ON
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OFF Repeat time in 2 minutes 1 (add)

4 16 8 4 2 1
Continuous horn Pulsed horn Alarm repeat Alarm repeat after silence after silence time x1 time x10 Inital alarm Initial alarm delay time x10 delay time x1
Jumper installed
Alarm initiating device

24 + VAC/ VDC
+
NO COM NC
FEATURES
Red alarm LED Alarm horn, continuous tone or pulsed Alarm horn silence switch Adjustable alarm delay time Adjustable alarm repeat time Alarm status SPDT relay Relay operates with the alarm horn option
Repeat time in seconds Relay COM (add)

NC
NO
Alarm relay
Relay follows horn
RAD-1
* Times are additive; for example, with SW3 and SW5 both ON, 4 sec + 16 sec = 20 sec delay (or 200 sec if DLY TIME x10 jumper is installed)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Alarm Delay Time Alarm Horn Alarm Repeat Time Alarm Status Relay 24 VAC @ 100 mA or 24 VDC @ 34 mA None, or 1 to 31 seconds in onesecond increments, or 10 to 310 seconds in 10-second increments Continuous or pulsed tone, 70 db min None, or 1 to 7 in one-minute increments, or 10 to 70 minutes in 10-minute increments SPDT, 0.5A @ 24 VAC, 1.0A @ 30 VDC Connections Dimensions Mounting Approvals Weight Warranty Screw terminals, 22 - 14 AWG wires 4.5"H x 2.75"W x 1.0"D (11.4 x 7.0 x 2.5 cm) Brushed stainless steel plate mounts to standard single junction box, two screws provided RoHS 0.19 lb (0.07 Kg) 18 months
MODEL RAD-1 DESCRIPTION Remote alarm indication station
66
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014 March 2014
NEW!
Indoor and outdoor applications Amber, blue, clear, green, and red colors 24 VAC, 24 VDC, and 120 VAC Surface and panel mount
ALARMS & INDICATION

STROBES & HORNS 125STR, 89STR, 869STR, 869, 868STR, 868
Signal strobes and horns available in wall-mount and panelmount congurations with a variety of colors and voltages. Model 125STR is a 120 VAC panel-mount strobe in NEMA 4X enclosure. Model 89STR mounts on a single-gang box and is a single, indoor, ush-mount strobe. Model 869STR is an indoor, ush-mount horn and strobe combination. Model 869 is an indoor, ush-mount horn only. Model 868 STR is an outdoor, surface-mount horn and strobe combination. Model 868 is an outdoor, surface-mount horn.
2
869 869STR
ALARMS & INDICATION
868STR
125STRH
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage N5 (89, 869, 868) AQ (89, 869, 868) 120A (125STRH) Current Rating 125STRH Horn/Strobe Average Candela Amber Blue Clear Green Red Color Horn Loudness Peak Candela Strobe Tube Life 120 VAC 24 VDC, 24 VAC 120 VAC -20% to +10% of nominal voltage 120 mA 24 VDC, 22 mA/390 mA 24 VAC, 72 mA/390 mA 120 VAC, 24 mA/87 mA 90 cd 20 cd 150 cd 70 cd 21 cd Amber, blue, clear, green, red 90 dba @ 10' 300,000 cd 3,000 hrs, 1,000 hrs Operating Humidity 868, 868 STR 869, 89 STR, 869 STR Operating Temperature 868, 868 STR 869, 89 STR, 869 STR Dimensions 89 STR 869 STR, 868 STR, 869, 868 Enclosure Rating 125 STRH Mounting 868 869 Approvals Warranty 95% RH @ 86F (30C) 85% RH @ 86F (30C) -31 to 150F (-35 to 66C) 32 to 120F (0 to 49C) 5"H x 3-3/8"W (12.7 x 8.6 cm) 5-1/2"H x 5-1/2"W (14 x 14 cm), NEMA 4X Weatherproof surface box supplied no NEMA rating 3" sq x 1-1/2" electrical box with 1-1/2" extension ring (need 3" depth) UL 1638 listed, cUL 2 years
MODEL 125STRH 89STR 869STR 868STR 869 868 DESCRIPTION Panel-mount strobe Indoor flush-mount strobe Indoor flush-mount electronic horn/strobe Outdoor surface-mount electronic horn/strobe Indoor flush- or panel-mount electronic horn Outdoor surface-mount electronic horn COLOR A Amber B Blue C Clear G Green R Red SUPPLY VOLTAGE AQ 24 VAC/VDC (89, 869, 868) N5 120 VAC (89, 869, 868) 120A 120 VAC (125STRH only)
B AQ
WIRING
868 STR/869 STR Horn/Strobe

Strobe Horn + +
868STR
Example: 868STR-B-AQ Outdoor surfacemount electronic horn with blue strobe and 24 VAC/VDC
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
67
ALARMS & INDICATION
NEW!
ALARM HORN SC-SERIES
DESCRIPTION
ALARMS & INDICATION
The SC Series Alarm Horns provide an audible tone when an electric signal is applied. They can be used in applications when an audible alarm is needed to indicate that immediate attention is required.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage SC110 SC628 SC628A, AN Current Rating SC100 SC628 SC628AN SC628A Horn Loudness Tone Panel Cutout Weight Approvals Warranty
30-120 VAC/VDC 6-28 VDC 6-28 VAC/VDC
6-21 mA 3-18 mA 4-30 mA 6-23 mA Medium, 68-80 dB (AN model Loud, 80-95 dB) Continuous Panel, cutout 1.13" (2.87 cm) 0.1 lb (0.05 Kg) UL recognized component File# S1290 1 year
WIRING
SC Horn
+
MODEL SC110 SC628 SC628A SC628AN DESCRIPTION Alarm horn, 120 VAC Alarm horn, 24 VDC Alarm horn, 24 VAC/VDC Alarm horn, 24 VAC/VDC
Horn
DESCRIPTION
The Model STB and STB-H wall-mounted strobes provide a bright, eye-catching warning light for any alarm application. The STB-H features a distinct audible signal.
WALL-MOUNTED STROBE STB, STB-H
FEATURES
Wall mounted with 4" square or double-gang box Integral alarm horn (91 db) 24 VDC powered 15/75 candela strobe intensity Meets requirements of ADA4.28.3 UL listed Xenon strobe for constant ash rate Strobe and horn powered separately if desired Jumper-selectable, continuous or temporal tone
WIRING
Signal S+ S+ SH- H+
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Current Rating STB STB-H Strobe Frequency Horn Loudness Strobe Intensity 20-31 VDC (24 VDC nominal)
Note: Switch 1, 2 off
MODEL STB STB-H DESCRIPTION Wall-mounted strobe Wall-mounted strobe with horn
68
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
80 mA at 24 VDC 136 mA at 24 VAC 1 Hz 104 dB max 15 (off-center) candela 75 (on-center) candela Operating Temperature 32 to 120F (0 to 49C) Dimensions 4.5"H x 4.56"W x 2.25"D (11.43 x 11.58 x 5.72 cm) Weight STB 1.0 lb (0.45 Kg) STBH 1.1 lb (0.5 Kg) Approvals UL Listed File S3406 Warranty 3 years
NEW!

ALARMS & INDICATION

XTRA-BRITE LED BEACON WITH HORN 51XBR SERIES
The 51XBR Series XTRA-BRITE LED beacons are combination visual and audible signaling devices, designed for indoor or outdoor applications. The integrated horn is synchronized with the ashing LED. The unit features a cast metal base that can be used as a junction box. The double fresnel lens is made of shatter-resistant polycarbonate, and is designed to magnify the superbright LED. LED light source with integrated horn Shatter-resistant double fresnel polycarbonate lens Five lens color options Immune to shock and vibration Cast metal base Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications
ALARMS & INDICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 51XBRFx120A 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 51XBRFx24D 24 VDC Current 51XBRFx120A 175 mA 51XBRFx24D 275 mA Max. Off State Leakeage Current 10 mA Surge (inrush / duration) 51XBRFx120A 50 A / 260 s 51XBRFx24D 10 A / 120 s Amber, blue, green,red, white Colors Flash Rate 65 FPM Projected LED Life 148,000 hours Horn Loudness 85 dB @10' Strobe Tube Life 148,000 hours Operating Temperature -31F to 150F (-35C to 66C) Dimensions 7.38"H x 6"W (18.7cm x 15.2cm) Mounting Direct surface mount Mounted on 1/2 in. NPT conduit Mounted on a 4 in. octagon box Approvals cULus Listed, uL 2.14lbs (0.97 kg) Weight Warranty 18 months
51XBR
WIRING
24 VDC WIRING
GREEN BLACK
120 VAC WIRING

BLACK
120 VAC POWER
+
24 VDC POWER
GND
+ NEUTRAL
Wire nuts not included.
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) H
7 3/8" (187mm)
MODEL 51XBRF DESCRIPTION Combination flashing LEDs with horns COLOR A Amber B Blue G Green R Red W White SUPPLY VOLTAGE 24D 24 VDC 120A 120 VAC @ 50/60 Hz G 24D Example: 51XBRFG24D Combination flashing LEDs with horns and 24V DC
3 1/2" (89mm)
6" (152mm)
3/4" (19.05mm) 1/2" (12.7mm) conduit hole
57PLEDM
W
March 2014
WHITE
RED
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
69
ALARMS & INDICATION

POLARIS CLASS LED BEACON 57 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Edwards Polaris Class 57PLEDM LED beacons are NEMA Type 4X and IP66 rated visual signals designed for indoor and outdoor applications.The Polaris Class is designed for industrial or commercial applications that require the longevity of an LED combined with the brightness of a xenon strobe. These units are very effective in high noise areas where ear protection is worn or audible signals may not be heard.
FEATURES
ALARMS & INDICATION
Six lens colors Seven ash patterns (includes steady-on) Hidden in Plain Sight (HIPS) switch High level of immunity to shock and vibration Black or gray base option
57PLEDMB 57PLEDMR 57PLEDMA
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 12 VDC, 0.7A, 24 VAC/VDC, 0.55A 57PLEDMx24ADx 120 VAC, 50/60Hz, 0.25A 57PLEDMx120Ax Leakage Current Off State Leakage 5 mA Surge Current 57PLEDMx24ADx 8.5A/2ms 4.5A/1ms 57PLEDMx120Ax Amber, blue, green, magenta, red, clear Color Projected LED Life 148,000 hours Flash Mode 7 selectable patterns with HIPS switch Operating Temperature -31 to 150.8F (-35 to 66C) 8" x 6.5" (203 x 165 mm) Dimensions Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X Mounting: On 3/4" (19mm) NPT threaded conduit Approvals UL 1638 and cUL Listed (E11459) Weight 3.4 lbs (1.54 kg) 18 months Warranty
DIMENSIONS
8" (203mm)
6.5" (165mm)
WIRING
24 VDC WIRING
GREEN BLACK
120 VAC WIRING
GREEN BLACK WHITE
MODEL 57PLEDM DESCRIPTION LED beacon COLOR A Amber B Blue G Green M Magenta R Red W White SUPPLY VOLTAGE 24AD 12-24 VDC, 24 VAC @ 50/60 Hz 120A 120 VAC @ 50/60 Hz BASE COLOR (Blank) Gray B Black G 24AD Example: 57PLEDG24AD LED beacon with green lens, gray base, and 12-24 VDC, 24 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
24 VAC WIRING
BLACK
RED
+
24 VDC POWER
GND
+ NEUTRAL
24 VAC POWER
RED
GND
+ NEUTRAL
120 VAC POWER
ACCESSORIES
57PLEDM

CBR Corner Mount Bracket WBR Wall Mount Bracket
CBR WBR
ACCESSORIES Corner Mount Bracket Wall Mount Bracket
PAGE 70-71 70-71
70
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
12-24 VDC, 24 VAC, 120 VAC Six lens colors Seven ash patterns (includes steady-on) Hidden in Plain Sight (HIPS) switch 3/ " (19mm) NPT threaded conduit 4 High level of immunity to shock and vibration Black or gray base option
ALARMS & INDICATION

POLARIS CLASS LED BEACON 94 SERIES
Edwards Polaris Class 94PLEDM LED beacons are NEMA Type 4X and IP66 rated visual signals designed for indoor and outdoor applications. The units are available in Edwards 94 Series housing in 12-24 VDC, 24 VAC, 120 VAC and are eld congurable with up to seven ashing patterns, including steady-on, utilizing a Hidden In Plain Sight (HIPS) switch. The inner, double fresnel lens is made of a high grade polycarbonate and is designed to magnify the ultra-bright LEDs inside. A clear, outer, impact-resistant polycarbonate dome offers additional protection against accidental impacts with machinery or falling objects. It also acts as a protective and simple to clean dust and residue cover. The Polaris Class beacons are designed to be mounted on 3/4 inch NPT conduit (indoor or outdoor). For outdoor installation and to maintain the NEMA and IP ratings, the beacon must be mounted with the dome facing directly up. When installing the beacon indoors in dry environments, it can be mounted in any position. The 94 Series housing has a cast base that can function as a junction box. The Polaris Class is designed for any industrial or commercial applications that require the longevity of an LED and the brightness of a xenon strobe. These units are very effective in high noise areas where ear protection is worn or audible signals may not be heard.
2
94PLEDMA 94PLEDMR 94PLEDMG
DIMENSIONS
ALARMS & INDICATION
7.75" (200mm)
HIPS Programming Switch 8.25" (210mm)
WIRING
24 VDC WIRING GREEN BLACK 24 VAC WIRING GREEN BLACK 120 VAC WIRING BLACK
120 VAC POWER
+
24 VDC POWER
GND
+ NEUTRAL
24 VAC POWER
GND
+ NEUTRAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 94PLEDMx24ADx 94PLEDMx120Ax Leakage Current Surge Current 94PLEDMx24ADx 94PLEDMx120Ax Color 12 VDC, 0.7A; 24 VAC/DC, 0.55A 120 VAC, 50/60Hz, 0.25A Off State Leakage 5mA
MODEL 94PLEDM DESCRIPTION LED beacon COLOR A Amber B Blue G Green M Magenta R Red W White SUPPLY VOLTAGE 24AD 12-24 VDC, 24 VAC @ 50/60 Hz 120A 120 VAC @ 50/60 Hz BASE COLOR (Blank) Gray B Black G 24AD B Example: 94PLEDG24AD LED beacon with green lens, black base, and 12-24 VDC, 24 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
8.5 A / 2 ms 4.5 A / 1 ms Amber, blue, green, magenta, red, white/clear Projected LED Life 148,000 hours Flash Mode 7 Selectable Patterns with HIPS Switch Operating Temperature -31 to 150.8F (-35 to 66C) Dimensions 94PLEDMx Models 8.25" x 7.75" (210 x 200 mm) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X and IP66 Rated Mounting On 3/4 inch NPT conduit (indoor or outdoor) Approvals UL 1638 and cUL Listed (E11459) Weight 6.10 lbs (2.77 kg) Warranty 18 months March 2014
94PLEDM
CBR WBR
ACCESSORIES Corner Mount Bracket Wall Mount Bracket
PAGE 70-71 70-71
WHITE
RED
RED
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
71
ALARMS & INDICATION

XTRA-BRITE LED HAZARDOUS LOCATION BEACON 107XBR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 107XBR hazardous location XTRA-BRITE LED visual signals are NEMA Type 3R and Type 4 heavy-duty visual signals designed for indoor or outdoor applications. The units are available in 24 VDC or 120 VAC and are eld congurable for steady-on or ashing (65 fpm). The inner, double fresnel lens is made of a high grade polycarbonate and is designed to magnify the super-bright LEDs inside. A clear, outer, impact-resistant glass globe also covers the lens and an optional dome guard ts over the glass dome to protect it against accidental impacts with machinery or falling objects. The 107XBR has three different mounting congurations including the pendant mount, bracket mount and ceiling mount and can be mounted on 3/4" NPT threaded conduit. The 107XBR is designed for applications such as petroleum reneries, utility gas plants, dry cleaning plants, fuel servicing areas and other similar applications. 107XBRPMR
ALARMS & INDICATION
107XBRCMG
107XBRBMA
FEATURES
Available in 24VDC or 120VAC Five lens colors Steady-on or ashing in every unit 3/4" NPT threaded conduit High level of immunity to shock and vibration Three mounting options: pendant, bracket or ceiling UL Listed for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G; Class II, Division 2, Groups F & G and Class III, Division 1 locations UL and cUL Listed for Marine environments (120VAC only)
WIRING
Connect leads to Power Source
Yellow, Not Connected (wire nut supplied)
Wire nuts (not supplied) DC units; Red positive (+) AC units; Black Hot DC units; Black negative (-) AC units; White neutral
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 107XBRxMx24D 107XBRxMx120A Current 107XBRxMx24D 107XBRxMx120A Color Flash Mode 24 VDC 120 VAC, 60Hz
220 mA 115 mA Amber,blue,green,red,clear Steady on or ashing (65 FPM, eld congurable) Project LED Life 148,000 hours Operating Temperature See Table on next page Dimensions 7" X 10.13" (178 x 260 mm) Enclosure Rating NEMA 3R and NEMA 4 Mounting Bracket mount, pendant mount, ceiling mount Approvals UL & cUL Listed, UL Listed for Marine Use Weight 107XBRBMx 10.87 lb (4.93 kg) 107XBRCMx 9.87 lb (4.47 kg) 107XBRPMx 8.97 lb (4.06 kg) Warranty 18 months
* Class II and Class III only apply to the pendant mount versions with clear globes. ** Marine Rating applies to UL listing only.
Connect leads to Power Source Yellow
DC units: Connect to Positive (+) AC units: Connect to Hot
(Yellow wire connected for Optional flash pattern)
Wire nuts (not supplied) DC units; Red positive (+) AC units; Black Hot DC units; Black negative (-) AC units; White neutral
Flash Rate 65 fpm
72
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Ambient temperature 40C 55C 65C
9 7/8" (251mm) 10 1/4" (260mm) 7" (172mm)
ALARMS & INDICATION
XTRA-BRITE LED HAZARDOUS LOCATION BEACON 107XBR SERIES
OPERATING TEMPERATURE CODES

Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G; Class III, Div. 2 Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Div. 1 85C (T6) 85C (T6) 85C (T6)
Class I, Div. 2 Groups A, B, C, D 135C (T4) 135C (T4) 135C (T4)
ALARMS & INDICATION
Note: Class II and Class III only apply to the pendant mount versions with clear globes.
DIMENSIONS
10 1/2" (267mm) 4" (102mm)
11 3/8" (289mm)
9 3/4" (248mm)
10 7/8" (276mm)
10 1/8" (260mm)
7" (178mm)
Pendant Mounting
Bracket Mounting
Ceiling Mounting
MODEL 107XBR DESCRIPTION Hazardous Location LED Beacon MOUNTING PM Pendant BM Bracket CM Ceiling COLOR A Amber B Blue G Green R Red W White SUPPLY VOLTAGE 24D 24V DC 120A 120V AC @ 60 Hz BM W 120A Example: 107XBRBMW120A Hazardous Location LED Beacon with bracket mounting, white LED, and 120V AC @ 60 Hz
107XBR
ACCESSORIES EDVPGU1 Optional Dome Gaurd
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
73
ALARMS & INDICATION

XTRA-BRITE LED ADVERSE LOCATION VISUAL SIGNALS 105XBRM SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 105XBRM Series LED visual signals are heavy duty, reliable, UL, cUL beacons. The 105XBRM Series features a UL listed Type 4X enclosure and is UL Listed for Marine Use. The 105XBRM Series has three different congurations for mounting that include the 105BX junction box, the 105BM mounting bracket, and the 105PM pipe mount attachment. The unit can be mounted on 3/4 NPT using the 105PM pipe attachment. It can also be surface mounted using the 105BX junction box, or wall mounted using the 105BX junction box with the 105BM mounting bracket. They can only be used with metallic wiring systems when installed at the end of the run.
ALARMS & INDICATION
FEATURES
Available in 24V DC or 120V AC Three mounting bases: 3/4" pipe mount attachment, outlet box attachment, or wall mounting bracket 65 fpm mode eld-selectable via dipswitch Immune to shock and vibration
SPECIFICATIONS
105XBRMB
WIRING
OFF
105-L Series Lens
1 2 STEADY
ON ON
0.215 0.108A Amber, blue, green, red, white Steady on or 65 FPM (dipswitch settings) Projected LED Life 148,000 hours Operating Temperature -31 to 212F (-35 to 100C) Dimensions 4.75" X 3.75" (121 x 95mm) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X Mounting " pipe mount attachment, outlet box attachment, or wall mounting bracket Approvals UL & cUL Listed, UL Listed for Marine Use Weight: 1.4 lbs (0.63 kg) Warranty: 18 months
Supply Voltage 105XBRMx24D 105XBRMx120A Current Rating 105XBRMx24D 105XBRMx120A Color Flash Mode
24 VDC 120 VAC 50/60Hz
OFF
105XBR Base 18 Wire Leads DC units; Red Positive (+), AC units; Black Hot DC units; Black Negative (-), AC units; White Neutral Wire nuts (not supplied)
OFF OFF
1 2 65 FPM
ON ON
(Dipswitches located inside the unit)
Power Source Wires
HAZARDOUS LOCATION RATINGS
MODEL
105XBRMx24D 105XBRMx120A
Class I II III
Division 2 2
Group A, B, C, D F, G
Operating Temperature T4A (120C, 248F) T4A (120C, 248F) T4A (120C, 248F)
MODEL DESCRIPTION 105XBRM XTRA-BRITE LED Adverse Locations Visual Signals COLOR A Amber B Blue G Green R Red W White SUPPLY VOLTAGE 24D 24V DC 120A 120V AC 105XBRM B N5 Example: 105SLEDBN5 Steady-On LED with blue lens and light source and 120V 60 Hz supply voltage
105BM 105BX 105PM
ACCESSORIES Wall-mount bracket (requires 105BX) Surface-mount box Pipe-mount base
PAGE 74,77,479-480 74,77,479-480 74,77,479-480
4.5" (114 mm)
5" (127 mm)
4.5" (114 mm) 2.25" (57 mm)
2" (51 mm) 5.25" (133 mm) 6" (152 mm)

4.5" (114 mm)
105PM Pipe Mount Attachment
105BX Outlet Box Attachment
105BM Mounting Bracket (use with 105BX)
74
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!

ALARMS & INDICATION

XTRA-BRITE LED BEACONS 125XBR SERIES
The Edwards 125XBR Class XBR XTRA-BRITE LED beacons are UL and cUL listed dual mode signaling devices, available in two versions, Steady-On/Flashing (125XBRM) and Steady-On/Lightburst (125XBRZ). Both versions feature a corrosion resistant Type 4X enclosure and can be panel or conduit mounted. The lens is made of shatter resistant polycarbonate. Both the 125XBRM and 125XBRZ beacons are dual mode devices, maximizing application exibility while reducing inventory costs. It can also be panel-mounted using the mounting gasket provided with the unit.
ALARMS & INDICATION
Available in 24 VDC or 120 VAC Available with amber, blue, green, red or white lens Available with gray or black base Option for panel or conduit mounting Available in dual mode Steady-On/Flashing LED or Steady-On/Lightburst LED versions
125XBR
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 125XBRxx24Dx 125BRxx120Ax Current 125XBRxx24Dx 125BRx120Ax Color Flash Rate 125XBRM 125XBRZ Projected LED Life Operating Temperature Dimensions Enclosure Rating Mounting Approvals Weight Warranty 24 VDC 120 VAC,50/60Hz 0.215A 0.108A Amber, blue, clear, green, red STEADY-ON/FLASHING (65 FPM) STEADY-ON/LIGHTBURST (420FPM) 148,000 hours -31 to 150F (-35 to 66C) 3.875"H3.875"H(98.4mm) X 3.25"W (82.6mm)(98.4mm) X 3.25"W (82.6mm) NEMA 4x On 1/2" or 3/4" NPT conduit using a 1/2" internal or 3/4" external conduit hub cULus Listed 0.5lbs 18 months
Gasket (provided for use when direct panel mounting) 3.875" (98.4mm)
Double threaded for panel mounting or 1/2" internal or 3/4" external conduit mounting
Locknut - 1.3625" O.D. (provided for use when direct panel mounting) 3.25" (82.6mm)
MODEL 125XBR DESCRIPTION Dual Mode XBR LED Beacons in NEMA 4X Enclosure OPERATION M Steady-On/ Flashing LED Z Steady-On/ Lightburst COLOR A Amber B Blue G Green R Red W White SUPPLY VOLTAGE 24D 24V DC 120A 120V AC @ 60 Hz BASE COLOR (BLANK) Gray B Black Z R 120A Example: 125XBRZR120A Dual Mode XBR LED Beacons in NEMA 4X Enclosure, with Steady-On Lightburst, red LED, 120V AC @ 60 Hz, and gray base
WIRING
125XBR Series LED Visual Indicator Locking Nut 1.3625" OD (supplied) Control panel (Enclosure) Yellow, Not connected (wire nut supplied) Gasket (supplied) 18 Wire Leads DC units; Red Positive (+) AC units; Black Hot DC units; Black negative (-) AC units; White neutral Wire Nuts (Not Supplied) Power Source Wires
125XBR
125GRD CBR WBR
ACCESSORIES Optional Gaurd for use with 125 Class Beacons Corner Mount Bracket Wall Mount Bracket
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
75
ALARMS & INDICATION

XTRA-BRITE LED MULTI-STATUS INDICATOR 105XBRI SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Edwards 105XBRi Series XTRA-BRITE LED MultiStatus Indicator is a heavy duty, reliable UL and cUL listed, multi-color visual signaling device. It features a corrosion resistant Type 4X enclosure that is UL listed for Marine use, and can be panel or conduit mounted. The base is manufactured from glass-reinforced thermoplastic polyester resin and the double fresnel lens is made of shatter resistant polycarbonate. The lights are available in 24 VDC and 120 VAC 50/60 Hz, in either Red/Blue/Amber or Red/Green/Amber.
ALARMS & INDICATION
FEATURES
Available in 24V DC or 120V AC Available in Red/Blue/Amber or Red/Green/Amber Three mounting bases: 3/4" pipe mount attachment, outlet box attachment, or wall mounting bracket PLC compatible XTRA-SAFE Technology enables status indication for those who are color blind Dip switch settings for use with or without external control Immune to shock and vibration
105XBRi-RGA
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 105XBRiRxA24D 105XBRiRxA120A Current 105XBRiRxA24D 105XBRiRxA120A Max. Off State Leakage Current Surge (inrush/duration) 105XBRiRxA24D 105XBRiRxA120A LED Colors Flash Mode Flash Rate Projected LED Life Operating Temperature Dimensions Enclosure Rating Mounting Approvals Weight Warranty 24 VDC 120 VAC, 50/60Hz 0.15A 0.1A 5mA 28A/65uSeconds 28.5A/212uSeconds Red/Green/Amber or Red/Blue/Amber Dipswitch settings for use with or without external control XTRA-SAFE Mode; Red 240 FPM, Amber120 FPM, Green or Blue 65 FPM 148,000 hours 31 to 150F (-35 to 66C) 4.5"W x 4.625"H (114 x 117 mm) NEMA 4X " pipe mount attachment, outlet box attachment, or wall mounting bracket UL & cUL Listed 1.4 lb(0.63 kg) 18 months
DIMENSIONS
4.625" (92mm)
4.375" 4.625" (111mm) (117mm)
4.5" (114mm)
HAZARDOUS LOCATION RATINGS

Cat. No 105XBRIRGA24D 105XBRIRGA120A 105XBRIRBA24D 105XBRIRBA120A Class l ll lll l ll lll Division 2 2 2 2 Group A,B,C,D F,G A,B,C,D F,G Operating Temperature T5 (100C, 212F) T5 (100C, 212F) T5 (100C, 212F) T6 (85C, 185F) T6 (85C, 185F) T6 (85C, 185F) March 2014 March 2014
76
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
WIRING
105-LC Lens Red (DC + or AC hot for Red LED activation) Blue with Green tracer (DC + or AC hot for Blue or Green LED activation (depending on model)) Wire Nuts (not supplied) Power source wires (2) Screws to mount 105BX to the mounting surface Mounting Surface
ALARMS & INDICATION

2
Dipswtich Settings: Applications WITHOUT a PLC or Controller* XTRA-SAFE Technology Enabled (Factory Default) Applications WITHOUT a PLC or Controller* XTRA-SAFE Technology Disabled
Applications WITH a PLC or Controller*
Black (DC -) or White (AC neutral)
Amber (DC + or AC hot for Amber LED activation)
ALARMS & INDICATION
*It is generally recommended that both dipswitches, SW1 and SW2, be set to OFF for applications using an external Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) or other external controller. A PLC or controller, however, can be used with any of the shown configurations.
(Dipswitch located inside the unit)
MODEL 105XBRi
DESCRIPTION LED Multi-Status Indicator in NEMA 4X Enclosure COLORS RGA Red, Green, Amber RBA Red, Blue, Amber SUPPLY VOLTAGE 24D 24 VDC 120A 120 VAC @ 50/60 Hz RGA 24D Example: 105XBRiRGA24D LED Multi-Status Indicator in NEMA 4X Enclosure with Red, Green, and Amber lens, and 24 VDC
105XBRi
105BM 105BX 105PM
ACCESSORIES Wall-mount bracket (requires 105BX) Surface-mount box Pipe-mount base
PAGE 74,77,479-480 74,77,479-480 74,77,479-480
5" (127mm) 4.5" (114mm) 4.5" (114mm) 2" (51mm) 5.25" (133mm) 6" (152mm)
(4) 3/4" Knockouts

2.25" (57mm)
4.5" (114mm)
0.34" (9mm) Diameter
105BM Mounting Bracket (use with 105BX)
105BX Outlet Box Attachment
105PM Pipe Mount Attachment
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
77
ALARMS & INDICATION

DESCRIPTION
The Edwards 125XBRi Series XTRA-BRITE LED MultiStatus Indicator is a UL and cUL listed, multi-color visual signaling device. It features a corrosion resistant Type 4X enclosure and can be panel or conduit mounted. The base is manufactured from a 33% glass lled nylon, providing high resistance to heat and high chemical resistivity. The lens is made of shatter resistant polycarbonate. The lights are available in 24 VDC and 120 VAC 50/60 Hz, in either Red/Blue/Amber or Red/Green/Amber.
FEATURES
ALARMS & INDICATION
Available in 24 VDC or 120 VAC Available with gray or black base Available in Red/Blue/Amber or Red/Green/Amber Option for panel or conduit mounting PLC Compatible XTRA-SAFE Technology enables status indication for those who are color-blind Dip switch settings for use with or without external control Immune to shock and vibration Protective wire guard available, Cat. No. 125GRD
125XBRi
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 125XBRiRxA24Dx 24 VDC 125XBRiRxA120Ax 120 VAC, 50/60Hz Current 125XBRiRxA24Dx 0.15A 125XBRiRxA120Ax 0.1A Max. Off State Leakage Current 5 mA Surge (inrush/duration) 125XBRiRxA24Dx 28.5A/65uSeconds 125XBRiRxA120Ax 28.5A/212uSeconds LED Colors Red/Green/Amber or Red/Blue/ Amber Dipswitch enabled Flash Mode Flash Rate XTRA-SAFE Mode, Red 240 FPM, Amber120 FPM, Green or Blue 65 FPM Projected LED Life 148,000 hours Operating Temperature -31 to 150F (-35 to 66C) Dimensions 3.25"W x 3.875"H (82.6 x 98.4mm) NEMA 4X Enclosure Rating Mounting Conduit or panel mount Approvals UL & cUL Listed Weight 0.5 lbs (0.22 kg) Warranty 18 months
DIMENSIONS
3.875" (98.4mm) Gasket (provided for use when direct panel mounting)
Double threaded for panel mounting or 1/2" internal or 3/4" external conduit mounting
Locknut - 1.3625" O.D. (provided for use when direct panel mounting) 3.25" (82.6mm)
78
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
125XBRI Series Chameleon LED Visual Indicator Gasket (supplied) Locking Nut 1.3625" OD (supplied) Control panel Wire nuts (not supplied) DC Units; Black DC common (-) AC Units; White AC neutral (Red LED activation) (DC Units; Red positive (+) AC Units Red Hot (Amber LED activation) DC Units; Amber Positive (+) AC Units; Amber Hot
ALARMS & INDICATION

WIRING
2
Dipswtich Settings: Applications WITHOUT a PLC or Controller* XTRA-SAFE Technology Enabled (Factory Default) Applications WITHOUT a PLC or Controller* XTRA-SAFE Technology Disabled
Applications WITH a PLC or Controller*
(Blue or Green LED activation) DC Units; Blue with green stripe, Positive (+) AC Units; Blue with green stripe, Hot
ALARMS & INDICATION
Wire color corresponds with each indicated color. Red wire = Red LED's Yellow wire = Amber LED's Blue with Green tracer wire = Green or Blue LED's
*It is generally recommended that both dipswitches, SW1 and SW2, be set to OFF for applications using an external Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) or other external controller. A PLC or controller, however, can be used with any of the shown configurations.
(Dipswitch located inside the unit)
MODEL 125XBRi DESCRIPTION LED Multi-Status Indicator in NEMA 4X Enclosure COLOR RGA Red, Green, Amber RBA Red, Blue, Amber SUPPLY VOLTAGE 24D 24 VDC 120A 120 VAC @ 60 Hz BASE COLOR (BLANK) Gray B Black RGA 120A Example: 125XBRi-RGA-120A LED Multi-Status Indicator in NEMA 4X Enclosure, with red, green, and amber LEDs, with 120 VAC @ 60 Hz, and gray base
125XBRi
125GRD CBR WBR
ACCESSORIES PAGE Optional Guard for Use with 125 Class Beacons Corner Mount Bracket 70-71 Wall Mount Bracket 70-71
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
79
ALARMS & INDICATION

LED STACKLIGHT 200 CLASS CLEARVIEW
DESCRIPTION
The 200 Class 70mm ClearView LED Stacklight is a versatile, multi-mode signaling device that may contain up to ve light modules, or four light modules and one sounder module in a single, integrated stack. The lens modules are clear, and are available with red, amber, blue, green, yellow and white LEDs in 24 VAC, 24 VDC and 120 VAC. The lenses are made from a self-extinguishing polycarbonate material and are scratch and impact resistant. Optional piezoelectric and magnetodynamic sounder modules complement the visual signals of the Stacklight, offering several audible tones depending on the model chosen. The sound module has been designed so that it is always in the top position of the Stacklight. The 200 Class 70mm ClearView LED Stacklight features an interlocking system for quick assembly without any tools. It is available in gray or black and offers multiple voltage ranges to provide solutions for industrial applications, while also meeting machine builder and OEM requirements.
270CLED
ALARMS & INDICATION
WIRING
FEATURES
24 VAC, 24 VDC and 120 VAC Stackable up to ve modules including sounder Quick and simple assembly with NO tools required Multi-Mode (Steady, Single, Double or Triple Flash) Two optional sounders available; Piezoelectric: Six user selectable tones, Magnetodynamic: 32 user selectable tones Clear lens LED light source Available in Gray or Black IP65 or IP54 available cULus Listed CE approved
5 4 3 2 1
On the power supply line, use appropriate time-lag fuses according to the voltage.
V DC V AC
() (+)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Light Modules 24 VDC, 0.065A; 24 VAC, 0.075A to 0.085A 120 VAC/DC, 0.035A Piezoelectric Sound Modules 12 VAC/DC, 0.003A; 24 VAC/DC, 0.006mA; 48 VAC/DC, 0.013A; 120 VAC, 0.004A; 240 VAC, 0.01A Magnetodynamic Sound Modules 12 VAC, 0.12-0.95A; 12 VDC, 0.03-0.335A; 24 VAC 0.17-1.06A; 24VDC, 0.045-0.45A; 120VAC, 0.04-0.105A; 240 VAC, 0.025-0.06A Color White, red,green,blue, amber Flash Mode Steady on, Single (75FPM), Double (85FPM), Triple (85FPM) Horn Loudness Piezoelectric Sound Modules 12 VAC/DC, 72-79dB; 24 VAC/DC, 77-85dB 48 VAC/DC, 79-89dB; 120 VAC, 75-81dB 240 VAC, 78-87dB Magnetodynamic Sound Modules 12 VAC/DC, 86.5-103.5dB; 24 VAC/DC, 91-107dB; 120 VAC, 93-103dB; 240 VAC, 93-103.5dB Operating Temperature Light Modules -22 to 122F (-30 to 50C) Piezoelectric Sound Modules -22 to 140F (-30 to 60C) at 12V to 48V; -22 to 132.8F (-30 to 56C) at 120V to 240V Magnetodynamic Sound Modules -22 to 140F (-30 to 60C) at 12V to 24V; -22to 122F (-30 to 50C) at 120V to 240V Dimensions Base 1.89"H x 2.678" dia (48 x 68 mm) Light Module 2.323"H x 2.953"dia (59 x 75 mm) Sound Module 4.095"H x 2.953"dia (104 x 75 mm) Enclosure Rating NEMA 3R, 4X,IP66 rated base and light modules, IP54 rated sound modules Mounting Wall mount or Surface mount Weight Base 0.83 lb (0.38 Kg) Light Modules 0.81 lb (0.37 Kg) Piezoelectric Sound Modules 1.04 lb (0.47 Kg) Magnetodynamic Sound Modules 1.28 lb (0.58 Kg) Approvals cULus Listed, CE approved Warranty 18 months
80
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Sound Type Diagram
on
ALARMS & INDICATION

LED STACKLIGHT 200 CLASS CLEARVIEW
70MM PIEZOELECTRIC (PZO) ACOUSTIC MODULE DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

12 VDC/VAC dB A at 1m 0.003 75 24 VDC/VAC dB A at 1m 0.006 81 48 VDC/VAC dB A at 1m 0.013 83 120 VAC dB A at 1m 0.004 75 240 VAC dB A at 1m 0.010 81
F (Hz)1 50/60
Continuous reduced output
2 on
Continuous maximum output
50/60
0.003
79
0.006
85
0.013
89
0.004
81
0.010
87
on
Slow intermittent reduced output
50/60
0.003
72
0.006
77
0.013
79
0.004
76
0.010
78
ALARMS & INDICATION
2 on
Slow intermittent maximum output

1 2 on 3
50/60
0.003
77
0.006
84
0.013
86
0.004
81
0.010
85
Fast intermittent reduced output

1 2 on 3
50/60
0.003
74
0.006
79
0.013
81
0.004
76
0.010
79
Fast intermittent maximum output

1 2 3
50/60
0.003
78
0.006
85
0.013
87
0.004
81
0.010
85
1For AC voltages only
DIMENSIONS/ORDERING INFORMATION
LIGHT MODULE
2.835" (72mm)
BASE AND COVER

2.953" (75mm) .788" (20mm)
MODEL 270CLED
3.11" (79mm)
2.323" 2.717" (59mm) (69mm)
2.323" (59mm)
1.89" (48mm)
2.953" (75mm)
ACOUSTIC MODULE
2.678" (68mm)
4.567" (116mm)
4.095" (104mm) 1/2" NPT
DESCRIPTION LED Stacklight Module MODULE TYPE S Steady M Multimode COLOR A Amber B Blue G Green R Red Y Yellow W White SUPPLY VOLTAGE 24AD 24V AC/DC 120A 120V AC BASE COLOR (BLANK) Gray B Black M W 120A
LED LIGHT MODULES
270CLED
Example: 270CLEDMW120A LED Stacklight Module with multimode module, white LED, 120 VAC, and gray base
2.953" (75mm)
SOUND MODULES Piezoelectric Sounder 270PZO1248AD 12-48 AC/DC, Gray 270PZO1248ADB 12-48 AC/DC, Black 270PZO120240A 120-240 VAC, Gray 270PZO120240AB 120-240 VAC, Black Magnetodynamic Sounder 270MDA1224AD 270MDA1224ADB 270MDA120A 270MDA120AB 270MDA240A 270MDA240AB 12-24 VAC/DV, Gray 12-24 VAC/DV, Black 120 VAC, Gray 120 VAC, Black 240 VAC, Gray 240 VAC, Black
270FLXT 270FMLADAPT 270JBX** 270KIT** 270SSXT100 270SSXT200 270SSXT400 270TEP** 270THF** 270TWM** 270TWM2**
ACCESSORIES 270 Flexible Steel Extension Stem - 370mm 270 Female Adapter Base - Gray Junction Box - Gray Footing with Extension - Gray 270 Stainless Steel Extension Stem - 100mm 270 Stainless Steel Extension Stem - 200mm 270 Stainless Steel Extension Stem - 400mm Threaded Extension Pole 100mm - Gray Threaded Footing - Gray Threaded Wall Mount - Gray Double Threaded Wall Mount - Gray
**NOTE: Add B to the end of the model number for black unit.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
81
ALARMS & INDICATION

75 MM TOWER LIGHTS TWS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The TWS Series Tower Lights enable stacking of up to ve signaling devices. Each device has its own set of contacts. Starting with a bottom module, up to ve devices can be added in any combination of continuous and ashing incandescent lights, continuous and ashing LED lights, and Xenon strobes. Each stack can be capped with a horn. Each light comes in a variety of colors, and all lamps are replaceable. Several wall- and pedestal-mounting congurations are available.
ALARMS & INDICATION
OPERATION
Horns IP20 upward mount IP24 downward moun Ratings IP66
Stack with TWS-BS
Stack with TWS-BP1
Stack with TWS-KIT Two stacks with TWS-BP2
WIRING
5
0 1 2
3 4 5
4 3 2
5 4 3 2 1
C VDC + (VAC)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Voltage Range Power Light module Horn module 12-24 VAC/VDC, 24-240 VAC 24 VAC/ VDC, 110 VAC, 24 VAC , 24 VDC 5W 12-120 VAC/VDC (7W 240 VAC) 12V-2.7 mA, 24V-6 mA, 110V-4 mA,240V-8.5 mA Blue, amber,red,green, yellow, clear Strobe Dimensions Base Light Horn Mounting Enclosure Horn Approvals Warranty 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) 2.68"H x 2.95" dia (6.8 x 7.5 cm) 2.72"H x 2.95" dia (6.9 x 7.5 cm) 3.11"H x 2.95" dia (7.9 x 7.5 cm) Wall, two holes; surface, four holes; 2.13" (5.4 cm) centers IP66 IP20 upward mount Ip 24 downward mount CE UL Listed File E194312 18 months
Color Flash Rate Incandescent LED 110 FPM 20 FPM Strobe 65 FPM 10 FPM(24 VAC/DC) 90 FPM 20 FPM (110/240 VAC) Horn Loudness Medium, 76-86 dB Operating Temperature -22 to 140F (-30 to 60C)
82
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Steps Direction 1 Select Module and Cap (1 required) TWS-BC TWS-BS 2 Select Mounting Base (1 required) TWS-BP1 TWS-BP2 TWS-KIT 24 VAC 24 VDC 110 VAC 24 VAC 24 VDC Select Lighting Modules (5 maximum) 110 VAC 24 VAC 24 VDC 110 VAC 24 VAC 24 VDC 110 VAC 24 VAC 24 VDC 110 VAC 24 VAC 24 VDC 110 VAC 4 Select Horn (1 maximum) 24 VAC 24 VDC 110 VAC 3
ALARMS & INDICATION

75 MM TOWER LIGHTS TWS SERIES
Part Number
Description
Bottom module and cap
Base with gasket Single wall-mount base Double wall-mount base Base and stem extension Color Continuous Incandescent TWS-F1G TWS-F1N TWS-F1A TWS-F2G TWS-F2N TWS-F2A TWS-F3G TWS-F3N TWS-F3A TWS-F4G TWS-F4N TWS-F4A TWS-F5G TWS-F5N TWS-F5A TWS-F6G TWS-F6N TWS-F6A Flashing Incandescent TWS-L1G TWS-L1N TWS-L1A TWS-L2G TWS-L2N TWS-L2A TWS-L3G TWS-L3N TWS-L3A TWS-L4G TWS-L4N TWS-L4A TWS-L5G TWS-L5N TWS-L5A TWS-L6G TWS-L6N TWS-L6A TWS-AG TWS-AN TWS-AA Continuous LED TWS-FL1G TWS-FL1N TWS-FL1A TWS-FL2G TWS-FL2N TWS-FL2A TWS-FL3G TWS-FL3N TWS-FL3A TWS-FL4G TWS-FL4N TWS-FL4A TWS-FL5G TWS-FL5N TWS-FL5A Flashing LED TWS-LL1G TWS-LL1N TWS-LL1A TWS-LL2G TWS-LL2N TWS-LL2A TWS-LL3G TWS-LL3N TWS-LL3A TWS-LL4G TWS-LL4N TWS-LL4A TWS-LL5G TWS-LL5N TWS-LL5A Strobe
ALARMS & INDICATION
Module Voltage Range
Part Number BLUE BLUE BLUE AMBER AMBER AMBER RED RED RED GREEN GREEN GREEN YELLOW YELLOW YELLOW CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR TWS-X1G TWS-X1N TWS-X1A TWS-X2G TWS-X2N TWS-X2A TWS-X3G TWS-X3N TWS-X3A TWS-X4G TWS-X4N TWS-X4A TWS-X5G TWS-X5N TWS-X5A TWS-X6G TWS-X6N TWS-X6A
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 TWS-BA15D-A TWS-BA15D-G TWS-BA15D-N TWS-LED1-A TWS-LED1-G TWS-LED1-N TWS-LED2-A TWS-LED2-G TWS-LED2-N TWS-LED3-A TWS-LED3-G TWS-LED3-N TWS-LED4-A TWS-LED4-G TWS-LED4-N TWS-LED5-A TWS-LED5-G TWS-LED5-N TWS-LRX2J
ACCESSORIES Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 110VAC Replacement IC Lamp 24 VAC Replacement IC Lamp 24 VDC Replacement IC Lamp 110 VAC Blue replacement LED 24 VAC Blue replacement LED 24 VDC Blue replacement LED 110 VAC Amber replacement LED 24 VAC Amber replacement LED 24 VDC Amber replacement LED 110 VAC Red replacement LED 24 VAC Red replacement LED 24 VDC Red replacement LED 110 VAC Green replacement LED 24 VAC Green replacement LED 24 VDC Green replacement LED 110 VAC Yellow replacement LED 24 VAC Yellow replacement LED 24 VDC Yellow replacement LED Universal Xenon replacement- requires solder connection
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
83
ALARMS & INDICATION

OPERATOR STATIONS ESB SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The ESB Series Operator Stations offer a highly visible method to shut down equipment, initiate alarms, or give a controller input during emergency conditions. Operation occurs with the breaking of a lens, and then pushing the red push-button inside. Both break-lens to release button and eld replacement lens are available.
FEATURES
ALARMS & INDICATION
Highly visible yellow/black background UL listed for Category NKCR, File #E352651 Various NEMA rated enclosures Red push-button operators 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contact included
ESB-M1F-BLR-BS
ESB-M3S-BLP-CS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Contact Rating A600 Q600 Contact Conguration 24 VAC, 120 VAC M4S M1F Enclosure Rating Approvals Weight M1S M2S,M1F M3S M4S Warranty 5.91"H x 5.91"D x 4.72"D (15 x 15 x 12 cm) 5.5"H x 5.5"W x 4"D (14 x 14 x 10.2 cm) NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 UL Listed le # E352651, NKCR, cUL 2.63 lb (1.19 kg) 2.55 lb (1.16 kg) 2.83 lb (1.28 kg) 3.95 lb (1.79 kg) 1 year
10A, 600 VAC 2.5A, 600 VDC 4 Maintained or 6 Momentary maximum Mechanical Life Contact 10 million operations Contact Type Self-cleaning silver contacts Contact Resistance <25 m Operating Temperature -13 to 158F (-25 to 70C) Storage Temperature -22 to 185F (-30 to 85C) Dimensions M1S, M2S, M3S 4"H x 4" W x 4"D (10.2 x 10.2 x 10.2 cm)
WIRING
TOP
1NO-1NC Note: Typical contact connection (4 momentary or 6 maintained maximum)
84
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Model ESB Description Enclosure M1S M3S M2S M4S M1F Button Style BLR BLP Legend BS CS FN HS PO RP SD SO ST VP VT XX* ESB
ALARMS & INDICATION

OPERATOR STATIONS ESB SERIES
Break-Lens Operator Station (UL NKCR) NEMA 1 Metal enclosure, surface mount
ALARMS & INDICATION
NEMA 3R Metal enclosure, surface mount NEMA 12,13 Metal enclosure, surface mount NEMA 4,12 Metal Enclosure, surface mount NEMA 1 Metal enclosure, ush mount Break Lens to Release Button model with red momentary push button Break Lens - Push Button model maintained operator Boiler Shut-down Chiller Stop Exhaust Fan HVAC Shut-down Power Off Refrigerant Purge Shut Down Shut Off Stop Ventilation Stop Ventilation Start Custom Legend *18 character max, no color changes, no font changes, no company logos. Example: ESB-M1S-BLP-CS Break-Lens Operator Station, NEMA 1 metal enclosure, surface mount, maintained Break Lens Push Button operator, labeled as Chiller Stop
M1S
BLP
CS
ES-LENS ES-NC ES-NO
ACCESSORIES PAGE Replacment Lens for ESB series Operator Stations Normally Closed Contact Block for Non-illuminated ESM, ESB, and ESP Emergency Operator Stations 98 Normally Open Contact Block for Non-illuminated ESM, ESB, and ESP Operator Stations 98
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
85
ALARMS & INDICATION

EMERGENCY OPERATOR STATIONS ESM SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The E-Stop ESM Series Emergency Operator Stations offer a highly visible method to shut down equipment, initiate alarms, or give a controller input during emergency conditions. Operation is with the push of a red 40mm mushroom-head push-button. The button may be reset with a pull or twist of the mushroom head, depending on the button style.
FEATURES
ESM-M1S-PP0-BS
ALARMS & INDICATION
Highly visible yellow/black background UL listed for Category NISD Emergency Stop Devices, File #E348889 Various NEMA rated enclosures 40mm Red Mushroom Operators 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contact included
ESM-NXS-PP0-VT
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Contact Rating A600 Q600 Contact Conguration 24 VAC, 120 VAC M3S M1F Enclosure Rating Approvals Weight M1S NXS M2S SXS M3S M1F Warranty 4"H x 4" W x 4"D (10.2 x 10.2 x 10.2 cm) 5.5"H x 5.5"W x 3"D (14 x 14 x 7.6 cm) NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 availiable UL Listed NISD File# E348889, CSA, NEMA 1.84 lb (0.84 kg) 1.93 lb (0.88 kg) 2.30 lb (1.04 kg) 1.90 lb (0.86 kg) 2.95 lb (1.34 kg) 2.39 lb (1.03 kg) 1 year
10A, 600 VAC 2.5A, 600 VDC 4 Maintained or 6 Momentary maximum Mechanical Life Contact 10 million operations Self-cleaning silver contacts Contact Type Contact Resistance <25 m Operating Temperature -13 to 158F (-25 to 70C) Storage Temperature -22 to 185F(-30 to 85C) Dimensions 4"H x 4"DW x 3"D M1S, M2S (10.2 x 10.2 x 7.6 cm) 4.45"H x 2.87" W x 3.11"D NXS (10.2 x 7.6 x 7.9 cm) SXS 3.5"H x 3.25"W x 2.75"D (8.9 x 8.3 x 7.1 cm)
WIRING
PTI24 PP0, PT0, PK
TOP
4
1 NO-1NC Note: Typical contact connection
1NO-1NC Note: Typical contact connection (4 momentary or 6 maintained maximum) March 2014 March 2014
86
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Model ESM Description Enclosure M1S NXS M2S SXS M3S M1F Button Style PP0 PT0 PTL24* PK0 ESM
ALARMS & INDICATION

EMERGENCY OPERATOR STATIONS ESM SERIES
Maintained Emergency Operator Station (UL NISD) NEMA 1 Metal enclosure, surface mount NEMA 4X,12 Non-metal enclosure, surface mount NEMA 12,13 Metal enclosure, surface mount NEMA 4X Stainless steel enclosure, surface mount NEMA 3R Metal enclosure, surface mount NEMA 1 Metal enclosure, ush mount
ALARMS & INDICATION
Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push-pull) Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push-twist) Illuminated 24V red maintained 40mm mushroom (push-twist, lamp included) Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push- key release) Legend BS CS FN HS PO RP SD SO ST VP VT XX** Emergency - Boiler Shut-down Emergency - Chiller Stop Emergency - Exhaust Fan Emergency- HVAC Shut-down Emergency - Power Off Emergency - Refrigerant Purge Emergency - Shut Down Emergency - Shut Off Emergency - Stop Emergency - Ventilation Stop Emergency - Ventilation Start Custom Legend *Can only be used with M1S or M1F enclosure **18 character max, no color changes, no font changes, no company logos.
M1S
PP0
CS
Example: ESM-M1S-PP0-CS Maintained Emergency Operator Station, NEMA1 metal enclosure, surface mount, Red maintained 40mm push-pull mushroom, labeled as Chiller Stop
ES-KEY ES-NC ES-NO
ACCESSORIES Replacement Key for PK0 option, ESM and ESP series Normally Closed Contact Block for Non-illuminated ESM, ESB, and ESP Emergency Operator Stations Normally Open Contact Block for Non-illuminated ESM, ESB, and ESP Emergency Operator Stations
PAGE 87,89 85,87,89 85,87,89
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
87
ALARMS & INDICATION

EMERGENCY OPERATOR STATIONS ESP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The E-Stop ESP Series Emergency Operator Stations offer a highly visible method to shut down equipment, initiate alarms, or give a controller input during emergency conditions. The ESP Series consists of a stainless steel plate with a 40mm mushroom head push-button. The button may be reset with a pull or twist of the mushroom head, depending on the button style.
FEATURES
ALARMS & INDICATION
Stainless steel plate mounted Highly visible yellow/black background UL listed for Category NISD Emergency Stop Devices, File #E348889 40mm Red Mushroom Operators 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contact included
ESP-PK0-SO
ESP-PP0-HS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Contact Rating A600 Q600 Contact Conguration 24 VAC, 120 VAC Storage Temperature Dimensions Enclosure Rating Approvals Weight Warranty -22 to 185F (-30 to 85C) 4.5"H x 2.75"W x 0.63"D (11.4 x 7 x 1.6 cm) NEMA 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 UL Listed NISD File# E348889 0.58 lb (0.26kg) 1 year
10A, 600 VAC 2.5A, 600 VDC 4 Maintained or 6 Momentary maximum Contact 10 million operations Mechanical Life Self-cleaning silver contacts Contact Type Contact Resistance <25 milli ohms Operating Temperature -13 to 158F (-25 to 70C)
WIRING
PTI24 PP0, PT0, PK
TOP
4
1 NO-1NC Note: Typical contact connection
1NO-1NC Note: Typical contact connection (4 momentary or 6 maintained maximum) March 2014 March 2014
88
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Model ESP Description Button Style PP0 PT0 PTL24 PK0 Legend BS CS FN HS PO RP SD SO ST VP VT XX* ESP
ALARMS & INDICATION

EMERGENCY OPERATOR STATIONS ESP SERIES
Plate-mounted Emergency Operator Station (UL NISD) Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push-pull) Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push-twist) Illuminated 24V Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push-twist, lamp included) Red maintained 40mm mushroom (push- key release)
ALARMS & INDICATION
Emergency - Boiler Shut-down Emergency - Chiller Stop Emergency - Exhaust Fan Emergency- HVAC Shut-down Emergency - Power Off Emergency - Refrigerant Purge Emergency - Shut Down Emergency - Shut Off Emergency - Stop Emergency - Ventilation Stop Emergency - Ventilation Start Custom Legend *18 character max, no color changes, no font changes, no company logos.
PP0
CS
Example: ESP-PP0-CS Plate mounted Emergency Operator Station. Red Maintained Push-Pull button labeled as Chiller Stop.
ES-KEY ES-NC ES-NO
ACCESSORIES PAGE Replacement Key for PK0 option, ESM and ESP series 98 Normally Closed Contact Block for Non-illuminated ESM, ESB, and ESP Emergency Operator Stations 98 Normally Open Contact Block for Non-illuminated ESM, ESB, and ESP Emergency Operator Stations 98
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
89
ALARMS & INDICATION

OPERATOR STATIONS ST120 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
ST120 Series Operator Stations offers a means of disconnect to shut down equipment and/or initiate alarms during emergency conditions. Contacts are rated 600V @ 10A AC and 2.5A DC. All models carry a one-year warranty. UL le is E158147.
ALARMS & INDICATION
ST120-FN1-BP2-RPG
ST120-SN4XNM-PO
ST120SL-RP2-VS
ST120-SN3R-BP2-CS
ST120SL-N1-BS
PUSH-BUTTON OPERATION MODEL DESCRIPTION ST120SL Complete push-pull emergency operator station (contacts not included) Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled Pull to Reset NEMA 4X and 12 nonmetallic surface-mount box F Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled Pull to Reset NEMA 4 and 12 all-metal flush-mount box FN1 Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled Pull to Reset NEMA 1 all-metal flush-mount box N1 Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled Pull to Reset NEMA 1 all-metal surface-mount box RP1 Red Raised Lid - Push Button padlockable solid lid over momentary flush round push button RP2 Red Raised Lid - Push Button padlockable solid lid over maintained flush round push button LEGENDS BS EMERGENCY - BOILER SHUT-DOWN CS EMERGENCY - CHILLER STOP FAN EMERGENCY - EXHAUST FAN HS EMERGENCY - HVAC SHUT-DOWN PO EMERGENCY - POWER OFF RPG EMERGENCY - REFRIGERANT PURGE SD EMERGENCY - SHUT DOWN SO EMERGENCY - SHUT OFF ST EMERGENCY - STOP VS EMERGENCY - VENTILATION STOP VSTART EMERGENCY - VENTILATION START BREAK-LENS OPERATION MODEL ST120 DESCRIPTION Complete break-lens emergency operator station (spare lens included, contacts not included) FN1 FN4 SN1 SN3R SN4 SN4XNM NEMA 1 all-metal flush-mount box NEMA 4 and 12 all-metal flush-mount box NEMA 1 all-metal surface-mount box NEMA 3R rainproof all-metal surface-mount box NEMA 4 and 12 all-metal surface-mount box NEMA 4X non-metalic surface-mount box Red Break Lens to Release Button model (use normally closed contact to close circuit when button releases) BP1 Red Break Lens - Push Button model, momentary operator BP2 Red Break Lens - Push Button model, maintained operator Break Lens - Operate Switch two-position selector switch, maintained both positions, short lever P1 P3 Break Lens - Operate Switch three-position selector switch, maintained all positions, short lever LEGENDS - See above
PILCLHCOV1 PILCLHCOV5 PILENS PILNCCB PILNOCB
ACCESSORIES Clear hinged cover for push-pull model and ST120SN4XNM Clear hinged cover for break-lens model except ST120SN4XNM Replacement lens for break-lens model N.C. stackable contact block for MST1 stations N.O. stackable contact block for MST1 Stations
PAGE 90,92 90-92 90-92
Notes: Six contact blocks max (2 rows of 3) may be used on each break glass operator station and the -FN1 and -N1 modesl of push-button operation stations. The - model and F model push-button stations can only take three contact blocks (1 row of 3). All units use normally open contacts to close circuit or normally closed to open circuit (except "Break Glass of Release Button" model).
90
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!

WPS MP VSTART
ALARMS & INDICATION

PLATE MOUNTED OPERATOR STATIONS WPS SERIES
The WPS Series Plate-mounted Operator Stations mount on a single-gang wall box or a standard handy box and come with brushed stainless steel plate. They are rated NEMA 1 for indoor applications. Many options are available for the WPS Series in addition to the models shown on our catalog page.

2
Mounted on brushed stainless steel wall plate Order contacts separately for wiring exibility Hinged lockout lids options Special congurations and labeling are available Single-gang wall or handy box mounting Contacts rated 600V at 10A AC and 2.5A DC One-year warranty UL File E158147
WPS-MP-BS-CLM
ALARMS & INDICATION
WPS-KR-VS
WPS-BR-PO
WPS-RP2-HS
WPS-MO-PO-DLM
MODEL DESCRIPTION WPS Wall plate, box mounted emergency operator station (order contacts separately) BUTTON STYLE MO Red momentary 40 mm mushroom MP Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-pull) labeled Pull to Reset TW Red maintained 40 mm mushroom (push-turn to reset) labeled Turn to Reset KR Red maintained key release 40 mm mushroom with two keys, key required to reset only RP1 Red Raise Lid - Push Button padlockable solid lid over momentary ush round push button RP2 Red Raise Lid - Push Button padlockable solid lid over maintained ush round push button CP1 Red Raise Lid - Push Button padlockable clear lid over momentary ush round push button CP2 Red Raise Lid - Push Button padlockable clear lid over maintained ush round push button BR Break Lens model with hammer (NC/NO contacts included) LEGENDS CS EMERGENCY - CHILLER STOP PO EMERGENCY - POWER OFF BS EMERGENCY - BOILER SHUT-DOWN HS EMERGENCY - HVAC SHUT-DOWN VS EMERGENCY - VENTILATION STOP ST EMERGENCY - STOP SD EMERGENCY - SHUT-DOWN VSTART EMERGENCY - VENTILATION START SO EMERGENCY - SHUT-OFF CLM Clearhinged lockout lid for use with MO, MP, TW, KR 40mm mushroom button DLM Hinged lockout lid for use with MO 40mm mushroom button. Requires lid to be lifted in order to automatically release/extend mushroom device. Example: WPS-MP-VSTART Wall plate operator station red maintained push-pull button labeled Ventilation Start
PILCLM PILNCCB PILNOCB PILRPKEY PILBRLENS Note:
RELATED PRODUCTS Clear cover for MO, MP, TW, KR stations N.C. stackable contact block N.O. stackable contact block Replacement key for WPS-KR series, specify model and key number when ordering Replacement lenses for WPSBR models only (3/pkg) Three contact blocks can be used for a depth of 1-5/8" (42 mm). Three more can be added for a depth of 2-5/8" (67 mm).
PAGE 103 103
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
91
ALARMS & INDICATION

POWER CONTROL STATIONS MNST AND MST1 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MNST and MST1 Series Power Control Stations offer two push-button control for a variety of HVAC and other equipment. It comes with two round push-buttons (one green and one red) and one set of normally open and normally closed contacts.
FEATURES
Models with non-metallic NEMA 4X & 12 enclosures for
ALARMS & INDICATION
outdoor and wet locations Models with metal NEMA 1 enclosures for indoor and dry locations Bold, reective legends on white enamel aluminum face plate Two maintained/interlocked push buttons on MNST models Two momentary/non-interlocked ormomentary/ noninterloced, push buttons on MST1 models UL listed, File E158147
MNSTN1SS with PILCLHCOV1 COVER
MNSTLGSS
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating Contact Conguration Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Conduit Connection Knockouts in top, bottom & back for 1/2" MNSTxxN1x/MST1xxN1x (1.27 cm) and 3/4" conduit Mounting MNSTx/MST1x Surface mount, external mounting tabs top and bottom MNSTxxN1x/MST1xxN1x Surface mount, two mounting holes in the back 600V, 10A continuous @120 VAC, 0.5A continuous @24 VDC 1NC, 1 NO -13 to 158F (-25 to 70C) -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Approvals Enclosure Rating MNSTx/MST1x MNSTxxN1x/MST1xxN1x Dimensions MNSTx/MST1x UL Listed le #E158147, cUL Listed NEMA 4X/4/12/3/1, Nonmetallic backbox NEMA 1, Metal backbox
4"W x 4"H x 2.4"D (10.16 x 10.16 x 6.09 cm) MNSTxxN1x/MST1xxN1x 4"W x 4"H x 3"D (10.16 x 10.16 x 7.62 cm) Weight MNSTx/MST1x 1 lb (0.45 kg) MNSTxxN1x/MST1xxN1x 2.5 lbs (1.13 kg) Warranty 1 year
Model Description MNST Power control stations, two maintained/interlocked pushbuttons, one set of NO/NC specialty contact blocks included MST1 Power control stations, two momentary/non-interlocked pushbuttons, one set of NO/NC contact blocks included (BLANK) Default main legend "POWER CONTROL SWITCH" LB Main legend "BOILER" LC Main legend "CHILLER" LE Main legend "EXHAUST FAN" LF Main legend "FUEL" LG Main legend "GENERATOR" LH Main legend "HVAC" LP Main legend "POWER" LV Main legend "VENTILATION" (BLANK) NEMA 4X/4/12/3 non-metallic grey surface-mount box for outdoor or indoor/wet locations N1 NEMA 1 metal grey surface-mount box for indoor/dry locations SS "START" and "STOP" pushbuttons OO "ON" and "OFF" pushbuttons CI Custom inscriptions on pushbuttons (customer to provide inscription details) MNST LB N1 SS Example: MNSTLBN1SS Boiler control station in NEMA 1 metal housing with start and stop pushbuttons
ACCESSORIES PILCLHCOV1 Clear hinged cover for push-pull model and ST120SN4XNM ACCESSORIES specialty closed contact block for MNST stations only PILNCCB PILNCMN N.C.Additional stackable contactnormally block for MST1 stations Additional specialty normally open contact block for MNST stations only PILNCMN PILNOMN Additional specialty Normally Closed contact block for MNST stations only PILCLHCOV1 Clear hinged cover, tamperproof PILNOCB PILNCCB N.O.N.C. stackable contact block for stackable contact block forMST1 MST1 Stations stations N.O. stackable contact block Open for MST1 stations PILNOMN PILNOCB Additional specialty Normally contact block for MNST stations only
PAGE 90,92 90-92 90-92
92
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
0-5 or 0-10 VDC input signal 3-1/2 digit, easy to read LCD display (VPI-1, VPI-4) 4-1/2 digit, easy to read LCD display (VPI-3) Available in black amber, green and red digits Snap-in panel mounting NEMA 4 enclosure available Precalibrated before shipping Positive-to-negative indication Jumper selectable engineering unit display of F, C, PSI, %
ALARMS & INDICATION

3-1/2 DIGIT LCD PANEL DISPLAY VPI SERIES
The VPI Series is a voltage (0-5V, 0-10V) input 24 VDC powered, 3-1/2 digit display. The VPI Series uses a voltage signal of 0-5 or 0-10 VDC that can be scaled to a span of 2000 digits within a range of -1999 to 1999. This display also features jumper selectable, built-in engineering units. The VPI-4 offers large, easy to read 1" (2.54 cm) digits. FEATURES
VPI-4 VPI-1-C-WMB VPI-1-C-G (typical panel mount)
ALARMS & INDICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Black Color Input Signal Input Impedance Accuracy Digit Count VPI-1, VPI-4 VPI-3 Digit Size VPI-1, VPI-3C VPI-4 Digit Span (VPI-3) Decimal Point (VPI-3) Display Color Zero Range (VPI-3) Operating Humidity Operating Temperature Panel Clearance Cutout Requirement VPI-1C VPI-4 Dimensions VPI-1C, VPI-3C VPI-4 E (NEMA4X) WMB Enclosure Rating Approvals Weight Warranty 24 VDC @ 10 mA 24 VDC @ 35 mA 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC 400 k 0.1% of scale plus one digit 3-1/2 digits 4-1/2 digits 0.5" (1.27 cm) 1.0" (2.54 cm) 2000 digits (20000 digits) Three positions or none, Four positions or none Black, amber, green, red -1999 to 1999, -19999 to 19999 95% non-condensing 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 1.0" (5.08 cm) 1.00"H x 2.40"W (2.54 x 6.10 cm) 1.77"H x 3.62"W (4.5 x 9.2 cm) 1.10"H x 2.51"W (2.82 x 6.38 cm) 1.89"H x 3.62"W (4.8 x 9.6 cm) 6.0"H x 6.0"W x 3"D (15.2 x 15.2 x 7.6 cm) 2.12"H x 3.12"W x 1.75"D (5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm) NEMA 1, NEMA 4X RoHS 4 oz (113g) 1 year
VPI-1-C-R-E APPLICATION Temperature Humidity Pressure
VPI-1-C-R-E-DBL
Gallons per minute Voltage Kilowatt demand
WIRING
Power supply 24 VDC
Voltage input
Power connection only required for amber, green, or red display.
+ PWR
+ SIG
+ BL
5V 10V OFFSET
5V Span pot 10V Span pot Offset (ZERO) pot
* PWR- and SIGmust be externally connected together
VPI
Displays are custom calibrated at no charge and require specication of input scale (VDC), range, engineering units, and decimal point placement.
MODEL VPI-4 VPI-1C VPI-3C DESCRIPTION 3-1/2 digit panel display*, 1'' (2.54 cm) digits 3-1/2 digit panel display*, 0.5'' (1.27 cm) digits 4-1/2 digit panel display*, 0.5'' (1.27 cm) digits 3-1/2 digit display with black digits A 3-1/2 digit display with amber digits G 3-1/2 digit display with green digits R 3-1/2 digit display with red digits No enclosure E LCD panel display with NEMA 4X enclosure (VPI-1C and VPI-3C only) WMB LCD panel display with small enclosure (VPI-1C and VPI-3C only) E-DBL Two LCD panel displays in one NEMA 4X enclosure (VPI-1C and VPI-3C only) A E-DBL Example: VPI-1C-A-E-DBL Two amber 3-1/2 digit displays mounted in a single enclosure
VPI-1C
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 GP-3420 GP-3430
RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting goof plate, 3.40" x 2.00" (8.6 x 5.1 cm) LPI-1C, LPI-3C, VPI-1C mounting goof plate, 3.40" x 3.00" (8.6 x 7.6 cm)
PAGE 995 93,97-99 93,97-99
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
93
ALARMS & INDICATION

PANELPILOT SMART GRAPHICAL DISPLAY SGD-24, -28
DESCRIPTION
The PanelPilot Smart Graphics Display is a congurable panel-mount volt meter with selectable graph colors, input signal scales, and meter display types. It can be used to display any proportional control or transmitter signal represented by a voltage span within 0 to 40 VDC. It is easily and quickly eld-congured using simple software, via a USB cable, or is available precongured from Kele. It has a customizable splash screen and comes in a 2.4" or 2.8" screen size. A NEMA 4X enclosure is also available which can house one or two displays, preassembled at Kele or separately available for eld installation.
ALARMS & INDICATION
SGD-28-M-C-E
SGD-28-M
FEATURES
2.4" or 2.8" color TFT screen for high visibility Free PanelPilot software saves money Simple USB cable connection for quick setup 6 standard meter types, selectable colors, scales, and labels for display exibility Splash screen accepts common picture les and allows customization Snap-in panel mount for fast installation NEMA 4X enclosure option with single or double display mounting
APPLICATION
Temperature Humidity Pressure Air quality Valve or damper position Air or water ow Water level Light level Motor speed Any 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC transmitter signal
METER CHOICES
Digital
Analog
Analog & Digital
Bar Graph
Bar Graph Meter
Digital & Bar Graph Meter
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Input Signal Input Impedance Wire Type Accuracy Display Type SGD-24 4 to 30 VDC @ 35 mA 0/2-10 VDC, 4-20mA (with resistor) 0-40 VDC max 110 mA @ 5 VDC Screw terminals, 16 to 26 AWG 0.05% typical, 0.1% maximum SGD-28 Dimensions SGD-24 (3 mm) maximum panel thickness 2.15"H x 3.43"W (5.45 x 8.70 cm) 0.11" (3 mm) maximum panel thickness
2.4 inch diagonal 320 x 240 pixels, 16-bit color SGD-28 2.8 inch diagonal 320 x 240 pixels, 16-bit color Interface Compatible with Windows XP, 2000, Vista, Windows 7, mini USB cable connection Sample Intervals 3 samples per second Operating Temperature 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) Panel Cutout SGD-24 1.81"H x 2.91"W (4.60 x 7.40 cm) 0.11"
1.9"H x 3.0"W x 0.7"D (4.8 x 7.6 x 1.8 cm) SGD-28 2.2"H x 3.5"W x 0.8"D (5.7 x 8.9 x 1.9 cm) NEMA 4X enclosure 6.0"H x 6.0"W x 3.0"D (15.2 x 15.2 x 7.6 cm) Enclosure Options NEMA 1 standard NEMA 4X optional Additional Specications Meter choices- Bar graph, analog needle, digital readout, combinations Approvals CE, RoHS Weight SGD-24 0.11 lb (0.05 kg) SGD-28 0.14 lb (0.06 kg) Warranty 1 year
94
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
WIRING
*Order Separately BAS Input 4-20 mA
ALARMS & INDICATION

PANELPILOT SMART GRAPHICAL DISPLAY SGD-24, -28
++ - +
1 2 3 4
1-5 V
1 = IN2 Input 2 (40 VDC max) (not used) 2 = IN1 Input 1 (40 VDC max) 3 = OV Common 4 = v+ Power (4-30 VDC)
* 250
4-20 mA Loop-powered Transmitter
*Meter must be configured for 1-5 V input for 4-20 mA input signal, when using the 250 resistor. If using a 500 resistor, configure the meter for 2-10 V.
24 VDC Power Supply
*24 VDC POWER SUPPLY MUST BE FLOATING (NOT GROUNDED TO BAS COMMON)
ALARMS & INDICATION
4-20 mA Wiring
++ - +
1 2 3 4
BAS Input 0-10V
- +
24 VDC Power Supply
+ SIG + PWR
0-10 VDC Transmitter
0-10 VDC Wiring
MODEL SGD-24-M SGD-24-M-C SGD-24-M-C-E SGD-24-M-C-XK SGD-24-M-C-XK-E SGD-24-M-CEDBL SGD-24-MCXKEDBL SGD-28-M SGD-28-M-C SGD-28-M-C-E SGD-28-M-C-XK SGD-28-M-C-XK-E SGD-28-M-CEDBL SGD-28-MCXKEDBL DESCRIPTION Smart Graphics Display, 2.4 inch Smart Graphics Display, 2.4 inch, custom calibrated Smart Graphics Display, 2.4 inch, calibrated, enclosure Smart Display, 2.4 inch, calibrated, custom graphic Smart Display, 2.4 inch, calibrated, custom graphic, enclosure Smart Display, 2.4 inch, calibrated, enclosure, double Smart Display, 2.4 inch, calibrated, custom graphic, enclosure, double Smart Graphics Display, 2.8 inch Smart Graphics Display, 2.8 inch, custom calibrated Smart Graphics Display, 2.8 inch, calibrated, enclosure Smart Display, 2.8 inch, calibrated, custom graphic Smart Display, 2.8 inch, calibrated, custom graphic, enclosure Smart Display, 2.8 inch, calibrated, enclosure, double Smart Display, 2.8 inch, calibrated, custom graphic, enclosure, double
Note: Custom Calibrated Panels, require completion of the panel conguration worksheet. Worksheet available on Kele website www.kele.com
SFP66-258E SFP66-258F SFP66-258C SFP66-258D USB-A-MF P6063C-P258 250R-3-1
ACCESSORIES Panel for SGD-24, single Panel for SGD-24, double Panel for SGD-28, single Panel for SGD-28, double USB Cable Type A TO Mini B 6x6x3 NEMA4X Encl Clear Hinge Cover w/ SOPK Kit 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% Resistor Long Leads RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT

DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
95
ALARMS & INDICATION

KELE BIG DISPLAY READOUT, 3-1/2 DIGIT LED, RED/BLUE/GREEN BDR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BDR Big Display Readout has large 2.3" size LED digits. It provides 3-1/2 digits and comes in three bright LED colors: red, green or blue. The BDR has a selectable decimal point position and accommodates negative sign readouts. The readouts are in linear proportion to the 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 0-5VDC signal inputs or a voltage monitor input from 0-20VDC. These displays are easy to eld calibrate with non-interactive zero and span pots as well as free pre-calibration service from Kele at time of order.
BDR-G
FEATURES
ALARMS & INDICATION
Large 2.3" (5.8 cm) digital display LED colors in red, green or blue 3-1/2 digit with negative signal as needed Standard signal inputs: 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 0-5 VDC Wall, ceiling or panel mount Non-interactive zero and span pots Pre-calibration
BDR-B
BDR-R
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Input Current Input Voltage DC Input Monitor Accuracy Digit Span Decimal Point Display Color Display Size Display Type Range Calibration Operating Humidity Operating Temperature Cutout Requirement Dimensions Enclosure Options Mounting Approvals Weight Warranty 90-240 VAC, 12 VA / 10.5 - 30 VAC/VDC 6VA 4-20 mA, 300 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 1 M DC power (no offset, 10 M 0-200 mVDC, 0-2 VDC, 0-20 VDC 1% full scale plus 1 count 3-1/2 digit Off, DP1, DP2, DP3 (1999, 199.9, 19.99, 1.999) Red, green, blue 2.3" (5.8 cm) Seven-segment LED -1999 to 1999 Zero and span, non-interactive 5-95% RH non-condensing 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) 4.0"H x 10.4"W x 2.0"D (10.0 x 26.4 x 5.0 cm) 4.2"H x 10.6"W x 2.2"D (10.6 x 27.0 x 5.5 cm) NEMA 1, aluminum and plastic Panel: Steel U-bracket Wall/ceiling: Steel swivel bracket RoHS 2.8 lb (1.3 kg) 1 year
Mounting Brackets included
WIRING
Calibration pots (use varies with source; see installation manual)
VPI DCV LPI 5V 10V SPAN ZERO SPAN ZERO SPAN SPAN
+
LPI VPI DCV
LPI OFFSET
DP1 DP2 DP3 DECIMAL
200mV
SPAN OR ZERO ADJ. VPI RANGES 200mV DCV 20V 2V 10V 5V
FUNCTION
LPI = Current signal VPI = Voltage signal DCV = Voltage monitor DP = Decimal point placement LPI OFFSET = Negative () sign Choice for V or I signal *LPI function disables RANGES switch
DCV IN IN+
VPI SIG SIG+
LPI SIG SIG+
AC POWER 90V-250V AC AC
GND
BDR-999-[R/G/B]-24 10.5 to 30 VAC/VDC
INPUT
Power supply monitor 0-(0.2, 2, or 20) VDC Voltage signal in 0-5 or 0-10 VDC Current signal in 4-20 mA
Displays are custom calibrated at no charge and require specication of input scale (mA, VDC), range, engineering units, and decimal point placement.
MODEL BDR-999-R-24 BDR-999-G-24 BDR-999-B-24 BDR-999-R-120 BDR-999-G-120 BDR-999-B-120
DESCRIPTION Red LED 3-1/2 digit display, 2.3" (5.8 cm) high 24 VAC/VDC Green LED 3-1/2 digit display, 2.3" (5.8 cm) high 24 VAC/VDC Blue LED 3-1/2 digit display, 2.3" (5.8 cm) high 24 VAC/VDC Red LED 3-1/2 digit display, 2.3" (5.8 cm) high 120 VAC Green LED 3-1/2 digit display, 2.3" (5.8 cm) high 120 VAC Blue LED 3-1/2 digit display, 2.3" (5.8 cm) high 120 VAC
RELATED PRODUCTS DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
96
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION APPLICATION
Temperature Humidity Pressure Differential or static pressure Kilowatt demand
ALARMS & INDICATION

3-1/2 DIGIT LCD PANEL DISPLAY LPI-1C
Model LPI-1C is a loop-powered indicator featuring a large 3-1/2 digit LCD display with black digits. The Model LPI-1C displays engineering units of F, C, PSI, %, or no engineering units if desired. It is directly powered by the 4-20 mA signal and scaled to specications. FEATURES Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale 3-1/2 digit LCD display Snap-in panel mounting Easy-to-read digits NEMA 4X enclosure available Precalibrated for desired range Negative-to-positive indication Jumper-selectable engineering unit display
LPI-1C-WMB
LPI-1C (typical panel mount)
ALARMS & INDICATION
LPI-1C-E
LPI-1C-E-DBL
SPECIFICATIONS
4-20 mA loop-powered Input Signal 300 nominal @ 24 VDC Input Impedance Accuracy 0.1% of scale Digit Size 0.5" (1.27 cm) Three positions or none (1.0.0.0) Decimal Point Black Display Color -1999 to 1999 Range Operating Humidity 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 1.97" (5.00 cm) Panel Clearance 1.00" H x 2.40" W (2.54 x 6.10 cm) Cutout Requirement Dimensions Display 1.11" H x 2.51" W (2.82 x 6.38 cm) 6.0"H x 6.0"W x 3.0"D E (NEMA 4X) (15.2 x 15.2 x 7.62 cm) 2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D WMB (5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm) Approvals RoHS Weight 0.14 lb (0.06 kg) (display only) Warranty 1 year
Gallons per minute Voltage Current Many other 4-20 mA applications
WIRING
Power supply
+ + -
Sensor/ transmitter
4-20 mA
BAS input or other + 4-20 mA load

-
Connect the LPI-1C indicator in series with the 4-20 mA current loop to be measured.
+
S P A N
Z E R O
SIG Board unit
Factory calibrated (no field calibration needed)
Connector pins
F C PSI %
Engineering unit jumpers Unit selected displays to the right of display reading.
Back of display unit
MODEL LPI-1C DESCRIPTION 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with black digits* No enclosure E 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with NEMA 4X enclosure WMB 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with small enclosure E-DBL Two 3-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in one NEMA 4X enclosure E-DBL Example: LPI-1C-E-DBL Two LPI-1C displays mounted in a single enclosure
Displays are custom calibrated at no charge and require specication of input scale (mA), range, engineering units, and decimal point placement.
LPI-1C
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 GP-3420 GP-3430
PAGE 93,97-99 93,97-99
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
97
ALARMS & INDICATION
NEW!
2
SPECIFICATIONS
ALARMS & INDICATION

3-1/2 DIGIT LCD AMBER / GREEN / RED PANEL DISPLAY LPI-1C-A, LPI-1C-G, LPI-1C-R
DESCRIPTION Models LPI-1CA, G, and R are 4-20 mA, 24 VDC-powered, brightly lit 3-1/2 digit color LCD displays, available with amber, green, or red digits. Models LPI-1CA, G, and R also feature jumper-selectable built-in engineering units of F, C, PSI, %, or no units. The same 24 VDC power supply can be used to provide power to the 4-20 mA loop and the display. FEATURES Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale Bright 3-1/2 digit LCD display Available in amber, green, and red Snap-in panel mounting Easy-to-read digits NEMA 4X enclosure available Precalibrated for desired range Negative-to-positive indication Jumper selectable engineering unit display APPLICATION Temperature Humidity Pressure
LPI-1C-G-WMB
LPI-1C-G (typical panel mount)
Supply Voltage 24 VDC @ 35 mA Input Signal 4-20 mA loop powered Input Impedance 300 nominal @ 24 VDC Accuracy 0.1% of scale Digit Size 0.5" (1.27 cm) Decimal Point Three positions or none (1.0.0.0) Display Color Amber Display Size 0.5" (1.27 cm) Range -1999 to 1999 Operating Humidity 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Panel Clearance 1.97" (5.00 cm) Cutout Requirement 1.00"H x 2.40"W (2.54 x 6.10 cm) Dimensions Display 1.11"H x 2.51"W (2.82 x 6.38 cm) E (NEMA 4x) 6.0"H x 6.0"W x 3.0"D (15.2 x 15.2 x 7.62 cm) WMB 2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D (5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm) DBL 6.0"H x 6.0"W x 3.0"D (15.2 x 15.2 x 7.62 cm) Approvals RoHS Weight 0.14 lb (0.06 kg) (Display only) Warranty 1 year
LPI-1C-R-E LPI-1C-R-E-DBL Differential or static pressure Kilowatt demand Gallons per minute Voltage Current Many other 4-20 mA applications
WIRING
Power supply 24 VDC
+ Sensor/ transmitter
+ 4-20 mA
- BAS input or +
other 4-20 mA load
+
SIG
S P A N
-+
B/L
Z E R O
Factory calibrated (no field calibration needed)
Board unit
Connector pins
F C PSI %
Back of display unit
MODEL LPI-1C-A LPI-1C-G LPI-1C-R DESCRIPTION 3-1/2 digit LCD with amber digits* 3-1/2 digit LCD with green digits* 3-1/2 digit LCD with red digits* No enclosure E 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with NEMA 4X enclosure WMB 3-1/2 digit LCD panel display with small enclosure E-DBL Two 3-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in one NEMA 4X enclosure E-DBL Example: LPI-1C-A-E-DBL Two amber 3-1/2 digit LCD displays mounted in single enclosure
LPI-1C-A
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 GP-3420 GP-3430
PAGE 93,97-99 93,97-99 March 2014 March 2014
98
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale Optional, bright 4-1/2 digit LCD colored display Available in black, amber, green, or red digits Snap-in panel mounting Easy-to-read digits NEMA 4X enclosure available Precalibrated for desired range Negative-to-positive indication Jumper-selectable engineering unit display
ALARMS & INDICATION
4-1/2 DIGIT BLACK / AMBER / GREEN / RED DISPLAY LPI-3C, LPI-3C-A, LPI-3C-G OR LPI-3C-R
Model LPI-3C is a 4-20 mA, brightly lit, 4-1/2 digit display. Along with standard black digits, amber, green, and red (powered by 24 VDC) are also available. The Model LPI-3C also features jumper-selectable built-in engineering units of F, C, PSI, %, or no units. For those units with colored digits, the same 24 VDC power supply can be used to provide power to the 4-20 mA loop and the display.
LPI-3C-A-WMB
LPI-3C (typical panel mount)
ALARMS & INDICATION
LPI-3C-G-E
APPLICATION
LPI-3C-R-E-DBL
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VDC @ 35 mA for colored digits Supply Voltage Loop-powered 4-20 mA signal Input Signal 300 nominal @ 24 VDC Input Impedance Accuracy 0.1% FS 0.5" (1.27 cm) LCD Digit Size Four positions or none (1.0.0.0.0) Decimal Point -19999 to +19999 Range Operating Humidity 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Panel Clearance 1.97" (5.00 cm) 1.00"H x 2.40"W (2.54 x 6.10 cm) Cutout Requirement Dimensions 1.11"H x 2.51"W (2.82 x 6.38 cm) Display 6.0"H x 6.0"W x 3.0"D E (NEMA 4X) (15.2 x 15.2 x 7.62 cm) WMB 2.12''H x 3.12''W x 1.75''D (5.4 x 7.94 x 4.45 cm) Approvals RoHS, Except: (LPI-3CA) Weight 0.14 lb (0.06 kg) (Display only) Warranty 1 year
Temperature Humidity Pressure Differential or static pressure Kilowatt demand Gallons per minute Voltage Current Many other 4-20 mA applications
WIRING
Power supply 24 VDC Sensor/ transmitter
4-20 mA
+ - + SPAN
BAS input or other 4-20 mA load Power connection only required for amber, green, or red display.
ZERO
SIG B/L
Board unit Factory calibrated (no field calibration required)

Connector pins
F C PSI %
Display unit
MODEL LPI-3C DESCRIPTION 4-1/2 digit LCD panel display* 4-1/2 digit display with black digits A 4-1/2 digit display with amber digits, (This unit not RoHS compliant) G 4-1/2 digit display with green digits R 4-1/2 digit display with red digits No enclosure E 4-1/2 digit LCD panel display with NEMA 4X enclosure WMB 4-1/2 digit LCD panel display with small enclosure E-DBL Two 4-1/2 digit LCD panel displays in a single NEMA 4X enclosure A E-DBL Example: LPI-3C-A-E-DBL Two amber 4-1/2 digit LCD displays mounted in a single enclosure.
LPI-3C
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 GP-3420 GP-3430
PAGE 93,97-99 93,97-99
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
99
ALARMS & INDICATION
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
ALARMS & INDICATION
KELE 3-1/2 DIGIT LARGE BLACK/RED/GREEN/AMBER PANEL DISPLAY LPI-4
The Model LPI-4 loop-powered indicator features a large 1" (2.54 cm) 3-1/2 digit display. It is designed to display any 4-20 mA signal in desired scale. The Model LPI-4 is powered directly from the 4-20 mA signal loop, so there is no need for a power supply for the black digit model. It is also available in a 24 VDC powered version with red, green, or amber digits.
LPI-4
FEATURES

Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale 3-1/2 digit LCD display Large, easy-to-read digits Available in either black, red, green, or amber digits Precalibrated for desired range Snap-in panel mount with retainer Negative range indicator Includes weather-resistant seal Optional jumper-selectable display units F, C, %, PSI
LPI-4G
LPI-4R
APPLICATION
Temperature Voltage/current Humidity Pressure Killowatt demand Gallons per minute
LPI-4A
SPECIFICATIONS
Black loop powered Red/Green/ Amber 24 VDC @ 35 mA 4-20 mA Input Signal Input Impedance 300 0.05% of scale plus one digit Accuracy Digit Count 3-1/2 digits 1" (2.54 cm) Digit Size Three positions or none (1.0.0.0) Decimal Point Range -1999 to 1999 Operating Humidity 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Cutout Requirement 1.77" x 3.62" (4.5 X 9.2 cm) Dimensions 1.89"H x 3.78"W x 1.8"D (4.8 x 9.6 x 4.6 cm) Approvals RoHS 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Weight Warranty 1 year Supply Voltage
WIRING
Power supply 24 VDC
Power supply 24 VDC
+ Sensor/ + transmitter
+ +
BAS input or other 4-20 mA load Sensor/ transmitter
+ -
BAS input or other 4-20 mA load
+ SIG SPAN ZERO
+ - + SIG
B/L SPAN ZERO
LPI-4
LPI-4R, G, A
MODEL LPI-4 LPI-4R LPI-4G LPI-4A
DESCRIPTION 3-1/2 digit black panel display 3-1/2 digit red panel display 3-1/2 digit green panel display 3-1/2 digit amber panel display
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 GP-5132
RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT LPI-4 mounting goof plate, 5.13" x 3.25" (13.0 x 8.3 cm)
100
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
Temperature Humidity Pressure GPM Kilowatt demand Voltage/Current
ALARMS & INDICATION
KELE 3-1/2 DIGIT SMALL BLACK/RED PANEL DISPLAY LPI-5
The LPI-5 loop-powered indicator features a small 0.37" (0.94 cm), 3-1/2 digit, black LCD or red LED display. The meter displays any 4-20 mA signal in desired scale. The Model LPI-5 is powered directly from the 4-20 mA signal loop, so the black LCD display and red LED display do not require a separate power supply. FEATURES Indication of 4-20 mA signal in desired scale Loop powered 3-1/2 digit display Snap-in panel mounting Small, easy-to-read display Precalibrated for desired range Selectable decimal point location Positive-to-negative indication (black LCD display) APPLICATION
2
LPI-5
ALARMS & INDICATION
LPI-5R
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Input Signal Input Impedance Black Red Accuracy Digit Count Digit Size Decimal Point Display Color Engineering Units Range Black 24 VDC @ 35 mA 4-20 mA 300 380 0.1% of scale plus one digit 3-1/2 digits max 0.37" (0.94 cm) Three positions of none (1.0.0.0) Black, Red (Black only) M, k, C, m, V, F, A, -1999 to 1999, min span 100 digit counts Red 0 to 1999 Operating Humidity 95% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 130F (0 to 54C) Cutout Requirement Black 0.86"H x 1.57"W (2.2 x 4.0 cm) Red 0.8"H x 1.3"W (2.0 x 3.3 cm) Dimensions 0.95"H x 1.73"W x 1.1"D Black (2.4 x 4.4 x 2.8 cm) Red 1.28"H x 1.82"W x 1.6"D (3.25 x 4.64 x 4.0 cm) Approvals RoHS 0.13 lb (0.06 Kg) Weight Warranty 1 year
WIRING
24 VDC Power supply
+ -
+ Sensor/ transmitter -
4-20 mA
- BAS input or other + 4-20 mA load
Factory calibrated (No field calibration needed)
SIG
LPI-5 or LPI-5R
MODEL LPI-5 LPI-5R
DESCRIPTION 3-1/2 digit small black LCD panel display 3-1/2 digit small red LED panel display
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
101
ALARMS & INDICATION

PULSE OR RUN-TIME ACCUMULATOR DISPLAY ALD-1
DESCRIPTION
The ALD-1 is a 5-1/2 digit LCD resettable accumulator or runtime counter. The lithium battery provides years of troublefree service. Two wires are all that are necessary to totalize consumption, ow data, or run-time data. No external power supply is necessary.
GROUND SHIPPING ONLY
FEATURES
Resettable accumulator or run-time counter Long life lithium battery No external power supply
ALARMS & INDICATION
WIRING
Switch Contact (orange) (not used) Run ALD-1C/10C Run Time Clock (+) (white) (+) (blue) (-) (orange/white) Reset ALD-1/R Accumulator Counter (+) Cnt (white) Rst (blue) (-) Com (black) Switch Contact Reset N.O. Count N.O.
ALD-1R Reset Wiring
SPECIFICATIONS
Battery Life Input Count Speed Accumulator Timer counts Digit Size Display Range 10 years nominal Contact or solid-state switch 100 counts per second One-hour or 0.1-hour increments 0.2" (0.51 cm) high 5-1/2 digit 0-199999 Reset Push button or remote contact Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 1.0"H x 2.0"W (2.54 x 5.08 cm) Panel Cutout Bezel 1.1"H x 2.09"W x 1.72"D (2.79 x 5.3 x 4.37 cm) Weight 0.13 lb (0.06 Kg) Warranty 2 years
MODEL ALD-1 ALD-10C ALD-1C ALD-1R DESCRIPTION LCD push-button resettable accumulator counter LCD run-time remote reset clock, one-hour increments LCD run-time remote reset clock, 0.1-hour increments LCD remote reset accumulator counter
102
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
BEACON TYPES AND THEIR APPLICATIONS
Rotating Beacons Used to signal over a large area such as in airports, distribution centers and large process areas. Flashing Beacons Double Flashing Beacons Steady Beacons Used to identify a continuous source or process. Strobe Lights Diode Supervised and UL 1971 Strobe Lights
ALARMS & INDICATION

EDWARDS AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALS SIGNALING BASICS
VISUAL SIGNALING BASICS BY EDWARDS SIGNALING

From the amber light of a rotating beacon at an airport to the double ash of a red strobe in a Division 2 area, Edwards provides the widest array of visual signaling solutions in the industry. The following is a brief overview of some of the types of visual signals and applications.
LIGHT SOURCES AND THEIR APPLICATIONS

Edwards signals use a variety of light sources: halogen, standard incandescent, LED, and strobe. The following is a brief overview of these type of light sources and their use. LED Use in areas where vibration resistance and long life are of utmost concern. Light output with older technology LEDs is relatively poor; newer technology LEDs have vastly improved light output but are still expensive. Halogen Use in areas where high light output and long life are considerations. Halogen light sources work well in high ambient light areas. However, halogen bulbs tend to perform unfavorably in high vibration environments. Incandescent Incandescent light sources are typically the most inexpensive. They are often used in applications where cost is a driving factor. Incandescent bulbs tend to have a relatively short life span. Their light output, while usually sufcient, is less than that of a halogen or strobe. Strobes Strobes are known for their exceptional bright burst of light energy. A strobe light passes a brief, intense pulse of electric current through a gas, which then emits a brilliant burst of light. The gas is usually one of two inert gases, xenon or krypton. Strobe lights are very vibration resistant and will function for thousands of hours before requiring replacement.
ALARMS & INDICATION
Used to signal attention and equipment condition in process control lines, airport baggage areas, and other areas requiring human interface. Used to signal attention and equipment condition over wide areas. Sometimes used in lieu of Rotating Beacons.
Used for equipment status and malfunction indication over large and high noise areas. Diode polarized strobes are used in electronically supervised alarm circuits. When the strobe has a UL 1971 listing it may also be used in compatible re alarm systems as a signaling device for the hearing impaired.
LENS COLORS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS

Most Edwards strobes, steady and ashing beacons come in six lens colors: amber, blue, clear, green, magenta and red. Edwards LED signals come in amber, blue, green, red and, in some cases, white. The following are examples of how various lens colors are used in industrial and commercial signaling environments: Amber Denotes caution. Blue Used for safety and security. Clear (or White) & Green Used to indicate normal run operation. Magenta Used for radiation alarms. Red Denotes emergency or warning.
CAT. NUMBER VOLTAGE SUFFIXES

Edwards visual signals are available in a wide variety of voltages. Each signal has a catalog number sufx which indicates the voltage of that specic signal. The following is a list of the cat. number sufxes and the voltages they represent: Sufx -AQ -E1 -EK -FJ -FY -G1 Voltage 24V AC/DC 12V DC 12-48V DC 20-30V DC 36V DC 24V DC Sufx -G5 -GW -MP -N5 -R5 -S1 Voltage 24V AC 50/60 Hz 24-28V DC 72-125V DC 120V AC 50/60 Hz 240V AV 50/60 Hz 250V DC
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
103
ALARMS & INDICATION

EDWARDS AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALS SIGNALING BASICS
AUDIBLE SIGNALING BASICS BY EDWARDS SIGNALING
From the soft melodic sound of a chime, to the ear piercing emergency blast of an outdoor warning signal, Edwards audible signals produce sounds that demand immediate attention.
AUDIBLE SIGNALS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS

Vibrating and Single Stroke Bells 6", 8", and 10" bells are used for alarms over large areas such as distribution centers. 4" bells are used for smaller applications. Single stroke bells are most useful for paging applications.
Obviously, the more critical the application, the more startling the signal generated must be. A horn is generally the most startling signal. Its rasping tone commands immediate attention. A single stroke bell can be used for paging applications where danger is not at hand. A small buzzer may serve to notify a machine operator that a particular operation is completed. 2. Uniform Sound Distribution Usually, better signal distribution can be achieved by carefully positioning a number of smaller signals throughout a given area than by centrally locating a single large unit. 3. Ambient Sound Conditions The frequency of the signaling device selected should be as different from the background noise as possible. The signal should override this noise by a minimum of six decibels. Usually, the noisier the area, the louder the signal required and the greater the number required. 4. Size of Area to be Covered The larger the area, the louder the signal required or the greater the number of units required. Better coverage is frequentlyobtained by the use of several signals of lower dB rating than by the use of one very loud signal, providing the signals can be positioned to advantage.
ALARMS & INDICATION
Vibrating Horns Used to signal attention and equipment condition in process control lines and other areas requiring human interface. Buzzers Most often used for local annunciation of noncritical events but can also be used when a distinctive paging signal is required. Chimes Suitable for relatively quiet locations to page or locally annunciate. Sirens and Outdoor Warning Signals For use in general services and emergency warning over large geographic areas. Multiple Tone Signals Used in stand-alone and signaling systems that require multiple tone selectability and exibility. Voice Signals Used where the delivery of specic instructions are required.
5. Mounting Considerations
The surface that the signal is mounted on can markedly affect the signals performance. A horn, for example, should be rigidly mounted to a sturdy surface so that all of its energy is directed into the sound output and not absorbed by the wall. A buzzer, however, can sound much louder if mounted on a resonant surface because it will act as a sound board for the device.
SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS

Sound pressure uctuations diminish or die out with increasing distance from the sound source. A distance must generally be specied along with the dB rating to fully describe a sound. The sound pressure level changes 6 dB for each halving or doubling of distance. For a change in distance of ten times, the sound pressure level changes 20 dB.
CAT. NUMBER VOLTAGE SUFFIXES

Edwards audible signals are available in a wide variety of voltages. Each signal has a catalog number sufx which indicates the voltage of that specic signal. The following is a list of the cat. number sufxes and the voltages they represent:
TYPICAL DB LEVELS WHEN SELECTING AUDIBLE SIGNALS

In specifying a signaling device, the above characteristics should be considered along with as many factors concerning the application as can be gathered. Selecting the proper device for each signaling application need not be difcult if the following points are observed. 1. Signal Function Basically, the types of functions to which signals can be applied are: general alarm or emergency, start and dismissal, paging or coding, localized danger, and indication. The rst step in selecting a signal is to carefully dene this function. Is the signal to be a warning, a call, or an instruction? Will it be used to protect life or property? How much time will be available to take action?
Sufx
-AQ -E1 -EK -FJ -FY -G1
Voltage
24V AC/DC 12V DC 12-48V DC 20-30V DC 36V DC 24V DC
Sufx
-G5 -GW -MP -N5 -R5 -S1
Voltage
24V AC 50/60 Hz 24-28V DC 72-125V DC 120V AC 50/60 Hz 240V AV 50/60 Hz 250V DC
104
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
CONTROL VALVES
HUMIDITY
CONTROL VA LV E S
Kele Assembles Thousands of Custom Valves to Meet Your Actuator Preference, Most Build and Ship Same-Day. We Also Offer FREE Tagging.
VBN2/VBN3 | p. 140 Series
V-Ball Series | p. 145
VG2000 Series | p. 173
EVSI Series | p. 125
V200 Series | p. 113
KOV Series | p. 206
CONTROL VALVES
MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Accessories KOV Series Fabric Weatherproof Cover for Globe Valve Actuators. . . . . . . 206 Ball Valves B2, B3 Series Ball Valves .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HTCCV Series High Temperature Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VG1000 Series Ball Valves .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VBN2, VBN3 Series Ball Valves .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V-Ball Series Ball Valve- V-Ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PICCV Series Pressure Independent Control Valves.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MVN Series MVN Ball Valve Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL VA LV E S
133 136 138 140 145 151 162
599 Series | p. 111 Ball Valves
Buttery Valves KB Series Buttery Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 F6, F7 Series Buttery Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Globe Valve Actuators ML Series Direct-Mount Globe Valve Actuators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UGVL, SGVL, WGVL Retrot Series Universal Retrot Linkage/ Actuator Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VA-4233, VA-7000 series Direct-mount Globe Valve Actuators . . . . . . . . . DuraDrive Series Globe Valve Actuators .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forta Series Globe Valve Actuators.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
164 170 178 188 191
VT Series | p. 121
Globe Valves V5011, V5013 Series Threaded Globe Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VGF Series Flanged Globe Valves.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VG7000 Series Globe Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G2, G3 Series Threaded Globe Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VG2000 Series Flanged Globe Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VB Series Threaded and Flanged Globe Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156 158 160 167 173 182
Solenoid Valves 8210 Series Red Hat Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 EVSI Series Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
KB Series | p. 193
Zone Valves KZ Series Two-Position Poptop Zone Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z200/Z300 Series Two-Position Zone Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KVC Series Zone Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Zone Valve Series Zone Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V200, V300 Series Zone Valves.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V5860 Series Modulating Zone Valves .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VM Series Modulating Poptop Zone Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VT Series Two-Position Poptop Zone Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105 107 109 111 113 117 119 121
kele.com
NEW!

CONTROL VALVES
TWO-POSITION POPTOP ZONE VALVES KZ SERIES
The KZ Series Two-Position PopTop zone valves offer a wide range of models to handle chilled water, hot water, and 15 psig (103 kPa) steam applications. PopTop valves feature removable actuators to aid in both installation and service. They are available in 2-way and 3-way body patterns and with normally open or normally closed actuators.
KZG13A02A
3
KZT2221 KZ23B020
Two- or three-way mixing/diverting body patterns Removable and replaceable actuator NPT, sweat, or inverted are connections 2-position spring return control
CONTROL VALVES
DIMENSIONS
VALVE BODY SIZE 1/2" Sweat 3/4" Sweat 1" Sweat 1/2" NPT 3/4" NPT 1" NPT Inverted flare union ACTUATOR KZG KZH A 1-5/16 (3.33) 1-3/8 (3.49) 1-11/16 (4.29) 1-3/8 (3.49) 1-11/16 (4.29) 1-7/8 (4.76) 1-3/8 (3.49) E 2-3/8 (6.03) 2-5/8 (6.67) DIMENSIONS - in (cm) B C 7/8 (2.22) 7/8 (2.22) 7/8 (2.22) 7/8 (2.22) 7/8 (2.22) 1 (2.54) 7/8 (2.22) F 3-11/16 (9.36) 3-7/8 (9.84)
E F 3/4 (1.91) 3/4 (1.91) G 3-5/16 (8.41) 3-1/4 (8.26) H
7/8 (2.22)
1-5/16 (3.33) 3-5/16 (8.41) 1-11/16 (4.29) 3-3/8 (8.57) 1-11/16 (4.29) 3-5/8 (9.21) 1-5/16 (3.33) 3-3/8 (8.57) 1-7/16 (3.65) 3-5/8 (9.21) 1-3/4 (4.45) 3-7/8 (9.84) 1-5/16 (3.33) 4-1/8 (10.48) G 2-3/8 (6.03) 2-3/8 (6.03) H 1-1/4 (3.18) 1-1/4 (3.18)
B Two-way C Three-way
Actuator release (with power-off push and pull up)
A D
PIPING
N.C. actuator N.O. actuator N.C. actuator
Shown N.C. to the coil Note: Reverse Ports A and B for N.O. coil operation
N.C. actuator
B
Coil
Return
B
Coil
Return
B
Coil
AB
A
Return Supply
B
Coil
A
Supply Return
Supply
Supply
Two-way Normally Closed Piping
Two-way Normally Open Piping
Three-way Valve in Mixing Configuration
Three-way Valve in Diverting Configuration
WIRING
680-243 Changeover thermostat pipe-mounted
Two-position snap acting thermostat SPST
Two-position snap acting thermostat SPDT
AC Power
AC Power
Heating or Cooling Valve

March 2014 2014
Heating and Cooling Valve
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
105
CONTROL VALVES
TWO-POSITION POPTOP ZONE VALVES KZ SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Size 1/2", 3/4", 1" Cv Range 1.0 to 8.0 Connections FNPT, Sweat, or inverted are (3/4" only) Flow Characteristic Quick Opening Leakage Rating ANSI Class IV (0.01% of rated capacity) Maximum Closeoff Pressure Cv 1.0-1.5 60 psid (414 kPa) KZG actuator, 75 psid (517 kPa) KZH actuator Cv 2.5-3.0 40 psid (276 kPa) KZG actuator, 50 psid (345 kPa) KZH actuator Cv 3.5-4.0 25 psid (172 kPa) KZG actuator, 30 psid (207 kPa) KZH actuator Cv 5.0 20 psid (137 kPa) KZG actuator, 25 psid (172 kPa) KZH actuator Cv 7.5-8.0 17 psid (117 kPa) KZG actuator, 20 psid (137 kPa) KZH actuator Maximum Pressure Rating 300 psig (2067 kPa) Materials Of Construction Brass valve body and seat, nickel-plated stem, BUNA N paddle; stainless steel base plate and aluminum cover on actuator Hot or chilled water; 50% or less ethylene Media Compatibility glycol; 15 psig steam Media Temperature Range 32 to 200F (0 to 93C) for KZT valve; up to 250F (121C) with for KZS valve with KZxx4 actuator Supply Voltage Supply VA Supply Watts Control Signal Wiring Action Two-Way Valves Three-Way Valves Actuator Compatibility Actuator Mounting Auxiliary Contacts Auxiliary Switch Drive Time Manual Override Operating Temperature KZG Actuator KZxx4 Actuator Spring Return Time Weight Approvals Warranty 24 VAC 10%; 120 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz; 208-277V models also available 7 VA 6.5 W Two-position, two-wire 18" (45.2 cm) leads N.O./N.C. determined by choice of actuator N.C. actuator only KZG (general purpose) or KZH (high performance) type actuators only PopTop N.O. contacts, 24-240 VAC, 5A Models with auxiliary switch available 25 seconds maximum @ 60 Hz N.C. actuators only Maximum ambient 104F (40C); Maximum ambient 169F (77C) 9 seconds maximum Valve bodies: <1.4 lb (0.64 kg) Actuators: 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) UL and ULc Listed; CE 2 years
CONTROL VALVES
VALVE
MODEL DESCRIPTION KZ Two-position PopTop electric valve TEMPERATURE T Water S Steam (must use high temperature actuator) CONFIGURATION 2 Two-way 3 Three-way CV SIZE 2 1/2" 3 3/4" 4 1" CONNECTION Sweat - 1/2", 3/4", 1" 1 2 NPT - 1/2", 3/4", 1" 4 Inverted flare - 3/4" only CV CAPACITY 2-way 3-way Size 1 1.0 1.5 1/2'' 2 2.5 3.0 1/2'', 3/4'' 3 3.5 4.0 1/2'', 3/4'' 5 5.0 5.0 3/4'', 1'' 7 7.5 7.5 3/4'' 7 8.0 8.0 1'' KZ T 2 2 1 1 Example: KZT2211
ACTUATOR
MODEL DESCRIPTION KZ VT Series actuator CLOSEOFF G General operation H High performance VALVE OPERATION 1 Normally closed* 2 Normally open** TEMPERATURE 3 Normal 4 Steam VOLTAGE 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz A B 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz D 208 VAC, 60 Hz T 277 VAC, 60 Hz U 230/220 VAC, 50 Hz LEADS 02 18'' Leads OPTIONS 0 None A End switch KZ G 1 3 A 02 0 Example: KZG13A020
Note: Valve and actuator shipped separately.
*Inverted flare fittings not included with valve. They are field-supplied.
* Three-way valves use N.C. actuator only; reverse ports for N.O. ** No manual override.
SSTAG 680-243-6 30-158-A 30-158-B 30-158-D 30-158-T 30-158-U 436-252
RELATED PRODUCTS Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order Changeover thermostat with conduit tting ACCESSORIES KZG/KZH Series actuator replacement motor, 24 VAC KZG/KZH Series actuator replacement motor, 110/120 VAC KZG/KZH Series actuator replacement motor, 208 VAC KZG/KZH Series actuator replacement motor, 277 VAC KZG/KZH Series actuator replacement motor, 230/240 VAC 3/4" are-to-sweat tting
106
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March March2014 2014
NEW!
High-quality, long-life design High close-off pressures standard Drop-in replacement for existing zone valves Manual override lever for N.C. actuators Actuators available with end switch Front-mount, push-button actuator release Anti-water hammer gear motion Knockout for 1/2" conduit Available assembled or separate valve/actuator
CONTROL VALVES
TWO-POSITION ZONE VALVES Z200/Z300 SERIES
The Z200/Z300 Series zone valves are high-quality, costcompetitive, two-position, spring return valves made for chilled water, hot water, and 15 psig (103 kPa) steam applications. The Z200/Z300 Series zone valves feature, as standard, high temperature ratings and high close-off ratings. They are available in a full range of common sizes, connection types, and operating voltages.
Z200411-Z12100
Z300411
CONTROL VALVES
SPECIFICATIONS
1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" (sweat connections only) Cv Range 1.0, 2.5, 3.5, 5.0, 7.5, 8.0 Connections FNPT, Sweat (BSP, inverted are and SAE are available special order) Body Pattern 2-way and 3-way (mixing/diverting) Flow Characteristic Quick Opening Leakage Class ANSI Class III (0.1%) Maximum Closeoff Pressure Cv = 1.0 75 psid (517 kPa) Cv = 2.5 50 psid (345 kPa) Cv = 3.5 30 psid (207 kPa) Cv = 5.0 25 psid (172 kPa) Cv = 7.5 20 psid (137 kPa) Cv = 8.0 20 psid (137 kPa) Maximum Pressure 300 psig (2067 kPa) Materials Of Construction Forged brass body, stainless steel stem, brass seat, EPDM paddle, aluminum actuator base, polycarbonate actuator housing Media Compatibility Hot and chilled water, up to 50% glycol; 15 psig (103 kPa) maximum steam (2-way valves only) Media Temperature Range 32 to 250F (0 to 121C) Supply Voltage 24 VAC models, 120 VAC models (208, 240, 277 VAC models available special order) Supply VA 7 VA Size Conduit Connection Wiring 24 VAC Actuators 120 VAC Actuators Auxiliary Switch 7/8" (2.2 cm) knockout for 1/2" conduit 18" (45.7 cm) leads; 6" (15.2 cm) leads Model dependant; switch closes when actuator opens, operates with manual override
Contact Rating 24 VAC Actuators 0.4A @ 24 VAC 120 VAC Actuators 5.0A @ 120-277 VAC Actuator Compatibility 2-way Valves N.O. or N.C. actuator 3-way Valves N.C. actuator only 10 to 60 seconds Drive Time Spring Return Time 6 seconds Included on N.C. actuators only Manual Override Operating Temperature Maximum ambient 104F (40C) for models with auxiliary switches; maximum 169F (77C) for models without auxiliary switches Weight 1/2" Valves 0.70 lb (0.32 kg) 3/4" Valves 0.80 lb (0.36 kg) 1" Valves 0.90 lb (0.41 kg) 1-1/4" Valves 0.90 lb (0.41 kg) Actuators: 0.92 lb (0.42 kg) Approvals ULC, CE, plenum rating, cULus File #239721868P Warranty 2 years
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
107
CONTROL VALVES
TWO-POSITION ZONE VALVES Z200/Z300 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4 (10.2) 3.4 (8.7)
WIRING
Thermostat (dry contact) (black) (black) (red) (red)
AC power
3
C Two-way D Three-way 1.2 (3.0) A B CONNECTION SIZE/TYPE 1/2" Sweat 3/4" Sweat 1" Sweat 1 1/4" Sweat 1/2" NPT 3/4" NPT 1" NPT 2.4 (6.0)
CONTROL VALVES
A 1.3 (3.4) 1.4 (3.5) 1.7 (4.3) 1.8 (4.6) 1.4 (3.6) 1.6 (3.9) 1.8 (4.6)
B 2.6 (6.8) 2.75 (7.0) 3.4 (8.6) 3.6 (9.2) 2.9 (7.2) 3.7 (7.8) 3.6 (9.2)
C 0.9 (2.4) 0.9 (2.4) 0.9 (2.4) 0.9 (2.4) 0.9 (2.4) 0.9 (2.4) 0.9 (2.4)
D 1.3 (3.4) 1.5 (3.8) 1.6 (3.9) 1.7 (4.3) 1.25 (3.2) 1.25 (3.2) 1.7 (4.3)
E 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9) 3.7 (9.3) 3.7 (9.3) 3.5 (8.9) 3.7 (9.3) 3.7 (9.3)
Auxiliary switch 5A @ 24-250 VAC (120 VAC models), .4A @ 24 VAC (24 VAC models)
PIPING
N.C. Actuator N.O. Actuator N.C. Actuator Only
N.C. Actuator Only
A Coil
Return
A Coil
Return
A (NC) B (NO) AB Coil Return Supply
A (NC) B (NO) AB Coil Supply Return
Supply
Supply
VALVE
MODEL DESCRIPTION Z200 Two-way Z300 Three-way (requires N.C. actuator) CONNECTION SIZE 4 1/2" 5 3/4" 6 1" 7 1-1/4" (sweat connection only) CONNECTION TYPE 1 NPT 3 Sweat CV RATING 1 1.0 (1/2" only) 2 2.5 (1/2", 3/4") 3 3.5 (1/2", 3/4") 5 5.0 (3/4", 1") 7 7.5-8.0 (3/4", 1", 1-1/4")* Z200 5 1 2
ACTUATOR
MODEL DESCRIPTION Z1 Two-position spring return FUNCTION 1 N.C. with end switch, two- or three-way 2 N.C. without end switch, two- or three-way 3 N.O. with end switch, two-way only 4 N.O. without end switch, two-way only VOLTAGE 1000 24 VAC, 8" wire 3000 208 VAC, 6" wire 4000 230 VAC, 6" wire 5000 277 VAC, 6" wire 6000 120 VAC, 6" wire Z1 2 3000 Example: Z123000 Normally closed, two-position, spring return, 208 VAC
Example: Z200-512 Two-way, 3/4" NPT, Cv = 2.5 Note: Above combinations are regularly stocked at Kele. Valves are also available with BSP, inverted flare, and SAE flare connections; consult Kele for pricing and availability.
* 1-1/4" size only available with sweat connections.
To order a valve/actuator assembly, append the valve number with the actuator number, separated by a dash. Example: Z200512-Z122000 is a two-way, 3/4" NPT, Cv = 2.5 valve with a normally closed, two-position, spring return, 120 VAC actuator pre-assembled by Kele. Other models available from Caleffi. Call Kele for more information.
108
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
SPECIFICATIONS
CONTROL VALVES
ZONE VALVES KVC SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Kele KVC Series includes two- and three-way, hot and chilled water control valves and fail-in-place or power-fail return electric actuators. The unique cartridge design enables the valve to be piped mixing or diverting for the three-way valve, and either ow direction for the two-way valve. The actuator uses a unique twist-off mount for easy installation or servicing and is available with two-position, oating, or proportional control signals.
FEATURES Three-way mixing and diverting in one body Two-way bi-directional ow for simple installation Linear ow characteristics Easily replaceable seat cartridge Twist-on low power/long life actuator Manual override Fail-in-place or power-fail return actuator models Selectable power fail return direction models
KVC 2100N66 valve with KVC 6936 actuator
CONTROL VALVES
Size 1/2", 3/4", 1-1/4", 1" Cv 0.7, 4.7, 0.7, 2.9, 4.7, 8.7 Connections FNPT Body Pattern 2-Way, 3-Way Flow Characteristic Linear Maximum Closeoff Pressure 60 psid (414 kPa) Pressure Rating 300 psig (2069 kPa) Materials Of Construction Bronze valve body, stainless steel stem, Ryton and Noryl trim, Noryl and Ryton plastic actuator housing Media Compatibility Hot water, chilled water Media Temperature Range 34 to 203F (1 to 95C) Supply Voltage 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz Supply VA 6 VA Control Signal Two-position, oating, or proportional Wiring 39" (99 cm) cable, 20 AWG conductors
Action 2-way 3-way Connector Manual Override Stroke Time KVCx114 KVCx93x Weight KVC2050 KVC2075 KVC2100 KVC2125 KVC3050 KVC3075 KVC3100 KVCxxx4 KVCxxx6 Approvals Warranty
Stem spring up on actuator removal, stem up to close (bi-directional ow) Stem spring up on actuator removal, stem up closes port A, stem down closes port B Twist-lock mount with latch Combination override lever and position indicator 6 seconds 120 seconds 1.2 lb (.54 kg) 1.8 lb (.80 kg) 2.1 lb (.95 kg) 2.2 lb (1.0 kg) 1.4 lb (.61 kg) 1.5 lb (.68 kg) 1.6 lb (.70 kg) 0.9 lb (.39 kg) 1.1 lb (.50 kg) UL, CSA Listed, CE Certied 1 year
TABLE 1. KVC REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGES

VALVE SIZE AND CV CARTRIDGE BODY MODEL NO. PATTERN 3/4" VALVE 1" 1-1/4" SIZE AND CV CARTRIDGE 1/2" BODY MODEL NO. 3.2 PATTERN VCZZ1100 4.7 1/2" 6.6 3/4" 7.11" 1-1/4" VCZZ1100 6.6 7.1 VCZZ1400 2.9 3.9 3.2 4.2 4.7 4.3 TwoVCZZ1400 2.9 3.9 4.2 4.3 TwoVCZZ1500 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.8 way VCZZ1500 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.8 way VCZZ1600 1.5. 1.5 1.5 VCZZ1600 1.3 1.5 1.3 1.5. 1.5 VCZZ6100 Three-way 6.6 3.8 8.7 6.6 8.7 VCZZ6100 3.8 Three-way 8.7 8.7
Note: 1000 Series fit all two-way bodies. Note: 1000 Series cartridges fit cartridges all two-way bodies. 6000 Series cartridges fit all 6000 Series cartridges fit all three-way three-way bodies. bodies. Cartridge tool included with each cartridge. Cartridge tool included with each cartridge.
THREE-WAY VALVE FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
Stem up
Stem down B
Stem up
Stem down
AB AB AB AB Common Common Common Common Three-way Mixing or Diverting Three-way Mixing or Diverting
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
109
CONTROL VALVES
ZONE VALVES KVC SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Manual control 3.7 (9.4) 2.7 (6.8) Manual control 3.7 (9.4) 2.7 (6.8)
3.6 (9.0)
D A Port C B 39" Cable
3.6 (9.0) A Port AB B
Two-way Assembly
Three-way Assembly
39" Cable
TABLE 2. SPECIFICATIONS AND DIMENSIONS VALVE NUMBER SIZE PORT BODY KVC2050N07 1/2" two-way FNPT KVC2050N13 1/2" two-way FNPT KVC2050N29 1/2" two-way FNPT KVC2050N32 1/2" two-way FNPT KVC2075N47 3/4" two-way FNPT KVC2100N66 1" two-way FNPT KVC2125N71 1-1/4'' two-way FNPT KVC3050N37 1/2" three-way FNPT KVC3075N66 3/4" three-way FNPT KVC3100N87 1" three-way FNPT KVC3125N92 1-1/4'' three-way FNPT
Cv 0.7 1.3 2.9 3.2 4.7 6.6 7.1 3.7 6.6 8.7 9.2
C in (cm) 3.87 (9.8) 3.87 (9.8) 3.87 (9.8) 3.87 (9.8) 3.7 (9.4) 3.7 (9.4) 4.3 (11.0) 3.7 (9.4) 3.7 (9.4) 3.7 (9.4) 4.3 (11.0)
D in (cm) 4.37 (11.1) 4.37 (11.1) 4.37 (11.1) 4.37 (11.1) 4.45 (11.3) 4.45 (11.3) 4.6 (11.8)
E in (cm) 5.34 (13.6) 5.12 (13.0) 5.35 (13.6) 5.6 (14.2)
CONTROL VALVES
WIRING
H 24 VAC G Close Open (brown) (black) (white) (gray) (orange) (blue) H (brown)
KVC 6936
Valve Actuator
24 VAC
500
(white) (gray) (blue) (black) (orange)
KVC 7936
Valve Actuator
H 24 VAC G
External control SPST
Open
Port A closed (brown) (black) (blue)
KVC 8114
Valve Actuator
Two-position
External control SPDT
2-10 VDC* signal
Power-Fail Close Port A

H 24 VAC G Close Open (brown) (black) (white) (gray) (orange) (blue) H
Power-Fail Open Port A

(brown) (white) (gray) G
500
H 24 VAC
Open
Port A closed (brown) (black) (blue)
KVC 6934 KVC 2114

Valve Actuator
KVC 6936
Valve Actuator
24 VAC
KVC 7936
Valve Actuator
Two-position or Floating Controller

2-10 VDC* signal
(blue) (black) (orange)
H 24 VAC G
(brown)
500
2-10 VDC* signal
KVC 7934
Valve Actuator
(black) (blue)
Power-Fail Open Port A
* Use 500 resistor when signal is 4-20 mA
Power-Fail Close Port A

(see table 3 above)
Proportional * Use 500 resistor when signal is 4-20 mA
MODEL KVC8114 KVC2114 KVC6934 KVC6936 KVC7934 KVC7936 SSTAG DESCRIPTION Two-position, three-wire SPST control, six-second timing actuator Two-position, three-wire SPDT control, six-second timing actuator Three-wire oating control, 120-second timing actuator Three-wire oating control, 120-second timing power-fail return actuator Proportional 2-10 VDC control, 120-second timing actuator Proportional 2-10 VDC control, 120-second timing power-fail return actuator RELATED PRODUCTS Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
110
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Direct-coupled universal bonnet Direct-coupled installation without tools Manual override with hex wrench Visual position indication
CONTROL VALVES
ZONE VALVES 599 SERIES
The 599 Series zone valves work with any SFA/P Series or SSA/P Series electric actuator. The actuators provide two-position, three-position or 0-10 VDC control. Typical applications include hot or chilled water for zones with radiators, oor heating via manifolds, fan coil units, cooling ceilings, wall-mounted boilers, and VAV applications.
Two-way
Three-way
CONTROL VALVES
SPECIFICATIONS
1/2", 3/4", 1" 1, 2.5, 4, 4.1, 7 0.1" (2.5 mm) 2-way, 3-way diverting Linear ANSI Class III (0.1% of rated capacity) ANSI Class 125 Body Rating Media Temperature Range 34 to 230F (1 to 110C) Supply Voltage 24 VAC 20%, 120 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz Supply VA Two-position actuators: 9.8 VA; threeposition (oating) actuators: 0.8 VA; proportional (0-10 VDC) actuators: 2.5 VA Two-position, three-position (oating), Control Signal and 0-10 VDC proportional Action Two-way valves are stem-up-toopen; three-way valves are diverting; normal position is determined by choice of actuator Size Cv Range Stroke Body Pattern Flow Characteristic Leakage Rating Stroke Time Two-position actuators: 35 seconds; three-position (oating) actuators: 150 seconds; proportional (0-10 VDC) actuators: 34 seconds Operating Temperature 41 to 122F (5 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH non-condensing Two-position actuators: 1.2 lb Weight (0.54 kg); three-position (oating) actuators: 0.5 lb (0.25 kg); proportional (0-10 VDC) actuators: 0.5 lb (0.25 kg) NEMA 1 (indoor only) Enclosure Rating Approvals CE, EMC directive 89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC low voltage; UL873, cUL Certied to Canadian Standard C22.2 No. 24-93 2 years Warranty
DIMENSIONS
W
in (cm)
W1
W1
H H H1 H1
Valve Line Size SR 0.5 (1.5) 0.75 (2) 1 (2.5) NSR 0.5 (1.5) 0.75 (2) 1 (2.5)
H1 2-way 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 4.26 (10.8) 4.26 (10.8) 4.26 (10.8) 3-way 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 4.26 (10.8) 4.26 (10.8) 4.26 (10.8) 2-way 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5) 12.26 (31.1) 12.26 (31.1) 12.26 (31.1)
H 3-way 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5) 12.26 (31.1) 12.26 (31.1) 12.26 (31.1) 2-way 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 3.26 (8.3) 3.26 (8.3) 3.26 (8.3)
W1 3-way 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 4.38 (11.2) 3.26 (8.3) 3.26 (8.3) 3.26 (8.3) 2-way 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5) 11.26 (28.6) 11.26 (28.6) 11.26 (28.6)
W 3-way 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5) 12.38 (31.5) 11.26 (28.6) 11.26 (28.6) 11.26 (28.6)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
111
CONTROL VALVES
ZONE VALVES 599 SERIES
WIRING
+ NEUT 24 VAC Y G0 G
FLOW
Grounded class 2 transformer for 24 VAC power A0-V Board
SSA/P61U
Y2 Y1
G 24 VAC (Red) G0 Neutral (Black)
COM AB NC
NO A
NEUT
24 VAC
CONTROL VALVES
Grounded class 2 transformer for 24 VAC power
WARNING: Wire connection G is HOT, not ground.
SSA81U
SFA/P
Two-way, Normally Open
Three-way
120 VAC Spring Return 2 position Normally Normally Closed Open SFA11U* SFP11U* Actuator Actuator Code 240 Code 241 240-00210 241-00210 240-00211 241-00211 240-00214 241-00214 240-00212 241-00212 240-00213 241-00213 240-00510 241-00510 240-00511 241-00511 240-00514 241-00514 240-00512 241-00512 240-00513 241-00513 Spring Return 2-Position Normally Normally Closed Open SFA71U* SFP71U* Actuator Actuator Code 242 Code 243 242-00210 243-00210 242-00211 243-00211 242-00214 243-00214 242-00212 243-00212 242-00213 243-00213 242-00510 243-00510 242-00511 243-00511 242-00514 243-00514 242-00512 243-00512 242-00513 243-00513 24 VAC Non-Spring Return 3-position 0 to 10 VDC Modulating Normally Normally Normally Closed Closed Open SSA81U* SSA61U* SSP61U* Actuator Actuator Actuator Code 244 Code 245 Code 248 244-00210 245-00210 248-00210 244-00211 245-00211 248-00211 244-00214 245-00214 248-00214 244-00212 245-00212 248-00212 244-00213 245-00213 248-00213 244-00510 245-00510 248-00510 244-00511 245-00511 248-00511 244-00514 245-00514 248-00514 244-00512 245-00512 248-00512 244-00513 245-00513 248-00513
2-Way
NPT
Sweat
Line Size Inch cm 0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.75 2 1 2.5 0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.75 2 1 2.5
Close Off psi kPa 44 303 44 303 44 303 44 303 22 152 44 303 44 303 44 303 44 303 22 152
Flow Rate Valve Body Only Cv Kvs 1 0.85 599-00210 2.5 2 599-00211 4 3.4 599-00214 4.1 3.5 599-00212 7 6 599-00213 1 0.85 599-00510 2.5 2 599-00511 4 3.4 599-00514 4.1 3.5 599-00512 7 6 599-00513
120 VAC 2 position
2-Position A SR AB B SR AB A SFA71U* Actuator Code 242 242-00230 242-00231 242-00234 242-00232 242-00233 242-00530 242-00531 242-00534 242-00532 242-00533 SFP71U* Actuator Code 243 243-00230 243-00231 243-00234 243-00232 243-00233 243-00530 243-00531 243-00534 243-00532 243-00533
SR AB Close Off psi kPa 44 303 44 303 44 303 44 303 22 152 44 303 44 303 44 303 44 303 22 303 Flow Rate Valve Body Only Cv Kvs 1 0.85 599-00230 2.5 2 599-00231 4 3.4 599-00234 4.1 3.5 599-00232 7 6 599-00233 1 0.85 599-00530 2.5 2 599-00531 4 3.4 599-00534 4.1 3.5 599-00532 7 6 599-00533
B SR AB
Line Size Inch cm 0.5 1.5 NPT 0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.75 2 1 2.5 1.5 Sweat 0.5 0.5 1.5 0.5 1.5 0.75 2 1 2.5
SFA11U* Actuator Code 240 240-00230 240-00231 240-00234 240-00232 240-00233 240-00530 240-00531 240-00534 240-00532 240-00533
SFP11U* Actuator Code 241 241-00230 241-00231 241-00234 241-00232 241-00233 241-00530 241-00531 241-00534 241-00532 241-00533
24 VAC 3-position Non-Spring Return SSA81U* Actuator Code 244 244-00230 244-00231 244-00234 244-00232 244-00233 244-00530 244-00531 244-00534 244-00532 244-00533
0 to 10 VDC Modulating Non-Spring Return SSA61U* Actuator Code 245 245-00230 245-00231 245-00234 245-00232 245-00233 245-00530 245-00531 245-00534 245-00532 245-00533 SSP61U* Actuator Code 246 248-00230 248-00231 248-00234 248-00232 248-00233 248-00530 248-00531 248-00534 248-00532 248-00533
*Actuator only
3-Way
Example: A 240-00210 is a 599-00210 valve body and SFA11U actuator assembly. The valve and actuator can also be ordered separately.
SSTAG
RELATED PRODUCTS Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
112
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Size Cv Range Connections Stroke Life Expectancy Body Pattern
CONTROL VALVES
ZONE VALVES V200, V300 SERIES
The Spartan V200 two-way and V300 three-way zone valve product line is a complete offering in zone valves with a wide variety of connection sizes and types, and a wide selection of actuators, including electric, thermostatic, thermo-electric, and pneumatic. All the valve bodies are interchangeable with all the actuators for complete exibility and easy selection.
3
MP5100 V245-34
Valves are fully interchangeable with all actuators Complete selection of NPT/Sweat/Union ttings Electric, thermostatic, thermo-electric and pneumatic actuators Interchangeable cartridges for multiple Cvs Full service from the top of the valve body
CONTROL VALVES
ME4840
OT-1100
1/2", 3/4", 1" 0.15 to 9.0 NPT, solder, union 2-way valves: 0.16" (4.0 mm) 3-way valves: 0.11" (2.8 mm) 1.5 million cycles, 3 million full strokes 2-way, 3-way diverting (mixing OK if pressure drop <5 psid) ANSI Class III (0.1%) Leakage Class Body Rating ANSI 250 (400 psi @ 150F, 250 psi @ 250F), PN16 Maximum Closeoff Pressure OT-11, -21, -51: 30 psid (207 kPa); all others 45 psid (311 kPa); EB cartridges 100 psid (689 kPa) Materials Of Construction Low zinc bronze valve body alloy C84400, stainless steel stem and spring, integral bronze seat, EPDM/brass disc/plunger, double EPDM o-rings Media Compatibility Hot and chilled water, up to 50% glycol; 15 psig (103 kPa) steam (1" valve not rated for steam) Media Temperature Range 250F (120C) maximum media temperature Supply Voltage ME-16, -17: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz ME-4430, -4530: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz ME-4431, -4531: 110 VAC, 50/60 Hz ME-46, -47, -48, -49: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz ME-41, -42, -43: 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz ME-44, -45, -46, -47, -48, -49: 8 VA Supply VA ME-16, -17: 2W holding, 5W running Supply Watts ME-41, -42, -43: 1W
Control Signal Input Impedance Wiring Action
OT-11, -21, -51: thermostatic, modulating, temperature up = stem down MP-5100: pneumatic, SR, 3-6 psi modulating or 2-position MP-5300: pneumatic, SR, 7-11 psi modulating or 2-position ME-16, -17: 2-position, SR, two-wire, wax technology, can be pulsed ME-44, -45: 2-position, SR two-wire ME-4640: oating, SR ME-4740: PWM, SR, 0.2 to 5 second pulse, 5 seconds full stroke ME-48, -49: proportional, SR, 2-10/10-2 VDC or 4-20 mA ME-4140: oating, NSR, triac or low energy gold contacts ME-4240: PWM, NSR ME-4340: proportional, NSR, 2-10 VDC ME-46, -47: 2 k ME-48, -49: 200 k ME-41, -42: 2 k ME-4340: 200 k ME-16, -17: 40" (100 cm) leads ME-44, -45: 4" (10 cm) leads ME-46, -47, -48, -49: 32" plenum-rated cable ME-41, -42, -43: 32" plenum-rated cable Cartridges spring return valve stem up; valve body designs are either stem-up-toopen (SUTO) or stem-up-to-close (SUTC); spring return actuators available in failstem-up or fail-stem-down
(Continued on next page)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
113
CONTROL VALVES
SPECIFICATIONS (continued)
Actuator Compatibility Actuator Mounting Air Connections All actuators: compatible with all valve bodies (exception: V222 valves use MP actuators only) Knurled mounting ring, hand tighten Brass barbs for 5/32" or 1/4" OD exible tubing (MP actuators, maximum 60 psig) OT-11, -21, -51: 3.4"H x 2.4" Dia. (8.6 x 6.0 cm) MP-51, -53: 2.5"H x 3.1" Dia. (6.4 x 7.8 cm) ME-16, -17: 3.1"H x 1.8"W x 1.8"D (7.9 x 4.6 x 4.6 cm) ME-44, -45: 3.5"H x 2.8"W x 2.5"D (8.9 x 7.1 x 6.3 cm) ME-46, -47, -48, -49: 3.5"H x 3.0"W x 3.5"D (8.9 x 7.6 x 8.9 cm) ME-41, -42, -43: 3.1"H x 2.5"W x 3.3"D (7.9 x 6.4 x 8.5 cm) OT-11, -21, -51: variable MP-51, -53: variable ME-16, -17: <5 minutes ME-44, -45: 10 seconds; ME-46, -47, -48, -49: 60 seconds drive, 25 seconds spring ME-41, -42: 90 seconds ME-4340: 60 seconds NEMA 1 (IP20) MNPT Unions ME-46, -47, -48, -49: 1-5 VDC, 100 k impedance ME-41, -42, -43: 1-5 VDC, 33 k impedance Manual Override Operating Temperature Setpoint Range Weight C Approvals B Warranty ME-16, -17 actuators only OT-11, -21, -51: 40 to 85F (4 to 29C) MP-51, -53: 41 to 122F (5 to 50C) ME-16, -17: 46 to 122F (8 to 50C) ME-44, -45: 41 to 122F (5 to 50C) ME-46, -47, -48, -49: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) ME-41, -42, -43: 40 to 122F (5 to 50C) OT-11, -21, -51: 40 to 85F (4 to 29C) V222-12, -34: 1.5 lb (.68 kg) V241-12: .60 lb (.27 kg) V241-34: 1.0 lb (.45 kg) V243-12: .55 lb (.25 kg) V243-34: .75 lb (.34 kg) V243-10: 2.1 lb (.95 kg) V245-12: .50 lb (.23 kg) V245-34: .70 lb (.32 kg) V320-12: .95 lb (.43 kg) V320-34: 1.0 lb (.45 kg) V345-10: 2.1 lb (.95 kg) V325-12: .60 lb (.27 kg) V325-34: .80 lb (.35 kg) OT-1100: .30 lb (.14 kg) MP-51, -53: .40 lb (.18 kg) ME-16, -17: .30 lb (.14 kg) ME-44, -45: .75 lb (.34 kg) ME-46, -47, -48, -49: .95 lb (.43 kg) ME-41, -42: .55 lb (.25 kg) CE Valves: 5 years; Actuators: 2 years
Dimensions
CONTROL VALVES
Drive Time Enclosure Rating Feedback
DIMENSIONS - in (cm)
Stem up to close MNPT Unions C B Sweat C B Stem up to open Stem up to open MNPT Union FNPT C B
A A V222-12 4.3 (10.9) V222-34 5.2 (13.2) B C 2.4 (6.2) 1.1 (2.8) 2.4 (6.2) 1.1 (2.8) Stem up to open MNPT Unions B A
A V245-12 V245-34 A 2.2 (5.9) 2.3 (5.8) B C 1.6 (4.1) 1.1 (2.8) 1.6 (4.1) 1.1 (2.8) Stem up A B
A A B C V241-12 3.3 (8.4) 1.6 (4.1) 1.1 (2.8) V241-34 3.8 (9.6) 2.2 (5.6) 1.1 (2.8) Mounts to any Spartan actuator Stem up A B
MP actuator only
Mounts to any Spartan actuator
FNPT
C B C D B
Sweat* A C A B
C B D
A A 2.3 (5.8) 2.7 (6.9) 3.9 (9.9) B C 1.6 (4.1) 1.1 (2.8) 2.2 (5.6) 1.1 (2.8) 2.8 (7.1) 1.8 (4.6)
A A 4.3 (10.8) V320-34 5.2 (13.2) V345-10 6.2 (15.8) V320-12 B 3.2 (8.1) 3.7 (9.4) 4.6 (11.7) C 1.1 (2.8) 1.1 (2.8) 1.5 (4.0) D 2.1 (5.3) 2.6 (6.6) 3.1 (7.9) V325-12 V325-34 A 3.0 (7.7) 2.2 (5.7)
V243-12 V243-34 V243-10
B 2.6 (6.7) 2.2 (5.7)
C 1.1 (2.8) 1.1 (2.8)
D 1.5 (3.8) 1.1 (2.8)
* V325-12 is the same valve body as V325-34 (3/4"); it has inserts for 1/2" sweat.
114
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR WIRING
AC power COM H WHT GRN Control contact 24 AC transformer
CONTROL VALVES
COM H
Floating control 1-5 VDC feedback
WHT BLK RED BRN GRN
COM 24 AC transformer H Signal*
Common 1-5 VDC feedback
**
WHT BLK RED GRN
Two-position Spring Return Actuators (ME-4430, -4431, -4530, -4531)
Floating Spring Return Actuator (ME-4640)
* Proportional: 2-10 VDC PWM: 0.02-5.0 seconds 24 AC pulse ** 500, 1/2W, 1% resistor if control signal to actuator is 4-20 mA
PWM and Proportional Spring Return Actuators (ME-4740, -4840, -4940)
24 AC transformer
** 500, 1/2W, 1% resistor if control signal to actuator is 4-20 mA
* Proportional: 2-10 VDC PWM: 0.02-5.0 seconds 24VAC pulse
COM H
WHT RED BLK
24 AC transformer COM H *Signal
Floating control
WHT BLK RED ** GRN
1 2 3 4
Manual o erride ME-1 Control contact 24 AC
CONTROL VALVES
Floating Non-Spring Return Actuators (ME-4140, -4142)
1-5 VDC feedback
Common
Proportional and PWM Non-Spring Return Actuator (ME-4240, -4340)
Two-position Wax Actuators (ME1605, ME1705)
Valve Model No. Cv Description V222-12-ER1.0 1.0 1/2", 2W, SUTC, MNPT unions V222-12-ER2.0 2.0 (MP actuators only)* V222-12-ER3.0 3.0 V222-34-ER1.0 1.0 3/4", 2W, SUTC, MNPT unions V222-34-ER2.0 2.0 (MP actuators only)* V222-34-ER3.0 3.0 V241-12-BC0.15 0.15 V241-12-BC0.25 0.25 V241-12-EP0.5 0.5 V241-12-EP1.0 1 V241-12-EP1.5 1.5 1/2", 2W, SUTO, FNPT X MNPT union V241-12-EP2.0 2 (Change -EPxxx to -EVxxx for steam applications) V241-12-EP2.5 2.5 V241-12-EP3.0 3 V241-12-EP3.5 3.5 V241-34-EP1.0 1 V241-34-EP1.5 1.5 V241-34-EP2.0 3/4", 2W, SUTO, FNPT X MNPT union 2 V241-34-EP2.5 2.5 (Change -EPxxx to -EVxxx for steam applications) V241-34-EP4.5 4.5 V243-12-BC0.15 0.15 V243-12-BC0.25 0.25 V243-12-EP0.5 0.5 V243-12-EP1.0 1 V243-12-EP1.5 1/2", 2W, SUTO, FNPT 1.5 V243-12-EP2.0 2 (Change -EPxxx to -EVxxx for steam applications) V243-12-EP2.5 2.5 V243-12-EP3.0 3 V243-12-EP3.5 3.5 V243-34-EP1.0 1 V243-34-EP1.5 1.5 V243-34-EP2.0 3/4", 2W, SUTO, FNPT 2 V243-34-EP2.5 2.5 (Change -EPxxx to -EVxxx for steam applications) V243-34-EP4.5 4.5 V243-10-EB6.0 6 V243-10-EB6.4 6.4 1", 2W, SUTO, FNPT V243-10-EB8.0 8 (Use EV6.4 or EV9.0 for steam) V243-10-EB9.0 9 V245-12-BC0.15 0.15 V245-12-BC0.25 0.25 1/2", 2W, SUTO, sweat V245-12-EP0.5 0.5 (Change -EPxxx to -EVxxx for steam applications) V245-12-EP1.0 1 V245-12-EP1.5 1.5 V245-12-EP2.0 2 1/2", 2W, SUTO, sweat V245-12-EP2.5 2.5 (Change -EPxxx to -EVxxx for steam applications) V245-12-EP3.0 3 V245-12-EP3.5 3.5 *Change ER to EVR for steam applications Valve Model No. V245-34-EP1.0 V245-34-EP1.5 V245-34-EP2.0 V245-34-EP2.5 V245-34-EP3.0 V245-34-EP3.5 V320-12-ED1.0 V320-12-ED2.0 V320-12-ED3.0 V320-12-ED3.5 V320-34-ED1.0 V320-34-ED2.0 V320-34-ED3.0 V320-34-ED3.5 V345-10-ED5.5 V325-12-ED1.0 V325-12-ED2.0 V325-12-ED3.0 V325-12-ED3.5 V325-34-ED1.0 V325-34-ED2.0 V325-34-ED3.0 V325-34-ED3.5 Cv 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.5 5.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.5 Description
3/4", 2W, SUTO, sweat (Change -EPxxx to -EVxxx for steam applications)
1/2", 3W, diverting valve, MNPT unions
3/4", 3W, diverting valve, MNPT unions 1", 3W, diverting valve, MNPT unions 1/2", 3W, diverting valve, sweat (uses 3/4" 1/2" bushing)
3/4", 3W, diverting valve, sweat
Actuator Model No. Description THERMO-ELECTRIC ME-1605 Two-position SR, two-wire, 24 VAC, wax, fail stem up ME-1705 Two-position SR, two-wire, 24 VAC, wax, fail stem down ELECTRIC ME-4140 Floating, NSR, 24 VAC with timeout ME-4240 PWM 0.25-5 sec, NSR, 24 VAC ME-4340 Proportional 2-10 VDC, NSR, 24 VAC ME-4430 Two-position SR, two-wire, 24 VAC, fail stem up ME-4431 Two-position SR, two-wire, 110 VAC, fail stem up ME-4530 Two-position SR, two-wire, 24 VAC, fail stem down ME-4531 Two-position SR, two-wire, 110 VAC, fail stem down ME-4640 Floating, SR, 24 VAC, fail stem up ME-4840 Proportional 2-10 VDC, SR, 24 VAC, fail stem up ME-4940 Proportional 2-10 VDC, SR, 24 VAC, fail stem down ME-4740 PWM 0.25-5 sec, SR, 24 VAC, fail stem up SELF-CONTAINED THERMOSTATIC OT-1100 Valve mount thermostatic top 40 to 85F (5 to 30C) OT-2100 6 -1/2' capillary, remote bulb 40 to 85F (5 to 30C) OT-5100 6 -1/2' capillary, remote wall mount 40 to 85F (5 to 30C) Locking cover for OT-1100 OM -1200 PNEUMATIC MP-5100 4 sq in actuator, modulating 3-6 psi spring, fail stem up MP-5300 4 sq in actuator, modulating 7-11 psi spring, fail stem up
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
115
CONTROL VALVES
VALVE SELECTION CHART
Size/Connections 1/2" FNPT 3/4" FNPT 1" FNPT 1/2" sweat 3/4" sweat 1/2" unions/MNPT 3/4" unions/MNPT 1" unions/MNPT 1/2" FNPT x union/MNPT 3/4" FNPT x union/MNPT Flow Pattern (SUTO/C = stem up to open/close) Two-way Three-way V243 (SUTO) V245 (SUTO) V222 (SUTC) V240 (SUTO) V241 (SUTO) V325
ACTUATOR SELECTION CHART

Control Two-position electric Fail-in-Place ME-4140 (with timeout) ME-4142 (with timeout) ME-4240 ME-4340 OT-1100 (valve mount) OT-2100 (remote bulb) OT-5100 (wall mount)
Fail Mode Spring Return ME-4430 (24V, fail up) ME-4431 (115V, fail up) ME-4530 (24V, fail down) ME-4531 (115V, fail down) ME-4640 (fail up) ME-4740 (fail up) ME-4840 (fail up) ME-4940 (fail down) MP-5100 (3-6 psi, fail up) MP-5300 (7-11 psi, fail up) ME-1605 (fail up) ME-1705 (fail down)
Floating electric
V320
PWM electric Proportional electric Pneumatic Two-position thermo-electric
CONTROL VALVES
Note: Match valve stem action to the action of the actuator to achieve desired assembly action. For example: a V243 (stem up to open) with an ME-4430 actuator (fail up) will be a normally open assembly. That valve with an ME-4530 would be normally closed.
Thermostatic
ACCESSORIES MODEL BC0.15 BC0.25 EB6.0 EB6.4 EB8.0 EB9.0 ED1.0 ED2.0 ED3.0 ED3.5 EP0.5 EP1.0 EP1.5 EP2.0 EP2.5 EP3.0 EP3.5 EP4.5 EV1.5 EV2.0 EV0.5 EV2.5 EV3.5 EV4.5 EV1.0 EV6.4 EV9.0 EV3.0 AV-6112 AV-6134 AV-6312 AV-6334 AV07 DESCRIPTION Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 0.15 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 0.25 Cartridge for two-way 1" SUTO; Cv = 6.0 Cartridge for two-way 1" SUTO; Cv = 6.4 Cartridge for two-way 1" SUTO; Cv = 8.0 Cartridge for two-way 1" SUTO; Cv = 9.0 Cartridge for three-way; Cv = 1.0 Cartridge for three-way; Cv = 2.0 Cartridge for three-way; Cv = 3.0 Cartridge for three-way; Cv = 3.5 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 0.5 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 1.0 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 1.5 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 2.0 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 2.5 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 3.0 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 3.5 Cartridge for two-way 1/2" or 3/4" SUTO; Cv = 4.5 Cartridge for steam Cv=1.5, for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" valve Cartridge for steam Cv=2.0, for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" valve Cartridge for steam Cv=0.5, for 2W 1/2" valve Cartridge for steam Cv=2.5, for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" valve Cartridge for steam Cv=3.5, for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" valve Cartridge for steam Cv=4.5, for 2W 3/4" valve Cartridge for steam Cv=1.0, for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" valve Cartridge for steam Cv=6.4, for 2W 1" valve Cartridge for steam Cv=9.0, for 2W 1" valve Cartridge for steam Cv=3.0, for 2W 1/2" or 3/4" valve 1/2" union MNPT, for V320, 222 3/4" union MNPT, for V320, 222 1/2" union sweat, for V320, 222 3/4" union sweat, for V320, 222 Cartridge tool, 3/4" and 1/2" hex
116
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
CONTROL VALVES
MODULATING ZONE VALVES V5860 SERIES
The V5860 Series valve is designed specically for use in small hot water or chilled water applications. The V5860 comes in two-way and three-way congurations in 1/2" and 3/4" FNPT. The wide selection of Cv's offer precise equal percentage control, which is ideal for fan coils, baseboards, and small AHUs. The eld-mounted, non-spring return screwon actuators offer easy installation and modulating control using oating or proportional signals.
V5863A1006/M7410F1000
M6410A1029
Very small Cv's from 0.19 up to 4.9 High quality plug-seat design for precise control Very quiet operation Floating or proportional control Non-spring return actuators
V5862A2013
CONTROL VALVES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.25 (0.64)
Stroke 0.7 (1.83)
0.25 (0.64)
Stroke 0.7 (1.83)
in (cm)
3.9 (10.00)
2.3 (5.79)
C B B
B E
A B A
DIMENSION PIPE SIZE 1/2 3/4 A 3 3-1/2 B 3/4 1 C 1-5/16 1-1/4 D 1-5/16 1-1/4 E 1-5/16 1-1/2
0.5 (1.27) 1.9 (4.84) 2.4 (6.11)
1/2" NPT
Valve
Model V5862A2005 V5862A2013 V5862A2021 V5862A2039 V5862A2047 V5862A2054 V5862A2062 V5862A2070 V5863A2004 V5863A2012 V5863A2020 V5863A2038 V5863A2046 V5863A1006 V5863A1014 M6410A1029 M7410F1000 March 2014 Size 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" NA NA Cv 0.19 0.29 0.47 0.74 1.2 1.9 2.9 4.9 0.29 0.47 0.74 1.2 1.9 2.9 4.9 NA NA Maximum Closeoff Pressure 65 psid 65 psid 65 psid 65 psid 65 psid 65 psid 45 psid 45 psid 55 psid 55 psid 55 psid 22 psid 22 psid 26 psid 26 psid NA NA Action
Actuator
Weight 0.6 lb (.27 kg) 0.6 lb (.27 kg) 0.6 lb (.27 kg) 0.6 lb (.27 kg) 0.6 lb (.27 kg) 0.6 lb (.27 kg) 0.9 lb (.41 kg) 0.9 lb (.41 kg) 0.7 lb (.32 kg) 0.7 lb (.32 kg) 0.7 lb (.32 kg) 0.7 lb (.32 kg) 0.7 lb (.32 kg) 1.0 lb (.45 kg) 1.0 lb (.45 kg) 1.0 lb (.45 kg) .55 lb (.25 kg)
Stem up on actuator removal, valve open Stem up on actuator removal, valve open Stem up on actuator removal, valve open Stem up on actuator removal, valve open Stem up on actuator removal, valve open Stem up on actuator removal, valve open Stem up on actuator removal, valve open Stem up on actuator removal, valve open Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open Stem up on actuator removal, ports B-AB open Drive open, drive closed, fail-in-place Direct or reverse acting, switch selectable, fail-in-place
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
117
CONTROL VALVES
MODULATING ZONE VALVES V5860 SERIES
Connections Stroke Body Pattern Flow Characteristic FNPT 1/4" 2-Way, 3-Way mixing Equal Percentage (two-way), Linear (three-way) Pressure Rating 230 psig (1586 kPa) Materials Of Construction Brass valve body and trim, stainless steel stem Media Compatibility Hot or chilled water, 50% maximum glycol Media Temperature Range 36 to 230F (2 to 110C) Supply Voltage 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 0.7 VA (M6410), 1.4 VA (M7410) Supply VA Tri-state (oating) (M6410), 0/2-10 Control Signal VDC or 4-20 mA (M7410) 1/2" FNPT hub Conduit Connection Wiring 4.9' (1.5 m) cable Stem up on actuator removal, Action valve open (B-AB open for 3-way) 125 seconds @ 60 Hz, Stroke Time 150 seconds @ 50 Hz Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Enclosure Rating UL Listed for plenum use, UL94-5V 1 year Warranty
VALVE FLOW CHARACTERISTICS

With actuator removed stem is up With actuator removed stem is up. B-AB open
Port A Inlet Outlet
Port AB
Port B
Two-way
Three-way
WIRING
Floating controller Closed (stem down) (white) Open (stem up) (blue) (red) 0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC Signal 24 VAC Proportional Left switch Stem down on a signal increase Stem up on a signal increase
CONTROL VALVES
24 VAC
SPDT
M6410 Valve actuator
+ 500
(blue) (red) (white)
M7410 Valve actuator
Right switch 0-10 VDC signal 2-10 VDC signal
* 4-20 mA signals with 500 resistor
Model V5862A2005 V5862A2013 V5862A2021 V5862A2039 V5862A2047 V5862A2054 V5862A2062 V5862A2070 V5863A2004 V5863A2012 V5863A2020 V5863A2038 V5863A2046 V5863A1006 V5863A1014 M6410A1029 M7410F1000 SSTAG Description 1/2", 2W, NPT, Cv=0.19 1/2", 2W, NPT, Cv=0.29 1/2", 2W, NPT, Cv=0.47 1/2", 2W, NPT, Cv=0.74 1/2", 2W, NPT, Cv=1.2 1/2", 2W, NPT, Cv=1.9 3/4", 2W, NPT, Cv=2.9 3/4", 2W, NPT, Cv=4.9 1/2", 3W, NPT, Cv=0.29 1/2", 3W, NPT, Cv=0.47 1/2", 3W, NPT, Cv=0.74 1/2", 3W, NPT, Cv=1.2 1/2", 3W, NPT, Cv=1.9 3/4", 3W, NPT, Cv=2.9 3/4", 3W, NPT, Cv=4.9 Two-position or tri-state (oating), 24 VAC, fail-in-place Proportional (0/2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA), 24 VAC, fail-in-place Maximum Closeoff Pressure 65 psid 65 psid 65 psid 65 psid 65 psid 65 psid 45 psid 45 psid 55 psid 55 psid 55 psid 22 psid 22 psid 26 psid 26 psid Weight 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) 0.9 lb (0.41 kg) 0.9 lb (0.41 kg) 0.7 lb (0.32 kg) 0.7 lb (0.32 kg) 0.7 lb (0.32 kg) 0.7 lb (0.32 kg) 0.7 lb (0.32 kg) 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) 0.55 lb (0.25 kg)
118
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Two- or three-way mixing body patterns Removable and replaceable actuator NPT or sweat connections Manual override Time-out option (tri-state actuator) Non-spring or spring return actuators
CONTROL VALVES
MODULATING POPTOP ZONE VALVES VM SERIES
The VM Series Modulating PopTop Zone Valves offer a wide variety of Cv ranges and control signal options for hot and chilled water. The PopTop valves are designed with removable actuators with tri-state or proportional control and either non-spring or spring return action. The valves are available in two- and three-way body patterns, 1/2" to 1-1/4" sizes, and in NPT or sweat pipe connections. An optional motor timeout actuator is available for controllers that do not automatically turn off their signals after the full stroke of the valve.
AP23A000 with VM2313 VM2211
AT33A000
PIPING
CONTROL VALVES
B
Coil
A
Return Supply
B
Coil
Return
Supply
Modulating Three-way Valve (mixing only)
Modulating Two-way Valve
Note: Piping is the same for N.O. or N.C. type valves. Normal (Open, Closed) position refers to flow through the coil.
SPECIFICATIONS
1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" 1.0 to 8.0 FNPT, Sweat, or 1/2" SAE are valve body connections Flow Characteristic Equal Percentage for Cv 1 to 4; linear for Cv 8.0 Leakage Rating ANSI Class IV (0.01% of rated capacity) Maximum Closeoff Pressure Cv 1.0: 50 psid (344 kPa) Cv 2.0: 50 psid (344 kPa), 20 psid (137 kPa) spring return Cv 4.0: 35 psid (241 kPa), 20 psid (137 kPa) spring return Cv 8.0: 35 psid (241 kPa), 15 psid (103 kPa) spring return Maximum Pressure Rating 300 psig (2067 kPa) Materials Of Construction Brass valve body and seat, chromeplated stem, thermoplastic plug; high-temperature plastic actuator housing Media Compatibility Hot or chilled water; 50% or less ethylene glycol Media Temperature Range 32 to 200F (0 to 93C) Supply Voltage 24 VAC 15%, 50/60 Hz Size Cv Range Connections 1 VA (AT non-spring); 1.2 VA (AT w/ timeout); 1.7 VA (AP non-spring); 10 VA (AT/AP spring-return) Control Signal AT actuators: tri-state (oating); AP actuators: proportional (0-5, 0-10, 5-10 VDC or 4-20 mA) jumper selectable 200 k (0-10 VDC); 300 (4-20 mA) Input Impedance Wiring Terminals Action Two-way valves: N.O./N.C. determined by choice of actuator; three-way valves: use only N.C. actuator Actuator Compatibility AT (tri-state) or AP (proportional 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA) type actuators only Poptop Actuator Mounting Drive Time 150 seconds @ 60 Hz Spring Return Time 9 seconds maximum Manual Override Combination override lever and position indicator, all actuators Operating Temperature Maximum ambient 125F (52C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing Weight Valve plus actuator assembly, <1.9 lb (0.86 kg) Enclosure Rating NEMA 1 Approvals UL873, File #E9429 Class 2; CUL Canadian Standards C22.2 No. 24; CE Approved; C-Tick 2 years Warranty Supply VA
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
119
CONTROL VALVES
MODULATING POPTOP ZONE VALVES VM SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4.25 (10.80) 3 .81 (9.68) 0.19 (0.48) 0.13 (0.33)
VALVE BODY SIZE A 1-5/16 (3.33) 1-3/8 (3.49) 1-11/16 (4.29) 1-7/8 (4.76) 1-2/8 (3.49) 1-11/16 (4.29) 1-7/8 (4.76) 4-9/16 (11.59)
4.25 (10.80) 3 .81 (9.68)
0.19 (0.48)
0.13 (0.33)
DIMENSIONS
B 15/16 (2.38) 15/16 (2.38) 15/16 (2.38) 1 (2.54) 15/16 (2.38) 15/16 (2.38) 1 (2.54) 5/16 (0.31) C 1-5/16 (3.33) 1-11/16 (3.33) 1-11/16 (3.33) 1-13/16 (4.76) 1-5/16 (3.33) 1-7/16 (3.65) 1-11/16 (4.29) 2-1/4 (5.72) 1/2" sweat 3/4" NPT 1'' sweat 1-1/4" sweat 1/2'' NPT/BSP 3/4" NPT/BSP 1" NPT/BSP 1/2" SAE flare
2.25 (5.72)
2.25 (5.72)
3.06 (7.77)
3.06 (7.77)
1.63 (4.14)
1.63 (4.14)
2-Way 3-Way
2-Way 3-Way
CONTROL VALVES
A 2.0 (5.08)
1.56 (3.96)
1.19 (3.02)
A 2.0 (5.08)
1.56 (3.96)
1.19 (3.02)
Spring Return WIRING

Floating thermostat CLOSE COM OPEN 24 VAC 24 VAC transformer 24 VAC transformer
Non-Spring Return
Modulating signal Required for spring return models
24V COM SIGNAL IN
Signal Jumper J3 0-10V 0-5V 5-10V 4-20 mA DA/RA
AT Series Tri-state Valve
AP Series Proportional Valve
VALVE
MODEL DESCRIPTION VM Modulating PopTop electric valve CONFIGURATION 2 Two-way 3 Three-way VALVE SIZE 2 1/2" 3 3/4" 4 1" 5 1-1/4" CONNECTION Sweat - 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4" 1 2 Threaded NPT - 1/2", 3/4", 1" 5 1/2'' SAE flare CV SIZE 1 1.0 1/2" 1/2", 3/4" 2 2.0 1/2", 3/4", 1" 3 4.0 1", 1-1/4" 7 8.0 VM 2 2 2 1 Example: VM2221
MODEL DESCRIPTION A VM Series actuator CONTROL T Three-wire floating P Proportional, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA ACTION 1 Normally closed spring return* 2 Normally open spring return 3 Non-spring return TEMPERATURE RATINGS 3 General temperature only VOLTAGE 24 VAC only A LEADS 00 No leads TIMEOUT CONFIGURATION T Time-out for AT models 0 No timeout for AT models All AP models A T 3 3 A 00 0 Example: AT33A000
ACTUATOR
* Three-way valves are compatible only with N.C. actuators. For N.O. simply turn the valve around.
BODY AND ACTUATOR REQUIREMENTS Body Configuration VX3XXX Spring Return Action Configurations Actuator Spring Return Mode AX1XXXX
1 = Normally Closed 2 = Normally Open If actuator action is 1, body configuration can be 2 or 3. If actuator action is 2, body configuration must be 2.
2 = Two-way 3 = Three-way If body configuration is 2, actuator action can be 1 or 2. If body configuration is 3, actuator action must be 1.
120
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
CONTROL VALVES
TWO-POSITION POPTOP ZONE VALVES VT SERIES
The VT Series Two-Position PopTop zone valves offer a wide range of models to handle chilled water, hot water, and 15 psig (103 kPa) steam applications. PopTop valves feature removable actuators to aid in both installation and service. They are available in 2-way and 3-way body patterns and with normally open or normally closed actuators.
AG13A02A
3
VT2221 AH23B020
Two- or three-way mixing/diverting body patterns Removable and replaceable actuator NPT, sweat, or inverted are connections 2-position spring return control
CONTROL VALVES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
F 3/4 (1.91) 3/4 (1.91) G 3-5/16 (8.41) 3-1/4 (8.26) H
VALVE BODY SIZE 1/2" Sweat 3/4" Sweat 1" Sweat 1/2" NPT 3/4" NPT 1" NPT Inverted flare union ACTUATOR AG AH
A 1-5/16 (3.33) 1-3/8 (3.49) 1-11/16 (4.29) 1-3/8 (3.49) 1-11/16 (4.29) 1-7/8 (4.76) 1-3/8 (3.49) E 2-3/8 (6.03) 2-5/8 (6.67)
DIMENSIONS B C 7/8 (2.22) 7/8 (2.22) 7/8 (2.22) 7/8 (2.22) 7/8 (2.22) 1 (2.54) 7/8 (2.22) F 3-11/16 (9.36) 3-7/8 (9.84)
7/8 (2.22)
1-5/16 (3.33) 3-5/16 (8.41) 1-11/16 (4.29) 3-3/8 (8.57) 1-11/16 (4.29) 3-5/8 (9.21) 1-5/16 (3.33) 3-3/8 (8.57) 1-7/16 (3.65) 3-5/8 (9.21) 1-3/4 (4.45) 3-7/8 (9.84) 1-5/16 (3.33) 4-1/8 (10.48) G 2-3/8 (6.03) 2-3/8 (6.03) H 1-1/4 (3.18) 1-1/4 (3.18)
B Two-way C Three-way
Actuator release (with power-off push and pull up)
A D
PIPING
N.C. actuator N.O. actuator N.C. actuator
N.C. actuator
B
Coil
Return
B
Coil
Return
B
Coil
A
Return Supply
B
Coil
A
Supply Return
Supply
Supply
WIRING
680-243 Changeover thermostat pipe-mounted
Two-position snap acting thermostat SPST
Two-position snap acting thermostat SPDT
AC Power
AC Power
Heating or Cooling Valve
Heating and Cooling Valve
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
121
CONTROL VALVES
TWO-POSITION POPTOP ZONE VALVES VT SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Size 1/2", 3/4", 1" Cv Range 1.0 to 8.0 Connections FNPT, Sweat, or inverted are (3/4" only) Flow Characteristic Quick Opening Leakage Rating ANSI Class IV (0.01% of rated capacity) Maximum Closeoff Pressure Cv 1.0-1.5: 60 psid (414 kPa) AG actuator, 75 psid (517 kPa) AH actuator Cv 2.5-3.0: 40 psid (276 kPa) AG actuator, 50 psid (345 kPa) AH actuator Cv 3.5-4.0: 25 psid (172 kPa) AG actuator, 30 psid (207 kPa) AH actuator Cv 5.0: 20 psid (137 kPa) AG actuator, 25 psid (172 kPa) AH actuator Cv 7.5-8.0: 17 psid (117 kPa) AG actuator, 20 psid (137 kPa) AH actuator Maximum Pressure Rating 300 psig (2067 kPa) Materials Of Construction Brass valve body and seat, nickel-plated stem, BUNA N paddle; stainless steel base plate and aluminum cover on actuator Media Compatibility Hot or chilled water; 50% or less ethylene glycol; 15 psig steam Media Temperature Range 32 to 200F (0 to 93C) with AG actuator; up to 250F (121C) with AH actuator Supply Voltage Supply VA Supply Watts Control Signal Wiring Action Actuator Compatibility Actuator Mounting Auxiliary Contacts Auxiliary Switch Drive Time Manual Override Operating Temperature Spring Return Time Weight Approvals Warranty 24 VAC 10%; 120 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz; 208-277V models also available 7 VA 6.5 W Two-position, two-wire 18" (45.2 cm) leads Two-way valves: N.O./N.C. determined by choice of actuator; three-way valves: N.C. actuator only AG (general purpose) or AH (high performance) type actuators only Poptop N.O. contacts, 24-240 VAC, 5A Models with auxiliary switch available 25 seconds maximum @ 60 Hz N.C. actuators only AG actuator: maximum ambient 104F (40C); AH actuator: maximum ambient 169F (77C) 9 seconds maximum Valve bodies: <1.4 lb (.64 kg) Actuators: 1.0 lb (.45 kg) UL and ULc Listed; CE 2 years
CONTROL VALVES
VALVE
MODEL DESCRIPTION V Two-position PopTop electric valve TEMPERATURE T Water S Steam (must use high temperature actuator) CONFIGURATION 2 Two-way 3 Three-way CV SIZE 2 1/2" 3 3/4" 4 1" CONNECTION Sweat - 1/2", 3/4", 1" 1 2 NPT - 1/2", 3/4", 1" 4 Inverted flare - 3/4" only CV CAPACITY 2-way 3-way Size 1 1.0 1.5 1/2'' 2 2.5 3.0 1/2'', 3/4'' 3 3.5 4.0 1/2'', 3/4'' 5 5.0 5.0 3/4'', 1'' 7 7.5 7.5 3/4'' 7 8.0 8.0 1'' V T 2 2 1 1 Example: VT2211
ACTUATOR
MODEL DESCRIPTION A VT Series actuator CLOSEOFF G General operation H High performance VALVE OPERATION 1 Normally closed* 2 Normally open** TEMPERATURE 3 Normal 4 Steam VOLTAGE 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz A B 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz D 208 VAC, 60 Hz T 277 VAC, 60 Hz U 230/220 VAC, 50 Hz LEADS 02 18'' Leads OPTIONS 0 None A End switch G 1 3 A 02 0 Example: AG13A020
Note: Valve and actuator shipped separately.
*Inverted flare fittings not included with valve. They are field-supplied.
* Three-way valves use N.C. actuator only; reverse ports for N.O. ** No manual override.
SSTAG 680-243-6 30-158-A 30-158-B 30-158-D 30-158-T 30-158-Y 436-252
RELATED PRODUCTS Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order Changeover thermostat with conduit tting ACCESSORIES AG/AH Series actuator replacement motor, 24 VAC AG/AH Series actuator replacement motor, 110/120 VAC AG/AH Series actuator replacement motor, 208 VAC AG/AH Series actuator replacement motor, 277 VAC AG/AH Series actuator replacement motor, 230/240 VAC 3/4" are-to-sweat tting
122
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
FEATURES Industry standard Red Hat II Wide range of sizes and options High ow rates, low pressure drop Long service life For hot or chilled water, air or inert gases 1/2" NPT conduit connection standard Lead wires standard Not polarity sensitive APPLICATION
CONTROL VALVES
RED HAT SOLENOID VALVES 8210 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The ASCO 8210 Series solenoid valves are general service, pilot operated, two-way solenoid valves for liquid and air/inert gas applications. They are available in normally closed or normally open operation with coil voltages to meet any typical application. The 8210 Series come completely assembled with conduit connection and wire leads.
CONTROL VALVES
The 8210 Series valves are general purpose, and the standard models are suitable for most clean liquids (hot and chilled water, light oils), air and inert gas applications. They are ideal for boiler and cooling tower ll valves. There are also many options available for the 8210 Series, such as explosionproof enclosures, manual operators, junction box/ terminal block wiring connections, and different seal materials for more demanding media. Many solenoid valves are pilot-operated and require a differential pressure to open/close. Applications such as gravity drain for tanks or vacuum applications may not generate enough differential pressure across the valve for the valve to operate. In these applications, choose a direct-acting valve which is indicated in the ASCO catalog with a minimum differential pressure of zero. Other types of ASCO valves, also available through Kele, include valves for hot water/steam service, cryogenic service, fuel service, intrinsicially safe applications, and pneumatic control systems.
WIRING
RED RED
Control contact GRN Power (coil voltage)
Note: ASCO solenoid valves are not polarity sensitive. Grounding the green wire is strongly recommended.
SPECIFICATIONS
Size 1/2" NPT to 2" NPT Cv 4.0, 5.0, 13, 15, 22, 43, 5.5 Materials Of Construction Brass body, NBR or PTFE seals and discs Media Compatibility Clean hot or chilled water, air or inert gas Media Temperature Range Maximum 180F (82C) water temperature Supply Voltage 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 24 VAC, 60 Hz N.C., N.O. (valve body determines action) Operating Pressure Minimum 5 psid (35 kPa), maximum 125 to 150 psid (862 to 1034 kPa), varies by model Operating Temperature 32 to 125F (0 to 52C) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (standard Red Hat II enclosure) Approvals CSA, UL Listed, CE Warranty 1 year Action
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
123
CONTROL VALVES
RED HAT SOLENOID VALVES 8210 SERIES
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
1/2 NPT
Model 8210G2 8210G9 8210G4 8218G8 8210G22 8210G100 8210G34 8210G35 8210G14 8210G18 8210G32 8210G103
Size 1/2" NPT 3/4" NPT 1" NPT 1-1/4" NPT 1-1/2" NPT 2" NPT 1/2" NPT 3/4" NPT 1" NPT 1-1/4" NPT 1-1/2" NPT 2" NPT
H 3.1 (8.6) 3.6 (9.2) 5.6 (14.3) 5.6 (14.3) 6.1 (15.6) 7.3 (18.6) 4.3 (11.0) 4.6 (11.6) 6.5 (16.6) 6.5 (16.6) 7.0 (17.9) 8.2 (20.9)
L 2.8 (7.0) 2.8 (7.1) 3.8 (9.5) 3.7 (9.3) 4.4 (11.1) 5.1 (12.9) 2.8 (7.0) 2.8 (7.1) 3.7 (9.3) 3.7 (9.3) 4.4 (11.1) 5.1 (12.9)
Width
3
NPT, both ends
CONTROL VALVES
2.8 (7.2) 2.3 (5.9) 3.0 (7.6) 2.3 (5.9) 4.0 (10.2) 2.9 (7.5) 4.0 (10.2) 3.4 (8.6) 4.2 (10.6) 3.4 (8.6) 4.7 (11.9) 4.7 (11.9) 3.8 (9.6) 2.3 (5.8) 3.9 (10.0) 2.3 (5.8) 4.9 (12.5) 3.4 (8.6) 4.9 (12.5) 3.4 (8.6) 5.1 (12.9) 3.8 (9.5) 4.7 (11.9) 4.7 (11.9)
Weight lb (kg) 1.9 (.86) 2.7 (1.2) 4.4 (2.0) 5.6 (2.5) 5.8 (2.6) 7.2 (3.3) 1.9 (.86) 2.7 (1.2) 4.4 (2.0) 5.6 (2.5) 5.8 (2.6) 7.2 (3.3)
MODEL 8210G2-120/60 8210G2-24/60 8210G9-120/60 8210G9-24/60 8210G4-120/60 8210G4-24/60 8210G8-120/60 8210G8-24/60 8210G22-120/60 8210G22-24/60 8210G100-120/60 8210G100-24/60 8210G34-120/60 8210G34-24/60 8210G35-120/60 8210G35-24/60 8210G14-120/60 8210G14-24/60 8210G18-120/60 8210G18-24/60 8210G32-120/60 8210G32-24/60 8210G103-120/60 8210G103-24/60 DESCRIPTION 1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 120 VAC coil 1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 24 VAC coil 3/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 120 VAC coil 3/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 24 VAC coil 1" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 120 VAC coil 1" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 24 VAC coil 1-1/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 120 VAC coil 1-1/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 24 VAC coil 1-1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 120 VAC coil 1-1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 24 VAC coil 2" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 120 VAC coil 2" NPT solenoid valve, N.C., 24 VAC coil 1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 120 VAC coil 1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 24 VAC coil 3/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 120 VAC coil 3/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 24 VAC coil 1" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 120 VAC coil 1" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 24 VAC coil 1-1/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 120 VAC coil 1-1/4" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 24 VAC coil 1-1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 120 VAC coil 1-1/2" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 24 VAC coil 2" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 120 VAC coil 2" NPT solenoid valve, N.O., 24 VAC coil
SSTAG 238210-005-D 238210-032-D 238610-005-D 238610-032-D 272610-005-D 272610-032-D
RELATED PRODUCTS Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order ACCESSORIES 24 VAC coil N.C., (1/2"-2") 120 VAC coil N.C., (1/2"-2") 24 VAC coil N.O., (1/2"-3/4") 120 VAC coil N.O., (1/2"-3/4") 24 VAC coil N.O., (1"-2") 120 VAC coil N.O., (1"-2")
124
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
CONTROL VALVES
SOLENOID VALVES EVSI SERIES
The EVSI Series solenoid valves are two-way, two-position valves for clean water or low pressure steam applications and are available in normally closed or normally open operation. EVSI Series valves are pilot-operated and designed for nonwater hammer operation. They come completely assembled with coil and are UL recognized and CSA listed. The coils also include a gasketed conduit connector for NEMA 4 (IP65) environmental rating.
Anti-water hammer design For hot or chilled water and low pressure steam Fully encapsulated molded coils 1/2" threaded conduit connection Enclosed screw terminals NEMA 4 (IP56) environmental rating Modular conduit connection for easy installation Unique snap-on coil, no tools required
CONTROL VALVES
EVSI-20-NC-24
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
H TYPE EVSI 15 EVSI 20 EVSI 25 EVSI 32 H1 EVSI 40 EVSI 50 B NPT 0.5" 1" L in (cm) B in (cm) H1 in (cm) H* in (cm) Weight w/o coil lbs (kg) 1.8 (0.80) 2.2 (1.0) 4.4 (2.0) 9.6 (4.3) 7.1 (3.2) 3.1 (1.4)
0.75" 1.25" 1.5" 2"
3.25 (8.3) 4.6 (11.6) 4.8 (12.2) 5.2 (13.2) 6.4 (16.2) 3.7 (9.4)
2.25 (5.8) 2.75 (7.0) 3.25 (8.2) 4.4 (11.3)
2.1 (5.2)
0.6 (1.5) 0.7 (1.8) 0.7 (2.7) 1.4 (3.7)
3.7 (9.4) 3.9 (9.8)
0.9 (2.2) 4.25 (10.8) 4.5 (11.5) 5.1 (13.0)
3.75 (9.5) 1.25 (3.2) 4.9 (12.4)
* For normally open valves + 3/16" (0.5 cm). 018F coil weight = 0.75 (0.34)
SPECIFICATIONS
Size 1/2" FNPT to 2" FNPT Cv 4.6, 9.3, 12.3, 21, 28, 46.7 Life Expectancy 800,000 cycles minimum Maximum System Pressure 225 psig (1550 kPa) for 1/2" and 3/4" valves; 180 psig (1240 kPa) for 1" to 2" valves Pressure Drop Minimum differential pressure 4.3 psid (30 kPa) to operate the pilot; maximum differential pressure 142 psid (980 kPa) Materials Of Construction Brass valve body, EPDM gasket Media Compatibility Clean hot or chilled water or glycol, steam 15 psig Media Temperature Range -22 to 248F (-30 to 120C) Supply Voltage 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 14 W 1/2" NPT Screw terminals inside DIN connector accept 16 to 18 AWG wire; DIN spades on encapsulated coil Action N.C., N.O. (valve body determines action) Stroke Time .04 seconds opening time, 0.35 seconds closing time for 1/2" valves; up to 5.0 seconds opening time, 10.0 seconds closing time for 2" valves Manual Override EVSI-MOM manual override magnet, order seperately Operating Temperature 32 to 120F (0 to 50C) Dimensions Coil, 2.5"H x 1.8"W x 2.4"D (5.7 x 4.6 x 6.1 cm) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (IP65) with waterproof conduit connection Warranty 1 year Supply Watts Conduit Connection Wiring Terminations
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
125
CONTROL VALVES
SOLENOID VALVES EVSI SERIES
WIRING
Co o
1 2
ro 24,120, or 240 VAC
Flathead screwdriver
2 1
CONTROL VALVES
Conduit Connector Assembly
Note: The coil can rotate to any desirable direction, and the conduit connector can be oriented up, down, or to either side.
MODEL DESCRIPTION EVSI Solenoid valve SIZE (NPT) 15 1/2", Cv = 4.6, opening time 0.04 sec, closing time 0.35 sec 20 3/4", Cv = 9.3, opening time 0.04 sec, closing time 1.0 sec 25 1", Cv = 12.3, opening time 0.30 sec, closing time 1.0 sec 32 1-1/4", Cv = 21.0, opening time 1.0 sec, closing time 2.5 sec 40 1-1/2", Cv = 28.0, opening time 1.5 sec, closing time 4.0 sec 50 2", Cv = 46.7, opening time 5.0 sec, closing time 10.0 sec NORMAL MODE NC Normally closed NO Normally open COIL VOLTAGE 24 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 120 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 240 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz EVSI 15 NC 24
Example: EVSI-15-NC-24 Solenoid valve with 1/2'' NPT, normally closed, and 24 VAC coil
018F7655 018F7663 018F7658
ACCESSORIES 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz replacement coil only 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz replacement coil only 208/240 VAC, 60 Hz replacement coil only
EVSI-MOM SSTAG
RELATED PRODUCTS Solenoid valve manual override magnet Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order
126
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
200 psi close-off 0.4 to 160 Cv ranges depending on valve size 600/WOG/ANSI 250 pressure rating Double o-ring stem packing Blow-out proof stem for high pressure safety Thermal barrier on universal mounting bracket
CONTROL VALVES
599 SERIES BALL VALVES 599 BALL VALVE SERIES
The Siemens 599 Series ball valves and valve actuators deliver comprehensive control solutions for almost any chilled water, hot water, or 50% glycol applications. Available in spring return, non-spring return, 2-position, oating, and proportional control these valves and actuators suit most applications. Two-way valves are available with chrome-plated brass ball and brass stem or stainless steel ball and stem for harsher conditions. The 599 Series has a wide variety of Cv ranges to help you size the control of your application correctly.
CONTROL VALVES
599 Series 2-way Ball Valve
599 Series 3-way Ball Valve
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections Female NPT Body Pattern 3 Way, 2 Way Leakage Class ANSI Class 1V Body Rating Forged Brass ASTM B283, C37733 Maximum Closeoff Pressure 200 PSI Materials Of Construction Forged Brass or Stainless Steel Media Compatibility 50% Water, Glycol Solution Media temperature 35 to 250F (2 to 121C) Actuator Compatibility Siemens GDE, GLB, GMA, GQD, Static pressure 360 psi (2482 kPa) Flow Optimizer Glass lled polymer Ball Nickel-plated brass or Stainless Steel Ball seals Reinforced PTFE seals with EPDM O-rings Female end connections Brass Stem Brass or stainless steel Stem seals EPDM O-rings Angle of rotation 0 to 90 degrees Close-off ratings per ANSI/FCI 70-2 Class IV for A-AB, Class III for B-AB Maximum operating differential pressure 60 psi Dimensions See Dimensions table Weight See Dimensions tables Warranty 2 Years
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
127
CONTROL VALVES
DIMENSIONS, 2-WAY REFERENCE GUIDE (See Figure 1)
C Length* Actuator Codes 171A-D, 173A-D GDE/GLB 1/2 (1.5) 3/4 (20) 0.4 to 10.0 6.3 to 25 10 1 (25) 16 40, 63 25 1-1/4 (3.2) 1-1/2 (4.0) 16 25 to 100 25, 63 40, 100, 160 40, 100 2 (5.0) 63 160 3-7/8 (98) 3-3/8(86) 3-11/16 (94) 3-5/8 (92) 3-15/16 (100) 4 (102) 4-5/8 (11.8) 7 (178) 6-11/16 (170) 6-15/16 (176) 7-1/16 (180) 7-1/16 (180) 7-1/2 (190) 2-7/16 (61) 2-3/4 (70) 3 (77) 3-1/4 (82) 6-11/16 (170) 6-11/16 (170) 6-11/16 (170) C Length* Actuator Codes 171H,J,K,L, N GQD 6 (153) 6 (153) C Length* Actuator Codes 171E,F,G,M,P 172E,F,G,M,P Fail-Safe GMA 8-3/8 (213) 8-3/8 (213) 8-11/16 (221) 8-7/16 (214) 8-11/16 (221) 8-7/16 (214) 8-3/4 (223) 8-3/4 (223) 9-1/8 (223) 7-5/8 (193) 8 (204) 8 (204) 8-5/15 (212) 8-13/16 (223) 8-3/8 (213) 8-13/16 (223) 8-13/16 (223) 9-1/4 (235) 9-3/8 (238) 10-1/16 (255) 0.50 (0.23) 0.78 (0.35) .97 (.44) 1.75 (0.79) 1.19 (54) 1.19 (0.54) 1.41 (0.64) 1.81 (0.82) 1.19 (0.54) 2.50 (1.13) 2.53 (1.14) 4.66 (2.11) 4.69 (2.13)
Line Size Inch (cm)
Cv Range
A Length
F Height
Weight lbs (kg)
CONTROL VALVES
*Dimension C is maximum length, measured from the actuator, end tting, or mounting plate, whichever extends the furthest.
DIMENSIONS, 3-WAY REFERENCE GUIDE (See Figure 2)

Line Size Inches (mm) 1/2 (15) Product Number 599-10350(S) through 599-10357(S) 599-10358(S) 3/4 (20) 599-10359(S) 599-10360(S) 599-10361(S) 1 (25) 599-10362(S) 599-10363(S) 599-10364(S) 599-10365(S) 599-10366(S) 1-1/2 (40) 599-10367(S) 599-10368(S) 599-10369(S) 599-10370(S) 2 (50) 599-10371(S) 599-10372(S) 4-5/8 (117) 7-1/4 (184) A Length C Length * for Actuator Codes 171A-D Codes 173A-D 6-11/16 (170) C Length * for Actuator Codes 171E-G 8-3/8 (213) B Height G Height F Height Weight lb (kg)
2-9/16 (65) 2-3/4 (70) 3-1/8 (79) 3-1/4 (83) 3-13/16 (77) 3-5/8 (92) 3-15/16 (100) 3-15/16 (100) 4-5/8 (117)
3-1/4 (83)
1-3/8 (35) 1-3/8 (35)
8-5/8 (219)
1.50 (0.68) 1.60 (0.73)
6-11/16 (170) 6-11/16 (170) 6-15/16 (176) 6-7/8 (174) 7 (178) 7 (178) 7-1/4 (184)
8-3/8 (213) 8-3/8 (213) 8-5/8 (219) 8-9/16 (217) 8-11/16 (221) 8-11/16 (221) 7-7/8 (200) 8-11/16 (221) 9-1/16 (230)
3-1/4 (83) 3-3/4 (95) 4 (102)
1-11/16 (43) 1-11/16 (43) 2 (51) 2-1/8 (54) 2-5/16 (59)
8-5/8 (219) 9-1/8 (232) 9-5/8 (244) 9-3/4 (248) 10-1/4 (260) 10-1/4 (260) 11 (279) 10-3/8 (264)
2.20 (1.00) 2.37 (1.08) 2.74 (1.24) 2.85 (1.29) 4.30 (1.95) 3.90 (1.76) 7.83 (17.16) 6.70 (3.04)
1-1/4 (32)
4 (102)
4 (102) 4-1/2 (114) 4-1/2 (114) 5-3/4 (146)
2-5/16 (59) 2-13/16 (71) 2-7/8 (73)
11-3/16 (284)
*Dimension C is maximum length, measured from the actuator, end tting, or mounting plate, whichever extends the furthest.
128
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DIMENSIONS 2-WAY
2-12" (60 mm) SERVICE ENVELOPE
CONTROL VALVES
FIGURE 1. DIMENSIONS WITH ACTUATOR
FIGURE 2. DIMENSIONS WITH ACTUATOR 3-WAY

2-1/2" (60 mm) SERVICE ENVELOPE
3
D
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
CONTROL VALVES
8" (200 mm) SERVICE ENVELOPE
END VIEW
END VIEW SIDE VIEW
SIDE VIEW
F B
B
A C
1" (25 mm) SERVICE ENVELOPE AT SIDES 4" (100 mm) SERVICE ENVELOPE Anti-rotation screw must be driven in fully for GDE/GLB actuators ONLY
G A
1" (25 mm) SERVICE ENVELOPE AT SIDES
C
Anti-rotation screw must be driven in fully for GDE/GLB actuators ONLY
NOTES: 1. All dimensions are in inches (mm) and weights are in pounds (kg) 2. Dimension D, Depth, is 3.7 inches (94.5mm) 3. Dimension E, Handle, is 5.3 inches (135.9 mm)
NOTES: 1. All dimensions are in inches (mm) and weights are in pounds (kg) 2. Dimension D, Depth, is 3 inches (76 mm) 3. Dimension E, Handle, is 4 inches (102 mm)
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
129
CONTROL VALVES
2-WAY Cv GUIDE
Product Numbers: 2-Way, Full-Port (No Flow Characterizer) Chrome-Plated Ball with Brass Stems or Stainless Steel Ball with Stainless Steel Stems and Flow Coefcients Valve Line Size in Inches (mm) 1/2 (15) 3/4 (20) 1 (25) Effective (Installed) Cv (Kvs) Valve Product Number* 599-10307 599-10307S 599-10311 599-10311S 599-10316 599-10316S 599-10321 599-10321S 599-10324 599-10324S 599-10326 599-10326S 599-10329 599-10329S Supply Line Size in Inches (mm) 1/2 (13) 10.00 (8.62) 3/4 (20) 6.94 (5.93) 25.00 (21.55) 1 (25) 6.19 (5.29) 18.66 (15.95) 63.00 (54.31) 1-1/4 (32) 15.35 (13.12) 39.78 (34.00) 100.00 (86.21) 1-1/2 (38) 33.56 (28.69) 69.19 (59.13) 63.00 (54.31) 160.00 (137.93) 2 (51) 51.45 (43.98) 55.34 (47.30) 93.80 (80.17) 100.00 (86.21) 2-1/2 (63) 51.00 (43.59) 76.34 (65.25) 94.30 (80.60) 3 (76) 86.12 (73.61) 4 (102) 5 (127) 6 (152)
CONTROL VALVES
1-1/4 (32) 1-1/2 (40) 2 (50)
= Valve may be oversized *S sufx = Stainless Steel
= Optimal valve size
= Valve may be undersized
3-WAY Cv GUIDE
Product Numbers: 3-Way, Full-Port (No Flow Characterizer) Chrome-Plated Ball with Brass Stems or Stainless Steel Ball with Stainless Steel Stems and Flow Coefcients Valve Line Size in Inches (mm) 1/2 (15) 3/4 (20) 1 (25) 1-1/4 (32) 1-1/2 (40) 2 (50) Effective (Installed) Cv (Kvs) Valve Product Number* 599-10357 599-10357S 599-10360 599-10360S 599-10363 599-10363S 599-10366 599-10366S 599-10369 599-10369S 599-10372 599-10372S Supply Line Size in Inches (mm) 1/2 (13) 10.00 (8.62) 3/4 (20) 6.94 (5.93) 16.00 (13.79) 1 (25) 6.19 (5.29) 13.9 (11.98) 25.00 (21.55) 1-1/4 (32) 12.4 (10.69) 22.5 (19.40) 40.00 (34.48) 1-1/2 (38) 21.2 (18.27) 36.9 (31.81) 63.00 (54.31) 2 (51) 33.3 (28.70) 55.3 (47.67) 100 (86.21) 2-1/2 (63) 51.00 (43.96) 94.3 (81.29) 3 (76) 86.1 (74.23) 4 (102) 5 (127) 6 (152)
= Valve may be oversized *S sufx = Stainless Steel
= Optimal valve size
= Valve may be undersized
130
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
VALVE SELECTION INFORMATION
2-WAY Valve Size in (mm) 0.5 (15) 0.5 (15) Close-Off PSI 200 psi Valve Body 599-10300 Flow Rate Cv 0.4 1 599-10301 200 psi 0.63 1.6 4 6.3 10 6.3 10 16 25 10 16 25 40 63 16 25 40 63 100 25 40 63 100 160 40 63 100 160 599-10302 0.5 (15) 200 psi 599-10303 0.5 (15) 200 psi 599-10304 0.5 (15) 200 psi 2.5 599-10305 599-10306 599-10307* 599-10308 599-10309 599-10310 599-10311 599-10312 599-10313 599-10314 599-10315 599-10316* 599-10317 599-10318 599-10319 599-10320 599-10321* 599-10322 599-10323 599-10324* 599-10325 599-10326 599-10327 599-10328 599-10329* 599-10330* 0.5 (15) 0.5 (15) 0.5 (15) 0.75 (20) 0.75 (20) 0.75 (20) 0.75 (20) 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25) 1.25 (32) 1.25 (32) 1.25 (32) 1.25 (32) 1.25 (32) 1.5 (40) 1.5 (40) 1.5 (40) 1.5 (40) 1.5 (40) 2 (50) 2 (50) 2 (50) 2 (50) 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi
CONTROL VALVES
3-WAY Valve Body 599-10350 599-10351 599-10352 599-10353 599-10354 599-10355 599-10356 599-10357* 599-10358 599-10359 599-10360* 599-10361 599-10362 599-10363* 599-10364 599-10365 599-10366* 599-10367 599-10368 599-10369* 599-10370 599-10371 599-10372* Valve Size in (mm) 0.5 (15) 0.5 (15) 0.5 (15) 0.5 (15) 0.5 (15) 0.5 (15) 0.5 (15) 0.5 (15) 0.75 (20) 0.75 (20) 0.75 (20) 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25) 1.0 (25) 1.25 (32) 1.25 (32) 1.25 (32) 1.5 (40) 1.5 (40) 1.5 (40) 2 (50) 2 (50) 2 (50) Close-Off PSI 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi 200 psi Flow Rate Cv 0.4 0.63 1 1.6 2.5 4 6.3 10 6.3 10 16 10 16 25 16 25 40 25 40 63 40 63 100 Weight (lbs) 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.64 1.64 2.26 2.26 2.26 3.5 3.5 3.5 5.16 5.16 5.16 5.16 5.16 5.16 8.5 8.5 8.5
Weight Lbs 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.78 0.78 0.78 0.78 1.19 1.19 1.19 1.19 1.19 1.81 1.81 1.81 1.81 1.81 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4.69 4.69 4.69 4.69
CONTROL VALVES
* Denotes a full-port valve without ow characterizer insert. Add S to the end of the valve body number to indicate stainless steel ball and stem
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
131
CONTROL VALVES
ACTUATOR SELECTION INFORMATION
Actuator Prex Code 171C = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 171D 171G 173C 173D 171K 171E Fail Position NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC Supply Voltage 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 120VAC 120VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 120VAC 120VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC Actuator Type NSR NSR SR NSR NSR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR NSR NSR SR SR NSR NSR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR SR Manual Override X X X X X X
Actuator GDE161.1P GLB161.1P GMA161.1P GDE161.1P GLB161.1P GQD151.1P GMA121.1P GQD121.1P GQD221.1U GMA221.1U GQD126.1P GMA126.1P GDE131.1P GLB131.1P GMA131.1P GQD131.1P GDE131.1P GLB131.1P GMA161.1P* GQD151.1P* GMA121.1P* GQD121.1P* GQD221.1U* GMA221.1U* GQD126.1P* GMA126.1P* GMA131.1P* GQD131.1P*
Control Signal Proportional, 0-10V Proportional, 0-10V Proportional, 0-10V Proportional, 0-10V Proportional, 0-10V Proportional, 2-10V On-Off, 2 position On-Off, 2 position On-Off, 2 position On-Off, 2 position On-Off, 2 position On-Off, 2 position Tri-state (oating), 3 position Tri-state (oating), 3 position Tri-state (oating), 3 position Tri-state (oating), 3 position Tri-state (oating), 3 position Tri-state (oating), 3 position Proportional, 0-10V Proportional, 2-10V On-Off, 2 position On-Off, 2 position On-Off, 2 position On-Off, 2 position On-Off, 2 position On-Off, 2 position Tri-state (oating), 3 position Tri-state (oating), 3 position
Valve Size 1/2" thru 1-1/4" 1-1/2" thru 2" 1/2" thru 2" 1/2" thru 1-1/4" 1-1/2" thru 2" 1/2" thru 3/4" 1/2" thru 2" 1/2" thru 3/4" 1/2" thru 3/4"
CONTROL VALVES
171H 171L 171M 171N 171P 171A 171B 171F 171J 173A 173B 172G 172K 172E 172H 172L 172M 172N 172P 172F 172J
X X X X X X X X X
1" thru 2" 1/2" thru 3/4" 1" thru 2" 1/2" thru 1-1/4" 1" thru 2" 1" thru 2" 1/2" thru 3/4" 1/2" thru 1-1/4" 1" thru 2" 1" thru 2" 1/2" thru 3/4" 1" thru 2" 1/2" thru 3/4" 1/2" thru 3/4"
X X X
1" thru 2" 1/2" thru 3/4" 1" thru 2" 1" thru 2" 1/2" thru 3/4"
* Actuator is mounted upside down to provide NC setting To Order a Valve Assembly, combine an Actuator Prex Code with the sufx of the valve body number from Valve Selection Table Example: 171C 10357 Part Number = = = GDE161.1P actuator 599-10357 valve body 171C-10357
132
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Equal percentage characteristic (2-way) Large Cv range from 0.8 to 57 Assembled, ready for installation Spring return or non-spring return actuators Floating, two-position, or proportional control
CONTROL VALVES
BALL VALVES B2, B3 SERIES
The B2 Series 2-way and B3 Series 3-way ball valves are used for two-position, oating or proportional control of HVAC hot or chilled water. The valves come assembled with direct coupled Belimo electric actuators with spring return or nonspring return operation.
B230/2F2N
CONTROL VALVES
B212/TR24-SR
SPECIFICATIONS
Size 1/2" to 2" NPT standard, larger sizes also available Cv Range 0.8 to 57 Body Pattern Two-way, three-way mixing or diverting Flow Characteristic Two-way equal percentage, threeway linear Leakage Rating 0% for port A to AB; 2% maximum for port B to AB Maximum Closeoff Pressure 200 psig (1380 kPa) Materials Of Construction Forged brass body with nickel plating, chrome plated (or stainless steel) ball, PTFE Teon seals, Tefzel characterized disc, EPDM o-rings Media Compatibility Hot or chilled water, <60% glycol Media Temperature Range 0 to 212F (-18 to 100C) Compatible Actuators Non-spring return TR, LRB, NRB, ARB; spring return TF, LF, AF Pressure Drop Maximum differential pressure 30 psid (207 kPa), higher could cause noise and/or damage Pressure Rating Two-way 1/2" to 1-1/4" 600 psig (4135 kPa) 1-1/4" (B231) to 2" 400 psig (2758 kPa) Three-way 1/2" to 1" 600 psig (4135 kPa) 1-1/4" to 2" 400 psig (2758 kPa) Approvals UL Listed, CSA, CE Warranty 5 years
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
133
CONTROL VALVES
DIMENSIONS
3
B-2 Series
Stainless Steel Valve Body B207-B211 B212-B216 B217-B221 B222-B225 B229-B230 B231-B232 B238-B240 B248-B250 B251-B254 B261-B265 B277-B280 Brass Valve Body B207B-B211B B212B-B216B B217B-B221B Valve Nominal Size Inches DN (mm) 15 0.5 0.5 15 0.5 20 1.0 25 1.25 32 1.25 32 1.5 40 2.0 50 2.0 50 2.5 65 3.0 80 Valve Nominal Size Inches DN (mm) 0.5 15 0.5 15 0.75 20 Dimensions - in (mm) A B 2.41 (61.1) 1.39 (35.2) 2.38 (60.4) 1.78 (45.2) 2.73 (69.3) 1.87 (47.4) 3.09 (78.4) 1.87 (47.4) 3.72 (94.6) 1.87 (47.4) 3.72 (94.6) 2.04 (51.9) 3.88 (98.5) 2.04 (51.9) 4.21 (107.0) 2.27 (57.7) 4.93 (125.2) 2.73 (69.5) 5.55 (140.9) 2.73 (69.5) 5.82 (147.9) 2.73 (69.5) Dimensions - in (mm) A B 2.38 (60.8) 1.39 (35.2) 2.38 (60.8) 1.78 (45.2) 2.73 (69.3) 1.87 (47.4)
B-3 Series
Stainless Steel Valve Nominal Size Valve Body Inches DN (mm) B307-B311 0.5 15 B312-B316 0.5 15 B317-B321 0.75 20 B322-B325 1.0 25 B329-B331 1.25 32 B338-B341 1.5 40 B347-B352 2.0 50 Brass Dimensions - in (mm) A B C 2.41 (61.1) 1.39 (35.2) 1.20 (30.6) 2.38 (60.4) 1.78 (45.2) 1.29 (32.8) 2.73 (69.3) 1.87 (47.4) 1.47 (37.3) 3.09 (78.4) 1.87 (47.4) 1.59 (40.3) 3.96 (100.6) 2.27 (57.7) 2.14 (54.3) 4.39 (111.6) 2.51 (63.7) 2.40 (61.1) 4.90 (124.5) 2.73 (69.5) 2.74 (69.7)
CONTROL VALVES
Valve Nominal Size Dimensions - in (mm) Valve Body Inches DN (mm) A B C B307B-B311 0.5 15 2.41 (61.1) 1.39 (35.2) 1.20 (30.6) B312B-B316B 0.5 15 2.38 (60.4) 1.78 (45.2) 1.29 (32.8) B317B-B321B 0.75 20 2.73 (69.3) 1.87 (47.4) 1.47 (37.3)
FLOW PATTERN
B Port must be piped to the bypass leg.
B-2 Series
B-3 Series
CAUTION: B port leakage rating on three-way valves is 0.5% to 2% of Cv. Do not pipe B port to the coil.
134
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
VALVE SPECIFICATION Valve # B209B B211B B212B B213B B214B B218B B219B B223 B224 B225 B230 B231 B240 B249 B250 B309B B311B B312B B313B B318B B323 B325 B330 B331 B340 B349 B350 Port Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way* Two-way* Two-way Two-way* Two-way Two-way* Cv Size 0.8 1/2" 1.9 1/2" 3.0 1/2" 4.7 1/2" 7.4 1/2" 7.4 3/4" 10.0 3/4" 10.0 1" 19.0 1" 30.0 1" 19.0 1-1/4" 25.0 1-1/4" 37.0 1-1/2" 46.0 2" 57.0 2" 0.8 1/2" 1.9 1/2" 3.0 1/2" 4.7 1/2" 7.4 3/4" 10.0 1" 30.0 1" 19.0 1-1/4" 25.0 1-1/4" 37.0 1-1/2" 46.0 2" 57.0 2" Three-way Three-way Three-way Three-way Three-way Three-way Three-way* Three-way Three-way Three-way Three-way Three-way TR24-3-T TR24-3-T TR24-3-T TR24-3-T TR24-3-T LRB24-3 LRB24-3 ARB24-3 ARB24-3 ARB24-3 ARB24-3 ARB24-3
CONTROL VALVES
SPRING RETURN (N.O. / CCW) Two-pos TFRB24 TFRB24 TFRB24 TFRB24 TFRB24 TFRB24 TFRB24 LF24 LF24 LF24 LF24 AFRB24 AFRB24 AFRB24 AFRB24 TFRB24 TFRB24 TFRB24 TFRB24 TFRB24 LF24 LF24 AFRB24 AFRB24 AFRB24 AFRB24 AFRB24 Tri-state Proportional TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR TFRB24-3 TFRB24-SR LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24-3 LF24-SR
AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT
NON-SPRING RETURN Two-pos/Tri-state Proportional Standard NEMA 4 Standard NEMA 4 TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4 TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4 TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4 TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4 TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4 TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4 TR24-3-T NRB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4 LRB24-3 NRB24-3-T-N4 LRB24-SR NRB24-SR-T-N4 LRB24-3 NRB24-3-T-N4 LRB24-SR NRB24-SR-T-N4 LRB24-3 NRB24-3-T-N4 LRB24-SR NRB24-SR-T-N4 LRB24-3 NRB24-3-T-N4 LRB24-SR NRB24-SR-T-N4 ARB24-3 NRB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR NRB24-SR-T-N4 ARB24-3 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T-N4 ARB24-3 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T-N4 ARB24-3 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T-N4 NRB24-3-T-N4 NRB24-3-T-N4 NRB24-3-T-N4 NRB24-3-T-N4 NRB24-3-T-N4 NRB24-3-T-N4 NRB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-3-T-N4 ARB24-3-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4 TR24-SR-T NRB24-SR-T-N4 LRB24-SR NRB24-SR-T-N4 LRB24-SR NRB24-SR-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T-N4 ARB24-SR ARB24-SR-T-N4
CONTROL VALVES
TFRB24-3 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-3 TFRB24-3 LF24-3 LF24-3

AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT
TFRB24-SR TFRB24-SR TFRB24-SR TFRB24-SR TFRB24-SR LF24-SR LF24-SR

AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT AFRB24-MFT
*No characterized disc; requires Cv adjustment for installation in pipe sizes larger than the valve. MODEL B_ _ _ / All valves are factory assembled. No field assembly required. DESCRIPTION Ball valve with brackets and mounting (select from above) _ _ _ _ Compatible actuator (select from above) (other options for the actuator family are also available)
Example: B209B / TR24-SR-T 1/2" ball valve, Cv=0.8, with proportional non-spring return actuator
Note: Standard ball valve construction is chrome-plated brass ball for 1/2" and 3/4" sizes (B sufx); stainless steel ball available as an option. On 1" sizes and larger, stainless ball is standard. Note: Multi-function Technology (MFT) model actuators are also available. Add -MFT to the base model number and specify the control signal conguration or the Belimo P-code for a pre-set MFT conguration (not required if to be eld congured, or if the default conguration of 2-10 VDC is required).
ZS-CCV-90 SSTAG ZS-CCV-110 ZS-CCV-100
RELATED PRODUCTS NEMA 4 weather shield for LF Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order NEMA 4 weather shield for AFB/AFR Nema 4 weather shield for LR/AR
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
135
CONTROL VALVES
HIGH TEMPERATURE BALL VALVES HTCCV SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The HTCCV Series 2-way high temperature ball valves are used for two-position, oating or proportional control of HVAC hot or chilled water, or low pressure steam. The valves come assembled with direct coupled Belimo electric actuators with spring return or non-spring return operation. This valve displays a true equal percentage characteristic. They come in standard sizes from 1/2 to 1 and Cvs from (0.29 to 28).
FEATURES
Equal percentage ow characteristic Assembled, ready for installation Spring return or non-spring return actuators Floating, two-position, or proportional control
CONTROL VALVES
B215HT029/LRB24-SR
SPECIFICATIONS
Size 1/2", 3/4" and 1" FNPT Cv Range 0.29 to 28 Body Pattern 2-way only Flow Characteristic Equal Percentage Leakage Rating 0%, bubble tight Maximum Closeoff Pressure 200 psid (1380 kPa) Materials Of Construction Brass body (DZR) P-CuZn35Pb2, stainless steel ball and stem, Tefzel characterized disc and seat, EPDM o-rings Media Compatibility Hot water, <60% glycol, <15 psig (104kPa) steam Media Temperature Range 60 to 266F (16 to 130C) water, limited to 250F (121C) for steam Compatible Actuators Non-spring return: TR, LRB; Spring return: TF, LF Non-spring return: TR, LRB; Spring return: TF, LF Pressure Drop Maximum differential pressure 60 psid (414 kPa) for water, 15 psid (104 kPa) for steam 600 psig (4135 kPa) Pressure Rating UL Listed, CSA, CE Approvals Warranty 5 years
DIMENSIONS
FLOW PATTERN
2-way High Temperature Characterized Control Valves
Flow direction
A INLET OUTLET AB
Valve Nominal Size
Dimensions - inches (cm)
Valve Body Inches DN (mm) A B C B215HT 1/2" 15 3.33 (8.46) 2.09 (5.32) 0.53 (1.35) B220HT 3/4" 20 3.96 (10.06) 2.37 (6.01) 0.67 (1.70) B225HT 1" 25 5.14 (13.06) 3.14 (7.98) 0.92 (2.325)
Upstream A Downstream AB Valve should be installed with the characterization disc downstream (unlike the CCV series valves).
Open Closed
136
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MOUNTING / PIPING DIAGRAMS
VALVE SPECIFICATION Port Valve# Cv Two-way B215HT029 0.29 Two-way B215HT046 0.46 Two-way B215HT073 0.73 Two-way B215HT116 1.16 Two-way B215HT186 1.86 Two-way B215HT290 2.9 Two-way B215HT455* 4.55 Two-way B220HT186 1.86 Two-way B220HT290 2.9 Two-way B220HT464 4.64 Two-way B220HT731 7.31 Two-way B220HT928 9.28 Two-way B220HT1320 13.2 Two-way B225HT464 4.64 Two-way B225HT731 7.31 Two-way B225HT1160 11.6 Two-way B225HT1856 18.56 Two-way B225HT2800 28 Size 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 1" 1" 1" 1 1" *Modied equal percentage characteristic
CONTROL VALVES
HIGH TEMPERATURE BALL VALVES HTCCV SERIES
Assembly can be mounted horizontally or vertically for water applications. For steam applications the valve can be mounted vertically but if mounted horizontally the valve must be 90 off center of the pipe. Do not install with actuator below pipe. Water application only Steam or water application
CONTROL VALVES
NON-SPRING RETURN Two-Pos/Tri-state Proportional TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T TR24-3-T TR24-SR-T LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LRB24-3 LRB24-SR LRB24-3 LRB24-SR
SPRING RETURN Two-Pos Tri-state Proportional TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR TF24 TF24-3 TF24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR LF24 LF24-3 LF24-SR
B_ _ _ / Select ball valve # from list above (brackets and mounting are included). Select actuator # from list above (other options for the actuator family are also available) Example: B215HT029 / TR24-SR 1/2" ball valve, Cv=0.29 with proportional non-spring return actuator All valves are factory assembled. No eld assembly required.
Note: Multi-Function Technology (MFT) model actuators are available. Add -MFT to the base model number and specify the control signal conguration or the Belimo P-code for a pre-set MFT conguration (not required if to be eld congured, or if the default conguration of 2-10 VDC is required).
SSTAG
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
137
CONTROL VALVES
BALL VALVES VG1000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Johnson Controls VG1000 Series ball valves are available with two- and three-way body patterns with a characterized insert for equal percentage ow control and Cv ratings in the range of traditional globe valves. They are available in connection sizes from 1/2" to 2" (Cv's from 1.2 to 73.7). The VG1000 Series valves are used in combination with spring return and non-spring return direct-coupled actuators from Johnson Controls. The VG1000 Series are designed to control chilled water, hot water, 50% glycol, and 15 psig steam (stainless trim models only).
FEATURES
CONTROL VALVES
Minimum 200,000 full cycle life expectancy Compatible with water, glycol, and low-pressure steam Equal percentage ow characteristics Assembled or ordered separately
DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS
Valve Size 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" A 6.30 (15.99) 6.30 (15.99) 6.38 (16.19) 6.81 (17.30) 6.97 (17.70) 7.17 (18.22) B 0.66 (1.67) 0.66 (1.67) 0.75 (1.91) 1.03 (2.62) 1.14 (2.90) 1.47 (3.73) C 2.52 (6.39) 2.80 (7.10) 3.41 (8.65) 3.94 (10.00) 4.33 (10.99) 4.84 (12.30)
* Dimension E is reduced by 0.59" (1.5 cm) for M9206-Bxx-2S Series two-position actuators. ** Dimension H is increased Minimum Clearance Required by 3" (7.6 cm) for M9210-BAx-3 Series 120 VAC two-position actuators. 3-1/2 (89)clearance over dimension A is 3.50" (8.89 cm) for all non-spring return actuators. Actuator replacement Actuator replacement clearance over dimension E is 4.50" (11.43 cm) for all spring return actuators. 2-13/16 5-1/2
(71) F
Dimensions in (cm) D E F 7.84 (19.91) 7.20* (18.30) 4.20 (10.6) 7.84 (19.91) 7.20* (18.30) 4.20 (10.6) 7.84 (19.91) 7.28* (18.49) 4.20 (10.6) 7.84 (19.91) 7.69* (19.53) 4.20 (10.6) 7.84 (19.91) 7.88* (20.00) 4.20 (10.6) 7.84 (19.91) 8.03 (20.40) 3.94 (10.0)
G 3.25 (8.25) 3.25 (8.25) 3.25 (8.25) 3.25 (8.25) 3.25 (8.25) 4.57 (11.6)
H 7.25 (18.42) 7.25 (18.42) 7.25 (18.42) 7.25 (18.42) 7.25 (18.42) 9.81** (24.92)
J 1.25 (3.18) 1.41 (3.57) 1.70 (4.33) 1.97 (5.00) 2.17 (5.52) 2.42 (6.16)
(140)
A B
C Diverting flow C
F A
Three-way
C B C B
E B
Two-way
Two-Way Valve
C Two-way
Non-spring Return Three-Way Valve
CE Three-way
G D
Two-way
Two-Way Valve
Three-Way Valve
Spring Return
Two-way
Mixing flow B With actuator fully ccw, port B = closed, Flow = A C With actuator fully cw, port A = closed, Flow = B C
Top view
Three-way Flow Pattern
SPECIFICATIONS
Size Cv Range Life Expectancy Body Pattern 1/2" to 2" FNPT 1.2 to 73.7 200,000 leak-free cycles Two-way and three-way mixing or diverting Flow Characteristic Equal percentage Leakage Rating ANSI Class IV (0.01% of Cv) Maximum Closeoff Pressure 200 psid (1378 kPa) Pressure Drop 50 psid (345 kPa) maximum; full port valves up to 150 psid (1034 kPa) Pressure Rating 580 psig (3996 kPa), PN40 Materials Of Construction Forged brass body, stainless steel (or chrome-plated brass) ball, stainless steel (or nickel-plated brass) stem, EPDM o-ring stem seals and graphite reinforced PTFE seats Hot or chilled water, <50% glycol, <15 psi steam (stainless trim models only) Media Temperature Range Stainless trim: 23 to 250F (-5 to 121C); Brass trim: 23 to 203F (-5 to 95C) Compatible Actuators Non-spring return: VA9104 (integral linkage) or M9109 w/M9000-520 linkage; Spring return: VA9203, VA9208 (integral linkage) Operating Temperature See M9100 Series and M9200 Series in ACTUATORS & DAMPERS catalog section Warranty 1 year Media Compatibility
138
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
2-WAY BRASS TRIM 2-WAY SS TRIM VALVE 3-WAY 3-WAY BRASS SS TRIM TRIM SIZE
1/2"
CONTROL VALVES
BALL VALVES VG1000 SERIES
NON-SPRING RETURN ACTUATOR FLOATING
VA9104-AGA-3S M9106-AGA-2 VA9104-AGA-3S M9106-AGA-2 VA9104-AGA-3S M9106-AGA-2 VA9104-AGA-3S M9106-AGA-2 VA9104-AGA-3S M9106-AGA-2 VA9104-AGA-3S M9106-AGA-2 VA9104-AGA-3S M9106-AGA-2 VA9104-AGA-3S M9106-AGA-2 VA9104-AGA-3S M9106-AGA-2 VA9104-AGA-3S M9106-AGA-2 VA9104-AGA-3S M9106-AGA-2 VA9104-AGA-3S M9106-AGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9106-AGA-2 M9109-AGA-2 M9109-AGA-2 M9109-AGA-2
SPRING RETURN ACTUATOR LINKAGE

INCLUDED M9000-520 INCLUDED M9000-520 INCLUDED M9000-520 INCLUDED M9000-520 INCLUDED M9000-520 INCLUDED M9000-520 INCLUDED M9000-520 INCLUDED M9000-520 INCLUDED M9000-520 INCLUDED M9000-520 INCLUDED M9000-520 INCLUDED M9000-520 M9000-520 M9000-520 M9000-520 M9000-520 M9000-520 M9000-520 M9000-520 M9000-520 M9000-520
CV
1.2
CLOSEOFF
200 PSIG
TWOPOSITION
PROPORTIONAL
VA9104-GGA-3S M9106-GGA-2 VA9104-GGA-3S M9106-GGA-2 VA9104-GGA-3S M9106-GGA-2 VA9104-GGA-3S M9106-GGA-2 VA9104-GGA-3S M9106-GGA-2 VA9104-GGA-3S M9106-GGA-2 VA9104-GGA-3S M9106-GGA-2 VA9104-GGA-3S M9106-GGA-2 VA9104-GGA-3S M9106-GGA-2 VA9104-GGA-3S M9106-GGA-2 VA9104-GGA-3S M9106-GGA-2 VA9104-GGA-3S M9106-GGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9106-GGA-2 M9109-GGA-2 M9109-GGA-2 M9109-GGA-2
TWOPOSITION
FLOATING
PROPORTIONAL
VA9203-GGA-2Z
VG1241AD
VG1245AD VG1841AD VG1845AD
VA9104-IGA-3S M9106-IGA-2
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z
VG1241AE
VG1245AE
VG1841AE
VG1845AE
1/2"
1.9
200 PSIG
VA9203-GGA-2Z
VG1241AF
VG1245AF
VG1841AF
VG1845AF
1/2"
2.9
200 PSIG
VA9203-GGA-2Z
VG1241AG
VG1241AG VG1841AG VG1841AG
1/2"
4.7
200 PSIG
VA9104-IGA-3S M9106-IGA-2 VA9104-IGA-3S M9106-IGA-2 VA9104-IGA-3S M9106-IGA-2 VA9104-IGA-3S M9106-IGA-2 VA9104-IGA-3S M9106-IGA-2 VA9104-IGA-3S M9106-IGA-2 VA9104-IGA-3S M9106-IGA-2 VA9104-IGA-3S M9106-IGA-2 VA9104-IGA-3S M9106-IGA-2 M9106-IGA-2 M9106-IGA-2 M9106-IGA-2 M9106-IGA-2 M9106-IGA-2 M9106-IGA-2 M9109-AGA-2 M9109-AGA-2 M9109-AGA-2
VA9203-GGA-2Z
CONTROL VALVES
VG1241AL
VG1245AL
VG1841AL
VG1845AL
1/2"
7.4
200 PSIG
VA9203-GGA-2Z
VG1241AN
VG1245AN VG1841AN VG1845AN
1/2"
11.7
200 PSIG
VA9203-GGA-2Z
VG1241BG
VG1245BG VG1841BG VG1845BG
3/4"
4.7
200 PSIG
VA9203-GGA-2Z
VG1241BL
VG1245BL
VG1841BL
VG1845BL
3/4"
7.4
200 PSIG
VA9203-GGA-2Z
VG1241BN
VG1245BN VG1841BN VG1845BN
3/4"
11.7
200 PSIG
VA9203-GGA-2Z
VG1241CL
VG1245CL VG1841CL
VG1845CL
1"
7.4
200 PSIG
VA9203-GGA-2Z
VG1241CN
VG1245CN VG1841CN VG1845CN
1"
11.7
200 PSIG
VA9203-GGA-2Z
VG1241CP VG1241DN VG1241DP VG1241DR VG1241EP VG1241ER VG1241ES VG1241FR VG1241FS VG1241FT
VG1245CP VG1841CP VG1845CP VG1245DN VG1841DN VG1845DN VG1245DP VG1841DP VG1845DP VG1245DR VG1841DR VG1845DR VG1245EP VG1245ER VG1245ES VG1245FR VG1245FS VG1245FT VG1841EP VG1841ER VG1841ES VG1841FR VG1841FS VG1841FT VG1845EP VG1845ER VG1845ES VG1845FR VG1845FS VG1845FT
1"
18.7
200 PSIG 200 PSIG 200 PSIG 200 PSIG 200 PSIG 200 PSIG 200 PSIG 200 PSIG 200 PSIG 200 PSIG
VA9203-BGA-2 VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-BGA-3 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-AGA-2 VA9208-AGA-2
VA9203-GGA-2Z VA9208-GGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2 VA9208-GGA-2
1-1/4" 11.7 1-1/4" 18.7 1-1/4" 29.2 1-1/2" 18.7 1-1/2" 29.2 1-1/2" 46.8 2" 2" 2" 29.2 46.8 73.7
For models with switches, change to actuator model number to include C instead of A at the end of the three letter insert. Example: VA9203-GGC-2Z Refer to actuator pages for wiring diagrams Notes: 1. Order optional thermal barrier M9000-561 for steam applications when using VA actuators. Barrier is included with linkage M9000-520. 2. Order optional weather shield M9000-341 for assemblies using VA actuators. Not available for assemblies using M actuators + linkage. 3. Valves are also available with sweat connections; models are VG1275 instead of VG1245, for example. 4. Valves are also available with press connections; models are VG1295 instead of VG1245, for example. 5. Spring return assembly model numbers have either -NC (normally closed) or -NO (normally open) sufx and will be pre-assembled as such. For 3W valves, normal refers to ow to the coil, port A. 6. Requires controller with timeout, or use M9106-IGA-2. No time out on M109. The M9106-IGA valve size limit is 1.5" maximum. 7. Valves, linkages, and actuators can be ordered separately or assembled (no extra charge). 8. Not all options shown in chart. Contact Kele for more information.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
139
CONTROL VALVES
BALL VALVES VBN2, VBN3 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The VBN2 and VBN3 Series are Honeywell's characterized ow, low torque, two- and three-way ball valves. They are designed to provide Cv ratings that closely match industry standard globe valves and they have equal percentage ow characteristics. A single-style bracket maximizes simplicity and exibility in mounting spring or non-spring return actuators. The valve bodies are 1/2" to 2" NPT sizes and use low torque, low cost actuators.
CONTROL VALVES
FEATURES
Parabolic ow insert constructed into the ball Cv ratings similar to globe valves Three-way body pattern similar to globe valves Low torque means smaller, lower cost actuators Common mounting bracket Removable manual override handle Flexible bracket orientation Plenum rated Available with or without actuator Nema 3R option available
VBN2, VBN3 Series
SPECIFICATIONS
Size Cv Range Body Pattern 1/2" to 3" FNPT (three-way to 2-1/2") 0.38 to 162 Two-way and three-way (mixing or diverting) Flow Characteristic Two-way: equal percentage for models with parabolic insert, linear for full port models; Three-way: equal percentage ports A-to-AB and linear ports B-to-AB Leakage Rating ANSI Class IV (0.01% of Cv) Maximum Closeoff Pressure Two-way 1/2" and 3/4": 130 psid (897 kPa); Two-way 1" to 3": 100 psid (690 kPa); Three-way 1/2" to 1": 50 psid (345 kPa); Three-way 1-1/4" to 2-1/2": 40 psid (276 kPa) Materials Of Construction Forged brass body (ASTM B283), nickel-plated brass (or stainless steel) ball and stem, EPDM o-ring stem seals and EPDM with reinforced Teon ball seals Hot or chilled water, <50% glycol Media Compatibility Media Temperature Range -22 to 250F (-30 to 121C) Compatible Actuators Any Honeywell or Kele 44 in-lb non-spring return or spring return actuator will operate all VBN2, VBN3 assemblies up to 3" Operating Temperature See MN Series, MVN Series, and MS Series in ACTUATORS & DAMPERS catalog section Pressure Rating 360 psig (2482 kPa) @ 250F (121C) Warranty 1 year on valves, 5 years on actuators
140
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ORIENTATION OF BALL IN VALVE
T POSITION ON TOP OF 3 WAY BALL VALVE STEM Stem
CONTROL VALVES
A AB A Full flow (only for 2-way bodies)
AB
AB
A AB
AB A
AB
B Full flow
B A and B mixed to AB, or A and B diverted from AB, depending on flow direction.
FLOW ORIENTATION
AB PORT SUPPLY A PORT COIL AB PORT RETURN A PORT COIL
CONTROL VALVES
B PORT RETURN SUPPLY
B PORT
DIVERTING
MIXING
Three-way ball valve flow for orientation (not to scale).
RANGEABILITY
Rangeability is a measure of a valves controllability. It is a measured property and is expressed as the ratio of a valves maximum ow rate to its minimum controllable ow rate. CV Rangeability CV Rangeability CV Rangeability CV Rangeability CV Rangeability CV Rangeability Cv Rangeability Cv Rangeability 0.38 41 0.31 41 4.40 159 4.40 159 23.00 484 42.00 603 45.00 250 49.00 250 2-WAY AVAILABLE CV AND RANGEABILITY 0.68 1.30 2.00 2.30 4.70 17 52 * 321 159 0.63 17 9.00 390 8.30 390 30.00 * 57.00 * 55.00 * 63.00 287 1.20 52 15.30 1040 14.90 1040 41.00 603 71.00 287 72.00 287 82.00 558 2.50 321 26.00 484 25.00 * 74.00 1263 100.00 * 101.00 558 124.00 750 4.30 159 44.00 1263 37.00 484 172.00 558 108.00 558 162.00 750 145.00 877 7.40 * 54.00 1207 41.00 1207 8.00 390 10.10 390 11.70 251 14.70 251 29.00 1503
VBN2A VBN2B VBN2C VBN2D VBN2E VBN2F VBN2G VBN2H
102.00 1263
210.00 750 202.00 877
266.00 877
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
141
CONTROL VALVES
DIMENSIONS
3
A C Pipe Model No. VBN2A VBN2B VBN2C 0.38, 0.68, 1.3, 2.0, 2.6, 4.7, 11.7 8.0 3/4" 1" 0.31, 0.63, 1.2, 2.5, 4.3, 7.4, 14.7 10.1, 29 9.0 4.4, 15.3, 54 26, 44 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" VBN2D VBN2E VBN2F VBN2G VBN2H 4.4, 8.3, 14.9, 25, 41 37, 102 23, 30, 74 41, 172 42, 108 57, 71, 100, 210, 266 45, 55, 72, 101, 162, 202 49, 63, 82, 124, 145 CV A 2-3/8 (60) 2-5/8 (67) 2-3/8 (60) 2-5/8 (67) 3-3/4 (95) 3 (76) 4-3/8 (111) 3 (76) 3-5/8 (92) 3-3/8 (86) 3-3/4 (95) 4 (102) 4-3/8 (111) 4-3/4 (121) 5 (127)
F B E D
Dimensions inches (mm) B 3-7/16 (87) 3-11/16 (94) 3-7/16 (87) 3-11/16 (94) 3-11/16 (94) 3-15/16 (100) 4-7/16 (113) 3-15/16 (100) 4-7/16 (113) 3-15/16 (100) 5-3/16 (132) 5-3/16 (132) 5-3/4 (146) 5-3/4 (146) 5-7/8 (149) C 6-5/8 (168) 6-1/2 (165) 6-7/16 (164) 6-1/2 (165) 7-1/16 (179) 6-3/4 (171) 7-3/8 (187) 6-11/16 (170) 7 (178) 6-15/16 (176) 7-1/16 (179) 7-3/16 (183) 7-7/16 (189) 7-9/16 (192) 7-11/16 (195) D 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) E 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) F 8-1/8 (206) 8-5/16 (211) 8-1/8 (206) 8-5/16 (211) 8-5/16 (211) 8-11/16 (221) 8-7/8 (225) 8-11/16 (221) 9-1/16 (231) 9-1/16 (231) 8-7/8 (225) 8-7/8 (225) 10-1/2 (267) 10-1/2 (267) 10-11/16 (271)
Weight lb (kg) 1 (0.5) 1 (0.5) 1 (0.5) 1 (0.5) 1 (0.5) 1.4 (0.6) 2.4 (1.1) 1.4 (0.6) 2.4 (1.1) 2.4 (1.1) 3.2 (1.5) 3.2 (1.5) 5 (2.3) 5.5 (2.5) 5.9 (2.7)
CONTROL VALVES
Size 1/2"
VBN2 dimensions in inches (millimeters)
F B E D
G A C Pipe Size 1/2" 3/4" 1" Model No. VBN3A VBN3B VBN3C CV 0.33, 0.59, 1.0, 2.4, 4.3, 8.0 0.40, 0.66, 1.3, 2.4, 3.8, 7.0, 11.0 0.40, 0.65, 1.3, 2.3, 3.5 8.6, 22 4.5, 14.9, 31 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" VBN3D VBN3E VBN3F VBN3G 4.1, 8.7, 19.0 12.7, 27, 34 4.0, 8.3, 13.4, 32 24, 61 24, 38, 57 83, 109 38, 74, 100 Dimensions inches (mm) C D E 7 (178) 6-1/2 (168) 7-5/16 (186) 6-13/16 (173) 7-13/16 (198) 6-13/16 (173) 7-5/16 (186) 7-13/16 (198) 7-5/16 (186) 7-5/16 (186) 7-13/16 (198) 7-13/16 (198) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 3 (76) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) 4 (102) Weight lb (kg) 2.4 (1.1) 2 (0.9) 2.8 (1.3) 2.6 (1.2) 3.3 (1.5) 2.5 (1.1) 2.8 (1.3) 3.3 (1.5) 3.3 (1.5) 3.3 (1.5) 3.8 (1.7) 3.8 (1.7)
A 3-1/2 (90) 2-13/16 (71) 3-13/16 (97) 3 (76) 4-1/2 (114) 3 (76) 3-5/8 (92) 4-1/2 (114) 4 (102) 4 (102) 5 (127) 5 (127)
B 3-5/16 (84) 3-5/16 (84) 3-5/16 (84) 3-13/16 4 (102) 3-13/16 4 (102) 4 (102) 4-1/2 (114) 4-1/2 (114) 5-13/16 5-13/16
F 9-3/8 (238) 8-13/16 (224) 9-1/2 (241) 9-13/16 (249) 10-13/16 (275) 9-13/16 (249) 10-5/16 (262) 10-13/16 (275) 11 (279) 11 (279) 12-5/16 (313) 12-5/16 (313)
G 2-3/8 (60) 2 (51) 2-3/4 (70) 2-5/8 (67) 3-1/4 (83) 2-1/2 (64) 2-3/4 (70) 3-1/4 (83) 3-1/4 (83) 3-1/4 (83) 3-3/4 (95) 3-3/4 (95)
VBN3 dimensions in inches (millimeters)
142
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
VBN 2 A B P A 1
CONTROL VALVES
ORDERING INFORMATION, VALVE BODY WITH ACTUATOR
MODEL VBN VB Series Ball Valve with Female NPT threaded connections CONFIGURATION 2 2-Way 3 3-Way CONNECTION SIZE A 1/2" B 3/4" C 1" D 1-1/4" E 1-1/2" F 2" G 2-1/2" H 3" (2-Way valves only) CODE for Cv SELECTION x See Tables 1 and 2 for the Ordering Code to place here VALVE TRIM P Nickel chrome plate brass S 316 stainless steel VALVE PROFILE A MVN standard (1/2", 3/4", 1" and 1-1/4" valves) L MVN low prole (1/2", 3/4", 1" and 1-1/4" valves only)** X MN, MS or Kele actuator base ACTUATOR 0 No actuator (valve body only) 1 MVN613 On/Off or oating (90 second timing) 2 MVN643 On/Off or oating (30 second timing) 3 MVN713 Modulating 4 MN6105A1011-Direct Coupled Actuator (DCA), oating On/Off (SPDT) 5 MN7505A2001-Direct Coupled Actuator (DCA), oating, modulation, On/Off (SPDT), Non-spring return 6 MS7505A2030- Direct Coupled Actuator (DCA), oating, modulation, On/Off (SPDT), Spring return 7 MS8105A1030- Direct Coupled Actuator (DCA), 2-Position (SPST), Spring return FAIL SAFE POSITION 0 Fail in place/ No actuator 1 Fail safe open 2 Fail safe closed 3 Fail A to AB Open 4 Fail B to AB Open OPTIONS 00 Standard actuator- no options 01 1 meter cable 02 NEMA 3R Enclosure (DCA actuators only) 1 00 Example: VBN2ABPA1100
CONTROL VALVES
*Standard base provides clearance between valve and actuator for insulation. **Low prole base enables insallation of valve and actuator in tight spaces. NOTE: All functions and options are not available with all versions
SSTAG
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
143
CONTROL VALVES
TABLE 1: VBN2 2-WAY VALVE CV CODE SELECTION CHART
Valve Size Cv 1-1/4" 1-1/2"
CONTROL VALVES
Ordering Code B D E F G H J K L M N P R S T U 1 2
1/2" 0.38 0.68 1.3 2.0 2.6 4.7 8.0 11.7
3/4" 0.31 0.63 1.2 2.5 4.3 7.4 10.1 14.7 29.0
1"
2"
2-1/2"
3"
4.4 9.0 15.3 26.0 44.0 54.0
4.4 8.3 14.9 25.0 37.0 41.0
23.0 30.0 41.0 74.0
102.0
42.0 57.0 71.0 100.0 108.0 210.0 266.0
45.0 55.0 72.0 101.0 162.0 202.0
49.0 63.0 82.0 124.0 145.0
172.0
TABLE 2: VBN3 3-WAY VALVE CV CODE SELECTION CHART

Valve Size Cv 1-1/4"
Ordering Code B C D E F G H J K L M N P R S T
1/2" 0.33 0.59 1.0 2.4 4.3 8.0
3/4" 0.4 0.66 1.3 2.4 3.8 7.0 11.0
1" 0.4 0.65 1.3 2.3 3.5 4.5 8.6 14.9 22.0 31.0
1-1/2"
2"
2-1/2"
4.1 8.7 12.7 19.4 27.0 34.0
4.0 8.3 13.4 24.0 32.0 61.0
24.0 38.0 57.0 83.0 109.0 38.0 74.0 100.0
144
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

CONTROL VALVES
BALL VALVE- V-BALL V-BALL SERIES
The VSI V-Ball Series is a unique, industrial-grade valve with temperature, pressure, leakage, and close-ff ratings that far exceed those of standard commercial grade valves. The V-Ball Series assures positive low-leakage control in higher pressure systems such as those with variable speed pumps. With a standard carbon steel body and a Standard ANSI 150/300 pressure-temperature rating, the V-Ball Series can handle up to 250 psi differential (closeoff) in hot or chilled water systems and up to 125 psi saturated steam. These valves excel in high-rise building applications and any hightemperature/high-pressure/high-range-ability application.
CONTROL VALVES
Up to 250 psi close off Good for chilled or hot water, 50% Glycol, and steam ANSI 150/300 Stainsless steel body available Thermal overload protection Internal heaters on selected actuators TFM 1700 seat Peek bearing ALFAS o-ring
VSI V-Ball Series
US
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes Threaded/Wafered 1" to 2" Flanged 3" to 6" Rangeability 300:1 turndown ratio Flow Characteristic Equal percentage Body Rating 1" to 2" ANSI 150/300 multi-rated 3" to 6" ANSI 150 or ANSI 300 Leakage Rating ANSI Class VI Media Compatibility 125 psi steam, 50% glycol Maximum Closeoff Pressure 250 psi Maximum System Pressure 300 psi Pressure Drop 100 psi Dimensions ASME B16.10 face to ace Materials (Standard): Body Carbon steel Ball 304 stainless steel Stem 304 stainless steel Seat PTFE Packing Teon Bushing Stanyl PA46 Materials (Optional): Body 304 stainless steel Shaft Bearing PTFE Seat Graphite Pressure Rating 250 psi Temperature Range -50 to 400F (-45C to 204C) Approvals CSA US File 226201 Warranty 1 year
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
145
CONTROL VALVES
CV VALUES
Flow Coefcients (Cv) for V-Series Ball Valves 1" - 6" Flow Coefcient Valve Size, Inches V-1 (1") V-1.5 (1.5") V-2 (2") V-3 (3") V-4 (4") V-6 (6") Valve Rotation in Degrees 10 0.04 0.07 0.09 1 4 5 20 0.5 3 4 12 22 33 30 3 7 10 29 46 79 40 5 12 21 49 86 148 50 8 21 34 68 130 230 60 12 29 43 117 195 330 70 17 40 65 157 279 440 75 24 55 77 207 350 507 80 29 68 85 215 421 575 90 31 73 96 270 529 850 Torque Required @ 250 psi Close Off in-lb 40 80 130 200 400 650
Cv
CONTROL VALVES
VALVE SIZE 1" 1.5" 2" 3" 3" 4" 4"-6" 6" 1"- 3"
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR SPECIFICATIONS (SIZED FOR 250 PSI CLOSE-OFF)

CLOSE OFF PSI 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 ELECTRIC ACTUATOR KA-44 KA-88 KAS-175 KA-301 EFB24 EFB24 (X2) GMB24 (X2) GKX24MFT(X2) 1005-X ELECTRIC POWER 24 VAC (6VA) 24 VAC (6VA) 24 VAC (16VA) 24 VAC (9VA) 24 VAC (6VA) 24 VAC (6VA) 24 VAC (6VA) 24 VAC (42VA) 24 VAC (40VA) or 120 VAC (40VA) 24 VAC (46VA) or 120 VAC (97VA) CONTROL TORQUE SIGNAL (IN/LB) 2-POS, FLOAT, 44 2-10 VDC 2-POS, FLOAT, 88 2-10 VDC 2-POS, FLOAT, 175 2-10 VDC 2-POS, FLOAT, 301 2-10 VDC 2-POS, FLOAT, 270 2-10 VDC 2-POS, FLOAT, 540 2-10 VDC 2-POS, FLOAT, 360 2-10 VDC 2-POS, FLOAT, 720 2-10 VDC 2-POS, FLOAT, 443 2-10 VDC, 4-20mA 2-POS, FLOAT, 885 2-10 VDC, 4-20mA FAIL SAFE YES YES YES NO YES YES NO YES NO RUN TIME (SECONDS) 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 20 DIMENSIONS (HxWxL) 8" x 7" x 9.25" (20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm) 8" x 7" x 9.25" (20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm) 8" x 7" x 9.25" (20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm) 8" x 7" x 9.25" (20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm) 8" x 7" x 9.25" (20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm) 8" x 7" x 9.25" (20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm) 8" x 7" x 9.25" (20.3 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm) 13" x 7" x 9.25" (33 x 17.8 x 23.5 cm) 6.3" x 5.4" x 6.3" (16 x 13.7 x 16 cm) 7.2" x 5.8" x 7.7" (18.2 x 14.7 x 19.6 cm)
4"-6"
250
1010-X
NO
30
1. Series 1000-X modulating units are equipped with control modules that accept 2-10V or 4-20mA control signal and feedback signal of 4-20mA. 2. The KA and KAS actuators are Kele brand direct coupled actuators and are rated NEMA 2 - indoor use. They can be used on the smaller sized 2-4" valves. The same applies to the G Series Belimo brand. 3. The Series 1000-X actuators are standard equipped with a heater and are NEMA 4 rated for outdoor usage.
146
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
KA / KAS ACTUATOR WIRING
2 3 4 24 VAC Line voltage
CONTROL VALVES
KA-175-2T - KA-301-2T Two-position Control
1 2 3 4 5
24 VAC + 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA
Line voltage
1 2 3 4 5 + 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA
+ 24 VDC
2 3 4
24 VAC
Line voltage
0/2-10 VDC feedback
0/2-10 VDC feedback
Floating Controller
KA-175-2T - KA-301-2T Floating Control

Relay contact or switch 1 2 24 VAC Line voltage
KA-301-P Proportional Control 24 VAC Power 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA Signal

1 2 3 4 5
KA-175-P - KA-301-P Proportional Control 24 VDC Power 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA Signal
CONTROL VALVES
24 VAC
Line voltage
1 2 3 4 5
24 VAC 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA 0/2-10 VDC feedback
Line voltage
Floating controller
* 500, 1/2"W or greater resistor required when control signal is 4-20 mA
KAS-175-2 Two-position Control
KAS-175-M Floating Control
KAS-175-M Proportional Control
1000 SERIES WIRING

PROPORTIONAL/MODULATING
ACTUATOR
TWO-POSITION
GND Y&G Grey Brown White
Heater OLS C CLS
Field Wiring
ACTUATOR
Field Wiring
7 6 5 4 3 K 2 1 PE Close N Full-close Signal Full-open Signal COM Open L
Grey Brown White Pink

1K RP
3 2 1
Full-close Signal Full-open Signal Com
Purple Orange
SERVO-CONTROLLER
C L
Black Red Blue

Push Button
+ Output Signal + Input Signal L Power Supply N HEATER
Black Red Blue
Thermal Protector
Thermal Protector Push Button*
PE
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
147
CONTROL VALVES
DIMENSIONS
D A
CONTROL VALVES
A B
VALVE SIZE 1" 1.5" 2"
SERIES V 2-WAY THREADED/WAFERED A B C D 15 5 7 10 17 6.5 8 10 19 7 9 10
A
B
VALVE SIZE 3" 4" 6"
SERIES V 2-WAY FLANGED A B C D 22.5 8 10.5 10 24 9 12 10 26.5 10.5 14.5 10
148
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
VALVE SIZE 1" 1.5" 2" 3" 4" 6" 1E2V 1005-X 1005-X 1005-X 1005-X 1010-X 1010-X VALVE SIZE 1" 1.5" 2" 3" 4" 6" 2E2D KA-44-2T KA-88-2T KA-175-2T KA-301-2T GMB24-3(X2) GMB24-3(X2) VALVE SIZE 1" 1.5" 2" 3" 4" 6" LP2SC D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 D-3244-5110 D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 VALVE SIZE 1" 1.5" 2" 3" 4" 6" HP21 / HP22 HP2S01 / HP2S02 C-DA63/WT8 C-DA63/WT8 C-DA63/WT8 C-DA63/WT8 C-DA83/WT8 C-DA092/WT8
CONTROL VALVES
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR CODES (NEMA 4 ELECTRIC)

2E2V 1005-X-24V 1005-X-24V 1005-X-24V 1005-X-24V 1010-X-24V 1010-X-24V 1EMV2 / 1EMV4 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-2(4) 1010/S-X 1010/S-X 2EMV2 / 2EMV4 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) 1010/S-X-24V-2(4) 1010/S-X-24V-2(4)
CONTROL VALVES
2E2DSC / 2E2DS0 KAS-44-2 KAS-88-2 KAS-175-2 EFB24 EFB24(X2) GKX24-MFT(X2)
2EMD KA-44-M KA-88-M KA-175-P KA-301-P GMB24-SR(X2) GMB24-SR(X2)
2EMDSC / 2EMDSO KAS-44-M KAS-88-M KAS-175-M EFB24-SR EFB24-SR(X2) GKX24-MFT(X2)
ACTUATOR CODES (LOW PRESSURE PNEUMATIC- 20PSI AIR)

LP2SO D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 D-3244-5110 D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 LPMSC D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120 D-3244-5100 D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100 LPMSO D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120 D-3244-5100 D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100
ACTUATOR CODES (HIGH PRESSURE PNEUMATIC-80 PSI AIR)

HP2SC1 / HP2SC2 C-SR63/WT8 C-SR63/WT8 C-SR83/WT8 C-SR83/WT8 C-SR105/WT8 C-SR125/WT8 HPM C-DA63/VP7G C-DA63/VP7G C-DA63/VP7G C-DA63/VP7G C-DA83/VP7G C-DA092/VP7G HPMSC / HPMSO C-SR63/VP7G C-SR63/VP7G C-SR83/VP7G C-SR83/VP7G C-SR105/VP7G C-SR125/VP7G
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
149
CONTROL VALVES
MODEL DESCRIPTION V V-Ball SIZE -1 1" -1.5 1.5" -2 2" -3 3" -4 4" -6 6"
ACTUATOR
-2E2V -2EMV2 -2EMV4 -1E2V -1EMV2 -1EMV4 -2E2D NEMA 4, 24V electric, 2-position NEMA 4, 24V electric, modulating, 2-10 VDC input NEMA 4, 24V electric, modulating, 4-20 mA input NEMA 4, 120V electric, 2-position NEMA 4, 120V electric, modulating, 4-20 mA input NEMA 2, 24V electric, 2-position -LP2SC -LP2SO -LPMSC -LPMSO -HP22 -HPM Low pressure pneumatic, 2-position, spring return, NC Low pressure pneumatic, 2-position, spring return, NO Low pressure pneumatic, 3-15 positioner, spring return, NC Low pressure pneumatic, 3-15 positioner, spring return, NO High pressure pneumatic, double acting, 120V solenoid High pressure pneumatic, double acting, 24V solenoid High pressure pneumatic, double acting, 3-15 positioner
CONTROL VALVES
NEMA 4, 120V electric, modulating, 2-10 VDC input -HP21
-2E2DSC NEMA 2, 24v electric, 2-position, spring return, NC -2E2DSO NEMA 2, 24v electric, 2-position, spring return, NO -2EMD NEMA 2, 24V electric, modulating
-HP2SC1 High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NC, 120V solenoid -HP2SO1 High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NO, 120V solenoid -HP2SC2 High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NC, 24V solenoid High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NC, 3-15 positioner
-2EMDSC NEMA 2, 24v electric, modulating, spring return, NC -HP2SO2 High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NO, 24V solenoid -2EMDSO NEMA 2, 24v electric, modulating, spring return, NO -HPMSC
-2
-1EMV2 Example: V-2-1EMV2 Two-inch NEMA4, 120V electric, modulating 2-10 VDC output
MODEL KOV-3 KOV-4 SSTAG
DESCRIPTION NEMA 3R fabric weather cover 10" x 10" NEMA 3R fabric weather cover 14" x 12" Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dog tag, custom engraved per order
RELATED PRODUCTS
150
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Connections Flow Characteristic Flow Range Leakage Rating
CONTROL VALVES
PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CONTROL VALVES PICCV SERIES
The Belimo PICCV Series valves combine a differential pressure regulator with a 2-way characterized control valve to supply a specic ow rate regardless of system pressure uctuations. The valve performs the function of a balancing valve and a control valve in one unit. PICCV valves can be used to regulate ow through air handling unit heating and cooling coils, fan coil units, unit ventilators and VAV reheat coils.
Compensates for pressure variations to maintain system performance at varying loads Predictable ow throughout valve travel provides favorable energy savings Helps to maintain desired delta T and reduces additional chiller staging Constant ow performance reduces actuator movement and hunting to extend actuator life Valve is sized based on coil ow rate and not Cv simplies valve selection and saves time
CONTROL VALVES
PICCV_ARX24-MFT
APPLICATION
The Pressure Independent Characterized Control Valve is typically used in air handling units on heating and cooling coils, and fan coil unit heating or cooling coils. Some other common applications include unit ventilators and VAV reheat coils. This valve is suitable for use in a hydronic system with constant or variable ow. This valve is designed with MFT functionality which facilitates the use of various control input.
NPT female ends Equal percentage 75 0.01% of rated valve capacity at 50 psi differential Leakage Class ANSI Class IV Maximum Closeoff Pressure 200 psi Pressure Drop 5 to 50 psid Maximum Pressure Rating 1/2", 3/4", 1" 600 psi 1-1/4", 1-1/2", 2" 400 psi
Materials of Construction Body Nickel-plated brass Ball and Stem Chrome-plated brass Media Compatibility Chilled or hot water, 60% Glycol maximum Weight, Valve Body Only 1/2" 5.8 lb (2.6 kg) 3/4" 3.8 lb (1.7 kg) 1" 13.1 lb (5.9 kg) 1-1/4" 10.7 lb (4.9 kg) 1-1/2" 12.5 lb (5.7 kg) 2" 10.1 lb (4.6 kg) Warranty 5 years
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
151
CONTROL VALVES
FLOW PATTERN
PICCV consists of a differential pressure regulator in series with a control valve. The amount of ow that passes through the valve is controlled by the use of a pressure regulator that moves according to the change in pressure above and below it. All pressure changes are absorbed by the pressure regulator allowing the differential pressure to be held constant over the control valve section thereby giving the same ow.
Water enters valve pressure is P1 (high). Regulator Section Control Valve Section
Water exits valve pressure is P2 (low).
CONTROL VALVES
Water passes through regulator, disc, and ball pressure drops.
Ports sense pressure drop and transfer it through this channel below regulator. Low pressure pulls regulator down against the spring force.
TYPICAL APPLICATION
The Pressure Independent Characterized Control Valves can be piped in a parallel orientation to achieve increased flow rates. Our PICCV valves are available in flows to 100 GPM. To achieve flows larger than this, it is recommended to connect two of these valves in parallel leading to a common manifold. To correctly operate these valves, the Belimo Multi Function Technology (MFT) will be employed to utilize one common control signal. For example, the first valve will be outfitted with an MFT actuator that will correspond to a 2-5 or 2.6 VDC signal. The second valve would be outfitted with an MFT actuator that would correspond to a 6-10 VDC signal. Therefore, through a single 2-10 VDC output, the full flow range will be achieved. The actuators will be wired in a parallel arrangement. The established configured P Codes are P-10137 for 2-5 VDC, P-10118 for 2-6 VDC, and P-10119 for 6-10 VDC. This recommended application provides the control of flows up to 200 GPM by using two valves. The top diagram on the next page details valves piped in a parallel arrangement. The bottom diagram features a typical single piping arrangement. If more than three valves are piped in parallel, please call Belimo to discuss control options.
TYPICAL PARALLEL PIPING IN RELATION TO THE INPUT AND OUTPUT (SCALE: NONE)
BELIMO PICCV (TYP.) PARALLEL PIPING ARRANGEMENT FOR PICCV VALVES
H/CCOIL
P/T PORT
FLOW
P/T PORT
P/T PORT
TEE (TYP.) FLOW
AIR VENT FLOW P/T PORT P/T PORT
SHUTOFF VALVE FLOW
UNION CONNECTION (TYP.)
152
888-397-5353 USA
FLOW
kele.com

P/T PORT FLOW STRAINER FLOW SHUTOFF VALVE
NEW!
H/CCOIL H/CCOIL P/T PORT P/T PORT AIR VENT AIR VENT FLOW P/T PORT FLOW DRAIN P/T PORT
would be outfitted with an MFT actuator that would correspond to a 6-10 VDC signal. Therefore, through a single 2-10 VDC output, For full example, the first will be outfitted with an MFT that will correspond to aThe 2-5 established or 2.6 VDC signal. The P second valve the flow range will valve be achieved. The actuators will be actuator wired in a parallel arrangement. configured Codes are would be for outfitted withP-10118 an MFT for actuator that and would correspond to a 6-10 VDC signal. Therefore, through a single 2-10 VDC output, P-10137 2-5 VDC, 2-6 VDC, P-10119 for 6-10 VDC. the full flow range will be achieved. The actuators will be wired in a parallel arrangement. The established configured P Codes are This recommended application provides the and control of flows to 200 GPM by using two valves. The top diagram on the next page P-10137 for 2-5 VDC, P-10118 for 2-6 VDC, P-10119 forup 6-10 VDC. details valves piped in a parallel arrangement. The bottom diagram features a typical single piping arrangement. PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CONTROL VALVES This recommended application provides the control of flows up to 200 GPM by using two valves. The top diagram on the next page If more valves than three valves are piped in parallel, The please call Belimo tofeatures discuss a control options. details piped in a parallel arrangement. bottom diagram typical single piping arrangement. PICCV SERIES
CONTROL VALVES
If more than three valves are piped in parallel, please call Belimo to discuss control options.
TYPICAL PARALLEL PIPING IN RELATION TO THE INPUT AND OUTPUT (SCALE: NONE) TYPICAL PARALLEL PIPING IN RELATION TO THE INPUT ANDPARALLEL OUTPUT (SCALE: NONE) PIPING ARRANGEMENT
BELIMO PICCV (TYP.) BELIMO PICCV (TYP.) FLOW FLOW P/T PORT P/T PORT FOR PICCV VALVES PARALLEL PIPING ARRANGEMENT FOR PICCV VALVES P/T PORT P/T PORT FLOW TEE (TYP.) FLOW SHUTOFF VALVE SHUTOFF VALVE
TEE (TYP.)
FLOW FLOW
P/T PORT P/T PORT
P/T PORT P/T PORT
FLOW FLOW
UNION CONNECTION (TYP.)
CONTROL VALVES
UNION CONNECTION (TYP.) FLOW FLOW STRAINER (Optional) STRAINER (Optional) FLOW FLOW SHUTOFF VALVE SHUTOFF VALVE
TYPICAL PIPING IN RELATION TO THE INPUT AND OUTPUT (SCALE: NONE) DRAIN
BELIMO PICCV (TYP.) TYPICAL PIPING IN RELATION TO THE INPUT AND OUTPUT (SCALE: NONE) FLOW FLOW AIR VENT AIR VENT BELIMO PICCV (TYP.) P/T PORT P/T PORT P/T PORT P/T PORT FLOW FLOW
H/CCOIL H/CCOIL
SHUTOFF VALVE SHUTOFF VALVE
UNION CONNECTION (TYP.) UNION CONNECTION (TYP.) FLOW P/T PORT FLOW DRAIN DRAIN P/T PORT
FLOW FLOW
STRAINER (Optional) STRAINER (Optional)
FLOW FLOW
SHUTOFF VALVE SHUTOFF VALVE
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
153
CONTROL VALVES
ORDERING INFORMATION, NON-SPRING RETURN
ACTUATOR SELECTION, ON/OFF/FLOATING OR PROPORTIONAL LRB24-3 = 1/2" to 1", 45 in-lb (5 Nm), on/off/oating LRX24-MFT = 1/2" to 1", 45 in-lb (5 Nm), proportional/MFT technology ARX24-MFT = 1/4" to 2", 180 in-lb (20 Nm), proportional/MFT technology VALVE BODY SELECTION
Model
Inches
GPM
Model
Inches
GPM
P2050B005 PICCV-32-018 1/2 IN 0.5 1 1/4 IN 18 P2050B010 PICCV-32-020 1/2 IN 1 1 1/4 IN 20 P2050B015 PICCV-32-022 1/2 IN 1.5 1 1/4 IN 22 P2050B020 PICCV-32-024 1/2 IN 2 1 1/4 IN 24 P2050B025 PICCV-32-026 1/2 IN 2.5 1 1/4 IN 26 P2050B030 PICCV-40-027 1/2 IN 3 1 1/2 IN 27 P2050B035 PICCV-40-029 1/2 IN 3.5 1 1/2 IN 29 P2050B040 PICCV-40-031 1/2 IN 4 1 1/2 IN 31 P2050B045 PICCV-40-033 1/2 IN 4 1 1/2 IN 33 P2050B045 PICCV-50-033 1/2 IN 5 2 IN 33 P2050B050 PICCV-50-035 1/2 IN 5 2 IN 35 P2050B055 PICCV-50-036 1/2 IN 5.5 2 IN 36 P2075B060 PICCV-50-038 3/4 IN 6 2 IN 38 P2075B065 PICCV-50-039 3/4 IN 6.5 2 IN 39 P2075B070 PICCV-50-044 3/4 IN 7 2 IN 44 P2075B075 PICCV-50-048 3/4 IN 7.5 2 IN 48 P2075B080 PICCV-50-056 3/4 IN 8 2 IN 56 P2075B085 PICCV-50-060 3/4 IN 8.5 2 IN 60 P2075B090 PICCV-50-070 3/4 IN 9 2 IN 70 P2075B095 PICCV-50-075 3/4 IN 9.5 2 IN 75 P2075B100 PICCV-50-090 3/4 IN 10 2 IN 90 PICCV-25-011 PICCV-50-100 1 IN 11 2 IN 100 PICCV-25-012 1 IN 12 To order valve and actuator assembly, append the valve PICCV-25-013 1 IN 13 number and the actuator number with a + sign. PICCV-25-014 1 IN 14 Example: P2050B005+LRB24-3 1/2", 0.5 GPM valve with a PICCV-25-015 1 IN 15 45 in-lb actuator with on/off/oating control PICCV-25-016 1 IN 16 PICCV-25-017 1 IN 17 PICCV-25-018 1 IN 18 Note: Other actuators available from Belimo. Ask your Kele sales representative.
CONTROL VALVES
154
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
TFRX24-MFT = 1/2" only, 22 in-lb (3 Nm) LF24-MFT = 1/2" to 1", 44 in-lb (5 Nm) AFRX24-MFT = 1-1/4" to 2", 180 in-lb (20 Nm) Model Inches 1/2 IN 1/2 IN 1/2 IN 1/2 IN 1/2 IN 1/2 IN 1/2 IN 1/2 IN 1/2 IN 1/2 IN 1/2 IN 3/4 IN 3/4 IN 3/4 IN 3/4 IN 3/4 IN 3/4 IN 3/4 IN 3/4 IN 3/4 IN 1 IN 1 IN 1 IN, 1 IN 1 IN 1 IN 1 IN 1 IN 1 IN 1-1/4 IN 1-1/4 IN 1-1/4 IN 1-1/4 IN 1-1/4 IN 1-1/4 IN 1-1/4 IN 1-1/4 IN 1-1/4 IN P2050B005 P2050B010 P2050B015 P2050B020 P2050B025 P2050B030 P2050B035 P2050B040 P2050B045 P2050B050 P2050B055 P2075B060 P2075B065 P2075B070 P2075B075 P2075B080 P2075B085 P2075B090 P2075B095 P2075B100 PICCV-25-011 PICCV-25-012 PICCV-25-013 PICCV-25-014 PICCV-25-015 PICCV-25-016 PICCV-25-017 PICCV-25-018 PICCV-25-019 PICCV-32-018 PICCV-32-019 PICCV-32-020 PICCV-32-021 PICCV-32-022 PICCV-32-023 PICCV-32-024 PICCV-32-025 PICCV-32-026
CONTROL VALVES
ORDERING INFORMATION, SPRING RETURN

ACTUATOR SELECTION, PROPORTIONAL/MFT
VALVE BODY SELECTION GPM 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5 8 8.5 9 9.5 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Model PICCV-40-026 PICCV-40-027 PICCV-40-028 PICCV-40-029 PICCV-40-030 PICCV-40-031 PICCV-40-032 PICCV-40-033 PICCV-50-033 PICCV-50-034 PICCV-50-035 PICCV-50-036 PICCV-50-037 PICCV-50-038 PICCV-50-039 PICCV-50-040 PICCV-50-044 PICCV-50-048 PICCV-50-052 PICCV-50-056 PICCV-50-060 PICCV-50-065 PICCV-50-070 PICCV-50-075 PICCV-50-080 PICCV-50-090 PICCV-50-100 Inches 1-1/2 IN 1-1/2 IN 1-1/2 IN 1-1/2 IN 1-1/2 IN 1-1/2 IN 1-1/2 IN 1-1/2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN 2 IN GPM 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 44 48 52 56 60 65 70 75 80 90 100
CONTROL VALVES
To order valve and actuator assembly, append the valve number and the actuator number with a + sign. Example: P2050B005+LF24-MFT 1/2", 0.5 GPM valve with a 44 in-lb spring return actuator with proportional control
Note: Other actuators available from Belimo. Ask your Kele sales representative.
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
155
CONTROL VALVES
THREADED GLOBE VALVES V5011, V5013 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The V5011 Series is a two-way threaded globe valve used for control of water or steam. The V5013 Series is a three-way threaded globe valve used for mixing control of water. The valves can be ordered assembled with actuators for spring return or non-spring return operation, or the valve, linkage, and actuator may be ordered separately for eld assembly. FEATURES Two- and three-way body patterns from 1/2" to 2" Two-way equal percentage characteristics Three-way linear characteristics Floating, two-position, or proportional control actuators ANSI 150 body class Compatible with MP953 pneumatic actuators V5013N1097/ KA-175-P
CONTROL VALVES
SPECIFICATIONS
Size Cv Range Stroke Body Pattern 1/2" to 2" FNPT 0.73 to 46.8 3/4" Two-way (stem up to open), threeway mixing (stem up to open B-AB) Flow Characteristic Two-way V5011N1xxx: equal percentage; Two-way V5011N2xxx: linear; Three-way: ports A-AB equal percentage, ports B-AB linear Rangeability 50:1 per VDI/VDE 2173 Leakage Rating ANSI Class III, 0.05% of Cv 250,000 full cycles at maximum rated Life Expectancy temperature Maximum Closeoff Pressure Actuator dependant, see Selection Chart; maximum differential pressure for quiet service 20 psid Pressure Drop Maximum water differential pressure for quiet service 20 psid (138 kPa). Maximum Pressure Rating Water: 217 psi (1497 kPa) from 36 to 248F (2 to 120C), 185 psi (1277 kPa) from 248 to 337F (120 to 169C); Steam: 100 psi (690 kPa) at 337F (169C), using stainless trim valve (V5011N2xxx) Pressure Rating ANSI 150 Materials Of Construction Red brass body, stainless steel stem, metal-to-metal brass/stainless plug and seat, spring-loaded carbon-ber reinforced Teon V-ring packing
Hot or chilled water, <50% glycol, steam (use V5011N2xxx for steam above 15 psig (103 kPa) to 100 psig (690 kPa)) Media Temperature Range Brass trim: 36 to 248F (2 to 120C), 15 psig (103 kPa) steam; Stainless trim: 36 to 340F (2 to 177C), 100 psig (690 kPa) steam Action Stem up to open (2-way), stem up to open B-AB, close A-AB (3-way) Compatible Actuators Electric rotary Kele KA/KAS Series or Honeywell MN/MS Series with appropriate Q5020 Linkage, or directmount ML Series shown on following pages. For pneumatic actuation see MP953 Series in PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS catalog section. Actuator Mounting U-bolt or set screws to t 1-3/8" valve yoke diameter, 3/4" stroke length Operating Temperature Actuator dependant, refer to appropriate ACTUATORS & DAMPERS section or ML Series (on following pages) for specications Approvals Actuator dependant, refer to appropriate ACTUATORS & DAMPERS section or ML Series (on following pages) for specications Warranty 1 year on valves, 5 years on rotary actuators, 1 year on direct-mount actuators
Media Compatibility
156
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Q5020 *Linkage 12"
3-way port A/B 2-way port B
CONTROL VALVES
THREADED GLOBE VALVES V5011, V5013 SERIES
VALVE SIZE 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2"
Valve bonnet*
B
3-way port A 2-way port A
ANSI CLASS 150 Dimensions in (cm) A B C 3.3 (8.38) 1.6 (3.95) 2.6 (6.65) 3.3 (8.38) 1.6 (3.95) 2.2 (6.50) 4.1 (10.42) 1.6 (3.95) 2.6 (6.65) 4.2 (10.67) 1.6 (3.95) 2.9 (7.25) 4.7 (11.94) 1.8 (4.65) 3.0 (7.70) 5.3 (13.46) 1.8 (4.65) 3.3 (8.35)
A 3-way port B
V501x Two-way and Three-way
* Allow approximately 12" (30.5 cm) clearance above the valve bonnet for installation and service of the actuator and linkage.
CONTROL VALVES
GLOBE VALVE Body Type Twoway NPT Size Cv Water and 15# Steam Model V5011N1008 V5011N1016 V5011N1024 V5011N1032 V5011N1040 V5011N1057 V5011N1065 V5011N1073 V5011N1081 V5011N1099 V5013N1030 V5013N1048 V5013N1055 V5013N1063 V5013N1071 V5013N1089 V5013N1097 HighPressure Steam Model V5011N2006 V5011N2014 V5011N2022 V5011N2030 V5011N2048 V5011N2055 V5011N2063 V5011N2071 V5011N2089 V5011N2097
NON-SPRING RETURN *
SPRING RETURN* Proportional Closeor Floating off (psid) KAS-44-M 207 KAS-44-M 207 KAS-44-M 207 KAS-44-M 207 KAS-44-M 184 KAS-44-M 79 KAS-44-M 66 KAS-88-M 84 KAS-88-M 55 KAS-175-M 63 KAS-44-M 207 KAS-44-M 184 KAS-44-M 79 KAS-44-M 66 KAS-88-M 84 KAS-88-M 55 KAS-175-M 63
1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" Three- 1/2" way 1/2" NPT 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2"
0.73 1.16 1.85 2.9 4.7 7.3 11.7 18.7 29.3 46.8 2.9 4.7 7.3 11.7 18.7 29.3 46.8
Floating Proportional CloseTwoTwooff position position (psid) KA-44-2T KA-44-M 230 KAS-44-2 KA-44-2T KA-44-M 230 KAS-44-2 KA-44-2T KA-44-M 230 KAS-44-2 KA-44-2T KA-44-M 230 KAS-44-2 KA-44-2T KA-44-M 143 KAS-44-2 KA-44-2T KA-44-M 69 KAS-44-2 KA-44-2T KA-44-M 47 KAS-44-2 KA-88-2T KA-88-M 69 KAS-88-2 KA-88-2T KA-88-M 44 KAS-88-2 KA-175-2T KA-175-P 58 KAS-175-2 KA-44-2T KA-44-M 230 KAS-44-2 KA-44-2T KA-44-M 143 KAS-44-2 KA-44-2T KA-44-M 69 KAS-44-2 KA-44-2T KA-44-M 47 KAS-44-2 KA-88-2T KA-88-M 69 KAS-88-2 KA-88-2T KA-88-M 44 KAS-88-2 KA-175-2T KA-175-P 58 KAS-175-2
* See KA and KAS Series direct-coupled actuator catalog pages for wiring and specs. Q5020A1003 linkage included with assembly. MODEL DESCRIPTION VALVE AND ACTUATOR SELECTION / ORDERING INFORMATION VALVE SELECTION (INCLUDES Q5020A1003 LINKAGE) Vxxxxxxxxx / Select 1/2" to 2" valve model number (from list above) ACTUATOR SELECTION* KA_ _ _ _ KA actuator (from list above)
Example: V5011N1008 / KA-44-2T 1/2" two-way globe valve, Cv=0.73, with floating non-spring return actuator, factory assembled. * Specify normally open or normally closed when ordering an assembly with a KAS actuator. For field assembly, order the Model Q5020A1003 linkage, the valve, and the actuator as separate line items.
Q5020A1003 SSTAG SW2
RELATED PRODUCTS Linkage for 1/2" to 2" valves Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order Auxiliary switch kit for KA-175/301 and KAS-88/175
0901786A
ACCESSORIES Repack kit for V5011, V5013 valves with 1/4" diameter stem (1/2" to 1-1/4")
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
157
CONTROL VALVES
FLANGED GLOBE VALVES VGF SERIES
DESCRIPTION The VGF Series is a family of two- and three-way anged globe valves designed specically for commercial HVAC systems. All models of the VGF Series have stainless steel trim suitable for chilled water/glycol, heating water, and steam up to 100 psig.
CONTROL VALVES
The valves are available with linear or equal percentage ow characteristics. They have ASME/ANSI standard dimensions and pressure/temperature ratings, and there are models with pressure balanced trim for high close-off applications. The VGF Series come assembled with Kele Revolution direct-coupled electric actuators or direct-mount Honeywell actuators, or the valves and actuators can be ordered separately.
VGF31EM25/KAS-175-M
Q5022B1009/KAS-175-M
FEATURES Stainless steel trim - all models ANSI B16.3 pressure/temperature ratings ANSI 125 anges standard, ANSI 250 special order Equal Percentage or linear ow characteristics Three-way mixing models or diverting models Pressure balanced models for high close off Available assembled with actuator or separate Spring or non-spring return assemblies Floating, two-position, or proportional control
TABLE 1. MEDIA PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE RATING

System Pressure Temperature F (C) 35 to 130 (2-66) Up to 200 (<93) Up to 250 (<121) Up to 300 (<149) Up to 356 (<180) ANSI Class 125 (VGF21, VGF31) 175 psig (1206 kPa) 165 psig (1138 kPa) 150 psig (1034 kPa) 140 psig (965 kPa) 125 psig (862 kPa) ANSI Class 250 (VGF22, VGF32) 400 psig (2758 kPa) 370 psig (2251 kPa) 340 psig (2344 kPa) 310 psig (2137 kPa) 280 psig (1931 kPa)
NOTE: ANSI Class 250 valves are special order.
SPECIFICATIONS
Size Cv Range Connections 2-1/2" to 6", ANSI Flanges 72 to 370 Flanges per ANSI/ISA 75.03; bolt holes conform to ANSI B16.1 Stroke 3/4" (2-1/2" and 3" valves); 1-1/2" (4", 5" and 6" valves) Body Pattern Two-way: stem up to open Three-way mixing: stem up to open B-AB Three-way diverting: stem up to open AB-A Flow Characteristic Two-way: Equal percentage or linear Three-way: Linear Rangeability 50:1 Leakage Rating Single seat: ANSI Class III, 0.05% Pressure balanced: ANSI Class IV, 0.01% Maximum Closeoff Pressure Actuator dependant, see Selection Chart Maximum Pressure Rating See Table 1 Pressure Rating ANSI Class 125 (Class 250 models available) Materials Of Construction Cast iron ASTM A126 Class B (GG25) body, stainless steel stem and trim, spring-loaded PTFE cone ring packing Hot or chilled water, <50% glycol, steam to 100 psig (690 kPa) Media Temperature Range See Table 1 U-bolt or set screws attach to valve Actuator Mounting yoke; 2-1/2" and 3" valves: 1-3/8" yoke diameter and 3/4" stroke length; 4", 5" and 6" valves: 1-7/8" yoke diameter with 1-1/2" stroke length Actuator dependant, refer to Approvals appropriate ACTUATORS & DAMPERS section or ML Series (on following pages) for specications Compatible Actuators Rotary Kele KA/KAS Series or Honeywell MN/MS Series with appropriate Q5020/Q5022 Linkage, or direct-mount ML Series Operating Temperature Actuator dependant, refer to appropriate ACTUATORS & DAMPERS section or ML Series (on following pages) for specications 1 year on valves, 5 years on rotary Warranty actuators, 1 year on direct-mount actuators Media Compatibility
158
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Body Type Size 2.5 3 4 5 6 Cv Valve Model Floating Two-way E = Equal % L = Linear 72 120 150 320 370 70 115 150 285 365 72 120 150 320 370 70 115 150 285 365 VGF21 (E OR L) S25 VGF21 (E OR L) S30 VGF21 (E OR L) S40 VGF21 (E OR L) S50 VGF21 (E OR L) S60 VGF31EM25 VGF31EM30 VGF31EM40 VGF31EM50 VGF31EM60 VGF31LD25 VGF31LD30 VGF31LD40 VGF31LD50 VGF31LD60 KA-301-2T KA-301-2T (2 qty) KA-301-2T (2 qty) KA-301-2T (2 qty) KA-301-2T KA-301-2T KA-301-2T (2 qty) KA-301-2T (2 qty) KA-301-2T (2 qty) KA-301-2T KA-301-2T KA-301-2T (2 qty) KA-301-2T (2 qty) KA-301-2T (2 qty) KA-301-2T ML6421A1017 ML6421A1017 ML6421B1040 ML6421B1040 ML6421B1040 Three-way mixing 2.5 3 4 5 6 2.5 3 4 5 6 2.5 3 4 5 6 Three-way diverting Two-way pressure balanced VGF21 (E OR L) P25 VGF21 (E OR L) P30 VGF21 (E OR L) P40 VGF21 (E OR L) P50 VGF21 (E OR L) P60
CONTROL VALVES
FLANGED GLOBE VALVES VGF SERIES
TABLE 2. VGF SERIES FLANGED GLOBE VALVE AND ACTUATOR COMBINATIONS AND CLOSE-OFF RATINGS
NON-SPRING RETURN (NSR) ACTUATORS Proportional Close Off (psd) 95 47 47 18 18 120 80 47 18 18 95 47 47 18 18 175 175 175 175 175 Linkage Q5020B1001 Q5020B1001 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 Q5020B1001 Q5020B1001 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 Q5020B1001 Q5020B1001 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Two-position (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 (2 qty) KAS-175-2 KA-301-P KA-301-P (2 qty) KA-301-P (2 qty) KA-301-P (2 qty) KA-301-P KA-301-P KA-301-P (2 qty) KA-301-P (2 qty) KA-301-P (2 qty) KA-301-P KA-301-P KA-301-P (2 qty) KA-301-P (2 qty) KA-301-P (2 qty) KA-301-P ML7421A1032 ML7421A1032 ML7421B1023 ML7421B1023 ML7421B1023 SPRING RETURN (SR) ACTUATORS Proportional/Floating (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M (2 qty) KAS-175-M Close off (psid) 112 55 27 11 11 141 94 27 11 11 112 55 27 11 11 175 175 175 175 175 Linkage Q5022A1001 Q5022A1001 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 Q5022A1001 Q5022A1001 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 Q5022A1001 Q5022A1001 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 Q5022A1001 Q5022A1001 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009 Q5022B1009
CONTROL VALVES
DIMENSIONS
Stem up to open A 1 Dotted line represents ANSI 125 valve body. B Stroke Y E Bonnet B C Port A Port B Actuator Clearances in (cm) Above Bonnet KA and KAS 12 (30.5) ML 6421 14.25 (36.0) ML 7421 14.25 (36.0) Q5020B1001 9.5 (24.1) (Requires 12" for service) Weight 6 lb (2.7 kg) 1 Dotted line represents ANSI 125 valve body. Bonnet 1 C D
A B AB
Three-way Valve Flow Patterns
Stroke Y E
A AB
MIXING Stem up = B AB Stem down = A AB
Two-way valves, Equal Percentage or Linear, Standard or Pressure Balanced

VALVE SIZE (in) 2-1/2 3 4 5 6
ANSI CLASS 125 Two-way Valve Dimensions, in (mm)
Three-way Valves, Mixing or Diverting

VALVE SIZE (in) 2-1/2 3 4 5 6
DIVERTING Stem up = AB A Stem down = AB B
A 10-7/8 (276) 11-1/2 (298) 13-7/8 (352) 15-1/2 (400) 17-1/2 (451)
B C 10-7/8 (276) 7 (178) 11-1/2 (298) 7-1/2 (191) 13-7/8 (352) 9 (229) 15-1/2 (400) 10 (254) 17-1/2 (451) 11 (279)
E 3-1/2 (89) 3-1/2 (89) 5-1/2 (133) 5-1/2 (133) 5-1/2 (133)
Y 3/4 (20) 3/4 (20) 1-1/2 (38) 1-1/2 (38) 1-1/2 (38)
Weight lb (kg) 42 (19.0) 53 (24.0) 73 (33.1) 120 (54.4) 166 (75.3)
ANSI CLASS 125 Three-way Valve Dimensions, in (mm)
A 10-7/8 (276) 11-3/4 (298) 13-7/8 (352) 15-1/2 (400) 17-1/2 (451)
B C 3 (276) 7 (178) 4-3/16 (107) 7-1/2 (191) 5-1/2 (140) 9 (229) 5-3/8 (137) 10 (254) 5-11/16 (145) 11 (279)
D 3-1/2 (95) 4-3/8 (111) 5-1/8 (130) 5-1/2 (146) 6-5/8 (168)
E 4-3/16 (107) 4-3/16 (107) 6-11/16 (170) 6-11/16 (170) 6-11/16 (170)
Y 3/4 (20) 3/4 (20) 1-1/2 (38) 1-1/2 (38) 1-1/2 (38)
Weight lb (kg) 42 (19.0) 53 (24.0) 73 (33.1) 120 (54.1) 166 (75.3)
MODEL VGF_ _ _ _ _ _ / DESCRIPTION Select valve model (from table above) KA_ _ _ _ or ML_ _ _ _ _ Select actuator model (from list above) Note: Valve assemblies with KA and KAS actuators use the Q5020B1001 linkage. If ordering valve and actuator separately for field assembly, order the Q5020B1001 also. Note: Specify normally open or normally closed when ordering an assembly with KAS spring return actuator.
Example: VGF21ES25 / KAS-175-M is a two-way, 2-1/2" ANSI 125 flanged, Cv=63, equal percentage valve assembled with a spring return, proportional/ floating actuator.
SSTAG 208638 R43176754-002 R43176755-005
RELATED PRODUCTS Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order Packing kit for all VGF Series anged globe valves Repair kit for 2-1/2" and 3" VGF Series ANSI 125 anged valves Repair kit for all 4" to 6" VGF Series anged valves
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
159
CONTROL VALVES
GLOBE VALVES VG7000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The VG7000 Series Valves are designed for hot water, chilled water, or steam control in HVAC systems. The globe design exhibits excellent control with two-way equal percentage and three-way linear response. The valves come in two- or three-way NPT thread congurations. All the valves can be tted with many different control actuators (both electric and pneumatic) and with a variety of control signals, spring ranges, and failsafe operation.
FEATURES
CONTROL VALVES
Wide actuator selection, electric and pneumatic Corrosion protection with brass and optional SS trim Equal percentage and linear characteristics Longevity with over one million cycles tested Serviceability with in-place valve repacking
VG7241CT SPECIFICATIONS
Size 1/2 to 2 FNPT 0.73 to 46.2 Cv Range 5/16 (8 mm): 1/2 and 3/4 valves Stroke 1/2 (13 mm): 1 and 1-1/4 valves 3/4 (19 mm): 1-1/2 and 2 valves Flow Characteristic Two-way equal percentage; threeway linear 25:1 per EN 60534-2-4 Rangeability Leakage Rating Brass trim: ANSI Class IV, 0.01% of maximum ow per ANSI/FCI 70-2; stainless trim: 0.05% of maximum ow Maximum Closeoff Pressure Actuator dependant, see Ordering Information Pressure Drop Maximum recommended pressure drop for water is 35 psid (241 kPa) for 1/2 to 1-1/4 valves, 30 psid for 1-1/2 and 2 valves; for steam 15 psid (103 kPa) for brass trim valves and 100 psid (690 kPa) for stainless trim valves Maximum Pressure Rating Brass trim with water: 400 psi (2756 kPa) up to 150F (66C), decreasing to 365 psi (2515 kPa) at 248F (120C); Brass trim with steam: 35 psi (241 kPa) at 284F (138C); Stainless trim with water: 400 psi (2756 kPa) up to 150F (66C), decreasing to 308 psi (2122 kPa) at 338F (170C); Stainless trim with steam: 100 psi (241 kPa) at 338F (170C)
VG7842CT
ANSI B16.15, Class 250 (EN 12360) Pressure Rating Materials Of Construction Cast bronze body, stainless steel stem, brass trim models have brass plug, elastomer disc seat and rubber (EPR packing), stainless trim models have stainless plug/seat and springloaded PTFE/elastomer V-ring packing Media Compatibility Hot or chilled water; <50% glycol; steam 35 psig (Fluid Group 1 according to 67/548/EEC) Media Temperature Range Water: 35 to 248F (2 to 120C); Steam: maximum 338F (170C) (actuator dependant), 35 psig Threaded mounting collar Actuator Mounting Compatible Actuators Electric VA-7000 or VA-4233 Series shown on following pages; pneumatic see V-3000, MP800 Series in PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS catalog section. Operating Temperature Actuator dependent, refer to following pages for specications Approvals Actuator dependent, refer to following pages for specications 1 year Warranty
160
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Actuator mounting collar
D
CONTROL VALVES
GLOBE VALVES VG7000 SERIES
VALVE SIZE in (DN)*
WEIGHT lb (kg) 2.2 (1.0) 3.3 (1.5) 5.3 (2.4) 5.3 (2.4) 10.9 (5.0) 16.0 (7.3)
Stem up
(C) C
(Two-way valve) (N.O.) Three-way valve N.C.
1/2 (DN15) 3/4 (DN20)
NO
1 (DN25) 1-1/4 (DN32) 1-1/2 (DN40) 2 (DN50)
A FACE TO FACE ALL VALVES 3 (7.6) 3-7/32 (8.1) 4-1/8 (10.4) 4-23/32 (11.9) 5-1/8 (13.0) 5-29/32 (15.0)
DIMENSIONS B LOWER VALVE Two-way Three-way 13/16 (2.1) 1-13/16(4.6) 15/16 (2.4) 2-1/8 (5.4) 1-5/32 (2.9) 1-11/32 (3.4) 2-5/32 (5.5) 2-1/8 (5.3) 2-9/19 (6.5) 2-25/32 (7.0) 3-3/8 (8.5) 3-3/4 (9.5)
D ACTUATOR COLLAR ALL VALVES
1-3/4 (4.4) 1-3/4 (4.4) 2-11/16 (6.8) 2-13/16 (7.1) 3-7/16 (8.7) 3-3/4 (9.5)
* DN is the European designation for the body size in metric units cm.
MODEL VG7 DESCRIPTION Globe valve NPT thread CODE Configuration code for brass trim (Order codes 243, 443, 844 for stainless steel trim respectively) 241 Two-way N.O. (stem down = closed) 441 Two-way N.C. (stem down = open) 842 Three-way mixing VALVE FLOW CLOSEOFF FOR ELECTRIC ACTUATORS (psid) CODE SIZE (FNPT) Cv 715x 720x 423x 926x CT 1/2" 0.73 345 N/A 345 N/A ET 1/2" 1.8 345 N/A 345 N/A GT 1/2" 4.6 216 N/A 208 N/A LT 3/4" 7.3 138 N/A 132 N/A NT 1" 11.6 86 N/A 63 N/A PT 1-1/4" 18.5 52 N/A 38 111 RT 1-1/2" 28.9 N/A 70 N/A 71 ST 2" 46.2 N/A 45 N/A 46 ASSEMBLY CODE VALVE SIZE AND PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR* 3008B 1/2" - 1", 3-6 psig, V-3000-8011 (with VG7000-100(1,4) spring kit) 3008D 1/2" - 1", 4-8 psig, V-3000-8011 (with VG7000-100(2,5) spring kit) 3008E 1/2" - 1", 9-13 psig, V-3000-8011 (with VG7000-100(3,6) spring kit) 821C 1/2" - 3/4", 3-7 psig, MP821C001 (SS trim only) 821D 1/2" - 3/4", 4-8 psig, MP821D001 (SS trim only) 821E 1/2" - 3/4", 9-13 psig, MP821E001 (SS trim only) 822C 1" - 1-1/4", 3-7 psig, MP822C001 822D 1" - 1-1/4", 4-8 psig, MP822D001 822E 1" - 1-1/4", 9-13 psig, MP822E001 823C 1-1/2" - 2", 3-7 psig, MP823C001 823D 1-1/2" - 2", 4-8 psig, MP823D001 823E 1-1/2" - 2", 9-13 psig, MP823E001 P Pilot positioner installed for any of the above
*See V-3000/MP8000 catalog page for specs and close off ratings
CONTROL VALVES
ASSEMBLY CODE 7150G 7152G 7200G 7202G ASSEMBLY CODE 423A 423B 423G 72CHGA 74CHGA
VALVE SIZE AND ELECTRIC NON-SPRING RETURN ** 1/2" - 1 1/4" VA-7150-1001, floating 1/2" - 1 1/4" VA-7152-1001, 0-10 VDC control 1-1/2" - 2" VA-7200-1001, floating 1-1/2" - 2" VA-7202-1001, 0-10 VDC / 0-20 mA control VALVE SIZE AND ELECTRIC SPRING RETURN *** 1/2" - 1-1/4" VA-4233-AGA-2, floating 1/2" - 1-1/4" VA-4233-BGA-2, two-position 1/2" - 1-1/4" VA-4233-GGA-2, 0-10 VDC proportional 1-1/4" - 2" VA-7820HGA-2 Two-position or floating, 0-10 VDC proportional, spring up 1-1/4'' - 2'' VA-7830HGA-2 Two-position or floating, 0-10 VDC proportional, spring down Example: VG7241CT/3008EP 1/2" two-way N.O. 9-13 psig pneumatic valve with positioner
**See VA-7000 catalog page for wiring and specs
***See VA-4233 catalog page for wiring and specs
VG7241
CT
3008E
SSTAG VG7000-6001 VG7000-6002
Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order 0.5" to 0.75" packing kit 1" to 2" packing kit
RELATED PRODUCTS
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
161
CONTROL VALVES
MVN BALL VALVE ACTUATORS MVN SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MVN 3Nm (27 lb-in) Control Valve Actuator is used with the VBN2 two-way and the VBN3 three-way control ball valves to control hot and chilled water with glycol solutions up to 50% in heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems to provide two-position or modulating functions.
FEATURES
Non-spring Return Floating and modulating Space saving, click-on installation no tool required Extendable position indicator for easy commissioning Available with or without cable Compatible with control ball valves from 1/2 to 1-1/4 inches. Actuator can be mounted on the valve in any of four positions.
CONTROL VALVES
MVN643L
SPECIFICATIONS
Actuator Type Valve Rotational Stroke 90 3 Non-spring return, Fail in place Fail Safe Mode Torque 27 lb-in. (3 Nm). External Auxiliary Switches Available No Supply Voltage 24 VAC +20%, -15%, 24 VDC Power Consumption 5 VA- Modulating; 1.5 VA - Floating; 6 VA - Fast Acting SPDT Environmental Rating NEMA2 Frequency 50 Hz; 60 Hz Mounting Click-on installation no tool required Noise Rating at 1m (Maximum) 35 dB(A) max at 1 m [50 dB(A) for MVN643] Plenum rated plastic housing Materials Operating Humidity Range (% RH) 5 to 95% RH, noncondensing Ambient Temperature Range -4 to 131F (-20 to 55C) Storage Temperature Range -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C) 90 sec. for MVN613 and MVN713; Timing 30 sec. for MVN643 Electrical Connections Field wiring 18 to 20 AWG to screw terminals, located under the removable access cover 5% to 95% RH noncondensing Humidity Ratings: Design Life (at Rated Voltage) 60,000 cycles; 1 cycle = 0900 Cable Specication 18 AWG, Plenum Rated, 300 V, 10 A, 3 ft. length from end of access cover Dimensions: Standard base units 2-13/16"W x 3-7/8"H x 4-9/16"D (7.1 x 9.8 x 11.6 cm) Low Prole base units 2-13/16"W x 3-1/2"H x 4-9/16"D (7.1 x 8.2 x 11.6 cm) 1.4 lb (0.64 kg) Weight Environmental Protection Ratings IP40 UL/cUL; UL60730 Approvals
MODEL MVN613A0000 MVN613L0000 MVN643A0000 MVN643L0000 MVN713A0000 MVN713L0000 DESCRIPTION Floating control ball valve actuator Floating control ball valve actuator Fast acting SPDT contol ball valve actuator Fast acting SPDT contol ball valve actuator Modulating control ball valve actuator Modulating control ball valve actuator
162
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
WIRING
FLOATING ACTUATOR BLACK WHITE 2 24 VAC BROWN
CONTROL VALVES
MVN BALL VALVE ACTUATORS MVN SERIES
PROPORTIONAL/MODULATING: 4-20mA CONTROLLER OUTPUT WITH 500 SERIES RESISTOR PROPORTIONAL ACTUATOR DIP SWITCH POSITION 1 2 MODE OFF OFF 2-10V OFF ON 0-10V ON OFF 10-2V ON ON 10-0V RED BLACK TO OTHER ACTUATORS WHITE
3
2 24 VAC 1
1 2
FLOATING CONTROLLER POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. USE CLASS II 24V TRANSFORMER FOR MVN643.
CONTROL VALVES
MVN613 or MVN643 with Floating Control
500 OHMS, 1/2 W MINIMUM
4-20mA CONTROLLER
1
FLOATING ACTUATOR BLACK WHITE BROWN 2 24 VAC 1
1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. 2 USE CLASS II 24V TRANSFORMER.
MVN713 with 4-20mA Control
2
1
FLOATING CONTROLLER
PROPORTIONAL/MODULATING: 0(2)...10 VDC OR 10...0(2) VDC CONTROLLER OUTPUT PROPORTIONAL ACTUATOR DIP SWITCH POSITION 1 2 MODE OFF OFF 2-10V OFF ON 0-10V ON OFF 10-2V ON ON 10-0V RED BLACK
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. USE CLASS II 24V TRANSFORMER FOR MVN643.
MVN613 or MVN643 with 2-Position Control
2 24 VAC
WHITE FLOATING ACTUATOR BLACK WHITE BROWN SPST 1 2 2 24 VAC
+
0 (2)-10 VDC CONTROLLER
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. 24 VDC SUPPLY ACCEPTABLE.
2
1 2
MVN713 with 0 (2)-10 VDC Control
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. USE CLASS II 24V TRANSFORMER.
MVN643 with Two Position SPST Control
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
163
CONTROL VALVES
DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS ML SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The ML6420, ML6421, ML6984, ML7420, ML7421, and ML7984 are direct-mount, electric, non-spring return actuators designed for use on Honeywell V5011N/13N and VGF Series globe valves.
The ML6425 and ML7425 are direct-mount, electric spring return. The actuators can be ordered pre-assembled with a valve, or they may be easily installed in the eld; separate linkages are not required.
ML7421, ML6421 ML7425, ML6425 ML7984, ML6984
ML7420, ML6420
CONTROL VALVES
DIRECT-MOUNT ACTUATOR SELECTION CHART / CLOSE-OFF RATINGS

Non-spring return (NSR) actuator Size 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5" 6" 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5" 6" VGF21ES25, LS25 VGF21ES30, LS30 VGF21ES40, LS40 VGF21ES50, LS50 VGF21ES60, LS60 VGF21EP25 VGF21EP30 VGF21EP40 VGF21EP50 VGF21EP60 Two-way valve V5011N1008 - N1040 V5011N1057 V5011N1065 V5011N1073 V5011N1081 V5011N1099 Three-way valve V5013N1030, N1048 V5013N1055 V5013N1063 V5013N1071 V5013N1089 V5013N1097 VGF31EM25 VGF31EM30 VGF31LD25 VGF31LD30 VGF31LD40, EM40 VGF31LD50, EM50 VGF31LD60, EM60 Floating ML6984, ML6420 ML6984, ML6420 ML6984, ML6420 ML6984, ML6420 ML6984, ML6420 ML6984, ML6420 ML6421A ML6421A ML6421A ML6421A ML6421B ML6421B ML6421B ML6421A ML6421A ML6421B ML6421B ML6421B Proportional ML7984, ML7420 ML7984, ML7420 ML7984, ML7420 ML7984, ML7420 ML7984, ML7420 ML7984, ML7420 ML7421A ML7421A ML7421A ML7421A ML7421B ML7421B ML7421B ML7421A ML7421A ML7421B ML7421B ML7421B Closeoff psid 273, 230 273, 230 193, 163 123, 104 79, 67 44, 37 87 58 69 34 34 13 13 175 175 175 175 175 Floating ML6425 ML6425 ML6425 ML6425 ML6425 ML6425 ML6425 ML6425 ML6425 ML6425 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Spring return (SR) actuator Proportional ML7425 ML7425 ML7425 ML7425 ML7425 ML7425 ML7425 ML7425 ML7425 ML7425 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Closeoff psid 230 230 163 104 67 37 29 19 23 11 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Life Expectancy Input Impedance 50,000 full stroke cycles or 1,000,000 repositions (ML6984, ML7984) 100 k for 2-10 VDC input, 500 for 4-20 mA input (ML74xx); 20 k for 2-10 VDC input, 237 for 4-20 mA input (ML7984) 55 dBA @ 3.3' (1m) for ML6984, ML7984 only, others not rated 12 seconds, for ML6425, ML7425 only Yes, on ML6420, ML7420, ML6421, ML7421 only Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) for ML64xx, ML74xx; 32 to 132F (0 to 55C) for ML6984, ML7984 Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH non-condensing for ML64xx, ML74xx; 15% to 95% RH non-condensing for ML6984, ML7984 Approvals UL Listed, CE Warranty 1 year
Noise Spring Return Time Manual Override
164
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Floating thermostat or DDC
CONTROL VALVES
CAUTION: Install actuator on valve before energizing.

Signal source 135
ML6984
T5 T6
24 VAC
ML7984A
R W B C
L1 L2
W R B
T6
24 VAC
L1 L2
B Stem down
2
T5
DIP SWITCH CONFIGURATION
1 2 3 4 On Off
W Stem up R
FUNCTION Mechanical 135 input
CONTROL VALVES
ML6984 Floating Control

3 ML7984A 1
24 VAC
T6
ML7984A Resistance Control

3 ML7984A L1 L2 1
Current signal source
R W
2
T5
+
DC signal source
R W
T6
24 VAC
2 L1 L2
+
FUNCTION 4-20 mA direct acting
T5

1
Master actuator Slave actuator Master actuator Slave actuator
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
On Off On Off
FUNCTION 2-10 VDC direct acting 10-2 VDC reverse acting

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 On Off On Off
20-4 mA reverse acting

1
ML7984A mA Proportional Control

ML6420
C T1 Extend W Retract B
ML7984A VDC Proportional Control

ML6425
24 VAC 24 VAC
ML6421
C T1 Extend 1 Retract 2 Floating controller
L1 L2
C T1 H T2 Extend 1 Retract 2 Floating controller
L1 L2
ML6420, ML6421 Floating Control

ML7420
Internal connection T1 T2 + T1 T2 +
ML6425 Floating Control

3 ML7425 Feedback F + Signal * L2 L1 Override extend Override retract Comm L2
T2 T1 O1 O2 TS
ML7421
24 VAC
L1 L2
+ 2-10 VDC signal
+ Feedback signal + 2-10 VDC 24 VAC - Signal
Direct/reverse action
L1 L2 10-2 VDC 2-10 VDC Extends Extends (factory setting) *Add a 500 resistor for 4-20mA signals
ML7420, ML7421 mA Proportional Control

1
ML7425 VDC Proportional Control
Allow 0.5 amps maximum for each device. Actuators and controller can share the same transformer providing proper phasing is observed, except as noted.
2 T5 and W terminal are connected internally. Device is compatible with the three-wire control system. 3 Use configuration DIP switches to select device functions. See installation instructions.
FUNCTION Direct Acting Reverse Acting

1 2 3 4 On Off On Off
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
165
CONTROL VALVES
Model Force Supply Voltage 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 24 VAC 50/60 Hz Supply VA 6 VA 7 VA Control Signal Two-position/oating Action NSR, DA/RA by wiring Stroke 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) Stroke Time 60 seconds 60 seconds 63 seconds 63 seconds 95 seconds 95 seconds
ML6420A3049 135 lbf (600 N)
ML7420A3055 135 lbf (600 N) ML6984A4000 160 lbf (710 N) ML7984A4009 160 lbf (710 N)
Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA NSR, DA/RA by jumpers Two-position/oating NSR, DA/RA by wiring
24 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 12 VA 24 VAC 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 12 VA 11 VA 12 VA 11 VA 12 VA 11 VA 11 VA 12 VA 12 VA
Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, NSR, DA/RA by DIP 0-135 switches Two-position/oating NSR, DA/RA by wiring
ML6421A1017 405 lbf (1800 N) 24 VAC 60 Hz
CONTROL VALVES
ML7421A1032 405 lbf (1800 N) 24 VAC 60 Hz ML6421B1040 405 lbf (1800 N) 24 VAC 60 Hz ML7421B1023 405 lbf (1800 N) 24 VAC 60 Hz ML6425A3022 135 lbf (600 N) ML6425B3013 135 lbf (600 N) ML7425A3013 135 lbf (600 N) ML7425B3012 135 lbf (600 N) 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 24 VAC 50/60 Hz
Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA NSR, DA/RA by jumpers Two-position/oating NSR, DA/RA by wiring
1-1/2" (3.8 cm) 175 seconds 1-1/2" (3.8 cm) 175 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds 90 seconds
Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA NSR, DA/RA by jumpers Two-position/oating Two-position/oating Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Prop. 2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA
SR stem down, DA/RA by 3/4" (1.9 cm) wiring SR stem up, DA/RA by wiring 3/4" (1.9 cm)
SR stem down, DA/RA by 3/4" (1.9 cm) jumpers SR stem up, DA/RA by jumpers 3/4" (1.9 cm)
MODEL ML6420A3049 ML7420A3055 ML6984A4000 ML7984A4009 ML6421A1017 ML6421B1040 ML7421A1032 ML7421B1023 ML6425A3022 ML6425B3013 ML7425A3013 ML7425B3012 SSTAG KOV Series DESCRIPTION 135 lbf, non-spring return, oating control for 1/2" to 2" valves 135 lbf, non-spring return, proportional control (2-10V, 4-20 mA) for 1/2" to 2" valves 160 lbf, non-spring return, oating control for 1/2" to 2" valves 160 lbf, non-spring return, proportional input (2-10V, 4-20 mA, 135) for 1/2" to 2" valves 405 lbf, non-spring return, oating control for 2-1/2" to 3" valves 405 lbf, non-spring return, oating control for 4" to 6" valves 405 lbf, non-spring return, proportional control (2-10V, 4-20 mA) for 2-1/2" to 3" valves 405 lbf, non-spring return, proportional control (2-10V, 4-20 mA) for 4" to 6" valves 135 lbf, spring return stem down, oating control for 1/2" to 3" valves 135 lbf, spring return stem up, oating control for 1/2" to 3" valves 135 lbf, spring return stem down, proportional (2-10 VDC, 4-20 mA) for 1/2" to 3" valves 135 lbf, spring return stem up, proportional (2-10V, 4-20 mA) for 1/2" to 3" valves
RELATED PRODUCTS Stainless steel tag on bead chain, 1" x 2" dogtag, custom engraved per order Fabric Weatherproof cover for globe actuators
PAGE 206
166
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES BENEFITS

CONTROL VALVES
THREADED GLOBE VALVES G2, G3 SERIES
The G2 Series 2-way and G3 Series 3-way globe valves can be used for two-position, oating or proportional control of HVAC hot water, chilled water or steam. The valves come assembled with Belimo electric actuators with spring return or non-spring return operation and are ideal for controlling unit ventilators, air handling units and a wide variety of HVAC heating and cooling systems.
Full line of spring and non-spring actuators for all applications 2-position, oating and modulating control signals for all control sequences Self-adjusting stroke Visual sliding stroke indicators; position indicators adjusted automatically Assembly can be mounted with valve stem horizontal to the pipe Self locking valve coupling
CONTROL VALVES
G2-SVK
Utilizes full control signal for maximum resolution Speeds installation and system check Piping exibility Proper valve-actuator connection is ensured
G3-LV
SPECIFICATIONS
Actuator Control Type Floating point, On-Off, 2-10 VDC multi-function technology (MFT) Actuator Manual Override All models except LF Actuator Electrical Connection 3' (1mm) cable with 1/2" conduit tting standard Connections NPT female ends Flow Characteristic G2 Equal percentage G2S, G3, G3D Linear Maximum Inlet Pressure 241 kPa Maximum Pressure Rating 250 psi Media Compatibility Chilled or Hot Water, 60% Glycol, Steam (G2, G2S) Pipe Size Range 1/2", 3/4", 1", 1-1/4", 1-1/2", 2" Maximum Differential Pressure Water 35 psi (241 kPa) Steam 20 psi (138 kPa) to 35 psi (241 kPa) Warranty 5 years Weight Varies per valve
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
167
CONTROL VALVES
G2 SERIES FLOW PATTERNS & DIMENSIONS G3 SERIES FLOW PATTERNS & DIMENSIONS
CONTROL VALVES
168
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
VALVE SPECIFICATION
Valve # Cv Port Size Two-pos/ Tri-state
CONTROL VALVES
SPRING RETURN (N.O. / CCW)
Two-Pos Tri-state Proportional
NON-SPRING RETURN
Proportional
ELECTRONIC FAIL SAFE

Two-pos/ Tri-state Proportional
Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way Two-way
G212 G213 G214 G215 G219 G220 G224 G225 G232 G240
0.4 1.3 2.2 4.4 5.5 7.5 10 14 20 28 40
1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 3/4 3/4 1 1
LVB24-3 LVB24-3 LVB24-3 LVB24-3 LVB24-3 LVB24-3
LVB24-SR LVB24-SR LVB24-SR LVB24-SR LVB24-SR LVB24-SR SVB24-SR SVB24-SR SVB24-SR SVB24-SR SVB24-SR LVB24-SR LVB24-SR LVB24-SR SVB24-SR SVB24-SR SVB24-SR SVB24-SR
LF-24 LF-24 LF-24 LF-24 LF-24 LF-24 NFBUP-X1 NFBUP-X1 NFBUP-X1 AFBUP-X1 AFBUP-X1 LF-24 LF-24 LF-24 NFBUP-X1 NFBUP-X1 AFBUP-X1 AFBUP-X1
LF24-3 LF24-3 LF24-3 LF24-3 LF24-3 LF24-3
LF24-SR LF24-SR LF24-SR LF24-SR LF24-SR LF24-SR NFB24-SR-X1 NFB24-SR-X1 NFB24-SR-X1 AFB24-SR-X1 AFB24-SR-X1
LVKB24-3 LVKB24-3 LVKB24-3 LVKB24-3 LVKB24-3 LVKB24-3 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-3 LVKB24-3 LVKB24-4 LVKB24-5 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-3 SVKB24-3
LVKB24-SR LVKB24-SR LVKB24-SR LVKB24-SR LVKB24-SR LVKB24-SR SVKB24-SR SVKB24-SR
SVB24-3 SVB24-3 SVB24-3 SVB24-3 SVB24-3 LVB24-3 LVB24-3 LVB24-3 SVB24-3 SVB24-3 SVB24-3 SVB24-3
CONTROL VALVES
1-1/4 1-1/2 2 1/2 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2
SVKB24-SR SVKB24-SR SVKB24-SR LVKB24-SR LVKB24-SR LVKB24-SR SVKB24-SR SVKB24-SR SVKB24-SR SVKB24-SR
Two-way Three-way Three-way Three-way Three-way Three-way Three-way Three-way
G250 G314 G315 G320 G325 G332 G340 G350
2.2 4.4 7.5 14 20 28 41
LF24-3 LF24-3 LF24-3
LF24-SR LF24-SR LF24-SR NFB24-SR-X1 NFB24-SR-X1 AFB24-SR-X1 AFB24-SR-X1
MODEL G_ _ _ _ /
DESCRIPTION Globe valve with specications listed above ----Compatible actuator (select from above) (other options for the actuator family are also available)
Note: Standard globe valve construction is a bronze body and seat with a stainless steel stem and brass plug. Stainless steel seat and plug is available as an option on the two-way valves only. Add S to the end of the valve body number. Note: Standard three-way valve is mixing valve. For diverting valve add D to the end of the valve body number. Note: Multi-function Technology (MFT) model actuators are also available. Add - MFT to the base model number of the actuator and specify the control signal conguration or the Belimo P-code for a pre-set MFT conguration (not required if to be eld congured, or if the default conguration of 2-10 VDC is required)
MODEL S1A S2A ZS-SPGV-20 ZS-SPGV-60
ACCESSORIES DESCRIPTION Auxiliary switch, 1- single pole double throw Auxiliary switch, 2- single pole double throw Weather shield for single NF or AF actuators on G2 or G3 series valves Weather shield for LF actuators on G2 or G3 series valves
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
169
CONTROL VALVES
UNIVERSAL RETROFIT LINKAGE/ACTUATOR KITS UGVL, SGVL, WGVL RETROFIT SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Belimo New Generation Linear Globe Valve Actuators and Retrot Linkages offer greater power and exibility. Engineered to suit a broad range of HVAC applications, both the New Generation Actuators and Retrot Linkages are highly adaptable making selection, installation, and long-term service worry-free. New force ranges is from 112 lbf [500N] to 1011 lbf [4500N] and there is a broader travel range from 0.6" (15 mm) to 2" (50 mm). With a universal format, these retrot linkages and actuators will t most globe valves on the market today.
FEATURES
Increased force ranges for higher close-off pressures Field selectable fail-safe actuator positions Lower power consumption during operation Cast Aluminum linkage Locking coupler feature to prevent slipping Centering device on linkage to assure proper alignment Manual override capability
CONTROL VALVES
UGVL-SVK UGVL-LV
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections 3' (0.9 m) 18GA plenum rated cable Life Expectancy 100,000+ cycles Materials of Construction Plastic, aluminum, steel Color Orange actuator Fail Safe 35 seconds (not on all models), 35 sec Supply Voltage UGVL+LVB24-3 24 VAC UGVL+LVX120-3 120 VAC Control Signal UGVL+LVB24-3 Floating, on-off UGVL+LVB24-SR Proportional UGVL+LVX24-MFT MFT Noise (Actuator Type) SV Series 55 dB LV Series 45 dB EV/RV Series 65 dB Conduit Connection 1/2" conduit tting appliance cable Feedback Auxiliary Switch Force (Actuator Type) LV Series SV Series AVK Series EVB Series RVB Series Compatible Actuators Actuator Mounting Drive Time Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Enclosure Rating Approvals Warranty Dependent on model Add-on, @SPDT, 3A @ 250V, 112 foot lbs (lbf) 337 foot lbs (lbf) 450 foot lbs (lbf) 562 foot lbs (lbf) 1011 foot lbs (lbf) Actuator included in part number Included in part number 90 sec (variable on MFT) -22 to 122F (-30 to 50C) 5-95% non-condensating NEMA 2 / IP54, UL enclosure type 2 cULus, UL 60730-1A/-2, -14, CAN/CSA E60730-1:02, CE 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC 5 years
RETROFIT LINKAGE REPLACEMENT PRODUCT RANGE

Original Valve Manufacturer Honeywell Valve Body Model Numbers V5011 Series V5011N Series V5013 Series V5013N Series V(B)-3754 Series, Bronze Trim V(B)-3974 Series, Bronze Trim V(B)-4324 Series, Bronze Trim V(B)-5844 Series V-4332 VG7000 Series 591 Series 599 Series 656 Series V6600 V6700 V6800 Belimo USA G2 series Belimo USA G2S series Belimo USA G3 series VB7000 series VB9000 series Type 20 Type 22 Type 30 Type 32 Belimo Linkage Type
Johnson Controls
UGVL
Siemens, Landis, Powers Robertshaw
Siebe (Belimo), Invensys, Barber Coleman
SGVL
Warren Controls
WGVL
170
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DIMENSIONS / COMPARISON
C B H2 H1
CONTROL VALVES
3
A
CONTROL VALVES
New UGVL with LV, SV
New SGVL with LV, SV
Dimensions - in (cm)
A UGVL
A D
B 4.4 (11.2) 3.9 (9.9) 5.5 (14)
C 9.6 (24.4) 8.2 (20.8) 10.3 (26.2)
D 10.9 (27.7)
H1 8.4 (21.3)
H2 12.1 (30.7)
8 (20.3) 6.7 (17) 10.4 (26.4)
SGVL WGVL
New WGVL with AV, EV and RV
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
171
CONTROL VALVES
MODEL U S W DESCRIPTION Universal Retrofit Schneider Valve Retrofit Warren Valve Retrofit GLOBE VALVE LINKAGE GVL+ Retrofit Globe Valve Linkage ACTUATOR LVB Non-spring return for 1/2" thru 3/4" valve LVX Non-spring return for 1/2" thru 3/4" valve (used with 120 VAC or MFT options only) SVX Non-spring return for 1" thru 2" valve SVB Non-spring return for 1" thru 2" valve (used with SR option only) EVB Non-spring return for 2-1/2" thru 6" valve (used with Warren valves only) RVB Non-spring return for 2-1/2" thru 6" valve (used with Warren valves only) LVKX Electronic fail-safe for 1/2" thru 3/4" valve LVKB Electronic fail-safe for 1/2" thru 3/4" valve (used with SR option only) SVKX Electronic fail-safe for 1" thru 2" valve SVKB Electronic fail-safe for 1" thru 2" valve (used with SR option only) AVKB Electronic fail-safe for 2-1/2" thru 6" valve (used with Warren valves only) ACTUATOR 24 24 VAC/VDC 120 120 VAC-230 VAC CONTROL TYPE -3 Floating/On-off -MFT Multifunction technology, proportional, default 2-10 VDC -SR Proportional GVL+ LVB 24 -3 Example: UGVL+LVB24-3 Universal retrofit globe valve linkage, floating, on-off signal, 24V, NSR
CONTROL VALVES
NOTE: All functions and options are not available with all versions.
S2A-GV
Aux-Switch
RELATED PRODUCTS
172
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Service* Valve Assembly Leakage 0.1% of maximum ow Inherent Flow Characteristics Modied linear Rangeability** 2-1/2" Valves 6.5:1 3" Valves 7.7:1 4" Valves 9.3:1 5" Valves 10.7:1 6" Valves 10.4:1
CONTROL VALVES
FLANGED GLOBE VALVES VG2000 SERIES
The VG2000 Series anged globe valves from Johnson Controls are designed to control the ow of water and steam in HVAC systems. Available in 2-1/2" through 6" pipe sizes, these ANSI Class 125 valves are available in normally open (N.O.), normally closed (N.C.) and 3-way mixing congurations.
Complete family of 2-1/2" through 6" anged cast iron valves with several choices in electric and pneumatic actuation Every valve factory tested to assure performance and tight close-off Order valve body alone for eld assembly, or preassembled with actuator to t the application
CONTROL VALVES
VG2000 Series
Hot water, chilled water, 50% glycol solutions, or steam for HVAC systems
Maximum Recommended Operating Pressure Drop 35 psig (241 kPa) for all valve sizes Maximum Actuator Supply Pressure (Pneumatically Actuated Valves Only) 25 psig (172 kPa) maximum Maximum Closeoff Pressures Dependent on valve size and actuator used Materials of construction Body Cast iron with black lacquer nish Stem 316 stainless steel Plug Brass Packing Ethylene propylene terpolymer (EPT) ring packs Valve Fluid Operating Temperature Limits 35 to 281F (2 to 138C), 35 psig (241 kPa) saturated steam * Proper water treatment is recommended; refer to VDI 2035 Standard. ** Rangeability is dened as the ratio of maximum ow to minimum controllable ow. The performance specications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For application at conditions beyond these specications, consult Johnson Controls, Inc. Neither Kele, Inc., nor Johnson Controls, Inc., shall be liable for damages resulting from misapplication or misuse of its products.
Valve Stroke 2-1/2" and 3" Valves 3/4" (19 mm) 3" and 4" Valves 1-1/8" (29 mm) 5" Valves 1-3/8" (35 mm) 6" Valves 1-1/2" (38 mm) Valve Body Rating Meets requirements of ASME B16.1, Class 125. Steam 35 psig (241 kPa) at 281F (138C) Maximum Allowable Water 175 psig (1,206 kPa) up to 150F (66C) Pressure/Temperature Decreasing to 125 psig (861 kPa) at 281F (138C)
Spring Ranges (MP8000 Series Actuators) 3 to 7, 4 to 8, and 9 to 13 psig (21 to 48, 28 to 55, and 62 to 90 kPa)
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
173
CONTROL VALVES
DIMENSIONS
3
D B C
CONTROL VALVES
Two-Way
Three-Way Mixing
DIMENSIONS
Valve Body Size 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5" 6" A 4-21/32" (118 mm) 5-5/16" (135 mm) 6-7/16" (164 mm) 6-7/8" (175 mm) 8-3/16" (208 mm) B 7-1/4" (184 mm) 8-5/8" (219 mm) 10-1/2" (267 mm) 12-1/2" (318 mm) 14-1/2" (368 mm) C 7" (178 mm) 7-1/2" (191 mm) 9" (229 mm) 10" (254 mm) 11" (279 mm) D 6-25/32" (172 mm) 6-13/16" (175 mm) 8-1/16" (205 mm) 9-5/32" (233 mm) 9-15/16" (252 mm)
WEIGHTS
Valve Body Size 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5" 6" 2-WAY 40 lb (18.14 kg) 60 lb (27.22 kg) 90 lb (40.82 kg) 135 lb (61.24 kg) 140 lb (65.50 kg) 3-WAY 60 lb (27.22 kg) 85 lb (38.56 kg) 115 lb (52.16 kg) 180 lb (81.65 kg) 220 lb (99.79 kg)
DIMENSIONS
Valve Size 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5" 6" Flange Flange Diameter Thickness 7"" (178 mm) 11/16" (17 mm) 7-1/2" (191 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 9" (229 mm) 1" (25 mm) 10" (254 mm) 1" (25 mm) 11" (279 mm) 1" (25 mm) Bolt Circle Diameter 5-1/2" (140 mm) 6" (152 mm) 7-1/2" (191 mm) 8-1/2" (216 mm) 9-1/2" (241 mm) Bolt Hole Diameter 3/4" (19 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 7/8" (22 mm) 7/8" (22 mm) Bolt Holes 4 4 8 8 8
Flange and Bolt Circle
174
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Spring Range Size Cv 51 83 3 to 7 psig Closeoff psig 53 37 2-1/2" 3" 2-1/2" 3" 4" 3" 4" 5" 6" 51 83 150 109 75 42 83 150 240 350 152 86 55 38 Spring Range Size 2-1/2" 3" 4" 3" 4" 5" 6" Cv 54 83 150 83 150 237 344 Closeoff psig 24 17 9 34 19 12 9 3 to 7 psig Spring Range Size 2-1/2" 3" 4" 3 4 5 6 Cv 54 83 150 83 150 237 344 Closeoff psig 65/14 45/10 25/6 91/21 51/12 33/7 23/5 3 to 7 psig
CONTROL VALVES
VG2231 TWO-WAY NORMALLY OPEN VALVES WITH PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS

4 to 8 psig 9 to 13 psig Closeoff Closeoff Model Number Model Number Model Number psig psig MP82 Series Actuators 25 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area 49 28 VG2231TL-823C00 VG2231TL-823D00 VG2231TL-823E00 34 19 VG2231UL-823C00 VG2231UL-823D00 VG2231UL-823E00 MP84 Series Actuators 50 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area 100 58 VG2231TM-843C00 VG2231TM-843D00 VG2231TM-843E00 70 40 VG2231UM-845C00 VG2231UM-845D00 VG2231UM-845E00 39 23 VG2231VM-845C00 VG2231VM-845D00 VG2231VM-845E00 MP86 Series Actuators 100 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area 140 81 VG2231UN-865C00 VG2231UN-865D00 VG2231UN-865E00 79 46 VG2231VN-865C00 VG2231VN-865D00 VG2231VN-865E00 51 29 VG2231WN-867C00 VG2231WN-867D00 VG2231WN-867E00 35 20 VG2231YN-867C00 VG2231YN-867CD0 VG2231YN-867E00
CONTROL VALVES
VG2431 TWO-WAY NORMALLY CLOSED VALVES WITH PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS

4 to 8 psig 9 to 13 psig Closeoff Closeoff Model Number Model Number Model Number psig psig MP84 Series Actuators 50 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area 32 75 VG2431TM-843C00 VG2431TM-843D00 VG2431TM-843E00 22 52 VG2431UM-845C00 VG2431UM-845D00 VG2431UM-845E00 13 29 VG2431VM-845C00 VG2431VM-845D00 VG2431VM-845E00 MP86 Series Actuators 100 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area 46 105 VG2431UN-865C00 VG2431UN-865D00 VG2431UN-865E00 26 59 VG2431VN-865C00 VG2431VN-865D00 VG2431VN-865E00 17 38 VG2431WN-867C00 VG2431WN-867D00 VG2431WN-867E00 11 26 VG2431YN-867C00 VG2431YN-867D00 VG2431YN-867E00
VG2831 THREE-WAY MIXING VALVES WITH PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS

4 to 8 psig 9 to 13 psig Closeoff Closeoff Model Number Model Number Model Number psig psig MP84 Series Actuators 50 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area 60/19 35/45 VG2831TM-843C00 VG2831TM-843D00 VG2831TM-843E00 42/13 24/31 VG2831UM-845C00 VG2831UM-845D00 VG2831UM-845E00 23/8 14/18 VG2831VM-845C00 VG2831VM-845D00 VG2831VM-845E00 MP86 Series Actuators 100 sq. in. Effective Diaphragm Area 84/28 49/63 VG2831UN-865C00 VG2831UN-865D00 VG2831UN-865E00 47/16 27/35 VG2831VN-865C00 VG2831VN-865D00 VG2831VN-865E00 30/10 18/23 VG2831WN-867C00 VG2831WN-867D00 VG2831WN-867E00 21/7 12/16 VG2831YN-867C00 VG2831YN-867CD0 VG2831YN-867E00
To add an optional positioner to the valve assembly, change the 00 at the end of the code number to 01 for a V-9502-95 pneumatic positioner or to 02 for an EPP-1000-8 Electro-pneumatic positioner.
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
175
CONTROL VALVES
ORDERING INFORMATION ELECTRIC SPRNG RETURN
VG2X31 VALVES WITH M9220-XGX-3 ACTUATORS Spring Return
Valve Size Cv Closeoff psig Floating M9220-AGA-3 (w/switches) M9220-AGC-3 (w/o switches) On/Off M9220-BGA-3 (w/switches) M9220-BGC-3 (w/o switches) Proportional M9220-GGA-3 (w/switches) M9220-GGC-3 (w/o switches)
3
VG2231TM 2-1/2" 51 3" 83 VG2231UM 3" 83 VG2231UM 4" 150 VG2231VM 240 VG2231WN 5"
VG2231TM 2-1/2" 51 3" 83 VG2231UM 3" 83 VG2231UM 4" 150 VG2231VM 240 VG2231WN 5" VG2831TM 2-1/2" 54 3" 80 VG2831UM 3" 80 VG2831UM 4" 157 VG2831VM 4" 157 VG2831VM 238 VG2831WN 5" 6" 347 VG2831YN VG2831TM 2-1/2" 54 3" 80 VG2831UM 3" 80 VG2831UM 4" 157 VG2831VM 4" 157 VG2831VM 238 VG2831WN 5" 6" 347 VG2831YN
Two-Way Spring Return Normally Open Valve Stem Up VG2231TM-92NAGx VG2231TM-92NBGx VG2231TM-92NGGx VG2231UM-92NAGx VG2231UM-92NBGx VG2231UM-92NGGx VG2231TM292NAGx VG2231UM292NBGx VG2231UM292NGGx VG2231UM292NAGx VG2231VM292NBGx VG2231VM292NGGx VG2231WN292NAGx VG2231WN292NBGx VG2231WN292NGGx Two-Way Spring Return Normally Closed Valve Stem Down 76 VG2231TM-94NAGx VG2231TM-94NBGx VG2231TM-94NGGx 33 VG2231UM-94NAGx VG2231UM-94NBGx VG2231UM-94NGGx 66 VG2231TM294NAGx VG2231UM294NBGx VG2231UM294NGGx 37 VG2231UM294NAGx VG2231VM294NBGx VG2231VM294NGGx 20 VG2231WN294NAGx VG2231WN294NBGx VG2231WN294NGGx Three-Way Mixing Spring Return Valve Stem Up Side Inlet Port Closed 45 VG2831TM-92NAGx VG2831TM-92NBGx VG2831TM-92NGGx 20 VG2831UM-92NAGx VG2831UM-92NBGx VG2831UM-92NGGx 40 VG2831UM292NAGx VG2831UM292NBGx VG2831UM292NGGx 11 VG2831VM-92NAGx VG2831VM-92NBGx VG2831VM-92NGGx 22 VG2831VM292NAGx VG2831VM292NBGx VG2831VM292NGGx 12 VG2831WM292NAGx VG2831WN292NBGx VG2831WN292NGGx 7 VG2831YN292NAGx VG2831YN292NBGx VG2831YN292NGGx Three-Way Mixing Spring Return Valve Stem Down Side Inlet Port Open 45 VG2831TM-94NAGx VG2831TM-94NBGx VG2831TM-94NGGx 20 VG2831UM-94NAGx VG2831UM-94NBGx VG2831UM-94NGGx 40 VG2831UM294NAGx VG2831UM294NBGx VG2831UM294NGGx 11 VG2831VM-92NAGx VG2831VM-94NBGx VG2831VM-94NGGx 22 VG2831VM294NAGx VG2831VM294NBGx VG2831VM294NGGx 12 VG2831WM294NAGx VG2831WN294NBGx VG2831WN294NGGx 7 VG2831YN294NAGx VG2831YN294NBGx VG2831YN294NGGx 76 33 66 37 20
CONTROL VALVES
176
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Size Cv Closeoff psig 62 101 27 43 88 24 49 26 16 37 60 16 26 53 9 14 30 7 15 4 9 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 3" 3" 3" 4" 4" 5" 6" 51 51 83 83 83 150 150 240 350 2-1/2" 2-1/2" 3" 3" 3" 4" 4" 4" 5" 5" 6" 6" 54 54 80 80 80 157 157 157 238 238 347 347 Valve VG2231TM VG2231UM VG2231VM VG2231WN VG2231YN VG2831TM VG2831UM VG2831VM VG2831WN VG2831YN March 2014 2014 Size 2-1/2 3 4 5 6 2-1/2 3 4 5 6 Cv 51 83 150 240 350 54 80 157 238 347 Closeoff psig 115 79 45 29 20 69 48 27 17 12
CONTROL VALVES
ORDERING INFORMATION ELECTRIC NON-SPRNG RETURN

VG2X31 VALVES WITH M91XX-XGX-2 ACTUATORS NON-SPRING RETURN Non-Spring Return On/Off Floating Proportional without On/Off Floating with without Switches Switches Two Switches M9116-AGA-2 M9116-GGA-2 M9116-AGC-2 M9124-AGA-2 M9124-GGA-2 M9124-AGC-2 Two-Way, Push-Down-To-Close VG2231TM+916AGA VG2231TM+916GGA VG2231TM+916AGC VG2231TM+924AGA VG2231TM+924GGA VG2231TM+924AGC VG2231UM+916AGA VG2231UM+916GGA VG2231UM+916AGC VG2231UM+924AGA VG2231UM+924GGA VG2231UM+924AGC VG2231UM2924AGA* VG2231UM2924GGA* VG2231UM2924AGC* VG2231VM+924AGA VG2231VM+924GGA VG2231VM+924AGC VG2231VM2924AGA* VG2231VM2924GGA* VG2231VM2924AGC* VG2231WN2924AGA* VG2231WN2924GGA* VG2231WN2924AGC* VG2231YN2924AGA* VG2231YN2924GGA* VG2231YN2924AGC* Three-Way, Mixing VG2831TM+916AGA VG2831TM+916GGA VG2831TM+916AGC VG2831TM+924AGA VG2831TM+924GGA VG2831TM+924AGC VG2831UM+916AGA VG2831UM+916GGA VG2831UM+916AGC VG2831UM+924AGA VG2831UM+924GGA VG2831UM+924AGC VG2831UM2924AGA* VG2831UM2924GGA* VG2831UM2924AGC* VG2831VM+916AGA VG2831VM+916GGA VG2831VM+916AGC VG2831VM+924AGA VG2831VM+924GGA VG2831VM+924AGC VG2831VM2924AGA* VG2831VM2924GGA* VG2831VM2924AGC* VG2831WN+924AGA VG2831WN+924GGA VG2831WN+924AGC VG2831WN2924AGA* VG2831WN2924GGA* VG2831WN2924AGC* VG2831YN+924AGA VG2831YN+924GGA VG2831YN+924AGC VG2831YN2924AGA* VG2831YN2924GGA* VG2831YN2924AGC* Proportional with Two Switches M9116-GGC-2 M9124-GGC-2 VG2231TM+916GGC VG2231TM+924GGC VG2231UM+916GGC VG2231UM+924GGC VG2231UM2924GGC* VG2231VM+924GGC VG2231VM2924GGC* VG2231WN2924GGC* VG2231YN2924GGC* VG2831TM+916GGC VG2831TM+924GGC VG2831UM+916GGC VG2831UM+924GGC VG2831UM2924GGC* VG2831VM+916GGC VG2831VM+924GGC VG2831VM2924GGC* VG2831WN+924GGC VG2831WN2924GGC* VG2831YN+924GGC VG2831YN2924GGC*
CONTROL VALVES
*Valve assemblies require two actuators mounted in tandem. On tandem assemblies with switches, only one actuator is required to have switches. M9116-AGx-2 actuators are not designed for tandem operation.
ORDERING INFORMATION ELECTRIC NON-SPRNG RETURN

VG2x31 Valves with VA-3100-xGx Series Non-Spring Return Actuators On/Off Floating without Switches VA-3100-AGA Non-Spring Return On/Off Floating with Two Switches VA-3100-AGC Proportional with Two Switches VA-3100-HGC VG2231TM+300HGC VG2231UM+301HGC VG2231VM+301HGC VG2231WN+302HGC VG2231YN+302HGC VG2831TM+300HGC VG2831UM+301HGC VG2831VM+301HGC VG2831WN+302HGC VG2831YN+302HGC
Two-Way Push-Down-To-Close VG2231TM+300AGA VG2231TM+300AGC VG2231UM+301AGA VG2231UM+301AGC VG2231VM+301AGA VG2231VM+301AGC VG2231WN+302AGA VG2231WN+302AGC VG2231YN+302AGA VG2231YN+302AGC Three-Way Mixing VG2831TM+300AGA VG2831TM+300AGC VG2831UM+301AGA VG2831UM+301AGC VG2831VM+301AGA VG2831VM+301AGC VG2831WN+302AGA VG2831WN+302AGC VG2831YN+302AGA VG2831YN+302AGC
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
177
CONTROL VALVES
DIRECT-MOUNT GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS VA-4233, VA-7000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The VA-7000 Series is a family of direct-mount non-spring return actuators for use with 1/2" to 2" JCI VG7000 valves in a wide range of HVAC applications. They are available for threewire oating control or proportional control. The VA-4233 Series is a family of direct-mount spring return actuators, available for two-position, oating, or proportional control. VA-4233-AGA-2
FEATURES Compact size Simple installation and adjustment No separate linkages Economical, yet powerful
CONTROL VALVES
VA-7150
Supply Voltage Noise Feedback Auxiliary Contacts 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 35 dBa @ 3.3 ft (1m) 0/2-10 VDC (VA-78xx-HGA only) Two SPDT; 50 VA pilot duty @ 24 VAC; 5.8A resistive, 1/4 HP, 275 VA pilot duty @ 120 VAC (VA-4233-GGC only) Set screw to bonnet, 1/4-28 UNF-2B threads for valve stem; Set screw to bonnet, stem nut connector 15 seconds (VA-4233 only) 100,000 full stroke cycles Operating Temperature VA-71xx 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) VA-72xx, -78xx 23 to 131F (-5 to 55C) VA-4233 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 10% to 90% RH non-condensing Approvals VA-71xx, -72xx, -4233 UL 873 Listed, File E27734, Class 2, plenum rated; CSA C22.2 No. 139 Certied, File LR85083; CE Directive 89/336/EEC VA-78 UL 60730 Listed, File E194024; ULc 60730-1 Listed; CE Directive 89/336/ EEC Warranty 1 year
Valve Mounting VA-71xx, -72xx VA-4233, -78xx Spring Return Time Life Expectancy
178
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Model Force Supply VA 2.7 VA VA-7150-1001 90 lbf (400 N) VA-7152-1001 4.7 VA VA-7200-1001 180 lbf (800 N) VA-7202-1001 8.7 VA 6.7 VA VA-4233-AGA-2 VA-4233-BGA-2 VA-4233-GGA-2 61 lbf (271 N) 12 VA VA-4233-GGC-2 VA7820-HGA-2 180 lbf (800 N) VA7830-HGA-2 11 VA
CONTROL VALVES
Control Signal Floating
Input Impedance
Action
Stroke
Stroke Time
NSR, DA/RA by wiring 165 seconds 100 k NSR, DA/RA by jumpers .78" (2.0 cm) maximum NSR, DA/RA by wiring
Prop. 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC
Floating
CONTROL VALVES
62 seconds Prop. 0-10 VDC, 100 k (0-10 VDC); 500 NSR, DA/RA by jumpers 0-20 mA (0-20 mA)
Floating
SR stem up, DA/RA by wiring SR stem up, power stem down .91" (2.3 cm) maximum
Two-position
Prop. 0/2-10 200 k (2-10 VDC); 500 VDC, 6-9 VDC, (4-20 mA) 4-20 mA
SR stem up, DA/RA by switch
76 seconds
Prop. 0/2-10 200 k (2-10 VDC); 500 VDC, 6-9 VDC, (4-20 mA) 4-20 mA
SR stem up, DA/RA by switch
Prop. 0/2-10 100 k (0-10 VDC); 500 SR stem up, DA/RA by DIP VDC, 0/4-20 mA (0-20 mA) switch 1.0" (2.5 cm) maximum Prop. 0/2-10 100 k (0-10 VDC); 500 SR stem down, DA/RA by VDC, 0/4-20 mA (0-20 mA) DIP switch 114 or 57 seconds
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
179
CONTROL VALVES
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SETUP COMPONENTS
Stroke jumpers Starting point Span value
Fail position
Input selection jumper

0-10 0-5 5-10
Stroke adjustment
1 2 3 4
DOWN UP
3
Setup LED Zero adjust DA RA
Long/short selection jumper Stroke potentiometer Direct/Reverse action selection jumper
8mm 10mm 13mm 19mm DA RA DOWN

1 2 3 4
Input signal selection Volts mA
Action selection Fail safe input signal DOWN UP
UP
FB VA-7202 Proportional Control DA (direct acting) Signal increase extends stem downward RA (reverse acting) Signal increase retracts stem upward
Setup LED
CONTROL VALVES
VA-7152 Proportional Control
DIMENSIONS
Model Dimensions 6.1"H x 3.8" Diameter (15.4 x 9.8 cm) 6.1"H x 3.8" Diameter (15.4 x 9.8 cm) 7.8"H x 4.2" Diameter (19.7 x 10.6 cm) 7.8"H x 4.2" Diameter (19.7 x 10.6 cm) 6.8"H x 4.1"W x 3.3"D (17.3 x 10.4 x 9.1 cm) 6.8"H x 4.1"W x 3.3"D (17.3 x 10.4 x 9.1 cm) 6.8"H x 4.1"W x 3.3"D (17.3 x 10.4 x 9.1 cm) 6.8"H x 4.1"W x 3.3"D (17.3 x 10.4 x 9.1 cm) 9.1"H x 4.5"W x 8.4"D (23.1 x 11.5 x 21.2 cm) 9.1"H x 4.5"W x 8.4"D (23.1 x 11.5 x 21.2 cm) Enclosure Rating Wiring Conduit Connection Weight
VA-7150-1001
NEMA 1 (IP40)
Screw terminals, 24 to 14 AWG
Cable gland, 1/2" (6.4 mm) maximum 1.7 lb (0.8 kg) diameter Cable gland, 1/2" (6.4 mm) maximum 1.7 lb (0.8 kg) diameter Two 7/8" (2.2 cm) knockouts for 1/2" 2.2 lb (1.0 kg) ttings Two 7/8" (2.2 cm) knockouts for 1/2" 2.2 lb (1.0 kg) ttings Fitting for 1/2" conduit Fitting for 1/2" conduit Fitting for 1/2" conduit Fitting for 1/2" conduit 3.1 lb (1.4 kg) 3.1 lb (1.4 kg) 3.1 lb (1.4 kg) 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)
VA-7152-1001
NEMA 1 (IP40)
VA-7200-1001
NEMA 2 (IP42)
VA-7202-1001 VA-4233-AGA-2 VA-4233-BGA-2 VA-4233-GGA-2 VA-4233-GGC-2 VA7820-HGA-2 VA7830-HGA-2
NEMA 2 (IP42) NEMA 2 (IP42) NEMA 2 (IP42) NEMA 2 (IP42) NEMA 2 (IP42) NEMA 2 (IP54) NEMA 2 (IP54)
Screw terminals, 24 to 14 AWG 48" (12.2 cm) cable with 20 AWG 48" (12.2 cm) cable with 20 AWG 48" (12.2 cm) cable with 20 AWG 48" (12.2 cm) cable with 18 AWG
48" (12.2 cm) UL 758 AWM cable, Integral connector for 3/8" (1.0 cm) ex 7.3 lb (3.3 kg) 18 AWG conduit 48" (12.2 cm) UL 758 AWM cable, Integral connector for 3/8" (1.0 cm) ex 7.3 lb (3.3 kg) 18 AWG conduit
180
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MODEL VA-7150-1001 VA-7152-1001 VA-7200-1001 VA-7202-1001 VA-4233-AGA-2 VA-4233-BGA-2 VA-4233-GGA-2 VA-4233-GGC-2 VA7820-HGA-2 VA7830-HGA-2 M9000-200 KOV-2 V-9999-BC1 VG7000-1016
CONTROL VALVES
DESCRIPTION 90 lbf, non-spring return, oating control, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" valves 90 lbf, non-spring return, proportional (0-5, 0-10 VDC) control, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" valves 180 lbf, non-spring return, oating control, for 1-1/2" and 2" valves 180 lbf, non-spring return, proportional (0-10 VDC, 0-20 mA) control, for 1-1/2" and 2" valves 61 lbf, spring return stem up, oating control, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" valves 61 lbf, spring return stem up, two-position control, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" valves 61 lbf, spring return stem up, proportional control, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" valves 61 lbf, spring return stem up, proportional control, with auxiliary switches, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" valves 180 lbf, spring return stem up, proportional control, for 1/2" to 2" valves 181 lbf, spring return stem down, proportional control, for 1/2" to 2" valves
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Commissioning tool NEMA 3R fabric weather shield, 8" dia. x 10"H, fits Honeywell ML6420/7420/6425/7425 and Belimo NV/NVF 206
CONTROL VALVES
ACCESSORIES Kit for 1/2 to 1-1/4 Barber Colman VB9000 Series valves Bonnet adapter for replacing M100, V-400, V-500, MP8000 Series on VG7000 valves
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
181
CONTROL VALVES
THREADED AND FLANGED GLOBE VALVES VB SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The VB Series Globe Valves are available in 1/2" to 2" threaded bronze body VB-7XXX models, or in 2 1/2" to 6" anged cast iron body VB-8XXX models. The anged valves have a patented balanced plug design. The balanced plug design allows water or steam to ow through the valve plug, equalizing the pressure on the top and bottom of the plug which greatly reduces the force required to operate and close these larger size valves.The VB Series Valves are designed for control of chilled water, hot water, or steam in the HVAC industry and have a long history of high quality and reliability. They are available pre-assembled with electric or pneumatic actuators, or available without actuator for eld assembly.
CONTROL VALVES
FEATURES
Low-prole body High quality, proven history of performance Self-adjusting packing design Wide temperature range 20 to 281F (-7 to 138C) Pneumatic or electric actuation choices Available pre-assembled or separately Two- and three-way body patterns Mixing and diverting 3-way body patterns Balanced plug design on anged models VF-8213-596-5-12
SPECIFICATIONS
1/2 to 2 FNPT, 2-1/2 to 6 anged 0.4 to 40 (NPT bodies); 56 to 500 (anged bodies) Body Pattern Two-way, three-way mixing or diverting Rangeability 1/2 to 2: from 5:1 (Cv=0.4), up to 75:1 (Cv=40) 2-1/2 to 6: 100:1 Leakage Rating ANSI Class IV, 0.01% of Cv Maximum Closeoff Pressure Actuator dependant, see Ordering Information Pressure Drop 35 psid (241 kPa) for water; 20 psid (138 kPa) for steam Pressure Rating 1/2 to 2: ANSI B16.15-1985, Class 250 (400 psi (2756 kPa) @ 20 to 150F (-7 to 66C), decreasing to 321 psi (2215 kPa) at 281F (138C)); 2-1/2 to 6: ANSI B16.1-1993, Class 125 (200 psi (1380 kPa) @ 20 to 150F (-7 to 66C), decreasing to 169 psi (1166 kPa) at 281F (138C)) Flow Characteristic Two Way Equal % Three Way Linear Size Cv Range Materials Of Construction 1/2 to 2: Bronze body/plug/seat, stainless steel stem and springloaded TFE packing; 2-1/2 to 6: Cast iron body, bronze plug/seat, stainless steel stem and spring-loaded TFE/EPDM packing Media Compatibility Hot or chilled water, steam (up to 35 psig (241 kPa)), glycol (up ro 50%) Media Temperature Range 20 to 281F (-7 to 138C) Action Two-way stem up to close and stem up to open models; three-way mixing or diverting Actuator Mounting Threaded mounting yoke Compatible Actuators Electric Forta Series or DuraDrive Series shown on following pages; pneumatic see MK Series in PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS catalog section. Operating Temperature Actuator dependant, refer to following pages for specications Approvals Actuator dependant, refer to following pages for specications Warranty 2 years
182
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Part Number
CONTROL VALVES
MODEL NUMBERS AND DIMENSIONS FOR VB-7000 AND VB-8000 SERIES VALVES WITHOUT ACTUATORS
Dimensions in inches (mm) Stem Position A B C D Ea

(Stem Down) (Stem Down)
Valve Pattern Size
Weight (lbs)
VB-7213-0-4-01 VB-7213-0-4-02 VB-7213-0-4-03 VB-7213-0-4-04 VB-7213-0-4-05 VB-7213-0-4-06 VB-7213-0-4-07 VB-7213-0-4-08 VB-7213-0-4-09 VB-7213-0-4-10 VB-7213-0-4-11 VB-7223-0-4-01 VB-7223-0-4-02 VB-7223-0-4-03 VB-7223-0-4-04 VB-7223-0-4-05 VB-7223-0-4-06 VB-7223-0-4-07 VB-7223-0-4-08 VB-7223-0-4-09 VB-7223-0-4-10 VB-7223-0-4-11 VB-7313-0-4-02 VB-7313-0-4-04 VB-7313-0-4-06 VB-7313-0-4-08 VB-7313-0-4-09 VB-7313-0-4-10 VB-7313-0-4-11 VB-7323-0-4-04 VB-7323-0-4-06 VB-7323-0-4-08 VB-7323-0-4-09 VB-7323-0-4-10 VB-7323-0-4-11 VB-8213-0-5-12 VB-8213-0-5-13 VB-8213-0-5-14 VB-8213-0-5-15 VB-8213-0-5-16 VB-8223-0-5-12 VB-8223-0-5-13 VB-8223-0-5-14 VB-8223-0-5-15 VB-8223-0-5-16 VB-8303-0-5-12 VB-8303-0-5-13 VB-8303-0-5-14 VB-8303-0-5-15 VB-8303-0-5-16
1/2"
2-way
SUTO
3-1/16 (78) 1-1/16 (27) 1-11/16 (43)
2.0
3/4" 1"
2-way 2-way 2-way 2-way 2-way
SUTO SUTO SUTO SUTO SUTO
3-5/8 (92) 4-5/8 (118) 5-3/8 (137) 6-1/8 (156) 1-1/8 (29) 1-3/8 (35) 1-1/2 (38) 1-9/16 (40) 2-3/8 (60) 2-7/16 (57) 2-3/4 (70)
3/4 (19)
7/16 (11)
3.0 5.5 6.0 13 13
1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2"
CONTROL VALVES
B A
1/2"
2-way
SUTC
3-1/16 (78) 1-1/4 (32) 1-11/16 (43)
2.0
Typical VB-7000 Threaded Valve
3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5" 6" 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5" 6" 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5" 6"
2-way 2-way 2-way 2-way 2-way 3-way 3-way 3-way 3-way 3-way 3-way 3-way 3-way 3-way 3-way 3-way 3-way 2-way 2-way 2-way 2-way 2-way 2-way 2-way 2-way 2-way 2-way 3-way 3-way 3-way 3-way 3-way
SUTC SUTC SUTC SUTC SUTC MIXING* MIXING* MIXING* MIXING* MIXING* MIXING* DIVERTING* DIVERTING* DIVERTING* DIVERTING* DIVERTING* DIVERTING* SUTO SUTO SUTO SUTO SUTO SUTC SUTC SUTC SUTC SUTC
3-5/8 (92) 1-3/4 (45)
1-1/8 (29) 1-3/4 (45)
7/16 (11)
3.0 5.5 6.0 13 13 2.0
4-5/8 (118)
2 (51) 5-3/8 (137) 1-13/16 (46) 2-1/8 (54) 6-1/8 (156) 2-1/16 (53) 2-3/16 (56) 3-1/16 (78) 3-5/8 (92)
1/2-20" E 1-1/4-16" D
1-3/8 (35) 1-11/16 (43) 1-11/16 (43) 1-3/4 (45) 1-9/16 (40) 4-5/8 (118) 2 (51) 1-5/8 (41) 5-3/8 (137) 1-9/16 (40) 1-1/8 (29) 6-1/8 (156) 1-7/8 (53) 1-3/16 (30) 3-1/16 (78) 1-3/8 (53) 1-11/16 (43) 3-5/8 (92) 1-11/16 (43) 1-3/4 (45) 1-9/16 (40) 4-5/8 (118) 2 (51) 1-5/8 (41) 5-3/8 (137) 1-9/16 (40) 1-1/8 (29) 6-1/8 (156) 1-7/8 (53) 1-3/16 (30) 8-9/16 (217) 9-1/2 (241) 11-1/2 (292) 13 (330) 14 (356) 8-9/16 (217) 9-1/2 (241) 11-1/2 (292) 13 (330) 14 (356) 4 (102) 4-5/8 (117) 5-1/2 (140) 6-15/16 (176) 7-1/2 (190) 4 (102) 4-1/4 (108) 4-15/16 (125) 5-7/16 (138) 6-1/4 (159) 4-1/8 (105) 4-3/8 (111) 5-1/16 (129) 5-9/16 (141) 6-3/8 (162) 4-1/4 (108) 4-7/8 (124) 5-3/4 (146) 6-3/4 (172) 7-1/2 (191)
3/4 (19)
7/16 (11)
3.0 5.0 5.5 14 14 2.0 2.5 5.0 5.5 14 14 46 58 95 141 146 46 58 95 141 146 55 68 113 166 212
3/4 (19)
7/16 (11)
Typical VB-8000 Flanged Valve

Note: Actuator dimensions are listed on the DuraDrive Series pages
3-1/4 (83)
1 (25) 1-3/4 (45)
3-1/4 (83)
1 (25) 1-3/4 (45)
MIX. & DIV.* 8-9/16 (217) 5-7/16 (138) 4-3/16 (106) MIX. & DIV.* 9-1/2 (241) 6-3/8 (162) 4-3/8 (111) MIX. & DIV.* 11-1/2 (292) 8-7/16 (214) 5-1/16 (129) 13 (330) 8-13/16 (224) 5-5/8 (143) MIX. & DIV.* 14 (356) 9-3/4 (248) 6-3/4 (171) MIX. & DIV.*
3-1/4 (83)
1 (25) 1-3/4 (45)
a Stroke for rated flow. Add up to 1/16 inch (1.6mm) for disc seating and compression. SUTO = Stem up to open, SUTC = Stem up to close *See 3-way flow patterns on the next page
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
183
CONTROL VALVES
VALVE FLOW PATTERNS
3
A B A B
Flow
Flow Note: A label on the side of the valve provides port identification. Stem position Up Flow B to AB A port closed A to AB B port closed
Flow
Flow Note: A label on the side of the valve provides port identification. Stem Position Up Flow AB to B A port closed AB to A B port closed
VB-7313 Mixing valve (Stem up = B-AB)
CONTROL VALVES
AB A B A B
Flow Down
AB
Flow Down
VB-8303 Piped as mixing valve VB-7323 Diverting valve (Stem up = B-AB)
VB-8303 Piped as diverting valve
Three-way Flanged Valve Flow Patterns

Note: Two-way VB-7213 and VB-8213 valves are stem up to open (SUTO). VB-7223 and VB-8223 are stem up to close (SUTC).
FLANGE DIMENSIONS
E D
B C A Flange Dimensions Flange Detail for American Standard 125 psi Cast Iron Pipe Flanges
Nominal Pipe Size 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5" 6" Flanges Flange Flange Diameter Thickness A B 7" 11/16" 7-1/2" 3/4" 9" 15/16" 10" 11" 1" Drilling Diameter of Diameter of Bolt Circle Bolt Holes C D 5-1/2" 6" 3/4" 7-1/2" 8-1/2" 7/8" 9-1/2" Bolting Number of Bolts 4 8 Diameter of Bolts 5/8" 3/4" Length of Machine Bolts E 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/4"
184
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
VU-8213-686-5-12 VU-8213-686-5-13 VU-8213-686-5-14 VU-8213-686-5-15 VU-8213-686-5-16 2-1/2" Flanged 3" Flanged 4" Flanged 5" Flanged 6" Flanged 56 85 145 240 370
CONTROL VALVES
Linkage Closeoff 130 None 80 250 250 250 250 200 200 150 150 150 100 65
TWO-WAY ELECTRIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION SUTO = Stem Up To Open, SUTC = Stem Up To Close Model Number Size Cv Pattern Fail Control Actuator VF-7213-255-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 VF-7213-255-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 Two-way Non-spring Floating (24 VAC) VF-7213-255-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 MF-22303 return VF-7213-255-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 SUTO VF-7213-255-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 VF-7213-255-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 VA-7213-804-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 VA-7213-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 VA-7213-804-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 VA-7213-804-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 MA51-7103-100 VA-7213-804-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 VA-7213-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 VA-7213-804-4-07 1" NPT 10 VA-7213-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 Two-way Spring return Two-position VA-7213-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 N.O. (24 VAC) VA-7213-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 MA51-7203 SUTO VA-7213-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 VA-8213-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged 56 VA-8213-596-5-13 3" Flanged 85 MA61-7203 VA-8213-596-5-14 4" Flanged 145 VA-8213-596-5-15 5" Flanged 240 VA-8213-556-5-16 6" Flanged 370 MA41-7153 VA-7223-804-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 VA-7223-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 VA-7223-804-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 VA-7223-804-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 MA51-7103-100 VA-7223-804-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 VA-7223-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 VA-7223-804-4-07 1" NPT 10 VA-7223-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 Two-way Spring return Two-position VA-7223-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 N.C. (24 VAC) VA-7223-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 MA51-7203 SUTC VA-7223-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 VA-8223-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged 56 VA-8223-596-5-13 3" Flanged 85 MA61-7203 VA-8223-596-5-14 4" Flanged 145 VA-8223-596-5-15 5" Flanged 240 VA-8223-556-5-16 6" Flanged 370 MA41-7153 VF-7213-804-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 VF-7213-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 VF-7213-804-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 VF-7213-804-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 MF51-7103-100 VF-7213-804-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 VF-7213-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 VF-7213-804-4-07 1" NPT 10 VF-7213-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 Two-way Spring return Floating (24 VAC) VF-7213-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 N.O. VF-7213-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 MF51-7203 SUTO VF-7213-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 VF-8213-596-5-12 2-1/2 " Flanged 56 VF-8213-596-5-13 3" Flanged 85 MF61-7203 VF-8213-596-5-14 4" Flanged 145 VF-8213-596-5-15 5" Flanged 240 VF-8213-556-5-16 6" Flanged 370 MF41-7153 VU-7213-674-4-02 1/2" NPT 2.2 M400A VU-7213-674-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 VU-7213-674-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 Two-way VU-7213-680-4-08 1" NPT 14 VU-7213-680-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 SUTO M800A Non-Spring Programmable VU-7213-680-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 Return Floating/Proportional VU-7213-680-4-11 2" NPT 40 Two-way SUTO M1500A
None
CONTROL VALVES
125 AV-609 250 250 250 250 200 200 90 90 150 100 65
None
125 AV-609 250 250 250 250 200 200 150 150 150 100 65
None
125 AV-609 AV-821 250 250 250 207 130 88 48
AV-821
AV-821
125
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
185
CONTROL VALVES
TWO-WAY ELECTRIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION (continued) SUTO = Stem Up To Open, SUTC = Stem Up To Close Model Number Size Cv Pattern Fail Control Actuator VF-7223-804-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 VF-7223-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 VF-7223-804-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 VF-7223-804-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 MF51-7103-100 VF-7223-804-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 VF-7223-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 VF-7223-804-4-07 1" NPT 10 VF-7223-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 Two-way Spring return Floating (24 VAC) VF-7223-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 N.C. VF-7223-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 MF51-7203 SUTC VF-7223-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 VF-8223-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged 56 VF-8223-596-5-13 3" Flanged 85 MF61-7203 VF-8223-596-5-14 4" Flanged 145 VF-8223-596-5-15 5" Flanged 240 VF-8223-556-5-16 6" Flanged 370 MF41-7153 VS-7213-814-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 VS-7213-814-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 VS-7213-814-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 VS-7213-814-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 MS51-7103-160 VS-7213-814-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 VS-7213-814-4-06 VS-7213-814-4-07 VS-7213-814-4-08 VS-7213-593-4-09 VS-7213-593-4-10 VS-7213-593-4-11 VS-8213-596-5-12 VS-8213-596-5-13 VS-8213-596-5-14 VS-8213-596-5-15 VS-8213-556-5-16 VS-7223-814-4-01 VS-7223-814-4-02 VS-7223-814-4-03 VS-7223-814-4-04 VS-7223-814-4-05 VS-7223-814-4-06 VS-7223-814-4-07 VS-7223-814-4-08 VS-7223-593-4-09 VS-7223-593-4-10 VS-7223-593-4-11 VS-8223-596-5-12 VS-8223-596-5-13 VS-8223-596-5-14 VS-8223-596-5-15 VS-8223-556-5-16 3/4" NPT 1" NPT 1" NPT 1-1/4" NPT 1-1/2" NPT 2" NPT 2-1/2" Flanged 3" Flanged 4" Flanged 5" Flanged 6" Flanged 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 3/4" NPT 3/4" NPT 1" NPT 1" NPT 1-1/4" NPT 1-1/2" NPT 2" NPT 2-1/2" Flanged 3" Flanged 4" Flanged 5" Flanged 6" Flanged 7.5 10 14 20 28 40 56 85 145 240 370 0.4 1.3 2.2 4.4 5.5 7.5 10 14 20 28 40 56 85 145 240 370 Linkage Closeoff 250 250 250 250 200 200 90 90 150 100 65
None
125 AV-609 250 250 250 250 200 200 150 150 150 100 65
CONTROL VALVES
Two-way SUTO
Spring return N.O.
Proportional (24 VAC, 4-20 mA) MS51-7203
None
MS61-7203 MS41-7153 AV-609
125
MS51-7103-160
Two-way SUTC
Spring return N.C.
Proportional (24 VAC, 4-20 mA) MS51-7203
None
250 250 250 250 200 200 90 90 150 100 65
MS61-7203 MS41-7153 AV-609
125
THREE-WAY ELECTRIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION Model Number Size Cv Pattern VF-7313-255-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 Three-way VF-7313-255-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 Mixing VF-7313-255-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 VA-7313-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 VA-7313-804-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 VA-7313-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 VA-7313-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 Three-way VA-7313-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 Mixing VA-7313-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 VA-7313-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 VU-7313-674-4-02 VU-7313-674-4-04 VU-7313-674-4-06 VU-7313-674-4-08 VU-7313-680-4-09 VU-7313-680-4-10 VU-7313-680-4-11 VU-8303-686-5-12 VU-8303-686-5-13 VU-8303-686-5-14 VU-8303-686-5-15 VU-8303-686-5-16 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 3/4" NPT 1" NPT 1-1/4" NPT 1-1/2" NPT 2" NPT 2-1/2" Flanged 3" Flanged 4" Flanged 5" Flanged 6" Flanged 2.2 4.4 7.5 14 20 28 40 80 110 190 290 500
Fail Non-spring return
Control Floating (24 VAC)
Actuator MF-22303 Incl. two-position
Linkage None
Closeoff 130 80 250 250 200 90 150 100 65 250 250 198 207 130 88 48
MA51-7103-100 Spring return B-AB Two-position (24 VAC) MA51-7203 None
M400A Mixing Non-Spring Return Three-way Mixing/Diverting Programmable Floating/Proportional M800A
AV-821
AV-821
M1500A
AV-822
125
186
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
VF-8303-596-5-13 VF-8303-596-5-14 VF-8303-596-5-15 VF-8303-556-5-16 VS-7313-814-4-02 VS-7313-814-4-04 VS-7313-814-4-06 VS-7313-814-4-08 VS-7313-593-4-09 VS-7313-593-4-10 VS-7313-593-4-11 VS-8303-596-5-12 VS-8303-596-5-13 VS-8303-596-5-14 VS-8303-596-5-15 VS-8303-556-5-16 3" Flanged 4" Flanged 5" Flanged 6" Flanged 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 3/4" NPT 1" NPT 1-1/4" NPT 1-1/2" NPT 2" NPT 2-1/2" Flanged 3" Flanged 4" Flanged 5" Flanged 6" Flanged 110 190 290 500 1.3 4.4 7.5 14 20 28 40 80 110 190 290 500
CONTROL VALVES
Control Two-position (24 VAC) Actuator MA61-7203 MA41-7153 MF51-7103-100 Linkage None AV-609 250 250 200 90 150 100 65 35 AV-609 250 250 200 90 150 100 65 35 AV-609 Closeoff 35
THREE-WAY ELECTRIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION (continued) Model Number Size Cv Pattern Fail VA-8303-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged 80 VA-8303-596-5-13 3" Flanged 110 Three-way Spring return VA-8303-596-5-14 4" Flanged 190 Mixing/Diverting B-AB VA-8303-596-5-15 5" Flanged 290 VA-8303-556-5-16 6" Flanged 500 VF-7313-804-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 VF-7313-804-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 VF-7313-804-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 VF-7313-804-4-08 1" NPT 14 Three-way VF-7313-593-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 Mixing VF-7313-593-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 Spring return VF-7313-593-4-11 2" NPT 40 B-AB VF-8303-596-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged 80 Three-way Mixing/Diverting
Floating (24 VAC)
MF51-7203
None
MF61-7203 MF41-7153 MS51-7103-160
CONTROL VALVES
Three-way Mixing Spring return B-AB Three-way Mixing/Diverting
Proportional (24 VAC, 4-20 mA) 2-10 VDC
MS51-7203
None
MS61-7203 MS41-7153
TWO-WAY PNEUMATIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION Model Number Size Cv Pattern VK4-7213-201-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 VK4-7213-201-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 VK4-7213-201-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 VK4-7213-201-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 VK4-7213-201-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 VK4-7213-201-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 VK4-7213-301-4-07 1" NPT 10 VK4-7213-301-4-08 1" NPT 14 Two-way VK4-7213-301-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 VK4-7213-611-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 VK4-7213-611-4-11 2" NPT 40 VK4-8213-602-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged 56 VK4-8213-602-5-13 3" Flanged 85 VK4-8213-602-5-14 4" Flanged 145 VK4-8213-602-5-15 5" Flanged 240 VK4-8213-652-5-16 6" Flanged 370 VK4-7223-203-4-01 1/2" NPT 0.4 VK4-7223-203-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 VK4-7223-203-4-03 1/2" NPT 2.2 VK4-7223-203-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 VK4-7223-203-4-05 3/4" NPT 5.5 VK4-7223-203-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 VK4-7223-303-4-07 1" NPT 10 VK4-7223-303-4-08 1" NPT 14 Two-way VK4-7223-303-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 VK4-7223-613-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 VK4-7223-613-4-11 2" NPT 40 VK4-8223-602-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged 56 VK4-8223-602-5-13 3" Flanged 85 VK4-8223-602-5-14 4" Flanged 145 VK4-8223-602-5-15 5" Flanged 240 VK4-8223-652-5-16 6" Flanged 370 THREE-WAY PNEUMATIC VALVE ASSEMBLIES - ORDERING INFORMATION Model Number Size Cv Pattern VK4-7313-303-4-02 1/2" NPT 1.3 VK4-7313-303-4-04 1/2" NPT 4.4 VK4-7313-303-4-06 3/4" NPT 7.5 Three-way VK4-7313-303-4-08 1" NPT 14 Mixing VK4-7313-303-4-09 1-1/4" NPT 20 VK4-7313-612-4-10 1-1/2" NPT 28 VK4-7313-612-4-11 2" NPT 40 VK4-8303-602-5-12 2-1/2" Flanged 80 VK4-8303-602-5-13 3" Flanged 110 VK4-8303-602-5-14 4" Flanged 190 Three-way Mixing/Diverting VK4-8303-602-5-15 5" Flanged 290 VK4-8303-652-5-16 6" Flanged 500
Fail
Control
Actuator
Linkage
Closeoff 220
3-7 psi spring with positioner
MK-2690+AK-42309-500
AV-7400 130
Spring return N.O.
3-6 psi spring with positioner 3-8 psi spring with positioner 5-10 psi spring with positioner
MK-4601+AK-42309-500 MK-6601+AK-42309-500
AV-401 AV-430
150 90 250 160
MK-6811+AK-42309-500 MK-6911+AK-42309-500
AV-497
125
8-13 psi spring with positioner
130 MK-2690+AK-42309-500 AV-7400 60
Spring return N.C.
10-13 psi spring with positioner 8-13 psi spring with positioner 5-10 psi spring with positioner
MK-4621+AK-42309-500 MK-6621+AK-42309-500
AV-401 AV-430
60 40 170 90
MK-6811+AK-42309-500 MK-6911+AK-42309-500
AV-497
125
Fail
Control 10-13 psi spring with positioner
Actuator
Linkage
Closeoff 200
MK-4621+AK-42309-500
AV-401
Spring return B-AB 5-10 psi spring with positioner
MK-6611+AK-42309-500
AV-430
120 60 40 80 50
MK-6811+AK-42309-500 MK-6911+AK-42309-500
AV-497
35
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
187
CONTROL VALVES
GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS DURADRIVE SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Schneider Electric DuraDrive Series linear globe valve actuators are designed to mount directly onto two- and threeway VB-7000 and VB-8000 Series globe valves. They have integral linkage to provide linear travel and are available in a wide selection of spring and non-spring return models.
FEATURES
Direct-mount, integral linkage (SR models) Wide selection of control signal inputs Rugged design, reliable performance Spring or non-spring return models
CONTROL VALVES
MA51-7103-000
Input Impedance MS41-7153/AV-609-1 80 k @ 0/2-10 VDC; 500 @ 4-20 mA Conduit Connection 1/2 FNPT Wiring MF-22303 48" (122 cm) 18 AWG plenum cable rated for UL Mx51-7103 36" (91 cm) plenum cable Mxxx-7203 36" (91 cm) appliance cable Mx41-7153 36" (91 cm) cable, 18 AWG Enclosure Rating MF-22303 NEMA 1 (IP31) All others NEMA 2 (IP54) Feedback MF51, MS51, MS41 2-10 VDC Manual Override Crank Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature MF-22303 40 to 281F (4 to 138C) Mx51-7103, Mx41 -22 to 140F (-30 to 60C) Mx51-7203, Mx61-7203 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) Weight MF-22303 Mxxx-7102, -7203 Mx41-7153/AV-609 Approvals MF-22303 Mx51, Mx61 Mx41-7153 Warranty MF-22303 All others 1.5 lb (.68 kg) 4.3 lb (1.9 kg) 7.5 lb (3.4 kg) UL 873, File E9429; cUL, C22.2 No. 24-93; CE EMC Directive 89/336/ EEC; UL 873, File E9429; cUL, C22.2 No. 24-93; CE EMC Directive 89/336/ EEC; C-tick; UL, CE, cUL, C-tick 2 years 5 years
188
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Model MF-22303 24 VAC 1.5 VA 45 lbf (200 N) 105 lbf (467 N) MA51-7103-100 MF51-7103-100 24 VAC/VDC 5.3 VA 24 VAC/VDC 6.9 VA 24 VAC/VDC 6.6 VA 24 VAC/VDC 6.6 VA 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA 105 lbf (467 N) 105 lbf (467 N) 105 lbf (467 N) 220 lbf (979 N) 220 lbf (979 N) 220 lbf (979 N) 220 lbf (979 N) 220 lbf (979 N) 220 lbf (979 N) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) 133 in-lb (15 Nm) MS51-7103-100 MS51-7103-160 MA51-7203 MA61-7203 MF51-7203 MF61-7203 MS51-7203 MS61-7203 MA41-7153/AV-609-1 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA MF41-7153/AV-609-1 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA MS41-7153/AV-609-1 24 VAC/VDC 9.7 VA
CONTROL VALVES
Supply Supply Force/ Actuator Voltage VA Torque Code 255 804 804 814 814 593 596 593 596 593 596 556 556 556
Action
Control Signal
Stroke
Drive Time
NSR, DA/RA by Floating, contacts or 126 seconds 9/16" (1.4 cm) wiring terminations Triacs nominal SR valve stem up SR valve stem up, DA/RA by wiring SR, DA/RA by jumpers SR, DA/RA by jumpers SR valve stem up SR valve stem up SR valve stem up, DA/RA by wiring SR valve stem up, DA/RA by wiring SR, DA/RA by jumpers SR, DA/RA by jumpers SR, Mounting orientation DA/RA SR, Mounting orientation DA/RA SR, Mounting orientation DA/RA Two-position Floating Prop. 2-10 VDC Prop. 4-20 mA Two-position Two-position Floating Floating Prop. 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA Prop. 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA Two-position Floating Prop. 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA 1/2" (1.3 cm) 1/2" (1.3 cm) 1/2" (1.3 cm) 1/2" (1.3 cm) 1/2" (1.3 cm) 1" (2.5 cm) 1/2" (1.3 cm) 1" (2.5 cm) 1/2" (1.3 cm) 1" (2.5 cm) 1" w/AV-609 linkage 1" w/AV-609 linkage 1" w/AV-609 linkage 44 seconds 60 seconds 60 seconds 60 seconds 190 seconds maximum 190 seconds maximum 190 seconds maximum 190 seconds maximum 190 seconds maximum 190 seconds maximum 190 seconds 190 seconds 190 seconds
Spring Return Time 16 seconds 19 seconds 16 seconds 16 seconds
CONTROL VALVES
16 seconds 35 seconds 40 seconds 35 seconds 40 seconds 35 seconds 40 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds 30 seconds
ACTUATOR DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
D H
Model Number Mx51-7103 Mx51-7203 Mx61-7203 Mx223x3 Mx41-7153/AV-609
6-5/16 (16.0) 6-3/4 (17.2) 3-1/2 (8.9) 7 (17.8) 10-5/8 (27.0) 2-9/16 (6.5) 9-9/16 (24.2) 10-5/8 (27.0) 2-9/16 (6.5) 3-5/16 (8.4) 5-9/16 (14.1) 3 (7.6) 6-1/8 (15.6) 11-5/8 (29.5) 4 (10.2)
Mx-223x3 *Mx41/Mx51/Mx61
* Mx41 assemblies include separate AV-60x linkages. Dimension diagrams are generic and for illustration purposes only.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
189
CONTROL VALVES
WIRING
Green 24 VAC transformer or 20-30 VDC MF22303 Series Black Red Blue Yellow/Black Typical floating controller Common Hot (+DC) Extend Green/Yellow Retract 24 VAC transformer or 20-30 VDC MF51-7203 MF61-7203 Black White (Retract) Red (Extend) SPDT floating 24 VAC transformer
MF22303 Wiring
MA51-7103-100 MA51-7203 MA61-7203
MF41-7153, MF51/MF61-7203 Wiring
Black Red
Com Hot (+DC)
MA51-7203, MA51-7103-100, MA61-7203 Wiring
SPST control contact
CONTROL VALVES
24 VAC transformer or 22-30 VDC
Gray Black Red

500
Com Com Hot (+DC) Yellow/Black AI AO Violet Green/Yellow
MSX1-7203
24 VAC Transformer or 20-30 VDC
Control signal () 4 to 20 mA (+) Feedback signal 2 to 10 VDC (+) ()
Black Red Yellow/Black Blue
Common Hot (+DC) Retract Extend Violet
MF51-7103-100
2-10 VDC
Typical floating controller Feedback signal () 2 to 10 VDC (+)
L R To additional actuators
MS51/MS61-7203 Wiring
24 VAC Transformer or 20-30 VDC
MF51-7103-100 Wiring
mA DC Control signal VDC Feedback signal
(+) (+) ()
()
Black Com Red Hot (+DC) Yellow/Black AI Violet AO
MS51-7103-160
MS51-7103-160 Wiring
MODEL MF-22303 MA51-7103-100 MF51-7103-100 MS51-7103-100 MS51-7103-160 MA51-7203 MA61-7203 MF51-7203 MF61-7203 MS51-7203 MS61-7203 MA41-7153 MF41-7153 MS41-7153 DESCRIPTION Non-spring return, 45 lbf, oating control, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" VB-7xxx valves Spring return stem up, 105 lbf, two-position, plenum cable, for 1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx Spring return stem up, 105 lbf, oating, plenum cable, for 1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx Spring return stem up, 105 lbf, proportional 2-10 VDC, plenum cable, for 1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx Spring return stem up, 105 lbf, proportional 4-20 mA, plenum cable, for 1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx Spring return stem up, 220 lbf, two-position, plenum cable, for 1-1/4" to 2" VB-7xxx Spring return stem up, 220 lbf, two-position, plenum cable, for 2-1/2" to 4" VB-7xxx Spring return stem up, 220 lbf, oating, plenum cable, for 1-1/4" to 2" VB-7xxx Spring return stem up, 220 lbf, oating, plenum cable, for 2-1/2" to 4" VB-7xxx Spring return stem up, 220 lbf, proportional, plenum cable, for 1-1/4" to 2" VB-7xxx Spring return stem up, 220 lbf, proportional, plenum cable, for 2-1/2" to 4" VB-7xxx Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), two-position, 24 VAC, two-wire control Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), tri-state control, 24 VAC Spring return 133 in-lb (15 Nm), proportional control, 24 VAC
190
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
CONTROL VALVES
GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS FORTA SERIES
The Forta Series globe valve actuator is a programmable linear actuator family for use with VB7000, VB8000 and VB9000 series two- and three-way valves. The actuators are easily congured for oating or proportional control, direct or reverse action, stroke timing and ow characteristics. An automatic input control signal setup allows for easy eld installation onto existing Scheider Electric globe valves. The Forta actuator can also be purchased as part of a complete valve assembly for new applications/installations (order the VU Series).
M800A-VB (screw-mount, linkage not required)
Floating or proportional control in the same actuator Proportional conguration 0-10, 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, 500 resistor included Direct/Reverse action (switch selectable) Congurable run time Manual override Electronic valve sequencing and ow characteristic (equal percentage or linear) selection Torque overload protection (full stroke) Easy auto zero and span
M400A with AV-821 on a VB-7213-0-4-07
CONTROL VALVES
MOUNTING
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA M400 M800 M1500 Control Signal Motor Noise Conduit Connection Wiring Feedback Auxiliary Switch Action Force M400 M800 M1500 Stroke Stroke Time March 2014 24 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz 6 VA 15 VA 24 VA Floating or Proportional 0/2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA Brushless DC 32 dBa maximum Two knockouts, 7/8" (2.2 cm) Screw terminals 2-10 VDC Two SPDT, 4A resistive @ 24 VAC (model specic) Non-spring return, direct or reverse DIP switch selectable 90 lbf (400 N) 180 lbf (800 N) 337 lbf (1500 N) 3/8" to 2" (.9 to 5.2 cm) Floating, 60 or 300 seconds; Proportional, 15 seconds (for 1/2" stroke) Requires AV-811 linkage for VB-7xxx, AV-812 for VB-8xxx, VB-9xxx valves "-VB" models Direct screw-mount to valve bonnet Manual Override Yes Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) for chilled water applications; maximum temperature reduces to 90F (32C) when media temperature is 366F (186C) Operating Humidity 15% to 95% RH non-condensing Dimensions M400, M800 9.5"H x 6.3"W x 4.6"D (24.2 x 16.0 x 11.7 cm) M1500 6.8"H x 6.3"W x 4.6"D (17.3 x 16.0 x 11.7 cm) Weight 3.9 lb (1.8 kg) Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 (IP54) if both conduit connectors used, otherwise NEMA 1 (IP40) Approvals UL 873, cULus, C-tick, CE Warranty 1 year Valve Mounting Non "...VB"
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
191
CONTROL VALVES
GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS FORTA SERIES
WIRING
Optional auxiliary switches
K1 K2 KC1
Not Closed Closed
*add- S2 to model number for auxiliary switch
K3
Not open
K4 KC2
Open
Terminal G H AI C D1
H G
Function 24 vac 24 vac + Floating Floating +
AO AI
DI D2
D2 A0
Description power power input signal signal common Extend/ Retract* Extend/ Retract* feedback signal
*Exact operation will vary based on the settings of DIP switch #1 and #7
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
CONTROL VALVES
MOD 2-10 6-10, 5-10 60 s NORM NORM OP
INC SEQ 0-10 2-6, 0-5 300 s INV LIN/LG ADJ
Function in the OFF position Modulating 2-10 V 6-10 V, 5-10 V 60 s Normal Normal Operation
Description ON position Increase/decrease Sequence 0-10 V 2-6 V, 0-5 V 300 s Inverted Linear/Logarithmic End position adjustment Control Control Voltage range Part of voltage range Running time Direction of movement Valve characteristic Operation/End position adjustment
O 1 2 N 3 4 5 6 7 8
COMPATIBILITY
VB-7000 Bronze Valve VB-8000/9000 Flanged Iron Valve
(AV-822 linkage required) M1500A/ M1500A-VB (337 lbf) M800A/ M800A-VB (180 lbf) (AV-821 linkage required for M400A, M800A, M1500A) M400A/ M400A-VB (90 lbf)
Valve size 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2"
Valve size 2-1/2" 3" 4" 5" 6"

* VB-9313 only
M400A (90 lbf)
M800A (180 lbf)

* * *
M1500A (337 lbf)
MODEL M400A M400A-S2 M400A-S2-VB M400A-VB M800A M800A-S2 M800A-S2-VB M800A-VB M1500A M1500A-S2 M1500A-S2-VB M1500A-VB AV-821 AV-822 DESCRIPTION 90 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/oating control, requires AV-81x linkage 90 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/oating control, requires AV-81x linkage, auxiliary switch 90 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/oating control, screw-mount, auxiliary switch 90 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/oating control, screw-mount 180 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/oating control, requires AV-81x linkage 180 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/oating control, requires AV-81x linkage, auxiliary switch 180 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/oating control, screw-mount, auxiliary switch 180 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/oating control, screw-mount 337 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/oating control, requires AV-81x linkage 337 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/oating control, requires AV-81x linkage, auxiliary switch 337 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/oating control, screw-mount, auxiliary switch 337 lbf, non-spring return, proportional/oating control, screw-mount Linkage for VB-7xxx valves (required for M400A, M800A, M1500A) Linkage for VB-8xxx & VB-9xxx valves (required for M400A, M800A, M1500A)
AV-821 AV-822
ACCESSORIES Linkage for VB-7xxx valves (required for M400A, M800A, M1500A) Linkage for VB-8xxx & VB-9xxx valves (required for M400A, M800A, M1500A)
192
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Size Cv Body Pattern Flow Characteristic Rangeability Leakage Rating 2" thru 24" 135 thru 43116 Lugged 150 # buttery Modied EQ% 10:1 for 30 to 70 range Bubble tight Mounting Flange ANSI 150 Body Rating ASME/ANSI Class 125 Maximum Closeoff Pressure 100 PSI, 200 PSI Maximum Pressure Rating ASME/ANSI Class 125
CONTROL VALVES
BUTTERFLY VALVES KB SERIES
The KB Series buttery valves from Valve Solutions are available in sizes from 2" to 24" and come with a variety of options to meet your needs. The Fusion Bonded Epoxy coated body along with the EPDM seat and o-ring make for a very durable and long lasting buttery valve. These valves are available in 100 PSI, 150 PSI, and 200 PSI close off ratings for 2 position control. These are available with low or high pressure pneumatic actuators or with Valve Solutions new 1000X series actuators.
Good for chilled water, hot water and 50% Glycol applications Ductile iron body construction PTFE bushing Stainless steel disc and stem Manual gear wheel available Actuators come with two 1/2" conduit entries
VSI Series 2100 with Series C and Solenoid
CONTROL VALVES
US
VSI, 14-inch with 1060
VSI Buttery Valve 6-inch 3-way with 1000-X
Media Compatibility H2O - 50% Glycol Media Temperature Range -30 to 225F (-34 to 107C)
24 VAC, 120 VAC 60 Hz Ranges from 38.4 VA to 474 VA depending on actuator Supply Current 0.34A to 7.2 A depending on actuator Conduit Connection (1) 1/2" NPT conduit connection Air Connections 80 PSI 1/4 NPT Feedback 4-20 mA Auxiliary Switch (2) SPDT, optional Action Floating, modulating, 2-position Rotation 90 degrees Actuator Compatibility Dependent on model Actuator Mounting ISO 5211, direct-coupled Weight 32 to 1754 lbs. depending on model Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 on select models Approvals CSA US File 226201 Meets ARRA or BAA Yes
Supply Voltage Supply Frequency Supply VA
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
193
CONTROL VALVES
VALVE DIMENSIONS in (mm)
PORT 2-WAY 3-WAY DIM A B C Height without actuator Weight 2-WAY D LB (KG) LB (KG) LUGS (4ea) (4ea) (4ea) (8ea) 5/8 -11 5/8 -11 5/8 -11 5/8 -11 Two-way Valve Bodies (8ea) 3/4-10 (8ea) 3/4-10 (8ea) 3/4-10 (12ea) 7/8-9 (12ea) 7/8-9 (12ea) 1-8 (16ea) 1-8 (16ea) (20ea) (20ea) 1 1/8-7 1 1/8-7 1 1/4-7 2" 1.693 (43) 4.5 (114) 10.7 (272) 6.34 (161) 9 (4.07) 2.5" 1.811 (46) 5 (127) 11.8 (300) 6.89 (175) 10 (4.57) 3" 1.811 (46) 5.5 (140) 12.8 (325) 7.13 (181) 12.75 (5.77) 4" 2.047 (52) 6.5 (165) 15 (381) 7.9 (200) 19.25 (8.75) 5" 2.205 (56) 7.5 (190) 17.2 (437) 8.4 (2.13) 6" 2.205 (56) 8" 2.632 (60) 10" 2.677 (68) 11 (280) 24.7 (627) 11.5 (292) 12" 3.071 (78) 12 (305) 27 (686) 13.27 (337) 14" 3.071 (78) 14 (356) 31 (788) 14.49 (368) 152.5 (69.2) 16" 4.016 (102) 15 (381) 34 (864) 15.75 (400) 18" 4.488 (114) 16.5 (419) 37.5 (953) 16.61 (422) 20" 5.000 (127) 18 (457) 41 (1041) 18.9 (480) 408 (185) 24" 6.053 (154) 22 (559) 50 (1270) 22.13 (562) 626.5 (248.2)
8 (203) 9 (228) 18.2 (462) 8.9 (226) 20.6 (523) 10.24 (259)
24.25 28 44 70 103 (11.04) (12.64) (20.02) (31.67) (46.87)
253 333 (114.6) (151.2)
CONTROL VALVES
Weight 3-WAY Mounting
Three-way Tee-mounted Valve Bodies
* For total valve height add dimension D to the actuator coupling height listed above. Actuator mounting plate
1000 SERIES WIRING

PROPORTIONAL/MODULATING
ACTUATOR
TWO-POSITION
GND Y&G Grey Brown White
Heater OLS C CLS
Field Wiring
ACTUATOR
Field Wiring
7 6 5 4 3 K 2 1 PE Close N Full-close Signal Full-open Signal COM Open L
Grey Brown White Pink

1K RP
3 2 1
Full-close Signal Full-open Signal Com
Purple Orange
SERVO-CONTROLLER
C L
Black Red Blue

Push Button
+ Output Signal + Input Signal L Power Supply N HEATER
Black Red Blue
Thermal Protector
Thermal Protector Push Button*
PE
194
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
KA / KAS ACTUATOR WIRING
2 3 4 24 VAC Line voltage
CONTROL VALVES
KA-175-2T - KA-301-2T Two-position Control
1 2 3 4 5
24 VAC + 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA
Line voltage
1 2 3 4 5 + 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA
+ 24 VDC
2 3 4
24 VAC
Line voltage
0/2-10 VDC feedback
0/2-10 VDC feedback
Floating Controller
KA-175-2T - KA-301-2T Floating Control

Relay contact or switch 1 2 24 VAC Line voltage
KA-301-P Proportional Control 24 VAC Power 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA Signal

1 2 3 4 5
KA-175-P - KA-301-P Proportional Control 24 VDC Power 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA Signal
CONTROL VALVES
24 VAC
Line voltage
1 2 3 4 5
24 VAC 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA 0/2-10 VDC feedback
Line voltage
Floating controller
* 500, 1/2"W or greater resistor required when control signal is 4-20 mA
KAS-175-2 Two-position Control
KAS-175-M Floating Control
KAS-175-M Proportional Control
DOUBLE ACTING PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECS (100PSI CLOSE OFF)

2-WAY VALVE SIZE 2-3 4 5-6 8 10 12 14 16-18 20 24 3-WAY VALVE SIZE 2-3 4 5-6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 CLOSE OFF (PSI) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Pneumatic Actuator C-DA063 C-DA083 C-DA092 C-DA105 C-DA125 C-DA140 C-DA160 C-DA190 C-DA210 C-DA240 C-DA270 Air Source PSIG 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 Control Signal 2-POS 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC Modulating 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA Torque @ 80PSI Failsafe In/LB 354 NO 761 NO 1097 NO 1611 NO 2443 NO 4160 NO 6470 NO 10355 NO 12949 NO 12949 NO 28464 NO Timing Seconds 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 2 2 Dimensions HxWxL (in) 4.25x3.25x6.6 5.07x4.05x8.03 5.37x4.27x10.31 6.02x4.78x10.55 6.89x5.59x11.85 7.56x5.98x15.35 8.54x6.95x18.03 10.24x8.12x20.67 11.22x8.90x20.94 12.56x10.24x23.70 14.02x11.58x28.43 Coupling Height (in) DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT Actuator Weight (lbs) 4.41 6.83 10.14 14.99 19.68 28.66 44.09 68.37 103.62 147.74 213.85
DOUBLE ACTING PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECS (100PSI CLOSE OFF)

2-WAY VALVE SIZE 2-3 4 5 6 8 10 12-14 16 18-20 24 3-WAY VALVE SIZE 2-2.5 3-4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 CLOSE OFF (PSI) 200 200 200 200 200 200 150 150 150 150 150 150 Pneumatic Actuator C-DA063 C-DA083 C-DA092 C-DA105 C-DA125 C-DA140 C-DA160 C-DA190 C-DA210 C-DA240 C-DA270 C-DA300 Air Source PSIG 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 Control Signal 2-POS 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC Modulating 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA Torque @ 80PSI Failsafe In/LB 354 NO 761 NO 1097 NO 1611 NO 2443 NO 4160 NO 6470 NO 10355 NO 12949 NO 12949 NO 28464 NO 37147 NO Timing Seconds 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 Dimensions HxWxL (in) 4.25x3.25x6.6 5.07x4.05x8.03 5.37x4.27x10.31 6.02x4.78x10.55 6.89x5.59x11.85 7.56x5.98x15.35 8.54x6.95x18.03 10.24x8.12x20.67 11.22x8.90x20.94 12.56x10.24x23.70 14.02x11.58x28.43 14.88x12.76x29.21 Coupling Height (in) DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT Actuator Weight (lbs) 4.41 6.83 10.14 14.99 19.68 28.66 44.09 68.37 103.62 147.74 213.85 242.51
HIGH PRESSURE DOUBLE ACTING (DA)
HIGH PRESSURE DOUBLE ACTING (DA)
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
195
CONTROL VALVES
SPRING RETURN PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECS (100PSI CLOSE OFF)
2-WAY 3-WAY CLOSE VALVE VALVE OFF (PSI) SIZE SIZE 2" 2" 100 2.5"-3" 2.5"-3" 100 4"-5" 4" 100 5" 100 6"-8" 6" 100 10" 8"-10" 100 12" 12" 100 14" 14" 100 16" 100 18" 16" 100 20" 18" 100 20" 100 Pneumatic Actuator C-SR063 C-SR083 C-SR092 C-SR105 C-SR125 C-SR140 C-SR160 C-SR190 C-SR210 C-SR240 C-SR270 C-SR300 Air Source PSIG 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 Control Signal 2-POS 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC Modulating 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA Torque @ 80PSI Failsafe In/LB 121 YES 280 YES 413 YES 560 YES 929 YES 1522 YES 2469 YES 3540 YES 4868 YES 7266 YES 9904 YES 12922 YES Timing Seconds 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 Dimensions HxWxL (in) 4.25x3.25x6.6 5.07x4.05x8.03 5.37x4.27x10.31 6.02x4.78x10.55 6.89x5.59x11.85 7.56x5.98x15.35 8.54x6.95x18.03 10.24x8.12x20.67 11.22x8.90x20.94 12.56x10.24x23.70 14.02x11.58x28.43 14.88x12.76x29.21 Coupling Height (in) DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT Actuator Weight (lbs) 4.63 7.94 11.46 15.24 22.27 33.07 52.91 77.16 121.25 176.37 260.15 286.6
CONTROL VALVES
SPRING RETURN PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECS (200PSI CLOSE OFF)

2-WAY 3-WAY CLOSE VALVE VALVE OFF (PSI) SIZE SIZE 2" 200 2.5"-3" 2"-2.5" 200 4" 3" 200 4" 200 5"-6" 5" 200 8" 6"-8" 200 10" 200 12" 10" 200 14" 12" 150 16" 14" 150 16" 150 18" 18" 150 Pneumatic Actuator C-SR063 C-SR083 C-SR092 C-SR105 C-SR125 C-SR140 C-SR160 C-SR190 C-SR210 C-SR240 C-SR270 C-SR300 Air Source PSIG 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 40-130 Control Signal 2-POS 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC 24/120VAC Modulating 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA 3-15PSI, 4-20mA Torque @ 80PSI Failsafe In/LB 121 YES 280 YES 413 YES 560 YES 929 YES 1522 YES 2469 YES 3540 YES 4868 YES 7266 YES 9904 YES 12922 YES Timing Seconds 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 Dimensions HxWxL (in) 4.25x3.25x6.6 5.07x4.05x8.03 5.37x4.27x10.31 6.02x4.78x10.55 6.89x5.59x11.85 7.56x5.98x15.35 8.54x6.95x18.03 10.24x8.12x20.67 11.22x8.90x20.94 12.56x10.24x23.70 14.02x11.58x28.43 14.88x12.76x29.21 Coupling Height (in) DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT Actuator Weight (lbs) 4.63 7.94 11.46 15.24 22.27 33.07 52.91 77.16 121.25 176.37 260.15 286.6
LOW PRESSURE SPRING RETURN PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECS (100PSI CLOSE OFF)
2-WAY 3-WAY CLOSE VALVE VALVE OFF (PSI) SIZE SIZE 2"-3" 2"-2.5" 100 4"-5" 3"-4" 100 6"-8" 5"-6" 100 10"-12" 8"-10" 100 2"-3" 2"-2.5" 100 4"-5" 3"-4" 100 6"-8" 5"-6" 100 10"-12" 8"-10" 100 Pneumatic Actuator D31535130 D32445110 D32465110 D32465110(X2) D31535120 D32445100 D32465100 D32465100(X2) Air Source PSIG 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Control Signal 2-POS 20 PSI 20 PSI 20 PSI 20 PSI NA NA NA NA Modulating NA NA NA NA 3-15 PSI 3-15 PSI 3-15 PSI 3-15 PSI Torque @ 80PSI Failsafe In/LB 201 YES 425 YES 602 YES 1204 YES 201 YES 425 YES 602 YES 1204 YES Timing Seconds 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Dimensions HxWxL (in) 10x8x16 12x10x20 14x12x24 14x12x24 10x8x16 12x10x20 14x12x24 14x12x24 Coupling Height (in) 3" 4" 5" 5" 3" 4" 5" 5" Actuator Weight (lbs) 14 24 35 70 14 24 35 70
LOW PRESSURE SPRING RETURN PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR SPECS (100PSI CLOSE OFF)
2-WAY 3-WAY CLOSE VALVE VALVE OFF (PSI) SIZE SIZE 2"-2.5" 2" 200 3"-4" 2.5"-3" 200 5"-6" 4"-5" 200 8" 6"-8" 200 2"-2.5" 2" 200 3"-4" 2.5"-3" 200 5"-6" 4"-5" 200 8" 6"-8" 200 Pneumatic Actuator D31535130 D32445110 D32465110 D32465110(X2) D31535120 D32445100 D32465100 D32465100(X2) Air Source PSIG 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Control Signal 2-POS 20 PSI 20 PSI 20 PSI 20 PSI NA NA NA NA Modulating NA NA NA NA 3-15 PSI 3-15 PSI 3-15 PSI 3-15 PSI Torque @ 80PSI Failsafe In/LB 201 YES 425 YES 602 YES 1204 YES 201 YES 425 YES 602 YES 1204 YES Timing Seconds 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Dimensions HxWxL (in) 10x8x16 12x10x20 14x12x24 14x12x24 10x8x16 12x10x20 14x12x24 14x12x24 Coupling Height (in) 3" 4" 5" 5" 3" 4" 5" 5" Actuator Weight (lbs) 14 24 35 70 14 24 35 70
196
LOW PRESSURE SPRING RETURN (SR)
LOW PRESSURE SPRING RETURN (SR)
HIGH PRESSURE SPRING RETURN (SR)
HIGH PRESSURE SPRING RETURN (SR)
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
2-Way 3Way Valve Size Valve Size 2"-3" 2"-2.5" Close Off Psi 100 Electric Actuator KA-175 2"-3" 4" 2"-2.5" 3" 100 100 KAS-175 KA-301 GKB24 4"-5" 5" 3"-4" 4" 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 GMB24 6" 2"-5" 6" 8" - 10" 12"-14" 5"-6" 2"-5" 6" 8" - 10" 12" 14" 16"-18" 20" 24" 16"-18" 20" 24" GKX24MFT(X2) 1005-X 1010-X 1020-X 1040-X 1060-X 1100-X 1160-X 1250-X
CONTROL VALVES
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR SPECIFICATIONS (SIZED FOR 100 PSI CLOSE-OFF)

Electric Power Control Signal Torque (in/lb) 175 175 301 360 360 720 443 885 1770 3540 5310 8851 14616 22127 Fail Safe NO YES NO YES NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Run Time Dimensions (HxWxL) In. (Seconds) 95 8"x7"x9.25" 95 95 95 95 95 20 30 30 30 45 30 48 75 8"x7"x9.25" 8"x7"x9.25" 8"x7"x9.25" 8"x7"x9.25" 13"x7"x9.25" 6.3"x5.4"x6.3" 7.2"x5.8"x7.7" 8.6"x7.2"x10" 8.6"x7.2"x10" 8.6"x7.2"x10" 9.6"x9.5"x12.2" 9.6"x9.5"x12.2" 9.6"x9.5"x12.2" Coupling Height 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 13" DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT Coupling Height 3Way 8" 8" 8" 8" 8" 13" 2"
2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(16VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(9VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(21VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(6VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(42VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(40VA) or 2-POS, FLOAT, 120VAC(40VA) 2-10VDC, 4-20mA 24VAC(46VA) or 2-POS, FLOAT, 120VAC(97VA) 2-10VDC, 4-20mA 24VAC(116VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, or 4-20mA 120VAC(201VA) 24VAC(173VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, or 4-20mA 120VAC(410VA) 120VAC(432VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, 4-20mA 120VAC(456VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, 4-20mA 120VAC(472VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, 4-20mA 120VAC(475VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, 4-20mA
24VAC(6VA)
CONTROL VALVES
2" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3"
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
197
CONTROL VALVES
ELECTRIC ACTUATOR SPECIFICATIONS (SIZED FOR 150/200 PSI CLOSE-OFF)
2-Way 3Way Valve Size Valve Size 2" 2" 2" 2" 2.5" 2.5" 3" 4" 5" 2"-4" 5"-6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 18" 20" 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 150 150 150 150 Electric Actuator KA-175 KAS-175 KA-301 EFB24 GMB24(X2) EFB24(X2) GKX24MFT 1005-X 1010-X 1020-X 1040-X 1060-X 1060-X 1100-X 1160-X 1250-X Electric Power 24VAC(6VA) Control Signal Torque (In/Lb) 175 175 175 270 720 270 720 443 885 1770 3540 5310 5310 8851 14616 22127 Fail Safe NO YES NO YES NO YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO Run Time Dimensions (HxWxL) In. (Seconds) 95 8"x7"x9.25" 95 95 95 95 95 95 20 30 30 30 45 45 30 48 75 8"x7"x9.25" 8"x7"x9.25" 8"x7"x9.25" 13"x7"x9.25" 13"x7"x9.25" 13"x7"x9.25" 5.5"x4.4"x6.3" 7.2"x5.8"x7.7" 8.6"x7.2"x10" 8.6"x7.2"x10" 8.6"x7.2"x10" 8.6"x7.2"x10" 9.6"x9.5"x12.2" 9.6"x9.5"x12.2" 9.6"x9.5"x12.2" Coupling Height 2Way 8" 8" 8" 13" 13" 13" 13" DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT Coupling Height 3Way 8" 8" 8" 13" 13" 13" 13" 2" 2" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3"
2.5"-3" 2.5"-3" 4"-5" 4" 5"
2"-4" 5"-6" 8" 10" -12" 14" 14" 16"-18" 20" 24"
2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(16VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(16VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(14VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(21VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(28VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(42VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC 24VAC(40VA) or 2-POS, FLOAT, 120VAC(40VA) 2-10VDC, 4-20mA 24VAC(46VA) or 2-POS, FLOAT, 120VAC(97VA) 2-10VDC, 4-20mA 24VAC(116VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, or 4-20mA 120VAC(201VA) 24VAC(173VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, or 4-20mA 120VAC(410VA) 120VAC(432VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, 4-20mA 120VAC(432VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, 4-20mA 120VAC(456VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, 4-20mA 120VAC(472VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, 4-20mA 120VAC(475VA) 2-POS, FLOAT, 2-10VDC, 4-20mA
CONTROL VALVES
198
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
VALVE TYPE/SIZE 2-WAY/2" 2-WAY/2.5" 2-WAY/3" 2-WAY/4" 2-WAY/5" 2-WAY/6" 2-WAY/8" 2-WAY/10" 2-WAY/12" 2-WAY/14" 2-WAY/16" 2-WAY/18" 2-WAY/20" 2-WAY/24" 3-WAY/2" 3-WAY/2.5" 3-WAY/3" 3-WAY/4" 3-WAY/5" 3-WAY/6" 3-WAY/8" 3-WAY/10" 3-WAY/12" 3-WAY/14" 3-WAY/16" 3-WAY/18" 3-WAY/20" 3-WAY/24" 1E2V 1005-X 1005-X 1005-X 1005-X 1005-X or 1010-X 1010-X 1020-X 1020-X or 1040-X 1040-X 1040-X or 1060-X 1100-X 1100-X or 1160-X 1160-X 1250-X 1005-X 1005-X 1005-X 1005-X or 1010-X 1005-X or 1010-X 1010-X or 1020-X 1020-X 1020-X or 1040-X 1040-X or 1060-X 1060-X 1100-X 1100-X or 1160-X 1160-X or 1250-X 1250-X VALVE TYPE/SIZE
CONTROL VALVES

2E2V 1005-X-24V 1005-X-24V 1005-X-24V 1005-X-24V 1005-X-24V or 1010-X-24 1005-X-24V or 1010-X-24 1005-X-24V or 1020-X-24V 1005-X-24V or 1040-X-24V 1005-X-24V or 1040-X-24V 1005-X-24V 1005-X-24V 1005-X-24V 1005-X-24V 1005-X-24V or 1010-X-24 1005-X-24V or 1010-X-24 1010-X-24V or 1020-X-24 1020-X-24V 1020-X-24V or 1040-X-24V 1040-X-24V 1EMV2 / 1EMV4 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S -X-2(4) OR 1010/S-X 1010/S-X 1020/S-X 1020/S-X or 1040/S-X 1040/S-X 1040/S-X or 1060/S-X 1100/S-X 1100/S-X or 1160/S-X 1160/S-X 1250/S-X 1005/S-X-2(4) or 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-2(4) or 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-2(4) or 1005/S-X-2(4) 1005/S-X-2(4) or 1010/S-X 1005/S-X-2(4) or 1010/S-X 1010/S-X or 1020/S-X 1020/S-X 1020/S-X or 1040/S-X 1040/S-X or 1060/S-X 1060/S-X 1100/S-X 1100/S-X or 1160/S-X 1160/S-X or 1250/S-X 1250/S-X 2EMV2 / 2EMV4 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) or 1010/S-X-24V-2(4) 1010/S-X-24V-2(4) 1020/S-X-24V-2(4) 1020/S-X-24V-2(4) or 1040/S-X-24V-2(4) 1040/S-X-24V-2(4) 1040/S-X-24V-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) or 1010/S-X-24V-2(4) 1005/S-X-24V-2(4) or 1010/S-X-24V-2(4) 1010/S-X-24V-2(4) or 1020/S-X-24V-2(4) 1020/S-X-24V-2(4) 1020/S-X-24V-2(4) or 1040/S-X-24V-2(4) 1040/S-X-24V-2(4)
CONTROL VALVES

2-WAY/2" 2-WAY/2.5" 2-WAY/3" 2-WAY/4" 2-WAY/5" 2-WAY/6" 3-WAY/2" 3-WAY/2.5" 3-WAY/3" 3-WAY/4" 3-WAY/5" 3-WAY/6"
2E2D KA-175-2T KA-175-2T or KA-301-2T KA-175-2T or KA-301-2T KA-301-2T or GMB24-3(x2) GMB24-3 or GMB24-3(x2) GMB24-3(x2) KA-175-2T KA-175-2T or KA-301-2T KA-301-2T GMB24-3 or GMB24-3(x2) GMB24-3(x2) GMB24-3(x2) 2E2DSC / 2E2DS0 KAS-175-2 KAS-175-2 or EFB24 KAS-175-2 or EFB24 GKB24-3 or EFB24(x2) GKB24-3 or GKX24-MFT(x2) GKX24-MFT(x2) KAS-175-2 KAS-175-2 or EFB24 EFB24 or GKB24-3 GKB24-3 or EFB24(x2) GKX24-MFT(x2) GKX24-MFT(x2) 2EMD KA-175-P KA-175-P or KA-301-P KA-175-P or KA-301-P KA-301-P or GMB24-SR(x2) GMB24-SR or GMB24-SR(x2) GMB24-SR(x2) KA-175-P KA-175-P or KA-301-P KA-301-P GMB24-SR or GMB24-SR(x2) GMB24-SR(x2) GMB24-SR(x2) 2EMDSC / 2EMDSO KAS-175-M KAS-175-M or EFB24-SR KAS-175-M or EFB24-SR GKB24-SR or EFB24-SR(x2) GKB24-SR or GKX24-MFT(x2) GKX24-MFT(x2) KAS-175-M KAS-175-M or EFB24-SR EFB24-SR or GKB24-SR GKB24-SR or EFB24-SR(x2) GKX24-MFT(x2) GKX24-MFT(x2)
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
199
CONTROL VALVES
ACTUATOR CODES (LOW PRESSURE PNEUMATIC- 20PSI AIR)
VALVE TYPE/SIZE 2-WAY/2" 2-WAY/2.5" 2-WAY/3" 2-WAY/4" 2-WAY/5" 2-WAY/6" 2-WAY/8" 2-WAY/10" 2-WAY/12" 3-WAY/2" 3-WAY/2.5" 3-WAY/3" 3-WAY/4" 3-WAY/5" 3-WAY/6" 3-WAY/8" 3-WAY/10" LP2SC D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 or D-3244-5110 D-3244-5110 D-3244-5110 or D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 or D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110(x2) D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 or D-3244-5110 D-3244-5110 D-3244-5110 or D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 or D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110(x2) LP2SO D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 or D-3244-5110 D-3244-5110 D-3244-5110 or D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 or D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110(x2) D-3153-5130 D-3153-5130 or D-3244-5110 D-3244-5110 D-3244-5110 or D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 D-3246-5110 or D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110(x2) D-3246-5110(x2) LPMSC D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120 or D-3244-5100 D-3244-5100 D-3244-5100 or D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100 or D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100(x2) D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120 or D-3244-5100 D-3244-5100 D-3244-5100 or D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100 or D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100(x2) LPMSO D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120 or D-3244-5100 D-3244-5100 D-3244-5100 or D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100 or D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100(x2) D-3153-5120 D-3153-5120 or D-3244-5100 D-3244-5100 D-3244-5100 or D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100 D-3246-5100 or D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100(x2) D-3246-5100(x2)
CONTROL VALVES
ACTUATOR CODES (HIGH PRESSURE PNEUMATIC-80 PSI AIR)

VALVE TYPE/SIZE HP21 / HP22
2-WAY/2" 2-WAY/2.5" 2-WAY/3" 2-WAY/4" 2-WAY/5" 2-WAY/6" 2-WAY/8" 2-WAY/10" 2-WAY/12" 2-WAY/14" 2-WAY/16" 2-WAY/18" 2-WAY/20" 2-WAY/24" 3-WAY/2" 3-WAY/2.5" 3-WAY/3" 3-WAY/4" 3-WAY/5" 3-WAY/6" 3-WAY/8" 3-WAY/10" 3-WAY/12" 3-WAY/14" 3-WAY/16" 3-WAY/18" 3-WAY/20" 3-WAY/24" C-DA63/WT8 C-DA63/WT8 C-DA63/WT8 C-DA83/WT8 C-DA83/WT8 or C-DA092/WT8 C-DA092/WT8 or C-DA105/WT8 C-DA105/WT8 or C-DA125/WT8 C-DA125/WT8 or C-DA140/WT8 C-DA140/WT8 or C-DA160/WT8 C-DA160/WT8 C-DA190/WT8 C-DA190/WT8 or C-DA240/WT8 C-DA210/WT8 or C-DA240/WT8 C-DA270/WT8 or C-DA300/WT8 C-DA63/WT8 C-DA63/WT8 C-DA63/WT8 or C-DA83/WT8 C-DA83/WT8 C-DA83/WT8 or C-DA092/WT8 C-DA092/WT8 or C-DA105/WT8 C-DA105/WT8 or C-DA125/WT8 C-DA125/WT8 or C-DA140/WT8 C-DA140/WT8 or C-DA160/WT8 C-DA160/WT8 or C-DA190/WT8 C-DA190/WT8 or C-DA210/WT8 C-DA210/WT8 or C-DA240/WT8 C-DA240/WT8 or C-DA270/WT8 C-DA270/WT8
HP2SC1 / HP2SC2 HP2S01 / HP2S02

C-SR63/WT8 C-SR83/WT8 C-SR83/WT8 C-SR92/WT8 C-SR92/WT8 or C-SR125/WT8 C-SR125/WT8 C-SR125/WT8 or C-SR140/WT8 C-SR140/WT8 or C-SR160/WT8 C-SR160/WT8 or C-SR190/WT8 C-SR190/WT8 or C-SR210/WT8 C-SR210/WT8 or C-SR240/WT8 C-SR240/WT8 or C-SR300/WT8 C-SR270/WT8 C-SR63/WT8 or C-SR83/WT8 C-SR83/WT8 C-SR83/WT8 or C-SR92/WT8 C-SR92/WT8 or C-SR105/WT8 C-SR105/WT8 or C-SR125/WT8 C-SR125/WT8 or C-SR140/WT8 C-SR140/WT8 C-SR140/WT8 or C-SR190/WT8 C-SR160/WT8 or C-SR210/WT8 C-SR190/WT8 or C-SR240/WT8 C-SR240/WT8 or C-SR270/WT8 C-SR270/WT8 or C-SR300/WT8 C-SR300/WT8
HPM
C-DA63/VP7G C-DA63/VP7G C-DA63/VP7G C-DA83/VP7G C-DA83/VP7G or C-DA092/VP7G C-DA092/VP7G or C-DA105/VP7G C-DA105/VP7G or C-DA125/VP7G C-DA125/VP7G or C-DA140/VP7G C-DA140/VP7G or C-DA160/VP7G C-DA160/VP7G C-DA190/VP7G C-DA190/VP7G or C-DA240/VP7G C-DA210/VP7G or C-DA240/VP7G C-DA270/VP7G or C-DA300/VP7G C-DA63/VP7G C-DA63/VP7G C-DA63/VP7G or C-DA83/VP7G C-DA83/VP7G C-DA83/VP7G or C-DA092/VP7G C-DA092/VP7G or C-DA105/VP7G C-DA105/VP7G or C-DA125/VP7G C-DA125/VP7G or C-DA140/VP7G C-DA140/VP7G or C-DA160/VP7G C-DA160/VP7G or C-DA190/VP7G C-DA190/VP7G or C-DA210/VP7G C-DA210/VP7G or C-DA240/VP7G C-DA240/VP7G or C-DA270/V97G C-DA270/VP7G
HPMSC / HPMSO
C-SR63/VP7G C-SR83/VP7G C-SR83/VP7G C-SR92/VP7G C-SR92/VP7G or C-SR125/VP7G C-SR125/VP7G C-SR125/VP7G or C-SR140/VP7G C-SR140/VP7G or C-SR160/VP7G C-SR160/VP7G or C-SR190/VP7G C-SR190/VP7G or C-SR210/VP7G C-SR210/VP7G or C-SR240/VP7G C-SR240/VP7G or C-SR300/VP7G C-SR270/VP7G C-SR63/VP7G or C-SR83/VP7G C-SR83/VP7G C-SR83/VP7G or C-SR92/VP7G C-SR92/VP7G or C-SR105/VP7G C-SR105/VP7G or C-SR125/VP7G C-SR125/VP7G or C-SR140/VP7G C-SR140/VP7G C-SR140/VP7G or C-SR190/VP7G C-SR160/VP7G or C-SR210/VP7G C-SR190/VP7G or C-SR240/VP7G C-SR240/VP7G or C-SR270/VP7G C-SR270/VP7G or C-SR300/VP7G C-SR300/VP7G
Note: Actuators listed in order depending on valve body pressure rating. Example: C-DA125/VP7G or C-DA140/VP7G 100 psi pressure body or 150/200 psi pressure body
200
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
MODEL KB Buttery Valve 1 2 PRESSURE 100 psi (low pressure) TYPE -2 -3 150/200 psi (high pressure) 2-Way 3-Way SIZE -02 -25 -03 -04 -05 -06 -08 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 ACTUATOR -2E2V -2EMV2 -2EMV4 -1E2V -1EMV2 -1EMV4 -2E2D -2E2DSC -2E2DSO -2EMD -2EMDSC -2EMDSO -10 -12 -14 -16 -18 -20 -24 KB 1 -3 -02 -1EMV2
CONTROL VALVES
3
10 12 14
CONTROL VALVES
16 18 20 24 -LP2SC -LP2SO -LPMSC -LPMSO -HP21 -HP22 -HPM -HP2SC1 -HP2SO1 -HP2SC2 -HP2SO2 -HPMSC -HPMSO Low pressure pneumatic, 2-position, spring return, NC Low pressure pneumatic, 2-position, spring return, NO Low pressure pneumatic, 3-15 positioner, spring return, NC Low pressure pneumatic, 3-15 positioner, spring return, NO High pressure pneumatic, double acting, 120V solenoid High pressure pneumatic, double acting, 24V solenoid High pressure pneumatic, double acting, 3-15 positioner High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NC, 120V solenoid High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NO, 120V solenoid High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NC, 24V solenoid High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NO, 24V solenoid High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NC, 3-15 positioner High pressure pneumatic, spring return, NO, 3-15 positioner
NEMA 4, 24V electric, 2-position NEMA 4, 24V electric, modulating, 2-10 VDC input NEMA 4, 24V electric, modulating, 4-20 mA input NEMA 4, 120V electric, 2-position NEMA 4, 120V electric, modulating, 2-10 VDC input NEMA 4, 120V electric, modulating, 4-20 mA input NEMA 2, 24V electric, 2-position NEMA 2, 24v electric, 2-position, spring return, NC NEMA 2, 24v electric, 2-position, spring return, NO NEMA 2, 24V electric, modulating NEMA 2, 24v electric, modulating, spring return, NC NEMA 2, 24v electric, modulating, spring return, NO
3-Way ARRANGEMENT CODE (See arrangement chart for diagram)* -01 -02 -03 -04 -05 -06 -01 Arrangement 1 Arrangement 2 Arrangement 3 Arrangement 4 Arrangement 5 Arrangement 6 Example: KB1-3-02-1EMV2-01
* Note: Arrangement Code only needed when ordering 3-way valves
THREE-WAY CONFIGURATION
Actuator Normal Closed
1
Slave Normal Open
2
Slave Normal Open
3
Act. Normal Closed Slave Normal Open Slave Normal Open
4
Act. Normal Closed
5
Slave Normal Open
6
Slave Normal Open
March 2014 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
201
CONTROL VALVES
BUTTERFLY VALVES F6, F7 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The F6, F7 Series buttery valves fulll the requirements of commercial and industrial HVAC applications requiring positive shutoff for water. Applications include chiller isolation, cooling tower isolation, change-over systems, large air handler coil control and bypass, and various water distribution and storage systems. The F6 assemblies are two-way and the F7 are three-way ow patterns. Undercut disc assemblies, designated by "HDU" in the part number have a maximum close-off of 50 psid, and full-cut models, designated by "HD" part number, have full 200 psid close-off rating. Small size valves are available with economical Belimo rotary actuators and all sizes are available with industrial grade, NEMA 4 actuators, to meet most application requirements. Other sizes, assembly combinations, connection types, and materials of construction are available.
CONTROL VALVES
FEATURES Advanced seat and disc design provide bubble-tight shutoff while maintaining a low seating torque Standard rotary actuators, or industrial grade NEMA 4 actuators for a variety of application requirements Internal valve body ve bushing design isolates the valve body from the shaft resulting in better control Standard stainless steel disc and shaft for strength, durability and long-lasting operation
APPLICATIONS Buttery valves allow high ows with relatively low pressure loss, compared to globe valves, and are typically used for isolation or ow control. Good modulation is achieved between 30 and 70 degrees of full open. At valve openings greater than 70 degrees, the pressure loss is too low to produce any signicant effect on ow or the energy loss of a ow system. Buttery valves can be controlled with a maintenance-free electronic actuator or manually, with an ergonomic, wear-free plastic handle or gear operator.
SPECIFICATIONS
Mounting Flange ANSI Class 125/150 lug style anges Maximum Closeoff Pressure 50 psid (345 kPa) (undercut models); 200 psid (1380 kPa) (full rated models) Pressure Rating 200 psig (1379 kPa) @ -30F to 275F per ASME/ANSI Class 125/150 Materials Of Construction Ductile iron ASTM A536 (with epoxy powder nish) valve body; EPDM seat; 416 stainless steel shaft; 304 stainless steel disc; EPDM o-ring; RPTFE bushings Media Compatibility Hot or chilled water, up to 60% glycol Media Temperature Range -22 to 250F (-30 to 120C) Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC (Belimo direct-coupled); 24 VAC or 120 VAC (SY Series) Control Signal Two-position, oating, proportional 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA All models have manual override Manual Override Operating Temperature -22 to 122F (-30 to 50C) Enclosure Rating NEMA 2 and NEMA 4 enclosed (Belimo direct-coupled actuators); NEMA 4/4X (SY Series industrial actuators) Warranty 2 years
202
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
THREE-WAY CONFIGURATION CODES CONFIGURATION CODES
2-way Configuration
2 Pos. Non-Spring Return Set Up Required Field Logic Determines Normal Position NC (Normally Closed) 1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Closed (Normally Open) 1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Open Modulating NO NO/FO (Normally Open/Fail Open) Field Logic Determines Normal Position Spring Fails Valve OPEN NC/FC (Normally Closed/Fail Closed) Field Logic Determines Normal Position Spring Fails Valve CLOSED NO/FO (Normally Open/Fail Open) 1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Open Spring Fails Valve OPEN NO/FC (Normally Open/Fail Closed) 1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Open Spring Fails Valve CLOSED NC/FO (Normally Closed/Fail Open) 1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Closed Spring Fails Valve OPEN NC/FC (Normally Closed/Fail Closed) 1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Closed Spring Fails Valve CLOSED Spring Return
CONTROL VALVES
CONTROL VALVES
3-way Configuration
2 Pos. Specify Flow Pattern [10-35] Specify Flow Pattern [10-35] Non-Spring Return No Set Up Required Field Logic Determines Normal Position Master (Actuated) Valve NC (Normally Closed) 1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Closed Master (Actuated) Valve NO (Normally Open) 1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Open NO/FO (Normally Open/Fail Open) Field Logic Determines Normal Position Spring Fails Master Valve OPEN NC/FC (Normally Closed/Fail Closed) Field Logic Determines Normal Position Spring Fails Master Valve CLOSED NO/FO (Normally Open/Fail Open) 1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Master Valve Open Spring Fails Master Valve OPEN NO/FC (Normally Open/Fail Closed) 1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Maser Valve Open Spring Fails Master Valve CLOSED NC/FO (Normally Closed/Fail Open) 1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Master Valve Closed Spring Fails Master Valve OPEN NC/FC (Normally Closed/Fail Closed) 1 VDC/2 VDC/4mA = Master Valve Closed Spring Fails Master Valve CLOSED
Spring Return
Modulating
2 Pos.
Modulating
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
203
CONTROL VALVES
ASSEMBLY COMBINATIONS/ORDERING INFORMATION - INDOOR LOCATIONS

Cv @ 90 NSR NSR SR or fail-safe Proportional/ On/off/oating On/off/oating MFT SR or fail-safe Proportional/MFT
Model
Size
Close-off
3
2-way undercut F650HDU 2" (DN50) F665HDU 2-1/2" (DN65) F680HDU 3" (DN80) F6100HDU 4" (DN100) F6125HDU 5" (DN125) F6150HDU 6" (DN150) 3-way undercut F750HDU 2" (DN50) F765HDU 2-1/2" (DN65) F780HDU 3" (DN80) F7100HDU 4" (DN100) F7125HDU 5" (DN125) F7150HDU 6" (DN150) 2-way full rated F650HD 2" (DN50) F665HD 2-1/2" (DN65) F680HD 3" (DN80) F6100HD 4" (DN100) F6125HD 5" (DN125) F6150HD 6" (DN150) F6200HD 8" (DN200) F6250HD 10" (DN250) F6300HD 12" (DN300) F6350HD 14" (DN350) F6400HD 16" (DN400) F6450HD 18" (DN450) F6500HD 20" (DN500) 3-way full rated F750HD 2" (DN50) F765HD 2-1/2" (DN65) F780HD 3" (DN80) F7100HD 4" (DN100) F7125HD 5" (DN125) F7150HD 6" (DN150) F7200HD 8" (DN200) F7250HD 10" (DN250) F7300HD 12" (DN300) F7350HD 14" (DN350) F7400HD 16" (DN400) F7450HD 18" (DN450) F7500HD 20" (DN500)
CONTROL VALVES
115 196 302 600 1022 1579 115 196 302 600 1022 1579 115 196 302 600 600 1579 3136 5340 8250 11917 16388 21705 27908 115 196 302 600 600 1579 3136 5340 8250 11917 16388 21705 27908
ARB24-3-5 50 GRB24-3-7 2XGMB24-3-X1 AMB24-3-X1 50 GMB24-3-X1 2xGMB24-3-X1
ARB24-MFT-5 GRX24-MFT-7 2XGMX24-MFT-X1 AMX24-MFT-X1 GMX24-MFT-X1 2xGMX24-MFT-X1
AFBUP-X1 AFBUP-X1 2XAFBUP-X1 -AFBUP-X1 AFBUP-X1 2XAFBUP-X1 ---AFBUP-X1 GKRB24-3-5 ---------AFBUP-X1 2XAFBUP-X1 ------------
AFX24-MFT-X1 2xAFX24-MFT-X1 2XAFX24-MFT-X1 -AFX24-MFT-X1 2xAFX24-MFT-X1 2XAFX24-MFT-X1 ---AFX24-MFT-X1 AFX24-MFT-X1 GKRX24-MFT-5 ---------AFX24-MFT-X1 2XAFX24-MFT-X1 ------------
ARB24-3-5 GMB24-3-X1 2xGMB24-3-X1 --------AMB24-3-X1 GMB24-3-X1 2xGMB24-3-X1
ARB24-MFT-5 GMX24-MFT-5 2xGMX24-MFT-X1 --------AMX24-MFT-X1 GMX24-MFT-X1 2xGMX24-MFT-X1
200
--
200
----------
--
----------
Ordering example: F6100HDU/GKRX24-MFT-7 two-way 4", undercut, 50 psid close-off, fail-safe, proportional/MFT control, 24V actuator
204
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Model Size Cv @ 90 Close-off 2-way undercut F650HDU 2" (DN50) F665HDU 2-1/2" (DN65) F680HDU 3" (DN80) F6100HDU 4" (DN100) F6125HDU 5" (DN125) F6150HDU 6" (DN150) 3-way undercut F750HDU 2" (DN50) F765HDU 2-1/2" (DN65) F780HDU 3" (DN80) F7100HDU 4" (DN100) F7125HDU 5" (DN125) F7150HDU 6" (DN150) 2-way full rated F650HD 2" (DN50) F665HD 2-1/2" (DN65) F680HD 3" (DN80) F6100HD 4" (DN100) F6125HD 5" (DN125) F6150HD F6200HD F6250HD F6300HD F6350HD 6" (DN150) 8" (DN200) 10" (DN250) 12" (DN300) 14" (DN350) 115 196 302 600 1022 1579 115 196 302 600 1022 1579 115 196 302 600 600 1579 3136 5340 8250 11917 16388 21705 27908 115 196 302 600 600 1579 3136 5340 8250 11917 16388 21705 27908 200 200 50 50 F6400HD 16" (DN400) F6450HD 18" (DN450) F6500HD 20" (DN500) 3-way full rated F750HD 2" (DN50) F765HD 2-1/2" (DN65) F780HD 3" (DN80) F7100HD 4" (DN100) F7125HD F7150HD F7200HD F7250HD F7300HD F7350HD F7400HD F7450HD F7500HD 5" (DN125) 6" (DN150) 8" (DN200) 10" (DN250) 12" (DN300) 14" (DN350) 16" (DN400) 18" (DN450) 20" (DN500)
CONTROL VALVES
ASSEMBLY COMBINATIONS/ORDERING INFORMATION - NEMA 4 RATED

NSR NSR On/off/oating Proportional/MFT NEMA 4 housNEMA 4 housing ing NSR On/off/oating SY NEMA 4 NSR Proportional/ MFT SY NEMA 4 -------------
GRCX24-3-T-N4
GRX24-MFT-T-N4 2xGRX24-MFT-T-N4 DKRX24-MFT-T-N4
2xGRCX24-3-T-N4 DKRX24-3-T-N4
-------------
CONTROL VALVES
GMCX24-3-T-X1-N4 GMX24-MFT-T-X1-N4 GMCX24-3-T-X1-N4 GMX24-MFT-T-X1-N4 2xGMCX24-3-T-X1- 2xGMX24-MFT-T-X1N4 N4
GRCX-24-3-T-N4 ----------
GRX24-MFT-T-N4 ----------
SY2-24 or SY2-110 SY3-24 or SY3-110 SY4-24 or SY4-110 SY5-24 or SY5-110 SY6-110 SY8-110
SY2-24MFT or SY2-120MFT SY3-24MFT or SY3-120MFT SY4-24MFT or SY4-120MFT SY5-24MFT or SY5-120MFT SY6-120MFT SY8-120MFT
GMCX24-3-T-X1-N4 GMX24-MFT-T-X1-N4 -----------------------
SY2-24 or SY2-110 SY3-24 or SY3-110 SY4-24 or SY4-110 SY5-24 or SY5-110 SY6-110 SY7-110 SY8-110 SY9-110
SY2-24MFT or SY2-120MFT SY3-24MFT or SY3-120MFT SY4-24MFT or SY4-120MFT SY5-24MFT or SY5-120MFT SY6-120MFT SY7-120MFT SY8-120MFT SY9-120MFT
Ordering example: F6100HDU/2XGRX24-MFT-T-N4 two-way 4", undercut, 50 psid close-off, non-spring return, proportional control, 24V, NEMA4
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
205
CONTROL VALVES
FABRIC WEATHERPROOF COVER FOR GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS KOV SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The KOV Series fabric cover offers an innovative and effective weather protection solution for low-voltage directmount globe valve actuators. Made of heavy-duty, water repellent, acrylic woven fabric, the KOV provides a signicant degree of protection against falling rain, sleet, snow and ice. The light color minimizes solar heat gain to keep the actuator cooler than traditional plastic or metal encosures and the fabric breathes to prevent condensation. It can be installed and removed in seconds and it is available in four sizes to t many popular globe valve direct-mount actuators. FEATURES
KOV-3 on ML7421B actuator and 5" globe valve
CONTROL VALVES
Heavy-duty, water repellent fabric Keeps actuator cool in hot sun Breatheable design prevents condensation Cinch strap allows quick and easy installation Keeps actuator clean and protected
SPECIFICATIONS
Materials Of Construction 600D Oxford fabric, thickened and densied for heavy duty protection; nylon webbing and straps; nylon buckle Dimensions KOV-1 Approximately 6" diameter x 7"H (15 x 18 cm) KOV-2 Approximately 8" diameter x 10"H (20 x 25 cm) KOV-3 Approximately 10" diameter x 10"H (25 x 25 cm) KOV-4 Approximately 14" diameter x 12"H (36 x 30 cm) Color Light tan to minimize solar gain
APPLICATION
The KOV Series has been tested to the NEMA 3R standard and will effectively protect a NEMA 2 (IP42 or equivalent) actuator from the weather when mounted vertically. The cover fabric is guaranteed for a period of ve years against loss of color or strength from normal exposure conditions including sunlight, mildew, rot and atmospheric chemicals. It is not rated for high-voltage equipment.
Weather Shield Temperature Comparisons

Enclosure air temperature test data 140 120 100 Deg. F 80 60 40 20 0 10:30 11:30 12:30 13:30 14:30 15:30 16:30
KOV Series MetalBox PlasticBox
Time of Day
MODEL KOV-1 KOV-2 KOV-3 KOV-4 DESCRIPTION NEMA 3R fabric weather shield, 6" dia. x 7"H, ts Honeywell ML6984/7984, JCI VA-4233 NEMA 3R fabric weather shield, 8" dia. x 10"H, ts Honeywell ML6420/7420/6425/7425 and Belimo NV/NVF NEMA 3R fabric weather shield, 10" dia. x 10"H, ts Honeywell ML6421/7421 NEMA 3R fabric weather shield, 14" dia. x 12"H, ts Honeywell Q5022 linkage with dual actuators
206
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
USEFUL STEAM INFORMATION
1 Boiler hp = 34.5 lb/hr EDR (equivalent direct radiation) = 240 BTU/hr per FT2 1 Therm = 100,000 BTU Example: 100,000 BTU/hr = 105 lb/hr of 5 psig steam
CONTROL VALVES
STEAM VALVE SIZING INFORMATION
Cv (FLOW COEFFICIENT) DETERMINATION
The Steam Valve Capacity Table on the following page is based on the following formula:
Cv = Where:
RECOMMENDED PRESSURE DROPS FOR STEAM

Refer to specific valve data for maximum allowable pressure drops and close-off ratings. Two-position Zone Valves and Direct Radiator Valves Use a minimum of 10% of inlet pressure (psig). Proportional Control Valves Low pressure (15 psig or less): Pof 80% of gauge inlet pressure. When Cv required is between two valve sizes and closer to the smaller valve size, resize for Cv using 42% of the absolute inlet pressure as pressure drop. Use the valve that is larger than the calculated Cv. For steam pressures greater than 15 psig: 42% of the absolute inlet pressure. When Cv required is between two valve sizes, select the larger size. Note: Do not size steam valves on higher system pressures using a pressure drop greater than 42% of the absolute inlet pressure.
QK
3 P x P2
Cv = Coefficient of flow Q = lb per hour of steam P = Differential pressure in psig (pressure drop) P2 = Outlet pressure in psia (absolute) psig + 14.7 = psia (absolute)
CONTROL VALVES
K = 1 + (0.0007 x F super-heat) Note: K normally is 1 (K = 1 for saturated steam). Other forms of the formula are: Q =
3Cv P x P2
K
Note: K normally is 1.
P =
( 3QK Cv )
1 P2
Note: K normally is 1. P2 =
( 3QK Cv )
1 P
Note: K normally is 1 (K = 1 for saturated steam). These formulas can be used to calculate one of the quantities if the others are known.
See next page for Steam Valve Capacity Table
STEAM DATA
psig (kPa) 0 (0) 5 (34) 15 (103) 50 (345) 100 (689) Temperature F (C) 212 (100) 237 (114) 250 (121) 298 (148) 338 (170) Latent Heat (hfg) 970 954 945 912 880
To convert BTU/hr to lb/hr of steam, divide BTU/hr by the latent heat of vaporization (hfg) at the corresponding steam pressure.
100,000 BTU/hr = 105 lb/hr 954
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
207
CONTROL VALVES
STEAM CAPACITY IN POUNDS PER HOUR (based on saturated steam)
5# 0.5* 4 1* 8 1.5* 12 2* 14 2.5* 16 4* 23 5* 27 10* 48 10# 15# 20# 25# 40# 50# 100#
208
STEAM VALVE CAPACITY TABLE
3.7 9.2 12.1 18.7 23 31 34 37 47 56 70 84 98 102 139 162 232 333 372 418 521 604 697 790 930 1069 1348 1580 1859 2184 2556 3253 3950 4090 7.8 19.3 25.4 35.1 49 64 70 78 98 117 146 176 205 215 293 340 488 699 780 878 1093 1268 1463 1658 1951 2244 2829 3317 3902 4585 5366 6829 8292 8585
* For two-position control 1000 BTU/hr is approximately 1#/hr
2#
CONTROL VALVES
888-397-5353 USA
9.5 23.5 31 43 59 79 86 95 119 143 178 214 250 262 357 414 594 851 951 1070 1331 1545 1783 2021 2377 2734 3447 4042 4755 5587 6538 8321 10104 10461 17.1 20.4 11.6 23.4 9.7 17.5 42.3 50.6 28.6 57.8 24 43.3 55.5 66.4 37.6 75.9 31.5 56.8 76.9 91.9 52.1 105.2 43.7 78.7 107 128 72 146 61 109 141 169 95 193 80 144 154 184 104 210 87 157 171 204 116 234 97 175 214 255 145 292 121 219 256 306 174 351 146 262 320 383 217 438 182 328 385 460 260 526 218 393 449 536 304 613 255 459 470 562 318 643 267 481 641 766 434 876 304 656 743 889 503 1016 422 761 1068 1277 723 1460 607 1093 1529 1828 1036 2091 867 1565 1709 2043 1157 2337 970 1749 1923 1967 1092 2298 1302 2629 2392 2448 1359 2860 1620 3271 2777 2842 1577 3320 1881 3797 3204 3830 2170 4381 1820 3279 3631 3716 2062 4341 2459 4966 4272 4372 2426 5107 2893 5842 4913 5028 2790 5873 3327 6718 6195 6340 3518 7405 4195 8471 7263 7433 4124 8682 4918 9931 8744 4852 10214 5786 11684 8544 10275 5701 12002 6799 13729 10040 12024 6672 14044 7956 16065 11749 15303 8491 17875 10126 20447 14953 18582 10311 21705 12296 24828 18157 19238 10675 22471 12730 25704 18798 32.4 80.2 104.3 145.8 203 267 292 324 405 486 608 729 851 891 1215 1409 2025 2900 3240 3645 4536 5265 6075 6885 8101 9316 11746 13771 16201 19036 22277 28352 34427 35642 5.9 14.5 19 26.3 37 48 53 58 73 88 110 131 153 161 219 254 365 523 584 657 818 949 1095 1241 1460 1680 2118 2483 2921 3432 4016 5112 6207 6426 13.9 34.3 45.1 62.4 87 114 125 139 173 208 260 312 364 381 520 603 867 1241 1387 1560 1942 2254 2601 2947 3468 3988 5028 5895 6935 8149 9536 12136 14737 15257 20.7 51.3 67.4 93.3 130 171 187 207 259 311 389 466 544 570 777 902 1296 1856 2073 2332 2903 3369 3887 4406 5183 5961 7516 8811 10366 12180 14254 18141 22028 22806 38.3 94.8 124.4 172.3 239 316 345 383 479 574 718 861 1005 1053 1436 1665 2393 3427 3829 4307 5360 6221 7179 8136 9571 11007 13878 16271 19143 22493 26321 33500 40678 42114 38.8 96.1 126.2 174.7 242 320 349 388 485 582 728 874 1019 1068 1456 1689 2427 3475 3883 4368 5436 6310 7280 8251 9707 11163 14075 16502 19414 22812 26695 33975 41256 42712 68 168 221 306 424 560 611 679 848 1018 1273 1528 1782 1867 2546 2954 4244 6077 6790 7639 9506 11034 12731 14429 16975 19521 24613 28857 33950 39891 46681 59412 72143 74689
0.2*
1.6
kele.com
Inlet Pressure psig P Cv 0.4 0.99 1.3 1.8 2.5 3.3 3.6 4.0 5 6 7.5 9.0 10.5 11 15 17.4 25 35.8 40 45 56 65 75 85 100 115 145 170 200 235 275 350 425 440
2.2 5.4 7.1 9.8 13.6 18 19.6 22 27 33 41 49 57 60 82 95 136 195 218 245 305 354 409 463 545 627 790 926 1090 1281 1499 1907 2316 2398
5.9 14.6 19.2 27 37 49 53 59 74 89 111 133 155 162 221 257 369 528 590 664 826 958 1106 1253 1475 1696 2138 2507 2949 3465 4055 5161 6267 6488
March 2014
1 MBH equals 1000 BTU/hr
HUMIDITY
We Offer Convenient Options to Complete Your Job.

Super 33/88 Black | p. 232 Vinyl Electrical Tape
CBL Series | p. 209
Genesis Wiring | p. 210
35 Vinyl | p. 230 Color-Coding Tape
Compression | p. 227 Terminals & Splices
3M Scotchcode | p. 231 Tape Dispenser

MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Boxes 4BX Series 4 Square Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HBX Series Handy Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWBX Series Switch Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8BX Series Octagonal Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WBX Series Weatherproof Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 219 220 220 221
Conduit/Connectors FLEX Series Flexible Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 EMT Series EMT Conduit Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 RIG Series Rigid Conduit Fittings .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Tape/Markers 35 Vinyl Color-Coding Tapes Tapes .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEMFLEX 1700 Black Vinyl Electrical Tape Tapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3M Scotchcode Tape Dispenser STD Wire Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3M Scotchcode Write on Dispensers Wire Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Super 33 and 88 Black Vinyl Electrical Tape Tapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tartan 3939 Duct Tape Tapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire CBL Series Communication and Control Cable.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Genesis Wiring Genesis Communication and Control Cable . . . . . . . . . . . W181P, W221P, W241P Series Communication and Control Cable.. . . . . HW-76B Hook-up Wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Accessories .. . . . . . . . . . CH, CAT, 4BRT, BC, EWK Series Cable Hangers and Seals Compression Terminals and Splices Compression Terminals and Splices.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Series Lever Nuts Compact Splicing Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Nuts, Ties, Accessories Wire Nuts, Ties, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . .
W181P Series | p. 212

ELETRICAL WIRING M AT E R I A L S
230 230 231 231 232 232
HW-76B | p. 213
209 210 212 213
226 227 228 229
222 Series | p. 228
Wiring Devices S and R Series Switches and Receptacles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 TL Series Twist-Lock Plugs, Connectors And Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 SW Series Fusible and Non-Fusible Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
kele.com
NEW!


COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL CABLE CBL SERIES
The CBL Series offers a selection of high quality wire and cables that can be used for building communication and panel wiring. Additional cable types and sizes are avaialble for order.
Plenum and non-plenum communication cables Thermostat wire for connecting to any thermostat Stocked at Kele 300 volts rated UL listed for Type CL3P or Type CL3R
CBL-TP Series
4
WIRING
CBL-TW Series CBL-TP CBL-ETH CBL-TW
Model Jacket Color Number Of Conductors 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 5 5 6 6 8 8 8 8 2 2 Number Of Pairs AWG Size Plenum Rating Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Non-plenum Plenum Non-plenum Plenum Non-plenum Plenum Non-plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Shielding Standard Package
TWISTED PAIR (22 AWG) CBL-TP222SN Gray CBL-TP224SN Gray CBL-TP226SN Gray CBL-TP222SP Gray CBL-TP224SP Gray CBL-TP226SP Gray TWISTED PAIR (18 AWG) CBL-TP182SN Gray CBL-TP184SN Gray CBL-TP186SN Gray CBL-TP182SP Gray CBL-TP184SP Gray CBL-TP186SP Gray THERMOSTAT WIRE CBL-TW185UN White CBL-TW185UP White CBL-TW186UN White CBL-TW186UP White CBL-TW188UN White CBL-TW188UP White CAT5E ETHERNET CBL-ETH248UN CBL-ETH248UP MSTP CBL-MSTP182SP CBL-MSTP222SP Gray Gray Natural Teal
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 None None None None None None 4 4 1 1
22 22 22 22 22 22 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 24 24 18 22
Shielded Shielded Shielded Shielded Shielded Shielded Shielded Shielded Shielded Shielded Shielded Shielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Shielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Shielded Shielded
1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 250 ft (76 m) 250 ft (76 m) 250 ft (76 m) 250 ft (76 m) 250 ft (76 m) 250 ft (76 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m) 1000 ft (305 m)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
209

GENESIS COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL CABLE GENESIS WIRING
DESCRIPTION
The Genesis Series Low Voltage Cables are produced with innovative equipment and technology in a state-of-the-art facility for the HVAC controls contractor. The Genesis Series comes in color coded boxes with wrap-around labels for easy identication and alphanumeric coding to make eld identication easier. Each foot of cable is labeled in feet with the amount of cable left in the box to easily manage any installation. Wire is available in most any color with some required minimums for special orders. Genesis is so condent of their wire that they have included a "100% three for one" replacement warranty for the lifetime of the original installation.
NEW!
Shielding Approvals Standard Packaging 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Package Type Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Pounds per 1000 ft 13 18 25 14 20 27 20 27 32 45 59 19 26 33 47 61 23 29 33 50 61 Shield Shield Shield Shield Shield Shield Shield Shield Shield Shield Shield Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Shield Shield Shield Shield Shield CM, CL2 CM, CL2 CM, CL2 C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P CM, CL2 CM, CL2 CM, CL2 CM, CL2 CM, CL2 C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P
4
FEATURES
Low capacitance Countdown footage identication Easy eld identication Color coded boxes UL and ETL tested Lifetime 100% three for one replacement warranty
Model Number Multi-conductor 12021009 12041009 12061009 32021012 32041012 32061012 12141009 12281009 12151009 12161009 12171009 31141012 31261012 31151012 31161012 31171012 32141012 32261012 32151012 32161012 32171012 Gray Gray Gray Natural Natural Natural Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Natural Natural Natural Natural Natural Natural Natural Natural Natural Natural 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 3 4 6 8 2 3 4 6 8 2 3 4 6 8 None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None 22 22 22 22 22 22 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Jacket Color Number of Number of AWG Size Stranding Conductors Pairs Plenum Rating
210
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Model Number Jacket Color Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Stranded, Twisted Pair 12021009 12811009 12831009 32021009 32811009 32831009 47104801 47114801 47120301 47130301 47140301 47160301 47104807 47114807 47120307 47130307 47140307 47160307 47614812 47630312 47640312 47660312 CAT5e Ethernet 50781106 50881106 CAT6 50922106 51022106 LonWorks 10621109 32522101 32541101 MS/TP 32511005 33221003 Other Temperature Controls 46522110 (Trane type) Security 11011101 11021101 11031101 11041101 32951099 COAX 50031008 50011008 50131008 *Minimum runs may apply. **Estimated weight. Black Black Black White White White White None 2 2 4 4 16 None None None None Combo 22 22 22 22 18/22 Purple 2 1 18 Green Orange 2 2 1 1 22 18 Gray White White 2 2 2 1 1 1 22 22 22 Blue Blue 8 8 4 4 23 23 Blue Blue 8 8 4 4 24 24 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 3 4 5 6 8 2 3 4 5 6 8 3 5 6 8 1 2 3 1 2 3 22 22 22 22 22 22 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Thermostat White White White White White White Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Natural Natural Natural Natural None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None

GENESIS COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL CABLE GENESIS WIRING
Plenum Rating Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Plenum Non-plenum Plenum Non-plenum Plenum Non-plenum Plenum Plenum Plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Non-plenum Shielding Approvals Standard Packaging 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 500 250 250 250 250 250 500 500 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Package Type Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Reel Spool Spool Spool Spool Spool Spool Spool Spool Spool Spool Spool Spool Spool Spool Spool Spool Pull-box Pull-box Reel-in-a box Reel-in-a box Pull-box Reel-in-a box Pull-box Reel Reel Reel-in-a box Pull-box Pull-box Pull-box Pull-box Reel Reel Reel Reel Pounds per 1000 ft 13 21 27 14 24 26 16 22 27 33 38 50 16 22 27 33 38 50 23 35 42 54 21 27 22 25 18 13 21 21 56 30 8 9 14 15 115 31 36 60
Number of Number of AWG Size Stranding Conductors Pairs Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid solid Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Stranded Solid Stranded Solid Stranded Stranded
Shield Shield Shield Shield Shield Shield Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Shielded Shield Shield Shield Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Shielded Shielded Shielded
CM, CL2 CM, CL2 CM, CL2 C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P C(UL), FT6, CMP, CL2P CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2 CL2P CL2P CL2P CL2P FT4, CMR, CL2R FT4, CMP, CL2P FT4, CMR, CL2R FT6, CMP, CL2P Level 4, CM, CL2 Level 4, CM, CL2 Level 4, CM, CL2 CMP, CL2P CMP, CL2P CMP, CL2P CM, CL2 CM, CL2 CM, CL2 CM, CL2 CMP CATV, CL2 CL2 CL2
4
RG6 60% Aluminum CATV RG59 95% BC CCTV RG59 95% Aluminum CCTV
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
211

COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL CABLE W181P, W221P, W241P SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Communication and control cable for HVAC systems.
FEATURES
BACnet and ECHELON/LONWORKS approved models Low capacitance models UL listed
NEW!
Model W221P-2003ORRB W241P-2000FRIB Blue 2 1 22 AWG Orange 2 1 22 AWG Stranded Plenum Shielded 12.5 pf/ft at 1 Khz nom. FEP 0.174" nom 1,000 ft (305 m) BACnet UL type CMP/CL3P Orange 2 1 24 AWG Stranded Plenum Shielded 12.5 pf/ft at 1 Khz nom. FEP 0.132" nom 1,000 ft (305 m) BACnet UL type CMP/CL3P
4
W181P-2028XRB W221P-2001B
Wiring
Color Number Of Conductors Number Of Pairs Wire Size Stranding Plenum Rating Shielding Capacitance Insulation Overall Diameter Standard Package Communication Standard Approvals
Violet 2 1 18 AWG Stranded Plenum Shielded 23.1 pf/ft. nom. FEP 0.178" nom 1,000 ft (305 m) UL type CMP/CL3P
Stranded Plenum Unshielded 15.0 pf/ft.10% FEP 0.120" nom 1,000 ft (305 m) Lonworks UL type CMP/CL3P/FPLP
212
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
HOOK-UP WIRE HW-76B
DESCRIPTION
The HW-76B is a tinned copper, PVC-insulated, stranded hook-up wire used for panel wiring of electric and electronic equipment. The extruded PVC insulation is ame and ozone resistant and inert to most chemicals, oils, and solvents.
FEATURES
Passes VW-1 vertical wire ame test Stranded, tinned copper conductor Easily molded for panel construction Excellent memory of molded position Easy to strip Available in various colors UL and non-UL available
4
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Rating Non-UL UL Conductor Insulation Insulation Thickness Non- UL UL 1000 V 600 V Tinned Copper PVC 0.016" (0.041 cm) 0.031" (0.079 cm) Nominal OD Non-UL UL Operating Temperature Non-UL UL Approvals 0.09" (0.229 cm) 0.122" (0.310 cm) 176F (80C) 221F (105C) UL File # E68175
Model HW-76B-BK HW-76B-WT HW-76B-RD HW-76B-Y HW-76B-GN HW-76B-BL HW-76B-BN HW-76B-PU HW-76B-OR HW-76B-UL-BK HW-76B-UL-WT HW-76B-UL-RD HW-76B-UL-Y HW-76B-UL-GN HW-76B-UL-BL HW-76B-UL-BN HW-76B-UL-PU HW-76B-UL-OR Color Black White Red Yellow Green Blue Brown Purple Orange Black White Red Yellow Green Blue Brown Purple Orange Number Of Conductors 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AWG Size 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 Plenum Shielding Rating None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None None Approvals MIL-W-76B MIL-W-76B MIL-W-76B MIL-W-76B MIL-W-76B MIL-W-76B MIL-W-76B MIL-W-76B MIL-W-76B Standard Package 500 Ft (152 M) 500 Ft (152 M) 500 Ft (152 M) 500 Ft (152 M) 500 Ft (152 M) 500 Ft (152 M) 500 Ft (152 M) 500 Ft (152 M) 500 Ft (152 M) Weight 6 lb (2.7kg) 6 lb (2.7kg) 6 lb (2.7kg) 6 lb (2.7kg) 6 lb (2.7kg) 6 lb (2.7kg) 6 lb (2.7kg) 6 lb (2.7kg) 6 lb (2.7kg) 7 lb (3.18 kg) 7 lb (3.18 kg) 7 lb (3.18 kg) 7 lb (3.18 kg) 7 lb (3.18 kg) 7 lb (3.18 kg) 7 lb (3.18 kg) 7 lb (3.18 kg) 7 lb (3.18 kg)
UL1015 CSA TEW 500 Ft (152 M) UL1015 CSA TEW 500 Ft (152 M) UL1015 CSA TEW 500 Ft (152 M) UL1015 CSA TEW 500 Ft (152 M) UL1015 CSA TEW 500 Ft (152 M) UL1015 CSA TEW 500 Ft (152 M) UL1015 CSA TEW 500 Ft (152 M) UL1015 CSA TEW 500 Ft (152 M) UL1015 CSA TEW 500 Ft (152 M)
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
213
NEW! NEW!
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FLEX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of 1/2" and 3/4" exible conduit and ttings.
Flexible Steel Conduit
Model
Description
Unit Quantity
FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT FLEX12 FLEX34
1/2" exible steel conduit- 100 ft 3/4" exible steel conduit- 100 ft
1 roll 1 roll
Flexible Steel Conduit Straight
FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT STRAIGHT CONNECTOR UL FILE E32539 FLEXCN12 FLEXCN34 1/2" exible steel conduit straight connector 3/4" exible steel conduit straight connector 1 piece 1 piece UL FILE E32539 1 piece 1 piece
Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit Flexible Steel Conduit 90
FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT 90 CONNECTOR FLEXCN9012 1/2" exible steel conduit 90 connector FLEXCN9034 3/4" exible steel conduit 90 connector LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT FLEXLT12 FLEXLT34 1/2" liquid tight exible steel conduit- 100 ft 3/4" liquid tight exible steel conduit- 100 ft
1 roll 1 roll UL FILE E11853 1 piece 1 piece UL FILE E11853 1 piece 1 piece
Steel Liquid Tight 90 Steel Liquid Tight Straight
STEEL LIQUID TIGHT STRAIGHT CONNECTOR FLEXLTCN12 1/2" liquid tight straight connector FLEXLTCN34 3/4" liquid tight straight connector STEEL LIQUID TIGHT 90 CONNECTOR FLEXLT9012 FLEXLT9034 1/2" liquid tight 90 connector 3/4" liquid tight 90 connector
NON-METALLIC LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FLEXNM12 FLEXNM34 1/2" non-metallic liquid tight exible conduit- 100 feet 3/4" non-metallic liquid tight exible conduit- 100 feet 1 roll 1 roll
Non-Metallic Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit
NON-METALLIC STRAIGHT CONNECTOR (Must be used with FLEXNM Non-Metallic Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit) FLEXNMCN12 1/2" non-metallic liquid tight straight connector FLEXNMCN34 3/4" non-metallic liquid tight straight connector NON-METALLIC CONNECTOR (Must be used with FLEXNM Non-Metallic Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit) FLEXNM9012 1/2" non-metallic liquid tight 90 connector FLEXNM9034 3/4" non-metallic liquid tight 90 connector 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece
Non-Metallic Liquid Tight Straight
Non-Metallic Liquid Tight 90
214
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
EMT CONDUIT FITTINGS EMT SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete line of EMT ttings for 1/2" and 3/4".
Description
Elbow
Model
Unit Quantity
EMT 90 ELBOW EMTEL12 EMTEL34
1/2" EMT 90 elbow 3/4" EMT 90 elbow
1 piece 1 piece
4
Offset Nipple
EMT OFFSET NIPPLE EMTOFNP12 1/2" EMT offset nipple
UL File E35001 1 piece UL File E35001 1 piece 1 piece UL File E35001 1 piece 1 piece UL File E35001 1 piece 1 piece
Set Screw Coupling Set Screw Connector
EMT SET SCREW CONNECTOR EMTSCN12 EMTSCN34 1/2" EMT set screw connector 3/4" EMT set screw connector
EMT SET SCREW COUPLING EMTSCU12 EMTSCU34 1/2" EMT set screw coupling 3/4" EMT set screw coupling
EMT COMPRESSION CONNECTOR EMTCCN12 EMTCCN34
1/2" EMT compression connector 3/4" EMT compression connector
EMT COMPRESSION COUPLING EMTCCU12 EMTCCU34
UL File E35001 1 piece 1 piece

Compression Connector
1/2" EMT compression coupling 3/4" EMT compression coupling
EMT 90 COMPRESSION CONNECTOR EMTCCN9012 EMTCCN9034
UL File E32539 1 piece 1 piece
1/2" 90 compression connector 3/4" 90 compression connector
EMT ONE-HOLE STRAP EMT1STP12 EMT1STP34 1/2" EMT one-hole strap 3/4" EMT one-hole strap
UL File E333806 1 piece 1 piece UL File E333806 1 piece 1 piece

1-hole Strap 2-hole Strap 90 Compression Connector
EMT TWO-HOLE STRAP EMT2STP12 EMT2STP34 1/2" EMT two-hole strap 3/4" EMT two-hole strap
EMT PULLING ELBOW EMTPE12 EMTPE34 1/2" EMT pulling elbow 3/4" EMT pulling elbow 1 piece 1 piece
Pulling Elbow
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
215
NEW! NEW!
RIGID CONDUIT FITTINGS RIG SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete line of 1/2" and 3/4" rigid conduit ttings.
Rigid Offset
Model
Description
Unit Quantity
RIGID CONDUIT OFFSET RIGOFF12 RIGOFF34
UL File E32539
1/2" rigid conduit offset, threaded 3/4" rigid conduit offset, threaded
1 piece 1 piece
Locknut
RIGID CONDUIT LOCKNUT RIGLOC12 RIGLOC34 1/2" rigid conduit locknut 3/4" rigid conduit locknut
UL File E32539 1 piece 1 piece UL File E61301 1 piece 1 piece UL File E14814 1 piece 1 piece UL File E32539 1 piece 1 piece UL File E32539 1 piece 1 piece UL File E333806 1 piece 1 piece UL File E333806 1 piece 1 piece UL File E32539 1 piece 1 piece
2-hole Strap 1-hole Strap Reducing Washer Insulated Bushing Bushing
PLASTIC INSULATING BUSHING RIGPBU12 RIGPBU34 1/2" plastic insulating bushing 3/4" plastic insulating bushing
RIGID METAL BUSHING RIGMBU12 RIGMBU34 1/2" metal bushing 3/4" metal bushing
RIGID METAL BUSHING INSULATED RIGMIBU12 RIGMIBU34 1/2" metal bushing insulated 3/4" metal bushing insulated
REDUCING WASHER RIGRW3412 RIGRW134 3/4" to 1/2" reducing washer 1" to 3/4" reducing washer
RIGID ONE-HOLE STRAP RIG1STP12 RIG1STP34 1/2" rigid one-hole strap 3/4" rigid one-hole strap
RIGID TWO-HOLE STRAP RIG2STP12 RIG2STP34 1/2" rigid two-hole strap 3/4" rigid two-hole strap
RIGID PULLING ELBOW RIGPE12 RIGPE34 1/2" rigid pulling elbow 3/4" rigid pulling elbow
Pulling Elbow
216
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
RIGID CONDUIT FITTINGS RIG SERIES
Reducing Bushing
Model
Description
Unit Quantity
REDUCING BUSHING RIGRB3412 RIGRB112 RIGRB134
3/4" x 1/2" reducing bushing 1" x 1/2" reducing bushing 1" x 3/4" reducing bushing
1 piece 1 piece 1 piece
4
Elbow
RIGID 90 ELBOW RIG90EL12 RIG90EL34 1/2" rigid 90 elbow 3/4" rigid 90 elbow 1 piece 1 piece
RIGID CONDUIT COUPLING RIGC12 RIGC34 1/2" rigid conduit coupling 3/4" rigid conduit coupling 1 piece 1 piece
Conduit Coupling
RIGID CONDUIT NIPPLES RIGN120 RIGN123 RIGN126 RIGN340 RIGN343 RIGN346 1/2" x close rigid conduit nipple 1/2" x 3" rigid conduit nipple 1/2 x 6" rigid conduit nipple 3/4" close rigid conduit nipple 3/4" x 3" rigid conduit nipple 3/4" x 6" rigid conduit nipple 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece
LB Conduit Conduit Nipple
RIGID LB CONDUIT RIGLB12 RIGLB34 1/2" rigid LB conduit 3/4" rigid LB conduit 1 piece 1 piece
RIGID T CONDUIT RIGT12 RIGT34 1/2" rigid T conduit 3/4" rigid T conduit 1 piece 1 piece
T Conduit
RIGID CONDUIT DOMED COVER RIGCOV12 RIGCOV34 1/2" conduit domed cover 3/4" conduit domed cover 1 piece 1 piece
Domed Cover
RIGID CONDUIT COVER GASKET RIGG12 RIGG34 1/2" conduit cover gasket 3/4" conduit cover gasket 1 piece 1 piece
Cover Gasket
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
217

4" SQUARE BOXES 4BX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete line of 4" square boxes.
1-1/2" D Square Box
1-1/2" Extension Ring
Raised Blank
NEW!
Raised Toggle Flat Blank Raised Duplex Raised 2 Toggles Raised 1 Toggle 1 GFCI Raised 1 Duplex 1 Toggle Raised Receptacle 1-19/32" Opening
4
Flat 1/2" KO
Raised GFCI
Raised Receptacle
Raised 1 Toggle 1 Receptacle
Raised 2 Duplex
Raised 1 Duplex 1 GFCI
Raised Receptacle 2-9/16" Opening
Raised Receptacle 2-1/2" Opening
Model 4BX11212 4BX11234 4BX112EX 4BX21834 4BXCVFBL 4BXCVFKO 4BXCVRA2DUP 4BXCVRA2TG 4BXCVRABL 4BXCVRADU 4BXCVRADUGF 4BXCVRAGF 4BXCVRASR 4BXCVRASR1 4BXCVRASR2 4BXCVRASR3 4BXCVRATG 4BXCVRATGDU 4BXCVRATGGF 4BXCVRATGSR 4BXPLE112 4BXPLE218 4BXPLECVBL Description UL FILE E18095 & E2527 4" square steel box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" KO 4" square steel box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 4" square steel extension ring box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 4" square steel box 2-1/8" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" KO 4" square steel box cover, at, blank 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, two duplex ush receptacles 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, two toggle switches 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, blank 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, one duplex ush receptacle 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, one duplex ush receptacle, one GFCI device 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, one GFCI device 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, one single ush receptacle 1-13/32" deep 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, one 30-50A single ush receptacle 2-9/64" dia. 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, one single ush receptacle 2-1/2" dia. 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, 20A twist-lock receptacle 1-19/32" dia. 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, one toggle switch 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, one toggle switch, one duplex ush receptacle 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, one toggle switch, one GFCI device 4" square steel box cover, at, 1/2" raised, one toggle switch, one single ush receptacle 4" square steel plenum box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 4" square steel plenum box 2-1/8" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 4" square steel blank plenum box cover, gasketed, captive screws Unit Quantity 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece
218
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of handy boxes.
1-1/2" Deep Handy Box Handy Box Extension

HANDY BOXES HBX SERIES
4
1/2" Knockout Receptacle 1-19/32"
Blank
Receptacle 1-13/32"
Duplex Receptacle
One Toggle
Model HBX112 HBX178 HBX17834 HBX218 HBX21834 HBX218EXT HBXCVBL HBXCVKO HBXCVSR HBXCVSR1 HBXDU HBXTG Description UL FILES E18095, E2527 1-1/2" deep steel handy box, 1/2" conduit 1-7/8" deep steel handy box, 1/2" conduit 1-7/8" deep steel handy box, 3/4" conduit 2-1/8" deep steel handy box, 1/2" conduit 2-1/8" deep steel handy box, 3/4" conduit 2-1/8" x 4" steel handy box extension ring, 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" KO Handy box cover, blank Handy box cover, one 1/2" KO Handy box cover, single receptacle 1-19/32" KO Handy box cover, single receptacle 1-13/32" KO Handy box cover, one duplex receptacle Handy box cover, one toggle switch Unit Quantity 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
219
NEW! NEW!
SWITCH BOXES SWBX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete assortment of switch boxes.
Switch Box
Switch Box w/Cable Clamp
Model SWBX SWBX34 SWBXCBL Description UL FILE E2527 3" x 2" gangable switch box, 2 1/2" deep, 1/2" KO 3" x 2" gangable switch box, 2 1/2" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO 3" x 2" gangable switch box, 2 1/2" deep, nonmetallic sheathed cable clamp 1/2" KO Unit Quantity 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece
OCTAGONAL BOXES 8BX SERIES

DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of 4" octagonal boxes. Blank Duplex
1-1/2" D Octagon
1-1/2" D Octagon w/ Bracket
1/2" KO
Raised
Model 8BX11212 8BX11234 8BX112BK 8BX21812 8BX21834 8BXCVBL 8BXCVDU 8BXCVKO 8BXCVRA Description UL FILES E18095 & E2527 4" octagon steel box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" KO 4" octagon steel box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2"and 3/4" KO 4" octagon steel box with bracket 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" KO 4" octagon steel box 2-1/8" deep, 1/2" KO 4" octagon steel box 2-1/2" deep, 1/8"and 3/4" KO 4" octagon steel box blank cover 4" octagon steel box cover duplex receptacle 4" octagon steel box blank cover 1/2" KO 4" octagon steel box cover1/2" rasied with ears Unit Quantity 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece March 2014
220
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW! NEW!
WEATHERPROOF BOXES WBX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of weatherproof boxes.
3 Hub 4 Hub 5 Hub Single Receptacle/ Switch In Use GFCI Blank 2 Screw Blank 4 Screw
4
Toggle Switch
Photo Cell Vertical Duplex Receptacle
Horizontal Duplex Receptacle
Raised 1 Hub
Raised 2 Hub
Raised 3 Hub
Model WBX312 WBX334 WBX412 WBX434 WBX512 WBX534 WBXCV112HUB WBXCV312HUB WBXCVBL2 WBXCVBL4 WBXCVGF WBXCVIU WBXCVPHO WBXCVSR WBXCVTG WBXCVVDU WBXCVHDU Description UL FILES E53330 & E2527 One gang weatherproof outlet box with (3) 1/2" hubs One gang weatherproof outlet box with (3) 3/4" hubs One gang weatherproof outlet box with (4) 1/2" hubs One gang weatherproof outlet box with (4) 3/4" hubs One gang weatherproof outlet box with (5) 1/2" hubs One gang weatherproof outlet box with (5) 3/4" hubs Plate with (1) 1/2" hub Plate with (3) 1/2" hub Blank plate with two screws Blank plate with four screws GFCI self-closing cover IN-use cover, 2 1/4" deep. Polycarbonate Photo cell plate (120 VAC, 300W photo cell included) Single receptacle/ switch, self-closing cover Toggle switch plate (switch not inlcuded) Vertical duplex receptacle/ switch, self-closing cover Horizontal duplex receptacle/ switch, self-closing cover Unit Quantity 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
221

SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES S AND R SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of switches and receptacles.
4
TOGGLE SWITCHES WITH GROUND Model Description Ivory UL File E7458 S1T15I Single pole toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, ivory S1T20I Single pole toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, ivory S3T15I Three way toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, ivory S3T20I Three way toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, ivory White S1T15W Single pole toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, white S1T20W Single pole toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, white S3T15W Three way toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, white S3T20W Three way toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, white Ivory Decorator SD1T15I Decorator single pole toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, ivory SD1T20I Decorator single pole toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, ivory SD3T15I Decorator three way toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, ivory SD3T20I Decorator three way toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, ivory White Decorator SD1T15W Decorator single pole toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, white SD1T20W Decorator single pole toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, white SD3T15W Decorator three way toggle switch, 15A 120-277 VAC, white SD3T20W Decorator three way toggle switch, 20A 120-277 VAC, white COMBO UNITS Model Description Ivory SR15I Duplex style toggle switch & receptacle, 15A 120 VAC, ivory S215I Duplex style dual toggle switch, 15A 120 VAC, ivory SP15I Duplex style toggle switch & pilot light, 15A 120 VAC, ivory SD215I Decorator style dual toggle switch, 15A 120 VAC, ivory White SR15W Duplex style toggle switch & receptacle, 15A 120 VAC, white S215W Duplex style dual toggle switch, 15A 120 VAC, white SP15W Duplex style toggle switch & pilot light, 15A 120 VAC, white SD215W Decorator style dual toggle switch, 15A 120 VAC, white
NEW!
Unit Quantity 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece Unit Quantity 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece
Toggle Switch
Decorator Toggle
Dual Toggle
Toggle with Switch
Toggle with Pilot
Dual Decorator Toggle
222
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

Unit Quantity 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece Unit Quantity 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece Unit Quantity 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece
RECEPTACLES Model Description Single Receptacle UL File E13399 R15I Single receptacle, 15A 125 VAC, 1.37 diameter, ivory R20I Single receptacle, 20A 125 VAC, 1.37 diameter, ivory R15W Single receptacle, 15A 125 VAC, 1.37 diameter, white R20W Single receptacle, 20A 125 VAC, 1.37 diameter, white Duplex Receptacle UL File E13399 RD15I Duplex receptacle, 15A 125 VAC, ivory RD20I Duplex receptacle, 20A 125 VAC, ivory RD15W Duplex receptacle, 15A 125 VAC, white RD20W Duplex receptacle, 20A 125 VAC, white Decorator Duplex Receptacle UL File E13399 RDD15I Decorator duplex receptacle, 15A 125 VAC, ivory RDD20I Decorator duplex receptacle, 20A 125 VAC, ivory RDD15W Decorator duplex receptacle, 15A 125 VAC, white RDD20W Decorator duplex receptacle, 20A 125 VAC, white GFCI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE UL File E13399 Model Description RGFI15I Duplex receptacle GFCI protected, 15A 125 VAC, ivory RGFI20I Duplex receptacle GFCI protected, 20A 125 VAC, ivory RGFI15W Duplex receptacle GFCI protected, 15A 125 VAC, white RGFI20W Duplex receptacle GFCI protected, 20A 125 VAC, white WALLPLATES (STANDARD SIZE) Model Description Toggle COV1TI 1 gang toggle wallplate ivory thermoplastic COV2TI 2 gang toggle wallplate ivory thermoplastic COV3TI 3 gang toggle wallplate ivory thermoplastic COV1TW 1 gang toggle wallplate white thermoplastic COV2TW 2 gang toggle wallplate white thermoplastic COV3TW 3 gang toggle wallplate white thermoplastic COV1TSS 1 gang toggle wallplate stainless steel COV2TSS 2 gang toggle wallplate stainless steel COV3TSS 3 gang toggle wallplate stainless steel Single Receptacle COVRI 1 gang single receptacle wallplate ivory thermoplastic COVRW 1 gang single receptacle wallplate white thermoplastic COVRSS 1 gang single receptacle wallplate stainless steel
Single Receptacle
4
Duplex Receptacle
Decorator Duplex
GFCI
Toggle
Single Receptacle March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
223

WALLPLATES (STANDARD SIZE) (continued) Model Description Duplex Receptacle COV1RDI 1 gang duplex receptacle wallplate, ivory COV2RDI 2 gang duplex receptacle wallplate, ivory COV1RDW 1 gang duplex receptacle wallplate, white COV2RDW 2 gang duplex receptacle wallplate, white COV1RDSS 1 gang duplex receptacle wallplate, stainless steel COV2RDSS 2 gang duplex receptacle wallplate, stainless steel Blank COV1BI COV2BI COV1BW COV2BW COV1BSS COV2BSS Decorator COV1DI COV2DI COV1DW COV2DW 1 gang blank wallplate ivory thermoplastic 2 gang blank wallplate ivory thermoplastic 1 gang blank wallplate white thermoplastic 2 gang blank wallplate white thermoplastic 1 gang blank wallplate stainless steel 2 gang blank wallplate stainless steel 1 gang decorator wallplate ivory 2 gang decorator wallplate ivory 1 gang decorator wallplate white 2 gang decorator wallplate white
NEW!
Unit Quantity 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece
Duplex Opening
4
Blank
Decorator
RJ-45 Wall Jack COV1RJ45I 1 gang wall jack, 1 RJ-45 opening, ivory COV12RJ45I 1 gang wall jack, 2 RJ-45 openings, ivory COV1RJ45W 1 gang wall jack, 1 RJ-45 opening, white COV12RJ45W 1 gang wall jack, 2 RJ-45 openings, white Telephone / Cable COV1TCI 1 gang telephone/cable 1 opening, ivory COV1TCW 1 gang telephone/cable 1 opening, white COV1TCSS 1 gang telephone/cable 1 opening, stainless steel Combination COV2TRI 2 gang combination, 1 toggle, 1 duplex receptacle, ivory COV2TRSS 2 gang combination, 1 toggle, 1 duplex receptacle, stainless steel COV2TRW 2 gang combination, 1 toggle, 1 duplex receptacle, white
RJ-45
Telephone/Cable
Combo
224
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March2014 2014 March
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of twist-lock plugs, connectors and receptacles. UL le # E13399
Connector TLC2P20A3W125 TLC2P20A3W250 TLC2P20A3W277 TLC2P20A3W480 TLC3P30A4W250 TLC3P30A4W480 Connector NEMA Rating L5-20R L6-20R L7-20R L8-20R L15-30R L16-30R Receptacle TLR2P20A3W125 TLR2P20A3W250 TLR2P20A3W277 TLR2P20A3W480 TLR3P30A4W250 TLR3P30A4W480

TWIST-LOCK PLUGS, CONNECTORS AND RECEPTACLES TL SERIES
Receptacle
Connector
Plug
4
Receptacle NEMA Rating L5-20R L6-20R L7-20R L8-20R L15-30R L16-30R Plug TLP2P20A3W125 TLP2P20A3W250 TLP2P20A3W277 TLP2P20A3W480 TLP3P30A4W250 TLP3P30A4W480 Plug NEMA Rating L5-20P L6-20P L7-20P L8-20P L15-30P L16-30P Description 20 amp, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, 125V 20 amp, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, 250V 20 amp, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, 277V 20 amp, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, 480V 30 amp, 3-pole, 4-wire grounding, 250V 30 amp, 3-pole, 4-wire grounding, 480V Unit Quantity 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece 1 piece
FUSIBLE AND NON-FUSIBLE DISCONNECTS SW SERIES

DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete selection of fusible and non-fusible disconnects.
Model Description Unit Quantity NON-FUSIBLE SINGLE-THROW SAFETY SWITCHES 240 VAC SW3330 NEMA1, 3-pole, 3-wire, 30 amp 1 piece SW3360 NEMA1, 3-pole, 3-wire, 60 amp 1 piece SW33100 NEMA1, 3-pole, 3-wire, 100 amp 1 piece FUSIBLE SINGLE-THROW SAFETY SWITCHES 600 VAC (Fuses not included.) SWF2330 NEMA1, 2-pole, 3-wire, 30 amp, class H 1 piece SWF2360 NEMA1, 2-pole, 3-wire, 60 amp, class H 1 piece SWF23100 NEMA1, 2-pole, 3-wire, 100 amp, class H 1 piece SWF3330 NEMA1, 3-pole, 3-wire, 30 amp, class H 1 piece SWF3360 NEMA1, 3-pole, 3-wire, 60 amp, class H 1 piece SWF33100 NEMA1, 3-pole, 3-wire, 100 amp, class H 1 piece SWF3430 NEMA1, 3-pole, 4-wire, 30 amp, class H 1 piece SWF3460 NEMA1, 3-pole, 4-wire, 60 amp, class H 1 piece SWF34100 NEMA1, 3-pole, 4-wire, 100 amp, class H 1 piece
SW Series
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
225

CABLE HANGERS AND SEALS CH, CAT, 4BRT, BC, EWK SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The CAT Series "J" hooks and Model 4BRT bridle rings make a cumbersome job easy. Each hook or ring can be attached using a beam clamp. The EWK Series is a sturdy, easy to use Knockout Seal.
FEATURES
4
Assorted sizes Easy mounting Hammer-on clips Clamp-type clips
NEW!
CH-050-B, CH-100-B Package Quantity CAT12 50 piece 100 piece CAT1-4Z34 50 piece 80 piece 60 piece 25 piece 40 piece 40 piece 100 piece 100 piece 100 piece 50 piece BC 4BRT20 4Z34
Model Description UL File E333806
CONDUIT HANGER CH-050-B CH-100-B CABLECAT LOOPS CAT 12 CAT21 CAT32 CAT64 CAT21-4Z34 CAT32-4Z34 4Z34 4BRT20 4BRT32 4BRT64 BEAM CLAMP BC BC-200
Hanger for 1/2" conduit Hanger for 3/4" conduit CableCat 3/4" loop, supports 16 four-pair UTP or two-strand ber optic cable CableCat 1-5/16" loop, supports 50 fourpair UTP or two-strand ber optic cable CableCat 2" loop, supports 80 four-pair UTP or two-strand ber optic cable CableCat 4" loop, supports 300 four-pair UTP or two-strand ber optic cable CableCat CAT21 with 4Z34 multifunction drop-wire clip CableCat CAT32 with 4Z34 multifunction drop-wire clip CableCat multifunction drop-wire clip 1/4"-20 threaded 1-1/4" (3.2 cm) bridle ring 1/4"-20 threaded 2" (5.1 cm) bridle ring 1/4"-20 threaded 4" (10.2 cm) bridle ring Beam Clamp up through 1/2" anges, accepts 1/4" threaded rod Beam Clamp up through 5/8" anges, accepts 1/4" threaded rod 1/2" KO Seal 3/4" KO Seal
THREADED BRIDLE RING [For use with Beam Clamp BC , BC-200]
100 piece 50 piece BC200
KNOCK OUT (KO) SEALS EWKO12 EWKO34 1 piece 1 piece
EWKO12, EWKO34
226
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Premium-grade, nylon-insulated terminals Excellent quality, reliability, and performance Low cost UL File# E76766, E32244, E79133, E68376
Model NR2218-8N NR1614-8N NR1412-8N NBS2218-4 NBS2218-8N NBS1614-4 NBS1412-8 Model NFD2218-110 NFD2218-187 NFD2218-250 NFD1614-110 NFD1614-187 NFD1614-250 NFD1412-250 NFD1210-250 NPBFD2218-250 NPBFD1614-250 NPBFD1210-250 FIFD1614-187 FIFD1614-250 FIFD2218-187 FIFD2218-250 BUTT SPLICES Model NBS-2218 NBS-1614 NBS-1210 2218 16 -14 12 -10 Wire Size 22-18 16-14 14-12 22-18 22-18 16-14 14-12 Wire Size 22 -18 22 -18 22 -18 16 -14 16 -14 16 -14 14 -12 12 -10 22 -18 16 -14 12 -10 16 -14 16 -14 22 -18 22 -18 Stud #8-0.178" #8-0.178" #8-0.178" #4-0.119" #8-0.178" #4-0.119" #8-0.178" Width 0.268 (0.68) 0.26 (0.66) .315 (.80) 0.228 (0.58) 0.276 (0.70) 0.232 (0.59) 0.315 (0.80) RINGS UL File E76766 BLOCK SPADES UL File E32244 Mating Tab UL File E79133 0.020 x 0.110 (0.05 x 0.28) 0.020 x 0.187 (0.05 x 0.47) 0.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64) 0.020 x 0.110 (0.05 x 0.28) 0.020 x 0.187 (0.05 x 0.47) 0.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64) 0.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64) 0.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64) UL File E79133 0.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64) 0.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64) 0.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64) 0.020 x 0.187 (0.05 x 0.47) 0.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64) 0.020 x 0.187 (0.05 x 0.47) 0.032 x 0.250 (0.05 x 0.64) UL File E68376 Wire Size Color Red Blue Yellow FEMALE DISCONNECTS PIGGYBACK DISCONNECTS FULLY INSULATED FEMALE DISCONNECTS

COMPRESSION TERMINALS AND SPLICES COMPRESSION TERMINALS AND SPLICES
Compression terminals and splices are used for connecting, securing, and terminating all types of electrical wiring applications. Each terminal is an assembly of a bare terminal tted with a funneled copper gripping sleeve and a tightly tted insulation sleeve made of nylon.
Splice
Ring
Piggyback Disconnect
Female Disconnect
4
Color Package Qty Red Blue Yellow Red Red Blue Yellow Color Red Red Red Blue Blue Blue Yellow Yellow Red Blue Yellow Red Red Blue Blue 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Package Qty 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Ring
Block Spade
Female Disconnect
Piggyback Disconnect
UL File E79133
Fully Insulated Female Disconnect
Package Qty 50 50 50
Butt Splice
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
227
NEW! NEW!
COMPACT SPLICING CONNECTORS 222 SERIES LEVER NUTS
DESCRIPTION
Compact Splicing Connectors for 2, 3, and 5 conductors.
FEATURES

For all connections requiring: Stranded/solid wires Wide range of wire sizes Combination of different wire sizes in one connector Small space consumption Built-in test point Protection against electrical shock, touch safe Low installed cost and safe operation Maintenance free connection Resusable connector
222-412
222-413
222-415
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Rating 600 V (1000 V signs and xtures) 20 A maximum Current Rating Wire Size 28-12 AWG Number Of Conductors 2, 3, 5 Operating Temperature 221F (105C) maximum Strip Length Strip to 0.37" (9-10 mm) Dimensions 222-412 222-413 222-415 Approvals 0.81" x 0.49" x 0.57" (2.05 x 1.24 x 1.45 cm) 0.81" x 0.67" x 0.57" (2.05 x 1.7 x 1.45 cm) 0.81" x 1.05" x 0.57" (2.05 x 2.66 x 1.45 cm) UL Listed E69654
INSTALLATION
Step 1. Strip wire. Step 2. Push up lever. Step 3. Insert conductor and push down lever.
Integrated test port allows for easy testing of connection integrity.
Model 222-412 222-413 222-415 222-412J 222-413J 222-415J Number Of Conductors 2 3 5 2 3 5 ACCESSORIES Wire cutting and stripping tool (34-8 AWG) Description 2 - conductor connector 50 pc box 3 - conductor connector 50 pc box 5 - conductor connector 40 pc box 2 - conductor connector 350 pc jar 3 - conductor connector 250 pc jar 5 - conductor connector 150 pc jar
206-124
228
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March2014 2014 March
NEW! NEW!
WIRE NUTS, TIES, ACCESSORIES WIRE NUTS, TIES, ACCESSORIES
DESCRIPTION
These miscellaneous electrical products are used for supporting and connecting conductors.
Waterproof Wire Nut Moisture-Resistant Butt Splice
Wire Nut
KWN78G
MOISTURE-RESISTANT BUTT SPLICES (Pkg. 100) Model UR 19-26
Wire Size
4
WIRE NUTS Model KWN72B KWN73O KWN74Y KWN76R KWN78G
UL File E116091 (Pkg. 100) Wire Size 22-14 22-14 18-12 18-10 14-8 I.D. 0.188 0.203 0.235 0.328 0.453 Color Blue Orange Yellow Red Gray Volts 300 600 600 600 600
Heavy-Duty Cable Clamp
EWKO12, EWKO34
Tie Wraps
HEAVY-DUTY CABLE CLAMPS Model CC0625N CC0750N CC08750N CC1N CC1250N CC1250N KO SEALS Model EWKO12 EWKO34 Model CABLE TIES K400CT K750CT K750PCT K1970CT K1400PCT MOUNTING TIES KMT650-8 KMT800-10 IDENTIFICATION TIES IDT400 IDT750 MOUNTING PLATFORMS MP7575 MP1111 Size 5/8" 3/4" 7/8" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" Width 1/2" (1.27 cm) 1/2" (1.27 cm) 1/2" (1.27 cm) 1/2" (1.27 cm) 1/2" (1.27 cm) 1/2" (1.27 cm)
UL File E76766 (Pkg. 25) Thickness Hole Diameter
Cable Tie Mounting Tie
0.060" (0.15 cm) 0.203" (0.52 cm) 0.060" (0.15 cm) 0.203" (0.52 cm) 0.060" (0.15 cm) 0.203" (0.52 cm) 0.060" (0.15 cm) 0.203" (0.52 cm) 0.060" (0.15 cm) 0.203" (0.52 cm) 0.060" (0.15 cm) 0.203" (0.52 cm)
Identification Tie
Description 1/2" KO Seal 3/4" KO Seal Length 4.0" (10.16 cm) 7.5" (19.05 cm) 7.5" (19.05 cm) 19.7" (50.04 cm) 14.5" (35.56 cm) 6.5" (16.51 cm) 8.0" (20.32 cm) 4.0" (10.16 cm) 7.5" (19.05 cm) 0.75" (1.91 cm) 1.1" (2.79 cm)
Unit Quanity 1 piece 1 piece Width 0.10" (0.25 cm) 0.19" (0.48 cm ) 0.19" (0.48 cm ) 0.19" (0.48 cm ) 0.19" (0.48 cm ) .14" (0.36 cm) 0.19" (0.48 cm ) 0.10" (0.25 cm) 0.19" (0.48 cm ) 0.75" (1.91 cm) 1.1" (2.79 cm) Type Miniature Standard Plenum Standard Plenum Stud #8-0.178" Stud #10-0.198" Write-On Write-On 4- way miniature 4- way standard 3/16" (0.48 cm) 5/16" (0.79 cm)
Mounting Platform
Thickness Unit Quantity 100/ pkg. 100/ pkg. 100/ pkg. 100/ pkg. 100/ pkg. 50/ pkg. 50/ pkg. 50/ pkg. 50/ pkg. 50/ pkg. 50/ pkg.
UL File E97527 UL File E97527
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
229
NEW! NEW!
TAPES TEMFLEX 1700 BLACK VINYL ELECTRICAL TAPE
DESCRIPTION
3M's Temex 1700 Black Vinyl Electrical Tape is an economical, exible, general purpose tape.
FEATURES

General purpose vinyl electrical tape Temperated rated to 176F (80C) Thickness 7 mils UL File# E129200
Temex 1700
MODEL 1700 DESCRIPTION 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m)
TAPES 35 VINYL COLOR-CODING TAPES

DESCRIPTION
3Ms 35 Vinyl Color-Coding Tape is available in nine faderesistant colors, is super stretchy and conformable, and has excellent insulating properties.
FEATURES
Premium grade vinyl electrical insulating tape in nine fade resistant colors Provides excellent mechanical and electrical insulation Resists UV rays, abrasion, corrosion, alkalies, and acids Wraps smoothly and holds tight in temperatures to 220F (105C) Thickness 7 mils UL File# E129200
35
Model 35-BLUE 35-BROWN 35-GRAY 35-GREEN 35-ORANGE 35-RED 35-VIOLET 35-WHITE 35-YELLOW Color Blue Brown Gray Green Orange Red Violet White Yellow ORDERING INFORMATION Dimensions 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1m) Standard Package 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll March 2014
230
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW! NEW!
WIRE MARKERS 3M SCOTCHCODE TAPE DISPENSER STD
DESCRIPTION
The ScotchCode Tape Dispenser STD is a compact, carry-along dispenser with ten rellable compartments that hold eight-foot rolls of non-smear polyester tape. Used for marking binder groups, wire or cable, the tapes high tack, acrylic adhesive resists solvents, oil and water, and adheres rmly to insulation surfaces. An end-loop hooks the dispenser easily to a tool pouch or belt.
Model SDR-0 SDR-1 SDR-2 SDR-3 SDR-4 SDR-5 SDR-6 SDR-7 SDR-8 SDR-9 SDR-BK SDR-BL SDR-BN SDR-GN SDR-GY SDR-OR SDR-RD SDR-VL SDR-WH SDR-YL STD-0-9X STD-CX
STD
Description Number rell "0" Number rell "1" Number rell "2" Number rell "3" Number rell "4" Number rell "5" Number rell "6" Number rell "7" Number rell "8" Number rell "9" Black color rell Blue color rell Brown color rell Green color rell Grey color rell Orange color rell Red color rell Violet color rell White color rell Yellow color rell Dispenser lled with 10 rolls of numbered tape (one each of 0-9) Dispenser lled with 10 rolls of colored tape (one each of black, blue, brown, green, gray, orange, red, violet, white and yellow)
Standard Package 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 roll 1 dispenser 1 dispenser
4
WIRE MARKERS 3M SCOTCHCODE WRITE ON DISPENSERS

DESCRIPTION
This self-laminating, write-on marker dispenser is handy for identifying wire and cable. It is easy to use, rellable, and comes with an SMP permanent marking pen.
DIMENSIONS
L Write-On Area W H
SWD
SPECIFICATIONS AND ORDERING INFORMATION

WRITE-ON AREA MARKER SIZE LABELS RECOMMENDED W H W L MODEL DESCRIPTION PER ROLL WIRE O.D. SWD Regular dispenser with 250 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.312" (0.8 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 1.375" (3.5 cm) 0.09-0.31" (0.23-0.78 cm) tape and SMP pen SWD-R Refill roll for SWD 250 0.75" (1.9 cm) 0.312" (0.8 cm) 0.75" (1.9 cm) 1.375" (3.5 cm) 0.09-0.31" (0.23-0.78 cm) STANDARD PACKAGE 1 card 1 card
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
231
NEW! NEW!
TAPES SUPER 33 AND 88 BLACK VINYL ELECTRICAL TAPE
DESCRIPTION
3Ms Super 33 and 88 Black Vinyl Tapes is all heavy duty and for all weather use. It also resists UV rays, abrasion, corrosion, alkalies and acids, and is ame retardant.
FEATURES
Useable in cold weather applications to 0F (-18C) and high temperature environments up to 220F (105C) UL File#E129200, CSA certied Aggressive adhesive and elastic backing conforms to irregular surfaces for moisture-tight protection.
Model SUPER 33 SUPER 88 Dimensions 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1 m) 3/4" x 66' (1.9 cm x 20.1 m) Thickness 7 mils 8.5 mils Standard Package 1 roll 1 roll
TAPES
DESCRIPTION
3Ms Tartan 3939 Duct Tape is a general purpose, silver duct tape with good adhesion and strong backing.
FEATURES
Seals HVAC ducts General-purpose, silver, laminated-cloth duct tape Temperature rated to 150F (65C) 9.8 mils thick
Model 3939 Dimensions 2" x 180' (5.1 cm x 54.8 m) Standard Package 1 roll
232
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
ENCLOSURES
HUMIDITY
ENCLOSURES
Kele Has A Wide Selection of NEMA-Rated Enclosures.
NSTA Instapanels | p. 237
C-SD Concept | p. 267
H&G Series | p. 264
567 Series | p. 251
SCE Series | p. 249
A-ALP/A-BLP | p. 256
ENCLOSURES
MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Services Custom Services / Panel Shop Keles Custom Panel Shop.. . . . . . . . . . . 233 NEMA / IP Ratings Enclosure Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Accessories Perf Panel Kele Control Component Mounting Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed and Hinged Window Kits Hoffman Enclosure Accessories. . . . . . . Locks, Latches, Ventilation, Heating, Cooling Hoffman Enclosure Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Latches, Locks, Ventilation, Heating, Cooling Saginaw Enclosure Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMT Series EMT Conduit Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 269 270 271 272
RET Series | p. 239
Multiple NEMA Ratings C-SD Concept Series Hoffman NEMA 4, 12, and 13 Enclosures & Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 EL SERIES Saginaw NEMA 4, 12, and 13 Enclosures & Panels. . . . . . . . . 268 NEMA 1 NSTA Series Kele Insta-Panel Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RET Series Kele NEMA 1 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEMA 1 Small Hoffman Enclosures and Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEMA 1 Medium Hoffman Enclosures and Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEMA 1 Large Hoffman Enclosures and Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SC Series NEMA 1 Screw Cover Boxes HC Series NEMA 1 Hinge Cover Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AFE SERIES Flush Mounted, Screw Cover NEMA1 Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . FC, FCS Series Flush Mounted, Screw Cover NEMA1 Boxes.. . . . . . . . . . Versa-Cab Control Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCE Series Small Saginaw NEMA 1 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCE Series Large Saginaw NEMA 1 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 Series Siemens NEMA 1 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B Series and Window Kits Miscellaneous Enclosures and Window Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 239 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 269
ENCLOSURES
Polypro Series | p. 260
NEMA 12 A-LP Series Hoffman NEMA 12 Enclosures and Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 NEMA 3R A-HCLO Series Hoffman NEMA 3R Enclosures and Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . R-LP SERIES Saginaw NEMA 3R Enclosures and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . WF Series Hoffman NEMA 3R Enclosure with Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR SERIES Saginaw NEMA 3R Enclosure with Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEMA 4/4X A-ALP, A-BLP Series Hoffman NEMA 4 Enclosures and Panels. . . . . . . . A-SSLP Series Hoffman NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Enclosures and Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-LP SERIES Saginaw NEMA 4 Enclosures and Panels H-SSLP SERIES Saginaw NEMA 4X Stainless Steel Enclosures and Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POLYPRO Series POLYPRO Type 4X Non-Metallic Enclosures . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RJ, N Series NEMA 4X Fiberglass Enclosures .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model 14121-000 Miscellaneous Enclosures PS Series Non-Metallic Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H and G Series Non-Metallic Enclosures 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 262 263 263 264
PS Series | p. 263
kele.com
NEW!
6000 sq. ft dedicated Panel Shop Specialized labeling/logos Expedite service
ENCLOSURES
KELE'S CUSTOM PANEL SHOP CUSTOM SERVICES/PANEL SHOP
Kele's Custom Panel Shop offers 123 years of combined panel building experience. From complex one-time designs to multiple standardized panels, Kele has the capacity and efciency to help make and keep jobs protable. UL508A and UL698A panels, done with complete labeling and doccumentation are available from Kele whenever the job requires them. All Kele Custom Panel Shop panels are inspected prior to shipment.
UL508A Panels typically equipment intended for general industrial use and installed in ordinary locations in accordance with state, local and National Electrical codes. UL508A panels are intended to operate using 600 volts or less and where ambient temperatures do not exceed 104F (40C) UL698A Panels typically equipment intended for general industrial use and installed in unclassied locations with intrinsically safe circuit extensions into Class I, Class II, and Class III, Division 1 hazardous (classied) locations in accordance with local, state, and National Electric codes. UL698A panels are intended to operate where ambient temperatures do not exceed 104F (40C), have an oxygen concentration no greater than 21% by volume, and a normal barometric pressure of one atmosphere. Custom Panel Assemblies one-time designs, specialty builds for certain jobs, and complex designs Repeat Panel Assemblies multiple jobs, one model number, consistent price, and standardized components Contact the Kele Custom Panel Shop by e-mailing panels1@kele.com or call 888-397-5353 and ask to speak to the panel shop.
5
Custom Stainless Steel Face Plate
ENCLOSURES
UL approved for the following - UL 508A, UL 698A, CATEGORY NNNY Custom Panel Door
123 years of combined panel building experience 100% drawing inspection for accuracy on all drawings Documented panel inspection on 100% of panels Capable of cutting special hole sizes in stainless steel Optional wire tagging available
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
233
ENCLOSURES
KELE'S CUSTOM PANEL SHOP CUSTOM SERVICES/PANEL SHOP
CAPABILITIES
NEW!
Labeled Terminal Blocks and Wires Custom Panel Assembly
5
Door Device Terminations
ENCLOSURES
Labeled Relays
CONTACT INFORMATION Contact the Kele Custom Panel Shop by e-mailing panels1@kele.com or call 888-397-5353 and ask to speak to the panel shop.
234
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ENCLOSURE RATING Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 3R Type 3S Type 4 Type 4X Type 6 Type 12 Type 13
ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURE SELECTION CHART NEMA/IP RATINGS
NEMA ENCLOSURE TYPES*
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA Standard 250) and Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer Association of Canada (EEMAC)
Enclosure intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against contact with the enclosed equipment or locations where unusual service conditions do not exist Enclosure intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against limited amounts of falling water and dirt
Enclosure intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust, rain, and sleet; undamaged by the formation of ice Enclosure intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against falling rain and sleet; undamaged by the formation of ice Enclosure intended for indoor/outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against falling dirt, rain, sleet, snow, windblown dust, and in which the external mechanisms remain operable when ice laden Enclosure intended for indoor/outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water; undamaged by the formation of ice Enclosure intended for indoor/outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion, windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water; undamaged by the formation of ice Enclosure intended for indoor/outdoor use where occasional submersion is encountered in limited depth; undamaged by the formation of ice Enclosure intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids Enclosure intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, spraying of water, oil, and noncorrosive coolant
This material is reproduced with permission from NEMA. The preceding descriptions, however, are not intended to be complete representations of NEMA standards for enclosures and not those of the EEMAC. * See page 423 for enclosure types for hazardous locations.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
235
ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURE SELECTION CHART NEMA/IP RATINGS
Example Rating
If 1st IP number is 2 and the 2nd IP then the IP rating is number is 3 IP 2 3
FIRST NUMERAL
IP 0 Test
No protection
Protection Protection Enclosure against solid against liquids protection against objects penetration of solid objects greater than 12 mm and against spraying water
Protection against solid 1 objects over 50 mm (i.e., accidental touch by hands) Protection against solid objects over 12 mm (i.e., fingers) Protection against solid objects over 2.5 mm (i.e., tools and wires) Protections against solid objects over 1 mm 2
NEW!
SECOND NUMERAL
Test IP 0 No protection Protection against vertically falling drops of water (i.e., condensation) Protection against direct sprays of water up to 15 degrees from vertical Protection against sprays up to 60 degrees from vertical 3 4 Protection against water sprayed from all directions (limited ingress permitted) Protection against low pressure jets of water from all directions (limited ingress permitted) 5 6 Protection against strong jets of water Protection against the effects of immersion between 15 cm and 1m Protection against long periods of immersion under pressure 7 8 IP65 IP66 IP67 IEC 60529 has no equivalents to NEMA Enclosure Types 7, 8, 9, 10, or 11. Indicates compliance
ENCLOSURES
Protection against dust (limited ingress, no harm-ful deposit)
Total protection against dust
CROSS-REFERENCE (approximate) NEMA, UL, CSA vs IEC Enclosure Type

(cannot be used to convert IEC classifications to NEMA Type numbers) ENCLOSURE RATING Type 1 Type 3 Type 3R Type 3S Type 4 Type 4X Type 6 Type 12 Type 13 IP20 IP22 IP55 IP64
Enclosure Type Rating vs IP Rating Electrical enclosures are rated by type (NEMA 250/UL 50) and/or (IEC 60529) based on the degree of protection provided. Type ratings and IP ratings have only the following in common: 1. A degree of protection for persons from hazardous components inside the enclosure 2. A degree of protection for equipment inside the enclosure from ingress of solid foreign objects, including dust 3. A degree of protection for equipment inside the enclosure from ingress of water NEMA 250 and UL 50 type rating documentation defines additional requirements that type-rated enclosures must meet. These include the following: Mechanical impact on enclosure walls Gasket aging and oil resistance Corrosion resistance Door and cover requirements Sheet metal gauge construction requirements Note: Electrical enclosures that carry an IP rating only have not been designed to the additional type-rating requirements; therefore, a type-rating cannot be assigned to an enclosure that has been only IP rated. Electrical enclosures manufactured by Hoffman are tested for both Type rating and IP rating and carry both Type and IP ratings. This material is reproduced with permission from Hoffman.
236
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
ENCLOSURES KELE INSTA-PANEL ENCLOSURES NSTA SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Frequently jobs are done on a fast track basis in our industry. Instapanels were created for a fast turnaround on a control panel job, saving time and labor. Instapanels are built at Kele in three sizes: small, medium, and large. Each panel is set up with transformer(s), blocks, wire duct, convenience outlet, additional DIN rail and a perforated back panel for easy mounting of customer parts. Pick the size panel based on the interior space necessary for mounting components. Choose from NEMA 1 or NEMA 4/12 enclosures.
FEATURES
Three popular sizes of NEMA 1 enclosures (Gray, Dark Blue, Light Blue and Tan/Brown) Convenience outlet Three popular sizes of NEMA 4/12 enclosures (Gray color only)
NSTA2018VA100
NSTA2620VA200
ENCLOSURES
NSTA3826VA300
NSTA2016412-GY
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage NSTA2018VA100, NSTA2016412-GY NSTA2620VA200, NSTA2420412-GY NSTA3826VA300, NSTA3624412-GY Convenience Outlet Enclosure Size NSTA2018VA100 NSTA2016412-GY NSTA2620VA200 NSTA2420412-GY NSTA3826VA300 NSTA3624412-GY March 2014 Interior Panel Mounting Dimensions NSTA2018VA100 7.375"H x 13.125"W (18.7 x 33.3 cm) NSTA2016412-GY 7.375"H x 13.125"W (18.7 x 33.3 cm) NSTA2620VA200 13.0" H x 15.375" W (33.0 x 39.0 cm) NSTA2420412-GY 13.0" H x 15.375" W (33.0 x 39.0 cm) NSTA3825VA300 24.0" H x 20" W (61.0 x 50.8 cm) NSTA3624412-GY 24.0" H x 20" W (61.0 x 50.8 cm) Panel Color Dark brown body and light tan door, Dark blue body and door, Gray body and door (NEMA 4/12 only) Dark blue body and poweder blue door Weight NSTA2018VA100 31 lb (14 kg) NSTA2016412-GY 36.2 lb (16.4 kg) NSTA2620VA200 45 lb (20.4kg) NSTA2420412-GY 53.3 lb (24.2 kg) NSTA3826VA300 71 lb (32.2 kg) NSTA3624412-GY 88.6 lb (40.2 kg)
(1) 120/24 VAC transformer, 100 VA (2) 120/24 VAC transformers, 100 VA (200 VA total) (3) 120/24 VAC transformers, 100 VA (300 VA total) 120 VAC, 3A maximum 20"H x 18"W x 7"D (50.8 x 45.7 x 17.8 cm) 20"H x 16"W x 8"D (51.0 x 30.0 x 20.0 cm) 26"H x 20"W x 7"D (66 x 50.8 x 17.8 cm) 24"H x 20"W x 8"D (61.0 x 51.0 x 20.0 cm) 38"H x 26"W x 7"D (96.5 x 66 x 17.8 cm) 36"H x 24"W x 8"D (91.0 x 61.0 x 20.0 cm)
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
237
NEW! NEW!
ENCLOSURES KELE INSTA-PANEL ENCLOSURES NSTA SERIES
NEMA 4/12 NEMA 1
DIMENSIONS
8.0 (20.3)
3 AMP MAX
NEMA 4/12
NEMA 1
4.25 (10.8)
L N G
9.0 (22.8)
3 AMP MAX
5.25 (13.3)
14.75 (37.5)
5.375 (13.6)
L N G TX-1-A TX-1-B TX-2-A TX-2-B TX-3-A TX-3-B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
WIRE DUCT
W I R E D U C T
WIRE DUCT
WIRE DUCT
6.75 (17.1)
TX-1
4" BAM-1000
W I R E D U C T
TX-1 A TX-1 B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
7.375 (18.7)
W I R E D U C T
TX-1-A TX-2-A TX-1-B TX-2-B 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
4.0 (10.1)
3 AMP MAX
TX-1
TX-2
TX-3
W I R E D U C T
WIRE DUCT
W I R E D U C T
4.375 (11.1)
4" BAM-1000
4.75 (12.0)
BAM-1000
WIRE DUCT
WIRE DUCT
10.0 (25.4)
10.0 (25.4)
5.0 (12.7)
13.125 (33.3)
17.5 18 (44.5) (45.7)
W I R E D U C T
15.375 (39.0)
W I R E D U C T
23.5 22 (59.7) (55.9)
W I R E D U C T
W I R E D U C T
7.375 (18.7)
13.0 (33.0)
24.0 (61.0)
W I R E D U C T
33.5 34.2 (85.0) (86.9)
24.0 (61.0)
WIRE DUCT
15.5 (39.4) 14.5 (36.8)
NEMA 1
NEMA 4/12
WIRE DUCT
17.5 (44.4) 18 (45.7)
NEMA 1
WIRE DUCT
NEMA 4/12
23.5 (59.7) 24 (61)
NEMA 1
NEMA 4/12
ENCLOSURES
3 AMP MAX
3 AMP MAX L N G
3 AMP MAX
TX-1
TX-1
TX-2
L N G
L N
TX-1
TX-2
TX-3
L N G
A B
L N
A B
L N
A B
A B
L A N B
L N
A B
L N
M10/16SFL
L N G A B
L N G TX-1 A TX-1 B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
INCOMING 120VAC M4/6.P M4/8SF M4/6
L N G TX-1 A B TX-2 A B
L N G TX-1 A TX-1 B TX-2 A TX-2B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M10/16SFL INCOMING 120 VAC M4/6.P M4/8SF M4/6
L N G TX-1 A B TX-2 A B TX-3 A B
L N G TX-1A TX-1B TX-2A TX-2B TX-3A TX-3B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
M10/16SFL INCOMING 120 VAC M4/6.P M4/8SF M4/6
MODEL NSTA2018VA100 NSTA2018VA100-DB NSTA2018VA100-GY NSTA2018VA100-PB NSTA2620VA200 NSTA2620VA200-DB NSTA2620VA200-GY NSTA2620VA200-PB NSTA3826VA300 NSTA3826VA300-DB NSTA3826VA300-GY NSTA3826VA300-PB NSTA3624412-GY NSTA2420412-GY NSTA2016412-GY DESCRIPTION 20" x 18" Insta-Panel, (1) 100 VA transformer, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA , Tan and Brown 20" x 18" Insta-Panel, (1) 100 VA transformer, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Dark Blue 20" x 18" Insta-Panel, (1) 100 VA transformer, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NMEA 1, Gray 20" x 18" Insta-Panel, (1) 100 VA transformer, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Light Blue 26" x 20" Insta-Panel, (2) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1,Tan and Brown 26" x 20" Insta-Panel, (2) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Dark Blue 26" x 20" Insta-Panel, (2) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Gray 26" x 20" Insta-Panel, (2) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Light Blue 38" x 26" Insta-Panel, (3) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Tan and Brown 38" x 26" Insta-Panel, (3) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Dark Blue 38" x 26" Insta-Panel, (3) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Gray 38" x 26" Insta-Panel, (3) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 1, Light Blue 36" x 24" Insta-Panel, (3) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 4/12, Gray 24" x 20" Insta-Panel, (2) 100VA transformers, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 4/12, Gray 20" x 16" Insta-Panel, (1) 100 VA transformer, outlet, 12 available terminal blocks, NEMA 4/12, Gray
*No suffix: brown/tan, DB: dark blue, GY: gray, PB: dark blue/light blue
238
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEMA 1
8.125 (20.6)
NEMA 4/12
TX-1 TX-2
NEW! NEW!
ENCLOSURES
KELE NEMA 1 ENCLOSURES RET SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RET Series includes attractive, economical NEMA 1 enclosures designed to house controls and instruments in areas which do not require oil-tight and dust-tight ratings. The RET Series enclosures are furnished with a perforated metal subpanel for easy mounting of components. No drilling or layout is needed. Simply set the control components on the panel and attach with #7 or #8 self-tapping screws in the prepunched holes. The RET Series is also available in a UL listed version.
FEATURES

Low-cost NEMA 1 enclosure Mounted with door hinged on left or right side Removable door Attractive powder-coated nish, standard brown enclosure with tan door Optional colors available Key lock, two keys, and attractive gray powder-coated perf panel furnished Mounting of control components simplied with perf panel Optional UL-listed enclosures available UL listed, File #E155405, for RET UL-listed panels
DIMENSIONS
ENCLOSURES
in (cm)
7.0 (17.78)
0.64 (1.63)
B C
RET OPTIONAL COLOR CHART
Knockouts
Perf Panel
0.5 (1.27) Standoff
Keylock
D
#10-32 Washers, Screws, and Standoffs
Dark Blue
Powder Blue
Orange
Green
Gray
1 2 3
Optional colors shown in approximate hue
Knockouts are for 3/4" conduit, two knockouts on both sides, three knockouts top and bottom (except two on RET 1812). Perf Panel is 16-ga powder-coated steel. Standard color is brown enclosure with tan door.
DIMENSIONS ENCLOSURE in (cm) ENCLOSURE PERF WEIGHT MODEL A B C D MATERIAL PANEL lb (kg) RET2620 26 (66) 20 (51) 18.75 (47) 17.75 (51) 16-ga steel Included 36 (16.4) RET3826 38 (97) 26 (66) 24.75 (62) 29.75 (81) 16-ga steel Included 61 (27.8) RET4230 42 (107) 30 (76) 28.75 (66) 33.75 (97) 14-ga steel Included 83 (37.8) RET1812ULP 18 (46) 12 (31) 10.75 (28) 9.75 (36) 16-ga steel Included 16 (7.3) RET2018ULP 20 (51) 18 (46) 16.75 (42) 11.75 (36) 16-ga steel Included 27 (12.3) RET2620ULP 26 (66) 20 (51) 18.75 (47) 17.75 (51) 14-ga steel Included 41 (18.6) RET3626ULP 36 (91) 26 (66) 24.75 (62) 27.75 (76) 14-ga steel Included 69 (31.3) -DB: Dark Blue, -PB: Powder Blue, -OR: Orange, -GN: Green, -GY: Gray (Note: No suffix - Brown/Tan)
PERF PANEL H x W in (cm) 23.5 x 17.5 (60 x 44) 35.5 x 23.5 (90 x 60) 39.5 x 27.5 (100 x 70) 15.5 x 9.0 (39 x 23) 17.5 x 15.5 (44 x 39) 23.5 x 17.5 (60 x 44) 33.5 x 23.5 (85 x 60)
ACCESSORIES RET-KEY Replacement Key for Ret-Lock RET-LOCK Lock with key for RET enclosure
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
239
NEW! NEW!
ENCLOSURES
KELE CONTROL COMPONENT MOUNTING PANEL PERF PANEL
DESCRIPTION Perf Panels easily mount control components in standard control enclosures and are a product normally stocked by Kele. Perf Panels are made from perforated 16-gauge steel and feature a gray powder-coated nish. Prepunched holes allow for mounting almost any device without drilling. Simply set the control components on the panel and attach with #7 or #8 self-tapping screws. RET Enclosures come standard with Perf Panels. Hoffman NEMA 1, 3R & 4 enclosures, H series, non-metal and C-SD Concept series enclosures featured in the Kele catalog can be ordered with a perforated panel. Custom sizes may also be ordered.
SIZE (SAMPLE)
Size (Sample) 16 gauge steel, holes 1/8" staggered
STANDARD PERFORATED PANELS

Perf # Size (in) H xW Flat/ Flanged Perf # Size (in) H xW Flat/Flanged Perf # Size (in) H xW Flat/ Flanged
HP66 HP86 HP88 HP108 HP1010 HP128 HP1210 HP1211 HP1212 HP1412 HP1612 HP1616 HP1620 HP1812 HP1818 HP2012 HP2016 HP2020 HP2416 HP2420 HP2424 HP3024 HP3030 HP3624 HP3630 QP1812 RP1812 RP2018
4.25" X 4.25" 6.25" X 4.25" 6.25" X 6.25" 8.25" x 6.25" 8.25" x 8.25" 10.25" x 6.25" 10.25" x 8.25" 10.25" x 9.25" 10.25" x 10.25" 12.25" x 10.25" 14.25" x 10.625" 13" x 14.5" 13" x 18.5" 16.25" x 10.25" 16.25" X 16.25" 18.25" x 10.25" 17" x 14.5" 17" x 18.5" 21" x 14.5" 21" x 18.5" 21" x 22.5" 26" x 22.5" 26" x 28.5" 32" x 22.5" 32" x 28.5" 17" X 11" 15.5" x 9" 17.5" x 15.5"
Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flat Flanged Flanged
RP2620 RP3626 RP3826 RP4230 ST86 ST108 ST1210 ST1412 ST1614 ST1816 ST2016 ST2412 ST2424 ST3020 ST3024 ST3630 IP66 IP86 IP88 IP108 IP1210 IP1412 IP1614 IP1816 CSP1212 CSP1612 CSP2016
23.5" x 17.5" 33.25" x 23.25" 35.5" x 23.5" 39.25" x 27.25" 6.75" X4.88" 8.75" X 6.88" 10.75" X 8.88" 12.88" X 10.88" 14.88" X 12.88" 16.88" X 14.88" 17" X 13" 21" X 9" 21" X 21" 27" X 17" 27" X 21" 33" X 27" 4.88" X 4.88" 6.75" X4.88" 6.75" X 6.75" 8.75" X 6.88" 10.75" X 8.88" 12.75" X 10.88" 14.75" X 12.88" 16.75" X 14.88" 10.2" X 10.2" 14.5" X 10.2" 18.2" X 14.5"
Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flanged Flat Flat Flanged
CSP2020 CSP2416 CSP2421 CSP2424 CSP3024 CSP3624 CSP3630 CSP3636 CSP4236 CSP4836 CSP6036 HO1612 HO1616 HO2016 HO2020 HO2416 HO2420 HO2424 HO3024 HO3030 HO3624 HO3630 HO4224 HO4230 HO4236 HO4836 HO6036
18.2" X 18,2" 22.2" X 14.2" 22.2" X 18.2" 22.2" X 22.2" 28.2" X 22.2" 34.2" X 22.2" 34.2" X 28.2" 34.2" X 34.2" 40.2" X 34.2" 46.2" X 34.2" 58.2" X 34.2" 13" X 9" 13" X 13" 17" X 13" 17" X 17" 21" X 13" 21" X 17" 21" X 21" 27" X 21" 27" X 27" 33" X 21" 33" X 27" 39" X 21" 39" X 27" 39" X 33" 45" X 33" 57" X 33"
Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flat Flat Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged
ENCLOSURES
MODEL DESCRIPTION FT-H x W (in) Flat perf panel for enclosure smaller than 16" x 12" (40.6 x 30.5 cm) FL-H x W (in) Flanged perf panel for enclosure 16" X 12" or larger (40.6 x 30.5 cm) Note: Order customer perforated panels by exact size Example: FT-14.5 x 10.25 at perf panel, 14.50" x 10.25" Note: Maximum painted at/anged panel 34"H x 58"W (86 x 147 cm) Maximum unpainted anged panel 34"H x 78"W (86 x 198 cm)
240
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

ENCLOSURES
HOFFMAN ENCLOSURES AND PANELS NEMA 1 SMALL
Hoffman A Series Small NEMA 1 enclosures house controls and instruments in areas which do not require oil-tight and dust-tight ratings.
Removable doors with butt hinges Mounting holes on back of enclosure Easy operation of ush latch with a screwdriver or coin Weldnuts provided for mounting optional panels ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coating inside and out over phosphorized surfaces Optional steel panels with white nish UL listed, File #E27567 CSA certied File #LL42184 One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
ENCLOSURES
in (cm)
C 0.56 (1.42) Weldnut Panel (optional) 0.5 (1.27)
B B - 1.0 (2.54) Four mounting holes 0.28 (0.71) dia A A - 3.0 (7.62) 1.81 (4.60)
0.53 (1.35) Flange width, typical
ENCLOSURE MODEL A-6N64 A-8N64 A-8N84 A-10N84 A-10N104 A-12N104 A-12N124 A-14N124 A-8N86 A-10N86 A-10N106 A-12N106 A-12N126 A-14N126 A-16N126 A-20N126 A-12N128 A-14N128 DIMENSIONS BODY WEIGHT A x B x C in (cm) GAUGE lb (kg) 16 4.0 (1.8) 6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) 16 5.0 (2.3) 8 x 6 x 4 (20 x 15 x 10) 16 6.0 (2.7) 8 x 8 x 4 (20 x 20 x 10) 16 6.5 (3.0) 10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10) 16 7.5 (3.4) 10 x 10 x 4 (25 x 25 x 10) 16 9.0 (4.1) 12 x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10) 16 10.0 (4.6) 12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) 16 11.0 (5.0) 14 x 12 x 4 (36 x 30 x 10) 16 6.0 (2.7) 8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 16 8.0 (3.6) 10 x 8 x 6 (25 x 20 x 15) 16 9.0 (4.1) 10 x 10 x 6 (25 x 25 x 15) 16 10.0 (4.6) 12 x 10 x 6 (30 x 25 x 15) 16 12.0 (5.5) 12 x 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15) 16 13.0 (5.9) 14 x 12 x 6 (36 x 30 x 15) 16 14.0 (6.4) 16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 16 17.0 (7.8) 20 x 12 x 6 (51 x 35 x 15) 16 14.0 (6.4) 12 x 12 x 8 (30 x 30 x 20) 16 15.0 (6.8) 14 x 12 x 8 (36 x 30 x 20)
SOLID PANEL*
MODEL A-6N6P A-8N6P A-8N8P A-10N8P A-10N10P A-12N10P A-12N12P A-14N12P A-8N8P A-10N8P A-10N10P A-12N10P A-12N12P A-14N12P A-16N12P A-20N12P A-12N12P A-14N12P
DIMENSIONS WEIGHT H x W in (cm) GAUGE lb (kg) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 10) 0.5 (0.2) 14 6.25 x 4.25 (16 x 11) 0.75 (0.3) 14 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 1.0 (0.5) 14 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 1.0 (0.5) 14 8.25 x 8.25 (21 x 21) 1.5 (0.7) 14 10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21) 2.0 (0.9) 14 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 2.5 (1.1) 14 12.25 x 10.25 (31 x 26) 3.0 (1.4) 14 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 1.0 (0.5) 14 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 1.0 (0.5) 14 8.25 x 8.25 (21 x 21) 1.5 (0.7) 14 10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21) 2.0 (0.9) 14 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 2.5 (1.1) 14 12.25 x 10.25 (31 x 26) 3.0 (1.4) 14 14.25 x 10.25 (36 x 26) 3.5 (1.6) 14 18.25 x 10.25 (46 x 36) 4.0 (1.8) 14 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 2.5 (1.1) 14 12.25 x 10.25 (31 x 26) 3.0 (1.4) 14
Add P to the end of the model number to order optional perf panel. See Accessories page for locks, latches, heaters, fans, and ventilation kits. * Order panels separately
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
241
ENCLOSURES
DESCRIPTION
Hoffman A Series Medium NEMA 1 enclosures house controls and instruments in areas which do not require oil tight and dust tight ratings.
HOFFMAN ENCLOSURES AND PANELS NEMA 1 MEDIUM
FEATURES
Removable doors with butt hinges Mounting holes on back of enclosure Easy operation of ush latch with a screwdriver or coin Collar studs provided for mounting optional panels ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coating inside and out over phosphatized surfaces Optional steel panels with white nish UL listed File #E27567 CSA certied, File #LL42184 One-year warranty
NEW!
B E Four mounting holes (min) 0.31 (0.79) dia 1.81 (4.60) D 0.53 (1.35) Flange width, typical
ENCLOSURES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
C 0.56 (1.42) 3/8-16 Collar stud Panel (optional) 0.62 (1.57) A
DIMENSIONS BODY ENCLOSURE A x B x C in (cm) MOUNTING D x E in (cm) GAUGE MODEL 13.88 x 7 (35 x 18) 16 A-16N12ALP 16 x 12 x 6.62 (41 x 31 x 17) 16 A-16N16ALP 16 x 16 x 6.62 (41 x 41 x 17) 13.88 x 11 (35 x 28) 16 A-16N20ALP 16 x 20 x 6.62 (41 x 51 x 17) 13.88 x 15 (35 x 38) 16 A-20N16ALP 20 x 16 x 6.62 (51 x 41 x 17) 17.88 x 11 (45 x 28) 16 A-20N20ALP 20 x 20 x 6.62 (51 x 51 x 17) 17.88 x 15 (45 x 38) 24 x 16 x 6.62 (61 x 41 x 17) 21.88 x 11 (56 x 28) 16 A-24N16ALP 16 A-24N20ALP 24 x 20 x 6.62 (61 x 51 x 17) 21.88 x 15 (56 x 38) 14 A-24N24ALP 24 x 24 x 6.62 (61 x 61 x 17) 21.88 x 19 (56 x 48) 14 A-30N24ALP 30 x 24 x 6.62 (76 x 61 x 17) 27.5 x 16.75 (70 x 43) 14 A-36N24ALP 36 x 24 x 6.62 (91 x 61 x 17) 33.5 x 16.75 (85 x 43) 14 A-36N30ALP 36 x 30 x 6.62 (91 x 76 x 17) 33.5 x 22.75 (85 x 58) 13.88 x 7 (35 x 18) 16 A-16N12BLP 16 x 12 x 8.62 (41 x 31 x 22) 16 A-20N16BLP 20 x 16 x 8.62 (51 x 41 x 22) 17.88 x 11 (45 x 28) 16 A-20N20BLP 20 x 20 x 8.62 (51 x 51 x 22) 17.88 x 15 (45 x 38) 24 x 20 x 8.62 (61 x 51 x 22) 21.88 x 15 (56 x 38) 16 A-24N20BLP 14 A-24N24BLP 24 x 24 x 8.62 (61 x 61 x 22) 21.88 x 19 (56 x 48) 14 A-30N24BLP 30 x 24 x 8.62 (76 x 61 x 22) 27.5 x 16.75 (70 x 43) 14 A-30N30BLP 30 x 30 x 8.62 (76 x 76 x 22) 27.5 x 22.75 (70 x 58) 14 A-36N24BLP 36 x 24 x 8.62 (91 x 61 x 22) 33.5 x 16.75 (85 x 43) 14 A-36N30BLP 36 x 30 x 8.62 (91 x 76 x 22) 33.5 x 22.75 (85 x 58) 16 A-24N20CLP 24 x 20 x 10.62 (61 x 51 x 27) 21.88 x 15 (56 x 38) 14 A-24N24DLP 24 x 24 x 12.62 (61 x 61 x 27) 21.88 x 19 (56 x 48) 14 A-30N24DLP 30 x 24 x 12.62 (76 x 61 x 27) 27.5 x 16.75 (70 x 43) 36 x 30 x 12.62 (91 x 76 x 27) 33.5 x 22.75 (85 x 58) 14 A-36N30DLP * Order panels separately Add P to the end of the part number to order optional perf panel. See Accessories page for locks, latches, louvers, fans and heaters. WEIGHT lb (kg) 15.0 (6.8) 22.5 (10.2) 21.5 (9.8) 21.5 (9.8) 26.0 (11.8) 26.0 (11.8) 30.0 (13.6) 40.0 (18.1) 49.5 (22.5) 52.2 (23.7) 69.0 (31.3) 17.0 (7.7) 25.5 (11.6) 30.5 (13.8) 33.0 (15.0) 42.0 (19.1) 50.5 (22.9) 61.5 (27.9) 54.2 (24.6) 68.0 (30.8) 36.0 (16.3) 51.0 (23.1) 62.5 (28.4) 81.0 (36.7) SOLID PANEL* MODEL A-16N12MP A-16N16MP A-16N20MP A-20N16MP A-20N20MP A-24N16MP A-24N20MP A-24N24MP A-30N24MP A-36N24MP A-36N30MP A-16N12MP A-20N16MP A-20N20MP A-24N20MP A-24N24MP A-30N24MP A-30N30MP A-36N24MP A-36N30MP A-24N20MP A-24N24MP A-30N24MP A-36N30MP SIZE WEIGHT H x W in (cm) GAUGE lb (kg) 13 x 10.5 (33 x 27) 14 3.0 (1.4) 13 x 14.5 (33 x 37) 14 5.0 (2.3) 13 x 18.5 (33 x 47) 14 6.0 (2.7) 17 x 14.5 (43 x 37) 14 6.0 (2.7) 17 x 18.5 (43 x 47) 14 7.0 (3.2) 21 x 14.5 (53 x 37) 14 7.0 (3.2) 21 x 18.5 (53 x 47) 14 9.0 (4.1) 21 x 22.5 (53 x 57) 12 15.0 (6.8) 26 x 22.5 (66 x 57) 12 18.5 (8.4) 32 x 22.5 (81 x 57) 12 23.0 (10.4) 32 x 28.5 (81 x 72) 12 29.0 (13.2) 13 x 10.5 (33 x 27) 14 6.0 (2.7) 17 x 14.5 (43 x 37) 14 6.0 (2.7) 17 x 18.5 (43 x 47) 14 7.0 (3.2) 21 x 18.5 (53 x 47) 14 9.0 (4.1) 21 x 22.5 (53 x 57) 12 15.0 (6.8) 26 x 22.5 (66 x 57) 12 18.5 (8.4) 26 x 28.5 (66 x 72) 12 23.5 (10.7) 32 x 22.5 (81 x 57) 12 23.0 (10.4) 32 x 28.5 (81 x 72) 12 29.0 (13.2) 21 x 18.5 (81 x 47) 14 9.0 (4.1) 21 x 22.5 (53 x 57) 12 15.0 (6.8) 26 x 22.5 (66 x 57) 12 18.5 (8.4) 32 x 28.5 (81 x 72) 12 29.0 (13.2)
242
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

ENCLOSURES
HOFFMAN ENCLOSURES AND PANELS NEMA 1 LARGE
Hoffman A Series Large NEMA 1 enclosures house controls and instruments in areas which do not require oil-tight and dust-tight ratings.
Continuous hinges Mounting holes on back of enclosure Easy operation of ush latch with a screwdriver or coin Collar studs provided for mounting optional panels ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coated Door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity Optional steel panels with white nish Optional locks and latches available UL listed, File #E27567 CSA certied File #LL42186 One-year warranty
ENCLOSURES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3/8-16 Collar stud Panel (optional) 0.91 (2.31)
C 0.56 (1.42)
B B - 7.24 (18.39) Four mounting holes (min) 0.44 (1.12) dia A A - 2.12 (5.38) Coin Latch 2.40 (6.11)
SOLID PANEL** MODEL A-42P30* A-42P36* A-48P36* A-42P30* A-42P36 A-48P36
ENCLOSURE MODEL A-42N3009* A-42N3609* A-48N3609* A-42N3013* A-42N3613 A-48N3613
DIMENSIONS BODY WEIGHT A x B x C in (cm) GAUGE lb (kg) 14 42 x 30 x 9.25 (107 x 76 x 24) 101 (45.9) 14 42 x 36 x 9.25 (107 x 91 x 24) 122 (55.4) 14 48 x 36 x 9.25 (122 x 91 x 24) 124 (56.3) 14 42 x 30 x 13.25 (107 x 76 x 34) 112 (50.9) 14 42 x 36 x 13.25 (107 x 91 x 34) 132 (59.9) 14 48 x 36 x 13.25 (122 x 91 x 34) 144 (65.4)
* Stocked at Kele. Other size enclosures and panels are special order and cannot be returned for credit. See Accessories page for locks, latches, louvers, fans, and heaters. Add P to the end of the part number to order optional perf panel.
DIMENSIONS GAUGE H x W in (cm) 39 x 27 (99 x 69) 12 39 x 33 (99 x 84) 12 45 x 33 (114 x 84) 12 39 x 27 (99 x 69) 12 39 x 33 (99 x 84) 12 45 x 33 (114 x 84) 12
WEIGHT lb (kg) 33 (15.0) 39 (17.7) 46 (20.9) 33 (15.0) 39 (17.7) 46 (20.9)
** Order panels separately
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
243
ENCLOSURES
NEMA 1 SCREW COVER BOXES SC SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SC Series screw cover boxes serve as surface-mounted junction boxes or switch boxes. With the addition of a eldinstalled perforated subpanel, they can also house controls and instruments in areas that do not require oil tight and dusttight ratings.
FEATURES
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Four mounting 0.5 holes (1.27) 0.28 (0.7) dia 1.5 (3.81) C 0.53 (1.35) Typical A B Knockouts on all sides. Patterns and sizes vary with enclosure size.
ENCLOSURES
16-gauge steel construction to meet NEMA 1 Flat, removable covers fastened with plated steel screws Unique keyhole screw slots in cover for removal without extracting the screws Mounting holes on back of enclosure Various sizes of easily removable knockouts on all sides ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder nish inside and out over phosphatized surfaces Available with optional perf panel UL listed File #E27525 CSA certied, File #LL42184 One-year warranty
ENCLOSURE MODEL SC664 SC666 SC884 SC886 SC1084 SC1284 SC12104 SC12106 SC12124 SC16124 SC18124 SC18126 DIMENSIONS A x B x C in (cm) x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) x 6 x 6 (15 x 15 x 15) x 8 x 4 (20 x 20 x 10) x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 10) x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10) x 8 x 4 (40 x 20 x 10) x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10) x 10 x 6 (30 x 25 x 10) x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) x 12 x 4 (41 x 30 x 10) x 12 x 4 (46 x 30 x 10) x 12 x 6 (46 x 30 x 15) WEIGHT lb (kg) 3.1 (1.4) 4.0 (1.8) 4.7 (2.1) 6.0 (2.7) 6.1 (2.8) 6.3 (2.9) 7.3 (3.3) 8.8 (4.0) 8.5 (3.8) 12.0 (5.5) 12.0 (5.5) 14.0 (6.4) OPTIONAL PERF PANEL DIMENSIONS SIZE H x W in (cm) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 10.25 x 6.25 (26 x 16) 10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21) 10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21) 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 14.25 x 10.625 (36 x 26) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26)
6 6 8 8 10 12 12 12 12 16 18 18
Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel. (Standoffs are field installed, drilling required). See Hoffman Enclosure Accessory page in the Enclosures section for locks, latches, heaters, fans, and ventilation kits. Additional box sizes available.
244
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

ENCLOSURES
NEMA 1 HINGE COVER BOXES HC SERIES
The HC Series NEMA 1 hinge cover boxes serve as surfacemounted junction boxes or switch boxes. With the addition of a eld-installed perforated subpanel, they can also house controls and instruments in areas that do not require oil-tight and dust-tight ratings.
16-gauge steel construction meets NEMA 1 Removable doors with butt hinges Door hinge on left or right side Mounting holes on back of enclosure Easy operation of ush latch with a screwdriver or coin Various sizes of easily removable knockouts on all sides ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder nish inside and out over phosphatized surfaces Available with optional perf panel UL listed, File #E27525 CSA certied, File #LL42184 One-year warranty
ENCLOSURES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Four mounting holes 0.28 (0.71) dia
A - 1.06 (2.69) Opening
Flushmounted coin latch A
B - 1.06 (2.69) Opening
Knockouts on all sides. Patterns and sizes vary with enclosure size.
ENCLOSURE MODEL HC664 HC666 HC886 HC1084 HC1284 HC12104 HC12124 HC12126 HC16124 HC16126 HC18124 HC18126 DIMENSIONS A x B x C in (cm) x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) x 6 x 6 (15 x 15 x 15) x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10) x 8 x 4 (30 x 20 x 10) x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10) x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) x 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15) x 12 x 4 (41 x 30 x 10) x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) x 12 x 4 (46 x 30 x 10) x 12 x 6 (46 x 30 x 15) WEIGHT lb (kg) 3.2 (1.5) 4.0 (1.8) 6.0 (2.7) 7.0 (3.2) 8.0 (3.6) 8.0 (3.6) 8.8 (4.0) 10.3 (4.7) 12.0 (5.5) 13.0 (5.9) 12.0 (5.4) 14.0 (6.4) OPTIONAL PERF PANEL DIMENSION SIZE H x W in (cm) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 10.25 x 6.25 (26 x 16) 10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21) 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 14.25 x 10.625 (36 x 26) 14.25 x 10.25 (36 x 26) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26)
6 6 8 10 12 12 12 12 16 16 18 18
Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel. (Standoffs are field installed, drilling required.) See Hoffman Enclosure Accessory page in the Enclosure section for locks, latches, heaters, fans, and ventilation kits. Additional box sizes available.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
245
ENCLOSURES
DESCRIPTION
The AFE Series ush mounted screw covered boxes are designed to mount within a wall to serve as junction boxes or switch boxes. With the addition of a eld-installed perforated subpanel, they may also be used to house controls and instruments in areas that do not require oil-tight and dusttight ratings. The AFE Series is a gray powder coated steel enclosure and cover.
FLUSH MOUNTED, SCREW COVER NEMA1 BOXES AFE SERIES
NEW!
AFE Series
5
FEATURES
16 gauge steel contruction rated NEMA 1 Flat, removeable covers fastened with plated steel screws Mounting holes on back of enclosure Various sizes of easily removeable knockouts on all sides Attractive, gray powder-coated box Available with perf panel
DIMENSIONS
ENCLOSURES
in (cm)
Four mounting holes 0.5 0.28 (0.7) dia (1.27) 1.5 (3.81)
0.53 (1.35) Typical A
AFE Flush cover enclosure BOX SIZE H x W x D in (cm) A x B in (cm) WEIGHT lb (kg) 4.3 (2.0) 664B 6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) 7.5 x 7.5 (19 x 19) 5.2 (2.4) 666B 6 x 6 x 6 (15 x 15 x 15) 7.5 x 7.5 (19 x 19) 7.6 (3.4) 886B 8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 9.5 x 9.5 (24 x 24) 8.2 (3.7) 1084B 10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10) 11.5 x 9.5 (29 x 24) 8.6 (3.9) 1284B 12 x 8 x 4 (30 x 20 x 10) 13.5 x 9.5 (34 x 24) 12.2 (5.5) 12124B 12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) 13.5 x 13.5 (34 x 34) OPTIONS P Powder-coated perf panel (standoffs are field installed)
PERF PANEL DIM H x W in (cm) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 10.25 x 6.25 (26 x 16) 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26)
AFE
664B
Example: AFE-664B-P Gray steel flush enclosure with perf panel
246
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
ENCLOSURES
FLUSH MOUNTED SCREW COVER BOXES FC, FCS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The FC/FCS Series ush mounted screw cover boxes are designed to mount within a wall to serve as junction boxes or switch boxes. With the addition of a eld-installed perforated subpanel, they may also be used to house controls and instruments in areas that do not require oil-tight and dusttight ratings. The FC Series is a gray powder coated steel enclosure and cover, while the FCS Series is a gray powdercoated steel enclosure with a 304 stainless steel cover. Each series is available with a locking door.
FEATURES
16 gauge steel construction rated NEMA 1 Flat, removable covers fastened with plated steel screws Mounting holes on back of enclosure Various sizes of easily removable knockouts on all sides Attractive, gray powder-coated box Available with gray powder-coated or stainless steel cover Available with optional door and perf panel
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Four mounting holes 0.5 0.28 (0.7) dia (1.27) 1.5 (3.81)
ENCLOSURES
0.53 (1.35) Typical A
FC Flush cover enclosure WEIGHT FCS Stainless steel flush cover enclosure FC and FCS FC-D and FCS-D BOX SIZE H x W x D in (cm) A x B in (cm) lb (kg) lb (kg) 664 6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) 8 x 8 (20 x 20) 4.00 (1.81) N/A 666 6 x 6 x 6 (15 x 15 x 15) 8 x 8 (20 x 20 cm) 4.80 (2.18) N/A 886 8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 10 x 10 (25 x 25) 6.90 (3.13) 7.50 (3.40) 1084 10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x 10) 12 x 10 (30 x 25) 8.00 (3.63) 8.75 (3.97) 1284 12 x 8 x 4 (30 x 20 x 10) 14 x 10 (36 x 25) 9.00 (4.08) 9.70 (4.40) 12104 12 x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10) 14 x 12 (36 x 30) 9.10 (4.13) 9.80 (4.45) 12124 12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) 14 x 14 (36 x 36) 9.95 (4.51) 10.45 (4.74) 16124 16 x 12 x 4 (41 x 30 x 10) 18 x 14 (46 x 36) 13.15 (5.96) 13.70 (6.21) 18124 18 x 12 x 4 (46 x 41 x 10) 20 x 14 (51 x 36) 13.50 (6.12) 14.25 (6.46) 18126 18 x 12 x 6 (46 x 41 x 15) 20 x 14 (51 x 36) 15.50 (7.03) 16.30 (7.39) OPTIONS D Continuously hinged door with key lock (8" x 8" / 20 x 20 cm or larger) P Powder-coated perf panel (standoffs are field installed) FCS 1284 D P
PERF PANEL D OPTION DIMENSIONS DOOR DIMENSIONS H x W in (cm) H x W in (cm) 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) N/A 4.25 x 4.25 (11 x 11) N/A 6.25 x 6.25 (16 x 16) 3.57 x 5.94 (10 x 15) 8.25 x 6.25 (21 x 16) 5.57 x 5.94 (15 x 15) 10.25 x 6.25 (26 x 16) 7.57 x 5.94 (19 x 15) 10.25 x 8.25 (26 x 21) 7.57 x 7.94 (19 x 20) 10.25 x 10.25 (26 x 26) 7.57 x 9.94 (19 x 25) 14.25 x10.625 (36 x 26) 11.57 x 9.94 (29 x 25) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26) 13.57 x 9.94 (34 x 25) 16.25 x 10.25 (41 x 26) 13.57 x 9.94 (34 x 25)
Example: FCS-1284-D-P Stainless steel flush-covered enclosure with locking door and perf panel
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
247
ENCLOSURES
CONTROL CABINET VERSA-CAB
DESCRIPTION
The Versa-Cab Control Cabinet is designed to make mounting electrical and pneumatic components easy. The front panel is aluminum bonded to plywood, which makes it simple to cut a large hole with just a saw. Large meters, gauges, indicators, and operator interface devices can be mounted easily. If a change is needed later, replacement panels can be ordered. FEATURES
NEW!
Cabinet Model No. VC-1812 VC-2418 VC-2424 VC-3024 VC-3624 VC-4230 VC-4836 Dimensions 18" x 12" x 9.5" 24" x 18" x 9.5" 24" x 24" x 9.5" 30" x 24" x 9.5" 36" x 24" x 9.5" 42" x 30" x 9.5" 48" x 36" x 9.5" Dimensions 16.5" x 10.5" 22.5" x 16.5" 22.5" x 22.5" 28.5" x 22.5" 34.5" x 22.5" 40.5" x 28.5" 46.5" x 34.5" Dimensions 16.5" x 10.5" 22.5" x 16.5" 22.5" x 22.5" 28.5" x 22.5" 34.5" x 22.5" 40.5" x 28.5" 46.5" x 34.5" Weight Lbs. 17.0 25 30 35 40 53 72 Weight Lbs. 2.1 4.2 5.6 7 8.4 12.2 16.8 Weight Lbs. 2.1 4.2 5.6 7 8.4 12.2 16.8 Replacement Face Panels VC-1812-FP VC-2418-FP VC-2424-FP VC-3024-FP VC-3624-FP VC-4230-FP VC-4836-FP Replacement Back Panels VC-1812-BP VC-2418-BP VC-2424-BP VC-3024-BP VC-3624-BP VC-4230-BP VC-4836-BP
ENCLOSURES
Direct replacement for M8100 cabinets Extruded aluminum alloy frame Removable face and back panels Panels consist of aluminum bonded to both sides of plywood core Face panel has gray baked enamel nish Piano hinge on the door Cabinet can be mounted so door opens left or right Includes key-lock latch UL Listed Type 1, le #E218484
DIMENSIONS
D W
248
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
ENCLOSURES
SAGINAW NEMA 1 ENCLOSURES SCE SERIES SMALL
The SCE Series small enclosures are designed to house electrical controls, instruments and components in areas that do not require oil, water and dust tight protection.
FEATURES NEMA 1 construction 0.063 & 0.075 carbon steel depending on its size Spot weld construction Standoffs provided for mounting optional panels Butt hinge Doors open 180 degrees Black quarter turn latches Latches are opened or closed with a screwdriver Ground stud on door Mounting holes in back of enclosure Subpanel mounting hardware ANSI-61 gray powder coat nish (white sub panel) UL File #E69392
DIMENSIONS
D W
ENCLOSURES
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
REAR VIEW
Model SCE6N604LP SCE8N604LP SCE8N804LP SC8N0806LP SCE10N804LP SCE10N806LP SCE10N1004LP SCE10N1006LP SCE12N1004LP SCE12N1006LP SCE12N1204LP SCE12N1206LP SCE12N1208LP SCE14N1204LP SCE14N1206LP SCE14N1208LP SCE16N1206LP SCE16N1208LP SCE16N1606LP SCE16N1608LP SCE16N2006LP March 2014
Dimensions in (cm) H xW x D 6 x 6 x 4 (15 x 15 x 10) 8 x 6 x 4 (20 x 15 x 10) 8 x 8 x 4 (20 x 20 x10) 8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 10 x 8 x 4 (25 x 20 x10) 10 x 8 x 6 (25 x 20 x15) 10 x 10 x 4 (25 x 25 x 10) 10 x 10 x 6 (25 x 25 x 15) 12 x 10 x 4 (30 x 25 x 10) 12 x 10 x 6 (30 x 25 x 15) 12 x 12 x 4 (30 x 30 x 10) 12 x 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15) 12 x 12 x 8 (30 x 30 x 20) 14 x 12 x 4 (36 x 30 x 10) 14 x 12 x 6 (36 x 30 x 15) 14 x 12 x 8 (36 x 30 x 20) 16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 16 x 12 x 8 (41 x 30 x20) 16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15) 16 x 16 x 8 (41 x 41 x 20) 16 x 20 x 6 (41 x 51 x 15)
Panel Gauge Weight lb (kg) 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 4 (1.8) 5 (2.27 6 (2.72) 7 (3.18) 7 (3.18) 8 (3.630 8.5 (3.86) 9 (4.1) 8 (3.63) 10 (4.54) 9 (4.1) 10 (4.54) 12 (5.45) 10 (4.54) 11 (4.99) 14 (6.36) 11 (4.99) 17 (7.72) 16 (7.26) 20 (9.09) 21 (9.53) Sub Panel SCE6N6MP SCE86MP SCE8N8MP SCE8N8MP SCE10N8MP SCE10N8MP SCE10N10MP SCE10N10MP SCE12N10MP SCE12N10MP SCE12N12MP SCE12N12MP SCE12N12MP SCE14N12MP SCE14N12MP SCE14N12MP SCE16N12MP SCE16N12MP SCE16N16MP SCE16N16MP SCE20N16MP
Sub Panel Dimensions in (cm) 4 x 4 (10 x 10) 6 x 4 (15 x 10) 6 x 6 (15 x 15) 6 x 6 (15 x 15) 8 x 6 (20 x 15) 8 x 6 (20 x 15) 8 x 8 (20 x 20) 8 x 8 (20 x 20) 10 x 8 (25 x 20) 10 x 8 (25 x 20) 10 x 10 (25 x 25) 10 x 10 (25 x 25) 10 x 10 (25 x 25) 12 x 10 (30 x 25) 12 x 10 (30 x 25) 12 x 10 (30 x 25) 14 x 10 (36 x 25) 14 x 10 (36 x 25) 14 x 14 (36 x 36) 14 x 14 (36 x 36) 18 x 14 (46 x 36)
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
249
ENCLOSURES
SAGINAW NEMA 1 ENCLOSURES SCE SERIES LARGE
DESCRIPTION The SCE Series large enclosures are designed to house electrical controls, instruments and components in areas that do not require oil, water and dust tight protection. FEATURES NEMA 1 construction 0.063 & 0.075 carbon steel depending on its size Spot weld construction Standoffs provided for mounting optional panels Butt hinge Doors open 180 degrees Black quarter turn latches Latches are opened or closed with a screwdriver Ground stud on door Mounting holes in back of enclosure Subpanel mounting hardware ANSI-61 gray powder coat nish (white sub panel)
NEW!
W
REAR VIEW
DIMENSIONS
D
ENCLOSURES
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
Model SCE20N1606LP SCE20N1608LP SCE20N2006LP SCE20N2008LP SCE20N2010LP SCE24N1606LP SCE24N2006LP SCE24N2008LP SCE24N2010LP SCE24N2406LP SCE24N2408LP SCE24N2412LP SCE30N2406LP SCE30N2408LP SCE30N2412LP SCE30N3008LP SCE36N2406LP SCE36N2408LP SCE36N2412LP SCE36N3006LP SCE36N3008LP SCE36N3012LP Dimensions in (cm) H xW x D 20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15) 20 x 16 x 8 (51 x 41 x 15) 20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15) 20 x 20 x 8 (51 x 51 x 20) 20 x 20 x 10 (51 x 51 x 25) 24 x 16 x 6 (61 x 41 x 15) 24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 51 x 15) 24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20) 24 x 20 x 10 (61 x 51 x 25) 24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15) 24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20) 24 x 24 x 12 (61 x 61 x 30) 30 x 24 x 6 (76 x 61 x 15) 30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20) 30 x 24 x 12 (76 x 61 x 30) 30 x 30 x 8 (76 x 76 x 20) 36 x 24 x 6 (91 x 61 x 15) 36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20) 36 x 24 x 12 (91 x 61 x 30) 36 x 30 x 6 (91 x 76 x 15) 36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20) 36 x 30 x 12 (91 x 76 x 30) Panel Gauge Weight lb (kg) 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 21 (9.5) 24 (10.9) 25 (11.4) 28 (12.7) 31 (14.1) 27 (12.3) 32 (14.5) 33 (15) 35 (16) 41 (19) 46 (21) 53 (24.1) 51 (23.2) 54 (24.5) 61 (27.7) 60 (27.2) 54 (24.5) 62 (28) 73 (33) 68 (38.9) 69 (31.3) 83 (37.7) Sub Panel SCE20N16MP SCE20N16MP SCE20N20MP SCE20N20MP SCE20N20MP SCE24N16MP SCE24N20MP SCE24N20MP SCE24N20MP SCE24N24MP SCE24N24MP SCE24N24MP SCE30N24MP SCE30N24MP SCE30N24MP SCE30N30MP SCE36N24MP SCE36N24MP SCE36N24MP SCE36N30MP SCE36N30MP SCE36N30MP Sub Panel Dimensions in (cm) 18 x 14 (46 x 36) 18 x 14 (46 x 36) 18 X 18 (46 X 46) 18 X 18 (46 X 46) 18 X 18 (46 X 46) 22 X 14 (56 X 36) 22 X 18 (56 X 46) 22 X 18 (56 X 46) 22 X 18 (56 X 46) 22 X 22 (56 X 56) 22 X 22 (56 X 56) 22 X 22 (56 X 56) 28 X 22 (71 X 56) 28 X 22 (71 X 56) 28 X 22 (71 X 56) 28 X 28 (71 X 71) 34 X 22 (86 X 56) 34 X 22 (86 X 56) 34 X 22 (86 X 56) 34 X 28 (86 X 71) 34 X 28 (86 X 71) 34 X 28 (86 X 71) March 2014
250
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!

ENCLOSURES
SIEMENS NEMA 1 ENCLOSURES 567 SERIES
The 567 Series includes attractive, economical NEMA 1 enclosures designed to house controls and instruments in areas which do not require oil-tight and dust-tight ratings. The medium and large models are over 9 inches deep allowing the installation of larger components. The 567 Series enclosures are furnished with a perforated metal subpanel for easy mounting of components. No drilling or layout. Just set the control components on the panel and attach with #7 or #8 self-tapping screws in the prepunched holes. The 567 Series is UL listed and CSA approved.
NEMA 1 enclosure Medium and Large are over 9 inches deep Removeable door hinged on left or right side Attractive gray nish Key lock, two keys, and an attractive powder-coated 16 gauge perf panel furnished Mounting of control components simplied with perf panel UL File #E111475, CSA approved 1/2" to 2" knockouts on sides, top and bottom
ENCLOSURES
DIMENSIONS
W
Door
H
Door lock Mounting plate
Model 567-351 567-352 567-353 Size Small Medium Large Dimensions 19.5" H x 16.38" W x 5.75" D (49.5 x 41.6 x 14.6 cm) 24.31" H x 24.38" W x 9.38" D (61.7 x 61.9 x 23.8 cm) 36.5" H x 24.38" W x 9.38" D (92.7 x 61.9 x 23.8 cm) Materials 16-ga steel 16-ga steel 14-ga steel Weight 20.0 lb (9 kg) 39.0 lb (18 kg) 72.0 lb (33 kg) Perf Panel 14.5" x 14.75" (36.8 x 37.5 cm) 19.25" x 23.0" (48.9 x 58.4 cm) 31.5" x 22.0" (80.0 x 55.9 cm) Mounting Keyholes 16.5" x 13.5" (41.9 x 34.3 cm) 21" x 16" (53.3 x 40.6 cm) 33.5" x 16.75" (85.1 x 42.5 cm)
ACCESSORIES 567-225 Key & Lock for 567 enclosures
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
251
ENCLOSURES
DESCRIPTION Hoffman A-HCLO Series NEMA 3R lift-off hinged cover enclosures house controls and instruments and provide protection in outdoor installations against rain, sleet, and snow, or indoors against dripping water.
HOFFMAN NEMA 3R ENCLOSURES AND PANELS A-HCLO SERIES
FEATURES
Drip-shield top and seam-free sides, front, and back Galvanized steel lift-off hinges with stainless steel pins Cover fastened securely with draw-pull catches Provisions for padlocking on each draw-pull catch Embossed mounting holes on back of enclosure Gasketing along top of door ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coating inside and out over galvanized steel Optional steel panels with white nish Fans, heaters, louvers, and windows available UL listed, File #E27567 CSA certied, File #LL42184 One-year warranty
NEW!
13.0 (33.0)
1.13 (2.90)
ENCLOSURES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4.0 (10.16)
1.06 (2.70)
Optional external mounting foot kit Mounting holes 0.28 (0.71) dia
Optional external mounting foot kit Mounting holes 0.28 (0.71) dia
16-gauge
16- and 14gauge
14-gauge
0.53 (1.35) Flange width, typical Knockout for optional panel mounting kit
1.06 (2.70)
Knockout for optional panel mounting kit
1.13 (2.90)
ENCLOSURE MODEL A-8R64HCLO A-8R86HCLO A-10R86HCLO A-12R106HCLO A-12R126HCLO A-16R126HCLO A-16R166HCLO A-20R166HCLO A-20R208HCLO A-24R208HCLO A-24R248HCLO A-30R248HCLO DIMENSIONS** A x B x C in (cm) 8 x 6 x 4 (20 x 15 x 10) 8 x 8 x 6 (20 x 20 x 15) 10 x 8 x 6 (25 x 20 x 15) 12 x 10 x 6 (30 x 25 x 15) 12 x 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15) 16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15) 20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15) 20 x 20 x 8 (51 x 51 x 20) 24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20) 24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20) 30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20) SOLID MOUNTING BODY WEIGHT PANEL* MODEL D GAUGE lb (kg) 16 9.12 (23) 4.9 (2.2) A-6P6 16 9.12 (23) 6.8 (3.1) A-8P6 16 11.12 (28) 8.2 (3.7) A-8P8 16 13.12 (33) 11 (5.0) A-10P10 16 13.12 (33) 11.8 (5.4) A-12P10 16 17.12 (43) 14.6 (6.6) A-14P12 14 17.31 (44) 18.2 (8.3) A-16P16 14 21.31 (54) 21.5 (9.8) A-20P16 14 21.31 (54) 30.7 (13.9) A-20P20 14 25.31 (64) 36 (16.3) A-24P20 14 25.31 (64) 45 (20.4) A-24P24 14 31.31 (80) 54 (24.5) A-30P24 DIMENSIONS GAUGE WEIGHT lb (kg) H x W in (cm) 4.88 x 4.88 (12 x 12) 0.5 (0.32) 14 6.75 x 4.88 (17 x 12) 0.7 (0.3) 14 6.75 x 6.88 (17 x 17.5) 1 (0.5) 14 8.75 x 8.88 (22 x 22.5) 1.7 (0.8) 14 10.75 x 8.88 (27 x 22.5) 2.1 (0.95) 14 12.75 x 10.88 (32 x 28) 3 (1.4) 14 13 x 13 (33 x 33) 5.2 (2.4) 12 17 x 13 (43 x 33) 6.7 (3) 12 17 x 17 (43 x 43) 9 (4.1) 12 21 x 17 (53 x 43) 11 (5) 12 21 x 21 (53 x 53) 14 (6.4) 12 27 x 21 (69 x 53) 18.7 (8.5) 12
Panel Mounting Kit A-PMK3RL016 is required. Order separately. Panel Mounting Kit A-PMK3RL014 is required. Order separately.
* Order panels separately
(Includes panel mounting kit) ** Enclosures with B=8 or less have one latch
Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel.
A-MFK3RL014 A-MFK3RL016
RELATED PRODUCTS 14-gauge enclosure mounting foot kit 16-gauge enclosure mounting foot kit
252
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

ENCLOSURES
SAGINAW NEMA 3R ENCLOSURES AND PANELS R-LP SERIES
Saginaw R-LP Series NEMA 3R lift-off hinged cover enclosures house controls and instruments and provide protection in outdoor installations against rain, sleet, and snow, or indoors against dripping water.
Drip-shield top and seam-free sides, front, and back Galvanized steel lift-off hinges with stainless steel pins Cover fastened securely with draw-pull catches Provisions for padlocking on each draw-pull catch ANSI 61 gray polyester-powder coating inside and out over galvanized steel Optional steel panels with white nish UL listed, File #E69392 CSA certied One-year warranty
R-LP Series
ENCLOSURES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.06 (2.70)
16-gauge
16- and 14gauge
1.06 (2.70)
(OVERALL) DIMENSIONS BODY A x B x C in (cm) GAUGE 16 12 x 12.3 x 7.7 (30.5 x 31.2 x 19.6) 16 16 x 12.3 x 7.7 (40.6 x 31.2 x 19.6) 16 20 x 16.3 x 7.7 (50.8 x 41.4 x 19.6) 16 24 x 20.3 x 9.7 (61 x 51.6 x 24.6) 16 30 x 24.3 x 9.7 (76.2 x 61.7 x 24.6) SOLID PANEL MODEL SCE12DLP12 SCE16P12 SCE20P16 SCE24P20 SCE30P24
ENCLOSURE MODEL SCE12R1206LP SCE16R1206LP SCE20R1606LP SCE24R2008LP SCE30R2408LP
WEIGHT lb (kg) 15 16 25 32 60
DIMENSIONS H x W in (cm) 9 x 9 (22.9 x 22.9) 13 x 9 (33 x 22.9) 17 x 13 (43.2 x 33) 21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2) 27 x 21 (68.6 x 53.3)
WEIGHT lb (kg) 3 4 8 14 22
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
253
NEW! NEW!
ENCLOSURES
HOFFMAN NEMA 3R ENCLOSURE WITH FAN WF SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The WF Series enclosures have a forced-air ventilation system for cooling drives or other heat producing equipment in applications that require outdoor protection. The enclosures have a white polyester powder nish that will reduce the solar heat load by up to 70% compared to a gray enclosure. An integrated solar shield on the top adds additional solar heat reduction. The integral fan and vent placement optimizes heat removal, by drawing in from the bottom and exhausting at the top. Gasketing and the lter protects against contaminants entering the enclosure. An adjustable thermostat (70 to 140 F) brings on the fan when needed.
FEATURES
Active cooling ventilation system with factory-installed fan and lter (115 VAC) Terminal power connection for fan Easy access washable expanded metal lter Front hood exhaust and intake saves interior space Quarter turn latch with padlock attachment Collar studs for mounting back panel Largest two sizes constructed of aluminum to reduce weight Grounding provision on door and body DAH series heaters can be added to raise the temperature and prevent condensation 16 and 14 gauge galvanized steel UL listed File #E61997 One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
.97 (2.50)
ENCLOSURES
B H
.34 x .16 Mounting slot (Typical)
5.78 (14.7) 4.00 (10.2)
0.14 (0.4)
E G A
Panel (order separately)
1.20 (30.0)
C
Door vented hood
0.89 (23.0)
D
B - 2.94 (7.50)
4.68 (11.9)
6.29 (16.0)
3.00 (7.60) Door bonding provision
1.86 (4.70)
1.90 (4.80)
2.37 2.38 (6.0) (6.0) Body grounding stud
Sub Panel Mounting Drive Dimensions A x B Weight lb Sub Panel Dimensions D Holes G x H in HP x C in (mm) (kg) x E in (mm) (mm) 3 10 25 40 75 100 29 x 24 x 12 (737 x 610 x 305) 35 x 24 x 12 (889 x 610 x 305) 41 x 24 x 12 (1041 x 610 x 305) 47 x 24 x 14 (1194 x 610 x 356) 55 x 36 x 16 (1397 x 914 x 406) 67 x 36 x 16 (1702 x 914 x 706) 106 (48.1) 111 (50.3) 124 (56.2) 135 (61.2) 140 (63.5) 165 (74.8) A-24P24 A-30P24 A-36P24 A-42P24 A-48P36 A-60P36 21 x 21 (533 x 533) 27 x 21 (686 x 533) 33 x 21 (838 x 533) 39 x 21 (991 x 533) 45 x 33 (1143 x 838) 57 x 33 (1448 x 838) 29.94 x 13 (760 x 330) 35.94 x 13 (913 x 330) 41.94 x 13 (1065 x 330) 47.94 x 13 (1218 x 330) 55.94 x 27 (1421 x 686) 67.94 x 27 (1726 x 686) Weight Heater Part lb (kg) number 14 (6.4) 18 (8.2) 22 (10.0) 27 (12.2) 46 (20.9) 59 (26.8) DAH2001A DAH2001A DAH2001A DAH2001A DAH4001B DAH4001B
Model WF3LP WF10LP WF25LP WF40LP WF75LP WF100LP
Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel.
254
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ENCLOSURE MODEL SCE29VR2412 SCE35VR2412 SCE41VR2412 SCE47VR2412 SCE53VR2412 SCE65VR2412 DRIVE HP 3 10 25 40 75 100
ENCLOSURES
SAGINAW NEMA 3R ENCLOSURE WITH FAN VR SERIES
The VR Series enclosures have a forced-air ventilation system for cooling drives or other heat-producing equipment in applications that require outdoor protection. The enclosures have a white polyester powder nish that will reduce the solar heat load by up to 70% compared to a gray enclosure. An integrated solar shield on the top adds additional solar heat reduction. The integral fan and vent placement optimizes heat removal, by drawing in from the bottom and exhausting at the top. Gasketing and the lter protects against contaminants entering the enclosure. An adjustable thermostat (50 to 90 F) brings on the fan when needed.
Active cooling ventilation system with factory-installed fan and lter (115 VAC) Terminal power connection for fan Front hood exhaust and intake saves interior space Quarter turn latch with padlock attachment Grounding provision on enclosure 14 gauge galvanized steel UL listed, File #E69392 One-year warranty
VR Series
)
ENCLOSURES
DIMENSIONS
B
5.2 (14.5)
in (cm)
E A
Panel (order separately) Door vented hood
13.25 (33.7)
3.00 (7.60)
1.86 (4.70)
SUB PANEL WEIGHT lb (kg) 125 (56.7) 131 (59.4) 144 (65.3) 160 (72.6) 221 (100.2) 244 (110.7) MODEL SCE24P24 SCE30P24 SCE36P24 SCE42P24 SCE48P36 SCE60P36 DIMENSIONS D x E in (mm) 21 x 21 (533 x 533) 27 x 21 (696 x 533) 33 x 21 (838 x 533) 39 x 21 (911 x 533) 45 x 33 (1143 x 838) 57 x 33 (1447 x 838) WEIGHT lb (kg) 17 (7.7) 22 (10) 27 (12.2) 31 (14.1) 55 (25) 58 (26.3)
DIMENSIONS A x B x C in (mm) 29 x 24 x 12 (737 x 610 x 305) 35 x 24 x 12 (889 x 610 x 305) 41 x 24 x 12 (1041 x 610 x 305) 47 x 24 x 14 (1194 x 610 x 356) 53 x 36 x 16 (1346 x 914 x 906) 65 x 36 x 16 (1651 x 914 x 906)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
255
ENCLOSURES
DESCRIPTION
Hoffman A-ALP and A-BLP Series NEMA 4 enclosures are designed to house electrical and pneumatic controls, instruments, and components. These enclosures provide protection from windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water.
)
HOFFMAN NEMA 4 ENCLOSURES AND PANELS A-ALP, A-BLP SERIES
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.00 (7.6)
FEATURES
Continuously welded or ground-smooth seam, no holes or knockouts Seamless, watertight foam gasket for tight seal Hasp and staple for padlocking Removable door Data pocket included Collar studs provided for mounting optional subpanels Steel subpanels available Fans, heaters, louvers, and windows available UL listed File #E61997 CSA certied, File #LR42186 One-year warranty
B
Mounting holes
ENCLOSURES
B-1.84 (4.67) Door stiffener used on panels with A dimensions of A 42" and larger A-1.81 (4.60)
Door clamp Padlocking hasp and staple
Data pocket
3.38 (8.58)
Two clamps 30" (76.20) or larger
ENCLOSURE* DIMENSIONS A x B x C in (cm) A-16H12ALP 16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) A-16H16ALP 16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15) A-20H16ALP 20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15) A-20H20ALP 20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15) A-24H20ALP 24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 51 x 15) A-24H24ALP 24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15) A-30H24ALP 30 x 24 x 6 (76 x 61 x 15) A-36H24ALP 36 x 24 x 6 (91 x 61 x 15) A-16H12BLP 16 x 12 x 8 (41 x 30 x 20) A-20H16BLP 20 x 16 x 8 (51 x 41 x 20) A-20H20BLP 20 x 20 x 8 (51 x 51 x 20) A-24H20BLP 24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20) A-24H24BLP 24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 28) A-30H24BLP 30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20) A-36H24BLP 36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20) A-36H30BLP 36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20) Call Kele for sizes other than those listed. MODEL BODY GAUGE 16 16 16 16 16 16 14 14 16 16 16 16 16 14 14 14 WEIGHT lb (kg) 17.9 (8.1) 24.4 (11.1) 25.5 (11.6) 29.7 (13.5) 34.1 (15.5) 39 (17.7) 54 (24.5) 61 (27.7) 19.8 (9.0) 27.8 (12.6) 32.5 (14.7) 40.7 (18.5) 43 (19.5) 58 (26.3) 67.0 (30.4) 80 (36.3) MODEL A-16P12 A-16P16 A-20P16 A-20P20 A-24P20 A-24P24 A-30P24 A-36P24 A-16P12 A-20P16 A-20P20 A-24P20 A-24P24 A-30P24 A-36P24 A-36P30 SOLID STEEL SUBPANEL** GAUGE 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
DIMENSIONS A x B in (cm) 13 x 9 (33 x 23) 13 x 13 (33 x 33) 17 x 13 (43 x 33) 17 x 17 (43 x 43) 21 x 17 (53 x 43) 21 x 21 (53 x 53) 27 x 21 (69 x 53) 33 x 21 (83 x 53) 13 x 9 (33 x 23) 17 x 13 (43 x 33) 17 x 17 (43 x 43) 21 x 17 (53 x 43) 21 x 21 (53 x 53) 27 x 21 (69 x 53) 33 x 21 (83 x 53) 33 x 27 (83 x 69)
WEIGHT lb (kg) 3.7 (1.7) 5.2 (2.4) 6.9 (3.1) 8.9 (4.0) 11 (5.0) 14 (6.4) 18.7 (8.5) 22.0 (10.0) 3.7 (1.7) 6.9 (3.2) 8.9 (4.0) 11 (5.0) 14 (6.4) 18.7 (8.5) 22.0 (10.0) 29.6 (13.4)
* Add a P after enclosure number to include a solid steel subpanel. Perf panels are not available for this product. ** Order panels separately.
256
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ENCLOSURE* MODEL A-16H1206SSLP A-16H1606SSLP A-20H1606SSLP A-20H2006SSLP A-24H2008SSLP A-24H2408SSLP A-30H2408SSLP A-30H3008SSLP A-36H2408SSLP A-36H3008SSLP DIMENSIONS A x B x C in (cm) 16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15) 20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15) 20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15) 24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20) 24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20) 30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20) 30 x 30 x 8 (76 x 76 x 20) 36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20) 36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20) BODY GAUGE 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
ENCLOSURES
HOFFMAN NEMA 4X STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURES AND PANELS A-SSLP SERIES
Hoffman A-SSPL Series NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures house electrical and pneumatic controls, instruments, and components. These enclosures provide protection from corrosion, windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water.
14 gauge type 304 stainless Continuously welded or ground-smooth seam, no holes or knockouts Seamless, watertight foam gasket for tight seal Hasp and staple for padlocking Removable door Data pocket included Collar studs provided for mounting optional subpanels Steel or stainless steel subpanels available Fans, heaters, louvers, and windows available UL listed, File #E61997 CSA certied, File #LR42186 One-year warranty
ENCLOSURES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.00 (7.6)
B
Mounting holes
B - 1.84 (4.67)
A
Data pocket
A - 1.81 (4.60)
Two clamps 30" (76.20) or larger
SUBPANEL** SOLID STAINLESS STEEL WEIGHT lb (kg) 22.0 (10.0) 25.0 (11.3) 32.0 (14.5) 33.4 (15.2) 45.2 (20.5) 51.4 (23.3) 62.0 (28.1) 72.0 (32.7) 65.0 (29.5) 88.0 (39.9) MODEL A-16P12SS6 A-16P16SS6 A-20P16SS6 A-20P20SS6 A-24P20SS6 A-24P24SS6 A-30P24SS6 A-30P30SS6 A-36P24SS6 A-36P30SS6 DIMENSIONS A x B in (cm) 13 x 9 (33 x 23) 13 x 13 (33 x 33) 17 x 13 (43 x 33) 17 x 17 (43 x 43) 21 x 17 (53 x 43) 21 x 21 (53 x 53) 27 x 21 (69 x 53) 27 x 27 (69 x 69) 33 x 21 (83 x 53) 33 x 27 (83 x 69) WEIGHT lb (kg) 3.7 (1.7) 5.3 (2.4) 7.0 (3.2) 10.0 (4.5) 11.3 (5.1) 13.9 (6.3) 18.0 (8.2) 24.0 (10.9) 22.0 (10.0) 27.0 (12.2) MODEL A-16P12 A-16P16 A-20P16 A-20P20 A-24P20 A-24P24 A-30P24 A-30P30 A-36P24 A-36P30 SOLID STEEL DIMENSIONS A x B in (cm) 13 x 9 (33 x 23) 13 x 13 (33 x 33) 17 x 13 (43 x 33) 17 x 17 (43 x 43) 21 x 17 (53 x 43) 21 x 21 (53 x 53) 27 x 21 (69 x 53) 27 x 27 (69 x 69) 33 x 21 (83 x 53) 33 x 27 (83 x 69) WEIGHT lb (kg) 3.6 (1.6) 5.3 (2.4) 7.0 (3.2) 10.0 (4.5) 11.0 (5.0) 13.0 (5.9) 18.0 (8.2) 22.0 (10.0) 23.0 (10.4) 27.0 (12.2)
Call Kele for sizes other than those listed.
* Add an S after enclosure number to include a stainless steel subpanel; add a P after enclosure number to include a solid steel subpanel. ** Order panels separately. Add PF to end of part number to order optional perf panel.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
257
ENCLOSURES
DESCRIPTION
Saginaw H-LP Series NEMA 4 enclosures are designed to house electrical and pneumatic controls, instruments, and components. These enclosures provide protection from windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water.
SAGINAW NEMA 4 ENCLOSURES AND PANELS H-LP SERIES
NEW!
)
FEATURES
Continuously welded or ground-smooth seam, no holes or knockouts Seamless, watertight foam gasket for tight seal Hasp and staple for padlocking Collar studs provided for mounting optional subpanels Steel subpanels available UL listed File #E69392 CSA certied One-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
B
Mounting holes
ENCLOSURES
B-1.84 (4.67) A-1.81 (4.60)
ENCLOSURE MODEL SCE16H1206LP SCE16H1208LP SCE16H1606LP SCE20H1606LP SCE20H1608LP SCE20H2006LP SCE20H2008LP SCE24H2006LP SCE24H2008LP SCE24H2406LP SCE24H2408LP SCE30H2406LP SCE30H2408LP SCE30H3008LP SCE36H2406LP SCE36H2408LP SCE36H3008LP DIMENSIONS A x B x C in (cm) 16 x 12 x 6 (40.7 x 30.5 x 15.2) 16 x 12 x 8 (40.7 x 30.5 x 20.3) 16 x 16 x 6 (40.6 x 40.6 x 15.2) 20 x 16 x 6 (50.8 x 40.6 x 15.2) 20 x 16 x 8 (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 20 x 20 x 6 (50.8 x 50.8 x 15.2) 20 x 20 x 8 (50.8 x 50.8 x 20.3) 24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 50.8 x 15.2) 24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 50.8 x 20.3) 24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15.2) 24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20.3) 30 x 24 x 6 (76.2 x 61 x 15.2) 30 x 24 x 8 (76.2 x 61 x 20.3) 30 x 30 x 8 (76.2 x 76.2 x 20.3) 36 x 24 x 6 (91.4 x 61 x 15.2) 36 x 24 x 8 (91.4 x 61 x 20.3) 36 x 30 x 8 (91.4 x 76.2 x 20.3) WEIGHT lb (kg) 21 (9.5) 22 (10) 27 (12.3) 30 (13.6) 31 (14.1) 34 (15.5) 33 (15) 39 (17.7) 43 (19.5) 43 (19.5) 50 (22.7) 56 (25.5) 61 (27.7) 74 (33.6) 63 (28.6) 65 (29.5) 84 (38.2) MODEL SCE16P12 SCE16P12 SCE16P16 SCE20P16 SCE20P16 SCE20P20 SCE20P20 SCE24P20 SCE24P20 SCE24P24 SCE24P24 SCE30P24 SCE30P24 SCE30P30 SCE36P24 SCE36P24 SCE36P30 SOLID STEEL PANEL DIMENSIONS A x B in (cm) 13 x 9 (33 x 22.9) 13 x 9 (33 x 22.9) 13 x 13 (33 x 33) 17 x 13 (43.2 x 33) 17 x 13 (43.2 x 33) 17 x 17 (43.2 x 43.2) 17 x 17 (43.2 x 43.2) 21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2) 21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2) 21 x 21 (53.3 x 53.3) 21 x 21 (53.3 x 53.3) 27 x 21 (68.6 x 53.3) 27 x 21 (68.6 x 53.3) 27 x 27 (68.6 x 68.6) 33 x 21 (83.8 x 53.3) 33 x 21 (83.8 x 53.3.) 33 x 27 (83.8 x 65.6) WEIGHT lb (kg) 4 (1.8) 4 (1.8) 6 (2.7) 8 (3.6) 8 (3.6) 10 (4.5) 10 (4.5) 14 (6.4) 14 (6.4) 17 (7.7) 17 (7.7) 22 (10) 22 (10) 28 (12.7) 27 (12.3) 27 (12.3) 34 (15.5)
258
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ENCLOSURE MODEL SCE16H1206SSLP SCE16H1606SSLP SCE20H1606SSLP SCE20H2006SSLP SCE24H1608SSLP SCE24H2006SSLP SCE24H2008SSLP SCE24H2408SSLP SCE30H2408SSLP SCE30H3008SSLP SCE36H2408SSLP SCE36H3008SSLP
ENCLOSURES
SAGINAW NEMA 4X STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURES AND PANELS H-SSLP SERIES
Saginaw H-SSLP Series NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures house electrical and pneumatic controls, instruments, and components. These enclosures provide protection from corrosion, windblown dust and rain, splashing water, and hose-directed water.
14 gauge type 304 stainless Continuously welded or ground-smooth seam, no holes or knockouts Seamless, watertight foam gasket for tight seal Hasp and staple for padlocking Data pocket included Collar studs provided for mounting optional subpanels Steel subpanels available UL listed, File #E69392 CSA certied One-year warranty
5
H-SSLP Series
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
B
Mounting holes
ENCLOSURES
Door clamp Padlocking hasp and staple Data pocket
SOLID STEEL PANEL WEIGHT lb (kg) 23 (10.5) 26 (11.8) 30 (13.6) 35 (15.9) 39 (17.7) 40 (18.2) 44 (20) 50 (22.7) 60 (27.3) 74 (33.6) 66 (30) 87 (39.5) MODEL SCE16P12 SCE16P16 SCE20P16 SCE20P20 SCE24P16 SCE24P20 SCE24P20 SCE24P24 SCE30P24 SCE30P30 SCE36P24 SCE36P30 DIMENSIONS A x B in (cm) 13 x 9 (33 x 22.9) 13 x 13 (33 x 33) 17 x 13 (43.2 x 33) 17 x 17 (43.2 x 43.2) 21 x 13 (53.3 x 33) 21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2) 21 x 17 (53.3 x 43.2) 21 x 21 (53.3 x 53.3) 27 x 21 (68.6 x 53.3) 27 x 27 (68.6 x 68.6) 33 x 21 (83.8 x 53.3) 33 x 27 (83.8 x 65.6) WEIGHT lb (kg) 4 (1.8) 6 (2.7) 8 (3.6) 10 (4.5) 11 (5) 14 (6.4) 14 (6.4) 17 (7.7) 22 (10) 28 (12.7) 27 (12.3) 34 (15.5)
DIMENSIONS A x B x C in (cm) 16 x 12 x 6 (40.7 x 30.5 x 15.2) 16 x 16 x 6 (40.6 x 40.6 x 15.2) 20 x 16 x 6 (50.8 x 40.6 x 15.2) 20 x 20 x 6 (50.8 x 50.8 x 15.2) 24 x 16 x 8 (61 x 40.6 x 20.3) 24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 50.8 x 15.2) 24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 50.8 x 20.3) 24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20.3) 30 x 24 x 8 (76.2 x 61 x 20.3) 30 x 30 x 8 (76.2 x 76.2 x 20.3) 36 x 24 x 8 (91.4 x 61 x 20.3) 36 x 30 x 8 (91.4 x 76.2 x 20.3)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
259
ENCLOSURES
DESCRIPTION
POLYPRO TYPE 4X NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES POLYPRO SERIES
POLYPRO polyester enclosures perform exceptionally well in applications where harsh chemicals, weather extremes and corrosive environments demand toughness from a lightweight enclosure. Providing excellent ultraviolet protection and a tight environmental seal, these versatile, feature-rich enclosures are also recyclable.
FEATURES
Provides excellent chemical resistance to a broad range of solvents, alkalis and acids Resists cracking and provides excellent impact resistance Lighter-weight than berglass Easy, dustless in-eld modications using standard tools Overlapping tongue-and-groove raised cover and gasket provide a secure Type 4X seal Removable snap-hinge cover allows for easy access to cover and body for modications Molded layout grid on inside of body and solid covers assists with component mounting Molded-in embosses for rear panel mounting Optional cover screws included with all models Internal rail system and adjustable panel blocks allow for panel height adjustment and installation of multiple panels Scratch-resistant polycarbonate windows Standard models include body and cover,two mounting feet, two latch assemblies with optional cover screws and hardware (adjustable panel blocks and panels sold separately) Non-glass-lled polyester material offers superior UV resistance; eliminates berbloom associated with berglass
NEW!
Aluminum Swing-Out Panels
ENCLOSURES
DIMENSIONS
W B N Optional Window C
.28 7 mm
L A M
F
.64 16 mm
.75 19 mm .25 x .38 6 mm 10 mm (Slot 6X) .13 A 12 3 mm 305 mm .15 A 12 4 mm 305 mm
X H
.75 19 mm
Section X-X
ORDERING INFORMATION (Aluminum Swing-Out Panels)
E D G J Y Y
Model
D x E (in.) 5.00 x 3.62 5.00 x 5.62 7.00 x 5.62 7.00 x 7.62 9.00 x 7.62 9.00 x 9.62 11.00 x 9.62 13.00 x 11.62 15.00 x 13.62 17.00 x 15.62
D x E (mm) 127 x 92 127 x 143 178 x 143 178 x 194 229 x 194 229 x 244 279 x 244 330 x 295 381 x 346 432 x 397
1.37 35 mm
Section Y-Y
87825133
A64PSWPNL A66PSWPNL A86PSWPNL A88PSWPNL A108PSWPNL A1010PSWPNL A1210PSWPNL A1412PSWPNL A1614PSWPNL A1816PSWPNL
260
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ACCESSORIES
ADJUSTABLE PANEL BLOCK KIT
DIMENSIONS MODEL AxBxC in./mm A644PHC 6.12 x 4.12 x 4.38/155 x 105 x 111 A644PHCW 6.12 x 4.12 x 4.38/155 x 105 x 111 A664PHC 6.12 x 6.12 x 4.38/155 x 155 x 111 A664PHCW 6.12 x 6.12 x 4.38/155 x 155 x 111 A864PHC 8.12 x 6.12 x 4.38/206 x 155 x 111 A864PHCW 8.12 x 6.12 x 4.38/206 x 155 x 111 A884PHC 8.12 x 8.12 x 4.38/206 x 206 x 111 A884PHCW 8.12 x 8.12 x 4.38/206 x 206 x 111 A1084PHC 10.12 x 8.12 x 4.38/257 x 155 x 111 A1084PHCW 10.12 x 8.12 x 4.38/257 x 155 x 111 A10106PHC 10.04 x 10.04 x 6.38/255 x 255 x 162 A10106PHCW 10.04 x 10.04 x 6.38/255 x 255 x 162 A12106PHC 12.08 x 10.09 x 6.38/307 x 256 x 162 A12106PHCW 12.08 x 10.09 x 6.38/307 x 256 x 162 A14128PHC 14.02 x 12.01 x 8.35/356 x 305 x 212 A14128PHCW 14.02 x 12.01 x 8.35/356 x 305 x 212 A16148PHC 16.02 x 14.01 x 8.35/407 x 356 x 212 A16148PHCW 16.02 x 14.01 x 8.35/407 x 356 x 212 A181610PHC 17.95 x 15.94 x 10.35/456 x 405 x 263 A181610PHCW 17.95 x 15.94 x 10.35/456 x 405 x 263 F in./mm 4.32/110 4.32/110 4.32/110 4.32/110 4.32/110 4.32/110 4.32/110 4.32/110 4.32/110 4.32/110 6.32/161 6.32/161 6.32/161 6.32/161 8.27/210 8.27/210 8.27/210 8.27/210 10.27/261 10.27/261 G in./mm 7.38/187 7.38/187 7.38/187 7.38/187 9.38/238 9.38/238 9.38/238 9.38/238 11.38/289 11.38/289 11.31/287 11.31/287 13.34/339 13.34/339 15.27/388 15.27/388 17.27/439 17.27/439 19.20/488 19.20/488
ENCLOSURES
POLYPRO TYPE 4X NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES POLYPRO SERIES
STAINLESS STEEL LATCHES (PADLOCKABLE)
ENCLOSURES
POLYESTER MOUNTING BRACKET KITS
HINGE RETAINERS
H in./mm 2.56/65 2.56/65 4.56/116 4.56/116 4.56/116 4.56/116 6.56/167 6.56/167 6.56/167 6.56/167 8.56/217 8.56/217 8.56/217 8.56/217 10.56/268 10.56/268 12.56/319 12.56/319 14.56/370 14.56/370 J in./mm 3.91/99 3.91/99 3.91/99 3.91/99 3.91/99 3.91/99 3.91/99 3.91/99 3.91/99 3.91/99 5.91/150 5.91/150 5.91/150 5.91/150 7.91/201 7.91/201 7.91/201 7.91/201 9.91/252 9.91/252 L in./mm 8.15/207 8.15/207 8.15/207 8.15/207 10.15/258 10.15/258 10.15/258 10.15/258 12.15/309 12.15/309 12.08/307 12.08/307 14.08/358 14.08/358 16.04/407 16.04/407 18.04/458 18.04/458 19.97/507 19.97/507 M in./mm 4.25/108 4.25/108 6.25/159 6.25/159 8.25/210 8.25/210 10.25/260 12.25/311 14.25/362 16.25/413 N in./mm 2.25/57 4.25/108 4.25/108 6.25/159 6.25/159 8.25/210 8.25/210 10.25/260 12.25/311 14.25/362 W in./mm 5.23/133 5.23/133 7.23/184 7.23/184 7.23/184 7.23/184 9.23/234 9.23/234 9.23/234 9.23/234 11.23/285 11.23/285 11.23/285 11.23/285 13.32/338 13.32/338 15.32/389 15.32/389 17.32/440 17.32/440 Cover Type Solid Window Solid Window Solid Window Solid Window Solid Window Solid Window Solid Window Solid Window Solid Window Solid Window Steel Panel A6P4 A6P4 A6P6 A6P6 A8P6 A8P6 A8P8 A8P8 A10P8 A10P8 A10P10 A10P10 A12P10 A12P10 A14P12 A14P12 A16P14 A16P14 A18P16 A18P16 Aluminum Panel A6P4AL A6P4AL A6P6AL A6P6AL A8P6AL A8P6AL A8P8AL A8P8AL A10P8AL A10P8AL A10P10AL A10P10AL A12P10AL A12P10AL A14P12AL A14P12AL A16P14AL A16P14AL A18P16AL A18P16AL Panel Size D x E in./mm 4.88 x 2.88/124 x 73 4.88 x 2.88/124 x 73 4.88 x 4.88/124 x 124 4.88 x 4.88/124 x 124 6.75 x 4.88/171 x 124 6.75 x 4.88/171 x 124 6.75 x 6.88/171 x 175 6.75 x 6.88/171 x 175 8.75 x 6.88/222 x 175 8.75 x 6.88/222 x 175 8.75 x 8.88/222 x 226 8.75 x 8.88/222 x 226 10.75 x 8.88/273 x 226 10.75 x 8.88/273 x 226 12.75 x 10.88/324 x 276 12.75 x 10.88/324 x 276 14.75 x 12.88/375 x 327 14.75 x 12.88/375 x 327 16.75 x 14.88/425 x 378 16.75 x 14.88/425 x 378
Purchase panels separately. Panels are available in aluminum, mild steel, stainless steel, conductive and composite materials.
ACCESSORIES
March 2014 APNLBLK APOLYFT4 APOLYFT6 APOLYFT8 APOLYFT10 APOLYFT12 APOLYFT14 APOLYFT16 AQRLSS6 AHGCLP Adjustable panel block kit, 4/pkg Polyester mounting bracket kit, 4in, 2/pkg Polyester mounting bracket kit, 6in, 2/pkg Polyester mounting bracket kit, 8in, 2/pkg Polyester mounting bracket kit, 10in, 2/pkg Polyester mounting bracket kit, 12in, 2/pkg Polyester mounting bracket kit, 14in, 2/pkg Polyester mounting bracket kit, 16in, 2/pkg Padlockable stainless steel latches, 2/pkg Polypro hinge retainers, 10/pkg
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
261
ENCLOSURES
NEMA 4X FIBERGLASS ENCLOSURES RJ, N SERIES
DESCRIPTION
RJ and N Series NEMA 4X Enclosures are constructed from compression-molded berglass-reinforced polyester. These enclosures offer excellent impact resistance, thermal insulation, and corrosion resistance. Smooth-surfaced, lightweight, nonconductive, and ame-retardant, they can be easily drilled. The gray color is molded in. The RJ Series has captive stainless cover screws with berglass encapsulated heads. The N Series has stainless steel latches. Both types use a stainless steel piano hinge. All are UL listed, File #E64358.
NEW!
RJ N
N C B W F D J H E M A
DIMENSIONS
ENCLOSURES
in (cm)
W F
P J B
Four mounting holes
C O A E H
RJ Series ORDERING INFORMATION

RJ Series
ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS in (cm) MODEL RJ806HW RJ1008HW RJ1210HW RJ1412HW RJ1614HW RJ1816HW INSIDE AxBxC MOUNTING ExF OVERALL HxWxD COVER DIMENSIONS SURFACE AREA O x P in (cm) NO. OF SCREWS 2 2 2 2 2 2
N Series
ALUMINUM PANEL* (OPTIONAL) DIMENSIONS in (cm) MODEL J HxW BP86AL 6.88 x 4.88 (17 x 12) BP108AL 8.88 x 6.88 (23 x 17) BP1210AL 10.88 x 8.88 (28 x 23) BP1412AL 12.88 x 10.88 (33 x 28) BP1614AL 14.88 x 12.88 (38 x 33) BP1816AL 16.88 x 14.88 (43 x 38) 5.49 5.91 5.87 6.87 6.87 9.86
7.73 x 5.74 x 5.95 (20 x 14.5 x 15) 8.88 x 4 (23 x 10) 9.63 x 7.52 x 6.20 (24 x 19 x 16) 7.25 x 5.28 (18 x 13) 9.73 x 7.73 x 6.33 (25 x 20 x 16) 10.75 x 6 (27 x 15) 11.63 x 9.37 x 6.58 (30 x 24 x 17) 9.3 x 7.38 (24 x 18) 11.79 x 9.8 x 6.32 (30 x 25 x 16) 12.75 x 8 (32 x 20) 13.56 x 11.43 x 6.58 (34 x 29 x 17) 11.2 x 9.23 (28 x 23) 13.50 x 11.52 x 7.45 (34 x 29 x 19) 14.63 x 10 (37 x 25)15.5 x 13.38 x 7.69 (39 x 34 x 20) 13.2 x 11.16 (34 x 28) 15.60 x 13.56 x 7.45 (40 x 35 x 19) 16.75 x 12 (43 x 30)17.53 x 15.43 x 7.68 (45 x 39 x 20) 15.2 x 13.24 (39 x 34) 17.69 x 15.69 x 10.31 (45 x 40 x 26)18.88 x 12 (48 x 30)19.63 x 17.48 x 10.63 (50 x 44 x 27) 17.25 x 15.25 (44 x 39)
N Series
ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS in (cm) MODEL COVER DIMENSIONS
ENCLOSURE OPENING NO. OF INSIDE MOUNTING OVERALL M x N in (cm) LATCHES AxBxC ExF HxWxD N20166HWT 19.7 x 16.04 x 7.24 (50 x 41 x 18) 21.5 x 10.12 (56 x 26) 22.75 x 16.87 x 7.77 (58 x 43 x 20) 16.75 x 12.19 (43 x 31) 2 N20168HWT 19.7 x 16.04 x 9.24 (50 x 41 x 24) 21.5 x 10.12 (56 x 26) 22.75 x 16.87 x 10.27 (58 x 43 x 26) 16.75 x 12.19 (43 x 31) 2 N201610HWT 19.7 x 16.04 x 11.24 (50 x 41 x 29) 21.5 x 10.12 (56 x 26) 22.75 x 16.87 x 12.27 (58 x 43 x 31) 16.75 x 12.19 (43 x 31) 2 N242410HWT 24.05 x 24.39 x 11.25 (61 x 62 x 29) 25.75 x 17.87 (65 x 45) 27.0 x 25.24 x 11.9 (69 x 64 x 30) 21.25 x 20.0 (54 x 51) 4 N30208HWT 29.9 x 20.14 x 9.23 (76 x 51 x 24) 31.75 x 14.25 (81 x 36) 32.86 x 20.99 x 9.89 (83 x 53 x 25) 27.0 x 16.5 (69 x 42) 5 N302410HWT 30.46 x 25.47 x 11.27 (77 x 65 x 29) 32.25 x 18.5 (82 x 47) 33.41 x 26.32 x 11.95 (85 x 67 x 30) 27.38 x 21.25 (70 x 54) 5 N36308HWT 36.31 x 31.69 x 9.36 (92 x 80 x 24) 38.13 x 23.88 (97 x 61) 39.31 x 32.5 x 10.05 (100 x 83 x 25) 33.25 x 27.25 (84 x 69) 5 N363010HWT 36.31 x 31.69 x 11.36 (92 x 80 x 29) 38.13 x 23.88 (97 x 61) 39.31 x 32.5 x 12.05 (100 x 83 x 34) 33.25 x 27.25 (84 x 69) 5
STEEL PANEL* (OPTIONAL) DIMENSIONS in (cm) J HxW BP2016CS 17 x 13 (43 x 3) 6.26 BP2016CS 17 x 13 (43 x 3) 8.26 BP2016CS 17 x 13 (43 x 3) 10.26 BP2424CS 21 x 21 (53 x 53) 10.25 BP3020CS 27 x 17 (69 x 43) 8.23 BP3024CS 27 x 21 (69 x 53) 10.27 BP3630CS 33 x 27 (84 x 69) 8.36 BP3630CS 33 x 27 (84 x 69) 10.36 MODEL
* Order optional panels separately Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel.
262
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS
ENCLOSURES
NON-METALLIC BOXES PS SERIES
The versatile PS Series non-metallic boxes are constructed only of ame-resistant materials. Rated for protection mode IP66 (similar to Nema 4X), these boxes give complete protection from dust, water jets, and even temporary ooding. Standard boxes from Kele have knockout side walls, gray bases, and gray covers. Optional tting plates are available for easy mounting of control components inside the PS Series.
PS1313-7
PS1313-7-T
SPECIFICATIONS
Materials Of Construction Base/cover: Polystyrene, impact-resistant, non-ammable Seal: Polyurethane Color Light gray or smoke tinted (T option cover only) Flammability Rating UL94 V2, 1760F (960C) Temperature Rating -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Knockouts 1/2" NPT (2.3 cm), 3/4" NPT (2.9 cm)
ENCLOSURES
BOX MODEL* DIMENSIONS A x B x C in (cm) FITTING PLATE MODEL DIMENSIONS H x W in (cm)
3.54 x 3.54 (9.0 x 9.0) 3.54 x 3.54 (9.0 x 9.0) 4.33 x 4.33 (11.0 x 11.0) 5.91 x 3.54 (15.0 x 9.0) 5.91 x 5.91 (15.0 x 15.0) 8.66 x 5.91 (22.0 x 15.0) PS1111-7 4.33 x 4.33 x 2.60 (11.0 x 11.0 x 6.6) TK1111 PS1111-9 4.33 x 4.33 x 3.54 (11.0 x 11.0 x 9.0) TK1111 PS1313-7 5.11 x 5.11 x 2.95 (13.0 x 13.0 x 7.5) TK1313 PS1811-9 7.09 x 4.33 x 3.54 (18.0 x 11.0 x 9.0) TK1811 PS1818-9 7.09 x 7.09 x 3.54 (18.0 x 18.0 x 9.0) TK1818 PS2518-9 10.0 x 7.09 x 3.54 (25.4 x 18.0 x 9.0) TK2518 * Add T to the end of model number for smoke-tinted transparent cover. Fitting plates are plastic laminate 0.10" (0.25 cm) thick with screws furnished. Call Kele for other box sizes and options.
MISCELLANEOUS ENCLOSURES 14121-000

DESCRIPTION
Model 14121-000 enclosures are constructed of impactresistant polycarbonate and feature a transparent, gasketed cover that keeps out dust and water.
DIMENSIONS
MODEL 14121-000 DESCRIPTION Polycarbonate enclosure with transparent cover, 0.53 lb (0.24 kg)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
263
ENCLOSURES
NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES H AND G SERIES
DESCRIPTION Premium H and G Series enclosures have hinged covers that close with stainless steel latches and are designed for use in any electrical application requiring a sturdy enclosure. FEATURES NEMA 4X Polycarbonite construction Stainless steel latches Light gray gloss nish Gasketed opaque & lockable cover Unique Integra Panel Suspension System Multiple bosses for easy installation of devices or DIN rails UL-50 / c-UL listed, File #E207562
NEW!
G
4.75 (12.07) 4.75 (12.07) 4.75 (12.07) 4.75 (12.07) 4.75 (12.07) 4.75 (12.07) 3.21 (8.15) 3.21 (8.15) 4.75 (12.07) 4.75 (12.07) 6.75 (17.15) 6.75 (17.15) 4.71 (11.96) 4.71 (11.96) 6.71 (17.04) 6.71 (17.04) 6.66 (19.62) 6.66 (19.62) 8.38 (21.29) 8.38 (21.29)
ENCLOSURES
Enclosure Model H6064HLL H6064HCLL H8064HLL H8064HCLL H8084HLL H8084HCLL H10082HLL H10082HCLL H10084HLL H10084HCLL H10086HLL H10086HCLL H12104HLL H12104HCLL H12106HLL H12106HCLL H141206HLL H161407HLL H181610HLL G242410
Weight 2.0 (0.91) 2.0 (0.91) 2.5 (1.2) 2.5 (1.2)
A
8.07 (20.5) 8.07 (20.5) 9.75 (24.77) 9.75 (24.77)
B
7.13 (18.11) 7.13 (18.11) 8.75 (22.23) 8.75 (22.23) 9.50 (24.13) 9.50 (24.13)
D
3.63 (9.22) 3.63 (9.22) 4.00 (10.16) 4.00 (10.16) 5.25 (13.34) 5.25 (13.34) 9.54 (24.23) 9.54 (24.23) 5.63 (14.30) 5.63 (14.30) 5.63 (14.30) 5.63 (14.30) 8.00 (20.32) 8.00 (20.32) 7.63 (19.38) 7.63 (19.38)
Dimensions in (cm) E F
6.47 (16.43) 6.47 (16.43) 8.44 (21.44) 8.44 (21.44) 8.44 (21.44) 8.44 (21.44) 9.54 (24.23) 9.54 (24.23) 10.54 (26.77) 10.54 (26.77) 10.54 (26.77) 10.54 (26.77) 5.47 (13.89) 5.47 (13.89) 5.35 (13.59) 5.35 (13.59) 5.47 (13.89) 5.47 (13.89) 3.51 (8.92) 3.51 (8.92) 5.47 (13.89) 5.47 (13.89) 7.47 (1897) 7.47 (1897) 5.35 (13.59) 5.35 (13.59) 7.35 (18.67) 7.35 (18.67) 7.38 (18.75) 7.38 (18.75) 8.38 (21.29) 8.38 (21.29)
H
4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 3.21 (8.15) 3.21 (8.15) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 4.23 (10.74) 4.23 (10.74) 6.23 (15.82) 6.23 (15.82) 6.18 (15.70) 6.18 (15.70) 7.18 (18.24) 7.18 (18.24)
I
4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 8.25 (20.96) 8.25 (20.96) 8.25 (20.96) 8.25 (20.96)
J
4.25 (10.80) 4.25 (10.80) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 6.25 (15.88) 8.25 (20.96) 8.25 (20.96) 8.25 (20.96) 8.25 (20.96)
Aluminum Panel
7.36 (18.68) 7.36 (18.69) 7.36 (18.69) 7.36 (18.69) 9.31 (23.65) 9.31 (23.65) 8.54 (21.69) 8.54 (21.69) 9.36 (23.77) 9.36 (23.77) 9.36 (23.77) 9.36 (23.77)
ABP66 ABP66 ABP86 ABP86 ABP88 ABP88 ABP108 ABP108 ABP108 ABP108 ABP108 ABP108
3.0 (1.4) 10.44 (26.52) 3.0 (1.4) 10.44 (26.52)
3.0 (1.4) 11.06 (28.09) 10.12 (25.70) 3.0 (1.4) 11.06 (28.09) 10.12 (25.70) 3.0 (1.4) 12.07 (33.66) 11.13 (28.27) 3.5 (1.6) 12.07 (33.66) 11.13 (28.27) 3.5 (1.6) 12.07 (30.66) 11.13 (28.27) 4.0 (1.8) 12.07 (30.66) 11.13 (28.27) 4.0 (1.8) 13.69 (34.77) 12.75 (32.39) 4.0 (1.8) 13.69 (34.77) 12.75 (32.39) 4.5 (2.0) 14.07 (35.74) 13.13 (33.35) 4.5 (2.0) 14.07 (35.74) 13.13 (35.35)
11.36 (28.85) 12.54 (31.85) 11.36 (28.85) 12.54 (31.85) 11.36 (28.85) 12.54 (31.85) 11.36 (28.85) 12.54 (31.85)
10.25 (26.04) ABP1210 10.25 (26.04) ABP1210 10.25 (26.04) ABP1210 10.25 (26.04) ABP1210
6.0 (2.7) 15.69 (39.85) 14.75 (37.47) 10.00 (25.40) 13.36 (33.93) 14.58 (37.03) 9.0 (4.1) 17.69 (44.93) 16.75 (42.55) 12.00 (30.48) 15.00 (38.40) 16.70 (42.42)
10.25 (26.04) 12.25 (31.12) ABP1412 10.25 (26.04) 12.25 (36.20) ABP1412 12.25 (31.12) 14.25 (36.20) ABP1614 12.25 (31.12) 14.25 (36.20) ABP1614
H141206HCLL 6.0 (2.7) 15.69 (39.85) 14.75 (37.47) 10.00 (25.40) 13.36 (33.93) 14.58 (37.03) H161407HCLL 9.0 (4.1) 17.69 (44.93) 16.75 (42.55) 12.00 (30.48) 15.00 (38.40) 16.70 (42.42)
14.0 (6.4) 19.69 (50.01) 18.75 (47.63) 14.00 (35.56) 17.64 (44.81) 18.91 (48.03) 11.50 (29.22) 11.50 (29.21) 10.16 (25.81) 14.25 (36.20) 16.25 (41.28) ABP1816 31 (14.1) 27.16 (689.8) 25.94 (659) 18 (457) 27.81 (706.3) 25.25 (641) 11.50 (292) 11.50 (292) 10.61 (269.5) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) ABP-2424
H181610HCLL 14.0 (6.4) 19.69 (50.01) 18.75 (47.63) 14.00 (35.56) 17.64 (44.81) 18.91 (48.03) 11.50 (29.22) 11.50 (29.21) 10.16 (25.81) 14.25 (36.20) 16.25 (41.28) ABP1816
Add P to the end of the H Series part number to order optional perf panel.
264
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ACCESSORIES
BACK PANEL ABP-88 FULL SWING PANEL KIT ABP88USPUSOPK SWING PANEL BRACKETS USOPKG
ENCLOSURES
NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES H AND G SERIES
KEY LOCK CAT60
PRE-CUT DIN RAIL
ENCLOSURES
CORD GRIPS
ACCESSORIES
MODEL ABP108 ABP1082 ABP108USPUSOPK ABP1210 ABP1210USPUSOPK ABP1412 ABP1412USPUSOPK ABP1614 ABP1614USPUSOPK ABP1816 ABP1816USPUSOPK ABP66 ABP66USPUSOPK ABP86 ABP86USPUSOPK ABP88 ABP88USPUSOPK CAT60 CGLTF11 CGLTF16 CGLTF21 CGLTF29 CGLTF7 CGLTF9 CGNPT1 CGNPT1/2 CGNPT3/4 CGNPT3/8 DIN10 DESCRIPTION Aluminum panel for 10"x8" enclosure Aluminum panel for 10"x8"x2"enclosure Aluminum swing panel Kit for 10"x8" Aluminum panel for 12"x10" enclosure Aluminum swing panel Kit for 12"x10" Aluminum panel 14"x12" enclosure Aluminum swing panel Kit for 14"x12" Aluminum panel for 16"x14" enclosure Aluminum swing panel Kit for 16"x14" Aluminum panel for 18"x16" enclosure Aluminum swing panel Kit for 18"x16" Aluminum panel for 6"x6" enclosure Aluminum swing panel Kit for 6"x6" Aluminum panel for 8"x6" enclosure Aluminum swing panel Kit for 8"x6" Aluminum panel for 8"x8"enclosure Aluminum swing panel Kit for 8"x8" Keylock PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (0.217-0.394) PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (0.315-0.551) PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (0.472-0.709) PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (0.669-0.984) PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (0.177-0.256) PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (197-0.315) NPT cord grip w/ lock nut (0.669-0.984) NPT cord grip w/ lock nut (0.236-0.472) NPT cord grip w/ lock nut (0.433-0.709) NPT cord grip w/ lock nut (0.197-0.315) DIN Rail Kit for 10" wide enclosure (2 rails, 2 screws)
DIN12 DIN14 DIN16 DIN18 DIN6 DIN8 ICGLTF13.5 SP10I USPOKB USPOKG ABP2424 ABP2424GSOPK ASP2424 GMMR10 Kit GPP Kit GSOPK24
DIN Rail Kit for 12" wide enclosure (2 rails, 4 screws) DIN Rail Kit for 14" wide enclosure (2 rails, 4 screws) DIN Rail Kit for 16" wide enclosure (2 rails, 4 screws) DIN Rail Kit for 18" wide enclosure (2 rails, 4 screws) DIN Rail Kit for 6"wide enclosure (2 rails, 4 screws) DIN Rail Kit for 8"wide enclosure (2 rails, 4 screws) PC hub cord grip w/ lock nut (0.236-0.472) Screw Pack (10 pcs) Swing panel kit - Black Swing panel kit - Gray Aluminum back panel/swing panel only for G242410 Models Aluminum 24" back panel/swing panel and 24" hinge for swing panel for G242410 Models Aluminum side panel only for Genesis G242410 Models Multi-Max Rails with screws - 10" depth (set of 4 with screws) for G242410 Models Panel Pad kit - (four panel brackets that mount on Mulit-max rail) for G242410 Models 24" aluminum hinge for swing panel (use standard back panel as swing panel) for G242410 Models
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
265
ENCLOSURES
DESCRIPTION
Hoffman A-LP Series NEMA 12 single-door, wall-mounted enclosures house electrical and pneumatic controls, instruments, and components. These enclosures provide protection from dust, dirt, oil, and water.
HOFFMAN NEMA 12 ENCLOSURES AND PANELS A-LP SERIES
FEATURES 16 gauge steel bodies and 14 gauge doors on sizes up through 24" x 24"; larger sizes all 14 gauge
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.62 (1.57) F B 1.25 2.0 (3.18) (5.08) Mounting holes 0.44 (1.1) dia 3.38 (8.59) B - 1.84 (4.67) Door clamp Padlocking hasp and staple C A Data pocket A - 1.81 (4.60) 3.38 (8.6) 0.62 (1.57) 0.44 (1.12) 1.25 (3.18) Door stiffener
Seams continuously welded and ground smooth, no holes or knockouts External mounting feet Quick and easy operation of door clamps Door removable by pulling heavy gauge continuoushinge pin Hasp and staple for padlocking Oil-resistant gasket attached with adhesive and steel retaining strips Collar studs for mounting optional panels White inside with ANSI 61 gray outside nish over phosphatized surfaces Optional steel panels with white nish UL listed File #E61997 CSA certied, File #LR42186
ENCLOSURES
SOLID PANEL* ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS in (cm) WEIGHT MODEL MODEL lb (kg) AxBxC F 16 x 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 1.25 (3.1) A-161206LP A-16P12 17.3 (7.8) 16 x 16 x 6 (41 x 41 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-161606LP A-16P16 21.2 (9.6) 20 x 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-201606LP A-20P16 25.1 (11.4) 20 x 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-202006LP A-20P20 29.1 (13.2) 24 x 20 x 6 (61 x 51 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-242006LP A-24P20 34.1 (15.5) 24 x 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-242406LP A-24P24 39.0 (17.7) 30 x 24 x 6 (76 x 61 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-302406LP A-30P24 52.0 (23.6) 36 x 24 x 6 (91 x 61 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-362406LP A-36P24 62.0 (28.1) 36 x 30 x 6 (91 x 76 x 15) 3.0 (7.6) A-363006LP A-36P30 75.0 (34.0) 16 x 12 x 8 (41 x 30 x 20) 1.25 (3.1) A-161208LP A-16P12 19.3 (8.8) 20 x 16 x 8 (51 x 41 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-201608LP A-20P16 27.3 (12.4) 24 x 16 x 8 (61 x 41 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-241608LP A-24P16 31.3 (14.2) 24 x 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-242008LP A-24P20 37.0 (16.8) 24 x 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-242408LP A-24P24 42.0 (19.1) 30 x 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-302408LP A-30P24 57.0 (25.9) 36 x 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-362408LP A-36P24 68.0 (30.8) 36 x 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-363008LP A-36P30 82.0 (37.2) 42 x 24 x 8 (107 x 61 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-422408LP A-42P24 103.0 (46.7) 42 x 36 x 8 (107 x 91 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-423608LP A-42P36 113.0 (51.3) 48 x 36 x 8 (122 x 91 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-483608LP A-48P36 122.0 (55.3) 60 x 36 x 8 (152 x 76 x 20) 3.0 (7.6) A-603608LP A-60P36 148.0 (67.1) * Order panels separately. Contact Kele for additional NEMA 12 sizes. Please see the Accessories page for latch kits, lock kits, electric heaters, ventilation kits, and cooling fans. Add P to the end of part number to order optional perf panel. DIMENSIONS H x W in (cm) 13 x 9 (33 x 23) 13 x 13 (33 x 33) 17 x 13 (43 x 33) 17 x 17 (43 x 43) 21 x 17 (53 x 43) 21 x 21 (53 x 53) 27 x 21 (69 x 53) 33 x 21 (83 x 53) 33 x 27 (83 x 69) 13 x 9 (33 x 23) 17 x 13 (43 x 33) 21 x 13 (53 x 33) 21 x 17 (53 x 43) 21 x 21 (53 x 53) 27 x 21 (69 x 53) 33 x 21 (83 x 53) 33 x 27 (83 x 69) 39 x 21 (99 x 53) 39 x 33 (99 x 83) 45 x 33 (114 x 83) 57 x 33 (145 x 83) WEIGHT lb (kg) 3.6 (1.6) 5.3 (2.4) 7.0 (3.2) 10.0 (4.5) 11.0 (5.0) 13.0 (5.9) 18.0 (8.2) 23.0 (10.4) 27.0 (12.2) 3.6 (1.6) 7.0 (3.2) 8.7 (3.9) 11.0 (5.0) 13.0 (5.9) 18.0 (8.2) 23.0 (10.4) 27.0 (12.2) 25.0 (11.3) 39.0 (17.7) 46.0 (20.9) 58.0 (26.3)
266
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
ENCLOSURE MODEL GRAY MODEL BEIGE
ENCLOSURES
HOFFMAN NEMA 4, 12, AND 13 ENCLOSURES & PANELS C-SD CONCEPT SERIES
Hoffman Concept Series enclosures are attractive, singledoor wall-mounted enclosures designed to safely house electrical and pneumatic components. Manufactured from 14 gauge or 16 gauge steel, depending on size, seams are continuously welded and ground smooth, so there are no holes and knock-outs. These enclosures provide protection from dust, dirt, oil, and water. Concept Series enclosures are rated NEMA 4, 12, and 13.
Minimum width body ange for maximum door opening Hidden hinges for clean aesthetic appearance Door removable by pulling captive hinge pins Seamless foam-in-place one-piece gasket for oil-tight and dust-tight seal Furnished with all hardware for wall mounting and seals for the mounting holes Panel-mounting studs for optional subpanels and accessories Door bar on hinge side for wire management and ground Provisions on door for thermoplastic data pocket UL listed, File #E61997 CSA certied, File #LR42186 Rated NEMA 4, 12, and 13 ANSI61 gray polyester powder coating inside and out with white panels Six enclosure sizes available in RAL 9001 beige polyester powder coating
C-SD16126 C-SD16126-BG
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
B - 1.64 (4.17) Body opening
0.80 (2.03) 6.23 (15.82)
ENCLOSURES
A - 1.70 (4.32) Door clear space
1.72 (4.37) 1.16 (2.95)
Collar stud
SOLID STEEL PANEL* WEIGHT lb (kg) 12.5 (5.7) 15.6 (7.1) 21.5 (9.8) 26.0 (11.8) 29.4 (13.3) 36.9 (16.7) 17.5 (7.9) 23.6 (10.7) 33.9 (15.4) 40.0 (18.1) 48.0 (21.8) 57.0 (25.9) 77.0 (34.9) 82.0 (37.2) 107.0 (48.5) 124.0 (56.2) 148.0 (67.1) MODEL C-P1212 C-P1612 C-P2016 C-P2020 C-P2420 C-P2424 C-P1612 C-P2016 C-P2420 C-P2424 C-P3024 C-P3624 C-P3630 C-P3630 C-P4236 C-P4836 C-P6036 DIMENSIONS A x B in (cm) 10.2 x 10.2 (26 x 26) 14.5 x 10.2 (37 x 26) 18.2 x 14.5 (46 x 37) 18.2 x 18.2 (46 x 46) 22.2 x 18.2 (56 x 46) 22.2 x 22.2 (56 x 56) 14.2 x 10.2 (36 x 26) 18.2 x 14.2 (46 x 36) 22.2 x 18.2 (56 x 46) 22.2 x 22.2 (56 x 56) 28.2 x 22.2 (72 x 56) 34.2 x 22.2 (87 x 56) 34.2 x 28.2 (87 x 72) 34.2 x 28.2 (87 x 72) 40.2 x 34.2 (102 x 87) 46.2 x 34.2 (117 x 87) 58.2 x 34.2 (148 x 87) GAUGE 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 WEIGHT lb (kg) 2.3 (1.1) 3.5 (1.6) 8.0 (3.6) 10.0 (4.5) 12.8 (5.8) 15 (6.8) 3.4 (1.5) 7.9 (3.6) 13.0 (5.9) 13.0 (5.9) 19.0 (8.9) 24.0 (10.9) 31.5 (14.3) 30.4 (13.8) 43.0 (19.5) 49.5 (22.5) 64.0 (29) DIMENSIONS BODY A x B x C in (cm) GAUGE 12 x 6 (30 x 30 x 15) 16 16 12 x 6 (41 x 30 x 15) 16 16 x 6 (51 x 41 x 15) 20 x 6 (51 x 51 x 15) 16 20 x 6 (61 x 20 x 15) 16 24 x 6 (61 x 61 x 15) 16 12 x 8 (41 x 30 x 20) 16 16 x 8 (51 x 30 x 20) 16 20 x 8 (61 x 51 x 20) 16 24 x 8 (61 x 61 x 20) 16 24 x 8 (76 x 61 x 20) 16 16 24 x 8 (91 x 61 x 20) 30 x 8 (91 x 76 x 20) 14 30 x 10 (91 x 76 x 25) 14 36 x 10 (107 x 91 x 25) 14 14 36 x 10 (122 x 91 x 25) 14 36 x 10 (152 x 91 x 25)
C-SD12126+ C-SD12126-BG+ 12 x C-SD16126+ C-SD16126-BG+ 16 x C-SD20166+ C-SD20166-BG+ 20 x 20 x C-SD20206+ C-SD24206+ C-SD24206-BG+ 24 x 24 x C-SD24246+ 16 x C-SD16128+ 20 x C-SD20168+ 24 x C-SD24208+ 24 x C-SD24248+ C-SD30248+ C-SD30248-BG+ 30 x 36 x C-SD36248+ C-SD36308+ C-SD36308-BG+ 36 x 36 x C-SD363010+ 42 x C-SD423610+ 48 x C-SD483610+ 60 x C-SD603610+ Call Kele for sizes other than those listed. See the Accessories page for heaters and fans. Add PF to the end of part number to oder optional perf panel.
* Order panels separately. + Add P to the end of model number to include solid steel subpanel.
C-WHK March 2014
RELATED PRODUCTS Keylock handle for Concept Series
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
267
ENCLOSURES
DESCRIPTION
Saginaw Enviroline Series enclosures are attractive, single-door wall-mounted enclosures designed to safely house electrical and pneumatic components. Manufactured from 14 gauge steel seams are continuously welded and ground smooth, so there are no holes and knock-outs. These enclosures provide protection from dust, dirt, oil, and water. Saginaw Enviroline Series enclosures are rated NEMA 4, 12, and 13.
SAGINAW NEMA 4, 12, AND 13 ENCLOSURES & PANELS EL SERIES
NEW!
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
B
1.1 (27.9)
FEATURES
Minimum width body ange for maximum door opening Hidden hinges for clean aesthetic appearance Door removable Seamless foam-in-place one-piece gasket for oil-tight and dust-tight seal Panel-mounting studs for optional subpanels and accessories Removable data pocket UL listed, File #E69392 CSA certied Rated NEMA 4, 12, and 13 ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating inside and out with white panels
ENCLOSURES
ENCLOSURE MODEL SCE12EL1206LP 12 x 12 SCE16EL1206LP 16 x 12 SCE16EL1208LP 16 x 12 SCE16EL1606LP 16 x 16 SCE20EL1606LP 20 x 16 SCE20EL1608LP 20 x 16 SCE20EL2006LP 20 x 20 SCE20EL2008LP 20 x 20 SCE24EL1608LP 24 x 16 SCE24EL2006LP 24 x 20 SCE24EL2008LP 24 x 20 SCE24EL2010LP 24 x 20 SCE24EL2406LP 24 x 24 SCE24EL2408LP 24 x 24 SCE30EL2408LP 30 x 24 SCE36EL2408LP 36 x 24 SCE36EL3008LP SCE36EL3010LP SCE36EL3608LP SCE42EL3610LP SCE42EL3612LP SCE48EL3610LP SCE48EL3612LP 36 36 36 42 42 48 48 x x x x x x x 30 30 36 36 36 36 36 DIMENSIONS A x B x C in (cm) x x x x x x x x x x x x 6 6 8 6 6 8 6 8 (30.5 x 30.5 x 15.2) (40.7 x 30.5 x 15.2) (40.7 x 30.5 x 20.3) (40.6 x 40.6 x 15.2) (50.8 x 40.6 x 15.2) (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) (50.8 x 50.8 x 15.2) (50.8 x 50.8 x 20.3) WEIGHT lb (kg) 16 (7.3) 15.6 (7.1) 21 (9.5) 24 (10.9) 28 (12.7) 30 (13.6) 33 (15) 36 (16.4) 36 (16.4) 38 (17.3) 48 (21.8) 50 (22.7) 45 (20.5) 48 (21.8) 68 (30.9) 71 (32.3) 77 (35) MODEL SCE12DLP12 SCE16P12 SCE16P12 SCE20P16 SCE20P16 SCE20P16 SCE20P20 SCE20P20 SCE24P16 SCE24P20 SCE24P20 SCE24P20 SCE24P24 SCE24P24 SCE30P24 SCE36P24 SCE36P24 SCE36P30 SCE36P30 SCE36P36 SCE42P36 SCE42P36 SCE48P36 SCE48P36 SCE60P36 SCE60P36 SOLID STEEL PANEL DIMENSIONS A x B in (cm) 9 x 9 (22.9 x 22.9) 13 x 9 (33 x 22.9) 13 x 9 (33 x 22.9) 17 17 17 17 17 21 21 21 21 21 21 27 33 x x x x x x x x x x x x x 13 13 13 17 17 13 17 17 17 21 21 21 21 (43.2 x 33) (43.2 x 33) (43.2 x 33) (43.2 x 43.2) (43.2 x 43.2) (53.3 x 33) (53.3 x 43.2) (53.3 x 43.2) (53.3 x 43.2) (53.3 x 53.3) (53.3 x 53.3) (68.6 x 53.3) (83.8 x 53.3) WEIGHT lb (kg) 3 (1.4) 4 (1.8) 4 (1.8) 8 (3.6) 8 (3.6) 8 (3.6) 10 (4.5) 10 (4.5) 11 (5) 14 (6.4) 14 (6.4) 14 (6.4) 17 (7.7) 17 (7.7) 22 (10) 27 (12.3) 27 (12.3) 34 (15.5) 34 (15.5) 35 (15.9) 39 (17.7) 39 (17.7) 55 (25) 55 (25) 58 (26.4) 58 (26.4)
8 (61 x 40.6 x 20.3) 6 (61 x 50.8 x 15.2) 8 (61 x 50.8 x 20.3) 10 (61 x 50.8 x 25.4)
x 6 (61 x 61 x 15.2) x 8 (61 x 61 x 20.3) x 8 (76.2 x 61 x 20.3) x 8 (91.4 x 61 x 20.3) x 8 (91.4 x 76.2 x 20.3) x 10 (91.4 x 76.2 x 25.4) x 8 (91.4 x 91.4 x 20.3) x 10 (106.7 x 91.4 x 25.4) x 12 (106.7 x 91.4 x 30.5) x 10 (121.9 x 91.4 x 25.4) x 12 (121.9 x 91.4 x 30.5)
SCE36EL2412LP 36 x 24 x 12 (91.4 x 61 x 30.5)
73 (33.2) 89 (40.5) 102 (46.4) 127 (57.7) 130 (59.1) 137 (62.3) 140 (63.6) SCE60EL3610LP 60 x 36 x 10 (152.4 x 91.4 x 25.4) 164 (74.5) SCE60EL3612LP 60 x 36 x 12 (152.4 x 91.4 x 30.5) 167 (75.9)
33 x 21 (83.8 x 53.3) 33 x 27 (83.8 x 65.6) 33 x 27 33 x 33 39 x 33 39 x 33 45 x 33 45 x 33 (83.8 x 65.6) (83.8 x 83.8) (99.1 x 83.8) (99.1 x 83.8) (114.3 x 83.8) (114.3 x 83.8)
57 x 33 (144.8 x 83.8) 57 x 33 (144.8 x 83.8)
268
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
ENCLOSURES
MISCELLANEOUS ENCLOSURES AND WINDOW KITS B SERIES AND WINDOW KITS
B Series small enclosures are versatile boxes for relays, transducers, and other remotely mounted devices. The twopiece design allows easy access as the sections slip together and fasten with either a built-in snap lock or furnished sheet metal screws.
FEATURES

Two-piece construction Flanged sections to assure proper shielding 1/2" knockouts top and bottom Natural aluminum or galvanized steel nish
5
ACCESSORIES INCLUDED none none none QP1212 - 11" x 11" perf-panel
ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS in (cm) WEIGHT MODEL L W H lb (kg) B-5* 5 (12.7) 4 (10.16) 3 (7.62) 0.5 (0.2) B-7* 7 (17.78) 5 (12.7) 3 (7.62) 0.75 (0.34) B-12** 12 (30.48) 12 (30.48) 3 (7.62) 5.5 (2.5) B-12-P 12 (30.48) 12 (30.48) 3 (7.62) 7 (3.2) * Natural aluminum finish
ENCLOSURES
** Galvanized steel finish
MISCELLANEOUS ENCLOSURES AND WINDOW KITS FIXED AND HINGED WINDOW KITS
DESCRIPTION Hoffman Fixed and Hinged Window Kits are designed for use with NEMA 1, 4, 4X, 12, and 13 enclosures. Each NEMA 1, 4, 12, and 13 kit comes with a clear 0.25" (.64 cm) acrylic window, all of the essential hardware, and easy-to-follow instructions. The NEMA 4X stainless steel Fixed Window Kits are designed for use with NEMA 4X enclosures, have a clear 0.25" (.64 cm) polycarbonate window, and also include hardware and instructions. The Hinged Window Kits are 1.49" (3.78 cm) deep and provide an available working space of 1.19" (3.02 cm) from the surface of the door to the inside of the window.
DIMENSIONS
FIXED WINDOW KIT DIMENSIONS H x W in (cm) MODEL A-PWK53NF* A-PWK95NF* A-PWK133NF A-PWK138NF* A-PWK175NF A-PWK1711NF* A-PWK2315NF* A-PWK2919NF* A-PWK3523NF WINDOW SIZE 5.0 x 3.0 (13 x 8) 9.0 x 5.0 (23 x 13) 13.0 x 3.0 (33 x 8) 13.0 x 8.0 (33 x 20) 17.0 x 5.0 (43 x 13) 17.0 x 11.0 (43 x 28) 23.0 x 15.0 (58 x 38) 29.0 x 19.0 (74 x 48) 35.0 x 23.0 (89 x 58) FRAME SIZE 7.5 x 5.5 (19 x 14) 11.5 x 8.0 (29 x 20) 15.5 x 5.5 (39 x 14) 15.5 x 10.5 (39 x 27) 19.5 x 8.0 (50 x 20) 19.5 x 13.5 (50 x 34) 25.5 x 17.5 (65 x 44) 31.5 x 21.5 (80 x 54) 37.5 x 25.5 (95 x 65) CUT-OUT SIZE 6.69 x 4.69 (17 x 12) 10.69 x 7.19 (27 x 18) 14.69 x 4.69 (37 x 12) 14.69 x 9.69 (37 x 25) 18.69 x 7.19 (47 x 18) 18.69 x 12.69 (47 x 32) 24.69 x 16.69 (63 x 42) 30.69 x 20.69 (78 x 53) 36.69 x 24.69 (93 x 63) MODEL A-PWK1212H A-PWK1612H A-PWK2016H A-PWK2020H A-PWK2420H A-PWK3024H HINGED WINDOW KIT DIMENSIONS H x W in (cm) WINDOW SIZE 10.28 x 10.28 (26 x 26) 14.28 x 10.28 (36 x 26) 18.28 x 14.28 (46 x 36) 18.28 x 18.28 (46 x 43) 22.28 x 18.28 (57 x 43) 28.28 x 22.28 (57 x 57) FRAME SIZE 12.0 x 12.0 (30 x 30) 16.0 x 12.0 (41 x 30) 20.0 x 16.0 (51 x 41) 20.0 x 20.0 (51 x 51) 24.0 x 20.0 (61 x 51) 30.0 x 24.0 (76 x 61) CUT-OUT SIZE 10.44 x 10.44 (27 x 27) 14.44 x 10.44 (37 x 27) 18.44 x 14.44 (47 x 37) 18.44 x 18.44 (47 x 47) 22.44 x 18.44 (57 x 47) 28.44 x 22.44 (72 x 57)
Note: All steel fixed window kits meet UL Type 4 and Type 12, CSA Type 12. All stainless steel fixed window kits meet UL/CSA Type 4, Type 4X, and Type 12. All hinged window kits maintain UL Type 12 integrity.
* Available in stainless steel. Add SS after part number. Example: A-PWK53NFSS
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
269
ENCLOSURES
MODEL A-L12AR A-L7A A-L2A A-L2BR A-L2CR A-L2DR DESCRIPTION Cylinder lock T-handle latch One-point latch kit Three-point latch kit for 16", 20", 24", or 30"H enclosures Three-point latch kit for 36", 42", or 48"H enclosures Three-point latch kit for 60" or 72"H enclosures ENCLOSURE NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 12 NEMA 12 NEMA 12 NEMA 12
HOFFMAN ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES LOCKS, LATCHES, VENTILATION, HEATING, COOLING
NEW!
A-L12AR A-L2A A-L7A Louver Plate Kit A-VK33 Filters for Louver Plate Kit A-FLT33 Decorative Vent Kit X-PV32 Electric Heater
5
LOUVER KITS A-VK33 A-VK43 A-VK64 A-VK84 DIMENSIONS in (cm) 3.88 x 4.50 (9.9 x 11.4) 4.50 x 5.50 (11.4 x 14) 5.62 x 7.50 (14 .2 x 19) 5.81 x 9.50 (14.8 x 24.1) DIMENSIONS in (cm) 3.22 x 3.25 (8.2 x 8.3) 3.84 x 4.25 (9.8 x 10.8) 4.45 x 6.25 (11.3 x 15.9) 4.64 x 8.25 (11.8 x 21) CUT-OUT SIZE in (cm) 2.62 x 3.00 (6.7 x 7.6) 3.25 x 4.00 (8.3 x 10.2) 4.38 x 6.00 (11.1 x 15.2) 4.56 x 8.00 (11.6 x 20.3) USED WITH A-VK33 A-VK43 A-VK64 A-VK84
ENCLOSURES
FILTERS A-FLT33 A-FLT43 A-FLT64 A-FLT84
DECORATIVE VENT KIT DIMENSIONS (includes filter) in (cm) X-PV32 11.81 x 7.88 x 1.03 (30 x 20 x 2.6)
ELECTRIC HEATERS ENCLOSURE SURFACE AREA (Sq Ft) = 2[(LxW) + (LxD) + (WxD)]/144 Mounting - 100/200 watt requires 1" clearance on sides and bottom and 4" above Heater 4"W x 5"H x 4"D (10.16 cm x 12.7 cm x 10.2 cm) 400/800 watt requires 1" clearance on sides and bottom and 6" above Heater 4.25"W x 7"H x 4.38"D (10.8 cm x 17.8 cm x 11.1 cm) MODEL D-AH1001A D-AH2001A D-AH4001B D-AH8001B WATTS VOLTAGE (VAC) 120 100 120 200 120 400 120 800 Hz AMPS WEIGHT 10F 20F 30F 40F 50F 60F lb (kg) Maximum enclosure surface area in sq ft 4 (1.8) 30 15 10 50/60 0.9 5 4 (1.8) 50 25 15 50/60 1.7 14 12 8 6 (2.7) 50/60 3.3 50 30 23 19 16 6 (2.7) 50/60 6.5 50 35 28
Desired ambient temperature rise F
COOLING FANS (1 guard included, 2 recommended) 115 VAC 50/60 Hz CFM SIZE in (cm) FAN # SHAPE GUARD # BRACKET # 100 4.69 (11.92) A-4AXFN Square A-GARD4 A-BRKT4 240 6.72 (17.07) A-6AXFN Round A-GARD6 A-BRKT6 560 10.00 (25.4) A-10AXFN Round A-GARD10 A-BRKT10
Cooling Fans A-4AXFN
Fan Bracket A-BRKT4
Additional Fan Guard A-GARD4
270
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION ORDERING INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION Cylinder lock, chrome T-handle latch, non-locking MODEL SCEDKLD SCENLTH
ENCLOSURES
SAGINAW ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES LATCHES, LOCKS, VENTILATION, HEATING, COOLING
Many enclosure applications require keyed locks, venting, heating and/or cooling. These accessories will help to complete your panel projects.
ENCLOSURE NEMA 1 NEMA 1
SCEDLKLD SCENLTH
LOUVER KITS SCEAVK33 SCEAVK43 SCEAVK64 SCEAVK84 FILTERS SCEFLT33 SCEFLT43 SCEFLT64 SCEFLT84 DIMENSIONS in (cm) 3.88 x 4.50 (9.9 x 11.4) 4.50 x 5.50 (11.4 x 14) 5.62 x 7.50 (14 .2 x 19) 5.81 x 9.50 (14.8 x 24.1) DIMENSIONS in (cm) 3.22 x 3.25 (8.2 x 8.3) 3.84 x 4.25 (9.8 x 10.8) 4.45 x 6.25 (11.3 x 15.9) 4.64 x 8.25 (11.8 x 21) CUT-OUT SIZE in (cm) 2.62 x 3.00 (6.7 x 7.6) 3.25 x 4.00 (8.3 x 10.2) 4.38 x 6.00 (11.1 x 15.2) 4.56 x 8.00 (11.6 x 20.3) USED WITH SCEAVK33 SCEAVK43 SCEAVK64 SCEAVK84
ENCLOSURES
SCEAVK33
SCEFLT33
ELECTRIC HEATERS ENCLOSURE SURFACE AREA (Sq Ft) = 2[(LxW) + (LxD) + (WxD)]/144 Mounting - 100/200 watt requires 1" clearance on sides and bottom and 4" above Heater 4"W x 5"H x 4"D (10.16 cm x 12.7 cm x 114 cm) 400/800 watt requires 1" clearance on sides and bottom and 6" above Heater 4"W x 7.5"H x 4.58"D (10 cm x 19 cm x 11.4 cm) MODEL SCEHF1251A SCEHF2001A SCEHF4001B SCEHF8001B WATTS VOLTAGE (VAC) 115 125 115 200 115 400 115 800 Hz AMPS WEIGHT lb (kg) 4 (1.8) 1.1 60 4 (1.8) 1.7 60 4 (1.8) 3.5 60 4 (1.8) 7 60
SCEHF1251A
COOLING FANS (1 guard included, 2 recommended) 115 VAC 50/60 Hz SHAPE CFM SIZE in (cm) FAN # GUARD # BRACKET # Square 100 4.69 (11.92) SCEGARD4 SCE112399 SCECF4 Round 240 6.72 (17.07) SCEGARD6 SCE111252 SCECF6 Round SCEGARD10 SCE110551 560 10.00 (25.4) SCEC10
SCECF4
SCE112399
SCE-GARD4
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
271
ENCLOSURES
EMT CONDUIT FITTINGS MUT
DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a complete line of EMT ttings for 1/2" and 3/4".
Model EMT 90 ELBOW EMTEL12 1/2" EMT 90 elbow 3/4" EMT 90 elbow 1 piece 1 piece Description
Unit Quantity
NEW!
Elbow Offset Nipple Set Screw Connector Set Screw Coupling Compression Connector 90 Compression Connector
EMTEL34
EMT OFFSET NIPPLE UL FILE E35001 EMTOFNP12 1/2" EMT offset nipple 1 piece
EMT SET SCREW CONNECTOR UL FILE E35001 EMTSCN12 1/2" EMT set screw connector 3/4" EMT set screw connector 1 piece 1 piece
ENCLOSURES
EMTSCN34
EMT SET SCREW COUPLING UL FILE E35001 EMTSCU12 EMTSCU34 1/2" EMT set screw coupling 3/4" EMT set screw coupling 1 piece 1 piece
EMT COMPRESSION CONNECTOR UL FILE E35001 EMTCCN12 EMTCCN34 1/2" EMT compression connector 3/4" EMT compression connector 1 piece 1 piece
EMT COMPRESSION COUPLING UL FILE E32539 EMTCCU12 EMTCCU34 1/2" EMT compression coupling 3/4" EMT compression coupling 1 piece 1 piece
EMT 90 COMPRESSION CONNECTOR UL FILE E35001 EMTCCN9012 EMTCCN9034 1/2" 90 compression connector 3/4" 90 compression connector 1 piece 1 piece
EMT ONE-HOLE STRAP UL FILE E333806 EMT1STP12 EMT1STP34 1/2" EMT one-hole strap 3/4" EMT one-hole strap 1 piece 1 piece
EMT TWO-HOLE STRAP UL FILE E333806 EMT2STP12 EMT2STP34 1/2" EMT two-hole strap 3/4" EMT two-hole strap 1 piece 1 piece 1-hole Strap 1 piece 1 piece 2-hole Strap
EMT PULLING ELBOW EMTPE12 EMTPE34 1/2" EMT pulling elbow 3/4" EMT pulling elbow
Pulling Elbow
272
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
FLOW
HUMIDITY
Kele Provides Solutions for Air and Fluid Movement, Measurement, and Control.
220B | p. 291
NFP Series | p. 310
626600A | p. 320
FLOW
KOAMS | p. 273
Recordall | p. 337 Disc Meter
EE65 | p. 282
FLOW
MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Air Flow KOAMS Series Kele Outdoor Airow Measuring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KMS Series Airow Measuring Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KIP Series Fan Inlet Airow Measuring Probe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Series Stainless Steel Pitot Tubes .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FXP Series Differential Pressure Air Velocity Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMP Series Ampliow Air Velocity Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPFS Series Low-Cost Differential Pressure Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . SSS-1000 Series Differential Pressure Flow Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EE65 and EE66 Series Air Velocity Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AVS-200 Air Velocity Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2G-20 Series Air Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FE-1000 Series Insertion Type Airow Sensing Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FE-1050 Series Fan Inlet Airow Sensing Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 341 342
DTFXL Series | p. 301
Gas Flow FT2A Series Thermal Mass Flow Meter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Liquid Flow SDI Series Flow Sensor with Integral Flow Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Series Overview Flow Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220B, 220SS Brass & Stainless Steel Flow Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225B, 226B, 226SS Series Hot Tap Flow Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228B, 228C, 228SS Tee-Mounted Flow Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250B Tee Mounted Flow Sensor.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228PV Series PVC Tee Flow Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Series Programmable Analog Flow Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UFT-1 Series Universal Flow Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3000, 3050 Series Flow and Energy Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTFXL Series Ultrasonic Flowmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-2000 Series Magnetic Flow Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2200, 3100 Series Fixed and Retractable Insertion Vortex Flow Meters . . . V-BAR 700 Insertion Vortex Flow Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NFP Series Target Flow Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Series BTU Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Series BTU Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DE/DB Series Ultrasonic Energy Meter, Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626600A Paddle Flow Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FS1-6 Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F61 Series Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EDC Condensate Pumps COU, LIM, JAG, and PAN Models. . . . . . . . . . . DXN Series Portable Ultrasonic Flow and Energy Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IOG Series Industrial Oval Gear Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCDL Compound Series Recordall Compound Series Meter . . . . . . . . . RCDL Nutating Disc Recordall Nutating Disc Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCDL Turbo Series Recordall Turbo Series Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT2A Series | p. 286
DPFS Series | p. 280
289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 299 301 303 307 309 310 312 314 316 320 322 324 326 327 331 335 337 339
FLOW
kele.com
NEW!
Supply Voltage Supply VA
FLOW
KELE OUTDOOR AIRFLOW MEASURING SYSTEM KOAMS SERIES
The Kele KOAMS Series outdoor airow measuring system consists of multiple airow elements, factory mounted and pre-piped in a casing designed for anged connection to ductwork, control dampers, louvers, etc. An optional inlet bell is available for plenum applications. The integral signal processor utilizes current state-of-the-art digital microprocessor technology with unequaled 24-bit A/D and 12-bit D/A signal conversion resolution and has twelve-point linearization capability. The KOAMS is capable of measuring down to 100 fpm and providing full scale operating ranges as low as 693 fpm. The signal processor accepts a temperature input signal for air density compensation for standard (scfm) or actual (acfm) airow calculations. KOAMS with Inlet Bell
Accuracy of 0.5% through the velocity range of 200 to 1,200 fpm and 5% accuracy at 100 FPM Multiple total and static pressure sensing ports to comply with ASHRAE Standard 111 for duct traversing Not affected by condensation or moisture Aerodynamically designed to resist fouling by airborne particulates Factory mounted and pre-piped in a anged duct section (casing) Optional inlet bell for plenum applications Airow station can be operated in humidity ranges of 0 to 100% with no effect on the station
FLOW
Full scale spans as low as 693 fpm (3.52 m/s) velocity Excellent AD/DA resolution: 24-bit A/D and 12 bit D/A Twelve point linearization and four point ow correction Large back lit LCD for conguration and local indication of the measured process Auto zeroing function Temperature compensation for air density correction NEMA 4 rated enclosure Modbus communication Certied LonWorks or BACnet MS/TP communication option
20 to 28 VAC/VDC Standard processor: 4.6 VA at 24 VAC, 2.7 VA at 24 VDC Full-option processor: 6 VA at 24 VAC/VDC Accuracy Within 0.5% of actual ow through the range of 200 to 1,200 fpm, and 5% at 100 fpm velocity, when installed in accordance with publlished recommendations Operating Temperature Processor: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Station: up to 350F (177C) continuous operation Operating Humidity Processor: 0 to 95% RH, noncondensing Station: 0 to 100% RH Velocity Range 100 to 2,800 fpm
Materials Of Construction Elements: 6063-T5 anodized aluminum Casing: 16 ga. G90 galvanized steel (other materials available special order) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X with proper connectors Dimensions Processor housing 6.7"H x 4.7"W x 2.7"D (16.9 x 11.9 x 6.9 cm) Analog Output Jumper selectable 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC (1K minimum), or 4-20 mA (500 maximum) Digital Outputs Optional high/low alarm, two single (one Form C) dry contact Contact Rating 5A at 30 VAC/VDC, 10A at 120 VAC resistive load Communication LonWorks, BACnet MS/TP, Modbus
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
273
FLOW
SIGNAL PROCESSOR FIELD CONNECTIONS
KELE OUTDOOR AIRFLOW MEASURING SYSTEM KOAMS SERIES
NEW!
CASING WIDTH (inches, minimum increments of 1/4") CASING HEIGHT (inches, minimum increments of 1/4") CASING LENGTH (5", 8", 12"; custom lengths available) PROBE DIRECTION 2 Casing height SIGNAL PROCESSOR MOUNTING LOCATION 3 Remote OUTPUT 1 2 3 4-20 mA 0-5 VDC 0-10 VDC 2 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER OPTIONS 1 Inlet bell (not available w/5 casing) High/Lo alarm LonWorks Communication BACnet MS/TP Communication Modbus Communication Optional 0.1% F.S. Accuracy
DIMENSIONS
FLOW
MODEL DESCRIPTION KOAMS Outdoor airow measuring system
L F Static pressure port Flow Total pressure port H
Flanged Stations for Ducted Applications
3
4
5 6 7
L F Static pressure port Flow Total pressure port H W
KOAMS - 20 - 30 - 12 - 2 - 3 - 1 - 2 - 1 Example: KOAMS-20-30-12-2-3-1-2-1 20" x 30" station with 12'' casing length, 4-20 mA output, and inlet bell
4"
Stations with Optional Inlet Bell for Plenum Applications
Note: Dimension "F"= 1-1/2' (stations 8'-72") or 2' (stations > 72")
KOAMS-TT
RELATED PRODUCTS Replacement outside air temperature transmitter (-30 to 130F)
274
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Connections
FLOW
AIRFLOW MEASURING STATION KMS SERIES
The Kele KMS Series airow measuring stations utilize multiple averaging sensors for static pressure measurements and a bullet-nose probe for total pressure. The sensors are distributed across the ow stream to conform to the industry standard rules for equal-area averaging (the standard pitot traverse). The standard unit includes a 16-gauge galvanized casing with anged duct connection, 3/8'' hexagon-celled aluminum ow straightening vanes, and internal copper sensors constructed to ASTM B88. Instrument connections are 1/2'' FNPT. Other congurations are available on request. APPLICATION When utilized with a differential pressure transmitter, the KMS Series provides an accurate, repeatable airow signal for building automation and HVAC applications. Air velocity may be determined by the formula: Velocity (fpm) = 4004P, where P is differential pressure in "W.C. Then, ow rate may be determined by the formula: CFM = AV, where A is the effective area of the ow measuring station in square feet, and V is the velocity obtained above. The proper range for a differential pressure transmitter to use with the KMS Series airow measuring station may be determined by the formula: P = (Max Velocity/4004)2. KMS Front and Back
1/2" FNPT HI/LO pressure pickups, factory-mounted on the long side dimension when station is rectangular Accuracy 2% within design ow range Minimum Velocity 1000 fpm (305 mpm) 6000 fpm (1830 mpm) Maximum Velocity Mounting Duct anges standard Clean HVAC duct air Media Compatibility Media Temperature Range 400F (204C) maximum 6" W.C. maximum duct static Maximum Pressure Pressure Drop <0.13" W.C. @ 2000 fpm
Materials Of Construction Casing: 16-gauge galvanized sheet steel; pickup sensors: rigid copper (hard drawn to ANSI H23.1 and ASTM B88 standards); internal ttings: copper (ANSI B-16.22); straightening vanes: 3/8" aluminum hexagon cell Dimensions Casing depth 12" (30.5 cm); H x W dimensions made-to-order Warranty 1 year
FLOW
MODEL KMS
DESCRIPTION Airflow measuring station SHAPE 811 Round with flanges 911 Rectangular with flanges DIMENSIONS W x H Diameter or width x height (inches) 911 48 x 24 Example: KMS-911-48 x 24 Rectangular airflow station with 16-gauge galvanized
casing, 3/8'' straightening vanes, and copper probes 48'' wide x 24'' high
KMS
Note: Standard location for flow connections is on the "long" dimensions side of a rectangular station. Stations can be rotated. If connections must be located on the "short" side, specify it on the order; a cost adder applies.
KMS-PAK-B
ACCESSORIES 1/2" FNPT to 1/4" OD tubing barb tting
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
275
FLOW
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KIP Series fan inlet airow measuring probe provides a reliable and economical means to measure airow at fan inlets. Similar to airow stations, the probe measures velocity pressure with multiple averaging pickups for total and static pressure. Rugged, lightweight, and easy to install, it is used with industry-standard differential pressure transmitters, gauges, or manometers. KIP Series probes install easily at the fan inlet and do not require straight duct runs. They are particularly applicable for jobs where tting a ow measuring station is difcult or impossible. FEATURES Easy and quick to install Accurate and repeatable Economical Lightweight and rugged No straight duct runs required High velocity, high differential Standard airow calculations
FAN INLET AIRFLOW MEASURING PROBE KIP SERIES
NEW!
For fan inlet depth > 3.5" For fan inlet depth 0.5" to 3.5"
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections 3/16" barbs for 1/4" OD poly tubing Accuracy 2% within design ow range Minimum Velocity 400 fpm (122 mpm) Maximum Velocity 12,000 fpm (3658 mpm) Mounting Drill/screw on fan inlet Media Compatibility Clean HVAC duct air Media Temperature Range 400F (204C) maximum Materials Of Construction Aluminum with anodized nish Dimensions Made-to-order Warranty 1 year
FIGURE 1. FAN INLET
FLOW
1 2
Distance varies with inlet diameter
Inlet Flow View
Mount ultraprobe in smallest diameter
Isometric View
Dimension Y is the smallest fan inlet diameter. The probes will be built for proper spacing using this dimension, which is required for ordering.
APPLICATION
The fan inlet diameter (dimension Y) shown in Figure 1, must be correctly determined and specied. Each set of probes is made to order and cannot be returned for credit if the dimensions are incorrectly specied. If the fan inlet depth is 3.5" (8.9 cm) or greater, order the KIP-Y-3.5. Each KIP Series probe will have both static (low) and total (high) pressure pickup barbs. Tee the high-pressure pickups together and the low pickups together. If the fan inlet depth is less than 3.5" (8.9 cm), order the KIPY-.5. One KIP Series probe will have a single static (low) pressure pickup barb, and the other probe will have a single total (high) pressure pickup barb. Determining the differential (velocity) pressure for a KIP Series probe is the same as for a pitot tube or ow measuring station (see KMS Series catalog page for formulas).
Model KIP-Y-.5 KIP-Y-3.5 Description Probe set for fan inlet depth 0.5" to 3.5" (specify Y; = inlet diameter range 6" to 96" (15 to 244 cm) Probe set for fan inlet depth > 3.5" (specify Y; = inlet diameter range 6" to 96" (15 to 244 cm)
Note: One KIP includes a pair of pickup probes for measuring airow at a fan inlet. For dual inlet fans, two KIPs must be ordered. CX, RX, XLdp Series M264 Series T-101 RELATED PRODUCTS Ashcroft differential pressure transmitters Setra differential pressure transmitter 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) PAGE 1014 901
276
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
304 stainless steel construction ASME design Accurate even with up to 15 misalignment Insertion depth markings stamped on tube
FLOW
STAINLESS STEEL PITOT TUBES 160 SERIES
The Dwyer 160 Series stainless steel pitot tubes are designed for use with differential pressure transmitters, manometers, or air velocity gauges to measure air ow in ducts. See Measuring Air Flow in the Technical Reference Section for complete application information. The 160 Series is designed per ASME and meets AMCA and ASHRAE standards. Insertion depth is stamped on the side of the pitot tubes, and the static pressure port is parallel to the sensing tube to allow easy alignment with air ow. A Model A-158 split ange mounting kit allows for simple, leak-free mounting of the 160 Series.
160-12 tube and A-158 mounting ange Air velocity calculator, ow charts, and instructions included 1/4" connections for 3/8" OD tubing Handy A-158 split ange for duct mounting One year warranty
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
8.0 (20.32), 12.0 (30.48), 18.0 (45.72), 24.0 (60.96), 0.5 (1.27) 36.0 (91.44) or 48.0 (121.92)
FLOW
Total pressure connection 5.0 (12.7) 0.31 (0.79) 0.25 (Fits 3/8'' OD (0.64) poly tubing, Model T-110) 3.63 (9.21)
2.66 (6.75)
Static pressure 8 - 0.040 diameter holes (0.10) equally spaced
Total pressure 0.125 diameter hole (0.32) (face into air flow)
Static pressure connection
0.25 (Fits 3/8'' OD (0.64) poly tubing, Model T-110)
Note: See Measuring Airflow in the Technical Reference section for application of 160 Series pilot tubes for flow measurement.
MODEL DESCRIPTION 160 Stainless steel pitot tube LENGTH XX Length (inches) - 8, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 160
CX, RX, XLdp Series M264 Series T-110
18
Example: 160-18 Pitot tube with 18" insertion length

PAGE 1014 901
RELATED PRODUCTS Ashcroft differential pressure transmitters Setra differential pressure transmitter 3/8" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
A-158
ACCESSORIES 160 Series pitot tube mounting ange (required for duct mount)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
277
FLOW
DESCRIPTION
The Kele FXP Series probe is a differential air pressure sensor designed to measure air velocities in HVAC ductwork. It uses multiple sensing points to measure total and static pressures and incorporates a unique design to amplify the differential pressure by approximately 2.5 times for accurate measurement of air velocities down to 200 fpm. It is easy to install and cost effective.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AIR VELOCITY SENSORS FXP SERIES
NEW!
FXP -10
FEATURES
Multiple sensing points for greater accuracy Easy installation Chamfered sensing points for consistent readings 2% accuracy 2.5X signal amplication Accepts 1/4" OD tubing
PERFORMANCE CHART
10.000 FXP Calibration Curve fpm
Check that the FXP probe size corresponds with the duct or terminal where it is installed. The FXP probe is mounted in the duct by drilling a 1" diameter hole. Check that the air ow direction in the duct corresponds with the arrow on the FXP probe. For round ducts, install the FXP probe diagonally in the duct for best results. This equalizes both horizontal and vertical irregular air approach.
FLOW
1.000
SIZING THE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
CFM- Cubic feet per minute (customer furnished) A- Area square feet (customer furnished) V- Velocity feet per minute (customer furnished) P- Differential pressure in WC" Use formula B to calculate the P for transmitter
V(FPM) = CFM A V = Kv * P Formula A
Air Velocity (fpm)

100 0.001
INSTALLATION
0.010 0.100 Differential Pressure ("w.g.) Fpm=2213
1.000 mps=11242
10.000
P = V Kv
Formula B
FXP Calibration Chart Size Kv Size Kv Size 4" 2225 7" 2450 12" 5" 2325 8" 2480 14" 6" 2400 10" 2440 16" 18" and up 2550
Kv 2500 2525 2550
MODEL DESCRIPTION FXP FXP air velocity sensor WIDTH XX Duct width (up to 48")
T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901 M264 Series Setra differential pressure transmitter 1014 CX, RX, XLdp Series Ashcroft differential pressure transmitters
RELATED PRODUCTS
PAGE
278
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

FLOW
AMPLIFLOW AIR VELOCITY SENSOR AMP SERIES
The Kele AMP Series ampliow air velocity sensor is designed to measure air ow velocity in HVAC duct systems. The design of the AMP Series allows it to amplify the velocity pressure by a factor of three, which, in turn, allows low air ow velocities to be accurately measured. Sensing holes along the length of the tube yield an average velocity pressure reading for greater accuracy. The simple design of the AMP Series allows quick, easy installation in new or existing ductwork.
AMP-18
Multipoint readings for average velocity pressure Simple installation Rugged, extruded aluminum construction Double taps allow eld check connections Three-to-one ratio pressure signals Adaptable to round, square, or oval ducts 1/4" barbs for 3/8" OD tubing One year warranty
PERFORMANCE
AMPLIFLOW SENSOR CALIBRATION CURVE
5000 4000 3000 2000
Air Velocity (fpm)
AMPLIFLOW VELOCITY PRESSURE
INSTALLATION
Mount the AMP Series at least three (10 is ideal) duct diameters downstream of coils, dampers, or elbows, and through the width of the duct for best results. Cut a hole 0.75"H x 0.88"W (1.9 x 2.3 cm) in the duct. Drill holes in the opposite side of the duct to allow the eld pressure taps to protrude through the duct. Remove the rubber caps from the eld pressure taps and insert the AMP Series into the duct so that the eld pressure taps protrude. Attach the AMP Series to the duct with sheet metal screws and replace the rubber caps on the eld pressure taps.
1000 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200
FLOW
100
.01
.02
.03
.04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .1
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1.0
1.5 2.0
P Pressure Drop ("W.C.)
Velocity (fpm) = 2213 P Velocity (mps) = 11.242 P
MODEL DESCRIPTION AMP Ampliflow air velocity sensor WIDTH XX Duct width (up to 30")*
Note: The ampliflow will be constructed so that the field pressure taps in the end of the sensing tube protrude through the duct. * Lengths 30'' to 96'' available by special order. Provide field-constructed support for sensors >30''.
Nailor Ind. U.S. Patent No. 4,735,100
PAGE 1014 901
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
279
FLOW
DESCRIPTION
The Kele DPFS Series differential pressure ow sensor is the most economical way to sense airow velocity in VAV ducts, and other small size branch ducts in HVAC systems. The DPFS Series is available in 4 different lengths for ow sensing in duct sizes from 4" to 18" (10 to 46 cm) and can reliably sense velocities above 1000 FPM (feet/minute) or 305 MPM (meters/minute).
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FLOW SENSOR DPFS SERIES
NEW!
FLOW PERFORMANCE
0.900 0.800
Differential Pressure ("WC)
INSTALLATION Select the appropriate DPFS model to t the duct size; the ow sensor length needs to be at least half the duct width in order to get a good reading of the velocity pressure. The DPFS-1 is for 4" to 6" ducts; the DPFS-2 is for 6" to 8" ducts; the DPFS-3 is for 8" to 10" ducts and the DPFS-4 is for 10" to 18" ducts. Mounting the DPFS Series sensor requires a 7/8" (2.2 cm) hole in the duct, through which the probe insert. The DPFS requires 10 straight duct diameters upstream and 10 downstream for accurate readings. The sensor must be mounted with the ow direction arrow accurately pointing in the direction of the airow. To ensure reliable performance, the sensor pickup openings must be kept free of dirt and dust accumulation. Using 1/4" OD poly tubing, connect the DPFS "H" port to a differential pressure gauge or transmitter "High" input port, and the "L" port to the gauge or transmitter's "Low" input port
0.700 0.600 0.500 0.400 0.300 0.200 0.100 0.000 500 DPFS-1 DPFS-2 DPFS-3 DPFS-4
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
Velocity (FPM)
FLOW
DPFS-1 DPFS-2 DPFS-3 DPFS-4
Velocity = 3285(P) Velocity = 3365(P) Velocity = 3490(P) Velocity = 3425(P)
Notes: 1. Test data based on round duct sizes 6" (DPFS-1), 8" (DPFS-2), 10" (DPFS-3) and 12" (DPFS-4 ) 2. Flow coefcients were derived by averaging data for each sensor size.
SPECIFICATIONS
3/16" (0.48 cm) OD connections for 1/4" (0.64 cm) OD poly tubing Operating Temperature 40 to 120F (4 to 49C) Mounting Flange 4" x 2" ange with integral foam gasket and two 3/16" holes spaced 3.3" (8.4 cm) center-to-center Materials Of Construction ABS Dimensions DPFS-1 4.0"W x 2.1"H x 3.6"L (10.2 x 5.3 x 9.1 cm) DPFS-2 4.0"W x 2.1"H x 6.0"L (10.2 x 5.3 x 15.2 cm) Connections DPFS-3 DPFS-4 Approvals Weight DPFS-1 DPFS-2 DPFS-3 DPFS-4 Warranty 4.0"W x 2.1"H x 8.3"L (10.2 x 5.3 x 21.1 cm) 4.0"W x 2.1"H x 10.6"L (10.2 x 5.3 x 26.9 cm) RoHS 0.04 lb (0.02 kg) 0.06 lb (0.03 kg) 0.07 lb (0.032 kg) 0.08 lb (0.036 kg) 2 years
MODEL DPFS-1 DPFS-2 DPFS-3 DPFS-4 DESCRIPTION Differential pressure ow sensor, 3.0" insertion, for 4" to 6" ducts Differential pressure ow sensor, 5.2" insertion, for 6" to 8" ducts Differential pressure ow sensor, 7.5" insertion, for 8" to 10" ducts Differential pressure ow sensor, 9.7" insertion, for 10" to 18" ducts
Cost-saving 10-packs are available; order model with "...-10PAK" suffix.
PAGE 1014 901
280
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FLOW
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FLOW SENSORS SSS-1000 SERIES
The SSS-1000 Series airow sensors sense differential (velocity) pressure of VAV units and other locations in main or branch ducts. Four different lengths allow selection of the sensor to yield accurate readings on terminal box inlet diameters from 4" to 16" (10.2 to 40.6 cm).
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections
Operating Temperature Mounting Length SSS-1002 SSS-1003 SSS-1004 SSS-1005 Storage Temperature Approvals Weight SSS-1002 SSS-1003 SSS-1004 SSS-1005 Warranty
1/4" (6.4 mm) OD connections, t 3/8" (9.5 mm) OD polyethylene tubing 40F to 120F (4C to 49C) Integral ange with foam gasket 3.16" (8.0 cm) insertion (one sensing point) 5.41" (13.7 cm) insertion (two sensing points) 7.66" (19.4 cm) insertion (three sensing points) 9.91" (25.2 cm) insertion (four sensing points) -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) RoHS 0.04 lb (0.02 kg) 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) 0.06 lb (0.03 kg) 0.07 lb (0.03 kg) 2 years
SSS-1000 Series
PERFORMANCE
DIMENSIONS
P Inches "W.C.
FLOW
in (cm)
3.5 (8.89)
H L
1.25 (3.18) Flow 0.1875 (0.477) diameter mounting holes (2) 2.75 (6.99)
1000 2000
Velocity (fpm)
SSS-1002 SSS-1003 SSS-1004 SSS-1005 Velocity = 3450 Velocity = 3300 Velocity = 3200 Velocity = 3200 P P P P
Note: See specications for insertion dimensions
INSTALLATION
The SSS-1000 Series sensor requires a 7/8" (2.22 cm) diameter cutout for the insertion portion and two pilot holes for sheet metal screws or rivets to hold the ange against the ductwork. Sensors should be installed as level as possible to ensure accurate velocity pressure readings.
Model SSS-1002 SSS-1003 SSS-1004 SSS-1005 Description Differential pressure ow sensor, 3.16" insertion Differential pressure ow sensor, 5.41" insertion Differential pressure ow sensor, 7.66" insertion Differential pressure ow sensor, 9.91" insertion ACCESSORIES PAGE Barb coupling, 3/8" OD tubing to 1/4" OD tubing 903 RELATED PRODUCTS Ashcroft differential pressure transmitters Setra differential pressure transmitter 3/8" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) PAGE 1014 901
B-265 CX, RX, XLdp Series M264 Series T-110
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
281
FLOW
AIR VELOCITY TRANSMITTERS EE65 AND EE66 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The E+E EE65 and EE66 Series airow velocity transmitters are ideal for accurate ventilation control applications. They incorporate innovative hot lm anemometer technology which guarantees good accuracy at low airow velocity and is superior to conventional anemometers with commercial temperature sensors or NTC bead thermistors. The hot lm sensor is also less sensitive to dust and dirt, for high reliability and low maintenance costs. The EE65 and EE66 series are available with current or voltage output with the measuring range and the response time jumper selectable in the eld. The EE66 is specically designed for very low airow velocities and is accurate down to approximately 30 fpm (0.15 m/s). FEATURES
NEW!
EE65-01-VB5
Adjustable insertion length for precise measurement Jumper selectable ranges and outputs for application exibility Jumper selectable time constant for signal stability Dust and splash-proof NEMA 4 (IP65) enclosure allows installation in potentially wet areas Very low ow velocity EE66 model for clean rooms and other low velocity applications
DIMENSIONS
0.47 (12.0) 1.46 (37.2)
WIRING
Power supply 24 VAC/VDC 20%
+ ~
0.71 (18.0) A
3.15 (80.0)
FLOW
V+ GND AV V/mA
V+ = supply voltage GND = ground AV = airflow output
1 2 3
A = 3.9" (100) or 7.9" (200) 3.15 (80.0)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Output Signal Loads Wiring 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz, 24 VDC 20% 150 mA @ 24 VAC, 90 mA @ 24 VDC 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA; jumper selectable 0-10 VDC output, 10k minimum resistance; 4-20 mA output, 450 maximum resistance Terminal strip with 1/2" NPT conduit connector or M16x1.5 cable gland for 0.18" to 0.39" (0.45 to 10.0 cm) cable diameter 40 fpm (0.2 m/s), plus 3% of measured value, at 68F (20C) and 45% RH 7.9 fpm (0.04 m/s), plus 2% of measured value, at 68F (20C) and 45% RH 0.7 or 4 seconds, jumper selectable Probe= Electronics= Velocity Range EE65 EE66 Enclosure Rating Dimensions -VB3 -VB5 Weight -VB3 -VB5 Approvals Warranty -13F to 122F (-25C to 50C) 14F to 122F (-10C to 50C) 0-2000 fpm (0-10 m/s), 0-3000 fpm (0-15 m/s) or 0-4000 fpm (0-20 m/s) 0-200 fpm (0-1.0 m/s), 0-300 fpm (0-1.5 m/s) or 0-400 fpm (0-2.0 m/s) NEMA 4 (IP 65) 3.2"H x 3.2"W x 5.4"D (8.0 x 8.0 x 13.7 cm) 3.2"H x 3.2"W x 9.3"D (8.0 x 8.0 x 23.7 cm) 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) 0.30 lb (0.14 kg) CE, RoHS 1 year
Accuracy EE65 EE66 Response Time Operating Temperature
MODEL EE65-01-VB3 EE65-01-VB5 EE66-01-VB3 EE66-01-VB5 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DESCRIPTION Air velocity transmitter, probe length 3.9" (100 mm) Air velocity transmitter, probe length 7.9" (200 mm) Low ow transmitter, probe length 3.9" (100 mm) Low ow transmitter, probe length 7.9" (200 mm) RELATED PRODUCTS Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT PAGE 979 995
282
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Three DIP switch-selectable velocity ranges Two analog outputs Selectable time constant Dust- and splash-proof (IP44) enclosure
FLOW
AIR VELOCITY TRANSMITTER AVS-200
The Kele AVS-200 is an electronic air velocity transmitter for use in HVAC systems, laboratories, and industrial applications. It features three DIP switch-selectable velocity ranges and two analog outputs (one voltage, one current). The AVS-200 also has a selectable time constant (the time it takes to register 63.2% of a velocity change) of 3 or 10 seconds. The sensing probe has an adjustable insertion length of up to 8" (20.3 cm) and a 4.5' (1.4 m) cable. AVS-200
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA Output Signal Loads Wiring Accuracy Repeatability Temperature Effect 24 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz 5 VA 0-10 VDC, 0/4-20 mA 0-10 VDC output: 1k minimum resistance; 4-20 mA output: 600 maximum resistance 4.5' (1.4 m) cable from transmitter to probe; screw terminals inside transmitter housing 5% of measured value plus 0.5% of measuring range 0.5% of measuring range Maximum 0.1%/C (0.2%/F) Time Constant 63.2% for 3 or 10 seconds Operating Temperature Electronics 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Sensing Tip -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Velocity Range 0-1000 fpm (0.5.1 m/s), 0-2000 fpm (10.2 m/s), or 0-3000 fpm (0-15.3 m/s); DIP switch selectable Probe Length Range Adjustable 1" to 8" (2.5 to 20.3 cm) Enclosure Rating IP44 Approvals CE, RoHS Weight 1.8 lb (0.8 kg) Warranty 1 year
FLOW
WIRING
AVS-200
Internal Connection
INSTALLATION
The sensing probe must be installed through a 5/8"(16mm) hole in the duct with the arrow on the mounting ange pointing in the direction of the airow. The tab on the mounting ange should be aligned with the line on the probe to ensure proper airow measurement. The insertion length is adjustable. Loosen the set screw, and move the probe to the selected position. The scale on the probe shows the insertion length. Always install the sensing probe downstream of lters and coils. Avoid placement directly in the outside air stream. For best accuracy, locate the sensing probe a minimum of 10 duct diameters (or widths) upstream of any obstruction and a minimum of 10 duct diameters downstream.
24 VAC
0-20 mA or 4-20 mA 0-10 VDC Common
Note: Any device sharing a transformer with the AVS-200 must have a common power negative "-" and signal negative "-" terminal, and polarity must be observed. Otherwise, a separate transformer must be used.

MODEL AVS-200 691-K0A
ORDERING INFORMATION DESCRIPTION Air velocity transmitter RELATED PRODUCTS Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 PAGE 979
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
283
FLOW
AIR FLOW A2G-20 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Wika A2G-20 Series air velocity transmitter is jumper selectable and features a separate signal out for temperature, three velocity ranges, and one temperature range. Applications include supply and exhaust fan tracking; clean room air; lab air handling and paint booth supply air. For both the air velocity (FPM) and for the temperature signals, the user can select either of two outputs (0-10V or 4-20 mA). Additional options include a digital display and a SPDT relay. The digital display shows both the measured value and the relay settings.
NEW!
A2G-20 Series Accuracy >1.2F (<0.5C) (Temperature) Velocity Range (Air) 0 to 390 FPM 2 m/s range selectable by jumper 0 to 1,970 FPM 10 m/s range selectable by jumper 0 to 3940 FPM 20 m/s range selectable by jumper Temperature Range 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C), max. 85% rH Enclosure Rating Plastic (ABS) Nema 3 Approvals RoHS, WEEE Warranty 1 year
FEATURES
Three ranges; jumper selectable: 0 to 390 FPM, 0 to 1970 FPM, 0 to 3940 FPM One temperature range 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) User selectable output signals: 0-10V or 4-20 mA Duct installation
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Output Signal (Air Velocity) Output Signal (Temperature) Wiring Accuracy (Air) 0 to 390 FPM 0 to 1,970 FPM 0 to 3940 FPM AC/DC 24V 10% 0-10 V (linear to FPM), load min or 4-20 mA (linear to FPM), load max 0-10 V (linear to F), load min 1k or 4-20 mA (linear to F), load max 400 PG-gland M16 <19.6 FPM (5%) <98.1 FPM (5%) <196.2 FPM (5%)
WIRING
284
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL A2G20-V00-3X-1AAF-M-Z A2G20-V00-3X-1AAF-M-A A2G20-V00-3X-1AAF-M-B DESCRIPTION Air velocity transmitter, no digital display and no relay Air velocity transmitter with digital display, no relay Air velocity transmitter with digital display and SPDT relay
FLOW
AIR FLOW A2G-20 SERIES
FLOW
DCPA-1.2 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
285
FLOW
THERMAL MASS FLOW METER FT2A SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Fox FT2A Series thermal mass ow meters are perfect for measuring ow of natural gas, compressed air, propane, oxygen, and most common gases. The ow meters measure both ow rate and temperature with isolated 4-20 mA outputs for both variables. In addition, a separate pulse output can be used for logging total gas ow. The FT2A mass ow meters measure gas ow velocity as low as 50 sfpm (standard feet/ minute) and as high as 50,000 sfpm, without the need for temperature or pressure compensation. Each ow meter is calibrated at the factory using the same gas as the application. As a result, the FT2A more than meets EPA accuracy requirements for monitoring both boiler intake gas and combustion emissions. Standard models include a 2 line x 16 character bright white backlit display for viewing ow rate, ow total, elapsed time, process gas temperature and alarms. The FT2A has an integral keypad for setting parameters such as signal spans, pulse frequency scaling, pipe area, zero cutoff, ltering, diagnostics and alarms. The FT2A Series is available in two styles, inline or insertion. The inline models (male NPT) include built-in ow conditioners which reduce the need for long straight runs of upstream and downstream pipe. The most common inline sizes are 1/2" to 2" and other inline sizes are available. The insertion models install in a 3/4" coupling (eld provided) and are available in insertion lengths to t pipes from 1-1/2" to 72". Both inline and insertion styles come standard with stainless steel wetted parts, an integral NEMA 4X enclosure rated for Class I, Div. 2, Groups B,C,D hazardous areas, and a NIST calibration certicate.
NEW!
C
FM
US
APPROVED
APPLICATION
Natural gas, air, ammonia, biogas, butane, compressed air, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, ethane, ethylene, helium, hydrogen, methane, nitrogen, oxygen, propane, and more
FEATURES
Measures gas ow rate in SCFM, SCFH, NM3M, NM3H, KG/M, KG/H, and more, for complete choice in units Two 4-20 mA analog outputs, ow rate and temperature RS485-Modbus, Isolated BACnet MS/TP, Probus-DP, DeviceNet and Ethernet Modbus TCP models available for network communication Insertion or inline mounting styles for installation choices All welded 316SS sensor construction and no moving parts for durability and long life Field programmable for exibility in conguration Standard NEMA 4X enclosure designed for Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, and D NIST traceable calibration standard to assure accuracy Free FT2A View Software available
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Watts Output Signal 24 VDC 10%, 85-264 VAC 50/60 Hz 20 Watts DC, 12 Watts AC 2 isolated 4-20 mA outputs (one for ow and one for temperature); 1 isolated pulse output 0-100Hz, 10V p/p for ow (can be used for alarming) Two 3/4" NPT conduit connections on sides of housing Screw terminals USB Port-optional: for connection to computer, models available with RS485-Modbus BACnet MS/TP, Probus-DP, DeviceNet and Ethernet Modbus TCP Flow: 1% of reading, 0.2% of full scale 1.8F (1.0C) over -40 to 250F (-40 to 121C) 0.2% of full scale 1/2" MNPT pipe section to 2" MNPT pipe section (standard inline), 3/4" MNPT coupling, 6" length probe for 1-1/2" to 6" pipes (standard insertion, other lengths available) Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Media Compatibility Standard conguration for natural gas; other gases such as air, biogas, butane, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, methane, oxygen, propane, etc. optional. Media Temperature Range -40 to 250F (-40 to 121C) Maximum Pressure Rating 300 psig (21 bar) Materials Of Construction 316 stainless steel sensor and ow body Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X, designed for Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C & D hazardous areas Approvals CE, FM/FMc Weight 8.0 lb (3.6 kg) to 10.0 lb (4.5 kg) inline models, 6.0 lb (2.7 kg) 6" insertion model Warranty 1 year
Wiring Wiring Terminations Communication Interface Accuracy Temperature Repeatability Mounting
286
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

Figure 4: 4 to 20mA Output Wiring for Loop Power Provided by FT2A

Figure 5: Frequency/Alarm Output Isolated (Recommended)
24V

+ -

FT2A
Customer PLC or DCS

+
4 to 20mA FLOW RATE

+
4 to 20mA TEMPERATURE OR FLOW RATE

-

DIMENSIONS
3.3 (8.4) 1.50 (3.8)
Input Power
Input Power Signal Wiring
5.35 (13.6)
1.4 (3.5)
7.12 (18.1)
7.12 (18.1)
Female
MODEL TFH1000
Gas Mass Flowmeter & Temperature Transmitter
2x NPT Male Thread

C L
C L
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Figure 1: Connections for 24VDC Supply +24VDC 24V Return Earth Ground (+) (-)( )
FLOW
Figure 2: Connections for Optional AC Power
Earth Ground AC AC
Figure 3: 4 to 20mA Output Wiring for Customer-Supplied Power Source

FT2A
Customer PLC or DCS

+24VDC 4 to 20mA FLOW RATE

24VDC Return +24VDC 4 to 20mA TEMPERATURE OR FLOW RATE
24VDC Return

FT2A
Customer PLC or DCS
FLOW
+24VDC 2.4K to 10K OHM Frequency or Alarm Output 24VDC Return

3.9 (10.0)
3.2 (8.1)
Signal Wiring
2x 3/4 inch NPT Female
MODEL TFH1000
Gas Mass Flowmeter & Temperature Transmitter
HH
LL
FLOW
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
287
FLOW

MODEL FT2A
DESCRIPTION Gas Mass Flowmeter PROBE/BODY 05P 1/2" MNPT Inline, ow range 0-48 scfm 075P 3/4" MNPT Inline, ow range 0-120 scfm 10P 1" MNPT Inline, ow range 0-192 scfm 125P 1 1/4" MNPT Inline, ow range 0-320 scfm 15P 1 1/2" MNPT Inline, ow range 0-450 scfm 20P 2" MNPT Inline, ow range 0-750 scfm 06IE Insertion, 6" probe, ow range (see table) SENSOR MATERIAL SS 316 Stainless steel sensor and owbody SENSOR TYPE ST Standard, -40-250F (-40-121C) ENCLOSURE/POWER E1 Local NEMA 4X, 24 VDC Power E2 Local NEMA 4X, 85-264 VAC Power BUS OPTIONS B0 No communication bus
NEW!
MB Modbus, BN, BACnet, MS/TP
FLOW
BN BACnet, MS/TP BD DeviceNet BP ProBus-DP BE Ethernet Modbus TCP CALIBRATION G1 Air, N2; max ow less than 1200 SCFM (2040 NM3H) G2 Air, N2; max ow greater than 1200 SCFM (2040 NM3H) Ar, CO2, H2, CH4, Natural Gas, O2; max ow less than 1000 SCFM G3 (1700 NM3H) Ar, CO2, H2, CH4, Natural Gas, O2; max ow greater than 1000 G4 SCFM (1700 NM3H) CO, He, Ammonia, Propane, Digester gas; max ow less than 700 G5 SCFM (1190 NM3H) CO, He, Ammonia, Propane, Digester gas; max ow greater than 700 G6 SCFM (1190 NM3H) Example: FT2A-05P-SS-ST-E1-B0-G3; 1/2" NPT inline, 316SS, standard temp., 24 VDC power, display/keypad, no communication, for natural gas <1000 SCFM. NOTE: An FT2A Series Application Data form must be lled out and sent in with the purchase order. Details regarding application and media parameters are required for factory calibration. The form is located at www.kele. com under Flow/FT2 Series/Related Products.
102299 102878 104870 DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
ACCESSORIES PAGE 90 elbow mounting kit, makes housing upright in vertical pipe installations Teon ferrule kit, for ease in removal of the insertion models USB Cable Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC Out 995 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994
288
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Direct insertion or hot tap installation Fits pipe sizes 1.5" to 36"+ (3.8 to 91+ cm) Mounts in 1" NPT tap, weld-on or pipe saddle Low pressure drop Optional 8 character 3/8" (0.95 cm) LCD NEMA 4X enclosure standard Bidirectional models available Field programmable with optional software
FLOW
FLOW SENSOR WITH INTEGRAL FLOW TRANSMITTER SDI SERIES
The Badger Meter SDI Series ow sensor has an integral transmitter and is available in either brass or stainless steel. Hot tap stainless steel models include isolation valve and mounting hardware which enables owmeter installation and removal while the piping system is pressurized; system shutdown is unnecessary. Hot tap stainless steel models are also available for bidirectional ow measurement. The impeller is rugged and non-fouling and requires no custom calibration. The SDI Series is available with a frequency output, analog output, or a scaled-pulse output and the display is optional; programming is done using the A301-20 Programming Kit. Stainless steel models are available with a PEEK (polyetheretherketone) tip for high uid temperatures (up to 300 F).
SDI Series
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 8-35 VDC 25 mA Supply Current Maximum Output Impedance 750 @ 24 VDC Output Signal Models with standard frequency pulse, two-wire 4-20 mA, scaled pulse, or bi-directional (hot-tap models only) Wiring Terminations Screw terminals 1/2" FNPT Conduit Connection Conguration A-SDI Programming software kit, includes 20' cable 1% of ow rate Accuracy Repeatability 0.5% Display One line, eight character 3/8" (.95 cm) LCD, annunciators for rate, total, input, output Operating Temperature 14 to 150F (20 to 65C) Velocity Range 0.3 to 20 fps (.09 to 6.1 mps) Installation Install in straight pipe section with a minimum distance of 10 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream to any bend, obstruction or transition Mounting 1" MNPT, mount in Thredolet or pipe saddle Media Temperature Range Maximum 300F (149C) for PEEK tip; 180F (82C) for PPS tip Maximum Pressure 1000 psig (6895 kPa) for stainless steel, 600 psig (4137 kPa) for brass Pressure Drop 0.5 psid (3.5 kPa), or less, at 10 fps velocity Materials Of Construction Polypropylene enclosure with Viton sealed dacrylic cover, probe and sensor materials vary by model number (see ORDERING INFORMATION) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X Warranty 1 year
MODEL DESCRIPTION SDI Flow sensor with integral transmitter MATERIAL 0D1N Stainless steel insertion with PPS tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes 0D2N Stainless steel insertion with PPS tip for 12"" to 36" pipes 0D3N Stainless steel insertion with PPS tip for 36"+ pipes 1D1N Brass insertion with PPS tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes 1D2N Brass insertion with PPS tip for 12" to 36" pipes 1D3N Brass insertion with PPS tip for 36"+ pipes 2D1N Stainless steel insertion with PEEK tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes 2D2N Stainless steel insertion with PEEK tip for 12" to 36" pipes 2D3N Stainless steel insertion with PEEK tip for 36"+ pipes 0H1N Stainless steel hot tap with PPS tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes 0H2N Stainless steel hot tap with PPS tip for 12" to 36" pipes 0H3N Stainless steel hot tap with PPS tip for 36"+ pipes 2H1N Stainless steel hot tap with PEEK tip for 1.5" to 10" pipes 2H2N Stainless steel hot tap with PEEK tip for 12" to 36" pipes 2H3N Stainless steel hot tap with PEEK tip for 36"+ pipes OUTPUT 0 Standard frequency pulse 1 4-20 mA 2 Scaled pulse 5 Bidirectional, 4-20 mA + direction (hot tap, PPS tip only) 6 Bidirectional, scaled pulse (hot tap, PPS tip only) DISPLAY 0 No display 1 LCD option (not available with output option 0) CONSTRUCTION 0200 Viton O-ring, Carbide shaft, stainless steel impeller, Torlon bearing (std) 1200 EPDM O-ring, Carbide shaft, stainless steel impeller, Torlon bearing SDI 2D1N 1 1 0200 Example: SDI2D1N11200 Flow sensor with integral transmitter, stainless steel insertion with PEEK tip, 4-20 mA output, display, standard construction.
FLOW
8132030 A-1027 A301-20
ACCESSORIES Replacement ball valve for hot tap install Hot tap adapter nipple, required for hot tap Flow/BTU transmitter programming kit, Includes cable
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
289
FLOW
FLOW SENSORS 200 SERIES OVERVIEW
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 200 Series ow sensors feature a sixbladed impeller with a proprietary nonmagnetic sensing mechanism. The design provides higher and more constant torque than four-bladed impeller designs and is less prone to be fouled by waterborne debris. The forward curveshape, coupled with the absence of magnetic drag, provides improved operation and repeatability at lower ow rates. This is especially true where the impeller is exposed to metallic or rust particles found in steel or iron pipes. As the liquid ow turns the impeller, a low impedance signal is transmitted with a frequency proportional to the ow rate. This signal can travel up to 2,000' (610m) between the sensor and the transmitter without the need for amplication. All sensors are supplied with 20' (6.10m) of Belden type 9320 (two-conductor shielded) cable. Standard construction of the 200 Series sensors consists of EPDM O-rings, tungsten carbide shaft, nylon impeller, and UHMWPE bearings. A complete line of ow transmitters is available for use with these ow sensors. The 200 Series can be used for potable water and the following pages contain details on each model.
NEW!
228 SS-2 226B 250B 220B 225B
FLOW
SELECTION CHART
MODEL 220B 220SS 225B 226B 226SS 228C-2 228B-2 228SS-2 250B 228PV 4000 Series DESCRIPTION Brass, insertion type Stainless steel, insertion type Brass, retractable with gate valve Brass, retractable with ball valve Stainless steel, retractable with ball valve Brass sensor in a 2" (5.08 cm) cast iron tee Brass sensor in a 2" (5.08 cm) brass tee Stainless steel sensor in a 2" (5.08 cm) stainless steel tee Removable sensor in a cast bronze tee Removable sensor in a PVC tee PVC PIPE SIZE in (cm) 2-1/2 (6.35) and up 2-1/2 (6.35) and up 2-1/2 (6.35) and up 2-1/2 (6.35) and up 2-1/2 (6.35) and up 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 1/2 (1.27) , 3/4 (1.91), 1 (2.54), 1-1/4 (3.18), 1-1/2 (3.81) 1-1/2 to 4 (3.81 to 10.16) PVC 1/2 (1.27), 3/4 (1.91), 1 (2.54) PVC
March 2014
290
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Connections MODEL 220B 220SS 310-00 UFT-1A 230-FRK 2X2.5-3THD 2X4-6THD 2X8-36THD
FLOW
BRASS & STAINLESS STEEL FLOW SENSORS 220B, 220SS
The 220B (brass) and 220SS (stainless steel) ow sensors mount in a 2" NPT pipe saddle or Thredolet and are used in general ow measuring applications in metallic or PVC pipes from 2-1/2" to 40" (6.4 to 101 cm) size. Positioning nuts on the three threaded retaining rods allow the sensor to be accurately positioned to a standard insertion depth of 1-1/2" into the pipe. When this insertion depth is maintained, and there are at least 10 upstream and 5 downstream diameters of straight uninterrupted ow, an accuracy of 1% of actual ow rate can be obtained between ow velocities of 0.5 to 30 ft/sec. The standard 200 Series ow sensor are rated for water temperatures to 221 F. For higher temperature requirements, see the SDI Series.
220B
2" MNPT (mount in Thredolet or tee) Wiring 20' (6.1 m) Belden 9320 twoconductor shielded cable Accuracy 1% of full scale 0.3% of full scale Repeatability Linearity 0.2% of full scale Rangeability 60:1 Velocity Range 0.5 to 30 fps (.15 to 9.0 mps) Media Compatibility Hot water, chilled water, water/glycol, potable water (verify application is compatible with ow sensor materials of construction, check material compatibility resources prior to ordering) Media Temperature Range Maximum 221F (105C) Maximum Pressure 400 psig (2758 kPa) @ 100F (37.8C) media temperature
Materials Of Construction 220B Standard construction is Admiralty brass UNS C44300 sleeve, glassreinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order). 220SS Standard construction is 300 series stainless steel sleeve, glassreinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order). Dimensions 7.1"H x 3" diameter (18.1 x 7.6 cm) Approvals CE Weight 4.1 lb (1.9 kg) Warranty 1 year
FLOW
DESCRIPTION Brass ow sensor Stainless steel ow sensor RELATED PRODUCTS Programmable analog flow transmitter Universal flow transmitter, pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output ACCESSORIES Repair kit for 200 Series flow sensors (includes impeller, shaft, bearing, and O-ring) 2" Thredolet for 2-1/2" and 3" pipes 2" Thredolet for 4", 5" and 6" pipes 2" Thredolet for 8" to 36" pipes PAGE 296 297
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
291
FLOW
HOT TAP FLOW SENSORS 225B, 226B, 226SS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 225B, 226B, 226SS Series hot tap ow sensors feature an elongated sensor, special mounting adapter, pipe nipple, and isolation valve to allow the nonmagnetic impeller sensor to be installed into a pressurized pipe while the pipe is in service. This is accomplished by rst attaching a 2'' saddle or Thredolet onto the pipe and screwing the nipple and isolation valve into the saddle or tting. A hole is then drilled through the pipe using a commercial tapping machine. When complete, the tapping apparatus is removed, the isolation valve is closed, and the sensor is installed. The 225B, 226B, 226SS Series can be used for pipe sizes 2-1/2" to 40" (6.4 to 101 cm). The hot tap ow sensor is also recommended for any application where it would be difcult to shut down or drain the pipeline to remove the sensor for service. The overall length of the sensor tube is 18" (46 cm); however, a clearance height of 36" (91 cm) should be allowed for the fully extended length of the insertion tool.
NEW!
Model 225B Model HTT Model 226B
226SS Dimensions Approvals Weight 225B 226B, 226SS HTT Warranty UNS C44300 sleeve, glass-reinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order). Standard construction is 300 series stainless steel sleeve, glass-reinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order). 18"H x 3" diameter (46 x 7.6 cm) plus valve handle CE 17.5 lb (7.9 kg) 13.0 lb (5.9 kg) 12.0 lb (5.4 kg) 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections Wiring 2" MNPT 20' (6.1 m) two-conductor 20 AWG U.L. Type PTLC shielded cable Accuracy 1% of full scale Repeatability 0.3% of full scale Linearity 0.2% of full scale Rangeability 60:1 Velocity Range 0.5 to 30 fps (.15 to 9.0 mps) Media Compatibility Hot water, chilled water, water/glycol, potable water (verify application is compatible with ow sensor materials of construction, check material compatibility resources prior to ordering) Media Temperature Range Maximum 221F (105C) Maximum Pressure 225B 300 psig (2069 kPa) @ 100F (37.8C) media temperature 226B, 226SS 400 psig (2758 kPa) @ 100F (37.8C) media temperature Materials Of Construction 225B, 226B Standard construction is Admiralty brass
FLOW
MODEL 225B 226B 226SS
230-FRK 2X2.5-3THD 2X4-6THD 2X8-36THD 813144-1211 HTT 81873
DESCRIPTION Brass hot tap ow sensor with gate-type isolation valve Brass hot tap ow sensor with ball-type isolation valve Stainless steel hot tap ow sensor with ball-type isolation valve
ACCESSORIES Repair kit for 200 Series ow sensors (includes impeller, shaft, bearing, and O-ring) 2" Thredolet for 2-1/2" and 3" pipes 2" Thredolet for 4", 5" and 6" pipes 2" Thredolet for 8" to 36" pipes Replacement sleeve assembly for 225B, 226B ow sensors Hot tap tool Replacement gate valve for 225B, 2"
310-00 UFT-1A
RELATED PRODUCTS Programmable analog flow transmitter Universal flow transmitter, pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output
PAGE 296 297
292
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Connection Type 228B 228C, 228SS Wiring
FLOW
TEE-MOUNTED FLOW SENSORS 228B, 228C, 228SS
The Badger Meter 228B is a brass ow sensor mounted in a 2" bronze tee with 2" copper solder couplings included, the 228C is a brass ow sensor mounted in a 2" cast iron tee, and the 228SS is a stainless steel ow sensor mounted in a 2" stainless steel tee.
228 SS-2
2" solder 2" FNPT 20' (6.1 m) 2-conductor 20 AWG shielded UL type PTLC wire, rated to 221F (105C). May be extended to 2000 maximum with similar cable 1% of full scale Accuracy Repeatability 0.3% of full scale Linearity 0.2% of full scale 0.5 to 30 fps (.15 to 9.0 mps) Velocity Range Hot water, chilled water, water/glycol, Media Compatibility potable water (verify application is compatible with ow sensor materials of construction, check material compatibility resources prior to ordering) Media Temperature Range Maximum 221F (105C) Maximum Pressure 228B 200 psig (1379 kPa) @ 100F (37.8C) media temperature 228C 175 psig (1207 kPa) @ 100F (37.8C) media temperature 228SS 400 psig (2758 kPa) @ 100F (37.8C) media temperature Materials Of Construction 228B Standard construction is cast bronze tee (Class 125 per ASME B16.15), copper couplings, admiralty brass UNS C44300 sleeve, glass-reinforced nylon impeller,
228C
228SS
Dimensions Approvals Weight 228B 228C 228SS Warranty
Pennlon UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order). Standard construction is cast iron tee (class 125 per ASME B16.4), admiralty brass UNS C44300 sleeve, glassreinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order). Standard construction is 316 stainless steel tee, 300 series SS sleeve, glassreinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings (other materials available special order). 8.4"H x 7.9"W x 3.0"D (21.3 x 20.0 x 7.6 cm) CE 8.8 (4.0 kg) 7.2 lb (3.3 kg) 12.0 lb (5.4 kg) 1 year
FLOW
MODEL 228B-2 228C-2 228SS-2 230-FRK 813124-1211 310-00 UFT-1A DESCRIPTION Brass ow sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 cm) bronze tee (copper solder couplings included) Brass ow sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 cm) cast iron pipe tee Stainless steel ow sensor mounted in a 2" (5.08 cm) stainless steel pipe tee ACCESSORIES Repair kit for 200 Series flow sensors (includes impeller, shaft, bearing, and O-ring) Replacement sleeve assembly for 220B, 228B, 228BC flow sensors RELATED PRODUCTS Programmable analog flow transmitter Universal flow transmitter, pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output PAGE 296 297
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
293
FLOW
TEE MOUNTED FLOW SENSOR 250B
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 250B Series ow sensors consist of a removable ow sensor mounted in a cast bronze housing. They are available for 1/2'' to 1-1/2'' (1.3 to 3.8 cm) pipe sizes.
NEW!
250B-0.5 reinforced nylon impeller, Pennlon UHMWPE bearings, tungsten carbide shaft, glass reinforced PPS housing, and ethylene propylene EPDM o-rings Dimensions 250B-0.5, -0.75 250B-1 250B-1.25 250B-1.5 Approvals Weight 250B-0.5 250B-0.75 250B-1 250B-1.25 250B-1.5 Warranty 4.6"H x 4.0"W x 1.6"D (11.7 x 10.2 x 4.1 cm) 4.8"H x 5.5"W x 2.1"D (12.2 x 14.0 x 5.3 cm) 5.0"H x 6.1"W x 2.4"D (12.7 x 15.5 x 6.1 cm) 5.2"H x 6.5"W x 2.6"D (13.2 x 16.5 x 6.6 cm) CE 4.6 lb (2.1 kg) 4.8 lb (2.2 kg) 6.2 lb (2.8 kg) 6.5 lb (2.9 kg) 7.6 lb (3.4 kg) 1 year
6
SPECIFICATIONS
Connection Type Wiring 1/2" FNPT to 1-1/2" FNPT 20' (6.1 m) 2-conductor 20 AWG shielded UL type PTLC wire, rated to 221F (105C). May be extended to 2000' maximum with similar cable Accuracy 1% of full scale Repeatability 0.7% of full scale Linearity 0.7% of full scale Rangeability 60:1 Velocity Range 0.3 to 15 fps (.09 to 4.5 mps) Media Compatibility Hot water, chilled water, water/glycol, potable water (verify application is compatible with ow sensor materials of construction, check material compatibility resources prior to ordering) Media Temperature Range Maximum 221F (105C) Maximum Pressure 400 psig (2758 kPa) @ 100F (37.8C) media temperature Materials Of Construction Cast bronze UNS C83600 tee, glass-
FLOW
MODEL 250B-0.5 250B-0.75 250B-1 250B-1.25 250B-1.5 310-00 813107-1211 UFT-1A DESCRIPTION Brass ow sensor mounted in a 1/2" (1.3 cm) NPT bronze pipe tee Brass ow sensor mounted in a 3/4" (1.9 cm) NPT bronze pipe tee Brass ow sensor mounted in a 1" (2.5 cm) NPT bronze pipe tee Brass ow sensor mounted in a 1-1/4" (3.2 cm) NPT bronze pipe tee Brass ow sensor mounted in a 1-1/2" (3.8 cm) NPT bronze pipe tee RELATED PRODUCTS Programmable analog flow transmitter Replacement sensor assembly for 250B, includes 20' cable Universal flow transmitter, pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output PAGE 296 297
294
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Connection Type Wiring MODEL 228PV1505-1211 228PV2005-1211 228PV3005-1211 228PV4005-1211
FLOW
PVC TEE FLOW SENSORS 228PV SERIES
The Badger Meter 228PV ow sensors are designed to measure water ow in PVC pipes. These sensors consist of a removable, nonmagnetic sensor in a schedule 80 PVC tee with solvent-weld socket end connections. They are available in 1-1/2" to 4" (3.8 to 10.2 cm) sizes.
228PV
Schedule 80 PVC 20' (6.1 m), 20 AWG two-conductor shielded UL type PTLC cable, rated to 221F (105C), may be extended to 2000' maximum with similar cable Accuracy 1% of full scale Repeatability 0.3% of full scale Linearity 0.2% of full scale Pulse Rate 3.2 to 200 Hz, 5 ms 25% width, 9-20 VDC power @ 2 mA maximum; 5V CMOS and LSTTL compatible Velocity Range 0.5 to 30 fps (0.15 to 9 mps) Media Compatibility Hot water, chilled water (verify application is compatible with ow sensor materials of construction, check material compatibility resources prior to ordering) Media Temperature Range Maximum 140F (60C) Maximum Pressure 100 psig (689 kPa) @ 77F (25C) media temperature, decreasing to 40 psig (276 kPa) @ 140F (60C)
Materials Of Construction PVC per ASTM D-2462 and D-2467 virgin unplasticized PVC resin, approved for potable water, PPS housing, EPDM o-ring, tungsten shaft, nylon impeller, Pennlon bearings Dimensions 228PV1505 5.2"H x 5.0"W x 2.4"D (13.1 x 12.7 x 6.0 cm) 228PV2005 5.6"H x 5.6"W x 2.9"D (14.3 x 14.3 x 7.3 cm) 228PV3005 6.8"H x 6.5"W x 4.2"D (17.3 x 16.5 x 10.7 cm) 228PV4005 6.8"H x 7.4"W x 5.4"D (17.3 x 18.7 x 13.7 cm) Approvals CE Weight 228PV1505 1.0 lb (.45 kg) 228PV2005 1.0 lb (.45 kg) 228PV3005 1.5 lb (.68 kg) 228PV4005 2.5 lb (1.1 kg) 1 year Warranty
FLOW
DESCRIPTION Flow sensor in 1-1/2" PVC tee, pulse output Flow sensor in 2" PVC tee, pulse output Flow sensor in 3" PVC tee, pulse output Flow sensor in 4" PVC tee, pulse output
UFT-1A
RELATED PRODUCTS Universal flow transmitter, pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output
PAGE 297
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
295
FLOW
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 310 Series programmable analog ow transmitter is a loop-powered device that converts the signal from a 200 or 4000 Series ow sensor into a linear 4-20 mA signal. An integral, adjustable electronic lter dampens the analog output for smooth, stable operation. The microprocessor-based 310 Series can be ordered precongured, or it can be eld-congured with a computer. An A301-20 Programming Kit will congure all 310 Series transmitters. FEATURES 4-20 mA loop powered Compact size Computer programmable Electronic signal dampening
PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG FLOW TRANSMITTER 310 SERIES
NEW!
310-00
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Input Signal Output Signal Maximum Output Impedance Conguration Loop powered, 9-35 VDC 0.4 to 10 kHz, unscaled raw pulses from Data Industrial ow sensor, or sine wave 4-20 mA, 2-wire 750 @ 24 VDC A301-20 programming kit (order separately) cable connects to DIC communication port and DB9 COM port on a computer. Transmitter must be looppowered for programming (9-24 VDC will work) 0.04% of reading over entire span Varies with lter, typically 1 second 10% to 90% step response -20 to 158F (-29 to 70C) Surface mount, transmitter only Surface mount, in NEMA 4X enclosure Surface mount, in metal enclosure Surface mount, in plastic enclosure DIN rail mount, with clips 1.8"H x 3.7"W x 1.5"D (4.4 x 9.3 x 3.8 cm) 2.8"H x 4.5"W x 2.0"D (7.1 x 11.3 x 5.1 cm) 1 year
WIRING
24 VDC Power Supply
+ _
Shield (if applicable) (black) (red)
200 Series Flow Sensor

FLOW
_
4-20 mA Signal
Sensor Inputs
Calibration Port
NOTE: Call Kele for 4000 Series wiring.
Model 310
Accuracy Response Time Operating Temperature Mounting 310-00 310-01 310-02 310-03 310-04 Dimensions 310-00, -04 310-01, -02, -03 Warranty
FLOW
Power (4000 only)
4-20 mA loop (+)
4-20 mA loop (-)
Shield Ground
Signal (+)
Signal (-)
MODEL 310 DESCRIPTION Programmable analog flow transmitter MOUNTING 00 Transmitter only 01 Transmitter in NEMA 4X enclosure 02 Transmitter in metal enclosure 03 Transmitter in plastic enclosure 04 Transmitter with DIN rail mount OPTIONS XR Pre-configured option 00 XR Example: 310-00-XR Preconfigured programmable analog flow transmitter for field mounting
310
For preconfigured flow sensors, specify pipe size, schedule, and maximum flow rate at time of order.
A301-20 200 Series
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Flow/BTU transmitter programming kit, includes cable Data Industrial impeller type ow sensors with pulse output 290
296
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Analog and pulse outputs Optional watertight (NEMA 4X) enclosure Optional displays for ow rate and totalization Excitation voltage for ow sensors LED indication of pulse activity
FLOW
UNIVERSAL FLOW TRANSMITTER UFT-1 SERIES
The Kele UFT-1 Series universal ow transmitter is a solidstate, digital signal converter designed to operate with Data Industrial 200 Series ow sensors. Both analog (4-20 mA) and pulse outputs are available. The UFT-1 may be mounted in an optional NEMA 4X enclosure or with digital display of gpm or totalized ow (in a non-watertight enclosure). UFT-1
UFT-1E-1
OPERATION
INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION The UFT-1 transmitter can be mounted in any position. NEMA 4X enclosed models have a watertight seal; when a display option is selected, however, the enclosure becomes non-watertight. Field calibration is not required with the UFT-1 and ow conversion must be accomplished at the monitoring computer. The information below is provided for making the conversion calculations. FLOW RATE Flow (gpm) = ((mA measured - 4 mA) x Maximum gpm)/16 mA. Maximum gpm is the ow rate at 20 mA output on the transmitter and must be specied at the time the UFT-1 is ordered for proper calibration. TOTALIZED FLOW Totalized gallons = (Flow factor) x (Output divider) x (Total pulses) For totalized m3, multiply the above by 0.00379. Output divider = 10 or 100 depending on jumper-selection. Flow factors per pulse are shown in Table 1.
APPLICATION
ANALOG OUTPUT (RATE) The UFT-1 analog transmitter converts a Data Industrial digital ow signal into a precalibrated 4-20 mA signal. It must be calibrated for each Data Industrial ow sensor installation. The pipe type, size, and maximum ow rate must be specied at the time of order if 4-20 mA output is to be used. PULSE OUTPUT (TOTALIZATION) The UFT-1 pulse output divides the Data Industrial digital ow signal by a jumper-selectable 10 or 100 to provide a more usable digital pulse. The pulse output is normally used where ow totalization is required. A simple conversion formula (using the ow factors for Data Industrial Flow Sensors on the next page) can convert the digital pulses to totalized gallons. The pulse output is an optoisolated transistor switch that can be wired to source or sink pulses to totalizer equipment. NOTE: The UFT-1 Series is not intended for eld setup or eld calibration.
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 24 VDC Input Signal 15 to150 Hz FS, dry or electric contact Maximum Output Impedance 750 @ 24 VDC Output Signal UFT-1 Solid state switch; UFT-1A 4-20 mA Pulse Output 40 VDC @ 200 mA Conguration Factory congure only; provide pipe size/ schedule and maximum ow rate at time Accuracy Response Time Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Mounting UFT-1, -1A UFT-1E, -1AE Approvals Warranty of order 0.5% 5 seconds from 10% to 90% 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) 5% to 90% RH non-condensing Snap track Surface mount, enclosed RoHS 18 months
WIRING
Output pulse divider selection jumper (10 or 100) 100
10 Pulse out + Pulse out Pulse out mA signal out XDCR signal in 24 VDC power XDCR Sig in PWR Common (red)
Totalize
+ Power
Typical totalizer hookup
Flow sensor
(black)
+ 4-20 mA Output
Transducer power option jumper (Leave on for Data Industrial flow sensors. Remove for devices with their own power supply.)
24 VDC power supply
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
297
FLOW
UNIVERSAL FLOW TRANSMITTER UFT-1 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Pulse out + Pulse out mA signal out XDCR signal in
NEW!
FLOW FACTORS FOR DATA INDUSTRIAL FLOW SENSORS
MODEL PIPE SIZE in (cm) FLOW FACTOR
GALLONS/PULSE JUMPER IN JUMPER IN 10 POSITION 100 POSITION
2.19 (5.56)
6
3.25 (8.25)
24 VDC power Common
FLOW
228PV-1.5 228PV-2 228B-2 228C-2 250B-0.5 250B-0.75 250B-1 250B-1.25 250B-1.5 220B-2.5 220B 220B 220B 220B 220B 220B 220B 220B 220B 220B
1-1/2 (3.81) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 1/2 (1.27) 3/4 (1.91) 1 (2.54) 1-1/4 (3.18) 1-1/2 (3.81) 2-1/2 (6.35) 3 (7.62) 4 (10.16) 5 (12.7) 6 (15.24) 8 (20.32) 10 (25.40) 12 (30.48) 14 (35.56) 16 (40.64) 18 (45.72)
0.03118 0.04611 0.04579 0.04731 0.005646 0.007514 0.007015 0.01280 0.01780 0.03800 0.07280 0.1396 0.2457 0.3611 0.6710 1.080 1.630 1.944 2.502 3.158
0.3118 0.4611 0.4579 0.4731 0.05646 0.07514 0.07015 0.1280 0.1780 0.3800 0.7280 1.396 2.457 3.611 6.710 10.80 16.30 19.44 25.02 31.58
3.118 4.611 4.579 4.731 0.5646 0.7514 0.7015 1.280 1.780 3.800 7.280 13.96 24.57 36.11 67.10 108.0 163.0 194.4 250.2 315.8
Notes 1. Flow factors for a Model 225 and 226 are the same as Model 220. * 2. Flow factor for Model 228S is the same as 228C. 3. PV Series is sized for schedule 80 PVC pipe. All other series are sized for schedule 40 black iron pipe.
MODEL UFT-1 UFT-1A UFT-1E UFT-1AE
DESCRIPTION Universal flow transmitter pulse output only Universal flow transmitter with pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output* Universal flow transmitter pulse output in NEMA 4X enclosure Universal flow transmitter with pulse and calibrated 4-20 mA output* in NEMA 4X enclosure DISPLAY OPTION (enclosed models only, , enclosure changes to non-watertight) 1 Flow totalization only 2 Flow rate only 3 Flow totalization and flow rate** 1 Example: UFT-1A-E-2 Basic transmitter with calibrated 4-20 mA flow rate output (4 mA = no flow; 20 mA = max flow), enclosed with LCD flow rate indication
* Pipe size, schedule, and
maximum flow rate must be specified at time of order.
** When a UFT-1AE3 is ordered
the UFT-1A will be in one enclosure and the totalizer and rate display will be in a separate enclosure.
UFT-1
200 Series DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS Data Industrial impeller type flow sensors with pulse output Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
PAGE 290 995
298
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION OPTIONAL FEATURES FEATURES
Menu-driven programming or Windows based programming NEMA 4X rated enclosure Two-line x 16-character display
FLOW
FLOW AND ENGERY MONITOR 3000, 3050 SERIES
The Badger Meter 3000 and 3050 Series ow and energy monitors are economical, full-featured, compact units designed for ow and BTU measurement applications. Outputs include one mechanical relay and one solid state pulse output, both featuring unit/pulse and set-point control independently based on ow or total readings.
An analog 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA output is optional and USB, RS-485 Modbus, and BACnet/MSTP provide high-level communication. A two-line by 16-character, 3/8" high backlit LCD display is congured by the user to display ow rate and ow total. Custom units can be created during eld setup. The ow sensor input features exible scaling options and signal type selections that permit the use of most Data Industrial meter sensors, or other frequency (sine/pulse) or linear devices. Matched 10 k thermistors (ordered separately) provide temperature differential for BTU calculations. One mechanical relay and one solid state relay output Optional 0/4-20 mA output USB, RS-485, Modbus, and BACnet/MSTP all in one unit
6
3050-1-0
FLOW
Password-restricted access Non-volatile memory Temperature sensor zeroing
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Input 8 to 28 VAC, 5 VA; 8-35 VDC, 280 mA Data Industrial ow sensor or other frequency (sine/pulse) device Sensor Input Two 2-wire 10 k type II thermistors or 100 3-wire platinum RTDs or eld-dened custom temperature inputs Maximum Output Impedance 1 k @ 24 VDC Output Solid state pulse output rated at 1A @ 30 VAC or 35 VDC; closed 0.5 @ 1A; open >10 M Relay Output Relay and pulse output are fully functional as either totalizing or setpoint outputs Relay Output Rating 5A @ 120 VAC or 30 VDC resistive; 1A @ 120 VAC or 30 VDC inductive Analog Output 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA (isolated, sinking or sourcing); loop powered (sinking) 30 VDC @ 0 mA maximum, 3 VDC @ 20 mA minimum; self powered (sourcing) 600 maximum load Pulse Rate 1 pulse per 1.0000000 to 99999999 units; any predened or custom unit can be used for ow or BTU totalizing; contact time 1 to 9999 milliseconds Setpoints Setpoint alarm for ow rate, BTU rate, Temp1, Temp2, DeltaT using March 2014 any predened or custom unit Compensation for variances between input sensors by adjusting T2 to match T1 Communication Interface USB 2.0A to mini-B 5-pin cable required, provides access to all programming and operation features Communication Protocol RS485 supports Modbus and BACnet/MSTP Display Backlit LCD, 16 characters/line, 0.31"H (0.79 cm), two lines Engineering Units Flow and Total in gal, liters, ft3, acre-ft, or bbl; Energy rate kBTU/ hr, BTU/min, KW, Tons, J/sec or eld-programmed custom; energy total units can be MBTU, kBTU, kWh, MWh, kJ, or eld-programmed custom Operating Temperature -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X Approvals CE Weight Panel mount 0.8 lb (0.34 kg) Wall mount 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) Warranty 1 year Zero Adjustments
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
299
FLOW
FLOW AND ENGERY MONITOR 3000, 3050 SERIES
WIRING
Badger 3050 BTU Monitor
J1-1 Temp 1 IN+ J1-2 Temp 1 INJ1-3 Temp GND J1-4 Shield J17-3 GND J17-2 Temp 2 INJ17-1 Temp 2 IN+
J6-1 Analog IN+ J6-2 Analog INJ6-3 Shield J8-1 Sensor IN J8-2 GND J8-3 Shield J8-4 Sensor Power
J14-1 Relay 1 NO J14-2 Relay 1 NC J14-3 Relay 1 COM J13-1 Relay 1 OUT J13-2 Relay 2 OUT
NEW!
24 VDC Supply J10-1 RS485 A J10-2 RS485 B J10-3 RS485 Iso GND J9-1 Loop+ J9-2 LoopJ9-3 GND 4-20 mA DC Power J12-1 USB Power J12-2 USB DataJ12-3 USB Data+ J12-4 N/C J12-5 Shield USB Connection J1-1 Earth J1-2 ACC/DC J1-3 ACL/DC + 12-24 VDC/VAC Power Supply
bare wire
(black)
(red)
10 K Type II Thermistor
10 K Type II Thermistor
Pulse Counter
200 Series Flow Sensor
DIMENSIONS
4.33" 110 mm 1/8" 3.2 mm (4 PLACES)
3.57"-3.60" 90.6 mm-91.4 mm
3.54" 90 mm
FLOW
3.49" 88.7 mm
MOUNTING TEMPLATE
TOP
2.21" 56 mm
PANEL CUTOUT
3.57"-3.60" 90.6 mm-91.4 mm
4.80" 122 mm
3.62" 92 mm
3.78" 96 mm
Data Industrial
3.23" 82 mm
Data Industrial
Series 3050
Series 3050
4.72" 120 mm
3.78" 96 mm
SIDE
3.49" 88.7 mm
SIDE
MODEL 3000 3050 DESCRIPTION Flow meter with display BTU monitor with display ANALOG OUTPUTS 0 No analog output 1 Analog output, RS485 (BACnet/Modbus), and USB MOUNTING 0 Panel mount 1 Wall mount
200 Series ST-U24B-XP ST-U24S-XP
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Data Industrial impeller type ow sensors with pulse output 290 Temperature sensors, matched 0.1F, brass wells Temperature sensors, matched 0.1F, stainless steel wells
300
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

FLOW
ULTRASONIC FLOWMETER DTFXL SERIES
The Dynasonics DTFXL Series ultrasonic ow meter measures water ow in a wide variety of pipe sizes and pipe materials, using clamp-on sensors that attach to the outside of the pipe. This non-invasive, non-contact ow meter provides instantaneous ow rate and accumulated ow and provides a 4-20 mA output as well as pulse outputs. The DTFXL Series ow meter is easy to install, has a large bidirectional ow range, and comes with or without a display. Conguration, monitoring, and calibration of the DTXFL is accomplished with an easy-to-use software package via a cable connection from a PC to the ow meter. For systems using water/glycol solutions, the higher-powered DB Series ultrasonic ow meter may perform better.
DTFXL4-AN1-NN
6
APPLICATION
The DTFXL Series is available in 3 basic transmitter/ transducer arrangements for installation and application exibility. Models with integral transducers are available for pipe sizes 1/2" to 2"; the transmitter is attached to the transducers which clamp on to the pipe for a local mount arrangement. Models with remote small pipe (1/2" to 2") clamp-on transducers require the transmitter to be wall- or panelmounted away from the pipe. Models with remote large pipe (2-1/2" to 100") strap-on transducers also require the transmitter to be wall or panelmounted away from the pipe. Transmitters are available with or without display.
Transit-time technology in an economical package Can handle some suspended solids and gas pockets Bidirectional ow range for changeover systems Multiple totalizers for forward, reverse, net Models with or without display Selectable standard or metric engineering units Non-invasive, no system down time to install 4-20 mA output plus choice of pulse outputs Optional armored cable High temperature transducers available
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency 11 to 30 VDC 0-1000 Hz for Turbine output (nonground referenced AC and 100 mV pp minimum), switch selectable; 5 VDC pp ground-referenced square wave for TTL output Supply Current 0.25 A Maximum Output Impedance 900 maximum for 4-20 mA output; source power can share common with power supply Outputs 4-20 mA and Turbine or TTL Conduit Opening 1/2" conduit knockout (7/8" hole, 2.2 cm) Cable Length Remote transducer models available with 20' (6.1m), 50' (15m), or 100' (30m) cables Accuracy 1.0% of reading above 1 fps (0.3 mps) velocity, 0.01% of reading below 1 fps (0.3 mps) Response Time 0.3 to 30 seconds, adjustable March 2014 Display Two-line x eight-character LCD Operating Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C); remote DTTS/DTTN transducers have upper limit of 250F (121C) and high temperature DTTH transducers have upper limit of 400F (200C) Velocity Range 0.1 to 40 fps (feet/second), 0.03 to 12.4 mps (meters/second), bi-directional Pipe Size Range 1/2" to 100" (1.2 to 254 cm) Media Compatibility Most clean liquids or liquids with some suspended solids or aeration, not recommended for glycol solutions, not for steam; for water/ glycol systems the DE Series is recommended Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X as long as a liquid-tight connector is used Approvals ANSI/ISA 582.01; CSA C22.2 No. 213, E79-15-95 Warranty 1 year
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
301
FLOW
ULTRASONIC FLOWMETER DTFXL SERIES
WIRING
PC cable connection Note: Power ground and 4-20 mA common are connected internally. Upstream (red) Upstream (black) Downstream (black) Downstream red) Transducer connections 4-20 mA output Turbine or TTL output Power
+ + 4-20 mA +
DIMENSIONS- INTEGRAL MODELS

in (mm)
6.66 (169.2)
3.17 (80.5)
Turbine or TTL Pulse

+
24 VDC power supply
NEW!
TRANSIT TIME FLOWMETER
2.57 (65.3)
0.875 (22.2) diameter conduit hole
Note: Integral model transmitters have conduit knockout connection on the right side of the enclosure. Remote models have two conduit holes on the bottom side of the enclosure.
Dimensions A, B, C and D vary by pipe size, the D dimension being slightly larger than the outside diameter of the pipe.
6
MODEL DTFXL1 DTFXL2 DTFXL3 DTFXL4
DESCRIPTION Transmitter without display Transmitter with display Transmitter without display, UL enclosure Transmitter with display, UL enclosure PIPE SIZE A 1/2" ANSI carbon steel B 3/4" ANSI carbon steel C 1" ANSI carbon steel D 1 1/4" ANSI carbon steel E 1 1/2" ANSI carbon steel F 2" ANSI carbon steel G 1/2" copper H 3/4" copper I 1" copper J 1 1/4" copper K 1 1/2" copper L 2" copper M 1/2" tubing (plastic) N 3/4" tubing (plastic) P 1" tubing (plastic) Q 1 1/4" tubing (plastic) R 1 1/2" tubing (plastic) S 2" tubing X For DTTN, DTTH transducers Y For DTTS, DTTC transducers CONNECTOR OPTIONS N 1/2" conduit knockout OUTPUT SIGNALS 1-NN 4-20 mA and pulse
Remote transducers for small pipes (with Y pipe size) MODEL DESCRIPTION DTTS Remote transducers for 1/2" to 2" pipes DTTC High Temperature transducer for 1/2 to 2 pipes PIPE SIZE D 1/2" F 3/4" G 1" H 1 1/4" J 1 1/2" L 2" PIPE TYPE P ANSI carbon steel C Copper T Tubing CABLE LENGTH 020 20 feet (6.1 m) 050 50 feet (15 m) 100 100 feet (30 m) CABLE ARMOR OPTION N No armor A Flexible armor CABLE ARMOR LENGTH 000 No armor 020 20 feet (6.1 m) 050 50 feet (15 m) 100 100 feet (30 m)
Remote transducers for large pipes (with X pipe size) MODEL DESCRIPTION DTTN Standard transducer for 2 1/2" to 20" pipes DTTH High temperature transducer for 2 1/2" to 100" pipes CABLE LENGTH 020 20 feet (6.1 m) 050 50 feet (15 m) 100 100 feet (30 m) CABLE ARMOR OPTION N No armor A Flexible armor CABLE ARMOR LENGTH 000 No armor 020 20 feet (6.1 m) 050 50 feet (15 m) 100 100 feet (30 m) OPTIONS N Normal area rating
FLOW
NOTE: Add -C sufx to transmitter model number for factory-congured transmitter and ll out the application data sheet located on Kele's website. The UltraLink software is required to reset the DTFXL totalizer and to eld congure, monitor, and diagnose the DTFXL. The PC cable is required to connect a PC to the DTFXL and the software is available on CD or free from www.dynasonics.com.
D002-2007-001 D005-0803-104 D005-2116-004 D010-0204-001 D010-2102-010 DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
RELATED PRODUCTS Additional 36" stainless straps for DTTN/H transducers (two straps included standard with remote transducers) UltraLink software CD USB to DB-9 Serial Communications Cable PC to transmitter cable Mounting track assembly for DTTN/DTTH transducers, for <10" pipes Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT
PAGE
995 994
302
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Supply Watts Digital Inputs Maximum Output Impedance Outputs Analog output Digital outputs Pulse outputs Frequency output Alarm Wiring Terminations
FLOW
MAGNETIC FLOW METER M-2000 SERIES
The Badger Meter M-2000 Series magnetic ow meter is the result of years of research and eld use in electromagnetic ow meters. The M-2000 can measure almost any liquid, slurry or paste that has minimum electrical conductivity. These meters are perfect for ow measurement in commercial HVAC water systems, wastewater, reclaimed water, irrigation and industrial applications because they can handle suspended solids, have no pressure drop, no moving parts, and their accuracy is not affected by temperature, pressure, viscosity, density or ow prole. They are NSF listed for use in potable water. The ANSI 150 RF anged pipe spool makes them easy to install and they are available with the NEMA 4X (IP66) integral amplier (transmitter and display housing) mounted atop the ow detector housing, or with the amplier remotely mounted. For the remote mount conguration, a 30 ft. cable is standard (other lengths available) and the detector housing comes with either a NEMA 4X or NEMA 6P (submersible) junction box. Each meter is factory calibrated and tested and a certicate is included. FEATURES High accuracy of +/- 0.25% and ow range of 300:1 for reliable measurement Unaffected by most solids contained in the uid for application exibility Pulsed DC magnetic eld for zero point stability Corrosion resistant liners provide long life Grounding rings included for non-conductive piping Bidirectional ow sensing and totalization for reversing system application Empty pipe detection feature generates error message when pipe is not full NEMA 4X (IP66) enclosure for installation in exposed areas Large backlit 4-line, 20 character LCD display for local indication and programming even in low light conditions Modbus RTU via RS232 communications for network systems
FLOW
85-265 VAC (45-65 Hz) 15 W Maximum 30 VDC, programmable as positive zero return, external totalizer reset, or preset batch start 800 ohms @ 24 VDC 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-10 mA, or 2-10 mA Four congurable, 24 VDC sourcing outputs (maximum of two) 50 mA each or 100 mA total, sinking open collector outputs (maximum of four) 100 mA each or 30 VDC total, AC solid state relay (maximum of two) 48 VAC 500 mA maximum Scalable up to 10 kHz, passive open collector up to 10 kHz active switched 24 VDC, up to two outputs (forward and reverse ow), pulse width programmable from 1 to 1,000 ms or 50% duty cycle Scaleable up to 10 kHz open collector, up to 1 kHz solid state relay High/low ow alarm, error alarm, empty pipe alarm outputs 1/2" NPT conduit connection and 3 cord grips on amplier housing; 30 ft. standard length cable for remote mount congurations (other lengths available) RS232 - Modbus RTU or remote display 0.25% of ow rate for velocities greater than 1.64 fps (0.5 mps; 0.004% for lower velocities 0.1% Backlit, 4 line, 20 character LCD and 3-button progamming keys
Engineering Units
Pipe Size Range Flow Range Velocity Range Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Media Compatibility Media Temperature Range
Ounces, pounds, liters, US gallons, imperial gallons, barrels, hectoliters, megagallons, cubic meters, cubic feet, acre feet 1" to 24" standard (1/4", 1/2" and 28" to 54" also available), ANSI 150 RF anges standard Unidirectional or bidirectional with two separate totalizers (programmable) 0.10 to 39.4 fps (0.03 to 12 mps) -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Up to 90% non-condensing Many uid applications including hot or chilled water, glycol solutions; minimum conductivity 5.0 /cm 178F (80C) with rubber liner; 212F (100C) with PTFE liner and local mount amp; 311F (155C) with PTFE liner and remote mount amp 285 psig at ambient temperature, refer to ANSI B16.5 standard for 150 lb RF anges for temperature/pressure spec Meter housing and anges: carbon steel Liner: Rubber Electrodes: Alloy C Pipe spool: 316 SS Grounding rings: stainless steel Amplier housing: cast aluminum with powder-coat paint NEMA 4X (IP66) amplier housing; NEMA 4X or NEMA 6P detector housing junction box for remote mount conguration NSF Listed, CE 1 year
Maximum Pressure Materials Of Construction Enclosure Rating
Communication Accuracy Repeatability Display
Approvals Warranty
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
303
FLOW
MAGNETIC FLOW METER M-2000 SERIES
WIRING
NEW!
FLOW
304
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
Note: Dimension D in table below is overall height (similar to dimension B) to the top of junction box, for assemblies with remote amplier conguration.
FLOW
MAGNETIC FLOWMETER M-2000 SERIES
DIMENSIONS AND FLOW RANGES
FLOW
Size 1" (DN25) 1-1/4" (DN32) 1-1/2" (DN40) 2" (DN50) 2-1/2" (DN65) 3" (DN80) 4" (DN100) 5" (DN125) 6" (DN150) 8" (DN200) 10" (DN250) 12" (DN300) 14" (DN350) 16" (DN400) 18" (DN450) 20" (DN500) 22" (DN550) 24" (DN600) March 2014
A 8.9" (22.5 cm) 8.9" (22.5 cm) 8.9" (22.5 cm) 8.9" (22.5 cm) 11.0" (28.0 cm) 11.0" (28.0 cm) 11.0" (28.0 cm) 15.8" (40.0 cm) 15.8" (40.0 cm) 15.8" (40.0 cm) 19.7" (50.0 cm) 19.7" (50.0 cm) 19.7" (50.0 cm) 23.6" (59.0 cm) 23.6" (59.0 cm) 23.6" (59.0 cm) 23.6" (59.0 cm) 23.6" (59.0 cm)
B 14.4" (36.6 cm) 15.2" (38.6 cm) 15.4" (39.0 cm) 15.9" (40.3 cm) 17.1" (43.4 cm) 17.3" (44.0 cm) 18.4" (46.6 cm) 19.6" (49.8 cm) 20.6" (52.4 cm) 22.5" (57.2 cm) 26.8" (68.1 cm) 28.9" (73.4 cm) 30.8" (78.2 cm) 33.7" (85.6 cm) 35.0" (89.0 cm) 38.2" (96.9 cm) 39.6" (100 cm) 42.2" (107 cm)
C 4.3" (10.8 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm) 5.0" (12.7 cm) 6.0" (15.2 cm) 7.0" (17.8 cm) 7.5" (19.1 cm) 9.0" (22.9 cm) 10.0" (25.4 cm) 11.0" (27.9 cm) 13.5" (34.3 cm) 16.0" (40.6 cm) 19.0" (48.3 cm) 21.0" (53.3 cm) 23.5" (59.7 cm) 25.0" (63.5 cm) 27.5" (69.9 cm) 29.5" (74.9 cm) 32.0" (81.3 cm)
D 11.7" (29.8 cm) 12.5" (31.8 cm) 12.7" (32.2 cm) 13.2" (33.5 cm) 14.4" (36.6 cm) 14.7" (37.2 cm) 15.7" (39.8 cm) 16.9" (43.0 cm) 17.9" (45.6 cm) 20.4" (51.8 cm) 24.1" (61.3 cm) 26.2" (66.6 cm) 28.2" (71.6 cm) 31.0" (78.8 cm) 32.4" (82.2 cm) 35.5" (90.1 cm) 36.9" (93.7 cm) 39.5" (100 cm)
Weight 18 lb (8.0 kg) 20 lb (9.0 kg) 21 lb (9.5 kg) 26 lb (11.5 kg) 52 lb (23.5 kg) 54 lb (24.5 kg) 56 lb (25.5 kg) 58 lb (26.0 kg) 60 lb (27.0 kg) 86 lb (39.0 kg) 178 lb (81 kg) 207 lb (94 kg) 258 lb (117 kg) 306 lb (139 kg) 400 lb (181 kg) 493 lb (224 kg) 523 lb (237 kg) 552 lb (251 kg)
Flow Range 0.3 to 93 gpm (1.2 to 350 lpm) 0.5 to 150 gpm (2.0 to 575 lpm) 0.8 to 239 gpm (3 to 900 lpm) 1 to 373 gpm (4.7 to 1400 lpm) 2 to 631 gpm (8 to 2400 lpm) 3 to 956 gpm (12 to 3600 lpm) 5 to 1493 gpm (19 to 5600 lpm) 8 to 2334 gpm (30 to 8800 lpm) 11 to 3361 gpm (40 to 12,700 lpm) 20 to 5975 gpm (75 to 22,600 lpm) 30 to 9336 gpm (120 to 35,300 lpm) 45 to 13,444 gpm (170 to 50,800 lpm) 60 to 18,299 gpm (230 to 69,200 lpm) 80 to 23,901 gpm (300 to 90,400 lpm) 100 to 30,250 gpm (380 to 114,000 lpm) 125 to 37,346 gpm (470 to 140,000 lpm) 150 to 45,188 gpm (570 to 170,000 lpm) 180 to 53,778 gpm (680 to 200,000 lpm)
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
305
FLOW
MAGNETIC FLOWMETER M-2000 SERIES
APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
The M-2000 provides two amplier mounting options, integral or remote. The amplier housing is NEMA 4X rated and can be located outdoors; observe the operating temperature range of -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C). If located outdoors, provide a roof or shield over the amplier to protect the LCD display from direct sunlight. If the amplier is to be remote mounted, standard available cable lengths are 15', 30', 50' and 100' (up to 500' optional). Magnetic owmeters can operate accurately in any pipeline orientation and can measure ow in both directions. A "Forward Flow" direction arrow is printed on the detector label. They also perform best when placed in a vertical pipe with the liquid owing upward; this assures a full pipe at all times and minimizes sediment deposits on the liner and electrodes. If mounting in a horizontal pipe, mount the detector such that the electrodes are on the sides of the pipe, not the top and bottom, also to minimize deposits and build-up on the electrodes. Avoid locations where a partially-lled piping situation can occur; the meter will display an "Empty Pipe Detection" message and will stop measuring ow until the pipe is full.
NEW!
Sufcient straight-pipe runs are required for optimum accuracy and performance. A minimum of 3 diameters upstream and 2 diameters downstream are required (more is better). Grounding is critical for magnetic ow meters; they must be electrically connected to the liquid media. If using non-conductive piping, the grounding rings (included) must be properly installed. See the M-2000 manual for details.
FLOW
MODEL DESCRIPTION M2K- Magnetic owmeter SIZE CODE PIPE SIZE 010 1" 013 1-1/4" 015 1-1/2" 020 2" 025 2-1/2" 030 3" 040 4" 050 5" 060 6" 080 8" 100 10" 120 12" 140 14" 160 16" 180 18" 200 20" 220 22" 240 24" LINER CODE LINER MATERIAL RRubber TPTFE AMPLIFIER OPTIONS LC Local mount amplier, NEMA 4X (IP66) housing RM-N4X Remote mount amp, 30 ft. cable, NEMA 4X junction box on detector tube RM-N6P Remote mount amp, 30 ft. cable, NEMA 6P junction box on detector tube
M2K-
040
R-
LC
Example: M2K-040R-LC 4" magnetic owmeter with rubber liner, local mount amplier
306
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES No moving parts Easy to install Reliable and robust design Wide ow range - 15:1 turndown ratio Microprocessor based piezo resistive sensor technology Optional integral display
FIGURE 1. VORTICES CREATED BY A BLUFF BODY
FLOW
FIXED AND RETRACTABLE INSERTION VORTEX FLOW METERS 2200, 3100 SERIES
The 2200 Series xed insertion and 3100 Series retractable vortex ow meters are used to measure the ow rate of water or water/glycol mixtures in 2" to 20" pipes. Each ow meter is factory calibrated and scaled to provide precise output signals. No complex eld adjustments or confusing measurement routines are required to install the ow meters. Simple design, easy installation, reliable performance, and low cost make these ow meters an excellent choice for commercial HVAC applications. 2200 Series with optional display and Thredolet mount
OPERATION
As ow passes a bluff body in the ow stream, vortices are alternately formed on either side of the bluff body (Figure 1). According to well-proven physical laws, the frequency at which vortices are alternately formed is directly proportional to the average ow velocity. The vortices create low- and high-pressure zones behind the bluff body. A vortex ow meter has a sensing element that detects these low- and high-pressure zones and the frequency at which they are created to measure ow. The uttering of a ag (Figure 2) is one example of how vortices are created. The ag pole acts as a bluff body to the blowing wind as the ag waves from the force of the vortices alternately created.
FIGURE 2. EXAMPLES OF VORTEX EFFECT
FLOW
Bluff body Bluff body
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 10-32 VDC Maximum Output Impedance R(load) = 50 (Vs-10) Output Signal 4-20 mA loop-powered standard (pulse output available special order) Connections 2200: 1-1/2" MNPT 3100: 2" MNPT Wiring Terminations Screw terminals inside housing Conduit Connection 3/4" FNPT Conguration For factory pre-conguration, specify pipe size, pipe material/schedule and maximum ow rate. Separately available Hydro-Flow Field-Pro software is available for eld conguration Accuracy 1% of full scale (combined linearity and repeatability) Display Optional, LCD alternates between showing 4-digit ow rate and 8-digit total ow Engineering Units English, gallons; metric, cubic meters (other units available upon request or can be congured using Hydro-Flow Field-Pro software) Operating Temperature -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) Velocity Range 1 fps (0.3 mps) minimum, 15 fps (4.5 mps) maximum March 2014 2200: 2" to 20" (5 to 50 cm) 3100: 3" to 20" (8 to 50 cm) Install in straight pipe section with a minimum distance of 10 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream to any bend, obstruction or transition Mounting Thredolet, or piping tee (2200 Series only) Media Compatibility Water, water/glycol mixtures, condensate Media Temperature Range 32 to 160F (0 to 71C) Maximum Pressure 400 psig (2759 kPa) for Thredolet mount, 150 psig (1035 kPa) for piping tee mount Materials Of Construction Reinforced polycarbonate enclosure, Ultem plastic vortex shedder, 316 SS shedder bar, stainless steel stem, EPDM o-rings, brass compression tting, aluminum/nickel-plated retractor (3300 Series only) Enclosure Rating NEMA 6 Warranty 2 years Pipe Size Range Installation
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
307
FLOW
WIRING
FIXED AND RETRACTABLE INSERTION VORTEX FLOW METERS 2200, 3100 SERIES
Vs (10 to 32 VDC)
*Rload
NEW!
10" (250) 267 (61) 4000 (909) 267 (61) 4000 (909) 12" (300) 368 (83) 5500 (1249) 366 (83) 5500 (1249) 14" (350) 418 (95) 6250 (1420) 417 (95) 6250 (1420) 16" (400) 568 (129) 8500 (1931) 567 (129) 8500 (1931) 18" (450) 734 (167) 11000 (2498) 733 (167) 11000 (2498) 20" (500) 934 (212) 14000 (3180) 933 (212) 14000 (3180)
6
FLOW RANGES
Pipe size in (mm) Minimum flow 2200 gpm (m3/h) Series Maximum flow gpm (m3/h) 2" (50) 10.6 (2.4) 3" (80) 23.4 (5.4) 4" (100) 40 (9.2) 600 (136) 40 (9.0) 600 (136) 6" (150) 100 (23) 1500 (341) 100 (23) 1500 (341)
4-20 mA wiring * Rload maximum = 50 (Vs - 10)
8" (200) 167 (38) 2500 (557) 167 (38) 2500 (557)
160 (36.3) 350 (79.5) N/A N/A 26.6 (6.0) 400 (90.8)
FLOW
Minimum flow 3100 gpm (m3/h) Series Maximum flow gpm (m3/h)
MODEL 2200 3100 DESCRIPTION Fixed insertion vortex flow meter Retractable insertion vortex flow meter PIPE SIZE DESCRIPTION 02 2" pipe (fixed insertion only) 03 3" pipe 04 4" pipe 06 6" pipe 08 8" pipe 10 10" pipe 12 12" pipe 14 14" pipe 16 16" pipe 18 18" pipe 20 20" pipe MOUNTING DESCRIPTION 1 Thredolet 4 Tee (2" size only) OUTPUT, DISPLAY OPTIONS DESCRIPTION 2-1-1 4-20 mA output, no display 2-2-1 4-20 mA output, display, English units 2200 06 1 2-1-1 Example: 2200-06-1-2-1-1 Fixed insertion flow meter, 6" pipe, Thredolet mount, 4-20 mA, no display
Notes: Other options and configurations available. Separately ordered configuration software also available for field configuration. Consult Kele with calibration information when ordering (pipe size, fluid temperature and pressure, max flow rate). Software - FieldPro - EC10011
308
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Measures ow rates of liquids, gases, or steam 2000 psig (13,790 kPa) pressure rating 500F temperature rating No moving parts Integral transmitter with local display Stainless steel construction
FLOW
INSERTION VORTEX FLOW METER V-BAR 700
The V-Bar 700 insertion vortex ow meter can be used to measure the ow rates of most liquids, gases, and steam. The same V-Bar 700 will t pipe sizes from 3" to 80" (8 to 200 cm), features no moving parts, adds negligible head loss to the system, and comes with an easily programmable integral local ow rate indicator and totalizer. The microprocessorbased electronics condition the signal and provide a frequency output, a scaled pulse output, or a 4-20 mA output. OPERATION Vortex ow meters are devices that measure the frequency of vortices created in the ow stream. Vortices are like tiny eddies produced by an obstruction (called a bluff body) in the ow and are actually areas of low pressure. These vortices travel with the ow downstream until they run out of energy. Inserting a bluff body (Figure 1) into the stream creates these vortices that alternate from side to side. The frequency of these vortices or pressure pulses can be measured and are directly proportional to the average ow rate. A ag waving in the wind is an example of this vortex effect (Figure 2). The agpole is the bluff body, and the high- and low-pressure areas are seen as high and low ridges in the ag. These ridges alternate as they travel across the ag and cause the ag to appear to be waving.
FIGURE 1. VORTICES CREATED BY A BLUFF BODY
FIGURE 2. EXAMPLES OF VORTEX EFFECT
Bluff body Bluff body
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Isolated 18-40 VDC Supply Current 35 mA maximum Maximum Output Impedance R(load) = 50 (Vs-18) Output Signal 4-20 mA two-wire loop-powered, scalable frequency voltage pulse (3-wire 0-3000 Hz square wave, 50% duty cycle, low level = 0-1 V, high level = power supply voltage-load) Connections 2" MNPT process connection, 1/4" pressure tap Wiring Terminations Screw terminals inside housing Conduit Connection 3/4" FNPT Conguration Factory pre-conguration required, see Ordering Information Accuracy 1.0% of ow rate for water applications, 1.5% of ow rate for steam and gas Repeatability 0.15% of ow rate Response Time Adjustable from 1 to 100 seconds Display 2-line by 8-character LCD alternately shows ow rate and total ow. Four-button interface enables local programming modications Engineering Units English, gallons; metric, cubic meters (other units available upon request) Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Velocity Range -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) 5 to 100% RH non-condensing Liquid ow: 1.5 fps (0.5 mps) minimum, 32 fps (9 mps) maximum Pipe Size Range 3" to 80" (8 to 200 cm) Installation Straight pipe section, minimum 10 pipe diameters upstream, 5 pipe diameters downstream Mounting Thredolet, or piping tee Media Compatibility Liquid, gas or steam Media Temperature Range -200 to 500F (-129 to 260C) Maximum Pressure 2000 psig (138 bar) Materials Of Construction Wetted parts: 316 stainless steel (or cast equivalent) External parts: Aluminum, 316 SS, carbon steel Electrical enclosure: 383 Aluminum Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X Dimensions Maximum overall height 32.5" (82.6 cm); insertion 3" minimum to 10" maximum (7.6 to 25.4 cm), recommended service clearance 12" (30.5 cm) Weight 9 lb (4.1 kg) maximum Warranty 2 years
Please call Kele for specic application and prices. The following information is required:
1. Pipe size and schedule 2. Type of gas or liquid 3. Operating pressure 4. Maximum ow rate (lb/hr, scfm) 5. Temperature 6. Constant or varying pressure
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
309
FLOW
TARGET FLOW METER NFP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Niagara NFP Series ForceMeter is an insertion type ow meter that can measure water or steam. It utilizes a hermetically sealed strain-gage bridge circuit to convert ow force to a two-wire 4-20 mA output signal that is proportional to ow rate. All wetted parts are 316L stainless steel and the meter mounts to 4" and larger pipes using a 2" or 4" ANSI 150# or 300# raised face ange. The NFP Series comes pre-calibrated and congured based on the application parameters provided at the time of order; the meter only needs to be zeroed to adjust for installation orientation. Many different models and conguration options are available, such as retractable insertion types, inline models, and hazardous approval.
NEW!
C
FEATURES
Quick response time for ow change display in less than 1 second, can be dampened Rugged design includes no moving parts to wear out All welded sensor construction for durability Hermetically sealed to withstand challenging environmental conditions Maintenance-free keeps cost of ownership down Integral display for local indication of ow and totalization
FM
APPROVED
US
FLOW
NFP Series
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Output Signal Accuracy Repeatability Response Time Display Wiring Terminations Conduit Connection Conguration 24 VDC 10% 2-wire, 4-20 mA @ 500 1.0% of rate 0.15% of ow rate 0.33 mS 2-line alphanumeric with bar graph Screw terminals 3/4" FNPT Factory pre-conguration required to assure application/product match: specify pipe size and material/ schedule, uid/gas type, operating pressure and temperatures, and minimum/maximum ow rates 19.6 gpm (4" pipe) to 98,000 gpm (60" pipe) 4" to 60" (100 to 1500 cm) 15:1 Install in straight pipe section with a minimum distance of 10 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream to any bend, obstruction or transition ANSI anges standard Mounting Media Compatibility Liquid, non-volatile gases, or steam Media Temperature Range -65 to 425F (-54 to 218C), other ranges special order Operating Temperature -4 to 170F (-20 to 75C) Maximum Pressure >1000 psi (69 bar) for primary sensing elements; piping connections per applicable ANSI specs Materials Of Construction 316L stainless steel wetted parts, Polyester powder coated aluminum housing Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X Dimensions Height 10.8" (32.4 cm) from mounting ange to top of transmitter; insertion length depends on pipe size specied, force sensor locates in center of pipe Approvals CE, FM Weight 9 lb (4.1 kg) maximum Warranty 2 years
Flow Range Pipe Size Range Turn Down Installation
310
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Integral Transmitter Wiring
Enclosure Mounted on Flowmeter (Backside)
Conduit Entry for Customer Wiring Conduit Entry for Customer Wiring
GND
FLOW
TARGET FLOW METER NFP SERIES
DIMENSIONS
Typical Remote Enclosure
4.5 (11.4)
Customer Wiring
8.25 (20.96) (approx.)
4-20mA Output +
4 (10.2)
Power Supply 18-36 VDC +
6
E
BAS +
FLOW
6.0 (15.2)
Flow
Typical Integral Enclosure
MODEL DESCRIPTION NFP Flow Meter LINE SIZE (inches) DESCRIPTION 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, etc. Select pipe size (larger insertion and smaller in-line models are available) MOUNTING DESCRIPTION M 2" raised flange P 4" raised flange FLANGE RATING DESCRIPTION 01 150 # raised-face ANSI 02 300 # raised-face ANSI BODY, ELEMENT DESCRIPTION Y1V1ZV SS316L Body, unidirectional Gas, Liquid or Steam G, L, or S
5.5 (13.97)
NFP
01
Y1V1ZV
Example: NFP-4-M-01-Y1V1ZV-G Insertion target flow meter for water, 4" pipe size, 2" RF 150 # mounting flange, 303/304 SS body, 1,000 psi, 425 DF -rating
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
311
FLOW
BTU TRANSMITTER 340 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 340 Series is an inexpensive and easy-toapply BTU transmitter which calculates energy usage based on liquid ow rate from a Data Industrial impeller ow sensor and differential temperature using two 10 k thermistor inputs. The onboard microcontroller and digital circuitry provide precise measurements and produce accurate driftfree outputs. Conguration is accomplished with a Windows based software programming kit. The 340 Series is available with onboard communication technology for LonWorks, BACnet, Johnson Controls N2 Metasys, or Modbus networks.
NEW!
340-00 User Interface Communication Conguration Computer connection allows visibility of real-time ow rate, ow total, temperature readings, energy rate and energy total BACnet and Modbus, LonWorks, Metasys N2, or Modbus Windows based A30120 programming kit (order separately) cable connects to DIC communication port and DB9 COM port on a computer for calibration of ow sensor information, units, output scaling; unit must be powered to congure Mounting -00 Enclosure Surface mount, no enclosure -02 Enclosure Surface mount, in metal enclosure -03 Enclosure Surface mount, in plastic enclosure -04 Enclosure DIN rail mount, with clips Operating Temperature -20 to 158F (-29 to 70C) Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) without enclosure Warranty 1 year
6
FEATURES
AC or DC powered for installation exibility Field programmable makes changes easy Small footprint saves space Uses two matched 10k thermistors Used with Data Industrial ow sensors
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Input Signal 12-35 VAC 5% or 12-24 VDC 10% 60 mA @ 12 VDC All ow sensors: Excitation voltage 3-wire, 7.9-11.4 VDC, 270 source impedance Pulse sensors: Signal amplitude 2.5 VDC threshold, signal limit <35V AC or DC peak, frequency 0-10 kHz, pull-up 8.5 VDC @ 2 k source impedance Sine wave sensors: Signal amplitude 10 mV p-p threshold, signal limit <35V AC or DC peak, frequency 0-10 kHz Temperature sensors: Two matched 10 k @ 25C, two-wire, type II Pulse, isolated solid state switch programmed for units of energy or ow BACnet and Modbus communication LonWorks communication N2 communication Voltage range: 0 to 60V (DC or AC peak); On-state load current: 700 mA maximum; On-state load resistance: 700 m; Off-state leakage: < 1A @ 60 V peak; Pulse width: adjustable from .05 to 5.0 seconds Output Signal -- Output BN Output LW Output N2 Output Pulse Output
312
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
AC/DC power + supply Pulse AC Line or DC+ AC Common or DC output + Flow Sensor (red) (black) Power out Signal (+) Signal () Shield Shield (if applicable) Temp 1 Temperature sensors Temp 2 * Network communications terminals vary slightly per model
FLOW
BTU TRANSMITTER 340 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
Pulse input device
in (cm)
1.6 (4.1) 3.65 (9.3) 0.88 (2.2)
() (+)
2.95 (7.5) 0.6 (1.5)
FLOW
ORDERING INFORMATION MODEL DESCRIPTION 340 BTU meter OUTPUT LW Transmitter for use with LONWorks networks N2 Transmitter for use with Johnson Metasys networks BN Transmitter for use with BACnet and Modbus networks ENCLOSURE 00 Transmitter only 02 Transmitter with metal enclosure 03 Transmitter with plastic enclosure 04 Transmitter with DIN rail mounting clips 340
_ _ 02 Example: 340 Series BTU meter with standard pulse output

and metal enclosure
200 Series A301-20 ST-U24B-XP ST-U24S-XP 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS Data Industrial impeller type flow sensors with pulse output Flow/BTU transmitter programming kit, includes cable Temperature sensors, matched 0.1F, brass wells Temperature sensors, matched 0.1F, stainless steel wells
PAGE 290
ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
313
FLOW
BTU METER 380 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Badger Meter 380 Series BTU meters provide an inexpensive solution to monitoring thermal energy consumption in cold or hot water systems. The integrated ow and temperature sensors along with the internal metering components make installation and commissioning easy. With on-board Modbus and BACnet communication and a compact design that will t in a wall, the 380 Series is perfect for networking and multi-tenant billing applications.
NEW!
380CS07
FEATURES
AC or DC power Field programmable Scaled pulse or RS-485 (Modbus and BACnet) output standard Two temperature sensors included Compact, ts within a standard 2X4 stud wall Compatible with potable water and water/glycol mixtures
FLOW
APPLICATION
Strip Malls Multi-tenant buildings Ofce buildings Thermal storage systems Sustainable design buildings
WIRING
2 POWER 1 3 2 1 2 1 GND + RS 485
PULSE OUTPUT
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA Supply Current Sensor Input 12-28 VAC or 12-35 VDC 5 VA 200 mA maximum 0.24" diameter RTD probe, meets IEC751 Class B; 6.5' (2 m) cable for remote sensor, custom tting for 1/8" NPT pipe tap included Scaled pulse: 10, 50, 150, 200 or 250 ms Two cable glands, PG6 and PG9 Screw terminals inside enclosure Modbus RTU, BACnet 0.5% 3/4", 1", 1-1/4", 1-1/2", 2" FNPT 1 to 15 fps 2% of range Operating Temperature -4 to 149F (-20 to 65C) Media Temperature Range Cold service -4 to 140F (-20 to 60F) Hot service 39 to 257F (4 to 125C) Materials Of Construction Cast bronze tee, 316 SS impeller, PEEK ow sensor, polyurethane potting material, polycarbonate housing Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 Weight 3/4" 6 lb (2.7 kg) 1" 7 lb (3.2 kg) 1-1/4" 8 lb (3.6 kg) 1-1/2" 9 lb (4.1 kg) 2" 13 lb (5.9.kg) Warranty 1 year March 2014
Output Wiring Wiring Terminations Communication Repeatability Size Connections Velocity Range Accuracy
314
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
B Overall height D Hex C Tee length A Overall length
FLOW
BTU METER 380 SERIES
TOP VIEW
Custom RTD fitting 1/8" NPT
8" (20.3 cm) 360 Pivot area case from center of tee
PG-7
PG-9
6
T2 length 6.5 ft. (2 m) E Width
Dimensions in (cm) TEE/NPT SIZE 2" 1.5" 1.25" 1" 3/4" A 7.9 (20.1) 7.3 (18.5) 7.1 (18) 6.7 (17.1) 6.7 (17.1) B 8.5 (21.6) 8.3 (21.1) 8.1 (20.6) 7.9 (20.1) 7.9 (20.1) C 7.8) (19.8) 6.7 (17.1) 6.3 (16) 5.4 (13.7) 5.4 (13.7) D 3.3 (8.4) 3.8 (9.7) 2.4 (6.1) 2 (5.1) 2 (5.1) E 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9)
0.24" (0.6 cm)
FLOW
INSTALLATION
24 AWG twisted, shielded pair Series 380 Btu meter Series 380 Btu meter Series 380 Btu meter Series 380 Btu meter (Up to 32 units)
Modbus or BACnet device Model 3700 Data Acquisition Server (Modbus) or similar Modbus or BACnet device
MODEL 380CS07 380CS10 380CS12 380CS15 380CS20 380HS07 380HS10 380HS12 380HS15 380HS20 3700 A304-1M DESCRIPTION 380 BTU System, cold service, 3/4" FNPT 380 BTU System, cold service, 1" FNPT 380 BTU System, cold service, 1-1/4" FNPT 380 BTU System, cold service, 1-1/2" FNPT 380 BTU System, cold service, 2" FNPT 380 BTU System, hot service, 3/4" FNPT 380 BTU System, hot service, 1" FNPT 380 BTU System, hot service, 1-1/4" FNPT 380 BTU System, hot service, 1-1/2" FNPT 380 BTU System, hot service, 2" FNPT RELATED PRODUCTS Data acquisition server Model 380 programming software
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
315
FLOW
DESCRIPTION The DE Series ultrasonic energy meter and DB Series ultrasonic ow meter attach externally to water distribution piping to measure ow rate and (the DE Series) supply/return temperature difference to calculate energy consumption. Since they are non-invasive, they add no pressure head loss to the system and can be installed on existing piping systems without shutdown or interruption. Installation is easy and fast, there are no moving parts, and they measure bi-directional ow. The DE energy meter measures energy usage in BTU, MBTU, MMBTU, Tons, kJ, kW, MW and is perfect for retrot of existing hot water or chilled water hydronic systems. Network communication models include Modbus RTU over RS485, Modbus TCP/IP, and Ethernet communication includes BACNet/IP, EtherNet/ IP protocols. The DE and DB meters have a backlit display (available with or without a keypad interface), a USB port for programming, and integral or remote clamp-on ow transducer congurations. The DE Series uses strap-on RTD temperature sensors (immersion sensors are also available). The DE and DB meters work with pipe sizes 1/2" to 100", are available in 24 VAC, 120 VAC, or 24 VDC power, and have a 4-20 mA analog output for ow rate and a pulse output for totalizing. Free ULTRALINK software is used to congure the meters. APPLICATION Heating/chilled/condenser water Potable water Irrigation water Rain/reclaimed water
ULTRASONIC ENERGY METER, FLOW METER DE/DB SERIES
NEW!
FEATURES Backlit display for easy reading in low light USB Port for conguration and monitoring No uid contact means no uid compatibility issues, no pressure drop, and no plant shutdown necessary for installation Bi-directional ow measurement for reversing ow systems Selectable engineering units for international preferences No moving parts to maintain or replace minimizes service costs Works with small amounts of suspended solids or aeration Totalizer options include forward, reverse and net total for ow measurement exibility Network communication models available for large projects (up to 126 meters per network) Keypad models allow access to many parameters Free Ultralink software for conguration
Accuracy Repeatability Sensitivity Display Engineering Units Pipe Size Range Velocity Range Operating Temperature Flow: 1.0% of reading above 1 fps (0.3 mps) velocity, 0.01% of reading below 1 fps (0.3 mps) Temperature (DE only): 0.45F (0.25C) 0.5% of reading Flow: 0.001 fps (.0003 mps) Temperature: 0.05F (.025C) Two-line LCD, LED backlit, top row: 0.7" (1.8 cm) height, 7-segment; bottom row: .35" (0.9 cm) height, 14-segment; ow rate and totalization indication DB: ow rate in gallons, cubic feet, million gallons, barrels, acre-feet, lbs., meters, cubic meters, liters, million liters, kg. DE: ow rates above plus BTU, MBTU, MMBTU, Tons, kJ, kW, MW 1/2" to 100" (1.2 to 254 cm) 0.1 to 40 fps (feet/second), 0.03 to 12.4 mps (meters/second), bi-directional -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C); remote DTTS/ DTTN transducers have upper limit of 250F (121C) and high temperature DTTH have upper limit of 400F (200C) Most clean liquids or liquids with some suspended solids or aeration Enclosure: powder-coated aluminum, polycarbonate, stainless steel, polyurethane, nickel-plated steel mounting brackets Transducers: NEMA 6 (IP67), PVC/CPVC, Ultem, Nylon cord grip, PVC cable jacket NEMA 4 (IP65) as long as a liquid-tight connectors are used CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1 (24 VDC, 120 VAC only); CE EN61326-1:2006 1 year
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 95-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz 20-28 VAC, 47-63 Hz 10-28 VDC Frequency DTTS small transducers: 2 MHz DTTN remote transducers: 1 MHz DTTL large pipe transducers 500 kHz Supply VA 17 VA maximum @ 95-264 VAC Supply Watts 5W @ 10-28 VDC Supply Current 0.35 A @ 20-28 VAC Maximum Output Impedance AC powered: 400 maximum DC powered: Maximum loop resistance = (Vsupply-7)/0.02 Outputs DE: 4-20 mA internal power, can span negative-to-positive ow/energy rates DB: 4-20 mA internal power, can span negative-to-positive ow/energy rates; two 0-1,000 Hz open collector transistors that can be congured for ow rate, alarming or totalizing Wiring Transducer cables: RG59 coaxial 75 or Twinaxial 78 , (optional armored conduit), maximum length 990' (300 m) in 10' (3m) increments RTDs (DE meters only): Platinum 385, 1 k, 3-wire PVC jacket cable Conduit Opening Two 1/2" FNPT and one 3/4" FNPT Cable Length Remote transducer models available with 20' (6.1m), 50' (15m), or 100' (30m) cables Communication USB: 2.0 for connection to PC running ULTRALINK conguration utility RS485: Modbus RTU command set, ENERGYLINK network monitoring software 10/100 Base-T: RJ45 communication via Modbus TCP/IP, Ethernet/IP and BACnet/IP Conguration PC running free ULTRALINK software or via integral display keypad (limited access to parameters)
Media Compatibility Materials Of Construction Enclosure Rating Approvals Warranty
316
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Bottom Botto om View
Integral Flow Transducer
FLOW
INSTALLATION (DE MODEL SHOWN; DB DOES NOT HAVE TEMPERATURE TRANSDUCERS)
Front View
Remote Flow Transducers
Supply
Supply
Temperature Transducers
Temperature Transducers
Return
Return
Transmitter with integral transducers
Transmitter with remote transducers
DIMENSIONS AND FLOW RANGES

Mechanical Dimensions: Inches (MM) Remote System
4.20 (106.7) 6.00 (152.4)
6
DTTS/DTTN Transducer Dimensions: Inches (MM)
Pipe Size Pipe Material Measuring Range 2 - 38 GPM 8 - 144 LPM 1.8 - 27 GPM 7 - 102 LPM 1.5 - 18 GPM 6 - 68 LPM 2.75 - 66 GPM 10 - 250 LPM 2.5 - 54 GPM 10 - 204 LPM 2.5 - 45 GPM 10 - 170 LPM 3.5 - 108 GPM 13 - 409 LPM 3.5 - 95 GPM 13 - 360 LPM 3.5 - 85 GPM 13 - 320 LPM 5 - 186 GPM 19 - 704 LPM 4.5 - 152 GPM 17 - 575 LPM 4 - 136 GPM 15 - 514 LPM 6 - 250 GPM 23 - 946 LPM 5 - 215 GPM 19 - 814 LPM 5 - 200 GPM 19 - 757 LPM 2.375 8 - 420 GPM (60.3)* 30 - 1590 LPM 2.125 8 - 375 GPM (54.0)* 30 - 1419 LPM 8 - 365 GPM 30 - 1381 LPM
ANSI/DN
"
4.32 (110)
ANSI/DN
FLOW
"
Wall mount
6.50 (165.1) 2.30 (58.4)
Pipe mount
1.38 (35.1)
2.12 (53.8)
ANSI/DN
1"
2.90 (73.7)
ANSI/DN
1-"
.19 DIA (4.8) 2 Mounting holes 1.20 (30.5)
ANSI/DN
Integral System
2.12 (53.8)
1-"
ANSI/DN
2"
B D C A
* Varies due to U-bolt configuration

DTTS U-Bolt Connections ANSI/DN & Copper 2" (50 mm) Models
DTTN/DTTH Pipes larger than 2" (50 mm)
DTTS Pipes/Tubing " to 2" (12 mm to 50 mm)
C (Min Clearance)
B
A DTTN 2.95 (74.9) DTTH 2.95 (74.9)
B 2.75 (69.8) 2.75 (69.8)
C 3.00 (76.2) 3.00 (76.2)
DTTL 3.40 2.94 3.20 (86.4) (74.7) (81.3)
D A C
D A C
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
317
FLOW
POWER WIRING FOR 24 VAC
ASD06-24S15
OUT OUT+
IN: 18-36VAC OUT: 15VDC
O1 N
2 3 4
O1 N
2 3 4
24 VAC Transformer
COMMUNICATIONS WIRING (MODEL SPECIFIC)
POWER WIRING FOR 24 VDC
FLOW
4-20 mA Out Reset Total

TD(A)TD(B)+ GND GND +12V
Modbus Gnd Modbus B Modbus A

10 - 28 VDC Power Gnd. Signal Gnd. Control 1 Control 2 Frequency Out 4-20 mA Out Reset Total Modbus Gnd Modbus B Modbus A
Model 485SD9TB
+ Downstream Upstream +
TEMPERATURE SENSOR WIRING

WHITE RED PIN #8 PIN #6 PIN #4 PIN #2 PIN #5 PIN #3 PIN #1 BLACK GREEN BROWN BLUE DRAIN RTD1 RTD2
318
RS-485
RS-485 Converter
To 12 VDC Supply
Chassis Gnd. 24 VAC AC Neutral Signal Gnd. Control 1 Control 2 Frequency Out 4-20 mA Out Reset Total Modbus Gnd Modbus B Modbus A
Test P1
NEW!
POWER WIRING FOR 120 VAC
ACN
AC IN : 100-240VAC,50/60Hz DC OUT : +15V / 0.3A
strodyne www.astrodyne.com PWC-15E 0.15A
-IN+
+Vo
-Vo
R2807
ACL
Modbus TFX Rx TFX Tx
95 - 264 VAC AC Neutral Signal Gnd. Control 1 Control 2 Frequency Out 4-20 mA Out Reset Total Modbus Gnd Modbus B Modbus A
10 -28 VDC
Power Ground
RS-232
O1 N
2 3 4
4-20 mA OUTPUT WIRING

Signal Gnd. Control 1 Control 2 Frequency Out 4-20 mA Out Reset Total
1 2 *Loop Resistance 3 4 5 6
WHITE BLACK RED DRAIN GREEN BLUE BROWN
PIN#5 PIN#3 PIN#1 PIN#8 PIN#6 PIN#4 PIN#2
DE/DB Series
*Loop resistance maximum = 400 ohms for AC powered units or (supply voltage 7 VDC/0.02 for DC powered units.
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MODEL DE DB C D 20-28 VAC 11-28 VDC KEYPAD Keypad Y N Y N No keypad COMMUNICATIONS L M N H X N 0 1
FLOW
DESCRIPTION BTU Meter Flowmeter PIPE SIZE IA 1/2" ANSI pipe IB 3/4" ANSI pipe IC 1" ANSI pipe ID 1 1/4" ANSI pipe IE 1 1/2" ANSI pipe IF 2" ANSI pipe IG 1/2" copper IH 3/4" copper II 1" copper IJ 1 1/4" copper IK 1 1/2" copper IL 2" copper IM 1/2" OD tubing IN 3/4" OD tubing IP 1" OD tubing IQ 1 1/4" OD tubing IR 1 1/2" OD tubing IS 2" OD tubing RZ Remote Flow Transducers (see DT, DS tables) TRANSDUCER MATERIAL/TEMPERATURE L PVC: -40 to +185F (-40 to +185C) H CPVC: -40 to +250F (-40 to +121C) N None (select for Remote Transducer Only) POWER 90-264 VAC A
10/100 Base-T (EtherNet/IP, BACnet/IP, Modbus TCP/IP) No communications ENERGY TEMPERATURE RANGE (Separately ordered RTD kit required) +32 to +122F (0 to +122C) +32 to +212F (0 to +100C) None (for DB flowmeter) -40 to +350F (-40 to +177C) -4 to +85F (-20 to +30C) APPROVALS General safety (power supply C only) OPTIONS None, plugged ports Cable Gland Kit
FLOW
Remote transducers for small pipes (with RZ pipe size) MODEL DESCRIPTION DTTS Remote transducers for 1/2" to 2" pipes DTTC High Temperature transducer for 1/2 to 2 pipes PIPE SIZE D 1/2" F 3/4" G 1" H 1 1/4" J 1 1/2" L 2" PIPE TYPE P ANSI carbon steel C Copper T Tubing CABLE LENGTH 020 20 feet (6.1 m) 050 50 feet (15 m) 100 100 feet (30 m) CABLE ARMOR OPTION N No armor A Flexible armor CABLE ARMOR LENGTH 000 No armor 020 20 feet (6.1 m) 050 50 feet (15 m) 100 100 feet (30 m)
Remote MODEL DTTN DTTH DTTL
transducers for large pipes (with RZ pipe size) DESCRIPTION Standard transducer for 2 1/2" to 20" pipes High temperature transducer for 2 1/2" to 100" pipes Large transducer for 22" to 100" pipes CABLE LENGTH 020 20 feet (6.1 m) 050 50 feet (15 m) 100 100 feet (30 m) CABLE ARMOR OPTION N No armor A Flexible armor CABLE ARMOR LENGTH 000 No armor 020 20 feet (6.1 m) 050 50 feet (15 m) 100 100 feet (30 m) OPTIONS N Normal area rating
Note: Shaded selections are special order. Note: DT remote transducers come with 36" straps that fit pipes up to 10". (P/N D002-2007-001)
D002-2007-005 D005-0350-300 D005-0803-104 D005-2117-003 D005-2117-004 D010-2102-010 D010-2102-016 D010-3000-120 D010-3000-121 D010-3000-122
ACCESSORIES 72" stainless steel straps, 1 pair, for DTTN/DTTH, for pipes up to 20" RTD Connector Kit (required for non-standard sensors) UltraLink PC software for DE/DB Meters USB A/B Cable, 10 ft. (3 m) for DE/DB Series Meters USB A/B Cable, 15 ft. (4.6 m) for DE/DB Series Meters Mounting track assembly for DTTN/DTTH transducers, for <10" pipes Mounting track assembly for DTTN/DTTH transducers, for 10" to 16" pipes RTD kit for DE Energy Meter, strap-on, 20 ft. cables RTD kit for DE Energy Meter, strap-on, 50 ft. cables RTD kit for DE Energy Meter, strap-on, 100 ft. cables
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
319
FLOW
PADDLE FLOW SWITCH 626600A
DESCRIPTION
The 626600A Flow Switch from Calef is used to prove liquid ow in 1" to 8" pipes containing water, 50% or less glycol solutions, or other liquids that are compatible with stainless steel, brass, and EPDM. It is designed for use in HVAC systems, heat exchangers, pumping systems, water treatment, and process systems in general. The high quality of Model 626600A makes it ideal for controlling pumps, burners, compressors, refrigerators, motorized valves, or for activation of signaling units or warning devices.
NEW!
626600A
6
FEATURES
316L stainless steel bellows for durability and long life NEMA 5 (IP54) environmental rating for use in humid or dusty environments Six stainless steel blades to t 1" to 8" pipes Insulated cover over microswitch contacts for safety Large, easily-accessible calibration screw with locking nut to maintain setpoint
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Resistive/Inductive: 15A @ 240 VAC maximum; Lamp load: 3A @ 125 VAC for the N.C. contact, 1.5A @ 125 VAC for the N.O. contact; Motor load: 5A, 1/4 HP @ 125 VAC for the N.C. contact, 2.5A, 1/8 HP @ 125 VAC for the N.O. contact Pipe Size Range 1" to 8" (2.5 to 20 cm) Connections 1" MNPT Operating Temperature 130F (55C) maximum ambient Media Temperature Range -22 to 250F (-30 to 121C) Maximum System Pressure 150 psig (1 bar) Materials Of Construction Wetted parts: P-Cu Zn40 Pb2 brass body, 316L stainless steel bellows, EPDM o-ring; Housing cover: Class UL94V-0 self-extinguishing polycarbonate Approvals CE, UL File E307420 Weight 1.7 lb (0.8 kg) Warranty 2 years Contact Rating
WIRING
1 COMMON
3 NO
2 NC Shown in no-flow, normal position
320
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
3"-DN 80
FLOW
PADDLE FLOW SWITCH 626600A
in (mm)
3.4 (87)
1/2" FNPT conduit connection
5.5 (135) 3.1 (80)
4"-DN100
1"
5"-DN125
1.25" 1.5" 2" 2.5"
6"-DN150
DN 175 8"-DN200
Select the blade marked with the diameter of the pipe in which the switch will be installed. For pipe sizes 1" to 2.5", remove all extra pre-fitted blades. For pipes 3" and above, leave all pre-fitted blades installed and add the long blade and trimming as shown for pipe size. Install the switch in the pipe, observing the flow direction arrows shown on the body casting and housing cover. The distance between the top of the pipe and the upper surface of the brass housing should be 3.1" (80 mm). The switch can be installed in a horizontal or vertical pipe, but avoid installing the switch below horizontal; dirt and deposits may collect in the switching mechanism and affect operation.
OPERATION
Operating flow rates: gpm (lpm) Diameter of Pipe
Minimum calibration Operating flow rate with increasing flow Minimum calibration Operating flow rate with decreasing flow Maximum calibration Operating flow rate with increasing flow Maximum calibration Operating flow rate with decreasing flow
1"
5.7 (21.7) 4.0 (15.0) 12.3 (46.8) 11.9 (45.1)
1.25"
7.5 (28.4) 5.5 (20.9) 16.7 (63.5) 16.3 (61.8)
1.5"
11.4 (43.4) 8.4 (31.7) 26.0 (98.5) 25.5 (96.9)
2"
13.2 (50.1) 9.7 (36.7) 29.5 (112) 29.0 (110)
2.5"
22.0 (83.5)
3"
29.9 (113)
4"
44.0 (167) 37.4 (142) 94.6 (359) 92.4 (351)
5"
61.1 (232) 51.5 (197) 136 (518) 127 (484)
6"
72.6 (275) 63.8 (242)
8"
FLOW
162 (618) 145 (551)
16.3 22.9 (61.8) (86, 8) 51.5 (195) 50.6 (192) 69.5 (264) 68.6 (260)
189 334 (718) (1269) 158 308 (601) (1169)
CALIBRATION
B A C
If the required operating flow rate differs from that given in the table below, the necessary correction should be carried out as follows: turn the calibration screw (A) in a clockwise direction for the contacts to close at higher flow rate values or in a counterclockwise direction for lower flow rate values. When the adjustment has been made, lock the screw (A) with the locking ring nut (B). Avoid all contact with the presetting screw (C). An incorrect setting would seriously impair the operation of the switch.
MODEL 626600A DESCRIPTION Paddle ow switch, 1" to 8" pipes, NEMA 5
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
321
FLOW
FLOW SWITCH FS1-6
DESCRIPTION
The Kele FS1-6 paddle ow switch is designed to prove liquid ow in a wide variety of HVAC and industrial applications. The corrosion-resistant ow switch is mounted in a weather-resistant box for simple wiring connections. The polyphenylene sulde plastic vane is eld trimmable for 1" (2.54 cm) and larger pipes, and it is magnetically coupled to the SPDT switch to prevent liquid from entering the switch housing.
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
FEATURES
Weather-resistant construction Simple installation Leak-proof magnetic switch operation Field adjustable for 1" (2.54 cm) and larger pipes SPDT snap-acting switch
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Arrangement SPDT; black wire = common, red wire = normally open (at no ow), blue wire = normally closed (at no ow) Contact Rating 5A @ 125/250 VAC Wiring 18" (46 cm) leads, 18 AWG 1" to 12" (2.5 to 30 cm) Pipe Size Range 1" MNPT Connections Media Temperature Range 212F (100C) maximum Maximum System Pressure 150 psig (1 bar) Materials Of Construction Wetted parts: Polyphenylene sulde vane, ceramic 8 magnet, 316 stainless steel spring and pin Weight 1 lb (.45 kg) 1 year Warranty
in (cm)
4.50 (11.43)
2.75 (6.99)
2.25 (5.72)
1" NPT pipe connection
13.25* (33.66)
5.00* (12.70)
1.00 (2.54)
WIRING
Black - Common Red - Normally open (no ow) Blue - Normally closed (no ow)
* Dimension with vane full length for 6" and larger pipe installation
322
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
INSTALLATION PERFORMANCE
FLOW
FLOW SWITCH FS1-6
1. Carefully unpack switch, making sure to remove any packing from the lower housing. Adjust the actuation or deactuation point by trimming the vane to the length desired. If using a pipe with weld-o-let, cond-o-let, or plastic PVC ttings, use graduations indicated on the vane. If using standard 125 or 250 lb (57 or 113 kg) bronze, iron, or steel ttings, trim the vane 0.125" (0.32 cm) above the marking provided. Because of the great variation in ttings and process connections, it is recommended the unit be checked when installed to ensure proper operation and that there is no interference between the vane and the ttings. For pipes larger than 6" (15.24 cm), leave the vane full length. 2. This ow switch is intended to be used in clean process media where particles, scale, and debris are not present. Buildup of such materials may cause inaccurate signals.
3. The switch must be indexed during installation in the line with the ow arrow on the side of the switch pointing in the direction of the ow. Pipe sealant is required at the 1" NPT thread connection. It is important to not get the sealant in the vane assembly as it may prevent proper operation and cause misleading signals. When installing the unit, be certain not to over-torque the housing. Damage may occur if excessive force is used.
4. Connect the switch wires in accordance with local electrical codes. The FS1-6 is not intended to be a load-carrying conduit connection. Loads may damage the switch and stop operation.
FLOW
PIPE SIZE 1 1.25 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 12
ACTUATION gpm (lpm) 10.7 (40.5) 9.5 (36.0) 8.1 (30.7) 9.8 (37.1) 12.4 (46.9) 20.2 (76.5) 43.0 (163) 74.2 (281) 116.7 (442) 167.1 (632)
DEACTUATION gpm (lpm) 9.3 7.7 6.3 8.5 8.9 12.7 32.8 56.6 89.0 127.4 (35.2) (29.1) (23.9) (32.2) (33.7) (48.1) (124) (214) (337) (482)
MODEL FS1-6 DESCRIPTION Weather-resistant ow switch
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
323
FLOW
FLOW SWITCH F61 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Johnson Controls F61 Series paddle ow switches are used to prove ow on liquid lines using water, ethylene glycol solutions, or other liquids compatible with brass and phosphor bronze parts. The SPDT contact switch is activated by liquid ow through the pipe and the set point is adjustable. The F61KD (NEMA 1 enclosure) and F61MD (NEMA 3R enclosure) are inline models for 1/2" NPT and 3/4" NPT pipe. The F61KB-11 (NEMA 1 enclosure) and F61MB-1 (NEMA 3R enclosure) are for 1" (2.5 cm) and larger pipes. They are furnished with a stainless steel paddle in three segments for pipes 1" to 3" (2.5 to 7.6 cm) in diameter. Paddle segments may be removed or trimmed as needed. A 6" (15 cm) paddle is also furnished for 4" (10 cm) diameter pipes and larger.
NEW!
F61KB-11 F61KD-3 KD-4 MD-1, MD-2 Approvals Warranty Brass ttings, phosper bronze bellows, stainless steel paddle Brass ttings, stainless steel bellows, stainless steel paddle UL recognized, File E5368 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
Media Temperature Range KB-11, KD-3, KD-4 32F to 250F (0C to 121C) MB-1, MD-1, MD-2 -20F to 250F (-30C to 121C) Maximum System Pressure 150 psig (1034 kPa) Materials Of Construction KB-11, MB-1, KD-3,
FLOW
WIRING ELECTRICAL RATINGS MOTOR RATINGS Horsepower AC full load amps AC locked rotor amps Noninductive or Resistance load amps
120V 208V 1 1 16 8.8 96 52.8
240V 277V 1 8 48 16
Action on increase of flow B Y R

F61 Series
16 16 16 Pilot duty 125 VA 24/277 VAC
DIMENSIONS
Model F61KD-3 F61MD-1 F61KD-4 F61MD-2 F61KB-11 F61MB-1 Size 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 3/4" 1" 1" Connections FNPT inline FNPT inline FNPT inline FNPT inline 1" MNPT insertion 1" MNPT insertion Dimensions 5.0"H x 4.0"W x 2.8"D (12.8 x 10.1 x 7.1 cm) 5.0"H x 4.0"W x 2.8"D (12.8 x 10.1 x 7.1 cm) 5.0"H x 4.0"W x 2.8"D (12.8 x 10.1 x 7.1 cm) 5.0"H x 4.0"W x 2.8"D (12.8 x 10.1 x 7.1 cm) 8.4"H (3" paddle) x 4.0"W x 2.8"D (21.3 x 10.2 x 7.1 cm) 8.7"H (3" paddle) x 4.8"W x 2.8"D (22.1 x 12.2 x 7.1 cm) Weight 2.1 lb (.95 kg) 2.2 lb (1.0 kg) 2.1 lb (.95 kg) 2.2 lb (1.0 kg) 1.7 lb (.77 kg) 2.4 lb (1.1 kg) Enclosure Rating NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 1 NEMA 3R NEMA 1 NEMA 3R March 2014
324
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
LINE PIPE SIZE (in) 1 1-1/4 5.8 (1.3) MODEL F61KB-11 F61MB-1 Minimum adjustment Maximum adjustment Flow increases R to Y closes Flow decreases R to B closes Flow increases R to Y closes Flow decreases R to B closes 4.2 (1.0) 2.50 (0.6) 3.70 (0.8) 8.80 (2.0) 13.30 (3.0) 8.50 (1.9) 12.50 (2.8)
FLOW
FLOW SWITCH F61 SERIES
ADJUSTMENTS: TYPICAL FLOW RATES gpm (m3/hr) 1-1/2 7.5 (1.7) 2 13.7 (3.1) 2-1/2 18.0 (4.1) 3 27.5 (6.2) 4* 65.0 (14.8) 37.0 (8.4) 50.0 (11.4) 27.0 (6.1) 128.0 (29.1) 81.0 (13.4) 122.0 (27.7) 76.0 (17.3) 5* 125.0 (28.4) 57.0 (12.9) 101.0 (22.9) 41.0 (9.3) 245.0 (55.6) 118.0 (26.8) 235.0 (53.4) 111.0 (25.2) 6* 190.0 (43.1) 74.0 (16.8) 158.0 (35.9) 54.0 (12.3) 375.0 (85.2) 144.0 (32.7) 360.0 (81.8) 135.0 (30.7) 8* 375.0 (85.2) 205.0 (46.6) 320.0 (72.7) 170.0 (38.6) 760.0 (172.6) 415.0 (94.2) 730.0 (165.8) 400.0 (90.8)
5.00 (1.1)
9.50 (2.2)
12.50 (2.8)
19.00 (4.3)
19.20 (4.4)
29.00 (6.6)
34.50 (7.8)
53.00 (12.0)
18.00 (4.1)
27.00 (6.1)
32.00 (7.3)
50.00 (11.4)
*Flow rates for these sizes are calculated. These gpm figures are for switch with 6" paddle. For 4" and 5" line pipe the paddle is trimmed. MODEL INLET/OUTLET SIZE (Female NPT) 1/2" x 1/2" 3/4" x 3/4" 1/2" x 1/2" 3/4" x 3/4" NEMA Enclosure 1 1 3R 3R ADJUSTMENT RANGE gpm (m3/hr) R to Y closes flow increase Minimum 0.6 (0.14) Maximum 1.1 (0.25) R to Y opens flow decrease Minimum 0.3 (0.07) Maximum 0.9 (0.2)
FLOW
F61KD-3 F61KD-4 F61MD-1 F61MD-2
MODEL F61KD-3 F61MD-1 F61KD-4 F61MD-2 F61KB-11 F61MB-1 DESCRIPTION Flow switch inline 1/2" x 1/2" NPT, NEMA 1 Flow switch inline 1/2" x 1/2" NPT, NEMA 3R Flow switch inline 3/4" x 3/4" NPT, NEMA 1 Flow switch inline 3/4" x 3/4" NPT, NEMA 3R Flow switch for pipe 1" diameter and larger, NEMA 1 Flow switch for pipe 1" diameter and larger, NEMA 3R
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
325
FLOW
COU, LIM, JAG, AND PAN MODELS EDC CONDENSATE PUMPS
DESCRIPTION Kele offers a variety of condensate removal pumps that are small, quiet running, and high performance for air conditioning and ventilation systems. Rigorously tested for total efciency over a long life-span, these devices are in use all over the world. FEATURES DRAIN PAN PUMP (COU) Electronic Energy Control System (EECS) for quiet start/stop Designed for low-cost installations Compact dimensions Completely encapsulated electronics Auto-sensing power, one model for 110/120 or 208/240 VAC
NEW!
COU LIM JAG PAN
CONDENSATE REMOVAL (PAN) Electronic Energy Control System (EECS) for quiet start/stop Small footprint, low prole for ease of mounting Electronic control with high water alarm Tiny remote mount reservoir/sensing unit Fits all wall-mount splits Maximum Discharge Lift Approvals Warranty 65' (20 m) CE, UL94 5 VA ame retardant ABS material 2 years
LIMPET CONDENSATE DISCHARGE (LIM) Electronic Energy Control System (EECS) for quiet start/stop 120V or 240V auto sensing Built-in alarm circuit Thermal protection Built-in non-return valves CONDENSATE PUMP (JAG) Electronic Energy Control System (EECS) for quiet start/stop Electronic control with high water alarm Fits all wall-mount air conditioners Mounts vertically or horizontally
FLOW
Supply Voltage 120-240 VAC 50/60 Hz auto sensing Supply Watts 17W Operating Temperature 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) Media Temperature Range 104F (40C) maximum Alarm Relay 5A, 30 VDC, 250 VAC breaks on fault Maximum Capacity 3.2 gallons/hour (12 liters/hour)
DIMENSIONS
Model COU.6000.0 LIM.6000.0 JAG.6000.0 PAN.6000.0 Dimensions 1.7"H x 1.3"W x 6.3"L (4.3 x 3.43 x 16.0 cm) with .25" (.6 cm) ID discharge tube 2.4"H x 2.0"W x 11.3"L (6.1 x 5.3 x 28.6 cm) with .25" (.6 cm) ID discharge tube 1.8"H x 1.6"W x 6.9"L (4.6 x 4.0 x 17.5 cm) with .25" (.6 cm) ID discharge tube Pump: 1.3"H x 1.8"W x 5.3"L (3.2 x 4.6 x 13.5 cm) with .25" (.6 cm) ID discharge tube Remote Sensor: 1.4" dia. x 1.8"W (3.6 x 4.5 cm) with 5' (1.5m) x 0.125" (3.3 mm) tube Wiring 18" (46 cm) 5-conductor cable, alarm contacts rated 5A @ 250 VAC, 30 VDC, break on fault 18" (46 cm) 5-conductor cable, alarm contacts rated 5A @ 250 VAC, 30 VDC, break on fault 40" (1 m) 18 AWG 5-conductor cable, alarm contact rating 5A @ 250 VAC maximum, break on fault 40" (1 m) 18 AWG 5-conductor cable, alarm contact rating 5A @ 250 VAC maximum, break on fault
MODEL COU.6000.0 LIM.6000.0 JAG.6000.0 PAN.6000.0 ACC.0038.0 ACC.0056.0 DPP.0076.0 LIM.0071.0 PCF.0061.0 DESCRIPTION Drain pan pump, 110-230 VAC auto sensing, 3.2 gph (12 lph) Condensate discharge system, 110-230 VAC auto sensing, 3.2 gph (12 lph) Condensate pump, 110-230V 50/60 Hz auto sensing, 3.2 gph (12 lph) Condensate pump with remote sensor, 110-230V 50/60 Hz auto sensing, 3.2 gph (12 lph) ACCESSORIES Inline lter kit for PAN, JAG pumps Anti-syphon valve kit Drain pan pump skirt lter Replacement lter element for LIM.4000 system Acoustic jacket for JAG, PAN pumps
326
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Input Signal Software Scaling and Control Sensor Input Digital Inputs Cable Length Repeatability Display Pipe Size Range Velocity Range Storage Temperature Approvals Ambient Conditions Battery Voltage input. 0-5V or 0-10 V, 1% accuracy Breakout Box Connector Digital Output Rate or Total Pulse User Selectable Enclosure Energy or Temperature
FLOW
PORTABLE ULTRASONIC FLOW AND ENERGY METER DXN SERIES
The Badger Meter DXN Series portable ultrasonic ow and energy meter is a true hybrid instrument, capable of measuring liquid ow with multiple technologies, including: Doppler, transit time and liquid thermal (heat energy) ow. Easy to install by clamping onto the outside of the pipe, the DXN measures ow using non-invasive ultrasonic sensors. Compatible with a pipe wall thickness gauge, inside pipe diameter can be veried to ensure accurate ultrasonic measurements when piping details are unknown or unavailable.
The DXN Series has a number of advanced features including a touchscreen interface, full-color graphing, wizard-based start-up conguration, USB connectivity, and Modbus TCP/IP connectivity. These features make it easy for technicians to obtain accurate readings while capturing ow surges and high-speed batch operations. The DXN Series captures and displays multiple user-dened and application parameters at once and can record the data with an easy-touse data logging function. The ability to monitor and record several parameters at once allows technicians to verify and troubleshoot permanent ow installations with ease.
6
DXN w Transducers
80k input impedance 14 V @ 50 mA max for powering current or voltage sensors Totalizer reset, external pull-up Transit time: 20' (6 m) paired coaxial cable, BNC to BNC, Doppler: 20' (6 m) paired coaxial cable, BNC to 4-pin 0.1% of reading 800 x 480 WVGA Color Outdoor Readable Display; Gloved-operation resistive touch screen 1/2" and larger; US standard pipe tables are built into User interface Transit Time: Bi-directional to 40 FPS (12 MPS) Doppler: Uni-directional to 40 FPS (12 MPS) Do not exceed 175F (80C) Safety: UL61010-1, CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1, EN61010-1 Directives: 2006/95/EC Low Voltage, 2004/108/EC EMC Battery powered: -4 to 110F (-20 to 45C) Externally powered: -20 to 140F (-30 to 60C) Internal 11.1 V lithium ion battery, 75W-hr. Provides 6-9 hrs of continuous operation with battery and indenitely on external power. Charging 32 to 104F (0 to 40C), 12 hours while in use; 4 hours powered off 0.2" quick disconnect screw terminals; 15 pin to adapter box; 6' (1.8 m) of cable (DSUB to DSUB connectors) 15-pin high-density DSUB Open collector, external or pull-up Rate pulse: 0-1000 Hz Total pulse: 33 ms duration Water/Dust resistant [IP 64] 2x RTDs PT1000 tab type; can handle various temperature ranges from -58 to 570F (-50 to 300C), based on RTD type Transit Time: 1% of reading or 0.01
Flow Sensitivity Housing Material Liquid Types Logging Sampling Rate Measurement Update Output Current Output Voltage
Flow Rate Accuracy
Software Scaling and Control 100 output impedance Pipe Surface Temperature DTTSU/DTTN/DTTL: -40 to 250F (-40 to 121C) DT94: -40 to 250F (-40 to 121C) Pipe Thickness Dual mode transducer with 6' (1.8 m) of cable (BNC ends) Power Cords North American plug (2 at & 1 round prong; NEMA 5/15P); China plug (3 at prongs; GB2099); Euro plug (2 round prongs; CEE7/7); U.K. plug (3 rectangular prongs; BS1363A); Japan plug (2 at & 1 round, JIS8303, w/ 3-2 prong adapter) Power Requirements 10-30 VDC via-3-pin connector, 40 W min; 3.6A resettable fuse Supplies: Desktop adapter: 100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz 50 W 10V-18V; Cigarette lighter adapter: 5A fused RTDs 2x platinum 385, 1000, 3-wire PVC jacketed cable standard with quick connector Temperature Accuracy Absolute 0.5F (1C); Difference 0.2F (0.5C); Resolution 0.02F (0.01C) Transducer Frequency DTTSU: 2 MHz, DTTN: 1 MHz, DTTL: 500 kHz DT94: 625 kHz User Menu Windows .NET fully integrated user menu; multi-language: English, Spanish, German, French, Portuguese, Japanese, Russian, Italian, Dutch, Norwegian, and Swedish Approvals CSA Warranty 1 year
FPS (0.003 MPS), whichever is greater Doppler: 2% of full scale 0.001 FPS (0.0003 MPS) DTTSU: CPVC, Ultem, and anodized aluminum track system; Nickel-plated brass connector with Teon insulation DTTN/DTTL/DT94: CPVC, Ultem; Nickel-plated brass connector with Teon insulation Liquid dominant uids >300 sites stored in 1 GB; downloads to USB Flash drive 0.1-10 seconds update/lter rate. Transit time, up to 50 Hz high speed mode 4-20 mA active/passive 1% accuracy 0-5 V or 0-10 V output voltage, 1% accuracy
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
327
FLOW
FLOW
SENSOR AND HARDWARE KIT OPTIONS
Basic
Small pipe and standard pipe transit time transducers (1) Couplant, grease; 5.3 oz; Dow 111 (1) Couplant, Ultrasound gel; 0.25 liter bottle (4) Stainless steel straps (1/2" wide, 12-5/16" max dia., worm drive clamp) Basic Kit and large pipe transducers Basic kit and Doppler transducers
All Transit Time Hybrid
NEW!
Energy Basic kit and non-invasive RTDs (1) Silicone Heat Sink Compound; 5 oz syringe (1) RTD Installation tape, 36 ft
Full
Basic kit plus all, transit time, Doppler, RTDs and pipe wall thickness gauge (1) Silicone Heat Sink Compound; 5 oz syringe (1) RTD Installation tape, 36 ft (2) Stainless steel straps (1/2" wide, 21-1/4" max dia., worm drive clamp)
PARTS AND ACCESSORIES

Power Cords/Cables Part Number
D005-2109-013 D005-2109-015 D005-2109-016 D005-2109-017 D005-2109-014 D005-2129-020
Description
North American plug (2 flat & 1 round prong; NEMA 5/15P) UK plug (3 rectangular prongs; BS1363A) Euro plug (2 round prongs; CEE7/7) Japan plug (2 flat & 1 round, JIS8303, w/ 3-2 prong adapter) China plug (3 flat prongs; GB2099) Transit time Cables, 20' (6 m) Transit time Cables, 50' (15 m) Transit time Cables, 100' (30 m) Doppler Cables, 20' (6 m) Doppler Cables, 50' (15 m) Doppler Cables, 100' (30 m)
FLOW
D005-2129-050 D005-2129-100 D005-2130-020 D005-2130-050 D005-2130-100
Transducers (Heads with case) Part Number

D010-2200-002-C D071-0110-000-C D071-0110-200-C D071-0112-001-C
Description
DTTSU universal small pipe DTTN standard pipe DTTL large pipe DT94 Doppler transducer
Minimum Pipe O.D.

0.5" (12 mm) 2" (50 mm) 16" (400 mm) 1" (25 mm)
Maximum Pipe O.D.

2.4" (60.3 mm) 98" (2500 mm) 120" (3050 mm) 60" (1524 mm)
RTDs/Accessories/Spare Parts Part Number

D002-2007-004 D002-2007-001 D002-2007-005 D002-2011-001 D002-2011-011 D010-3000-128 D010-3000-129
Description
0 392 F (200 C) RTD Silicone stretch tape 36" (914 mm) SS Hose clamp / transducer strap 72" (1829 mm) SS Hose clamp / transducer strap Acoustic couplant, grease (Dow 111), 150 F (65 C) 5.3 oz tube Acoustic couplant, paste high temperature, 142 gram tube, 392 F (200 C) Industrial RTD Kit,1 1000 Ohm, 392 F (200 C); 20' (6 m) cable Building Automation RTD Kit,1 1000 Ohm, 266 F (130 C); 20' (6 m) cable
328
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
9.45 (240) 7.78 (197.6) 3.77 (95.7)
FLOW
DTTSU Transit Time Transducer

7.00 (177.8) 1.54 (39.1)
0.3 1.0 1.5 2.0
1.65 (41.9)
DTTN Transit Time Transducer

3.45 (87.6)
3.50 (88.9) 1.54 (39.1)
FLOW
1.70 (43.2)
DTTL Transit Time Transducer

4.21 (106.9)
DXN Connection Panel

Doppler Transducer Transit Time Transducer (Upstream) Transit Time Transducer (Downstream) Auxiliary I/O
3.90 (99.0) 2.48 (63.0)
2.50 (63.5) Power/Charger USB On/Off Switch Ethernet
DT94 Doppler Transducer

1.70 (43.2) 4.13 (104.9)
Transducer Pipe Size Requirements

Minimum Pipe O.D. DTTSU DTTN DTTL DT94 .5" (12 mm) 2" (50 mm) 16" (400 mm) 1" (25 mm) Maximum Pipe O.D. 2.4" (60.3 mm) 98" (2500 mm) 120" (3050 mm) 60" (1524 mm)
1.89 (48.0)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
329
FLOW

MODEL DXNP
FLOW
DESCRIPTION Portable Clamp-on Ultrasonic Flow Meter POWER CORD A North American U U.K., Singapore E Euro J Japan C China SENSOR & HARDWARE KIT B Basic T All transit time H Hybrid E Energy F Full CARRYING CASE S Standard - Outer case with shoulder strap APPROVALS N CE + General Safety, U.S., Canada, and EU OPTIONS N None
NEW!
DXNP
Example: DXNP-A-B-S-N-N Portable clamp-on ultrasonic flow meter with North American power cord, basic sensor and hardware kit, standard carrying case, CE + General Safety approvals and no options
330
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
OPERATING PRINCIPLE
FLOW
INDUSTRIAL OVAL GEAR METER IOG SERIES
The Badger Meter Model IOG (industrial oval gear meter), is a modular ow meter design, economical yet highly accurate and rugged. The Model IOG is designed for a variety of chemical applications including petroleum based uids, water solutions, and any other liquid compatible with the materials of construction.
Fluid enters the inlet port and then passes through the metering chamber. Inside the chamber, uid forces the internal gears to rotate before exiting through the outlet port. Each rotation of the gears displaces a specic volume of uid. As the gears rotate, a magnet on each end of the gear passes a reed switch in the top-mounted registers circuit board. The reed switches send pulses to the microprocessor in the register to change the LED display segments. The oval gear meter can be used in conjunction with a variety of industrial registers. See the online documentation for Oval Gear Meter Registers, ER-420 Flow Rate/Totalizer, and the ER-500 Flow Monitor for more information on the available register options.
6
Industrial Oval Gear
FEATURES
Compact size High accuracy and repeatability Factory calibrated (stated in pulses per liter) Flow range of 0.067-185 gpm Flexibility of installation options (vertical installation or horizontal installation) Low pressure drop Minimum number of wearable parts for long product life and easy eld servicing Wide range of instrumentation available for control system interfacing Certifcations: UL File#913, CSA Pressure Rating (psi) Port Size 1/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1" HF 1-1/2" 2" 3" March 2014 Housing Material Stainless Aluminum Stainless Aluminum Stainless Aluminum Stainless Aluminum Stainless Aluminum Stainless Aluminum Stainless Aluminum Stainless Aluminum NPT/BSP 1000 1500 3000 2000 3000 2000 3000 2000 3000 2000 2000 1500 1500 1000 1000 750 ANSI 150# 285 285 285 285 285 285 285 ANSI 300# 740 740 740 740 740 740 -
APPLICATION
Due to the rugged nature of this particular ow measurement technology, the Industrial Oval Gear Meter can be used in a number of applications where conventional meters are not acceptable. Whether the liquid being measured is very viscous or highly corrosive, the oval gear meter can handle it. The Industrial Oval Gear Meter is designed for a variety of applications including petroleum based uids, water solutions, and any other liquid compatible with the materials of construction.
FLOW
Rotor Material Stainless Steel LCP
Operating Temperature Range -22 to 240F (-30 to 120C) -22 to 176F (-30 to 80C)
SPECIFICATIONS
Approvals Warranty CSA 1 year
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
331
FLOW
DIMENSIONS
NEW!
F
FLOW
Port Size 1/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1" HF 1-1/2" 2" 3"
A
2.17" (55 mm) 3.94" (100 mm) 3.94" (100 mm) 3.94" (100 mm) 3.94" (100 mm)
B
1.54" (39 mm) 3.44" (87.5 mm) 3.84" (97.5 mm) 3.84" (97.5 mm) 3.89" (98.9 mm)
C
2.05" (52 mm) 3.62" (92 mm) 3.62" (92 mm) 3.62" (92 mm) 3.62" (92 mm)
9.70" 5.12" 8.93" 10.10" 6.69" 8.45" 7.68" 8.89" 3.94" 4.84" (246.4 mm) (130 mm) (226.8 mm) (256.5 mm) (170 mm) (214.6 mm) (195.1 mm) (225.8 mm) (100.2 mm) (122.9 mm) 10.10" 5.12" 9.33" 10.50" 6.69" 8.70" 7.93" 9.14" 3.94" 4.84" (256.5 mm) (130 mm) (236.9 mm) (266.7 mm) (170 mm) (220.9 mm) (201.4 mm) (232.2 mm) (100.2 mm) (122.9 mm) 10.10" 5.12" 9.33" 10.50" 6.69" 8.70" 7.93" 9.14" 3.94" 4.84" (256.5 mm) (130 mm) (236.9 mm) (266.7 mm) (170 mm) (220.9 mm) (201.4 mm) (232.2 mm) (100.2 mm) (122.9 mm) 10.15" 5.12" 9.38" 10.55" 6.69" 8.60" 7.83" 9.04" 3.94" 4.84" (257.8 mm) (130 mm) (238.3 mm) (268.0 mm) (170 mm) (218.4 mm) (198.8 mm) (229.6 mm) (100.2 mm) (122.9 mm)
5.51" 4.93" 4.92" 11.15" 5.12" 10.38" 11.51" 8.35" 8.90" 8.13" 9.31" (140 mm) (125.3 mm) (125 mm) (283.2 mm) (130 mm) (263.7 mm) (292.4 mm) (212 mm) (226.1 mm) (206.5 mm) (236.5 mm) 5.91" 5.34" 5.28" 11.60" 5.12" 10.83" 11.96" 10.39" 9.16" 8.39" 9.57" (150 mm) (135.6 mm) (134 mm) (294.6 mm) (130 mm) (275.1 mm) (303.8 mm) (264 mm) (232.7 mm) (213.1 mm) (243.1 mm) 8.27" 6.35" 7.09" 12.57" 5.12" 11.80" 12.93" 13.54" 9.58" 8.81" 9.99" (210 mm) (161.4 mm) (180 mm) (319.3 mm) (130 mm) (299.7 mm) (328.4 mm) (344 mm) (243.3 mm) (223.8 mm) (253.8 mm)
332
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
FLOW RANGE
Port Size 1/4" American (gpm) Low .067 0.11 High 2.2 2.2 1/2" 0.25 8.0 16 14 18 16 45 40 65 60 100 100 185 185 0.50 6.6 3/4" 1" 1" HF 1-1/2" 2" 3" 0.50 1.20 0.6 1.4 1.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 5.0 10
FLOW
FLOW RANGE AND MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
SI (lpm) Low 0.25 0.44 1.0 2.0 2.0 4.5 2.3 5.3 5.7 9.5 9.5 15 15 23 19 38 High 8.3 8.3 30 25 60 53 68 60 170 151 246 227 379 379 700 700 Fluid Viscosity > 5.0 cP < 5.0 cP > 5.0 cP < 5.0 cP > 5.0 cP < 5.0 cP > 5.0 cP < 5.0 cP > 5.0 cP < 5.0 cP > 5.0 cP < 5.0 cP > 5.0 cP < 5.0 cP > 5.0 cP < 5.0 cP Accuracy (%) 1.0 2.5 0.5 2.0 0.5 2.0 0.5 2.0 0.5 2.0 0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0 Repeatability (%) 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03
FLOW
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
Wetted Parts Port Size 1/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1" HF 1-1/2" 2" 3" Housing 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al Cover 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al 316 SS 6061 Al Spindle 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS Gears 316 SS 316 SS LCP 316 SS LCP 316 SS LCP 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS Fluorosint Fluorosint Fluorosint Fluorosint Graphalloy Graphalloy Bearings Fluorosint 500 Graphalloy Magnet Neodymium Au Plated Alnico Alnico Alnico Neodymium Ni Plated Neodymium Ni Plated Neodymium Ni Plated Neodymium Ni Plated O-Ring Aflas Viton Aflas Viton Aflas Viton Aflas Viton Aflas Viton Aflas Viton Aflas Viton Aflas Viton Bolts 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS
NOTE: Upon request, additional O-Ring options are Buna-N and EPDM.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
333
FLOW
MODEL IOG
DESCRIPTION Industrial Oval Gear Meter PORT SIZE (for 1/4" port size see the 4 part numbers listed below) 050 1/2 inch port 075 3/4 inch port 100 1 inch port HF 1 inch high flow 150 1.5 inch port 200 2 inch port 300 3 inch port HOUSING SS Stainless Steel AL Aluminum CONNECTIONS NPT National Pipe Thread BSP Britsh Standard Pipe 150 150 LB Flange 300 300 LB Flange
NEW!
METER MOUNT REGISTER STANDARD R0 ILR-700 Local Display w/ Rate and Total T1 ILR-710 Display w/ Scaled Pulse Output T2 ILR-720 Display w/ Dual Scaled Pulse Output T3 ILR-730 Local Display w/ Ananlog Output METER MOUNT NON-SCALED TRANSMITTERS T4 ILR-740 Unscaled Pulse Output T5 ILR-741 Unscaled Pulse Output, Explosion Proof METER MOUNT REGISTER LARGE DISPLAY R1 ER-420 Scalable Rate Flow Counter 115-230 VAC RJ ER-420 Scalable Rate Flow Counter 24 VDC RK ER-420 Scalable Rate Flow Counter, Loop Powered RL ER-500 Standard RM ER-500 Advanced w/ Modbus NO REGISTER or TRANSMITTER RX None
FLOW
IOG
050
SS
NPT
T1
Example: IOG-050-SS-NPT-T1 1.2 inch port, stainless steel w/ IRL-710 Display w/ Scaled Pulse Output
1/4" Port Size Part Numbers 1/4" IOG, Aluminum, NPT - IOG-025-AL-NPT-01 1/4" IOG, Aluminum, BSP - IOG-025-AL-BSP-01 1/4" IOG, Stainless Steel, NPT - IOG-025-SS-NPT-11 1/4" IOG, Stainless Steel, BSP - IOG-025-SS-BSP-11
334
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Compound Series Model Meter Flanges, Class 150 Typical Operating Range (100% 1.5%) Low Flow Registration (97% minimum) Maximum Continuous Flow Pressure Loss at Maximum Continuous Flow Crossover Flow Rate, Typical Pressure Loss at Crossover Minimum Crossover Accuracy Maximum Operating Pressure Maximum Operating Temperature Test Plug 2" (50 mm) 2" elliptical or round (50 mm) 0.5200 gpm (0.145 m3/h) 0.25 gpm (0.06 m3/h) 170 gpm (38.3 m3/h) 5.4 psi at 170 gpm (0.38 bar at 38.3 m3/h) 12 gpm 3.5 psi (0.24 bar) 97%
FLOW
RECORDALL COMPOUND SERIES METER RCDL COMPOUND SERIES
The Badger Meter Recordall Compound Series meters meet or exceed the most recent revision of AWWA Standard C700 and are available in a leadfree bronze alloy. The Compound Series meters comply with the lead-free provisions of the Safe Drinking Water Act, are certied to NSF/ANSI Standards 61 and 372 (Trade Designation: LL-NS) and carry the NSF-61 mark on the housing. All components of the lead-free bronze alloy meter (housing, measuring element, seals, and so on) comprise the certied system. Badger Meter Recordall Compound Series meters combine two metering technologies in one innovative package. A positive displacement chamber measures low ow, while a turbine chamber records high ow.
OPERATION At low ow rates, the Compound Series meter diverts water up through a bypass to the disc chamber. Leaving the chambers outlet port, water ows beyond the turbine element and main valve. As the ow rate increases, a pressure differential is created that opens the main valve. The water then ows straight through the turbine chamber. In addition, a portion still ows through the disc chamber before exiting the meter. METER INSTALLATION The meter is designed for installations where ow is in one direction only. A separate strainer is provided to ensure optimum ow conditioning and protection of the measuring element. Companion anges for installation of meters on various pipe types and sizes are available in cast iron or NL bronze as an option.
6
Compound Series Family
APPLICATION
Use the Recordall Compound meter for measuring potable cold water in commercial and industrial applications where ow is in one direction only. The meter is an ideal choice for facilities that experience rapid and wide uctuations in water demand, such as hospitals, universities, residential complexes and manufacturing or processing facilities.
FLOW
FEATURES Offered in four sizes Patented design that eliminates the need for a trigger valve and maintains crossover accuracy Permanently sealed, tamper-resistant register or encoder
An optional summator can be provided as an integral part of the register assembly. All register options are removable from the meter without disrupting water service Certifcations: NSF/ANSI Standard 61 Certied, Annex G
3" (80 mm) 3" round (80 mm) 0.5450 gpm (0.1102 m3/h) 0.25 gpm (0.06 m3/h) 400 gpm (90.3 m3/h) 6.0 psi at 400 gpm (0.41 bar at 90.3 m3/h) 12 gpm 4.0 psi (0.28 bar) 97% 150 psi (10 bar) 105 F (41 C) 1-1/2"
4" (100 mm) 4" round (100 mm) 0.751000 gpm (0.17227 m3/h) 0.375 gpm (0.09 m3/h) 800 gpm (181.6 m3/h) 11.0 psi at 800 gpm (0.75 bar at 181.6 m3/h) 20 gpm 4.0 psi (0.28 bar) 97%
6" (150 mm) 6" round (150 mm) 0.752000 gpm (0.17454.4 m3/h) 0.375 gpm (0.09 m3/h) 1500 gpm (340.5 m3/h) 9.3 psi at 1500 gpm (0.64 bar at 340.5 m3/h) 30 gpm 5.0 psi (0.35 bar) 95%
2"
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
335
FLOW
DIMENSIONS
Compound Series Model Meter & Pipe Size Net Weight Shipping Weight Length (A) Width (B ) Height (C) Flange (D) Bolt Circle (E) Centerline (C) to Base (F) Number of Bolts 2 2" Elliptical (50 mm) 2" (50 mm) 45 lb (20.4 kg) 63 lb (28.5 kg) 15-1/4" * (387 mm) 7-3/8" (187 mm) 5-7/8" (149 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 4-1/2" (114 mm) 4-3/4" (121 mm) 4 2-3/4" (70 mm) 2" Round (50 mm)
RECORDALL COMPOUND SERIES METER RCDL COMPOUND SERIES
NEW!
3" (80 mm) 3" (80 mm) 4" (100 mm) 4" (100 mm) 85 lb (38.4 kg) 6" (150 mm) 6" (150 mm) 152 lb (68.7 kg) 24" (610 mm) 71.5 lb (32.4 kg) 99.5 lb (45 kg) 17" (432 mm) 120 lb (53.8 kg) 200 lb (90.4 kg) 20" (508 mm)** 9-1/4" (235 mm) 6-5/8" (168 mm) 3/4" (19 mm) 6" (152 mm) 3-5/8" (92 mm) 4 9-1/8" (232 mm) 7-1/4" (184 mm) 7/8" (22 mm) 7-1/2" (190.5 mm) 4-1/4" (108 mm) 8 12-3/8" (314 mm) 8-7/8" (225 mm) 15/16" (24 mm) 9-1/2" (241 mm) 5-3/8" (137 mm) 8
B D E
B D
* Adapter available to increase total length to 17 (432 mm). **Adapter available to increase total length to 24 (610 mm).
Elliptical Flange (2" only)
FLOW
Round Flange
F E
MODEL UM1-0008-6032 UM1-0008-6034 UM1-0008-6035 UM1-0008-6037 DESCRIPTION 2" Compound Meter with Pulse 3" Compound Meter with Pulse 4" Compound Meter with Pulse 6" Compound Meter with Pulse
336
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Typical Operating Range (100% 1.5%) Low Flow (Min. 95.0%) Low Flow (Min. 97.0%) 25 0.525 gpm (0.115.7 m3/hr) n/a n/a Low Flow (Min. 98.5%) 0.25 gpm (0.057 m3/hr) Maximum Continuous 15 gpm (3.4 m3/hr) Operation Pressure Loss at Maximum 3.5 psi at 15 gpm Continuous Operation (0.24 bar at 3.4 m3/hr) Maximum Operating Temperature Maximum Operating Pressure Measuring Element Available in NL bronze and thermoplastic to Meter Connections t 0.625" (DN 15mm) spud thread bore diameter sizes Test Plugs n/a
FLOW
RECORDALL NUTATING DISC METERS RCDL NUTATING DISC
The Badger Meter Recordall Model Nutating Disc Series meters meet or exceed the most recent revision of AWWA Standard C700 and are available in a lead-free bronze alloy. The meters comply with the lead-free provisions of the Safe Drinking Water Act, are certied to NSF/ANSI Standards 61 and 372 (Trade Designation: M25-LL) and carry the NSF-61 mark on the housing. All components of the lead-free bronze alloy meter (housing, measuring element, seals, and so on) comprise the certied system. Operation: Water ows through the meters strainer and into the measuring chamber where it causes the disc to nutate. The disc, which moves freely, nutates on its own ball, guided by a thrust roller. A drive magnet transmits the motion of the disc to a follower magnet located within the permanently sealed register. The follower magnet is connected to the register gear train. The gear train reduces the disc nutations into volume totalization units displayed on the register or encoder face. Operating Performance: The Recordall Nutating Disc Series meters meet or exceed registration accuracy for the low ow rates (95%), normal operating ow rates (100 1.5%), and maximum continuous operation ow rates as specically stated in AWWA Standard C700. Construction: Recordall Nutating Disc Series meter construction, which complies with ANSI/AWWA standard C700, consists of three basic components: meter housing, measuring chamber, and permanently sealed register. The water meter is available in a lead-free bronze alloy with externally-threaded spuds. A corrosion-resistant engineered polymer material is used for the measuring chamber. Industrial RCDL Disc Meters
APPLICATION
For use in measurement of potable cold water in residential, commercial and industrial services where ow is in one direction only.
FLOW
Connections: Tailpieces/Unions for installations of meters on various pipe types and sizes, including misaligned pipes, are available as an option. Certications: NSF/ANSI Standards 61 and 372 Certied
MODEL 35 70 120 0.7535 gpm 1.2570 gpm 2.5120 gpm (0.177.9 m3/hr) (0.2816 m3/hr) (0.5727 m3/hr) n/a 0.75 gpm (0.17 m3/hr) 1.25 gpm (0.28 m3/hr) 0.375 gpm n/a n/a (0.085 m3/hr) n/a n/a n/a 25 gpm (5.7 m3/hr) 50 gpm (11.3 m3/hr) 80 gpm (18 m3/hr) 5.0 psi at 25 gpm 6.5 psi at 50 gpm 4.8 psi at 80 gpm (0.37 bar at 5.7 m3/hr) (0.45 bar at 11.3 m3/hr) (0.33 bar at 18 m3/hr) 80F (26C) 150 psi (10 bar)
170 2.5170 gpm (0.5739 m3/hr) 1.5 gpm (0.34 m3/hr) n/a n/a 100 gpm (23 m3/hr) 3.3 psi at 100 gpm (0.23 bar at 23 m3/hr)
Nutating disc, positive displacement Available in NL bronze Available in NL bronze 1.5" AWWA two-bolt el- 2.0" AWWA two-bolt and engineered polymer and engineered polymer liptical ange, drilled or elliptical ange, drilled to t 0.75" (DN 20 to t 1.0" (DN 25 mm) 1.511.5 NPT internal or 211.5 NPT internal mm) spud thread bore spud thread bore pipe threads pipe threads diameter sizes diameter sizes Optional 1.0" NPT test 1.0" NPT test plug (TP) plug (TP) available on n/a n/a available on elliptical elliptical long and short long and short versions versions
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
337
FLOW
DIMENSIONS
Meter Size 5/ " (15 mm) 8 3/ " (20 mm) 4 1" (25 mm) 1-1/2" (40 mm) 2" (50 mm) Meter Model 25 35 70 120 EL Hex 120 EL, TP 170 EL Hex 170 EL, TP A Laying Length 1 7- /2" (190 mm) 7-1/2" (190 mm) 10-3/4" (273 mm) 12-5/8" (321 mm) 15-1/4" (387 mm) B Height Reg. 4-15/16" (125 mm) 5-1/4" (133 mm) 6-1/2" (165 mm) 7" (178 mm) 8" (203 mm)
RECORDALL NUTATING DISC METERS RCDL NUTATING DISC
NEW!
C Centerline Base 1-11/16" (42 mm) 1-5/8" (41 mm) 2-5/16" (59 mm) 2-3/8" (60 mm) 2-7/8" (73 mm) Width 4-1/4" (108 mm) 5" (127 mm) 7-3/4" (197 mm) 8-3/4" (222 mm) 9-1/2" (241 mm) 19 lb (8.6 kg) 30 lb (13.6 kg) 1/2"
Approx. Shipping Weight 1 4- /2 lb (2 kg) 5-1/2 lb (2.5 kg) 11-1/2 lb (5.2 kg)
6
Meter Spud and Connection Sizes Size Designation 5/8" x x L Laying Length 7-1/2" B Bore Dia. 5/8" Coupling Nut and Spud Thread 3/4" (5/8") Tailpiece Pipe Thread (NPT)
FLOW
Meter Spud and Connection Sizes Size Designation x 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" x 1" x x x L Laying Length 7-1/2" 9" 9" B Bore Dia. 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" Coupling Nut and Spud Thread 1" (3/4") 1" (3/4") 1-1/4" (1") Tailpiece Pipe Thread (NPT) 3/4" 3/4" 1"
Meter Spud and Connection Sizes Size Designation 1" x x L Laying Length 10-3/4" B Bore Dia. 1" Coupling Nut and Spud Thread 1-1/4" (1") Tailpiece Pipe Thread (NPT) 1"
MODEL UM1-0008-6014 UM1-0007-5863 UM1-0007-2649 UM1-0008-6016 UM1-0008-6017 DESCRIPTION Model 25 Pulse Water Meter Model 35 Pulse Water Meter Model 70 Pulse Water Meter Model 120 Pulse Water Meter Model 170 Pulse Water Meter
338
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Turbo Series Model Meter Flanges AWWA 125 Pound Class Typical Operating Range (100% 1.5%) Typical Low Flow (95% min.) Max. Continuous Flow Maximum Intermittent Flow Pressure Loss at Max. Continuous Flow Pressure Loss at Max. Continuous Flow: With Integral Strainer Max. Operating Pressure Max. Operating Temperature Optional Integral Strainer Optional External Strainer Test Plug 160 1-1/2" (40 mm) Elliptical 4200 gpm (0.945.4 m3/h) 2.5 gpm (0.6 m3/h) 160 gpm (36 m3/h) 200 gpm (45.4 m3/h) 3.8 psi (0.26 bar) 9.9 psi (0.68 bar) 200 2" (50 mm) Elliptical or Round 4310 gpm (0.970.4 m3/h) 2.5 gpm (0.6 m3/h) 200 gpm (45.4 m3/h) 310 gpm (70.4 m3/h) 3.1 psi (0.21 bar) 8.3 psi (0.57 bar)
FLOW
RECORDALL TURBO SERIES METERS RCDL TURBO SERIES
The Badger Meter Recordall Turbo Series meters meet or exceed the most recent revision of AWWA Standard C701 Class II Standards and are available in a lead-free bronze alloy for sizes 1-1/2" through 10" and cast iron for 12" meters. Turbo Series meters comply with the lead-free provisions of the Safe Drinking Water Act. Sizes 1-1/2" through 10" meters are also certied to NSF/ANSI Standards 61 and 372 (Trade Designation: Turbo Series LL-NS) and carry the NSF-61 mark on the housing. All components of the lead-free alloy meter (housing, measuring element, seals and so on) comprise the certied system.
Operation & Performance: Direct magnetic drive is achieved when the magnet carrier is driven by a gear train coupled to the rotor. The gear train consists of two sets of gears connected by a vertical transmission shaft. One gear set is at the magnet carrier, the other is a worm gear set at the rotor shaft. When water ows into the Turbo Series meter measuring element, it contacts the multi-vaned rotor. The resulting rotor rotation is then transmitted by magnetic coupling to a sealed register or encoder. The direct magnetic drive is built to provides a reliable meter-to-registration coupling.
6
Industrial Turbo Meters
APPLICATION
Recordall Turbo Series meters are designed for cold water, commercial and industrial applications where ows are consistent medium to high ows. Applications include hotels, apartment buildings, irrigations centers and manufacturing and processing plants. Turbo Series meters help reduce day-today maintenance costs while delivering accurate and efcient performance.
Models 160 through 6200 are designed for 1-1/2" through 12" applications Direct coupled turbine based on an exclusive "oating rotor"design that reduces bearing frictionand associated wear and tear Low pressure loss for improved system efciency Exceptional registration accuracy across low ow rate, normal operating ow rate and maximum continuous operation ow Permanently sealed, tamper-resistant register or encoder Integral strainer option for sizes 1-1/2" through 4" help protect your system from damaging debris and related downtime NSF/ANSI Standards 61 and 372 Certied
FLOW
450 3" (80 mm) Round 5550 gpm (1.1124.9 m3/h) 4 gpm (0.9 m3/h) 450 gpm (102.2 m3/h) 550 gpm (124.9 m3h) 1.8 psi (0.12 bar) 5 psi (0.43 bar)
1000 4" (100 mm) Round 101250 gpm (2.3284 m3/hr) 6 gpm (1.4 m3/h) 1000 gpm (227.1 m3/h) 1250 gpm (284 m3h) 7.3 psi (0.50 bar) 17.8 psi (1.2 bar)
2000 6" (150 mm) Round 202500 gpm (4.5568 m3/h) 12 gpm (2.7 m3/h) 2000 gpm (454 m3/h) 2500 gpm (568 m3/h) 4.8 psi (0.33 bar)
3500 8" (200 mm) Round 304500 gpm (6.81022 m3/h) 20 gpm (4.5 m3/h) 3500 gpm (795 m3/h) 4500 gpm (1022 m3/h) 2.5 psi (0.17 bar)
5500 10" (250 mm) Round 507000 gpm (11.41590 m3/h) 30 gpm (6.8 m3/h) 5500 gpm (1250 m3/h) 7000 gpm (1590 m3h) 1.6 psi (0.11 bar)
6200 12" (300 mm) Round AWWA 125 lb class 908800 gpm (20.51998 m3/h) 65 gpm (14.8 m3/h) 6200 gpm (1408 m3/h) 8800 gpm (1988 m3/h) 0.8 psi (0.05 bar)
150 psi (10 bar) 120 F (49 C) Built into inlet end. Removable cover plate permits access to strainer for cleaning. Available for Models 200, 450, 1000, 2000, 3500, 5500 and 6200. Standard with integral strainer; optional for other models. Optional for Models 2000 and 3500.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
339
FLOW
RECORDALL TURBO SERIES METERS RCDL TURBO SERIES
DIMENSIONS OF METERS WITH INTEGRAL STRAINER
NEW!
200 Round 2" (50 mm) 26 lb (12 kg) 30 lb (14 kg) 4 1-1/2" (40 mm) 17" (432 mm) 6" (152 mm) 7-3/32" (180 mm) 5/8" (16 mm) 4-3/4" (121 mm) 2-5/8" (67 mm) 450 Round 3" (80 mm) 49 lb (22 kg) 55 lb (25 kg) 4 2" (50 mm) 19" (483 mm) 7-1/2" (191 mm) 8-15/16" (227 mm) 27/32" (21 mm) 6" (152 mm) 3-19/32" (91 mm) 1000 Round 4" (100 mm) 60 lb (27.22 kg) 70 lb (31.75 kg) 8 2" (50 mm) 23" (584 mm) 9" (229 mm) 9-21/32" (245 mm) 13/16" (21 mm) 7-1/2" (191 mm) 4-5/16" (109 mm)
Turbo Series Model Meter Flanges
160 Elliptical 1-1/2" (40 mm) 14.3 lb (6.5 kg) 16.8 lb (7.6 kg) 2 1" (25.4 mm) 13" (330 mm) 5-7/32" (133 mm) 6-9/32" (159 mm) 51/64" (20 mm) 4" (102 mm) 1-27/32" (47 mm)
200 Elliptical 2" (50 mm) 24 lb (11 kg) 28 lb (13 kg) 2 1-1/2" (40 mm) 17" (432 mm) 5-27/32" (148 mm) 6-1/2" (165 mm) 27/32" (47 mm) 4-1/2" (114 mm) 2-1/16" (52 mm)
FLOW
Meter & Pipe Size Net Weight Shipping Weight Number of Bolts NPT Test Port & Test Plug (Standard) Length (A) Width (B ) Height (C) Flange (D) Bolt Circle (E) Centerline (F)
MODEL UM1-0007-6445 UM1-0008-6020 UM1-0008-6021 UM1-0008-6023 UM1-0008-6024 UM1-0008-6025 UM1-0008-6026 DESCRIPTION 1 1/2" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse 2" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse 3" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse 4" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse 6" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse 8" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse 10" Turbine Water Meter with Pulse
340
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Accuracy Connections MODEL FE-1000
FLOW
INSERTION TYPE AIRFLOW SENSING ELEMENT FE-1000 SERIES
The Paragon Controls FE-1000 insertion type airow sensing element is designed for quick, easy installation through a small cutout in the existing ductwork. Where multiple elements are required for proper duct traversing, the output ports are manifolded together, external to the ductwork. Each element is furnished complete with mounting hardware, sealing gaskets and all brass compression ttings required to manifold the elements together.
Multiple total and static pressure sensing ports along the length of the element Averaging internal manifold Insensitive to ow angle variations of as much as 20 when faced in the normal direction of ow 2% accuracy throughout the velocity rages of 100 fpm and over
6
FE-1000
Within 2% of actual ow (even in moderately turbulent ows) with approach angle variation of 20, when installed in accordance with published recommendations 1/4" compression, suitable for use with thermoplastic or copper tubing; thermoplastic tubing requires the use of tubing inserts, which are supplied with the ttings
Velocity Range 100 to 10,000 fpm Operating Temperature 350F (177C) continuous operation (in air) 400F (204C) intermittent operation (in air) Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH, non-condensing Materials Of Construction 6063-T5 anodized aluminum (standard) Warranty 1 year
FLOW
DESCRIPTION Insertion type airflow sensing element DIMENSIONS 1 Inches 2 Millimeters DUCT CONFIGURATION 1 Rectangular 2 Circular 3 Oval ELEMENT LENGTH (SPECIFY) INTERNAL INSULATION (SPECIFY) MATERIAL TYPE 1 Aluminum (standard) MOUNTING CONFIGUATION 1 Insertion (standard) 2 Internal Mount 3 Bayonet Tip TAKEOFF CONFIGURATION 1 1/8-27 Female NPT (standard)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
341
FLOW
DESCRIPTION
The Paragon Controls FE-1050 is an airow measuring element assembly specically designed for installation in the inlet cone of centrifugal fans or inlet bell of vane-axial fans. The design of these primary elements provides a means of accurate measurement of fan capacity along with ease of installation. Each assembly is complete with two airow measuring elements and pivot mounting hardware.
FAN INLET AIRFLOW SENSING ELEMENT FE-1050 SERIES
NEW!
FE-1050 Operating Temperature 350F (177C) continuous operation (in air) 400F (204C) intermittent operation (in air) Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH, non-condensing Materials Of Construction 6063-T5 anodized aluminum (standard) Warranty 1 year
FEATURES
Multiple total and static pressure sensing ports along the length of the element Averaging internal manifold Insensitive to ow angle variations of as much as 20 when faced in the normal direction of ow 2% accuracy throughout the velocity ranges of 100 fpm and over
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Connections Within 2% of actual ow when installed in accordance with published recommendations 1/4" compression, suitable for use with thermoplastic or copper tubing; thermoplastic tubing requires the use of tubing inserts, which are supplied with the ttings 100 to 8,000 fpm Velocity Range
342
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
MODEL FE-1050
FLOW
FAN INLET AIRFLOW SENSING ELEMENT FE-1050 SERIES
FLOW
Note: The 0.585 inch diameter probe is used for minimum fan inlets less than or equal to 28 inches and the 1 inch diameter probe is used for minimum fan inlets greater than 28 inches.
DESCRIPTION Fan inlet airflow sensing element DIMENSIONS 1 Inches 2 Millimeters INLET CONFIGURATION 1 Single inlet (SWSI) 2 Double inlet (DWDI) MOUNTING CONFIGUATION 1 Minimum inlet diameter (standard) 2 Mid-bell installation DIAMETER OF SENSING PLANE (SPECIFY) MATERIAL TYPE 1 Aluminum
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
343
FLOW
MEASURING AIRFLOW
Averaging Differential Pressure Devices To take some of the guesswork out of determining average duct velocity, an averaging tube may be used. An averaging tube operates basically the same way as a pitot tube to determine average duct velocity pressure, except instead of measuring one point within the duct, the averaging tube measures multiple points to determine a true average velocity. As an added benet, some averaging tubes are designed so that the differential pressure measured is two to three times the actual velocity pressure. This amplication is accomplished by the shape and design of the tube and results in greater resolution and the ability to measure lower air velocities.
NEW!
In Summary
Only the average duct velocity and duct cross-section area must be known to determine airow. By piping the total pressure to the high-pressure port and the static pressure to the low-pressure port of a differential pressure transmitter, the velocity pressure will be measured. When the duct center velocity is measured with a pitot tube, the average velocity will be approximately 90% of the measured velocity. By using an averaging tube, the average duct velocity may be measured directly. The averaging tube may also amplify pressure for greater resolution and higher accuracy at low ow rates. Flow coefcients for use with averaging tubes will be provided by the manufacturer. Always install airow measurement devices at least 7.5 duct diameters downstream and 1.5 diameters upstream of anything in the duct that could cause turbulence.
FLOW
(for use with pitot tubes only)

Device Placement in the Duct When measuring airow with either a pitot tube or an averaging tube, the best results will be obtained when the ow measuring device is located at least 7.5 duct diameters downstream and 1.5 diameters upstream from any disturbance (elbows, obstructions, etc.). Also, for best results, straightening vanes may be used 1.5 to 5 diameters upstream of the ow measuring device.
QUICK TIPS
By applying the two simple facts below, air velocity may be quickly estimated in the field. Fact 1. 4000 fpm velocity = 1" velocity pressure Fact 2. Velocity pressure varies as the flow squared or 2 P 2 = V2 or V2 = P2 P1 V1 V1 P1
( )
FIGURE 2. FLOW COEFFICIENTS FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS (for use with pitot tubes only) Differential Pressure Transmitter Range "W.C. 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 Maximum Air Velocity (fpm) 1265 1790 2190 2830 4000 5660 6930 8950 Flow Coefficient (Cf) 316 448 549 708 1000 1420 1733 2240
Example: If a velocity pressure is known, the velocity may be calculated by using 4000 fpm and 1" differential as V1 and P1. Assume the velocity pressure is 0.25". What is the air velocity? or V2 V 2 = P2 V1 P1 4000 or V2 = 2000 fpm = 0.25 1
If a velocity is known, velocity pressure may be calculated in a similar manner. Assume velocity is 1000 fpm, what is velocity pressure? or P2 P2 = V2 P1 V1 1 or P2 = 0.0625" W.C.
( )
= 1000 4000
( )
344
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
We Carry A Wide Array of Brands to Meet Your Jobs Specified Needs.
GMD-20 | p. 353
CD-A | p. 349
GDC-150 | p. 384
IAQ-A | p. 366
BA/420CO | p. 377
RLD-134A | p. 404

MODEL/SERIES PAGE
CO2/IAQ KCD Series Carbon Dioxide Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T5100, 8041 Carbon Dioxide Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD-A Series Carbon Dioxide Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C7232 Series Carbon Dioxide Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GMD20, GMW21 Series Carbon Dioxide Sensors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 045, 050 SenseAir Series CO2 Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T8000 Series CO2, Humidity and Temperature Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KCO2 Series CO2 and CO2/RH Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KTS Series Tri-Sense Transmitters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BA/BS3xxC Series CO2, Relative Humidity and Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BA/BS3xxV Series VOC/Indoor Air Quality Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IAQ-A Series Indoor Air Quality Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IAQ-N Series Network Compatible Indoor Air Quality Monitor.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CM-E1, GD-2B, HD-11 Toxic and Combustible Gas Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration UCK Universal Calibration Kit Universal Gas Calibration Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refrigerant Verication Kits Refrigerant Verication Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gas-Series, NIOSHSCBA Gas Cylinders and Safety Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Gases Calibration Gas Cylinders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309K Series Gas Calibration Kits Gas Calibration Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carbon Monoxide KCO Series Carbon Monoxide Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KCOP Series Carbon Monoxide Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KCOC Series Combination Carbon Monoxide Sensor with CO2, RH, or VOC . . . . . . . . . TP1-M Carbon Monoxide Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BA/420CO Series Carbon Monoxide Sensor.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CM6, GD6,TX-6-AM,TX-6-HS, TX-6-ND Toxic and Combustible Gas Sensors. . . . . . . . . 345 347 349 351 353 355 357 359 360 362 364 366 367 378 436 436 437 437 436 369 371 373 375 377 380
IAQ-A | p. 366
PH/Conductivity 50000 Conductivity Series Conductivity Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 50000 pH and ORP Series pH or ORP Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Refrigerants VA301EM Gas Detection Expansion Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HGM-SZ Refrigerant Gas Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HGM-MZ Multi-Zone Refrigerant Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VASQN8X Multipoint Sample Draw Gas Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RLD-5 Refrigerant Leak Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RLD-134A Refrigerant Leak Detector .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IR-F9 Series Infrared Refrigerant Gas Detector AGM-SZ Single Zone Ammonia Gas Monitor .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoke Detectors SM-501 Series Duct Smoke Detectors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SL-2000 Series Duct Smoke Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MS Series Remote Accessories for SM-501 and SL-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4120 Photoelectric Duct Smoke Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4120 Series Remote Accessories D4120 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS-100 Series Plenum Smoke Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2151 and B114 Series Pendant Smoke Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toxic and Combustibles GDS Series Toxic and Combustible Gas Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDC150 Toxic and Combustible Gas Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPC3 Series Single Point Transmitter and Controller .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDD Series Dual Sensor Gas Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDC 350 Toxic and Combustible Stand-alone Gas Detector/Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GDN Series Network Compatible Gas Detector .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VA301C-DLC Gas Detection Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OS-1 Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 398 399 400 402 404 406 410 411 413 417 418 415 420 421 382 384 386 388 390 392 396 408
GDS | p. 382
SM-501 | p. 411
GAS & S P E C I A LT Y SENSORS
Vibration 140T Vibration Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 550 Vibration Transmitter / Switch.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 VK Series Vibration Switch .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
kele.com
Weather A70 Series Weather Instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 DS-2B Rain/Snow Sensor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS KCD SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KCD Series was designed to offer an economical, reliable, non-dispersive infrared carbon dioxide sensor. It measures environmental carbon dioxide levels for use in demand-controlled ventilation, air-quality monitoring, and other HVAC applications in accordance with ASHRAE standards. Voltage or milliamp analog output and convenient terminals on the wall mount make installation both simple and trouble-free. The analog output is available in 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, over the industry standard 0-2000 ppm CO2 range. Also has 1000 ohm platinum 385 curve or 10K ohm Either Type II or II sensor options avalible.
FEATURES
24 VAC/VDC power 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA output 0-2000 ppm CO2 range Wall-mount and duct versions Reverse polarity protected Simple push-button calibration Factory calibrated Temperature option
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Accuracy Repeatability Measurement Range Sensing Technology Calibration Calibration Interval Life Expectancy Visual Indication Warm Up Time Response Time 20-28 VAC @ 8 VA, 50/60 Hz, reverse polarity protection or 18-30 VDC @ 330 mA 0-10V or 4-20 mA (600 max) model dependant 3% of reading or 40 ppm 20 ppm 0-2000 ppm CO2 Non-dispersive IR (NDIR) Push button @ 2000 ppm 5 years 10 years typical LED ashes above 1000 ppm of CO2 3 minutes <1 minute Temperature Thermistor 10,000 Type II & III RTD 1,000 Platinum 385 curve Operating Humidity 0% to 99% RH (noncondensing) Operating Temperature 50 to 122F (10 to 50C) Dimensions Wall 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D (11.4 x 7.3 x 2.54 cm) Duct 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 6.9"D (11.4 x 7.3 x 17.5 cm) Duct probe 1.7" (4.3 cm) diameter Weight Wall 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Duct 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
345

CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS KCD SERIES
WIRING
Power input 20-30 VAC 18-30 VDC
+ + +
Current or voltage output.
24 VAC/VDC OUTPUT Temperature (optional)
NEW!
Current output 4-20 mA (optional)
(
0-10 V Jumper "off" 0-5 V Jumper "on"
Temperature (optional)
Two terminals are electrically connected

+ + - + -
OUTPUT 1
24 VAC/VDC
7
Wall Mount
CO2 Cal Port
+
Voltage or current output '' terminals of OUTPUT and power input are electrically connected.
Power input 18-30 VDC 20-28 VAC (polarity applies to VDC only)
UNUSED
CO
2O
UT
Power input 18-30 VDC 20-28 VAC (polarity applies to VDC only)
Duct Mount - With Temp
Duct Mount - Without Temp
MODEL DESCRIPTION KCD CO2 sensor MOUNTING W Wall mount D Duct mount ANALOG OUTPUT V 0-10 VDC A 4-20 mA T85 1k 385 curve RTD T24 10k Type II thermistor T3 10k Type III thermistor KCD W V T3 Example: KCD-W-V-T3 Wall-mount CO2 sensor with 0-10 VDC output
PU
24 VOLTS AC or DC I V
Jumper
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 GAS-CO2-2000 UCK-1
ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L 437 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
346
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS T5100, 8041
DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advanced Sensors Models T5100 and 8041 Carbon Dioxide sensors are designed to monitor the CO2 levels to provide an indication of occupancy for use in demand-controlled ventilation according to ASHRAE Standard 62. Model T5100 wall-mount carbon dioxide sensors are designed to monitor the CO2 concentration in a room. The Model 8041 is a duct-mount sensors with 4" probes that monitor the carbon dioxide levels inside a duct air stream. Each model outputs a 0-10 VDC signal representing a 0-2000 ppm concentration of CO2.
FEATURES
Analog output, 0-5/10 VDC (eld selectable) or 4-20 mA models ABC Logic(TM) automated calibration Non-dispersive infrared technology 8041 T5100-X
SPECIFICATIONS
18-30 VAC @ 1.8 VA, 50/60 Hz reverse polarity protected or 18-42 VDC @ 15 mA, 18-30 VAC @ 0.7 VA, 50/60 Hz; 18-42 VDC @ 29 mA Signal Output 0-10 VDC, 0-5/10 VDC led selectable, 4- 20 mA Maximum Output Impedance mA 500 Minimum Output Impedance VDC 1000 Accuracy whichever is greater 40 ppm or 3% reading, Whichever is greater 30 ppm or 3% reading Linearity <1% of Full scale Stability <2% Full scale over life of sensor Temperature Dependence 0.1% Full scale per F (0.2% FS per C) Supply Voltage 0-2000 ppm (factory setting) None, uses ABC Logic (Automatic Background Calibration) Warm Up Time <2 minutes operational, 10 minutes to maximum accuracy Response Time 3-5 minutes for 90% step change 0.13% of reading per 0.54" W.C. Pressure (1 mm Hg) Wiring Terminations Leads, Terminals Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH, noncondensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 3.05"H x 3.05"W x 1.58"D Dimensions (7.46 x 7.46 x 4.02 cm) 4.6"H x 3.2"W x 1.0"D (11.6 x 8.1 x2.5 cm) Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 kg), 0.4 lb (0.11 kg) Approvals CE, RoHS Warranty 2 years Measurement Range Calibration Interval
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
347

CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS T5100, 8041
WIRING
Mounting holes Interface connector Thermistor
NEW!
Drill/Punch 1/8" Holes Drill/Cut 1 1/4" Hole Gasket (Supplied) Duct
Sensor 7-pin Connector Slot for wiring
Mounting holes
Wiring: 1 ground 2 CO2 (0-5/10 or 4-20 mA) 3 24 Volt input 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 6 Not Used 7 Not Used
T5100
STRIP GAUGE
OPTIONS
Wiring:
AC-/DC-/GND AC+/DC+
UIP
J2
0.25" (6mm)
CO2
OUTPUTS
18-30 VACRMS 18-42 VDC < 2W PEAK
POWER
GND
RED - 24V BROWN - V out BLACK - Ground Conduit
8041
T5100-I
5V-NC 10C-NO
STRIP GAUGE CO2
1. Before installing sensor, note the direction of the airflow. Ensure all mounting holes are sealed tightly. 2. Drill/Cut one 1-1/2" hole / Punch/Drill one 1/8" hole.
AC-/DC-/GND 0.25" (6mm)
OPTIONS
UIP
J2
J3
3. Slide sensor into 1-1/2" hole and secure with screws.

AC+/DC+
V CO2
OUTPUTS
18-30 VACRMS 18-42 VDC < 2W PEAK
POWER
GND
4. Connect conduit and make necessary wire connections. 5. Install lid, ensure it snaps into place.
8 7
T5100-V
MODEL 8041 T5100-V T5100-I DESCRIPTION Duct-mount carbon dioxide sensor, 0-10 VDC analog output, 4" probe Wall-mount carbon dioxide sensor, 0-5/10 VDC analog output, eld selectable Wall-mount carbon dioxide sensor,4-20 mA analog output
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436 DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 DCP-1.5-W 995 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
348
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS CD-A SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model CD-A represents a new level of economy in reliable non-dispersive infrared carbon dioxide sensors. It measures environmental carbon dioxide levels for use in demand-controlled ventilation, air-quality monitoring, and other HVAC applications in accordance with ASHRAE standards.Fully isolated analog outputs and a convenient center wiring terminal make installation both simple and trouble-free. The analog output is jumper-selectable, 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC, over the industry standard 0-2000 ppm CO2 range. Models are also available with an optional LCD display and/or control relay with adjustable setpoint.
FEATURES
24 VAC/VDC power 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA analog output, jumper selectable 0-2000 ppm CO2 range Wall-mount and duct-sampling versions Isolation of output and power Compact, attractive enclosure Optional control relay with adjustable setpoint Simple single-point calibration Optional LCD display Factory calibrated
CD-AW-LCD
CD-AD-LCD
Duct Probe Assembly (included with above)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Accuracy 20-30 VAC @ 2.5 VA or 18-30 VDC @ 104 mA 0-10 VDC (factory setting) 4-20 mA (eld selectable), 500 max 5% of reading or 75 ppm, whichever is greater Max drift (per year) 75 ppm Repeatability 20 ppm 0-2000 ppm CO2 Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) Three years, Span only (automatic electronic zero adjustment) 10 years typical 0.35" LCD (0.88 cm), 4 digit 3 minutes Less than 1 min 50 ppm (alarm) 1000 ppm (eld adjustable 700-1300 ppm) Relay Output N.O. (N.C. eld selectable), 2A @ 24 VAC Operating Humidity 0% to 90% RH noncondensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Dimensions Wall 5.2"H x 3.2"W x 1.4"D (13.2 x 8.1 x 3.6 cm) Duct 5.2"H x 3.2"W x 3.4"D (13.2 x 8.1 x 8.6 cm) Weight Wall 0.61 lb (0.27 kg) Duct 1.35 lb (0.61 kg) Warranty 1 year Deadband Relay Setpoint
Measurement Range Sensing Technology Calibration Interval Life Expectancy Visual Indication Warm Up Time Response Time
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
349

CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS CD-A SERIES
DIMENSIONS INSTALLATION
in (cm)
5.25 (13.34)
NEW!
JP5 Optional LCD Display 24 VAC/VDC No Polarity
Sensing Cell
The wall-mounted CD-AW must be placed in an area that is representative of the entire conditioned space. Recommended mounting height is 4' to 6' (1.22 to 1.83m) above the oor. Avoid drafts for locations where occupants may routinely breathe toward the sensor.
The duct-sampling style CD-AD requires a minimum air velocity of 400 fpm (3 m/s). Complete installation and conguration instructions are included with each unit shipped.
7
WIRING
3.5 (8.89)
1.38 (3.08)
Analog Selector **Signal 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC *Optional Control Relay Contacts 2A@ 24 VAC/VDC
* Relay contacts are field-selectable N.O. or N.C. JP5 open N.C. closed - N.O. (factory setting) ** Output signal is field-selectable 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, fully isolated. Voltage - outboard and middle pin jumpered Current - inboard and middle pin jumpered
MODEL CD-AW CD-AW-LCD CD-AW-R CD-AW-R-LCD CD-AD CD-AD-LCD CD-AD-R CD-AD-R-LCD DESCRIPTION CO2 wall mount sensor with analog output CO2 wall mount sensor with analog output, with LCD display CO2 wall mount sensor with analog output, with relay CO2 wall mount sensor with analog output, with LCD display and relay CO2 duct mount sensor with analog output CO2 duct mount sensor with analog output, with LCD display CO2 duct mount sensor with analog output, with relay CO2 duct mount sensor with analog output, with LCD display and relay
UCK-1 GAS-CO2-1000 89-0018-00 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
RELATED PRODUCTS
Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 1000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L Replacement lter for CD-AD duct probe
Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT
ACCESSORIES PAGE
979 995 994
350
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR C7232 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Used with HVAC control systems to control building ventilation, the Honeywell Model C7232 Carbon Dioxide Sensor measures CO2 concentration in a ventilated space or duct. These easy-to-install sensors provide long term CO2 monitoring at a low cost, and they are compact in size with selectable ranges. They have an analog and relay output, use non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) technology, and feature a unique corrosion-free sensing chamber for accurate, stable CO2 sensing. Models are available for wall and duct-mount applications, with or without an LCD display, and with or without the Honeywell logo.
FEATURES
Available with LCD to provide sensor readings and status information NDIR technology to measure carbon dioxide gas Gold-plated sensor for long-term calibration stability Analog and relay outputs based on CO2 levels Automatic Background Calibration (ABC) algorithm based on long-term evaluation to reduce required maintenance
C7232A C7232B
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Minimum Output Impedance VDC Accuracy Pressure Depedence Measurement Range Calibration Interval Response Time Display 24 VAC 20% @ 3 VA, 50/60 Hz (Class 2) 0-10, 2-10 VDC, 0-20, 4-20 mA, (jumper selectable) <500, >5000 30 ppm + 2% of reading 1.4% change in reading per 0.15 psig (1.0 kPa) deviation from 14.5 psig (1000 kPa) 0-2000 ppm 5% and 50 ppm Five years 2 minutes 4-Digit LCD Relay Output Shipped N.O., close at 800 ppm (selectable) Contact rating: 1A @ 50 VAC/24 VDC Minimum load: 1mA @ 5 VDC, SPST Wiring Terminations 20 AWG, 8" cable, 20 AWG, 6" cable Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH noncondensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Enclosure Rating Wall NEMA 1 Duct NEMA 3 Flammability rating UL955V Approvals UL File # E4436, CE Weight Wall 0.4 lb (0.18 kg) Duct 1.6 lb (0.45 kg) Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
351

CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR C7232
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.0 (2.52)
Knockouts for European Applications
2.38 (6.05) Standard Utility 2.38 Conduit Box (6.05) (2 x 4) Mounting Holes
5.06 (12.85)
NEW!
3.31 (8.41) 1.81 (4.60) 5.63 (14.30) 1.63 (4.14) 8.0 (20.32)
3.16 (8.03)
C7232A
C7232B
WIRING
(red) 24V L1 (HOT) L2
(black)
WIRE COLOR DESIGNATION Red G+ G0 OUT1 M NO COM Black Yellow Brown Orange Green
FUNCTION 24 VAC Hot 24 VAC Common Analog Output Signal Analog Output Common Relay Output Normally Open Relay Output Common
Analog Out
+ _
(yellow) (brown)
Note: Provide disconnect means and overload protection to power supply as required. Order transformer separately.
(orange) (green)
C7232
INSTALLATION
The wall-mount C7232A must be installed in a ventilated place where it will not be affected directly by air from ducts, drafts, or in dead spots behind doors or in corners. The duct-mount C7232B mounts to the outside of the air duct, and its sampling tube installs through a 1" (2.54 cm) hole. Leakage into the duct or the sensor box cover will skew the sensor readings, so the box cover and duct must be completely sealed.
MODEL C7232A1008 C7232A1016 C7232A1032 C7232B1006 C7232B1014 C7232B1030 691-K0A DESCRIPTION Wall-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output, LCD display Wall-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output Wall-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output, no logo Duct-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output, LCD display Duct-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output Duct-mount CO2 sensor, analog and relay output, no logo ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
352
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS GMD20, GMW21 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Vaisala GMW21 and GMD20 Series Carbon Dioxide Sensors are specially designed for demand-controlled ventilation. The transmitters use the silicon-based CARBOCAP sensor. The simple structure and reference measurement capabilities make these single-beam, dualwavelength NDIR sensors extremely stable and reliable. The temperature and ow dependence is negligible. Models are available with a temperature output. GMW21D
FEATURES
Silicon-based NDIR sensor Excellant long-term stability Negligible temperature dependence Easy installation Five-year recommended calibration interval Duct sensor measurement in the duct
GMD20D
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 24 VAC @ 2.5 VA or 24 VDC @ 104 mA Signal Output 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, and 0-10 VDC Maximum Output Impedance mA 500 maximum Minimum Output Impedance VDC 1 k minimum Accuracy 2% of reading 30 ppm Linearity 1% FS Stability <5% FS for 5 years Air Velocity 0-2000 fpm (0-10 mps) Measurement Range 0-2000 ppm Warm Up Time 15 minutes Response Time 1 minute Relay Setpoint 1000 ppm (adjustable with calibration software Operating Humidity 0% to 85% non-condensing Operating Temperature 23 to 113F (-5 to 45C) Approvals CE Weight Wall 0.35 lb (0.16 kg) Duct 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) Warranty 2 years
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.52 (6.4)
min 3.15 (8.0) max 5.51 (14.0) 0.59 (1.5) 1.65 (4.2) 0.87 (2.2)
1.65 (4.2)
GMD20, GMD20D 3.15 (8.0)

2.36 (6.0)
4.27 (10.8)
3.26 (8.3)
2.36 (6.0) 3.26 (8.3)
2.62 (6.67)
GMW21, GMW21D
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
353

CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS GMD20, GMW21 SERIES
INSTALLATION
The wall-mount GMW21 Series must be placed in an area representative of the entire conditioned space. Recommended mounting height is 5' (1.5m), and the unit may be mounted onto a wall box or surface mounted.
The duct-mount GMD20 Series mounts directly to the duct. The duct probe insertion depth is adjustable using the mounting plate. Since the CO2 level is sensed in the duct, there are no minimum airow requirements.
NEW!
mA V 0
CALIBRATION
The GM Series is factory calibrated. A recalibration is recommended every five years. A field check can be done with a calibration gas and multimeter. A calibration adjustment requires the Model 19222 GM calibration software.
WIRING
Power Supply
Analog Outputs
0/mA
24V Power Common 0-10 VDC 4-20 mA
Serial Com
4-20 mA Standard (remove jumper for 0-20 mA)

V7 V10
Steady Red for Fault
Blinks Green Normally
MODEL GMD20 GMD20D GMW21 GMW21D GML20 DESCRIPTION Duct-mount CO2 transmitter Duct-mount CO2 transmitter with relay and display Wall-mount CO2 transmitter Wall-mount CO2 transmitter with relay and display Wall-mount CO2 transmitter with LONworks
19222GM 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 GAS-CO2-2000 GMA20T GMR20 UCK-1
ACCESSORIES PAGE Calibration software kit (includes disk and serial adapter) Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L Analog temperature option (GMW21 only) Relay option (GMW21 or GMD20 only) Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants)
354
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CO2 TRANSMITTER 045, 050 SENSEAIR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The aSENSE Model 045 and eSENSE Model 050 CO2 transmitters from SenseAir utilize the latest NDIR technology to accurately and reliably measure indoor levels of CO2. The aSENSE Model 045 is a digital low-cost transmitter. It measures both CO2 concentration and temperature in the ambient air and can transmit data to a BAS system or controller. The aSENSE Model 045 is a key component for climate control of buildings and other processes. The eSENSE Model 050 is a new simple, low cost, state-of theart, infrared and maintenance-free carbon dioxide transmitter for room or duct applications. The eSENSE Model 050 measures the carbon dioxide concentration in the ambient air up to 2000 ppm and transforms the data into an analogue output. Both the aSENSE and the eSENSE help you save money by decreasing your energy consumption while creating a healthier indoor climate. 045-8-0370-F
FEATURES
ABC logic needs no calibration Five-year warranty Platinum EQC coatings, unique to SenseAir products SenseAir track-individual serial number for every unit ISO 9001 & 14001 certied
045-8-0341-F
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output aSense Output 1 Ouptut 2 eSense Output 1 Output 2 24 VAC @ 3 VA 20%, 50/60 Hz; 24 VDC @ 125 mA 20 % 0-10V models: CO2 0-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA (500 ohms); 0-5V models CO2 0-5 VDC or 0/4-20 mA (500 ohms) 0-10V models: Temperature 0-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA (500 ohms); 0-5V models Temperature 0-5 VDC or 0/4-20 mA (500 ohms) 0-10V models: CO2 0-10 VDC; 0-5V models CO2 0-5 VDC 0-10V models: CO2 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA (500 ohms); 0-5V models CO2 0-5 VDC or 4-20 mA (500 ohms) 1% of measurement range 30 ppm 3% of reading CO2 0 to 2000 ppm, CO2 0-2000 ppm, Temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Sensing Technology Calibration Visual Indication Warm Up Time Relay Output aSense Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) with ABC logic Not needed 4 Digits, 7 segments LCD 1 minute (@ full spec 15 minutes)
Accuracy aSense eSense Measurement Range March 2014
SPDT 50 VAC @ 1 A; 24 VDC @ 1 A (1000 ppm) eSense No relay available Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non condensing) Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Dimensions Wall aSense 4.74"H x 3.22"W x 1.18"D (120 x 82 x 30 mm) eSense 5.11"H x 3.35"W x 1.18"D (130 x 85 x 30 mm) Duct 11.5"H x 6.0"W x 3.3"D (29.1 x 15.2 x 8.5 cm) Approvals CE, RoHS Weight Wall 0.32 lbs (0.15 kg) Duct 0.90 lbs (0.41 kg) Warranty 5 years
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
355

CO2 TRANSMITTER 045, 050 SENSEAIR SERIES
WIRING
COM RELAY
COM + OUT 1
+ OUT 2
+ OUT 1
NC
NO
COM
+ OUT 2
NEW!
mA output (shown)
eSense Wiring
7
aSense Wiring
NOT USED
040-8-0049 045-8-0340-F 045-8-0341-F 045-8-0342-F 045-8-0343-F 045-8-0370-F 045-8-0371-F 045-8-0372-F 045-8-0373-F 050-8-0140 050-8-0141 050-8-0142 050-8-0143 050-8-0158 050-8-0159 050-8-0160 050-8-0161 RELATED PRODUCTS aSense outside air aSense wall relay 0 -10v CO2 & Temperature sensor aSense wall relay 0 -10v display CO2 & Temperature sensor aSense wall relay 0 -5v CO2 & Temperature sensor aSense wall relay 0 -5v display CO2 & Temperature sensor aSense duct relay 0 -10v CO2 & Temperature sensor aSense duct relay 0 -10v display CO2 & Temperature sensor aSense duct relay 0 -5v CO2 & Temperature sensor aSense duct relay 0 -5v display CO2 & Temperature sensor eSense wall 0 -10v CO2 sensor eSense wall 0 -10v dispaly CO2 sensor eSense wall 0 -5v CO2 sensor eSense wall 0 -5v dispaly CO2 sensor eSense duct 0 -10v CO2 sensor eSense duct 0 -10v dispaly CO2 sensor eSense duct 0 -5v CO2 sensor eSense duct 0 -5v dispaly CO2 sensor
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
356
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CO2, HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER T8000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advanced Sensors T8000 Series Ventostat CO2/RH/Temperature Transmitter is the next generation CO2 sensors from GE Sensing. Each GE Ventostat comes with a passive 10k Type II thermistor and has simultaneously active voltage and current outputs for CO2 measurement. The T8100 and T8300 features reliable automatic calibration using patented Telaire ABC logic that will ensure accurate and stable calibration for the lifetime of the sensor. The T8200 offers an accurate solution for hospitals and other full time operational 24 hours a day facilities. Both the T8100 and the T8200 are available with optional and selectable analog humidity and temperature outputs. The T8300 offers all of the accuracy of the T8100 but utilizes a pitot tube kit for measuring duct levels of CO2.
FEATURES
Simultaneous voltage and current outputs for CO2 Maintenance free lifetime self-calibration Passive temperature output Non-dispersive infrared sensor Ideal for 24 hours per day facilities (T8200) Optional display available Optional active temperature and humidity outputs
T8100-D
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output 18-30 VAC @ 0.7 VA, 50/60 Hz or 18-42 VDC @ 29 mA 0-5V, 0-10V, or 4-20 mA (500 ohms) selectable for CO2, humidity, or temperature (simultaneous current or voltage output for CO2) 400-1250 ppm: 3% or 30 ppm, whichever is greater; 1250-2000 ppm: 5% +30ppm, 10% or 75 ppm, whichever is greater; 2.5% RH (20 to 80% RH) 0.8% @ 72F (22C) 0 to 2000 ppm 0 to 99% RH (non condensing) Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Sensing Technology CO2 Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) Humidity Capacitive polymer Temperature Passive: 10k Type II thermistor Warm up time (CO2) 10 minutes Display Scrolling LCD Response Time 5 seconds 0% to 95% RH Operating Humidity Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) RoHS, CE Approvals Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Warranty 1 year (lifetime on calibration)
Accuracy T8100/T8300 T8200 Humidity Temperature Measurement Range CO2 Humidity
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
357

CO2, HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER T8000 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
NEW!
Display Wiring
7
WIRING
Non-Display Wiring
MODEL T8100 T8100-B T8100-D T8100-DB T8100-H T8100-HD T8100-HDB T8200 T8200-B T8200-D T8200-DB T8300-B T8300-DB DESCRIPTION Wall-mount CO2 sensor, white Wall-mount CO2 sensor, black Wall-mount CO2 sensor, LCD display, white Wall-mount CO2 sensor, LCD display, black Wall-mount CO2, RH, and active temperature Wall-mount CO2, RH, and active temperature, LCD display Wall-mount CO2, RH, and active temperature, LCD display, black Wall-mount CO2 sensor, no display, white Wall-mount CO2 sensor, no display, black Wall-mount CO2 sensor, LCD display, white Wall-mount CO2 sensor, LCD display, black Duct mount, pitot tube kit CO2 sensor, black Duct mount, pitot tube kit CO2 sensor LCD display, black
RELATED PRODUCTS
T1508 T1552 Calibration Gases T2090 T2075 T2076
Duct-mount accessory enclosure OSA-mount accessory enclosure CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) UIP software conguration software for the T8100, T8200 and T8300 transmitters Calibration Kit for T8100, T8200 and T8300 transmitters Calibration kit for T8100, T8200 and T8300 transmitter with calibration ow meter
358
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CO2 AND CO2/RH SENSORS KCO2 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KCO2 Series Carbon Dioxide Sensors measure environmental CO2 levels for use in demand-controlled ventilation, air-quality monitoring, and other HVAC applications. The sensor provides visual indication and analog output of CO2 levels. The units are equipped with push-button calibration and an easily accessible calibration port for eld maintenance. Optional audible alarm indication, LCD display, or relay output is available.
FEATURES
24 VAC/VDC power 0-10V or 4-20 mA option Optional RH transmitter Push-button calibration Calibration port Visual LED alarm Optional relay, audible alarm and LCD display LCD displays either parameter
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Accuracy CO2 Humidity Measurement Range CO2 Humidity Sensing Technology CO2 Humidity Visual Indication 20-28 VAC @ 5 VA, 50/60 Hz, reverse polarity protected or 12-30 VDC @ 200 mA 4-20 mA, 0-10V 600 max 3% of reading or 40 ppm 5% of reading 20% to 80% RH 0-2000 ppm 0% to 100%
WIRING
Power input 12-30 VDC 20-28 VAC
(Polarity matters for VDC only)
Voltage or current outputs. All outputs are same type

+ + +
24 VAC/VDC Output 1 Output 2
Not all outputs are used on every unit. See product manual for output assignments. All terminals are electrically connected, but isolated from power supply. Dry contact rated 24 VAC, 2A maximum
Non-dispersive IR (NDIR) Capacitive LED Flashes above 1000 ppm of CO2 Display Optional, four-digit LCD Warm Up Time <3 minutes Relay Output (Optional) SPST 2A @ 24 VAC (Normally Open) Relay Setpoint 1000 ppm CO2 Alarm Auditory Levels [Db] 65 dB, set at 1000 ppm of CO2, Optional, 65 dB, set at 1000 ppm of CO2 Operating Humidity 0% to 99% RH (noncondensing) Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Dimensions Wall 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D (11.4 x 7.3 x 2.54 cm) Duct 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 6.9"D (11.4 x 7.3 x 17.5 cm) Duct probe 1.7" (4.3 cm) diameter Weight Wall 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Duct 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) Warranty 1 year
Relay
Wall Mount
Voltage or current outputs. All outputs are same type. All '' terminals are electrically connected, but isolated from power supply. Optional RH sensor output.
Relay is optional and may not be present.
CO2 Cal Port +
CO
2O Ou
RH
utp
ut
tpu
24 Volts AC or DC Relay
Power input 18-30 VDC 20-28 VAC (polarity applies to VDC only) Dry contact rated 24 VAC, 2A maximum Relay is optional and may not be present.
Duct Mount
MODEL DESCRIPTION KCO2 CO2 sensor with LED indication OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL SENSOR RH Relative humidity sensor MOUNTING W Wall mount D Duct mount ANALOG OUTPUT A 4-20 mA output V 0-10V output OPTIONS (Can be combined) A Audible alarm LCD Four-digit LCD display R SPST relay output KCO2 RH W A LCD
Example: KCO2-RH-W-A-LCD Wall mount CO2/RH transmitter with 4-20 mA output, and LCD display
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
ACCESSORIES PAGE
Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
359

TRI-SENSE TRANSMITTERS KTS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Tri-Sense Transmitters combine three different sensors in a stylish, compact enclosure-reducing installation time and space required. The unit is designed to work in tandem with building automation systems to provide proper ventilation in enclosed spaces such as schools, ofces, conference rooms, malls, and theaters. Each of the three sensors has an independent analog output for 0-10V or 4-20 mA, but the output type is the same. The unit is precalibrated for LED indication with a factory default setting for the appropriate gas. The sensors are equipped with pushbutton calibration and an easily accessible calibration port for eld maintenance. Optional LCD display and relay output are available. The optional LCD display is selectable for any one of the three sensed variables.
NEW!
Wall Mount Duct Mount with Display Duct Mount Relay Output Optional, SPST, N.O. 2A @ 24 VAC/VDC Relay Setpoint CO Factory set at 20 ppm of CO CO2 Factory set at 1000 ppm of CO2 0% to 99% RH (noncondensing) Operating Humidity Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Dimensions Wall 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D (11.4 x 7.3 x 2.54 cm) 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 6.9"D Duct (11.4 x 7.3 x 17.5 cm) Duct probe 1.7" (4.3 cm) diameter Weight Wall 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) Duct Warranty 1 year
7
FEATURES
Three-in-one sensor combinations LED status indication Pre-calibrated to 20 ppm CO or 1000 ppm CO2 levels 0-10V or 4-20 mA output Optional relay output Isolated power and output Simple push-button calibration Optional LCD display
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Accuracy CO CO2 Humidity VOC Measurement Range CO CO2 Humidity VOC Sensing Technology CO CO2 Humidity VOC Visual Indication Warm Up Time 20-28 VAC, 50/60 Hz @ 5 VA, reverse polarity protected or 12-30 VDC @ 298 mA 4-20 mA (500 ohms) (500), 0-10V 2.5% full-scale 3% of reading or 40 ppm 5% of reading (20% to 80% RH) 10% ethanol 0-200 ppm 0-2000 ppm 0% to 100% 0-1000 ppm ethanol Electrochemical Non-dispersive IR (NDIR) Capacitive Sintered metal oxide LED Flashes above alarm setpoint Display Optional, four-digit LCD <15 minutes (maximum accuracy)
360
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

TRI-SENSE TRANSMITTERS KTS SERIES
WIRING
Voltage or current outputs. All outputs are same type. All '-' terminals are electrically connected, but isolated from power supply. See product manual for sensor assigned to each output.
CO2 Cal Port + CO Cal Port

+ + + +
24 VAC/VDC OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3
Not all outputs are used on every unit. See product manual for output assignments. All terminals are electrically connected, but isolated from power supply. Dry contact rated 24 VAC, 2A max Relay is optional and may not be present.
RELAY
OU TP UT 1 OU TP UT 2 OU TP UT 3
24 VOLTS AC or DC RELAY
Power Input 18-30 VDC 20-28 VAC (polarity applies to VDC only) Dry contact rated 24 VAC, 2A max Relay is optional and may not be present.
+ +
Wall Mount
Duct Mount
MODEL DESCRIPTION KTS Kele Tri-Sense IAQ transmitter SENSOR COMBINATION 134 CO, RH, VOC transmitter 213 CO2, CO, RH transmitter 234 CO2, RH, VOC transmitter OUTPUT C 4-20 mA current output V 0-10 VDC voltage output APPLICATION W Wall mount D Duct mount OPTIONS R Integral relay LCD Four digit LCD display
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 GAS-CO-200 GAS-CO2-2000 UCK-1
ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 200 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
361

DESCRIPTION
The BAPI model BA/BS3xxC, Relative Humidity and Temperature Sensors measure and serve as an indicator of space occupancy. The BAPI BA/BS3xxC also has 2% relative humidity and various temperature sensor options. All units have no override, no LED and no legend.
CO2, RELATIVE HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS BA/BS3XXC SERIES
FEATURES
Optional display available Output corresponds to 0 to 2000 ppm of CO2 Available with optional temperature and humidity outputs
NEW!
BABS3
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 0 to 5 VDC Output Units: 9-35 VDC @ 200 mA Max 0 to 10 VDC Output Units: 15-35 VDC @ 200 mA Max Measurement Range 0 to 2000 CO2 ppm RH: 0-100% or 35-70% RH RH: 2% Accuracy Sensing Technology Humidity: Capacitive Polymer Temperature: Thermistor, RTD CO2: NDIR Display Main Display: 0.76" 4-digit numeric (Numeric Values) Response Time Less than 120 seconds Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Enclosure Rating ABS, Plastic, Material Rated UL84v-0 Mounting 2" x 4" J-Box or drywall mount (screws provided) Approvals RoHS Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Warranty 2 years
DIMENSIONS
362
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CO2, RELATIVE HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS BA/BS3XXC SERIES
WIRING
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
BA
CO2 Room Sensor in the BAPI-Stat 3 Style Enclosure Temperature Display Mode (Must select one) BS3F Temperatures displayed in F (t oggle on or off) BS3X No LCD display CO2 Output (Must select one) CO5 CO2 t ransmitted as 0 to 2,000 ppm, 0 to 5 VDC output CO10 CO2 t ransmitted as 0 to 2,000 ppm, 0 to 10 VDC output Humidity Output (optional) No Humidity Transmitter H205 -H205 2% humidity t ransmitter, 0 to 5 VDC output H210 -H210 2% humidity t ransmitter, 0 to 10 VDC output H212 -H212 2% humidity t ransmitter, 2 to 10 VDC output (special order) Passive Temperature Output (must select one) No t emperature output option 0 100 Platinum RTD, 100 @ 0C, 0.385/C temp coefcient (special order) 375 1K Platinum RTD, 1,000 @ 0C, 3.75/C temp coefcient (special order) 1 1K Platinum RTD, 1,000 @ 0C, 3.85/C temp coefcient (special order) 102 10K-2 Thermistor, 10,000 @ 25C (special order) 103 10K-3 Thermistor, 10,000 @ 25C (special order) 20 20K Thermistor, 20,000 @ 25C (special order)
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
363

VOC/INDOOR AIR QUALITY SENSORS BA/BS3XXV SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Humans exhale Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) as well as CO2. The BAPI BA/Bs3xxV Indoor Air Quaility Sensors measure these VOCs and serve as an indicator of space occupancy with same reliability of CO2 transmitters. The BAPI sensor is different from other VOC sensors. Using a calibration algorithm, the sensor value is converted to an output with a high correlation to a CO2 level. The sensor also picks up VOCS from other sources such as building materials, perfumes, colognes, and furniture off gassing. Using this sensor to ventilate helps to achieve true indoor air quiality and not just CO2 dilution. All units have no override, no LED, and no legend.
NEW!
BABS3 BS3F with LED VOC Level Indication
FEATURES
Measures human sourced and environmental VOCs Calibration algorithm for CO2 correlation Output corresponds to 0 to 2000 ppm of CO2 Optional display on wall unit only Available with optional temperature and humidity outputs
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Measurement Range Accuracy Output Duct 0 to 5 VDC Output units: 9-35 VDC @ 50 mA Max 0 to 10 VDC Output Units: 15- 35 VDC @ 50 mA Max VOC: 0-100% (0 to 2,000 CO2 PPM) RH: 2%
DIMENSIONS
0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC (model specic) Wall 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC (model specic) Sensing Technology Humidity: Capacitive Polymer VOC: Micro-machined Metal Oxide Display Main Display: 0.76" 4-digit numeric (Numeric Values) Minor Display: 0.34" 3-digit Alpha-Numeric (PPM, %RH) Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Enclosure Rating Duct NEMA 4x Wall NEMA 1 Mounting Duct Directly to duct Wall 2" x 4" J-Box or drywall mount (screws provided) Dimensions Duct 5" H x 3.2" W x 7.6" D (12.7 x 8.2 x 19.3 cm) Wall 5.5" H x 3.5" W x 1.1" D (13.9 x 8.9 x 2.7 cm) Approvals RoHS Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Duct Wall 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Warranty 2 years
364
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

VOC/INDOOR AIR QUALITY SENSORS BA/BS3XXV SERIES
WIRING
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
7
BS
VOC Room Sensor in the BAPI-Stat 3 Style Enclosure Temperature Display Mode (Must select one) Duct Option BS3F Temperatures displayed in F (t oggle on or off) BS3C Temperatures displayed in C (t oggle on or off) (special order) BS3X No LCD d isplay VOC Output (Must select one) VOC05 VOCs t ransmitted as 0 to 2,000 ppm CO2 equivalent, 0 to 5 VDC output VOC10 VOCs t ransmitted as 0 to 2,000 ppm CO2 equivalent, 0 to 10 VDC output Humidity Output No Humidity Transmitter H205 -H205 2% humidity t ransmitter, 0 to 5 VDC output H210 -H210 2% humidity t ransmitter, 0 to 10 VDC output H212 -H212 2% humidity t ransmitter, 2 to 10 VDC output (special order) Passive Temperature Output No t emperature output option 0 100 Platinum RTD, 100 @ 0C, 0.385/C temp coefcient (special order) 1375 1K Platinum RTD, 1,000 @ 0C, 3.75/C temp coefcient (special order) 1 1K Platinum RTD, 1,000 @ 0C, 3.85/C temp coefcient (special order) 102 10K-2 Thermistor, 10,000 @ 25C (special order) 103 10K-3 Thermistor, 10,000 @ 25C (special order) 20 20K Thermistor, 20,000 @ 25C (special order) Override Conguration J Override as a separate output (special order) N Override in parallel (//) with sensor (special order) P Override in parallel (//) with setpoint: NOT available on voltage setpoint models (special order) Z No override (needed if no override is required) (standard) VOC Level Indication No level indication LED Green/orange/red LED legend for good, fair and poor (special order) ARW Black arrow on display with legend to indicate good, fair and poor (special order) BNK No LED, arrow indicators, legend (standard)
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
365

INDOOR AIR QUALITY MONITOR IAQ-A SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics IAQ-A Series provides indoor air quality monitoring of CO2, temperature, and RH for demand control ventilation applications. Its patented touchscreen monitor brings leapforward technology right to your ngertips, with benets that extend from simplied installation and commissioning to user operation. You can set password levels and protect. The unit is available for wall or duct mount installations and easily mounts to a standard electrical box. FEATURES Senses CO2, Temperature and RH Analog outputs: 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC Jumper selectable gas detection range Easy Calibration Optional backlit LCD Independent sensor operation ABC Logic
NEW!
IAQ-DAC-TRH-D IAQ-WAC-TRH-D
SPECIFICATIONS
20 to 30 VAC @ 6.7 VA, 50/60 Hz or 18 to 28 VDC @ 281 mA Signal Output 4-20 mA (500 ohms) or 0-10 VDC selectable for CO2, Humidity or Temperature Accuracy CO2: 3%, 0-2000 ppm; RH: 0% to 95% noncondensing Temperature: 0.9F @ 77F (0.5C @ 25C) Measurement Range CO2: 0-2000 ppm, 0-5,000 ppm (jumper selectable) Humidity: 0% to 95% noncondensing Temperature: 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Sensing Technology CO2: Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) RH and temperature: Capacitive Display Graphic LCD; two-line, alphanumeric Response Time CO2:<60 seconds for 90% step change Humidity: 4 seconds Temperature: 30 seconds 420 ft/min (2 m/s) Minimum Duct Velocity Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH, Non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Dimensions Wall 4.6"H x 3.0"W x 1.5"D (11.8 x 7.7 x 3.7 cm) Duct 6.4"H x 8.7"W x 3.0"D (16.3 x 22.2 x 7.7 cm) 1 1/16" (2.7 cm) diameter Duct probe Approvals CSA, RoHs, CE Weight Wall 0.44 lb (0.2 kg) Duct 0.7 lb (0.32 kg) Warranty 1 year
Supply Voltage
WIRING
(+) 1 2 3 4 (+) 5 (+) 6 COMM (-) (- ) 7 8 (+) 9 10
Not Used
RH TEMP CO2
Not Used
MODEL IAQ-WAC-TRH IAQ-WAC-TRH-D IAQ-DAC-TRH IAQ-DAC-TRH-D DESCRIPTION CO2, temperature, and RH transmitter, wall mount, withou display CO2, temperature, and RH transmitter, wall mount with display CO2, temperature, and RH transmitter, duct mount without display CO2, temperature, and RH tranmistter, duct mount with display
ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
366
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

NETWORK COMPATIBLE INDOOR AIR QUALITY MONITOR IAQ-N SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics IAQ-N Series provides indoor air quality monitoring of CO2, temperature, and RH for demand control ventilation applications. The monitor can be programmed for BACnet or Modbus communication for easy installation and integration into existing building automation systems. The IAQ-N Series features a two-line LCD display and programmable setpoints for CO2, humidity, and temperature. The unit is available for wall or duct mount installations and easily mounts to a standard electrical box.
FEATURES
Senses CO2, temperature, and RH High accuracy BACnet or Modbus communication Menu driven operation User selectable gas detection range Easy calibration Backlit LCD Independent sensor operation ABC logic IAQ-DNC-TRH-D
IAQ-WNC-TRH-D
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Accuracy CO2: RH: Temperature: Measurement Range CO2: Humidity: Temperature: Sensing Technology CO2: RH and temperature: Capacitive Display Response Time CO2: Humidity: Temperature: Baud Rate 20-30 VAC @ 6.7 VA, 50/60 HZ or 18-30 VDC @ 281 mA 3%, 0-2000 ppm; 0% to 95% noncondensing 0.9F @ 77F (0.5C @ 25C) 0-2000 ppm, 0-5,000 ppm (jumper selectable) 0% to 95% noncondensing 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) Graphic LCD; two-line, alphanumeric <60 seconds for 90% step change 4 seconds 30 seconds 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800, 115200 Communication BACnet, MS/TP, Modbus Protocol Minimum Duct Velocity 420 ft/min (2 m/s) Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Dimensions Wall 4.6"H x 3.0"W x 1.5"D (11.8 x 7.7 x 3.8 cm) Duct 6.4"H x 8.7"W x 3.0"D (16.3 x 22.2 x 7.7 cm) Duct probe 1 1/16" (2.7 cm) diameter Approvals CSA, RoHs, CE Weight Wall 0.44 lb (0.2 kg) Duct 0.7 lb (0.32 kg) Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
367

WIRING
NETWORK COMPATIBLE INDOOR AIR QUALITY MONITOR IAQ-N SERIES
Bacnet +, Modbus DI EIA/RS-485 B
NEW!
(- ) (+) 8 9 10 Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
(-) COMM
RS-485 COMMUNICATION Communication Wire Gauge: 2-24 AWG (Belden 9841) Twisted and shielded cable 2000 feet (600 m) per channel T-tap: 65 feet (20 m) / T-tap 130 feet (40 m) total
Bacnet -, Modbus D0 EIA/RS-485 A
Power
MODEL IAQ-WNC-TRH-D IAQ-DNC-TRH-D DESCRIPTION CO2, temperature, and RH transmitter, wall mount, Modbus/BACnet CO2, temperature, and RH transmitter, duct mount, Modbus/BACnet
ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L 437 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
368
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR KCO SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KCO Series Carbon Monoxide Sensors are available in analog or relay versions. The sensors are provided in heavy-duty steel enclosures, and the sensors use low-temperature components that are ideal for open parking garages in cold climates. The KCO Series Carbon Monoxide Sensors is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained. For more information on the proper application and use of this product please read Environmental Safety Devices in our technical reference section.
KCO-R-H
FEATURES
Two-stage alarming (KCO-R) 0-200 ppm 4-20 mA output (KCO-A) Microprocessor controlled recalibration (KCO-A) Heavy-duty enclosures Operating temperature down to -4F(-20C) Low-temperature option available -20F (-29C) Temperature and humidity compensated
KCO-A-H Note: Front covers are blank
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VAC @ 10 VA 20% 24 VAC @ 10 VAC 20% or 24 VDC @ 260 mA 20% Signal Output (KCO-A) 4-20 mA Maximum Output 500 max Impedance Accuracy 5% Drift 10% 2 years Measurement Range KCO-A 0-200 ppm KCO-R 0-250 ppm Sensor Technology Solid-state metal oxide semiconductor Sensor Life Expectancy 10 years Visual Indication Supply Voltage KCO-A KCO-R Warning Amber Alarm Red Power on Flashing Green/red Warm Up Time 30 seconds Response Time <30 sec 10 minutes Time Delay (KCO-A) Relay Output (KCO-R) 120 VAC, 2A resistive Alarm Setpoints (KCO-R) Warning 50 ppm, alarm 100 ppm (reset 5-10 ppm change) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% noncondensing Operating Temperature -4 to 185F (-20 to 85C) Weight 2.0 lb (0.9 kg) Warranty 18 months
INSTALLATION
KCO-R The KCO-R is a two-stage carbon monoxide sensor with a relay output for each stage. If the CO level rises above the warning stage setpoint for over 30 seconds, the warning relay, amber warning LED, and a three-minute minimum on timer will activate. Once below the setpoint, the relay and LED will reset. If the concentration continues to rise and exceeds the alarm stage setpoint for 10 minutes, the alarm stage relay and red LED will activate. Calibration of the unit requires the application of a hydrated test gas. KCO-A The KCO-A is a microprocessor-controlled sensor with a 4-20 mA analog output based on a 0-200 ppm sensing range. The microprocessor controls the heating of the sensor and subsequent reading of the CO level. The microprocessor compensates for any drift in the sensor over time. The microprocessor system includes self-diagnostic, self-restarting, and remote failure reporting. The output signal will drop below 4 mA if a fault is discovered. If power problems cause the unit to malfunction, the unit will selfcheck and restart. Calibration of the unit requires the application of a hydrated test gas, and the push of a button performs the recalibration. March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
369

CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR KCO SERIES
INSTALLATION
The KCO Series senses levels of CO for up to 5000 ft2 (465m2) of coverage if there is normal air circulation within the area. Mount on a wall or column approximately 5' (1.52m) above the oor. The sensors should not be mounted in corners where airow could be restricted. CAUTION: Not for diesel fume applications.
NEW!
L1 L2 24 VAC + 4-20 mA SIG OUT
WIRING
N.O. Alarm N.C. Relay T2
Factory setting 100 ppm
Relay R2
Relay R1 T1 N.O. Warning Factory setting N.C. Relay 50 ppm T3 L1 (+) L2 ()
24 VAC/DC
KCO-R
KCO-A
MODEL KCO DESCRIPTION R Relay output carbon monoxide sensor A Analog output carbon monoxide sensor H Hinged-cover enclosure LT Low-temperature option -20F (-29C) 50 ppm 50/100 ppm relay settings (KCO-R only) R H 50 ppm Example: KCO-RH-50 ppm Carbon monoxide sensor with relay output and hinged cover enclosure.
KCO
GAS-CO-100 GAS-CO-200 GAS-CO-25 GAS-CO-50 UCK-1 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
RELATED PRODUCTS 100 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 200 ppm carbon monoxide (C) in air, 17L 25 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 50 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) ACCESSORIES Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT
PAGE
436 PAGE 979 995 994
370
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS KCOP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KCOP Series Carbon Monoxide Detectors are designed to monitor CO levels in parking garages, loading docks, factories, warehouses, transportation terminals, and more. Models are available with 4-20 mA output or dual relay output for designated warning and alarm CO levels. The detector features a tri-color LED which illuminates green to indicate the unit is powered and functioning properly. On the relay output models, the LED will illuminate amber and red for warning and alarm status. A red LED indicates that the sensor needs to be replaced. The microprocessorbased electronics are housed in a rugged, steel enclosure with hinged- or screw-covers. A low-temperature option is available for colder climates. The KCOP Series Carbon Monoxide Detectors are designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained. For more information on the proper application and use of this product please read "Environmental Safety Devices" in our technical reference section.
KCOP-A-S
FEATURES
LED power indication 4-20 mA or dual relay output Replaceable sensor Sensor end of life indication Jumper selectable warning/alarm levels (KCOP-R) Heavy-duty enclosures with hinge- or screw-cover Low-temperature option available -22F (-30C) Temperature compensated
KCOP-R-H
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage KCOP LT Option Signal Output KCOP-R KCOP-A Accuracy KCOP LT Option Measurement Range Sensing Technology Calibration Visual Indication Warm Up Time March 2014 20-30 VAC @ 5 VA or 24 VDC @ 200 mA, 50/60 Hz 20-30 VAC @ 26 VA or 24 VDC @ 1.1 A, 50/60 Hz Two SPDT relay contacts, 240 VAC, 2A resistive 4-20 mA (600) 2.5% full scale 4% full scale 0-200 ppm Electrochemical Recalibrate with 100 ppm CO gas Status Green: Power on, microprocessor operating properly; Yellow: Warning; Red: Alarm Under 15 minutes Response Time KCOP (all) 30 Seconds to warning KCOP-R 13 minutes to alarm Sensing Technology Electrochemical Sensor Life Expectancy Approximately 5 years Warning/alarm: 10/20 ppm, 25/50 Relay Setpoints ppm or 50/100 ppm, jumper selectable, (KCOP-R only) Operating Humidity 5% to 99% noncondensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C), -22 to 122F (-30 to 50C) Dimensions 6.50"H x 6.0"L x 2.13"D (16.5 x 15.2 x 5.4 cm) Weight KCOP-A 3.5 lb (1.6 kg) KCOP-R 4.0 lb (1.8 kg) Warranty 1 year
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
371

CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS KCOP SERIES
INSTALLATION
The KCOP Series senses levels of CO for up to 5000 ft2 (465m2) of coverage if there is normal air circulation within the area. Mount on a wall or column approximately 5' (1.52m) above the oor. The sensors should not be mounted in corners where airow could be restricted.
CAUTION: Not for diesel fume applications.
NEW!
J3 24 VAC/DC
WIRING
J3
+ -
24 VAC/DC
18-28 VAC/VDC Power input (Observe proper polarity for DC power applications.)
+ -
18-28 VAC/VDC Power input (Observe proper polarity for DC power applications.) Terminals of output and power input are electrically connected.
7
4-20 mA
J3
4-20 mA Output (0-200 ppm)
K1
Warning NO COM NC J1
Warning Alarm Dry contacts rated 240 VAC, 2A max
K2 Alarm
NO COM NC
J2
Relay Output
Analog Output The KCOP has a non-isolateed bridge circuit. Circuit ground is not electrically isolated from the input power. Use isolated power supply.
MODEL KCOP DESCRIPTION R Relay output carbon monoxide sensor A Analog output carbon monoxide sensor H Hinged-cover enclosure S Screw-cover enclosure LT Low-temperature option -20F (-29C) 10 ppm 10/20 ppm relay settings (KCOP-R only) 25 ppm 25/50 ppm relay settings (KCOP-R only) 50 ppm 50/100 ppm relay settings (KCOP-R only) R H 50 ppm Example: KCOP-R-H-50 ppm Carbon monoxide sensor with relay output and hinged cover enclosure.
KCOP
KCOP-CAL UCK-1 GAS-CO-100 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE KCOP calibration kit (Contains regulator, tubing and instructions. Gas is ordered separtely) Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436 100 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L ACCESSORIES Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT PAGE 979 995 994
372
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

COMBINATION CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR WITH CO2, RH, OR VOC KCOC SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KCOC Series Combination Carbon Monoxide Sensors pair a CO sensor with a CO2, RH, or VOC sensor in the same enclosure-reducing installation time and space required. The unit provides visual indication and analog output of CO levels in enclosed spaces such as schools, ofces, malls, and theaters. Each transmitter is available with either a 0-10V or 4-20 mA and is scaled from 0-200 ppm of CO and all outputs will use the same output. They are designed with push button calibration and an easily accessible calibration port for eld maintenance. Optional audible alarm indication, LCD display, or relay output is available. The optional relay option closes at 30 ppm and opens at 20 ppm, and the audible alarm will sound at 50 ppm. The KCOC Series Carbon Monoxide Detectors are designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained. For more information on the proper application and use of this product please read Environmental Safety Devices in our technical reference section.
FEATURES
Combines CO sensor with CO2, RH, or VOC sensor LED status indication 0-10V or 4-20 mA output Optional relay output Isolated power and output Simple push button calibration Optional audible alarm Optional LCD display
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage KCOC VOC Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Accuracy CO CO2 RH VOC Measurement Range CO CO2 RH VOC Sensing Technology CO CO2 20-28 VAC @ 2.5 VA, 50/60 Hz or 12-30 VDC @ 104 mA 20-28 VAC @ 4 VA, 50/60 Hz or 12-30 VDC @ 166 mA 4-20 mA, 0-10V 600 2.5% full scale 3% of reading or 40 ppm 5% of reading 20% to 80% RH 10% ethanol equivalent 0-200 ppm 0-2000 ppm 0 to 100% RH 0-1000 ppm ethanol equivalent Electrochemical Non-dispersive IR (NDIR) RH VOC Visual Indication Warm Up Time Relay Output Capacitive Sintered metal oxide LED Flashes above 20 ppm of CO Display Optional, four-digit LCD <15 minutes (maximum accuracy) Optional, SPST 2A @ 24 VAC/VDC, closes <\>>20 ppm
Alarm Auditory Levels [Db] Optional, 65 dB, set at 20 ppm of CO Operating Humidity 0% to 99% RH (noncondensing) Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Dimensions Wall 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D (11.4 x 7.3 x 2.54 cm) Duct 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 6.9"D (11.4 x 7.3 x 17.5 cm) Duct Probe 1.7" (4.3 cm) diameter Weight Wall 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) Duct 0.55 lb (0.25 kg) Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
373

WIRING
COMBINATION CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR WITH CO2, RH, OR VOC KCOC SERIES
NEW!
Voltage or current outputs. All outputs are same type. All '' terminals are electrically connected, but isolated from power supply.

+ + +
24 VAC/VDC OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
Not all outputs are used on every unit. See product manual for output assignments. All terminals are electrically connected, but isolated from power supply. Dry contact rated 24 VAC, 2A max
CO2 Cal Port +
CO Cal Port
7
RELAY
CO
Power input 18-30 VDC 20-28 VAC (polarity applies to VDC only) Dry contact rated 24 VAC, 2A max Relay is optional and may not be present. 2nd sensor output. See product manual for output type.
Relay is optional and may not be present.
OU
OU
TP
TP
UT
UT
24 VOLTS AC or DC RELAY
Wall Mount
Duct Mount
MODEL DESCRIPTION KCOC CO sensor with LED indication OPTIONAL ADDITIONAL SENSOR (limit of 2) CO2 Carbon dioxide sensor RH Relative humidity sensor VOC Volatile organic compound sensor MOUNTING W Wall mount D Duct mount ANALOG OUTPUT A 4-20 mA output V 0-10V output OPTIONS (Can be combined) A Audible alarm LCD Four-digit LCD display R SPST relay output (for CO or VOC) KCOC RH W A LCD
Example: KCOC-RH-W-A-LCD Wall mount CO and RH transmitter with 4-20 mA output, and LCD display
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 GAS-CO-200 GAS-CO2-2000 UCK-1
ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 200 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
374
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CARBON MONOXIDE TRANSMITTER TP1-M
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics Model TP1-M Carbon Monoxide Sensor features a two-wire, 4-20 mA output signal and two alarm outputs. It is the rst available zero-maintenance CO gas monitor with an electrochemical sensor. The Model TP1-M has a low initial cost and installs quickly and easily into a standard single-gang outlet box. It has a two to threeyear operational life and never needs calibration. The Model TP1-M Carbon Monoxide Sensor is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained. For more information on the proper application and use of this product please read Environmental Safety Devices in our technical reference section.
FEATURES
0-500 ppm CO range(non-adjustable) High accuracy (5% of range) electrochemical industrial sensor Two alarm levels (25 and 200 ppm) Two wire, loop-powered 4-20 mA analog output LED status/diagnostic indicator Low power consumption, only 50 mA Fits standard single-gang outlet box Automatic, full function self-test performed daily Unobtrusive design with rugged stainless steel screen Two to three-year operational life
TP1-M
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output 10-28 VDC @ 50 mA Two-wire, 4-20 mA Output signal fail modes Self-test fail 2 mA; Sensor expired 2 mA Overrange gas alarm 24 mA Maximum Output Impedance mA 650 max Accuracy 5% of full range Measurement Range 0-500 ppm Life Expectancy 2-3 years (plus one-year shelf life) Electrochemical Sensor Technology Calibration None-Disposal Visual Indication Power on: On No power:Off Self-test fail: Fast ash (1 per 0.5 sec) Life ending: Slow ash (1 per 2.0 sec) provides one-month warning Life ended: Off 250 mA @ 24 VDC max (transistor switch) Wiring Terminations 18-22 AWG 15% to 90% noncondensing Operating Humidity Operating Temperature 32F to 104F (0C to 40C) 2.56"H x 1.75"W x 1.36"D Dimensions (6.5 x 4.5 x 3.5 cm) Approvals CSA IEC No. 1010 ANSI/ISA S82.01 CSEC C22.2 No. 1010 EMC Directive 89/336/EEC 0.42 lb (0.18 kg) Weight Warranty 2 years Alarm Contacts
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
375

CARBON MONOXIDE TRANSMITTER TP1-M
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.0 (7.62)
2.80 (7.11)
NEW!
TWO-WIRE INSTALLATION
24 VDC Power Supply
M: TP-M S: XXXXX
O/P1 24 VDC

24 VDC 20 mA
4.60 (11.68) 3.25 (8.26)
4-20 mA O/P2
4-20 mA Signal
TP1-M
TOXY POINT
7
ALARMS OUTPUTS INSTALLATION
Single-Gang Electrical Box (field-supplied)
Transistor switches close on alarm

M: TP-M S: XXXXX 24 VDC 20 mA
24 VDC Power Supply
O/P1 24 VDC 4-20 mA O/P2

O/P1
O/P2
4-20 mA Signal
TOXY POINT
Alarm Outputs: 24 VDC output, 250 mA max
24 VDC Relay
Note: If only relay output is used, 4-20 mA terminal must be connected to the power supply (). AC Fan
24 VDC Alarm
MODEL TP1-M DESCRIPTION Carbon monoxide sensor
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
ACCESSORIES PAGE Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
376
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CARBON MONOXIDE SENSOR BA/420CO
DESCRIPTION
Continuously monitor for carbon monoxide (CO) with the BAPI Model BA/420CO Carbon Monoxide Sensor. The unit is equipped with an on-board electrochemical sensor and provides a 4 to 20 mA output signal proportional to the carbon monoxide concentration detected. The Model BA/420CO features a rugged housing with mounting tabs for easy installation. An optional LCD display is available for local indication. Units are factory calibrated and ready for eld installation and operation. The Model BA/420CO Carbon Monoxide Sensor is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained. For more information on the proper application and use of this product please read "Environmental Safety Devices" in our technical reference section.
BA/420CO-1
FEATURES
High accuracy at low concentrations Long life electrochemical sensor Rugged housing with mounting tabs Calibration certicate included Optional LCD display BA/420CO-1-D
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output 14-27 VDC Loop powered, 4 to 20 mA, two-wire Maximum Output Impedance mA 500 max @ 24 VDC Resolution 1 ppm (models with display only) Measurement Range CO-1 1-100 ppm CO-3 1-300 ppm Sensing Technology Electrochemical Life Expectancy > 4 years Response Time 90%; < 40 seconds @ 77 F (25 C) Wiring Terminations 3/4 conduit adapter Operating Humidity 15% to 90% RH (noncondensing) Operating Temperature w/o Display -4 to 104F (-20 to 40C) w/ Display 14 to 104F (-10 to 40C) Dimensions 3.8 diameter x 2.13H (9.65 x 5.41 cm) Approvals CE, Rohs Weight 0.3 lb (0.4 kg) Warranty 2 years
DIMENSIONS
+ WHITE - BLACK
MODEL BA/420CO-1 BA/420CO-1-D BA/420CO-1-D-PM BA/420CO-1-PM BA/420CO-3 BA/420CO-3-D BA/420CO-3-D-PM BA/420CO-3-PM DESCRIPTION CO sensor, 1-100 ppm CO sensor, 1-100 ppm, with display CO sensor, 1-100 ppm with display, panel mount CO sensor, 1-100 ppm, panel mount CO sensor, 1-300 ppm CO sensor, 1-300 ppm, with display CO sensor, 1-300 ppm with display, panel mount CO sensor, 1-300 ppm, panel mount
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
377

TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS SWITCHES CM-E1, GD-2B, HD-11
DESCRIPTION
The 3M Macurco Toxic and combustible switches are wall mounted, low voltage, relay detector switches. It is an electronic detection system used to measure various gases to switch at a high limit which can be wired to fans, damper actuators and etc. Model CM-E1 measures CO, Model GD-2B measures Methane and Propane and Model HD-11 measure Hydrogen.
NEW!
CM-E1 HD-11 Operating Temperature CM-E1 GD-2B/HD-11 Enclosure Rating Dimensions CM-E1/GD-2B HD-11 Approvals Weight CM-E1/GD-2B HD-11 Warranty 40 to 100F ( 4.4 to 37.8C) 32 to 120F ( 0 to 48.9C) NEMA 1 5.1" H x 3.1" W x 1.5" D (13 x 7.9 x 3.8 cm) 4.51" H x 5.0" W x 1.6" D (11.4 x 12.7 x 4.1 cm) ETL 1.0 lb (0.45 Kg) 0.54 lb (0.25 Kg) 1 year
FEATURES
Buzzer (CM-E1 model) Mounts on 2 x 4 electrical box
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage CM-E1 GD-2B/HD-11 Range CM-E1 GD-2B HD-11 Relay Buzzer Operating Humidity 9-32 VDC @ 35 mA 12-24 VAC @ 2 VA; 12-24 VDC @ 35 mA 70 ppm CO 25% L.E.L. Methane and Propane 10% L.E.L. H2 (1) Alarm, SPST, 40 VDC @ 100 mA (1) Trouble, SPST, 40 VDC @ 100 mA (CM-E1 & GD-2B only) 85 db @ 10 feet 10 to 90%, non-condensing
WIRING
CM-E1 & GD-2B
HD-11
N.O. Contact
N.C. Contact
378
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS SWITCHES CM-E1, GD-2B, HD-11
APPLICATION
12/24V
Power
Alarm Relay
4-20 mA Loop
SPDT fan Relay
Typical layout in small garage
Power
CM6
Relay 24VAC coil

Exhaust fan
Coil
r
transformer 24VAC
N.O.
Yellow N.O. Green Blue Gray
Red (+) AC or DC
nt centrally door, louver damper
Black
CM6
Air inlet
Main fan power
to computer or control panel
to remote 24VAC alarm
MODEL CM-E1 GD-2B HD-11 DESCRIPTION Wall mounted CO single gas switch Wall mounted Combustile single gas switch Wall mounted Hydrogen single gas switch
DCPA-1.2 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
379

TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSORS CM6, GD6,TX-6-AM,TX-6-HS, TX-6-ND
DESCRIPTION
The CM6, GD6, TX-6-AM, TX-6-HS & TX-6-ND from 3M Macurco are low voltage, dual relay detectors, controller and transducer. Each device has selectable 4-20 mA output, buzzer and digital display options. It is an electronic detection system used to measure the concentration of various gases. The CM6 is a low level meter capable of displaying from 0-200 ppm of carbon monoxide. The GD6 is a low level meter capable of displaying from 0-50% L.E.L of Methane, Propane or Hydrogen.The TX-6-AM is a low level meter capable of displaying from 0-100 ppm of NH3 (Ammonia). The TX-6-ND is a low level meter capable of displaying from 0-20 ppm of NO2 (Nitric Oxide). The TX-6-HS is a low level meter capable of displaying from 0-50 ppm of H2S (Hyrdogen Sulde).
NEW!
CM6 Fan and Alarm: relay minimum run time: selectable Off (default), 3, 5, 10 or 15 minutes Relay Output Fan: 5A, 240 VAC, pilot duty SPDT Alarm: 0.5A @ 200Volts, 10 VA Time Delay Fan and Alarm: Selectable at 0, 1, 3 (default), 5 and 10 minutes Wiring Terminations Plugs/terminals Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH Operating Temperature 0 to 125F (-18 to 52C) Dimensions 4.5"W x 4.0"H x 2.125"D (11.4 x 10.2 x 5.4 cm) Approvals ETL listed Weight 1.0 lbs (0.45 kg) 1 year Warranty Display 3 digit LED Time Range
7
FEATURES
Easy calibration Selectable fan and alarm activation Mounts on standard 4x4 electrical box Internally supervised system Easy functional verication
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Output Range CM-6 GD6 TX-6-AM TX-6-ND TX-6-HS Life Expectancy Visual Indication 12 to 24 VAC @ 3 VA or 12 to 32 VDC @ 125 mA, reverse polarity protected Stand by 23 mA @ 24 VDC Fan relay 50 mA @ 24 VDC Both relays (alarm) 75 mA @ 24 VDC 4-20 mA 900 (4-20 mA) 0-200 ppm 0-50% L.E.L Methane, Propane, Hydrogen 0-100 ppm NH3 0-20 ppm N2O 0-50 ppm H2S 7+ years LED (1) Status (green)
380
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS SENSORS CM6, GD6,TX-6-AM,TX-6-HS, TX-6-ND
DIMENSIONS/WIRING
in (cm)
4.5 (11.4)
2.125 (5.4)
Terminal designations
Macurco
GAS DETECTOR
CM-6
4.0 (10.2)
DO NOT PAINT
APPLICATION
SPDT fan Relay
Exhaust fan Controls (transformer & relay)
12/24V
Power
Alarm Relay
Typical layout in small garage
Power
CM6
4-20 mA Loop
Relay 24VAC coil

Exhaust fan
Coil
AC or DC
COM
N.O.
mount centrally door, louver damper
N.C.
CM6
No Polarity
transformer 24VAC
N.C. or N.O.
Air inlet
Main fan power
to computer or control panel
to remote 24VAC alarm
MODEL CM6 GD6 TX-6-AM TX-6-HS TX-6-ND DESCRIPTION Wall mounted CO single-point gas detector Wall mount combustible single point gas detector Wall mount NH3 single point gas detector Wall mount H2S single point gas detector Wall mount N2O single point gas detector RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Calibration kit, 2 gas cylinders (50 and 200 ppm), does not include test hood Test hood 200 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 437 50 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 437 ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
CME-FCK-C CME1-FTG GAS-CO-200 GAS-CO-50
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
381

TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTOR GDS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele GDS Series Gas Detector is a standalone micro-processor-based system for continuous, effective monitoring of toxic and combustible gases. The GDS Series provides a 4-20 mA output in proportion to the level of gas present and two relay outputs to activate additional horns, strobes, or ventilation systems. The modular design adds functionality and exibility with pre-calibrated plug-in sensors. The unit features a two-line LCD for local indication, self test diagnostics, and a built-in 85 dBA buzzer. The rugged polycarbonate housing is resistant to rust, corrosion, and dents. The GDS Series Gas Detector is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained.
NEW!
GDS
Easy installation, commissioning, and operation LED status indication Password protection Gases detected: Carbon monoxide (CO), Nitrogen dioxide (NO2 - diesel exhaust), Oxygen (O2), Hydrogen (H2), Hydrogen Sulde (H2S), Methane (CH4), Propane (C3H8) Display Resolution CO O2 H2S, NO2 CH4, C3H8, H2 Relay Output 1 ppm 0.2% 0.2 ppm 0.5% DPDT pilot duty, 150 VA max inductive, 5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC Alarm Auditory Levels [Db] 85 dBA @ 10 ft (3m) Operating Humidity 15 to 90% non-condensing Operating Temperature CO -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C) All Others -40 to 122F (-40 to 50C) Dimensions 8.1''H x 5.9''W x 2.7''D (20.6 x 14.9 x 6.7 cm) Weight Wall 1.84 lb (0.83 kg) Duct 7.96 lb (3.61 kg) CSA C22.2 Approvals Warranty 1 year
FEATURES
Pre-calibrated plug-in sensors Built-in 85 dBA buzzer 4-20 mA and two relay outputs Wide variety of gases detected Two-line LCD display Wall or duct mount
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Measurement Range CO O2 H2S N2O CH4,C3H8, H2 Sensing Technology CO, O2, H2S, NO2 CH4, C3H8, H2 Calibration Interval Life Expectancy CO All Others Visual Indication Display 17-27 VAC @ 8.4 VA, 50/60 Hz or 24-38 VDC @ 350 Ma (E3SAH base unit is 120 VAC only) 4-20 mA (500) 0-250 ppm 0% to 25% 0-50 ppm 0-10 ppm 0% to 100% LEL Electrochemical Catalytic combustion 6 months 6 years 2 years Green LED: power Amber LED 1: Alarm/fault Amber LED 2: Alarm/fault 8 character, two-line LCD
382
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTOR GDS SERIES
WIRING
TRANSMITTER 1 TRANSMITTER X
24VAC
24VAC
4-20mA
24VAC
4-20mA
LEGEND = One transmitter connected = More than one tranmitter connected
24VDC
DDC SYSTEM
MODEL GDS-WC3H8 GDS-WCH4 GDS-WCO-1 GDS-WH2 GDS-WH2S GDS-WNO2 GDS-WO2 GDS-DC3H8 GDS-DCH4 GDS-DCO-1 GDS-DH2 GDS-DH2S GDS-DNO2 GDS-DO2 DESCRIPTION Propane gas detector, wall mount Methane gas detector, wall mount Carbon Monoxide gas detector, wall mount Hydrogen gas detector, wall mount Hydrogen Sulde gas detector, wall mount Nitrogen Dioxide gas detector, wall mount Oxygen gas detector, wall mount Propane gas detector, duct mount Methane gas detector, duct mount Carbon Monoxide gas detector, duct mount Hydrogen gas detector, duct mount Hydrogen Sulde gas detector, duct mount Nitrogen Dioxide gas detector, duct mount Oxygen gas detector, duct mount
E3SCO 1309K0002 1309K0004 E3H2 E3H2S E3M E3NO2 E3O2 E3P ECLAB E3SAH Calibration Gases
RELATED PRODUCTS Replacement CO sensor cartridge GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 58 to 103L gas cylinders GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 17 to 34L gas cylinders Replacement H2 (Hydrogen) sensor cartridge Replacement H2S (Hydrogen Sulde) sensor cartridge Replacement CH4 (Methane) sensor cartridge Replacement NO2 (Nitrogen Dioxide) sensor cartridge Replacement O2 (Oxygen) sensor cartridge Replacement C3H8 (Propane) sensor cartridge Splash Guard for NEMA 4X Single Base Unit Wall mount, 120 VAC CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436 Universal calibration kit for corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3) 436 One gang weatherproof outlet box with (3) 3/4" hubs
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 UCK-1 UCK-2 WBX334
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
383

TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTOR GDC150
DESCRIPTION
The all new GDC150 transmitter from Bacharach offers detection and protection for a wide range of hazards including toxic gases such as carbon monoxide (CO), oxygen depletion, combustible gases, refrigerant leaks and total volatile organic compounds (TVOCs). The GDC150 features 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC linear output signals, an automatic thermal resetting fuse, RoHS compliant circuit boards and LED indicators for power and open loop. The onboard alarm LEDs indicate when alarm threshold values are exceeded. The GDC150 is packaged in a rugged, polycarbonate housing for both indoor and outdoor applications. Automated calibration and simple maintenance procedures performed in the eld allow for continuous operation and high performance.
NEW!
WIRING
GDC-150 24 VAC Power 4-20 mA Signal + + 24 VAC SIG SIG +
FEATURES
Wide range of gases detected 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC signal LED indicators Alpha numeric LED display NEMA 4X or standard housing Automated calibration
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Sensing Technology Visual Indication Relay Output 12-30 VAC @ 2.9 VA, 50/60 Hz or 16-30 VDC @ 120 mA (non-ground reference supply only) 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC, jumper selectable Electrochemical, Solid State, Catalytic Bead, Photoionization Detector (PID) LED: Green = power, Red = alarm, Flashing Red = fail Amber LED, internal relay coil status indicator (only supplied with relay option) Red LED 4-20 mA open loop indicator for remote transmitter Optional, one only SPDT, 2 A at 30 VAC/VDC Rugged PVC with hinged, secured, drip-proof door NEMA 4X Water and dust-tight, corrosion resistant polycarbonate with hinged, secured door Wiring Terminations VDC 3 conductor shielded VAC 4-conductor shielded Operating Humidity 0-90% RH Non-condensing Operating Temperature -4 F to 104 F (-20 C to 40 C) Dimensions 4.43 L x 6.5 W x 2.54 D Standard (11.3 x 16.5 x 6.5 cm) NEMA 4X 5.0 L x 5.0W x 3.0D (12.5 x 12.5 x 3.0 cm) Approvals C-Tick Certied Weight Standard 1.0 lb (0.5 kg) NEMA 4X 1.3 lb (0.6 kg) 1 year Warranty March 2014 Enclosure Rating Standard
384
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com

TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTOR GDC150
MODEL GDC15001 DESCRIPTION Wall mount gas detector Enclosure option 1 3 Standard Enclosure NEMA 4X enclosure w/splash guard Feature Options 0 1 2 3 No option LED numeric display Relay Relay and display Sensor options 01 02 03 04 05 06 09 13 20 Carbon Monoxide (CO) 0-200 ppm Hydrogen Sulde (H2S) 0-50 ppm Oxygen (O2) 0-25% Volume Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) 0-10 ppm Ammonia (NH3) 0-500 ppm Nitric Oxide (NO) 0-100 ppm Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) 0-20 ppm Formaldehyde (HCHO) 0-10 ppm Combustible gases (catalytic sensor) MET PRO H2 ISO HEX 28 29 30 METHANE 0-100% L.E.L. PROPANE 0-100% L.E.L. H2 0-100% L.E.L. ISOBUTANE 0-100% L.E.L. HEXANE 0-100% L.E.L.
VOC 0-50 ppm VOC 0-300 ppm Combustible gases (solid state sensor) MET PRO H2 ISO HEX METHANE 0-50% L.E.L. PROPANE 0-50% L.E.L. H2 0-50% L.E.L. ISOBUTANE 0-50% L.E.L. HEXANE 0-50% L.E.L.
31
Refrigerant (solid state sensor) R11 R12 R22 134 401 402 404 407 410 42A 42D 438 507 R11 0-2000 ppm R12 0-2000 ppm R22 0-2000 ppm R134A 0-2000 ppm R401A 0-2000 ppm R402A 0-2000 ppm R404A 0-2000 ppm R407C 0-2000 ppm R410A 0-2000 ppm R422A 0-2000 ppm R422D 0-2000 ppm R438A 0-2000 ppm R507 0-2000 ppm
32
VOC 0-500 ppm
5209-0004 5209-0006 5209-0016 5209-0019
RELATED PRODUCTS Splash guard (for NEMA 4X sensors only) Calibration adapter for all other sensors Calibration adapter for catalytic sensor Guard to protect GDC-150 (16 gauge galvanized metal)
Calibration Gases UCK-1 UCK-3
ACCESSORIES PAGE CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive or corrosive gases 436
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
385

SINGLE POINT TRANSMITTER AND CONTROLLER SPC3 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SPC3 Series single point gas detection system detects and controls levels of carbon monoxide (CO) and other gases in a wide variety of commercial and industrial applications. These include Carbon Monoxide levels in parking structures, engine repair shops, equipment rooms and ventilation systems, etc. The controller can communicate with any compatible electronic analog control, DDC/PLC control or automation system via binary and/or analog output signal. The SPC3 Series has been tested by an independent laboratory, is CE approved and also approved by the City of Los Angeles.
NEW!
SPC3-1112-2-00
FEATURES
LCD display Selectable analog outputs 2 Relay outputs LED status indicators Simple menu driven programming
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
5.12 (13)
5.12 (13)
2.95 (7.5)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 24 VAC -20%/+15% @ 5 VA, 50/60 Hz or 24 VDC -20%/+15% @ 208 mA 0/4-20 mA 0/2-10 VDC Sensing Technology 1000 models 3000 models Life Expectancy Visual Indication Display Response Time Relay Output Alarm Auditory Levels [Db] Wiring Terminations Electrochemical Catalytic bead 3-5 years On, stage status, failure 2 lines, 16 characters per line t90 <50 seconds (1) SPDT. (1) NC-SPST or (1) NO SPST. 30 VAC/VDC @ 0.5 A
Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA 500 Minimum Output Impedance VDC 50 k Repeatability CO 3 ppm of reading NH3 3% of reading NO2 2% of reading O2 0.1% of reading 3000 models 2% of reading Measurement Range CO 0-250 ppm, span eld calibratable 0 to 200-300 NH3 0-300 ppm 0-10 ppm N02 O2 0-25 % 3000 models 0 to 100% L.E.L.
83 db @ unit Terminal blocks, screw type for lead wire Operating Humidity 15 to 95%, non-condensing Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Dimensions 5.12"W x 5.12"H x 2.95D (13 x 13 x 7.5 cm) Approvals CE, City of Los Angeles Weight 0.6 lbs (0.3 kg) Warranty 1 year
386
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

SINGLE POINT TRANSMITTER AND CONTROLLER SPC3 SERIES
WIRING
24 VAC/VDC Input Power Supply, and Analog Output Relay Outputs
Digital input 24 VDC, 50 mA (output switch)

Relays are normally de-energized, 30 VAC/VDC 0.5 A
(0) 4-20 mA or (0) 2-10 VDC***
NO NC Common NC/NO** Common
24 VAC/VDC** -20%/15%, 50/60 Hz ***Jumper output signal AO01 range selectors: V-A Over both pins Pins not covered Over both pins Pins not covered = VDC = mA = 4-20 mA / 2-10 VDC = 0-20 mA / 0-10 VDC
0-20%
S3 = Built-in horn S4 = Switched output **Jumper SPST relay (R2) NC/NO selector: NC NO Covers top two pins = SPST-NC Covers bottom two pins = SPST-NO
SPC3-1112-200 SPC3-1120-200 SPC3-1130-200 SPC3-1195-200 SPC3-3330-200 SPC3-3340-200 SPC3-3355-200 SPC3-3380-200 SPC3-3389-200 Carbon Monoxide (CO) single point transmitter and controller Ammonia (NH3) single point transmitter and controller Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) single point transmitter and controller Oxygen (O2) single point transmitter and controller Benzene/Gasoline (C6H6) single point transmitter and controller Hyrodgen (H2) single point transmitter and controller Methane (CH4) single point transmitter and controller Propane (C3H8) single point transmitter and controller Jet A single point transmitter and controller
GAS-CO-200 CC-STANDARD -17 GR-17-300 CONKIT-E/CH-LC UCK-1
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 200 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 437 Briefcase style calibration kit with foam inserts for 17 liter cylinders Regulator precalibrated for SPC3 Calibration cup with 6 ft of tubing Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
387

DUAL SENSOR GAS DETECTOR GDD SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele GDD Series Dual Sensor Gas Detector simultaneously monitors two different gases in two different locations. The detector consists of a base unit with built-in sensor coupled with a remote sensor that can be installed up to 200 feet (6om) away. The modular design adds functionality and exibility with pre-calibrated plug-in sensors. The GDD Series provides a 4-20 mA output in proportion to the level of gas present and two relay outputs on base unit only to activate additional horns, strobes, or ventilation systems. The unit features a two-line LCD for local indication, self test diagnostics, and a built-in 85 dBA buzzer. The remote sensor is sold seperately. The GDD Series Dual Sensor Gas Detector is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained. NOTE: As an handy solution to a wall mounting application, we recommend the WBX334 extra wide handi-box for easy mounting and installation.
NEW!
GDD
Two-line LCD display Easy installation, commissioning, and operation LED status indication Password protection 0.2 ppm 0.5% DPDT pilot duty, 150 VA max inductive, 5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC (base unit only) Alarm Auditory Levels [Db] 85 dBA @ 10 ft (3m) Operating Humidity 15 to 90% non-condensing Operating Temperature O2,H2S,N2O,CH4,C3H6,H2 -40 to 122F (-40 to 50C) CO -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C) Dimensions Base unit 8.1H x 5.9W x 2.7D (20.6 x 14.9 x 6.7 cm) Remote sensor 2.6H x 1.8W x 1.4D (6.5 x 4.5 x 3.5 cm) Weight 1.84 lb (0.83 kg) Wall Remote 0.42 lb (0.19 kg) Approvals CSA C22.2 Warranty 1 year H2S, NO2 CH4, C3H6, H2 Relay Output
FEATURES
Simultaneously monitor two gases in different locations Pre-calibrated plug-in sensors Built-in 85 dBA buzzer 4-20 mA and two relay outputs on base unit only Wide variety of gases detected
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Measurement Range CO O2 H2S N2O CH4, C3H6, H2 Sensing Technology CO, O2, H2S, NO2 CH4, C3H6, H2 Calibration Interval Life Expectancy CO All Others Visual Indication Display Display Resolution CO O2 17-27 VAC @ 8.4 VA, 50/60 Hz or 24-38 VDC @ 350 mA 4-20 mA (500) 9base unit only) 0-250 ppm 0% to 25% 0-50 ppm 0-10 ppm 0% to 100% L.E.L. Electrochemical Catalytic combustion 6 months 6 years 2 Years Green LED: power Amber LED 1: Alarm/fault Amber LED 2: Alarm/ fault 8 character, two-line LCD 1 ppm 0.2%
388
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

DUAL SENSOR GAS DETECTOR GDD SERIES
WIRING APPLICATION
Second (remote) sensor allows for dual gas monitoring. Two on-board relays can activate ventilation or strobes.
Remote Unit
7
Note: No useble analog output on remote sensor. Only base unit has analog output of base unit. Relay output is tripped by whichever set point is tripped rst.
Base Unit
MODEL GDD-C3H8 GDD-CH4 GDD-CO-1 GDD-H2 GDD-H2S GDD-NO2 GDD-O2 GDD-RC3H8 GDD-RCH4 GDD-RCO GDD-RH2 GDD-RH2S GDD-RNO2 GDD-RO2 1309K0002 Calibration Gases E3H2 E3H2S E3M E3NO2 E3O2 E3P E3SCO ECLAB 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 UCK-1 UCK-2 WBX334 DESCRIPTION Propane gas detector Methane gas detector Carbon Monoxide gas detector Hydrogen gas detector Hydrogen Sulde gas detector Nitrogen Dioxide gas detector Oxygen gas detector Remote Propane gas sensor Remote Methane gas sensor Remote Carbon Monoxide gas sensor Remote Hydrogen gas sensor Remote Hydrogen Sulde gas sensor Remote Nitrogen Dioxide gas sensor Remote Oxygen gas sensor RELATED PRODUCTS GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 58 to 103L gas cylinders CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) Replacement H2 (Hydrogen) sensor cartridge Replacement H2S (Hydrogen Sulde) sensor cartridge Replacement CH4 (Methane) sensor cartridge Replacement NO2 (Nitrogen Dioxide) sensor cartridge Replacement O2 (Oxygen) sensor cartridge Replacement C3H8 (Propane) sensor cartridge Replacement CO sensor cartridge Splash Guard for NEMA 4X ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) Universal calibration kit for corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3) 436 One gang weatherproof outlet box with (3) 3/4" hubs
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
389

DESCRIPTION
Bacharachs GDC350 full-featured xed gas monitors provide superior operation - standalone or as part of a larger system utilizing the standard analog outputs. This state-ofthe-art instrument can detect a wide range of gases including carbon monoxide (CO), oxygen (O2), combustible gases, refrigerants and total volatile organic compounds (TVOCs). The GDC350 provides a unique two sensor interface, allowing for multiple gases to be detected with onboard or remote sensors. Sensors can be located integral to the unit or remotely allowing for sensors to be placed directly in areas where potential leaks can occur. Bacharachs proprietary calibration algorithms extend the amount of time required between calibrations, reducing maintenance costs and lowering the overall cost of ownership for non-critical applications. The GDC350 has all the features and functionality for any application. LED alarm indicators visually indicate when alarm conditions are met and an audible alarm alerts nearby personnel. An onboard alpha numeric display shows gas readings in real time for each sensor. Integral dry contact relays are available to drive external audible / visual alarms, activate fans, or connect to building management and control systems. Installation and maintenance is simple and easy, reducing overall system cost. A pre-wired plug-in option is available for out-of-the-box operation. Simply plug the unit into any standard AC outlet for immediate detection and protection.
TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE STAND-ALONE GAS DETECTOR GDC350
NEW!
FEATURES Can be used as a stand alone controller On board or remote sensing Wide range of gases detected Dual 4-20 mA signals Unique two sensor interface LED indicators Alpha numeric LED display NEMA 4X or standard housing Automated calibration
SPECIFICATIONS
12-28 VAC @ 2.9 VA, 15-30 VDC @ 120 mA (non-ground reference supply only) Signal Output 4-20 mA (dual outputs for 2 sensor onboard congurations) Sensing Technology Electrochemical, Solid State Visual Indication LED indicators for Power, Fail, Low Gas Alarm, High Gas Alarm Contacts Two SPDT relays, 5A @ 240 VAC Alarm Auditory Levels [Db] 80 dB Audible alarm w/ silence Wiring Terminations 3 conductor shielded VDC VAC 4 conductor shielded Operating Humidity 0-95% RH Non-Condensing Operating Temperature 32 F to 104 F (0 C to 40 C) Enclosure Rating Standard Rugged PVC NEMA 4X Watertight polycarbonate Dimensions Standard 5.3 L x 6.8 W x 2.6 D (13.5 x 17.3 x 6.6 cm) NEMA 4X 5.1L x 7.1W x 3.9D (13.0 x 18.0 x 10.0 cm) Approvals C-Tick Certied Weight Standard 1.2 lb (0.6 kg) NEMA 4X 1.4 lb (0.7 kg) Warranty 1 year Supply Voltage
WIRING
GDC-350 + + 24 VAC SIG SIG +
24 VAC Power 4-20 mA Signal
390
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

TOXIC AND COMBUSTIBLE STAND-ALONE GAS DETECTOR GDC350
MODEL GDC350 DESCRIPTION Wall mount gas detector Product option 1 2 3 4 Single sensor, onboard Single sensor, remote Dual sensor, onboard Dual sensor, onboard & remote Enclosure option 1 2 3 4 Standard enclosure, no display Standard enclosure, w/ display NEMA 4X enclosure, w/ splash guard, no display NEMA 4X enclosure, w/ splash guard & display Sensor option 1 00 01 03 04 06 09 No on board sensor Carbon Monoxide (CO) 0-200 ppm Oxygen (O2) 0-25% Volume Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) 0-10 ppm Nitrogen Oxide (NO) 0-100 ppm Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) 0-20 ppm Sensor Option 2 00 01 03 04 06 09 30 No on board sensor Carbon Monoxide (CO) 0-200 ppm Oxygen (O2) 0-25% Volume Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) 0-10 ppm Nitric Oxide (NO) 0-100 ppm Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) 0-20 ppm Combustible gas (sold state sensor) MET PRO H2 ISO HEX 31 METHANE 0-50% L.E.L. PROPANE 0-50% L.E.L. H2 0-50% L.E.L. ISOBUTANE 0-50% L.E.L. HEXANE 0-50% L.E.L.
Refrigerants (solid state sensor) R11 R12 R22 134 401 402 404 407 410 42A 42D 438 507 R11 0-2000 ppm R12 0-2000 ppm R22 0-2000 ppm R134A 0-2000 ppm R401A 0-2000 ppm R402A 0-2000 ppm R404A 0-2000 ppm R407C 0-2000 ppm R410A 0-2000 ppm R422A 0-2000 ppm R422D 0-2000 ppm R438A 0-2000 ppm R507 0-2000 ppm
32
TVOCs (must be remote)
5209-0004 5209-0006 5909-0003 5909-0004
RELATED PRODUCTS Splash guard (for NEMA 4X sensors only) Calibration adapter for all on board sensors Guard to protect GDC350 (16 gauge galvanized metal) Enclosed external transformer 120 VAC to 220 VAC) ACCESSORIES PAGE CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive or corrosive gases 436
Calibration Gases UCK-1 UCK-3
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
391

NETWORK COMPATIBLE GAS DETECTOR GDN SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele GDN Series Network Compatible Gas Detector optimizes BAS, re, ventilation, and other security systems by providing continuous monitoring of toxic and combustible gases. Modbus or BACnet MS/TP protocols are supported by the GDN Series and can be quickly integrated into a BAS network . Activate alarms, horns, strobes, and fans through HVAC controls or directly from the on-board relay. The modular design adds functionality and exibility with precalibrated plug-in sensors. The unit features a two-line LCD for local indication, self test diagnostics, and a built-in 85 dBA buzzer. The GDN Series Network Compatible Gas Detector is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained.
NEW!
GDN
Password protection Gases detected: Carbon monoxide (CO) Nitrogen dioxide (NO2 diesel exhaust) Oxygen (O2) Hydrogen (H2) Hydrogen Sulde (H2S) Methane (CH4) Propane (C3H8) Display Relay Output 8 character, two-line LCD DPDT pilot duty, 150 VA max inductive, 5A @ 30 VDC, 250 VAC Alarm Auditory Levels [Db] 85 dBA @ 10 ft (3m) 0.5%, 1 ppm, 0.2 ppm, 0.2%, 0.5% Display Resolution Operating Humidity 15 to 90% non-condensing Operating Temperature CO -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C) All Others -40 to 122F (-40 to 50C) 8.1''H x 5.9''W x 2.7''D Dimensions (20.6 x 14.9 x 6.7 cm) CSA Approvals Weight 1.84 lb (0.83 kg) 1 year Warranty
FEATURES
Modbus or BacNet MS/TP compatible Pre-calibrated plug-in sensors Built-in 85 dBA buzzer Wide variety of gases detected Two-line LCD display DPDT relay output Easy installation, commissioning, and operation LED status indication
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Communication Measurement Range CO O2 H2S N2O CH4, C3H8, H2 Sensing Technology CO, O2, H2S,NO2 CH4, C3H8, H2 Calibration Interval Life Expectancy CO Alll Others Visual Indication Green LED: Amber LED 1: Amber LED 2: 17-27 VAC @ 8.4 VA, 50/60 Hz or 24-38 VDC @ 350 Ma RS485 Modbus, Bacnet MS/TP 0-250 ppm 0% to 25% 0-50 ppm 0-10 ppm 0% to 100% LEL Electrochemical Catalytic combustion 6 months 6 years 2 years Power Alarm/fault Alarm/fault
392
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

NETWORK COMPATIBLE GAS DETECTOR GDN SERIES
APPLICATIONS
Modbus Conguration BACnet (MS-TP) Conguration
VA301C Modbus Communication
Network
VA301EM Modbus Communication Up to 3 x 32 units BACnet Communication
BAS
BAS DVC HVAC
Alarms, Strobes, Horns
Supports Modbus protocol to daisy-chain detectors, providing up to 96 points of monitoring on a serial bus. Excellent option for controllerbased (VA301C) installations common in larger applications. A relay output is provided as an option for activating ventilation directly (e.g. when fan is located in close proximity to detector).
GDN Series outputs directly to BACnet or other BAS (building automation system). Alarms, strobes, and horns are activated through the BAS with links to DCV/HVAC controls. The system design supports new and retrofit installations for large buildings, and can couple with a controller to effectively integrate wired and wireless system components. A relay output is provided as an option for activating ventilation directly (e. g. when fan is located in close proximity to the detector).
MODEL GDN-BC3H8 GDN-BCH4 GDN-BCO-1 GDN-BH2 GDN-BH2S GDN-BNO2 GDN-BO2 GDN-MC3H8 GDN-MCH4 GDN-MCO-1 GDN-MH2 GDN-MH2S GDN-MNO2 GDN-MO2 DESCRIPTION BACnet network Propane gas detector, wall mount BACnet network Methane gas detector, wall mount BACnet network Carbon Monoxide gas detector, wall mount BACnet network Hydrogen gas detector, wall mount BACnet network Hydrogen Sulde gas detector, wall mount BACnet network Nitrogen Dioxide gas detector, wall mount BACnet network Oxygen gas detector, wall mount Modbus network Propane gas detector, wall mount Modbus network Methane gas detector, wall mount Modbus network Carbon Monoxide gas detector, wall mount Modbus network Hydrogen gas detector, wall mount Modbus network Hydrogen Sulde gas detector, wall mount Modbus network Nitrogen Dioxide gas detector, wall mount Modbus network Oxygen gas detector, wall mount RELATED PRODUCTS GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 58 to 103L gas cylinders GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 17 to 34L gas cylinders CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) Replacement H2 (Hydrogen) sensor cartridge Replacement H2S (Hydrogen Sulde) sensor cartridge Replacement CH4 (Methane) sensor cartridge Replacement NO2 (Nitrogen Dioxide) sensor cartridge Replacement O2 (Oxygen) sensor cartridge Replacement C3H8 (Propane) sensor cartridge Replacement CO sensor cartridge Splash Guard for NEMA 4X
1309K0002 1309K0004 Calibration Gases E3H2 E3H2S E3M E3NO2 E3O2 E3P E3SCO ECLAB
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 UCK-1 UCK-2
ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436 Universal calibration kit for corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3) 436
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
393

GAS DETECTION EXPANSION MODULE VA301EM
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics VA301EM Expansion Module allows the monitoring of toxic and combustible gases and refrigerants. Up to four sensors can be placed 500' away for toxic and combustible gases, and 200' away for refrigerant gas monitoring. The transmitter is equipped with a backlit LCD display and keypad that can be placed in a safe area, remote from the sensors. Alarm relays and Modbus communication are standard. The unit is compatible with the VA301C controller. FEATURES Sense one to four zones Sensors available for toxic and combustible gases and refrigerants RS-485 Modbus communication Contact input for manual break-glass switches Three 24VDC outputs to activate strobes and horns 4-20mA output for each sensor Four relay outputs Easy-to-read LCD display Explosionproof sensors for combustible and toxic gases
NEW!
VA301EM-RFSA S301D2CO VA301IRFSR134A Alarm Auditory Levels [Db] 105 dBA @ 3 ft (1m) Gases Detected CO, NO2, R11, R12, R123, R125, R134A, R22 Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH (noncondensing) Operating Temperature 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) VA301RF S301 -40 to 104F (-40 to 40C) Dimensions VA301EM 7.99"H x 11.02"W x 2.76"D (20.3 x 28 x 7 cm) 4.02H x 11.02W x 2.48D VA301RF (10.2 x 28 x 6.3 cm) 3"H x 2" Diameter (7.6 x 5.1 cm) S301 Approvals CSA Weight 3.1 lb (1.4 kg) VA301EM VA301RF 2.3 lb (1.0 kg) 2.0 lb (0.9 kg) S301 Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output 22-27 VAC @ 48 VA, 50/60 Hz or 22-38 VDC @ 2 A max. 4-20 mA, 1000 @ 24, RS-485 Modbus 40 ppm @ 500 ppm
Accuracy Measurement Range CO 0-250 ppm 0-10 ppm NO2 Refrigerants 0-1000 ppm Sensing Technology CO Electrochemical Refrigerants Dual Infrared Sensor Distance To Transmitters Up to 500 feet (160 m), 200 ft (60.9m) maximum- maximum; Calibration Interval 6 months Visual Indication Green - Normal Red - Alarms A, B, & C Yellow - Fault/Service Alarm Amber - Tx (network mode) Backlit LCD Display Response Time 60 seconds Relay Output 4 DPDT relays (4) 5A, 30 VDC or 250 VAC (resistive load)
394
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

GAS DETECTION EXPANSION MODULE VA301EM
WIRING
NC
RELAY 3
NO
NC
NETWORK END OF LINE JUMPER
RELAY 4
NO
J8 J17 J10 J18 A B A B +24 VDC GDN
J9 RELAY 1 RELAY 2
+
( ) NO NC NO NC
SENSOR POWER POWER
COMMUNICATION SHIELD NETWORK
SENSOR
J16 BREAK GLASS SWITCH INPUT
24 VDC OUTPUT
4-20 mA OUTPUT
MODEL S301D2CO S301D2NO2 VA301IRFSR11 VA301IRFSR12 VA301IRFSR123 VA301IRFSR125 VA301IRFSR134A VA301IRFSR22 DESCRIPTION Remote Carbon Monoxide gas sensor Remote Nitrogen Dioxide gas sensor Remote R11 refrigerant sensor Remote R12 refrigerant sensor Remote R123 refrigerant sensor Remote R125 refrigerant sensor Remote R134A refrigerant sensor Remote R22 refrigerant sensor
1309K0002 1309K0004 691-K1A Calibration Gases DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 NIOSHSCBA NIOSHSCBA-WC UCK-1 UCK-2 UCK-3
ACCESSORIES PAGE GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 58 to 103L gas cylinders GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 17 to 34L gas cylinders Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 100 VA 979 CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Self-contained breathing apparatus kit 437 Self-contained breathing apparatus kit with SCBA-WALCASE wall case Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436 Universal calibration kit for corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3) Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive or corrosive gases
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
395

GAS DETECTION CONTROLLER VA301C-DLC
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics VA301C-DLC Gas Detection Controller provides continuous monitoring of up to 96 inputs/ outputs, on three channels, at distances up to 2000'. Modbus communication channels are included. The VA301C-DLC is pre-programmed at the factory, but menu driven changes can be made in the eld. The VA301C-DLC allows monitoring of an entire network and will initiate an alarm or ventilation activation upon detection of a gas. One model is available with datalogging. The VA301C-DLC Gas Detection Controller is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained.
NEW!
VA301C-DCL VA-301R-8 User Interface Visual Indication Dot-matrix display and keypad Blinking Green LED: Normal operation Red LED: Alarm Level 1, 2, and 3 Blinking Amber LED: Signal Tx Blinking Green LED: Signal Rx Yellow LED: Failure Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Operating Temperature -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C) Dimensions VA301C-DLC 8.0" H x 11.0" W x 2.7" D (20.3 x 28.0 x 7.0 cm) VA301R 8.0"H x 9.5"W x 2.5"D (20.3 x 24.4 x 5.7 cm) Approvals CSA Weight VA301C-DLC 2.3 lb (1.0 kg) VA301R 3.0 lb (1.4 kg) Warranty 1 year
7
FEATURES
Full array of visual indicators and audible alarm Multiple fully programmable alarm levels Programmable time delays Failure indicator Up to 96 transmitters and relay modules Up to 768 events Up to 128 zoning groups Graphic 122 x 32 dot-matrix display Datalogging available
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage VA301C-DLC VA301R Relay Output VA301C-DLC VA301R Relay Setpoint Alarm Auditory Levels [Db] Alarm Time Delay 17-27 VAC @ 8.6 VA or 24-38 VDC @ 350 mA 17-27 VAC @ 8.6 VA or 24-38 VDC @ 250 mA 5A, 30 VDC or 250 VAC (resistive load) 4 DPDT relays (alarms/fault), buzzer 8 DPDT relays Multiple with high and low setpoints
6 0, 30 sec, 45 sec, 1-99 minute before and after alarm Network Capacity: Up to 96 transmitters and 96 relay modules Communication Three Modbus zones Distance To Transmitters 2000' (600m) maximum, 65 ft (20m) T-Tap, 130 ft (40m) total T-Tap, 2000 ft (600m) maximum
396
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

GAS DETECTION CONTROLLER VA301C-DLC
WIRING
VA301C-DLC CONTROLLER
VA301IRFS SENSOR
VA301IRFS SENSOR
VA301IRFS SENSOR
S301D2 SENSOR
J24
24 AWG BELDEN 9841 MAX 2000 (60 cm) 32 SENSORS + 32 RELAY MODULES PER CHANNEL
CH 3 B2 A2
B3 A3
VA301EM EXPANSION MODULE
CH 2 B1 A1 CH 1
Fan GDN SERIES SENSOR
Alarm VA-301R RELAY MODULE
MODEL VA301C-DLC VA301R-8 VA301C DESCRIPTION Gas detection controller with datalogging Eight-relay module Gas detection controller
VA301EM GDN Series
RELATED PRODUCTS Gas detection expansion module Network compatible gas detector
PAGE 394 392
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
ACCESSORIES Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT
PAGE 979 995 994
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
397

REFRIGERANT GAS MONITOR HGM-SZ
DESCRIPTION
The Bacharach Model HGM-SZ Single Zone Refrigerant Gas Monitor is designed for continuous monitoring of CFC, HFC, and HCFC refrigerants and halogen gases. The unit features 30 pre-programmed refrigerants plus one custom gas. Three adjustable alarm levels with relay output designate leak, spill, and evacuation concentrations. Gas alarms and system fault conditions are indicated by visual and audible alarms. The Model HGM-SZ provides a system fault relay output and a 4 to 20 mA output for integration with remote monitoring equipment or building management systems. The HGM-SZ Single Zone Refrigerant Gas Monitor is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained.
NEW!
C
US
INSTALLATION
The monitor should be located outside the mechanical room and readily accessible for verication and servicing. The sample line should be located as close as possible to the source of a potential leak.
FEATURES
43 pre-programmed refrigerants and one custom Self diagnostics verify operation Three alarm levels with SPDT alarm contacts System fault alarm 200 data point logging 4-20 mA output signal 50-foot sampling tube and end lter included Audible and visual alarm indication Local indication of current and peak gas levels Alarm-silence button NEMA 1
WIRING
LINE 2 (LIVE) LINE 1 (NEUTRAL) GND
(+)
LINE1 LINE2
NEUTRAL
(-)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA 3 alarm relays, 1 fault relay, 240 VAC, 5A, and 4-20 mA 500 (non-isolated) Accuracy 1 ppm 10% reading Sensitivity 1 ppm Measurement Range 0-1000 ppm Sensing Technology Single pass, infrared non-dispersive Gases Detected R-11, R-12, R-22, R-23, R-113, R-114, R-123, R-124, R-125, R-134a, R-227, R-236fa, R-245fa, R-401a, R-402a, R- 402b,R-404a, R-407a, R-407c, R-408a, R-409a, R-410a, R-500, R-502, R-503, R-507, R-508b, H-1211, H-1301, H-2404, N-1230 Warm Up Time 15 minutes Response Time 9 to 90 seconds depending on sample tube length Coverage Up to 50 ft (15m) from measuring point to monitor Operating Humidity 5% to 90% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Dimensions 7.7"H x 3.6"D x 13.7"L (20 x 9 x 35 cm) Approvals UL le E212266, CSA, CE Weight 11.1 lb (5.0 kg) Warranty 2 years
GROUND STUD
IMPORTANT! AC input ground wire always on bottom of Ground Stud
Use supplied crimp-on ring terminals, washers, and nuts to connect AC ground wires to Ground Stud as shown to meet approval agency requirements.
MODEL HGM-SZ DESCRIPTION Single zone refrigerant monitor
RELATED PRODUCTS M1104KF Replacement line end lter HGM-LON Lonworks Communication Adapter HGM-N2 Metasys N2 Communication Adapter NIOSHSCBA-WC Self-contained breathing apparatus kit with SCBA-WALCASE wall case UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for noncorrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 125-SS-2 Replacement charcoal lter* Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) 3015-5705 BACnet Communication Adapater *NOTE: Recommend replacing every six months
398
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

MULTI-ZONE REFRIGERANT MONITOR HGM-MZ
DESCRIPTION
The Bacharach Model HGM-MZ Multi-Zone Refrigerant Gas Monitor is designed for continuous multi-point monitoring of CFC, HFC, and HCFC refrigerants and halogen gases. The standard unit monitors four discrete points and can be expanded to sixteen point monitoring in four point increments. The unit features 43 pre-programmed refrigerants plus one custom gas. Three adjustable alarm levels with relay output designate leak, spill, and evacuation concentrations. Gas alarms and system fault conditions are indicated by visual and audible alarms. The Model HGM-MZ provides a system fault relay output and RS-485 serial interface for integration with a building management system. The HGM-MZ Multi-Zone Refrigerant Gas Monitor is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained.
US
INSTALLATION
FEATURES
Four-point monitoring expandable to sixteen points 43 pre-programmed refrigerants and one custom Up to 1200 ft (365m) distance between measuring point and monitor Three alarm levels and system fault alarm with SPDT contacts Self diagnostics verify operation 100 data point logging Audible and visual alarm indication with silence button Local indication of current and peak gas levels NEMA 1
WIRING
LINE 2 (LIVE) LINE 1 (NEUTRAL) GND
RELAY 1 LEAK
RELAY 2 SPILL
RELAY 3 EVACUATE
RELAY 4 FAULT
COMMON
COMMON
COMMON
COMMON
NC
NC
NC
NO
NO
NO
LINE1 LINE2
NEUTRAL
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Relay Output Accuracy Sensitivity Measuring Range Sensing Technology Gases Detected 100 to 240 VAC @ 21 VA, 50/60 Hz 3 SPDT alarm relays, 1 fault relay, 250 VAC, 3A; Dual 4-20mA output (optional) 1 ppm 10% reading 1 ppm 1000 ppm Single pass, infrared non-dispersive R-11, R-12, R21, R-22, R-23, R-113, R-114, R-123, R-124, R-125, R-134a, R-227, R-236FA, R-245FA, R-401a, R-402a, R-402b, R-404a, R-407a, R-407c, R-408a, R-409a, R-410a, R-422a, R-422d, R-427a R-500, R-502, R-503, R-507, R-508b, H-1211, H-1301, H-2402, N-1230, FA188, FC72, HFP 5 to 120 seconds depending on sample tube length 15 minutes Monitoring distance: 1200 ft (365m) maximum per zone Optional: LON, N2 and BACnet 5% to 90% RH (noncondensing) 32 to 122 F (0 to 50C), 32 to 122 F (0 to 50 C) 12.2"L x 13.7"H x 5.0"D (31 x 35 x 12.7 cm) UL le E212266, CSA, CE 15 lb (6.8 kg) 18 lb (8.2 kg) 20 lb (9.1 kg) 22 lb (10.0 kg) 2 years
GROUND STUD
IMPORTANT! AC input ground wire always on bottom of Ground Stud
Use supplied crimp-on ring terminals, washers, and nuts to connect AC ground wires to Ground Stud as shown to meet approval agency requirements.
MODEL HGM-MZ HGM-MZ-8 HGM-MZ-12 HGM-MZ-16 DESCRIPTION Multi zone refrigerant monitor (4-zone) Multi zone refrigerant monitor (8-zone) Multi zone refrigerant monitor (12-zone) Multi zone refrigerant monitor (16-zone)
Response Time Warm Up Time Coverage Communication Operating Humidity Operating Temperature Dimensions Approvals Weight MZ MZ-8 MZ-12 MZ-16 Warranty
RELATED PRODUCTS 3015-5152 Dual 4-20mA output board 3015-5171 Four zone expansion kit* HGM-RD Remote display HGM-LON Lonworks Communication Adapter HGM-N2 Metasys N2 Communication Adapter NIOSHSCBA-WC Self-contained breathing apparatus kit with SCBA-WALCASE wall case UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for noncorrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 3015-5705 BACnet Communication Adapater 3015-3411 Line end lters (4) Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) *NOTE: Must order 3015-3411 filter kit.
NO
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
399
NC

MULTIPOINT SAMPLE DRAW GAS MONITOR VASQN8X
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics VASQN8X is a sample draw gas monitor. The standard unit (VASQN82) has two sampling points and a three-relay output for different stages of alarm. The unit is ideal for MRI rooms as the sampling point tubing can be up to 1000 from the monitor. The optional two-gas model will pick up both gases at each sampling point. Each unit includes 100 ft lengths of sampling tubing per number of ports ordered. The VASQN8X Multipoint Sample Draw Gas Monitor is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained.
NEW!
VASQN8X
FEATURES
Visual indicators and audible alarm Programmable alarm levels Two sampling points Failure indicator Three alarm levels Integrated ow loss surveillance
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Accuracy Relay Output Relay Output Rating Alarm Auditory Levels Measurement Range Sensing Technology Sampling Distance 24 VAC @ 18 VA 3% Three DPDT relays (three alarms) 5A, 30 VDC or 250 VAC (resistive) 110 dBA at 3 ft (1m) Oxygen: 0 to 25% Refrigerants: 0 to 1000 ppm Oxygen: Diffusion fuel Cell Refrigerants: Electrochemical 100 ft (30.5) per port (included); Maximum 1000 ft (305m) Visual Indication Green LED: Normal Red LED: Alarm levels 1 and 2 Yellow LED: failure indication Green LED: Aspirated zone indication Operating Humidity 15% to 90% RH, noncondensing Operating Temperature 32 to 100F (0 to 40C) Dimensions 19"H x 13.0"W x 3.75"D (48 x 33 x 10 cm) Approvals CSA Weight 26.5 lbs (12 kg) Warranty 1 year
400
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

MULTIPOINT SAMPLE DRAW GAS MONITOR VASQN8X
APPLICATION TABLE O2 Oxygen Refrigerants (All except R-123) Refrigerants (R-123) 3 - 5 foot (1 - 1.5 m) from oor 1 foot (30 cm) from oor 1 foot ( 30 cm) from oor 26 ft (7m) 31 ft (7m) 32 ft (7m) 1,257 ft2 (154 m2) 1,257 ft2 (154 m2) 1,257 ft2 (154 m2) 0-25% Volume 0-1000 ppm 0-1000 ppm 19.5% Volume 250 ppm 50 ppm 22% Volume 500 ppm 500 ppm 22.5% Volume 900 ppm 900 ppm
VASQN8
Multipoint gas detector with tubing supplied per point Points (Choose one) 2 Two points 4 Four points 8 Eight points Gas (Choose one) R22 R-22 refrigerant R11 R-11 refrigerant R123 R-123 refrigerant R134 R-134a refrigerant R404 R-404a refrigerant R507 R-507 refrigerant O2 Oxygen 4 O2 Example: VASQN84O2, Four point multipoint gas detector with tubing supplied per point measuring Oxygen.
VASQN8
691-K0A Calibration Gases UCK-1 UCK-3
ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive or corrosive gases 436
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
401

REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR RLD-5
DESCRIPTION
The Kele RLD-5 is a solid-state CFC refrigerant leak detector capable of detecting the presence of escaping refrigerants. It is eld adjustable for ve different CFC refrigerant types: R-11, R-12, R-22, R-113, and R-502. An analog output is provided to allow interfacing to computer monitoring equipment. An alarm relay is also provided with adjustable set point and jumper-selectable time delay function to prevent nuisance alarms. Four LEDs provide status indication for warm-up, ready, warning, and alarm. The RLD-5 is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained. For more information on the proper application and use of this product please read "Environmental Safety Devices" in our technical reference section.
NEW!
Field-replaceable sensor Refrigerant leak detection as described in ASHRAE 15-2004 Minimum 15 minute time delay
FEATURES
R-11, R-12, R-22, R-113, and R-502 detection Selectable analog output LED status indication Alarm relay output
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage
2 (5.08)
in (cm)
REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
RLD-5
Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Minimum Output Impedance VDC Accuracy Measurement Range Relay Output
24 VAC 10% @ 14 VA or 24 VDC 10% @ 580 mA 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 1-6 VDC (jumper selectable) 300 maximum 5 k minimum 5% Long term drift 8% 0-1000 ppm SPDT 0.5A 24 VAC/VDC (jumper selectable); Manual reset (latched), Auto reset (unlatched) Adjustable 0-1000 ppm
8 (20.32)
WARM-UP READY WARNING ALARM RESET ALARM
Relay Setpoint Factory set 500 ppm Time Delay 15 min., 30 min., 1 hr, 2 hr (jumper selectable) Operating Humidity 10% to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 32F to 158F (0C to 70C) Weight 1.5 lb (0.45 kg) Warranty 1 year
CAL.
4.5 (11.43)
402
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR RLD-5
WIRING
15 min 30 min 1 hr 2 hrs Setpoint X 100 R-22 10 0 2 4 6 8
J4
Time Delay Selector for Alarm Relay Output
Setpoint
ADJ GND
Alarm Relay Setpoint Dial (factory set at 500 ppm)
S1
R-502 R-113 R-11 Refrig Type R-22
Refrigerant Selector Dial Analog Output/Signal Selector
Alarm Relay Fuse
R-12 4-20 mA 0-5 VDC 0-10 VDC 1-6 VDC Unlatched Latched
J6
F2
GMA 1 AMP
K1
J5 J2
Alarm Relay Output Selector AC/DC Selector
AC pwr DC pwr TB3

NO COM NC Alarm
TB2
TB1
GND Analog Output Power

GMA 1 AMP
Power Fuse
F1
24 VAC/VDC
Analog Output
INSTALLATION / OPERATION
Installation The RLD-5 is suitable for indoor use only. Mount the unit as close to the source of potential refrigerant leaks as possible. Some recommended considerations are as follows: 1. Mount approximately 3' (0.9m) from oor (refrigerants are heavier than air and will settle on the oor). 2. Mount at least 5' (1.5m) from exhaust fans (direct airow across sensing element will affect accuracy). 3. If used in refrigeration pits, mount 1' (0.3m) above oor. Operation To test operation, place a small amount of alcohol below the sensing element. The analog output signal should increase. Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes.
MODEL RLD-5 DESCRIPTION Refrigerant leak detector
RELATED PRODUCTS 170-0830 Replacement sensing element NIOSHSCBA-WC Self-contained breathing apparatus kit with SCBA-WALCASE wall case ACCESSORIES PAGE 691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
403

REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR RLD-134A
DESCRIPTION
The Kele RLD-134A is a solid-state HFC refrigerant leak detector capable of detecting the presence of escaping refrigerant R-134A. An analog output is provided to allow interfacing to computer monitoring equipment. An alarm relay is also provided with adjustable set point and jumperselectable time delay function to prevent nuisance alarms. Four LED's provide status indication for warm-up, ready, warning, and alarm. The RLD-134A is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained. For more information on the proper application and use of this product please read "Environmental Safety Devices" in our technical reference section.
NEW!
Field-replaceable sensor Wall-mounting kit Refrigerant leak detection as described in ASHRAE15-2004 Minimum 15 minute time delay
FEATURES
R-134A detection Selectable analog output LED status indication Alarm relay output
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage
2 (5.08)
in (cm)
REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR
RLD-134A
Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Minimum Output Impedance VDC Accuracy Measurement Range Relay Output
24 VAC 10% @ 14 VA or 24 VDC 10% @ 580 mA 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 1-6 VDC (jumper selectable) 300 maximum 5 k minimum 5%; Long term drift 8% 0-1000 ppm SPDT 0.5A 24 VAC/VDC Manual reset (latched) Auto reset (unlatched) (jumper selectable) Adjustable 0-1000 ppm
8 (20.32)
WARM-UP READY WARNING ALARM RESET ALARM
Relay Setpoint Factory set 500 ppm Relay Time Delay 15 min., 30 min., 1 hr, 2 hr (jumper selectable) Operating Humidity 10% to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Weight 1.5 lb (0.45 kg) Warranty 1 year
CAL.
4.5 (11.43)
404
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTOR RLD-134A
WIRING
15 min 30 min 1 hr 2 hrs Setpoint X 100 0 2 4 6 10 8
J4
Time Delay Selector for Alarm Relay Output Alarm Relay Setpoint Dial (factory set at 500 ppm)
Alarm Relay Fuse
F2
GMA 1 AMP K1 4-20 mA 0-5 VDC 0-10 VDC 1-6 VDC Unlatched Latched AC pwr DC pwr
TB3 TB2 TB1
Analog Output/Signal Selector Alarm Relay Output Selector AC/DC Selector
NO COM NC Alarm
GND Analog Output
+
GMA 1 AMP F1
Power
Power Fuse
24 VAC/VDC Analog + Output
- +
Installation The RLD-134A is suitable for indoor use only. Mount the unit as close to the source of potential refrigerant leaks as possible. Some recommended considerations are as follows: 1. Mount approximately 3' (0.9m) from oor (refrigerants are heavier than air and will settle on the oor). 2. Mount at least 5' (1.5m) from exhaust fans (direct airow across sensing element will affect accuracy). 3. If used in refrigeration pits, mount 1' (0.3m) above oor. Operation To test operation, place a small amount of alcohol below the sensing element. The analog output signal should increase. Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes. Not recommended for MRI rooms.
MODEL RLD-134A DESCRIPTION Refrigerant leak detector
RELATED PRODUCTS 170-0832 Replacement sensing element NIOSHSCBA-WC Self-contained breathing apparatus kit with SCBA-WALCASE wall case ACCESSORIES PAGE 691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 UCK-1 Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) 436
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
405

INFRARED REFRIGERANT GAS DETECTOR IR-F9 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Honeywell Analytics IR-F9 Series refrigerant detector is a highly accurate, affordable, micro-processor based infrared sensor that will provide years of reliable service. A true diffusion sensor, the IR-F9 Series does not require either the use of pumps or lters and allows all points of detection to be monitored perpetually. The versatile sensor is housed in a high mass metal bench structure that enables thermal stability and freedom from the effects of vibration.
NEW!
IR-F9 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
7.71" 1"
4.52"
FEATURES
Available in seven different refrigerants R134a, R22, R404a, R407a, R410a, R422a, R507a Visual indication Infrared technology 4-20 mA output Easy calibration with cal kit No pump Continual monitoring Optional RS-485 Modbus communication
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Accuracy Repeatability Measurement Range 24 VDC regulated 1.2A maximum 4-20 mA
500 3% full scale 1% full scale 0-1000 ppm standard (0-500 ppm to 0 to 3000 ppm) Sensing Technology Dual infrared sensor Calibration Interval Every 6 months For testing and verication of Visual Indication 4-20 mA loop, calibration and operation Response Time 10 seconds with full scale calibration gas @ 0.75 liters/ minimum ow rate Gases Detected R134a, R22, R404a, R407a, R410a, R422d, R507a Operating Humidity 0% to 99% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature -20 to 140F (-28 to 60C) NEMA 4 berglass reinforced Enclosure Rating polyester Dimensions 9.59"H x 7.71"W x 4.52"D (24.4 x 19.6 x 11.5 cm) Weight 4.4 lb (2.0 kg) 1 year Warranty
5.01" Top View
9.59" 3.68"
9.19"
406
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
Side View
March 2014

INFRARED REFRIGERANT GAS DETECTOR IR-F9 SERIES
WIRING
White connects to signal input of monitoring equipment Red connects to 24 VDC power supply positive side Black connects to 24 VDC ground side Bare wire wrap connects to case ground at monitoring equipment (earth ground)
JP1
Output (white) +24 VDC (red)

SIG +24 GND SHLD
DC ground (black) Shield (bare)
TEST + TEST -
7
Installation The IR-F9 can only report what it is seeing at the moment and it is very important the sensor be located where leaks are most likely to occur. CFC/HCFC/HFC vapor is heavier than ambient air, so in a room with no air movement it will tend to settle. For quickest detection, mount the sensor about one to two feet from the oor, close to the potential leak source. Be aware the indicated concentration may not be representative of personnel exposure and easy access for the required calibration and maintenance could be compromised. Some recommended considerations are as follows: 1. Must be easily accessible for calibration and maintenance. 2. Always mount the sensor vertically. 3. Mount the sensor close to the potential leak source for fastest possible leak detection. 4. Protect sensor from water, excessive humidity, and wash-down. 5. Always make a drip loop in the conduit. 6. Never mount sensor on a vibrating surface. Operation The IR-F9 has two internal pushbutton(s), and two adjustment pots that are utilized for navigation of test functions, calibrations, and operating modes. In addition, a pair of test points is also provided that assist in the connection to standard meter leads for use in the upcoming calibration and diagnostic procedures. *NOTE: The pushbutton(s) must be pressed the correct number of times and at the correct rate.
MODEL IR-F9-R134A IR-F9-R22 IR-F9-R404A IR-F9-R407A IR-F9-R410A IR-F9-R422D IR-F9-R507A DRM RP NIOSHSCBA-WC UCK-1 420MDBS Calibration Gases DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 DESCRIPTION Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R134a Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R22 Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R404a Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R407a Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R410a Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R422d Stand-alone infrared refrigerant detector for R507a RELATED PRODUCTS Dual relay module Relay plug-in module with setpoint adjustment (uses 4-20 mA terminals) Self-contained breathing apparatus kit with SCBA-WALCASE wall case Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) Interface module 4 to 20 mA to RS485 with Phoenix connector CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page)
ACCESSORIES PAGE Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
407

OXYGEN SENSOR OS-1
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model OS-1 is a dependable, economical oxygen sensor designed to monitor oxygen levels in ambient air. It has a jumper-selectable analog output for interfacing with a BAS controller and an SPDT relay output to activate an alarm in the event of oxygen depletion due to a refrigerant leak. The units are powered by 24 VAC/VDC and are housed in a rugged polystyrene enclosure for dust and moisture protection. The Model OS-1 is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained.
NEW!
24VAC/VDC power 0% to 25% range Rugged polystyrene enclosure
7
FEATURES
4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, or 0-10 VDC output, jumperselectable SPDT alarm relay
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
2.95 (7.5)
in (cm)
5.11 (13.0)
Supply Voltage Signal Output Accuracy Measurement Range Sensing Technology Life Expectancy
5.11 (13.0)
1.13 (2.9) 1.6 (4.1)
OS-1
24 VAC @ 6 VA or 24 VDC @ 250 mA (jumper selectable) 4-20 mA (300 max) 0-5 VDC (20 k min) 0-10 VDC (20 k min) 1% 0% to 25% oxygen Galvanic cell Approximately ve years @ 68F (20C) in ambient air Response Time Approximately 12 seconds Relay Type SPDT 24 VAC/VDC @ 0.5A, factory set @ 19.5% Operating Humidity 10% to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 40 to 104F (5 to 40C) Weight 1.25 lb (0.57 kg) Warranty 1 year
408
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

OXYGEN SENSOR OS-1
WIRING
OFF OPR
Setpoint Adjust
Setpoint Adjust Pot

R29 R8 Offset Span 4-20 MA 0-5 VDC 0-10 VDC Analog Out F1 J1 DC AC R6
Analog Output Select Jumper Alarm Fuse

F2
J2
Power Select Jumper
Power Fuse
Note: AC power must be oating and may not be grounded. If AC power is grounded a separate transformer is required for each OS-1.
COM
NO
SENS-
SENS+
OUT+
NC
PWR+
PWR-
OUT-
Alarm
(factory wired)
Analog
INSTALLATION
The OS-1 is suitable for indoor use only. Mount the unit as close to the source of potential refrigerant leaks as possible. Some recommended considerations are as follows: 1. Mount the unit with the sensor pointing down. 2. Mount the unit in a location with low vibration. Strong vibration may cause a change in the condition of the internal membrane. 3. The sensor should be mounted 3' to 5' (0.9 to 1.5m) from the oor in equipment rooms or 1' (0.3m) above the oor in refrigeration pits. 4. The OS-1 should cover about 1000-1500 square feet with adequate air movement. 5. Mount at least 5' (1.5m) from the exhaust fan. 6. Verify operation yearly. Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes. Not recommended for MRI rooms.
MODEL OS-1 DESCRIPTION Oxygen sensor, 0% to 25% range
GAS-O2-18 UCK-1 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
RELATED PRODUCTS 18% oxygen (O2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants)
PAGE 436
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
409

SINGLE ZONE AMMONIA GAS MONITOR AGM-SZ
DESCRIPTION
The Bacharach Model AGM-SZ Single Zone Ammonia Gas Monitor is designed for single point monitoring of ammonia gas with up to 50 ft (15.2 m) distance from measuring point to monitor. The unit features a digital display for local indication of current gas levels and peak value. Three adjustable alarm levels with relay output designate leak, spill, and evacuation concentrations. Gas alarms and system fault conditions are indicated by visual and audible alarms. The Model AGM-SZ provides a system fault relay output and a 4 to 20 mA output for integration with remote monitoring equipment or building management systems. The AGM-SZ Single Zone Ammonia Gas Monitor is designed to be used as part of a control system that helps to prevent the formation of a hazardous environment when properly installed and maintained.
NEW!
C
US
INSTALLATION
FEATURES
Three alarm levels with SPDT alarm contacts Self diagnostics verify operation LED status indication System fault alarm 200 data point logging 4-20 mA output signal 50-foot sampling tube and end lter included Audible and visual alarm indication Local indication of current and peak gas levels Alarm-silence button NEMA 1
WIRING
RELAY 1 LEAK
NO COM NC
RELAY 2 SPILL
NO COM NC
RELAY 3 EVACUATE
NO COM NC
RELAY 4 FAULT
NO COM NC
GND
LINE1
NEUTRAL
LINE2
SPECIFICATIONS
100 to 240 VAC @ 21 VA, 50/60 Hz 3 alarm relays, 1 fault relay, 240 VAC, 3A, and 4-20 mA 500 (non-isolated) Accuracy 10 ppm from 25 to 100 ppm or 10% reading from 100 to 10,000 ppm Sensitivity 1 ppm Measurement Range 25-10,000 ppm Gases Detected Ammonia (NH3, R-717) Sensing Technology Single-pass, infrared non-dispersive Coverage Up to 50 ft (15m) from measuring point to monitor 15 minutes Warm Up Time Response Time 9 to 30 seconds depending on sample tube length 5% to 90% RH non-condensing Operating Humidity Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Dimensions 7.4"H x 15"L x 3.3"D (18.8 x 38.1 x 8.4 cm) Weight 10.0 lb (4.5 kg) UL le E212266, CSA, CE Approvals Warranty 2 years Supply Voltage Signal Output
FUSE
STROBE /HORN
MODEL AGM-SZ DESCRIPTION Single zone ammonia gas monitor
RELATED PRODUCTS Replacement sample tubing Replacement exhaust/purge tubing NIOSHSCBA-WC Self-contained breathing apparatus kit with SCBAWALCASE wall case UCK-2 Universal calibration kit for corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3) 3015-3411 Line end lters (4) Calibration Gases CO, CO2, NO2, O2, CH4, NH3, N2, H2S, H2, and Refrigerants (See calibration page) 304-2742 304-2743
410
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS SM-501 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Air Products & Controls SM-501 Series Duct Smoke Detectors provide early detection of smoke and combustion products present in air moving through HVAC ducts. Air sampling is accomplished by intake sampling tubes, which are ordered separately. A standard length exhaust tube is provided with each detector. The SM-501 Series is designed to operate in duct widths from 6" (15 cm) to 10.0' (3.05m) with an air velocity from 500-4000 fpm (2.5-20.3 mps). Complete systems may be shut down in the event of smoke detection.
OPERATION
The SM-501 Series will operate on any one of four input voltages: 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC. It uses either photoelectric or ionization smoke detector heads. Each detector contains two alarm contacts, which transfer in the event of smoke, and one trouble contact, which supervises the presence of input power and removal of the detector head. A manual test/reset switch and visual indicators of pilot and alarm are provided on the front of the detector. Up to 30 SM-501 Series units may be wired to use a common test/reset function and to alarm simultaneously when a single unit alarms. If remote signal devices such as horns or strobes are used, up to 15 detectors may be interconnected to operate with a single alarm.
SM-501 FEATURES
Universal voltage: 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC Remote reset, alarm, and indication available Two alarm contacts and one trouble contact Interchangeable "plug-in" photoelectric or ionization heads Compatible with building automation and re alarm systems Dust ltering included in detector head Interconnect up to 15 detectors for common functions
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency Relay Contacts Air Velocity Radioactive Element (without accessories) 24 VAC @ 35 mA standby, 74 mA alarm 24 VDC @ 15 mA standby, 56 mA alarm 115 VAC @ 25 mA standby, 32 mA alarm 230 VAC @ 12 mA standby, 16 mA alarm 50/60 Hz Alarm 2-SPDT, 10A, 115 VAC, resistive Trouble 1-SPDT, 10A, 115 VAC, resistive 500-4000 fpm (2.5-20.3 mps) For SM-501-N only Americium 241, 0.9 Ci Wiring Terminations Solid or stranded, 12 to 22 AWG terminals 10% to 85% RH non-condensing
Operating Humidity Operating Temperature SM-501-N 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) SM-501-P 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Enclosure Rating 18-gauge steel back box, clear plastic cover (94V-0), Gray paint with clear cover, NEMA 1 Dimensions 9.13"H x 7.25"W x 2.25"D (23.19 x 18.42 x 5.72 cm) Weight 3.2 lb (1.45 kg) Approvals UL & cUL listed UL268A; UROX, UROX7, File #S2829 CSFM listed 3240-1004:108 MEA approved 73-92-E, Vol. 26 Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
411

DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS SM-501 SERIES
MOUNTING FIGURE 1. TYPICAL DUCT NSTALLATION

Mount the detector in an air duct using the provided template and four sheet metal screws. Detector must be mounted at least six duct widths from the fan or other sources of turbulence with airow from 500-4000 fpm (2.5-20.3 mps). The intake sampling tube has holes drilled the entire length of the tube and should extend the entire width of the duct. The holes must be facing into the airow (see Figure 1 to the right). The exhaust tube is a piece of steel piping approximately 7" long (17.8 cm). Intake Sampling Tube Lengths Model Duct Width STS-2.5 6.0" to 2.5' (0.15 to 0.7m) STS-5.0 2.5' to 5.0' (0.7 to 1.5m) STS-10.0 5.0' to 10.0' (1.5 to 3m) Installation 1. Cut the intake sampling tube to the desired length. 2. Firmly insert the stopper (provided with the detector) in the end of the intake sampling tube. 3. Follow instruction sheet provided with each detector.
Stopper
NEW!
Airflow Entire Width of Duct Intake Tube (order separately) Exhaust Tube (provided) Top of Detector
Note: Sampling tubes over 3' (0.9m) must be supported on the opposite side of the duct from the detector.
WIRING
INTERCONNECTING WIRING
Unit #1 16 Unit #2 16 17 18 Unit #3 16 17 18 Unit #1 20 21 Unit #2 20 21 Unit #3 20 21
Power Connections (see below)
Alarm Contacts 10A
Alarm Contacts 10A
Trouble Contacts* 10A
"Remote Accessories" (see MS Series)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
17 18
CAUTION: For terminals 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12, do not use looped wire under terminals. Break wire run to provide supervision of connections.
*Trouble contacts are shown in non-energized condition. Under normal operation contacts will be reversed.
All Relays Operating with Single Alarm (30 detectors max) Unit #1 16 Unit #2 16 17
+Red
N.O. Reset Switch Common Test/Reset (30 detectors max) Unit #1 16

+Red
Unit #3 16 17
+Red
Unit #2 16 17
+Red
Unit #3 16 17
+Red
24 VAC 50/60 Hz 0.2A max
24 VDC 0.1A max _ +
115 VAC 50/60 Hz 0.1A max

G N H
230 VAC 50/60 Hz 0.1A max

G H1 H2
17 18 H 19
-Black
17 18
+Red
18 H 19
-Black
18 H 19
-Black
18 H H 19
-Black -Black
18 H 19
-Black
19
Power Connections
All Relays Operating with Single Alarm; All Horns/Strobes Operating with Single Alarm (15 detectors max)
All Relays Operating with Single Alarm; Individual Horns/Strobes Operating on Alarmed Detector Only (30 detectors max)
Note: Use a common independent power supply for all interconnected detectors.
MODEL SM-501-N SM-501-P 55000-250APO 55000-350APO STS-10.0 STS-2.5 STS-5.0 TG-1000 WP-1 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 DESCRIPTION Ionization duct smoke detector for 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC Photoelectric duct smoke detector for 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC RELATED PRODUCTS Replacement ionization smoke detector head only Replacement photoelectric smoke detector head only Sampling tube for 5.0' to 10.0' (1.5 to 3m) duct widths Sampling tube for 6.0" to 2.5' (0.15 to 0.7m) duct widths Sampling tube for 2.5' to 5.0' (0.7 to 1.5m) duct widths Aerosol test gas NEMA 3R enclosure for SM Series duct smoke detector ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
412
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR SL-2000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Air Products & Controls SL-2000 Series Duct Smoke Detectors provide early detection of smoke and combustion products present in air moving through HVAC ducts. Air sampling is accomplished by intake sampling tubes, which are ordered separately. A standard length exhaust tube is provided with each detector. These devices are designed to prevent the recirculation of smoke in areas by the air handling systems, fans and blowers. Complete systems may be shut down in the event of smoke detection.
OPERATION
The SL-2000 Series is designed to operate in duct widths from 12.0" to 10.0' (30.5 cm to 3.05m) with an air velocity from 100-400 fpm (0.5-20.3 mps). The SL-2000 Series will operate on any one of four input voltages: 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC. It uses either a photoelectric or ionization smoke detector head. Each detector contains two Form C and one Form A contact, which transfer in the event of smoke. There is also one trouble contact, which supervises the presence of input power and the removal of the detector head. A manual test/reset switch and visual indicators of pilot and alarm are provided on the front of the detector. Up to 30 SL-2000 Series units may be wired to use a common test/ reset function and to alarm simultaneously when a single unit alarms.
FEATURES
Low-ow technology, 100-4000 fpm Universal voltage: 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC Two Form C and one Form A alarm contacts and one trouble contact Interchangeable "plug-in" photoelectric or ionization heads Compatible with building automation and re alarm systems Dust ltering included in detector head Interconnect up to 30 detectors for common functions Compatible with MS Series Remote Accessories Cover removal trouble indication Magnet test capability Front or rear loading sampling tubes Optional weatherproof enclosure
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency Relay Contacts (without accessories) 24 VAC @ 55 mA standby, 190 mA alarm 24 VDC @ 15 mA standby, 70 mA alarm 115 VAC @ 16 mA standby, 32 mA alarm 230 VAC @ 10 mA standby, 20 mA alarm 50/60 Hz Alarm (2) SPDT, 10A, 115 VAC, resistive Alarm (1) SPST-NO, 2A, 115 VAC, resistive Trouble (1) SPDT, 10A, 115 VAC, resistive 100-4000 fpm (0.5-20.3 mps) Air Velocity Radioactive Element Americium 241, 0.9 Ci 10% to 85% RH non-condensing Operating Humidity Operating Temperature SL-2000-N 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) SL-2000-P Enclosure Rating Gray plastic back box, clear plastic cover, NEMA 1 Dimensions 4.5"H x 13.5"L x 2.25"D (11.4 x 34.3 x 5.7 cm) UL File S2829 CSFM 3240-1004:105 Approvals MEA 73-92-E, Vol. 27 Weight 3.5 lb (1.6 kg) Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
413

DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR SL-2000 SERIES
MOUNTING FIGURE 1. TYPICAL DUCT INSTALLATION

Mount the detector in an air duct using the provided template and sheet metal screws. Detector should be mounted at least six duct widths from the fan or other sources of turbulence with airow from 100-4000 fpm (0.5-20.3 mps). The intake sampling tube has holes drilled the entire length of the tube and should extend the entire width of the duct, with the end opposite the detector capped. The holes must be facing into the airow (see Figure 1 to the right). The exhaust tube is a piece of steel piping approximately 7" long (17.8 cm). Intake Sampling Tube Lengths Model Duct Width STN-2.5 1.0' to 2.5' (0.3 to 0.7m) 2.5' to 5.0' (0.7 to 1.5m) STN-5.0 5.0' to 10.0' (1.5 to 3m) STN-10.0
NEW!
Red Stopper Airflow
Entire Width of Duct
Intake Tube (order separately)
Exhaust Tube (provided)
Important For the correct installation, testing and maintenance of a duct smoke detector, follow the instructions provided with the detector and refer to your locally enforced re, mechanical, and/or building codes. Please also review NFPA 72 (National Fire Alarm Code) and NFPA 90A (Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems). Your local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) should also be consulted.
Top of Detector
Note: Sampling tubes over 3' (0.9m) must be supported on the opposite side of the duct from the detector.
WIRING INTERCONNECTING WIRING

RESET INPUT (+) PILOT OUT 10A *TROUBLE CONTACTS N.C. N.O. C 4 5 6 10A ALARM CONTACT N.C. N.O. C 7 8 POWER INPUT 24 VAC/VDC (- ) (+) POWER INPUT 220/240 VAC 120 VAC 220 115 H
Detector #1 12 13 14 19 20 +RED H BLK
Detector #2 Detector #30 12 13 14 19 20 +RED H BLK 19 20 12 13 14 +RED H BLK
Detector #1 12 13 14 19 20 +RED H BLK
Detector #2 Detector #10 12 13 14 19 20 +RED H BLK 19 20 12 13 14 +RED H BLK
(-) COMM
10
GROUND G
All alarm relays operate with single alarm

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Individual horn/strobe operate on alarmed detector only 30 detectors max
All alarm relays operate with single alarm All horns/strobes operate with single alarm 10 detectors max
N.O. CONNECTION
N.O. C 2A ALARM CONTACT
C N.C. N.O. 10A ALARM CONTACT
(-) (+) AUX POWER OUT
Detector #1 12 20
Detector #2 Detector #30 12 20 12 20
Detector #1 1 20 Normally open reset switch
Detector #2 Detector #30 1 20 Common test/reset 30 detectors max 1 20
INTERCONNECT ALARM LINK
* Trouble contacts are shown in non-energized condition. Under normal operation contacts will be reversed.
All alarm relays operate with single alarm 30 detectors max
CAUTION: For terminals (7, 8, 18), (6, 16, 17), and (13, 14) do not use looped wire under terminals. Break wire run to provide supervision of connections.
NOTE: When using detector interconnection functions, wire all detectors to a common power source. Use of multiple power sources for interconnected detectors may cause damage to the detectors and/or may prevent the detectors from functioning properly.
MODEL SL-2000-N SL-2000-P DESCRIPTION Ionization duct smoke detector for 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC Photoelectric duct smoke detector for 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 55000-250APO 55000-350APO STN-10.0 STN-2.5 STN-5.0 TG-1000 WP-2000
RELATED PRODUCTS Replacement ionization smoke detector head only Replacement photoelectric smoke detector head only Sampling tube for 5.0' to 10.0' (1.5 to 3m) duct widths Sampling tube for 1.0' to 2.5' (0.3 to 0.7m) duct widths Sampling tube for 2.5' to 5.0' (0.7 to 1.5m) duct widths Aerosol test gas NEMA type 3R enclosure 11.06"H x 18.13"W x 4.38"D (28.1 x 46.0 x 11.2 cm)
414
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

REMOTE ACCESSORIES FOR SM-501 AND SL-2000 MS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Air Products & Controls MS Series remote accessories are used with the SM-501, SL-2000, or HS-100 Series duct smoke detectors to provide audible and visual indication as well as remote test/reset functions. All devices have a brushed stainless steel face plate. All devices are also designed to be mounted on a single- or double-gang box.
ALARM PILOT PILOT TEST/RESET TEST/RESET
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
MS-RA
MS-RA/P
ALARM PILOT
MS-RA/R
MS-RA/P/R
PILOT ALARM
ALARM
FEATURES
Remote indication for SM-501, SL-2000, and HS-100 smoke detectors Available with alarm and pilot LEDs and alarm horn Available with momentary push button or maintained key-operated test/reset switch Mounts to standard single- or double-gang box
TEST/RESET
TEST/RESET
MS-KA/R
MS-KA/P/R
MS-RH
ALARM PILOT
MS-RH/P/A
TEST/RESET
MS-RH/KA/P/R
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Current Alarm LEDs Pilot LEDs Horn Alarm Auditory Levels [Db] Reset Wiring Terminations LEDs/Horn Switches Dimensions Single-gang Double-gang Weight Approvals Warranty 15 mA @ 24 VDC from detector 15 mA @ 24 VDC from detector 20 mA @ 24 VDC from detector 78 db@10' (3.0m) Normally open 6" (15.2cm)/24 AWG pigtails 6" (15.2cm)/22 AWG pigtails 2.75"W x 4.5"H (6.9 x 11.4 cm) 4.5"W x 4.5"H (11.4 x 11.4 cm) 0.5 lb (0.22 kg) maximum UL File #S7425 CSFM 73001004:107 MEA 73-92-E, Vol. 25 1 year
WIRING
(red)
(black)
(black)
Red Alarm LED
SM-501 Terminal #19 HS-100 Terminal #12 SL-2000 Terminal #19 SM-501 Terminal #17 HS-100 Terminal #13 SL-2000 Terminal #12 SM-501 Terminal #19 HS-100 Terminal #11 SL-2000 Terminal #19 SM-501 Terminal #21 HS-100 Terminal #14 SL-2000 Terminal #2 SM-501 Terminal #21 HS-100 Terminal #15 SL-2000 Terminal #1 SM-501 Terminal #20 HS-100 Terminal #7 SL-2000 Terminal #20
Horn
(red)
(black)
(red)
Green Pilot LED
Test/Reset Switch
Note: If duct smoke detectors are interconnected for common functions, refer to detector installation guide for proper connection of remote alarm functions.
Remote Accessory Wiring for SM-501, HS-100, and SL-2000 Smoke Detectors
MODEL MS-KA/R MS-KA/P/R MS-RA MS-RA/P MS-RA/P/R MS-RA/R MS-RH MS-RH/KA-P/A/T MS-RH/KA/P/R MS-RH/P/A DESCRIPTION Remote red alarm LED and key-operated test/reset switch Remote red alarm LED, green pilot LED, and key-operated test/reset switch Remote red alarm LED Remote red alarm LED and green pilot LED Remote red alarm LED, green pilot LED, and push button test/reset switch Remote red alarm LED and push button test/reset switch Remote alarm horn Remote duct smoke det w/alarm/horn/LED/pilot/fault-trouble/key operated test/reset Remote alarm horn, red alarm LED, green pilot LED, and key-operated test/reset switch Remote alarm horn, red alarm LED, and green pilot LED
Ordering Note: For a complete selection of accessories please see the Remote accessories page for the SM-501 smoke detectors. Smoke Dectctors require duct sampling tubes STN-2.5, STN-5.0 or STN-10.0.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
415

PHOTOELECTRIC DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR D4120
DESCRIPTION
The InnovairFlex D4120 4-wire photoelectric duct smoke detector features a pivoting housing that ts both square and rectangular footprints and mounts to round or rectangular ductwork. This unit senses smoke in the most challenging conditions, operating in airow speeds of 100 to 4,000 feet per minute, temperatures of -4F to 158F, and a humidity range of 0 to 95 percent (non-condensing). A plug-in sensor head offers improved false alarm immunity and simple installation, testing, and maintenance. An improved cover design isolates the sensor head from the low-ow feature for simple maintenance.
NEW!
C
FM
APPROVED
US
D4120
FEATURES
Photoelectric, integrated low-ow technology NEMA 4 models for outdoor mounting Versatile mounting options: square or rectangular conguration Plug-in sensor offers superb false alarm immunity and the latest sensor technology 2:1 sensor-to-power capability allows one power board to monitor both supply and return smoke sensors Patented sampling tube installs from front or back of the detector with no tools required Increased wiring space with a newly added 3/4-inch conduit knockout One easy-access Test/Reset button and improved LED status Patented interconnect feature for multi-fan shutdown New high contrast terminal designations Built-in short circuit protection from operator wiring errors Field selectable settings for conguring the detector Two DPDT Form-C relay contacts 24 VAC/DC or 120VAC Backward compatibility
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency Alarm Contacts Alarm (SPST) Aux (DPDT) (without accesories) 24 VAC @ 65 mA (standby & alarm) 20-29 VDC@21 mA (standby & alarm) 120 VAC @ 20 mA (standby & alarm) 50/60 Hz Air Velocity Warm Up Time Reset Time minimum 100 to 4000 ft/min (0.5 to 20.32 m/ sec) 35 seconds maximum Using RTS45:1 0.03 to 0.3 seconds powering down: 0.6 seconds maximum
2.0A @ 30 VDC (resistive) 10A @ 250 VAC (resistive), 1/2 HP @ 240 VAC, 1/4 HP @ 120 VAC Supervisory (SPDT) 2.0A @ 30 VDC (resistive) 2.0A @ 125 VAC (resistive) Alarm Response Time 15 seconds Reset Voltages 3.0 VDC minimum, 2.0 VAC minimum, 10 VAC minimum, 3.0 VDC minimum 2.0 VAC minimum 10 VAC
Enclosure Rating D4120 NEMA 1 D4120W NEMA 4 Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C) Approvals UL le S911, MEA, FM, CSFM Weight D4120 3.2 lb (1.45 kg) D4120W 3.3 lb (1.5 kg) Warranty 3 years
416
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

PHOTOELECTRIC DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR D4120
WIRING
Power Inputs (Note 1)
24VAC/DC
Power Inputs (Note 1)

24V
120 VAC
120 VAC
10
10
OR
OR
Auxiliary Contacts for Fan Shutdown, etc. (Note 2)

N.C. 16 AUX A C. 6 N.O. 17 N.C. 8 AUX B C. 18 N.O. 7
Auxiliary Contacts for Fan Shutdown, etc. (Note 2)

AUX A N.C. 16 C. 6 N.O. 17 N.C. 8 AUX B C. 18 N.O. 7
Supervisory Contacts
SUP C.
Supervisory Contacts
SUP C.
(Note 3)
SUP N.O.
(Note 3)
EOL Resistor Specified by Panel Manufacturer
SUP N.O.
UL/FM Listed 4-wire Control Panel
14
14
+
Alarm Initiation Loop Alarm Initiation Contacts (Note 4)
4
Alarm C.
Alarm N.O.
Alarm Initiation Contacts (Note 4)
Alarm C.
Alarm N.O.
First Detector in the Loop
Last Detector in the Loop
NOTE 1: 24V Power Inputs accept a nonpolarized 24VDC or 24VAC 50-60Hz. 120VAC Power Inputs accept only 120VAC 50-60Hz. Connect power source to appropriate terminals of each detector. See specications for additional power supply information. NOTE 2: Auxiliary contacts shown in standby position. Contacts switch during alarm as indicated by arrows. Auxiliary contacts are not to be used for connection to the control panel. See specications for contact ratings. NOTE 3: Supervisory contacts shown in standby position. Open contacts indicate a trouble condition in the panel. See specications for contact ratings. NOTE 4: Alarm Initiation contacts shown in standby position. Closed contacts indicate an alarm condition to the panel. See specications for contact ratings. *Please refer to the corresponding installation manual for accessory wiring diagrams.
MODEL D4120 D4120W* DESCRIPTION 4-wire photoelectric low-ow duct smoke detector Watertight 4-wire photoelectric low-ow duct smoke detector
*You must order two D4120W units for installations requiring two watertight detectors.
D4120W 691-K0A AOS APA151 D4P120 D4S DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 DST1 DST1.5 DST10 DST3 DST5 MHR MHW RA100Z RTS151 RTS151KEY RTS2
D4120
D4S
D4P120
2D51
ACCESSORIES PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Mini-alert add-on strobe, clear Remote annunciator with piezo alarm Power board component only, 24 VAC/VDC, 120 VAC Remote or replacement sensor (not watertight) Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 D4120 metal duct sampling tube, 1 ft (0.3m) D4120 metal duct sampling tube, 1.5 ft (0.45 m) D4120 metal duct sampling tube, 10 ft (3.0m) D4120 metal duct sampling tube, 3.0 ft (0.91m) D4120 metal duct sampling tube, 5 ft (1.5m) Mini Horn, Red Mini Horn, White Remote annunciator, red alarm LED Magnetic remote test station, red alarm LED Key-activated remote test/reset station with bi-color (green/red) power/alarm LED Key-activated remote test/reset station with sounder and power, trouble, and alarm LEDs
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
417

D4120 ACCESSORIES D4120 SERIES REMOTE ACCESSORIES
DESCRIPTION
System Sensor provides exibility with a variety of accessories for notication and test purposes. The smoke detector accessories add functionality to the detection system by allowing quick eye level inspections and audible/visual notication options. All System Sensor accessories are UL listed. APA151 The APA151 piezo annunciator provides an audible alarm signal and LED for alarm and status indication. The unit is designed for applications without a system control panel to comply with NFPA 90 A. MHR/MHW The MHR and MHW mini horns feature temporal or continuous tones at high or low volume settings. Designed for small or tight areas, the unit mounts to a single gang back box. RA100Z The RA100Z remote annunciators are designed for both conventional and intelligent applications. A red LED provides visual indication of an alarm condition. RTS151/RTS151KEY The RTS151 and RTS151KEY remote test stations are automatic re detector accessories designed to test duct smoke detectors from a convenient location. The RTS151 features a multi-colored LED that alternates between steady green and red for four-wire detectors and illuminates red to indicate alarm when used with two-wire detectors. RTS2/RTS2-AOS The RTS2 and RTS2-AOS multi-signaling accessories are designed to work with four-wire conventional smoke detectors. The units feature a key switch that can be used to select one of two connected sensors to be tested, reset, or both by a push button switch.
NEW!
SPECIFICATIONS
Model RA100Z APA151 RTS151 Standby mA 0 mA 12.5 mA maximum 12 mA maximum Trouble mA 16 mA Alarm mA 10 mA maximum 30 mA maximum 7.5 mA maximum 7.5 mA maximum 40 mA maximum 30 mA maximum 25 mA maximum
RTS151KEY 12 mA maximum RTS2 MHR/MHW AOS 8 mA 0 mA 0 mA
418
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

D4120 ACCESSORIES D4120 SERIES REMOTE ACCESSORIES
WIRING
APA151
10
RTS151/RTS151KEY 10 9 19
Field Installed Jumper (Red LED) Alarm Aux. Out +
D4120 7 18 8 17 6 16 14 3 13 5 4
Field Installed Jumpers SUP, NO SUP, C
D4120
9 19 7
Alarm
Field Installed Jumper
15
(+)
Aux. Out +
18 8 17 6 16 14 3 13 5 4
Aux. Out
20 ()
Common
20 Aux. Out 1 12
2 4 1 5 3
20 Aux. Out 1 12 15 Alarm 11 R Test 2 +

R Reset ACC + ACC
D4120 Duct Detector

SUP, NO SUP, C
MHR/MHW Audible Alert
(Red LED) Alarm
15 Alarm 11 R Test 2 R Reset + ACC + ACC
D4120 to MHR/MHW
RTS2/RTS2-AOS D4120
Aux. Out + Aux. Out
+ ACC + ACC +
(Green LED) Power
(Green LED) Power
NOTE: Wiring diagram shown is for D4120 4-wire duct smoke detector system equipped without a control panel. NOTE: A trouble condition is indicated when the green LED is not illuminated.
Aux. Out + Aux. Out ACC ACC +
For RTS151KEY Only Without a Control Panel
D4120 to APA151
D4120 to RTS2/RTS2-AOS
MODEL AOS MHW RA100Z RTS151 RTS151KEY RTS2 APA151 MHR DESCRIPTION Mini-alert add-on strobe, clear Mini Horn, White Remote annunciator, red alarm LED Magnetic remote test station, red alarm LED Key-activated remote test/reset station with bi-color (green/red) power/alarm LED Key-activated remote test/reset station with sounder and power, trouble, and alarm LEDs Remote annunciator with piezo alarm Mini Horn, Red
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
419

PLENUM SMOKE DETECTOR HS-100 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Air Products & Controls HS-100 Series Plenum Smoke Detectors provide early detection of smoke and combustion products present in air moving through HVAC plenum return systems in commercial rooftop package unit applications. The detectors are designed to prevent the recirculation of smoke in areas by the air handling system's fans and blowers.
FEATURES
Universal voltage: 24 VAC, 24 VDC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC Visual indication of power and alarm status Two alarm contacts and one trouble contact Interchangeable "plug-in" photoelectric or ionization heads Compatible with building automation and re alarm systems Dust ltering included in detector head Interconnect up to 30 detectors for common function
NEW!
HS-100 WIRING
DRY CONTACT OUTPUTS ALARM
15A @ 125VAC 10A @ 277VAC 7A @ 30VDC HP @ 125/250VAC (N.C.) HP @ 125/250VAC (N.O.)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage
0-2000 fpm (0-10.2 mps) 0-3000 fpm (0-15.2 mps) For HS-100-N only Americium 241, 0.9 Ci Relay Output Alarm 1-SPDT, 10A, 115 VAC, resistive; 1-SPST-NO, 2A Trouble 1-SPST-NC, 10A, 115 VAC, resistive Wiring Terminations Solid or stranded, 12 to 22 AWG terminals Operating Humidity 0% to 85% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature HS-100-N 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) HS-100-P 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Enclosure Rating White plastic, NEMA 1 Dimensions 6" Dia. x 4.0"H (15.2 x 10.2 cm) Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Approvals UL File #S2829 CSFM listed 32401004:118 MEA approved 73-92-E, Vol. 26 Warranty 1 year
Frequency Air Velocity HS-100-N HS-100-P Radioactive Element
24 VAC: @ 35 mA standby, 74 mA alarm; 24 VDC:@ 15 mA standby, 56 mA alarm; 115 VAC: @ 25 mA standby, 32 mA alarm; 230 VAC @ 12 mA standby, 16 mA alarm 50/60 Hz
FACP * Trouble contacts shown in normal unit energized state
ALM - COM
ALM - N.C.
ALM - N.O.
*
TRB - COM TRB - N.C. 16 17 18 ALM - COM 18 ALM - COM 19 ALM - N.O. 19 ALM - N.O.
(+) ()
10
15A @ 125VAC 10A @ 277VAC 7A @ 30VDC 1.0A @ 30VDC HP @ 125/250VAC
HIGH VOLTAGE
GN D Ground to Back Box
GN D Ground to Back Box
LOW VOLTAGE
24V 5 0/N 4 AC AC
24V 5 0/N 4
N H
1 Neutral 2 115V
H2
1 Neutral 2
H1
115VAC 50/60 HZ 0.1A MAX.
230VAC 50/60 HZ 0.1A MAX.
3 230V
24VAC 50/60 HZ 0.2A MAX.
24VDC 0.1A MAX.
CAUTION : Do not use looped wire under terminals. Break wire run to provide for proper supervision of connections.
MODEL HS-100-N HS-100-P DESCRIPTION Plenum ionization smoke detector Plenum photoelectric smoke detector
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
420
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

PENDANT SMOKE DETECTOR 2151 AND B114 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The System Sensor 2151 pendant smoke detector and B114 bases provide early detection of smoke and combustion products present in air moving through HVAC plenum return systems in commercial rooftop package unit applications. The detectors are designed to prevent the recirculation of smoke in areas by the air handling system's fans and blowers.The 2151 must be mounted to B114 base for either 120 VAC or 24 VAC/VDC supply voltages.
FEATURES
24 VAC, 24 VDC or 115 VAC (model specic) Visual indication of power and alarm status One alarm contact, Supervisory contact and Auxillary contact Compatible with building automation and re alarm systems Dust ltering included in detector head
2151
B114LP
C
FM
APPROVED
US
WIRING
24VDC/24VAC Terminals Supervisory Contacts
7
Base
6
Note: 120VAC model B114LP Transformer mounted below Housing, non-polarity, reversal, any color wire
8 9
STRIP GAUGE 1
2 3
Spring
4 5
Alarm Contacts
10 11
Tamper Resistant Tab

12 13 14
Auxillary Contacts
APA151 (0ptional)
+ RA1002 (0ptional)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage B114LP B114LPBT Alarm Relay Output Supervisory/Alarm Auxillary Air Velocity Wiring Terminations 120 VAC, Non-polarity reversal (any color wires) 24 VAC @ 0.8 VA; 24 VDC @ 35 mA; non-polarity reversal (any color wires) 2.0 A @ 30 VAC/VDC (Form A) 2.0 A @ 30 VAC/VDC; 1.0 A @ 120 VAC (Form C) 0-3000 fpm (0-15.2 mps) Solid or stranded, 12 to 22 AWG terminals 10% to 93% RH non-condensing Operating Humidity Operating Temperature 32 to 120F (0 to 49C) Enclosure Rating NEMA 1 Dimensions 4" Dia. x 1.66"H (10.2 x4.2 cm) 2151 6.2" Dia. x 2.2"H (15.5 x 5.6 cm) B114LP B114LPBT 6.2" Dia. x 0.95"H (15.5 x 2.4 cm) Approvals UL Listed File S911 Weight 2151 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) B114LP 0.8 lb (0.4 Kg) B114LPBT 0.6 lb (0.27 Kg) Warranty 1 year
MODEL 2151 B114LP B114LPBT 691-K0A RA100Z APA151 DESCRIPTION Pendent photoelectric smoke detector (body only) Base for 2151, 24 VAC/VDC Base for 2151, 24 VAC/VDC RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Remote annunciator, red alarm LED 415 Remote annunciator with piezo alarm 415
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
421

CONDUCTIVITY TRANSMITTER 50000 CONDUCTIVITY SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Burkert transmitter 50000 series is a compact transmitter designed for measuring the conductivity of uids. The transmitter consists of a sensor, enclosure with cover, and an optional and removeable display. The sensor comprises a cell with two electrodes and a platinum 1000 ohm temperature probe. The sensor itself is available with three different cell constants; C = 0.01, 0.1, and 1.0. The C = 1.0 constant uses graphit electyrode, while the other two incorporate stainless steel. The conductivity transmitter can operate independant of the display but the display is required for programming the transmitter. The 50000 Series is available with three fully programmable outputs (two transistor and one 4-20 mA analog output). The 50000 "Neutrino" Series, a less featured conductivity transmitter, has only one 4-20 mA analog output and is not available with LCD display.
NEW!
559638 559168 560693 adaptor with a G 1-1/2" external threaded sensor connection must be used. The transmitter can be installed in any position. In order to get reliable measurement air bubbles must be avoided. Please ensure that the mounting location provides a continuous and complete immersion of the sensor in the ow stream. Consult the installation manual for complete installation instructions.
constant C=0.01 or C=0.1 or graphite for cell constant C=1.0 Wiring Terminations Single analog output: 1x 5-pin M12 male xed connector 0 to 87 PSI (0 to 6 bar) Fluid Pressure Limit Maximum Pressure 58 psi (4 bar) Media Temperature Range PVC nut connection: 32 to 122F (0 to +50C) 85%, without condensation Operating Humidity Operating Temperature Transmitter: 14 to 140F (-10 to +60C); Probe 32 to 140F (0 to +60C) Standard: IP65 and IP67 with M12 Enclosure Rating cable plug mounted and cover tightened Neutrino: also includes NEMA 4X and NEMA 6P Dimensions 9.6"H x 2.6"W x 3.8" D Standard (24.4 x 6.5 x 9.7 cm) 7.4"H x 2.4"W x 3.4"D Neutrino (18.7 x 6.0 x 8.8 cm) UL File E237737, CSA Approvals Weight 0.88 lb (0.4 kg) complete unit Standard 0.52 lb (0.24 kg) complete unit Neutrino 1 year Warranty
FEATURES Programmable outputs: two transistor and single or dual analog 4-20 mA Removable backlighted display Universal process connection Three cell constants for covering a wide measuring range C = 0.01, 0.1 and 1.0 standard Diagnostic functions Additional material contruction: PVC or PVDF
Installation: The 50000 Series conductivity transmitters can
be installed into any adaptor with G 1-1/2" external threaded sensor connection by just xing the main nut. Select and install the required SO22 adaptor (see related products) onto the pipe according to specic requirements of the sensor and material (temperature and pressure). For mounting on a tank or direct mounting on a pipe (DN100 and DN110), an
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current 14-36 VDC reversed polarity protection With Sensor: 1 A (with transistor loads) analog output: 25 mA (at 14 VDC without transistor loads, with current loop)
Signal Output Standard Switch: Transistor Current: 4-20 mA Current: 4-20 mA Neutrino Maximum Output Impedance mA 610 at 24 V DC Conductivity: 3% of measured value Accuracy Temperature 1.8F (1C) 1 nS/cm Resolution Measurement Range Conductivity: 0.05 S/cm to 10 mS/ cm Temperature: -40 to 266F (-40 to +130C) Grey dot matrix 128x64 with backlighting Display 150 ms (10 to 90%) Response Time Materials Of Construction Housing / cover: Stainless steel 1.4561, PPS / PC Seals / Screws EPDM / Stainless steel Fixed connector mounting plate: Stainless steel Fixed connector: Brass nickel plated Display / navigation key: PC / PBT Nut: PVC or PVDF Wetted part materials Conductivity sensor: PVDF, stainless steel 1.4571 (316Ti) Electrode: Stainless steel 1.4571 (316Ti ) for cell
422
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

CONDUCTIVITY TRANSMITTER 50000 CONDUCTIVITY SERIES
WIRING
Standard Transitor 1 Power Supply +
DIMENSIONS
in (mm) 3.8 (97) 2.6 (65)
2
V+
3 4
Transitor 2
2.8 (70)
4-20 mA signal -
Neutrino
Power Supply +
7
+
(not used) Out 2 (not used) Out 1 4-20 mA - signal
0.87 (22) 0.94 (23.8)
0V +V
Parts needed for unit with display and single 4-20 mA and two transistors 559168 559638 560693 917116 562549 560693 917116 561228 561232 Display programming module Standard transmitter constant C=1.0 1 in NPT mounting adapter tee Electrical plug Parts needed for unit without display and single 4-20 mA Neutrino transmitter constant C=1.0 1 in NPT mounting adapter tee Electrical plug RELATED PRODUCTS SO22 threaded adapter for use with threaded tank or pipe, 1 1/4" NPT, PVC-U/FKM, EPD SO22 welded adapter for use directly on a pipe, Stainless steel/FKM, EPD
440015 440016 440017 440018 440019 DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
ACCESSORIES PAGE Buffer solution, 500 ml, 5 S Buffer solution, 500 ml, 15 S Buffer solution, 500 ml, 100 S Buffer solution, 500 ml, 706 S Buffer solution, 500 ml, 1413 S Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
423

PH OR ORP TRANSMITTER 50000 PH & ORP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Burkert 50000 pH and ORP transmitter is a compact device designed for measuring the pH or oxidation-reduction potential (ORP) in clean liquids or liquids that may have low conductivity. The transmitter consists of a replaceable standard 120 mm pH or ORP probe screwed in a probe holder with integrated Pt1000 temperature sensor. This assembly is then mated to an enclosure containing the electronic module and a removable display for a quick and easy installation. The pH/ORP transmitter can operate independent of the display, but it will be required for programming the transmitter and also for visualizing the measured and processed data. The 50000 Standard is available with either two transistors and one 4-20 mA output or two transistors and two 4-20 mA outputs. The 50000 Neutrino Series is a cost effective less featured product measuring pH and ORP but with one 4-20 mA output and is not available with an LCD display.
NEW!
559168 559168 w/ 561025 560693 FEATURES Programmable outputs: two transistor and single or dual analog 4-20 mA Removable backlighted display Universal process connection Compatible with pH/ ORP probes Diagnostic functions Additional material contruction: PVC or PVDF Fluid Pressure Limit Maximum Pressure Media Compatibility pH ORP 0 to 87 PSI (0 to 6 bar) 58 psi (4 bar) Contaminated uids (viscous, suspended solids, small volumes) Clean (cooling-water, waste water or slightly contaminated) Media Temperature Range pH 32 to 176F (0 to +80C) 14 to 122F (-10 to +50C) Operating Humidity 85%, without condensation Operating Temperature Transmitter 14 to 140F (-10 to +60C) Probe (Flatrobe) 32 to 140F (0 to +60C) Enclosure Rating Standard IP65 and IP67 with M12 cable plug mounted and cover tightened Neutrino also includes NEMA 4X and NEMA 6P 12"H x 3"W x 4.4"D Dimensions (30.5 x 7.6 x 11.2 cm) Approvals UL le E27737, CAN/CSA-C22 Warranty 1 year
Principles of Operation: The 50000 device can be used as a pH or a ORP transmitter according to the probe version mounted into the holder. The pH or redox probe is a glass membrane with variable selectivity according to the pH or the redox, which must be calibrated with buffer solution before the installation of the transmitter into the pipe. When a pH probe is immersed into the solution a difference in potential is formed due to ions (H+) between the glass membrane and the solution. This difference in potential measured in relation to a reference electrode is directly proportional to the pH value.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Signal Output Standard Neutrino Maximum Output Impedance mA Accuracy pH ORP Resolution pH ORP Temperature Measurement Range pH ORP Temperature Display Response Time Wiring Terminations 14-36 VDC reversed polarity protection With Sensor: 1 A (with transistor loads) analog output: 25 mA (at 14 VDC without transistor loads, with current loop) Switch:Transistor Current: 4-20 mA Current: 4-20 mA 610 at 24 V DC 0.02 pH or 0.5 mV 3 mV temperature: 1C (1.8F) 0.01 pH or 0.1 m 1 mV 0.1C (0.18F) -2 to 16 pH or -580 to +580 mV -2000 to +2000 mV -40 to +130C (-40 to 266F) Grey dot matrix 128x64 with backlighting 150 ms (10 to 90%) Single analog output: 1x 5-pin M12 male xed connector
424
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

PH OR ORP TRANSMITTER 50000 PH & ORP SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (mm) 4.4 (111) 3.0 (75)
WIRING
Standard Transitor 1 2 V+ 3 4 Transitor 2 1 4-20 mA signal Power Supply +
Neutrino
Power Supply +
7
+ 4-20 mA signal
(not used) Out 2

0.94 (23.8) 0.78 (20.0)
(not used) Out 1
Installation: The 50000 series pH/ORP transmitter can be installed into 560693 Tee. Iinstall it in a vertical position with an angle no greater than 75 from the vertical center line.
0V +V
559168 559634 560693 917116 561025 562557 560693 917116 561025 Parts needed for unit with display and single 4-20 mA and two transistors Display programming module Standard pH transmitter, PVC mounting nut 1 in NPT mounting adapter tee Electrical plug pH probe 0 to 14 pH For ORP, order 561027 probe instead of pH probe listed above Parts needed for unit without display and single 4-20 mA Neutrino pH transmitter, PVC mounting nut 1 in NPT mounting adapter tee Electrical plug pH probe 0 to 14 pH For ORP, order 561027 probe instead of pH probe listed above RELATED PRODUCTS SO22 threaded adapter for use with threaded tank or pipe, 1 1/4" NPT, PVC-U/FKM, EPD SO22 welded adapter for use directly on a pipe, Stainless steel/FKM, EPD
561228 561232
418540 418541 418543 418555 418557 560949 DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
ACCESSORIES PAGE Buffer solution, 500 ml, pH = 4 Buffer solution, 500 ml, pH = 7 Buffer solution, 500 ml, pH = 10 Buffer solution, 500 ml, ORP = 475 mV Storage solution for probes (KCl 3M), 500 ml Cleaning solution set for probes, 3x 500 ml Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
425

VIBRATION TRANSMITTER 140T
DESCRIPTION
A low cost, highly accurate and rugged vibration transmitter, the Balmac Model 140T is ideal for use with all machines, even those that previously may have been considered uneconomical to monitor.The Model 140T easily mounts by use of a standard 1/4-20 stud. It is a two-wire, loop-powered transmitter that can feed the vibration level of operating machinery to a data logger, milliamp monitor, or process control computer. Solid-state accelerometer and circuit design provide a 4-20 mA signal proportional to vibration velocity. Intrinsically safe, it can safely be used in hazardous environments when coupled with a Model MTL7706 instrinsic safety barrier.
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
FEATURES
Reliable performance Easy to install 4-20 mA signal compatible with BAS controllers Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Two year warranty
in (cm)
1" NPT 0.38 (0.95)
APPLICATION
Vibration monitoring can provide help in alerting for the destructive effects of vibration on mechanical system equipment, such as the following: Air handler fans Cooling tower fans Pumps Compressors
1.75 (4.44)
1.13 (2.86) 1.31 dia (3.33)
Mounting Connection 1/4-20, 0.38 deep (0.95)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Accuracy Measurement Range 140T-1 140T-2 Frequency Range Vibration Range 140T-1 12-50 VDC, black=negative, red=positive, reverse polarity protection 4-20 mA RL = 50 (Vs-12); 600 @ 24 VDC 5% to 10% of scale 0-1 in/sec vibration (0-25.4 mm/sec) 0-2 in/sec vibration (0-50.8 mm/sec) 7-1300 Hz 3% (420-78,000 rpm) Output 4-20 mA, proportional to vibration level, 0-1 in/sec (0-25.4 mm/sec) Output 4-20 mA, proportional to vibration level, 0-2 in/sec (0-50.8 mm/sec) 500V, circuit-to-case Isolation Mounting 1/4''-20 stud, 3/8" deep Process Connection 1" MNPT Terminals Wiring Termination Operating Temperature -4 to 185F (-20 to 85C) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4, weatherproof, Cadmium-plated steel Weight 1.4 lb (0.64 kg) UL le #E126345 Approvals Warranty 2 years 140T-2
426
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

VIBRATION TRANSMITTER 140T
INSTALLATION
The mounting orientation can be in any position. This position should be in an area for the best vibration signal denition or where there is a good transfer of the machine's (fan's, pump's, etc.) vibrations. The best location will vary from machine to machine. The location of the transmitter should be selected carefully. When selecting the site for the mounting location, it is helpful to survey the site with the aid of a vibration meter.
WIRING
+
140T
Standard Wiring
Hazardous Safe Area Area
Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes.
MTL7706 IS Barrier
3
4-20 mA
1 2
140T Max Cable C=0.08 F L= 4.0 mH
Ground Here Only
Intrinsically Safe Wiring
NOTE: Ensure that the transmitter is rigidly attached to the monitoring point for the proper sensing of the vibration.
MODEL 140T-1 140T-2 DESCRIPTION Intrinsically-safe vibration transmitter, range 0-1 in/sec (25.4 mm/sec) Intrinsically-safe vibration transmitter, range 0-2 in/sec (50.8 mm/sec)
MTL7706+
RELATED PRODUCTS Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters
Note: Each application should be evaluated on an individual basis. Consult equipment manufacturers for specic details concerning safe vibration levels. DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 ACCESSORIES PAGE Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
Wiring subject to physical damage should be adequately protected. When installing electrical conduit, it is recommended that a short length (12") of exible conduit be used between the transmitter and an associated junction box. This construction will provide some vibration isolation in the conduit line. Conduit and ttings should conform to the environment of the transmitter location. Weather-resistant or raintight ttings should be used to protect the transmitter wiring from a humid or corrosive atmosphere.
4-20 mA Signal
12-50 VDC Power
20-35 VDC +
250
1-5V
888-397-5353 USA
427

VIBRATION TRANSMITTER / SWITCH 550
DESCRIPTION
The Balmac Model 550 Vibration Transmitter/Switch provides low cost, reliable vibration protection for rotating machinery operating within the range of 120- 60,000 rpm. The switch's vibration sensor, mounted perpendicular to the unit's base, responds to the velocity (in/sec) signal and effects automatic shutdown or alarm when preset limits are exceeded. The unit may be mounted with the sensitive axis in any plane (horizontal, vertical, or axial), even in an inverted position. Two limit set points are provided. One is set for the maximum allowable vibration (in/sec), while the other is set for a percentage of that setting, which trips the alarm relay when that percentage is reached. A built-in, adjustable time delay prevents triggering due to transient vibrations. The switch can be wired for automatic reset when vibration falls below setpoint, or it can be wired for latch and remote reset. The unit has a 4-20 mA output that may be used with a panel meter or data logger, permitting analysis of vibration trends. Once the switch has been installed and the limits set, it requires no attention. The Model 550 is enclosed in heavy, water-tight cast-aluminum housing. Explosionproof housings are available.
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.44 (8.7)
0.38 (1.0)
Two Mounting Holes 5/16" dia
1.0 (2.5)
1.0 (2.5)
0.38 (1.0)
FEATURES
Reliable performance Dual SPDT relay and 4-20 mA output Easy to install Two year warranty
6.75 (17.1) 6.0 (15.2) 5.25 (13.3)
4.06 (10.3) 4.19 (12.2) 1.75 (4.4)
550-X
550
Three Mounting Holes 5/16" dia
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Accuracy Vibration Sensitive Axis Measurement Range Frequency Range Relay Output Time Delay Limits 115 VAC 50/60 Hz 4-20 mA DC 500 5% Perpendicular to the base, omnidirectional mounting 0.1-2.75 in/sec (2.5-70 mm/sec) 2-1000 Hz (120-60,000 rpm) SPDT relay 5A @ 125 VAC; 5A @ 28 VDC 1-30 seconds Limit #1 (alarm) Set as a percent of Limit #2 (shutdown) Limit #2: (shutdown) Set at a velocity level in inches/sec Circuit closure between latch and common will reset both outputs Mounting 1/4" hardware, 3 mounting holes Wiring Terminations Terminals accepts up to 12 AWG wire Operating Temperature -30 to 165F (-34 to 74C) Enclosure Rating 550 Rugged, water- and dust-tight cast aluminum NEMA 3, 4, and 12 550-x NEMA 7CD, 9EFG Dimensions 550 3 .44"W x 5.937"H x 3.88"D (8.73 x 15.09 x 9.84 cm) 550-X 4.81"W x 7.13"H x 4.5"D (12.2 x 18.1 x 11.4 cm) Weight 550 3.6 lb (1.6 kg) 550-X 6 lb (2.7 kg) Warranty 1 year Remote Reset
428
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

VIBRATION TRANSMITTER / SWITCH 550
WIRING
The wiring access is through the 3/4" NPT conduit hole on the side of the switch enclosure. Wiring subject to physical damage should be adequately protected. When installing electrical conduit, a short length (12") of exible conduit must be used between the vibration switch and an associated junction box. This construction will provide some vibration isolation in the conduit line. Conduit and ttings should conform to the environment of the vibration switch location. In hazardous locations, the proper explosionproof ttings should be used. Weather-resistant or rain-tight ttings should be used to protect the switch wiring from a humid or corrosive atmosphere. Note: Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes.
4-20 mA Signal
4-20mA
Reset (N.O.) Jumper for Non-Latching Operation
Mute Latch Common C N/C N/O C N/C N/O L2 L1
Form C Contacts to Alarm and Shutdown Circuits
Limit #1 Alarm Limit #2 Shutdown
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
OPERATION
The 550 is a self-contained, vibration protection limit switch. It guards against destructive levels of vibration by tripping a relay that has a user-adjustable limit setpoint in terms of vibration velocity (in/sec). This relay output is connected to an alarm or control system to provide a warning or shutdown. It mounts at the monitoring point and is enclosed in a watertight, heavy castaluminum housing. Terminals are provided for remote or manual reset. A 4-20 mA output for recording or metering can connect to a remote readout panel meter or BAS controller.
TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS
VS
VS VS
VS
Centrifugal Compressor
Reciprocating Compressor
VS
VS
Y-Type Compressor
Vertical Pump
NOTE: You must ensure that the switch is rigidly attached to the monitoring point for the proper sensing of the vibration.
VS
VS
VS VS VS
Engine Gear Compressor
Cooling Tower Fan
MODEL 550 550-X RANGE 0.1 to 2.75 in/sec 0.1 to 2.75 in/sec NUMBER OF LIMITS 2 2 ENCLOSURE NEMA 3, 4, 12 Aluminum NEMA 7CD, 9EFG
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
429

VIBRATION SWITCH VK SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The IFM Efector VK Series vibration monitor continuously monitors HVAC and industrial equipment to prevent machine downtime and expensive downtime. The compact VK Series switch is designed to be permanently mounted to monitor a machine's vibration level. The monitor provides continuous feedback of vibration within a range of 10Hz to 1000Hz with a 4-20 mA analog signal. Setup is quick using two setup dials to adjust the maximum RMS velocity setpoint and response delay time. The sensor continuously monitors real-time RMS vibration velocity (based on the ISO 10816 standard) and provides an analog output of the velocity as well as a switching output when an alarm value is exceeded. Highlyvisible LEDs provide local indication for power and alarm.
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
FEATURES
Two easy to use dual setup dials Solid state electronics Analog and switched outputs No software needed Local LEDs for power and switching status
in (cm)
1.06 (2.7) M12 x1
WIRING
1 2 4 2 3 4 3
V+ Brown Switched NC Black 4-20 mA White VBlue
1
0.43 (1.1)
1: V+ 2: switched NC 3: 4-20 mA 4: V-
2.7
M8
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 18 32 VDC, 525 mA Signal Output 4-20 mA Maximum Output Impedance mA 500 Contact Rating 0.5A DC PNP (Sourcing) Contact Type 1 NC open collector transistor Accuracy Transmitter <5% of full range Switch <4% of full range Linearity <0.25% of full range <0.5% of full range Repeatability Measurement Range VK021 0 to 1"/second (0-25 mm/second) VK022 0 to 2"/second (0-50 mm/second) Frequency Range 10 Hz to 1000 Hz Visual Indication Power Green LED Switching status Yellow LED (Energized = Switched) 400g up to 50 mm/sec 1 to 60 seconds M8 (order mounting adapter separately) Wiring Terminations 4 pin M12 reg foot connector (order separately) Operating Temperature 13 to 176F (-25 to 80C) Enclosure Rating PBT (Pocan); PC (Makrolon); FPM (Viton); stainless steel 316L, IP67, NEMA 1 Dimensions 1.06" diameter x 2.88"H (2.7 x 7.31 cm) Approvals UL File E174189, CE Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) 2 years Warranty Shock Switch Adjustment Time Delay Process Connection
430
2.50 (6.4) 2.88 (7.3)

March 2014
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com

VIBRATION SWITCH VK SERIES
SETTING / CONNECTION DIAGRAM
4 to 20 mA V+
2
GND
1 4
RMS Set
NC
2
Delay Set
6 5
Locking ring Setting rings (manually adustable after unlocking) LED green: voltage supply M8 process connection LED yellow: lights when switching threshold and time delay are exceeded 6: Setting marks 1: 2: 3: 4: 5:
FREQUENCY DIAGRAM
Typical motor frequency 10Hz
Typical bearing fault frequency Frequency

Typical harmonic frequency 1000Hz
MODEL DESCRIPTION VK Series vibration monitor, switch point 0 to 25 mm/sec VK021 VK022 VK Series vibration monitor, switch point 0 to 50 mm/sec Ordering Note: Connector required, see below EVC001 EVC002 EVC003 EVC004 EVC005 EVC006 F90037 F90042 F90043 DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 RELATED PRODUCTS 6' foot straight connector 15' straight connector 30' straight connector 6' right-angled connector 15' right-angled connector 30' right-angled connector Octavis mounting adhesive Octavis mounting base Octavis mounting magnet ACCESSORIES PAGE Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
431

WEATHER INSTRUMENTS A70 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Comptus A70 Series Weather Instruments with signal conditioning provide a 4-20 mA output proportional to wind speed (A70-SL), wind direction (A70-DL), barometric pressure (A70-PL) or rainfall (A70-RL). The A70 Series provides the user with weather information that can be used for monitoring purposes or as an input to control systems.
FEATURES
Rugged construction Reliable operation Industry standard 4-20 mA output Track-mounted transmitter
NEW!
A70-DL A70-SL A70-RL A96 Lightning Arrestor
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Accuracy Warranty 12-24 VDC, 30 mA max; 24 VAC, 2.3 VA, 120 VAC (per model ordered) 4-20 mA 700 @ 24 VDC, R=(Supply Voltage -10) x 50 1% 1 year
APPLICATION
Wind Speed (A70-SL) The wind speed is measured with a three-cup anemometer, and a 4-20 mA output signal proportional to 0-100 mph is generated. Accuracy from 3-9 mph is 1 mph; above 10 mph, accuracy is 5% of reading. The A70-SL is supplied with 60' (18.28m) of cable and a 10" (25.40 cm) stub mast for mounting the anemometer. Wind Direction (A70-DL) Wind direction is measured with a precision potentiometric wind vane that produces a signal proportional to the azimuth of the wind. This signal is converted to a 4-20 mA output over 0 to 360 degrees The vane has a four-degree deadband on either side of north. The A70-DL is provided with 60' (18.28m) of cable and an S mast for mounting. Barometric Pressure (A70-PL) The A70-PL senses barometric pressure by an integrated silicon, absolute pressure sensor with integral temperature compensation. It outputs a 4-20 mA signal over 27'' to 31'' Hg. Accuracy is 0.05'' Hg. The sensor is mounted to the transmitter board, and a 3/16'' (0.48 cm) tube may be attached to the sensor to provide remote pressure sensing. Rainfall (A70-RL) The A70-RL utilizes tipping bucket technology to measure rainfall and outputs a 4-20 mA signal over a range of 0" to 1'' (0 to 2.5 cm). When the output reaches 20 mA (1''), it resets to 4 mA, and the cycle begins over again. Accuracy is 4%. The sensor includes 50' (15.24m) of cable.
ASSEMBLY / DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
5.5 (13.97) A76-SD 24 (60.96) 9.5 (24.13)
A76-T10
60 (152.4)
32 (81.3) Tripod Mounting

March 2014
432
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com

WEATHER INSTRUMENTS A70 SERIES
WIRING
Wind Speed Anemometer
Red Dot Center Wind Direction Terminal Vane
+
X1
Rain Gauge No Polarity

X4 2 1
24 VDC Power Supply
1 2 3 4
X3
24 VDC Power Supply
1 2 3 4 5
X2
24 VDC Power Supply
A70-SL
4-20 mA Signal
A70-DL
4-20 mA Signal
A70-PL
4-20 mA Signal
24 VDC Power Supply
A70-RL
1 X1 + 2
4-20 mA Signal
Wind Speed
Wind Direction
Barometric Pressure
Rainfall
WIRING
7
T1
AC
X2
24 VAC or 120 VAC power supply
H N Grd HOT NEU GND + 01 02 03 04 05
DC
MTR
X3
A70-SL
+ + SIG 01 02 03 04 05 ANEM VANE
X5
BARD DIR SPEED
08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01
+ + + +
4-20 mA sourcing signal Identical for each output
A70-DL
MODEL A70-DL A70-PL A70-RL A70-SDL A70-SDPL A70-SL DESCRIPTION Wind direction transmitter, 24 VDC loop powered Barometric pressure transmitter, 24 VDC loop powered Rainfall transmitter, 24 VDC loop powered Wind speed/direction transmitters, 24 VDC loop powered Wind speed/direction and barometric pressure transmitters, 24 VDC loop powered Wind speed transmitter, 24 VDC loop powered
For 24 VAC models, add 4 to end of model number; for 120 VAC models add 6 to end of model number ACCESSORIES Mounting bracket for wind speed and direction transmitters Tripod tower with mast (10 ft/3m total height) for wind speed and direction sensors Lightning arrestor for wind speed sensor (includes pipe-mounting clamp) Lightning arrestor for wind direction sensor (includes pipe-mounting clamp)
A76-SD A76-T10 A96-100P A96-200P March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
433

RAIN/SNOW SENSOR CONTROLLER DS-2B
DESCRIPTION
The Model DS-2B Rain/Snow Sensor Controller provides reliable rain and snow detection and control for commercial or residential applications. It detects rain to control motorized windows, roof vents, window wipers, etc., and detects snow to control snow melt and deicing systems for wheelchair ramps, stairways, driveways, loading docks, roofs, and more. The Model DS-2B is a low cost, easy-to-install, energy-saving alternative to thermostats, manual switches, or timer controls. It can be used stand-alone or in combination with building automation systems.
NEW!
DS-2B Power 14 AWG 18" (45.72 cm) leads Load 10 AWG 18" (45.72 cm) leads Remote control 22 AWG, ve-wire cable Operating Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Enclosure Rating Two-gang PVC NEMA 3R Dimensions 7.0"H x 4.75"W x 2.75"D (17.78 x 12.07 x 6.99 cm) Approvals UL le E207482, CE Weight 2.3 lb (1.04 kg) Warranty 2 years
FEATURES
Low cost Full 30A @ 240 VAC N.O. load contact rating UL listed and CE approved Replaceable precipitation sensor element Override switch for manual-on, auto, standby/reset Remote operation up to 1000' (305m) Adjustable temperature trigger point Adjustable delay-off time Activate or disable low temperature cutout Smart manual-on operates for one delay-off cycle
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Life Expectancy Relay Output Monitor Alarm Relay Time Delay Controller Additional Specications Mounting Wiring Terminations 100-120/200-240 VAC @ 15 VA, eld selectable Minimum 100,000 cycles (relay) Load 30A @ 240 VAC 24 VAC/VDC, 400 mA, 10W total Sensor 2 minutes 30-90 minutes, eld selectable Trigger temperature: 34, 39, or 44F (1.1, 3.9, or 6.6C), eld selectable 3/4" rigid conduit or 4 mounting tabs 18" (45.72 cm) leads
434
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

RAIN/SNOW SENSOR CONTROLLER DS-2B
OPERATION
The DS-2B senses precipitation and outdoor air temperature. It also provides on/off control for direct operation of rain or snow control loads and on/off status indication to a building automation system or other light load. It installs out in the open. Rain and snow will fall directly on the top of the enclosure where the sensing element is located. When precipitation, in the form of rain or snow, is present, the load and monitor relay contacts close based on the adjustable settings for the trigger (setpoint). When precipitation stops, the contacts remain closed until the adjustable delay-off timer expires. Factory settings are 39F (3.9C) trigger point, and the delay-off timer is enabled and set for one hour. Also, the lowtemperature cutout is disabled, so the trigger will switch even below 15F (-9.4C). A three-position toggle switch on the housing allows manual override. The manual-on position turns on the control (closes the relay outputs). The automatic position allows automatic control based on the adjustable settings. If switched to manual-on then back to automatic within two seconds, the control will execute one delay-off cycle. The toggle switch also has a standby/reset position, which turns off the control and resets the off timer. These manual override functions may also be accomplished remotely by wiring dry contacts to the remote control/monitoring cable (See Wiring below)
WIRING
Input L1 Power L2 GND
(black) (white) (green)
Monitor Contact 400 mA max @ 24 VAC/VDC (red) (orange) Load Contact 30A @ 240V N.O. (green) N.O. (black) Remote ManualOn Remote Standby/ Reset
Load Output
(red) (red)
(white)
(orange)
DS-2B
(red)
Monitor Contact Output Pilot Duty
MODEL DS-2B DESCRIPTION Rain/Snow sensor controller with remote control/monitor cable
MG-1
RELATED PRODUCTS Precipitation grid replacement kit
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
435

GAS CALIBRATION AND VERIFICATION KITS CO/CO2/NO2-C KIT SERIES, 3015 SERIES, MODEL UCK
GAS CALIBRATION KITS
The 1309K0002 and the 1309K0004 calibration kits from Honeywell Analytics are designed to ensure optimal performance from each of their gas detection devices. It is also ideal for the Kele GDS, GDN, and GDD Series gas detectors. These gas calibration kits include, tubing, regulator, calibration adapter, carrying case, and instructions to properly test and maintain gas detection instrumentation. Calibration gases are available in 17L, 58L, or 103L cylinder and must be ordered separately. These kits are not applicable to the VASQN8X and the SPXCD gas detectors.
NEW!
(Gas Sold Seperately)
MODEL DESCRIPTION 1309K0002 GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 58 to 103L gas cylinders 1309K0004 GDS, GDD, GDN calibration kit for 17 to 34L gas cylinders
REFRIGERANT CALIBRATION KITS
Perform operation validation on Bacharach refrigerant monitoring devices in the eld with the 3015 Series Refrigerant Verication Kits. Each kit includes a 1L lled refrigerant gas cylinder, 5 ft (1.5m) of plastic tubing, variable regulator, and a hard carrying case.
MODEL 3015-3430 3015-3437 3015-3438 DESCRIPTION R-22 Gas verication kit, 100 ppm R-134a Gas verication kit, 100 ppm R-123 Gas verication kit, 100 ppm
UNIVERSAL CALIBRATION KIT The Model UCK Universal Calibration Kit contains essential items to perform gas calibration on a variety of gas monitoring equipment. The kit includes assorted tubing sizes, couplings, adapters, restrictors, a regulator, pressure gage, and a hard carrying case. Gas cylinders are sold separately. The Model UCK-1 contains a regulator to t 17L cylinders for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants). For corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3), use Model UCK-2 which contains a regulator for 58L cylinders. Model UCK-3 contains both 17L and 58L regulators.
MODEL UCK-1 UCK-2 UCK-3 DESCRIPTION Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive gases (N2, CO2, CH4, H2, O2, CO, and refrigerants) Universal calibration kit for corrosive gases (NO2, H2S, SO2, and NH3) Universal calibration kit for non-corrosive or corrosive gases
436
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

GAS CYLINDERS AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT GAS SERIES AND MODEL NIOSHSCBA
DESCRIPTION
The GAS Series Gas Cylinders are available in 17L or 58L sizes for a variety of different gases and refrigerants. The weight for 17L cylinders is 0.94 lb (0.42 kg) and 1.7 lb (0.77 kg) for 58L cylinders.
MODEL GAS-CH4-7.5 GAS-CO-100 GAS-CO-200 GAS-CO-25 GAS-CO-50 GAS-CO2-1000 GAS-CO2-2000 GAS-CO2-800 GAS-H2-2 GAS-H2S-25 GAS-N2 GAS-NH3-50 GAS-NO2-5 GAS-O2-18 GAS-R11-500 GAS-R12-500 GAS-R123-100 GAS-R134A-500 GAS-R22-500 DESCRIPTION 2.5% methane A12, 17L 100 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 200 ppm carbon monoxide (C) in air, 17L 25 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 50 ppm carbon monoxide (CO) in air, 17L 1000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L 2000 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L 800 ppm carbon dioxide (CO2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L 2.0% hydrogen (H2) in air, 17L 25 ppm hydrogen sulde (H2S) in air, 58L Nitrogen (N2), 17L 50 ppm ammonia (NH3) in nitrogen (N2), 58L 5 ppm nitrogen dioxide (NO2) in air, 58L 18% oxygen (O2) in nitrogen (N2), 17L 500 ppm R-11 in air, 17L 500 ppm R-12 in air, 17L 100 ppm R-123 in air, 17L 500 ppm R-134a in air,17L 500 ppm R-22 in air, 17L
The Model NIOSHSCBA Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus Kit provides dependable respiratory protection in hostile environments. The unit meets NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health) requirements and has an assigned OSHA protection factor of 10,000. The kit includes a nylon harness assembly, hood, compact demand valve with adjustable ow by-pass, and a lled 30 minute aluminum cylinder.
MODEL NIOSHSCBA SCBA-WALCASE DESCRIPTION Self-contained breathing apparatus kit Aluminum case deluxe storage unit for single NIOSHSCBA
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
437

WHAT'S YOUR IAQ?
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) is a topic that has remained hot for over two decades. Thanks to several high-prole contaminant incidents, the public has a heightened awareness of the potential effects of unintentional exposure to carbon monoxide, mold and mildew, corona viruses, and legionella. Added to their concerns are threats of intentional exposure to anthrax, smallpox, and other unknown agents of chemical and biological warfare. In response to these potential dangers, mechanical engineers face the important challenge of changing the way ventilation is designed. They are diligently searching for the types of sensors and controls that will help them take the best steps possible to ensure that the air we breathe in our facilities is clean.
Through our network of manufacturers, research institutions, and military contacts, were aware of research thats in progress, and were among the rst to evaluate any IAQ-related product that has the potential of being brought to market.
NEW!
WHERE ARE WE WITH SENSORS TO DETECT CONTAMINANTS?
Our GDD, GDN, and GDS Series gas detectors offer state-of-the-art solutions for common toxic and combustible gases. They can provide a reliable source of alarm and control when a potential hazard is known. Refrigerant sensors range from the RLD-5 and RLD-134A, to the AGM, HGM, VA301, VAQN8X and GDC Series for single and multizone applications. Look under the Gas & Specialty Sensors and Hazardous Locations sections in the 2012 Kele Catalog for information on these products and their capabilities.
WHAT ABOUT SENSORS FOR TOXINS AND MICROORGANISMS?

Sensors for the higher-prole toxins and microorganisms are on the way, but theyre not cost-effective yet. Even though success has been proven for demand-controlled ventilation (DCV), its implementation rate remains low. Cost is the typical reason for leaving out this important part of a project. Trimming costs is understandable, but with a typical 6 to 18 month payback using DCV, it is far better even in the short run to maximize energy efciency this way. Kele stocks a variety of CO2 sensors to help meet any specication. Our KCO2, KCD Series, 5001 and 8041 Specialty, and C7232A are all time-proven, lowmaintenance devices that do the job at a competitive price.
WHAT ABOUT MOLD AND MILDEW?

Mold and mildew are tough to sense, but Keles wide range of humidity sensors, water leak detectors, and oat switches can all play a role in preventing these growths from occurring in the rst place. While they cant prevent every growth, controlling humidity adequately and detecting water are excellent steps to take to help prevent the proliferation of mold and mildew. Leak detectors and oat switches are also found in the Level section of the catalog, and our Humidity section can also provide you with what you need.
438
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014

DEMAND-BASED VENTILATION
Why Ventilate? When a building is occupied, there are two primary sources of air contaminants. The building materials and furnishings emit water vapor and other gases, and the people inside do, too. Of these, the people component is by far the most signicant in a typical ofce building, school, theater, or other similar commercial establishment. The non-people component may be heavier in industrial occupancies or places where volatile materials are stored. In either case, the air contaminant level must be controlled by introducing fresh air at an appropriate rate. Codes When an engineer selects the amount of outdoor air to be provided to a space, he/she must comply with the governing mechanical codes. Nearly all of these refer to ASHRAE Standard 62-1989, which species minimum ventilation rates for the most common types of occupancy on a cfm per person basis. These are the occupancy types mentioned above, in which the people component of contamination far outweighs the other sources. Consider a school classroom with 30 students plus a teacher. ASHRAE 62 calls for 15 cfm of outdoor air per person, so the air handling system must be capable of supplying a minimum of 465 cfm of outdoor air. Depending on the type of construction and exposure, this outdoor air can amount to as much as half of the heating and cooling load! Variable Occupancy-Variable Ventilation Now consider that the classroom in question only has 15 students enrolled for a school year. Through a full heating season and a partial cooling season, an unnecessary 225 cfm of outdoor air will be introduced if the damper controls are only designed for economizer with a minimum position. With typical Memphis weather and utility rates*, that is almost $300 lost for just one classroom in one year. In most other areas, the loss will be even higher. Demand-based ventilation is the answer to this problem. When people exhale, they tend to raise the level of carbon dioxide (CO2) in the space. When the code-required amount of outdoor air is being supplied, the indoor level of CO 2 tends to stabilize at about 700 ppm above the outdoor air CO2 level. Thus, if the outdoor air supply is modulated to maintain a consistent CO2 level of 700 ppm above ambient, the code-required level of ventilation per person is being supplied based on the number of people actually present. ASHRAE has conrmed that this technique is valid with a formal interpretation to Standard 62-1989. Note that a CO2 transmitter is needed. Volatile organic compound-only (VOC) sensors do not give a specic enough response to be used in this application. In most locations, the outdoor air CO2 level is very constant at 350 to 450 ppm. In this case, control can be achieved with return air or wall-mounted sensors. A control point of about 1000 ppm indoors will give the required ventilation rate with an adequate safety margin. In large cities with heavy trafc, or next to large parking structures, outdoor CO2 levels can vary. In this case, both indoor and outdoor levels should be sensed, and the control point should be around 700 ppm differential between the two. In the school example above, this type of control would automatically reduce the outdoor airow from 465 to 240 cfm since the 15 missing people do not contribute to the CO2 level in the room. Products Kele has a broad range of CO 2 level transmitters from Honeywell, GE, Vaisala, and our own Kele brand label sensors. Call Kele for the products that minimize ventilation expenses without compromising indoor air quality or code compliance. * Average rates $0.065/kWh, $0.50/ccf For more information, see the article Whats Controlling Your Ventilation? on the Kele web site in the Technical Reference section at www.kele.com.
GAS COVERAGE CHART

SYMBOL AREA (FT2) C12H26 1250 C3H8 1250 C4H10 1250 C6H14 1250 C6H6 1250 CG2O 1250 CH4 1250 CO 5000 CO2 5000 H2 1250 H2S 1250 NH3 1250 NO 5000 NO2 5000 O2 1250 REFRIGERANTS 1250 SO2 1250 VOC 1250
March 2014
MOUNTING 1 FT from Ceiling 1 FT from Ceiling 1 FT from Floor 1 FT from Ceiling 1 FT from Ceiling 3-5 FT from Floor 1 FT from Ceiling 3-5 FT from Floor 3-5 FT From Floor 1 FT From Ceiling 1FT From Floor 1FT From Ceiling 1-3 FT From Ceiling 1-3 FT From Ceiling 3-5 FT From Floor 1 FT From Floor 1FT From Floor 3-5 FT From Floor
NAME JETA PROPANE ISO-BUTANE HEXANE GASOLINE/BENZENE FORMALDEHYDE METHANE CARBON MONOXIDE CARBON DIOXIDE HYDROGEN HYDROGEN SULFIDE AMMONIA NITRIC OXIDE NITROGEN DIOXIDE OXYGEN REFRIGERANTS SULFURIC OXYGEN VOTILE ORGANIC CHEMICALS
RADIUS (FT) 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 50 50 20 20 20 50 50 20 20 50 20
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
439

ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY DEVICES
Not to be Used as a Life Safety Device

This phrase appears in some form in a number of Kele Catalogs including this one as a warning to customers that the particular product (usually a gas detector) is not to be relied upon to safeguard humans or animals from a particular hazard. It may, though, be part of a control system that helps prevent the formation of a hazardous environment under normal conditions when the product is properly applied and maintained. Even then, such devices, in most cases, cannot protect persons or animals that are intimate with the hazard. Occasionally, a specication may insist upon a device that is listed or certied as a life safety device. However, there is no such listing or certication available, except by manufacturers of certain reghting equipment and personal portable gas monitors. The only nationally recognized code that employs the term "life safety" is the Life Safety Code, and products are not specied in this code. Its ofcial title is actually "NFPA 101, Safety to Life from Fires in Buildings." There is no agency that certies compliance with this code. Some common products, which may be required to be applied as life safety devices, are classied into individual functional groups. Fire alarm equipment, including smoke detectors, is such a group. Boiler ame safety equipment is another group. UL, Factory Mutual, CSA, and other certifying agencies will list and label approved equipment for use in these specic categories. They are not listed and labeled as life safety devices but rather as Fire Protection Signaling Equipment or Gas Flame Safety Equipment. Again, it must be emphasized that there is no such certication as Life Safety unless it is being applied by a manufacturer to reghting equipment or personal portable protective equipment. The Life Safety Code does not specify products; therefore, no product can claim compliance with it. Even a gas sensor that is listed and labeled as a sensor by UL or another agency should never be used as a last line of defense for life. Considering the following logic will give a better appreciation for the underlying reasons why: Time Gas sensors have inherent response times that are signicant. Even the fastest sensors cannot claim better than 30 seconds, and many refrigerant leak sensors may exceed 15 minutes in response to the presence of a gas. If a multi-zone sensor is considered, response time for any one zone can exceed even the 15-minute level. Basically, if a person or animal is in the machine room when a catastrophic release of refrigerant occurs, no sensor will save he/she or it from injury or death.
NEW!
Life Span The active portions of gas sensors have limited lives. If not properly maintained, the sensor cannot function.
Power Gas sensors are powered by electricity, and there is rarely, if ever, a backup power system applied to them. If the electricity goes out, the sensor cannot function.
Location Even if a gas sensor has an uninterruptible power supply and is properly maintained, it can only measure gas concentration at its specic location. At the source of the leak, the concentration of the offending gas will be much higher. A person or animal nearer to the source of the contaminant may be exposed to a lethal dose; however, the level may never rise to the personal exposure limit at the sensor location if the prevailing airow is toward the source. Absolute Protection Absolute protection from inhalation hazards can only be provided by a source of known-to-be-clean air. Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) and remote air delivered by compressors and tubing are options that can actually safeguard a life from a toxic gas. In areas where such exposure is likely, other codes require that such clean air sources be available. To detect combustible or toxic mixtures at very low levels in order to protect lives in conned spaces or other potentially hazardous atmospheres, personal battery-operated monitors that perform well are available. These can also overcome some of the shortfalls of xed gas monitoring, as long as they are regularly tested and maintained. In conclusion, xed gas detectors may be used as part of a control system that is designed to prevent a hazardous situation from occurring. Excellent choices include Keles TP-1M and GMT-CO-S1 Carbon Monoxide Sensors to control garage ventilation. They may be used to signal a control system to begin ventilating a potential hazard or one that has already occurred. The same can be said of the reliable and cost-effective HGM Series and RLD Series Refrigerant Leak Detectors. In neither case, however, can they be relied upon absolutely to prevent health effects due to inhalation or combustion in a space that is already occupied. Their reaction time, level of maintenance, source of power, and proximity to the individuals in question cannot be guaranteed.
440
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HUMIDITY
Kele Has You Covered With Hard-to-Source Items Designed for Hazardous Environments.
L4 | p. 465
HZLIM | p. 450
MTL5000 | p. 474
TT881 | p. 445
EPETD8S | p. 452
K1 | p. 456
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Alarms and Control Stations for Hazardous Locations 878EX, 879EX, 116EXMST Explosion Proof Horns & Strobes . . . . . . . . . . 479 HL600 Series Hazardous Location Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Conduit Seals and Fittings for Hazardous Locations EYM Series Close-up Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLG50 Series Close-up Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC1A Kwiko Sealing Cement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACK6F Kwiko Twinpak Sealing Cement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F01 Fiber Filler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC1F01A Kwiko Sealing Cement and Fiber Filler Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosures and Accessories for Hazardous Locations CXJ Series Explosion Proof Custom Control Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AXJ, XJAT Series Explosion Proof Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MA8, MC6/7, MP6/7 Series Schneider Electric Explosion Proof Actuator Enclosure (for Valves and Dampers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZS-260 Explosion Proof Direct Coupled Actuator Enclosure .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (for Dampers) GRT Series Explosion Proof Outlet Box .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flow and Level Monitoring for Hazardous Locations IL10 Series Intrinsically Safe Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FS7-4E Explosion Proof Water Flow Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EchoSafe Flowline Explosion Proof Level Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELP Flowline Intrinsically Safe Ultrasonic Level Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . L4 Explosion Proof Float Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V4-2-U Explosion Proof Flow Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 488 489 489 489 489 481 482 484 487 488 455 462 460 463 465 465
SPXCD | p. 466
ELP | p. 463
Intrinsic Safety Barriers for Hazardous Locations MTL5000, MTL7000, MTL7700 Series Intrinsic Safety Barriers . . . . . . . . . 474 Pressure Sensors and Switches for Hazardous Locations K1 Series Intrinsically Safe Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 IXLdp Ashcroft Intrinsically Safe Differential Pressure Transmitter .. . . . . . . 457 1950G Series Explosion Proof Air Differential Pressure Switch .. . . . . . . . . 459 Specialty Sensors for Hazardous Locations SPXCD Series Explosion Proof Gas Monitor / Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 30-3003D Det-tronics Explosion Proof Duct Smoke Detector . . . . . . . . . . . 468 550-X Balmac Vibration Transmitter / Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 140T- Hazardous Intrinsically Safe Vibration Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 10316H2176 Explosion Proof Whisker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Temperature Controls for Hazardous Locations HZLIM Series Explosion Proof High and Low Limit Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . EPETD8S, T6051B1006 Explosion Proof Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A19AUC-2 Explosion Proof Bulb Thermostat.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HLT Series Explosion Proof Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature and Humidity Sensors for Hazardous Locations ST-X Series Precon Explosion Proof Room Temperature Sensor. . . . . . . . TT211 Minco Intrinsically Safe RTD Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TT881 Minco Explosion Proof Platinum RTD Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HT880 Series Minco Explosion Proof / Intrinsically Safe Humidity and Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HHT Series Explosion Proof / Intrinsically Safe Humidity & Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 452 453 454 442 443 445 447 449
ST-X | p. 442
HAZARDOUS L O C AT I O N S
kele.com
NEW!
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
APPLICATION GUIDE
The Application Guide below is a quick reference guide to applying Kele automation system interface devices in hazardous locations. Additional information on an explosion proof and instrinsically safe systems can be found in the Technical Reference section at the back of this catalog.The Application Guide covers the most common applications based upon customer requests and is not intended to be all-inclusive. If the application desired is not listed, please contact Kele for assistance at 888-397-KELE (5353)
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Notes: 1. Dry contacts, thermistors, RTDs, and other devices conforming to the denition of simple apparatus require that the sensing circuit limit the applied voltage and current to 1.2V and 100 mA maximum. Power dissipation and stored energy in the hazardous area must be limited to 25 mW and 20 mJ. Switches, thermistors, and RTDs used to sense ambient conditions may generally be given a temperature rating of T6 (185F/85C), but they must always be checked against the ignition temperature of the hazardous atmosphere. 2. AXJ and XJAT enclosures are available in a wide range of sizes and congurations. If the project calls for something other than the standard products shown in this catalog, contact Kele for availability of custom congurations.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
441
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
DESCRIPTION The Precon Model ST-X explosion proof room temperature sensor provides accurate space temperature sensing in a compact, unobtrusive housing suitable for wall mounting. The all aluminum NEMA 7 / NEMA 9 enclosure minimizes time lag and allows installation in most atmospheres containing ammable gases or dusts (Groups C, D, E, F, G). FEATURES Class I, Division 1, Group C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G NEMA 7CD, 9EFG RTD or thermistor styles available E-Z mount (1/2" NPT conduit entries top and bottom) Compact, unobtrusive package
PRECON EXPLOSION PROOF ROOM TEMPERATURE SENSOR ST-X SERIES
NEW!
ST-X CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from sensor to maintain explosion proof rating. WARNING: This device is not listed for use in areas classied as Group A (acetylene) or Group B (hydrogen and others). Where temperature sensing in these areas is required, an intrinsically safe system using the Model TT211 transmitter is recommended.
TM
8
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor 0.36F (0.2C) Type 63 0.72F (0.40C) Type 71 0.054F (0.03C) Type 81 and 85 0.48F (0.27C) @ 32F (0C) Type 91 0.91F (0.46C) @ 32F (0C) Lead Wires #24 AWG, 8'L (2.4m) Materials Of Construction Copper-free aluminum enclosure Sensor Type Thermistor, Platinum thin lm RTD Temperature Range -30 to 240F (-34 to 115C) Dimensions 5.75"H x 1.63"W x 2.13"D (14.1 x 4.1 x 5.2 cm) 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) Weight Warranty 1 year
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION MODEL ST-X3 ST-X21 ST-X22 ST-X24 ST-X27 ST-X42 ST-X63 ST-X71 ST-X81 ST-X85 ST-X91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III material (gray leads) 2252 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II material (green leads) 3000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II material (blue leads) 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II material (yellow leads) 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II material (gray leads) 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV material (green leads) 1000 nickel RTD @ 70F (21C) (yellow leads) 100 high accuracy RTD @ 32F (0C), 0.00385 //C (yellow leads) 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), 0.00385 //C (yellow leads) 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 0.00385 //C (blue leads) 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 0.00375 //C (green leads)
442
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
MINCO INTRINSICALLY SAFE RTD TRANSMITTER TT211
The Minco Model TT211 intrinsically safe RTD transmitter takes a standard RTD input and provides an accurate 4-20 mA output over any of three factory-calibrated temperature ranges. When coupled with a Model MTL7706 Safety Barrier and appropriate cabling, both the Model TT211 and the RTD are suitable for use in hazardous locations without the use of explosion proof enclosures.
Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D with intrinsic safety barrier Nonincendive for use in Class I Division 2 areas without barrier Accuracy 0.1% of span Compact size Epoxy potted for moisture resistance Zero and span adjustable to 5% of span
FM
APPROVED
US
TT211
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
8.5-35 VDC Platinum RTD, 100 (0.00385 //C) Conguration Two-wire, loop powered Output 4-20 mA (accuracy) 0.1% of span Linearity Maximum Output Impedance 775 @ 24 VDC, 575 @ 20 VDC, 325 @ 15 VDC Operating Temperature -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) Supply Voltage Input Operating Humidity Thermal Effect Area Entity Parameters Weight Approvals Warranty 0% to 100% non-condensing 0.007% of span per F ( 0.013% per) Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1, Groups A,B,C,D Vmax: 25V; Imax: 150 mA; Ci: 0F; Li: 0 mH 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) FM approved 3 years
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.5 (1.27)
0.08 (0.20) 1.0 (2.54)

0.25 (6.4)
0.15 (0.38) I.D. through 1.5 (3.81)
0.68 (1.71) 1.09 (2.71) Mounting: Use #6 screw through or #8 thread forming screw
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
443
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
MINCO INTRINSICALLY SAFE RTD TRANSMITTER TT211
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations. Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturers instructions. When the Model TT211 transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7706+ intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two must be limited to 0.12 F, and total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2200'/823m maximum Belden #8760 18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18 H/FT, 44 pF/FT).
WIRING
RTD Hazardous Area Safe Area
NEW!
Power Bus 1 2
4 3 2 1
MTL7706+ Intrinsically Safe Barrier

3
20-35 VDC 250 1-5V
4-20 mA 4
TT211
Maximum Cable C = 0.12 F L = 4.0 mH Ground Here Only
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION TT211 Intrinsically-safe RTD transmitter PD For 100 platinum RTD, TCR=0.00385 //C PW For 1000 platinum RTD, TCR=0.00375 //C RANGE 1EN -20 to 140F (-28.9 to 60C) 1S 0 to 100F (-17.8 to 37.8C) 1BN 30 to 240F (-1.1 to 115.6C) TT211 PW 1EN
Note: Contact Kele for additional ranges and RTD types.
Example: TT211-PW-1EN Transmitter with range of -20 to 140F (-28.9 to 60C) for 1000 platinum RTD (TCR=0.00375 //C)
250R-3-1 DCP-1.5-W MTL7706+ ST-A81 ST-A91 ST-D81 ST-D91 ST-S81 ST-S91 ST-W81 ST-W91
RELATED PRODUCTS 250 3 WATT 1% Resistor Long Leads Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 100 platinum RTD all-purpose temperature probe 1000 platinum RTD all-purpose temperature probe 100 platinum RTD duct temperature sensor 1000 platinum RTD duct temperature sensor 100 platinum RTD space temperature sensor 1000 platinum RTD space temperature sensor 100 platinum immersion temperature probe 1000 platinum immersion temperature probe
PAGE 1299 995 474 1197 1197 1184 1184 1211 1211
444
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
MINCO EXPLOSION PROOF PLATINUM RTD TRANSMITTER TT881
The Minco Model TT881 explosion proof platinum RTD transmitter is designed for temperature measurement in applications calling for a rugged industrial housing. This RTD transmitter may be ordered for 100 ohm and 1000 ohm 385 platinum RTD or 1000 ohm 375 platinum RTD.
Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G NEMA 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG Availible in 100 or 1000 RTDs High RFI/EMI immunity NIST certicate available 4-20 mA loop powered Substitute replacement for discontinued HCT-881 Hy-Cal transmitters
FM
APPROVED
US
TT881-A with Probe
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage TT881 Accuracy Rangeability Zero Span Zero Span Adjust Output Input Voltage Effect 10-35 VDC (reverse polarity protector) 0.01% of span 100, 385 platinum, three-wire sensor 0.00385 //C PF 1000, 385 platinum, two-wire sensor 0.00385 //C PW 1000, 375 platinum, two-wire sensor 0.00375 //C Ice Point Resistance [Ro] 100 0.1, 0.12% 1000 1, 0.12% Better than 0.25C per year Stability Insulation Resistance Sheath: 500F (260C), 100 m @ 50 VDC min Probe Material Stainless steel body Explosion proof Class I, Div 1, Area Groups B, C, D; Class II, Div 1, Groups E, F, G; NEMA 4X with thermowell; without thermowell, explosion proof indoor only Factory Mutual, File #3012833 Pressure 2750 psig (18,961 kPa) max @ 500F Operating Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) noncondensing Standard Length 5.5L (13.97 cm), 0.25 (0.64 cm) probe, 1/2 NPT mounting FM Approvals Weight (5.5 length) 5.6 lb (2.54 kg) 3 years Warranty Sensing Element PD
-58 to 122F (-50 to 50C) 45 to 1080F (25 to 600C) Noninteractive 4-20 mA, two-wire standard 0.001% of span/volt max (negligible) for 10-45 VDC Linearity 0.2% of span for any range from -58 to 1022F (-50 to 550C) Temperature Coefcient 0.002% of span/C NEMA 4X, FM approved, explosionHousing Type proof Class I, Div 1, Groups B, C, D; Class II, Div 1, Groups E, F, G Terminations Terminal Screws Mounting Includes an integral sensor mounted Immersion via 1/2 NPT threads with 1/4 probe Wall/Pipe Mounting hardware available for surface installations with accessory AC103168 Maximum Load (Supply voltage - 10 VDC) / 0.02A, i.e., (24-10 VDC) / 0.02 = 700 SENSOR -58 to 500F (-50 to 260C) Temperature Range March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
445
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.7 (9.4) 4.25 (10.80)
MINCO EXPLOSION PROOF PLATINUM RTD TRANSMITTER TT881
Zero and Span Adjustments under cover
1.5 (3.81)
5.5 (13.97)
Wall Mount (AC103168 Option)
NEW!
+
RTD
Power Supply 10 to 45 VDC 4-20 mA Signal
TT881
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from junction box to maintain explosion proof rating. For Group B and C atmospheres, conduit seals must be installed within 2 (5.08 cm) of the enclosure regardless of less stringent code requirements.
WARNING: All circuits MUST be de-energized before opening the cover of this device for any purpose, including resetting a manual reset controller or adjusting a set point. If work must be performed with an energized circuit, the atmosphere inside and outside the enclosure must be proven safe with a listed intrinsically safe combustible gas detector.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
DEL * TT881 DESC PT N Assembly probe for two-wire RTDs * PD 100 0.00385 //C platinum curve, 6" leads PF 1000 0.00385 //C platinum curve, 6" leads * PW 1000 0.00375 //C platinum curve, 6" leads LLL Length LLL in .1" increments 055 = 5.5", 120 = 12.0" E Duct mount, NEMA 4X box, LLL typically 8.0" * P Immersion, NEMA 4X box, LLL typically 5.5" for 6" well insertion W Wall mount, NEMA 4X box, LLL typically 2.0" 1 4-20 mA DC output EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20/140F) or (-29/60C) Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/100F) or (-18/38C) * S N Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32/122F) or (0/50C) H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40/90F) or (4/32C) C Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/100C) -Range codes per Minco letter ranges in the catalog SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e., -40/-10F 1 No calibration data, sensor or transmitter Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0C with NIST * 2 3 Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0, 100, and 260C with NIST PW 055 P 1 S 2 Example: TT881PW055P1S2 Transmitter with 5.5" immersion probe, 1000 375 curve platinum RTD, ranged for 0/100F, with NIST matched @ 0C
TT881
*Normally stocked item
AC103168 DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 EYM-50 GFF-50 WB-6 WS-6
RELATED PRODUCTS Separate pipe/wall mounting hardware kit Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 1/2" size, 1.06" turning radius, 1 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 1/2" galvanized mounting flange Brass well Stainless steel well
PAGE 995 994 488 1293 1293
446
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Replaces Hy-Cal HCT880 Series Available with digital display Intrinsically safe with MTL7706 barrier
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
MINCO EXPLOSION PROOF / INTRINSICALLY SAFE HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER HT880 SERIES
The Minco Model HT880 explosion proof / intrinsically safe humidity transmitter is designed for rugged industrial use. Approved by FM for hazardous location, this system provides safe, reliable, and accurate humidity and optional temperature measurement. The capacitive lm sensor is ideal for low and high humidity measurement with 4-20mA outputs. The HT880 comes with a stainless steel sintered lter and an optional NIST traceable certicate. The HT885 has a digital display.
HT880 with AC103168 bracket
FM
APPROVED
US
HT885
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations. Provide wiring and grounding in accordance with manufacturers instructions. When the Model HT-880 is combined with the MTL7706 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance must be limited to 0.22 F, and inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700/823m maximum Belden #8760 18/2 shielded cable 0.18 H/FT, 44 pF/FT). CAUTION: Conduit seals MUST be installed within code-required distance from the enclosure to maintain explosion proof rating. For Group B and C atmospheres, conduit seals must be within 2 (5 cm) of the enclosure regardless of less stringent code requirements. NOTE: When using the temperature option, both humidity and temperature loops must be connected to operate.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 16.5 to 28.0 VDC Maximum Output Impedance 725 FI FX 375 Entity Parameters Vamx 28V, Imax 100 mA, Ci O, Li O mH Area FI Class I, Div. 1, 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Div. 1, 2, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Div. 1, 2; Class I, Zone 0, Aex [ia] IIC T4 Class I, Div. 1, 2, Groups B, C, D; FX Class II, Div. 1, 2, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Div. 1,2 Accuracy 2.5% RH from 10 to 80% RH Includes hysteresis, linearity, repeatability, and all temperature and voltage effects Sensor Type RH: Thin lm capacitive element Optional Temperature: 1000 platinum RTD, 385 curve 50 seconds in slow moving air Response Time March 2014 Operating Humidity Operating Temperature HT880 HT885 Conduit Connection Mounting Adjustments Display Enclosure Sensor Filter Sensor Range Wiring Approvals Weight HT880 HT885 Warranty 0 to 100% RH -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C) -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) 1/2" FNPT 1/2" MNPT and bracket sold separately Non-interacting zero/span (HT885) 3.5 digit LCD display, % RH and optional F or C Metal with screw-on cover 60 micron stainless steel sintered lter 0% to 100% RH Terminals, 22-14 AWG FM 2.8 lb (1.3 kg) 4.5 lb (2.02 kg) 3 years
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
447
Control room
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
WIRING
FI Wiring
Hazardous area Safe area
MINCO EXPLOSION PROOF / INTRINSICALLY SAFE HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER HT880 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
MTL7706+ IS Barrier
3 1
Power Bus
2
20-28 VDC 4-20 mA
Temperature Humidity
4-20 mA 4
Ground Here Only
NEW!
4.45 ref Insertion depth Probe 4.15 ref 1/2 NPT OR G1/2 process thread Connection head Model CH106 Conduit thread Sintered cap
MTL7706+ IS Barrier
4-20 mA 4
3
Power Bus
2
20-28 VDC 4-20 mA
Temperature sensor Humidity sensor connection connection
FX Wiring
Ground Here Only
PS
4-20 mA
Temperature & Humidity
WARNING: All circuits MUST be de-energized before opening the cover of this device for any purpose. If work must be performed with an energized circuit, the atmosphere inside and outside the enclosure must be proven safe with a listed intrinsically safe combustible gas detector.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
DESCRIPTION Industrial-grade, 2.5% RH, 4-20 mA transmitter Industrial-grade, 2.5% RH, 4-20 mA transmitter with LCD display CALIBRATION N25 NIST three-point 2.5% calibration certificate S25 Standard 2.5% calibration TEMPERATURE OPTIONS (other ranges available) NT No temperature transmitter EN -20 to 140F (-28 to 60C) S 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) -Special calibration ranges available (must call) PROBE LENGTH 60 6" inch probe length 12 12" inch probe length AGENCY APPROVAL FX FM approved, explosion proof (NT option only)* * Not for use as intrinsically safe FI FM approved, intrinsically safe MODEL HT880 HT885D
AC102765 AC103168 AC103253 DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 EYM-50 GFF-50 MTL7706+
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE HT885 pipe/wall bracket Separate pipe/wall mounting hardware kit Duct mount kit for HT880 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 1/2" size, 1.06" turning radius, 1 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488 1/2" galvanized mounting flange Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 474
448
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Available with digital display Intrinsically safe with MTL7706+ barrier
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF / INTRINSICALLY SAFE HUMIDITY & TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER HHT SERIES
The Dwyer HHT Series explosion proof / intrinsically safe humidity transmitter is designed for rugged industrial use. Approved by FM for hazardous location, this system provides safe, reliable, and accurate humidity and/or temperature measurement with 4-20 mA outputs. Two models have a digital display.
C
FM
APPROVED
US
HHT
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations. Provide wiring and grounding in accordance with manufacturers instructions. When the Model HT-880 is combined with the MTL7706 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance must be limited to 0.22 F, and inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700/823m maximum Belden #8760 18/2 shielded cable 0.18 H/FT, 44 pF/FT). CAUTION:CONDUIT seals MUST be installed within coderequired distance from the enclosure to maintain explosion proof rating. For Group B and C atmospheres, conduit seals must be within 2 (5 cm) of the enclosure regardless of less stringent code requirements. NOTE: When using the temperature option, both humidity and temperature loops must be connected to operate.
WIRING
Hazardous area Safe area
MTL7706+ IS Barrier
3 1 4
Power Bus
20-28 VDC
2
Temperature RH
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
Ground Here Only

Temperature COM
4-20 mA
RH
MTL7706+ IS Barrier
3 4 1
Power Bus
20-28 VDC
2
4-20 mA
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXP Wiring
4-20 mA
Ground Here Only

Temperature & RH
PS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Explosion proof Intrinsically Safe Entity Parameters Area Explosion proof Intrinsically Safe Accuracy Sensor Type RH: Temperature: 16.5 to 28 VDC 9.5 to 28 VDC Vmax= 28V, Imax= 100 mA, Ci= nF, Li= 7.7 H Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D; Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Div. 1, Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Div. 1 2% RH from 10 to 90% RH Capacitive Solid state Response Time Conduit Connection Mounting Display Enclosure RH Sensor Range Temperature Sensor Range Wiring Approvals Weight Warranty 15 seconds 1/2" FNPT Duct probe: 1/2" MNPT LCD Display Aluminum 0% to 100% RH -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Terminals FM, CE 2.5 lb (1.1 Kg) 1 year
MODEL HHT-IU HHT-IT HHT-IT-LCD HHT-EU HHT-EU-LCD GFF-50 MTL7706+ EYM-50 DCPA-1.2 A-287 DCP-1.5-W DESCRIPTION 10 inch Intrinsically safe Humidity transmitter 10 inch Intrinsically safe Humidity and Temperature transmitter 10 inch Intrinsically safe Humidity and Temperature transmitter with display 10 inch Explosion proof Humidity transmitter 10 inch Explosion proof Humidity transmitter with display RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1/2" galvanized mounting ange Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 474 1/2" size, 1.06" turning radius, 1 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994 Separate pipe/wall mounting hardware kit for TTE Series Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
449
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF HIGH AND LOW LIMIT CONTROLS HZLIM SERIES
DESCRIPTION The HZLIM Series explosion proof high and low limit controls are eld-assembled combinations of industry standard controls, heavy duty explosion proof enclosures, and seals for use in atmospheres that may contain hazardous gases or dusts (Groups B, C, D, E, F). The HZLIM-LO-A includes the ultra reliable A11A-1 manual reset low limit control, a XJA7514C2M2M explosion proof enclosure, two EYM-75 conduit seals, and an ACK6F ber/ cement kit. The HZLIM-LO-B is identical to the HZLIM-LO-A but includes the equally reliable A11B-1 automatic reset low limit control instead of the A11A-1. The HZLIM-HI is also identical to the HZLIM-LO-A but includes the time proven A70KA-1 manual reset high limit control in place of the A11A-1.
NEW!
HZLIM Series
FEATURES
DIMENSIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Class I Division 1 Groups B, C, D Class II Division 1 Groups E, F,G NEMA 7BCD, 9EFG Long life, snap acting contacts Easy set point adjust Freeze protection for hazardous locations Code required AHU high limit protection for hazardous locations
in (cm)
Wiring 3/4" Rigid Conduit EYM75 Seal 3.13 (7.95) Sealing Cement Fiber Dam Wiring Enclosure 10 (25.40) Controller
SPECIFICATIONS
Refer to the A70 and A11 Series in the Thermostats and Controllers section for specications, capillary, installation and wiring information.
Capillary
EYM75 Seal 3.13 (7.95) Sealing Cement Fiber Dam
10.25 (26.04) Capillary
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from junction box to maintain explosion proof rating. For Group B and C atmospheres, conduit seals must be installed within 2 (5.08 cm) of the enclosure regardless of less stringent code requirements.
WARNING: All circuits MUST be de-energized before opening the cover of this device for any purpose, including resetting a manual reset controller or adjusting a set point. If work must be performed with an energized circuit, the atmosphere inside and outside the enclosure must be proven safe with a listed intrinsically safe combustible gas detector. March 2014
450
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING OPERATION MODEL HZLIM-HI HZLIM-LO-A HZLIM-LO-B
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF HIGH AND LOW LIMIT CONTROLS HZLIM SERIES
Install the XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, included with each kit, in its intended location. Install the two EYM75 conduit seals in the two tapped holes of the XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, making sure to engage a minimum of ve full threads. Also be sure that the plugs on the conduit seals are both facing up and to the front (cement will be poured into them later). The male nipple, supplied with ttings, can be easily removed and replaced in the opposite side for proper orientation.
Unpack the A11 or A70 controller, and fully uncoil the capillary tubing. Place plastic bushings in both openings inside the enclosure and also in the bottom of the lower conduit seal. Gently feed the end of the capillary (or capillary and bulb) through the bottom opening and conduit seal from inside the XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, taking care not to nick or kink the capillary. Once the end is out, slowly feed the rest of the capillary fully through to the outside of the conduit seal. Use an assistant, if needed, to make sure that the inner and outer plastic bushings stay in place to protect the capillary from damage. Once this is accomplished, mount the A11 or A70 controller to the panel inside the enclosure. Install the capillary (or capillary and bulb) on the equipment according to the included instructions. Install rigid conduit and wiring as required by code from the upper conduit seal, engaging a minimum of ve full threads at each joint. Only individual insulated conductors may pass through the conduit seal. If jacketed cable is used, the jacket must be stripped back beyond the seal or else a listed cable seal must be applied within the enclosure. Remove the plugs from the two conduit seals. Make sure that the wires and capillary are centered in the seals. Then install ber dams and sealing compound in each according to the included instructions (minimum 0.75"/2 cm cement depth), and replace the plugs. Adjust the setpoint on the controller, install the cover for the XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, and tighten securely.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
ORDERING INFORMATION DESCRIPTION Kit with one A70KA-1 manual reset high limit control, one XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, two EYM75 conduit seals, three plastic conduit bushings, and one ACK6F sealing kit Weight: 26.9 lb (12.2 kg) Kit with one A11A-1 manual reset low limit control, one XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, two EYM75 conduit seals, three plastic conduit bushings, and one ACK6F sealing kit Weight: 25.7 lb (11.7 kg) Kit with one A11B-1 automatic reset low limit control, one XJATS14C2M2N1 enclosure, two EYM75 conduit seals, three plastic conduit bushings, and one ACK6F sealing kit Weight: 25.7 lb (11.7 kg)
ACK6F EYM-75
RELATED PRODUCTS Cement: 1.9 lb * (0.85kg) Fiber: 0.3 lb (0.19 kg), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set * Consists of five 0.4 lb (0.19 kkg) cement pouches 3/4" size, 1.19" turning radius, 2 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction
PAGE 489 488
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
451
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF THERMOSTATS EPETD8S, T6051B1006
DESCRIPTION The EPETD8S and T6051B1006 Series explosion proof thermostats are two-position room thermostats designed for on/off control with set points from 50 to 90F (10 to 32C) (EPETD8S) and 46 to 84F (8 to 29C) (T6051B1006). These snap-acting switch type devices are suitable for line- or lowvoltage applications and have SPDT contacts for heating or cooling control. FEATURES Class I Division 1 Groups C, D; Class II Division 1 Groups E, F, G NEMA 7CD, 9EFG Line or low voltage control of heating or cooling systems EPETD8S UL le #E114308 T6051B1006 UL le #E12842 EPETD8S
NEW!
T6051B1006 Weight 5.3 lb (2.4 kg) Dimensions 5.6" x 6.4" x 4.5" (14.3 x 16.2 x 11.4 cm) 5.6" x 6.4" x 4.75" (14.3 x 16.2 x 12.1 cm) Setpoint Range 50 to 90F (10 to 32C) 46 to 84F (8 to 29C) SPDT SPDT 5.3 lb (2.4 kg)
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Voltage Range 24-244 VAC, 22A heating and cooling 24-120 VAC 10A heating, 7A cooling; 240 VAC 6A heating, 4A cooling Differential Heating 2F (1.1 C), Cooling 4F (2.2C) Heating 1F (0.6C), Cooling 1F (0.6C) Contact Arrangement
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EPETD8S
T6051B1006
WIRING
INSTALLATION/MOUNTING
Surface-mount explosion proof box using the mounting ears for surface applications. Each includes two 3/4" tapped conduit entries (top and bottom).
N.C. N.O. C
C - N.C. Open on temp rise C - N.O. Close on temp rise
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from thermostat to maintain explosion proof rating.
HLT-1 (SPDT) & HLT-2 (DPDT)

MODEL EPETD8S T6051B1006
DESCRIPTION Line- or low-voltage heating/cooling thermostat Line- or low-voltage heating/cooling thermostat
ACK6F EYM-75
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Cement: 1.9 lb * (0.9 kg) Fiber: 0.3 LB (0.14 kg), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set * Consists of five 0.4 lb (0.19 kg) cement pouches 489 3/4" size, 1.19" turning radius, 2 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488
452
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Class I, Division 1, Group D (NEMA 7) Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G (NEMA 9) Line or low voltage control of heating or cooling systems 6' (1.83m) capillary for exible bulb placement Immersion well available 20 to 80F range (celcuis) Duct bulb holders available
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF BULB THERMOSTAT A19AUC-2
The Johnson Controls Model A19AUC-2 explosion proof bulb thermostat is an ideal solution for air or uid temperature control in potentially hazardous areas. Its 6' capillary and bulb make mounting convenient, and its external setpoint adjustment knob provides easy operation without having to verify that the atmosphere is safe. An optional thermowell makes immersion applications a snap.
A19AUC-2
INSTALLATION / MOUNTING
Each explosion proof box has mounting ears for surface applications and includes 3/4" FNPT tapped conduit entry on the top side.
SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Non Inductive Amps Full Load Amps Locked Rotor Amps Pilot Duty Range Differential Bulb Capillary Dimensions Weight Approvals Area Warranty SPDT 22.0 A @ 277 VAC maximum 16.0 A @ 120VAC; 9.2 A @ 208 VAC; 8.0 A @ 240 VAC 96.0 A @ 120 VAC, 55.2A @ 208 VAC, 48.0A @ 240 VAC 125 VA @ 24-600 VAC 20 to 80 (-7 to 27) 3.5 (1.9) 0.38" x 4.97" (0.95 x 12.6 cm) 6' (1.83 m) 6.25" H x 3" W x 4.25" D (15.9 x 7.6 x 10.8 cm) 2.6 lb (1.2 kg) UL listed File #E37739, CSA Explosion proof Class1, Division 1, Group D; Class II, Division 2, Groups E, F, G 1 year
WIRING
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
C 1 N.C. 3 N.O. 2
A19AUC
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from thermostat to maintain explosion proof rating.
MODEL A19AUC-2 DESCRIPTION Remote bulb thermostat
TE-6001-1 WEL14A-603R
RELATED PRODUCTS Duct temperature element holder with box 5-13/16 Copper bulb well
PAGE 1391
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
453
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF THERMOSTAT HLT SERIES
DESCRIPTION The HLT Series explosion proof thermostats are twoposition room thermostats designed for on/off control with setpoints from 40 to 110F (4 to 43C). The HLT Series has a bulb and capillary room temperature sensor and adjustment slot for changing the setpoint. The thermostats are suitable for line- or low-voltage applications and have either SPDT or DPDT contacts for heating or cooling control. FEATURES Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G NEMA 7CD, 9EFG Line or low voltage control of heating or cooling systems UL File #E114308
NEW!
HLT APPLICATION On/Off control in hazardous classied areas. Weight 5.3 lb (2.4 kg) 5.3 lb (2.4 kg) Dimensions 5.8"H x 6.4"W x 5.6"D (14.7 x 16.3 x 14.2 cm) 5.8"H x 6.4"W x 5.6"D (14.7 x 16.3 x 14.2 cm) Setpoint Range 40 to 110F (4 to 43C) 40 to 110F (4 to 43C)
8
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Contact Rating 24-277 VAC, 22A heating or cooling Differential Heating: 3F (1.7C); Cooling 3F (1.7C) Contact Arrangement SPDT DPDT
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HLT-1 HLT-2
24-277 VAC, Heating: 3F (1.7C); 22A heating and cooling Cooling 3F (1.7C)
WIRING
INSTALLATION/MOUNTING
Surface-mount explosion proof box using the mounting ears for surface applications. Each includes two 3/4" tapped conduit entries (top and bottom).
N.C. N.O. C
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within coderequired distance from thermostat to maintain explosion proof rating.
HLT-1 (SPDT) & HLT-2 (DPDT)
MODEL HLT-1 HLT-2 DESCRIPTION Line- or low-voltage heating/cooling thermostat, SPDT Line- or low-voltage heating/cooling thermostat, DPDT
ACK6F EYM-75
RELATED PRODUCTS Cement: 30 oz * (850g) Fiber: 5 oz (142g), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set * Consists of five 6 oz (187g) cement pouches 3/4" size, 1.19" turning radius, 2 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction
PAGE 489 488
454
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
INTRINSICALLY SAFE LEVEL TRANSMITTER IL10 SERIES
The Wika IL10 Series Intrinsically Safe Level Transmitter is exceptionally stable and is virtually unaffected by shock, vibration and orientation. These Instrinsically (IS) Safe transmitters are ideal for monitoring water level in an explosive atmosphere with a safety barrier. The IL10 Series can be lowered into a tank of water and the 4-20 mA signal will directly correspond to the level.
Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G 0.25% accuracy, all ranges 4-20 mA, loop powered Ranges from 4.2 feet (1.3 m) to 34.9 feet (10.6 m) IL10
FM
APPROVED
US
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 10-30 VDC Accuracy 0.25% of span 4-20 mA Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA 695 @ 24 VDC Overpressure Proof 30 psi, Burst 35 psi Operating Temperature -22 to 140F (-30 to 60C) NEMA 4X (IP65) Enclosure Rating Dimensions 1.1" diameter x 5.8" long (2.7 x 14.7 cm) Materials of Construction Entity Parameters Area Approvals Weight Warranty Stainless steel case Vmax = 30V, Imax = 100 mA, Ci = 22 nF, Li = 0.1 mH Intrinsically safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G CSA, FM, CE 2.6 lb (1.2 Kg) maximum 1 year
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
WIRING
Hazardous Safe Area Area MTL7706+ Intrinsically Safe Barrier Green Brown + 4 3 1 2
Power Bus
10-30 VDC + 250 1-5V
Blue
IL10
Shield Ground Here Only
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations. Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. When a IL10 Series transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7706 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two must be limited to 0.12 F. Total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700'/823m maximum Belden #8760 18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18 H/FT, 44 pF/FT).
MODEL IL10ANGGGDZG12Z IL10ANGUGDZG12Z IL10ANCNGDZG12Z IL10ANCPGDZG12Z IL10ANBCGDZG12Z DESCRIPTION Intrinsically-safe level transmitter 4.2 foot range with 10 foot lead Intrinsically-safe level transmitter 8.3 foot range with 20 foot lead Intrinsically-safe level transmitter 11.6 foot range with 20 foot lead Intrinsically-safe level transmitter 23.1 foot range with 30 foot lead Intrinsically-safe level transmitter 34.9 foot range with 40 foot lead RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 474 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% resistor long leads 1299 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995

MTL7706+ 250R-3-1 DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
455
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
INTRINSICALLY SAFE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER K1 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Ashcroft K1 Series intrinsically safe pressure transmitter is exceptionally stable and is virtually unaffected by shock, vibration, or orientation. Performance is directly traceable to NIST standards, and a calibration certicate is available for each unit upon request. These intrinsically safe (IS) transmitters are ideal for monitoring pressures in explosive atmospheres with barrier. FEATURES Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1, Group G; Class III Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D 0.5% accuracy, all ranges 4-20 mA, loop powered Ranges from 100-3000 psig (690-20,685 kPa)
NEW!
C
FM
APPROVED
US
SPECIFICATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Supply Voltage 10-36 VDC Accuracy 0.5% full scale Thermal Effect 0.03 full scale/F zero and span Output 4-20 mA Maximum Output Impedance 650 @ 24 VDC Overpressure Proof: 150%; Burst: 300% Temperature Compensation -20 to 160F (-29 to 71C) Operating Temperature -20 to 180F (-29 to 82C) Response Time 5 ms Materials Of Construction 304 stainless steel case
Process Connection Diaphragm Material Zero Span Adjust Dimensions Weight Area Approvals Entity Parameters Warranty
1'8" BNPT male 316 stainless steel 17-4 PH stainless steel Field adjustable 10% 4" L x 5/8" dia (10.2 x 1.6 cm) 0.65 lb (0.29 kg) Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups G; Class III UL File #E152893, FM Vmax=30V, Imax- 250 mA, Li = 0, Ci = 0.1 F 1 year
WIRING
Hazardous Safe Area Area MTL7706 Intrinsically Safe Barrier
BR+
4
1 2
Power Bus
20-35 VDC + 250 1-5V
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations. Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. When a K1 Series transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7706 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two must be limited to 0.12 F. Total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700'/823m maximum Belden #8760 18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18 H/FT, 44 pF/FT).
K1
Ground Here Only
MODEL K15M0142F2100X K15M0142F2200X K15M0142F2500X K15M0142F21KX K15M0142F23KX 250R-3-1 DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 MTL7706+ PT DESCRIPTION 4-20 mA intrinsically safe pressure transmitter 0-100 psig (690 kPa) 4-20 mA intrinsically safe pressure transmitter 0-200 psig (1379 kPa) 4-20 mA intrinsically safe pressure transmitter 0-500 psig (3448 kPa) 4-20 mA intrinsically safe pressure transmitter 0-1000 psig (6895 kPa) 4-20 mA intrinsically safe pressure transmitter 0-3000 psig (20,685 kPa) RELATED PRODUCTS 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% Resistor Long Leads Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings PAGE 1299 995 994 474
456
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES 100 psig static line pressure 0.25% or 0.5% accuracy down to 0.05 "W.C. Uni-directional or bidirectional ranges 300 Series cast stainless steel body NEMA 4X NIST certicate included
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
ASHCROFT INTRINSICALLY SAFE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER IXLDP
The Ashcroft Model IXLdp (XFM option) is an intrinsically safe, industrial-quality, differential pressure transmitter for use on air and other noncorrosive gases. The Model IXLdp is available with accuracies of 0.25% and 0.50% in pressure ranges of 0.1 "W.C. to 200 "W.C. uni-directional or bi-directional.
FM
APPROVED
US
IXLdp
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Entity Parameters Maximum Supply Voltage Maximum Supply Current Area Accuracy 12-36 VDC 4-20 mA @ 545 Vmax = 36V, Imax = 250 mA, Ci = 12 nF, Li =0 36V 250 mA Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III;Div 1 and 2, Groups A through G Nonincendive Class I, Div 2, Groups A through D; Class II, Div 2, Groups F, G, Class III 0.25 % or 0.5% Response Time 250 ms Operating Temperature -20 to 185F (-29 to 85C) Conduit Connection Two 1/2" female Process Connection Two 1/4" NPT female Enclosure NEMA 4X Maximum Static Pressure 100 psig Media Clean, dry, noncorrosive gas Proof Pressure 15 psid Burst Differential Pressure 50 psid Aprovals FM Weight 2 lb (0.9 kg) Warranty 1 year
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Access Cover (terminal block) Mounting Foot Mounting Foot 0.2 (0.5) 1.4 (3.6) 4.3 (10.9)
Zero Pot Location
2.7 (6.9) 0.2 Type Two Places Mounting Foot
1/2 NPSM Thread Type (both sides for conduit piping) 5.0 (12.7)
Access Cover (zero and span pots) 3.0 (7.6) 1/4 NPT Pressure Fittings High Low 0.7 (1.8)
2.5 (6.4)
0.7 (1.8) 4.6 (11.7)
2.7 (6.9) 0.8 (2.0)
Span Pot
1.4 (3.6) 3.0 (7.6)
INSTALLATION
The transducer should be used with clean, dry air or other dry, noncorrosive gases. The unit should be mounted with #8 or #10 screws using the three mounting feet provided. The transducer can be mounted in any orientation with virtually no effect on calibration. Any minor zero pressure offsets that are encountered can be adjusted using the zero-adjust potentiometer. The highand low-pressure connection ports are plugged to avoid debris entering the unit. The plugs should be left in place until the tubing and ttings are connected. The two 1/4" NPT pressure connections should be sealed to the transducer housing using Teon tape. Do not use dope-type sealant. March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
457
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
ASHCROFT INTRINSICALLY SAFE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER IXLDP
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations. Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturers instructions. When the Model IXLdp transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7706+ intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two must be limited to 0.12 F, and total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700'/823m maximum Belden #8760 18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18 H/FT, 44 pF/FT).
WIRING
NEW!
Power Bus
3 1 2
Hazardous Area Safe Area
Earth Ground
20-35 VDC
250 1-5V
4-20 mA 4
Ground Here Only
MODEL DESCRIPTION IX Differential pressure transmitter ACCURACY 3 0.25% accuracy 5 0.5% accuracy PRESSURE CONNECTION F 1/4" NPT female pressure connection OUTPUT SIGNAL 4 4-20 mA output signal ELECTRICAL CONNECTION S Screw terminals PRESSURE RANGE Differential or Gauge Compound P1IW 0.10" W.C. (24.9 Pa) P05IWL 0.05" W.C. (12.4 Pa) P25IW 0.25" W.C. (62.24 Pa) P1IWL 0.10" W.C. (24.9 Pa) P5IW 0.50" W.C. (124.6 Pa) P2IWL 0.20" W.C. (49.8 Pa) 1IW 1.00" W.C. (249.1 Pa) P25IWL 0.25" W.C. (62.24 Pa) 2IW 2.00" W.C. (498.2 Pa) P5IWL 0.50" W.C. (124.6 Pa) 2P5IW 2.50" W.C. (622.4 Pa) 1IWL 1.00" W.C. (249.1 Pa) 3IW 3.00" W.C. (747.3 Pa) 2IWL 2.00" W.C. (498.2 Pa) 5IW 5.00" W.C. (1245.5 Pa) 2P5IWL 2.50" W.C. (622.4 Pa) 10IW 10.00" W.C. (2491.0 Pa) 3IWL 3.00" W.C. (747.3 Pa) 15IW 15.00" W.C. (3734.5 Pa) 5IWL 5.00" W.C. (1245.5 Pa) 20IW 20.00" W.C. (4979.3 Pa) 10IWL 10.00" W.C. (2491.0 Pa) 25IW 25.00" W.C. (6224.1 Pa) 15IWL 15.00" W.C. (3734.5 Pa) 50IW 50.00" W.C. (12.4 kPa) 20IWL 20.00" W.C. (4979.3 Pa) 100IW 100.00" W.C. (24.9 kPa) 25IWL 25.00" W.C. (6224.1 Pa) 150IW 150.00" W.C. (37.3 kPa) 50IWL 50.00" W.C. (12.4 kPa) 200IW 200.00" W.C. (49.8 kPa) 100IWL 100.00" W.C. (24.9 kPa) OPTIONS XFM Factory mutual approval (required for intrinsically safe) IX 3 FO2 42 ST 10IW XFM Example: IX3FO242ST10IWXFMX41 Intrinsically safe differential pressure transducer with 0.25% accuracy, 4-20 mA output, and 10" W.C. range.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
250R-3-1 A-602 DCP-1.5-W MTL7706+
RELATED PRODUCTS 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% Resistor Long Leads Mounting kit for air filter applications. Includes two pressure tips, two 5-foot lengths of aluminum tubing and two adapters. Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters
PAGE 1299 995 474
458
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
FEATURES Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III Ranges from 0.07" to 20" W.C. (17.4 to 4981 Pa) Adjustable setpoint within range SPDT 10A contacts
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
FM
APPROVED
EXPLOSION PROOF AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH 1950G SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Dwyer 1950G Series explosion proof air differential pressure switch monitors differential air pressure in a hazardous environment. The 1950G Series has an external screw type setpoint adjustment and a NEMA 7 and 9 rated enclosure. The enclosure is anodized cast aluminum with explosion proof rating for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G. The optional Model A-602 pressure probe kit allows the 1950G Series to monitor lter pressure drop.
US
DIMENSIONS 0.26" dia (0.66) in Mounting Holes (2) (cm)

Range Adjustment Screw 5.43 4.87 (13.79) (12.37)
3.5 (8.89)
1/2" NPT Electrical Conduit Connection
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VDC 10%, 208 mA; 120/240 VAC @ 5 VA Switch SPDT, 10A @ 240 VAC/28 VDC Operating Temperature 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) Connections 1/8" NPT Diaphragm Buna-N Area Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, D, G; Class III Burst Pressure 10 psig (69 kPa) Approvals UL File #E62583, FM, CSA, CE, ATEX Weight 3 lb (1.4 kg) Warranty 1 year Supply Voltage
1/8" NPT High Pressure Port
1.68 (4.27)
1/8" NPT Low Pressure Port
Vent Drain Plug
1.43 (3.63)
0.38 (0.95)
WIRING
C. N.O. N.C. +
Closes on high differential pressure Opens on high differential pressure VAC
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from DP switch to maintain explosion proof rating.
MODEL DESCRIPTION 1950G Explosion proof air differential pressure switch OPERATING RANGE APPROXIMATE DEADBAND "W.C."(Pa) RANGE "W.C." Pa At Min Setpoint At Max Setpoint 00 0.06 (14.9) 0.04 (10) 0.07-0.15 17.4-37.3 0 0.11 (27.4) 0.06 (14.9) 0.15-0.5 37.3-124.5 1 0.29 (72.2) 0.11 (27.4) 99.6-398.5 0.4-1.6 5 0.9 (224) 348.7-1370 0.4 (99.6) 1.4-5.5 10 1.8 (448) 3.0-11.0 747.2-2740 0.9 (224) 20 3.0 (747) 1.2 (299) 996-4981 4.0-20 SUPPLY VOLTAGE B-24 24 VDC B-120 120 VAC B-240 240 VAC NON-ATEX NA For Non CE approval models 1950G 1 B-120 NA Example: 1950G-1-B-120 - NA 0.4-1.6" W.C.", explosion proof air differential pressure switch with 120 VAC supply voltage - non atex
A-602 ACK6F EYM-50
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Mounting kit for air filter applications. Includes two pressure tips, two 5-foot lengths of aluminum tubing and two adapters. Cement: 1.9 lb * (0.9 kg) Fiber: 0.3 LB (0.14 kg), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set * Consists of five 0.4 lb (0.19 kg) cement pouches 489 1/2" size, 1.06" turning radius, 1 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
459
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
FLOWLINE EXPLOSION PROOF LEVEL TRANSMITTER ECHOSAFE
DESCRIPTION The Flowline Model EchoSafe is an explosion proof, industrial-grade ultrasonic liquid-level transmitter with automatic temperature compensation. Liquid conductivity, clarity, foam, or suspended solids do not affect the highly accurate 4-20 mA output since no contact is made with the material being measured. FEATURES Class I Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III Division 1, Groups E, F, G Compact XP enclosure with viewing window and dual conduit ports Narrow (3") beam for use in tight locations Integral display Simple pushbutton calibration Suitable for a wide variety of liquids Not affected by foam, dirty liquids, etc. 8' to 24.6' range (20 cm to 7.5m) Fail-Safe intelligence with diagnostic feedback Display in inches or centimeters
NEW!
C
FM
APPROVED
US
EchoSafe
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 18-28 VDC (loop-powered) Accuracy 0.2% of maximum range 0.079" (2 mm) Resolution Range XP88-0 8" to 24.6' (20 cm to 7.5 m) XP89-0 8" to 32.8' (20 cm to 10 m) Signal Output 4-20 mA or 20-4 mA, two-wire Maximum Output Impedance 250 @ 24 VDC Display Type LCD, 6-digits Display Units Inch, cm, ft, m, percent Fail Safe 4 mA, 20 mA, 21 mA, 22 mA, or hold last Operating Temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Temperature Compensation Pressure Rating Enclosure Rating Mounting Conduit Connection Materials Of Construction Area Approvals Weight Warranty Automatic over entire range 30 psig (207 kPa) NEMA 4X 2" NPT threads two 1/2" NPT Transducer: PVDF, Enclosure: Aluminum, Window: Glass Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups E,F,G: Class III FM, RoHS, CE 6 lb (2.7 kg) 1 year
WIRING
The EchoSafe requires 14-28 VDC power and a load that receives a 4-20 mA current input. Connect the red wire of the transmitter to the positive VDC terminal on the power supply. Connect the black wire on the transmitter to the (+) terminal on the load. Connect the () of the load to the () of the power supply.
(black) (red)
EchoSafe
4-20 mA Signal
UP
SELECT
DOWN
FAST
24 VDC Power Supply
460
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
4.44" (11.3) 1/2" NPT 3.89" (9.9) 6.06" (15.4) 2" NPT
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
FLOWLINE EXPLOSION PROOF LEVEL TRANSMITTER ECHOSAFE
EchoSafe
UP
SELECT
DOWN
FAST
6.06" (15.4)
4.00" (10.2)
Side View
Front View
Top View
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
MODEL XP88-00 XP89-00 DESCRIPTION Explosion proof level transmitter, 8" to 24.6' Explosion proof level transmitter, 8" to 32.8'
LM50-1001
ACCESSORIES 2" Mounting bracket (included with "B" option)
ACK6F DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 EYM-50
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Cement: 30 oz * (850g) Fiber: 5 oz (142g), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set * Consists of five 6 oz (187g) cement pouches 489 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 1/2" size, 1.06" turning radius, 1 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
461
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF WATER FLOW SWITCH FS7-4E
DESCRIPTION The McDonnell & Miller Model FS7-4E explosion proof water ow switches are used to prove ow on liquid lines in hazardous areas. The FS7-4E has an external adjustment of setpoint so one does not have to remove the explosion proof housing. A trimmable paddle allows for handling 1 1/4" to 16" pipe sizes.
NEW!
FS7-4E Installation Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty Vertical 9.7" H x 7.3" W x 4.6" D (24.7 x 18.4 x 11.7 cm) UL File E33552, CSA 12.3 lb (5.6 Kg) 1 year 2 1/2" 3" 4" 33.3 (126) 21.1 (79.9) 5" 6" 8" 104 (393.6) 89 (336.9) 44.4 (168.1) 56.3 (213.1) 31 (117.3) 84 (317.9) 51 (193) 48.7 (184.3) 15.4 (58.3) 114.8 (434.5) 210 (794.9) 71 (270.6) 131 (495.8)
FLOW
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Type Media Temperature Connection Maximum Pressure Enclosure Area SPDT 32 to 300F (0 to 149C) 1/2" female conduit 300 psi (2068 kPa) NEMA 7 & 9 Explosion proof Class I, Division 1, Group C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
ADJUSTMENTS: TYPICAL FLOW RATES

Line Pipe Size (inch) Minimum Minimum Maximum Maximum GPM(LPM) Flow No Flow Flow No Flow 1 1/4" 4.8 (18.2) 3 (11.4) 7.7 (29.1) 5.9 (22.3) 1 1/2" 2"
6.3 (23.8) 9.9 (37.5) 15.3 (57.9) 24.4 (92.4) 3.6 (13.6) 5.9 (22.3) 9.5 (36)
10 (37.9) 15.8 (59.8) 23.7 (89.7) 35.5 (134.4) 61.4 (232.4) 7 (26.5) 11 (41.6) 17 (64.3) 29.2 (110.5) 37.7 (142.7)
WIRING
ELECTRICAL RATINGS MOTOR RATINGS AC full load amps AC locked rotor amps
C NO NC
120V 240V 7.4 3.7 44.4 22.2
NO FLOW
Pilot duty 125 VA @ 120/240VAC 50/60 Hz
C NO NC
MODEL FS7-4E DESCRIPTION Explosion proof water ow switch
462
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
FLOWLINE INTRINSICALLY SAFE ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER ELP
The Flowline Model ELP Echo Touch is an industrialgrade ultrasonic liquid-level transmitter with automatic temperature compensation. Liquid conductivity, clarity, foam, or suspended solids do not affect the highly accurate 4-20 mA output since no contact is made with the material being measured. When coupled with Model MTL7706 intrinsic safety barrier, the intrinsically safe design and NEMA 4X(IP65) housing allow use in nearly all atmospheres containing hazardous gases, dusts, or bers.
Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Division 1 Continuous level measurement with 4-20 mA output Narrow (eight-degree) beam for use in tight locations Simple pushbutton calibration Automatic temperature compensation NEMA 4X (IP65) housing Suitable for a wide variety of liquids Not affected by foam, dirty liquids, etc. 0.5" to 18' range (0.15 to 5.5m)
ELP
8
DIMENSIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
in (cm)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 20-35 VDC Accuracy 0.25% of span 0.125" (0.3 cm) Resolution Range 5" to 18' (15 cm to 5.5 m) Signal Output 4-20 mA Maximum Output Impedance 600 @ 24 VDC Pulse Rate Two per second Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Temperature Compensation Automatic over entire range Pressure Rating 30 psig (207 kPa) @ 77F (25C) derated 0.93 psig per F (11.6 kPa perC ) above 77F (25C) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X (IP65) Mounting 2" NPT threads Conduit Connection 1/2" NPT Area Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Division 1 Approvals CSA approved, CE Entity Parameters Vmax = 32V, Imax = 130 mA, Ci = 0 F, Li = 0 mH Weight ELP: 3.0 lb (1.4 kg), ELP-B 3.6 lb (1.6 kg) Warranty 1 year March 2014
2.8 (7.11)
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations. Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturers instructions. When the Model ELP transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7706+ intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two must be limited to 0.12 F, and total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 2700'/823m maximum Belden #8760 18/2 shielded twisted pair cable 0.18 H/FT, 44 pF/F).
WE MAKE IT EASY.
6.3 (16.00)
4.9 (12.45)
3.6 (9.14) 1.3 (3.30)
2" NPT
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
463
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
INSTALLATION
FLOWLINE INTRINSICALLY SAFE ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER ELP
Hazardous Area
+ -
Safe Area

3 1
NEW!
Power Bus
4-20 mA
20-35 VDC +
ELP Level Probe

Max Cable C = 0.12 F L = 4.0 mH
1-5V 250
Ground Here Only
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
MOUNTING
TABLE 1. BEAM RADIUS
B Option Side Mount Bracket* The ELP can be mounted through any threaded (2" NPT) opening in a tank top or with the optional side-mount bracket. Care should be taken to locate the ELP far enough from tank walls to avoid inter-ference with the beam. Avoid locations near motors or other sources of vibration.
D
* For depths (D) greater than 5' (1.5m), the side-mount bracket must be extended away from the tank wall according to Table 1. The side-mount bracket provides 4.5" (11.4 cm) clearance from the wall only.
feet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
DEPTH meters 0.3 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.4 3.7 4.0 4.3 4.6 4.9 5.2 5.5
RADIUS inches cm 1.2 3.1 2.1 5.2 2.9 7.3 3.7 9.5 4.6 11.6 5.4 13.7 6.2 15.9 7.1 18.0 7.9 20.1 8.8 22.3 9.6 24.4 10.4 26.5 11.3 28.7 12.1 30.8 13.0 32.9 13.8 35.1 14.6 37.2 15.5 39.3
MODEL ELP ELP-B DESCRIPTION Intrinsically-safe ultrasonic level transmitter Intrinsically-safe ultrasonic level transmitter with side-mount bracket
250R-3-1 DCP-1.5-W MTL7706+
RELATED PRODUCTS 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% Resistor Long Leads Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters
PAGE 1299 995 474
464
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Explosion proof construction Stainless steel oat Magnetically actuated Good for specic gravities 0.7 and up CE, CSA and UL listed; FM approved 1-1/2" NPT mounting Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF FLOAT SWITCH L4
The Model L4 explosion proof oat switch is a heavy duty explosion proof switch for the most critical applications.
FM
APPROVED
US
SPECIFICATIONS
Limits Operating Pressure Contact Rating Installation Area Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty Temperature: -4 to 275F (-20 to 135C) 100 psig (690 kPa) SPDT, 10A, 125/250 VAC Horizontal Explosion proof Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G 19-5/32" L (48.7 cm) x 3.34" (8.5 cm) UL File #E31755, CSA, CE, FM 4.3 lb (1.95 kg) 1 year
WARNING: Models L4 and V4-2-U are not listed for use in areas classied as Group A (acetylene) or Group B (hydrogen and others). For these atmospheres, an intrinsically safe system using standard dry-contact switch, intrinsic safety barriers, and voltage-limiting circuitry is recommended.
EXPLOSION PROOF FLOW SWITCH V4-2-U

DESCRIPTION The Model V4-2-U explosion proof ow switch is a dependable solution for protecting against low ow conditions in pipelines for liquids, gases, and owing solids. FEATURES Explosion-proof construction Stainless steel vanes Accommodates pipe sizes 1-1/2" and up Magnetically actuated CE, CSA, and UL listed; FM approved 1-1/2" NPT mounting Class I Division 1 Groups C, D; Class II Division 1 Groups E, F, G
C
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
FM
APPROVED
US
SPECIFICATIONS
Limits Operating Pressure Contact Rating Installation Area Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty Temperature: -4 to 275F (-20 to 135C) 1000 psig (6900 kPa) SPDT, 10A @ 125/250 VAC Within 5 degrees of vertical Explosion proof Class I, Division 1, Group C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E,F,G 13-1/2" (34.3 cm) overall length; 6-3/4" (17.1 cm) top of cover to bottom of threads UL listed File #E31755, CSA, CE, FM 4.5 lb (2.0 kg) 1 year
MODEL V4-2-U L4 ACK6F EYM-75 DESCRIPTION Explosion proof ow switch Explosion proof oat switch RELATED PRODUCTS Cement: 30 oz * (850g) Fiber: 5 oz (142g), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set * Consists of five 6 oz (187g) cement pouches 3/4" size, 1.19" turning radius, 2 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction PAGE 489 488
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
465
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF GAS MONITOR / TRANSMITTER SPXCD SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Honeywell Analytics XCD Series explosion proof gas monitor/transmitter provides comprehensive monitoring of ammmable, toxic, and oxygen gas hazards in potentially explosive atmospheres. Users can modify detector operation using the LCD and magnet switches without ever needing to open the unit. This enables one-man, non-intrusive operation and reduces routine maintenance time and costs. The XCD series is suitable for both indoor and outdoor use.
NEW!
C
FEATURES User friendly and intuitive tri-colored backlit display with digits, bar graph, and icons Fully congurable via magnetic switches Selectable sink or source 4-20 mA output Built in Alarm and Fault relays MODBUS communications for remote diagnostics/ conguration Removable plug in display module provides easy access to terminal area
FM
APPROVED
US
Integral mounting bracket 2 x M20 or 3/4" NPT cable/conduit entries Epoxy painted aluminum alloy housing Class I, Division 1 Groups B, C, and D; Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1 Groups E, F, and G; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Supply Voltage 16 to 32 VDC @ 208.3 mA Operating Temperature -40 to 149F (-40 to 65C) Conduit Connection 2 x 3/4" NPT Materials Of Construction Housing: Epoxy painted aluminum alloy LM25; Sensor: stainless steel IP66 Housing Type Mounting Integral mounting plate with 4 x mounting holes suitable for M8 bolts Communication RS485, MODBUS RTU Inrush Current 800 mA @ 24 VDC maximum 4 - 20 mA sink or source Output Current Relays 3 x 5A@250VAC. Selectable normally open or normally closed (switch) and energized/de-energized (programmable). Alarm relays default normally open/de-energized. Fault relay default normally open/ energized 15 x screw terminals 20 to 14 AWG Class I, Division 1 Groups B, C, and D; Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1 Groups E, F, and G; Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G, UL File #E186567, CE 4.4 lb (2 kg) 1 Year
Terminals Wire Size Approvals
Weight Warranty
WIRING
NC RLY 1 24 VDC Power Supply + + + 1 2 3 4 5 6 24 VDC 0 VDC 4-20 mA Signal Common TxD RxD RLY 1 RLY 2 COM NO NC COM NO NC COM NO
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
4-20 mA Signal
Modbus Communication
SPXCD
466
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
GAS Electrochemical Sensors Oxygen (O2) 25.0% V/V only 10 to 100 ppm 25.0% V/V 50 ppm n/a Hydrogen Sulde (H2S) Carbon Monoxide (CO) Hydrogen (H2) Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) Flammable Infrared Sensors Methane (CH4) Propane (C3H8) Carbon Dioxide (CO2) 20 to 100% 20 to 100% LEL 2% Vol only 100% LEL 100% LEL 2% V/V 10% LEL 10% LEL N/A 1.0 ppm 100 ppm n/a 5.0 ppm 100 to 1000 ppm 1000 ppm only 10 to 50 ppm 300 ppm 1000 ppm 10 ppm Catalytic Bead Sensors 20 to 100% LEL 100% LEL 10% LEL MODEL SPXCDULNCXM SPXCDULNFXM SPXCDULNHXM SPXCDULNNXM SPXCDULNO1M SPXCDULNG1M SPXCDULNRXM SPXCDULNPXM SPXCDULNB1M S3KCAL SPXCDCC SPXCDDMK SPXCDMTBR SPXCDSPD
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF GAS MONITOR / TRANSMITTER SPXCD SERIES
User Selectable Default Default Alarm Points User Selectable Default Response Steps Calibration Gas Calibration Accuracy Full Scale Range Range Time (T90) A1 A2 Range Point 0.5% Vol. 1 ppm
20.9 V/V (xed)
20.9 V/V 25 ppm 100 ppm 500 ppm 5 ppm
<30 sec <50 sec <30 sec <65 sec <40 sec
19.5 V/V 23.5 V/V 10 ppm 20 ppm
30 to 70% of selected full scale range
6 ppm 100 ppm 200 ppm 25 ppm 200 ppm 400 ppm 3 ppm or 5.0 ppm 10.0 ppm 20%
25 to 95% of selected full scale range
50% LEL
<25 sec
1.5% LEL 20% LEL 40% LEL
50% LEL 30 to 70% of selected full scale range 50% LEL 1% V/V
<40 sec <40 sec <40 sec
1.5% LEL 20% LEL 40% LEL
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
1.5% LEL 20% LEL 40% LEL 2% Vol. 0.40% V/V 0.80% V/V Rising Alarm
Falling Alarm
DESCRIPTION UL/CSA Approved Carbon Monoxide 0-250ppm, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure UL/CSA Approved Combustibles 0-100% LEL, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure UL/CSA Approved Hydrogen Sulde 0-50ppm, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure UL/CSA Approved Nitrogen Dioxide 0-50ppm, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure UL/CSA Approved Oxygen 0-25%, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure UL/CSA Approved Hydrogen 0-1000ppm, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure UL Approved Methane 0-100% LEL, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure UL Approved Propane 0-100% LEL, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure UL Approved Carbon Dioxide 0-2% VOL, 4-20mA, 3 Relays, ModBus, Aluminum Enclosure Calibration cap Collecting cone for use with lighter than air gases Duct mounting kit Mounting bracket (inc. bolts, nuts, brackets) Sunshade / Deluge Protection
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
467
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
DESCRIPTION The Det-Tronics Model 30-3003D explosion proof duct smoke detector provides early detection of smoke and products of combustion in air moving through HVAC ducts. An intake tube accomplishes air sampling. A return tube, duct enclosure, junction box, and instruction manual are included with the base unit. The detector and junction box are listed for use in atmospheres with hazardous gases or dusts (Groups C, D, E ,F ).
DET-TRONICS EXPLOSION PROOF DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR 30-3003D
NEW!
30-3003D
FEATURES Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Trouble-free photoelectric detector 24 VDC operation Contacts (3): N.O. (alarm), N.C. (supervisory), SPDT (auxiliary)
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Contact Rating Alarm Auxillary Air Velocity Area Enclosure Rating Sampling Tube Return Tube Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty 20-28 VDC @ 10 mA standby, 50 mA alarm SPST, 1A @ 30 VDC SPDT, 2A @ 30 VDC 600-4000 fpm (3-20 mps) Explosion proof Class I, Division 2, Groups C,D; Class II, Division 2, Groups E, F, G; Class III Detector :NEMA 4X berglass; Detector and junction box: NEMA3, 7CD, 9EF, 12 3/4" galvanized EMT in 1', 3', 6', or 10'L (0.3, 0.9, 1.8, or 3m) 12"L (30.5 cm), included 12.75" H x 3.5" W x 6" D (32.4 x 8.9 x 15.2 cm) CSA 13.0 lb (5.9 kg) 1 year
WIRING
(yellow) (yellow) (violet) (violet) (black) (red) 1 2 3 4 5 6 TB-2 1 + 24 VDC Power Supply 2 Normally Closed 3 Supervisory 4 Contacts 5 Normally Open Alarm Contacts TB-3 1 2 C Auxiliary 3 NO SPDT Contacts 4 NC 5 Ground
Factory Wiring to Detector
Wiring Terminal Box
Note: Circuit shown in the normal standby energized mode.
468
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
6.12 (155) 14.75 (375)
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
DET-TRONICS EXPLOSION PROOF DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR 30-3003D
11.62 (295)
Alarm Indicator
9.38 (238)
0.31 (7.9) DIA Mounting 4 Places
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code required distance from junction box to maintain explosion proof rating.
MOUNTING
Mount the detector in an air duct using the provided template. Detector must be mounted at least six duct widths from the fan or other sources of turbulence.
Entire Width of Duct Stopper Air Flow
The intake sampling tube has holes drilled the entire length of the tube and should extend the entire width of the duct. The holes must be facing into the air ow. 1. Cut the intake sampling tube to the desired length. 2. Firmly insert the stopper (packaged in the installation kit) in the end of the intake sampling tube. 3. Follow instruction sheet provided with each detector.
Intake Tube
Exhaust Tube
Top of Detector
MODEL 30-300D-1 30-3003D-3 30-3003D-6 30-3003D-10 ACK6F EYM-100 DESCRIPTION Explosion proof duct smoke detector, photoelectric with 1' duct sampling tube Explosion proof duct smoke detector, photoelectric with 3' duct sampling tube Explosion proof duct smoke detector, photoelectric with 6' duct sampling tube Explosion proof duct smoke detector, photoelectric with 10' duct sampling tube RELATED PRODUCTS Cement: 30 oz * (850g) Fiber: 5 oz (142g), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set * Consists of five 6 oz (187g) cement pouches 1" size, 1.38" turning radius, 4 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction PAGE 489 488
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
469
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
BALMAC VIBRATION TRANSMITTER / SWITCH 550-X
DESCRIPTION The Balmac Model 550-X vibration switch provides low cost, reliable vibration protection for rotating machinery operating within the range of 120-60,000 rpm. The switch's vibration sensor, mounted perpendicular to the unit's base, responds to the velocity signal (in/sec) and effects automatic shut-down or alarm when pre-set limits are exceeded. The unit may be mounted with the sensitive axis in any plane (horizontal, vertical or axial), even in an inverted position. Two limit set points are provided. One is set for the maximum allowable vibration (in/sec), while the other is set for a percentage of that setting, tripping the alarm relay when that percentage is reached. A built-in, adjustable time delay prevents triggering due to transient vibrations. The switch can be wired for latch and remote reset or for automatic reset when vibration falls below set point. The unit has a 4-20 mA output that may be used with a panel meter or data logger, permitting analysis of vibration trends. Once the switch has been installed and the limits set, it requires no attention. The Model 550-X vibration switch is enclosed in an explosion proof housing suitable for Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G.
NEW!
C
FM
APPROVED
US
550-X
DIMENSIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
in (cm)
FEATURES Reliable performance Dual SPDT relay and 4-20 mA output Easy to install Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
0.38 (0.95)
0.38 (0.95)
Two Mounting Holes 5/16" dia
6.75 (17.15) 6 (15.24)
4.06 (10.32) 4.19
550-X
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Limits Limit #1 (alarm) 100-130 VAC, 50/60 Hz Remote Reset Circuit closure between latch and common will reset both outputs Area Explosion proof housing Class I, Div 1, Groups C, D: Class II, Div 1, Groups E, F, G; NEMA 7CD, 9EG Conduit Connections 3/4" NPT Wiring Terminations Accept 12 AWG wire Operating Temperature -30 to 165F (-34 to 74C) Mounting 1/4" hardware, 3 mounting holes Dimensions 4.81"W x 7.13"H x 4.5"D (12.2 x 18.1 x 11.4 cm) Approvals CSA Weight 5.5 lb (2.5 kg) Warranty 2 years
Set as a percent of Limit #2 (shutdown) Limit #2 (shutdown) Set at a velocity level in inches/sec Measurement Range 0.1-2.75 in/sec (2.5-70 mm/sec) Frequency Range 2-1000 Hz (120-60,000 rpm) Time Delay 1-30 seconds Relay Output SPDT relay 5A @ 125 VAC; 5A @ 28 VDC Signal Output 4-20 mA DC Accuracy 5% Maximum Output Impedance 500 Vibration Sensitive Axis Perpendicular to the base, omnidirectional mounting
470
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING TYPICAL INSTALLATION
VS VS VS VS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
BALMAC VIBRATION TRANSMITTER / SWITCH 550-X
The wiring access is through the 3/4" NPT conduit hole on the side of the switch enclosure. Wiring subject to physical damage should be adequately protected. When installing electrical conduit, a short length (12"/30 cm) of exible conduit must be used between the vibration switch and an associated junction box. This construction will provide some vibration isolation in the conduit line. Conduit and ttings should conform to the environment of the vibration switch location. Weather-resistant or rain-tight ttings should be used to protect the switch wiring from a humid or corrosive atmosphere. Make all connections in accordance with national and local codes. Note: Model EYM-75 conduit seal is required within 18" (45 cm) of the enclosure to maintain explosion proof rating.
4-20 mA Signal
4-20mA
Reset (N.O.) Jumper for Non-Latching Operation
Mute Latch Common C N/C N/O C N/C N/O L2 L1
Form C Contacts to Alarm and Shutdown Circuits
Limit #1 Alarm Limit #2 Shutdown
115 VAC 50/60 Hz
8
OPERATION
The Model 550-X is a self-contained, vibration protection limit switch. It guards against destructive levels of vibration by tripping a relay that has a user-adjustable limit setpoint in terms of vibration velocity (in/sec). This relay output is connected to an alarm or control system to provide a warning or shutdown. It mounts at the monitoring point and is enclosed in a water-tight, heavy-cast aluminum housing. Terminals are provided for remote or manual reset. A 4-20 mA output for recording or metering can connect to a remote readout panel meter or BAS controller.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Centrifugal Compressor
Reciprocating Compressor
VS
VS
Y-Type Compressor
Vertical Pump
CAUTION: Ensure that the switch is rigidly attached to the monitoring point for the proper sensing of the vibration.
VS
VS
VS VS VS
Engine Gear Compressor
Cooling Tower Fan
MODEL 550-X DESCRIPTION Vibration transmitter/switch with 0.1-2.75 in/sec (2.5-70 mm/sec) range, two limits, and NEMA 7CD, 9EFG enclosure
ACK6F EYM-50
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Cement: 1.9 lb * (0.9 kg) Fiber: 0.3 LB (0.14 kg), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set * Consists of ve 0.4 lb (0.19 kg) cement pouches 489 1/2" size, 1.06" turning radius, 1 oz Kwiko cement required, Malleable Iron construction 488
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
471
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
INTRINSICALLY SAFE VIBRATION TRANSMITTER 140T- HAZARDOUS
DESCRIPTION The Balmac Model 140T intrinsically safe vibration transmitter is low cost, yet highly accurate and rugged. It is ideal for use with all machines, even those which previously may have been considered uneconomical to monitor. The Model 140T easily mounts by use of a standard 1/4"-20 stud. It is a two-wire, loop-powered transmitter which can feed the vibration level of operating machinery to a data logger, milliamp monitor, or process control computer. Solid state accelerometer and circuit design provide a 4-20 mA signal proportional to vibration velocity. Intrinsically safe, it can be used in hazardous environments when coupled with a Model MTL7706 Intrinsic Safety barrier.
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1" NPT 0.38 (0.95) 1.75 (4.44) 1.13 (2.86) 1.31 dia (3.33) Mounting Connection 1/4-20 0.38 (0.95)
FEATURES
Reliable performance Easy to install 4-20 mA output Intrinsically safe Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
APPLICATION Vibration monitoring can help alert the maintenance staff to the destructive effects of vibration on mechanical system equipment such as air handler fans, cooling tower fans, pumps, and compressors.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency Range Isolation Maximum Output Impedance Signal Output Accuracy Vibration Range 12-50 VDC, black=negative, red=positive, reverse polarity protection 7-1300 Hz 3% (420-78,000 rpm) 500V, circuit-to-case RL = 50 (Vs-12); 600 @ 24 VDC 4-20 mA 5% to 10% of scale Output 4-20 mA, proportional to vibration level, 0-1 in/sec (0-25.4 mm/ sec), Output 4-20 mA, proportional to vibration level, 0-2 in/sec (0-50.8 mm/sec) Operating Temperature -4 to 185F (-20 to 85C) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4, weatherproof, Cadmium-plated steel Process Connection 1" MNPT Mounting 1/4''-20 stud, 3/8" deep Approvals Weight Warranty UL listed le #E126345 0.41 lb (0.18 kg) 1 year
472
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
INSTALLATION WIRING
MODEL 140T-1 140T-2
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
INTRINSICALLY SAFE VIBRATION TRANSMITTER 140T- HAZARDOUS
The mounting orientation can be in any position. This position should be in an area for the best vibration signal denition or where there is a good transfer of the machines (fans, pumps, etc.) vibrations. The best location will vary from machine to machine. The location of the transmitter should be selected carefully. When selecting the site for the mounting location, it is helpful to survey the site with the aid of a vibration meter.
Wiring subject to physical damage should be adequately Area protected. When installing electrical conduit, it is recommended that a short length (12"/30 cm) of exible conduit be used between the transmitter and an associated junction box. This construction will provide some vibration isolation in the conduit line. Conduit and ttings should 4-20 mA conform to the environment of the transmitter location. Weather-resistant or rain-tight ttings should be used to 140T protect the transmitter wiring from a humid or corrosive Max Cable C=0.08 F atmosphere. Make all connections in accordance with L= 4.0 mH national and local codes.
Hazardous Safe Area
MTL7706 + IS Barrier
3 4
1 2
20-35 VDC +
250
1-5V
Ground Here Only
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
CAUTION: Intrinsically safe devices require the use of an intrinsic safety barrier when applied in hazardous locations. Provide wiring and grounding strictly in accordance with manufacturers instructions. When the Model 140T transmitter is combined with the Model MTL7706 intrinsic safety barrier, total cable capacitance between the two must be limited to 0.08 F, and total cable inductance must be limited to 4.0 mH (equivalent to 1800'/548m maximum Belden #8760 18/2 twisted pair cable 0.18 H/FT, 44 pF/F). You must ensure that the transmitter is rigidly attached to the monitoring point for the proper sensing of the vibration.
DESCRIPTION Intrinsically-safe vibration transmitter, range 0-1 in/sec (25.4 mm/sec) Intrinsically-safe vibration transmitter, range 0-2 in/sec (50.8 mm/sec)
250R-3-1 DCP-1.5-W MTL7706+
RELATED PRODUCTS 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% resistor long leads Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters
PAGE 1299 995 474
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
473
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS MTL5000, MTL7000, MTL7700 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The MTL7000, MTL7700 and MTL5000 Series of ultraslim intrinsic safety barriers are the worldwide standard in protection and accuracy for intrinsically safe sensing and controlling devices in hazardous locations. The electronic design limits the amount of electrical energy that can be transmitted into the hazardous area to a level below the ignition energy of even the worst-case explosive mixture of fuel and air. This level of protection remains intact even in the event of two simultaneous faults, thus providing the highest possible safety rating for this type of system. All MTL7000, MTL7700 and MTL5000 Series barriers are FM approved for use in intrinsically safe systems under the entity concept and can thus be applied with the widest possible array of intrinsically safe devices.Designed for ease of installation, these barriers provide a positive intrinsic safety ground through the DIN rail. Isolating spacers are available for applications in which the intrinsic safety ground must be separate from the mounting panel's earth ground (ANSI / ISA RP-12.6 species grounding requirements).
NEW!
C
FM
APPROVED
US
MLT7700 SERIES
FEATURES
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
FM entity approval Class I, II, and III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G BASEEFA approval EEx [ia], IIC DIN rail mounting with integral intrinsic safety ground Compact size
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Installation and approval side label 3 1 2 3.543 (9 cm)
APPLICATION According to the entity concept, barriers must be selected to limit the available hazardous area voltage (V) and current (I) to levels below the rating of the intrinsically safe device (Vmax, Imax). Also, the combined capacitance (C) and inductance (L) of the intrinsically safe device and cabling must be less than the maximum ratings for the barrier (La, Ca). The great majority of applications can be satised with one of the six key barrier types stocked by Kele. Other types are available to suit most every application, contact Kele for assistance. Refer to the Hazardous Location Application Guide in the Technical Reference section for more detailed barrier selection procedures.
Hazardous Area Terminals

4
Safe Area Terminals
Hazardous Terminals
4.134 (10.5 cm) Product top label Color-coded top label

0.496 (1.26 cm)
MTL7700 SERIES
474
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SAFETY SPECIFICATIONS
Application Model V 4-20 mA Two-wire transmitter DI 200 Series flow sensors Controller output 4-20 mA Dry contact/Dry contact Digital output MTL7706+ 28 MTL7765ac 15 MTL7728+ 28 MTL5011B MTL7728+ 10.5 28
* The MTL5011B is isolated end to end.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Entity Safety Parameters I C(max) L(max) (mA) (F) (mH) 93 300 0.083 4.2 150 93 100 300 800 300 0.58 0.12 2.4 0.083 1.45 4.2 165 4.2
Max Voltage 35 12.5 27 35 35
End to End Resistance () N/A 124 333 N/A * 333
14 93
ADDITIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
MTL7706+ (for loop-powered 4-20 mA transmitters) Supply Voltage 20-35 VDC Current 45 mA typical @ 20 mA with24 VDC supply @ mA 20 mA with20@ VDC supply Supply Current 60 mA max 45 tyipica 20 mAl with 24 VDC supply; 60 mA maximum @ 20 mA with a 20 VCD supply Transmitter voltage 16 VDC min @ 20 mA with 250 load Supply Voltage 20-35 VDC 11 VDC min 2 @ 20 mA with 500 load Accuracy 500 max Safe area load Maximum Safe Area Voltage 250 VAC/VDC 4-20 range Accuracy Safe Area Load 2 A over 500 mA maximum Max safe area voltage 16 250 VAC/VDC Transmitter VDC minimum @ 20 mA with 250 load; 11 VDC @ 20 mA with 500 loadEach explosion proof box Area Class I, II, III, Div 1, Groups A, B, C,D, E, for F, Gsurface applications and includes 3/4" FNPT tapped conduit entry on the top side. has mounting ears Agency approvals FM BASEEFA EEx [ia] IIC Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) MTL7765ac (for DI 200 Series ow sensors and other generalAC and DC systems) Working voltage 12.0 VDC @ 10 A leakage current Max safe area voltage 250 VAC/VDC Area Class I, II, III, Div 1, Groups A, B, C,D, E, F, G Agency approvals FM BASEEFA EEx [ia] IIC Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) MTL5011B (dry contact to dry contact isolator) Supply voltage 20-35 VDC, 40 mA max Contacts 2A @ 250 VAC, 40 VDC Max safe area voltage 250 VAC/VDC Area Class I, II, III, Div 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G Agency approvals FM/UL BASEEFA EEx [ia] IIC Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) MTL 7728+ (for switched digital outputs) Supply voltage 10-35 VDC (regulated) Supply current 1.5 mA plus load current, actively limited to 50 mA totalto protect safety fusing (50 mA) Output current (Iout) Up to 35 mA Max safe area voltage 250 VAC/VDC Area Class I, I, III, Div 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G Agency approvals FM BASEEFA EEx ia IIC Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg)
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
WARNING: Check compatibility of the electrical safety parameters of the eld equipment with those of the barriers to make sure that the combination is safe. If an intrinsically safe device does not have entity approval, it must be paired with a barrier specically listed in its intrinsic safety drawing (control drawing).
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
475
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
WIRING
6 5
I/P 680 22 k
3 2 1
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
NEW!
Output SPDT
Power Bus Power 20-35 VDC 250 1-5V
3 4-20 mA 4 1 2 4-20 mA
Resistors only required for line fault detection
Vs- 20-35 VDC Vs+
Dry Contact to Dry Contact Digital Input
MTL5011B
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Two-wire Transmitter
Ground Here Only
4-20 mA Input from Hazardous Area Hazardous Area Safe Area 4-20 mA Signal to Controlled Device or Display
3 4 1 2
MTL7706+
4-20 mA Signal from Controller
Shield
Ground Here Only 4-20 mA Output to Hazardous Area Hazardous Area Safe Area LED, Alarm, Solenoid, etc.
3 4 1 2
MTL7728+
Digital Output
10-35 VDC (regulated)
Iout
Ground Here Only
Digital Output to Hazardous Area
MTL7728+
476
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING (CONTINUED)
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

3 4 1 2
Shield SIG COM UFT-1
RED BLK
DI 200 Series Flow Sensors
Shield
Ground Here Only
DI 200 Series Flow Sensors
MTL7765ac
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
MODEL MTL5011B MTL7706+ MTL7728+ MTL7765AC
DESCRIPTION Isolator for digital (dry contact) inputs, SPDT Intrinsic safety barrier, 4-20 mA two-wire transmitters Active barrier for 4-20 mA outputs to hazardous area devices Intrinsic safety barrier
250R-3-1 DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 DIN-3F
RELATED PRODUCTS 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% resistor long leads Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant
PAGE 1299 995 994 860
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
477
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF WHISKER SWITCH 10316H2176
DESCRIPTION The Model 10316H2176 explosion proof limit switch combined with the Model E50KL421 whisker spring rod offers an ideal solution for sensing equipment position in extreme environments. The switch also carries standard NEMA ratings for most environments. Isolated normally-open and normallyclosed contacts are included. The aluminum housing and stainless steel whisker gives corrosion resistance.
NEW!
10316H2176 E50LK421
FEATURES One-way gasket keeps liquids out, but allows gases to escape Aluminum housing offers corrosion resistance Whisker spring rod gives mounting options NEMA 1,4, 7, 9, 13 ratings
SPECIFICATIONS
Switch Materials Of Construction Conduit Entrance Mounting Enclosure Rating 1 N.O. & N.C., 120 VAC; 60A make, 6A break
DIMENSIONS
228.6 (9.0) 2.29 DIA. (0.9) STEEL SPRING ROD
Cast aluminum die cast 3/4" pipe tap Surface mount NEMA 1, 4, 13, 7 Division 1, Class I BCD, 9 Division 1, Class II EFG (Note: a conduit seal-off kit is required for these switches) Operating Temperature -20 to 200F (-29 to 93C) Materials Of Construction Stainless steel Rod Diameter 0.09 in (0.23 cm) Rod Length 11.612 in (29.5 cm) Minimum Return Torque 4.5 in-oz Weight 10316H2176 1.65 lb (0.75 kg) E50LK421 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Warranty 1 year
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
.685 (1.7) 0.257 (0.7) DIA. 4 MTG. HOLES
0.277 (0.7)
0.5 (1.3)
3.08 (7.8)
295.15 (11.62)
5.35 (13.6)
0.325 (0.8) 3.5 (8.9)
3/4 - 14 TAPER PIPE TAP
4.165 (10.6) 0.945 (2.4)
6.35 (.25)
16.26 (6.4) 28.45 (1.12) 12.7 (.50) 9.65 (38)
2.36 (6.0) 3.0 (7.6)
2.54 (6.5)
TYPE CX TYPE CBX
E50KL421
Adjustable Side Pushbutton Head
Electrical Data Maximum Contact Ratings, per Pole

AC Volts B600 120 240 480 600 Current, Amperes Make Break 30 15 7.5 6 3 1.5 0.75 0.60 Cont. 5 Volt Amperes Make Break 3600 360 DC Volts DC Current, Ampere
120 240
0.1 0.05
MODEL 10316H2176 E50KL421 DESCRIPTION Explosion proof whisker switch 1 normally-open, 1 normally-closed contact Whisker spring rod
478
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION DIVISION 1 & 2 HORNS MODELS 8783X, 879EX DIVISION 1 & 2 STROBE MODEL 116EXMST FEATURES MODEL 116EXMSTR-N5* 116EXMSTA-N5* 116EXMSTB-N5* 116-GRD 92-ST 116EX-P 116EX-B 116EX-C 116EX-S
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF HORNS & STROBES 878EX, 879EX, 116EXMST
These Edwards horns and stobes offer a selection that should meet any hazardous location alarming need. FEATURES Heavy-duty, high-decibel vibrating horn Corrosion-resistant epoxy nish NEMA 4X Wall-mounting with side brackets Power connection wires embedded in sealing compound Tapped for 3/4" conduit 97 dB at 10 feet 120 VAC (878EX-N5), 24 VDC @ 160 mA (879EX-G1) UL listed for Class 1, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D; Class II, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups E, F; Class III locations UL File E14660
MODEL 878EX-N5 879EX-G1 DESCRIPTION Divisions 1 and 2 horn 120 VAC Divisions 1 and 2 horn 24 VDC
High-impact glass dome 65 ashes per minute 800,000 peak candlepower 3000-hour lamp rating NEMA 3R and 4X rated UL listed 1638, 1203, Marine 1598A; CUL listed C22.2 No. 205; Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G; Class II, Division 2, Group F, G; Class III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Division 2, Group G UL File E212211
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
DESCRIPTION Divisions 1 and 2 strobe, red lens 120 VAC Divisions 1 and 2 strobe, amber lens 120 VAC Divisions 1 and 2 strobe, blue lens 120 VAC Optional dome guard Replacement strobe tube Pendant mount Wall bracket mount (requires 116EX-C) Ceiling mount Stanchion mount * Requires mount
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
479
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATION CONTROL STATIONS HL600 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The HL600 Series hazardous location control stations allow alarm and control interface in a hazardous environment. The standard unit enclosure is rated NEMA 7/9 in a diecast aluminum enclosure. Contacts are included. A 1/2" - 14 NPT threaded opening is on the bottom. There are 12 standard legends, but special legends can be provided. FEATURES NEMA 7/NEMA 9 diecast aluminum enclosure surface mount Rated Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D; Class II, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups E, F, G Contacts included Momentary contacts available on special order Twelve standard legends, specials available Mechanically interlocked maintained contacts Weight 5 lb (2.27 kg) UL Listed One year warranty
NEW!
HL600-FUEL-CI
DC - NEMA TYPE P600 Inductive and Resistive Volts 120 240 600 Make and Break Amps 1.1 0.55 0.2 Continuous Carrying Amps 5 5 5
CONTACT ELECTRICAL RATINGS

MODEL HL600
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
AC - NEMA TYPE B600 Inductive 35% Power Factor Resistive 75% Power Factor Make Break Continuous Make, Break, and Volts Amps VA Amps VA Carrying Amps Continuous Carrying Amps 120 30.5 3600 3.75 360 5 5 240 15.0 3600 1.5 360 5 5 480 7.5 3600 0.75 360 5 5 600 6.0 3600 0.6 360 5 5
MODEL DESCRIPTION HL600 Hazardous location control station - surface mount - buttons labeled ON and OFF STOP EMERGENCY - STOP POWER EMERGENCY - POWER OFF SHUTDOWN EMERGENCY - SHUTDOWN FUEL FUEL SHUT-OFF FUEL PUMP FUEL PUMP CONTROL GAS GAS SHUT-OFF BOILER BOILER SHUTDOWN HVAC HVAC SHUTDOWN VENT VENTILATION STOP VENTSTART VENTILATION START REFRIG REFRIGERATION STOP CHILLER CHILLER STOP SL SPECIFIC LEGEND - SPECIFY Maintained mechanically interlocked contacts (1 N.O. and 1 N.C.) MO Momentary contacts (2 N.O.) EX Extended head on red button RS Green button labeled RESET, red button labeled STOP CI Custom inscriptions on one or both buttons (specify) HL600 CHILLER EX Example: HL600-CHILLER-EX Hazardous location control station labeled CHILLER STOP with extended head on OFF button.
480
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Copper-free aluminum enclosures Integral cast mounting feet Enclosures suitable for drilling and tapping Factory-installed operators in the cover Controls installed and wired per specications Windows available CUSTOM PUSH-BUTTON STATIONS CUSTOM CONTROL STATIONS WINDOW ENCLOSURES CIRCUIT BREAKERS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF CUSTOM CONTROL STATIONS CXJ SERIES
CXJ Series explosion proof custom control stations can be built to customer specications with door-mounted pushbuttons, pilot lights, selector switches, or potentiometers. Any combination of devices can be assembled in one of 75 sizes of aluminum enclosures. NEMA 3, 7, and 9 (4X optional) UL and CSA available Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B,C, D; Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups E,F, G; Class III Separate operator devices available
Custom Push-button stations are for applications requiring only operator interface and/or pilot light indication. Stations are available in one-hole to nine-hole arrangements. Operators can be purchased separately.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Control stations are used to house control components and have the ability to add operators on the cover. The enclosures are available in 75 shapes and sizes that t any application.
Window enclosures are available with square or rectangular windows. This provides convenient viewing of gauges, meters, or control device displays.
Circuit breakers provide overload and short-circuit protection on feeder or branch circuits, as well as lighting, heating, and motor circuits. The enclosure includes an external breaker operator handle that can be padlocked in on or off position. The circuit breaker can be used as a general service disconnect.
Call Kele to Order
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
481
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF ENCLOSURES AXJ, XJAT SERIES
DESCRIPTION The AXJ Series and XJAT Series explosion proof enclosures consist of cast aluminum instrument housings and junction boxes for explosion proof and dust ignition proof applications. They are suitable for Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D; Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups E, F, G; and Class III. They are furnished with mounting feet, a cover, and two 3/4" drilled and tapped conduit openings. AXJ Series enclosures include cover hinges. The N1 sufx adds a mounting panel which is 3/16" (0.476 cm) thick aluminum. The XJAT Series is available in a glass window and backplate version. FEATURES Machined ange on AXJ Series Threaded opening on XJAT Series Cast copper-free aluminum Stainless steel hinge on AXJ Series Optional aluminum backplate 3/4" NPT holes, top and bottom Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B,C,D Class II, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups E,F,G UL File #146600 (AXJ, XJATG) UL File #E94590 (XJATS) XJAT Series Class III Nema 3, 4x, 7, and 9 AXJ Series Class III Nema 3, 7, and 9
NEW!
XJATG AXJ XJATS WARNING:All conduit runs must be sealed within six inches of the enclosure.
A 9.75 (24.76) 12.5 (31.75) 17.0 (43.18) 17.0 (43.18) 23.125 (58.73) B 9.75 (24.76) 12.5 (31.75) 17.0 (43.18) 23.0 (58.42) 29.125 (73.97) C 6.25 (15.87) 8.5625 (21.74) 9.5 (24.13) 9.5 (24.13) 11.875 (30.16) E 5.12 (13.01) 4.5 (11.43) 8.62 (21.90) 14.12 (35.87) 18.37 (46.67) F Lug bolt Weight lb (kg) 17 9.12 3/8" (7.71) (23.17) 36 10.75 3/8" (16.32) (27.30) 77 15.75 1/2" (34.92) (40.00) 116 15.75 1/2" (52.61) (40.00) 210 21.75 5/8" (95.25) (55.24)
w/o Back Plate
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
DIMENSIONS
AXJ JUNCTION BOX DIMENSIONS in (cm) MODEL MODEL with BACKPLATE AXJ664-H1-C2-M2 AXJ886-H1-C2-M2 AXJ664-H1-C2-M2-N1 AXJ886-H1-C2-M2-N1 W 6.0 (15.24) 8.0 (20.32) 12.0 (30.48) 12.0 (30.48) 18.0 (45.72) L 6.0 (15.24) 8.0 (20.32) 12.0 (30.48) 18.0 (45.72) 24.0 (60.96) D 4.0 (10.16) 6.0 (15.24) 6.0 (15.24) 6.0 (15.24) 8.0 (20.32) Dc 1.0 (2.54) 1.0 (2.54) 1.5 (3.81) 1.5 (3.81) 1.5 (3.81)
AXJ12126-H1-C2-M2 AXJ12126-H1-C2-M2-N1 AXJ12186-H1-C2-M2 AXJ12186-H1-C2-M2-N1 AXJ18248-H1-C2-M2 AXJ18248-H1-C2-M2-N1
W L E B
Dc
D F
AXJ SERIES
482
w/o Back Plate XJATS JUNCTION BOX (SOLID COVER) DIMENSIONS in (cm) March MODEL MODEL BACKPLATE WHEN W L D Throat Opening C E F Weight lb 2014 (kg) 888-397-5353 USAwith kele.com YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHTA NOW, B CALL KELE. 6.0 6.0 4.12 5.75 7.25 7.25 7.0 5.0 8.5 12.0 XJATS2-C2-M2 XJATS2-C2-M2-N1 * (15.24) (15.24) (10.47) (14.60) (18.41) (18.41) (17.78) (12.7) (21.59) (5.44) *
NEW!
W L E
DIMENSIONS (CONTINUED) F
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS B
EXPLOSION PROOF ENCLOSURES AXJ, XJAT SERIES D C
Dc
AXJ SERIES
w/o Back Plate
XJATS JUNCTION BOX (SOLID COVER) DIMENSIONS in (cm) MODEL MODEL with BACKPLATE W L D Throat Opening 6.0 6.0 4.12 5.75 * XJATS2-C2-M2-N1 (15.24) (15.24) (10.47) (14.60) * XJATS2-C2-M2 7.0 9.0 4.15 7.12 * XJATS14-C2-M2 * XJATS14-C2-M2-N1 (17.78) (22.86) (10.55) (18.09) 12.0 12.0 6.12 9.12 XJATS11-C2-M2 XJATS11-C2-M2-N1 (30.48) (30.48) (15.55) (23.17)
A B C E F Weight lb (kg) 7.25 7.25 7.0 5.0 8.5 12.0 (18.41) (18.41) (17.78) (12.7) (21.59) (5.44) 10.5 8.37 7.37 8.5 9.75 33.0 (26.67) (21.27) (18.73) (21.59) (24.76) (14.97) 13.75 13.75 9.75 10.5 15.5 54.0 (34.92) (34.92) (24.76) (26.67) (39.37) (24.49)
* Two diagonal mounting feet
8
B L F
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
E A
H C
XJATS SERIES
w/o Back Plate XJATG JUNCTION BOX (with WINDOW) DIMENSIONS in (cm) MODEL MODEL with WINDOW Throat Glass Viewing with WINDOW and BACKPLATE W L D Opening A B C E F Weight lb (kg) Area 12.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 4.12 5.75 7.25 7.25 7 5.0 8.5 * XJATG2-C2-M2 *XJATG2-C2-M2-N1 (15.24) (15.24) (10.47) (14.60) (18.41) (18.41) (17.8) (12.7) (21.59) (5.44) (10.16) 33.0 5.25 7.0 9.0 4.15 7.12 10.5 8.37 7.37 8.5 9.75 * XJATG14-C2-M2 *XJATG14-C2-M2-N1 (17.78) (22.86) (10.55) (18.09) (26.67) (21.27) (18.73) (21.59) (24.76) (14.96) (13.33) 54.0 6.75 12.0 12.0 6.12 9.12 13.75 13.75 9.75 10.5 15.5 XJATG11-C2-M2 XJATG11-C2-M2-N1 (30.48) (30.48) (15.55) (23.17) (34.92) (34.92) (24.8) (26.67) (39.37) (24.49) (17.14)
* Two diagonal mounting feet
B L
E A
H C
XJATG SERIES
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
483
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
DESCRIPTION The Schneider Electric MA8, MC6/7, and MP6/7 Series explosion proof actuator enclosures are designed for installation in a hazardous environment. Each of these actuators are factory assembled to order. The enclosure is a cast aluminum housing and bolted cover with explosion proof ratings for Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G. They are for use with any damper with appropriate linkage and with Schneider Electric globe valve sizes 1/2" through 2", two- or three-way.
EXPLOSION PROOF ACTUATOR ENCLOSURE (FOR VALVES AND DAMPERS) MA8, MC6/7, MP6/7 SERIES
NEW!
Dimensions Actuators (Only) Drive Shaft Weight Approvals Warranty (not to exceed) 9"H x 8.25"W x 11"D (22.9 x 21 x 28 cm) 1/2" dia I1.27 cm), 0.93" L (2.38 cm) varies per model UL (actuator only), CSA (assembly) 2 years
FEATURES
Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Full range of approved actuators Approved for valves or dampers
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Conduit Opening Assembly Materials Of Construction Area Two, 3/4" NPT Factory only Cast aluminum, bolted cover enclosure Explosion proof Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
AM-116 AM-123 CPX9301 CPX9301456 CPX9302 PR-48 RELATED PRODUCTS Splined crank arm for 1/2" (1.27cm) shaft (damper linkage required) Ball joint connector (damper linkage required) 6 to 9 VDC (fixed) actuator drive kit for hazardous locations 0 to 10 VDC (fixed) actuator drive kit for hazardous locations 4 to 20 mA (fixed) actuator drive kit for hazardous locations 5/16" dia., 48" (1.2m) length push rod PAGE
484
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Valve Body Actuator
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Linkage
Size (NPT)
Power
Flow (Cv)
Close-off (psid)
2-POSITION, FLOATING, 2-WAY VALVES, NON-SPRING RETURN VB-7213-0-4-02 VB-7213-0-4-04 VB-7213-0-4-06 VB-7213-0-4-08 MP6-381 AV-293 VB-7213-0-4-09 VB-7213-0-4-10 VB-7213-0-4-11
1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2"
24 VAC, 52.8 VA
1.3 4.4 7.5 14 20 28 40
250 250 250 150 90 60 35
PROPORTIONAL 2-WAY VALVES, NON-SPRING RETURN Requires separate CPX explosion proof actuator drive kit VB-7213-0-4-02 1/2" VB-7213-0-4-04 1/2" VB-7213-0-4-06 3/4" VB-7213-0-4-08 MP6-381 AV-293 1" 24 VAC, 52.8 VA +CPX Drive Kit VB-7213-0-4-09 1-1/4" VB-7213-0-4-10 1-1/2" VB-7213-0-4-11 2"
1.3 4.4 7.5 14 20 28 40
250 250 250 150 90 60 35
2-POSITION, 2-WAY VALVES, SPRING RETURN Can be linked spring return open or spring return closed - specify at time of order. VB-7213-0-4-02 1/2" 1.3 VB-7213-0-4-04 1/2" 4.4 VB-7213-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 VB-7213-0-4-08 MA8-318 AV-291 1" 24 VAC, 92 VA 14 VB-7213-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 VB-7213-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 VB-7213-0-4-11 2" 40 FLOATING 2-WAY VALVES, SPRING RETURN Can be linked spring return open or spring return closed - specify at time of order. VB-7213-0-4-02 1/2" 1.3 VB-7213-0-4-04 1/2" 4.4 VB-7213-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 VB-7213-0-4-08 MP6-361 AV-291 1" 24 VAC, 60 VA 14 VB-7213-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 VB-7213-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 VB-7213-0-4-11 2" 40 PROPORTIONAL 2-WAY VALVES, SPRING RETURN Can be linked spring return open or spring return closed - specify at time of order. Requires separate CPX explosion proof actuator drive kit VB-7213-0-4-02 1/2" 1.3 VB-7213-0-4-04 1/2" 4.4 VB-7213-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 MP6-361 VB-7213-0-4-08 1" 14 AV-291 24 VAC, 60 VA + CPX Drive Kit VB-7213-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 VB-7213-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 VB-7213-0-4-11 2" 40 2-POSITION / FLOATING 3-WAY VALVES, NON-SPRING RETURN VB-7313-0-4-02 VB-7313-0-4-04 VB-7313-0-4-06 VB-7313-0-4-08 MP6-381 AV-293 VB-7313-0-4-09 VB-7313-0-4-10 VB-7313-0-4-11
250 250 250 150 90 60 35
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
250 250 250 150 90 60 35
250 250 250 150 90 60 35
1/2" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2"
24 VAC, 52.8 VA
1.3 4.4 7.5 14 20 28 40
250 250 200 150 90 60 35
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
485
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Valve Body Actuator Linkage
Size (NPT)
PROPORTIONAL 3-WAY VALVES, NON-SPRING RETURN Requires separate CPX explosion proof actuator drive kit VB-7313-0-4-02 1/2" VB-7313-0-4-04 1/2" VB-7313-0-4-06 3/4" MP6-381 AV-293 24 VAC, 52.8 VA VB-7313-0-4-08 1" + CPX Drive Kit VB-7313-0-4-09 1-1/4" VB-7313-0-4-10 1-1/2" VB-7313-0-4-11 2"
NEW!
Power Flow (Cv) 1.3 4.4 7.5 14 20 28 40 250 250 250 150 90 60 35 250 250 250 150 90 60 35 250 250 250 150 90 60 35 250 250 250 150 90 60 35 Timing (no load, seconds) 20 20 20 20 70 20 30 36 130 90 90 25 130 90 90 108 108 90 90 90 90 Power 24 VAC, 92 VA 24 VAC, 92 VA 120 VAC, 108 VA 120 VAC, 108 VA 24 VAC, 53 VA 120 VAC, 96 VA 120 VAC, 96 VA 240 VAC, 96 VA 24 VAC, 52.8 VA 24 VAC, 60 VA 24 VAC, 60 VA 120 VAC, 78 VA 120 VAC, 60 VA 120 VAC, 60 VA 120 VAC, 60 VA 240 VAC, 60 VA 240 VAC, 60 VA 24 VAC, 60 VA 24 VAC, 60 VA 24 VAC, 60 VA 120 VAC, 60 VA Torque in-lb (N-m) 60 (6.8) 60 (6.8) 60 (6.8) 60 (6.8) 220 (25) 175 (19) 220 (25) 220 (25) 220 (25) 50 (5.6) 50 (5.6) 60 (6.8) 220 (25) 50 (5.6) 90 (10) 50 (5.6) 50 (5.6) 50 (5.6) 50 (5.6) 50 (5.6) 50 (5.6)
Close-off (psid)
2-POSITION 3-WAY VALVES, SPRING RETURN Can be linked spring return open or spring return closed - specify at time of order. VB-7313-0-4-02 1/2" 1.3 VB-7313-0-4-04 1/2" 4.4 VB-7313-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 VB-7313-0-4-08 1" 14 MA8-318 AV-291 24 VAC, 92 VA VB-7313-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 VB-7313-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 VB-7313-0-4-11 2" 40 FLOATING 3-WAY VALVES, SPRING RETURN Can be linked spring return open or spring return closed - specify at time of order. VB-7313-0-4-02 1/2" 1.3 VB-7313-0-4-04 1/2" 4.4 VB-7313-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 VB-7313-0-4-08 MP6-361 AV-291 1" 24 VAC, 60 VA 14 VB-7313-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 VB-7313-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 VB-7313-0-4-11 2" 40 PROPORTIONAL 3-WAY VALVES, SPRING RETURN Can be linked spring return open or spring return closed - specify at time of order. Requires separate CPX explosion proof actuator drive kit VB-7313-0-4-02 1/2" 1.3 VB-7313-0-4-04 1/2" 4.4 VB-7313-0-4-06 3/4" 7.5 VB-7313-0-4-08 AV-291 1" 24 VAC, 60 VA 14 MP6-361 + CPX Drive Kit VB-7313-0-4-09 1-1/4" 20 VB-7313-0-4-10 1-1/2" 28 VB-7313-0-4-11 2" 40
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
DAMPER ACTUATORS
Model Number MA8-318 MA8-318-500 MA8-418 MA8-418-500 MC6-351 MC6-421 MC6-431 MC7-4311 MP6-381 MP6-361 MP6-371 MP6-421 MP6-485 MP6-465 MP6-475 MP7-4651 MP7-4751 MP6-367 MP6-377 MP6-379 MP6-470 Description Explosion proof 2-wire, 2-position, spring return CCW Explosion proof 2-wire, 2-position, spring return CCW , end switch Explosion proof 2-wire, 2-position, spring return CCW Explosion proof 2-wire, 2-position, spring return CCW , end switch Explosion proof 3 wire 2-position, non-spring return Explosion proof 3 wire 2-position, non-spring return Explosion proof 3 wire 2-position, non-spring return Explosion proof 3 wire 2-position, non-spring return Explosion proof proportional /oating, non-spring return Explosion proof proportional /oating, spring return CW Explosion proof proportional /oating, spring return CCW Explosion proof proportional /oating, non-spring return Explosion proof proportional /oating, non-spring return Explosion proof proportional /oating, spring return CW Explosion proof proportional /oating, spring return CCW Explosion proof proportional /oating, spring return CW Explosion proof proportional /oating, spring return CCW Explosion proof sequencing, non-spring return Explosion proof sequencing, spring return CCW Explosion proof 5-position, spring return CCW Explosion proof 5-position, spring return CCW
486
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF DIRECT COUPLED ACTUATOR ENCLOSURE (FOR DAMPERS) ZS-260
The Belimo Model ZS-260 explosion proof direct coupled actuator enclosure is designed for Belimo Models GM, AFB, LF, and NFB direct-mount style actuators installed in a hazardous environment. The ZS-260 Series has NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 construction for eld-mounted actuators with a drive shaft in front or rear depending on application. The enclosure is a cast aluminum housing with explosion proof ratings for Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G. They are for use with any damper with appropriate linkage.
Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Full range of approved actuators
8
Enclosure Rating Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty NEMA 7CD, NEMA 9EG 16" H x 10" W x 9.5" D (40.6 x 25.4 x 24.1 cm) UL listed File #E171998, CSA 31 lb (14.1 kg) 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
Conduit Opening Materials Of Construction Drive Shaft Two, 3/4" FNPT
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Cast aluminum, bolted cover SS, 1/2" dia (1.27 cm), 1.5" L (3.8 cm) Area Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Compatible Actuators AFB, AFX, AF, NFB, NFX, GMB, GMX, AMB, AMX (see actuator specication for torque and control details)
CAUTION: Conduit seal MUST be installed within code-required distance from enclosure to maintain explosion proof rating.
WARNING: This device is not listed for use in areas classied as Group A (acetylene) or Group B (hydrogen).
MODEL DESCRIPTION ZS-260 Damper actuator enclosure with front or rear drive shaft (Order linkage and actuator separately)
KG8-K KH8-K PR-48 ZG-109
RELATED PRODUCTS Ball joint, 90 angle, use with 5/16" diameter pushrod Crank arm for 3/4" shaft, 3-1/2" length, use with KG8-K ball joint 5/16" dia., 48" (1.2m) length push rod 10-ga galvanized right angle mounting plate, 13"H x 10"W x 6"D (25.4 x 33 x 15.2 cm)
PAGE 7 7 8
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
487
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION CONDUIT ACCESSORIES GRT, EYM, PLG50 SERIES
CONDUIT OUTLET BOX GRT SERIES EXPLOSION PROOF OUTLET BOX DESCRIPTION These explosion proof, dust-ignition proof, cast-aluminum conduit outlet boxes are used with threaded metal conduit and are furnished with a cover and internal ground screw. They are suitable for Class I, Div 1 and 2, Groups B,C,D: Class II, Div 1 and 2, Groups E,F,G; and Class III, Div 1 and 2. In Class I, Group B atmospheres, all conduit runs must have a sealing tting eld installed adjacent to the enclosure. The UL File # is E10444.
NEW!
MODEL CONDUIT SIZE 1/2" 3/4" COVER CONSTRUCTION OPENING 3.38" 3.38" Cast Aluminum Cast Aluminum WEIGHT lb (kg) 1.4 (0.6) 1.4 (0.6)
GRT50-A GRT75-A
8
CONDUIT SEALING FITTING EYM SERIES DESCRIPTION These explosion proof, dust-ignition proof, malleable iron conduit sealing ttings are used with threaded metal conduit in horizontal or vertical applications. Fittings have female connections with one removable male nipple. They are suitable for Class I, Div 1 and 2, Groups A,B,C,D: Class II, Div 1 and 2, Groups E,F,G; Class III, Div 1 and 2. The UL File # is E10444
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
MODEL SIZE TURNING RADIUS EYM-50 1/2" EYM-75 3/4" EYM-100 1" 1.06" 1.19" 1.38" KWIKO CONSTRUCTION WEIGHT CEMENT lb (kg) REQUIRED 1 oz Malleable Iron 0.8 (0.4) 2 oz Malleable Iron 1.1 (0.5) 4 oz Malleable Iron 1.5 (0.7)
CLOSE-UP PLUGS PLG50 SERIES DESCRIPTION These explosion proof, dust-ignition proof, steel closeup plugs are used with threaded metal conduit. They are suitable for Class I, Div 1 and 2, Groups A,B,C,D; Class II, Div 1 and 2, Groups E,F.G; and Class III, Div 1 and 2.
MODEL PLG50R PLG75R PLG100R SIZE 1/2" 3/4" 1" CONSTRUCTION Steel, Recessed Head Steel, Recessed Head Steel, Recessed Head WEIGHT lb (kg) 0.1 (0.05) 0.1 (0.05) 0.2 (0.1)
488
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
KWIKO SEALING CEMENT MODEL AC1A
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF CONDUIT ACCESSORIES AC1A, ACK6F, F01, AC1F01A
When mixed with water, according to label directions, Kwiko Sealing Cement forms a pourable cement for conduit sealing ttings.
MODEL AC1A
DESCRIPTION 1 lb (0.5kg), 23 cu in (377.0 cu cm) volume when set
KWIKO TWINPAK SEALING CEMENT MODEL ACK6F Each plastic pouch in the Kwiko Twinpak contains premeasured Kwiko cement and premeasured water (in an inner bag). Squeeze the pouch to break the inner water bag, knead the mixture thoroughly and pour. The Kwiko Twinpak includes an adequate amount of ber ller packed separately.
MODEL DESCRIPTION ACK6F Cement: 1.9 lb * (850g) Fiber: 0.3 lb (0.14kg), 25 cu in (410 cu cm) volume when set * Consists of five 6 oz (187g) cement pouches
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Fiber Filler is used to prevent cement from leaking while it is in the uid state.
MODEL F01 DESCRIPTION Quantity: 0.06 lb (0.03kg)
KWIKO SEALING CEMENT AND FIBER FILLER KITS MODEL AC1F01A The Model AC1F01A combines Model AC1A cement and Model F01 ller in a handy kit.
MODEL AC1F01A DESCRIPTION Cement: 1 lb (0.5kg) Fiber: 0.06 lb (0.03kg), 23 cu in (377.0 cu cm) volume when set
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
489
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERES
Automation dealers are continuing to gain business that was once reserved only for specialty and industrial contractors. Its a trend that is accelerating very rapidly, and the fastest growth is in the areas of hazardous locations and the monitoring of toxic and combustible gases. Kele is committed to providing the products and technical support needed to assist our customers in these important areas. By way of introduction, this article covers the basics of a hazardous atmosphere and the equipment used to monitor combustible gases. See additional articles in Technical Reference for information relating to principles and application of intrinsically safe systems, explosion proof systems, and other available means of dealing with electrical equipment in hazardous atmospheres. What Is Hazardous? The widely known Fire Triangle illustration (Figure 1) shows the three components required to support combustion. All three must be present, and the methods we use to prevent explosions are designed to eliminate one of the three legs of the triangle. What the triangle doesnt show, though, is that fuel and oxygen must be mixed in the proper proportion in order to burn. If the fuel is methane (CH 4), the major component of natural gas, the concentration in air must be between 5% and 15% or else the mixture will not ignite. Those of us old enough to have worked with finicky carburetors on gasoline engines are familiar with this principle. If the mixture was too lean (not enough fuel) or too rich (too much fuel), the engine would not start. The same applies to ignition of any combustible gas in air. Get the Mixture Right The lowest concentration of a gas in air that will ignite is its lower explosive limit (LEL), and the highest concentration that will ignite is its upper explosive limit (UEL). These values are also sometimes referred to as the lower and upper
NEW!
flammability limits (LFL, UFL). Limits for some common fuels are shown in Table 1 below. If a system is designed to keep the fuel concentration below the LEL, the fuel leg is effectively removed from the fire triangle. Under certain conditions (in an oil field, for example), it is easier to maintain the concentration above the UEL. In this case, the oxygen leg is eliminated. In either case, combustion cannot happen.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Silent Sentries It is often advisable to monitor the concentration of fuel in air in order to take action or sound an alarm if it is moving toward an explosive level. The GDS Series combustible gas monitors a r e i d e a l for this purpose. The GDS-WCH4 provides a 4-20 mA signal over the range of 0% to 100% of the LEL, and it has an alarm relay set to energize at 25% of the LEL (an industry standard alarm point). The sensor responds to a very wide range of combustible gases, and the outputs (analog and relay) are factorycalibrated for the gas specified at the time of order. For example, if the gas is methane (5% LEL), the GDS-WCH4 will output 4 mA at 0% methane and 20 mA at 5% methane. The alarm relay will energize at 1.25% methane. With this device, the alarm relay or an automation system responding to the analog signal can cause electricity (source of ignition) to be shut off in an area if the gas concentration is rising toward the explosive level (LEL). If the sensor itself must remain energized, an explosion proof enclosure is available (use SPXCD Series) to prevent it from becoming the source of ignition itself. The system described here is based on removing the fuel leg from the fire triangle, then having an automatic means of removing the ignition source leg if the fuel begins to return. This is the first of many ways we will discuss to work safely with electricity in hazardous locations.
FIGURE 1. FIRE TRIANGLE
FIRE
Oxygen
Lower Explosive Limit (LEL) Upper Explosive Limit (UEL) (Percent by volume in air) (Percent by volume in air) Methane 5.0 15.0 Butane 8.4 1.6 Propane 9.6 2.1 Ethanol 3.3 19.0 7.8 Gasoline (100 Octane) 1.4 Isopropyl alcohol 12.7 2.0 Ethyl ether 1.9 36.0 Xylene 0.9 7.0 Toluene 7.1 1.0 Hydrogen 4.0 75.0 85.0 Acetylene 2.5 Fuel
Note: Multiply percentages by 10,000 to convert to parts per million (ppm)
Ign itio
el
nS
Fu
ou rce
490
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Jacketed Cable Conduit Seal Ground Flange Joint provides long, narrow path to cool escaping gases Sealing Compound Fibrous Packing Hot gases cooled by long expansion path through threads Cable Seal Required Explosion Inside Box
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF CONTROLS
TABLE 1. CLASS, DIVISION, AND GROUP
NEMA Classifications - Marked with Rated Class, Division, and Group NEMA 7 NEMA 8 NEMA 9 NEMA 10 Class 1 (Gases) Indoor Hazardous Locations, Air-Break Class 1 (Gases) Indoor/Outdoor Hazardous Locations, Oil-Immersed Class 2 (Dusts) Indoor Hazardous Locations Meets U.S. Bureau of Mines Safety Requirements
Recap In hazardous locations there are three elements that must be present in order to produce an explosion (see the Hazardous Atmospheres article in Technical Reference for more information). The three legs of the re triangle (fuel, oxygen, and an ignition source) are required to support combustion. In addition, the volume ratio of fuel to air must be within the fuels explosive limits, and the ignition source must release sufcient energy to ignite the mixture. Removing any of these three elements will eliminate the explosion hazard. Explosion proof Dened Perhaps the most common and familiar way to eliminate ignition sources from a hazardous location is through the use of explosion proof construction. An enclosure that is rated explosion proof (NEMA 7, 8, 9, or 10) for a particular hazard group (see Figure 1) is strong enough to withstand the pressure of a worst-case explosion inside itself. Additionally, it is designed to vent the resulting hot gases in such a way that they are cooled below the ignition temperature of a worst-case explosive mixture outside the box. FIGURE 1. FLANGED AND THREADED OPENINGS
Summary of NEC Classes and Group Examples Group A B C D E F G Class 1 (Gases) Acetylene Hydrogen, Ethylene Oxide, Propylene Oxide Ether, Hydrogen Sulfide, Hydrazine, Nitroethane Methane, Acetone, Benzene, Gasoline, Naphtha Metallic Dusts (all metals) Carbonaceous Dusts (coal, asphalt, etc.) Nonconductive Dusts (grain, drugs, pesticides, plastics, dyes, etc..) Class 2 (Dusts)
Summary of NEC Divisions Division 1 Hazard always or frequently present, or may be present during normal operation,
or high probability of hazard existing at the same time as electrical malfunction
Division 2 Hazard normally not present, or highly unlikely to be present at the same time
as electrical malfunction, or area adjacent to Division 1
With anged enclosures, it is very important to torque the cover bolts evenly and as close as possible to the recommended value. Also, the flange surfaces must not be scratched or marred in any way. Improper torque or damaged surfaces can allow hot gases to escape and ignite an explosive mixture outside the enclosure. Threaded connections or covers must engage at least ve full threads to maintain the integrity of the system. One additional step is needed to control the spread of hot gases. Conduits entering the enclosure must be sealed within the code-required distance (usually 18) of the box to prevent the buildup of pressure within the raceway system or the leakage of combustion products into the room. If a jacketed cable passes through a conduit seal, the jacket should be removed within the seal so that the sealing compound can completely surround each insulated conductor. An alternative is to seal the cable at the end of the jacket as shown in the illustration. Classication So where can these types of enclosures be used? As usual in our industry, there are no easy answers! Each explosion proof enclosure will be listed or labeled for use in a particular environment as dened in the National Electrical Code (NEC) or IEC Standards. In turn, the hazardous area itself must be classied according to the same standards. The enclosure must have a listing that meets or exceeds the classication of the area in which it is to be used. In the NEC, considerations are Class, Division, and Group as shown in Table 1. IEC standards use different code letters from the NEC but generally follow the same logic.
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
How It Works To contain the pressures of an explosion, these enclosures are made from heavy cast steel or cast aluminum. To cool escaping gases, anged enclosures have extra-wide anges that are ground to a smooth nish and tight tolerance, thus yielding a very thin, long path to the outside as shown in Figure 1. Enclosures with threaded covers (and threaded connections to either type of enclosure) produce the same effect by virtue of the long, narrow path through the threads. As the hot gases from an internal explosion pass through these long, narrow channels, they give up heat to the metal and their pressure is reduced. These two effects team up to lower the temperature of the gases to a safe level before they can come in contact with the atmosphere surrounding the enclosure.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
491
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
EXPLOSION PROOF CONTROLS
For gases, which comprise the majority of our industrys hazards, explosion proof enclosures are readily available for Class 1, Division 1, Groups C and D. Enclosures rated for Group B (hydrogen) can also be found but generally only in small sizes since hydrogen is so easily ignitable and has high explosive energy. Almost nothing is offered for Group A (acetylene) environments because of acetylenes easy ignition and tremendous explosive energy. Using explosion proof enclosures removes the ignition leg from the fire triangle in a potentially hazardous location. Although it is costly and requires care to maintain the systems integrity, it is an effective method for working with electricity in combustible atmospheres. The Intrinsically Safe Controls article in the Technical Reference section outlines an alternative method of applying controls to hazardous locations.
NEW!
HZLIM Temperature Controller 1950G Differential Pressure Switch
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
30-3003D Smoke Detector
EPET Thermostat
AXJ, XJAT Control Enclosures
492
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Ignition of Energy (mJ)
1.0
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
INTRINSICALLY SAFE CONTROLS
hydrogen and air in exactly the best proportion for ignition, about 30% hydrogen by volume (see Figure 1). This mixture takes an instantaneous release of about 20 mJ in order to start burning, or else its temperature must be raised above the autoignition temperature of hydrogen (932F/500C). For electrical devices we wish to place in this room, the amount of stored energy and the rate at which it can be released under worst-case conditions must be kept below these critical levels, and the surface temperature (see Table 2 for ratings) must be kept below the autoignition temperature. If these conditions are met to the satisfaction of UL, FM, CSA, BASEEFA, etc., then the device may be listed and labeled as intrinsically safe. This means that with a properly applied safety barrier, cabling, and ground, the device cannot start a re even under the worst-case conditions. There is one subset of such intrinsically safe devices that can be used without a listing or label, although a barrier, proper cabling, and ground are still required. These are designated simple apparatus and are a group of things that obviously neither produce nor store any energy, such as RTDs, thermistors, switches, and a few others. They may be used as if they do have a label, as long as the operating limitations shown in Table 1 are strictly adhered to. Barriers So, if we have an RTD and an intrinsically safe temperature transmitter in a hazardous location, can we wire them up to our controller and power supply in the safe area and turn them on? Not yet! Three more steps are needed rst. While the devices in the hazardous area cannot ignite the gas mixture on their own, the controller and power supply in the safe area may each be capable of transmitting enough energy through the wires into the hazardous area to do the job anyway! An intrinsic safety barrier will prevent this and is required for every intrinsically safe device, except listed self-contained battery-powered units. Barriers range from simple to sophisticated, but they all use failsafe components to limit the voltage and current that can be passed through them even in the event of worst-case wiring errors. For example, suppose
One answer for applying controls in hazardous locations is the use of explosion proof construction to prevent a source of ignition from coming in contact with a room full of fuel and air. Strong enclosures with threaded or flanged covers can confine explosive forces within themselves and cool the escaping gases enough to prevent ignition of the surrounding atmosphere. Wouldnt it be even better to prevent any explosion at all?
FIGURE 1. EFFECT OF CONCENTRATION ON IGNITION ENERGY

Propane - Air, 1 ATM
0.1
Hydrogen - Air, 1ATM
0.01 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Volume Concentration (%)
What IS Means Intrinsically safe systems are designed to be just that. Remember that even if the ideally explosive mixture of fuel and air exists, an ignition source of sufficient energy and duration is required to light it up. Intrinsically safe design limits the available release of energy in the hazardous area to a level well below the minimum ignition energy of the worstcase gas mixture. It also maintains this limiting function in the event of two simultaneous worst-case faults. Since this type of protection is very failsafe and requires no enclosure maintenance, most engineers (and property insurance carriers) consider it to be even safer than explosion proof construction. Surprisingly, it is usually less expensive to boot! How does it work? First of all, lets consider a room lled with
FIGURE 2. SIMPLE ZENER DIODE BARRIER 50 mA Fuse 220 120
Safe Area
30V Zener Diode Fused Zener Barrier
28V Zener Diode
Hazardous Area
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
493
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
INTRINSICALLY SAFE CONTROLS
someone in the safe area accidentally hooks 240 VAC up to our temperature transmitter signal lines, and one of the lines is frayed enough at the transmitter to cause an arc at that voltage. Without an intrinsic safety barrier, there may not be enough evidence left to gure out what happened. However, a barrier rated for the atmosphere, cabling, and its field device will save the day even under these circumstances. Figure 2 illustrates a simple zener diode barrier circuit. A high voltage at the safe- side terminals will cause the zener diode to draw a high current and blow the input fuse. The series resistors limit the current to the hazardous side. Barriers are also rated for how much capacitance and inductance are allowed on the hazardous side. TABLE 1. OPERATING LIMITS FOR A SIMPLE APPARATUS (RTDs, THERMISTORS, SWITCHES, ETC.)
NEW!
Hazardous Area Intrinsically Safe Temperature Transmitter Safe Area Intrinsic Safety Barrier Shield RTD (Simple Apparatus) Seal to Prevent Passage of Hazardous Gases Intrinsic Safety Ground Shield
Cable Requirements This leads us into the cabling between the hazardous area device and its barrier. If the cable is very long and has a high capacitance, it could possibly store enough energy to cause an ignition in the event of a wiring fault. It must be checked against the rating of the barrier. If the eld device, the transmitter in our example, has a high capacitance, the combined capacitance of the cable and device must be less than the barrier rating. Cable and device inductance are treated in the same manner.
Applied Voltage Current Through Power Dissipation Stored Energy
1.2 VAC or VDC 100 mA 25 mW 20 J
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
Temperature class: Simple apparatus with surface area between 20 mm2 and 10 cm2 are classied as T4 275F (135C) when the matched output power of the barrier is less than 1.3W into a 104F (40C) ambient. Switches and other contacts that dissipate no power may be classied T6 185F (85C).
IS Grounding The nal factor to consider is grounding. What good is all this built-in electronic safety if a nearby lightning strike raises the ground potential a couple of thousand volts above the potential of the cable shield in our hazardous area? The resulting arc from the shield to ground can be every bit as effective as a butane lighter in touching off an explosion, so we neednt have bothered with using intrinsically safe products. An intrinsic safety ground, bonded to the earth ground, is the last essential link that makes the system work. Normally provided at the barrier location, it keeps the cable shields at or near the same potential as the earth, even as that value moves around during storms. FIGURE 3. SPECIAL INTRINSIC SAFETY GROUNDING
TABLE 2. INTRINSIC SAFETY TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 842F (450C) 572F (300C) 392F (200C) 275F (135C) 212F (100C) 185F (85C)
4-20 mA Loop to Controller
Remember, simply using a barrier does not make the circuit intrinsically safe. An intrinsically safe device must be used with the intrinsically safe barrier.
Once it is all together, as shown in Figure 3, the benets of an intrinsically safe system are many. There is no need to power systems down and safe the atmosphere for maintenance. Calibrate, adjust, even swap out bad parts with the system turned on and the atmosphere at its worst. A properly designed system cannot release enough energy to do any damage.
494
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
SELECTING INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS
Note that this is for a simple system like the one described and that each ungrounded conductor in the hazardous area requires either a separate barrier or a multichannel barrier designed for its purpose. More complex systems need more complex analysis to make sure that no more than Vmax can be developed between any two conductors and that no more than Imax can be driven through any terminal in the IS device. Usually, the manufacturer or supplier of an IS device requiring more than one ungrounded conductor can provide a barrier recommendation that meets these criteria. Fortunately, most applications in the building automation industry can be handled with a simple loop. If grounding one side of a current loop is a problem, a signal isolator such as the Model DT-13E can be applied in the safe area as a solution. Example Consider a need to monitor a ventilators vibration level in a battery room. The project electrical engineer has classified the area as Class 1, Division 1, Group B, and the hazardous material in question is hydrogen. Special corrosion protection is not required, and the cable run from the transmitter to its barrier will be about 200 (61m). Hydrogens autoignition temperature is 968F (520C), so the vibration transmitter need only have a temperature classification of T1 (842F or 450C) or lower. The Model 140T is a good choice. It is rated IS for Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D, and its temperature classification is T6 (less than 185F or 85C). Its entity parameters are shown in Figure 2. The Model MTL7706+ barrier was chosen since it is designed for loop-powered 4-20 mA devices, and its Voc and Isc parameters are less than or equal to the Vmax and Imax parameters of the 140T. In addition, its Ca and La ratings leave plenty of allowable cable capacitance and inductance for the length of our run. Refer to Figure 1 on the following page for the cable calculations related to our example. The shorter of these two results is the limiting distance, so our cable run from the MTL7706+ barrier to the 140T vibration transmitter must not exceed 717 (218m). The estimated 200 (61m) run in our example is well within this limit. All that remains is to ensure proper grounding and installation according to NEC Article 504. As with all such systems, an IS drawing that shows all relevant entity parameters must accompany the installation (see Figure 2). With a little care and a little math, selection of IS barriers for simple loops can be straightforward. Its even easier when the selection is already made for you look for the Hazardous Locations section in the Kele Catalog for engineered intrinsically safe solutions to your automation interface needs!
Here is a closer look at assembling the right combination of parts to produce a properly-coordinated intrinsically safe (IS)system. Hazardous Area Equipment Selection of an IS device or simple apparatus to be used in a hazardous area is fairly easy. For explosion protection, ensure that the device rating is equal to or better than the classification of the hazardous area (Class, Division, Group, and Temperature Classification under the NEC or Category, Zone, Group, and Temperature Classification under the IEC). Then, as with any device, also make sure that its construction is suitable for any corrosive or other adverse environmental conditions that may be present.
Safety Parameters Selecting an appropriate intrinsic safety barrier is often even simpler, since a conscientious supplier of IS solutions, such as Kele, will usually include a barrier recommendation and wiring diagram with the product in question. In the absence of such a recommendation, it is not an insurmountable chore to select an appropriate barrier under the Entity Concept described in ISA Technical Report TR-12.2-1995. Under this concept, the IS device to be applied in a hazardous location is labeled by its manufacturer with the maximum voltage (Vmax) and current (Imax) that can be applied to it without degrading its level of safety. The IS device is also labeled with the amount of internal capacitance (Ci) and inductance (Li) that it adds to the circuit. Barrier Parameters Each intrinsic safety barrier is listed with the maximum voltage (Voc) and current (Isc) that can be passed through to the hazardous side terminals under fault conditions, and the maximum capacitance (Ca) and inductance (La) that can be connected safely to the hazardous side terminals. Finally, the cable capacitance (Ccable) and inductance (Lcable) can usually be gleaned from the cable manufacturers literature or technical support line. Or, if the exact cable parameters cannot be located, the default values recommended in ANSI/ISA-RP12.6 can be used (Ccable = 60 pF/ft or 197 pF/m and Lcable = 0.20 H/ft or 0.67 H/m). Matching Them Up For simple loops (i. e., two-wire IS devices that can function with one wire grounded), matching up a barrier with an IS device is as simple as making sure the following relationships are true: Vmax must be greater than or equal to Imax must be greater than or equal to Ci + Ccable must be less than or equal to Li + Lcable must be less than or equal to Voc Isc Ca La
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
495
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
SELECTING INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS
FIGURE 1. CABLE LIMIT CALCULATION
These calculations assume default values of 60 pF and 0.20 H per foot of cable (197 pF and 0.67 H per meter). Lower values are available and may be obtained from cable manufacturers. Capacitive cable length limit = (Ca Ci) / (Cable capacitance per unit length) = (0.083 F 0.04 F) / (60 pf/ft or 197 pf/m) = 717 (218m) Inductive cable length limit = = = (La Li) / (Cable inductance per foot) (4.2 mH 0.0 mH) / (0.20 H/ft or 0.67 H/m) 21,000 (6400m)
NEW!
Power Supply 24-35 VDC
FIGURE 2. INTRINSIC SAFETY CONTROL DRAWING
8
Hazardous (Classified) Location Class 1, Division 1, Group B Non-Hazardous Location
4
+
MTL7706+ Intrinsic Safety Barrier Entity (Safety) Parameters Voc 28V I sc 93 mA Ca 0.083 F La 4.2 mH 4 1
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
140T Vibration Transmitter Entity Parameters Vmax 28V I max 110 mA Ci 0.04 F Li 0 mH
4-20 mA
1
2
2
5
+
3
4-20 mA Signal
Notes:
I.S. Ground 3
1 The MTL7706 must not be connected to any device that uses or generates in excess of 250V rms or DC unless it has been determined that the voltage has been adequately isolated from the barrier. 2 The installation must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70, Article 504, and ANSI/ISA-RP12.6. 3 The MTL7706+ must be connected to a suitable ground electrode per NFPA 70, Article 504. The resistance of the ground path must be less than 1. 4 Total interconnecting cable capacitance must be limited to 0.043 F and inductance limited to 4.2 mH.
496
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDIT Y
HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
Kele Carries Nine Brands to Meet Your Sensing Needs.
GEH2 | p. 515
KH2 | p. 509
HS20K | p. 513
HW30K | p. 530
SRH12 | p. 525
HW31K | p. 532
HUMIDIT Y
HUMIDITY
MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Humidistats VH7200 Series 3% Humidistats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDC Series 5% Duct Mount Humidistat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCY-BH Series 5% Wall Mount Humidistat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCI Series 3% Wall and Duct Proportional Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EE46 Condensation Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HC-101, HC-201 Room and Duct Humidistats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W43A-14 Room Humidistat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 558 560 562 564 566 566
A/RH2 | p. 519
HS20K | p. 513
SRH | p. 525
RH Transmitters A/RH1 Series Automation Components BAS/HVAC RH Transmitters. . . . . 497 HMW90 Series Wall-Mounted Humicap Humidity and Temperature Transmitter. 499 E31 Series Multifunction Humidity/Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 HF5 Series 1% Room and Duct Multi-Parameter Humidity and Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 EE23 Series Room or Duct Humidity, Temperature, Dew Point Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 HT829, HT839 1% and 2% Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters. . . . 507 H_20K Series 2% Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters .. . . . . . . . . . 511 HS20K Series 2% Room Humidity Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 GEH2 Series 2% Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . 515 HMD60, HMD70, and HMK41K 2% Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 A/RH2 Series 2% Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . 519 HT2D, HT2O, HT2S 2% Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters. . . . . . 521 BA/H200 Series 2% Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters. . . . . . . . . 523 SRH12 Series 2% Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . 525 EHRH 2% Waterproof / Washdown Humidity Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 KH3 Series 3% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity Transmitters.. . . . . . . . . . 528 H_30K Series 3% Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters .. . . . . . . . . . 530 HD31K, HO31K, HW31K 3% Humidity Transmitter & Optional Temperature Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 HMW80 Series 3% Room Humidity and Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . 534 HMD42, HMD53 3% Duct Humidity and Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . 536 A/RH3 Series 3% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity Transmitters. . . . . . . . . 538 BA/H300 Series 3% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity Transmitters. . . . . . . 540 SRH13 Series 3%Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity Transmitters. . . . . . . . . 542 GEH3 Series 3% Room, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . 543 KH5 Series 5% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity Transmitters.. . . . . . . . . . 545 GEH5 Series 5% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity Transmitters . . . . . . . . . 547 A/RH5 Series 5% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity Transmitters. . . . . . . . . 549 SRH15 Series 5% Room, Duct, and OSA Humidity Transmitters . . . . . . . . 551 Specialty Transmitters KH2 Series 2% Wall, Duct and OSA Humidity Transmitters .. . . . . . . . . . . . DP4A, EN4A, WB4A Dew Point, Enthalpy & Wet Bulb Transmitters . . . . . . HMD/S/W8XD/H/W Series Dew Point, Enthalpy and Wet Bulb Transmitters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9002 Infrared Dew Point & Grains Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A21 Outdoor Aspirated Humidity / Temperature Housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
509 552 554 555 567
kele.com
HUMIDITY
AUTOMATION COMPONENTS BAS/HVAC RH TRANSMITTERS A/RH1 SERIES
DESCRIPTION Model A/RH1 Relative Humidity Transmitters provide RH readings at 1% accuracy using a ceramic resistive sensor offering a 20% to 90% operating range. The transmitters come in wall, duct, and OSA mounting styles. They have multiple eld-selectable outputs, including 4-20 mA, 0-10V, and 0-5V signals. The supply power is also selectable as 24 VDC or 24 VAC. FEATURES Accuracy of 1% Duct and OSA twist-off weatherproof housing 24 VDC or 24 VAC power (eld-selectable) 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V signal (eld-selectable) Field-calibratable Optional temperature sensor A/RH1-R
A/RH1-O
A/RH1-SP
A/RH1-D
9
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Accuracy Thermal Effect Signal Output Measurement Range Sensing Technology Operating Temperature Room Duct/OSA Enclosure Room Duct/OSA 12-40 VDC or 24 VAC, selectable 1% @ 77F (25C) over a selectable 20% span from 50 to 70%, 60 to 80%, or 70 to 90% RH <0.005% per F (<0.01 per C) 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC (eld selectable) 0% to 100% Capacitive 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Plastic Delta-style Plastic weatherproof Dimensions Room Duct OSA Weight Room Duct OSA Wall Pack Approvals Warranty 3.8"H x 2.8"W x 0.9"D (9.8 x 7 x 2.3 cm) 3.6" (9 cm) head with 8.15"L (20 cm) probe 0.75 (1.9 cm) 3.6" (9 cm) head with 3.0"L (7.6 cm) probe 1.4" (3.6 cm) 0.22 lb (0.1 kg) 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) 0.22 lb (0.1 kg) CE, RoHS 5 years
HUMIDITY
WIRING
Output Selection Switches (SW 1)
ON OFF
ON OFF ON
ON
4-20 mA Output
ON
2 Wire Current Output Signal
DC Supply Voltage 4-20 mA Output
4-20 mA Output
ON
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
0-10 VDC Output

4-20mA VIN COM VOUT Supply Ground / Signal Common AC or DC Supply Voltage
0-10 VDC Output

ON OFF
ON
OFF
0-5 VDC Output

ON OFF
ON
ON Ground / Signal Common ONSupply AC or DC Supply Voltage OFF 4-20 mA Output
0-5 VDC Output
3 Wire Current Output 4-20 Signal mA Output

4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
Voltage Output Signal

0-10 or 0-5 VDC Output Signal Supply Ground / Signal Common AC or DC Supply Voltage 4-20mA VIN COM VOUT

0-10 or 0-5 VDC Output Signal Supply Ground / Signal Common
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
March 2014
WE MAKE IT AC or DC Supply Voltage
EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
497
HUMIDITY
AUTOMATION COMPONENTS BAS/HVAC RH TRANSMITTERS A/RH1 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.25 (5.7) 0.89 (2.3) 0.79 (2.0) 3.84 (9.8) 4.24 (10.8) 3.60 (9.1) 2.69 (6.8) 0.86 (2.2) 6.10 (15.5)
1.00 (2.5)
4.68 (11.9) 3.95 (10.0)
0.75 (1.9) 2.25 (5.7)
3.84 (9.8)
4.51 (11.5)
(4) PG11/0.5" (1.27) NPT Knockouts 3.00 (7.6)
2.75 (7.0)
0.60 (1.5) 0.92 (2.3)
1.40 (3.6)
PG11 Watertight Fitting (Cable Dia. 0.12 to 0.28"/ 0.3 to 0.7 cm)
Room
0.65 (1.7) 0.75 (1.9) 80 Micron Sintered Stainless Steel Filter Plastic Washer 80 Micron Stainless Steel Sintered FIlter 0.58 (1.5) 0.18 (0.5) O.D. Ref 1.00 (2.5) 2.70 (6.9)
Outside
2.75 (7.0) 1.40 (3.6) 0.75 (1.9) 4.5 (1.4)
1.07 (2.7)
7.15 (18.2)
0.46 (1.2) Stainless Plate
HUMIDITY
2.25 (5.7)
Plastic Cover for Stainless Steel Filter to Protect Sensor during Wash Down
0.75 (1.9)
Duct
MODEL A/RH1 DESCRIPTION 1% accuracy humidity transmitter (5070) 20% Range 50 to 70% (6080) 20% Range 60 to 80% (7090) 20% Range 70 to 90% AN Type III 10,000 thermistor CP Type II 10,000 thermistor 20K 20,000 thermistor 100 100 385 PT RTD IK 1,000 385 PT RTD R Room D Duct O Outside air SP Wall plate
AN R
Stainless Plate
A/RH1 - (5070) -
Example: A/RH1- (5070) - AN-R Room humidity transmitter with 1% accuracy over 50 to 70% range and Type III 10,000 thermistor
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 691-K0A
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
498
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
WALL-MOUNTED HUMICAP HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER HMW90 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Wall-Mounted Vaisala HMW90 Series HUMICAP Humidity and Temperature Transmitters measure the relative humidity and temperature of indoor environments, where high accuracy, stability, and reliable operation are required. The HMW90 Series includes models for both current and voltage output. These exible transmitters offer a variety of options and features. Transmitters are available with an optional display. The HMW90 Series humidity transmitters are quick and easy to install. The wiring is connected secured to the wall through the back plate and the electronics with the sensors can then be easily snapped on. Dip switches for transmitter conguration can be accessed when the enclosure is open. FEATURES Easy installation, conguration and eld adjustment 1.7% accuracy Optional relay (HMW93 only) NIST calibration certicate included Long term stability with HUMICAP 180R sensor
HMW90 Series APPLICATION Museums and archive facilities Data centers Laboratories Production and warehouse Testing environments facilities
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Stability Supply Voltage HMW92 HMW93 Signal Output HMW92 HMW93 Maximum Output Impedance mA HMW92 Minimum Output 1.7% RH @ 50 to 104F (10 to 40C) from 0 to 90% RH 0.5% RH/year 10 to 28 VDC 18 to 35 VDC, 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz 4-20 mA 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC 500 10 k minimum 0 to 100% RH, 23 to 131F (-5 to 55C) Sensing Technology HUMICAP 180R Operating Temperature 23 to 131F (-5 to 55C) Enclosure ABS/PC Enclosure Rating IP30, UL-V0 approved Wiring Terminations Screw terminals Dimensions 5.22"H X 3.19"W X 1.18"D (13.27 X 8.1 X 3.0 cm) Approvals CE Weight 0.34 lb (0.16 kg) Warranty 1 year Impedance VDC HMW93 Measurement Range
HUMIDITY
DIMENSIONS
59.5
30
29.8
4.4
132.7
33.5
81
30.5
HMW90 Series Dimensions March 2014
HMW90 Series Mounting Base Dimensions
34
27
47.5
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
499
HUMIDITY
WALL-MOUNTED HUMICAP HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER HMW90 SERIES
WIRING
HMW92 Wiring (2 Power Supplies) HMW92 (Three-wire connection)
-T +T -RH +RH
mA
+ Power supply 10 ... 28 VDC - R = 0 ... 600 L + Power supply ... 28 VDC - 10 RL = 0 ... 600
-T +T -RH +RH
mA mA
+ -
mA
Power supply 10 ... 28 VDC RL = 0 ... 600
9
HMW93 Wiring HMW93 (Three-wire connection)
Relay -RH +RH -T +T -Vs +Vs
HUMIDITY
+ 18 ... 35 VDC - or 24 VAC 20%

max. 50 VDC 500 mA
V V
Power supply
Relay -RH +RH -T +T -Vs +Vs

V
RL = 10 k min.
+ -
Power supply 18 ... 35 VDC or 24 VAC 20% RL = 10 k min.
MODEL HMW92 HMW92D HMW93 HMW93D DESCRIPTION Humidity and Temperature transmitters with two current outputs Humidity and Temperature transmitters with two current outputs, with visible display Humidity and Temperature transmitters with two voltage outputs Humidity and Temperature transmitters with two voltage outputs, with visible display
HTM10 DCPA-1.2 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE HMW90 series replacement sensor element Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
500
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
MULTIFUNCTION HUMIDITY/TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER E31 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The E+E E31 Series Multifunction Humidity/Temperature Transmitters offer precise measurement of humidity and temperature with eld selectable analog outputs for both parameters. The unit can also be ordered with enthalpy, dew point, and wet bulb. Two-point calibration can be performed using push-buttons on the circuit board-no need for dismounting which makes it ideal for regulatory environments. Built-in LEDs indicate transmitter status and errors. An optional display is available for local indication of measured values and minimum and maximum values. FEATURES Accuracy of 1.3% RH Derived values for dew point, enthalpy, and wet bulb Simple calibration Stainless steel sintered lter Optional display available Dual output signals RS232 output
WIRING
RxD/BTxD/A+ GND Ser 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Supply Analog output Serial data output
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Humidity Temperature Supply Voltage 4- 20 mA: Signal Output Communication Measurement Range Humidity Temperature Sensing Technology Humidity Temperature Sensor Protection Display Type Display Dewpoint Enthalpy 1.3% RH, <90% RH, 5 to 104F (-15 to 40C) 0.27F (0.14C) 0.06 0-5/10 VDC: 8-35 VDC, 40 mA; 12-30 VAC, 1.0 VA 8-35 VDC, 80 mA; 12-30 VAC, 1.9 VA Field selectable: 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, (500 max load), 0-5 V, or 0-10 V, Serial interface RS232C 0 to 100% RH -40 to 120F (-40 to 48.9C) Capacitive Pt1000 RTD, 385 curve Stainless steel sintered lter Optional, two line, alphanumeric LCD, English units -40 to 120F (-40 to 48.9C) 0-64 Btu/lb (0 to 400 kJ/kg)
4-20 mA + 4-20 mA +
Out 2 Out 1 GND
Power Supply 8-35 VDC 12-30 VAC
GND V+
HUMIDITY
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 5.3 (13.5) 2.6 (6.7) 3.5 (9.0)
Plastic enclosure
6.4 (16.3) 5.3 (13.5)
2.6 (6.7) 3.5 (9.0)
Wetbulb 0 to 100F (-17.8 to 37.8C) Operating Temperature Display: -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) No Display -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C) Enclosure NEMA 4, IP65 Wiring Terminations Screw terminals Warranty 1 year March 2014
Metal enclosure
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
501
HUMIDITY
MULTIFUNCTION HUMIDITY/TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER E31 SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION E31* Humidity and temperature transmitter, 8 to 35 VDC, 12 to 30 VAC HOUSING M Humidity and temperature transmitter with metal housing P Humidity and temperature transmitter with polycarbonate housing APPLICATION A Wall mount B Duct mount D Wall mount with remote sensing probe and 6.6' (2m) cable PROBE LENGTH (MODEL B ONLY) 5 Probe length, 7.9" (200 mm) 6 Probe length, 15.8" (400 mm) DISPLAY - No display D LCD display ALARM OUTPUT No alarm relay S With alarm relay Chart 1 Physical Parameters A) - RH B) - temperature C) - dew point E) - wet bulb I) - specic enthalpy Chart 2 2) Output Signals 2) - 0 to 5 VDC 3) - 0 to 10 VDC Chart 3 3) Scaling (T - temperature, Td - dew point, Tf - frost point) 05 0 to 100 12 -40 to 120
HUMIDITY
Example: E31MA5DS EE31 duct humidity and temperature transmitter with polycarbonate housing, wall mount, probe length, 7.9", LCD display, with alarm relay. * Each E31 is shipped with setup software and required cable.
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 691-K0A HA010502 HA011101
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 EE23/EE31 Radiation Shield 1/2" conduit connector
502
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
1% ROOM AND DUCT MULTI-PARAMETER HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER HF5 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Rotronic HF5 Series High Performance Multi Parameter Humidity and Temperature Transmitters are ideal for all applications where exact measurement of humidity, enthalpy, dry bulb, wet bulb, temperatures plus other psychrometric parameters are critical. This high performance transmitter using air chip technology accurately measures relative humidity to within 0.8% RH. The HydroClip2 probe can be individually calibrated and adjusted to increase measurement precision where you need it the most. The HF5 Series is available in a duct mount or wall mount conguration. This unit can be factory congured or software is available for eld conguration. FEATURES Interchangeable probe Calculates all psychrometric values Automatic sensor and drift compensation Optional DIN rail mounting Field congurable with software
HFxxW
HF5xxD
WIRING
K2
2 1 2 1
T-OUT V+ H-OUT V+
APPLICATION The HF5 is ideal for high accuracy HVAC applications, building management systems, museums, libraries, environmental monitoring systems. The HF5 Series measures dew point, wet bulb, enthalpy, specic humidity, absolute humidity and mixing ratio. HydroClip2 The new HygroClip2 is available in various formats: from a simple plug-in probe for handheld instruments and data loggers to the highly developed cable probes for high temperature and other special applications. As standard, they all have high accuracy, which can be increased further by specic adjustments within our patented AirChip, making every HygroClip2 a highend product for all applications.
Terminals K2-2: T-OUT K2-1: V+ Terminals K1-2: H-OUT K1-1: V+
K1
Description Temperature output (+) OUT-2 Power supply: 1028 VDC (+) Description Relative humidity or dew point (+) OUT-1 Power supply: 1028 VDC (+)
HUMIDITY
Note: Connect the + of the power supply to only one of the V+ terminals. The two terminals marked V+ are internally connected.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage HF52 HF53 Accuracy Stability Repeatability Long Term Stability Response Time Temperature: Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance March 2014 10 to 28 VDC, 40 mA 15 to 40 VDC, 50 mA; 12 to 28 VAC, 1.2 VA 0.8% RH @ 73F (23C) from 5% to 95% RH 0.5% drift per year 0.3% RH <1% RH/year RH: Typically 10 seconds for 63 % of a jump 35 to 80 %RH (1 m/sec air ow at sensor) Typically 4 seconds for 63 % of a change from 23 to 80 C (1 m/sec air ow at sensor) 4-20 mA 500 1000 Range Humidity 0-100% Temperature -148 to 392F (-100 to 200C) Display Optional: LCD, 1 or 2 decimals Operating Humidity 0 to 100% non-condensing Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Enclosure Rating ABS/IP65 conforms to UL94-HB Wiring Terminations Screw terminals/ M16 cable gland or " conduit adapter Dimensions Case 5.1"H x 5.1"W x 1.8"D (13 x 13 x 4.5 cm) Wall Plate 0.6" x 3.5"L (1.5 x 9 cm) Duct Probe 0.6" x 8.3"L (1.5 x 21 cm) Approvals CE/EMC: EMC Directive 2004/108/ EC Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg) Warranty 1 year
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
503
HUMIDITY
1% ROOM AND DUCT MULTI-PARAMETER HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER HF5 SERIES
MODEL HF520 HF532 HF534 HF535
DESCRIPTION 2-wire (loop powered), 4-20 mA 3-wire, 4-20 mA 3-wire, 0-5 V 3-wire, 0-10 V INSTALLATION/MOUNTING D W Duct mount (through wall) Wall mount PSYCHROMETRIC PARAMETERS B A Humidity (0 to 100 %RH) and Temperature - see range below Temperature & Dew / Frost point - see range below Temperature & Wet Bulb temperature (Tw) - see range below Temperature & Enthalpy (H) - see range below OUTPUT RANGES 6X 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) OPTIONAL KEYPAD AND DISPLAY D Keypad and display (HF52: no backlight HF53: w. backlight) No keypad and display ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 3 4 1x " conduit adapter (horizontal mounting) 1x " conduit adapter (vertical mounting - type D w/o display)
DEWPOINT, WETBULB OR ENTHALPY RANGES (optional)
C D
HUMIDITY
4X
0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) S Hydroclip standard climate probe
HF520
6X
Example: HF520DB6XD4S 2 Wire psychrometric transmitter, duct mount, humidity and temperature outputs, display and HydroClip Standard Climate probe.
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994
504
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
ROOM OR DUCT HUMIDITY, TEMPERATURE, DEW POINT TRANSMITTER EE23 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The E+E EE23 series Humidity and Temperature Transmitter has been developed for high-precision measurement of relative humidity and temperature. EE23 Series transmitters are available for wall and duct mounting with or without the snap inmounting kit, which allows a quick and easy exchange of the transmitter. Outputs can be selected between voltage and current. A special protection coating for the sensing element permits the permanent use in very polluted environments. FEATURES Humidity and temperature calibration NEMA 4 housing Stainless steel sintered lter Optional alarm switch Optional display
APPLICATION Green houses Storage rooms Swimming halls Meteorology
9
WIRING
Output and Supply
with active temperature output with passive temperature output
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Humidity Temperature Hysteresis Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance Measurement Range Sensing Technology 1.3%, 90% RH, 5 to 104F (-15 to 40C) 0.27F (0.14C) < 2% RH 0-5 VDC: 10.5 - 35 VDC, 35 mA; 12 - 28 VAC, 0.8 VA 0-10 VDC: 15 - 35 VDC, 35 mA; 15 - 28 VAC, 1.4 VA 4-20 mA: 15 to 35 VDC, 60 mA; 15 to 28 VAC, 2.6 VA 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC 470 5000 Humdity: 0-100% Humidity: Capacitive, HC1000-200 Temperature: 1000 Platinum (class A, DIN EN 60751) sintered stainless steel lter
Alarm Output
Analog outputs Analog output
HUMIDITY
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Metal:
5.3 (13.5)
3.5 (9.0)
Sensor Protection Operating Temperature Non-display -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) With display -22 to 140F (-30 to 60C) Display LCD, English units Polycarbonate or Aluminum alloy Enclosure Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (IP65) Wiring Terminations Screw terminals maximum size wire AWG 16 (1.5 mm2) Approvals CE Warranty 1 year March 2014
Plastic:
3.5 (9.0)
2.6 (6.7)
Both metal and plastic casings are 2.6" (6.7 cm) deep
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
505
HUMIDITY
ROOM OR DUCT HUMIDITY, TEMPERATURE, DEW POINT TRANSMITTER EE23 SERIES
MODEL EE23
DESCRIPTION Humidity and temperature transmitter, 8 to 35 VDC, 12 to 30 VAC HOUSING M P Humidity and temperature transmitter with metal housing Humidity and temperature transmitter with polycarbonate housing APPLICATION A B Wall mount Duct mount PROBE LENGTH (MODEL B ONLY) 5 6 Duct probe length, 7.9" (20.0 cm) Duct probe length, 15.8" (40.0 cm) DISPLAY D No display LCD display ALARM OUTPUT S No alarm relay With alarm relay AB RH and temperature OUTPUT 2 3 6 0-5 VDC 0-10 VDC 4-20 mA RANGE FOR TEMPERATURE 05 10 12 15 0 to 100F (-17 to 37.8C) -20 to 120F (-28.9 to 48.9C) -40 to 120F (-40 to 48.9C) 20 to 120F (-6.7 to 48.9C)
HUMIDITY
EE23
6X
AB
12
Example: EE223PB6DSAB212 EE23 duct humidity and temperature transmitter with plastic case, 15.8" (40.0 cm) probe, LCD display, 0-5 VDC outputs for RH and temperature (0-100%; -40 to 120F (-40 to 120C)
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 691-K0A HA010502 HA010502
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 EE23/EE31 Radiation Shield 1/2" conduit connector
506
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
1% AND 2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS HT829, HT839
DESCRIPTION The Minco Model HT829 Relative Humidity Transmitter measures 0% to 100% RH over a range of -10 to 185F (-23 to 85C). The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low-cost space, duct, and outdoor monitoring or process and industrial building control. A temperature sensor built into the integrated circuit provides temperature compensation over the full temperature range.The HT839 Series has temperature transmitter output.
Room Housing (S)
FEATURES Temperature-compensated IC sensor One-point eld calibration, RH or temperature Weatherproof housing for OSA and duct 1% or 2% RH accuracy Sintered lter
Duct Housing (D)
OSA / Wall Housing (O)
FM
APPROVED
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy 1% units 1% from 10% to 80% RH 2% units 2% from 0% to 90% RH Time Constant 60 sec in slow-moving air Supply Voltage 9.4 VDC min to 35 VDC max Signal Output Two-wire, 4-20 mA over 0% to 100% RH and temperature (HT839) Maximum Output Impedance 730 @ 24 VDC (Power supply - 9.4) / 0.02 A = Sensing Technology Capacitive monolithic IC (Humidity) Sensor Protection Sintered lter (Humidity) Calibration One-point adjustment Adjustments Zero, noninteracting Operating Temperature Room -10 to 150F (-23 to 66C) Duct/OSA -10 to 185F (-23 to 85C), Wiring Terminations Nonpolar terminals, connect either way (22-14 AWG wire)
Dimensions Room 4.5"H x 2.8"W x 1.5"D (11 x 7 x 4 cm) Duct 4.6"L x 2.9"W x 2.3"D (22 x 7.3 x 5.7 cm), 4.6" (11.8 cm) probe length 0.38" (0.95 cm) OSA 10.2"L x 2.7"W x 2.3"D (26x 7 x 5.7 cm), 8" (20 cm) probe length 1.25" (3.2 cm) Weight Room 0.3 lb (0.13 kg) Duct 1.1 lb (0.5 kg) OSA 1.16 lb (0.53 kg) Warranty 3 years
HUMIDITY
WIRING HT829, RH ONLY

24VDC
WIRING HT839, RH AND TEMPERATURE
24VDC
+ -
Z S Hum* Hum
T
Hum* Hum Temp* Temp * Non-polar connections ** Need humidity connection to output temperature signal properly
Z S Z S
+ RH 4-20mA Signal
*Non-polar connections
RH Signal 4-20mA **Temp Signal 4-20mA
+ +
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
507
HUMIDITY
1% AND 2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS HT829, HT839
MODEL DESCRIPTION HT829 Relative humidity transmitter only HT839 Relative humidity transmitter and temperature transmitter D Duct mount, weather resistant box, 8" probe O Outside air mounting, weather resistant box with weather shield S Space room/office mounting 1 4-20 mA DC output N1 1% RH from 10/80% @ 25C, temperature matched at 0C with NIST certificate N2 2% accuracy from 0/90% @ 25C, temperature matched at 0C with NIST certificate S2 2% accuracy from 0/90% @ 25C, no calibration data EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20/140F) or (-29/60C) (HT839 only) S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/100F) or (-18/38C) (HT839 only) A Range codes per Minco letter ranges (20/120F) or (-7/49C) (HT839 only) BI Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30/130F) or (-1/54C) (HT839 only) N Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32/122F) or (0/50C) (HT839 only) H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40/90F) or (4/32C) (HT839 only) -Range codes per Minco letter ranges in the catalog (HT839 only) SX Special range on next item line, -xxx/-yyyE, i.e., -20/120F (HT839 only) HT839 D 1 S2 A Example: HT839D1S2A 2% RH and temperature duct transmitter with 8" probe, temperature ranged for 20/120F
HUMIDITY
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
508
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS KH2 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KHR, KHD, and KHO Series Humidity Transmitters are specically designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%. The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low-cost humidity monitoring for building control. The RH transmitters are available with thermistor or RTD temperature sensors. They come in room (KHR), duct (KHD), and OSA (KHO) mounting styles. OPERATION The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20 mA signal with the latest microprocessor capacitive design. Multipoint factoryautomated calibration improves accuracy and repeatability. The optional temperature sensors, thermistor or RTD, offer direct connections to most automation systems. FEATURES Calibration-free interchangeable sensors Twelve-point computerized calibration 2% accuracy (5% to 95% RH) Replaceable sensor probe (no re-calibration) No need to remove box to replace sensor probe Attractive room enclosure design Two-wire, 4-20 mA output, 0% to 100% RH
KHR
KHD
KHO
9
Metal handy box NEMA 3R plastic box
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy 2% RH @ 73F (23C) from 5% to 90%; (0-5% & 90%-100%) add 3% <0.5% per year 0.05% / F 9.5-28 VDC 4-20 mA two-wire, loop-powered KHD KHO Probe Duct
Drift Thermal Effect Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance 725 @ 24 VDC (Supply voltage - 9.5 VDC) / 0.02 Sensing Technology Precon HS-2000 capacitive Operating Humidity 0-100% Non-condensing Operating Temperature -20 to 158F (-29 to 70C) Enclosure KHR White plastic, UL94HB
Probe: 1/2" aluminum tube with expanded Teon lter OSA Probe: 1/2" aluminum tube with 40 micron stainless steel sintered lter Wiring Terminations Screw terminals Weight (Without Options) KHR 0.21 lb (0.09 kg) KHD 1.2 lb (0.59 kg) KHO 0.52 lb (0.24 kg) Approvals RoHS Warranty 18 months
HUMIDITY
WIRING
24 VDC Power Supply
J5 +V
Temperature sensor output to BAS Controller
SENSOR
RH LOOP
12-28 VDC
4-20mA RH Signal
J4
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
509
HUMIDITY
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS KH2 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
Plug-in Replaceable Sensor
Removeable Sensor Cover 1.30 (3.30) 3.20 (8.12)
2.50 (6.35)
1/2" Conduit Hole* (face down) 4.10 (10.4) 2.50 (6.35) Mounting Box
3.31 (8.40)
Mounting Tabs (2)
4.5 (11.43)
PC Board Clips
* Must face down to maintain watertight integrity
2.75 (6.98)
0.94 (2.38)
3.30 (8.38)
1/2" Conduit Hole* (face down)
Back Plate
Front
Side
MODEL KHD2 KHO2 KHR2 DESCRIPTION Duct mounted 2% humidity transmitter Outside air 2% humidity transmitter Wall mounted room/space 2% humidity transmitter OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE RANGES T3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III T21 2252 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T22 3000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T24 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T27 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T42 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type IV T81 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve T85 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 385 platinum curve T91 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve OPTIONS CL1 Custom one color logo, KHR2 only WP Weatherproof housing, KHD2 only XJ1 RJ11 externally-accessible communication jack (CCRJ11AD required), KHR2 only XJ2 Internal RJ11 communication jack, KHR2 only XLED LED indicator lamp 24V AC/DC green, KHR2 only XMB Momentary pushbutton switch, jumpered across sensor or pot (JP1), KHR2 only
T3 WP Example: KHD2-T3-WP Duct mounted 2% humidity transmitter with 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III and weatherproof housing
HUMIDITY
KHD2
HSR HSD HSO DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
ACCESSORIES Replacement 2% humidity sensor for wall Replacement 2% humidity sensor Replacement 2% humidity sensor RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
510
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS H_20K SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Kele Series H_20K Humidity Transmitters have been specically designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments measure relative humidity from 5% to 90% RH with 2% accuracy and produce a two wire 4-20 mA linear output. All are available with an optional passive RTD or thermistor. The duct and OSA versions may also be tted with a 4-20mA temperature transmitter. APPLICATION The temperature compensated circuitry converts the relative humidity into a 4-20 mA signal. The optional temperature sensors, RTDs or thermistors, offer direct connection to most automation systems. On duct and OSA units, an optional 4-20 mA temperature transmitter may also be employed and is rangeable from -30 to 250F (-34 to 121C). FEATURES 2% accuracy (5% to 90%) Two-wire, 4-20 mA RH output Optional temperature thermistor Optional temperature RTD Optional temperature 4-20mA (duct or OSA)
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4.50 (11.43)
9
2.13 (5.4) 0.25 (0.64) 4.625 (11.7) 7.0 (17.8)
2.88 (7.30) 2.125 (5.4)
2.875 (7.3)
4.43 (11.3)
5.25 (13.3) 1.25 (3.18)
HUMIDITY
3.23 (8.20)
Foam gasket
HW20K
HD20K
HO20K
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Stability Thermal Effect Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Measurement Range RH Temperature 2% RH @ 73F (23C) from 5% to 90% RH; (0-5% & 90%-100%) add 3% 0.5% drift per year 0.05% per F 9.5-28 VDC 4-20 mA, thermistor, RTD 725 @ 24VDC (Supply voltage - 9.5V) / 0.02 0-100% -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) (see ordering information) Sensor Protection (Duct and OSA) Sintered lter 0-100% RH non-condensing Operating Humidity Operating Temperature -20 to 158F (-29 to 70C) Enclosure Room White plastic Duct Weather resistant cast aluminum Wiring Terminations Terminal block (22 to 16 AWG) Weight Room 0.3 lb (0.09 kg) Duct 1.14 lb (0.52 kg) OSA 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) Approvals RoHs Warranty 1.5 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
511
HUMIDITY
WIRING FOR RH ONLY AND "T" TEMPERATURE OPTION WIRING OR RH AND "TT" TEMPERATURE OPTION
Optional temperature sensor
T RH V+
Power supply 24 VDC
Humidity 4-20 mA signal

Power Supply 24 VDC
T RH V+
Temperature 4-20 mA signal Humidity 4-20 mA signal
Room, Duct, OSA (RH or RH-T)
Duct and OSA with TT option only
MOUNTING ROOM AND DUCT SENSOR

DIAGRAM 1: The transmitter should be mounted so that the 9" (22.86 cm) probe is in the center of the duct. The transmitter should be duct mounted away from fans, corners, heating and cooling coils, and other equipment that will affect the measurement of relative humidity.
Optional CustomerSupplied Handy Box
MOUNTING OSA SENSOR

The transmitter should be mounted preferably on the north side (Northern Hemisphere) of a building under the eave, not above windows or doors. The transmitter should be mounted vertically with the sensor slots pointing down.
Plate Mounting Screws
Wire Access Hole
White Faceplate (standard)
HUMIDITY
any heating or cooling generating devices. Basic model comes with screw terminal block, two #6-32 screws for handybox mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws for direct wall mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16 allen key head. Precautions should be taken to prevent air inltration from inside the wall.
Diagram 2 Diagram 2: The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (12.7 cm) above the oor, on an interior wall, away from
Diagram 1
Cover Mounting 1/16 Allen Screws
North
MODEL HW20K HW21K HD20K HO20K DESCRIPTION 2% beige room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 2% white room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 2% duct-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 2% OSA-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output OPTIONS (Temperature Sensors or Transmitters) -No temperature sensor T3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III T21 2252 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T22 3000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T24 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II T27 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T42 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type IV T63 1000 nickel SS flush mounted plate RTD @ 70F (26C), Type III (yellow leads) T71 100 SS flush mounted plate RTD @ 32F (0C), Type III (blue leads) T81 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve T85 1000 385 platinum RTD T91 1000 375 platinum RTD TT-2 -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only) TT-3 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only)
T3 Example: HD20K-T3 Duct-mount humidity sensor with 10 k Type III temperature sensor
HD20K
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
512
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
2% ROOM HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER HS20K SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Kele Model HS20K-C and HS20K-V Humidity Transmitters has been specically designed for use with HVAC/BAS applications and, with its unique lowprole design, is perfect for museums, institutions or other architecturally challenging locations. The HS20K will monitor humidity from 5% to 95% with 2% accuracy with an 4-20 mA analog current output or a 0-5 VDC voltage output. The HS20K Series is available with optional passive temperature sensors. FEATURES 2% accuracy 4-20mA or 0-5 VDC analog outputs Passive temperature sensors output optional Stainless steel plate mounted HS20K
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermal Effect Supply Voltage HS20K-C HS20K-V Signal Output HS20K-C HS20K-V Maximum Output Impedance 2% RH @ 73F (23C) from 5% to 90%; (0-5% & 90-100%) add 3% 0.05% per F 9.5-28VDC 5 VDC 4-20 mA, two wire loop powered, passive thermistor or RTD 0 to 5 VDC, passive thermistor or RTD
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.75 (6.99)
4.50 (11.43)
3.25 (8.25)
HUMIDITY
725 @ 24VDC (Supply voltage 9.5V) / 0.02 Sensing Technology Precon HS-2000 capacitive Operating Humidity 0-100% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature -20 to 158F (-29 to 70C) Enclosure Flush mounted stainless steel plate Wiring Terminations Terminal block (22 to 16 AWG) 0.34 lb (0.15 kg) Weight RoHS Approvals Warranty 18 months
WIRING
Power Supply 24 VDC
VOLTAGE WIRING
(DCP-524 power supply recommended)
4-20 mA Signal
Temperature (optional)
2 1
Pin 1 - not used Pin 2 - Power (5 VDC) Pin 3 - RH Out (5 VDC) Pin 4 - Ground
HS20K-C 4-20mA Current Output
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
513
HUMIDITY
2% ROOM HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER HS20K SERIES
MODEL HS20K-V HS20K-C
DESCRIPTION Stainless steel wall plate humidity sensor with 0-5 VDC output Stainless steel wall plate humidity sensor with 4-20 mA output OPTIONS T3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (gray leads) T21 2252 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (green leads) T22 3000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (blue leads) T24 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (yellow leads) T27 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (gray leads) T42 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type IV(green leads) T63 1000 nickel RTD @ 70F (26C) (yellow leads) T71 100 RTD @ 32F (0C) (blue leads) T81 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 curve (yellow leads) T85 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve (blue leads) T91 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 curve (green leads)
T3 Example: HS20K-V-T3 2% SS wall plate humidity transmitter with 0-5 VDC output with Type III 10,000 thermistor
HS20K-V
HUMIDITY
DCP-1.5-W-C DCP-524 DCPA-1.2-C
RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 24 VAC In to special DC output (Specify output voltage when ordering, 1.5-24 VDC) Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC and 5 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/ Special DC output (Specify output voltage when ordering, 1.3-27 VDC)
PAGE 995 997 994
514
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS GEH2 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Amphenol Advanced Sensors Model GEH2 Series 2% Accuracy Humidity Transmitters are designed specically for commercial building automation systems (BAS). The room, duct and OSA transmitters use replaceable sensor tips and switch selectable transmission including 4-20mA, 0-5V or 0-10VDC. The GEH also has an optional temperature transmitter output with selectable outputs(RH&T must be the same type). All duct and OSA enclosures are rated for IP42 or NEMA 3R applications. Room FEATURES 2% accuracy Temperature compensated Field-selectable 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V outputs Replaceable sensor Optional temperature transmitter OSA APPLICATIONS HVAC building controls Hospitals/pharmaceuticals Swimming pools Clean rooms Animal rooms Museums / archives Duct
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Supply Voltage Signal Output 2% (10% to 90%) 18-30 VDC, 100mA 4-20 mA/0-5V/0-10V selectable; 0-100% RH
WIRING
VOLTAGE MODE
V SW1 I V SW3 I
CURRENT MODE
V SW1 I V SW3 I
Maximum Output Impedance 700 maximum @ 24 VDC Minimum Output Impedance 10 k minimum Sensing Technology Capacitive and replaceable Operating Humidity 0% to 99%, non-condensing Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Enclosure Rating ABS plastic, UL94V Room Installed Room IP20, NEMA 1 Duct/OSA IP42, NEMA 3R Stainless steel with removable tip, PTFE Teon shield, Wiring Terminations 16 to 22 AWG terminals Weight Room 0.34 lb (0.15 Kg) Duct 0.96 lb (0.44 Kg) OSA 1.22 lb (0.55 Kg) Warranty 2 years
HUMIDITY
Switch Positions for Voltage Mode

Switch Selectable 0-5 V or 0-10 V Output 10V V-TMP GND V-RH I2RH/P + + + Temp Input RH Input 24 VDC
Switch Positions for Current Mode
24 VDC 4-20 mA/RH 4-20 mA/Temp
I1RH/P+ I2RH/P I2-TMP
SW2
TH Not TH
5V I1RH/P+
used
J7
RH and Temperature - Voltage
J8
RH and Temperature - Current Loop
V SW3 V SW1 3K Current 10V I
JPR1 10K
Voltage
SW2
J7 5V
J8
Connector and Switch Locations

Only one terminal block provided; move for either voltage or current.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
515
HUMIDITY
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS GEH2 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 3.80 (9.63) Cover Base 4.70 (11.92) 4.70 (11.92) Wiring Access 2.75 (7.0) 1/2'' (1.27) knockout (each side) 4.70 (11.92) 0.5 (1.27) 1.28 (3.24) 6.38 (16.2) 2.75 (7.0) 8.80 (22.37)
4.70 (11.92)
Cover (all mounts)
Space (Wall) Mount

2.37 (6.03)
Outside Air Mount
Duct Mount
9
MODEL GEH2
DESCRIPTION RH transmitter 2% accuracy RH MOUNTING ENCLOSURE S Decorative room mounting enclosure D Duct mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure O OSA mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure and weather shield SN Decorative room mounting enclosure with NIST certificate DN Duct mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure with NIST certificate ON OSA mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure and weather shield with NIST certificate TEMPERATURE OPTION TT0 Transmitter, 40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.2C) (S, D, SN, and DN only) TT2 Transmitter, -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) (D, O, DN, and ON only) TT3 Transmitter, 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) (All enclosure mounts) 2% room RH transmitter with NIST certificate 2% duct RH transmitter
HUMIDITY
Example: GEH2-SN GEH2-D
GEH2-RH GEH2-RHTT DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Replaceable 25% humidity sensor for room, duct, and OSA Replaceable 2% humidity and temperature sensor for room, duct and OSA transmitters Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
516
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
2% DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS HMD60, HMD70, AND HMK41K
DESCRIPTION Vaisalas Models HMD60 and HMD70 Duct Mount Relative Humidity Transmitters have been specically designed for use in HVAC/BAS and pharmaceutical applications. These instruments measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%. They are easily installed and meet the European CE standards. Five-minute eld calibration is possible using the Model HMK41K Humidity Calibrator. When accuracy adjustment or sensor replacement is necessary, the transmitter can be calibrated in seconds with a single potentiometer without disturbing operation. This saves hours of maintenance time and assures high accuracy.
HMD 60 or HMD 70
FEATURES Comes with NIST certicate Full 0% to 100% RH measurement State-of-the-art replaceable sensor technology
9
Enclosure Rating Cast aluminum NEMA 4 (IP55), ABS plastic Screw terminals (20-16 AWG) CE 1.68 lb (0.76 kg) 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
HMD60, HMD70 Accuracy Humidity Temperature Supply Voltage 60 Series 70 Series Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance Measurement Range Humidity Duct Mount Temperature Duct Mount Sensing Technology
2% RH (0% to 90% RH) @68F (20C) 0.2C 10 to 35 VDC 10 to 35 VDC, 9 to 24 VAC @ 0.3 VA (signal dependant) 500 @ 24 VDC 3000 min 0% to 100% -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) Capacative and replaceable, Vaisala HUMICAP 180
Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Duct Warranty
HUMIDITY
Operating Temperature Electronics 23 to 131F (-5 to 55C) Sensor Head (Duct) -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C),
HM41K Sensor Capacitive and replaceable Operation Handheld, onsite calibrator Reference Probe Accuracy 1% RH (0% to 90% RH) 2% RH (90% to 100% RH) Measuring range 0% to 100% RH, -40 to 140F (-22 to 78C) Operating temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Storage temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Temperature coefcient +0.04% RH/C typical Agency approvals CE, NIST certicate Weight 2.1 lb (0.95 kg) Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
517
HUMIDITY
2% DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS HMD60, HMD70, AND HMK41K
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.94 (10.01) 3.23 (8.20)
Outside Wall Northern Exposure (Northern Hemisphere)

End View into Sensor
3.23 3.94 (8.20) (10.01)
Mounting Bracket 2.50 (6.35) 4.50 (11.43) 1.75 (4.45)
0.47 (1.19)
3.50 (8.89) Sun/Rain Shield
2.44 (6.20)
9.85 (25.01)
Side View
10.0 (25.40)
HMD 60/70 Duct RH
WMK-20 Outside Air Bracket
WIRING
RH gain T gain
RH offset T offset
T Test 1 2 3 4 5
RH gain T gain
RH offset T offset
1 2 3 4 5
HMD 60U or HMD 60Y
HMD 70U or HMD 70Y

+RH -RH +T -T Y Option 4-20 mA Temperature Signal 4-20 mA RH Signal Output Selections T 0-1V RH T 0-5V RH T 0-10V RH Power Supply
Us RH out
T GND out
Power Supply
Y Option Voltage Temperature Signal Voltage RH Signal
Duct Current Output
Duct Voltage Output
HUMIDITY
MODEL DESCRIPTION
HMD60U HMD60Y HMD70U HMD70Y HMW60U HMW60Y HMW70U HMW70Y
Duct RH transmitter, 4-20 mA output Duct RH and temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA output Duct RH transmitter 0-1V, 0-5V, 0-10V output Duct RH and temperature transmitter, 0-1V, 0-5V, 0-10V output Wall mount, RH transmitter, 4-20 mA output Wall mount, humidity with 4-20 mA output , temperature with 4-20 mA output Wall mount, RH transmitter, 0-1 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC outputs Wall mount, humidity, and temperature, 0-1 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC outputs
HMK41K HUMICAP180 WMK-20 DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 2% handheld calibrator with calibration cable Replacement humidity sensor (replaces 0062HM) OSA/Wall-mount bracket Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
518
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS A/RH2 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The ACI A/RH2 Series Relative Humidity Transmitters utilize a capacitive sensing element to deliver a proportional 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC output. It is available for room, duct, outside, and stainless steel wall plate applications. The A/RH2 Series has on board DIP switches which allow the user to select the desired output signal and can be powered by AC or DC power sources. Each A/RH2 Series humidity transmitter is calibrated using a NIST Traceable Temperature/Humidity Chamber. Three and ve point NIST calibration certicates are available and optional. FEATURES Popular room housing Accuracies of 2%, 3% or 5% Three-year warranty Duct and OSA twist-off NEMA 4 housing 24 VDC or 24 VAC power (eld-selectable) 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V signal (eld-selectable) Field calibratable Digital display option Optional temperature sensor
A/RH2-O A/RH2-R
A/RH2-SP
A/RH2-D
9
Dimensions Room Duct OSA Weight Room Duct OSA SP Approvals Warranty 3.8"H x 2.8"W x 0.9"D (9.8 x 7 x 2.3 cm) 3.6" (9 cm) head with 8.15"L (20 cm) probe 0.75" (1.9 cm) 3.6" (9 cm) head with 3.0"L (7.6 cm) probe 1.4" (3.6 cm) 0.22 lb (0.1 kg) 1.21 lb (0.54 kg) 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) CE, RoHS 5 years
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermal Effect Supply Voltage Signal Output Measurement Range Sensing Technology Operating Temperature Room Duct/OSA Enclosure Room Duct/OSA 2% @ 77F (25C) from 10% to 95% <0.005% per F (<0.01 per C) 12-40 VDC or 24 VAC, selectable 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC (eld selectable) 0% to 100% Capacitive 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Plastic Delta-style Plastic weatherproof
HUMIDITY
WIRING

ON OFF

4-20 mA Output
ON
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
0-10 VDC Output

ON OFF
ON
Supply Ground / Signal Common AC or DC Supply Voltage 4-20 mA Output
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
0-5 VDC Output

ON OFF
March 2014
ON

0-10 or 0-5 VDC Output Signal Supply Ground / Signal Common AC or DC Supply Voltage
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
519
HUMIDITY
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS A/RH2 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.25 (5.7) 0.89 (2.3) 0.79 (2.0) 3.84 (9.8) 4.24 (10.8) 3.60 (9.1) 2.69 (6.8) 0.86 (2.2) 6.10 (15.5)
1.00 (2.5)
4.68 (11.9) 3.95 (10.0)
0.75 (1.9) 2.25 (5.7)
3.84 (9.8)
4.51 (11.5)
(4) PG11/0.5" (1.27) NPT Knockouts 3.00 (7.6)
2.75 (7.0)
0.60 (1.5) 0.92 (2.3)
1.40 (3.6)
Room
Outside
2.75 (7.0) 1.40 (3.6) 0.75 (1.9) 4.5 (1.4)
1.07 (2.7)
7.15 (18.2)
HUMIDITY
2.25 (5.7)
0.75 (1.9)
Duct
MODEL A/RH2
Stainless Plate
DESCRIPTION 2% accuracy humidity transmitter AN Type III 10,000 thermistor CP Type II 10,000 thermistor 20K 20,000 thermistor 100 100 385 PT RTD 1K 1,000 385 PT RTD R Room D Duct O Outside air SP Stainless steel plate passive sensors only Example: A/RH2-100-R A 2% accuracy room humidity transmitter with 100 RTD
A/RH2 - 100 - R
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 691-K0A
RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2
PAGE 995 994 979
520
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 2% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS HT2D, HT2O, HT2S
DESCRIPTION The Minco Model HT relative humidity transmitters are full-range, high-accuracy building automation transmitters. Model HT covers 0% to 100% RH over a wide temperature. The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low cost space, duct, and outdoor monitoring for building control.
OPERATION The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20 mA signal. The HT transmitters have a microprocessor that performs the temperature compensation calculations from an onboard RTD. The microprocessor maintains both high accuracy and low cost with a wide humidity and operational temperature span. An added optional temperature output is available in the same enclosure. It comes with a 4-20 mA signal and a large selection of temperature ranges.
HT2D
HT2O The housings for the duct- and OSA-mount congurations are suitable for outdoor use. The aluminum cast box is gasketed to maintain a rain-tight environment for the transmitter.
HT2S
9
C
FM
APPROVED
US
FEATURES 100% replacement for discontinued Hycal transmitters Advanced wall-mount design Weather-resistant housing for duct and OSA use Dual output option (humidity and temperature)
HUMIDITY
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Humidity Temperature Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Measurement Range Humidity Temperature EN Range S Range H Range 2% (5 to 90% RH) 0.5F (0.27C) 9.4-35 VDC (24V nominal) 4-20 mA (Power supply 9.4V) / 0.02 = load, i.e., (24V 9.4V) / 0.02 = 730 0 to 100% RH -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) -0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) 40 to 90F (4 to 32C) Sensing Technology Humidity Temperature Operating Temperature Room Duct/OSA Wiring Terminations Weight Room Duct OSA Warranty Capacitive monolithic IC Platinum 1000 RTD 385 curve -10 to 150F (-23 to 65C) -10 to 185F (-23 to 85C) Nonpolar terminals (22-14 AWG wire) 0.3 lb (0.13 kg) 1.1 lb (0.50 kg) 1.16 lb (0.53 kg) 3 years
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
521
HUMIDITY
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 2% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS HT2D, HT2O, HT2S
DIMENSIONS
2.75 (6.99)
2.75 (6.98)
4.63 (11.75)
Housing Bottom View 4.50 (11.43)
4.0 (10.16) 2.25 (5.72)
4.5 (11.43) 1.25 (3.18)
2.88 (7.30)
0.38 (0.953)
1.58 (4.01) Housing Top View
2.0 (5.08)
Foam Gasket
8.0 (20.32)
HT2S
HT2O
HT2D
WIRING
24 VDC Power Supply
Hum* Hum Temp* Temp
HUMIDITY
4-20 mA Humidity Signal
4-20 mA Optional Temperature Signal**
HT2S
* Non-polar connection ** Needs humidity connection to output temperature signal properly
ODE HT2 DES T ON 2% relative humidity transmitter D Duct mount, weather resistant box, 8" probe O Outside air mounting, weather resistant box with weather shield S Space room/office mounting 1 4-20 mA DC output NT No temperature transmitter EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20/140F) or (-29/60C) S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/100F) or (-18/38C) H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40/90F) or (4/32C) D 1 NT Example: HT2D1NT 2% RH duct transmitter with 8" probe, no temperature output
HT2
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
PAGE 994 995
522
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
2% WALL, DUCT AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS BA/H200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The BAPI BA/H200 Series 2% Accuracy Humidity Transmitters from BAPI are designed specically for HVAC systems. Room sensors are available in the traditional Delta style enclosure or the new BAPI STAT 4. All Duct Units feature medical-grade closed cell foam to seal the probe insertion hole and to absorb vibration. All Outside Air Units have etched Teon leadwires and are built to withstand high humidity and condensation and perform under real world conditions. Duct and OSA units are available in weatherproof enclosures selectable from IP66 or NEMA 3R. RH transmitter outputs include 4-20 mA, 0-5V, and 0-10V with replaceable sensor tips. FEATURES Popular room housing 2% Accuracy Three-year warranty Duct and OSA twist-off NEMA 4 housing 24 VDC or 24 VAC power (eld-selectable) 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V signal (eld-selectable) Field calibratable Optional temperature sensor
Delta-Style Enclosure
BAPIStat 4 Enclosure
BAPIBox 2 Enclosure
9
NEMA 4 (BB) Duct Unit Weatherproof (WP) Duct Unit
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance Sensing Technology Sensor Protection Room Duct/OSA 2% from 20% to 95% RH 15-26 VAC/VDC 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC 700 maximum @24 VDC 10 k minimum Resistive with ceramic substrate Room Gore-Tex 100 micron stainless steel sintered lter 0-100%, non-condensing Enclosure Room Duct/OSA BAPIBox (BB) BAPIBox II (BB2) WP Wiring Terminations Weight Room OSA/Duct BB/BB2 WP Approvals Warranty BAPI STAT 4: ABS Plastic, UL94V-0
HUMIDITY
IP66, UV resistant polycarbonate IP66, UV resistant polycarbonate Weatherproof, NEMA 3R cast aluminum Four wire, 16 to 22 AWG terminals 0.25 lb (0.11kg) 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) 1.3 lb (0.59 kg) CE, RoHS 2 years
Operating Humidity Operating Temperature Room 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Duct/OSA -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C)
WIRING
4 TO 20 mA TERMINATION Terminal Legend Function GND ........... 4 to 20 mA signal (to analog input of controller) V+ ............. +15 to +26 VDC TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor 0 TO 5 VDC TERMINATION Terminal Legend Function GND ........... To controller ground (GND or common) V+ ............. +15 to +26 VAC/VDC V OUT.......... 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10V signal (to analog input of controller) TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor
J6
J7
Humidity Transmitter Module

YELLOW YELLOW BLUE BLUE WHITE or GREEN BLACK RED
Blue wire (3%); Blue with Black stripe (2%)
Sintered Sensor Tip
POT 1 J1
% RH ADJUST
RH ZERO
RTH1
Room Humidity Circuit Board
GND
V+
1 2
V OUT
J2
Display Cycle in Seconds 3 T 10 20 H
RTH2
TEMP
F/C
POT 2
ON DEG F OFF DEG C
TEMP +
Optional Temperature Sensor Wires Voltage Output: 0-5V (white) or 0 to 10V (green) Ground: 4-20 mA output (two-wire loop) to controller or voltage output ground Power: 15 to 26 VDC
Duct and OSA
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
523
HUMIDITY
BAPI ROOM DUCT, AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS BA/H200 SERIES
BAPI ROOM HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER MODEL BA/H200R BA/H210R BA/H220B4XZCG BA/H205B4XZCG BA/H210B4XZCG BA/H212B4XZCG DESCRIPTION 2% Humidity Transmitter, 4-20 mA output, Delta enclosure 2% Humidity Transmitter, 0-10 VDC output, Delta Enclosure 2% Humidity Transmitter, 4-20 mA output, BAPI STAT 4 2% Humidity Transmitter, 0-5 VDC output, BAPI STAT 4 2% Humidity Transmitter, 0-10 VDC output, BAPI STAT 4 2% Humidity Transmitter, 2-10 VDC output, BAPI STAT 4 DISPLAY OPTION (optional) D F LCD Display Delta (BAPI STAT 4)
Example: BA/H220B4XZCGDF 2% Room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output, BAPI STAT 4 with LCD display
BAPI DUCT HUMIDITY SENSOR
MODEL BA/H200 BA/H210 BA/H212
DESCRIPTION 2% Humidity w/ Interchangeable Output of 0-5 VDC or 4-20 mA output 2% Humidity, 0-10 VDC output 2% Humidity, 2-10 VDC output ENCLOSURE OPTION (Must choose one) DBB DBB2 DWP BapiBox Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate BapiBox2 Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate Weatherproof Enclosure, NEMA 3R Rated Metal Enclosure
HUMIDITY
Example: BA/H200DBB2 2% Duct mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output, BB2 enclosure
BAPI OSA HUMIDITY SENSOR MODEL BA/H200 BA/H210 BA/H212 DESCRIPTION 2% Humidity w/ Interchangeable Output of 0-5 VDC or 4-20 mA output 2% Humidity, 0-10 VDC output 2% Humidity, 2-10 VDC output ENCLOSURE OPTION (Must choose one) OBB OBB2 OWP BapiBox Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate BapiBox2 Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate Weatherproof Enclosure, NEMA 3R Rated Metal Enclosure
Example: BA/H200OWP 2% OSA mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output, weather proof housing
BA/ADP-525-7-CPW BA/ADP-525-7-OFW BA/ADP-525-7-WMW BA/FOAMBACK DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 UR
RELATED PRODUCTS Copla white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate Off white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate Warm white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate White foam back insulator Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1391 1391 1391 1391 995 994
524
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 2% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS SRH12 SERIES
DESCRIPTION Designed for the HVAC control system, the Setra SRH12 Series of humidity transmitters offer reliable measurement of RH levels from 0 to 100% with an accuracy of 2%. Available in wall, duct, and outside air congurations, the SRH12 Series is easy to install and service if necessary. The transmitters utilize a eld replaceable sensor tip that allows the end user to replace sensors on-site. This eliminates factory calibration and downtime. FEATURES 2% RH accuracy No recalibration required Replaceable sensor Capacitive sensor technology Reverse polarity protection Outside Air
APPLICATION HVAC/R building controls Indoor air quality Laboratories Antiquities preservation Swimming pools Clean rooms Duct
WIRING Shield 6 5 4 3 2 1 Ground connection (not used) (not used) (not used) RH (4 to 20 mA) output Vin
HUMIDITY
RTN/COM +EXC
Wall
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Drift Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance 2% RH (0-100% RH) @ 73F (23C) <1% RH/yr @ 73F (23C), 50% RH 12-30 VDC 4-20 mA, 2-wire Dimensions Room Duct 4.7"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D (12 x 7 x 2.5 cm) 5.1"L x 2.7"W x 2.4"D (13 x 6.8 x 7 cm) 8.5" (21.6 cm) probe length 1/2" probe 6.1"L x 4"W x 12.5"D (15.5 x 10 x 32 cm) CE, RoHS 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) 1.3 lb (0.59 kg) 2.6 lb (1.2 kg) 1 year (sensor) 3 years (electronics only)
700 @ 24 VDC = (supply - 10) / 0.02 Sensing Technology Replaceable capacitive Sensor Protection Porous Polyethylene Protection Reverse polarity protection 0 to100% Operating Humidity Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Enclosure Room ABS plastic (ammability, 94V-0) Polycarbonate (ammability, 94V-0), Duct NEMA 4 (IP65), Wiring Terminations Pluggable terminal block
OSA Approvals Weight Room Duct OSA Warranty
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
525
HUMIDITY
DIMENSIONS
2.81 (7.15)
5.60 (14.22) 5.10 (12.95) 2.68 (6.81)
6.10 (15.49)
4.04 (10.26) 2.68 (6.8)

2.38 (6.04) 4.50 (11.44)
4.69 (11.9)
2.38 (6.04)
8.56 (21.75) Security Lock
Conduit Knockouts Both Sides Duct Probe
12.52 (31.8)
4.05 (10.27)
Universal Wall/Pipe Mounting Flange Porous Weather Shield
0.98 (2.47) Security Latch
Wall Mount
Duct Mount
Outside Air
HUMIDITY
MODEL SRH2PO11T0N SRH12PD11T0N SRH12PW11T0N DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W SRH32PT0 DESCRIPTION 2% Outside air humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 2% Duct mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 2% Wall mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 ACCESSORIES Replacement 2% humidity sensor
526
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
2% WATERPROOF / WASHDOWN HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER EHRH
DESCRIPTION The Amphenol Advance Systems EHRH Series Humidity Transmitters are specically designed for washdown areas and condensing atmospheres and offer thermistor or 4-20 mA temperature output. The EHRH Series measures relative humidity with a 2% resistive sensor and can withstand 100% saturation. It is made to be surface mounted to a single-gang outlet box or mounted directly to the wall. The EHRH Series are furnished with a waterproof case, connector, and stainless steel cover with leads for termination inside the wall. FEATURES Wash down waterproof design 4-20 mA output Easy one-point eld calibration Rugged metal cover Temperature output: thermistor or 4-20 mA
APPLICATION Swimming pools Green houses
Hospital suites Food processing Gymnasium
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Humidity 2% (30% to 95%) Temperature (EHRHT) 0.5F (0.3C) Supply Voltage 24 VDC 20% (loop powered) Signal Output 4-20 mA Maximum Output Impedance 700 @ 24 VDC Measurement Range Humidity 0% to 100% Temperature -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) Sensing Technology Humidity Bulk polymer resistive Temperature Platinum 1000 385 RTD (EHRHT) Type III 10 k Adjustments Zero 20% Span 10% Sensitivity 0.1% RH Operating Temperature -4 to 129F (-20 to 54C) Enclosure Rating Epoxy-hardened waterproof case Cover: Stainless steel Wiring Terminations Flying leads Weight 0.98 lb (0.44 kg) Warranty 1 year
HUMIDITY
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.75 (6.98) 1.25 (3.17) 1.12 (2.86)
WIRING
O F F G S A E I T N
Shown with customersupplied wiring box
Power Supply (red/white) (green/yellow) (white/brown) (white/brown)
5.37 (13.64)
3.30 (8.25)
2.75 (6.98)
4-20 mA Signal
Z S
Type 3 Thermistor
Front view Side View Top View
EHRH
MODEL EHRH EHRHT DESCRIPTION Waterproof/Washdown 2% RH transmitter Waterproof/Washdown 2% RH temperature transmitter RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
Power Supply 4-20 mA Signal RH 4-20 mA Temp (red/white) (green/yellow) (white/orange) (white/brown)
O F F G S A E I T N
Z S
DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
EHRHT
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
527
HUMIDITY
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS KH3 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Kele Model KHR, KHD, and KHO Humidity Transmitters are specically designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%. The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low cost humidity monitoring for building control. The RH transmitter is available with thermistor or RTD temperature sensors or a 4-20 mA rangeable temperature transmitter. They are available in room, duct, and OSA mounting styles. FEATURES Packaged for Price and Performance Calibration free Interchangeable sensors Twelve point computerized calibration 0% to 100% RH measurement 3% accuracy (5% to 95% RH) Temperature compensated No need to remove mounting box to replace sensor Attractive new room enclosure design Two-wire, 4-20 mA output Custom Logo's Optional push button, LED and comm. jack Optional temperature sensor (Thermistor or RTD) KHR KHO
KHD
WIRING - KHR WIRING - KHD AND KHR

24 VDC Power supply
24 VDC Power Supply
J5 +V
HUMIDITY
4-20 mA RH signal Optional temperature sensor to controller
12-28 VDC
SENSOR
RH LOOP
12-28 VDC
4-20mA RH Signal
J1
V+ RH TT THRM THRM
J4
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Drift Thermal Effect Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA 3% RH @ 73F from 5% to 90% RH; (0%-5% & 90%-100%) add 4% <0.5% per year 0.05% per F 9.5-28VDC 4-20 mA two-wire, loop-powered Probe KHR KHD Wiring Terminations Weight KHR KHD KHO Approvals Warranty 1/2" aluminum tube with expanded Teon lter 1/2" aluminum tube with 40 micron stainless steel sintered lter Screw terminals 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) 0.52 lb (0.24 kg) RoHS 18 months
725 @ 24 VDC (Supply voltage 9.5 VDC) / 0.02 Sensing Technology Precon HS-2000 capacitive Operating Humidity 0-100% non-condensing Operating Temperature -20 to 158F (-29 to 70C) Enclosure KHR White plastic, UL94HB KHD Metal handy box KHO NEMA 3R plastic box
528
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
MODEL KHD3 KHO3 KHR3
DESCRIPTION Duct mounted 3% humidity transmitter Outside air 3% humidity transmitter Wall mounted room/space 3% humidity transmitter Optional temperature ranges T3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III T21 2252 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T22 3000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T24 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T27 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T42 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type IV T81 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve T85 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 385 platinum curve T91 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve OPTIONS CL1 Custom one color logo, KHR3 only WP Weatherproof housing, KHD3 only XJ1 RJ11 externally-accessible communication jack (CCRJ11AD required), KHR3 only XJ2 Internal RJ11 communication jack, KHR3 only XLED LED indicator lamp 24 VAC/VDC green, KHR3 only XMB Momentary pushbutton switch, jumpered across sensor or pot (JP1), KHR3 only XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F (0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F (0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F (0C/25C/70C)
KHD3
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 HSD3 HSO3 HSR3
RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Replaceable 3% humidity sensor for KHD3 Replaceable 3% humidity sensor for KHO3 Replaceable 3% humidity sensor for KHR3
PAGE 995 994
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
529
HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY
DESCRIPTION The Kele Series H_30K Humidity Transmitters have been specically designed for use with HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments measure relative humidity from 5 to 90% with 3% accuracy and produce a two wire, 4-20mA linear output. All can come equipped with an optional passive RTD or thermistor. The duct and OSA versions may also be tted with a 4-20mA temperature transmitter. HD30K OPERATION The temperature compensated circuitry converts the relative humidity into a 4-20 mA signal. The optional temperature sensors, RTDs or thermistors, offer direct connection to most automation systems. On duct and OSA units, an optional 4-20 mA temperature transmitter may also be employed and is rangeable from -30 to 250F (-34 to 121C). HW30K FEATURES 3% accuracy (5% to 90%) Two wire, 4-20mA RH output Optional temperature thermistor Optional temperature RTD Optional temperature 4-20mA (Duct or OSA) HO30K
9
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4.50 (11.43)
2.13 (5.4) 0.25 (0.64) 4.625 (11.7) 7.0 (17.8)

3.23 (8.20)
2.875 (7.3)
4.43 (11.3) 2.88 (7.30) 2.125 (5.4)
5.25 (13.3) 1.25 (3.18)
HUMIDITY
Foam gasket
HW30K
HD30K
HO30K
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Stability Thermal Effect Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Measurement Range RH Temperature 3% RH @ 73F (23C) from 5% to 90%; (0-5% & 90%-100%) add 4% typically <0.5% drift per year 0.05% per F 9.5-28 VDC RH: 4-20 mA Temperature: 4-20 mA, optional thermistor, RTD 725 @ 24VDC (Supply voltage 9.5V) / 0.02) 0-100% -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) (see ordering information) Sensor Protection Sintered lter (duct and OSA) Operating Humidity 0-100% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature -20 to 158F (-29 to 70C) Enclosure Beige plastic (room), weather resistant cast aluminum (duct and OSA) Wiring Terminations Terminal block (22 to 16 AWG) Weight Wall 0.3 lb (0.09 kg) Duct 1.14 lb (0.52 kg) OSA 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) Approvals RoHs Warranty 18 months
530
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
WIRING FOR RH ONLY AND "T" TEMPERATURE OPTION
Optional temperature sensor
T RH V+
WIRING FOR RH AND "TT" TEMPERATURE OPTION
Power supply 24 VDC
Humidity 4-20 mA signal

Power Supply 24 VDC
T RH V+
Temperature 4-20 mA signal Humidity 4-20 mA signal
Room, Duct, OSA (RH or RH-T)
Duct and OSA with TT option only
MOUNTING ROOM SENSOR

DIAGRAM 1: The transmitter should be mounted so that the 9" (22.86 cm) probe is in the center of the duct. The transmitter should be duct mounted away from fans, corners, heating and cooling coils, and other equipment that will affect the measurement of relative humidity. Optional CustomerPlate Mounting Screws Wire Access Hole
MOUNTING OSA SENSOR

Supplied Handy Box
DIAGRAM 1
DIAGRAM 2
DIAGRAM 2: The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (12.7 cm) above the oor, on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices. Basic model comes with screw terminal block, two #6-32 screws for handybox mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws for direct wall mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16 allen key head. Precautions should be taken to prevent air inltration from inside the wall.
North
HUMIDITY
MODEL HW30K HD30K HO30K DESCRIPTION 3% beige room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 3% duct-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 3% OSA-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output OPTIONS (Temperature Sensors or Transmitters) -No temperature sensor T3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III T21 2252 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T22 3000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T24 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II T27 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T42 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type IV T63 1000 nickel SS flush mounted plate RTD @ 70F (26C), Type III (yellow leads) T81 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve T85 1000 385 platinum RTD T91 1000 375 platinum RTD TT-2 -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only) TT-3 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) transmitter, 4-20 mA (duct and OSA only) XN1 NIST 1 point, 30% (Humidity only) XN2 NIST 2 point, 30% and 50% (Humidity only) XN3 NIST 3 point, 30%, 50% and 70% (Humidity only)
T3 Example: HD30K-T3 Duct-mount humidity sensor with 10 k Type III temperature sensor
HD30K
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
PAGE 994 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
531
HUMIDITY
3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER & OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS HD31K, HO31K, HW31K
DESCRIPTION The Kele Models HW31K, HD31K, and HO31K 3% Humidity Transmitters are specically designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%. The standard twowire, 4-20 mA output provides low-cost humidity monitoring for building control. The RH transmitters are available with thermistor or RTD temperature sensors or a 4-20 mA rangeable temperature transmitter. They are available in room, duct, and OSA mounting styles. OPERATION The transmitter converts the relative humidity into a 4-20 mA signal with 3% accuracy. The optional temperature sensors, thermistor or RTD, offer direct connections to most automation systems. The optional rangeable temperature transmitter offers a 4-20 mA signal and is rangeable from -30 to 250F (-34 to 121C).
HD31K HW31K
9
FEATURES 0% to 100% RH measurement 3% accuracy (5% to 90% RH) Two-wire, 4-20 mA output White plastic design OPTIONS:
HO31K
Temperature thermistor Temperature RTD Temperature 4-20 mA for duct and OSA
HUMIDITY
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermal Effect Stability Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Measurement Range RH Temperature Sensor Protection 3% RH @ 73F (23C) from 5% to 90%; (0-5% & 90%-100%) add 4% 0.05% per F typically <1% drift per year 9.5-28 VDC RH: 4-20 mA Temperature: 4-20 mA optional thermistor, RTD 725 @ 24VDC (Supply voltage - 9.5V) / 0.02) 0-100% -20 to 140F (29 to 60C) (see ordering information) Sintered lter (duct and OSA) Operating Humidity 0-100% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature -20 to 158F (-29 to 70C) Enclosure Rating White plastic Wiring Terminations Screw terminals for loop termination Weight Room 0.3 lb (0.09 Kg) Duct 0.58 lb (0.26 Kg) OSA 0.72 lb (0.33 Kg) Approvals RoHs Warranty 18 months
532
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER & OPTIONAL TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS HD31K, HO31K, HW31K
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4.50 (11.43)
2.3 (5.84)
3.25 (8.26) 2.5 (6.35)
0.75 (1.91)
0.88 (2.24)
8.38 (21.29)
1/8" NPT
1/2" Conduit Hole

4.87 (12.38) Mounting Tabs
4.75 (12.07)
5.5 (13.98)
2.75 (7.0)
1.20 (3.05)
Gasket
Correct position for mounting outdoor air sensor
Front View
Side View
0.25 (0.64)
HW31K
HD31K
HO31K
MOUNTING
WIRING FOR ROOM UNIT

Optional Temperature Sensor
T RH V+
MOUNTING OSA SENSOR

Cover Hooks
0.75 (1.90)
Wire-way hole
Cover Securing Screws and Back Plate Board Hooks
Power Supply 24 VDC
Humidity 4-20 mA Signal

North
Room, HW31K (RH or RH-T)
HUMIDITY
MODEL HW31K HD31K HO31K DESCRIPTION 3% room-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 3% duct-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 3% OSA-mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output OPTIONS (temperature sensor or transmitter) -No temperature sensor T3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III T21 2252 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T22 3000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T24 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II T27 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T42 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type IV T63 1000 nickel RTD @ 70F (26C), Type III T81 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve T85 1000 @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum RTD T91 1000 @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum RTD
T3 Example: HD31K-T3 Duct-mount humidity transmitter with 10 k Type III temperature sensor
HD31K
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
533
HUMIDITY
3% ROOM HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER HMW80 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Vaisala HMW80 Series Room Humidity and Temperature Transmitter features the interchangeable INTERCAP sensor and is designed for use in energy management systems in buildings. They combine excellent stability with reliable operation. The HMW80 Series is easy to install, requires no recalibration if the sensor is changed and is insensitive to dust as well as to most chemicals.. This means great savings in overall maintenance costs. The HMW80 Series transmitters are available in four models: HMW82 and HMW83 transmitters measure both humidity and temperature. The TMW82 and TMW83 measure temperature only. HMW80 Series is available in both 2- and 3-wire and 4-20 mA and voltage analog signals. FEATURES 3% accuracy Easy to replace interchangeable humidity sensor Two-year warranty No recalibration required Low maintenance costs Temperature and humidity outputs 2-wire or 3-wire models
WIRING
HUMIDITY
Power Supply -10 to 28 VDC
Power Supply
_ 4-20 mA + _ 4-20 mA +
Power Supply -10 to 28 VDC
You must connect the RH channel of the HMW82, even if you only want to measure temperature. Connecting the temperature channel is optional.
+ Power supply _ 15 to 35 VDC _ + _ +
0 to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy HMW Series TMW Series Thermal Effect Supply Voltage HMW82/TMW82 HMW83/TMW83 Signal Output HMW82/TMW82 HMW83/TMW83 Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance Humidity 3%, 0 to 70% RH, 50 to 86F (10 to 30C) Temperature 0.9F ( 0.50C) Temperature compensated with less than 0.005% per F (0.01% per C) 20 to 28 VDC 18 to 35 VDC/24 VAC 20% 4-20 mA (loop powered) 0 to 10 VDC 600 10 k Measurement Range Humidity 0 to 100% RH Temperature 23 to 131F (-5 to 55C) Sensing Technology Humidity Replaceable Vaisala Intercap Temperature Digital Temperature Sensor Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature 23 to 131F (-5 to 55C) Enclosure ABS/ Polycarbonate UL-V0 approved, IP30 Wiring Terminations Terminal block (22 to 16 AWG) Approvals CE (EN61326-1) Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Warranty 2 years
534
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
3% ROOM HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER HMW80 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.2 (8.1)
3.0 (7.7)
0.35 (0.9) 0.20 (0.5)
5.0 (12.7)
4.9 (12.4)
0.17 (0.44) 1.28 (3.24)
0.17 (0.44)
2.32 (5.9)
0.79 (0.20)
9
0.21 (0.55)
3.07 (7.8)
2.37 (6.03)
0.95 (2.4)
HUMIDITY
MODEL HMW82 HMW83 TMW82 TMW83 DESCRIPTION 3% Room humidity and temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA 3% Room humidity and temperature transmitter, 0-10 VDC Room temperature transmitter, 2-wire 4-20 mA output Room temperature transmitter, 3-wire 0-10V output
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 691-K0A
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
535
HUMIDITY
3% DUCT HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER HMD42, HMD53
DESCRIPTION The Vaisala HMD42 and HMD53 Duct Mounted Humidity Transmiitters are designed for building automation applications. They combine reliable operation with excellent stability, providing low cost of ownership to the user. The HMD42 and HMD53 transmitters measure humidity with a 3% RH accuracy and temperature with a 0.54F (0.3C) accuracy. They feature various selectable analog output signals and they can be powered by either AC or DC voltage. The HMD42 and HMD53 humidity transmitters use the interchangeable Vaisala INTERCAP Sensor. The transmitters require no recalibration if the sensor is changed. The duct mount HMD42 and HMD53 transmitters can be installed in various measurement environments due to the robust IP65 (NEMA4) rated metal enclosure which protects the sensor from dust and splashes of water. FEATURES Duct mount 3% RH accuracy No recalibration required Easy to replace interchangeable sensor Current or selectable voltage output
PRODUCT DIAGRAM SPECIFICATIONS

ELECTRONICS
Lid
Accuracy Humidity Temperature Stability Supply Voltage HMD42 HMD53
3% RH 0.72F (0.4C) RH: 2% RH/2 years 10-35 VDC 10 to 35 VDC, 9 to 24 VAC @ 0.3 VA (signal dependent) @ 0.3 VA (signal dependent)
Screws
Screw terminal
Signal Output HMD42 4-20 mA 0 to 1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10 VDC HMD53 Maximum Output Impedance mA 500 Minimum Output Impedance VDC 20 k Measurement Range Humidity 0 to 100% Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Sensing Technology Humidity Replaceable Vaisala INTERCAP Temperature Pt 1000 RTD Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH Operating Temperature 23 to 131F (-5 to 55C) Enclosure Cast aluminum Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (IP65) Probe Stainless steel Wiring Terminations Screw terminal Approvals CE (EN61326-1, EN55022) Weight 0.6 lb (0.3 kg) Warranty 1 year
HUMIDITY
18941HM
10528HM
Glands
INTERCAP sensor part no. 15778HM Membrane filter part no. DRW010525 Stainless stell sintered filter part no. HM46670SP
Electronics, Accessories, Spare Parts
Removing and Reinstalling the Sensor Head 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the lid. Disconnect the screw terminal. Open the screws (2 pcs.) Pull the sensor head out carefully. To reinstall, push in the sensor head. Reassemble in reverse order.
Replacement of the Intercap Sensor If the INTERCAP sensor is damaged, remove it and insert a new one. Recalibration is not needed. If the filter is dirty, replace it to ensure a maximum lifetime and fast response for the sensor. Do not attempt to clean the filter.
536
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
3% DUCT HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER HMD42, HMD53
DIMENSIONS
2.36 (60) 9.84 (250)
2.36 (60)
9.84 (250)
0.47 (12)
0.47 (12)
OUTPUT SELECTIONS
3.99 (100)
3.99 (100)
INSTALLATION OF THE CURRENT MODULE Take off the jumpers
3.94 (100)
3.23 (82)
3.94 (100)
3.23 (82)
Connect the module; note the right direction! Connect the power supply
3.23 (82)
3.23 (82)
HMD42 Dimensions
HMD53 Dimensions
WIRING
HMD 42
+RH 5 RH 4 3 +T T 2 1 Power Supply 10 - 35 VDC +
HMD 42 4-20 mA RH HMD 42 4-20 mA Temp
HMD 53
GND 5 Tout 4 3 RHout 2 Vs 1 + DC/AC Power Supply
VDCout Temp VDCout RH
HUMIDITY
() + +
+ +
MODEL HMD42 HMD53 DESCRIPTION Duct mount, humidity 4-20 mA output Duct mount, humidity and temperature, 0-1 V, 0-5V, and 0-10 V output
15778HM DCPA-1.2 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Replaceable humidity sensor Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
537
HUMIDITY
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS A/RH3 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The ACI A/RH3 Series Relative Humidity Transmitters utilize a capacitive sensing element to deliver a proportional 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC output. it is available for room, duct, outside, and stainless steel wall plate applications. The A/RH3 Series has on board DIP switches which allow the user to select the desired output signal and can be powered by AC or DC power sources. Each A/RH3 Series humidity transmitter is calibrated using a NIST Traceable Temperature/Humidity Chamber. Three and ve point NIST calibration certicates are available and optional. FEATURES 3% accuracy Three-year warranty Duct and OSA twist-off weatherproof housing 24 VDC or 24 VAC power (eld-selectable) 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V signal (eld-selectable) Field-calibratable A/RH3-R
A/RH3-O
A/RH3-SP
A/RH3-D
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermal Effect Supply Voltage Signal Output 3% @ 77F (25C) from 10% to 95% <0.005% per F (<0.01 per C) 12-40 VDC or 24 VAC, selectable 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC (eld selectable) 0% to 100% Capacitive 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Plastic Delta-style Plastic weatherproof Dimensions Room Duct OSA Weight Room Duct OSA SP Approvals Warranty 3.8"H x 2.8"W x 0.9"D (9.8 x 7 x 2.3 cm) 3.6" (9 cm) head with 8.15"L (20 cm) probe 0.75" (1.9 cm) 3.6" (9 cm) head with 3.0"L (7.6 cm) probe 1.4" (3.6 cm) 0.22 lb (0.1 kg) 1.21 lb (0.54 kg) 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) CE, RoHS 5 years
HUMIDITY
Measurement Range Sensing Technology Operating Temperature Room Duct/OSA Enclosure Room Duct/OSA
WIRING
ON OFF
ON OFF ON
ON
4-20 mA Output
ON
4-20 mA Output
ON
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
0-10 VDC Output

4-20mA VIN COM VOUT Supply Ground / Signal Common AC or DC Supply Voltage
0-10 VDC Output

ON OFF
ON
OFF
0-5 VDC Output

ON OFF
ON
ON Ground / Signal Common ONSupply AC or DC Supply Voltage OFF 4-20 mA Output
0-5 VDC Output
3 Wire Current Output 4-20 Signal mA Output

4-20mA VIN COM VOUT

0-10 or 0-5 VDC Output Signal Supply Ground / Signal Common AC or DC Supply Voltage 4-20mA VIN COM VOUT

4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
538
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com

4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
March 2014
HUMIDITY
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.25 (5.7) 0.89 (2.3) 0.79 (2.0) 3.84 (9.8) 4.24 (10.8) 3.60 (9.1) 2.69 (6.8) 0.86 (2.2) 6.10 (15.5)
1.00 (2.5)
4.68 (11.9) 3.95 (10.0)
0.75 (1.9) 2.25 (5.7)
3.84 (9.8)
4.51 (11.5)
(4) PG11/0.5" (1.27) NPT Knockouts 3.00 (7.6)
2.75 (7.0)
0.60 (1.5) 0.92 (2.3)
1.40 (3.6)
Room
0.65 (1.7) 0.75 (1.9) 80 Micron Sintered Stainless Steel Filter 1.07 (2.7) Plastic Washer 80 Micron Stainless Steel Sintered FIlter 0.58 (1.5) 0.18 (0.5) O.D. Ref 1.00 (2.5) 2.70 (6.9)
Outside
2.75 (7.0) 1.40 (3.6) 0.75 (1.9) 4.5 (1.4)
7.15 (18.2)
2.25 (5.7)
HUMIDITY
0.75 (1.9)
Duct
MODEL A/RH3
Stainless Plate
A/RH3 - 100 - R
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 691-K0A
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
539
HUMIDITY
3% ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS BA/H300 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The BAPI Model BA/H Series 3% Accuracy Humidity Transmitters are designed specically for HVAC systems. The room transmitters use Delta or BAPI-Stat II enclosures with optional communication jacks. All duct and OSA units come in weatherproof enclosures selectable for NEMA 3R or IP66 applications. All BA/H transmitters have optional temperature sensors or temperature transmitters. Transmitter outputs include 4-20mA, 0-5V ad 0-10V with replaceable sensors. FEATURES Popular room housing Accuracies of 3% Three-year warranty Duct and OSA twist-off NEMA 4 housing 24 VDC or 24 VAC power (eld-selectable) 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V signal (eld-selectable) Field calibratable Optional temperature sensor
Delta-Style Enclosure
BAPIBox 2 Enclosure
HUMIDITY
NEMA 4 (BB) Duct Unit
Weatherproof (WP) Duct Unit
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance Sensing Technology Sensor Protection Room Duct/OSA 3%, from 20% to 95% RH 15-26 VAC/VDC 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC 700 maximum @24 VDC BAPIBox II (BB2) 10 k minimum Resistive with ceramic substrate Room Gore-Tex 100 micron stainless steel sintered lter 0-100%, non-condensing WP Wiring Terminations Weight Room Duct/OSA BB/BB2 WP Approvals Warranty Enclosure Room Duct/OSA BAPIBox (BB) ABS Plastic, UL94V-0 IP66 rated UV resistant polycarbonate IP66 rated, UV resistant polycarbonate Weather Proof, NEMA 3R, Cast aluminum Four wire, 16 to 22 AWG terminals 0.25 lb (0.11 Kg) 1.0 lb (0.45 Kg) 1.3 lb (0.55 Kg) CE, RoHS 2 years
Operating Humidity Operating Temperature Room 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Duct/OSA -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C)
540
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS BA/H300 SERIES
WIRING
Humidity Transmitter Module
YELLOW YELLOW BLUE BLUE WHITE or GREEN BLACK RED
4 TO 20 mA TERMINATION
J6
J7
POT 1 J1
% RH ADJUST
RH ZERO
POT 2 J2
2 Display Cycle in Seconds 3 T 10 20 H
Terminal Legend Function GND ........... 4 to 20 mA signal (to analog input of controller) V+ ............. +15 to +26 VDC TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor 0 TO 5 VDC TERMINATION Terminal Legend Function GND ........... To controller ground (GND or common) V+ ............. +15 to +26 VAC/VDC V OUT.......... 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10V signal (to analog input of controller) TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor TEMP.......... Optional temperature sensor
Blue wire (3%); Blue with Black stripe (2%)
Sintered Sensor Tip
RTH1
Room Humidity Circuit Board
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE BA/ADP-525-7-CPW Copla white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate BA/FOAMBACK White foam back insulator BA/FOAMBACK-GRAY Gray foam back insulator UR Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 BA/ADP-525-7-OFW Off white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate BA/ADP-525-7-WMW Warm white 7" x 5.25" adaptor plate
GND
V+
V OUT
RTH2
TEMP
F/C
ON DEG F OFF DEG C
TEMP +
Optional Temperature Sensor Wires Voltage Output: 0-5V (white) or 0 to 10V (green) Ground: 4-20 mA output (two-wire loop) to controller or voltage output ground Power: 15 to 26 VDC
Duct and OSA
BAPI ROOM HUMIDITY TRANSMITTER MODEL BA/H300R BA/H310R DESCRIPTION 3% Humidity Transmitter, 4-20 mA output, Delta enclosure 3% Humidity Transmitter, 0-10 VDC output, Delta Enclosure DISPLAY OPTION D LCD Display Example: BA/H300RD 3% Room humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output, with LCD display BAPI DUCT HUMIDITY SENSOR MODEL BA/H300 BA/H310 BA/H312 DESCRIPTION 3% Humidity w/ Interchangeable Output of 0-5 VDC or 4-20 mA output
HUMIDITY
3% Humidity, 0-10 VDC output 3% Humidity, 2-10 VDC output ENCLOSURE OPTION DBB DBB2 DWP BapiBox Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate BapiBox2 Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate Weatherproof Enclosure, NEMA 3R Rated Metal Enclosure
Example: BA/H300DBB2 3% Duct mount humidity transmitter, 0-10 VDC output, BB2 enclosure BAPI OSA HUMIDITY SENSOR MODEL BA/H300 BA/H310 BA/H312 DESCRIPTION 3% Humidity w/ Interchangeable Output of 0-5 VDC or 4-20 mA output 3% Humidity, 0-10 VDC output 3% Humidity, 2-10 VDC output ENCLOSURE OPTION OBB OBB2 OWP BapiBox Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate BapiBox2 Enclosure, IP66 Rated, UV Resistant Polycarbonate Weatherproof Enclosure, NEMA 3R Rated Metal Enclosure
Example: BA/H300OWP 3% OSA mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output, weather proof housing
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
541
HUMIDITY
DESCRIPTION Designed for the HVAC control system, the Setra SRH13 Series of humidity transmitters offer reliable measurement of RH levels from 0 to 100% RH with an accuracy of 3%. Available in wall, duct, and outside air congurations, the SRH13 Series transmitters are easy to install and service if necessary. The transmitters have a eld replaceable sensor tip that allows the end user to replace sensors in the eld eliminating factory calibration and downtime. FEATURES 3% RH accuracy No recalibration required Replaceable sensor Capacitive sensor technology Reverse polarity protection
SRH113PW
SRH13PD
WIRING
Shield 6 5 4 3 2 1 Ground connection (not used) (not used) (not used) RH (4 to 20 mA) output Vin
9
RTN/COM +EXC
SRH13P0
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Stability Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance 3% RH (0-100% RH) @ 73F (23C) <1%RH/yr @ 73F (23C), 50% RH 12-30 VDC 4-20 mA, 2-wire Dimensions Room Duct OSA Approvals Weight Room Duct OSA Warranty 4.7"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D (12 x 7 x 2.5 cm) 5.1"L x 2.7"W x 2.4"D (13 x 6.8 x 7 cm) 8.5" (21.6 cm) probe length 1/2" probe 6.1"L x 4"W x 12.5"D (15.5 x 10 x 32 cm) CE, RoHS 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) 1.3 lb (0.59 kg) 2.6 lb (1.2 kg) 1 year (sensor) 3 years (electronics only)
HUMIDITY
700 @ 24 VDC, = (supply - 10) / 0.02 Sensing Technology Replaceable capacitive Sensor Protection Porous polyethylene Reverse polarity protection Protection Operating Humidity 0 to100% Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Enclosure Room ABS plastic (ammability 94V-0) Duct/OSA Polycarbonate (ammability, 94V-0), NEMA 4 (IP65) Wiring Terminations Pluggable terminal block
MODEL SRH13PO11T0N SRH13PD11T0N SRH13PW11T0N SR33PT0 DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W DESCRIPTION 3% Outside air humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 3% Duct mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 3% Wall mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output ACCESSORIES Replacement 3% humidity sensor RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
542
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
ROOM, DUCT AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS GEH3 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Amphenol Advance Systems Model GEH3 Series 3% Accuracy Humidity Transmitters are designed specically for commercial building automation systems (BAS). The room, duct, and OSA transmitters have replaceable sensor tips and switch-selectable outputs of 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC. The GEH3 Series also has an optional temperature transmitter, which has the same selectable outputs as humidity. All duct and OSA units come in weather-resistant enclosures rated for IP42 or NEMA 3R applications.
FEATURES 3% accuracy Temperature compensated Field-selectable 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V outputs Replaceable sensor Optional temperature transmitter
Room OSA
Duct
SPECIFICATIONS
3% (10% to 90%) 12-30 VDC, 2.4 VA 4-20 mA/0-5V/0-10V selectable; 0-100% RH Maximum Output Impedance mA 700 maximum @ 24 VDC Minimum Output Impedance VDC 10 k minimum Sensing Technology Capacitive and replaceable Operating Humidity 0% to 99%, non-condensing Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Enclosure Rating Room ABS plastic, UL94V Room Installed IP20, NEMA 1 Duct/OSA IP42, NEMA 3R Stainless steel with removable tip, PTFE Teon Shield Wiring Terminations 16 to 22 AWG terminals Weight Room 0.5 lb. (0.23 kg) Duct/OSA 1.3 lb. (0.59 Kg) Warranty 2 years Accuracy Supply Voltage Signal Output
WIRING
VOLTAGE MODE
V SW1 I V SW3 I
CURRENT MODE
V SW1 I V SW3 I
HUMIDITY

Switch Selectable 0-5 V or 0-10 V Output 10V V-TMP GND V-RH I2RH/P + + + Temp Input RH Input 24 VDC
SW2
TH Not TH
5V I1RH/P+
used
J7
J8
JPR1 10K
Voltage
SW2
J7 5V
J8

March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
543
HUMIDITY
ROOM, DUCT AND OSA 3% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS GEH3 SERIES
WIRING
4.70 (11.92)
Cover (all mounts)
Space (Wall) Mount

2.37 (6.03)
Outside Air Mount
Duct Mount
9
MODEL GEH3
DESCRIPTION RH transmitter 3% accuracy RH MOUNTING ENCLOSURE S Decorative room mounting enclosure D Duct mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure O OSA mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure and weather shield SN Decorative room mounting enclosure with NIST certificate DN Duct mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure with NIST certificate ON OSA mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure and weather shield with NIST certificate TEMPERATURE OPTION TT0 Transmitter, 40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.2C) (S, D, SN, and DN only) TT2 Transmitter, -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) (D, O, DN, and ON only) TT3 Transmitter, 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) (All enclosure mounts) 3% room RH transmitter with NIST certificate 3% duct RH transmitter
HUMIDITY
DCPA-1.2 GEH3-RH GEH3-RHTT DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994 Replaceable 3% humidity sensor for room, duct, and OSA Replaceable 3% humidity and temperature sensor for room, duct and OSA transmitters Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
544
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
DESCRIPTION The Kele KHR, KHD, and KHO Series Humidity Transmitters are specically designed for use in HVAC/BAS applications. These instruments measure relative humidity from 0% to 100%. The standard two-wire, 4-20 mA output provides low-cost humidity monitoring for building control. The RH transmitters are available with thermistor or RTD temperature sensors. They come in room (KHR), duct (KHD), and OSA (KHO) mounting styles. FEATURES Calibration-free interchangeable sensors Twelve-point computerized calibration
SPECIFICATIONS
5% RH @ 73F (23C) from 5% to 90% RH; (0%-5% & 90%-100%) add 5% <0.5% drift per year Drift Thermal Effect 0.05%/F Supply Voltage 9.5- 28 VDC Signal Output 4-20 mA = 0% to 100% RH, two-wire, loop-powered Passive temperature output: All Kele standard thermistors and RTDs Maximum Output Impedance (Supply voltage - 9.5 VDC) / 0.02, 725 @ 24 VDC Sensing Technology Precon HS-2000 capacitive Operating Temperature -20 to 158F (-29 to 70C) Accuracy Enclosure Rating KHR KHD KHO Probe KHD White plastic, UL94HB Metal handy box NEMA 3R plastic box
1/2" aluminum tube with expanded Teon lter KHO 1/2" aluminum tube with 40 micron stainless steel sintered lter Wiring Terminations Screw terminals Weight (without options) KHR 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) KHD 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) KHR 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) Approvals RoHS Warranty 18 months
HUMIDITY
WIRING
24 VDC Power supply
J1
4-20 mA RH signal Optional temperature sensor to controller
12-28 VDC
V+ RH TT THRM THRM
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
545
HUMIDITY
INSTALLATION
24 VDC Power Supply
J5 +V
SENSOR
RH LOOP
12-28 VDC
4-20mA RH Signal
J4
9
HUMIDITY
MODEL KHD5 KHO5 KHR5
DESCRIPTION Duct mounted 5% humidity transmitter Outside air 5% humidity transmitter Wall mounted room/space 5% humidity transmitter Optional temperature ranges T3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III T21 2252 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T22 3000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T24 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T27 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II T42 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type IV T81 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve T85 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 385 platinum curve T91 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve OPTIONS CL1 Custom one color logo, KHR5 only RJ11 externally-accessible communication jack (CCRJ11AD required), KHR5 only XJ1 XJ2 Internal RJ11 communication jack, KHR5 only XLED LED indicator lamp 24V AC/DC green, KHR5 only XMB Momentary pushbutton switch, jumpered across sensor or pot (JP1), KHR5 only WP Weatherproof housing, KHD5 only
KHD5
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
546
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 5% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS GEH5 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Amphenol Advanced Sensors Model GEH5 Series 5% Accuracy Humidity Transmitters are designed specically for commercial building automation systems (BAS). The room, duct, and OSA transmitters have replaceable sensor tips and switch-selectable outputs of 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC. The GEH5 Series also has an optional temperature transmitter, which has the same selectable outputs as humidity. All duct and OSA units come in weather-resistant enclosures rated for IP42 or NEMA 3R applications.
FEATURES 5% accuracy Temperature compensated Field-selectable 4-20 mA, 0-10V, or 0-5V outputs Replaceable sensor Optional temperature transmitter
Room OSA
Duct
9
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Supply Voltage Signal Output 5% (10% to 90%) 18-30 VDC, 100 mA 4-20 mA/0-5V/0-10V selectable; 0-100% RH
WIRING
VOLTAGE MODE
V SW1 I V SW3 I
CURRENT MODE
V SW1 I V SW3 I
SW2
Maximum Output Impedance 700 maximum @ 24 VDC Minimum Output Impedance 10 k minimum Sensing Technology Capacitive and replaceable Operating Humidity 0% to 99%, non-condensing Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Enclosure Rating ABS plastic, UL94V Room Installed Room IP20, NEMA 1 Duct/OSA IP42, NEMA 3R Stainless steel with removable tip, PTFE Teon shield Wiring Terminations 16 to 22 AWG terminals Weight Room 0.34 lb (0.15 Kg) Duct 0.96 lb (0.44 Kg) 1.22 lb (0.55 Kg) OSA Warranty 2 years

Switch Selectable 0-5 V or 0-10 V Output
HUMIDITY
10V
V-TMP GND V-RH I2RH/P
SW2
+ + +
Temp Input RH Input 24 VDC
TH Not TH
5V I1RH/P+
used
J7
J8
JPR1 10K
Voltage
J7 5V
J8

March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
547
HUMIDITY
ROOM, DUCT, AND OSA 5% HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS GEH5 SERIES
WIRING
4.70 (11.92)
Cover (all mounts)
Space (Wall) Mount

2.37 (6.03)
Outside Air Mount
Duct Mount
9
MODEL GEH5 DESCRIPTION RH transmitter 5% accuracy RH MOUNTING ENCLOSURE S Decorative room mounting enclosure D Duct mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure O OSA mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure and weather shield SN Decorative room mounting enclosure with NIST certificate DN Duct mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure with NIST certificate ON OSA mounting with ABS plastic IP42 enclosure and weather shield with NIST certificate TEMPERATURE OPTION TT0 Transmitter, 40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.2C) (S, D, SN, and DN only) TT2 Transmitter, -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) (D, O, DN, and ON only) TT3 Transmitter, 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) (All enclosure mounts) 5% room RH transmitter with NIST certificate 5% duct RH transmitter
HUMIDITY
GEH5-RH GEH5-RHTT DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Replaceable 5% humidity sensor for room, duct, and OSA transmitters Replaceable 5% humidity and temperature sensor for room, duct and OSA transmitters Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
548
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
DESCRIPTION The ACI A/RH5 Series Relative Humidity Transmitters utilize a capacitive sensing element to deliver a proportional 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC output. It is available for room, duct, outside, and stainless steel wall plate applications. The A/RH5 Series has on board DIP switches which allow the user to select the desired output signal and can be powered by AC or DC power sources. FEATURES Popular room housing Five-year warranty Duct and OSA twist-off NEMA 4 housing 24 VDC or 24 VAC power Field selectable current or voltage outputs Single point eld calibration Digital display option Optional temperature sensor A/RH5-R
A/RH5-O
A/RH5-SP
A/RH5-D
9
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermal Effect Supply Voltage Signal Output Measurement Range Sensing Technology Operating Temperature Room Duct/OSA Dimensions Room 5% @ 77F (25C) from 10% to 95% <0.005% per F (<0.01 per C) 12-40 VDC or 24 VAC, selectable 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC (eld selectable) 0% to 100% Capacitive 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) 3.8"H x 2.8"W x 0.9"D (9.8 x 7 x 2.3 cm) Duct OSA Enclosure Room Duct/OSA Weight Room Duct OSA SP Approvals Warranty 3.6" (9 cm) head with 8.15"L (20 cm) probe 0.75" (1.9 cm) 3.6" (9 cm) head with 3.0"L (7.6 cm) probe 1.4" (3.6 cm) Plastic Delta-style Plastic weatherproof
HUMIDITY
0.22 lb (0.1 kg) 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) CE, RoHS 5 years
WIRING

ON OFF

4-20 mA Output
ON
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
0-10 VDC Output

ON OFF
ON
Supply Ground / Signal Common AC or DC Supply Voltage 4-20 mA Output
4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
0-5 VDC Output

ON OFF
ON

4-20mA VIN COM VOUT
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
549
HUMIDITY
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.25 (5.7) 0.89 (2.3) 0.79 (2.0) 3.84 (9.8) 4.24 (10.8) 3.60 (9.1) 2.69 (6.8) 0.86 (2.2) 6.10 (15.5)
1.00 (2.5)
4.68 (11.9) 3.95 (10.0)
0.75 (1.9) 2.25 (5.7)
3.84 (9.8)
4.51 (11.5)
(4) PG11/0.5" (1.27) NPT Knockouts 3.00 (7.6)
2.75 (7.0)
0.60 (1.5) 0.92 (2.3)
1.40 (3.6)
Room
Outside
2.75 (7.0) 1.40 (3.6) 0.75 (1.9) 4.5 (1.4)
1.07 (2.7)
7.15 (18.2)
HUMIDITY
2.25 (5.7)
0.75 (1.9)
Duct
MODEL A/RH5
Stainless Plate
A/RH5 - 100 - R
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 691-K0A
RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2
PAGE 995 994 979
550
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
DESCRIPTION Designed for the HVAC control system, the Setra SRH15 Series Humidity Transmitters offer reliable measurement of RH levels from 0 to 100% with an accuracy of 5%. Available in wall, duct, and outside air congurations, the SRH Series transmitters are easy to install and service if necessary. The transmitters utilize a eld replaceable sensor tip that allows the end user to replace sensors on-siteeliminating factory calibration and downtime. FEATURES 5% RH accuracy No recalibration required Replaceable sensor Capacitive sensor technology Reverse polarity protection SRH13PD
SRH113PW
WIRING
Shield 6 5 4 3 2 1 Ground connection (not used) (not used) (not used) RH (4 to 20 mA) output Vin
9
SRH13P0
RTN/COM +EXC
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Drift Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance 5% RH (0-100% RH) @ 73F (23C) <1% RH/yr @ 73F (23C), 50% RH 12-30 VDC 4-20 mA, 2-wire Wiring Terminations Dimensions Room Duct OSA Approvals Weight Room Duct OSA Warranty Pluggable terminal block
HUMIDITY
700 @ 24 VDC = (supply - 10) / 0.02 Sensing Technology Replaceable capacitive polymer Sensor Protection Porous polyethylene Protection Reverse polarity protection Operating Humidity 0 to100% Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Enclosure Room ABS plastic (ammability, 94V-0) Duct/OSA Polycarbonate (ammability, 94V-0), NEMA 4 (IP65)
4.7"H x 2.8"W x 1.0"D (12 x 7 x 2.5 cm) 5.1"L x 2.7"W x 2.4"D (13 x 6.8 x 7 cm) 8.5" (21.6 cm) probe length 1/2" probe 6.1"L x 4"W x 12.5"D (15.5 x 10 x 32 cm) CE, RoHS 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) 1.3 lb (0.59 kg) 2.6 lb (1.2 kg) 1 year (sensor) 3 years (electronics only)
MODEL SRH5PO11T0N SRH5PD11T0N SRH5PW11T0N SR35PT0 DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W DESCRIPTION 5% Outside air humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 5% Duct mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 5% Wall mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output ACCESSORIES Replaceable 5% humidity sensor RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
551
HUMIDITY
DEW POINT, ENTHALPY & WET BULB TRANSMITTERS DP4A, EN4A, WB4A
DESCRIPTION The Amphenol Advanced Sensors Model DP4 Dew Point, WB4 Wet Bulb, and EN4 Enthalpy Transmitters are rugged, compact, and ideally suited for monitoring dew point, wet bulb, or enthalpy in building automation and process applications. Using a capacitive RH sensor and an RTD temperature sensor, the units microprocessor computes the dew point, wet bulb, or enthalpy. Two linear outputs provide a 4-20mA signal for dew point, wet bulb, or enthalpy, and a 4-20 mA signal for dry bulb. temperature. Room OSA Duct
FEATURES Dew point accuracy of 1.8F (1C) over the specied range Enthalpy accuracy of 2 BTU/lb over specied range Wet bulb accuracy of 3F over the specied range Dry bulb accuracy of .05F (0.9C)over the specied range Two 4-20 mA output signals Microprocessor-based signal processing Weather resistant duct/OSA mounting Temperature compensated
APPLICATIONS DP4 supply air setpoint (condensation prevention) EN4 economizer efciency WB4 evaporative cooling decision potential
HUMIDITY
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Accuracy Enthalpy Dew Point Wet Bulb Dry Bulb Signal Output Measurement Range Dew Point Duct/OSA Space Enthalpy Space/Duct/OSA 18-30 VDC, 100 mA 2 BTU/lb 1.8F (1C) 3F (1.7C) 0.5F (0.9C) Field selectable: 4-20 mA (700 max load), 0-5 V, or 0-10 V Humidity and dry bulb temperature -20 to 120F (-28.8 to 49C) 40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.2C) 0-50 BTU/lb Wet Bulb Duct/OSA 0 to 100F (-17.8 to 37.8C) Space 40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.2C) Dry Bulb Duct/OSA -20 to 120F (-28.8 to 49C) 40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.2C) Space Sensing Technology Capacitive and replaceable Operating Humidity 0 to 99% RH, non-condensing Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Weight Room 0.34 lb (0.15 Kg) Duct 0.96 lb (0.44 Kg) OSA 1.22 lb (0.55 Kg) Warranty 1 year
552
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
DEW POINT, ENTHALPY & WET BULB TRANSMITTERS DP4A, EN4A, WB4A
DIMENSIONS
4.70 (11.92)
Cover (all mounts)
Space (Wall) Mount

2.37 (6.03)
Outside Air Mount
Duct Mount
WIRING
VOLTAGE MODE
V SW1 I V SW3
V SW1 I
CURRENT MODE
I
V SW3 I
V SW1
V SW3

Switch Selectable 0-5 V or 0-10 V Output 10V SW2

3K Current JPR1 10K
V-TMP GND V-XR I2DP/P
SW2
+ Temp XR + + 24 VDC
Vin XR RTN TEMP RTN
I1XR/P+ I2XR/P I2-TMP
10V
Voltage
HUMIDITY
J7 5V
J8
TH Not TH
5V I1DP/P+
used
J7
XR and Temperature - Voltage
*XR represents; DP - Dewpoint; EN-Enthalpy; WB - Wet bulb
J8
XR and Temperature - Current Loop
MODEL EN4A-D EN4A-O DP4A-D EN4A-S DP4A-O DP4A-S WB4A-D WB4A-O WB4A-S DESCRIPTION Duct enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter OSA enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter Duct dew point and dry bulb transmitter Room enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter OSA/Wall dew point and dry bulb transmitter Room dew point and dry bulb transmitter Duct wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter OSA wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter Room wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
553
HUMIDITY
DEW POINT, ENTHALPY & WET BULB TRANSMITTERS HMD/S/W8XD/H/W SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Vaisala Model HMX8XD Dew Point, HMX8XW Wet Bulb, and HMX8XH Enthalpy Transmitters are rugged, compact, and ideally suited for monitoring dew point, wet bulb, or enthalpy in building automation and process applications. Using a Vaisala Intercap RH sensor and an RTD temperature sensor, the unit's microprocessor computes the dew point, wet bulb, or enthalpy. Two linear outputs provide a 4-20mA signal for dew point, wet bulb, or enthalpy, and a 4-20 mA signal for dry bulb. temperature. FEATURES Dew point, Wet Bulb and Dry Bulb accuracy of 1.8F (1C) over the specied range Enthalpy accuracy of 2 BTU/lb over specied range Two 4-20 mA output signals Microprocessor-based signal processing Weather resistant duct/OSA mounting Temperature compensated HMS82 APPLICATION Dew point for supply air setpoint (condensation prevention) Enthalpy for economizer efciency Wet bulb for evaporative cooling decision potential
HMD82 HWM88
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 10 - 28 VDC Accuracy Dew Point, Wet Bulb & Dry Bulb 1.8F (1.0C) Enthalpy 2 BTU/lb Relative Humidity 3% RH Signal Output (2, Dry Bulb Temperature & Model Specic) 4-20 mA @ 600 Measurement Range Dew Point, Wet Bulb & Dry Bulb -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Enthalpy -10 tp 190 BTU/lb (-40 to 460 kj/hg) Relative Humidity 0 to 199% Sensing Technology Viasal Intercap Operating Humidity 0 to 99 % non-condensing Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Dimensions Duct 5.2" H x 2.8" W x 11.5" D (13.1 x 7.2 x 29.1 cm) OSA 8.1" H x 4.8" W x 3.9" D (20.7 x 12.2 x 10 cm) Room 7.6" H x 2.8" W x 1.6" D (19.3 x 7.2 x 4.1 cm) Approvals CE Weight Duct 0.65 lb (0.29 Kg) OSA 1.6 lb (0.72 Kg) Room 0.25 lb (0.11 Kg) Warranty 1 year
HUMIDITY
MODEL HMD82TD HMS82TD HMW88TD HMD82H HMS82H HMW88H HMD82W HMS82W HMW88W HMD82 HMS82 HMW88 DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W DESCRIPTION Duct dew point and dry bulb transmitter Outside Air dew point and dry bulb transmitter Room dew point and dry bulb transmitter Duct ehtanlpy and dry bulb transmitter Outside Air enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter Room enthalpy and dry bulb transmitter Duct wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter Outside Air wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter Room wet bulb and dry bulb transmitter Duct dry bulb and dry bulb transmitter Outside Air dry bulb and dry bulb transmitter Room dry bulb and dry bulb transmitter
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
554
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
INFRARED DEW POINT & GRAINS TRANSMITTER 9002
DESCRIPTION The Amphenol Advanced Sensors VaporStat Model 9002 is an absolute humidity transmitter that measures the amount of water vapor in the air with adversity to temperature variations. The moisture level is then calculated as dew point and transmitted simultaneously as 0-10 VDC and 4-20 mA. A display and keyboard are incorporated for local indication and parameter adjustment. A contact closure is also incorporated with keyboard entries for set point and differential. The Model 9002 is wall-mounted and available with accessories for duct and OSA applications.
APPLICATION The Model 9002 sampling chamber measures the infrared light absorbed by the moisture in the air and processes it as dew point or grains of moisture per pound of dry air. The 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA output ranges are selected at the keyboard and displayed on the LCD readout. A control contact energizes at the set point entered on the keyboard. The Model 9002 is ideally suited for local alarm and signaling for clean room controls, desiccant system controls, paper mill controls, and textile process controls as well as condensation prevention.
9002
9002 and T1508 Enclosure
FEATURES

Dew point accuracy 3.6F (2C) 0-10V and 4-20 mA output Digital display or blank cover Patented infrared absorption platform Gold-plated element for durability Built-in keyboard for range adjust Elevation correction via keyboard Tamper-resistant keyboard cover 10-minute eld calibration with gas
HUMIDITY
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Supply Voltage Signal Output Relay Output Measurement Range Sensing Technology Calibration Adjustments Altitude Limits Dew point: 3.6F (2.0C) @ 77F 24 VAC, 25%, 2.75 VA simultaneous outputs: 0-10V @ 1000 min 4-20 mA @ 500 max SPDT, 2A @ 24 VAC Dew point: 27 to 80F (-3 to 27C) Nondispersive infrared In eld with nitrogen gas Setpoint: Adjustable, full range Differential: Adjustable, full range Correctable to 5000' (1524m) Keypads Four-key menu control Life Expectancy 15 years Display Two-line, 1/2" (1.27 cm) LCD Output Range Adjust Within 0 to 80F (-17 to 26C) Operating Humidity 0% to 98% Operating Temperature 32 to 120F (0 to 50C) Warranty 18 months
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
555
HUMIDITY
INFRARED DEW POINT & GRAINS TRANSMITTER 9002
DIMENSIONS MOUNTING
3.25 (8.26) 1.37 (3.48)
in (cm)
5.63 (14.30)
Tamper Set Screw
WIRING
CONTROLS
N L1 24 VAC Use either or both outputs below 0-10V Out Signal Common 4-20 mA Out
2 1 Input AC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 NC COM NO
clear set enter
HUMIDITY
Mounting Bracket
Clear Mode Arrow Enter Button Button Button Button
SETUP
FACTORY OUTPUT SETTINGS Dew point, 0 to 80F (-22 to 25C) @ sea level Moisture = 0-140 grains per lb of dry air @ sea level Relay on @ 50F (10C), off @ 59F (15C) CHANGING SETTINGS 1. Press mode and clear at the same time for ve seconds to enter the adjust mode. 2. Press mode key to display item to change: elevation, dew point, grains, or relay. 3. Use arrow keys to select ranges. 4. Press enter to conrm selection. 5. Press clear to nish and return to normal display.
MODEL 9002 T1508 T1551 691-K0A DESCRIPTION Dew point and grains 0-10 VDC/4-20 mA transmitter and SPDT contact RELATED PRODUCTS Duct-mount accessory enclosure OSA-mount accessory enclosure Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 PAGE 979
556
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
3% HUMIDISTATS VH7200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Viconics VH7200 Series Humidistats are designed for controlling humidication and dehumidication equipment in HVAC and energy management systems. The humidistat utilizes a PI time proportional control algorithm to accurately control relative humidity. The VH7200 Series features adjustable control setpoint, and the ability to set the maximum number of output cycles from 3 to 8 per hour. Units accept a remote outdoor air temperature sensor which can be used to reset the humidity set point-minimizing energy consumption and condensation on windows and building structures. The high limit protection (available only on Model VH7270 when used with a remote humidity sensor) prevents damage due to over-humidication. FEATURES Designer wall mounting 3% RH control accuracy Two status LEDs Proportional high limit override eliminates condensation problems Sensor failure protection Outdoor temperature reset Keypad lockout Backlit LCD two line display
US
WIRING
24 VAC Hot On/Off Humidification On/Off Humidification
HUM HUM R
24 Vac Com. On/Off Dehumidification On/Off Dehumidification C

DEH DEH
VH7270K1000 Universal
Analog 0-10 VDC Humidification Digital input, dry contact to Scom Remote humidity sensor (0-10 VDC)
9
Supply Humidity High Limit Sensor (0-10 VDC) Outside air temperature sensor (thermistor) Sensor(s) and BI input common
HUM DI1 HS Scom OS HL 0-10
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Supply Voltage Signal Output Relay Output Setpoint Range Binary Inputs Sensing Technology Display 5% RH (20-100% RH) @ 50F to 90F (10C to 32C) 19-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 2 VA 0-10 VDC, 2 k minimum load impedance 1A continuous, 3A in-rush maximum @ 30 VAC Humidication 10 to 90% RH Dehumidication 15 to 95% RH Relay dry contact Bulk polymer Two line, 16 character LCD Resolution Humidity 0.1% Temperature 0.2F (0.1C) Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Outdoor Air: -40 to 122F Temperature Range (-40 to 50C) Enclosure ABS plastic Wiring Terminations Screw terminals Dimensions 4.9"H x 3.4"W x 1.1"D (12.4 x 8.6 x 2.8 cm) Approvals UL File E27734, CSA, CE Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 Kg) Warranty 1 year
HUMIDITY
MODEL VH7200A1000 VH7270F1000 VH7270K1000 691-K0A HD20K KHD2 KTO24 ST-O24 DESCRIPTION Humidistat, on/off (humidify), on/off (dehumidify) Humidistat, 0-10 VDC (humidify), on/off (dehumidify) Humidistat, 0-10 VDC and on/off (humidify), on/off (dehumidify) RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 2% duct-mount humidity sensor 511 2% duct mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 509 OSA thermistor sensor, Type 2, model 24, 0.5F (0.28C) 1216 OSA thermistor sensor, Type 2, model 24, 0.36F (0.20C) 1217
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
557
HUMIDITY
5% DUCT MOUNT HUMIDSTAT TDC SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Vector Model TDC-BH-U Duct Mount Humidistat is a stand-alone programmable electronic humidistat designed for controlling humidication and dehumidication equipment in HVAC and energy management systems. The TDC-BH-U Series features one internal humidity sensor, one external temperature sensor input and two relay outputs. Humidity reset is possible using the ST-O24 outdoor air temperature sensor for cold weather applications to prevent condensation. The TDC-BH-U-D Series comes with all of the features of the base model plus a time clock feature for advanced programming with 48 hour backup.
FEATURES Humidication and Dehumidication control External temperature input for set point setback Programmable user interface Optional time clock 2 relay outputs Easy to read display Replaceable sensor
TDC-BH-U
SPECIFICATIONS
HUMIDITY
Accuracy Supply Voltage Anolog Input Relay Output Operating Humidity
5% RH (10-90%) 24 VAC 10%, 50-60 Hz 1.5 VA, 24 VDC, 63 mA 10K Type II (Type 24) thermistor 2 NO SPST Relays, 2 Amps @ 24 VAC 0% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Enclosure Rating Polycarbonate PC (UL class V-0) Wiring Terminations Terminal block (12 to 24 AWG Approvals CE Weight 0.48 lb (0.22 kg) Warranty 2 years
CONNECTION TERMINALS
Humidify / Fan 24 VAC/VDC GND Dehumidify / Fan 10k Type II thermistor
Terminal-description: 1. Connection for power-supply (24 VAC/VDC, 10%). In case of DC, connect the negative power-terminal. Common connection for analog inputs and outputs. 2. Connection for power-supply (24 VAC/VDC, 10%). In case of DC, connect the positive power-terminal. 3. Contact DO 1 Humidify or Fan, 2A maximum 4. Contact DO 1 Humidify or Fan, 2A maximum 5. Contact DO 2 Dehumidify or Fan, 2A maximum 6. Contact DO 2 Dehumidify or Fan, 2A maximum 7. Thermistor input RT (10k Type II thermistor) 8. Thermistor input RT (10k Type II thermistor)
558
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
5% DUCT MOUNT HUMIDSTAT TDC SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.0 (7.6) 1.9 (4.7) 3.6 (9.1)
WIRING
24 VAC
2 G 1 G0 3 Q13 4 Q14 5 Q23 6 Q24 7 B1 8 M
Humidify / Dehumidify, TDC-BH-U (-D) Y Binary output 1: Humidify 0 to 24 VAC or 0 to 30 VDC Y Binary output 2: Dehumidify 0 to 24 VAC or 0 to 30 VDC R Temperature input for setback: 10k Type II thermistor Humidify plus fan control, TDC-BH-U (-D) W04 Y Binary output 1: Humidify 0 to 24 VAC or 0 to 30 VDC Y Binary output 2: Fan 0 to 24 VAC or 0 to 30 VDC R Temperature input for setback: 10k Type II thermistor Dehumidify plus fan control, TDC-BH-U (-D) W05 Y Binary output 1: Fan 0 to 24 VAC or 0 to 30 VDC Y Binary output 2: Dehumidify 0 to 24 VAC or 0 to 30 VDC R Temperature input for setback: 10k Type II thermistor
2.7 (6.8)
TDC-BH-U
(GND)
HUMIDITY
MODEL TDC-BH-U-W20 TDC-BH-U-W24 TDC-BH-U-W25 TDC-BH-U-D-W20 TDC-BH-U-D-W24 TDC-BH-U-D-W25 DESCRIPTION 5% duct mount humidistat for humidication and dehumidication with display 5% duct mount humidifying humidistat with display and fan control option 5% duct mount dehumidifying humidistat with display and fan control option 5% duct mount humidistat for humidication and dehumidication with display with programmable time clock 5% duct mount humidifying humidistat with display, fan control option and programmable time clock 5% duct mount dehumidifying humidistat with display, fan control option and programmable time clock
AES-HT-A5 AMC-1 AMC-2 ST-R24 ST-D24 SD-TN10-20-2 SDB-TN10-12-W SDB-TN10-20-W ST-O24 DCPA-1.2 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS 5% Replacement humidity element Cable gland for SDC-H1 Conduit fitting, 1/2 in NPT for SDC-H Raw temperature sensor with six foot cable, 10k Type II thermistor Eight inch duct sensor with six foot cable, 10k Type II thermistor Eight inch duct sensor with six foot cable, 10k Type II thermistor Five inch duct sensor with housing and six foot cable, 10k Type II thermistor Eight inch duct sensor with housing and six foot cable, 10k Type II thermistor Outdoor temperature sensor Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
PAGE
1247 1197
1217 994 979 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
559
HUMIDITY
5% WALL MOUNT HUMIDISTAT TCY-BH SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Vector Model TCY-BH-U Wall Mount Humidistat is a stand-alone programmable electronic humidistat designed for controlling humidication and dehumidication equipment in HVAC and energy management systems. The TCY-BH-U Series features one internal humidity sensor, one external temperature sensor input and two relay outputs. Humidity reset is possible using the ST-024 outdoor air temperature sensor for cold weather applications to prevent condensation. The TCY-BH-U-D Series comes with all of the features of the base model plus a time clock feature for advanced programming with 48 hour backup.
FEATURES Humidication and dehumidication control External temperature input for set point setback Programmable user interface Optional time clock 2 relay outputs Easy to read display Replaceable sensor
TCY-BH-U
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage
HUMIDITY
Accuracy Anolog Input Relay Output Operating Humidity
24 VAC 10%, 50-60 Hz 3 VA, 24 VDC, 125 mA 5% RH (10-90%) 10k Type II (Type 24) Thermistor 2 NO SPST Relays, 2 Amps @ 24 VAC 0% to 95% non-condensing
Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) ABS plastic (UL94 class V-0) Enclosure Rating Wiring Terminations Terminal block (12 to 24 AWG) Dimensions 4.4"H x 2.9"W x 1.8"D (11.2 x 7.3 x 4.7 cm) Approvals CE 0.58 lb (0.26 kg) Weight Warranty 2 years
CONNECTION TERMINALS
Humidify / Fan 24 VAC/VDC GND
Dehumidify / Fan 10k Type II thermistor
Terminal-description: 1. Connection for power-supply (24 VAC/VDC, 10%). In case of DC, connect the negative power-terminal. Common connection for analog inputs and outputs. 2. Connection for power-supply (24 VAC/VDC, 10%). In case of DC, connect the positive power-terminal. 3. Contact DO 1 Humidify or Fan, 2A maximum 4. Contact DO 1 Humidify or Fan, 2A maximum 5. Contact DO 2 Dehumidify or Fan, 2A maximum 6. Contact DO 2 Dehumidify or Fan, 2A maximum 7. Thermistor input RT (10k Type II thermistor) 8. Thermistor input RT (10k Type II thermistor)
560
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
5% WALL MOUNT HUMIDISTAT TCY-BH SERIES
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
in (cm)
1.69 (4.3) 4.45 (11.3) 4.7 (1.8)
2.87 (7.3)
0...250V AC 24V AC
2 G 1 G0 3 Q13 4 Q14 YB1 5 Q23 6 Q24 YB2 7 B1
RT
Humidify/Dehumidify, TCY-BH-U (-D) YB1 YB2 RT Humidifier De-humidifier Temperature input for setback: 024 VAC or 030 VDC 024 VAC or 030 VDC NTC 10k @ 25C (77F)
8 M
Humidify plus fan control, TCY-BH-U (-D) W04 YB1 YB2 RT Humidifier Fan Temperature input for setback: 024 VAC or 030 VDC 024 VAC or 030 VDC NTC 10k @ 25C (77F)
TCY-BH-U
HUMIDITY
Dehumidify plus fan control, TCY-BH-U (-D) W05 YB1 YB2 RT Fan De-humidifier Temperature input for setback: 024 VAC or 030 VDC 024 VAC or 030 VDC NTC 10k @ 25C (77F)
OV (GND)
MODEL TCY-BH-U-W20 TCY-BH-U-W24 TCY-BH-U-W25 TCY-BH-U-D-W20 TCY-BH-U-D-W24 TCY-BH-U-D-W25 AES-HT-A5 AMC-1 AMC-2 S-TN10-2 SD-TN10-12-2 SD-TN10-20-2 SDB-TN10-12-W SDB-TN10-20-W SOD-TN10 DCPA-1.2 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DESCRIPTION 5% wall mount humidistat for humidication and dehumidication with display with programmable time clock 5% wall mount humidifying humidistat with display, fan control option and programmable time clock 5% wall mount dehumidifying humidistat with display, fan control option and programmable time clock 5% wall mount humidistat for humidication and dehumidication with display 5% wall mount humidifying humidistat with display and fan control option 5% wall mount dehumidifying humidistat with display and fan control option RELATED PRODUCTS 5% Replacement humidity element Cable gland for SDC-H1 Conduit fitting, 1/2 in NPT for SDC-H Raw temperature sensor with six foot cable, 10k Type II thermistor Eight inch duct sensor with six foot cable, 10k Type II thermistor Eight inch duct sensor with six foot cable, 10k Type II thermistor Five inch duct sensor with housing and six foot cable, 10k Type II thermistor Eight inch duct sensor with housing and six foot cable, 10k Type II thermistor Outdoor temperature sensor Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT PAGE
994 979 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
561
HUMIDITY
3% WALL AND DUCT PROPORTIONAL CONTROLLER TCI SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Vector Model TCI Wall and Duct Proportional Controller is designed for proportional control of humidication and dehumidication equipment in HVAC and energy management systems. The "23" models comes with a time clock for advanced programming with 48 hour backup and the "13" models do not. The "H" models have internal relative humidity sensors and the others without "H" in model number must use a remote relative humidity sensor (ordered separately) for RH measurement.
FEATURES Humidication and dehumidication control External temperature input for set point setback Programmable user interface Optional time clock 2 analog outputs and one digital output Easy to read display TCI
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Accuracy Signal Output Analog Digital Signal Input 13 23 Measurement Range Operating Humidity 24 VAC 10% 3 VA, 50-60 Hz; 24 VDC, 125 mA 3% RH (20%-80%) 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA @250 24 VAC/VDC @ 2 A 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA @ 240 0/2-10 VDC or 0/4-20 mA @ 240 & 10k Type II thermistor (24) 0 to 100 % RH 0% to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (-25 to 50C) Enclosure Rating ABS Plastic Sensing Technology Capacitive sensor Wiring Terminations Terminal block (12 to 24 AWG) Dimensions 4.4" H x 2.9" W x 1.8" D (11.2 x 7.3 x 4.7 cm) Approvals CE Weight 0.58 lb (0.26 Kg) 13 23 0.6 LB (0.27 kG) Warranty 2 years
HUMIDITY
562
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
3% WALL AND DUCT PROPORTIONAL CONTROLLER TCI SERIES
WIRING
AC/DC Power Supply + Com 24+ Output Com Digital Output Analog Output Analog Output Univseral Input 1 24+ 2 Output Com 3 4 5 6 7 Univseral Input Thermistor Input Digital Output Analog Output Analog Output AC/DC Power Supply + Com 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13 Models
Logic: 13 models with "U" in model number #7 is Remote Temperature 13 models with "U" in modle number #7 is Remote Humidity
23 Models
Logic: 23 models with "U" in model number #7 is Remote Humidity or Temperature #8 is Temperature only 23 models with "U" in modle number #7 is Remote Humidity #8 is Temperature only
HUMIDITY
MODEL TCY3-T1102-H-U-W24 TCY3-T1102-H-U-W25 TCY3-T1102-H-U-D-W24 TCY3-T1102-H-U-D-W25 TCY3-T1102-U-W26 TCY3-T1102-U-W27 TCY3-T1102-U-D-W26 TCY3-T1102-U-D-W27 DESCRIPTION 3% wall mount proportional humidistat with display for humidication 3% wall mount proportional humidistat with display for dehumidication 3% wall mount proportional humidistat with display for humidication plus clock and time schedules 3% wall mount proportional humidistat with display for dehumidication plus clock and time schedules Wall mount proportional humidistat with display for humidication Wall mount proportional humidistat with display for dehumidication Wall mount proportional humidistat with display for humidication plus clock and time schedules Wall mount proportional humidistat with display for dehumidication plus clock and time schedules
HD30K KHD3 DCPA-1.2 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W ST-D24-XH
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE AMC-2 Conduit tting, 1/2 in NPT for SDC-H 530 3% Duct mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 528 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Duct 10K Tpye II thermistor with handi box
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
563
HUMIDITY
CONDENSATION MONITOR EE46
DESCRIPTION The E+E EE46 Condensation Monitors are used to monitor the formation of condensation on chilled ceilings or to prevent condensation at critical spots of heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems. It is also used as a dew point monitor for systems operating near the dew point. The condensation monitor measures the relative humidity near the dew point using its high-quality capacitive sensor. Once a 90% RH condition is reached, a contact will energize signaling an approaching condensation condition and that an appropriate action is required to avoid condensation forming. An additional status light indicates and visually conrms the condensation danger. The EE46 is highly insensitive to dust and dirt and is ideal for mounting on walls, ducts and pipes up to 2". Each EE46 comes with an adjustable and removable cable tie for mounting but also has an adhesive back for added security. EE46
FEATURES Compact design Fast response time Dust protection Easy mounting Visual status indication
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VAC 20%. 0.1 VA; 24 VDC 20%, 3 mA Switch Point 90% RH, 3% Relay Output 24 VAC/VDC, 1A Display Single red LED 10 to 100% RH Operating Humidity Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Materials Of Construction Polycarbonate Enclosure Rating Fire resistant UL94-V0 Dimensions 2.5" H x 2.1" W x 0.9" D (6.4 x 5.3 x 2.2 cm) Approvals CE Weight 0.13 lb (0.95 Kg) Warranty 1 year Supply Voltage
HUMIDITY
WIRING
Connection Diagram
V+ GND NC COM NO
Status Indication
Power Supply 24V AC/DC 20%
LED continuous red: Operating < 90% RH LED blinking red: Condensation danger
564
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
CONDENSATION MONITOR EE46
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions - in (mm)
Pipe mounting
Maximum 2" (50)
Installation
2" (5 0)
ax
im
heat-conductive film
um
9
Wall mounting
1.32 (33.5) 0.18 (4.5) 0.87 (22.0)
heat-conductive film
2.50 (63.5)
HUMIDITY
0.9 (23)
1.70 (43) 2.09 (53)
MODEL EE46 DESCRIPTION Pipe, wall or duct mounted condensation monitor
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
565
HUMIDITY
ROOM AND DUCT HUMIDISTATS HC-101, HC-201
DESCRIPTION The Schneider Electric Models HC-101 and HC-201 Humidistats are used for low or line voltage ON/OFF single-stage control of humidiers, dehumidiers, valves, solenoids, compressors, relays, and other electrical components. FEATURES 18-month warranty Economical and reliable humidity control
WIRING
(brown) N.O. (red) N.C. Drop in RH Brown makes on drop in humidity. All units provided with green grounding lead ( ). (orange) Common
HC-101
HC-201
MAXIMUM ELECTRICAL RATINGS

VAC FLA LRA RESISTIVE PILOT DUTY MODEL 50/60 Hz AMPS VA 8 60 HC-101 24 HC-201 120 7.2 43.2 8 345
SPECIFICATIONS / ORDERING INFORMATION
MODEL DESCRIPTION HC-101 HC-201 Room Duct
SCALE RANGE
AMBIENT LIMITS F (C) DIFF Operating Shipping and Storage -40 to 140 (-40 to 60) -40 to 140 (-40 to 60) CONNECTION WEIGHT COVER DIMENSIONS in (cm) (HxWxD) 4.38 x 2.88 x 1.63 (11.13 x 7.32 x 4.14) 4.38 x 6.50 x 2.25 (11.13 x 16.51 x 5.72)
10% to 90% RH 5% 40 to 125 (4 to 52) 15% to 95% RH 5% 40 to 125 (4 to 52)
6" (15.0 cm) 1.0 lb Beige Color-coded leads (0.45 kg) plastic Coded screw 1.5 lb Metal terminals (0.68 kg)
HUMIDITY
ROOM HUMIDISTAT W43A-14

DESCRIPTION The SPDT contact action of the Johnson Controls Model W43A14 Humidistat provides control of humidifying or dehumidifying equipment. A ush-mounting bracket that ta a standard outlet box is supplied. The Model W43A features eld-adjustable high and low stops. Stops can be set for locked setting. ACCESSORIES The Model W43A-14 includes A faceplate for horizontal mounting. The plate is for on-the-job installation over vertical plate. It can be eld converted to concealed adjustment. Specify plate kit PLT333-12R (vertical) or PLT333-9R (horizontal). FEATURES One-year warranty Horizontal or vertical mounting
W43A-14
DIMENSIONS
MODEL SWITCH RANGE DIFF % DIMENSIONS ACTION in (cm) (HxW) W43A-14 SPDT 0% to 70% RH 4% RH 4.71 x 2.96 (12.0 x 7.5)
WIRING
H
MAXIMUM ELECTRICAL RATINGS

MOTOR RATINGS VAC 120 208 240 WEIGHT lb (kg) AC full load amps 6.0 3.5 3.0 1.0 (0.45) AC locked rotor amps 36.0 21.0 18.0 Pilot Duty 125 VA, 24-277 VAC (low or line voltage)
C
MODEL W43A-14C
DESCRIPTION SPDT switch action, 4% RH Diff % Humidistat
Action on increase of humidity
566
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
OUTDOOR ASPIRATED HUMIDITY / TEMPERATURE HOUSING A21
DESCRIPTION Model A21 Outdoor Aspirated Humidity/Temperature Housing provides powered aspiration for outdoor monitoring of humidity and temperature. The NEMA 3R enclosure is painted white to reduce the effect of radiation, and the enclosure has a lockable latch for security. OPERATION The fan pulls air in from the lower vent intake and exhausts the air out the upper opposing vent of the enclosure at 12 CFM. The 24 VDC power is supplied for both the fan and transmitters. The transmitter power is internally ltered from any fan motor noise that might affect the transmitter signal.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Maximum Output Impedance Fan Filter Type 24 VDC @ 110 mA (plus power requirements for the humidity/ temperature transmitters) 47 added to the 4-20 mA transmitter 12 CFM Washable foam lter Operating Temperature -40 to 120F (-40 to 49C) Enclosure Rating NEMA 3R with white enamel paint and latch for padlock Hinge Piano-type, left-hand side Weight 6.31 lb (2.9 Kg) Warranty 1 year
WIRING
Dry Bulb Temperature To Controller * Input
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.20 (0.50) 4.7 (12.06) Air Exhaust 1.75 (4.44)
Terminal Strip (projected forward 3.5 (8.89) for easy wiring) A B CD E F
0.5 (1.27)
5.0 (12.7)
0.5 (1.27)
HUMIDITY
A Do not use or terminate
B C
Left Side
10.0 (25.40)
Not used
Air Intake
3.65 (9.27)
1.0 (2.54)
Fan
+ Power
24VDC Supply
9.0 (22.86)
1.0 (2.54)
Front View
5.25 (13.34)
6.5 (16.51)
- 4-20 mA to + Controller Input + Installed Transmitter
3.0 (7.62)
Right Side
Lower Back Plate* 4.25"W x 4.25"H x 3"D 0.5 (1.27)
* Temperature
0.25 (0.64)
7.0 (17.78) 6.32 (16.05)
0.37 (0.95)
sensors are directly wired to the controller. They do not wire to the terminal strip.
0.5" and 0.75" knockouts on centerline and height shown
Bottom View
1.64 (4.15) 3.0 (7.62)
Conduit Entry 1/2" & 3/4" Knockouts *Estimated usable dimensions
A21
Mounting
Interior
MODEL A21 A21-FAN DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 HW20K HW30K KTM* Series PN-46 ST-R* Series DESCRIPTION Outdoor aspirated humidity/temperature housing RELATED PRODUCTS Replacement fan assembly Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 2% wall-mount humidity sensor 3% wall-mount humidity sensor KTM* Series raw encapsulated thermistor and RTD sensors Aluminum sensor holder with adhesive backing ST-R* Series raw encapsulated thermistor and RTD sensors PAGE 995 994 511 530 1245 1298
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
567
HUMIDITY
HUMIDITY SELECTION CHART HUMIDITY SELECTION CHART
PRODUCT W43A-14 HC-101 HC-201 GEH5S SHR-5P-W GEH5D SRH-5P-D GEH5O SRH-5P-O KHR3 SHR-3P-W HW30K/HW31K HMW40/50 ACI-3-R BA/H300-B KHD3 SHR-3P-D HD30K/31K HMD40/50 ACI-3-D BA/H300-D KHO3 SHR-3P-O HO30K HO31K ACI-3-O BA/H300-O VH7200 KHR2 HW20K ACI-2-R GEH2S EHRH HT2-S HT829-S HMW-60U HMW-70U BA/H200-B KHD2 HD20K ACI-2-D GEH2D HT2D HT829-D HMD-60U HMD-70U BA/H200-D KHO2 HO20K ACI-2-O GEH2O HT2O HT829-O BA/H200-O EE29 ACI/RH1-R HT829-S1N1 ACI-RH1-D HT829-D1N1 ACI-RH1-O HT829-O1N1 9002 RH DB WB DP EN MNFR JCI Schneider Schneider GE Setra GE Setra GE Setra Kele Setra Kele Vaisala ACI BAPI Kele Setra Kele Vaisala ACI BAPI Kele Setra Kele Kele ACI BAPI Viconics Kele Kele ACI GE GE Minco Minco Vaisala Vaisala BAPI Kele Kele ACI GE Minco Minco Vaisala Vaisala BAPI Kele Kele ACI GE Minco Minco BAPI E&E ACI Minco ACI Minco ACI Minco Telair ACCURACY 4% diff. 5% diff. 5% diff. 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 3% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 1.3% 1% 1% 1% 1% 1% 1% 1.8F MOUNTING SIGNAL Wall SPDT Wall SPDT Duct SPDT Wall 4-20/0-10 Wall 4-20/0-10 Duct 4-20/0-10 Duct 4-20/0-10 OSA 4-20/0-10 OSA 4-20/0-10 Wall 4-20 mA Wall 4-20 mA Wall 4-20 mA Wall 4-20/0-10 Wall 4-20/0-10 Wall 4-20/0-5 Duct 4-20 mA Duct 4-20 mA Duct 4-20 mA Duct 4-20/0-10 Duct 4-20/0-10 Duct 4-20/0-5 OSA 4-20 mA OSA 4-20 mA OSA 4-20 mA OSA 4-20 mA OSA 4-20/0-10 OSA 4-20/0-5 Wall 0-10 V Wall 4-20 mA Wall 4-20 mA Wall 4-20/0-10 Wall 4-20/0-10 Wall 4-20 mA Wall 4-20 mA Wall 4-20 mA Wall 4-20 mA Wall 0-5 VDC Wall 4-20/0-5 Duct 4-20 mA Duct 4-20 mA Duct 4-20/0-10 Duct 4-20/0-10 Duct 4-20 mA Duct 4-20 mA Duct 4-20 mA Duct 0-5 VDC Duct 4-20/0-5 OSA 4-20 mA OSA 4-20 mA OSA 4-20/0-10 OSA 4-20/0-10 OSA 4-20 mA OSA 4-20 mA OSA 4-20/0-5 Wall 4-20/0-5/0-10 Wall 4-20 mA Wall 4-20 mA Duct 4-20 mA Duct 4-20 mA OSA 4-20 mA OSA 4-20 mA Wall/Duct 4-20 mA MEASUREMENT RH RH RH RH/T optional RH RH/T optional RH RH/T optional RH RH/T optional RH RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH, RH/T RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH, RH/T RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH/T optional RH, RH/T RH/T optional RH/T RH/T optional RH RH/T optional RH RH/T optional RH DP/T ATTRIBUTES Accuracy Aesthetics Duct Replaceable sensor Replaceable sensor Replaceable sensor Replaceable sensor Replaceable sensor Replaceable sensor Replaceable sensor Replaceable sensor Executive housing Replaceable sensor Delta housing BAPI housing Replaceable sensor Replaceable sensor Metal/universal enclosure Replaceable sensor 4-20 mA and 0-10V 4-20 mA and 0-5V Replaceable sensor Replaceable sensor Metal enclosure Universal enclosure 4-20 mA and 0-10V 4-20 mA and 0-5V Humidistat Replaceable sensor Executive housing Delta housing Replaceable sensor Wash-down housing Minco housing One-point calibration Vaisala housing Voltage output BAPI housing Replaceable sensor Metal enclosure 4-20 mA and 0-10V Replaceable sensor Metal enclosure One-point calibration Metal enclosure Metal enclosure 4-20 mA and 0-5V Replaceable sensor Metal enclosure 4-20 mA and 0-10V Replaceable sensor Metal enclosure One-point calibration 4-20 mA and 0-5V Metal or plastic housing Executive housing Minco housing Plastic enclosure One-point calibration Plastic enclosure One-point calibration IR measurement APPLICATION Limit control Limit control Limit control Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Monitoring Limit control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control, pool RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control RH control Clean room control Clean room control Clean room control Clean room control Clean room control Calculation input Calculation input Condensation control
HUMIDITY
Relative Humidity is the ratio of actual water vapor in the air vs. the water vapor that the air can hold at saturation. Dry bulb temperature is the temperature of the air using a dry sensor without any effect from evaporative cooling. Wet bulb temperature is the temperature of the air using a wet sensor, which measures the cooling effect from evaporation. Dew point temperature is the temperature at which water vapor begins to condense into water liquid, which is at 100% RH. Enthalpy is the measure of the heat energy in the air.
568
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
Manage and Contain Liquid Assets, As Well As Maintained Around-the-Clock Monitoring with Leak Detection Sensors.
WD2 | p. 570
LU2 | p. 597
SC Cables | p. 581
LU81 | p. 599
F7-SS | p. 590
LD310 | p. 574

MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Float Switches MLS Series Multi-Level Switch .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KCFS Series Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FS7 Series Float Level Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F7 Series Float Level Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F8-SSL Stainless Steel Float Level Switch .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NG2DW1500B Mechanical Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LV41, LV42 Series Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L8 General-Purpose Float Switch .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VS-120R1R9L-01 Vertical Float Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leak Detection WD-1B Kele Water Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WD-2-T Kele Tape Style Water Detector.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AQS00660, AQS00661, LD1-24 Water Sensor / Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SD-RO1 Spot Leak Detector LD310 Series Cable-Style Water Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LD1500 Web-Accessible Leak Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LD2100 Web-Accessible Leak Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LD5200 Cable-Style Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LDRA6 Leak Detection Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SC Series, SC-C Series, SC-H Series Water, Chemical (Conductive Fluids) and Hydrocarbon Sensing Cable .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 587 589 590 591 591 592 593 594
DL14 Series | p. 582
569 570 572 573 574 575 576 578 580 581
WD-1B | p. 569
Level Controllers DL14, 24, 34 Series EchoPod Ultrasonic Level Switch, Transmitter, and Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 WLC Series Water Level Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584 Liquid Level Switch LU77/78 Series EchoSwitch Ultrasonic Level Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 SS/SP Series Condensate Overow Switches .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Liquid Level Transmitters DL10 Series EchoPod Ultrasonic Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LU2 Series EchoSonic Ultrasonic Level Transmitter.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LU80/81/83/84 Series EchoSpan Ultrasonic Level Transmitters. . . . . . . . . LD31, LD32 Series DeltaSpan Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LD34, LD35 Series DeltaSpan Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS-10, LH-10 Series Level Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LD5200 | p. 578
596 597 599 601 603 605
kele.com
NEW!

KELE WATER DETECTOR WD-1B
The Kele WD-1B water detector features gold-plated probes and microchip technology for dependable detection of conductive liquids. The Model WD-1B can be operated from 11-27 VAC/VDC. For application exibility, SPDT contacts are provided to connect to a monitoring system. A height-adjustable, cast-aluminum, weatherproof enclosure is standard. A green LED visible outside the box indicates power. A red LED indicates water detected. The Model WD-1B is also available with an external tape style sensor, the Model WD-2-T. FEATURES Weatherproof enclosure Easy to install SPDT alarm contacts 11-27 VAC/DC (50/60 Hz) Reliable operation LEDs for power and alarm indication (green, red) Adjustable detection level OPERATION The Model WD-1B can be used with any contact-closure monitoring panel. The SPDT contacts may be wired normally open or normally closed, allowing wiring exibility to handle most installations.
WD-1B
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.12 (0.32) 2.75 (6.99)
Gasketed SS Cover 1/2" FNPT Conduit Connection
4.5 (11.43)
LED Window
2.0 (5.08)
0.31 (0.79)
MOUNTING Secure by applying a silicone adhesive to the mounting feet and placing the sensor in the area to be protected. For more permanent installations, fasten the sensor using the 0.19" (0.48 cm) holes provided in the mounting feet with #6 or #8 screws. The legs are adjustable 1.5" (3.81 cm) for precise water level signaling.
max 1.8 (4.57) min 0.20 (0.51)
3.75 (9.53 )
10
Mounting Holes 0.187" dia (0.47)
1.75 (4.45)
Probe height adjustable 0'' to 1.5" (0 to 3.8 cm)
WIRING
The WD-1B is provided with a 1/2" FNPT conduit connection in the end of the enclosure. Terminations are made to the color-coded wires with field-supplied connectors. All interconnect wiring should be 18 AWG or larger. Input Voltage 11-27 VAC/VDC (red) (white) (yellow) (orange) SPDT Alarm Contacts
Supply Voltage 11-27 VAC/VDC Supply Current VDC 10 mA typical, 30 mA maximum 30 mA typical, 70 mA maximum VAC Relay Type SPDT Relay Outputs 1A @ 24 VAC/VDC, 1/2A @ 120 VAC Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Enclosure Rating Cast aluminum, weather resistant with adjustable legs 4.3"H X 3.75"W X 4.5"L Dimensions (10.7 X 9.5 X 11.4 cm) Approvals CE Weight 0.98 lb (6.44 kg) Warranty 1 year
E D
E/D Option Jumper*
(blue)
If grounded AC power is used, the grounded power supply lead must be connected to the white lead on the WD-1B, or the unit may fail to operate. *E/D Option Jumper: E = Output relay is energized when water is detected. (No alarm on power loss) D = Output relay is de-energized when water is detected or when power is lost. (Alarm on when water is present or power loss)
MODEL WD-1B DESCRIPTION Water detector
RELATED PRODUCTS WD-2-T Water detector (tape style sensor)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
569

TAPE STYLE WATER DETECTOR WD-2-T
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model WD-2-T tape style water detector uses a self-adhesive sensor tape with copper ber electrodes and a durable netted cover for dependable detection of conductive liquids anywhere along the length of tape. The Model WD-2-T includes a tape integrity self-check feature, which activates a trouble output if the tape is unplugged, broken, or cut. Alarm relays may be independently jumpered to energize or de-energize upon water or trouble detection.
NEW!
WD-2
FEATURES
Weather resistant enclosure Designed to minimize external noise pickup SPDT alarm and trouble relay contacts Relay action jumper selectable Continuous tape integrity self-check Power/Alarm/Trouble status LED (green, red, green/red) Sensor tape lengths of 10 ft (3.1m), 25 ft (7.6m), 50 ft (15.2m), 100 ft (30.5m) Floor or under-pipe mounting Able to convert to two alarm relays
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
0.12 (0.32) 2.75 (6.99) Gasketed SS Cover 0.5 (1.27) FNPT Conduit Connection 4.5 (11.43) LED Window
2.0 (5.08)
10
OPERATION The Model WD-2-T can be used with any contact-closure monitoring device, wiring to either the normally open or normally closed contacts for exibility.
0.31 (0.79) 1.8 (4.57) 3.75 (9.53 ) 1.75 (4.45)
0.75 (1.91) 0.125 (.32)
Mounting Holes 0.187 (0.47) dia
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 11 -27 VAC/VDC Supply Current VDC 15mA typical, 60 mA maximum VAC 35 mA typical, 120 mA maximum Relay Type SPDT Relay Output Rating 1A @ 24 VAC/VDC, 1/2A @ 120 VAC Operating Temperature Detector: 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Tape: 32 to 180F (0 to 82C) Sensor Electrodes 3 mil copper ber, 1/4" gap Enclosure Cast aluminum, weather resistant Dimensions Approvals Weight WD-2 WD-2-T-10 WD-2-T-25 WD-2-T-50 WD-2-T-100 Warranty 4.23"H x 3.75"W x 4.5"D (10.7 x 9.5 x 11.4 cm) CE 0.98 lb (6.44 kg) (without tape) 1.8 lb (0.8 kg) 2.2 lb (1.0 kg) 3.0 lb (1.4 kg) 4.6 lb (2.1 kg) 18 Months
INSTALLATION
Floor Mounting Mount the Model WD-2-T box adjacent to the area to be protected. Unroll the sensor tape, remove vinyl release layer from the back, and hand press onto a surface that is dry and free of all debris and dust. Note 1: Once the sensor is activated (wet), the contacts will remain in alarm until the netted cover is completely dry. Note 2: To convert the tape integrity check relay to a second alarm relay, remove the jumper in the lower right corner of the circuit board. If the sensing tape is not used, install the jumper labeled NO TBL CHK.
570
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
TBL
NEW!
WIRING
Orange Blue
NC COM

TAPE STYLE WATER DETECTOR WD-2-T
The Model WD-2-T is provided with a 1/2" FNPT conduit connection in the end of the enclosure. Terminations are made using the color-coded wires with eld-supplied connectors. All interconnect wiring should be 18 AWG or larger.
Yellow
NO
K1
Brown Purple Gray
COM
Input Voltage 11-27 VAC/VDC
WD-2 Water Detector Probe
ALM
NO TBL CHK
Intall Jumper if no resistor on end of water tape
NC
Probe
K2
NO
TBL White Red D E
ALM OPT
Remove Jumper to convert trouble relay into second alarm relay
Energize (E) or De-energize (D) relay on trouble
Energize (E) or De-energize (D) relay on water detected
10
The Model WD-2-T tape includes a supervisory resistor mounted on the far end for the tape integrity self-check. A self-check disable jumper is provided inside for use with older or cut-down tapes that do not have the supervisory resistor.
STATUS INDICATOR Normal Green blink Water detected Red blink Red/green alternating Tape sensor problem JUMPER POSITIONS NO TBL CHK OPT ALM TBL Install jumper to disable tape trouble check Remove jumper to convert trouble contacts to second set of alarm contacts (position D) De-energize relay on alarm (position E) Energize relay on alarm (position D) De-energize relay on trouble (position E) Energize relay on trouble
MODEL DESCRIPTION WD-2 Water detector without sensor tape WD-2-T-10 Water detector with 10 (3.1m) sensor tape WD-2-T-25 Water detector with 25 (15.2m) sensor tape WD-2-T-50 Water detector with 50 (30.5m) sensor tape WD-2-T-100 Water detector with 100 (7.6m) sensor tape
691-K0A DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 WD-CLIP-5
RELATED PRODUCTS Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Pack of five mounting clips (space 18"/45.7 cm for under-pipe installation)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
571

WATER SENSOR / SWITCH AQS00660, AQS00661, LD1-24
DESCRIPTION The Model LD1-24 and the AQS models are small electronic control relays for detecting a rising water level. Inside a waterproof enclosure, each model features a medium-power relay, which is operated by water reaching the trip level, and can be used to control alarms or other equipment. The relay is normally energized when the power supply is switched on and no water is present. When water rises up the side of the box to reach the switching level, the relay drops out. This sequence is failsafe, allowing each model to be used as a water spillage alarm switch or to turn off a valve or an air conditioning unit before the water overows its containment.
NEW!
AQS LDI-24
FEATURES All components safely encapsulated against moisture ingress Switching capability 5A at 240 VAC
WIRING
(red) (blue) 3A max Fuse Supply Voltage Supply Neutral
10
INSTALLATION
A piece of double-sided tape is tted to the base of each model and can be used to x it to the surface being protected. Clean the mounting surface thoroughly to ensure good adhesion. Pull off the protective paper covering and press the models down into position. The AQS models also have slots for mounting with #4 self-tapping screws.
Control Circuit
(black) (yellow) (white)
Isolated Switch Output Common Break on Water Rise Make on Water Rise
AQS
Note:
Relay is energized to make black and yellow when powered-up and dry.
AQS00660: 95-254V 50/60 Hz AQS00661: 24V 50/60 Hz or DC
(red)
(mauve) (pink) (grey) Isolated Switch Output
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage AQS00660 AQS00661 LD1-24 Relay Output Rating 95-254V 50/60 Hz, 2W 24 VAC/VDC 50/60 Hz 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 240 VAC 50/60 Hz, 5A; 24 VDC, 2.5A
Supply 24 VAC 50/60 Hz
(red)
N/O N/C COM
Note: Relay contacts shown in alarm (or power-off) condition.
Switch Off Level AQS00660/1 0.32" (0.8 cm) nominal LD1-24 0.43" (1.1 cm) nominal Switch On Level AQS00660/1 0.40" (1 cm) nominal LD1-24 0.31" (0.8 cm) nominal Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Cable Length AQS00660/1 5 ft (1.5m) LD1-24 18" (0.46m) Dimensions AQS00660 1.2"H x 2.0"W x 1.25"L (3.0 x 5.0 x 3.1 cm) AQS00661 1.2"H x 2.0"W x 1.25"L (3.0 x 5.0 x 3.1 cm) LD1-24 0.9"H x 2.0"W x 1.25"L (2.2 x 5.0 x 3.1 cm) Approvals CE Warranty 1 year
LD1-24
WA R N I N G : A l t h o u g h t h e L D 1 - 2 4 i s t o t a l l y encapsulated and resistant to water ingress when used as intended (to detect rising water levels), it should not be installed where the encapsulated surface is permanently under water.
MODEL DESCRIPTION AQS00660 95-254 VAC water sensor/switch AQS00661 24 VAC/VDC water sensor/switch 24 VAC water sensor/switch LD1-24
572
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Adjustable sensing probe height Small footprint No exposed metal sensing posts All components encapsulated against moisture Switching capability 0.5A at 120 VAC Simple installation

SPOT LEAK DETECTOR SD-RO1
The RLE Technologies SD-RO1 spot leak detector is an economical solution for detecting uids in small, conned areas, such as drip pans. The unit is designed with polymer coated sensing probes to detect conductive uids at a single point. The height of the probes can easily be adjusted to the desired position by simply bending them. Units can be screwed or glued to the oor or baseboard for quick installation.
SD-R01
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Contact Rating 24 VAC/VDC, 0.1A 1A @ 24 VDC, 0.5A resistive @ 120 VAC Contact Type SPDT Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing Cable Length 14 ft (4.27m) Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty 2.0"H x 1.55"W x 1.0"D (5.1 x 3.9 x 2.5 cm) CE, RoHS, ETL, conforms to UL 61010-1, EN61010-1 0.4 lb (0.2 kg) 1 year
10
WIRING
Connect the white (N/O) and green (Com) or blue (N/C) leads to the alarm device. Connect the black (-) and red (+) leads to the power source. Test the SD-RO1 by placing water under the sensing probes.
Reset switch diagram (used with VDC applications only, see VDC latching note)
24 VAC/VDC
+ Red (+) Black (-)
White (N .O.)
Green (Com) Blue (N.C.) Brown ( Not Used )
VDC latching note: When powered by VDC, contacts remain latched until reset switch is used. (See reset switch diagram)
(Note: The SD-RO1 latches if powered by DC voltage and a reset switch must be installed on the positive or negative wire. The SD-RO1 will automatically reset with AC voltage applied.)
MODEL DESCRIPTION SD-R01 Spot leak detector, 24 VAC/VDC
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
573

CABLE-STYLE WATER DETECTOR LD310 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RLE Technologies LD310 cable-style water detector reports the presence of water within a predetermined zone. The LD310 is a single zone system with both a visual and audible alarm indicator as well as a separate output relay for leaks and fault detection. The LD310 continuously monitors leak sensing cable and is ideal for small areas. If conductive uid contacts the sensing cable anywhere along its length, the module will activate a leak relay and audible alert, and ash the LED, clearly indicating uid has been detected. If the sensing cable is cut or comes loose, the module will activate a cable fault by ashing the LED and activating a fault relay. The LD310 also features three jumper selectable leak detection thresholds for adjusting the sensitivity of the leak/ fault detection circuit.
NEW!
LD310 Monitors up to 300 ft (91 m) of sensing cable (SC) / 210 ft (64m) of chemical sensing cable (SC-C) Lightweight enclosure with easy installation Use non-sensing cable between sections of sensing cable Altitude Limits Mounting Cable Length Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty 15,000 ft (4,572m) maximum Surface mount 300 ft (91m) maximum of conductive uid sensing cable or 210 ft (64m) of chemical sensing cable 2.7"W x 4.4"H x 1.38"D (6.8 x 11.2 x 3.5 cm) CE, ETL listed, RoHS compliant 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) 1 year
FEATURES
Dual dry contacts alarm uid or fault detection Three adjustable alarm thresholds Bi-color LED indication for normal/alarm conditions Audible alert that is jumper selectable on/off Push-button switch allows users to test and reset the system and silence audible alarm
10
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Relay Type 5 VDC ( 10%) @ 100 mA Two Form C alarm relays (leak and fault) 1A @ 24 VDC, 0.5A resisitive @ Relay Outputs 120 VAC Normal Operation: Green; Cable LED Indication Fault: Flashing Orange; Leak Detected: Flashing Red <20 seconds, 10 sec typical Response Time Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% non-condensing
MODEL LD310 LD310-10KIT LD310-25KIT LD310-50KIT LD310-100KIT DESCRIPTION Water detector includes 15 (4.6m) leader cable and end-of-line connector (order sensing cable separately) Water detector kit includes LD310 detector, 15 (4.6m) leader cable, 10' (3.05m) sensing cable and end of line connector Water detector kit includes LD310 detector, 15 (4.6m) leader cable, 25' (7.62m) sensing cable and end of line connector Water detector kit includes LD310 detector, 15 (4.6m) leader cable, 50' (15.2m) sensing cable and end of line connector Water detector kit includes LD310 detector, 15 (4.6m) leader cable, 100' (30.5m) sensing cable and end of line connector
JC-25 NSC-10 NSC-100 NSC-25 NSC-50 SC-C-10 SC-C-25 SC-C-50 SC-C-100 LC-KIT-REPLACEMENT SC-10 SC-17 SC-25 SC-50 SC-100 DCP-524
Package of 25 cable-securing J clips 10' non-sensing cable 100' non-sensing cable 25' non-sensing cable 50' non-sensing cable 10 ft (3.1m) Chemical sensing cable 581 25 ft (7.7m) Chemical sensing cable 581 50 ft (15.4m) Chemical sensing cable 581 100 ft (30.8m) Chemical sensing cable 581 Replacement 15' (4.6m) leader cable and end-of-line connector 10 ft. (3.1 m) sensing cable 581 17 ft. (5.2 m) sensing cable 581 25 ft. (7.7 m) sensing cable 581 50 ft. (15.4 m) sensing cable 581 100 ft. (30.8 m) sensing cable 581 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC and 5 VDC OUT
RELATED PRODUCTS
PAGE
574
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Relay Type Relay Outputs Accuracy Repeatability Communication Ports Ethernet RS-232 RS-485 RJ-45 Protocol Terminal Emulation (RS-232) SNMP Modbus (RS-485/IP)

WEB-ACCESSIBLE LEAK DETECTOR LD1500
The RLE Technologies LD1500 web-accessible leak detector offers a reliable leak detection solution that mitigates potential water damage, costly business outages, and downtime. The unit detects the presence of any conductive uid and identies the distance to the leak. The distance to the leak can be communicated via various protocols to alarm monitoring and notication systems. The physical location of the leak can be determined by crossreferencing the distance with a cable reference map of your site. Sensing cable is available in standard lengths with preinstalled mating end connectors. Linked end-to-end these connections allow for easy installation of additional length. The LD1500 can monitor up to 1500 ft (457m) of sensing cable or 1050 ft (320m) or chemical sensing cable.
LD1500
WIRING
Adjustable leak, delay and cable contamination alarm thresholds SNMP, Modbus and BACnet communications Quick return to normal status after cable is wiped dry Modbus (RS-485) integration with LD2100 and LD5100 HTML interface Self calibrating
End Terminator
Sensing Cable
Leader Cable
Basic installation of LD1500,leader cable, sensing cable and EOL terminator
10
24 VAC/VDC @ 600 mA max SPDT 1A @ 24 VDC, 0.5A resisitive @ 120 VAC 2 ft (0.6m) plus 0.5% of the cable length 2 ft (0.6m) plus 0.25% of the cable length 10/100 BASE-T, 500 VAC RMS isolation 9600 baud, no parity, 9 data bits, 1 stop bit 1200, 2400, 9600 or 19200 baud (selectable), no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit 10/100BASE-T Ethernet Port VT100 compatible V1: V2C MIB-2 compliant; NMS Manageable with Get, Set, Traps Slave, RTU mode; supports function
BACnet (MS/TP & IP) LED Indication Response Time Alarm Logging Samples Security Login Operating Humidity Operating Temperature Mounting Cable Length Cable Type Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty
codes 03, 04, 06, and 16 EIA-485 1 bi-color power/status (green=power on, red=alarm) Adjustable from 5-995 seconds Bi-color status LED Logging capabilities: Logs last 10 events Web browser access: 1 Web password read only, 1 password read/write 5 to 95% non-condensing 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Wall mount 1500 ft (457.2m) maximum Water detection cable 3.6"H x 7.0"W x 1.25"D (9.2 x 17.8.0 x 3.2 cm) CE, ETL Listed, RoHS compliant 1.5 lb (0.68 kg) 1 year
MODEL DESCRIPTION LD1500 Water detector includes 15' leader cable and end-of-line connector (order sensing cable separately) JC-200 JC-25 NSC-10 NSC-100 NSC-25 NSC-50 SC-10 RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Package of 200 cable-securing J clips Package of 25 cable-securing J clips 10' non-sensing cable 100' non-sensing cable 25' non-sensing cable 50' non-sensing cable 10' sensing cable 581 SC-100 SC-25 SC-50 WCCS-50 X-CON RELATED PRODUCTS 100' sensing cable 25' sensing cable 50' sensing cable Weighted cable connector; simulates 50' of sensing cable X connector single SC input, 3 SC outputs PAGE 581 581 581
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
575

DESCRIPTION
The RLE Technologies LD2100 web-accessible leak detector monitors up to 5000 ft (1524m) of sensing cable (SC) or 3500 ft (1067m) of chemical sensing cable (SC-C). The LED display provides basic information about alarm conditions, while a browser offers a convenient way to congure the unit, access and acknowledge alarms, and view alarm logs. Output communications include a Form C relay, SNMP, Modbus and BACnet. SMTP allows for direct email alarm notication which can be routed to cell phones, PDAs, or other wireless devices.
NEW!
LD2100 SC Cable - Sold Separately Green, alphanumeric, dot matrix LED 1 bi-color power/status (green=power on, red=alarm) Alarm Visual: Green, alphanumeric, dot matrix LED display, Bi-color status LED Audible: 70 dBA @ 2' (0.6 m) Email (Ethernet): 4 Email recipients SNMP: 4 community strings Altitude Limits 15,000 ft (4,572m) maximum Logging Samples Logging capabilities: Logs last 500 events Security Login 1 Web password Read Only, 1 Web password Read/Write Operating Humidity 5 to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Mounting Wall mount Cable Length 5000 ft (1524m) maximum Cable Type All SeaHawk cables Dimensions 4.25"H x 8.0"W x 1.25"D (10.8 x 20.3 x 3.2 cm) Approvals CE, ETL Listed, certied to CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1, RoHS compliant Weight 1.5 lb (0.68 kg) Warranty 1 year March 2014 Display LED Indication
FEATURES
Adjustable leak, delay and contamination alarm thresholds 32 congurable virtual zones Single person cable mapping HTML interface SNMP, Modbus, BACnet and relay output Monitors up to 5000 ft (1524m) of sensing cable or 3500 ft (1067m) of chemical sensing cable Alarm notication via email Quick return to normal status after cable is wiped dry Self calibrating
10
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Relay Outputs 24 VAC/VDC @ 600 mA max 1A @ 24 VDC, 0.5A resisitive @ 120 VAC SPDT Detection Accuracy 2 ft (0.6m) 0.5% of the cable length Detection Repeatability 2 ft (0.6m) 0.25% of the cable length Response Time Adjustable from 5 to 995 seconds Communication Ports Ethernet 10/100 BASE-T, 500 VAC RMA isolation RS-232 9600 baud, no parity, 9 data bits, 1 stop bit RS-485 1200, 2400, 9600 or 19200 baud selectable, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit Protocol Terminal Emulation (RS-232) VT100 compatible SNMP V1: V2C MIB-2 compliant; NMS Manageable with Get, Set, Traps: V3 optional Modbus (RS-485/IP) Slave, RTU mode; supports function codes 03, 04, 06, and 16 BACnet (MS/TP & IP) EIA-485
576
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
WIRING
N L W B G R

LD2100
LEAK
NO C NC
RS-232
A B + SH
Power input
TB2 Leader cable
TB3 Relay output
TB4 RS-485 ModBus
RJ45 Ethernet
SENSOR WIRING SIMPLE SYSTEM LD2100

LC-KIT Leader Cable NSC-50 Non-sensing SC-100 Sensing End-of-Line (Included in LC-KIT) Terminator
COMPLEX SYSTEM
SC-50 Distance reads 100-150' Branch #2
EOL (Included) WCCS Weighted Cable Connector
10
EOL (Included)
LD2100
LC-KIT Leader Cable
Input
X-CON
Output
Branch #1
SC-100' Distance reads 200-300'
NSC-10 Non-Sensing
SC-100 Distance reads 350-450'
Distance reads 0-50' SC-50
EOL (Included)
MODEL DESCRIPTION LD2100 Water detector includes 15' leader cable and end-of-line connector (order sensing cable separately)
JC-25 JC-200 NSC-10 NSC-25 NSC-50 NSC-100 SC-10 SC-25 SC-50 SC-100 X-CON
RELATED PRODUCTS Package of 25 cable-securing J clips Package of 200 cable-securing J clips 10' non-sensing cable 25' non-sensing cable 50' non-sensing cable 100' non-sensing cable 10' sensing cable 25' sensing cable 50' sensing cable 100' sensing cable X connector single SC input, 3 SC outputs
PAGE
581 581 581 581
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
577

CABLE-STYLE WATER DETECTOR LD5200
DESCRIPTION
The RLE Technologies LD5200 cable-style water detector pairs superior leak detection technology with an easy-touse interface. This integration helps users to quickly and efciently establish a distance-read leak detection system that reliably protects valuable assets. All basic device functionality is available from the LCD touch screen - congure, monitor, locate, and acknowledge leaks from the front panel. While the Model LD5200 can function as a stand-alone device, it also has powerful integration capabilities. A robust web interface supports remote access - any time, any place.
NEW!
LD5200 SC Cable Audible: 85 dBA @ 2 ft (0.6 m); re-sound 0-999 min Visible: Alarm indicated on LCD touch screen and through web interface Event log: last 1024 events Logging Trend log: Cable current level every day, for the last 365 days LCD Touch Screen: No password Security Login required to view controller status and data. Web Interface: Username and password can be congured. This is optimal. Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing Mounting Type 1 wall mount enclosure Cable Length Up to 10,000 ft (3048 m) of conductive uid sensing cable or 7,000 ft (2134 m) of chemical sensing cable Cable Type Fluid or chemical sensing cable Dimensions 12.5"W x 10.0"H x 3.25"D (318 x 254 x 83 mm) CE, ETL listed, CSA, RoHS Approvals compliant Weight 8.2 lbs (3.7 kg) 1 year Warranty Alarm
FEATURES
Access the device remotely. Manage an entire building's leak detection system through one IP address Monitor up to 10,000 feet of conductive uid sensing cable or 7,000 feet of chemical sensing cable Master device for up to 127 RLE leak detection controllers Congure up to 32 virtual zones Send direct email alarm notication Access the device remotely via the web interface Create up to 10 interactive leak detection reference maps
10
SPECIFICATIONS
100-240 VAC @ 500mA max, 50/60 Hz 4-20 mA loop powered, 18-36 VDC, Analog Output RL=500 max. Relay Type 2 Form C Leak Relays, 2 Form C Cable Break Relays 1A @ 24VDC, 0.5A resistive @ Relay Outputs 120VAC 2 ft (0.6 m) 0.5% of the cable Accuracy length Repeatability 2 ft (0.6 m) 0.25% of the cable length Communication Ports EIA-485 (Port 1, Port 2, Port 3): 9600, 19200, or 38400 baud (selectable); No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit EIA-232: 9600 baud; No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit RJ-45: 10/100BaseT Ethernet port (TCP/IP) Protocol EIA-485: Modbus RTU, Master & Slave; BACnet MS/TP; N2, Slave EIA-232: Terminal emulation, VT100 compatible RJ-45: Ethernet, TCP/IP; Modbus/ TCP/UDP, Master & Slave; SNMP V1, V2, V3, NTP, SMTP, DNS; BACnet/IP Display 480 x 272 pixel color backlit LCD touch screen; 95.04mm x 53.85mm Supply Voltage
578
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
TB1 4-20mA Output TB2 Cable Interface (W - B - G - R) TB3 Form C Maintenance Relay TB4 (2) Form C Leak Relay Outputs and (2) Form C Fault Relay Outputs

CABLE-STYLE WATER DETECTOR LD5200
RLE Technologies LD5200
P1 EIA-232 Connector
SW1 TB5 EIA-485 EIA-485 Port 3 Port 3 Termination
SW2 EIA-485 Port 2 Termination
P2 SW3 EIA-485 Ethernet Jack Port 1 Termination TB6 Bottom EIA-485 Port 2
TB6 Top EIA-485 Port 1
TB7 Input Power
10
MODEL LD5200
DESCRIPTION Leak detector includes 15' leader cable and end-of-line terminator
JC-200 JC-25 NSC-10 NSC-25 NSC-50 NSC-100 SC-10 SC-25 SC-50 SC-100 WCCS-50 X-CON
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Package of 200 cable-securing J clips Package of 25 cable-securing J clips 10' non-sensing cable 25' non-sensing cable 50' non-sensing cable 100' non-sensing cable 10 ft. (3.1 m) sensing cable 581 25 ft. (7.7 m) sensing cable 581 50 ft. (15.4 m) sensing cable 581 100 ft. (30.8 m) sensing cable 581 Weighted cable connector; simulates 50' of sensing cable X connector single SC input, 3 SC outputs
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
579

LEAK DETECTION MONITOR LDRA6
DESCRIPTION
The RLE Technologies LDRA6 leak detection monitor detects the presence of water, conductive uids, and chemicals. When a leak is detected, the unit annunciates an alarm for the corresponding zone. The Model LDRA6 accommodates up to six inputs which can be congured for zone leak detection or as remote alarm annunciators. Each of the six zones can accommodate up to 1,000 ft (305m) of sensing cable or 700 ft (213m) of chemical sensing cable. As a remote alarm status panel, each of the six inputs can be congured to relay and annunciate alarms from equipment and sensors that provide a digital dry contact signal.
NEW!
LDRA6
LED Indication Response Time Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Altitude Limits Mounting Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty Cable Input: Each input requires SeaHawk LC-Kit: 15ft (4.57m) leader cable and EOL (not included) Maximum Length: Up to 1,000ft (305m) of conductive uid sensing cable and/or spot detectors per zone; 6,000ft (1830m) total, or 700ft (213m) of chemical sensing cable per zone; 4,200ft (1280m) total Alarm: red; Cable Fault: yellow When used with conductive uid sensing cable or chemical sensing cable, 20-3600sec, software adjustable in 10 second increments; 2sec Dry Contact NO/NC 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing 15,000ft (4572m) max. Wall mount enclosure 10.5"W x 8.0"H x 2.0"D (267 x 203 x 51 mm) CE, ETL listed, CSA, RoHS compliant 4 lbs. (1.82kg) 1 year
FEATURES
Multi-functional controller with audible alarm Adjustable leak thresholds Accommodates up to six inputs Tri-color LEDs Quiet, test, reset push button
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage
10
Relay Type Relay Outputs Communication Ports
Protocol Audible Alarm Input
24VDC@ 600mA max.; requires RLE power supply: PSWA-DC-24 (not included) 1 Form C Summary Alarm Relay, 6 Form C alarms, one per input/zone 1A @ 24VDC, 0.5A resistive @ 120VAC congurable for supervised or nonsupervised, latched or non-latched EIA-232: 9600 baud; Parity none; 8 data bits, 1 stop bit EIA-485: 1200, 2400, 9600 or 19,200 baud; Parity none, odd, even (programmable); 8 data bits, 1 stop bit Terminal Emulation (EIA-232): VT100 compatible Modbus (EIA-485): Slave; RTU Mode; Supports function codes 03, 04, 06, and 16 85DBA @ 2ft (0.6m); re-sound (disabled, 8,16 or 24 hours) Leak Detection Cable: Compatible with SeaHawk sensing cable (not included) or SeaHawk spot detectors (SD-Z or SD-Z1 only; not included)
MODEL LDRA6 JC-25 NSC-10 NSC-100 NSC-25 NSC-50 SC-C-10 SC-C-25 SC-C-50 SC-C-100 LC-KIT-REPLACEMENT PSWA-DC-24 SC-10 SC-17 SC-25 SC-50 SC-100 DESCRIPTION Six zone leak detection monitor RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Package of 25 cable-securing J clips 10' non-sensing cable 100' non-sensing cable 25' non-sensing cable 50' non-sensing cable 10 ft (3.1m) Chemical sensing cable 581 25 ft (7.7m) Chemical sensing cable 581 50 ft (15.4m) Chemical sensing cable 581 100 ft (30.8m) Chemical sensing cable 581 Replacement 15' (4.6m) leader cable and end-of-line connector 85-264VAC, 50/60 Hz to 24VDC power adapter 10 ft. (3.1 m) sensing cable 581 17 ft. (5.2 m) sensing cable 581 25 ft. (7.7 m) sensing cable 581 50 ft. (15.4 m) sensing cable 581 100 ft. (30.8 m) sensing cable 581
580
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Cable Type SC SC-C SC-H Bend Radius SC-H Operating Temperature SC SC-C SC-H Dimensions SC Conductive uid detection Chemical detection Hydrocarbon detection 0.75 in. (19.05mm) minimum 32 to 167F (0 to 75C) -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) -4 to 140F (-20 to 90C)
WATER AND CHEMICAL (CONDUCTIVE FLUIDS) & HYDROCARBON SENSING CABLE SC SERIES, SC-C SERIES, SC-H SERIES
The RLE Technologies' SeaHawk Sensing Cable reliably senses the presence of liquids in a wide variety of industrial, business, and residential settings. Sensing cables are durable, highly exible, and resistant to bends and kinks. The Conductive Fluid Sensing Cable (SC Series) detects the presence of any conductive uid. The Chemical Sensing Cable (SC-C Series) detects the presence of aqueous acids, bases, and other conductive uids, including water. The Hydrocarbon Sensing Cable (SC-H Series) detects the presence of hydrocarbons while remaining impervious to the presence of water. RLE's sensing cables are engineered to minimize false alarms, and are available in standard, custom, and bulk lengths. Use sensing cables in conjunction with RLE's SeaHawk zone or distance-read leak detection controllers to detect a leak along the length of the sensing cable. RLE controllers are supervised systems - not only do they locate leaks, but they also monitor the cable for contamination, breaks, and disconnects. RLE's sensing cables and controllers offer reliable leak detection solutions that mitigate potential damage, costly business outages, and downtime.
SC Cable
SC-H
APPLICATION
SC-H Series detects the presence of: Petroleum Unleaded gasoline Diesel #1 and #2 Home heating oil Kerosene
SC-C
Jet fuel Xylene SC-C Series detects the presence of: Acids Bases Other conductive uids
INSTALLATION
When using SC-H and SC-C sensing and non-sensing cables with a SeaHawk controller, reduce the controller's capacity distance by 30%. For example, the LD300 monitors up to 300 feet of water detection cable (SC). When used with hydrocarbon or chemical sensing cable, the maximum length of cable the LD300 can monitor is reduced to 210 feet. Note: Prolonged exposure to concentrated ketones may cause temporary reduction of sensitivity.
FEATURES Resistant to bends and kinks Highly exible Compatible with SeaHawk zone and distance-read leak detection controllers Available in standard and custom lengths
10
SC-C SC-H Approvals SC SC-C Weight SC SC-C SC-H Warranty
Cable diameter: 0.24" (6.0mm) Connector diameter: 0.45" (11.4mm) Cable diameter: 0.28" (7.0mm) Connector diameter: 0.45" (11.4mm) CE, RoHS compliant, Plenum rated UL, RoHS compliant, Plenum rated 0.02 lb (0.009kg), 1 ft. (0.305m) length 0.035 lb (0.016kg), 1 ft. (0.305m) length 0.05 lb (0.023kg), 1 ft. (0.305m) length 1 year
Cable diameter: 0.25" (6.4mm) Connector diameter: 0.96" (24.4mm)
MODEL MODEL DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION SC-10 SC-H-10 10 ft. (3.1 m) sensing 10 ft (3.1m) cable Hydrocarbon sensing cable SC-17 SC-H-25 17 ft. (5.2 m) sensing 25 ft (7.7m) cable Hydrocarbon sensing cable SC-25 SC-H-50 25 ft. (7.7 m) sensing 50 ft (15.4m) cable Hydrocarbon sensing cable SC-50 SC-H-100 50 ft. (15.4 m)100 sensing ft (30.8m) cable Hydrocarbon sensing cable SC-100 100 ft. (30.8 m) sensing cable SC-C-10 10 ft (3.1m) Chemical sensing cable SC-C-25 25 ft (7.7m) Chemical sensing cable SC-C-10 MODEL SC-C-25 SC-C-50 SC-C-50 SC-C-100 SC-C-100 SC-H-10 SC-H-25 SC-H-50 SC-H-100 10 DESCRIPTION ft (3.1m) Chemical sensing cable 25 50 ft ft (7.7m) (15.4m) Chemical Chemical sensing sensing cable cable 50 100 ft (15.4m) ft (30.8m) Chemical Chemical sensing sensing cable cable 100 10 ft ft (30.8m) (3.1m) Chemical Hydrocarbon sensing sensing cable cable 25 ft (7.7m) Hydrocarbon sensing cable 50 ft (15.4m) Hydrocarbon sensing cable 100 ft (30.8m) Hydrocarbon sensing cable
JC-25 NSC-10 NSC-25 NSC-50 NSC-10-M NSC-25-M NSC-50-M
RELATED PRODUCTS Package of 25 cable-securing J clips JC-C-25 Package of 25 cable-securing J clips for SC-C sensing 10' non-sensing cable cable 25' non-sensing cable JC-H-25 Package of 25 cable-securing J clips for SC-H sensing 50' non-sensing cable cable 10 ft (3.1m) Hydrocarbon/chemical non-sensing cable LC-KIT-REPLACEMENT Replacement 15' (4.6m) leader cable and 25 ft (7.7m) Hydrocarbon/chemical non-sensing cable end-of-line connector 50 ft (15.4m) Hydrocarbon/chemical non-sensing cable X-CON X connector single SC input, 3 SC outputs
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
581

DESCRIPTION
The EchoPod DL14, 24 and 34 Series ultrasonic level switch, transmitter and controller provide non-contact measurement of uid level in tanks up to 18 ft (5.5 m) in depth. The EchoPod is a compact multi-function sensor enabled by WebCal, a PC user interface for conguration and calibration. The DL Series combines 4 relays, a 4-20 mA output, and control for 1 or 2 pumps or valves.The rugged PVDF enclosure is well suited for a wide range of corrosive, waste, or slurry type media. It can be broadly applied to atmospheric day tanks, process vessels, dispensers, pump lift stations and waste sumps. Level indication and control may be monitored via a local display or through the BAS.
ULTRASONIC LEVEL SWITCH, TRANSMITTER, AND CONTROLLER DL14, 24, 34 SERIES ECHOPOD
NEW!
C
FM
APPROVED
US
FEATURES
Provides switch, controller, and transmitter functions in one device Replaces multi-point, conductivity, and pressure level devices Free WebCal PC software provides fast and easy conguration Well suited for corrosive and dirty applications Maintenance free Encapsulated, corrosion resistant submersible NEMA 4X enclosure DL14-00
APPLICATION
Cooling tower tanks Wastewater tanks Diesel fuel tanks Chemical feed tanks Rinse tanks
10
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Contact Rating Contact Type Deadband DL14 DL24 DL34 Accuracy DL14 DL24/34 Temperature Effect Measurement Range Dl14 DL24 DL34 Beam Width DL14 DL24 DL34 Conguration Fail Safe 24 VDC, 35 mA maximum 4-20 mA, two wire loop powered 400 @ 24 VDC 1A maximum @ 24 VAC/VDC 4 - SPST relays (normally open) 2" (5 cm) 4" (10 cm) 8" (20 cm) 0.125" (0.3 cm) 0.2% of range Automatic compensation Up to 49.2" (1.25m) Up to 9.8' (3m) Up to 18.0' (5.5m) 2" (5 cm) 2" (5.08 cm) 3" (7.62 cm) Free WebCal software (USB port fob tool L99-1001 required) Signal 4 mA, 20 mA, 21 mA 22 mA, or hold last signal, Relay: Power loss Hold last signal, Relay: Power on Hold last signal, open, closed Resolution DL14 0.019" (0.05 cm) DL24 0.039" (1 mm) DL34 0.079" (2 mm) Operating Temperature 20 to 160F (-7 to 60C) Plycarbonate/ABS FR Enclosure Transmitter PVDF Polyurethene Cable Jacket Enclosure Rating Encapsulated, corrosion resistant, submersible, NEMA 4X Process Connection DL14 1" NPT with Viton gasket DL24 1" NPT (1" G) with Viton gasket DL34 2" NPT (2" G) with Viton gasket Cable Length 48" (1.2m) Dimensions DL14 3.2"H x 2.0" diameter (8.1 x 5.1 cm) DL24 4.9"H x 3.06" diameter (12.5 x 7.8 cm) DL34 6.5"H x 3.06" diameter (16.5 x 7.8 cm) Approvals CE, RoHS, FM Warranty 1 year
582
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
PART NO.: LI99-1001
ULTRASONIC LEVEL SWITCH, TRANSMITTER, AND CONTROLLER DL14, 24, 34 SERIES ECHOPOD
Red - Power Blk - Return Wht - TX (Out) Grn - RX (In) Blu - Rly 1 Org - Rly 2 Yel - Rly 3 Pur - Rly 4 Brn - Rly Com
GREEN WHITE BLACK
RED
USB Fob Interface EchoPod communicates with WebCal through a USB interface called a fob. Before plugging your fob into your computers USB port, be sure that you have installed WebCal on your computer. Connect the red, green, white and black wires from EchoPod into the correct terminals on the fob. Tighten the screws on the terminals and plug your fob into the USB port of your computer.
10
DIMENSIONS
MODEL DESCRIPTION
DL14 DL24 DL34 EchoPod level sensor, up to 49.2" (1.25m) EchoPod level sensor, up to 9.8' (3m) EchoPod level sensor, up to 18.0" (5.5m) 0 NPT process connection, DL14 & 24 - 1" NPT, DL34 - 2" NPT Metric process connection, DL14 & 24 - 1" G, DL34 - 2" G Without FOB USB adapter (order separately 0 see related products) 1 Includes FOB USB adapter
48.0 (121.9) 2.0 (5.1)
3.2 (8.1) 2.7 (6.9) DL-14, 24: 1" NPT (4" G) DL-34: 2" NPT (2" G)
*Note: Specify alarm levels when ordering
0.89 (2.3)
LI99-1001 LM52-1400 LM52-1800 LM52-1410 LM52-1810
RELATED PRODUCTS Fob calibration key 2NPT x 1 NPT (Sch. 40) fitting 2 NPT x 1 NPT (Sch. 80) fitting 2 Socket x 1 NPT (Sch. 40) fitting 2 Socket x 1 NPT (Sch. 80) fitting
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
583

ELECTRONIC WATER LEVEL CONTROL SYSTEM WLC SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Waterline Controls WLC Series electronic water level control system may look like the competition but the unit is revolutionary in its design. The WLC Series is perfect in any application where water level management is important such as cooling tower basins and water holding tanks for cooling towers. It uses a microprocessor that monitors all probes for correct operation and then provides the corresponding outputs to drive the power relays, the Building Automation System and a visual indication of the operational status. The Modular construction and a self-test feature insure userfriendly operation. By using a very low voltage and current, WLC Series sensors never foul or degrade. So when we say "Never Replace A Water Level Controller Again" we mean it!
NEW!
WLC Series
FEATURES
Easy installation Simple, reliable, and automatic Compensates for wave action No moving parts or mechanical oats Liquid tight enclosure Accurately manages levels to within 1/8" of operating range Easy to read LED display
10
WIRING
POWER ALARM
FILL
HIGH ALARM
LOW ALARM
HEAT CUT OUT
TESTING
PRESS TO TEST
Quantity of relays and lights are a function of the model.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Contact Rating Internal Dry Contacts Contact Type Accuracy LED Indication Dimensions Enclosure Mounting Orientation Approvals Warranty 110 VAC 60 Hz, 250 mA @ 110 VAC 30A @ 250 VAC 0.5 @ 50 VAC/VDC SPST 0.125" (3.175 mm) of operating range Power on, Status indication 8.75 X 10.5 X 6.0 (22.2 x 26.7 x 15.2 cm) including the hinge and latch NEMA 4X Vertical ETL listed Limited lifetime warranty
S ensor Low Voltage R aceway
Blue Pair
Brown Pair
Green Pair
Red Pair
HEAT CUT OFF (HCO)
LOW ALARM (LA)
HIGH ALARM (HA)
FILL
*Bottom plate removed in illustration
WLC-3000 through 6000

B lack B lack
G reen (G round) 220VAC OR White B lack 110VAC
MODEL DESCRIPTION WLC-3000 Water level controller, ll only WLC-4000 Water level controller, ll with high alarm and built-in diagnostics WLC-4500 Water level controller, ll with low alarm and built-in diagnostics WLC-5000 Water level controller, ll with high and low alarm and built-in diagnostics WLC-6000 Water level controller, ll with high, low, and ultra-low (heat cut off) alarms and diagnostics
584
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!


ULTRASONIC LEVEL SWITCH LU77/78 SERIES ECHOSWITCH
The Flowline EchoSwitch LU77/78 ultrasonic level switch provides non-contact liquid level measurement up to 26.2' (8m) with integral three-channel relay control and a 4-20 mA signal output. Each relay can be congured for a single setpoint alarm or two latched setpoints for automatic ll or empty in simplex, duplex, or triplex control modes. Calibration is quick and easy using a sequence of push-button entries. Local LCD indication reveals level values and relay status. The LU77/78 is designed with a NEMA 4X enclosure, suitable for outdoor applications. LU77
Select sensing range of 9.8' (3.0m) or 26.2' (8.0m) LCD display with digital push-button calibration NEMA 4X enclosure Non-volatile memory 3" maximum beam width Integral timer for pump or valve delay Pump simplex, duplex, or triplex control modes 4-20 mA output can be used to provide local or remote level indication
10
APPLICATIONS
Cooling tower sumps Tanks Wells Water/waste sumps Process vessels Lift stations Day tanks
LU78
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Power Signal Output Memory Relay Output Deadband LU77 LU78 Repeatability Operating Pressure Process Temperature Measurement Range LU77 LU78 95-250 VAC 20 watts @ 120 VAC 4-20 mA, 2-wire isolated sinking Non Volatile 3 SPDT, 60 VA, 1A maximum 4" (10.1 cm) 8" (20.3 cm) 0.25" (6.35 mm) 30 psig (206.9 kPA) -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) 4 to 9.8 (10 cm to 3m) 8 to 26.2 (20 cm to 8m) Beam Width LU77 LU78 Fail Safe Operating Temperature Enclosure Enclosure Rating Conduit Connection Process Connection LU77 LU78 Dimensions Approvals Warranty 2" (5.1 cm) diameter 3" (7.6 cm) diameter Selectable: open, closed or last hold -7 to 140F (-22 to 60C) PVDF, Polycarbonate NEMA 4X (IP65) Dual, 1/2" NPT 1" NPT 2" NPT 5.2"H x 5.2"W x 3.9"D (13.3 x 13.3 x 10.0 cm) CE, RoHS 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
585

ULTRASONIC LEVEL SWITCH LU77/78 SERIES ECHOSWITCH
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
3.9 (10.0) 5.2 (13.3)
NEW!
CONFIGURATION
2.4 (6.2) 1.9 (4.9) 1.25 (3.2)
The LU77/78 is congured using three push buttons. To access the conguration menu, hold down the SELECT button for ve seconds. The display will scroll through the top level of the conguration menu [units, tank, relay 1, relay 2, relay 3, safe, mplex, help, run]. Press the SELECT button to choose the displayed menu item. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to set parameters. Hold down the SELECT button to save. Select EXIT to return to the main conguration menu.
1" NPT (1" G)
To return to operational mode, press SELECT when RUN appears on the display.
LU77
5.2 (13.3) 5.5 (13.9)
95 to 250 VAC Power

RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3
SPDT Relay 60 VA NC / COM / NO
10
4.0 2" NPT (2" G)
(10.1)
L1 L2 POWER
R1
R2
R3
EchoSwitch II
UP DOWN SELECT
2.7
(6.9)
3.5 (8.8)
FAST
LU78
MODEL DESCRIPTION LU77-5004 Ultrasonic level switch, up to 9.8 ft (3m) LU77-5005-B Ultrasonic level switch, up to 9.8 ft (3m) with mounting bracket LU78-5004 Ultrasonic level switch, up to 26.2 ft (8m) LU78-5005-B Ultrasonic level switch, up to 26.2 ft (8m) with mounting bracket
RELATED PRODUCTS LM50-1001 2" Mounting bracket (included with "B" option) LM50-1001-1 1" Mounting bracket (included with "B" option) LM52-1400 2"NPT x 1 NPT (Sch. 40) tting LM52-2400 3" NPT x 2 NPT (Sch. 40) tting
586
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Simple installation Low cost SPDT contacts

FLOAT SWITCH KCFS SERIES
The Kele KCFS Series oat switches provide a cost effective solution for applications such as condensate drip pan monitoring. The KCFS-SC features a spring clip and the KCFS-LB an L bracket for mounting.
KCFS-SC KCFS-LB
SPECIFICATIONS
Switch 5A @ 125 VAC 3A @ 250 VAC Operating Temperature Maximum 150F (70C) Mounting Orientation Horizontal Dimensions Wiring Terminations Warranty 3.5" (8.9 cm) clip to oat 6" (15 cm) leads 18 AWG 1 year
WIRING
Common Normally Open KCFS Normally Closed
MODEL DESCRIPTION KCFS-LB Float switch with L bracket mount KCFS-SC Float switch with spring clip mount
10
MULTI-LEVEL SWITCH MLS SERIES

DESCRIPTION
The Innovative Solutions MLS Series multi-level switch can be customized to meet application requirements. The unit can be congured with up to four independent switch points and stem lengths up to 48" (122 cm). The MLS Series is mounted vertically and shipped in the normally open position. For normally closed operation, simply invert the oat.
FEATURES
Up to four independent switch points 50 VA SPST switch operation (120-240 VAC) Easy installation Hermetically sealed
MLS
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Pressure Stainless steel: 120 psig (8.3 bar) Buna-N: 150 psig (10.3 bar) Specic Gravity Stainless Steel 0.85 Buna-N 0.65 Operating Temperature Stainless steel -40 to 300F (-40 to 149C) Buna-N -40 to 180F (-40 to 82C) March 2014 Switch Rating Wetted Materials Mounting Orientation Process Connection Dimensions Approvals Warranty 50 VA SPST @ 120 VAC Brass stem, Buna-N oat, 316 SS stem, Buna-N oat, 316 SS stem, 316 SS oat Vertical ( 30) 1/2" NPT(M), 1" NPT(M) Up to 48" L x 1.0" diameter UL File E203716 1 year
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
587

MULTI-LEVEL SWITCH MLS SERIES
MLS ACTUATION LEVELS
A = Minimum distance from actuation point to bottom of mounting. B = Minimum distance between actuation levels. C = Minimum distance from end of unit to lowest actuation point. Notes: 1. A, B, and C dimensions are based on a specific gravity of 1.0. 2. Minimum distances A= 1 (2.5 cm) B= 1.75 (4.4 cm) C= 1 (2.5 cm) 3. Actuation levels are calibrated on descending fluid level, with water as the fluid, unless otherwise specified. 4. Standard tolerance on actuation levels is 1/8" (3mm).
L3 L2 L1 LO B
L4
Common
NEW!
SWITCH WIRING
Wiring Options Common Wire L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 Black Red NO or NC Yellow Blue Brown Orange
Wire Color
Notes: All SPST switches are set normally open in their dry, no level condition unless specied otherwise. White-Red and White-Yellow denote single white wire with red or yellow stripes.
10
FLOAT SIZES AND OPERATING SPECIFICATONS
Float Materials
316 stainless steel
Dimensions
1" 1" 1" 1"
Temperature
-40 to +300 F -40 to +180 F
Pressure
300 psig 150 psig
Minimum Specic Gravity

0.95 0.80
Buna-N
588
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Low cost 50 W SPST switch operation (120-240 VAC) Easy installation Vertical mounting UL File E161587

FLOAT LEVEL SWITCHES FS7 SERIES
The Kele FS7 Series Float Level Switches provide an economic solution to monitoring the most common liquid levels applications in tanks and other vessels. Magnets within the oat actuate the sealed reed switch on rising or falling levels. These switches are mounted in the vertical position and are shipped in the normally open position. The switch action can easily be reversed (normally closed position) by removing the oat, rotating it 180 (end-to-end), and replacing the oat on the stem. FS7-BN
FS7-SS
WIRING
11.81 inch (30.1 cm) leads
APPLICATIONS
Condensate vessels Storage tanks Humidiers and de-humidiers Chemical storage Chillers
FS7 Series
Shipped Normally Open
10
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 0.64 (1.60) 0.19 (0.50) 11.81 (30.1) LEADS 1/8-27 NPT 0.78 (200) HEX FLATS
ACTUATION LEVELS
in (cm) 11.8 (30.1) LEADS 1/8-27 NPT 1/2 HEX
2.02 (5.10)
TOP
TOP
0.90 (2.30)
NC NO
2.20 (5.60) 1.60 1.00 (4.10) (2.54)
0.32 (0.80) Actuation 3/4 Submergence
0.32 (8.00)
0.31 (0.80) 1.00 (2.54)
1.10 (2.80) MAX OVER WELD
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Material Specic Temperature Limits Number (stem/ oat) Gravity FS7-BN PS/Buna-N 0.7 -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) -4 to 248F (-20 to 120C) FS7-SS SS/SS 0.7 Note: PS = Polysulfone, SS = 316 Stainless steel. Operating Pressure 57 psig 170 psig Installation Vertical Vertical Mounting Connection 1/8" NPT 1/8" NPT Dimensions 2.0"L x 1.0" 2.2"L x 1.1" Weight 0.03 lb (0.02kg) 0.06 lb (0.03kg)
MODEL DESCRIPTION FS7-BN Vertical oat switch, Polysulfone stem / Buna-N oat, 11.81" (30 cm) leads FS7-SS Vertical oat switch, 316 Stainless Steel stem / 316 Stainless Steel oat, 11.8" (30 cm) leads
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
589

FLOAT LEVEL SWITCHES F7 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Innovative Solutions F-7 Series Float Level Switches provide an economical solution to monitoring liquid levels in tanks and other vessels. Magnets within the oat actuate the hermetically sealed reed switch on rising or falling levels. Switches are available in horizontal or vertical mounting congurations. Vertical oats are shipped in the normally open position. The switch action can easily be reversed by removing the oat, rotating it 180 (end-to-end), and replacing the oat on the stem. The operation of the horizontal oats can be changed by rotating the entire switch 180.
NEW!
F7-BT F7-HIP F7-HPP F7-HSS F7-LL F7-SS F7-PS
FEATURES
Low cost 50 VA SPST switch operation (120-240 VAC) Hermetically sealed Easy installation Vertical or horizontal mounting UL File E203716
APPLICATION
10
Condensate vessels Storage tanks Humidiers and de-humidiers Chemical storage Chillers
WIRING
RED
Open
RED
Closed
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Number F7-BT F7-PS F7-SS F7-LL F7-HPP F7-HIP F7-HSS Material (stem/ float) PS/Buna-N PS/PS SS/SS PS/Buna-N PP/PP PP/PP SS/SS Specific Gravity 0.75 0.65 0.90 0.75 0.80 0.55 0.80 Operating Mounting Weight Installation Connection Dimensions Pressure -40 to 180F (-40 to 82C) 150 psig Vertical 1/8" NPT 2.21"L x 1.0" 0.1 lb (0.05kg) -40 to 225F (-40 to 107C) 50 psig Vertical 1/8" NPT 2.21"L x 1.0" 0.1 lb (0.05kg) -40 to 300F (-40 to 149C) 300 psig Vertical 1/8" NPT 2.06"L x 1.0" 0.2 lb (0.09kg) -40 to 180F (-40 to 82C) 150 psig Vertical 1/8" NPT 1.62"L x 1.13" 0.09 lb (0.04kg) -40 to 150F (-40 to 66C) 100 psig Horizontal (Ext) 1/2" NPT 4.24"L x 0.69" 0.09 lb (0.04kg) -40 to 150F (-40 to 66C) 100 psig Horizontal (Int) 5/8"-11 3.94"L x 0.69" 0.2 lb (0.09kg) -40 to 300F (-40 to 149C) 300 psig Horizontal (Ext) 1/2" NPT 4.24"L x 0.69" 0.2 lb (0.09kg) Temperature Limits
Note: PS = Polysulfone, PP = Polypropylene, SS = 31 Stainless steel.
MODEL DESCRIPTION F7-BT Vertical oat switch, Polysulfone stem / Buna-N oat F7-PS Vertical oat switch, Polysulfone stem / Polysulfone oat F7-SS Vertical oat switch, 316 Stainless Steel stem / 316 Stainless Steel oat F7-LL Vertical low level oat switch, Polysulfone stem / Buna-N oat F7-HPP External horizontal oat switch, Polypropylene stem / Polypropylene oat F7-HIP Internal horizontal oat switch, Polypropylene stem / Polypropylene oat F7-HSS External horizontal oat switch, 316 Stainless Steel stem / 316 Stainless Steel oat
590
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!


STAINLESS STEEL FLOAT LEVEL SWITCH F8-SSL
The Innovative Solutions Model F8-SSL Stainless Steel Float Level Switch is designed for high pressure or high temperature level monitoring applications. Magnets within the oat actuate the hermetically sealed reed switch on rising or falling levels. The unit is mounted vertically and shipped in the normally open position. For normally closed operation, simply invert the oat.
High pressure and high temperature performance 50 VA SPST switching Hermetically sealed Easy installation Vertical mounting Normally open or closed operation
F8-SSL
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating Specic Gravity Operating Temperature Wetted Materials Mounting Orientation Actuation Process Connection Dimensions Wiring Terminaltions Approvals Weight Warranty 50 VA, SPST, NO/NC 0.75 -40 to 300F (-40 to 149C) 316 Stainless Steel (stem/oat) Vertical 1 3/16" 1/4" NPT(M) 2.06" L x 1.0" diameter 2 Red lead wires UR, UL File E203716 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) 1 year
MODEL F8-SSL DESCRIPTION Vertical oat switch
10
MECHANICAL FLOAT SWITCH NG2DW1500B
DESCRIPTION
The Model NG2DW1500B is an economical mechanical oat switch. The switch can be installed by tie-wrapping it to a support structure or by adding an external weight to the cable. The unit is ultrasonically welded and potted for a complete seal. SPDT contacts are included so the unit can be used to empty or ll a tank or sump.
FEATURES
SPDT mechanical switch 10A contacts rated for 1/4 hp Float suitable for sewage and high temperature CPE-jacketed 15' (4.6m) cord Extra cord weight available
NG2DW1500B
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating Contact Conguration Operating Temperature Wetted Materials Operation Angle Wiring 10A 120/240 VAC, 1/4 hp 120/240 VAC SPDT 140F (60C) maximum ABS plastic 25 degrees above, 10 degrees below horizontal
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
PM-590 External Weight Pumping Range
25
Horizontal
10
Tank Full Tank Empty

Cable Length Cable Type Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty
Black-red closed Black-white closed

15' (4.6m) 16/3 CPE jacketed 4.6"H x 2.6" diameter (11.7 x 6.6 cm) CSA 1.65 lb (0.7 kg) 1 year
MODEL DESCRIPTION NG2DW1500B Mechanical oat switch PM-590 External weight 1.27 lb (0.58 kg)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
591

LEVEL SWITCH LV41, LV42 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Flowline LV41 and LV42 Series general purpose sump oat level switches provide reliable liquid level detection. The LV41 Series is perfect for simple liquid level control for lling or draining reservoirs and tanks. The oat switches are universally used for pump automation due to reliability, inexpensiveness and ease of installation. The LV42 Series is designed for the automation of pumps, specically lling and draining of tanks, wells and reservoirs. The body is free of any irregularities, making it ideal for use in sewage water applications. The polypropylene body consists of a double airtight chamber with high-pressure melted polypropylene re-injection sealing to ensure a perfect seal against inltration.
NEW!
LV41 LV42
FEATURES
Mechanically actuated oat switch intended for automatic start / stop of electrical components (LV41 only) Submersible polypropylene body and PVC cable for corrosive liquids 10A @ 250 VAC dry contact selectable NO Compatible with counter weights and cable hangers for simple installation
DIMENSIONS
Side View
1.64" (41.5 mm)
10
Blue (N.O.) Black (Com) Brown (N.C.)
Top View
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating Contact Type Operating Pressure LV41 LV42 Process Temperature LV41 LV42 Sensor Rating Cable Length Approvals Weight Warranty 10 A @ 250 VAC SPDT (NO/NC) 14.5 psi (1 bar) 29 psi (2 bar) 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) IP68 available in 20 ft (6.1 m) and 50 ft (15.2 m) CE, RoHS 2.4 lb (1.1 kg) 1 year
3.18" (81.0 mm)
4.14" (105.0 mm) 5.5" (139.7 mm)
LV41
4.36" (110.83 mm)
8.36" (212.5 mm)
LV42
MODEL LV41-7201 LV41-7501 LV42-7201 LV42-7501 DESCRIPTION Small sump oat level switch with 20 ft of cable Small sump oat level switch with 50 ft of cable Large sump oat level switch with 20 ft of cable Large sump oat level switch with 50 ft of cable
592
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
CE approved Polyphenylene sulde oat Magnetically actuated Good for specic gravities 0.6 and greater 1" NPT(M) mounting

GENERAL-PURPOSE FLOAT SWITCH L8
The Dwyer Model L8 Flotect Liquid Level Switch featues a leak proof body and oat constructed from tough, durable polyphenylene sulde (PPS) which has excellent chemical resistance. Because the liquid level snap switch is magnetically actuated, ther-e is no direct mechanical linkage to leak or fail, assuring longer life and decreased maintenance costs. L8
INSTALLATION / WIRING GUIDE

Wire in accordance with local electrical codes. Lead wire color codes are as follows. Black - Common, Red - Normally Closed, Blue - Normally Open. Normal is the contact condition when liquid level is below the actuation point. Closed contacts open and open contacts close when liquid level lifts the oat to the actuation point.
L8 WP2
10
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating 5A @ 125/250 VAC Contact Type SPDT Operating Pressure 150 psig (10.34 bar) Specic Gravity 0.6 minimum Operating Temperature 212F (100C) maximum Mounting Horizontal with index arrow pointing down Process Connection 1" NPT Dimensions 8.31" L (21.1 cm) Conduit Connection Wiring Terminations Red Blue Black Approvals Weight Warranty 1/2" NPT 18 AWG, 18" (460 mm) long Normally Closed Normally Open Common CE, UL File E38115 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) 1 year
MODEL L8 L8-WP L8-WP2 DESCRIPTION Level switch Level switch with phenylpolioxide weatherproof enclosure Level switch with aluminum weatherproof enclosure
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
593

VERTICAL FLOAT SWITCH VS-120R1R9L-01
DESCRIPTION
The Model VS-120R1R9L-01 vertical oat switch is designed for sump pump control. The unit features adjustable oat stops, a rod guide, pipe clamp, and stainless steel bracket. The switch and cord assembly is suitable for exposure to sewage environments. The plug assembly ts into a standard three-prong, 120 VAC electrical outlet and has an integral three-prong switched socket for sump pump control. The pump connects into the back of the power plug and switching level actuation is controlled though the positioning of the oat using the adjustable stops. The VS-120RIR9L-01 contact makes on a level rise.
NEW!
VS-120R1R9L-01
FEATURES
SPDT mechanical switch 10A contacts rated for 1/2 hp Float suitable for sewage and high temperature Adjustable oat stops Mounts to sump discharge pipes up to 2.5" (6 cm)
10
SPECIFICATIONS
115 VAC 10A 120/240 VAC, 1/2 hp 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Operating Temperature 150F (66C) maximum Enclosure ABS plastic Wetted Materials Black Polypropylene Mounting Orientation Vertical 10 ft (3.1m) Cable Length Dimensions 12.5"H (31.8 cm), 2.4" (6 cm) diameter oat Wiring Terminaltions Piggy-back three-prong standard plug Approvals CSA Weight 1.3 lb (0.6 kg) Warranty 1 year Supply Voltage Contact Rating
DIMENSIONS
12.5"H (31.8 cm) with 2.4" (6 cm) diameter oat
in (cm)
3.75 (9.5) Pipe Clamp Mount
Rod Guide Bracket 12.5 (31.8)
Adjustable Stop Rod Float 2.38 (6.0) Adjustable Stop
MODEL DESCRIPTION VS-120R1R9L-01 Vertical oat switch
594
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Waterproof Primary or auxiliary installation Easy to install and service Low voltage UL 508 listed Plenum rated models

CONDENSATE OVERFLOW SWITCHES SS/SP SERIES
The RLE Technologies SS/SP Series condensate overow switches detect rising water in A/C condensate drain pans and shut off the system to prevent overow and water damage. Designed for installation on auxiliary drain pan outlets or inline on primary drains, models are available with a solid state electronic probe or magnetic reed switch. Switches include mounting adapters and hardware. Model SG1 condensate overow alarm is wired across the normally closed contacts of the condensate switch. As the water level rises, the switch opens allowing current to ow through the alarm which sounds a buzzer and ashes an LED indicating a possible overow condition. The SG1 works with most 24-volt overow switches and pumps and comes prewired with 4-foot 18 AWG lead wires and 2-sided tape.
SS1
SS2AP
SS3
WIRING
10
SG1
Normal Position Closed Contacts Contacts Open On rising water
SP1P
SPECIFICATIONS
Model SS1 SS2AP SS3 SP1P Switch Type Magnetic Magnetic Magnetic Solid state Supply Switching Voltage Capability 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 1.25A 1.25A 1.25A 2.3A Installation Primary (inline) or auxillary Auxillary Drain Pan Primary (inline) or auxillary Plenum Rated No Yes No Yes Mounting Adapter 3/4" adapter 3/4" adapter NA 3/4" adapter Lead Length 6 ft (1.8m), 18 AWG 4 ft (1.2m), 18 AWG 6 ft (1.8m), 18 AWG 6 ft (1.8m), 18 AWG Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) 0.09 lb (0.04 kg) 0.2 lb (0.09 kg)
MODEL DESCRIPTION SS1 Inline magnetic reed condensate overow switch SS2AP Auxiliary condensate overow switch SS3 Auxiliary condensate pan overow switch SP1P Inline solid state condensate overow switch SG1 RELATED PRODUCTS Condensate overflow alarm
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
595

ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER DL10 SERIES ECHOPOD
DESCRIPTION
The compact Flowline EchoPod DL10 Ultrasonic Level Transmitter provides non-contact liquid level measurement up to 49.2" (1.25m) with reversible 4-20 mA output. The Model DL10 is ideal for corrosive, sticky, and dirty media. Transmitters can be quickly congured using WebCal software. The software offers pre-programmed menus, tank setpoint graphics, and custom wiring diagrams. User can dene loop failsafe, start-up condition, output at empty and specic tank levels.
NEW!
C
FM
APPROVED
US
FEATURES
Ideal for small tank applications Simple conguration PC enclosure designed to be corrosion resistant Minimal dead band optimizes lling capacity Adjustable loop failsafe 2" (5.1 cm) beam diameter for restricted spaces
DL10
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 48.0 (121.9) 2.0 (5.1)
APPLICATION
10
Small atmospheric day tanks Skid or process vessels Lift stations Drums Sumps Chemical feed applications
3.2 (8.1) 2.7 (6.9)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Memory Deadband Accuracy Operating Pressure Process Temperature Measurement Range Beam Width Fail Safe 24 VDC, 25 mA 4-20 mA loop powered
0.89 (2.3)
1" NPT (1" G)
TYPICAL WIRING
RED BLACK SHIELD WHITE GREEN (+) VDC 24 VDC () VDC
400 @ 24 VDC Non-volatile 2" (5.1 cm) 0.125" (3 mm) 30 psig (206.9 kPa) 20 to 140F (-7 to 60C) 2" to 49.2" (50.8 to 1.25m) 2" (5.1 cm) Signal 4 mA, 20 mA, 21 mA 22 mA, or hold last signal Resolution 0.019" (0.5 mm) Temperature Compensation Automatic Operating Temperature -31 to 140F (-35 to 60C) Enclosure Polycarbonate, NEMA 6P Process Connection 1" NPT Cable Length 48" (1.2m) Dimensions 3.2"H x 2.0"W x 2.0"D (8.1 x 5.1 x 5.1 cm) CE, FM, RoHS Approvals Weight 3.0 lbs (1.4 kg) 1 year Warranty
(+) KEY
RED BLACK SHIELD WHITE GREEN = = = = = POWER RETURN _ TX RX
()
8888
DISPLAY / PLC / CONTROLLER
MODEL DL10-00 DL10-01 DESCRIPTION Ultrasonic level transmitter Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob RELATED PRODUCTS Fob calibration key 2NPT x 1 NPT (Sch. 40) tting 2 NPT x 1 NPT (Sch. 80) tting 1 NPT ange (Sch. 80) March 2014
LI99-1001 LM52-1400 LM52-1800 LM52-1850
596
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Memory Deadband LU23 LU27 LU28/29 Accuracy Operating Pressure Process Temperature Measurement Range LU23 LU27 LU28 LU29 Beam Width LU23 24 VDC 4-20 mA two-wire 500 @24VDC Non-volatile 8" (20 cm) from sensor 4" (10 cm) from sensor 8" (20 cm) from sensor 0.2% of span in air 30 psig (206.9 kPa) -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) 8" to 18.0' (20 cm to 5.5 m) 4" to 9.8' (10 cm to 3.0 m) 8" to 26.2' (20 cm to 8.0 m) 8" to 32.8' (20cm to 10 m) 3" (7.6 cm)

ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER LU2 SERIES ECHOSONIC
The Flowline EchoSonic LU2 Series ultrasonic level transmitter provides non-contact liquid level measurement with a reversible 4-20 mA output. Models are available in three measurement ranges from 9.8 ft to 32.8 ft (3m to 10m), and an accuracy of 0.2%. The LU2 Series is ideal for ultrapure, corrosive, waste, and slurry applications. Transmitters can be quickly congured using WebCal software. The software offers pre-programmed menus, tank set point graphics, and custom wiring diagrams. User can dene loop failsafe, startup condition, output at empty, and specic tank levels.
FM
APPROVED
US
9.8', 26.2', 32.8' (3.0, 8.0, or 10m) ranges available Simple conguration Polycarbonate enclosure designed to be corrosion resistant and submersible Minimal deadband optimizes the lling capacity of tanks and sumps Adjustable loop failsafe 2" (5.1 cm) beam diameter for applications with restricted space
LU2 Series
APPLICATIONS
Cooling tower sumps Tanks Wells Ice storage Waste sumps Process vessels
10
LU27 LU28/29 Fail Safe
2" (5.1 cm) 3" (7.6 cm) Selectable: 4 mA, 20 mA, 21 mA, 22 mA, or hold last signal
Resolution LU27 0.019" (0.5 mm) LU28/29 0.079" (2.0 mm) Operating Temperature -31 to 140F (-35 to 60C) Polycarbonate Enclosure Enclosure Rating NEMA 6P (UL 50 Type 6P) Process Connection LU23 2" NPT LU27 1" NPT 2" NPT LU28/29 Cable Length 10' (3m) length Dimensions 2.9"H x 4.1"W x 4.1"D (7.4 x 10.5 x 10.5 cm) Approvals CE, FM, RoHS Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
597

ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER LU2 SERIES ECHOSONIC
DIMENSIONS
4.1 (10.5)
NEW!
10' Cable (3m) Red - Power Black - Return White - Tx (out) Green - Rx (in) Shld 10' Cable (3m) Red - Power Black - Return White - Tx (out) Green - Rx (in) Shld
1" NPT (1" G)
1.9 2.9 1.2 (4.9) (7.4) (3.2)
LU27
4.1 (10.5)
10
2" NPT (2" G) 2.4 3.4 1.7 (6.1) (8.6) (4.4)
LU28/29
MODEL LU27-01 LU27-01-B LU27-01-B-C LU27-01-C LU28-01 LU28-01-B LU28-01-B-C LU28-01-C LU29-01 LU29-01-B LU29-01-B-C LU29-01-C DESCRIPTION Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 9.0 ft (3.0m) Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 9.0 ft (3.0m) with bracket Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 9.0 ft (3.0m) with bracket, custom calibration Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 9.0 ft (3.0m) custom calibration Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 26.2 ft (8.0m) Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 26.2 ft (8.0m) with bracket Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 26.2 ft (8.0m) with bracket, custom calibration Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 26.2 ft (8.0m) custom calibration Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 32.8 ft (10m) Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 32.8 ft (10m) with bracket Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 32.8 ft (10m) with bracket, custom calibration Ultrasonic level transmitter with fob, 32.8 ft (10m) custom calibration RELATED PRODUCTS Fob calibration key 2 Mounting bracket (included with "B" option) 1 Mounting bracket (included with "B" option) 2NPT x 1 NPT (Sch. 40) tting 3 NPT x 2 NPT (Sch. 40) tting 3 NPT x 2 NPT (Sch. 80) tting 4 NPT x 2 NPT (Sch. 80) tting
LI99-1001 LM50-1001 LM50-1001-1 LM52-1400 LM52-2400 LM52-2800 LM52-3800
598
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!


ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS LU80/81/83/84 SERIES ECHOSPAN
The Flowline EchoSpan LU80/81/83/84 Series ultrasonic level transmitter provides non-contact liquid level measurement up to 32.8' (10m), with an accuracy of 0.2%. Setup is fast and easy using the push button menu and LCD display. The LU80/81/83/84 Series features fail-safe intelligence with diagnostic feedback for easy troubleshooting. The electronics are housed in a rugged NEMA 4X enclosure ideal for ultrapure, corrosive, waste, and slurry applications.
9.8', 18.0', 26.2', 32.8' (3, 5.5, 8, or 10m) ranges available Simple conguration Polycarbonate/ABS enclosure rated NEMA 4X (IP65) Fail-safe intelligence 3" (7.6 cm) beam diameter for applications with restricted space (LU81/83/84) Six segment LCD display indicates liquid level in inches or centimeters LU80/81/83/84 Series
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 12-28 VDC Signal Output 4-20 mA, two-wire @ 500 Memory Non-volatile Deadband LU80 4" (10 cm) LU81/83 8" (20 cm) LU84 12" (30 cm) Accuracy 0.2% of span in air Operating Pressure 30 psig (206.9 kPa) Measurement Range LU80 4" to 9.8' (10 cm to 3m) LU81 8" to 18.0' (20 cm to 5.5m) LU83 8" to 26.2' (20 cm to 8m) LU84 12" to 32.8' (30 cm to 10m) Beam Width LU80 2" (5.0 cm) LU81/83/84 3" (7.6 cm) Fail Safe Selectable: 4mA, 20 mA, 21 mA, 22 mA, or hold last signal Temperature Compensation Automatic Operating Temperature -7 to 140F (-22 to 60C) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X (IP65) Process Connection LU80 1" NPT LU81/83/84 2" NPT Approvals CE, RoHS Weight 2.0 lbs (0.9 kg) LU80 LU81/83/84 3.0 lbs (1.4 kg) Warranty 1 year
10
DIMENSIONS
(81/83/84 models) 5.2 (13.3)
3.9 5.5 (10) (13.8)
(80 model)
4.0
4.0 3.5 (8.8) 2.7

(6.9)
(10.1) (10.1)
2" NPT (81/83/84 (5.1) models) 1" NPT (80 model) (2.5)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
599

ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS LU80/81/83/84 SERIES ECHOSPAN
WIRING
Wiring to a Flowline LC52-1001 Controller
NEW!
Wiring to a Typical Two-Wire Loop Powered Indicator Wiring to a Flowline LI1_-1001 Universal Panel Meter
Black Red Gray White Brown Orange Yellow Purple Blue Green
JWA mode
Wiring to a Typical Programmable Logic Controller
10
Wiring to a Flowline LI42-1001 MicroPoint Indicator
Transmitter #1
Transmitter #2
MODEL LU80-5101 LU80-5101 LU81-5101 LU81-5101-B LU83-5101 LU83-5101-B LU84-5101 LU84-5101-B DESCRIPTION Ultrasonic level transmitter, 9.8 ft (3m) Ultrasonic level transmitter, 9.8 ft (3m) with bracket Ultrasonic level transmitter, 18.0 ft (5.5m) Ultrasonic level transmitter, 18.0 ft (5.5m) with bracket Ultrasonic level transmitter, 26.2 ft (8m) Ultrasonic level transmitter, 26.2 ft (8m) with bracket Ultrasonic level transmitter, 32.8 ft (10m) Ultrasonic level transmitter, 32.8 ft (10m) with bracket
RELATED PRODUCTS LM50-1001 2" Mounting bracket (included with "B" option) LI99-1001 Fob calibration key LM50-1001-1 1" Mounting bracket (included with "B" option) LM52-1400 2"NPT x 1" NPT (Sch. 40) tting LM52-2400 3" NPT x 2" NPT (Sch. 40) tting LM52-2800 3" NPT x 2" NPT (Sch. 80) tting LM52-3800 4" NPT x 2" NPT (Sch. 80) tting
600
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage 13 to 30 VDC Signal Output LD31 4-20 mA, two-wire @ 900 LD32 4-20 mA, two-wire @ 850 Maximum Output Impedance mA LD31 900 @ 30 VDC LD32 850 @ 30 VDC Accuracy 0.25% of full scale Proof Pressure 2 x full scale Process Temperature LD31 0 to 150F (-18 to 66C) LD32 0 to 180F (-18 to 82C)

LEVEL TRANSMITTER LD31, LD32 SERIES DELTASPAN
The Flowline DeltaSpan LD31 and LD32 Series submersible pressure level transmitters provide continuous level measurement up to 46 ft (14m) of water column with a 4-20 mA signal output. Select the LD31 Series liquid level sensor for relatively clean water, light weight oil or diluted chemical. Application examples include water wells and ponds. Select the LD32 Series liquid level sensor for dirty, foaming or slurry type liquids. Application examples include municipal sewer or storm pump lift stations.
Corrosion resistant 316 SS body with polyurethane or ETFE cable Strong cable design with maintenance free breather tube and vent lter Automatic temperature compensation for accurate measurement Rugged clog and damage resistant diaphragm design (LD32 Series only) LD31
LD32
10
Measurement Range Cable Length SX01 & SX11 SX21 & SX31 Cable Type Approvals Weight LD31 LD32 Warranty
up to 46 ft (14m)
40 ft (12.2m) 60 ft (18.3m) Polyurethane cable jacket and ETFE cable jacket CE, RoHS 2.2 lb (1.0 kg) 4.3 lb (2.0 kg) 1 year
DIMENSIONS
1/2" NPT (+) Red
1.0" (25.4 mm)
4.08" (104 mm)
(-) Black (Clear) Vent Shld
2.19" (55.6 mm)
LD31
Shld (Clear) Vent (-) Black (+) Red 1/2" NPT
1.5" (38.1 mm)
7.98" (202.8 mm)
LD32 March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
601

MODEL DESCRIPTION
LD31 LD32
Submersible pressure level transmitter, clean liquid applications Submersible pressure level transmitter, dirty liquid applications CABLE JACKET S1 S2 Polyurethane ETFE
NEW!
RANGE ft (m) 01 0-11 (0-3.4) 0-23 (0-7) 0-34 (0-10.4) 0-46 (0-14)
10
11 21 31
LD31
S111 Example: LD31-S111 Model pressure transmitter with polyurenthance cable jacket and 0-23 ft range
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
602
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Accuracy Proof Pressure Process Temperature Measurement Range LD34 LD35 Cable Length S101 & S111 S121 & S131 1000 @ 30 VDC 0.25% of full scale 2 x full scale -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) up to 100 ft (30.5m) up to 30 ft (9.1m) 40 ft (12.2m) (LD34) 60 ft (18.3m) (LD34)

The Flowline DeltaSpan LD34 and LD35 Series smallbore submersible pressure level transmitters provide continuous level measurement up to 100 ft (30.4m) of water column with a 4-20 mA signal output. Select the LD34 Series liquid level sensor for monitoring of relatively clean water. Application examples include ballast tanks, ground water, surface water, dewatering, down hole and remediation. Select the LD35 Series liquid level sensor for dirty, foaming or slurry type liquids. Application examples include sewage lift stations industrial slurries, industrial sumps, landll leachate, reservoirs, sludge pits and oil tankers.
Welded 316 SS body and 316 SS nose cap provide years of trouble free service (LD34) Tapered body top prevents damage or snaring when removing from installation (LD34) Incorporates lighting and surge protection Provides precise output readings with its 0.25% of full scale accuracy (LD34) Robust PTFE coated FKM uroelsatomer diaphragm provides a non-stick surface for aggressive uids (LD35)
10
LD34 LD35
10 to 33 VDC 4-20 mA, two-wire @ 1000
S141 S151 SX01 & SX11 SX21 & SX31 Cable Type Approvals Weight LD34 LD35 Warranty
70 ft (21.3m) (LD34) 100 ft (30.5m) (LD34) 40 ft (12.2m) (LD35) 60 ft (18.3m) (LD35) Polyurethane cable jacket, ETFE cable jacket (LD35 only) CE, RoHS 0.24 lb (0.11 kg) 0.30 lb (0.14 kg) 1 year
DIMENSIONS
0.625" (15.87 mm) (+) Red (-) Black (Clear) Vent Shld
6.25" (158.30 mm)
LD34
0.625" (15.87 mm)
1.188" (30.16 mm)
(+) Red (-) Black (Clear) Vent Shld
5.94" (150.83 mm)
LD35 March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
603

MODEL
LD34 LD35
DESCRIPTION
Small-bore pressure level transmitter, clean liquid applications Small-bore pressure level transmitter, dirty liquid applications CABLE JACKET S1 Polyurethane
NEW!
S2* ETFE RANGE ft (m) 01 11 21 0-11.55 (0-3.5) 0-15 (0-4.6) 0-20 (0-6.1) 0-30 (0-9.1)
10
31
41** 0-50 (0-15.2) 51** 0-100 (0-30.5)
LD34
S111
Example: LD34-S111 Small-bore pressure level transmitter for clean liquid applications with polyurenthane cable jacket and 0-15 ft range
*Cable jacket option only available for LD35 Series **Ranges only available for LD34 Series
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
604
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage 10-30 VDC Accuracy LS-10 0.25% of span LH-10 0.125% of span Signal Output 4-20 mA Maximum Output 695 @ 24 VDC Impedance mA Proof 30 psi, Burst 35 psi Overpressure Operating Temperature -22 to 140F (-30 to 60C) Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X (IP65) Dimensions 1.1" diameter x 5.8" long (2.7 x 14.7 cm) Materials Of Construction Stainless steel case Approvals CE, CSA Weight 2.6 lb (1.2 kg) maximum Warranty 1 year

LEVEL TRANSMITTER LS-10, LH-10 SERIES
The Wika LH10 & LS-10 Series Level Transmitter is exceptionally stable and is virtually unaffected by shock, vibration and orientation. The LH-10 series level transmitters have 0.125% accuracy for the 4-20 mA signal while the LS-10 series has 0.25%. Both the LH-10 & LS-10 Series can be lowered into a tank of water and the 4-20 mA signal will directly correspond to the level.
0.125% (LH-10). 0.25% (LS-10) accuracy, all ranges 4-20 mA, loop powered Ranges from 4.2 feet (1.3 m) to 34.9 feet (10.6 m)
10
LH-10 LS-10
WIRING
Vented PUR-cable tensile strength 220 lbs (110 lbs with FEP-cable)
Legend:
Sig+ output signal postive UB+ power supply postive OV power supply negative Sig+ output signal negative
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
605

LEVEL TRANSMITTER LS-10, LH-10 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
LS-10
NEW!
LH-10 with FEP-cable
10
MODEL
LS-10 LH-10
DESCRIPTION
Submersible liquid level transmitter with 40' cable High performance submersible liquid level transmitter with 40' cable PRESSURE RANGE ft (m) 01* 0-4.2 (0-1.3) 02 03 05 0-8.3 (0-2.5) 0-11.6 (0-3.5) 0-34.9 (0-10.6) Example: LS-10-05 Submersible liquid level transmitter with 40' cable, 0-34.9 ft range
04** 0-23.1 (0-7.0)
LS-10
05
*Range only available for LH-10 model ** Range only available for LS-10 model
606
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Level (ft) = (mA out - 4) x R x ft/psid 16 Where: mA out = mA output of the M230 R = Range of the M230 in psid ft/psid = Feet of water per psid at a specific temperature (from Figure 2) Level = (17.8 - 4) x 2 x 2.323 16 Level (ft) = (mA out - 4) x R x 2.31 16 x specific gravity of liquid 60" W.C. = 5' W.C. 5 ft 2.31 ft/psid = 2.16 psid
80 (26.7) 100 (37.8) 120 (48.9) 140 (60) 160 (71.1) 180 (82.2) 200 (93.3) 210 (98.9)

LIQUID LEVEL MEASUREMENT
tower with a 3 deep sump is mounted on a roof, and a M230 used to monitor the level is in an equipment room on the top oor (see Figure 3). The pressure at the M230 when the sump is full is 3 ft + 10 ft = 5.6 psid 2.31 Of this 5.6 psid, the pressure caused by the water in the cooling tower sump is 3 ft = 1.3 psid 2.31 The remaining 4.3 psid is created by the water in the tube between the M230 and the bottom of the sump. An M230-010PD-C (0-10 psid range) would be the proper transmitter. When using pressure transmitters for liquid-level measurement, the following precautions should be taken: 1. Verify that the pressure transmitter is compatible with the liquid being monitored. 2. Protect the pressure transmitter from freezing and overtemperature. 3. To protect the pressure transmitter from rust, scale, sand, etc., do not connect the sensing tube to the low point of the sump. Either connect into the side of the tank, or insert the sensing tube into the bottom of the tank so the tip of the tube is slightly above the bottom of the sump. 4. When used on pressurized systems, be sure that the system pressure plus the liquid pressure does not exceed the static pressure rating of the differential pressure transmitter. If you have any questions, please call Kele.
2.314 2.323 2.333 2.346 2.361 2.377 2.396 2.406
= 4 ft
What if the liquid monitored not water? Simply What if the liquid being being monitored isis not water? Simply modify thethe formula to to account for the modify formula account for thespecic specific gravity gravity of the liquid being monitored. the liquid being monitored.
One of the features of the M230 that makes it ideal for liquid level applications is the wide variety of ranges available. Assume you want to monitor a water level of 0-60 in a vented tank. To select the correct range for the M230, simply convert the 60 W.C. to psid.
10
The M230 is available in many standard ranges. The best selection for an application measuring 0-2.16 psid is the M230005PD-C with a standard range of 0-5 psid. Assume a cooling
FIGURE 3. COOLING TOWER SUMP
3'
10' M230
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
607

LIQUID LEVEL MEASUREMENT
The Bubbler System One of the most difcult applications frequently encountered in the building automation industry involves measuring the level of liquid in a tank. The Bubbler System is one solution for continuously measuring liquid level. This system involves forcing a stream of compressed air through a tube that is inserted into a tank. The pressure required to force the air out of the tube is equal to the pressure created by the liquid above the end of the tube. By measuring this pressure, the level in the tank may be determined. Using a Pressure Transmitter A simpler method of measuring liquid level is to install a pressure transmitter level with the bottom of the tank or at the lowest level that must be monitored. If the specic gravity of the liquid in the tank is known, then the liquid level may be easily calculated. The Model M230 differential pressure transmitter is excellent for this application. Remember, the water height, or L (see Figure 2), is measured from the low port of the pressure transmitter to the top of the water level. Model M230
NEW!
FIGURE 1. VENTED TANK M230-002PD-C
L
Low-pressure port open to atmosphere For example, assume the tank in Figure 1 contains 100F water. The M230-002PD-C has a range of 0-2 psid (4 mA output at zero pressure and 20 mA at 2 psid). If the output from the M230 is 17.8 mA, what is the water level?
FIGURE 2. PRESSURIZED TANK
10
M230
When used on a vented (non-pressurized) tank, the highpressure port is piped to the liquid at the bottom of the tank, and the low-pressure port is vented to the atmosphere. The M230 then measures the pressure created by the liquid (see Figure 1). This method may also be used to measure liquid level in a pressurized tank by piping the low-pressure port to the top of the tank above the liquid. The M230 will then measure the difference in pressure created by the liquid in the tank (see Figure 2). Now that we know the pressure created by the liquid in the tank, how can we convert this to liquid level? Due to gravity, a column of water at 70F, 2.31 high creates a pressure of 1 psig. Therefore, if the liquid in the tank is water, multiplying the pressure indicated by the M230 by 2.31 will provide the level of water in the tank in feet. As shown in Table 1, the value of 2.31 ft/psid is relatively accurate for the temperature of water in most HVAC processes. If the temperature of water being monitored is known, the value for ft/psid corresponding to the water temperature in Table 1 may be used in place of 2.31.
TABLE 1. CONVERSION FACTOR VS TEMPERATURE
Temperature F (C) 32 (0) 40 (4.4) 60 (15.6) 80 (26.7) 100 (37.8) 120 (48.9) 140 (60) 160 (71.1) 180 (82.2) 200 (93.3) 210 (98.9)
ft/psid for water 2.307 2.307 2.309 2.314 2.323 2.333 2.346 2.361 2.377 2.396 2.406
March 2014
608
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT CALL KELE. (mA NOW, out - 4) xR x ft/psid
Level (ft) =
16
LIGHTING CONTROLS
HUMIDITY
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Kele Provides System and Zone Controls, with a Wide Variety of Peripheral Sensors and Switches.
DLM Series | p. 615
AF16 Series | p. 664
LX-24 | p. 624
WSD Series | p. 637
CI-24 | p. 626
ET Series | p. 674
LIGHTING CONTROLS
MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Emergency Lighting Control ELCU-100 WattStopper Emergency Lighting Control.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 ELCU-200 Emergency UL924 Bypass/ Shunt Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 ESR Series Functional Devices UL924 Emergency Bypass / Shunt Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 Light Sensors MK7-B Series PLC-Multipoint Celestial Self-Contained Ambient Light Sensors, Voltage Based . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSR-1, PSR-1-T Kele Photo-Sensitive Resistor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K, LC Series Photo Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EM Series Photo Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAS Series PLC-Multipoint Self-Contained Ambient Light Sensors, Current Based . . . . . . . . . Lighting Contactors and Relays HDR Relay 5 Wire with Override and Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RR-7, RR-9 GE Lighting Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2R7CDD, 2R9CDD ILC Lighting Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AF16 Series ABB Lighting Contactors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS7K Series AEG Lighting Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Panels and Control Products RP Basic Series BlueRidge Relay Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZC Basic Series BlueRidge Lighting Zone Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMCP Series WattStopper Lighting Integrator Panels with Digital Lighting Management (DLM) Support .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLM Series Digital Lighting Management Digital Lighting Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LC8 Series WattStopper Modular Contractor Panel.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CX Series Commercial Lighting Control Panels Standalone Programmable Lighting Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ILC Apprentice II Programmable Lighting Control Panel .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIL-1 Kele Pulse Initiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LDIM2 Kele Fluorescent Dimming Control Module .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting Switches- Addressable, Override, Smart, Time and Wireless LS-PB-C series ILC Light Sync Adressable Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LV Series Lighting Override Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPODM Series SensorSwitch Low Voltage Sensor Interface Switch .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLLV-SW Lighting Override Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS-100, HS-150 WattStopper Card Key Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42000 Series Marktime Fan Light Time Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93000 Series Manual Time Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTS Series SensorSwitch Line Voltage Timer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WWS Series Wireless Switch Transmitter and Control Relay Receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
643 645 647 649 650
LIGHTING CONTROLS
LMCP Series | p. 613
660 661 663 664 665
609 611 613 615 618 620 622 658 672
MK7-B Series | p. 643
652 653 654 655 656 676 677 678 679
CM Series | p. 633
Occupancy Sensors and Related Power Packs .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 LX-24 Kele Occupancy Sensor LX-100 Kele Occupancy Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 CI-24 WattStopper Occupancy Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 CI-200, CX-100 WattStopper Occupancy Sensor.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 DT-300 Series WattStopper Dual-Technology Occupancy and Light Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 DW, PW, and UW WattStopper Wall Switch Sensors CM Series SensorSwitch PIR and PDT Ceiling Mount Occupancy Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 CMRB Series SensorSwitch High Bay Line Voltage Occupancy Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 SSD Series SensorSwitch PIR Wall Switch Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636 WSD Series SensorSwitch PIR and PDT Wall Switch Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 WSX Series SensorSwitch PIR and PDT Wall Switch Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 WV Series SensorSwitch PIR and PDT Wide View Occupancy Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 42E Series PIR and Dual Technology Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor Switch.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 BZ-50 WattStopper Universal Voltage Power Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 Time Clocks ET Series Electronic Time Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 FM_D Series Electronic Time Clocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
kele.com
NEW!

Zone Control Zone Control (ZC) (ZC)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
BLUERIDGE RELAY PANELS RP BASIC SERIES
Relay Panel Basic (RP Basic) is a UL Listed lighting control panel. RP Basic may be scheduled from any BACnet BAS and is compatible with all low voltage switches as well asGeneral occupancy sensors. RP Basic mounts Architecture near the circuit breaker panel to provide centralized control of branch lighting circuits. The relay panels come with a black powder coated steel enclosure and a removable door for 8 relay capacity panels, or a hinged reversable door for 16 relay capacity panels and above.
BAS Router
Internet
rchitecture ecture
BAS Router S Router
Field Devices d Devices
Field Devices Field Devices Field Devices UL Listed (UL E133813) BACnet MS/TP communication to BAS network Zone Control (ZC) Relay Panel (RP) Retrofit Interior (RI) Line and low voltage compartment separation Upgradable controller board rmware Field Devices 347 VAC Transformer (optional) panels: Other available options for 16 or more relay capacity IP InternetInternet IP LS5 LVS Low/Line voltage bays (optional) OCC BACnet Multi-pole lighting contactors (optional) BACnet MS/TP MS/TP LVS (Low Voltage Switch) / OCC (Occupancy Sensor) / LS5 (Light Sensor) 24 VAC auxiliary transformer 24 VDC power supply RPSB08 BACnet IP router (optional) Field Devices Field Devices Field Devices Field Devices Field Devices Field Terminations Devices UL924 emergency bypass (optional) Controller Board Relay(RP) Panel (RP) Relay Panel Field Devices Field Devices General Architecture LVS
BACnet(+) In/Out (RI) RetrofitRetrofit Interior Interior (RI) BACnet(-) In/Out Shield In Micro-B USB Port (for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit) BT485 Terminator Plug Internet (if applicable) Programing / Protocol Network Address Rotary Switch 10s Kit (RK) RetrofitRetrofit Kit (RK) Dip Switch Network Address Rotary Switch 1s
J2 J1 COMM
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WIRING
11
SW3
10s
1s
IP
LVS
OCC OCC
LS5
LS5
CAN/DDN Term
Internet BACnet MS/TP

TEST LEXP
BAS Router
LVS (Low Switch) Voltage /Switch) / OCC (Occupancy / LS5 (Light Sensor) LVS (Low Voltage OCC (Occupancy Sensor) Sensor) / LS5 (Light Sensor) Bluetooth Plug Field Devices Field Devices Field Devices (for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit) BAS Router
Bluetooth
Field Devices
Controller Board Terminations Controller Board Terminations

BACnet(+) BACnet(+) In/Out In/Out BACnet(-) BACnet(-) In/Out In/Out Shield In Shield In
ON
24VDC UI 21 UI 22 24VDC UI 23 UI 24 24VDC UI (Universal Input) / GND (Ground) GND GND GND GND UI (Universal Input) / GND (Ground) GND GND GND GND GND GND IN OUT GND 5VDC GND
277VAC Relays 33-64

Power LED Neutral Run LED
Brown
IN OUT
IN OUT
COMM 120VAC Black
SW3
10s
1s
Earth Ground
CAN/DDN Term
UI (Universal Input) / GND (Ground)
PWR RUN
PWR RUN
White
Wire Strip Length Indicator TEST Manual Override Lever

LEXP
24VAC(+) Auxiliary Out 24VAC(-) Auxiliary Out 24VAC(+) Power In 24VAC(-) Power In
Bluetooth
Input Terminals Input Terminals
24VDC UI 21 UI 22 24VDC 24VDC UI 23 UI 21 UI 24 UI 22 24VDC 24VDC GND UI 23 GND UI 24 GND 24VDC GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 5VDC GND GND GND GND 5VDC GND
(for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit) 24VDC WE MAKE UI 1 Transformer Terminations UI 2 24VDC Line In Line In
Input Terminals
March 2014
Transformer Terminations LTR Terminations LTR Terminations Transformer Terminations
IT EASY.
LTR Terminations
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
RELAY 1-32
456
456
24VDC UI 1 UI 2 24VDC UI 3 UI 4 24VDC UI 5 UI 6 24VDC UI 7 UI 8 24VDC UI 9 UI 10 24VDC UI 11 UI 12 24VDC UI 13 UI 14
24VDC UI 1 UI 2 24VDC UI 3 UI 4 24VDC UI 5 UI 6 24VDC UI 7 UI 8 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC UI 9 UI 15 UI 15 UI 10 UI 16 UI 16 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC UI 11 UI 17 UI 17 UI 12 UI 18 UI 18 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC UI 13 UI 19 UI 19 UI 14 UI 20 UI 20
CAN/DDN
Relays 1-32 Relays 1-32

Bluetooth Plug RELAY 33-64 (for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
RELAY 33-64
Bluetooth
Term
LEXP
Input Terminals Controller Board Terminations
24VDC Relays 33-64 RELAY 1-32 Relays 33-64 UI 1 BACnet(+) In/Out UI 2 24VDC BACnet(-) In/Out Power LED UIPower 3 LED Shield In Run LED UI 4 RELAY 33-64 Run LED Micro-B USB Port 24VDC UI 5 configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit) (for UI 6 24VAC(+) Out 24VAC(+) Auxiliary Auxiliary Out BT485 24VDC 24VAC(-) Out Terminator Plug UI 24VAC(-) 7 Auxiliary Auxiliary Out (if applicable) UI 8 24VDC 24VDC 24VAC(+) Power In Power UI 15 In UI 24VAC(+) 9 UI 16 InPower In 24VAC(-)24VAC(-) Power UI 10 24VDC 24VDC UI 17 UI 11 UI 18 PWR RUN UI 12 24VDC 24VDC UI 19 UI 13 Bluetooth Plug UI 20 UI 14
Transformer TerminationsDip Switch LTR Terminations Network Address Relays 1-32

J2 J1
ON
24VDC UI 21 UI 22 24VDC UI 23 UI 24 24VDC GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 5VDC GND
78
78
456
78
456
78
9 01
9 01
Programing / Protocol Network Address Rotary Switch 10s Rotary Switch 1s

9 01 9 01
IN OUT
Bluetooth Plug Bluetooth Plug (for configuration with TK-2.0 (for configuration changes changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)Tech Kit)
Bluetooth
Line In Relay Output
Test Button
Relays 1-32
609
UI (Universal Input) / GND (Ground)
CAN/DDN
CAN/DDN
456
456
78
78
456
456
Micro-B Micro-B USB PortUSB Port (for configuration with TK-2.0 (for configuration changes changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)Tech Kit) J1 BT485 Terminator Plug BT485 Terminator Plug (if applicable) (if applicable)
24VDC RELAY 1-32 UI 1 Field Devices Field Devices Field Devices UI 2 Network Address Rotary Switch 10s Programing / Protocol Programing / Protocol Network Address Rotary Switch 10s 24VDC Relays 1-32 Dip Switch Network Address Dip Switch UI 3 Network Address Rotary Switch 1s UI 4OCC LS5 LVS Rotary Switch 1s J2 Zone Control (ZC) Relay Panel (RP) RELAY 33-64 Retrofit 24VDC J2 J1 UI 5 SW3 10s 1s LVS (Low Voltage Switch) / OCC (Occupancy Sensor) / LS5 (Light Sensor) SW3 10s 1s COMM Relays 33-64 UI 6 COMM Field Devices Test Button 24VDC Test Button TEST UI 7 TEST Power LED UI 8 24VDC Run LED Controller Board Terminations24VDC Term LEXP UI 15 Term LEXP UI 9 Network Address Rotary Switch 10s Programing / Protocol UI 16 BACnet(+) In/Out UI 10 LS5 24VAC(+) Auxiliary Out Dip Switch LVS 24VDC OCC Network Address BACnet(-) In/Out 24VDC 24VAC(-) Auxiliary Out Rotary Switch 1s UI 17 Shield In UI 11 Micro-B USB Port J2 UI 18 PWR RUN (for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit) J1 UI 12 24VAC(+) Power In 24VDC SW3 10s 1s BT485 Terminator Plug 24VDC COMM 24VAC(-) In LVS (Low UI Voltage Switch) / OCC (Occupancy Sensor) / LS5 (Light Power Sensor) 19 Test Button UI 13 RELAY 1-32 (if applicable) TEST RELAY 1-32 UI 20 UI 14
Field Devices
ON
Zone Control (ZC)
Relay Panel (RP)
Retrofit Interior (RI)
9 01
9 01
78
78
ON
9 01
9 01
456
456
General Architecture
78
78
9 01
9 01
23
23
Test Button
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Retrofit Kit (RK)
Interior
23
23
23
23
Bluetooth
23
23
23
23
LIGHTING CONTROLS
BLUERIDGE RELAY PANELS RP BASIC SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Auxiliary Out 120, 277, 347 VAC 10%, 50-60 Hz 24VAC, 800mA (devices with full wave rectied power supply only) Analog Switch Inputs 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA Lighting Tough Relay (LTR) Resistive Load 20A @ 347 VAC / 1.5 HP @ 120 VAC Short Circuit Current Rating 30,000A @ 277 VAC Contactor Ballast 30A @ 347 VAC Contactor Tungsten 20A @ 347 VAC Relay Type SPST latching with manual override lever, pulse driven Relay Terminals Universal screw terminal, box type clamp, accepts double 14-10 AWG or single 8AWG (solid or stranded copper wire) Relay Life Cycles 300,000 on/off cycles @ full load Relay Life 1 million Micro-B USB or Bluetooth wireless Connection Style Communication Protocol BACnet MS/TP Network ready, RS-485, half duplex, daisy Communication Ports chain wiring Max length 4000 ft Network Tech Kit 2.0 Conguration Override Manual 32 to 125F (0 to 50C) Operating Temperature
NEW!
Operating Humidity Mounting Enclosure Rating Enclosure Dimensions RPSB08- RPSB16- RPSB32- RPSB48- RPSB64- Approvals Weight RPSB08- RPSB16- RPSB32- RPSB48- RPSB64- Warranty 20.5 lb (9.3 kg) 32 lb (14.5 kg) 47.5 lb (21.5 kg) 63.5 lb (28.8 kg) 82.5 lb (37.4 kg) 2 years
20-95% RH non-condensing Surface Mounted Type 1, (dry / indoor environment) 16ga steel with black powder coat nish 13.00"W x 14.75"H x 5.75"D ( 33.0 x 37.5 x 14.6 cm) 18.00"W x 16.20"H x 5.75"D (45.7 x 41.1 x 14.6 cm) 18.00"W x 25.00"H x 5.75"D (63.5 x 45.7 x 14.6 mm) 18.00"W x 33.80"H x 5.75"D (45.7 x 85.9 x 14.6 cm) 18.00"W x 42.60"H x 5.75"D (45.7 x 10.82 x 14.6 cm) UL 916, FCC Part 15, CEC Title 24, Electronics meet or exceed IEC Level 3
11
MODEL RPSB08 RPSB16 RPSB32 RPSB48 RPSB64 DESCRPITION Relay Panel Switching Basic, 8 relays capacity, 24 Universal Inputs Relay Panel Switching Basic, 16 relays capacity, 24 Universal Inputs Relay Panel Switching Basic, 32 relays capacity, 24 Universal Inputs Relay Panel Switching Basic, 48 relays capacity, 24 Universal Inputs Relay Panel Switching Basic, 64 relays capacity, 24 Universal Inputs NUMBER OF RELAYS INSTALLED XX Replace XX with the number of relays installed POWER OPTIONS 0 120/277V AC transformer 1 347V AC transformer 2 120/277V AC transformer plus 120/277V AC auxiliary transformer (for 16 relays capacity and above panels only) 3 347V AC transformer plus 347V AC auxiliary transformer (for 16 relays capacity and above panels only) SPECIAL OPTIONS (for 16 relays capacity and above panels only) 00 None X1 With UL924 Emergency Bypass (Relays 17-32 only) Low Voltage Bay Options (Bottom of panel, for 16 relays capacity and above panels only) (BLANK) None L1 9" bay LA 9" bay plus one 2.5A 24V DC power supply LB 9" bay plus two 2.5A 24V DC power supplies LC 9" bay plus one BACnet IP router LD 9" bay plus one BACnet IP router and one 2.5A 24V DC power supply LE 9" bay plus one BACnet IP router and two 2.5A 24V DC power supply LINE VOLTAGE BAY OPTIONS WITH DEAD FRONT COVER (Top of panel, for 16 relays capacity and above panels only) (BLANK) None H1 9" bay HA 9" bay plus one 4 pole 30A electrically held lighting contactor, 120V coil HB 9" bay plus two 4 pole 30A electrically held lighting contactor, 120V coil HC 9" bay plus four 4 pole 30A electrically held lighting contactor, 120V coil HD 9" bay plus one 4 pole 30A electrically held lighting contactor, 277V coil HE 9" bay plus two 4 pole 30A electrically held lighting contactor, 277V coil HF 9" bay plus four 4 pole 30A electrically held lighting contactor, 277V coil
LIGHITING CONTROLS
RPSB16
16
X1
Example: RPSB161X1 Relay Panel Switching Basic w/ UL924, 16 Relay Capacity, 16 Relays Installed, 24 Universal Inputs, 347V AC Control Power Transformer
LTR1 RPRVD RPSB-CTRL TK- 2.0
ACCESSORIES Relay, Lighting Tough Relay, Field Installation, 20A Relay Voltage Divider Relay Panel Switiching Basic, Replacement Controller, PCB ONLY Technicians Kit, includes Micro-USB Cable, USB flash drive with Essentials software, USB Bluetooth Dongle, Bluetooth module, and Screwdriver March 2014
610
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!

LIGHTING CONTROLS
BLUERIDGE LIGHTING ZONE CONTROLLER ZC BASIC SERIES
Zone Control Basic (ZC Basic) is a UL Listed distributed lighting controller in a compact junction box mounted package. ZC Basic may be scheduled from any BACnet BAS, and it is compatible with all low voltage override switches, occupancy sensors, and light level sensors. ZC Basic is suited for new or existing buildings, and may be scaled from basic to advanced occupancy and vacancy detection control sequences.
UL Listed and Plenum Rated (UL E133813) BACnet MS/TP communication to BAS network Line and low voltage compartment separation Micro-USB and Bluetooth (optional) ports for conguration Monitor and measure equipment performance Track lamp, ballast, and relay life Track schedule, occupancy sensor, and manual control savings
ZCSB-00-00
WIRING
General Architecture
Internet IP BACnet MS/TP BAS Router
11
Field Devices
Field Devices
Field Devices
Field Devices
Zone Control (ZC) Field Devices
Relay Panel (RP)
Retrofit Interior (RI)
Retrofit Kit (RK)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
LVS
OCC
LS5
LVS (Low Voltage Switch) / OCC (Occupancy Sensor) / LS5 (Light Sensor)
FI-1 Board Terminations
FI-2 Board Terminations
Controller Board Terminations

Network Address Rotary Switch 1s Network Address Rotary Switch 10s Programing/Protocol Dip Switch Test Button
TEST
J2 J3
ON
BACnet (+) Out BACnet (-) Out
78
78
90 1
90 1
23
R1 R2 L N
FI-1
Relay Output 1 Relay Output 2 Line In* Neutral
SW5
10s
1s
5VDC Ground
JP1
J2
J3
S1 S2
Switch Input 1* Switch Input 2*
FI-2 Board
+5V GND
Earth Ground
J2
BT485 Terminator Plug (if applicable)
J4
J1
Controller Board
BN+ BNS
ON OFF
PWR RUN
BACnet (+) In BACnet (-) In Shield
Universal Input 1 Universal Input 2 24VDC Ground Universal Input 3 Universal Input 4 24VDC Ground Universal Input 5 Universal Input 6 24VDC Ground
Power Switch Power LED / Run LED
*FI-1 terminations are compatible with 120, 230, or 277VAC single phase circuits. Do not mix voltages or phase on the same unit. Refer to install guide for wiring details.
*Applicable on ZC with Bluetooth Wireless Option only.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
Micro-B USB Port Bluetooth Plug* (for configuration changes with TK-2.0 Tech Kit)
BN+ BNS
AO-1V AO-1G AO-2V AO-2G AO-3V AO-3G +24V SN+ SNGND
Controller Board
J5
J1
J4
DN+ DNUI-1 UI-2 +24V GND UI-3 UI-4 +24V GND UI-5 UI-6 +24V GND
J6
FI-1 Board
FI-2
456
23
456
611
LIGHTING CONTROLS
BLUERIDGE LIGHTING ZONE CONTROLLER ZC BASIC SERIES
APPLICATION
MSTP NETWORK
ZC 2-Channel Line Voltage 2-Way Switch Application Example

CL3P 22/2 SHEILDED LOW CAP MAX 4,000'
Zone Controller-ZCSB-00-00
BLK RED SHIELD BLK RED WHT GRN FI-2 BOARD BLK RED BLK
R1 R2
FI-1 BOARD
L N G OI OI S1 S2
AO-1G
AO-2G
AO-3G
AO-1V
AO-2V
AO-3V
+24V
GND
DN+
GND
GND
+24V
+24V
BN+
BN-
TERMINALS 10-14 AWG
SHIELD
WHT
RED
RED
INCOMING SHIELD IS NOT CONNECTED
GROUND NEUTRAL LINE (120V-277V)
GRN WHT BLK CIRCUIT BREAKER 20A MAX
RED WHT BLK
BLK
BLK
+24V
GND
UI-1
UI-2
UI-3
UI-4
UI-5
UI-6
DN-
GND
CN+
+5V
CN-
NEW!
CL3P 22/2 SHEILDED LOW CAP MAX 4,000' MSTP NETWORK BALLAST-1 WHT BLK BALLAST-2 CL3P 18/3 MAX 500' WHT BLK LIGHT FIXTURE NEXT FIXTURE VIO-N.C. GRY-N.O. OCCUPANCY SENSOR BRN-COM RED-24VDC BLK-GND WHT-OCC RED BLK WHT CM-9-R (SET TIMER TO MINIMUM)
BN+
BN-
11
BLK RED WHT BLK BLK SWITCH A OUTBOARD NEXT FIXTURE BLK RED SWITCH B OUTBOARD
LIGHITING CONTROLS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Resistive Load Relay Type Relays Connection Style Communication Protocol Network Conguration Override 120, 230 or 277 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz 20A @ 277VAC / 1.5HP @ 120VAC Mechanicall latching relays with manual override lever 2 Micro-B USB or Bluetooth Wireless BACnet MS/TP to BAS network Max Length 4000 ft Tech Kit 2.0 Manual Operating Temperature 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) Operating Humidity 10-90% RH non-condensing Mounting 4" or 4 11/16" juntion box Enclosure 20ga steel white powder coat nish Enclosure Rating Plenum Rated, Type 1, (dry / indoor envirnment) 10.0"W x 5.06"H x 2.50"D Dimensions (25.4 x 12.9 x 6.4 cm) 3 lb (1.36 kg) Weight Approval UL listed, UL916, FCC Part 15, CEC Title 24 Warranty 2 years
MODEL ZCSB-00-00 ZCSB-00-BT TK- 2.0 DESCRIPTION Zone Controller, Switching Basic, 120/277, Max of 2-CH Zone Controller, Switching Basic w/ BlueTooth, 120/277, Max of 2-CH ACCESSORIES Technicians Kit, includes Micro-USB Cable, USB flash drive with Essentials software, USB Bluetooth Dongle, Bluetooth module, and Screwdriver March 2014
612
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Input voltage Secondary Class 2 Power Supply
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WATTSTOPPER LIGHTING INTEGRATOR PANELS WITH DIGITAL LIGHTING MANAGEMENT DLM SUPPORT LMCP SERIES
The LMCP Series panel provides simple network-capable lighting control enabling the automation of lighting functions throughout an entire facility. The HDR relays in the panel can respond directly to inputs from Digital Lighting Management (DLM) switches, occupancy sensors, daylight sensors, and input modules.
Standard single pole heavy duty relays UL and cUL listed for both lighting and plug loads Availabe in interiors sized for 8,24, or 48 relays maximum LMCT -100 handheld Conguration tool recommended for setup Runs event-based schedule routines independently (does not require BAS or Segment Manager) Supports astronomical, time- based, and photocell-based event types Two free topology DLM Category 5e local networks for DLM sensors, switches, and LMIO series input modules Additional power available for low voltage switiches or accessories Qualies for use in ARRA-funded projects
LMCP
LENC-08-S
120/277 VAC 60 Hz, 120/347 VAC 60 Hz, 240 VAC 50 Hz
24 VDC output, up to 250 mA across 2 RJ45 ports per local network Local Network Segments Free-topology DLM local network segments may include digital switches and sensors Category 5e cable, 150 ft. per DLM device, up to 1,000 ft. total per local network Segment Network Parameters WattStopper LM-MSTP wire Linear topology; 4000 ft. maximum per segment Network Connections Terminals for connection to DLM segment network (BACnet MS/TP) Communication Protocol BACnet MS/TP Accessory Power Available LMCP8 800 mA @ 24 VDC LMCP24 1000 mA @ 24 VDC LMCP48 1000 mA @ 24 VDC HDR Relays Coil voltage, 24 VDC, pulse ON and pulse OFF Individually replaceable Mechanically latched contacts
Relay Contact Ratings SCCR (short circuit current rating) Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Enclosure Rating Enclosure Options Dimensions LMCP8 LMCP24 LMCP48 Approvals Weight LMCP8 LMCP24 LMCP48 8 Relay Enclosure 24 Relay Enclosure 48 Relay Enclosure Warranty
30 Amps ballast @ 277V 20 Amps ballast @ 347V 20 Amps tungsten @ 120V 30 Amps resistive @ 347V 1.5 HP @ 120V 14,000 Amps with HDR Heavy Duty Relay 32 to 131F (0 to 55C) 5-95% RH noncondensing NEMA 1 Surface (LENCxxS) or Flush (LENCxxF) 13"W x 10.5"H x 4.25"D (33.02 x 26.67 x 10.79 cm) 14"W x 23.37"H x 4.25"D (35.56 x 59.36 x 10.79 cm) 14"W x 35.75"H x 4.25"D (35.56 x 90.81 x 10.79 cm) UL and cUL Listed (E207852) 16 lb (7.3 kg) 30 lb (13.6 kg) 46 lb (20.9 kg) 20 lb (9.1 kg) 50 lb (22.7 kg) 66 lb (29.9 kg) 5 years
11
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DIMENSIONS
MODEL 8-relay Interior WIDTH 13" (33 cm) HEIGHT 10.5" (26.7 cm) ENCLOSURE LENC8S LENC8F 24-relay Interior 14" (35.6 cm) 23.4" (59.4 cm) LENC24S LENC24F 48-relay Interior 14" (35.6 cm) 35.8" (90.8 cm) LENC48S LENC48F WIDTH 15.8" (40.1 cm) 17.1" (43.4 cm) 24" (61 cm) 25.9" (65.8 cm) 24" (61 cm) 25.9" (65.8 cm) HEIGHT 16.6" (42.2 cm) 18.5" (47 cm) 32" (81.3 cm) 33.4" (84.8 cm) 44.5" (113 cm) 45.9" (116.6 cm) DEPTH 4.6" (11.7 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm) 4.6" (11.7 cm)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
613
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WIRING
LM10-301 Connection and Wiring Diagram
Local Network A or B
WATTSTOPPER LIGHTING INTEGRATOR PANELS WITH DIGITAL LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SUPPORT LMCP SERIES
P115/277 wiring
Watertight J Bo x Sensor Hood
Occupancy Sensor
Switch LMPO-200 Sensor
LMRJ Cables To LMCP
Class 2 wiring #20 AWG up to 250' #18 AWG up to 1000'
NEW!
(see installation instructions for additional voltages)
115V AC Supply
277V AC Supply
LMIO-301
GND
GND
NEU
NEU
115
115
277
277
DLM Panel Connection Diagram

To Segment Manager or BAS (optional) To additional LMCP Panels or DLM Local Networks (optional)
Local Network B
Emergency Relay Wiring

(Fail-safe, bypassed operation)
Segment Network (linear topology twisted pair dataline)
LM-MSTP Wire
Emergency Lighting Circuit
Line Load
HDR Relay
Local Network A Switch Occupancy Sensor
Switch
N.C. Contactor
11
Typical of up to 48 loads Line Voltage
Normal Power Sense

LMCP Panel LMRJ Cables
H N
INSTALLATION
MODEL LMCP8 LMCP24 LMCP48 PANEL INTERIOR Network-capable lighting control panel with maximum of 8 relay capacity* Network-capable lighting control panel with maximum of 24 relay capacity* Network-capable lighting control panel with maximum of 48 relay capacity* VOLTAGE OPTIONS 115/277 With 115/277 VAC supply 115/347 With 115/347 VAC supply 240 With 240 VAC supply NUMBER OF HDR RELAYS INSTALLED Replace XX with number of HDR relays installed XXHD (max. of interior relay capacity) NUMBER OF EMERGENCY RELAYS INSTALLED Replace XX with number of UL924 fail-safe emergency relays installed XXEM (max. of 24 relays, not available for 8 relay capacity panels) EMERGENCY RELAY COIL VOLTAGE 115 VAC coil voltage 115 240 VAC coil voltage 240 277 VAC coil voltage 277 347 VAC coil voltage 347 277 Example: LMCP48-115/277-48HD-24EM277 48 Relay capacity panel with 115/277 VAC, 48 HDR relays, 24 Emergency relays, 277VAC coil voltage *Order enclosure separately.
LIGHITING CONTROLS
IR Window
Panel Interior
IR Window Power On/Of f
BA T= Sensor Conguratio n Load Cong (PnL) Daylighting Con g Button Conguration Dimming Conguratio n Adjust Light Level
LMCP48 115/277 48HD 24EM

Home/ Main Menu Up Right/Next
Select Back Left Down
MODEL LENC
LMCT-100
ACCESSORIES PAGE HDR Mechanically latching relay with 5-pin plug-in connector, pilot contacts, override switch 660 LMCT - 100 Digital Wireless Configuration tool
ENCLOSURES Lighting panel enclosure ENCLOSURE TYPE / SIZE 08 8 relay capacity 24 24 relay capacity 48 48 relay capacity PANEL TYPE Flush mounted style F Surface mounted style S 24 S
LENC
Example: LENC24S 24 relay surface mounted enclosure.
Enclosure sold separately.
614
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Connection Type Cable Length Wire Type Local Network Segment Network
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS T
Digital Lighting Management, DLM Series is an intelligent, distributed control system that automatically maximizes lighting energy efciency. DLM is designed to scale from stand-alone control of individual rooms to centralized control of a oor, a building, or an entire campus. With DLM, you layer your choice of control strategies to meet project goals, from energy code compliance to building aesthetics, simplied maintenance and enhanced energy performance. Control options include room controllers for switched or dimmed lighting loads, or for plug loads; digital occupancy sensors; sleek switches and handheld remotes; versatile daylighting sensors; lighting control panels; tools for remote conguration, scheduling and system management; and interfaces providing connectivity to third party devices. For building-wide monitoring and management, multiple DLM local networks may be connected to an industry standard open protocol network for control by a segment manager or building automation system (BAS).
DLM Series
11
On/off and dimming control options Plugged components on a free-topology Category 5e DLM local network Capable of bi-level control, daylight harvesting, plug load control, and dimming
LIGHTING CONTROLS
24 VDC from DLM local network, Segment Manager 15 VDC from 120 VAC plug-in power supply (included) Removable terminal block for twisted pair DLM segment network connection Local DLM network up to 1,000 feet of cable, max of 300 feet between communicating devices LMRJ-XX cables with RJ45 connectors Equivalent rated for BACnet MS/TP (RS485)
Room Controllers LMRC-100, LMPL-101 150 mA per controller (maximum 4) Up to 24 communicating devices Up to 8 loads (20 A) LMRC-2XX, LMPL-201 Up to 250 mA per room controller (output is limited if network is fully powered) Up to 48 communicating devices Up to 64 loads (20 A) Up to 4 LMRC-100 or LMPL-101 controllers March 2014
Communication Interface Up to 127 DLM local networks, connected via LMBC-300 Network Bridge or LMRC-xxx Series Room Controller Communication Protocol RS485 network, BACnet MS/TP twisted pair, baud rate 9600, 19200, 38400 or 76800 selectable Free topology permits both star and Connection Style daisy chain connection patterns Linear topology for MS/TP network daisy chain connection; 4000 feet maximum per segment Normal operation LED Indication Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5-90% RH, non-condensing BTL, FCC Part 15, ASHRAE 90.1, Approvals IECC, EPAct, California Title 24, 1 year Warranty
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
615
NEW! NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS DLM SERIES DIGITAL LIGHTING MANAGEMENT
APPLICATION APPLICATION CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Digital Lighting Management (DLM) components operate on a free-topology DLM local network. Each DLM local network is managed by one or more room controllers that, upon startup, automatically congure system components for the most energyefcient sequence of operation using Plug n Go technology. Plug n Go establishes default functionality based on the installed components. The DLM architecture is designed from the bottom up, the segment network operation is simple, and builds on the Plug n Go and Push n Learn functionality of each local network. New or existing DLM systems can easily be incorporated into BACnet MS/TP networks. DLM Network Bridge devices are standard MS/TP master devices, and the MS/TP MAC address and communication baud rate are automatically congured through arbitration with other devies on the network. Building operators create normal and after hours lighting control schedules and monitor operation for energy savings and real-time consumption. [For more product information and data sheets go to WWW.KELE.COM]
Two DLM local networks connected to optional DLM segment network

DLM Local Network for Room 1
Switch LMRC-102 Dual Relay Room Controller LMRJ Cables Line Voltage Loads J-Box
11
1 2
LIGHITING CONTROLS
Daylight Sensor
Network Bridge Corner Mount Occupancy Sensor (optional) Ceiling Mount Occupancy Sensor
To Segment Manager or BAS
Segment Network (linear topology twisted pair dataline)
LM-MSTP Wire
To additional DLM Local Networks
DLM Local Network for Room 2
Line Voltage Class 2 0-10 Volt Control Wiring
Scene Switch
Dimming Switch
Dimming Switch LMRJ Cables
LMRC-312 On/Off/ Dimming Room Controller with Network J-Box Bridge
Line Voltage
0-10 Volt Ballast 0-10 Volt Ballast
Digital Lighting Management local network components plug together in any configuration (free topology)
Occupancy Sensor
LMPL-201 Plug Load Room Controller
Each segment network can connect up to 127 local networks for centralized monitoring and control
51
616
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS DLM SERIES DIGITAL LIGHTING MANAGEMENT
MODEL LMBC-300 LMCI-100 LMCT-100 LMDC-100 LMDM-101-I-P LMDX-100 LMIO-101 LMIR-100 LMLS-105 LMLS-305 LMLS-400 LMLS-500 LMLS-MB1 LMLS-MB2 LMPC-100 LMPL-101 LMPL-201 LMPX-100 LMRC-101 LMRC-102 LMRC-211 LMRC-212 LMRC-213 LMRC-CA LMRH-101 LMRH-102 LMRH-105 LMRJ-25 LMRL-100 LMSM-ENC1 LMSM-201 LMSM-603 LMSW-101-I-P LMSW-102-I-P LMSW-103-I-P LMSW-104-I-P LMSW-105-I-P LMSW-108-I-P LMUC-100 DESCRIPTION BACnet network bridge Computer Interface Tools and Software Digital Wireless Conguration Tool Digital Dual Technology Ceiling Mount Occupancy Sensor Digital 1-Button Dimming Wall Switch with Ivory plate Digital Dual Technology Corner Mount Occupancy Sensor Digital Input/Output Interface Digital IR Ceiling Mount Receiver On/Off Photosensor 0-10 Volt Dimming Photosensor Digital on/off dimming Closed Loop Photo sensor Open Loop Multi-zone DLM Photo sensor with extened tube Photo sensor mounting bracket J box Photo sensor mounting bracket wall mount Digital PIR Ceiling Mount Occupancy Sensor Digital Plug Load Room Controller Digital Plug Load Room Controller Digital PIR Corner Mount Occupancy Sensor Digital On/ Off room controller with one relay Digital On/Off Room Controller with 2 relays Digital On/Off/0-10 Volt Dimming Room Controller with 1 relay and 1 0-10 volt dimming output Digital On/Off/0-10 Volt Dimming Room Controller with 2 relays and 2 0-10 volt dimming outputs Digital On/Off/0-10 Volt Dimming Room Controller with 3 relays and 3 0-10 volt dimming outputs Conduit adapter LV connection Digital Dimming IR Remote Control Digital 2-Button IR Remote Control Digital Scene IR Remote Control RJ45 cables 25 feet nonplenum rated Isolated Relay Interface Enclosure for Segment Manager, 14"L x 8.5"W x 5"D, include 120VAC duplex outlet Segment Manager, one BACnet MS/TP segment network Segment Manager, three BACnet MS/TP segment network Digital 1-Button Wall Switch with Ivory plate Digital 2-Button Wall Switch with Ivory plate Digital 3-Button Wall Switch with Ivory plate Digital 4-Button Wall Switch with Ivory plate Digital 5-Button Scene Switch with Ivory plate Digital 8-Button Wall Switch with Ivory plate Digital Ultrasonic Ceiling Mount Occupany Sensor
11
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
617
LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION
The LC8 Series panel provides zone-based control of up to eight channels, or zones, of interior and exterior lighting. Zones respond to control signals from the system clock, or an accessory photocell, to automatically turn lighting on and off. The LC8 panel uses interchangeable relay modules, available separately, that can be selected to suit project needs. Relay options include the LCSP-2 dual single-pole module and LCDP-1 double-pole module.
WATTSTOPPER MODULAR CONTRACTOR PANEL LC8 SERIES
NEW!
LC8 Series Operating Humidity Enclosure Rating Enclosure Options Relay Mounting Dimensions Approvals Weight LC8-120/277 LCSP-1 LCSP-2 Warranty 5-95% RH noncondensing NEMA 1 Surface DIN rail 12"W x 14"H x 3"D (30.48 x 35.56 x 7.62 cm) UL, cUL E131150 8.1 lb (3.67 kg) 0.37 lb (0.17 kg) 0.49 lb (0.22 kg) 1 year
FEATURES
Nonvolatile program memory retains all programming during power outages Interchangeable single-pole and double-pole relay modules Manual override of relays and channels via touchscreen interface Eight universal switch inputs for low voltage switches, occupancy sensors or other devices to directly control each relay Pilot light output for each switch input Accepts most types of switch inputs Compatible with LVSW-100 Series Low Voltage Switches and AS-100 Automatic Wall Switch
11
SPECIFICATIONS
LIGHITING CONTROLS
Supply Voltage Contactor Ballast Contactor Motor Short Circuit Current Rating Relays Relay Type Relay Terminals User Interface
120/277 VAC, 50/60 Hz 20A @ 120 or 277VAC, 20A @ 208, 240 or 480 VAC 0.5 HP @ 120VAC, 1 HP @ 208, 240 or 480VAC
14,000 Amps Modular; dual 1-pole or single 2-pole Electically held Screw compression Touchscreen interface to congure relays and input switches Operating Temperature 32 to 139F (0 to 60C)
DIMENSIONS
in (mm) 12 .0" (30 4.8 mm
14.0" (355.6mm)
3.0" (76.2mm)
Modules clip onto DIN rail, and plug to panel power supply and each other via integral connectors.
618
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
LCDP 1
Line LED lit when relay is on. Loa d
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WATTSTOPPER MODULAR CONTRACTOR PANEL LC8 SERIES
Low Voltage Switches

Jumper between B and +24 RED WHITE
LCD with Touch Screen
Double Pole Relay Module
Line
APPLIANCE CONTROL 88T9
Pa t. Pe nd. 800.879.8585 14000r1 www.wattstoppe r.com
Loa d
LCDP 1
Line
LED lit when relay is on.
Double Pole Relay Module LCDP 1
Loa d
Double Pole Relay Module
Line
Loa d
LCSP 2
Line
2-Wire Momentary Push Button

RED WHITE BLACK
Y R B +24 W
- Pilot - On - Off - +24 - Gnd
Y R B +24 W Y R B +24 W Y R B +24 W Y R B +24 W Y R B +24 W Y R B +24 W Y R B +24 W Y R B +24 W
J4 J5 J6
Loa d
Dual Single Pole Relay Module
Line
LV Switch Inputs
Pa t. Pe nd. 800.879.8585 www.wattstopper.com 14001r1
Loa d
LCSP 2
Line
Dual Single Pole Relay Module LCSP 2 Power Supply Module
Loa d
Dual Single Pole Relay Module
Reset Button
Y R B +24 W
24V GND PCELL D GN

J7 J8 J9 J10 J11
Line B Loa d
Pa t. Pe nd. 800.879.8585 www.wattstopper.com 14001r1
LC PS 120/277
LED lit when relay active.
Standard 3-Wire Momentary
GROUND GROUND
120/277V Po wer Supply for use with LC8 Lighting Control Panel
120/277V
Pa t. Pe nd. 800.879.8585 13999r 1 www.wattstoppe r.com
NEUTRA L
B -to- W Jumper RED
EM-24D2 Photocell Connection
Conduit
24 Pin to Power Supply Module
WHITE
2-Wire Maintained Contact
Y R B +24 W
To Relay Module LED

LCSP 2
A LED lit when relay is on. Line
To Relay Module
Connecting Occupancy Sensors

Input 1 Output 1 Input 2 Output 2
COMMON CONTROL 24VDC
Input 1 Output 1 Input 2
LED
LCDP 1
Line
Loa d
Loa d
Dual Single Po le Relay Module
DoublePo le Relay Module

Line B
Line
Energy Management Equipment 86WA
BLACK BLUE RED
Blue Red Black
Y R B +24 W
Energy Management Equipment 86WA
LED
Pa t. Pend. 800.879.8585 www.wattstopper.com 14001r1
Loa d
Output 2
Loa d
Occupancy Sensor or Indoor Photocell
11
To Relay Module or Power Supply Module
To Relay Module or Power Supply Module
Connecting an EM-24D2 Exterior Photocell

BLACK White RED RED
GND PCEL L GN D +24
Relay modules can be mixed and matched to congure the LC8 for a variety of single-pole and double-pole lighting control applications.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
MODEL LC8-120/277 LCSP-2 LCDP-1 DESCRIPTION Relay panel with power supply, 4 modules capacity Dual SPST Relay Module, two 20A relays Single DPST Relay Module, one 20A relay
AS-100-W CI-24 EM-24VD2
RELATED PRODUCTS Automated sweep switch (A=Almond, I=Ivory, W=White) Ceiling-mount occupancy sensor with SPDT isolated contact 24 VDC Exterior photocell with relay contact
PAGE 626 649
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
619
NEW! NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PROGRAMMABLE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL CX SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The CX Series Commercial Lighting Control Panels provide cost-effective lighting control for maximum energy savings. The LCD user interface is located in the door and utilizes simple and intuitive scrolling menus to program, check status or update the panel. The easy to use Pre-Programmed Scenarios Menu makes project commissioning simple and fast. The CX panels can save up to 50% in labor and materials when used in place of conventional time clock and contactor combinations.
FEATURES
Four relay panel sizes 4, 8, 16, and 24 relay spaces Five types of relays 20A/1P and 20A/2P, NO, NC (14K SCCR) and 30A/P latching (18K SCCR) Door mounted LCD user interface with keypad 365 day programming with 64 schedules Astronomical and real time clock Selectable pre-programmed scenarios Programmable inputs accept low voltage switches, photocells, or motion sensors Two low voltage dry contact output relays on 8 relay panel Program uploads via removable SD memory card
11
CX Series
LIGHITING CONTROLS
SPECIFICATIONS
120/208/240/277 VAC 6 standard, additional 1 input for each installed relay Program Port SD card User Interface Door mounted LCD graphical Time Range Real time clock and astronomical clock Time Schedules 64 schedules with date range, 32 groups Timing Functions 99 Holiday dates, 4 holiday schedules, recurring dates Open/ Close time, after hour sweeps Operating Temperature 32-112F (0-50C) Operating Humidity 10% - 90% Non-condensing Hinged lockable door Lockout
Relay CXR2N CXR2C Type Electrically Held, NO Electrically Held, NC Poles 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 Supply Voltage 120 277 120 277 120 277 347 480 480
Supply Voltage Digital Switch Inputs
Dimensions CX04, 08 CX16, 24 Enclosure Rating Mounting Approvals Weight CX04 CX08 CX16 CX24 Warranty
17"H x 14.5"W x 4"D (43 x 37 x 10 cm) 24"H x 20"W x 4"D (61 x 51 x 10 cm) NEMA 1 Surface ETL, UL File E174097 22 lb (10 kg) 28 lb (13 kg) 37 lb (17 kg) 40 lb (18 kg) 2 years
Contactor Tungsten 15A n/a 15A n/a 20A n/a n/a -
Contactor Ballast 20A 20A 20A 20A 30A 30A 20A 20A 20A
Contactor Motor 1 Hp 3/4 Hp 1 Hp 3/4 Hp 1 Hp n/a n/a 2 Hp 2 Hp
Short Circuit Current Rating 14K 14K 14K 14K 18K 18K 18K 14K 14K
CXR3L CXRTN CXRTC
Latching Electrically Held, NO Electrically Held, NC
620
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PROGRAMMABLE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL CX SERIES
WIRING
Power Wiring Power Wiring Wiring RelayRelay Wiring
BLACK COMMON WHITE 120 VAC
CXR-Relays
Internal Transformer
RED 208 VAC
ORANGE 240 VAC BROWN 277 VAC
24V CTRL COM LED
20AMP 1 POLE RELAY
LINE (120/277/347/480) LOAD
Model Relay Panels CX042S042NN CX042S043LN CX042S04TNN CX042S00SPN CX043S043LN CX043S00SPN CX082S082NM CX082S083LM CX082S08TNM CX082S00SPM CX083S083LM CX083S00SPM CX162S162NM CX242S242NM CXR Relays CXR2N CXR2C CXR3L CXRTN CXRTC 120/ 277 VAC 120/277 VAC 120/277/347 VAC 480 VAC 480 VAC 20A/1P NO Electrically Held 20A/1P NC Electrically Held 30A/1P Latching 20A/ 2P NO Electrically Held 20A/2P NC Electrically Held 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 8 8 8 8 16 24 4 4 4 0 4 0 8 8 8 0 8 0 16 24 120/208/240/277 VAC 120/208/240/277 VAC 120/208/240/277 VAC 120/208/240/277 VAC 120/277/347 VAC 120/277/347 VAC 120/208/240/277 VAC 120/208/240/277 VAC 120/208/240/277 VAC 120/208/240/277 VAC 120/277/347 VAC 120/277/347 VAC 120/208/240/277 VAC 120/208/240/277 VAC 20A/1P NO Relays Capacity Relays Installed Supply Voltage Relay Type
11
LIGHTING CONTROLS
30A/1P Latching 20A/2P NO CXR Field Installed relay 30A/1P Latching CXR Field Installed relay 20A/1P NO 30A/1P Latching 20A/2P NO CXR Field Installed relay 30A/1P Latching CXR Field Installed relay 20A/1P NO 20A/1P NO
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
621
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PROGRAMMABLE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL ILC APPRENTICE II
DESCRIPTION
The ILC Apprentice II (APII) is a programmable lighting control panel that can network up to 48 control points and up to 32 LightSync devices via RJ-45 ports. The onboard USB 2.0 port connected to a PC with the Apprentice II Pro software allows control of the panel via a PC. Add-on cards are easy to install and add capabilities such as Metasys N2, Modbus, LonWorks, BACnet, and DTMF telephone switching. The lighting control panel incorporates a user friendly interface, solid reliability, and the exibility to easily comply with energy codes.
NEW!
1 PILOT 1 ON 1 OFF 1 COM
Typical momentary switch with LED (Up to 4 switches)
FEATURES
Stand alone lighting control Ships complete, easy to install Pre-drilled mounting holes Low cost 365-day programmable lighting control panel Removable hinged locking door standard ILC LightSync switch and accessory ready Network up to 48 control points
11
Panel sizes to accomodate 4, 8, and 16 relay outputs Available with 4 to 48 hardwired inputs 48 programmable relay groups, presets, and timers Uses ILCs new cost-effective Softcross (zero crossing) relays All ON, All OFF push buttons for relay override Daylight Saving Time adjustment and astronomical clock standard Optional add-on input and communication modules
SPECIFICATIONS
120 or 277 10% VAC 50 to 60 Hz 4, 8, or 16 SPST Zero Cross, electrically held N.O. or N.C. Relay Life 10,000,000 cycles Contactor Ballast 20A at 120/277 VAC 20A at 120/277 VAC Resistive Load Switch Input 4 expandable Relay Terminals #1410AWG solid or stranded copper wire Communication Ports RJ-45 Communication Protocol BACnet/ MSTP, BACnet/ IP, LonWorks, N2,MODBUS, TCP/IP Operating Temperature 32 to 112F (0 to 50C) 10% to 90% non-condensing Operating Humidity Dimensions Supply Voltage Supply Frequency Relay Type APII 04 APII 08 APII 16 Enclosure Rating Additional Specications 12.0" H x 14.0" W x 4.0"D (30.5 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm) 16.0" H x 14.0" W x 4.0"D (40.6 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm) 24.0" H x 14.0" W x 4.0"D (61.0 x 35.6 x 10.2 cm) NEMA 1, surface mount Soft conguration with greater than 50-year EEPROM memory retention in absence of power Minimum 30-day clock retention UL, cUL, File #E141518 FCC approval for commercial use California Title 24 1 year
LIGHITING CONTROLS
Approvals Warranty
WIRING
Low Voltage
1 PILOT 1 ON 1 OFF 1 COM
Power Wiring
Power transformer termination detail
RED 12VAC
1b
1a
BROWN WHITE BLACK Primary USE FOR 277 VAC USE FOR 120 VAC
YELLOW
(Center Tap)
1 1a
RED 12VAC
1b
Secondary
Typical momentary switch with LED (Up to 4 switches)
Dedicated 120/277 VAC circuit Cap unused lead
622
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ADD-ON INTERFACE MODULES
MODEL APII APII 04 A SRINO
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PROGRAMMABLE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL ILC APPRENTICE II
APPLICATION ADD-ON INTERFACE MODULES (CARDS)

MB: Modbus interface module The Modbus interface add on module can easily be added to any Apprentice II lighting control panel to provide for integration to your Modbus communication and control system. N2: N2 Metasys interface module The Metasys N2 interface module can be integrated into a building automation system that includes the N2 communications protocol. The host system can then poll the status of the Apprentice II lighting control panel inputs and outputs and issue commands to the lighting control panels relay outputs. LON: LONWorks interface module The LONWorks interface add-on module can easily be added to any Apprentice II lighting control panel to provide integration with a LONWorks control system. TL: DTMF telephone interface module The DTMF telephone add-on module provides voice prompted DTMF touch-tone telephone control and monitoring. Through the use of DTMF control signals the system user can command relays or groups of relays ON or OFF or activate preset scenes, from any touch-tone telephone, including cellular phones. BNMSTP/BNIP: BACnet interface module The Apprentice II BACnet interface add-on module can easily be added to any Apprentice II lighting control panel to provide integration with a BACnet control system. TCPIP: TCP/IP Interface The TCP/IP module gives the controller the ability to have an IP address on a 10/100Base-T Ethernet network. Connect to the panels, monitor, and program using the Apprentice II Pro software or connect from anywhere on the local are network or from the wide area network. DEVICE NETWORK
Up to 48 control points per network CAT-5 Up to 32 LightSync addressable network devices
Expansion panel
INTELLIGENT LIGHTING CONTROLS, INC. MINNEAPOLIS, MN 800 922 8004 I N T E L L I G E N T L I G H T I N G C O N T R O L S, I N C. MINNEAPOLIS, MN 800 922 8004 INTELLIGENT LIGHTING CONTROLS, INC. MINNEAPOLIS, MN 800 922 8004
Master
to hard-wired switch inputs
Network Note: Communication network is 3000 FT max. For networks greater than, 3000 FT add PSR.
11
DESCRIPTION ILC Apprentice II Lighting Control Panel* ENCLOSURE TYPE / SIZE 04 Four relays 08 Eight relays (Accepts one additional IB-4 interface board) 16 Sixteen relays (Accepts three additional IB-4 interface boards) PANEL TYPE A Stand alone master panel with display and keypad X Expansion panel (no display or keypad). RELAY TYPE SR1NO Normally open (04-4 relays, 08-8 relays, 16-16 relays)** SR1NC Normally closed (04-4 relays, 08-8 relays, 16-16 relays)** Example: APII-04A-SR1NO ILC Apprentice II standard controller in a 04 enclosure type with4 N.O. relays.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
* All panels ship with one IB-4 input board installed. One additional IB-4 can be added to the 08 enclosure type for a total of 8 inputs, and three additional IB-4 can be added to the16 enclosure type for a total of 16 inputs. **No mixing of NO vs NC
93000378 APII-BNIP APII-BNMSTP APII-LON APII-MB APII-N2 APII-TL APIITCP/IP IB-4 PSR SR1-NC SR1-NO March 2014
ACCESSORIES Lightsync Addressable Photocell APII BACnet /IP interface card APII BACnet/MSTP interface card APII LONWorks interface card APII MODBUS interface card APII Metasys N2 protocol interface card APII Telephone override touch and voice APII TCPIP Interface card APII 4 Input expansion board Power Source Repeater for network's greater than 3000 ft APII Lighting panel relay (NC) APII Lighting panel relay (NO)
PAGE 622 622 622 622 622 622
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
623
LIGHTING CONTROLS
KELE OCCUPANCY SENSOR LX-24
DESCRIPTION
The Model LX-24 is a ceiling-mount passive infrared (PIR) occupancy sensor specically designed to interface with building automation systems through an internal isolated relay. A user-adjustable time delay (30 seconds to 30 minutes) on deactivation may be programmed through DIP switches to prevent unnecessary cycling. The Model LX-24 includes two levels of sensitivity selectable through DIP switches.
NEW!
LX-24
FEATURES
Passive infrared technology Adjustable time delay Adjustable sensitivity Isolated relay for use with BAS and other control systems 360-degree coverage up to 1200 ft2 Red LED to indicate occupancy detection Five-year warranty
OPERATION
The Model LX-24 is powered by 24 VDC, and uses PIR technology to detect occupancy. When the unit senses the difference between infrared emissions from a human body and the background space, detection occurs. The Model LX-24 transfers an SPDT contact set, when occupancy is detected. The contacts return to their normal state after a user-selectable time delay once the space is unoccupied.
11
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VDC, 10%, 37mA 1A @ 24 VDC, 24 VAC 360 degrees up to 1200 ft2 (111.48m2) Time Delay Adjust Digital (DIP switch setting) for 30 seconds, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, or 30 minutes Operating Temperature 32 to 98F (0 to 36C) Mounting 2.75" to 3" hole in ceiling Color White Dimensions 3.3" dia x 2.2" deep (8.5 x 5.6 cm), extends approx. 0.36" (0.91 cm) from ceiling Weight 1.0 lb (0.46 kg) 5 years Warranty
LIGHITING CONTROLS
Supply Voltage Contact Rating Coverage Pattern
WIRING
Cable Wires 1-(red) 2-(green) 3-(orange) 4-(yellow) 5-(black)
DIP Switch Control for Time Delay, Sensitivity, and Override LED
24 VDC Supply
Isolated Relay Contacts
Normally Closed Contact Common Normally Open Contact 24 VDC Return
ON 1 2 3 4
DIP SWITCH # TIME DELAYS 30 sec 10 min. 20 min. 30 min.
1 X X O O
2 X O X O
MODEL LX-24 DESCRIPTION 24 VDC ceiling-mount occupancy sensor with SPDT isolated contact
SENSITIVITY Minimum Maximum OVERRIDE Normal Override

= factory setting
O X O X X=on O=off
624
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

LIGHTING CONTROLS
KELE OCCUPANCY SENSORS LX-100
The Model LX-100 Wall-/Corner-Mount passive infrared (PIR) occupancy sensor controls lighting and HVAC equipment. This device can control equipment directly through a BAS with the SPDT isolated relay built into the sensors. Passive infrared technology Advanced PIR technology Adjustable time delay Adjustable unit sensitivity Contains isolated relay for use with BAS and other control systems LED indicator
LX-100
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VDC 20 mA 1A @ 24 VDC, 1/2A @ 120 VAC, SPDT Ambient Light From 2.5 to 430 fc Coverage Pattern See patterns Time Delay Adjust Digital (DIP switch setting) from 30 seconds to 30 minutes Operating Temperature 32 to 98F (0 to 36C) Dimensions 3.38"L x 3.35"W x 2.05"D (8.6 x 8.5 x 5.2 cm) Weight 1.0 lb (0.46 kg) 5 years Warranty Supply Voltage Contact Rating
OPERATION
The LX-100 uses Passive infrared technology to detect occupancy. Detection occurs when the unit senses the difference between infrared emissions from a human body and the background space. Operation occurs by sending a lowvoltage signal and energizing the SPDT relay when a person enters the controlled area. LX-100 has an adjustable time delay for turning the lights off when no occupancy is detected, and adjustable sensitivity setting. LX-100 contains an adjustable light-level sensor for controlling lighting based on ambient light level. It is wired differently than the occupancyonly output, and does not work with the SPDT-isolated relay.
11
COVERAGE PATTERNS
ft (m)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
18 (5.49) 10 (3.05) 5 14 28 48 (1.52) (4.27) (8.53) (14.63) Dense Wide Angle (Standard)
Coverages shown are maxium and represent coverage for half-step walking motion. For building spaces with lower levels of activity or with obstacles and barriers, coverage size may vary.
WIRING
Shown with DCP 1.5W Power Supply (Optional) Building Automation System
N.C. Contact Common N.O. Contact Control Output 24 VDC Control Return Light Level Output 24 VDC +24 VDC Common Cable Wires
1-(brown) 2-(red) 3-(orange) 4-(yellow) 5-(green) 6-(blue) 7-(violet) 8-(gray)
+To Other Sensors
24 VAC IN
Not Used
LX-100
For Digital Input to BAS
MODEL LX-100 DCP-1.5-W March 2014 DESCRIPTION Dense wide-angle sensor with mounting bracket RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
625
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WATTSTOPPER OCCUPANCY SENSOR CI-24
DESCRIPTION
The CI-24 is a ceiling-mount passive infrared occupancy sensor specically designed to interface with Building Automation Systems through an internal isolated relay. A user-adjustable time delay (30 seconds to 30 minutes) on deactivation may be programmed through DIP switches to prevent unnecessary cycling. The CI-24 includes a built-in override switch. Two levels of sensitivity are also selectable through DIP switches. The four-level patented Fresnel lens allows the CI-24 to cover up to 1200 ft2 (111.48 m2).
NEW!
CI-24
FEATURES
Advanced PIR technology Adjustable time delay Adjustable sensitivity Contains isolated relay for use with BAS and other control systems Patented Fresnel lens 360 coverage up to 1200 ft2 (111.48m2) Red LED indicates occupancy detection Five-year warranty Manual override switch
OPERATION
Powered by 24 VAC/VDC, the Model CI-24 uses advanced PIR technology to detect occupancy. Detection occurs when the unit senses the difference between infrared emissions from a human body and the background space. When occupancy is detected, the Model CI-24 transfers an SPDT contact set. The contacts return to their normal state after a user-selectable time delay once the space is unoccupied.
11
LIGHITING CONTROLS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Contact Rating Coverage Pattern Time Delay Adjust 24 VAC/DC 10% 37 mA 1A @ 24 VAC/DC, 1/2A @ 120 VAC 360 degrees up to 1200 ft2 (111.48 m2)
WIRING
Cable Wires 1-(red) 2-(green) 3-(orange) 4-(yellow) 5-(black)
DIP Switch Control for Time Delay, Sensitivity, and Override LED
24 VAC/VDC Supply
Isolated Relay Contacts
Digital (DIP switch setting) for 30 seconds, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, or 30 minutes Operating Temperature 32 to 98F (0 to 36C) Mounting 2.75" to 3" hole in ceiling Color White Dimensions 3.3" dia x 2.2" deep (8.5 x 5.6 cm), protrudes approximately 0.4 from ceiling surface Approvals cUL listed UL Listed le E101196 Weight 1.0 lb (0.46 kg)
Normally Closed Contact Common Normally Open Contact 24 Return
ON 1 2 3 4
DIP SWITCH # TIME DELAYS 30 sec 10 min. 20 min. 30 min. SENSITIVITY Minimum Maximum OVERRIDE Normal Override
1 X X O O
2 X O X O
MODEL CI-24 DESCRIPTION Ceiling-mount occupancy sensor with SPDT isolated contact
O X O X X=on O=off
= factory setting
Note: Exceeding voltage rating may damage sensor.
626
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

LIGHTING CONTROLS
WATTSTOPPER OCCUPANCY SENSOR CI-200, CX-100
The CX-100 wall-/corner-mount and CI-200 ceiling mount devices are full-featured passive infrared occupancy sensors that control lighting and HVAC equipment. Both units can control equipment directly through a power pack or through a BAS with the SPDT isolated relay built into the sensors. Both models have adjustable sensitivity and time delays.
Advanced PIR technology Adjustable time delay Adjustable unit sensitivity Contains isolated relay for use with BAS and other control systems Fresnel lens with choice of 3 coverage patterns (CX-100) 360 coverage (CI-200) LED indicator 5-year warranty
CI-200
CX-100
11
OPERATION
Models CX-100 and CI-200 use advanced PIR technology to detect occupancy. Detection occurs when the units sense the difference between infrared emissions from a human body and the background space. They are powered by 24 VDC either from a power pack or separate 24 VDC power supply. Both units operate by sending a low-voltage signal to the power pack and energizing the SPDT relay when a person enters the controlled area. Both units have an adjustable time delay for turning the lights off when no occupancy is detected, and both have an adjustable sensitivity setting. Each unit contains an adjustable light-level sensor for controlling lighting based on ambient light level. This feature is wired differently than the occupancy-only output, and does not work with the SPDT-isolated relay.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VDC, 26 mA 24 VDC, 20 mA 1A @ 24 VDC, 1/2A @ 120 VAC, SPDT Ambient Light From 2.5 to 430 fc See patterns Coverage Pattern Time Delay Adjust Digital (DIP switch setting) from 30 sec to 30 min Operating Temperature 32 to 98F (0 to 36C) Supply Voltage CI200 CX100 Contact Rating Dimensions CX-100 CI-200 Approvals Weight Warranty 3.38"L x 3.35"W x 2.05"D (8.6 x 8.5 x 5.2 cm) 3.30" Dia. x 2.2" D (8.5 x 5.6 cm), extends approximately 0.36" from ceiling UL and cUL listed File E101196 1.0 lb (0.46 kg) 5 years
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
627
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WATTSTOPPER OCCUPANCY SENSOR CI-200, CX-100
COVERAGE PATTERNS
44 (13.4)
Coverage shown is maxium and represents coverage for half-step walking motion. Under ideal conditions, with no barriers or obstacles, coverage can reach up to 1200 ft2 for half-step walking motion and up to 500 ft2 for hand motion (typical desktop level of activity). 8 (2.44)
22 3 22 13 13 7 (6.71) (3.96)(2.13) (0.91) (3.96) (6.71) 3 7 (0.91) (2.13) 0 (0.31)
NEW!
5 (1.52) 0 (0.31) 30 (9.14)
ft (m)
CI-200
ft (m)
18 (5.49)
16 (4.88)
Aisle Way
10 ft
10 (3.05) 5 14 28 48 (1.52) (4.27) (8.53) (14.63) Dense Wide Angle (Standard) 14 5 16 50 (1.52)(4.27)(4.88) (15.24) Long Range 80 90 (24.38) (27.43)
15 (4.57) 67 (20.42)
67 21 0 21 38 38 6 15(20.42) 25 ft 50 ft (11.58) (6.40) (0.31) (6.40) (11.58) Extra Wide Angle (CI-100-2) 10 10 33.5 33.5 (10.21) (3.05) (3.05) (10.21)
11
Coverages shown are maxium and represent coverage for half-step walking motion. For building spaces with lower levels of activity or with obstacles and barriers, coverage size may vary.
CX-100
WIRING
LIGHITING CONTROLS
24 VDC Power Input
N.C. Contact Common N.O. Contact Control Output 24 VDC Control Return Light Level Output 24 VDC +24 VDC Common
Cable Wires
1-(brown) 2-(red) 3-(orange) 4-(yellow) 5-(green) 6-(blue) 7-(purple) 8-(gray)
CX-100 or CI-200
Note: See power pack in this section for switching lighting loads or other line voltage loads For Digital Input to BAS
MODEL CI-200 CI-200-1 CX-100 CX-100-1 CX-100-3 B347-P BZ-50 DCP-1.5-W LMLS-MB1 S-120/277/347-E DESCRIPTION Ceiling-mount sensor Long-range sensor with mounting bracket * Special order Dense wide-angle sensor with mounting bracket Long-range sensor with mounting bracket * Special order Aisle-way sensor with mounting bracket * Special order RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 347 VAC to 24 VDC power pack 120-277 VAC to 24 VDC power pack 641 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Photo sensor mounting bracket J box Slave pack 64
628
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SmartSet adjusts sensitivity and time delay Walk-through mode turns lights off Ultrasonic diffusion technology LED occupancy indication Pluggable terminal wiring
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WATTSTOPPER DUAL-TECHNOLOGY OCCUPANCY AND LIGHT SENSOR DT-300 SERIES
The low-prole DT-300 dual-technology occupancy sensor with light level sensor combines the benets of passive infrared (PIR) and ultrasonic technologies. The sensor mounts in the ceiling with a at, unobtrusive appearance and provides 360 degrees of coverage. Using SmartSet technology, the DT-300 requires no adjustment at installation. SmartSet continuously monitors the controlled space to identify usage patterns. Using this information, it automatically adjusts the time delay and sensitivity settings for optimal performance and energy efciency. The sensor assigns short delays (as low as 5 minutes) for times when the space is usually vacant, and longer delays (up to 30 minutes) for busier times. The DT-305 is a lower cost version of the DT-300 without isolated relay or light level sensor. DT-300
11
OPERATION
In normal operation, the DT-300 turns lighting on when both the PIR and ultrasonic technologies detect occupancy.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
It can also work with a low voltage switch for manual-on operation. PIR technology senses the difference between infrared energy from a human body in motion and the background space. Ultrasonic technology uses the Doppler principle and high frequency (40 KHz) ultrasound to sense motion. Once lighting is on, detection by either technology holds lighting on. When no occupancy is detected for the length of the time delay, lighting turns off. The DT-300 can also be congured so that one or both technologies are needed to turn lighting on or hold lighting on.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage DT300 DT305 Switch Input Relay Output DT300 Ambient Light DT300 24 VDC/VAC 10% 43 mA 24 VDC/VAC 10% 35 mA Low voltage, momentary for manual ON or OFF operation Isolated SPDT contacts rated for 1A @ 30 VAC/VDC SmartSet (automatic), xed (5, 10,15, 20, or 30 minutes), walkthrough, test-mode Ultrasonic Frequency 40kHz Ceiling tile 4" square junction box Mounting with double gang mud ring Dimensions 4.50" x 1.02"D (114.3mm x 25.9mm) Approvals UL and CUL listed le E101196 Weight 1.0 lb (0.46 kg) Warranty 5 years Time Delay Adjust
10 to 300 footcandles (108 to 3230 lux) Coverage Pattern Up to 1000 ft2 (92.9 m2) Sensitivity Adjustment SmartSet (automatic) or reduced sensitivity (for PIR sensitivity); ultrasonic sensitivity is variable with trimpot
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
629
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WIRING
Occupancy and Light Level Controlled Lighting
(white) Neutral (red) Line N Hot (white) (black) (black) (blue) Power Pack (red) Load Switch Lighting load
WATTSTOPPER DUAL-TECHNOLOGY OCCUPANCY AND LIGHT SENSOR DT-300 SERIES

DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Trigger
Isolated relay outputs Common Normally open contact Normally closed contact Relay common N.O. N.C.
Auxiliary relay pack
(blue) Momentary Switch (black)
Light level (24VDC) out Control (24VDC) out Manual switch +24V (in) Common DT-300 Terminals
NEW!
Initial Occupancy Maintain Occupancy
Both Either Either Either PIR Either Both PIR Both PIR Ultra Ultra Man. Both
Standard Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Option 6 Option 7
Occupancy Logic
(red)
Man. Either Either(30) Both(30)
= Factory Setting = ON = OFF
Switch#
Hot
OFF switch (red) load
Light level lighting load
DT300
Occupancy
(white) Neutral (red) Line N Hot (white) (black)
(black) (blue)
Logic 1 2 3 Standard Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Option 6 Option 7
Time Delay 4 5 6
5 sec/SmartSet 5 min 10 min 10 min 15 min 15 min 20 min 30 min
= walk-through mode
Power pack (red) Load Switch
Lighting load
11
Control (24VDC) out Momentary switch Manual switch +24V (in) Common DT-305 Terminals
(red)
Occupancy
LEDs 7 Disabled Enabled PIR Sensitivity 8 Minimum Maximum/SmartSet
DT305
LIGHITING CONTROLS
Notes: Exceeding voltage rating may damage sensor. Shown with BZ-50 power pack (optional).
COVERAGE
MOUNTING
4" Octagonal J-Box (at least 1.5" deep) Ceiling Ceiling
Depluggable terminal
Re-trigger (seconds duration)

Either(5) Either(5) Either(5) Both(5) PIR(5) Ultra(5)
Depluggable terminal Spring clips (2) Rear housing Front cover
PIR Coverage Ultrasonic Coverage 40' x 40' (12m x 12m)
44' (13.4m)
Rear Housing Screws Front Cover
J-Box Mount
Ceiling Mount
MODEL DT-300 DT-305 DESCRIPTION Dual technology occupancy sensor with isolated relay and light level actuation Dual technology occupancy sensor with 24 VDC control output only (no light level or relay)
630
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Relay Type 24 volt models 120 volt models Contactor Ballast Relay Output Coverage Pattern
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WATTSTOPPER WALL SWITCH SENSORS DW, PW, AND UW
PW SERIES Passive Infrared PIR technology senses occupancy by detecting the difference between heat emitted from the human body in motion and the background space. UW SERIES Passive Ultrasonic Ultrasonic detection works by transmitting ultrasonic sound waves throughout an area and measuring the speed at which they return. Occupant movement changes the frequency at which these sound waves return, resulting in a Doppler shift and occupancy detection.
DW SERIES Dual Technology (Infrared and Ultrasonic) The Dual Technology combines the best of both PIR and ultrasonic technologies. While PIR and ultrasonic sensors provide optimal control for many spaces, some applications pose difculty for single technology products. Dual Technology sensors ensure maximum sensitivity and coverage in tough applications for optimal reliability and energy savings.
PW-100 PW-100-24
UW-100, UW-100-24 DW-100, DW-100-24
Detection Signature Processing eliminates false triggers and provides immunity to RFI and EMI Zero-crossing technology relay Vandal resistant lens Choice of Auto-ON or Manual-ON operation SmartSet automatically adjusts time delay and sensitivity setting from occupants patterns Selectable walk-through mode Selectable test mode Selectable audible and/or visual alerts LED occupancy indication Built-in light level sensing Override mode
11
LIGHTING CONTROLS
UW-200 DW-200
PW-200
18-24 VDC, 35 mA 24 VAC 10% 35 mA 120 VAC 10% 50/60 Hz 240/277 10% VAC 50/60 Hz SPDT SPST 800 watt @ 120 VAC, 1200 watt @ 277 VAC (120 volt models only) 1A @ 30 VDC/VAC (24 volt models only) PIR major motion 35' x 30' PIR minor motion 20' x 15' Ultrasonic major motion 20' x20' Ultrasonic minor motion 15' x15', PIR Major motion 35' x 30', minor motion 20' X 15', Ultrasonic Major motion 20' x 20' minor motion 15' x 15'
Sensitivity Adjustment PIR (high/low), Ultrasonic (fully variable), PIR (high/low), Ultrasonic (fully variable) Time Delay Adjust SmartSet (automatic), xed (5, 15 or 30 minutes), walk-through, testmode Dimensions 2.73"L x 1.76"W x 1.83"D (6.9 x 4.5 x 4.7 cm) Approvals UL Listed, File E101196 Weight 0.41 lb (0.19 kg) Warranty 5 years
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
631
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WATTSTOPPER WALL SWITCH SENSORS DW, PW, AND UW
WIRING
Neutral Load Neutral
Ground green/yellow Ground green
Neutral
white
Ground green
+24 VAC Common Control outputs
red black blue
Line
black
red
Line
black
PW-100 Wiring
Neutral
Neutral
NEW!
Load
24 VAC Wiring Only
red
Isolated relay outputs
UW-100 and DW-100 Wiring
Normally closed contact Common Normally open contact Not used
24 VDC Wiring Only

Line 1 black
Line
black blue red Primary load
red
Line 2
blue
Primary load
white (Neutral) red (Line) Lighting load red (Load)
Ground green/yellow
Ground green/yellow
brown Secondary load
Ground
green
Ground green
Neutral Neutral white
Neutral
white
+24 VDC Common Control outputs
red black blue
PW-200 Wiring (Bi-Level)
PW-200 Wiring (Two Circuit)
white Neutral black Hot
Power pack
Isolated relay outputs
Line 1 Line black blue red Primary load Line 2
white blue
red
Primary load
Normally closed contact Common Normally open contact Not used
11
COVERAGE
Neutral
white
Neutral white Ground green
Ground green
UW-200, DW-200 Wiring (Bi-Level)
UW-200, DW-200 Wiring (Two Circuit)

white
PW-100-24, UW-100-24 and DW-100-24 Wiring Note: 24 volt units available with one relay only
Neutral
Major motion
Major motion Minor motion
LIGHITING CONTROLS
Minor motion
PIR Coverage
PIR Coverage 35' (10.6m)
Ultrasonic Coverage

Ultrasonic Coverage
35' (10.6m)
20' (6.1m)
20' (6.1m)
20' (6.1m) 15' (4.5m)
20' (6.1m) 15' (4.5m)
7.5' 15' (2.2m) (4.5m) 15' (4.5m)
7.5' (2.2m)
7.5' (2.2m) 10' (3.0m)
7.5' (2.2m) 10' (3.0m)
4' (1.2m) 0 20' (6.1m) 35' (10.6m)
4' (1.2m) 0 20' (6.1m) 35' (10.6m)
* For best performance, Watt Stopper/Legrand recommends using this sensor in spaces no larger than 15' x 15'
Passive Ultrasonic
Passive Infrared
Dual Technology (Infrared & Ultrasonic)
MODEL PW UW DW DESCRIPTION Passive Infrared Passive Ultrasonic Dual Technology (Infrared and Ultrasonic) POWER AND NUMBER OF RELAYS 100 One relay 120/230/277 VAC power 100-24 One relay 24 VAC/VDC power 200 Two relays 120/230/277 VAC power COLOR X-P W = white, LA = light almond, G = grey, B = black
UW
200
LA-P Example: UW-200-LA-P = Passive ultrasonic, two relays, light almond

with wall plate
ACCESSORIES BZ-50 120-277 VAC TO 24 VDC POWER PACK
632
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

LIGHTING CONTROLS
SENSOR SWITCH PIR AND PDT CEILING MOUNT OCCUPANCY SENSORS CM SERIES
The CM Series occupancy sensor offers amazing peformance and sensitivity to small motions. There are variety of model options to t the applcation needs. The CM 9 models offers standard range PIR sensor for smaller rooms and the CM 10 models provide extended range for larger spaces. The CM PDT models offers dual technolgoy PIR with Microphonics for excellent detection. The CMR line voltage models are economical solution for automatic lighting control with no power pack needed. The CM series is light weight and ceiling mounted with 360 degree coverage pattern. 100% digital PIR detection with excellent RF immunity Push-button programmable User adjustable time delays (30 sec to 20 min) No eld calibration or sensitivity adjustments required Convenient test mode 100 hr lamp burn-in timer Green LED indicator
CM9
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage CM CMR Supply Current CMx Frequency Motor Load CMRx Dimming Load Coverage CMx-9 CMx-PDT-9 CMx-10 CMx-PDT-10 12-24 VAC/VDC 800/1200/ 1500 W @ 120/277/347 VAC 4mA, 16mA w/R option 50/60 Hz 1/4 HP Sinks <20mA 500 sq. ft 1000 sq. ft 2000 sq. ft. 2500 sq. ft, 360 Passive Infrared (PIR) Dual Technology (PIR and Microphonics) Operating Temperature 14 to 160F (-10 to 71C) Operating Humidity 20-90% non-condensing Mounting Ceiling mount Dimensions 4.55" (11.56 cm), 1.55" (3.94 cm) deep Approvals UL, cUL (E167435) Weight 0.38 lb (0.17 kg) Warranty 5 year limited Coverage Pattern Sensor Type CMx CMx-PDT
11
LIGHTING CONTROLS
INSTALLATION
PUSH BUTTON FOR TIMER PROGRAMMING
PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS 1. Press button twice for function 2, occupancy time delay. 2. LED will ash back the selected function's current setting (5 ashes for 10 minutes time delay). 3. Press button the number of times indicated in Occupancy Time Delay table below to change. 4. To exit the current setting, wait for LED sh dequence to repeat 3 times then return to step 1.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
633
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WIRING
STANDARD WIRING
- Power Input (12-24 VAC/VDC) RED BLACK - Common WHITE - Occupancy State (high VDC for occupied)
SENSOR SWITCH PIR AND PDT CEILING MOUNT OCCUPANCY SENSORS CM SERIES
PHOTOCELL/DIMMING OPTIONS
BLUE - Direct output to power pack for providing photocell control and/or secondary dim time out. Output is high VDC with occupancy & low light. Output also held high during secondary dim time out. For multi-level control, use two power packs and connect White wire to primary load and Blue to daylight load. VIOLET w/ WHITE STRIPE - Connect to 0-10 VDC control wire (typically Violet) from 0-10 VDC dimmable ballast GRAY from BALLAST - Connect to sensor Black wire
NEW!
RED WHT BLK
POWER PACK
(PP20)
(-)
VIO w/ WHT STRIPE (+)
Photocell / Dimming Options
Relay Option
CM MODEL
11
SENSORS IN PARALLEL Sensors may be wired in parallel; however, the maximum load ratings stay the same. Do not wire sensors with Photocell and dimming option in parallel.
HOT
BLK BLK WHT
BLK BLK WHT
BLK BLK WHT
SWITCH LOAD
LIGHITING CONTROLS
VIO (+)
LOAD N
GRY (-)
Dimming Options
CMR MODEL
MODEL CM-10 CM-9 CM-PDT-10 CM-PDT-9 CMR-10 CMR-9 CMR-PDT-10 CMR-PDT-9 DESCRIPTION Extended Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Low Voltage, PIR Standard Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Low Voltage, PIR Extended Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Low Voltage, PDT Standard Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Low Voltage, PDT Extended Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Line Voltage, PIR Standard Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Line Voltage, PIR Extended Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Line Voltage, PDT Standard Range 360 Degree Sensor-Ceiling Mount, Line Voltage, PDT
Note: Call Kele for models with low voltage relay, photocell, dimming, and low temperature options availabilty.
PP20
RELATED PRODUCTS Power Pack, 120/277 VAC
634
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage 800/1200/1500 W @ 120/277/347 VAC Frequency 50/60 Hz 1/4 HP,0-10VDC Motor Load Dimming load Sinks <20mA Coverage CMRB-50 7854 sq. ft. CMRB-6 1257 sq. ft Coverage Pattern 360 Sensor Type PIR, line voltage
LIGHTING CONTROLS
SENSOR SWITCH HIGH BAY LINE VOLTAGE OCCUPANCY SENSORS CMRB SERIES
The CMRB Series is xture mounted, high bay, line voltage occupancy sensor. The CMRB 6 provides Passive Infrared (PIR) occupancy detection over a 15-30 ft (4.57-9.1m) radial coverage pattern that overlaps the areas lit by a typical high bay xture when mounted at 15 to 45 ft (4.57 to 13.72m) heights. The CMRB 50 Series High Bay Aisleway occupancy sensor provides bi-directional detection extending 50 ft (15.24m) in either direction when mounted at height of 40 ft (12.19m). CMRB-50 CMRB-6
CMRB-6 Coverage Pattern (High View)
0m 0 ft
Self-contained relay, no power pack needed No minimum load requirements Compatible w/electronic & magnetic ballasts, CFLs, LED, & incandescents Interchangeable hot & load wires, impossible to wire backwards Push-button programmable Non-volatile settings memory Adjustable time delays No eld calibration or sensitivity adjustments required Convenient test mode 100 hr lamp burn-in timer Green LED indicator
COVERAGE PATTERNS
CMRB-50 Coverage Pattern (Side View)
0 ft 0 m 10 3 20 6
4.6 15
30 9.1 40 12.2 15.2 50 7.6 25 0m 0 ft 7.6 25 15.2 50

9.1 30
13.7 9.1 30 6 20 3 10 0m 3 0 ft 10 6 20 9.1 30
45
11
Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Mounting Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty
14 to 160F (-10 to 71C) 20-90% non-condensing Fixture, 1/2" knockout 3.63"H x 3.63"W x 1.50"D (9.22 x 9.22 x 3.81 cm) UL, cUL (E167435) 0.38 lb (0.17 kg) 5 year limited
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WIRING
Snap Plate
BLK BLK WHT VIO (+) GRY (-)
Blank Plate
[D] Dimming Option
FB3 Bracket
Main Bracket Housing
MODEL DESCRIPTION CMRB-50 High Bay Aisleway Sensor-Fixture Mount Line Voltage, PIR CMRB-50-KIT High Bay Aisleway Sensor-Fixture Mount Line Voltage, BRACKET CMRB-6 High Bay 360 Sensor-Fixture Mount, Line Voltage, PIR CMRB-6-KIT High Bay 360 Sensor-Fixture Mount, Line Voltage, BRACKET Note: Call Kele for models with low voltage relay, photocell, dimming, and low temperature options availability. FB3 March 2014 ACCESSORIES Snap-in Fixture Mount Bracket
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
635
LIGHTING CONTROLS
SENSOR SWITCH PIR WALL SWITCH SENSORS SSD SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SSD Series is a residential grade wall switch occupancy sensor that utilizes Passive Infrared detection. Unlike other wall switch sensors, it does not require a neutral connection, nor is there a minimum load requirement.
FEATURES
PIR occupancy detection No minimum load required Switches incandescent, CFL, LED, and electronic & magnetic uorescent lighting Interchangeable hot & load wires - impossible to wire backwards No neutral connection required Green LED indicator
NEW!
SSD-VA-120 WIRING
Note: Connection to Ground required for sensor to function
INSTALLATION
PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS FOR TIME DELAY 1. Press and hold button until LED ashes rapidly 2. Enter the Time Delay function by pressing button twice 3. The number of LED ashes indicates current setting (ve ashes for 10 minutes) 4. Press button the number of times according to the table below to change 5. Press and hold button until LED ashes rapidly then release button 6. Press button twice to conrm. LED will ash twice indicating acceptance. Time Delay Settings
Function Number 2 Function Name Time Delay
11
LIGHITING CONTROLS
Settings (*indicates default setting)
2 - 2.5 min 3 - 5 min
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 800 W @ 120 VAC Frequency 60 Hz Motor Load 1/4 HP Coverage 7584 sq. ft. Coverage Pattern 180 Time Range 30 seconds to 20 minutes Sensor Type PIR, line voltage 9 programmable settings Time Delay Adjust Operating Temperature 14 to 160F (-10 to 71C) Operating Humidity Mounting Color Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty 20-90% non-condsensing Wall, Single Gang Switch Box, 30-48 in (76.2-121.9 cm) Height Ivory, White 4.2"H x 1.8"W x 1.5"D (10.67 x 4.57 x 3.81 cm) UL,cUL(E253721) 0.32 lb (0.15 kg) 5 year limited
MODEL DESCRIPTION SSD-120-IV Wall Switch Sensor-PIR, 120V, Ivory SSD-120-WH Wall Switch Sensor-PIR, 120V, White SSD-SA-120 IV Wall Switch Sensor-PIR, 1 Sw/Man On, 120V, Ivory SSD-SA-120 WH Wall Switch Sensor-PIR, 1 Sw/Man On, 120V, White SSD-VA-120 IV Wall Switch Sensor-PIR, 120V, Vacancy, Ivory SSD-VA-120 WH Wall Switch Sensor-PIR, 120V, Vacancy, White Wall Plate not included
March 2014 636
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

LIGHTING CONTROLS
SENSOR SWITCH PIR AND PDT WALL SWITCH SENSORS WSD SERIES
The WSD Series is a stylish, easy to install, and simple to use Wall Switch Decorator style Passive Infrared (PIR) sensor. It is ideal for private ofces, copy rooms, closets, or any small enclosed space without obstructions. For rooms with obstructions, the Dual Technology WSD PDT Series sensor is recommended.The WSD family sensors have a patent-pending wiring method that enables them to function either with or without a neutral connection.
WSD WIRING
SINGLE RELAY
WSD-2P
100% digital PIR detection - excellent RF immunity Self-grounding mounting strap Green LED status indicator Device accommodates powering over ground or neutral connection Line power and load wires are interchangeable impossible to wire backwards Compatible w/ LEDs, electronic & magnetic ballasts, CFLs, & incandescents Integrated LampMaximizer minimum on time provides increased uorescent lamp life - disabled by default Includes matching wall plate
DUAL RELAY
N * H GND
N * H GND
BLK BLK
LOAD 1
LOAD 2
BLU BLU
BLK BLK
LOAD 1
WIRE COLOR KEY

120/277 VAC WIRING BLACK - Line 1 Input BLACK - Load 1 Output BLUE - Line 2 Input BLUE - Load 2 Output
} }
BLACK wires can be reversed BLUE wires can be reversed
Notes: - Unit will draw power from either line connection. - Both poles line connection must be same phase.
347 VAC WIRING (-347 Option) Red wires replace Black wires.
*WIRING TO NEUTRAL
Remove jumper between Neutral and Ground
11
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency Motor Load Coverage WSD WSD-PDT Coverage Pattern Time Range Time Delay Adjust Sensor Type WSD 120/277/347 VAC @800/1200/1500 W 50/60 Hz 1/4 HP 7854 sq. ft. 9425 sq. ft. 180 30 seconds to 30 minutes 10 programmable settings Passive Infrared (PIR) WSD-PDT Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Mounting Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty Dual Technology (PIR and Microphonics) 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) 20-75% non-condensing Wall, Single Gang Switch Box, 30-48 in (76.2-121.9 cm) Height 1.68"W x 2.74"H x 1.63"D (4.27 x 6.96 x 4.14 cm) UL, cUL (E253721) 0.32 lb (0.15 kg) 5 year limited
LIGHTING CONTROLS
MODEL WSD WSD-2P WSD-PDT WSD-PDT-2P DESCRIPTION
Decorator Style wall switch with passive infrared (PIR) sensor Decorator Style wall switch with passive infrared (PIR) sensor, dual relay Decorator Style wall switch with dual technology sensors (PIR and Microphonics) Decorator Style wall switch with dual technology sensors (PIR and Microphonics), dual relay OPERATING MODES (reprogrammable via push-button except for VA version models) Auto On (default) or vacancy for WSD and WSD-PDT models; (blank) Pole 1- Auto on, Pole 2- Vacancy (default) for WSD-2P and WSD-PDT-2P models
SA VA 2SA
Vacancy (manual on, default) or Auto On for WSD and WSD-PDT models Vacancy (manual on) only for WSD and WSD-PDT models Both poles vacancy (default), for WSD-2P and WSD-PDT-2P models COLOR FINISH AL Light Almond BK Black GY Gray IV Ivory WH White
WSD-PDT
SA -
GY
Example: WSD-PDT-SA-GY Wall Switch Sensor, PDT, Semi-Auto, Gray
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
637
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION
The WSX Series of wall switch occupancy sensors provides simple and cost effective solutions for commercial and residential lighting control applications. All WSX Series sensors have a stylish low prole appearance, soft-click buttons, and provide small motion detection up to 20 ft (6.10 m), making them perfect for private ofces, private rest rooms, closets, copy rooms, or any other small enclosed space. The WSX family sensors have a patent-pending wiring method that enables them to function either with or without a neutral connection.
SENSOR SWITCH PIR AND PDT WALL SWITCH SENSORS WSX SERIES
NEW!
WSX WIRING
SINGLE RELAY DUAL RELAY
WSX-NL
WSX-2P
FEATURES
100% digital PIR detection - excellent RF immunity Ruggedized assembly, vandal resistant lens standard Small motion detection to 20 ft Dual Technology (PDT) utilizes PIR / Microphonics sound detection (patented) 100% passive detection, no potential for interference with other building systems Self-grounding mounting strap Device accommodates powering over ground or neutral connection (patent pending) White LED status indicator Matching wall plate included
N * H GND
N * H GND
BLK BLK
LOAD 1
LOAD 2
BLU BLU
BLK BLK
LOAD 1
WIRE COLOR KEY

120/277 VAC WIRING BLACK - Line 1 Input BLACK - Load 1 Output BLUE - Line 2 Input BLUE - Load 2 Output
11
} }
BLACK wires can be reversed BLUE wires can be reversed
Notes: - Unit will draw power from either line connection. - Both poles line connection must be same phase.
347 VAC WIRING (-347 Option) Red wires replace Black wires.
*WIRING TO NEUTRAL
Remove jumper between Neutral and Ground
SPECIFICATIONS
LIGHITING CONTROLS
Supply Voltage Frequency Motor Load Coverage WSX WSX-PDT WSX-PDT-NL Coverage Pattern Sensor Type WSX WSX-PDT
120/277/347 VAC @800/1200/1500 W 50/60 Hz 1/4 HP 7854 sq. ft. 9425 sq. ft. 1508 sq. ft. 180 Passive Infrared (PIR) Dual Technology (PIR and Microphonics)
Time Range Time Delay Adjust Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Mounting Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty
30 seconds to 30 minutes 10 programmable settings 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) 20-75% non-condensing Wall, Single Gang Switch Box, 30-48in (76.2-121.9cm) Height 1.68"W x 2.74"H x 1.63"D (4.27 x 6.96 x 4.14 cm) UL, cUL E167435 0.32 lbs (0.15 kg) 5 year limited
MODEL WSX WSX-2P WSX-PDT WSX-PDT-2P DESCRIPTION Wall switch with passive infrared (PIR) sensor Wall switch with passive infrared (PIR) sensor, dual relay Wall switch with dual technology sensors (PIR and Microphonics) Wall switch with dual technology sensors (PIR and Microphonics), dual relay OPERATING MODES (reprogrammable via push-button except for VA version models) (blank) SA VA 2SA 2VA NL
Auto On (default) or vacancy for WSX and WSX-PDT models; Pole 1- Auto on, Pole 2- Vacancy (default) for WSX-2P and WSX-PDT-2P models
Vacancy (manual on, default) or Auto On for WSX and WSX-PDT models Vacancy (manual on) only for WSX and WSX-PDT models Both poles vacancy (default), for WSX-2P and WSX-PDT-2P models Both poles vacancy only, for WSX-2P and WSX-PDT-2P models Night light, Manual On/Auto Off operation of lights (default) COLOR FINISH AL Light Almond BK Black GY Gray IV Ivory RD Red WH White GY Example: WSX-PDT-NL-GY Wall Switch Sensor Neural/Ground, PDT, Night light, Gray
WSX-PDT
NL -
638
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

LIGHTING CONTROLS
SENSOR SWITCH PIR AND PDT WIDE VIEW OCCUPANCY SENSORS WV SERIES
The WV Series Wide View occupancy sensor is designed to mount in a corner and detect small motions up to 40 ft (12.19 m) away, and larger motions up to 70 ft (21.34 m) away. This makes it ideal for 30 ft x 30 ft (9.14 m x 9.14 m) classrooms or corridors up to 70 ft (21.34 m) long. For rooms with obstructions, use the WV PDT 16 Series sensor which adds Microphonics detection.
WV16
(SHOWN WITH WV-BR-SS MOUNTING BRACKET)
100% digital PIR detection, excellent RF immunity 120 by 40 ft (12.19 m) coverage for small motion Push-button programmable Adjustable time delays Convenient test mode No eld calibration or sensitivity adjustments required 100 hr lamp burn-in timer Green LED indicator
WIRING/COVERAGE PATTERN
BLK, Common WHT, Occupancy State (high VDC for occupied) RED, 12-24 VAC/VDC input
POWER PACK
WV16 Coverage Pattern

40 30 20 10
Photocell Option
12.2 9.1 6
11
(PP20)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
3 0m 9 30 6 20 3 10 0m 0 ft 3 10 6 20 9 30
TOP VIEW
0 ft
Relay Option
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Coverage Coverage Pattern Sensor Type WV-16 WV-PDT-16 Time Range 12-24 VAC/VDC Small motion - 40ft (12.19m); Large motion - 70ft (21.34m) 120 Passive Infrared (PIR) Dual Technology (PIR and Microphonics) 30 seconds to 20 minutes Time Delay Adjust 9 programmable settings Operating Temperature 14 to 160F (-10 to 71C) Operating Humidity 20-90% non-condensing Mounting Corner or ceiling using WV BR bracket Dimensions 3.6"W x 3.0"H x 1.75"D (9.14 x 7.62 x 4.45 cm) Approvals UL, cUL (E167435) 0.32 lb(0.15 kg) Weight Warranty 5 year limited
MODEL DESCRIPTION WV-16 Wide View Sensor-Corner Mount, Low Voltage, PIR Wide View Sensor-Corner Mount, Low Voltage, PIR, WV Bracket, Kit WV-16-KIT WV-PDT-16-KIT Wide View Sensor-Corner Mount, Low Voltage, PDT, WV Bracket, Kit Note: Call Kele for models with low voltage relay, photocell, dimming, and low temperature options availability. ACCESSORIES Power Pack, 120/277 VAC Ceiling Mount Bracket
PP20 WV-BR-SS March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
639
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION
The MarkTime 42E Series Occupancy Sensors with LED sensor indicator are ideal for lighting control in rooms that are not occupied all the time. Time delay and sensor sensitivity are eld adjustable. Use with Incandescent, uorescent and CFL lighting. Indoor use only.
PIR AND DUAL TECHNOLOGY OCCUPANCY/VACANCY SENSOR SWITCH 42E SERIES
FEATURES
LED sensor indicator Time delay, sensor sensitivity, & light level eld adjustable Pushbutton manual override Use with incandescent, uorescent and CFL lighting Wall plate included California title 24 compliant
NEW!
42ESD1 42ES5HD 42ES624 42ES5HD Top View
10' 10'
WIRING
Neutral White
COVERAGE PATTERNS
42ESD1 Top View
20'
42ES624 Top View
11
Hot Black
Load Red
Load
10'
Ground Green
Neutral
White
10'
LIGHITING CONTROLS
20'
10'
10'
SPECIFICATIONS
Rating 42ES624 42ES5HD 42EDS1 Coverage 42ES624 42ES5HD 42EDS1 Sensitivity Adjustment 42ES624 42ES5HD/42EDS1 Time Delay Adjust 120VAC, 50/60Hz, 500W, 500VA, 1/8HP 120VAC, 50/60Hz, 800W, 800VA, 1/4HP 120VAC, 50/60Hz, 800W, 800VA, 1/4HP; 277VAC, 50/60Hz, 1600VA PIR 150 x 20FT, 450 sq. ft. PIR 180 x 20FT, 650 sq. ft. PIR 180 x 40FT, 1200 sq. ft. / US 180 x 20FT, 400 sq. ft. Field adjustable sensor sensitivity 30% to 100% Field adjustbale sensor sensitivity 30% to 100% and light level, 100Lux to Daylight Operating Temperature Dimensions 42ES624 42ES5HD 42EDS1 Mounting Approvals Weight Warranty 42EDS1 42ES5HD 42ES624-W Delay Off, Field Adjustable 15 sec to 30 min 32 to 131F (0 to 55C) 4 1/8H X 1 W X 2D 4H X 1 W X 1 D 4 1/8H X 1 W X 1 D Standard wall box (Wall plate included) UL, cUL Listed 0.4 lbs (0.181 kg) 3 years 5 years 2 years
MODEL 42ES624-I 42ES624-W 42EDS1-I 42EDS1-W 42ES5HD-I 42ES5HD-W DESCRIPTION PIR sensor, manual on/auto off, ivory PIR sensor, manual on/auto off, white Dual-tech,occupancy, auto on/auto off, vacancy, manual on/auto off, ivory Dual-tech,occupancy, auto on/auto off, vacancy, manual on/auto off, white PIR sensor, auto on/auto off, vacancy, manual on/auto off, ivory PIR sensor, auto on/auto off, vacancy, manual on/auto off, white
640
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES OPERATION SPECIFICATIONS
Model BZ-50 B347-P S-120/277/347-E S-120/277/347-E Type Power Pack Power Pack Slave Pack Slave Pack Supply Voltage 120/ 277 VAC 347 VAC 120/ 277 VAC 347 VAC
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WATTSTOPPER UNIVERSAL VOLTAGE POWER PACK BZ-50
The Power Pack provides 24 VDC operating voltage for occupancy sensors and light level sensors. Each is capable of switching up to 20A electrical load. The Slave Pack is similar to the Power Pack but has no transformer power supply, only an isolated relay. Power and Slave Packs can be combined to switch almost any lighting or HVAC load controlled by occupancy or light sensor controls. They can also be used for low voltage switching. S-120/277/347E-P BZ-50
Power Pack includes fully self-contained transformer and isolated relay; Slave Pack includes isolated relay only Available in several AC voltage inputs Zero-crossing switching technology for increased reliability and product life Attaches easily to standard 1/2" knockouts
Housed in ABS, UL listed 94V-0 plastic enclosure Can be used to switch low voltage control wiring UL and cUL listed Five-year warranty
11
The Power Pack consists of a transformer and high-current relay combined in one small, powerful package. The transformer has a primary high voltage input and a secondary 24 VDC, 100 mA output. The Slave Pack contains a high current relay only and is controlled by the sensor. When occupancy is detected by the sensor (and inadequate ambient light is detected if this feature is used), the sensor electrically closes an internal circuit that sends 24 VDC back to the Power and/or Slave Packs, which switch the line voltage to control lighting or other equipment.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Secondary Voltage 24 VDC, 100 mA Operating Temperature 32 to 98F (0 to 36C) Dimensions 1.6" H x 2.75" W x 1.6" D (4.1 x 7.0 x 4.1 cm) with 1/2" snap-in nipple
Enclosure Rating Approvals Weight Warranty
UL 2043-listed 94V-0 plastic enclosure (plenum rated) UL and cUL listed, File #E101196 0.48 lb (0.22 kg) 5 years
Contactor Ballast 20A 15A 20A 15A Contactor Tungsten 20A Contactor Motor 1 hp 24 VDC Output Current 225 mA 100 mA -
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
641
LIGHTING CONTROLS
INSTALLATION
WATTSTOPPER UNIVERSAL VOLTAGE POWER PACK BZ-50
Note: All power packs should be installed in accordance with state, local, and national electrical codes and requirements. Power Packs are designed to attach to existing or new electrical enclosures with 1/2" knockouts. 1. Disconnect power at the circuit breaker prior to doing any work. 2. Connect the white wire to neutral and the black wire to the appropriate hot leg. 3. Connect one red wire to the line side of the voltage to be controlled and the other red wire to the load to be controlled. 4. Make all low-voltage connections to the occupancy sensor (see wiring below). 5. Verify all connections are correct, and reset the circuit breaker.
NEW!
Switch Load N.C. Contact Common N.O. Contact Control Output 24 VDC Control Return Light Level Output 24 VDC +24 VDC Common Wires 1-(brown) 2-(red) 3-(orange) 4-(yellow) 5-(green) 6-(blue) 7-(purple) 8-(gray)
WIRING
N Hot (white) (black) (black) (red) (blue) Power Pack (red) Line (red) Load
N Hot
Switch Load
(red) Load (red) Line
Slave Pack
(blue) (black)
3 Wire 24 VDC Sensor (CX-100 or CI-200)
11
N Hot
(white) (black)
Power Pack
(red) Line (red) Load
Cable Wires N.C. Contact Common N.O. Contact Control Output 24 VDC Control Return Light Level Output 24 VDC +24 VDC Common 1-(brown) 2-(red) 3-(orange) 4-(yellow) 5-(green) 6-(blue) 7-(purple) 8-(gray)
Switch
Load
LIGHITING CONTROLS
3 Wire 24 VDC Sensor (CX-100 or CI-200)
(red)
(black)
(white) Neutral
(blue)
(red) +24 VDC
(black) Hot (red) (red)
(black) COM
(blue) +SW High Voltage Low Voltage
High Voltage Connection Made Inside J-Box
Power Pack
MODEL BZ-50 B347-P S-120/277/347-E DESCRIPTION 120-277 VAC to 24 VDC power pack 347 VAC to 24 VDC power pack Slave pack
642
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

LIGHTING CONTROLS
PLC-MULTIPOINT CELESTIAL SELF-CONTAINED AMBIENT LIGHT SENSORS MK7-B SERIES
The MK7-B Series Celestial Series Self-contained Sensors develop a variable output voltage that corresponds to the amount of present ambient light. These precise ambient lightlevel measurement units are designed to detect and transmit, via an analog signal, the amount of light present at their location to the remote analog input point of most Building Automation Controllers. The sensors contain a precision photo-diode type cell that provides an exact, proportional output over a wide range of light levels, allowing for accurate lighting control.
MK7-B-CCF Indoor
MK7-B-CR Outdoor
MK7-B-CS Skylight
APPLICATION
Sensors allow most building automation controllers to become sophisticated lighting control computers to control any type of lighting at any light level based on the amount of ambient light available. There are three basic types of sensors: Indoor Designed to monitor the ambient light levels in ofces, schools, etc., the sensor mounts in a 3/8" hole bored in a ceiling tile central to the electrical lighting being controlled. It features an adjustable maximum range from 5-750 fc at the sensor face and a 60 eld of view with special at Fresnel lens conguration. Outdoor Designed to mount horizontally in a 1/2" conduit tting to monitor the outside ambient light levels for parking garages, security lighting, sign lighting, etc., the sensor is generally roof-top mounted facing the northern sky. It features an adjustable maximum range from 5-750 fc at the sensor face. Completely weathertight and temperature stable. At very low ambient temperatures (below 13F), the sensor will still function but will lose some accuracy and light level sensitivity. Skylight Designed to mount vertically in a 1/2" conduit tting to monitor the ambient light levels from inside a skylight well in warehouses, shopping malls, etc., the sensor features an adjustable maximum range from 1000-7500 fc at the sensor face.
Factory calibrated Analog voltage models Wide range of light-level monitoring Compatible with most BAS controllers Extremely accurate and reliable Three basic models for monitoring: indoor light levels (ceiling mount), outdoor light levels (roof mount), skylight light levels (skylight mount) Day lighting control for three application zones
11
OPERATION
The sensor heads contain patented solid-state circuitry designed to be extremely accurate, adjustable, and exible over a wide range of input and output voltages. The standard three-wire sensors operate from any input voltage between 12-24 VDC and give a return output signal of 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 1-10 VDC. The sensors come factory calibrated. The sensor is equipped with a variable range potentiometer, but calibration equipment, such as a foot-candle meter, would be required to change the range of the unit. Note: There is a charge for recalibration of the unit by the manufacturer.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Analog Output Wire Type Calibration Indoor Factory Field Adjustable Outdoor Factory Field Adjustable Skylight Factory Field Adjustable 12-24 VDC; 20 mA max 4-20 mA (750 impedance), 0-10 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 1-10 VDC, 1-5 VDC Three-wire, 18-gauge, stranded 0-100 fc 0 fc minimum - 750 fc maximum 0 - 250 fc 0 fc minimum - 750 fc maximum 10 - 2000 fc 10 fc minimum - 7500 fc maximum Sensor Type Linearity Protection Repeatability Operating Temperature Temperature Accuracy Dimensions Indoor Outdoor Skylight Weight Approvals Warranty Blue-enhanced photo-diode 2% Non-Polarized 0.5% -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) 10% 1.5" x 1.5" x 1.7" (38 x 38 x 43 mm) 1.4" x 1.4" x 2.4" (36 x 36 x 61 mm) 1.3" x 1.3" x 2.8" (33 x 33 x 71 mm) 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) ETL, NEC Class 2, RoHS, Title 24 2 years
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
643
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WIRING / CALIBRATION
PLC-MULTIPOINT CELESTIAL SELF-CONTAINED AMBIENT LIGHT SENSORS MK7-B SERIES
The sensors come factory calibrated. Each sensor is equipped with a variable range potentiometer, but calibration equipment, such as a foot-candle meter, would be required to change the range of the unit. Note: there is a charge for recalibration of the unit by the manufacturer. Rotating the potentiometer one way or the other causes the upper limit voltage that the sensor produces to correspond to lower or higher foot-candle readings. For example, with a 5V model at the minimum gain setting, the sensor will deliver 5 VDC at 750 fc; at the maximum setting, the sensor will deliver 5 VDC at 50 fc. The zero light level setting is xed and will not change. The adjustment procedure allows for precise light level monitoring and can compensate for the physical light sensing location of the unit, which may differ from the actual light level present at the task level. Once the calibration procedure is completed, it will remain constant with no further adjustments. Complete installation instructions are provided with the unit. The lower end output (zero light level) and the upper end light level outputs can be custom-ordered for specic voltages. A range of the standard output voltages supplied are listed in Specications.
24 VDC
NEW!
V Sig In Power (red) (black) (yellow) 24V Power Com Ref V Out mA Sig Out
24 VDC
POWER
(red) (black) (yellow)
MK7-B
Com Signal
VTI-1
MK7-B
COM SIGNAL
11
4-20 mA Signal
Wiring the MK7-B
Wiring the MK7-B to VTI-1
LIGHITING CONTROLS
To prevent electrical shock and possible equipment damage, disconnect power coming from the controller prior to hookup. Wiring from the sensor to the controller should be with 18- or 22-gauge stranded wire. Do not run the low-voltage wire with or near power wiring. For long wire runs or where there is excessive electrical noise, shielded cable or cable in conduit is required. Cable length should not exceed 500' (152m). Wire the sensor to the appropriate analog port of the controller according to the controller manufacturers instructions and the specic details of the particular sensor listed on this page.
MODEL MK7-B DESCRIPTION Celestial Ambient Light Sensor Indoor CCF Outdoor CR Skylight CS OUTPUT SIGNAL 4-20 mA VTI 0-5 VDC 0/5 1-5 VDC 1/5 0-10 VDC 0/10 1-10 VDC 1/10
MK7-B
CCF
1/5
Example: MK7-B-CCF-1/5 Light sensor, indoor housing, 1-5 VDC output signal
644
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Economical dark/light sensing 1/2" NPT design Track-mounted PSR-1-T transmitter Optional weatherproof enclosure
LIGHTING CONTROLS
KELE PHOTO-SENSITIVE RESISTOR PSR-1, PSR-1-T
The Model PSR-1 Photo-Sensitive Resistor may be used as an input to indicate the presence or absense of light at the sensor location. The Model PSR1-T is a PSR-1 coupled with a 4-20 mA transmitter. The sensor is designed to be mounted in the end of a weatherproof conduit box.
APPLICATION
The Model PSR-1 has a resistance in darkness in excess of 1 MW and a resistance in bright light of less than 1.5 kW. Models PSR-1 and PSR1-T indicate the presence or absence of light. They should not be used for footcandle control of occupied spaces. The PSR-1-T is calibrated for 4 mA in bright light (>100 footcandles) and 20 mA in darkness (0.1 footcandles).
PSR-1-T
11
LIGHTING CONTROLS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage PSR-1-T 12-35 VDC Maximum Current Draw 22 mA PSR-1-T Output Impedance 750 Outputs PSR-1 >1 M in dark, <1.5 k in bright light, non-linear within span PSR-1-T 4 mA = bright light; 20 mA = dark Non-linear within span Operating Temperature -13 to 167F (-25 to 75C) Weight PSR-1 0.05 lb (0.02 kg) PSR-1-T 0.35 lb (0.16 kg) PSR-1-E 0.65 lb (0.3 kg) PSR-1-T-E 0.95lb (0.43 kg) Warranty 1 year
RESISTANCE CURVE
1M
100k
Resistance (ohms)
10k
1k
100
10 0 0.1 0.5 1.0 5.0 10 50 100
Illumination (fc)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
645
LIGHTING CONTROLS
KELE PHOTO-SENSITIVE RESISTOR PSR-1, PSR-1-T
WIRING
17" (red) (black)
1/2" NPT Controller Input Terminals (Non-polarized resistance)
NEW!
in (cm)
4-20 mA Signal PSR-1 24 VDC Power Supply
5 4 3 2 1
2.25 (5.72)
4-20 mA Transmitter Board
PSR-1
4 mA ADJ P2 20 mA ADJ
K420-P
1.75 (4.45)
P1
11
OPERATION
Typical Application Using ST-O(X) Outdoor Air Sensor with PSR-1 Model AD-2 3/4" x 1/2" Adapter Required
PSR-1-T
APPLICATION NOTES
Due to the wide tolerance and non-linear nature of the low-cost PSR-1 and PSR-1-T, the values for resistance versus light level (or mA versus light level) cannot be predicated accurately. As stated in the data sheet, it is not intended for control of lighting levels in occupied spaces. However, an installed device will give very repeatable performance through its span. Note the following procedure is required for each individual PSR-1 and PSR-1-T installed, as interchangeability is not guaranteed. 1. Install the PSR-1 or PSR-1-T in its intended location and connect to controller. Preferred direction of mounting is due north toward the sky or toward a location where the sun can never appear. 2. Arrange for the sensed lighting to be darkened to the control point that is desired, use of a reliable light level meter is recommended. For outdoor lighting, the most common on/off control points are turn lights on at a point between 1 and 3 foot candles. Without a light meter, the lowest level (on point) can be estimated by observation on a cloudless day at about 5 minutes prior to sunset, or about 5 minutes after sunrise. The high (off point) level can be estimated by observation on a cloudless day at about 15 minutes prior to sunset, or about 15 minutes after sunrise. Sunrise and sunset time for your locality on a given day may be obtained at www.srrb.noaa.gov. 3. Record the value (Ohms or mA) at which each lighting control point is reached. 4. While the method is NOT recommended for analog control of lighting level in occupied spaces, the same procedure may be employed to control articial lighting in areas that otherwise illuminated by skylights or other overwhelming sources of natural light. 5. Any exposure to direct sun may allow the temperature of the device to approach or exceed 167 F (75 c ) limit.
LIGHITING CONTROLS
MODEL PSR-1 PSR-1-T PSR-1-E PSR-1-T-E AD-2 DESCRIPTION Photo-sensitive resistor Photo-sensitive resistor with 4-20 mA output Photo-sensitive resistor with waterproof enclosure Photo-sensitive resistor with waterproof enclosure and 4-20 mA output ACCESSORIES Knock-out adapter -3/4" TO 1/2"
646
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

LIGHTING CONTROLS
PHOTO SWITCHES K, LC SERIES
Models K and LC Photo Switches are universally employed to control lighting loads in response to available natural light. Each will turn on at dusk and off at dawn, and each may be connected to directly switchloads up to its continuous rating or to switch larger loads through relays or contactors. Stem mount types (see specications below) are equipped with a 1/2" MNPT nipple and locknut for mounting to a weatherproof box or conduit body.Stem/swivel mount types attach in the same manner, but include a swivel for directional aiming.
K4251
LC K41
On at dusk, off at dawn operation Weatherproof enclosure Simple installation and wiring Heavy-duty switch to control loads directly Contacts remain closed in case of cell failure Ideal for outdoor lighting, billboard lighting, security lighting UL listed, CSA approved
K4221C
K122
11
SPECIFICATIONS
120 VAC 50/60 Hz, 208-277 VAC 50/60 Hz, 105-480 VAC 50/60 Hz SPST Switch Type Lead Length 6" (15.24 cm) Lead Wire Type Pigtail leads, 14 AWG Foot Candles On 1-5 Off 3-15, On 5 Off 15 Operating Temperature -40 to 150F (-40 to 65C) Supply Voltage Enclosure Rating Approvals Weight Warranty K Series LC Series NEMA 3R weatherproof UL Listed E42722, CSA, UL Listed E59121, CSA 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) 5 years 3 years
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.0 (7.62)
2.0 (5.08)
1.38 (3.5)
1.88 (4.76)
5 2. 35) . (6
1/2'' NPT
(8 3.5 .9 0)
5 2. 35) . (6
25 ) 5. .35 3 (1
2.94(7.46) dia
3 (8. .5 89 )
1/2" NPT
K4221C
K122
LC
K4251
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
647
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PHOTO SWITCHES K, LC SERIES
INSTALLATION
When exposed to weather, mount Models K and LC to a weatherproof hub or conduit body via 1/2" threaded nipple. They may be mounted to a 1/2" knockout in a handy box in locations protected from weather, such as parking garages or beneath substantial overhangs. The LC plugs into a standard mating twist-lock socket supplied by lighting xture manufacturers or the K122 twist-lock base. K122 base includes the mounting bracket. Mount in a location facing north for normal outdoor light control application, and wire to switch the load directly or through a lighting contactor. Switching level may be adjusted on K41 by moving the slide to block more or less of the photocell window. Covering more of the window will cause lights to come on earlier in the evening (at a higher ambient light level). The K42 model is more directional and may be aimed at darker areas to adjust the level at which lights come on, or it may be aimed toward another light source to provide coordination between multiple light groups. Aiming of the LC series is set by the position of the socket base.
NEW!
Twist Lock Receptacle (black) (red)
(white) (black)
Weight 4.0 oz (0.10 kg) 4.0 oz (0.10 kg) 4.0 oz (0.10 kg) 4.0 oz (0.10 kg) 4.0 oz (0.10 kg) 3.0 oz (0.09 kg) 3.0 oz (0.09 kg)
WIRING
K Photo Switches
(white) (black)
11
(black) Lamp Load
(red)
Lamp Load (white)
(white)
LIGHITING CONTROLS
(red or white)
(black)
120, 208, 240, or 277V
120, 208, 240, or 277V
Models K
Line Line or Neutral
Model LC
Model K4121C K4123C K4221C K4251 LC4521C LC4523C K122 Mounting Stem Stem Stem/Swivel Stem/Swivel Twist lock Twist lock Twist lock base Supply Voltage 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 208-277 VAC 50/60 Hz 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 208-277 VAC 50/60 Hz 105-480 VAC 50/60 Hz Contactor Ballast Contactor Tungsten Foot Candles 8.3A 8.3A 8.3A 8.3A 8.3A 8.3A 15A 15A 15A 15A 8.3A 8.3A On 1-5 Off 3-15 On 1-5 Off 3-15 On 1-5 Off 3-15 On 1-5 Off 3-15 On 5 Off 15 On 5 Off 15
648
(red or white)
Line Line or Neutral
(black)
March 2014
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PHOTO SWITCHES EM SERIES
The EM is a low voltage photocell used for controlling exterior lighting and signage. The photocell provides an ON signal when the ambient light level drops below a preset dark setpoint. It then provides a signal OFF as the ambient light level rises above the preset light setpoint. The photocell relay contact red wires are connected to a panel, to a low voltage controlled loads or directly to a Building Automation System.
On at dusk, off at dawn operation Simple installation and wiring One set of normally open, isolated relay contacts; contacts are closed when sensed light level is below dark setpoint, open when light level is above light setpoint 8-second time delay and built-in setpoint deadband prevent cycling 1/2" threaded male conduit base for easy mounting on conduit ttings or junction boxes. Weatherproof enclosure Economical input to BAS or lighting control systems Ideal for outdoor lighting, billboard lighting, security lighting
EM Series
OPERATION
INSTALLATION/ MOUNTING Mount on exterior or roof of building. Point light sensing window North. The photocell provides an ON signal when the ambient light level drops below a preset dark setpoint. It then provides a signal OFF as the ambient light level rises above the preset light setpoint. The setpoint can be changed for specic applications by opening and closing the photocell aperture window.
11
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WIRING
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC, 1 VA Relay Type N.O. SPST 1 A at 30 VAC/VDC Relay Output Lead Length 8" (20.32 cm) Lead Wire Type Pigtail leads, 20 AWG Accuracy 10% FC Operating Temperature -25 to 125F (-31.7 to 51.7C) Mounting Stem with 1/2" thread tting Dimensions 2.64" x 1.57"x 1.89" (67.1 x 39.9 x 48.0 mm) Enclosure Rating NEMA 3R weatherproof 0.4 lb (0.18 kg) Weight Warranty 1 year
Light Sensing Window Sliding Window Aperture 1/2" Thread Fitting 24 VDC
BLK (24+) WHT (com)
24 VAC
BLK BLK RED RED
Model EM
N/O Relay Contacts 1A @ 30 VAC/VDC (closes below dark setpoint)
MODEL EM-24A2 EM-24VD2 DESCRIPTION 24 VAC Exterior photocell with relay contact 24 VDC Exterior photocell with relay contact
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
649
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION
The MAS sensors are microprocessor-based light monitors that measure ambient light levels. They provide an analog DC signal to various microprocessors and energy management systems. The sensor is powered by 24 VDC and provides a 4-20 mA analog signal over 2 wires. The MAS can be set to a range of 0 to 10,000 fc. It comes in many styles of housing, including indoor, outdoor, atrium and skylight. The MAS sensor's range can be changed with the MAS-CAL from up to 4000 feet away.
PLC-MULTIPOINT SELF-CONTAINED AMBIENT LIGHT SENSORS MAS SERIES
NEW!
MASI Indoor Sensor Type MASS Skylight Sensor Type MASO Outdoor Sensor Type MASA Atrium Sensor Type (Correct Orientation Shown)
FEATURES
Compatible with many lighting and building automation controllers Measuring range 0-10,000 Fc Output 4-20 mA Adjustable response time Day lighting control for four application zones Indoor sensor adhesive ceiling mount All others 1/2 inch NPT mount Class 2 wiring device NIST traceable factory calibration available Title 24 Listed RoHS compliant
11
LIGHITING CONTROLS
WIRING
MASS
MASS
Supplied by others
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Current Rating Analog Output Calibration Linearity Filter Type Lens Protection Repeatability 18 to 30 VDC 20mA Low 4mA, High 20mA, 250 output impedance MAS-CAL tool 2% Clear, Opaque, Dark Fresnel, Flat, Dome Non-polarized 0.5% Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Temperature Accuracy 10% RoHS Statement Yes Dimensions Indoor 1.5" X 1.5" X 1.7" (38 X 38 X 43 mm) Outdoor 1.4" X 1.4" X 2.4" (36 X 36 X 61) Atrium/Skylight 1.3" X 1.3" X 2.8" (33 X 33 X 71 mm) ETL, NEC Class 2, RoHS, Title 24 Approvals Weight 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) Warranty 2 years March 2014
650
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Model Ordering description MASI-12X0T MASI-12X1T MASI-12X2T MASI-1X0T MASI-1X1T MASI-1X2T MASI-2X0T MASI-2X1T MASI-2X2T MASO-12X0T MASO-12X1T MASO-12X2T MASO-1X0T MASO-1X1T MASO-1X2T MASO-2X0T MASO-2X1T MASO-2X2T MASA-12X0T MASA-12X1T MASA-12X2T MASA-1X0T MASA-1X1T MASA-1X2T MASA-2X0T MASA-2X1T MASA-2X2T MASS-12X0T MASS-12X1T MASS-12X2T MASS-1X0T MASS-1X1T MASS-1X2T MASS-2X0T MASS-2X1T MASS-2X2T
Indoor light sensor 50 Fc instant time response Indoor light sensor 50 Fc 10 min time response Indoor light sensor 50 Fc 20 min time response Indoor light sensor 100 Fc instant time response Indoor light sensor 100 Fc 10 min time response Indoor light sensor 100 Fc 20 min time response Indoor light sensor 200 Fc instant time response Indoor light sensor 200 Fc 10 min time response Indoor light sensor 200 Fc 20 min time response Atrium light sensor 500 Fc instant time response Atrium light sensor 500 Fc 10 min time response Atrium light sensor 500 Fc 20 min time response
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PLC-MULTIPOINT SELF-CONTAINED AMBIENT LIGHT SENSORS MAS SERIES

Filter Type
Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Opaque Opaque Opaque Opaque Opaque Opaque Opaque Opaque Opaque Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Foot Candles
Min 0 Fc Max 200 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 200 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 200 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 200 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 200 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 200 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 200 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 200 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 200 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 500 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 500 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 500 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 500 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 500 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 500 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 500 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 500 Fc Min 0 Fc Max 500 Fc Min 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Min 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Min 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Min 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Min 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Min 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Min 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Min 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Min 50 Fc Max 2,000 Fc Min 100 Fc Max 10,000 Fc Min 100 Fc Max 10,000 Fc Min 100 Fc Max 10,000 Fc Min 100 Fc Max 10,000 Fc Min 100 Fc Max 10,000 Fc Min 100 Fc Max 10,000 Fc Min 100 Fc Max 10,000 Fc Min 100 Fc Max 10,000 Fc Min 100 Fc Max 10,000 Fc
Lens
Fresnel Fresnel Fresnel Fresnel Fresnel Fresnel Fresnel Fresnel Fresnel Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome Dome
Location
Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Indoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Outdoor Atrium Atrium Atrium Atrium Atrium Atrium Atrium Atrium Atrium Skylight Skylight Skylight Skylight Skylight Skylight Skylight Skylight Skylight
Mounting
Ceiling Ceiling Ceiling Ceiling Ceiling Ceiling Ceiling Ceiling Ceiling 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT 1/2" NPT
Mounting Orientation
Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
Outdoor light sensor 125 Fc instant time response Outdoor light sensor 125 Fc 10 min time response Outdoor light sensor 125 Fc 20 min time response Outdoor light sensor 250 Fc instant time response Outdoor light sensor 250 Fc 10 min time response Outdoor light sensor 250 Fc 20 min time response Outdoor light sensor 500 Fc instant time response Outdoor light sensor 500 Fc 10 min time response Outdoor light sensor 500 Fc 20 min time response
11
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Up Up Up Up Up Up Up Up Up
Atrium light sensor 1000 Fc instant time response Atrium light sensor 1000 Fc 10 min time response Atrium light sensor 1000 Fc 20 min time response Atrium light sensor 2000 Fc instant time response Atrium light sensor 2000 Fc 10 min time response Atrium light sensor 2000 Fc 20 min time response Skylight light sensor 2500 Fc instant time response Skylight light sensor 2500 Fc 10 min time response Skylight light sensor 2500 Fc 20 min time response Skylight light sensor 5000 Fc instant time response Skylight light sensor 5000 Fc 10 min time response Skylight light sensor 5000 Fc 20 min time response Skylight light sensor 10000 Fc instant time response Skylight light sensor 10000 Fc 10 min time response Skylight light sensor 10000 Fc 20 min time response
MAS-CAL
ACCESSORIES Calibration unit for MAS series light level sensors
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
651
LIGHTING CONTROLS
ILC LIGHT SYNC ADRESSABLE SWITCHES LS-PB-C SERIES
DESCRIPTION
LightSync LS-PB-C Series switches provide the exibility needed for ILC lighting control panel applications that require multiple bypass switches. Each addressable switch button may be individually programmed to control a single relay or group of relays within an individual ILC lighting panel or a network of panels on the LightSync(tm) data line network. LightSync(tm) switches are equipped with common CAT-5 cable RJ-45 connectors. The data line network CAT-5 cable plugs into the RJ-45 plug in the ILC Apprentice II lighting control panel. Switch assembly and cover plate are ordered separately. Warranty is one year.
NEW!
LS-PB-C-WH-6
FEATURES
Digitally-addressable device 1 to 6-button conguration Mounts in standard single-gang box spacing LED status indicators provide true relay group/preset status Fits standard Decoratype plate Available in four colors and stainless steel Up to 3000 feet without a repeater
11
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 12/24 VDC; 7 mA typical Data Transmission LightSync CAT-5 data line Communication Port RJ45 LED Indication Relay group / preset status Operating Temperature 32 to 112F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 10% to 95% Non-condensing Dimensions 2.75" x 4.5" x 1.3" (6.9 x 11.4 x 3.2 cm) Approvals FCC and UL approved Weight 0.7 lbs (0.32 kg) Warranty 2 years
WIRING
CAT-5 Cable To ILC Lighting Panel or Power supply repeater (PSR) RJ45 port Additional LightSync Devices or Power supply repeater (PSR)
LIGHITING CONTROLS
MODEL LS-PB-C DESCRIPTION LightSync switch assembly* SWITCH COLOR Ivory IV White WH Black BL Gray GY Stainless steel SS X Number of pushbuttons (up to 6 max.) WH 4
LS-PB-C
Example: LS-PB-WH-4 White, four pushbutton switch assembly *Switch cover plates included
DCP-1.5-W PSR
ACCESSORIES PAGE Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power Source Repeater for network's greater than 3000 ft
652
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Attractive, architecturally pleasing design Momentary and latching versions available 1-4 buttons with or without LED Mounts to standard single-gang box 2-year warranty
LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING OVERRIDE SWITCHES LV SERIES
Hubbell Building Automation Low Voltage Wall Switches are designed for virtually any area. The soft contours of its architecturally pleasing design t easily into any decor. Switches are available momentary and feature multiple button congurations with and without a pilot LED.
LVSM2NPWH
LVSMIPLWH
SPECIFICATIONS
30 VDC Max @100 mA 18-30VDC, internal 2.2kohm, Watt resistor Actuation Type Momentary Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 10% - 90% non-condensing Number Of Switches 1-4 Mounting Single-gang NEMA 1 style switch box (wall plate sold seperately) Color White,ivory Dimensions 4.3" x 1.9" x 1.6" (10.9 x 4.8 x 4.1 cm) Materials Of Construction Housing Rugged, high impact, injection molded Plastic Leads Color coded Weight 0.19 lb (0.09 kg) 2 years Warranty Contact Rating Switch Pilot LED
LVSM2PLWH
LVSM1NPWH
WIRING
L1 S1 S2 L2 L3 L4
11
LIGHTING CONTROLS
S3 S4
S1 S2 S3 S4
LVS 4-Button Momentary Switch, No Pilot LEDs
LVS 4-Button Momentary Switch, with Pilot LEDs* *Note Pilot Polarity Marks
MODEL LVSMINPIV LVSMINPWH LVSMIPLIV LVSMIPLWH LVSM2NPIV LVSM2NPWH LVSM2PLIV LVSM2PLWH LVSM3NPIV LVSM3NPWH LVSM3PLIV LVSM3PLWH LVSM4NPIV LVSM4NPWH LVSM4PLIV LVSM4PLWH DESCRIPTION Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 1 Button, No Pilot, Ivory Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 1 Button, No Pilot, White Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 1 Button, w/Pilot LED, Ivory Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 1 Button, w/Pilot LED, White Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 2 Button, No Pilot, Ivory Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 2 Button, No Pilot, White Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 2 Button, w/Pilot LEDs, Ivory Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 2 Button, w/Pilot LEDs, White Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 3 Button, No Pilot, Ivory Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 3 Button, No Pilot, White Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 3 Button, w/Pilot LEDs, Ivory Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 3 Button, w/Pilot LEDs, White Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 4 Button, No Pilot, Ivory Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 4 Button, No Pilot, White Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 4 Button, w/Pilot LEDs, Ivory Low Voltage Switch, Momentary, 4 Button, w/Pilot LEDs, White
Standard Decora style wallplates not included. Add "P" at end of model to include wall plate.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
653
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION
SENSOR SWITCH LOW VOLTAGE SENSOR INTERFACE SWITCH SPODM SERIES
The sPODM Series of low voltage wall stations interface with standard Sensor Switch occupancy sensors and power packs in order to implement a wide range of single and bi-level switching applications. These switch devices provide an elegant and cost effective way of deploying bi-level lighting control that meet energy and building codes without having to source special sensors or power packs.
FEATURES

NEW!
SPODM
Conductor 18AWG wire is recommended for all wiring BI-LEVEL (MANUAL ON / AUTO ON) SOLUTION w/ OCCUPANCY SENSOR: 1 GANG
sPODM 2P BLK/ORN WHT BLK RED PP20 WHT BLU BLU
AUTO ON LOAD
Enables standard occupancy sensors to be used for manual on operation Alternative usage as override switch for auto-on applicaitons Single gang decorator style with either 1 or 2 on/off switches Soft-click push-buttons Programmable without removing switch plate Wall plate included
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 12-24 VAC/VDC 5 mA Current Draw Dimming load Sinks < 20mA Operating Temperature 14 to 160F (-10 to 71C) Operating Humidity 20-90% RH, non-condensing Wall, single gang switch Mounting box Dimensions 2.74"H x 1.68"W x 1.63"D (6.96 x 4.27 x 4.14 cm) Approvals Title 24 compliant 0.32 lb (0.15 kg) Weight 5 year limited Warranty
WIRING
N Class 1 Connections
SP20
WHT / BLU STRIPE BLU / WHT STRIPE BLK RED
WHT BLK RED
11
BLU
MANUAL BLU ON LOAD
BLU
WHT
RED BLK WHT
BI-LEVEL (AUTO-ON / MANUAL ON) SOLUTION w/ OCCUPANCY SENSOR: 2 GANG

sPODM BLK/ORN WHT / BLU STRIPE BLK RED WHT WHT BLK RED PP20 WHT BLU BLU
AUTO ON LOAD
MANUAL ON w/ DIMMING & OCCUPANCY SENSOR

H N
WHT RED sPODM SA D WHT WHT BLK RED BLK BLK RED
Class 1 Connections H
BLK / ORN PP20 WHT BLU BLU
0-10 VDC BALLAST
LIGHITING CONTROLS
GRY
VIO
Class 1 Connections
WHT RED BLK RED BLK WHT SP20
BLU BLU
MANUAL ON LOAD
WHT / BLU STRIPE VIO
H
WHT RED BLK WHT / BLU STRIPE sPODM SA
Note: If sensor also has dimming output, connect sensor VIO wire to SPODM and ballast VIO wire. Lowest output level always takes precedence.
MODEL sPODM DESCRIPTION Low voltage sensor interface switch # of Switches / Default on Operation (blank) SA 2P 1 Switch, Auto-On 1 Switch, Manual On 2 Switches (Pole 1 Manual / Pole 2 Auto-On) Color Finish AL BK GY IV WH Light Almond Black Gray Ivory White
sPODM
2P
WH
Example: SPODM-2P-WH Interface Switch, 2 Poles, Manual / Auto-on, White
PP20
ACCESSORIES POWER PACK, 120/277 VAC
654
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Switch ts a single gang electrical box Includes white wall plate One or two button DIgital input
LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING OVERRIDE SWITCHES CLLV-SW
The CLLV-SW lighting override switch is a low voltage input into a lighting control panel. Each button registers a solid, audible click when pushed.
CLLV-SW1
CLLV-SW2
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating 24 VDC Contact Type Momentary (digital input only) Life Rating 1,000,000 mechanical operations Operating Temperature 14 to 160F (-10 to 71.1C ) Operating Humidity 20%-95% RH, non-condensing Color White Dimensions 4.1" H x 1.5" W x10" D (10.3 x3.8 x2.5 cm) Materials Of Construction Plastic Weight 0.06 lb (0.03 kg) Warranty 2 years
WIRING
To switch input To switch input To switch input common To switch input
11
LIGHTING CONTROLS
CLLV-SW2
CLLV-SW1
MODEL CLLV-SW1 CLLV-SW2 DESCRIPTION 1 button, low voltage momentary switch without wall plate 2 button, low voltage momentary switch without wall palte CLLV-SW1P CLLV-SW2P 1 Button, Low voltage momentary switch with white wall plate 2 Button, Low voltage momentary switch with white wall plate
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
655
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WATTSTOPPER CARD KEY SWITCHES HS-100, HS-150
DESCRIPTION
The HS Series Card Key Switch turns electrical circuits on or off when a card key or HS-FOB Key Fob is inserted or removed from its slot. The HS-100 is a low voltage unit with a normally open and normally closed isolated relay, allowing it to interface with a third party energy management and/or lighting management control system. Additionally, the HS-100 can connect to one or more Watt Stopper Power Packs. The HS-150 is a line voltage unit that serves as a master switch for a single guest room circuit.
NEW!
HS-100/HS-150 Shown with coverplate HS-WD
FEATURES
Attractive, low-prole styling Choice of ve decorator colors Backlit card key slot provides visibility in darkened rooms 30-second egress time delay Zero crossing for reliability and increased product longevity (HS-150) Can connect with one or more Watt Stopper Power packs mounted remotely (HS-100) Uses the same card key that unlocks the door More effective compliance with code than a simple master wall switch, as only the HS card Key switch ensures that guests will turn the lights off when leaving the room Compliant with current requirements in both the IECC and ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1 Compatible with building automation systems, energy management systems, and lighting control panels
OPERATION
HS card key switches are ideal for guest rooms in hotels, motels, boarding houses, or similar applications with guest rooms.
11
LIGHITING CONTROLS
OPERATION Inserting a door entry card key or HS-FOB into the HS card key switch energizes the controlled circuits and loads. Removing the card key initiates a 30-second time delay to allow a safe egress from the hotel room. Once this time delay elapses, the power to the circuits is terminated. To restore power to the room controlled circuits, reinsert the card key into the HS card key switch.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage HS100 HS150 Contact Rating Relay Output Egress Time Delay Color Dimensions Card Key (Fob) 24 VAC/VDC Half wave rectied 120/247/277 VAC, 50/60 Hz Zero cross 0-8000W Ballast. Tungsten, 1/4 hp @ 240/277 VAC, switches at zero crossing, SPDT 1A/ 30VDC/VSC SPDT Isolated 30 seconds Black, gray, ivory, light almond, white 3.4"H x 2.1"W x 0.03"D (8.6 x 5.4 x 0.09 cm) Casing (WP) Casing (WLP/WPR) HS100/HS150 Approvals Weight Card Key (Fob) Casing (WP) Casing (WPL/WPR) HS100/HS150 Warranty 2.6"H x 1.7""W x 1.9"D (6.8 x 4.3 x 4.8 cm) 4.7 "H x 6.4"W x 1.9"D (11.9 x 16.3 x 4.8 cm) 2.6"H x 1.7"W x 1.9"D (6.8 x 4.3 x 4.8 cm) UL File E101196 0.04 lb (0.02 kg) 0.06 lb (0.03 kg) 0.12 lb ( 0.05 kg) 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) 5 years
656
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WATTSTOPPER CARD KEY SWITCHES HS-100, HS-150
WIRING
white (Neutral) red (Line)
BZ-50
N.C.
white (Neutral)
white Neutral
Power pack
Local switches
Relay Common N.O.
Local switches
Relay Common N.O.
Lighting load
Controlled receptacles inside the room
GND
GND
Lighting control panel or other building control system
black
blue
red
black Hot/Line
white
black Hot/Line
red* (Load)
Lighting load Lighting load
white Neutral
Lighting load
Lighting load Lighting load
red* (Load)
N.O. +24V IN RLY COMM COMM N.C.
Controlled receptacles inside the room
DIMENSIONS
N.O. +24V IN RLY COMM COMM N.C.
GROUND
24V In Common
+24V In
*When using the Wattstoppers Power Pack do not exceed its maximum load rating.
Common
*When using the Wattstoppers Power Pack do not exceed its maximum load rating.
HS-100 with Power Pack
HS-100 with BAS or Lighting Control Panel
HS-150
4.7 (11.94) 2.63 (6.78)

HS-WP
6.36 (16.16)
HS-WPR
4.7 (11.94)
6.36 (16.16)
HS-WPL
4.7 (11.94)
11
Model HS-100-B HS-100-G HS-100-I HS-100-LA HS-100-W HS-150-B HS-150-G HS-150-I HS-150-LA HS-150-W HS-FOB-B HS-FOB-I HS-FOB-LA HS-FOB-W HS-WP-B HS-WP-G HS-WP-I HS-WP-LA HS-WP-W HS-WPL-I HS-WPL-LA HS-WPL-W HS-WPR-B HS-WPR-G HS-WPR-I HS-WPR-LA HS-WPR-W Color Black Gray Ivory Light almond White Black Gray Ivory Light almond White Black Ivory Light almond White Black Gray Ivory Light almond White Ivory Light almond White Black Gray Ivory Light almond White Description Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered separately Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately Low voltage card key switch, cover plate ordered seperately Optional key fob accessory for guest rooms that do not use a card key Optional key fob accessory for guest rooms that do not use a card key Optional key fob accessory for guest rooms that do not use a card key Optional key fob accessory for guest rooms that do not use a card key Cover plate for single-gang box Cover plate for single-gang box Cover plate for single-gang box Cover plate for single-gang box Cover plate for single-gang box Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the left Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the left Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the left Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the right Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the right Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the right Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the right Cover plate for three-gang box with decorator switch option; card slot on the right
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
657
LIGHTING CONTROLS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
KELE PULSE INITIATOR PIL-1
DESCRIPTION
The PIL-1 Pulse Initiator is designed to provide pulses to latch and unlatch mechanically held or magnetically held lighting contactors (such as the RR-7, RR-9, or TR Series) from maintained contact outputs.
FEATURES
LED indicators: Pulse out (unlatch/latch) Command in (off/on) AC or DC operation Selectable power-up (PUP) state Snap-track mounted
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
OPERATION
11
LIGHITING CONTROLS
The Model PIL-1 is controlled by a single SPST N.C. or N.O. switch or relay. Closing the input contact causes the latch output to close momentarily for 100 ms. Opening the input contact causes the unlatch output to close momentarily for 100 ms. A power-up feature allows the operator to select either an immediate pulse out (PUP position), depending on the present command of the controller, or a pulse out only when the controller input changes state. LEDs indicate input state and output latch or unlatch pulses. Typical control signals would be a digital output from a BAS panel, a light or toggle switch, or a contact on a timer.
in (cm)
PUP
3 (7.62)
PULSE OUT
PIL-1
CMD IN OFF ON 2.38 (6.03)
PWR PWR CMD IN
UL
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Input Output Output Pulse Time 24 VAC/VDC @ 50 mA SPST switch or relay Two N.O. pulsed contacts rated for 120 VAC @ 5A 100 ms standard, others availiable upon request (5 sec max) Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing 2.375"H x 3"W x 1.375"D Dimensions (6.03 x 7.62 x 3.5 cm) Weight 0.25 lb (0.12 kg) Warranty 18 months
658
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
KELE PULSE INITIATOR PIL-1
WIRING
PUP PULSE OUT UL L CMD IN OFF ON
Multiple PIL-1s may be controlled by the same command contact. Wiring polarity must be observed.
PWR PWR CMD IN
UL
24 VAC/VDC
+ -
Power
Latch
(red)
Common
(blue)
Command Contact
Unlatch
(black)
Command
Typical Wiring for Driving 24V Lighting Contactors
To Lighting Circuits RR-7 / RR-9 Lighting Contactor (Up to 10 per PIL-1)
11
PUP
PULSE OUT UL L CMD IN OFF ON
LIGHTING CONTROLS
PWR PWR CMD IN
UL
Latch
+ 24 VAC/VDC Command Contact
Power Power Command Unlatch
Switch Leg to Latch Circuits Switch Leg to Unlatch Circuits
Typical Wiring for Driving Loads other than 24V
MODEL PIL-1 PIL-1-C DESCRIPTION Pulse initiator Pulse initiator with factory-calibrated pulse duration (specify when ordering)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
659
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION
This low voltage relay is used for control of lighting circuits and other electrical loads. Momentary, low voltage pulses from the light control panel control system switch the relays on or off. Mechanical latching operation results in a lower power consumption. The relay will remain in the last switched state in the event of power loss. A manual override switch allow lights to be turned on in the event of panel or relay failure. The relay mounts in a standard knockout and comes with pluggable cable for easy panel connection.
RELAY 5 WIRE WITH OVERRIDE & CONNECTOR HDR
NEW!
HDR
FEATURES
Integral manual override Suitable for use with all HID ballasted loads Expected service life is over 25 years at nominal load and cycle rate 5-pin pluggable connection
11
SPECIFICATIONS
SPST contacts latching with manual override lever Short Circuit Current Rating 14,000 Amps @ 277 VAC Contactor Ballast 30 Amp @ 277 VAC, 20 Amp @ 347 VAC Contactor Tungsten 20 Amp @ 120 VAC 30 Amp @ 347 VAC Resistive Load Relay Terminals #10-#14 AWG gauge wire solid or stranded Operating Temperature 32F to 149F (0C to 60C) Operating Humidity 5 to 90% non-condensing Approvals UL FIle E258542, CSA Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 Kg) 5 years Warranty Relay Type
WIRING
Power terminal connections Manual override switch
Ylw Ylw Red Black Blue
C C C C C
LIGHITING CONTROLS
Pluggable wire connection Blue = 24 VDC to center coil Red = On wire Black = Off wire Ylw = Isolated pilot contacts
MODEL HDR DESCRIPTION Mechanically latching relay with 5-pin plug-in connector, pilot contacts, override switch
LIB Series RR-BRACKET-4
RELATED PRODUCTS Bacnet lighting panel Optional mounting bracket with 4 1/2" KO
660
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Relay Type Coil Impedance Coil Inrush Current Contactor Ballast Contactor Motor Contactor Tungsten Resistive Load Pilot Contact Pulse Rate
LIGHTING CONTROLS
GE LIGHTING RELAYS RR-7, RR-9
GE Model RR-7 and RR-9 Lighting Relays are mechanical latching-type units requiring only momentary 24 VAC switch circuit pulses to open or close line voltage circuits. All GE low voltage relays may be used to full-rated capacity for tungsten lament, ballast, or resistive loads. The Model RR-9 includes an auxiliary contact on the low voltage side for status indication.
CAUTION: The coil is designed to resist burnout if continuous voltage is applied, but coil life will be shortened with prolonged, continuous voltage.
Optional Bracket for RR-7/RR-9 and HDR Relay
RR-7
21-30 VAC (class 2) momentary 30-38 VDC momentary SPST Maintained mechanically latching, SPST Maintained mechanical latching 75-85 @60 Hz unrectied, 55-60 DC resistance 325 mA @ 24 VAC, 450 mA @ 35 VDC 20A at 277 VAC 1/2 hp @ 110-125 VAC, 1/2 hp @ 220-277 VAC 20A lament 125 VAC 30A at 277 VAC 1A, 24 VAC isolated (RR-9 only) Minimum activating 50 ms
Lead Length Wiring
6" (15 cm) Two terminals, two back wiring holes per terminal for use with 14-10 AWG solid or stranded wire (copper wire only) Endurance 50,000 cycles, full load 100,000 cycles, no load Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Operating Humidity 10% to 95% RH noncondensing Mounting Mounts in standard 1/2" KO in 14 or 16 gauge material UL listed File # E18830, CSA Approvals certied 0.3 lb (0.12 kg) Weight Warranty 1 year
11
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DIMENSIONS
0.75 (1.91) 6.13 (15.57) 1.54 (3.91) C L C L 1.54 (3.91) C L 1.54 (3.91) C L 0.75 (1.91)
1.61 (41)
.91 (23)
1.72 (44)
1.41 (36)
1.53 (39)
1.25 (3.18) 2.50 (6.35) C L
RR7 BLACK RED BLUE
RR9 YELLOW YELLOW BLACK RED BLUE
LINE TERMINALS .67 (17) inches (millimeters)
2.50 (6.35)
0.60 (1.52)
0.72 (1.83)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
661
NEW! NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
GE LIGHTING RELAYS RR-7, RR-9
INSTALLATION WIRING
Common (blue) Pilot (yellow) OFF (black)
The relay employs a split low-voltage coil to move the line voltage contact armature to the on or off latched position. The on coil moves the armature to the on position when a 24 VAC control signal is impressed across its leads. This is analogous to a magnet attracting the handle of a standard single-pole switch to the on position when energized. The armature (handle) latches in the on position and will remain there until the off coil is energized, drawing the armature into the off position. This control operation provides several key control features: Positive action The relay always goes to the state commanded. For example, multiple off commands will simply keep the contacts in the off position. Stable operation Since the relay latches in the on or off position, power outages do not result in a change of state. Minimal power consumption Control power is only required when the relay changes state. Additive control functions Pulse control signals coupled with latching allow any number of switches or electronic control devices to operate the same relay. The relay position is always dictated by the last signal.
11
Important Restriction 1. Do not use these relays to switch DC loads. Doing so will damage the power contacts.
On (red)
Off (black)
Common (blue)
On (red)
LIGHITING CONTROLS
On Coil
(blue)
Pilot Contacts (maintained contact)
Off Coil Power Contacts (maintained contact)
20A, 277 VAC (line contacts)
Armature Line Load
RR-7
Armature Line Load
RR-9
MODEL RR-7 RR-7-B RR-7-T RR-9 RR-9-B RR-BRACKET-4 DESCRIPTION Three-wire low voltage leads RR-7 with banana plug connectors RR-7 with connector Five-wire low voltage leads with isolated pilot auxiliary contact RR-9 with banana plug connectors Optional mounting bracket with 4 1/2" KOs
662
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Relay Type Coil Impedance Coil Inrush Current Contactor Ballast Contactor Motor Resistive Load Pilot Contact Pulse Rate
LIGHTING CONTROLS
ILC LIGHTING RELAYS 2R7CDD, 2R9CDD
ILC Model 2R7CDD and 2R9CDD Lighting Relays are mechanical latching-type units requiring only a momentary 24 VDC or VDC switch circuit pulses to open or close line voltage circuits. All ILC low voltage relays may be used to full rated capacity for ballast or resistive loads. The Model 2R9CDD includes an auxillary contact on the low voltage side for status indication.
2R9CDD
Optional RR-Bracket-4 for 2R7CDD and 2R9CDD Relay
18-30 VAC momentary, 12-24 VDC momentary SPST Maintained mechanically latching 68-73 , 50-60 DC resistance 350 mA @ 24 VDC 20 A @ 347 VAC 1 hp @ 120 VAC 20 A @ 347 VAC 1 A, 30 VAC/VDC (2R9CDD only) Minimum activing 17 ms, maximum 250 ms
6" (15 cm) Two terminals, use with 14-10 AWG solid or stranded (copper wire only), wo terminals, use with 14-10 AWG solid or stranded (copper wire only) Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Operating Humidity 10% to 90% RH noncondensing Mounting Mounts in standard 1/2" KO Approvals UL File E66211, FCC Weight 1.0 lb (2.2 kg) Warranty 3 years
Lead Length Wiring
11
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DIMENSIONS
.52 (1.3) 2.1 (5.3)
INSTALLATION
The relay with a minimum of 17 millisecond and maximum of 250 milisecond pulse, by either 24 vac or 24 vdc, will command the relay on. The relay will latch and remain on until the off coil is energized. This control operation provides several key control features: Stable operation Since the relay latches in the on or off position, power outages do not result in a change of state. Minimal power consumption Control power is only required when the relay changes state.
LINE
TOP
FRONT
LOAD
1.5 (3.8)
SIDE
1.8 (4.6)
2R7CDD 2R7CDD Orange Orange Black Black Red Red Blue Blue
Pilot Pilot Off On Common
MODEL 2R7CDD 2R9CDD DESCRIPTION Three-wire low voltage leads Five-wire low voltage leads with isolated pilot auxiliary contact
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
663
LIGHTING CONTROLS
ABB LIGHTING CONTACTORS AF16 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
AF16 Series lighting contactors are electrically-held four-pole contactors available with normally closed or normally open contacts. The contacts are rated for 30A general purpose, ballast and tungsten. Compact size, surface or DIN rail mounting, and a unique detachable coil interface make installation simple. Normally closed contacts ensure the lights stay on if the control circuit fails.
FEATURES
Up to four single-phase loads per contactor 277 VAC and 347 VAC in a single coil Electronic coils eliminate chatter and hum Integral coil surge suppression Four normally open (N.O.) or combo two normally open (N.O.) & two normally closed (N.C.) styles
NEW!
AF16-40
SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency 50/60 Hz Coil Burden 50 VA inrush, 2.2 VA Holding Coil Voltage 24 to 60 VAC, 100 to 500 VAC/VDC Four (N.O. or N.C) Electrically held Contactor Type 30A tungsten, Contactor Current ballast or general purpose Contactor Voltage Max 347 VAC, 1-phase, per pole; Max 600 VAC, 3 phase, break all lines 16-10 AWG copper solid or Wiring stranded 75C, max two wires per terminal Mounting Surface or DIN rail Approvals cULus Listed, File E319322, CE, RoHS compliant Weight 0.69 lb (0.31 kg) Warranty 1 year
WIRING
A1 L1 L2
A2 L3 L4 1
A1 R3
A2 R5 7
11
LIGHITING CONTROLS
T1
T2
T3
T4
R4
R6
Four-pole N.O. Contactor
2 N.O. + 2 N.C. Contactor
DIMENSIONS
77 3.03" 45 1.77" 71 2.80" 5.5 0.22" 6 0.24" 35 1.38 " 4.2 0.17" 2x M4 8-32 UNC
35 mm EN/IEC 60715
60 2.36"
80 3.15"
70 2.76" 5 0.20"
5.5 0.22"
10 0.39"
5 0.20 "
AF16
MODEL AF16-22-00-14 AF16-22-00-41 AF16-22-00-13 AF16-40-00-14 AF16-40-00-41 AF16-40-00-13 DESCRIPTION 2 N.O. + 2 N.C., 30A contactor, 250-500 VAC/VDC coil 2 N.O. + 2 N.C., 30A contactor, 24-60 VAC coil 2 N.O. + 2 N.C., 30A contactor, 100-250 VAC/VDC coil 4 N.O., 30A contactor, 250-500 VAC/VDC coil 4 N.O., 30A contactor, 24-60 VAC coil 4 N.O., 30A contactor, 100-250 VAC/VDC coil
664
60 2.36"
AF16
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Frequency Coil Burden Coil Voltage Contact Type Contactor Ballast Contactor Tungsten Wiring
LIGHTING CONTROLS
AEG LIGHTING CONTACTORS LS7K SERIES
The LS7K Series Lighting Contactors are electrically held and are available in four-pole normally closed or normally open congurations. The 30 amp contacts are fully rated for general purpose and ballast lighting loads. Compact size and two mounting methods make installation easy, and use of the normally-closed style may eliminate the need for a more expensive latching contactor to keep lights on should the control circuit fail. DIN or surface mounting Easy parts replacement Normally closed (N.C.) or normally-open (N.O.) fourpole style
LS7K-04
50/60 Hz 45 VA inrush, 6 VA Holding 24 VAC, 120 VAC or 277 VAC Four (N.O. or N.C.) Electronically Held 30 A @ 600 VAC 20A at 277 VAC 14-10 AWG 75C copper only
Mounting Approvals Weight Warranty
Surface or DIN rail UL listed File #E76233, CE 0.66 lb (0.3 kg) 1 year
NOTE: Electrically held contactors and starters can emit a humming noise when the coil is energized.
11
DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS
LIGHTING CONTROLS
A1 R1 R3
A2 R5 R7 R1
A1 R3
A2 R5 R7
3.35 (8.5)
R2
R4
R6
R8
R2
R4
R6
R8
3.18 (8.1) 1.77 (4.50)
Four-pole N.C. Contactor
Four-pole N.O. Contactor
LS7K-04-A/G LS7K-40-A/G
MODEL LS7K-04-A LS7K-04-G LS7K-40-A LS7K-40-G LS7K-04-H LS7K-40-H DESCRIPTION Four-pole, N.C., 30A contactor, 120 VAC coil Four-pole, N.C., 30A contactor, 24 VAC coil Four-pole, N.O., 30A contactor, 120 VAC coil Four-pole, N.O., 30A contactor, 24 VAC coil Four-pole, N.C., 30A contactor, 277 VAC coil Four-pole, N.O., 30A contactor, 277 VAC coil
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
665
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION
Watt Stopper/Legrand's Emergency Lighting Control Unit ELCU-100 is a self-contained, reliable, easy-to-install device. The ELCU provides all required functionality to allow any standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building.
WATTSTOPPER EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL ELCU-100
NEW!
OPERATION
Housing Type Fire rated V-0, 80C Approvals UL 924 listed, le #E302768 Meets NFPA, OSHA, and NEC safety codes Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Warranty 5 years
FEATURES
Eliminates energy waste caused by "always ON" emergency lighting Integral push-to-test button activates emergency mode for a true test condition Connects to remote test switch or other input to activate emergency ON from a remote location Operates as a control device or as a shunt Senses local single circuit power failure Zero-crossing switching relay technology
LED indication for emergency and normal power Half-second delayed ON positively identies emergency Provides absolute fail-to-on emergency lighting
11
APPLICATION
The ELCU is designed to control lighting in areas where emergency lighting xtures are connected to dedicated circuits that are typically on 24 hours per day. The ELCU allows normal control of emergency lighting for energy savings and/or task related reasons while strictly adhering to National Electric Code requirements. It is suitable for any application where enhanced energy saving is desired.
LIGHITING CONTROLS
MOUNTING
The ELCU is equipped with an integral DIN rail mounting groove and retaining clip mechanism. It can be installed on the DIN rail track provided within a WattStopper enclosure (e.g., LS-E8, LSE12), or in a WattStopper lighting control panel.
The ELCU monitors a single circuit that provides normal lighting to an area. As long as normal power is present, the ELCU permits lighting control devices (i.e., occupancy sensors, panels, dimmers, or wall switches) to control the emergency lighting xtures as well as the general lighting. If power is lost for any reason, including the tripping of a single branch circuit breaker, the ELCU will force the emergency xtures for that area on. The ELCU can be wired either as a control device, so that emergency lighting follows the control of normal lighting, or as a bypass device to shunt emergency power around a control device when normal power fails.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Contactor Ballast Contactor Motor Contactor Tungsten Activation Test Control Dimensions 120/277 VAC; 60 Hz 10A @ 120 VAC; 10A @ 277 VAC 1HP @ 120 VAC maximum load 2A @ 120 VAC maximum load Supplies 24 VDC source for dry contact closure Push-to-test button on unit 2.78"H x 3.44"W x 2.63"D (7.1 x 8.7 x 6.7 cm)
666
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING Wired as a control device
Emergency Line Normal Neutral
ON/OFF Control Device
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WATTSTOPPER EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL ELCU-100

Wired as a shunt
Emergency Line Normal Neutral
Sensing Line
Jumper Wire or Normally Closed Input from Test Switch Fire Alarm Input Security Input Other
Normal Lighting
Dimmer
Normal Lighting
Sensing Line
Switching Line
Normal Power
Line Neutral Switch In In
Remote Remote In Out +24 VDC
Jumper Wire or Normally Closed Input from Test Switch Fire Alarm Input Security Input Other
Normal Power
Line Neutral Switch In In
ELCU-100
ELCU-100
Emergency Power
Line Out
Line Neutral In
Emergency Power
Line Out
Line Neutral In
Emergency Line Emergency Lighting Emergency Neutral
Emergency Line
Dimmer
Emergency Lighting
11
Emergency Neutral
When wired as a control device, the ECLU receives a switching signal from the output of the control device (relay, switch, power pack, etc.)
When wired as a shunt, the switching line is not used. Note: Use with WattStopper universal dimmers or contact dimmer manufacturer to determine the suitability of the specified dimmer for shunt operation.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Normal Power Normal Power Sense
Normal Control Device
Normal ON/OFF Normal Switching Signal Normal Lighting
Normal Power
Normal Power Sense
Normal Power
Line Neut. Switch In In
Normal Power
Line Neut. Switch In In
ELCU-100 Emergency Power

Emergency Power
Line Out Line In Neut
Normal ON/OFF Emergency ON Emergency Lighting Emergency Power
ELCU-100
Emergency Power
Line Out Line In Neut
Control Device
Normal Control Emergency Lighting
Emergency ON
MODEL ELCU-100 DESCRIPTION Emergency lighting control unit, 120/277 VAC 60 Hz
EMTS-100 LS-E12 LS-E8
ACCESSORIES Remote test switch on single gang plate, 24 VDC, normally closed contact Surface mount enclosure for up to 6 ECLU units, includes screw cover and DIN rail Surface mount enclosure for 1 or 2 ECLU units, includes screw cover and DIN rail
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
667
LIGHTING CONTROLS
EMERGENCY UL924 BYPASS/ SHUNT RELAYS ELCU-200
DESCRIPTION
The ELCU-200 Emergency Lighting Control Unit is a selfcontained device that allows any standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building. If power is lost for any reason, including the tripping of a single branch circuit breaker, the ELCU-200 will force on the emergency xtures for that area. The ELCU-200 can be wired either as a control device, so that emergency lighting follows the control of normal lighting, or as a bypass device to shunt emergency power around a control device (e.g., a dimmer) when normal power fails.
NEW!
ELCU-200
FEATURES
Eliminates energy waste caused by emergency lighting that is always on Integral push-to-test button activates emergency mode for a true test condition Connects to EMTS-100 Remote Test Switch or other input to activate emergency on from a remote location Operates as a control device or as a shunt Senses local single circuit power failure Zero cross switching technology for reliability and increased product life Compatible with WattStopper occupancy sensors, daylighting controls, lighting control panels, and dimmers LED indication for emergency and normal power Half-second delayed on positively identies emergency xtures for required maintenance Provides absolute fail-to-on emergency lighting Qualies for use on ARRA-funded projects
11
LIGHITING CONTROLS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Frequency Maximum Load Ballast Incandescent Motor Activation 120/277 VAC 60 Hz Dimensions Housing Type Approvals 1.7"H x 2.97"W x 1.64"D (43.2mm x 75.4mm x 41.7mm) with a 1/2" (12.7mm) threaded nipple Fire rated V-0, 176F (80C) UL Listed, cUL listed for Emergency Lighting and Power, E302768 Meets NEC, OSHA, and NFPA safety codes; UL 2043 plenum rated 0.44 lb (0.2 kg) 5 years
20A @ 120/277 VAC 10A @ 120 VAC 1HP @ 120 VAC Supplies 24 VDC source for dry contact closure. Push-to-test button on unit. Operating Temperature 32 to 131F (0 to 55C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95%, noncondensing
Weight Warranty
668
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Normal Line Normal Neutral
Emergency Line Always On
LIGHTING CONTROLS
EMERGENCY UL924 BYPASS/ SHUNT RELAYS ELCU-200
Wiring for a Shunt or Bypass Device

Dimmer Normal Power Sense Emergency Neutral Emergency Power Out
Remote Activation Normal Power
Normal Lighting Normal Neutral Cap
Emergency Power In
Normal Switch Sense
Push to Test
EMERGENCY CIRCUIT
Emergency Power
Circle CUT -OUT R 8 m .5 m
Cir.#_______
09
86
0r
Cut Jumper Loop to use with normally closed - Test switch - Fire alarm panel - Security panel - Other Emergency Lighting
Dimmer
Emergency Neutral
When wired as a shunt, the switching line is not used. Note: Use with WattStopper universal dimmers or contact dimmer manufacturer to determine the suitablity of the specified dimmer for shunt operation.
11
Wiring for a Control Device

Normal Line Normal Neutral Emergency Power In Emergency Neutral Emergency Power Out
Remote Activation Normal Power
Control Device Normal Power Sense Normal Neutral
Normal Lighting
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Normal Switch Sense
Push to Test
EMERGENCY CIRCUIT
Emergency Power
Circle CUT -OUT R 8 m .5 m
Cir.#_______
09
86
0r 1
Cut Jumper Loop to use with normally closed - Test switch - Fire alarm panel - Security panel - Other Emergency Lighting
Emergency Line Always On
Emergency Neutral
When wired as a control device, the ELCU-200 receives a switching signal from the output of the control device (relay, switch, power pack, etc.)
MODEL ELCU-200 ELCU-200-U EMTS-100 DESCRIPTION Emergency Lighting Control Unit Emergency Lighting Control unit, ARRA- compliant ACCESSORIES Remote test switch on single gang plate, 24 VDC, normally closed contact
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
669
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION
These ESR Series UL924 Emergency Lighting Shunt Relays, or Bypass Relays, are designed for applications that require an emergency load, such as exit lighting or any other emergency lighting, to be switched on during a loss of normal power. The economically priced relays are available prepackaged in their own Nema 1 enclosure or in panel versions to be installed inside an existing enclosure. Emergency lighting relays can be ordered with a standard two-position on/auto override switch. The override switch models can be used for testing purposes to verify your emergency load is being switched properly.
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES EMERGENCY BYPASS / SHUNT RELAYS ESR SERIES
NEW!
ESRU1C
Emergency Lighting ESRU1C Normal Circuit Breaker Panel
Hot Wht/Blk Neutral Wht/Yel Light Switch
APPLICATION
11
When normal power is present, the ESR relay coil is activated and the emergency panel is fed from normal power. The lighting load can be switched on/off using an individual wall switch. When normal power drops out, the ESR coil is deactivated and N/C contact falls closed. The automatic transfer switch changes over to backup (generator) power, and the lighting load is illuminated regardless of the position of the wall switch. Models that have override test switches are set in the auto position from the factory. This allows emergency power to be switched to the load. To test eld wiring connections at the time of installation, the override test switch should be changed to the "closed" position (illuminating emergency lighting), and then placed back to the "auto" position. The red LED shows the normal utility power is connected correctly.
WIRING
EXAMPLE WIRING FOR ESRU1C
Normal Power
LIGHITING CONTROLS
Transfer Switch Emergency Circuit Breaker Panel Emergency Power

ie. Generator/ Battery Backup Hot Blu Yel
Neutral
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VAC/VDC, 120 VAC, 208-277 VAC 10 million cycles minimum mechanical Coil Continuous duty Frequency 50 - 60 Hz Operate Time 18-20 ms Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (-34 to 60C) Enclosure Rating Plenum, NEMA 1 LED Indication Relay status LED, on = activated Dimensions Size A: 2.3" x 3.2" x 1.8" (5.8 x 8.1 x 4.6 cm) Size B: 4" x 4" x 1.8" (10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm) Size J: 1.7" x 2.8" x 1.5" (4.3 x 7.1 x 3.8 cm) Supply Voltage Relay Life Size M: Size N: Size O: Approvals Warranty 1.6" x 4" x 1.8" (4.1 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm) 1.7" x 2.8" x 1.80" (4.3 x 7.1 x 4.6 cm) 1.3" x 4" x 1.80" (3.3 x10.2 x 4.6 cm) UL Listed, UL924, C-UL, CE 5 year
670
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Selectable jumper wire Common LOW VAC/VDC CLOSED HIGH VAC AUTO Not used
LIGHTING CONTROLS
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES UL924 EMERGENCY BYPASS / SHUNT RELAYS ESR SERIES
HIGH VAC Comm CLOSED AUTO LOW VAC/DC Org Org Comm
LOW VAC/VDC
N/O
Common
HIGH VAC
N/C
Typical of ESRM2402SB
Typical of ESR1S-NC, 2401SB-NC, 2402SB-NC, RU1S-NC

HIGH VAC N.C.
Typical of ESRM2402B
HIGH VAC LOW VAC/DC Comm
N/C Comm N/O N/C Comm N/O
Color Coding Of Wires

White/Yellow Common 24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 208-277 VAC Normally Closed Common Normally Open Coil Coil Coil Coil Contact Contact Contact White/Blue White/Black White/Brown
LOW VAC/VDC
Common
Common
N.O.
Blue Yellow Orange
Typical of ESR01P, 02P, 24P
Typical of ESR2402B, U1C, H1C, 2401B, MU1C, MNU1C, 2402B
Model ESRU1C Coil Voltage Relay Type SPDT SPST-NC SPDT SPST-NC SPDT SPST-NC SPDT SPST-NC DPDT DPDT DPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT SPST Resistive Load Contactor Ballast Coil Current Override Weight 0.4 lb (0.2 kg) Yes 0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg) 0.4 lb (0.2 kg) Yes 0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg) 0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg) Yes 0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg) 0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg) Yes 0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg) 1 lb (0.5 kg) 0.5 lb ( 0.22 kg) 1 lb (0.5 kg) 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) Yes 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) Size J
11
10-30 VAC/ VDC; 120 VAC 10-30 VAC/ VDC; ESRU1S-NC 120 VAC 10-30 VAC/ VDC; ESRH1C 208-277 VAC 10-30 VAC/ VDC; ESRH1S-NC 208-277 VAC 24 VAC/ VDC; ESR2401B 120 VAC 24 VAC/ VDC; ESR2401SB-NC 120 VAC 24 VAC/ VDC; ESR2402B 208-277 VAC 24 VAC/ VDC; ESR2402SB-NC 208-277 VAC ESR24P ESR01P ESR02P ESRMU1C 24 VAC/ VDC 120 VAC 208-277 VAC
10-30 VAC/ VDC; 120 VAC 10-30 VAC/ VDC; ESRMNU1C 120 VAC 24 VAC/ VDC; ESRM2402B 208-277 VAC 24 VAC/ VDC; ESRM2402SB 208-277 VAC
10A @ 120-277 24 VAC-46 mA, 24 VDC-18 480 VA @ 277 VAC, 28 VDC mA, 120 VAC-28 mA 24 VAC-46 mA, 24 VDC-18 10A @ 277 VAC 480 VA @ 277 mA, 120 VAC-28 mA 10A @ 120-277 24 VAC-46 mA, 24 VDC-18 480 VA @ 277 VAC mA, 208-277 VAC-39 mA 10A @ 24 VAC-46 mA, 24 VDC-18 10A @ 277 VAC 120/277 mA, 208-277 VAC-39 mA 10A @ 24 VAC-83 mA, 24 VDC-35 20A @ 277 VAC 120/277 mA, 120 VAC-47 mA 10A @ 24 VAC-83 mA, 24 VDC-35 20A @ 277 VAC 120/277 mA, 120 VAC-47 mA 10A @ 24 VAC-83 mA, 24 VDC-35 20A @ 277 VAC 120/277 mA, 208-277 VAC-69 mA 10A @ 24 VAC-83 mA, 24 VDC-35 20A @ 277 VAC 120/277 mA, 208-277 VAC-69 mA 20A @300 VAC, 20A @ 277- 24 VAC-138 mA, 24 VDC-55 28 VDC 480 mA 20A @300 VAC, 20A @ 277120 VAC-105 mA 28 VDC 480 20A @300 VAC, 20A @ 277208-277 VAC-105 mA 28 VDC 480 15A @ 150 24 VAC-46 mA, 24 VDC-18 480 VA @ 277 VAC, 28 VDC mA, 120 VAC-28 mA 15A @ 150 24 VAC-46 mA, 24 VDC-18 480 VA @ 277 VAC, 28 VDC mA, 120 VAC-28 mA 10A @ 24 VAC-83 mA, 24 VDC-35 20A @ 277 VAC 120/277 mA, 208-277 VAC-69 mA 10A @ 24 VAC-83 mA, 24 VDC-35 20A @ 277 VAC 120/277 mA, 208-277 VAC-69 mA
LIGHTING CONTROLS
A J A A A A A B B B O N M O
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
671
NEW! NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
KELE FLUORESCENT DIMMING CONTROL MODULE LDIM2
DESCRIPTION
The Model LDIM2 is a uorescent dimming control for dimmable electronic ballasts. It is designed for single 0-10V output with a 0-10V input or a PWM input. Feedback is provided for light level setpointand light level output. It is an energy saving, low cost device that is easily installed. The LDIM2 requires dimmable ballasts designed for an analog 0-10V input. FEATURES
11
For controlling 0-10 VDC electronically dimmable ballasts 0.5 amp output capacity Fused output 0-10 VDC light level setpoint 24 VAC/VDC PWM light level setpoint 4-20 mA light level setpoint feedback 4-20 mA light level output feedback 24 VAC power Status LED Light output electrically isolated from automation system signals Fail-safe feature sets output to full-bright if input signal is lost Manual override of setpoint input 3.25" x 6.00" snap-track mount
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS (0 = OFF, 1 = ON)

LDIM Light Dimmer PWM Input Analog Input Go 100% Bright On Signal Loss Maintain Current Brightness On Signal Loss No Manual Override Manual Override 40% Manual Override 50% Manual Override 60% Manual Override 70% Manual Override 80% Manual Override 90% Manual Override 100% PWM Timebase, 0.59-2.93 sec (SW1 = Off) 0.1-2.65 sec Timebase 0.1-5.2 sec Timebase 0.1-12.85 sec Timebase 0.1-25.6 sec Timebase Analog Input Range (SW1 = On) 0-10V 2-10V 0 0 0 0 0 1 DIP Switch Assignments SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VAC @ 250 mA10% 50 k 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC, or PWM (Adjustable 0.1 to 25.6 seconds) Output 0-10 VDC, sinking, 0.50 amp max load Wiring Terminations Removable terminal block 40% to 100% (adjustable) Manual Override Dip Switches 8 postition Feedback Two 4-20 mA (setpoint and output) Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing Warranty 2 years
LIGHITING CONTROLS
Supply Voltage Input Impedance Input Signal
GREEN STATUS LED OPERATION

Solid Off (No Power) Indicates that 24VAC power is missing. Any time power is applied, the LED should not be solid off. Solid On (Normal) The LED is solid on for: Analog input, no override, no PWM pulse present, not in Lost Analog Input state. PWM input, no override, no PWM pulse present, not in Lost PWM state. Blink-Blink-Pause (Override) This occurs when the board is in Override state and no PWM pulse is present. Blink-Blink-Blink-Pause (Lost PWM or Lost Analog Input) This occurs in the PWM state, no override, when a pulse has not been received for 10 seconds (i.e.,Lost PWM state). This occurs in the analog input state, no override, no PWM pulse present, when the input value drops below 0.3 volts (i.e., Lost Analog Input state). The input value must rise above 0.5V to return to normal operation. Rapid Blink (PWM Pulse Active) Any time a PWM pulse is active, the Status LED will blink rapidly. This is true even in the analog input and override modes. The rationale for this is that you may have the board in the analog input or override mode because there is a problem with the pulses coming from the controller, and this way you can visually tell when the pulses have been restored. The PWM pulse does not affect the output in the analog input and override modes, just the Status LED.
672
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
Electrical Isolation
0-10V / 2-10V Light Level Setpoint from Automation System
Setpoint PWM Input Setpoint PWM Input 24 VDC Loop Power IN Light Output Feedback mA Setpoint Feedback mA 0-10V Setpoint Input 24 VAC Power Common
24 VAC V OUT
VIN
24 VAC V out
Vin
Power Supply Transformer
0-10V / 2-10V Analog Setpoint Signal from Automation System (Feedback circuits not shown)
Pulse-Width Setpoint Input Using Boards Power Supply (Feedback circuits not shown)
24 VDC Power
0-10V Dimmable Electronic Ballast
GND
SIG
Light Output Feedback (4-20 mA) Setpoint Feedback + 24 VDC (4-20 mA) + Automation mA Input + Automation mA Input
LDIM2
Setpoint PWM Input Setpoint PWM Input 24 VDC Loop Power IN Light Output Feedback mA Setpoint Feedback mA 0-10V Setpoint Input 24 VAC Power Common FBK PWR EXT SPT INT OUT EXT Jumpers
To dimming ballast 0.5A max
NEW! NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
KELE FLUORESCENT DIMMING CONTROL MODULE LDIM2
WIRING
0-10V Dimmable Electronic Ballast 0-10V Dimmable Electronic Ballast
GND
GND
SIG
LDIM2
PWM Input is isolated and polarity insensitive
0-10V Dimmable Electronic Ballast LDIM2
GND
SIG
Automation System PWM Contacts
SIG
GND
SIG
Independent Power Supply 24 VAC or VDC
GND
11
SIG
24 VAC
PWM Input is isolated and polarity insensitive Automation System PWM Contacts
LDIM2
Powering Both mA Feedback Signals with External 24 VDC Loop Supply
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Light Output Feedback (4-20 mA) Setpoint Feedback (4-20 mA) + Automation mA Input + Automation mA Input
LDIM2
Setpoint PWM Input Setpoint PWM Input 24 VDC Loop Power IN Light Output Feedback mA Setpoint Feedback mA 0-10V Setpoint Input 24 VAC Power Common Either mA output may be powered internally, but not both FBK PWR EXT SPT INT OUT EXT Jumpers Choose one output
24 VAC
24 VAC V out
Vin
Powering Single mA Feedback Signal Internally from LDIM2

24 VDC Power Light Output Feedback (4-20 mA) Setpoint Feedback + 24 VDC (4-20 mA) + Automation mA Input + Automation mA Input
Pulse-Width Setpoint Input Using Independent Power Supply (Feedback circuits not shown)
LDIM2
Setpoint feedback powered by external supply FBK PWR EXT SPT INT OUT EXT Jumpers Either output can be powered from either source
+24 VDC 2.7K-10K Resistor
LDIM2
Light Output
24 VAC
Setpoint PWM Input Setpoint PWM Input 24 VDC Loop Power IN Light Output Feedback mA Setpoint Feedback mA 0-10V Setpoint Input 24 VAC Power Common Output feedback powered by internal supply
Voltmeter
24 VDC
Testing LDIM2 Output Without Lighting Ballast(s) Attached
Powering One mA Feedback Signal with External 24 VDC Loop Supply and One mA Feedback Signal Internally from LDIM2
MODEL LDIM2 DESCRIPTION Fluorescent dimming control
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
673
NEW! NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
ELECTRONIC TIME CLOCKS ET SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Models ET90115C/CR and ET90215C/CR are one- and two-channel electronic time clocks that provide simple, inexpensive control of lighting, HVAC equipment, commercial ovens, fans, blowers and pumps or any electrical load with a time-of-day schedule. These microprocessor-controlled models offer the ultimate in control and application exibility. A simple keypad combined with a large backlit menu based display make models ET90115C/CR and ET90215C/CR easy to program.
FEATURES
24 hour, 7 day or 365 day scheduling Automatically adjust for daylight savings time Holiday programming (up to 99 schedules) Lifetime memory for program data with 4000+ events Power loss back up of 100 hours Remote override option One- and Two-circuit models Large backlit menu based display and simple keyboard Auto review for easy programming review, with help message for omissions Available in NEMA 1 and NEMA 3R (lockable enclosures
ET Series
11
WIRING
Circuit #1
Circuit #2 *
LIGHITING CONTROLS
T
TIMER
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Frequency Contact Resistance 120277 VAC, 27 watts 50/60 Hz 20A (NO), 10A (NC) @ 12-240 VAC, 28 VDC Contactor Ballast 20A (NO), 3A (NC) @ 120-277 VAC 1 hp @ 120 VAC, 2 hp @ 240 VAC Contactor Motor 470 VA pilot duty @ 12-240 VAC Contactor Tungsten 5A (NO) @ 12-240 VAC Relay Output SPDT contacts Channels One, Two Operating Temperature -40F to 120F (-40C to 50C) Dimensions NEMA 1 7.88"H x 5.0"W x 3.0"D (20 x 12.7 x 7.6 cm) NEMA 3R 9.88"H x 5.6"W x 3.6"D (25.1 x 14.3 x 9.2 cm) Enclosure Rating NEMA 1, NEMA 3R Approvals CSA certied Weight NEMA 1 2.5 lb (1.1 kg) NEMA 3R 3.4 lb (1.5 kg) Warranty 1 year
120/277 VAC
AC IN
NC-1
NO-1
COM1
NC-2
NO-2
COM2
Neutral Hot
*Model-specific
MODEL ET90115C ET90115CR ET90215C ET79215CR DESCRIPTION Single-channel time clock, 120 VAC, NEMA 1 Single-channel time clock, 120 VAC, NEMA 3R Two-channel time clock, 120 VAC, NEMA 1 Two-channel time clock, 120 VAC, NEMA 3R
674
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
ELECTRONIC TIME CLOCKS FM_D SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The FM1D50 Series Electronic Time Clocks are compact time controls providing 24-hour or 7-day time-based switching of HVAC control circuits, lighting, or machinery. The FM1D50 is a single-circuit control and the FM2D50 is a two-circuit control. They utilize heavy-duty, 16A, SPDT relay contacts suitable for low- or line- voltage loads.
FEATURES

24-hour or 7-day programming with easy 4-button interface 50 programs and 20 program models 24 VAC or 120 VAC models Automatic daylight time changeover Large LCD display of day, time, and load status Manual override of each circuit Eighth-day holiday programming UL recognized, CE certied
FM1D50A-120
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA Supply Frequency Battery Connection Type Contactor Ballast Contactor Motor Contactor Tungsten Resistive Load Relay Output Accuracy 24 VAC/VDC, 120V, 240 V 4.4 VA max 50/60 Hz Three year battery life Screw terminals, 12 AWG maximum (NO) 8A @ 240 VAC, 12A @120 VAC (NO) 1/2 hp, 120 VAC; 1 hp, 240 VAC; (NC) 360 VA @ 120 VAC (NO) 1000W @ 240 VAC, 600W @120 VAC (NC) 16A @ 277 VAC SPDT 4 minutes per year Shortest Switch Time Operating Temperature Enclosure Dimensions 1 Channel 2 Channel Enclosure Rating Approvals Weight Warranty 1 minute -13 to 131F (-25 to 55C) Plastic with terminal cover 2.4"H x 2.4"W x 2.3"D (6.0 x 6.0 x 5.8 cm) 4"H x 2.8"W x 2.3"D (10.2 x 7.2 x 5.8 cm) NEMA 3R UL recognized component, le E10694; CE certied 0.5 lb ( 0.23 kg) 1 year
11
LIGHTING CONTROLS
WIRING
N.O. M 1 2 N.O. 3 4 N.C. 5 1 M 2 3 4 5 Circuit 1 6 7 8 Circuit 2 N.C. N.O. N.C.
Input Power
Isolated Contacts Output
Input Power
Isolated Contacts Output
Note: Screw terminals accept up to #12 AWG wire
FM1D50A
Model FM1D20A-24 FM1D20A-120 FM1D20A-240 FM1D50A-24 FM1D50A-120 FM1D50E-24 FM2D50-24 FM2D50-120 Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC 120V 240 V 24 VAC/VDC 120V 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 120V
Note: Screw terminals accept up to #12 AWG wire
Channels 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 Mounting
FM2D50
Additional Specications 20 programs 20 programs 20 programs 50 programs 50 programs 50 programs 50 programs 50 programs
Surface/ DIN rail Surface/ DIN rail Surface/ DIN rail Surface/ DIN rail Surface/ DIN rail Flush Surface/ DIN rail Surface/ DIN rail
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
675
LIGHTING CONTROLS
MARKTIME FAN LIGHT TIME SWITCH 42000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
42000 Series In-Wall Timers are perfect for automatic shutoff control of ventilation in high humidity areas, bath fans and whole house fans. For high humidity areas; switch turns ON a light and fan simultaneously. Turn light OFF, fan remains ON for a preset time.
FEATURES
Control of fan/light with one switch Solid state components for long life Single or multi-ganged installation 1 to 60 minute time delay setting Two position switch: On/Timed Fan Three position switch: On/Off/Timed Fan White or Ivory available Standard wall box mount Package includes installation hardware Wall Plate not included
NEW!
42513 42702-1 (Shown with wall plate)
WIRING
11
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 120 VAC, 60 Hz Power Rating Models 425xx 1/3 HP; 500W Incandescent (Do not use with uorescent lamp ballasts or CFLs) Model 42702-1 1/6 HP; 500 watts incandescent/tungsten; 200VA uorescent ballasts Contact Type N.O., SPST Time Delay Models 425xx 1 to 60 minutes settings Model 42702-1 20 to 60 minutes preset range Lead Wire 6" Enclosure ABS, UL94 5V-A, UL94V0 I. Standard Fan/Light Application Dimensions 42503/42507 4-1/8"H x 1-"W x 1 "D mm BLACK BLUE LINE WIRE WIRE 42513/42517 4"H X 1-"W X 1-"D mm WHITE NEUTRAL WIRE LIGHT 42702-1 4-1/8"H x 1-"W x 2"D mm RED Mounting Standard wall box WIRE GREEN GROUND WIRE Approvals UL, cUL Weight 0.4 lb (0.181kg) FAN MOTOR Warranty 1 year
42513
I. Standard Fan/Light Application
BLACK WIRE BLUE WIRE
II. Single Timed Load Applic

BLACK WIRE BLUE WIRE
AT W LINE LINE
LIGHITING CONTROLS
WHITE NEUTRAL WIRE
LIGHT RED WIRE
WHITE NEUTRAL WIRE RED WIRE GROUND GREEN WIRE
GROUND
GREEN WIRE
FAN MOTOR
LO
II. Single Timed Load Application

ATTACH TO WIRE NUT LINE BLACK WIRE BLUE WIRE
WHITE NEUTRAL WIRE RED WIRE GROUND GREEN WIRE
LOAD
42702-1
Model 42503 42507 42513 42517 42702-1 Maximum Time Setting 60 mins. 60 mins. 60 mins. 60 mins. 20 mins 40 mins. 60 mins. Mode of Activation 3 Position Toggle 3 Position Toggle 2 Position Toggle 2 Position Toggle Push Button Mounting Style Wall Box Wall Box Wall Box Wall Box Wall Box Switch Configuration 2 SPST 2 SPST 2 SPST 2 SPST 2 SPST Contact Position OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Power 1/3 hp 500 Watts 1/3 hp 500 Watts 1/3 hp 500 Watts 1/3 hp 500 Watts 1/6 hp 500 Watts Approvals cUL UL cUL UL cUL UL cUL UL cUL UL Color Ivory White Ivory White Ivory White
676
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
LIGHTING CONTROLS
MANUAL TIME SWITCH 93000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Marktime 93000 Series Wall Box Time Switch is a spring wound, manually set time switch for the control of electrical current. Interchangeable with standard toggle switches to turn circuits either off or on at the end of a preset time period, the 93000 Series is ideally suited for new installations or retrot projects.
FEATURES
White and ivory plates and knobs included with each time switch Time range from minutes to 12 hours, all with 5% accuracy Easy-to-install two-wire design to t standard singlegang wall box Heavy motor loads without the need of contactors Hold-Change of state without timer No Hold-Change of state with timer
93504C
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.28 (0.7)
7A Tungsten @ 125 VAC 20A noninuductive, 1 Hp 125 VAC 10A noninductive @ 277 VAC Contact Type N.O./ N.C. SPDT Operating Temperature -40 to 120C ( -40 to 49C) Single gang wallbox Mounting Color Ivory and White included Approvals UL Listed, File E13151 Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg) Warranty 1 year
Current Rating
3.8 (9.7)
3.3 (8.4)
SPECIFICATIONS
11
2 x 0.2 (0.5) 1.8 (4.5)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
1.2 (3.1) 0.1 (0.2) 1.1 (2.9)
WIRING
Line 1
Load 1 N.O. N.C. Load 2
Line 2
Note: For SPDT operation, install jumper wire from Line 1 terminal to the Line 2 terminal
0.7 (1.8)
MODEL 93501C 93502C 93503C 93504C 93505C 93506C 93507C 93511C 93512C 93513C 93516C DESCRIPTION 0-15 min. timer includes knob and trim plate 0-30 min. timer includes knob and trim plate 0-60 min. timer includes knob and trim plate 0-120 min. timer includes knob and trim plate 0-6 hr. timer includes knob and trim plate 0-12 hr. timer includes knob and trim plate 0-4 hr. timer includes knob and trim plate 0-15 min. timer with Hold, includes knob and trim plate 0-30 min. timer with Hold, includes knob and trim plate 0-60 min. timer with Hold, includes knob and trim plate 0-12 hr. timer with Hold, includes knob and trim plate
2.7 (6.9)
0.18 (0.5)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
677
LIGHTING CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION
The PTS Series Electronic Auto Shut-off Timer Switches provide a simple to use and simple to apply lighting control alternative to wall switch occupancy sensors. These elegant decorator style wall stations each provide six preset countdown timer selections as well as an on/off push-button.
SENSOR SWITCH LINE VOLTAGE TIMER SWITCH PTS SERIES
FEATURES
Self-contained relay Interchangeable hot & load wires No neutral connection required Self-grounding mounting strap No minimum load requirement Push-button programmable w/o removing switch plate Fixed or Adjustable Preset Times LED ashes for last 30 sec of buttons time setting Green on/off switch status LED Green LED time indicators Wall plate included
NEW!
PTS-60 PTS-720
SPECIFICATIONS
800/1200/1500 W @ 120/277/347 VAC Frequency 50/60 Hz Motor Load 1/4 HP Time Scale PTS-60 60, 30, 15, 10, 5, 2 min PTS-720 12hr, 8hr, 4hr, 2hr, 60min, 30min Operating Temperature 14 to 160F (-10 to 71C) 20-90% non-condensing Operating Humidity Mounting Wall, single gang switch box 4.2"H x 1.8"W x 1.5"D Dimensions (10.67 x 4.57 x 3.81 cm) Approvals ETL listed Weight 0.32 lb (0.15 kg) Warranty 5 year limited Supply Voltage
11
WIRING
PROGRAMMING
H BLK BLK GND
LOAD
LIGHITING CONTROLS
Function Number 2 3 4 5 5
Function Name Blink Warning Beep Warning Status Tick Max Time Allowable (model # PTS 60) Max Time Allowable (model # PTS 720) Default Time - when on/off button pressed (model # PTS 60) Default Time - when on/off button pressed (model # PTS 720) Factory Defaults 2. Disabled 1. Enabled*
Settings (*indicates default setting) 1. Enabled 2 min & 1 min* 3. Enabled 1 min 4. Enabled 2 min 2. Disabled 2. Disabled* 3. 15 min 4. 10 min 3. 4 hr 4. 2 hr 4. 10 min 5. 5 min 6. 2 min 4. 2 hr 5. 60 min 6. 30 min 2. Restore defaults 7. Last time selected* 3. Enabled, (ticks every 0.5 sec) 5. 5 min 6. 2 min 5. 60 min 6. 30 min 7. Last time selected*
1. Enabled (ticks every 1 sec) 1. 60 min* 2. 30 min 1. 12 hr* 2. 8 hr 1. 60 min 2. 30 min 3. 15 min 1. 12 hr 2. 8 hr 3. 4 hr 1. Maintain current*
Note: Connection to Ground required for sensor to function
MODEL PTS-60-AL PTS-60-GY PTS-60-IV PTS-60-WH PTS-720-AL PTS-720-GY PTS-720-IV PTS-720-WH DESCRIPTION Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 60Min, Lite Almond Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 60Min, Gray Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 60Min, Ivory Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 60Min, White Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 60Min, Lite Almond Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 12Hr, Gray Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 12Hr, Ivory Prog. Interval Timer Switch, Line Voltage, 12Hr, White
678
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

LIGHTING CONTROLS
WIRELESS SWITCH TRANSMITTER AND CONTROL RELAY RECEIVER WWS SERIES
Battery-free WWS Wireless Switch Transmitters are used to control lighting, but they can be used to control virtually any on/off device. Each self-powered wireless switch transmitter can be placed anywhere within range of a receiver.
Switch transmitters are powered by EnOceans energy harvesting technology that converts the press of the switch into a small amount of electricity. This electricity is used to transmit a wireless signal that communicates with a wireless relay receiver. The WR Wireless Relay Receivers are prepackaged with relay, LED, socket, mounting rail, transient protection, and housing. The relay receiver has built-in repeater function. Relay receives signal from wireless switch transmitter and rebroadcasts the signal to the next relay receiver.
Decora style with several color choices EnOcean enabled "energy harvesting" technology No hardwiring for wireless switch transmitter Battery free 120 or 277 VAC receiver Up to 100' (30 m) typical indoor transmission distance Made in the USA
WWS Wireless Switch
WR Wireless Receiver
11
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage WR WWS Frequency Relay Life WR Contact Type WR Contactor Ballast WR Contactor Motor WR Contactor Tungsten WR Contact Resistance WR Pilot Duty WR Transmission Power WWS Receiver Sensitivity WR Lead Wires WR March 2014 120 VAC, 73 mA, 60 Hz 277 VAC, 73 mA, 60 Hz None 315 mHz 10 million cycles min mechanical (1) 20 A SPDT Continuous Duty Coil 20A N.O. @ 277 VAC, 10A N.C. @ 277 VAC 2 Hp @ 277 VAC, 1 Hp @ 120 VAC 10A N.O. @ 120 VAC 20A @ 277 VAC, 5A @ 480 VAC 770 VA @ 120 VAC, 1,110 VA @ 277 VAC Max 10 mW equivalent isotropic radiated power -93 dBm typical 16", 600V Rated Antenna LED Indication WR Integrated 15 cm Red Relay Status / Learn Mode Status (Flashing) Rocker, Momentary, Toggle None Up to 100 feet (typical)
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Switch Type WR Override Range Operating Temperature WWS -13 to 149F (-25 to 65C) WR -30 to 140F (-2 to 61C) Dimensions WWS 2.75" x 4.50" x 0.62" (7.0 x 11.4 x 1.6 cm) WR 2.30" x 3.20" x 1.80" with .50" NPT Nipple Enclosure Rating WR NEMA 1, plenum Approvals WWS FCC (US), IC (Canada) WR UL Listed File E268805, CE Weight WWS 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) WR 0.4 lb (0.2 kg) Warranty 1 year
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
679
LIGHTING CONTROLS
APPLICATION
WIRELESS SWITCH TRANSMITTER AND CONTROL RELAY RECEIVER WWS SERIES
The radio coverage in commercial buildings is usually restricted by re safety walls that must be considered as screening. Inside the re protected sections lightweight or glass partition walls are used with good radio wave propagation properties (except for metal reinforcements or metalized walls). The following are two common installation architectures 1. Radio sensors control the actuators directly (RF bus). Usually, the radio paths to be covered are not very long (cubicle installation). 2. Radio sensors control the actuators via automation system Centrally-placed radio Gateways to the Building Automation System (e.g. BACnet, TCP/IP, LON,EIB) are used for system coverage. In the following a reliable radio planning is shown that can be done in quick time and using simple tools only: STEP 1: Take a building oor plan and a drawing circle STEP 2: Mark relevant radio shadings into the oor plan Fire protection walls Lavatories, staircases, elevator shafts, supply areas STEP 3: Draw circles area wide The circle center points are the ideal positions of the radio gateways. By that the gateways should be positioned in such a way that no screens block the connection to any corner inside the re safety section (potential sensor positions). Planning with 32-39 feet range offers extensive reserve to avoid most typical bad conditions. For a highly robust radio transmission system it is advisable to implement a redundant radio receiver path. To do so, program two gateways for parallel reception of radio transmitters.
NEW!
Blu N/C Yel Comm Blk 277 Vac Red Neutral or Other Phase
11
LIGHITING CONTROLS
WIRING
Blu N/C
Yel Comm
Blk 120 Vac
Wht Neutral
Wireless Receiver Control Circuit
Org N/O
Wireless Receiver Control Circuit
Org N/O
WR120E20
MODEL WWS-A WWS-BK WWS-BR WWS-W WWSP-A WWSP-BK WWSP-BR WWSP-W WR120E20 WR277E20
WR277E20
DESCRIPTION Wireless Switch Transmitter, Almond Wireless Switch Transmitter, Black Wireless Switch Transmitter, Brown Wireless Switch Transmitter, White Switch Cover Plate, Almond Switch Cover Plate, Black Switch Cover Plate, Brown Switch Cover Plate, White Wireless Relay Receiver / Repeater Relay 20 Amp SPDT, 120 VAC Wireless Relay Receiver / Repeater Relay 20 Amp SPDT, 277 VAC
680
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
MOTOR CONTROLS
HUMIDITY
MOTOR CONTROLS
Kele Has Soft Starters and VFDs to Extend the Life of Your Motor and Help Save Energy and Maintenance Costs.
Core VFD Series | p. 695
PSR Series | p. 681
FCXLS/NFCXLS | p. 692
MOTOR CONTROLS
MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Motor Disconnects ABB EOT Series Enclosed Non-Fused Disconnect Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 BCXLS Series Breaker Combination Motor Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 FCXLS, NFCXLS Series Fusible and Non-Fusible Motor Starters . . . . . . . 692 Motor Starters PSR Series Softstarters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 A Series ABB 3 Phase Motor Starter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 TEC Compact Starters 3 Phase Motor Starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) and Bypasses CORE VFD Honeywell Variable Frequency Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CORE VFD With Bypass Honeywell Variable Frequency Drives .. . . . . . . . SmartDrive Compact VFD Honeywell Compact Variable Frequency Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SMARTVFD HVAC Honeywell All Purpose Variable Frequency Drives. . . . SMARTVFD HVAC With Bypass Assembly Variable Frequency Drives with Bypass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
695 698 702 704 707
A Series | p. 683
MOTOR CONTROLS
TEC Compact | p. 687 Starters
Smart VFD | p. 704 HVAC
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Compact size Easy to install and adjust DIN rail or screw mounting
MOTOR CONTROLS
SOFTSTARTERS PSR SERIES
Constant-speed AC motors are used to drive HVAC fans and pumps. During start and stop, both mechanical and electrical stresses are high, causing undesirable load peaks each time the motors are started. An ABB Softstarter eliminates many of these problems. The voltage is smoothly applied to, and removed from, the motor. Both the torque and the current consequently behave in the same way. The result is that mechanical and electrical stresses are signicantly lower than with conventional starting methods.
The PSR series Compact Softstarters range covers motor currents from 3 to 46A. All sizes include a Run signal relay. The 25A and above are also provided with an output signal for TOR (Top Of Ramp, i.e. full voltage). With standard performance the PSR Softstarters handle ten starts per hour. When an auxiliary cooling fan is added, the starting capacity is increased to 20 starts per hour.
PSR16-600-70
PSR45-600-70
PSR30-600-70
Run signal relay 25A and above includes "Top Of Ramp" output signal Motor ratings up to 600 VAC and 40Hp Seperate Acceleration/ Deceleration times
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Motor Voltage Rating Current Rating PSR3 PSR6 PSR9 PSR12 PSR16 PSR25 PSR30 PSR37 PSR45 Horsepower 100/ 240 V, 24 VDC 208 to 600 VAC 3.9A Starting capacity 15.6A for 6s 6.8A Starting capacity 27.2A for 6s 9A Starting capacity 36A for 6s 12A Starting capacity 48A for 6s 16A Starting capacity 64A for 6s 25A Starting capacity 100A for 6s 30A Starting capacity 120A for 6s 37A Starting capacity 148A for 6s 46A Starting capacity 180A for 6s Based on rated Voltage and FLA Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Altitude Limits Protection Rating LED Indication 1-10 seconds 0-20 seconds 13,123 ft. (4000 m) Main circuit IP20 Control Circuit IP20 On/ Ready Green On/ Ready Green Run/ Top of Ramp Green Run/ Top of Ramp Green Operating Temperature -13 to 140F (-25 to 60C) Storage Temperature -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Number of Starts/ hr 10 standard; 20 with Aux. Fan Approvals UL ListedFile E161428 Warranty 12 months from installation, maximum 18 months from factory
12
MOTOR CONTROLS
WIRING
Model PSR3 - 16 with MCCB
COM
L/+
Model PSR25 - 45 with MCCB

Supply Voltage
L/+ N/C
Supply Voltage
N/C
Circuit protection by customer
Fuse (customer supplied)
Circuit protection by customer
PSR
PSR
Note: verify motor nameplate voltage and horsepower rating for soft starter selection
Note: verify motor nameplate voltage and horsepower rating for soft starter selection
COM Fuse (customer supplied)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
681
MOTOR CONTROLS
SOFTSTARTERS PSR SERIES
Control Supply Voltage 100/ 240 V 100/ 240 V 100/ 240 V 100/ 240 V 100/ 240 V 100/ 240 V 100/ 240 V 100/ 240 V 100/ 240 V 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
Model PSR3-600-70 PSR6-600-70 PSR9-600-70 PSR12-600-70 PSR16-600-70 PSR25-600-70 PSR30-600-70 PSR37-600-70
Full Circuit Horsepower Load Breaker Fuse Size Amps 208V 240V 480V 600V Max. 3.4 6.1 9 11 15.2 24.2 28 34 46.2 3.4 6.1 9 11 15.2 24.2 28 34 46.2 .5 1 2 3 3 7.5 7.5 10 15 .5 1 2 3 3 7.5 7.5 10 15 0.75 1.5 2 3 3 7.5 7.5 10 15 .5 1 2 3 3 7.5 10 10 15 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 2 5 7.5 10 10 20 25 30 40 2 5 7.5 10 10 20 25 30 40 50 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 50 A 100 A 100 A 150 A 150 A 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 40 A J-Type 60 A J- Type 70 A J- Type
NEW!
Dimensions Weight 0.99 lbs. (0.45 kg) 0.99 lbs. (0.45 kg) 0.99 lbs. (0.45 kg) 0.99 lbs. (0.45 kg) 0.99 lbs. (0.45 kg) 1.43 lbs. (0.65 kg) 1.43 lbs. (0.65 kg) 2.20 lbs. (1.00 kg) 2.20 lbs. (1.00 kg) 2.20 lbs. (1.00 kg) 0.99 lbs. (0.45 kg) 0.99 lbs. (0.45 kg) 0.99 lbs. (0.45 kg) 0.99 lbs. (0.45 kg) 1.43 lbs. (0.65 kg) 1.43 lbs. (0.65 kg) 2.20 lbs. (1.00 kg) 2.20 lbs. (1.00 kg) 5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47" (140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm) 5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47" (140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm) 5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47" (140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm) 5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47" (140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm) 5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47" (140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm) 6.30" x 1.77" x 5.04" (160mm x 45mm x 128mm) 6.30" x 1.77" x 5.04" (160mm x 45mm x 128mm) 7.36" x 1.77" x 6.02" (187mm x 45mm x 153mm) 7.36" x 1.77" x 6.02" (187mm x 45mm x 153mm) 5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47" (140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm) 5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47" (140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm) 5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47" (140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm) 5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47" (140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm) 5.51" x 1.77" x 4.47" (140mm x 45mm x 113.5mm) 6.30" x 1.77" x 5.04" (160mm x 45mm x 128mm) 6.30" x 1.77" x 5.04" (160mm x 45mm x 128mm) 7.36" x 1.77" x 6.02" (187mm x 45mm x 153mm) 7.36" x 1.77" x 6.02" (187mm x 45mm x 153mm)
12
PSR45-600-70 PSR3-600-81 PSR6-600-81
MOTOR CONTROLS
PSR9-600-81 PSR12-600-81 PSR16-600-81 PSR25-600-81 PSR30-600-81 PSR37-600-81 PSR45-600-81
100 A J- Type 100 A J- Type
PSR-FAN
ACCESSORIES Cooling Fan for increased starting capacity (eld-installable)
682
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES NEMA sizes 00 thru 5 UL508A panel program, le #E105450 Compact space-saving design Auxiliary contacts available Coil operates 85 to 110% of rated voltage Solid-state adjustable overload relays standard Conventional bimetallic overloads available
MOTOR CONTROLS
ABB 3 PHASE MOTOR STARTER A SERIES
The A Series ABB starter line offers motor start/stop and protection. The double-break contacts allow stopping a motor with minimal conact wear. The thermal overloads are sized for the motor FLA and keep motor windings from over-heating during overload conditions. We offer these starters in open, enclosed, enclosed with fusible disconnect, and enclosed with circuit breaker. Auxiliary contacts are available for eld installation.
A50NSF1-84A6B
A9NS1-81E
DIMENSIONS
Enclosed Starters in (cm) MODEL SIZE A9, A16, A26 A50, A75 A145 A260 NEMA 1 11"H x 6"W x 5"D (27.9 x 15.2 x 12.7 cm) 13"H x 9"W x 7"D (33.0 x 22.9 x 17.8 cm) 30"H x 24"W x 12"D (76.2 x 61.0 x 30.5 cm) 30"H x 24"W x 12"D (76.2 x 61.0 x 30.5 cm) NEMA 1 fused 14"H x 12"W x 8"D (35.6 x 30.5 x 20.3 cm) 20"H x 16"W x 8"D (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3 cm) 30"H x 24"W x 12"D (76.2 x 61.0 x 30.5 cm) 36"H x 30"W x 12"D (91.4 x 76.2 x 30.5 cm) NEMA 1 circuit breaker 14"H x 12"W x 8"D (35.6 x 30.5 x 20.3 cm) 14"H x 12"W x 8"D (35.6 x 30.5 x 20.3cm) 24"H x 20"W x 8"D (61.0 x 50.8 x 20.3 cm) 30"H x 24"W x 12"D (76.2 x 61.0 x 30.5 cm)
12
MOTOR CONTROLS
MODEL SIZE A9, A16 A26 A50, A75 A145 A260
Open Frame Starters in (cm) 5.3"H x 1.7"W x 3.7"D (13.3 x 4.4 x 9.5 cm) 5.8"H x 2.1"W x 4.3"D (9.0 x 2.1 x 11.0 cm) 6.9"H x 2.8"W x 4.4"D (17.7 x 7.0 x 11.3 cm) 12.9"H x 4.1"W x 6.3"D (32.9 x 10.5 x 16.0 cm) 17.5"H x 5.5"W x 7.1"D (44.4 x 14 x 18.1 cm)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
683
MOTOR CONTROLS
WIRING
Non-reversing, reversing AF09 - AF750, AFN00 - AFN4

L1 Incoming Lines L1 L2 L3
Disconnect
Fuse Disconnect
NEW!
External Control Supply Standard 120 VAC
CX1 CX2 2-1 1-1 1-2 2-2
Breaker
1 2
3 4
5 6
X1
X2 2 4 6
OL
97 98
3-1
L1
L2 T2
L3 T3
3-7
T1
OL
95 96
3-2 3-2 JUMPER
3-6
OL
3-3 3-4 3-4 14 15
A1
M A2
OL
T1 T2 T3
12
MOTOR
* Remote Contact Customer Disconnect Fuse Disconnect Breaker External Control Supply Standard 120 VAC
Incoming Lines L1 L2 L3
MOTOR CONTROLS
1 2
3 4
5 6
CX1
CX2
6 2-1 1-1 1-2 2-2
3-7 X2 X1 L1 L2 T2 L3 T3 L1 T1 L2 T2 L3 3-6 3-2 3-2 3-5 3-3 3-4 3-4 14 JUMPER
R F
13
01 21
F
T1 T3
01 22
A1
F A2 R A2
R
14 13
01 21
01 22
A1
OL
T1 T2 T3 3 1 2 4
MOTOR
* F * R
All units ship with a NO and NC contacts. Additional contacts can be added in the field.
Remote Contact Customer
684
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Incoming Lines L1 L2 L3 Disconnect Fuse Disconnect
1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 6 2 4 6 X2 L1 L2 T2 L3 T3 L1 T1 X1 L2 T2 L3
MOTOR CONTROLS
2 speed, 1 winding; 2 speed, 2 winding AF09 - AF75

Breaker External Control Supply Standard 120VAC
CX1
CX2
2-1 1-1
1-2 2-2
3-7
SOL FOL
95 96 95 96
3-6 3-2 3-2 Jumper 3-9 3-5 3-3 3-4 3-4

14
F S
13 01 21 01 21 13
01 22 01 22
A1
S A2 F
A2
S
T1 T3
F
14
A1
SOL
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
FOL
3
T2
12
T1 MOTOR T11
T13 T12
* S * F
Disconnect
Fuse Disconnect

Breaker
MOTOR CONTROLS
1 2
3 4
5 6
External Control Supply Standard 120VAC
CX1
2 4 6
CX2
2-1 1-1
1-2 2-2
SOL FOL
95 96 95 96
3-7 3-2 3-2 Jumper 3-6 3-9 3-5 3-3

14
1F S
13 01 21
2F
21 22 A1
01 22
S A2 2F
A2
1F
14 13 A1
2F
14 13
01 21
01 22
3-4 3-4
1F A2 A1
* S * F
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
685
MOTOR CONTROLS
WIRING
Non-reversing, single phase AF09 - AF110, AFN00 - AFN2

L1 Incoming Lines L1 L2 Fuse Disconnect
Disconnect
Breaker
NEW!
External Control Supply Standard 120 VAC
CX1 CX2 2-1 1-1 1-2 2-2
1 2 X1 X2
3 4
5 6
OL
97 2 4 6 98
3-1
3-7
L1
L2 T2
L3 T3
OL
95 96
3-2 3-2 JUMPER
3-6
T1
OL
3-3 3-4 3-4 14 15
A1
M A2
OL
T1 T2 T3
*
MOTOR
12
NEMA SIZE 00 MOTOR HORSEPOWER 3-PHASE, 1800 RPM** 200V 230V 460V 1/4 1/4 1/3, 1/2 1/3 3/4 1/3, 1/4 1/2 1 1/2 3/4 3/4 1.5, 2 1 1 1.5 1.5 3 2 2 5 3 3 7.5 5 5 10 7.5 7.5 15 10 20 10 15 25 15 30 20 20 40 25 25, 30 50 60 30 40 75 40 50 100 50 60 60 125 100 200 575V 1/2 3/4 1 1.5, 2 5 10 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150
OVERLOAD RELAY MODEL SETTING OPEN STYLE RANGE A9N00S-*E 0.63 - 1.0 A9N00S-*F 1.0 - 1.4 A9N00S-*G 1.3 - 1.6 A9N00S-*H 1.7 - 2.4 A9N00S-*J 2.2 - 3.1 A9N00S-*K 2.8 - 4.0 A9N00S-*L 3.5 - 5.0 A9N00S-*M 4.5 - 6.5 A9N00S-*N 6.0 - 8.5 A16N0S-*M 4.5 - 6.5 A16N0S-*N 6.0 - 8.5 A16N0S-*P 7.5 - 11 A26N1S-*Q 10 - 14 A26N1S-*R 13 - 19 A26N1S-*S 18 - 25 A50N2S-*A 18 - 25 A50N2S-*B 22 - 32 A50N2S-*C 29 - 42 A75N3S-*C 29 - 42 A75N3S-*D 36 - 52 A75N3S-*E 45 - 63 A75N3S-*F 60 - 80 A145N4S-*R 65 - 90 A145N4S-*A 65 - 90 A145N4S-*B 65 - 90 A145N4S-*C 65 - 90 A260N5S-*T 110 - 150 A260N5S-*A 130 - 185 A260N5S-*C 220 - 310 MODEL NEMA 1 ENCLOSED A9NS1-*E A9NS1-*F A9NS1-*G A9NS1-*H A9NS1-*J A9NS1-*K A9NS1-*L A9NS1-*M A9NS1-*N A16NS1-*M A16NS1-*N A16NS1-*P A26NS1-*Q A26NS1-*R A26NS1-*S A50NS1-*A A50NS1-*B A50NS1-*C A75NS1-*C A75NS1-*D A75NS1-*E A75NS1-*F A145NS1-*R A145NS1-*A A145NS1-*B A145NS1-*C A260NS1-*T A260NS1-*A A260NS1-*C MODEL NEMA 1 ENCL. FUSIBLE DISCONNECT A9NSF1-*E6A A9NSF1-*F6A A9NSF1-*G6A A9NSF1-*H6A A9NSF1-*J6A A9NSF1-*K6A A9NSF1-*L6A A9NSF1-*M6A A9NSF1-*N6A A16NSF1-*M6A A16NSF1-*N6A A16NSF1-*P6A A26NSF1-*Q6A A26NSF1-*R6A A26NSF1-*S6A A50NSF1-*A6B A50NSF1-*B6B A50NSF1-*C6B A75NSF1-*C6C A75NSF1-*D6C A75NSF1-*E6C A75NSF1-*F6C A145NSF1-*R6E A145NSF1-*A6E A145NSF1-*B6E A145NSF1-*C6E A260NSF1-*T6E A260NSF1-*A6E A260NSF1-*C6E FUSE CLIP SIZE CLASS J 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 30A 60A 60A 60A 100A 100A 100A 100A 400A 400A 400A 400A 400A 400A 400A MODEL NEMA 1 ENCL. W/CIRCUIT BREAKER A9NSM1-*E4A A9NSM1-*F4A A9NSM1-*G4A A9NSM1-*H4A A9NSM1-*J4B A9NSM1-*K4B A9NSM1-*L4C A9NSM1-*M4C A9NSM1-*N4C A16NSM1-*M4C A16NSM1-*N4C A16NSM1-*P4D A26NSM1-*Q4D A26NSM1-*R4D A26NSM1-*S4E A50NSM1-*A4E A50NSM1-*B4E A50NSM1-*C4E A75NSM1-*C4E A75NSM1-*D4F A75NSM1-*E4F A75NSM1-*F4F A145NSM1-*R4F A145NSM1-*A4F A145NSM1-*B4F A145NSM1-*C4F A260NSM1-*T4H A260NSM1-*A4H A260NSM1-*C4J CIRCUIT BREAKER RATING (480 V MAX) 3 3 3 3 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 25 25 25 50 50 50 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 250 250 400
MOTOR CONTROLS
*Insert code 84 for 120 VAC 60Hz, code 80 for 240 VAC, code 81 for 24 VAC 50/60 Hz **Check full load amp rating on motor nameplate to ensure proper overload protection Note - for additional auxiliary contacts add suffix 10 for 1 N.O., 20 for 2 N.O., 01 for 1 N.C., 02 for 2 N.C., 11 for 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. Example: A50N2S-84A-20 Open frame style, 10 HP, 120 VAC coil, 2 N.O. auxiliary contacts
686
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Compact design cULus, CE, and UL508 approved Available with reset or start stop NEMA 4X enclosed Single or three phase Class 10 overloads
MOTOR CONTROLS
3 PHASE MOTOR STARTERS TEC COMPACT STARTERS
TEC Compact Starters are compact 3 phase motor starters. They have an enameled copper wire coil and have ngersafe contacts.These starters are UL 508SB rated. There is an external window indicator that shows contact wear.
TEC18-AKSS3-18A
SPECIFICATIONS HORSE POWER - 3PHASE Part Number TEC12-A4XR-8A TEC12-G4XR-8A TEC12-AKSS3-8A TEC12-GKSS3-8A TEC12-A4XR-13A TEC12-G4XR-13A TEC12-AKSS3-13A TEC12-GKSS3-13A TEC18-A4XR-18A TEC18-G4XR-18A TEC18-AKSS3-18A TEC18-GKSS3-18A TEC25-A4XR-25A TEC25-G4XR-25A TEC25-AKSS3-25A TEC25-GKSS3-25A 200V 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 230V 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 480V 5 5 5 5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 600V 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 20 20 20 20 Coil Voltage 120V 24V 120V 24V 120V 24V 120V 24V 120V 24V 120V 24V 120V 24V 120V 24V Enclosure NEMA Rating 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X Control Type/ Version Reset only Reset only Start/stop Start/stop Reset only Reset only Start/stop Start/stop Reset only Reset only Start/stop Start/stop Reset only Reset only Start/stop Start/stop Overload Amp Weight Range lbs (kg) 5.5 - 8A 2.3 (1.04) 5.5 - 8A 5.5 - 8A 5.5 - 8A 9 - 13A 9 - 13A 9 - 13A 9 - 13A 7 - 10A 7 - 10A 7 - 10A 7 - 10A 17- 25A 17- 25A 17- 25A 17- 25A 2.3 (1.04) 2.3 (1.04) 2.3 (1.04) 2.3 (1.04) 2.3 (1.04) 2.3 (1.04) 2.3 (1.04) 2.3 (1.04) 2.3 (1.04) 2.3 (1.04)
12
MOTOR CONTROLS
2.3 (1.04) 2.7 (1.22) 2.7 (1.22) 2.7 (1.22) 2.7 (1.22)
Other options and models available from manufacturer.
DIMENSIONS
A B C D E
TEC12, TEC18 Starters 4.72" (11.98 cm) 5.51" (18.99 cm) 6.54" (16.61 cm) 5.9" (14.98 cm) 3.46" (8.78 cm)
TEC25 Starter 5.31" (13.48 cm) 6.1" (15.49 cm) 7.28" (18.49 cm) 6.5" (16.51 cm) 3.98" (10.10 cm)
A B
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
687
MOTOR CONTROLS
3 PHASE MOTOR STARTERS TEC COMPACT STARTERS
WIRING
L1(X1) 13 M 14 A1 (A) START M A2 (B) STOP 95 96
OL RESET
17 18 START-STOP PUSHBUTTONS Series TECKSS3* L1(X1) 13 M 14 A1 (A) START M A2 (B) STOP 95 96
NEW!
L2(X2) L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 M M L2(X2) OL T1 T2 T3 T1 OL T2
13
14 Aux. NO
OL RESET
17 18 REMOTE START-STOP PUSHBUTTONS Series TEC4XR (Reset only)*

* L2 on control circuit should be connected to neutral for 120V control voltage. Dashed lines indicate field connection.
MTR
THREE-PHASE*
MTR
SINGLE-PHASE*
12
MOTOR CONTROLS
MODEL TEC12-A4XR-8A TEC12-G4XR-8A TEC12-AKSS3-8A TEC12-GKSS3-8A TEC12-A4XR-13A TEC12-G4XR-13A TEC12-AKSS3-13A TEC12-GKSS3-13A TEC18-A4XR-18A TEC18-G4XR-18A TEC18-AKSS3-18A TEC18-GKSS3-18A TEC25-A4XR-25A TEC25-G4XR-25A TEC25-AKSS3-25A TEC25-GKSS3-25A
DESCRIPTION Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, with reset and overload,5.5 to 8 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, with reset and overload, 5.5 to 8 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, start/stop and overload, 5.5 to 8 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, start/stop and overload, 5.5 to 8 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, with reset and overload, 9 to 13 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, with reset and overload, 9 to 13 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, start/stop and overload, 9 to 13 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, start/stop and overload, 9 to 13 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, with reset and overload, 12 to 18 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, with reset and overload, 12 to 18 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, start/stop and overload, 12 to 18 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, start/stop and overload, 12 to 18 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, with reset and overload, 17 to 25 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, with reset and overload, 17 to 25 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 120 VAC, start/stop and overload, 17 to 25 Amps Compact starter, 3 phase, 24 VAC, start/stop and overload, 17 to 25 Amps
ACCESSORIES EEC0.63-1A Overload relay TEC Series/0.63-1 Amps EEC1-1.6A Overload relay TEC Series/1-1.6 Amps Overload relay TEC Series/1.6-2.5 Amps EEC1.6-2.5A EEC2.5-4A Overload relay TEC Series/2.5-4 Amps Overload relay TEC Series/4-6 Amps EEC4-6A EEC5.5-8A Overload relay TEC Series/5.5-8 Amps EEC7-10A Overload relay TEC Series/7-10 Amps EEC9-13A Overload relay TEC Series/9-13 Amps EEC12-18A Overload relay TEC Series/12-18 Amps EEC17-25A Overload relay TEC Series/17-25 Amps
688
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

MOTOR CONTROLS
ENCLOSED NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH ABB EOT SERIES
The EOT Series of enclosed manual motor controllers are rotary operated, 3 pole, 600V Hp rated switches, housed in thermoplastic/polycarbonate enclosures suitable for wet and corrosive environments. These NEMA 3R/12 models are equipped with selector style handles. They are compact in size have touch safe operation. cUL/IEC-47-3 approvals and UL508 listed.
Suitable as motor disconnect Horsepower rated Touch safe construction Positive operation Clear position indication Self lifting tunnel terminals Extremely compact size Accessories include 4th Power Pole & Snap-on auxiliary contacts OSHA Lock Out/Tag Out
Selector switch style
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 600V MAX Enclosure Rating NEMA 3R/12 Auxiliary Contacts (optional) Maximum number allowed: 2NO + 1NC Meets ARRA or BAA Yes Dimensions, Including Handle EOT16 & EOT32 6.36"H x 3.94"W x 4.55"D (16.2 x 10 x 11.6 cm) EOT45 7.87"H x 5.75"W x 5.43"D (19.8 x 14.6 x 18.8 cm) EOT63 11.81"H x 8.27"W x 7.12"D (30 x 21 x 181 cm) Approvals UL Listed E63822, IEC947-3, UL 508 Note: Only 1 additional pole per switch allowed
WIRING
Disconnect means Short Circuit protective device Controller Overload protection EOT Motor disconnect
12
MOTOR CONTROLS
MODEL EOT16U3P3-S EOT16U3P3-1S EOT16U3P3-S1 EOT16U3P3-1S1 EOT32U3P3-S EOT32U3P3-1S EOT32U3P3-S1 EOT32U3P3-1S1 EOT45U3P3-S EOT45U3P3-1S EOT45U3P3-S1 EOT45U3P3-1S1 EOT63U3P3-P EOT63U3P3-1P EOT63U3P3-P1 EOT63U3P3-1P1 DESCRIPTION Black selector handle; 16 Amp rating Black selector handle; 16 Amp rating; 1 NO auxiliary contact Red/Yellow selector handle; 16 Amp rating Red/Yellow selector handle; 16 Amp rating; 1 NO auxiliary contact Black selector handle; 40 Amp rating Black selector handle; 40 Amp rating; 1 NO auxiliary contact Red/Yellow selector handle; 40 Amp rating Red/Yellow selector handle; 40 Amp rating; 1 NO auxiliary contact Black selector handle; 60 Amp rating Black selector handle; 60 Amp rating; 1 NO auxiliarycontact Red/Yellow selector handle; 60 Amp rating Red/Yellow selector handle; 60 Amp rating; 1 NO auxiliary contact Black pistol handle; 80 Amp rating Black pistol handle; 80 Amp rating; 1 NO auxiliary contact Red/Yellow pistol handle; 80 Amp rating Red/Yellow pistol handle; 80 Amp rating; 1 NO auxiliary contact
EOT products are properly installed on the load side of a branch circuit protective device and are suitable for use as motor disconnects as illustrated above.
HORSEPOWER RATINGS
Model Series eOT16 Three Phase Max HP 200-208V 3 240V 6 480V 10 600V 10 Single Phase Max HP 120V 1 240V 2 eOT32 10 10 20 25 2 5 eOT45 15 15 30 30 2 7.5 eOT63 20 20 40 40 2 10
ACCESSORIES OA1G01 Auxiliary contact NC, mounts on left side of switch only OA1G10 Auxiliary contact, NO mounts on right side of switch only OTPL40FP 4th Pole, late-break/early-make function (eOT16 & eOT32) OTPL80FP 4th Pole, late-break/early-make function (eOT45 & eOT63) OTPS40FP 4th Pole (EOT16 & eOT32) OTPS80FP 4th Pole (EOT45 & eOT63)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
689
MOTOR CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION Breaker combnation motor starters are UL508. They include 600 Volt internatinally accepted industrial control breakers with instantaneous and thermal trip. They all have door handle safety interlocks and pilot lights. Magnetic starters with percision and consisten overload protection and different single phasing protection. FEATURES Breakers with instantaneous and thermal trip NEMA 1 or NEMA 12/4 enclosure Space and drilling for fused control circuit transformer HOA switch Pilot light Door safety interlocks 24V or 120V coil voltage UL File #E90628
BREAKER COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS BCXLS SERIES
NEW!
BCXLS11K-1G-0N-M01-H0A-PL
ON PL R
A2
WIRING
TRANSFORMER H1(L1) H4(L2)
A1
PILOT LIGHTS
H3 H2
L1
12
X1
21
OFF PL
22
L2 X2
BREAKER COMBINATION
FU X1 X2
L1
L2
L3
CONTROL CIRCUIT
L1 X1 HAND OFF AUTO 14 A1
MOTOR CONTROLS
13
A2
95
OL
96
L2 X2 A1
L2 X2
H1
H4 13 M A1 M A2
95
23
24
REMOTE SWITCH START A1 13 14
14 Aux. NO
OL
L1 X1
STOP 21 22
A2
95
OL
96
96
L2 X2
OL T1 T2 T3
AUX 13 14
MTR
OFF ON L1 X1 13 14 A1
A2
95
OL
96
L2 X2
FUSIBLE CONTROL TRANSFORMERS

Model B050MBT713RK B100MBT713RK B150MBT713RK B200MBT713RK B250MBT713RK B300MBT713RK B350MBT713RK Primary Volts 208V, 230V, 460V 208V, 230V, 460V 208V, 230V, 460V 208V, 230V, 460V 208V, 230V, 460V 208V, 230V, 460V 208V, 230V, 460V Secondary Volts Continuous VA 115V, 24V 50VA 115V, 24V 100VA 115V, 24V 150VA 115V, 24V 200VA 115V, 24V 250VA 115V, 24V 300VA 115V, 24V 350VA Contactors to use with LS07,4,7,17,27,37, LS05,4K,7K,11K,18K LS47,57,77,87,107 ,LS22K,30K,37K,45K, LS55K LS177, LS75K LS90K(3P) LS247 LS110K, 132K, 160K LS220K, 280K, 375K LS450K Height 3.25" (83 mm) 3.62"(92 mm) 4.37" (111 mm) 4.5" (114 mm) 5.25" (133 mm) 5.12" (130 mm) 5.37" (137 mm) Width 3.0" (76 mm) 3.75" (95 mm) 3.75" (95 mm) 4.5" (114 mm) 4.5" (114 mm) 5.25" (133 mm) 5.25" (133 mm) Depth 3.93" (100 mm) 4.55" (76 mm) 4.55" (76 mm) 5.18" (132 mm) 5.18" (132 mm) 6.12" (155 mm) 6.12" (155 mm)
690
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ORDERING INFORMATION/SPECIFICATIONS
Part Number HP 5 Voltage 200/230 Coil Voltage 24 VAC BCXLS7K-1G-O-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS7K-1G-O-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS7K-1A-O-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS7K-1A-O-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS7K-2G-O-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS7K-2G-O-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS7K-2A-O-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS7K-2A-O-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS11K-1G-ON-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS11K-1G-ON-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS11K-1A-ON-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS11K-1A-ON-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS11K-2G-ON-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS11K-2G-ON-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS11K-2A-ON-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS11K-2A-ON-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS15K-1G-Q-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS15K-1G-Q-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS15K-1A-Q-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS15K-1A-Q-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS15K-2G-Q-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS15K-2G-Q-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS15K-2A-Q-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS15K-2A-Q-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS15K-3G-Q-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS15K-3G-Q-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS15K-3A-Q-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS15K-3A-Q-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS22K-1G-RN-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS22K-1G-RN-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS22K-1A-RN-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS22K-1A-RN-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS22K-2G-QN-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS22K-2G-QN-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS22K-2A-QN-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS22K-2A-QN-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS37K-1G-SN-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS37K-1G-SN-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS37K-1A-SN-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS37K-1A-SN-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS37K-2G-SN-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS37K-2G-SN-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS37K-2A-SN-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS37K-2A-SN-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS45K-1G-TM-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS45K-1G-TM-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS45K-1A-TM-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS45K-1A-TM-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS45K-2G-TM-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS45K-2G-TM-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS45K-2A-TM-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS45K-2A-TM-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS55K-1G-TN-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS55K-1G-TN-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS55K-1A-TN-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS55K-1A-TN-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS55K-2G-TN-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS55K-2G-TN-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS55K-2A-TN-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS55K-2A-TN-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS75K-1G-TT-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS75K-1G-TT-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS75K-1A-TT-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS75K-1A-TT-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS75K-2G-TT-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS75K-2G-TT-M4-HOA-PL BCXLS75K-2A-TT-M01-HOA-PL BCXLS75K-2A-TT-M4-HOA-PL 120 VAC 24 VAC 10 460 120 VAC 24 VAC 7.5 230 120 VAC 24 VAC 15 460 120 VAC 24 VAC 10 200 120 VAC 24 VAC 10 230 120 VAC 24 VAC 20 460 120 VAC 24 VAC 15 200/230 120 VAC 24 VAC 30 460 120 VAC 24 VAC 20/25 200/230 120 VAC 24 VAC 50 460 120 VAC 24 VAC 25/30 200/230 120 VAC 24 VAC 60 460 120 VAC 24 VAC 40 230 120 VAC 75 460 24 VAC 24 VAC 40/50 200/230 120 VAC 24 VAC 100 460 120 VAC
MOTOR CONTROLS
BREAKER COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS BCXLS SERIES
Enclosure Coil NEMA Rating Inrush 1 12/4 45 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 45 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 88 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 88 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 88 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 88 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 88 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 191 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 191 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 191 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 191 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 191 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 191 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 191 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 191 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 400 VA 1 12/4 1 12/4 400 VA 1 12/4
Coil Holding Current 6 VA
Overload Breaker Range Rating 14.5-18 Amps 14.5-18 Amps 30A
Dimensions in (lb) 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 24" x 20" x 8" (61 x 50.8 x 20.3) 24" x 20" x 8" (61 x 50.8 x 20.3) 24" x 20" x 8" (61 x 50.8 x 20.3) 24" x 20" x 8" (61 x 50.8 x 20.3) 30" x 24" x 8" (76.2 x 61 x 20.3) 30" x 24" x 8" (76.2 x 61 x 20.3)
Weight lb (kg) 31 (14.1)
6 VA
30A
31 (14.1)
9 VA
21-26 Amps
50A
32 (14.5)
9 VA
21-26 Amps
50A
32 (14.5)
9 VA
30-40 Amps
80A
33 (15)
9 VA
30-40 Amps
80A
33 (15)
9 VA
30-40 Amps
80A
33 (15)
17 VA
54-65 Amps
125A
45 (20.4)
12
17 VA
42-55 Amps
100A
45 (20.4)
17 VA
64-82 Amps
150A
47 (21.3)
MOTOR CONTROLS
17 VA
64-82 Amps
150A
47 (21.3)
17 VA
78-97 Amps
150A
61 (27.7)
17 VA
78-97 Amps
150A
61 (27.7)
17 VA
90-110 Amps
175A
63 (28.6)
17 VA
90-110 Amps
175A
63 (28.6)
32 VA
140-190 Amps 140-190 Amps
225A
97 (44)
32 VA
225A
97 (44)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
691
MOTOR CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION Fusible and Non-Fusible combination controls for your motor. These have UL/CSA manual motor disconnects with door safety interlocks. Industrial controls disconnects are load make, load break, UL listed for motor load switching duty. Starter and overload relay complete with precision ambient compensated heaters and differential single phasing protection. FEATURES NEMA 1 or NEMA 12/4 enclosure Space and drilling for fused control circuit transformer HOA switch Pilot light Door safety interlocks 24V or 120V coil voltage UL File #E90628
FUSIBLE AND NON-FUSIBLE MOTOR STARTERS FCXLS, NFCXLS SERIES
NEW!
FCXLS7K-2A-0-M4-HOA-PL
R
A2 L2 X2
WIRING
TRANSFORMER H1(L1) H4(L2)
A1
PILOT LIGHTS ON PL
H3 H2
L1
12
FU X1 X2
X1
21
OFF PL
22
FUSIBLE COMBINATION L1 L2 L3
CONTROL CIRCUIT
L1 X1 HAND OFF AUTO 14 A1
13
A2
95
OL
96
L2 X2 A1
L2 X2
MOTOR CONTROLS
H1
23 24 1 2
H4 M A1 M A2 OL
REMOTE SWITCH START A1 13 14 A2
L1 X1
STOP 21 22
95
OL
96
L2 X2
95
96
OL T1 T2 T3
AUX 13 14
OFF ON L1 X1 13 14 A1
MTR
M
A2 95
OL
96
L2 X2
FUSIBLE CONTROL TRANSFORMERS

Model B050MBT713RK B100MBT713RK B150MBT713RK B200MBT713RK B250MBT713RK B300MBT713RK B350MBT713RK Primary Volts Secondary Volts Continuous VA Contactors to use with Height Width Depth
208V, 230V, 460V
115V, 24V
50VA
LS07, 4, 7, 17, 27, 37, LS05, 4K, 7K, 11K, 18K
3.25" (83 mm)
3.0" (76 mm)
3.93" (100 mm)
692
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ORDERING INFORMATION - FCXLS
Part Number HP
5
MOTOR CONTROLS
Voltage
200/230
Coil Enclosure Coil Coil Holding Overload Fuse Block Voltage NEMA Rating Inrush Current Range Rating
24 VAC 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 45 VA 6 VA 14.5-18 30A
Dimensions in (cm)
12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3)
Weight lb (kg)
18 (8.16)
FCXLS7K-1G-O-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS7K-1G-O-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS7K-1A-O-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS7K-1A-O-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS7K-2G-O-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS7K-2G-O-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS7K-2A-O-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS7K-2A-O-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS11K-1G-ON-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS11K-1G-ON-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS11K-1A-ON-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS11K-1A-ON-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS11K-2G-ON-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS11K-2G-ON-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS11K-2A-ON-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS11K-2A-ON-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS15K-1G-Q-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS15K-1G-Q-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS15K-1A-Q-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS15K-1A-Q-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS15K-2G-Q-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS15K-2G-Q-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS15K-2A-Q-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS15K-2A-Q-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS15K-3G-Q-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS15K-3G-Q-M4-HOA-PL
120 VAC 24 VAC
10
460
45 VA
6 VA
14.5-18
120 VAC 24 VAC
Amps
30A
18 (8.16)
7.5
230
120 VAC 24 VAC
88 VA
9 VA
21-26 Amps
60A
18 (8.16) 18 (8.16) 18 (8.16) 18 (8.16) 18 (8.16) 27 (12.2)
15
460
120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC
88 VA
9 VA
21-26 Amps
30A
10
200
88 VA
9 VA
30-40 Amps
60A
10
230
88 VA
9 VA
30-40 Amps
60A
27 (12.2)
FCXLS15K-3A-Q-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS15K-3A-Q-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS22K-1G-RN-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS22K-1G-RN-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS22K-1A-RN-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS22K-1A-RN-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS22K-2G-QN-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS22K-2G-QN-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS22K-2A-QN-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS22K-2A-QN-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS37K-1G-SN-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS37K-1G-SN-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS37K-1A-SN-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS37K-1A-SN-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS37K-2G-SN-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS37K-2G-SN-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS37K-2A-SN-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS37K-2A-SN-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS45K-1G-TM-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS45K-1G-TM-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS45K-1A-TM-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS45K-1A-TM-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS45K-2G-TM-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS45K-2G-TM-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS45K-2A-TM-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS45K-2A-TM-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS55K-1G-TN-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS55K-1G-TN-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS55K-1A-TN-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS55K-1A-TN-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS55K-2G-TN-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS55K-2G-TN-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS55K-2A-TN-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS55K-2A-TN-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS75K-1G-TT-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS75K-1G-TT-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS75K-1A-TT-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS75K-1A-TT-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS75K-2G-TT-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS75K-2G-TT-M4-HOA-PL FCXLS75K-2A-TT-M01-HOA-PL FCXLS75K-2A-TT-M4-HOA-PL
20
460
120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC
15
200/230
30
460
20/25
200/230
50
460
25/30
200/230
60
460
40
230
75
460
40/50
200/230
100
460
1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4 1 12/4
88 VA
9 VA
30-40 Amps
60A
27 (12.2)
191 VA
17 VA
54-65 Amps
100A
20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 30" x 24" x 8" (76.2 x 61 x 20.3) 30" x 24" x 8" (76.2 x 61 x 20.3) 36" x 24" x 10" (91.4 x 61 x 25.4) 36" x 24" x 10" (91.4 x 61 x 25.4)
41 (18.6)
12
191 VA
17 VA
42-55 Amps
60A
41 (18.6)
191 VA
17 VA
64-82 Amps
100A
42 (19.1)
MOTOR CONTROLS
191 VA
17 VA
64-82 Amps
100A
42 (19.1)
191 VA
17 VA
78-97 Amps
100A
44 (20)
191 VA
17 VA
78-97 Amps
100A
44 (20)
191 VA
17 VA
90-110 Amps
200A
88 (40)
191 VA
17 VA
90-110 Amps
200A
88 (40)
400 VA
32 VA
140-190 Amps 140-190 Amps
200A
124 (56.2)
400 VA
32 VA
200A
124 (56.2)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
693
MOTOR CONTROLS
ORDERING INFORMATION - NFCXLS
Part Number NFCXLS7K-1G-O-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS7K-1G-O-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS7K-1A-O-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS7K-1A-O-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS7K-2G-O-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS7K-2G-O-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS7K-2A-O-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS7K-2A-O-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS11K-1G-ON-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS11K-1G-ON-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS11K-1A-ON-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS11K-1A-ON-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS11K-2G-ON-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS11K-2G-ON-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS11K-2A-ON-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS11K-2A-ON-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS15K-1G-Q-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS15K-1G-Q-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS15K-1A-Q-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS15K-1A-Q-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS15K-2G-Q-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS15K-2G-Q-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS15K-2A-Q-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS15K-2A-Q-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS15K-3G-Q-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS15K-3G-Q-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS15K-3A-Q-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS15K-3A-Q-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS22K-1G-RN-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS22K-1G-RN-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS22K-1A-RN-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS22K-1A-RN-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS22K-2G-QN-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS22K-2G-QN-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS22K-2A-QN-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS22K-2A-QN-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS37K-1G-SN-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS37K-1G-SN-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS37K-1A-SN-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS37K-1A-SN-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS37K-2G-SN-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS37K-2G-SN-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS37K-2A-SN-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS37K-2A-SN-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS45K-1G-TM-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS45K-1G-TM-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS45K-1A-TM-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS45K-1A-TM-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS45K-2G-TM-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS45K-2G-TM-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS45K-2A-TM-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS45K-2A-TM-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS55K-1G-TN-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS55K-1G-TN-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS55K-1A-TN-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS55K-1A-TN-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS55K-2G-TN-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS55K-2G-TN-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS55K-2A-TN-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS55K-2A-TN-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS75K-1G-TT-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS75K-1G-TT-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS75K-1A-TT-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS75K-1A-TT-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS75K-2G-TT-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS75K-2G-TT-M4-HOA-PL NFCXLS75K-2A-TT-M01-HOA-PL NFCXLS75K-2A-TT-M4-HOA-PL HP Voltage
200/230
10
460
7.5
230
15
460
10
200
10
230
20
460
12
15
200/230
30
460
MOTOR CONTROLS
20/25
200/230
50
460
25/30
200/230
60
460
40
230
75
460
40/50
200/230
100
460
Coil Enclosure Coil Voltage NEMA Rating Inrush 1 24 VAC 12/4 45 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 45 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 88 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 88 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 88 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 88 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 88 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 191 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 191 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 191 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 191 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 12/4 24 VAC 191 VA 120 VAC 1 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 191 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 191 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 191 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 400 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4 1 24 VAC 12/4 400 VA 1 120 VAC 12/4
NEW!
Coil Holding Current 6 VA Overload Range 14.5-18 Amps Dimensions in (cm) 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 6 VA 14.5-18 Amps 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 9 VA 21-26 Amps 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 9 VA 21-26 Amps 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 9 VA 30-40 Amps 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 9 VA 30-40 Amps 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 9 VA 30-40 Amps 12" x 10" x 6" (30.5 x 25.4 x 15.2) 17 VA 54-65 Amps 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 17 VA 42-55 Amps 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 17 VA 64-82 Amps 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 17 VA 64-82 Amps 16" x 12" x 8" (40.6 x 30.5 x 20.3) 17 VA 78-97 Amps 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3) 17 VA 78-97 Amps 20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
Weight lb (kg) 17 (7.7)
17 (7.7)
17 (7.7)
17 (7.7)
18 (8.2)
18 (8.2)
18 (8.2)
27 (12.2)
27 (12.2)
28 (12.7)
28 (12.7)
38 (17.2)
38 (17.2)
17 VA
90-110 Amps 90-110 Amps 140-190 Amps 140-190 Amps
20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
40 (18.1)
17 VA
20" x 16" x 8" (50.8 x 40.6 x 20.3)
40 (18.1)
32 VA
24" x 20" x 8" (60.1 x 50.8 x 20.3)
65 (29.4)
32 VA
24" x 20" x 8" (60.1 x 50.8 x 20.3)
65 (29.4)
694
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Intuitive commissioning Start-up wizard Real-time clock Detachable keypad PID with sleep control
MOTOR CONTROLS
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES CORE VFD
CORE VFDs are an economical option drive option with easy to set up functionality. The rmware includes special features that make start-up and commissioning of HVAC applications especially easy. The Wizard consists of critical commissioning questions to intuitively guide users through parameter setup process, which covers nearly all your commercial heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) applications. Additionally, the VFD CORE is rated for constant torque for industrial applications. The CORE VFD line is also available with a bypass option which is also easy to integrate. The by-pass comes with a control transformer, time delay fuses, 3 contactors, primary and secondary fuses. The CORE line of VFDs is a time saver as well as an energy saver.
HCRDA005DA1000T
SPECIFICATIONS
Model specic, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 380-480 VAC or 200-240 VAC Motor Rating 0.75 to 250 Hp Frequency Range 0-320 Hz 0.1 - 3000 seconds Acceleration Time Deceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds Digital Input 6 logical, 24 VDC= on, 0 VDC= off, all congurable Analog Input 2; 0-010v or 4-20 mA voltage Input impedance 200 k Current impedance 250 Digital Output Open collector, max. load 48V/ 50 mA Analog Output 1; 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA programmable 500 maximum load Supply Voltage 2; SPDT 8A at 24VDC or 250 VAC 0.4A at 125 VDC minimum load 10mA at 5 VAC/VDC 5% DC choke (Frame D and E standard; 3% built in) -- Optional for frames A, B, C Class 2 GMC/ RFI EMC Complies with EN50082-1, -2 EN61800-3 Communication Protocol RS485 MODBUS, BACnet Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Operating Temperature 14 to 104F (-10 to 40C) Approvals UL Listed File E190898, CE, RoHS Eco Friendly Yes Warranty 3 years Relay Outputs Filter Type
12
MOTOR CONTROLS
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Frame A B B C C C D D E E E March 2014 208/230 VAC 1.0 - 7.5 HP 10 - 15 HP 20 HP 25 - 40 HP 460 VAC 1.0 - 10 HP 15 HP 20 - 25 HP 30 - 40 HP 50 HP 60 - 75 HP 100 - 125 HP Enclosure NEMA type NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 Width in (cm) 5.12 (13.0) 7.48 (19.0) 7.48 (19.0) 9.84 (25.0) 9.84 (25.0) 9.84 (25.0) 12.99 (33.0) 12.99 (33.0) 14.57 (37.0) 14.57 (37.0) 14.57 (37.0) Height in (cm) 9.84 (25.0) 12.6 (32.0) 12.6 (32.0) 15.75 (40.0) 15.75 (40.0) 15.75 (40.0) 27.10 (68.83) 27.10 (68.83) 28.18 (71.58) 28.18 (71.58) 28.18 (71.58) Depth in (cm) 6.69 (17.0) 7.48 (19.0) 7.48 (19.0) 8.27 (21.0) 8.27 (21.0) 8.27 (21.0) 10.83 (27.5) 10.83 (27.5) 11.81 (30.0) 11.81 (30.0) 11.81 (30.0) Weight lb (kg) 6.17 (2.8) 10.14 (4.6) 12.35 (5.6) 23.15 (10.5) 19.18 (8.7) 20.72 (9.4) 78.26 (35.5) 89.29 (40.5) 100.75 (45.7) 101.85 (46.2) 120.59 (54.7)
50 - 60 HP 75 HP 100 HP 125 HP
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
695
MOTOR CONTROLS
WIRING
3-PHASE POWER IS PROVIDED JUMPER FUSE/NO FUSE BREAKER R(L1) NFB S(L2) T(L3)
DC CHOKE (OPTIONAL)
BREAKING RESISTOR (OPTIONAL)
R(L1) S(L2) T(L3)
U(T1) V(T2) W(T3)
MOTOR IM 3~
NEW!
3-PHASE POWER IS PROVIDED FRAME E R S +1/DC+ -/DC+ U(T1) MOTOR IM 3~ r V(T2) s W(T3) FUSE/NO FUSE BREAKER R(L1) NFB R(L1) S(L2) T(L3) RA1 (RELAY OUT 1): RUN RA2 (RELAY OUT 2): FAULT RA3 (RELAY OUT 3): READY MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS RA1 RB1 RC1 RA2 250VAC/5A 250VAC/6A 30VDC/6A S(L2) T(L3) FACTORY SETTING: PNP SOURCE FWD/STOP REV/STOP PRESET SPD 1 PRESET SPD 2 PRESET SPD 3 PRESET SPD 4 EXT FAULT FAULT RESET NA NA DCM COM +24V +24V FWD REV MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 FACTORY SETTING RC2 RA3 30VDC/5A MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT FREQUENCY TERMINALS 250VAC/5A MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT FREQUENCY TERMINALS 30VDC/5A
ANALOG MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINAL 0~10V/0~20mA ANALOG SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL ANALOG MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINAL 0~10V/0~20mA COMMUNICATION EXTENSION CARD I/O & RELAY EXTENSION CARD DIGITAL SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL WHILE USING INTERNAL POWER TO RUN SINK MODE POWER REMOVAL SAFETY FUNCTION FOR EMERGENCY STOP DIGITAL SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL
FACTORY SETTING: PNP SOURCE DCM COM +24V +24V FWD REV MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 RA1 RB1 RC1 RA2
RA1 (RELAY OUT 1): RUN RA2 (RELAY OUT 2): FAULT RA3 (RELAY OUT 3): READY
FACTORY SETTING
FWD/STOP REV/STOP PRESET SPD 1 PRESET SPD 2 PRESET SPD3 PRESET SPD 4 EXT FAULT FAULT RESET NA NA
MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS 250VAC/6A 30VDC/6A
RC2 RA3
MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT FREQUENCY TERMINALS 250VAC/5A 30VDC/5A MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT FREQUENCY TERMINALS 250VAC/5A 30VDC/5A
DIGITAL SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL WHILE USING INTERNAL POWER TO RUN SINK MODE POWER REMOVAL SAFETY FUNCTION FOR EMERGENCY STOP DIGITAL SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL
DCM S1 SCM +10V AVI1 ACI AVI2 ACM
RC3
RC3
+10V/20mA 3 5K 2 1 0~10V/0~20mA 0-20mA/0~10V 0~+10V ANALOG SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL MAIN CIRCUIT (POWER) TERMINALS MODBUS RS-485 CONTROL SG+ PIN 1~2, 7, 8: TERMINALS RESERVED SGSHIELDED PIN 3, 6: GND LEADS & PIN 4: SGCABLES PIN 5: SG+
AFM1 ACM AFM2
12
ANALOG MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINAL 0~10V/0~20mA ANALOG SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL ANALOG MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINAL 0~10V/0~20mA COMMUNICATION EXTENSION CARD I/O & RELAY EXTENSION CARD
+10V/20mA 5K 3 2 1 0~10V/0~20mA 0-20mA/0~10V 0~+10V ANALOG SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL
AFM1 ACM AFM2
OPTION SLOT 1
8 1 8 1
OPTION SLOT 1
OPTION SLOT 3
MAIN CIRCUIT (POWER) TERMINALS CONTROL TERMINALS SHIELDED LEADS & CABLES
MI: MULTIFUNCTION INPUT AVI: ANALOG VOLTAGE INPUT ACI: ANALOG CURRENT INPUT
MODBUS RS-485 SG+ PIN 1~2, 7, 8: RESERVED SGPIN 3, 6: GND PIN 4: SGPIN 5: SG+
8 1 8 1
OPTION SLOT 3
MOTOR CONTROLS
Frame Sizes A, B, and C
Frame Sizes D and E
M1
M2
M8 DCM
COM +24V INTERNAL CIRCUIT
Source Mode with internal power (+24 VDC)
696
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MODEL HCRDA0020A1000T HCRDA0030A1000T HCRDA0050A1000T HCRDA0075A1000T HCRDA0100B1000T HCRDA0150B1000T HCRDA0200B1000T HCRDA0250C1000T HCRDA0300C1000T HCRDA0400C1000T HCRDA0500D1000T HCRDA0600D1000T HCRDA0750E1000T HCRDA1000E1000T HCRDA1250E1000T HCRDC0010A1000T HCRDC0020A1000T HCRDC0030A1000T HCRDC0050A1000T HCRDC0075A1000T HCRDC0100A1000T HCRDC0150B1000T HCRDC0200B1000T HCRDC0250B1000T HCRDC0300C1000T HCRDC0400C1000T HCRDC0500C1000T HCRDC0600D1000T HCRDC0750D1000T HCRDC1000D1000T HCRDC1250D1000T HCRDA0010A1000T
MOTOR CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION Core VFD 230 V, 2 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 3 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 5 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 7.5 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 10 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 15 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 20 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 25 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 30 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 40 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 50 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 60 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 75 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 100 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 125 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 1 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 2 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 3 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 5 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 7.5 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 10 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 15 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 20 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 25 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 30 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 40 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 50 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 60 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 75 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 100 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 460 V, 125 HP, NEMA 1 Core VFD 230 V, 1 HP, NEMA 1
12
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
697
MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION The CORE VFD with a bypass option comes with a control transformer, time delay fuses, three contactors, primary and secondary fuses. CORE VFDs are an economical option drive option with easy to set up functionality. The rmware includes special features that make start-up and commissioning of HVAC applications especially easy. The Wizard consists of critical commissioning questions to intuitively guide users through a parameter setup process, which covers nearly all your commercial heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) applications. Additionally, the VFD CORE is rated for constant torque for industrial applications. The CORE line of VFDs is a time saver as well as an energy saver. FEATURES Intuitive commissioning Start-up wizard Real-time clock Detachable keypad PID with sleep control
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES CORE VFD WITH BYPASS
NEW!
Core VFD with Bypass Relay Outputs Filter Type 2; SPDT 8A at 24VDC or 250 VAC 0.4A at 125 VDC minimum load 10mA at 5 VAC/VDC 5% DC choke optional on frames A, B, and C Class 2 GMC/ RFI Complies with EN50082-1, -2 EMC EN61800-3 Communication Protocol RS485 MODBUS, BACnet Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH, non-condensing Operating Temperature 14 to 104F (-10 to 40C) Approvals UL Listed File #E190898, CE, RoHS Eco Friendly Yes Warranty 3 years
12
SPECIFICATIONS
Model specic, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 380480 VAC or 200-240 VAC 0.75 to 250 Hp Motor Rating Frequency Range 0-320 Hz Acceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds Deceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds 6 logical, 24 VDC = on, 0 VDC = off, Digital Inputs all congurable Analog Input 2; 0-010V or 4-20 mA voltage Input Impedance 200 k Current Impedance 250 Open collector, max. load 48V/ 50 Digital Output mA Analog Output 1; 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA programmable 500 maximum load Supply Voltage
MOTOR CONTROLS

Frame A B C D E 208/230 VAC 1.0 - 7.5 HP 10 - 20 HP 25 - 40 hp 50 - 60 HP 75 - 125 HP 460 VAC 1.0 - 10 HP 15 - 25 HP 30 - 50 HP 60 - 125 HP Enclosure NEMA type NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 Width in (cm) 8.9 (22.7) 12.4 (31.6) 12.4 (31.6) 19.5 (49.7) 23.0 (48.3) Height in (cm) 22.0 (55.9) 48.0 (121.9) 48.0 (121.9) 53.5 (135.9) 66.5 (168.9) Depth in (cm) 9.3 (23.6) 9.66 (24.5) 9.66 (24.5) 11.4 (29.1) 14.4 (36.7) Weight lb (kg) 37.0 (16.78) 67.0(30.39) 83.0 (37.65) 193.0 (87.54) 225 (102.06)
698
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
3-PHASE POWER IS PROVIDED FUSE/NO FUSE BREAKER R(L1) NFB S(L2) T(L3) FACTORY SETTING: PNP SOURCE FACTORY SETTING FWD/STOP REV/STOP PRESET SPD 1 PRESET SPD 2 PRESET SPD3 PRESET SPD 4 EXT FAULT FAULT RESET NA NA
DIGITAL SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL WHILE USING INTERNAL POWER TO RUN SINK MODE
MOTOR CONTROLS
DC CHOKE (OPTIONAL)
JUMPER
BREAKING RESISTOR (OPTIONAL)
R(L1) S(L2) T(L3)
U(T1) V(T2) W(T3)
MOTOR IM 3~
DCM COM +24V +24V FWD REV MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8 RA1 RB1 RC1 RA2
RA1 (RELAY OUT 1): RUN RA2 (RELAY OUT 2): FAULT RA3 (RELAY OUT 3): READY
MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS 250VAC/6A 30VDC/6A
RC2 RA3
MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT FREQUENCY TERMINALS 250VAC/5A 30VDC/5A MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT FREQUENCY TERMINALS 250VAC/5A 30VDC/5A
12
POWER REMOVAL SAFETY FUNCTION FOR EMERGENCY STOP DIGITAL SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL
RC3
MOTOR CONTROLS
+10V/20mA 5K 3 2 1 0~10V/0~20mA 0-20mA/0~10V 0~+10V ANALOG SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL MAIN CIRCUIT (POWER) TERMINALS MODBUS RS-485 CONTROL SG+ PIN 1~2, 7, 8: TERMINALS RESERVED SGSHIELDED PIN 3, 6: GND LEADS & PIN 4: SGCABLES PIN 5: SG+
AFM1 ACM AFM2
OPTION SLOT 1
8 1 8 1
OPTION SLOT 3
Frame Sizes A, B, and C
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
699
MOTOR CONTROLS
WIRING (continued)
3-PHASE POWER IS PROVIDED
FRAME E R S FUSE/NO FUSE BREAKER R(L1) NFB S(L2) T(L3) r s
+1/DC+
NEW!
-/DC+ U(T1) MOTOR IM 3~ V(T2) W(T3) RA1 (RELAY OUT 1): RUN RA2 (RELAY OUT 2): FAULT RA3 (RELAY OUT 3): READY MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS RA1 RB1 RC1 RA2 250VAC/5A 250VAC/6A 30VDC/6A RC2 RA3 30VDC/5A MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT FREQUENCY TERMINALS 250VAC/5A MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT FREQUENCY TERMINALS 30VDC/5A
R(L1) S(L2) T(L3)
FACTORY SETTING: PNP SOURCE FWD/STOP REV/STOP PRESET SPD 1 PRESET SPD 2 PRESET SPD 3 PRESET SPD 4 EXT FAULT FAULT RESET NA NA
DCM COM +24V +24V FWD REV MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 MI7 MI8
FACTORY SETTING
12
DIGITAL SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL WHILE USING INTERNAL POWER TO RUN SINK MODE POWER REMOVAL SAFETY FUNCTION FOR EMERGENCY STOP DIGITAL SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL
RC3
MOTOR CONTROLS
+10V/20mA 3 5K 2 1 0~10V/0~20mA 0-20mA/0~10V 0~+10V ANALOG SIGNAL COMMON TERMINAL
AFM1 ACM AFM2
OPTION SLOT 1
MAIN CIRCUIT (POWER) TERMINALS CONTROL TERMINALS SHIELDED LEADS & CABLES
MODBUS RS-485 SG+ PIN 1~2, 7, 8: RESERVED SGPIN 3, 6: GND PIN 4: SGPIN 5: SG+
8 1 8 1
OPTION SLOT 3
Frame Sizes D and E
700
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING (continued)
L1 L2 L3
MOTOR CONTROLS
BC-3
HVFDSB3
BC-1
L1 L2 L3
U V W
BC-2
Main Disconnect
Three bypass contactors shown (BC-1, BC-2, BC-3). BC-3 not supplied in a two contactor bypass
Transformer
To factory wired bypass controls (switches, coils, etc.)
Note: Typical wiring shown. Refer to product installation manual for electrical wiring connections and requirements.
MODEL HCRBA0010A1300T HCRBA0020A1300T HCRBA0030A1300T HCRBA0050A1300T HCRBA0075A1300T HCRBA0100B1300T HCRBA0150B1300T HCRBA0200B1300T HCRBA0250C1300T HCRBA0300C1300T HCRBA0400C1300T HCRBA0500D1300T HCRBA0600D1300T HCRBA0750E1300T HCRBA1000E1300T HCRBA1250E1300T HCRBB0010A1300T HCRBB0020A1300T HCRBB0030A1300T HCRBB0050A1300T HCRBB0075A1300T HCRBB0100B1300T HCRBB0150B1300T HCRBB0200B1300T DESCRIPTION CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/1 HP/NEMA 1 CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/2HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/3HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/5HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/7.5HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/10HP/NEMA 1/FRB CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/15HP/NEMA 1/FRB CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/20HP/NEMA 1/FRB CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/25HP/NEMA 1/FRC CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/30HP/NEMA 1/FRC CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/40HP/NEMA 1/FRC CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/50HP/NEMA 1/FRD CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/60HP/NEMA 1/FRD CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/75HP/NEMA 1/FRE CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/100HP/NEMA 1/FRE CORE VFD W/BYPASS/208V/125HP/NEMA 1/FRE CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/1HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/2HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/3HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/5HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/7.5HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/10HP/NEMA 1/FRB CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/15HP/NEMA 1/FRB CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/20HP/NEMA 1/FRB MODEL HCRBB0250C1300T HCRBB0300C1300T HCRBB0400C1300T HCRBB0500D1300T HCRBB0600D1300T HCRBB0750E1300T HCRBB1000E1300T HCRBB1250E1300T HCRBC0010A1300T HCRBC0020A1300T HCRBC0030A1300T HCRBC0050A1300T HCRBC0075A1300T HCRBC0100A1300T HCRBC0150B1300T HCRBC0200B1300T HCRBC0250B1300T HCRBC0300C1300T HCRBC0400C1300T HCRBC0500C1300T HCRBC0600D1300T HCRBC0750D1300T HCRBC1000D1300T HCRBC1250D1300T DESCRIPTION CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/25HP/NEMA 1/FRC CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/30HP/NEMA 1/FRC CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/40HP/NEMA 1/FRC CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/50HP/NEMA 1/FRD CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/60HP/NEMA 1/FRD CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/75HP/NEMA 1/FRE CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/100HP/NEMA 1/FRE CORE VFD W/BYPASS/230V/125HP/NEMA 1/FRE CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/1HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/2HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/3HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/5HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/7.5HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/10HP/NEMA 1/FRA CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/15HP/NEMA 1/FRB CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/20HP/NEMA 1/FRB CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/25HP/NEMA 1/FRB CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/30HP/NEMA 1/FRC CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/40HP/NEMA 1/FRC CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/50HP/NEMA 1/FRC CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/60HP/NEMA 1/FRD CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/75HP/NEMA 1/FRD CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/100HP/NEMA 1/FRD CORE VFD W/BYPASS/460V/125HP/NEMA 1/FRD
12
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
701
MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION This compact VFD is a true micro drive, which saves space in the equipment cabinet and makes installation easy. The SmartDrive architecture allows for ease and speed in drive conguration. The intuitive user interface makes commissioning a breeze. The SmartDrive Compact VFD provides a standard PI Controller. Choose options to t any application. Interface type, lter, enclosure, inputs, and outputs are available in a wide array of combinations. For wall mounting, a frame kit is recommended. Frame kits are not necessary for installation inside a panel. FEATURES Small, compact micro drive design PI controller standard No main power supply required for programming Intuitive user interface DIN rail or screw mounting Flexible options include inputs, outputs, eld bus, and ltering Application interface "touch wheel" makes programming easy
HONEYWELL COMPACT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SMARTDRIVE COMPACT VFD
NEW!
CONTROL I/O
Signal Terminal 1 +10Vre Ref. voltage out Analog signal in 1 2 AI1
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Motor Rating Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Frequency Range Digital Switch Inputs Analog Inputs Digital Outputs Analog Output Relay Outputs 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 0.25 - 7.5 hp 0.1- 3000 seconds 0.1 - 3000 seconds 30 - 320 Hz 6; 0 - 30 VDC programmable 2; (1) 0-10 VDC, (1) 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA 1 Open Collector, max. load 48V/ 50mA 1, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, RL=500 2; (1) SPST N.O. (1) SPDT 250 VAC/2A, 250 VDC/0.4A
API FULL
Factory preset Freq. reference P)
Description Maximum load 10 mA 0 - +10 V Ri = 200 k (min) 20%, max. load 50 mA
12
3 6 7 8 9 10 A B 4
mA
GND 24Vout GND DI1 DI2 DI3 A B AI2 GND GND DI4 DI5 DI6 AO
I/O signal ground 24V output for DI's I/O signal ground Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 RS485 signal A RS485 signal B Analog signal in 2 I/O signal ground I/O signal ground Digital input 4 Digital input 5 Digital input 6 Digital signal out Relay out 1
Start forward P) Preset speed B0 P) FB Communication FB Communication PI actual value P) Start reverse P)
0 - +30 V Ri = 12 k min
MOTOR CONTROLS
5 13 14 15 16 18
0(4) - 20 mA, Ri = 200
Preset speed B1P) Fault reset P) Disable PI contr. P)
0 - +30 V Ri = 12 k (min)
20 DO 22 RO 11 23 RO 12 24 RO 21 25 RO 22 26 RO 23
Output frequency P) Active = READY P) Active = RUN P)
Filter Type RFI Communication Protocol RS485 (Modbus protocol), Serial Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing) Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Frame Size MI1, MI2, MI3 Dimensions Frame sizes MI1 6.1"H x 2.6"W x 3.9"D (15.5 x 6.6 x 9.9 cm) MI2 7.7"H x 3.5"W x 4.0"D (19.6 x 8.9 x 10.2 cm) MI3 10.3"D x3.9"W x 4.3"D (26.2 x 9.9 x 10.9 cm) Weights MI1 1.20 lb (0.55 kg) MI2 1.50 lb (0.65 kg) MI3 2.18 lb (0.99 kg) Approvals CE, UL, cUL FILE #E190898 Warranty 3 years
Relay out 2 Active = FAULT P)
0(4) - 20 mA, RL = 500 Open collector, max. load 48V/50mA Max. switching load: 250 VAC/2A or 250 VDC/ 0.4A Max. switching load: 250 VAC/2A or 250 VDC/ 0.4A
P) = Programmable function, see parameter lists and descriptions in installation manual.
Note: NEMA 1 frame kits include the top protection from vertically dripping water with additional physical contact protection over the wiring terminals. Recommended for nonenclosed VFD mounting.
702
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Full IO Model Limited IO Model
HVFDCD1B0003L00 HVFDCD1B0003L01 HVFDCD1B0005L00 HVFDCD1B0005L01 HVFDCD1B0007L00 HVFDCD1B0007L01 HVFDCD1B0010L00 HVFDCD1B0010L01 HVFDCD1B0015L00 HVFDCD1B0015L01 HVFDCD1B0020L00 HVFDCD1B0020L01 HVFDCD1B0030L00 HVFDCD1B0030L01 HVFDCD3C0005L00 HVFDCD3C0005L01 HVFDCD3C0007L00 HVFDCD3C0007L01 HVFDCD3C0010L00 HVFDCD3C0010L01 HVFDCD3C0015L00 HVFDCD3C0015L01 HVFDCD3C0020L00 HVFDCD3C0020L01 HVFDCD3C0030L00 HVFDCD3C0030L01 HVFDCD3C0040L00 HVFDCD3C0040L01 HVFDCD3C0050L00 HVFDCD3C0050L01 HVFDCD3C0075L00 HVFDCD3C0075L01 HVFDCD1B0003F00 HVFDCD1B0003F01 HVFDCD1B0005F00 HVFDCD1B0005F01 HVFDCD1B0007F00 HVFDCD1B0007F01 HVFDCD1B0010F00 HVFDCD1B0010F01 HVFDCD1B0015F00 HVFDCD1B0015F01 HVFDCD1B0020F00 HVFDCD1B0020F01 HVFDCD1B0030F00 HVFDCD1B0030F01 HVFDCD3C0005F00 HVFDCD3C0005F01 HVFDCD3C0007F00 HVFDCD3C0007F01 HVFDCD3C0010F00 HVFDCD3C0010F01 HVFDCD3C0015F00 HVFDCD3C0015F01 HVFDCD3C0020F00 HVFDCD3C0020F01 HVFDCD3C0030F00 HVFDCD3C0030F01 HVFDCD3C0040F00 HVFDCD3C0040F01 HVFDCD3C0050F00 HVFDCD3C0050F01 HVFDCD3C0075F00 HVFDCD3C0075F01
MOTOR CONTROLS
HONEYWELL COMPACT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SMARTDRIVE COMPACT VFD

Supply Voltage Current Rating
1.7A 1.7A 2.4A 2.4A 2.8A 2.8A 3.7A 3.7A 4.8A 4.8A 7.0A 7.0A 11.0A 11.0A 1.3A 1.3A 1.9A 1.9A 2.4A 2.4A 3.3A 3.3A 4.3A 4.3A 5.6A 5.6A 7.6A 7.6A 9.0A 9.0A 12.0A 12.0A
Horsepower
0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 0.75 0.75 1 1 1.5 1.5 2 2 3 3 0.5 0.5 0.75 0.75 1 1 1.5 1.5 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7.5 7.5
EMC
NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES NO YES
Frame Size
MI1 MI1 MI1 MI1 MI1 MI1 MI1 MI1 MI2 MI2 MI2 MI2 MI3 MI3 MI1 MI1 MI1 MI1 MI1 MI1
208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 208 to 230 VAC, 1 phase input - 3 phase output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 380 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 460 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 460 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 460 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 460 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output 460 to 480 VAC, 3 phase input/ output
12
MOTOR CONTROLS
MI1 MI1 MI2 MI2 MI2 MI2 MI3 MI3 MI3 MI3 MI3 MI3
ACCESSORIES
HVFDCABLE HVFDCDMCA HVFDCDMCAKIT HVFDCDNEMA1FR1 HVFDCDNEMA1FR2 HVFDCDNEMA1FR3
Commissioning cable and USB adaptor VFD commissioning device Commisioning kit Enclosure upgrade Nema 1 kit frame size1 Enclosure upgrade Nema 1 kit frame size2 Enclosure upgrade Nema 1 kit frame size3
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
703
MOTOR CONTROLS
DESCRIPTION SmartVFD HVAC drives are all-purpose, and can handle both constant-torque and variable-torque loads. The rmware includes special features that make start-up and commissioning of HVAC applications especially easy. Application-specic startup wizards for pumps and fans, combined with the simple and intuitive user interface, make the SmartVFD a pleasure rather than a chore. Integration is a snap with the SmartVFD. It includes both Ethernet and RS485 connections, and will talk BACnet, Modbus, and JCI N2. Take the complexity out of drive selection, installation, and startup - choose SmartVFD for your HVAC projects and start saving time, money, and manpower as well as energy. FEATURES Intuitive commissioning High resolution graphic interface User manual included in rmware Simple start-up wizard - pump or fan Fire mode 2 PID controllers Real-time clock
HONEYWELL ALL PURPOSE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES SMARTVFD HVAC
NEW!
STANDARD I/O BOARD
Terminal Signal
Reference output
Technical information
+10 VDC, +3%; Maximum current 10 mA Analog input channel 1; Short-circuited protected 0- +10VDC (Ri = 200 k) 4-20 mA (Ri = 250 ) Resolution 0.1%, accuracy 1% Selection V/mA with dip-switches Differential input if not connected to ground; Allows 20V differential mode voltage to GND Analog input channel 2; Short-circuited protected Default: 4-20 mA (Ri =250 ) 0-10 VDC (Ri = 200k) Resolution 0.1%, accuracy 1% Selection V/mA with dip-switches Differential input if not connected to ground; Allows 20V differential mode voltage to GND
12
SPECIFICATIONS
Model specic, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 380-480 VAC or 200-240 VAC Motor Rating 0.75 to 250 Hp Frequency Range 0-320 Hz 0.1 - 3000 seconds Acceleration Time Deceleration Time 0.1 - 3000 seconds Digital Inputs 6 logical, 24 VDC= on, 0 VDC= off, all congurable Analog Input 2; 0-10V or 4-20 mA voltage input impedance 200 k current impedance 250 Digital Output Open collector, max. load 48V/ 50 mA Analog Output 1; 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA programmable 500 maximum load Relay Outputs 2; SPDT 8A at 24 VDC or 250 VAC 0.4A at 125 VDC minimum load 10mA at 5 VAC/VDC Filter Type 5% DC choke Class 2 GMC/ RFI EMC Complies with EN50082-1, -2 EN61800-3 Communication Protocol RS485 JCI N2, MODBUS, BACnet MS/TP Ethernet BACnet/ IP, Modbus/TCP Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Operating Temperature 14 to 104F (-10 to 40C) Approvals UL Listed File E190898 CE RoHS Yes Eco Friendly Warranty 3 years Supply Voltage
Analog input, voltage or current
Analog input common (current)
Analog input voltage or current
MOTOR CONTROLS
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
30 A B
Analog input common (current)
+24 VDC, 10%, max volt. ripple < 100mVrms; max. 250mA 24VDC aux. voltage Dimensioning: max. 1000mA/control unit. Short-circuit protected I/O ground Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 Common A for DIN1-DIN6 Ground for reference and controls (connected internally to frame earth through 1M) Positive or negative logic Ri = min. 5k 0...5VDC = 0 1530VDC = 1 Digital inputs can be disconnected from ground
+24 VDC, 10%, max volt. ripple < 100mVrms; max. 250mA 24 VDC aux. voltage Dimensioning: max. 1000mA/control unit. Short-circuit protected I/O ground Digital input 4 Digital input 5 Digital input 6 Common A for DIN1-DIN6 Analog signal (+output) Analog output common 24 VDC auxiliary input voltage RS485 RS485 Ground for reference and controls (connected internally to frame earth through 1M) Positive or negative logic Ri = min. 5k 0...5VDC = 0 1530VDC = 1 Digital inputs can be isolated from ground. Analog output channel 1, selection 0 -20mA, load <500 Default: 0-20 mA/0-10 VDC Resolution 0.1%, accuracy 2% Selection V/mA with dip-switches Short-circuited protected. Can be used as external power backup for the control unit Differential receiver/transmitter Set bus termination with dip switches
704
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
RELAY BOARD TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Relay board with two change-over contact (SPDT) relays and one relay Relay with normally-open (NO or SPST) board contact. 5.5 mm isolation between channels.
MOTOR CONTROLS
RELAY CONNECTIONS
From Standard I/O board From term. #12 RUN From term. #13
21 RO1/1 22 RO1/2 23 RO1/3 24 RO2/1 25 RO2/2 26 RO2/3 28 TI1+ 29 TI1-
Terminal
Relay Board
Signal Relay output 1
21
22 23 24 25
Switching capacity 2 4VDC/8A 250 VAC/8A Relay Output 1* 125 VDC/0.4A Min.switching load 5V/10mA
Relay output 2
26 28 29
Switching capacity 24 VDC/8A 250 VAC/8A Relay Output 2* 125 VDC/0.4A Min.switching load 5V/10mA Thermistor Rtrip = 4.7 k (PTC); Input Measuring voltage 3.5V
Thermistor input
* If 230VAC is used as control voltage from the output relays, the control circuitry must be powered with a separate isolation transformer to limit short circuit current and ovrvoltage spikes. This is to prevent welding on the relay contacts. Refer to standard EN 60204-1, section 7.2.9
12

Frame 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 208/ 230 VAC 0.75-4 HP 0.75-4 HP 0.75-4 HP 5-10 Hp 5-10 Hp 5-10 Hp 15-20 Hp 15-20 Hp 15-20 Hp 25-40 Hp 25-40 Hp 25-40 Hp 50-75 Hp 50-75 Hp 50-75 Hp 100-125 Hp 100-125 Hp 460 VAC 1.5-7.5 HP 1.5-7.5 HP 1.5-7.5 HP 10-20 Hp 10-20 Hp 10-20 Hp 25-40 Hp 25-40 Hp 25-40 Hp 50-75 Hp 50-75 Hp 50-75 Hp 100-150 Hp 100-150 Hp 100-150 Hp 200-250 Hp 200-250 Hp Enclosure NEMA type 1 12 3 1 12 3 1 12 3 1 12 3 1 12 3 1 12 Width in. (cm) 5 (12.7) 5 (12.7) 20.5 (52.07) 5.7 (14.48) 5.7 (14.48) 20.5 (52.07) 7.7 (19.56) 7.7 (19.56) 28.5 (72.39) 9.3 (23.62) 9.3 (23.62) 28.8 (73.15) 11.4 (28.96) 11.4 (28.96) 11.4 (28.96) 18.9 (48.00) 18.9 (48.00) Height in. (cm) 12.9 (32.77) 12.9 (32.77) 20 (50.8) 16.5 (41.91) 16.5 (41.91) 24 (60.96) 21.9 (55.63) 21.9 (55.63) 36 (88.9) 25.4 (64.51) 25.4 (64.51) 48 (121.92) 38 (96.52) 38 (96.52) 38 (96.52) 45.3 (115.06) 45.3 (115.06) Depth in. (cm) 7.5 (19.05) 7.5 (19.05) 10 (25.4) 8.4 (21.34) 8.4 (21.34) 10 (25.4) 9 (22.86) 9 (22.86) 10 (25.4) 10.2 (25.91) 10.2 (25.91) 12 (30.48) 13.5 (34.29) 13.5 (34.29) 13.5 (34.29) 14.4 (36.58) 14.4 (36.58) Weight lb (kg) 13.0 (5.9) 13.0 (5.9) 13.0 (5.9) 22.0 (10.0) 22.0 (10.0) 22.0 (10.0) 44.0 (20.0) 44.0 (20.0) 44.0 (20.0) 83.0 (37.7) 83.0 (37.7) 83.0 (37.7) 154.0 (70.0) 154.0 (70.0) 154.0 (70.0) 238.0 (108.2) 238.0 (108.2)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
705
MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS

HP Amps Frame
4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 8 8 8 9 9
NEMA 1
HVFDSD3C0015G100 HVFDSD3C0020G100 HVFDSD3C0030G100 HVFDSD3C0040G100 HVFDSD3C0050G100 HVFDSD3C0075G100 HVFDSD3C0100G100 HVFDSD3C0150G100 HVFDSD3C0200G100 HVFDSD3C0250G100 HVFDSD3C0300G100 HVFDSD3C0400G100 HVFDSD3C0500G100 HVFDSD3C0600G100 HVFDSD3C0750G100 HVFDSD3C1000G100 HVFDSD3C1250G100 HVFDSD3C1500G100 HVFDSD3C2000G100 HVFDSD3C2500G100 HVFDSD3A0007G100 HVFDSD3A0010G100 HVFDSD3A0015G100 HVFDSD3A0020G100 HVFDSD3A0030G100 HVFDSD3A0050G100 HVFDSD3A0075G100 HVFDSD3A0100G100 HVFDSD3A0150G100 HVFDSD3A0200G100 HVFDSD3A0250G100 HVFDSD3A0300G100 HVFDSD3A0400G100 HVFDSD3A0500G100 HVFDSD3A0600G100 HVFDSD3A0750G100 HVFDSD3A1000G100 HVFDSD3A1250G100
12
460 VAC 3.4 1.5 4.8 2 5.6 3 8 4 9.6 5 12 7.5 16 10 23 15 31 20 38 25 46 30 61 40 72 50 87 60 105 75 140 100 170 125 205 150 261 200 310 250 208/ 230 VAC 3.7 0.75 4.8 1 6.6 1.5 8 2 11 3 18 5 24 7.5 31 10 48 15 62 20 75 25 88 30 105 40 140 50 170 60 205 75 261 100 310 125
NEW!
NEMA 12 NEMA3R
HVFDSD3C0015G200 HVFDSD3C0020G200 HVFDSD3C0030G200 HVFDSD3C0050G200 HVFDSD3C0075G200 HVFDSD3C0100G200 HVFDSD3C0150G200 HVFDSD3C0200G200 HVFDSD3C0250G200 HVFDSD3C0300G200 HVFDSD3C0400G200 HVFDSD3C0500G200 HVFDSD3C0600G200 HVFDSD3C0750G200 HVFDSD3C1000G200 HVFDSD3C1250G200 HVFDSD3C1500G200 HVFDSD3C2000G200 HVFDSD3C2500G200 HVFDSD3A0007G200 HVFDSD3A0010G200 HVFDSD3A0015G200 HVFDSD3A0020G200 HVFDSD3A0030G200 HVFDSD3A0050G200 HVFDSD3A0075G200 HVFDSD3A0100G200 HVFDSD3A0150G200 HVFDSD3A0200G200 HVFDSD3A0250G200 HVFDSD3A0300G200 HVFDSD3A0400G200 HVFDSD3A0500G200 HVFDSD3A0600G200 HVFDSD3A0750G200 HVFDSD3A1000G200 HVFDSD3A1250G200 HVFDSD3C0015G300 HVFDSD3C0020G300 HVFDSD3C0030G300 HVFDSD3C0050G300 HVFDSD3C0075G300 HVFDSD3C0100G300 HVFDSD3C0150G300 HVFDSD3C0200G300 HVFDSD3C0250G300 HVFDSD3C0300G300 HVFDSD3C0400G300 HVFDSD3C0500G300 HVFDSD3C0600G300 HVFDSD3C0750G300 HVFDSD3C1000G300 HVFDSD3C1250G300 HVFDSD3C1500G300 HVFDSD3A0007G300 HVFDSD3A0010G300 HVFDSD3A0015G300 HVFDSD3A0020G300 HVFDSD3A0030G300 HVFDSD3A0050G300 HVFDSD3A0075G300 HVFDSD3A0100G300 HVFDSD3A0150G300 HVFDSD3A0200G300 HVFDSD3A0250G300 HVFDSD3A0300G300 HVFDSD3A0400G300 HVFDSD3A0500G300 HVFDSD3A0600G300 HVFDSD3A0750G300 HVFDSD3C0040G200 HVFDSD3C0040G300
MOTOR CONTROLS
Drives are typically sized to match the horsepower rating of the motor, which will be accurate 95 percent of the time. For greatest accuracy, drives should be sized based upon the Full Load Amps or current draw of the motor. The VFD must have a slightly larger current rating maximum.
ACCESSORIES LON communication card Commissioning cable and USB adaptor
32006630-001 HVFDCABLE
706
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Disconnect, 2-, or 3-contactor bypass Fused disconnect Auto bypass available Available in NEMA 1, 12, or 3R enclosure types Compact size SmartVFD wizard for pump or fan control Intuitive commissioning High resolution graphic interface User manual built in to rmware
MOTOR CONTROLS
HONEYWELL VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE WITH BYPASS SMARTVFD HVAC WITH BYPASS ASSEMBLY
Honeywells integral bypass and disconnect system make applying the SmartVFD drive a snap. Available with a simple fused disconnect switch, a 2-contactor bypass assembly, or a 3-contactor bypass assembly, it simplies installation. All the features of the SmartVFD are included -- a wide array of congurable inputs and outputs, and all the most popular network protocols, and the super easy startup wizards that speed commissioning. All drives feature Hand-Off-Auto operation as a is fully integrated keypad function. Make the SmartVFD choice for your variable speed drive needs.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Motor Rating Frequency Range Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Digital Inputs Analog Input Digital Output Analog Output 208 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz 230 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz 480 VAC, 3 phase, 60Hz 1.0 to 250 Hp 0 - 320 Hz 0.1 - 3000 seconds 0.1 - 3000 seconds 6 factory preset 2; 0-10V or 4-20 mA programmable Open collector, max. load 48V / 50 mA 1; 4-20 mA 2 each SPDT 8A at 24 VDC or 250 VAC 0.4A at 125 VDC Minimum load 10Ma at 5 VAC/VDC Filter Type 5% DC choke , and class 2 GMC/RFI EMC Complies with EN50082-1, -2 Communication Protocol RS485 BACnet MS/TP, N2, Modbus BACnet/ IP, Modbus/TCP Ethernet Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Operating Temperature 14 to 104F (-10 to 40C) Approvals UL Listed File #E190898 cUL CE RoHS Eco Friendly Yes Warranty 3 years Relay Outputs
12
MOTOR CONTROLS
WIRING
BC-3 HVFDSB3 BC-1
L1 L2 L3 Main Disconnect
L1 L2 L3
U V W
BC-2
Three bypass contactors shown (BC-1, BC-2, BC-3). BC-3 not supplied in a two contactor bypass
Transformer
To factory wired bypass controls (switches, coils, etc.)
Note: Typical wiring shown. Refer to product installation manual for electrical wiring connections and requirements. March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
707
MOTOR CONTROLS
DIMENSIONS - IN (CM)
Horsepower and Voltage Frame 208/ 230 460 VAC Size VAC
4 0.75-4 Hp 1.5-7.5 Hp
NEMA 1 Conguration
Disconnect 2-Contactor 3-Contactor, 3-Contactor w/ Auto- Bypass
Width
8.9 (22.6) 8.9 (22.6) 8.9 (22.6) 8.9 (22.6) 8.9 (22.6) 8.9 (22.6) 12.4 (30.4) 12.4 (30.4) 12.4 (30.4) 20.84 (51.1) 20.84 (51.1) 20.84 (51.1) 25.0 (61.3) 25.0 (61.3) 25.0 (61.3)
Height
8.9 (22.6) 8.9 (22.6) 8.9 (22.6) 34.5 (84.5) 34.5 (84.5) 41.5 (101.7) 45.0 (110.3) 45.0 (110.3) 55.0 (134.8) 51.5 (126.2) 51.5 (126.2) 59.0 (144.6) 60.0 (147.0) 60.0 (147.0) 70.0 (171.5)
NEW!
NEMA 12 Height NEMA 3 R Height Depth Width Depth Width
10.7 (26.2) 12.0 (29.4) 36.0 (88.2) 8.8 (21.6) 20.5 (50.2) 20.0 (49.0) 10.7 (26.2) 16.0 (39.2) 16.0 (39.2) 12.0 (29.4) 16.0 (39.2) 16.0 (39.2) 16.0 (39.2) 20.0 (49.0) 20.0 (49.0) 16.0 (39.2) 24.0 (58.8) 24.0 (58.8) 20.0 (49.0) 36.0 (88.2) 8.8 (21.6) 24.5 (60.0) 24.0 (58.8) 10.7 (26.2) 10.7 (26.2) 36.0 (88.2) 40.0 (98) 44.0 (107.8) 44.0 (107.8) 8.8 (21.6) 8.8 (21.6) 8.8 (21.6) 8.8 (21.6) 24.5 (60.0) 24.5 (60.0) 28.5 (69.8) 28.5 (69.8) 24.0 (58.8) 24.0 (58.8) 30.0 (73.5) 30.0 (73.5) 36.0 (88.2) 36.0 (88.2) 36.0 (88.2) 46.0 (112.7) 10.8 (26.5) 28.5 (69.8) 54.0 (132.3) 10.8 (26.5) 34.5 (84.5) 54.0 (132.3) 10.8 (26.5) 34.5 (84.5) 12.6 (30.9)
Depth
10.0 (24.5)
10.0 (24.5)
10.0 (24.5) 10.0 (24.5) 10.0 (24.5) 10.0 (24.5) 10.0 (24.5) 10.0 (24.5) 10.0 (24.5)
5-10Hp
10-20 Hp
10.7 (26.2) 10.7 (26.2) 12.6 (30.9)
15-20Hp
25-40 Hp
12.6 (30.9) 11.4 (27.9) 11.4 (27.9) 11.4 (27.9) 16.2 (39.7) 16.2 (39.7) 16.2 (39.7)
25-40Hp
50-75 Hp
50.0 (122.5) 11.8 (28.9) 28.5 (69.8) 48.0 (117.6) 12.0 (29.4) 64.0 (156.8) 13.6 (33.3) 40.4 (98.9) 48.0 (117.6) 12.0 (29.4) 64.0 (156.8) 13.6 (33.3) 40.4 (98.9) 48.0 (117.6) 12.0 (29.4) 64.0 (156.8) 15.1 (36.9) 40.4 (98.9) 48.0 (117.6) 12.0 (29.4)
12
8 50-75 Hp 100-150 Hp
Disconnect 2-Contactor
56.0 (137.2) 48.0 (117.6) 15.1 (36.9) 40.4 (98.9) 60.0 (147.0) 12.0 (29.4) 56.0 (137.2) 48.0 (117.6) 15.1 (36.9) 40.4 (98.9) 60.0 (147.0) 12.0 (29.4)
MOTOR CONTROLS
3-Contactor, 3-Contactor w/ Auto- Bypass
SMART VFD BYPASS CONFIGURATIONS Our ve congurations make it easy for you to select the right bypass to complete your drive package. All bundles are available in NEMA 1, NEMA 12 and ventilated NEMA 3R HOA (HAND OFF AUTO). SmartVFD Disconnect Only Adds a fused disconnect to the VFD. SmartVFD 2-Contactor Bypass Provides an economical means of bypassing the VFD. Freeze/Fire/Smoke Interlock SmartVFD 3-Contactor Bypass Commission, service or replace the VFD without affecting the operation of the motor. Fused Disconnect Freeze/Fire/Smoke Interlock VFD is isolated from power with motor running in BYPASS mode TEST position powers the VFD without sending power to the motor SmartVFD 3-Contactor Bypass with Auto-Bypass The package adds the control capabilities below to the standard three contactor bypass. Any VFD fault will automatically send the bypass to BYPASS mode A contact closure sends the bypass to BYPASS mode Dry contacts indicate when the bypass is in BYPASS mode, alerting the building management system
708
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
HVFDSB3 Honeywell SmartVFD HVAC A B C 208 VAC - up to 75 Hp 230 VAC - up to 75 Hp Motor Horsepower 0007 0010 0015 0020 0030 0040 0050 0075 0100 0150 0200 0250 0300 0400 0500 0600 0750 1000 1250 1500 .75 Hp 1 Hp 2 Hp 3 Hp 4 Hp 5 Hp 7.5 Hp 10 Hp 15 Hp 20 Hp 25 Hp 30 Hp 40 Hp 50 Hp 60 Hp 75 Hp 100 Hp 125 Hp 150 Hp G 1.5 Hp 480 VAC - up to 150 Hp User Interface 1 2 3 HVFDSB3 C 0400 G 1
MOTOR CONTROLS
208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC
208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 208, 230 & 480 VAC 480 VAC 480 VAC 480 VAC Graphic User Interface Enclosure NEMA 1 NEMA 12 NEMA 3R Options 10 20 30 31 30 Disconnect only Drive with 2 contractor BYPASS Drive with 3 contactor BYPASS Drive with 3 contactor BYPASS, w/ Fused disconnect and Auto-bypass
Example: HVDSB3C0400G130 480 VAC, 40 Hp, Smart VFD NEMA 1 with graphic keypad display, 3 contractor bypass
12
MOTOR CONTROLS
32006630-001 HVFDCABLE
ACCESSORIES PAGE LON communication card Commissioning cable and USB adaptor
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
709
MOTOR CONTROLS
AC = alternating current ANSI = American National Standards Institute ASD = adjustable speed drive BHP = brake horsepower CFM = cubic feet per minute CSA = Canadian Standards Association CSI = current source inverter DC = direct current DSP = digital signal processor ECC = eddy current coupling FPM = feet per minute GPM = gallon per minute GTO = gate turnoff (thyristor)
MOTOR CONTROL ACRONYMS, CALCULATIONS & CONVERSION FORMULAS
NEW!
IGBT = insulated gate bi-thermal thyristor LCI = load-commutated inverter NPV = net present value PAM = pulse amplitude modulation PLC = programmable logic controller PWM = pulse width modulated (inverter) SCR = silicon-controlled rectier SR = switched reluctance THD = total harmonic distortion V = voltage VSI = variable source inverter VVI = variable voltage inverter CONVERSION FORMULAS/FACTORS
Length
IEEE = Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
NEMA = National Electrical Manufacturers Association
12
HDF = harmonic distortion factor
MOTOR CONTROLS
Calculating the Horsepower Requirement of a Load

The mechanical load required by the driven equipment is known as the Brake Horsepower (BHP). The BHP value can be calculated by the following: BHP = T x N (required HP) 5,250 Where: HP = horsepower supplied by the motor T = Torque (lb-ft) force x radius N = base speed of motor (rpm) Once the machine BHP (speed times torque) requirement is determined, horsepower (HP) can be calculated: Rated motor HP = Motor Efciency (%) / 100 = available HP If the calculated horsepower falls between standard available motor ratings, select the higher available horsepower rating. It is good practice to allow some margin when selecting the motor horsepower.
Multiply By To Obtain Meters 3.281 Feet Meters 39.37 Inches Inches 0.025 Meters Feet 0.305 Meters Torque Newton-Meters 0.738 lb-ft lb-ft 1.356 Newton-Meters lb-in 0.083 lb-ft lb-ft 12.00 lb-in Rotation RPM 6.00 Degrees per second RPM 0.105 Radius per second Degrees per second 0.167 RPM Radius per second 9.549 RPM Power Watts 0.001 HP lb-ft per minute 0.000 HP HP 746 Watts HP 30300 lb-ft/min Temperature Degrees C = (Degrees F-32) x 5/9 Degrees F = (Degrees C x 9/5) + 32
710
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MOTOR CONTROLS
GLOSSARY OF COMMON TERMS
Alternating Current: The ow of electricity which changes direction on a regular continuous cycle reaching a maximum in one direction, decreasing to zero, then reversing to reach a maximum in the opposite direction. Air Gap: The space between the rotating and stationary part of an electric motor. Magnetic energy is transferred across this gap. Ambient: The air which surrounds a motor for air cooled machines. Ampere: A unit of current which is a measure of the rate of electron ow. It is often abbreviated as Amp. The unit of current ow is the amp. Breakdown Torque: The maximum torque that a motor can develop at rated voltage without stalling or an abrupt drop in speed. Brush: A current carrying material which is in contact with an armature or slip ring assembly to provide an electrical connection between rotating and stationary components of a motor. Capacitor: A device which can store electrical charge. In an AC circuit, a capacitor causes the voltage to lead the current. The unit of capacitance is the Farad. Commutator: An assembly which is mounted on the shaft of a DC motor to provide the switching functions between the armature coils and the power supply. Conductor: Any material which offers little resistance to the ow of electricity such as copper. Duty Cycle: The relationship between the operating time and the resting time of an electric motor. Eddy Current: Localized currents in electrical steels that are caused by alternating magnetic ux resulting in losses and heating. Efciency: The ratio of mechanical output to the electrical input power of a motor. Electromotive Force (emf): A synonym for voltage usually used to describe induced or generated voltages in an electric circuit. Field: The term used to describe the stationary part of a DC machine. The eld provides the magnetic ux which interacts with the armature. Flux: The magnetic eld which is established around a current carrying conductor or a permanent magnet. Frequency: The rate at which alternating current reverses its direction of ow. The unit of frequency is either Hertz or cycles per second. Full Load Current: The current that a motor draws at rated voltage, frequency and load. Full Load Slip: The difference between the synchronous speed of a motor and full load speed. It is often expressed as a ratio of the synchronous speed to full load speed in percent. Full Load Speed: The speed of the motor at rated voltage, frequency and load. Full Load Torque: The torque that is necessary to produce rated horsepower at full load speed. Horsepower: A measurement of power used to rate electric motors. The unit of power rating in motors is either horsepower or kilowatts. One horsepower is equal to 746 watts.
12
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
711
MOTOR CONTROLS
MOTOR CONTROLS
GLOSSARY OF COMMON TERMS
Impedance: The total opposition a circuit offers to the ow of alternating current. It is the vector sum of resistance and reactance. Inductance: The property of an electrical circuit which opposes a change in current due to the magnetic eld induced by that current. Inertia: Inertia is the resistance an object has to a change in its state of motion. It is determined by the weight of the object multiplied by the square of the radius of gyration (k). Rotating parts do not operate at the same speed, therefore calculating the inertia for each moving part allows rotating parts to be considered as a single unit working together. Line Voltage: The voltage supplied to the input terminals of an electric device. Magnetomotive Force (mmf): The magnetic energy supplied in the establishment of magnetic ux. It is analogous to the electromotive force in an electric circuit. Phase: A term used to describe the spatial relationship of windings in an electric motor or voltages and currents in an electric circuit. Power Factor: A measurement of the difference in phase between voltage and current in an electric circuit. Most electrical devices cause the current to lag the voltage because of inductance. The voltage leads the current in capacitive circuits. Reactance (inductive): The property of a magnetic circuit which causes the voltage to lag the current.
NEW!
12
Resistance: The property of an electrical conductor which impedes the ow of electricity. The unit of resistance is the ohm. Rotor: The rotating member of an electric motor. Service Factor: The service factor of an AC motor is a multiplier which when applied to the rated horsepower indicates the permissible loading which may be carried under the conditions specied for the service factor. Slip: The ratio between the synchronous speed and the operating speed of an induction motor, often expressed as a percent. Stator: The stationary part of an AC motor housing the steel laminations and the windings. Temperature Rise: The difference between the temperature of the windings of an operating motor and the ambient temperature. Torque: The turning force applied to a shaft, usually expressed as pound-feet (English) or Newton-meters (metric). Voltage: The standard unit of electromotive force which produces a ow of current in a conductor. The unit of electromotive force is the volt. Watt: A measurement of power in an electrical circuit which is equal to one joule of energy being expended in one second.
MOTOR CONTROLS
712
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NETWORK & WIRELESS
HUMIDITY
Kele Has Doubled the Offering of Network and Wireless Solutions, and Continues to Add to Our Options to Meet Your Needs.
Babel Buster | p. 719 Series
NETWORK & WIRELESS
L-VIS Series | p. 721
BASRT-B | p. 727
110A | p. 733
ValuPoint VP4-23 | p. 744 Series
EKI Series | p. 738
NETWORK & WIRELESS

MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Network Display and Control Panels
L-VIS Series BACnet and LON Touch Panel. . 721 BBC-SD BACnet Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . 724 WebOP Series Touchscreen Operator Display Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
Wireless EnOcean and ZigBee Devices and Systems (cont.)

E3T-SxE Series EnOcean Wireless European Light Switches .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826 E3T-S2H Series EnOcean Wireless Handheld Remote. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 EasySens Thanos EnOcean Room Operating Panel .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 EasySens Receiver Gateways EnOcean Receiver Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 EasySens SRC Receiver Controllers EnOcean Receiver Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832 EasySens Repeater EnOcean Wireless Repeater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833 EasySens Switches EnOcean Lighting, Blinds and Shutters Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834 EasySens Specialty Wireless Transmitters EnOcean Remote Control, Key Card Switch, Window/Door Contact.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835 EasySens Room Sensors EnOcean Temperature, Humidity and CO2 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 EasySens Temperature Sensors EnOcean Surface, Duct, Remote and Outdoor Temperature Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837 EasySens Input Modules EnOcean Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Network Gateways
ETH-1000 Provides connectivity between Ethernet and RS-485 based networks . . . . . . . . . . . . 713 XLTR-1000 Provides Connectivity Between Two Rs-485 Based Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714 Raptor Protocol Converter RLE Technologies Protocol Coverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715 LGATE-9xx Series Lonworks/Bacnet And Universal Gateways. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 Babel Buster Series BACnet - Modbus - SNMP Gateways. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719 AddMe Series BACnet - Modbus Network I/O. 743
Network I/O Modules

L-IOB Series BACnet and LON I/O Module. . . 739 i.CanDoIt Series Embedded Network Servers. 742 AddMe Series BACnet - Modbus Network I/O. 743 ValuPoint VP4-23 Series BACnet MS/TP Programmable I/O .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 BAS-3000BC Series BACnet Remote I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
WebOP Series | p. 725
Wireless Long Range Transceivers

AIC900E Wireless Ethernet transceiver. . . . . . . 759 WBT900, WBT900-IP Wireless BACnet MSTP And BACnet Ip Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 WLT900 Wireless LonWorks Transceiver. . . . . 763
Network Monitoring and Control Devices and Zone Systems

FGD Web Series Remote Web-Based Monitoring System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748 DL-125C Auto Dialer .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750 KTEC Zoning System Kele Constant Volume Zoning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752 FlexStat Flexible BACnet Thermostat . . . . . . . 756
Wireless Sensing and Control Devices and Systems

Viconics Wireless Wireless Thermostat System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766 RF-RXS Wireless Network Receiver SonNet Wireless Network Receiver .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 770 RF-RX Series SonNet Wireless Receivers .. . . 770 RF-RR Series SonNet Wireless RouterSensors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 RF-RS Series SonNet Wireless Temperature, Humidity and CO2 Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773 MOD9200 Frontier 2.0 Gateway transceivers. . 774 RM2402D and RM2432D Frontier 2.0 Wireless Analog And Digital Receivers. . . . . . . . . . . . 776 RR2552 Frontier 2.0 Spread Spectrum Repeater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 RT2602, RT2620 Frontier 2.0 Wireless Digital Input Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 RT2630 Series Frontier 2.0 Wireless Universal input transmitter module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782 SST2630 Frontier 2.0 Wireless Remote Temperature System .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784 DT2630 Frontier 2.0 Wireless Duct Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786 WH2630 Frontier 2.0 Wireless Humidity And Temperature Wall Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 WT2630 Frontier 2.0 Wireless Temperature Wall Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 Wi-MGR Wireless Sensor Gateway . . . . . . . . . 792 BA/RCV-EZ and BA/RPT-EZ BAPI Wireless Receiver and Repeater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794 BA/WAI Series, BA/WDI, BA/WTS BAPI Wireless Universal Transmitters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796 BA/WT(H)-D BAPI Wireless Duct Temperature & Humidity Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 BA/WT-I BAPI Wireless Immersion Temperature Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 BA/WT-RPP BAPI Wireless Remote Probe Temperature Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802 BA/BS2-WT(H) BAPI Wireless Room Temperature & Humidity Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 BA/WT-O, BA/WTH-O BAPI Wireless OSA Temperature & Humidity Transmitters. . . . . . 806 BA/COM, BA/ROM, BA/RYOM, BA/RYOL, BA/SOM, BA/VOM BAPI Wireless System Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 EE240 Series E+E Wireless Humidity/Temperature/ CO2 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 58-G1 and 58-N-1101 Series Ideal Wireless Sensor System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Network Routers, Repeaters, Switches and Terminators

BASRT-B BACnet Multi-Network Router. . . . . L-IP Series BACnet/IP and LON/IP Router . . . L-Switch Series LON Switch Router. . . . . . . . 110A FTT-10 LonWorks Repeater . . . . . . . . . . L-Term Series BACnet, LON, Modbus Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852 Ethernet Switch Industrial Ethernet Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EIBA Switches BAS Ethernet Switches . . . . . EKI Series Unmanaged Ethernet Switches. . . 727 728 731 733 734 736 737 738
L-IP Series | p. 728
Wireless EnOcean and ZigBee Devices and Systems

SmartStruxure Lite MPM-GW Series EnOcean and Zigbee Wireless Manager and Gateway.813 SmartStruxure Lite MPM-UN Series Multipurpose Manager and Gateway. . . . . . . . . . 814 SmartStruxure Lite MPM-VA Series Multipurpose VAV Manager and Gateway. . . . . . 815 SmartStruxure Lite SEC Series Zigbee Wireless I/O Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816 E3X-MRCFP Series EnOcean Wireless Room Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 E3X-DxxFP Series EnOcean Wireless Dimmer/ Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819 E3X-Rxx-3HOTP Series 3 Wire EnOcean Wireless Relay Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820 E3X-Rxx-5IBTP Series 5 Wire EnOcean Wireless Relay Receiver and Repeater. . . . 821 E3R-R04FP Series EnOcean Wireless Low Voltage Relay Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822 E3X-x12GP Series EnOcean Wireless Plug-in Relay Receiver and Dimmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . 818 E3X-Rxx-REPTP Series EnOcean Wireless Repeater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824 E3T-Rxx-2INTP Series EnOcean Wireless Switch Leg Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823 E3T-SLICP EnOcean Wireless Light Sensor. . 826 E3T-MDCCP EnOcean Wireless Window/Door Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829 E3X-Txx Series EnOcean Wireless Thermostat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825 E3T-C2AWH EnOcean Wireless Key Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 E3T-SxA Series EnOcean Wireless Switches. 828
MPM-GW | p. 813 Series
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION ETHERNET PROTOCOLS SUPPORT:
NETWORK & WIRELESS
PROVIDES CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN ETHERNET AND RS-485 BASED NETWORKS ETH-1000
The ETH-1000 Ethernet Gateway allows information to be transferred seamlessly between Ethernet and RS-485 networks with minimal conguration requirements. The ETH-1000 provides a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port and an RS-485 port.
Allen Bradley CSP (also known as "PCCC" and "AB Ethernet") (client and server) BACnet/IP (client and server) EtherNet/IP (client and server) Mitsubishi MELSEC (also known as "MC") (client) Modbus/TCP (client and server) Pronet IO
ETH-1000
RS-485 PROTOCOLS SUPPORT:
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Communication 7 - 24 VDC 70 mA @ 24VDC Ethernet Communications IEEE 802.3 10/100 Mbps data rate 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX physical layer 100 m (max) CAT5 cable length MS/TP Communications ANSI/ASHRAE 135 (ISO 16484-5) 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800, 115.2k baud rate EIA-485 physical layer 1200 m (max) cable length LED Indication Module Status Off = No power Green = Power normal function Flashing Green = Gateway is connected via USB Flashing Red = Fatal error Network Status Off = No IP address Green = Has IP and connection Flashing Green = Has IP no Connection Red = Critical Fail / Duplicate IP Flashing Red = Connection time out Alternating Red/Green = Start up RS485 Green (TX) = Transmitting data Red (RX) = Receiving data Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Operating Humidity 20 to 90% non-condensing Dimensions 4" x 3" x 1.5" (10.16 x 7.62 x 3.81 cm) Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
Modbus RTU (master, slave, and sniffer) BACnet MS/TP (client and server) Toshiba ASD (master) Johnson Controls, Inc. Metasys N2 (slave) Sullair Supervisor (master)
WIRING
4.0
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
3.0
1.5
MODEL ETH-1000 XLTR-1000 DESCRIPTION Provides protocol translation between Ethernet and RS-485 based networks RELATED PRODUCTS Provides protocol translation between RS485 based networks PAGE 714
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
713
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION The XLTR-1000 provides simultaneous support for many different communication protocols, allowing complex interchanges of data between otherwise incompatible networks. When properly congured, the gateway will become essentially "transparent" on the networks, and the various network devices can engage in seamless dialogs with each other.
PROVIDES CONNECTIVITY BETWEEN TWO RS-485 BASED NETWORKS. XLTR-1000
NEW!
XLTR-1000 RS-485 PROTOCOLS SUPPORT: BACnet MS/TP (client and server) Johnson Controls, Inc. Metasys N2 (master and slave) Modbus RTU (master, slave, and sniffer) MSA Chillgard (monitor) Siemens FLN (slave) Sullair Supervisor (master) TCS Basys (master) Toshiba ASD (master)
FEATURES
USB connectivity Can be powered via USB 32 bit processor Baud rates up to 115.2K Mounting options: Desktop, DIN-Rail, Panel/Wall
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Communication 7 - 24 VDC 15 mA @ 24VDC MS/TP ANSI/ASHRAE 135, (ISO 16484-5) 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800, 115.2k baud rate EIA-485 physical layer 1200 m (max) cable length LED Indication Module Status Off = No power Green = Power normal function Flashing Green = Gateway is connected via USB Flashing Red = Fatal error RS485 Green (TX) = Transmitting data
DIMENSIONS
4.0
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
3.0
Red (RX) = Receiving data Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Operating Humidity 20 to 90% non-condensing 4" x 3" x 1.5" Dimensions (10.16 x 7.62 x 3.81 cm) Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
1.5
MODEL XLTR-1000 DESCRIPTION Provides protocol translation between RS485 based networks
ETH-1000
RELATED PRODUCTS Provides protocol translation between Ethernet and RS-485 based networks
PAGE 713
714
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

NETWORK & WIRELESS

RLE TECHNOLOGIES PROTOCOL COVERTER RAPTOR PROTOCOL CONVERTER
The Raptor Protocol Converter connects directly to equipment and converts the SNMP , BACnet, and Modbus protocols to one or more of these same protocols for integration into a building management system (BMS) or network management system (NMS). The Protocol Converter is ideal for situations where data from monitored equipment is incompatible with the protocols used by the BMS or NMS, such as in cases where legacy monitoring systems are present. The ability of the Protocol Converter to accept up to 1,024 inputs over 32 modules means exible integration with multiple alarm and management systems with the use of one simple device. In addition, the Dual Port Protocol Converter provides a costeffective means to connect to multiple trunk lines with two additional Modbus EIA-485 ports.
FDS-PC
FDS-PC-DP
Multiple input and output protocols Monitor up to 1,024 Modbus registers, OIDs, or instances Connect up to 32 units/modules/nodes Connect to multiple trunk lines with Dual Port Protocol Converter Alarm notication through email, SNMP Web conguration
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC @ 600mA max, 50/60 Hz EIA-485 Status 2 Green Transmit and Receive LEDs (additional LEDs for Dual Port Protocol Converter)
Communication Ports Ethernet 10/100BaseT, RJ45 connector; 500VAC RMS isolation EIA-232 DB9 female connector; 9600 baud; No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit EIA-485 1200, 2400, 9600 or 19200 baud (selectable); Parity: none, even or odd, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit Protocol TCP/IP; HTML, TFTP SNMP V1: V2C MIB-2 compliant; NMS Manageable with Get Modbus (EIA-485) Modbus Master/Slave; RTU mode; Supports Master codes 01, 02, 03, 04; Slave code 03 Modbus TCP/IP Modbus Master/Slave; TCP/IP transmission protocol BACNet/IP ASHRAE STD 135-2004 Annex J; Port 3 on Dual Port Protocol Converter is BACnet MS/TP capable (Slave only) SMTP (email) Supports Client Authentication (plain and login); compatible with ESMTP Servers Terminal Emulation (EIA-232) VT100 compatible (for conguration and diagnostics only) Indicator Network 1 Green/Red LED: Link/No Link; 1 Green Active (additional LEDs for Dual Port Protocol Converter) March 2014
Security Login Web Browser Access (Ethernet) 1 Web password Read Only; 1 Web password Read/Write Terminal Emulation Access None Protocols In SNMP, Modbus EIA-485, Modbus TCP/IP, BACnet/IP Protocols Out SNMP, Modbus EIA-485, Modbus TCP/IP, BACnet/IP; BACnet MS/ TP (Port 3 of Dual Port Protocol Converter only) Maximum Number of units/modules/nodes 32 Maximum Number of registers/OIDSs/instances 1024 Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Storage Temperature -4to 185F (-20 to 85C) Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing Mounting Desktop or rack mount (brackets included) Dimensions 9.8"W x 5.3"D x 1.8"H (248 x 135 x 46 mm) Weight 2.32 lb. (1.05kg) Approvals CE; ETL listed: conforms to UL 61010-1, EN 61010-1; certied to CSA C22.2 NO. 61010-1; RoHS compliant
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
715
NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS

RLE TECHNOLOGIES PROTOCOL COVERTER RAPTOR PROTOCOL CONVERTER
WIRING
EIA-232 COM Connection
Connect the straight through, 9-pin, serial cable:
NEW!
Power Supply and Ground Connections RJ45 Ethernet Connection
Terminal Block Designation Description
Modbus EIA-485 Connections
13
Terminal Block Designation Item No. 1 Item
Power 24 VDC/VAC Jack Status EIA-232 Port RX TX EIA-485 LED
Power Terminal Block Power connector for wall wart adapter Status LED DB9 Female connector Receive/Transmit status LED. Dual Port Protocol Converter contains two additional sets of LEDs. Dual Port Protocol Converter contains two additional sets of switches; EIA-485 Port 2, the 5-pin port, can be congured as a 2-wire (half-duplex) or 4-wire (full-duplex) connection.Ports 1 and 3: Switch 1 - unused; Switch 2 - On = 100 Ohm terminationPort 2: Switch 1 -Duplex (On = 4-wire; Off = 2-wire); Switch 2 - On = 100 Ohm termination Dual Port Protocol Converter contains two additional EIA-485 ports. Port2 (the middle port) can be congured as a 2-wire or 4-wire connection. In addition to all other supported protocols, Port 3 (the left most port) of the Dual Port Protocol Converter is BACnet MS/TP capable (Slave only). 10/100 BaseT connector
NETWORK & WIRELESS
2 3 4 5 6
EIA-485 Termination Switch
7 8
EIA-485 Port RJ45 Ethernet Port
MODEL FDS-PC FDS-PC-DP DESCRIPTION Protocol converter for BMS and NMS integration, Single port Protocol converter for BMS and NMS integration, Dual port
716
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
NETWORK & WIRELESS
LONWORKS/BACNET AND UNIVERSAL GATEWAYS LGATE-9XX SERIES
LGATE-900 is a CEA-709/BACnet gateway which allows seamless integration of systems using both communication standards by mapping CEA-709 network variables (NVs) to standard BACnet server objects. LGATE-900 is fully compliant with the standards CEA-709, CEA-852, and EN 14908 (LonMark system) as well as ASHRAE 135-2008 and ISO 16484-5. Analog, binary, and multistate BACnet objects (input/output) are mapped to NVs based on the CEN/TS 15231:2005 standard. BACnet properties are automatically congured with default values from the SNVT self-description. Scalar NVs are mapped to one BACnet object each. Structured NVs are mapped to several BACnet object, one for each member (members can be selected individually). Each LGATE-900 can handle up to 750 BACnet Objects. Several devices can be installed in a network at the same time.
LGATE 900
LGATE 95x
LGATE-95x allows a smooth integration between LonMark Systems, BACnet networks, KNX networks, Modbus devices, M-Bus devices as well as ZigBee PRO wireless devices. Network variables are mapped to binary, analog, or multistate objects (input, output, value) according to the CEN/ TS 15231:2005 standard. Data points can be manually or automatically generated across multiple protocols. In addition to analog, binary and multistate objects LGATE-95x supports alarming, scheduling and trending. They can be either connected through their Ethernet/IP ports to LonMark IP-852, BACnet/IP, KNXnet/IP and Modbus TCP simultaneously or to TP/FT-10, BACnet MS/TP channels, Modbus RTU and KNX TP1 respectively.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage LGATE-900 LGATE-95x Supply Watts LGATE-900 LGATE-95x Communication LGATE-900 LGATE-95x Channels LGATE-900 LGATE-95x 12 to 24 VAC / 50-60 Hz, 12-35 VDC 24 VAC / 50-60 Hz, 24 VDC 3 Watts 2.5 Watts Type CEA-709, BACnet, OPC XMLDA Type CEA-709, BACnet, Modbus, OPC XML-DA, KNX, M-Bus 1x Ethernet (100Base-T) Lonmark IP-852, BACnet/IP, HTTP, FTP, 1x TP/FT-10, 1x BACnet MS/TP 2x Ethernet (100Base-T), Lonmark IP-852, BACnet/IP, HTTP, FTP, KNXnet/IP, Modbus TCP (Master or Slave); 1x TP/FT-10 (Lonmark System); 1x BACnet MS/TP; 1x Modbus RTU (Master or Slave); 1x EXT (alternatively for M-Bus Master EN13757-3 with L-MBUS20/80, KNX TP1 with LKNX-300)
13
Fully compliant with ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2008 and ISO 16484-5 (BACnet) Fully compliant with CEA-709, CEA-852 and EN 14908 (LON) Built-in Web server for device conguration Support alarming, scheduling and trending Network diagnostic LEDs (LGATE-900) 128x64 display with backlight (LGATE-95x) Local and remote access to information about device status and data points (LGATE-95x) DIN rail mountable
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Dimensions LGATE-900
4.21"W x 3.94"H x 2.36"D (10.7 x 10.0 x 6.0 cm) LGATE-95x 6.26"W x 3.94"H x 2.95"D (15.9 x 10.0 x 7.5 cm) Operating Temperature 32 to 112F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0-90% RH non-condensing Weight LGATE-900 0.55 lbs (0.25 kg) 0.77 lbs (0.35 kg) LGATE-95x Approvals CE, FCC Warranty 2 years March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
717
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BACNET AND UNIVERSAL GATEWAYS LGATE-9XX SERIES
WIRING
LGATE 900
C B A D E F
BACnet/IP Ethernet 40 POWER
NEW!
LGATE 95x
USB-B microSD DISPLAY DIAL RESET POWER 1 2 3 USB1 USB2 Ethernet1 Ethernet2 RS-485 FT EXT1 EXT2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 131415 GND
ACT ACT RESET
LINK ACT BACnet/IP
G STATUS H
Serial Terminal
RS-485 FT Ethernet 1 2 3 4 5 6 8
POWER 15 16 17
Termination (L-Term) MS/TP CEA-709 Port
12-24 VAC Connectors MS/TP 1 2 3 CEA-709 4 5 6 Ethernet 8 POWER 15 16 17 Input GND Input + (B) non-inverting input Input - (A) inverting input Input EARTH GND Input B Input A 10/100Base-T (RJ45) Power supply input EARTH GND Power supply input MINUS Power supply input PLUS Do NOT connect to EARTH GND SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male) Buttons RESET STATUS Reset Send I AM message Status LEDs A Green flashing fast B Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast C Green Yellow Red Flashing at 1 Hz OFF D Green E Green flashing F Green G Green H OFF Traffic on MS/TP port Traffic on CEA-709 port Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port IP port is fully functional IP port functional but config. is not up-to-date IP port is non-functional IP port is not commissioned IP port is not active Ethernet link Ethernet traffic BACnet IP enabled Power Normal operation
- + 24-35 VDC
B A 2 x 10/100Base-T + - B A B A (RJ45) 24 VAC 2 x USB-A M-Bus, KNX TP1, Modbus RTU, BACnet MS/TP TP/FT-10 ZigBee PRO Connectors USB1 USB2 USB-B Ethernet1 Ethernet2 microSD USB-A USB-A USB-B RJ45 RJ45 slot USB Host USB Host PC 10/100Base-T 10/100Base-T microSD card max. 2 GB
Connectors POWER 1 Power supply input EARTH GND 2 Power supply input MINUS Can be connected to EARTH GND 3 Power supply input PLUS Do NOT connect to EARTH GND Modbus 4 Input GND BACnet 5 Input + MS/TP 6 Input TP/FT-10 7 Input EARTH GND 8 Input B 9 Input A EXT1 10 Input GND M-Bus, 11 Input B KNX TP1 12 Input A ZigBee EXT2 13 Input GND M-Bus 14 Input B KNX TP1 15 Input A ZigBee
13
Buttons RESET DIAL Reset Turn-and-Push Dial Weidmller BLZP 5.08/03/180 0.2 - 2.5 mm2 7
NETWORK & WIRELESS
NOTE: If terminal 1 is not connected make a short between terminal 15 and 16, and connect to EARTH GND.
MODEL LGATE-900 LGATE-950 LGATE-951 DESCRIPTION Lonworks to BACNET LGATE Gateway Universal LGATE Gateway with one ext. port Universal LGATE Gateway with two ext. ports
718
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
GND
GND
10/100Base-T (RJ45)
- + 12-35 VDC
March 2014
NEW!
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BACNET - MODBUS - SNMP GATEWAYS BABEL BUSTER SERIES
Control Solutions' Babel Buster Series gateways are to put devices having a common building automation protocol on a network having a different protocol than the device was made for. They provide support for building automation with BACnet and Modbus. Support for data centers and IT infrastructure with SNMP. The gateways are easy to use and cost effective for building automation applications.
Easy to use and cost effective Models support all major building automation protocols SNMP to Modbus and Modbus to SNMP translation Modbus to BACnet and BACnet to Modbus translation
BB2-3010
BB2-6010
Supply Voltage 10-30 VDC or 12-24 VAC, 50/60 Hz Supply Current BB2-3010/6010/7010 0.1 A @ 24 VDC BB2-7030 0.15 A @ 24 VDC Communication Ports BB2-3010 2 RS-485 ports BB2-6010/7010/7030 1 RS-485 and 1 RJ-45 port Baud Rate MS/TP baud rates: 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800; Modbus RTU baud rates: 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 Signal LEDS BB2-3010/7030 4; device data/status, BUS data/status BB2-6010/7010 2; device data/status Operating Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
Operating Humidity Mounting Dimensions
Weight Approvals BB2-3010 FCC, CE, UL916 Listed, BTL Listed BB2-6010/7010/7030 FCC Class A, CE 1 year Warranty
5-95% RH non-condensing DIN rail 3.94"H x 2.76"W x 2.36"D (100 x 70 x 60 mm) 2 lbs (0.91 kg)
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
BABEL BUSTER GATEWAYS SUPPORTED PROTOCOLS
Gateways
BACnet MS/TP Web Server Server & Client Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
BACnet IP Server & Client
Modbus RTU Master & Slave Yes Yes Yes Yes
Modbus TPC Server & Client Yes Yes Yes Yes
SNMP Server & Client
HTTP Client
BB2-3010 BB2-6010 BB2-7010-01 BB2-7010-02 BB2-7030-01 BB2-7030-02 BB2-7030-03

March 2014
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
719
NETWORK & WIRELESS

WIRING
BACNET - LONWORKS - MODBUS - SNMP - WIRELESS GATEWAYS BABEL BUSTER SERIES
BB2-3010
Ethernet activity LED
NEW!
BB2-6010/7010/7030
Power LED Ground, Power Common Power, +12 to +24VDC or 24VAC
Communications LEDs
Ethernet Link LED
Modbus RTU RS-485 (EIA-485), or MS/TP Network
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL BB2-3010 BB2-6010 BB2-7010-01 BB2-7010-02 BB2-7030-01 BB2-7030-02 BB2-7030-03
DESCRIPTION Modbus RTU to BACnet MS/TP Modbus to SNMP and Modbus to Modbus Modbus to BACnet IP Modbus to BACnet IP to SNMP BACnet Gateway and Router with Modbus TCP BACnet Gateway and Router with SNMP BACnet Gateway and Router with HTTP Client
0SUP12INT 0SUP24VP MTX002
ACCESSORIES 12VDC International power supply 24VDC Power Supply USB to MS/TP Port Adapter
720
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BACNET AND LON TOUCH PANEL L-VIS SERIES
L-VIS Series Touch Panel is an extremely exible graphical user interface with an unprecedented range of functions. Any data point can be displayed on or controlled by the highresolution touch display, surrounded by an an anodized frame. Three different models support BACnet MS/TP or BACnet/ IP and three different models support LonMark TP/FT-10 or IP-852 Ethernet (CEA-852) are available. Touch display sizes are available in 5.7", 12.1" or 15". The L-VIS Touch Panels are designed for extremely low power consumption. They save energy and can be wall mounted without fear of overheating. All L-VIS Touch Panels are congured using the same conguration tool - the L-VIS Congurator and it is free to download from Loytec.
LVIS-3E100/LVIS-ME200
LVIS-3E115/LVIS-ME215
High resolution TFT touch display with dimmable backlight Anodized aluminum front frame Flush-mounting in combination with the mounting frame External temperature sensor L-TEMP1 (optional, up to 4 sensors) and 2 inputs for external light switches Models support routing connectivity to BACnet MS/TP or BACnet/IP channel Models support connectivity to LonMark TP/FT-10 or IP-852 Ethernet (CEA-852) channel Simple graphical programming with L-VIS conguration software included
LVIS-3E112/LIVS-ME212
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Supply Voltage LVIS-3E100/LVIS-ME200 20 to 35 VDC, 24 VAC 10% LVIS-3E112/LVIS-ME212 24 VDC 10% or 85 to 240 VAC LVIS-3E115/LVIS-ME215 24 VDC 10% or 85 to 240 VAC Supply Watts LVIS-3E100/LVIS-ME200 3 Watts/8 Watts with backlight LVIS-3E112/LVIS-ME212 2.5 Watts/13 Watts with backlight LVIS-3E115/LVIS-ME215 2.5 Watts/16 Watts with backlight Channels LVIS-3E100 1x Ethernet (100Base-T) LonMark IP-852, 1x TP/FT-10 LVIS-3E112/LVIS-3E115 2x Ethernet (100Base-T) LonMark IP-852, 1x TP/FT-10 LVIS-ME200 1x Ethernet (100Base-T)BACnet/IP, 1x BACnet MS/TP LVIS-ME212/LVIS-ME215 2x Ethernet (100Base-T)BACnet/IP, 1x BACnet MS/TP Communication LVIS-3Exxx CEA-709 (LON) LVIS-MExxx BACnet Display Type TFT Touch Display Display LVIS-3E100/LVIS-ME200 5.7" (14.48 cm) LVIS-3E112/LVIS-ME212 12.1" (30.73 cm) LVIS-3E115/LVIS-ME215 15" (38.1 cm)
Dimensions LVIS-3E100/LVIS-ME200 8.27"W x 6.46"H x 2.48"D (21.0 x 16.4 x 6.3 cm) LVIS-3E112/LVIS-ME212 12.93"W x 10.56"H x 2.56"D (32.9 x 26.83 x 6.5 cm) LVIS-3E115/LVIS-ME215 15.51"W x 12.52"H x 2.56"D (39.4 x 31.8 x 6.5 cm) LVIS-FRAME1 6.93"W x 5.83"H x 2.24"D (17.6 x 14.8 x 5.7 cm) LVIS-FRAME12 11.77"W x 9.80"H x 2.40"D (35.3 x 29.37 x 6.1 cm) LVIS-FRAME15 13.89"W x 11.56"H x 2.40"D (35.3 x 29.37 x 6.1 cm), Operating Humidity 10-90% RH @ 122F (50C) (non-condensing) Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Weight LVIS-3E100/LVIS-ME200 3.04 lb (1.38 kg) LVIS-3E112/LVIS-ME212 5.51 lb (2.50 kg) LVIS-3E115/LVIS-ME215 7.72 lb (3.50 kg) LVIS-FRAME1 1.08 lb (0.49 kg) LVIS-FRAME12 2.31 lb (1.05 kg) 3.19 lb (1.45 kg) LVIS-FRAME15 Approvals CE, FCC Warranty 2 years
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
721
NETWORK & WIRELESS

INSTALLATION
NEW!
Mounting Frame 12.1: LVIS-FRAME12 15: LVIS-FRAME15 5-7: LVIS-FRAME1
STATUS STAT PWR RESET ONLINE ACT LINK ACT709, MS/TP CNIP, CN/IP Status LEDs ACT709 GREEN flashing fast GREEN flashing at 1 Hz RED permanent RED flashing fast CNIP GREEN YELLOW RED Flashing at 1Hz OFF MS/TP GREEN flashing CN/IP GREEN flashing LINK GREEN ACT GREEN flashing ONLINE GREEN PWR GREEN STAT OFF Traffic on CEA-709 port CEA-709 port not commissioned CEA-709 port is damaged Traffic overload on CEA-709 port IP port is fully functional IP port functional but config. is not up-to-date IP port is non-functional IP port not commissioned IP port not active Traffic on BACnet MS/TP port Traffic on BACnet IP port Ethernet link Ethernet traffic Node is in configured online state Power Normal operation
L-VIS Touch Panel
WIRING L-VIS 5.7" PANEL

MS/TP or CEA-709 (LON)
13
L-TEMP External temperature sensor
- + 20-35 VDC
24 VAC +/-10%
Ethernet
JP1 JP2
NETWORK & WIRELESS
2 3
4 5 6
8 9 10
11 12 13
TEMP
7
SWITCH
POWER EARTH
100Base-T RS-485 or FT/LPT (LON)
Connectors 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Temperatur sensor data Temperatur sensor GND Temperatur sensor +3V MS/TP input GND/CEA-709 input EARTH GND MS/TP +/CEA-709 input B MS/TP -/CEA-709 input A Ethernet 10/100 Base-T (RJ45) Digital input GND Digital input 1 Digital input 0 Power supply input earth ground Power supply input MINUS Power supply input PLUS Do not connect PLUS to GND
Jumpers JP1 JP2 Normal operation Clear configuration MS/TP channel active/FT-10/ LPT-10 channel active BIP channel active/CEA-852 (IP-10) channel active Weidmller BLZP 5.08/03/180
LVIS-ME Buttons RESET Reset STATUS Send I AM message LVIS-3E100 Buttons
0,2 - 2,5 mm2
RESET Reset STATUS Send service pin message
722
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
MS/TP or FT/LPT(LON)
NETWORK & WIRELESS

L-VIS 12.1" AND 15" PANEL
Ethernet2 Ethernet1
MICROSD
MS/TP or RS-485 FT CNIP
ONLINE ACT LINK
STATUS PC USB RESET STAT POWER
GND TEMP +3 V DIGIN1 GND DIGIN0
Status LEDs (LON) FT GREEN flashing fast GREEN flashing at 1 Hz RED permanent RED flashing fast GREEN YELLOW RED Flashing at 1Hz OFF GREEN GREEN flashing GREEN GREEN OFF Traffic on CEA-709 port CEA-709 port not commissioned CEA-709 port is damaged Traffic overload on CEA-709 port IP port is fully functional IP port functional but config. is not up-to-date IP port is non-functional IP port not commissioned IP port not active Ethernet link Ethernet traffic Node is in configured online state Power Normal operation
DC only!
POWER1 1 2 POWER2 3 4 5
AUDIO OUT USB1 Ethernet1 USB2 Ethernet2
RS-485 Extension 6 7 8 9 10 11
CNIP
Extension cable 61006001 GND
85 - 264 VAC EARTH
-+ 24 VDC
2 x USB Stereo Plug 2 x 10/100Base-T (RJ45)
BA
+ -
PE
EIA-485 BACnet or CEA-709 (LON) L-TERM Termination
LINK ACT ONLINE PWR STAT
Buttons (LON) RESET STATUS Reset Send service pin message
Connectors POWER1 85-264 VAC POWER2 24 VDC 1 2 3 4 5
PROTECTIVE EARTH MUST BE CONNECTED!

Power supply AC input Power supply AC input Power supply DC input earth ground Power supply DC input MINUS Power supply DC input PLUS do not connect PLUS to GND 6 Input earth ground 7 Input +/Input B 8 Input -/Input A 9 Input GND 10 Input + 11 Input 0,2 - 2,5 mm2 7
TRS connector Stereo 3.5 mm Extension cable Nr. 61006001 Modular connector 6p6c (RJ12)
Status LEDs (BACnet) MS/TP CNIP LINK ACT ONLINE PWR STAT GREEN flashing GREEN flashing GREEN GREEN flashing GREEN GREEN OFF Traffic on BACnet MS/TP port Traffic on BACnet IP port Ethernet link Ethernet traffic Node is online Power Normal operation
BACnet/ CEA-709 TP/FT-10 MS/TP (Blank)/ TP/LPT EIA-485
black green red white blue yellow
GND TEMP +3 V DIGIN1 GND DIGIN0
13
Buttons (BACnet) RESET STATUS Reset Send I AM message
Weidmller BLZP 5.08/03/180
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL LVIS-3E100 LVIS-3E112 LVIS-3E115 LVIS-ME200 LVIS-ME212 LVIS-ME215 LVIS-FRAME1 LVIS-FRAME12 LVIS-FRAME15 DESCRIPTION 5.7 inch L-VIS Touch Panel with LON 12.1 inch L-VIS Touch Panel with LON 15 inch L-VIS Touch Panel with LON 5.7 inch L-VIS Touch Panel with BACnet 12.1 inch L-VIS Touch Panel with BACnet 15 inch L-VIS Touch Panel with BACnet Mounting frame for 5.7 inch L-VIS Touch Panel Mounting frame for 12.1 inch L-VIS Touch Panel Mounting frame for 15 inch L-VIS Touch Panel
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
723
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BACNET GRAPHIC DISPLAY BBC-SD
DESCRIPTION The BACnet Building Controller Small Display (BBC-SD) is a compact, addressable network display device for MS/TP based BACnet networks. It enables users to quickly monitor their system, and easily make changes to the way their building is controlled. The wall mounted BBC-SD has a touchscreen operator interface with permission based menu icons, allowing simple navigation to read and write BACnet values, view alarms, grouped data, and point descriptions. The BBCSD is easily congured via the Windows-based BBC-SDPro Conguration Utility. FEATURES Able to automatically display and modify up to 150 BACnet object properties Can manually address, view and modify any primitive data points on the BACnet network 50 congurable data screens containing live BACnet network data and/or hyper links to other data screens allow unique point groupings 12-bit color, 480 x 272 pixel TFT-based touch screen allows local user interface for data display and modication Conforms to BACnet MS/TP LAN Standard Multi-tiered icon-driven screen navigation Multi-level numeric password-based access protection Able to "sniff" network trafc, store and display up to 128 notication or summary alarms Flash program upgradeable through use of standard SD/MMC card port Non-volatile memory stored on the BBC-SD for back-up and cloning over the network Network time synchronization capabilities (requires interaction with a live time master) Advanced MS/TP diagnostics utilities Up to 16 linked BACnet schedules and calendars AUTOPHOS compatible
NEW!
BBC-SD
WIRING
BBC-SD back, terminal view
Term J0 - earth ground connection Term J2 - 24VAC/DC power connection Term SW1 network termination and bias
2 O1 N
EARTH
X2
X1
J2
Term J3 - BACnet MS/TP network connection Use 18-22 AWG - shielded, twisted-pair cable.
N+ N-
J3
TERM
SW1
BIAS
13
DIMENSIONS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS
14 to 29 VAC/DC, 50/60 Hz 4 Watts Type BACnet MS/TP Master Speed 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 76.8 kbps, 57.6k, 115.2k SD/MMC Card Socket: Supports 2GB storage capacity Supported Protocols BACnet MS/TP Memory 1 MB SRAM; 8MB Intel on board Flash Processor High-speed 32-bit processor running at 86 MHz Touch screen Backlit 16:9 Display Type widescreen TFT color LCD, 480 x 272 pixels Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0 to 80% (non-condensing) Dimensions 6.0" x 3.4" x 1.0" (15.24 x 8.64 x 2.54 cm) Weight 0.90 lb (0.41 kg) UL File E95642, E120096, CE Approvals Warranty 1 year (120 days on software) Supply Voltage Supply Watts Communication
3.2" 2.3"
1.1"
0.9" 1.3" 2.5" 0.9"
3.2" 2.3" 5.3" 5.8"
MODEL BBC-SD BBC-SD-PRO DESCRIPTION BACnet Graphic Display ACCESSORIES Conguration Software (required)
724
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Supply Watts Protocol
NETWORK & WIRELESS

TOUCHSCREEN OPERATOR DISPLAY PANEL WEBOP SERIES
The WebOP Series of touchscreen operator panels are designed to satisfy the stringent standards required in the automation market for both commercial and industrial applications. This series of operator panels are designed with ARM-based RISC platform. It provides Real-Time OS which bundles WebOP Designer software and lets the Operator Panel become a control HMI for exible system integration. WebOP Designer 2.0 is a free software development tool which runs on a standard PC and helps create application screens. This series of operator panels also support a variety of LCD sizes from 4.3" to 10.1" and are suitable for any HMI applications, and will interface to different DDCs, motion/thermal controllers, inverters and sensors. It has variety of communication interface connections make it very exible for many applications. It supports BACnet MSTP, BACnet IP, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP, Rockwell and Siemens PLCs and many others.
Panel fixing
Fixing Screw
WOP-2100T
WOP-2000T Series
COM 1 DB-9 Female
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 Description RS-422 TXD+ / RS-485+ RS-232 RXD RS-232 TXD RS-422 RXD+ GND
WIRING
9
COM 2 (5 Pins)
RS-422
Various touchscreen LCD sizes (4.3" to 12") Supports BACnet MS/TP, BACnet IP, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP/IP, and other PLC protocols Supports ARM9-based CPUs with 200MHz and 128MB ash memory Supports RTC, battery backup RAM, and Ethernet-based operator panels Supports runtime data downloads through Serial, Ethernet, USB Supports adjustable brightness controls via touch panel Reliable rmware for 24/7 operation Supports Windows XP/ Vista-based WebOP Designer development tool Supports vertical and horizontal application screen rotation Communicates with up to four types of devices Panel mounting for machinery IP65 approved front panel
3 8 7
RS-485
10
COM 3 (6 Pins)
RS-232
RS-422 TXD- / RS-485RS-232 TXD (COM 3) RS-422 RXD-
(DC Jack) 1 Power Connector RS-232 RXD (COM 3) 8
2 Power Connector (Terminal)
3 COM 1 9-Pin Female / COM 1 9-Pin
Download Cable Male / COM 2 9-Pin 4 COM 2 9-Pin

5 COM 2 5-Pin (Terminal)
1 Connector 9-Pin Female (Terminal) 6 COM 3 6-PinCOM
WOP-2040T
COM 1
PC Connector 9-Pin Male
7 USB Connector (Type-A) 8 USB Connector (Type-B)
RXD TXD SG
2 3 5
3 2 5
TXD RXD SG
13
5
9 Ethernet port (N models only) 10 Micro-SD Slot / Micro-SD 11 Audio / 12 Mic /
COM 2
PC Connector 9-Pin Male
COM 2 Connector 9-Pin Male
RXD TXD SG
2 3 5
3 2 5
TXD RXD SG
COM 3 DB-9 (T series only)

COM 3 Connector 9-Pin Female PC Connector 9-Pin Male
10
NETWORK & WIRELESS
RXD TXD SG
8 7 5
3 2 5
TXD RXD SG
Panel fixing Power supply
WOP-2050T / WOP-2070T / WOP-2080T / WOP-2100T
Powered by a Low Voltage / Limited Energy power source.
24 VDC 10% 5W, 10W BACnet, Modbus, and other PLC Protocols Processor 32 bit RISC, 200MHz Operating System HMI RTOS LED Indication Power on LED Mounting Panel Housing Type Plastic Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 10-90% RH, non-condensing Storage Temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Approvals CE, BSMI, CCC, UL, FCC Class A Warranty 2 years
Fixing Screw
Mounting
Panel fixing
WOP-2000T Series
COM 1 DB-9 Female
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 Description RS-422 TXD+ / RS-485+ RS-232 RXD RS-232 TXD RS-422 RXD+ GND
COM 2 (5 Pins)
RS-422
Fixing Screw
RS-485
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
6
kele.com
COM 3 (6 Pins) USA 888-397-5353

RS-232
RS-422 TXD- / RS-485RS-232 TXD (COM 3) RS-232 RXD (COM 3)
725
Fixing Screw
NETWORK & WIRELESS

PINOUTS
TOUCHSCREEN OPERATOR DISPLAY PANEL WEBOP SERIES
WOP-2000T Series
COM 1 DB-9 Female
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description RS-422 TXD+ / RS-485+ RS-232 RXD RS-232 TXD RS-422 RXD+ GND RS-422 TXD- / RS-485RS-232 TXD (COM 3) RS-232 RXD (COM 3) RS-422 RXD-
COM 2 (5 Pins)
RS-422
Outlet
RS-485
COM 3 (6 Pins)
RS-232
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
Cut-out
H A C 6mm 0.23 L Model
A
130 mm / 5.11 188 mm / 7.4 188 mm / 7.4 231.5 mm / 9.11 269.8 mm / 10.62
Download Cable
COM 1
RXD TXD SG
2 3 5
3 2 5
TXD RXD SG
B
106.2 mm / 4.18 143.3 mm / 5.64 143.3 mm / 5.64 174.6 mm / 6.87 212 mm / 8.35
C
36.4 mm / 1.43 30 mm / 1.18 30 mm / 1.18 37 mm / 1.46 37.4 mm / 1.47
L
118.5 mm / 4.66 175 mm / 6.89 175 mm / 6.89 221 mm / 8.7
H
92.5 mm / 3.64 132.5 mm / 5.21 132.5 mm / 5.21 164 mm / 6.46
COM 2
COM 2 Connector 9-Pin Male PC Connector 9-Pin Male
WOP-2040T WOP-2050T WOP-2070T WOP-2080T WOP-2100T
RXD TXD SG
2 3 5
3 2 5
TXD RXD SG
COM 3 DB-9 (T series only)

259.5 mm / 10.22 201.5 mm / 7.93
RXD TXD SG
8 7 5
3 2 5
TXD RXD SG
Power supply
13
Powered by a Low Voltage / Limited Energy power source.
COMMUNICATION PORTS MODEL WOP-2040T-N1AE RS-232/422/485, USB, Ethernet WOP-2040T-S1AE RS-232/422/485, USB WOP-2050T-S1AE RS-232/422/485, USB WOP-2070T-N2AE RS-232/422/485, USB, Ethernet WOP-2070T-S2AE RS-232/422/485, USB WOP-2080T-N2AE RS-232/422/485, USB, Ethernet WOP-2080T-S2AE RS-232/422/485, USB WOP-2100T-N2AE RS-232/422/485, USB, Ethernet WOP-2100T-S2AE RS-232/422/485, USB
DATA LOGGING WEIGHT Internal + MicroSD 0.66 lbs (0.3 kg)
WIRING TERMINATIONS DISPLAY 4.3" WQVGA LCD 1 x RJ-45, 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9, 2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG) Internal 0.66 lbs (0.3 kg) 4.3" WQVGA LCD 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9, 2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG) Internal + MicroSD 1.12 lbs (0.51 kg) 5.6" QVGA LCD 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9, 2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG) Internal + MicroSD 1.32 lbs (0.6 kg) 7" WVGA LCD 1 x RJ-45, 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9, 2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG) Internal 1.32 lbs (0.6 kg) 7" WVGA LCD 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9, 2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG) 1 x RJ-45, 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9, Internal + MicroSD 2.05 lbs (0.93 kg) 8" SVGA LCD 2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG) 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9, Internal 2.05 lbs (0.93 kg) 8" SVGA LCD 2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG) Internal + MicroSD 2.64 lbs (1.2 kg) 10.1" WSVGA LCD 1 x RJ-45, 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9, 2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG) Internal 2.64 lbs (1.2 kg) 10.1" WSVGA LCD 1 x USB, 1 x DB-9, 2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 ~ 24 AWG)
NETWORK & WIRELESS
1702002600 CWOP-P2HAB-ADU2E CWOP-P2HFM-AD12E PWR-247-AE
ACCESSORIES Power Cable US Plug 1.8 M PC to HMI program download cable, USB/2m PC to HMI program download cable, DB9/2m 24 V 50 W AC-DC Power Adapter
726
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Versatile Routing Flexible communications IP network support Easy installation
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BACNET MULTI-NETWORK ROUTER BASRT-B
The BASRT-B provides stand-alone routing between BACnet networks such as BACnet/IP, BACnet Ethernet, and BACnet MSTP. This allows the system integrator to mix BACnet network technologies within a single BACnet internetwork. There are two physical communication ports on the BAS Router. One is a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet port and the other an isolated MS/TP port. Conguration is accomplished via a web page.
BASRTP-B
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Communication Ethernet 24 VAC/VDC 4 VA BACnet IP, IEEE 802.3 10/100 Mbps data rate 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (100 m (max) CAT5 cable length) BACnet MS/TP, ANSI/ASHRAE 135 (ISO 16484-5) 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800 bps data rate EIA-485 (1200 m (max) cable length)
BASRT-B
WIRING
BASRT-B Termination and bias applied internally
+ SC MS/TP Power HIB HI COM D+ D
Connect shield to chassis at only one point
MS/TP
24V GND
Up to 31 Full-load Field MS/TP Devices
D+
24V GND
13
LED Indication Power Green = power OK Ethernet Green = 100 Mbps Yellow = 10 Mbps Flash = activity MS/TP Flashing green = receive activity Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Operating Humidity 10 to 90% (non-condensing) Dimensions 4.85"H x 2.74"W x 1.0"D (12.3 x 1.9 x 2.5 cm) 0.6 lbs (0.27 kg) Weight Approvals CE Mark; CFR 47, Part 15 Class A Yes RoHS Statement 2 years Warranty
HI 24 VAC LO Ground
HI 24 VAC LO Ground
HI
NETWORK & WIRELESS
24 VAC LO Ground
DIAGRAM
Power Input
24 VAC/VDC 4 VA half-wave regulated design allows power sharing with other half-wave devices. Power OK indicator
Power LED:
Ethernet
10/100 Mbps Ethernet with auto-negotiation and Auto-MDIX. Protocols supported include HTTP, IP, UDP, TCP, and BACnet/IP.
Ethernet LED
Monitors Ethernet activity
Aux USB Connection

Allows firmware upgrades in the field
MODEL BASRT-B BASRTP-B DESCRIPTION BACnet multi-network router Portable BACnet multi-network router (powered via usb port)
Reset IP
Switch returns BAS Router to default IP address and default password settings.
MS/TP LED
Monitors MS/TP activity
MS/TP
3-wire isolated EIA-485 connection with support for 2-wire non-isolated devices
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
727
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BACNET/IP AND LON/IP ROUTER L-IP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The L-IP LON models connects CEA-709 channels (e.g. TP/ FT-10 or TP/XF-1250) through IP networks. The BACnet model connects BACnet MS/TP to a BACnet/IP network. It routes data packets back and forth through an IP based network, such as a LAN (Ethernet), an Intranet, or even the Internet. They also connect to the IP network via a 100Base-T Ethernet channel. Every CEA-709 (LON) L-IP router supports the operating modes Smart Switch Mode and Congured Router Mode.
NEW!
LIP-ME201 1x TP/FT-10, 1x Ethernet (100Base-T) Lonmark IP-852, HTTP, FTP LIP-ME201 1x BACnet MS/TP, 1x Ethernet (100Base-T) BACnet/IP, HTTP,FTP Operating Temperature 0 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 10-90% RH @ 122F (50C) noncondensing D IN rail Mounting C BACnet/IP Ethernet Dimensions B All other models 4.21"W x 3.94"H x 2.36"D 40 POWER ACT LINK G (10.7 x 10.0 x 6.0 cm) STATUS ACT RESET 6.26"W x 3.94"H x 2.36"D LIP-3333ECTB H D Serial BBMD (15.9 xTerminal 10.0 x 6.0 cm) E F Weight LIP-3333ECTB 0.68 lbs (0.31 kg) All other models 0.49 lbs (0.22 kg) Approvals MSTP Ethernet CE, FCC POWER 4 5 6 8 2 years 15 16 17 Warranty LIP-3ECTB
MS/TP Port
FEATURES
BACnet and LON models Conguration via built-in Web server or serial port Status and activity LED 100baseT connection DIN-rail mountable
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Watts Communication LIP-1ECTB LIP-3xxxx LIP-ME201 Channels LIP-1ECTB 12 to 35 VDC, 12 to 24 VAC 10% 3 Watts Type CEA-709, IP (10/100Base-T + TP/XF-1250) Type CEA-709, IP (10/100Base-T + TP/FT-10) Type BACnet, IP (10/100Base-T + BACnet MS/TP)
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
1x TP/XF-1250, 1x Ethernet (100Base-T) Lonmark IP-852, HTTP, FTP LIP-3333ECTB 4x TP/FT-10, 1x Ethernet (100Base-T) Lonmark IP-852, HTTP, FTP LIP-33ECRB/LIP-33ECTB 2x TP/FT-10, 1x Ethernet (100Base-T) Lonmark IP-852, HTTP, FTP
WIRING
LIP-ME201 (RJ45)
CEA-852
C B ACT RESET D E F LINK ACT BBMD Serial Terminal 40 POWER G STATUS H BACnet/IP Ethernet
10/100Base-T
- + 12-35 VDC
12-24 VAC
Connectors MS/TP 4 5 6 Ethernet 8 POWER 15 16 Input GND Input + Input 10/100Base-T (RJ45) Power supply input EARTH GND Power supply input MINUS Can be connected to EARTH GND 17 Power supply input PLUS Do NOT be connect to EARTH GND SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male) Buttons RESET STATUS Reset Send I AM pin message
Status LEDs B Green flashing fast Orange flashing Red C Green flashing D Green E Green flashing F Green G Green H OFF Traffic on MS/TP port Sole master Communication error Traffic on BACnet IP port Ethernet link Ethernet traffic BBMD enabled Power Normal operation
MSTP Ethernet 4 5 6 8
POWER 15 16 17
MS/TP Port
10/100Base-T (RJ45) CEA-852 Status LEDs
- + 12-35 VDC
12-24 VAC Traffic on MS/TP port Sole master Communication error Traffic on BACnet IP port
Connectors MS/TP
Ethernet
728
4 5 6 8
Input GND Input + Input 10/100Base-T (RJ45)
888-397-5353 USA
B Green flashing fast Orange flashing Red C Green flashing
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
C B CNIP Ethernet ACT LINK ACT 40 POWER RESET D E F Server Serial Terminal FT Ethernet 4 5 6 8 POWER 15 16 17 Termination (L-Term) CEA-709 10/100Base-T (RJ45) CEA-852
NETWORK & WIRELESS

LIP-xECTB
Status LEDs B Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast C Green Yellow Red Flashing at 1 Hz OFF Green Green flashing Green Green OFF Traffic on port 1 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 1 IP port is fully functional IP port functional but config. is not up-to-date IP port in non-functional IP port is not commissioned IP port is not active Ethernet link Ethernet traffic BBMD enabled Power Normal operation
Connectors Input EARTH GND port 1 Input B port 1 Input A port 1 10/100Base-T (RJ45) Power supply input EARTH GND Power supply input MINUS Power supply input PLUS Do NOT connect to EARTH GND SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male) Buttons RESET STATUS Reset Send service pin message
CEA-709 4 G 5 STATUS 6 H Ethernet 8 POWER 15 16 17
D E F G H
- + 12-35 VDC
12-24 VAC
LIP-xxECRB
Connectors
C B A D E F PRIM ACT RESET LINK ACT Server Serial Terminal 40 POWER G STATUS H CNIP Ethernet
Status LEDs A Green Off Orange Red B Device is active Device is inactive (standby) Problem with twin router Device is inactive due to error Green flashing fast Traffic on CEA-709 loop Green flashing at Port not commissioned 1 HZ Red permanent CEA-709 port damaged Red flashing fast Loop open/Traffic overload Green IP port is fully functional Yellow IP port functional but config. is not up-to-date Red IP port in non-functional Flashing at 1 Hz IP port is not commissioned OFF IP port is not active Green Ethernet link Green flashing Ethernet traffic Green BBMD enabled Green Power OFF Normal operation
CEA-709 1 2 3 CEA-709 4 5 6 Ethernet 8 POWER 15 16 17
FT FT Ethernet 1 2 3 4 5 6 8
POWER 15 16 17
Do not connect Input B loop side 2 Input A loop side 2 Input EARTH GND port 2 Input B loop side 1 Input A loop side 1 10/100Base-T (RJ45) Power supply input EARTH GND Power supply input MINUS Power supply input PLUS Do NOT connect to EARTH GND SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male) Buttons
13
Termination (L-Term)
RESET STATUS
CEA-709 CEA-709 Loop Loop Side 2 Side 1 10/100Base-T (RJ45) CEA-852
Reset Send service pin message
- + 12-35 VDC
12-24 VAC
D E F G H
NETWORK & WIRELESS
LIP-xxECTB
C B ACT RESET D E F LINK ACT Server Serial Terminal 40 POWER
Connectors
CNIP Ethernet
Status LEDs A Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast B Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast C Green Yellow Red Flashing at 1 Hz OFF Green Green flashing Green Green OFF Traffic on port 2 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 2 Traffic on port 1 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 1 IP port is fully functional IP port functional but config. is not up-to-date IP port in non-functional IP port is not commissioned IP port is not active Ethernet link Ethernet traffic BBMD enabled Power Normal operation
CEA-709 1 2 3 G CEA-709 4 STATUS 5 H 6 Ethernet 8 POWER 15 16 17
FT FT Ethernet 1 2 3 4 5 6 8
POWER 15 16 17
Input EARTH GND port 2 Input B port 2 Input A port 2 Input EARTH GND port 1 Input B port 1 Input A port 1 10/100Base-T (RJ45) Power supply input EARTH GND Power supply input MINUS Power supply input PLUS Do NOT connect to EARTH GND SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male) Buttons
CEA-709 CEA-709 Port 2 Port 1
RESET STATUS
Reset Send service pin message
10/100Base-T (RJ45) CEA-852
- + 12-35 VDC
12-24 VAC
D E F G H
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
729
NETWORK & WIRELESS

WIRING
LIP-xxxECTB
A B C D
L-IP
ACT
ACT
ACT
ACT
RESET
CNIP ACT Server
NEW!
Ethernet F 40 POWER LINK G I STATUS J H Serial Terminal Ethernet 17 POWER 24 25 26 10/100Base-T (RJ45) CEA-852
FT FT FT FT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 1415
CEA-709 CEA-709 Port 4 CEA-709 Port 2 CEA-709 Port 3 Port 1
- + 12-35 VDC
12-24 VAC
Connectors CEA-709 4 Input EARTH GND port 4 5 Input B port 4 6 Input A port 4 CEA-709 7 Input EARTH GND port 3 8 Input B port 3 9 Input A port 3 CEA-709 10 Input EARTH GND port 2 11 Input B port 2 12 Input A port 2 CEA-709 13 Input EARTH GND port 1 14 Input B port 1 15 Input A port 1 Ethernet 17 10/100Base-T (RJ45) POWER 15 Power supply input EARTH GND 16 Power supply input MINUS 17 Power supply input PLUS Do NOT connect to EARTH GND SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male) Buttons RESET STATUS Reset Send service pin message
Status LEDs A Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast B Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast C Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast D Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast E Green Yellow Red Flashing at 1 Hz OFF Green Green flashing Green Green OFF Traffic on port 4 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 4 Traffic on port 3 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 3 Traffic on port 2 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 2 Traffic on port 1 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 1 IP port is fully functional IP port functional but config. is not up-to-date IP port in non-functional IP port is not commissioned IP port is not active Ethernet link Ethernet traffic BBMD enabled Power Normal operation
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
F G H I J
MODEL LIP-1ECTB LIP-3333ECTB LIP-33ECRB LIP-33ECTB LIP-3ECTB LIP-ME201 DESCRIPTION L-IP Lon Router, 1 TP/XF-1250, 1 ethernet port (IP-852) L-IP Lon Router, 4 TP/FT-10, 1 ethernet port (IP-852) L-IP Lon Router with redundancy, 2 TP/FT-10, 1 ethernet port (IP-852) L-IP Lon Router, 2TP/FT-10 , 1 ethernet port (IP-852) L-IP Lon Router, 1TP/FT-10, 1 ethernet port (IP-852) BACnet/IP Router, MS/TP to BACnet/IP
730
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Supply Watts Communication Channels LS-11333CB LS-11CB LS-13300CB LS-13333CB LS-13CB LS-33300CB LS-33CB Type CEA-709 (LON)
NETWORK & WIRELESS

LON SWITCH ROUTER L-SWITCH SERIES
The L-Switch is the solution for interconnecting multiple CEA709 channels. It provides up to ve ports and routes packets between these ports. In spite of its small size, the L-Switch router delivers rst class performance and exibility in use. In order to provide the optimal router conguration, the L-Switch comes with 2 to 5 ports as well as the two operating modes Smart Switch Mode and Congured Router Mode.
LS-11CB
For physical separation and logical connection of up to 5 CEA-709 network segments Can be used as congured router Can be used as learning switch or repeater in Smart Switch Mode Plug & Play installation in Smart Switch Mode Forwards packets of up to 256 bytes length Supports up to four domains in Smart Switch Mode DIN-rail mountable LS-11333CB
12 to 35 VDC, 12 to 24 VAC 10% 3 Watts
LonMark System 2x TP/XF-1250, 3x TP/FT-10 LonMark System 2x TP/XF-1250 LonMark System 1x TP/XF-1250, 2x TP/FT-10 LonMark System 1x TP/XF-1250, 4x TP/FT-10 LonMark System 1x TP/XF-1250, 1x TP/FT-10 LonMark System 3x TP/FT-10 LonMark System 2x TP/FT-10
Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 10-90% RH @ 122F (50C) nonOperating Humidity condensing Dimensions LS-xxxxxCB 6.26"W x 3.94"H x 2.36"D (15.9 x 10.0 x 6.0 cm) 4.21"W x 3.94"H x 2.36"D (10.7 x LS-xxCB 10.0 x 6.0 cm) Weight LS-xxxxxCB 0.66 lb (0.30 kg) LS-xxCB 0.49 lb (0.22 kg) Approvals CE, FCC Warranty 2 years
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

LS-xxCB
DIP1 DIP2 Function ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF Smart switch mode Repeater mode Smart switch mode/ subnet learning Configured CEA-709 router Configured EIA-709 router
LS-xxxxxCB
DIP3 Function (RS-485 version only) ON OFF Bit-rate auto detection on Bit-rate auto detection off DIP4 DIP5 DIP6 DIP7 Must be OFF Must be OFF Must be OFF Must be OFF
OFF ON
OFF ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
731
NETWORK & WIRELESS

LON SWITCH ROUTER L-SWITCH SERIES
WIRING
LS-xxCB
NEW!
LS-xxxxxCB
ACT A B C D E ACT ACT ACT ACT 40 POWER RESET Serial Terminal (Console Connector) I STATUS J FT FT FT FT FT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 POWER 24 25 26
B A ACT ACT RESET Serial Terminal (Console Connector) 40 POWER G STATUS H
FT FT 1 2 3 4 5 6
POWER 15 16 17
Termination (L-Term) CEA-709 CEA-709 Port 1 Port 2
- + 12-35 VDC
12-24 VAC Connectors CEA-709 1 2 3 CEA-709 4 5 6 POWER 15 16 17 Input EARTH GND port 2 Input B port 2 Input A port 2 Input EARTH GND port 1 Input B port 1 Input A port 1 Power supply input EARTH GND Power supply input MINUS Power supply input PLUS Do NOT connect to EARTH GND SERIAL 40 RS-232 Interface (DB9 male) Status LEDs A Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast B Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast G Green H OFF Traffic port 2 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 2 Traffic on port 1 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 1 Power Normal operation
CEA-709 CEA-709 CEA-709 Port 4 CEA-709 Port 2 CEA-709 Port 1 Port 5 Port 3
- + 12-35 VDC
12-24 VAC
Connectors CEA-709 1 2 3 CEA-709 4 5 6 CEA-709 7 8 9 CEA-709 10 11 12 CEA-709 13 14 15 Input EARTH GND port 5 Input B port 5 Input A port 5 Input EARTH GND port 4 Input B port 4 Input A port 4 Input EARTH GND port 3 Input B port 3 Input A port 3 Input EARTH GND port 2 Input B port 2 Input A port 2 Input EARTH GND port 1 Input B port 1 Input A port 1
Status LEDs A Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast B Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast C Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast D Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast E Green flashing fast Green flashing at 1 HZ Red permanent Red flashing fast I Green J OFF Traffic port 5 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 5 Traffic on port 4 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 4 Traffic on port 3 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 3 Traffic on port 2 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 2 Traffic on port 1 Port not commissioned CEA-709 port damaged Traffic overload on port 1 Power Normal operation
13
Buttons RESET STATUS Reset Send service pin message
NETWORK & WIRELESS
POWER 24 Power supply input EARTH GND 25 Power supply input MINUS 26 Power supply input PLUS Do NOT connect to EARTH GND SERIAL 40 EIA-232 (DB9 male) Buttons RESET STATUS Reset Send service pin message
MODEL LS-11333CB LS-11CB LS-13300CB LS-13333CB LS-13CB LS-33300CB LS-33CB DESCRIPTION L-Switch 2 x TP/XF-1250, 3 x TP/FT-10 L-Switch 2 x TP/XF-1250 L-Switch 1 x TP/XF-1250, 2 x TP/FT-10 L-Switch 1 x TP/XF-1250, 4 x TP/FT-10 L-Switch 1 x TP/XF-1250, 1 x TP/FT-10 L-Switch 3 x TP/FT-10 L-Switch 2 x TP/FT-10
732
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Input Power
NETWORK & WIRELESS

FTT-10 LONWORKS REPEATER 110A
Model 110A is a two-channel physical layer repeater for FTT-10 LonWorks networks. Data received on one channel is reconditioned and re-transmitted on the other channel. Each Model 110A effectively doubles the wiring distance and the number of nodes that can be placed on the network. On-board jumpers allow each channel to be terminated independently for bus or free topology. A local 3.5 mm network jack allows a convenient way to connect an installation or diagnostic tool to the network without disconnecting any wires. Three LEDs provide diagnostic information for troubleshooting. A green LED indicates when power is applied. Two red LEDs indicate when data is being received on each of the two local channels.
110A
WIRING
WIRING AND INSTALLATION
Extends wiring distance of FTT-10 LonWorks Networks Up to 5 repeaters can be daisy chained together to create a multi-segment repeater of up to 10 channels Low cost alternative to routers congured as repeaters All wiring is to removable terminal blocks for ease of service Polarity insensitive AC/DC wide input voltage range Input power has over current and transient voltage suppression Termination for bus and free topology 3.5 mm network jack for local installation tool connection Communication and power indicators to assist in eld diagnostics DIN Rail mount enclosure
All wiring is done via two sets of removable terminal blocks. The top terminal block has two positions and supplies power to the unit. 12-36 VDC or 9 -26 VAC can be used. The terminals are polarity insensitive.
Daisy Chain Connectors Vin B (Input Power) Vin A
13
The bottom terminal block has four positions. Two terminals for each network. The terminals for the first network are labeled Network A1 and Network B1. The second network channel is labeled Network A2 and Network B2. The network wiring is polarity insensitive. The network jack provides an access point for a network
NETWORK & WIRELESS
12-36 VDC or 9-26 VAC @ 30 mA typical. Polarity insensitive wiring. Network Transceiver Type Two Echelon FTT-10A transceivers at 78 kbps. DC blocking capacitors forLink Power network are installed. Network Termination Separate jumpers for each channel support free and bus topology termination. Multi-Segment Operation Max of 5 repeaters can be daisy chained to construct a 10-channel repeater hub. Protection Input power is fused and transient voltage protected. Fuse automatically resets when fault is removed. Enclosure Material Grey frame retardant Noryl UL94_V0 Operating Temperature 32 to 176F (0 to 80C) Operating Humidity 0-90% RH non-condensing Dimensions 3.54"H x 1.42"W x 2.28"D (90 x 36 x 58 mm) Enclosure Type DIN rail mount to 35 mm rail Weight 0.3 lb (0.14kg) Warranty 1 year
Network Jack Network A1 Network B1 Network A2 Network B2
MODEL 110A DESCRIPTION Model 110A FTT-10 Physical Layer Repeater
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
733
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BACNET, LON, MODBUS TERMINATOR L-TERM SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The LON TP/FT-10, TP/LPT-10, TP/XF-1250 and BACnet MS/ TP networks need to be terminated using a dened network terminator. L-Term LT-03 offers one standard network terminator for a TP/FT-10 or TP/LPT-10 channel. In addition, LT-03 comes with a network access connector for a simple and reliable connection to the CEA-709 network e.g. for maintenance or analyzing the network locally. L-Term LT-13 and LT-33 offer two standard network terminators in a slim housing which makes them a perfect solution for LOYTEC active network infrastructure products (e.g. L-IP, L-Switch, L-Proxy etc.) at a very competitive price. L-Term LT-04 and LT-B4 offer one standard network terminator for a EIA-485 channel such as BACnet MS/ TP, Modbus or TP/RS-485 (CEA-709). LT-04 comes with a network access connector for a simple and reliable connection to the network e.g. for maintenance or analyzing the network locally. The LT-B4 is a bus termination with biasing circuit (failsafe biasing) and needs a power supply. This biasing circuit draws the level of the bus in standby mode (idle) to a safe value (logic "1").
NEW!
L-Term Series
WIRING
24V AC/DC
free bus com topology
GND
NC
13
FEATURES
BACnet, Modbus and LON models available Supports bus and free topology termination (LT-03, LT-13, LT-33) TP/FT-10 side can also be used to terminate link power channels Pluggable screw terminals (0.5 - 2.5 mm) DIN-rail mountable
1 B A +
L-Term
RS-485
5V 510 120
LOYTEC www.loytec.com
TP/FT-10
bus free com topology
Bus Terminator LT-B4
L-Term
RS-485
L-Term
Bus Terminator LT-33
L-Term
TP/FT-10
TP/FT-10
510
com free bus topology
NC
A +
B -
NC
NETWORK & WIRELESS
LT-B4
LT-04
LT-13 LT-33
LT-03
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Channels LT-03 LT-04 LT-13 LT-33 LT-B4 24 VAC/VDC 10% LonMark System 1x TP/FT-10 or TP/ LPT-10 1 x EIA-485 (BACnet MS/TP, Modbus RTU) LonMark System 1x TP/XF-1250, 1x TP/FT-10 or TP/LPT-10 LonMark System 2x TP/FT-10 or TP/LPT-10 Active 1 x EIA-485 (BACnet MS/ TP, Modbus RTUActive 1 x EIA-485 (BACnet MS/TP, Modbus RTU) LON, BACnet MS/TP, Modbus RTU 10-90% RH @ 122F (50C) noncondensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Dimensions 0.71"W x 2.28"H x 3.54"L (18 x 58 x 90 mm) Approvals CE Weight 0.15 lb (0.07 kg) Warranty 2 years Communication Operating Humidity
734
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
LPOW-2415B
GND
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BACNET, LON, MODBUS TERMINATOR L-TERM SERIES
RS-485 NETWORK TERMINATOR APPLICATION EXAMPLE

Modbus RTU: LINX-100 Automation Server and terminator LT-B4 with biasing circuit (failsave biasing)
Modbus Device
status
NC
Made in Austria
Power Supply
85-265VAC 50/60 Hz 24VDC/15W GND +
L-POW
L-Term
RS-485
5V 510 120
L-INX
OPC ACT CNIP
Automation Server
Made in EC
24V AC/DC
8 B A +
LINK ACT CS/RNI
Bus Terminator LT-B4
2 1
B A
2 3 4 5
serial
power
status
L-Term
RS-485
510
RS-485
1
Input N L
FT B A
6
12-35 VDC INPUT or 12-24 VAC, 40-70 Hz
NC
100Base-T
LINX-100
- + ~ ~
DC AC
A + B NC
15 16 17
LT-B4
LT-04
85265 VAC 50 / 60 Hz
EIA-485 A Line (inverting) - , DA0 EIA-485 B Line (non-inverting) + , DA1
LT-04 Modular Plug RJ-45(8P8C)

Pin 1 2 3 ... 8 Marking A+ B NC Description non-inverting pin, B (EIA-485) inverting pin, A (EIA-485) not connected
LON NETWORK Network Terminator LON TERMINATOR APPLICATION EXAMPLE Application Examples
1) LT-33 in a typical free topology installation on two TP/FT-10 channels together with an LS-33CB 2-port L-Switch
2) LT-13 in a typical network with TP/XF-1250 backbone and free typology on TP/FT-10 together with two LS-13CB L-Switches
3) LT-03 in a free topology installation together with a LINX-100 Automation Server
bus free com topology
L-INX
OPC ACT CNIP
Automation Server
Made in EC
13
LINK ACT CS/RNI
A
free bus com topology
NC
L-switch XP
ACT ACT
EIA709 router
Made in EU
L-Term
TP/XF-1250
TP/FT-10
TP/FT-10
1
4 5
serial
power
status
L-Term
L-Term
TP/FT-10
2 1
FT
1
LS-13CB
serial
power
status
FT B A
6
100Base-T
LINX-100
- + ~ ~
DC AC
TP/FT-10
TP-1250
3 4
15 16 17
TP/XF-1250 Backbone
B A
2
B A
5 6
- + ~ ~
DC AC
15 16 17
NETWORK & WIRELESS
TP/FT-10 TP/XF-1250 Stub
TP/FT-10 TP/FT-10
TP/FT-10
TP/XF-1250 Stub
LT-03 Modular Plug RJ-45(8P8C)

A NC B
L-switch XP
ACT ACT
EIA709 router
Made in EU
Pin 1 2 3 4 ... 8
Marking com free bus -
Description tie point free topology bus topology not connected
TP/XF-1250
L-Term
TP/FT-10
2 1
FT
1
LS-13CB
serial
power
status
TP-1250
3 4
B A
2
B A
5 6
- + ~ ~
DC AC
15 16 17
TP/FT-10
MODEL LT-03 LT-13 LT-33 LT-04 LT-B4 March 2014 DESCRIPTION L-Term LON Network Terminator, 1 x TP/FT-10 or TP/LPT-10, 1 x RJ45 L-Term LON Network Terminator, 1 x TP/FT-10, 1 x TP/XF-1250 L-Term LON Network Terminator, 2 x TP/FT-10 or TP/LPT-10 L-Term BACnet and Modbus Network Terminator, 1 x EIA-485, 1 x RJ45 L-Term BACnet and Modbus Network Terminator, 1 x EIA-485 w/ failsafe
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
735
NETWORK & WIRELESS

INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET SWITCH 852 ETHERNET SWITCH
DESCRIPTION The 852-111 has 5 ports with each port featuring autonegotiation and auto MDI/MDI-X detection. Existing 10Mbps networks can now be upgraded effortlessly to higher speed 100Mbps Fast ETHERNET networks. The 852-111 5-port density can be used to create multiple segments to alleviate client congestion and provide dedicated bandwidth to each user node. The 852-111 is a cost-effective solution to keep up with the constant demands for emerging IP-based industry communication needs. The switch can be easily congured and installed and is also ideally suited for small to medium-sized networks.
NEW!
852-111
FEATURES 5-port 10/100 Mbps Auto-negotiation ETHERNET ports Comprehensive front-panel diagnostic LEDs Supports Auto-MDI/MDI-X Full/half-duplex transfer modes for each port Wire speed reception and transmission Store-and-forward switching method Integrated address Look-Up Engine, supports 2K absolute MAC addresses Supports surge protection IEEE 802.3x ow control for fullduplex Supports DIN 35 rail
WIRING
13
1 Power 2 Status 3 Ground
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Top view of Industrial Eco Switch
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Watts Communication 18 to 30 VDC 3W Ethernet communications IEEE 802.3 10/100 Mbps data rate 10 BASE-T, 100 BASE-TX physical layer 100 m (max) CAT 5 cable length Green Green (100 Mbps) Activity Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Operating Humidity 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 0.92" x 2.9" x 4.29" (2.34 x 7.38 x 10.92 cm) Weight 0.77 lb (0.35 kg) Warranty 1 year
LED Indication Power Speed Flash
MODEL 852-111 DESCRIPTION 5 port industrial Ethernet switch
736
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BAS ETHERNET SWITCHES EIBA SWITCHES
The Plug-and-Play (PnP) EIBA switches provide the needed functionality, mounting convenience, and ruggedness to t most BAS applications. The popular EIBA5-100T which is designed for panel mounting is complemented by its DIN-rail cousin, the EIBA5-100T/R.
Utilizing switching technology, the compact and low-cost EIBA switches provide ve 10/100 Mbps shielded RJ-45 ports. Each port is Auto-MDIX compliant and can operate as an uplink port, eliminating the need for crossover cables. All ports automatically negotiate data rate, duplex, and ow control.
Compact size 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX compliant Auto-MDIX ports Auto-negotiated data rate, duplex and ow control Panel and DIN-rail mountable versions Powered from an unregulated DC source (10-36 V) or an AC source (8-24 V, 47-63 Hz) via a quick-disconnect terminal strip
EIBA5-100T
EIBA5-100T/R
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Communication 24 VAC/VDC 10% 4 VA Ethernet communications IEEE 802.3 10/100 Mbps data rate 10 BASE-T, 100 BASE-TX physical layer 100 m (max) CAT 5 cable length
WIRING
PWR HI PWR COM (customer supplied)
13
optional chassis connection AC Powered PWR HI PWR COM
LED Indication Ethernet Green = 100 Mbps Yellow = 10 Mbps Flash = activity Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Operating Humidity 10 to 95% non-condensing 4.13"H x 3.5"W x 1.25"D Dimensions (10.5 x 8.9 x 3.2 cm) 0.6 lbs (0.272 kg) Weight Approvals CE Mark, UL 508, C-UL, File #E225652 RoHS Statement Yes 5 years Warranty
NETWORK & WIRELESS
(customer supplied)
optional chassis connection AC Powered with Grounded Secondary PWR HI PWR COM
(customer supplied)
optional chassis connection DC Powered
MODEL EIBA5-100T EIBA5-100T/R DESCRIPTION Five-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, panel mount Five-port 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX, DIN-rail mount
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
737
NETWORK & WIRELESS

UNMANAGED ETHERNET SWITCHES EKI SERIES
DESCRIPTION The EKI Series Unmanaged Industrial Ethernet Switches are designed for use in demanding industrial environments, offering unmatched performance, reliability, and value. With no setup required, they are truly plug-and-play. Models are available in standard 10/100Mbps with both copper wire and ber optic connections.
NEW!
EKI-2525 EKI-3525 WIRING PWR2 P-Fail PWR1 V2- V2+ V1- V1+ (+12 ~ 48 VDC)
Pin Assignment of the Power Connector EKI-3525/3528-AE P1, P2, P-Fail, Loop Detection, 10/100T (X): Link/Activity, Speed Operating Temperature 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing Enclosure IP30, IP40 Mounting DIN/panel Flow Control Yes Housing Type Metal, Plastic+Metal Dimensions EKI-2525/2525M/ 2528-AE 1.46"H x 5.51"W x 3.74"D (37 x 140 x 95 mm) EKI-3525-AE 1.02"H x 4.73"W x 3.35"D (28.5 x 120 x 85.3 mm) EKI-3528-AE 1.75"H x 4.73"W x 3.35"D (44.5 x 120 x 85.3 mm) Approvals CE/FCC/UL, C1D2 (EKI-2525/2528/2525M) Warranty 5 years
FEATURES
Slim size, DIN-rail mount Redundant 12-48Vdc power input Rugged extruded aluminum enclosure IP30 and IP40 rating Hardware status LED light
SPECIFICATIONS
13
Power Input 12~48 VDC, redundant dual inputs Power Consumption EKI-2525-AE 3w EKI-2525M/2528-AE 5w EKI-3525/3528-AE 2.4W/ 2.5W Fault Output 1 Relay Output Communication Ethernet Communication Ports EKI-2525/3525-AE 5 - 10/100 Mbps ports EKI-2525M-AE 4 - 10/100 Mbps ports and 1 - 100 M.M Fiber port EKI-2528/3528-AE 8 - 10/100 Mbps ports Data Throughput 100Mbps Protocol EKI-2525/2525M/ 2528-AE IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x EKI-3525/3528-AE IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x, 802.1p, 802.3az LED Indication EKI-2525/2525M/ 2528-AE P1,P2,P-Fail, 10/100T(X):Link/ Activity and Duplex/Collision,
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL EKI-2525-AE EKI-2525M-AE EKI-2528-AE EKI-3525-AE EKI-3528-AE DESCRIPTION 5-port 10/100Mbps Unmanaged Ethernet Switch 4-port 10/100M +1 MM Fiber Unmanaged Ethernet Switch 8-port 10/100Mbps Unmanaged Ethernet Switch 5-port 10/100Mbps Unmanaged Industrial 8-port 10/100Mbps Unmanaged Industrial
738
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Power Consumption Channels LIOB-1xx LIOB-4xx LIOB-5xx Communication LIOB-1xx LIOB-4xx LIOB-5xx MODEL LIOB-150 LIOB-151 LIOB-152 LIOB-153 LIOB-450 LIOB-451 LIOB-452 LIOB-453 LIOB-550 LIOB-551 LIOB-552 LIOB-553 March 2014
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BACNET AND LON I/O MODULE L-IOB SERIES
The L-IOB I/O Module family of products consists of smart I/O devices featuring different I/O setups. Based on LOYTEC's 32-bit L-CORE platform the L-IOB I/O Modules provide rst class performance and extensive resources. The L-IOB I/O Modules contain a 128x64 display with backlight. The display shows device and data point information. A jog dial is used for local operation by navigating through detailed information on the display and for operating and overriding of data points. The conguration of the L-IOB I/O Modules is done with the L-INX Conguration Tool which is free to download from Loytec.
Physical Inputs and Outputs Stackable I/O Modules supporting LIOB-Connect Models available for LonMark (TP/FT-10 and IP-852) and BACnet Networks (BACnet/IP) 128x64 display with backlight Local access to information about device status and data points Manual operation using the jog dial Conguration through L-INX conguration tool Removable terminal with a clamping yoke connection to accomodate diameters from 0.2-2.5 mm (26-12 AWG) Simple device replacement without software tool
LIOB-150
24 VAC/VDC 10 % 1.7W, 2.5-2.7W with relays on 1x LIOB-FT or LonMark TP/FT-10 2x Ethernet (100Base-T) LIOB-IP or LonMark IP-852 2x Ethernet (100Base-T) LIOB-IP or BACnet/IP, OPC XML-DA Type LIOB-FT, CEA-709 (LON) Type LIOB-IP, LonMark IP-852 Type LIOB-BIP, BACnet/IP, LIOB-IP, OPC XML-DA
Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 10-90% RH @ 122F (50C) noncondensing 4.21"W x 3.94"H x 2.95"D (10.7 x Dimensions 10.0 x 7.5 cm) Weight 0.71 lbs (0.32 kg) Approvals CE, FCC, LonMark 3.4 Warranty 2 years
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Note: See next page for wiring and terminals layout.
DESCRIPTION LON TP/FT-10 I/O MODULES 8UI 2DI 2AO 8DO LON TP/FT-10 I/O MODULES 8UI 12DI LON TP/FT-10 I/O MODULES 6UI 6AO 8DO LON TP/FT-10 I/O MODULES 6UI 6AO 5DO LON IP-852 I/O MODULES 8UI 2DI 2AO 8DO LON IP-852 I/O MODULES 8UI 12DI LON IP-852 I/O MODULES 6UI 6AO 8DO LON IP-852 I/O MODULES 6UI 6AO 5DO BACNET/IP I/O MODULES 8UI 2DI 2AO 8DO BACNET/IP I/O MODULES 8UI 12DI BACNET/IP I/O MODULES 6UI 6AO 8DO BACNET/IP I/O MODULES 6UI 6AO 5DO
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
739
NETWORK & WIRELESS

WIRING
24VDC/VAC + -
NEW!
LIOB-151 LIOB-153
LIOB-15X
LIOB-150
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
LIOB-152
740
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
LIOB-45X/55X LIOB-450/550 LIOB-452/552
NETWORK & WIRELESS

24VDC/VAC + -
LIOB-451/551
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
LIOB-453/553
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
741
NETWORK & WIRELESS

EMBEDDED NETWORK SERVERS I.CANDOIT SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Control Solutions' i.CanDoIt Series provides a simple and cost effective facility management and remote monitoring solution suitable for use in small sites. It has no site licenses or installation fees. The only software tool needed is a web browser. Multi-protocol support for BACnet and Modbus. The i.CanDoIt is programmable, even though it is powerful without programming.
NEW!
AM3-IPx AMJR-14x
FEATURES
Embedded Web Server Data Logging & Trending Time & Date Scheduling Astronomical Clock Email Event Notications Fill-in-the-blank Alarm Templates Field Programmable User Web Pages
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage AM3x AMJRx Communication Ports Analog Input AM3x AMJRx Discrete Inputs 18-30 VDC or 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 10-30 VDC or 24 VAC 50/60 Hz RS-485 Port 18 (16 universal + 2 analog) 12 universal TTL to 24VDC 2, Pulse count frequency input Totalizing count input
AM3x Wiring Terminals
13
Analog Output AM3x 4, 4-20mA (0-20mA) 8-bit resolution Discrete Outputs AM3x 8, Form A relay, 5A @ 120 VAC AMJRx 2, Open drain FET, 1A @ 24VDC Processor 32-bit ARM Signal LEDs Power and communication AM3x 8 AMJRx 2 Resolution AM3x 0.1% reference up to 16-bit AMJRx 10-bit Data Logging Yes Operating Temperature -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5-90% RH non-condensing Mounting DIN rail Dimensions AM3x 3.94"H x 6.1"W x 2.36"D (100 x 155 x 60 mm) AMJRx 3.94"H x 2.76"W x 2.36"D (100 x 70 x 60 mm) Weight AM3x 2.0 lbs (0.91kg) AMJRx 1.5 lbs (0.68kg) 1 year Warranty
NETWORK & WIRELESS
TX / + RS-485 Port TX / POWER GND GND A/UI 1 A/UI 2 A/UI 3 A/UI 4 GND Discrete Outputs DO 1 DO 2
GND A/UI 5 A/UI 6 A/UI 7 A/UI 8 GND GND A/UI 9 A/UI 10 A/UI 11 A/UI 12 GND Analog / Universal Inputs
AMJRx Wiring Terminals
Power Input Analog / Universal Inputs
MODEL AM3-IP-BN AM3-IP-MB AMJR-14-BN AMJR-14-IP DESCRIPTION BACnet IP Client & Server Modbus TCP Client & Server and SNMP Agent BACnet IP Client/Server, Modbus RTU Master Modbus RTU Master & TCP Client/Server, SNMP Agent March 2014
742
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Easy to use slave I/O and programmable I/O Models for BACnet MS/TP Models for Modbus RTU
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BACNET - MODBUS NETWORK I/O ADDME SERIES
Control Solutions' AddMe Series I/O devices are ideal for expansion of virtually any distributed building automation control system. These devices can be used as slave I/O or programmable controllers. The AddMe series is Control Solutions' original line of general purpose programmable I/O devices that have a long history as work horses in the industry.
AM3-Sx
AMJR-14x
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage AMJRx 10-30 VDC or 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz AM3x 18-30 VDC or 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz Supply Current AMJRx 0.15A @ 24VDC AM3x 0.3A @ 24VDC Communication Ports RS-485 Port Baud Rate BACnet supports 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800 Modbus supports 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 Analog Input AMJRx 12 universal AM3x 18 (16 universal + 2 analog) Analog Output AM3x 4, 4-20 mA (0-20 mA), 8-bit resolution Discrete Outputs AMJRx 2, open drain FET,1A @ 30 VDC AM3x 8, form A relay, 5A @120VAC Supported Protocols AMJR-14-SB/AM3-SB BACnet MS/TP Slave AMJR-14-SM/AM3-SM Modbus RTU Slave Signal LEDs AM3x 8, power and consumption Resolution AMJRx 10-bit AM3x up to 16-bit Operating Temperature AMJRx -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) AM3x -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing Mounting DIN rail Dimensions AM3x 3.94"H x 6.1"W x 2.36"D (100 x 155 x 60mm) AMJRx 3.94"H x 2.76"W x 2.36"D (100x 70 x 60mm) Weight AMJRx 1.5 lbs (0.68kg) AM3x 2 lbs (0.91kg) Warranty 1 year
AM3x Wiring Terminals
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
TX / + RS-485 Port TX / POWER GND GND A/UI 1 A/UI 2 A/UI 3 A/UI 4 GND Discrete Outputs DO 1 DO 2
GND A/UI 5 A/UI 6 A/UI 7 A/UI 8 GND GND A/UI 9 A/UI 10 A/UI 11 A/UI 12 GND Analog / Universal Inputs
AMJRx Wiring Terminals
Power Input Analog / Universal Inputs
MODEL AMJR-14-SB AM3-SB AM3-SM AMJR-14-SM DESCRIPTION BACnet MS/TP Slave, 14 I/O BACnet MS/TP Slave, 32 I/O Modbus RTU Slave, 32 I/O Modbus RTU Slave, 14 I/O
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
743
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BACNET MS/TP PROGRAMMABLE I/O VALUPOINT VP4-23 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Control Solutions ValuPoint Model VP4-2330 Programmable I/O for BACnet MS/TP is a BACnet Application Specic Controller (B-ASC) that includes user programmable control, 14 analog/ universal inputs, 3 analog outputs, and 6 relay outputs. VP42330 also includes a BACnet client for interface with other MS/ TP devices. It includes an enhanced processor and expanded memory capacity along with a robust feature set.
NEW!
VP4-23 Series
FEATURES
14 Analog/Universal Inputs 3 Analog and 6 Discrete Outputs Implements B-ASC BACnet Standard Prole Freely programmable - i.CanDrawIt graphical programming COV Subscription support BACnet client for interface to other slave devices Congurable object allocation, up to 200 objects
WIRING
Wiring Terminals
13
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Communication Ports Baud Rate Analog Input Analog Output Discrete Outputs 18-30 VDC or 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 0.3A @ 24 VDC RS-485 BACnet MS/TP at 9600 to 76800 baud 14 Universal Inputs 0-10 VDC, thermistor, discrete, dry contact, pulse 0.1% reference, up to 16-bit resolution Continuously self-calibrating sigmadelta converter Non-volatile totalizing count inputs (10Hz on all channels, to 1kHz on 2 channels) 10-bit fast scan mode 3 Output 4-20mA (0-20mA), 8-bit resolution, 500 ohm load max. 6 Outputs Form A relay 2A @ 120 VAC or 2A @ 30 VDC Protocol VP4-2330 Processor Data Logging Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Mounting Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty BACnet MS/TP ARM 32-bit 64K Flash for User Program Freely programmable i.CanDrawIt graphical programming Yes -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) 5-95% RH non-condensing DIN rail 3.94" H x 4.13" W x 2.36"D (100 x 105 x 60mm) 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg) FCC, CE, UL 916 Listed 1 year
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL VP4-2330 DESCRIPTION BACnet MS/TP, 14 universal / analog inputs, 9 outputs
744
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

NETWORK & WIRELESS

BACNET REMOTE I/O MODULES BAS-3000BC SERIES
The BAS-3000BC series are BACNet MS/TP remote IO modules with RS-485 interfaces that can be expanded as remote IO modules for 3rd party BACNet MS/TP DDC controllers. BAS-3000BC series provides IO models with predened BACNet objects and services listed as PICS to ensure seamless communication with each other. Advantech's domain focused conguration tool is a BACnet utility specially designed for building automation systems, and is a powerful graphical conguration tool. After simple training, general engineering technicians will be able to easily congure their Advantech BACnet 3000BC IO modules.
24 VDC or 24 VAC input 3000 VDC isolation protection (DO) BACNet MS/TP Server Supports PWM output (BAS-3024BC and BAS-3050BC)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 24 VDC/24 VAC Supply Watts BAS-3018BC-AE 3 W @ 24 VDC BAS-3024BC-AE 4 W @ 24 VDC BAS-3050BC/3051BC 3 W @ 24 VDC Communication Serial RS-485 Protocol BACnet MS/TP Baud Rate 1200-78K Universal Input supports 0 - 10V, 0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA, RTD, Thermistor (3K, 10K), and digital input (dry contact) Analog Output supports 0 - 10V, 0 - 20 mA, and 4 20 mA Digital Output 1A per channel, 10-35 VDC PWM Output PWM period: 2 ms-3600 sec; Pulse Width: 0.2 ms minimum Accuracy 0.1% of FSR (Voltage, Current) Operating Temperature 14 - 140F (-10 - 60C) 20 - 95% RH non-condensing Operating Humidity Storage Temperature -4 - 176F (-20 - 80C) Storage Humidity 0 - 95% RH non-condensing Enclosure ABS + PC Wiring Terminations 2 x plug-in terminal block (#16 - 24 AWG) Mounting DIN/panel Dimensions 4.7"H x 4.7"W x 1.7"D (120 x 120 x 44 mm) Weight 0.57 lbs (0.26 kg) Approvals CE, RoHS Warranty 2 years
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
745
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS

WIRING
746
LOAD
NETWORK & WIRELESS
888-397-5353 USA
BAS-3050
DC +
kele.com
BAS-3051
BAS-3050
BAS-3051 VS+ VSFG VS+ VSFG
DI0 COM DI1 COM DI2 COM DI3 COM DI4 COM DI5 COM DI6 COM DI7 COM DI0 COM DI1 COM DI2 COM DI3 COM DI4 COM DI5 COM DI6 COM DI7 COM DATA+ DATAGND DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 VCC VCC GND GND
DATA+ DATAGND DI8 COM DI9 COM DI10 COM DI11 COM DI12 COM DI13 COM DI14 COM DI15 COM
NEW!
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
RTD RTD
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DI
0~20MA
0~10V DC
*:For single ended AI, UIx- need extra wire connected with AGND
BAS-3018
DI
0~20MA
0~10V DC
0~10V
0~20MA
+
LOAD LOAD
VS+ VSFG
*:For single ended AI, UIx- need extra wire connected with AGND
DATA+ DATAGND UI0+ UI0UI1+ UI1UI2+ UI2UI3+ UI3UI4+ AGND UI5+ AGND UI6+ AGND UI7+ AGND
BAS-3018
13
DATA+ DATAGND UI0+ UI0UI1+ UI1UI2+ UI2UI3+ UI3AO0+ AGND AO1+ AGND AO2+ AGND A03+ AGND
NETWORK & WIRELESS
BAS-3024
DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3 VCC VCC COM COM VS+ VSFG
LOAD
MODEL BAS-3018BC-AE BAS-3024BC-AE BAS-3050BC-AE BAS-3051BC-AE DESCRIPTION 8-ch UI BACNet MS/TP Remote I/O Module 4-ch UI,4-ch DO, 4-ch AO BACNet MS/TP Remote I/O module 8-ch DI,8-ch DO BACNet MS/TP Remote I/O Module 16-ch DI BACNet MS/TP Remote I/O Module
March 2014
DC
BAS-3024
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
747
NETWORK & WIRELESS

REMOTE WEB-BASED MONITORING SYSTEM FGD WEB SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Sensaphone Web600 provides exible web-based remote monitoring. It keeps track of critical temperatures and other conditions and users can be notied immediately when current values exceed the normal range. Completely stand-alone and easy to use, the Web600 can be used for monitoring cold food storage, medical cold storage, and other temperature-sensitive areas like computer rooms and data centers. In addition to temperature monitoring, the Web600 can also read values from humidity sensors, air quality sensors, water leak detection sensors and much more.
NEW!
FGD-W600 Data Logging 32,000 samples (all samples include data, date and time) 1 second to 1 month sampling rate. User programmable channel selection (Zones 1-6, battery, and input power) Additional Specications Optional Battery Backup Module (FGD-W610) Provides 2 hours of backup (rechargable) Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0-90% RH, (non-condensing) Dimensions 3.25"H x 5.5"W x 1.25"D (8.3 x 14 x 3.2 cm) Weight FGD-W600 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) FGD-W610 1 lb (0.45 kg) Approvals FCC Part 15-B compliant RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
FEATURES
Six sensor inputs to monitor environmental conditions and/or alarm contacts 10/100BASE-T Ethernet port Optional battery backup for uninterrupted performance Compact design allows wall-mount or tabletop installation Embedded web page to program and manage your Web600 system Notication via e-mail, SMS (text message) or SNMP trap Connectable to up to six external sensors Includes Software
13
SPECIFICATIONS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
120 VAC/5 VDC 50/60Hz (plug-in transformer with 6 cord included) Supply Current 6W E-mail SMTP Communication Text Messages Web Page Supported formats HTTP, PDA, WAP, and XML SNMP MIB with traps, GET, GETNEXT, and SET MODBUS/TCP Slave Conformance Class 0 & 1 Communication Ports Ethernet 10/100Base-T Inputs 6 Universal Inputs Normally closed/normally open dry contact 10K thermistor, Type 3 4-20 mA current loop (Requires 24 VDC power) (12 bit resolution) Input Impedance 250 Supported Protocols Modbus TCP Alarm status LED Signal LEDs Power status LED Ethernet link and activity LEDs
Supply Voltage
748
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Battery Backup
NETWORK & WIRELESS

REMOTE WEB-BASED MONITORING SYSTEM FGD WEB SERIES
5V DC Power Battery Backup Ethernet Power Alarm Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone Zone +1- +2- +3- +4- +5- +6-
(Sold Separately)
NO or NC Dry Contacts
24VDC
10 K type 3 Thermistor
+ 4-20 mA Transducer -
BATTERY BACKUP (NOT INCLUDED)
With the addition of the optional battery backup module, the Web600 can monitor for power failures and stay operational for two full hours while the power is out. Dimensions Weight 3.25"H x 5.5"W x 1.25"D (8.3 x 14 x 3.2 cm) 1 lb (0.45 kg)
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
FGD-W610
MODEL FGD-W600 FGD-W610 KHR3 KTR3 DESCRIPTION Sensaphone Web600 Backup battery for Web600 ACCESSORIES PAGE 3% Wall mount humidity transmitter, 4-20 mA output 529 10k Type 3 wall sensor 1170
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
749
NETWORK & WIRELESS

VISONIC AUTO DIALER DL-125C
DESCRIPTION The DL-125C automatic programmable speech dialer is designed for twin contact closure input. It will automatically dial out and alert up to four numbers per alarm. The 20-second voice message is digitally stored in non-volatile memory and may be changed at any time. The unit is powered by 12 VDC and may be connected to any phone line with pulse or tone dialing. The DL-125C is ideal for panel mounting and alarming any contact input such as temperature high or low limits, water leak detection, efrigerant leak, CO2 limit alarm, control failure, and a host of other purposes. OPERATION/APPLICATION Upon alarm initiation, the DL-125C pauses for a programmable time (1-255 sec), then hangs up any device on the same phone line (line seizure) and dials out to the rst of four possible phone numbers. If someone answers, the 20-second message is delivered. The DL-125C will attempt to dial each phone number between 1 and 15 times (decided at set-up) before abandoning any further attempts. Once a call is answered and the 20-second message is delivered, the unit waits three seconds for an acknowledgment (touch tone digit 1). The recipient can cancel further call-outs, or the device will continue to call the remainder of the phone numbers. If acknowledged, a "listen in" feature is enabled so the called party can audibly monitor the site for 10 seconds (this can be programmed for a longer time). After the call cycle is complete, the DL-125C moves on to the next phone number or stops (as programmed) after rst acknowledgment.
NEW!
DL-125-C FEATURES
For a secure way of life
13
Normally-open or normally-closed dual contact input Screw terminal strip connection 20 seconds of digitally stored voice Site monitor microphone Line seizure capability Compact design Keypad interface Phone line failure output
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Connection Phone Impedance Alarm Input (AL) AL 1 AL 2 Alarm Out (LF) Dial Alert Microphone Controls Memory No. of Calls Numbers / dial-out Messages Segment 1 11-28 VDC 20 mA standby, 105 mA maximum Terminal strip Tone (DTMF) or pulse 600 2 alarm inputs Congurable NO or NC Congurable NO or NC Phone line fail, 30 Volt triac LED indication during use Built-in 12-key number pad 1 program and 1 stop button 2 alarm buttons (AL-1, AL-2) EEPROM, non-volatile 4 calls per alarm maximum or 2 pager calls maximum 20 numbers maximum 2, each using 2 segments Message 1, segment 1 & 2 Message 2, segment 1 & 3 14.5 seconds, activated for both alarms Segment 2 2.5 seconds, identies alarm AL-1 Segment 3 2.5 seconds, identies alarm AL-1 Message Length Overall 20 seconds for all segments Dialing Attempts Adjustable, 1-15 Message Repeats Adjustable, 1-255 Time Between Repeats 3 seconds Dialer trigger delay Adjustable, 1-255 seconds Listen-in Function Adjustable (enable/disable) Listen-in Duration Adjustable, 1-255 seconds Acknowledge First call or all calls (enable/disable) Enclosure NEMA 1 Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Dimensions 4.25"H x 6.0"W x 1.4"D (10.5 x 15.0 x 3.5 cm) Weight 0.5 lb (0.24 kg) Approvals CE Warranty 1 year
NETWORK & WIRELESS
750
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Earth No alarm internal connection (opens on alarm)
Red
NETWORK & WIRELESS

VISONIC AUTO DIALER DL-125C
Phone Line
Hand Set
12/24 VDC Z1 Z2
L F
24 to 30 VAC
Grn Red
To wall jack To phone
11-28 VDC
Telephone line failure alert Alarm-2 Alarm-1
DL-125C
PROGRAM MEMORY LOCATION CHART

Memory Location 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17-19 20 21 22 23 24 Description (code option) 1st phone number for Z1, (Alarm 1) 2nd phone number for Z1, (Alarm 1) 3rd phone number for Z1, (Alarm 1) 4th phone number for Z1, (Alarm 1) 1st phone number for Z2, (Alarm 2) 2nd phone number for Z2, (Alarm 2) 3rd phone number for Z2, (Alarm 2) 4th phone number for Z2, (Alarm 2) Not used or accessible 0 = enable, 1 = disable listen-in Dialing method, 0 = DTMF, 1= Pulse Alarm Z1 dialing attempts Alarm Z2 dialing attempts Alarm delay before callout, (seconds) Order of segment messages 0 = Alarm segment rst 1 = Location segment rst LF output logic 0 = NC, 1 = NO Not used or accessible Recorded message repeats Listen-in duration (seconds) Z1 input denition, 0 = NO, 1 = NC Z2 input denition, 0 = NO, 1 = NC Acknowledgement reset Entry Limits 20 digits 20 digits 20 digits 20 digits 20 digits 20 digits 20 digits 20 digits N/A 0 or 1 0 or 1 1 - 15 1 - 15 1 - 255 0 or 1 0 or 1 N/A 1 - 255 1 - 255 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 Program Format [PR] [1] [#] [NUM] [#] [PR] [2] [#] [NUM] [#] [PR] [3] [#] [NUM] [#] [PR] [4] [#] [NUM] [#] [PR] [1] [#] [NUM] [#] [PR] [2] [#] [NUM] [#] [PR] [3] [#] [NUM] [#] [PR] [4] [#] [NUM] [#] N/A [PR] [10] [#] [CODE] [#] [PR] [11] [#] [CODE] [#] [PR] [12] [#] [NUM] [#] [PR] [13] [#] [NUM] [#] [PR] [14] [#] [SEC] [#] [PR] [15] [#] [CODE] [#] [PR] [16] [#] [NUM] [#] N/A [PR] [20] [#] [NUM] [#] [PR] [21] [#] [SEC] [#] [PR] [22] [#] [CODE] [#] [PR] [23] [#] [CODE] [#] [PR] [24] [#] [CODE] [#] Factory Default NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE N/A 1 0 4 4 3
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
1 1 N/A 4 60 0 0 1
Backup = 1, All numbers are called regardless of acknowledgement. Non-backup = 0, after the rst acknowledgement no other calls are made. CAUTION: Additional comments and/or requirements This device is not a life safety device and should not be used for life safety applications.
MODEL DL-125C DESCRIPTION Auto dialer for remote alarm voice indication
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
751
NETWORK & WIRELESS

KELE CONSTANT VOLUME ZONING SYSTEM KTEC ZONING SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION The technologically advanced KTEC Zoning Control System provides efcient space temperature control for constant volume zoning systems in multi-zone heating and cooling applications. This cost-effective zoning control system can operate as a stand-alone system, or it can be mapped into a supervisory controller via a BACnet - Master-Slave/ Token-Passing (MS/TP) Bus to enable remote monitoring and programmability within a Building Automation System (BAS). FEATURES Fully scalable zoning control system meets the requirements of small and large zoning control systems BACnet MS/TP communication provides compatibility with a proven communication network True stand-alone zoning control system offers additional application exibility Backlit Display offers real-time control status of the environment in easy-to-read, English plain text messages with constant backlight that brightens during user interaction Simplied setpoint adjustment enables the user to change the setpoint by simply pressing the UP/DOWN arrow keys Congurable binary inputs provide additional inputs for advanced functions such as remote night setback, service or lter alarms, motion detector, and window status Over 20 congurable parameters enable the zoning control system to adapt to applications with varying requirements, allowing installer parameter access without opening the controller cover
NEW!
KTEC2664Z Rooftop Controller KTEC2647Z Zone Controller
CONTROL LAYOUT
Room Temp
Room Temp
70.0F
FAN HEAT
70.0F
HEAT
COOL
COOL
YES SCROLL
NO
MENU
OVERRIDE
13
Five keys on the zone controller make operation easy and intuitive Backlit, plain text LCD is easy to read in any condition LEDs indicate system activity
Three keys on the zone controller make operation easy and intuitive Backlit, plain text LCD is easy to read in any condition LEDs indicate system activity
KTEC2664Z Rooftop Controller
KTEC2647Z Zone Controller
See installation instructions for wiring diagrams
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Analog Input KTEC2647Z KTEC2664Z Analog Output Digital Inputs KTEC2647Z KTEC2664Z Auxiliary Contacts Static Pressure Accuracy Sensor Type 19 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 2 VA @ 24 VAC Resistive inputs (RS and UI3) for 10K Type II thermistor Resistive inputs (RS, OS, and DS) for 10K Type II thermistor 0 to 10 VDC into 2k resistance load (minimum) Dry contacts across terminal scom to terminals BI1 and BI2 Dry contact across terminal scom to terminal BI1 Triac output 19 to 30 VAC, 15 mA to 1 A continuous current, 3A peak in-rush current 0 to 5 VDC for full static pressure range selected 0.9F (0.5C) at 70F (21C) 10k ohm NTC thermistor (Local) Heating 40 to 90F (4.5 to 32C) Cooling 54 to 100F (12 to 37.5C) Deadband 2F (1C) Number of Zones 31 zones maximum per 1 rooftop controller Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Display -40 to 122F (-40 to 50C) in 0.5 increments Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 4.9"H x 3.4"W x 1.1"D (12.5 x 8.6 x 2.9 cm) 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) Weight Approvals United States UL Listed, CCN XAPX, Under UL 873, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment FCC Compliant to CFR 47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A, RoHS Canada UL Listed, CCN XAPX7, Under CAN/ CSA C22.2 No. 24 RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 3 years Setpoint Range
752
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION - KTEC2664Z
Terminal Use 1 Cool2 2 Cool1 3 - Fan 4 - 24 V ~ Hot 5 - 0 V ~ Com Terminal Identification Y2 Y1 G RC C
Terminal Use
NETWORK & WIRELESS

Description Output for RTU cooling stage number 2. Output for RTU cooling stage number 1. Output for the fan. Power supply of thermostat, hot side (Delivered from the RTU ). Power supply of thermostat, common side. Also used as reference for the analog BPD output when used (Delivered from the RTU ).
Description
6 Heat
1 Cool2 2 Cool1 3 - FanLeg Switch 4 - 24 V ~ Hot 5 - 0 V ~ Com
RH W1 W2
Terminal Identification Y2 Y1 G RC C
7 Heat1 8 Heat2 9 By-pass damper 10 Aux output 7 Heat1

8 Heat2
24 VAC for switched leg stage for the heating Output RTU cooling number 2. stages. for RTU stages cooling stage number Output If heating are part or 1. RTU, install a jumper across RC & RH. for the fan. Output If heating stages are part of a separate equipment with a different Power supply of thermostat, hot side (Delivered from the RTU ). power supply, feed external switched power leg through Power supply of thermostat, common side. Also used as reference for the RH without installing a jumper across RC & RH. analog BPD output when used (Delivered from the RTU ). Output for heating stage number 1. 24 VAC switched legstage for the heating stages. Output for heating number 2.
If heating stages are part or RTU, install a jumper across RC & RH. If heating stages are part of a separate equipment with a different Local power analog 0 - 10 VDC by-pass damper output. supply, feed external switched power leg through RH without installing a jumper RC & RH. Auxiliary output usedacross to disable economizer damper minimum Output lighting for heating stage number 1. control during unoccupied periods. Output for heating stage number 2.
6 Heat Switch Leg
BPD
RH W1 W2 BPD AU
AU
position or
SP 11 Static pressure DI1 12 - DI1 9 By-pass damper 13 - RS

10 Aux output
14 - Scom 15 - OS 13 - RS 16 - DS
SP 11 Static pressure ScomDI1 12 - DI1
RS
BACnet Com + BACnet Com BACnet Network Connections Com BACnet Com Ref
BACnet Com BACnet Com Ref
Scom 14 - Scom BI2 15 - OS Network 16 - DS Connections UI 3 Com + Com Ref
BI2 RS UI 3
Local analog 0 5 VDC static pressure input. Configurable digital input. Seeoutput. parameter section for more information. Local analog 0extra - 10 VDC by-pass damper Auxiliary output used to disable economizer damper minimum position or will use the Return air temperature sensor input. If sensor fails, thermostat control lighting during unoccupied on-board thermistor sensor toperiods. control if the communication is lost. Local analog 0 5 VDC static pressure input. Reference input DI input. 1, RS, OS & DS. section for more information. Configurable extrafor digital See parameter Outside air temperature sensor input. Return air temperature sensor input. If sensor fails, thermostat will use the on-board thermistor sensor to control if the communication is lost. Discharge air temperature sensor input.
Reference input for DI 1, RS, OS & DS. Outside air temperature sensor input. Discharge air temperature sensor input.
Ref
BACnet communication bus + connection. BACnet communication bus connection. BACnet communication bus + connection. Communication bus reference terminal. BACnet communication bus connection. o DO NOT USE FOR OTHER THAN SERVICING ISSUES Communication bus reference terminal. o o DO WIRE SHIELD TO THAT POSITION DO NOT NOT USE FOR OTHER THAN SERVICING ISSUES
o DO NOT WIRE SHIELD TO THAT POSITION
13
WIRING - KTEC2664Z
NETWORK & WIRELESS
KTEC2664Z Thermostat Terminals

KTEC2664Z Thermostat Terminals
Y2 Y2 Y1 Y1 G G
BPD Aux SP
RC C C RC
RHRH W1 W1 W2
W2
BPD Aux SP
DI1 RS SCom OS DS
DI1 RS SCom OS DS
Jumper
Digital Input
Y2
Y1
Jumper RC C
RH
W1
W2
BPD
Aux
SP
DI1
RS
Digital Input Scom OS
DS
Y2
Y1
Cool Stage 2
RC
Fan
RH
W1 W2 Heat
Stage 1 Heat Stage 2
Cool Stage 2 Cool Stage 1
Cool Stage 1 Fan
Heat Stage 1
0-10 VDC By-Pass Damper Actuator
BPD
Auxiliary Output
Aux
0-5 VDC Static Pressure Transducer
SP
DI1
RS
Scom
Discharge Air Sensor
OS
DS
0-10 VDC Com 24V By-Pass Damper Actuator 24V Com
Auxiliary 24V Output
0-5 Com
Heat Stage 2
VDC Static Pressure Transducer

Return Air Com Sensor Outdoor Sensor
Discharge Air Sensor
24V
24 Vac Thermostat internal contacts System wiring Transfo.
Return Air Sensor

Dry contact
Outdoor Sensor
March 2014
24 Vac Thermostat internal contacts
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
Dry contact
753
NETWORK & WIRELESS

TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION - KTEC2647Z Terminal Use Terminal TerminalUse Use Terminal Terminal Terminal Identification Identification Identification 24 V~ Hot 4 - 24 V ~ Hot 24V~ V~Hot Hot 24 Hot 24 44 -24 VV ~~Hot 0 V~ Com 5 - 0 V ~ Com 0V~ V~Com Com Com 0 55 -00 VV ~~Com 6 - On/Off Rht On/OffRht Rht 66 -On/Off 7 On/Off Rht On/OffRht Rht 77 -On/Off 99 -Analog Rht Analog Rht 9 -Analog Rht 10 VAV Damper 10 VAVDamper Damper 10 VAV Not Used Not Used Not Used 12 BI1 12 BI1 12 -BI1 13 -RS 13 RS 13 - RS 14 -Scom 14 Scom 14 - Scom 15 -BI2 15 BI2 15 - BI2 16 -UI3 SS 16 UI3 SS 16 - UI3 SS BO 5 BO5 5 BO BO 5 BO5 5 BO AO AO2 2 AO 2 AO AO1 1 AO 1 Blank Blank Blank BI BI1 1 BI 1 RS RS RS Scom Scom Scom BI2 BI2 BI2 UI UI3 3 UI 3
Description Description Description
Power supply of thermostat, hot side. Power supply supply of Power of thermostat, thermostat, hot hot side. side. side. Also used as reference for Power supply of thermostat, common Power supply of thermostat, common for Power supply of thermostat, commonside. side.Also Alsoused usedas asreference reference for the analog outputs when used. the analog analog outputs outputs when the when used. used. Local isolated triac reheat output when used. Local isolated isolated triac Local triac reheat reheat output output when whenused. used. Local isolated triac reheat output when used. Local isolated isolated triac Local triac reheat reheat output output when whenused. used.
NEW!
24 V~ Hot 24 V~ V~ Com Hot 24 Com 24 V~ Com AO 2 AO 2 AO 2 AO 1 AO 1 AO 1
VAV VAV Damper Damper and andAnalog AnalogReheat ReheatWiring Wiring VAV Damper and Analog Reheat Wiring
Com Com 24 VAC 24 VAC Com 0-10 VDC 0-10 VDC 24 VAC 0-10 VDC Com Com 24 VAC 24 VAC Com 0-10 VDC 0-10 VDC 24 VAC
Local - 10 10 VDC VDC reheat reheat output output when when used. Local analog analog 0 0 Local analog 0- 10 VDC reheat output whenused. used. Local VAV analog 0 10 VDC output. Local VAV VAV analog 0 Local analog 0- 10 10 VDC VDC output. output. Blank unused terminal. Blank unused unused terminal. Blank terminal. Configurable extra digital input. input. See parameter parameter sectionfor for more Configurable extra digital Configurable extra digital input. See See parametersection section formore more information. information. information. Remote room sensor input when used. Input auto-detects a remote Remote room sensor input when used. Input auto-detects a remote Remote room sensor input when used. Input auto-detects a remote sensor and will automatically by-pass the internal sensor when used. sensor and will automatically by-pass the internal sensor when used. sensor andinput will automatically internal sensor when used. Reference for BI BI 1, 1, BI BI 2, 2,by-pass UI3 and andthe RS. Reference input for UI3 RS. Reference input for BI 1, BI 2, input UI3 and RS. Non-configurable extra digital for monitoring monitoring localfunctions functions over Non-configurable extra digital input for local over Non-configurable extra digital input for monitoring local functions over the the network. network. the network. Non-configurable extra analog analog input input for for monitoring monitoringlocal localdischarge discharge or Non-configurable extra or Non-configurable extra analog input for monitoring local discharge or supply over the network. network. supply temperatures temperatures over the supply temperatures over the network. BACnet bus + + connection. connection. BACnet communication bus BACnet communication bus bus + connection. connection. BACnet bus connection. BACnet communication BACnet communication bus connection. Communication reference terminal. terminal. Communication bus reference Communication busFOR reference terminal. o DO NOT USE OTHER THAN SERVICING SERVICINGISSUES ISSUES o OTHER THAN o DO NOT NOT WIRE USE FOR OTHER THANPOSITION SERVICING ISSUES o DO SHIELD TO THAT THAT POSITION o SHIELD TO o DO NOT WIRE SHIELD TO THAT POSITION
BACnet Network BACnet NetworkConnections Connections BACnet Network Connections Com BACnet Com Com+ + BACnet Com Com + BACnet Com Com BACnet Com ComBACnet Com Com BACnet Com Ref Ref Ref Ref Ref Ref
13
WIRING - KTEC2647Z
VAVDamper DamperWiring Wiring VAV VAV Damper Wiring
NETWORK & WIRELESS
24V~ V~Hot Hot 24 24 V~ Hot 24V~ V~Com Com 24 24 V~ Com
AO11 AO AO 1
VAVDamper Damper VAV VAV Damper Motor Motor Com Motor Com 24 VAC
24 VAC Com 0-10 VDC 0-10 VDC 24 VAC 0-10 VDC
0-10 VDC
Reheat ReheatValve Valveor orSCR SCR Reheat Valve or SCR VAV VAVDamper DamperMotor Motor VAV Damper Motor
APPLICATION - KTEC2647Z
S m tc ic S cc hh ee m aa ti Pressure dependent VAV cooling only only system system S c h e m a t i c Pressure dependent VAV cooling Pressure dependent VAV cooling only system Analog VAV Actuator W Wi ir ri in ng g Wiring S ee tt gg ss S ti tn in Settings Mandatory Mandatory RehtConf = 0 None Mandatory RehtConf = 0 None RehtConf = 0 None
Analog VAV Actuator Analog VAV Actuator
0 to 10 0VDC to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC
Room Temperature Control Room Temperature Control Minimum & Maximum Position Room Temperature Control Minimum & Maximum Position Adjusted at Thermostat Minimum at & Maximum Position Adjusted Thermostat Adjusted at Thermostat
UI3 UI3 0 V~ Com UI3 0 V~ Com 24 V~ Hot 0 V~ Com 24 V~ Hot 24 V~AO1 Hot AO1 AO1
754
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MS/TP Bus Rooftop Controller Zone Controller
NETWORK & WIRELESS

Rooftop Unit Bypass Damper Return Mixed Airflow Return Airflow Zone Damper
Supply
Bypass Airflow
Zone Damper
Zone Damper
Zone Controller
Zone Controller RS485 End-of-Line Terminator (MS-BSCEOL-0)
Typical Zoning Control System Installed on a Single MS/TP Bus This installation consists of multiple KTEC2647 Zone Controllers, each controlling a single zone damper; and a KTEC2664Z Rooftop Controller controlling a rooftop unit. Optionally, the MS/TP Bus can be wired to a supervisory controller to provide centralized monitoring and control of the system. Refer to the Installation Instructions document under "Related Documents" at www.Kele.com for complete wiring and setup details. * See installation instructions for wiring diagrams KTEC2664Z ROOFTOP CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION Parameters that must be congured locally at start of initial commissioning... RTC Mac RTC network address Default - 4 Address must be unique on the network Valid range - 4 to 127 RTC Baud Rate One controller per bus Default - Auto Sets the network baud rate, 38400 recommended Baud rates - 9600,19200, 38400, 76800, Auto KTEC2647Z ZONE CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION Parameters that must be congured locally at start of initial commissioning... ZONE Mac ZONE network address Default - 255 A ddress must be unique on the network Valid range - 1 to 127 RTC MAC N etwork address must be specied to RTC Default - 4 controller to which this zone Rooftop controller is tied Valid range - 1 to 127
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL KTEC2647Z-2 KTEC2664Z-2 M230-005PD-V5 MS-BACEOL-0 ST-D24 DESCRIPTION Zone Controller for Proportional Zone Damper, On/Off, or Proportional Reheat Control Rooftop Controller for Control of Up to Two Stages of Heating and Two Stages of Cooling in Rooftop ACCESSORIES PAGE Differential pressure transducer, 0-5" WC, 0-5 VDC 1041 EOL BACnet R485 terminator 10K Type 2 duct temperature themistor 1197
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
755
NETWORK & WIRELESS

FLEXIBLE BACNET THERMOSTAT FLEXSTAT
DESCRIPTION The FlexStat Series of intelligent thermostats can monitor temperature/humidity/motion-sensing, and are wallmounted. In addition the FlexStat comes with BACnet MS/TP communications standard. The FlexStat simplies networked zone control for common HVAC equipment. Example applications are packaged rooftop units, air handlers, fan coil units, and heat pumps. The on-board library of programs permits rapid conguration of a wide range of HVAC control applications via the FlexStats display and buttons. FEATURES User-friendly English-language menus on a 64 x 128 pixel, dot-matrix LCD display with 5 buttons for data selection and entry Built-in, factory-tested libraries of congurable application control sequences Schedules can easily be set by weekdays (Mon. Fri.), weekend (Sat. - Sun.), entire week (Mon. -Sun.), individual days, and/or holidays Six On/Off and independent heating and cooling set point periods are available per day Three levels of password-protected access (user/ operator/administrator)
NEW!
BACnet 120000 Series Integral temperature and optional humidity and/or motion sensors Multiple models available 72-hour power (capacitor) backup and a real time clock for network time synchronization or full stand alone operation
Temperature (with humidity) 0.9F (0.5C) Temperature (without humidity) 0.36F (0.2C) Range Humidity (optional) 0 to 100% RH Temperature (with humidity) 36 to 120F (2.2 to 48.8C) Temperature (without humidity) 48 to 96F (8.8 to 35.5C) Response Time Humidity (optional) < 4 seconds Operating Temperature 34 to 125F (1.1 to 51.6C) Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 4.1"H x 5.5"W x 1.1"D (10.6 x 14.1 x 1.1 cm) 0.48 lb (0.22 kg) Weight cULus Listed File #E145832, FCC Approvals Warranty 5 years
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 24VAC 50/60 Hz 13 VA Supply Current Display 64 x 128 pixel dot matrix LCD Analog Input 0-12 VDC (Active/Passive) 10K thermistor (type 2 or 3) Analog Output 0-12 VDC, 20 mA (maximum) 1 A maximum each or total of Digital Output 1.5 A per bank of relays Sensor Type Humidity (optional) CMOS Temperature (with humidity) CMOS Temperature (without humidity) 10K Type 2 Motion (optional) Passive infrared with 33 feet (10 meter) range Accuracy Humidity (optional) 2% RH (10 to 90% RH)
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MOTION / OCCUPANCY SENSOR (OPTIONAL) PATTERN

Top View
10 m 32.8 ft X
Side View
10 m 32.8 ft
Y 46.5
10 m 32.8 ft
55
10 m 32.8 ft
756
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
BAC-120063C
BAC-120163C
BAC-121063C
BAC-121163C
BAC-120036C
BAC-120136C
BAC-121036C
BAC-121136C
NEW!
APPLICATIONS
NETWORK & WIRELESS

13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
To order white instead of light almond, add W to the end of the model number (e.g., BAC-120036CW).
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
757
NETWORK & WIRELESS

WIRING
6/3 & 3/6 Wiring
Input Pull-Up Switches 10K W 0-12 V IN9 IN8 IN7 IN4 IN3 Pushed Left Pushed Right IN2
NEW!
EOL Switches OFF ON
NOTE: EOL = End Of Line of BACnet MS/TP network NOTE: Inputs configurable for Type 3 (default) or Type 2 thermistors in FlexStats menu
NOTE: IN1 and IN56 are reserved for internal sensors Inputs
(Wiring is dependent on application)
NOTE: IN1 and IN56 are reserved for internal sensors Inputs
(Wiring is dependent on application)
NOTE: SC = Switched (Relay) Common Outputs
NOTE: SC = Switched (Relay) Common Outputs
IN9 IN8
Analog 9 GND 79
IN9 IN8
Analog 9 GND 79
(Wiring Cutout in Backplate)
13
IN7 +B A IN4 IN3 GND
Analog 7 Relay 6 SC 46 Relay 5 Relay 4 Relay 3 SC 13 Relay 2 Relay 1
(Wiring Cutout in Backplate)
GND
Analog 8
GND IN7 +B A IN4 IN3 GND IN2
Analog 8 Analog 7 Analog 6 GND 46 Analog 5 Analog 4 Relay 3 SC 13 Relay 2 Relay 1
MS/TP Network Inputs
MS/TP Network Inputs
NETWORK & WIRELESS
IN2
24 VAC
Common//C Phase/ /R
24 VAC
Common//C Phase/ /R
MODEL BAC-120036C BAC-120063C BAC-120136C BAC-120163C BAC-121036C BAC-121063C BAC-121136C BAC-121163C DESCRIPTION 3 relays and 6 analog outputs almond 6 relays and 3 analog ouputs almond 3 relays and 6 analog outputs humidity almond 6 relays and 3 analog outputs humidity almond 3 relays and 6 analog outputs motion sensor almond 6 relays and 3 analog outputs motion sensor almond 3 relays and 6 analog outputs humidity motion sensor almond 6 relays and 3 analog outputs humidity motion sensor almond
758
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
NETWORK & WIRELESS

AIC WIRELESS ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER AIC900E
The AIC900E-K Series of wireless ethernet devices are readily available for any building automation, control or monitoring application. The devices are a reliable lowcost alternative to long runs of communication cable to previously hard to reach locations, due to a lack of existing communications architecture. The AIC900E-K Series wireless devices are shipped ready to install, with a true plugand-play set-up requiring no special programming or network management tools. 902-928 MHz frequency provides excellent non-line-ofsight performance to penetrate foliage, building walls, and oors Highest Quality of Service (QoS) availablesynchronous point-to-multipoint protocol enables extremely low data latency and jitter 128 bit encrypted payload protection provides secure data delivery Simple plug-and-play setup with minimal conguration required Flexible input power, 12-24 VAC/DC Up to 40 mile range
AIC900E-K
ANTENNA SELECTION CHARTS
WIRING
RD3DB RD5DB
Wireless Channel Display Link Quality Display LED Indication
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Ethernet Connection
Power 24 VAC/VDC
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Frequency Connections Protocol Tranmission Power Range Receiver Sensitivity 24 VAC/VDC (requires isolated power supply) 100 mA @ 24 VAC 902-928 MHz RPSMA female Ethernet +21 dBm (4 Watts EIRP when used with 15 dBi antenna) Up to 40 miles (64 km)- Requires 15 dBi antenna -97 dBm at 10e-4 BER (-112 dBm with 15 dBi antenna) Modulation DSSS (Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum) Channels 12 non-overlapping Operating Temperature -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C) Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 4.3"H x 1.75"W x 3.35"D (10.9 x 8.5 x 4.45 cm) Weight 0.65 lb (0.28 kg) Approvals FCC ID: R4N-AW900M IC:5303AAW900M RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
759
NETWORK & WIRELESS

AIC WIRELESS ETHERNET TRANSCEIVER AIC900E
CABLES
NEW!
LMR600-15 Length: 15 ft Must be used with CC1 LMR600-30 Length: 30 ft Must be used with CC1
CC1 (Custom Cable 1) Length: 1 ft Use when connecting to another listed cable
CC3 (Custom Cable 3) Length: 1 ft Used when connecting antenna directly to transceiver CC2 (Custom Cable 2) Length: 6 ft Must be used with CC1
13
MODEL AIC900E-K AIC900-E-51 DESCRIPTION Wireless Ethernet transceiver 900 MHz (Antenna not included) AIC900-E, CC3 cable, WPENCL100808 NEMA 4X enclosure, 3dB low prole antenna
NETWORK & WIRELESS
3DB BASE 3DB LOW PROFILE 6DB BASE AIC10.5P AIC11AW AIC12.5P AIC15AW CC1 CC2 CC3 COAX SURGE LMR600-15 LMR600-30 POLE CLAMP RD3DB RD5DB WPENCL100804
ACCESSORIES PAGE 3dB Base Station, Omni-Directional Antenna 765 3dB Low Profile Omni-Directional Antenna 765 6dB Base Station, Omni-Directional Antenna 765 10.5dBi Panel Antenna 765 9dB Yagi Antenna 765 12.5dBi Panel Antenna 765 13dB Yagi Antenna 765 Custom cable, RPSMA N-female bulkhead Custom cable, N-male to N-male, 6 (LMR195) Custom cable, N-male to N-male, 6 (LMR195) Coax surge suppressor, in-line LMR600 Cable, 15 with N-male connectors LMR600 Cable, 30 with N-male connectors Pole clamp assembly (for 3db and 6db base antenna) 3 dBi Rubber Duck Style Antenna 765 5 dBi Rubber Duck Style Antenna 765 10X8X4 NEMA 4X, Weatherproof enclosure with hinged clear lid
760
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
NETWORK & WIRELESS
AIC WIRELESS BACNET MSTP AND BACNET IP WIRELESS TRANSCEIVER WBT900, WBT900-IP
The WBT900-K and WBT900-IP-K transceivers allow you to install a close or long range, non line-of-sight, point-tomultipoint, wireless BACnet MSTP or BACnet IP network, at a fraction of the cost of installation labor, conduit and cable.
The WBT900-K and WBT900-IP-K transceivers are plug and play, requiring no special programming tools or network management software.
902-928 MHz frequency provides excellent non-line-ofsight performance to penetrate foliage, building walls, and oors Highest Quality of Service (QoS) available-synchronous point-to-multipoint protocol enables extremely low data latency and jitter 128 bit encrypted payload protection provides secure data delivery Simple plug-and-play setup with minimal conguration required Flexible input power, 12-24 VAC/DC Up to 50 mile range
WBT900-K
WBT900-IP-K
WIRING
USB Connection
RD3DB RD5DB
Wire Channel Display Link Quality Display
13
LED Indication
NETWORK & WIRELESS
RS485 Connection
Ethernet Connection
Power 24 VAC/VDC
Power 24 VAC/VDC
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Frequency Connections Protocol WBT900-K WBT900-IP-K Transmission Power Range 24 VAC/VDC (requires isolated power supply) 100 mA @ 24 VAC 902-928 MHz RPSMA female BACnet MS/TP BACnet IP +21 dBm (4 Watts EIRP when used with 15 dBi antenna) Up to 40 miles (64 km)- Requires 15 dBi antenna Receiver Sensitivity -97 dBm at 10e-4 BER (-112 dBm with 15 dBi antenna) Modulation DSSS (Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum) Channels 12 non-overlapping Operating Temperature -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C) Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 4.3"H x 1.75"W x 3.35"D (10.9 x 8.5 x 4.45 cm) 0.65 lb (0.28 kg) Weight Approvals FCC ID: R4N-AW900M IC:5303AAW900M RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
761
NETWORK & WIRELESS

CABLES
AIC WIRELESS BACNET MSTP AND BACNET IP WIRELESS TRANSCEIVER WBT900, WBT900-IP
NEW!
CC3 (Custom Cable 3) Length: 1 ft Used when connecting antenna directly to transceiver CC2 (Custom Cable 2) Length: 6 ft Must be used with CC1
13
MODEL WBT900-K WBT900-51 WBT900-IP-K WBT900-IP-51 3DB BASE 3DB LOW PROFILE 6DB BASE AIC10.5P AIC11AW AIC12.5P AIC15AW CC1 CC2 CC3 COAX SURGE LMR600-15 LMR600-30 POLE CLAMP RD3DB RD5DB WPENCL100804
DESCRIPTION Wireless BACnet MSTP Transceiver 900m MHz (Antenna not included) WBT900, CC 3 cable, WPENCL100808 NEMA 4X enclosure, 3DB LOW PROFILE antenna Wireless BACnet IP Transceiver 900 MHz (Antenna not included) WBT900-IP, CC 3 cable, WPENCL100808 NEMA 4X enclosure, 3DB LOW PROFILE antenna ACCESSORIES PAGE 3dB Base Station, Omni-Directional Antenna 765 3dB Low Profile Omni-Directional Antenna 765 6dB Base Station, Omni-Directional Antenna 765 10.5dBi Panel Antenna 765 9dB Yagi Antenna 765 12.5dBi Panel Antenna 765 13dB Yagi Antenna 765 Custom cable, RPSMA N-female bulkhead Custom cable, N-male to N-male, 6 (LMR195) Custom cable, N-male to N-male, 6 (LMR195) Coax surge suppressor, in-line LMR600 Cable, 15 with N-male connectors LMR600 Cable, 30 with N-male connectors Pole clamp assembly (for 3db and 6db base antenna) 3 dBi Rubber Duck Style Antenna 765 5 dBi Rubber Duck Style Antenna 765 10X8X4 NEMA 4X, Weatherproof enclosure with hinged clear lid
NETWORK & WIRELESS
762
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
NETWORK & WIRELESS

WIRELESS LONWORKS TRANSCEIVER WLT900
The WLT900-K Wireless LonWorks Transceiver provides a reliable and cost effective solution for networking buildings and other remote sites without long runs of Lon cable. LonWorks communication can be established for close range of 100 feet or up to 40 miles with a higher gain antenna. The wireless protocol features a dynamic addressing scheme that simplies node-to-node communication in point-to-point or point-to-multipoint applications. The WLT900-K Wireless LonWorks Transceiver offers true plug-and-play setup requiring no special programming or network management tools. A minimum of two transceivers is required for operation.
FEATURES
Peer-to-peer protocol Ultra-fast sync time Variable output 5 mW to 1000 mW No complex programming required Ranges from 100 feet to several miles
WLT900-K
WIRING
USB Connection
RD3DB RD5DB
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
TP/FT-10 Connection
Power 24 VAC/VDC
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Frequency Connections Protocol Transmission Power Range Receiver Sensitivity March 2014 24 VAC/VDC (requires isolated power supply) 100 mA @ 24 VAC 902-928 MHz RPSMA female Lonworks +21 dBm (4 Watts EIRP when used with 15 dBi antenna) Up to 40 miles (64 km)- Requires 15 dBi antenna -97 dBm at 10e-4 BER (-112 dBm with 15 dBi antenna) Modulation DSSS (Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum) Channels 12 non-overlapping Operating Temperature -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C) Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 4.3"H x 1.75"W x 3.35"D (10.9 x 8.5 x 4.45 cm) Weight 0.65 lb (0.28 kg) Approvals FCC ID: R4N-AW900M IC:5303AAW900M
RoHS Statement
Warranty
Yes
1 year
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
763
NETWORK & WIRELESS

AIC WIRELESS LONWORKS TRANSCEIVER WLT900
CABLES
NEW!
CC3 (Custom Cable 3) Length: 1 ft Used when connecting antenna directly to transceiver
13
CC2 (Custom Cable 2) Length: 6 ft Must be used with CC1
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL WLT900-K WLT900-51 3DB BASE 3DB LOW PROFILE 6DB BASE AIC10.5P AIC11AW AIC12.5P AIC15AW CC1 CC2 CC3 COAX SURGE LMR600-15 LMR600-30 POLE CLAMP RD3DB RD5DB WPENCL100804
DESCRIPTION Wireless LonWorks Transceiver 900 MHz (Antenna not included) WLT900-K, CC3 cable, WPENCL100808 NEMA 4X enclosure, 3dB low prole antenna ACCESSORIES PAGE 3dB Base Station, Omni-Directional Antenna 765 3dB Low Profile Omni-Directional Antenna 765 6dB Base Station, Omni-Directional Antenna 765 10.5dBi Panel Antenna 765 9dB Yagi Antenna 765 12.5dBi Panel Antenna 765 13dB Yagi Antenna 765 Custom cable, RPSMA N-female bulkhead Custom cable, N-male to N-male, 6 (LMR195) Custom cable, N-male to N-male, 6 (LMR195) Coax surge suppressor, in-line LMR600 Cable, 15 with N-male connectors LMR600 Cable, 30 with N-male connectors Pole clamp assembly (for 3db and 6db base antenna) 3 dBi Rubber Duck Style Antenna 765 5 dBi Rubber Duck Style Antenna 765 10X8X4 NEMA 4X, Weatherproof enclosure with hinged clear lid
764
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ANTENNAS: DIRECTIONAL ANTENNAS: OMNI - DIRECTIONAL
Dimensions: 8.75 x .5 in (22.2 x 1.27 cm)
NETWORK & WIRELESS

AIC WIRELESS ANTENNAS
Line-of-sight: 2 miles* Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 1200 ft with trees* *Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment Dimensions: 13.3 x 13.3 x 1.7 in (33.8 x 33.8 x 4.3 cm)
AIC10.5P
Line-of-sight: 20 miles* Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 1500 ft with trees* *Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment Dimensions: 21.06 x 6.8 x 1.5 in (53.5 x 17.5 x 4.3 cm) Line-of-sight: 5 miles* Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 1300 ft with trees* *Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment Dimensions: 15.4 x 15.4 x 1.7 in (39.1 x 39.1 x 4.3 cm) Line-of-sight: 40 miles* Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 1500 ft with trees* *Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment Dimensions: 39.5 x 12.6 x 6.8 in (100.5 x 32.0 x 17.5 cm)
AIC11AW
AIC12.5P
AIC15AW
Line-of-sight: .25 miles* Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 5 Walls/300 ft* *Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment
RD3DB
13
Line-of-sight: .5 miles* Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 6 Walls/500 ft* *Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment Dimensions: 17.0 in long x .5 in diameter (43.18 x 1.27 cm) Line-of-sight: .5 miles* Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 6 Walls/500 ft* *Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment Dimensions: 4 in long x 1 in diameter (10.16 x 2.54 cm) Line-of-sight: 5 miles* Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 1500 ft with trees* *Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment Dimensions: 23.12 in long x 1.31 in diameter (31.75 x 3.3 cm) Line-of-sight: 20 miles* Maximum Non Line-of-Sight: 2000 ft with trees* *Range may vary based on terrain and noise environment Dimensions: 61 in long x 1.31 in diameter (155 x 3.3 cm) March 2014
NETWORK & WIRELESS
RD5DB
3dB Low Prole
3dB Base
6db Base
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
765
NETWORK & WIRELESS

WIRELESS THERMOSTAT SYSTEM VICONICS WIRELESS
DESCRIPTION The Viconics Wireless thermostat system provides wireless networked control of Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) equipment on a Building Automation System (BAS). The Viconics Wireless thermostats integrate into a supervisory controller using BACnet(R) Internet Protocol (IP) or BACnet Master- Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) communications. VWG-40 Coordinators allow the supervisory controller to communicate with multiple Viconics wireless thermostats. The wireless mesh network uses ZigBee(R) technology to enable remote monitoring and programming and to enhance reliability by providing redundant transmission paths through other Viconics wireless thermostats, creating a resilient, self healing mesh network.
NEW!
VT7300A5031W Thermostat VWG-40 Coordinator VWG-RA-1000 APPLICATION Commercial structures with brick or solid concrete walls and/or ceilings that impede hard-wired thermostat applications Ofce buildings, retail stores, and other commercial real estate where tenant turnover is frequent Museums, historical buildings, atriums, and other sites where building aesthetics and historical preservation are important Buildings with marble, granite, glass, mirrored, wood veneer, or other decorative surfaces that present challenges to hard-wired applications Buildings with asbestos or other hazardous materials that must not be penetrated or disturbed Buildings with occupants sensitive to disruptions to business College dorms, hotels, and condos Fan Switching Relay Output D-Shell Connection RS-485 3-Pin Non-Isolated Port, BACnet MS/TP (VWG-40-MSTP-1000) (VT7300) 30 VAC, 1.0 A maximum, 3.0 A inrush (VT7300A, C, VT7600) 30 VAC, 1.0 A maximum, 15 mA minimum, 3.0 A in-rush (VT72xxF, VT73xxF) 0 to 10 VDC 30 VAC, 1.0 A Maximum, 3.0 A inrush Dry contacts
FEATURES Wireless communication Integral humidity sensing capability (dehumidication models) On/off, oating, or proportional 0 to 10 VDC control Three speeds of fan control (model-dependent) Integral wireless signal strength testing built into wireless thermostats and coordinators Backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Two congurable binary inputs Over 20 congurable parameters
13
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Coordinator 15 VDC 19 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Thermostats Supply Current 2 VA Supply Watts 15 W maximum (coordinator) Coordinator Operating System NiagaraAX Platform IBM PowerPC 405EP 250 MHz Processor 64 MB SDRAM & 64 MB Serial Flash Battery Backup shutdown begins within 10 seconds Real-time clock - 3 month backup maximum with battery Frequency 2.4Ghz Modulation DSSS (Direct-sequence spreadspectrum transmission) Communication (coordinator) Ethernet Two 10/100 Mbps Ports (RJ-45 Connection), BACnet IP (VWG-40-IP -1000) RS-232 9-Pin
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Analog Output Auxiliary Contacts
Digital Inputs Accuracy Temperature 0.9F (0.5C) at 70F (21C Models with Humidity 5% RH from 20 to 80% RH at 50 to 90F (10 to 32C) Sensor Type Thermostat (local) 10K NTC
766
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SPECIFICATIONS (CONTINUED)
Setpoint Range
2.44 (61.9) Diagnostic light emitting diodes 6.31 (160.4)
NETWORK & WIRELESS

Heating 40 to 90F (4.5 to 32C) in 0.5 increments Cooling 54 to 100F (12 to 38C) in 0.5 increments Transmission Power 10 mW Maximum Range Through walls 30 ft (10 m) Line-ofsight 100 ft (30 m) Open space Deadband 2F (1C) between heating and cooling Number of Zones 30 Maximum Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Display -40 to 122F (-40 to 50C) Operating Humidity 95% RH maximum (non-condensing) Weight Coordinator 1.10 lb (0.49 kg) Thermostat 0.75 lb (0.34 kg)
Approvals Coordinator
Thermostat
RoHS Statement Warranty
UL916, C-UL listed to Canadian Standards Association, (CSA) C22.2 No. 205-m1983 "Signal Equipment", CE, FCC part 15 Class A, C-Tick, United States UL Listed, CCN XAPX, Under UL 873, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment FCC Compliant to Part 15.247 Regulations for Low Power Unlicensed Transmitters, C-Tick Canada UL Listed, CCN XAPX7, Under CSA C22.2 No. 24, Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment Industry Canada, ICES-003 Yes 1 year
DIMENSIONS, CONTROLS, AND CONNECTIONS - in (cm)
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Status LED (beneath cover)

4.82 (122.4)
4.94 (12.5)
Room Temp 70.0F
FAN HEAT COOL
SEC
PRI
BEAT STATUS
Backlit plain-text LCD System activity LEDs

MODE
FAN
OVERRIDE
Intuitive operation keys
3.375 (8.6) 1.13 (2.9)
LAN2 (SEC) RJ-45 Ethernet port
LAN1 (PRI) RJ-45 Ethernet port
Coordinator
Wireless Thermostat
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
767
NETWORK & WIRELESS

Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controller System Overview A Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controller System consists of: A supervisory controller At least one VWG-40 Coordinator Multiple Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers
Supervisory controller
NEW!
Battery connector (Bottom board) Earth ground spade lug On board wireless adapter with antenna connection Antenna connector LAN2 (SEC) LAN1 (PRI)
Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers Depending on the model, the Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers can communicate sensed temperature, setpoint temperature, and other data with an associated supervisory controller and control a variety of fan coil and zoning equipment. The Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers are designed for indoor, intra-building applications only. The Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers can also serve as repeaters to extend the range of the BACnet data communications within the wireless mesh network.
wireless thermostat controller coordinator (BACnet MS/TP)
wireless thermostat controller
10 m (30 ft) through walls 30 m (100 ft) open space recommended signal range
Coaxial power connector for wall mounted power module
RJ-45 Ethernet ports LAN2 and LAN1 on top board. RS-485 Port COM2 on bottom board.
Figure 1 Component Descriptions Supervisory Controllers (building automation system) The Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controller System interfaces with Web-enabled, Ethernet-based, supervisory controllers that connect BAS networks to IP networks and the Web. Supervisory controllers provide scheduling, alarm and event management, trending, energy management, data exchange, dial-out capability, and password protection with a computer running Microsoft Internet Explorer Web browser. VWG-40 Coordinators A VWG-40 Coordinator provides a wireless interface between a supervisory controller and the Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers, allowing the exchange of BACnet IP (VWG-40IP-1000 model) or BACnet MS/TP (VWG-40-MSTP-1000 model) messages. The VWG-40 Coordinator initiates the formation of the wireless mesh network - one is required per wireless mesh network. Each VWG-40 Coordinator and the Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers assigned to it share a "Personal Area Network Identication" (PAN ID). A VWG-40 Coordinator requires a 15 VDC power source. An optional remote-mount antenna and cable is available to allow transmission when the coordinator is mounted inside a metal panel. A VWG-40 Coordinator enables the Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers to communicate with the supervisory controller, which schedules zone occupancy of the wireless system, collects trend data, overrides points, and monitors alarms. The Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controller System conrms and synchronizes data transmissions between the Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers and VWG-40 Coordinators. Together, these components provide wireless monitoring and temperature control of building Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) equipment. Figure 1 illustrates a simple Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controller System using a BACnet MS/TP Version of the VWG-40 Coordinator
VWG-40 Coordinator (Cover Removed)

Antenna connector Battery in bracket (On top of option cards, if present) BACnet IP ports (RJ-45 ethernet) LAN2 LAN1 (SEC) (PRI) Serial port not used
13
Battery connector
BACnet MS/TP port Connector for coaxial power (RS-485)
Earth ground spade lug
VWG-40 Coordinator Communications Port (Cover Removed)
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Component Quantities A Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controller System can support up to: 100 Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers per MS/TP trunk on the supervisory controller 254 Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers integrated through BACnet IP on a supervisory controller 30 Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers per VWG-40 Coordinator Each increment of 30 Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers requires one additional VWG-40 Coordinator. Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers can be added as repeaters, as required, to extend range and provide redundant pathways. Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers serving only as repeaters do not count towards the totals shown in Table 1; however, indiscriminate use of Viconics Wireless Thermostat Controllers as repeaters can lead to reduced performance.
768
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
TABLE 1
Number of Viconics wireless thermostats 1-30 1 2 3 4 31-60 61-90 91-100
NETWORK & WIRELESS

VWG-40 Coordinators Required
CAUTION: APPLICATIONS TO AVOID Locations or applications that prohibit cellular telephones or Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) systems are unsuitable for the wireless products. Examples include: Operating rooms or radiation therapy rooms Critical environments Department of defense applications requiring Diacap certication (for example, military bases and military hospitals) Do not use the products in applications that cannot tolerate intermittent interference, or where: Critical control features would impact life-safety or result in large monetary loss, including secondary (backup) lifesafety applications Data centers, production lines, or critical areas would be shut down Loss of critical control would result from loss of data from humidity or temperature sensor communications Operation of exhaust fans or Air Handling Units (AHUs) would impair a purge or pressurization mode Missing data would invalidate reporting required by the customer security points being monitored
Viconics Wireless Communication The Viconics Wireless Thermostat System uses DSSS RF wireless technology and operates on the 2.4 GHz ISM band. The system meets the IEEE 802.15.4 standard for low power, low dutycycle RF transmitting systems and is compatible with wireless mesh networks compliant with the ZigBee standard. The Viconics Thermostats have a transmission power of 10 mW. A successful Viconics Wireless Thermostat System requires that a minimum RF (wireless) signal strength be maintained between the VWG-40 Coordinators and Viconics Wireless Thermostats. VWG-40 Coordinator and Viconics Wireless Thermostat locations are important considerations in system design. Distance, metal objects, and other obstructions can reduce or completely block the RF signal transmission between a VWG-40 Coordinator and Viconics Wireless Thermostat.
MODEL VWG-40-IP-1000 VWG-40-MSTP-1000 VWG-APP-1000 VT7200C5031W VT7200F5031W VT7300A5031W VT7300F5031W VT7305A5031W VT7305F5031W VT7350C5031W VT7350F5031W VT7355C5031W VT7355F5031W VT7600A5031W VT7600B5031W VT7600H5031W VT7605B5031W VT7652H5031W DESCRIPTION Coordinator BACnet IP version Coordinator BACnet MS/TP version Wireless Niagara card 2 Outputs-on/off / oating - no fan 2 Outputs - 0 -10 VDC analog - no fan Commercial - 2 outputs-on/off Commercial - 2 outputs - 0-10 VDC Hotel - 2 outputs-on/off Hotel - 2 outputs - 0-10 VDC 6 Commercial - 2 outputs-on/off / oating / RH Commercial - 2 outputs - 0-10 VDC / RH Hotel - 2 outputs - on/off / oating / RH Hotel - 2 outputs - 0 - 10 VDC / RH Single stage, non-programmable Multi-stage, non-programmable Heat pump, non-programmable Multi-stage economizer Commercial - 2 outputs-on/off / oating
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
* Hotel Version: Center button changes display from celsius to farenheight Commercial Version: Center button is for occupancy override
ACCESSORIES VWGPSNAAC1201000 120 VAC to 15 VDC power supply VWG-PS-AC24-1000 24 VAC to 15 VDC power supply for VWG-40 VWG-WA-1000 Relacement antenna for VWG-40 Coordinator VWG-RA-1000 Remote antenna for VWG-40 Coordinator VWG-BB-1000 Replacement battery pack for VWG-40 Coordinator March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
769
NETWORK & WIRELESS

SONNET WIRELESS NETWORK RECEIVER RF-RXS WIRELESS NETWORK RECEIVER
DESCRIPTION
The RF-RXS Wireless Network Receivers allow quick and seamless integration with Tridiums range of JACE controllers, with all supported building automation system protocols, such as BACnet, LonTalk and ModBus. The integral web interface allows an engineer to not only gather measurement data from SonNet wireless devices but perform radio network management services such as auto-commissioning of SonNet wireless devices and setting device conguration parameters.
FEATURES
DIN rail mounted housing Serial connection to COM1 or COM2 of JACE
NEW!
RF-RXS
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Supply Radio Output 24 VAC/VDC, 50/60 Hz Frequency 2.4 GHz, 16 channels, direct-sequence spread spectrum Power Output + 10 dBm Aerial Characteristics Gain 3.0 dBi, VSWR < 2:1 Data Encryption AES 128 Serial Communications USB 2.0, serial 9-pin RS-232 Operating Temperature -14 to 122F (10 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0-90% RH non-condensing Dimensions 3.94"H x 2.76"W x 2.28"D (10.0 x 7.0 x 5.8 cm) Weight 0.84 lbs (0.38 kg) Warranty 3 years
MODEL RF-RXS RF-RXS-N DESCRIPTION Serial reciever for Niagara, supports CMS/USB Option card for Tridium Jace, with JAR le
13
SONNET WIRELESS RECEIVERS RF-RX SERIES

SonNet Wireless System Deployment A SonNet Wireless system is comprised of a receiver, battery powered sensors and permanently powered routers. Routers, though permanently powered, can also have sensing elements, accomplishing both router and sensors functions. Routers and sensors can either communicate directly with the receiver or via other routers. Routers are required to be permanently powered as they need to stay awake at all times to allow signals from child nodes to be instantly forwarded to their parent nodes. Battery powered sensors only wake for very short periods to send data.
NETWORK & WIRELESS
In the schematic to the left, routers R2 to R7 have 5 children each, all battery powered sensors. Their parent is the receiver. Router R1 has 8 children and R8 has 4 children, giving a total number of network devices of 51, including the receiver.
The receiver can support a maximum of 16 directly connected child devices, of which only 12 can be battery powered nodes, plus up to 4 routers. Routers can support a maximum of 16 directly connected child devices, of which only 8 can be battery powered nodes, plus up to 8 routers.
There can be a maximum depth of 8 layers of routers in a network and a maximum of 50 nodes per network with the RF-RX series of receivers.
Note that battery powered devices can only route their signals to the receiver directly or through routers, and not through other battery powered devices.
770
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

RF-RX20 Wiring Terminals
V19 G19 V17 G17 V15 G15
NETWORK & WIRELESS

SONNET WIRELESS RECEIVERS RF-RX SERIES
The RF-RX Series of SonNet Wireless Receivers collect data from all other devices on the wireless network, including measurements from sensors, link quality for all links formed in the network, battery levels for all battery powered devices, hours run for all devices and the current status of all devices. Note: Each receiver can support a maximum of 16 children, which can consist of a maximum of 12 battery powered nodes and 4 routers, or up to 16 routers if there are no battery powered nodes. A USB socket is provided for connection to a PC or laptop running the Sontay SonNet CMS software.
RF-RX
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Supply Radio Output Range Aerial Characteristics Data Encryption Power Output Analogue Outputs 24 VAC / VDC Frequency 2.4GHz, 16 channels, direct-sequence spread spectrum, Compliance IEEE 802.15.4-2006 328 ft (100 m) Gain 1.2dBi, VSWR 2:1 AES 128 +10dBm RF-RX20 20 x 0-10Vdc analogue outputs @10mA max. each, RF-RX40 40 x 0-10Vdc analogue outputs @10mA max. each 4.09"H x 8"W x 1.5" D,DIN-rail (104mm)H x (203mm)W x (38mm) D (excluding aerial) 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) 0 to 90% RH non-condensing 1.21 lb (0.55kg) 3 years
Proven 802.15.4 low power network Encrypted data transmission 20 or 40 output models Short-circuit protected analogue outputs Overvoltage protected analogue outputs to +36V Self-healing tree topology Lower installation costs Easy to install and commission
Housing Operating Conitions Weight Warranty
13
WIRING
USB Connector
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Reset Button
V13 G13 V11 G11 V07 G07 V05 G05 V03 G03 V04 G04 V09 G09 V01 G01 V02 G02
Supply
2
Alarm
V20 G20
V18 G18
V16 G16
V14 G14
V12 G12
V10 G10
ALM
ALM
24V
Terminal Assignments: G = Common 0V V = 0-10Vdc output Example: Output 2, G02 = 0V, V02 = 0-10Vdc
0V
MODEL RF-RX20 RF-RX40 DESCRIPTION Receiver with 20 x 0-10VDC outputs Receiver with 40 x 0-10VDC outputs RF-AERIAL-PM2 RF-AERIAL-PM5 ACCESSORIES Aerial extension with bulk head tting, 2M Aerial extension with bulk head tting, 5M
March 2014
V06 G06
V08 G08
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
771
NETWORK & WIRELESS

SONNET WIRELESS ROUTER-SENSORS RF-RR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RF-RR Series of SonNet Wireless Routers-Sensors are used in conjunction with the SonNet RF-RX20 or RF-RX40 receiver units, and RF-RS series of battery powered wireless sensors, and are used to route signals from battery powered nodes and other routers to the receiver module, where the signal strength of a direct path is not sufcient for reliable communications. Note: Each router can support a maximum of 16 children, which can consist of a maximum of 8 battery powered nodes and 8 routers, or up to 16 routers if there are no battery powered nodes. Consideration should be given to network planning for redundancy in case of router failure or damage. Routers automatically nd the best path back to the receiver, which may be directly to the receiver or via other parent routers.
NEW!
Plant Housing Router-Sensor Space Housing Router-Sensor
Dimensions Space Housing Plant Housing Approvals Weight RF-RR-R-6xx RF-RR-T-3xx RF-RR-T-5xx RF-RR-1000/CO2/RH Warranty 4.53"H x 3.35"W x 1.10"D (115 x 85 x 28 mm) 4.57"H x 4.17"W x 2.05"D (116 x 106 x 52 mm) CE, FCC 0.79 lb (0.36 kg) 0.46 lb (0.21 kg) 0.55 lb (0.25 kg) 0.26 lb (0.12 kg) 3 years
FEATURES
Proven 802.15.4 low power network Complete range of sensor types Allows networks to be expanded Self-healing tree topology Lower installation costs Easy to install and commission
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Transmission Power Baud Rate Transmit Frequency Beam Pattern Range Communication Channels Sensor Accuracy Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Wiring Terminations 24 VAC / VDC +10 dBm 250Kbps 2.4 GHz Isotropic 328 ft (100 m) SonNet 16 Termperature: 0.3C, RH 3%, CO2: 75 ppm -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C) 90% RH non-condensing 22 AWG
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL RF-RR-R-622 RF-RR-R-631 RF-RR-R-632 RF-RR-T-322 RF-RR-T-331 RF-RR-T-332 RF-RR-T-341 RF-RR-T-351 RF-RR-T-555-2 RF-RR-T-555-5 RF-RR-1000 RF-RR-1000-MS RF-RR-1000-SP RF-RR-1000-MS-SP RF-RR-RH-1000 RF-RR-RH-1000-MS RF-RR-RH-1000-SP RF-RR-RH-1000-MS-SP RF-RR-CO2-1000 RF-RR-CO2-RH-1000 DESCRIPTION Duct humidity and temperature sensor/router, 24 VAC Wall humidity and temperature sensor/router, 24 VAC Outside humidity and temperature sensor/router, 24 VAC Duct temperature sensor/router, 150 MM probe, 24 VAC Outside air temperature sensor/router, 24 VAC Outside air temperature sensor/router, with rad. Sheild, 24 VAC Immersion temperature sensor/router, 150 MM probe, 24 VAC Clamp-on temperature sensor/router, 24 VAC Flyind lead temperature sensor/router, 2M, 24 VAC Flying lead temperature sensor/router, 5M, 24 VAC Room temperature sensor/router, 24VAC Room temperature sensor/router, 24VAC, override button Room temperature sensor/router, 24VAC, set point Room temperature sensor/router, 24VAC, override button, set point Room humidity/temperature sensor/router, 24VAC Room humidity/temperature sensor/router, 24VAC, override button Room humidity/temperature sensor/router, 24VAC, set point Room humidity/temperature sensor/router, 24VAC, override button, set point Room CO2 sensor/router, 24VAC Room CO2/humidity/temperature sensor/router, 24VAC RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE
771 771
RF-RX20 RF-RX40
Receiver with 20 x 0-10VDC outputs Receiver with 40 x 0-10VDC outputs
772
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Up to 5 years battery life Encrypted data transmission Congurable parameters Self-healing tree topology Lower installation costs Easy to install and commission
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SONNET WIRELESS TEMPERATURE, HUMIDITY AND CO2 SENSORS RF-RS SERIES
The RF-RS Series of SonNet Wireless Temperature and Humidity, CO2 Senors are used in conjunction with the SonNet RF-RX20 or RF-RX40 receiver units, and if required (depending on installation topography), SonNet RF-RR series of routers. Data is transmitted back to the receiver at congurable time intervals, or on a congurable change in measured value. Each sensor retains these congurations if the battery becomes discharged or requires replacement. The sensors automatically nd the best path back to the receiver, which may be directly to the receiver or via parent routers.
Plant Housing Sensor
Space Housing Sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
Radio Output Range Aerial Characteristics Data Encryption Power Output Accuracy Battery Type Battery Life Plant Sensor Types Frequency 2.4GHz, 16 channels, directsequencespread spectrum, Compliance IEEE 802.15.4-2006 328 ft (100 m) Space Gain 1.2dBi, VSWR 1.5:1, Plant Gain 2.0dBi, VSWR 2:1 AES 128 +10 dBm Temperature 0.3C, RH 3% RH,CO2 75ppm Space 3.6V AA 2.4Ah Li-SOCl2, nonrechargeable, Plant 3.6V 2.1Ah 2/3 A Li-SOCl2, non-rechargeable >3 years (depending on conguration) Duct, outside air, outside air with solar radiation shield, immersion, strap-on and ying lead Operating Temperature Opertaing Humidity Dimensions Space Housing Plant Housing Weight RF-RS-R-6xx RF-RS-T-3xx RF-RS-T-5xx RF-RS-1000/CO2/RH Approval Warranty 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) 0-90% RH non-condensing 4.53"H x 3.35"W x 1.10"D (115 x 85 x 28 mm) 4.57"H x 4.17"W x 2.05"D (116 x 106 x 52 mm) 0.79 lb (0.36 kg) 0.46 lb (0.21 kg) 0.55 lb (0.25 kg) 0.26 lb (0.12 kg) CE, FCC 3 years
13
MODEL RF-RS-R-622 RF-RS-R-631 RF-RS-R-632 RF-RS-T-322 RF-RS-T-331 RF-RS-T-332 RF-RS-T-341 RF-RS-T-351 RF-RS-T-555-2 RF-RS-T-555-5 RF-RS-1000 RF-RS-1000-MS RF-RS-1000-SP RF-RS-1000-MS-SP RF-RS-RH-1000 RF-RS-RH-1000-SP RF-RS-RH-1000-MS RF-RS-RH-1000-MS-SP RF-RS-CO2-1000 RF-RS-CO2-RH-1000 DESCRIPTION Duct humidity and temperature sensor Wall humidity and temperature sensor Outside humidity temperature sensor Duct temperature sensor, 150MM probe Outside air temperature sensor Outside air temperature sensor with rad. Sheild Immersion temperature sensor, 150MM probe Clamp-on temperature sensor Flying lead temperature sensor, 2M Flying lead temperature sensor, 5M Room temperature sensor, end device, with battery Room temperature sensor, end device, with battery, override button Room temperature sensor, end device, with battery, set point Room temperature sensor, end device, with battery, override button and set point Room humidity temperature sensor, end device, with battery Room humidity temperature sensor, end device, with battery, set point Room humidity temperature sensor, end device, with battery, override button Room humidity temperature sensor, end device, with battery, override button and set point Room CO2 sensor, end device, with battery Room CO2/Humidity temperature sensor, end device, with battery
NETWORK & WIRELESS
RF-RP RF-RS
ACCESSORIES Battery for plant sensors Battery for space sensors
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
773
NETWORK & WIRELESS

FRONTIER 2.0 GATEWAY TRANSCEIVERS MOD9200
DESCRIPTION The Frontier 2.0 network transceiver utilizes reliable Spread Spectrum Mesh Network Radio technology. Together with other Frontier 2.0 sensors and controls, the system can be used to wirelessly transmit remote sensor readings, status/alarm indications, control signals and outputs. It is compatible with any control panels or Automation systems that utilize BACnet MSTP (MOD9200BNT) or LonWorks (MOD9200LON). Up to 50 separate physical wireless sensor transmitters and/ or wireless remote output (analog & digital) modules can be used with (1) MOD9200 transceiver. Up to 100 data points can be monitored and controlled. The maximum radio transmission distance is dependent on building type. The maximum open-air transmission distance is one mile. In a typical commercial building with steel I-beam construction, concrete oors with reinforcing rod, and metal stud walls, it can be expected that transmissions will penetrate vertically through oors and horizontally through 200 to 500 feet of walls, furniture and air. Generally a wireless system will cover about three oors one oor above and one oor below the transceiver location. In some buildings with favorable transmission characteristics the system may cover more oors.
NEW!
MOD9200 FEATURES Monitor up to 100 data points; control up to 50 wireless digital output points and 50 wireless analog output points Multiple MOD9200 Transceivers can be used for large systems MOD9200LON requires standard Lon network management tool such as LonMaker, Tridium software or equivalent MOD9200BNT requires standard BACnet networking tools Simple PC Windows based wireless sensor setup tool Low battery and lost sensor alarm indications per wireless sensor Supports LonWorks Protocol (MOD9200LON) Supports BACnet MSTP Protocol (MOD9200BNT) Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VAC 60 Hz 500 mA 902-928 MHz BACnet MS/TP, Modbus, LonWorks (model dependent) Transmission Power 11 dBm Range 1 mile (line-of-sight) Indoor 200 to 500 ft Receiver Sensitivity -110 dBm Operating Temperature 32 to 150F (0 to 66C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 8.8"H x 4.7"W x 2.25"D (22.35 x 11.93 x 5.58 cm) Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) Approvals FCC certied Warranty 1 year Supply Voltage Supply Current Frequency Protocol
DIMENSIONS
8.8" (22.35)
4.7" (11.93)
8.25"
774
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
3.5"
NEW!
INSTALLATION
Mount the gateway on the wall using four #8 screws. MODEL MOD9200BNT MOD9200D MOD9200LON-A MOD9200LON-B MOD9200LON-C MOD9200LON-D MOD9200LON-E MOD9200LON-F
NETWORK & WIRELESS

FRONTIER 2.0 GATEWAY TRANSCEIVERS MOD9200
CAUTION: Sensors, Repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas: - Inside metal enclosure or panel - Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks - In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced. CAUTION: Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected.
Refer to the conguration setup instruction manual for conguration of the MOD9200BNT registers and BACnet variables setup. A PC is required for the setup of the Transceiver. Refer to the conguration setup instruction manual for conguration of the MOD9200LON registers and SNVT variables setup. A PC is required for the setup of the Transceiver. Choose a location close to the Gateway network connection and away from the ground. 24 VAC Input - Connect 24VAC 60 Hz to the input terminals using 18-20 AWG wire. MSTP (RS485) - Use 20 or 22 gauge shielded twisted pair wire to connect the Transceiver (Terminals A+ & B-) to the MSTP network. FTT-10 (LonWorks) - Use 20 or 22 gauge shielded twisted pair wire to connect the Transceiver (Terminals A+ & B-) to the LON network. Must be Echelon approved cable.
DESCRIPTION BACnet MSTP network transceiver Modbus network transceiver Up to 30 wireless wall temp sensors with setpoint adjustments and/or push button override switches, up to 6 humidity sensors, up to 50 wireless digital outputs & up to 50 wireless analog out. Up to 50 wireless temperature only sensors (50 wall, duct or immersion types), up to 50 wireless digital outputs & up to 50 wireless analog out. Up to 50 wireless sensors (up to 50 temperature points and up to 50 humidity points), up to 50 wireless digital outputs & up to 50 wireless analog out. Up to 50 wireless devices (40 0-10VDC point types, 40 discrete inputs, 10 temperature,10 humidity point types), up to 50 wireless digital outputs & up to 50 wireless analog out. Up to 50 wireless sensors/transmitters (26 temperature points, 26 setpoint adjustments, 26 push button override switches, 12 CO2 PPM inputs, 6 humidity points, 4 digital status inputs), up to 50 wireless digital outputs & up to 50 wireless analog out. Up to 50 wireless sensors (up 40 temperature points, up to 20 humidity points & 40 discrete inputs), up to 50 wireless digital outputs & up to 50 wireless analog out.
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
775
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION The RM2402D and RM2432D paired with other Frontier 2.0 sensors and controls can be used to transmit remote sensor readings, status/alarm indications and control signals wirelessly. It is compatible with any control systems or DDC panels that accept 0-10 VDC, 0-5 VDC inputs and dry contact inputs. Up to eight (8) separate wireless sensor transmitters can be used with one RM2432D. Two digital transmitters can be used with one RM2402D. A Data-Link LED is used to conrm the receiver has received the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation. FEATURES Up to 4 analog outputs (0-10 VDC or 0-5 VDC eld selectable) and 4 digital outputs (relay contact) (RM2432D only) Up to 2 digital outputs (RM2402 only) Mesh Network Real time sensor status indications Individual low battery and lost sensor alarm indications (RM2432D only) Common alarm relay output for external indication Adjustable digital capture time (up to 4 hours) for application such as temporary occupancy Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS ANALOG AND DIGITAL RECEIVERS RM2402D AND RM2432D
NEW!
RM2432D RM2432D
DIMENSIONS
RM2432
in (cm) 8.8" (22.35)
13
4.7" (11.93)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Frequency Analog Output RM2432 Digital Output RM2402 24 VAC 60 HZ or 24 VDC 300 mA maximum 902-928 MHz 4x - 0-10 VDC or 0-5 VDC Minimum controller input resistance should be greater than 20K
NETWORK & WIRELESS
8.25"
2x - Pilot duty relay contact closure Contact rating - 1 A at 24VAC maximum 2x - Pilot duty relay contact closure Contact rating - 1 A at 24VAC maximum RM2432 4x - Pilot duty relay contact closure Contact rating - 1 A at 24VAC maximum 1x - Pilot duty relay contact closure Low Battery Contact rating - 1 A at 24VAC maximum Receiver Sensitivity -110 dBm Operating Temperature -40 to 160F (-40 to 71C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions (2432) 8.8"H x 4.7"W x 2.25"D (22.35 x 11.93 x 5.58 cm) Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) FCC certied Approvals 1 year Warranty
DIMENSIONS
RM2402
in (cm)
7.3" (18.54)
3.5"
4.7" (11.93)
3.5
6.75
776
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
INSTALLATION
- Sensor Out (Lost) = Off - Sensor In (Normal) = On - Battery Low (Alarm) = Blink MODEL RM2402D RM2402D-24DC RM2402DE RM2402DE-24DC RM2432D RM2432D-24DC RM2432DE RM2432DE-24DC CK2432-K
NETWORK & WIRELESS
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS ANALOG AND DIGITAL RECEIVERS RM2402D AND RM2432D
CAUTION: Sensors, Repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas: - Inside metal enclosure or panel - Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks - In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced. CAUTION: Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected. CAUTION: Observe polarity when connecting analog outputs to the controller inputs.
Conguration The RM2432 Receiver can be congured to accept inputs from up to 8 wireless sensors. Refer to the RM2432D Conguration Manual for instruction. Installation Mount the RM2402/RM2432 Receiver as close to the controller as possible using four #8 screws. Select 0-10VDC or 0-5VDC output by moving the J4 jumper (RM2432 only). Using the RM2402/RM2432 conguration information, connect the analog and digital outputs to the appropriate control input terminals on the controller using 20 AWG wire. The controller input connecting to the RM2432 should have a minimum analog input resistance of 20K . Note: Always connect the Low Battery (or Lost Sensor) relay contact output to the appropriate alarm input on the controller. (RM2432D) Connect 24 VAC 60 Hz or 24 VDC to the input terminals using 20 AWG wire. Check all connections before applying power to the unit. Wireless Sensor Status Indications The status of the sensors assigned to the outputs of the RM2402/RM2432D are displayed by 8 for (RM2432) 2 for (RM2402) LEDs on the top of the plug-in status module board as shown:
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
DESCRIPTION Output receiver with two (2) digital outputs (relay contacts) Same as RM2402D except 24 VDC power Same as RM2402D except in NEMA4 enclosure Same as RM2402DE except 24 VDC power Output receiver with four (4) analog output (0-10 VDC or 0-5 VDC selectable) and four (4) digital outputs (relay contacts) Same as RM2432D except 24 VDC power Same as RM2432D except in NEMA4 enclosure Same as RM2432DE except 24 VDC power Programming Set-Up Cable
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
777
NETWORK & WIRELESS

FRONTIER 2.0 SPREAD SPECTRUM REPEATER RR2552
DESCRIPTION The Frontier 2.0 RR2552 signal repeater utilizes reliable Spread Spectrum Radio technology. It can be easily installed in minutes to increase the transmission distance between wireless sensors and the receivers. Multiple repeaters can be used to extend the transmission distance to thousands of feet inside any commercial and industrial buildings.
NEW!
RR2552
FEATURES For wireless sensor and wireless control applications Receives wireless sensor/relay information and outputs a corresponding signal to any DDC controller/ panel Real time sensor status indications
SETTING THE REPEATER NETWORK ID The repeater must have the same Network ID as the receiver (1 to 64). The repeater Network ID is eld programmable using the Network ID Selector Switch to add numbers to the Base Network ID of "1." When all (6) switches are set to the top "OFF" the Network ID is set to "1." To set a different Network ID depress the appropriate DIP Switch. Each switch adds a number to the Base Network ID of 1. For example, to set the Network ID to "2", depress the "+1" switch to "ON" which adds "1" to the Base ID of "1." To set the Network ID to "3", set the "+1" switch to "OFF" and the "+2" switch to "ON" which adds "2" to the Base ID of "1" equaling "3." See table below for switch positions.
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VAC 60 Hz Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell DL123A) *Use only for testing Frequency 902-928 MHz Transmission Power 11 dBm Range 1 mile (line-of-sight) Indoor 200 to 500 ft -110 dBm Receiver Sensitivity Operating Temperature -30 to 160F (-34 to 71C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 7.3"H x 4.7"W x 2.25"D (18.5 x 11.9 x 5.7 cm) 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) Weight Approvals FCC certied 1 year Warranty Supply Voltage Battery
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
REPEATER NETWORK ID DIP SWITCH SETTING
DIMENSIONS
Figure 1
in (cm) 7.3" (18.5)
Network ID Selector
Data Link LED Active LED
3.5"
4.7" (11.9)
6.75"
Power LED Antenna
778
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
INSTALLATION
Mount the RR2552 to the wall using four #10 screws. MODEL RR2552B RR2552BE
NETWORK & WIRELESS

FRONTIER 2.0 SPREAD SPECTRUM REPEATER RR2552
CAUTION: Sensors, Repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas: - Inside metal enclosure or panel - Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks - In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced. CAUTION: Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected. CAUTION: For long term operation the repeater requires 24 VAC. The repeater will function for only 4 to 6 hours in "Test Mode" on a set of batteries. Observe polarity when connecting analog outputs to the controller inputs.
Determining Repeater Location: To select the proper repeater location, rst install and power the receiver or transceiver. The receiver will have a Network ID assigned to it during initial programming. The repeater must have the same Network ID as the receiver or transceiver. Set the Network ID on the repeater using the Network ID DIP Switch. The battery operated Test Mode is intended to be used only during the initial installation to determine the optimum location for a repeater in the system prior to wiring 24 VAC to the repeater. To operate the unit in Test Mode, move the jumper (J1 located near the battery terminals on the PWB) from 24 VAC to Battery. Install (2) batteries - Type 3.0V LiMNO2 1400 mAH (Duracell DL123A). The repeater is now functional and can be moved to different locations to determine optimal system performance. While the repeater is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data LED will blink rapidly. Once a connection has been established, the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received and transmitted successfully. The Active LED will blink once every second to indicate that the repeater is functional. A signal repeater can be installed 200 to 500 feet from a receiver as needed to improve transmission distance/reliability between sensors and the receiver. Performance of the device is generally better when the repeater is installed elevated from the ground as much as possible.
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Check to see that the Test Mode Jumper (J1) has been moved from " Battery" to "24 VAC." Connect 24 V 60 Hz to the power input terminals using 16-20 AWG wire.
DESCRIPTION Two way repeater Two way reapeater in NEMA4 enclosure
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
779
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION
The Frontier 2.0 RT2602 and RT2620 wireless remote digital input modules accept a variety of digital sensor/control inputs and transmits wirelessly to Frontier 2.0 receivers. They can be used for remote alarm/status indications and wireless on/ off control applications. Up to 4 dry contact inputs can be monitored. A Data-Link LED is used to conrm the receiver has received the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation.
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS DIGITAL INPUT MODULES RT2602, RT2620
NEW!
RT2620
DIMENSIONS
RT2620A
in (cm)
FEATURES
Battery powered or 24 VAC powered remote wireless sensor input modules Up to 4 digital inputs (relay contact) No calibration required Mesh Network - easy to install and relocate sensors without additional wireless installation tools Sensor Data-Link LED conrms connection with Frontier 2.0 receivers Long battery life (approximately 4 to 5 years) Low battery LED + remote low battery alarm notication Optional 24VAC power (RT2620A) Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
13
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Battery 24 VAC 60 Hz (A model only) Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell DL123A) 500mA 923.58 MHz
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Supply Current Frequency Digital Inputs RT2602 2 dry contacts RT2620 4 dry contacts Transmission Power 11 dBm Range 1 mile (line-of-sight) Indoor 200 to 500 ft Operating Temperature 15 to 125F (9 to 51C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 7.3"H x 4.7"W x 2.25"D (18.5 x 11.9 x 5.7 cm) Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) Approvals FCC certied Warranty 1 year
7.3'' (18.5)
Input Voltage Selection Jumper
*
4.7'' (11.9)
24 VAC Digital Input 4 Digital Input 3 Digital Input 2 Digital Input 1
780
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
INSTALLATION
MODEL RT2602B RT2620A RT2620B
NETWORK & WIRELESS
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS DIGITAL INPUT MODULES RT2602, RT2620
CAUTION: Sensors, Repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas: - Inside metal enclosure or panel - Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks - In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced. CAUTION: Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected.
Wireless digital transmitters should be installed within 200 to 500 feet of the receiver. RR2552 signal repeaters can be installed as needed to increase transmission distance between sensors and receivers. Sensor Location: To select the proper sensor location, rst install and power the receiver. Observing polarity, insert the battery into the sensor to activate it (for RT2620A, move the voltage selection jumper to battery operation before inserting the battery). The mesh networked Frontier 2.0 system does not require any additional wireless equipment to determine the proper location of the sensors. While the sensor is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data-Link LED will blink rapidly 8-10 times every 10 seconds. Once a connection has been established the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received successfully. The Data-Link LED will continue to blink once for every data transmission. The data transmission rate is programmed into the sensor (normally 1 minute intervals). To manually initiate a data transmission, press the push button switch located by the negative terminal of the battery. Installation: Once the location has been determined, mount the RT2602/RT2620 remote transmitter on a wall using four #8 screws. Determine if the RT2602/RT2620 remote transmitter will be powered by 24 VAC or by batteries on a permanent basis. For 24 VAC Operation (RT2620A only): If the device is to be powered by 24 VAC, move the voltage selection jumper to 24 VAC position and connect 24 V 60 Hz to the input terminals using 18-20 AWG wire. For Battery Operation: If the device is to be powered using the 3.0 volt batteries remove the voltage selection jumper and reposition it for battery operation (RT2620A only).
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
NOTE: For RT2620A, the device is shipped with the voltage selection jumper installed in the 24 VAC position. For proper operation it is important to use the correct type of battery. Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell DL123A) batteries. Installing the battery or applying 24 VAC (RT2620A only) will activate the transmitter again. Sensor Inputs: Wire the sensor inputs to the appropriate terminals using 18 AWG wire. Record the sensor location on the wiring label located inside the cover.
DESCRIPTION Battery powered device with 2 digital inputs Battery powered or 24 VAC powered (eld selectable) device with four (4) digital sensor inputs Battery powered only device with (4) digital sensor inputs
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
781
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION
The Frontier 2.0 RT2630 wireless remote analog and digital input module accepts a variety of analog and digital sensor/ control inputs and transmits wirelessly to Frontier 2.0 receivers. It can be used for remote alarm/status indications and wireless on/off control applications. Up to 4 analog input and 4 dry contact inputs can be monitored. A Data-Link LED is used to conrm the receiver has received the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation.
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS UNIVERSAL INPUT TRANSMITTER MODULE RT2630 SERIES
NEW!
RT2630
FEATURES Battery powered (battery included) or 24 VAC powered remote wireless sensor input modules Up to 4 analog inputs (20K , 0-10VDC and 0-20mA types) and 4 digital inputs (relay contact) No calibration required Mesh Network - easy to install and relocate sensors without additional wireless installation tools Sensor Data-Link LED conrms connection with Frontier 2.0 receivers Long battery life (approxiamately 4 to 5 years) Low battery LED + remote low battery alarm notication Optional 24VAC or 24VDC power Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
13
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
24 VAC 60 Hz or 24 VDC 300 mA Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell DL123A) 923.58 MHz 12 bit resolution 4x - resistance inputs (20K) 4x - voltage inputs (0-10VDC) 4x - current inputs (0-20 mA) 4x - dry contacts 11 dBm in (cm)
7.3 (18.54)
Input Voltage Source
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Battery
Frequency Analog Input RT2630A RT2630B RT2630C Digital Inputs Transmission Power Range 1 mile (line-of-sight) Indoor 200 to 500 ft Operating Temperature 15 to 125F (-9 to 51C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) 7.3"H x 4.7"W x 2.25"D Dimensions (18.5 x 11.9 x 5.7 cm) Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) FCC certied Approvals Warranty 1 year
DIGITAL IN
Dig In 4
Dig In 3
Dig In 2
Dig In 1
DL123A
24 VAC BATT
3.5
PWR PWR
4.7 (11.93)
ANALOG IN
Volt In 1
Volt In 2
Volt In 3
Volt In 4
6.75
782
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
INSTALLATION
NETWORK & WIRELESS
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS UNIVERSAL INPUT TRANSMITTER MODULE RT2630 SERIES
CAUTION: Sensors, repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas: - Inside metal enclosure or panel - Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks - In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced. CAUTION: Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected. CAUTION: Observe polarity when connecting analog outputs to controller inputs
Wireless digital transmitters should be installed within 200 to 500 feet of the receiver. RR2552 signal repeaters can be installed as needed to increase transmission distance between sensors and receivers. Sensor Location: To select the proper sensor location, rst install and power the receiver. Observing polarity, insert the battery into the sensor to activate it (for battery operation, move the voltage selection jumper to battery mode before inserting the battery). The mesh networked Frontier 2.0 system does not require any additional wireless equipment to determine the proper location of the sensors. While the sensor is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data-Link LED will blink rapidly 8-10 times every 10 seconds. Once a connection has been established the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received successfully. The Data-Link LED will continue to blink once for every data transmission. The data transmission rate is programmed into the sensor (normally 1 minute intervals). To manually initiate a data transmission, press the push button switch located by the negative terminal of the battery. Once the location has been determined, mount the RT2630 remote transmitter on a wall using four #8 screws. Determine if the RT2630 transmitter will be powered by 24 VAC/VDC or by batteries on a permanent basis. For 24 V Operation: If the device is to be powered by 24 V (AC or DC), connect 24 V to the input terminals using 18-20 AWG wire. For Battery Operation: If the device is to be powered using the optional DL123A batteries (included) remove the voltage selection jumper and reposition it for battery operation. NOTE: The device is shipped with the voltage selection jumper installed in the 24 V position. For proper operation it is important to use the correct type of battery. Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell DL123A) batteries. Installing the battery or applying 24 VAC will activate the transmitter. Sensor Inputs: Wire the sensor inputs to the appropriate terminals using 18 AWG wire. Record the sensor location on the wiring label located inside the cover. Attach the cover using the four screws.
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
RT2630 Input Module with 4 Digital Inputs and 4 Analog Inputs A 4 Resistance inputs (20K) B 4 Voltage inputs (0-10VDC) C 4 Current inputs (0-20 mA) Power options DC 24VDC or battery AC 24VAC or battery RT2630 A
- AC
Example: RT2630-A-AC Input module with 4 digital inputs and 4 resistance inputs (20K), 24VAC or battery.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
783
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION The Frontier 2.0 SST2630 wireless remote sensor is encapsulated in a 0.25" OD 304 stainless steel probe. The sensor is used typically for a single point of temperature measurement in piping or ductwork. A Data-Link LED is used to conrm the receiver has received the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation. FEATURES Battery included No calibration required No wiring needed Easy to install Battery powered sensors Mesh Network - easy to install and relocate sensors without additional wireless installation tools Sensor Data-Link LED conrms connection with Frontier 2.0 receivers Long battery life (approximately 4 to 5 years) Low battery LED plus remote low battery alarm notication Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS REMOTE TEMPERATURE SYSTEM SST2630
NEW!
SST2630 (Battery Included)
13
SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS
Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell DL123A) 923.58 MHz 2" (5 cm) , cable length 15 ft. (4.5 meters) in (cm)
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Battery Frequency Probe Length
3/16 Dia (4)
2.25 (5.7)
Temperature Range 25 to 125F (-3 to 51C) SST2630A SST2630B 0 to 200F (-17 to 93C) SST2630C -40 to 160F (-40 to 71C) Accuracy 1F Resolution 12 Bit Transmission Power 11 dBm Range 1 mile (line-of-sight) Indoor 200 to 500 ft Operating Temperature 0 to 125F (-17 to 51C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 1.75"H x 3.12"W x 5.75"D (4.4 x 7.9 x 14.6 cm) Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) FCC certied Approvals Warranty 1 year
5.25 (13.3)
5.75 (14.6)
1.75 (4.44)
3.12 (7.92)
784
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
INSTALLATION
NETWORK & WIRELESS
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS REMOTE TEMPERATURE SYSTEM SST2630
CAUTION: Sensors, repeaters and receivers should NOT be installed in the following areas: - Inside metal enclosure or panel - Inside or immediately next to elevator shaft or elevator banks - In front of or immediately next to large trees or a large body of water Transmission distance and performance will be drastically reduced. CAUTION: Do not use this product in any safety related applications where human life may be affected.
Wireless SST2630 sensors should be installed within 200 to 500 feet of the receiver. RR2552 signal repeaters can be installed as needed to increase transmission distance between sensors and receivers. To select the proper sensor location, rst install and power the receiver. Observing polarity, insert the battery into the sensor to activate it. The mesh networked Frontier 2.0 system does not require any additional wireless equipment to determine the proper location of the sensors. While the sensor is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data-Link LED will blink rapidly 8-10 times every 10 seconds. Once a connection has been established, the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received successfully. The Data-Link LED will continue to blink once for every data transmission. The data transmission rate is programmed into the sensor (normally 1 minute intervals). To manually initiate a data transmission press the push button switch located by the negative terminal of the battery.
The sensor probe should be mounted under any insulation in direct contact with the pipe using metal pipe straps. For proper measurement of temperature, thermal conductive compound should be used in between the sensor probe and the pipe. The installation should be wrapped with insulation to reduce the effect of ambient air. The plastic housing of the sensor can either be mounted on the pipe with metal pipe strap or wall mounted. Locate and record the sensor TXID numbers located on a label on the inside of the enclosure cover. This information will be needed later to set up the receiver. The sensor has a Low Battery LED that will start to blink continuously when the battery voltage is low. A low battery signal is also sent to the receiver for remote indication that the battery should be replaced. If the battery is not replaced in approximately 2 months the battery voltage will become so low that the Low Battery and Data-Link LEDs will not blink. Replace the battery and the Data-Link LED will start blinking while the sensor is re-establishing communications with the receiver. Then attach the cover of the sensor by installing the four screws.
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SST2630 Wireless Remote/Strap-on Temperature Sensor Temperature ranges A 25 to 125F B 0 to 200F C - 40 to 160F Enclosure E NEMA4 enclosure (Optional) SST2630 - A
-
Example: SST2630AE Sensors in NEMA4 enclosure with 25F to 125F range.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
785
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION The DT2630 is a battery operated spread spectrum wireless duct temperature sensor. The sensor is encapsulated in a 0.25" OD 304 stainless steel probe with various probe lengths (4", 6", 8", 12" & 18") available. Each sensor is congured from the factory with a unique transmitter ID. Frontier 2.0 wireless sensors utilize Spread Spectrum Radio technology. A Data-Link LED is used to conrm the receiver has received the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation.
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR DT2630
NEW!
DT2630
FEATURES
Battery included No calibration required No wiring needed Easy to install Various probe lengths Battery powered sensors Mesh Network - easy to install and relocate sensors without additional wireless installation tools Sensor Data-Link LED conrms connection with Frontier 2.0 receivers Long battery life (approximately 4 to 5 years) with standard models Low battery LED + remote low battery alarm notication Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
DIMENSIONS
13
SPECIFICATIONS
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Battery Frequency Probe Length
Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell DL123A) 923.58 MHz 4", 6", 8", 12", 18" (10.6, 15.24, 20.32, 30.48 cm)
Temperature Range DT2630A 25 to 150F, (-3 to 65C) DT2630B -40 to 160F (-40 to 71C) Accuracy 1F 12 Bit Resolution Transmission Power 11 dBm Range 1 mile (line-of-sight) Indoor 200 to 500 ft Operating Temperature -40 to 160F (-40 to 71C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 1.75"H x 3"W x 5"D, Probe 0.25" (4.44 x 7.92 x 14.6 cm), ( 0.63 cm) Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) Approvals FCC certied Warranty 1 year
786
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
INSTALLATION
NETWORK & WIRELESS
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR DT2630
Wireless duct sensors should be installed within 200 to 500 feet of the receiver. RR2552 signal repeaters can be installed as to increase transmission distance between sensors and receivers. To select the proper sensor location, rst install and power the receiver. Observing polarity, insert the battery into the sensor to activate it. The mesh networked Frontier 2.0 system does not require any additional wireless equipment to determine the proper location of the sensors. While the sensor is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data-Link LED will blink rapidly 8-10 times every 10 seconds. Once a connection has been established, the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received successfully. The Data-Link LED will continue to blink once for every data transmission. The data transmission rate is programmed into the sensor (normally 1 minute intervals). To manually initiate a data transmission press the push button switch located by the negative terminal of the battery. Install the duct sensor through a 1" opening in the side of the duct. Since the sensor is located at the tip of the probe, consideration should be made to place the tip of the probe in the middle of the airow. Mount the plastic housing of the sensor onto the ductwork using four (4) sheet metal screws. Locate the sensor at a straight section of the duct and away from heating, cooling or humidifying elements. Locate and record the duct sensor TXID numbers located on a label on the inside of the enclosure cover. This information will be needed when setting up the receiver. The sensor has a Low Battery LED that will start to blink continuously when the battery voltage is low. A low battery signal is also sent to the receiver for remote indication that the battery should be replaced. If the battery is not replaced in approximately 2 months the battery voltage will become so low that the Low Battery and Data-Link LEDs will not blink. Replace the battery and the Data-Link LED will start blinking while the sensor is re-establishing communications with the receiver. Attach the cover of the duct sensor by installing the four screws to complete the installation.
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
DT2630 Wireless Duct Temperature Sensor Temperature ranges A 25 to 150F B -40 to 160F Enclosure Standard black case E NEMA4 enclosure Probe lengths -04 4" probe -06 6" probe -08 8" probe -12 12" probe -18 18" probe DT2630 A - -04
Example: DT2630A-04 Duct temperature sensor with 4" probe 25 to 150F .
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
787
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION
The Frontier 2.0 WH2630 wireless humidity and temperature sensors are programmed with unique transmitter IDs so that individual room information can be identied. No eld programming is required. The sensors are available with 3% accuracy. A Data-Link LED is used to conrm the receiver has received the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation.
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE WALL SENSOR WH2630
NEW!
WH2630 (Battery Included)
FEATURES Battery included Advanced RH sensor technology No calibration required Excellent long term stability, response time and reset rate Battery powered sensors Mesh Network - easy to install and relocate sensors without additional wireless installation tools Sensor Data-Link LED conrms connection with Frontier 2.0 receivers Long battery life (approximately 3 years with one battery) Low battery LED plus remote low battery alarm notication Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS
Battery Frequency Accuracy WH2630A WH2630B Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell DL123A) 923.58 MHz Humidity 3% RH (10 to 90% RH) Temperature 1F, Humidity 3% RH (10 to 90% RH) 0 to 100% RH 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) 11 dBm 1 mile (line-of-sight)
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Humidity Range Temperature Range Transmission Power Range Indoor 200 to 500 ft Operating Temperature 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 4.50"H x 2.75"W x 1.50"D (11.4 x 6.9 x 3.8 cm) Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) Approvals FCC certied Warranty 1 year
4.50'' (11.4)
2.75'' (6.9)
1.50'' (3.8)
788
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
INSTALLATION
NETWORK & WIRELESS
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE WALL SENSOR WH2630
Wireless wall sensors should be installed within 200 to 500 feet of the receiver. RR2552 signal repeaters can be installed as needed to increase transmission distance between sensors and receivers. To select the proper sensor location, rst install and power the receiver. Observing polarity, insert the battery into the sensor to activate it. The mesh networked Frontier 2.0 system does not require any additional wireless equipment to determine the proper location of the sensors. While the sensor is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data-Link LED will blink rapidly 8-10 times every 10 seconds. Once a connection has been established, the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received successfully. The Data-Link LED will continue to blink once for every data transmission. The data transmission rate is programmed into the sensor (normally 1 minute intervals). To manually initiate a data transmission press the push button switch located by the negative terminal of the battery. Once the sensor location has been determined, mount the sub base on an inside wall approximately 4.5 ft. from the oor (or in the specied location) to allow exposure to the average zone temperature using two #8 screws, Velcro or double-sided tape. Locate and record the wall sensor ID Number located on a label on the back of the sub base prior to mounting. Do not mount the sensors on an outside wall, on a wall containing water pipes or near air ducts. Avoid locations that are exposed to discharge air from registers or radiation from lights, appliances, or the sun. Attach the wall sensor to the sub base by tightening the two locking screws at the bottom of the sub base. This information will be needed later to set up the receiver. NOTE: The locking screw must be installed for a secure installation. The screws are turned counter-clockwise to secure the cover. The sensor has a Low Battery LED that will start to blink continuously when the battery voltage is low. A low battery signal is also sent to the receiver for remote indication that the battery should be replaced. If the battery is not replaced in approximately 2 months the battery voltage will become so low that the Low Battery and Data-Link LEDs will not blink. Replace the battery and the Data-Link LED will start blinking while the sensor is re-establishing communications with the receiver.
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL WH2630A WH2630B DESCRIPTION Wireless wall humidity (3%) sensor Wireless wall humidity (3%) and temperature sensor
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
789
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION The Frontier 2.0 WT2630 wireless temperature sensors are programmed with unique transmitter IDs so that individual room information can be identied. No eld programming required. The override button (B & C models only) located on the side of the sensor housing can be assigned to a digital output in the Frontier 2.0 family of receivers for occupancy override or similar applications. The setpoint adjustment (B Model only) can be assigned to an analog output in a Frontier 2.0 receiver. The output will then be used by a controller for a variety of control setpoint ranges (user dened) and other applications such as dimming of light and window blinds control. A Data-Link LED is used to conrm the receiver has received the data transmission. This eliminates the need for special wireless installation equipment or tools and allows for quick installation.
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS TEMPERATURE WALL SENSOR WT2630
NEW!
WT2630 (Battery Included)
FEATURES
Battery included No calibration required No wiring needed Flexible user dened set point range Set point slider can be used for a variety of other applications Battery powered sensors Mesh Network - easy to install and relocate sensors without additional wireless installation tools Sensor Data-Link LED conrms connection with Frontier 2.0 receivers Long battery life (approximately 4 to 5 years) Low battery LED + remote low battery alarm notication Reliable Spread Spectrum technology
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS
Lithium 3.0V 1400 mAh (Duracell DL123A) Frequency 923.58 MHz Temperature Range 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) Setpoint Label Warm - cool or 65 to 85F Accuracy 1F Resolution 12 Bit Transmission Power 11 dBm Range 1 mile (line-of-sight) Indoor 200 to 500 ft Operating Temperature 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) Operating Humidity 0 to 100% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 4.50"H x 2.75"W x 1.50"D (11.4 x 6.9 x 3.8 cm) Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) Approvals FCC certied Warranty 1 year Battery
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4.50'' (11.4)
COOL
WARM
2.75'' (6.9)
1.50'' (3.8)
790
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
INSTALLATION
MODEL WT2630A WT2630B WT2630C
NETWORK & WIRELESS
FRONTIER 2.0 WIRELESS TEMPERATURE WALL SENSOR WT2630
Wireless wall sensors should be installed within 200 to 500 feet of the receiver. RR2552 signal repeaters can be installed as to increase transmission distance between sensors and receivers. To select the proper sensor location, rst install and power the receiver. Observing polarity insert the battery into the sensor to activate it. The mesh networked Frontier 2.0 system does not require any additional wireless equipment to determine the proper location of the sensors. While the sensor is attempting to connect to the receiver, the Data-Link LED will blink rapidly 8-10 times every 10 seconds. Once a connection has been established the Data-Link LED will blink once to indicate the data transmission has been received successfully. The Data-Link LED will continue to blink once for every data transmission The data transmission rate is programmed into the sensor (normally 1 minute intervals). To manually initiate a data transmission, press the push button switch located by the negative terminal of the battery. Once the sensor location has been determined, mount the sub base on an inside wall approximately 4.5 ft. from the oor (or in the specied location) to allow exposure to the average zone temperature using two #8 screws, Velcro or double sided tape. Locate and record the wall sensor ID Number located on a label on the back of the sub base prior to mounting. Do not mount the sensors on an outside wall, on a wall containing water pipes or near air ducts. Avoid locations that are exposed to discharge air from registers or radiation from lights, appliances, or the sun. Attach the wall sensor to the sub base by tightening the two locking screws at the bottom of the sub base. This information will be needed later to set up the receiver. NOTE: The locking screw must be installed for a secure installation. The screws are turned counter-clockwise to secure the cover. The sensor has a Low Battery LED that will start to blink continuously when the battery voltage is low. A low battery signal is also sent to the receiver for remote indication that the battery should be replaced. If the battery is not replaced in approximately 2 months the battery voltage will become so low that the Low Battery and Data-Link LEDs will not blink. Replace the battery and the Data-Link LED will start blinking while the sensor is re-establishing communications with the receiver.
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
DESCRIPTION Wall sensor only Wall sensor with set point adjustment and override push button Wall sensor with override push button
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
791
NETWORK & WIRELESS

WIRELESS SENSOR GATEWAY WI-MGR
DESCRIPTION
The Wi-MGR is a wireless gateway designed for easy integration with facility monitoring and management systems. The convenient wireless design helps reduce installation costs associated with hard-wired sensors and systems. The Wi-MGR comes equipped with a 418 megahertz radio receiver capable of receiving signals from select transmitters sensing temperature, humidity, motion, power transmitters, dry contact, analog (0-20mA), 0-5 VDC, and 0-10 VDC signals. Also included is a 900 megahertz receiver capable of receiving signals from sensors and point repeaters. The Wi-MGR integrates these signals to facilities monitoring systems in the form of SNMP, Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus RTU, and BACnet/IP. The Wi-MGR can receive signals within 100 feet (30.5m) in open air space with the 418 MHz frequency and up to 1300 feet (396m) of open air space with the 900 MHz frequency. Repeaters are used to add additional distance between the Wi-MGR and the wireless sensors (transmitters).
NEW!
Wi-MGR
APPLICATION
The Wi-MGR operates as part of a wireless mesh network.
418MHz 418MHz
FEATURES
Wireless design Includes applicable receiver & antennas for indoor open air transmission 418MHz antenna - receives transmissions up to 100 feet (30.5m) 900MHz antenna - receives transmissions up to 1300 feet (396m) Additional wired inputs and outputs provides expanded functionality Ability to output to Modbus, BACnet, and SNMP
900MHz
418MHz
13
0 90
MH
z
418MHz
900MHz
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC. 50/60Hz 600mA @ 24VAC/VDC Maximum Supply Current Frequency 900MHz and 418MHz Maximum Number of Wireless Modules 400 with repeaters; 150 without repeaters LED Indication Network 2 Green Active & Speed Status 1 Red LED EIA-485 Status 2 Green Transmit & Receive Communication Ports Ethernet 10/100 BASE-T, RJ45 connector; 500VAC RMS isolation EIA-232 DB9 female connector; 9600 baud; No parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit 1200, 2400, 9600 or 19200 baud (selectable); Parity: none, even or odd, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit Protocol TCP/IP, HTML, TFTP, SNMP Modbus (EIA-485), Modbus TCP/IP UDP/IP, BACnet/IP, BACnet/MSTP, Terminal Emulation (EIA-232) Operating Temperature 32 to 122F(0 to 50C ) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Mounting Desktop or rack (brackets included) Dimensions 9.7W x 4.8D x 1.6H (24.6 x 12.2 x 4.1 cm) Weight 2.3 lbs(1.04 kg) Warranty 1 year EIA-485
792
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Wi-MGR Physical connections MODEL WI-MGR WI-TS WI-DIT WI-TH2 WI-LD WI-LD-SPOT WI-AS420 WI-AS5 WI-AS10 WI-TS9 WI-THS9 WI-PR BA/BS2-WT BA/BS2-WTH BA/RPT49-EZ BA/WAI-05 BA/WAI-10 BA/WAI-420 BA/WDI BA/WT-D-4 BA/WT-D-8 BA/WT-I-4 BA/WT-O-BB BA/WT-RPP-10-BB BA/WT-RPP-25-BB BA/WTH-D BA/WTH-O-BB
NETWORK & WIRELESS

WIRELESS SENSOR GATEWAY WI-MGR
Wi-MGR Physical connection Descriptions

Item Antenna 418MHz Antenna 900MHz Relay 1 Relay 2 DI #1 DI #2 DI #3 DI #4 Power 24 VDC/VAC Jack Status RS232 Port RX TX RS485 LED RS485 Termination switch RS485 Port RJ45 Ethernet port Description RP-SMA connector RP-SMA connector Relay output 1 terminal block (NC/NO/C) Relay output 2 terminal block (NC/NO/C) Digital input 1 (+ -) Digital input 2 (+ -) Digital input 3 (+ -) Digital input 4 (+ -) Power terminal block Wall adapter connector Status LED DB9 female connector Receive/Transmit status LED 1 (unused); 2 100 ohm termination EIA-485 circuit connector 10/100 BASE-T connector
DESCRIPTION Wireless Gateway, 418/900 MHz receiver, includes 24VDC power adapter Temperature sensor; 418 MHz wireless transmitter Temperature sensor and digital input; 418 MHz wireless transmitter Temp/Humidity sensor; 418 MHz wireless transmitter Water Sensor; 418MHZ wireless transmitter (requires Wi-LD-SPOT or Wi-LD-25) Spot detector for use with Wi-LD Analog input (0-20mA); 418 MHz wireless transmitter Analog input (0-5v); 418 MHz wireless transmitter Analog input (0-10v); 418 MHz wireless transmitter Temperature sensor; 900 MHz wireless transmitter Temp/Humidity sensor; 900 MHz wireless transmitter Point repeater, 418MHz Receiver, 900 MHz transmitter RELATED PRODUCTS Room temperature battery transmitter, 418 MHz at 1 mW, (batteries included) Room temperature and humidity battery transmitter, 418 MHz @ 1 mW, (batteries included) 9-15 VDC power BAPI repeater for 418 MHz signals with repeat at 900 MHz 0-5VDC Analog Input Transmitter, 418 MHz 0-10VDC Analog Input Transmitter, 418 MHz 4-20 mA Analog Input Transmitter, 418 MHz Digital Input Transmitter, 418 MHz Duct temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, 4" insertion probe, batteries included Duct temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, 8" insertion probe, batteries included Four-inch immersion temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, (batteries included) OSA temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, batteries included Remote stainless steel temperature probe, with 418 MHz transmitter and 10 feet of plenum cable, batteries included Remote stainless steel temperature probe, with 418 MHz transmitter and 25 feet of plenum cable, batteries included Duct temperature and humidity probe, 418 MHz transmitter, 6" insertion probe, batteries included OSA temperature and humidity probe, 418 MHz transmitter, batteries included PAGE 804 804 794 796 796 796 796 798 798 800 806 802 802 798 806
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
793
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BAPI WIRELESS RECEIVER AND REPEATER BA/RCV-EZ AND BA/RPT-EZ
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA/RCV Wireless Receivers detect the radio signals from sensor transmitters or BA/RPT repeaters and send the value through a hard-wired RS485 bus to dedicated output modules. Each receiver can accommodate 127 output modules, which come in a variety of output types including thermistor simulation (10K type 2 or 3), 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, and solid-state switch. The BA/RCV418 receives signals directly from sensor transmitters at 418 MHz. The BA/ RCV900 receives signals only from repeaters at 900 MHz. The BAPI BA/RPT Wireless Repeater detects all 418 MHz sensor transmitter signals, and re-transmits the signal at 900 MHz to extend useable wireless distance to as far as 1000 feet. These signals are received with a BA/RCV900 for RS485 communication distribution to the output modules. OPERATION/APPLICATION The receiver detects the wireless signal from one or more transmitters, then outputs the value through an RS485 communication line to attached output modules selected specically for the input requirements. Module addressing is made simple by pushing a button on the output module and transmitter at the same time, thus completing a permanent wireless address link between transmitter and output module.
NEW!
BA/RCV900-EZ
FEATURES
WIRING
BA/TEMP Transmitter 418 MHz BA/EZ RCV 418 Receiver BA/EZ ROM Output 1 BA/EZ COM Output 127
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Eliminates point wiring FCC license pre-approved Receivers accommodate 127 output modules each Receiver sensitivity -106 dBm minimum Built In error detection Repeater transmit power 100 mW 1000-foot repeater range (open air) Snap-track mounting
BA/TEMP Transmitter 418 MHz
BA/EZ RPT Repeater 900 MHz
BA/EZ RCV 900 Receiver
BA/EZ ROM Output 1
BA/EZ COM Output 127
* The transmission range from repeater to receiver is 1000 feet.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage RCV-418 RCV-900, RPT Supply Current RCV-418 RCV-900, RPT Frequency RCV-418 RCV-900, RPT Transmission Power Range RCV-418 RCV-900, RPT Receiver Sensitivity RCV-418, RPT RCV-900 17-30 VAC/VDC 9-15 VDC, 20 mA 150 mA 418 MHz 900 MHz 100 mW (repeater) 100 ft 1000 ft -106 dBm -110 dBm Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Materials of Construction ABS Plastic, UL94V-0 Dimensions 2.75"H x 4.8"W x 1.2"D (7.0 x 12.0 x 3.0 cm) Weight 0.5 lb (0.2 kg) Approvals FCC ID#T4F16963N16964 (418 MHz models only) FCC CFR part 15.247 (900 MHz models) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 2 years
794
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Snap track mount 418 MHZ Antenna RS485 Comm. bus SG PG Power bus 17-30 VAC/VDC Power BA/RCV-418-EZ 418 MHZ Receiver
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BAPI WIRELESS RECEIVER AND REPEATER BA/RCV-EZ AND BA/RPT-EZ
RS485 Comm. bus Power bus
900 MHZ Antenna Snap track mount 9-15 VDC Power
RS485 Comm. bus SG PG Power bus
RS485 Comm. bus Power bus
Output Typical output module
Output BA/RCV-900-EZ 900 MHZ Receiver Typical output module
418 MHZ Antenna 900 MHZ Antenna
Power 9-15 VDC
9-15 VDC Power BA/RPT49-EZ Repeater
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Install horizontally at highest practical elevation. If installed in a metal enclosure, be sure the antenna is mounted outside enclosure, preferably on the top. A plastic enclosure will enable the antenna to be located within. Keep the RS485 bus as short as possible but denitely less then 4000 feet. Each PG terminal should be earth grounded. Shield is continuous through the Twisted Shielded Pair and each module.
MODEL BA/RCV418-EZ BA/RCV900-EZ BA/RCV900-EA-EZ BA/RPT49-EZ DESCRIPTION BAPI receiver for 418 MHz transmitter signals to RS485 BAPI receiver for RPT repeater 900 MHz signals to RS485 BAPI receiver for RPT repeater 900 MHz signals to RS485 with extendable antenna 9-15 VDC power BAPI repeater for 418 MHz signals with repeat at 900 MHz
BA/AOM-CONN VC350-12
RELATED PRODUCTS Pluggable terminal block kit Power supply 24 VAC to 12 VDC, 350 mA
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
795
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BAPI WIRELESS UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTERS BA/WAI SERIES, BA/WDI, BA/WTS
DESCRIPTION
The BA/W Series Wireless Universal Input Transmitters are designed to monitor 0-5VDC, 0-10VDC or 4-20 mA signals and transmit that analog value to a receiver. The Digital Input version monitors any dry contact status input and transmits that On/Off status to the receiver. The Thermistor Temperature Input version takes any 10K Type 2 thermistor sensor and transmits it to any BAPI receiver. All models transmit their data every 10-17 seconds. The units are battery operated and only require wiring from the remote input sensor.
NEW!
WIRING
BA/TEMP Transmitter 418 MHz BA/EZ RCV 418 Receiver BA/EZ ROM Output 1 BA/EZ COM Output 127 BA/TEMP Transmitter 418 MHz BA/EZ RPT Repeater 900 MHz BA/EZ RCV 900 Receiver BA/EZ ROM Output 1 BA/EZ COM Output 127
FEATURES
Two Year Battery Powered with Replaceable Battery 0-5, 0-10 and 4-20mA Analog Input Models Digital Input (dry contact) Model Thermistor Temperature Input Model 100' open air range, 1,000' range with a Repeater Transmission Interval from 10-17 seconds Easy Two-Wire Termination and Easy Setup Mode
SPECIFICATIONS
Battery
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Frequency Transmission Power Range Update Interval Analog Input BA/WAI-05 BA/WAI-10 BA/WAI-420 BA/WTS
Two AA 3.6V lithium batteries (included) 418 MHz 1 mW 100 ft 10-17 seconds (xed) 0-5VDC, Impedance > 30K 0-10VDC, Impedance > 50K 4-20 mA, Impedance = 100 Any 10K Type 2 Thermistor, range -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
Dry contact, > 20 seconds (< 10 closed, >250 open) Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) 5 to 95% RH, (non-condensing) Operating Humidity Enclosure NEMA 4 (IP66) Dimensions 5.0"H x 4.1"W x 2.5"D (12.7 x 10.4 x 5.4 cm) Weight 0.5 lb (0.22 kg) FCC ID# T4F16963N16964 Approvals (418 MHz only) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 2 year
Digital Inputs BA/WDI
WIRING - FIGURES ARE ON NEXT PAGE

Battery Installation: Battery supplied: Two-3.6 VDC Lithium batteries (Figure 1) Install both batteries per the +/- indication on the battery holder board. Note: Both batteries face the same way. (Unit will run on one battery if needed) Input Sensor Wiring Description: Voltage: Wire the + signal to the + terminal on the battery board. (Figure 2) Wire the signal to the terminal on the battery board. Current (sync): Wire the 4-20 mA current signal (-) from the sensor to + terminal on the battery board. (Figure 3) Wire the of the power supply feeding the sensor to the sensor to the terminal on the battery board. Wire the + of the power supply feeding the sensor to the + of the sensor. Current (source): Wire the + signal to the + terminal on the battery board. (Figure 4) Wire the signal to the terminal on the battery board. Provide + power to sensor Provide power to sensor Thermistor Sensor: Wire either lead to the + terminal of the battery board. (Non-Polar) (Figure 5) Wire the other lead to the terminal of the battery board. (Non-Polar) Contact Input: Wire either lead to the + terminal of the battery board. (Non-Polar) (Figure 6) Wire the other lead to the terminal of the battery board. (Non-Polar)
796
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
APPLICATION
3.6 VDC Lithium Typical of 2
SIGNAL OUT
NETWORK & WIRELESS

BAPI WIRELESS UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTERS BA/WAI SERIES, BA/WDI, BA/WTS
BA/WAI-05 Battery & Termination Board
Customer Provided Voltage Transmitter
SIGNAL IN
Customer Provided Voltage Transmitter

SIGNAL OUT
SIGNAL IN
0-5V
0-10V
Fig. 1: Battery Installation
Fig. 2a: 0-5V Transmitter Termination
Fig. 2b: 0-10V Transmitter Termination

Power Supply*
4-20 mA Loop Transmitter*
SIGNAL IN
Power Supply*
4-20 mA Transmitter*
4-20 mA
SIGNAL IN
SIGNAL OUT
4-20 mA
SEPARATE POWER SUPPLY
*Customer Provided
*Customer Provided
Fig. 3: 4-20 mA Loop Powered Transmitter Termination

BA/WTS Battery & Termination Board
Fig. 4: 4-20 mA 4-wire Transmitter Termination

BA/WDI Battery & Termination Board
Customer Provided Switch/Contact Customer Provided 10K-2 Thermistor

10K-2 NO-POLARITY SENSOR IN TRANSISTOR OR CONTACT SWITCH
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Fig. 5: 10K-2 Thermistor Termination
Fig. 6: Digital Input (DI) Termination
MODEL BA/WAI-05 BA/WAI-10 BA/WAI-420 BA/WDI BA/WTS DESCRIPTION 0-5VDC Analog Input Transmitter, 418 MHz 0-10VDC Analog Input Transmitter, 418 MHz 4-20 mA Analog Input Transmitter, 418 MHz Digital Input Transmitter, 418 MHz Thermistor Sensor Transmitter, 418 MHz
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
797
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION
The BAPI wireless duct temperature and humidity transmitters sense in-duct conditions with a battery operated 418 MHz RF transmitter. The sensor/transmitter is mounted in a NEMA 4, (IP66) enclosure with 4" or 8", stainless steel temperature duct probe or 6" temperature/RH probe and has an in-building range of 100 (30.5m). The battery has an estimated eight-year life with transmission updates approximately every 10 seconds. Other duct insertion probe lengths are available.
BAPI WIRELESS DUCT TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS BA/WT(H)-D
NEW!
BA/WT-D-4 BA/WTH-D-4
OPERATION/APPLICATION
Temperature and humidity data is transmitted via 418 MHz RF to a receiver. Minimum in-building range is 100 feet and battery life is estimated to be eight years with high-capacity 3.6V lithium batteries (at a 10-second transmit interval). Each transmitter has a unique address and includes built-in error detection. Each variable sent by the transmitter is converted by a BAPI Analog Output Module to a voltage, current, or resistance signal for input to a controller or monitor. The unit can also be set up to send low-battery information to the controller.
FEATURES
Wireless temperature and humidity sensing Eight-year battery life Built-in error detection Repeater available for 1000-foot range Available receiver with signal outputs of voltage, current, or resistance NEMA 4 (IP66) enclosure Stainless steel temperature probe Sintered lter humidity probe Two-year warranty
WIRING
13
BA/EZ ROM Output 1
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS
Battery Two AA 3.6 VDC lithium batteries (included) 418 MHz 1 mW 100 ft 10 seconds (xed) 2%, (5% to 95%) 0 to 100% RH Enclosure Dimensions Weight Approvals RoHS Statement Warranty NEMA 4 (IP66) 4.1"H x 5.0"W x 2.5"D (10.4 x 12.7 x 6.4 cm) 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) FCC ID# T4F16963N16964 Yes 2 years
Frequency Transmission Power Range Update Interval Humidity Accuracy Humidity Range Sensor Type WT Temperature: 10K type 2 WTH Temperature: 10K type 2 Humidity Capacitive Temperature Range -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Temperature Accuracy 0.36F (0.2C) Operating Temperature -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C) Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing
798
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
Note: Batteries included
NETWORK & WIRELESS
BAPI WIRELESS DUCT TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS BA/WT(H)-D
BA/WTH-D
BA/WT-D
13
Install the probe horizontally on the duct. The enclosure should not be installed inside a metal duct. Installing the batteries starts the wireless transmission immediately. Pushing the button on the transmitter and the button on the associated output module simultaneously will conrm that the address link between the units is correct. This should be done one at a time to avoid crossaddressing.
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL BA/WT-D-4 BA/WT-D-8 BA/WTH-D DESCRIPTION Duct temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, 4" insertion probe, batteries included Duct temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, 8" insertion probe, batteries included Duct temperature and humidity probe, 418 MHz transmitter, 6" insertion probe, batteries included
BA/LI3620 BA/RCV418-EZ BA/RCV900-EZ BA/RPT49-EZ
RELATED PRODUCTS AA lithium 3.6V battery, two required for each transmitter BAPI receiver for 418 MHz transmitter signals to RS485 BAPI receiver for RPT repeater 900 MHz signals to RS485 9-15 VDC power BAPI repeater for 418 MHz signals with repeat at 900 MHz
PAGE 794 794 794
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
799
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION
The BAPI wireless immersion temperature transmitters sense in-pipe conditions and send data with a battery operated 418 MHz transmitter. The sensor / transmitter is mounted in a NEMA 4 (IP66) enclosure with a 2", 4" or 8" stainless steel temperature immersion probe suited for four inch well insertion. The transmitter has an in-building range of 100 feet. The battery has an estimated eight-year life with transmission updates approximately every 10 seconds. Other immersion probe lengths are available.
BAPI WIRELESS IMMERSION TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER BA/WT-I
NEW!
BA/WT-I-4
OPERATION/APPLICATION Temperature data is transmitted via 418 MHz to a receiver. Minimum in-building range is 100 feet, and battery life is estimated to be eight years with high-capacity 3.6 VDC lithium batteries (at a 10-second transmit interval). Each transmitter has a unique address and includes built-in error detection. Each variable sent by the transmitter is converted by a BAPI analog output module to a voltage, current, or resistance signal for input to a controller or monitor. The unit can also be set up to send low-battery information to the controller.
FEATURES
WIRING
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Wireless temperature sensing Eight-year battery life Built-in error detection Repeater available for 1000-foot range Output modules available with voltage, current, or resistance outputs Stainless steel temperature probe Standard 316-stainless steel wells available Two-year warranty
BA/EZ ROM Output 1
SPECIFICATIONS
Two AA 3.6 VDC lithium batteries (included) Frequency 418 MHz Transmission Power 1 mW Range 100 ft Update Interval 10 seconds (xed) Sensor Type Temperature: 10 k Type 2 thermistor Temperature Range -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Temperature Accuracy 0.36F (0.2C) Operating Temperature -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Enclosure NEMA 4 (IP66) Mounting 1/2" NPT, 1/4" probe Battery Dimensions Probe Length 2" 4" 8" Weight Approvals RoHS Statement Warranty 4.1"H x 5.0"W x 2.5"D (10.4 x 12.7 x 6.4 cm) 1.5"L from tip to 1/2" NPT thread, 1/4" diameter 3.5"L from tip to 1/2" NPT thread, 1/4" diameter 7.5"L from tip to 1/2" NPT thread, 1/4" diameter 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) FCC ID# T4F16963N16964 Yes 2 year
800
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
BA/WT-I
NETWORK & WIRELESS
BAPI WIRELESS IMMERSION TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER BA/WT-I
Install the probe horizontally or vertically at the highest practical elevation into the pipe. The enclosure should not be installed inside a metal box or inverted. Installing the batteries starts the wireless transmission immediately. Pushing the button of the transmitter and the button of the associated output module simultaneously will establish an address link between the two units. This should be done one at a time to avoid cross-addressing.
13
MODEL BA/WT-I-2 BA/WT-I-4 BA/WT-I-8 DESCRIPTION Two-inch immmersion temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, (batteries included) Four-inch immersion temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, (batteries included) Eight-inch immersion temperature probe, 418 MHz, (batteries included)
NETWORK & WIRELESS
PAGE 794 794 794
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
801
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION BAPI wireless remote temperature probes feature a stainless steel probe with 5, 10 or 25 feet of plenum-rated cable. The watertight BAPI-Box enclosure houses a 418 MHz, batteryoperated transmitter. Remote probes are commonly used in refrigerated case or strap-on applications. They are ideal for hard-to-access areas or for applications where the usual immersion or duct sensors do not t well. Additional cable options, lead lengths, and probe styles are available upon request.
BAPI WIRELESS REMOTE PROBE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER BA/WT-RPP
NEW!
BA/WT-RPP-10-BB
OPERATION/APPLICATION Temperature data is transmitted via 418 MHz to a receiver. Minimum in-building range is 100 feet, and battery life is estimated to be eight years with high-capacity 3.6 VDC lithium batteries (at a 10-second transmit interval). Each transmitter has a unique address and includes built-in error detection. Each variable sent by the transmitter is converted by a BAPI analog output module to a voltage, current, or resistance signal for input to a controller or monitor. They can also be set up to send low-battery information to the controller.
FEATURES
WIRING
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Wireless temperature sensing Eight-year battery life Built-in error detection Repeater available for 1000-foot range Output modules available with outputs of voltage, current, or resistance Plenum rated cable Stainless steel probe sensor Two-year warranty
BA/EZ ROM Output 1
SPECIFICATIONS
Battery AA 3.6 VDC lithium batteries (included) Frequency 418 MHz Transmission Power 1 mW Range 100 ft Update Interval 10 seconds Sensor Type Temperature: 10K type 2 Temperature Range -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Temperature Accuracy 0.36F (0.2C) Operating Temperature -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C) Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing Enclosure NEMA 4 (IP66) Dimensions Weight Approvals RoHS Statement Warranty 4.1"H x 5.0"W x 2.5"D (10.4 x 12.7 x 6.4 cm) 1 lb (0.45 kg) FCC ID# T4F16963N16964 Yes 2 years
802
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
APPLICATION
BA/WT-RPP
NETWORK & WIRELESS
BAPI WIRELESS REMOTE PROBE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER BA/WT-RPP
Install the enclosure horizontally (probe down) at the highest practical elevation on the north side of a building or in permanent shade. The transmitter should not be installed inside a metal enclosure. Installing the batteries starts the wireless transmission immediately. Pushing the button of the transmitter and the button of the associated output module simultaneously will establish an address link between the two units. This should be done one at a time to avoid cross-addressing.
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL BA/WT-RPP-5-BB BA/WT-RPP-10-BB BA/WT-RPP-25-BB DESCRIPTION Remote stainless steel temperature probe, with 418 MHz transmitter and 5 feet of plenum cable, batteries included Remote stainless steel temperature probe, with 418 MHz transmitter and 10 feet of plenum cable, batteries included Remote stainless steel temperature probe, with 418 MHz transmitter and 25 feet of plenum cable, batteries included
PAGE 794 794 794
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
803
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION
The BAPI wireless room temperature and humidity transmitters measure in-room conditions with a battery operated 418 MHz transmitter. The sensor / transmitter is mounted in a BAPI-Stat 2 style enclosure and has an in-building range of 100 feet. The battery has an estimated eight-year life with transmission updates approximately every ten seconds. OPERATION/APPLICATION Temperature and humidity data is transmitted via 418 MHz RF to a receiver. Minimum in-building range is 100 feet, and battery life is estimated to be eight years with high-capacity 3.6V lithium batteries (at a 10-second transmit interval). Each transmitter has a unique address and includes built-in error detection. Each variable sent by the transmitter is converted by a BAPI Analog Output Module to a voltage, current, or resistance signal for input to a controller or monitor. They can also be set up to include low-battery information to the controller.
BAPI WIRELESS ROOM TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS BA/BS2-WT(H)
NEW!
BA/BS2-WT
FEATURES
Wireless temperature and humidity sensing Eight-year battery life Built-in error detection Repeater available for 1000-foot range Output modules available with signal outputs of voltage, current, or resistance BAPI-Stat 2 enclosure Two-year warranty
WIRING
13
BA/EZ ROM Output 1
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS
Battery Two AA 3.6V lithium batteries (included) 418 MHz 1 mW 100 ft 10 seconds (xed) 2%, (5% to 95%) 0%-100% RH Operating Temperature 32-140F (0 to 60C) 5% to 95% RH non-condensing Operating Humidity Dimensions 4.5"H x 2.75"W x 1.1"D (11.4 x 7.0 x 2.7 cm) Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Approvals FCC ID# T4F16963N16964 (418 MHz only) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 2 year
Frequency Transmission Power Range Update Interval Humidity Accuracy Humidity Range Sensor Type BA/BS2-WT Temperature: 10K type 2 BA/BS2-WTH Temperature: 10K type 2 Humidity: Capacitive Temperature Range -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Temperature Accuracy 0.36F (0.2C)
804
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Note Batteries included
NETWORK & WIRELESS
BAPI WIRELESS ROOM TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS BA/BS2-WT(H)
Battery polarity important
Transmitter training button
Note: The unit starts transmitting as soon as the batteries are installed.
13
Install as you would any wall sensor, about 4' to 5' from the oor. The box should not be installed inside a metal box. Installing the batteries starts the RF transmission immediately. Pushing the training button of the transmitter and the button of the associated output module simultaneously will conrm the address link between the correct units. This should be done one at a time to avoid cross-addressing.
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL BA/BS2-WT BA/BS2-WT-S BA/BS2-WT-O BA/BS2-WT-SO BA/BS2-WTH DESCRIPTION Room temperature battery transmitter, 418 MHz at 1 mW, (batteries included) Room temperature with setpoint adjust, 418 MHz 1mW, (batteries included) Room temperature with push button, 418 MHz 1mW, (batteries included) Room temperature with push button and set point adjust, 418 MHz 1mW, (batteries included) Room temperature and humidity battery transmitter, 418 MHz @ 1 mW, (batteries included)
PAGE 794 794 794
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
805
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION
The BAPI wireless outside air temperature and humidity transmitters sense outside conditions and transmit them with a battery-operated 418 MHz transmitter. The sensor / transmitter is mounted in a NEMA 4 (IP66) enclosure with a 2.58 stainless steel temperature probe or a 1.58 temperature / humidity probe. The transmitter has a minimum in-building range of 100 feet. The battery has an estimated eight-year life with transmission updates approximately every 10 seconds. Other duct insertion probe lengths are available.
BAPI WIRELESS OSA TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS BA/WT-O, BA/WTH-O
NEW!
BA/WT-O BA/WTH-O
OPERATION/APPLICATION Temperature and humidity data is transmitted via 418 MHz to a receiver. Minimum in-building range is 100 feet and battery life is estimated to be eight years with high-capacity 3.6 VDC lithium batteries (at a 10-second transmit interval). Each transmitter has a unique address and includes built-in error detection. Each variable sent by the transmitter is converted by a BAPI analog output module to a voltage, current, or resistance signal for input to a controller or monitor. The unit can also be set up to send low-battery information to the controller.
13
FEATURES
Wireless temperature and humidity sensing Eight-year battery life Built-in error detection Repeater available for 1000-foot range Output modules available with signal outputs of voltage, current, or resistance Stainless steel temperature probe PVC weather shield (temperature model) Sintered lter (temperature / RH model) Two-year warranty
WIRING
BA/EZ ROM Output 1
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS
Battery Two AA 3.6 VDC lithium batteries (included) 418 MHz 1 mW 100 ft 10 seconds (xed) 2%, (5 to 95%) 0 to 100% RH Operating Humidity Enclosure Dimensions Probe BA/WT-O BA/WTH-O Weight Approvals RoHS Statement Warranty 5-95% RH non-condensing NEMA 4 (IP66) 4.1"H x 5.0"W x 2.5"D (10.4 x 12.7 x 6.4 cm) 1.58" (4.02 cm) 2.58" (6.56 cm) 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) FCC ID#T4F16963N16964 Yes 2 years
Frequency Transmission Power Range Update Interval Humidity Accuracy Humidity Range Sensor Type BA/WT-O Temperature: 10K type 2 BA/WTH-O Temperature: 10K type 2 Humidity: Capacitive Temperature Range -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Temperature Accuracy 0.36F (0.2C) Operating Temperature -40 to 212F (-40 to 100C)
806
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
BA/WT-O-BB BA/WTH-O-BB
NETWORK & WIRELESS
BAPI WIRELESS OSA TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY TRANSMITTERS BA/WT-O, BA/WTH-O
13
Install the enclosure horizontally (probe down) at the highest practical elevation on the north side of a building or in permanent shade. The transmitter should not be installed inside a metal enclosure. Installing the batteries starts the wireless transmission immediately. Pushing the button of the transmitter and the button of the associated output module simultaneously will establish an address link between the two units. This should be done one at a time to avoid cross-addressing.
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL BA/WT-O-BB BA/WTH-O-BB DESCRIPTION OSA temperature probe, 418 MHz transmitter, batteries included OSA temperature and humidity probe, 418 MHz transmitter, batteries included
PAGE 794 794 794
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
807
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION The BAPI BA/ROM, VOM, COM, and RYOM Wireless System Output Modules are specically designed to connect to any BA/RCV receiver and communicate over an RS485 communication trunk to generate standard output signals for any BAS system. A total of 127 modules may be interspersed on the RS485 trunk. Each will output a signal representative of its assigned wireless transmitter located remotely. Each module may be powered from the receiver power bus, or individually, based on overall system power requirements. The BAPI BA/ROM Thermistor Simulation Output Module converts a wireless transmitter temperature signal according to a standard thermistor curve. The two standard curves are 10 K Type 3 and a 10 K Type 2, with a resistance temperature response of 35 to 120F (1 to 50C). The BAPI BA/VOM Voltage Output Module converts a wireless transmitter temperature signal to a standard voltage signal. The two standard voltage outputs are 0-5 VDC and 0-10 VDC, with voltage temperature responses based on individual models. The BAPI BA/COM Current Output Module converts a wireless transmitter temperature signal to a standard 4-20 mA current signal. The 4-20 mA current is typical of a loop powered (9-36 VDC) device with current temperature responses based on individual models. The BAPI BA/RYOM Digital Output Module converts the pushbutton on a wireless room temperature transmitter to a solid-state relay closure for AC or DC voltages (5 second momentary actuation). NO or NC solid-state contacts are available, based on individual models. The BAPI BA/RYOL Digital Output Module converts the BA/ WDI digital input tranmitter signal to a latching relay output. NO or NC contacts are available, based on individual models. The BAPI BA/SOM Setpoint Output Module converts the setpoint data from a wireless receiver to a resistance or voltage output.
BAPI WIRELESS SYSTEM OUTPUT MODULES BA/COM, BA/ROM, BA/RYOM, BA/RYOL, BA/SOM, BA/VOM
NEW!
BA/SOM-16-EZ, BA/VOM-05-C-EZ, BA/ROM-102-EZ
FEATURES
Provide BAS point wiring 127 modules per system include: Thermistor simulation for temperature 0-10 VDC or 0-5 VDC signals 4-20 mA signals Solid-state contacts FCC license pre-approved Built-in error detection Built-in fail-safe positions Snap-track mounting
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage COM ROM, VOM RYOM/RYOL SOM Analog Output COM ROM-102 ROM-103 SOM-10 SOM-60 SOM-80 Externally (loop) powered 9-36 VDC, 20 mA 9-30 VDC at 3 mA, or 17 to 30 VAC at 0.1 VA 9-30 VDC at 15 mA, or 17 to 30 VAC at 0.5 VA See SOM data sheet located under "Related Documents" at www.Kele.com 4-20 mA, 9-36 VDC, loop powered Impedance 750 at 24 VDC 10 k type 2 thermistor curve, 5 VDC excitation maximum 10 k type 3 thermistor curve, 5 VDC excitation maximum 0 to 10 VDC, 10 k maximum 0 to 10 k, linear 0 to 20 k, linear 10 to 30 k, linear 10 k Type 2 thermistor 50 to 90F (10 to 32C) VOM-10 0-10 VDC, 10 k maximum Digital Outputs Solid state dual FETs, NO or NC 40 VAC/VDC, 150 mA maximum 1A leakage in off state 15 on-state resistance Connections Terminal strip (inter-lockable) Update Interval 10 seconds Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing Materials Of Construction ABS Plastic, UL94V-0 Dimensions 2.75"H x 2.34"W x 1.2"D (7.0 x 5.9 x 3.0 cm) Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year SOM-84 SOM-102
808
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Typically Hard Wired or Interlocked On Rail
418 MHz Activator SG PG Comm SG PG Comm
www.buplhvac.com
NETWORK & WIRELESS
BAPI WIRELESS SYSTEM OUTPUT MODULES BA/COM, BA/ROM, BA/RYOM, BA/RYOL, BA/SOM, BA/VOM
Typically Service Button to Program Output Modules To RF Transmitters
SG PG Comm
SG PG Comm
www.buplhvac.com
SG PG Comm
SG PG Comm
www.buplhvac.com
SG PG Comm
SG PG Comm
www.buplhvac.com
SG PG Comm
www.buplhvac.com
Service Button
Service Button
Service Button
Service Button
Power Bus*
9 to 36 VDC 17 to 31 VAC
Power Bus*
Power Bus*
9 to 36 VDC 17 to 31 VAC Relative Output
Power Bus*
9 to 36 VDC 17 to 31 VAC Votage + Output --
Power Bus
Not Required Loop Voltage 9 to 36 VDC Current + Output --
Switched Output
*17-30 VAC Power To Controller Device (Typically A Relay) To Controller Thermistor Input
O-5 VDC or O-10 VDC To Controller
24 VDC Signal To Controller
Typical BA/RCV RF Receiver With RS485 Communication
BA/R YOM Digital Output N.O. or N.C.
BA/ROM Thirmistor Simulat 0K type 2 @ 77F or 10K type 3 @ 77F
BA/VOM O-5 VDC Output or O-10 VDC Output
BA/COM 4-20 MA Output
*The power bus maybe split when needed and is required when module current draw exceeds the system power supply. If the power bus is split re-established with an indendently power source. Do not parallel power sources.
Interlocking wiring plugs with screw terminals, hard wire or snap together on DIN rail
Service button, used to assign output modules to transmitters
SG www.buplhvac.com SG PG PG Comm Comm
Service Button
418 MHz Antenna SG PG Comm

www.bapihvac.com
SG www.buplhvac.com SG PG PG Comm Comm

Service Button
SG PG Comm
www.buplhvac.com
SG PG Comm
SG PG Comm
www.buplhvac.com
SG PG Comm
Service Button
Service Button
13
MODEL BA/COM-C-EZ BA/COM-E-EZ BA/COM-H-EZ BA/COM-M-EZ BA/ROM-102-EZ BA/ROM-103-EZ BA/RYOM-NC-EZ BA/RYOM-NO-EZ BA/SOM-10-EZ BA/SOM-60-EZ BA/SOM-80-EZ BA/SOM-84-EZ BA/SOM-102-C-EZ BA/VOM-10-C-EZ BA/VOM-10-E-EZ BA/VOM-10-H-EZ BA/VOM-10-M-EZ BA/RYOL-NC-EZ BA/RYOL-NO-EZ
DESCRIPTION BAPI wireless current output module, 4-20 mA = 50F to 90F BAPI wireless current output module, 4-20 mA = 60F to 80F BAPI wireless current output module, 4-20 mA = -20F to 120F BAPI wireless current output module, 4-20 mA = 0 to 100% RH BAPI wireless thermistor simulation output module, 10K type 24 (35F to 120F ) BAPI wireless thermistor simulation output module, 10K type 3 (32F to 120F ) Relay output momentary, normally open output Relay output momentary, normally closed output BAPI wireless setpoint output module, 0 to 10 VDC BAPI wireless setpoint output module, 0 to 10K 0 to 20K output 10 to 30K output 10 k-2 thermistor, 50F to 90F BAPI wireless voltage output module, 0-10 VDC = 50F to 90F BAPI wireless voltage output module, 0-10 VDC = 60F to 80F BAPI wireless voltage output module, 0-10 VDC = -20F to 120F BAPI wireless voltage output module, 0-10 VDC = 0 to 100% RH Relay output latching, normally closed default Relay output latching, normally open default
Power bus* Power bus* Power bus* Power bus* Power bus
not required
9 to 36 VDC Switched 17 to 31 VAC output
Relative output
Votage + output --
Loop voltage 9 to 36 VDC
Current + output --
*17-30 VAC Power
To controller device (typically a relay) (1730 VAC or 930 VDC)
To controller thermistor input
0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC To controller
9 to 36 VDC Current cignal to controller
Typical BA/EZ-RCV RF receiver with RS485 communication
BA/EZ-RYOM Digital output N.O. or N.C.
BA/EZ-ROM Thermistor simulator 10 k type 2 @ 77F or 10 k type 3 @ 77F
BA/EZ-VOM 0-5 VDC output or 0-10 VDC output
BA/EZ-COM 4-20 mA output
*The power bus may be split when needed and is required when module current draw exceeds the system power supply. If the power bus is split, re-establish with an independent power source. Do not parallel power sources.
NETWORK & WIRELESS
BA/AOM-CONN VC350-12
RELATED PRODUCTS Pluggable terminal block kit Power supply 24 VAC to 12 VDC, 350 mA
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
809
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION The EE240 Series feature advanced sensor technology and ease of installation. An extendable assortment of sensing probes allows for usage in many applications. The EE240 Series is capable of point to point or complex networking. Wireless Transmitter EE244 Every transmitter can be equipped with up to three sensing probes. An optional display is available to provide local indication. As a standard, batteries provide for the power supply. For more power demanding applications the device can be powered through an external adapter. Wireless Transmitter EE245 The elegant housing combines the measurement of temperature, humidity and CO2. An optional display is available to provide local indication. As a standard, batteries provide for the power supply. For more power demanding applications the device can be powered through an external adapter. Base Station EE241 and EE242 The point-to-point connection can be accomplished with the EE241. The conguration at the factory of the up to four transmitted measurement values is done in accordance with your specications, meaning that the values are available as analog outputs (0 - 5 / 10 V or 4 - 20 mA) immediately after installation. For more complex networks (up to 500 transmitters or up to 2000 measurement values) the user-congurable EE242 is available. Independent of the topology of the network, the integrated Webserver and the Ethernet interface warrants highest exibility in the conguration of the network with a computer. A simple integration of the measurement system in the customer's network and the easy remote access and diagnostic of the measurement data are additional helpful features. The output values
WIRELESS SENSOR FOR HUMIDITY / TEMPERATURE / CO2 EE240 SERIES
NEW!
EE245 EE244* EE241
*Temperature sensor sold separately can be transferred as an analog signal, as well as in digital form via Ethernet. For network integration, Modbus is supported. Router Series EE244-R, EE245-R The radio range depends greatly on local circumstances. With the router series EE244-R obstacles can be bypassed or the transmission distance expanded.
FEATURES Interchangeable Sensing Probes Remote Probes up to 33 ft (10 m) Battery Operating Life up to 1 Year Webserver Ethernet Long Rangeability
13
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage EE241/EE242 EE244 EE245/-R Battery EE244, EE245 Supply Current EE241 EE242 EE244 Frequency Communication EE242 Outputs EE241/EE242 2 3 6 Measurement Range EE07-PFT1/-MFT9 EE03-FT9 EE07-PT1/MT EE871 Accuracy EE07-PFT1/-MFT9 EE03-FT9 EE07-PT1/MT 24V AC/DC 20% 24 VDC 8-28 VDC / 12 VAC 4 x 1.5V AA 70mA at 24 VDC 150mA at 24 VDC 20mA at 24 VDC 2.4 GHz Webserver, Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP 4 x 0-5 VDC 4 x 0-10 VDC 4 x 4-20mA 0-100% RH / -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C) 0-95% RH / -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) -40-176F (-40 to 80C) 0 to 2000ppm 0 to 5000ppm 0 to 10000ppm 2% RH (0 to 90% RH); 3% RH (90 to 100% RH); 0.18F (0.1C) at 68F (20C) 3% RH (10 to 100% RH) at 69.8F (21C); 0.54F (0.3C) at 68F (20C) 0.18F (0.1C) at 68F (20C) EE871 (50ppm+2% of m.v.) (50ppm+3% of m.v.) (100ppm+5% of m.v.) EE245 Temperature 0,3 C (at 20 C) / 0,4 C (20...55 C) RH 3 % (30...70 %) / 5 % (70...90 %) CO2 2000ppm ( 50ppm +2 % of m.v.) 5000ppm ( 50ppm +3 % of mv.v) Transmission Power 10mW Range Up to 330 ft (100 m) indoors Up to 3300 ft (1000 m) line of sight Operating Temperature EE241/EE242 Without display -22 to 122F (-30 to 50C) With display -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C) EE244 Without display -40 to 122F (-40 to 50C) With display -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C) EE245/-R 23 to 131F (-5 to 55C) Materials Of Construction EE241/EE242 Polycarbonate (PC), IP20 EE244 Polycarbonate (PC), IP65 EE245 Polycarbonate (PC), IP30 Dimensions EE241/EE242 4.3" x 3.5" x 2.4"(10.8 x 9.0 x 6.2 cm) EE244 5.3" x 3.5" x 2.4"(13.5 x 9.0 x 6.2 cm) EE245 1.25" x 3.34" x 5.35" (3.2 x 8.5 x 13.6 cm) Weight 1.94 lbs (0.88 kg) Approvals ETSI / FCC Part 15.247 / IC RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
NETWORK & WIRELESS
810
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
OPERATION
MODEL EE242-A2 EE242-A2D EE242-A3 EE242-A3D EE242-A6 EE242-A6D EE241-A2 EE241-A2D EE241-A3 EE241-A3D EE241-A6 EE241-A6D EE244-RA EE244-AA1 EE244-AA1D EE244-AA2 EE244-AA2D EE244-AA3 EE244-AA3D EE245 EE245-R EE07-PFT1 EE07-MFT9 EE03-FT9 EE07-PT1 EE07-MT EE871-2C95 EE871-5C95 EE871-10C95 HA010801 HA010802 HA010803 HA010328 HA010329 HA010330 HA010203 HA010403 HA010209 HA010333 March 2014
NETWORK & WIRELESS

WIRING CONNECTION
WIRELESS SENSOR FOR HUMIDITY / TEMPERATURE / CO2 EE240 SERIES
The data transmission is based on the IEEE 802.15.4 protocol with a transmission frequency of 2.4 GHz, which can be used worldwide without any additional cost. A special identication address, checksums, handshakes, and bidirectional communication provide the highest transmission reliability. Typical radio ranges are 330 ft (100 m) for indoor applications and 3300 ft (1000 m) in the open eld. Greater radio ranges are easily obtainable with routers. The self-conguring, scalable, and self-healing mesh network - even when a connection fails - is another component contributing to the improvement of the transmission reliability and security. The highest possible data security level is accomplished with a preset encryption key according to AES-128.
DESCRIPTION Base station "wireless network" 0-5V without display Base station "wireless network" 0-5V without display Base station "wireless net work" 0-10V without display Base station "wireless net work" 0-10V with display Base station "wireless net work" 4-20mA without display Base station "wireless net work" 4-20mA wtih display Base station "point-to-point" 0-5V without display Base station "point-to-point" 0-5V with display Base station "point-to-point" 0-10V without display Base station "point-to-point" 0-10V with display Base station "point-to-point" 4-20mA without display Base station "point-to-point" 4-20mA with display Router 2.4 GHz Transmitter with 1 probe option without display Transmitter with 1 probe option with display Transmitter with 2 probe option without display Transmitter with 2 probe option with display Transmitter with 3 probe option without display Transmitter with 3 probe option with display RH/CO2/Temperature wall sensor transmitter Router 2.4 GHz wall mount RH/T probe for standard applications RH/T probe for clean room applications, food and pharmaceutical industry RH/T module for installation in small spaces or obtrusive mounting applications T probe for standard applications T probe for clean room applications, food and pharmaceutical industry C02 probe for standard applications 0-2000ppm C02 probe for standard applications 0-5000ppm C02 probe for standard applications 0-10000ppm Probe cable for EE07 6.5 ft (2 m) Probe cable for EE07 16.4 ft (5 m) Probe cable for EE07 32.8 ft (10 m) Connection cable for EE03 6.5 ft (2 m) Connection cable for EE03 16.4 ft (5 m) Antenna cable 6.5 ft (2 m) Bracket for rail installation Reference probes Duct mounting kit for EE07 Crossover cable (PC to base station)
13
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
811
NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK & WIRELESS

IDEAL WIRELESS SENSOR SYSTEM 58-G1 AND 58-N-1101 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The IDEAL Wireless Sensor System enables wireless monitoring of environmental conditions for building automation, HVAC control, and energy management. The system includes a growing list of wireless sensor devices for measuring temperature, humidity, light, pressure, CO2, and other parameters. All sensor devices communicate wirelessly to a common gateway which supports a wide range of industry standard BAS protocols.
NEW!
58-N-1101
INSTALLATION The 58-N-1101 series sensors have integrated anges for wall mounting, no wiring is needed. The sensors need to be congured to a gateway prior to installation. The 58-G1 wireless gateway can be wall mounted using the integrated mounting anges or set on a tabletop. 24V AC/DC power is required and connects through a removable terminal block. It has a USB Type A port for sensor interface and a USB Type B port for PC interface conguration. It also has a network port for ethernet, RS-485, or FTT-10 (model dependant).
FEATURES
Wide range of sensor types Integrates easily into existing BAS systems including BACnet,Modbus, LonWorks, Metasys N2, and XML. Gateway supports up to 100 senssors and 800 sensor points Gateway can be congigured for redundancy in critical applications All devices approved for use in the US and Canada
58-G1
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 58-N-1101-x-N Non-Replaceable +25 year battery 58-G1 24 VAC/VDC Supply Current 1A Frequency 58-G1, 58-N-1101 2.4 GHz Protocol 58-G1 Serial ,BACnet IP,BACnet Ethernet BACnet MSTP, Modbus TCP,Modbus RTU SNMP, N2,LonWorks Accuracy Temperature +/- 1F (50-100F ) Humidity +/- 3% (10-90%) Range 58-N-1101 Data - 100 ft typically Operating Temperature -4 to 122F(-20 to 50C) indoor use only Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing Materials Of Construction ABS plastic, UL94-5VA rating Dimensions 58-N-1101-x-N 4.2"W x 2.1"H x 1.1"D (10.6 x 5.3 x 2.7 cm) 58-G1 6.6"W x 4.4"H x 1.75"D (16.7 x 11.1 x 4.4 cm) Weight 58-N-110 0.5 lbs (0.22 kg) 58-G1 1.0 lbs (.45 kg) Approvals FCC Part 15 and Industry Canada Contains FCC ID: OA3MRF24J0MA Contains IC: 7693A-24J40MA RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 2 year
13
MODEL 58-N-1101-T-N 58-N-1101-TH-N 58-N-1101-TT-N 58-N-1101-L-N 58-G1-101-SERIAL 58-G1-101-BACNET-IP 58-G1-101-BACNET-ETH 58-G1-101-BACNET-MSTP 58-G1-101-MODBUS-TCP 58-G1-101-MODBUS-RTU 58-G1-101-SNMP 58-G1-101-METASYS-N2 58-G1-101-LON DESCRIPTION Wireless temperature sensor (Non-replaceable 25+ year battery) Wireless temperature and humidity sensor (Non-replaceable 25+ year battery) Wireless temperature sensor internal and external 10K RTD (Non-replaceable 25+ year battery) Wireless light sensor (Non-replaceable 25+ year battery) BAS Gateway - Serial output to PC via USB BAS Gateway - BACNET/IP via Ethernet interface and serial output via USB BAS Gateway - BACNET/Ethernet via Ethernet interface and serial output via USB BAS Gateway - BACNET/MSTP via RS-485 interface and serial output via USB BAS Gateway - MODBUS TCP via Ethernet interface and serial output via USB BAS Gateway - MODBUS RTU via Ethernet interface and serial output via USB BAS Gateway - SNMP via Ethernet interface and serial output via USB BAS Gateway - METASYS N2 via RS-485 interface and serial output via USB BAS Gateway - LonWorks via FTT-10 interface and serial output via USB
NETWORK & WIRELESS
812
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

ZigBee (optional antenna) (Pink striped antenna for 2.4GHz)
NETWORK & WIRELESS
ENOCEAN AND ZIGBEE WIRELESS MANAGER AND GATEWAY SMARTSTRUXURE LITE MPM-GW SERIES
The MPM-GW Series multi-purpose wireless manager and gateway enable the control, monitoring and management of entire sites via StruxureWare Building Expert. It has an aesthetic look, similar to a router, allowing for in-room deployment. It supports control and gateway functionalities for wireless peripherals for variety of applications. All models have an embedded web server hosting Building Expert, a web-based intelligent building management system that allows complete conguration and management of small sites.
Wireless control of EnOcean end-devices (128 points per MPM) Wireless control of ZigBee end-devices (30 peripherals per MPM) Programmable via StruxureWare Building Expert Points visible through BACnet, EcoStruxure Web Services (EWS) & oBIX Real-time response to scripting/graphical programming
MPM-GW
DIMENSIONS
EnOcean (optional antenna) (Green striped antenna for 315MHz) (Gray striped antenna for 868MHz) (Yellow striped antenna for 902MHz)
191mm (7.52 in)
116mm (4.57 in)
24V AC/DC CANbus H CANbus L GND
Ethernet 100B/T
for DIN rail mount
13
45mm (1.77 in)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency 24 VAC/VDC, 50/60Hz EnOcean: 315MHz, 868MHz or 902MHz; ZigBee: 2.4GHz, 16RF Channels Receiver Sensitivity EnOcean -95dBm; ZigBee -101dBm/-105dBm (amplied) Range Line of sight: EnOcean 100ft/30m; ZigBee peripherals 100ft/30m, ZigBee MPM 300ft/100m Communication ZigBee Pro, EnOcean, BACnet/IP. CANbus (125500Kbps), Ethernet(10/100Mbps) Supported Protocols BACnet, EWS, oBIX, FTP, EnOcean, ZigBee, CANbus Memory 64MB Flash Antenna External whip, RP SMA Connector Clock Backup Real-time clock, Battery backed (10,000 hrs) ARM9 32-bit, 400MHz Processor Enclosure Rigid ABS, UL94V0-5VB Maximum Number Of Wireless Modules EnOcean (wireless): 128 points; ZigBee (wireless): 30 peripherals Data Storage 2GB ash for local storage Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Operating Humidity 0-90% RH non-codensing Storage Temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C ) Mounting Din-rail, wall or ceiling mount Dimensions 7.52"H x 4.57"W x 1.77"D (191 x 116 x 45 mm) Weight 0.7 lbs (0.32 kg) Approvals UL916, CSA, FCC, ICES-003, CE, Japanese Radio Law, RoHS Warranty 1.5 year
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Manager StruxureWare integration
EnOcean
ZigBee
315 MHz
868 MHz
902 MHz x
Building Expert
Part numbers MPM-NW-000-5045 MPM-GW-C00-5045 MPM-GW-D00-5045 MPM-GW-E00-5045 MPM-GW-CI0-5045 MPM-GW-DI0-5045 MPM-GW-EI0-5045 MPM-GW-0I0-5045
x x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Note: Certification training through Schneider Electric is required before ordering. Call Kele for details. USA uses 902 MHz and 315 MHz frequencies for EnOcean. Europe uses 868 MHz frequency.
March 2014
High power x x x x
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
813
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION
UNIVERSAL NETWORK AND WIRELESS CONTROLLERS SMARTSTRUXURE LITE MPM-UN SERIES
The MPM-UN Series multi-purpose manager and controllers enable the control, monitoring and management of entire sites via StruxureWare Building Expert.They canalso be used for wired and wireless zone control in larger buildings. They support variety of HVAC, lighting and metering applications. All models have an embedded web server hosting Building Expert, a web-based intelligent building management system that allows complete conguration and management of small sites.
FEATURES
Control of wired end-devices (6 inputs, 6 outputs) Wireless control of EnOcean end-devices (optional, 128 points per MPM) Wireless control of ZigBee end-devices (optional, 30 peripherals per MPM) Modbus (optional). Programmable via StruxureWare Building Expert Points visible through BACnet, EcoStruxure Web Services (EWS) & oBIX Real-time response to scripting/graphical programming
126mm DIMENSIONS (4.96 in) 126mm (4.96 in) 132mm (5.20 in)
NEW!
MPMUN
WIRING
Output port
EnOcean (optional) (Green striped antenna for 315MHz) (Gray striped antenna for 868MHz) (Yellow striped antenna for 902MHz)
OP 1A OP 1B OP 2A OP 2B 15VDC AO1 GND AO2 GND AO3 GND AO4 B A GND AI6 GND AI5 GND AI4 GND AI3 GND AI2 GND AI1
132mm (5.20 in)
ZigBee (optional) (Pink striped antenna for 2.4GHz)

24V AC/DC CANbus H CANbus L GND 24V AC/DC CANbus H CANbus L GND
for DIN rail mount
13
Supply Voltage Frequency Receiver Sensitivity
34mm (1.34 in) 34mm (1.34 in)
for DIN rail mount
Ethernet 100B/T
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VAC/VDC, 50/60Hz EnOcean: 315MHz, 868MHz or 902MHz; ZigBee: 2.4GHz, 16RF Channels EnOcean -95dBm; ZigBee -101dBm/-105dBm (amplied) Line of sight: EnOcean 100ft/30m; ZigBee peripherals 100ft/30m, ZigBee MPM 300ft/100m ZigBee Pro, EnOcean, BACnet, CANbus (125500Kbps), Ethernet(10/100Mbps), Modbus BACnet, EWS, oBIX, FTP, EnOcean, ZigBee, CANbus, Modbus 64MB Flash ARM9 32-bit, 400MHz 2GB ash for local storage External whip, RP SMA Connector Real-time clock, Battery backed (10,000 hrs) 6 universal, congurable, 14-bit resolution (analog: 4-20mA, 0-10V; digital: dry contact, thermistor: 1-100K)
Input port
RS 485 connectors for Modbus (optional)
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Range Communication Supported Protocols Memory Processor Data Storage Antenna Clock Backup Input
Manager StruxureWare integration EnOcean ZigBee I/O
6 outputs
315 MHz
868 MHz
902 MHz
Building Expert
Part numbers MPM-UN-004-5045 MPM-UN-0I4-5045 MPM-UN-C00-5045 MPM-UN-C04-5045 MPM-UN-CI4-5045 MPM-UN-D04-5045 MPM-UN-DI4-5045 MPM-UN-E00-5045 MPM-UN-E04-5045 MPM-UN-EI4-5045
x
x x x
x
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
x
x x x
x
x x x
Maximum Number Of Wireless Modules EnOcean (wireless): 128 points; ZigBee (wireless): 30 peripherals Outputs 2 relay (24V, 1.1A each), 4 analog (0-12V, 50mA max, 12-bit resolution) Storage Temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Operating Humidity 0-90% RH non-codensing Rigid ABS, UL94V0-5VB Enclosure Mounting Din-rail, wall or ceiling mount Dimensions 4.96"H x 5.20"W x 1.34"D (126 x 132 x 34 mm) 0.5lbs (0.23 kg) Weight UL916, CSA, FCC, ICES-003, CE, Japanese Approvals Radio Law, RoHS 1.5 years Warranty
x
x x x x x
x
x x x x x
x
x x x x x
x
x x x x x
814
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
Modbus
6 inputs
High power
x
x
x
x x
x x
NEW!

NETWORK & WIRELESS
NETWORK AND WIRELESS VARIABLE AIR VOLUME CONTROLLER AND MANAGER SMARTSTRUXURE LITE MPM-VA SERIES
The MPM-VA Series VAV controllers and managers enable the control, monitoring and management of entire sites via StruxureWare Building Expert.They can also be used for wired and wireless zone control in larger buildings. This series of controllers support variety of variable-air-volume, HVAC, lighting and metering applications. All models have an embedded web server hosting Building Expert, a web-based intelligent building management system that allows complete conguration and management of small sites. Pressure sensor with actuator as an option Supports VAV functionalities and applications Control of wired end-devices (6 inputs, 6 outputs). Wireless control of EnOcean end-devices (optional, 128 points per MPM) Wireless control of ZigBee end-devices (optional, 30 peripherals per MPM) Supports Modbus Programmable via StruxureWare Building Expert Points visible through BACnet, EcoStruxure Web Services (EWS) & oBIX Real-time response to scripting/graphical programming
MPMVA
WIRING
Output port
ZigBee (optional) (Pink striped an tenna for 2.4GHz)
24V AC/DC CAN H CAN L GND
EnOcean (optional) (Green striped antenna for 315MHz) (Gray striped antenna for 868MHz) (Yellow striped antenna for 902MHz)
DIMENSIONS
191mm (7.52 in)
Actuator (optional)
141mm (5.55 in)
OP 1A OP 1B OP 2A OP 2B 15VDC AO1 GND AO2 GND AO3 GND AO4
Ethernet 100B/T
63mm (2.48 in)
for DIN rail mount
RS 485 connectors for Modbus
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency Receiver Sensitivity Range Communication Supported Protocols Memory Processor Sensor Type Range Data Storage Actuation Type Torque Antenna Clock Backup Enclosure Input Maximum Number Of Wireless Modules Output Storage Temperature Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Mounting Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty 24 VAC /VDC, 50/60Hz EnOcean: 315MHz, 868MHz or 902MHz; ZigBee: 2.4GHz, 16RF Channels EnOcean -95dBm; ZigBee -101dBm/-105dBm (amplied) Line of sight: EnOcean 100ft/30m; ZigBee peripherals 100ft/30m, ZigBee MPM 300ft/100m ZigBee Pro, EnOcean, BACnet, CANbus (125-500Kbps), Ethernet(10/100Mbps), Modbus BACnet, EWS, oBIX, FTP, EnOcean, ZigBee, CANbus, Modbus 64MB Flash ARM9 32-bit, 400MHz Flow Sensor -2 to 2 in WC, Accuracy: 3% m.v. 2GB ash for local storage Damper Actuator 45in-lb (5Nm), Rotation: 0 to 95, Shaft Diameter: 1/4" to 3/4" External whip, RP SMA Connector Real-time clock, Battery backed (10,000 hrs) Rigid ABS, UL94V0-5VB 6 universal, congurable, 14-bit resolution (analog: 4-20mA, 0-10V; digital: dry contact, thermistor: 1-100K) EnOcean (wireless): 128 points; ZigBee (wireless): 30 peripherals 2 relay (24V, 1.1A each), 4 analog (0-12V, 50mA max, 12-bit resolution) -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) 32 to 140F (0 to 60C 00 to 90% non-codensing90% RH non-codensing Din-rail, wall or ceiling mount 7.52"H x 5.55"W x 2.48"D (191 x 141 x 63 mm) 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg) UL916, CSA, FCC, ICES-003, CE, Japanese Radio Law, RoHS 1.5 years
B A GND AI6 GND AI5 GND AI4 GND AI3 GND AI2 GND AI1
Input port
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Manager StruxureWare integration
EnOcean
ZigBee
I/O
VAV Flow sensor x x x
6 outputs
315 MHz
902 MHz
868 MHz
Part numbers MPM-VA-004-5045 MPM-VA-0I4-5045 MPM-VA-C04-5045 MPM-VA-CI4-5045 MPM-VA-D04-5045 MPM-VA-DI4-5045 MPM-VA-E04-5045 MPM-VA-EI4-5045 MPM-VS-004-5045 MPM-VS-0I4-5045 MPM-VS-C04-5045 MPM-VS-CI4-5045 MPM-VS-D04-5045 MPM-VS-DI4-5045 MPM-VS-E04-5045 MPM-VS-EI4-5045
x x x
x x x x x
x x x x x x x x x x
x x x
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
x
x x x x
x
x x x x
x
x x x x
x
x x x x
x
x x x x x x x x x x x x
x
x
x
x x x x x x x x x x x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
815
Actuator x x x
Building Expert
Modbus
6 inputs
High power
x
x x x x
NETWORK & WIRELESS

ZIGBEE WIRELESS I/O MODULE SMARTSTRUXURE LITE SEC SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SEC Series Smart Terminal Controllers enable the wireless control of a wide variety of equipment to optimize use, comfort and power consumption. They are the control arm of MPM series devices, all part of the SmartStruxure Lite line of products. The SEC-TE is equipped with the smallest control engine in the industry. It supports local scripting/programmability, providing distributed intelligence and enabling redundant control solutions.
NEW!
SECTE
DIMENSIONS
108mm (4.25 in) 176mm (6.93 in) 56mm (2.20 in)
for DIN rail mount
FEATURES
Programmable Real-time response to scripting 802.15.4 Wireless Zigbee protocol
WIRING
ZigBee (optional pink striped antenna for 2.4GHz)
GND AI1 AI2 AI3* AI4 GND AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 NC NC 24VAC GND
*AI3 can be used for pulse counting

R5A R5B R4A R4B R3B Live R2B Live R1B Live Neutral Neutral Neutral Neutral GND AI1 AI2 AI3* AI4 GND AO1 AO2 AO3 AO4 NC NC 24VAC GND
Transformer wiring
R5A R5B R4A R4B R3B Live
Only on 115VAC and 230VAC models
R2B Live R1B Live Neutral Neutral Neutral Neutral
13
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency Receiver Sensitivity Range Communication Supported Protocols Antenna Enclosure Input Output Storage Temperature Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Mounting Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty 24 VAC/VDC, 115 VAC, 230 VAC, 50/60Hz ZigBee: 2.4GHz, 16RF Channels -101dBm/-105dBm (amplied) Line of sight: 100ft/30m 802.15.4 ZigBee ZigBee Internal, Optional external whip, RP SMA Connector Rigid ABS, UL94V0-5VB 4 universal, congurable, 14-bit resolution (analog: 4-20mA, 0-10V; digital: dry contact, thermistor: 1-100K) 5 line-power relays (230VAC max, 5A each), 4 analog (0-12V, 50mA max, 12-bit resolution) -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) 0 to 140F (0 to 60C) 00 to 90% non-codensing90% RH noncondensing Din-rail, wall or ceiling mount 4.25"H x 6.93"w x 2.20"D (108 x 176 x 56 mm) 1.3 lbs (0.59 kg) UL916, CSA, FCC, ICES-003, CE, Japanese Radio Law, RoHS 1.5 years
NETWORK & WIRELESS
ZigBee I/O 110-120 VAC Power 220-240 VAC x x x x x x x x x x x
4 universal inputs
4 analog outputs
External antenna
5 digital outputs
Part numbers SEC-TEA-115-5045 SEC-TEA-230-5045 SEC-TEA-24-5045 SEC-TEA-R-115-5045 SEC-TEA-R-230-5045 SEC-TEA-R-24-5045 SEC-TEB-115-5045 SEC-TEB-230-5045 SEC-TEB-24-5045 SEC-TEB-R-115-5045 SEC-TEB-R-230-5045 SEC-TEB-R-24-5045
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
x x x x x x
Note: Certification training through Schneider Electric is required before ordering. Call Kele for details.
816
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
24 VAC
High power
March 2014
NEW!

NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN WIRELESS ROOM CONTROLLER E3X-MRCFP SERIES
These small transceivers respond to self-powered wireless occupancy sensors and light switches and other ILLUMRA RF transmitters. The Room Controllers may receive input from wired occupancy sensors to automatically turn off lights when no one is in a room. Additionally, the room controllers can extend the reach of wired sensors by wirelessly transmitting sensor status to other ILLUMRA receivers. Installs in minutes Easy conguration Requires no switch leg wires Communicates with ILLUMRA switches, sensors and transmitters Error checking ensures response only to appropriate wireless switches One transmitter can control unlimited receivers within range Can act as a repeater to extend range E3X-MRCFP-04
WIRING
Single Pole or Multi-way Wireless Switch (1 or more wireless light switches)
MANY SWITCHES, WIRED SENSOR AND/OR WIRELESS SENSOR, 1 RECEIVER, 3 ZONES AC POWER 277V BROWN AC POWER 120V BLACK AC POWER NEUTRAL WHITE RELAY CONTACT RED RELAY CONTACT RED GROUND GREEN OR BARE AC POWER WHITE FIXTURE
NWO-R12-R27NP1
+24VDC RED COMMON BLACK CONTROL ON BLUE HOLD ON YELLOW HOLD OFF BROWN NWO-R12-R27NP1
AC POWER BLACK
E3X-MRCFP-04
OUT 3 OUT 2 OUT 1 IN 1 GND VCC
+24VDC RED COMMON BLACK CONTROL ON BLUE HOLD ON YELLOW HOLD OFF BROWN NWO-R12-R27NP1
AC POWER 277V BROWN AC POWER 120V BLACK AC POWER NEUTRAL WHITE RELAY CONTACT RED RELAY CONTACT RED
GROUND GREEN OR BARE AC POWER WHITE FIXTURE
13
AC POWER BLACK
NETWORK & WIRELESS
+24VDC RED COMMON BLACK CONTROL ON BLUE HOLD ON YELLOW HOLD OFF BROWN
AC POWER 277V BROWN AC POWER 120V BLACK AC POWER NEUTRAL WHITE RELAY CONTACT RED RELAY CONTACT RED
GROUND GREEN OR BARE AC POWER WHITE FIXTURE
AC POWER BLACK
BATTERY-FREE, WIRELESS SWITCHES
BATTERY-FREE, WIRELESS SENSOR
BREAKER PANEL
HOT BLACK +24VDC COMMON CONTROL OUTPUT ANY 3-WIRE 24VDC SENSOR NEUTRAL WHITE GROUND GREEN OR BARE
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
817
NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN WIRELESS ROOM CONTROLLER E3X-MRCFP SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Channels E3X-MRCFP-04 E3X-MRCFP-13 ESX-MRCFP-22 Communication Output Rating Transmit Frequency Transmit Range 8-30VDC 4 outputs 3 outputs, 1 input 2 outputs, 2 inputs EnOcean wireless 100mA max. per channel 315 MHz 50-150 feet
NEW!
Operating Temperature -13 to 140F (-25 to 60C) Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing Dimensions 1.30"W x 2.88"H x 0.67"L (3.30 x 7.32 x 1.70 cm) Weight 0.1 lbs (0.05 kg) Approvals FCC, IC Warranty 3 years E3X-R12GP
Operating Humidity Enclosure Mounting Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty
MODEL E3X-MRCFP-04 E3X-MRCFP-13 E3X-MRCFP-22 DESCRIPTION Room controller, 0 inputs, 4 outputs, 8-28VDC, 315MHz Room controller, 1 input, 3 outputs, 8-28VDC, 315 MHz Room controller, 2 inputs, 2 outputs, 8-28VDC, 315 MHz
ENOCEAN WIRELESS PLUG-IN RELAY RECEIVER AND DIMMER E3X-X12GP SERIES
13
DESCRIPTION
The wirelessly controlled ILLUMRA Plug-in Relay Receiver responds to selfpowered wireless light switches and other ILLUMRA transmitters to provide ON/ OFF control of lights and other plug-in devices. The receiver may also respond to signals from wireless occupancy sensors to provide automatic control of electrical loads. The easy-to-install Plug-in Dimmer/Relay Receiver provides dimming and relay (on/off) control of lamps and other devices.
NETWORK & WIRELESS
FEATURES
Plugs into any 120V outlet Fast, simple programming Requires no switch-leg wires DIM or ON/OFF control of lights
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Watts Transmit Frequency Transmit Range Contact Rating E3X-D12GP E3X/E9X-R12GP Connections Communication Operating Temperature 120VAC 1W 315 MHz, 902 MHz 50-150 feet 2.5A 6A 110V plug & receptacle EnOcean wireless -13 to 122F (-25 to 50C) 0-95% RH non-condensing Plastic Plug in 2.07"W x 3.26"H x 1.42"D (8.2 x 5.3 x 3.6 cm) 0.5 lbs (0.23 kg) ETL: UL244A (USA), CSAc22.2#14-05 (Canada); FCC, IC 3 years
MODEL E3X-D12GP E3X-R12GP E9X-R12GP DESCRIPTION Plug-in dimmer/relay, 120 VAC, 300W, 50/60 Hz, 315 MHz Plug-in relay, 120 VAC, 500W, 3A ballast, 6A general 50/60 Hz, 315 MHz Plug-in relay, 120 VAC, 500W, 3A ballast, 6A general 50/60 Hz, 902 MHz
818
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN WIRELESS DIMMER/CONTROLLER E3X-DXXFP SERIES
The ILLUMRA Dimmers respond to wireless light switches and transmitters to control dimmable LED power supplies or dimmable uorescent ballasts. The dimmer can also turn off or dim lights based on signals from wireless or wired sensors detecting occupancy or available natural light. The wirelessly controlled LED dimmer is perfect for energy-saving applications such as architectural dimming, daylighting, load shedding, and manual ON / automatic OFF control. The dimmer may also be used for custom lighting applications. Installs in minutes Easy conguration Requires no switch leg wires Variable or ON/OFF control of LEDs, uorescent lights, or actuators A single transmitter can control unlimited dimmers in range Can function as a repeater
E3X-DxxFP
WIRING
EnOcean Wireless Switch Wired Switch ILLUMRA LED DIMMER WITH WIRELESS CONTROL, HARD-WIRED CONTROL AND OCCUPANCY SENSOR INPUT
VIOLET
GREY
WIRELESS CONTROL SIGNAL
TWO-WIRE CONTROL INTERFACE.
MOT IN+ CTL IN+

E3X-D02FP OR E3X-D02FP-M
OUT+ OUTIN8-28 VDC IN+
ANY 12VDC OR 24VDC DIMMABLE LED FIXTURE UP TO 5 AMPS BLACK COMMON (-) ANY 12VDC OR RED +12VDC OR 24VDC OUT (+) 24VDC POWER SUPPLY BLACK LINE WHITE NEUTRAL
ALWAYS INSTALL DEVICES IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODES AND REGULATIONS
13
EnOcean Wireless Sensors
NETWORK & WIRELESS
LOW VOLTAGE WIRING
HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING
BREAKER PANEL
ANY 24VDC WIRED SENSOR
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Communication Output Rating Connections E3X-D01FP E3X-D02FP E3X-D02FP-M Transmit Frequency Transmit Range Operating Temperature 8-30VDC EnOcean wireless 5A Power, 0-10V output, relay control output Power, PWM dimming output Power, PWM dimming output, 0-10V input 315 MHz 50-150 feet -13 to 140F (-25 to 60C) Operating Humidity Enclosure Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty 0-95% RH non-condensing Plastic 1.30"W x 2.88"H x 0.67"D (3.30 x 7.32 x 1.70 cm) 0.1 lbs (0.05 kg) FCC, IC 3 years
MODEL E3X-D01FP E3X-D02FP E3X-D02FP-M DESCRIPTION Wireless 0-10V controller, on/off control, 12-30VDC, 315 MHz Wireless constant voltage LED dimmer, PWM, 8-30VDC, 315 MHz Wireless constant voltage LED dimmer, master, 315 MHz
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
819
NETWORK & WIRELESS

3 WIRE ENOCEAN WIRELESS RELAY RECEIVER E3X-RXX-3HOTP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
ILLUMRA single channel relay receivers allow lights to be controlled by ILUMRA self-powered switches, remotes, and sensors. The line-voltage relays help simplify advanced wireless lighting control.
FEATURES
Installs in minutes, programs in seconds Requires no switch leg or traveler wires Compatible with ILLUMRA transmitters Each unit stores up to 25 light switch IDs Error checking on all packet transfers
NEW!
E3X-R12-3HOTP
RED AC POWER WHITE GROUND GREEN OR BARE FIXTURE E3T-S1AWH E3T-S2AWH BATTERY-FREE, WIRELESS SWITCHES OR OTHER TRANSMITTERS
WIRING
BREAKER PANEL
HOT BLACK NEUTRAL WHITE GROUND GREEN OR BARE
13
E3X-R12-3HOTP
N.O. RED
AC POWER BLACK AC POWER WHITE
WIRELESS CONTROL SIGNAL UP TO 150 FT.
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage ExR-R12-3HOTP 120 VAC ExR-R24-3HOTP 240 VAC ExR-R27-3HOTP 277 VAC Supply Watts 1W 3A, 8A Contact Rating Relay Type A Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz 50-150 feet Transmit Range Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) 0-95% RH non-condensing Operating Humidity Communication Mounting Enclosure Color Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty EnOcean wireless Threaded nipple Plastic White 1.73"W x 2.11"H x 1.09"D (4.39 x 5.36 x 2.77 cm) 0.3 lbs (0.14 kg) ETL: UL244A (USA), CSAc22.2#1405 (Canada); FCC, IC 3 years
MODEL E3X-R12-3HOTP E3X-R24-3HOTP E3X-R27-3HOTP E9X-R12-3HOTP E9X-R24-3HOTP E9X-R27-3HOTP DESCRIPTION 3 wire relay receiver, nipple mounted, 120 VAC, 500W, 315 MHz 3 wire relay receiver, nipple mounted, 240 VAC, 1000W, 315 MHz 3 wire relay receiver, nipple mounted, 277 VAC, 1150W, 315 MHz 3 wire relay receiver, nipple mounted, 120 VAC, 1500W, 902 MHz 3 wire relay receiver, nipple mounted, 240 VAC, 3000W, 902 MHz 3 wire relay receiver, nipple mounted, 277 VAC, 3400W, 902 MHz
820
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

NETWORK & WIRELESS
5 WIRE ENOCEAN WIRELESS RELAY RECEIVER AND REPEATER E3X-RXX-5IBTP SERIES
ILLUMRA single channel relay receivers and repeaters allow lights and fans to be controlled by ILUMRA self-powered wireless switches and sensors. The line-voltage relays help simplify advanced wireless lighting control. Installs in minutes, programs in seconds Requires no switch leg or traveler wires Compatible with all ILLUMRA transmitters 50-150 foot range (typical) Each unit stores up to 25 light switch IDs Error checking ensures receiver only responds to appropriate wireless transmitters
E3X-Rxx-5IBTP
WIRING
Single Pole or Multi-way Wireless Switch (1 or more wireless light switches)*
BREAKER PANEL RED HOT BLACK NEUTRAL WHITE GROUND GREEN OR BARE AC POWER WHITE GROUND GREEN OR BARE FIXTURE
N.O. RED COMMON YELLOW N.C. BLUE AC POWER BLACK AC POWER WHITE
E3T-S1AWH
E3T-S2AWH
E3X-R12-5IBTP E3R-R12-5IBBP
WIRELESS CONTROL SIGNAL UP TO 150 FT.
13
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage E3X-R02-5IBTP E3X-R12-5IBTP E3X-R24-5IBTP E3X-R27-5IBTP Transmit Frequency Transmit Range Contact Rating Relay Type Communication 24 VAC 120 VAC 240 VAC 277 VAC 315 MHz, 902 MHz 50-150 feet 8A C EnOcean wireless Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing Mounting Threaded nipple Enclosure Plastic 1.73"W x 2.11"H x 1.09"D Dimensions (4.39 x 5.36 x 2.77 cm) 0.3 lbs (0.14 kg) Weight Approvals ETL: UL244A (USA), CSAc22.2#1405 (Canada); FCC, IC Warranty 3 years
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL E3X-R02-5IBTP E3X-R12-5IBTP E3X-R24-5IBTP E3X-R27-5IBTP E9X-R02-5IBTP E9X-R12-5IBTP E9X-R24-5IBTP E9X-R27-5IBTP DESCRIPTION 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 24 VAC, 315 MHz 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 120 VAC, 315 MHz 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 240 VAC, 315 MHz 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 277 VAC, 315 MHz 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 24 VAC, 902 MHz 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 120 VAC, 902 MHz 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 240 VAC, 902 MHz 5 wire relay receiver w/repeater, nipple mounted, 277 VAC, 902 MHz
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
821
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION
The Low Voltage Relay Receiver connects wireless light switches and sensors to new or existing control systems. The low voltage receiver responds to up to 80 different transmitters and provides 4 or 8 output channels (dry contact or 8-30V for relay and contactor applications). The outputs can be programmed as either momentary or maintained contacts.
ENOCEAN WIRELESS LOW VOLTAGE RELAY RECEIVER E3R-R04FP SERIES
FEATURES

NEW!
E3R-R04FP
8-30VDC 8-28VAC POWER + -
Control up to 4 or 8 seperate devices or groups of devices Responds to up to 80 transmitters Dry contact output channels for relay/contactor applications Outputs can be programmed as either momentary or maintained contacts.
WIRING
E3T-S1AWH E3T-S2AWH
WIRELESS CONTROL SIGNAL UP TO 150 FT. LINE OF SIGHT
R1
R2
R2
R2
ANY 8-28VAC OR 8-30VDC POWER ADAPTER (SOLD SEPARATELY)
NO1 C1 NC1 NO2 C2 NC2 NO3 C3 NC3 NO4 C4 NC4
ANY LOW VOLTAGE LOAD (FLASHLIGHT BULBS SHOWN).
13
FORM-C RELAYS: THERE ARE FOUR RELAYS IN THE DEVICE. EACH RELAY HAS THREE TERMINALS AVAILABLE FOR EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS: COMMON, NORMALLY OPEN, AND NORMALLY CLOSED. RELAY COMMON TERMINALS: EACH OF THE FOUR RELAYS HAS A COMMON TERMINAL. THE COMMON TERMINALS ARE NOT CONNECTED TO EACH OTHER INSIDE THE DEVICE. IN THE EXAMPLE SHOWN, THE COMMON TERMINALS ARE EXTERNALLY CONNECTED TO THE POSITIVE SUPPLY VOLTAGE. HOWEVER, THE COMMON TERMINALS CAN BE CONNECTED TO ANY VOLTAGE WITHIN THE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE RELAY TERMINALS. SEE DATASHEET.
NETWORK & WIRELESS
LOADS CONNECTED TO THE NORMALLY OPEN CONTACTS WILL BE TURNED OFF UNTIL A WIRELESS SWITCH ACTIVATES THEIR RESPECTIVE CHANNEL. HERE, LOAD LD-2O IS ON, BECAUSE CHANNEL 2 HAS BEEN ACTIVED BY ONE OF THE WIRELESS SWITCHES.
LD-1O
LD-1C
LD-2O
LD-2C
LD-3O
LD-3C
LD-4O
LD-4C
LOADS CONNECTED TO THE NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACTS WILL BE TURNED ON UNTIL A WIRELESS SWITCH ACTIVATES THEIR RESPECTIVE CHANNEL. HERE, LOAD LD-2C IS OFF, BECAUSE CHANNEL 2 HAS BEEN ACTIVED BY ONE OF THE WIRELESS SWITCHES.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 8-30VAC, 8-28VDC Supply Watts 2W max. Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz Transmit Range 50-150 feet Relay Type C, A Communication EnOcean wireless Digital Outputs 4, 8 relay outputs Contact Rating 2A Operating Temperature -13 to 140F (-25 to 60C) Operating Humidity Enclosure Mounting Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty 0-95% RH non-condensing Plastic Panel 3.2"W x 5.1"H x 1.13"D (8.13 x 12.95 x 2.87 cm) 0.3 lbs (0.14 kg) FCC, IC 3 years
MODEL E3R-R04FP-4 E3R-R04FP-8 E9R-R04FP-4 E9R-R04FP-8 DESCRIPTION 4 channel low voltage relay receiver, 8-28VAC/VDC, 315 MHz 8 channel low voltage relay receiver, 8-28VAC/VDC, 315 MHz 4 channel low voltage relay receiver, 8-28VAC/VDC, 902 MHz 8 channel low voltage relay receiver, 8-28VAC/VDC, 902 MHz
822
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

NETWORK & WIRELESS
ENOCEAN WIRELESS SWITCH LEG TRANSMITTER E3T-RXX-2INTP SERIES
The ILLUMRA Single Channel Switch Leg Transmitter (SLT) replaces wire between an electrical device and a control switch. The SLT senses status of photocell, timer, or manual switch master circuit to control wireless slave receiver(s). These transmitters communicate with ILLUMRA's E3R-x and E9R-x series of receivers and E3X-x and E9X-x series of transceiver controllers (model frequency dependent).
E3T-Rxx-2INTP
Installs in minutes Easy-to-congure Eliminates need for switch-leg wires Unique ID of each SLT activates only the intended reciever(s)
WIRING
Basic Installation of Switch Leg Transmitter
BREAKER PANEL #1 HOT BLACK NEUTRAL WHITE LOAD GROUND GREEN OR BARE AC POWER RED LOAD BREAKER PANEL #2 AC POWER BLACK
HOT BLACK GROUND GREEN OR BARE NEUTRAL WHITE
AC POWER BLACK GROUND GREEN OR BARE AC POWER WHITE

AC POWER WHITE AC POWER BLACK
GROUND GREEN OR BARE
OFF
COM. BLACK
N.O. RED
WIRELESS CONTROL SIGNAL REPLACES SWITCH-LEG WIRES ON/OFF SWITCH E3T-R12-2INTP E3X-R12-5IBTP BATTERY-FREE, WIRELESS SWITCHES CAN ALSO CONTROL NEW LOAD EXISTING CIRCUIT WITH SWITCHED LOAD ADD A SWITCH-LEG TRANSMITTER ADD A NEW LOAD, WHICH MAY BE CONNECTED TO A DIFFERENT BRANCH CIRCUIT. THE NEW LOAD WILL BE CONTROLLED BY THE EXISTING ON/OFF SWITCH.
N.O. RED COMMON YELLOW N.C. BLUE AC POWER BROWN AC POWER BROWN
13
WIRELESS SWITCH LEG SOLUTION
NETWORK & WIRELESS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage E3T-R02-2INTP 24VAC, 50/60Hz E3T-R12-2INTP 120VAC, 50/60Hz E3T-R24-2INTP 240VAC, 50/60Hz E3T-R27-2INTP 277VAC, 50/60Hz Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz Transmit Range 50-150 feet 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Operating Temperature Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing Communication EnOcean Wireless Mounting Enclosure Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty Threaded nipple Plastic 1.73"W x 2.11"H x 1.09"D (4.39 x 5.36 x 2.77 cm) 0.15 lbs (0.07kg) ETL: UL244A (USA), CSAc22.2 #14-05 (Canada); FCC, IC 3 years
MODEL E3T-R02-2INTP E3T-R12-2INTP E3T-R24-2INTP E3T-R27-2INTP E9T-R02-2INTP E9T-R12-2INTP E9T-R24-2INTP E9T-R27-2INTP March 2014 DESCRIPTION Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 24V, 315 MHz Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 120V, 315 MHz Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 240V, 315 MHz Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 277V, 315 MHz Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 24V, 902 MHz Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 120V, 902 MHz Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 240V, 902 MHz Wireless SLT circuit interlock transmitter, 277V, 902 MHz
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
823
NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN WIRELESS REPEATER E3X-RXX-REPTP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The ILLUMRA Repeater works to extend the wireless coverage area of ILLUMRA wireless networks. It receives wireless control signals and retransmits them to distant receivers or other repeaters. The device is capable of onelevel and two-level repeating, effectively tripling the coverage distance otherwise achievable without using repeaters. It is easy to install and requires no setup or commissioning. These repeaters communicate with ILLUMRA's E3T-x series of transmitters, E3R-x series of receivers and E3X-x series of transceiver controllers.
NEW!
E3X-Rxx-REPTP
2x x 3x
FEATURES
One-level and two-level repeating Fast, easy installation No setup required No commissioning required
WIRING APPLICATION DIAGRAM

Transmitter Level 1 repeater Level 2 repeater
13
Coverage area without repeaters Coverage area with Level-1 repeaters Coverage area with Level-2 repeaters
NETWORK & WIRELESS
*Using two levels of repeaters achieves up to triple the distance achievable without repeaters. Results will vary, depending on site-specific conditions.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage E3X-R02-REPTP 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz E3X-R12-REPTP 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz E3X-R24-REPTP 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz E3X-R27-REPTP 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz Transmit Frequency 315 MHz Transmit Range 50-150 feet Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing Communication Mounting Enclosure Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty EnOcean wireless Threaded Nipple Plastic 2.11"H x 1.73"W x 1.09"D (5.36 x 4.39 x 2.77 cm) 0.15 lbs (0.07 kg) ETL: UL244A (USA), CSAc22.2 #14-05 (Canada); FCC, IC 3 yrs
MODEL E3X-R02-REPTP E3X-R12-REPTP E3X-R24-REPTP E3X-R27-REPTP DESCRIPTION Repeater, 24 VAC, 315 MHz Repeater, 120 VAC, 315 MHZ Repeater, 240 VAC, 315 MHZ Repeater, 277 VAC, 315 MHZ
824
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN WIRELESS THERMOSTAT E3X-TXX SERIES
The ILLUMRA Thermostat uses wireless communication to provide quick and easy implementation of energy-saving HVAC controls. When the thermostat receives an occupied signal from an ILLUMRA wireless switch or sensor, it adjusts temperature set point to a narrow preset range (i.e. 70-72F). When the thermostat receives an unoccupied signal, it adjusts temperature set points to a wider range (i.e. 62-80F). This thermostat communicates with ILLUMRA's E3T-x series of transmitters, E3R-x series of receivers and E3X-x series of transceiver controllers. E3X-T02-U2W
Installs in minutes Easy conguration Requires no switch leg wires Responds automatically to occupancy or vacancy
WIRING
Key Card Switch Control of Thermostat
KEY CARD SWITCH HVAC UNIT
E3T-C2AWH
E3X-T02-U2W
Disable HVAC Unit When Existing Light Circuit is Turned Off

BREAKER PANEL #1
13
HOT BLACK GROUND GREEN OR BARE NEUTRAL WHITE
AC POWER BLACK GROUND GREEN OR BARE AC POWER WHITE

AC POWER WHITE AC POWER BLACK
LOAD
COM. BLACK
HVAC UNIT
NETWORK & WIRELESS
OFF
N.O. RED
ON/OFF SWITCH E3T-R12-2INTP
E3X-T02-U2W
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Transmit Frequency Transmit Range Temp. Monitor Range Temp. Set Point Range Accuracy Max Loads Fan Control Heat/Cool Control 24 VAC 315 MHz 50-150 feet 32.0 to 99.9F (0.0 to 37.7C) 60 to 85F (15.5 to 29.5C) 1F (0.5C) 1.5 amp/circuit Selectable: Auto cycle, low, medium, high, economy, off 1 heat and cool circuit, heat pump reversing valve circuit Communication Display Type Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Enclosure Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty EnOcean wireless LCD 14 to 131F (10 to 55C) 0-95% RH non-condensing Plastic 3.5"W x 5.0"H x 1.5"D (8.9 x 12.7 x 3.8 cm) 0.5 lbs (0.23 kg) FCC, IC 3 years
MODEL E3X-T02-U2W March 2014 DESCRIPTION 24VAC thermostat, 315 MHz
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
825
NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN WIRELESS LIGHT SENSOR E3T-SLICP
DESCRIPTION
ILLUMRA Wireless Battery-Free Light Sensor saves time, energy, and money by avoiding costly and time-consuming installation of hardwired daylighting controls. The light sensor saves energy by lowering the output of articial light when daylight is present in a room, saving up to 60 percent of the energy. The sensor can be used in open-loop and closed-loop daylight-harvesting applications. This light sensor communicates with ILLUMRA's E3R-x series of receivers and E3X-x series of transceiver controllers.
NEW!
E3T-SLICP
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Battery Transmit Frequency Transmit Range Communication LED Indication Illuminance Range Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Enclosure Mounting Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty Self-powered with solar cell Optional 1/2 AA Lithium (#14250) 315 MHz 50-150 feet EnOcean wireless TX 0-1024 lux 10% -13 to 140F (-25 to 60C) 0-95% RH non-condensing Plastic Screws / 2 sided tape 3.7"W x 3.5"H x 1.1"D (9.39 x 8.89 x 2.79 cm) 0.2 lbs (0.09 kg) FCC, IC, RoHS 3 years
FEATURES
Installs in minutes Easy conguration Compatible with a wide variety of ILLUMRA dimmers and relays Open-loop or closed-loop applications Turn off or dim lights to save energy
MODEL E3T-SLICP DESCRIPTION Wireless light sensor, 315 MHz
13
ENOCEAN WIRELESS EUROPEAN LIGHT SWITCHES E3T-SXE SERIES

DESCRIPTION
ILLUMRA European style light switches are wireless and battery-free, delivering a no maintenance solution. Pressing the switch provides the energy needed to transmit a wireless signal that controls lights or other devices connected to ILLUMRA receivers.
NETWORK & WIRELESS
These switches communicate with ILLUMRA's E3R-x and E9R-x series of receivers and E3X-x and E9X-x series of transceiver controllers (model frequency dependent).
FEATURES
Mount switches anywhere Create 3-way and 4-way switches Control lights, motors, or other electrical loads Recongure or relocate as needed Unique (theft) tamper-resistant design E3T-S1Exx
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Transmit Frequency Transmit Range Communication Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Enclosure Self-powered when switch is pressed 315 MHz, 902 MHz 50-150 feet EnOcean wireless -13 to 149F (-25 to 65C) 0-95% RH, non-condensing Plastic Mounting Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty Screws / 2 sided tape 3.16"W x 3.16"D x 0.40"D (8.03 x 8.03 x 1.02 cm) 0.15 lbs (0.07 kg) FCC, IC 3 years
MODEL E3T-S1EBK E3T-S1EWH E3T-S2EBK E3T-S2EWH DESCRIPTION European single rocker, 315 MHz, black European single rocker, 315 MHz, white European dual rocker, 315 MHz, black European dual rocker, 315 MHz, white E9T-S1EBK E9T-S1EWH E9T-S2EBK E9T-S2EWH European single rocker, 902 MHz, black European single rocker, 902 MHz, white European dual rocker, 902 MHz, black European dual rocker, 902 MHz, white
826
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Control all or only selected devices in a room Use with most room key cards Installs in minutes
NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN WIRELESS KEY CARD READER E3T-C2AWH
The ILLUMRA Key Card Switch needs no wires or batteries. Inserting a key card provides the energy to transmit a wireless signal that controls lights or other devices connected to ILLUMRA receivers. These key card readers communicate with ILLUMRA's E3R-x and E9R-x series of receivers and E3X-x and E9X-x series of transceiver controllers (model frequency dependent). E3T-C2AWH
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Transmit Frequency Transmit Range Communication Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Self-powered when key card is inserted/ removed 315 MHz, 902 MHz 50-150 feet EnOcean wireless -13 to 149F (-25 to 65C) 0-95% RH non-condensing Enclosure Mounting Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty Plastic Screws / 2 sided tape 3.05"W x4.65"H x 1.04"D (7.75 x 11.81 x 2.64 cm) 0.3 lbs (0.14 kg) FCC, IC 3 years
MODEL E3T-C2AWH E9T-C2AWH DESCRIPTION Wireless key card reader, 315 MHz Wireless key card reader, 902 MHz
ENOCEAN WIRELESS HANDHELD REMOTE E3T-S2H SERIES

DESCRIPTION
ILLUMRA self-powered light switches use no wires or batteries. Pressing the switch provides the energy needed to transmit a wireless signal that controls lights or other devices connected to ILLUMRA recievers. The Handheld Self-Powered Wireless Light Switch is small enough to t in the palm of your hand keep it in your pocket, on a table, or leave it in your car to turn on lights as you pull up to a house or building. These handheld remotes communicate with ILLUMRA's E3R-x and E9R-x series of receivers and E3X-x and E9X-x series of transceiver controllers (model frequency dependent).
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
FEATURES
Control lights, motors, or other electric loads Use in single pole, 3-way, or 4-way switch applications One switch can control unlimited receivers within range Experience wireless dimming control or rocker, toggle, or momentary switch functionality
Mounting Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty
E3T-S2HWH
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Transmit Frequency Transmit Range Communication Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Enclosure Self-powered when switch is pressed 315 MHz, 902 MHz 50-150 feet EnOcean wireless -13 to 149F (-25 to 65C) 0-95% RH non-condensing Plastic Screws / 2 sided tape 1.85"W x 3.15"H x 0.7"D (4.70 x 8.00 x 1.78 cm) 0.15 lbs (0.07 kg) FCC, IC 3 years
MODEL E3T-S2HBK E3T-S2HWH E9T-S2HBK E9T-S2HWH DESCRIPTION Handheld remote wireless light switch, 315 MHz, black Handheld remote wireless light switch, 315 MHz, white Handheld remote wireless light switch, 902 MHz, black Handheld remote wireless light switch, 902 MHz, white
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
827
NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN WIRELESS SWITCHES E3T-SXA SERIES
DESCRIPTION
ILLUMRA Self-powered Wireless Light Switches are powered by EnOcean technology that converts the press of the switch into a small amount of electricity. This electricity is used to transmit a wireless signal that communicates with a wide variety of ILLUMRA Receivers. Battery-free wireless light switches are primarily used to control lights in homes or businesses but they can be used to control virtually any on/ off device. Each Self-powered Wireless Light Switch can be placed anywhere within range of a receiver. Traditionally the wireless light switch is surface mounted on a wall with screws or industrial tape but can also be used in a standard switch box or as a wireless hand held remote. These switches communicate with ILLUMRA's E3R-x and E9R-x series of receivers and E3X-x and E9X-x series of transceiver controllers (model frequency dependent).
NEW!
E3T-S1AWH E3T-S2AWH
Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty 2.75"W x 4.5"H x 0.62"D (6.99 x 11.43 x 1.58 cm) 0.25 lbs (0.11 kg) FCC, IC 3 years
FEATURES
Installs in minutes Requires no wiring Easy to congure Unique ID of each switch activates only the intended reciever(s)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Transmit Frequency Transmit Range Communication Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Enclosure Mounting Self-powered when switch is pressed 315 MHz, 902 MHz 50-150 feet EnOcean wireless -13 to 149F (-25 to 65C) 0-95% RH non-condensing Plastic Standard switch box or surface mounted using screws or adhesive
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL EST-S1ABK E3T-S1ABR E3T-S1AGY E3T-S1AIV E3T-S1ALA E3T-S1AWH E3T-S2ABK E3T-S2ABR E3T-S2AGY E3T-S2AIV E3T-S2ALA E3T-S2AWH E9T-S1ABK E9T-S1ABR E9T-S1AGY E9T-S1AIV E9T-S1ALA E9T-S1AWH E9T-S2ABK E9T-S2ABR E9T-S2AGY E9T-S2AIV E9T-S2ALA E9T-S2AWH DESCRIPTION Single rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, black Single rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, brown Single rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, gray Single rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, ivory Single rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, lt almond Single rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, white Dual rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, black Dual rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, brown Dual rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, gray Dual rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, ivory Dual rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, lt almond Dual rocker wireless light switch, 315 MHz, white Single rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, black Single rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, brown Single rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, gray Single rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, ivory Single rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, lt almond Single rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, white Dual rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, black Dual rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, brown Dual rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, gray Dual rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, ivory Dual rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, lt almond Dual rocker wireless light switch, 902 MHz, white
828
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MODEL E3T-MDCCP E9T-MDCCP
NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN WIRELESS WINDOW/DOOR SENSOR E3T-MDCCP
The ILLUMRA Wireless Door/Window Sensor maximizes the energy savings of heating and air conditioning systems by providing wireless status of windows and/or doors. The sensor uses a magnet contact switch that is powered by a solar cell and communicates with a wide variety of ILLUMRA products. Energy waste can be reduced by 20 to 60 percent by disabling blowers and/or adjusting temperature setpoints in HVAC systems when windows and doors are left open. The wireless Door/Window Sensor is a key component to reducing energy waste in hotel, condominium and dormitory buildings. These sensors communicate with ILLUMRA's E3R-x and E9R-x series of receivers and E3X-x and E9X-x series of transceiver controllers (model frequency dependent). E3T-MDCCP
Solar powered when fully charged, can run in total darkness for several days No batteries - No Maintenance Install in minutes Eliminate the need to pull wires to sensors
13
Supply Voltage Self-powered, integrated solar cell Transmit Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz 15-60 feet Transmit Range Communication EnOcean wireless Operating Temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing Enclosure Plastic Mounting Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty Screws / 2 sided tape 0.62"W x 3.86"H x 0.81"L (1.57 x 9.80 x 2.06 cm) 0.11 lbs (0.05 kg) FCC, IC 3 years
NETWORK & WIRELESS
DESCRIPTION Window/door sensor with magnet contact, 315 MHz Window/door sensor with magnet contact, 902 MHz
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
829
NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN ROOM OPERATING PANEL EASYSENS THANOS
DESCRIPTION
The EasySens Thanos is a touchscreen room operating panel designed for temperature and humidity detection as well as for integrated operation of HVAC, lighting and blind for single room control. The device is ideal for design-oriented applications. The operating functions can be exibly adapted to the most different room layouts.
FEATURES
Control of automatic HVAC applications by simple touch Integrated temperature detection Optional with integrated humidity detection Bi-directional EnOcean Wireless Communication Touch surface made of glass for intuitive operation
NEW!
TH-SR-L-BL 100-240V
WIRING
24V
Power supply GND UV 15-24VDC / 24AC
1 10 DI1 2 9 DI2 3 8 DI3 4 7 5 6 DI4
N(L)
100...240V AC
Power supply
L(N)
13
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency Range Communication Digital Inputs Display Type 24 VAC, 10%; 15-25 VDC, 10% 315 MHz, 902 MHz Typical 70-100 ft EnOcean 4 Capacitive Touch, 3.5" TFT, 320x240 pixels, 262 colors 3% (20-80% RH) Humidity Accuracy Humidity Range 0-100% RH Setpoint Range Programmable Temperature Range 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) Temperature Accuracy 0.5K (0.9F) Interface Touch screen,SD card, Anodised function clip, changeable function keypad
1 10 2 9 3 8 4 7 5 6
Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0 to 85% RH non condensing Color White, Black Antenna Internal Enclosure NEMA 1 Dimensions TH-SR-L 7.76"W x 3.23"H x 0.73"D (19.7 x 8.2 x 1.9 cm) TH-SR-S 4.96"W x 3.23"H x 0.73"D (12.6 x 8.2 x 1.9 cm) Weight TH-SR-L 1.16 lb (0.53 kg) TH-SR-S 0.83 lb (0.38 kg) Approvals CE, FCC, Canada RSS, MIC, RoHS Warranty 2 Years
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL TH-SR-L-WH TH-SR-L-BL TH-SR-LQ-WH TH-SR-LQ-BL TH-SR-S-WH TH-SR-S-BL
DESCRIPTION Thanos Room,Large, White, 24V Thanos Room, Large Black, 24V Thanos Landscape,Large,White,24V Thanos Landscape,Large,Black,24V Thanos Room,Small, White, 24V Thanos Room, Small, Black, 24V
MODEL TH-SR-RH-L-WH TH-SR-RH-L-BL TH-SR-RH-LQ-WH TH-SR-RH-LQ-BL TH-SR-RH-S-WH TH-SR-RH-S-BL
Thanos Temp/RH,Large, White, 24V Thanos Temp/RH, Large Black, 24V Thanos,Temp/RH Landscape,White,24V Thanos,Temp/RH Landscape,Black,24V Thanos Temp/RH,Small, White, 24V Thanos Temp/RH,Small,Black, 24V
Add -315 for 315 MHz or -902 for 902 MHz at the end of the part number to order.
830
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
EnOcean Wireless Technology Models Support Major Building Automation Communication Protocols Easy to Install and Setup
NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN RECEIVER GATEWAYS EASYSENS RECEIVER GATEWAYS
The EasySens Recievers and Gateways are receiver interface devices for EnOcean wireless sensors and switches to higher level control systems via BACnet MS/TP, Modbus or LON. The STC65-x models are bi-directional transceiver gateways and the SRC65 model is an uni-directional receiver gateway.
SRC65-BACNET-315
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 15-24 VDC/24VAC +/-10% Power Consumption SRC65-BACNET 1 watt STC65-RS485-MODBUS 0.6 watt STC65-FTT 0.5 watt Antenna External with magnetic stand Communication SRC65-BACNET EnOcean Wireless/ BACNET STC65-RS485MODBUS EnOcean Wireless/ MODBUS STC65-FTT EnOcean Wireless/ LON Frequency 315MHZ, 902MHz Range 70 -100 FT, typical in building Max Number of Wireless Devices SRC65-BACNET 32 STC65-RS485MODBUS 32 16 uni-directional / 11bi-directional STC65-FTT Enclosure Plastic Mounting Surface mount with screw terminals Operating Temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Opperating Humidity 0 to 70% RH, non-condensing 3.07" x 2.28" x 1.79" Dimensions (78x 58 x 45.5mm) Weight 0.62 lbs (0.28kg) Approval CE,FCC,RoHS Warranty 2 years
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
WIRING
STCx and SRCx Wiring
MODEL SRC65-BACNET STC65-FTT-LON DESCRIPTION EnOcean/BACnet Receiver Gateway EnOcean/LON Receiver and Transmitter Gateway STC65-RS485-MODBUS EnOcean/Modbus Receiver and Transmitter Gateway
+15-24VDC / 24VAC GND Bus B Bus A
B u s -A
Gnd -
B u s -B
Uv+
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
831
NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN RECEIVER CONTROLLERS EASYSENS SRC RECEIVER CONTROLLERS
DESCRIPTION
The EasySens SRC Receiver Controller is a simple wireless solution for room climate control. There are several model options for heating and cooling control and analog outputs for variety of applications.
FEATURES
EnOcean Wireless Technology Easy to Setup with "Prog" and "Learn" buttons Model with Dimmer Capability Available
NEW!
SRC-DO2 Enclosure ABS plastic, Red Mounting Surface mount with screw terminal Operating Temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) 0-70% RH non-condensing Operating Humidity Dimensions 1.89" x 2.76" x 1.77" (48 x 70 x 45 mm) Weight 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) Approval CE,FCC, RoHS Warranty 2 years
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Power Consumption SRC-DO2-24V-1 SRC-AO-x Outputs SRC-DO2-24V-1 SRC-AO-x-V SRC-AO-x-VV Communication Antenna Frequency Range Max Number of Wireless Devices 24 VAC/VDC 1.5 watts 1 watt 2 Relay Outputs 1 analog 0-10V output, 20 mA max 2 analog 0-10V outputs, 20 mA max EnOcean Wireless Internal 315MHz, 902MHz 70-100 ft, typical in building Up to 32 EnOcean Transmitters
13
WIRING
SRC-DO2 Wiring Diagram
NETWORK & WIRELESS
max. 24V/3A R1 R2
SC C SH SC C SH
+ -
MODEL SRC-DO2-24V-1 SRC-AO-MULTI-V SRC-AO-MULTI-VV SRC-AO-CLIMATE-VV SRC-AO-DIM-V SRC-AO-DIM-VV

24V AC/DC GND
Cool
PWM M
DESCRIPTION Thermostat-Actuator, 2xDO, 24V Multi-Actuator, 1xAO, 0-10V, 24V Multi-Actuator, 2xAO, 0-10V, 24V Actuator for heating/cooling, 2xAO, 0-10V, 24V Dimming-Actuator, 1xAO, 0-10V, 24V Dimming-Actuator, 2xAO, 0-10V, 24V
Heat
PWM
SRC-AO* Wiring Diagram
- +
AO1
AO1 0...10V AO2 0...10V
AO2
+24V / AC1 GND / AC2
832
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
EnOcean Wireless Technology Easy to Use and Setup Internal and External Antenna Options Upto 2 Levels Repeating
NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN WIRELESS REPEATER EASYSENS REPEATER
The EasySens Repeater is designed for low-level amplication of radio signals between EnOcean sensors and receivers. Typically, the repeater is used if the sensor location is outside the receiving range or if there are range problems between sender and receiver with existing installations such as walls and appliances interfering the radio signals.
EasySens Repeater
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Supply Communication Antenna Frequency Range Enclosure Mounting 24 VAC/VDC EnOcean Wireless External 315 MHz 70-100ft, typical in building Plastic Surface mount with screw terminal Operating Temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Operating Humidity 0 to 70% RH, non-condensing 3.07"W x 1.79"H x 2.28"D Dimensions (78 x 45.5 x 58 mm) Approvals CE, FCC, RoHS Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg) Warranty 2 years
WIRING
13
L N
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Uv Radio Rx LEVIN2 LEVIN1
Externe Antenne External Antenna
MODEL SRE-Repet/B-ext ANT10 ANT20 DESCRIPTION Repeater with Antenna, 315 MHz ACCESSORIES Extension for external antenna, length 32ft Extension for external antenna, length 65ft
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
833
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION
The EasySens Switches are EnOcean wireless switches. They are maintenance-free and self-powered through electrodynamic energy generator inside the switch. These switches communicate with the Easysens Thanos, SRCx and STCx series of receiver gateways, and SRCx series of receiver controllers (model frequency dependent).
ENOCEAN LIGHTING, BLINDS AND SHUTTERS SWITCHES EASYSENS SWITCHES
NEW!
BBJ-2CH-WH BBJ-4CH-WH LBJ-2CH-CR LBJ-4CH-ALU Dimensions LBJ-x/BBJ-x LMI-x/BMI-x Approvals Weight LBJ-x/BBJ-x LMI-x/BMI-x Warranty 3.15"H x 3.15"W x 0.59"D (80 x 80 x 15 mm) 2.4"H x 2.4"W x 0.59"D (61 x 61 x 15 mm) CE, FCC, RoHS 0.24 lb (0.11 kg) 0.15 lb (0.07 kg) 2 years MODEL BBJ-4CH-ALU BBJ-4CH-ANT LMI-2CH-WH LMI-2CH-ALU LMI-2CH-ANT BMI-2CH-WH BMI-2CH-ALU BMI-2CH-ANT LMI-4CH-WH LMI-4CH-ALU LMI-4CH-ANT BMI-4CH-WH BMI-4CH-ALU BMI-4CH-ANT DESCRIPTION 4-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Aluminium 4-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Anthracite 2-CH switch for lighting, Mini,White 2-CH Switch lighting, Mini, Aluminium 2-CH Switch, lighting, Mini, Anthracite 2-CH Switch, blinds/shutters, Mini, pure white 2-CH Switch, blinds/shutters, Mini, Aluminium 2-CH Switch, blinds/shutters, Mini, Anthracite 4-CH Switch,lighting, Mini, pure white 4-CH Switch, lighting, Mini, aluminium 4-CH Switch, lighting control, Mini, Anthracite 4-CH Switch blinds/shutters, Mini, pure white 4-CH Switch, blinds/shutters,Mini, Aluminium 4-CH Switch blinds/shutters, Mini, Anthracite
FEATURES
EnOcean Wireless, Maintenance Free Lighting, Dimmer and Blind Control Models Available Single or Dual Swiches Models Available Multiple Decor Options
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Supply Self-powered when switch pressed EnOcean Wireless Communication Antenna Internal Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz Range 70-100 ft, typical in building Enclosure Plastic Mounting Surface mount Operating Temperature -13 to 149F (-25 to 65C) Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL LBJ-2CH-WH LBJ-2CH-CR LBJ-2CH-ALU LBJ-2CH-ANT BBJ-2CH-WH BBJ-2CH-CR BBJ-2CH-ALU BBJ-2CH-ANT LBJ-4CH-PWH LBJ-4CH-CR LBJ-4CH-ALU LBJ-4CH-ANT BBJ-4CH-WH BBJ-4CH-CR
DESCRIPTION 2-CH Switch,lighting,White 2-CH Switch,lighting,Cream white 2-CH Switch,lighting,Aluminium 2-CH Switch,lighting,Anthracite 2-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Davos White 2-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Cream White 2-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Aluminium 2-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Anthracite 4-CH Switch,Lighting,Pure White 4-CH Switch,lighting,Cream White 4-CH Switch,Lighting,Aluminium 4-CH Switch,Lighting,Anthracite 4-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Pure White 4-CH Switch,blinds/shutters,Cream White
834
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
EnOcean Wireless, Energy Harvesting Batteryless, Maintenance Free Use in Variety of Applications
NETWORK & WIRELESS
ENOCEAN REMOTE CONTROL, KEY CARD SWITCH, WINDOW/DOOR CONTACT EASYSENS SPECIALTY WIRELESS TRANSMITTERS
The EasySens Specialty Transmitters are EnOcean wireless devices. They are energy harvesting, battery free wireless transmitters could be used for variety of applications.
Model 4-CH-EC is a four button remote control could be used for dimmer and roller blind control. SR-KCS model is wireless key card switches could be used for room or ofce lighting control when occupied. Model SRW01 is a wireless window or door contact for status monitoring in connection with receiver SRC-x and higher level control systems. These transmitters communicate with the Easysens Thanos, SRCx and STCx series of receiver gateways, and SRCx series of receiver controllers (model frequency dependent). 4-CH-EC SR-KCS
SRW01
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Supply Self-powered Communication EnOcean Wireless Antenna Internal Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz Range 70-100 ft, typical in building Enclosure Plastic Mounting Surface mount Operating Temperature -13 to 149F (-25 to 65C) Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing Dimensions 4-CH-EC 3.27"H x 1.97"W x 0.98"D (83 x 50 x 25 mm) SR-KCS SRW01 Approvals Weight 4-CH-EC SR-KCS SRW01 Warranty 4"H x 2.38"W x 0.75"D (102 x 60 x 19 mm) Sensor: 3.63"H x 0.81"W x 0.63"D (168 x 21 x16 mm) Magnet: 0.81"H x 0.5"W x 0.38"D (21 x 13 x10 mm) CE, FCC, RoHS 0.18 lb (0.08 kg) 0.35 lb (0.16 kg) 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) 2 years
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL 4-CH-EC SR-KCS SRW01 DESCRIPTION 4 Button Remote Control Key Card Switch Wireless window/door contact switch
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
835
NETWORK & WIRELESS

DESCRIPTION
The EasySens Room Sensors are EnOcean wireless sensors with variety of options in temperature, humidity, and CO2 sensing. Models with setpoint control, override, and occupancy detection are also available. These sensors communicate with the Easysens Thanos, SRCx and STCx series of receiver gateways, and SRCx series of receiver controllers (model frequency dependent).
ENOCEAN TEMPERATURE, HUMIDITY AND CO2 SENSORS EASYSENS ROOM SENSORS
NEW!
SR04-CO2-RHLCDZ SR04PST
Antenna Enclosure Housing Type Response Time Storage Humidity Storage Temperature Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Color Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty Internal NEMA 1 Wall mount <10 mins CO2 70% RH, non-condensing 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 0 to 85% RH, non-condensing White 0.98"H x 3.3"W x 3.3"D (25 x 84.5 x 84.5 mm) CE, FCC, Canada RSS, MIC 0.29 lb (0.13 kg) 2 years
FEATURES
EnOcean Wireless with Battery Backup Easy to Install with Learn Button Adjustable Transmission Interval Variety of Sensing and Control Model Options
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Battery Backup Frequency Range Communication Display Type SR04-CO2-Z, RHLCDZ,LCD-Z SR04-CO2-LCD, RH-LCD CO2 Accuracy Humidity Accuracy Humidity Range Temperature Range Temperature Accuracy Resolution 24 VAC, 10%; 15-25 VDC, 10% Optional LS14250 315 MHz, 902 MHz Typical 70-100 ft EnOcean Wireless Transmission LED LCD 40 ppm +4% @21C 3% (20-80% RH) 0-100% RH 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) 0.4K (0.72F), 1% of measuring range 0.15K / 0.27F,0.4% RH
13
MODEL SR04 SR04P SR04T SR04P-MS SR04PT SR04PS SR04PST SR04-RH SR04PT-RH SR04P-MS-RH SR04-CO2 SR04-CO2-RH SR04-CO2-Z SR04-CO2-LCD SR04-CO2-RHLCDZ SR04-CO2-RH-LCD SR04-CO2-LCD-Z DESCRIPTION Room Temp Sensor Room Temp Sensor,Setpoint Room Temp, Occupancy Room Temp, setpoint,Night mode Room Temp,Setpoint,Occupancy Room Temp,Setpoint,Fan speed Room Temp,setpoint,Fan,Occupancy Room Temp/RH Room Temp/RH,Setpoint,Occupancy Temp/RH setpoint,Night mode Room Temp/CO2 Room Temp/RH/CO2 Room Temp/CO2 LED Room Temp/CO2 LCD Room Temp/RH/CO2 LCD/LED Room Temp/RH/CO2 LCD Room Temp/CO2 LCD/LED
NETWORK & WIRELESS
LS14250
ACCESSORIES Lithium batteries for external power supply
836
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
EnOcean Wireless with Battery Backup Easy to Install with Learn Button Adjustable Transmission Interval Model Options for Variety of Applications
NETWORK & WIRELESS
ENOCEAN SURFACE, DUCT, REMOTE AND OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSORS EASYSENS TEMPERATURE SENSORS
The EasySens Temperature Sensors are solar powered EnOcean wireless sensors. They provids wireless temperature sensing for variety of applicaitons; duct, immersion, surface contact and outdoor sensing. These temperature sensors communicate with the Easysens Thanos, SRCx and STCx series of receiver gateways, and SRCx series of receiver controllers (models with 315MHz frequency only).
SR65
SR65-AKF
SR65-TF
SR65-VFG
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Supply Battery Backup Frequency Range Communication Temperature Range SR65/SR65-TF SR65-AKF/SR65-VFG Resolution Accuracy Probe Length SR65-AKF-135 SR65-TF Antenna Enclosure Housing Type SR65 SR65-AKF SR65-TF SR65-VFG Solar cell Optional LS14250 315 mhz Typical 70-100ft EnOcean Wireless -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) 10 to 194F (-12 to 90C) 0.55F 1.5F 5.3" (13.5 cm) 2" (5.1 cm) probe, cable 3.2" (8.1 cm) Internal NEMA 4/IP65 Outdoor Duct Cable Clamp onPipe Operating Temperature -13 to 149F (-25 to 65C) Operating Humidity 0-85% RH non-condensing Dimensions 1.8"H x 2.3"W x 3.1"D (45.5 x 58 x 78 mm) Approvals CE, FCC, Canada RSS, MIC RoHS Statement Yes Weight SR65/SR65-VFG 0.29 lb (0.13 kg) SR65-AKF 0.33 lb (0.15 kg) SR65-TF 0.35 lb (0.16 kg) Warranty 2 years
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
MODEL SR65 SR65-AKF-135 SR65-TF SR65-VFG LS14250 DESCRIPTION Outdoor Air Temp Duct Temp, 5.3" probe Cable Temp, 3.2ft Pipe Contract Temp ACCESSORIES Lithium batteries for external power supply
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
837
NETWORK & WIRELESS

ENOCEAN INPUT MODULES EASYSENS INPUT MODULES
DESCRIPTION
The EasySens Input Modules are EnOcean wireless input modules provide information and status to a higher level controller. The module SR65 DI has one digital input for dry contacts by which the switch status can be evaluated. The status of the contact (opened/closed) is transmitted by radio signal to a receiver.
The module SR-MI-HS has three inputs for receiving pulses from water, gas, electric or BTU meters with S0 interfaces (DIN 43864). Pulses of every inputs are totaled independently and the total will be transmitted every 5, 10, 100 or 1000 seconds, depending on the settings. In addition, a signal can be generated and transmitted every 10th or every 100th pulse. These input modules communicate with the Easysens Thanos, SRCx and STCx series of receiver gateways, and SRCx series of receiver controllers (model frequency dependent).
NEW!
SR65-DI SR-MI
Power Supply 24V
FEATURES
EnOcean Wireless Adjustable Transmission Intervals Easy to Setup "Learn Button"
WIRING
dry contact
+ ~
~
Antenna
13
Learn- / Transmit Button Status LED (Transmit)
SR65-DI-315
NETWORK & WIRELESS
TI TW
+ - + - + S01 S02 S03
Dipswitch transmission configuration
SR-MI-HS-315
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 24 VAC, 10%; 15-24 VDC, 10% Frequency 315 MHz, 902 MHz Range Typical building 70-100 ft Communication EnOcean Digital Inputs 3 x Pulse inputs, ASK modulation Protocol EnOcean Color White Antenna External Enclosure NEMA 1 Housing Type Din Rail Wiring Terminations Terminal block max 16 AWG Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0-85% RH non-condensing Dimensions 2.4"H x 2.0"W x 3.6"D (60 x 51 x 91 mm) Approvals CE, FCC, Canada RSS, MIC RoHS Statement Yes Weight 0.57 lb (0.26 kg) Warranty 2 Years
MODEL SR65-DI-315 SR-MI-HS-315 SR-MI-HS-902 DESCRIPTION Digital Input-module, 315 MHz Energy Meter 3x Pulse Inputs, 315 MHz Energy Meter 3x Pulse Inputs, 902 MHz
838
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Data Line The Protection Zone Window PC642C Surge Protector SP * SPG * Power Strip
NETWORK & WIRELESS

APPLYING SURGE PROTECTORS
The single point ground is a common ground point or node used in the protection zone to bond together all ground references inside the zone. Surge currents passing through a ground conductor generate a voltage across the conductor. This is primarily due to inductance of the wire. Inductance is highly dependent on conductor length; therefore, it is very important to keep suppressor ground wires to the single point ground very short. The protection zone window is a hypothetical small opening in the zone through which all electrical conductors enter or leave. The single point ground is located at the protection zone window. Figure 2 illustrates a typical installation of equipment within a small area; however, there are three problems associated with the installation depicted. Problem #1 There are four ground references in Figure 2. AC outlet #1, AC outlet #2, AC outlet #3, and the data line all present separate ground references. The three AC outlet grounds are connected together at the power panel many feet away. The ground wire lengths offer enough inductance to effectively create separate grounds. In addition, the data line may run hundreds of feet to yet another ground reference in remote circuitry. Problem #2 Notice in Figure 2 there is substantial distance between various conductors leaving the imaginary circle of the protection zone. Even if ground conductors were bonded together, destructive voltages would exist during a surge due to wire inductance. Problem #3 While the data line shows a surge suppressor, the lack of suppressors in the power receptacles leaves an opening in the protection zone. Even the best data line suppressor cannot prevent damage under these conditions. Solving the Problems The problems listed for the installation in Figure 2 are solved using the Protection Zone Concept. Figure 1 illustrates the proper installation: All devices are powered from the same AC outlet. The AC service incorporates a Model HSP-121BT1RU surge suppressor. The single point ground is established in the protection zone window. Data line suppressor(s), Model PC642C, are added at the single point ground. A ground bus bar is located at the ground area to facilitate multiple ground connections
Surge protectors are relatively simple devices, yet they must be carefully selected and applied to function properly. When selecting and applying surge protectors, there are a few essentials to keep in mind.
First, the operating voltage of the system is important. Surge protectors are voltage sensitive switches and must not clamp the normal system voltage. The surge protector clamp voltage must be higher than the system voltage. For example, a 24 VDC system voltage generally uses a 30 volt surge protector. Second, some surge protectors have an input side and an output side. If installed backwards, they will fail prematurely.
Lastly, grounding is often misunderstood when it comes to proper installation of surge suppressors. This can seriously affect the performance of protection systems and lead to electronics damage. Use the Protection Zone Concept to effectively apply surge protectors to EMS and BAS installations. The Protection Zone The protection zone is an imaginary circle drawn around and encompassing electronic equipment items that are located in close proximity to each other (see Figure 1). Everything passing through the imaginary circle should be commonly grounded and should have surge protection.
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Data Line To Approved Ground
Single Point Ground AC Service
The Protection Zone
*Ground wires between single point ground and surge protectors must be very short.
AC Service Surge Protector HSP-121BT1RU
Figure 1. The Protection Zone, Window, and Single Point Ground
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
839
NETWORK & WIRELESS

AC Power Ground #1 AC Power Data Line AC Outlet #1 Ground #2
AC Outlet #2 Data Line Surge Protector SP Data Line Data Ground
NEW!
Summary Remember the following when applying surge protection:
Building 1 Data Line Building 2 Building N CPU SP SP SP SP SP C C C C C C C C CPU Main Processing Equipment C Distributed EMS/BAS Controllers SP Surge Protector
1. Keep all grounds inside the protection zone at the same potential. If different ground potentials are present on electronic equipment, damage will occur regardless of the suppression used.
AC Power Ground #3
AC Outlet #3
The Protection Zone
Figure 2. Typical Installation of Equipment within a Small Area Ground wires to the suppressors are very short. An optional (depending on code) ground conductor connects the ground bus to the main building power ground. This conductor may be quite long, but that does not create a problem now that the ground area has been established. Protecting Multibuilding Data and Control Systems The Protection Zone Concept can also be applied to multibuilding, multidrop data and control systems. In Figure 3, the surge protectors located at the building entrance are improperly positioned to protect the CPU and the controllers. During lightning activity, ground potentials at opposite ends of a building can be thousands of volts, causing damage to electronic equipment. Also, surge protectors for data lines that enter buildings have series resistance. The series resistance of the surge protectors is additive. The total series resistance often is too great and can cause communication or data line problems. The installation in Figure 3 shows ve protectors in series over the length of the data line. To properly configure surge protection on a multibuilding, multidrop system (see Figure 4), connect the surge protector on each controller drop so that the protector is not in series with the main data line. When connected in this manner, no more than two surge protectors are connected in series. Using the Protection Zone Concept, locate the data line surge protectors within the protection zone window along with an AC service outlet surge protector for each respective controller. Remember to keep the ground connections to the single point ground very short.
Building 1 SP CPU SP AC Power Data Line Building 2
2. Protect all electrical and data circuits entering or leaving the protection zone at the protection zone ground window. Doing this keeps circuits at a safe voltage with respect to the ground window. This safe voltage is the clamp voltage (letthrough voltage) of the respective suppressors. The majority of surge protection installations are fairly simple and only involve bonding suppressor grounds to AC service grounds at the ground window. Existing sites may involve some rewiring to accomplish the best results. In order to keep the data line surge suppressor ground and AC service ground wires very short, wiring must sometimes be moved. When applying surge protectors, using the Protection Zone Concept will effectively protect EMS and BAS installations.
13
NETWORK & WIRELESS
Figure 3. Improper Positioning of Surge Protectors
Building N
* *
SP C SP AC Power
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
C SP AC Power
C SP AC Power
C SP AC Power
C SP AC Power
C SP AC Power
C SP AC Power
C SP AC Power
CPU
Main Processing Equipment
Distributed EMS/BAS Controllers
* Conductor from data line SP ground and AC power
SP Surge Protector
<
Model HSP-121BT1RU AC Power Surge Protector Model PC642C Data Line Surge Protector
SP ground to single point ground must be very short
Figure 4. Proper Positioning of Surge Protectors
840
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
PANEL FABRICATION
HUMIDITY
Utilize Keles UL Certified Panel Shop, or Shop for Your Panel Components and Projects. Also, Check Out Keles Configurable InstaPanel.
ZS6 Series | p. 843
HW Series | p. 869
S200U-K Series | p. 855

PA N E L FA B R I C AT I O N
BAM-1000 | p. 860
ZS4 Series | p. 845
LB Series | p. 865
PANEL FABRICATION
MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Fittings and Mounting Hardware BAM1000, DIN 3F DIN Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860 Fuse Holders M4/6SNBT, M4/8SF, M10/16SFL ABB DIN Rail Switch & Fuse Holders .. . ZS4 Series Disconnect Switch and Fuse Holders SNK Series DIN Rail Disconnect Switch and Fuse Holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6SC30, 6SM30 Series Class CC Enclosed Fuse Holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6M30 Series Class M Base-Mount Fuse Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6W30 Sectional Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses and Circuit Breakers FLM, FLQ, FNQ, KLK Series Midget Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GF, K235, 251 Series Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S200U-K Series ABB Miniature Circuit Breakers.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QL Series Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1C SERIES Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844 845 851 852 853 854 854 855 856 856
VD Series | p. 857
Labels and Accessories .. . . . . . . . . 861 PDK, PRK Panel Receptacle & Disconnect Switch Assemblies SPA Plate-Mounted Potentiometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872 Labels Engraved Phenolic Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872 Pilot Lights and Selector Switches L4000 Series Pilot Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APW Series IDEC Pilot Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Series IDEC Pilot Lights and Miniature Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LB Series Flush Mount Pilot Lights, Pushbuttons and Switches . . . . . . . . . RBTS Series Toggle Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASW Series IDEC General Purpose Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CL, KT, M, MP Series ABB Pushbuttons, Selector Switches, Pilot Lights, Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862 863 864 865 866 867 870
TS Series C | p. 850
PA N E L FA B R I C AT I O N
Push Button Switches .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868 ABW, AOW Series IDEC Pushbutton Switches HW Series Push Buttons and Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869 Terminal Blocks CDU4N-G Series Value Line DIN Rail Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M4/6, M6/8 ABB DIN Rail Terminal Blocks (Standard Gray) .. . . . . . . . . . . . ZS6, ZS10 SNK Series DIN Rail Terminal Blocks .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAK4, SAK6 Weidmller DIN Rail Terminal Blocks (Standard Beige). . . . . 6G38 3/8 Sectional Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BKA/1 Panel Mount Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Series Double Row Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TS Series Double Row Terminal Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Duct VD Series Wiring Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABB Series ABB Wiring Duct .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 Series Iboco Wiring Duct .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1E Series Iboco Small Finger Wiring Duct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P Series Wiring Aids .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST, STS Support Brackets DIN Rail Support Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CL Wire Retainers Wire Duct Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841 842 843 846 847 848 849 850 857 858 859 859 860 860 859
1C16UL | p. 856
kele.com
NEW!

PANEL FABRICATION
VALUE LINE DIN RAIL TERMINAL BLOCKS CDU4N-G SERIES
The Model CDU4N-G DIN rail terminal block offers a modular design for exibility in layout and reduced installation time. The narrow width of the terminal block offers maximum circuit density. These models offer a favorable cost solution for basic installations.
Wire secured by ribbed compression clamp Universal DIN rail mounting Reduced installation time Block removable without displacing adjacent blocks
CDU-4N-G
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage Rated Current Wire Size Approvals Warranty 600 VAC/VDC 30A UL 22-10 AWG UL recognized component, File #E167040 1 year
PANEL FABRICATION
DINRALU CEP1-G CTR4SI/EN-120-G CPE4 SEW35-B (Two required)
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.685 (4.28)
CDU4N-G
.240 (.610)
1.811 (4.6)
CEP6-G (One required)
14
CDU-4N-G (Top View)
CDU4N-G
MODEL CDU4N-G CEP6-G SEW35-G CPE4 CTR4SI/EN-120-G CEP1-G W6 AQU75S BAM-1000 DIN-3F DINRALU DINRSTL K235 Series DESCRIPTION DIN rail terminal block, gray End section (1 required), gray End stop (2 required), gray Grounding block, green and yellow Fuse holder w/indicator, gray (K235 style fuse not included) Fuse holder end section, gray Blank markers (50 per card) PAGE 860 860 860 860 854
RELATED PRODUCTS 75-pole jumper strip 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m) 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant DIN rail, aluminum, 39.4" (1m) DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m) Fast-acting fuse
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
841
PANEL FABRICATION
DESCRIPTION
Model M4/6 and M6/8 DIN rail terminal blocks offer a modular design for exibility in layout and reduced installation time. Unique marker holders provide optional top- or side-mount marking capability. The Model M4/6 offers maximum circuit density while the Model M6/8 offers the convenience of larger screws for conventional screwdriver installation.
ABB DIN RAIL TERMINAL BLOCKS (STANDARD GRAY) M4/6, M6/8
FEATURES
Wire secured by ribbed compression clamp Universal DIN rail mounting Reduced installation time Block removable without displacing adjacent blocks Various marking options
NEW!
SCF6 BAM2 M4/6 M4/6-RD M6/8
PANEL FABRICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage Rated Current Rated Wire Size M4/6 M6/8 Approvals Warranty 600 VAC/VDC 30A UL, 25A CSA 22-10 AWG 22-8 AWG UL-recognized component, File #E60645; CSA certied; CE 1 year
MODEL DESCRIPTION SINGLE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCKS M4/6 DIN rail terminal block, gray M4/6-BK DIN rail terminal block, black M4/6-BL DIN rail terminal block, blue M4/6-GR DIN rail terminal block, green M4/6-RD DIN rail terminal block, red M4/6-OR DIN rail terminal block, orange M4/6-YW DIN rail terminal block, yellow M4/6.P Grounding block, green and yellow SINGLE 8 mm TERMINAL BLOCKS (use M4/6 accessories) M6/8 8 mm DIN rail terminal block, gray M6/8.P 8 mm grounding block, green and yellow ACCESSORIES DINRSTL 35 mm steel DIN mounting rail, 39.4"L (1m) DINRALU 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail, 39.4"L (1m) BAM2 End stop (two required), gray FEM6 End section (one required), gray SCF6 Circuit separator, gray BJS6 Jumper bar for M4/6, 20 poles per bar BJS6-2 Jumper bar for M4/6, two poles per bar BJS6-3 Jumper bar for M4/6, three poles per bar BJS6-4 Jumper bar for M4/6, four poles per bar BJS6-5 Jumper bar for M4/6, five poles per bar BJS6-10 Jumper bar for M4/6, 10 poles per bar BJS8 Jumper bar for M6/8, 20 poles per bar EV6 Jumper bar hardware (screw and post, package 20) DOUBLE STACK 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCKS M4/6D2 Double stack terminal block, gray FEM6D Double stack end section, gray BAMH Double stack end stop, gray SCF6D Double stack circuit separator, gray BEIGE SINGLE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCKS M4/6-BG DIN rail terminal block, beige FEM6-BG End section, beige BAM2-BG End stop, beige SCF6-BG Circuit separator, beige MARKERS RC610B Blank strips (100 blanks) RC610/1-10 10 strips of 1-10 RC610/1-50 Two strips of 1-50 RC610/1-100 One strip of 1-100 RC610/X01-X00 One strip of 100 numbers (fill in range, i.e., 201-300) RC610-G Ground marker strip (100) RC610-L Line marker strip (100) RC610-N Neutral marker strip (100) RC610-CUSTOM Custom markers printed at Kele; 3 max horizontal, 7 max vertical (vertical shown in picture) RTM7 Top mount, blank, 19.7" (50 cm)
14
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.75 (4.45)
1.89 (4.80)
0.24 (0.61)
0.315 (0.8)
M4/6, M6/8
2.57 (6.55)
M4/6
M6/8
2.34 (5.95)
M4/6D2
842
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

PANEL FABRICATION
SNK SERIES DIN RAIL TERMINAL BLOCKS ZS6, ZS10
Model ZS6 and ZS10 DIN rail terminal blocks offer a modular design for exibility in layout and reduced installation time. Their unique prole allows for easy and ergonomic mounting. Marking surfaces can be read clearly from any angle in an enclosure and are larger than standard markers in the industry.The two terminal blocks central channels-aligned from 4mm-12AWG up to 16mm-4AWG terminal blocks offer exibility of use. They offer common and polarity distribution with JB screwless jumper bars. One unique end section and circuit separator ts all feed-through terminal blocks. ES4
CS ZS6-D2 ZS6-PE
ZS6
Reverse mounting error-free; no short circuit possible 20% more marking surface Double deck blocks have 2 marking areas 1 end section and 1 circuit separator Complete set of accessories
PANEL FABRICATION
DIMENSIONS in (mm)
2.09 (53.0)
MODEL DESCRIPTION SINGLE 6mm TERMINAL BLOCKS ZS6 DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-grey ZS6-BK DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-black ZS6-BL DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-blue ZS6-BR DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-brown ZS6-GN DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-green ZS6-OR DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-orange ZS6-PR DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-purple ZS6-RD DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-red ZS6-WH DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-white ZS6-YL DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-yellow ZS6-PE Grounding block-green and yellow 6mm TERMINAL BLOCK ACCESSORIES DIN-3F 35mm steel DIN mounting rail, 39.4L (1 meter) BAM-1000 35mm aluminum DIN mounting rail, 39.4L (1 meter) BAM3 End stop - dark grey ES4 End section - dark grey JB6-2 Jumper bar - 2 poles - orange JB6-3 Jumper bar - 3 poles - orange JB6-4 Jumper bar - 4 poles - orange JB6-5 Jumper bar - 5 poles - orange JB6-10 Jumper bar - 10 poles - orange CS Circuit separator - dark grey MODEL DESCRIPTION DOUBLE DECK 6mm TERMINAL BLOCKS ZS6-D2 DIN rail mount double deck terminal block - grey ZS6-D2-BL DIN rail mount double deck terminal block - blue ZS6-D2-OR DIN rail mount double deck terminal block - orange BAZH1 Double deck end stop - dark grey ES4-D2 Double deck end section - dark grey ES-TC6 Double deck spacer - dark grey SINGLE 8mm TERMINAL BLOCKS (use ZS6 accessories) ZS10 DIN rail mount feed-through screw clamp-grey ZS10-PE Grounding block-green and yellow MARKERS FOR 6mm TERMINAL BLOCKS MC612 Blank strips (100 blanks)-white MC612PA/1-10 10 strips of 1-10 MC612PA/1-100 1 strip of 1-100 MC612-CUSTOM Custom markers printed at Kele; 3 max horizontal; 7 max vertical
2.22 (56.3)
1.92 (48.8)
14
1.05 (26.7)
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage 600V Rated Current 20A, 42A Rated Wire Size 24-12 AWG, 20-6 AWG Operating Temperature -67 to 230F (-55 to 110C) Spacing 0.236", 0.315" Approvals CE;UR File #E60645; CSA #2329965 RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
843
NEW! NEW!
PANEL FABRICATION
ABB DIN RAIL SWITCH & FUSE HOLDERS M4/6SNBT, M4/8SF, M10/16SFL
DESCRIPTION Model M4/8SF, M4/8SFL, and M10/16SFL fuse holders provide a safe method for protecting or isolating a circuit. Once installed, the fuse is enclosed and prohibits the installer from coming in contact with a live circuit. The fuse can be disengaged by pulling up on the fuseholder. Optional blown fuse indicators are available. Model M4/6SNT is a non-fusible disconnect switch that provides a safe method for isolating a circuit. LEN (lamp) Fuse M10/16SFL FEATURES Wire secured by ribbed compression clamp Universal DIN rail mounting Unique disconnect design M4/8SF M4/6SNBT
PANEL FABRICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage Rated Current Rated Wire Size M4/6 M4/8 M10/16 600 VAC/VDC 10A UL (6.3A IEC) 22-10 AWG 22-12 AWG 24-8 AWG Fuse Size M10/16SFL M4/8 Approvals Warranty GF Series 0.25" x 1.25" (0.63 x 3.17 cm) K235 Series 0.197" x 0.787" (0.5 x 2.0 cm) UL-recognized component, File #E60645; CSA certied; CE 1 year
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.68 (6.82) 0.63 (1.60) 2.23 (56.5) Closed 0.315 (0.8) 1.75 (4.45) 0.24 (0.6) Closed
14
2.32* (5.89)
1.9* (48.5)
2.05 (5.2)
* With holder closed
M10/16SFL
M4/8SF, SFL
M4/6SNBT
MODEL DESCRIPTION SWITCH M4/6SNBT1 6 mm blade switch block (with test sockets). gray/orange handle FEM62 End section for M4/6SNBT M4/8 FUSEHOLDER M4/8SF 8 mm fuseholder (K235 fuse not included) M4/8SFL 8 mm fuseholder with neon lamp (K235 fuse not included) FEM8S 8 mm fuseholder end section K235-(amp) Fast acting fuses for 8 mm fuse holder (10A fuse maximum) M10/16SFL FUSEHOLDER M10/16SFL 16 mm fuseholder (GF fuse not included) LEN Fuse indicator lamp (110-220 VAC only) GF-(amp) Fast acting fuse
BAM2 DINRALU DINRSTL M4/6
RELATED PRODUCTS End stop DIN rail, aluminum, 39.4" (1m) DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m) DIN rail terminal block 6 mm
PAGE 842 860 860 842 March 2014
844
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Rated Voltage Rated Current Pole Spacing Rated Wire Size 150V, 600V 25A, 10A, 22A 0.205", 0.315" 24-10 AWG
PANEL FABRICATION
SNK SERIES DIN RAIL DISCONNECT SWITCH AND FUSE HOLDERS ZS4 SERIES DISCONNECT SWITCH AND FUSE HOLDERS
SNK ZS4 Series disconnect switches and fuse holders provide a safe method for protecting or isolating a circuit. Once installed the fuse is enclosed and prohibits the installer from coming in contact with live circuit. You can quickly identify the defective circuit by the blown fuse indicator.
Fits both 5x20mm and 5x25mm fuses Wiring of terminal block can be done when fuseholder is in closed position Blown fuse indicator for quick identication of fuse failures ZS4-SF1-R1
ZS4-SF1
ZS4-S-T2
PANEL FABRICATION
Operating Temperature 67 to 230F (-55 to 110C) Approvals CE;UR File #E60645; CSA #2329965 RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
DIMENSIONS in (mm)
3.79 (96.3) 90 3.5 (88.8) 90 2.35 (59.7) 180 2.77 (70.3)
2.09" (53)
14
2.37" (60.4) 2.08" (52.9) 2.64" (67.2)
3.40 (86.3)
2.15 (54.6)
1.85 (47.1)
3.10 (78.8)
ZS4-SF1-R1
1.30 (32.9)
ZS4-SF1
1.05 (26.7)
ZS4-ST-2
1.05" (26.7)
MODEL ZS4-S-T2 ZS4-SF1 ZS4-SF1-R1 ZS4-SF1-R3 ES4-SF GF-(amp) K235-(amp) DESCRIPTION 4mm Disconnect with blade; with 2 test sockets - grey 4mm Fuseholder - grey/dark grey (fuse not included) 4mm Fuseholder with blown fuse indicator 24-60V - grey/dark grey (fuse not included) 4mm Fuseholder with blown fuse indicator 115-250V - grey/dark grey (fuse not included) End section - dark grey RELATED PRODUCTS Fast acting fuse Fast acting fuses for 8 mm fuse holder (10A fuse maximum) PAGE 854 854
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
2.35" (59.7)
845
PANEL FABRICATION
DESCRIPTION
Model SAK4 and SAK6 DIN rail terminal blocks offer a modular design for exibility in layout and reduced installation time. The standard color is beige for the terminal blocks and accessories, but other color terminal blocks are available. The Model SAK4 offers maximum circuit density while the Model SAK6 offers the convenience of larger screws for conventional screwdriver installation. Double-stacks and fuseholders are available. The markers are side mount in horizontal printing.
WEIDMLLER DIN RAIL TERMINAL BLOCKS (STANDARD BEIGE) SAK4, SAK6
NEW!
TW DIN-3F EW35 SAK4 SAK6 ASK1 EW35
FEATURES
Wire secured by ribbed compression clamp Universal DIN rail mounting Reduced installation time Block removable without displacing adjacent blocks
PANEL FABRICATION
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.654 (4.2)
1.87 (4.75)
MODEL DESCRIPTION STDRD SINGLE BEIGE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCK PKG* SAK4 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, beige 100 EK4 6 mm grounding block, green and yellow 100 AP-SAK End section, beige (one required) 100 EW35 End stop, beige (two required) 50 TW Circuit separator, beige 20 FUSEHOLDERS ASK1 Fuseholder beige (K235 style fuse not included) 100 ASK1-LD Fuseholder beige with 120 VAC/VDC indicator 25 (K235 style fuse not included) AP-ASK1 Fuseholder end section, beige (one required) 20 SINGLE BEIGE 8 mm TERMINAL BLOCK SAK6 8 mm DIN rail terminal block, beige 100 EK6 8 mm grounding block, green and yellow 100 AP-SAK End section, beige (one required) 100 EW35 End stop, beige (two required) 50 TW Circuit separator, beige 20 DOUBLE STACK BEIGE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCK DK4 6 mm double stack terminal block, beige 100 AP-DK End section, beige (one required) 20 EW35 End stop, beige (two required) 50 TW Circuit separator, beige 20 SINGLE 6 mm TERMINAL BLOCK IN COLORS SAK4-BL 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, blue 100 SAK4-RD 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, red 100 SAK4-YW 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, yellow 100 SAK4-OR 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, orange 100 SAK4-GR 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, green 100 SAK4-GY 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, gray 100 SAK4-BK 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, black 100 SAK4-BR 6 mm DIN rail terminal block, brown 100 ACCESSORIES DINRSTL 35 mm steel DIN mounting rail, 39.4" (1m) 40 DINRALU 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail, 39.4" (1m) 40 Q10-6 6 mm 10 pole jumper bar with screws and spacers 20 Q10-8 8 mm 10 pole jumper bar with screws and spacers 20 DEKH-1/50 Horizontal numbers (one strip of 1-50) 10 DEKH-x/xx Horizontal numbers (one strip of 50 numbers, 10 fill in range, i.e. 51-100) DEKH-LNG Horizontal markers labeled L1, L2, L3, N, G 10 DEK-B Blank markers 10 K235 Fuses 5 * May be ordered by piece
SAK4
1.969 (5.0)
SAK4
0.256 (0.65)
SAK6
0.315 (0.8)
14
in (cm)
2.244 (5.7)
DK4
0.236 (0.6)
in (cm)
2.283 (5.8)
1.339 (3.4)
ASK1
0.315 (0.8)
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage Rated Current Rated Wire Size SAK4 SAK6 Approvals 600 VAC/VDC 30A UL, 36A CSA 22-10 AWG 22-8 AWG UL-recognized component, File #E60693; CSA certied
846
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Sectional design for layout exibility Channel mounting 32 circuits per foot Kant Kut wiring connectors Touch-proof design
PANEL FABRICATION
3/8" SECTIONAL TERMINAL BLOCKS 6G38
Model 6G38 sectional terminal blocks are individually molded blocks that can be assembled to produce a terminal strip for the required number of circuits. The larger size of these 3/8" blocks makes wiring terminations easier for both small and large wire gauges. The Model 6G38-TSKK-C is channel mounted and can be used in conjunction with the Model 6W30 sectional fuse holder.
6G38-TSKK-DIN
6G38-TSKK-C
PANEL FABRICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage Rated Current Rated Wire Size Connections Materials Of Construction 600V 30A 22-10 AWG Tin-plated copper Gray glass-lled polycarbonate, 257F (125C) Circuits Per Foot Approvals Warranty 32 UL-recognized component, File #E62806, CSA certied, File #LR19766 1 year
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.25 (3.17) 1.50 (3.81) 1.54 (3.92) 1.25 (3.17) 1.26 (3.19)
1.54 (3.91)
0.375 (0.95) TYP.
14
A
1.78 (4.51)
6G38-TSKK-C
6G38-TSKK-DIN
A = 0.84 + (0.375 x No. of Blocks) in = (2.13) + (0.95 x No of Blocks)cm
MODEL DESCRIPTION CHANNEL MOUNT 6G38-TSKK-C 3/8" sectional terminal block, MPC channel mount 6G38-E-C End section, MPC channel mount (one required) MC Mounting clamps (2 required) MPC-3 Pre-punched aluminum mounting channel, 3' (0.91m) MPC-6 Pre-punched aluminum mounting channel, 6' (1.83m) DIN RAIL MOUNT 6G38-TSKK-DIN 3/8" sectional terminal block, DIN rail mount 6G38-E-DIN End section, DIN rail mount (one required) MSK End bracket (two required) for DIN terminal blocks DINRSTL DIN rail, steel DIN-3F 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant DINRALU DIN rail, aluminum BAM-1000 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m) ACCESSORIES J-38 Individual jumpers for 3/8" (0.95 cm) blocks
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
847
PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL MOUNT TERMINAL BLOCKS BKA/1
DESCRIPTION
Model BKA/1 panel-mount terminal blocks are compact and modular. They are used for applications where space saving, direct mount, multiple terminal assemblies are required. These modular blocks can be used to replace barrier strips. Because of the compact size, these terminals are appropriate for use in small enclosures, equipment housings, or conned locations where space is a constraint. Model BKA/1 terminal blocks are individual, single-pole components that snap-together to any required number of poles. This design also permits modules to be added or subtracted to meet changing electrical requirements. Mounting sections snap on to the ends of the terminal assembly or between terminal blocks to provide additional mounting points where required.
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
PANEL FABRICATION
FEATURES
Extremely compact Cost effective 50 terminations per foot Screw-cage clamp Modular design Surface mount
in (cm)
0.87 (2.2)
0.24 (0.60)
0.87 (2.2)
SPECIFICATIONS
14
Rated Voltage Rated Current Rated Wire Size Materials Of Construction Circuits Per Foot Approvals Warranty
300V 20A 22-12 AWG Polyamide 6.6 50 UL-recognized component, File #E95701; CSA certied, File #LPR42110 1 year
BKA/1 Terminal
0.24 (0.62) 0.29 (0.73)
0.87 (2.21)
0.13 (0.34) 0.87 (2.21)
EH2 Mounting Section
MODEL BKA/1 EH2 AQU75S SB6/10 DESCRIPTION Single terminal block module, 0.236" (0.60 cm) Mounting section (2 required, min) ACCESSORIES 75-pole jumper strip Blank marker strip for 10 blocks
848
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Closed-back design Insulation barrier between poles Multiple pole arrangements Easy to install Surface mounted
PANEL FABRICATION
DOUBLE ROW TERMINAL BLOCKS 100 SERIES
100 Series double row terminal blocks are designed for low voltage/amperage wire terminations. These double-row terminal blocks provide an insulation barrier between circuits to prevent short circuits in factory or eld wiring applications.
PANEL FABRICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage 250V Rated Current 15A Rated Wire Size 22-14 AWG Materials Of Construction Thermoplastic base, plated steel terminals with Sems pressure saddle screws Spacing 3/8" centers Approvals UL-recognized component, File #E167040 Warranty 1 year
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
#6-32 X 1/4 Screw
0.3 (0.78) 0.38 (0.96)
Mounting Holes 0.165 dia (0.41)
0.31 (0.79)
0.88 (2.24)
A B
0.48 (1.22)
0.28 (0.71)
NO. OF POLES 5 10 15 20 25 30
DIMENSIONS A 2.25 (5.72) 4.12 (10.46) 6.00 (15.24) 7.88 (20.02) 9.75 (24.77) 11.62 (29.51)
in (cm) B 2.53 (6.43) 4.41 (11.20) 6.28 (15.95) 8.16 (20.73) 10.03 (25.48) 11.91 (30.25)
14
MODEL 105SP 110SP 115SP 120SP 125SP 130SP JSPS DESCRIPTION Double row terminal blocks, ve poles Double row terminal blocks, 10 poles Double row terminal blocks, 15 poles Double row terminal blocks, 20 poles Double row terminal blocks, 25 poles Double row terminal blocks, 30 poles RELATED PRODUCTS 10-pole jumper strip
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
849
PANEL FABRICATION
DOUBLE ROW TERMINAL STRIPS TS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
TS Series double row tubular screw terminal strips are a cost-effective alternative to barrier strips or other types of terminal blocks. They're easy to use; simply strip the wire and insert and tighten the terminal screw. The tubular screw terminal strips feature a dead front design that prevents shocks and shorts. The polyamide nylon strips can be readily eld-cut to the desired number of poles using only a utility or pocket knife.
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
FEATURES
PANEL FABRICATION
Tubular screw clamp connection with wire protector Opaque white polyamide 6.6 housing Panel mounting or free oating Recessed metal parts for nger protection Easily cut to the required number of poles Surface mounted
SPECIFICATIONS
TS1.5 Rated voltage Rated current Rated wire size Housing material Connections Recommended tightening torque Pole spacing 300V 15A 40A 22-14 AWG 18-8 AWG Polyamide 6.6 Tubular screw clamp with wire protector 6.6 in-lb (0.75 Nm) TS6
in (cm)
B H C L
14
0.32" (0.8 cm) 0.47" (1.2 cm) 38 terminals/ft 25 terminals/ft Agency approvals UL-recognized component, File #E103245; CSA certified, File #LR38962 Warranty 1 year
MODEL TS1.5/2WP TS1.5/3WP TS1.5/4WP TS1.5/10WP TS1.5/12WP TS6/12WP
0.53 (1.35) 0.85 (2.16) 1.16 (2.95) 3.04 (7.72) 3.66 (9.30) 5.51 (13.99)
A
0.32 (0.8)
0.72 0.61 (1.82) (1.55)
0.11 0.32 (0.28) (0.81)
0.91 0.70 0.47 0.17 0.47 (2.32) (1.77) (1.19) (0.42) (1.19)
MODEL TS1.5/2WP TS1.5/3WP TS1.5/4WP TS1.5/10WP TS1.5/12WP TS6/12WP MPB6 DESCRIPTION Double row terminal strip, two poles Double row terminal strip, three poles Double row terminal strip, four poles Double row terminal strip, 10 poles Double row terminal strip, 12 poles Heavy-duty double row terminal strip, 12 poles ACCESSORIES Marking plate, blank (for use with TS6/12WP)
850
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS
Dim. A B C D E F G H Inches (cm) 0.70 (1.78) 1.40 (3.56) 2.10 (5.33) 2.80 (7.11) 1.70 (4.32) 2.35 (5.97) 0.48 (1.22) 3.12 (7.92)
PANEL FABRICATION
CLASS CC ENCLOSED FUSE HOLDERS 6SC30, 6SM30 SERIES
6SC30 & 6SM30 Series fuse holders can be used for various applications including control panels, lighting, heating and air conditioning, refrigeration equipment, transformer protection, and power monitoring. The 6SC30 & 6SM30 Series feature the convenience of DIN rail mounting and blown fuse protection. FEATURES Tested and approved for 200,000 RMS symmetrical amps withstand rating and short circuit current ratings (SCCR) DIN rail mount Touchsafe design IEC type IP20 Handle for quick, easy fuse change Blown fuse indication AC and DC rated
6SC30A1I-C 6SM30A1I-C
PANEL FABRICATION
Voltage Rating 600 VAC/VDC Current Rating 30 Amps Wire Size 18-6 AWG Indicator Light 65 VAC minimum, 90 VDC minimum Materials of Construction Thermoplastic
Fuse Size Mounting Approvals Warranty
13/32" diameter by 1 1/2" long DIN rail UL File E35113 1 year
D C B A F E
14
H INDICATOR G
MODEL 6SC30A1I-C 6SC30A2I-C 6SC30A3I-C 6SC30A4I-C 6SM30A1I-C 6SM30A2I-C 6SM30A3I-C 6SM30A4I-C FLM/FLQ FNQ-R DESCRIPTION Fuse holder, one pole, with blown fuse indication; (use FNQ fuse) Fuse holder, two poles, with blown fuse indication; (use FNQ fuse) Fuse holder, three poles, with blown fuse indication; (use FNQ fuse) Fuse holder, four poles, with blown fuse indication; (use FNQ fuse) Fuse holder, one pole, with blown fuse indication; (use FLM/FLQ fuse) Fuse holder, two poles, with blown fuse indication; (use FLM/FLQ fuse) Fuse holder, three poles, with blown fuse indication; (use FLM/FLQ fuse) Fuse holder, four poles, with blown fuse indication (use FLM/FLQ fuse) RELATED PRODUCTS 250/500 V fuses 600 V fuses PAGE 854 854
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
851
PANEL FABRICATION
CLASS M BASE-MOUNT FUSE HOLDER 6M30 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
6M30 Series class M base-mount fuse holders can be used for various applications including control panels, lighting, heating, air conditioning, refrigeration equipment, and transformer protection.
NEW!
6M30 Series Clip Material Fuse Size Flammability Rating Approvals Warranty Copper alloy, tin plated 0.41" dia (1.03 cm), 1.5"L (3.81 cm) (FLM/FLQ Series) UL 94V-0 UL-recognized component, File #E35113; CSA certied, File #LR21455 1 year
2.35 (5.97) 1.50 (3.81) 3.13 (7.95) 0.42 (1.06) 0.75 (1.91) 0.172 x 0.218 Slots (0.44 x 0.55) 0.50 (1.27) 1.290 (3.28)
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage Rated Current Connections 600V 30A Quick connects and sems pressure plate 10-18 AWG Wire Size Materials Of Construction High impact thermoplastic, 257F (125C)
PANEL FABRICATION
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.375 (0.95)
0.85 (2.16)
1.60 (4.06) 0.75 (1.91)
1.56 (3.96)
14
0.24 (0.61) 0.42 (1.06)
1 Pole
2 Poles
3 Poles
MODEL 6M30A1SPQ 6M30A2SPQ 6M30A3SPQ CCM630 FLM/FLQ KLK-PAK DESCRIPTION Fuse holder, one pole Fuse holder, two poles Fuse holder, three poles PAGE 854 854
RELATED PRODUCTS Fuse holder cover 250/500 V fuses Fuse package includes fues holder, three poles, the KLK-3 fuses
852
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Sectional design for layout exibility Channel mounting Built-in fuse puller Compatible with 6H38 sectional terminal blocks
PANEL FABRICATION
SECTIONAL FUSE HOLDERS 6W30
The Model 6W30 sectional fuse holders are used with Model 6H38 Marathon sectional terminal blocks and may be mounted on the same mounting channel. Each row of fuse holders requires an end section. If the fuse holders are to be mounted alone, two mounting clamps are required in addition to the end section and mounting channel.
PANEL FABRICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage 600V Rated Current 30A Wire Size 22-10 AWG Materials of Construction White nylon, 221F (105C) Clip Material Copper alloy, tin plated Fuse Size 0.41" dia x 1.5"L (1.03 x 3.81 cm) (FLM/FLQ Series) Flammability Rating Approvals Warranty 94V-0 UL-recognized component, File #E35113; CSA certied, File #LR21455 1 year
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Sectional Dimensions L = 0.88 + (0.68 x N) C = 0.48 + (0.68 x N) N = Number of poles

2.00 (5.08) 2.03 (5.16)
2.80 (7.11)
14
L C
0.34 (0.86) 1.70 (4.32) 0.21 (0.53) 0.49 (1.24) 2.00 (5.08) 1.00 (2.54)
2.00 (5.08)
1.70 (4.32)
1.95 (4.95)
0.68 (1.73)
MODEL 6W30A1-C 6WE-C MC MPC-3 MPC-6 DESCRIPTION Sectional fuse holder, channel mount Fuse holder end section, channel mount Mounting clamps (2 required) Pre-punched aluminum mounting channel, 3' (0.91m) Pre-punched aluminum mounting channel, 6' (1.83m)
FLM/FLQ
RELATED PRODUCTS 250/500 V fuses
PAGE 854
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
853
PANEL FABRICATION
FUSES FLM, FLQ, FNQ, GF, K235, 251 SERIES
DESCRIPTION FLM, FLQ, FNQ series midget fuses are slow-acting fuses used with 6SC30 & 6SM30 Series, 6M30 Series, 6W30 Series, and FB2X Series fuse holders. The KLK-3 series fuses are fast-acting fuses.
SPECIFICATIONS/ORDERING INFORMATION
AMP RATING 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.25 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0 7.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 30.0 AMP RATING 3.0A 250V MODEL 500V MODEL FLM-0.5 FLQ-0.5 FLM-0.8 FLQ-0.8 FLM-1 FLQ-1 FLM-1.25 FLQ-1.25 FLM-1.5 FLQ-1.5 FLM-2 FLQ-2 FLM-2.5 FLQ-2.5 FLM-3 FLQ-3 FLM-4 FLQ-4 FLM-5 FLQ-5 FLM-7 FLQ-7 FLM-10 FLQ-10 FLM-15 (125 VAC) FLQ-15 FLM-20 (32 VAC) FLQ-20 FLM-30 (32 VAC) FLQ-30 600V MODEL KLK-3 600V MODEL FNQ-R-0.5 FNQ-R-0.8 FNQ-R-1 FNQ-R-1.25 FNQ-R-1.5 FNQ-R-2 FNQ-R-2.5 FNQ-R-3 FNQ-R-4 FNQ-R-5 FNQ-R-7 FNQ-R-10 FNQ-R-15 FNQ-R-20 FNQ-R-30
NEW!
FNQ-R FLM/FLQ/KLK Series
APPLICATION FLM/FLQ/FNQ Series - Inductive loads, power supplies, control transformers, control circuits with high inrush currents KLK-3 - Watt meters, watt transducers, and control circuits without high inrush currents FLM/FLQ/KLK UL File E19180; FNQ UL File E4273
PANEL FABRICATION
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.41 (1.03) 1.50 (3.81)
DESCRIPTION GF and K235 series glass fuses are available in slow-blow and fast-acting models. FEATURES
GF Series for use with M10/16SFL fuse holder,HKP-HH and HRK K235 Series for use with M4/8 and ZS4 Series Disconnect Switch and Fuse Holders GF & K235 UL File E19180; HKP-HH & HRK UL File E72169
14
GF, K235 Series HKP-HH HRK

AMP RATING VOLTAGE FAST-ACTING FUSE SLOW-BLOW FUSE 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 5 7 10 15 HRK HKP-HH
(Order QTY 1 = standard package of 5) Ex. 5 GF-5 = 25 fuses

FAST-ACTING K235-0.5 250 GF-0.5 GF-0.5S K235-1 250 GF-1 GF-1S K235-1.5 250 GF-1.5 GF-1.5S K235-2 250 GF-2 GF-2S K235-2.5 250 GF-2.5 GF-2.5S K235-3 250 GF-3 GF-3S K235-5 (125V) 250 GF-5 GF-5S K235-7 (125V) 250 GF-7 GF-7S K235-10 (125V) 250 GF-10 GF-10S* 250 GF-15* GF-15S* Inline fuseholder, 32V, 15A, for 1/4" fuses 7/8"-1-1/4" Panel mount fuseholder, 250V, 15A, for 1/4" x 1-1/4" fuses
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
GF = 1.25 (3.17) K235 = 0.787 (2.0)
GF = 0.25 (0.63) K235 = 0.197 (0.5)
* Ceramic tube fuse
DESCRIPTION 251 Series fast-acting circuit board type fuses are sold in packs of 5 and range from 0.125 A to 2.0 A ratings.
251 Series
APPLICATION UL File E19180

(Sold in packs of 5) (Order QTY 1 = PACKAGE of 5) AMP RATING 125V MODEL 1/8 #251.125 1/2 #251.500 1 #251001 2 #251002
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.47 (3.74)
0.28 (0.70)
1.47 (3.74)
Epoxy Coating
LF
1A
0.095 (0.238) dia
854
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Current limiting Fast breaking time (2.5-3.5 msec) DIN rail or front panel mounting Finger safe terminals
PANEL FABRICATION
ABB MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS S200U-K SERIES
The S200U-K Series of miniature circuit breakers are effective products for both commercial and industrial applications. The K-"power" characteristic-function asures protection and control for circuits like transformer and auxiliary circuits, and against overloads and short-circuits. Two terminal spaces on top or bottom can be used for cables wth differnt cross-sections or combination of cables and busbars. The S200U-K Series also feature a quick fastening system for easy removal of the devices from the busbar and have a patented IP 20 nger safe terminals.
S201U-K20
PANEL FABRICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage 240 VAC 0.2 to 63A Rated Current Rated Interruption Capacity 10,000A Protection Rating IP 20 Poles Single, 2, 3 Operating Temperature -13 to 131F (-25 to 55C) Mounting Vertical and Horizontal on 35mm DIN rail Additional Specications Short Circuit Capacity 10kA Frequency 50/60 Hz Electromechanical Protection Method (thermal/magnetic) Dimensions Single 2 Pole 3 Pole Approvals Weight Single 2 Pole 3 Pole Warranty 0.73"W x 2.72"D x 3.47"H (1.8 x 6.9 x 8.8 cm) 1.38"W x 2.72"D x 3.47"H (3.5 x 6.9 x 8.8cm) 2.19"W x 2.72"D x 3.47"H (5.25 x 6.9 x 8.8cm) UL Listed 489; File #E212323 0.33 lb (0.15kg) 0.62 lb (0.28kg) 0.93 lb (0.42kg) 1 Year
14
MODEL S201U-K1 S201U-K2 S201U-K3 S201U-K4 S201U-K5 S201U-K8 S201U-K10 S201U-K15 S201U-K20 S201U-K25 S202U-K1 S202U-K2 S202U-K3 S202U-K4 S202U-K5 March 2014 DESCRIPTION Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 1 Amp Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 2 Amp Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 3 AMP Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 4 AMP Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 5 AMP Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 8 AMP Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 10 AMP Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 15 AMP Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 20 AMP Circuit breaker; 1 pole; 240 VAC 25 AMP Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 1 AMP Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 2 AMP Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 3 AMP Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 4 AMP Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 5 AMP MODEL S202U-K8 S202U-K10 S202U-K15 S202U-K20 S202U-K25 S203U-K1 S203U-K2 S203U-K3 S203U-K4 S203U-K5 S203U-K8 S203U-K10 S203U-K15 S203U-K20 S203U-K25 DESCRIPTION Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 8 AMP Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 10 AMP Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 15 AMP Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 20 AMP Circuit breaker; 2 pole; 240 VAC 25 AMP Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 1 AMP Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 2 AMP Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 3 AMP Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 4 AMP Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 5 AMP Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 8 AMP Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 10 AMP Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 15 AMP Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 20 AMP Circuit breaker; 3 pole; 240 VAC 25 AMP
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
855
PANEL FABRICATION
CIRCUIT BREAKER QL SERIES, 1C SERIES
DESCRIPTION QL Series circuit breakers provide excellent protection against overloads and short circuits for electrical circuits and small-sized electrical equipment. FEATURES Holds 100% rated current independent of ambient temperature Resets immediately after tripping Mounts to DIN rail
NEW!
QL Series
SPECIFICATIONS
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, 8A, 10A, 15A, 20A, 25A Rated Interruption Capacity 10,000A Protection Method Hydraulic magnetic technology Single pole Poles Time Delay 150% rated current, 8-90 sec; 200% rated current 4-28 sec Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Dimensions 3.8"H x 0.51"W x 2.7"D (9.7 x 1.3 x 6.8 cm) Weight 0.22 lb (0.1 kg) UL 489 listed, File #E192487, CSA, CE, Approvals VDE Warranty 1 year Rated Voltage Rated Current
MODEL QL-1 QL-2 QL-3 QL-4 QL-5 QL-8 QL-10 QL-15 QL-20 QL-25 DESCRIPTION 1A Circuit breaker 2A Circuit breaker 3A Circuit breaker 4A Circuit breaker 5A Circuit breaker 8A Circuit breaker 10A Circuit breaker 15A Circuit breaker 20A Circuit breaker 25A Circuit breaker
PANEL FABRICATION
DESCRIPTION
14
1C Series circuit breakers provide excellent protection against overloads and short circuits for electrical circuits and small-sized electrical equipment.
FEATURES
Line/load reversible Current limiting Mounts to DIN rail
1C15UL
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage Rated Current 120/240/277 VAC, 50/60 Hz 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A ,5A, 8A, 10A, 15A, 20A, 25A
Model 1C1UL 1C2UL 1C3UL 1C4UL 1C5UL 1C8UL 1C10UL 1C15UL 1C20UL 1C25UL Description 1A Circuit breaker 2A Circuit breaker 3A Circuit breaker 4A Circuit breaker 5A Circuit breaker 8A Circuit breaker 10A Circuit breaker 15A Circuit breaker 20A Circuit breaker 25A Circuit breaker March 2014
Rated Interruption Capacity 10,000A Protection Method Thermal magnetic technology Poles Single pole Operating Temperature -13 to 131F (-25 to 55C) Dimensions 4.3"H x 0.57"W x 2.8"D (10.9 x 1.4 x 7.1 cm) Weight 0.31 lb (0.14kg) Approvals UL File #E329510, CE Warranty 1 year
856
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
High impact PVC, self extinguishing Equipped with cover Attractive white or gray nish UL recognized, le E97527 One year warranty MODEL VD1-15G VD1-15W VD1-3G VD1-3W VD15-15G VD15-15W VD15-3G VD15-3W VD22-22G VD22-22W VD22-3G VD22-3W VD3-3G VD3-3W
PANEL FABRICATION
WIRING DUCT VD SERIES
VD Series wiring duct allows the simplication and acceleration of panel-building operations such as wire retention, identication of equipment and circuits, and wire separation.
PANEL FABRICATION
DESCRIPTION 1.5"H x 1"W x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 2.54 cm x 2m), includes cover (**56) 1.5"H x 1"W x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 2.54 cm x 2m), includes cover (**56) 3"H x 1"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 2.54 cm x 2m), includes cover (**28) 3"H x 1"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 2.54 cm x 2m), includes cover (**28) 1.5"H x 1.5"W x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**38) 1.5"H x 1.5"W x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**38) 3"H x 1.5"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**28) 3"H x 1.5"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**28) 2.25"H x 2.25"W x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover (**18) 2.25"H x 2.25"W x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover (**18) 3"H x 2.25"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover (**20) 3"H x 2.25"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover (**20) 3"H x 3"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**16) 3"H x 3"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**16) ** Carton quantity, order per piece
14
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
857
PANEL FABRICATION
ABB WIRING DUCT ABB SERIES
DESCRIPTION
ABB Series wiring duct allows for the simplication and acceleration of panel-building operations such as wire retention, identication of equipment and circuits, and wire separation.
FEATURES
UL94VO resistant to abnormal heat and re up to 960F (516C) Equipped with cover Attractive white or gray nish Accessories available to minimize panel planning and construction time UL File# E125800, IEC 695-2-1 Standard One-year warranty
NEW!
ABB Series
PANEL FABRICATION
MODEL Gray ABB-5043 ABB-5083 ABB-5045 ABB-5085 ABB-5067 ABB-5087 ABB-5089 White ABB-1SL5043A00 ABB-1SL5083A00 ABB-1SL5045A00 ABB-1SL5085A00 ABB-1SL5067A00 ABB-1SL5087A00 ABB-1SL5089A00 DESCRIPTION 1"W x 1.5"H x 6.5'L ( 2.54 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**24) 1"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (2.54 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**14) 1.5"W x 1.5"H x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**15) 1.5"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**18) 2.25"W x 2.25"H x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover (**16) 2.25"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**12) 3"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**8) 1"W x 1.5"H x 6.5'L (2.54 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**24) 1"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (2.54 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**14) 1.5"W x 1.5"H x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 3.81 cm x 2m), includes cover (**15) 1.5"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (3.81 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**18) 2.25"W x 2.25"H x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 5.72 cm x 2m), includes cover (**16) 2.25"W x 3"H x 6.5'L (5.72 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**12) 3"H x 3"W x 6.5'L (7.62 cm x 7.62 cm x 2m), includes cover (**8) ** Carton quantity, order per piece
14
ACCESSORIES Gray ABB-5302 ABB-5304 ABB-5306 ABB-5308 ABB-05240 White ABB-1SL5302A00 ABB-1SL5304A00 ABB-1SL5306A00 ABB-1SL5308A00 Gray cover for 1"W wire duct Gray cover for 1.5"W wire duct Gray cover for 2.25"W wire duct Gray cover for 3"W wire duct Plastic label for slot mounting White cover for 1"W wire duct White cover for 1.5"W wire duct White cover for 2.25"W wire duct White cover for 3"W wire duct
858
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

PANEL FABRICATION
IBOCO WIRING DUCT T1, T1E SERIES
T1 Series wiring duct allows for the simplication and acceleration of panel-building operations such as wire retention, identication of equipment and circuits, and wire separation. T1E Series wiring ducts have smaller width ngers. They are 0.16" wide compared to the T1 Series which are 0.47" wide. Self-extinguishing rigid PVC duct Equipped with cover Attractive white or gray nish UL recognized component File E123572, CSA certied Accessories available to minimize panel planning and construction time All models are 6.5' (1.98 m) long and include cover One-year warranty
T1E
T1 Series
PANEL FABRICATION
INSTALLATION
CL Wire Retainer
Model T1 T1E Description T1 Series wiring duct (0.47 wide fingers) T1E Series wiring duct (0.16 wide fingers) 10 1.0 (2.54 cm) width 15 1.5 (3.81 cm) width 22 2.25 (5.72 cm) width 30 3.0 (7.62 cm) width 15 1.5 (3.81 cm) height 22 2.25 (5.72 cm) height 30 3.0 (7.62 cm) height 40 4.0 (10.16 cm) height 50 5.0 12.7 cm height G Grey cover W White cover
14
22 30 W
T1
- Only available with T1(E)-30 models Example - T1-2230W T1 Series wiring duct, 2.25W x 3.0H x 6.5L (5.72 cm x 7.62 cm x 1.98 m), with white cover Sold individually or in packages. Ask your sales person or check kele.com for package quantity purchases
COV-10* COV-15* COV-22* COV-30* SEP-15 SEP-22 SEP-30 ZP1 ZP2
ACCESSORIES CL-1515 1"W x 6.56'L (2.54 x cm x 2m) duct cover CL-1522 1.5"W x 6.56'L (3.81cm x 2m) duct cover CL-1530 2.25"W x 6.56'L (5.72 cm x 2m) duct cover CL-2215 3"W x 6.56'L (7.62 cm x 2m) duct cover CL-2222 Circuit separator, 1.5"H x 6.56'L (3.81 cm x 2m), CL-2230 use with duct 1.5"H (3.8 cm) Circuit separator, 2.25"H x 6.56'L (5.72 cm x 2 m), CL-2240 CL-3022 use with duct 2.25"H (5.72 cm) CL-3030 Circuit separator, 3"H x 6.56'L (7.62 cm x 2m), CL-3040 use with duct 3"H (7.62 cm) DINBLOK3 Wire tie attatchment Wire tie attachment
Wire retainer for 1.5" x 1.5" (3.81 x 3.81 cm) duct Wire retainer for 1.5" x 2.25" (3.81 x 5.72 cm) duct Wire retainer for 1.5" x 3" (3.81 x 7.62 cm) duct Wire retainer for 2.25" x 1.5" (5.72 x 3.81 cm) duct Wire retainer for 2.25" x 2.25" (5.72 x 5.72 cm) duct Wire retainer for 2.25" x 3" (5.72 x 7.62 cm) duct Wire retainer for 2.25" x 4" (5.72 x 10.16 cm) duct Wire retainer for 3" x 2.25" (7.62 x 5.72 cm) duct Wire retainer for 3" x 3" (7.62 x 7.62 cm) duct Wire retainer for 3" x 4" (7.62 x 10.16 cm) duct DIN rail mounting block *Add W for White or G for Gray.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
859
PANEL FABRICATION
WIRING AIDS P, ST, STS SERIES, DIN RAIL
DESCRIPTION The P Series Spiralite universal spiral wrapping is great for fast and economical grouping of wire bundles. FEATURES Polyethylene construction Provides exible connection between panel and door Strong, yet simple to install and remove
MODEL FOR WIRE BUNDLES in (cm) FT (m) (per carton*) P2 1/4 to 1 (0.64 to 2.54) 80 (24) P3 3/8 to 2 (0.95 to 5.08) 80 (24) P4 1/2 to 3 (1.27 to 7.62) 65 (20) * Available in carton quantities only order quantity 1 = 1 carton
NEW!
P Series STS Series ST Series
PANEL FABRICATION
DESCRIPTION
ST, STS support brackets give you options in mounting your DIN rail. These are made of cold-rolled steel treated with galvanic zinc plating and passivation.
FEATURES
Includes 6mm screws
DIMENSIONS
in. (mm)
3.15 (80) 1 (25) o0.23 (6) 2.36 (60) 0.31 (8) 2.05 (52) 0.23 6MA (6) 0.28 x 0.47 (7 x 12) 0.79 (20)
M6
MODEL ST STS-25 STS-50 STS-70 STS-90 DESCRIPTION DIN Rail support bracket 1" din rail support bracket 2" din rail support bracket 2.75" din rail support bracket 3.5" din rail support bracket
14
ST
1.18 (30) 2.36 (60)
2 (50) 0.08 (2)
1.38 (35) 2.36 (60) 2.52 (64) 2.75 (70) 3.15 (80)
Height
25mm = 1 50mm = 2 70mm = 2.75 90mm = 3.5
STS
DESCRIPTION
DIN rail is the standard method for mounting relays and terminal blocks. Kele offers ve models with different features.
FEATURES
One meter length (39.4") Perforated Steel or aluminum
BAM-1000 with DINCLIC-FM4 Mounting Clips
DIMENSIONS
1.38 in (3.51) ST and STS screw size 6mm (cm) 0.30 (0.75) 1.06 (2.69) 1.23 (3.12) 1.38 (3.51) 0.39 (0.99) 1.06 (2.7) 1.38 (3.5) .24 (.63) 0.59 (1.5)
DIN-3F
DIN-3F
BAM-1000
BAM-1500
MODEL BAM-1000 BAM-1500 DIN-3F DINRALU DINRSTL DESCRIPTION 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m) 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m) 15mm height 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant DIN rail, aluminum, 39.4" (1m) DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m)
DINCLIC-FM4
RELATED PRODUCTS Mounting clips, 4 mm screw size
860
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Prewired Handy box included Cost effective Always hot receptacle Panel disconnect switch Pilot light option to indicate closed switch CAUTION: Receptacle is always hot.
PANEL FABRICATION
PANEL RECEPTACLE & DISCONNECT SWITCH ASSEMBLIES PDK, PRK
These panel receptacle and disconnect switch assemblies combine convenience and function. Models PRK-S, PRKFS, and PRK-FLS provide constant power to the receptacle and can be used to power down the rest of the panel with the toggle switch. Models PRK-FS and PRK-FLS include a fuse holder for circuit protection (fuse sold separately). Models PDK and PRK use the standard single-gang conguration and the Models PRK-FLS, PRK-FS, and PRK-S use the double-gang conguration. The 51012218 offers DIN rail mounting and convenient push-on wiring.
PRK-GFI
PRK-S
PRK
PANEL FABRICATION
51012218
PRK-FLS
PDK
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Current Rating Non-GFI GFI Switch Indicator Wire Type 120 VAC 20A @ 120 VAC 15A @ 120 VAC 20A @120 VAC 25 mA @120 VAC 12 AWG (UL) MTW 600V, 13 AWG (UL) MTW 600V 250V (0-15A ordered separately)
PDK-F-2P
PRK-FLS
PDK-L
WIRING
L N (IN) G
14
S F
Fuse Size Dimensions PDK, PDK-F, PRK, 51012218, PRK-GFI 4.75" H x 2.75" W (12.07 x 6.99 cm), PRK-S, PRK-FS, PRK-FLS 4.50" H x 4.50" W (11.43 x 11.43 cm) Warranty 1 year
L L N (OUT) G
MODEL PDK PDK-F-2P PDK-L PRK PRK-FLS PRK-FS PRK-GFI PRK-S 51012218 GF Series DESCRIPTION Panel disconnect switch assembly Panel disconnect switch assembly, 2 pole, 1 leg fused Panel disconnect switch assembly with green light Panel receptacle assembly Panel switch and receptacle assembly with fuse holder and green light Panel switch and receptacle assembly with fuse holder Panel receptacle assembly with GFI receptacle Panel switch and receptacle assembly Din mounted duplex receptacle RELATED PRODUCTS Fuses (fuses ordered separately) PAGE 854
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
861
PANEL FABRICATION
PILOT LIGHTS L4000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION L4000 Series replaceable incandescent pilot lights with associated colored lenses can be mounted to control panels to provide instantaneous status indication of mechanical equipment such as fans, pumps, compressors, or control circuits. FEATURES Low cost Noncorrosive black polyester body Nickel-plated brass terminals for positive contact Sturdy polycarbonate lenses Simple installation with nylon hex nut Replaceable incandescent lamps
NEW!
SSG1-11/16 with L4017/L4018
PANEL FABRICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Terminals Body Material Bezel Lens Mounting Approvals Nickel plated brass Black polyester Polished stainless steel Polycarbonate 11/16" (1.75 cm) dia hole, supplied with polyester hex nut, Threaded UL-recognized component, File #E20325; CSA recognized, File #LR13346
Supply Voltage Supply Current Life Expectancy
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Flat lens Dome lens 0.53 (1.35) 0.25 to 0.34 (0.64 to 0.86) Panel thickness (when hex nut is reversed as shown) 0.09 0.84 (0.23) (2.13) 0.38 (0.97) 0.53 (1.35)
Model
0.81 (2.06) 0.63 (1.60) 0 to 0.25 (0 to 0.64) Panel thickness 0.81 (2.06) Across flats 11/16-27 Threads 0.187 (0.48) Terminals
14
12PSB5 12 VAC/VDC 0.17A 12,000 hours 24PSB5 24 VAC/VDC 0.073A 10,000 hours 28PSB5 28 VAC/VDC 0.04A 5,000 hours 120PSB5 120 VAC/VDC 0.025A 5,000 hours 5SBF200OCW028B 24/28 VDC 0.015A 50,000 hours 5SBF200OCW120A 120 VAC 0.010A 50,000 hours *Average life ratings are based on shock-free, vibration-free, transient-free continuous operation. Incandescent lamps should not be connected across inductive loads, such as a relay coil or solenoid, without a varistor or transzorb to prevent voltage transients from damaging the lament.
SOCKET MODEL L4017 DESCRIPTION Lamp socket, 11/16" dia threaded LAMPS MODEL 12PSB5 24PSB5 28PSB5 120PSB5 5SBF200-OCW-028B 5SBF200-OCW-120A FLAT LENSES L4025 L4026 L4027 L4028 L4029 L4030 L4031 DESCRIPTION Lamp, 12 VAC/VDC Lamp, 24 VAC/VDC Lamp, 28 VAC/VDC Lamp, 120 VAC/VDC LED, 24/28 VDC LED, 120 VAC Flat lens, red Flat lens, clear Flat lens, amber Flat lens, white Flat lens, green Flat lens, blue Flat lens, yellow
ROUND LENSES L4018 L4019 L4020 L4021 L4022 L4023 L4024
Round lens, red Round lens, clear Round lens, amber Round lens, white Round lens, green Round lens, blue Round lens, yellow
SSG1-11/16
RELATED PRODUCTS Wall plate box mount 11/16" hole March 2014
862
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
PANEL FABRICATION
IDEC PILOT LIGHTS APW SERIES
APW Series replaceable incandescent and LED pilot lights can be mounted on control panels to provide immediate visual status of mechanical equipment such as fans, pumps, compressors, or control circuits.
APW299D-G-24 mounted in E-1PBG
Rugged, oil-tight construction Bezel-threaded lock ring for easy panel installation Incandescent or LED lamps Small size Excellent visibility Multiple voltage input ranges
SSG1-67
SPECIFICATIONS
PANEL FABRICATION
Materials Of Construction Lens Acrylic Base Nylon Bezel Chrome-plated die-cast zinc Applicable Wire Size Minimum 1 x 22 AWG Maximum 2 x 14 AWG or 1 x 12 AWG Mounting 0.86 (2.2 cm) hole Panel thickness adjustment ring Panel Thickness 0.04" to 0.24" (0.10 to 0.61 cm) Lamps T3-1/4 miniature bayonet base LED 6 VDC, 52 mA; 12 VAC/VDC, 26 mA; 24 VAC/VDC,13 mA; 120 VAC, 8 mA; 1,000,000 hrs average life Incandescent 6.3V, 1W; 12V, 1W; 24V, 1W; 3000 hrs average life Protection Rating NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Approvals UL listed, File #E65961; CSA certied, File #LR48366 Warranty 1 year
APW199D-R-24
APW299D-G-24
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.11 (2.85) Panel cutout 0.86 (2.18)
A PILOT LIGHTS A B Dome 0.98 (2.49) 0.94 (2.36) Flush 0.62 (1.57) 0.94 (2.36)
14
PILOT LIGHTS INCANDESCENT MODEL STYLE APW299 - - Dome APW199 - - Round flush LED MODEL APW299D - - APW199D - - STYLE Dome Round flush
Lens Color Code: R-Red, G-Green, A-Amber, S-Blue, W-White Lamp Voltage Code: 6-6 VAC/VDC, 12-12 VAC/VDC, 24-24 VAC/VDC
Lens Color Code: R-Red, G-Green, A-Amber, S-Blue, W-White, Y-Yellow Lamp Voltage Code: 6-6 VDC, 12-12 VAC/VDC, 24-24 VAC/VDC, 120-120 VAC
REPLACEMENT LAMPS INCANDESCENT MODEL VOLTAGE IS-6 6.3V IS-12 12V IS-24 24V IS-120 120V MODEL LSTD-6 LSTD-1 LSTD-2 LSTD-H2 LED VOLTAGE 6 VDC 12 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC COLOR G - Green R - Red A - Amber W - White PW - Pure White S - Blue
E-1PBG E-2PBG E-3PBG E-4PBG SSG1-67
One-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Two-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Three-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Four-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Wall plate box mount 7/8" hole *Holes are 22.5 mm in a vertical arrangement.
RELATED PRODUCTS
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
863
PANEL FABRICATION
DESCRIPTION A Series pilot lights and illuminated push buttons are low-cost, lighted operator devices. A Series selector switches and non-illuminated push buttons are low-cost operator devices.
IDEC PILOT LIGHTS AND MINIATURE SWITCHES A SERIES
FEATURES
Pilot Lights Attractive housing with bright LED indication Smaller 5/8'' (1.6 cm) cutout required Long-lasting LED lamps, 24 VAC/DC 5% 1 Amp contacts, 24/120V Oil tight (IP65 when mounted in enclosure) SPDT switches Momentary or maintained switches Illuminated push buttons ideal for push-to-test applications Solder connections One-year warranty UL le #E55996 Selector Switches Smaller 5/8" (1.59 cm) cutout required Oil-tight (IP65 when mounted in enclosure) 1-amp contacts, 24/120V SPDT switches Momentary and maintained pushbuttons Maintained two- and three-position selector switch Solder connections One-year warranty UL le #E55996
NEW!
SSG1-5/8 AL6M-M14P-S AB6M-M1PB AS6M-2Y2P AS6M-3Y2P
PANEL FABRICATION
14
NON-ILLUMINATED PUSH BUTTONS MODEL DESCRIPTION AB6M Round non-illuminated push button M Momentary operation A Maintained operation 1P SPDT contacts 2P DPDT contacts BUTTON COLOR G (green), R (red), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow), B (black) AB6M M 1P R
Example: AB6M-M1P-R Round non-illuminated push button, momentary, SPDT contacts, red button
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
UL file #E55996 0.11 (0.28)
ILLUMINATED PUSH BUTTONS MODEL DESCRIPTION AL6M Round illuminated push button, 24 VAC/VDC M Momentary operation A Maintained operation 14P SPDT contacts 24P DPDT contacts BUTTON COLOR A (amber), G (green), R (red), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow) AL6M M 14P A
Example: AL6M-M14P-A Round illuminated push button, momentary, SPDT contacts, amber lens
0.32 (0.81)
0.87 (2.2) 1.18 (3.00)
0.35 (0.89)
WIRING
NC NO COM NC NO COM
PILOT LIGHTS AL6M-P4P Round pilot light, 24 VAC/VDC LENS COLOR A (amber), G (green), R (red), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
AL6M-P4P
Example: AL6MP4P-A Round pilot light, amber lens
SELECTOR SWITCHES AS6M Round selector switch 2Y2P Two-position, maintained operation 3Y2P Three-position, maintained operation 2KT2PA Two-position keylock, removeable any position AS6M 2Y2P Example: AL6M-2Y2P Two-position round selector switch, maintained operation
(+) Lamp
(-) Lamp
(DPDT for three-position switch only)
Illuminated Push Buttons Non-Illuminated Push Buttons and Pilot Lights and Selector Switches
RELATED PRODUCTS SSG1-5/8 Wall plate box mount 5/8" hole
864
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
5A contact ratings Black or metallic bezels available Bright and clear LED illumination Round bezel mounts in an 18mm hole Square bezel mounts in an 18 x 18 mm hole IP65 degree of protection
PANEL FABRICATION
FLUSH MOUNT PILOT LIGHTS, PUSHBUTTONS AND SWITCHES LB SERIES
The LB Series add style and safety to any application. The LB Series ush mount style of pushbuttons and pilot lights project only 2mm in front of the panel and just 34.9mm depth behind the panel. They are available in both illuminated and non-illuminated styles. LB7GL-A1T54-S
LB6MB-A1T5-S LB7MK-25TA
SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage Continuous Current Insulation Resistance Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Contact Type Terminals Action Mechanical Life Approvals Warranty 250V 5A 100 M (minimum) -13 to 140F (-25 to 60C) 45 to 85% RH (no condensation) -22 to 176F (-30 to 80C) SPDT, DPDT Solder/tab terminal #110, PC board terminal (optional) Momentary, Maintained Momentary 2M minimum operations Maintained 250K minimum operations UR File #E55996, CSA #LR21451, CE 1 year
WIRING
Lamp Terminal (+)
SPDT/DPDT Contacts
PANEL FABRICATION
TOP 22 X1 24 14 X2 21 11 12 Lamp Terminal (+) Lamp Terminal ()
TOP
X1 X2
Lamp Terminal ()
(SPDT contacts on the right only)
DIMENSIONS
Gasket Locking Ring
0.15 (3.85)
Panel Thickness: 0.020 to 0.13 (0.5 to 3.2)
Round
0.27 (6.95)
0.43 (11) 0.89 (22.5)
Mounting Bracket
0.86 (22)
0.86 (22)
0.07 (2)
0.20 (5.2)
PILOT LIGHTS
MODEL LB DESCRIPTION 16mm Flush Mount LED Pilot Light Models 6 Round 7 Square M Metallic Bezel B Black Bezel P-1T04 24V AC/DC Operating Voltage Color
PUSHBUTTONS
MODEL LB DESCRIPTION 16mm Flush Mount LED Pushbutton Models 6 Round Button 7 Square Button M Metallic Bezel B Black Bezel G Black Bezel with Guard B-A1 Standard Maintained B-M1 Standard Momentary L-A1 Illuminated Maintained L-M1 Illuminated Momentary SPDT T5 DPDT T6 T54* SPDT 24V AC/DC T64* SPST 24V AC/DC Color
KEY SELECTOR SWITCH WITH FLUSH BEZEL

LB 16mm Key Switch, 2 position 6 Round Flush bezel shape 7 Square Flush bezel shape M Metallic Bezel B Black Bezel K-2T5A SPDT K-2T6A DPDT
LB 6 M B - A1 T5 - S
Example: LB6MB-A1T5-S 16mm Flush Mount Pushbutton Model, Round button,Metallic Bezel, Standard Maintained, silver SPDT contacts, Blue Note: All options are not available with all models.
Color A - Amber (Only lighted models) B - Black (Only non-illuminated pushbuttons) G - Green PW - Pure White (Only lighted models) R - Red S - Blue W - White Y - Yellow
* Illuminated Models Only
1.19 (30.4)
6 .8 0 22) (
Square
Square with Guard
0.95 (24.2)
14
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
865
PANEL FABRICATION
TOGGLE SWITCHES RBTS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
RBTS Series toggle switches are general-purpose toggle switches for pilot duty control of electric equipment such as fans, pumps, and compressors or control of electric control circuits.
FEATURES
Non-corrosive, phenolic and metal housing Durable slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism Simple installation requires single hole Conveniently installed with one hexagon locknut and one knurled facenut (furnished) Compression spring provides positive contact pressure in closed position
NEW!
SSG1-1/2 RBTS314 RBTS114 RBTS308
PANEL FABRICATION
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Mounting hole 0.5" (1.27) diameter
A B H
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating Terminals Housing Material Mounting Approvals Warranty 10A @ 250 VAC 15A @ 125 VAC 3/4 hp, 120-240 VAC Screw Phenolic, metal (bright nickel plated brass) Single hole type, 0.5" dia (1.27 cm) UL-recognized component, File #E7560, E67774 1 year
Typical Switch
14
SWITCH Single Pole Double Pole Three Pole Four Pole
A
0.687 (1.74) 0.687 (1.74) 0.687 (1.74) 0.687 (1.74)
B
0.465 (1.18) 0.465 (1.18) 0.465 (1.18) 0.465 (1.18)
H
0.67 (1.70) 0.778 (1.98) 0.803 (2.04) 1.218 (3.09)
W
1.134 (2.88) 1.308 (3.32) 1.308 (3.32) 1.44 (3.65)
D
0.634 (1.61) 0.75 (1.91) 1.088 (2.76) 1.34 (3.41)
MODEL RBTS308 RBTS312 MODEL RBTS310 RBTS308 RBTS314 RBTS312 RBTS315 RBTS310 RBTS316 RBTS314
ORDERING INFORMATION DESCRIPTION MODEL Toggle switch SPST on-off RBTS114 Toggle switch SPDT on-on RBTS111 DESCRIPTION MODEL Toggle switch SPDT on-off-on RBTS117 Toggle switch SPST on-off RBTS114 Toggle switch DPST on-off RBTS413 Toggle switch SPDT on-on RBTS111 Toggle switch DPDT on-on RBTS415 Toggle switch SPDT on-off-on RBTS117 Toggle switch DPDT on-off-on RBTS414 Toggle switch DPST on-off RBTS413
DESCRIPTION Toggle switch 3PST on-off Toggle switch 3PDT on-on DESCRIPTION Toggle switch 3PDT on-off-on Toggle switch 3PST on-off Toggle switch 4PST on-off Toggle switch 3PDT on-on Toggle switch 4PDT on-on Toggle switch 3PDT on-off-on Toggle switch 4PDT on-off-on Toggle switch 4PST on-off
RBTS315 RBTS316
Toggle switch DPDT on-on Toggle switch DPDT on-off-on

MODEL SYZE-212
RBTS415 RBTS414
Toggle switch 4PDT on-on Toggle switch 4PDT on-off-on
LEGEND PLATES
LEGEND PLATES
DESCRIPTION On/Off/Auto plate
MODEL SYZE-212
SSG1-1/2
RELATED PRODUCTS On/Off/Auto plate Wall plate box mount 1/2" hole
DESCRIPTION
866
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Rugged, oil-tight construction Snap-t blocks with N.O. and N.C. contacts Self-cleaning silver contacts Durable nylon operator base Optional key or lever styles available
PANEL FABRICATION
IDEC GENERAL PURPOSE SELECTOR SWITCHES ASW SERIES
The ASW Series general-purpose selector switches are for pilot duty control of electrical equipment such as fans, pumps, compressors, or control circuits.
ACSNO-354-YB-C3016 SSG1-67
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating Contact Resistance Contact Material Electrical Life Protection Rating Applicable Wire Size Minimum Maximum Mechanical Life Mounting Panel Thickness Approvals Warranty 10A, 600 VAC/VDC; 5 mA, 3 VAC/ VDC minimum 50 m maximum (inital value) Silver 500,000 minimum operations NEMA 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 x 22 AWG 2 x 14 AWG or 1 x 12 AWG 500,000 minimum operations, 0.878" (2.23 cm) hole Panel thickness adjustment ring, 0.04" to 0.24" (0.10 to 0.61 cm) UL listed, File #E68961; CSA certied, File #LR48366, 1 year Knob Style Selector Switch ASW320 mounted in E-1PBG
PANEL FABRICATION
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.5 (3.81) 1.92 2 Blocks (4.84) 4 Blocks 2.7 (6.86) Knob Style 0.98 (2.5) 0.94 (2.39) Panel cutout 0.14 (0.35)* 0.878 (2.23)
* Required for legend plates or anti-rotation ring
TWO-POSITION MAINTAINED
Contact Configuration
14
ADDITIONAL CONTACT BLOCKS
SELECTOR SWITCHES THREE-POSITION MAINTAINED

Contact Configuration Contact #
Contact #
Model
Operator Position L
O X X O
Model
Operator Position L
X O X O O X O O X
R
X O O X
C
O O O X O O O X X
R
O X O O X O X X O
HW-C10 Normally open contact HW-C01 Normally close contact TW-DB Dummy block (needed when only one HW-C10 or HW-C01 is used)
ASW210 ASW2K10 (Key) 1 N.O. 1 ASW201-116

1 N.C. 1 1 N.O. 1
1 ASW320 ASW3K20 (Key) 2 N.O. 2 1 2 3 1 2 N.O. 2 ASW322 2 N.C. 3 ASW3K22 (Key) 4
ASW321-255
2 N.O. 1 N.C.
ASW211 1 N.C. 2 ASW2K11 (Key) NWAL-212 X
Legend PlateLegend PlateNWAL-317 Note: Key is removeable in any position. Hand-Off-Auto Off-On X = Contacts closed O = Contacts open X = Contacts remain closed when switch is moved between these two positions. CAM SWITCHES
ACSNO-244-YB-C2008 ACSNO-354-YB-C3016 Four-position, contact made each position only, 45 degrees (1.2", 3.05 cm mounting hole) Five-position, contact made each position only, 45 degrees (1.2", 3.05 cm mounting hole)
E-1PBG E-2PBG E-3PBG E-4PBG NWAL-CUSTOM SSG1-67
One-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Two-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Three-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Four-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Custom engraved nameplate Wall plate box mount 7/8" hole
RELATED PRODUCTS
March 2014
*Holes are 22.5 mm in a vertical arrangement.
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
867
PANEL FABRICATION
IDEC PUSHBUTTON SWITCHES ABW, AOW SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The ABW and AOW Series push button switches are for manual control of fans, pumps, compressors, or control circuits.
FEATURES
Flush, extended, or mushroom style available Snap-t blocks with N.O. and N.C. contacts Self-cleaning silver contacts Rugged, oil-tight construction
NEW!
SSG1-67 AOW411R mounted in E-1PBG Flush Extended Mushroom
SPECIFICATIONS
PANEL FABRICATION
Contact Rating
14
Contact Resistance Contact Material Electrical Life Protection Rating Insulation Applicable Wire Size Minimum 1 x 22 AWG Maximum 2 x 14 AWG or 1 x 12 AWG 500,000 minimum operations Mechanical Life Operating Temperature -13 to 122F (-25 to 50C) Panel Thickness Panel thickness adjustment ring, 0.04" to 0.24" (0.10 to 0.61 cm) UL listed, File #E68961; CSA Approvals certied, File #LR48366 1.5 years Warranty
10A, 600 VAC/VDC; 5mA, 3 VAC/ VDC minimum 50 m maximum (inital value) Silver 500,000 minimum operations NEMA 1, 2, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 600V
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 0.78
Panel thickness 0.04 to 0.24 (0.10 to 0.60) B Panel cutout
(2.00)
1.89 (4.85) 4 Blocks: 2.67 (6.85) 2 Blocks: PUSHBUTTONS Flush Extended
A 0.86 (2.20) A 0.507 (1.30) 0.741 (1.90) B 0.936 (2.40) 0.936 (2.40)
MODEL DESCRIPTION ABW Momentary action push-button switch AOW Maintained action push-button switch 1 Flush (includes colored buttons of red, green, and black) 2 Extended (specify color below, red standard) 4 Mushroom (specify color below, red standard) # Normally open contacts (max 2) # Normally closed contacts (max 2) Button color for extended and mushroom models B = Black, G = Green, R = Red
ABW 1 0 1
Example: ABW101 Momentary flush push button with one normally closed contact
E-1PBG E-2PBG E-3PBG E-4PBG HW-C01 HW-C10 NWAR-27 SSG1-67 TW-DB
One-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Two-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Three-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Four-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Normally closed contact Normally open contact Emergency stop label 2.75" (6.99 cm) round Wall plate box mount 7/8" hole Dummy block (needed when only 1 HW-C10 or HW-C01 is used)
RELATED PRODUCTS
*Holes are 22.5 mm in a vertical arrangement.
868
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Locking lever removable contact blocks Non-illuminated or LED illumination Self-cleaning rolling action contacts IP65 protection
PANEL FABRICATION
UNIBODY PUSH BUTTONS AND SWITCHES HW SERIES
The ies are IEC style devices that feature tamperproof mounting and construction, modular stackable contact blocks with IP20 ngersafe screw terminals, and pure silver contacts with a self cleaning action. Models include illuminated and non-illuminated pushbuttons in both round and square ush and extended styles.
HW4L-M2F
HW4K-2AF11
HW4B-M1F11-G
HW1S-2TF11
HW4B-M2F11-R
PANEL FABRICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Rating 600V Insulation Resistance 100 M (minimum) 10A Continuous Current Operating Temperature -13 to 122F (-25 to 50C) Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation) Storage Temperature -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) 500K minimum operations Mechanical Life UL Listed File #E68961; Approvals CSA File #LR92374; CE Warranty 1 year
WIRING
Contact Block (Bottom View) Terminal Wiring
1 contact block
2 contact blocks 4 contact blocks
Arrows indicate access directions for wiring.
DIMENSIONS
in. (mm)
M3.5 Terminal Screw Locking Ring Panel Thickness 0.031 to 0.24 (0.8 to 6)
LO CK LO CK
14
Dimensions for A 0.51 (1.3cm) Flush 0.75 (1.9cm) Extended 0.83 (2.1cm) Selector Key Switch 1.20 (30.5cm)
0.98 (25) 0.98 (25) 1.17 (29.6)
240V - AC
2.76 (70.2) (4 blocks)
.93 ) 0 23.6 (
1.98 (50.2) (1 or 2 blocks)
1.16 (29.4)
0.98 (24.8) 1.16 (29.4)
PUSHBUTTON STYLE MODEL DESCRIPTION 22mm Pushbutton HW 4B Round Standard 4L Round Illuminated 2B Square Standard 2L Square Illuminated M Momentary A Maintained 1 Flush Style 2 Extended Style F Contact Blocks Color Standard QD Color Illuminated HW 4B - M 1 F - - *D *D Illumination Voltage F
Contacts - HW Series Models

10 - 1 NO 01 - 1NC 11 - 1NO & 1NC 20 - 2NO 02 - 2NC 22 - 2NO & 2NC
SWITCH STYLE MODEL DESCRIPTION HW 22mm Model Switch 1S-2T Selector Switch 1K-2A Key Switch Contact Blocks *D
Colors - HW Series Models B - Black G - Green R - Red S - Blue W - White Y - Yellow
Illumination Voltage 6V - AC/DC 120V - AC

12V - AC/DC 24V - AC/DC
QD
Colors - HW Series Models

A - Amber G - Green S - Blue W - White
Example: HW4B-M110-G
22mm Pushbutton, Round Standard, Momentary, Flush Style, 1 NO, Green
R - Red Y - Yellow PW - Pure White
Note: All options are not available with all models.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
869
1.63 (41.4)
1.14 (29)
1.63 (41.4)
PANEL FABRICATION
DESCRIPTION This series of operator interface devices offers a wide variety of pushbuttons, selectors switches, and pilot lights. There are also press-to-test pilot lights and a potentiometer added to the product line. These devices use the IEC style of buttons, plus offer economical pricing.
ABB PUSHBUTTONS, SELECTOR SWITCHES, PILOT LIGHTS, POTENTIOMETERS CL, KT, M, MP SERIES
FEATURES
22.5 mm size Quick release contact blocks Press-to-test pilot light offered Potentiometer model
NEW!
Key Switch Push Button Pilot Light Selector Switch SSG1-67 SPA
Key-operated selector switch
0.91 (2.31) 1.04 (2.65) 1.69 (4.3) 1.14 (2.9) 0.06-0.24 (0.15-0.6)
PANEL FABRICATION
SPECIFICATIONS
AC: 120V, 6A; 240V, 3A; 480V, 1.5A; 600V, 1.2A DC: 120V,0.55A; 240V, 0.27A; 480V, 0.1A; 600V, 0.1A Rated Insulation Voltage 690V 10 million operations Mechanical Life (contact block) Terminals #14-20 AWG Contact Material Silver Mounting 0.874" (2.25 cm) hole Operating Temperature -13 to 122F (-25 to 50C) Panel Thickness 0.059" to 0.236" (0.15 to 0.6 cm) Protection Rating NEMA type 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Approvals UL listed, File #E76003; CSA certied, File #LR19700 1 year Warranty Contact Rating
14
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Selector switch
0.91 (2.31) 1.04 (2.65) 1.69 (4.3)
0.06-0.24 (0.15-0.6)
1.14 (2.9)
1.18 (3.0)
1.91 (4.85)
1.18 (3.0)
1.18 (3.0)
1.91 (4.85)
1.67 (4.25)
Push button
0.91 (2.31) 1.04 (2.65) 1.69 (4.3)
0.06-0.24 (0.15-0.6)
Emergency stop push button Extended

1.04 (2.65) 1.69 (4.3) 0.69 (1.75) 0.91 (2.31)
0.06-0.24 (0.15-0.6)
1.14 (2.9) 0.51 (1.3)
1.58 (4.0) 1.0 (2.55)
1.18 (3.0)
1.91 (4.85)
1.18 (3.0)
1.91 (4.85)
870
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
1.04 (2.65) 1.69 (4.3) 1.18 1.91
(4.85) (4.85) (3.0) POTENTIOMETERS (3.0) ABB PUSHBUTTONS, SELECTOR SWITCHES, PILOT LIGHTS, CL, KT, M, MP SERIES
0.51 (1.3)
PANEL FABRICATION
1.14 (2.9) 1.69 (4.3) 0.69 (1.75) 1.18 1.91
1.04 (2.65)
1.58 (4.0)
1.0 (2.55)
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Potentiometer
0.06-0.24 (0.15-06
Pilot light
5 6 7 8 9 10
0.06-0.24 (0.15-0.6)
0.79 (2.0) 0.57 (1.3)
1.14 (2.9)
1.14 (2.9)
0.28 (0.7)
0.55 (1.4)
1.02 (2.6)
1.75H x 1.17W (4.45 x 2.96)
1.75H x 1.91W (4.45 x 4.85)
1.13 (2.87)
1.65 (4.2)
Selector switch contact functions

A C
O = not actuated (normal state) X = actuated (state changed)
Press-to-test Pilot light schematic
L1
L2
Control voltage source Light color per order Customers control contact X1 21 22 Wiring included 13 14 X2
PANEL FABRICATION
KEY SWITCHES
M2SSK1 Two-position, key-operated selector switch, key removed each position M3SSK1 Three-position, key-operated selector switch, key removed each position 30 Chrome bezel 1 Standard key code # Normally open contacts (max 2 for 3 pos, 1 for 2 pos) # Normally closed contacts (max 2 for 3 pos, 1 for 2 pos)
SELECTOR SWITCHES (Center off only)

M2SS2 Two-position selector switch, maintained each position M3SS1 Three-position selector switch, maintained each position 30 Chrome bezel B Black operator # Normally open contacts (max 2) # Normally closed contacts (max 2)
PUSH BUTTONS
MP Flush and extended push buttons 1.68 1 Flush momentary operator (4.27) 2 Flush maintained operator 3 Extended momentary operator 4 Extended maintained operator 0.91 30 Chrome bezel (2.31) Color R-Red, G-Green, Y-Yellow, L-Blue, W-White, B-Black # Normally open contacts (max 3) # Normally closed contacts (max 3)
PILOT LIGHTS
CL Pilot light with integrated LED 502 24 VAC/VDC 513 110-130 VAC Color R-Red, G-Green, Y-Yellow, L-Blue, W-White
14
PRESS-TO-TEST PILOT LIGHTS

MP1-MLFPT Press-to-test illuminated pilot light including one normally open and one normally closed contact 8 24V full voltage incandescent 1 120V full voltage incandescent L8 24V LED L1 120V LED R-Red, G-Green, Y- Yellow, Color L- Blue, W-White
MUSHROOM PUSH BUTTONS

MPM1-60R Red mushroom momentary, chrome bezel, 40 mm MPMP3-20R Red mushroom maintained - pull to release, no bezel, 40 mm # Normally open contacts (max 3) # Normally closed contacts (max 3)
POTENTIOMETER
0-10 k cermet potentiometer, 280-degree rotation, metal housing, black knob w/ white marking SPA MT-310B, SS plate, custom plate SK615562-87 Sweep symbol legend plate SK615562-88 Legend plate with 0 to 10 scale MT-310B
E-1PBG E-2PBG E-3PBG E-4PBG MCB-01 MCB-10
RELATED PRODUCTS One-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Two-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Three-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Four-hole NEMA 12/13 push-button enclosure Normally closed contact block Normally open contact block
RELATED PRODUCTS SK615540-1 29.6 x 39 mm blank legend plate SK615541-1 29.6 x 44.5 mm blank legend plate SK616021-71 Spare key for key switch SSG1-67 Wall plate box mount 7/8" hole *Holes are 22.5 mm in a vertical arrangement. ** Custom plates from factory only
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
871
PANEL FABRICATION
PLATE-MOUNTED POTENTIOMETER SPA
DESCRIPTION
The SPA plate-mounted potentiometer is used as a setpoint input. This 0-10 k 3-wire potentiometer can be used as a direct input to a controller. When combined with a VTI or UAT to convert to an analog signal, the SPA can be used to manually position a valve or damper actuator. When combined with a UCM-420A or UCS-121-R you get the advantage of stand-alone control. The plate is custom designed, so it can be made with any desired color, unit, and range. The SPA unit has three terminals with the center terminal as the wiper.
NEW!
SPA
PANEL FABRICATION
MODEL
SPA SPA-UAT-1 SPA-VTI-1
DESCRIPTION
0-10 k Plate mounted potentiometer slotted solder lugs 10% linear accuracy specify color, unit, range SPA potentiometer with UAT-1 calibrated for mA or voltage output specify output (requires 24 VAC/DC power, see UAT page in our Transducer section) SPA potentiometer with VTI-1 calibrated for 4-20 mA output (requires 24 VDC power, see VTI page in our Transducer section)
ENGRAVED PHENOLIC LABELS LABELS

DESCRIPTION
Kele offers a large selection of custom engraved labels for assembled panels, tags for valves, terminal blocks, or standalone user interface products. Our computerized engraver allows us to create designs with unusual shapes, colors, holes, and lettering on the screen. We offer standard sizes for rectangular labels, but specials are easily done.
14
STANDARD STANDARD SIZES SIZES

SIZES in (cm) 1/2 x 1 (1.3 x 2.5) 3/4 x 1-1/2 (1.9 x 3.8) 3/4 x 1-1/2 (1.9 x 3.8) 3/4 x 1-1/2 (1.9 x 3.8) 3/4 x 3 (1.9 x 9.6) 3/4 x 3 (1.9 x 9.6) 3/4 x 3 (1.9 x 9.6) 1 x 2 (2.5 x 5.1) 1 x 2 (2.5 x 5.1) 1 x 2 (2.5 x 5.1) 1 x 3 (2.5 x 9.6) 1 x 3 (2.5 x 9.6) 1 x 3 (2.5 x 9.6) 1 x 3 (2.5 x 9.6) 1 x 4 (2.5 x 10.2) 1 x 4 (2.5 x 10.2) 1 x 4 (2.5 x 10.2) 1 x 4 (2.5 x 10.2) NUMBER # OF LINES* CHARACTERS PER LINE 1 4 2 7 2 5 1 4 2 16 2 11 1 8 3 10 2 7 2 6 2 8 2 11 1 5 3 16 2 11 2 14 1 7 3 21 LETTER SIZE in (mm) 1/8 (3.2) 1/8 (3.2) 3/16 (4.8) 1/4 (6.4) 1/8 (3.2) 3/16 (4.8) 1/4 (6.4) 1/8 (2.2) 3/16 (4.8) 1/4 (6.4) 1/4 (6.4) 3/16 (4.8) 3/8 (9.5) 1/8 (3.2) 1/4 (6.4) 3/16 (4.8) 3/8 (9.5) 1/8 (3.2)
ORDERING INFORMATION ORDERING INFORMATION

1. Label size 2. Label / text color Black background with white letters White background with black letters Red background with white letters White background with red letters Blue background with white letters White background with blue letters Metallic silver background with black letters 3. Letter size Upper case is standard 4. Text row 1 Text row 2 Text row 3 5. Standard options Chain hole, chain hole with chain Two screw holes (subtract 3 characters) Toggle switch hole Pushbutton / selector switch / pilot light hole 6. Non-standard labels send drawing
* Each line of text must be indicated by a separate set of quotation marks. Example: Order a 1" x 3" label, 1/4" lettering, black background with white lettering, BEST SERVICE
872
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
Kele is STILL Your Source for Controls, Accessories and Fittings to Meet Your Repair and Replacement Needs of Pneumatic Controls and Accessories.
T-4000 Series | p. 875
EP3 Series | p. 895
T-100 Series | p. 901
P N E U M AT I C S & FITTINGS
MCP Series | p. 883
MP953 Series | p. 879
B Series | p. 903

MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Damper Actuators MCP Series KMC Pneumatic Actuators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP918A, MP918B, MP920B Series Pneumatic Damper Actuators . . . . . . D-3000, D-4000 Series Pneumatic Damper Actuators .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MK-3000, MK-7100 Series Pneumatic Damper Actuators .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 887 889 890
E/P Valves EP3 Series Electric/Pneumatic Three-Way Air Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 35A Series Electric/Pneumatic Three-Way Air Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896 V11 Series Three-Way Solenoid Air Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897 Fittings T-100 Series, T-141 Pneumatic Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B Series, R-3710, F-1000 Series Pneumatic Air Supply Barb Fittings . . . . C-Series Pneumatic Air Supply Compression Fittings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M Series, F-1000 Series Miscellaneous Pipe Fittings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-Series Pneumatic Air Supply Solder Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TP970 Series | p. 873
901 903 905 908 909
Pressure Reducing Devices and Accessories PV600 Series Isolation Valves and Pressure Regulators.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899 .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899 K-383, K-384, K-387 Pressure Regulators K-332, FILN05, Tool-95-1 PRV Station, Filters, Calibration Kit . . . . . . . . . . 900 Thermostats TP970 Series Single Setpoint Pneumatic Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873 .. . 875 T-4000 Series Single and Dual Setpoint Pneumatic Room Thermostats 2200 Series, TK-1000 thru TK-5000 Series Single Setpoint Room Pneumatic Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .877 VAV Controls CSC Series KMC Pneumatic VAV Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891 Valve Actuators MP953 Series Pneumatic Globe Valve Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879 V-3000, MP800 Series Pneumatic Globe Valve Actuators.. . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 MK-2690, MK-46XX, MK-6XXX Series Pneumatic Globe Valve Actuators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
V11 Series | p. 897
P N E U M AT I C S & FITTINGS
MK-3000 | p. 890 Series
kele.com
NEW!

SINGLE SETPOINT PNEUMATIC THERMOSTAT TP970 SERIES
The TP970 Series pneumatic thermostat is a two-pipe, single setpoint thermostat used to provide proportional control of pneumatic valves and damper actuators in heating and air conditioning systems. Replacement kits are available for Johnson, Powers, Robertshaw, Barber-Colman, and older Honeywell two-pipe pneumatic thermostats.
Shock-resistant, suspension-mounted thermostats provide dependable performance and responsiveness Pilot operated for high capacity Direct Acting (DA) and Reverse Acting (RA) models Adapter plate kits cover existing thermostat wallmark Backplate has molded air connections-no separate ttings needed Universal locking cover with satin chrome nish and horizontal, vertical, or blank window options
DIMENSIONS
TP970A,B OR TP9600A,B
TP970
MB M
N.O.
DIAGRAM
Branch line pressure gage port
Typical piping diagram
15
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections Number Of Pipes Sensor Element Setpoints Throttling Range Barbs for 5/32" OD poly tubing 2 Bimetal Single Adjustable, 2 to 10F (1 to 5C), factory set at 4F (2C) Remote Bulb No Air Consumption 0.011 scfm (5.2 mL/s) Operating Temperature 100F (37.8C) maximum Storage Temperature 150F (66C) maximum Maximum Operating Pressure 25 psi (170 kPa) Dimensions 3.3"H x 2.0"W x 1.6"D (8.3 x 5.2 x 4.1 cm) Weight 0.35 lb (0.2 kg) to 1.3 lb (0.6 kg) depending on kit/cover Mounting Wall Warranty 1 year March 2014
Throttling range adjustment
Setpoint knob Bimetel Nozzle Calibration screw Setpoint cam
Flapper
Setpoint knob
Valve unit
TP970 High Capacity Pilot Operated Thermostat
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
873

SINGLE SETPOINT PNEUMATIC THERMOSTAT TP970 SERIES
MODEL TP970A2004 TP970A2012 TP970A2020 TP970A2038 TP970A2145 TP970A2234 TP970A2242 TP970A2259 TP970B2002 TP970B2010 TP970B2077 TP970B2150 TP970B2166 TP970B2182 TP970C2000
DESCRIPTION Direct acting, 60F to 90F, (does not include cover) Direct acting, 40F to 70F, (does not include cover) Direct acting, 15C to 30C, (does not include cover) Direct acting, 60F to 90F, large wall plate and satin chrome cover Direct acting, 60F to 90F, small wall plate and satin chrome cover Direct acting, 15C to 30C, small wall plate and satin chrome cover Direct acting, 60F to 90F, thermostat, small wall plate and beige cover Direct acting, 60F to 90F, thermostat and satin chrome cover Reverse acting, 60F to 90F, (does not include cover) Reverse acting, 15C to 30C, (does not include cover) Reverse acting, 60F to 90F, small wall plate and satin chrome cover Reverse acting, 15C to 30C, small wall plate and satin chrome cover Reverse acting, 60F to 90F, small wall plate and beige cover Reverse acting, 60F to 90F, satin chrome cover Direct acting, 60F to 90F, (does not include cover)
NEW!
ACCESSORIES
MODEL 14001865-001 14002053-001 14002374-004 14002573-001 14003192-001 14004406-910 14004407-910 AK3863 CCT735A 14002362-001 14004447-001 14004447-002 14004459-001 14004460-001 14004787-910 14004878-910 CCT729A 14004447-005 DESCRIPTION Filter cartridge assembly Back plate assembly Restrictor block assembly, .005 in., For TP970A-D; TP971A-E except C; TP972A; TP973A-B; TP9600 family; HP970A-B; and HP972B Modernization kit to convert all 1 & 2 pipe Honeywell & competitive pneumatic stats to TP970, TP971A, TP972, TP973,TP974, TP9600 family, HP970, HP971 and HP972 Wallplate adapter kit. Adapts HP970 or TP970 series stats to HP900 and TP900 ush mounted and TP910 series ush or surface mounted installations Cover kit, satin chrome include a cover, setpoint cover and 6 window inserts for 60F to 90F scale Cover kit, beige, includes cover, setpoint insert cover and 6 window inserts for 60F to 90F scale Honeywell thermostat tool kit, TP970/TP900 Thermostat calibration tool includes allen wrench for cover installation Duct sampling chamber for TP970 pneumatic thermostats Setpoint cam assembly for TP970A1004, A1012, A1020, A1038, A1046, A1053, A1095, A2004, A2012, A2020, A2038, A2053, A2095; TP970C Setpoint cam assembly for TP970B1002, B1010, B1028, B1036, B2002, B2010, B2028, B2036; TP970D Repair kit consisting of a thermometer assembly, a thermometer post and a 60 to 90F Aluminum Scaleplate Nozzle, throttling plate and bimetal assembly, DA, left side Cover kit, bright chrome includes cover, setpoint insert cover and 6 window inserts for 60F to 90F scale Cover kit, premier white includes cover, setpoint insert cover and 6 window inserts for 60F to 90F scale Gauge adapter for calibration. Add 305965 0-30 psi gauge for complete tool. Setpoint Cam Assembly for TP970B1044
15
FILN05 FILN05-B T-100 T-100-2 TOOL-95-1
RELATED PRODUCTS
PAGE
900 900 901 901 900
Inline disposable air filter, straight, with barbs for 1/4" OD tubing Inline disposable air filter, 90 bent barbs for 1/4" OD tubing 5/32" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 500 ft (152 m) 5/32" OD black poly tubing, twin, 1 coil, 500 ft (152 m) Pneumatic controls calibration kit
874
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SINGLE AND DUAL SETPOINT PNEUMATIC ROOM THERMOSTATS T-4000 SERIES
The T4000 Series pneumatic room thermostats provide individual space temperature control in all types of heating and cooling applications. By producing a proportional output signal, these thermostats modulate pneumatic valves and damper actuators in response to load changes in the space. A variety of high volume and low volume output thermostats are available to meet the functional requirements of any control system. The T4000 Series is provided in one- and two-pipe, dual temperature, horizontal, and vertical congurations.
Adjustable sensitivities and set points Individual set points on dual temperature thermostats Pneumatic feedback for greater accuracy Vibration and shock resistant Meets governmental and commercial requirements Single and dual bimetal sensing elements Optional all-metal covers
T-4002-201 T-4000-2141 T-4002-124
INSTALLATION
Direct acting pneumatic thermostat (temperature up, output pressure up)
SO
SO
DA/RA pneumatic thermostat (8 psi @ setpoint)
Restrictor
S 20
(8 psi @ setpoint) N.O. Heating 3-6 psig (21-42 kPa) N.C. Cooling 9-13 psig (63-91 kPa) S 20
S 20
0.005 or 0.007
15
(0 psi @ setpoint)
Two-pipe, Dual Temperature Thermostat
T-4054-1
Two-pipe Thermostat
T-4002
One-pipe Thermostat (constant bleed)
T-4100
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections Number of Pipes Sensor Element Sensitivity T4002 T4054/T4100 Barbs for 5/32" OD poly tubing 1 or 2 depending on model selected Bimetal Adjustable from 0.75 to 4 psig/F (9 to 50 kPa/C) Adjustable from 1 to 3 psig/F (12 to 38 kPa/C) 55 to 85F (13 to 29C) 20 scim (5 mL/s) 38 scim (10 mL/s) 25 or 45 scim (7 or 12 mL/s), depending on restrictor Operating Temperature -20 to 130F (-29 to 54C) Storage Temperature -20 to 150F (-29 to 66C) Maximum Operating Pressure 25 psi (170 kPa) Dimensions 2.1"H x 3.1"W x 1.8"D (5.3 x 8.0 x 4.5 cm) Weight 0.4 lb (0.2 kg) Mounting Wall Warranty 1 year Air Consumption T4002 T4054 T4100
Setpoint Range Setpoints T4002/T4100 Single T4054 Dual Remote Bulb No
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
875

ACCESSORIES Thermostat bracket Covers
SINGLE AND DUAL SETPOINT PNEUMATIC ROOM THERMOSTATS T-4000 SERIES
T-4002-124
T-4756-2141 T-4756-2145 T-4000-2145

Surface bracket for exposed tubing
NEW!
Setpoint adjust knob
T-4000-2138 T-4000-2141 Horizontal/Vertical
T-4002-5012
Retrofit cover plate Flex allen screwdriver
Thermostat guards (metal) (wire)
T-4002-3004
T-4002-3000
T-4002-125
JC5309
Included in T-4002-303, 304
MODEL T-4002-201* T-4002-202* TYPE Single temperature Two-pipe Single temperature Two-pipe T-4002-203* T-4002-204* T-4002-303 retrofit kit T-4002-304 retrofit kit T-4054-1* T-4054-2* T-4100-1 T-4100-2 Single temperature Two-pipe Single temperature Two-pipe Single temperature Two-pipe Single temperature Two-pipe Dual temperature Two-pipe Dual temperature Two-pipe Single temperature One-pipe Single temperature One-pipe * Order T-4000 Series cover and T-4002-124 mounting bracket separately when ordering these Johnson thermostats. Call Kele for white, nickel, or brass covers. For other Johnson Controls pneumatic products, call Kele. Reverse Vertical Included Included Direct Reverse Direct Reverse Direct Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Vertical Included T-4002-124 Included in kit Included in kit T-4002-124 Reverse Vertical T-4002-124 Direct Vertical T-4002-124 Reverse Horizontal T-4002-124 PROPORTIONAL ACTION Direct Horizontal MOUNTING REQUIRED ACCESSORIES COVER BRACKET T-4000-2141 T-4002-124 with setpoint T-4000-2141 with setpoint T-4000-2145 with setpoint T-4000-2145 with setpoint Included in kit Included in kit T-4756-2141 T-4756-2145 T-4756-2141 T-4756-2145 Included
15
876
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SINGLE SETPOINT ROOM PNEUMATIC THERMOSTATS 2200 SERIES, TK-1000 THRU TK-5000 SERIES
The 2200 Series and TK Series thermostats provide proportional temperature control of pneumatically actuated valves and dampers to maintain room air temperatures in heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.
Classic appearance Setpoint and thermometer Blank cover or covers included with exposed setpoint and thermometer Bimetal sensing element Adjustable throttling range models TK-1001
2212-618
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections TK-1000/5000 2200 Number of Pipes Sensor Element Mounting Setpoint Range Setpoints Throttling Range TK1000/5000 2200 5/32" spring-reinforced plastic tubing 3/16" spring-reinforced plastic tubing 1, 2, or 3 with manual override Bimetal Wall 55 to 85F (13 to 29C) Single, Dual (TK1201, TK1281 only) Adjustable, 2 to 10F (1 to 5C), factory set at 4F (2C) Adjustable, 2 to 12F (1 to 6C), factory set at 3F (2C) No Supply Air Pressure TK1000/5000 15 or 20 psig (103 or 138 kPa), 30 psig maximum 2200 20 psig (138 kPa), 30 psig maximum Maximum Operating Pressure 30 psi (207 kPa) Color TK1000/5000 Beige; plastic cover has setpoint and thermometer, blank cover also provided 2200 White; plastic cover has setpoint and thermometer, blank cover also provided Dimensions TK1000/5000 4.4"H x 2.8"W x 1.6"D (11.1 x 7.0 x 4.1 cm) 2200 2.0"H x 2.0"W x 1.3"D (5.2 x 5.2 x 3.2 cm) Weight 0.4 lb (0.2 kg) Warranty 2 years
15
Remote Bulb Air Consumption TK1000 13.8 scim (3.8 mL/s) TKR-5x01 41.5 scim (11.3 mL/s) 2212 15.6 scim (4.3 mL/s) 2211 29.4 scim (8.0 mL/s) Operating Temperature 40 to 150F (4 to 65C)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
877

MODEL TK-1001 TK-1001-116 TK-5001 TK-5001-116 TK-1101 TK-1101-116 TKR-5101 TK-1301 TK-1301-116 TK-1381 TK-1601 TK-1201 TK-1281 2212-618 2212-619 2211-612 2211-613
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC SINGLE SETPOINT ROOM PNEUMATIC THERMOSTATS 2200 SERIES, TK-1000 THRU TK-5000 SERIES
15
DESCRIPTION Direct acting, 55 to 85F, two-pipe, heating or cooling Direct acting, 13 to 29C, two-pipe, heating or cooling Direct acting, 55 to 85F, one-pipe, heating or cooling Direct acting, 13 to 29C, one-pipe, heating or cooling Reverse acting, 55 to 85F, two-pipe, heating or cooling Reverse acting, 13 to 29C, two-pipe, heating or cooling Reverse acting, 55 to 85F, one-pipe, heating or cooling Direct acting, 55 to 85F, two- or three-pipe, heating or cooling with day or night Direct acting, 13 to 29C, two- or three-pipe, heating or cooling with day or night Reverse acting, 55 to 85F, two- or three-pipe, heating or cooling with day or night Direct acting, 55 to 85F, two- or three-pipe, heating or cooling with day or night and 0/20 output line for PE switch Reverse/direct acting, 55 to 85F, two-pipe, heating/cooling Direct/reverse acting, 55 to 85F, two-pipe, heating/cooling Direct acting, 55 to 85F, two-pipe, heating or cooling Reverse acting, 55 to 85F, two-pipe, heating or cooling Direct acting, 55 to 85F, one-pipe, heating or cooling Reverse acting, 55 to 85F, one-pipe, heating or cooling
NEW!
878
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

PNEUMATIC GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS MP953 SERIES
The MP953 Series pneumatic globe valve actuators operate Honeywell V5011 and V5013 Series valves to provide proportional control of steam or hot water or cold water in HVAC systems.
Rolling diaphragm for long life and low hysteresis Easily attached to valve May be installed after piping valve Slide lock feature permits simple engagement to stem Direct or reverse-action control Models available with pilot positioner MP953C1000 MP953F1101
Model MP953C1000 MP953C1018 MP953C1026 MP953C1067 MP953C1075 MP953C1083 MP953C1471 MP953C1489 MP953C1547 MP953C1554 MP953C1562 MP953D1107 MP953D1131 MP953D1172 MP953E1301 MP953E1319 MP953E1327 MP953E1368 MP953E1376 MP953E1384 MP953E1400 MP953E1418 MP953E1443 MP953F1093 MP953F1101 MP953F1119 Reverse acting, normally stem down Yes Direct acting, normally stem up Yes 8" (20 cm) diameter, 33 sq. in. (84 sq. cm) effective area 5" (13 cm) diameter, 11 sq. in. (28 sq. cm) effective area 3/4" (1.9 cm) Reverse acting, normally stem down No Direct acting, normally stem up 8" (20 cm) diameter, 33 sq. in. (84 sq. cm) effective area No 13" (33 cm) diameter, 99 sq. in. (251 sq. cm) effective area 8" (20 cm) diameter, 33 sq. in. (84 sq. cm) effective area 13" (33 cm) diameter, 99 sq. in. (251 sq. cm) effective area 7" (18 cm) diameter, 22 sq. in. (56 sq. cm) effective area 1-1/2" (3.8 cm) 1-1/2" (3.8 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 5" (13 cm) diameter, 11 sq. in. (28 sq. cm) effective area 3/4" (1.9 cm) Action Positioner Diaphragm Stroke Spring Range 2-7 psi 8-12 psi 4-11 psi 2-7 psi 8-12 psi 4-11 psi 2-7 psi 4-11 psi 3-15 psi 2-7 psi 4-11 psi 8-13 psi 3/4" (1.9 cm) 4-11 psi 3-7 psi 3 psi span 5 psi span 10 psi span 3 psi span 5 psi span 10 psi span 13" (33 cm) diameter, 99 sq. in. (251 sq. cm) effective area 1-1/2" (3.8 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 3/4" (1.9 cm) 5 psi span 10 psi span 10 psi span 3 psi span 7" (18 cm) diameter, 22 sq. in. (56 sq. cm) effective area 5 psi span 10 psi span
15
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
879

PNEUMATIC GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS MP953 SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature MP953C/E MP953D/F Maximum Pressure Weight 160F (71C) maximum diaphragm temperature 248F (120C) maximum diaphragm temperature 25 psi (172 kPa)
NEW!
MP953C - 5" MP953C - 8" MP953C - 13" MP953D - 7" MP953E - 5" MP953E - 8" MP953E - 13" MP953F - 7" Warranty 2.0 lb (0.9 kg) 6.7 lb (3.0 kg) 22.4 lb (10.2 kg) 5.2 lb (2.4 kg) 3.7 lb (1.7 kg) 8.6 lb (3.9 kg) 24.4 lb (11.1 kg) 8.0 lb (3.6 kg) 1 year
Operator size nominal dia 1 2 3 4 4.375 (11.1) 5.375 (13.7)
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4 1
Minimum Clearance
Positioner on MP953E only
Positioner on MP953F only MP953F 4.25 (10.8)
4.375 (11.1)
Minimum clearance
5-inch 8-inch 13-inch
5.125 9.25 4.625 (13.0) (23.5) (11.7) 8.25 11.125 6.5 (21.0) (28.3) (16.5)
13.5 18.125 10.0 7.6875 (34.3) (46.0) (25.4) (19.5)
(7-inch shown in diagram)

2
MP953E MP953C
3
MP953F 10.5 (26.7) MP952D 5.625 (14.3)
MP953C, E
7.125 (18.1) MP953D, F
MODEL MP953C1000 MP953C1018 MP953C1026 MP953C1067 MP953C1075 MP953C1083 MP953C1471 MP953C1489 MP953C1547 MP953C1554 MP953C1562 MP953D1107 MP953D1131 MP953D1172 MP953E1301 MP953E1319 MP953E1327 MP953E1368 MP953E1376 MP953E1384 MP953E1400 MP953E1418 MP953E1443 MP953F1093 MP953F1101 MP953F1119 DESCRIPTION 2-7 psi spring range, 5" diameter, 3/4" stroke, for 1/2" to 2" valves, normally stem up 8-12 psi spring range, 5" diameter, 3/4" stroke, for 1/2" to 2" valves, normally stem up 4-11 psi spring range, 5" diameter, 3/4" stroke, for 1/2" to 2" valves, normally stem up 2-7 psi spring range, 8" diameter, 3/4" stroke, w/stem ext., for 3/4" to 3" valves, normally stem up 8-12 psi spring range, 8" diameter, 3/4" stroke, w/stem ext., for 3/4" to 3" valves, normally stem up 4-11 psi spring range, 8" diameter, 3/4" stroke,w/stem ext., for 3/4" to 3" valves, normally stem up 2-7 psi spring range, 13" diameter, 1-1/2" travel w/stem ext., for 4" to 6" valves, normally stem up 4-11 psi spring range, 13" diameter, 1-1/2" stroke, w/stem ext., for 4" to 6" valves, normally stem up 3-15 psi spring range, 8" diameter, 1-1/2" travel, w/stem ext., for 4" to 6" valves, normally stem up 2-7 psi spring range, 13" diameter, 3/4" stroke, w/stem ext., for 2-1/2" and 3" valves, normally stem up 4-11 psi spring range, 13" diameter, 3/4" stroke, w/stem ext., for 2-1/2" and 3" valves, normally stem up 8-13 psi spring range,7" diameter, 3/4" stroke, for 1/2" to 3" valves, normally stem down 4-11 psi spring range, 7" diameter, 3/4" stroke, for 1/2" to 3" valves, normally stem down 3-7 psi spring range, 7" diameter, 3/4" stroke, for 1/2" to 3" valves, normally stem down 3 psi spring range, 5" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 1/2" to 2" valves, normally stem up 5 psi spring range, 5" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 1/2" to 2" valves, normally stem up 10 psi spring range, 5" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 1/2" to 2" valves, normally stem up 3 psi spring range, 8" diameter, 3/4 stroke, w/stem ext., with positioner, for 3/4" to 3" valves, normally stem up 5 psi spring range, 8 diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 3/4" to 3" valves, normally stem up 10 psi spring range, 8 diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 3/4" to 3" valves, normally stem up 5 psi spring range, 13 diameter, 1-1/2 stroke, with positioner, for 4" to 6" valves, normally stem up 10 psi spring range, 13" diameter, 1-1/2 stroke, w/stem ext., with positioner, for 4" to 6" valves, normally stem up 10 psi spring range, 13" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 2-1/2" and 3" valves, normally stem up 3 psi spring range, 7" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 2-1/2" and 3" valves, normally stem down 5 psi spring range, 7" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 2-1/2" and 3" valves, normally stem down 10 psi spring range, 7" diameter, 3/4 stroke, with positioner, for 2-1/2" and 3" valves, normally stem down
15
880
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

PNEUMATIC GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS V-3000, MP800 SERIES
Johnson Controls pneumatic valve assemblies accurately control the ow of steam, hot water, or cold water through coils and heat exchangers of all types. These actuators have a molded, synthetic rubber diaphragm contained in a sturdy metal housing that protects against dirt and damage. Optional V-9502 pilot positioners offer increased force for very stable, accurate control, or for sequencing heating/cooling valves.
Low prole ts tight spaces Barbs for 1/4" or 1/8" OD poly tubing, or 1/8" FNPT air connections Fits all VG7000 valves from 1/2" to 2" Replaceable synthetic rubber diaphragm Full selection of spring ranges
V-3000 (installed)
MP800
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Valve + Actuator C
Note: See VG7000 Series catalog sheet for valve specications.

DIMENSIONS VALVE SIZE 1/2
N.C.
A FACE TO FACE ALL VALVES 3 (7.62) 3-7/32 (8.18) 4-1/8 (10.48) 4-23/32 (11.99) 5-1/8 (13.02) 5-29/32 (15.00)
B LOWER VALVE Two-way Three-way 13/16 (0.81) 15/16 (0.94) 1-5/32 (2.94) 1-11/32 (3.41) 2-5/32 (5.48) 2-1/8 (5.40) 1-13/16 (4.60) 2-1/8 (5.40) 2-9/16 (6.51) 2-25/32 (7.06) 3-3/8 (8.57) 3-3/4 (9.53)
C C V-3000 MP8000 ALL VALVES ALL VALVES 4.75 (12.07) N/A 4.75 (12.07) 6 (15.24) N/A N/A N/A N/A 10.6 (26.92) 10.6 (26.92) 10.6 (26.92) 10.6 (26.92)
Stem Up (C) C
( Two-way Valve) Three-way Valve (N.O.)
B NO A
3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2
* DN is the European designation for the body size in metric units cm.
15
SPECIFICATIONS
Action V-3000 MP800 Connections Positioner V-3000 MP800 Diaphragm V-3000 MP800 Spring Range V-3000 MP82xC001 MP82xD001 MP82xE001 Spring return up Field reversible action Barb for 1/4" or 1/8" OD poly tubing; 1/8" NPT for brass tting Order separately V-9502-75 (and spring kit V-9502-6801) Order separately V-9502-95 (and mounting kit MP8000-6002) 4.5" (11.4 cm) diameter, 8 sq. in. (20 sq. cm) effective area 8.7" (22.1 cm) diameter, 25 sq. in. (64 sq. cm) effective area Depends on separately ordered spring VG7000-100x 3-7 psi 4-8 psi 9-13 psi Stroke V-3000 5/16" to 3/4" (0.8 to 1.9 cm) depends on separately ordered spring MP821 5/16" (0.8 cm) MP822 1/2" (1.3 cm) MP823 3/4" (1.9 cm) Operating Temperature -20 to 150F (-29 to 66C) Media Temperature Range Maximum uid temperature 338F (170C), 100 psig (103 kPa) steam Maximum Pressure 25 psig (172 kPa) Dimensions V-3000 3.5"H x 4.1"DIA (8.8 x 10.5 cm) MP800 10.7"H x 8.7"DIA (27.2 x 22.1 cm) Weight V-3000 0.9 lb (0.41 kg) MP800 14.0 lb (6.4 kg) Mounting V-3000 Set screw to VG-7000 valve bonnet MP800 Threaded nut to VG-7000 valve bonnet Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
881

PNEUMATIC GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS V-3000, MP800 SERIES
VALVE CLOSE-OFF TABLE VG SERIES VALVES (shown in N.O./N.C. congurations)
Valve size (See VG7000 page) Valve code CT ET GT LT Valve code NT PT Valve code RT ST Size 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 3/4" Size 1" 1-1/4" Size 1-1/2" 2" Cv 0.73 1.8 4.6 7.3 Cv 11.6 18.5 Cv 28.9 46.2
Closeoff (psid) - N.O./N.C. for V-3000 actuator 3-6 psid 345/100 345/100 225/49 144/29 3-6 psid 90/17 55/10 4-8 psid 339/142 339/142 192/68 122/41 4-8 psid 76/25 47/14
(VG-7000-1001) (VG-7000-1002) (VG-7000-1003)
NEW!
Closeoff (psid) - N.O./N.C. for MP800 actuator 4-8 psid 9-13 psid 3-7 psid 9-13 psid 191/348 191/348 108/168 69/100 9-13 psid 42/65 26/37 308/280 308/280 308/175 308/81 3-7 psid 308/308 308/308 308/183 304/109 4-8 psid 308/308 308/308 275/308 175/252 9-13 psid
(VG-7000-1006)
(MP821C001B) (MP821D001B) (MP821E001B)
(VG-7000-1004) (VG-7000-1005)
(MP822C001A) (MP822D001A) (MP822E001A)
279/70 170/40 3-7 psid 109/25 70/16
257/96 157/55 4-8 psid 100/34 64/21
148/223 90/128 9-13 psid 58/79 37/50
(MP823C001A) (MP823D001A) (MP823E001A)
ORDERING INFORMATION MODEL V-3000-8011 VG7000-1001 VG7000-1002 VG7000-1003 VG7000-1004 VG7000-1005 VG7000-1006 MP821C001B MP821D001B MP821E001B MP822C001A MP822D001A MP822E001A MP823C001A MP823D001A MP823E001A MP8000-6002 V-9502-6801 V-9502-75 V-9502-95 DESCRIPTION Valve actuator housing (appropriate VG7000-100x spring kit required, order separately) Spring kit for V-3000-8011 valve actuator, 3-6 psig (21-41 kPa) range, use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves Spring kit for V-3000-8011 valve actuator, 4-8 psig (28-55 kPa) range, use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves Spring kit for V-3000-8011 valve actuator, 9-13 psig (62-90 kPa) range, use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves Spring kit for V-3000-8011 valve actuator, 3-6 psig (21-41 kPa) range, use with 1" valves Spring kit for V-3000-8011 valve actuator, 4-8 psig (28-55 kPa) range, use with 1" valves Spring kit for V-3000-8011 valve actuator, 9-13 psig (62-90 kPa) range, use with 1" valves Actuator and spring 3-7 psig (28-55 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves (stainless steel trim models only) Actuator and spring 4-8 psig (28-55 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves (stainless steel trim models only) Actuator and spring 9-13 psig (62-90 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1/2" and 3/4" valves (stainless steel trim models only) Actuator and spring 3-7 psig (28-55 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1" and 1-1/4" valves Actuator and spring 4-8 psig (28-55 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1" and 1-1/4" valves Actuator and spring 9-13 psig (62-90 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1" and 1-1/4" valves Actuator and spring 3-7 psig (28-55 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1-1/2" and 2" valves Actuator and spring 4-8 psig (28-55 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1-1/2" and 2" valves Actuator and spring 9-13 psig (62-90 kPa), includes linkage, for use with 1-1/2" and 2" valves
15
ACCESSORIES Mounting kit for V-9502-95 positioner (MP800 actuators) Spring kit for V-9502-75 positioner (V-3000 actuator) Pilot positioner for V-3000 actuator, order VG7000-100x spring kit separately Pilot positioner for MP800 actuator, includes six springs
882
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

KMC PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS MCP SERIES
KMC MCP-8031 Pneumatic Actuators are designed to control small dampers in HVAC air handling systems or air terminal units. They feature a right-angle bracket for mounting to the side of VAV terminals, ductwork, or damper frame. The metal body is also suited to ceiling plenum installations where nonmetallic actuators are not allowed. The actuator may be rotated in its bracket (supplied on most models) so air connections can be made where needed. Actuators are supplied with a clevis and optional clevis/cotter pins or crank arm linkage.
The metal body is ideal for ceiling installations Mounting bracket supplied on all models except -2099 and -3003 Crank arm linkage or direct connection between damper and actuator shaft available
MCP-8031-2111
SPECIFICATIONS
Effective Area Stroke Supply Connection Supply Pressure 8 sq. inches (52 sq. cm) 1-11/16" (43 mm) 3/16" (5 mm) OD metal ttings 0 to 20 psi (138 kPa) operating, 30 psi (207 kPa) maximum Weight 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg) Damper Rating @ 1000 fpm (5.08 m/s) Gradual 8 sq. ft. (0.74 sq. m) Two-position 10 sq. ft. (0.93 sq. m) Spring Ranges and Retracted/Extended Torque (Based on 0 and 20 psi applied) 38 psi (2155 kPa), 20/81 in-lb. (2/9 Nm) @ 90 48 psi (2855 kPa), 27/81 in-lb. (3/9 Nm) @ 90 312 psi (2183 kPa), 20/54 in-lb. (2/6 Nm) @ 90 510 psi (3469 kPa), 34/67 in-lb. (4/8 Nm) @ 90 813 psi (5590 kPa), 54/47 in-lb. (6/5 Nm) @ 90 +0.5/-1.0 psi at start point and Tolerance 1.0 psi at nish point
NOTE: If application requires operation near maximum temperature AND maximum pressure, install a tubing restraint at the actuator connection. Temperature Limits: Operating -20 to 180F (-29 to 82C) Shipping -40 to 180F (-40 to 82C) Material Body CRS with zinc and dichromate Diaphragm Neoprene Bronze or Delrin (plastic) Bearings CRS with nickel plating Shaft
15
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
883

KMC PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS MCP SERIES
DIMENSIONS
9/32" (7) DIA. MTG. HOLES (4)
25/32" (20) 9-13/32" (239) 5" (127)
Half Stroke
4-3/8" 2-5/16" (111) (59) 3-7/8" (98) 3/16" (5) DIA. PUSH ON FITTING B
NEW!
9/32" (7) DIA. MTG. HOLES (4) 25/32" (20) 4-1/4" (108) A 1-1/2" (38) 15/32" (5) DIA. PUSH-ON FITTING 5-1/2" (140) 25/32" (20) 3-9/16" (90) DIM B. 1-3/16" (30) 1-11/16" (43) 2-3/16" (56) 15/32" (12) 7/16" (11) DIA. PIN 1/4" (6) DIA. 5/8" (16) Rotate body for desired fitting position on bronze bushing actuators only
2-5/16" 4-3/8" (59) (111)
1-15/16" (49) REF.
1-1/2" (38) 5-1/2" (140)
3-9/16" (91)
25/32" (20)
ROTATION 90 60 45
DIM A. 2-25/32" (71) 3-13/32" (87) 3-31/32" (108)
CAUTION: Pneumatic devices must be supplied with clean, dry control air. Any other medium (e.g. oil or moisture contamination will cause the device to fail.)
DAMPER TYPE Opposed blade without seals Parallel blade without seals Opposed blade with seals Parallel blade with seals Up to 1000 FPM 3 in-lb / sq.ft. 4 in-lb / sq.ft. 5 in-lb / sq.ft. 7 in-lb / sq.ft.
3/16" (5) 2-3/8" (60)
1000 to 2500 FPM 4.5 in-lb / sq.ft. 6.0 in-lb / sq.ft. 7.5 in-lb / sq.ft. 10.5 in-lb / sq.ft.
2500 to 3000 FPM 6 in-lb / sq.ft. 8 in-lb / sq.ft. 10 in-lb / sq.ft. 14 in-lb / sq.ft.
15
MODEL MCP-36312000 MCP-36313000 MCP-36313001 MCP-36315000 MCP-36315001 MCP-36318000 MCP-36318001 MCP-80312100 MCP-80312101 MCP-80312102 MCP-80312111 MCP-80312112 MCP-80313003 MCP-80313100 DESCRIPTION Actuator: Rotary, 3-12 PSI, Round Shaft Actuator: Rotary, 5-10 PSI, Round Shaft Actuator: Rotary, 5-10 PSI, Square Shaft Actuator: Rotary, 8-13 PSI, Round Shaft Actuator: Rotary, 8-13 PSI, Square Shaft Actuator: Rotary, 3-8 PSI, Round Shaft Actuator: Rotary, 3-8 PSI, Square Shaft Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 3-12 PSI, No Linkage Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 3-12 PSI, Clevis Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 3-12 PSI, Bracket Only Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 3-12 PSI, 1/2" Crank Arm Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 3-12 PSI, 3/8" Crank Arm Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 5-10 PSI, Clevis Only Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 5-10 PSI, No Linkage MODEL MCP-80313101 MCP-80313102 MCP-80313111 MCP-80313112 MCP-80315100 MCP-80315101 MCP-80315102 MCP-80315111 MCP-80315112 MCP-80318100 MCP-80318101 MCP-80318102 MCP-80318111 MCP-80318112 DESCRIPTION Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 5-10 PSI, Clevis Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 5-10 PSI, Bracket Only Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 5-10 PSI, 1/2"Crank Arm Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 5-10 PSI, 3/8" Crank Arm Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 8-13 PSI, No Linkage Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 8-13 PSI, Clevis Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 8-13 PSI, Bracket Only Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 8-13 PSI, 1/2" Crank Arm Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 8-13 PSI, 3/8" Crank Arm Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 4-8 PSI, No Linkage Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 4-8 PSI, Clevis Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 4-8 PSI, Bracket Only Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 4-8 PSI, 1/2" Crank Arm Actuator: Metal, 1-11/16", 4-8 PSI, 3/8"Crank Arm
MODEL HPO-0004 HPO-0005 HPO-0006
DESCRIPTION Retainer, bracket Clevis pin Cotter pin
ACCESSORIES
MODEL VTD-1611 VTD-1403 VTD-1404 DESCRIPTION Push rod Short crank arm, 3/8 shafts Short crank arm, 1/2 shafts
884
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
COMMON SPECIFICATIONS INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model MK-2690 MK-4601 MK-4611 MK-4621 MK-4641 MK-6601 MK-6611 MK-6621 MK-6801 MK-6811 MK-6821 MK-6911 Spring Range Springs provided in AV-7400 or AV-400 linkage (order separately) 3-6 psi (21-41 kPa) 5-10 psi (34-69 kPa) 10-13 psi (69-90 kPa) 3-13 psi (21-90 kPa) 3-8 psi (21-55 kPa) 5-10 psi (34-69 kPa) 8-13 psi (55-90 kPa) 3-8 psi (21-55 kPa) 5-10 psi (34-69 kPa) 8-13 psi (55-90 kPa) 5-10 psi (34-69 kPa)

PNEUMATIC GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS MK-2690, MK-46XX, MK-6XXX SERIES
DESCRIPTION The MK Series actuators provide proportional pneumatic control of Schneider Electric VB-7000 and VB-8000 Series globe valves.
FEATURES Rugged die cast aluminum construction MK-46xx, MK-6xxx have rolling diaphragms for long life Multiple spring ranges for various applications
Action Spring return valve stem up Connections 1/8" NPT Positioner Order separately AK-42309-500 Operating Temperature -20 to 220F (-29 to 104C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH non-condensing Maximum Pressure 30 psig (207 kPa) Dimensions MK-2690 3.6"H x 5.0"W x 2.3"D (9.0 x 12.7 x 5.7 cm) MK-46xx 3.9"H x 4.8"DIA (9.9 x 12.1 cm) MK-6xxx 7.8"H x 10.5"DIA (19.9 x 26.7 cm) Mounting Vertical upright Warranty 1 year
MK2690
MK-46xx
Stroke 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal 1/2" (1.3 cm) nominal 1" (2.5 cm) nominal 1" (2.5 cm) nominal 1" (2.5 cm) nominal
Diaphragm 6 sq. in. (39 sq. cm) 11 sq. in. (71 sq. cm) 11 sq. in. (71 sq. cm) 11 sq. in. (71 sq. cm) 11 sq. in. (71 sq. cm)
Linkage AV-400 or AV-7400, order separately AV-401 required, order separately AV-401 required, order separately AV-401 required, order separately AV-401 required, order separately
15
50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm) AV-430 required, order separately 50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm) AV-430 required, order separately 50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm) AV-430 required, order separately 50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm) AV-497 required, order separately 50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm) AV-497 required, order separately 50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm) AV-497 required, order separately
1-3/4" (4.4 cm) nominal 50 sq. in. (323 sq. cm) AV-497 required, order separately
NOMINAL SPRING RANGES

Model Number Nominal Spring Rangea (Spring Color Code) psig 3 to 7 (Yellow) MK-2690
a
kP a 21 to 48 34 to 69 55 to 90
5 to 10 (Black) 8 to 13 (Blue)
Nominal (no load) condition, spring range based on 1/2" (13mm) maximum stroke, provided by AV-7400 or AV-400 linkage
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
885

PNEUMATIC GLOBE VALVE ACTUATORS MK-2690, MK-46XX, MK-6XXX SERIES
NOMINAL SPRING RANGES (CONTINUED)
Model number MK-4601 MK-4611 MK-4621 MK-4641

a
Nominal spring rangea (Spring color code) psig kP a 3 to 6 21 to 41 34 to 69 69 to 90 21 to 90
NEW!
5 to 10 3 to 13 10 to 13 kP a 21 to 55 34 to 69 55 to 90 21 to 55 34 to 69 55 to 90 34 to 69 Nominal stroke in (cm) 0.5 (1.37) 0.5 (1.37) 0.5 (1.37) 1.0 (2.54) 1.5 (3.31)
Nominal (no load) condition, spring range based on 1/2" (13mm) maximum stroke.
Model number
Nominal spring rangea (Spring color code) psig 3 to 8 5 to 10 8 to 13 3 to 8 5 to 10 8 to 13 5 to 10
MK-6601 MK-6611 MK-6621 MK-6801 MK-6811 MK-6821 MK-6911bc

a
Nominal (no load) condition, spring range based on 0.5" (13mm) maximum stroke, 1" (25.4mm), or 1.5" (33.1mm) stroke for MK-6911. MK-6911 is only used on 6.0" VB-8xx3-0-5-16. The MK-6911 was used on discontinued 4" to 6" VB-9323-0-5-x.
b c
Recommended for field replacements only where 20 psi air supply pressure is not available and/or required close-off pressure is less than 125 psi.
15
MODEL MK-2690 MK-4601 MK-4611 MK-4621 MK-4641 MK-6601 MK-6611 MK-6621 MK-6801 MK-6811 MK-6821 MK-6911 AV-400 AV-7400 AK-42309-500 DESCRIPTION Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, no springs (order AV-400 or AV-7400 linkage kit) Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 3-6 psi spring range, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" VB-7xxx globe valves Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 5-10 psi spring range, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" VB-7xxx globe valves Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 10-13 psi spring range, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" VB-7xxx globe valves Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 3-13 psi spring range, for 1/2" to 1-1/4" VB-7xxx globe valves Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 3-8 psi spring range, for 1-1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx globe valves Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 5-10 psi spring range, for 1-1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx globe valves Pneumatic valve actuator, 1/2" stroke, 3-13 psi spring range, for 1-1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx globe valves Pneumatic valve actuator, 1" stroke, 3-8 psi spring range, for 2-1/2" to 5" VB-8xxx globe valves Pneumatic valve actuator, 1" stroke, 5-10 psi spring range, for 2-1/2" to 5" VB-8xxx globe valves Pneumatic valve actuator, 1" stroke, 8-13 psi spring range, for 2-1/2" to 5" VB-8xxx globe valves Pneumatic valve actuator, 1-3/4" stroke, 5-10 psi spring range, for 6" VB-8xxx globe valves ACCESSORIES Linkage kit for assembling MK-2690 pneumatic actuators to 1-1/2" & 2" globe valves Linkage kit for assembling MK-2690 pneumatic actuator to 1/2" to 2" VB-7xxx globe valves Positive positioner kit for MK-2690, MK-46xx, MK-6xxx actuators
886
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES, MP918A AND B Rolling diaphragm for long life Low friction shaft bearing Close tolerance on operating range and stroke Versatile mounting and connecting hardware Nonoverlapping spring ranges for sequencing FEATURES, MP920B

PNEUMATIC DAMPER ACTUATORS MP918A, MP918B, MP920B SERIES
The MP918A and MP918B pneumatic actuators position damper blades to control airow in HVAC systems. The MP918A has a positive positioner, otherwise is the same as the MP918B. MP920B actuators have a long 6" stroke and are suitable for fan inlet vane control applications in a VAV system.
MP918B1014
Rolling diaphragm operated for long life Fail-safe on over pressure Actuator can be swivel mounted from either end to pipe, oor, or wall surface Optional positive positioner provides accurate positioning under varying load conditions
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections MP918A, MP920 MP920 Diaphragm MP918 MP920 Air Consumption MP918A, MP920 Barbs for 5/32" OD (4 mm) tubing for pilot; 1/4" OD (6 mm) tubing for main and branch Barbs for 1/4" OD (6 mm) tubing Neoprene, rolling type, 23.8 sq. in. (154 sq. cm) effective area Neoprene, rolling type, 24.8 sq. in. (160 sq. cm) effective area Operating Temperature MP918A -20 to 160F (-29 to 70C) MP918B -40 to 160F (-40 to 70C) MP920 -40 to 160F (-40 to 70C) Maximum Pressure Rating MP918A 25 psi (172 kPa) MP918B, MP920 25 psi (172 kPa) Weight MP918A 13.9 lb (6.3 kg) MP918B 10.5 lb (4.8 kg) MP920 13.1 lb (5.9 kg) 1 year Warranty
15
0.021 scfm (9.9 mL/s) @ 18 psi (124 kPa) MP918B None
DIMENSIONS
1.25" Pipe Clamp
8.5 (215) MP918A 8.5 (215) MP918B Edge of Damper 6.875 (175) wide 18.75 (475) MP918B 21.0 (5.35) MP918A, Internal N.C. Mounting
0.44" to 0.5" (11 to 13)
6.18 (157)
4.0 (100) MIN.
11.81 (300) 13.0 (330)
3.06 (78)
36.0 (914) MAX.
3.0 (76)
MP918 A and B
MP920B
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
887

PNEUMATIC DAMPER ACTUATORS MP918A, MP918B, MP920B SERIES
NET FORCE EXERTED AND STROKE
Operating Range psi (kPa) 3 to 7 (21 to 48) 3 to 13 (21 to 90) 5 to 10 (34 to 69) 8 to 13 (55 to 90) Stroke in (cm) 3.5 (9.0) 3.5 (9.0) 3.5 (9.0) 3.5 (9.0) Net Force in Pounds (N) Exerted at Various Pressures 0 psi (0 kPa) 18 psi (124 kPa) 52 (231) 50 (222) 96 (427) 160 (712) 160 (712) 0 psi (0 kPa) 173 (770) 244 (1086) 89 (396) 162 (721) 83 (370) 83 (370) 20 psi (138 kPa) 298 (1326)
Model MP918B
NEW!
DAMPER A AND B DIMENSIONS
MP918A 8 to 13 (55 to 90)1 3.5 (9.0) Model Operating Range Stroke MP920B 7.25 to 13 (50 to 90) 6 (15.0)
Note: 1. Also see MP918A Operating Range and Startpoint Pressure.
Vertical Blade
Horizontal Blade
MAXIMUM DAMPER RATING FOR "B" DIMENSIONS - in

MP918A Modulating Service Damper Model D640, D641 Operating Range psi (kPa) 3 to 7 (21 to 48) 3 to 13 (21 to 90) 5 to 10 (34 to 69) 8 to 13 (55 to 90) 3 to 7 (21 to 48) 3 to 13 (21 to 90) 5 to 10 (34 to 69) 8 to 13 (55 to 90) 13 psi (90 kPa) 123" (84.8) N/A 123" (84.8) N/A 101" (69.6) N/A 101" (69.6) N/A 18 psi (124 kPa) 123" (84.8) 123" (84.8) 123" (84.8) 123" (84.8) 101" (69.6) 101" (69.6) 101" (69.6) 101" (69.6) 2-Pos. Service 18 psi (124 kPa) 123" (84.8) 123" (84.8) 205" (141.3) 205" (141.3) 101" (69.6) 101" (69.6) 169" (116.5) 169" (116.5)
(cm)
MP918B Damper Model D640, D641 D642, D643 D644, D645 Operating Range psi (kPa) 8 to 13 (55 to 90)1 Modulating Service 18 psi (124 kPa) 20 psi (138 kPa) 2-Position Service 18 psi (124 kPa) 20 psi (138 kPa)
205" (141.5) 287" (197.9) 205" (141.5) 287" (197.9) 169" (116.5) 236" (162.7) 169" (116.5) 236" (116.5)
D642, D643, D644, D645
Note: 1. With positive positioner (3, 5, or 10 psi span). Also applies to MP918B 8-13 psi (55 to 90 kPa) slaves used with MP918A.
N/A = Not applicable
15
MODEL MP918A1024 MP918A1057 MP918A1081 MP918B1006 MP918B1014 MP918B1022 MP918B1030 MP918B1048 MP918B1063 14004345-001 in MP918B1071 (cm) MP918B1089 MP918B1097 MP918B1105 MP918B1113 MP918B1196 MP920B1002 DESCRIPTION Damper actuator with 10 psi span positioner, includes mounting bracket and crank arm Damper actuator with 10 psi span positioner, includes internal NC mounting bracket Damper actuator with 10 psi span positioner, includes internal NO mounting bracket Damper actuator 3-13 psi spring range, includes external mounting bracket and crank arm Damper actuator 3-13 psi spring range, includes internal NC mounting bracket Damper actuator 3-13 psi spring range, includes internal NO mounting bracket Damper actuator 3-13 psi spring range, does not include mounting bracket ACCESSORIES Damper actuator 5-10 psi spring range, includes external mounting bracket and crank arm PAGE 3-7 psi spring range, includes external mounting bracket P o Damper s i t i actuator v e Damper actuator 3-7 psi spring range, includes internal NC mounting bracket Damper actuator 8-13 psi spring range, includes external mounting bracket and crank arm Damper actuator 8-13 psi spring range, includes internal NC mounting bracket Damper actuator 8-13 psi spring range, includes internal NO mounting bracket Damper actuator 8-13 psi spring range, does not include bracket Damper actuator 8-13 psi spring range, includes external trunnion mounting bracket Damper actuator 7-13 psi spring range, 6" stroke
14004345-001
ACCESSORIES Positive positioner kit for MP920 damper actuator
888
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION

PNEUMATIC DAMPER ACTUATOR D-3000, D-4000 SERIES
The Johnson Controls D-3000 Series pneumatic damper actuators provide a wide range of forces to handle applications from VAV control dampers to inlet vanes. The D-3062 and D-3153 have models that are UL/ULC listed for smoke damper applications.The D-4000 Series actuators are constructed of a glass reinforced polymer with synthetic elastomer diaphragms.They include barb ttings for 5/32" or 1/4" OD poly tubing.
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections Diaphragm Operating Temperature Maximum Pressure Rating Warranty Barb for 1/4" OD poly tubing Synthetic elastomer -20 to 150F (-29 to 66C) 25 psig (172 kPa) 1 year
D-4073-1 D-3062-3 with D-3062-101
D-3153-4
MODEL NOMINAL SPRING RANGE psig 3-7 5-10 8-13 8-13 8-13 5-10 8-13 8-13 5-10 8-13 8-13 5-10 8-13 8-13 5-10 8-13 8-13 8-13 8-13 8-13 kPa 21-49 35-70 56-91 56-91 56-91 35-70 56-91 56-91 35-70 56-91 56-91 35-70 56-91 56-91 56-91 56-91 56-91 56-91 56-91 56-91
MAXIMUM ACTUATOR FORCE
Value at 20 psig (140 kPa) Supply
Power lbf 85.8 66 46.2 47 47 67 47 47 67 105 105 150 105 105 105 164 328 164 164 328 N 38.2 294 206 209 209 298 209 209 298 467 467 667 467 467 467 729 1458 729 729 1458
Return lbf 19.8 33 52.8 54 54 34 54 54 34 120 120 75 120 120 120 187 374 187 187 374 N 80 147 235 240 240 151 240 240 151 534 534 534 534 534 534
EFFECTIVE PILOT ESTIMATED MOUNTING STROKE DAMPER CONTROL POSITIONER TORQUE* NOTES LENGTH 2 Pos Prop. @90 20 psig (see below)
WEIGHT
D-3062-1 D-3062-2 D-3062-3 D-4073-1 D-4073-2 D-4073-3 D-4073-4 D-4073-5 D-4073-6 D-3153-1 D-3153-2 D-3153-3 D-3153-4 D-3153-5 D-3153-6 D-3244-1 D-3244-2 D-3244-3 D-3246-1 D-3246-3
NOTES 1 2 3 4 5 6
in-lb (Nm) 20 (2.3) 33 (3.7) 46 (5.2) 71 (8) 71 (8) 51 (5.8) 71 (8) 71 (8) 51 (5.8) 158 158 113 158 158 158 (17.9) (17.9) (12.8) (17.9) (17.9) (17.9)
5 5 5 3 3 3 4 4 4 3 3 3 4 4 4 1 1, 6 2 2 1, 6
in 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 6 6
cm 5.1 5.1 5.1 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 10.2 10.2 10.2 15.2 15.2
ft 6.25 6.25 6.25 11.7 11.7 11.7 11.7 11.7 11.7 25 25 25 25 25 25 50 100 50 75 150
ft 4 4 4
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
lb (kg) 1.2 (0.54) 1.2 (0.54) 1.2 (0.54) 7.9 6.4 6.4 6.4 4.9 4.9 (3.6) (2.9) (2.9) (2.9) (2.2) (2.2)
6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75 6.75 16 16 16 16 16 16 30 60 30 45 90
15
11.5 (5.2) 10.0 (4.5) 10.0 (4.5) 10.0 (4.5) 8.5 (3.9) 8.5 (3.9) 45.5 (20.7) 63 (28.4) 15 (6.8) 16 (7.0) 75 (34.0)
833 328 (37) 1666 656 (74.1) 833 328 (37) 833 492 (55.6) 1666 984 (55.6)
- Floor-mounted assembly included - Swivel-mounted assembly included - Universal-mounting bracket included - Auxiliary-mounting bracket included - D-3062-101 mounting kit (Order separately) - Two actuators
* Torque = crank arm length x force x 0.5 (crank arm length = stroke length @ 90-degree rotation) Order the DS-3062-1 and DS-2153-1 for high temperature smoke damper operation.
D-3062-101
ACCESSORIES Mounting bracket kit for D-3062 actuators
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
889

PNEUMATIC DAMPER ACTUATORS MK-3000, MK-7100 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Schneider Electric MK-3000, MK-7100 Series pneumatic actuators provide damper control for 3-8, 5-10, and 8-13 psig (2155, 34-69, and 55-90 kPa) pressure ranges. The MK-3000 has a 3.5" (8.9 cm) nominal stroke and is adjustable 2" to 4" (5.1 to 10.2 cm) for smaller applications such as zone dampers and VAV boxes. The MK-7100 has a 4.5" (11.4 cm) nominal stroke and is adjustable 4" to 5" (10.2 to 12.7 cm) for larger applications such as air handler dampers.
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections 1/8" NPT Diaphragm Beaded, molded neoprene Operating Temperature -20 to 160F (-29 to 71C) Maximum Pressure Rating 30 psig (207 kPa) Dimensions MK-3000 12.0"H x 5.9"W x 5.5"L (30.5 x 14.9 x 14.0 cm) MK-7100 17.6"H x 7.8"W x 7.6"L (44.8 x 19.7 x 19.4 cm) Weight MK-3000 5.0 lb (2.2 kg) to 5.5 lb (2.5 kg) MK-7100 15.0 lb (6.8 kg) to 15.5 lb (7.1 kg) Any position Mounting 1 year Warranty
NEW!
MK-7100 MK-3101
OPPOSED BLADES ft2 (m2) Proportional Two-position 15 (1.39) 45 (4.18) 45 (4.18) 45 (4.18) 48.2 (4.48) 144.6 (10.65) 48.2 (4.48) 144.6 (10.65) 144.6 (10.65) 144.6 (10.65)
APPLICATION
NOMINAL CONTROL DAMPER AREA Actuator Model MK-3101, MK-3111, MK-3121 MK4-3121**, MK4-3821** MK-7101 MK-7121* MK4-7121** PARALLEL BLADES ft2 (m2) Proportional Two-position 11.6 (1.07) 34.8 (3.23) 34.8 (3.23) 34.8 (3.23) 37.5 (3.48) 112.5 (10.45) 37.5 (3.48) 112.5 (10.45) 112.5 (10.45) 112.5 (10.45)
Damper ratings are nominal and based on standard (not low leakage) dampers at 1" W.C. static pressure and 2000 fpm (10 m/s) velocity. * MK-7121 requires 15 psig (103 kPa) to be available to actuator. **Requires 20 psig (140 kPa) be available to the actuator
15
MODEL
RETURN STROKE Based on NOMINAL 1.5 psig OPERATING (10 kPa) RANGE pressure to actuator
MAXIMUM FORCE POWER STROKE
15 psig (103 kPa) Supply dual pressure system 15 psig 20 psig (103 kPa) (138 kPa) Supply Supply single single pressure or dual pressure system system
NOMINAL TORQUE** PROPORTIONAL CONTROL

15 psig (103 kPa) Supply dual pressure system 15 psig (103 kPa) Supply single pressure system 20 psig (103 kPa) Supply single or dual pressure system
MK-3101 MK-3111 MK-3121 MK4-3121* MK-7101 MK-7121 MK4-7121*
psig 3-8 5-10 8-13 8-13 3-8 8-13 8-13
kPa 21-55 34-69 55-90 55-90 21-55 55-90 55-90
lb 12 28 52 52 30 130 130
N 53 125 231 231 133 578 578
lb 44 28 4 4 110 10 10
N 196 125 18 18 489 44.5 44.5
lb 56 40 16 16 140 40 40
N 249 178 71 71 623 178 178
lb 96 80 56 56 240 140 140
N 427 356 249 249 1068 623 623
in-lb 21 21 7 7 67.5 22.5 22.5
Nm 2.37 2.37 0.79 0.79 7.62 2.54 2.54
in-lb 21 21 21 28 67.5 67.5 90
Nm 2.37 2.37 2.37 3.16 7.62 7.62 10.17
in-lb 21 21 21 91 67.5 67.5 293
Nm 2.37 2.37 2.37 10.28 7.62 7.62 33.10
*Factory-installed positive positioner (AK-42309-500) start point adjustable 1 to 12 psig (7 to 83 kPa) with range adjustable 2 to 13 psig (14 to 90 kPa). **Nominal torque for actuators without positive positioner is based on 1.5 psig (10 kPa) pressure change at the actuator. Adjust pressure reducing valve so that listed pressures are available at the actuator. Force and torque based on factory set stroke and starting pressure.
AK-42309-500 AM-530 AM-542 AM-122 AM-533 AM-161-3 AM-123
ACCESSORIES Positive positioner kit for MK-2690, MK-46xx, MK-6xxx actuators Crank arm for 1/2" dia. damper shaft, holes for 3-1/2" and 4-1/2" stroke End connector for 5/16" dia. push rod Linkage connector straight type Actuator shaft extension Damper linkage kit Ball joint connector (damper linkage required)
890
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

KMC PNEUMATIC VAV CONTROLS CSC SERIES
The pneumatic CSC-2000 Series are designed for use on VAV terminal units in HVAC systems. These are differentialpressure, sub-master controllers with adjustable minimum and maximum airow settings. A master controller, typically a room thermostat, resets the CSC-2000 velocity setpoint. Direct acting models are for normally open VAV terminal units. Reverse acting are for normal closed VAV terminal units. Each is equipped with separate adjustment knobs for minimum and maximum airow settings. All models should be calibrated with the use of airow measuring equipment.
Separate adjustments for minimum and maximum airow settings CSC-2001/2003/2007/2009/2017 are designed for normally open dampers with direct-acting thermostats for cooling and reverse-acting thermostats for heating CSC-2002/2004/2008/2010/2018 are designed for normally closed dampers with reverse-acting thermostats for cooling and direct-acting thermostats for heating CSC-2001/2002 are equipped with 0 to 10 molded plastic reference dials; others have blind adjustments
CSC-2000 Beige NO Molded
CSC-2000 Beige NO with Dial
CSC-2000 Gray NC Molded
CSC-2000 Gray NC with Dial
15
SPECIFICATIONS
Output Sensitivity 0 to 1" range unit, 5 psig/0.02" WC (35 kPa/5 Pa) 0 to 2" range units, 5 psig/0.04" WC (35 kPa/10 Pa) Main Air Pressure 15 to 30 psig (103 to 207 kPa) Max. Signal Pressure 6" wc (1493 Pa) applied to either port (X or Y) Material ABS (beige or gray) Output Capability 0 to supply pressure Weight 0.47 lb (0.21 kg) Temperature Limits Operating 40 to 120F (4 to 49C) Shipping -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C)
MOUNTING POSITION The controllers are position sensitive. The min. and max. ow limits must be set (calibrated) in the same position the controller will be mounted. The CSC-2001/2002 (with molded plastic dials) must be mounted horizontally with dials facing up. The CSC-2003 through CSC-2018 may be mounted horizontally (preferred), with the adjustment knobs up or down, or mounted vertically.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
891

MODELS
The tables below illustrate the appropriate model for each application. If replacing a CSC-2001-22 or CSC-2002-22 (now obsolete), use the CSC-2001, CSC-2002, CSC-2003, or CSC-2004 and mount appropriately. DIRECT ACTING (BEIGE CONTROLLERS) FOR NORMALLY OPEN DAMPERS Model CSC-2001 CSC-2003 CSC-2007 Direct Acting Reverse Acting 0 to 2.0" wc (498 Pa) Min. plus 2.0" wc (498 Pa) 0 to 1.0" wc (249 Pa) Min. plus 1.0" wc (249 Pa) 8 0.5 to 13 psig (55 3.5 to 90 kPa) Thermostat Required Setpoint Range For Cooling For Heating Minimum Maximum Reset Pressure Band
NEW!
Air Consumption 010 Molded Plastic Dial Yes 14.4 scim @ 20 psig (3.93 mL/s @ 138 kPa) 14.4 scim @ 20 psig (3.93 mL/s @ 138 kPa) 11.5 scim @ 20 psig (3.1 mL/s @ 138 kPa) 14.4 scim @ 20 psig (3.93 mL/s @ 138 kPa) 11.5 scim @ 20 psig (3.1 mL/s @ 138 kPa) No molded plastic dial has paper label instead
CSC-2009 CSC-2017
Model CSC-2002 CSC-2004 CSC-2008
15
CSC-2010 CSC-2018
REVERSE ACTING (GRAY CONTROLLERS) FOR NORMALLY CLOSED DAMPERS Thermostat Required Setpoint Range Reset 010 Molded Air Consumption Pressure Band Plastic Dial For Cooling For Heating Minimum Maximum 14.4 scim @ 20 psig Yes (3.93 mL/s @ 138 kPa) 0 to 1.0" wc 14.4 scim @ 20 psig 0 to Max (249 Pa) (3.93 mL/s @ 138 kPa) 3 0.5 to 8 psig 11.5 scim @ 20 psig No molded Reverse Acting Direct Acting (21 3.5 to 55 kPa) (3.1 mL/s @ 138 kPa) plastic dial has paper label 14.4 scim @ 20 psig instead (3.93 mL/s @ 138 kPa) 0 to 2.0" wc 0 to Max (498 Pa) 11.5 scim @ 20 psig (3.1 mL/s @ 138 kPa) Specications and design subject to change without notice.
892
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (mm) 1" (25) 1" (25) 3-1/4" (83)
x x Y

3/16" (5) Mtg. Holes, 2
CAUTION: Pneumatic devices must be supplied with clean, dry control air. Any other medium (e.g. oil or moisture contamination will cause the device to fail. Setpoint
2-5/8" (67) 3-13/16" (97)
1-3/4" (45)
B
3-9/16" (91)
Connections
Adjustments
15
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
893

MODEL CSC-2001 CSC-2002 CSC-2003 CSC-2004 CSC-2007 CSC-2008 CSC-2009 CSC-2010 CSC-2017 CSC-2018 CSC-3011-10 CSC-3025-10 FILN-05 HMO-4505 PG-05 SSS-100x
DESCRIPTION VAV Controller direct acting normally open 0-1" WC beige with molded dial VAV Controller reverse acting normally closed 0-1" WC gray with molded dial VAV Controller direct acting normally open 0-1" WC beige VAV Controller reverse acting normally closed 0-1" WC gray VAV Controller direct acting normally open 0-1" WC beige low consumption VAV Controller reverse acting normally closed 0-1" WC gray low consumption VAV Controller direct acting normally open 0-2" WC beige VAV Controller reverse acting normally closed 0-2" WC gray VAV Controller direct acting normally open 0-2" WC beige low consumption VAV Controller reverse acting normally closed 0-2" WC gray low consumption VAV Controller universal 0-1" WC with 8psi start VAV Controller universal 0-2" WC with 8psi start high ow ACCESSORIES In-line lter with straight tting Mounting bracket 0-30 PJIG GUAGE SSS-1000 series ow sensors
NEW!
Staefa VCV2100-201, -251 VCV2200-251 Titus I (Typically Robertshaw R77 Series or Kreuter CSC-2000 Series controller. If complete Robertshaw or Kreuter part number is shown on the Titus controller, use Cross Reference at left to select Oynacon replacement. If Robertshaw or Kreuter number is notavailable, replace with Oynacon CSC-3011 Universal Flow Controller.) Titus, Honeywell, Johnson, Barber-Colman VCV2500-101 [a] VCV2500-201 [a] VCV2500-301 [a] VCV2500-401 [a] VCV2100 (all models) VCV2200 (all models) Titus I, Titus II, Titus IIA, Titus III Johnson P-3800-1, P-3800-2 [a] Honeywell CP980C, D, E & F [b] Barber-Colman PPR-9100 and HYUR-2700 Series (all models)
REPLACEMENT CROSS REFERENCE - VAV RESET VOLUME CONTROLLERS

Model CSC-2001 CSC-2002 Robertshaw R77-21, R77-L21 R77-22, R77-L22 R77-23, R77-L23, R77-23DA R77-24, R77-L24, R77-24RA R77-25 R77-26 R77-27 R77-28 R78 Series (all models) R77 Series (all models) Kreuter CSC-2001, CSC-2011 CSC-2002, CSC-2012 CSC-2003, CSC-2013 CSC-2004, CSC-2014 CSC-2007 CSC-2008 CSC-2009, CSC-2015 CSC-2010, CSC-2016 CSC-3004 CSC-3011 CSC-3017 CSC-3021 CSC-3023 CSC-2000 Series (all models) [a] CSC-3016, CSC-3020, CSC-3026 CSC-3025 CSC-2017 CSC-2018
15
CSC-2003 CSC-2004 CSC-2007 CSC-2008 CSC-2009 CSC-2010
CSC-3011 Universal Controller
CSC-3016 CSC-3025 Universal Controller for Trane Boxes
VCV2500-101 VCV2500-201 Johnson P-3800-1, P-3800-2 VCV2500-301 (on TRANE VAV Units) VCV2500-401 (on TRANE VAV Units) [a] When applied on VAV terminal units manufactured by The Trane Company, Dynacon CSC -3025 ow controller should be used. [b] For Honeywell CP980 Velocitrol controllers, existing inlet sensor must be replaced with Dynacon SSS-1000 series sensor.
894
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC THREE-WAY AIR VALVES EP3 SERIES
The EP3 Series is an industrial quality, two-position, three-way solenoid air valve with a capacity of 500 scim. A momentary manual override push button provides operation without closing the electrical circuit. An LED provides visual indication of the air valve's status. The valve can be mounted in any position with body mounting holes or with the mounting plate furnished with the valve. Each EP3 also comes with 16" lead wires and three barbed ttings for 1/4" plastic tubing.
LED indication Integral mounting plate Low capacity Manual override Universal porting N.C., N.O., diverter, or selector determined by piping
EP3-24 VAC
BACK-UP APPLICATIONS
Control Branch R N.O. Note: Energize EP for back-up control
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
R
LED
red + black Removable lead wire connector

2+1
Controlled Device
A C
N.C. P
Back-Up Control
LED
2.39 (6.07)
2.2 (5.59)
Manual override
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage EP3-24VAC EP3-24VDC EP3-120VAC Supply Watts Supply Current EP3-24VAC, -24VDC EP3-120VAC Connections Cv Override Indicator Air Capacity 24 VAC, +15%, -10% 24 VDC, +15%, -10% 120 VAC, +15%, -10% 2.5 W
P
1.5 (3.81)
"P" Port #10-32 "A" Port #10-32 on opposite side
P
0.19 (0.48)
0.37 (0.94)
Manual override
A
0.38 (0.97)
15
0.63 (1.59)
Mounting holes 0.13" (0.32) diameter through two places
Mounting holes 0.17" (0.44) diameter through two places
R N.O.
104 mA continuous duty, 157 mA inrush 20 mA continuous duty, 157 mA inrush Three barbed ttings for 1/4" OD poly tubing 0.04 Momentary pushbutton Red LED - on when energized 500 scim (0.29 scfm) @ 15 psig (103 kPa) Operating Temperature 0 to 122F (-18 to 50C) Pressure Range 0-50 psig (0-345 kPa) Wiring 16" (40.6 cm) leads with connector Approvals UL-recognized component Warranty 1 year March 2014
Ports (de-energized) A Common P Normally closed R Normally open A Common
P N.C.
MODEL EP3-24VAC EP3-24VDC EP3-120VAC DESCRIPTION 24 VAC three-way air valve 24 VDC three-way air valve 120 VAC three-way air valve
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
895

ELECTRIC/PNEUMATIC THREE-WAY AIR VALVES 35A SERIES
DESCRIPTION The 35A Series is an industrial-quality, two-position, threeway solenoid air valve with a capacity of 1728 scim. A non-locking manual override push button provides operation without closing the electrical circuit. Two mounting holes at the base of the valve body provide easy mounting to control panels. Each 35A also comes with 18" lead wires and three barbed ttings for 1/4" OD plastic tubing. FEATURES Industrial quality Medium capacity Manual override Universal porting N.C., N.O., diverter, or selector determined by piping
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
PIPING
in (cm)
Manual pushbutton
Ports (de-energized) 1 - Normally closed 2 - Common 3 - Normally open
N.C. 1 C 2 3 N.O.
1.97 (5.00) 0.3 (0.77)
Ports 3 2 1
Two mounting holes 0.13 diameter (0.34 cm)
2 0.46 (1.17)
0.13 (0.33)
15
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 35A-FW-24VAC 35A-FW-120VAC 35A-24VDC Supply Watts 35A-FW-24VAC 35A-FW-120VAC 35A-24VDC Connections Cv 24 VAC/VDC 50/60 Hz 120 VAC 60 Hz, 110 VAC 50 Hz 24 VDC 1.8 W 1.7 W 5.4 W 1/8" NPT or barb for 1/4" OD tubing 0.18 Override Air Capacity
0.43 0.85 (1.08) (2.15) 0.55 (1.40) 1.10 (2.79)
0.39 (0.99) 0.65 (1.65) 0.95 (2.41)
Momentary pushbutton 1728 scim, 1 scfm (28 lpm) @ 20 psig (138 kPa) Operating Temperature 0 to 104F (-18 to 40C) Pressure Range 28" Hg vacuum to 120 psig (827 kPa) Wiring 18" leads, 22 AWG Approvals CE Warranty 1 year
MODEL 35A-FW-24VAC 35A-FW-120VAC 35A-24VDC DESCRIPTION 24 VAC three-way air valve 120 VAC three-way air valve 24 VDC three-way air valve
896
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION APPLICATION

THREE-WAY SOLENOID AIR VALVE V11 SERIES
V11 Series three-way solenoid air valves have a capacity of 2592 scim and have three connections: a normally open (N.O.) port with 1/8" FNPT connection, and normally closed (N.C.) and common (COM) ports with barbed ttings for 1/4" OD tubing. The posts in the die cast aluminum valve body have No. 60 mesh (217 micron openings) monel screens to prevent foreign material from entering the valve ports.
The V11 Series is used in applications where the operation of a pneumatic device is dependent upon an electrical circuit. The valves direct supply air to the pneumatic device when the coil is energized or de-energized, depending on the supply and exhaust air connections. All V11 Series valves are designed for use only as HVAC control system devices. Where system closure, improper ow, or loss of pressure due to valve failure can result in personal injury and/or loss of property, it is recommended that additional devices be added to accommodate proper system operation, such as using a whisker switch to monitor the blade position on smoke dampers.
FEATURES Three-port connection C, N.O., N.C. Two-position operation Positive air seal Manual operation for testing and checkout of some models Compact and lightweight Mounts in any position High capacity
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage See ordering information Supply Watts AC models 6W DC model 9W Connections 1/8" NPT normally open port; barbs for 1/4" OD tubing on common and normally closed port Override Separately ordered key, Y99AA-4 Air Capacity 2592 scim, 1.5 scfm (42 lpm) @ 15 psig (105 kPa) supply Operating Temperature AC models DC models Pressure Range Wiring Approvals Warranty 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) 0 to 20 psig (0 to 138 kPa) 18" leads, 18 AWG, 7/8" knockout for 1/2" conduit connector UL Listed, CSA 1 year
15
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.88 Diameter (2.24) conduit hole 2.0 (5.08) 0.97 (2.46)
COM ND
0.68 (1.73) 0.19 (0.48) 1.50 (3.81)

NC
0.67 (1.70)
2.56 (6.50)
0.41 (1.04)
0.18 (0.46) 0.38 (0.97)
3.13 (7.95)
1/4 Barb connector 1/8-27 NPT
0.97 (2.46) 0.38 (0.97)
1.0 (1.54)
0.19 0.5
0.19 (0.48) 1/4 Barb connector
1.75 (4.43)
1.75 (4.45)
0.20 (0.51)
0.25 (0.64) 0.50 (1.27) 0.57 (1.45)
0.22 0.37 (0.56) (0.94)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
897

THREE-WAY SOLENOID AIR VALVE V11 SERIES
APPLICATION DIAGRAM
Electrical leads Control air Access plug for key Supply air N.C. C Exhaust air
NEW!
Electrical leads Access plug for key C 20 psig (138 kPa) N.C. N.O.
To system
N.O.
15 psig (103 kPa)
Two-Pipe
Three-Pipe
OPERATION
In a typical application, supply air is connected to the normally closed port, and the control device is connected to the common port. When the solenoid is energized, a magnetic eld activates a plunger-type valve stem, and supply air is directed to the control device. When the solenoid is de-energized, the supply air connection is closed, and the normally open port exhausts air from the control device. Reverse action may be obtained by connecting the supply air to the normally open port, using the normally closed port for exhaust (see Application Diagram). For day/night or summer/winter two-pressure switching, see the example Threepipe Application Diagram. To manually operate, remove the access plug, and insert the Y99AA-4 key. The manual opener key is ordered separately.
15
MODEL V11HAA-100 V11HBA-100 V11HCA-100 V11HDA-100 V11HFA-100 V11HGA-100 V11PNA-105 Y99AA-4
DESCRIPTION 110/120 VAC, 50/60 Hz three-way air va lve 220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz three-way air valve 208 VAC, 50/60 Hz three-way air valve 440/480 VAC, 50/60 Hz three-way air valve 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz three-way air valve 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz three-way air valve 24 VDC three-way air valve Manual opener key ACCESSORIES
898
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION

ISOLATION VALVES AND PRESSURE REGULATORS PV600 SERIES
PV600 Series air and water two-way isolation valves are rated to 200 psig (1379 kPa) at -40 to 175F (-40 to 79C). They are useful in isolating transducers for removal or for bypass operations. They are constructed of a brass body and plastic hand valves. Fittings are 1/8 threaded NPT male or female.
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 0.15 lb (.07 kg)
PV608-2
PV607-2
1.34 (3.40)
Top View 1.38 (3.51)
MODEL PV607-2 PV608-2 DESCRIPTION Male to Male 1/8" NPT isolation valve Female to Male 1/8" NPT isolation valve
D
1.67 (4.24)
Isolation Valve PV600
DESCRIPTION The K-383, K-384 and K-387 pressure regulators have a large ow capacity to reduce supply air pressure from the compressor down to the requirements of the pneumatic control system.The regulators have 1/8" gauge ports.
K-312
D
K-383
K-384
15
SPECIFICATIONS
Connections K-383 1/4" FNPT pipe connection K-384 1/2" FNPT pipe connection K-387 3/8" FNPT pipe connection Output 0-50 psig (0-345 kPa) Operating Temperature -40 to 200F (-40 to 93C) Maximum Pressure 400 psig (2,758 kPa) Weight K-383 2.0 lb (1.0 kg) K-384 3.4 lb (1.3 kg) K-387 5.0 lb (2.3 kg) Mounting Inline piping Warranty 1 year
MODEL DESCRIPTION K-383 Pressure regulator, 1/4" pipe, 16 scfm capacity K-384 Pressure regulator, 1/2" pipe, 32 scfm capacity K-387 Pressure regulator, 3/8" pipe, 22 scfm capacity
ACCESSORIES AL-322 2" gauge, 0-30 psi, center back 1/8" NPT connection AL-327 2" gauge, 0-100 psi, center back 1/8" NPT connection K-312 Safety pop-off valve, 1/2" MNPT, 30 psi setpoint, 24 scfm
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
899

PRV STATION, FILTERS, CALIBRATION KIT K-332
DESCRIPTION The K-332 PRV station is a cartridge-style lter element that removes oil vapor, moisture, and dirt to one micron size. The K-332-B assembly includes a wall mounting bracket, lter cartridge, pressure reducing valve (PRV) and three shut-off/ bypass valves for uninterrupted lter servicing. This complete airow station is designed for airow rates and pressure regulation up to 8 scfm and 30 psig (200 kPa). The regulator is adjustable up to 35 psig (241 kPa).
NEW!
3/8" 3/8" 12" (3.05 cm) PRV Station Model K-332-B 17" (4.32 cm)
MODEL K-332 K-332-B DESCRIPTION PRV station with lters PRV station with wall bracket, bypass and three isolating valves
DESCRIPTION The FILN05 is a nal-device pneumatic air lter with straight plastic barb ttings for 1/4" OD poly tubing. The FILN05-B model comes with 90 bent ttings. The microbre disposable lter unit consists of a HEPA Microex lter tube permanently bonded into a sealed nylon casting. As the lter shows signs of contamination, simply remove and replace. A replacement model FILN05-R is available without the barb ttings. NOTE: Not for use with synthetic lubricants.
SPECIFICATIONS
15
Connections FILN05-B
FILN05
Plastic barbs, 90 degree, for 1/4" OD poly tubing FILN05 Plastic barbs, straight, for 1/4" OD poly tubing FILN05-R Replacement lter, no barb ttings Air Capacity 1.4 scfm, 1.5 psid Operating Temperature 32 to 200F (0 to 93C) Maximum Pressure Rating 100 psi (689 kPa) @ 100F (38C) Materials Of Construction Transparent nylon housing, HEPA Microex lter Dimensions 2.8"L x 1"DIA (7.0 x 2.5 cm) Weight 0.3 oz (8.5 g)
MODEL DESCRIPTION FILN05-B Inline disposable air lter, 90 bent barbs for 1/4" OD tubing Inline disposable air lter, straight, with barbs for FILN05 1/4" OD tubing FILN05-R Inline disposable air lter, replacement, without barbs
DESCRIPTION The TOOL-95-1 is a pneumatic controls calibration kit. It includes gauges, wrenches, tees, screwdrivers and a squeeze-bulb pump. The TOOL-M-225 is a larger replacement squeeze bulb pump for higher air volumes. TOOL-95-1
MODEL TOOL-95-1 TOOL-M-225 DESCRIPTION Pneumatic thermostat calibration kit Large-capacity squeeze bulb pump TOOL-M-225
900
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES T-100 SERIES POLYETHYLENE: Flexible and lightweight Flame retardant High stress-crack resistance Easy to handle and install Resistant to ultraviolet breakdown Meets or exceeds every requirement for ame retardant polyethylene tubing set by the pneumatic controls industry Numbering system for multitube identication Available with colored stripes

PNEUMATIC TUBING T-100 SERIES, T-141
T-100 Series pneumatic tubing is a superior quality, ameretardant, stress-crack resistant, exclusively compounded polyethylene tubing that provides long-term, reliable performance. This tubing is suitable for installation in air ducts, plenums, and other spaces used for environmental air. The T-141 is made of extremely exible, clear-blue polyurethane that is not ame-retardant-rated and is used only for inside panels. It is kink-resistant, has an excellent memory, and features high compression strength and outstanding abrasive resistance.
T-100
T-141
PERFORMANCE CHART - POLYETHYLENE TUBING

Burst Pressure (psig/kPa)
600 INSTANTANEOUS BURST PRESSURE VS TEMPERATURE (4137) 500 (3448) 400 1/4" OD x 0.040" (2758) 3/8" OD x 0.062" 300 (2069) 200 1/2" OD x 0.062" (1379) 100 (690) 75 (24) 100 (38) 125 (52) 150 (66) 175 (79)
Temperature F (C)
15
CAUTION: The polyethylene performance chart indicates short term burst pressures, not long term operating pressures, as indicated in laboratory testing. No representations of operating burst pressures are expressed or implied.
SPECIFICATIONS
Specications for T-100 Series Burst Pressure T-100 Series ASTM Test D-1599; typical value >500 psig (3,448 kPa) T-141 only 320 psig (2,206 kPa) @ 75F (24C) derated to 160 psig (1,103 kPa) @ 150F (66C) Bending Modulus ASTM Test D-747; typical value 3000 psig 5000 Density ASTM Test D-792; typical value 1.1 0.005 g/cc Elongation ASTM Test D-638; typical value 600% Melt Index ASTM Test D-1238; typical value 0.6 0.1 g/10 min Polyethylene Classication March 2014 ASTM Test D-1248; Type I, Class B or C, Category 4 Shore A Hardness ASTM Test D-1700; typical value 97 3 Shore D Hardness ASTM Test D-1700; typical value 45 3 Smoke Density UL 1820; peak optical density 0.5, maximum optical density 0.15 Stress Crack Resistance ASTM Test D-1693; typical value V 200 hours Flame Propagation UL 1820; typical value 0.5 Tensile Strength ASTM Test D-638; typical value >2000 psig (13,790 kPa) Water Absorption ASTM Test D-576; maximum value 5 Flammability Rating UL 94 V-2; UL 910 NFPA 90A
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
901

PNEUMATIC TUBING T-100 SERIES, T-141
DIMENSIONS
Model T-100 T-100-2 T-101 T-101-2 T-101-B T-101-G T-101-O Description 5/32" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 500 ft (152 m) 5/32" OD black poly tubing, twin, 1 coil, 500 ft (152 m) 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black poly tubing, twin, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black with blue stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black with green stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
NEW!
Dimensions Weight 0.156" OD, 0.096" ID, 0.030 Wall, 500 ft (152 m) coil 0.156" OD, 0.096" ID, 0.030 Wall, 500 ft (152 m) coil 0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil 0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil 0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil 0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil 0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil 0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil 0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil 0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil 0.375" OD, 0.250" ID, 0.062 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil 0.500" OD, 0.375" ID, 0.062 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil 0.250" OD, 0.159" ID, 0.045 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil
3.0 lb (1.4 kg) per coil 6.0 lb (2.8 kg) per coil 3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil 6.6 lb (3.0 kg) per coil 3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil 3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil 3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil 3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil 3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil 3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil 3.3 lb (1.5 kg) per coil 7.6 lb (3.4 kg) per coil 10.6 lb (4.8 kg) per coil 7.2 lb (3.3 kg) per coil
1/4" OD black with orange stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 0.250" OD, 0.170" ID, 0.040 Wall, 250 ft (76 m) coil 1/4" OD black with red stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black with violet stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black with white stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black with yellow stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 3/8" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/2" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD clear blue poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
T-101-R T-101-V T-101-W T-101-Y T-110 T-130 T-141
15
MODEL T-100 T-100-2 T-101 T-101-2 T-101-B T-101-G T-101-O T-101-R T-101-V T-101-W T-101-Y T-110 T-130 T-141
DESCRIPTION 5/32" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 500 ft (152 m) 5/32" OD black poly tubing, twin, 1 coil, 500 ft (152 m) 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black poly tubing, twin, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black with blue stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black with green stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black with orange stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black with red stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black with violet stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black with white stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD black with yellow stripe poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 3/8" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/2" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 1/4" OD clear blue poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
902
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SOLDER ADAPTERS Model Robertshaw B-121 B-122 B-123 21-375 F-100-12 141-425 MALE ADAPTERS Model Robertshaw B-130 B-131-10 21-784 20-885 21-005 B-132 B-133 B-134 F-100-11 F-100-35 141-202 141-354 141-209 FEMALE ADAPTERS Model Robertshaw B-135 20-925 BULKHEAD BARBS Model Robertshaw B-138 20-894 B-139 21-377 B-142 20-874 COUPLINGS Model Robertshaw B-260 20-875 B-261 21-064 B-262 B-263 20-886 B-264 20-887 B-265 20-890 B-266 20-891 B-267 20-888 MALE BRANCH TEES Model Robertshaw B-371 20-897 B-372 20-905

PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY BARB FITTINGS B SERIES
Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell 1610B 1586B
Description (in) 3/16 ID 1/4 OD to 5/32 B 3/16 ID 1/4 OD to 1/4 B 1/4 ID to 1/4 B Description (in) 3/16 x 1/8 MPT 1/4 or 5/32 x 1/8 MPT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 3/8 x 1/8 MPT 3/8 x 1/4 MPT Description (in) 1/4 x 1/8 FPT Description (in) 3/16 x 1/4 Comp 1/4 x 1/4 Comp Description (in) 1/4 B x 1/4 Comp 3/8 B x 3/8 Comp 1/4 B x 1/4 B Description (in) 5/32 x 5/32 1/4 x 5/32 1/4 x 3/16 Solder 1/4 x 1/4 3/8 x 3/8 3/8 x 1/4 1/2 x 3/8 1/2 x 1/2
Std. Pack 100 100 100 Std. Pack 100 100 100 100 50 Std. Pack 100 Std. Pack 100 50 Std. Pack 25 25 50 Std. Pack 50 50 100 50 50 50 25 25 Bulkhead Barb Compression Adapter Female Adapter Solder Adapter
Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell F-100-21 141-249 1590BT 1591BT 1592BT
Male Adapter
Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell 141-211 1594B
COMPRESSION ADAPTERS Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell B-136 20-892 B-137 20-893 F -200-33 141-233 1635B Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell 1619B Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell F-300-31 141-247 1628B F-300-30 141-246 1606B F-300-26 141-201 1607B F-300-27 141-216 1608B F-300-21 141-217 1610B F-300-19 141-219 1611B F-300-36 141-218 1617B
15
Coupling
Cross Reference Description Std. Pack Johnson Siemens Honeywell "Left x "Right x "Top F-700-79 141-220 1600 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 25 F-700-63 1609BT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT x 1/4 100 Description
"Left x "Right x "Top
Male Branch Tees
FEMALE BRANCH TEE Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell B-373 20-904 F-700-76 141-227 1614B B-373-1 ---------
Std. Pack 25 10 Female Branch Tees
1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 FPT
1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 FPT Drop Ear
Sold in package quantities only Order quantity 1=1 package
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
903

PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY BARB FITTINGS B SERIES, R-3710, F-1000 SERIES
BARB TEES Model Robertshaw B-374 20-876 B-375 21-785 B-376 20-898 B-377 20-899 B-378 20-900 B-379 20-901 B-381 20-903 GAUGE TEE Model Robertshaw B-387 20-906
Cross Reference Description Johnson Siemens Honeywell "Left x "Right x "Top F-700-83 141-245 1637B 5/32 x 5/32 x 5/32 F-700-84 1630B 1/4 x 1/4 x 5/32 F-700-73 141-203 1612B 1/4 x1/4 x1/4 F-700-74 141-214 1615B 3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4 F-700-75 141-204 1613B 3/8 x 3/8 x 3/8 F-700-67 141-223 1616B 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/4 F-700-65 141-221 1620B 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2
NEW!
Std. Pack 100 100 100 100 100 5 5 Barb Tee Std. Pack 5 Gauge Tee Description (in) 5/32 and 1/4 Plug 1/4 Plug 3/8 Plug 1/2 Plug Description (in) 5/32 x 1/8 MPT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT Std. Pack 100 50 50 100 Std. Pack 100 100 Barb Plug Barb to MPT 90 Ell Description (in) 1/4 x 1/8 FPT Std. Pack 100 Barb to FPT 90 Ell Description (in) 3/16 x 1/4 1/4 x 1/4 3/8 x 3/8 1/2 x 1/2 Std. Pack 100 100 100 5 Barb 90 Ell
Cross Reference Johnson Siemens F-700-62 141-213
Description Honeywell "Left x "Right x "Top 1604BT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT x 1/8 FPT
BARB PLUGS Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell F-1000-323 B-391 20-910 141-237 1640 B-392 21-378 F-1000-241 141-238 B-393 21-379 BARB TO MPT 90 ELL Model Robertshaw B-570 B-571 20-895 Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell 141-242 F-500-41 141-200 1595BT
15
BARB TO FPT 90 ELL Model Robertshaw B-572 20-896 BARB 90 ELL Model Robertshaw B-569 B-573 20-908 B-574 20-909 B-575 -
Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell F-500-42 141-208 1589B
Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell F-500-39 141-230 1642 F-500-38 141-231 1598B F-500-37 141-232 1599B
INLINE RESTRICTORS Model Number R-3710-2007 R-3710-2005 R-3710-2010
Description Orifice 0.007", 1/4" x 1/4" barbs, aqua-colored thermoplastic Orifice 0.005", 1/4" x 1/4" barbs, red-colored thermoplastic Adjustable restrictor, 5/32" x 5/32", brass Inline Restrictors
904
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
COMPRESSION TEES Model Robertshaw C-331 C-333 20-949 C-335 20-951 C-336 20-950 C-337 C-338 -

PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY COMPRESSION FITTINGS C-SERIES
COMPRESSION ADAPTERS TO MPT Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-132 F-200-2 044-126 1433T C-133 20-930 F-200-3 044-128 1435T C-134 20-931 F-1000-36 044-129 1436T C-135 20-933 F-200-4 044-135 1442T C-136 20-934 F-200-5 044-137 1443T C-137 20-935 F-200-6 044-138 1444T C-138 F-200-7 1446T C-139 F-200-8 1447T C-140 F-200-9 1448T
Description (in) 3/16 x 1/8 MPT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 1/4 x 1/4 MPT 3/8 x 1/8 MPT 3/8 x 1/4 MPT 3/8 x 3/8 MPT 1/2 x 1/4 MPT 1/2 x 3/8 MPT 1/2 x 1/2 MPT
Std. Pack 50 50 50 25 25 25 10 25 25
Compression Adapter to MPT
COMPRESSION ADAPTERS TO FPT Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-146 20-942 1459 C-147 20-943 1460 C-149 1465
Description (in) 1/4 x 1/8 FPT 1/4 x 1/4 FPT 3/8 x 1/4 FPT
Std. Pack 25 10 10
Compression Adapter to FPT
COMPRESSION LINE VALVES Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-151 20-914 F-1000-93 2135 C-152 20-919 F-1000-94 2136
Description (in) 1/4 3/8
Std. Pack 10 10 Compression Line Valve
COMPRESSION UNIONS Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-231 F-800-1 1420 C-232 F-800-2 C-233 20-939 F-800-3 1421 C-234 20-941 F-800-4 1428 C-235 20-940 F-800-5 1423 C-236 F-800-6 1429 C-237 F-800-7 1424
Description (in) 3/16 x 3/16 1/4 x 3/16 1/4 x 1/4 3/8 x 1/4 3/8 x 3/8 1/2 x 3/8 1/2 x 1/2
Std. Pack 25 10 50 10 50 10 25
15
Compression Union
Cross Reference Description Johnson Siemens Honeywell "Left x "Right x "Top F-700-8 1528 3/16 x 3/16 x 3/16 F-700-9 1529 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4 F-700-10 1538 3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4 F-700-11 1531 3/8 x 3/8 x 3/8 1540 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/4 F-700-12 1539 1/2 x 1/2 x 3/8
Std. Pack 10 25 10 25 10 10
Compression Tee
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
905

COMPRESSION ADAPTERS TO MPT Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-361 20-956 F-700-4 1551T C-362 20-952 1542T
Description "Left x "Right x "Top 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT x 1/4
ANGLE GAUGE TEE Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-369 20-958 1557T
NEW!
Std. Pack 10 10 Tees with MPT Std. Pack 10 Angle Gauge Tee Std. Pack 10 Gauge Tee Std. Pack 10 Branch Female Tee Description (in) 1/4 x 1/4 3/8 x 3/8 Std. Pack 10 10 Bulkhead Fitting Description (in) 1/4 Std. Pack 50 Compression Plug Description (in) 1/4 3/8 1/2 Std. Pack 200 100 100
Description "Left x "Right x "Top

1/8 MPT x 1/8 FPT x 1/4
GAUGE TEE Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-370 20-955 1559T
Description "Left x "Right x "Top

1/4 x 1/8 MPT x 1/8 FPT
BRANCH FEMALE TEE Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-372 20-957 F-700-7 1564T
Description "Left x "Right x "Top 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 FPT
15
BULKHEAD FITTINGS Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-375 F-800-8 C-376 -
COMPRESSION PLUG Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-378 21-381 F-1000-14 1568
PLASTIC FERRULES Model Robertshaw C-381 20-961 C-382 20-962 C-383 -
Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell F-1000-9 1571 F-1000-10 1572 F-1000-11 1573
Plastic Ferrule
906
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

PLASTIC TUBING INSERTS Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-384 20-966 F-1000-198 1575 C-385 20-967 F-1000-184 1576 C-386 F-1000-8 1577
Description (in) 1/4 3/8 1/2
Std. Pack 200 200 100
Plastic Tubing Insert
COMPRESSION 90 ELLS Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-521 F-800-3 1479 C-522 F-800-4 C-523 F-800-5 1481 C-524 F-800-7 1482
Description (in) 1/4 x 1/4 3/8 x 1/4 3/8 x 3/8 1/2 x 1/2
Std. Pack 10 25 10 10
Compression 90 Ell
COMPRESSION 90 ELL TO MPT Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-532 F-500-2 1488T C-535 20-945 F-500-3 1490T C-536 20-946 1491T C-538 20-947 F-500-5 1497T C-539 F-500-6 1498T
Description (in) 3/16 x 1/8 MPT 1/4 x 1/8 MPT 1/4 X 1/4 MPT 3/8 x 1/4 MPT 3/8 x 3/8 MPT
Std. Pack 100 50 50 25 25
Compression 90 Ell to MPT
15
COMPRESSION 90 ELL TO FPT Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell C-552 20-948 1511 Description (in) 1/4 x1/8 FPT Std. Pack 25
Compression 90 Ell to FPT
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
907

MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS M SERIES, F-1000 SERIES
90 DROP EAR ELBOW Model Description Std. Pack M-127 1/8" FPT 25
GLOBE VALVES Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell M-132 20-973 F-1000-98 2030
NEW!
Drop Ear Elbow Description (in) 1/2 FPT Std. Pack 10 Globe Valve Description (in) 1/8 FPT 1/4 FPT Std. Pack 10 10 Shut Off Description (in) 1/8 MPT 1/4 MPT 3/8 MPT Std. Pack 25 50 25 Hex Nipples M-633 M-648-K
SHUT OFF COCKS Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell M-135 F-1000-218 M-136 F-1000-219 2108
HEX NIPPLES Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell M-141 20-990 1739T M-142 20-992 1751T M-143 1762T GANG STRAPS AND CLIPS Model Description Std. Pack M-633 Copper-plated 100 six-gang strap M-648-K Capillary 1 mounting clip 1/8" maximum CC-1G Non-metallic 1 capillary clip 3/8" maximum
15
PIPE CLAMPS - Copper Plated Model Description (in) Std. Pack M-622 1/4 single 100 M-623 3/8 single 100 M-628 1/4-1/4 dual 100
BUSHINGS SNAP-IN BUSHINGS Model Description Std. Pack F-1000-331 Nylon bushing, 1/2" EMT thru-wall conduit 50 F-1000-332 Nylon bushing, 3/4" EMT thru-wall conduit 50 NB12K Nylon bushing, 1/2" knockout (7/8" hole) 50 CCT1820 Nylon bushing, 1/2" EMT and 1/2" knockout 50 2157 Nylon bushing, 3/4" knockout 1
CC-1G
Snap-In Bushing
908
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SOLDER CAPS Model Robertshaw S-141 S-142 S-143 SOLDER COUPLINGS Model Robertshaw S-202 S-205 S-206 S-207 S-208 S-209 SOLDER TEES Model Robertshaw S-302 S-306 S-308 S-310 S-312 S-314 S-316 SOLDER 90 ELBOWS Model Robertshaw S-502 S-504 S-506 SOLDER 45 ELBOWS Model Robertshaw S-515 S-516 -

PNEUMATIC AIR SUPPLY SOLDER FITTINGS S-SERIES
SOLDER ADAPTERS TO MALE PIPE THREAD Model Cross Reference Robertshaw Johnson Siemens Honeywell S-104 F-100-3 1104 S-109 F-100-7 1109 Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell 1161 1162 1163 Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell F-300-1 1002 F-300-2 1003 F-300-4 1025 F-300-3 1005 F-300-7 1029 F-300-5 1006
Description (in) 3/8 OD x 1/4 MPT 1/2 OD x 1/2 MPT Description (in) 1/4 3/8 1/2 Description (in) 3/16 x 3/16 1/4 x 1/4 3/8 x 1/4 3/8 x 3/8 3/8 x 1/2 1/2 x 1/2
Std. Pack 25 100 Std. Pack 50 50 50
Solder Adapter to MPT
Solder Cap Std. Pack 100 100 50 100 50 100 Std. Pack 50 50 50 50 50 50 25 Std. Pack 50 50 50 Std. Pack 50 50
Solder Coupling
Cross Reference Description Johnson Siemens Honeywell "Left x "Right x "Top F-700-17 1251 3/16 x 3/16 x 3/16 F-700-18 1252 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/4 F-700-24 1270 3/8 x 3/8 x 1/4 F-700-20 1254 3/8 x 3/8 x 3/8 F-700-27 1275 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/4 F-700-28 1276 1/2 x 1/2 x 3/8 F-700-25 1255 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell F-500-19 1172 F-500-20 1174 F-500-22 1175 Cross Reference Johnson Siemens Honeywell 1202 1203 Description (in) 1/4 x 1/4 3/8 x 3/8 1/2 x 1/2 Description (in) 3/8 x 3/8 1/2 x1/2
Solder Tee
15
Solder 90 Elbow
Solder 45 Elbow
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
909

PNEUMATIC THERMOSTATS CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE
PNEUMATIC THERMOSTATS CROSS-REFERENCE
Model # TK-5001 TP973A2259 T4100-1 TK-5101 TP973B2171 T4100-2 TK-1001 TP970A2259 T-4002-201 2212-118 TK-1101 TP970B2182 T-4002-202 2212-119 TK-1301 TP971A2102 T-4506-203 TK-1201 TP972A2192 T4752 Manufacturer Schneider Electric Honeywell Johnson Schneider Electric Honeywell Johnson Schneider Electric Honeywell Johnson Robertshaw Schneider Electric Honeywell Johnson Reverse Robertshaw Schneider Electric Honeywell Johnson Schneider Electric Honeywell Johnson Direct Acting or Reverse Acting Direct Direct Direct Reverse Reverse Reverse Direct Direct Direct Direct Reverse Reverse Two Reverse Direct Direct Direct
One or Two Pipe One One One
One One
NEW!
Other Includes Cover Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Two Two No Day/Night Day/Night Day/Night Heat/Cool Heat/Cool Heat/Cool Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes COOLING Dehumid. Pressure sensed upstream
Includes Mounting Bracket
One Two Two Two Two Two Two Two Two Two Two Two
15
CONTROLLER ACTION
CONTROLLER ACTION INSTRUCTIONS 1. Pick system application 2. Pick fail safe condition 3. Intersection shows action FAILS TO ON (Normally Open Ports) (Normally Closed Contacts) FAILS TO OFF (Normally Closed Ports) (Normally Open Contacts)
HEATING Humid. Pressure sensed downstream
D.A. R.A.
R.A. D.A.
910
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

BASIC PNEUMATIC TERMS
Action: The direction of magnitude change of the output of a controller with respect to the change in the variable that is being sensed. Example: Direct Action: Variable increases, output increases. Reverse Action: Variable increases, output decreases. Branch Lines: The tubing in a pneumatic control system which carries the output signal from controllers to auxiliary devices or actuators.
Constant Volume Control: An air system in which the total quantity of air ow remains the same. The load is matched by changing the temperature of the air delivered.
Day/Night Thermostat: A pneumatic thermostat which can be indexed by a change in main pressure to control at one setpoint during the day and another setpoint during the night. Example: 15 psig main during the day and 20 psig main during the night. (Synonymous to night setback or set-up). Direct Acting (DA): The action of a controller that produces an increase in output pressure as the variable increases. Electric-Pneumatic Switch (EP): An electrically operated air ow switch with normally closed and normally opened inputs which lead to a common output. Also known as solenoid air valve. Mains: The tubing in a pneumatic control system which carries the supply pressure from the air supply equipment to the controllers. Normally Closed (N.C.): A controlled device that reduces the ow of the controlled medium as the branch pressure is reduced, and will go to shut-off if the branch pressure goes to zero. Normally Open (N.O.): A controlled device that increases the ow of the controlled medium as the branch pressure is reduced, and will go to full-ow if the branch pressure goes to zero. Pneumatic-Electric Switch (PE): An air pressure operated switch in which the contacts are made or broken in order to operate electrical devices in a pneumatic control system. Positive Positioning: The characteristic of a controlled device in which it has the maximum force available at any point of the stroke. Restrictor: A device which has a minute opening (such as 0.005" or 0.0075") which changes the velocity pressure of the air line to static pressure. Reverse Acting (RA): The action of a controller that produces a decrease in output pressure as the variable increases. Reversing Relay: An auxiliary device that produces a decrease in the output pressure to the controlled device as the input from the controller increases. Summer/Winter: A pneumatic thermostat which can be indexed by a change in main pressure to control at one action during the summer and another action during the winter. This is necessary because it is controlling the same controlled device. Example: 15 psi during summer - reverse action; 20 psi during winter - direct action.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
911
15

PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS, SENSORS AND ACTUATORS
INTAKE FILTER COMPRESSOR PRESSURE SWITCH
PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS
SERVICE BYPASS VALVE
HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY RELIEF VALVE DRIVE BELT
MOTOR AIR DRYER
STORAGE TANK
NEW!
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE HIGH-PRESSURE GAGE SAFETY REFIEF VALVE MAIN AIR TO SYSTEM AUTO SEPARATOR FILTER/TRAP DRAIN COCK LOW-PRESSURE GAGE SUBMICRON FILTER PIPED TO DRAIN
TEST COCK NORMALLY OPEN SERVICE/TEST VALVE NORMALLY CLOSED SERVICE/TEST VALVE TEST COCK AUTO TRAP
P neumatic control systems start with a compressed air supply system consisting of a compressor, tank, dryer and pressure reducing valve assembly. Main air, typically 25 psi (pounds per square inch) pressure, is used to operate thermostats, actuators, relays and other pneumatic devices. Pneumatic systems have some advantages over electric systems: Spring return (fail-safe) functionality is built in to most pneumatic devices. systems provide safe control for hazardous locations (no electricity, no spark) and cost less than explosion proof and Pneumatic intrinsically safe equipment. A pneumatic system has built-in backup capability for power outage situations (until compressed air tank runs down). Pneumatic actuators are powerful and cost effective, especially for spring-return control of large buttery valves (for example). Pneumatic systems are reliable, powerful, and long lasting when properly installed and maintained.
PNEUMATIC SENSORS
BIMETAL CONTACT POINT FOR THROTTING RANGE ADJUSTMENT
15
M
SETPOINT SCREW
FLAPPER NOZZLE
BRANCH
Control devices consume air to maintain branch pressure and provide modulation. Typically rated in scim (standard cubic inches per minute), pneumatic devices bleed off system pressure, reducing storage tank pressure. The compressor cycles to maintain tank pressure. Temperature sensors, for example, consist of a bimetal element linked to a apper. Changes in temperature move the apper to open/close the nozzle. The nozzle (in this 1-pipe example) can pass more air than the restrictor, thus controlling (modulating) the branch air and ultimately the device at the end of the branch line.
PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS
DAMPER
ROLLING DIAPHRAGM AIRFLOW PISTON SPRING
BRANCH LINE
F1 F2
PUSH ROD
DAMPER ACTUATOR
BRANCH LINE
FLOW F3
n a spring return actuator, branch air pressure force opposes spring force. Increasing branch pressure compresses the spring, and vice-versa. I A exible diaphragm separates the air chamber and spring chamber. Linear motion drives a pushrod, connected to damper linkage or valve stem, to position the damper or valve. Spring range and branch air pressure determine the balance of forces, and thus the end device position. Spring ranges make sequencing valves or actuators simple; controlling a hot water valve and a cooling valve with one branch signal is common and very effective.
912
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
We Stock a Wide Variety to Meet Your Energy Management Requirements.
DTK-120SRD | p. 965
E50 Series | p. 927

TM
OVR DIN Series | p. 968
ENG Accessories | p. 919
H Series | p. 930
CS1150A | p. 939

MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Current Operated Switches RIBXG, RIBXK, RIBXK420 Series Current-Operated Switches & Transducers . . . . CS1A, CS1150A-LED, SCS1.5A, SCS1150A-LED Current-Operated Switches . . . A/ACS, A/ASCS, A/CS, A/SCS, A/CR Series ACI Current-Operated Switches. . . . A/MCS, A/MSCS, A/MCS-A, A/MSCS-A ACI Mini Current-Operated Switches . . . . RIBX Series Functional Devices Current Switch and Relay .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current, Voltage and Power Monitoring Transducers EnGenius - Patent Pending Intelligent Power Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENG-485, PT-NTL-10 Communication Modules for EnGenius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EnGenius Accessories Intelligent Power Monitor Accessories .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . PQube Series PQube Power Quality Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PQube Ethernet Modules Ethernet and Combined CT/Ethernet Modules. . . . . . . . PQube TH Series Temperature/Humidity Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PQube DC Voltage Monitors DC Voltage and Energy Monitors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E50 Series E50 Series Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-Series Class 500 Submeters Advanced KWH/DEMAND Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . U3889, 209PF Voltage Disconnect Switch Block, Ct Shorting Switches . . . . . . . . . . 4CTV, 4CMA Kele AC Current Transducer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CX, SCX Series (Current) AC Current Transducer with Current Output . . . . . . . . . . CX, SCX Series (Voltage) AC Current Transducers with Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . A/CT, A/SCT Series Current Transducers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RIBX-V Series Current Transducer and Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sentry 200-A Series High AC Current Transducers With Current Output . . . . . . . . . 258, 269 Three-Phase Voltage Monitors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201A MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250A MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Series MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Series MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 MotorSaver Three-Phase Voltage Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potential and Current Transformers PQube XCT CT Modules Current Transformer Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PQube SCN Series High Accuracy Split Core Current Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PQube DC Sensors DC Hall Effect Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCT Series Current Transformers With Voltage Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCT-1800 Series Rope CT AC Current Sensor.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500T, 501T Split-Core Current Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600T, 601T Split-Core Current Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RL Series Solid-Core Current Transformers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941 939 942 944 946
EnGenius | p. 913
SCX Series | p. 950
913 918 919 920 921 924 924 927 930 934 948 950 951 952 953 955 956 957 958 959 960 961
921 922 924 932 933 935 936 937
A/CR-12DC-12A | p. 942
Power Monitoring & Protection WNC SERIES WattNode AC Power Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925 UCT Series Solid Core Current Transformers with Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938 Protection DTK-120HW Surge Protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTK-MRJ11 Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTK-2LVLP Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTK-120SR, DTK-2MHLP Power/Data Surge Protector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTK-120SRD, DTK-TSS4D 54kA Series Connected Surge Protector with Dry Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRS, PC642C Series Data Line Surge Protector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FAS-TEL, HSP-121BT1RU Power & Data Line Surge Protector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OVR DIN Series DIN Rail Mount Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392-SVSR2 Lightning Arrester. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V130LA1, V39ZA1, V47ZA1, 1.5KE56CA Metal Oxide Varistor, Transzorb .. . . . . . .
962 962 962 963 965 966 967 968 969 970
kele.com
NEW!

INTELLIGENT POWER MONITOR ENGENIUS TM - PATENT PENDING
The EnGenius is a two processor based power monitoring device that monitors and records numerous power system parameters. The EnGenius continuously measures voltage and current to calculate and display over 57 values. 120 to 600V can be monitored without the need of potential transformers. 601 to 32000 V can be monitored with the use of potential transformers. All scaling calculations are handled by the meter.
The Engenius comes standard in a NEMA 4 rated enclosure ready to be mounted. A data port is provided on the front interface for easy setup and trend retrieval via EnGenius desktop software. Built for the future, the EnGenius allows for feature upgrades through the data port.
EnGenius Patent Pending
NEMA 4 enclosure standard KWH Accuracy class 0.5% ANSI C12.20 For meter alone with unmatched CT's OR for Meter-CT set with factory calibrated matched CT's Data port for setup and trend retrieval Measure voltages up to 32000 VAC (*voltages over 600VAC require the use of a potential transformer, not included) Supports 0.333V safe CTs and 5 AMP CTs (must use optional 5 AMP adapter board) Supports 1V and 2 V CT's (must use ENG-2VT/1V-ADPTR) BACnet MSTP, Lonworks, N2 and Modbus RTU available Password protected conguration Powered by separate 24 VAC supply On board data logging Auto conguration Upgradable rmware through data port Bidirectional power measurement CSI approved
PARAMETERS
Parameters that can assigned to 4-20 mA output: Total Positive KW Total Bi-directional KW (12 mA = 0 KW) Total Sliding Window KW (user congured, 5 to 60 min.) Peak Sliding Window KW Total KVA Total PF Average System Volts Average System Amps Parameters that can be assigned to Digital Outputs: Positive KWH pulse Negative KWH pulse Low volts - alarm Unbalanced volts - alarm Low or unbalanced volts - alarm
16
Analog Output 1 Output Type 4-20 mA (loop powered) Accuracy 0.5% full scale Maximum Loop Supply Voltage 30 VDC Maximum Impedance 850 @ 24 VDC Digital Output 2 Outputs Type Optically isolated solid state FET switch Rated Voltage 28 VAC/40 VDC maximum Rated Current 00 mA maximum Operating Temperature -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C) Operating Humidity 0 to 95% (non-condensing) Enclosure NEMA 4, UL94 rated 5VA Dimensions 6.5 x 6.5 x 4 (16.5 x 16.5 x 10.1 cm) Weight 3.1 lb (1.4 kg) Approvals ETL, CE File #4004284 RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
Supply Voltage 24 VAC 10% 60Hz Supply Current 250 mA maximum Monitored Voltage Line to Line 120 to 600 VAC Line to Line with potential transformer 601 to 32000 VAC Monitored Current 5 to 6000A using current transformers System Type 2-Wire Single Phase 3-Wire Single Phase 4-Wire Wye 3-Wire Delta 4-Wire Delta Communication Data Port Serial interface to EnGenius Desktop Software OPTIONAL Communications (not eld installable) BACnet MS/TP Lonworks Modbus RTU N2
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
913

WIRING - .333 V CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, 3-PHASE POWER SYSTEMS
Route Through Le Conduit
24 VAC POWER SUPPLY
CONTACT 24 VOLT 2 POWER
NEW!
APPLY 24VAC POWER BEFORE MOVING JUMPER FROM OFF TO ON CR2032 BATTERY BATTERY JUMPER OFF ON FRONT PANEL NETWORK CARD CABLE RIBBON
Building Automaon Device
MA OUT CONTACT 1
Building Automaon De
ALARM OR PULSE OUTPUT ALARM OR PULSE OUTPUT + 4 20 MA -
NETWORK CARD (Oponal)
24 VDC POWER SUPPLY +
* READ ALL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS *
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Earth Ground for CT/Comm Cable Shields
X2
X1
X2
X1
X2
X1
L1
L2
L3
FUNCTIONAL EARTH Route Through Center Conduit
CTC
CTB
CTA
0.333V CT INPUTS
SYSTEM VOLTAGE INPUTS 120 600 VOLTS AC
Lug on conduit bonding plate Route Through Right Conduit
16
L1
H1 CTA 0.333V H1 CTB 0.333V H1 CTC 0.333V
Earth Safety Ground
L1
L2
L3
L O A D
L2
L3
(For 3-Wire Delta neutral not present)
914
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Route Through Le Conduit
24 VAC POWER SUPPLY

WIRING - 5 AMP CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, 3-PHASE POWER SYSTEMS

APPLY 24VAC POWER BEFORE MOVING JUMPER FROM OFF TO ON BATTERY JUMPER FRONT PANEL CR2032 BATTERY
OFF ON
CONTACT 24 VOLT 2 POWER
NETWORK CARD CABLE RIBBON
Building Automaon Device
MA OUT CONTACT 1
NETWORK CARD (Oponal)
24 VDC POWER SUPPLY +
Shown with oponal 5 AMP Adapter Board

*See addional CT INPUT diagrams below.
A B C
RA RB X2 X2 CTCX1 X1
* READ ALL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS *

5 AMP CT INPUTS X2 CTBX1 X2 CTAX1
X2 X1 X2 X1
N
RISK OF ELECTRIC RISK OF SHOCK ELECTRIC SHOCK
L1
L2
L3
Lug on conduit bonding plate
FUNCTIONAL RA EARTH
CTC
CTB
CTA
0.333V CT INPUTS
SYSTEM VOLTAGE INPUTS 120 600 VOLTS AC
Lug on conduit bonding plate Route Through Right Conduit
gh t
Route Through Center Conduit
H1
Earth Safety Ground
L1
2V/1V CT INPUTS CTA 5 AMP CTC CTB CTA X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1 H1

CTB 5 AMP
ENG-2V/1V-ADPTR
INSTALL JUMPERS FOR 2V CTS
+
HDR4
L O A D
L2
H1
L3
*Use 2v CT
CTC 5 AMP
L O A D
2V CT INPUTS
Earth Safety Ground
(For 3-Wire Delta neutral not present)
1V CT INPUTS
16
ENG-2V/1V-ADPTR
2V/1V CT INPUTS CTC CTB CTA X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1
2V/1V CT INPUTS CTC CTB CTA X2 X1 X2 X1 X2 X1
*Use 1v CT
*Use 2v CT
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
ENG-2V/1V-ADPTR
HDR4
HDR4
915

Parameters Available Via Display/Network* Total KW* Total Sliding Window KW (period programmable 5-60 minutes) Total KVAR Total KVA* Phase A KW* Phase B KW* Phase C KW* Phase A KVAR* Phase B KVAR* Phase C KVAR* Phase A KVA Phase B KVA Phase C KVA Total PF* Phase A PF* Phase B PF* Phase C PF* Average L-N Volts Average L-L Volts L1-L2 Volts** L2-L3 Volts** L3-L1 Volts** L1-N Volts** L2-N Volts** L3-N Volts** Average Amps Phase A Amps* Phase B Amps* Phase C Amps* Total Positive KWH* Total Negative KWH Total Absolute KWH (Sum of positive and negative ) Total Net KWH (Positive minus negative) Phase A Positive KWH Phase B Positive KWH Phase C Positive KWH Phase A Negative KWH Phase B Negative KWH Phase C Negative KWH Total Positive KVARH Total Negative KVARH Total Absolute KVARH Total Net KVARH Phase A Positive KVARH Phase B Positive KVARH Phase C Positive KVARH Phase A Negative KVARH Phase B Negative KVARH Phase C Negative KVARH Timestamp (When energy counters were last cleared) Peak Sliding Window KW (since last cleared)* Timestamp (when Peak Sliding Window occured) Timestamp (when Peak Sliding Window KW was last cleared)
*ONLY Values with asterisk are available for LONWORKS ** For Delta System For WYE System Phase A = L1-L2 Phase A = L1-N Phase B = L2-L3 Phase B = L2-N Phase C = L3-L1 Phase C = L3-N
COMMUNICATION CARDS
ENG-485
NEW!
TO ENGENIUS MAIN BOARD IN1 IN2 GND
MODULE STATUS
ENG-485
RIBBON CABLE
(BACnet, Modbus, N2)
RS-485 Network
PT-NTL-10
RIBBON CABLE
16
LonWorks Network
916
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
GND
A(+) B (-) LONWORKS FT-10 NWK
TX RX
RS-485 NETWORK TO ENGENIUS MAIN BOARD
March 2014
NEW!
ENG
ENG-2V/1V-ADPTR ENG-485 ENG-5AMPBRD ENG-CABLE ENG-SOFTWARE PT-NTL-10 500T, 501T 600T, 601T RCT-1800 Series SCT Series UCT Series

EnGenius Intelligent Power Monitor 9000 .333V input 9500 5 Amp input BACnet Communication Board B L M N LonWorks Communication Board Modbus Communication Board N2 Communication Board D Display T Trend Data Logging
Example: ENG-9000-B-D = EnGenius .333V input with BACnet and display. ENG-9000-B-D-T = Additional feature of trend data logging. Note: CTs are ordered separately and not included in the above part numbers.
ACCESSORIES PAGE 2V or 1V input adapter board for ENG-9000 919 BACnet, Modbus, N2 Communication Board 918 5 Amp Input adapter board for ENG-9000 919 Data Cable for EnGenius 919 Desktop Software for EnGenius 919 LonWorks communications module 918
16
RELATED PRODUCTS Split-Core Current Transformer, 5A Secondary Split-Core Current Transformer, 5A Secondary Rogowski Coil Flexible Current Sensor, 0.333V Secondary Split-Core Current Transformer, 0.333V Secondary Solid-Core Current Transformer, 0.333V Secondary
PAGE 935 935 933 932 938
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
917

COMMUNICATION MODULES FOR ENGENIUS ENG-485, PT-NTL-10
DESCRIPTION
The ENG-485 and PT-NTL-10 are communication modules for EnGenius Intelligent Power Monitor. They read data from the EnGenius main processor, format the data, and transmit it to a network. They allow all of the power system parameters measured by the EnGenius to be monitored over a single pair of wires. The ENG-485 contains BACNET, Modbus and N2 communication protocols. The chosen communication protocol is selected either through the front panel display/keypad or the desktop software. The ENG-485 features 2 contact-closure inputs for monitoing external equipment. Each input can be congured to read contact state (On/Off) or as a Pulse Counter to count pulses from ow meters or other power meters. In the Pulse Counter mode, a Clear command is available to reset the pulse count when desired. The PT-NTL-10 is a a dedicated Lonworks communication module. This module does not have the 2 contact-closure inputs.
NEW!
ENG-485
FEATURES
ENG-485 contains BACnet, Modbus & N2 communication protocols on one board. The chosen one is selected either through the the front panel display/keypad or through the optional Desktop Software. 2 Contact-closure inputs PT-NTL-10 is a dedicated Lonworks module. This protocol has a subset of values. See data sheet for details.
WIRING ENG-485
Optional External Status or Pulse Count contacts 2 Ribbon Cable Plugs Into EnGenius Main Board (Disconnect 24 VAC power before plugging or unplugging)
PT-NTL-10
Ribbon Cable
PT-NTL-10
Service Button Service LED
Module Status LED Receive Data, Transmit Data Statuts LEDs RX TX A(+) B() GND
1
IN1 IN2 GND
RS-485 Twisted Pair A Conductor RS-485 Twisted Pair B Conductor RS-485 Reference Conductor (if used)
Mounting Holes ENG-485
FTT-10 CONTROL MODULE

FT-10 NWK Not Polarity Sensitive
RS-485 Communications Terminals RS-485 twisted pair is polarity sensitive. If unable to communicate, try reversing the A and B conductors.
Status LED
16
SPECIFICATIONS
To LonWorks FT-10 Network
Communication PT-NTL-10 LonWorks FTT-10 transceiver ENG-485 BACNet, Modbus, N2 Connections Pluggable screw terminals Operating Temperature PT-NTL-10 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) ENG-485 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0-95% RH non-condensing Dimensions PT-NTL-10 4.5"H x 2.6"W x 1.7"D (11.4 x 6.6 x 4.3 cm) ENG-485 4.5"H x 2.6"W x 0.6"D (11.4 x 6.6 x 1.5cm)
Weight PT-NTL-10 ENG-485 Approvals PT-NTL-10 Warranty
0.7 lb (0.32kg) 0.1 lb (0.05 kg) UL listed, File #E161500 Certied to LonMark Interoperability Guidelines v 3.1 18 months
MODEL ENG-485 PT-NTL-10 DESCRIPTION BACnet, Modbus, N2 Communication Board LonWorks communications module
918
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MODEL ENG-CABLE ENG-SOFTWARE ENG-5AMPBRD ENG-2V/1V-ADPTR

INTELLIGENT POWER MONITOR ACCESSORIES ENGENIUS ACCESSORIES
EnGenius Accessories help you get the most out of the EnGenius power monitor. With these and future available accessories, the EnGenius can be kept up to date. Available accessories are the software, data cable, 5 Amp CT input adapter board and a safe current transformer 2V/1V input adapter board. The 2V/1V adapter board is congurable to the application you need.
ENG-SOFTWARE
ENG-CABLE - LED lights indicate when the Desktop Software is being transmitted to the EnGenius intelligent power monitor and when data is being downloaded into the computer. ENG-SOFTWARE - The Desktop Software is conveniently loaded on this ash drive. This software will enable you to easily and conveniently interact with EnGenius intelligent power monitor via the data cable. You can quickly program one power monitor, save to your desktop/laptop and then program several more power monitors in a timely fashion. You will also be able to download the information from the EnGenius and analyze the data. ENG-2V/1V-ADPTR - Use this adapter board to retrot an EnGenius to accept safe CTs with either 2V or 1V secondary output. The same board can be used for either application. Just change the DIP switches to the conguration you need. ENG-5AMPBD - Use this adapter board to retrot an EnGenius to accept current transformers with 5A secondary output.
ENG-CABLE
ENG-2V/1V-ADPTR
ENG-5AMPBRD
16
Weight 0.55 lb (0.25 kg) Cable Flash Drive 0.01 lb (0.004 kg) 5AMP and 2V/1V Adapter boards 0.35 lb (0.16 kg) Warranty 1 year
Dimensions Cable 36" (0.9m) length Flash Drive 2.25" x 0.625" (5.72 x 1.59 cm) 5AMP and 2V/1V Adapter boards 2" x 3.5" (5.08 x 8.89cm)
DESCRIPTION Data Cable for EnGenius Desktop Software for EnGenius 5 Amp Input adapter board for ENG-9000 2V or 1V input adapter board for ENG-9000
AH04
RELATED PRODUCTS Fuse pack, 3 Phase
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
919

POWER QUALITY METERS PQUBE SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PQube is a high-precision power quality and energy monitor. This will record the details of every power disturbance on a removable SD card. The PQube AC power monitor can handle up to 690V, 50/60/400Hz three-phase systems. It will recored voltage dips, swells and interruptions and will give you waveforms and RMS graphs. No software is required, the programming is embedded. The PQube system hsa been designed to be plug and play so modules are easily added. DIN rail mount or optional panel mount bracket.
NEW!
PS1 PQube
FEATURES
Three-phase and single phase monitoring up to 690V, 50/60/400Hz Auto power conguration Voltge dips, swells, and interruptions - waveforms and RMS graphs - recorded on removable SD card Email alerts and Excel reports available with optional ethernet module 1-microsecond high-frequencey events Power from 24VAC, 24VDC~48VDC Optional power supply modules for 100V~240V supply All modules are DIN rail mount
DIMENSIONS
in. (mm)
3.01 (76.5) 1.13 (28.6) 2.82 (71.7)
1.76 (44.8)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Monitored Voltage System Type 24 VAC 60/60 Hz 5 VA, 24-48 VDC 100 to 690V Three-phase (Wye or Delta), single phase Frequency Range 40 to 70 Hz and 320 to 560 Hz Measurement Channels L-N, L-L, N-E Monitored Current Up to 6000 A with input module Relay Output 30 VAC/VDC, 300 mA max Communication Connection Mini-B USB socket Data Storage 4 GB Scan Disk card (included) Operating Temperature -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C) Operating Humidity up to 95% RH Mounting DIN rail Weight 0.73 lbs (0.331 kg) Approvals CE, RoHS, UL le#E220936 Warranty 1 year
N 15 L3 13 L2 11 L1 9
16
Selector Button 21 22 23 24 29 30 31 32 Relay Out Analog In 22 & 30
3.54 (89.9)
CAUTION: MUST HAVE EARTH GROUND TO WORK PROPERLY
Joystick Digital In Earth
23 & 31
Power In 24VAC 24-48VDC
MODEL PQube-02-0000 PQube-02-0100 PS1-100~240-00 ENCL-EXT1074-01 PQUBE BATTERY DESCRIPTION PQube power quality meter-4 AC voltage inputs, 2 analog inputs, 1 digital input, 1 relay output PQube power quality meter-4 AC voltage inputs, 2 analog inputs, 1 digital input, 4 relay outputs Power supply PQube from 100V~240V, 50/60 Hz Enclosure for PQube Assembly, 10 x 7.2 x 4.3", IP65 rated Replacement battery, lithium polymer; 0.6 AMP-hour
920
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Accuracy 1% (plus uncertainty of external CT's)
Adds current waveforms to PQube events Enables power consumption and energy monitoring Crest factor typically 3.5 times rated input

CURRENT TRANSFORMER INTERFACE MODULES PQUBE XCT, CT, ETHERNET MODULES
The XCT current transformer modules connects your existing CT's to your PQube. The external CT input ratio range is 1:1 to 1000:1. The XCT4 Series connect directly to current transformer secondary wires and has 4 channels of current monitoring. The XCT5 Series connects directly to voltage output current transformer wires and has 5 channels of current monitoring. The CT4 is a current sensing module that has 20Amp input. Just feed the wires through the opening.
XCT4
SPECIFICATIONS
2.8"W x 3.5"H x 3.2"L (7.1 x 8.9 x 8.1 cm) 0.5 lbs (0.22 kg)
XCT5
MODEL XCT4-1A-00 XCT4-5A-00 XCT5-0.333V-00 XCT5-1V-00 XCT5-5V-00 XCT5-10V-00 CT4-20A-00 DESCRIPTION Interface module for CT's with 1 Amp output Interface module for CT's with 5 Amp output Interface module for CT's with 0.333V output Interface module for CT's with 1V output Interface module for CT's with 5V output Interface module for CT's with 10V output Current sensing module 20Amp input
DESCRIPTION
The ETH1 Ethernet module automatically sends you an email whenever a disturbance occurs, complete with picture and Excel compatible attachments. The CTE1 Modules combine the XCT5 current sensing and the ETH1 ethernet into a single package.
FEATURES
Built in web server
See status of the PQube and look at event and trend recordings Update rmware and reset remotely Free email account with each PQube Synchronize to UTC time standard DHCP/Fixed IP, POP, SMTP, FTP, Modbus/TCP
16
CTE1
SPECIFICATIONS
2.8"W x 3.5"H x 3.2"L (7.1 x 8.9 x 8.1 cm) 0.5 lbs (0.22 kg)
ETH1
MODEL ETH1-10T-00 CTE110T0.333V00 CTE1-10T-1V-00 CTE1-10T-5V-00 CTE1-10T-10V-00 DESCRIPTION Ethernet module with email account Combined ethernet & CT module for 0.333V CT's Combined ethernet & CT module for 1V CT's Combined ethernet & CT module for 5V CT's Combined ethernet & CT module for 10V CT's
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
921

HIGH ACCURACY SPLIT CORE CURRENT SENSORS PQUBE SCN SERIES
DESCRIPTION
These SCN Series of split core current sensors easily clamp around existing conductors. They range from 1A - 600A primary input/ 333mV output. They are for use with the XCT5 and CTE1 Series of current transformer interface modules.
FEATURES
Accuracy 0.2% Phase angle: 0.2 Crest factor 3.5 times nominal CT rating 8ft. leads, 18 AWG twisted pair 1 year warranty
NEW!
SCN Snaptop
DIMENSIONS
PSL Part Number
Dimensions - mm (inches)
A B 42 (1.65") 42 (1.65") 60 (2.37") 60 (2.37") 60 (2.37") 60 (2.37") 81 (3.17") 81 (3.17") 81 (3.17") 81 (3.17") 81 (3.17") C 29 (1.12") 29 (1.12") 29 (1.12") 29 (1.12") 29 (1.12") 29 (1.12") 35 (1.39") 35 (1.39") 35 (1.39") 35 (1.39") 35 (1.39") D 10 (0.4") 10 (0.4") 18 (0.7") 18 (0.7") 18 (0.7") 18 (0.7") 32 (1.25") 32 (1.25") 32 (1.25") 32 (1.25") 32 (1.25") E 10 (0.4") 10 (0.4") 18 (0.7") 18 (0.7") 18 (0.7") 18 (0.7") 32 (1.25") 32 (1.25") 32 (1.25") 32 (1.25") 32 (1.25") 61 (2.40") 61 (2.40") 78 (3.08") 78 (3.08") 78 (3.08") 78 (3.08") 83 (3.27") 83 (3.27") 83 (3.27") 83 (3.27") 83 (3.27")
SCN2-1A:333mV-0.4 SCN2-5A:333mV-0.4 SCN3-20A:333mV-0.7

D A
SCN3-50A:333mV-0.7 SCN3-100A:333mV-0.7
E B
SCN3-150A:333mV-0.7 SCN4-200A:333mV-1.25
16
SCN4-300A:333mV-1.25 SCN4-400A:333mV-1.25 SCN4-500A:333mV-1.25 SCN4-600A:333mV-1.25
MODEL DESCRIPTION SCN2-1A:333mV-0.4 0.2% accuracy;1A:333mV; 0.4"X0.4" SCN2-5A:333mV-0.4 0.2% accuracy;5A:333mV; 0.4"X0.4" SCN3-20A:333mV-0.7 0.2% accuracy;20A:333mV; 0.7"X0.7" SCN3-50A:333mV-0.7 0.2% accuracy;50A:333mV; 0.7"X0.7" SCN3-100A:333mV-0.7 0.2% accuracy;100A:333mV; 0.7"X0.7" SCN3-150A:333mV-0.7 0.2% accuracy;150A:333mV; 0.7"X0.7" MODEL SCN4-200A:333mV-1.25 SCN4-300A:333mV-1.25 SCN4-400A:333mV-1.25 SCN4-500A:333mV-1.25 SCN4-600A:333mV-1.25 DESCRIPTION 0.2% accuracy;200A:333mV; 1.25"X1.25" 0.2% accuracy;300A:333mV; 1.25"X1.25" 0.2% accuracy;400A:333mV; 1.25"X1.25" 0.2% accuracy;500A:333mV; 1.25"X1.25" 0.2% accuracy;600A:333mV; 1.25"X1.25"
922
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
PE L3 L2 L1
13 11 9 32

POWER QUALITY METERS PQUBE WIRING DIAGRAM
PE
L3 L2 L1
9
13
11
L3
L2
L1
32
PQUBE MONITORS COMPLETE VOLTAGE QUALITY
WITH CT4 CURRENT MODULE
PE PE L3 L2 L1
6 5 4 3 2 1
16
L3 L2
13 11 9
L1
6 5 4 3 2 1 13 11 9
32
WITH XCT5/CTE1 CURRENT MODULE, 3 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS PQUBE MEASURES CURRENT ON ALL PHASES
32
WITH XCT4 CURRENT MODULE, 3 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS PQUBE MEASURES CURRENT ON ALL PHASES
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
923

TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY PROBE PQUBE TH SERIES, DC VOLTAGE MONITORS, DC SENSORS
DESCRIPTION
The TH1 probe monitors ambient temperature and humidity. The PQube can now record temperature and humidity events with the addition of the probe. Every PQube accepts 2 electrically isolated probes. Use one for local conditions and the other on the optional 10 meter extension cable for monitoring remote conditions.
FEATURES
Temperature accuracy 0.5C Max temp -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) Humidity accuracy 4.5% RH (20-80% RH) maximum 7.5% 10-100% RH 1.42 x 0.6" (3.61 x 1.53cm) 0.4 lb (0.018 kg)
NEW!
TH Series
MODEL DESCRIPTION TH1-80C-00 TH1 temperature/humidity probe THC-2M-00 Extension cable for TH180C-00; 2 meter length (6ft. 6.74")
DESCRIPTION
Compact DC Voltage Attenuators connect to PQube's analog channels. This can be used to monitor high voltage DC power. ATT1 models measure 1 differential voltge or 2 voltages relative to earth. ATT2 model measured DC voltage and DC current (with Hall effect sensors).
ATT1
FEATURES
600VDC or 1200VDC (CAT IV 300VAC) Termnals are standard shrouded safety banana jacks Shielded cables ATT1 = 4 x 2 x 1.5" (10.2 x 5.1 x 3.8cm) 1.08 lb (0.49 kg) ATT2 = 5 x 2.6 x 1.2" (12.7 x 6.6 x 3.0cm) 3.40 lb (1.54 kg) ATT2
MODEL ATT1-0600V-00 ATT1-1200V-00 ATT2-0600V-00 ATT2-1200V-00 DESCRIPTION Voltage module 600VDC (CAT lV 300VAC) Voltage module 1200VDC (CAT lV 300VAC) Voltage/current module 600VDC (CAT lV 300VAC) Voltage/current module 1200VDC (CAT lV 300VAC)
16
DESCRIPTION
DC Hall Effect Sensors are for use with the ATT2 Voltage / Current Modules. They measure AC or DC current. 50A to 600A primary input to 4V output. They are powered fromt he DC output of the ATT2 module.
FEATURES
Measures AC or DC current
SCSDC-O-0050:4V CSDC-RCL0050:4V ORDERING INFORMATION

MODEL SCSDC-O-0050:4V SCSDC-O-0100:4V SCSDC-O-0200:4V SCSDC-O-0400:4V SCSDC-O-0600:4V DESCRIPTION DC current sensor, split-core, 50A:4V 0.83" dia. DC current sensor, split-core, 100A:4V 0.83" dia. DC current sensor, split-core, 200A:4V 0.83" dia. DC current sensor, split-core, 400A:4V 0.83" dia. DC current sensor, split-core, 600A:4V 0.83" dia. March 2014
MODEL CSDC-RCL0050:4V CSDC-RCL0100:4V CSDC-RCL0200:4V CSDC-RCL0400:4V CSDC-RCL0600:4V
DESCRIPTION DC current sensor,solid core, 50A:4V 0.81X0.41" DC current sensor,solid core, 100A:4V 0.81X0.41" DC current sensor,solid core, 200A:4V 0.81X0.41" DC current sensor,solid core, 400A:4V 0.81X0.41" DC current sensor,solid core, 600A:4V 0.81X0.41"
924
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!


WATTNODE AC POWER METER WNC SERIES
WNC Series of AC Power measurement meters are available in pulse output or will support several communication protocol outputs. True power, kWh reactive power, VARs, power factor, and indivitdual phase measurements. Diagnostic LEDs provide a per-phase indication of power (green ashing) and negative power (red ashing) to help troubleshoot connection problems such as swapped CT's or excessive live voltage. The meters use the safe Ct's producing 0.333 VAC at rated current. They have a small form factor for easy installation inside most electrical panels with pluggable screw terminals for easy wiring. Power Related Measurements - 50+ for BACnet and Modbus; 27+ for LonWorks. BACnet, Modbus, Lonworks or Pulse 1 to 3 Phase 120VAC to 600VAC 0.5% nominal accuracy (see manual for details) Euroblock style pluggable screw terminal blocks Line powered Uses safe current transformers; 0.333V output Bidirectional
WNC Series
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 120 to 600VAC CT Input 0.333V nominal, 3V maximum Operating Temperature -22F to 131F (-30C to 55C) Operating Humidity 5 to 90% RH up to 104F (40C) Dimensions 6.1" x 3.35" x 1.5" (15.5 x 8.5 x 3.8 cm) Weight 11oz. RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 5 Years Communication Protocol BACnet MS/TP (RS-485) Modbus RTU LonWorks Network Variables (SNVTs) Meets ARRA or BAA Yes Signal LEDs Diagnostic LEDs Provide per-phase indication of power (green ashing) and negative power (red ashing) on BACnet, Modbus and Pulse models only Approvals CE, UL & cUL File #312220 FCC Class B, EN 55022 Class B Additional Specications Assembled in the USA
WIRING
PC or BACnet Host
EIA-485
A, D0, RxD/TxD B+, D1, RxD+/TxD+ Common
MS/ TP
AB+ C X
WATTNODE BACNET
Com
WNC- 3Y-208-BN WNC- 3D-240-BN
Ground
N
WHITE BLACK
A CT
WHITE BLACK
Status Status Status
A B C
B CT C CT
Shorting Jumper
Source Faces 240 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC
Phase A Neutral Phase B
LOAD
Current Transformers
16
LINE
Single Phase Three-Wire, Mid-Point Neutral Wire
EIA-485
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 6.1 (15.5)
PC or BACnet Host
MS/ TP
AB+ C X
WATTNODE BACNET
Com
WNC- 3D-240-BN
Ground
N
WHITE BLACK
A CT
WHITE BLACK
A B C
B CT C CT
3.35 (8.5 )
0.386 (1.0) 5.375 (13.66)
Shorting Jumper
3.35 (8.5)
0.200
Source Faces
Phase A
LOAD
(0.5)
LINE
208-240 VAC
Phase B
Drawn to Scale 1.50 (3.8) High
Single Phase Two-Wire without Neutral
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
925

WATTNODE AC POWER METER WNC SERIES
WIRING
PC or BACnet Host
EIA-485
MS/ TP
AB+ C X
EIA-485
WATTNODE BACNET
MS/ TP
Com
WNC- 3Y-xxx-BN WNC- 3D-xxx-BN
Ground
N A B C
WHITE BLACK
A CT
WHITE BLACK WHITE BLACK
B CT C CT
Source Faces
WHITE BLACK
NEW!
PC or BACnet Host
AC X
WATTNODE BACNET
B+
Com
WNC- 3D-xxx-BN
Ground
WHITE BLACK
A CT
A B C
WHITE BLACK
B CT C CT
Phase A
Source Faces
Phase A
LOAD
LINE
LOAD
Phase B
LINE
Phase B
Phase C Neutral
Phase C
Three Phase Four-Wire Wye
Three Phase Three-Wire Delta without Neutral
MODEL WNC-3Y-208-BN WNC-3Y-400-BN WNC-3Y-480-BN WNC-3Y-600-BN WNC-3D-240-BN WNC-3D-400-BN WNC-3D-480-BN WNC-3D-240-MB WNC-3D-400-MB WNC-3D-480-MB WNC-3Y-400-MB WNC-3Y-208-MB WNC-3Y-480-MB WNC-3Y-600-MB WNC-3D-240-P WNC-3D-400-P WNC-3D-480-P WNC-3Y-208-P WNC-3Y-400-P WNC-3Y-480-P WNC-3Y-600-P WNC-3Y-208-FT10 WNC-3Y-400-FT10 WNC-3Y-480-FT10 WNC-3Y-600-FT10 WNC-3D-240-FT10 WNC-3D-400-FT10 WNC-3D-480-FT10 DESCRIPTION 3 Phase 4 Wire 120V/208V BACnet 3 Phase 4 Wire 230V/400V BACnet 3 Phase 4Wire 277V/480V BACnet 3 Phase 4 Wire 347V/600V BACnet 3 Phase 3 Wire 120V/208V BACnet 3 Phase 3 Wire 230V/400V BACnet 3 Phase 3Wire 277V/480V BACnet 3 Phase 3 Wire 120V/208V Modbus 3 Phase 3 Wire 230V/400V Modbus 3 Phase 3Wire 277V/480V Modbus 3 Phase 4 Wire 230V/400V Modbus 3 Phase 4 Wire 120V/208V Modbus 3 Phase 4Wire 277V/480V Modbus 3 Phase 4 Wire 347V/600V Modbus 3 Phase 3 Wire 120V/208V Pulse 3 Phase 3 Wire 230V/400V Pulse 3 Phase 3Wire 277V/480V Pulse 3 Phase 4 Wire 120V/208V Pulse 3 Phase 4 Wire 230V/400V Pulse 3 Phase 4Wire 277V/480V Pulse 3 Phase 4 Wire 347V/600V Modbus 3 Phase 4 Wire 120V/208V LonWorks 3 Phase 4 Wire 230V/400V LonWorks 3 Phase 4Wire 277V/480V LonWorks 3 Phase 4 Wire 347V/600V LonWorks 3 Phase 3 Wire 120V/208V LonWorks 3 Phase 3 Wire 230V/400V LonWorks 3 Phase 3Wire 277V/480V LonWorks
16
926
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage UL CE

E50 SERIES POWER METER E50 SERIES
The E50 Series power meter provides a solution for measuring energy data with a single device. Inputs include Control Power, CT, and 3-phase voltage. The E50 supports multiple output options, including solid state relay contacts, BACnet, Modbus RTU (with or without data logging), and pulse. The LCD screen on the faceplate allows instant output viewing. The meter is housed in a plastic enclosure suitable for installation on T35 DIN rail according to EN50022. The E50 can be mounted with any orientation over the entire ambient temperature range, either on a DIN rail or in a panel. The meter is not sensitive to CT orientation to reduce installation errors.
TM
E50
Monitors 1, 2, or 3 phase services Monitors services up to 600 VAC directly and 32,000 VAC with use of a potential transformer Accepts .333 VAC or 1V Current Transformer's (sold separately) DIN mounting for easy installation ANSI 12.20 0.5% accuracy BACnet, Modbus RTU or pulse output 90-600 VAC for application versatility Bright backlit LCD with easy visibility Pulse and phase loss alarms standard User-enabled password protection Approved for California Solar applications
DIMENSIONS
DIN Mount Option
4.2 (10.7) +
Screw Mount Option

2.4 (6.1) 1.2 (3.1) 0.3 (0.8) +
3.6 (9.1)
3.9 (9.9) 4.3 (10.9)
0.2 (0.4)
+ 0.4 (1.0)
16
E50C2/E51C2 90 VAC (L-N) to 600 VAC (L-L), 50/60Hz 90 VAC (L-N) to 300 VAC (L-L), 50/60Hz, UL 90 VAC (L-N) to 600 VAC (L-L), 50/60Hz Line to Line: 90 to 600 VAC E50C3/E51C3 E50H3 Accuracy RS-485 2-wire, Modbus RTU Full Data Set, RS-485 2-wire Modbus RTU Full Data Set, data logging, RS-485 2-wire BACnet MS/TP Full Data Set, data logging Real power and energy 0.5% (ANSI C12.20, IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S)
Monitored Voltage Line to Line with Potential Transformer 601 to 32000 VAC Monitored Current 5 to 32,000 Amps Current Transformer Input 0 to 0.333V to 0 to 1 V Input Signal 2 (E50H5 only) Pulse Solid-State or mechanical contacts (current less than 1 mA) Minimum Pulse Width 20 msec Outputs E50B1 Reactive energy pulse 30 VAC/DC, E50C1 RS-485 2-wire Modbus RTU Basic Data Set
Operating Temperature Meter: -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C) Display: 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Operating Humidity < 95% RH non-condensing Mounting DIN Rail or 3-point screw mount Dimensions 2.3" x 4.2" x 3.6" (5.9 cm x 10.7 cm 9.1 cm) Weight 0.62 lb (0.28 kg) Approvals CE, UL508, File #E339785, RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 5 years
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
927

WIRING
1-Phase Line-to-Neutral 2 - Wire System 1 CT
Customer Supplied (1/2 Amp Fuse)
NEW!
1-Phase Line-to-Line-Wire System 1 CT
1-Phase Direct Voltage Connection 2 CT
3-Phase 3-Wire 3 CT no PT
3-Phase 4-Wire Wye Direct Voltage Input Connection 3 CT

3-Phase 4-Wire Wye Connection 3 CT 3 PT

16
Direct Connect Control Power (Phase to Phase)
Direct Connect Control Power (Phase to Neutral)
Direct Connect Control Power (DC Control Power)
Control Power Transformer (CPT) Connection
928
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
BACNET/MODBUS DATA OUTPUTS
Basic Data Set (BDS): Power (kW) Energy (kWh) MODEL E51C2 E51C3 E50B1 E50C1 E50C2 E50C3 E50H5 AE010 AE011 AH02 AH03 AH04

Full Data Set (FDS) includes BDS plus: Congurable for CT & PT ratios, system type, and passwords Diagnostic alerts Current: 3-phase average Volts: 3-phase average Current: by phase Volts: by phase Line-Line and Line-Neutral Power: Real, Reactive, and Apparent 3-phase total and per phase Power Factor: 3-phase average and per phase Frequency Power Demand: Most Recent and Peak Demand Conguration: Fixed, Rolling Block, and External Sync (Modbus only) Data Logging (includes all FDS outputs, plus): Real Time Clock: user congurable 10 user congurable log buffers: each buffer holds 5760 16-bit entries
(User congures which 10 data points are stored in these buffers) User congurable logging interval(When congured for a 15 minute interval, each buffer holds 60 days of data) Continuous and Single Shot logging modes: user selectable Auto write pause: read logs without disabling the meter's data logging mode
BACNET DATA LOGGING (includes all FDS outputs, plus): Real Time Clock: uses BACnet Time Synchronization services 3 BACnet log events: each buffer holds 5760 32-bit entries (User congures which 3 data points are stored in these buffers) User congurable logging interval, (When congured for a 15 minute interval, each buffer holds 60 days of data) Continuous and single shot logging modes: user selectable Auto write pause: read logs without disabling the meter's data logging mode
16
DESCRIPTION Power meter bi-dIrectional, Modbus, pulse output Power meter bi-dIrectional, Modbus, pulse output , data logging Pulse output only Modbus output, basic data set Modbus output, full data set Modbus output, full data set, data logging Power meter FDS BACnet, 2 pulse inputs,data logging
ACCESSORIES Nema 4 enclosure for AE Series meters Lock and key for AE010 enclosure Fuse pack, 1 Phase Fuse pack, 2 Phase Fuse pack, 3 Phase
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
929

ADVANCED KWH/DEMAND METER H-SERIES CLASS 500 SUBMETERS
DESCRIPTION
The H-Series Class 500 Submeters come with enclosure, display, and does include split core current sensors. Available outputs include pulse, LonWorks, BACnet, BACnet IP, Modbus RTU, or Modbus TCP. There are 38 different points of information available on the communicating models. The dual protocol output allows operation for both RS-485 and Ethernet communication simultaneously. In addition, they will accept up to two pulse inputs from other meters (water, gas, sewer, etc.) and communicate this information as two more data points. Accuracy meets or exceeds +/- 0.5%.
NEW!
H Series Class 500 Operating Temperature NEMA 4 (Outdoor) Housing: -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C) NEMA 12 (Indoor) Housing: -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C) 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Operating Humidity Housing Type Models with R NEMA 4 Models without R NEMA 12 Dimensions-Meter 7.5"H x 7"W x 3.75"D (19.1 x 17.8 x 8.3 cm) Dimensions-Current Sensors Interior Window 100A and 200A = 7/8" x 1-1/2" 400A = 1-1/2" x 2-3/4" 800A and 1600A = 3-1/4" x 4-1/2" 3200A = 5-7/16" x 7-7/8" Approvals UL le#E249361 Battery Description Non-rechargeable cell used for memory retention Manufacturer Eagle-picher Mfg Part No. LTC-3PN Working Voltage 3.5 Vdc Current Capacity 350 mAHr Electrolyte Lithium thionyl nitrate Warranty 1 year
FEATURES
Direct-read 8-digit LCD display of cumulative kWh Includes 0-2 volt output split-core current sensors Remote mounting of current sensors up to 500 feet from meter (using 22 Awg wire) Current sensor installation diagnostic indicator Available in standard JIC Industrial-grade steel enclosure UL Listed; meets or exceeds ANSI C12 national accuracy standards Optional power failure contact for alarming Dual protocol output
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Input Communication Input Voltage Conguration CT Input Available CT's Overload Rating Voltage Overload Current Sensor Overload Accuracy Range (4 Wire Wye) (4 Wire Wye) (3 Wire Delta) (3 Wire Delta) Up to 600 VAC RMS available, 50/60Hz Modbus RTU or TCP/IP BACnet IP or MS/TP LonWorks 3-wire (Delta) or 4-wire (WYE) 0-2 VDC current sensors included Sensors - Up to 3200 Amp RMS AC available +25% continuously; +100% for 20 cycles 100% for 1 minute without damaging meter Certied to ANSI C12.20 115/208 VAC: 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 Amp 277/480 VAC: 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 Amp 220/240 VAC: 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 Amp 480 VAC: 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 Amp
16
930
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
LINE VOLTAGE A B C N B A CURRENT SENSORS B C W B W B W LOAD NOTES: LINE VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS: 14-22 AWG SOURCE 1/10A, 600 VAC INLINE FUSE PER CONDUCTOR. LITTLEFUSE PART NUMBER KLDR 100.

ADVANCED KWH/DEMAND METER H-SERIES CLASS 500 SUBMETERS
MAINS LINE VOLTAGE AND CURRENT SENSOR WIRING DIAGRAMS (CURRENT SENSORS INCLUDED)
LINE VOLTAGE
A B C CURRENT SENSORS B C W B W B W
A B C N LOAD
NOTES: LINE VOLTAGE CONNECTIONS: 14-22 AWG SENSOR CONNECTIONS: B=BLACK LEAD, W=WHITE LEAD 1/10A, 600 VAC INLINE FUSE PER CONDUCTOR. LITTLEFUSE PART NUMBER KLDR 100.
A
B
C SOURCE
SENSOR CONNECTIONS: B=BLACK LEAD, W=WHITE LEAD
NEUTRAL NOT USED IN DELTA SYSTEM. REMOVE NEUTRAL TERMINAL BLOCK SCREW FOR DELTA SYSTEMS. M32788
NEUTRAL NOT USED IN DELTA SYSTEM. REMOVE NEUTRAL TERMINAL BLOCK SCREW FOR DELTA SYSTEMS. M32797
3-phase, 4-wire installation diagram.
3-phase, 3-wire installation diagram.
MODEL H50DESCRIPTION H Series Class 500 Submeter 208 480 600 208V meter 480V meter 600V meter 100 100A input 200 200A input 400 400A input 6 800 800A input 1600 1600A input 3200 3200A input J Indoor use only R Outdoor use (NEMA 4x) N Green Net Option 02KIT 03KIT 05KIT 06KIT 07KIT H50480 100 -orH50480 100 J N J 03KIT Modbus RTU and Ethernet EZ-7 BACnet MS/TP and Ethernet BACnet IP and RS-485 EZ-7 Modbus RCP/IP and Modbus RTU Lonworks and Ethernet EZ-7
16
62-030405
Example: 480V, 100A meter, BACnet MS/TP and Ethernet 03KIT Example: 480V, 100A Green Net meter, BACnet MS/TP and Ethernet EZ-7
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
931

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT SCT SERIES
DESCRIPTION The SCT Series of current transformers provides a lowvoltage (0-0.333 V) output proportional to line current and is used in conjunction with the PowerTrak PT-9300 and the EnGenius to monitor electrical power systems. Often referred to as "Safe CTs," the mV output of these current transformers eliminates the need for shorting switches, and their split-core design makes them easy to install. FEATURES Millivolt output (0-0.333V) Split-core design Low-cost No need for shorting switches
NEW!
SCT-0400 SCT-0750 SCT-2000 SCT-1250
SPECIFICATIONS
5-3000A (see Ordering Information) 0-0.333 VAC, 0% to 100% rated current 50-400 Hz 600V 1%, (10% to 130% rated current) 8' (2.44m) twisted pair leads, 22 AWG 1 lb (0.45 kg) maximum UL-recognized component, File #E96927 CE Yes 3 years
MODEL SCT-0400-000 SCT-0400-005 SCT-0400-010 SCT-0400-015 SCT-0400-020 SCT-0400-025 SCT-0400-030 SCT-0400-040 SCT-0400-050 SCT-0400-060 SCT-0400-075 SCT-0750-000 SCT-0750-005 SCT-0750-010 SCT-0750-020 SCT-0750-030 SCT-0750-050 SCT-0750-070 SCT-0750-0100 SCT-0750-0150 SCT-0750-0200 SCT-1250-000 SCT-1250-050 SCT-1250-100 SCT-1250-150 SCT-1250-200 SCT-1250-250 SCT-1250-300 SCT-1250-400 SCT-1250-600 SCT-2000-000 SCT-2000-100 SCT-2000-200 SCT-2000-400 SCT-2000-600 SCT-2000-800 SCT-2000-1000 SCT-2000-1200 SCT-2000-1500 SCT-3000-000 SCT-3000-400 SCT-3000-600 SCT-3000-800 SCT-3000-1000 SCT-3000-1200 SCT-3000-1500 SCT-3000-2000 SCT-3000-3000 DESCRIPTION Split-core current transformer, 0.333V no burden resistor Split-core current transformer, 5A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 10A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 15A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 20A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 25A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 30A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 40A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 50A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 60A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 75A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, no burden resistor Split-core current transformer, 5A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 10A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 20A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 30A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 50A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 70A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 100A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 150A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 200A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, no burden resistor Split-core current transformer, 50A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 100A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 150A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 200A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 250A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 300A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 400A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 600A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, no burden resistor Split-core current transformer, 100A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 200A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 400A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 600A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 800A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 1000A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 1200A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 1500A:0.333V Split core current transformer, no burden resistor Split-core current transformer, 400A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 600A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 800A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 1000A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 1200A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 1500A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 2000A:0.333V Split-core current transformer, 3000A:0.333V
Primary Current Secondary Voltage Frequency Insulation Class Accuracy Lead Wires Weight Approvals RoHS Statement Warranty
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
16
A D B E C
LOAD SOURCE
Window
A B C D E
SCT-0400 1.00 (1.54) 1.55 (3.9) 1.05 (2.7) 0.40 (1.0) 1.09 (2.8)
SCT-0750 2.00 (5.1) 2.10 (5.3) 0.61 (1.5) 0.75 (1.9) 0.75 (1.9)
DIMENSIONS MODEL SCT-1250 3.25 (8.25) 3.35 (8.51) 1.00 (2.54) 1.25 (3.18) 1.25 (3.18)
SCT-2000 4.75 (12.07) 5.00 (12.70) 1.20 (3.05) 2.00 (5.08) 2.00 (5.08)
SCT-3000 5.75 (14.6) 7.50 (19.1) 1.20 (3) 3.00 (7.6) 5.00 (12.7)
ENG-9000
RELATED PRODUCTS Powertrak, 0.333 V input
PAGE 913
932
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION

ROPECT AC CURRENT SENSOR RCT-1800 SERIES
Magnelab s innovative RopeCT is based on the Rogowski principle of mutual inductance, which allows accurate measurement of AC current in a exible medium. The resulting rope-like CT is highly accurate throughout its range and is easy to install by snaking it around parallel conductors or buswork. The RopeCT is both the ultimate in convenience and, often, the only solution to tough installation situations.
FEATURES
Available in 250A to 5000A ratings Phase angle error < 0.5 degrees measured at 50% rated current 0-0.333 VAC safe output, no shorting switches required Eight-foot twisted pair leads One percent accuracy from 10 to 300 percent of rating
RCT-1800-1000
WIRING
Rope CT
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Primary Current Secondary Voltage Frequency Insulation Class Accuracy Lead Wires Weight Rope Length Approvals RoHS Statement Warranty 12 to 30 VAC/VDC 250A to 5000A 0-0.333 V 50 to 10,000 Hz 600V 1% 8' twisted pair leads 0.4 lb (0.18 kg) 48" CE, UL recognized File #E96927 Yes 1 year
One turn primary
(red) (black) (white) high (black) common
1 2 3 4 5 6
Power supply 12 to 30 VAC or VDC
Output
0.999
16
Output Voltage
0.333 0.266 0.199 0.133 0.066 0 0 20 40 60 80 100 300
Percentage of Input Current
MODEL RCT-1800-0250 RCT-1800-0500 RCT-1800-1000 RCT-1800-2000 RCT-1800-3000 RCT-1800-4000 RCT-1800-5000 DESCRIPTION 250A, 18-inch Rogowski coil exible current sensor 500A, 18-inch Rogowski coil exible current sensor 1000A, 18-inch Rogowski coil exible current sensor 2000A, 18-inch Rogowski coil exible current sensor 3000A, 18-inch Rogowski coil exible current sensor 4000A, 18-inch Rogowski coil exible current sensor 5000A, 18-inch Rogowski coil exible current sensor
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
933

VOLTAGE DISCONNECT SWITCH BLOCK, CT SHORTING SWITCHES U3889, 209PF
DESCRIPTION
The Model U3889 Voltage Disconnect Switch Block provides a means for disconnecting power monitoring equipment. It provides isolation from line voltage and will short out and disconnect current transformer secondaries, preventing transformer damage that may occur when the circuit is opened under load. One side of the switch is connected to the circuits being measured; the other side of the switch is connected to the power monitoring equipment. The black plastic cover (209PF) is constructed so that all switches must be in the closed position before the cover can be sealed.
NEW!
U3889-E 209PF U3889 WIRING
To Power Monitoring Equipment To Phase Voltage To CT Secondary Notes: 1. Red switch pulled up disconnects voltage. 2. Black switch pair pulled up shorts CT secondary and disconnects load from CT.
FEATURES
Provides voltage disconnect and CT shorting/ disconnect for power instrumentation Available in convenient metal screw cover enclosure Color-coded switch handles UL recognized
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Rating Current Rating Dimensions Switch Cover (209PF) Optional enclosure Weight Approvals Warranty 600V 30 A 9.5"L x 3.5"W x 2.75"D (24.1 x 8.9 x 7 cm) 10.1"L x 4.6"W x 3.1"D (25.7 x 11.7 x 7.9 cm) Metal screw cover box, NEMA 1 12"L x 10"W x 4"D (30.5 x 25.4 x 10.2 cm) 2.9 lb (1.3 kg) 3.5 lb (1.5 kg) with cover 11 lb (5 kg) with enclosure UL-recognized component, File #E109317 Lifetime (normal use)
16
MODEL U3889-E U3889 209PF DESCRIPTION Switch block mounted in a 12" x 10" x 4" metal screw cover box Switch block Switch cover (not for use with U3889-E)
934
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES

SPLIT-CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 500T, 501T
Model 500T and 501T Split-Core Current Transformers provide a low-amperage current output proportional to line current and are for use in energy management control and metering applications. These transformers are ideal for use as inputs to power monitors such as the EnGenius and current transducers such as Models 4CTV and 4CMA. These transformers are designed to be assembled around an existing insulated conductor without the need for dismantling the primary bus or cables. The portion of the transformers marked "This End Removable" can be disassembled and then reassembled around the conductors that require current monitoring.
500T (shown with end removed) DIMENSIONS
5A secondary Split-core construction for easy installation Brass stud terminals #8-32 with one at washer, lockwasher, and regular nut
in (cm)
0.75 (1.91)
LABEL H1 X1
0.44 (1.12)
CAUTION: Proper safety precautions must be followed by a trained electrician during installation. It is recommended that the incoming power be de-energized before installation. The current transformer must have its secondary terminals short-circuited or the burden (load) connected before energizing the primary circuit. For indoor use only. Use on insulated conductors only.
Four Mounting Holes 0.31" (0.79) dia
A1
B2 B1
B3 A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3
DIMENSIONS MODEL 500T 501T 4.1 (10.4) 4.1 (10.4) 6.4 (16.3) 6.4 (16.3) 7.3 (18.5) 7.3 (18.5) 7.1 (18.0) 11.7 (29.7) 10.0 (25.4) 14.5 (36.8) 10.9 (27.7) 15.4 (39.1)
THIS END REMOVABLE
A2 A3
1.63 (4.14)
SPECIFICATIONS
Secondary Frequency Terminations 0-5A 50-400 Hz Brass stud terminal with nut, at washer, lockwasher Materials Of Construction Plastic, UL94V-1 Insulation Class 600V, 10 kV BIL Continuous Thermal Current 1.33 @ 30C ambient (86F) 1.0 @ Resistor Factor 55C ambient (131F) Window Size Weight Approvals Warranty 4.1" x 7.1" (10.4 x 18.0 cm), 4.1" x 11.7" (10.4 x 29.7 cm) 8 lb (3.6 kg) UL-recognized component, File #E238872; CSA certied, File #245941 1 year
16
MODEL 500T - 4.1" x 7.1" (10.4 x 18.0 cm) Window
MODEL 500T-301 500T-401 500T-501 500T-601 500T-751 500T-801 500T-102 500T-122 500T-152 500T-162 500T-202 500T-252 500T-302 500T-402 CURRENT RATIO 300:5 400:5 500:5 600:5 750:5 800:5 1000:5 1200:5 1500:5 1600:5 2000:5 2500:5 3000:5 4000:5 ANSI METER CLASS @ 60Hz B0.1 B0.2 B0.5 2.5 VA 5 VA 12.5 VA 4.8 4.8 2.4 2.4 4.8 1.2 2.4 1.2 1.2 2.4 1.2 1.2 2.4 0.6 1.2 2.4 0.6 0.6 1.2 0.6 0.6 1.2 0.3 0.6 0.6 ACCURACY CLASS WITH UNITY POWER FACTOR 5% @ 1.5 VA 3% @ 2.5 VA 2% @ 2.5 VA 1% @ 4.0 VA 1% @ 5.0 VA 1% @ 5.0 VA 1% @ 7.5 VA 1% @ 10.0 VA 1% @ 12.5 VA 1% @ 12.5 VA 1% @ 15.0 VA 1% @ 25.0 VA 1% @ 25.0 VA 1% @ 25.0 VA

MODEL 501T-102 501T-122 501T-152 501T-202 501T-252 501T-302 501T-352 501T-402 CURRENT RATIO 1000:5 1200:5 1500:5 2000:5 2500:5 3000:5 3500:5 4000:5 ANSI METER CLASS @ 60Hz B0.1 B0.2 B0.5 2.5 VA 5 VA 12.5 VA 2.4 4.8 1.2 2.4 1.2 1.2 2.4 0.6 1.2 2.4 0.6 0.6 1.2 0.6 0.6 1.2 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.6 ACCURACY CLASS WITH UNITY POWER FACTOR 1% @ 7.5 VA 1% @ 10.0 VA 1% @ 12.5 VA 1% @ 15.0 VA 1% @ 25.0 VA 1% @ 25.0 VA 1% @ 25.0 VA 1% @ 25.0 VA
Example: 500T-102 Split-core current transformer with a current ratio of 1000:5 and a window size of 4.1" x 7.1" (10.4 x 18.0 cm)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
935

SPLIT-CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 600T, 601T
DESCRIPTION
The Model 600T and 601T Split-Core Current Transformers provide a low amperage current output proportional to line current. They are for use in energy management control and metering applications, and are ideal for use as inputs to power monitors like the EnGenius and current transducers like Models 4CTV and 4CMA.These transformers are designed to be assembled around an existing insulated conductor without the need for dismantling the primary bus or cables. The portion of the transformers marked "This End Removable" can be disassembled and then reassembled around the conductors that require current monitoring. FEATURES 5A secondary Split-core construction for easy installation Brass stud terminals #8-32 with one at washer, lockwasher and regular nut
NEW!
601T (shown with end removed) DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.13 (2.87)
SPECIFICATIONS
Secondary 0-5A Frequency 50-400 Hz 600V, 10 kV BIL Full Wave Insulation Class Continuous Thermal Current Resistor Factor 1.33 @ 30C (86F) ambient 1.0 @ 55C (131F) ambient Terminations Brass stud terminals with nut, at washer, lockwasher Materials Of Construction Plastic, UL94V-1 Window Size 2.0" x 5.5" (5.08 x 13.97 cm), 4.5" x 4.5" (11.43 x 11.43 cm) 1.5 lb (0.68 kg) Weight Approvals UL-recognized component, File #E238872; CSA certied, File #245941 Warranty 1 year
A B
This End Removable
A B C D
DIMENSIONS MODEL 601 600 7.75 (19.69) 6.75 (17.15) 5.50 (13.97) 4.50 (11.43) 2.00 (5.08) 4.50 (11.43) 4.25 (10.80) 6.75 (17.15)
H1 X1
LABEL
0.44 (1.12) Two Mounting Holes 0.19 (0.48) dia
16
CAUTION: Proper safety precautions must be followed by a trained electrician during installation. It is recommended that the incoming power be deenergized before installation. The current transformer must have its secondary terminals short-circuited or the burden (load) connected before energizing the primary circuit. For indoor use only. Use on insulated conductor only.
MODEL 600T - 2.0" x 5.5" (5.1 x 14 cm) Window
ANSI METER CLASS @ 60 Hz

ANSI METER CLASS @ 60 Hz
MODEL
CURRENT RATIO
B0.1 2.5 VA
B0.2 5 VA
B0.5 ACCURACY CLASS 12.5 VA WITH UNITY POWER FACTOR
MODEL
CURRENT RATIO
B0.1 2.5 VA
B0.2 5 VA
B0.5 ACCURACY CLASS 12.5 VA WITH UNITY POWER FACTOR
600T-401 400:5 4.8 2.4 600T-501 500:5 4.8 2.4 600T-601 600:5 2.4 2.4 600T-801 800:5 1.2 1.2 600T-102 1000:5 1.2 1.2 600T-122 1200:5 1.2 0.6 600T-162 1600:5 0.6 0.6 600T-202 2000:5 0.6 0.6 MULTI RATIO CURRENT RATIO 600T-122-801 1200/800:5
---2.4 2.4 1.2 1.2 0.6
1% @ 1.5 VA 1% @ 2.0 VA 1% @ 2.5 VA 1% @ 5.0 VA 1% @ 7.5 VA 1% @ 15.0 VA 1% @ 20.0 VA 1% @ 30.0 VA
--601T-301 300:5 -4.8 -601T-401 400:5 -4.8 4.8 -601T-501 500:5 2.4 4.8 -601T-601 600:5 1.2 2.4 4.8 601T-801 800:5 1.2 1.2 4.8 601T-102 1000:5 1.2 1.2 2.4 601T-122 1200:5 1.2 1.2 1.2 601T-152 1500:5 1.2 1.2 1.2 601T-162 1600:5 0.6 0.6 1.2 601T-202 2000:5 CURRENT RATIO MULTI RATIO 1200/800/400:5 601T-122-MR
1% @ 0.5 VA 1% @ 1.0 VA 1% @ 1.5 VA 1% @ 2.0 VA 1% @ 2.5 VA 1% @ 5.0 VA 1% @ 10.0 VA 1% @ 15.0 VA 1% @ 15.0 VA 1% @ 20.0 VA
Example: 601T-102 Split-core current transformer with a current ratio of 1000:5 and a window size of 4.5" x 4.5" (11.4 x 11.4 cm)
936
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

SOLID-CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS RL SERIES
The RL Series Solid-Core Current Transformers provide a low-amperage current output proportional to line current and are for use in building automation and metering applications. These low-cost current transformers are ideal as inputs to power monitors, such as the EnGenius and current transducers, such as Models 4CTV and 4CMA.
5A secondary Flexible leads are UL 1015 105C, CSA approved, #16 AWG, 24"L (61 cm) UL recognized component, CSA certied
RL
Secondary 0-5A Frequency 50-400 Hz 600V, 10 kV BIL, Full Wave Insulation Class Lead Wires 24" (61 cm), 16 AWG Materials Of Construction Plastic, UL94V-1 Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) 2RL 5RL 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) 7RL 1.5 lb (0.63 kg) 8RL 2.5 lb (1.2 kg) Approvals UL-recognized component, File #E238872; CSA File #245941 Warranty 1 year
CAUTION: Proper safety precautions must be followed by a trained electrician during installation. It is recommended that the incoming power be de-energized before installation. The current transformer must have its secondary terminals short-circuited or the burden (load) connected before energizing the primary circuit. For indoor use only. Use on insulated conductors only.
MODELS MODEL 2RL MODEL 5RL CURRENT Outer dia 2.46" (6.25 cm) Outer dia 3.56'' (9.0 cm) RATIO CURRENT Window dia 1.05" (2.67 cm) Window dia 1.56'' (3.9 cm) CODE RATIO Accuracy % Accuracy % VA VA 500 3 50:5 2 2.0 1.0 750 2 75:5 2 2.0 1.5 101 1 100:5 2 2.0 2.0 151 1 150:5 1 4.0 5.0 201 1 200:5 1 4.0 5.0 251 1 250:5 1 6.0 10.0 301 1 300:5 1 8.0 12.5 401 1 400:5 1 10.0 12.5 501 -500:5 1 -20.0 601 -600:5 1 -25.0 751 -750:5 1 -25.0 801 -800:5 1 -25.0 102 -1000:5 1 -25.0 122 -1200:5 ---162 -1600:5 ---202 -2000:5 ---252 -2500:5 ---MODEL 7RL Outer dia 4.58" (11.6 cm) Window dia 2.50" (6.4 cm) Accuracy % VA ----2.5 2 5.0 1 5.0 1 5.0 1 12.5 1 15.0 1 25.0 1 30.0 1 30.0 1 35.0 1 35.0 1 35.0 1 45.0 1 ----MODEL 8RL Outer dia 5.73'' (14.6 cm) Window dia 3.25'' (8.3 cm) Accuracy % VA --------5.0 1 7.5 1 --25.0 1 35.0 1 50.0 1 --60.0 1 75.0 1 ----120.0 1 50.0 1
16
5RL
Model
201
Important! Shaded items in Ordering Information are available by special order and are not returnable for credit.
Current Ratio Code
Example: 5RL201 Model RL current transformer with 1.56" (3.9 cm) window diameter and a 200:5 current ratio
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
937

SOLID CORE CURRENT TRANSFORMERS WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT UCT SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The UCT Series of solid core current sensors provide a low voltage (0.333V) output proportional to line current and is used in conjuction with the EnGenius power monitoring meter. These are often referred to as "safe", the mV output eliminates theneed for shorting switches. The rugged epoxy encapsulated construction comes with 8-foot twisted leads.
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
Model Dimensions (in) A UCT-0300 UCT-0500 UCT-0750 UCT-1000 0.30 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 B 1.70 1.90 2.10 2.40 2.70 C 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.80 0.80 UCT-1250
FEATURES

Rated input current from 5A to 400A Phase angle < 1 measured at 50% rated current 8 ft. twisted-pair lead UL recognized
SPECIFICATIONS
Primary Secondary Frequency Insulation Class Accuracy Lead Wires Weight Approvals RoHS Statement Warranty 5A to 400A, 250A to 5000A 0 - 0.333V, 0-0.333 V 50 to 10,000 Hz 600V 1%; Accuracy at 10% to 130% of rated current 8' twisted pair leads 0.4 lb (0.18 kg) CE, UL recognized File #E96927 Yes 1 year
16
WIRING
Internal Burden Resistor White
ONE TURN CUSTOMER SUPPLIED Black
MODEL UCT-0300-005 UCT-1000-050 UCT-1250-100 UCT-1250-150 UCT-1250-200 UCT-1250-250 UCT-1250-300 UCT-1250-400 DESCRIPTION Solid core current sensor 5A:0.333VAC Solid core current sensor 50A:0.333VAC Solid core current sensor 100A:0.333VAC Solid core current sensor 150A:0.333VAC Solid core current sensor 200A:0.333VAC Solid core current sensor 250A:0.333VAC Solid core current sensor 300A:0.333VAC Solid core current sensor 400A:0.333VAC
938
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!


CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES CS1A, CS1150A-LED, SCS1.5A, SCS1150A-LED
The Kele Models CS1A, SCS1.5A, CS1150A and SCS1150A are solid-state switches that operate when the AC current level sensed by the internal current transformer exceeds a xed or adjustable trip point. Internal circuits are totally powered by induction from the conductor being monitored. There is zero off-state leakage current in the solid-state relay output that can switch AC or DC circuits. The Smart LED indication option eliminates the need for meters when setting the adjustable trip point of the current switch. Solid-core and split-core models are available. SCS1150A-LED
Models with xed or adjustable trip point Switch AC or DC circuits Power and status LED Applicable for VFD applications down to 6Hz Powered by monitored line Available in solid-core models or split-core models that clamp easily around cables One-year warranty UL listed, CE certied
CS1150A-LED
SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Switch Type Rating Insulation Class Trip Point CS1A SCS1.5A CS1150A SCS1150A, SC250-NC Range CS1A, CS1150 SCS1.5A, SCS1150A, SC250-NC Deadband Response Time Off State Leakage Jumper None = 0-100A Mid = 0-150A High = 0-200A March 2014 6-100 Hz Normally open, solid state (SC250NC is normally closed) 1-135 VAC/VDC, 0.3A (SC250-NC model 0.2A) 600V Fixed, 1A Fixed, 1.25A Adjustable 1-200A Adjustable 1.25-200A 1 - 200A, Jumper High 1.25 - 200A, Jumper High 5% of setpoint Less than 250 milliseconds < 25 mA Operating Temperature -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C) Mounting 3.5"L (8.9 cm) with 3.0" (7.6 cm) mounting centers Dimensions 1.9" x 3.45" x 1" CS1A, CS1150 (4.82 x 8.76 x 2.54 cm) SCS1.5A, SCS1150A, SC250-NC 2.75" x 3.45" x 1.2" (6.98 x 8.76 x 3.04 cm) Window Size 0.75" (1.9 cm) dia, for up to 250 CS1A, CS1150 MCM cable SCS1.5A, SCS1150A, 0.85" (2.2 cm) square aperture, for SC250-NC up to 350 MCM cable 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Weight UL listed, File #E320368 CE certied Approvals Warranty 1 year
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
939

CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES CS1A, CS1150A-LED, SCS1.5A, SCS1150A-LED
WIRING
1-135V VAC/VDC max 0.3A
Relay, Lamp, Small Contactor, or Similar AC or DC Load
Terminals not polarity sensitive
NEW!
Digital Input Terminals not polarity sensitive
Bldg Automation System, Energy Mgmt System,
Monitored Conductor
Monitored Conductor
INSTALLATION / ADJUSTMENT
Sensors can be mounted in any position or hung directly on wires. For larger mounting screws, drill out mounting holes. Use up to #14 AWG copper wire to terminals. Tighten to 7 in-lb torque. Adjustment for CS1150A and SCS1150A 1. With the sensor wired as shown, use a voltmeter across the sensor contacts. A full voltage across the contact conrms the switch is open. Turn on the motor or other load being monitored. 2. The sensor is shipped with the multiturn adjustment set to the most sensitive position. If the sensor now operates, turn the adjustment counter-clockwise (CCW) until the operation reverses. The meter will indicate this action. 3. Now, turn the adjustment clockwise (CW) until the sensor just operates its controlled circuit. It is desirable to turn the adjustment slightly beyond this threshold point to provide a margin for normal current variations. Status LED Indicator 1. Light: Sufcient current is owing to opposite device. 2. No light: Current is either OFF or below the bottom of the range. Application Notes 1. M ake sure that switched current (connected to terminals) is limited to 0.3A continuous. Switched voltage should be no higher than 135 VAC/VDC. 2. Important! Monitoring excessive current can damage the sensor. Make sure monitored currents do not exceed maximum ratings. 3. For proper operation of the split-core model, make certain that the mating surfaces of the magnetic core are clean. Troubleshooting Problem 1. Sensor does not switch at all, regardless of current level. 2. Adjustment has no stops; keeps turning. Probable Causes and Corrections Adjustment pot is probably backed off completely, which disables the sensor. See Installation/Adjustment immediately above for instructions. Verify that mating surfaces of the split core are free of foreign particles. The multiturn adjustment pot has a slip-clutch that prevents damage at either end of its rotation.
16
MODEL CS1A SCS1.5A CS1150A-LED SCS1150A-LED SC250-NC DESCRIPTION Solid-core current switch, xed 1.0A trip, normally open Split-core current switch, xed 1.25A trip, normally open Solid-core current switch, adjustable, normally open with LED Split-core current switch, adjustable, normally open with LED Split-core current switch, adjustable, normally closed with LED
940
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION

CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES & TRANSDUCERS RIBXG, RIBXK, RIBXK420 SERIES
The RIBXK, RIBXG, RIBXK420 Series include both currentoperated switches and current transducers. Solid-core and split-core current-operated switch models have a solid-state switch that operates when the current level sensed by the internal current transformer exceeds a xed or adjustable set point. Solid-core current transducer models output a 4-20 mA signal proportional to the line current being monitored.
RIBXKF RIBXKA
SPECIFICATIONS
RIBXK, RIBXG SERIES
Monitored AC Current RIBXKF, RIBXKTF 0.25-150A RIBXKA, RIBXKTA 0.5-150A RIBXGF, RIBXGTF 0.35-150A RIBXGA, RIBXGTA 0.75-150A Switch Trip Point RIBXKF, RIBXKTF 0.25A, xed RIBXKA, RIBXKTA 0.5-150A, adjustable RIBXGF, RIBXGTF 0.35A, xed RIBXGFL, RIBXGTFL 0.75A, xed RIBXGA, RIBXGTA 0.75-150A, adjustable Switch Type Solid state, normally open Switch Rating 30 VAC/VDC, 0.4A maximum Off State Leakage <30 A @ 30 VAC/VDC On State Voltage Drop <0.3 VAC/VDC @ 0.1A <1.6 VAC/VDC @ 0.4A
RIBXK420
RIBXKTF RIBXKTA FEATURES
RIBXGTF
Supply Voltage 24 VDC Output 4-20 mA, 30 mA maximum Accuracy 5% FS Linearity 1% FS Output Impedance 600 maximum @ 24 VDC Input Range 20, 50, or 100A General Frequency Suitable for most VFD applications Maximum Sensed Voltage 600 VAC Connections 16" (40.6 cm), 18 AWG, 600V wires or terminals for 14-22 AWG Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (-34.4 to 60C) 0.3 lb (0.13 kg) Weight Approvals UL listed, UL916, UL864 File #57312 RoHS Statement Yes 1 year Warranty
RIBXK420 SERIES
Solid- and split-core switch models have xed (go/no go) or adjustable trip points Solid-core transducer models have a 4-20 mA output Low cost Ratcheting cam clamp to secure switch to wire Removable mounting tab
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.50 (1.27) dia. Ratcheting Cam Clamp 1.008 (2.56) Removable Mounting Tab RIBXK
24 VDC Power Supply + (red) (black) BAS Input or Other 4-20 mA Load
1.46 (3.7) Optional Trip Adjust 1.86 (4.73) Optional LEDs
Wire Clamp
2.00 (5.1)
Load Wire Opening 0.52 x 0.52 (1.3 x 1.3) 2.52 (6.4) 1.10 (2.8)
1.508 (3.83)
Removable Mounting Tab
1.75 (4.4)
16
RIBXG
Normally open Wh/Yel solid-state switch is not polarity sensitive Load Load Wire Wire
Wh/Yel Wh/Yel Wh/Yel
RIBXK420
Models with Screw Terminals RIBXK RIBXG ,
Models with Wire Leads
MODEL RIBXKF RIBXKTF RIBXKA RIBXKTA RIBXK420-20 RIBXK420-50 RIBXK420-100 RIBXGF RIBXGTF RIBXGFL RIBXGTFL RIBXGA RIBXGTA DESCRIPTION Solid-core current-operated switch, wire leads, xed-trip Solid-core current-operated switch, terminals, xed-trip Solid-core current-operated switch, wire leads, adjustable-trip Solid-core current-operated switch, terminals, adjustable-trip Solid-core current transducer, 0-20A Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A Solid-core current transducer, 0-100A Split-core current-operated switch, xed 0.35A trip, wire leads Split-core current-operated switch, xed 0.35A trip, terminal strip Split-core current-operated switch, xed 0.75A trip, wire leads, LEDs Split-core current-operated switch, xed 0.75A trip, terminal strip, LEDs Split-core current-operated switch, adjustable trip, wire leads, LEDs Split-core current-operated switch, adjustable trip, terminal strip, LEDs
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
941

ACI CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES A/ACS, A/ASCS, A/CS, A/SCS, A/CR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The ACI current switches are solid-state devices that operate when the sensed AC current level exceeds a xed or adjustable trip point. The A/CS Series is solid-core with a xed trip point. The A/SCS Series is split-core with a xed trip point. The A/ACS Series is solid-core with adjustable trip point. The A/ASCS Series is split-core with adjustable trip point. All models monitor either a 0-200 or 0-250 amp current ow in the wire and are available in normally-open or normally-closed congurations. The A/CR Series command relay brings control to monitoring applications. FEATURES Available in solid or split-core Fixed or adjustable trip points Switches AC or DC circuits Status LED's Integral DIN rail mount Powered by monitored line Enclosure rated UL94-5VB Pilot duty rated (A/CR Series)
NEW!
A/CS, A/ACS A/SCS, A/ASCS A/CR-D-12A Operating Temperature 5 to 104F (-15 to 40C) 0 to 95% RH,(non-condensing) Operating Humidity Mounting DIN rail (35 mm), screw Window Size 0.75" (1.9 cm), accepts up to 350 MCM cables Weight 0.21 lb (0.1 kg) UL and cUL listed, le #E309723 and Approvals #E179139 CE RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 5 years, limited A/CR-12DC-12A Relay Type Contact Rating SPDT 12A @ 250 VAC General Use Coil Voltage 12A @ 250 VAC Resistive 10-15.6 VDC 12A @ 30 VDC Resistive Coil Current 1/2HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NC 30mA @ 24 VDC A300 Pilot Duty A/CR-230AC-8A Relay Type Contact Rating SPDT 8A @ 250 VAC General Use Coil Voltage 8A @ 125 VAC Resistive 165-264 VAC 8A @ 30 VAC Resistive Coil Current 1HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NO 5mA @ 230 VDC 1/2HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NC A300 Pilot Duty March 2014
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency Outputs Normally Open Normally Closed Isolation Rating Insulation LED Indication Adjustable Fixed Deadband Induced from monitored conductor 40 Hz to 1 kHz 0.3A @ 200 VAC/VDC 0.15A @ 300 VAC/VDC 1270 VAC 600 VAC Red = Above trip point Green = Below trip point Red LED only 10% Setpoint
16
RELAY SPECIFICATIONS (COMMAND RELAY)

A/CR-DC-5A Relay Type Contact Rating SPDT 5A @ 250 VAC General Use Coil Voltage 5A @ 125 VAC Resistive 23-31.2 VDC 5A @ 30 VAC Resistive Coil Current 1/4HP, 120/250/277 VAC 15mA @ 24 VDC C 150 Pilot Duty A/CR-24AC-10A Relay Type Contact Rating SPDT 10A @ 250 VAC General Use Coil Voltage 10A @ 250 VAC Resistive 16-25.4 VAC 10A @ 30 VAC Resistive Coil Current 1HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NO 28mA @ 24 VAC 1/2HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NO A300 Pilot Duty A/CR-DC-12A Relay Type Contact Rating SPDT 12A @ 250 VAC General Use Coil Voltage 12A @ 125 VAC Resistive 20-31.2 VDC 12A @ 30 VAC Resistive Coil Current 1/2HP, 120/250/480 VAC-NC 16mA @ 24 VDC A300 Pilot Duty A/CR-115AC-8A Relay Type Contact Rating SPDT 8A @ 250 VAC General Use Coil Voltage 8A @ 250 VAC Resistive 80-132 VAC 8A @ 30 VAC Resistive Coil Current 1HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NO 10mA @ 115 VAC 1/2HP, 120/240/480 VAC-NC A300 Pilot Duty
942
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)

ACI CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES A/ACS, A/ASCS, A/CS, A/SCS, A/CR SERIES
Top View
Top View
in (cm)
Adjustment range: 3.0-200A Trip on = Above trip point
0.40 (1.0)
0.21 (0.5) Typ.
A/ASCS only
0.50 (1.3)
Adjustment range: 3.0-200A Trip on = Above trip point
Use Insulated Conductors Only
0.22 (0.6) Typ.
Use Insulated Conductors Only
2.84 (7.2)
2.84 (7.2)
Front View
Front View
0.78 (2.0)
A/ASCS, A/SCS
0.74 (1.9)
0.76 (1.9)
1.38 (3.5) 3.38 (8.6)
0.14 (0.4)
1.38 (3.5) 3.33 (7.8)
0.14 (0.4)
Top View
0.188 (.4) (2X)
Front View
1.320 (3.3)
1.107 (2.8)
A/CR-CD-12A
1.632 (4.1) 1.516 (3.8)
2.884 (7.3) 3.290 (8.3)

1.351 (3.4) Din rail size
MODEL A/CS A/CS-L A/CS-X A/CS-X-L A/ACS A/ACS-L A/ACSX A/SCS A/SCS-L A/SCSX A/ASCS A/ASCS-L A/ASCSX A/ASCSX-L A/CR-DC-5A A/CR-DC-12A A/CR-12DC-12A A/CR-24AC-10A A/CR-115AC-8A A/CR-230AC-8A March 2014 DESCRIPTION Solid-core current switch, 0.5A trip, normally-open, 0-250A range Solid-core current switch, 0.2A trip, normally-open, 0-250A range Solid-core current switch, 1A trip, normally-closed, 0-250A range Solid-core current switch, 0.5A trip, normally-closed, 0-250A range Solid-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-open, 1-250A range Solid-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-open, 0.5-250A range Solid-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-closed, 1-250A range Split-core current switch, 2.5A trip, normally-open, 0-200A range Split-core current switch, 1.5A trip, normally-open, 0-200A range Split-core current switch, 2.5A trip, normally-closed, 0-250A range Split-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-open, 3-200A range Split-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-open, 2-200A range Split-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-closed, 3-250A range Split-core current switch, adjustable trip, normally-closed, 2.5-250A range 5 Amp SPDT relay, 23-31.2 VDC coil voltage 12 Amp SPDT relay, 20-31.2 VDC coil voltage 12 Amp SPDT relay, 10-15.6 VDC coil voltage 10 Amp SPDT relay, 16-26.4 VAC coil voltage 8 Amp SPDT relay, 80-132 VAC coil voltage 8 Amp SPDT relay, 165-264 VAC coil voltage
16
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
943

ACI MINI CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES A/MCS, A/MSCS, A/MCS-A, A/MSCS-A
DESCRIPTION The ACI Mini Current Switch line has a normally-open, solid state contact that is non-polarity sensitive. They can be used to switch both AC and DC circuits up to 36 volts. The adjustable switches also include two status LED indicators that will indicate three states: tripped on, current present but below trip point, and current off or below the low end of the adjustable trip point range. The A/MCS and A/MSCS current switches should be used in applications in which a go/no-go current status switch is required. A current status switch can be used to monitor fan and pump status, motors, compressors, and any other electrical equipment for on or off status. The A/MCS-A and A/MSCS-A adjustable current switches should be used in applications such as monitoring over and under loads, changes in the normal operating current or equipment status. FEATURES Go / no-go status switch Rated up to 150A 5-year warranty UL94V-0 enclosure rating LED indication (adjustable models) Small size
NEW!
Operating Temperature -22 to 140F (-30 to 60C) Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH, (non condensing) Dimensions A/MCS, A/MCS-A 2.50" x 1.96" x 0.95" ( 6.35 x 4.97 x 2.41 cm) A/MSCS, A/MSCS-A 2.65" x 2.35" x 0.95" (6.73 x 5.08 x 2.43 cm) Window Size A/MCS, A/MCS-A 0.55" (1.39 cm) dia., up to 1 AWG cables A/MSCS, A/MSCS-A 0.53" (1.34 cm) dia., up to 1 AWG cables Weight 0.21 lb (0.1 kg) Approvals UL and cUL, le #E309723, CE, UL94-5UB RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 5 years
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Frequency Rating A/MCS, A/MSCS A/MCS-A, A/MSCS-A Insulation Class Isolation Rating LED Indication Red Green Trip Point A/MCS A/MCS-A A/MSCS A/MSCS-A Range A/MCS A/MCS-A A/MSCS A/MSCS-A Induced by monitored conductor 50/60 Hz 0.5 A continuous 36 VAC/VDC 0.5 A continuos 36 VAC/VDC 600 VAC 2,200 VAC Above trip point Below trip point Fixed 0.20A 0.32 - 150A Fixed 0.55A 0.70 - 150A 0.20 - 150A 0.32 - 150A 0.55 - 150A 0.70 - 150A
16
MODEL A/MCS A/MCS-A A/MSCS A/MSCS-A DESCRIPTION Solid-core, xed current switch, N.O., 0-150A <0.20A Solid-core, adjustable current switch, N.O., 0-150A 0.32 150A Split-core, xed current switch, N.O., 0-150A <0.55A Split-core, adjustable current switch, N.O., 0-150A 0.70 150A
944
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)

ACI MINI CURRENT-OPERATED SWITCHES A/MCS, A/MSCS, A/MCS-A, A/MSCS-A
Dimensions
Solid Core
0.188 (2x) (0.5)
A 50 A A, 0-1 .20 .50 c 0.2 e 0 t: 0 /Vd ge: bov G A AW tpu Vac an Ou 6.0 se R ON =-22 3 en 6 S TRIPept 1 c ac nly ls e o ina wir rm er Te opp c
Output: 0.50A, 36.0 VAC/VDC Sense range: 0.20-150A Trip on = Above 0.20A Terminals accept 16-22 AWG copper wire only
I AC
A/
MC
Co n io I at W m , to ton Au dle Mid
po
ne
nt
s,
1.991 (5.1)
2.0 (5.1)
2.5 (6.4)
0.942 (2.4)
A/MCS A/MSCS
A 50 t A, 5-1 Poin .50 c 0.5 rip t: 0 /Vd ge: e T G tpu Vac an ov AW Ou 6.0 se R = Ab -22 3 en N 16 O pt S IP cce nly R T ls a o e ina wir rm er Te opp c S
Split Core
0.188 (2x) (0.5)
Output: 0.50A, 36.0 VAC/VDC Sense range: 0.55-150A Trip on = Above trip point Terminals accept 16-22 AWG copper wire only
I n Co io I ACmatn ,W
to to Au dle Mid
A/
ts C en MS pon m
2.356 (6.0)
2.0 (5.1)
0.94 (2.4)
2.645 (6.7)
Solid Core
0.188 (2x) (0.5)
, .0A c t: 1 /Vd tpu ac Ou 6.0 V 3 IP TR DJ A IP N TR F O A OF 50 t r 2-1 Poin pe 0.3 Trip cop e: G ng ve W Ra Abo-22 A j. Ad N =pt 16 O ce IP c TRals a in rm nly Te ire o w
Output: 1.0A, 36.0 VAC/VDC TRIP OFF ON TRIP ADJ Adjustment range: 0.32-150A Trip on = Above trip point Terminals accept 16-22 AWG copper wire only
to to Au dle Mid
I Com n AC tio WI ma n,
A/
A S- nts, MC one p
1.991 (5.1)
2.0 (5.1)
16
2.5 (6.4)
A/MCS-A A/MSCS-A
0.942 (2.4)
Split Core
0.188 (2x) (0.5)
Output: 0.50A, 36.0 VAC/VDC Sense range: 0.20-150A Trip on = Above trip point Terminals accept 16-22 AWG copper wire only
, .0A c t: 1 /Vd tpu ac Ou 6.0 V 3 IP TR DJ A
IP N TR F O 0A t OF -15 oin .32 P : 0 rip ge e T an ov G j. R Ab AW Ad N = 6-22 O 1 IP pt TR acce nly ls e o ina ir rm r w Te oppe A c
to to Au dle Mid
I Com n AC io I at W m n,
A/
MS
CS
po
ne
nt
s,
2.356 (6.0)
2.0 (5.1)
2.645 (6.7)
0.94 (2.4)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
945

FUNCTIONAL DEVICES CURRENT SWITCH AND RELAY RIBX SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Relay in a Box RIBX Series provides a unique and costeffective solution to on/off motor control and current sensing status indication. Combined in a single, convenient junction box with high- and low-voltage separation are a control relay and a current sensing status switch. A three-position closed/ open/auto switch is available to override the output of the relay. This versatile product allows both control and status sensing of electrical loads by a BAS, all in a self-contained, easy-to-install housing. FEATURES Cost-effective current sensing with a control relay Self-contained housing with high and low voltage separation LED indication of relay and current sensor trip Optional relay contact override switch Plenum-rated housing UL and ULC listed for UL 916 Energy Management and UL 864 Fire
NEW!
RIBX Solid-Core Remote Current Sensing RIBX Internal Current Sensing RIBX Split-Core Remote Current Sensing On State Voltage Drop <0.3 VAC/VDC @ 0.1A <1.6 VAC/VDC @ 0.4A Lead Wires 16" (40.6 cm) 600V Rated Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (-34 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing) Dimensions Enclosure 4"H x 4"W x 1.8"D (10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm), NEMA 1 with 1/2" NPT Solid Core 1.86'' x 1.46'' (3 x 3.71 cm ) Split Core 2.52'' x 2.0'' (6.4 x 5.08 cm) Window Size Solid Core 0.5'' (1.27 cm) Split Core 0.52'' x 0.52'' (1.32 x 1.32 cm) Weight 1 lb (0.45 kg) Approvals UL and cUL listed, File #E68805 (UL 916) and #S7312 (UL 864) RoHS Statement Yes 1 year Warranty
16
SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Switch Rating LED Indication LED#1 LED#2 50/60 Hz 30 VAC/VDC @ 0.4A maximum ON Relay activated ON Current trip point exceeded 20mS
Response Time Relay Life Rating 10 million cycles minimum mechanical Coil Pull In Voltage 10-30 VAC/VDC models 9 VAC, 10 VDC 24 VAC/VDC models 18 VAC, 22 VDC Coil Drop Out Voltage 10-30 VAC/VDC models 2.1 VAC, 2.8 VDC 24 VAC/VDC models 3 VAC, 3.8 VDC Off State Leakage < .03 mA @ 30 VAC/VDC
946
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
APPLICATION
MODEL RIBXLCA RIBXLCEA RIBXLCF RIBXLCJA RIBXLCJF RIBXLCRA RIBXLCRF RIBXLSA RIBXLSEA RIBXLSF RIBXLSJA RIBXLSJF RIBXLSRA RIBXLSRF RIBX24BA Internal RIBX24BF RIBX24SBA RIBX24SBF Internal Split-core Solid-core CURRENT CURRENT SENSING OVER SENSING RANGE/THRESHOLD SW 0.5-10A/Adjustable Internal 0.125-5A/Adustable 0.5-10A/Fixed, 0.5A 3-150A/Adjustable 3-150A/Fixed, 3A 1.25-150A/Adjustable 1.25-150A/Fixed, 1.25A 0.5-10A/Adjustable Internal 0.125-5A/Adustable 0.5-10A/Fixed, 0.5A 3-150A/Adjustable 3-150A/Fixed, 3A 1.25-150A/Adjustable 1.25-150A/Fixed, 1.25A 0.5-20A/Adjustable 0.5-20A/Fixed, 0.5A 0.5-20A/Adjustable 0.5-20A/Fixed, 0.5A Yes Yes Split-core Solid-core RIBX243PA Internal RIBX243PF RIBXF RIBXA RIBXRF RIBXRA RIBXJF RIBXJA Note: 0.5-20A/Fixed, 0.5A 0.5-20A/Adjustable

FUNCTIONAL DEVICES CURRENT SWITCH AND RELAY RIBX SERIES
Internal Current Sensing (for single-phase loads) Models with internal current-sensing are great for direct-control and current-sensing of exhaust fans, pumps, and other single-phase electrical loads up to 20A. The control relay contacts of these models wire directly in series with single-phase motors using the wires that exit the housing through the 1/2" conduit hub. The current of the load is sensed within the housing. Low-voltage wiring from the controller for the control relay coil and status switch enter the separate Class 2 wiring compartment in the housing through star bushings or conduit and are connected to screw terminals.
BAS Controller Status In Control Out
Class 2 On/Off
Optional Override Switch Closed/Open/Auto
Single Phase Exhaust Fan
120-277 VAC 10 or 20A
Current is sensed internally.
RIBX
Current Sensor and Control Relay with Override Switch
Remote Current Sensing (for loads with motor starters) Models with remote current-sensing are great for control and status sensing of electrical loads that require a motor starter. The control relay contacts of these models are wired in series with the motor starter coil using the two wires that exit the housing through the 1/2'' conduit hub. Currents up to 150A are sensed externally with a current sensing ring connected to the two gray wires that also exit through the 1/2'' conduit hub. Low-voltage wiring from the controller for the control relay coil and status switch enter the separate Class 2 wiring compartment in the housing through star bushings or conduit and are connected to screw terminals.
Internal Current Sensing

BAS Controller Status In Control Out Current Sensor and Control Relay with Override Switch Optional Override Switch Closed/Open/Auto RIBX Toroid has no open circuit voltage eliminating electrical shock hazard.
Class 2 On/Off
Relay Switches Motor Starter Coil Three-Phase Power Contactor
Motor Starter
Remote Current Sensing
Three-Phase Motor
RELAY CONTACT RATINGS *
10A resistive 480 VA pilot duty 480 VA ballast 600W tungsten 240W tungsten 1/3 hp for N.O. 1/6 hp for N.C. 1/4 hp for N.O. 1/8 hp for N.C. 10A resistive 480 VA pilot duty 480 VA ballast 600W tungsten 240W tungsten 1/3 hp for N.O. 1/6 hp for N.C. 1/4 hp for N.O. 1/8 hp for N.C. 20A resistive 1110 VA pilot duty 770 VA pilot duty 20A ballast 10A ballast 10A tungsten 240W tungsten 2 hp 1 hp 120/240/277 VAC - 28 VDC 240/277 VAC 277 VAC 120 VAC N.O 120 VAC N.C. 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC 120 VAC N.O 120 VAC N.C. 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC 120 VAC 277 VAC N.O. 277 VAC N.C. 120 VAC N.O. 120 VAC N.C. 277 VAC 120 VAC
RELAY CONTACT WIRING

1-SPDT Relay
RELAY COIL AND CURRENT SWITCH
(blue) (yellow) (orange)
N.C. COM N.O.
Relay input current

33 mA @ 10 VAC 35 mA @ 12 VAC 46 mA @ 24 VAC 55 mA @ 30 VAC 10-30 VAC/VDC Common 13 mA @ 10 VDC 15 mA @ 12 VDC 18 mA @ 24 VDC 20 mA @ 30 VDC
Relay coil wiring
Current switch wiring 1-SPST Relay

(orange) (orange)
1
Current Sensor Status Closed Open Solid- and split-core models Auto (gray) Current (gray) Sensor
16
1-SPDT Relay
(blue) (yellow) (orange) (orange) (orange)
1
N.C.
Relay input current

50 mA @ 18 VAC 33 mA @ 22 VDC 83 mA @ 24 VAC 35 mA @ 24 VDC 47 mA @ 30 VDC 24 VAC/VDC Common Current Sensor Status
COM N.O. Closed Open Auto
Relay coil wiring
1-SPST Relay
Current switch output
20A resistive @ 300 VAC, 28 VDC 20A ballast @ 277-480 VAC 15A resistive @ 600 VAC 770 VA pilot duty @ 120 VAC, 1 Ph 1158 VA pilot duty @ 240 VAC, 1 Ph 1110 VA pilot duty @ 277 VAC, 1 Ph 1640 VA pilot duty @ 480 VAC, 1 Ph 1466 VA pilot duty @ 240 VAC, 1 Ph 2112 VA pilot duty @ 480 VAC, 1Ph Heavy Pilot Duty @ 600 VAC 7.5 HP @ 480 VAC, 3 Ph 5 HP @ 240 VAC, 3 Ph 3 HP @ 480-600 VAC, 1 Ph 2 HP @ 240-277 VAC, 1 Ph 1 HP @ 120 VAC, 1 Ph
(blue) (blue) (yellow) (yellow) (orange) (orange)

2
N.O. N.O.
210 mA @ 24 VAC 154 mA @ 30 VDC
Relay input current Relay coil wiring
24 VAC/VDC Common
N.O.
Current switch output

Current Sensor Status
0.5-30A/Fixed, 0.5A Internal 0.5-30A/Adjustable Internal Solid-core 1.25-150A/Fixed, 1.25A Solid-core 1.25-150A/Adjustable 3-150A/Fixed, 3A Split-core 3-150A/Adjustable Split-core
Current switch only Current switch only Current switch only Current switch only Current switch only Current switch only
Current Sensor Wiring Internal Models (purple) Current (purple) Sensor Solid- and split-core models (gray) Current (gray) Sensor
Current switch wiring

Current Sensor Status
1 Internal yellow jumper determines if SPST contacts are N.O. or N.C. 2 Can be ordered N.C. by adding -NC after model number. * Not rated for electronic ballast.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
947

KELE AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER 4CTV, 4CMA
DESCRIPTION
Models 4CTV and 4CMA are AC amperage-to-analog DC transducers that can be used to directly monitor loads of up to 20A. For loads of 20-5000A, an external current transformer can be used. Developed for building automation and energy management, the Model 4CTV converts an AC current to a 0-5 VDC voltage and the Model 4CMA converts an AC current to a 4-20 mA current that can be monitored by any processor that accepts analog DC voltage or current.
NEW!
4CTV
4CMA
FEATURES
4CTV requires no external power supply Rugged design to withstand momentary AC inrushes of 120A (6x rating) Easy to install, only two connections 50/60 Hz operation
APPLICATION
AC current input to DC voltage or milliamp output Monitoring of AC current of motors, lighting, heating, industrial processes, etc. Monitoring of chiller loads using existing current transformers
16
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 4CMA 24 VDC 4CTV Induced by monitored conductor Inputs 0-20A (change jumper to 0 to 50A) Outputs 4CMA 4-20 mA, 600 maximum load 4CTV 0-5 VDC, 30 k minimum load 600V Insulation Class Ripple <2% FS Accuracy 1% FS (24 VDC @ 25C) Operating Temperature -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C) Dimensions 2.9" x 1" x 2.45" (7.4 x 2.5 x .6.2 cm) Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) UL File# E320368, CE, RoHS Approvals RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.9 (7.4) 1.0 (2.5) 2.5 (6.4) 0.5 (1.3) 0.70 (1.8)
0.75 (1.9)
2.45 (6.2)
3.5 (8.9)
Solid-Core
948
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
IL
Voltage Output Vo = (0-5 VDC) 30 k Minimum Load

KELE AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER 4CTV, 4CMA
APPLICATION #1. Monitoring Loads Under 20A

Power Supply 24 VDC 10% Load 600 Max
4CTV Formula: IL (load amps) =
20 x turns
( V5o )
IL
Vo= VDC from 4CTV turns= number of times conductor passes through 4CTV 4CMA Formula: IL (load amps) = -4 ( Io16 )
IO (4-20 mA)
20 x turns
4CTV
4CMA
Io= mA DC from 4CMA turns= number of times conductor passes through 4CMA
Conductor
Conductor
Note: If IL is always below 10A, multiple passes of the conductor will improve scaling. The sum of these amperages must remain below 20A.
4CTV Formula: IL (load amps) = CT primary x rating Vo= VDC from 4CTV
Load 600 Max
APPLICATION #2. Monitoring Loads Over 20A with a Current Transformer

Current Transformer
IL
Voltage Output Vo = (0-5 VDC) 30 k Minimum Load
Current Transformer
IL
Power Supply 24 VDC 10%
o (V 5 )
4CMA Formula:
AM
Conductor
PS
Conductor
0-5 A
IO (4-20 mA)
4CTV
4 turns for CTs with 5A secondaries 20 turns for CTs with 1A secondaries
4CMA
IL (load amps) = CT primary x rating Io= mA DC from 4CMA
-4 ( Io16 )
APPLICATION #3. Monitoring and Summing Multiple Loads

Voltage Output Vo = (0-5N VDC) 30 k Minimum Load
0-
4 turns for CTs with 5A secondaries 20 turns for CTs with 1A secondaries
Note: If the CT is oversized, multiple conductor passes or more secondary turns through the 4CTV or 4CMA will improve scaling. The CT output should not exceed 5A or the CT secondary turns should not total more than 20A.
4CTV Formula: For loads under 20 amps Vo ILT (load amps) = 20 x N x turns 5xN 4CTV Formula: For loads over 20 amps Vo ILT (load amps) = CT primary x 5xN rating total
Power Supply 24 VDC 10%
Current Output 4-20 mA
) )
IO SIG OUT COM 24 PWR IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 UMM
4CT
Vo= VDC from 4CTVs turns = number of times conductor passes through 4CTV N = number of loads monitored
4CTV
4CTV LOAD #1 IL1
4CTV LOAD #2 IL2 LOAD #3 IL3

4CMA 4CMA 4CMA
Universal Math Module
4CMA Formula: For loads under 20 amps
ILT (load amps) = 20 x N x turns
-4 ( Io16 ) -4 ( Io16 )
16
4CMA Formula: For loads over 20 amps
LOAD #1 IL1
LOAD #2 IL2
LOAD #3 IL3
CT Primary ILT (load amps) = rating total x N= number of loads monitored
ILT = IL1 + IL2 + IL3

Note: If the loads are from secondaries of current transformers, the CT ratios and the turns on the 4CTVs and 4CMA must all be the same. If CTs are used, the CT primary amps would be the total for all CTs used.
turns = number of times conductor passes through 4CMA Io= mA from UMM
MODEL 4CTV 4CMA 500T/501T 600T/601T AL/RL DESCRIPTION Current transducer, 0-5 VDC voltage output Current transducer, 4-20 mA current output RELATED PRODUCTS Split-core current transformers Split-core current transformers Solid-core current transformers PAGE 935 936 937
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
949

AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER WITH CURRENT OUTPUT CX, SCX SERIES (CURRENT)
DESCRIPTION The Kele CX/SCX Series AC Current Transducers can be used to directly monitor up to 200 amps and output a 4-20 mA signal. Available in a split-core design that allows for easy installation of the transducer on existing wiring or in a lower cost solid-core version. FEATURES May eliminate the need for a current transformer Small size Loop powered Easily installed over existing cable with split-core design UL listed, CE certied
NEW!
SCX42050 CX42050 SCX420200 CX420200
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL CX42050 SCX42050 CX420200 SCX420200 RANGE (amps) 0-10 0-20 0-50 0-100 0-150 0-200 JUMPER None Mid High None Mid High MAX CONT (amps) 80 120 200 175 300 400
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.45 (8.7) 2.4 (6.10) 0.8 (2.0) 1 (2.5) 0.85 (2.18) 1.2 (3.05) 3.04 (7.73) 1.5 (3.9) 3.08 (7.8) 0.95 (2.4) 0.17 (0.45) 1.0 (2.5) 3.45 (8.7) 2.4 (6.0)
0.85 (2.18)
2.75 (7.0)
1.95 (4.9)
16
Frequency 10-400 Hz Output 4-20 mA Output Impedance 500 maximum @ 24 VDC Isolation Rating 1270 VAC Accuracy 1% FS Response Time 250 ms, 0-90% Internal Protection Reverse voltage protection Overrange Limit Sensor self-limits output to 40 mA Operating Temperature -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C) Materials Of Construction Thermoplastic (meets UL ammability rating 94V-0) Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Approvals UL and ULC listed, File #E320368, CE RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 5 years
Split-Core
Solid-Core
WIRING
4-20 mA
Power Supply
24 VDC Typical
Load
500 max @24 VDC
Monitored Conductor
MODEL CX42050 CX420200 SCX42050 SCX420200 DESCRIPTION Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A, 4-20 mA output Solid-core current transducer, 0-200A, 4-20 mA output Split-core current transducer, 0-50A, 4-20 mA output Split-core current transducer, 0-200A, 4-20 mA output
950
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES

AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS WITH VOLTAGE OUTPUT CX, SCX SERIES (VOLTAGE)
The Kele CX/SCX Series AC Current Transducers with Voltage Output can be used to directly monitor up to 200A and output a 0-5 or 0-10 VDC signal. Available in a split-core design that allows for easy installation of the transducer on existing wiring or in a lower-cost solid-core version. SCX05V50 CX05V50
May eliminate the need for a current transformer Small size No power supply needed Split-core model easily installed over existing cable UL listed, CE certied
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL CX05V50 SCX05V50 CX05V200 SCX05V200 CX10V50 SCX10V50 CX10V200 SCX10V200 RANGE (amps) 0-10 0-20 0-50 0-100 0-150 0-200 0-10 0-20 0-50 0-100 0-150 0-200 OUTPUT JUMPER None Mid High None Mid High None Mid High None Mid High MAX CONT (amps) 80 120 200 175 300 400 80 120 200 125 300 400
SCX10V200
CX10V200
0-5 VDC
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.5 (8.9) 1.25 (3.2) 2.75 (7.0) 0.65 (1.7) 0.20 (0.5) 1.0 (2.5) 2.5 (6.4) 0.5 (1.3) 2.9 (7.4) 0.70 (1.8)
0-5 VDC
0-10 VDC
0.85 (2.2)
2.5 (6.4)
0.75 (1.9)
2.45 (6.2)
0-10 VDC
0.85 (2.2) 4.0 (10.2)
3.5 (8.9)
Split-Core
Solid-Core
Frequency Output Output Impedance
50-60 Hz 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC 1 M required for rated accuracy 100 k load add 1.3% error Isolation Rating 1270 VAC Accuracy 1% FS over 5% to 100% of range Response Time 250 ms, 0-90% Operating Temperature -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C) Materials Of Construction Thermoplastic (meets UL ammability rating 94V-0) Window Size 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Approvals UL and ULC listed, File #E320368, CE Warranty 5 years
WIRING
0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC
16
Load*
Monitored Conductor
MODEL CX05V50 CX05V200 CX10V50 CX10V200 SCX05V50 SCX05V200 SCX10V50 SCX10V200 March 2014 DESCRIPTION Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-5 VDC output Solid-core current transducer, 0-200A, 0-5 VDC output Solid-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-10 VDC output Solid-core current transducer, 0-200A, 0-10 VDC output Split-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-5 VDC output Split-core current transducer, 0-200A, 0-5 VDC output Split-core current transducer, 0-50A, 0-10 VDC output Split-core current transducer, 0-200A, 0-10 VDC output
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
951

CURRENT TRANSDUCERS A/CT, A/SCT SERIES
DESCRIPTION Current sensors monitor the current owing to electrical equipment. The magnitude of the analog output signal is proportional to the current ow through the wire. The A/CT series offers solid-core sensors with 4-20mA, 0-5VDC, or 0-10VDC outputs. The A/SCT series offers split-core sensors for retrot applications with the same available outputs. Sensors are available with various input current ranges from 5 to 250 amps. True RMS models make monitoring of VFD applications a snap.
FEATURES
Available in solid-core or split-core 5 VDC, 10 VDC or 4-20mA outputs Voltage output models are selfpowered
NEW!
A/CT A/SCT
Maximum Sensing Current Voltage 600 VAC Isolation Rating 2200 VAC Accuracy A/CTA, A/SCTA 0.5% A/CTE, A/CTV, A/SCTE, A/SCTV 1% Operating Temperature 5 to 104F (-15 to 40C) VFD models 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) 0 to 95% (non-condensing) Operating Humidity Mounting DIN rail size 35 mm Window Size 0.75", accepts up to 350 MCM cables Weight 0.24 lbs (0.109 kg) Approvals UL listed, File #E309723, CE Warranty 5 years, limited RoHS Statement Yes Enclosure Rating UL94-5VB
Top View 0.50 (1.3) 0.22 (0.6) Typ. 2.84 (7.2) 0.74 (1.9) 0.76 (1.9) 0.14 (0.4)
Integral DIN rail mount True RMS versions for VFD applications
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage A/CTA, A/SCTA 12 to 30 VDC A/CTE, A/CTV, A/SCTE, A/SCTV Induced from monitored conductor Supply Current A/CTA, A/SCTA 36 mA maximum Frequency A/CTA, A/SCTA 30 to 60 Hz A/CTE, A/CTV, A/SCTE, A/SCTV 50 to 600 Hz Output A/CTA, A/SCTA 4-20 mA, 2-wire, loop-powered A/CTE, A/SCTE 0-5 VDC A/CTV, A/SCTV 0-10 VDC Output Impedance A/SCTA 700 @ 24 VDC A/SCTA-VFD 700 @ 24 VDC
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.78 (2.0) Top View 0.21 (0.5) Typ. 2.84 (7.2)
16
1.38 (3.5) 3.38 (8.6)
0.40 (1.0) 0.14 (0.4)
A/CTA, A/CTE, A/CTV
A/SCTA, A/SCTE, A/SCTV
1.38 (3.5) 3.33 (3.8)
MODEL A/CTA-5 A/CTA-50 A/CTA-250 A/CTA-50-VFD A/CTA-250-VFD A/SCTA-5 A/SCTA-50 A/SCTA-200 A/SCTA-50-VFD A/SCTA-200-VFD A/CTE-50 A/CTE-250 A/CTV-50 A/CTV-250 A/SCTE-50 A/SCTE-250 A/SCTV-50 A/SCTV-250 DESCRIPTION Solid-core, loop-powered current sensor, 0-5A input, 4-20 mA output Solid-core, loop-powered current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 4-20 mA output Solid-core, loop-powered current sensor, 0-100/200/250A input, 4-20 mA output Solid-core, loop-powered true RMS current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 4-20 mA output Solid-core, loop-powered true RMS current sensor, 0-100/200/250A input, 4-20 mA output Split-core, loop-powered current sensor, 0-5A input, 4-20 mA output Split-core, loop-powered current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 4-20 mA output Split-core, loop-powered current sensor, 0-100/150/200A input, 4-20 mA output Split-core, loop-powered true RMS current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 4-20 mA output Split-core, loop-powered true RMS current sensor, 0-100/150/200A input, 4-20 mA output Solid-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 0-5 VDC output Solid-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-100/200/250A input, 0-5 VDC output Solid-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 0-10 VDC output Solid-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-100/200/250A input, 0-10 VDC output Split-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 0-5 VDC output Split-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-100/200/250A input, 0-5 VDC output Split-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-10/20/50A input, 0-10 VDC output Split-core, self-powered current sensor, 0-100/200/250A input, 0-10 VDC output
952
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

CURRENT TRANSDUCER AND RELAY RIBX-V SERIES
The Relay In a Box RIBX-V Series provides a unique and cost-effective solution to on/off motor control and analog current sensing. Combined in a single, convenient junction box with high- and low-voltage separation are a control relay and a current sensing transducer that outputs 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC. A three-position closed/open/auto switch is available to override the output of the relay. This versatile product allows both control and analog current sensing of electrical loads by a building automation system, all in a selfcontained, easy-to-install housing.
Cost-effective analog current sensing with a control relay Self-contained housing with high- and low-voltage separation LED indication of relay Optional relay contact override switch Plenum-rated housing UL and ULC listed for UL 916 Energy Management and UL 864 Fire
RIBX-V
SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Output Output Impedance LED Indication Relay Life Rating 50/60 Hz 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC, proportional to current sensing range 30 k minimum LED on = relay activated 10 million cycles minimum mechanical Lead Wires 16" (40.6 cm) Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (-34 to 60C) 5% to 95% (non-condensing) Operating Humidity Dimensions 4"H x 4"W x 1.8"D (10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm), NEMA 1 th 1/2" NPT Weight Approximately 1 lb (0.45 kg) Approvals UL and cUL listed, le #E68805 (UL 916) and #S7312 (UL 864) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
16
Pull In Voltage 10-30 VAC/VDC models 9 VAC, 10 VDC 24 VAC/VDC models 18 VAC, 22 VDC Drop Out Voltage 10-30 VAC/VDC models 2.1 VAC, 2.8 VDC 24 VAC/VDC models 3 VAC, 3.8 VDC Accuracy 1% FS
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
953

CURRENT TRANSDUCER AND RELAY RIBX-V SERIES
APPLICATION
The RIBX-V Series with internal current sensing is great for direct control and analog current sensing of exhaust fans, pumps, and other single-phase electrical loads up to 20A. The control relay contacts of these models wire directly in series with single-phase motors using the wires that exit the housing through the 1/2" conduit hub. The current of the load is sensed within the housing. Low-voltage wiring from the controller for the control relay coil and analog current signal enter the separate Class 2 wiring compartment in the housing through star bushings or conduit and are connected to screw terminals.
BAS Contoller Analog In Control Out 0-5 or 0-10 VDC Class 2 On/Off Optional Override Switch Closed/Open/Auto Single Phase Exhaust Fan
NEW!
RIBX-V Analog Current Sensor and Control Relay with Override Switch
Current is sensed internally.
120-277 VAC 5, 10, 20, or 30A
MODEL CURRENT CURRENT SENSING OVER SENSING RANGE (amps) SW Internal RIBXLSEV RIBXLCV 0-5 Yes
*
RELAY CONTACT RATINGS

* 5A resistive
345 VA pilot duty 211 VA pilot duty 268 VA pilot duty 175 VA pilot duty 1/3 hp for N.O. 1/6 hp for N.C. 1/4 hp for N.O. 1/8 hp for N.C. 277 VAC 120/240 VAC N.O. 120/240 VAC N.C. 277 VAC N.O. 277 VAC N.C. 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC

RIBXLCEV, RIBXLCV 1-SPDT Relay (blue) N.C.
RELAY COIL AND ANALOG OUTPUT Relay input current

30 mA @ 10 VAC 32 mA @ 12 VAC 42 mA @ 24 VAC 50 mA @ 30 VAC 12 mA @ 10 VDC 14 mA @ 12 VDC 16 mA @ 24 VDC 18 mA @ 30 VDC
RIBXLCEV
(yellow) (orange)
COM N.O.
Relay coil wiring

10-30 VAC/VDC Common
Internal 0-10 Yes
16
RIBXLSV
10A resistive 480 VA pilot duty 480 VA ballast 600W tungsten 240W tungsten 1/3 hp for N.O. 1/6 hp for N.C. 1/4 hp for N.O. 1/8 hp for N.C.
120/240/277 VAC - 28 VDC RIBXLSEV, RIBXLSV 240/277 VAC 1-SPST Relay 277 VAC 120 VAC N.O (orange)* Closed 120 VAC N.C. (orange)* Open 120/240 VAC Auto 120/240 VAC 1 277 VAC *Gray wire on RIBXLSEV 277 VAC (blue)
Analog out wiring

0-10 VDC 0-5 VDC Common
RIBX24BV Internal RIBX24SBV 0-20
Yes
20A resistive 277 VAC 1110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC 240W tungsten N.C. 120 VAC 770 VA pilot duty 120 VAC 1 hp 120 VAC 2 hp 277 VAC 20A ballast N.O. 277 VAC 10A ballast N.C. 277 VAC 10A tungsten N.O. 120 VAC Not rated for electrical. 20A resistive 20A resistive 15A resistive 1 hp 2 hp 3 hp 5 hp 7.5 hp 20A ballast
1-SPDT Relay
N.C.
Relay input current

75 mA @ 24 VAC, 32 mA @ 24 VDC
(yellow) (orange)
COM N.O.
Relay coil wiring

24 VAC/VDC Common
(orange) (orange)
1-SPST Relay
1
Closed Open Auto
Analog out wiring

RIBX243PV
Internal
0-20
300 VAC 28 VDC 600 VAC 120 VAC, 1 Ph 240-277 VAC, 1 Ph 480-600 VAC, 1 Ph 240 VAC, 3 Ph 480 VAC, 3 Ph 277-480 VAC
N.O.
Relay input current

190 mA @ 24 VAC
N.O.
Relay coil wiring

24 VAC/VDC Common
N.O.
Analog out wiring

0-10 VDC Common
2
Current Sensor Wiring
Current Sensor (purple) (purple)
RIBXV
Internal
0-30
Current transducer only, 0-30A
Analog out wiring

Note:
1 Internal yellow jumper determines if SPST contacts are N.O. or N.C. * Not rated for electrical ballast.
2 Order N.C. by adding -NC after model number.
954
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES

HIGH AC CURRENT TRANSDUCERS WITH CURRENT OUTPUT SENTRY 200-A SERIES
The Sentry 200-A Series High AC Current Transducers with Current Output can be used to directly monitor up to 2000A without requiring an additional current transformer. The output from these transducers is a 4-20 mA signal.
Eliminates the need for a current transformer Large aperture to accommodate large conductors or wire bundles Loop powered 4-20 mA output Multi-range input eliminates zero and span adjustments Easy installation with integral mounting brackets
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL 200-3-A 200-4-A RANGE 0-375 0-500 0-750 0-1000 0-1333 0-2000 SWITCH MAX CONT MAX FOR MAX FOR POSITION 6 SEC 1 SEC (amps) 375 750 1500 3750 500 750 1000 2000 4000 10,000 1333 2000
200-3-A
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4.5 (11.43)
Supply 24 - loop-powered 40 VDC Output Voltage 4-20 mA, Frequency 50 - 60 Hz Supply voltage 24-40 VDC load 60010 max @ 24 VDC Output V Models - 400 Hz Rmax Output 4= - (V 20supply-12)/0.020 mA, loop-powered Accuracy FS max @ 24 VDC Output Impedance 1.0% 600 FrequencyVoltage 600 50-60 Hz, (V models 10-400 Hz) Insulation VAC Response time 500 ms to 90% Accuracy 1.0% FS of step change Case UL 94 flammability rated thermoplastic Response Time 500 ms to 90% of step change Weight (0.6 kg)self-limits to 25 mA output Overrange Limit 1.3 lbSensor Agency approvals UL and ULC terminals listed, File # E129625, Screw Terminations CE certified Materials Of Construction Insulation class 600 VAC UL 94 ammability rated Overrange limit Sensor self-limits to 25 mA output thermoplastic Termination Screw terminals Weight 1.3 lb (0.6 kg) Warranty 5 years Approvals UL and ULC listed, File #E129625, CE pending Note: The standard models are average responding. Also available are variable integration models Warranty 5 frequency years
for monitoring the load side of a VFD.
4.22 (10.7)
Aperture 3 (7.63)
1.9 (4.83) Depth
WIRING
Power Supply
16
+
Sentry 200-A 24 VDC Typical
Note: T he standard models are average responding. Also available are variable frequency integration models for monitoring the load side of a VFD.
Monitored Conductor
Load
+-
4-20 mA
MODEL 200-3-A 200-3-A-V 200-4-A 200-4-A-V DESCRIPTION Solid-core high current transducer, 0-750A, 4-20 mA output Solid-core high current transducer, 0-750A, 4-20 mA output (10 - 400 Hz) Solid-core high current transducer, 0-2000A, 4-20 mA output Solid-core high current transducer, 0-2000A, 4-20 mA output (10 -400 Hz)
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
955

THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITORS 258, 269
DESCRIPTION
Models 258 and 269 continuously monitor three-phase power lines for phase loss, phase reversal, and low voltage. Model 269 also monitors for high voltage. Models 258 and 269 do not require a neutral connection and can be used with any Wye or Delta systems. When correct voltage and phase rotation are applied, the internal relay will energize. A fault condition will de-energize the relay. When the fault is corrected, the monitor will automatically reset.
NEW!
258 269
A258B 480 380-480 60 4.5 50ms 50ms RB08-PC 5 (141.7) UR*, CSA A269 120 110-145 80-115 60 1.5 Adj. 1-10 sec 0.25 sec Surface 9 (255.1) UL, CSA B269 208/240 210-280 170-240 60 3.0 Adj. 1-10 sec 0.25 sec Surface 9 (255.1) UL, CSA C269 480 400-540 380-460 60 6.0 Adj. 1-10 sec 0.25 sec Surface 9 (255.1) UL, CSA
SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal AC Voltage (VAC phase to phase) Adjustment Range (VAC) Frequency (Hz) Power Consumption (W) Response Time Reset Time Mounting Weight oz (g) Agency Approvals (UL file #E60400) B258B 120 85-120 60 0.75 50ms 50ms RB08-PC 5 (141.7) UR, CSA 258B 208/240 160-240 60 1.5 50ms 50ms RB08-PC 5 (141.7) UR, CSA
Repeat Accuracy Reset Type Deadband Output Contacts Contact Rating
0.1% of setpoint (fixed conditions) Automatic Approx 2% SPDT 10A @ 240 VAC, resistive
Operating temp Humidity Dimensions 258 RB08-PC 269 Warranty
-20 to 131F (-30 to 55C) 0-97% noncondensing 1.95"H x 1.95"W x 3.25"D (4.96 x 4.96 x 8.25 cm) 2.25"H x 2.0"W x 0.625"D (5.7 x 5.1 x 1.6 cm) 6.06"H x 3.88"W x 2.82"D (15.4 x 9.9 x 7.1 cm) 5 years
* Condition of acceptability: A258B must be used with the RB08-PC socket.
WIRING
L1
L1 L2 L3 Control Voltage 345 1 2 Start 8 Stop M M M M M
16
L2
Motor
M M M A B C Model 269
Motor
L3
Model 258
Control Voltage Optional Alarm Indicator
Stop Start
M
Shown de-energized 258

MODEL A258B 258B B258B RB08-PC A269 B269 C269
Shown de-energized 269
DESCRIPTION Three-phase voltage monitor, 480 VAC Three-phase voltage monitor, 208/240 VAC Three-phase voltage monitor, 120 VAC (use with Model 3PT3 potential transformer) 600V/10A socket (required with each 258 voltage monitor) Three-phase voltage monitor, 120 VAC (use with Model 3PT3 potential transformer) Three-phase voltage monitor, 208/240 VAC Three-phase voltage monitor, 480 VAC
956
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES

MOTORSAVER THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR 201A
The MotorSaver 201A Three-Phase Voltage Monitor is an autoranging plug-in voltage monitor designed to protect three-phase motors regardless of size. It is used on 190480 VAC 50/60 Hz motors to prevent damage caused by single phasing, low voltage, phase reversal, or voltage unbalance. To detect harmful power line conditions, the unique microprocessor-based voltage and phase sensing circuit constantly monitors the three-phase voltages. When a harmful condition is detected, the Model 201A MotorSaver's output relay is deactivated after a xed trip-delay time period. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level for a xed restart delay time. The trip delay prevents nuisance tripping due to rapidly uctuating power line conditions.
201A
Protection of three-phase motors against single phasing, low voltage, phase reversal, and voltage unbalance DIN rail- or surface-mounted socket UL and ULC listed, CE certied Bicolor LED indication of normal and fault conditions Single-phase condition detection regardless of regenerated voltages
OT08PC
WIRING
L1 L2 L3 L1 3 L2 4 L3 5 1 8 OL M M M M OL OL OL
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Watts Frequency Transient Protection Line Voltage Monitored 5W 50* or 60 Hz 2500V for 10 ms Three-phase, 190-480 VAC, adjustable Low Voltage Trip 90% of setpoint Low Voltage Reset 93% of setpoint Reset Delay Time after Fault 2 seconds Reset Delay Time after Power Loss 2 seconds Trip Delay Time Low Voltage 4 seconds Trip Delay Time Phase Fault 2 seconds Trip Delay Time Unbalance 2 seconds Voltage Unbalance Reset 4.5% 6% Voltage Unbalance Trip Dimensions 2.37"W x 1.75"H x 4.25"L (6.0 x 4.4 x 10.8cm) Weight 0.56 lb (0.25 kg) Approvals UL Listed, File #E68520, CE certied Warranty 5 years
* 50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%.
Motor
201A
2
16
Control Voltage 240 VAC max
Start Hand Stop M Off Auto Pilot
Shown de-energized Model 201A
MODEL 201A OT08PC DESCRIPTION MotorSaver three-phase voltage monitor Socket, 600 VAC, DIN rail or surface mount
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
957

MOTORSAVER THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR 250A
DESCRIPTION The MotorSaver 250A Three-Phase Voltage Monitor is an autoranging voltage monitor designed to protect three-phase motors regardless of size. It is used on 190-480 VAC, 50/60 Hz motors to prevent damage caused by single phasing, low voltage, phase reversal, voltage unbalance, and high voltage. Added features include DPDT contacts and an adjustable restart time-delay setting. The unique microprocessor-based voltage and phase-sensing circuit constantly monitors the three-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the Model 250A's output relays are deactivated after a xed trip-delay time period. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level for an adjustable restart delay time. The trip and reset delays prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly uctuating power line conditions.
NEW!
250A
FEATURES
Protection of three-phase motors from single phasing, low-voltage, phase reversal, voltage unbalance, and high voltage Adjustable restart delay DPDT contacts UL and cUL listed Bicolor LED indication of normal and fault conditions Detection of single-phase conditions regardless of regenerated voltages
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Watts Frequency Contact Rating Transient Protection Line Voltage Monitored Low Voltage Trip Low Voltage Reset Reset Delay Time after Fault Reset Delay Time after Power Loss Trip Delay Time High Voltage Trip Delay Time Low Voltage Trip Delay Time Phase Fault Trip Delay Time Unbalance Voltage Unbalance Reset Voltage Unbalance Trip Operating Temperature Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty 5W 50* or 60 Hz DPDT, pilot duty 480 VA @ 240 VAC General-purpose 10A @ 240 VAC IEC 1000-4-5 190-480 VAC, adjustable 90% of setpoint 93% of setpoint Manual or 2-300 seconds Manual or 2-300 seconds 4 seconds 4 seconds 2 seconds 2 seconds 4.5% 6% -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) 5.25"W x 2.9"H x 2.92"D (13.3 x 7.4 x 7.4 cm) 0.875 lb (0.396 kg) UL and cUL listed, File #E68520 5 years
16
WIRING
L1 Input Power L2 L3
LED INDICATOR
Run Restart Delay Reverse Phase Unbalance/Single Phase High/Low Voltage
M M M
OL OL OL
Motor
Green Green Red Red Red
L1
250A
L2
L3 OL
Control Power
Start Hand Stop Off Auto Pilot M
Alarm Power
Alarm
MODEL 250A DESCRIPTION MotorSaver three-phase voltage monitor
shown de-energized Motor Protection with Local Alarm
958
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES

MOTORSAVER THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR 355 SERIES
The MotorSaver 355 Series Three-Phase Voltage Monitors are designed to protect three-phase motors regardless of size. The 355-200 model monitors 190-240 VAC input voltages, the 355-400 model monitors 380-480 VAC input voltages, and the 355-600 model monitors 575600 VAC input voltages. The unique microprocessor-based voltage and phase-sensing circuit constantly monitors the three-phase voltages to detect harmful power line conditions, including single phasing, low-voltage, phase reversal, voltage unbalance, and high voltage. When a harmful condition is detected, the 355 Series output relays are deactivated after an adjustable trip-delay time period. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level for an adjustable restart delay time. The trip and reset delays prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly uctuating power line conditions.
355-400
WIRING
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 M M M OL OL OL Motor
Protection of three-phase motors from loss of any phase, low-voltage, phase reversal, voltage unbalance, and high voltage Adjustable restart delay Adjustable trip delay Adjustable voltage-unbalance trip point Four diagnostic LEDs show overvoltage, undervoltage, voltage unbalance, reverse-phase and normal conditions UL and ULC listed Single-phase condition detection regardless of regenerated voltages
355 Series
Control Voltage
OL
Start Hand Stop M Off Auto Pilot
Shown de-energized
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Watts Frequency Contact Rating 6W maximum 50*/60 Hz SPDT, pilot duty 470 VA @ 600 VAC (400 or 600V range) Generalpurpose 10A @ 240 VAC (200V range) 1hp @ 240 VAC (200V range) Transient Protection 2500V for 10 ms Line Voltage Monitored 190-240, 380-480, or 575-600 VAC Low Voltage Trip 90% of setpoint (1%) Low Voltage Reset 93% of setpoint (1%) Reset Delay Time after Fault Manual or 2-300 seconds Reset Delay Time after Power Loss Manual or 2-300 seconds Trip Delay Time High Voltage 2-30 seconds, adjustable Trip Delay Time Low Voltage 2-30 seconds, adjustable Trip Delay Time Phase Fault 0.5 seconds Trip Delay Time Unbalance 2-30 seconds, adjustable Voltage Unbalance Reset Trip setting minus 1% Voltage Unbalance Trip 2% to 8%, adjustable 2.9H x 5.25W x 2.9D Dimensions (7.4 x 13.3 x 7.4 cm) Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Approvals UL and cUL listed, File #E68520 Warranty 5 years * 50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%.
16
MODEL 355-200 355-400 355-600 DESCRIPTION Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-240 VAC Three-phase voltage monitor, 380-480 VAC Three-phase voltage monitor, 575-600 VAC
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
959

MOTORSAVER THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR 455 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Model 455 three-phase voltage monitor combines load and line-side monitoring to alert the user of contact failure or impending contact failure. The line-side monitoring will protect the motor from damaging line-side conditions prior to the motor starting. With the Model 455, your motor is fully protected at all times. The motor will not start if a power problem is present. The monitor is equipped with an infrared LED to communicate with the handheld diagnostic tool, the Informer-MS, to display MotorSaver data to assist in monitoring and troubleshooting the system. Motor run hours, displayed by the Informer-MS can now be reset on the Model 455. FEATURES The 455's universal range from 190-480VAC 50/60 Hz provides the versatility needed to handle global applications. Four adjustment pots provide versatility for a variety of applications. Load and line-side monitoring provides contactor protection. Diagnostic LEDs indicate trip status and provide simple troubleshooting. Microcontroller-based circuitry for better accuracy and higher reliability.
NEW!
Model 455
Single-phase conditions are detected regardless of regenerated voltages. Transient protection meets IEEE and IEC standards and permits operation under tough conditions.
WIRING
VOLT. ADJ. (VAC) 208 220 416 440 200 230 400 460 190 240 380 480
L1
IR LINK
190-480 VAC, 3, 50/60 HZ
L2
L3
RESTART (SEC) 100 2 MAN 2 300 30
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Watts Frequency Contact Rating 6W maximum 50*/60 Hz SPDT 480 VA @ 240 VAC pilot duty 10A general purpose SPDT high voltage relay (-480R) 470 VA @ 600 VAC pilot duty IEC 1000-4-5; 1995 6K1
in (cm)
MODEL 455
OVER VOLT. PHASING FAULT UNDER VOLT.
PILOT DUTY RATING 480 VA AT 240 VAC 15 TRIP DELAY (SEC)
IND. CONT. EQ.
UNBALANCE TRIP (NEMA %)
2.9 (73.66)
SymCom. Inc.
M1
M2
M3 RUN
LISTED
784X
4.030 (102.36) 4.500 (114.30) 5.250 (133.35)
0.375 (9.53)
MAGNETIC CONTACTOR
INPUT POWER
16
Transient Protection Line Voltage Monitored 455 190 - 480 VAC 455 - 480R 380 - 480 VAC 455 - 575 475 - 600 VAC Low Voltage Trip 90% of setpoint (1%) Low Voltage Reset 93% of setpoint (1%) Reset Delay Time after Fault Manual or 2-300 seconds Reset Delay Time after Power Loss Manual or 2-300 seconds Trip Delay Time High Voltage 2-30 seconds, adjustable Trip Delay Time Low Voltage 2-30 seconds, adjustable Trip Delay Time Phase Fault 0.5 seconds Trip Delay Time Unbalance 2-30 seconds, adjustable Voltage Unbalance Reset Trip setting minus 1% Voltage Unbalance Trip 2% to 8%, adjustable Dimensions 2.9"H x 5.25"W x 2.9"D (7.4 x 13.3 x 7.4 cm) Weight 0.88 lb (0.396 kg) Approvals UL and cUL listed, #E68520, CS1, C1 Warranty 5 years
2.913 (73.99) 2.163 (54.94)
0.150 (3.81)
OL OL OL MOTOR
A B C
L1
L2
L3
MS455
M1 M2 M3
MAG.
M
CONTROL POWER 24 - 240 VAC
COIL HAND
OL
THERMOSTAT OPTIONAL
T
STOP START M
OFF AUTO PILOT
MODEL 455 455-480R 455-575 INFORMER-MS DESCRIPTION Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-480 VAC Three-phase voltage monitor, 380-480 VAC Three-phase voltage monitor, 575-600 VAC Hand held diagnostic/trouble shooting tool
960
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES

MOTORSAVER THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR 460
Input L2 Power L3
External Normally Open Momentary Manual Reset Switch
(customer supplied)
L1 L2 L3
L1
Magnetic Contactor
The MotorSaver Model 460 microcontroller-based voltage and phase sensing circuit constantly monitors the three phase voltage to detect harmful power line conditions. When a harmful condition is detected, the Model 460 output relay is deactivated after an adjustable trip delay time. The output relay reactivates after power line conditions return to an acceptable level for an adjustable restart delay time. If equipped with the manual reset option, an external normally open momentary reset switch must be closed to reactivate the output relay. The trip and restart delays prevent nuisance tripping due to rapidly uctuating power line conditions. The Model 460 automatically senses whether it is connected to a 190-240V 60 Hz system, a 440-480V 60 Hz system, or a 380-416V 50 Hz system. An adjustment is provided to set the nominal line voltage from 190-240 or 380-480 VAC. Other adjustments include a 1-30 second trip delay, a 1-500 second restart delay, and a 2% to 8% voltage-unbalance trip point adjustment.
460
WIRING
OL OL OL
Motor
Protection of three-phase motors from loss of any phase, low-voltage, phase reversal, voltage unbalance, and high voltage Adjustable restart delay Adjustable trip delay Adjustable voltage unbalance trip point Optional manual reset Diagnostic LEDs for indication of trip status Single-phase condition detection regardless of regenerated voltages Surface or DIN rail mounting
Manual Reset on 460-MR only
Model 460
4 5 6
OL
Control Power 24-240 VAC Shown de-energized
Start Manual Stop M Off Auto Pilot Contact
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Watts Frequency Humidity Contact Rating 6W maximum 50*/60 Hz 10-95% RH, non-condensing SPDT, pilot duty 480 VA @ 240 VAC General-purpose 10A @ 240 VAC Transient Protection IEC 1000-4-5, ANSI/IEEE C62.41, UL508 Line Voltage Monitored 190-480 Low Voltage Trip 90% of setpoint (1%) Low Voltage Reset 93% of setpoint (1%) Reset Delay Time after Fault 1-500 second adjustable Reset Delay Time after Power Loss 1-500 second adjustable Trip Delay Time High Voltage 1-30 second adjustable Trip Delay Time Low Voltage 1-30 second adjustable Trip Delay Time Phase Fault 1 second xed Trip Delay Time Unbalance 1-30 second adjustable Voltage Unbalance Reset Trip setting minus 1% (5-8%) Trip setting minus 0.5% (2-4%) Voltage Unbalance Trip 2% to 8%, adjustable Operating Temperature -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C) Dimensions 3.5"H x 2.1"W x 2.4"D (8.9 x 5.3 x 6.1 cm) Weight 0.9 lb (0.4 kg) Approvals UL and cUL listed, File #E68520, CE Warranty 5 years * 50 Hz will increase all delay times by 20%.
16
MODEL 460 460-MR 460-575 DESCRIPTION Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-480 VAC Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-480 VAC with manual reset Three-phase voltage monitor, 190-480 VAC, 1-30 second trip delay, 1-500 second restart delay, 2-8% voltage unbalance trip point
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
961

SURGE PROTECTORS DTK-120HW, DTK-MRJ11, DTK-2LVLP
DESCRIPTION The DTK Series products are general-purpose MOV based power line, telephone line, and data line surge protectors. They are designed to protect electronic equipment from surges and spikes that may be present on power inputs, communications, or data lines. FEATURES Metal-Oxide Varistor (MOV) technology Self-restoring after each surge within ratings Nanosecond response time UL listed
NEW!
DTK-MRJ11
DTK-120HW DTK-2LVLP DTK-2LVLP Low-Voltage Data Line Protection Let Through Voltage X: 15 VRMS LV: 27 VRMS Continuous Current Unlimited Accuracy X: 15 VRMS LV: 27 VRMS Protection L-G (all lines protected) Energy Dissipation X: 8 joules/pair LV: 17 joules/pair Surge Current 2000 amps/pair Response Time <5 ns Connections Screw terminals 22-16 AWG wire 1.6"H x 3.0"W x 1.6"D Dimensions (4.1 x 7.6 x 4.1 cm) 0.15 lb (0.07 kg) Weight UL 497B, File #E163310 Approvals 10 year limited Warranty
SPECIFICATIONS
DTK-MRJ11 Data/Phone Line Protection Service Voltage 130 VRMS Clamp Voltage 20V Continuous Current 150 mA RJ11/RJ14/RJ45 female to ground Protection Energy Dissipation 76 joules 2000 amps/pair (6V - 50V) Surge Current 9000 amps/pair (75V - 130V) Response Time <5 ns RJ11/RJ14/RJ45 female in/out + Connections ground wire Operating Temperature -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Operating Humidity Maximum 95% (non-condensing) Dimensions 1.7"H x 3.0"W x 1.2"D (6.9 x 7.8 x 2.9 cm) Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Approvals UL 497A, File #E163310 Warranty 10 year limited DTK-120HW Hard-Wired Surge Protection Service Voltage 110/125 VAC Frequency 0 Hz- 400 Hz Filtering RFI/EMI noise Unlimited Continuous Current Protection 700 V L-N, L-G 600V N-G Clamping Level 130 VRMS/185V peak Surge Current 19,500A Response Time <1 ns 3/4" hub-mount 3-12 AWG leads Connections Dimensions 2.9"H x 2.8"W x 1.7"D (7.3 x 7.1 x 4.3 cm) Weight 0.5 lb (0.22 kg) Approvals UL 1449 3rd Edition, cUL 1449, IEEE C62.41B, File #E136659 Warranty 10 years
WIRING
Wall Jack
16
Protected Equipment
To Building Ground
DTK-RJ11
Unprotected Pair #1
Protected Pair #1
Data Line In
Protected Equipment
Unprotected Pair #2
DTK-2LVLP
Protected Pair #2 To Building Ground If a shield is used, then ground at one end only.
Neutral Hot Ground
(white) (black) (green) DTK-120HW
Protected Line 120 VAC
MODEL DTK-120HW DTK-120/240CM+ DTK-MRJ11 DTK-2LVLPLV DESCRIPTION 120V inline surge protector 120/240 VAC surge protector 130V telephone line surge protector 27V four-wire data line surge protector MODEL DTK-2LVLPX DTK-1LVLPLV DTK-1LVLPX DTK-2LVLP-SCP-D DESCRIPTION 15V four-wire data line surge protector 1 pair 30V terminal strip surge protector 1 pair 14V terminal strip surge protector Low voltage surge protector
962
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

POWER/DATA SURGE PROTECTOR DTK-120SR, DTK-2MHLP
The new Model DTK-120SR is an in-line, four-stage, powerline surge protector with EMI/RFI ltering. It is designed for mounting in an enclosure or control panel. Series installation eliminates the need to dedicate a circuit breaker for surge protection while allowing for installation exibility. The 120SR meets stringent government and military specs for re panel applications and is suitable for use on critical 20 Amp loads.
The Model DTK-2MHLP series of signal, data and loop circuit surge protectors provide robust protection in a compact package. Designed for ease of installation with convenient eld-replaceable modules. The 2MHLP protects two circuit pairs per module. Applications include protection of 4-20mA current loops, alarm pane NAC, SLC and IDC loops, and burglar alarm panels.
DTK-120SR
DTK-2MHLP
DTK-120SR Series design for fast response and best protection Four-stage hybrid circuit design User replaceable fusing EMI/RFI ltering Compact design Screw terminals w/safety cover LED's for protection status, ground presence, ground fault indication and fuse status
DTK-2MHLPWB Multi-stage, SAD technology, hybrid design Hard-wire mounting base Field replaceable, hot swappable, modular edge card connection design Multiple voltage levels for variety of voice/data applications Two pairs protected per module, can be extended to ten pairs using a common ground using DTK-MB base
DTK-120SR Service Voltage 120V MCOV 150V Suppressed Voltage 600V Rating Max Continuous Current 20A EMI/RFI Attenuation Up to 35dB, 100kHz-100MHz Peak Surge Current 54,000 amps Protection L-N, L-G, N-G Operating Temperature 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) Dimensions 6.87"W x 3.50"H x 2.50"D (17.45 x 9.06 x 6.35 cm) Weight 0.76 lb (0.45 kg) Approvals UL1449, 3rd Edition Warranty 10-year limited
DTK-2MHLPWB Service voltage 5B 0-5 VDC 36B 36 VDC 12B 12 VDC 48B 48 VDC 24B 24 VDC 75B 75 VDC MCOV/Let-Through Voltage 5B 5/6.8 VDC 36B 48/57 VDC 12B 18/21.6 VDC 48B 64/76 VDC 24B 33/39 VDC 75B 90/108 VDC Max Continuous Current 5A Peak Surge Current 20kA Data Rate 200kbps (5V) to 2Mbps (130V) Protection L-G (all lines protected) Connections Edge card into DTK-MB mounting base Operating Temperature -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Dimensions 2.1"H x 0.9"W x 1.4"D (5.3 x 2.3 x3.6 cm) Weight 0.078 lb (0.036 kg) - with base Approvals UL 497B, DTK-120SR Recognition, File # E328921, DTK-2MHLP UL File #E14557 Warranty 10-year limited
16
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
963

POWER/DATA SURGE PROTECTOR DTK-120SR, DTK-2MHLP
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.50 (6.35) 2.04 (5.18)
6.00 (15.24)
NEW!
1.65 (4.2)
2.09 (5.3)
0.27 (0.7)
0.96 (2.4)
1.42 (3.6)
4.13 (10.5) 0.16 (2 PLCS TYP)
2.21 (5.6)
6.20 (15.74)
1.54 (3.9) 1.89 (4.8)
0.96 (2.4)
6.87 (17.45)
0.27 (0.7)
3.57 (9.06)
1.69 (4.3) 2.02 (5.1)
1.07 (2.7)
1.17 (3.0)
DTK-120SR
DTK-2MHLP
DTK-MB
WIRING
GND 1+
GND 1+
UNPROTECTED
IN
SUPPLY
BLK WHT GRN
Line 1 Neut GND
Line 1 Neut GND
BLK WHT GRN
PROTECTED
OUT
EQUIPMENT
1 2+ 2 GND
1 2+ 2 GND
16
DTK-120SR Expected System Voltages 120 VAC L-N L-G N-G Voltages 120 120 0
Note: If the DTK-120S15A is not installed inside the control panel/cabinet, provide an appropriate enclosure per NEC, NFPA, and all applicable codes.
DTK-MB
MODEL DTK-2MHLP5BWB DTK-2MHLP12BWB DTK-2MHLP24BWB DTK-120SR DESCRIPTION Surge protector, 5 VDC data line with base Surge protector, 12 VDC data line with base Surge protector, 24 VDC data line with base Surge protector, 120 VAC in-line, 20A continuous
964
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!


54KA SERIES CONNECTED SURGE PROTECTOR WITH DRY CONTACTS DTK-120SRD, DTK-TSS4D
Ditek's 54kA Series Connected Surge Protectors with Dry Contacts protects 120V power on electrical circuits and control panels and has Dry Contacts for remote notication of surge protection status. The hybrid series design provides maximum critical load protection, with EMI/RFI ltering. The DTK-120SRD is ideal for use in UL listed control panels where a UL Recognized component is required. LED indicates the protection status. DTK-TSS4D is ideal for use when a UL Listed SPD is required.
DTK-120SRD
Series design for fast response and best protection Multi-stage hybrid circuit design Suitable for use on circuit breakers rated at 10kA AIC UL 1449 & 1283 EMI/RFI ltering Form C Dry Contact circuit DTK-TSS4D only in NEMA 4X weatherproof enclosure 10 Year limited warranty
DTK-TSS4D
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage Short Circuit Current Rating Nominal Discharge Current Rating Maximum Continuous Current Peak Surge Current Temperature Range Protection DTK-120SRD DTK-TSS4D 120VAC 150VAC 10kA 3kA 20A 54,000 Amps 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) Type 2 component assembly Type 2 SPD Housing Type DTK-120SRD DTK-TSS4D Dimensions DTK-120SRD ABS Polycarbonate
6.87" W x 3.50" H x 2.50" D (17.45 x 8.89 x 6.35 cm) DTK-TSS4D 9.50" W x 6.25" H x 3.63" D EXAMPLE REMOTE MONITORING (24.1 x 15.9 x 9.2 cm) USING FACP FOR NOTIFICATION Weight DTK-120SRD DTK-120SRD 0.76 lb (0.34 kg) SURGE PROTECTOR (TYPICAL) DTK-TSS4D 1.85 lb (0.84 kg) Approvals cUL, UL 1283, UL1449 3rd Edition L L 120VAC - 1 SINGLE POLE BLACK Warranty 10 year limited
25 Amp Max BREAKER, TO BE FIELD VERIFIED
WHITE GREEN
N G
N G
120VAC TO FACP
16
WIRING
EXAMPLE REMOTE MONITORING USING FACP FOR NOTIFICATION
DTK-120SRD
SURGE PROTECTOR (TYPICAL)
NC C NO
TO FACP AUX. CONTACTS OR ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MOD
EXAMPLE MONITORING CIRCUIT

DRY CONTACT
NO C NC
120VAC - 1 SINGLE POLE 25 Amp Max BREAKER, TO BE FIELD VERIFIED
BLACK WHITE GREEN
L N G
L N G
120VAC(+)
120VAC TO FACP
NEUTRAL (-)
LOAD: 120VAC. 0.5AMP (MAX)
NC C NO
TO FACP AUX. CONTACTS OR ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE
EXAMPLE MONITORING CIRCUIT

DRY CONTACT
DESCRIPTION 120V surge protector, dry contacts, hybrid design, ABS housing 120V surge protector, dry contacts, hybrid design, NEMA 4X
NEUTRAL (-)
NO C NC MODEL DTK120-SRD DTK-TSS4D 120VAC(+)
March 2014
LOAD: 120VAC. 0.5AMP (MAX)
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
965

DATA LINE SURGE PROTECTOR DRS, PC642C SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Model PC642C Series surge suppressor is a dual-pair (four wire) and the DRS Series is a single pair (two-wire) DIN rail mount module implementing three-stage hybrid technology. These modules protect against over-voltage transients with gas tubes and silicon avalanche components. In addition, sneak and fault currents are mitigated with automatic resetting fuses (PTCs). The PTCs increase resistance several orders of magnitude when over currents are present and return to normal when over-currents are removed. The ability to self-restore in this manner signicantly increases suppressor performance and survivability. FEATURES Lightning protection for low voltage signal lines Three-stage protection Plug-in and DIN rail mount modules Automatic recovery Nanosecond response time
NEW!
PC642C DRS PCB1B
Field Side
WIRING
Field Side Data Line In Unprotected Pair 2 Unprotected Pair 1 Pin 1 or 10 grounded to local buildingapproved ground Do not install your own ground rod.
9 7 5 3 1 10 8 6 4 2
Electronics Side Data Line Out Protected Pair 2 Protected Pair 1 If a shield is used, then ground at one end only. Keying Pin
Ground
DRS
Line Line Shield
Equipment Side
PC642C on PCB1B
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Clamp Response Time Peak Surge Current Life Expectancy (10%) 8, 15, 30, or 36V <1 ns <10 kA (8 x 20 s) >100 occurrences @ 2000A, 8 x 20 s Series Resistance 5 nominal Operating Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Dimensions PC642C, PCB1B 2.5"H x 1.0"W x 2.0"D (6.1 x 2.5 x 5.1 cm) DRS 2.95"H x 0.8"W x 2.35"D (7.5 x 2.0 x 6.0 cm) Capacitance Operational Current Protector Primary Secondary Third Approvals Weight Warranty 1500 pF; PC642 w/ LC option: 50 pF Maximum 150 mA @ clamp voltage Three-element gas tube (GDT) Rugged solid-state avalanche diode (SAD) Positive temp coefcient device (PTC) UL497B, File #E175287 0.06 lb (0.03 kg) 1 year
16
MODEL PC642C DRS
PCB1B
DESCRIPTION Dual-pair (four-wire) surge protector, base mount (PCB1B required) Single-pair (two-wire) surge protector, DIN rail mount -008 Clamp voltage, 8V -015 Clamp voltage, 15V -030 Clamp voltage, 30V -036 Clamp voltage, 36V -LC Low capacitance option (PC642C only) Mounting/connector base for PC642C
kele.com
March 2014
966
888-397-5353 USA
NEW!
FEATURES Protection from overvoltage transients Three-stage hybrid technology Automatic recovery Fast response time

POWER & DATA LINE SURGE PROTECTOR FAS-TEL, HSP-121BT1RU
DESCRIPTION The HSP-121BT1RU is an advanced, three-stage, hybrid solid-state power line protector. It is an in-line style surge protector designed for mounting in an enclosure or control panel to protect sensitive electronic controls from noise, surges, and spikes that are present on the power lines. The HSP-121 is UL recognized. The FAS-TEL is an advanced two-stage hybrid, solid-state phone and data line surge protector. It is designed to protect electronic equipment from unwanted surges and transients that may be present on the phone line or communications data lines. The FAS-TEL is UL Listed.
HSP-121BT1RU FAS-TEL
SPECIFICATIONS
HSP-121BT1RU Supply Voltage Supply Current LED Indication 120 VAC, 60 Hz 15A Extinguishes on overload or internal protection failure Clamping Level Maximum 325V L-N, 350V L-G 330V L-N, 400V L-G ANSI/IEEE Clamping Category C62.41 1991-CAT.C1/B3 Maximum 10,000A Surge Current 15A slowblow (GF-15S) Blown fuse Fusing will disconnect load from power source. Response Time <5 ns Terminals Connections Operating Temperature -3 to 186F (-20 to 85C) Dimensions 2.95H x 5.25W x 2.0D (7.5 x 13.3 x 5.1 cm) Weight 0.83 lb (0.38 kg) UL 1449A recognized component, Approvals File# E324279 Warranty 5 years FAS-TEL Signal Voltage 220V Peak Continuous Current Unlimited Nominal Breakdown Voltage 270V Between TIP/RING/GND Protection Capacitance 50 pF Series Resistance 8 Surge Current Maximum 100A, 10 x 1000 s Response Time <1 ns 1 female, 1 male RJ11 jacks Connections Operating Temperature -40 to 149F(-40 to 65C) Dimensions 2.0" H x 2.0" W x 1.0" D (5.1 x 5.1 x 2.5 cm) Weight 0.5 lb (0.22 kg) UL 1449 listed, File #E118759 Approvals Warranty 1 year
16
WIRING
Unprotected Side
120 VAC 15 AMPS MAX
L I N E E Q U I P
RD
BL
Protected Side To Phone or Computers
From Power Panel
AC NEUT GRD
AC NEUT GRD
To Protected Equipment
TELCO
GN
LIGHT ON - NORMAL LIGHT OFF - REQUIRES SERVICE
Hardwire or use provided 7' (2.13m) cord with male RJ
SL-WT
RJ or Hardwire
HSP-121BT1RU
MODEL HSP-121BT1RU FAS-TEL March 2014
BuildingApproved Ground
Building-Approved Ground
FAS-TEL
DESCRIPTION 120 VAC inline surge protector with terminal block Data line/telephone line protector
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
967

DIN RAIL MOUNT SURGE PROTECTION OVR DIN SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The OVR DIN Rail Surge Protection Devices are the pluggable AC DIN rail devices. They are UL 1449 3rd edition. Over 80% of transient surges are caused by internal sources such as load switching and normal equipment operations. Installation of these SPD's will provide protection to valuable equipment and help keep an operation up and running. Installation at branch panels, control panels and terminal equipment is recommended to provide the most comple protection. The OVR DIN Rail series utilize fast acting metal oxide varistor technology to limit overvoltage to values compatible with the sensitive equipment connected to the network.
NEW!
OVRT23N40320PTSU ORDERING INFORMATION
(Blank) (Blank)
FEATURES
MOV technology End of life indicator Pluggable replaceable cartidges Remote indication (only on -TSU models)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Let Through Voltage Surge Current Response Time Dimensions One Pole 120 VAC, 277 VAC, 347 VAC, 480 VAC, 600 VAC, 230 VAC See technical data sheet for specications 15 kA, 40 kA, 70 kA <25ns
16
0.7" W x 3.3" H x 2.6" D (1.8 x 8.4 x 6.4cm) Two Pole 1.4" W x 3.3" H x 2.6" D (3.6 x 8.4 x 6.4 cm) Three Pole 2.1" W x 3.3" H x 2.6" D (5.3 x 8.4 x 6.4 cm) One Pole + N 1.4" W x 3.3" H x 2.6" D (3.6 x 8.4 x 6.4 cm) Two pole + N 2.1" W x 3.3" H x 2.6" D (5.3 x 8.4 x 6.4 cm) Three Pole + N 2.8" W x 3.3" H x 2.6" D (7.1 x 8.4 x 6.4 cm) Weight One Pole 0.25 lb (0.1 kg) Two Pole/ One Pole + N 0.5 lb (0.2 kg) Three Pole/Two Pole + N 0.75 lb (0.3 kg) Three Pole + N 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Approvals CE, RoHS, UR File #E322885 Warranty 1 year
Type 2 surge protector, 2 phase + neutral, 40 kA surge capacity, 320V, pluggable, with optional auxiliary contact
968
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION

LIGHTNING ARRESTER 392-SVSR2
The Model 392-SVSR2 is a two-pair gas tube lightning arrester in a plastic outdoor enclosure. It protects the communication lines that run between buildings against high voltage transients caused by motors, transmitters, lightning, etc. Transients can be harmful and even capable of destroying building automation systems. It is recommended that the Model 392-SVSR2 be used at all points where communication cables exit or enter a building. To protect low voltage communication inputs on Building Automation Systems, this device should be used in conjunction with an appropriate voltage level surge protector such as a Model DTK-2LVLP.
SPECIFICATIONS
Impulse Breakdown @100/V/sec 300-750V 150 VDC extinguishing in DC Holder less than 150 ms Insulation Resistance (initial) <100 M 5 pF Capacitance Impulse Life Specication Rated Heavy-Duty 80% survival to 400 surges of 500A AC Discharge Current 65A, 11 cycle, 60 Hz End-Of-Life Limits Insulation Resistance <1 M DC Breakdown Voltage <180V Impulse Breakdown Voltage <900V Vented (back-up) DC Breakdown Voltage <1600V (100-200 avg) Max Single Impulse Discharge Current 10 kA, 8 x 20 sec surge 3.5"H x 3.75"W x 2.5"D Dimensions (8.9 x 9.5 x 6.4 cm) Weight 0.85 lb (0.39 kg) Approvals UL listed File #E2332
392-SVSR2 WIRING
392-SVSR2
Use #6 AWG solid wire to copper clad steel ground rod (min. 8'/2.4m deep) through shortest path with no sharp bends.
If a shield is used, then ground at one end only.

(white) (orange) (white) (orange) (red) (red) (blue)
16
(blue)
Notes: To protect low-voltage communication circuits, this device should be used in conjunction with an appropriate voltage level surge protector such as the Model DTK-2LVLP. When applying surge protectors, use of the protection zone concept is recommended.
MODEL 392-SVSR2 DESCRIPTION Lightning arrester
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
969

METAL OXIDE VARISTOR, TRANSZORB V130LA1, V39ZA1, V47ZA1, 1.5KE56CA
DESCRIPTION Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) and Transzorb Voltage Transient Suppressors reduce high voltage spikes that could damage or confuse sensitive electronic circuits. Voltage spikes often will cause digital logic circuits to select an incorrect logic state or lock up entirely. CAUSES OF VOLTAGE SPIKES Voltage spikes appear in the user's circuit in three main ways: Voltage spikes come in on the power distribution bus and 1. are coupled to the user's circuits by the winding-to-winding capacitance of the user's power transformers. 2. Voltage spikes are generated in the power transformer secondary when the power transformer primary is turned off and the transformer's magnetic eld collapses.
NEW!
V130LA1 V39ZA1 V47ZA1 1.5KE56CA
3. Voltage spikes are generated within the user's circuits when an inductive load is switched off and the load's magnetic eld collapses. Voltage noise is also generated at the switched contacts and is radiated to the wires leading to the user's microprocessor. OPERATION When a voltage at or below the suppressor's nominal voltage is applied, the suppressor acts essentially like an open circuit. When a high-voltage spike appears across the suppressor the suppressor conducts or turns on, shunting the excess energy to the circuit return path, thereby reducing the amplitude of the voltage spike. When the voltage spike subsides, the suppressor reverts back to its open circuit state. MOV suppressors are bi-directional and can be used to protect both AC and DC circuits. They provide a somewhat soft clamping action in that the amplitude of the reduced voltage spike rises noticeably with the amount of energy contained in the spike. Transzorb suppressors come in unidirectional and bi-directional versions. The uni-directional versions are polarity-sensitive and can only be used in DC applications. The bi-directional versions may be used in both AC and DC circuits just like the MOV. Transzorbs have a faster response time and a much harder clamping action than MOVs because voltage spikes are clipped at a more consistent level independent of their energy content. The Transzorb sold by Kele is a bi-directional version. Note: Kele carries the varistors and transzorbs most often specied by the BAS manufacturers. They are generalpurpose in nature and should cover most applications at the recommended voltage.
WIRING
Power Transformer
120 VAC
24 VAC
24V 120V MOV MOV Suppresses external voltage spikes coming from the power distribution bus and the spikes from switching the power transformer off.
Transformer Installation
Circuit Hot MOV (both places) Inductive Load (relay, EP valve, etc.)
Load Switch (mechanical or electrical) Circuit Return Reduces mechanical switch arcs and electronic switch over-voltage breakdown. MOV voltage should match load circuit voltage.
16
Coil and Switch Installation
AGENCY APPROVALS
V130LA V39ZA1/V47ZA1 1.5KE56CA UL-recognized component, File #E75961 and E56529 UL-recognized component, File #E135010 UL-recognized component, File #E116110
MODEL V130LA1 V39ZA1 V47ZA1 1.5KE56CA DESCRIPTION 130 VAC/175 VDC varistor voltage transient suppressor 25 VAC/31 VDC varistor voltage transient suppressor 30 VAC/38 VDC varistor voltage transient suppressor 24 VAC/VDC transzorb voltage transient suppressor
970
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
To Find Direct Current hp x 746 E x %eff kW x 1000 E Amperes (I) when horsepower is known Amperes (I) when kilowatts is known Amperes (I) when kVA is known Kilowatts (kW) kVA Horsepower (output) I x E x %eff 746 IxE 1000

POWER EQUATIONS
FORMULAS TO DETERMINE AMPERES, hp, kW, and kVA
Alternating Current Single-Phase Three-Phase hp x 746 hp x 746 E x %eff x pf 1.73 x E x %eff x pf kW x 1000 kW x 1000 E x pf 1.73 x E x pf kVA x 1000 kVA x 1000 E 1.73 x E I x E x pf I x E x 1.73 x pf 1000 1000 IxE I x E x 1.73 1000 1000 I x E x %eff x pf I x E x 1.73 x %eff x pf 746 746
COMMON ELECTRICAL TERMS

Ampere (I) Volt (E) Ohm (R) Unit of current or rate of flow of electricity Unit of electromotive force Unit of resistance Ohms Law: I = E R (DC or 100% pf) Motor efficiency Note: If unknown assume %eff x pf = 0.7 for 25 hp or less 0.8 above 25 hp 1,000,000 ohms Unit of apparent power E x I (single-phase) E x I x 1.73 (three-phase) 1000 volt - amperes Ratio of true to apparent power W or kW = COS ( = angle current leads or lags voltage) VA kVA Unit of electrical work One watt for one hour 3.413 Btu 1000 watt hours Measure of time rate of doing work Equivalent of raising 33,000 pounds 1 foot in 1 minute 746 watts
%eff Megohm Volt amperes (VA)
Kilovolt Amperes (kVA) Power Factor (pf)
Watt Hour (Wh)
16
Kilowatt Hour (kWh) Horsepower (hp)
MOTOR APPLICATION FORMULAS

Torque (lb-ft) = hp x 5250 rpm hp x 321,000 rpm x shaft dia 3
Shaft stress = (pounds per square inch) For pumps Horsepower Speed Synchronous rpm Percent slip
gpm x head in feet x specific gravity* (*Water - 1.00, Ethylene glycol - 1.125) 3960 x mechanical efficiency of pump Hertz x 120 Poles synchronous rpm - full load rpm x 100 synchronous rpm
= =
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
971

POWER EQUATIONS
SINGLE-PHASE VOLTAGE DROP
V V
amps x (length of circuit in ft) x 2* x (ohms per 1000 ft) 1000 I x L x 2* x R

* Change to 1.73 for three-phase
Wire Size AWG (Stranded) 24 22 20 18 16 14 12
NEW!
ohms/1000 ft (@ 77 F) 25.67 16.46 10.35 6.512 4.095 2.576 1.620
A
Line
SINGLE-PHASE (VAC)
A
Line
120(240)(480) N
120(240) N
Ground
240(480) 120(240)
Ground
Two-wire
Line
Three-wire
POLYPHASE (VAC)
A 120(240)(480) 120(240)(480) C B 120(240)(480) Three-phase Three-wire C N B 120(240) 240(480) 120(240) Three-phase Four-wire Delta A 240(480)
16
208(416)
208(480) A B 120(277) N 120(277) C Three-phase Four-wire Wye 120(277) 208(480) 208(480)
972
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS BURDEN CALCULATION STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3:

DETERMININGBURDENFORCURRENT TRANSFORMERS
If a current transformer (CT) reads low, then the secondary is probably overloaded. Burden is the load which may be imposed on a transformer secondary by cables and connected devices without causing an error greater than the stated accuracy classication. Lower burden and proper sizing can improve the accuracy of the CT. It is a good idea to check your CT burden if the CT primary rating is under 200A. Burden is expressed in ohms impedance or volt-amperes for current transformers. The standard burden limits are dened by ANSI C57.13.
CTs carry an ANSI burden designation "B" followed by the ohms limit (e.g., B0.1). Below is a typical CT specication in our catalog: Model # Current ANSI Meter Class at 60 Hz Ratio B0.1 B0.2 B0.5 2.5 VA 5 VA 12.5 VA 600T-122 0.6 1.2 1.2 1200:5 Allowable burden in ohms (0.5 max) Allowable burden in volt-amperes (12.5 VA max)
Accuracy at burden above (e.g., 1.2%) CT primary to secondary ratio
You can see from the above example that if the total burden (wire plus device) is only 2.5 VA, the accuracy of the reading will be 0.6%. If a higher burden (up to 12.5 VA) is used, the accuracy will be 1.2%. For lower-line currents, the accuracy at 10% of the CT rating (120A through a 1200:5 CT) is double the published value. On the above example, at 2.5 VA burden, the accuracy would be 1.2%. At a 12.5 VA burden, the accuracy would be 2.4%.
Determine the burden of the connected device in VA or ohms impedance. This should be on the device data sheet. Add impedance of the secondary wire run. Measure the length of the wire run between current transformer and the burden (e.g., meter, relay, transducer, etc.). Refer to Nomogram No. 2 and determine the resistance, in ohms, of the wires that connect the secondary of the current transformer to the devices. The Nomogram makes allowances for the return wire. Add this resistance from Nomogram No. 2 to the impedance of the connected burdens. Nomogram No.1 will help convert ohms to VA. Make sure the total burden does not exceed the specied limits for the chosen CT.
16
Burden = RW + RD RD CT Line
Devices (Meter, Relay, Transducer, etc.)
Wire = Rw
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
973

SURGE PROTECTION CHART
Device DTK-120SR HSP-121BT1RU
SURGE PROTECTION CHART FAS-TEL

Device PC642C-008 DTK-120SR PC642C-012 HSP-121BT1RU Device PC642C-015 FAS-TEL DTK-120SR PC642C-030 PC642C-008 HSP-121BT1RU DTK-2MHLP5BWB
PC642C-012 FAS-TEL DTK-2MHLP12BWB PC642C-015 PC642C-008 DTK-2MHLP24BWB PC642C-030 PC642C-012 DTK-2MHLP36BWB DTK-2MHLP5BWB PC642C-015 DTK-2MHLP48BWB DTK-2MHLP12BWB PC642C-030 DTK-2MHLP75BWB DTK-2MHLP24BWB DTK-2MHLP5BWB 392-SVSR2 DTK-2MHLP36BWB DTK-2MHLP12BWB DTK-MRJ11 DTK-2MHLP48BWB DTK-2MHLP24BWB DTK-2LVLP DTK-2MHLP75BWB DTK-2MHLP36BWB DTK-120HW 392-SVSR2 DTK-2MHLP48BWB V130LA1 DTK-MRJ11 DTK-2MHLP75BWB V39ZA1 / V47ZA1 DTK-2LVLP 392-SVSR2 1.5KE56CA DTK-120HW DTK-MRJ11 DRS-008 V130LA1 DTK-2LVLP DRS-015 V39ZA1 / V47ZA1 DTK-120HW DRS-030 1.5KE56CA V130LA1 DRS-036 DRS-008 V39ZA1 / V47ZA1 DRS-015 1.5KE56CA DRS-030 DRS-008 DRS-036 DRS-015
DRS-030 DRS-036
SURGE PROTECTION POWER AC/DC Technology Clamp 1st/2nd/3rd/4th Stage Level 5V 12V 24V 36 48 75 120V 160V X TP MOV, LC, Fused MOV MO V ,R F, L CP ,R MO O V X S U G E T ECTION315V POWER AC/DC AD, F 300V Technology Clamp 1st/2nd/3rd/4th Stage Level 5V 12V 24V 36 48 75 120V GT, AD, SUR GEPTC PROTECTION 8V POWER AC/DC 16 0 V X TP MOV, Fused GTLC, , AD , PTCMOV 1 2 V Technology Clamp M O V , F , L C , M O V 3 1 5 V X 1st/2nd/3rd/4th Stage Level 5V 12V 24V 36 48 75 120V GT, AD, PT C 15V F 300V 16 X TP MOV, LC, Fused GTAD, , AD , PTC MOV 30V GT, AD, PTC 8V MO VAD, ,F ,L C ,M 3 1 5 V X 6 .8 X GT, FOV GT , A D , P T C 1 2 V AD, F F 300V 21.6 X AD, GT, , A D , P T C 1 5 V G T GT, AD, PTC 8V 39 X AD, GT, F GT , ,, P C 3 0 V G T ,A AD D PT T C 1 2 V 5 7 X AD, GT, F 6 8 X GAD, T , AGT, D , PF T C 1.5 7V 6 X AD, GT, F 23 10 .6 X GAD, T , AGT, D , PF T C V 10 8 X AD, GT, F 3 X AD, GT, F 69 .8 X AD, GT, F Dual GT 300-750V X X X X 51 7.6 X AD, GT, F AD, GT, F F 2 X MOV, 184-224V 76 X AD, GT, F 9 27V X AD, GT, F MOV 15V3or 108 X AD, GT, F 5 7 X AD, GT, M OV F 1 3 0V X Dual GT 300-750V X X X X 7 6 X AD, GT, M OV F 1 3 0V X MOV, F 184-224V 1 0 8 X AD, GT, M OV F 2 5 V X MOV 15V or 27V Dual 300-750V X X X X Tra nszoGT rb (AD) 56V MOV 130V X MOV, 184-224V GT, AD, F PTC 8V MOV 130V X MOV 15V 1 or 27V GT, AD, PTC 5V MOV 25V X M O V 130V X GT, A D , PTC Transzorb (AD) 56V M O V 130 X GT, A D , PTC 6V 8V GT, AD, PTC MOV 25V X GT, AD, PTC 15V Transzorb (AD) 56V GT, AD, PTC 30V GT, AD, PTC 8V GT, AD, PTC 36V GT, AD, PTC 15V GT, AD, PTC 30V GT, AD, PTC 36V
NEW!
DI DDC POINTS DO-24V AI/AO Fltg Ctrl COMMUNICATON Phone DO120V X X RS 232 RS 422 485
DI XX XX X X XX X X X XX X XX X X X X X X X X X X XX X XX X XX X X X X X X
Modem Ethernet Arcnet Short Haul
DDC POINTS COMMUNICATON X-> (model dial in w/ring) Modem DO-24V DORS RS AI/AO Fltg Ctrl 120V 232 422 X 485 X Phone Ethernet Arcnet Short Haul DDC POINTS COMMUNICATON X X X DO-24V DORS RS Modem DI 120V 232 422 485 Phone Ethernet Arcnet Short X AI/AO Fltg Ctrl X X Haul X-> (model dial in w/ring) X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X
X dial X-> (model X in w/ring)
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X X X X X connect) X-> (no ring direct X X X X X X-> (no ring direct connect) X X
X X
X X X
X X X X X
X X X X
X X X
X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X
X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
X X X X X X-> (no ring direct connect) X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X X X
X X
X
X X X
X X
X X X
X X
X X
Device Technology Fuse (F) Fuses are used to suppress high currents by failing open to the protected circuit if other SURGE PROTECTION TECHNOLOGIES
Device Technology LC (F) Fuse Thermal Fuse Device Technology LC (F) Fuse Gas Tube (GT) Thermal Fuse LC MOV or Varistor Gas Tube (GT) Thermal Fuse
Zener Diode MOV or Varistor Gas Tube (GT) PTC Diode Zener MOV or Varistor
16
Avalanche Diode (AD) PTC Zener Diode or Transorb TP MOV Diode (AD) Avalanche PTC or Transorb Types of Surges TP MOV Avalanche Diode (AD) Lightning or Transorb Power of Fluctuations Types TP MOV Surges Lightning Power Fluctuations Types of Surges Lightning Typical rise time of 1-20 microseconds, surge currents 20 kA (20,000A) to 250 kA SURGE PROTECTION CHART & TECHNOLOGIES Power Fluctuations Typically occur in 20-300 microseconds. 1. Select a surge protector with a clamping voltage that is higher than the system voltage that is being protected.
surge devices fail. Response time is less than one second. Inductive/Capacitive LC passive filter @ 60 Fuses are used to suppress high currents by Hz. failing open to the protected circuit if other Thermal fuses are used to cut out high temperatures by failing open to the protected surge devices fail. Response time ison less than one second. circuit. Response time is several seconds. Inductive/Capacitive LC passive filter @ 60 by Hz.failing open to the protected circuit if other Fuses are used to suppress high currents Gas tubes areare used to shunt ground very high voltages (>300V), such as protected lightning. Thermal fuses to cut to out on by failing open to the surge devices fail.used Response time is high less temperatures than one second. Response time is about 150 milliseconds. circuit. Response time is several Inductive/Capacitive LC passiveseconds. filter @ 60 Hz. Metal oxide varistors are used very to shunt ground(>300V), low to medium voltages Gas tubes are used to (MOV) shunt to ground highto voltages Thermal fuses are used to cut out on high temperatures by failing such openas to lightning. the protected (15-130V)time at low current. Typical response time is five nanoseconds. Response is about 150 milliseconds. circuit. Response time is several seconds. Zener diodes are used to clip and shunt to ground medium voltages (200V). Typical Metal oxide varistors (MOV) are to very shunt to ground low to medium voltages Gas tubes are used to shunt to used ground high voltages (>300V), such as lightning. response time is less than one nanosecond. (15-130V) lowis current. Typical response time is five nanoseconds. Responseat time about 150 milliseconds. Positive temperature coefficient thermistors open the circuit (200V). during a surge and Zener are used(MOV) to clip are and(PTC) shuntto toshunt ground Typical Metal diodes oxide varistors used to medium ground voltages low to medium voltages suppresstime low voltages (8-30V). Typical response time is less than one second. response is less than one nanosecond. (15-130V) at low current. Typical response time is five nanoseconds. Silicon avalanche suppression diodesthermistors are used to clip and shunt during to ground low and Positive temperature coefficient (PTC) open the circuit a surge Zener diodes are used to clip and shunt to ground medium voltages (200V). Typical to medium voltages (8-30V). Typical response time is less than five nanoseconds. suppress low voltages (8-30V). Typical response time is less than one second. response time is less than one nanosecond. Thermal Protected MOV Silicon avalanche suppression diodes are used to clip andthe shunt to ground Positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistors open circuit duringlow a surge and to medium voltages (8-30V). Typical response timetime is less than than five nanoseconds. suppress low voltages (8-30V). Typical response is less one second. Thermal Protected suppression MOV Silicon avalanche diodes are used to clip and shunt to ground low Typical rise time of 1-20 microseconds, surge currents 20 kA (20,000A) to 250 kA to medium voltages (8-30V). Typical response time is less than five nanoseconds. Typically occur in 20-300 microseconds. Thermal Protected MOV Typical rise time of 1-20 microseconds, surge currents 20 kA (20,000A) to 250 kA Typically occur in 20-300 microseconds.
974
2. Select Apply the "Protection Zone keep all is grounds inside the protection zone same potential. If 1. a surge protector with Concept," a clampingand voltage that higher than the system voltage that at is the being protected. different ground potentials are present on electronic equipment, damage will occur regardless of the suppression 2. Apply used. the "Protection Zone Concept," and keep all grounds inside the protection zone at the same potential. If different ground potentials are onvoltage electronic equipment, damage will occur regardless the suppression 1. Select a surge protector with apresent clamping that is higher than the system voltage that isof being protected. 3. used. Protect all electrical and data circuits entering or leaving the protection zone at the protection zone ground win2. Apply the "Protection Concept," and keep all grounds inside the protection at the sameis potential. If dow. Doing this keepsZone circuits at a safe voltage with respect to the ground window. zone This safe voltage the clamp 3. different Protect electrical and data circuits entering or leaving the protection zone the protection zone ground winground potentials are present on electronic equipment, damage will at occur regardless of the suppression voltage all (let-through voltage) of the respective suppressors. dow. Doing this keeps circuits at a safe voltage with respect to the ground window. This safe voltage is the clamp used. voltage (let-through voltage) of the respective suppressors. 3. Protect all electrical and data circuits entering or leaving the protection zone at the protection zone ground window. Doing this keeps at a safe voltage withNEED respect to the ground window. This safe voltage is the clampMarch 2014 888-397-5353 USAcircuits kele.com WHEN YOU IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE. POWER AC/DC DDC POINTS COMMUNICATION PROTECTION voltageSURGE (let-through voltage) of the respective suppressors.
Device Technology Clamp 5V 12V 24V 120V DI AI/AO DO-24V DO-120V RS RS RS Phone Ethernet Arcnet Modem
NEW!
Data Line The Protection Zone Window PC642C Surge Protector SP * SPG * Power Strip

Surge protectors are relatively simple devices, yet they must be carefully selected and applied to function properly. When selecting and applying surge protectors, there are a few essentials to keep in mind. First, the operating voltage of the system is important. Surge protectors are voltage sensitive switches and must not clamp the normal system voltage. The surge protector clamp voltage must be higher than the system voltage. For example, a 24 VDC system voltage generally uses a 30 volt surge protector. Second, some surge protectors have an input side and an output side. If installed backwards, they will fail prematurely. Lastly, grounding is often misunderstood when it comes to proper installation of surge suppressors. This can seriously affect the performance of protection systems and lead to electronics damage. Use the Protection Zone Concept to effectively apply surge protectors to EMS and BAS installations. The Protection Zone The protection zone is an imaginary circle drawn around and encompassing electronic equipment items that are located in close proximity to each other (see Figure 1). Everything passing through the imaginary circle should be commonly grounded and should have surge protection.
The single point ground is a common ground point or node used in the protection zone to bond together all ground references inside the zone. Surge currents passing through a ground conductor generate a voltage across the conductor. This is primarily due to inductance of the wire. Inductance is highly dependent on conductor length; therefore, it is very important to keep suppressor ground wires to the single point ground very short. The protection zone window is a hypothetical small opening in the zone through which all electrical conductors enter or leave. The single point ground is located at the protection zone window. Figure 2 illustrates a typical installation of equipment within a small area; however, there are three problems associated with the installation depicted. Problem #1 There are four ground references in Figure 2. AC outlet #1, AC outlet #2, AC outlet #3, and the data line all present separate ground references. The three AC outlet grounds are connected together at the power panel many feet away. The ground wire lengths offer enough inductance to effectively create separate grounds. In addition, the data line may run hundreds of feet to yet another ground reference in remote circuitry. Problem #2 Notice in Figure 2 there is substantial distance between various conductors leaving the imaginary circle of the protection zone. Even if ground conductors were bonded together, destructive voltages would exist during a surge due to wire inductance. Problem #3 While the data line shows a surge suppressor, the lack of suppressors in the power receptacles leaves an opening in the protection zone. Even the best data line suppressor cannot prevent damage under these conditions. Solving the Problems The problems listed for the installation in Figure 2 are solved using the Protection Zone Concept. Figure 1 illustrates the proper installation: All devices are powered from the same AC outlet. The AC service incorporates a Model HSP-121BT1RU surge suppressor. The single point ground is established in the protection zone window. Data line suppressor(s), Model PC642C, are added at the single point ground. A ground bus bar is located at the ground area to facilitate multiple ground connections.
16
Data Line To Approved Ground
Single Point Ground AC Service
The Protection Zone
*Ground wires between single point ground and surge protectors must be very short.
AC Service Surge Protector HSP-121BT1RU
Figure 1. The Protection Zone, Window, and Single Point Ground
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
975

Figure 2. Typical Installation of Equipment within a Small Area
AC Power Ground #1 AC Power Data Line AC Outlet #1 Ground #2
AC Outlet #2 Data Line Surge Protector SP Data Line Data Ground
NEW!
Summary Remember the following when applying surge protection:
Building 1 Building 2 Data Line Building N CPU SP SP SP SP SP C C C C C C C C CPU Main Processing Equipment C Distributed EMS/BAS Controllers SP Surge Protector
with the main data line. When connected in this manner, no more than two surge protectors are connected in series. Using the Protection Zone Concept, locate the data line surge protectors within the protection zone window along with an AC service outlet surge protector for each respective controller. Remember to keep the ground connections to the single point ground very short.
AC Power
AC Outlet #3
1. Keep all grounds inside the protection zone at the same potential. If different ground potentials are present on electronic equipment, damage will occur regardless of the suppression used. 2. Protect all electrical and data circuits entering or leaving the protection zone at the protection zone ground window. Doing this keeps circuits at a safe voltage with respect to the ground window. This safe voltage is the clamp voltage (let-through voltage) of the respective suppressors.
Ground #3
The Protection Zone
Ground wires to the suppressors are very short. An optional (depending on code) ground conductor connects the ground bus to the main building power ground. This conductor may be quite long, but that does not create a problem now that the ground area has been established. Protecting Multibuilding Data and Control Systems The Protection Zone Concept can also be applied to multibuilding, multidrop data and control systems. In Figure 3, the surge protectors located at the building entrance are improperly positioned to protect the CPU and the controllers. During lightning activity, ground potentials at opposite ends of a building can be thousands of volts, causing damage to electronic equipment. Also, surge protectors for data lines that enter buildings have series resistance. The series resistance of the surge protectors is additive. The total series resistance often is too great and can cause communication or data line problems. The installation in Figure 3 shows ve protectors in series over the length of the data line. To properly configure surge protection on a multibuilding, multidrop system (see Figure 4), connect the surge protector on each controller drop so that the protector is not in series
Building 1 SP CPU SP AC Power Data Line Building 2
16
Figure 3. Improper Positioning of Surge Protectors
The majority of surge protection installations are fairly simple and only involve bonding suppressor grounds to AC service grounds at the ground window. Existing sites may involve some rewiring to accomplish the best results. In order to keep the data line surge suppressor ground and AC service ground wires very short, wiring must sometimes be moved. When applying surge protectors, using the Protection Zone Concept will effectively protect EMS and BAS installations.
Building N
* *
SP C SP AC Power
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
C SP AC Power
C SP AC Power
C SP AC Power
C SP AC Power
C SP AC Power
C SP AC Power
C SP AC Power
CPU
Main Processing Equipment
Distributed EMS/BAS Controllers
* Conductor from data line SP ground and AC power
SP Surge Protector
<
Model HSP-121BT1RU AC Power Surge Protector Model PC642C Data Line Surge Protector
SP ground to single point ground must be very short
Figure 4. Proper Positioning of Surge Protectors
976
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
HUMIDITY
Kele Stocks Most Major Brands and a Huge Inventory of Power Supplies You Need to Get the Job Done.
XFMR Series | p. 977
E100E | p. 981
RIB TR Series | p. 985
T-PB Series | p. 987
DCP-1.5-W | p. 995
DCP-250 Series | p. 996
POWER SUPPLIES
POWER SUPPLIES
MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Power Supplies T-PB Series Air Products and Controls Enclosed 24 VAC Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 PSB40AB10, PSB100AB10, PSC40AB10, PSC100AB10 Functional Devices Enclosed 24 VAC Class 2 Power Source .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988 PSH Series Functional Devices Enclosed 24 VAC Class 2 Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989 PSH200A, PSH300A, PSH500A, PSMN300A, and PSMN500A Functional Devices Enclosed Power Source - 100 VA, 24 VAC Class 2 Outputs . . . . . 991 S1K and SDU Series Sola/Hevi-Duty Uninterruptible Power Supplies - UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 PSH550-UPS Functional Devices Uninterruptible Power Supply. . . . . . . . . 993 DCPA-1.2 Kele AC / DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 DCP-1.5-W Kele DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995 DCP-250 Kele Enclosed DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 DCP-524 Kele DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 SLS Series DC Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 PW2 Compact DC Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 AM-24830A Plug-in Class 2 Transformer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 PS5R Series IDEC Switching Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000 SDN-P Series Din Rail Mount Power Supplies .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 SDN-C Compact Series Compact Din Rail Mount Power Supplies .. . . . . 1003 Transformers XFMR Series Control Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 Series Kele Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691-U100 Kele Class 2 Control Transformer .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AT150F, AT175F Class 2 Control Transformers with Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . E100E, E150E, E300E, E500E Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694 Series Multi-Tap Control Transformers with Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . US Transformers US Made Transformers by Functional Devices. . . . . . . . 33 Series 120 VAC Secondary Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RIB TR Series Functional Devices Control Transformers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSH500A | p. 991
691 Series | p. 979
977 979 979 980 981 982 983 984 985
US Transformers | p. 983
kele.com
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
CONTROL TRANSFORMERS XFMR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The XFMR Series of voltage transformers provide nominal 24 VAC control voltage. These transformers are intended for NEMA 1 installation and should be installed in compliance with all national and local electrical codes.
FEATURES

VA ratings from 40 VA to 500 VA Low cost One year warranty UL Listed (File #E223965) (#E223966 for HD models)
XFMR50JA
XFMR75HB
WIRING
Primary Wires* 480 VAC Gray 120 VAC White 277 VAC Brown Common Black 240 VAC Orange Red 208 VAC Secondary Wires** 24 VAC Brown or Blue XFMR100HC
XFMR150FA
POWER SUPPLIES
*XFMR40FC isolation tranformer features red 24 VAC primary wires **XFMR40HA, XFMR50HA feature secondary terminals
XFMRHD300E
SPECIFICATIONS
Model VA Rating Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Frequency Circuit Breaker Mounting
XFMR50HA XFMR50JA XFMR40FB XFMR40FC XFMR50FA XFMR150FA XFMR175FA XFMR240FA XFMR375FA XFMR40HA XFMR50HB XFMR75HB XFMR75HC XFMR100HC XFMRHD100E XFMRHD150E XFMRHD300E XFMRHD500E March 2014
50 VA 75 VA 40 VA 40 VA 50 VA 150 VA 175 VA 240 VA 375 VA 40 VA 50 VA 75 VA 75 VA 100 VA 100 VA 150 VA 300 VA 500 VA
120/208/240 VAC 120/208/240 VAC 120 VAC 24 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC 208/240 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC 120/208/240 VAC 120/208/240/277/480 VAC 120/208/240/277/480 VAC 120/208/240/277/480 VAC 120/208/240/480 VAC 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC
24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC 24 VAC
50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60
No No No No No Yes, 10A trip point No No No No Yes, 2.5A trip point Yes, 4A trip point Yes, 4A trip point Yes, 4A trip point No No No No
1 Hub + Foot 1 Hub + Foot 2 Hub + Foot 1 Hub + Foot 2 Hub + Foot 1 Hub + Foot 2 Hub + Foot 1 Hub + Foot 1 Hub + Foot 1 Hub + Foot 1 Hub + Foot 1 Hub + Foot 2 Hub + Foot 2 Hub + Foot Foot Foot Foot Foot
17
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
977
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
CONTROL TRANSFORMERS XFMR SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Circuit Breaker
A B D C E
Mounting Hole
STYLE 1
STYLE 2
Circuit Breaker
MODEL
DIMENSIONS in (cm) C 2.88 (7.3) 3.04 (7.62) 2.88 (7.3) 2.88 (7.3) 2.88 (7.30) 2.88 (7.3) 3.2 (8.1) 3.2 (8.13) 4.52 (11.4) 4.52 (11.4) 3.06 (7.8) 2.88 (7.30) 3.06 (7.80) 3.06 (7.80) 3.38 (8.58) 3.22 (8.18) 3.88 (9.68) 3.88 (9.68)
WIRES
WEIGHT lb (kg)
STYLE 6 1 7 1 9 4 3 4 1 1 2 2 5 5 8 8 8 8
XFMR50HA XFMR50JA XFMR40FB XFMR40FC XFMR40HA XFMR50FA XFMR150FA XFMR175FA XFMR240FA XFMR375FA XFMR50HB XFMR75HB XFMR75HC XFMR100HC XFMRHD100E XFMRHD150E XFMRHD300E XFMRHD500E
2.79 (7.09) 3.88 (9.85) 2.48 (6.3) 2.48 (6.3) 2.48 (6.3) 2.79 (7.09) 3.55 (9.01) 4.12 (10.46) 3.72 (9.4) 4.315 (11.0) 3.45 (9.3) 2.79 (7.09) 3.87 (9.8) 4.05 (10.29) 3.35 (8.50) 3.60 (9.15) 4.80 (12.20) 5.93 (13.70)
2.17 (5.5) 2.5 (6.35) 2.17 (5.5) 2.17 (5.5) 2.17 (5.5) 2.17 (5.5) 3.79 (9.6) 3.8 (9.7) 3.8 (9.7) 3.8 (9.7) 2.5 (6.4) 2.17 (5.50) 2.5 (6.4) 2.5 (6.4) 2.89 (7.33) 3.78 (9.60) 4.49 (11.40) 4.49 (11.40)
1.81 (4.6) 2 (5.08) 1.81 (4.6) 1.81 (4.6) 1.81 (4.6) 1.81 (4.6) 3.14 (7.76) 3.14 (7.98) 3.18 (8.1) 3.18 (8.1) 2.03 (5.2) 1.81 (4.60) 2.03 (5.2) 2.03 (5.2) 2.93 (74.5) 3.43 (8.72) 3.13 (7.95) 4.13 (10.50)
2.01 (5.1) 2.3 (5.84) 1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 2.01 (5.1) 2.48 (6.30) 3.19 (8.10) 3.242 (8.2) 3.83 (9.7) 1.91 (4.9) 2.01 (5.1) 2.31 (5.9) 2.51 (6.38) 2.81 (7.15) 3.12 (7.93) 3.74 (9.51) 3.74 (9.51)
8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) Terminals Terminals Terminals Terminals
2.56 (1.16) 1.73 (0.79) 1.73 (0.79) 1.56 (0.71) 4.32 (1.95) 3.86 (1.75) 5.16 (2.45) 7.28 (3.09) 8.60 (3.91) 12.57 (5.71) 3.31 (1.50) 3.86 (1.75) 3.86 (1.75) 4.85 (2.20) 4.20 (1.91) 6 (2.73) 9 (4.10) 12.5 (5.68)
STYLE 3 Circuit Breaker
STYLE 4 Secondary Screw Terminals
STYLE 6
POWER SUPPLIES
STYLE 7
STYLE 8 Secondary Screw Terminals
Double-Gang Plate STYLE 9
17
MODEL XFMR50HA XFMR50JA XFMR40FB XFMR40FC XFMR50FA XFMR150FA XFMR175FA XFMR240FA XFMR375FA XFMR40HA XFMR50HB XFMR75HB XFMR75HC XFMR100HC XFMRHD100E XFMRHD150E XFMRHD300E XFMRHD500E DESCRIPTION Transformer 120/208/240:24 V 50 VA Transformer 120/208/240:24 V 75 VA Transformer 120:24 VAC 40 VA Transformer 24:24 VAC 40 VA Transformer 120:24 VAC 50 VA Transformer 120:24 VAC 150 VA Transformer 208/240:24 VAC 175 VA Transformer 120:24 VAC 240 VA Transformer 120:24 VAC 375 VA Transformer 120/208/240:24V 40VA Transformer 120/208/240/277/480:24 VAC 50 VA Transformer 120/208/240/277/480:24 VAC 75 VA Transformer 120/208/240/277/480:24 VAC 75 VA Transformer 120/208/240/480:24 VAC 100 VA Transformer 120/240:24 V 100 VA Transformer 120/240:24 V 150 VA Transformer 120/240:24 V 300 VA Transformer 120/240:24 V 500 VA
978
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
KELE CONTROL TRANSFORMERS 691 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 691 Series of stepdown voltage transformers provide nominal 24 VAC control voltage from 120 VAC primary supply. These transformers are designed for NEMA 1 locations. They should be installed in compliance with all national and local electrical codes.
FEATURES

691-K2A
Low cost Fully enclosed with metal end bells Compact size Resettable secondary circuit breaker (691-U100 Only) Dual threaded hubs (691-U100 Only)
691-U100
691-K1A
691-K0A
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Frequency VA Rating Mounting Conduit Connection Operating Temperature Wire Length Weight Warranty Approvals Circuit Breaker 691-K0A 120 VAC 24 VAC 60 Hz 40 VA Hub or foot 1/2" (1.3 cm) male threads 8" (20.3 cm) 2.1 lb (0.95 kg) 1 year
UL1585, UL5085-1 & 3 listed, Class 2 File #E99227
691-K1A 120 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 100 VA Hub or foot 1/2" (1.3 cm) male threads 8" (20.3 cm) 3.5 lb (1.6 kg) 1 year
UL1585, UL5085-1 & 2 listed, (not class 2) File #E250952
691-K2A 120 VAC 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 170 VA Hub or foot 1/2" (1.3 cm) male threads 8" (20.3 cm) 6.3 lb (2.9 kg) 1 year
UL1585, UL5085-1 & 2 listed, (not class 2) File #E250952
691-U100 120 VAC 24 VAC 60 Hz 96 VA Hub or foot Two 1/2" (1.27 cm) male connections 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) 8" (20.3 cm) 4.9 lb (2.2 kg) 3 years
UL1585 listed, Class 2, File #E316704
POWER SUPPLIES
14 to 104F (-10 to 40C) 14 to 104F (-10 to 40C) 14 to 104F (-10 to 40C)
Manual reset, 4A trip

3.12 (7.93)
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
in (cm)
D
C E
Primary (120 VAC) Black (120V), White (N)
3.13 (7.95) 3.0 (7.62) 1/2" (1.3 cm) Male Conduit Threads Secondary Wires (24 VAC) Brown (COM), Red (24 V) Primary Wires (120 VAC) Black (120 V), White (N)
3.80 (9.65)
3.2 (8.13)
3.13 (7.95)
17
1/2" (1.3 cm) Male Conduit Threads
Secondary (24 VAC) Red, Red
4.0 (10.16) 8" (20.32) Primary Wires (120 VAC) Black (120V) / White (N)
3/8" x 3/16" Slots (4) (0.953) x (0.476)
Circuit Breaker
DIMENSIONS MODEL 691-K1A 691-K2A A 2.6 (6.7) 3.1 (8.0) B C D 3.0 3.2 2.5 (7.7) (8.2) (6.4) 3.8 4.1 3.3 (9.6) (10.3) (8.3) E 2.2 (5.7) 2.4 (6.1)
2.5 (6.35)
2.06 (5.23)
691-K1A/691-K2A Transformers
691-K0A Transformer
691-U100
8" (20.32) Secondary Wires (24 VAC) Brown (COM) / Orange (24V)
MODEL 691-K0A 691-K1A 691-K2A 691-U100 March 2014 DESCRIPTION Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 100 VA Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 170 VA Class 2 control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 96 VA
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
979
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
CLASS 2 CONTROL TRANSFORMERS WITH BREAKER AT150F, AT175F
DESCRIPTION
Model AT150F and AT175F transformers provide power to nominal 24 VAC circuits in heating/cooling systems. Although the transformers are typically used in heating/cooling systems, they can be used in any application that does not exceed the load ratings. The transformers include a manual reset button for resetting the circuit breaker. They also meet NEC Class 2 "not wet" and Class 3 "wet" requirements and are UL listed under UL1585. These transformers can be foot or hub mounted.
FEATURES
Multi-tap primary connections Color-coded lead wires Manually resettable circuit breaker Meets NEC Class 2 "not wet" and Class 3 "wet" transformer requirements
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Primary Voltage 120/208/240 VAC, 208/277/480 VAC 24 VAC 60 Hz AT150F: 50 VA, AT175F:75 VA Foot or hub 1/2" male NPT 9" (22.8 cm), color coded 3 lb (1.36 kg) UL1585, UL5085-3 listed, File #E14881, CSA approved, File #LR95329-18 NEC Class 2 "not wet", Class 3 "wet" 1 year
in (cm)
0.44 (1.18)
A
DIMENSIONS
POWER SUPPLIES
Secondary Voltage Frequency VA Rating Mounting Conduit Connection Lead Wires Weight Approvals
MODEL AT150F AT175F
1.75 (4.5) 1.75 (4.5) 3.63 (9.3) 2.13 (5.4) 1.75 (4.5) 3.94 (10.2)
0.44 (1.18) 1/2" NPT
Reset Button
3.19 (8.10)
Warranty
0.69 (1.78)
2.19 (5.56)
17
WIRING
Common** 120V (black) (white) (red) (orange)
(yellow)
Common**
Primary* Wires
240V
208V
24 VAC Secondary Wires

(blue)
208V (black)
(yellow)
Primary* Wires
480V
277V
(red) (brown) (black/red) (blue)
24 VAC Secondary Wires
120/208/240 VAC Models
208/277/480 VAC Models
* Insulate the ends of the unused primary leads by taping or capping with a solderless connector. ** Black is common with respect to the transformer windings only, not the external circuit.
MODEL AT150F1022 AT150F1030 AT175F1023 AT175F1031 DESCRIPTION Control transformer, 120/208/240:24 VAC, 50 VA with breaker Control transformer, 208/277/480:24 VAC, 50 VA with breaker Control transformer, 120/208/240:24 VAC, 75 VA with breaker Control transformer, 208/277/480:24 VAC, 75 VA with breaker
980
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
FEATURES SPECIFICATIONS
Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage VA Rating Insulation Class Terminals Temperature Rise Mounting Weight E100E E150E E300E E500E Approvals Warranty
POWER SUPPLIES
CONTROL TRANSFORMERS E100E, E150E, E300E, E500E
DESCRIPTION Models E100E, E150E, E300E, and E500E are premium performance, epoxy-encapsulated control transformers used in temperature control systems and industrial applications. These transformers are able to meet high inrush loads while providing outstanding voltage regulation, more efcient (cooler) operation, and simple installation and wiring. They are designed to provide 24 VAC control voltage from a 120/240 VAC primary supply. Precise spacing between interleaved windings for maximized voltage regulation Oversized copper windings contribute to low temperature rise Solid epoxy-encapsulation to dissipate heat efciently and completely seal coil against moisture, dirt, and other airborne contaminants Ten year warranty
DIMENSIONS
120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 24 VAC 100 VA, 150 VA, 300 VA, 500 VA 221F (105C) Plated brass binder head screws 131F (55C) Slotted feet 4.2 lb (1.9 kg) 7.0 lb (3.2 kg) 11.8 lb (5.4 kg) 17.6 lb (7.99 kg) UL506, UL5085-1 & 2 listed, File #E77014 CSA certied, File #LR14328-22 10 years
in (cm)
D
H1
H3
H2
H4
POWER SUPPLIES
X2
X1
W MODEL DIMENSION E100E E150E D 4.64 (11.8) 4.48 (11.4) W 3.38 (8.6) 4.50 (11.4) H 2.87 (7.31) 3.82 (9.7) E300E 5.09 (12.9) 5.25 (13.3) 4.45 (11.3) E500E 6.32 (16.1) 5.25 (13.3) 4.45 (11.3)
WIRING
120 VAC * H1 H3 * H2 H4 H1 H3 *Jumper clips provided. Primary Wiring 240 VAC * H2 H4 X2 X1 24 VAC
Recommended Fuses (max amps) E100E: FLM-5 E150E: FLM-10 E300E: FLM-20 E500E: FLM-30 Secondary fuse holders (FB2X) are included with all tranformers. Use a 13/32" x 1-1/2" cartridge fuse.
17
Secondary Wiring
MODEL E100E E150E E300E E500E IP20 SBEDIN DESCRIPTION Control transformer, 120/240:24V, 100 VA Control transformer, 120/240:24V, 150 VA Control transformer, 120/240:24V, 300 VA Control transformer, 120/240:24V, 500 VA ACCESSORIES Terminal cover kit for E Series Transformers DIN circuit breaker mounting kit
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
981
POWER SUPPLIES
DESCRIPTION
The 694 Series of industrial-grade multi-tap stepdown voltage transformers with manual resettable current-limiting secondary circuit breakers is ideal for use in temperature control systems. These UL listed transformers provide 24 VAC control voltage from a 120-480 VAC primary supply. The leads are clearly marked for ease of wiring. These foot-mounted transformers are designed for NEMA 1 locations and should be installed in compliance with all national and local electrical codes.
MULTI-TAP CONTROL TRANSFORMERS WITH BREAKER 694 SERIES
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
FEATURES
Multi-tap primary from 120-480 VAC Manual resettable secondary circuit breaker Foot mounting
SPECIFICATIONS
Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Frequency VA Rating Circuit Breaker 120, 208, 240, 480 VAC 24 VAC 60 Hz 694-M1A: 75 VA, 694-M2A: 100 VA, 694-M3A: 180 VA, 694-M4: 300 VA 694-M1A: Manual reset, 5A trip, 694-M2A: Manual reset, 6A trip, 694-M3A: Manual reset, 12A trip, 694-M4: Manual reset, 16A trip 356F (180C) 10" (25.4 cm) 144F (80C) Foot UL506 listed, File #E67824, UL506 listed, File #E3210 3.8 lb (1.7 kg) 6.5 lb (3.0 kg) 15.0 lb (6.8 kg) 1 year
POWER SUPPLIES
in (cm)
D
Insulation Class Wire Length Temperature Rise Mounting Approvals Weight 694-M1A, 694-M2A 694-M3A 694-M4 Warranty
Circuit Breaker
17
WIRING
M1A/M2A/M3A Black White Orange Brown Gray M4 Black White Red Orange Gray Common 120 VAC 208 VAC 240 VAC 480 VAC 0 120 208 240 480 Circuit Breaker 24
MODEL 694-M1A
24 VAC (Blue) 0 Neutral (Brown)
Primary Wiring*
Secondary Wiring
A 2.50 (6.35) 694-M2A 2.50 (6.35) 694-M3A 3.78 (9.60) 694-M4 4.52 (11.48)
DIMENSIONS B C D E 3.00 4.52 2.50 2.25 (7.62) (11.48) (6.35) (5.72) 3.00 4.52 2.50 2.25 (7.62) (11.48) (6.35) (5.72) 3.15 5.05 2.45 3.51 (8.00) (12.83) (6.22) (8.92) 3.75 5.42 3.16 3.8 (9.53) (13.77) (8.03) (9.65)
* Insulate the ends of unused primary leads.
MODEL 694-M1A 694-M2A 694-M3A 694-M4 DESCRIPTION Control Transformer, 120/208/240/480:24 VAC, 75 VA Control Transformer, 120/208/240/480:24 VAC, 100 VA Control Transformer, 120/208/240/480:24 VAC, 180 VA Control Transformer, 120/208/240/480:24 VAC, 300 VA
982
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Foot and Hub mounted models available Class 2 rated Color coded wire leads Meets Buy American ARRA 2009
POWER SUPPLIES
US MADE TRANSFORMERS BY FUNCTIONAL DEVICES US TRANSFORMERS
These US Made Transformers come in 40VA, 50VA and 100VA options. They are Class 2 and have UL, CE and cUL approvals. They all feature split bobbin construction. Some also have a secondary circuit breaker.
TR100VA100US
WIRING
Primary Wires 480 VAC Gray 277 VAC Brown 240 VAC Orange 208 VAC Red SPECIFICATIONS
Model TR40VA001US TR40VA002US TR50VA001US TR50VA004US TR50VA005US TR100VA001US TR100VA002US TR100VA004US
120 VAC Common
White Black
Secondary Wires 24 VAC Yellow 24 VAC Yellow/White
Supply Voltage 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120/240/277/480VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120/240/277/480VAC
Supply Frequency
Secondary Voltage
Over Current Protection
Mounting Foot & Single Threaded Hub Foot & Dual Threaded Hubs Foot & Single Threaded Hub Foot & Dual Threaded Hubs Foot & Single Threaded Hub Foot & Single Threaded Hub Foot & Dual Threaded Hubs Foot & Dual Threaded Hubs
Weight 2.02 lbs. 2.05 lbs. 2.14 lbs. 3.04 lbs. 2.60 lbs. 4.06 lbs. 4.13 lbs. 4.60 lbs.
50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC 24VAC
Inherently Limited Inherently Limited 3 Amp Fuse Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker
POWER SUPPLIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
D C E
Mounting Hole
Circuit Breaker
MODEL TR40VA001US TR40VA002US TR50VA001US TR50VA004US TR50VA005US TR100VA001US TR100VA002US TR100VA004US
A 2.7 (6.9) 2.7 (6.9) 2.75 (7) 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9)
B 2.2 (5.6) 2.2 (5.6) 2.2 (5.6)
DIMENSIONS in (cm) C 2.875 (7.3) 2.875 (7.3) 2.875 (7.3) 3.25 (8.3) 3.25 (8.3) 3.25 (8.3) 3.25 (8.3) 3.25 (8.3)
STYLE 1
D E 1.93 (4.9) 1.93 (4.9) 1.93 (4.9) 1.95 (5) 1.95 (5) 2.55 (6.5) 2.55 (6.5) 2.75 (7) STYLE 1 2 1 4 5 1 2 4
17
1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 2 (5.1) 2 (5.1) 2 (5.1) 2 (5.1) 2 (5.1)
2.525 (6.4) 2.525 (6.4) 2.5 (6.4) 2.5 (6.4) 2.5 (6.4)
STYLE 4
STYLE 5
MODEL TR40VA001US TR40VA002US TR50VA001US TR50VA004US TR50VA005US TR100VA001US TR100VA002US TR100VA004US March 2014 DESCRIPTION US made 40VA, 120-24V inherent limit, 1 HUB US made 40VA, 120-24V inherent limit, 2 HUB US made 50VA, 120-24V, 1 HUB, 3A fuse US made 50VA, 480/277/240/120, 24V, 2 HUB, circuit breaker US made 50VA, 120-24V, 1 HUB, circuit breaker US made 96VA, 120-24V, 1 HUB, circuit breaker US made 96VA, 120-24V, 2 HUB, circuit breaker US made 96VA, 480/277/240/120, 24V, 2 HUB, circuit breaker
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
983
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
120 VAC SECONDARY TRANSFORMERS 33 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The 33 Series of industrial-grade control transformers with 120 VAC secondary voltage is ideal for use in building automation and temperature control systems. FEATURES 24 or 120 VAC secondary voltage Single hub or foot mounting Fully enclosed Compact size Low cost
SPECIFICATIONS
Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Frequency VA Rating Insulation Class Wire Length Temperature Rise Conduit Connection Mounting Dimensions
POWER SUPPLIES
Weight Approvals Warranty
120 VAC, 208 VAC, 480/240 VAC, 277 VAC 24 VAC, 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 50 VA, 100 VA 221F (105C) 8.0" (20.32 cm), labeled 131F (55C) 1/2" (1.27 cm) male threads Hub or foot, NEMA 1 50 VA models: 3.19"H x 3.0"W x 2.5"D (8.10 x 7.62 x 6.35 cm), 100 VA models: 3.63"H x 3.38"W 2.81"D (9.22 x 8.59 x 7.14 cm) 2.7 lb (1.2 kg), 4.0 lb (1.8 kg) UL 506, UL5085-1 & 2 listed, File #E3210 CSA certied, File #LR560 10 years
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
C
B E
D A
WIRING
H1 208 or 277V H2 H1 240V H3 H2 H4
0.38 (0.95)
1/2" (1.27) Conduit Hub
DIMENSIONS
17
H1 X2 120V X1
480V H3 H2
H4
VA 50
Models -K, 17, 18, 26, 82
X2
120V
X1
100
A 3.19 (8.10) 3.63 (9.22)
B 3.0 (7.62) 3.38 (8.59)
C 2.50 (6.35) 2.81 (7.14)
D 1.69 (4.29) 2.13 (5.41)
E 2.50 (6.35) 2.50 (6.35)
Model -HLK, PM
MODEL 33-050-17 33-050-18 33-050-82 33-050-HLK 33-050-PM 33-100-17 33-100-26 33-100-82 33-100-K 33-100-PM DESCRIPTION Control transformer, 208:120V, 50 VA Control transformer, 208:24V, 50 VA Control transformer, 277:120V, 50 VA Control transformer, 480/240:24V, 50 VA Control transformer, 480/240:120V, 50 VA Control transformer, 208:120V, 100 VA Control transformer, 277:24V, 100 VA Control transformer, 277:120V, 100 VA Control transformer, 120:24V, 100 VA Control transformer, 480/240:120V, 100 VA
984
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES CONTROL TRANSFORMERS RIB TR SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RIB TR Series offers a complete line of control transformers for use in building automation and temperature control systems. The series includes transformer VA ratings from 20 VA up through 375 VA and primary voltages of 120, 208, 240, 277, and 480 VAC. Isolation transformers for 24 VAC circuits are also included. All RIB TR Series transformers are UL listed and feature split-bobbin construction. Some also have a secondary circuit breaker.
FEATURES
Complete line of control transformers from 20 VA to 375 VA Foot and hub mounting on most models All models UL listed, many are Class 2 rated Ambient temp -30 to 140F (0 to 60C) Color-coded wire leads One year warranty
RIB TR Series
SPECIFICATIONS
VA PRIMARY: SECONDARY MODEL RATING VOLTAGE (VAC) TR20VA001 20 120:24 TR20VA002 20 208:24 TR20VA003 20 24:24 (isolation) TR20VA007 20 277:24 TR40VA001 40 120:24 TR40VA002 40 120:24 TR40VA003 40 24:24 (isolation) TR40VA004 40 120/208/240/277:24 TR40VA015 40 120/208/240:24 TR40VA040 40 120/208/240:24 (terminals) TR50VA001 50 120:24 TR50VA002 50 120:24 TR50VA003 50 208/240:24 TR50VA004 50 120/240/277/480:24 TR50VA005 50 120:24 TR50VA006 50 277:24 TR50VA007 50 277:24 TR50VA009 50 120/208/240 TR50VA014 50 277:24 TR50VA015 50 120/208/240/277/480:24 TR50VA016 50 120/208/240:24 TR50VA017 50 208/277/480:24 TR75VA001 75 120:24 TR75VA002 75 120:24 TR75VA003 75 277:24 TR75VA004 75 120/208/240/480:24 TR75VA005 75 120/208/240/480:24 TR85VA002 85 120:24 TR100VA001 96 120:24 TR100VA002 96 120:24 TR100VA004 96 120/240/277/480:24 TR150VA001 150 120:24 TR175VA001 175 208/240:24 TR175VA002 175 120:24 TR240VA001 240 120:24 TR300VA002 300 120/208/240/480:24 TR375VA001 375 120:24 FREQ (Hz) 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 CIRCUIT BREAKER No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No MOUNTING H = Hub 1H + Foot 2H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 2H + Foot 1H + Foot 2H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 2H + Foot 2H + Foot 2H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 2H + Foot 2H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 2H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 1H + Foot 2H + Foot 2H + Foot 1H + Foot Foot 2H + Foot 1H + Foot Foot Foot AGENCY APPROVALS Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 Class 2 UL1585 listed US/Canada, E197146 UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147 UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147 UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147 UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147 UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147 UL506 listed US/Canada, E197147
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
985
POWER SUPPLIES
17
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES CONTROL TRANSFORMERS RIB TR SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
A B D C E
Mounting Hole
Circuit Breaker
STYLE 1
STYLE 2
MODEL
DIMENSIONS C 2.6 (6.6) 2.63 (6.68) 2.6 (6.6) 2.6 (6.6) 2.9 (7.4) 2.9 (7.4) 2.9 (7.4) 2.88 (7.31) 2.88 (7.31) 2.88 (7.31) 2.9 (7.4) 2.9 (7.4) 2.9 (7.4) 3.0 (7.6) 3.0 (7.6) 2.9 (7.4) 2.9 (7.4) 3.0 (7.6) 3.05 (7.74) 3.04 (7.72) 3.06 (7.77) 3.05 (7.74) 3.0 (7.6) 3.0 (7.6) 3.06 (7.77) 3.0 (7.6) 3.18 (8.1) 3.0 (7.6) 3.0 (7.6) 3.0 (7.6) 3.25 (8.3) 3.2 (8.1) 3.18 (8.1) 4.5 (11.4) 4.5 (11.4) 4.5 (11.4)
WIRES
WEIGHT lb (kg)
STYLE 1 4 1 1 1 4 1 4 1 9 1 4 4 5 2 1 4 5 2 2 2 2 2 5 2 6 1 2 5 5 3 7 4 8 10 7
Circuit Breaker
TR20VA001
2.13 (5.4)
1.90 (4.8)
1.63 (4.1)
1.54 (3.9)
8.0 (20.3)
1.35 (0.61)
TR20VA002 TR20VA003 TR20VA007 TR40VA001 TR40VA002 TR40VA003 TR40VA004 TR40VA015 TR40VA040 TR50VA001 TR50VA002 TR50VA003
2.31 (5.86) 2.13 (5.4) 2.13 (5.4) 2.7 (6.9) 2.7 (6.9) 2.7 (6.9) 2.75 (7.0) 2.7 (6.9) 2.7 (6.9) 2.75 (7.0) 2.75 (7.0) 2.75 (7.0) 3.48 (8.8) 3.5 (8.9) 2.79 (7.1) 2.79 (7.1) 3.48 (8.8) 3.45 (8.76) 3.475 (8.82) 3.475 (8.82) 3.475 (8.82) 3.9 (9.9) 3.9 (9.9) 3.875 (9.84) 3.9 (9.9) 2.80 (7.1) 4.0 (10.2) 4.0 (10.2) 4.25 (10.8) 3.5 (8.9) 3.8 (9.7) 3.9 (9.9) 3.75 (9.5) 5.4 (13.7) 4.33 (11.0)
1.89 (4.80) 1.90 (4.8) 1.90 (4.8) 2.2 (5.6) 2.2 (5.6) 2.2 (5.6) 2.2 (5.6) 2.2 (5.6) 2.2 (5.6) 2.2 (5.6) 2.2 (5.6) 2.2 (5.6) 2.52 (6.4) 2.52 (6.4) 2.2 (5.6) 2.2 (5.6) 2.52 (6.4) 2.5 (6.4) 2.53 (6.42) 2.53 (6.42) 2.53 (6.42) 2.5 (6.4) 2.5 (6.4) 2.5 (6.4) 2.5 (6.4) 3.75 (9.5) 2.5 (6.4) 2.5 (6.4) 2.5 (6.4) 3.75 (9.5) 3.8 (9.7) 3.75 (9.5) 3.75 (9.5) 3.75 (9.5) 3.75 (9.5)
1.63 (4.1) 1.63 (4.1) 1.63 (4.1) 1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 2.0 (5.1) 2.0 (5.1) 1.75 (4.4) 1.75 (4.4) 2.0 (5.1) 2.0 (5.1) 2.0 (5.1) 2.0 (5.1) 2.0 (5.1) 2.0 (5.1) 2.0 (5.1) 2.0 (5.1) 2.0 (5.1) 3.10 (7.9) 2.0 (5.1) 2.0 (5.1) 1.97 (5.0) 3.23 (8.2) 3.1 (7.9) 3.1 (7.9) 3.13 (8.0) 3.18 (8.07) 3.15 (8.0)
1.54 (3.9) 1.54 (3.9) 1.54 (3.9) 1.93 (4.9) 1.93 (4.9) 1.93 (4.9) 2.06 (5.23) 1.95 (4.95) 1.95 (4.95) 1.93 (4.9) 1.93 (4.9) 2.01 (5.1) 1.95 (5.0) 2.0 (5.1) 2.01 (5.1) 2.01 (5.1) 1.95 (5.0) 1.95 (4.95) 1.95 (4.95) 1.95 (4.95) 1.95 (4.95) 2.4 (6.1) 2.4 (6.1) 2.4 (6.1) 2.4 (6.1) 2.0 (5.1) 2.55 (6.4) 2.55 (6.5) 2.75 (7.0) 2.0 (5.1) 3.0 (7.6) 3.0 (7.6) 3.23 (8.2) 3.84 (9.75) 3.83 (9.7)
8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 9.5 (24.1) 9.0 (22.9) 8.0 (20.3) 8.0 (20.3) 9.5 (24.1) 9.0 (22.9) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 9.5 (24.1) 8.5 (21.6) 7.0 (17.8)
1.32 (0.61) 1.39 (0.63) 1.38 (0.63) 2.02 (0.92) 2.05 (0.93) 2.05 (0.93) 2.02 (0.92) 1.96 (0.89) 1.96 (0.89) 2.14 (0.97) 2.18 (0.99) 2.17 (0.98) 3.04 (1.38) 2.6 (1.18) 2.16 (0.98) 2.17 (0.98) 3.04 (1.38) 2.8 (1.27) 2.98 (1.35) 2.90 (1.32) 2.86 (1.29) 3.66 (1.66) 3.70 (1.68) 3.60 (1.63) 3.78 (1.71) 4.35 (1.97) 4.06 (1.84) 4.13 (1.87) 4.60 (2.08) 4.92 (2.23) 7.05 (3.19) 7.10 (3.22) 9.12 (4.13) 12.1 (5.49) 11.44 (5.18)
STYLE 3
STYLE 4
Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breaker
POWER SUPPLIES
TR50VA004 TR50VA005 TR50VA006 TR50VA007 TR50VA009 TR50VA014 TR50VA015 TR50VA016 TR50VA017 TR75VA001, 005 TR75VA002 TR75VA003 TR75VA004 TR85VA002 TR100VA001 TR100VA002 TR100VA004 TR150VA001 TR175VA001 TR175VA002 TR240VA001 TR300VA002 TR375VA001
STYLE 5
STYLE 6
Secondary
STYLE 7
STYLE 8
Secondary Screw Terminals
Circuit Breaker
17
STYLE 9
STYLE 10
TRANSFORMER STYLES
WIRING Primary Wires 480 VAC Gray 277 VAC Brown 240 VAC Orange 208 VAC Red 120 VAC Common White Black Secondary Wires 24 VAC Yellow 24 VAC Yellow/White
Order by transformer model as listed under Specifications on the previous page.
986
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
AIR PRODUCTS AND CONTROLS ENCLOSED 24 VAC POWER SOURCE T-PB SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The T-PB Series power source provides 24 VAC from a 115 VAC input. Each T-PB Series unit contains an LED that illuminates when the 24 VAC output is operational. An on/off switch is provided in the 115 VAC input. This switch disconnects or connects both the hot and neutral of the input power. A convenience outlet is located on the front panel. This convenience outlet is not controlled by the on/off switch and is always hot. A circuit breaker is incorporated in the 24 VAC circuit, which must be manually reset if the rated 3.0A (Class 2) or 4.0A (Class 1) is exceeded and the breaker operates.The T-PB Series is available in a metal enclosure (UL Listed) for eld applications or without the enclosure (UL Recognized) for panel mounting.
FEATURES
Enclosed and panel-mounted models On/Off switch Convenience outlet, non-switched Circuit breaker Enclosure with removable access panel to on/off switch, breaker, and outlet
T-PB202-1
POWER SUPPLIES
WIRING SPECIFICATIONS
Primary Voltage 115 VAC Supply Current 6A maximum Supply Frequency 60 Hz Convenience Outlet 115 VAC, 5A Secondary Voltage 24 VAC Output Current/VA Rating T-PB202: 4.0A, 96 VA (Class 1), T-PB303: 3.0A, 72 VA (Class 2) Over Current Protection Circuit breaker Operating Temperature -13 to 140F (-25 to 60C) Panel mount, Enclosed Mounting Dimensions 4.75"H x 5.0"W x 3.75"D (12.1 x 12.7 x 9.5 cm), 6.12"H x 5.19"W x 4.12"D (15.5 x 13.2 x 10.5 cm) Weight 5.5 lb (2.65 kg) Approvals UL-recognized component File #E160579, UL1012 Listed, File #E160579 Warranty 1 year
Input Power 115 VAC 60 Hz 6.0 A max H 24 VAC LED Indicator N G Switched Output Power 24 VAC 60 Hz
On/Off Switch Circuit Breaker Unswitched Convenience Outlet 115 VAC 60 Hz, 5A max
ON OFF
ON 115 VAC 60 Hz 6.0 A 24 VAC 60 Hz
17
CAUTION OUTLET ALWAYS HOT 5A MAX
MODEL T-PB202-1 T-PB202-0 T-PB303-1 T-PB303-0 DESCRIPTION 24 VAC Power source, 4A (Class 1) with enclosure 24 VAC Power source, 4A (Class 1) panel mount 24 VAC Power source, 3A (Class 2) with enclosure 24 VAC Power source, 3A (Class 2) panel mount
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
987
POWER SUPPLIES
DESCRIPTION The PSC40AB10 and PSC100AB10 are 24VAC Class 2 power sources pre-packaged in a metal enclosure. The panel-mount versions, PSB40AB10 and PSB100AB10, are provided without the metal enclosure. These units are available with either 40VA or 100VA power ratings. All models accept 120VAC input and are provided with a combination on/off switch/circuit breaker to control the output and a combination on/off switch/breaker to control the incoming 120VAC power. Other handy features include a 120VAC convenience outlet, LED indication of the output and terminal strip wiring. FEATURES Enclosed or panel mount models Combination on/off switch/circuit breakers for the input and output Convenience outlet Terminal strip wiring LED indication of the output Class 2 UL Listed
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES ENCLOSED 24 VAC CLASS 2 POWER SOURCE PSB40AB10, PSB100AB10, PSC40AB10, PSC100AB10
NEW!
PSB40AB10 PSC40AB10 PSC40AB10, covered Output Indication Red LED for 24 VAC output Over Current Protection PSC100AB10 4A circuit breaker, PSC40AB10 3A circuit breaker Approvals UL listed, Class 2, UL916, File E190394, CUL Weight PSC40: 5.31 lb (2.41 kg) PSC100: 6.70 lb (3.04 kg) PSB40: 3.21 lb (1.5 kg) PSB100: 4.51 lb (2.05 kg) Warranty 1 year
3.90 (9.9) 5.25 (13.3) 2.25 2.25 (5.7) (5.7) 3.00 (7.6) 4.50 (11.4) 4.61 (11.7)
RESET RESET
SPECIFICATIONS
POWER SUPPLIES
Primary Voltage Input Control Convenience Outlet Secondary Voltage Output Control
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz Combination on/off switch and 10A circuit breaker. Controls input power to entire unit. 120 VAC, 9A 24 VAC PSB100AB10 has combination on/off switch and circuit breaker (4A). Controls 24 VAC output only., PSB40AB10 has combination on/ off switch and circuit breaker (3A). Controls 24 VAC output only.
WIRING
120 VAC Convenience Outlet in (cm) Neutral Ground 120 VAC 120 VAC Aux. Output 5.62 (14.3) 2.245 (5.7)
17
RESET RESET
LED Indicator
Removable Access Plate
6.25 (15.9)
5.20 (13.2)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Com 24 VAC 24 VAC On/Off 10A Main Breaker/Switch
PSC Enclosed Models
PSB Panel-Mount Models
MODEL PSB40AB10 PSB40AB10-IC-TC PSB100AB10 PSB100AB10-IC-TC PSC40AB10 PSC100AB10 DESCRIPTION Enclosed power source, 120 VAC to 24 VAC, 40 VA, panel mount UL508 OPEN BRACKET 40VA 120-24VAC; 10A BRKR & TC Enclosed power source, 120 VAC to 24 VAC, 100 VA, panel mount UL508 OPEN BRACKET 100VA 120-24VAC; 10A BRKR & TC Enclosed power source, 120 VAC to 24 VAC, 40 VA with enclosure Enclosed power source, 120 VAC to 24 VAC, 100 VA with enclosure
* -IC indicates UL508 and -TC indicates terminal cover
988
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Primary Voltage Input Control
POWER SUPPLIES
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES ENCLOSED 24 VAC CLASS 2 POWER SOURCE PSH SERIES
The PSH Series of Power Sources from Functional Devices includes one or two transformers pre-packaged in a metal enclosure. The transformers are available in 40VA, 75VA and 100VA sizes. A switch/circuit breaker is provided for switching the output of each transformer. An optional switch/circuit breaker is available for controlling power to the entire unit. Other handy features include an LED to indicate the presence of 24VAC at the Class 2 output terminals or wires, an internal high-voltage wiring compartment, and two optional 120VAC grounded convenience outlets.
One or two transformers in pre-packaged metal enclosure 40, 75 and 100 VA Class 2 transformers Output switch/circuit breaker and LED indication Optional primary switch/circuit breaker Optional 120 VAC convenience outlets To order UL508 add 1C to the end
PSH, Single Transformer Model with Options
PSH, Two Transformer Model with Options
POWER SUPPLIES
Convenience Outlet Secondary Voltage PSH40A: 24 VAC, 40VA PSH75A: 24 VAC, 75V PSH100A: 24 VAC, 100V PSH40A40A: Dual 40 24 VAC, 40 VA PSH40A75A: Dual 24 VAC, 40VA and 75 VA PSH40A100A: Dual 24 VAC, 40VA and 100 VA PSH75A75A: Dual 24 VAC, 75 VA PSH75A100A: Dual 24 VAC, 75VA and 100VA PSH100A100A: Dual 24 VAC, 100VA Note for dual power supplies: Output derating may exceed 20% due to elevated ambient temperature or heat buildup in device over time. Output Control Combination of on/off switch and circuit breaker. Controls 24 VAC output only.
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz (40 VA), 480/277/240/208/120 VAC 50/60 Hz (75VA) , 480/277/240/208/120 VAC 50/60 Hz (75 VA), 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz (100 VA) Combination on/off switch and 10A circuit breaker 120 VAC, 15A maximum.
Output Indication Dimensions Single Transformer Models: Two Transformer Models: Approvals Weight PSH40A: PSH75A: PSH100A: PSH40A40A: PSH40A75A: PSH40A100A: PSH75A75A: PSH75A100A: PSH100A100A: Warranty
Red LED, one for each 24 VAC output 4.50"H x 8.25"W x 4.50"D (11.4 x 20.96 x 11.4 cm) 4.50"H x 8.25"W x 4.50"D (11.4 x 20.96 x 11.4 cm) UL listed, Class 2, UL916, File E190394 CUL 3.1 lb (1.41 kg) 4.5 lb (2.04 kg) 4.6 lb (2.09 kg) 5.4 lb (2.45 kg) 6.8 lb (3.09 kg) 6.9 lb (3.13 kg) 8.4 lb (3.86 kg) 8.5 lb (3.86 kg) 8.6 lb (3.90 kg) 1 Year
17
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
989
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES ENCLOSED 24 VAC CLASS 2 POWER SOURCE PSH SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
5.438 (13.8) 5.15 (13.1)
8.625 (21.9) 8.25 (20.96)
4.50 (11.4)
4.50 (11.4)
RESET
OFF
4.25 (10.8)
RESET
RESET
4.25 (10.8)
OFF
OFF
RESET
OFF
4.50 (11.4)
RESET
OFF
4.5 (11.4)
Single Transformer Models
Two Transformer Models
WIRING
Optional 120 VAC Convenience Outlet 24 VAC Breaker/Switch 24 VAC Breaker/Switch
RESET
RESET
OFF RESET
OFF
OFF
LED Indicator Optional Terminal Strip Com 24 VAC Com
Optional 120 VAC Convenience Outlet Optional 10A Main Breaker/Switch
B10 Option INPUT: Models Only Transformer 40 VA, 75 VA, or Primary Wires 40 VA or 100 VA 100 VA Black: 120 VAC Black: 120 VAC White: Neutral White: Common LED Green: Ground Indicator 75 VA Optional Gray: 480 VAC Terminal Brown: 277 VAC Strip Orange: 240 VAC Com 24 VAC 24 VAC Red: 208 VAC White: 120 VAC Optional120 VAC Convenience Outlet Black: Common Optional 10A Main Breaker/Switch "EXT2" Option Models Only AC Power Supply Cord
Optional 120 VAC Convenience Outlet 24 VAC Breaker/Switch
RESET OFF RESET OFF
POWER SUPPLIES
OUTPUT: Models with Terminals HOT: 24 VAC COM: Common W Option Models Only Yellow/White: 24 VAC White/Blue: Common B10 Option Models Only Blue: 120 VAC auxiliary output
*Output derating may exceed 20% due to elevated ambient temperature or heat buildup in device over time.
17
MODEL PSH40A PSH75A PSH100A PSH40A40A PSH40A75A PSH40A100A PSH75A75A PSH75A100A PSH100A100A
DESCRIPTION Enclosed single 40 VA power source, 120 to 24 VAC Enclosed single 75 VA power source, 480/277/240/208/120 to 24 VAC Enclosed single 100 VA power source, 120 to 24 VAC Enclosed dual 40 VA power sources, 120 to 24 VAC Enclosed 40 VA, 120 to 24 VAC, and 75 VA, multi-tap to 24 VAC power sources Enclosed 40 VA and 100 VA power sources, 120 to 24 VAC Enclosed dual 75 VA power sources, 480/277/240/208/120 to 24 VAC Enclosed 75 VA, 480/277/240/208/120 to 24 VAC and 100 VA, 120 to 24 VAC sources Enclosed dual 100 VA power sources, 120 to 24 VAC OPTIONS External secondary terminals, 120 VAC convenience outlets N External secondary terminals, without 120 VAC convenience outlets W Internal secondary wires, 120 VAC convenience outlets NW Internal secondary wires, without 120 VAC convenience outlets Without 10A main switch/breaker and without auxiliary output wire B10 10A main switch/breaker and auxiliary output wire (75 VA transformers are 120 VAC input only with B10 option) 1C UL508 EXT2 With power cord
990
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
ENCLOSED POWER SOURCE - 100 VA, 24 VAC CLASS 2 OUTPUTS PSH200A, PSH300A, PSH500A, PSMN300A, PSMN500A
DESCRIPTION
The PSH200A, PSH300A and PSH500A are power sources that are pre-packaged in a metal enclosure and provide isolated, 24 VAC, 100VA, Class 2 outputs. The panel mount versions PSMN200A, PSMN300A and PSMN500A are provided without the metal enclosure. All models accept 480/277/240/120 VAC input and have combination on/off switch/circuit breakers to control each output. Other handy features include LED indication of each output and terminal strip wiring. The PSH200A and PSMN200A have ve 40VA Class 2 outputs; the PSH300A and PSMN300A have three 100VA Class 2 outputs and the PSH500A and PSMN500A have ve 100VA Class 2 outputs.
FEATURES
NEMA 1 enclosed or panel mount models Combination on/off switch/circuit breakers for each output Terminal strip wiring LED indication of each output Class 2, UL Listed PSH300A
WIRING
SPECIFICATIONS
Primary Voltage Output Voltage Output Control Output Indication Dimensions PSH Models: PSMN Models: Approvals Weight PSH200A: PSH300A: PSH500A: PSMN200A: PSMN300A: PSMN500A: Warranty 480/277/240/120 VAC 50/60 Hz Isolated 24 VAC, 100 VA Class 2 Combination on/off switch and 4A circuit breaker for each 24 VAC output Red LED for each 24 VAC output 12.125"H x 12.125"W x 6.0"D (30.8 x 30.8 x 15.2 cm) 11.33"H x 11.4"W x 7.0"D (22.8 x 28.9 x 17.8 cm) CE, RoHS 18.6 lb (8.44 kg) 18.0 lb (8.17 kg) 30.16 lb (13.68 kg) 12.38 lb (5.62 kg) 12.55 lb (5.69 kg) 20.6 lb (9.34 kg) 1 Year
POWER SUPPLIES
11.40"
480 277 240

USER CONNECTIONS
120 COM
ON 1 OFF ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3
24V COM 24V COM 24V COM
11.30"
SWITCH INDICATOR BREAKER
17
MODEL PSH200A PSH300A PSH500A PSMN200A PSMN300A PSMN500A APS53-TC DESCRIPTION Enclosed power source 480/277/240/120 VAC to 24 VAC, ve 40 VA outputs with enclosure Enclosed power source 480/277/240/120 VAC to 24 VAC, three 100 VA outputs with enclosure Enclosed power source 480/277/240/120 VAC to 24 VAC, ve 100 VA outputs with enclosure Panel mount power source 480/277/240/120 VAC to 24 VAC, ve 40 VA outputs, panel mount Panel mount power source 480/277/240/120 VAC to 24 VAC, three 100 VA outputs, panel mount Panel mount power source 480/277/240/120 VAC to 24 VAC, ve 100 VA outputs, panel mount ACCESSORIES Terminal cover for PSH500A/PSH300A
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
991
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
SOLA/HEVI-DUTY UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES - UPS S1K, SDU SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Sola/Hevi-Duty S1K and SDU Series of off-line Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) provides economical protection from damaging power interruptions and impulses. The S1K units feature three separate outlets for critical devices needing battery backup and surge protection and one surge-protected-only outlet for non-critical devices. Connections are made to the DIN-rail mount SDU units on easy-to-wire screw terminals. In addition, RJ-45 connections for phone/data line surge protection are provided with both the S1K and SDU. UPS monitoring software and cable are included for communication with the protected computer by RS-232 interface. The SDU has an optional relay module that can be connected to the model's port. S1K, SDU Series
SPECIFICATIONS
PRIMARY VOLTAGE MODEL Capacity VA/Watts Voltage (Single phase) Frequency Voltage (on battery) S1K650 S1K850 S1K1200 SDU500 SDU850 650/390 850/600 1200/720 500/300 850/510 115V 20% 120V +10%, -20% 50 or 60Hz 10% (auto sensing) Simulated sine wave 115 10% 115 5% 120V 5% 50 or 60 Hz 1 Hz 0.3 Hz 0.5% autosensing 4 milliseconds, typical Circuit breaker for overload and short circuit protection UPS automatic shutdown if overload exceeds 105% of nominal at 20 seconds, 120% at 10 seconds, 130% at 3 seconds UPS output cut off immediately Sealed, maintenance-free lead acid batteries 4 hours 10-20* 15-25* 15-30* 25-40* 6 hours 30-45* 4** Slow beeping sound every 4 seconds Rapid beeping sound every second Continue beeping sound 0% to 95% humidity non-condensing 0 to 40C up to 10,000 ft (3000 m) < 40 dBA (1 meter from surface) 8.8 (4.0) 11.6 (5.3) 8.1 (3.7) 10.8 (4.9) 10.8 (4.9) 10.7 (4.7) 11.4 (5.0) 5.3" x 3.8" x 10.4" 5.3" x 3.8" x 12.6" 5.3" x 3.8" x 10.4" (13.5 x 9.7 x 26.5) (9.7 x 32.0 x 13.5) (13.5 x 9.7 x 26.5) E179213 UL1778 listed 1 year **At full load 5.3" x 3.8" x 12.6" (9.7 x 32.0 x 13.5) 4.55" x 4.88" x 11.1" (11.6 x 12.4 x 28.2) UL recognized E179213 8 hours 2** S1K320 320/240 S1K520 520/340
POWER SUPPLIES
SECONDARY VOLTAGE
Frequency (on battery) Transfer Time Unit Input Overload Protection Short Circuit Type Typical Recharge Time (to 90% of full capacity) Backup Time (minutes) Battery Back-up
PROTECTION
BATTERY
ALARM
Battery Low Overload Ambient operation Audible noise Net Weight - lbs (kg) Dimensions H x W x D (in/cm)
ENVIRONMENT PHYSICAL
17
AGENCY APPROVALS WARRANTY *For typical 15" monitor
MODEL S1K320 S1K520 S1K650 S1K850 S1K1200 S1K-PMBRK SDU500 SDU850 SDU-PMBRK RELAYCARD-SDU DESCRIPTION Uninterruptible power supply, 320 VA Uninterruptible power supply, 520 VA Uninterruptible power supply, 650 VA Uninterruptible power supply, 850 VA Uninterruptible power supply, 1200 VA Wall/panel mount bracket for S1K UPS Uninterruptible power supply, 500 VA, DIN rail mount Uninterruptible power supply, 850 VA, DIN rail mount DIN rail mount bracket for SDU UPS Form C dry contact relay module for SDU UPS
992
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY PSH550-UPS
DESCRIPTION
The Model PSH550-UPS uninterruptible power supply (UPS) provides economical protection from damaging power interruptions and impulses in critical environments such as hospitals, laboratories, research and surgery centers. The Model PSH550-UPS features an extra 120 VAC outlet and a 10A circuit breaker on/off switch. The switch controls the incoming line voltage and can be used to verify the functionality of the UPS. The Model PSH550-UPS is ideal for those hard-to-install applications and locations where you need a UPS but also must use conduit to run your wiring. Models numbers ending in STAT have status contacts and LED Indicator Lights.
FEATURES 10 Amp circuit breaker On/off switch Additional 120 VAC outlet Metal enclosure STAT Models with LED Lights
PSH550-UPS
WIRING
UPS-STAT
UPS Status 120 Vac Contacts & LED Indicator Line Input Input Power Status Contacts & LED Indicator
}
120 VAC, 12 Amp 50/60 Hz Combination on/off switch and 10A circuit breaker. Controls input to entire unit. 120 VAC 120 VAC, 4.6A, 330 Watt 120 VAC, 7.1 A, 510 Watt 12.0"H x 14.0"W x 6.0"D (30.5 x 35.6 x 15.2 cm) 14.0"H x 16.0"W x 6.0"D (35.6 x 40.6 x 15.2 cm) metal housing with screw cover UL listed, UL916,C-UL, CE, UL Listed, UL916,UL1778, C-UL, CE, RoHS 23.6 lb (10.7 kg) 29 lb (13.2kg) 1 year 32 to 95F (0 to 35C) 3 minutes @ full 550 VA load; 13 minutes at 1/2 load 2 minutes @ full 850 VA load; 8 minutes at 1/2 load Metal housing with screw cover
UPS
GND Neut. Line
N/C COM N/O
Input Frequency Circuit Breaker Convenience Outlet Output PSH550 PSH850 Dimensions PSH550 PSH850 Approvals Weight PSH550 PSH850-UPS-STAT Warranty Temperature Stability Backup Time PSH550 PSH850 Housing Type
GND Neut. Line
RESET
N/C COM N/O
}
POWER SUPPLIES
OFF
RESET OFF
GND Neut. Line
To Protected Device From UPS Backed-Up Outlet
To UPS
On/Off Switch, Wired to Protected 120 VAC Breaker, Light Device line input
UPS Output Line Input
UPS
}
UPS plugged into one of two outlets. Other outlet spare.
SPECIFICATIONS
}
GND NEUT GND HOT
NEUT
HOT
Protected power from UPS Power to UPS
17
Computer Outlet
MODEL PSH550-UPS PSH550-UPS-STAT PSH850-UPS-STAT DESCRIPTION Uninterruptible power supply, 120 VAC, 550 VA with enclosure Uninterruptible power supply, 120 VAC, 550 VA with enclosure with contacts and LED Lights Uninterruptible power supply, 120 VAC, 850 VA with enclosure with contacts and LED Lights
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
993
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
KELE AC / DC POWER SUPPLY DCPA-1.2
DESCRIPTION
The DCPA-1.2 universal AC/DC power supply can deliver 30 VA of power. This compact, track-mounted supply accepts 120 VAC and delivers both 24 VAC and regulated 24 VDC power for control circuits.
FEATURES

24 VAC and 24 VDC output from the same power supply LED indication of AC input and DC output status Overload protection Screw terminals with pressure plates Snap-track mounted Adjustable DC output Full-wave rectied
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Frequency Regulation Output Voltage 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 1.5% @ full rated current 24 VAC 24 VDC (regulated) Adjustable 1.3-27 VDC Total combined current from both outputs not to exceed 1.2A @ 24V 2.5A for combined outputs (GF-2.5 fuse) Operating Temperature 32 to 130F (0 to 55C) Operating Humidity 95% RH non-condensing Snap-track (included) Mounting Temperature Stability 1% Dimensions 3.0"H x 3.25"W x 6"L (7.62 x 8.26 x 15.24 cm) Weight 2.3 lb (1 kg) 18 months Warranty
POWER SUPPLIES
Output Current Over Current Protection
WIRING
DC Voltage Adjustment 1. Apply 120 VAC to 120 VAC IN terminals. 2. Adjust DC output adjust pot until the desired DC voltage is displayed with a voltmeter at the 24 VDC OUT terminals. Note: Adjusting the DC output voltage will reduce the output current rating by the ratio of the output voltage divided by 24. Example: 6 VDC output will have a reduced output current of 300 mA. (6/24) x 1.2 = 300 mA
Fuse 2.5A (GF- 2.5)
17
AC IN
DC OUT
*The AC and DC load circuits must be isolated from each other. Either may be grounded but not both. Failure to isolate can result in damage to unit.
DC Output Adjust Pot
L 120
VAC IN
24 H VAC OUT
24 + VDC OUT
120 VAC Input
24 VAC* Output
24 VDC* Output
MODEL DCPA-1.2 DCPA-1.2-C DESCRIPTION Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/ Special DC Out (Specify output voltage when ordering, 1.3-27 VDC)
994
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
KELE DC POWER SUPPLY DCP-1.5-W
DESCRIPTION
The DCP-1.5-W is a regulated 1.5A power supply that accepts 24 VAC at the input and provides 24 VDC at the output. The DCP-1.5-W can be ordered with any output voltage from 1.5V to 27 VDC. Field voltage adjustments may also be made using only a screwdriver. The power supply is provided with a mounting track for easy eld application. This low cost power supply features good regulation and has full overcurrent protection.
FEATURES

Low cost Regulated DC output Snap-track mounted Screw terminals with pressure plates Adjustable DC output Full-wave rectied
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
in (cm)
Snap-Track Mounting (included)
4.0 (10.16) Depth = 1.63 (4.13) 2.19 (5.56)
D3
In general, the output current rating will be reduced by the ratio of the output voltage divided by the input voltage. For example, a 6 VDC supply powered by a 24 VAC transformer will have a reduced-rated output current of 375 mA. (6/24) x 1.5 = 0.375 To obtain the full-rated output current at reduced output voltages, the standard power supply input voltage must be reduced. It is a good practice to maintain the same AC input voltage as the desired DC output voltage. A grounded DC minus terminal and a grounded secondary 24 VAC input transformer will blow the unit's fuse. If this is a problem, there are three possible solutions: Option 1: Remove the ground on the transformer secondary to oat the voltage output, or use a separate ungrounded transformer. Option 2: Add a Model Y65G13-0 40 VA isolation transformer. This option reduces the power supply capacity to 920 mA. Option 3: Remove diode D3 (marked on board). Jumper the VDC OUT (-) terminal to the VAC IN (G) terminal. The grounded side of the AC supply should be wired to the VAC IN (G) terminal. This option reduces the power supply capacity to 400 mA.
VOLT OUT ADJ
FUSE 3A
APPLICATION
Output Voltage Adjustment
POWER SUPPLIES
+
DCP-1.5-W
H G
VAC IN
VDC OUT
GF-3 Fuse
Regulated DC Voltage + Output
24 VAC IN
Line Voltage Transformer*
* Input Transformer Required VA Rating @ 24 VAC = 43.2 x Desired DC Output Current For full 1.5A capacity, use a 75 VA transformer.
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VAC 50/60 Hz 1.5% at full rated current 24 VDC (full wave rectied and regulated), 1.5 - 27 VDC (full wave rectied and regulated) Output Current 1.5A (with 75 VA transformer) Over Current Protection 3A fuse (GF-3) Operating Temperature 32 to 130F (0 to 55C) 95% RH non-condensing Operating Humidity Mounting Snap track (included) Temperature Stability 1% Dimensions 1.63"H x 2.19"W x 4.0"D (4.13 x 5.56 x 10.16 cm) Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg) Warranty 18 months Supply Voltage Supply Frequency Regulation Output Voltage
17
MODEL DCP-1.5-W DCP-1.5-W-C DESCRIPTION Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 24 VAC In to special DC output (Specify output voltage when ordering, 1.5-24 VDC)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
995
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
KELE ENCLOSED DC POWER SUPPLY DCP-250
DESCRIPTION
The DCP-250 is a unique DC power supply that provides regulated 24 VDC power from a 120 VAC input. It is well suited for powering transmitters, transducers, actuators, and other equipment in building automation and temperature control systems. The DCP-250 can be ordered for hub mounting, surface mounting in a panel, or DIN rail mounting.
FEATURES

Flexible mounting for hub, panel/surface, DIN rail Compact size Fully enclosed Color-coded wiring LED indication Transformer isolated
DCP-250 Series
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 110-125 VAC, 10 VA 50/60 Hz Supply Frequency Regulation 0.5V Output Voltage 24 VDC (regulated) Output Current 250 mA Operating Temperature -22 to 104F (-30 to 40C) 95% RH non-condensing Operating Humidity Mounting DIN rail mount, Hub mount, Panel/surface mount Temperature Stability 1% Dimensions 4.0"H x 2.25"W x 1.75"D (10.16 x 5.71 x 4.45 cm) Approvals UL916 listed, File #E185225 Weight 1.0 lb (0.5 kg) Warranty 18 months
DIMENSIONS
POWER SUPPLIES
in (cm)
1/2" (1.27) Threaded Hub* (DCP-250-H only) (2) Mounting holes
Power Supply ON LED Lead Wires
4.0 (10.16)
17
WIRING
(black) (white) (white/red) (white/black)
L N +
2.25 (5.71)
1.75 (4.45)
120 VAC INPUT 24 VDC OUTPUT
Models DCP-250-P and DCP-250-D do not have the 1/2" (1.27 cm) hub. Wires exit through two holes in the top of the enclosure on these models.
MODEL DCP-250-H DCP-250-P DCP-250-D DESCRIPTION DC power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT, hub mount DC power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT, panel/surface mount DC power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT, DIN rail mount
996
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW! NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
KELE DC POWER SUPPLY DCP-524
DESCRIPTION
The Model DCP-524 is a power supply with dual isolatedoutputs. Powered by 24 VAC, it provides 5 VDC and 24 VDC. The outputs are highly regulated, require no eld adjustment, and are isolated from each other and the input voltage. The Model DCP-524 is used any time an isolated 5 VDC, 24 VDC, or combination is needed.
FEATURES

Low cost Snap-track mounted Dual isolated DC outputs, 5 VDC and 24 VDC Requires no eld adjustment Transformer isolated
SPECIFICATIONS
22-28 VAC @ 630 mA 50/60 Hz 5 VDC (regulated) and 24 VDC (regulated) Output Current 250 mA maximum @ 5 VDC; 80 mA maximum @ 24 VDC Operating Temperature 32 to 130F (0 to 55C) Supply Voltage Supply Frequency Output Voltage Operating Humidity Mounting Dimensions Weight Warranty 95% RH non-condensing Snap-track (included) 2.38"H x 4.0"W x 2.0"D (6.0 x 10.2 x 5.0 cm) 0.9 lb ( 0.4 kg) 18 months
POWER SUPPLIES
WIRING
17
5 VDC OUTPUT
24 VDC OUTPUT
24 VAC INPUT
5 VDC Output (isolated) 24 VDC Output (isolated)
24 VAC Input (may be grounded)
MODEL DCP-524 DESCRIPTION Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC and 5 VDC OUT
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
997
POWER SUPPLIES
DC POWER SUPPLIES SLS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SLS Series of DC Power Supplies from Sola/HeviDuty are used to transform various AC voltage inputs into a regulated DC output. Multiple mounting surfaces simplify installation by providing different mounting options. Units have built-in remote sensing capability for better load regulation.
FEATURES
Screw terminal connections, no soldering Multiple input voltages Regulated 24 VDC output up to 7.2A Remote sensing Transformer isolated
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
100, 120, 220, 230, 240 VAC 10% Supply Frequency 47-63 Hz Output Voltage 12 VDC, Adjustable 5% of rated voltage, 24 VDC, Adjustable 5% of rated voltage Output Current 1.7A, 1.2A, 2.4A, 3.6A, 4.8A, 7.2A Line Regulation 0.05% for 10% line change Load Regulation 5% for 50% load change Ripple 3 mV p-p maximum Wiring Terminations Screw terminals, input and output 16-gauge wire maximum Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Approvals UL1310, CUL-recognized component, File #E137632: CE certied Weight 2.3 lb (1.10 kg), 4.06 lb (1.84 kg), 7.28 lb (3.30 kg), 7.88 lb (3.57 kg), 14.00 (6.35 kg) Warranty 1 year Supply Voltage
in (cm)
Model SLS-12-017T SLS-24-012T SLS-24-024T SLS-24-036T SLS-24-048T SLS-24-072T 4.84"H x 4.00"W x 2.07"D (12.30 x 10.16 x 5.25 cm) 4.84"H x 4.00"W x 2.07"D (12.30 x 10.16 x 5.25 cm) 5.62"H x 4.87"W x 2.95"D (14.27 x 12.37 x 7.49 cm) 7.00"H x 4.87"W x 3.20"D (17.78 x 12.37 x 8.13 cm) 9.00"H x 4.87"W x 3.20"D (22.86 x 12.37 x 8.13 cm) 14.00"H x 4.87"W x 3.20"D (35.56 x 12.37 x 8.13 cm)
Weight 2.3 lb (1.10 kg) 2.3 lb (1.10 kg) 4.06 lb (1.84 kg) 7.28 lb (3.30 kg) 7.88 lb (3.57 kg) 14.00 (6.35 kg)
POWER SUPPLIES
WIRING
17
L 120 VAC N
(not included)
Fuse
5 1 3 2 4
L1 240 VAC L2
(not included)
Fuse
5 1 3 2 4
OUTSS+ OUT+
L O A D
OUT-
24 VDC
SS+ OUT+
L O A D
24 VDC
Jumper Bars for 120 VAC (Factory Setting)
Factory-installed Jumpers Jumper Bar for 240 VAC

(allows power supply to maintain proper voltage at a remote location)
120V Input
240V Input
Without Remote Sensing
With Remote Sensing
MODEL SLS-12-017T SLS-24-012T SLS-24-024T SLS-24-036T SLS-24-048T SLS-24-072T 6M30 Series FLM Series DESCRIPTION Power supply, 12 VDC adjustable 5% of rated voltage, 1.7A Power supply, 24 VDC adjustable 5% of rated voltage, 1.2A Power supply, 24 VDC adjustable 5% of rated voltage, 2.4A Power supply, 24 VDC adjustable 5% of rated voltage, 3.6A Power supply, 24 VDC adjustable 5% of rated voltage, 4.8A Power supply, 24 VDC adjustable 5% of rated voltage, 7.2A RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Fuse blocks 852 Fuses 854
998
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Compact size Regulated power outputs of 5, 12, or 24 VDC 115 VAC, 60 Hz input
POWER SUPPLIES
COMPACT DC POWER SUPPLY PW2
The Model PW2 converts unregulated 115 VAC to regulated DC voltage output. This compact, easy-to-mount power supply may be used to power transmitters, transducers, controllers, relays, and other peripheral devices requiring 5, 12, or 24 VDC.
Screw terminal connections Easy-to-mount enclosure
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Output Voltage 120 VAC 5% 60 Hz 12 VDC 0.5 VDC @ 200 mA, 24 VDC 1 VDC @ 100 mA, 5 VDC 0.2 VDC @ 300 mA 22-16 AWG Terminals Operating Temperature 32 to 131F (0 to 55C), 32 to 131F (0 to 55C) Operating Humidity Mounting Dimensions Weight Warranty 95% RH maximum, non-condensing Screw slots in base or side of enclosure 3.0"H x 2.2"W x 1.4"D (7.6 x 5.6 x 3.6 cm) 0.4 lb (0.2 kg) 1 year
MODEL PW2-12 PW2-24 PW2-5 DESCRIPTION Enclosed DC power supply, 115 VAC to 12 VDC Enclosed DC power supply, 115 VAC to 24 VDC Enclosed DC power supply, 115 VAC to 5 VDC
POWER SUPPLIES
PLUG-IN CLASS 2 TRANSFORMER AM-24830A

DESCRIPTION The Model AM-24830A is a UL Listed plug-in Class 2 transformer. Simply plug it into any 120VAC wall outlet and get a 24VAC output with 20VA of available power. Its small size and screw terminal connections make it a convenient and portable source of low voltage for many applications. FEATURES
Plugs into any 120VAC wall outlet Convenient and portable source of low voltage Screw terminal connections High efciency, low heat generation UL Listed
17
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 120 VAC Output Voltage 24 VAC Output Current 20W Operating Temperature 14 to 104F (-10 to 40C) Operating Humidity 20% to 80% RH Mounting Plug in Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty 3.2"H x 2.2"W x 1.9"D (8.1 x 5.6 x 4.8 cm) 2.2 lb (1 kg) UL listed, File #E112794, Class 2 Not Wet, Class 3 Wet 1 year
MODEL AM-24830A DESCRIPTION Plug-in Class 2 Transformer, 120 VAC to 24 VAC, 20 VA
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
999
POWER SUPPLIES
IDEC SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES PS5R SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The PS5R Series of switching power supplies is available with an output of 12 or 24 VDC and output power from 7.5-480W. The output is short circuit protected and regulated. These switching power supplies, which minimize the heat generated in control panels, have a much higher efciency than linear power supplies. They are small and completely enclosed, and they can be DIN rail or surface mounted.
FEATURES
Universal AC input (single phase): 100-240 VAC or 110-340/350 VDC Universal AC input (three phase): 320-575 VAC Output power from 7.5-480W Small size to save panel space DIN rail/surface mount enclosure Slim-line models to save valuable panel space High efciency operation for minimizing heat generation in control panels Time-saving, spring-loaded screw terminals
NEW!
PS5R-SC PS5R-SC PS5R-A24 PS5R-C24 Dimensions 2.95"H x 1.77"W x 2.76"D (7.49 x 4.50 x 7.01 cm) 2.95"H x 1.77"W x 2.76"D (7.49 x 4.50 x 7.01 cm) 2.95"H x 1.77"W x 3.74"D (7.49 x 4.50 x 9.50 cm) 3.54"H x 0.89"W x 3.74"D (9.0 x 2.25 x 9.50 cm) 2.95"H x 1.77"W x 3.74"D (7.49 x 4.50 x 9.50 cm) 2.95"H x 3.54"W x 3.74"D (7.49 x 9.0 x 9.50 cm) 3.74"H x 1.42"W x 4.25"D (9.5 x 3.6 x 10.8 cm) 2.95"H x 3.54"W x 3.74"D (7.49 x 9.0 x 9.50 cm) 3.74"H x 1.42"W x 4.25"D (9.5 x 3.6 x 10.8 cm) 2.95"H x 3.54"W x 3.74"D (7.49 x 9.0 x 9.50 cm) 3.74"H x 1.42"W x 4.25"D (9.5 x 3.6 x 10.8 cm) 4.72"H x 3.35"W x 5.51"D (12.0 x 8.5 x 14.0 cm) 2.95"H x 3.54"W x 3.74"D (7.49 x 9.0x 9.50 cm) 4.53"H x 1.81"W x 4.76"D (11.5 x 4.6 x 12.1 cm) 2.95"H x 5.7"W x 3.74"D (7.49 x 14.5 x 9.50 cm) 4.53"H x 1.97"W x 5.1"D (11.5 x 5.0 x 12.9 cm) 4.72"H x 7.87"W x 5.51"D (12.0 x 19.99 x 14.0 cm) 4.92"H x 3.15"W x 5.9"D (12.5 x 8.0 x 15.0 cm) 5.12"H x 4.53"W x 6.00"D (13.0 x 11.5 x 15.25 cm) Weight 0.33 lb (0.15 kg) 0.33 lb (0.15 kg) 0.37 lb (0.17 kg) 0.35 lb (0.16 kg) 0.37 lb (0.17 kg) 0.79 lb (0.36 kg) 0.55 lb (0.25 kg) 0.79 lb (0.36 kg) 0.55 lb (0.25 kg) 0.86 lb (0.39 kg) 0.63 lb (0.29 kg) 1.7 lb (0.8 kg) 0.86 lb (0.39 kg) 0.97 lb (0.44 kg) 1.3 lb (0.59 kg) 1.39 lb (0.63 kg) 2.6 lb (1.2 kg) 2.21 kb (1.0 kg) 4.41 lb (2 kg) March 2014 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC 12 VDC 12 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 0.6A, 7.5W 0.3A, 7.5W 1.2A, 15W 1.2 A, 15W 0.6A, 15W 2.5A, 30W 2.5A, 30W 1.3A, 30W 2.5A, 30W 2.1A, 50W 2.5A, 60W 3.1A, 75W 4.2A, 100W 3.75A, 90W 5A, 120W 5A, 120W 10A, 240W 10A, 240W 20A, 480W
SPECIFICATIONS
Model PS5R-A12 Supply Voltage 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC 100-240 VAC nominal, 110-340 VDC Supply Current 0.17A 0.17A 0.3A 0.45A 0.3A 0.68A 0.9A 0.68A 0.9A 1.15A 1.7A 1.1A 2.5A 2.3A 1.8A 1.8A 4A 3.6A
3 x 1.1A @ 400
Supply Frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Output Voltage Output Current
POWER SUPPLIES
PS5R-A24 PS5R-B12 PS5R-SB12 PS5R-B24 PS5R-C12 PS5R-SC12 PS5R-C24
17
PS5R-SC24 PS5R-D24 PS5R-SD24 PS5R-Q24 PS5R-E24 PS5R-SE24 PS5R-F24 PS5R-SF24 PS5R-G24 PS5R-SG24 PS5R-TJ24
320-575 VAC (3-phase), VAC, 3 x 0.8A @ 360-575 VAC (2-phase) 480 VAC
1000
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
WIRING
12 _ or 24 VDC
POWER SUPPLIES
IDEC SWITCHING POWER SUPPLIES PS5R SERIES
12 _ or 24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
_ +
_ 24 VDC +
-V NC +V
-V
NC
+V
-V
+V
-V
+V
-V
+V
DC ON V. ADJ
DC ON V. ADJ
NC L
NC
L N
Voltage Select
L N
L N Ground 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 110-340 VDC
Ground
Ground 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 110-340 VDC
Ground
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 110-340 VDC
100-120 VAC, 50/60 Hz 200-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
100-120V Jumper 200-240V Jumper
Ground 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 110-340 VDC
PS5R-A PS5R-B
24 _ VDC
PS5R-C, -D
+
PS5R-E
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 110-340 VAC Ground
PS5R-F
PS5R-G
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 110-340 VDC Ground
POWER SUPPLIES
-V
+V
L1 L2 L3
DC ON V. ADJ
+V -V
L N
Ground Ground 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 110-340 VDC 24 VDC
-V +V
-V
+V +
360 575V AC (2-phase operation), 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
PS5R-Q
PS5R-TJ24
PS5R-SC, -SD, -SE, -SF (slim-line)
MODEL PS5R-A12 PS5R-A24 PS5R-B12 PS5R-SB12 PS5R-B24 PS5R-C12 PS5R-SC12 PS5R-C24 PS5R-SC24 PS5R-D24 PS5R-SD24 PS5R-Q24 PS5R-E24 PS5R-SE24 PS5R-F24 PS5R-SF24 PS5R-G24 PS5R-SG24 PS5R-TJ24 DESCRIPTION Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 7.5W (0.6A) Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 7.5W (0.3A) Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 15W (1.2A) Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 15W (1.2A), slim-line Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 15W (0.6A) Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 30W (2.5A) Switching power supply, 12 VDC, 30W (2.5A), slim-line Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 30W (1.3A) Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 30W (1.3A), slim-line Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 50W (2.1A) Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 60W (2.5A), slim-line Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 75W (3.1A) Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 100W (4.2A) Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 90W (3.75A), slim-line Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 120W (5A) Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 120W (5A), slim-line Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 240W (10A) Switching power supply, 24 VDC, 240W (10A), slim-line Switching power supply (3-phase), 24 VDC, 480W (20A)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
320 575V AC (3-phase operation), 50/60 Hz
24 VDC
PS5R-SG (slim-line)
17
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1001
POWER SUPPLIES
DIN RAIL MOUNT POWER SUPPLIES SDN-P SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The SDN-P Series power supplies ensure compatibility in demanding applications. They have sag immunity, transient suppression and are noise tolerant. They have hazardous location approvals, wide temperature range and high tolerance to shock and vibration allows the SDN-P Series to be used in a wide variety of applications.
NEW!
SDN-P Storage Temperature -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) Operating Temperature 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C) CE, cULs, SEMI F47, RoHS, UL File Approvals #E61379 Warranty 5 years
W
FEATURES
Auto Select 115/230V, 50/60 Hz input DC OK signal Adjustable voltage Narrow width on rail for space critical applications
SPECIFICATIONS
POWER SUPPLIES
Supply Voltage Frequency Fusing Output Voltage Humidity
115/230 VAC auto select 47-63 HZ Internally fused 12 VDC, 24 VDC, 48 VDC < 90% RH, non-condensing
DIMENSIONS
D
Model Number SDN 2.5-24-100P SDN 4-24-100LP 24 Vdc
Dimensions - inches (mm) H W D
Weight
+ +
OK
24-28 V
OK NEC Class 2 Power Supply
24 VDC / 2.5 A
4.88 (124.0) 1.97 (50.0) 4.55 (116.0) 1.6 lbs (0.73 kg) 4.88 (124.0) 2.56 (65.0) 4.55 (116.0) 2.4 lbs (1.10 kg) 4.88 (124.0) 2.56 (65.0) 4.55 (116.0) 2.4 lbs (1.10 kg)
C
Single Parallel
S O LA
Power Supply SDN 2.5-24-100P
U L
17
SDN 5-24-100P SDN 10-24-100P
US LISTED
4.88 (124.0) 3.26 (83.0) 4.55 (116.0) 3.3 lbs (1.50 kg)
115/230 VAC 1.3-0.7 A 50/60 HZ
MODEL SDN 5-24-100P SDN 4-24-100LP SDN 20-24-100P SDN 2.5-24-100P SDN 10-24-100P DESCRIPTION 120W DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output 92W DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output 480W DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output 60W DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output 240W DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output
SDN-PMBRK2
ACCESSORIES Metal chassis mounting kit for SDN series
1002
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Single Phase Three Phase Frequency Single Phase Three Phase Fusing Single Phase Three Phase 115/230 VAC 380-480 VAC 43-67 HZ 50-60 HZ Internally fused Externally fused
POWER SUPPLIES
COMPACT DIN RAIL MOUNT POWER SUPPLIES SDN-C COMPACT SERIES
The SDN-C Compact Series DIN rail series power supplies are the next generation of the SDN Series. These models combine high efciency and compact size with new visual diagnostic LEDs to offer the most performance available from SolaHD. These have a patented DIN rail mounting clip and large, rugged accessible screw terminals.
Compact packaging to save space on the DIN rail Visual diagnostic LEDs for input and output status at a glance Higher efciency saves energy and lowers amount of heat generated in panel PowerBoost overload capability to start high inrush loads
SDN-C
24 VDC Output Voltage Humidity < 90% RH, non-condensing Storage Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Operating Temperature -13 to 140F (-25 to 60C) Approvals CE, cULs, SEMI F47, RoHS Warranty 5 years
POWER SUPPLIES
DIMENSIONS
Model Number SDN 5-24-100C SDN 10-24-100C SDN 5-24-480C SDN 10-24-480C SDN 20-24-480C SDN 40-24-480C Dimensions - inches (mm) H 4.85 (123.0) 4.85 (123.0) 4.85 (123.0) 4.85 (123.0) W D 1.97 (50.0) 4.36 (111.0) 2.36 (60.0) 4.36 (111.0) 1.97 (50.0) 4.36 (111.0) 2.36 (60.0) 4.36 (111.0)
SDN-C Series Dimensions

Weight 1.1lbs (0.50kg)
+ + OK
24-28 V
OK NEC Class 2 Power Supply
1.7lbs (0.80kg) 1.2lbs (0.52kg) 1.5lbs (0.70kg) 2.9lbs (1.30kg) 5.3lbs (2.40kg)
H
24 VDC / 2.5 A
Single Parallel
17
S O LA
Power Supply SDN 2.5-24-100P SDN5-24-100C
U L
4.85 (123.0) 3.42 (87.0) 4.98 (127.0) 4.85 (123.0) 3.35 (85.0) 4.68 (119.0)
US LISTED
115/230 VAC 1.3-0.7 A 50/60 HZ
MODEL SDN 5-24-100C SDN 10-24-100C SDN 5-24-480C SDN 10-24-480C SDN 20-24-480C SDN 40-24-480C SDN-PMBRK2 DESCRIPTION 120W compact DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output 240W compact DIN rail power supply, 115/230 VAC input, 24 VDC output 120W compact DIN rail power supply, 380/480 VAC input, 24 VDC output 240W compact DIN rail power supply, 380/480 VAC input, 24 VDC output 480W compact DIN rail power supply, 380/480 VAC input, 24 VDC output 960W compact DIN rail power supply, 480 VAC input, 24 VDC output, three phase ACCESSORIES Metal chassis mounting kit for SDN series
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1003
POWER SUPPLIES
CONTROL VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER SELECTION GUIDE
To make the proper transformer selection, the load must be completely analyzed. Every electricallyenergized component in the control circuit must be considered. Electromagnetic control devices have two current requirements. The first current requirement is called inrush volt-amperes (VA) and is the current required to energize the coil of the device. Inrush VA typically lasts anywhere from 5-20 ms and can be as much as 10 to 20 times the normal sealed VA. Sealed VA is the normal current required to maintain the energized coil in steady state for a period of time.
STEP 1 Determine the total sealed (steady state) VA load of the control circuit. Add the continuous VA requirements of the maximum number of components that will be energized at any given time. Include both electromagnetic (coils, solenoids, etc.) and non-electromagnetic components (pilot lights, timers, etc.). Sealed VA data is available from the component manufacturers. If only current is known, simply multiply current by voltage to get VA.
NEW!
Selection Example (Steps 1-4)
Determine the size transformer required to power the following list of components, assuming stable line voltage. Manufacturers Data Qty Components Sealed VA Inrush VA Description 3 Size 1 Contactors 63 555 2 Size 3 Contactors 86 1156 3 Relays 33 126 2 Indicating Lamps 14 14 TOTALS 196 1851 Using the chart, we find the inrush VA of 1851 will require a 250 VA transformer, even though the sealed VA is only 196.
280 580 770 1250 2750 3900 4900 8000 15,000 23,000 31,000 41,000 77,000
STEP 2 Determine the total inrush VA load of the control circuit. Add together the inrush VA ratings of the electromagnetic components (coils, solenoids, etc.) that will be energized simultaneously. Inrush VA data is usually available from the component manufacturers. Also, add the normal VA requirements of non-electromagnetic components (pilot lights, timers, etc.) that will be energized at the same time. STEP 3 Refer to the Regulation Data Chart below. If the supply circuit (primary) voltage is reasonably stable and fluctuates no more than 5%, refer to the 90% Secondary Voltage column. If it fluctuates as much as 10%, refer to the 95% Secondary Voltage column. NEMA standards require all electromagnetic devices to operate successfully at 85% of rated voltage. The 90% Secondary Voltage column is most commonly used for transformer selection.
POWER SUPPLIES
STEP 4
In the selected column of the Regulation Data Chart, locate the inrush VA closest to, but not less than, the inrush VA of the control circuit. Read to the far left side of the chart to determine the continuous nominal VA nameplate rating of the transformer needed. The secondary voltage delivered under inrush conditions will be a minimum of 85%, 90%, or 95% of rated secondary voltage, depending on the column selected from the Regulation Data Chart. The total sealed VA of the control circuit must not exceed the nominal VA rating of the transformer selected. REGULATION DATA CHART
Continuous Nominal VA (Name Plate Rating) Inrush VA @ 20% PF 95% Sec Voltage 90% Sec Voltage 85% Sec Voltage
50
200 350 400 800 1500 2000 3200 4200 8000 13,000 15,000 20,000 39,000 75,000
240 470 575 950 2200 2800 3700 5800 11,000 18,000 24,000 32,000 60,000 120,000
17
75 100 150 250 300 350 500 750 1000 1500 2000 3000 5000
150,000
STEP 5 Determine the proper transformer model number from the Kele catalog. Make sure your selection meets the following conditions: 1. Has the proper primary and secondary voltage 2. Exceeds the inrush VA demands 3. Has a nameplate VA that exceeds the sealed VA requirements
1004
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
side of the AC power input is connected directly to the negative side of the DC output. On the transformers positive halfcycle, the diode conducts. This allows the transformer current to charge the lter capacitor, as well as supply load current. On the transformers negative half-cycle, the diode turns off. The stored charge in the lter capacitor supplies load current until the next positive half-cycle. The half-wave rectier only uses transformer current every other half-cycle. It is not very efcient, but it is inexpensive and does a good job for lowcurrent power supplies. The full-wave bridge rectier is shown in Figure 2. Note that neither side of the AC power input is connected directly to the negative side of the DC output. On the transformers positive half-cycle, diodes D1 and D3 conduct. This allows the transformer current to charge up the lter capacitor, as well as supply load current. On the transformers negative half-cycle, diodes D2 and D4 conduct, supplying transformer current to the lter capacitor and load. The full-wave rectier utilizes the transformer current on both positive and negative half-waves. It is more efcient, and that is why it is often used in highercurrent power supplies.
POWERING MULTIPLE DEVICES FROM A COMMON TRANSFORMER
After properly sizing a control transformer for your application, there is an additional step in the selection process that should be considered. Even though the necessary steps have been taken to select a properly-sized transformer to power multiple 24 VAC devices (such as BAS controllers, transducers, actuators, and power supplies) there is a potential, but not so obvious problem that can exist. If not foreseen and corrected, this problem can cause blown fuses and/or physical damage to devices when the system is energized.
Many electronic HVAC controllers and interface devices are designed to take AC power on their input terminal strips. However, because the electronic components on these devices require DC power, the AC power at the terminal strip is converted to DC by use of an internal (onboard) power supply circuit (rectier/lter/regulator). Two common types of power supply circuits used are called full-wave bridge rectier and half-wave rectier. The problem with powering multiple devices from one AC power source stems from some devices using the half-wave circuit and some using the full-wave circuit. To better understand why mixing half- and full-wave rectiers on a common AC power source can be a problem, it is important to understand the difference between these two power supply circuits. The half-wave rectier is shown in Figure 1. Note that one
POWER SUPPLIES
So what is the problem with using a common AC transformer to power a device that has a full-wave rectier and a second device that has a half-wave rectifier? Consider Figure 3, which shows just such a setup. The conFIGURE 1. HALF-WAVE RECTIFIER CIRCUIT trol signal - terminals on Control Module Control Module Transformer No Transformer both modules are either Current Flow Current Flow directly connected togeth+ + + Reg Control Reg H Control H + Electronics Electronics er (as shown) or indirectly + + Control Signal 24 Control Signal 24 Input or Output VAC Power Input or Output VAC Power Stored connected by a common Charge G G ground. Looking carefully, you can see that the minus output of the full-wave recNegative Half-cycle Positive Half-cycle tifier is connected directly back to one of its AC inputs Note: AC G and Control signal - are the same electrical connection. via the pass thru common connection inside the halfFIGURE 2. FULL-WAVE RECTIFIER CIRCUIT wave device. This connection actually places diode Transformer Transformer Control Module Control Module Current Flow Current Flow D4 in the bridge directly + H H across the AC transformer 24 D4 D1 24 D4 D1 + Reg Control + VAC D3 D2 Reg Control VAC D3 D2 winding. Every time the AC Electronics + Electronics Control Signal G Control Signal + G + Input or Output Input or Output voltage goes to the polar ity that turns on the diode, the diode shorts out the Positive Half-cycle Negative Half-cycle transformer. In other words, the diode shorts the transformer 50% of the time. Note: AC G and Control signal - are not the same electrical connection. There are several symptoms
17
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1005
POWER SUPPLIES
that can occur from this situation: 1) A fuse blows every time the commons of the devices are connected together. 2) The diode shorting the transformer fails open. 3) The diode shorting the transformer fails shorted, and the transformer may burn up. 4) The circuit board foil traces connecting to the diode melt open or are blown off the board.
POWERING MULTIPLE DEVICES FROM A COMMON TRANSFORMER
17
These guidelines all require that the type of input power circuit (full- or half-wave) be known. Since most devices do not come with detailed schematic diagrams, this may be difficult to determine. Following are a few ideas that may help: 1) If a 24 VAC powered device has three wiring terminals, (power +, signal+ and a shared common for power - and signal -), then a half-wave rectier is being used. 2) If a 24 VAC powered device has four wiring terminals, (power +, power -, signal+, signal), rst check the Now that the problem has been pinpointed, some general products data sheet for any clues. Look for any notes that guidelines can be given for connecting multiple AC powered might indicate that the power and the signal devices together. terminals are electrically the same and hence, a half-wave 1) It is okay to connect multiple devices to the same AC device. transformer and share signal commons if: (a) every device 3) If no indication is given on the products data sheet, try uses a half-wave rectier; and (b) the same AC lead on using an ohmmeter to check the resistance between the every device is used for a common. signal terminal and both of the power terminals. A 2) It is okay to connect the signal common of a device that reading of a couple of ohms or less between the signal uses a full-wave rectier to other signal commons if the and either power terminal would indicate a common full-wave rectier device has a dedicated isolated AC connection between these terminals and a half-wave power transformer connected only to the devices power circuit. screws and nowhere else. 4) If no common connection can be found, the device is 3) It is okay to connect the signal common of a device that probably a full-wave rectifier. However, some devices uses a full-wave rectier to other signal commons if the incorporate a built-in isolation transformer that isolates both power terminals from both signal terminals. FIGURE 3. FULL-WAVE AND HALF-WAVE IN PARALLEL The differential pressure model T40 is an Full-Wave Bridge example. This type of device can be used Module Half-Wave Module with either full- or half-wave (voltage output) Control H Electronics devices. D4 D1 + H + Control Power 5) Finally, the manufacturer or supplier of the D3 D2 Electronics Control Control Sig Power G Sig device should be able to provide the required G information. Some manufacturers may require Pass Thru Common Connection that only their products be connected to a common transformer. Others may even require 24 H VAC G Path that ties bridge output that each of their devices have its own dediminus back to its own AC input cated and isolated transformer. 4) 5) device contains its own internal AC isolation transformer. It is okay to power a half-wave rectier device and a fullwave rectier device from the same AC transformer if the signal commons are absolutely, positively isolated from each other. If it is absolutely necessary to power a half-wave device and a full-wave device from the same AC source, and their DC control signals have to interact, a signal isolator such as the DT13E will be necessary. In summary, many devices (BAS controllers, transducers, actuators, and power supplies) used for the control of HVAC systems can be externally powered from 24 VAC. Because the electronic components of these devices require direct current, the AC power is internally converted to DC. When powering multiple devices from a common 24 VAC source, problems can arise due to different techniques that are used to convert the AC to DC. In other words, it is not as simple as plugging various appliances into an AC outlet in your house. Whenever you have different devices from different manufacturers, be careful to separate those devices that utilize a full-wave rectifier from those using a half-wave rectifier. When any doubt exists, provide a separate transformer. The small expense of an additional transformer or two will more than make up for all of the time and money spent on troubleshooting.
NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
1006
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
POWER SUPPLIES
UNDERSTANDING CURRENT SINKING, CURRENT SOURCING, AND GROUND LOOPS
circuit ground (See Figure 3). With this method, the I+ Youve just purchased some current to pneumatic terminals carry the different current values for each loop (I/P) transducers and are ready to try them. Each and, therefore, must be isolated from each other. Since transducer has been carefully installed according to the all of the output I- terminals are electrically the same, manufacturers recommendations and wired to its own they can be connected together. They may or may not be 4-20 mA analog output. All of the transducers are being connected to ground depending on the manufacturers powered by a common 24 VDC power supply. Feeling specications. A controller using this method to generate a condent with the installation, you decide it is time to test 4-20 mA signal is commonly called current sourcing. their operation. Individual commands are issued to each unit through the building automation system (BAS) but none of the I/P transducers appear to function properly. A command issued to one unit mysteriously causes all FIGURE 1. CURRENT SINKING CONTROLLER of the other units to react (or perhaps none of the units (typical for each output) work at all). After mumbling a few choice words, the installation and all the wiring are veried to be correct. The I+ system is trying to deliver a 4-20 mA signal to a device that is designed to accept a 4-20 mA signal. So what is the problem? Are all of the transducers defective? While this is possible, it is very unlikely. Instead, the problem Icould be directly related to the fact that all 4-20 mA analog + outputs are not created equal. Internal Power Supply Reg Different BAS controllers utilize different electronic techniques for generating a 4-20 mA current output. With one method, the analog output typically has its + I+ terminal connected to the + side of an internal V current loop power supply whose - side is connected Sense to ground. The output has its sensing and regulating electronics between the I- terminal and ground (See Figure 1). The I+ terminals are electronically identical. Because the I- terminals carry the different current values for each output loop, they must be isolated from each other. They cannot be connected together nor can they be connected to a common or FIGURE 2. DRIVING A GROUNDED LOAD WITH A CURRENT ground. Connecting a 4-20 mA load from SINKING CONTROLLER I+ to ground puts the controllers internal current loop power supply directly across Current Sinking I+ Controller the load (See Figure 2). The controllers regulating electronics are completely + bypassed, which will usually cause the Internal Power controllers output fuse to blow, the load ISupply to go to full output and remain there or the load to be physically damaged. A computer mA using this type of 4-20 mA signal is Sense and Regulate commonly referred to as a current sinking controller. Another method used to generate a 4-20 Driving a grounded load will cause unregulated current to bypass the mA signal puts the sensing and regulating controllers electronics electronics between the internal loop Grounded power supply and the analog output I+ Load terminal. The I- terminal is connected to
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1007
POWER SUPPLIES
17
POWER SUPPLIES
Looking back now at the problem discussed previously, all of the I/P transducers are being powered from a common power supply. After a little research you determine that your controller is current sinking and upon further examination of the I/P transducer, its power input - terminal is found to be common with its signal input - terminal. Since all of the I/P power input - terminals are connected to one common power supply, this effectively ties all of the controller analog output I- terminals
UNDERSTANDING CURRENT SINKING, CURRENT SOURCING, AND GROUND LOOPS
NEW!
FIGURE 4. GROUND LOOP CURRENTS
Transmitter Voltage drop in COM wire due to loop currents + +
FIGURE 3. CURRENT SOURCING CONTROLLER (typical for each output)

Sense
loop, causing ground loop currents to ow through the wire. This causes voltage drops in the ground wire due to wire resistance (See Figure 4). Also, since the impedance of the loop is rather low, a few volts potential difference can produce several amps of current, possibly damaging electrical components. Even worse, electrical storms could momentarily cause very large potential differences that would make an extremely large current ow possible. Under these circumstances, the current ow can be high enough to burn cables or destroy electrical interfaces. One simple way to solve this problem is to isolate or oat the com connection from ground at either end. However, the equipment often has its com terminal internally grounded, making it impractical to oat. When this is the case, a signal isolator such as the Model DT13E should be used. The DT13E accepts a current or voltage input and produces a linearly-transferred current or voltage output. The input and output are electrically isolated making the DT13E useful for eliminating ground loops, reducing noise pickup, allowing conversion of the signal type (from current input to voltage output and vice versa) and scaling between the input and output. The DT13E could also be used to solve the problem discussed earlier by allowing current sinking controllers to control grounded loads. The Model DT13 contains an internal power supply which provides regulated and isolated power to each half of the board. Input conditioning circuitry scales and lters the DC input and drives a precision isolator, which carries the signal across the isolation barrier. The output side of the isolator drives a circuit that reconverts the signal into a duplicate of the input, which can then be scaled as necessary for the application.
+
V
+
Internal Power Supply
Reg
I+ I-
POWER SUPPLIES
17
together. (A no-no for current sinking controllers.) One way to solve this problem is to provide a separate isolated (not grounded) power supply for each transducer. This can be costly and, if panel space is at a premium, not very practical. It may also be necessary to isolate the case of a metal transducer from ground for proper operation. Another way to solve this problem is to configure the computers analog outputs for voltage output. Doing so will typically allow the controller to drive grounded loads as well as multiple loads powered from a single power supply. Transducers that are designed to accept a voltage or that are eld selectable for current or voltage should, of course, be used (UCP-422-V, UCP-722, UCP-822). A third solution is to utilize two-wire transducers that are loop-powered and require no external power supply (UCP422, UCP-242). Another problem often encountered when interfacing a computers analog output to external equipment is the corruption of the control signal due to ground loop currents. Our instinct would lead us to believe that all ground points are at the same potential. In reality, there is no such thing as an absolute ground. Ground potentials at different locations are not equal because current flow in the ground conductors causes small voltage potentials to develop from one ground point to another. Connecting a wire between grounds creates a
Receiver
COM
COM
Ground loop current V Potential difference in two grounds
1008
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
PRESSURE
HUMIDITY
PRESSURE
Kele Carries Reliable Instruments for Critical Environments and General Building Pressure Sensing.
P74 Series | p. 1087
DPL Series | p. 1009
SRCM | p. 1095
PTX1 Series | p. 1059
GC52 | p. 1047
A2G | p. 1103
PRESSURE
MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Controllers and Monitors PCM Series Pressure Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRMS Series Multi-Room Monitoring Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRCM Series Room Condition Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRIM Series Room Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRMD Series Room Isolation Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRPM Series Room Pressure Monitor .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Differential Pressure Switches KDPS Series Differential Pressure Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AFS Series Adjustable Differential Pressure Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RH-3, RH-3-2 Differential Pressure Switch.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NS2-0000-02 Adjustable Differential Pressure Switch Kit .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFS-4001 Differential Pressure Switches .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RSS Series Adjustable Differential Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDP-109 Dual Setpoint Differential Pressure Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DFS-221 Fixed Differential Pressure Switch .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1910 Series Differential Pressure Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900-5-MR Manual Reset Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P32 Series Differential Pressure Switch .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2G-40 Series Differential Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-013, 24-014 Differential Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P74 Series Differential Pressure Switch .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J21K Series Differential Pressure Switches .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3000 Series Photohelic Differential Pressure Switch / Gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092 1094 1095 1097 1098 1099 1070 1071 1073 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1080 1081 1082 1085 1087 1088 1108
PRESSURE
M264 | p. 1014
PTX1 Series | p. 1059
Differential Pressure Transmitters DPL Series Low Differential Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009 DPA, DPA-M Series Differential Pressure Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011 DPA II Series Differential Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012 M264 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 M265 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 260 Series Multirange Differential Pressure Transmitter with Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018 M267-MR Multi-range Differential Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020 269 Series Precision Low Differential Pressure Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022 CXLdp Series Differential Pressure Transmitters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 DXLdp Series Differential Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 XLDP Series Differential Pressure Transmitters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 ZPS Series Differential Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028 PR274/275 Series Differential Pressure Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030 A2G-50 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032 T30 Series Differential Pressure Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 PR264 Series Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035 PR276 Series Duct Static Pressure Transmitter.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037 Gauges and Accessories BVA-5 Bypass Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DPW-3VLV, M230-3VLV, W30-3VLV Three and Five-Valve Manifolds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K2000 Series Low Cost Differential Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111.10, 111.12 Series Dial Gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2000 Series Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.34, 233.34 Series Dial Gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series A Microprocessor Based Differential Pressure Gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25W100 Refrigeration Gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PG Series Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47B-1, 47S-1, 747B, 747S, PT Snubbers, Pigtail.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A300 Series, RPS, SD-01, 21121, 60681 Air Pressure Sensors, Surge Dampeners. . . . . . . 1053 1054 1101 1105 1106 1109 1110 1111 1111 1112 1113
DPAII | p. 1012
Pressure Switches P10 Series Pressure Switch .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084 PK Series Adjustable Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089 J54 Series Pressure Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091 Pressure Transmitters P51 Series Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSS2 Series Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTX1 Series Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Series Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Series Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVI-1, PVI-2 Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GC51 Series Rangeable Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MBS 1900 Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSD-30 Series Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2G-05, -10, -15 Series Pressure Gauges / Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055 1057 1059 1061 1063 1066 1068 1065 1069 1103
kele.com
Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitters DPW-692 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039 M230 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041 231 Series Setra Differential Pressure Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043 231RS Series Remote Mounted Differential Pressure Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045 GC52 Series Wet/Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047 PR282 Series Wet to Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049 W30 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
NEW!
10 psig overpressure 1% full scale accuracy Reverse wiring protection 4-20 mA, 0-5 or 0-10 VDC output Zero and span adjustment Bidirectional ranges available
PRESSURE
PSI
LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER DPL SERIES
The Kele DPL Series Low Differential Pressure Transmitters offer reliable pressure measurements as low as 0.10" w.c. (25 Pa) with an exceptional 1% full scale accuracy. The rugged capacitance sensor can withstand up to 10 psig over pressure without damaging the unit. The transmitters feature reverse wiring protection and easily accessible zero and span pots. The DPL Series are designed for energy management systems, environmental pollution control, HVAC, and building automation applications.
APPLICATION
HVAC and energy management systems Variable air volume and fan control Filter monitoring Environmental pollution control Furnace draft Lab and fume hood control
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 4-20 mA Model 0-5, 0-10 VDC Model Signal Output DPL-XX-1 DPL-XX-4 DPL-XX-5 Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance Adjustments Accuracy 9-30 VDC 9-30 VAC/VDC 0-10 VDC (3-wire) 4-20mA (2-wire) 0-5 VDC (3-wire) 800 5,000 Adjustable via trim pots 1.0% full scale Compensated temperature range: 0 to 150F (-18 to 65C) Overpressure 10 psig (68.95 kPa) in positive or negative direction Operating Temperature 0 to 150F (-18 to 65C) Storage Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Fire retardant glass lled polyester Enclosure Rating (UL94V-0) Process Connection 1/4" OD press-on tting Wiring Terminations Screw terminal strip Approvals CE 0.3 lb (0.15 kg) Weight Warranty 1 year Thermal Effect
PRESSURE
DIMENSIONS
18
in (cm)
3.95 (10.0)
0.60 (1.5)
2.75 (7.0) 3.49 (8.9)
1.55 (3.9)
4.27 (10.8)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1009
PRESSURE
PSI
LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER DPL SERIES
WIRING
9 to 30 VDC Current monitoring device
Model DPL
NEW!
Readout or BAS Power supply -COM OUT Model DPL +EXC
RANGE CODE 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 BIDIRECTIONAL RANGE "W.C. 0.1 0.25 0.5 1.0 2.5 5.0 10.0 25.0 50.0
MODEL DESCRIPTION DPL Differential pressure transmitter XXX Range Code (see table) 1 4 5 0-10 V output 4-20 mA output 0-5 V output Example: DPL-10-4 Differential pressure transmitter with 4-20mA output, 0.1"w.c.
PRESSURE
DPL - 10 - 4
TABLE 1. RANGE CODES

RANGE CODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PRESSURE RANGE "W.C. 0 to 0.25 0 to 0.5 0 to 1.0 0 to 2.5 0 to 5.0 0 to 10.0 0 to 25.0 0 to 50.0 0 to 100
18
A-301-K A-302-K A-308-K A-345-K RPS RPS-I RPS-W SD-01 T-101
RELATED PRODUCTS Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb Surge dampener 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 901
1010
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER DPA, DPA-M SERIES
PSI
The Kele DPA and DPA-M Series are very cost-effective, low-range differential air pressure transmitters for duct pressure applications where measurement of pressure differentials up to 10" W.C. is required. The DPA and DPA-M Series incorporate a piezoresistive, silicon, micromachined sensing element and integrated temperature compensation for excellent performance and accuracy. Low cost 4-20 mA output standard or 1-5/2-10 VDC outputs 24 VAC or 24 VDC power Brass barb ttings for 1/4" tubing Two-year warranty DPA-1-20
DPA Mini
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage DPA DPA-M (Voltage) DPA-M (Current) Signal Output DPA DPA-M Accuracy Repeatability Operating Humidity 24 to 36 VDC @ 23 mA, 24 VAC 10% @ 0.83 VA 15 to 36 VDC @ 23 mA, 24 VAC 10% @ 0.83 VA 12 to 36 VDC @ 23 mA, 24 VAC 10% @ 0.83 VA 4-20 mA @ 500, 1-5 or 2-10 VDC 4-20 mA @ 500, 0-5 or 0-10 VDC 1% Full Scale Output 0.3% Full Scale Output 10 to 95% RH, non-condensing Operating Temperature DPA 32 to 185F (0 to 85C) DPA-M 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Compensated Temperature Range 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Input Range 0-1" W.C. to 0-20" W.C. Media Compatibility Dry air or inert non-conductive gases Proof Pressure 100" W.C. Wiring Termination Terminal (16 to 22 AWG) Approvals CE, RoHS, REACH Weight 0.32 lb (0.14 kg) Warranty 2 years
PRESSURE
MODEL DPA DPA-M DESCRIPTION Differential pressure transmitter Differential pressure transmitter mini INPUT RANGE ("W.C.) 1 0-1 2 0-2 3 0-3 4 0-4 5 0-5 10 0-10 20 0-20 300 0-0.3 KPa 500 0-0.5 KPa 1000 0-1.0 KPa 1600 0-1.6 KPa 2500 0-2.5 KPa OUTPUT SIGNAL 5 1-5 VDC 10 2-10 VDC 20 4-20 mA
Wiring
Output Signal Supply Voltage Wire Connections
18
Ground Output VIN
{
Example: DPA-M-10-5 Differential pressure transmitter mini with input range of 0-10" W.C. and 1-5 VDC output signal
DPA-M
10
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1011
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER DPA II SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele DPA II Series Differential Pressure Transmitter is a cost-effective, versatile low-range differential air pressure transmitter for applications such as monitoring building static pressure, lter blockage, measuring ow, clean rooms, etc. It has eld selectable pressure ranges and outputs through easy to congure DIP switches. The DPA II Series incorporates a durable piezoresistive sensing element and integrated temperature compensation for excellent performance and accuracy. Models with LCD feature an easy-to-read display for set up reference, trouble shooting assistance, and performance monitoring.
NEW!
DPAII-1-20 DPAII-1-20-LCD
FEATURES
Field selectable pressure ranges Field-selectable outputs 4-20mA, 1-5 VDC, or 2-10 VDC LCD option for easy installation and setup 24 VAC or 24 VDC power Two-year warranty
SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
3.07" (78.02mm)
PRESSURE
18
Supply Voltage 15-36 VDC, 35 mA 24 VAC 10%, 0.83 VA Signal Output 4-20 mA (two-wire) 1-5 or 2-10 VDC (three-wire) Dip switch selectable Max Output Impedence (mA) 550 max Min Output Impedance (VDC) 100 K min Accuracy 0.85% Full Scale Output, includes linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability Thermal Effect 0.067% FSO/F ( 0.12% FSO/C) Compensated Temperature Range 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Media Compatibility Dry air or inert non-conductive gases Overpressure 100" W.C. Operating Humidity 0 to 95% non-condesning Operating Temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Wetted Parts Brass ttings, PVC tubing, and silicon Enclosure Rating UL94-5VA Process Connection 1/4 in barbed ttings Wiring Terminations Screw terminal with cable gland Approvals RoHS, CE, WEEE, REACH Weight 0.45 lbs (0.20 kg); 0.50 lbs (0.23 kg) with LCD Warranty 2 years
Factory Calibration DO NOT ADJUST!
Unit Select DIP Switches 5.25" (133.45mm) Config DIP Switches
1.08" (27.52mm)
1/2" NPT Access Hole with Strain Relief Fitting
Terminal Blocks 16-22 AWG Shielded Conductors Recommended Brass Fittings (recommend 1/4" push-on tubing
1012
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Table 1 Wiring Connections Table 2 Output Selection
MODEL DPAII DPAII 10 5 LCD
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER DPA II SERIES
PSI
WIRING / OUTPUT SELECTION / SPAN SELECTION
Table 3 Span Selection
DESCRIPTION Differential pressure transmitter INPUT RANGE 1 0 to 1" w.c. 2 0 to 2" w.c. 3 0 to 3" w.c. 4 0 to 4" w.c. 5 0 to 5" w.c. 10 0 to 10" w.c. 20 0 to 20" w.c. 300 0 to 0.3 KPa 500 0 to 0.5 KPa 1000 0 to 1.0 KPa 1600 0 to 1.6 KPa 2500 0 to 2.5 KPa OUTPUT SIGNAL 5 1-5 VDC 10 2-10 VDC 20 4-20 mA DISPLAY OPTION LCD LCD Option
Model DPAII - 1 DPAII - 2 DPAII - 3 DPAII - 4 DPAII - 5 DPAII - 10 DPAII - 20 DPAII - 0.5 DPAII - 0.5 DPAII - 1.01 DPAII - 1.11 DPAII - 2.51
JUMPER SELECTABLE * 0 to 2" w.c. 0-300 Pa 0 to 1" w.c. 0-300 Pa 0 to 4" w.c. 0 to 5" w.c. 0 to 3" w.c. 0 to 5" w.c. 0 to 3" w.c. 0 to 5" w.c. 0-1600 Pa 0-2500 Pa 0-3200 Pa 0-5000 Pa 0 to 1" w.c. 0 to 2" w.c. 0 to 1" w.c. 0 to 2" w.c. 0 to 3" w.c. 0 to 4" w.c. 0 to 10" w.c. 0-2500 Pa 0 to 10" w.c. 0-1600 Pa
0-500 Pa 0-500 Pa 0-1000 Pa 0-1000 Pa 0-1000 Pa NA 0-5000 Pa 0-500 Pa 0-300 Pa 0 to 5" w.c. NA NA
PRESSURE
*Jumper selectable for customized applications
18
Example: DPAII-10-5-LCD Differential pressure transmitter with input range of 0 to 10" W.C. and 1 to 5 VDC output signal
RELATED PRODUCTS SD-01 Surge dampener RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) A-308-K Duct static pressure tting, 1/4" barb
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1013
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER M264 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra Model M264 Differential Pressure Transmitter is a low-air pressure transmitter able to sense differential pressure in both negative and positive ranges. The Model M264 incorporates a tensioned stainless steel diaphragm to form a variable capacitor that will produce variation in the output signal. The Model M264s durable design will tolerate an overpressure of 10 psig (68.95 kPa) and has an unconditional three-year warranty.
NEW!
M264 Series
FEATURES
4-20 mA output signal Voltage output signal optional 10 psig (68.70 kPa) overpressure Three-year unconditional warranty 1% accuracy standard, 0.4% and 0.25% optional Reverse wiring protected Stainless steel diaphragm Ideal for air and non-conducting gases
APPLICATION
HVAC building automation Variable air volume control Environmental pollution control Lab and fume hood control Filter monitoring Medical instrumentation Velocity pressure measurement
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Minimum Output Impedance VDC Accuracy 9 to 30 VDC, 9 to 33 VDC 4-20 mA (two-wire), 0-5 VDC (threewire), Current (two-wire) 4-20 mA, Voltage (three-wire) 0-5 VDC 800 @ 24 VDC, 750 @ 24 VDC 5000, 5000 1% FS, RSS (at constant temp) 1% FS Non-linearity 0.96% FS Non-repeatability 0.1% FS Hysteresis 0.2% FS; 0.4% and 0.25% optional Zero/Span shift 0.033F (0.018C), Compensated temperature range 0 to 150F (-18 to 65C) Zero/Span shift 0.033F (0.018C) 0.05% FS Up to 10 psig (68.95 kPa) range dependant, 10 psig (68.95 kPa) (Unit is factory calibrated at 0g effect with diaphragm vertical),
Range Upto 0.5" WC Upto 1.0" WC Upto 2.5" WC Upto 5.0" WC
18
Thermal Effect
Repeatability Overpressure Additional Specications
Zero offset (%FS/G) 0.60 0.50 0.22 0.14, Position effect: (Unit is factory calibrated at 0g effect with diaphragm vertical) Range (in) Zero offset (%FS/G) 0-10 0.12 0-5 0.14 0-1.0 0.22 0-0.1 2.10 Operating Temperature 0 to 175F (-18 to 79C) Storage Temperature -65 to 250F (-54 to 121C) Enclosure Rating Fire retardant, glass-lled polyester Process Connection 3/16" OD barbed brass Dimensions 5.06" x 2.75" x 2.38" (12.86 x 6.99 x 6.03 cm), 3.00"H x 5.51"W x 1.91"D (14.00 x 7.62 x 4.85 cm) Temperature Range 0 to 150F (-18 to 65C) Enclosure Fire-retardant glass lled polyester (UL 94 V-0 approved) Hysteresis 0.1% FS Linearity 0.96% FS Approvals CE Weight 0.55 lb (0.25 kg) Warranty 3 years March 2014
1014
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Zero
PRESSURE
PSI
4.56 (11.59)
Model M264
2.75 (6.99)
1.66 (4.22)
High
Low
Span
5.06 (12.86)
2.38 (6.03)
WIRING
COM EXC OUT
Low
High
4-20 mA
High Low
0-5 VDC
4-20 mA Output
0-5 VDC Output
PRESSURE
MODEL M264
DESCRIPTION Differential pressure transmitter XXX RANGE CODE (see Table 1 below) C 4-20 mA output (stocked at Kele) V 0-5 VDC output (call Kele for availability) 2R5WB C Example:
M264
M264-2R5WB-C Differential pressure transmitter with a 4-20 mA output proportional to a range of -2.5" to 2.5" W.C. (622 Pa) add -E to the end of part number for 0.4% accuracy or add -F to the end of part number for 0.25% accuracy RANGE CODE 0R1WB R25WB 0R5WB 001WB 2R5WB 005WB 010WB 025WB BIDIRECTIONAL PRESSURE RANGE "W.C. Pa 0.1 0.25 0.5 1.0 2.5 5.0 10.0 25.0 24.9 62.2 124 249 622 1244 2488 6221
TABLE 1. SPECIFYING RANGE PRESSURE RANGE RANGE CODE "W.C. Pa 0R1WD R25WD 0R5WD 001WD 2R5WD 005WD 010WD 025WD 050WD 100WD 0-0.10 0-0.25 0-0.50 0-1.00 0-2.50 0-5.00 0-10.0 0-25.0 0-50.0 0-100.0 0-24.9 0-62.2 0-124 0-249 0-622 0-1244 0-2488 0-6221 0-12441 0-24883
18
264-A1 A-301-K A-302-K A-308-K A-345-K RPS RPS-I RPS-W SD-01 T-101
RELATED PRODUCTS Conduit housing for M264 Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb Surge dampener 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 901
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1015
PRESSURE
PSI
DESCRIPTION
The Setra Model 265 differential pressure transducer provides superior positive and negative pressure sensing required for high efciency, air-control systems. The Model 265 is a 1.0% Full Scale accuracy unit (0.4%, 0.25% FS optional) with an available snap-on conduit enclosure molded from high impact Lexan.
NEW!
M265 Series Zero/Span Shift %FS: 0.033 F (0.06 C ) Up to 10 PSI (Range Dependent) Overpressure Measurement Range -50" WC to 100" WC Response Time 20-30 ms Operating Temperature 0 to 150F (-18 to 65C) Media Compatibility Dry Air or inert non-conductive gases Long-Term Stability 0.5% FS/YR Stability Approvals RoHS Weight 0.19 lbs (0.09 kg) Warranty 1 year Thermal Effect
Voltage Circuit Diagram
FEATURES
1% accuracy improves variable air volume system performance Optional accuracies as high as 0.25% FS 24 VDC or 24 VAC excitation High level 0-5 VDC , 0-10 VDC or 2-Wire 4-20 mA analog outputs are compatible with energy management systems Fully protected against reverse wiring
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Minimum Output Impedance VDC Accuracy 4-20 mA: 9-30 VDC @ 10 mA 0-5 mA: 9-30 VDC @ 10 mA, 9 to 3 VAC @ 0.2 VA 0-10 mA: 12 to 30 VAC @ 0.2 VA 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA 800 50,000 1% of FS; Optional 0.4% FS and 0.25% FS
PRESSURE
18
WIRING
Current Circuit Diagram
-COM
9 to 30 VDC
Current Monitoring Device
265
Readout or DAS Power Supply
OUT +EXC
Model 265
+EXC -COM OUT
Connected to positive terminal of DC/AC power supply Connect as the reference for power supply and output signal Connected to positive terminal of control or pressure
1016
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
2651 2R5WD 11 T1
T-101 SD-01 RPS RPS-I RPS-W A-302-K A-301-K A-345-K A-308-K DCPA-1.2 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W
PRESSURE
PSI
MODEL DESCRIPTION 2651 Very low differential pressure transducer PRESSURE RANGE "W.C. Differential Bidirectional R25WD 0 to 0.25 0R1WD 0.10 0R5WD 0 to 0.50 R25WB 0.25 001WD 0 to 1.0 0R5WB 0.50 2R5WD 0 to 2.5 001WB 1.0 005WD 0 to 5.0 2R5WB 2.5 010WD 0 to 10 005WB 5.0 025WD 0 to 25 010WB 10 050WD 0 to 50 025WB 25 100WD 0 to 100 050WB 50 EXCITATION / OUTPUT 11 24 VDC/ 4-20 mA 2B 24 VDC/ 0-5 VDC AB 24 VAC/ 0-5 VDC AC 24 VAC/ 0-10 VDC
ELECTRICAL TERMINATION T1 Terminal strip ACCURACY C 1% FS without calibration certificate

E F G 0.4% FS with calibration certificate 0.25% FS with calibration certificate 1% FS with calibration certificate
PRESSURE
Example: 2651-2R5WD-11-T1-C 265 transducer 0to 2.5" W.C. range, 4-20 mA output, terminal strip electrical connection, and 1% accuracy
18
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901 Surge dampener 1113 Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113 Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113 Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113 Duct static pressure tting, 1/4" barb 1113 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1017
PRESSURE
PSI
MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER WITH DISPLAY 260 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra 260 Series Multirange Differential Pressure Transmitter with Display incorporates many powerful, attractive and easy to use features as standard in a multicongurable package. One model with very low selectable differential pressure ranges is perfect for measuring space static pressure and duct airow velocity pressure. A second model with higher selectable ranges is used for sensing duct static pressure. Two similar models, with Pascal engineering units instead of inches of water, are also available. The 260 Series comes standard with a wide variety of selectable output signals, 1-5 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, making it compatible with virtually any building automation controller.
NEW!
260 Series
FEATURES
Optional LCD on all models Switches and jumpers for conguration Selectable analog output Designed for AC/DC unregulated power supplies Display feedback of conguration selection LCD ashes when out of range Push button zero Optional integral duct static probe Models with ranges in Pascal units Eleven-point NIST certication available
APPLICATION
Space static pressure Duct static pressure Duct airow Clean room pressure Air lock/isolation rooms Air lter monitoring
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 12-30 VDC Current Output Voltage Output 24 VAC/VDC Signal Output 4-20 mA (two wire) , 0-5 VDC (three-wire), 0-10 VDC (three-wire) Maximum Output Impedance 800 @ 30 VDC Minimum Output Impedance 10,000 Accuracy 1.0% FS at constant temperature Non-linearity 0.96% FS Non-repeatability 0.05% FS Hysteresis 0.1% FS Compensated Temperature Range 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Zero/Span shift 0.02% FS/F (0.036% FS/C) 10 psig (69 kPa) Overpressure Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Storage Temperature 23 to 131F (-5 to 55C) Enclosure UL 94V-0 ame resistant enclosure plenum rated, glass lled polyester Process Connection 3/16" OD barbed brass Approvals Meets CE standards Weight 0.5 lb (0.2 kg) Warranty 1 year Thermal Effect
18
1018
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (mm)
4.75 (120.7) 4.25 (108) 150 .86 (21.9) 4.15 (105.4) 1.35 (34.3) .63 (15.9) .59 (14.9) 1.50 (38.1) 1.03 (26.3) .87 (22)
PRESSURE
PSI
MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER WITH DISPLAY 260 SERIES
LOW
.63 (15.9) .63 (15.9) Knockout for 1/2" conduit
LOW
1.3 (31.83)
9.20 (233.7)
Optional Static Probe Diagram
7.61 (193.2)
SELECTABLE RANGES PER MODEL

Model MS1 Unidirectional ranges 0" to 0.1" W.C. 0" to 0.25" W.C. 0" to 0.5" W.C. 0" to 1.0" W.C. 0" to 1.0" W.C. 0" to 2.5" W.C. 0" to 5.0" W.C. 0" to 10.0" W.C. 0 to 25 Pa 0 to 50 Pa 0 to 100 Pa 0 to 250 Pa 0 to 250 Pa 0 to 500 Pa 0 to 1000 Pa 0 to 2500 Pa Bi-directional ranges 0.1" W.C. 0.25" W.C. 0.5" W.C. 1.0" W.C. 1.0" W.C. 2.5" W.C. 5.0" W.C. 10.0" W.C. 25 Pa 50 Pa 100 Pa 250 Pa 250 Pa 500 Pa 1000 Pa 2500 Pa
WIRING
Voltage Three-Wire, 0-5, 0-10 VDC Configuration
24 VAC/DC nominal excitation
EXC COM OUT
MS2
+ Power supply 13 - 30VAC/VDC -
+ -
Voltage monitor
MS3
Current Two-Wire, 4-20 mA Configuration
PRESSURE
MS4
24V (DC Only) nominal excitation Power supply 13 - 30VDC
EXC COM OUT
+ -
+ -
Current monitor
MODEL DESCRIPTION 260G Multirange differential pressure transmitter with display RANGES MS1 0-0.1" to 0-1.0" W.C. ranges, wall mount MS2 0-1.0" to 0-10" W.C. ranges, wall mount MS3 0-25 to 0-250 Pa ranges, wall mount MS4 0-250 to 0-2500 Pa ranges, wall mount PROBE OPTION S Static pressure probe DISPLAY OPTION D Display N No Display NIST OPTION NIST 11-point calibration certificate included 2601 MS1 S D Example: 2061MS1S Model 260 transducer 0" to 1.0" W.C. range with optional static pressure probe.
18
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 901
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1019
PRESSURE
PSI
MULTI-RANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER M267-MR
DESCRIPTION
The Setra Model M267-MR Differential Pressure Transmitter is a multi-rangeable low air differential pressure transmitter. One Model M267-MR replaces six single-range pressure transmitters and is ideal for stocking. Each Model M267-MR is factory calibrated for its highest range but can easily be recalibrated. The rugged poly-carbonate NEMA 4 case protects the internal electronics from the environment.
NEW!
M267-MR2-C
FEATURES
Measure six ranges with one unit (three positive and three bidirectional ranges) 1% accuracy in each range 10 psig (68.70 kPa) maximum overpressure Rugged IP65/NEMA 4 case Available in current or voltage outputs Available in ranges up to 30" W.C. (7.473 kPa) Easily reranged with dip switches
APPLICATION
HVAC building automation Static duct pressure Clean room pressure Environmental pollution control Filter monitoring
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Current Output Voltage Output Supply VA Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance Accuracy Non-repeatability Non-linearity Hysteresis Thermal Effect Overpressure 9 to 33 VDC 0 to 5 VDC models- 9 to 30 VAC/12 to 40 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC models- 11 to 30 VAC/13 to 40 VDC 0.8 VA 4-20 mA (two-wire), 0-5 VDC (threewire), 0-10 VDC (three-wire) 800 @ 24 VDC 5000 1.0% FS at constant temperature 0.05% FS 0.98% FS 0.1% FS Zero/Span shift 0.033% FS/F (0.018%FS/C), 40 to 150F (5 to 65C) Up to 10 psig (68.95 kPa) - range dependant (Unit is factory calibrated at 0g effect with diaphragm vertical) Range (in) Zero Offset (%FS/G) 0-0.5 0.60 0-1.0 0.50 0-2.5 0.22 0-5.0 0.14 Operating Humidity 35% to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 0 to 150F (-18 to 65C) Compensated Temperature Range 40 to 150F (5 to 65C) Enclosure Plastic glass-lled polycarbonate Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (IP65) Process Connection 3/16" OD barbed brass, for 1/4" OD tubing Dimensions 2.68"H x 6.20"W x 2.32"D (6.81 x 15.25 x 5.90 cm) Approvals CE Weight 0.56 lb (0.3 kg); 0.59 lb (0.27 kg) with duct probe Warranty 1 year Position Effect
18
1020
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
PRESSURE
PSI
MULTIRANGE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER M267-MR
in (cm)
6.20 (15.75)
5.60 (14.22)
1.73 (4.39) 0.18 (0.46) 0.75 (1.91) 0.50 (1.27) 0.93 (2.36) 7/8
0.80 (2.03)
1.18 (3.0)
2.68 (6.81)
High
Low
1.34 (3.40)
1.29 (3.28)
3/16'' OD Pressure Fitting for 1/4'' Push-on Tubing
WIRING
Power Supply
4-20 mA Signal
EXC COM SIG
ON
1 2 3 4
PRESSURE
Power Supply
( )
Voltage Signal
Current
Voltage
( )
MODEL M267 DESCRIPTION Multi-range differential pressure transmitter XXX RANGE CODE (see Table 1 below) C 4-20 mA output V5 0-5 VDC output V10 0-10 VDC output MR2 C Example: M267-MR2-C Multirange differential pressure transmitter with a 0-0.25" to 0-1.0" W.C. pressure range and a 4-20 mA output.
PRESSURE RANGE
18
M267
TABLE 1. SPECIFYING RANGE

RANGE CODE
MR1* MR2 MR3 MR4
"W.C. 0-0.1 0-0.25 0-0.5 0-1.0 0-1.25 0-2.5 0-5.0 0-7.5 0-15 0-30
Pa 24.91 62.03 124.55 249.10 311.38 622.75 1245.50 1868.25 3736.50 7473.00
"W.C. 0.05 0.125 0.25 0.50 0.625 1.25 2.5 3.75 7.5 15.0
Pa 12.46 31.14 62.03 124.55 155.69 311.38 622.75 934.13 1868.25 3736.50
* MR1 is available only with 0-0.1" W.C. and 0.05" W.C.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1021
PRESSURE
PSI
PRECISION LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 269 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra 269 Series Precision Low Differential Pressure Transmitters are designed for high performance applications such as clean rooms, isolation rooms, and other critical environments. The transmitters offer full scale accuracy of 0.5% with excellent long term stability. Installation and calibration is easy with the removable process head, detachable terminal block and Din Rail mounting. FEATURES 2 psig overpressure 0.5% full scale accuracy Reverse wiring protection 4-20 mA output Removable process head Bidirectional ranges available
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
0.5 (1.2) 0.75 (1.9) 3.9 (9.9)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Adjustments 13.5-30 VDC 4-20mA (2-wire)
800 Adjustable via an external security key Accuracy 0.5% full scale Thermal Effect Compensated temperature range: 20 to 140F (-6.7 to 60C) Overpressure 2 psig (14 kPa), positive or negative Operating Temperature -20 to 160F (-29 to 71C) Storage Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Enclosure Rating ABS plastic, re retardant (UL94 V-0) Mounting Vertical, DIN rail Process Connection 3/16" O.D. brass barbed ttings Wiring Terminations Detachable screw terminal connector Approvals CE Weight 0.56 lb (0.3 kg) Warranty 1 year
PRESSURE
1.3 (3.2)
2.9 (7.3) 3.4 (8.6)
18

MODEL 2691-001WB 2691-001WD 2691-005WB 2691-005WD 2691-010WD 2691-0R1WB 2691-0R1WD 2691-0R5WB 2691-0R5WD 2691-2R5WB 2691-2R5WD 2691-R25WB 2691-R25WD DESCRIPTION Differential pressure transmitter, 1.0" W.C. Differential pressure transmitter, 0-1.0" W.C. Differential pressure transmitter, 5" W.C. Differential pressure transmitter, 0-5" W.C. Differential pressure transmitter, 0-10" W.C. Differential pressure transmitter, 0.1" W.C. Differential pressure transmitter, 0-0.1" W.C. Differential pressure transmitter, 0.5" W.C. Differential pressure transmitter, 0-0.5" W.C. Differential pressure transmitter, 2.5" W.C. Differential pressure transmitter, 0-2.5" W.C. Differential pressure transmitter, 0.25" W.C. Differential pressure transmitter, 0-0.25" W.C.
269425-02
ACCESSORIES Security cal key (required for calibration)
1022
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS CXLDP SERIES
PSI
The Ashcroft CXLdp Series Differential Pressure Transmitters are designed for use with clean, dry, air and other clean, dry, non-corrosive gases. The CXLdp Series features a standard accuracy of 0.80%, an optional accuracy of 0.40%, 4-20 mA output, optional 0-10 V or 0-5 V output and a standard DIN rail mount.
Reliable and repeatable, stable capacitive sensor Reverse polarity protected High proof pressure, 15 psid DIN rail mount Power indication LED Optional NIST traceable calibration CXLdp
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA 12-36 VDC <6 mA for voltage output 4-20 mA, 0-10 V Proof Pressure Burst Pressure Response Time Media Compatibility Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty 15 psid (103 kPa) 25 psis 250 ms Clean, dry air and non-corrosive gases 1.9"W x 3.3"H x 1.3"D (4.8 x 8.5 x 3.3 cm) CE, RoHS 0.16 lb (0.07 kg) 3 years
PRESSURE
545 @ 24 VDC (up to 1091 @ 36 VDC) 0.8%, 0.4% 0.03% span/F Accuracy Stability 0.5% FS/yr Operating Temperature 0 to 160F (-18 to 71C) Compensated Temperature Range 35 to 130F (2 to 54C)
WIRING
18
ZERO
SPAN
ZERO
Zero adjust potentiometer V Out Span adjust potentiometer Zero adjust potentiometer
SPAN
Span adjust potentiometer
+
+
Vin (V+, Supply)
Common (V-)
+ BCS
SUPPLY
POWER
POWER SUPPLY
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1023
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS CXLDP SERIES
PRESSURE
MODEL DESCRIPTION CX CXLdp differential pressure transmitter 4 0.4% accuracy 8 0.80% accuracy MB2 1/4" barbed stainless steel fittings F01 1/8" FNPT 42 4-20 mA signal output 10 0-10 VDC signal output PRESSURE RANGE "W.C. P1IW 0-0.1 P1IWL 0.1 P25IW 0-0.25 P25IWL 0.25 P5IW 0-0.5 P5IWL 0.5 1IW 0-1.0 1IWL 1.0 2IW 0-2.0 2IWL 2.0 2P5IW 0-2.5 2P5IWL 2.5 3IW 0-3.0 3IWL 3.0 5IW 0-5.0 5IWL 5.0 10IW 0-10.0 10IWL 10.0
NEW!
XRH - NIST traceable 9 point calibration report CX 7 MB2 42 P1IWL Example: CX-7-MB2-42-ST-P1IWL Differential pressure transmitter with 1.0% accuracy that measures from -0.1" to 0.1" W.C. with a 4-20 mA output
18
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W 101A213-01
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE

Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 1/2" conduit/plenum kit for CXLdp transmitter
1024
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER DXLDP SERIES
PSI
The Ashcroft DXLdp Series Differential Pressure Transmitters are designed for critical, high accuracy, low pressure applications. The DXLdp Series is available in accuracies of 0.25%, 0.50% and 1.00% of Full Span which include non-linearity (Terminal Point Method) hysteresis, non-repeatability, zero offset, and span setting errors. It is available with voltage or milliamp outputs. The models are available in unidirectional and bidirectional ranges from 0.10" W.C. to 50" W.C. and 0.05" W.C. to 25" W.C. respectively.
Reliable and repeatable, stable capacitive sensor Ultra-low pressure ranges 0 to 0.10" W.C. or 0.05" W.C. DIN rail mount reduces installation and calibration costs Easy access zero and span adjustments (optional) 0.25% and 0.50% include NIST certicate, option on 1.00% accuracy CE Standard with all outputs 250ms response time LED range status indicators
DXLdp Series
PRESSURE
WIRING
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Supply Voltage 12-36 VDC Supply Current < 10 mA for voltage Signal Output 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, 1-6 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC Maximum Output Impedance mA 545 @ 24 VDC Accuracy 0.25%, 0.5%, 1.0% Stability 0.25% FS/yr Maximum Pressure 25 psi (172.4 kPa) Burst Pressure 25 psid (172 kPa) Proof Pressure 15 psid (103 kPa) Response Time 250 ms Operating Humidity 10 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Operating Temperature -20 to 160F (-28.9 to 71.1C) Process Connection 1/8" NPT Media Compatibility Clean, dry and non-corrosive gas Enclosure NEMA 1 Dimensions 3.9" W x 5.0" H x 0.9" D (9.9 x 12.7 x 2.3 cm) Approvals CE Weight 0.28 lb (0.13 kg), NEMA 1 case Warranty 3 years
18
POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY
Rs
Current Output
Voltage Output
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1025
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER DXLDP SERIES
PRESSURE
MODEL DESCRIPTION DX DXLdp ultra-low differential pressure transmitter 3* 0.25% accuracy, 0.02%/F 5* 0.50% accuracy, 0.02%/F 7 1.00% accuracy, 0.02%/F F01 1/8" FNPT 05 0-5 VDC signal output 10 0-10 VDC signal output 15 0-5 VDC signal output 16 1-6 VDC signal output 42 4-20 mA signal output ST Screw terminal electrical termination PRESSURE RANGE "W.C. P1IW 0-0.10 P05IWL P25IW 0-0.25 P1IWL P5IW 0-0.50 P25IWL P75IW 0-0.75 P5IWL 1IW 0-1.00 P75IWL 1P5IW 0-1.50 1IWL 2IW 0-2.00 2IWL 2P5IW 0-2.50 2P5IWL 3IW 0-3.00 3IWL 5IW 0-5.00 5IWL 10IW 0-10.0 10IWL OPTIONAL X-VARIATION XDL XPV XNL Optional LED
NEW!
0.05 0.10 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 2.00 2.50 3.00 5.00 10.00
Optional process valve actuator Optional text jacks
*units include 9 point NIST traceable calibration certificate
DX
F01
18
05 ST P1IWL Example: DX-7-F01-05-ST-P1IWL Ultra-low differential pressure transmitter with 1.00% accuracy, 1/8" FNPT process connection, 0-5 VDC signal output, screw terminal electrical termination, 0.10" W.C. pressure range, no options
T-101 SD-01 RPS RPS-I RPS-W A-302-K A-301-K A-345-K A-308-K DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901 Surge dampener 1113 Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113 Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113 Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113 Duct static pressure tting, 1/4" barb 1113 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
1026
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Reliable, stable capacitive sensor Low-range models down to 0.05" W.C. Positive or bidirectional ranges available Reverse polarity protected High proof pressure Includes NIST certicate
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANMITTERS XLDP SERIES
PSI
The Ashcroft XLdp Series Differential Pressure Transmitters are an industrial-quality, differential air pressure transmitter for use with air and other noncorrossive gases. The XLdp models are available in ranges from 0.1" to 25" W.C. and can withstand up to 10 psid overpressure. They are highly accurate and available in accuracies of 0.25% and 0.50%.
XLDP Series
WIRING
OUT V V+
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance 12-36 VDC 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC
545 @ 24 VDC (up to 1045 @ 36 VDC) Accuracy 0.25% or 0.5% 0.015% span/F Stability 0.5% FS/yr Operating Temperature -20 to 160F (-29 to 71C) Compensated Temperature Range 35 to 135F (2 to 57C) Proof Pressure 10 psid (69 kPa) Burst Pressure 25 psig (172 kPa) Response Time 250 ms Media Compatibility Clean, dry air and non-corrosive gases Dimensions 4.6"W x 4.2"H x 1.9"D (11.7 x 10.7 x 4.8 cm) Enclosure 300 Series stainless Approvals CE Weight 0.9 lb (0.4 kg) Warranty 3 years
1-5 VDC
24 VDC Power Supply
PRESSURE
24 VDC Power Supply
4-20 mA
MODEL DESCRIPTION XL XLdp differential pressure transmitter 3 0.25% accuracy 5 0.50% accuracy MB2 1/4" barbed stainless steel fittings 42 4-20 mA signal output 15 1-5 VDC signal output ST Electrical termination PRESSURE RANGE "W.C. P1IW 0-0.1 P05IWL 0.05 P25IW 0-0.25 P1IWL 0.1 P5IW 0-0.5 P25IWL 0.25 1IW 0-1.0 P5IWL 0.5 2IW 0-2.0 1IWL 1.0 2P5IW 0-2.5 2IWL 2.0 3IW 0-3.0 2P5IWL 2.5 5IW 0-5.0 3IWL 3.0 10IW 0-10.0 5IWL 5.0 10IWL 10.0 XL 3 MB2 42 ST P1IWL Example: XL-3-MB2-42-ST-P1IWL Differential pressure transmitter with 0.25% accuracy that measures from -0.1" to 0.1" W.C. with a 4-20 mA output
18
A-301-K A-302-K A-308-K A-345-K T-101
RELATED PRODUCTS Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 901
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1027
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ZPS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI ZPS Series Differential Pressure Transmitter is an accurate, rugged and economical solution for measuring and reporting duct/building static pressure, room-to-room differential pressure or air ow velocities/volumes. The ZPS Series micro-machined silicon piezoresistive pressure sensor is specically developed for low differential pressure. The sensor's custom ASIC (Application Specic Integrated Circuit) provides ve-point error correction over the compensated temperature range for excellent accuracy, repeatability and stability.
NEW!
ZPS Series
FEATURES
Field-selectable ranges and output signals Five direct and ve bidirectional standard ranges 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, or 0-10 VDC output signal Inches of water or Pascal engineering units Optional large LCD display Microprocessor controlled auto-zero Rugged IP66 (NEMA 4) housing Short-circuit proof and polarity protected Three-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
18
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 4-20 mA Models 0-5 VDC Models 0-10 VDC Models Signal Output Stability Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance Accuracy Overpressure 7 to 45 VDC 7 to 45 VDC, 7 to 32 VAC 13 to 45 VDC, 13 to 32 VAC, Two-wire, 4-20 mA or three-wire, 0-5 or 0-10 VDC 0.25% ful scale per year 850 @ 24 VDC 1 k 0.5% (on 0 to 0.1" W.C., 0-0.25 W.C., 0.1 W.C., and 0.25 W.C. range models), 0.25 on all other range models 2% of Span maximum (1.0 in WC @ 50F to 104F, 10 to 40C) 1 psi proof pressure, 1.5 psi burst pressure Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Enclosure UV-resistant Polycarbonate, UL94, V-0, IP66, NEMA 4 Mounting Four external tabs with holes for #10 screws Process Connection 3/16" barbed tting (use 1/8" to 3/16 ID tubing) Wiring Terminations 2 wires (4-20mA Current loop) 3 wires (AC or DC powered, Voltage out) Approvals CE, RoHS Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Warranty 3 years Thermal Effect
1028
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
4-20 mA Signal
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ZPS SERIES
PSI
VDC Signal
Power supply
(black) (red)
ZPS
(white)
Power G supply H or transformer
(black) (red) (white)
ZPS
4-20 mA Wiring
(See specifications for power supply information)
0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC Wiring

(See specifications for power supply information)
PRESSURE
18
A-301-K A-302-K A-308-K A-345-K RPS RPS-I RPS-W SD-01 T-101 ZPS-ACC01 ZPS-ACC10 ZPS-ACC12
RELATED PRODUCTS Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb Surge dampener 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 2 X 4 Stainless steel wall plate with static pickup Rooftop or wall-mount outside air pressure pickup port Pitot pressure probe assy, 6 long (includes static & total probe assy)
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 901
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1029
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS PR274/275 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The MAMAC Systems PR274/275 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter incorporates a new micromachined glass-on-silicon (Gl-Si) capacitance sensor. This technology revolutionizes very low pressure measurement. Temperature related zero drift, calibration shift due to overpressure, non-repeatability, non-linearity, and extremely low pressure sensitivity have been some of the problems which have plagued the controls industry. The PR274/275 Series with the new Gl-Si technology not only addresses all of the above shortcomings, but for the rst time offers a reliable, accurate means to measure and control building/room pressure, air ow, duct pressure, lter pressure drop, or any other extremely low pressure application. Up to six eld selectable direct or compound ranges, two enclosure types, eld selectable outputs, fully temperature compensated NIST traceable accuracy, non-interacting zero and span adjustments, short circuit and reverse polarity protected output, and a liberal ve year warranty are some of the features which make the PR274/275 Series the industrys highest performance, ultra-stable, low pressure sensor.
NEW!
PR-274/275 Can resolve less than 0.00001" W.C. (0.0025 pa) Two rugged steel enclosure types NEMA-4 (IP-65) or panel mount for ease of installation Short circuit and reverse polarity protected Conforms to EMC and RoHS standards Uni-directional: 0 - 0.10" W.C. to 0 30" W.C.; Bi-directional: 0.05" W.C. to 15" W.C. Operating Humidity 10-90% RH Non-Condensing Operating Temperature 0 to 175F (-18 to 80C) Dimensions 2.2"H x 6.0"W x 4.0"D 274 (5.6 x 15.2 x 10.2 cm) 275 2.1"H x 5.0"W x 2.3"D (5.4 x 12.7 x 5.7 cm) Approvals CE, RoHS Weight Enclosure 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Panel 0.5 lb (0.25 kg) Warranty 5 years Measurement Range
FEATURES
PRESSURE
100% solid state, micro-machined, glass-on-silicon, ultra-stable capacitance sensor As low as 0.05" W.C. ( 12.5 pa) Up to 6 eld selectable ranges in one unit
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 12-40 VDC; 12-35 VAC (VDC output units only) 10 mA max (VDC output units); 20 mA max (mA output units) 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC 600 at 24 VDC for mA output units 1K for VDC output units 1% of FS NEMA 4 (IP-65) or Panel Mount Clean dry air or any inert gas 0.0125%/F(.02%/C) 10 PSID
18
Supply Current Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance Accuracy Enclosure Media Compatibility Thermal Effect Overpressure
1030
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Wiring for mA Low Pressure Transducers with an External DC Power Supply
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS PR274/275 SERIES
PSI
Wiring for VDC Low Pressure Transducers when Applied with External AC Supply
Wiring for mA Output Transducers where the Controller or Meter has Internal DC Power Supply
Wiring for VDC Low Pressure Transducers when Applied with External DC Power Supply
PRESSURE
MODEL PR274 PR275 DESCRIPTION Low pressure sensor with enclosure mount Low pressure sensor with panel mount RANGE R1 0 to 0.10 / -0.05 to 0.05" W.C. R2 0 to 1.0 / 0 to 0.5 / 0 to 0.25 / -0.5 to 0.5 / -0.25 to 0.25 / -0.125 to 0.125" W.C. R3 0 to 5.0 / 0 to 2.5 / 0 to 1.25 / -2.5 to 2.5 / -1.25 to 1.25 / -0.625 to 0.625" W.C. R4 0 to 30 / 0 to 15 / 0 to 7.5 / -15.0 to 15.0 / -7.5 to 7.5 / -3.75 to 3.75" W.C. R5 0 to 25 / -12.5 to 12.5 Pa R6 0 to 250 / 0 to 125 / 0 to 62.5 / -125 to 125 / -62.5 to 62.5 / -31.25 to 31.25 Pa R7 0 to 1250 / 0 to 625 / 0 to 312.5 / -625 to 625 / -312.5 to 312.5 / -156.25 to 156.25 Pa R8 0 to 7500 / 0 to 3750 / 0 to 1875 / -3750 to 3750 / -1875 to 1875 / -937.5 to 937.5 Pa OUTPUT mA 4-20 mA 2-wire VDC 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC field selectable R2 mA Example: PR-274-R2-mA Low pressure sensor with enclosure mount, R2 range which has six (6) selectable field range options and 4-20 mA output.
18
PR-274
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901 SD-01 Surge dampener 1113 RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113 A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113 A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113 A-308-K Duct static pressure tting, 1/4" barb 1113 DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1031
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER A2G-50 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Wika A2G-50 Series differential pressure transmitter is the ideal accessory to complete a differential producer primary ow meter such as an averaging pitot tube. A DP transmitter that can be partnered with the AMP series, DPFS series and FXP series products to enable DP measurement with those devices. The unit is excellent for a room-to-room differential pressure signal to BAS. Each of the three range option code has eight selectable DP ranges within that option code. The user can select between two output signals (0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA). There is an optional digital display for the measured value. The standard unit has a button for re-zeroing; but there is also an auto-zeroing option that enable the device to re-zero itself every ten minutes to prevent zero point drift.
NEW!
A2G-50
FEATURES
Eight selectable ranges within each option code range Selectable 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA output signal Compact size
WIRING
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Minimum Output Impedance VDC Accuracy 24 VAC or 24 VDC 10% 4-20 mA 2-wire, 0-10 V 3-wire maximum load 500 Overpressure Proof Pressure 100" W.C. (24.9 kPa) Burst Pressure 120" W.C. (29.9 kPa) Measurement Range up to 0 to 28" W.C. (0 to 7.0 kPa) Operating Temperature -4 to 160F (-20 to 71C) NEMA 3, Plastic (ABS) Enclosure Process Connection Hose barb nozzles (ABS) for 3/16" and 1/4" hose ID Dimensions 3.36" H x 2.65" W x 1.69" D (8.53 x 6.73 x 4.29 cm) Approvals CE Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) Warranty 2 years
18
Load R minimum 1k 1.5% (3% at range -0.2/0.2" W.C.) of full span Compensated Temperature Range 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Included in total error band 1,5% Thermal Effect +1Pa (including: general accuracy, temperature drift, linearity, hysteresis, long term stability and repetition error)
1032
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
MODEL A2G50-E00-7C-EO-M-Z-Z A2G50-E00-7C-EP-M-Z-Z A2G50-E00-7C-EQ-M-Z-Z A2G50-E00-7C-EO-M-A-z A2G50-E00-7C-EP-M-A-z A2G50-E00-7C-EQ-M-A-z A2G50-E00-7C-EO-M-A-1 A2G50-E00-7C-EP-M-A-1 A2G50-E00-7C-EQ-M-A-1 T-101 A-308-K A-302-K A-301-K A-345-K DCPA-1.2 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER A2G-50 SERIES
PSI
PRESSURE
DESCRIPTION Differential pressure transmitter, 0 to 10 in WC; No digital display; No auto re-zero Differential pressure transmitter, 0 to 28 in WC; No digital display; No auto re-zero Differential pressure transmitter, "-0.4 to +0.4 in WC; No digital display; No auto re-zero Differential pressure transmitter, 0 to 10 in WC; With digital display; No auto re-zero Differential pressure transmitter, 0 to 28 in WC; With digital display; No auto re-zero Differential pressure transmitter, "-0.4 to +0.4 in WC; With digital display; No auto re-zero Differential pressure transmitter, 0 to 10 in WC; With digital display; With auto re-zero Differential pressure transmitter, 0 to 28 in WC; With digital display; With auto re-zero Differential pressure transmitter, "-0.4 to +0.4 in WC; With digital display; With auto re-zero
18
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901 Duct static pressure tting, 1/4" barb 1113 Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113 Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113 Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1033
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS T30 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Modus T30 Series Differential Pressure Transmitters are reliable, stable, low-air pressure transmitters with 4-20 mA outputs. The T30 Series is DC-powered. Higher ranges utilize piezo-resistive sensors. Ranges are available for 0" to 0.3" W.C. to 0" to 10" W.C. All models may be furnished in bidirectional ranges, which will measure both positive and negative pressure differentials. FEATURES Position insensitive No moving parts to wear out Compact size Fast response time due to low internal volume Solid-state circuitry for long life Low power consumption NEMA 4 enclosure and CE certication (Models M30/40)
NEW!
T30 Series
Vibration Resistance Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Media Compatibility Enclosure Process Connection Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty 5G to 50 Hz 32 to 115F (0 to 45C) -20 to 160F (-30 to 70C) Air, Inert gases Not rated, Flame retardant, glassreinforced NORYL 3/16" diameter suitable for 1/8" or 5/32" ID (1/4" OD) Tygon or polyurethane tubing; integral lters at both ports 3/8" terminals, #6 screws CE 0.42 lb (0.19 kg) 1 year
Power supply 11-32 VDC
SPECIFICATIONS
11-32 VDC (protected against reversal of polarity) Supply VA 1 VA Signal Output 4-20 mA Maximum Output Impedance 700 @ 24 VDC (= 50 x VDC 500) Adjustments Zero/Span adjustments: Non-interactive adjustments by means of 20-turn potentiometers for ne resolution Accuracy 1% of range (including non-linearity and hysteresis) Thermal Effect Zero 0.05%/C; Span 0.02%/C Measurement Range Up to 10" WC Supply Voltage
PRESSURE
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
5.15 (13.08) 4.7 (11.94) 4.25 (10.80)
Two holes 0.19 diameter (0.5) Span Zero 3.00 (7.62)
-+
Pressure Lo Hi
1.50 (3.81)
18
3/8" Terminal strip with #6 screws
3/16" OD Pressure fittings
T30 Transmitter
4-20 mA Signal
0.66 (1.68)
Side view
1.48 1.13 (3.76) (2.87) 0.13 (0.33)
T30
T30
MODEL DESCRIPTION T30 Differential pressure transmitter with NEMA 1 case 004 RANGE CODE (see Table 1 to the right) OPTIONS (leave blank for standard unit) B Bidirectional (12 mA @ zero pressure)
T30 004
Example:
T30-004-B Differential pressure transmitter 4 mA @ -0.2" W.C., 12 mA @ 0" W.C., and 20 mA @ + 0.2" W.C., 24 VAC power Note: NIST certification options available, consult Kele
TABLE 1. RANGE GE PRESSURE RANGE* RANGE MODEL "W.C. Overpressure CODE 03E 003 0-0.3 5" W.C. 04E 005 0-0.5 5" W.C. 05E 010 0-1.0 20" W.C. 06E 020 0-2.0 20" W.C. 07E 030 0-3.0 20" W.C. 08E 050 0-5.0 5 psid 09E 100 0-10.0 5 psid
*Call Kele for higher pressure ranges or metric ranges
1034
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Supply Current Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Minimum Output Impedance VDC Accuracy Thermal Effect Media Compatibility March 2014
PRESSURE
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PR264 SERIES
PSI
The MAMAC Systems Model PR264 Pressure Transmitter incorporates sophisticated integrated circuits and a new fused silicon monolithic cavity pressure sensor to not only provide a high-level, fully-conditioned and temperature compensated output, but also to offer up to three (3) eld selectable pressure ranges in one unit. The eld selectable feature eliminates costly inefciencies by providing a single unit which can be congured to cover all the pressure ranges for a particular application. For instance, 25.0, 50.0, and 100.0 psig in one unit. The stainless steel monolithic pressure cavity not only provides media compatibility for most of the applications, but also offers a leak-proof solution for todays environment conscious customers. Two industry standard output versions are available, 4-20mA 2-wire loop or eld selectable 0-5 VDC/0-10 VDC. Wide 12-40 VDC or 12-35 VAC unregulated supply voltage and a broad 0F - 180F compensated temperature range ensures compatibility to most of the applications. Rugged NEMA 4 (IP-65) enclosure, gasketed cover, external mounting bracket, fully temperature compensated NIST traceable accuracy and a liberal ve year warranty are some of the features which make the Model PR264 the industrys most reliable, rugged, and economical pressure sensor.
PR264
DIMENSIONS
PRESSURE
100% solid state fused silicon pressure sensor Rugged, leak-proof stainless steel monolithic pressure cavity with no welds, o-rings, or seams/ bonds Up to 3 eld selectable ranges in one unit Rugged NEMA-4 (IP-65) enclosure with external mounting bracket Short circuit and reverse polarity protected Conforms to EMC and RoHS standards
18
12-40 VDC; 12-35 VAC (VDC output units only) 10 mA max (VDC output units); 20 mA max (mA output units) 420 mA 2-wire, 05 VDC/010 VDC (eld selectable) 600 @ 24VDC for mA output units 1K for VDC output units 1% of FS 0.025%/F(.03%/C) Liquid/gases compatible to 316L
stainless steel 300% of rated pressure 500% of rated pressure 0 to 100 / 0 to 50 / 0 to 25 psig, 0 to 300 / 0 to 150 / 0 to 75 psig, 0 to 500 / 0 to 250 / 0 to 125 psig, 0 to 700 / 0 to 350 / 0 to 175 kPa, 0 to 2000 / 0 to 1000 / 0 to 500 kPa, 0 to 3500 / 0 to 1750 / 0 to 875 kPa Operating Humidity 10-90% RH Non-Condensing Operating Temperature 0 to 180F (-18 to 82C) Approvals CE, RoHS Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Warranty 5 years Overpressure Burst Pressure Measurement Range
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1035
PRESSURE
PSI
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PR264 SERIES
WIRING
Wiring Units with mA Output
NEW!
Wiring Units with VDC Output
Zero Span 1/8"NPT Female
ON
Zero Span
ON
Wiring for mA Output Pressure Transducers with an External DC Power Supply
Wiring for VDC Output Pressure Transducers when Applied with External AC Supply
Wiring for mA Output Transducers where the Controller or Meter has Internal DC Power Supply
Wiring for VDC Output Pressure Transducers when Applied with External DC Power Supply
ON
1/8"NPT Female
PRESSURE
18
MODEL DESCRIPTION PR264 Pressure sensor PRESSURE RANGE R1 0-25 / 50 / 100 psig R2 0-75 / 150 / 300 psig R3 0-125 / 250 / 500 psig R4 0-175 / 350 / 700 KPa R5 0-500 / 1000 / 2000 KPa R6* 0-875 / 1750 / 3500 KPa OUTPUT mA 4-20 mA 2-wire VDC 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC field selectable
PR-264
R1
mA
Example: PR-264-R1-mA Pressure sensor, 0-25 / 50 / 100 psig range with 4-20 mA 2-wire output.
1036
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Supply Current Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance VDC Accuracy Thermal Effect 1K for VDC output units 1% of FS 0.0125%/F(.02%/C)
PRESSURE
DUCT STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PR276 SERIES
PSI
The MAMAC Systems Model PR276 Duct Static Pressure Transmitter incorporates sophisticated integrated circuits and a new micro-machined glass-onsilicon (Gl-Si) capacitance sensor to not only provide a high level, fully conditioned and temperature compensated output, but also to offer up to three (3) eld selectable pressure ranges in one unit. The eld selectable feature eliminates costly inefciencies by providing a single unit which can be congured to cover all the pressure ranges for a particular application. For instance, 1.25", 2.50" and 5.00" W.C. are in one unit. To substantially reduce installation cost and to eliminate costly control panels, the Model PR276 incorporates a pressure sensor and a static pressure tip integrated as one assembly. Two industry standard output versions are available, 4-20mA 2-wire loop or eld selectable 0-5 VDC/0-10 VDC. Wide 12-40 VDC or 12-35 VAC unregulated supply voltage and a broad 25F150F compensated temperature range ensures compatibility to most of the applications. Rugged NEMA 4 (lP-65) enclosure, gasketed cover, external mounting bracket, fully temperature compensated NIST traceable accuracy, and a liberal ve year warranty are some of the features which make the Model PR276 not only the most reliable, but the lowest installed cost duct pressure sensor in the industry.
PR276
PRESSURE
100% solid state, micro-machined, glass-on-silicon, ultra-stable capacitance sensor Duct pressure transducer and static pressure tip integrated as one unit Up to 3 eld selectable ranges in one unit
Rugged NEMA-4 (IP-65) enclosure with external mounting bracket Short circuit and reverse polarity protected Conforms to EMC and RoHS standards
12-40 VDC; 12-35 VAC (VDC output units only) 10 mA max (VDC output units); 20 mA max (mA output units) 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC 600 @ 24VDC for mA output units
Overpressure 10 PSID Media Compatibility Clean dry air or any inert gas Measurement Range 0-1.25" W.C. to 0-15.0" W.C. Operating Humidity 10-90% RH Non-Condensing Operating Temperature 0 to 175F (-18 to 80C) Dimensions 2.25"H x 5.0"W x 2.7"D (5.7 x 12.7 x 6.8 cm) 8.0" (20.3 cm) Probe Length Approvals CE, RoHS Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Warranty 5 years
18
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1037
PRESSURE
PSI
DUCT STATIC PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PR276 SERIES
WIRING
Wiring for mA Output Duct Pressure Transducers with External DC Power Supply
NEW!
Wiring for VDC Output Duct Pressure Transducers when Applied with External AC Supply Wiring for VDC Output Duct Pressure Transducers when Applied with External DC Power Supply
Wiring for mA Output Duct Pressure Transducers where Controller or Meter has Internal DC Power Supply
PRESSURE
MODEL DESCRIPTION PR276 Duct pressure sensor PRESSURE RANGE psid (kPa) R10 0 to 5.0 / 0 to 2.5 / 0 to 1.25" W.C. R11 0 to 15 / 0 to 7.5 / 0 to 3.75" W.C. R12 0 to 1250 / 0 to 625 / 0 to 312.5 pa R13 0 to 3750 / 0 to 1875 / 0 to 937.5 pa OUTPUT mA 4-20 mA 2-wire VDC 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC field selectable
18
PR-276
R10
mA
Example: PR-276-R10-mA Duct pressure sensor, 0 to 5.0 / 0 to 2.5 / 0 to 1.25" W.C. range with 4-20 mA 2-wire output.
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE T-101 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901 SD-01 Surge dampener 1113 RPS Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 RPS-I Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 RPS-W White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 A-302-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113 A-301-K Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113 A-345-K Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113 A-308-K Duct static pressure tting, 1/4" barb 1113 DCPA-1.2 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 691-K0A Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 DCP-1.5-W Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
1038
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Competitively priced Very high quality Short-circuit proof Protection from reverse polarity Compact heavy duty housing True differential pressure sensing 1/2" NPT conduit connector NEMA 4 (IP65) environmental rating Mounting bracket included
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER DPW-692 SERIES
PSI
The Kele DPW-692 Series Differential Pressure Transmitter is ideal for monitoring pumps and piping differential pressures in HVAC systems and process systems including tank level monitoring. The DPW-692 Series incorporates proven, unique ceramic sensor technology and the stainless steel housing is compatible with a wide variety of liquid or gas media. The convenient DIN 43650-A wiring connector makes installation easy and provides NEMA 4 (IP65) environmental protection.
DPW-692-100-KIT
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Accuracy Thermal Effect Maximum Operating Pressure 0-60 psid 100 psid and greater Overpressure 0-60 psid 100 psid and greater Response Time 11-33 VDC Two-wire, 4-20 mA 800 at 24 VDC < 0.5% FS (includes linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability) <0.1% FS/C 362 psig (2500 kPa) 725 psig (5000 kPa) 543 psi (3750 kPa) 1088 psi (7500 kPa) <5 ms Maximum Differential: Port-to-Port 0-60 psid 174 psid 0-100 psid and Greater Hi: 464 psi, Low: 174 psi Operating Temperature 5 to 176F (-15 to 80C) Wetted Parts 303 stainless, FPM (Viton) seals Enclosure Rating NEMA 4 (IP65) Process Connection 1/8" FNPT Wiring Terminations DIN 43650-A connector with terminal blocks Approvals CE, RoHS Weight 0.94 lb (0.43 kg) Warranty 1 year
18
Note: The DPW-692 can be eld calibrated 10%; see installation instructions for this procedure. However, due to the very small recessed calibration screws, eld calibration is difcult and not recommended. Kele can provide factory custom calibration; please allow two weeks for delivery.
CAUTION: Not for use with ammonia.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1039
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER DPW-692 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
1/2" NPT
Wiring/ conduit connector 1/8" NPT 3.74 (95) .83 (21) .59 (15) 5.12 (130)
NEW!
WIRING
DIN Connector terminal block with screw terminals 2 3 1 24 VDC Power supply + + 420 mA Flathead screwdriver
2 1
Low port High port 1.57 (40)
1.73 (44)
.20 (5 )
1.18 (30)
PRESSURE
.47 (12) .78 (20)
Bracket
MODEL DPW-692-25-KIT DPW-692-35-KIT DPW-692-60-KIT DPW-692-100-KIT DPW-692-200-KIT DESCRIPTION 025 psid, 420 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector 035 psid, 420 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector 060 psid, 420 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector 0100 psid, 420 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector 0200 psid, 420 mA, 1/8" FNPT with bracket and conduit connector
18
To order a DPW-692 pre-assembled in a ve-valve bypass enclosure, replace -KIT with -BVA sufx. To order a DPW-692 pre-assembled with a three-valve manifold, replace -KIT with -3VLV sufx. To order a DPW-692 with factory custom range, add -C sufx to complete model number. To order a DPW-692 for use with refrigerants, add -R sufx after -KIT. A neoprene seal is used in place of Viton. Not applicable with -BVA or -3VLV assemblies.
G5100-1101000 DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W 101999
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE DIN 43650-A replacement conduit connector with gasket Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 DPW-692 Series replacement mounting bracket with screws
1040
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
0.25% accuracy NEMA 4 (IP65) protection Stainless steel wetted parts Elastomer seals High proof pressure Current or voltage outputs Mounting bracket included
PRESSURE
PSI
The Setra Model M230 Differential Pressure Transmitter is a highly accurate differential pressure transmitter that incorporates a capacitive technology to produce a linear electronic signal proportional to the differential pressure. It will measure differential pressure in unidirectional applications as much as 100 psi and bidirectional applications as much as 50 psi. The stainless steel wetted parts and elastomer seals make this unit ideal for both liquids and gases. The NEMA 4 (IP65) case keeps the internal electronics protected from the environment.
M230-025PD-C
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Current models Minimum 9 VDC + (0.02 x circuit resistance) Maximum 30 VDC + (0.004 x circuit resistance) Storage Temperature Wetted Parts Enclosure Rating Process Connection Approvals Weight Warranty -65 to 250F (-54 to 121C) 17-4 PH stainless, 300 Series stainless steel, viton, silicon rings NEMA 4 (IP65) 1/4-18 FNPT CE 0.9 lb (0.41 kg) 1 year
Voltage Models 0-5 VDC 9-30 VDC 0-10 VDC 13-30 VDC, 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 0-5 VDC Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance 100 @ 24 VDC Minimum Output Impedance 5000 Accuracy 0.25% FS Non-repeatability 0.05% FS Non-linearity 0.20% FS Hysteresis 0.10% FS Compensated Temperature 30 to 150F (-1 to 65C) Range Thermal Effect Zero/span shift 2.0% FS/100F (1.8% FS/50C) Maximum Operating Pressure 250 psig (1723.8 kPa) model dependant Operating Temperature 0 to 175F (-18 to 79C)
PROOF PRESSURE (High Side) Range Proof Range psid kPa psid kPa psid kPa 0-1 6.89 20 137.9 0.5 3.45 0-2 13.79 40 275.8 1 6.89 0-5 34.47 100 689.5 2.5 17.24 0-10 68.95 100 689.5 5 34.47 0-25 172.4 250 1723.7 10 68.95 0-50 344.7 250 1723.7 25 172.4 0-100 689.5 250 1723.7 50 344.7
18
Proof psid kPa 20 137.9 40 275.8 100 689.5 100 689.5 200 1379.2 250 1723.7 250 1723.7
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1041
PRESSURE
PSI
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.15 (5.46)
NEW!
WIRING
EXC OUT COM
Span Zero (*red)
* Wire colors when mounted in a BVA
(*brown)
Conduit opening
3.01 (7.65) 2.00 (5.08) 1.50 (3.81) 0.875 (2.2) Opening for 1/2" conduit 1/4-18 NPT Low pressure port 1.00 (2.54)
Power + supply
4-20 mA signal
Current
EXC OUT COM
1.94 (4.93) 3.05 (7.75) Bleed screws
1.00 (2.54)
(*yellow) (*red) (*brown)
* Wire colors when mounted in a BVA
1/4-18 NPT High pressure port
2.44 (6.20)
Power + supply
Voltage
+ signal
Voltage
MODEL DESCRIPTION M230 Differential pressure transmitter PRESSURE RANGE psid (kPa) 0-1.0 (6.90) 001PD 0-2.0 (13.79) 002PD 0-5.0 (34.48) 005PD 0-10.0 (68.95) 010PD 0-25.0 (172.38) 025PD 0-50.0 (344.75) 050PD 0-100.0 (689.50) 100PD 0.5 (3.45) 0R5PB 1.0 (6.90) 001PB 2.5 (17.24) 2R5PB 5.0 (34.48) 005PB 10.0 (68.95) 010PB 25.0 (172.38) 025PB 50.0 (344.75) 050PB OUTPUT C 4-20 mA V5 0-5 VDC V10 0-10 VDC OPTIONS BVA Bypass valve assembly 3VLV Three-valve manifold assembly M230 010PD C Example: M230-10PD-C Differential pressure transmitter ranging from 0-10 psid with a 4-20 mA output
18
PRESSURE
1042
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 231 SERIES
PSI
The Setra 231 Series Multi-Range Differential Pressure Transmitter is ideal for monitoring pumps and load differential pressures in HVAC systems and processes where local indication is needed. The 231 Series design provides users with eld accessible ranging, choice of outputs, and eld zero adjustment.
Field selectable ranges and outputs Field accessible pushbutton zero and remote zero Field selectable port swap True 4-20 mA output, and choice of VDC outputs Hinged cover Heavy duty aluminum NEMA 4 housing Optional LCD display RoHS compliant
231 Series
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Current Model Voltage Model Signal Output Current Model Voltage Model Maximum Output Impedance mA Minimum Output Impedance VDC Accuracy 12-30 VDC 12-30 VDC/18-28 VAC 2-wire, 4-20 mA 3-wire, 0-5, 0-10, or 1-5 VDC 600 @ 24 VDC Wetted Parts Enclosure Rating Process Connection Wiring Terminations Dimensions Temperature Range Enclosure Media Compatibility Note Approvals Weight Warranty 17-4 PH Stainless Steel NEMA 4 1/8" FNPT 1/2" conduit entry (7/8" dia), screw/ crimp terminals 4.0"H x 6.0"W x 2.0"D (10.2 x 15.2 x 5.1 cm) 32 to 130F (0 to 54C) Die Cast Aluminum, Powder Coated Liquids or Gases Compatible with 17-4 PH Stainless Steel Hydrogen not recommended for use with 17-4 PH stainless steel. CE, RoHS compliant 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg) 1 year
PRESSURE
5000 1.0% FS (2.0% FS for range D model ) Overpressure 2.2X full scale 15 X full scale (50 psi) Burst Pressure 10 x full scale (75 x 150 psi) 8 x full scale (250 psi) 1-5 seconds (adjustable) Response Time Operating Temperature -4 to 185F (-20 to 85C)
DIMENSIONS
6.0 (15.2) 5.6 (14.1) 2.0 (5.1) 5.2 (13.1)
18
R0.1 (0.3) 1.6 (4.0) 0.4 (0.9) High 2.0 (5.1) 1/2'' Conduit opening Low
1/8'' FNPT
1.0 (2.4)
4.9 (12.3) 4.0 (10.2) 5.1 (12.9)
1.2 (3.1)
1.7 (4.2)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1043
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 231 SERIES
WIRING
A B C D RANGES A MS1 50 MS2 100 MS3 250 + +
ZERO
B 25 50 125
C D 10 5 20 10 50 25
BAR A.REV OUTPUT SLOW A B C D BI-DIR 4-20 0-5 0-10 1-5 SWAP
A B C D
PSI NORM FAST UNI-DIR NORM
NEW!
A B C D ZERO A B C D RANGES A MS1 50 MS2 100 MS3 250 + + B 25 50 125 C D 10 5 20 10 50 25 OUTPUT A B C D 4-20 0-5 0-10 1-5 BAR A.REV SLOW BI-DIR SWAP
PSI NORM FAST UNI-DIR NORM
+
Power supply 12-24 VDC only digital control
+ +
2 wire current output Contact closure relay
Digital control voltage Remote zero digital output Power supply 12-24 VAC/VDC
+ +
3 wire voltage output Contact closure relay
Current (4-20 mA) Remote zero digital output
PRESSURE
18
MODEL DESCRIPTION Wet to wet differential pressure transmitter 231G RANGES: UNIDIRECTIONAL AND BIDIRECTIONAL* MS1 5, 10, 25, 50 psid and 5, 10, 25, 50 psid MS2 10, 20, 50, 100 psid and 10, 20, 50, 100 psid MS3 25, 50, 125, 250 psid and 25, 50, 125, 250 psid PRESSURE CONNECTION 2F 1/8-18 NPT female (Standard) DISPLAY OPTION N No display D LCD display MANIFOLD OPTION 3VLV 3 valve bypass option 231G - MS1 2F - D - 3VLV Example: 231G-MS1-2F-D-3VLV Setra differential pressure transmitter Model 231 ranging from 0 to 50 psid with LCD display and 3VLV bypass option.
* Line Pressure determines selection of range code.
47B-1 47S-1 PT
RELATED PRODUCTS Brass piston style snubber Stainless steel piston style snubber 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings
PAGE 1112 1112 1112
1044
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES APPLICATION

PRESSURE
PSI
REMOTE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 231RS SERIES
The Setra 231RS Series Multi-Range Differential Pressure Transmitter is ideal for monitoring pumps and load differential pressures in HVAC systems and processes where local indication is needed. Setra's 231RS Series with remote sensors reduces labor, materials, and time. The sensors are installed directly into the pipe and electrical connection is made between the remote sensors and the Model 231RS via cables or conduit. This reduces labor cost by one-third and the cost of copper to connect the pressure transducer to the pipe. Startup time is reduced since purging air out of the lines is not necessary. The Multi-Sense Model 231 wet-to-wet differential pressure transducer's all inclusive design provides users with eld accessible ranging, choice of output and eld zeroing. Model 231RS
+EXC.
COM
+OUT
+EXC. .
COM
DC/AC Power Supply
Energy management systems Process control systems Flow measurement of various gases or liquids Liquid level measurement of pressurized vessels
Controller Voltage Relay
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Warm Up Time Signal Output 15-30 VDC 40 mA (typical) at 18-30 VAC <0.12% FS 4-20 mA, 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC specied in order Overpressure 2X full scale Burst Pressure 15 x Full Scale (50 psi) 10 X Full Scale (75 x 150 psi) 8 x Full Scale (250 psi) Response Time 1-5 seconds (adjustable) Compensated Temperature Range 32 to 130F (0 to 54C) Operating Temperature -4 to 185F (-20 to 85C) Wetted Parts 17-4 PH Stainless Steel Enclosure Die Cast Aluminum, Powder Coated NEMA 4 Enclosure Rating Process Connection 1/4-18 NPT Male Wiring Terminations 1/2" conduit entry (7/8" dia), screw/ crimp terminals Dimensions 4.0"H x 6.0"W x 2.0"D (10.2 x 15.2 x 5.1 cm) Approvals CE, RoHS compliant Weight 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg) - case only Warranty 1 year
+OUT
Remote sensors Conduit and cable versions Field selectable output - 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5, 1 to 5, and 0 to 10 VDC Field accessible push-button zero and remote zero Jumper selectable port swap Optional LCD display All cast aluminum, NEMA4 rated housing
WIRING
HI
LO
PRESSURE
18
Maximum Output Impendence (Current) 250 Accuracy Pressure Ranges A, B, C 1.0% FS Pressure Range D 2.0% FS Thermal Effect Compensated 32 to 130F (0 to 54C) Zero Shift %FS/100F (50C) 2.0 (1.8) Span Shift %FS/100F(50C) 2.0 (1.8) Media Compatibility Liquids or Gases Compatible with 17-4 PH Stainless Steel Note: Hydrogen not recommended for use with 17-4 PH stainless steel Maximum Operating Pressure Equal to top of maximum range March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1045
PRESSURE
PSI
REMOTE MOUNTED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 231RS SERIES
DIMENSIONS
1.98 50.3 6.00 152.4 5.56 141.2
4.00 2.5 102.0
R 0.1
0.35 8.8
2.00 50.8
NEW!
IN MM
6.0 152.4 5.56 141.2 1.98 50.3 R 0.1 2.5 4.0 102 0.35 8.8 2.0 50.8 4.87 123.6 5.08 129.0 1.22 31.0 1.66 42.2
Side View
Front View
2x 0.86 21.9 1.56 39.6 1.22 30.9 1.24 31.5
Side View
Front View
0.95 24.1
1.56 39.6 5.16 131.1
0.95
IN MM
5.16 131.1
Bottom View
Bottom View
Conduit Version
Cable Version
OPERATION
PRESSURE
Pressure range selection: 1. Examine the pressure application and determine the highest system line pressure. 2. Determine the differential pressure being measured. 3. Find the maximum line pressure in the table on the right that is higher than your highest system line pressure. 4. Verify that your DP falls within the selectable ranges in that row. 5. Follow that row to the left and select that range code. Example: Highest System Line Pressure: 125 psig Differential Pressure Measured: 75 psid "Max Line Pressure" Higher than System Line Pressure: 150 psid (75 psid DP falls within ranges in this row) Select Range Code: RS4
18
Note: Line pressure determines selection of range code.
1046
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
0.5% accuracy Push button conguration Linear scaling function LED back light Loop check function 4-20 mA output NEMA 4X (IP65) protection Scaling function Flow measurement and totalization (square root extraction)
PRESSURE
PSI
WET/WET DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER GC52 SERIES
The Ashcroft GC52 Series Low Differential Pressure Transmitter offers reliable, low differential pressure measurement with an accuracy of 0.5%. The transmitter is loop powered with an integral LCD display. The GC52 features zero and span adjustment, linear scaling function, digital lter function, and push button conguration. The rugged NEMA 4X enclosure allows usage in indoor or outdoor environments.
WIRING
Transmission cable

Terminal box Shield Display (board)
Receiver
Power
PRESSURE
source
18
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Adjustments Accuracy 12-32 VDC 4-20 mA (2-wire) 500 Zero and Span Adjustable -10% to 110% FS 0.5% FS (includes linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability) 4 digit, 10 mm LCD; 0.5% FS + last digit accuracy Wetted Parts 316 SS, viton, and Alumina Ceramic Operating Temperature 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C) Storage Temperature 5 to 150F (-15 to 65C) Enclosure Rating Epoxy coated aluminum, NEMA 4X (IP65) Process Connection 1/4 FNPT Wiring Terminations Screw terminals Approvals CE, EN613261 1997, A1/1998, A2/2001 Weight 1 lb (0.7 kg) Warranty 1 year Display
Thermal Effect Zero/Span Shift 0.03% FS/C @ 73F (23C) Compensated Temperature Range 14 to 140F (10 to 60C) Overpressure Ranges 4IW, 8IW, 4IWL 30 psid (207 kPa) All Others 100 psid (690 kPa), March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1047
PRESSURE
PSI
WET/WET DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER GC52 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4 x .22 (56) Panel mounting holes Bracket 0.08 (0.03) thick
NEW!
4.49 (11.4) 3.62 (9.2) Drain outlet 2.91 (7.4) 2.28 (5.8) 0.42 (1.1) 2.07 (5.3)
GC52
inH2O
4.72 5.12 (12) (13)
2.56 (6.5)
PRESSURE
0.69 (1.8) 1.97 (5) 2.36 (6)
18
MODEL DESCRIPTION GC52 Low differential pressure transmitter PRESSURE RANGE "W.C. (kPa) 0-4.0 (1.0) 4IW 0-8.0 (2.0) 8IW 0-20.0 (4.98) 20IW 0-40.0 (9.95) 40IW 0-80.0 (19.9) 80IW 0-200.0 (49.7) 200IW 0-400.0 (99.5) 400IW 4.0 (1.0) 4IWL 8.0 (2.0) 8IWL 20.0 (4.98) 20IWL 40.0 (9.95) 40IWL 80.0 (19.9) 80IWL 200IWL 100.0 (49.7) 400IWL 400.0 (99.5) GC52 40IW Example: GC52-40IW Low differential pressure transmitter ranging from 0-40"w.c.
1048
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Supply Current Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Minimum Output Impedance VDC Accuracy Thermal Effect Media Compatibility
PRESSURE
PSI
WET TO WET DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PR282 SERIES
The MAMAC Systems Model PR282 Wet to Wet Differential Pressure Transmitter incorporates sophisticated integrated circuits and new fused silicon monolithic cavity pressure sensors to not only provide a high level, fully conditioned and temperature compensated output, but also to offer up to six (6) pressure ranges. The stainless steel monolithic pressure cavity not only provides media compatibility for most of the applications, but also offers a leakproof solution for todays environmentally conscious customers. Three industry standard output versions are available: 4-20 mA 2-wire loop or 0-5 VDC/010 VDC. A wide 12-40 VDC or 12-35 VAC unregulated supply voltage and a broad 0F180F compensated temperature range ensures compatibility to most of the applications. A rugged NEMA-1 (IP-30) enclosure, fully temperature compensated NIST traceable accuracy and a liberal ve year warranty are some of the features which make the Model PR282 the industrys most reliable, rugged, and economical pressure sensor. FEATURES 100% solid state fused silicon pressure sensor Rugged, leak-proof stainless steel monolithic pressure cavity with no welds, o-rings, or seams/ bonds
PR282 Series
NIST traceable calibration Rugged NEMA-1 (IP-30) enclosure Short circuit and reverse polarity protected Conforms to EMC and RoHS standards
12-40 VDC; 12-35 VAC (VDC output units only) 10 mA max (VDC output units); 20 mA max (mA output units) 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA 600 @ 24VDC for mA units 1K for VDC output units 1% of FS 0.025%/F(.03%/C) Liquid/gases compatible to 316L stainless steel
300% of rated pressure 500% of rated pressure 0-20 psid, 0-30 psid, 0-50 psid, 0-100 psid, 0-200 psid, 0-300 psid Operating Humidity 10-90% RH Non-Condensing Operating Temperature 0 to 180F (-18 to 82C) 3.5"H x 5.0"W x 2.0"D Dimensions (8.9 x 12.7 x 5.1 cm) Approvals CE, RoHS Weight 1.7 lb (0.75 kg) Warranty 5 years
Overpressure Burst Pressure Measurement Range
PRESSURE
WIRING
Differential Pressure Tranducer with mA Output
18
Differential Pressure Transducer with VDC Output
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1049
PRESSURE
PSI
WET TO WET DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PR282 SERIES
WIRING
Wiring for VDC Differential Pressure Transducers when applied with External DC Power Supply VDC Output Transducer Only 12-35 VAC Transformer
Controller / Meter / Recorder

+ Input Signal - Common Shield/Ground
NEW!
Wiring for VDC Differential Pressure Transducers when applied with External DC Supply VDC Output Transducer Only 12-40 VDC Power Supply Controller / Meter / Recorder
Wiring for mA Differential Pressure Transducers with External DC Power Supply
Wiring for mA Differential Pressure Transducers where the Controller or Meter has an Internal DC Power Supply mA Output Transducer Only Controller / Meter / Recorder
mA Output Transducer Only
12-40 VCD Power Supply
Controller / Meter / Recorder

PRESSURE
18
MODEL DESCRIPTION PR282 Differential pressure sensor OUTPUT 2 0-5 VDC 3 0-10 VDC 4* 4-20 mA PRESSURE RANGE psid (kPa) 1 0-20 (137.9) 2 0-30 (206.8) 3 0-50 (344.7) 4 0-100 (689.5) 5 0-200 (1379.0) 6 0-300 (2068.4) SUPPLY VOLTAGE A12B 24 VDC B12B 24 VAC PR-282 3 2 A12B Example: PR-282-3-2-A12B Differential pressure sensor, 0-10 VDC output, 0-30 psid range, with 24 VDC supply voltage.
* Only available in VDC supply voltage.
DCPA-1.2 691-K0A DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995
1050
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
316 stainless steel wetted parts 4-20 mA two-wire output Operates on nominal 24 VDC NEMA 4 cast aluminum enclosure Accuracy of 0.5% Ranges to 200 psig (1379 kPa) differential
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER W30 SERIES
PSI
The Modus W30 Series Differential Pressure Transmitters measure differential pressure in liquids and gases compatible with 316 stainless steel. They are an excellent choice for HVAC and process applications, including measurement of differential pressure across ow elements, heat exchangers, pumps, lters, coils, and liquid level monitoring. W30 Series transmitters are housed in a compact, heavyduty cast aluminum case designed to NEMA 4 (IP65) standards. The rugged design allows it to withstand high overpressure without damaging the unit or affecting calibration. It is 0.5% accurate and available in eight ranges up to 200 psi differential. The W30 Series is a 4-20 mA twowire loop-powered device that operates on nominal 24 VDC. W30
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.36 (6.0) Mounting holes 0.60 (1.52)
2 Mounting holes for #8 (4 mm) max screw 4.02 (10.2) Mounting holes 4.54 (11.53)
1/8-28 Female NPT 2 Ports
1/2'' Conduit connection
High
2.18 (5.5) 1.37 3.56 (3.48) (9.04) Low 1.35 (3.43) 4.92 (12.50)
PRESSURE
0.26 (0.65)
Front View
Bottom View
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Accuracy 11-32 VDC, 25 mA maximum 4-20 mA 600 @ 24 VDC 0.5% of differential pressure range, including non-linearity and hysteresis, or 1.0% for 0-6 psid (0-41.4 kPa) range Zero: 0.05% per C Span: 0.03% per C Zero: 0.05% per C Span: 0.03% per C 100 psi (690 kPa) 300 psi (2069 kPa) Less than 0.25% for static pressure change from 0-100% Operating Humidity 10% to 90% RH non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Wetted Parts 316 Stainless Steel Dimensions 3.56" x 4.54" x 2.18" (9.01 x 11.53 x 5.54 cm) Enclosure NEMA 3 Process Connection 1/8" FNPT Wiring Terminations 14-26 AWG pluggable terminal block Approvals CE Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) Warranty 1 year Effect of Static Pressure
18
Thermal Effect Overpressure 0 to 30 psid 60 to 200 psid
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1051
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER W30 SERIES
WIRING
24 VDC Power supply
Loop Resistance (Ohms)*
Enclosure ground N/C
NEW!
1500 1000 500
M A XI M U M R ES T IS A N C E
OPERATING REGION
+
W30
4-20 mA + Signal
0 0 10 20 30 40 VDC
Power Supply Voltage *Loop resistance = Wire resistance + Receiver resistance
INSTALLATION The W30 Series transmitter should be mounted on a stable surface, free of vibration and pipe strain. A Model PT steam syphon is recommended to protect the transmitter on steam applications. Another device that might be required is the Model 47 pressure snubber to protect the transmitter from pressure pulses.
PRESSURE
MODEL W30 DESCRIPTION Liquid differential pressure transmitter RANGE (call Kele for metric ranges) RANGE 31E 32E 33E 34E 35E 36E 37E 38E DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE RANGE psid (kPa) 6 10 15 30 60 100 150 200 (41.4) (69.0) (103.4) (206.8) (413.6) (689.5) (1034) (1379) MAXIMUM OPERATING STATIC PRESSURE* psig (kPa) 100 (690) 300 (2069)
* The maximum safe momentary over pressure at any port is two times the maximum operating static pressure.
18
MANIFOLD OPTION BVA Bypass valve assembly 3VLV Three-valve manifold assembly
W30
36E
Example: W30-36E Stainless steel liquid differential pressure transmitter with a range of 0-100 psig (689.5 kPa)
47B-1 47S-1 PT
RELATED PRODUCTS Brass piston style snubber Stainless steel piston style snubber 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings
PAGE 1112 1112 1112
1052
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Maximum Pressure Additional Specications Dimensions BVA-5-W30, DPW All Others Weight BVA-5-W30, DPW All Others Warranty 150 psi (1035 kPa) 150F (66C) 18"H x 10"W x 4"D (45.7 x 25.4 x 10.2 cm) 12"H x 10"W x 4"D (30.5 x 25.4 x 10.2 cm) 15.5 lbs (7.0 kg) 10.5 lbs (4.8 kg) 1 year
PRESSURE
BYPASS VALVE ASSEMBLY BVA-5
PSI
Differential pressure transmitters are often installed in systems with pressures much higher than the differential pressure being monitored. During installation, start-up, or shutdown, the pressure differential may exceed the transmitter differential pressure rating, resulting in severe damage to the transmitter. A Kele Model BVA-5 Bypass Valve Assembly will minimize this possibility. When it is purchased with a transmitter, the transmitter is assembled in a NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure with two isolation valves, an equalizing valve, and two vent valves mounted and piped. Optional pressure snubbers are also available mounted on the Model BVA-5.The Model BVA-5 is designed for use on systems with maximum pressures less than 150 psig (1034.3 kPa) at 150 Deg. F (65 Deg. C).
BVA-5
DIMENSIONS
Vent Transmitter Vent
V-4
V-5
NEMA 1 enclosure
PRESSURE
OPERATION To Place Transmitter in Service:

1. Open V-3. 2. Open V-4 and V-5. 3. Slowly open V-1 and V-2 to bleed the lines of air. 4. Close V-4 and V-5. 5. Open V-1 and V-2 fully. 6. Close V-3 to read differential pressure. To Take Transmitter Out of Service: 1. Open V-3. This will equalize the pressure at the transmitter. 2. Close V-1 and V-2. 3. Open V-4 and V-5 to release pressure.
V-1 1/8" FNPT low pressure port
V-3 V-2 1/8" FNPT high pressure port
BVA-5 piping
CAUTION: A BVA-5 bypass valve assembly is for use on systems with a maximum pressure of 150 psig (1034.3 kPa) at 150
18
MODEL DESCRIPTION BVA-5-DPW 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR KELE DPW BVA-5-PW2 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR PW2 BVA-5-R 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR 360C BVA-5-SET 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR SETRA BVA-SRS 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR SRS BVA-5-VER 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR VERIS BVA-5-W 5 VALVE BYPASS FOR GE W30 To order NEMA 3R Enclosure add sufx -3R Example: BVA-5-DPW-3R
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1053
PRESSURE
PSI
THREE-VALVE MANIFOLDS DPW-3VLV, M230-3VLV, W30-3VLV
DESCRIPTION
These Three and Five-Valve Manifolds, machined from brass, are perfect for applications up to 200F (93C) and 250 psig (1724 kPa). The manifolds can be ordered pre-assembled with a Model DPW-692, M230, or W30 Series differential pressure transmitter (see transmitter catalog page). Each transmitter ordered with a manifold is assembled before shipping.
FEATURES
High temperature tolerance High pressure tolerance Brass construction Easy to install Easy to operate
NEW!
DPW-3VLV (shown with transmitter) W30-3VLV (shown with transmitter) M230-3VLV (shown with transmitter) 5 VLV (shown with transmitter)
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
DP Transmitter
High Low
PRESSURE
Close
V3
Close Close
V1 High
V2 3VLV Low
SPECIFICATIONS
To place transmitter in service 1. Open V-3 2. Open V-1 3. Open V-2 4. Bleed air from system 5. Close V-3 To take transmitter out of service 1. Open V-3 2. Close V-1 3. Close V-2 4. Remove transmitter To bleed system with 5VLV 1. Briey open then close V4 to remove excess air 2. Briey open then close V5 to remove excess air
18
Maximum Pressure 250 psig (1724 kPa) Maximum Temperature 200F (93C) Process Connection 1/4" FNPT Dimensions DPW-3VLV 9.75"H x 7.24"W (24.8 x 18.4 cm) M230-3VLV 7.875"H x 7.25"W (20 x 18.4 cm) W30-3VLV 11.125"H x 7.25"W (28.3 x 18.4 cm) M230-5VLV 7.83"H x 7.05"W (19.9 x 17.9 cm) Warranty 1 year
MODEL DPW-3VLV M230-3VLV W30-3VLV M230-5VLV DESCRIPTION Three-valve manifold for Kele DPW-692 (not included) Three-valve manifold for Setra M230 (not included) Three-valve manifold for Modus W30 (not included) Five-valve manifold for Setra M230 (not included)
Ordering note: To order with manifold assembled with M230, DPW, or W30 transmitter use "3VLV" or "5VLV" sufx after appropriate model number.
1054
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Robust compact package Laser welded stainless steel design Reverse polarity protection 3' cable standard Optional enclosure Optional gauge assembly Ranges up to 500 psi
PRESSURE
PSI
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER P51 SERIES
The compact and robust Kele P51 Series Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter is designed for use with a wide variety of liquid or gas media and for industrial, process or commercial applications. The 304L and 316L stainless steel wetted parts makes the transmitter ideally suited for media such as water, glycol, refrigerants, steam (w/pigtail), and ammonia. The P51 Series is available in models with a 4-20 mA output or with 1-5 VDC output and come standard with a 3 foot cable. It is very competitively priced and can be ordered in an optional enclosure assembly, or enclosed with a gauge for local pressure indication.
P51
P51 with optional enclosure and gauge
APPLICATION
Hot/chilled water Pneumatics Steam (with pigtail) Compressors Refrigeration Agriculture Hydraulics Process control Flow
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Signal Output Output Current Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance Accuracy 8-30 VDC <5 mA (1-5 VDC models) 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC 0.45 mA maximum (sink or source, 1-5 VDC models) 800 at 24 VDC 50,000 <0.5% FS includes non-linearity, repeatability, and hysteresis (<1% on models with range 50 psig) Stability <0.25% FS per year typical <0.5% FS (-40C to 105C) Thermal Effect (<1% on models with range 50 psig) Overpressure 3X rated pressure Burst Pressure 5x rated pressure Measurement Range 0-15 psi to 0-500 psi <1 ms Response Time Operating Temperature -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Warranty 1 year
18
WIRING
24 VDC Power supply
(red)
(white)
4-20 mA + signal
24 VDC Power supply
(red)
(black)
(white)
1-5 VDC + signal
4-20 mA
March 2014
1-5 VDC
WE MAKE IT EASY. kele.com 888-397-5353 USA
1055
PRESSURE
PSI
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER P51 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
2.36 (60.0) Cable length 36 (914.4)
NEW!
0.85 (21.5) 0.51 (13) 0.16 (4.0) 0.86 (22.0)
HEX
0.86 (22.0)
1/8" - 27 NPT
PRESSURE
MODEL P51
18
P51
DESCRIPTION Pressure transmitter RANGE psig (kPa) 15 0-15 (0-103) 50 0-50 (0-345) 100 0-100 (0-690) 200 0-200 (0-1379) 300 0-300 (0-2069) 500 0-500 (0-3448) OUTPUT SIGNAL 20 4-20 mA output 5 1-5 VDC output OPTIONS E Transmitter in watertight enclosure with stainless steel fittings E-G Transmitter in enclosure with a pressure gauge, brass fittings 100 20 Example: P51-100-20 0-100 psi transmitter with 4-20 mA output, no options
47B-1 47S-1 DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 PT ZG-R01
RELATED PRODUCTS Brass piston style snubber Stainless steel piston style snubber Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings 500, 1/2W, 1% resistor
PAGE 1112 1112 995 994 1112 8
1056
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Splash-proof, plug-in electrical connector For steam, water, glycol, refrigerant, and more 4-20 mA output 304L/316L stainless steel wetted parts Wide range of pressures High overpressure capability
PRESSURE
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PSS2 SERIES
PSI
The Kele PSS2 Series Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter is highly accurate and compact, which makes it ideal for HVAC, building automation, and process gauge pressure applications. A splash-proof Packard-type electrical connector is provided for ease of installation. Eleven standard ranges are available for a wide variety of applications.
PSS2
PSS2 PSS2 with optional enclosure and gauge
SPECIFICATIONS
PRESSURE
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Accuracy Stability Thermal Effect Overpressure Burst Pressure Measurement Range
8-30 VDC 4-20 mA 800 @ 24 VDC Models > 75 psi <0.5% of span Models < 50 psi <1.0% of span <0.25% of span/year -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C), <0.5% FS 3x range 5x range 0-15 psi to 0-1000 psi
Media Compatibility
Fluids compatible with brass, 304L and 316 stainless steel <1 ms Response Time Operating Temperature -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Process Connection 1/8" MNPT, 316 stainless steel Wiring Terminations Splash-proof Packard connector, 16 AWG cable, 36" length Enclosure: 5.11"H x 5.11"W x 2.95"D Dimensions (13.0 x 13.0 x 7.5 cm) Weight 0.3 lb (0.13 kg) with 36" cable Warranty 1 year
18
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
36 (91) 16 AWG Cable
WIRING
in (cm)
24 VDC Power Supply
+
(red) (white)
4-20 mA Signal
2.6 3.5 (6.60) (8.89)
0.86 dia (2.2)
0.29 (6.74)
0.86 Hex (2.2) 1/8'' NPT
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1057
PRESSURE
PSI
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PSS2 SERIES
INSTALLATION
Mount the PSS2 Series in a manner that protects it from steam or temperatures outside of its operating range. A Model PT steam pigtail syphon must be installed in all applications where steam is to be monitored. When monitoring the pressure of a medium that is above or below the temperature operating range of the transmitter, the sensor should be isolated by a length of tubing. If 6" to 12" (15.2 to 30.5 cm) of brass tubing is used, temperatures up to 400F (204C) can be tolerated. See the Technical Reference section for information on Steam Isolation and Temperature Protection. If the PSS2 Series is to be subjected to uid hammer, pressure surges, or pulsations, a Model 47 pressure snubber is recommended.
NEW!
CAUTION: Not for use with ammonia. The PSS2 can be used with media that is compatible with 304L and 316L stainless steel.
18
PRESSURE
MODEL PSS2
DESCRIPTION Stainless steel 4-20 mA pressure transmitter PRESSURE RANGE psig (kPa) 15 0-15 (0-103.4) 30 0-30 (0-206.9) 50 0-50 (0-344.8) 75 0-75 (0-517.1) 100 0-100 (0-689.5) 150 0-150 (0-1034) 200 0-200 (0-1379) 300 0-300 (0-2068) 500 0-500 (0-3497) 750 0-750 (0-5171) 1000 0-1000 (0-6895) OPTIONS (leave blank for no options) E Watertight enclosure (with stainless steel bulkhead fitting) G* Enclosed with pressure gauge (watertight with transparent cover, brass fittings) LCD* Model LPI-1C LCD display with enclosure (not watertight, brass fittings) RED* Model LPI-1CR red digital display with enclosure (not watertight, brass fittings)
PSS2
100
Example: PSS2-100-G Stainless steel pressure transmitter with a 4-20 mA
output over the range of 0-100 psig, with pressure gauge, installed in a watertight enclosure with a transparent cover * Brass wetted parts option is only for those mediums compatible with brass.
250R-3-1 47B-1 47S-1 PT
RELATED PRODUCTS 250 OHM 3 WATT 1% resistor long leads Brass piston style snubber Stainless steel piston style snubber 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings
PAGE 1299 1112 1112 1112
1058
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Accuracy Thermal Effect Overpressure Burst Pressure Response Time Media Compatibility 10-30 VDC @ 25 mA 4-20 mA
PRESSURE
PSI
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PTX1 SERIES
The Kele PTX1 Series Stainless Steel Pressure Transmitter utilizes a thin lm strain-gauge bridge and stainless steel diaphragm to provide a highly accurate, stable means of measuring gauge pressures up to 2000 psig (13.79 MPa). Splash-proof cable connections protect the wiring, allowing the PTX1 Series to be mounted near the medium being measured. Optional indication is available as a digital display or as a 2" (5.1 cm) gauge.
For steam, water, glycol, ammonia, refrigerants, and more 1% full scale accuracy 200% proof pressure Wide range of pressures 4-20 mA output Reverse polarity protected Plug-in, splash-proof connector with 6' cable Stainless steel wetted parts Stainless steel case Optional watertight polystyrene enclosure Optional LCD/red digital indication Optional gauge available for mediums compatible with brass
PTX1-E-07
PTX1-07
PRESSURE
650 @ 24 VDC maximum 1% FS 0.04% FS/F zero and span 200% 800% 1 ms Fluids compatible with brass and 17-4 PH stainless steel Wetted Materials Diaphragm: 17-4 PH stainless steel Compensated Temperature Range -20 to 160F (-29 to 71C)
Operating Temperature -40 to 200F (-40 to 93C) Transmitter Case 304 stainless steel Process Connection 1/8" NPT male 316 stainless steel, with enclosure: 1/8" FNPT Wiring Terminations 72" (182 cm) jacketed leads Dimensions 7.09"H x 4.33"W x 3.54"D (18.0 x 11.0 x 9.0 cm) Weight PTX1 0.45 lb (0.20 kg) PTX1EG 2.05 lb (0.93 kg) Warranty 1 year
18
INSTALLATION
Mount the PTX1 Series in a manner that protects it from steam or temperatures outside of its operating range. A Model PT steam pigtail syphon must be installed on all applications where steam is to be monitored. When monitoring the pressure of medium that is above or below the temperature operating range of the transmitter, the sensor should be isolated by a length of tubing. If 6" to 12" (15.2 to 30.5 cm) of brass tubing is used, temperatures up to 400F (204C) can be tolerated. See the Technical Reference section for information on Steam Isolation and Temperature Protection. If the PTX1 Series is to be subjected to uid hammer, pressure surges, or pulsations, a Model 47 pressure snubber is recommended.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1059
PRESSURE
PSI
STAINLESS STEEL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PTX1 SERIES
WIRING
Loop Resistance ()
in (cm)
Splash-proof Hirschman Connector
24 VDC Power Supply (white) (black)
72.0 Cable (182.88) 2.73 (6.92) 0.63 Hex (1.59) 1/8" NPT male
NEW!
909 750 500 250 0 0 10 20 30 Loop Supply Voltage (VDC)
Vmin = 10V + [0.022A*(R Loop )]
4-20 mA
Load Limitations 4-20 mA Output
MODEL PTX1 PTX1E PTX1E-G** PTX1E-LCD** PTX1E-RED** DESCRIPTION Pressure transmitter with cable Pressure transmitter in watertight enclosure, stainless steel fittings Pressure transmitter in watertight enclosure, with gauge, brass fittings Pressure transmitter enclosed (not watertight), with LCD, brass fittings Pressure transmitter enclosed (not watertight), with red LCD, brass fittings PRESSURE RANGE psig (kPa) 01 30" Hg Vacuum to 0 (-101.6 Vacuum to 0) 02 30" Hg Vacuum to 15 (-101.6 Vacuum to 103.4) 03 0-15 (0-130.4) 04 3-15 (20.7-103.4) 05 0-30 (0-206.9) 06 0-60 (0-413.7) 07 0-100 (0-689.5) 08 0-150 (0-1034.3) 09 0-200 (0-1379.0) 10 0-300 (0-2068.5) 11 0-500 (0-3447.5) 12 0-750 (0-5171.3) 13 0-1000 (0-6895.0) 14* 0-2000 (0-13,790.0) 15 30'' Hg Vacuum to 30 (-101.6 Vacuum to 206.9) 16 30'' Hg Vacuum to 60 (-101.6 Vacuum to 413.7)
18
PTX1E-LCD
PRESSURE
07 Example: PTX1 Stainless steel pressure transmitter with 100 psig pressure range in enclosure with LCD indication * Enclosed models not available in pressure ranges above 1000 psig ** Brass wetted parts; do not use with mediums that are not compatible with brass Note: NIST certificate available; contact Kele.
47B-1 47S-1 DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 PT
RELATED PRODUCTS Brass piston style snubber Stainless steel piston style snubber Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings
PAGE 1299 1299 995 994 1112
1060
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Low cost Highly accurate Current output Lightweight Compatible with most common applications Stainless steel construction Conduit adapter standard Optional voltage output available
PRESSURE
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 209 SERIES
PSI
The Setra 209 Series Pressure Transmitter is specically designed for industrial applications with high performance requirements. It measures gauge pressure and can be used with gases or liquids compatible with 17-4 PH stainless steel. The 209 Series is packaged in a rugged, stainless steel/Valox housing, which is small and lightweight. The stainless steel capacitance sensing element and high level output, IC-based circuit assures excellent stability.
209 Series
APPLICATION
HVAC/R equipment Industrial equipment Compressor control Hydraulic systems Process and refrigeration systems
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
GND
PRESSURE
COM
OUT
EXC
3.63 (9.2)
1.62 (4.1)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Current Voltage Signal Output Current Voltage Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance Accuracy Stability Non-repeatability Non-linearity Hysteresis 14 to 30 VDC (RL=250), 2-wire 9 to 30 VDC, 3-wire 4-20 mA 0.5 to 5.5 VDC 800 @ 24 VDC 5000 0.25% FS 0.5% FS/year 0.05% FS 0.22% FS 0.10% FS Thermal Effect Zero 2.0% FS/100F (1.8% FS/50C) Span 1.5% FS/100F (1.3% FS/50C) Overpressure See ordering information Measurement Range 0 - 1 psi to 2000 psi Operating Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Compensated Temperature Range -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) Process Connection 1/4" 18 NPT Enclosure Stainless Steel, Valox Wetted Materials 17-4 PH stainless steel Wiring Terminations Screw terminals Approvals CE, RoHS Weight 0.14 lb (0.07 kg) Warranty 1 year
18
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1061
PRESSURE
PSI
WIRING
GND
COM OUT
EXC
NEW!
GND COM OUT EXC
4-20 mA
Rload
0.5-5.5 VDC
Rload
24 VDC* Power supply
24 VDC* Power supply
* See Specifications on previous page for power supply requirements.
4-20 mA
0.5-5.5 VDC
PRESSURE
18
MODEL DESCRIPTION 209 Pressure transmitter PROOF BURST RANGE psig (kPa) PRESSURE (psig) PRESSURE (psig) 001P 0-1 (0-7) 2 250 002P 0-2 (0-14) 4 250 005P 0-5 (0-34) 10 250 010P 0-10 (0-69) 20 500 025P 0-25 (0-172) 50 500 050P 0-50 (0-345) 100 750 100P 0-100 (0-690) 200 1000 200P 0-200 (0-1379) 400 2000 250P 0-250 (0-1724) 500 2000 500P 0-500 (0-3448) 1000 3000 10CP 0-1000 (0-6895) 2000 5000 20CP 0-2000 (13790) 3000 6500 OUTPUT G2M11 4-20 mA analog G2M24 0.5-5.5 VDC analog CONNECTION A1 Threaded conduit connection
209 050P G2M11 A1 Example: 209-050P-G2M11-A1 0-50 psig transmitter with 4-20 mA output and conduit connection
PAGE 1112 March 2014
PT
RELATED PRODUCTS 1/4" pigtail syphon with fittings
1062
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES DIMENSIONS
L-connector Conductor outer diameter .18" to .24"
max. 1.5 (38 mm)
EN175301-801-C
PRESSURE
PSI
The Wika 50 Series pressure transmitter is precision engineered and manufactured to t many industrial and OEM pressure measurement applications. The rugged design provides resistance to vibration, shock, wide temperature variations, RFI and other extreme environmental conditions that are typical of industrial and OEM applications. Performance and reliability is enhanced by the all stainless steel welded measuring cell that eliminates the need for soft sealing materials that may deteriorate over time. The state-of-the-art manufacturing and assembly process increases the long-term reliability of the 50 Series.
Pressure ranges: from 0...15 psi up to 0... 10,000 psi Non-linearity: 0.5% BFSL Signal output: 4-20 mA and 0-10 V
50 Series
DIMENSIONS
1/4 NPT Male
1.06 (27 mm) .51 (13 mm)
PRESSURE
max. 1.9 (48 mm)
1.14 (29 mm) 1.06 (27 mm)
2.4 (60.8 mm)
1/4 NPT
18
.51 (13 mm)
1/4 NPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 14-30 VDC, 20 mA Signal Output 4-20 mA @ 800 Accuracy < 1% of span Thermal Effect (at 0 to 80C) Typ. 1% of span; Max: 2.5% of span Overpressure (dependent on calibrated range) typ. ~2x rated pressure Measurement Range 0-15 to 0-10,000 psi Response Time <4 mS Operating Temperature 32 to 176 F (0 to 80 C) Process Connection 1/4" NPT male Wiring Terminations DIN 175301-803 A and C, M12x1, 6 ft. cable Media Compatibility 316L stainless steel Stability 0.1% of span Approvals CE Weight 0.14 lb (0.07 kg) Warranty 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1063
PRESSURE
PSI
MODEL 50426354 50426389 50426397 50426401 50426427 50372475 50398083 50426460 50426478 50426486 50426494 50426508 50426516 50372483 50426532 50426737 50426761 50426770 50426788 50426800 50426818 50426834 50426842 50426851 50426869 50426877 50426885 50426893 50426907 50426915
DESCRIPTION Pressure transmitter, 0-15 psia, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-100 psia, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-15 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-25 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-50 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-100 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-200 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-300 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-500 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-1000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-1500 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-2000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-3000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-5000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-10,000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-15 psia, 0-10 V, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-100 psia, 0-10 V, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-15 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-25 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-50 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-100 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-200 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-300 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-500 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-100 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-1500 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-2000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-3000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-5000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT Pressure transmitter, 0-10000 psi, 4-20 mA, 1/4 MNPT
NEW!
PRESSURE
18
ZG-R01 PT DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W 47B-1 47S-1
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 500, 1/2W, 1% resistor 8 1/4" pigtail syphon with ttings 1112 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Brass piston style snubber 1112 Stainless steel piston style snubber 1112
1064
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Supply Current Signal Output Output Current Maximum Output Impedance Minimum Output Impedance Accuracy 9-28 V 5 mA 4-20 mA Ratiometric (10-90% of V supp) up to 5mA Zero for 4-20 mA output < 25 for ratiometric Zero for 4-20 mA output < 25 for ratiometric < 1.0 % FS
PRESSURE
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER MBS 1900
PSI
This compact Danfoss MBS 1900 Series pressure transmitter is designed for use in air and water applications like booster pumps and air compressors. It offers a range of output signals and connection options. Stainless steel (316) welded construction for sensor element and package Reverse polarity protection EMC protection up to 100V/m RoHS conformty Digitally compensated UL/CSA certied
MBS 1900
Cable
Temperature Effect Included in accuracy System Pressure 0 to 360 psi Overpressure 3X rated pressure Burst Pressure 4X rated pressure Measurement Range 0 to 360 psi < 4 ms Response Time Operating Temperature -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) Weight 0.33 to 0.66 lbs (0.15 to 0.30 kg) Approvals CE, UL File# E31024, RoHS Warranty 18 months from manufacture date
PRESSURE
WIRING
Electrical Connection 4-20 mA Output (2 wire) Pin 1: + supply = Black Pin 2: supply = White Pin 3: not used Earth: Connected to MBS enclosure Black
DIMENSIONS
A0, A1
18
White
MODEL MBS19005811A36B04 MBS19006211A36B04 MBS19006411A36B04

DESCRIPTION Pressure transducer for water and air applications, 0-100 psi Pressure transducer for water and air applications, 0-200 psi Pressure transducer for water and air applications, 0-300 psi
ZG-R01 PT DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W 47B-1 47S-1
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 500, 1/2W, 1% resistor 8 1/4" pigtail syphon with ttings 1112 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Brass piston style snubber 1112 Stainless steel piston style snubber 1112
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1065
PRESSURE
PSI
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PVI-1, PVI-2
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Model PVI-1 and PVI-2 Pressure Transmitters are designed to provide economical monitoring of control air pressure in HVAC applications. The Model PVI-1 is furnished in a unique slim-line design housing, which saves panel space, and can be ordered with an optional DIN railmounting adapter. The Model PVI-2 is a snap-track mounted version with identical operation. Both versions are available with an optional pressure indication gauge.Both units have LED indication for power and for output over range when input pressure exceeds maximum calibrated pressure. The output signal is limited to 110% of normal full scale (20 mA, 5/10/15V).
NEW!
PVI-1 PVI-2 with Optional Gauge Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Process Connection 1/4" barb Wiring Terminations Terminals Dimensions PVI-1 3.4"H x 4.9"W x 2"D (8.6 x 12.4 x 5.1 cm)* PVI-2 3.25"H x 3.25"W x 1.75"D (8.26 x 8.26 x 4.45 cm)* Approvals RoHS Weight PVI-1 0.85 lb (0.39 kg) PVI-2 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) Warranty 18 months * Add 0.6"H (1.5 cm) each for mounting tabs and 2.3"H (5.8 cm) for gauge option.
FEATURES
AC or DC power 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) input pressure range 4-20 mA and voltage outputs available simultaneously Adjustable zero and span LED indication of power and output over range Optional pressure gauge
PRESSURE
APPLICATION
Models PVI-1 and PVI-2 convert an input pressure to a 4-20 mA current sourcing and a jumper-selectable 1-5, 2-10, or 3-15 VDC output signal that is directly proportional to the input pressure. The zero and span potentiometers allow for adjustment if the output signal required is different from the standard calibration.
18
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Current Voltage Maximum Output Impedance (mA) Minimum Output Impedance (VDC) Accuracy Span Adjustments Zero Adjustments Pressure Range Media Compatibility 24 VAC 10% @ 80 mA 24 VDC 10% @ 35 mA 4-20 mA (sourcing) 1-5 VDC, 2-10 VDC, 3-15 VDC 650 1-5 VDC: 1250 2-10 VDC 2500 3-15 CDC 3750 0.1 psig @ 77F (25C) 3-20 psig (20.7-137.9 kPa) 0-17 psig (0-117.2 kPa) 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa) factory setting Air and non-conductive gases
1066
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Zero and Span Zero and Span Selection Dip Switches
Pressure Zero Range
PRESSURE
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PVI-1, PVI-2
CALIBRATION
Models PVI-1 and PVI-2 are factory calibrated for 0-20 psig (0-137.9 kPa). If another pressure range is required, select the pressure zero range from Table 1 and set SW1 and SW2 accordingly. Then, select the pressure span range (high pressure minus low pressure) required from Table 2 and set SW3 and SW4. Apply the low-end pressure and adjust the zero pot for the desired output. Apply the high-end pressure and adjust the span pot. Repeat as required. Example: To monitor an 8-13 psig signal, the pressure zero range is 8, so set SW1 ON and SW2 OFF. The pressure span range is 5 (13-8 = 5), so set SW3 OFF and SW4 OFF.
PSI
Zero
Span PVI-1 (enclosed) PVI-2 (track mount)
Voltage Output Jumper (Shown in 1-5V Position) Voltage output and 4-20 mA outputs are simultaneously active. Voltage Output
Pressure Span Range 5V 15V
10V
Output Voltage Range Voltage Out mA Out COM 24V Power
Power Out Over
650 max
4-20 mA Output
24 VAC or VDC Power Supply
TABLE 1. PRESSURE ZERO RANGE ZERO 0.00-4.25 psig (0-29.3 kPa) 4.25-8.50 psig (29.3-58.6 kPa) 8.50-12.75 psig (58.6-87.9 kPa) 12.75-17.00 psig (87.9 kPa-117.2 kPa) TABLE 2. PRESSURE SPAN RANGE SPAN 3.00-7.25 psig (20.7-50.0 kPa) 7.25-11.50 psig (50.0-79.3 kPa) 11.50-15.75 psig (79.3-108.6 kPa) 15.75-20.00 psig (108.6-137.9 kPa)
SW1 ON ON OFF OFF SW3 OFF OFF ON ON
SW2 ON OFF ON OFF SW4 OFF ON OFF ON
PRESSURE
MODEL PVI-1
DESCRIPTION Pressure transmitter OPTIONS (must be factory installed) Pressure indication gauge 43 DIN rail mounting 47 Special calibration (specify range when ordering) C Example: PVI-1-43-47 Enclosed pressure transmitter with pressure indication gauge and DIN rail mounting
18
MODEL PVI-2
DESCRIPTION Track-mounted pressure transmitter OPTIONS (must be factory installed) Pressure indication gauge G Special calibration (specify range when ordering) C Example: PVI-2-G Track-mounted pressure transmitter with pressure gauge
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1067
PRESSURE
PSI
RANGEABLE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER GC51 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Ashcroft GC51 Rangeable Pressure Transmitter is a compact alternative to the conventional process transmitter available in compound and gauge ranges. The ranges span from Vacuum to 15 PSI, 30 PSI, or 50 PSI compound ranges and 0 to 7500 PSI ranges. The GC51 Series features a two wire 4-20mA output, backlit LCD display, stainless steel wetted parts, and NEMA 4X, IP65, robust aluminum housing. The range and output allows for rescaling and setting of user dened units.
NEW!
GC51
FEATURES
NEMA 4X (IP65) aluminum die cast housing Backlit LCD display Min./Max. hold to capture pressure events Rotatable display Adjustable pressure range and output 2 wire 4-20mA output Standard 120ms response time Internal push button keys with key lock feature Optional NIST certication
WIRING

Transmission cable Terminal box Shield Display (board) Power source Receiver
SPECIFICATIONS
PRESSURE
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Adjustments Accuracy Thermal Effect Overpressure (Proof) 1500 psi FS and below 3000, 5000 psi 7500 psi Measurement Range
12-32 VDC 4-20 mA (2-wire) 545 @ 24 VDC Zero and Span Adjustable -10% to 110% FS 0.25% Full Scale (includes linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability) 0.02% FS (URL)/C from 23C reference 200% FS value 150% FS value 120% FS value Vac-15 psi (-101.6 Vac to 103.4 KPa) to
Display Type Accuracy Operating Temperature Wetted Parts Storage Temperature Enclosure Rating Process Connection Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty
0-7500 psi (0-51710.68 KPa) 4 digit, 10mm LCD with LED backlight 0.25% FS (URL) + last digit -10 to 60C (14 to 140F) 316 Stainless Steel and 17-4PH SS -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) Epoxy coated aluminum, NEMA 4X (IP65) 1/4 FNPT Cable Gland (Cable Diameters 0.35" to 0.47") CE Approx. 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) 1 year
18
MODEL GC51-15V GC51-30V GC51-50V GC51-50 GC51-100 GC51-150 GC51-300 GC51-500 GC51-1000 GC51-1500 GC51-3000 GC51-5000 GC51-7500 PT DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W 47B-1 47S-1
DESCRIPTION Pressure transmitter, Vac to 15 psi Pressure transmitter, Vac to 30 psi Pressure transmitter, Vac to 50 psi Pressure transmitter, 0-50 psi Pressure transmitter, 0-100 psi Pressure transmitter, 0-150 psi Pressure transmitter, 0-300 psi Pressure transmitter, 0-500 psi Pressure transmitter, 0-1000 psi Pressure transmitter, 0-1500 psi Pressure transmitter, 0-3000 psi Pressure transmitter, 0-5000 psi Pressure transmitter, 0-7500 psi RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1/4" pigtail syphon with ttings 1112 Power supply, 120 VAC In to 24 VAC/24 VDC Out 994 Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Brass piston style snubber 1112 Stainless steel piston style snubber 1112
1068
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage 15-35 VDC Contact Rating 24 VDC @ 500 Contact Type Solid-state (PNP OR NPN) Accuracy 1.00% of span Measurement Range 0-15 psi to 0-5000 psi Shock 50g Operating Temperature 32 to 176F (0 to 80C)
PRESSURE
PRESSURE SWITCH PSD-30 SERIES
PSI
The design and outstanding functionality of the Wika PSD30 pressure switch received the IF Product Design Award in 2009. The large, ergonomically designed programming push buttons provide the user with tactile feedback for immediate conrmation that the touch event was registered by the trans-mitter. The user-friendly menu navigation layout meets the new German Engineering Federation (VDMA) Standard form for uid sensors (24574-1, Part 1, pressure switch). The goal of the VDMA is to simplify the use of pressure switches by standardizing menu navigation and display parameters.The PSD-30 can be adjusted three different ways to t specic installation requirements. The display and electrical connection can be rotated independently to maximize visibility while still orienting the electrical connection in the best position for the cable connector. If the transmitter is installed overhead or upside down the display can be electronically rotated 180.Time tested, proven WIKA thin lm and piezoresitive pressure sensor technology is an integral part of the PSD30 providing the high quality and long term reliability users demand.
PSD-30
WIRING
2x PNP + analog output
Brown White Black Gray Blue Legend: U+ Positive supply connection UNegative supply connection SP1 Switching point 1 SP2 Switching point 2 S+ Switching point 2
Available with single or dual Negative-PositiveNegative (NPN) or Positive-Negative-Positive (PNP) solid state switches High visibility, rugged 14-segment red LED display electronically rotates 180 for top-down installation User-friendly, intuitive 3-key operation Versions with 4-20 mA or 0-10V analog output available Programming menu meets VDMA Standards for user friendly navigation.
PRESSURE
Wetted Parts Process Connection Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty
Pressure connection 316 L stainless steel (13-8 PH for ranges above 150 psi) 1/4" FNPT 6 ft (2m) cable CE , UL File E12413, RoHS 0.44lbs (0.45 kg) 2 years
18
MODEL DESCRIPTION PSD-30 4-20 mA pressure transmitter with integral LED display PSD-30-10V 0-10 V pressure transmitter with integral LED display (models only with *) PRESSURE RANGE psi (kPA) 01 30" Hg Vacuum to 0 (-101.6 Vacuum to 0) 02 30" Hg Vacuum to 100 (-101.6 Vacuum to 689.5) 03 0-15 (0-130.4) 04 0-25 (0-172.4) 05 0-50 (0-344.7) 06* 0-100 (0-689.5) 07 0-200 (0-1379.0) 08 0-500 (0-3447.5) 09 0-2000 (0-13,790.0) 10 0-3000 (0-20,684.3) 11 0-5000 (0-34,473.8) PSD-30 03 Example: PSD-30-03 4-20 mA pressure transmitter with integral LED display, 0-15 psi range.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1069
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH KDPS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KDPS Series Adjustable Differential Pressure Switches are general-purpose, airow-proving switches designed for HVAC and building automation applications. The KDPS Series can be used to sense positive, negative, or differential air pressure. The silicone diaphragm and calibration spring are housed in a rugged plastic enclosure with a removable cover protecting the set point adjustment knob and snap action switch terminals. Electrical connections are made through a 7/8" diameter opening in the cover that accepts a 1/2" conduit connection. Air sampling connections accept 1/4" ID tubing.
NEW!
KDPS Series
FEATURES
Transparent cover for setpoint conrmation Easy, eld adjustable set point Dual scales
WIRING
Normally Closed
APPLICATION
2.5"
Proving fan status Monitoring lter for excess pressure drop Monitoring duct static pressure Proving air ow Monitoring damper status
1 Common 3
5"
Normally Open
0"
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating Contact Type Differential KDPS-02/03 KDPS-04/05 KDPS-10 KDPS-25 Operating Pressure Measurement Range KDPS-02 KDPS-03 KDPS-04 KDPS-05 KDPS-10 1.5A (0.4A) @ 250V SPST or SPDT 0.04" WC (10 Pa) 0.08" WC (20 Pa) 0.40" WC (100 Pa) 0.60" WC (150 Pa) 20" WC (5 kPa) 0.08 to 0.80" WC (20 to 200 Pa) 0.12 to 1.20" WC (30 to 300 Pa) 0.16 to 1.6" WC (40 to 400 Pa) 0.20 to 2.00" WC (50 to 500 Pa) 0.80 to 4.0" WC (200 to 1000 Pa) KDPS-25 1.0 to 10.0" WC (500 to 2500 Pa) Air, non-combustible and inert gases Media Compatibility Operating Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 C to 85C) Mounting Diaphram positioned in any vertical plane Enclosure IP54 (with cover) similar to NEMA 12 Process Connection 0.25" (6.0mm) diameter for 0.25" ID Tubing Wiring Terminations 0.25" (6.4 mm) copper alloy CE, RoHS, UR recognized File Approvals MH46253 Weight 6 oz (171.4g) Warranty 1 year
18
MODEL KDPS-02 KDPS-03 KDPS-04 KDPS-05 KDPS-10 KDPS-25 DESCRIPTION Differential pressure switch, 0.08" to 0.80" WC (20 to 200 Pa) Differential pressure switch, 0.12" to 1.20" WC (30 to 300 Pa) Differential pressure switch, 0.16" to 1.6" WC (40 to 400 Pa) Differential pressure switch, 0.20" to 2.00" WC (50 to 500 Pa) Differential pressure switch, 0.80" to 4.0" WC (200 to 1000 Pa) Differential pressure switch, 1.0" to 10.0" WC (500 to 2500 Pa)
1070
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Adjustable set point For static or differential pressure 15A switch rating Manual reset (Model AFS-460) Gold contacts (Model AFS-405) UR, CSA, FM approved Two-year warranty
PRESSURE
PSI
ADJUSTABLE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES AFS SERIES
The Cleveland Controls AFS Series Adjustable Differential Pressure Switches are general-purpose, airow-proving switches designed for HVAC and building automation applications. The AFS Series can be used to sense positive, negative, or differential air pressure. The diaphragm and calibration spring are housed in a plated enclosure with a removable metal guard protecting the set point screw and snap action switch terminals. Electrical connections are made through a 7/8 diameter opening in the metal guard that accepts a conduit connection. Air sampling connections accept OD rigid or semi rigid tubing. The Model AFS-460 features a manual reset button to close the switch following actuation. For low current applications use Model AFS-405 with gold contacts.
US
APPLICATION
Proving fan status Monitoring lter for excess pressure drop Monitoring duct static pressure Proving air ow Monitoring damper status
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating AFS-145, 222, 262, 405 15A non-inductive, 277 VAC, 60 Hz 24 VAC @ 2.4A AFS-460, 460-DSS 15A @ 125-277 VAC 1/4 HP @ 125 VAC 1/2 HP @ 250 VAC 1/2A @ 125 VDC Contact Type AFS-145, 222, 262, 405 AFS-136, 460-137 SPDT AFS-460 SPST N.C. AFS-460-DSS 2-SPST N.C. Switch Differential AFS-145, 222, 262, 405 Progressive, increasing from approximately 0.02" W.C. (5.0 Pa) @ minimum set point to approximately 0.8" W.C. (199 Pa) @ maximum set point AFS-460, 460-DSS None, manual reset Overpressure Measurement Range AFS-145, 222, 405 AFS-262 AFS-460 AFS-460-DSS Life Expectancy 0.5 psig (3.5 kPa)
PRESSURE
0.05" to 12.0" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa) 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa) 0.4" to 12.0" W.C. (99.3 to 2989 Pa) 2.0" to 12.0" W.C. (498 to 2989 Pa) AFS-145, 222, 262, 405: 100,000 cycles minimum @ 0.5 psig (3.5 kPa) maximum pressure each cycle and at maximum electrical load AFS-460: 6000 cycles Operating Temperature -40 to 180F (-40 to 82C) Process Connection AFS-145 1/8" NPTF All Others Ferrule and nut compression for 1/4" OD tubing Approvals CE, UL File MH6213, cCSAus, RoHS Weight 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) Warranty 2 years
18
WIRING
NO
C
C
C
NC
NC
Action on a rise in differential pressure
Opens on a rise in differential pressure
A Lead
NC
C
NC
Opens on a rise in differential pressure
B Lag
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1071
PRESSURE
PSI
ADJUSTABLE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES AFS SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.25 (8.23) 1.63 (4.14)
2.81 (7.14)
6.13 (15.57)
3.88 (9.86)
NEW!
Low pressure inlet (B) 3.25 (8.23)
C NO NC
1.38 (3.50)
0.710 (1.80)
1.94 (4.93) 0.44 (1.12) High pressure inlet (A) 0.78 (1.98)
Two mounting holes 3/16 fastener required
OPERATION
Select a mounting location that is free from vibration. The switch must be mounted with the diaphragm in any vertical plane in order to obtain the lowest specied operating setpoint. Avoid mounting with the sample line connections in the up position. Surface mount via the two 3/16" diameter holes in the integral mounting bracket. The Model AFS-460-DSS has a lead switch (A) and a lag switch (B). The lead switch trips according to the setpoint knob and the lag switch trips after the lead switch. If dual-switch simultaneous operation is required, order AFS-460-136 (120 VAC power) or AFS-460-137 (24 VAC power). Refer to the Dimensions drawing to identify the high pressure inlet (A) and the low pressure inlet (B), and connect the sample lines as follows: Positive Pressure Only Connect the sample line to (A); (B) remains open to the atmosphere. Negative Pressure Only Connect the sample line to (B); (A) remains open to the atmosphere. Two Negative Samples Connect the higher negative sample to (B); Connect the lower negative sample to (A). Two Positive Samples Connect the higher positive sample to (A); Connect the lower positive sample to (B). One Positive and One Negative Sample Connect the positive sample to (A); Connect the negative sample to (B).
PRESSURE
Locate sampling probe a minimum of 1-1/2 duct diameters downstream from the air source. Install the sampling probe as close to the center of the airstream as possible.
MODEL AFS-145* AFS-222* AFS-222-112 AFS-262* AFS-262-112 AFS-405 AFS-460* AFS-460-136 AFS-460-137 AFS-460-DSS* DESCRIPTION Differential pressure switch 0.05" to 12" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa), 1/8" NPTF Differential pressure switch 0.05" to 12" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa), 1/4" compression ttings Differential pressure switch 0.05" to 12" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa), 1/4" barbed ttings Differential pressure switch 0.05" to 2" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa), 1/4" compression ttings Differential pressure switch 0.05" to 2" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa), 1/4" barbed ttings Differential pressure switch 0.05" to 12" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa), gold contacts Manual reset differential pressure switch, 0.4" to 12" W.C. (99.3 to 2989 Pa), SPST Manual reset differential pressure switch, 0.4" to 12" W.C. (99.3 to 2989 Pa), 120 VAC, SPDT Manual reset differential pressure switch, 0.4" to 12" W.C. (99.3 to 2989 Pa), 24 VAC, SPDT Manual reset differential pressure switch, 2" to 12" WC (498 to 2989 Pa), 2 SPST switches * C models Kele calibration available
18
21122 21122-112 60681 A-301-K A-302-K A-308-K A-345-K T-101
RELATED PRODUCTS 6" aluminum impact tube, 1/4" OD connection 6" aluminum impact tube for 1/8" thru 1/4" ID flexible plastic tubing Static or total pressure sensing kit Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 901
1072
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Contact Rating Contact Type Setpoint Range RH-3 RH-3-2 Differential
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH RH-3, RH-3-2
PSI
The Columbus Electric Model RH-3 and RH-3-2 differential pressure switches monitor low-air pressure, vacuum, or differentials of air pressure. These switches are commonly used to prove fan operation, to sense dirty lters, and to monitor pressure drop across coils. Models RH-3 and RH-3-2 are shipped with 1/4" compression ttings, suitable for use with 1/4" OD copper or plastic tubing, and a 12" (30.5 cm) length of 1/4" plastic tubing.
OPERATION When pressure is applied to the high side of the airow switch or vacuum is applied to the low side, an internal diaphragm moves against and operates the lever of the snap-switch. When the airow switch is at rest (not operating), the snapswitch N.C. (normally closed) contact is made to the common terminal. When an increase in differential pressure operates the snap-switch, the N.O. (normally open) contact is made to the common terminal. The action of the diaphragm on the snap-switch is the same whether pressure or vacuum is being sensed. The wiring from the air sensing switch to other devices depends upon the application.
RH-3
PRESSURE
300 VA pilot duty @ 125-277 VAC, 15A resistive @ 125 VAC, 1/4 hp @ 125 VAC, 1/2 hp @ 250 VAC, 2.4A @ 24 VAC, 0.5A @ 24-125 VDC SPDT 0.05" to 12.0" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa) 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa) 0.02" W.C. (5.0 Pa) @ minimum setting, 0.8" W.C. (199 Pa) @ maximum setting
Overpressure 0.5 psig (3.5 kPa) Operating Temperature -40 to 180F (-40 to 82C) Mounting Any vertical plane Process Connection 1/4" compression, suitable for use with 1/4" OD copper or plastic tubing Approvals UL listed, le #MH10196, CSA 2.0 lb (0.91 kg) Weight Warranty 1 year
18
INSTALLATION
Mounting The RH-3 and RH-3-2 may be used to sense pressure, vacuum, or differentials of pressure and vacuum. Using sheet metal screws, mount the control vertically on the duct or equipment. Avoid areas of high vibration. Connect the 1/4" tubing to the air ow switch using 1/4" compression ttings. Insert the other end of the tubing into area to be sensed. See ordering information for static pressure tips and duct impact (total pressure) tubes for use with RH-3 and RH-3-2 switches. Adjustment The adjusting screw located in the junction box may be used to change the operating point. The operating range is 0.05" to 12.0" W.C. for the RH-3, and 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. for the RH-3-2. The differential is 0.02" rising to 0.8" at the highest setting. The switch will operate at 0.05" and reset before 0.03" on the low end. It will operate at 12.0" and reset before 11.2" on the high end. Rotate the adjusting screw clockwise to increase setting.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1073
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH RH-3, RH-3-2
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.88 (9.85) 1.94 (4.93)
NEW!
0.44 (1.11)
1.31 (3.33)
1.38 (3.50)
6/32" Terminals with screws and cup washers
2.81 (7.14)
3/16" diameter Two mounting holes
3.38 (8.58)
NO NC
3.75 (9.53) Junction box and cover Contact designations Scale plate
6.13 (15.7)
Two #6 sheet metal, slotted pan head (mounting screws provided)
0.671 (1.70)
Adjustment screw (turn clockwise to increase setpoint) High pressure inlet 1.63 (4.10) 3.25 (8.25) Low pressure inlet (Connector with nut and ferrule, will accept 1/4" OD tubing of copper, aluminum, or plastic - both 0.71 inlets, typical) (1.80)
0.78 (1.98)
PRESSURE
18
MODEL RH-3 RH-3-C RH-3-2 RH-3-2-C
DESCRIPTION 0.05" to 12.0" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa) 0.05" to 12.0" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa) custom calibration 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. (12.5 to 2989 Pa) 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa) custom calibration
21122 21122-112 60681 A-301-K A-302-K A-345-K T-101
RELATED PRODUCTS 6" aluminum impact tube, 1/4" OD connection 6" aluminum impact tube for 1/8" thru 1/4" ID flexible plastic tubing Static or total pressure sensing kit Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 901
1074
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Five pressure ranges in one unit Field adjustable setpoint and setpoint range Actuated by pressure or vacuum SPDT switch
PRESSURE
PSI
ADJUSTABLE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH KIT NS2-0000-02
The economical Cleveland Controls Model NS2 Adjustable Differential Pressure Switch Kit is designed for positive, negative, or differential pressure monitoring with actuation on pressure rise or fall. The set point range can be eld congured between 0.10"w.c. to 10.0"w.c. using the appropriate spring included in the kit. The kit includes a switch with quick-connect terminals, 5 different springs to change the set point range, orice plugs to restrict air ow, mounting brackets, a hex wrench, and instructions.
NS2-0000-02
DIMENSIONS AND WIRING

3.45 (88) 3.15 (80) 3.06 (78) 1.67 (42) 1.27 (32) 1.15 (29)
US
PRESSURE
3.08 (78)
NS2-0001-00 DATE CODE
Common terminal Normally closed terminal Normally open terminal Positive pressure connector 0.59 (15) Negative pressure connector 0.4 (10)
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating Contact Type Setpoint Spring Range Black Neutral Yellow Red Blue Overpressure Life Expectancy 1/10 hp @ 120-277 VAC; 28 VA pilot duty @ 24 VAC; 125 VA pilot duty @ 120 VAC SPDT 0.10" to 0.30" W.C. (25 to 75 Pa) 0.30" to 0.90" W.C. (75 to 224 Pa) 0.90" to 2.50" W.C. (224 to 623 Pa) 2.5" to 5.0" W.C. (623 to 1245 Pa) 5.0" to 10.0" W.C. (1245 to 2490 Pa) 14" W.C. (3486 Pa) 100,000 cycles minimum Operating Temperature -40 to 190F (-40 to 88C) Enclosure Glass-lled polycarbonate Diaphragm Material Post-cured silicone Process Connection 1/4" OD accepts 3/16" ID exible tubing Wiring Terminations Male quick connect terminals 1/4" x 0.032 Approvals CE, CSA, UL Recognized File MH6213 Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Warranty 1 year
18
MODEL NS2-0000-02 DESCRIPTION Adjustable differential pressure switch kit
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1075
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES RFS-4001
DESCRIPTION
The Cleveland Controls Models RFS-4001-025 and RFS4001-031 Differential Pressure Switches are generalpurpose, airow-proving switches designed for HVAC and building automation applications. They may be used to sense positive, negative, or differential air pressure. The plated housing contains a diaphragm, calibration spring and snap-acting switch. The Model RFS-4001-025 pressure connections located on each side of the diaphragm, accept copper or exible 1/4" OD tubing. The Model RFS- 4001-031 has tri-barb connectors that accept 1/8", 1/4", and 5/16" ID exible tubing. An enclosure cover guards against accidental contact with the live-switch terminal screws and the setpointadjusting screw. The enclosure will accept a 1/2" conduit connection.
NEW!
RFS-4001-031
FEATURES
Two-year warranty Adjustable setpoint Knockout for 1/2" conduit Enclosed terminals Compression or barb ttings
DIMENSIONS
4.625 (117)
SPECIFICATIONS
300 VA pilot duty @ 115-277 VAC, 15A non-inductive to 277 VAC Contact Type SPDT Setpoint Range 0.15" to 5.0" W.C. (37.3 to 1245 Pa) Differential Progressive, increasing from 0.05" W.C. at minimum setpoint to 0.3" W.C. at maximum setpoint Overpressure 0.5 psig (3.5 kPa) Life Expectancy 100,000 cycles minimum Operating Temperature -40 to 180F (-40 to 82C) Mounting Any vertical plane, avoid upward pressure connections Process Connection RFS-4001-025 1/4" compression, suitable for use with 1/4" copper or plastic tubing RFS-4001-031 Tri-barb connectors for 1/8", 1/4" and 5/16" ID tubing Wiring Terminations Screw terminals with cup washers Approvals UL File #MH6213, CSA Weight 0.9 lb (0.4 kg) Warranty 2 years Contact Rating
PRESSURE
1.00 (25) 4.098 (104)
3.75 (95) 4.125 (105)
1.365 (35) 2.959 (75) LOW 0.798 (20) HIGH 0.173 (4) 1.421 (36)
18
MODEL RFS-4001-025 RFS-4001-025-C RFS-4001-031 RFS-4001-031-C RFS-4001-092 A-301-K A-302-K A-308-K A-345-K T-101 DESCRIPTION Differential pressure switch 0.15" to 5.0" W.C., 1/4" compression ttings Differential pressure switch 0.15" to 5.0" W.C., 1/4" compression ttings, custom calibrated Differential pressure switch 0.15" to 5.0" W.C., tri-barb ttings Differential pressure switch 0.15" to 5.0" W.C., tri-barb ttings, custom calibrated Differential pressure switch RELATED PRODUCTS Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 901
1076
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Adjustable set point Actuated by a pressure or vacuum air ow Quick connect terminals 5A, SPDT switch
PRESSURE
PSI
ADJUSTABLE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH RSS SERIES
The economical Cleveland Controls RSS Series Adjustable Differential Pressure Switches are designed for positive, negative, or differential pressure monitoring with actuation on pressure rise or fall. The unit is constructed with a high temperature thermoplastic housing, an internal EPDM diaphragm, and an externally mounted snap action switch. Male quick connect terminals allows easy installation. The eld adjustability makes these switches ideal for light industrial and commercial HVAC applications.
RSS-495-011
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating Contact Type Setpoint Range RFS-495-011 RFS-495-013 Overpressure Life Expectancy 5A resistive, 120-277 VAC, 60 Hz; 1A pilot duty (120 VA) @ 120 VAC SPDT 0.20" to 1.0" W.C. (49 to 249 Pa) 1.0" to 4.0" W.C. (249 to 996 Pa) 1 psi (0.06 bar) 100,000 cycles minimum @ 1 psi maximum each cycle and maximum rated load Operating Temperature -40 to 190F (-40 to 88C) Diaphragm Material EPDM Thermoplastic Enclosure Process Connection Barbed ttings for 1/4" ID or 3/8" ID exible tubing UL recognized, le #MH6213, Approvals CSA, CE 0.25 lbs (0.11 kg) Weight Warranty 1 year
PRESSURE
DIMENSIONS
NC COM NO
4.62 (11.7) 5.25 (13.3)
2.13 (5.4) 0.25 (0.6) Male disconnects
.070 (0.2)
4.0 (10.2)
18
3.75 (9.5) 4.12 (10.5) High pressure inlet Low pressure inlet 0.5 (1.3) 1.22 (3.1)
MODEL RSS-495-011 RSS-498-013 A-301-K A-302-K A-308-K A-345-K T-101 DESCRIPTION Adjustable differential pressure switch, 0.20" to 1.0" W.C. (49 to 249 Pa) Adjustable differential pressure switch, 1.0" to 4.0" W.C. (249 to 996 Pa) RELATED PRODUCTS Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Duct static pressure fitting, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 901
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1077
PRESSURE
PSI
DUAL SETPOINT DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH DDP-109
DESCRIPTION
The Cleveland Controls Model DDP-109 Dual Setpoint Differential Pressure Switch provides dual switch action for HVAC and energy management applications. Two separately operated, independently adjustable SPDT snap-acting switches are mounted on a common foot bracket. Since the switches are set independently, an adjustable "deadband" can be established for control circuits requiring both high and low actuation points. The unit can measure differential pressures up to 2" W.C.
NEW!
DDP-109
FEATURES
Dual adjustable setpoints Independent switch operation Actuated by a pressure or vacuum air ow 15A SPDT switches
SPECIFICATIONS
15A resistive, 277 VAC, 60 Hz; 300 VA pilot duty @ 115-277 VAC, 60 Hz Contact Type Dual SPDT Setpoint Range 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. (12.5 to 498Pa) Differential Progressive, 0.02" W.C. (5.0 Pa) @ minimum setpoint to 0.8" W.C. (199 Pa) @ maximum setpoint Overpressure 0.5 psi (0.03 bar) Life Expectancy 100,000 cycles minimum @ 1 psi maximum each cycle and maximum rated load Operating Temperature -40 to 176F (-40 to 82C) Enclosure Zinc-coated steel Diaphragm Material Silicone Mounting Diaphragm in vertical plane Process Connection Compression ttings for 1/4" OD rigid or semi-rigid tubing Wiring Terminations Screw terminals with cup washers Approvals CSA, UL Recognized File MH6213 1.5 lb (0.68 kg) Weight Warranty 1 year Contact Rating
WIRING
To prove excessive air flow or pressure:
NO C NC NO C NC
Alarm Normal
PRESSURE
To prove insufficient air flow or pressure:
Normal Alarm
18
MODEL DDP-109 DESCRIPTION Dual setpoint differential pressure switch, 0.05" to 2.0" W.C. (12.5 to 498 Pa)
A-301-K A-302-K A-345-K T-101
RELATED PRODUCTS Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 901
1078
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Fixed set point at 0.05 W.C. (12.5 Pa) Prove excessive or insufcient pressure Quick connect terminals 15A, SPDT switch
PRESSURE
FIXED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH DFS-221
PSI
The Cleveland Controls Model DFS-221 Fixed Differential Pressure Switch is an airow proving switch designed for duct heater, oven, and other HVAC and energy management applications. The unit senses positive, negative, or differential pressure with SPDT switch actuation on pressure rise at 0.05 WC, 0.02 WC. The model DFS-221 is equipped with two barbed sample line connections for use with ID exible tubing. Electrical connections are made via male quick connect terminals for easy installation.
FM
APPROVED
US
DFS-221
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating Contact Type Setpoints Differential Overpressure Life Expectancy 15A resistive to 277 VAC, 60 Hz 300 VA pilot duty @ 115-270 VAC 15A resistive to 277 VAC, 60 Hz 300 VA pilot duty @ 115-270 VAC SPDT Fixed, 0.05" W.C. (12.5 Pa), 0.02" W.C. 0.02" W.C., 0.01" W.C. 0.5 psi (3.5 kPa bar) 100,000 cycles minimum @ 0.5 psi maximum each cycle and maximum rated load Operating Temperature -40 to 180F (-40 to 82C) Mounting Diaphram in vertical plane to obtain operating set point Process Connection Barbed ttings for 1/4" ID exible tubing Wiring Terminations Male quick connect terminals Approvals CE, CSA, FM, UL Recognized File MH6213 Weight 1.2 lbs (0.5 kg) Warranty 2 years
PRESSURE
DIMENSIONS
3.25 (8.2) 1.63 (4.1) 2.94 (7.4) 1.38 (3.5)
COM
WIRING
0.44 (1.1)
To prove excessive air flow or pressure:
2.84 (7.1)
NO C NC
Alarm Normal
N.O.
0.19 (5) dia hole (2 places)
18
N.C.
6.12 (15.6)
To prove insufficient air flow or pressure:
NO
High pressure inlet Low pressure inlet
Normal Alarm
C NC
1.94 (4.9) 3.88 (9.8) 4.38 (11.1)
0.78 (1.9)
0.71 (1.8)
MODEL DFS-221 DESCRIPTION Fixed differential pressure switch, 0.05" W.C. (12.5 Pa)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1079
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES 1910 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer 1910 Series Differential Pressure Switches are designed to monitor the differential pressure of air in HVAC applications. These automatic reset switches are available in ranges from 0.07" to 20" W.C. (17.4 to 4982.0 Pa) and have SPDT screw type electrical connections. The optional Model A-602 air lter kit includes two static pressure tips, aluminum tubing, and ttings, and it allows the 1910 Series to monitor lter pressure drop.
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Type Contact Operating Temperature Process Connection Dimensions Weight Approvals SPDT 15A @ 120-240 VAC -30 to 180F (-34 to 82C) 1/8" FNPT 3-1/2" diameter x 2-11/32" depth (8.9 x 3.4 cm) 1.28 lb (0.58 kg) UL File #E38121
NEW!
1910-5
C
FM
US
APPROVED
MODEL 1910-0 1910-00 1910-1 1910-10 1910-5 1910-20 A-301-K A-302-K A-345-K A-602 T-101 DESCRIPTION Pressure Switch 0.15 to 0.50 "WC Pressure Switch 0.07 to 0.015 "WC Pressure Switch 0.4 to 1.6 "WC Pressure Switch 3.0 to 11.0 "WC Pressure Switch 1.4 to 5.5 "WC Low differential pressure switch *NOTE: Add a "-C" at the end of the model number to request special calibration
PRESSURE
RELATED PRODUCTS Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) Mounting kit for air filter applications. Includes two pressure tips, two 5-foot lengths of aluminum tubing and two adapters. 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 901
MANUAL RESET PRESSURE SWITCH 1900-5-MR

DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer Model 1900-5-MR Manual Reset Pressure Switch is designed to monitor duct static and shut down the blower when excess pressure occurs. The switch must be manually reset before the system can start again. Switch contacts are SPDT with soldertype connections. The Model 1900-5-MR measures static pressure only, not differential pressure. Order the A-399 duct pressure kit separately.
18
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Type Operating Temperature Process Connection Dimensions Weight SPDT -30 to 180F (-39 to 82C) 1.8" FNPT 3-1/2" dia x 2-11/32" depth (8.9 x 6.4 cm) 1.3 lb (0.58 kg)
1900-5-MR
MODEL 1900-5-MR 1900-5-MR-C 1900-1-MR 1900-10-MR A-399 DESCRIPTION Manual reset pressure switch, 1.5-5.5" W.C. Manual reset pressure switch, 1.5-5.5" W.C. with custom calibration *NOTE: Add a "-C" at the end of the model Manual reset pressure switch, 0.4-1.6" WC number to request special calibration Manual reset pressure switch, 3-11" WC RELATED PRODUCTS Duct pressure kit for Series 1910 and 1900-5-MR, includes mounting ange, tubing, and 1/8" FNPT tting.
1080
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Easy-to-read setpoint scale Versatile mounting options Durable construction Setpoint switching repeatability One-year warranty
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH P32 SERIES
PSI
The Johnson Controls P32 Series Differential Pressure Switch is used to detect differential pressure or low positive gauge pressure by using only the high pressure connection and leaving the low pressure connector open. It can also detect vacuum by using only the low pressure connection and leaving the high pressure connector open to ambient pressure.
The P32 Series is factory set at the bottom of its operating range with the diaphragm in a vertical plane. The setting will change if mounted in other positions. The P32AF has a close differential, and the P32AC has a standard differential. P32 Switch with L Bracket
APPLICATION
Air proving with electric duct heaters, humidiers, and more Maximum air ow controller for variable volume systems Reheat duct-powered systems Clogged lter detection Detection of icing of air conditioning coils and initiation of defrost cycle
SPECIFICATIONS
Overpressure 1 psig (6.9 kPa) Indicator Yes, visual scale Electrical Ratings P32AF Close differential, 1/4 hp P32AC Standard differential, 1/2 hp Operating Temperature -40F (-40C) to 165F (75C) Mounting P32AX-1 L Bracket P32AX-2 U Bracket Process Connection Approvals Weight Warranty High pressure: metal 1/8" FNPT inside x 1/2" NPSM outside; low pressure: molded 1/8" FNPT UL Listed, le MH10588 1.0 lb (0.45 kg); 1.1 lb (0.5 kg) with ttings 1 year
PRESSURE
P32 Series
Y
Motor Ratings VAC AC full load amp AC locked rotor amp
120 5.8 34.8
208 3.35 20.1
240 2.9 17.4
Motor Ratings VAC AC full load amp AC locked rotor amp
Non-inductive or resistive load 10A, 24-277 VAC Pilot duty - 125 VA, 24 VAC; 360 VA, 120-277 VAC
Non-inductive or Resistive Load 10A, 24-277 VAC Pilot duty - 125 VA, 24 VAC; 360 VA, 120-277 VAC
120 9.8 58.8
208 5.65 33.9
240 4.9 29.4
R Action on increase of pressure
18
Model P32AC-1 P32AC-2* P32AF-1 P32AF-2*
Contact Action SPDT SPDT SPDT SPDT
Range "W.C. (Pa) 0.15-12 (37.4-2990) 0.05-5 (12.5-1246) 0.05-5 (12.5-1246) 0.05-5 (12.5-1246)
Differential "W.C. (Pa) Minimum Setpoint Maximum Setpoint 0.07 (17.4) 0.6 (149.5) 0.04 (10.0) 0.20 (49.8) 0.025 (6.2) 0.11 (27.4) 0.025 (6.2) 0.11 (27.4)
Setpoint Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable
Scale Plate Yes Yes Yes Yes
Bracket L U L U
*Supplied with 1/4" compression fitting, 4" extension tube, two mounting screws, gasket, angle barb fitting installed
Specify model number as shown in specications above.
RELATED PRODUCTS
FTG-18A-600R
Sensing tube kit
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1081
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH A2G-40 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Wika A2G-40 Series differential pressure switch is useful for DP and clogged lter monitor across lter banks; overpressure detection in rooms; and air ow proving for direct re AHU's or duct heaters. The clearly visible adjustment knob makes it easy to set the switchpoint without tools. This SPDT switch can be set up as a N.O. or N.C. contact. It features a robust housing in a compact design.
NEW!
A2G-40
FEATURES
Adjustment knob enables easy switch point setting Switch can be set up as N.O. or N.C. Compact size
WIRING
Micro Switch One (1) SPDT (single pole double throw)
PRESSURE
1-3 opens / 1-2 cloese on reaching the set point (differential pressure)
SPECIFICATIONS
18
Contact Rating Contact Type Differential A2G40-S00-7C-EH A2G40-S00-7C-EI/EJ A2G40-S00-7C-EK A2G40-S00-7C-EL A2G40-S00-7C-EM Operating Pressure Measurement Range A2G40-S00-7C-EH A2G40-S00-7C-EI A2G40-S00-7C-EJ A2G40-S00-7C-EK
2.0 A @ 250 VAC (with inductive load) SPDT 0.04" W.C. (10 Pa) 0.08" W.C. (20 Pa) 0.12" W.C. (30 Pa) 0.30" W.C. (80 Pa) 0.70" W.C. (180 Pa) 200" W.C. (49.8 kPa) .08 to .80" W.C. (20 to 200 Pa) 0.12 to 1.2" W.C. (30 to 300 Pa) 0.12 to 2.0" W.C. (30 to 500 Pa) 0.16 to 2.4" W.C. (40 to 600 Pa)
A2G40-S00-7C-EL 0.40 to 6.0" W.C. (100 to 1500 Pa) A2G40-S00-7C-EM 2.0 to 18.0" W.C. (500 to 4500 Pa) Media Compatibility air and other non-combustible gases Operating Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Mounting Enclosure positioned in any vertical plane Enclosure NEMA 3 Process Connection Hose barb nozzles (ABS) for 3/16" and 1/4" hose ID Wiring Terminations Screw terminals, PG-gland M16 Approvals CE, IP54 NEMA 3 Weight 0.3 lb (0.15 kg) Warranty 2 years
1082
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
MODEL A2G40-S00-7C-EH A2G40-S00-7C-EI A2G40-S00-7C-EJ A2G40-S00-7C-EK A2G40-S00-7C-EL A2G40-S00-7C-EM T-101 A-308-K A-302-K A-301-K A-345-K
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH A2G-40 SERIES
PSI
PRESSURE
DESCRIPTION Differential pressure switch, .08 to .8 in WC Differential pressure switch, 0.12 to 1.2 in WC Differential pressure switch, 0.12 to 2.0 in WC Differential pressure switch, 0.16 to 2.4 in WC Differential pressure switch, 0.40 to 6.0 in WC Differential pressure switch, 2.0 to 18.0 in WC
18
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901 Duct static pressure tting, 1/4" barb 1113 Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb 1113 Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression 1113 Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1113
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1083
PRESSURE
PSI
PRESSURE SWITCH P10 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Johnson Controls P10 Series Pressure Switches use changes in control air pressure to open or close an electrical circuit. The common terminal is red. The red-to-yellow terminals close an electrical circuit on a rise in pressure; the red-to-blue terminals close a circuit on a drop in pressure.
APPLICATION
Typical applications include pressure-electric switches in pneumatic systems, control of pumps or small air compressors, and pressure-electric interlock of uid ow systems.
NEW!
P10BC-7
FEATURES
Easily accessible screw terminals for eld wiring Snap-acting contacts in a dust-tight enclosure Visible calibration scale Field adjustment possible with cover on or removed Gas and oil resistant nylon-reinforced diaphragm One-year warranty Approvals UL File E6688 and CS LR948
WIRING
B
PRESSURE
Action on increase of pressure
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical ratings P10BC, P10FC Motor ratings VAC 120 208 240 277 16.0 9.2 8.0 7.0 AC full load amp 96.0 55.2 48.0 42.0 AC locked rotor amp Non-inductive amp 16.0 9.2 8.0 7.2 Pilot duty - 125 VA @ 24-277 VAC Maximum Allowable Pressure: 150 psig (1034 kPa) Model Number Contact of action stages 1 P10BC-7 SPDT P10FC-4 P10BG-3 2 1 2-SPDT SPDT Range psig (kPa) 3-20 (21-138) 2-20 (15-138) P10BG Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 240 AC full load amp 6.0 3.4 3.0 AC locked rotor amp 36.0 20.4 18.0 Non-inductive amp 6.0 3.4 3.0 Pilot duty - 125 VA @ 24-277 VAC
277 __ __ 2.6
18
Factory setting psig Switch Diff (kPa) psig (kPa) 12 (83) (R-Y cut-in) 2 (14) (R-Y cut-out) (R-Y cut-in) Low High Low stage High stage stage stage 8 (55) 12 (82) 2 (14) 2 (14) 12 (83) 0.2 (1.4) (R-Y cut-in)
Pressure Weight connector lb NPT* (kg) 1/8" 1.0 (0.45) 1/8" 1/8" 1.5 (0.68) 1.0 (0.45)
*Includes 1/4" barb fitting installed
ORDERING INFORMATION Specify model number as shown in specications above.
1084
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SPDT switch with screw terminals Gasketed zinc-plated steel cover Strong, corrosion-resistant polyester enclosure External, multiturn adjusting screw for excellent resolution 7/8" hole for 1/2" NPT conduit connection Corrosion-resistant brass port Front accessible holes for surface mounting NEMA 4 enclosure
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH 24-013, 24-014
PSI
The Delta-Pro Models 24-013 and 24-014 NEMA 4 Differential Pressure Switches offer a unique blend of small size, excellent performance, environmental protection, and attractive price. They can be used with liquids or gases.
The precision snap-acting switch and sensitive opposing diaphragms combine to provide a narrow deadband and repeatability of approximately 1% of span. Mechanical contact life is 10 million cycles, and actual switch life can be very long with typical pilot duty loads. The Delta-Pro NEMA 4 enclosure is small, yet it can still accommodate a 1/2" NPT conduit connection and terminal block wiring. The Delta-Pro is not only lightweight but also strong and durable. The multiturn adjustment screw is externally accessible for convenience and excellent resolution. The Delta-Pro's force-balance design provides excellent vibration resistance.
24-013
APPLICATION
Models 24-013 and 24-014 are used typically to sense differential pressure across devices such as oil or water lters, pumps, heat exchangers, chillers, coils, etc. They normally provide an alarm or shutdown function in applications where there is insufcient ow in a system or when excessive pressure differential indicates a problem. They may also be used to indicate pump status.
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Contact Rating Contact Type Adjustments Repeatability Overpressure Operating Pressure Life Expectancy Shock March 2014 5A resistive and inductive @ 125 VAC and 250 VAC, 1/4 hp 5A resistive and 3A inductive @ 30 VDC 0.5A resistive and 0.25A inductive @ 125 VDC gold clad silver contacts for minimum loads of 5 mA @ 6 VDC, 2 mA @ 12 VDC, and 1 mA @ 24 VDC SPDT Multiturn screw, accessible from outside enclosure Typically 1% of span 150 psid (1034.3 kPa) with surges up to 160F (71C) air temp, without loss of adjustability 0-150 psig (0-1034.3 kPa) up to 160F (71C) air temp 10 million cycles (actual life depends on load and cycle frequency) 15G, 10 ms duration Vibration Resistance MIL STD 810C, 2.5G, 5-500 CPS Operating Temperature 30 to 160F (-1 to 71C) Wetted Parts Polyurethane diaphragm, ethylene propylene, polysulphone, brass Media Temperature Range 200F (93C) @ 100 psig (689.5 kPa) working pressure Storage Temperature -20 to 180F (-29 to 82C) Enclosure Rating Reinforced nylon body, zinc-plated steel cover with neoprene gasket, NEMA 4 Mounting Surface mount with two screws through clearance holes or mount by ports Process Connection 1/4" FNPT brass Wiring Terminations 7/8" hole for 1/2" conduit connector (not provided), three screw terminals 16 AWG max wire size Approvals UL File E42272, CSA, CE Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg) Warranty 1 year
18
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1085
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH 24-013, 24-014
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.375 (6.03)
NEW!
Factory adjustment only, do not change 2.65 (6.75) 0.91 (2.31) 1.84 (4.68) 0.875 dia 3.5 (8.89) Clear for #6 screw 2.37 (6.03) 2.0 (5.08) 3.13 (7.94)
Setting adjustment
NC NO COM
Top View
INSTALLATION
Mounting Mount unit in any position. Locate where shock and vibration are minimal and ambient temperature is below 160F (71C). Surface mounting Insert two #6 screws through holes on 2" (5.08 cm) centers (recommended mounting for maximum vibration resistance). CAUTION: Never tighten by turning the switch body into the tting. Wiring Back out the screw terminal just enough to put stripped wire under this terminal block clamp. Maximum wire size is 16 AWG. Setpoint adjustment Use a screwdriver to turn the external adjusting screw. Turn in (clockwise) to increase differential pressure setting. For best setting accuracy, set the switch using the actual working pressures encountered in the application. The switch will make on a differential pressure rise to setpoint and break on a fall below setpoint minus the deadband (subtractive deadband).
PRESSURE
Suspended unit mounting Mount unit from its two ports. Always hold a wrench on the pressure port when making pressure connection. Making pressure connection Connect the high side pressure to the port labeled high. Use a wrench on the pressure port and hold the unit steady. Then, thread a 1/4 NPTM tting into the port.
PERFORMANCE CHART
18
MODEL*
24-013 24-014
PORT SWITCH DEADBAND psig (kPa) Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum 1.0 (6.895 kPa) 9.0 (62.1 kPa) 2.0 (13.8 kPa) 10.0 (69.0 kPa) 1/4 FNPT 5A 0.75 (5.2) 4.0 (27.6 kPa) 43.5 (299.9 kPa) 5.5 (37.9 kPa) 45.0 (310.3 kPa) Brass 5A 1.0 (6.9)
ADJUSTABLE SETTING RANGE psid (kPa) On fall On rise
* Add the suffix -C to have the unit precalibrated. Please specify the setpoint.
MODEL 24-013 24-013-C 24-014 24-014-C 24-020 DESCRIPTION Differential pressure switch 1-10 psi SPDT Differential pressure switch 1-10 psi SPDT, custom calibrated Differential pressure switch 4-45 psi SPDT Differential pressure switch 4-45 psi SPDT, custom calibrated Differential pressure switch 1-10 psi SPDT
1086
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH P74 SERIES
PSI
The Johnson Controls Model P74 Differential Pressure Switch measures the difference in pressure exerted upon its two sensing elements and operates an SPDT switch at the differential pressure setpoint. The setpoint may be adjusted without removing the cover and is visible on a calibrated scale.
Brass bellows Completely enclosed contact mechanism Externally adjustable with visual setpoint scale Universal mounting bracket supplied Heavy-duty elements withstand high overrun pressure For air, oil, or other liquids One-year warranty P74FA-1C
APPLICATIONS These differential pressure controls are used as operating controls and/or alarm controls. They are available for applications sensing air, oil, or liquid. Typical applications include proof-of-ow across a chiller or water-cooled condenser, proof-of-ow in a heating system, and lube oil pressure sensing on refrigeration compressors. In the water chiller application, the control provides low temperature protection. On proof-of-ow applications, the control measures pressure drop across two different points in either a closed water circulating system or a city water supply system. On a proof-of-ow application in a water chiller system, the control activates an alarm or signal light to warn the operator if a loss of water ow occurs. SPECIFICATIONS
Model* P74FA-1 P74FA-5 P74JA-2 P74EA-8 Pressure differential range psid (kPa) FAIC 8-60 (55-414) 2-30 (14-207) Connector size 1/4" male flare 1/4" FNPT 1/4" male flare 36" capillary with 1/4" flare nut Switch action SPDT snap-acting SPDT snap-acting SPDT floating SPDT snap-acting Electrical rating 6A 120V, 50/60 Hz 6A 120V, 50/60 Hz 1A 24V, 50/60 Hz 16A 120V, 50/60 Hz Switch differential psig (kPa) Maximum overrun pressure psig (kPa)
PRESSURE
1.5 (10) 3.5 (24)
18
180 (1241)
Specify model number as shown in specications above.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1087
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES J21K SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The United Electric J21K Series Differential Pressure Switches utilize opposing metal bellows to detect pressure differences between two pressure sources. When the pressure at the high port exceeds the pressure at the low port by a pre-determined amount (setpoint), the mechanism operates a single snap-action switch. The control setpoint can be adjusted by turning the internal adjustment hex screw.
NEW!
J21K
FEATURES
Adjustable setpoint Sealed metal bellows 15A switch rating Epoxy coated enclosure
SPECIFICATIONS
Setpoint Range 0 to 6 psi (0 to 41 kPa) J21K-140 J21K-150 0 to 40 psi (0 to 276 kPa) 0 to 25 psi (0 to 172 kPa) J21K-232 J21K-254 0 to 90 psi (0 to 621 kPa) J21K-357 0 to 70 psi (0 to 483 kPa) Operating Pressure J21K-140 30" Hg vac to 30 psi (1241 kPa) 30" Hg vac to 180 psi (1241 kPa) J21K-150 J21K-232 30" Hg vac to 110 psi (759 kPa) J21K-254 30" Hg vac to 120 psi (828 kPa) J21K-357 30" Hg vac to 350 psi (2413 kPa) Contact Rating 15A resistive, 125/250/480 VAC SPDT Contact Type Deadband J21K-140 0.1 to 0.4 psi (0.7 to 3 kPa) J21K-150 0.3 to 0.7 psi (2 to 5 kPa) J21K-232 0.6 to 1 psi (4 to 7 kPa) 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) J21K-254 J21K-357 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) Operating Temperature -40 to 160F (-40 to 71C) Brass or phosphor bronze bellows Wetted Parts Process Connection 1/4 NPTF Enclosure Type 4X (with water tight conduit tting) Approvals UL listed, le #E42272, CE Weight 2 lb (0.9 kg) Warranty 1 year
DIMENSIONS
4.22 (10.7) 1.73 (4.4)
1.06 (1.7)
PRESSURE
.875 (1.2) diameter hole 1.25 (3.2)
0.33 (0.8) 0.56 (1.4) 1.88 (4.8) A
Clearance for 1/4 screw
2.66 (6.8)
18
"A" Dimension J21K-140/150 8.0" (20.5 cm) J21K-232/254 6.5" (16.6cm) K21K-357 6.875" (17.46 cm)
MODEL J21K-140 J21K-150 J21K-232 J21K-254 J21K-357 DESCRIPTION Differential pressure switch, brass bellows, 0 to 6 psi (0 to 41 kPa) Differential pressure switch, brass bellows, 0 to 40 psi (0 to 276 kPa) Differential pressure switch, bronze bellows, 0 to 25 psi (0 to 172 kPa) Differential pressure switch, bronze bellows, 0 to 90 psi (0 to 621 kPa) Differential pressure switch, stainless steel bellows, 0 to 70 psi (0 to 483 kPa)
1088
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Two, easy to use dual setup dials Solid state electronics Two PNP switching outputs (1-NO, 1-NC) No software needed Local LEDs for power and switching status
PRESSURE
PRESSURE SWITCH PK SERIES
PSI
The IFM Efector PK Series is a low cost series of pressure switches. Each switch uniquely features a set of two radial dials for set point and reset. The PK Series has one normally open and normally closed contact and a green LED for power indication and a yellow LED for switching status. Each switch carries an IP67 rating for protection for the harshest of environments. The PK Series is available in three models that will switch on pressures ranges up to 5800 psi.
PK Series
DIMENSIONS
WIRING
in (cm)
1.06 (2.7) M12x1
V+ Brown
PRESSURE
Switched output NC
White Black
2.39 (6.1) 2.78 (7.1)
4 Switched output NO
0.30 (0.75)
4: 2:
3 3
VBlue
0.51 (1.3)
1: V+ 2: Switched output NC 4: Switched output NO 3: V- (Blue) common
2.7
1/4'' NPT
18
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Contact Rating Contact Type Accuracy Repeatability Measurement Range PK6224 PK6222 PK6220 Life Expectancy Visual Indication 9.6 to 32 VDC, <25mA 0.5A DC PNP (sourcing) 1 NO, 1 NC, open collector transistor <2.5% of full scale <0.5% of full scale Stainless 316L Wetted Parts Media Temperature Range -13 to 176F (-25 to 80C) Enclosure Rating IP67, PBT (Pocan); PC (Makrolon); FPM (Viton); stainless steel 316L Process Connection " NPT Wiring Terminations 4 pin M12 Electrical connector (order separately) Dimensions 1.06" diameter x 2.78"H (2.7 x 7.06 cm) Approvals UL File E174189, CE Weight 0.2 lb (0.091 kg) Warranty 2 years
0 to 145 psi 0 to 1450 psi 0 to 5800 psi 50 million switching cycles Power Green LED Switching status Yellow LED (Energized = Switched) Shock 50g (11ms) Operating Temperature -13 to 176F (-25 to 80C) March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1089
PRESSURE
PSI
PRESSURE SWITCH PK SERIES
SETTING / CONNECTION DIAGRAM
NEW!
pnp 500mA
9.6 to
32 VDC pnp
Set
500mA
2
Reset
5 6
4
1: L ocking ring: unlock the pressure switch by rotating the locking ring (1) to the unlocked position Set and Reset Rings: Set rings to desrired "Set" and 2: "Reset" positions a) Minimum distance between Set and Reset = 2% of the nal value of the measuring range. b) To obtain the setting accuracy: Set the rings to the minimum value, then set the requested value.
7
3: A green LED inidcates power on and supply voltage normal 4: Process connection NPT; tightening torque 25 Nm 5: Setting marks 6: Yellow LED: Set value reached, OUT1 = ON / OUT2 = OFF 7: internal thread M5
PRESSURE
18
MODEL PK6220 PK6222 PK6224
DESCRIPTION PK Series pressure switch, 0 to 5800 psi, 1 NO 1 NC contacts PK Series pressure switch, 0 to 1450 psi, 1 NO 1 NC contacts PK Series pressure switch, 0 to 145 psi, 1 NO 1 NC contacts
EVC001 EVC002 EVC003 EVC004 EVC005 EVC006 EVC008 EVC009 E30094
RELATED PRODUCTS 6 foot straight connector 15 straight connector 30 straight connector 6 right-angled connector 15 right-angled connector 30 right-angled connector 15 right angled connector with LED indication 30 right angled connector with LED indication PK Series protective cover
1090
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Low cost NEMA 1 enclosure Compact size 15A SPDT switch
PRESSURE
PRESSURE SWITCH J54 SERIES
PSI
The United Electric J54 Series Pressure Switch uses a diaphragm to sense changes in pressure to open or close an electrical circuit. The control setpoint can be varied by turning the internal adjustment hex screw. The switch is available with adjustable ranges from 3 psi (21kPa) to 500 psi (3448 kPa).
J54 Series
SPECIFICATIONS
Setpoint Range J54-24 J54-25 J54-27 J54-28 Deadband J54-24 J54-25 J54-27 J54-28 Contact Rating 3 to 30 psi (21 to 207 kPa) 10 to 100 psi (69 to 690 kPa) 30 to 300 psi (207 to 2070 kPa) 50 to 500 psi (345 to 3448 kPa)
DIMENSIONS
3.5 (8.9) 1.9 (4.9) 7/8 Diameter hole electrical connection 1.7 (4.2) #6-32 Terminal screw 2.8 (7.1) 1.4 (3.6)
PRESSURE
0.4 to 1.5 psi (3 to 10 kPa) 1 to 2.5 psi (7 to 17 kPa) 1.3 to 4 psi (9 to 28 kPa) 1.5 to 5 psi (10 to 34 kPa) 15A non-inductive, 125/250/480 VAC, 60 Hz Contact Type SPDT Overpressure 200 psi (1379 kPa) above setpoint, maximum 600 psi (4137 kPa) Operating Temperature 0 to 160F (-18 to 71C) Wetted Parts Buna-N diaphragm and O-ring, aluminum Process Connection 1/4" MNPT Approvals UL listed E42272, CE Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) Warranty 1 year
NC
NO
Common
0.69 (1.8)
4.38 (11.1) 1.69 (4.3) 1/4 MNPT 0.63 (1.6) 0.88 (2.2) 1.75 (4.4)
Adjustment: remove plastic cover and turn adjusting screw in for higher pressure setting Wrench flats
18
MODEL J54-24 J54-25 J54-27 J54-28 DESCRIPTION Pressure switch, 3 to 30 psi (21 to 207 kPa) Pressure switch, 10 to 100 psi (69 to 690 kPa) Pressure switch, 30 to 300 psi (207 to 2070 kPa) Pressure switch, 50 to 500 psi (345 to 3448 kPa)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1091
PRESSURE
PSI
PRESSURE CONTROLLER PCM SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele PCM Series Pressure Controller is a low air pressure transducer combined with a microprocessor-based proportional or Proportional plus Integral (PI) controller. The compact size and ease of installation and setup makes this unit ideal for standard HVAC applications. Ranges are available from 0-2, 3, or 5 "W.C. The setpoint adjustment knob is clearly marked with the appropriate scale for ease of use. All setup and tuning is easily accomplished by DIP switches and bottle plug jumpers. Mounting is a snap with the convenient mounting tabs or with the DIN rail mounting option. Remote setpoint is also possible with voltage or milliamp signals. The PCM Series can be congured for direct or reverse acting control.
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
FEATURES
Proportional or PI control Easy setup DIP switch/jumper setup and tuning Selectable proportional band Selectable integral reset rate Direct or reverse acting Optional DIN rail mounting Compact size Position insensitive
in (cm)
0.7 (1.78)
PRESSURE
APPLICATION
Controlling duct pressures Isolation rooms VAV systems Inlet guide vanes and VFDs Paint booths Relief damper control Pressure bypass damper control
Mounting Slots for optional DIN Rail Adapter High Pressure Port Low Pressure Port 2.9 (7.37) 1.5 (3.81)
3.4 (8.64) 4.0 (10.16)
4.6 (11.68)
4.8 (12.19) Setpoint Knob Pressure Ports 2.0 (5.08)
18
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Local Setpoint Input Remote Setpoint Input Accuracy 24 VDC +15%, -10% 75 mA max 4-20 mA sourcing 650 max Built-in three-wire potentiometer 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC 2% of range including non-linearity and hysteresis
2.75 (6.99)
Maximum Overpressure 800% of the pressure range Resolution 255 steps Operating Humidity 0% to 90% non-condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 125F (0 to 52C) Process Connection 3/16" dia suitable for 1/4" OD polyethylene tubing Approvals RoHS Weight 1.3 lb (0.61 kg) Warranty 18 months
1092
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
REMOTE FEEDBACK LOCAL SETPOINT SETPOINT
NEW!
WIRING
A1 A2 A3
Local Setpoint 0 1
PRESSURE
PRESSURE CONTROLLER PCM SERIES
PSI
PCM DIP SWITCH SETTINGS 1=ON 0=OFF
Remote Setpoint 1 0
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Direct Acting 1 This Units Reset Per Minute Rate Range Is: Off 0.5 1.0 2.0 0-2" W.C. A4 0 0 1 1 0-3" W.C. A5 0 1 0 1 0-5" W.C. Proportional Throttling Range Settings 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
Reverse Acting 0
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Remote Setpoint Input
4-20 mA or 1-5V Remote Setpoint
Common
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PWM INPUT PWM INPUT REM SPT INPUT LOC SPT POT + LOC SPT INPUT LOC SPT POT FEEDBK INPUT 24 PWR COMMON MA SIG OUTPUT
10% 20% 35% 50% 65% 80% 90% 100%
Optional Remote Setpoint Wiring 4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC
A6 A7 A8
PCM JUMPER POSITIONS

All B switches should be in the off position
Local Setpoint Jumper Positions 1, 8, 11 For Remote Setpoint: Voltage Input Jumper Positions 2, 8, 11 Current Input Jumper Positions 1, 8, 11
+ 24 VDC Power 4-20 mA Sourcing Output Signal to + Controlled Device
SETUP FOR LOCAL SETPOINT OPERATION (FACTORY SETTINGS)

1. Switch A1 off and switch A2 on. 2. Set jumper positions to 1, 8, and 11. 3. Set switch A3 in the on position for direct acting control and in the off position for reverse acting control. 4. Set switches A4 and A5 in the off position. 5. Set switches A6, A7, and A8 in the on position. This will set the proportional band at 100%. 6. Set all B switches to the off position. 7. A ll systems will require a ne-tuning process. Start the tuning process by decreasing the proportional band in increments through switches A6 through A8 until the system becomes unstable. Then, return to the DIP switch settings before the system started to hunt. witches A4 and A5 are used to select the integral reset rate. This 8. S feature corrects the offset that is inherent with proportional-only controllers. If it is determined that the integral reset is needed, increase the rate until this offset is corrected and still maintains stability.
PRESSURE
MODEL PCM DESCRIPTION Pressure setpoint controller PRESSURE RANGE 020 0-2" W.C. 030 0-3" W.C. 050 0-5" W.C. OPTIONS 47 DIN rail mounting (must be factory installed) 020
18
PCM
47
Example: PCM-020-47 Pressure controller for a 0-2" W.C. range with DIN rail mounting
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 901
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1093
PRESSURE
PSI
MULTI-ROOM MONITORING STATION MRMS SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra Multi-Room Monitoring Station (MRMS) is a remote monitoring device to view the status of up to 8-Rooms equipped with other Setra Room Pressure/ Condition Monitors.
FEATURES
Remotely monitor up to eight rooms Auto-discover setra room pressure/condition monitors Built-in audible & visual alarm Display room status and room condition Flush mount design Reduce total installation cost BACnet MS/TP protocol High denition color (TFT) touchscreen display
NEW!
MRMS Series
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 18-32 VAC, 50-60HZ Supply Watts 10 W Signal Output BACnet MS/TP ASC Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (Non-condensing) Operating Temperature 32 to 120F (0 to 50C) Enclosure Rating Fire retardant plastic UL94V-0 Wiring Terminations Removable terminal block Dimensions 5.84"H x 7.45"Wx 2.38"D (14.8 x 18.9 x 6.05 cm) Approvals RoHS Weight 1.1 lb (0.51 kg) Warranty 1 year
WIRING
PRESSURE
Rear view of the MRMS monitor to show wiring and plumbing connections
18
The back of the MRMS has electrical connectors labeled with their function. The mating electrical connectors (supplied) are color coded, keyed, and labeled with the matching function.
MODEL MRMSS MRMSB T-101 RPS RPS-I RPS-W 691-K0A DESCRIPTION Multi-room monitoring station with logo on face plate Multi-room monitoring station without logo on face plate RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901 Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
1094
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Color coded room status indication Flush mount design New intuitive interactive interface Clone conguration capability Selectable analog voltage and milliamp outputs SPDT alarm relay 4.3" TFT LCD display Optional BACnet MSTP SPDT relay output Analog current or voltage outputs
PRESSURE
ROOM CONDITION MONITOR SRCM SERIES
PSI
The Setra SRCM Series is a 2-in-1 solution incorporating the best of the SRPM and adding room condition monitoring capability. A large 4.3" TFT displays room conditions such as room ID, room pressure mode, room status, room pressure and a slide bar that indicates pressure relative to set point. It is also capable of displaying a full screen room condition banner to communicate the current room status and is easily programmed through the SmarTTouch display
The SRCM Series incorporates a ush mount design for the most esthetic installation. The display hinges up for easy access to a USB port that is provided for quick cloning of multiple units. The SRCM Series also has Multi-room dP measurement capabilities with the use of a remote dP transmitter, as well as the ability to display up to eight parameters utilizing BACnet MSTP. In addition to the standard analog and relay outputs, the SRCM Series is available in a BACnet MSTP conguration that is easily setup through the SmarTTouch display. The SRCM Series is perfect for applications in laboratory, pharmaceutical, research, isolation room, and surgical suite applications or anywhere maintaining and monitoring differential pressure.
Optional Remote Annunciator Setras SRAN annunciator allows remote indication of room status at monitoring or nurses station. A GREEN LED indicates a normal room condition, a RED LED and audible alarm signal a breach in room pressure status.
PRESSURE
18
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 18-32 VAC, 50-60 HZ Supply Watts 10W maximum, 3W typical Signal Output Current 4-20 mA Voltage 0 to 5, 0 to 10 VDC Maximum Output Impedance 510 Minimum Output Impedance 5000 Relay Output SPDT: 0.6A @ 120 VAC, 2A @ 30 VDC Accuracy 0.5% 0.25% (optional) 0.5% 0.25% (optional) March 2014 1 psi (15" WC for 0.10" WC or less models) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (Non-condensing) Operating Temperature 32 to 120F (0 to 50C) Flush Mount Mounting Process Connection Barbed Fittings for 1/4" Tubing Wiring Terminations Removable Terminal Block Dimensions 5.84"H x 7.45"W x 0.38"D (14.8 x 18.9 x 1.0 cm) Enclosure Fire retardant plastic UL94-1C Approvals CE (EMC Directive 2004/108 EC) Weight 1.2 lb (0.55 kg) Warranty 1 year Overpressure
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1095
PRESSURE
PSI
ROOM CONDITION MONITOR SRCM SERIES
WIRING
POWER L1 L2 RELAY COM +15 NO RC NC COM +15 Vdc Normally Open Relay COM Normally Closed Earth Ground 24 Vac 24 Vac
NEW!
ANALOG (ANL) OUTPUT COM mA Vdc COM Current Output (4-20 mA) Voltage Output (0-5 Vdc, 0-10 Vdc) INPUTS (wired to door N.O. contact) COM DI COM Digital Input Door COM IN2 +15 COM Analog Input2 (0-5, 0-10Vdc) 15 Vdc Analog Input2 COM IN1 +15 COM Analog Input1 (0-5, 0-10Vdc) 15 Vdc Analog Input1 LOW or reference pressure tubing connects here
COM B (+) A (-) GND

HIGH or room pressure tubing contacts here
REAR VIEW
18
PRESSURE
RPS RPS-I RPS-W T-101 SRAN
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901 Remote annunciator with red and green status LEDs, audible alarm and acknowledge switch
1096
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Signal Output
PRESSURE
ROOM PRESSURE MONITOR SRIM SERIES
PSI
The Setra SRIM Series room pressure monitor is designed for critical care low differential pressure applications that require stringent pressure monitoring and alarming. True differential pressure is measured and displayed. The SRIM Series is a complete system that includes a convenient 2-Line Character LCD display with an intuitive interface for pressure, calibration, and alarm setup. FEATURES Large 2-line LCD display Membrane keypad for ease of conguration & menu navigation Upper/lower alarm limit setting Wall & duct mount versions Mounting thickness <50mm Easy calibration without removing the wiring or plumbing
SRIM Series
18 to 32 VDC @ 5 mA 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mA (loop-powered) Accuracy 1.0% full scale RSS, 0.5% FS RSS, or 0.25% FS RSS Overpressure Up to 10 psi 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Operating Humidity Operating Temperature 21 to 140F (-6 to 60C) Enclosure Rating Fire retardant plastic UL94V-0
Process Connection Wiring Terminations Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty
Barbed ttings for 1/4" ID tubing Screw terminal Wall: 4.44"H x 6.19"W x 1.7"D (11.3 x 15.7 x 4.3 cm) Duct: 2.90"H x 5.67"W x 1.7"D (7.4 x 14.4 x 4.3 cm) CE, RoHS Wall: 0.6 lb (0.28 kg) Duct: 0.56 lb (0.25 kg) 1 year
PRESSURE
WIRING
Wiring for 4-20 mA and VDC outputs
18
MODEL SRIM T-101 RPS RPS-I RPS-W 691-K0A DESCRIPTION Room isolation monitor RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901 Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1097
PRESSURE
PSI
ROOM ISOLATION MONITOR SRMD SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Setra SRMD Model's temperature and humidity display panel features a CE compliant, high visible, large 1 inch 3.5 digit LCD display and an attractive ush mounted faceplate bezel. This display panel is compatible with any temperature, humidity, CO2 sensor that has a 0 to 5 VDC or 0 to 10 VDC analog output. FEATURES Highly visible 1" LCD display Single LCD display or dual LCD display model Available in red, green or blue LCD backlight Available with White or Metallic Bezel Flush mount design Wipe down capable Mount in standard 4-11/16" sq. electrical box Compatible with any analog sensor with 0-5VDC or 0-10VDC output
NEW!
SRMD Series
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 15-32 VDC or 24 VAC Supply Watts 50mA max (per display) Accuracy 1% FS 2 Counts Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Enclosure Rating Fire retardant UL94V-0 Wiring Terminations Screw terminals Dimensions 5.8"H x 5.8"W x 1.25"D (14.7 x 14.7 x 31.4 cm) Approvals CE Weight 0.8 lb (0.37 kg) Warranty 1 year
WIRING
Input Wiring
PRESSURE
MODEL SRMD DESCRIPTION Room monitoring display, dual display DISPLAY BEZEL COLOR DW White bezel DM Metallic bezel DISPLAY COLOR R Red G Green B Blue MEASUREMENT PARAMETER None N Temp (14 to 140F) T Humidity (0.0 to 100.0% RH) H SENSOR OPTION None N SRH Wall mount SRH12PW2CT5N W SRH Duct mount SRH12PD2CT5N D DISPLAY COLOR Red R Green G Blue B MEASUREMENT PARAMETER None N Temp (14 to 140F) T Humidity (0.0 to 100.0% RH) H MODEL SRMD DESCRIPTION Room monitoring display, single display DISPLAY BEZEL COLOR SW White bezel SM Metallic bezel DISPLAY COLOR R Red G Green B Blue MEASUREMENT PARAMETER None N Temp (14 to 140F) T Humidity (0.0 to 100.0% RH) H SENSOR OPTION NNN None WNN SRH Wall mount SRH12PW2CT5N DNN SRH Duct mount SRH12PD2CT5N
18
SRMD
SW - R - T - WNN
Example: SRMD-SW-R-T-WNN SRMD single display, white bezel, red display, temperature, with SRH wall mount sensor.
SRMD
- DW - R - T
- W -
R - T
Example: SRMD-DW-R-T-W-G-H SRMD dual display, white bezel, red display with temperature on top, SRH wall mount sensor green display with humidity on bottom.
T-101 RPS RPS-I RPS-W 691-K0A
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901 Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb 1113 Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 979
1098
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

PRESSURE
ROOM PRESSURE MONITOR SRPM
PSI
The Setra Model SRPM Room Pressure Monitor provides a system for monitoring differential pressures in critical low pressure applications. A backlit LCD provides an intuitive graphic user interface for ease of unit, security and alarm setup. Installation costs and on going calibration costs of ownership are signicantly reduced. A red LED, green LED, backlit LCD, local audible alarm and optional remote annunciator alert personnel of the status of the system. A SPDT relay output is also available for additional status indication. Three analog outputs are available in the same unit to interface with BAS system. The Model SRPM is housed in a tough re resistant plastic housing designed for surface mounting. The attractive case ts into Hospital and Pharamceutical applications. Models are available for 120/240 VAC or 24 VAC. The optional SRAN remote annunciator provides a visual and audible warning of room conditions at a remote location. BACNET VERSIONS
Easy, menu-driven programming Large 2" x 2" LCD touch screen display 0.25% or 0.5% accuracy Visual and audible local alarms w/ alarm silence Built in alarm horn with local alarm silence Optional remote annunciator available Selectable analog voltage and milli-amp outputs SPDT alarm relay Red and green room status LEDs Display resolution of 0.001" Door status monitor Variable alarm delay NIST certication included Optional BACnet MSTP
APPLICATION Typical applications include positive-pressure clean rooms such as pharmaceutical processing areas and negative-pressure isolation rooms such as hospital rooms housing contagious patients. Optional Remote Annunciator Setras SRAN annunciator allows remote indication of room status at monitoring or nurses station. A GREEN LED indicates a normal room condition, a RED LED and audible alarm signal a breach in room pressure status.
PRESSURE
18
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Watts Signal Output Alarm Relay Output Accuracy Display Display Resolution Display Units Protocol March 2014 18-32 VAC 50/60 Hz, 85-265 VAC 50/60 Hz 5W 0-5 VDC (2.5 V @ 0 pressure) 0-10 VDC (5 V @ 0 pressure) 4-20 mA sourcing (12 mA @ 0 pressure) SPDT, 5A @ 30 VDC, 120 VAC 0.25% FS or 0.5% FS LCD, 128x128 RGB backlit 0.001" WC Inches of Water ("WC), Pascals (Pa) BACnet Operating Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing) Operating Temperature 32 to 120F (0 to 50C) Enclosure Rating NEMA 1, Fire retardant plastic Mounting Mounts to a 4" x 4" electrical box Electrical Connection Removable terminal blocks Process Connection Barbed ttings for 1/4" OD tubing Dimensions 8.0"H x 5.4"W x 1.6"D (20.3 x 13.7 x 4.1 cm) Approvals CSA C22.2 No. 1010 Safety, ANSI Weight 1.5 lb (0.69 kg) Warranty 1 year
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1099
PRESSURE
PSI
ROOM PRESSURE MONITOR SRPM
WIRING
NEW!
0.05" WC 0.1" WC 0.25" WC 0.5" WC 1.0" WC 2.5" WC 5.0" WC A1 V1 A2 V2 24 VAC Supply voltage 120 VAC Supply voltage 24 VAC Supply, BACnet 120 VAC Supply, BACnet V 0.25% Accuracy 0.5% Accuracy E
PRESSURE
Model Description SRPM Setra Room Pressure Monitor R05WB 0R1WB R25WB 0R5WB 001WB 2R5WB 005WB
18
Example: SRPM-001WB-A1-E SRPM pressure monitor measuring 1.0" W.C. pressure 24VAC supply voltage at 0.5% accuracy.
4BX11234 RPS RPS-I RPS-W SRAN T-101
RELATED PRODUCTS 4" square steel box 1-1/2" deep, 1/2" and 3/4" KO Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb Remote annunciator with red and green status LEDs, audible alarm and acknowledge switch 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
PAGE 218 1113 1113 1113 901
1100
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES APPLICATION SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGE K2000 SERIES
PSI
The K2000 Series Differential Pressure Gauges can be used in applications for measuring positive, negative, or differential pressure with an accuracy of 2%. The gauge includes a 4" (10.2 cm) easy-to-read dial, housed in a rugged die cast aluminum housing. The K2000 Series has both back and side connections so that it may be either surface- or ush-mounted. Ranges are available from 0" to 0.25" W.C. up to 10" W.C.
2% full-scale accuracy Easy-to-read 4" (10.16 cm) white dial and red-tipped pointer Flush or surface mounting Easily accessible zero adjustment Corrosion-resistant cast aluminum housing Back and side connections
K2000
DIMENSIONS
The K2000 Series is ideal for monitoring lter status, duct static pressure, room pressure, fan or blower pressure, paint booths, dust collectors, and cabinet purging.
in (cm)
0.7 (1.8) 4.1 (10.3)
PRESSURE
1.8 (4.5)
2% of FS through out ranges @ 70F (3% on 0.5" ranges and 4% on 0.25" ranges) Operating Pressure -20" Hg to 15 psig (103 kPa) Media Compatibility Air and compatible gases Operating Temperature 20 to 140F (-7 to 60C) Enclosure Die-cast aluminum case and bezel with acrylic cover Process Connection 1/8" NPT female high and low pressure taps, duplicated-one pair side and one pair back. Included Accessories Two 1/8" FNPT barbed ttings, two plugs for duplicate pressure taps, and three ush mounting tabs with screws Weight 1.1 lb (0.51 kg) Warranty 2 years
3-M4
0.5 (1.3)
1/8 FNPT high pressure port
18
1.3 (3.18) 4.5 (11.4) 0.4 (1.11) 1.7 (4.3)
4.7 (12.0)
1/8 FNPT low pressure port

888-397-5353 USA
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
1101
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGE K2000 SERIES
INSTALLATION
Mounting the K2000 Series Differential Pressure Gauge: Mount the K2000 with the dial face in the vertical plane. Avoid areas of excessive vibration, pulsating pressures, or extreme temperature swings. Long runs of pneumatic tubing will not affect performance but it may affect response times. Once the K2000 is mounted, the pointing needle of the K2000 may need to be adjusted to the zero position. If adjustment is required, slightly turn the external pointer adjustment screw in either direction as required. Using the K2000 to measure differential pressure: The high pressure ports will always be connected to the higher of the two pressures that are being monitored. Conversely the lower pressure ports will always be connected to the lower of the two pressures being measures.
NEW!
MODEL RANGE DUAL SCALE "W.C./Pa 0-0.25/0-60 0-0.5/0-125 0-1.0/0-250 0-2.0/0-500 0-3.0/0-750 0-4.0/0-1000 0-5.0/0-1.5k 0-6.0/0-2.0k 0-8.0/0-2.5k 0-10/0-5.0k MINOR DIV. 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.20 0.20 0.20 K2000-00D* K2000-0D* K2001D K2002D K2003D K2004D K2006D K2008D K2010D K2020D
Monitoring variable positive pressures: This application will measure the positive pressure as it varies with respect to the atmosphere. Port the highest pressure source to a high port connection of the K2000 and leave the low pressure ports open to the atmosphere. Make sure any unused high pressure port is plugged. Monitoring variable negative pressures: This application will measure the negative positive pressure as it varies with respect to the atmosphere. Port the low pressure source to a low port connection of the K2000 and leave the high pressure ports open to the atmosphere. Make sure any unused low pressure port is plugged.
MODEL
RANGE "W.C. 0-0.25 0-0.5 0-1.0 0-2.0 0-3.0 0-4.0 0-5.0 0-6.0 0-8.0 0-10
MINOR DIV. 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.20 0.20 0.20
PRESSURE
K2000-00* K2000-0* K2001 K2002 K2003 K2004 K2005 K2006 K2008 K2010
18
* These ranges are calibrated for vertical scale position
Order by model number from selection chart above. Contact Kele for pressure ranges, metric ranges, and air velocity scales other than those shown. A-301-K A-302-K A-345-K A-368-K A-605 T-101 RELATED PRODUCTS Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) Surface mounting plate Mounting kit for air filter application. Includes aluminum surface mounting brackets with screws, two 5 ft. lengths of 1/4" aluminum tubing, two static pressure tips and two plastic vent valves. 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 901
1102
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Zero adjustment in front Red mark pointer standard Simple mounting and dismounting Installation depth 1.65 in. (A2G-05) Two part construction (A2G-10, A2G-15) Analog output signal (A2G-15)
PRESSURE
PRESSURE GAUGES/TRANSMITTER A2G-05, -10, -15 SERIES
PSI
The Wika A2G-05, -10, -15 Series pressure gauges/ transmitter are the latest innovation in accurate, full-featured pressure gauges and are ideally suited for the measurement of low pressure and differential pressure from 0.2 to 50 WC. The A2G-05 Series is ideal for installations with space limitations. The unit features a slim case (1.65 in.) which works well for recessed installation in the walls of clean rooms or in panel doors that have little room behind the panel to spare. Both the A2G-10 and the A2G-15 Series incorporate a twopiece modular design. A benet of the modular design is a two-part assembly that separates the measuring system from case components. This allows the replacement of only the measuring system, which provides reduced repair costs.
A2G-05-BTF
In addition to the local display, the A2G-15 features an electronic output signal and is available with a 2-wire, 4 to 20 mA or 3-wire 0 to 10 VDC output signal. This A2G-15 gauge is ideal for applications where a local indication and remote monitoring or evaluation is needed. The panel mount version of all three models is extremely easy to install and requires no tools. A2G-15
A2G-10
PRESSURE
WIRING (A2G-15 ONLY)

Output signal 4 ... 20 mA, 2-wire
Output signal 0 ... 10 V, 3-wire
18
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 15 to 35 VDC (A2G-15 only) Signal Output 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC (A2G-15 only) Maximum Output Impedance mA 600 @ 24 VDC Dial Size 4.5" (11.4 cm) Maximum Pressure 80" WC Accuracy 5% of full span ranges< 0.5" WC Range 0 to 0.2" WC to 0 to 50" WC Operating Temperature -22 to 176F (-30 to 80C) Gauge Movement Frictionless magnetic transmission Materials Of Construction Case: Aluminum Pointer: Plastic black Set Pointer: Plastic red Window: Makrolon Mounting Case: Black thermoplastic, high impact resistant March 2014 Diaphragm Material Enclosure Rating Mounting Process Connection Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty Silicone rubber NEMA 3 (NEMA 4 Optional) LM = lower mount (surface mount) (A2G-10, 15) CBM = center back mount (panel mount) UBM = recess mount (recess mount) (A2G-05) 1/8" - 3/16" hose barbed adapters included PG gland M12 (A2G-15 only) CE 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) 2 years
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1103
PRESSURE
PSI
PRESSURE GAUGES/TRANSMITTER A2G-05, -10, -15 SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION A2G WIKA differential pressure gauge series CONFIGURATION WIKA differential pressure gauge, thin case (1 inch case length) 05 10 WIKA differential pressure gauge, standard case 15 WIKA differential pressure gauge, standard case, analog output signal Surface mount (LM), models -10 and -15 only P Panel mount (CBM), threaded flange on rear of case models -05, -10 and -15 BTF
NEW!
PAGE 994 995
Recess mount (UBM), mounting ring on panel/wall surface with gauge bayonet connection (twist in) ANALOG SIGNAL (A2G-15 only) 420 4-20 mA analog signal 010 0-10 VDC analog signal RANGE CODES P25 0 to 0.25" WC P50 0 to 0.05" WC 01 0 to 1.0" WC 02 0 to 2.0" WC 03 0 to 3.0" WC 04 0 to 4.0" WC 05 0 to 5.0" WC 06 0 to 6.0" WC 07 0 to 8.0" WC 08 0 to 10.0" WC CP10 0.1" WC CP20 0.2" WC CP50 0.5" WC C10 1.0" WC C20 2.0" WC C40 4.0" WC C60 6.0" WC
18
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
PRESSURE
1104
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
Copper alloy wetted parts Black ABS or painted steel case Cost effective design Pressure ranges from 30" Hg vacuum to 5000 psig Center back mounting with option for U-clamp (111.12 Series only) Available in 1-1/2" through 4" sizes
PRESSURE
DIAL GAUGE 111.10, 111.12 SERIES
PSI
Designed for long, reliable service under rugged conditions, the Wika 111.10 and 111.12 Series pressure gauges are typically used in applications where the media does not corrode brass. The low cost 111.10 Series has a lower mount connection and features a black ABS or painted steel case standard, and a coiled safety Bourdon tube for 800 psig and higher. The 111.12 Series is specically designed for ush mounting into panels. This center back mount pressure gauge features a black ABS or black-painted steel case, a coiled safety Bourdon tube for 800 psig and higher, and option for U-clamp mounting.
111.10 Series
111.12 Series
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Measurement Range Overpressure Steady Fluctuating Short time Operating Temperature Ambient Media Wetted Parts Casing +3/2/3% of span (ASME B40.100 Grade B) 30" Hg Vacuum to 5000 psi 3/4 of FS value 2/3 of FS value FS value -40F to 140F (-40C to 60C) 140F (60C) maximum Copper Alloy Black Plastic Window Material Dial Size Dial Process Connection 111.10 Series 111.12 Series Approvals Warranty Crystal-clear plastic, snap-t 1.5" (3.8 cm), 2.0" (5.1 cm), 2.5" (6.4 cm), or 4.0" (10.2 cm) (111.10 Series only) White plastic with stop pin (1.5", 2.0", 2.5") White aluminum with stop pin (4") (111.10 Series only) Black or black and red lettering 1/8" or 1/4" NPT lower mount 1/8" or 1/4" NPT center back mount RoHS, UL File SA6444 1 year
PRESSURE
GAUGE MODEL 111.10 Dial Size Connection Pressure Range 30" Hg Vacuum 30" Hg Vacuum -15 psi 30" Hg Vacuum -30 psi 30" Hg Vacuum -60 psi 30" Hg Vacuum -100 psi 30" Hg Vacuum -160 psi 30" Hg Vacuum -200 psi 0-15 psi 0-30 psi 0-60 psi 0-100 psi 0-160 psi 0-200 psi 0-300 psi 0-400 psi 0-600 psi 0-800 psi 0-1000 psi 0-1500 psi 0-2000 psi 0-3000 psi 0-5000 psi March 2014 1-1/2" 1/8" LM 9747214 52234681 N/A N/A 50169025 N/A N/A 9747222 9747230 9747249 9747257 9747265 9747273 4233372 4233398 N/A 50646605 N/A N/A 50989309 N/A N/A 2" 1/4" LM 4252901 50786563 50786571 N/A 50302418 N/A 50657569 4252919 4252927 4252935 4252943 4252951 4252960 4252978 4252986 4252994 N/A 4253001 50786598 50786601 4253019 N/A 2-1/2" 1/4" LM 4253027 4253035 4253043 4253051 4253060 4253078 4253086 4253108 4253116 4253124 4253132 4253141 4253159 4253167 4253175 4253183 4253191 4253205 4253213 4253221 4253230 4253248 4" 1/4" LM 4255900 4255918 4255926 4255934 4255942 4255951 4255969 4255977 4255985 4255993 4256000 4256018 4256026 4256034 4256042 4256051 4256060 4256078 4256086 4256094 4256107 4256115 1-1/2" 1/8" CBM 9690128 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 9690209 9690217 9690225 9690234 9690242 9690250 4233355 4354385 9690285 N/A 9765654 N/A N/A N/A 8986154 111.12 2" 1/8" CBM 9690357 N/A 50741713 N/A N/A N/A N/A 9690438 9690446 9690455 9690463 9690471 9690489 9690497 4386082 4228930 N/A 4256585 N/A N/A 50075322 N/A 2-1/2" 1/4" CBM 4253371 4253389 4253397 4253400 4253418 4253426 4253434 4253451 4253460 4253478 4253486 4253494 4253507 4253515 4253523 4253531 4253541 4253559 4253567 4253575 4253583 4253591
18
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1105
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES 2000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer 2000 Series Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gauges provide an accurate, economical indication of positive, negative, or differential air pressure. The gauge includes a 4" (10.2 cm) easy-to-read dial and a frictionless magnetic movement in a cast aluminum housing, and it is resistant to shock, vibration, and overpressure. The Magnehelic Gauge has both back and side connections, so that it may be either surface- or ush-mounted. Ranges are available from 0" to 0.25" W.C. up to 10'' W.C.
NEW!
2001
FEATURES
2% full-scale accuracy Easy-to-read 4" (10.16 cm) white dial and red-tipped pointer Flush or surface mounting Easily accessible zero adjustment Corrosion-resistant cast aluminum housing Back and side connections
APPLICATION
The 2000 Series is ideal for monitoring fan and blower pressures, lter resistance, air velocity, and pressure drop across coils. It may be used to measure positive, negative, or differential pressures of air or compatible gases.
DIMENSIONS
PRESSURE
in (cm)
Pressure
0.69 (1.75)
.40 .20 0
.60 .80 1.0
SPECIFICATIONS
2% of FS (3% on -0 and 4% on -00 ranges) throughout range System Pressure -20" Hg to 15 psig (103 kPa) Relief plug designed to open at 25 Overpressure psig (172 kPa) Enclosure Die-cast aluminum Operating Temperature 20 to 140F (-7 to 60C) Process Connection 1/8" NPT female high and low pressure taps, duplicated-one pair side and one pair back Standard Accessories Two 1/8" NPT plugs for duplicate pressure taps, two 1/8" pipe thread to rubber tubing adapters, and three ush mounting adapters with screws Approvals RoHS Weight 1.12 lb (0.51 kg) Warranty 1 year Accuracy
MAGNEHELIC
0.5 (1.27)
Zero Set
18
Suction
0.5 (1.27) 1.69 (4.29) 0.5 (1.27)
Pressure
4.75 (12.06) 0.48 (1.11)
1.25 (3.17)
Suction
4.5 Hole (11.43)
Note: Dimensions are slightly different on medium and high pressure models.
1106
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
INSTALLATION
MODEL RANGE "W.C. 0-0.25 0-0.50 0-1.0 0-2.0 0-3.0 0-4.0 0-5.0 0-6.0 0-8.0 0-10 2000-00* 2000-0* 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2008 2010
A-301-K A-302-K A-345-K A-368-K A-605 T-101
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES 2000 SERIES
PSI
Mount the 2000 Series Magnehelic Gauge with the dial in a vertical position in a location free of excessive vibration or pulsating pressures. Sensing lines may be run any distance necessary, but long tubing lengths will increase response time slightly. If the pointer is not exactly on the zero mark with both the high- and low-pressure connections open to the atmosphere, adjust with the external zero adjust screw. To monitor positive pressure, connect tubing from the source of pressure to either of the two high-pressure ports. Plug the other high-pressure port, and vent one or both low-pressure ports to atmosphere.
To monitor negative pressure, connect tubing from the source of negative pressure to either of the two low-pressure ports. Plug the other low-pressure port, and vent one or both high-pressure ports to atmosphere.
To monitor differential pressure, connect tubing from the source of the higher pressure to either of the two highpressure ports. Connect tubing from the source of the lower pressure to either of the low-pressure ports. Plug both unused ports.
MINOR DIV. 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.20 0.20 0.20
MODEL
RANGE ZERO CENTER "W.C. 0.25-0-0.25 0.5-0-0.5 1-0-1
MINOR DIV. 0.01 0.02 0.05
PRESSURE
2300-0* 2301 2302
* These ranges are calibrated for vertical scale position
18
Order by model number from selection chart above. Contact Kele for pressure ranges, metric ranges, and air velocity scales other than those shown.
RELATED PRODUCTS Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) Surface mounting plate Mounting kit for air filter application. Includes aluminum surface mounting brackets with screws, two 5 ft. lengths of 1/4" aluminum tubing, two static pressure tips and two plastic vent valves. 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 1113 1113 901
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1107
PRESSURE
PSI
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH / GAUGE 3000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer Series 3000 Photohelic Differential Pressure Switch/Gauge combines two versatile, precise pressure switches with a time-proven Magnehelic pressure gauge. The gauge reading is unaffected by switch operation. External knobs are used to adjust the two DPDT switch setpoints. Switch setpoints (indicated by red pointers) and system pressure are fully visible at all times. Ranges are available from 0" to 0.25" W.C. up to 10'' W.C. full scale. The 3000 Series may be ordered with the switch assembly remote mounted to facilitate panel mounting.
NEW!
A3002
FEATURES
Two DPDT switches, externally adjustable Dependable Magnehelic pressure indication 2% F.S. accuracy Visible switch set points and pressure indication Easily accessible zero adjustment 4" (10.2 cm) easy-to-read white dial Optional manual reset Optional remote mounting of switch assembly UL listed, CSA and CE certied
WIRING
COM N.C. Reset
(HI)
COM
Reset (LOW)
N.C. Left Setpoint Knob
Right Setpoint Knob
110 Volt
+ 110 Volt
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
110 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 5W 10A @ 120 VAC, 60 Hz resistive 2% of full scale @ 70F (21C), 3% on -0 models, 4% on -00 models Overpressure 20" Hg to 25 psig (172 kPa) total pressure on either side of diaphragm Operating Temperature 20 to 120F (-7 to 49C) Process Connection 1/8" FNPT Supply Voltage Contact Rating Accuracy Conduit Entrance Cutout Size Depth Required Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty 3/4" conduit 4.75" (12.06 cm) diameter 7.63" (19.37 cm) 5.0"H X 5.0"W X 8.44"D (12.7 X 12.7 X 21.4 UL listed, le #E38121, CSA, CE 4.0 lb (1.81 kg) 1 year
18
MODEL A3000-00 A3000-0 A3001 A3002 A3003 RMR TAMP A-601 RANGE "W.C. 0-0.25 0-0.50 0-1.0 0-2.0 0-3.0
MINOR DIVISION 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.10 MODEL A3004 A3005 A3006 A3008 A3010 RANGE "W.C. 0-4.0 0-5.0 0-6.0 0-8.0 0-10 MINOR DIVISION 0.10 0.10 0.20 0.20 0.20
Remote mounting gauge and separate relay assembly with 5ft (12.7 cm) interconnecting cable (additional cable available in 5ft increments) Contact Kele for pressure ranges other Tamper-proof knobs than those shown (metric ranges, air Manual reset switch (one required for each circuit) velocity scales, etc.)
OPTIONS
A-301-K A-302-K A-345-K T-101
RELATED PRODUCTS Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m)
PAGE 1113 1113 1113 901
1108
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Accuracy Measurement Range Overpressure Steady Fluctuating Short Time Operating Temperature Ambient FS value 90% of FS value 150% of FS value
PRESSURE
DIAL GAUGE 232.34, 233.34 SERIES
PSI
Specically designed for the chemical and petroleum, and processing industries, the Wika 232.34 and 233.34 Series pressure gauges feature 316 stainless steel wetted parts, a solid-front, blowout back safety case, and adjustable pointer. Available in 4-1/2" or 6" dial size, this pressure gauge is eld repairable and eld liquid-llable. FEATURES Excellent load-cycle stability and shock resistance Solid front thermoplastic case Positive pressure ranges to 30,000 psi XSEL Process Gauge with 5 year warranty on gauge and 10 year warranty on pressure system (see terms and conditions) All lower mount connection gauges are factory prepared
232.34 Series 233.34 Series
0.5% of span (ASME B40.100 Grade 2A) 1.0% of span (ASME B40.100 Grade 1A) (for 20,000 psi range and above) 30" Hg Vacuum to 0 to 0-20,000 psi
Medium Wetted Parts Window Material Dial Size Dial Pointer Restrictor Fill Fluid Process Connection Approvals Warranty
-40F to 150F (-40C to 66C) dry -4F to 150F (-20C to 66C) glycerine lled -40F to 150F (-40C to 66C)
silicone lled max 212F (100C) 316L stainless steel Clear acrylic with Buna-N gasket 4.5" (11.4 cm) White aluminum with black lettering, stop pin at 6 o'clock Black aluminum, adjustable Stainless steel (0.6 mm) Glycerine 99.7% (233.34 Series) 1/4" or 1/2" NPT with M4 internal tap, lower mount RoHS 1 year
PRESSURE
Dial Size Connection Pressure Range 30" Hg Vacuum 30" Hg Vacuum -15 psi 30" Hg Vacuum -30 psi 30" Hg Vacuum -60 psi 30" Hg Vacuum -100 psi 30" Hg Vacuum -160 psi 30" Hg Vacuum -200 psi 30" Hg Vacuum -300 psi 30" Hg Vacuum -400 psi 0-15 psi 0-30 psi 0-60 psi 0-100 psi 0-160 psi 0-200 psi 0-300 psi 0-400 psi 0-600 psi 0-800 psi 0-1000 psi 0-1500 psi 0-2000 psi 0-3000 psi 0-5000 psi 0-10000 psi 0-15000 psi 0-20000 psi March 2014 4-1/2" 1/4" LM 9834478 9834486 9834494 9834508 9834516 9834524 9834532 4260163 4260171 9834559 9834567 9834575 9834583 9834591 9834605 9834613 9834621 9834630 9835008 9834648 9793318 9793661 9748911 9793521 9793679 N/A N/A GAUGE MODEL 232.34 4-1/2" 1/2" LM 9834729 9834737 9834745 9834753 9834761 9834770 9834788 4260180 4260198 9834800 9834818 9834826 9834834 9834842 9834850 9834869 9834877 9834885 9834974 9834893 9834907 9834915 9834923 9834931 9834940 9834958 9834966 233.34 4-1/2" 1/2" LM 9833914 9833922 9833930 9833948 9833956 9833965 9833973 N/A N/A 9833981 9833999 9834006 9834015 9834023 9834031 9834049 9834057 9834065 9834155 9834074 9834082 9834090 9834104 9834112 9834120 9834138 9834146
18
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1109
PRESSURE
PSI
DIGITAL GAUGE SERIES A
DESCRIPTION
The Sensocon Series A1 and A2 digital differential pressure gauges utilize a patent pending microprocessor based digital pressure gage for positive, negative, and differential measurement designed to be a direct replacement for mechanical gauges. The Series A digital differential pressure gauges utilize an extremely stable piezoresistive sensing technology to give a standard full scale accuracy of 1%. For applications requiring better accuracy, the Series A1 and A2 are also available with 0.5% or 0.25% accuracy. The Series A1 and A2 also have an optional 4-20 mA output for applications requiring an output signal. While the A1 features a bright LED display, the A2 adds a bright process arch which gives the gauge improved visibility, readability and precision. Both the Series A1 and A2 digital differential pressure gauges also feature 5 user selectable engineering units including inches of W.C., mm W.C., cm W.C., kPa, and Pa. The Sensocon Series A3 and A4 digital differential pressure controllers are a patent pending microprocessor based pressure controllers for positive, negative, and differential pressure as well as velocity and ow. These Series A3 and A4 differential pressure controllers include (2) 8A SPDT relays and an associated programming menu that allows full conguration of variables such as setpoints, dead band, engineering units, ow coefcients, and more. The programming is done from a user friendly menu on the LCD(A3) or OLED (A4) display or uploaded using an Opti Link
NEW!
FEATURES
Mounts in industry standard holes 1.6 (41 mm) panel depth LED or OLED program display Measures ow & velocity Optional 4-20 mA output Universal power 24-240 VAC/VDC Two 8A SPDT relays
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Relay Output Relay Output Rating Accuracy Thermal Effect Maximum Pressure Display Response Time Operating Temperature Media Compatibility Enclosure Enclosure Rating Process Connection Wiring Terminations Approvals Warranty 24-240 VAC/VDC, 7 VA 4-20 mA (optional), 120 mA (VDC) 750 (2) SPDT 8 Amps @ 250 VAC, 5A @30 VDC 1.0% standard (0.5% and 0.25% optional) +/- 0.02% FS/F 4" WC 2 psi; 5" WC or more 10 psi 4 Digit, red LED, " digits, LCD programming display (A3 and A4 only) <100 ms -10 to 140F (-23 to 60C) Air and compatible non combustible, non corrosive gasses Glass Filled Nylon Face designed to meet NEMA 4X with optional cover Push on connection for 3/16" tubing screw terminals ETL, CE 1 year
DIMENSIONS
PRESSURE
0.95 (24.1)
2.33 (59.1)
LOW
HIGH
4.57 (116)
4/20
4/20
5.1 (129.5)
1.61 (41)
0.32 (8.1)
18
Model A
Descpition Series A 4.5" panel m ount display DI SPLA Y CON FI GU RA TI ON 1 2 3 4 LED display LED display, process arch LED display, process arch, and LCD LED display, process ar ch, and OLED FUN CTI ON 0 1 I ndicat ion Cont rol ( 2) SPDT relays ( A3 and A4 only) TRA N SM I TTER 0 1 None 4- 20 m A ACCURA CY 0 1 2 1% 0.50% 0.25% PRESSURE RA N GE* 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 0 0.25" ( 60 Pa) 0 0.5" ( 125 Pa) 0 1" ( 250 Pa) 0 2" ( 500 Pa) 0 3" ( 750 Pa) 0 4" ( 1 kPa) 0 5" ( 1.25 k Pa) 0 8" ( 2.0 kPa) 0 10" ( 2.5 k Pa) 0 15" ( 3.75 kPa) 0 20" ( 5.0 k Pa) 0 30" ( 7.5 k Pa) 0 - 40" ( 10 kPa) 0 - 50" ( 12.5 kPa)
* All ranges ar e bi- direct ional
1110
C1
NC I N0 1
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Dial Size Accuracy Measurement Range Wetted Parts Process Connection Enclosure Case Warranty
PRESSURE
REFRIGERATION GAUGE 25W100
PSI
The Ashcroft Model 25W100 Refrigeration Gauges are ideal for installation on refrigeration manifolds for testing air conditioning units. The compound scale is designed specically for R134A refrigerant testing. FlutterGuard, a standard feature of these gauges, eliminates pointer utter.
2 1/2" (6.4 cm) 1%-2%-5% 30" Hg vac to 120 psi (retard to 250 psi) Brass socket, phosphor bronze bourdon tube 1/8" NPT, lower Window: Polycarbonate ABS plastic 1 year
25W100
MODEL DESCRIPTION 25W1007PH01L-R134A R e f r i g e r a t i o n g a u g e f o r R134A
DESCRIPTION
The PG Series Pressure Gauges are durable, cost-effective, general-purpose gauges for use in a wide variety of HVAC controls applications. All gauges are compatible with air, oil, and water and have a bronze bourdon tube, acrylic lens, and dual unit psi/kPa scale. The PG Series (except model PG-05) has a recalibrator screw. A wide variety of models, options, and accessories are available, including panel-mount models, specialty gauges, and diaphragm seals. PG Series
PRESSURE GAUGES PG SERIES
PRESSURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Overpressure 125% of FS value Operating Temperature -40 to 150F (-40 to 65C) Brass socket, phosphor bronze Wetted Parts bourdon tube Window Material Acrylic Process Connection 1/8" NPT or 1/4" NPT, depending on model (LM = lower mount, CBM = center back mount, PM = panel mount) 1 year
Warranty
GAUGE TYPE
DIAL SIZE CONNECTION ACCURACY CASE MATERIAL PRESSURE RANGE 30" Hg VAC/kPa 30" Hg VAC-30 psig 0-15 psig/kPa 0-30 psig/kPa 0-60 psig/kPa 0-100 psig/kPa 0-160 psig/kPa 0-200 psig/kPa 0-300 psig/kPa 0-400 psig/kPa 0-600 psig/kPa ECONOMY 1-1/2" 1/8" CBM 3-2-3% BLACK STEEL N/A N/A N/A PG-05 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1-1/2" 1/8" LM 2-1-2% BLACK STEEL PG-15-30-0-8L N/A PG-15-0-15-8L PG-15-0-30-8L PG-15-0-60-8L PG-15-0-100-8L PG-15-0-160-8L PG-15-0-200-8L PG-15-0-300-8L PG-15-0-400-8L PG-15-0-600-8L 1-1/2" 1/8" CBM 2-1-2% BLACK STEEL PG-15-30-0-8C N/A PG-15-0-15-8C PG-15-0-30-8C PG-15-0-60-8C PG-15-0-100-8C PG-15-0-160-8C PG-15-0-200-8C PG-15-0-300-8C PG-15-0-400-8C PG-15-0-600-8C 2" 1/4" CBM 2-1-2% BLACK STEEL PG-20-30-0-4C N/A PG-20-0-15-4C PG-20-0-30-4C PG-20-0-60-4C PG-20-0-100-4C PG-20-0-160-4C PG-20-0-200-4C PG-20-0-300-4C PG-20-0-400-4C PG-20-0-600-4C QUALITY 2" 1/4" LM 2-1-2% BLACK STEEL PG-20-30-0-4L N/A PG-20-0-15-4L PG-20-0-30-4L PG-20-0-60-4L PG-20-0-100-4L PG-20-0-160-4L PG-20-0-200-4L PG-20-0-300-4L PG-20-0-400-4L PG-20-0-600-4L 2" 1/4" PM 2-1-2% BLACK STEEL PG-20-30-0-4P N/A PG-20-0-15-4P PG-20-0-30-4P PG-20-0-60-4P PG-20-0-100-4P PG-20-0-160-4P PG-20-0-200-4P PG-20-0-300-4P PG-20-0-400-4P PG-20-0-600-4P 2-1/2" 1/4" LM 2-1-2% BLACK STEEL PG-25-30-0-4L PG-25-30-30-4L PG-25-0-15-4L PG-25-0-30-4L PG-25-0-60-4L PG-25-0-100-4L PG-25-0-160-4L PG-25-0-200-4L N/A N/A N/A 2-1/2" 1/4" PM 2-1-2% BLACK STEEL PG-25-30-0-4P N/A PG-25-0-15-4P PG-25-0-30-4P PG-25-0-60-4P PG-25-0-100-4P PG-25-0-160-4P PG-25-0-200-4P N/A N/A N/A CONTRACTOR 4-1/2" 1/4" LM 1% STAINLESS STEEL PG-45-30-0-4L PG-45-30-30-4L PG-45-0-15-4L PG-45-0-30-4L PG-45-0-60-4L PG-45-0-100-4L PG-45-0-160-4L PG-45-0-200-4L N/A N/A N/A
18
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1111
PRESSURE
PSI
SNUBBERS, PIGTAIL 47B-1, 47S-1, 747B, 747S, PT
DESCRIPTION
Snubbers will stop shocks and pulsations that damage pressure instruments, thus cutting costs of maintenance, calibration, and repair. They will also assure accuracy of the instruments and the readings, increase life of instruments, and prevent false operation of control equipment. Kele offers two types of pressure snubbers; piston and porous. Model 47 Snubbers Model 47 incorporates a piston that moves up and down inside of an internal tube within the snubber. This movement of the piston, caused by the shocks and pulsations of the uid, dampens the effect of these pulsations. Model 47 comes with three piston sizes: #02, #2, and #3. Piston #2 is installed in the factory in the snubber. It is used for most applications, such as water, air, and steam. The #3 piston is used for a greater snubbing effect, while the #02 piston is used for relatively thick uids or low pressure water applications. Model 747 Snubbers Model 747 is a porous snubber and a low-cost alternative to piston snubbers. There are no moving parts. It uses a porous material to dampen the effect of shocks and pulsations. The Model 747 is available in stainless steel and brass, and it is ordered based on the application, gases or liquids. Model PT In steam pressure monitoring, the temperature of the steam is higher than the maximum operating temperature of most pressure transmitters. A Model PT steam pigtail syphon will protect a pressure transmitter applied to steam systems. See the "Technical Reference" section in the Kele catalog for more detailed information.
NEW!
PT (Steam Syphon) PTX1 with 47S-1 747B Snubber The Model PT is constructed of steel and is suitable for steam pressure to 250 psig (1724 kPa) 400F (204C). Each is furnished with two 1/4" FPT x 1/8" FPT couplings and one 1/8" MPT x 1/8" MPT nipple for convenient installation.
PRESSURE
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.688 (1.75) 0.688 (1.75)
SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Pressure Brass Snubbers 3000 psig (20,685 kPa) SS Snubbers 5000 psig (34,475 kPa) PT 250 psig (1724 kPa) Maximum Temperature PT 400F (204C) Materials Of Construction Snubbers Brass, Stainless Steel PT Steel Process Connection Snubbers 1/8" MNPT PT 1/4" NPT (1/8" NPT ttings provided Dimensions 1.2"H X 0.69" diameter 747 Series (3.05 X 1.75 cm) 1.5"H X 0.69" diameter 47 Series (3.81 X 1.75 cm) 5.5" L (14 cm) PT
Instrument connection 1/8" FNPT
Instrument connection 1/8" FNPT
18
1.2 (3.05)
1.5 (3.81)
1/8" MNPT Pressure source
1/8" MNPT Pressure source
Maximum pressure 747B - 3000 psig (20,685 kPa) 47B - 3000 psig (20,685 kPa) 747S - 5000 psig (34,475 kPa) 47S - 5000 psig (34,475 kPa)
Model 747
Model 47
MODEL 47B-1 47S-1 747BE-1 747BG-1 747SE-1 747SG-1 PT DESCRIPTION Brass piston style snubber Stainless steel piston style snubber Brass porous style snubber for light oil and water Brass porous style snubber for air, steam, and other gases Stainless steel porous style snubber for light oil and water Stainless steel porous style snubber for air, steam, and other gases 1/4" pigtail syphon with ttings
1112
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MODEL 60681 A-301-K A-302-K A-308-K A-345-K A-3145K A-3245K A-3845K 21122 21122-112 21123 21123-112 A-306-K A-605 RPS RPS-I RPS-W SD-01 B-137
PRESSURE
PSI
AIR PRESSURE SENSORS, SURGE DAMPENERS A300 SERIES, RPS, SD-01, 21121, 60681
DESCRIPTION Static Pressure Sensors The A-300-K Series sensors are used with pressure transmitters and pressure switches to sense duct pressures. Two sensors are required to monitor pressure across coils, lters, blowers, etc. A-301-K and A-302-K have four radial sensing holes and 4" (10.2 cm) insertion depth. The A-308-K should be used only where accuracy is not critical. All mount in a 3/8" hole in the duct. If the interior of the duct is not accessible, an optional A-345-K ange mounting kit may be used. Room Static Pressure or Total Pressure Sensor Kit The versatile Model 60681 Pressure Sensing Kit is used for monitoring static pressure (aspiration) or total pressure (impact). The kit includes a 7" (17.8 cm) universal sensing probe, adjustable mounting ange, 1/4" adapter, and 3' (0.9 m) length of tubing (1/4" ID x 3/8" OD). For total (impact) pressure applications, install the curved tip opening facing into the air stream or away from the air stream for vacuum applications.
60681 RPS-W
RPS & SD-01 A-300 Series
Total Pressure Sensor The Model 21122 (4") and 21123 (8") sensors are used primarily for proving air ow in ducts. The opening in the tip of the 4" (10.2 cm) aluminum tube faces upstream and senses impact (total) pressure. The "-112" models accept 1/8" to 1/4" ID exible tubing. Outdoor Static Pressure Sensor The A-306-K Outdoor Static Pressure Sensor provides an outdoor pressure signal for reference in building pressurization applications. The A-306-K includes the sensor, 50' (15.24m) of vinyl tubing, mounting bracket, and hardware. Room Static Pressure Sensor The Model RPS is a stainless steel, wall-mounted room static pressure sensor. It mounts directly to the wall or to a standard electrical box. The Model RPS-W is a white plastic, wall-mounted room static pressure sensor, and the Model RPS-I is ivory. The RPS sensors have a 100 micron stainless steel breather vent. Filter Kit The Model A-605 Filter Kit includes an aluminum surface mounting bracket and screws, two 5 ft lengths of 1/4" aluminum tubing, two static pressure tips, and two plastic vent valves. Surge Dampener Surge Dampener Model SD-01 absorbs rapid pressure uctuations to provide steady pressure outputs. The dampener has two independent channels - one for the low pressure tubing and one for the high pressure tubing. Surge dampeners are typically used with outdoor pressure sensors, which are subject to wind gusts, and isolation rooms, clean rooms, or operating rooms where opening or closing doors creates sudden pressure changes.
APPLICATION
1 2 3
1. Positive static pressure increases as the filter gets dirty. 2. Differential across filter changes as filter gets dirty. 3. Flow is reduced as filter gets dirty.
PRESSURE
4. Negative pressure increases as the filter gets dirty. 5. Fan operation and true air flow: varying amounts of static pressure. Probes must be perpendicular to air flow.
DESCRIPTION Static or total pressure sensing kit Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression Duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb Duct static pressure tting, 1/4" barb Flange mounting kit (1 required for each A-301-K or A-302-K) A-301-K duct static pressure tip, 1/4" compression with A-345-K mounting ange A-302-K duct static pressure tip, 1/4" barb with A-345-K mounting ange A-308-K duct static pressure tting, 1/4" barb with A-345-K mounting ange 4" aluminum impact tube, 1/4" OD connection 6" aluminum impact tube for 1/8" thru 1/4" ID exible plastic tubing 8" aluminum impact tube, 1/4" OD connection 8" aluminum impact tube for 1/8" thru 1/4" ID exible plastic tubing Outdoor air static pressure kit Mounting kit for air lter application. Includes aluminum surface mounting brackets with screws, two 5 ft. lengths of 1/4" aluminum tubing, two static pressure tips and two plastic vent valves. Stainless steel room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb Ivory plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb White plastic room pressure sensor, 1/4" barb Surge dampener 1/4" barb adapter for #21122 and #21123 (standard pack-50)
18
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1113
PRESSURE
PSI
A REFRESHER ON 4-20 MA SIGNAL
The control signal, 4-20 mA, is the most common type of analog/proportional/modulating (these terms tend to be used interchangeably in our industry) signal we deal with and there are some fundamental facts about the 4-20 mA signal that we all know but are worth reviewing.
The 4-20 mA control signal is, of course, a variable current signal where 4 mA typically represents the low end of a range, for example 0%, and 20 mA represents the high end, for example 100%. This works great for measuring a given pressure range in a duct, the stroke position of a damper actuator, or the speed command being sent to a variable frequency drive. With the low end of the signal being 4 mA rather than zero, the instrumentation, and the technician, can distinguish between a zero signal and a broken wire or broken instrument. When referring to sensors, there are two-wire 4-20 mA signals, in which the sensor and the output signal are loop-powered with a 24 VDC power supply (Fig. 1), and three-wire 4-20 mA signals where the device requires 24 VAC (or VDC) power and generates the 4-20 mA signal (Fig. 2) directly. The examples shown are based on the Kele DPA Series differential pressure transmitters, but the wiring is typical of all the 4-20 mA sensors in our catalog.
NEW!
Fig. 2
4-20 mA H VAC 24 VAC Transformer G
Fig. 1
24 VDC Power Supply
4-20 mA
PRESSURE
Two-wire 4-20 mA with 24 VDC Power Supply
Three-wire 4-20 mA with 24 VAC Transformer
24 VAC Fig. 2 24 VDC Transformer Any 4-20 mA signal can be converted to a 2-10Supply VDC signal by putting a 500 resistor across the signal +/- terminals. The controller Power G above, if a controller will see 2-10 VDC across the resistor as the 4-20 mA ows through it (Ohms Law, V=IR). In the example 4-20 mA 4-20a mA analog input requires voltage instead of a current signal, installing the resistor across the two input terminals at the controller will H do the trick. VAC The same resistor solution holds true for sending a signal to an actuator used to drive a damper or valve. If a controller analog utput is 4-20 mA, and the actuator requires a 2-10 VDC signal, just install the resistor at the actuator signal input terminals. For 1-5 VDC, substitute a 250 resistor instead of 500.
Fig. 1
18
Verifying the signal is easy; put a meter in series with the 4-20 mA signal wires so the current ows through the meter. Set it to measure DC milliamps, make sure the leads are plugged into the common and milliamp sockets, andmA set the scale to read in the Three-wire 4-20 Two-wire 4-20 mA range that includes 20 mA. 24 See the sidebar the top of the next page to avoid with a pitfall that we hear about all too frequently! 24 VAC Transformer with VDC Power at Supply There you have it. Give us a call if you have questions. Did you know the Technical Sales Reps in the Kele Sales Department have combined over 120 years in the HVAC Controls business? We know our business, we can help, and were here to make it easy for you!
1114
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psia = = = = = = = = = = = = = = in of H20 ft of H20 mm of H20 cm of H20 in of Hg mm of Hg cm of Hg kg/cm2 bar mbar Pa kPa atm psig x x x x x x x x x x x x x + V P v* = = 4004 Pv V (4004 )2 Pt - Ps SCFM*1728 Pv Scim = = Head (feet) = psig x 2.31 specific gravity
PRESSURE
PRESSURE EQUATIONS
PSI
PRESSURE CONVERSION FACTORS

0.0361 0.4335 0.0014 0.0142 0.4912 0.0193 0.193 14.22 14.50 0.0145 1.45 x 10-4 0.1450 14.696 14.696 (sea level) in of H20 ft of H20 mm of H20 cm of H20 in of Hg mm of Hg cm of Hg kg/cm2 bar mbar Pa kPa atm = = = = = = = = = = = = = psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig x x x x x x x x x x x x x 27.71 2.31 703.1 70.31 2.036 57.71 5.771 0.0703 0.0689 68.95 6895 6.895 0.068
AIR PRESSURE / FLOW FORMULAS

Where: V Pv Pt Ps = = = = Velocity (fpm) Velocity pressure ("W.C.) Total pressure ("W.C.) Static pressure ("W.C.)
PRESSURE
* Pv may be determined by a pitot tube.
HEAD PRESSURE FORMULAS

psig = feet head x specific gravity* (*Water - 1.00, Ethylene glycol - 1.125) 2.31
PRESSURE DEFINITIONS
Absolute Pressure Atmospheric Pressure The sum of gauge pressure and atmospheric pressure The pressure existing at the surface of the earth caused by the weight of a column of air above the point of measurement; varies with altitude and weather conditions, but 14.696 psia is generally accepted except in high altitude locations A pressure reading above atmospheric pressure; most instruments read gauge pressure A tube that is inserted in a duct to measure both total pressure and static pressure and has separate connections so each pressure may be sensed A device that converts a pressure input into an electrical signal A device used to dampen pulsations to pressure instruments The outward push of a fluid against the walls of a container in every direction The sum of static pressure and velocity pressure The pressure exerted by the velocity of a fluid; generally obtained by measuring total pressure and static pressure and subtracting the static pressure from total pressure
18
Gauge Pressure Pitot Tube Pressure Transmitter Snubber Static Pressure Total Pressure Velocity Pressure
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1115
PRESSURE
PSI
MEASURING AIRFLOW
Building automation systems (BAS) are often required to measure the actual airow in air handling systems. Although there are many ways to measure airow, the two most commonly used with a BAS are the hot wire anemometer and various devices that measure the velocity pressure of the air. Once the velocity pressure is known, the BAS is then able to calculate airow. Each method has advantages as well as disadvantages. Hot Wire Anemometers The primary advantage of the hot wire anemometer is that it can provide an analog output that is proportional to ow, and no square root calculation is required to measure airow. The disadvantages of the hot wire anemometer are that it measures only one point in the cross section of the duct, and it may require periodic recalibration (see Model AVS-200 and Model EE65 in the Flow section). Differential Pressure Devices Pitot tubes and averaging tubes are among the ow measuring devices that measure velocity pressure. The pitot tube may be used with a differential pressure transmitter to determine airow at a relatively low cost; however, the BAS controller must be able to calculate the square root of the velocity pressure. Also, the pitot tube measures the velocity at only one point in the duct.
NEW!
Velocity (fpm) = 1096 Pv D
where Pv = velocity pressure in W.C. D = air density in lb/ft3
ow, the total pressure is piped to the high-pressure port of a differential pressure transmitter, and the static pressure is piped to the low-pressure port of the transmitter. The differential pressure that is then measured is the velocity pressure (Pv = Pt-Ps). Once the velocity pressure is known, velocity may be calculated by the following formula:
Air density is normally assumed to be 0.075 lb/ft3, based on 70F dry air at 29.9 Hg barometric pressure. If corrections must be made for barometric pressure or air temperature, the air density may be calculated by the following formula:
Air Density = 1.325 x PB T where PB = barometric pressure in "Hg T = absolute temperature (F + 460)
If air density is assumed to be standard (0.075 lb/ft3), the output of the differential pressure transmitter may be used to calculate air velocity by the following formula:
PRESSURE
FIGURE 1. MEASURING AIRFLOW WITH A PITOT TUBE

PS PS
160-xxx Pitot Tube Total Pressure Connection
Air Velocity (fpm) = (Cf) x
Mo - 4
T AIRFLOW ( + ) P V P S Static Pressure Connection Low-Pressure Port High-Pressure Port
where Cf = ow coefcient from Figure 2 Mo= pressure transmitter mA output

For accurate results, a differential pressure transmitter should be selected that corresponds as closely as possible to the velocity pressure to be measured (see Figure 2). Once the air velocity is known, airow in cfm is simply the duct inside area multiplied by air velocity.
18
T30-xxx Differential Pressure Transmitter Controller Input DCP-250 24 VDC Power Supply
Airow (cfm) = V x A
120 VAC
where V = average duct velocity (ft/min) A = duct cross sectional area (ft2)
Notice that V is average duct velocity. When using a pitot tube, velocity can be measured at only one point in the duct. In a straight duct run, the velocity will be greatest in the center of the duct and lowest near the duct wall where the effects of friction slow airow. The size and the shape of the duct determine how much the center velocity will deviate from the average velocity. To obtain an approximate average duct velocity when a pitot tube is installed in the center of a straight duct, reduce the center velocity by 10%. This will yield results that should be accurate to within 5%. March 2014
Airow Calculations with a Pitot Tube Figure 1 shows a typical pitot tube. In this diagram, Ps is the static pressure exerted in all directions, such as the pressure inside a balloon. This is sensed by the radial holes in the pitot tube. Pv is the velocity pressure caused by the momentum of the air moving in the duct. Pt is the total pressure and is the sum of the static pressure and velocity pressure (Pt = Ps+Pv). The opening in the tip of the pitot tube measures total pressure. Since only velocity pressure is required to calculate air
1116
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
UCM-420A DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
MUX B3 B4 B5 ADDR 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TIME B6 B7 B8 BASE 0 0 0 2.65 0 0 1 5.2 0 1 0 12.85 0 1 1 25.6 1 X X .59-2.93 RESET A4 A5 PER MIN 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 OFF 0.5 1 2 PROP A6 A7 A8 T.R. 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 10% 20% 35% 50% 65% 80% 90% REMOTE SETPOINT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PRESSURE
CONTROLLING DUCT PRESSURE
PSI
In this example, we are using the setpoint potentiometer on the UCM-420A to adjust the pressure, so the local setpoint should be enabled and the remote setpoint disabled. As the pressure in the duct increases, the control signal from the UCM-420A must decrease to slow down the fan speed, assuming the VFD is direct acting (speed increases with an increase in control signal); therefore, reverse-acting control should be selected for the UCM-420A. The integral reset rate and throttling range required will vary from system to system and must be determined in the field. Since pulse-width modulation is not to be used in this example, all PWM functions are disabled. The jumpers will be set for three-wire potentiometer local setpoint and 4-20 mA input from the pressure transducer. The instructions furnished with the UCM-420A explain in detail how to set the DIP switches and jumpers to accomplish the above setting. The input to the UCM-420A from the static pressure transducer has a range of 0-3 W.tC. Therefore, when there is no pressure in the duct, the input will be 4 mA; when the static pressure in the duct is 3 W.C., the input will be 20 mA. The setpoint potentiometer scale on the UCM-420A is labeled 0-100%. In our example, we require 2 W.C. in the duct, so the setpoint potentiometer should be set for 2/3 x 100 = 67%. Tuning the System As stated earlier, the throttling range and integral reset must be fine-tuned in the field and cannot be calculated. The throttling range is defined as the amount of signal change at the input required to cause the output to go through its entire range (4-20 mA). For example, a 50% throttling range means
that for every 1 mA change in the input, there will be a 2 mA change in the output. To properly adjust the throttling range, first disable the integral reset and set the throttling range at 100%. Then, reduce the throttling range in increments until the controller begins to hunt. When the controller begins to hunt, the throttling range is too narrow, so widen it one step. The integral reset rate may now be adjusted. The integral reset corrects the output of the UCM-420A to compensate for the offset inherent in proportional-only controllers. The integral reset ramps the output in the direction that forces the input signal to exactly match the setpoint. The number of times per minute this offset is overcome by the output signal is the integral reset rate. The quicker the system responds, the higher (more resets per minute) the reset rate may be set. AGood Solution This control system will provide very smooth, precise static pressure control in the discharge duct. It will also save energy since the fan will use only as much horsepower as required to maintain the setpoint pressure. In this example, the pressure is adjusted with the setpoint potentiometer on the UCM-420A. This pressure could also be controlled by a remote potentiometer or an analog or pulse width signal from a BAS controller. Another application would be controlling multiple zones (such as VAV boxes) from one BAS controller output by using the multiplex PWM mode. In this application, a Precon Type 3 thermistor could be used as the temperature input to each UCM-420A, and the BAS controller could send eight different setpoint signals to the zones. Multiple UCM-420As could receive the same setpoint signal.
PRESSURE
FIGURE 1. VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEM WIRING

A B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
120 VAC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Hi Lo
T30-030
Connect to duct Open to the atmosphere
18
DCP-250
Power Supply 24 VDC
STATUS
PWM INPUT PWM INPUT REM SPT INPUT LOC SPT POT + LOC SPT INPUT LOC SPT POT INPUT INPUT 24 PWR COMMON MA SIG OUTPUT
Transmitter
1 1 100%
SWITCH OFF
SWITCH ON
A3 REVERSE ACTING DIRECT ACTING A2 BOTH OFF >> REMOTE SETPT LOCAL SETPT ENABLE A1 SAMPLE AND HOLD MODE REMOTE SETPT ENABLE B1 BOTH OFF >> ANALOG PWM REM SETPT SGLE UNIT B2 REMOTE SETPOINT PWM REM SETPT MUX MODE
LOCAL SETPOINT
"1" MEANS TURN SWITCH ON
"0" MEANS TURN SWITCH OFF
FEEDBACK
MODEL DT13E Signal Isolator*
UCM-420A
+ +
* Required only if the VFD used requires an isolated control signal
SIG IN SIG IN SIG OUT SIG OUT AC PWR AC PWR Isolated Control Signal to VFD
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1117
PRESSURE
PSI
PROVIDING STEAM ISOLATION AND TEMPERATURE PROTECTION
Steam Isolation All pressure transducers installed on steam lines should be isolated from the steam to protect them from damage. A steam pigtail syphon, such as the Model PT, may be used for this purpose. Temperature Protection Frequently, it is necessary to measure the pressure of fluids at temperatures either above or below the operating range of available transducers. The expense of a special transducer can often be avoided if the pressure transducer is isolated from the pressure source by a short length of pipe or tubing. The curves on Figure 1 show how to limit the temperature at the transducer to a range of 0 to 200F (-17.8 to 93.3C) for fluid temperatures between -400 and 1700F (-204.4C to 926C). Figure 1 shows the various tubing lengths, sizes, and materials that can be used.
NEW!
Model PT
Deviation from these conditions will require some slight adjustments in the length of tubing selected, or if there is any doubt, a Model TM99A handheld thermometer on the transducer will readily verify proper operating conditions. Note that a 6 (15.2 cm) length of 1/4 (0.64 cm) stainless steel tubing will effectively protect a transducer from a 1000F (537.8C) pressure source. Thus, pressure transducers capable of operating at 200F (93.3C) can measure the pressure of fluids having much higher temperatures.
303SS 0.25 OD X 0.18 ID (0.635 cm OD X 0.457 cm ID BRASS 0.25 OD X 0.18 ID (0.635 cm OD X 0.457 cm ID) 303SS 0.25 OD X 0.18 ID (0.635 cm OD X 0.457 cm ID
FIGURE 1. TUBING LENGTH TO ISOLATE TRANSDUCER FROM TEMPERATURE SOURCE

2000 1800 TA = 100F Maximum transducer temperature 200F Minimum transducer temperature 0F
T O = Temperature of Pressure Source (F)
PRESSURE
1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 -200 -400
303SS 0.125 OD X 0.07 ID (0.318 cm OD X 0.18 cm ID)
18
10
L = Length of Tubing (inches)
The curves shown on the chart are based on the following assumptions: 1. The pressure vessel is insulated to limit radiant heat transfer to the transducer. Thus, the major source of thermal input is via the connecting tube. 2. The pressure medium has a coefficient of thermal conductivity less than 0.4 BTU/hr/ft2/ft/F (6 cal/hr/cm2/cm/C). This figure encompasses a wide range of liquids and gases. 3. The ambient temperature around the transducer is 100F (37.8C). 4. The heat-transfer rate (convection) from the tubing to still air is 1.44 BTU/ft2/hrF (1 cal/cm2/hrC).
From Data Instruments Reference
1118
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
FIGURE 1. VARIABLE AIR VOLUME SYSTEM
AC Power In
PRESSURE
CONTROLLING DUCT PRESSURE
PSI
The Model UCM-420A is one of the most versatile products sold by Kele. Although this product is capable of performing many control functions, it was primarily designed as a setpoint controller. Since the introduction of the UCM-420A, responses from customers indicate that pressure control is a popular application for this product. Controlling static pressure in a duct by varying fan speed with a variable frequency drive (VFD) is a common application. This system could also be used to control the pressure with inlet vanes, discharge dampers, bypass dampers, etc. The same principles involved in this application could be used in other control applications, such as controlling water pressure with variable speed pumping, VAV zone control, or humidifier control. A Model PCM pressure controller may be used to sense duct pressure and provide an analog Proportional plus Integral (PI) control signal to control this pressure. However, in this article, we utilized a DPL Series pressure transmitter and a UCM-420A setpoint controller so the relationship between the system components would be more clearly defined. A VAV Application Figure 1 shows a simple variable air volume (VAV) system. As the spaces served by the VAV terminals are satisfied, the zone dampers will modulate closed and, without a pressure control system, the static pressure in the duct will rise. For this example, assume that a static pressure of 2 W.C. is required. To monitor the static pressure in the duct, we will use a DPL Series differential pressure transmitter with a range of 0-3 W.C. The 4-20 mA signal from this device will be fed into a UCM-420A setpoint controller, which in turn will control the speed of the fan by sending a 4-20 mA control signal to the fans VFD. The manual potentiometer on the UCM-420A will be used to
set the static pressure at the desired level. See the wiring diagram in Figure 2 on the next page for system wiring. This wiring diagram shows a Model DT13E signal isolator. The DT13E will not be needed unless the VFD requires an isolated control signal. Programming the UCM-420A All programming of the UCM-420A is done by DIP switches and jumpers. A list of the functions programmed by DIP switches, as well as those programmed by jumpers, is shown in Table 1. The proper settings for this example are also shown. TABLE 1. PROGRAMMED FUNCTIONS DIP Switch Functions Remote setpoint enable/disable Local setpoint enable/disable Direct-/Reverse-acting Integral reset rate Throttling range Single unit PWM enable/disable Multiplex PWM enable/disable Multiplex unit address PWM time base Jumper Functions Remote setpoint signal Local setpoint signal Input signal None Three-wire potentiometer 4-20 mA Disable Enable Reverse acting As required As required Disable Disable Off Off
PRESSURE
4-20 mA VFD
PI Control Signal
18
VAV Terminal
UCM-420A 24 VDC
T30-030
VAV Terminal Static Pressure Tubing Return Air Supply Air
VAV Terminal
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1119
PRESSURE
PSI
BACK TO BASICS PRESSURE
One of the many common ties that bind all building automation and energy management systems is sensing pressure. Pressure readings throughout a system are great indicators of system performance. Sensed pressure can also be used to indirectly control other variables like temperature and ow. Here are some of the pressures associated with Building Automation and Energy Management Systems: Absolute Pressure The sum of gauge pressure and atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric Pressure The pressure existing at the surface of the earth caused by the weight of a column of air above the point of measurement. Atmospheric Pressure varies with altitude and weather conditions, but 14.696 psia is generally accepted except in high altitude locations. Compound Pressure Pressure ranging from vacuum to gauge pressure. Differential Pressure The difference between two pressures. Gauge Pressure A pressure reading above Atmospheric Pressure. Most instruments read gauge pressure.
NEW!
Total Pressure The sum of Static Pressure and Velocity Pressure.
Static Pressure The outward push of a uid against the walls of a container.
Velocity Pressure The pressure exerted by the velocity of a uid. Velocity pressure is generally obtained by measuring Total Pressure and Static Pressure and subtracting the Static Pressure from Total Pressure. The remainder is Velocity Pressure. The two types of pressure most commonly applied in Building Automation and HVAC systems are Gauge Pressure and Differential Pressure. Gauge pressure is often used to indicate things like the efciency of compressors (via pressure transducers), to protect equipment (with pressure switches). Differential pressure is often used to control building static pressure (through differential pressure transmitters), protect equipment (through differential pressure switches), and to indicate ow (usually by employing a pitot tube or venturi pressure sensor).
18
PRESSURE
1120
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
HUMIDITY
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
Hundreds of Options in Stock, and Thousands of Options Available.
LY/MK Series | p. 1125
RV8H Series | p. 1132
G7L Series | p. 1150
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Board Mounted Relays MR Series Air Products and Controls Multi-Voltage Control Relays . . . . . 1143 RIB M Series Functional Devices Modular Panel Relays .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145 Contactors DPC Series Denite Purpose Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151 T30, T40, T60, T90 EEC Denite Purpose Contactors .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152 Enclosed Relays RIB, RIBT Pilot Series Relay In A Box for Pump Level Switch Control. . . RIB, RIBT Power Series Functional Devices Relay In A Box . . . . . . . . . . RIB01 and RIB02 Series Functional Devices Relay in a Box Dry C ontact Input Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAM-1, PAM-4 Air Products and Controls Multi-Voltage Relay Modules. .
R E L AY S & C O N TA C T O R S
1133 1135 1138 1147
RIB Series | p. 1133
RV8H | p. 1132
Plug-In General Purpose Relays RH, RJ, RR Series IDEC General-Purpose Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SH, SJ, SR Series IDEC Relay Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . G2R-S, LY, MK Series Omron General-Purpose Relays P2RF, PF, PTF Series Omron Relay Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781, 782, 783, 784 Series Magnecraft Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-781D5-1, 70-782D-1, 70-783D-1, 70-784D-1 Magnecraft Relay Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RV8H Series 6mm Interface Relays .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20307 Series Special Voltage Relays
1121 1123 1125 1127 1129 1131 1132 1155
Power Relays KE375, KE900 Series Power Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148 G7L Series Omron Power Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150 Specialty Relay Products RIBL Latching Series Relay In A Box Latching Relay Series. . . . . . . . . . RIBTW Series Functional Devices LonWorks Relay in a Box . . . . . . . . . . RIBTW2401B-BC Functional Devices BACnet Relay in a Box .. . . . . . . . . RIBW Series Functional Devices Wireless Control Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . RSSDN IDEC Solid State Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model ALT Alternating Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIL-2 Kele Motor Starter Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing Relays RTE Series IDEC Multifunction Electronic Timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRU Series Multifunction Timing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821TD10H, TDRSOXP, TDRSRXP Magnecraft Time Delay Relays . . . . . 438USA, 438USA-INT Delay On Make / Interval Timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMV8000, KRDM Delay-on-Make Timing Relays.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TA, CT Series Lockout Delay Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KRDB, KSDB, TDUB Delay-on-Break Timing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPC Series | p. 1151
1137 1139 1140 1141 1153 1155 1167
kele.com
1158 1160 1162 1156 1164 1165 1166
NEW!
COIL RATINGS RH SERIES
RATED VOLTAGE 12 24 AC 120 240 DC 12 24 RATED CURRENT (mA) 15% @ 20C 60 Hz 50 Hz SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT 75 100 140 165 86 121 165 196 42 60.5 81 83 70 50 37 98 16.4 19.5 14.2 16.5 8.6 7.5 8.2 9.8 7.1 8.3 4.9 4.3 SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT 64 75 120 125 32 36.9 60 62
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

IDEC GENERAL-PURPOSE RELAYS RH, RJ, RR SERIES
IDEC general-purpose relays are available in the RH Series blade-style relays and the RR Series pin-style relays and the RJ Series compact relays.
The RH Series features a 10A switching capacity. They are available in SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and 4PDT contact congurations, driven by AC or DC coils, and they have blade terminals for socket mounting. The RR Series has a 10A contact rating. The RR Series relays are available in SPDT, DPDT, and 3PDT congurations driven by AC or DC coils, and they have pin or blade terminals for socket mounting. RJ Series RH Series RR Series
The RJ Series is compact to reduce space requirements. They are available in a 12A SPDT version and an 8A DPDT version. They are driven by AC or DC coils and have blade terminals for socket mounting.
FEATURES Blade style, pin style, and compact models Indicator light and/or check button available Surface or DIN rail mount UL recognized, CSA certied
CONTACT RATINGS
COIL RESISTANCE () 10% @ 20C SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT 165 39.3 25.3 21.2 83 153 103 84.5 10,800 7,360 16.5 12,100 9,120 8.3 SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT 96 188 160 100 750 650 400 388
RH SERIES (UL ratings)

RESISTIVE VOLTAGE RH1 RH2 RH3 RH4 240V AC 10A 7.5A 7.5A 120V AC 10A 10A 30V DC 10A 10A 28V DC 10A GENERAL USE RH1 RH2 RH3 RH4 7A 6.5A 5A 7.5A 7.5A 7A HORSEPOWER RATING RH1 RH4 RH3 RH2 1/3 hp 1/3 hp 1/6 hp 1/6 hp
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RR SERIES (UL ratings)

VOLTAGE RESITIVE (A) 10 10 10 240 AC 120 AC 30 DC INDUCTIVE (A) cos = 0.3 7 7.5 7 MOTOR LOAD (hp) 1/3 1/4
RR Series
RATED VOLTAGE 12 24 AC 120 240 12 24 DC Rated Current (mA) 15% @ 20C 60 Hz 50 Hz 245 210 121 105 24 20.5 12.1 10.5 120 60 COIL RESISTANCE () 10% @ 20C 365 182 35 18
RJ Series (UL ratings)

Resistive Load (Maximum) Inductive Load (Maximum) CONTACT N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. RJ1S 12A @ 250 VAC/30 VDC 12A @ 250 VAC; 6A @ 30 VDC 7.5A @ 250 VAC; 6A @ 30 VDC 7.5A @ 250 VAC; 3A @ 30 VDC RJ2S 8A @ 250 VAC/30 VDC 8A @ 250 VAC; 4A @ 30 VDC 4A @ 250 VAC; 4A @ 30 VDC 4A @ 250 VAC; 2A @ 30 VDC
RJ Series
MODELS AC DC BLADE & PCB BLADE PCB Rated Current (mA) 15% @ 20C COIL RESISTANCE () WITH LED1 WITHOUT LED1 10% @ 20C 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 47.5 24V 37.5 43.9 243 41.1 8.7 120V 7.5 8.8 6,400 7.4 1,080 22.1 25.7 24V 1,080 22.1 24V
1. LED indicator is only available on Blade relays.
Maximum continuous applied voltage RH, RR 110% of rated voltage RJ 140% of rated voltage Pull-in voltage RH, RR, RJ/AC 80% of rated voltage RJ, RJ/DC 70% of rated voltage Drop-out voltage AC 30% or more of rated voltage DC 10% or more of rated voltage Contact material RH Silver cadmium oxide RR Silver RJ Silver nickel alloy
Contact resistance RH RR RJ Operate time RH, RR RJ Release time RH, RR RJ Min load RH RR RJ Operating temp Agency approvals
19
50 m maximum 30 m maximum 50 m maximum 25 ms maximum 15 ms maximum 25 ms maximum 10 ms maximum 24 VDC/30 mA, 5 VDC/100 mA 24 VDC/10 mA, 5 VDC/20 mA 5 VDC/100 mA -22 to 158F (-30 to 70C) UL-recognized component, (RH, RR): File #E66043, (RJ): File #E55996 CSA certified, File #LR35144; CE certified (not RR blade style) 1 year
Warranty
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1121
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

IDEC GENERAL-PURPOSE RELAYS RH, RJ, RR SERIES
DIMENSIONS
1.07 (2.75) 1.07 (2.75)
1.07 (2.75)
0.55 (1.39) RH1B 1.39 (3.56) or less
0.82 (2.1) RH2B
1.22 (3.1) RH3B
1.60 (4.1) RH4B
RH Series Relays (blade)

0.2 (0.5)
1.418 (3.6) 1.418 (3.6)
1.07 (2.75)
in (cm)
NEW!
3
1.42 (3.64)
4 2
1.14 (2.9)
1.42 (3.6)
1.87 (4.8) or less
1.42 (3.64)
2.19 (5.55)
RR2P
RR3PA
RR1BA, RR2BA, RR3B 1.06 (2.7) 0.5 (1.27)
RR Series Relays (pin)
RR Series Power Relays (blade)
RJ Series Relays (blade)
WIRING
Legend NC NO
Bottom View
1 5 9
1 5 9
4 8 12
1 5 9 13 (-)
2 6 10
4 8 12
1 5 9 13 (-)
2 6 10
3 7 11
4 8 12 3 4 5
(-)
13
RH1B
4
(+)
5 6
14
13 (-)
(+)14
(+)14
(+)14
4 2
3 2
RH2B
5 4 3 6 7 8 9 2 10 1 11 7 A
RH3B
2 5 B 1 4 7 A 3 6 9 B
RH4B
1 4 7 A 2 5 8 3 6 9 B 1
1.13 (2.38)
6 7 8
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
(-)
1 8
(+)
RJ1S
RJ2S
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
RR2P
RR3PA
RR1BA
RR2BA
(+)
(-)
RR3B
(+)
MODEL RH1B RH2B RH3B RH4B DESCRIPTION Relay, SPDT, blade (use SH1B-05 socket) Relay, DPDT, blade (use SH2B-05 socket) Relay, 3PDT, blade (use SH3B-05 socket) Relay, 4PDT, blade (use SH4B-05 socket) U Standard relay UL Indicator light ULC Indicator light and check button AC12V 12 VAC coil voltage AC24V 24 VAC coil voltage AC120V 120 VAC coil voltage AC240V 240 VAC coil voltage DC12V 12 VDC coil voltage DC24V 24 VDC coil voltage U AC24V MODEL RR2P RR3PA RR1BA RR2BA RR3B DESCRIPTION Relay, DPDT, 8 pin (use SR2P-05 or SR2P-06) Relay, 3PDT, 11 pin (use SR3P-06 socket) Relay, SPDT, 11 blade (use SR3B-05 socket) Relay, DPDT, 11 blade (use SR3B-05 socket) Relay, 3PDT, 11 blade (use SR3B-05 socket) U Standard relay UL Indicator light ULC Indicator light and check button AC12V 12 VAC coil voltage AC24V 24 VAC coil voltage AC120V 120 VAC coil voltage AC240V 240 VAC coil voltage DC12V 12 VDC coil voltage DC24V 24 VDC coil voltage U AC24V
19
RH1B MODEL RJ1S RJ2S
RR2P
DESCRIPTION Relay, SPDT (use SJ1S-05B socket) Relay, DPDT (use SJ2S-05B socket) C No options CL LED indicator A24 24 VAC coil voltage A120 120 VAC coil voltage D24 24 VDC coil voltage C A24
Example: RR2PUAC24V DPDT relay 8 pin with 24VAC coil
RJ1S
DIN-3F DIN-3F, BAM-1000 SH, SR, SJ Series
RELATED PRODUCTS 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant DIN rail Relay sockets
PAGE 860 860 1123 March 2014
1122
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
SH4B-05 SR2P-05
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

IDEC RELAY SOCKETS SH, SJ, SR SERIES
The SH and SR Series of IDEC relay sockets are for use with the IDEC RH / RR Series relays and RTE Series timers. The SH and SR Series include both blade and pin style sockets and are available for one, two, three and four pole relays. The SH and SR sockets can be DIN rail or surface mounted. The SJ Series of IDEC relay sockets are for use with the IDEC RJ1S and RJ2S Series relays. They can be DIN rail or surface mounted.
SJ1S, SJ2S SH1B-05
Use with IDEC RH / RR / RJ relays and RTE timers Screw terminals with captive wire clamp Surface or DIN rail mount UL recognized, CSA certied and CE approved
SH2B-05
SH3B-05
SR2P-06
SR3P-06
SR3B-05
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
SPECIFICATIONS
Model SJ1S-05B SJ2S-05B SH1B-05 SH2B-05 SH3B-05 SH4B-05 SR2P-05 SR2P-06 SR3P-06 SR3B-05 Socket Type Blade, DIN rail or surface mount Blade, DIN rail or surface mount Blade, DIN rail or surface mount Blade, DIN rail or surface mount Blade, DIN rail or surface mount Blade, DIN rail or surface mount 8-Pin DIN rail or surface mount 8-Pin, DIN rail or surface mount 11-Pin, DIN rail or surface mount Blade, DIN rail or surface mount Rated Voltage 250V 250V 250V 300V 300V 300V 300V 300V 300V 300V Rated Current 12A 8A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A 10A Hold Down Clip or SpringWire Size Lever: SJ9Z-C1 (provided) Lever: SJ9Z-C1 (provided) Spring: SYS-02F1; Clip: SFA-101, SFA-202 Spring: SY4S-02F1; Clip: SFA-101, SFA-202 Spring: SH3B05F1; Clip: SFA-101, SFA-202 Spring: SH4B-02F1; Clip: SFA-101, SFA-202 Spring: SR2B-02F1 (RR2P only); Clip: SFA-203 (RTE-P1 only) Spring: SR2B-02F1 (RR2P only); Clip: SFA-202 (RTE-P1 only) Spring: SR3B-02F1 (RR only); Clip: SFA-202 (RTE-P2 only) Wire Size Two 14 AWG Two 14 AWG Two 12 AWG Two 12 AWG Two 12 AWG Two 12 AWG Two 12 AWG Two 12 AWG Two 12 AWG Weight 0.06 lb (0.03 kg) 0.07 lb (0.034 kg) 0.06 lb (0.03 kg) 0.10 lb (0.05 kg) 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) 0.16 lb (0.07 kg) 0.10 lb (0.05 kg) 0.10 lb (0.05 kg) 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) 0.14 lb (0.06 kg) Approvals UL recognized File #E62437, CSA certied File #LR84913, CE UL recognized File #E62437, CSA certied File #LR84913, CE UL recognized File #E62437, CSA certied File #LR35144e, CE UL recognized File #E62437, CSA certied File #LR35144e, CE UL recognized File #E62437, CSA certied File #LR35144e, CE UL recognized File #E62437, CSA certied File #LR35144e, CE UL recognized File #E62437, CSA certied File #LR35144e, CE UL recognized File #E62437, CSA certied File #LR35144e, CE UL recognized File #E62437, CSA certied File #LR35144e, CE UL recognized File #E62437, CSA certied File #LR35144e, CE
19
Spring: SR3B-02F1 (RR3PA only); Two 12 AWG Clip: SFA-202 (RTE-P2 only)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1123
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

IDEC RELAY SOCKETS SH, SJ, SR SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.2 (5.6) 1.9 (4.9) 1.4 (3.5) 0.1 (0.2)
1 4 8 2
in (cm)
0.66 (1.7)
0.32 (0.8)
2.8 (7.1)
2.62 (6.7)
0.16 dia. 1.83 (0.42) (4.8)
NEW!
1.12 (2.85)
in (cm)
0.86 (2.2)
in (cm) 0.32
(0.8)
0.17 0.22 (0.44) (0.55)
1.12 (2.85) 0.7 (1.88)
0.17 (0.44) 0.31 (0.79)
2 4
DIN Rail
2.62 (6.7)
0.31 (0.79)
0.16 1.83 dia. (4.8) (0.42) 0.14 dia.
DIN Rail
(0.36)
14 13
14 13
9
0.10 (0.25) 0.63 (1.6) 0.78 (2.0) 0.57 (1.5) 0.98 (2.5) 0.63 (1.6)
0.6 (1.6)
SJ1S, SJ2S
1.2 (2.9) 0.2 (0.4)
2 Mounting Holes 0.16 dia (0.42)
12 0.10 (0.25) 1.03 (2.6) 1.17 (3.0) 0.57 (1.5) 0.98 (2.5)
SJ1S
SJ2S
1.03 (2.6)
SJ1S, SJ2S
in (cm)
0.32 (0.8) 1.25 (3.2) 1.12 (2.85) 0.7 (1.88)
SH1B-05
in (cm)
0.32 (0.8)
0.22 0.17 1.65 (0.44) (0.55) (4.2) 0.31 (0.79) 0.14 dia. (0.36)
SH2B-05
in (cm)
1.25 (2.85) 0.64 (1.7) 5 6 DIN Rail 7 8 0.78 (2.0) 1.12 (2.85) 2 1 2 Mounting Holes 0.16 dia. (0.42) 1.14 (2.9) 4 3
1.12 (2.85) 0.7 (1.88)
1.40 (3.6)
0.17 (0.44)
0.22 (0.55)
8 4
2.62 (6.7) 0.16 dia. 1.83 (0.42) (4.8) DIN Rail 14 12 0.10 (0.25) 1.42 (3.6) 1.56 (4.0) 0.57 (1.5) 0.98 (2.5)
6 2
5 1
2.62 (6.7)
13
8 4
1.83 (4.8) 0.16 dia. (0.42) DIN Rail 14 12
7 3
6 2
5 1
2.03 (5.2)
0.31 (0.79)
0.32 (0.8)
in (cm)
0.17 0.20 (0.44) (0.55) 0.31 (0.79) 0.14 dia. (0.36)
0.14 dia. (0.36)
1.28 0.9 (3.3) (2.5)
10
13 11 10
0.16 dia. (0.42) 1.14 (2.9)
1.42 (3.6)
9
0.12 (0.25)
0.10 (.25)
1.97 (5.0)
1.81 (4.6)
0.57 (1.5) 0.98 (2.5)
2 Mounting Holes 0.16 dia (0.42) 1.81 (4.6)
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
SH3B-05
in (cm)
1.56 (4.0) 1.0 (2.55) 0.7 (1.8) 6 DIN Rail 5
SH4B-05
in (cm) 0.17
4 3 0.31 (0.79)
2.34 (6.0)
SR2P-05
1.41 0.31 (3.6) (0.8)0.17 0.20 (0.44) (0.55)
8 DIN Rail 7 6 5 4 0.31 (0.79) 0.14 dia. (0.36)
0.32 (0.8)
(0.44)
0.20 (0.55) 2.3
(5.9)
0.32 (0.8)
1.0 (2.55) 0.7 (1.8)
M3.5 Terminal Screw
1.12 (2.85)
6 3 2 5 4 1
in (cm)
2.34 (6.0)
0.16 0.97 dia. (2.5) (0.42)
0.14 dia. (0.36)
0.16 1.05 dia. (2.5) (0.42)
2.9 (7.6)
9 10 11 1 2 3
0.16 (0.42) 2.2 (5.6)
DIN Rail
B 9 8 A
7 0.04 (0.25) 1.3 (3.3) 0.86 (2.2)
1 2 8 2 Mounting Holes 0.16 dia. (0.42) 1.3 (3.3)
0.12 (0.25)
1.3 (3.3)
0.86 (2.2)
2 Mounting Holes 0.16 dia. (0.42) 1.3 (3.3)
.07 (0.2)
1.45 (3.7) 1.69 (4.3)
0.57 (1.5) 0.98 (2.5)
1.45 (3.7)
2 Mounting Holes 0.16 dia. (0.42)
SR2P-06
SR3P-06
SR3B-05
19
MODEL SH1B-05 SH2B-05 SH3B-05 SH4B-05 SJ1S-05B SJ2S-05B SR2P-05 SR2P-06 SR3B-05 SR3P-06 DIN-3F, BAM-1000 RH, RJ, RR series RTE Series
DESCRIPTION Relay socket, SPDT blade type, DIN/surface mount Relay socket, DPDT blade type, DIN/surface mount Relay socket, 3PDT blade type, DIN/surface mount Relay socket, 4PDT blade type, DIN/surface mount Relay socket, SPDT blade type, DIN/surface mount Relay socket, DPDT blade type, DIN/surface mount Relay socket, DPDT pin type, DIN/surface mount Relay socket, DPDT pin type, DIN/surface mount Relay socket, three-pole blade type, DIN/surface mount Relay socket, 3PDT pin type, DIN/surface mount RELATED PRODUCTS DIN rail Relay Time delay relay PAGE 860 1121 1158 March 2014
1124
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
COIL RATINGS LY SERIES
Rated Voltage
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

OMRON GENERAL-PURPOSE RELAYS G2R-S, LY, MK SERIES
Omron general-purpose relays are available in the LY, MK, and G2R-S Series. The LY Series is available in SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and 4PDT contact congurations driven by AC or DC coils. It has up to a 15A switching capacity and blade terminals for socket mounting.
LY MK G2R-S
The MK Series is available in DPDT and 3PDT congurations driven by AC or DC coils and has up to a 10A switch rating. The MK Series has pin-type terminals for socket-mounting and comes standard with a mechanical indicator and push-totest button. The G2R-S Series is available with SPDT or DPDT contacts rated up to 10A and driven by AC or DC coils. They are socket-mounted, and their small size saves space. They come with a mechanical indicator, optional LED, and lockable test button.
P2RF
FEATURES
Blade-style, pin-style and compact models DIN rail or surface mount UL recognized, CSA certied, CE certied
CONTACT RATINGS LY SERIES

Contact Form SPDT UL Contact Ratings
15A @ 240 VAC (inductive) 15A @ 28 VDC (resistive) 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC (motor) 13A @ 120 VAC (resistive) 12A @ 240 VAC (inductive) 10A @ 28 VDC (resistive) 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC (motor) 10A @ 240 VAC (inductive) 10A @ 28 VDC (resistive) 1/2 hp @ 240 VAC (motor)
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
Rated Current (mA) Coil Resistance () 60 Hz 50 Hz SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT 80 93.6 180 180 100 54 54 80 67 46 46 78 24 AC 9.2 14.8 16.4 10.8 10.8 17.3 19 4430 4430 2450 2200 120 9.2 36.9 36.9 DC 24 58.6 69 58.6 69 650 650 410 350
MK SERIES
Rated Voltage 24 AC 120 24 DC Rated Current (mA) 60 Hz 88 18 56 Coil Resistance () 68 1578 430
DPDT
3PDT 4PDT
G2R-S SERIES
Rated Voltage 24 AC 120 24 DC Rated Current (mA) 60 Hz 37.5 7.5 21.8 Coil Resistance () 253 7,286 1,100
MK SERIES
Contact Form DPDT UL Contact Rating
10A @ 250 VAC (resistive) 10A @ 28 VDC (resistive) 7A @ 250 VAC (inductive) 10A @ 120 VAC (resistive) 10A @ 28 VDC (resistive) 10A @ 250 VAC (resistive) 7A @ 250 VAC (inductive)
Min operating voltage Max continuous applied voltage Drop-out voltage AC DC Contact material LY, G2R-S MK Contact resistance Operating time Release time Min load LY, G2R-S MK Agency approvals
80% of rated voltage AC/DC 110% of rated voltage AC/DC 30% or more of the rated voltage 10% (LY), 15% (MK, G2R-S) or more of the rated voltage Silver cadmium oxide Silver 100 m maximum 30 ms maximum 25 ms maximum 100 mA/5 VDC 10 mA/1 VDC UL-recognized component, File #E41643 (LY, G2R-S), #E41515 (MK); CSA certified, File #LR31928 (LY, G2R-S); #LR41408 (MK); CE certified 1 year 3PDT
19
G2R-S SERIES
Contact Form SPDT DPDT UL Contact Rating
10A @ 30 VDC (resistive) 10A @ 250 VAC (general purpose) 5A @ 30 VDC (resistive) 5A @ 250 VAC (general purpose)
Warranty
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1125
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

OMRON GENERAL-PURPOSE RELAYS G2R-S, LY, MK SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.42 (3.60) 0.85 (2.15)
1.10 (2.79) 1.24 (3.14)
NEW!
1.14 (2.9) 0.51 (1.3) 1.10 (2.79) 1.4 (3.5) 1.14 (2.9) 1.63 (4.14)
LY
LY1/LY2
LY3
1.36 (3.45) max 1.36 (3.45) max 0.03 (0.08)
LY4
2.07 (5.25) max
G2R-1, G2R-2
MK2/MK3
WIRING
4 5 6 4 7 1 8 3 2 5
1 2 1 3 3 5 7 4 6 8 5 7 6 8 7 10 8 9 11 9 13 10 11 12 14 1 4 3 6 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
2 4
2 5
3 2
7 8 9
3 4 2
4 3 2
5 6 7
1 11 10
1 5
1 8
LY1
LY2
LY3
LY4
MK2
MK3
G2R-1
G2R-2
LY SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION LY LY Series 1 SPDT contact configuration 2 DPDT contact configuration 3 3PDT contact configuration 4 4PDT contact configuration I4 Push-to-test button (optional) (two- and four-pole only when combined with N option) N LED indicator (optional) AC24 24 VAC DC24 24 VDC AC120 120 VAC LY 2 I4 N AC24
MK SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION MK MK Series 2 DPDT contact configuration 3 3PDT contact configuration P N LED indicator (optional) Two-pole 5 Three-pole S Push-to-test button (standard) AC24 24 VAC DC24 24 VDC AC120 120 VAC MK 3 P N 5 S AC24
G2R-S SERIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION G2R G2R Series 1 SPDT contact configuration 2 DPDT contact configuration S No options SNI LED indicator, test button AC24(S) 24 VAC DC24(S) 24 VDC AC120(S) 120 VAC G2R 1 S AC24(S)
19
Example: G2R1SAC24(S) SPDT relay with 24 VAC coil.
Example: LY2I4NAC24 DPDT relay with push-totest button, LED indicator, and 24 VAC coil.
Example: MK3PN5SAC24 3PDT relay with LED indicator, push-to-test button, and 24 VAC coil.
Use with PTF Series sockets
Use with PF Series sockets
Use with P2RF Series sockets
DINRSTL, DINRALU PF, PTF, PRF Series
RELATED PRODUCTS DIN rail Relay sockets
PAGE 860 1127
1126
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Use with Omron LY / MK / G2R-S relays Screw terminals with captive wire clamp Surface or DIN rail mount UL recognized, CSA certied and CE approved
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

OMRON RELAY SOCKETS P2RF, PF, PTF SERIES
The PTF and PF Series of Omron relay sockets are for use with the Omron LY / MK Series Relays. The P2RF is for use with the G2R-S relays. The PTF and PF Series include both blade and pin style sockets and are available for one, two, three, and four pole relays. The P2RF comes with a built-in relay hold down mechanism. All of these sockets can be DIN rail or surface mounted.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Rated Voltage Rated Current Terminals 250V 10A, 5A, 15A M3.5 screws with captive wire clamps Dielectric Strength 1500V Wire Size Up to two 12 AWG Materials Of Construction Polyphenylene Hold Down Clip or Spring PFC-A1, PYC-A1 Mounting DIN rail or surface mount Approvals UL-recognized component, File #E87929; CSA certied, File #LR31928; CE certied
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS (IN (CM))

PTF08A-E for use with relay LY1, LY2 Hold-down clip: PYC-A1 Weight: 0.1 lb (0.05 kg)
3.09 (7.84) max 1.39 (3.53) Two Mounting Holes 0.18 (0.46) dia
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
2 1 4 3
2.68 (6.80)
0.31 (0.78) 1.12 (2.84) 1.18 (2.99)
5 6 8 7
0.75 (1.90)
PTF11A for use with relay LY3 Hold-down clip: PYC-A1 Weight: 0.13 lb (0.06 kg)
3.09 (7.84) max 1.39 (3.53)
Two Mounting Holes 0.18 (0.46) dia

3 6 2 5 1 4
2.68 (6.80)
7 10
19
1.08 (2.74)
0.31 (0.78) 1.46 (3.70) 1.18 (2.99)
11
PTF14A-E for use with relay LY4 HoId-down clip: PYC-A1 Weight: 0.15 lb (0.07 kg)
3.09 (7.84) max 1.39 (3.53)
4 8
3 7
2 6
1 5
2.68 (6.80)
12
11 14
10
9 13
0.31 (0.78) 1.79 (4.55) 1.18 (2.99) 1.42 (3.60)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1127
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

OMRON RELAY SOCKETS P2RF, PF, PTF SERIES
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS CONT'D (IN (CM))
PF083A-E for use with relay MK2 HoId-down clip: PFC-A1 Weight: 0.05 lb (0.02 kg)
2.05 (5.2)
0.16 (0.4)
NEW!
0.28 (0.7) 2 1 8 7 Two Mounting Holes 0.17 dia (0.42) 1.39 (3.54) 1.3 (3.3) 3 4 5 6 1.61 (4.1) 0.83 (2.1)
PF113A-E for use with relay MK3 HoId-down clip: PFC-A1 Weight: 0.1 lb (0.05 kg)
2.05 (5.2)
0.28 (0.7)
2 3 1.39 (3.54) 4
1 11
10 9
Two Mounting Holes 0.18 (0.45) dia 1.3 (3.3)
5 6 0.16 (0.4)
7 8
1.69 (4.28)
1.22 (3.1)
P2RF-05-E for use with relay G2R-1 Weight: 0.07 lb (0.03 kg)
3.37 (8.6) max.
Five M3.5
2.40 (6.1) max 4 3 2
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
0.14 (0.36) dia hole
1.40 (3.6) 5
0.20 (0.5) 0.61 (1.5) max 2.40 (6.1) max
M3 or 0.14 (0.36) dia hole
Terminal Arrangement
Mounting Holes
P2RF-08-E for use with relay G2R-2 Weight: 0.07 lb (0.03 kg)
3.37 (8.6) max.
Eight M3.5
2.48 (6.3) max 6 7 5 1.40 (3.6) 8 M3 or 0.14 (0.36) dia hole 3 2 4
0.14 (0.36) dia hole
19
0.16 (0.4) 0.63 (1.60) max 2.40 (6.1) max
Terminal Arrangement
Mounting Holes
MODEL P2RF-05-E P2RF-08-E PF083A-E PF113A-E PTF08A-E PTF11A PTF14A-E DESCRIPTION SPDT relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (G2R-1 relay) DPDT relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (G2R-2 relay) 2PDT pin relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (MK2 relays) 3PDT pin relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (MK3 relays) SPDT and DPDT blade relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (LY1 and LY2 relays) 3PDT blade relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (LY3 relays) 4PDT blade relay socket, DIN rail/surface mount (LY4 relays)
DIN-3F, BAM-1000 NBS Series
RELATED PRODUCTS DIN rail Block spades
PAGE 860
1128
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MODEL COIL Pull-in Voltage AC (50/60 Hz) Pull-in Voltage DC Dropout Voltage AC/DC Maximum Voltage Coil Power AC (60 Hz) Coil Power DC Duty CONTACTS Contact Material Contact Rating 781 85% of nominal 80% of nominal 10% of nominal 110% of nominal 0.9VA 0.7W Continuous Silver alloy 20A @ 277 VAC 10A @ 240 VAC Gen. Purp. 15A @ 28 VDC 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC 1 hp @ 250 VAC 100 mA @ 5 VDC or 0.5W 2500 Vrms 1600 Vrms 20 msec 20 msec 100,000 operations 10,000,000 operations Any -40 to 131F (-40 to 55C) 0.064 lb (0.029 kg) UL-recognized component File #E43641, CSA certified File 40787, CE: IEC 61810-1 1 year Minimum load DIELECTRIC STRENGTH Coil To Contacts Across Open Contacts Pole to Pole GENERAL Operate Time Release Time Electrical Life @ Rated Load Mechanical life @ No Load Operating Position Operating Temperature Weight Agency Approvals
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

MAGNECRAFT RELAYS 781, 782, 783, 784 SERIES
The Magnecraft 781, 782, 783, and 784 Series are SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, and 4PDT plug-in style relays available with common AC and DC coil voltages. They are equipped with a mechanical ag indicator to show relay status in the manual or powered condition. Full-featured versions of these relays also include a bi-polar LED to show coil "on" or "off" status, a push button that allows momentary manual operation without the need for coil power, and a removable lock-down door that can hold the push button and relay contacts in the operate position. 783 782 781
784
SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT congurations Flag indicator Optional LED and momentary/maintained pushbutton DIN rail/surface mount sockets Mating sockets: 781: 70-781D5-1A 783: 70-783D11-1 782: 70-782D8-1 784: 70-784D14-1
782 85% of nominal 80% of nominal 10% of nominal 110% of nominal 1.2VA 0.9W Continuous Silver alloy 15A @ 120 VAC 12A @ 277 VAC 12A @ 28 VDC 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC 1 hp @ 250 VAC 100 mA @ 5 VDC or 0.5W 1600 Vrms 1600 Vrms 1600 Vrms 25 msec 20 msec 100,000 operations 10,000,000 operations Any -40 to 131F (-40 to 55C) 0.08 lb (0.036 kg) UL-recognized component File #E43641, CSA certified File 40787, CE: IEC 61810-1 1 year
783 85% of nominal 80% of nominal 10% of nominal 110% of nominal 1.5VA 1.7W Continuous Silver alloy 15A @ 120 VAC 12A @ 277 VAC 20A @ 28 VDC 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC 3/4 hp @ 250 VAC 100 mA @ 5 VDC or 0.5W 1600 Vrms 1600 Vrms 2500 Vrms
784 85% of nominal 80% of nominal 10% of nominal 110% of nominal 1.5VA 2.0W Continuous Silver alloy 15A @ 120 VAC 12A @ 277 VAC 15A @ 28 VDC 1/2 hp @ 120 VAC 3/4 hp @ 250 VAC 100 mA @ 5 VDC or 0.5W 1600 Vrms 1600 Vrms 2500 Vrms
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
Warranty
25 msec 20 msec 20 msec 20 msec 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations Any Any -40 to 131F (-40 to 55C) -40 to 131F (-40 to 55C) 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) 0.18 lb (0.08kg) UL-recognized component UL-recognized component File #E43641, CSA certified File #E43641, CSA certified File 40787, CE: IEC 61810-1 File 40787, CE: IEC 61810-1 1 year 1 year
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1129
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

MAGNECRAFT RELAYS 781, 782, 783, 784 SERIES
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.53 (1.4) 0.83 max (2.10)
1.1 max (2.79)
1.1 max (2.79)
NEW!
1.2 (3.08) 1.6 max (4.06) 1.1 max (2.79) 1.1 max (2.79)
1.60 max (4.1)
781
782
783
784
WIRING
Bottom View
Legend NO NC
1 (12) 5 (14) 9 (11) 13 (A1) 14 (A2) 1 (12) 5 (14) 9 (11) 13 (A1) 4 (42) 8 (44) 12 (41) 14 (A2) 1 (12) 5 (14) 9 (11) 13 (A1) 2 (22) 6 (24) 10 (21) 4 (42) 8 (44) 12 (41) 14 (A2) 1 (12) 5 (14) 9 (11) 13 (A1) 2 (22) 6 (24) 10 (21) 3 (32) 7 (34) 11 (31) 4 (42) 8 (44) 12 (41) 14 (A2)
781
782
783
784
Numbers correspond to Magnecraft socket terminals. Numbers in parentheses correspond to other brand socket terminals.
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
Model Description KIT Includes relay and mating socket. Leave blank to order the relay only. 781XAXC SPDT relay with flag indicator (requires 70-781D5-1A socket) 782XBXC DPDT relay with flag indicator (requires 70-783D11-1 socket) 783XCXC 3PDT relay with flag indicator (requires 70-783D11-1 socket) 784XDXC 4PDT relay with flag indicator (requires 70-784D14-1 socket) 12D 12 VDC coil (782XBXC only) 24D 24 VDC coil 24A 24 VAC coil 120A 120 VAC coil 240A 240 VAC coil (782XBXC only) KIT - 781XBXC - 24A Example: KIT-782XBXC-24A DPDT relay with 24 VAC coil and 70-782D8-1 socket included.
19
Model 781XAXM4L 782XBXM4L 783XCXM4L 784XDXM4L
Description SPDT relay with flag, LED, momentary/maintained push button (requires 70-781D5-1A socket) DPDT relay with flag, LED, momentary/maintained push button (requires 70-782D8-1 socket) 3PDT relay with flag, LED, momentary/maintained push button (requires 70-783D11-1 socket) 4PDT relay with flag, LED, momentary/maintained push button (requires 70-784D14-1 socket) 12D 12 VDC coil 24D 24 VDC coil 24A 24 VAC coil 120A 120 VAC coil 240A 240 VAC coil Example: 782XBXM4L-24A DPDT relay with 24 VAC coil, LED, and push button (socket not included).
782XBXM4L - 24A
1130
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SPECIFICATIONS WIRING
1.18 (3.0) 0.67 (1.7)
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

MAGNECRAFT RELAY SOCKETS 70-781D5-1, 70-782D-1, 70-783D-1, 70-784D-1
DESCRIPTION These Relay Sockets are for use with the Magnecraft 781, 782, 783, and 784 Series relays. These sockets have ngersafe screw terminals and can be DIN rail or surface mounted. 70-781D5-1A 70-782D8-1
Voltage Rating 300V Current Rating 15A Terminals M3.5 zinc-plated steel Dielectric Strength 2000 Vms minimum Wire Size 20-12 AWG Operating Temperature -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C) Mounting DIN rail or surface mount Flammability Rating UL 94V-0 Approvals UL-recognized component, File #E70550, CSA certied File #4078 Weight 781D5 0.07 lb (0.032 kg) 782D 0.12 lb (0.055 kg) 783D 0.14 lb (0.062 kg) 784D 0.17 lb (0.077 kg) Warranty 1 year
70-783D11-1
70-784D14-1
Hold-down clip
SOCKET ACCESSORY MODULES*

1.10 (2.8) 1.41 (3.6)
in (cm)
3.14 (8.0) 2.67 (6.8) 2.67 (6.8) 2.67 (6.8)
Plugging an accessory module into the socket adds additional features to the relay.
For use with 70-783D11-1, 70-784D14-1 MOV suppressors 70-ASMM-24 24 VAC/VDC 70-ASMM-120 120 VAC/VDC 70-ASMM-240 240 VAC/VDC Protection diodes 70-ASMD-250 6-250 VDC Green LEDs 70-ASMLG-24 24 VAC/VDC 70-ASMLG-120/240 120/240 VAC/VDC For use with 70-781D5-1A, 70-782D8-1 MOV suppressors 70-BSMM-24 24 VAC/VDC 70-BSMM-120 120 VAC/VDC 70-BSMM-240 240 VAC/VDC Protection diodes 70-BSMD-250 6-250 VDC Green LEDs 70-BSMLG-24 24 VAC/VDC 70-BSMLG-120/240 120/240 VAC/VDC
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
0.19 (0.51)
0.82 (2.1)
1.06 (2.6) 1.18 (3.0)
1.45 (3.7) 1.57 (4.0)
1.81 (4.6) 1.96 (5.0)
5 1
8 4
5 1
8 4
6 2
5 1
8 4
7 3
6 2
5 1
14 13 9
14 12
13 9
14
13
14
13
12 10 9
12 11 10 9
Socket: 70-781D5-1A Hold-down clip*: 16-781SC
70-782D8-1 16-782SC
70-783D11-1 16-783SC
70-784D14-1 16-784SC
19
*Order metal hold-down clip and accessory modules separately.
MODEL 70-781D5-1A 70-782D8-1 70-783D11-1 70-784D14-1 DINRALU DINRSTL NBS Series March 2014 DESCRIPTION Relay socket, SPDT, use with 781 Series relays Relay socket, DPDT, use with 782 Series relays Relay socket, 3PDT, use with 783 Series relays Relay socket, 4PDT, use with 784 Series relays PAGE 860 860
RELATED PRODUCTS DIN rail, aluminum, 39.4" (1m) DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m) Block spades
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1131
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

6MM INTERFACE RELAYS RV8H SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RV8H Series 6mm interface relays provide a compact solution for general purpose relay requirements. The RV8H series Interface relays are ideal for HVAC and energy management controllers, PLC and electronic systems, industrial automation, panel builders, assembly machine applications and other applications that require a high switching capability in a compact space. Installation time is greatly reduced with pre-assembled relays and sockets.
NEW!
RV8H-S-AD24 RV8H-L-AD24
Allowable Switching Power 1500 VAC, 180W DC Minimum Applicable Load 6 VDC / 10mA Mechanical Life Over 10,000,000 operations Operating Temperature -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5 to 85% non-condensing Weight RV8H-L 0.07 lbs (0.03 kg) RV8H-S 0.06 lbs (0.02 kg)
RV8H-S Spring Clamp Terminal
14 NO A1(+) Coil 2.74 (69.6) 2.92 (74.2) 11 (13+) COM A2(-) Coil 12 NC 12 (NC) .24 (6.1) 1.38 (35) 3.67 (93.4) .24 (6.1) 2.74 (69.6)
FEATURES
Class I, Division 2 and Class I, Zone 2 hazardous locations Gold plated contacts Pre-assembled relay and DIN mount socket Lever for easy locking and removal of relay
SPECIFICATIONS
Number of Poles 1 pole Contact Conguration Form C, SPDT Max. Allowable Contact Power 1500 VAC, 180W DC Rated Load 250 VAC 6A, 30 VDC 6A Contact Rating 6A Allowable Switching Voltage 400 VAC, 125 VDC
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
in (mm)
RV8H-L Screw Terminal
Internal Connection (bottom view)

2.92 (74.2)
A1(+) Coil
14 NO
11 (13+) COM A2(-) Coil
A1
A2
12
11 (13+)
14
1.38 (35) 3.46 (88)
19
SCREW TERMINALS RV8H-L-D6 RV8H-L-D9 RV8H-L-D12 RV8H-L-D18 RV8H-L-D24 RV8H-L-AD12 RV8H-L-AD18 RV8H-L-AD24 RV8H-L-AD48 RV8H-L-AD60 RV8H-L-AD110 RV8H-L-AD220 SPRING CLAMP TERMINALS RV8H-S-D6 RV8H-S-D9 RV8H-S-D12 RV8H-S-D18 RV8H-S-D24 RV8H-S-AD12 RV8H-S-AD18 RV8H-S-AD24 RV8H-S-AD48 RV8H-S-AD60 RV8H-S-AD110 RV8H-S-AD220 COIL VOLTAGE 6V 9V 12V 18V 24V 12V 18V 24V 48V 60V 110V - 125V 220V - 240V DC
RATED CURRENT 15% (mA) 35 18.6 14.6 11.6 10.6 15.5 13.3 13.7 AC/DC 4 3.4 3.4 - 3.9 3.3 - 3.6 CIRCUIT RESISTANCE 10%() AC DC 755 1365 1730 11880 17600 170 485 820 1550 2270 800 1345 1790 12230 17910
CONSUMPTION
POWER
(W)
OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
PICKUP VOLTAGE DROPOUT VOLTAGE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE
0.21 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.2 0.25 0.33 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.85 90% MAX 7% MAX 110%
31790 - 31890 32450 - 32900 65670 - 66070 65940 - 68570
Note: To order Class 1 Division 2 RV8H Relays, add -C1D2 at the end of the part number.
1132
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

FUNCTIONAL DEVICES RELAY IN A BOX RIB, RIBT PILOT SERIES
The Relay In A Box (RIB) Pilot Series controls most BAS, HVAC, low-horsepower motor and lighting applications. The relays come mounted and pre-wired in a housing, saving the installer the time, trouble, and expense of buying separate components (relay, socket, mounting rail, and enclosure) and assembling them on the job or at the shop. The RIB Pilot Series has a protruding 1/2" or 3/4" NPT nipple from which all wires exit (except T series). To install, remove a conduit knockout in the equipment, insert the wires and nipple through the hole, tighten the locknut, and connect the wires.
RIB Pilot Series - 10A Relays The RIB Pilot Series has relay contacts rated for 10A and is used to control light electrical loads, drive power relays/ contactors, or sense the voltage being fed to electrical loads. The RIB Pilot Series requires a low coil-drive current and is provided with circuitry to allow powering the relay coil from a wide range of AC or DC voltages. RIBT Series - High/Low Voltage Separation The RIBT Series is designed to provide physically separate entrances for connections to the relay input coil and output contacts. Relay contact wires exit the housing through a 1/2" or 3/4" NPT nipple. The cover of the RIBT Series is removable, and the coil drive wires can enter the housing through one of two convenient openings with star bushings or 1/2" conduit. The coil drive wires are secured to screw terminals within a separate wiring compartment in the RIBT Series. Most of the RIB's in the Pilot Series are also available in the RIBT Series. FEATURES
RIBU1C
RIBU1S
Convenient and economical to use Relay status indicator via LED Coil uses low current and accepts a wide range of AC and DC voltages Closed/Open/Auto switch option available Nipple- or screw-mountable Compact, gray plastic enclosure Color-coded wires for eliminating errors UL listed for UL916 Energy Management and UL864 Fire Made in the USA
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL
Frequnecy Wire Length Life Rating 50/60 Hz 16" (40.6 cm) 10 million cycles minimum mechanical Relay Status LED, ON - relay activated Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (-34 to 60F) Operating Humidity 5-95% RH non-condensing Housing Type Plenum rated, NEMA 1, NEMA 4 Conduit Hub 1/2" NPT, 3/4" NPT Dimensions A size enclosures 1.7" H x 2.8" W x 1.5" D (4.32 x 7.11 x 3.81 cm) B size enclosures 4.0" H x 4.0" W x 1.8" D (10.16 x 10.16 x 4.57 cm) G size enclosures 2.3" H x 3.2"W x 1.8" D (5.84 x 8.13 x 4.57 cm) Approvals Warranty UL listed, UL 916 Energy Management UL 864 Fire, cUL listed, CSFM, UL File S7312 1 year
19
Coil pull-in/drop-out (nominal values)

COIL DRIVE 10-30 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 208-277 VAC PULL-IN DROP-OUT DC AC DC AC 10 9 2.8 2.1 20 18 3.8 3 102 9 176 13
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1133
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

FUNCTIONAL DEVICES RELAY IN A BOX RIB, RIBT PILOT SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS - PILOT SERIES
MODEL RIBU1C* RIBU1C-N4 RIBU2C* RIBH1C* RIBH1C-N4 RIBH2C* RIBU1SC* RIBH1SC* RIBU1S* RIBU2SC RIBU2S2 RIBU1SM RIBH1S* TYPE
1-SPDT 2-SPDT 1-SPDT 2-SPDT
10-30 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 50/60 Hz 10-30 VAC 208-277 VAC 50/60 Hz
COIL DRIVE
10-30 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
SIZE/ OVR HUB SW A-1/2 G-3/4 A-1/2 G-3/4 G-1/2 G-1/2

Yes-2 Yes-2 Yes
RELAY CONTACT RATINGS

10A resistive 10A resistive 480 VA pilot duty 480 VA ballast 600W tungsten 240W tungsten 1/3 hp for N.O. 1/6 hp for N.C. 1/4 hp for N.O. 1/8 hp for N.C.
10-30 VAC 208-277 VAC 50/60 Hz
120/240/277 VAC Relay #1 (blue) NC 28 VDC 240/277 VAC COM (yellow) 277 VAC NO (orange) 120 VAC N.O. 120 VAC N.C. Relay #2 (if present) 120/240 VAC NC (gray) 120/240 VAC COM (purple) 277 VAC NO 277 VAC (brown)
Auto Manual N.C. - Closed Open N.O. - Closed
NEW!
RELAY CONTACT WIRING RELAY COIL DRIVE DATA
277 VAC Relay #1 277 VAC (orange) Closed 277 VAC (orange) Open 120 VAC N.O. Auto 120 VAC N.C. 120-240 VAC Relay #2 of RIBU2S2 120-240 VAC Closed (brown) 277 VAC Open (brown) 277 VAC
Auto Relay #2 of RIBU2SC (gray) NC COM (purple) NO (brown) STATUS = 2nd Pole of switch of RIBU1SM, RIBH1SM Closed Open Auto (brown) (purple) (gray) (blue) (yellow) (orange) (gray) (purple) (brown) Wiring Common - White/Yellow wire 24 VAC/VDC - White/Blue wire 120 VAC - White/Black wire 208-277 VAC - White/Brown wire Input Current 24 mA @ 18 VAC 20 mA @ 20 VDC 32 mA @ 24 VAC 24 mA @ 30 VDC 40 mA @ 30 VAC 36 mA @ 30 VDC 31 mA @ 120 VAC (RIB2401D) 36 mA @ 208-277 VAC (RIB2402D) Wiring Common - White/Red wire Relay#1 - White/Black wire Relay#2 - White/Blue wire Relay#3 - White/Yellow wire Relay#4 - White/Brown wire (if present) Input Current 30 mA @ 10 VAC 12 mA @ 10 VDC 32 mA @ 12 VAC 14 mA @ 12 VDC 42 mA @ 24 VAC 16 mA @ 24 VDC 50 mA @ 30 VAC 18 mA @ 30 VDC No Relay Switch Only Wiring Relay #1 Common - White/Yellow wire 10-30 VAC/VDC - White/Blue wire 120 VAC - White/Black wire 208-277 VAC - White/Brown wire (yellow) Relay #2 (if present) Common Common - White/Purple wire (blue) N.C. 10-30 VAC/VDC - Gray/White wire (orange) N.O. 120 VAC - White/Red wire 208-277 VAC - White/Orange wire Input Current 30 mA @ 10 VAC 32 mA @ 12 VAC 42 mA @ 24 VAC 50 mA @ 30 VAC 25 mA @ 120 VAC 35 mA @ 208-277 VAC 12 mA @ 10 VDC 14 mA @ 12 VDC 16 mA @ 24 VDC 18 mA @ 30 VDC
1-SPDT 1-SPDT 1-SPST-NO** 1-SPST-NO** 1-SPDT 2-SPST-NO** 1-SPST-NO** 1-SPST-NO**
10A resistive 480 VA pilot duty G-1/2 480 VA ballast 600W tungsten Yes 10-30 VAC/VDC 240W tungsten G-3/4 120 VAC 1/3 hp for N.O. 50/60 Hz B-3/4 Yes-2 1/6 hp for N.C. 1/4 hp for N.O. Yes + 1/8 hp for N.C.
G-1/2 G-1/2
Status Yes
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RIBH1SM
1-SPST-NO**
10-30 VAC/VDC 208-277 VAC 50/60 Hz
Status Contact on RIBU1SM and RIBH1SM: Yes + 5A max @ 277 VAC
G-1/2
Status
RIB2401D* RIB2401D-N4 RIB2402D RIB2402D-N4
1-DPDT
24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 50/60- Hz
A-1/2
1-DPDT
24 VAC/VDC 208-277 VAC 50/60 Hz
A-1/2
10A resistive 10A resistive 1/2 hp for N.O. 1/3 hp for N.C. 10A resistive 10A resistive 180 VA pilot duty 1/8 hp for N.C. 10A resistive 10A resistive 480 VA pilot duty 480 VA ballast 600W tungsten 240W tungsten 1/3 hp for N.O. 1/6 hp for N.C. 1/4 hp for N.O. 1/8 hp for N.C.
30 VDC 277 VAC 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC 30 VDC 277 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC 120-277 VAC 28 VDC 240-277 VAC 277 VAC 120 VAC N.O. 120 VAC N.C. 120-240 VAC 120-240 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC
NC COM NO NC COM NO
Relay #1 Relay #2 Relay #3
RIBL3C RIBL4C
3-SPST-NO 3-SPST-NO 1-SPDT
10-30 VAC/VDC 50/60 Hz
B-1/2 B-1/2
(black) (black) (blue) (blue)
19
(yellow) (yellow) Relay #4 (if present) (gray) NC (purple) COM NO (brown) (blue) (yellow) (orange)
SIB02S
SPDT Manual Switch
A-1/2
Yes
Switch ratings 20A
277 VAC
Order by model number * Models may be ordered in RIBT Series with high/low voltage separation. ** Can be ordered normally closed by adding - NC after model number. N4 has NEMA 4 housing
1134
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL
Frequency Wire Length Life Rating 50/60 Hz 16" (40.6 cm) 10 million cycles minimum mechanical Relay Status LED, ON - relay activated Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (-34 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing Housing Type NEMA 1, plenum rated Conduit Hub 1/2" NPT, 3/4" NPT Dimensions A and G size enclosures 2.3" H x 3.2" W x 1.8" D (5.84 x 8.13 x 4.57 cm) B size enclosures 4" H x 4" W x 1.8" D (10.16 x 10.16 x 4.57 cm) March 2014
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

FUNCTIONAL DEVICES RELAY IN A BOX RIB, RIBT POWER SERIES
The Relay In a Box (RIB) Power Series controls most BAS, HVAC, low-horsepower motor and lighting applications. The relays come mounted and pre-wired in a housing, saving the installer the time, trouble and expense of buying separate components (relay, socket, mounting rail, and enclosure) and assembling them on the job or at the shop. The RIB Power Series has a protruding 1/2" or 3/4" NPT nipple from which all wires exit (except T series). To install, remove a conduit knockout in the equipment, insert the wires and nipple through the hole, tighten the locknut, and connect the wires. RIB Power Series - 20, 30A Relays The RIB Power Series has relay contacts rated for 20 and 30A. They require modest coil drive current and are used for direct switching and control of heavy electrical circuits, such as large resistive, motor, and lighting loads.
RIB, RIBT Power Series
RIBT Series - High/Low Voltage Separation The RIBT Series is designed to provide physically separate entrances for connections to the relay input coil and output contacts. Relay contact wires exit the housing through a 1/2" or 3/4" NPT nipple. The cover of the RIBT Series is removable and, with star bushings or 1/2" conduit, the coil drive wires can enter the housing through one of two convenient openings. The coil drive wires are secured to screw terminals within a separate wiring compartment in the RIBT. Most of the RIBs in the Power Series are also available in the T Series.
FEATURES
Convenient and economical to use Relay status indicator via LED Coil uses low current and accepts a wide range of AC and DC voltages Closed/Open/Auto switch option available Nipple or screw mountable Compact, gray plastic enclosure Color-coded wires for eliminating errors UL listed for UL916 Energy Management and UL864 Fire Made in the USA
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
19
Approvals Warranty UL listed, UL 916 Energy Management, UL 864 Fire, cUL listed, CSFM, UL File S7312 1 year

COIL DRIVE 24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 208-277 VAC 480 VAC PULL-IN DROP-OUT DC AC DC AC 22 18 3.8 3 85 35 160 60 340 140
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1135
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

FUNCTIONAL DEVICES RELAY IN A BOX RIB, RIBT POWER SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS - POWER SERIES
MODEL RIB2401B* RIB2402B* TYPE
1-SPDT
COIL DRIVE
24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 24 VAC/VDC 208 - 277 VAC
SIZE- OVR HUB SW

G-1/2
RELAY CONTACT RATINGS*

20A resistive 1 hp 2 hp 20A ballast N.O. 10A ballast N.C. 10A tungsten N.O. 770 VA pilot duty 1110 VA pilot duty 20A resistive 1 hp 2 hp 20A ballast N.O. 10A ballast N.C. 10A tungsten N.O. 770 VA pilot duty 1110 VA pilot duty 20A resistive 20A resistive 15A resistive 1 hp 2 hp 3 hp 20A ballast 770 VA pilot duty 1,158 VA pilot duty 1,110 VA pilot duty 1,640 VA pilot duty
1-SPDT
G-1/2
277 VAC 120 VAC 277 VAC 120/277 VAC 120/277 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC 277 VAC
RIB2401SB* RIB2402SB* RIB01P RIB02P RIB04P
1-SPST-NO 1-SPST-NO 1-DPDT 1-DPDT
24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 24 VAC/VDC 208 - 277 VAC 120 VAC 208-277 VAC
G-1/2 G-1/2 B-1/2 B-1/2
Yes Yes
277 VAC 120 VAC 277 VAC 120/277 VAC 120/277 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC 277 VAC
NEW!
N.C. Common N.O.
RELAY COIL DRIVE DATA
(blue) (yellow) (orange)
Wiring Common - White/Yellow wire 24 VAC/VDC - White/Blue wire 120 VAC - White/Black wire 208-277 VAC - White/Brown wire
(orange) (orange)
Closed Open Auto
Input Current
75 mA @ 24 VAC 32 mA @ 24 VDC 42 mA @ 120 VAC 62 ma @ 208/277 VAC
For normally closed, add -NC after model number when ordering.
1-DPDT
480 VAC
B-1/2
RIB24P*
300 VAC 28 VDC, 15 VDC 600 VAC 120 VAC 240-277 VAC 480-600 VAC 277-480 VAC 120 VAC 240 VAC 277 VAC 480 VAC
(blue) (yellow) (orange) (gray) (purple) (brown)
N.C. Common N.O. N.C. Common N.O.
Wiring 120 VAC - White/Black wires 208-277 VAC - White/Brown wires 480 VAC - White/Green wires Input Current 100 mA @ 120-480 VAC Wiring 24 VAC
White/Yellow wires
50 mA @ 24 VDC
1-DPDT
24 VAC/VDC
G-1/2
20A resistive 1 hp 2 hp 20A ballast N.O. 10A ballast N.C. 10A tungsten N.O. 770 VA pilot duty 1110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC 120 VAC 277 VAC 120/277 VAC 120/277 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC 120 VAC 240-277 VAC 120 VAC 277-480 VAC 120 VAC 277 VAC
Input Current
125 mA @ 24 VAC
RIB2401SBC*
1-SPDT
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC
G-1/2
Yes-2
RIB2402SBC* RIB24S2* RIB01S2 RIB02S2 RIB04S2 RIB243P* RIB013P RIB023P RIB043P
1-SPDT
24 VAC/VDC 208 - 277 VAC 24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC
G-1/2
Yes-2
Auto Manual N.C. - Closed Open N.O. - Closed
(yellow) Common (blue) N.C. (orange) N.O.
Wiring Common - White/Yellow wire 24 VAC/VDC - White/Blue wire 120 VAC - White/Black wire 208-277 VAC - White/Brown wire Input Current
75 mA @ 24 VAC 42 mA @ 120 VAC 32 mA @ 24 VDC
1-DPST-NO 208-277 VAC 480 VAC 1-3PST-NO 1-3PST-NO 1-3PST-NO 1-3PST-NO 24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 208-277 VAC 480 VAC
B-1/2
20A resistive 1 hp 2 hp 10A tungsten 20A ballast Yes Double 770 VA pilot duty Pole 1,110 VA pilot duty
Double Pole Switch Relay Pole #1 Relay Pole #2 (orange) (brown) Closed (orange) (brown) Open Auto For normally closed, add -NC after model number when ordering.
Wiring 24 VAC/VDC White/Yellow wires 120 VAC White/Black wires 208-277 VAC White/Brown wires 480 VAC White/Green wires Input Current
125 mA @ 24 VAC 50 mA @ 24 VDC 75 mA @ 120 VAC 95 mA @ 208-277 VAC 95 mA @ 480 VAC
B-1/2 B-1/2 B-1/2 B-1/2
19
RIB24P30
1-DPDT 24 VAC/VDC A-3/4
20A resistive 20A resistive 15A resistive 1 hp 2 hp 3 hp 5 hp 7.5 hp 20A ballast 1466 VA 2112 VA 30A resistive 25A resistive 15A resistive 1 hp 2 hp 3 hp 20A ballast 770 VA pilot duty 1,158 VA pilot duty 1,110 VA pilot duty 1,640 VA pilot duty
300 VAC 28 VDC 600 VAC 120 VAC, 1 PH 240-277 VAC, 1 PH 480-600 VAC 1 PH 240 VAC, 3 PH 480 VAC 3 PH 277-480 VAC 240 VAC, 3 PH 480 VAC, 3 PH 300 VAC 28 VDC 600 VAC 120 VAC 240-277 VAC 480-600 VAC 277-480 VAC 120 VAC 240 VAC 277 VAC 480 VAC
N.O. N.O. N.O.
Wiring 24 VAC/VDC - White/Yellow wires 120 VAC - White/Black wires 208-277 VAC - White/Brown wires 480 VAC - White/Green wires Input Current
190 mA @ 24 VAC 140 mA @ 30 VDC 140 mA @ 120 VAC 170 mA @ 208-277 VAC 120 mA @ 480 VAC
For normally closed, add -NC after model number when ordering. (blue) (yellow) (orange) (gray) (purple) (brown)
N.C. Common N.O. N.C. Common N.O.
Wiring 24 VAC/VDC - White/Yellow wires Input Current

125 mA @ 24 VAC 50 mA @ 24 VDC
*Not rated for electronic ballast
Order by model number * Models may be ordered in RIBT Series with high/low voltage separation. ** Can be ordered normally closed by adding - NC after the model number. N4 has NEMA 4 housing
1136
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

RELAY IN A BOX LATCHING RELAY SERIES RIBL LATCHING SERIES
The RIBL Latching Series relays are activated by pulse commands from a controller. The relay contacts are mechanically latched in the closed position and the load will remain on in the event of a control panel failure period. If power is completely lost the contacts will remain in their last state and the load will activate upon the return of normal power or emergency power.
RIBL12B
NEMA 1 Plastic enclosure UL Listed Energy efcient (no coil draw when relay is active) Optional override switch Optional status LED Optional auxilary contacts for status control
RIBL24SBM
SPECIFICATIONS
Operate Time Pulse Length Frequency Wire Type Life Rating 50 ms 30 seconds (maximum) 50/60 Hz 16" (46 cm) 600 v 1 million cycles minimum mechanical Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (-34 to 60C) 5 to 95% RH non-condensing Operating Humidity Housing Type NEMA 1, plenum rated Conduit Hub 0.5" NPT nipple Dimensions B, SB 1.7" x 2.8" x 1.5" (4.32 x 7.11 x 3.81 cm) 2.3" x 3.2" x 1.8" BM, SBM (5.84 x 8.13 x 4.57 cm) Approvals UL listed, UL508, C-UL, CE, RoHS Warranty 1 year
WIRING
Wht/Blu 24 Vac/dc () LATCH Wht/Yel 24 Vac/dc (+)
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
Org Line
Org Load Wht/Red 24 Vac/dc () UNLATCH
Model RIBL12B RIBL12BM RIBL12SB RIBL12SBM RIBL24B RIBL24BM RIBL24SB RIBL24SBM Coil Voltage Coil Current Latch / Unlatch Voltage Contact Arrangement Contact Rating LED Indication
None 182mA @ 10 VAC, 250mA @ 12 VAC, 165mA @ 10VDC, 198mA @ 12 VDC, 250mA @ 15VDC Latch / Unlatch: 10 VDC / 11 VAC Minimum One SPST latching relay, dual coil Latch / Unlatch: 20 VDC / 22 VAC Minimum 20A resistive @ 120277 VAC, 20A ballast @ 120-277 VAC, 16A electronic ballast @ 120-277 VAC, 5540 W tungsten @ 277 VAC, 720 VA @ 120-277 VAC, 2 hp @ 277 VAC, 3 hp @ 240 VAC, 1.5 hp @ 120 VAC ON = Voltage detected (contact closed) None ON = Voltage detected (contact closed) None ON = Voltage detected (contact closed) None ON = Voltage detected (contact closed)
19
12 VAC / DC
24 VAC / DC
175mA @ 20 VAC, 210mA @ 24 VAC, 92mA @ 20VDC, 110mA @ 24 VDC, 138mA @ 30 VDC
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1137
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

DESCRIPTION The dry contact input RIB Series is controlled by Class 2 circuits with a dry contact from a BAS controller, thermostat, switch, another relay, or a solid-state switch. The power to energize the RIB Series comes from the load being controlled or a local power source near the relay. The relay contacts are isolated from the input power and the dry contact input. FEATURES Remote power input, dry contact control LED indication UL listed Optional override switch
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES RELAY IN A BOX DRY CONTACT INPUT SERIES RIB01BDC, RIB01SBDC, RIB02BDC, RIB02SBDC, RIB21CDC
NEW!
RIB01SBDC RIB21CDC Output Type SPDT, SPST-NO 16" (40.6 cm) Wire Length Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (-34.4 to 60F) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing Housing Type NEMA 1, plemum, NEMA 1, plenum Conduit Hub 1/2" NPT RIB01, RIB02 Dimensions 2.3" H x 3.2" W x 1.8" D (5.8 x 8.1 x 4.6 cm), RIB21CDC 1.7" H x 2.8" W x 1.5" D (4.3 x 7.1 x 3.8 cm) UL File E68805 Approval Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
Coil Rating Contact Rating 120 VAC @ 42 mA, 208-277 VAC @ 62 mA, 120-277 VAC @ 50 mA 20A resistive @ 277 VAC 1110 VA pilot duty @ 277 VAC 770 VA pilot duty @ 120 VAC 20A ballast 277 VAC N.O. 10A ballast 277 VAC N.C 240W tungsten 120 VAC N.C. 2 hp 277 VAC 1 hp 120 VAC, 10A general use @ 250 VAC 10A resistive @ 30 VDC 1/2 hp 125-250 VAC 470 VA pilot duty 120-240 VAC 50/60 Hz SPST, 7 VDC, 1A minimum
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
Frequency Controlling Contact
WIRING
RIB21CDC 120-277 VAC Black Neutral or phase red POWER INPUT RIB01BDC RIB02BDC 120 VAC 208-277 VAC Black Black Neutral white Neutral or phase red
INSTALLATION
Contact Output (orange) N.O.
Power 208-480 VAC Low-Voltage Class 2 Wiring Power Input
RIB
Dry Contact Input (Class 2)* (white/red) (white/blue)

POWER INPUT RIB02SBDC RIB01SBDC 208-277 VAC 120 VAC Black Black Neutral white Neutral or phase red
(yellow) Common (blue) N.C.
19
RIB
Dry Contact Input (Class 2)* (white/red) (white/blue)
Closed Auto Open
orange orange
* If more than one dry contact RIB is used in common, connect all white/blue wires together
BAS Controller, Thermostat, or Other Dry Contact Switch Minimum rating 7 VDC, 1A
Relay Contact RIB located at RTU or Load
Starter
RTU or Other Load
MODEL RIB01BDC RIB01SBDC RIB02BDC RIB02SBDC RIB21CDC RIB21CDC-N4 DESCRIPTION Dry contact input RIB, 120 VAC, SPDT, 20A Dry contact input RIB, 120 VAC, SPST-NO, 20A, override switch Dry contact input RIB, 208-277 VAC, SPDT, 20A Dry contact input RIB, 208-277 VAC, SPST-NO, 20A, override switch Dry contact input RIB, 120-277 VAC, SPDT, 10A Dry contact input RIB, 120-277 VAC, SPDT, 10A, NEMA 4 housing
1138
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES LONWORKS RELAY IN A BOX RIBTW SERIES
The RIBTW Series of general-purpose power relays are controlled from a remote location using a LONWorks network. The relay is powered locally and communication with the network is over a twisted pair of wires. Using standard network variables (SNVTs) the relay can be commanded on and off over the network and the relay state is communicated. A separate digital input is provided to conveniently allow the state of a status feedback signal from a current switch (or other switched feedback device) to be communicated on the LONWorks network. Enclosed LonWorks relay with 20A contacts Additional dry contact input (powered by Class 2 circuit) Models with manual override switch LED indication of network status, relay status and service status UL listed and LonMark certied, CE RIBTW2401B
SPECIFICATIONS
Coil Rating Contact Rating 24 VAC @ 111 mA, 24 VDC @ 81 mA, 120 VAC @ 96 mA, 208-277 VAC @ 105 mA 20 A resitive @ 277 VAC, 20 A ballast N.O. @ 120/277 VAC, 10 A ballast N.C. @120/277 VAC, 10 A tungsten N.O. @ 120 VAC, 1110 VA piot duty @ 277 VAC, 770 VA pilot duty @ 120 VAC, 2 hp @ 277 VAC, 1 hp @ 120 VAC 50/60 Hz SPDT, SPST-NO Continous FTT-10A
WIRING
LON LON 24 VAC/VDC Common Dry contact input Class 2 circuit LON LON 24 VAC/VDC Common Dry contact input Class 2 circuit
Closed Open
Auto
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
(white/yellow) (white/black) (blue) (yellow) (orange) Neutral 120 VAC N.C. Comm N.O. or (white/brown) 208-270 VAC
(white/yellow) (white/black) (orange) (orange) Neutral 120 VAC or (white/brown) 208-270 VAC
Frequency Relay Type Duty Transceiver Type LED Indication Green Network status Red Relay status Yellow Service status Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (35 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing Housing Type NEMA 1, plenum rated Conduit Hub 1/2' NPT Dimensions 4"H x 4"W x 1.8"D (10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm) with " NPT Nipple Approvals UL listed le #E68805, CE certied, LonMark 3.3 certied, FCC, ROHS 0.82 lb (0.38 Kg) Weight 1 year Warranty
RIBTW2401B, RIBTW2402B
RIBTW2401SB, RIBTW2402SB
NOTE: When using 120, 200, or 277 VAC, there will be residual voltage on 24V terminals; this is not intended to power external devices.
APPLICATION
NODE OBJECT
NV1 nvi Request NV2 nvo Status
DESCRIPTION Command to open/close relay Command status of relay Default state of relay on/off Communication timer Invert status of Digital-In Max time between updates
SNVT NAME nvi Value nvo Fb Value nci Default nci Invert nci Max Send T
SNVT TYPE
SNVT_switch SNVT_switch SNVT_switch SNVT_lev_disc SNVT_elapsed_tm
CLOSED LOOP ACTUATOR

NV1 nvi Value NV2 nvo Value Fb
nci Max Receive T SNVT_elapsed_tm
nci Default nci Max Receive T
OPEN LOOP SENSOR OBJECT

NV1 nvo Value nci Invert nci Max Send T nci Min Send T
Min time between updates nci Min Send T SNVT_elapsed_tm The relay will go to the default state when the communication timer times out. Setting the timer value to zero will cause the communication to never time out.
19
MODEL RIBTW2401B-LN RIBTW2402B-LN RIBTW2401SB-LN RIBTW2402SB-LN DESCRIPTION LonWorks RIB relay, SPDT, 24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC power input LonWorks RIB relay, SPDT, 24 VAC/VDC or 208-277 VAC power input LonWorks RIB relay, SPST-NO with manual override switch, 24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC power input LonWorks RIB relay, SPST-NO with manual override switch, 24 VAC/VDC or 208-277 VAC power input
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1139
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

FUNCTIONAL DEVICES BACNET RELAY IN A BOX RIBTW2401B-BC
DESCRIPTION
The Model RIBTW2401B-BC is an open-protocol relay controlled from a remote location using a BACnet network. These are also available in the LonWorks protocol. The relay is powered locally, and communication with the network is over a twisted pair of wires. Using standard BACnet or LonWorks objects, the relay can be commanded on and off over the network and the relay state communicated back. A separate digital input is provided to conveniently allow the state of a status feedback signal from a current switch (or other switched feedback device) to be communicated on the network. Click on the related parts and pricing tab for a more complete listing of available models.
NEW!
RIBTW2401B-BC
FEATURES Enclosed BACnet relay with 20A contacts Additional dry contact input (powered by Class 2 circuit) LED indication of network status and relay status UL listed and BACnet compatible, CE
APPLICATION
Network 24 VAC/VDC
WIRING
BACnet Compatible Relay
Dry contact input (Class 2 circuit)
Dry contact Digital input REF A() B(+)
0 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112
Relay override
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
MSTP
MS/TP ADDRESS
Occupancy sensor
(orange) (yellow)
Connect jumper for terminating resistor. Disconnect for no terminating resistor. *24 V or 120 V required but not both
24 VAC/VDC Common
Line Neutral
(white/yellow) (white/black) (blue) Neutral 120 VAC N/C
(yellow) Comm
Load
NOTE: When using 120 VAC, there will be residual voltage on 24V terminals; this is not to be used for powering external devices.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Contact Rating 24 VAC @ 11 mA, 24 VDC @ 81 mA, 120 VAC @ 96 mA 20A resistive @ 277 VAC, 20A ballast N.O. @ 120/277 VAC, N.C. @ 277 VAC, 10A tungsten N.O. @ 120 VAC, 1110 VA pilot duty @ 277 VAC, 770 VA pilot duty @ 120 VAC, 2 hp @ 277 VAC, 1 hp @ 120 VAC 50/60 Hz SPDT Continuous duty 10 million cycles minimum 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800, and 115200 Green: network status, Red: relay status Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (35 to 60C) 5% to 95% non-condensing Operating Humidity Housing Type NEMA 1, plenum rated Conduit Hub 1/2" NPT Dimensions 4" H x 4" W x 1.8" D (10.2 x 10.2 x 4.6 cm); 1/2" NPT nipple Approvals UL listed le #E68805, CE certied, BACnet certied Weight 0.83 lb (0.38 Kg) Warranty 1 year LED Indication
19
Frequency Relay Type Duty Life Expectancy Baud Rate
MODEL RIBTW2401B-BC RIBTW2402B-BC DESCRIPTION BACnet RIB relay, SPDT, 24 VAC/VDC or 120 VAC power input BACnet RIB relay, SPDT, 24 VAC/VDC or 208/277VAC power input
1140
Baud rate
MSB
LSB
(orange) N/O
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Enclosed wireless relay with 20A contacts Eliminates hard wiring LED indication of relay status Continuous duty coil
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES WIRELESS CONTROL RELAYS RIBW SERIES
The RIBW Series wireless control relays are enclosed and offer easy installation without the expense of traditional hard wiring. The control relays are used in tandem with the wireless transmitter Model RIBWE24TDC-EN. Relays can be mounted up to 100 ft (30 m) from the transmitter.
RIBW01B-EN2
RIBW277B-EN2
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
SPECIFICATIONS
Relay Type Coil Rating RIBW01B-EN RIBW227B-EN Frequency Contact Rating SPDT, continuous duty TRANSMITTER Supply Voltage 24 VAC @ 42 mA; 24 VDC @ 38 mA, 50/60 Hz Frequency 315 mHz Transmission Power 10mW EIRP, maximum LED Indication On: input activated; slow blink: input deactivated; fast blink: transmitting Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (35 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing 1.7"H x 2.8"W x 1.5"D Dimensions (4.3 x 7.1 x 3.8) Housing Type NEMA 1, plenum rated Wire Length 16" (46 cm) 600V Warranty 1 year
120 VAC @ 73 mA 277 VAC @ 80 mA 50/60 Hz 20A resistive @ 120/277 VAC, 20A ballast N.O. @ 120/277 VAC, 10A ballast N.C. @120 VAC, 1110 VA pilot duty @ 120 VAC, 2 HP @ 277 VAC, 1 HP @ 120 VAC Life Expectancy 10 million cycles minimum LED Indication Red: on = energized Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (35 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing Dimensions 2.3"H x 3.2"W x 1.8"D (5.8 x 8.1 x 4.6 cm) with 0.5" (1.27 cm) NPT nipple Housing Type NEMA 1, plenum rated Wire Length 16" (46CM) 600 v Approvals UL Listed File E68805, CE, Rohs Warranty 1 year
19
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1141
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

WIRING
(blue)
FUNCTIONAL DEVICES WIRELESS CONTROL RELAYS RIBW SERIES
(black) 120 or 277 VAC Wireless receiver control unit (orange)
NEW!
(white/yellow) 24 VAC/VDC (white/yellow) 24 VAC/VDC Dry contact input (white/blue) (white/red) Wireless transmitter control unit Wireless transmission Low voltage control input (white/black) (white/black)
(white) Neutral
Relay Wiring
Transmitter Wiring
MODEL RIBW01B-EN2 RIBW24B-EN2 RIBW208B-EN2 RIBW240B-EN2 RIBW277B-EN2 RIBWE24TDC-EN2 DESCRIPTION 2-way wireless encl relay dry-contact, 20A 120 VAC 2-way wireless encl relay dry-contact, 20A 24 VAC 2-way wireless encl relay dry-contact, 20A 208 VAC 2-way wireless encl relay dry-contact, 20A 240 VAC 2-way wireless encl relay dry-contact, 20A 277 VAC Wireless trasmitter for RIB relays
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Wireless switch transmitter 679 WWS Series 679 WWS Series switch cover WWS Series swtich cover plates
19
1142
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MR-100 Relay sections (snap-apart) Voltage input
1 or 4 24 VDC @ 18 mA 24 VAC @ 18 mA 120 VAC @ 18 mA 230 VAC @ 18 mA SPDT
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
AIR PRODUCTS AND CONTROLS MULTI-VOLTAGE CONTROL RELAYS MR SERIES
The MR Series multi-voltage control relays offer SPDT or DPDT contacts which may be operated by multiple input control voltages.Each relay section contains a red LED, which indicates the relay coil is energized. Relay sections may be snapped apart from standard four- or eight-section assemblies and used independently.These relays are ideal for applications where local or remote contacts are required for control of electrical loads and general-purpose switching. They are suitable for use with HVAC, temperature control, re alarm, security, building automation, and lighting control systems.
MR-101/T
MR-601/T MR-801/S
Multi-voltage input, SPDT or DPDT control relays LED indication when relay is energized Snap-apart relay sections from standard four or eightsection assemblies Track, spacer, or enclosed mounting options Dust-proof housing with LED viewing holes on enclosed models Relays rated for 10 million mechanical operations
MR-101/C
MR-104/T
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
SERIES MR-200
24 VDC @ 40 mA 24 VAC @ 40 mA 120 VAC @ 40 mA 230 VAC @ 40 mA
MR-600
1, 4, or 8 24 VAC, 24 VDC @15 mA
MR-800
24 VDC @ 22 mA 24 VAC @ 60 mA 120 VAC @ 20 mA SPDT
Contact type Contact rating
DPDT 10A resistive @ 120 VAC 7A resistive @ 230 VAC/28 VDC N.O.: 1/6 hp @ 120 VAC N.C.: 1/8 hp @ 120 VAC 32 to 120F (0 to 49C) LED Track or enclosed
10A @ 120 VAC 7A @ 24 VDC
10A @ 120 VAC 7A @ 30 VDC/277 VAC 1/4 hp @ 120 VAC 1/3 hp @ 230 VAC
Temperature Indication Mounting Wiring Enclosure option Manual override Dimensions Enclosure dimensions Agency approvals
* Specifications are for each relay section.
32 to 120F (0 to 49C)
19
Track Solid or stranded, 12 to 22 AWG terminals
Track or spacer
18-gauge metal back, ABS-94VO plastic cover 1/2" knockouts 3.25"H x 2.13"W x 1.5"D (8.25 x 5.39 x 3.81 cm) 5.13"H x 3.13"W x 2.5"D (13 .46 x 7.95 x 6.35 cm) or 5.13"H x 9.5"W x 2.5"D (13.46 x 24.13 x 6.35 cm) UL-recognized component, File #S3403 Enclosed model UL listed, File #S3403
On/Auto/Off Switch 3.5"H x 2.13"W x 1.38"D (8.9 x 5.4 x 3.5 cm) UL-recognized component, File #S3403
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1143
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

WIRING
SPDT Contacts 10A @ 120 VAC
NC C NO
AIR PRODUCTS AND CONTROLS MULTI-VOLTAGE CONTROL RELAYS MR SERIES
DPDT Contacts 10A @ 120 VAC

NC C
NO NC C NO
Relay Energized Indicator
NEW!
NC C NO

NC C NO
Input Control Voltage

24 VDC 24 VAC 120 VAC 230 VAC
18/24 () (+)
115 230

24 VDC 24 VAC
18/24 () (+)
115
230
Supply 24 VAC 24 VDC 24 VAC/VDC Control Input Common
SUP CTL COM
ON AUTO OFF
24
115

24 VDC 24 VAC 120 VAC () AC N (+) AC H
A.C. A.C. N L2 H L1
A.C. A.C. N L2 H L1
120 VAC 230 VAC
Note:
Terminal strip connections
Multisection relays MR-604 and MR-608 have all supply and all common terminals factory jumpered together.
MR-101, -104
MR-201, -204
MR-601, -604, -608
MR-801, -804, -808
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
COIL VOLTAGE
SECTIONS
DPDT (10A) SPDT (10A)
MOUNTING
Enclosure (included) Track (included) Spacers (included)
SWITCH AGENCY APPROVALS

Manual Override On/Auto/Off
120 VAC
230 VAC
24 VDC
24 VAC
19
MR-101/T MR-101/C MR-104/T MR-104/C MR-201/T MR-201/C MR-204/T MR-204/C MR-601/T MR-604/T MR-608/T MR-801/T MR-801/S MR-804/T MR-804/S MR-808/T MR-808/S
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X
1 1 4 4 1 1 4 4 1 4 8 1 1 4 4 8 8
X X X X X X
UL
MODEL
X X X X X X X
Recognized Listed Recognized Listed Recognized Listed Recognized Listed Recognized Recognized Recognized Recognized Recognized Recognized Recognized Recognized Recognized
X X X X
1144
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
CSFM
MEA
X X X X X X X X
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

FUNCTIONAL DEVICES MODULAR PANEL RELAYS RIB M SERIES
The RIB M Series modular relay system allows the installer to mount a combination of relays in an attractive metal enclosure. Models are available to control most BAS, HVAC, low-horsepower motors and lighting applications. The relay modules snap into a 4" (10.16 cm) wide plastic track. This system provides a convenient and cost-saving method of mixing and matching relays of different ratings to suit the requirements of the application.Connections to the modules are made by wiring to screw terminals. Input connections can be grouped on one side of the enclosure and output connections on the other to separate high-voltage and lowvoltage wires. Plenty of room is provided within the enclosure for wire runs, and the housings can be stacked vertically or horizontally. The relay modules can be snap-track mounted inside the housing as pictured or mounted into an available space in other equipment. The track is available in 2" (5.08 cm) lengths for mounting one module or in 12" (30.5 cm) lengths for mounting several modules. RIBM Pilot Series - 10A, 15A modular relays These pilot modular relays have contacts rated up to 15A and are used to control light electrical loads, drive power relays/ contactors or to sense the voltage fed to electrical loads. The pilot modular relays require a low coil drive current and are provided with circuitry to allow powering the relay coil from a wide range of AC or DC voltages. RIBM Power Series - 30A modular relays The power modular relays have contacts rated up to 30A. They require modest coil drive current and are used for direct switching and control of heavy electrical circuits such as large resistive, motor, or lighting loads.
RIB M Series (shown in optional enclosure) FEATURES Convenient and economical to use Handy, track-mounted modules Attractive, stackable metal enclosure Relay status indicator via LED Coil uses low current and accepts wide range of AC & DC voltages Closed/Open/Auto switch option available High density relay packaging UL listed enclosure and relay modules
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Life Rating 50/60 Hz 10 million cycles minimum mechanical Relay Status LED, ON - relay activated Operating Temperature -30 to 140F (-34 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing Dimensions 1.75"H x 4"W x 1.25"L C (4.45 x 10.16 x 3.18 cm) D 1.75"H x 4"W x 2"L (4.45 x 10.16 x 5.08 cm) F 1.75"H x 4"W x 2.45"L (4.45 x 10.16 x 6.22 cm) H 1.75"D x 2.75"W x 1.25"L (4.45 x 6.99 x 3.18 cm) I 1.75"D x 2.75"W x 1.7"L (4.45 x 6.99 x 4.32 cm) J 1.75"D x 4"W x 1.5"L (4.45 x 10.16 x 3.85 cm) K 1.75"D x 2.75"W x 2.5"L (4.45 x 6.99 x 6.35 cm) March 2014 L MH1000 MH3500 MH38000 Approvals Warranty 1.75"D x 2.75"W x 1.25"L (4.45 x 6.99 x 8.64 cm) 14.5"H x 7.7"W x 3.9"D (36.83 x 19.56 9.91 cm) 24.5"H x 10.25"W x 3.9"D (62.23 x 26.04 x 9.91 cm) 24.5"H x 12.5"W x 6.5"D (62.23 x 31.75 x 16.5 cm) UL listed, UL 916 Energy Management, UL 864 Fire, cUL listed, CSFM. UL FIle E68805 1 year
19

PULL-IN COIL DRIVE DC AC 10-30 VAC/VDC 10 9 24 VAC/VDC 22 18 120 VAC 85 208-277 VAC 160 DROP-OUT DC AC 2.8 2.1 3.8 3 35 60
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1145
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

FUNCTIONAL DEVICES MODULAR PANEL RELAYS RIB M SERIES
SPECIFICATIONS - PILOT RELAY MODULES
MODEL RIBM24C RIBMN24C RIBM24S RIBMN24S RIBMU1C RIBMU1SC RIBMNU1C RIBMU2C RIBMH1C RIBMH1SC RIBMNH1C RIBMH2C TYPE
1-SPDT 24 VAC/VDC 50-60 Hz
COIL DRIVE SIZE* OVR C H C H C J I F C J I F
CONTACT RATINGS
15A general use 10A general use 10A resistive 1/2 hp 470 VA pilot duty
1-SPST 1-SPDT 2-SPDT 1-SPDT
Yes Yes-2 Yes-2
10-30 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 50-60 Hz 10-30 VAC/VDC 208-277 VAC 50-60 Hz
2-SPDT
10A resistive 15A resistive 15A inductive 480 VA pilot duty 480 VA ballast 600W tungsten 240W tungsten 1/3 hp for N.O. 1/6 hp for N.C. 1/4 hp for N.O. 1/8 hp for N.C.
NEW!
CONTACT WIRING
24S
NC Closed Open Auto
COIL DRIVE DATA

Wiring 24 VAC/VDC
125 VAC 250 VAC 30 VDC 125/250 VAC 120/240 VAC
24C
COM NO
*Cut appropriate jumper to select N.C. or N.O.
Current Input 24 mA @ 20 VAC 13 mA @ 20 VDC 28 mA @ 24 VAC 16 mA @ 24 VDC 44 mA @ 35 VAC 25 mA @ 35 VDC
Relay Without Override Switch

Relay #1 NC COM NO Relay #2 (if present) NC COM NO
120/240/277 VAC 150 VAC, 28 VDC 150 VAC 240/277 VAC 277 VAC 120 VAC N.O. 120 VAC N.C. 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC
Wiring Relay #1 (and #2 if present) either or 208-277 VAC 120 VAC 10-30 VAC/VDC Common
Relay With Override Switch

Auto Manual N.C. - Closed Open N.O. - Closed Common N.C. N.O.
RIBMU1S RIBMNU1S RIBMU1SM RIBMNU1SM RIBMH1S RIBMNH1S RIBMH1SM RIBMNH1SM
1-SPST-NO 1-SPST-NO 1-SPST-NO 1-SPST-NO
10-30 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 50-60 Hz 10-30 VAC/VDC 208-277 VAC 50-60 Hz
C K D L C K D L
Yes Yes + Status Yes Yes+ Status
10A resistive 15A resistive 480 VA pilot duty 480 VA ballast 600W tungsten 240W tungsten 1/3 hp for N.O. 1/6 hp for N.C. 1/4 hp for N.O. 1/8 hp for N.C.
277 VAC 150 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC 120 VAC N.O. 120 VAC N.C. 120/240 VAC 120/240 VAC 277 VAC 277 VAC
Closed U1S and H1S **For normally closed Open contacts, specify NC Auto after model number
**
U1SM and H1SM

Closed Open Auto Closed Open Auto
Current Input 30 mA @ 10 VAC 12 mA @ 10 VDC 32 mA @ 12 VAC 14 mA @ 12 VDC 42 mA @ 24 VAC 16 mA @ 24 VDC 50 mA @ 30 VAC 18 mA @ 30 VDC 25 mA @ 120 VAC 35 mA @ 208-277 VAC
* See Specification on previous page for dimensions.
STATUS 50 VAC/VDC max and 0.25 A max
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
SPECIFICATIONS - POWER RELAY MODULES

RIBM2401B RIBM2401SBC
1-SPDT 24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
C F C F
20A resistive 1 hp 2 hp 20A ballast N.O. 10A ballast N.C. 10A tungsten N.O. 770 VA pilot duty 1,110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC 120 VAC 277 VAC 120-277 VAC 120-277 VAC 120 VAC 120 VAC 277 VAC
Relay Without Override Switch

NC COM NO
Wiring
either - 208-277 VAC or 120 VAC 24 VAC/VDC Common
Yes-2
Relay With Override Switch

Auto Manual N.C. - Closed Open N.O. - Closed Closed Open Auto Common N.C. N.O.
RIBM2402B RIBM2402SBC RIBM2401SB RIBM2402SB RIBM24PL

DPST-NO DPST-NO DPDT
24 VAC/VDC 208-277 VAC 50/60 Hz 24 VAC/VDC 120 VAC 24 VAC/VDC 208-277 VAC 24 VAC/VDC 24 VAC/VDC
Yes-2
Current Input
45 mA @ 18 VAC 30 mA @ 22 VDC 75 mA @ 24 VAC 32 mA @ 24 VDC 42 mA @ 120 VAC 42 mA @ 30 VDC 62 mA @ 208-277 VAC
1-SPST-NO
Yes
Position of yellow jumper selects N.O. vs N.C.
19
RIBM24ZL RIBM24ZN
F F
20A resistive 300 VAC, 28 VDC 15A resistive 600 VAC 1 hp 120 VAC 2 hp 240-277 VAC 3 hp 480-600 VAC 20A ballast 277-480 VAC 770 VA pilot duty 120 VAC 1,158 VA pilot duty 240 VAC 1,110 VA pilot duty 277 VAC 1,640 VA pilot duty 480 VAC 24ZL and 24ZN: 30A res.@ 300 VAC
Wiring
NO 24 VAC/VDC COMMON
NC COM NO
Current Input
100 mA @ 20 VAC 50 mA @ 24 VDC 125 mA @ 24 VAC 70 mA @ 30 VDC
MH1000 MH3500 MH3800 MT212-12 MT212-2 MT4-12 MT4-2 ACCESSORIES Screw-cover housing Hinge-cover housing Hinge-cover housing Relay track, 12" x 2.75" (30.48 x 6.99 cm) Relay track, 2" x 2.75" (5.08 x 6.99 cm) Relay track, 12" x 4" (30.48 x 10.16 cm) Relay track, 2" x 4" (5.08 x 10.16 cm)
1146
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Multi-voltage input Small size Multiple mounting options Wirenuts, mounting screw, and tape included LED indication (PAM-1 only)
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
AIR PRODUCTS AND CONTROLS MULTI-VOLTAGE RELAY MODULES PAM-1, PAM-4
PAM Series relays are small encapsulated multi-voltage modules that provide 10A Form C contacts.These devices are ideal for applications where remote relays are required for control or status feedback. They are suitable for use with HVAC, temperature control, re alarm, security, building automation, and lighting control systems. PAM Series relays may be mounted by using double-sided adhesive tape (provided), a self-drilling screw, or they may be loosely placed in a handy box.
PAM-1
PAM-4
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VAC @ 31 mA, 24 VDC @ 15 mA, 120 VAC @ 19 mA PAM-4 9-40 VDC @ 15 mA Contact Rating SPDT, Form C, 10A @120 VAC, 7A @ 24 VDC, 250A @ 5 VDC 12" (30.5 cm), 18 AWG Wire Size Operating Temperature -58 to 185F (-50 to 85C) Mounting Pre-drilled mounting screw hole and mounting screw provided; doublesided tape also provided Coil Rating PAM-1 Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty 1.5"H x 1"W x 0.9"D (3.81 x 2.54 x 2.2 cm) UL listed File #S3403, CSFM, MEA 0.15 lb (0.068 kg) 1 year
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
WIRING
() (white)
Relay Energized LED

(blue) C 10A Contacts 9-40 VDC @ 15 mA
(-)
Mounting Hole
(+)
24 VAC/ VDC
120V*
(red)
(blue) (yellow)
(black)
(+) (red)
(yellow) N.C. (orange) N.O.
C N.C. 10A Contacts
(black)
(orange)N.O.
19
Mounting Hole
PAM-1
* May not be suitable for continuous duty use at 120 VAC for extended periods of time.
PAM-4
MODEL PAM-1 PAM-4 PAM-2 PAM-SD DESCRIPTION Multi-voltage relay module, 24 VAC/VDC, 120 VAC Multi-voltage relay module, 9-40 VDC Multi-voltage relay module, 12 or 24 VDC Multi-voltage relay module, 20-32 VDC
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1147
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

POWER RELAYS KE375, KE900 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The KE375 and KE900 Series of 30A relays are heavy duty power relays commonly used for energy management, refrigeration, and HVAC control applications. High power handling capability and small size make these power relays particularly suited for motor control, heater loads, and lighting control. The KE900 Series features an open frame construction, and the KE375 is encased in a clear polycarbonate cover.
NEW!
KE900D KE900S KE375
FEATURES
Small size High-power handling capability One-, two-, and three-pole models 24 VAC, 24 VDC & 120 VAC coils
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
SPECIFICATIONS
KE900 Coil voltage Coil power Pull-in voltage Contact ratings 24 VAC/60 Hz, 120 VAC/60 Hz, or 24 VDC AC: 9.5 VA sealed DC: 2.0W AC: 85% or less of nominal DC: 75% or less of nominal 30A or 1-1/2 hp @ 120 VAC / 240 VAC 20A or 2 hp @ 600 VAC 30A @ 28 VDC, resistive 3600W @ 120 or 240V (ballast) 2 hp @ 240 VAC 20A @ 600 VAC 20A @ 125 VDC (D models only) 3/16" dia mounting holes Screw terminals 30A @ 300 VAC, 80% PF 15A @ 600 VAC, 80% PF 30A @ 28 VDC 1 hp @ 120 VAC 2 hp @ 240 VAC / 277 VAC 3 hp @ 480/600 VAC, 100,000 cycles 20A @ 277/480 VAC ballast, 6000 cycles Top-mount cover with slotted tabs 0.25" x 0.032" quick connects AC: 4.6 VA DC: 2.6W KE375
19
Mounting Terminals Contact material Dielectric strength Operate/Release time Weight Agency approvals
Silver cadmium oxide 2200V RMS between contacts 2200V RMS between contacts 2200V RMS between other elements 3750V RMS between other elements 30 ms 10 oz (283g) UL/cUL listed, File #E37066 15 ms 3.5 oz (99g) UL/cUL-recognized component, File #E37066; CE certified
1148
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

POWER RELAYS KE375, KE900 SERIES
in (cm)
8-32 Screw (2) Contact Terminals
6-32 Screw (2) Coil Terminals
3.16 (8.03)
0.06 (0.16)
1.88 (4.76)
2.50 (6.35)
1.88 (4.76)
2.50 (6.35)
2.35 (5.97)
0.81 (2.08)
6-32 Screw (2) Coil Terminals
1.66 (4.22) 2.50 (6.35)

8-32 Screw (6) Contact Terminals
3.32 (8.43)
Two Holes 0.19 (0.48) dia

1 4
2.75 (6.99)
2 5 8 3 6 9
1.40 (3.56)
2.38 (6.04)
A
0.17 (0.43)
B
2.2 (5.59)
2.13 (5.41)
KE900S
KE900D
KE375T
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
WIRING
6 8 7
NC
5 3
NC
6 4
NC NO C
NO C
NO C
5 3
4 7
5 8
6 9
KE900S
KE900D
KE375T
MODEL KE375T120VAC KE375T24VAC KE375T24VDC KE900S120VAC KE900S24VAC KE900S24VDC KE900D120VAC KE900D24VAC KE900D24VDC DESCRIPTION 3PDT Power relay 120 VAC coil 3PDT Power relay 24 VAC coil 3PDT Power relay 24 VDC coil SPDT Power relay 120 VAC coil SPDT Power relay 24 VAC coil SPDT Power relay 24 VDC coil DPDT Power relay 120 VAC coil DPDT Power relay 24 VAC coil DPDT Power relay 24 VDC coil
19
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1149
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

OMRON POWER RELAYS G7L SERIES
DESCRIPTION G7L Series relays are heavy duty power relays commonly used for controlling refrigeration, HVAC equipment, heater loads, and lighting controls. High-power handling capability up to 30A, small size, and low cost characterize these relays. They are available in single and double pole models and are surface mounted or DIN rail mounted with the PL7F-06 socket. FEATURES High power capability Small size Low cost Push-to-test button Optional DIN rail screw terminal socket
NEW!
G7L Series
SPECIFICATIONS
24V, 26.4V maximum,120V 50/60 Hz.132V maximum Coil Power AC:2.5 VA, DC: 2.0W Pull In Voltage 18V, 75V Drop Out Voltage 3.6V, 18V, 20V G7L-1A: Resistive: 30A, 277 VAC Contact Rating General purpose: 25A, 277 VAC 30A 120 VAC Tungsten: 1.5 kW, 120 VAC Horsepower: 1.5 hp, 120 VAC 3 hp, 277 VAC, G7L-2A: Resistive: 25A, 277 VAC General purpose: 25A, 277 VAC 25A 120 VAC Tungsten 1.3 kW, 120 VAC Horsepower 1 hp, 120 VAC 2 hp, 277 VAC Contact Resistance 50 m maximum Terminals 0.25" x 0.031" quick connects Contact Material Silver cadmium oxide Dielectric Strength 2000 VAC between contacts, 4000 VAC between coil and contacts Operate Time 30 ms maximum Release Time 30 ms maximum Operating Temperature -13 to 140F (-25 to 60C) Mounting Top-mount cover with slotted tabs or DIN rail surface-mount socket with screw terminals Approvals UL-recognized component, File #E41643: CSA certied, File #LR35535: CE certifed Weight 0.2 lb (0.091 kg) Warranty 1 year Coil Voltage
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.43 (1.1) 1.85 (4.7) max 2.69 (6.85) max 2.36(6.0) 1.99 (5.05) max 0.25 (0.64) max 1.32 (3.35) max 0.031 (0.08) 0.078 (0.2)
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
0.12 (0.3)
G7L-1A, -2A
G7L-1A, 2A
0.177 (0.45)
Depth: 1.0 (2.54)

Two Mounting Holes 0.177 (0.45) dia or M4 tapped holes
2.1 (5.3)
G7L-1A, -2A
2.36 .007 (6.0 0.02)
P7LF-06
2.2 (5.6)
WIRING
0 4 6 1 0 2 4 6 1 8
19
G7L-1A-TUBJ-CB
G7L-2A-TUBJ-CB
MODEL DESCRIPTION G7L-1A-TUBJ-CB-24VAC SPST-N.O. Power relay 24 VAC G7L-1A-TUBJ-CB-24VDC SPST-N.O. Power relay 24 VDC G7L-1A-TUBJ-CB-120VAC SPST-N.O. Power relay 120 VAC DPST-N.O. Power relay 24 VAC G7L-2A-TUBJ-CB-24VAC G7L-2A-TUBJ-CB-24VDC DPST-N.O. Power relay 24 VDC G7L-2A-TUBJ-CB-120VAC DPST-N.O. Power relay 120 VAC P7LF-06 RELATED PRODUCTS DIN rail/surface mount socket
1150
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Two-, three-, and four-pole models Contact ratings from 30-60 FLA Optional auxiliary contacts on select models
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

DEFINITE PURPOSE CONTACTORS DPC SERIES
The DPC Series is an economical line of denite-purpose contactors designed to control electrical loads such as air conditioning, refrigeration compressor, motors, and resistance heaters.
Two-pole
Three-pole
Four-pole
IEC 60947-4-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Line Load Terminals Coil Terminals Auxiliary Contacts Wire Size Box lug or dual 0.25 quick connects Dual 0.25 quick connects 10A, 1/3 hp @ 120/250 VAC 4A @ 120 VAC for lamp load 14-4 AWG Operating Temperature -40 to 149F (-40 to 65C) Approvals UL recognized, File #E246810, CE certied Weight 1.5 lbs (0.68 kg) Warranty 1 year
CONTACT RATINGS
MODEL
DPC24A2D30 DPC01A2D30 DPC02A2D30 DPC24A2D40 DPC01A2D40 DPC24A3C30 DPC01A3C30 DPC24A3C40 DPC01A3C40 DPC24A3B50 DPC01A3B50 DPC24A3B60 DPC01A3B60 DPC24A4A30 DPC01A4A30 DPC24A4A40 DPC01A4A40
POLES
2 DPST-N.O. 2 DPST-N.O. 3 3PST-N.O. 3 3PST-N.O. 3 3PST-N.O. 3 3PST-N.O. 4 4PST-N.O. 4 4PST-N.O.
FULL-LOAD AMP (FLA)

30 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 40 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 30 FLA @ 240-600 VAC
LOCKED-ROTOR AMP (LRA)

180 LRA @ 240/277 VAC 150 LRA @ 480 VAC 120 LRA @ 600 VAC 240 LRA @ 240/277 VAC 200 LRA @ 480 VAC 160 LRA @ 600 VAC 180 LRA @ 240/277 VAC 150 LRA @ 480 VAC 120 LRA @ 600 VAC 240 LRA @ 240/277 VAC 200 LRA @ 480 VAC 160 LRA @ 600 VAC 300 LRA @ 240 VAC 250 LRA @ 480 VAC 200 LRA @ 600 VAC 360 LRA @ 240 VAC 300 LRA @ 480 VAC 240 LRA @ 600 VAC 180 LRA @ 240/277 VAC 150 LRA @ 480 VAC 120 LRA @ 600 VAC 240 LRA @ 240/277 VAC 200 LRA @ 480 VAC 160 LRA @ 600 VAC
RESISTIVE
40A @ 240-600 VAC 50A @ 240-600 VAC 40A @ 240-600 VAC
HP, SINGLE PHASE

2 hp @ 120 VAC 3 hp @ 240 VAC 2 hp @ 120 VAC 3 hp @ 240 VAC 2 hp @ 120 VAC 5 hp @ 240/277 VAC 3 hp @ 120 VAC 7.5 hp @ 240/277 VAC 3 hp @ 120 VAC 7.5 hp @ 200/208 VAC 10 hp @ 240 VAC 3 hp @ 120 VAC 7.5 hp @ 200/208 VAC 10 hp @ 240 VAC 2 hp @ 120 VAC 5 hp @ 240/277 VAC 3 hp @ 120 VAC 7.5 hp @ 240/277 VAC
HP, THREE PHASE

10 hp @ 200/208 VAC 10 hp @ 240/277 VAC 15 hp @ 480 VAC 20 hp @ 600 VAC 10 hp @ 200/208 VAC 10 hp @ 240/277 VAC 20 hp @ 480 VAC 25 hp @ 600 VAC 15 hp @ 200/208 VAC 15 hp @ 240 VAC 25 hp @ 480/600 VAC 25 hp @ 200/208 VAC 25 hp @ 240 VAC 30 hp @ 480/600 VAC 10 hp @ 200/208 VAC 10 hp @ 240/277 VAC 15 hp @ 480 VAC 10 hp @ 200/208 VAC 10 hp @ 240/277 VAC 10 hp @ 480 VAC
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
40 FLA @ 240-600 VAC
50A @ 240-600 VAC
50 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 60 FLA @ 240-600 VAC 30 FLA @ 240-600 VAC
65A @ 240-600 VAC 75A @ 240-600 VAC 40A @ 240-600 VAC
40 FLA @ 240-600 VAC
50A @ 240-600 VAC
MODEL DPC24A2D30 DPC24A2D40 DPC01A2D30 DPC01A2D40 DPC02A2D30 DPC24A3C30 DPC24A3C40 DPC01A3C30 DPC01A3C40 DPC24A3B50 DPC24A3B60 DPC01A3B50 DPC01A3B60 DPC24A4A30 DPC24A4A40 DPC01A4A30 DPC01A4A40
COIL VOLTAGE (VAC) 24 24 120 120 208/240 24 24 120 120 24 24 120 120 24 24 120 120
NRUSH I @ 50 Hz (VA) 31 31 31 31 35 65 65 65 65 140 140 140 140 68 68 68 68
SEALED @ 50 Hz (VA) 6 6 6 6 7 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 20 20 20 20 14 14 14 14
INRUSH @ 60 Hz (VA) 28 28 28 28 32 60 60 60 60 132 132 132 132 60 60 60 60
SEALED @ 60 Hz (VA) 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 14 14 14 14 9 9 9 9 PULL-IN (VAC) 18 18 88 88 177 18 18 88 88 18 18 93 93 19.2 19.2 88 88
DROP-OUT RANGE (VAC) 6-15 6-15 20-70 20-70 40-140 6-15 6-15 20-70 20-70 6-15 6-15 20-70 20-70 6-15 6-15 20-70 20-70
DIMENSIONS 3.29 (8.36) 3.29 (8.36) 3.29 (8.36) 3.29 (8.36) 3.29 (8.36) 3.30 (8.38) 3.30 (8.38) 3.30 (8.38) 3.30 (8.38) 4.06 (10.3) 4.06 (10.3) 4.06 (10.3) 4.06 (10.3) 3.42 (8.69) 3.42 (8.69) 3.42 (8.69) 3.42 (8.69) LENGTH 2.00 (5.08) 2.00 (5.08) 2.00 (5.08) 2.00 (5.08) 2.00 (5.08) 2.90 (7.37) 2.90 (7.37) 2.90 (7.37) 2.90 (7.37) 3.19 (8.10) 3.19 (8.10) 3.19 (8.10) 3.19 (8.10) 2.75 (7.00) 2.75 (7.00) 2.75 (7.00) 2.75 (7.00) WIDTH
2.61 (6.63) 2.61 (6.63) 2.61 (6.63) 2.61 (6.63) 2.61 (6.63) 3.00 (7.62) 3.00 (7.62) 3.00 (7.62) 3.00 (7.62) 3.56 (9.04) 3.56 (9.04) 3.56 (9.04) 3.56 (9.04) 3.03 (7.70) 3.03 (7.70) 3.03 (7.70) 3.03 (7.70)
HEIGHT
APPROX. OPTIONAL WEIGHT AUX. lb (kg) SWITCH 0.6 (0.27) No 0.6 (0.27) No 0.6 (0.27) No 0.6 (0.27) No No 0.6 (0.27) 1.0 (0.45) Yes 1.0 (0.45) Yes Yes 1.0 (0.45) Yes 1.0 (0.45) No 1.0 (0.91) No 1.0 (0.91) No 1.0 (0.91) No 1.0 (0.91) 1.5 (0.68) Yes 1.5 (0.68) Yes Yes 1.5 (0.68) Yes 1.5 (0.68)
19
CN1C March 2014
RELATED PRODUCTS Auxiliary contact, (1) SPDT
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1151
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

EEC DEFINITE PURPOSE CONTACTORS T30, T40, T60, T90
DESCRIPTION
The T30, T40, T60 and T90 Series of denite purpose contactors can be used in air conditioning, compressors, refrigeration, heaters and HVAC applications. They are rated for 200,000 electrical operations and 2 million mechanical operations. The coils are rated 80 to 105% voltage, 65VA inrush and 7.5VA sealed. These contactors are available in 1, 2 or 3 pole congurations up to 100 Amps.
FEATURES 1, 2, or 3 Pole styles FLA up to 90A Coil voltage up to 480V
NEW!
T40A3 Approvals Warranty CE, CSA, UL Listed #E309604 1 year
DIMENSIONS in (cm) HEIGHT 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 3.78 (9.6) 4.53 (11.5) 4.53 (11.5) 4.53 (11.5) 4.53 (11.5) 4.53 (11.5) 4.53 (11.5) 5.24 (13.3) 5.24 (13.3) 5.24 (13.3) 5.24 (13.3) 5.24 (13.3) 5.24 (13.3) WIDTH 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.64 (6.7) 2.66 (6.75) 2.66 (6.75) 2.66 (6.75) 2.66 (6.75) 2.66 (6.75) 2.66 (6.75) 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9) 3.5 (8.9) DEPTH 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 2.68 (6.8) 3.11 (7.9) 3.11 (7.9) 3.11 (7.9) 3.11 (7.9) 3.11 (7.9) 3.11 (7.9) 4.53 (11.5) 4.53 (11.5) 4.53 (11.5) 4.53 (11.5) 4.53 (11.5) 4.53 (11.5) INCLUDES 1 N.O. & 1 N.C. AUX. CONTACT No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Life 200,000 electrical operations Mechanical Life 2,000,000 mechanical operations Operating Temperature -40 to 149F (-40 to 65C)
MODEL CONTACT AMP RATING FULL LOAD COIL NUMBER VOLTAGE RESISTIVE OF POLES (VAC) 40 1 24 40 1 120 50 1 24 50 1 120 40 2 24 40 2 120 40 2 208 40 2 240 50 2 24 50 2 120 50 2 208 50 2 240 50 2 480 50 2 24 50 2 277 50 3 24 50 3 120 50 3 208 50 3 240 50 3 277 50 3 480 75 3 24 75 3 120 75 3 208 75 3 240 75 3 277 75 3 480 100 3 24 100 3 120 100 3 208 100 3 240 100 3 277 100 3 480
19
T30A1-G T30A1-A T40A1-G T40A1-A T30A2-G T30A2-A T30A2-B T30A2-C T40A2-G T40A2-A T40A2-B T40A2-C T40A2-E T40A2-G T40A2-H T40A3-G T40A3-A T40A3-B T40A3-C T40A3-H T40A3-E T60A3-G-AUX-C11 T60A3-A-AUX-C11 T60A3-B-AUX-C11 T60A3-C-AUX-C11 T60A3-H-AUX-C11 T60A3-E-AUX-C11 T90A3-G-AUX-C11 T90A3-A-AUX-C11 T90A3-B-AUX-C11 T90A3-C-AUX-C11 T90A3-H-AUX-C11 T90A3-E-AUX-C11
30 30 40 40 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 60 60 60 60 60 60 90 90 90 90 90 90
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
AUX-11-DP
ACCESSORIES 1 NO and 1 NC auxiliary for T30A3, T40A3 only
1152
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Photo isolation 4000V optical isolation Zero voltage turn-on Input status LED High surge capability Dual SCR output
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

IDEC SOLID STATE RELAY RSSDN
The Model RSSDN is a photo-isolated solid state relay. The 4-32 VDC input voltage allows the relay to be used on analog or digital outputs. While solid-state relays provide reliable switching and long-life operation, careful application is required as excessive temperature, high inrush currents, or induced currents can affect solid state relay operation.
RSSDN
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Current Regulated 10 mA 47-80 Hz Frequency Range Pick Up Voltage 4 VDC Drop Out Voltage 1 VDC Voltage Range 4-32 VDC Contact Type 1 Form A, SPST-N.O. Off State Leakage 20 mA @ rated voltage (maximum) Minimum Current 10A, 25A models (Holding) 50 mA, 50A, 75A, 90A models (Holding) 100 mA Output Current Limit 10 A, 25 A, 50 A, 75 A, 90 A 48-660 VAC Output Voltage Over Voltage Rating 1200 PIV Voltage Drop 1.6V (maximum) @ rated current Capacitance 8 pF 4000 rms minimum 1-Cycle 150A, 1-Second 30A, 1-Cycle 300A, 1-Second 75A, 1-Cylce 750A, 1-Second 150A Reverse Voltage Protection Yes (-32 VDC) Zero Voltage Switching Yes Turn Off Time 1/2 cycle @ 60 Hz Turn On Time 1/2 cycle @ 60 Hz Dimensions 2.25" H x 1.75" W x 0.95" D (5.72 x 4.45 x 2.41 cm) Approvals UL-recognized component, File #E194577: CE certied Weight 0.22 lb (0.10 kg) Warranty 1 year Dielectric Strength Surge Current
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
WIRING
FIGURE 1. CURRENT DERATING CURVES

RMS On-State Current (amps)
19
3 +
Control Voltage 4-32 VDC
2
RSSDN-10A
LOAD or
25
M
RMS On-State Current (amps)
10A, 25A
20 15 10 5 20
25A U
10A H e
ou
50A, 75A, 90A

100 80 65 50 20 20
90A 75A Mounted on H e 50A Heatsink
90A UnitFree Air
AC Line 48-660 VAC
M e nt ou
ed nt on
at
sin
d
k
on
-H
sin at He
ea
LOAD
10A Unit-
nit-Fre
ats
Observe the polarity of input terminals. Failure to do so may cause damage to the solid-state relays.
e Air Free Air
ink
n tsi k
30 40
50
60 70 80 90 100
50A Free Air
30 40
50
60 70 80 90 100
Relay Base Temp (C)
Relay Base Temp (C)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1153
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

IDEC SOLID STATE RELAY RSSDN
INSTALLATION

Install solid-state relays in dry, well-ventilated areas away from excessive heat. Use #6-32 screws, at washers, and lock washers to secure mounting on heat sinks. Vertical mounting is recommended to allow air to ow unimpeded. A small-capacity load may not turn off due to the leakage current present after the solid-state relay has turned off. In this case, use a resistor in parallel with the load to shunt the leakage current. When the input signal contains a ripple voltage, the lowest ripple amplitude should exceed the minimum pick-up voltage of 4V. Heat sinks are required to achieve the full output current rating. The recommended heat sink dimensions and materials are shown in the Table 1 below.
TABLE 1. RECOMMENDED HEAT SINK DIMENSIONS / MATERIALS Output Rating Dimensions in (cm) Material 10A 25A 50A 75A 90A 12 x 12 x 1/8 (30.5 x 30.5 x 0.3) 15 x 15 x 1/8 (38.1 x 38.1 x 0.3) 15 x 15 x 1/8 (38.1 x 38.1 x 0.3) 17 x 17 x 1/8 (43.2 x 43.2 x 0.3) 17 x 17 x 1/8 (43.2 x 43.2 x 0.3) Aluminum (black anodized) Aluminum (black anodized) Aluminum (black anodized) Aluminum (black anodized) Aluminum (black anodized)
NEW!
Lamp Loads
RECOMMENDED LAMP LOADS SSR Rating @ 120 VAC @ 240 VAC 10A 1 kW 2 kW 25A 2 kW 4 kW 50A 3 kW 6 kW
It is recommended to use a thermal compound (for example, Kele part number TCC-12) between the base of the solid-state relay and the heat sink for heat dissipation.
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
APPLICATION INFORMATION
When using solid-state relays for driving heaters where the load is Zero-voltage switching is ideal for driving incandescent lamps since the switched on and off rapidly and continuously, severe thermal stress cold fillament will not be subjected to a large inrush current. Using a zerowill result. In such cases, use an solid-state relay at no more than switched solid-state relay will reduce inrush current and prolong lamp life. 75% of the rating. RECOMMENDED HEATER LOADS SSR Rating @ 120 VAC @ 240 VAC 10A 1 kW 2 kW 25A 2 kW 4 kW 50A 3 kW 6 kW
Heater Loads
Solid-state relays use high-noise immunity circuitry with a snubber to handle the electrical noise generated by inductive loads.
Solenoid Valves and Contactors
Motor Loads
UL MOTOR LOAD RATINGS (hp) SSR Rating @ 120 VAC @ 240 VAC @ 480 VAC 10A 1/2 3/4 3/4 25A 1/2 3/4 3/4 50A 3/4 1-1/2 1-1/2 75A 3/4 5 5 90A 3/4 5 5
19
RECOMMENDED LOADS SSR Rating @ 120 VAC @ 240 VAC 10A 900W 1800W 25A 2100W 4200W 50A 3800W 7500W
MODEL RSSDN-10A RSSDN-25A RSSDN-50A RSSDN-75A RSSDN-90A DESCRIPTION Solid-state relay, 10A continuous output current Solid-state relay, 25A continuous output current Solid-state relay, 50A continuous output current Solid-state relay, 75A continuous output current Solid-state relay, 90A continuous output current
1154
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SPECIFICATIONS
Coil Rating 208 VAC @ 60 Hz, 277 VAC @ 60 Hz Coil Power 2.2 VA Relay Type DPDT (2 form C) Contact Rating 13A, 1/3 hp @ 120 VAC; 13A, 1/2 hp @ 277 VAC; 3A, 3/4 hp @ 600 VAC; 10A @ 28 VDC NOTE: SR3B-05 socket is rated for 10A, 300 V max MODEL 20307-86 20307-87 SR3B-05
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

SPECIAL VOLTAGE RELAYS 20307 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The 20307 Series plug-in style relays offer the exibility of using 208 VAC or 277 VAC single-phase voltages for relay control. These relays are DPDT and plug into a standard three-pole general purpose relay socket.
20307
FEATURES 208 VAC and 277 VAC coils Socket mounting Heavy-duty construction 13A contact rating UL recognized
SR3B-05
WIRING
Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty 2.2"H x 1.5"W x 1.37"D (5.6 x 3.8 x 3.5 cm) UL recognized File #E7443 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) 1 year
1 4 7 A (-) 3 6 9 B (+)
Bottom View
DESCRIPTION Relay, 208 VAC coil, DPDT Relay, 277 VAC coil, DPDT PAGE 1123
RELATED PRODUCTS Relay socket, three-pole blade type, DIN/surface mount
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
ALTERNATING RELAY MODEL ALT

DESCRIPTION The Model ALT alternating relay is commonly used to alternate between two loads to equalize run-time. When an external control switch opens, the Model ALTs output contacts transfer from one state to the other. When an external control switch closes, the output contacts remain in their current state. The SW option offers an override potentiometer switch on top of the relay that allows manual override control of either load or automatic operation. FEATURES Alternation between two loads to equalize run time Two LEDs to indicate the energized load Override switch Debounce time delay
WIRING
N.C. C N.O.
19
1 8 2 3 7 6 4 5
Supply Voltage 24 VAC/VDC or 115 VAC Control Switch
Bottom View
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Contact Rating Control Signal Operating Temperature Debounce Time Delay Aprroval Weight Warranty 20-26 VAC/VDC, 95-125 VAC 40 mA SPDT, 480 VA @ 240 VAC 115 VAC, 2 mA, 24 VAC/VDC, 2 mA -4 to 122F (-20 to 50C) 0.5 sec UL File E68520, CSA 0.35 lb (0.16 Kg) 5 years
MODEL DESCRIPTION ALT-115-S-SW Alternating relay, 115 VAC, override switch ALT-24-S-SW Alternating relay, 24 VAC/VDC, override switch OT08PC RELATED PRODUCTS Octal Relay Socket for Model ALT PAGE
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1155
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

DELAY ON MAKE / INTERVAL TIMERS 438USA, 438USA-INT
DESCRIPTION
The Model 438USA universal switch-adjustable time capsule is an all solid state timer that provides delay on make (ON-Delay) control of a load device operating from 19-288 VAC/DC. The Model 438USA controls up to a 1A load, such as a relay or solenoid. The Model 438USA-INT universal switch-adjustable time capsule is an all solid-state timer that provides interval timing control of a load device operating from 24 to 240 VAC. The 438USA-INT controls up to a 1A load, such as a relay or solenoid.
NEW!
438USA 438USA-INT to ow and the load to energize. The load remains energized as long as power is applied. When power is removed, the unit resets and is ready for another timing period. 438USA-INT - Interval When voltage is applied, the Model 438USA-INT turns on, permitting full load current to ow. At the end of the preset timing period, the unit turns off and permits only leakage current to ow through the load. To recycle, the operating voltage must be removed and reapplied. Recycle Time Repeatability Timing 100 ms, 50 ms after timing cycle, 200 ms during timing cycle 1% nominal Interval timer, Delay on make (ON-Delay) Operating Temperature -4 to 185F (-20 to 85C) Storage Humidity 95% non-condensing Approvals UL-recognized component, File #E47858; CSA certied, File #LR31931-3 Weight 0.2 lb (0.091 kg) Warranty 1 year
FEATURES
Encapsulated digital-timing circuitry Switch-selectable delay Low cost Transient protected 1A output rating
OPERATION
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
General Timing is set via a binary-coded DIP switch and is adjustable from 1 to 1024 seconds. With all switches closed, there is an internal, one-second delay; with all switches open, there is a 1024-second delay time. Prior to applying power to the timer, set the switches to the correct position for the desired time. 438USA - Delay-on-Make (ON-Delay) When power is applied, the Model 438USA remains in the off state, allowing only leakage current to ow. Once the preset time period elapses, the unit switches on, allowing full current
SPECIFICATIONS
19
Coil Rating Leakage Current 438USA-INT 438USA Output Range Transient Protection Voltage Drop Accuracy Adjustments
24-240 VAC (50/60 Hz), 19-288 VAC (50/60 Hz) or VDC Off State: 1 mA maximum @ 240V, Off State: 0.6 mA @ 24V, 1.8 mA @ 48 V, 5.4 mA @ 120V, 11.4 mA @240 V 10 mA to 1A inductive; inrush current to 25A for 8 ms 1 to 1024 seconds, 1-second increments 6000V for 8.3 ms 4V maximum, ON state 10% of setpoint 10-position DIP switch
1156
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
in (cm)
19-288 VAC/VDC Input
LOAD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

DELAY ON MAKE / INTERVAL TIMERS 438USA, 438USA-INT
Four 20 AWG wire (two for operating voltage and two for load circuit)
24 - 240 VAC (white) (black)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Terminals 0.25 Spade
LOAD* (yellow)
9 10
(white)
* Do not apply voltage to load wires. The load is powered from the input voltage.
1.7 (4.31)
0.90 (2.29) 2.25 (5.72) Four Mounting Holes 0.16 (0.3962) dia 0.20 (0.51)
1.7 (4.32)
0.90 (2.29)
0.27 (.69) 2.25 (5.71) Four Mounting Holes 0.16 (0.41) dia 2.65 (6.73) 0.20 (0.51) 0.36 (0.91) 0.76 (1.93)
2.65 (6.731)
0.76 (1.93)
438USA
TIME SETTINGS
438USA-INT
To delay 540-second interval

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OPEN 512 16 8 2 1 539 +1* 540 sec
To delay 60-second interval

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 OPEN 32 16 8 2 1 59 +1* 60 sec
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
FIGURE 1. TIMING Power

Time Delay
Power Load
Timing Interval
Load 438USA 438USA-INT
19
MODEL 438USA-INT 438USA DESCRIPTION Universal switch-adjustable time capsule, interval timer Universal switch-adjustable time capsule, delay on make (ON-delay) timer
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1157
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

IDEC MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC TIMERS RTE SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The RTE Series multi-function electronic timers are socketmounted adjustable time delay relays available in two function groups. The timer functions and time ranges are easily selected by setting external switches. The knob on the front of the timer is used to set the precise delay period within the selected time range. Timer Functions RTE-B1/RTE-P1 (Power-Triggered) -ON-Delay, Interval, OFF-Cycle, ON-Cycle RTE-B2/RTE-P2 (Signal-triggered) -ON-Delay, OFF-Cycle, OFF-Delay, ON-Cycle, Single-Shot
NEW!
RTE SR2P-06
FEATURES Selectable 10 timing functions and 20 time ranges Time delay settings from 0.1 second to 600 hours Two Form C delayed output contacts Space-saving package High repeat accuracy of 0.2% On and timing out LED indicators Standard 8-pin, 11-pin, or 11-blade relay socket UL Listed, CE certied
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.57 (4.0)
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
SPECIFICATIONS
Time Delay Settings 0.1 sec to 600 hours Contact Conguration 2 Form C, DPDT (delay outputs) 10A resistive @ 240 VAC, 30 VDC; Load Type 7A inductive @ 240 VAC, 30 VDC; 1/6 hp @ 120 VAC; 1/3 hp @ 240 VAC Input AD models 24 VAC/VDC (3.5 VA/1.7W) AF models 120VAC (6.6 VA) Operating Temperature -4 to 149F (-20 to 65C) Operating Humidity 35% to 85% RH Reset Time 100 ms maximum Accuracy 0.2%, 20 ms Setting Error 10% maximum Insulation Resistance 100 M minimum (500 VDC) Dielectric Strength Between power and output terminals: 2000 VAC, 1 minute Between contacts of different poles: 2000 VAC, 1 minute Between contacts on the same pole: 1000 VAC, 1 minute Electrical Life 500,000 operations (resistive) Mechanical Life 50 million operations Weight 0.2 lb (0.091 kg) Approvals UL listed, File #E66043, CE Warranty 1 year
1.40 (3.6)
RTE-P 8/11 Pin: RTE-B 11 Blade:
A = 3.06 (7.79) A = 2.95 (7.49)
WIRING
Bottom View
Delay 4 3 2 1 8 5 6 7 Delay Delay 1 4 7 A
Power (AC or DC)
2 5 8
3 6 9 B
Delay
19
Power (AC or DC)
RTE-B1/RTE-P1
Control Signal Switch
6
Control Signal Switch

7 8 9 10
Delay
5 4 3 2 1
Delay
Delay
1 4 7 A
2 5 8
3 6 9 B
Delay
11
Power (AC or DC)
Power (AC or DC)
Do not apply voltage to terminals 5 and 6.
Do not apply voltage to terminals 2 and 5.
RTE-B2/RTE-P2
1158
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
OPERATION
A: ON-Delay 1 (power start)
ITEM TERMINAL NO. OPERATION
Power Delayed Contact (1)2-7 (2)A-B (1)1-4,5-8 (2)1-7,3-9 (1)1-3,6-8 (2)4-7,6-9 PWR OUT (NC) (NO) Indicator Set Time T
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

IDEC MULTIFUNCTION ELECTRONIC TIMERS RTE SERIES
RTE-P1, -B1 B: Interval (power start)

Set timer for desired delay, apply power to coil. Contacts transfer immediately, and return to original position after preset time has elapsed. Reset occurs with removal of power.
ITEM
Power Delayed Contact
Set timer for desired delay, apply power to coil. Contacts transfer after preset time has elapsed, and remain in transferred position until timer is reset. Reset occurs with removal of power.
TERMINAL NO.
(1)2-7 (2)A-B (1)1-4,5-8 (2)1-7,3-9 (1)1-3,6-8 (2)4-7,6-9 PWR OUT T
OPERATION
(NC) (NO)
Indicator Set Time
C: Cycle 1 (power start, OFF first)
Set timer for desired delay, apply power to coil. First transfer of contacts occurs after preset delay has elapsed, after the next elapse of preset delay contacts return to original position. The timer now cycles between on and off as long as power is applied (duty ratio 1:1).
ITEM TERMINAL NO. OPERATION
Power Delayed Contact (1)2-7 (2)A-B (1)1-4,5-8 (2)1-7,3-9 (1)1-3,6-8 (2)4-7,6-9 PWR OUT T T
D: Cycle 3 (power start, ON first)

Functions in same manner as Mode C, with the exception that first transfer of contacts occurs as soon as power is applied. The ratio is 1:1. Time On = Time Off
ITEM
Power
TERMINAL NO.
(1)2-7 (2)A-B (1)1-4,5-8 (2)1-7,3-9 (1)1-3,6-8 (2)4-7,6-9 PWR OUT T T
OPERATION
(NC) (NO)
Delayed Contact
(NC) (NO)
Indicator Set Time
Indicator Set Time
A: ON-Delay 2 (signal start)

ITEM
Power Start Delayed Contact
RTE-P2, -B2 B: Cycle 2 (signal start, OFF first)

When the start input turns on while power is on, the output oscillates at a preset cycle (duty ratio 1:1), starting while the NO contact off.
ITEM
When a preset time has elapsed after the start input turned on while power is on, the NO output contact goes on.
TERMINAL NO.
(A)2-10 (B)A-B (A)5-6 (B)2-5 (A)1-4,8-11 (B)1-7,3-9 (NC) (A)1-3,9-11 (B)4-7,6-9 (NO) PWR OUT T
OPERATION
TERMINAL NO.
(A)2-10 (B)A-B (A)5-6 (B)2-5 (A)1-4,8-11 (B)1-7,3-9 (NC) (A)1-3,9-11 (B)4-7,6-9 (NO) PWR OUT T T T
OPERATION
Indicator Set Time
Indicator Set Time
Ta
C: Cycle 4 (signal start, ON first)

When the start input turns on while power is on, the NO contact goes on. The output oscillates at a preset cycle (duty ratio 1:1).
ITEM
D: Signal ON/OFF-Delay
When the start input turns on while power is on, the NO output contact goes on. When a preset time has elapsed while the start input remains on, the output contact goes off. When the start input turns off, the NO contact goes on again. When a preset time has elapsed after the start input turned off, the NO contact goes off.
ITEM
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
TERMINAL NO.
(A)2-10 (B)A-B (A)5-6 (B)2-5 (A)1-4,8-11 (NC) (B)1-7,3-9 (A)1-3,9-11 (NO) (B)4-7,6-9 PWR OUT T T
OPERATION
TERMINAL NO.
(A)2-10 (B)A-B (A)5-6 (B)2-5 (A)1-4,8-11 (B)1-7,3-9 (NC) (A)1-3,9-11 (B)4-7,6-9 (NO) PWR OUT T T
OPERATION
Indicator Set Time
Indicator Set Time
Ta
Ta
Ta
E: Signal OFF-Delay
When power is turned on while the start input is on, the NO output contact goes on. When a preset time has elapsed after the start input turned off, the NO output contact goes off.
ITEM
F: One-Shot (signal start)

When the start input turns on while power is on, the NO output contact goes on. When a preset time has elapsed, the NO output contact goes off.
ITEM
TERMINAL NO.
OPERATION
TERMINAL NO.
OPERATION
Indicator Set Time
Indicator Set Time
Ta
Ta
Ta
Note: T = Set Time, Ta = Shorter than set time, (1): RTE-P1, (2): RTE-B1, (A): RTE-P2, (B): RTE-B2
MODEL RTE-B1AD24 RTE-B1AF20 RTE-B2AD24 RTE-B2AF20 RTE-P1AD24 RTE-P1AF20 RTE-P2AD24 RTE-P2AF20 RTE-P1D12 RTE-P2D12 SR2P-06 SR3B-05 SR3P-05C SR3P-06 March 2014 DESCRIPTION 11 Blade 24 VAC/VDC On-delay, interval, off-cycle, on-cycle SR3B-05 11 Blade 100-240 VAC On-delay, interval, off-cycle, on-cycle SR3B-05 11 Blade 24 VAC/VDC On-delay, off-cycle, off-delay, on-cycle, single shot SR3B-05 11 Blade 100-240 VAC On-delay, off-cycle, off-delay, on-cycle, single shot SR3B-05 8 Pin 24 VAC/VDC On-delay, interval, off-cycle, on-cycle SR2P-06 8 Pin 100-240 VAC On-delay, interval, off-cycle, on-cycle SR2P-06 11 Pin 24 VAC/VDC On-delay, off-cycle, off-delay, on-cycle, single shot SR3P-06 11 Pin 100-240 VAC On-delay, off-cycle, off-delay, on-cycle, single shot SR3P-06 8 pin 12 VDC On- Delay, interval, off-cycle, on-cycle SR3P-05C 11 pin 12 VDC On-delay, off-cycle, off-delay, on-cycle, single shot SR3P-05C RELATED PRODUCTS Relay socket, DPDT pin type, DIN/surface mount Relay socket, three-pole blade type, DIN/surface mount Relay socket, SPDT, DPDT, or 3PDT blade type, DIN/surface mount Relay socket, 3PDT pin type, DIN/surface mount PAGE 1123 1123 1123 1123
19
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1159
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

MULTIFUNCTION TIMING RELAYS TRU SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The TRU Series is a multifunction, knob adjustable, universal time delay relay. It includes six of the most popular timing functions selected by a slide switch. The time delay is knob adjustable and the time delay range is switch selectable. The repeat accuracy is 0.1%. Both function and time range can be selected on the top face of the unit. In addition to multifunctioning and multiple time ranges, the TRU Series features universal input voltage; 19 to 264VAC and 19 to 30VDC and full 10A output relay. The TRU Series can directly replace up to 1000 competitive time delay relay models.
NEW!
TRU Series Accuracy 0.1% Adjustments 4 position DIP switch Operating Temperature -4 to 149F to (-20 to 65C) Storage Temperature -22 to 185F (-30 to 85C) Plug-in socket Mounting Approvals CE, CSA, UR File #E57310 Weight 0.38 lb (0.17kg) Warranty 10 years
FEATURES
Microcontroller 0.1% repeat accuracy Six timing functions are switch selectable 0.1s - 1000m in six ranges
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Voltage Frequency Output Type Contact Conguration Load Type 19 to 264 VAC and 19 to 30 VDC 50/60 Hz Electromechanical relay SPDT & DPDT, isolated 10A resistive @ 120/240 VAC, 28 VDC; 1/3 HP @ 120/240 VAC 1 million operations 10 million operations
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
Electrical Life Mechanical Life
DIMENSIONS
19
2.39 (60.7)
1.78 (45.2)
2.91 (73.9) 3.44 (87.3)
1160
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
L1 L1 L1
MODEL TRU1 TRU2 TRU3 NDS-11 NDS-8
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

MULTIFUNCTION TIMING RELAYS TRU SERIES
8-pin DPDT
Delay-on-Make Interval Recycling
N/L2
8-pin SPDT
Delay-on-Make Interval Single Shot
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
Recycling (ON Time First, Equal Recycle Delays) N/L2 Delay-on-Break Retriggerable Single Shot 11-pin DPDT
N/L2
S1 = Initiate Switch
19
DESCRIPTION Multifunction tming relay, 24-240VAC, 24VDC, DPDT, adjustable 8 pin plug-in Multifunction timing relay, 24-240VAC, 24VDC, SPDT, adjustable 8 pin plug-in Multifunction timing relay, 24-240VAC, 24VDC, DPDT, adjustable 11 pin plug-in RELATED PRODUCTS 11 pin socket base, 300VAC, surface or DIN mount 8 pin socket base, 300VAC, surface or DIN mount
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1161
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

MAGNECRAFT TIME DELAY RELAYS 821TD10H, TDRSOXP, TDRSRXP
DESCRIPTION
The Magnecraft 821TD10H, TDRSOXP, and TDRSRXP are adjustable time delay relays available with various timing functions. The 821TD10H is a DIN rail mounted product offering multiple timing functions, multiple timing scales, and universal voltage input. The TDRSOXP and TDRSRXP are dual function, low cost time delay relays used with DIN/ surface mount sockets. Timing Functions 821TD10H - On-delay, Interval, Off-delay, One-shot, Repeat cycle, Pulse, On & Off-delay, Memory latch TDRSOXP - On-delay, Interval TDRSRXP - Off-delay, Retriggerable One-shot
NEW!
821TD10H, TDRSOXP, TDRSRXP 0.2% 150 ms maximum On-delay, interval, Off-delay, Oneshot, Repeat cycle, Pulse, On and Off-delay, Retriggerable memory latch, On-delay, interval , Off-delay, one-shot, On-delay, interval LED Indication Green Input Red Blinks = timing, on = energized Operating Temperature -4 to 131F (-20 to 55C) Mounting 821 DIN rail/surface mount TDR DIN rail/surface mount socket Dimensions TDRSOXP w/socket 2.02" x 1.6" x 0.83" (5.1 x 4.1 x 2.1 cm) TDRSRXP w/socket 2.05" x 2.32" x 0.97" (5.2 x 5.0 x 2.5 cm) 821TD10H 3.5" x 0.69" x 2.55" (9 x 1.8 x 6.5 cm) TDRSOXP/TDRSRSP 1.73" x 1.42" x 2.8" (4.5 x 3.6 x 7.1 cm) Approvals 821 UL File E234203, RoHS TDR UL File E43641, RoHS Weight 821 0.1 lb (0.05 Kg) TDR 0.3 lb (0.13 Kg) Warranty 1 year Repeatability Reset Time Timing Functions
FEATURES
Adjustable timing ranges from 0.1 second to 10 days (821TD10H) Selectable timing functions Indication LEDs show power, timing (821TD10H) and relay energized The compact model 821TD10H DIN rail mounts without a socket Models TDRSOXP and TDRSRXP DIN rail or surface mount with industry standard sockets
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
SPECIFICATIONS
Coil Rating 821 TDR 12 to 240 VAC/VDC (-15%, + 10%), 3 VA 12/24/120 VAC/VDC (-20%, +10%), 5 VA
19
Relay Type 821 SPDT TDR, 822 DPDT Contact Rating 821 15A @ 240 VAC, 15A @ 24 VDC (resistive) TDR 12A @ 240 VAC, 12A @ 24 VDC (resistive) Input Pulse Time 50 ms minimum; 821, SRXP only Minimum Load 100 mA Transient Protection Yes Contact Material Silver alloy Electrical Life 821 70,000 operations @ full load TDR 100,000 operations @ full load Reverse Polarity Protected Wire Size 821 14 AWG maximum TDR 20-12 AWG with socket Mechanical Life 10 million operations @ no load Setting Error 821, 822 5% of mechanical setting TDR 10% of mechanical setting Time Delay Adjust Potentiometer, Removeable knob Time Range 821, 822 0.1 sec to 10 days TDR 0.1 sec to 10 hours
1162
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
3 2 4 5 6 1 8 7 24 or 120V Power (AC or DC) Non-polarity Sensitive
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

MAGNECRAFT TIME DELAY RELAYS 821TD10H, TDRSOXP, TDRSRXP
External Control Switch
12-240V Power (AC or DC)
CONTROL SWITCH
4 3 2
8 9 10
A1 S A2 +
Control switch ignored functions A to E Control switch required functions F to J
11
24 or 120V Power (AC or DC) Non-polarity Sensitive
15 16 18 COM NC NO
TDRSOXP
TDRSRXP
Use shielded wire for external trigger. Dry switch only.
821TD10H
Use shielded wire for external trigger. Dry switch only.
OPERATION
S P R
t t
P S
t t t
P On-Delay 821 Function: A TDRSOXP: SW1 OFF R

t
P R
R P OFF-Delay S break 821 Function: D TDRSRXP: SW1 OFF
Repeat Cycle: OFF First 821 Function: B
Interval 821 Function: C TDRSOXP: SW1 ON S
Retriggerable One Shot 821 Function: E
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
S R
t
P R
P R
t
Pulse
Pulse
R P One-Shot - S make 821 Function: H TDRSRXP: SW1 ON*
S R P Memory Latch - S make 821 Function: J
Repeat Cycle: ON First 821 Function: F R - Relay Output
Pulse (0.5 sec) 821 Function: G S - Control Switch Time Range 0.1sec-1sec 1sec-10sec 10sec-100sec 0.1min-1min 1min-10min 10min-100min 0.1hr-1hr 1hr-10hr
P - Power
Green Input LED Red Relay LED
t - Time Delay
On and Off Delay S make/break 821 Function: I
* Retriggerable: time delay period restarts any time the control switch is opened and closed.
Fine Adjust Knob

On Output 45 67 3 8 9 2 1 10
I II III IV Function Time Time Time off on
Digital Switches
Digital Switch Position II III IV OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON
Green Input LED Time Scale Select Function Select
A1 S A2 +
TDRSOXP TDRSRXP
TDRSOXP/TDRSRXP Time Range Selection
821TD10H
15 16 18
Time Scale Selection 1 sec Red Timing/ 10 sec Output LED 1 min 10 min Time Adjust 1 hr Multiplier 10 hr 1 day 10 day Always ON Always OFF
Time Adjust Multiplier 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
19
MODEL 821TD10H-UNI TDRSOXP-120 TDRSOXP-24 TDRSRXP-120 TDRSRXP-24 70-464-1 70-465-1 DESCRIPTION Time-delay relay, SPDT, multifunction, 12-240 VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 days Time-delay relay, on-delay/interval, 120 VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 hours Time-delay relay, on-delay/interval, 24 VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 hours Time-delay relay, off-delay/single-shot, 120 VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 hours Time-delay relay, off-delay/single-shot, 24 VAC/VDC, 0.1 sec to 10 hours Relay socket, eight-pin, use with TDRSOXP time delay relay Relay socket, 11-pin, use with TDRSRXP time delay relay
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1163
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

DELAY-ON-MAKE TIMING RELAYS TMV8000, KRDM
DESCRIPTION
These Delay-on-Make timers cover all the popular voltages and time delays. These are a cost effective approach for applications that require small size, isolation, reliability and long life. Encapsulation protects against shock, vibration and humidity.
FEATURES
Onboard adjust time delay Compact 2" x 2" size Adjustable timing ranges
NEW!
TMV8000 KRPSA2M KRDM421 Operating Humidity Power Consumption Mounting Dimensions Approvals Warranty 95% RH non-condensing 2VA for AC; 2W for DC Surface mount with one #10 screw 2"W x 2"H x 1.21"D (5.08 x 5.08 x 3.07 cm) CE, CSA, UR File #E57310 10 years
KRPS Series
L1 N/L2
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature TMV8000 -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C) KRPS -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) KRDM -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Storage Temperature TMV8000 -22 to 185F (-30 to 85C) KRPS/KRDM -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
WIRING
TMV8000
L1 N/L2
L1
N/L2
V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NC = Normally Closed NO = Normally Open S1 = Initiate Switch UTL = Untimed Load
KRDM Series
V = Voltage C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed
Load may be connected to terminal 3 or 1. TMV8000 has knob adjustment.
A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or RT terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external adjustment vs. time delay chart. The untimed load is optional. S1 is not used for some functions.
A knob is supplied for adjustable units, or RT terminals 4 & 5 for external adjust. See external adjustment vs time delay chart. Relay contacts are isolated.
SPECIFICATIONS Supply Voltage Output Type Output Form Output Rating (@ 40C) Timing Range Repeat Accuracy Timing Tolerance Reset Time Circuitry Protection Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Termination Weight TMV8000 KRPSA24M KRDM221* / KRDM421**
24-240 VAC/DC, 50/60 Hz Solid State NO, open during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush @ 55C 0.1 to 8 min adjustable 2% 10% 100ms Encapsultated 100 M .25 in. (6.35mm) male quick connect terminals 0.15 lb (0.07kg)
24-240 VAC/DC, 50/60 Hz Isolated Relay Contacts SPDT 10A @ 125VAC; 5A @ 230VAC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 0.1 to 10 min adjustable 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 2% 150ms Encapsultated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M .25 in. (6.35mm) male quick connect terminals 0.16 lb (0.08kg)
24 VAC/DC* / 120 VAC**, 50/60 Hz Isolated Relay Contacts SPDT 10A @ 125VAC; 5A @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 1 - 100 seconds adjustable 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms Encapsultated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M .25 in. (6.35mm) male quick connect terminals 0.16 lb (0.08kg)
19
1164
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES SPECIFICATIONS WIRING
CT1S30
L1 N
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

LOCKOUT DELAY TIMER TA, CT SERIES
The TA Series prevents rapid recycling of a compressor. A lockout delay is started when the thermostat opens, or input voltage is lost. Eliminates tripped circuit breakers or blown fuses caused by a locked rotor during short cycling. The TA will not allow the compressor to start when the line voltage is low. Because of the fast initiate time, bounce of the thermostat will not be transmitted to the compressor relay coil. A 30 second delay provides anti-reversing protection for scroll compressors. The CT Series combines a delay-on-make and delay-on-break time delay into one unit and may be used to control fan delays in heating and/or cooling equipment.
CT1S30
T2D120A15M
TA24A3
Lockout delay prevents rapid recycling of compressor Low voltage brownout protection Circuitry to activate the cooling anticipator (24VAC models)
Operating Temperature TA / CT Series -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) T2D Series -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Storage Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Operating Humidity 95% RH non-condensing Terminations 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) male quick
Mounting Dimensions Approvals Warranty
connect terminals Surface mount with one #10 screw 2"W x 2"H x 1.21"D (5.08 x 5.08 x 3.07cm) CE, CSA, UR File #E57310 10 years
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
T2D120A15M
L1 N/L2
L1 N
TA24A3
S1 = Initiate Switch, Contact, or Thermostat CR = Compressor Relay (Load) CR = Compressor Relay THMS = Wall Thermostat 1 Random Start Plus Lockout V = Voltage L = Load S1 = Initiate Switch or Thermostat CA = Optional Cooling Anticipator V = Voltage
SPECIFICATIONS Function Supply Voltage Output Type Output Form Output Rating Timing Range Lockout Time Repeat Accuracy Timing Tolerance Circuitry Protection Anticipator Resistor Insulation Resistance Voltage Drop Weight CT1S30 DOM & DOB 24 VAC Solid State NO 0.75A steady state, 5A inrush @ 55C 1 to 600s 5% 20% Encapsultated 3000 100 M = 1.25V 0.15lb (0.07kg) T2D120A15M Lockout 24 VAC or 120/230 VAC in 2 ranges Solid State NO 1A steady state, 10A inrush @ 60C 1s - 100m in 4 adjustable ranges or xed 1% or 20ms, whichever is greater 30% Encapsultated 3000 100 M = 2.5V @ 1A 0.15lb (0.07kg) TA24A3 / TA24A5 Lockout 12 or 24 VDC, 24 VAC Solid State NO 75mA, 1A @ 60C xed 0.5, 1, 2, 3, or 5m -15% to 35% Encapsultated 1800 100 M = 1.25V 0.15lb (0.07kg)
19
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1165
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

DELAY-ON-BREAK TIMING RELAYS KRDB, KSDB, TDUB
DESCRIPTION
The KRDB Series is a compact time delay relay measuring only 2 in. (50.8 mm) square. Its microcontroller timing circuit provides excellent repeat accuracy and stability. The KSDB Series is designed for general purpose commercial and industrial applications where a small, cost effective, reliable solid-state timer is required. This series is designed for popular AC and DC voltage. The TDUB Series combines digital timing circuitry with universal voltage operation and offers DIP switch selectable time delays ranging from 0.1 seconds to 102.3 minutes in three ranges.
NEW!
KRDB421 KSDB421 TDUB3000A Mounting Dimensions Approvals Warranty Surface mount with one #10 screw 2"W x 2"H x 1.21"D (5.08 x 5.08 x 3.07 cm) CE, CSA, UR File #E57310 10 years
KSDB Series
L1 N/L2
FEATURES
External or onboard adjustment knob 1A solid state or Isolated 10Aoutput Compact 2 x 2" time delay relay
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) Storage Temperature KRDB/TDUB -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) KSDB -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C) Operating Humidity 95% RH non-condensing
WIRING
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
L1
N/L2
KRDB421
V = Voltage S1 = Initiate Switch C = Common, Transfer Contact NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed UTL = Untimed Load (optional)
L1 N/L2
(Positive Switching) (Negative Switching)
TDUB3000A
UTL = Optional Untimed Load S1 = Initiate Switch L = Timed Load
UTL = Optional Untimed Load L = Load S1 = Initiate Switch RT is used when external adjustment is ordered.
A knob is supplied for adjustable units. The untimed load is optional. Relay contacts are isolated.
SPECIFICATIONS Supply Voltage Output Type Output Form Output Rating (@ 40C) Timing Range Repeat Accuracy
. Timing Tolerance
KRDB421 12, 24, or 110 VDC; 24, 120, or 230 VAC Isolated Relay Contacts SPDT 10A resistive @ 125VAC; 5A resistive @ 230VAC & 28VDC; 1/4 hp @ 125VAC 0.1s-1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms Encapsulated 1500V RMS input to output 100 M 0.25 in (6.35mm) Male quick connect terminals 0.16lb (0.08kg)
KSDB421 / KSDB431* 12, 24, or 110 VDC; 24, 120, or 230 VAC Solid State NO, closed before & during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush @ 60C 0.1s-1000m in 6 adjustable ranges or fixed 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M 0.25 in (6.35mm) Male quick connect terminals 0.15lb (0.07kg)
TDUB3000A 24 to 240 VAC, 12 to 24 VDC Solid State NO, closed before & during timing 1A steady state, 10A inrush @ 60C 0.1-102.3s in 0.1s increments; 1-1023s in 1s increments 0.5% or 20ms, whichever is greater 5% 150ms Encapsulated 2000V RMS terminals to mounting surface 100 M 0.25 in (6.35mm) Male quick connect terminals 0.15lb (0.07kg)
19
Reset Time Circuitry Protection Isolation Voltage Insulation Resistance Termination Weight
1166
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION OPERATION FEATURES DIMENSIONS
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

KELE MOTOR STARTER INTERFACE PIL-2
The PIL-2 is designed to provide momentary contact closures to control motor starters with momentary start/stop push buttons. The PIL-2 acts as a remote start/stop station using a single maintained contact from a controller, switch, or relay.
The Model PIL-2 is operated by a single maintained N.C. or N.O. contact from a switch, relay, or controller. Closing the input contact causes the N.O. latch output to close momentarily for 300 ms to start a motor. Opening the input contact causes the N.C. unlatch output to open momentarily for 300 ms to stop a motor. A power-up feature allows the selection of either an immediate pulse out (PUP position), based on the current state of the input contact, or a pulse out only when the input contact changes state. LEDs indicate input state and output latch or unlatch pulses.
PIL-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Input Output Output Pulse Time Weight Warranty 24 VAC/VDC @ 50 mA SPST switch or relay One N.O. contact rated 120 VAC, 5A; one N.C. contact rated 120 VAC, 5A 300 ms (contact Kele for special pulse time requiements, 5 sec maximum) 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) 18 months
LED indicators: Pulse out: latch/unlatch, Command in: off/on 24 VAC/DC power Selectable power-up state (PUP) Snap-track mounting for easy installation
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
in (cm)
Power-up jumper (shown in PUP position) PUP
3 (7.62)
PULSE OUT UL L CMD IN OFF ON
PIL-2
LED Indication PULSE OUT - UL PULSE OUT - L CMD IN - OFF CMD IN - ON 2.25 (5.72)
ON only during unlatch (stop) pulse ON only during latch (start) pulse ON only when command contact is open ON only when command contact is closed
PWR PWR CMD IN
UL L
19
Latch (start) Local start (push button) Starter coil M
+ 24 VAC/VDC
Command contact
Power Power Command
Unlatch (stop) L1 Local stop (push button)
L2
Starter hold-in contact
MODEL PIL-2 PIL-2-C DESCRIPTION Motor starter interface, 300 ms pulse Motor starter interface, special pulse (specify when ordering)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1167
RELAYS & CONTACTORS

MOTOR LOAD SIZING
A resistive load is one that offers simple resistance to the ow of current. An example would be an electric heater. An inductive load would be found in a motor, transformer, solenoid, or other device that has magnetizing coils. Inductive loads are often rated in amps with a separate motor rating in horsepower. They are characterized by high inrush current when contacts close, and by resistance to the stopping of current ow when contacts open (arcing). A pilot duty load is another specic type of inductive load that often has a separate rating. Pilot duty ratings come into play when relay contacts control the coils of other relays or contactors. A lighting load can be ballast type (fluorescent and HID lighting) or tungsten (incandescent). Ballasts are somewhat inductive, particularly the non-electronic types. Tungsten lighting presents a very low resistance at startup (high starting current) when the laments are cold, but behaves like a resistive load once the lamps are bright and hot. Tungsten loads can be the most destructive of all to a relays contacts unless they are specically designed to handle such an inrush.
NEW!
MOTORLOADSIZING FULL LOAD CURRENT (AMPS) VS HP THREE PHASE SINGLE PHASE Volts 115V 230V 460V 115V 230V HP 1/6 4.4 2.2 1/4 5.8 2.9 1/3 7.2 3.6 1/2 4 2 1 9.8 4.9 3/4 5.6 2.8 1.4 13.8 6.9 1 7.2 3.6 1.8 16 8 1-1/2 10.4 5.2 2.6 20 10 2 13.6 6.8 3.4 24 12 5 15.2 7.6 56 28 7-1/2 22 11 80 40 10 28 14 100 50 15 38 19 20 52 26 25 64 32 30 77 39 40 101 51
19
RELAYS & CONTACTORS
1168
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
TEMPERATURE SENSORS & TRANSMITTERS
HUMIDITY
Kele Stocks the Top Brands in Temperature Sensing.
ACI Duct Series | p. 1201
BA/Immersion | p. 1214 Series
KTUS* Series| p. 1224
ST-AV81H | p. 1236
KTOSA Series | p. 1219
ST-SK Series | p. 1174

TM

MODEL/SERIES PAGE
All Purpose KTA* Series All-Purpose Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST-A* Series All-Purpose Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KTM*, KTMR* Series Encapsulated Thermistor and RTD Sensor .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST-R*, ST-R*R Series Encapsulated Thermistor and RTD Sensors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KTMP* Series Mini Probe Thermistor and RTD Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST-MP* Series Mini Probe Thermistor and RTD Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KTM*S, KTM*SC Series Stainless Steel Sheath Thermistor and RTD Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST-R*S, ST-R*SC Series Stainless Steel Sheath Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205 1207 1245 1247 1249 1250 1251 1253 T91H, T91L, T91U Series 1000 Ohm 375 Platinum RTD Rangeable Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . 1277 T85U Series 1000 Ohm RTD Rangeable Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279 T81U Series 100 Ohm Platinum RTD Rangeable Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281 T71U Series 100 Ohm Platinum RTD Rangeable Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282 T5U, T63U Series 1000 Ohm RTD Rangeable Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283 TT801, TT807 Series Platinum RTD Temperature Industrial Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284 TT809 Series 1000 Ohm Platinum RTD Rangeable Temperature Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 T81PNR, T85PNR, T90PNR Series Platinum RTD Temperature Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 Room KTR* Series Room Temperature Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169 ST-S*E, ST-S*EW Series Executive Style Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171 TE200AD Series Executive Style Thermistor and RTD Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173 ST-S*K Series Decorator Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174 KTES* Series Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . 1176 ST-S*P Series Surface-Mount Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178 ACI Room Series Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180 BA/ Room Series Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181 KTP* Series Stainless Steel Flush-Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182 ST-S* Series Stainless Steel Flush-Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184 5, 77, 78 Room Sensors Nickel-Iron / Balco Room RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188 KTB* Series Button Style Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1191 ST-B* Series Button Style Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192 ST-BP Series Paintable Button Style Flush Mount Wall Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193 Sensor Options and Accessories Sensor Options Room Temperature Thermistor and RTD Sensors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295 Temperature Sensor Accessories Accessories for Temperature Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297 Plate Pal Series Room Temperature Display. . . . . . . . . 1300 Specialty TE-6300 Series 1000 Ohm Nickel Room, Duct, OSA RTD Sensors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186 ACI Bullet/Button Series Bullet/Button Thermistor and RTD Sensors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194 ST-STP* Series Strap-on Thermistors and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255 ACI Strap-On Series Strap-On Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256 BA/ Strap-On Series Strap-on Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257 ST-TS* Series Submersible Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259 ST-L* Series Ring Lug Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . 1260 BA/*RPFEP Series Extreme Temperature Sensors. . . . 1262 BA/*-TB Series Thermobuffer Temperature Sensor.. . . 1264 AS10 Series Thermal Vial Temperature Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267 S101144, S469, S665PDY48BC, S667PDY40BC Thermal Ribbon RTD .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268 TE200G Series Thermal Glass Thermistor And Rtd Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270 Temperature Switches .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291 TK Series Temperature Switch Wells and Adaptors WB, WS Sensor Thermowells and Well Adapters . . . . . 1293 WEL-B, WEL-S, F2B-D, F2N-B, F2S-D Sensor Thermowells and Well Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
TE-6300 Series | p. 1186

T E M P E R AT U R E SENSORS & TRANSMITTERS
Averaging ST-FZR Series Rigid Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230 ST-AV81R, ST-AV85R, ST-AV91R Platinum Curve Rigid Averaging Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232 ST-FZ* Series Averaging Thermistor & RTD Sensors. . 1234 ST-AV81H, ST-AV85H Averaging RTD Sensors. . . . . . 1236 ST-AV91H 1000 Ohm 375 Platinum Averaging Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237 ACI Averaging Series Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238 BA/ Averaging Series Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239 TE707C Series Flexible Plenum and Armored Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241 TE200FDC Series Flexible Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242 AS103759 Combination Averaging Sensor/Freezestat . . 1243 Duct KTD* Series Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . 1195 ST-D* Series Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . . . 1197 KTV* Series VAV Box Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199 ACI Duct Series Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . 1201 BA/ Duct Series Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . 1202 5, 77, 78 Universal Duct, Immersion, OSA Kele Nickel-Iron/ Balco Immersion, Duct & Outdoor RTD Sensors . . . 1204 KTUS*, KTOS* Series Duct, Immersion, OSA, Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224 KTU* Series Universal-Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226 ST-U* Series Universal-Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228 Immersion KTW* Series Immersion Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ST-W* Series Immersion Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACI Immersion Series Immersion Thermistor and RTD Sensors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BA/ Immersion Series Immersion Thermistor and RTD Sensors.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BA/Strap-On | p. 1257
1209 1211 1213 1214
ST-O Series | p. 1217

TM
Infrared Transmitters TY7321A1009 Infrared Room Temperature Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289 OSA KTO* Series OSA Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . . . . 1216 ST-O* Series Outside Air Thermistor and RTD Sensor. 1217 KTOSA* Series OSA Thermistor and RTD Sensors . . . 1219 ACI OSA Series OSA Thermistor and RTD Sensors. . . 1221 BA/ OSA Series OSA Temperature Sensors. . . . . . . . . 1222 RTD Transmitters AS Room, Duct, OSA, and Immersion Sensors Platinum Room, Duct, OSA, and Immersion RTD Sensors. . . 1189 S241HC, TT111H-0800 High Temperature Sensor & Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266 ST-T90 Series 1000 Ohm 375 Platinum RTD Fixed Temperature Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271 ST-T91 Series Rangeable Platinum Room Temperature Transmitter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273 TT859 Platinum 1000 Ohm Space Temperature Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
kele.com
NEW!
Economical Attractive new design Three-year warranty 0.5F (0.28C) accuracy Durable housing White color Thermistor or RTD Locking cover screws
TEMPERATURE
ROOM TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTR* SERIES
The Kele Model KTR* Room Temperature Thermistor and RTD Sensor is a cost-effective room temperature sensor with an accuracy of 0.5F (0.28C). The thermistor is made of a very stable, pre-aged material that offers the reliability needed in control systems. The platinum RTD comes in 100 ohm and 1000 ohm and is compatible with most HVAC systems. All sensors come with a three-year warranty.
APPLICATION
The KTR* Series is designed to be wall mounted indoors where appearance and accuracy are important. The sensor may be mounted directly to the drywall or on standard electrical boxes. It comes in all the most common thermistors or RTDs. Options may be mixed and matched for each application. KTR*
KTR*-A10K-J1-LED-MB
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor 0.50F (0.28C) 0.60F (0.33C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
RTD 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 81 Type 85 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD 100% (no drift platinum) Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) Enclosure Rating White plastic Mounting Directly to wall or single gang back box Wiring Terminations Terminals Approvals CE Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) Warranty 3 years March 2014
in (cm)
.5 (1.27) 3.31 (8.40) 1.31 (2.54)
2.64 (6.7) 4.5 (11.43) LED MB 1.25 (3.2) Typical logo location 1.5 (3.8) 0.18 (.47)
20
Wire Way
Back Plate
0.94 (2.38)
0.33 Adjust (.85) Tab
2.75 (6.98)
Front Side
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1169
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING AND SENSOR ONLY WIRING
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where back box is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical outlet boxes. Basic model comes with screw terminal block, white decorator faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handy-box mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws for direct wall mounting. Locking cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" Allen key head, installed as needed.
Wire Access Hole Mounting Back Plate Mounting Screws Option Board Clip To BAS Controller
ROOM TEMPERATURE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTR* SERIES
NEW!
WIRING TYPICAL COVER OPTIONS
2 1 8 7
JP1
MB Button 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8
Jumper Pot Pot Sensor Sensor
RJ11 plug
COVER ON CCRJ11AD accessory; required for J1 option
RJ11 plug with cover off; for J2 option
Push button will short out the pot or sensor momentarily
2 1
J1
8 7
+ -
8 7 JP1
J2
IN
Communication Wiring J1 or J2 Customer Contact 24 VAC/VDC Sensor to BAS Controller Axxx Pot to BAS Controller TB4 for MB only
J7
OUT
+
R4 R5
LED
LED
+
SENSOR
A K
R2
J3
R3
POT
J4 JP2
LED
D2
Self-Latching Cover
Cover Locking 1/16" Allen Screws installed as needed
MB Button
A D3 K
SW1
JP2 Pot Action Sensor DA RA Shipped DA Left to right Low to high resistance
R6 SW3
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the floor, on an interior wall, out of the sun, and away from any heating or cooling generating devices. Note: Adjust option requires option board removal to mount back plate.
RT1
SETPOINT ADJUST
Axxx
RT2
DA RA
Low to high resistance High to low resistance
TEMPERATURE
20
MODEL DESCRIPTION KTR Kele room sensor housing SENSOR SELECTION 3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III 21 2252 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 22 3000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 24 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 27 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 42 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV 81 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 85 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 91 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) ROOM SENSOR OPTIONS XA100K Setpoint adjust with 100,000 span XA10K Setpoint adjust with 10,000 span XA20K Setpoint adjust with 20,000 span XA400 Setpoint adjust with 400 span (R5 for offset) XCL1 Custom logo one color ( CL2=two color, CL3=three color) XD Dual sensors RJ11 externally-accessible communication jack( CCRJ11AD required) XJ1 XJ2 Internal RJ11 communication jack XLED LED lamp indicator, standard 24 VAC/VDC voltage Momentary pushbutton switch, jumpered across sensor or pot (JP1) XM XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XN3 TB4 Separate termination for MB option XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accurance, themistors only 0.135F, 0.075C XPL Red LED lamp externally powered 24VAC/VDC
Sample Order KTR3 Kele room sensor with 10,000 Type III thermistor
KTR85-A10K-MB Kele room sensor with 1000 385 RTD with 10k adjust pot and momentary switch
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 10-531 White adaptor plate 7" x 5.25" (KTR,KHR) 1297 CC-RJ11AD Adapter cable for XJ1 option with female RJ11 8-pin connector 1300 KT1 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 1390 T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
1170
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
TEMPERATURE
EXECUTIVE STYLE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-S*E, ST-S*EW SERIES
TM
The Precon Model ST-S*E and ST-S*EW Executive Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision room temperature sensing for building automation systems in beige or white respectively. The active sensing element is made of a highly stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
Lifetime warranty 0.36F (0.2C) thermistor accuracy 0.27F (0.15C) or 0.54F (0.30C) RTD accuracy Ultra high accuracy optional Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves Vented housing for quick temperature response Adaptable with many options Traditional beige or white covers Durable plastic housing and base plate Easy to mount to wall or electrical box
ST-S*EW
ST-S*E-XA-XME-XTA
TYPICAL MOUNTING
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical outlet boxes. Basic model comes with screw terminal block, white decorator faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handybox mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws for direct wall mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" allen key head.
Optional CustomerSupplied Handy Box Wire Access Hole Plate Mounting Screws
TYPICAL COVER WITH MULTIPLE OPTIONS

XJ1 XJ2
Internal Communication Jack under the cover External Communication Jack for use with handheld terminals, requires adapter cable CC-RJ11AD
F 90 80 70 60 50
XTA/XTAC (ST-S*E only)

Analog Temperature Display 50 to 90F, 10 to 32C
TEMPERATURE
XM
Exposed Momentary Push Button (cannot be used with XA, XJ1, or XJ2 options)
DEC INC
XME XPL XA
XK
Concealed Membrane Momentary Push Button Red LED Indicator Lamp Setpoint Adjust to provide a 10 k to 30 k resistance input (1-3 k and 1-1.4 k available)
Custom Logo (your company logo)
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (12.7 cm) above the floor, on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71, 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD March 2014 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 1000 Nickel 100 PT 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Enclosure ST-S*E: Beige plastic with tan metal face plate ST-S*EW: White plastic with white metal face plate Mounting Directly to wall or single gang box Wiring Terminations Terminals Approvals CE Weight 0.15 lb (0.07 kg) Warranty Lifetime
20
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1171
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
EXECUTIVE STYLE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-S*E, ST-S*EW SERIES
Front View 4.50 (11.43) 3.23 (8.20) Bottom View
1.20 (3.05)
NEW!
Front View 4.50 (11.43) 1.20 (3.05) 2.75 (6.99) Bottom View
ST-S*E
3.23 (8.20) 2.75 (6.99)
ST-S*EW
MODEL ST-S3 ST-S21 ST-S22 ST-S24 ST-S27 ST-S42 ST-S63 ST-S71 ST-S81 ST-S85 ST-S91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 executive thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 executive thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 executive thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 executive thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 executive thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 executive thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 nickel executive RTD @ 70F (21C), (yellow leads) 100 ultra high accurate executive RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 100 executive RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 executive RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 executive RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) E Executive beige enclosure with wide back plate EW Executive white enclosure with narrow back plate OPTIONS (List options in alphabetical order with dashes) XA * Setpoint adjustment (10,000 to 30,000, resistance input) XA10K * Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 3,000, resistance input) XA2K * Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 1,400, resistance input) XD Dual sensors XGR Gray decorator faceplate (tan is standard) XJ1 * RJ11 externally-accessible communication jack (CCRJ11AD required) XJ2 * Internal RJ11 communication jack XK Custom Logo XM ** Momentary switch wired N.O. to terminal block XME Membrane momentary switch wired only N.O. to terminal block, tan faceplate only XMP Membrane push button switch (XME) with terminals for separate button termination XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F (0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F (0C/70C) 4.50 XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F (0C/25C/70C) (11.43) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XPL * Red LED lamp externally powered 24VAC/VDC XTA Analog temperature display , 50 to 90F 1F XTAC Centigrade analog temperature display 10 to 32C 1C XZ Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71) 1.20 (3.05) sensor zone with E XA XTA Example: ST-S3-E-XA-XTA 10,000 Type III executive Side View setpoint adjustment and analog display
* Circuit board option | ** Cannot be mounted in conjunction with *options | Not available on EW housing
20
ST-S3
TEMPERATURE
10-531 CC-RJ11AD KT1 T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR
RELATED PRODUCTS White adaptor plate 7" x 5.25" (KTR,KHR) Adapter cable for XJ1 option with female RJ11 8-pin connector Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable
PAGE 1297 1300 1390 1281 1279 1277
1172
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
0.36F (0.2C) thermistor accuracy 0.54F (0.3C) RTD accuracy Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves Vented housing for quick temperature response Durable plastic housing and base plate Easy to mount to wall or electrical box
TEMPERATURE
EXECUTIVE STYLE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR TE200AD SERIES
The Greystone Energy Systems Model TE200AD Series Executive Room Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision room temperature sensing for building automation systems. The active sensing element is made of a highly stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
TE200AD
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.54F (0.3C) 2,252, 3,000, 10,000 Type II & III, 20,000 100 Platinum 385 curve, 1,000 Platinum 385 curve
DIMENSIONS
Front View 4.50 (11.43) 2.75 (6.99) Bottom View 1.25 (3.2)
Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Output Range 14 to 158F (-10 to 70C) Wiring Terminations 6" leads CE, RoHs Approvals Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 Kg) Warranty 5 years
TE200AD
2.75 (6.99)
TEMPERATURE
MODEL TE200AD2 TE200AD6 TE200AD7 TE200AD8 TE200AD12 TE200AD20 TE200AD24 DESCRIPTION 100 executive RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve, 3 wire (red, red, white leads) 3000 executive thermistor @ 77F (25C), (blue leads) 10,000 executive thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 executive thermistor @ 77F (25C), (gray leads) 1000 executive RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (gray leads) 20,000 executive thermistor @ 77F (25C), (gray leads) 10,000 executive thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) OPTIONS AS Membrane momentary switch wired only N.O. to terminal block BS Momentary switch wired N.O.
20
TE200AD24
AS
Example: TE200AD24AS 10,000 Type II executive sensor with membrane momentary switch.
T85U-XR T81U-XR
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1173
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The PreCon Model ST-S*K White Decorator Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision room temperature sensing for building automation systems. The thermistor element is made of a highly stable, pre-aged precision thermistor material accurate to within 0.36F (0.2C) while the platinum RTD is avaialble in 100 and 1000 models. Both are compatable with most HVAC systems.
DECORATOR ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-S*K SERIES
NEW!
ST-S*K
TM
FEATURES
Lifetime warranty Attractive new design 0.36F (0.2C) thermistor accuracy 0.27F (0.15C) or 0.54F (0.30C) RTD accuracy Durable housing White color Thermistor or RTD Locking cover screws
DIMENSIONS
XM option
OPTIONS
Setpoint slide adjust Momentary override switch
.5 (1.27) 3.31 (8.40) 1.31 (2.54)
APPLICATION
The ST-S*K Series is designed to be wall mounted indoors where appearance and accuracy are important. The sensor may be mounted directly to the drywall or on standard electrical boxes. It is available in all common thermistors or RTDs.
4.5 (11.43)
TEMPERATURE
Typical logo location Wire Way 0.33 Adjust (.85) Tab
1.5 (3.8) 0.18 (.47)
Back Plate
2.75 (6.98)
Front Side
in (cm)
0.94 (2.38)
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type71, 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 1000 Nickel 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Negative temperature coefcient Thermistor RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Enclosure White plastic Mounting Directly to wall or single gang box Wiring Terminations Terminals Approvals CE Weight 0.15 lb (0.07 kg) Warranty Lifetime
20
1174
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MOUNTING AND SENSOR ONLY WIRING
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where back box is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical outlet boxes.
Wire Access Hole Mounting Back Plate Mounting Screws Option Board Clip To BAS Controller Self-Latching Cover Cover Locking 1/16" Allen Screws Installed as needed
TEMPERATURE
WIRING
Communication Bus Terminal
DECORATOR ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-S*K SERIES
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, white decorator faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handy-box mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws for direct-wall mounting. Locking cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" Allen key head, installed as needed.
Out In
Pot Sensor LED
Setpoint Adjust Sensor Terminals LED Terminals 24 VAC/VDC Jumper Pins for Momentary Push button Option allow locating the N.O. contacts across the sensor (S) or the setpoint (P)
P S
XA Setpoint Adjust Potentiometer
Comp Ext Sens Sens
Controller Temp Sensor (standard) Sensor Mounted to Cover
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the floor, on an interior wall, out of the sun, and away from any heating or cooling generating devices. Note: Adjust option requires option board removal to mount back plate.
Optional Board Terminations (multiple options shown)
MODEL ST-S3K ST-S21K ST-S22K ST-S24K ST-S27K ST-S42K ST-S63K ST-S71K ST-S81K ST-S85K ST-S91K DESCRIPTION 10,000 decorator thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 decorator thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 decorator thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 decorator thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 decorator thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 decorator thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 nickel decorator RTD @ 70F (21C), (yellow leads) 100 ultra high accurate decorator RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 100 decorator RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 decorator RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 decorator RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS XA * Setpoint adjustment (10,000 to 30,000, resistance input) XA10K* Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 3,000, resistance input) XA2K * Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 1,400, resistance input) XD Dual sensors in one probe XK Custom Logo XM Momentary switch wired N.O. to terminal block XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XPL * Red LED lamp externally powered 24VAC/VDC XA Example: ST-S3K-XA 10,000 Type III decorator sensor with setpoint adjustment
* Circuit board option
TEMPERATURE
20
ST-S3K
10-531 KT1 T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR
RELATED PRODUCTS White adaptor plate 7" x 5.25" (KTR,KHR) Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable
PAGE 1297 1390 1281 1279 1277
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1175
TEMPERATURE
TKTES* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTES* Series Room Thermistor and RTD Temperature Sensor is a cost-effective room temperature thermistor with an accuracy of 0.5F (0.28C). The thermistor is made of a very stable, pre-aged material that offers the reliability needed in most HVAC systems, and it comes with a three-year warranty. FEATURES Economical Attractive design Three-year warranty 0.5F (0.28C) accuracy Durable housing White color
NEW!
KTES*
OPTIONS Setpoint slide adjust Momentary override switch
DIMENSIONS
APPLICATION The KTES* Series is designed to be wall mounted indoors where appearance is important. The sensor may be mounted directly to the drywall or on a standard US electrical outlet bow without adapters.
in (cm)
TEMPERATURE
3.25 (8.25)
4.50 (11.43)
2.75 (6.98)
0.76 (1.93)
Front View
Side View
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD 0.50F (0.28C) 0.60F (0.33C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13) over ve years RTD 100% (no drift platinum) Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) Enclosure White plastic Mounting Directly to wall or single gang box Wiring Terminations Terminals Approvals CE Weight 0.12 lb (0.05 kg) Warranty 3 years
20
1176
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MOUNTING
Optional CustomerSupplied Handibox Plate Mounting Screws
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
ROOM THERMISTOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR KTES* SERIES
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical outlet boxes.
XM Momentary Push Button XA Set Point Adjust Sensor Plate
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, two #6-32 screws for handibox mounting or for direct wall mounting.
Solder Pads
Override Select
POT
Factory Jumpers cut and resolder jumper to P (potentiometer) solder pads
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the oor, on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
Pot Termination Sensor Termination and Push Button (N.O.)
MODEL KTES3 KTES21 KTES22 KTES24 KTES27 KTES42 KTES81 KTES85 KTES91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 Room Thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III Material (gray leads) 2252 Room Thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II Material (green leads) 3000 Room Thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II Material (blue leads) 10,000 Room Thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II Material (yellow leads) 100,000 Room Thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II Material (gray leads) 20,000 Room Thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV Material (green leads) 100 Room RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve, (yellow leads) 1000 Room RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve, (blue leads) 1000 Room RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve, (green leads) OPTIONS XA Setpoint adjustment (10,000 to 30,000, resistance input) XA2K Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 1,400, resistance input) XA10K Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 3,000, resistance input) XD Dual sensors XM Momentary switch (jumpered across sensor) XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XZ Three wire RTD connections XA Example: KTES27-XA 100,000 Type II room sensor thermistor with set point adjust option
SENSOR
TEMPERATURE
20
KTES27

T85U-XR T81U-XR T91U-XR UR
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277 Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1177
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Precon Model ST-S* P Surface-Mount Room Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision room temperature sensing for building automation systems. The active sensing element is made of a highly stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
SURFACE-MOUNT ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-S*P SERIES
FEATURES
Lifetime warranty 0.36F (0.2C) thermistor accuracy 0.27F (0.15C) or 0.54F (0.30C) RTD accuracy Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Vented housing for quick temperature response Adaptable with many options Traditional tan cover with brushed aluminum faceplate Durable plastic housing and base plate Easy to mount to wall or back box
NEW!
ST-S*P
TM
APPLICATION
The wall-mounted enclosure is designed to be mounted indoors vertically or horizontally. The separate base plate may be mounted directly to the drywall or a standard electrical outlet box with adapters. The cover is secured with tamper resistant hex screws. Where moisture is a concern, the moisture-proong R or R# option is required.
OPTIONS
Setpoint adjustment Moistureproof with 18" (0.45m) leads Momentary switch override
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71, 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 1000 Nickel 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient Positive temperature coefcient RTD Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Enclosure Beige plastic with aluminum plate Mounting Directly to wall or BKT-1 bracket to mount to single gang box Wiring Terminations 8 (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails prestripped, Type 71 & 81 sensors have 18 leads Approvals CE Weight 0.1 lb (0.05 kg) Warranty Lifetime
20
1178
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MOUNTING
Accessory Mounting Bracket BKT-1 Optional CustomerSupplied Handy Box Adapter plate ISPL-1 or SSPL-1 Cover Mounting 1/16 Allen Screws Base Plate
TEMPERATURE
Setpoint Adjust provides a 0 to 10 k resistance input
SURFACE-MOUNT ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR ST-S*P SERIES
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit is not required. Adapters are required when mounting directly to electrical outlet boxes.
XA
Basic model comes with base plate, cover, brushed aluminum faceplate, 18" (45.7 cm) of 24 AWG wire, and two #6 x 1 screws for direct wall mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" allen key head.
Momentary Switch
XM
1 0 -1
-2
-3
Terminate with butt splices or soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended.
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.75 (4.45)
3.13 (7.94)
2.13 (5.4)
The sensor should be mounted approximately five feet above the floor, on an interior wall, away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
MODEL ST-S3P ST-S21P ST-S22P ST-S24P ST-S27P ST-S42P ST-S63P ST-S71P ST-S81P ST-S85P ST-S91P DESCRIPTION 10,000 surface-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 surface-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 surface-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 surface-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 surface-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 surface-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 1,000 nickel surface-mount RTD @ 70F (21C), (yellow leads) 100 ultra high accurate surface-mount RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 100 surface-mount RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 surface-mount RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 surface-mount RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS XA * Setpoint adjustment (10,000 to 30,000, resistance input) XA10K* Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 3,000, resistance input) XA2K * Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 1,400, resistance input) XD Dual sensors in one probe XK Custom Logo XM Momentary switch wired N.O. to terminal block XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XPL * Red LED lamp externally powered 24VAC/VDC XZ Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71) XM Example: ST-S27P-XB 100,000 Type II surface-mount zone sensor thermistor with momentary override option *Circuit board option
TEMPERATURE
20
ST-S27P
BKT-1 ISPL-1 KT1 SSPL-1 T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR UR
RELATED PRODUCTS Handy-box mounting bracket for wall sensor Plastic ivory switch plate cover for handy-box mounting Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key Stainless steel switch plate cover for handy-box mounting 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1390 1281 1279 1277 229
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1179
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The ACI Series Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specically for HVAC system temperature control. The room sensors come in thermistor and RTD sensor curves compatible with most BAS systems available today. Room sensors are vented for indoor use with options that include setpoint adjust, push-button override, communication jacks, and display. The ACI Room Sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (12.7 cm) above the floor. It can be mounted to a standard back box or directly to the wall using appropriate anchors for the wall covering.
ROOM THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ACI ROOM SERIES
NEW!
FEATURES
0.36F (0.2C) accuracy Five-year warranty Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves Delta-style room enclosure Digital display option Custom logos
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Thermistor Temperature Range Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Mountng Wiring Terminations 0.36F (0.2C) 0.50F (0.4C) 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 100, 1000 385 curve 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.1C drift Thermistor, 3 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Plastic Direct to wall or single gang box 10" (0.25m) of 22 AWG wire or terminal strip CE, RoHs 0.12 lb (0.05 Kg) 5 years
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.25 (5.7)
0.89 (2.3)
1.15 (2.9)
100.0 F C
3.84 (9.8) 4.51 (10.4)
TEMPERATURE
Approvals Weight Warranty
2.75 (7.0)
ACI/*R/LCD Room
0.60 (1.5) 0.92 (2.3)
MODEL A/AN A/CP A/20K A/100K A/100-2W A/1K-2W DESCRIPTION 10,000W thermistor @ 77F (25C) (ACI/10AN), Type 3 10,000W thermistor @ 77F (25C) (ACI/10CP), Type 2 20,000W thermistor @ 77F (25C) (ACI/20,000), Type 42 100K thermistor @77F (25C) 100W RTD @ 32F (0C), two-wire 385 curve, Type 85 1000W RTD @ 32F (0C), two-wire 385 curve, Type 85 MOUNTING CONFIGURATION R Room mounted RO Room with override RS Room with setpoint RSO Room with setpoint & override OPTIONS (RS, RSO ONLY)* 10KCWRA Adjust pot (0 to 10k); cool warm, reverse acting 10KCWDA Adjust pot (0 to 10k); cool warm, direct acting 1KCWRA Adjust pot (0 to 1k); cool warm, reverse acting Display (R only) DF 3.5 digit Fahrenheit display; 24 VAC/VDC RS - 10KCWRA - DF Example: A/AN-RS-10KCWRA-DF
ACI 10,000W thermistor, Type 3 Room with setpoint, 0 to 10k, cool warm, reverse acting with 3.5 digit LCD Fahrenheit display *Specs do not show in actual part number.
20
A/AN -
T81U-XR T85U-XR UR
RELATED PRODUCTS 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1281 1279 229
1180
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Accuracy Thermistor RTD 385 Curve 375 Curve Sensor Type Thermmistor RTD Temperature Range Stability Thermistor 0.36F (0.2C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) < 0.036 F (0.02C) per year
MODEL BA/
TEMPERATURE
BAS/HVAC TEMPERATURE SENSORS BA/ ROOM SERIES
The BAPI BA Series Room Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specically for HVAC systems. The room sensors come in a variety of enclosure styles, including Delta, Precon, stainless steel plate, and BAPIstat II. This series is available with thermistor, RTD, and semiconductor sensors, which makes the BA sensors compatible with every BAS system in use today.
0.36F (0.2C) Thermistor accuracy 0.27F (0.15C) or 0.54F (0.30 RTDC) RTD accuracy 2.7F (1.5C) semiconductor accuracy Lifetime limited sensor warranty Wide selection of thermistor, RTD, and semiconductor curves
BA/*R
BA/*-SP
RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty
10 k Type II & III 100, 1000, 385 curve; 1000, 375 curve 32 to 158F (-0 to 70C)
0.14 C with 6,000 continuous hours at 400 C 2.7 mW/C (power need to raise the temperature 1C), 0.4C/mW at 0C ABS plastic, UL94V-0 Directly to wall or single gang box Terminals CE, RoHS 0.25 lb (0.1 kg) Lifetime
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION Room temperature sensor surface mount SENSOR TYPE 10K2 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type 2 10K3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type 3 100 100 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K375 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 375 curve ROOM ENCLOSURE R Delta style enclosure BB BAPIstat II style enclosure SP Stainless steel plate style enclosure
20
BA/
10K3
Example: BA/10K3-R Delta room 10,000 thermistor sensor
UR
RELATED PRODUCTS Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 229
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1181
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Precon KTP* Series Stainless Steel Flush-Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide room temperature sensing for building automation systems. The active sensing element is made of a highly stable, thermistor material or platinum RTD. This design provides moisture/vapor resistance and is bonded to a 304 stainless steel plate. The back is insulated to reduce interior wall temperature influence. This sensor is intended for interior use only.
STAINLESS STEEL FLUSH-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTP* SERIES
NEW!
KTP*
FEATURES
Three-year warranty 0.50F (0.28C) thermistor accuracy 0.60F (0.33C) RTD accuracy Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Insulated backing for room temperature response Vandal-resistant ush mounting 304 stainless steel nish Easy to mount to wall or back box Standard size plate to cover mounting holes
APPLICATION
The KTP* Series sensors are designed to be mounted on indoor walls. They are ideal for use in schools or cold storage lockers, where vandalism or fork lifts can damage ordinary wall sensors. The sensors have an insulated back that reduces the conductive influences of wall temperatures, yet allows signicant convective influences to be sensed. Security screws (XS option) are available where tamper proong is required.
OPTIONS
Setpoint adjustment Momentary switch override Security screws
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor 0.50F (0.28C) 0.60F (0.33C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years 100% (no drift platinum) 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) 304 Stainless steel plate Single gang back box 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG wire leads,Type 71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads CE 0.2 lb (0.10 kg) 3 years
20
RTD Type 81 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 85 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient
1182
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MOUNTING
Basic model comes with screws for stainless steel faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handy-box mounting, and 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG wire. Security screws (XS Option) are #6-32 with a spanner head.
TEMPERATURE
XS Security Screws
OVERRIDE
STAINLESS STEEL FLUSH-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTP* SERIES
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical outlet boxes. Tighten mounting screws, crushing foam gasketing until plate edges lightly touch the wall. Insulate or seal all interior holes to prevent drafts from affecting the temperature readings. Terminate with butt splices or soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended.
DN -1 -2 -3
XM Momentary Push Button

UP 1 2 3
XA Setpoint Adjust provides a 0 to 10 k 3% resistance input
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.75 (6.99)
4.5 (11.43)
3.25 (8.25)
MODEL KTP3 KTP21 KTP22 KTP24 KTP27 KTP42 KTP81 KTP85 KTP91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 flush-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 flush-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 flush-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 flush-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 flush-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 flush-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 100 flush-mount RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 flush-mount RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 flush-mount RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XA Setpoint adjustment (10,000 to 30,000, resistance input) XA1500 Setpoint adjustment (0 to 1,500, resistance input) XA2K Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 1,400, resistance input) XA10K Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 3,000, resistance input) XD Dual sensors XK Custom logo XM Momentary switch wired N.O. to terminal block XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XS Security screws (SD-6 spanner screwdriver required) XZ Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81) XM Example: KTP3-XM 10,000 Type III stainless steel flush-mount sensor with momentary switch
TEMPERATURE
20
KTP3
KT1 SD-6 T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR UR
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 1390 Security spanner screwdriver (required for XS option) 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277 Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1183
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The PreCon Model ST-S* Stainless Steel Flush-Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision room temperature sensing for building automation systems. The active sensing element is made of a highly stable precision thermistor material or Platinum RTD. This material is ruggedized to provide moisture/vapor resistance and is bonded to a 304 stainless steel plate. The back is insulated to reduce interior wall temperature influence. This sensor is intended for interior use only.
STAINLESS STEEL FLUSH-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-S* SERIES
NEW!
ST-S*
TM
FEATURES
Lifetime warranty 0.36F (0.2C) thermistor accuracy 0.27F (0.15C) or 0.54F (0.30C) RTD accuracy Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Insulated backing for room temperature response Vandal-resistant ush mounting Adaptable with many options 304 Stainless steel nish Easy to mount to wall or back box Standard size plate to cover mounting holes
APPLICATION
The Model ST-S* is designed to be wall mounted indoors. It is ideal for use in schools or cold storage lockers, where vandalism or fork lifts can damage ordinary wall sensors. The sensor has an insulated back which reduces conductive influences of wall temperatures, yet allows signicant convective influences to be sensed. Security screws, XS option, are available where tamper proong is required.
OPERATION
Setpoint adjustment Momentary switch override Security screws
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71, 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 1000 Nickel 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Enclosure Brushed stainless steel Mounting Directly to wall or single gang box Wiring Terminations 8' of 24 AWG pigtails prestripped ends, Type 71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads Approvals CE Weight 0.2 lb (0.1 kg) Warranty Lifetime
20
1184
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MOUNTING
MODEL ST-S3 ST-S21 ST-S22 ST-S24 ST-S27 ST-S42 ST-S63 ST-S71 ST-S81 ST-S85 ST-S91 ST-S27 XM
TEMPERATURE
XS Security Screws
OVERRIDE
STAINLESS STEEL FLUSH-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-S* SERIES
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical outlet boxes. Tighten mounting screws, crushing foam gasketing until plate edges lightly touch the wall. Insulate or seal all interior holes to prevent drafts from affecting the temperature readings. Terminate with butt splices or soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended. Basic model comes with screws for stainless steel faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handy-box mounting, and 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG wire. Security screws (XS Option) are #6-32 with a spanner head.
DN -1 -2 -3
XM Momentary Push Button

UP 1 2 3
XA Setpoint Adjust provides a 0 to 10 k 3% resistance input
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.75 (6.99)
4.5 (11.43)
3.25 (8.25)
DESCRIPTION 10,000 flush-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 flush-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 flush-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 flush-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 flush-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 flush-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 flush-mount RTD @ 32F (0C), nickel curve (yellow leads) 100 flush-mount RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 100 flush-mount RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 flush-mount RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 flush-mount RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XA Setpoint adjustment (0 to 10k 3%) XA10K Setpoint adjustment (1,000 t0 3,000 resitance input) XA1500 Setpoint adjustment (0 to 1,500, resistance input) XA2K Setpoint adjustment (1,000 to 1,400, resistance input) XD Dual sensors XK Custom logo XM Momentary switch wired N.O. to terminal block XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XS Security screws (SD-6 spanner screwdriver required) XZ Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71) Example: ST-S27-XM 100,000 Type II stainless steel flush-mount sensor with momentary switch
TEMPERATURE
20
KT1 SD-6 T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR UR
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 1390 Security spanner screwdriver (required for XS option) 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277 Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1185
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Johnson Controls Room, Duct and OSA 1000 Nickel RTD sensors are specically designed for HVAC and BAS systems. The active element is a nickel-based sensor that has been proven to be very stable and robust with many years of service life. The sensors come complete and ready to install for their specic applications.
1000 OHM NICKEL-RTD / ROOM / DUCT / OSA TE-6300 SERIES
NEW!
TE-6312P-1 TE-6311P-1 TE-6316P-1 TE-6313P-1 TE-6300-603 TE-6314P-1 Enclosure Wiring Terminations Probe Duct/OSA/Strap-on Wall Averaging Warranty PVC conduit box 6" (15.24 cm) of 22 AWG 0.25" (0.64 cm) stainless steel Thin lm on circuit board with coating 0.093" (0.24 cm) copper 1 year TE-6313P-1 OSA N/A 0.35 lb (0.16 Kg) TE-6314P-1 Wall N/A 0.3 lb (0.14 Kg) TE-6316P-1 Averaging M-648-K 1.0 lb (0.45 Kg) TEMPERATURE F C 110 43 120 49 130 54 140 60 150 66 160 71 170 77 180 82 190 88 200 93 210 99 220 104 230 110 240 116 250 121 TE-63xx RESISTANCE 1121 1152 1184 1216 1248 1281 1314 1348 1382 1417 1452 1487 1524 1560 1597 March 2014
FEATURES
Easy to mount Proven long performance Many mounting styles Single assembly ordering PVC enclosure Stainless steel insertion probe
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy 0.34F ( 0.18C) Room/Probe Averaging 3F (1.67C) Sensor Type 1000 nickel @ 70F (21C) -50 to 220F (-46 to 104C) Temperature Range Sensitivity Approx 3/F (5.4 /C) Operating Temperature -50 to 122F (-46 to 50C)
TEMPERATURE
Model Type Accessories Weight TE-6300-603 Strap-on APB-28 0.05 lb (0.02 Kg) TE-6311P-1 Duct N/A 0.45 lb (0.2 Kg) TE-6312P-1 Immersion WB-9 TCC-111 0.4 lb (0.18 Kg)
PERFORMANCE CHARTS
F -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 TEMPERATURE C -46 -40 -34 -29 -23 -18 -12 -7 -1 4 10 16 21 27 32 38 TE-63xx RESISTANCE 674 699 725 751 777 803 830 858 885 914 942 971 1000 1030 1060 1090
20
1186
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4.46 (11.33) 3.47 (8.81) 0.67 (1.70) 45
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM NICKEL-RTD / ROOM / DUCT / OSA TE-6300 SERIES
2.75 (6.99)
0.09 (0.24)
4.47 (11.35)
6.0 max (15.24)
Mounting Plate 1.72 (4.37)
TE-6313 Outdoor Air Sensor

2.75 (6.99) 7.5 max (19.05)
TE-6316 Duct Averaging Sensor

2.75 (6.99)
4.47 (11.35)
7.5 max (19.05) 1/2" NPT 0.25 (0.63)
0.25 (0.63)
Mounting Plate
4.47 (11.35)
1.72 (4.37)
4.5 (11.43) 1.72 (4.37) 3.13 (7.95) 1.81 (4.60) 3 (7.62) WB-9 or WS-9
TE-6311 Duct Probe Sensor
TE-6312 Well Insertion Sensor
2.13 (5.41)
0.25 (0.63)
TEMPERATURE
TE-6314 Wall-Mount Sensor
TE-6300 Strap-On Sensor
CROSS REFERENCES
Type 63 models may be used in place of these located on this page.
MODEL TE-6300-603 TE-6311P-1 TE-6312P-1 TE-6313P-1 TE-6314P-1 TE-6316P-1 APB-28 CC-1G-K M-648-K T63U-XR TCC-111 WB-9 WS-9 DESCRIPTION Strap-on 1000 nickel RTD Duct-mount 1000 nickel RTD Immersion 1000 nickel RTD OSA-mount 1000 nickel RTD Wall-mount 1000 nickel RTD Duct averaging 1000 nickel RTD RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Adjustable pipe bracket 2"-8" diameter 1391 Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391 Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391 1000 ohm Nickel, 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1283 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298 9in brass bulb well 9in SS bulb well
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1187
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Wire Wound Nickel-Iron RTD Balco Room Sensors are used to provide reliable, accurate temperature readings in surface-mount room environments. The room sensors feature a stainless steel insulated plate, a standard plastic ventilated enclosure, or a deluxe executive enclosure design. The stainless steel plate is ideal for areas of vandalism or where the sensor can be easily knocked off the wall. The sensors are designed for interior use only in the temperature range of -30 to 140F (-34 to 60C).
NICKEL-IRON / BALCO RTD ROOM SENSORS TYPE 5, 77, 78 ROOM SENSORS
NEW!
ST-T*E ST-S* ST-S*K ST-S*P
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensitivity Type 5 Type 77 Type 78 Sensor Type Type 5 Type 77 Type 78 Temperature Range Sensor Type Type 5, 77 Type 78 Mounting Warranty 2.2/F @ 70F (21C) 2.48/F @ 70F (21C) two red wires 4.96/F @ 70F (21C) two gray wires 1000 Nickel 0.12% @ 70F (21C) 1000 Balco 0.12% @ 70FF (21C) 2000 Balco 0.12% @ 70F (21C) -30 to 240F (34 to 115C) 1000 0.12% @ 70F (21C) 2000 0.12% @ 70F (21C) Directly to wall or single gang box 1 year
TEMPERATURE
MODEL ST-S DESCRIPTION Surface-mount room sensor RTD SENSOR TYPE 5 1000 nickel-iron, Balco sensor 77 1000 nickel-iron, Balco sensor 78 2000 nickel-iron, Balco sensor ENCLOSURE P Plastic ventilated room enclosure E Executive-style room enclosure with tan faceplate Stainless steel plate K Decorator-style room enclosure 5 E Example: ST-S5E Executive style 1000 nickel-iron room sensor with tan faceplate
20
ST-S
KT1 T5U Series UR
RELATED PRODUCTS Mounting screwdriver 1/16 allen key Temperature transmitter for 1000 nickel-iron Balco sensor Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1390 1283 229
1188
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Low cost, easy installation Rugged design Platinum RTDs Interchangeable sensors NIST certication available
TEMPERATURE
PLATINUM ROOM, DUCT, OSA, AND IMMERSION RTD SENSORS AS ROOM, DUCT, OSA, AND IMMERSION SENSORS
The Minco Room, Duct, Outside Air, and Immersion Temperature RTD Sensors use a thin lm platinum element for fast, accurate point measurement for energy and environmental control applications.
WB-6
The Model AS _ _ _ S industrial room-mount housing provides an accurate, professional appearance. This housing can either direct mount or mount directly to a standard handibox or wire mold.
AS2PW080D
The Model AS _ _ _ D duct-mount sensor features a rugged, stainless steel probe mounted in a standard handibox, making installation quick and easy with self-tapping screws. The Model AS _ _ _ E uses a weather resistant box The Model AS _ _ _ O outside air sensor features a nonheat conductive, solar reflecting noncorrosive shield. This conguration is completely sealed against moisture in weather conditions. The slotted shield allows air to flow freely to the stainless steel probe to provide accurate measurement. Installation is made easy with a 1/2" female threads.
AS2PW055Q
The Model AS _ _ _ Q immersion probes are designed with a 1/2" tapered thread for easy installation in thermowells. The Model AS _ _ _ P uses a weather-resistant box.
AS2PW040O AS2PW000S
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Stability Sensor Type Temperature Range Room "S" Duct "D", "E" OSA "O", "W" Immersion "P", "Q" Probe Length Range 0.9F (0.5C) or 0.2% Ro trim Better than 0.05C per year 1000 platinum two-wire 0.00375 //C, 100 platinum three-wire 0.00385 //C -58 to 175F (-50 to 80C) -58 to 500F (-50 to 260C) -58 to 175F (-50 to 80C) -50 to 500F (-46 to 260C) 2" to 48" long Probe Material Room Duct OSA Immersion Enclosure Room Duct, Immersion OSA Wiring Terminations Warranty 0.187" diameter aluminum 0.25" diameter stainless steel 0.187" diameter stainless steel 0.25" diameter stainless steel Plastic with aluminum faceplate Electro zinc-plated box with 1/2" knockout White polyvinyl with weatherresistant box 4" 22 AWG silver-plated stranded copper, Teflon insulated 3 years
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1189
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1/2" Knockouts 1/2" NPT Typical both sides 4.0 (10.16) 0.25 (0.64) dia
PLATINUM ROOM, DUCT, OSA, AND IMMERSION RTD SENSORS AS ROOM, DUCT, OSA, AND IMMERSION SENSORS
2.75 (6.98)
Housing Bottom View

Stainless Steel Probe
4.50 (11.43) 1.58 (4.01)
NEW!
1/2" Knockouts Foam Gasket
0.25 (0.64) dia
4.0 (10.16)
Stainless Steel Probe
1.88 (4.76)
LLL 8.0 (20.32)
AS___080D Duct-Mount Sensor

4.63 (11.75) 1/2" FNPT 5.5 (13.97) 1.5 (3.81)
1.88 (4.76)
1.0 (2.54)
LLL 5.5 (13.97)
Housing Top View
2.88 (7.30)
AS_ _ _ 055Q Immersion Probe Mounted in Handy Box
AS___000S Room-Mount Sensor
2.0 (5.08)
AS___040O Outside Air Sensor
MODEL DESCRIPTION AS3 Assembly probe for three-wire RTDs (PD sensors only) AS2 Assembly probe for two-wire RTDs PD 100 0.00385 //C platinum curve, 6" leads, three-wire RTD PW 1000 0.00375 //C platinum curve, 6" leads, two-wire RTD LLL Length LLL in 0.1" increments 040 = 4.0", 120 = 12.0", 0.000 for all space sensors S D Duct mount, handy-box 1/2" knockouts, LLL typically = 8.0" (080) E Duct mount, weatherproof box, LLL typically = 8.0" (080) O Outside air, weatherproof box with weather shield, LLL = 4.0" (040) Q Immersion, handy-box 1/2" knockouts, LLL typically = 5.5" for 6" well insertion (055) P Immersion, weatherproof box, LLL typically = 5.5" for 6" well insertion (055) S Space, indoor room, wall-mount housing, LLL = 000 W Wall mount, outside, weatherproof box, LLL typically 4.0" (040) 000 No transmitter 801 TT-801, 3-wire fixed range, 100, 385 curve, PD sensor only 807 TT-807, 2-wire fixed range, 1000, PW sensor only XX No transmitter EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20/140F) or (-29/60C) S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/100F) or (-18/38C) A Range codes per Minco letter ranges (20/120F) or (-7/49C) BI Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30/130F) or (-1/54C) KK Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30/180F) or (-1/82C) BN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30/240F) or (-1/116C) N Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32/122F) or (0/50C) H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40/90F) or (4/32C) M Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-50/50C) C Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/100C) BW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/250C) JW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/500C) 1 No calibration data, sensor or transmitter 2 Sensor/Transmitter matched at 0C with NIST Sample order: AS3PD080D000XX1: 8" duct probe with three-wire, 100, 385 curve platinum RTD AS2PW055Q000XX1: 5.5" immersion probe with twowire, 1000, 375 curve RTD
20
TEMPERATURE
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 T81U-XR T91U-XR TCC-111 TCC-12 UR WB-6 WS-6
RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice Brass well Stainless steel well
PAGE 995 994 1281 1277 1298 1298 229 1293 1293 March 2014
1190
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!

TEMPERATURE
BUTTON STYLE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTB* SERIES
The Kele KTB* Series Button Style Flush-Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide room temperature sensing for building automation systems. The active sensing element is made of a highly stable, thermistor material or platinum RTD. This design provides moisture/vapor resistance and is bonded to either brass, steel or aluminum button style housing easily mountable into any wall. This sensor is intended for interior use only.
KTB*
Three-year warranty 0.50F (0.2C) thermistor accuracy 0.60F (0.33C) RTD accuracy Ultra high accuracy available Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Optional brass, steel, or aluminum metal button style housing Small, nearly invisible footprint
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.625 (1.6) 0.9 (2.3) wall 0.50 (1.3) 0.32 (0.8)
0.80 0.875 (2.0) (2.2)
Insulating Wall Housing
Sensor Housing
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor 0.60F (0.33C) 0.50F (0.28C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty 0.24F (0.13) over ve years 100% (no drift platinum), 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) Button style brass, aluminum, 304 Stainless steel Directly to wall 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG wire leads, type 81 sensors have 18" leads CE 0.25 lb (0.10 kg) 3 years
TEMPERATURE
MODEL KTB3 KTB21 KTB22 KTB24 KTB27 KTB42 KTB81 KTB85 KTB91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 100 button style RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 button style RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 button style RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS B Brass housing A Aluminum housing S Steel housing
20

T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR UR TB-A TB-B TB-S 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277 Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229 Aluminum button enclosure only Brass button enclosure only Stainless Steel button enclosure only
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1191
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-B* Series Button Style Flush-Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide precision room temperature sensing for building automation systems. The active sensing element is made of a highly stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD. This design provides moisture/vapor resistance and is bonded to either brass, steel or aluminum button style housingeasily mountable into any wall. This sensor is intended for interior use only.
BUTTON STYLE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-B* SERIES
NEW!
ST-B Button Sensor
TM
FEATURES
Lifetime warranty 0.36F (0.2C) thermistor accuracy 0.27F (0.15C) or 0.54F (0.30C) RTD accuracy Ultra high accuracy available Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Optional brass, steel, aluminum metal buttonstyle housing Small, nearly invisible footprint
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.625 (1.6) 0.9 (2.3) wall 0.50 (1.3) 0.32 (0.8)
0.80 0.875 (2.0) (2.2)
Insulating Wall Housing
Sensor Housing
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71, 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 1000 Nickel 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor RTD Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty Negative temperature coefcient Positive temperature coefcient 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Brass, aluminum,304 Stainless steel housing Directly to the wall 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with prestripped ends, type 71 & 81 have 18" leads CE 0.2 lb (0.1 kg) Lifetime
TEMPERATURE
MODEL ST-B3 ST-B21 ST-B22 ST-B24 ST-B27 ST-B42 ST-B63 ST-B71 ST-B81 ST-B85 ST-B91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 button style nickel RTD @ 70F (21C), (yellow leads) 100 ultra high accuracy button style RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 100 button style RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 button style RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 button style RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS B Brass housing A Aluminum housing S Steel housing
20
T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR TB-A TB-B TB-S
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277 Aluminum button enclosure only Brass button enclosure only Stainless Steel button enclosure only
1192
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Lifetime sensor warranty Paintable housing Flush mount Installs in drywall No back box required Virtually undetectable when painted
TEMPERATURE
PAINTABLE BUTTON STYLE FLUSH MOUNT WALL SENSOR ST-BP* SERIES
TM
The Precon ST-BP* Series Paintable Button Style FlushMount Thermistor and RTD Wall Sensors provide precision room temperature sensing for building automation systems. The ST-BP Series drastically descreases the footprint of the traditional box sensor so that it becomes virtually invisible once it is painted to match the decor. The active sensing element is made of a highly stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD. This design is intended for interior use only is bonded to a plastic paintable housing. ST-BP*
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 2.213 (5.62)
1.31 (3.33)
1.05 1.53 (2.67) (3.89)
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71, 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 1000 Nickel 100, Pt 385 Curve 1000, Pt 385 Curve 1000, Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Termpaerature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.09F (0.05C) over ve years RTD Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Directly to wall Mounting Wiring Terminations All Others 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG prestripped pigtails, Type 71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads Enclosure White plastic Approvals CE Weight 0.1 lb (0.05 kg) Warranty Lifetime
TEMPERATURE
MODEL ST-BP3 ST-BP21 ST-BP22 ST-BP24 ST-BP27 ST-BP42 ST-BP63 ST-BP71 ST-BP81 ST-BP85 ST-BP91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 paintable ush-mount button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 paintable ush-mount button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 paintable ush-mount button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 paintable ush-mount button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 paintable ush-mount button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 paintable ush-mount button style thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 paintable ush-mount button style nickel RTD @ 70F (21C), (yellow leads) 100 paintable ush-mount ultra high accuracy button style RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 100 paintable ush-mount button style RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 paintable ush-mount button style RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 paintable ush-mount button style RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
20
T85U-XR T81U-XR T91U-XR
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1193
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The ACI Bullet/Button Series Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specically for HVAC system temperature control. The button and bullet style sensors come in thermistor or RTD sensor curves. The A/*BP Stainless Steel Thermistor and RTD Sensor is for under-insulation mounting and direct contact to the pipe. Clean off any insulation or rust to promote solid contact, and secure with tie wraps so the probe is parallel to the pipe.
BULLET/BUTTON TEMPERATURE SENSORS ACI BULLET/BUTTON SERIES
FEATURES
Five-year warranty
NEW!
ACI Flush Mount Sensor ACI Button Sensor ACI Bullet Sensor
Stainless steel casing (BP) Small footprint for hidden applications (BBS. SBS) Brass or stainless button casing (BBS, SBS) Available in thermistor or RTD
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Temperature Range Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Button Bullet Flush Mounting Button, Surface mount Bullet Flush Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Button Bullet Surface mount Warranty 0.36F (0.2C) 0.50F (0.4C) 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 100, 1000 385 curve -40 to 302F (-40 to 150C) 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.1C drift Thermistor, 3 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Brass, Stainless Stainless Stainless Directly to wall Strap on to pipe Directly to wall 10" of 22 AWG wire or terminal strip CE, RoHs 0.12 lb (0.05 Kg) 0.04 lb (0.02 Kg) 0.2 lb (0.09 Kg) 5 years
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
24" Leads (0.6m)
1.6 (4.1)
0.17 (0.43)
0.38 0.9 (0.96) (2.3)
TEMPERATURE
1" Long x 0.250" OD Bullet Probe (2.5cm x 0.6cm )
0.215 (0.55) 0.615 (1.6)
0.88 (2.23)
0.15 (0.38) Spacer
A/*-BP Stainless Steel Probe
A/*BBS, SBS Button Sensor
MODEL A/AN A/CP A/20K A/100K A/100-2W A/1K-2W DESCRIPTION (choose one) 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type 3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type 2 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type 42 100k thermistor@ 77F (25C), Type 27 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), two-wire 385 curve 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), two-wire 385 curve MOUNTING CONFIGURATION (choose one) BP Stainless steel bullet probe BBS Brass button sensor SBS Stainless steel button sensor SP Flush mount sensor
20
A/AN
BP Example: A/AN-BP ACI bullet 10,000 thermistor sensor
T81U-XR T85U-XR TCC-111 TCC-12 UR
RELATED PRODUCTS 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1281 1279 1298 1298 229
1194
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Economical Metal enclosures with stainless steel probes Three-year warranty Thermistor or RTD sensor selections
TEMPERATURE
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTD* SERIES
The Kele KTD* Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed to be cost effective with accuracies of 0.5F (0.28C). Each uses metal enclosures and is constructed for easy installation with any building automation system (BAS). The thermistor is made of a very stable, pre-aged material that offers long-life reliability for HVAC control. The platinum RTD comes in 100 and 1000 versions. All sensors come with a three-year warranty. KTDNB3-GF KTDNB3
KTD3
KTD3-W
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 3.88 (9.89) Mounting T-Bar Vinyl Grommet 4.0 (10.2) 1.70 (4.3) 4.87 (12.38) KTD* 0.25 (0.64)
APPLICATION The KTD* Series sensors are designed for direct mounting on sheet metal duct systems. Where conduit is required, the duct sensors have a universal nylon mounting connector that adapts to a 1/2" knockout in a standard handy box. The nylon tting has a 1/2" NPT female conduit tting. The duct temperature sensors are waterproof and can be used in high humidity and condensing air. The sensors are point-sensitive and come standard with 9" (22.8 cm) insertion depth. The XL option provides custom lengths.
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 81 Type 85 Type 91 0.50F (0.28C) 0.60F (0.33C) 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years 100% (no drift platinum) 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k, Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Enclosure Metal handy box, weather resitant box optional Mounting Directly to duct, wall or single gang box Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m), 24 AWG wire leads, type 81 sensors have 18" (0.45m) leads Probe Seamless 304 stainless steel tube, 1/4" OD Approvals CE Weight KTD 0.72 lb (0.33 kg) KTDNB 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) Warranty 3 years
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1195
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTD* SERIES
Direct duct-mount screws can be used where conduit is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to outlet boxes. Install grommet in the 9/16" (1.43 cm) insertion hole. Basic model comes with 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG, 9" (22.86 cm) probe with T-bar, grommet, and #6 x 1 screws for direct duct mounting.
NEW!
Greenfield Fitting
Insertion Hole is 9/16" (1.43 cm)
Vinyl Grommet
1/2" NPT Duct temperature sensor with Greenfield fitting option (GF)
Basic Installation
MODEL DESCRIPTION KTD Duct temperature sensor KTDNB Duct temperature sensor with no box SENSOR SELECTION 3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III 21 2252 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 22 3000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 24 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 27 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 42 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV 81 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 85 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 91 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS QD Nylon insulated Quick Disconnect 1/4" X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable XCO 1/2" LB condulet fitting XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable XD Dual sensors in one probe XG Greenfield fitting (factory installed) XH Handy box housing (factory installed) XHP Non-metallic handy box housing ( factory installed) XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108" XL2 Custom length insertion probe, 4-7/8"(12.38 cm) XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm) XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed) XN NIST certificate of conformance XNB 1/2" MNPT brass close nipple XNP 1/2" MNPT plastic close nipple XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XW Weather resistant housing (factory installed) XZ Three wire RTD connections (optional only on Type 81)
KTD 3 Example: KTD-3 Duct sensor with 10,000 thermistor
20
TEMPERATURE
RELATED PRODUCTS 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1281 1279 1277 229
1196
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Lifetime warranty Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Tip sensitive for precise temperature response Adaptable with many options 304 stainless steel probe Greeneld tting standard Ultra high accuracy optional APPLICATION
TEMPERATURE
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-D* SERIES
TM
The PreCon Model ST-D* Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing element is a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD. The sensing element is sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a 9" (22.8 cm) long 304 stainless steel tube attached to a 4" (10 cm) electrical strap. The slots in the mounting bracket form mounting ears for direct duct mounting and standard electrical boxes. The grommet on the tube tting seals a 9/16" (1.43 cm) insertion hole.
ST-D3
ST-D91-XH
DIMENSIONS
The ST-D* Series sensors are designed for direct mounting on sheet metal duct systems. Where conduit is required, the duct sensors have a universal nylon mounting connector that adapts to a 1/2" knockout in a standard handy box. The nylon tting has a 1/2" NPT female conduit tting. The duct temperature sensors are waterproof and can be used in high humidity and condensing air. The sensors are point-sensitive and come standard with 9" (22.8 cm) insertion depth. The XL option provides custom lengths.
in (cm)
1/2" NPT 3.88 (9.89)
Vinyl Grommet 0.25 (0.64)
TEMPERATURE
9.0 (22.86) Standard
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71, 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD March 2014 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 1000 Nickel 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Mounting Directly to duct, wall, or single gang box Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with prestripped ends, type 71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads Approvals CE Weight 0.25 lb (0.1 kg) with no options Warranty Lifetime
20
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1197
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-D* SERIES
Direct duct-mount screws can be used where conduit is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to outlet boxes. Install grommet in the 9/16" (1.43 cm) insertion hole. Basic model comes with 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG, 9" (22.86 cm) probe with T-bar, grommet, and #6 x 1 screws for direct duct mounting.
NEW!
Greenfield Fitting
Vinyl Grommet
1/2" NPT Duct temperature sensor with Greenfield fitting option (GF)
Basic Installation
MODEL ST-D3 ST-D21 ST-D22 ST-D24 ST-D27 ST-D42 ST-D63 ST-D71 ST-D81 ST-D85 ST-D91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 duct thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 duct thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 duct thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 duct thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 duct thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 duct thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 nickel duct RTD @ 70F (21C), (yellow leads) 100 ultra high accurate duct RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 100 duct RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 duct RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 duct RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS (List options in alphabetical order with dashes) QD Nylon insulated Quick Disconnect 1/4" X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable XCO 1/2" LB condulet fitting XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable XD Dual sensors in one probe XG Greenfield fitting (factory installed) XH Handy box housing (factory installed) XHP Non-metallic handy box housing ( factory installed) XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108" XL2 Custom length insertion probe, 4-7/8"(12.38 cm) XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm) XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed) XN NIST certificate of conformance XNB 1/2" MNPT brass close nipple XNP 1/2" MNPT plastic close nipple XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XW Weather resistant housing (factory installed) XZ Three wire RTD connections (optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, not available with XC25 and XCP25) ST-D3 XG Example: ST-D3-XG 10,000 Type III duct temperature sensor with Greenfield fitting
20
TEMPERATURE
KT1 T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR UR
RELATED PRODUCTS Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1390 1281 1279 1277 229
1198
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Economical Stainless steel probes Three-year warranty Wide thermistor or RTD sensor selections Simple traditional mounting
TEMPERATURE
VAV BOX DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSORS KTV* SERIES
The Kele KTV* VAV Box Duct Thermistor and RTD sensors are designed to be cost-effective with accuracies of 0.5F (0.28C). Each mounts directly to the duct and is constructed for easy installation with optional quick disconnects and plenum cable when needed. The thermistor is made of a very stable, pre-aged material that offers long-life reliability for HVAC control. The platinum RTD comes in 100 and 1000 versions. All sensors come with three-year warranty. KTV3
OPTIONS
Greeneld ttings Plenum cable 1/4" quick connects KTV3-QD KTV3-QD-CP5
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor 0.50F (0.28C) 0.60F (0.33C)
TEMPERATURE
2.252k, 3k, 10k Type II & III, 20k, 100k
RTD Type 81 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 85 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Negative temperature coefcient Thermistor RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Stability 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years Thermistor 100% (no drift platinum) RTD 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise Heat Dissipation the temperature 1C) Enclosure Metal handy box, weather resistant box optional Mounting T-bar with protective grommet seal, Directly to Duct or Single gang box Wiring Terminations 5' (1.5m), 24 AWG wire leads with optional quick disconnects and plenum rated cable, type 81 sensors have 18" leads Probe Seamless 304 stainless steel tube, 14" OD, 4.87" (12.4 cm) long Approvals CE Weight 0.15 lbs (0.07 kg) Warranty 3 years March 2014
KTV3-GF
KTV3-CP5
MOUNTING/WIRING Wiring Terminate to controller directly with push-on quick connects or to terminals.
20
Mounting KTV* Drill a 916" (1.43 cm) hole for probe insertion. Using the provided #6 screws, secure to the duct with the T-bar mounting ears. Basic model comes with 5' (1.5 m) of 24 AWG wire, 4.87" (12.38 cm) probe with T-bar, grommet, and #6 x 1 screws for direct duct mounting. *Select sensor number on ordering information table. WE MAKE IT EASY. kele.com 888-397-5353 USA
1199
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Vinyl Grommet
VAV BOX DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSORS KTV* SERIES
1/2" NPT Greenfield Fitting
1.37 (3.49)
NEW!
3.88 (9.89) 1/2" NPT Vinyl Grommet 4.87 (12.38) Standard 3.88 (9.89) 4.87 (12.38) Standard
0.25 (0.64)
5' (1.52 m) wire or cable Basic Installation
Duct temperature sensor with Greenfield fitting option (GF)
MODEL DESCRIPTION KTV VAV box duct temperature sensor SENSOR SELECTION 3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III 21 2250 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 22 3000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 24 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 27 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 42 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV 63 1000 nickel RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 81 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 85 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 91 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS QD Nylon insulated quick disconnect " X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG jacketed cable XCP5 5' (1.2m) non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable XCP25 25' (7.6m) non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable XD Dual sensors in one probe XG Greenfield fitting (factory installed) XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 60" XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm) XL9 Custom length insertion probe, 9"(22.86 cm) XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed) XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XZ
KTV 3 - GF
20
TEMPERATURE
XW
Weather resistant housing
Three wire RTD connections (Type 81 only) (Not with XC25, XCP25)
Example: KTV-3-N1 VAV duct sensor with 10,000 thermistor with Greenfield fitting
PAGE 1281 1279 1277 229
1200
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Five-year warranty Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves Stainless steel probes
TEMPERATURE
DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSORS ACI DUCT SERIES
The ACI Duct Series Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specically for HVAC system temperature control. The duct sensors come in thermistor and RTD sensor curves compatible with most BAS systems available today. Duct sensors come with a foam-backed handy box and 8 probe.
The A/*D Duct Sensor should be mounted close to the center of the duct and penetrate through any duct insulation at least 1 (2.5 cm) into the airflow. The probes are sensitive within 1 of the tip and insert through a 3/8 (1 cm) hole. Use standard metal screws to secure to the duct.
A/AN-D-8-G-D
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor 0.36F (0.2C) RTD 0.50F (0.4C) Sensor Type Thermistor 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k RTD 100, 1000 385 curve Temperature Range -40 to 275F (-40 to 135C) Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD <0.1C drift Heat Dissipation Thermistor, 3 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Measurement Range -40 to 302F (-40 to 150C) Enclosure Galvanized metal box Wiring Terminations 10" of 22 AWG wire or terminal strip Approvals CE Weight 4" 0.6 lb (0.27 Kg) 8" 0.72 lb (0.72 Kg) 12" 0.9 lb (0.41 Kg) 18" 1.0 lb (0.45 Kg) Warranty 5 years
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4 8 12 18 5.8 (14.7) 7.8 (19.8) 11.7 (30) 17.7 (45) 0.90 (2.3)
0.76 (1.9)
See Table
0.125 (0.3) Foam Insulation
TEMPERATURE
1.9 (4.9)
1.9 (4.9)
ACI/*-D/AV Duct/Averaging
AN CP 20 100K 100 1K
Handy Box Height 8 12 18 4.19 (10.6) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.18 (8.07) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.91 (9.93) 3.57 (9.06) 3.58 (9.09) 3.57 (9.06) 3.57 (9.06) 3.58 (9.09)
4 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.43 (8.71) 3.58 (9.09) 3.58 (9.09)
MODEL A/AN-D-8-GD A/CP-D-8-GD A/20K-D-8-GD A/100K-D-8-GD A/100-2W-D-8-GD A/1K-2W-D-8-GD T85U-XR T81U-XR UR DESCRIPTION Duct mount 10 k type III thermistor with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion (ACI/AN-D8) Duct mount 10 k type II thermistor with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion (ACI/CP-D8) Duct mount 20 k type IV thermistor with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion (ACI/20K-D8) Duct mount 100 k type II thermistor with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion Duct mount 100 RTD 385 curve, two-wire with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion (ACI/100-2-D8) Duct mount 1 k RTD 385 curve, two-wire with 8" (20.3 cm) insertion (ACI/1000-2-D8) RELATED PRODUCTS 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice PAGE 1279 1281 229
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1201
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Series Duct Thermistor and RTD Sensors are available in a variety of easy-to-mount installation types. They come in thermistor and RTD sensors and feature etched Teflon leadwires and encapsulated sensors to create a watertight package that can perform in the real world.
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS BA/ DUCT SERIES
NEW!
BA/10K2-D4-NB BA/10K2-D3-JB BA/10K2-D4-BB4 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts: 0.65 lb (0.29 Kg) BB BAPI-Box - IP66 rated, UV-resistant polycarbonate; 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg) BB2 BAPI-Box 2 - IP66 rated, UV-resistant polycarbonate; 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg) BB4 BAPI Box 4 - IP44 Nylon & plastic; 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg) WP NEMA 3R cast aluminum; 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg) Mounting Directly to duct Wiring Terminations 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads Approvals CE, RoHS Warranty Lifetime JB
FEATURES 0.36F (0.2C) thermistor accuracy 0.27F (0.15C) or 0.54F (0.3C) RTD Lifetime limited sensor warranty Wide selection of mounting styles
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.55F (0.30C)
10 k Type II & III 100, 1000, 385 curve; 1000, 375 curve Temperature Range 32 to 158F (-0 to 70C) Stability < 0.036F (0.02C) per year, 0.14C with 6,000 continuous hours at 400C Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power need to raise the temperature 1C), 0.4C/mW at 0C Enclosure/Weight NB No Box; 0.5 lb (0.23 Kg)
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
20
BA/10K2-D4-NB
BA/10K2-D4-BB2
BA/10K2-D4-WP
1202
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
BA/10K2-D4-JB
BA/ 10K3 D8 JB
TEMPERATURE
DUCT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS BA/ DUCT SERIES
BA/10K2-D4-BB
BA/10K2-D4-BB4
TEMPERATURE
MODEL DESCRIPTION BA/ Probe temperature sensor REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE 10K2 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type 2 10K3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type 3 100 100 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K375 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 375 curve REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH D8 Duct mount with 8" probe (other lengths available 4", 12", 18") REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE NB No box with 18" leads JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts BB IP66 rated, UV resistant BB2 IP66 rated, UV resistant polycarbonate WP NEMA 3R weatherproof UV resistant enclosure
Example: BA/10K3-D8-JB BAPI 8" duct 10,000 thermistor sensor with JB box
20
PAGE 1279 1281 1277 229
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1203
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Kele Wire Wound Nickel-Iron Balco RTD Sensors are installed in rugged housings to measure the most important HVAC applications. The Duct and Immersion Sensors all have 304 stainless steel probes for use in almost any area. The Immersion Probe comes with a standard brass or optional stainless steel thermowell. The Duct Sensor has mounting tabs for direct mounting on a duct or installation in a handibox. The Outdoor Sensor, rated for outdoor temperatures, is equipped with a sun shield and weatherproof box for mounting under the eaves or another sheltered area. The Type 78 and 77 Raw Sensors are mounted in a 2" (5 cm) long aluminum case with teflon insulated lead wires. This sensor can be used for strap-on applications. The Type 5 raw sensor is mounted in a 2.5" (6.35 cm) PVC case. The Universal Sensor may be used for duct, immersion, and OSA temperature sensing.
NICKEL-IRON / BALCO RTD IMMERSION, DUCT & OUTDOOR SENSORS TYPE 5, 77, 78 UNIVERSAL DUCT, IMMERSION, OSA
NEW!
ST-O ST-R5 ST-U ST-W WEL-B ST-D Sensitivity Type 5 Type 77 Type 78 Warranty 2.2/F @ 70F (21C) 2.48/F @ 70F (21C) two red wires 4.96/F @ 70F (21C) two gray wires 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range -30 to 240F (34 to 115C) Sensor Type Type 5, 77 1000 0.12% @ 70F (21C) Type 78 2000 0.12% @ 70F (21C)
TEMPERATURE
MODEL ST-R ST-U ST-D ST-W ST-O DESCRIPTION Raw sensor Universal duct, immersion, or OSA sensor Duct sensor Immersion sensor with brass well Outdoor air sensor RTD SENSOR TYPE 5 1000 nickel-iron, Balco sensor 77 1000 nickel-iron, Balco sensor 78 2000 nickel-iron, Balco sensor OPTIONS Weather resistant housing (factory installed ST-D and ST-W only) XW XH Handy-box (factory installed ST-D and ST-W only) E Immersion sensor without well (ST-W only) S Stainless steel thermowell (ST-W and ST-U only) O Kit with OSAB weather shield (ST-U only) B WEL-B brass well (ST-U only) 5 XW Example: ST-D5-XW 1000 Balco duct sensor with a weatherproof housing
20
ST-D
F-1000-331 OSAB T5U-XR TCC-111 TCC-12 WEL-B WEL-S
RELATED PRODUCTS Nylon bushing for open wiring OSA weather shield, gasket, and bracket 1000 ohm Nickel, 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml Brass well 304 stainless steel well
PAGE 908 1226 1283 1298 1298 1294 1294
1204
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

TEMPERATURE
ALL-PURPOSE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTA* SERIES
The Kele KTA* Series All-Purpose Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing element is made of a highly stable thermistor material or platinum RTDs. The KTA* Series sensors are rugged, point-sensitive waterproof sensors featuring a 9" (22.8 cm) 304 stainless steel probe and brass tting. The brass tting has a 1/2" NPT male thread. The sensors are supplied with two 1/2" locknuts for easy installation in handy boxes (or other enclosures with 1/2" knockouts).
KTA*
Three-year warranty Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Tip sensitive for precise temperature response All metal construction with 304 stainless steel probes Easy to mount to duct, wall, or back box Waterproof probe
APPLICATION
The KTA* Series Sensors are waterproof and can be used where it is possible for the sensed temperature to fall below the ambient dew point, causing condensation to occur on the sensor. However, it is important that the eld connection be made as far as possible from the sensed media. The sensing element is sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a versatile 9" long stainless steel tube with a brass electrical tting. The all-purpose probe is suitable for plenum mounting, duct mounting, immersion wells, or outside air.
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor Heat Dissipation 0.50F (0.28C) 0.60F(0.33C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k Mounting Wiring Terminations Probe Approvals Weight Warranty 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) Ductly to duct, wall or customer supplied back box, no adapters needed for standard box 8' (2.44m) of 24 AWG wire leads, Type 81 sensors have 18" (0.45m) leads Seamless 304 stainless steel tube, 1/4" OD CE 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) w/o options 3 years
20
RTD Type 81 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 85 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient Positive temperature coefcient RTD Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD 100% (no drift platinum)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1205
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
Locknuts provide direct mounting and can be used where conduit is not required. Mount directly to electrical outlet boxes as shown below. Basic model comes with two locknuts for mounting to a variety of box options.
All-Purpose Sensor with Customer-Supplied Handy Box
KELE ALL-PURPOSE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR KTA* SERIES

DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Hole 1-1/16"(2.7 cm)
NEW!
1.5 (3.81) 1.0 (2.54) Typical Insertion 9.25 (23.51) 1.0 (2.54)
0.83 (2.06)
8.25 (20.96)
0.25 (0.64)
1/2" NPT Thread

Secure sensor to handy box with locknuts. Secure handy box to duct with screws.
MODEL KTA3 KTA21 KTA22 KTA24 KTA27 KTA42 KTA81 KTA85 KTA91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 all-purpose thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 all-purpose thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 all-purpose thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 all-purpose thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 all-purpose thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 all-purpose thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 100 all-purpose RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 all-purpose RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 all-purpose RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS QD Nylon insulated Quick Disconnect " X25 25 (7.6) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable XCO " LB condulet fitting XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable XD Dual sensors in one probe XH Handy box housing (factory installed) XHP Non-metallic handy box housing (factory installed) XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108" XL2 Custom length insertion probe, 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2" (5.08 cm) XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F (0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F (0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F (0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XW Weather resistant housing (factory installed) XZ Three wire RTD connections (optional only on Type 81, not available with XC25 and XCP25) XP Example: KTA24-XP 10,000 Type II all-purpose temperature sensor with matched sensor
20
KTA24
TEMPERATURE
PAGE 1281 1279 1277 229
1206
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

TEMPERATURE
ALL-PURPOSE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-A* SERIES
TM
The Precon ST-A* Series All-Purpose Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing element is made of a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTDs. The ST-A* Series sensors are rugged, point-sensitive waterproof sensors featuring a 9" (22.8 cm) 304 stainless steel probe and brass tting. The brass tting has a 1/2" NPT male thread. The sensors are supplied with two 1/2" locknuts for easy installation in handy boxes (or other enclosures with 1/2" knockouts).
ST-A*
APPLICATION
The ST-A* Series Sensors are waterproof and can be used where it is possible for the sensed temperature to fall below the ambient dew point, causing condensation to occur on the sensor. However, it is important that the eld connection be made as far as possible from the sensed media. The sensing element is sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a versatile 9" long stainless steel tube with a brass electrical tting. The all-purpose probe is suitable for plenum mounting, duct mounting, immersion wells, or outside air.
Lifetime warranty Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Tip sensitive for precise temperature response Adaptable with many options All metal construction with 304 stainless steel probe Easy to mount to duct, wall, or back box Waterproof probe
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71, 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 1000 Nickel 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient Positive temperature coefcient RTD Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Mounting Directly to duct, wall, or customersupplied back box, no adapters needed for standard boxes Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with prestripped ends, type 71 & 81 have 18" leads Approvals CE Weight 0.2 lb (0.09 kg) w/o options Warranty Lifetime
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1207
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
Locknuts provide direct mounting and can be used where conduit is not required. Mount directly to electrical outlet boxes as shown below. Basic model comes with two locknuts for mounting to a variety of box options.
All-Purpose Sensor with Customer-Supplied Handy Box
ALL-PURPOSE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-A* SERIES
Hole 1-1/16"(2.7 cm)
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.5 (3.81) 1.0 (2.54) Typical Insertion 9.25 (23.51) 1.0 (2.54)
0.83 (2.06)
8.25 (20.96)
0.25 (0.64)
1/2" NPT Thread
Secure sensor to handy box with locknuts. Secure handy box to duct with screws.
MODEL ST-A3 ST-A21 ST-A22 ST-A24 ST-A27 ST-A42 ST-A63 ST-A71 ST-A81 ST-A85 ST-A91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 all-purpose thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 all-purpose thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 all-purpose thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 all-purpose thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 all-purpose thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 all-purpose thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 nickel all purpose RTD @ 70F (21C), (yellow leads) 100 ultra high accurate all purpose RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 100 all-purpose RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 all-purpose RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 all-purpose RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS QD Nylon insulated Quick Disconnect " X25 25 (7.6) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable XCO " LB condulet fitting XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable XD Dual sensors in one probe XH Handy box housing (factory installed) XHP Non-metallic handy box housing ( factory installed) XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108" XL2 Custom length insertion probe, 4-7/8"(12.38 cm) XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm) XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XW Weather resistant housing (factory installed) XZ Three wire RTD connections (optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, not available with XC25 and XCP25) XP Example: ST-A24-XP 10,000 Type II all-purpose temperature sensor with matched sensor
20
TEMPERATURE
ST-A24
PAGE 1281 1279 1277 229
1208
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Economical Metal enclosures with stainless steel probes Three-year warranty 0.5F (0.28C) accuracy Wide selection of thermistor or RTD sensors
TEMPERATURE
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTW* SERIES
The Kele KTW* Immersion Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed to be cost-effective with accuracies of 0.5F (0.28C). Each sensor is constructed for easy installation with any building automation system (BAS). The thermistor is made of a very stable, pre-aged material that offer long-life reliability for HVAC control. The platinum RTD comes in 100 and 1000 versions. All sensors come with a three-year warranty.
KTWNB3
KTWNB3-LT
KTW3
KTW3-W
APPLICATION
The KTW Series Sensors are waterproof and feature a 304 stainless steel probe and brass tting. The tting has 1/2" NPSM female threads to accept the standard Greeneld tting. It also has 1/8" NPSM male threads for installing into an optional Model WEL-B thermowell. The thermowells are designed with close tolerances, eliminating the need for thermal grease under normal conditions. Each well is designed so that the sensor assembly can be easily removed after installation. The well screws into a 1/2" FNPT saddle (or Thredolet tting) furnished by the installing contractor.
OPTIONS
304 stainless steel well, maximum temperature 900F (482C), maximum pressure 3000 psig (20,685 kPa) Handy-box enclosure Custom lengths (wells available) 1/2" LB conduit tting Liquid-tight tting Weather resistant box Matched pairs used for BTU measurement NIST Traceable
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation 0.50F (0.28C) 0.60F (0.33C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years 100% (no drift platinum) 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Enclosure Mounting Wiring Terminations Probe Approvals Weight KTWNB KTW Warranty Metal, weather resistant 1/2" conduit tting directly to duct or wall 8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81 sensors have 18" leads Seamless 304 stainless steel tube, 1/4" OD CE 0.65 lb (0.30 kg) standard w/o options 1.1 lb (0.5 Kg) w/o options 3 years
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1209
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
Mounting Install well into customer-supplied 1/2" FNPT saddle (or Thredolet). Screw sensor into the well via the 1/8" NPSM brass fitting. Wiring Terminate with butt splice or soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended.
Install the wells as shown to obtain optimum well strength. Flow Flow
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTW* SERIES
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 1.70 (4.3) 4.0 (10.2) WEL-B 1/2" NPT 4.87 (12.38) 5.13 (13.03) 3.25 (8.26) 0.25 (0.63)
KTW*
Angle must not allow end of well to contact the other side of pipe.
MODEL DESCRIPTION KTW Well immersion temperature sensor KTWNB Well immersion temperature sensor with no box SENSOR SELECTION 3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III 21 2252 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 22 3000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 24 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 27 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 42 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV 81 100 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 85 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 91 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS B WEL-B brass well included QD Nylon insulated quick disconnect " S WEL-S 304 stainless steel well included X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable XCO " LB condulet fitting XCP25 25' non-shielded plenum cable XD Dual sensors in one probe XHP Non-metallic handy box housing ( factory installed) XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 60" XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm)(Specify E without well) XL9 Custom length insertion probe, 9"(22.86 cm)(Specify E without well) XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed) XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XNB " MNPT brass close nipple (not available with KTW) XNG No Greenfield fitting(" NPSM threads) (not available with KTW) XNP " MNPT plastic close nipple (not available with KTW) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, all thermistors, 0.135F (0.075C) XW Weather resistant housing (not available with KTWNB) XZ Three wire RTD connections(Type 81 only) (Not with XC25, XCP25)
KTW 3 B Example: KTW-3-B Immersion sensor with 10,000 thermistor and brass well
20
TEMPERATURE
T81U-XR T91U-XR TCC-111 TCC-12 UR WEL-B WEL-S
RELATED PRODUCTS 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice Brass well 304 stainless steel well
PAGE 1281 1277 1298 1298 229 1294 1294 March 2014
1210
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES APPLICATION
TEMPERATURE
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-W* SERIES
TM
The PreCon Model ST-W* Immersion Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing element is a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
TCC-12
The sensing element is sealed with a temperature conductive compound in a 4-7/8" (12.4 cm) stainless steel tube and brass tting. A brass thermowell is the standard well provided with each sensor. A Greeneld connector is factory installed for flexible connection. The sensor probe assembly is removable from the thermowell for replacement without draining the system.
Lifetime warranty 0.36F (0.2C) thermistor accuracy 1F (0.53C) RTD accuracy Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Brass thermowell for quick temperature response Adaptable with many options Easy to mount and remove from thermowell Waterproof stainless steel probe
WEL-B
ST-W24
OPTIONS
The Model ST-W* is a waterproof sensor featuring a 304 stainless steel probe and brass tting. The tting has a 1/2" NPT female threads to accept the standard Greeneld tting. It has 1/8" NPT male threads for installing into a furnished WEL-B thermowell. The thermowells are designed with close tolerances, eliminating the need for thermal grease under normal conditions. Each well is designed so that the sensor assembly can be easily removed after installation. The well screws into a 1/2" NPT saddle (or Thredolet tting) furnished by the installing contractor. 304 stainless steel well, maximum temperature 900F (482C),maximum pressure 3000 psig (20,685 kPa) Handy-box enclosure Custom lengths (wells available) 1/2" LB conduit tting Liquid-tight tting Weather resistant box Matched pairs used for BTU measurement NIST Traceable
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Mounting 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Directly to pipe in supplied brass well, no adapters needed for standard boxes, customer-supplied 1/2" Thredolet required in pipe 8' (2.44 m) of 24 AWG pigtails with prestripped ends, type 71 & 81 have 18" leads CE 0.65 lb (0.3 kg) w/o well Lifetime
20
Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty
RTD Type 63 1000 Nickel Type 71, 81 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 85 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1211
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
Mounting Install well into customer-supplied 1/2" FNPT saddle (or Thredolet). Screw sensor into the well via the 1/8" NPSM brass fitting. Wiring Terminate with butt splice or soldering. Wire nuts are not recommended.
Install the wells as shown to obtain optimum well strength. Flow Flow
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-W* SERIES
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.37 (3.49)
Greenfield Fitting 1/8" NPSM
1/2" NPT
4.87 (XL) (12.38)
5.13 (13.03)
3.25 (8.26)
0.25 (0.63)
Angle must not allow end of well to contact the other side of pipe.
Sensor Sensor in Well
MODEL ST-W3 ST-W21 ST-W22 ST-W24 ST-W27 ST-W42 ST-W63 ST-W71 ST-W81 ST-W85 ST-W91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 immersion thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 immersion thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 immersion thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 immersion thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 immersion thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 immersion thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 nickel immersion RTD @ 70F (21C), (yellow leads) 100 ultra high accurate immersion RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 100 immersion RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 immersion RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 immersion RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) WELL DESIGNATION Sensor with standard brass well E Sensor without well S Sensor with stainless steel well 900F (482C) max temp, 3000 psig (20.7 kPa) max pressure OPTIONS QD Nylon insulated quick disconnect " X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable XCO " LB condulet fitting XCP25 25' non-shielded plenum cable XD Dual sensors in one probe XH Handy box housing (factory installed) XHP Non-metallic handy box housing ( factory installed) XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108"(Specify E without well) XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm)(Specify E without well) XL9 Custom length insertion probe, 9"(22.86 cm)(Specify E without well) XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed) XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XNB " MNPT brass close nipple XNG No Greenfield fitting(" NPSM threads) XNP " MNPT plastic close nipple XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, all thermistors, 0.135F (0.075C) XW Weather resistant housing XZ Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, not available for use with XC25 & XCP25 options) S XP Example: ST-W3-S-XP 10,000 Type III immersion sensor with a matched 10,000 Type III immersion sensor and stainless steel well
20
TEMPERATURE
ST-W3
TCC-111 TCC-12 UR
RELATED PRODUCTS Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1298 1298 229
1212
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Five-year warranty Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves Stainless steel probes
TEMPERATURE
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ACI IMMERSION SERIES
The ACI Immersion Series Thermistor and RTD Immersion Sensors are designed specically for HVAC system temperature control. The immersion sensors come in thermistor and RTD sensor curves compatible with most BAS systems available today. The ACI Immersion Sensor threads into a 1/2" (1.27 cm) well (included), which is secured into the pipe to a customersupplied 1/2" saddle or Thredolet. The probe is tight tting for accurate readings. Faster response can be achieved by using TCC-12 thermal conductive compound at the bottom of the well.
A/AN-I-4-GD
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Temperature Range Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty 0.36F (0.2C) 0.50F (0.4C) 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 100, 1000 385 curve -40 to 302F (-40 to 150C) 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.1C drift Thermistor, 3 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Galvanized metal box 10 of 22 AWG wire or terminal strip RoHS CE 1.0 lb (0.45 Kg) 5 years
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
5.5 (14.0)
0.25 (0.64)
1/2" Male NPT Threads

1.8 (4.8) 2.9 (5.9)
1/2" Conduit Knockouts 1/2" Male NPT Nylon Fitting
TEMPERATURE
4.0 (10.6)
A/*-I-X-GD Immersion
MODEL A/AN-I-4-GD A/CP-I-4-GD A/20K-I-4-GD A/100-2W-I-4-GD A/1K-2W-I-4-GD ACI/4 T81U-XR T85U-XR TCC-111 TCC-12 UR DESCRIPTION Immersion 10 k type III thermistor with well and 4 (10.1 cm) insertion Immersion 10 k type II thermistor with well and 4 (10.1cm) insertion Immersion 20 k type IV thermistor with well and 4 (10.1 cm) insertion Immersion 100 RTD 385 curve with well and 4 (10.1 cm) insertion Immersion 1 k RTD 385 curve with well and 4 (10.1 cm) insertion RELATED PRODUCTS ACI brass thermowell 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice PAGE 1281 1279 1298 1298 229
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1213
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Series Thermistor and RTD Immersion Sensors are designed specically for HVAC systems. They come in thermistor and RTD sensors and feature double encapsulated sensor etched Teflon leadwires to create a watertight package that can perform in the real world.
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS BA/ IMMERSION SERIES
FEATURES
0.36F (0.2C) thermistor accuracy 0.27F (0.15C) or 0.54F (0.3C) RTD Lifetime limited sensor warranty Wide selection of mounting styles
NEW!
BA/10K2-I8-JB BA/10K2-I4-BB2 BA/10K2-I2-BB4 Enclosure JB BB BB2 BB4 WP Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight I2 I4 & I8 Warranty 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts BAPI-Box Enclosure - IP66 rated, UV-resistant polycarbonate BAPI-Box 2 Enclosure - IP66 rated, UV-resistant polycarbonate BAPI Box 4- IP20 nylon & plastic NEMA 3R Aluminum Directly to pipe 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads CE, RoHS 0.65 lb (0.29 Kg) 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg) Lifetime
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Temperature Range Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation 0.36F (0.2C) 0.55F (0.30C) 10 k Type II & III 100, 1000, 385 curve; 1000, 375 curve 32 to 158F (-0 to 70C) <0.036F (0.02C) per year 0.14C with 6,000 continuous hours at 400C 2.7 mW/C (power need to raise the temperature 1C), 0.4C/mW at 0C
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
20
BA/10K2-I8-BB BA/10K2-I8-BB2
1214
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
BA/10K2-I8-BB4
MODEL BA/
BA/ 10K3 I8 JB
TEMPERATURE
IMMERSION THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS BA/ IMMERSION SERIES
BA/10K2-I8-JB
BA/10K2-I8-WP
DESCRIPTION Probe temperature sensor REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE 10K2 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 10K3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III 100 100 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K375 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 375 curve REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH I2 Immersion probe 2" long, 1/2" well thread Order BA/2 well seperately I4 Immersion probe 4" long, 1/2" well thread Order BA/4 well seperately I8 Immersion probe 8" long, 1/2" well thread Order BA/8 well seperately REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE NB No box with 18" leads JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts BB NEMA 4 weatherproof, UV resistant plastic BB2 BAPI-Box 2 enclosure - IP66 rated, UV resistant polycarbonate WP NEMA 3R weatherproof enclosure
Example: BA/10K3-I8-JB BAPI 8" immersion10,000 thermistor sensor with JB box
TEMPERATURE
20
T85U-XR T81U-XR T91U-XR BA/2 BA/4 BA/8
RELATED PRODUCTS 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 2" BAPI stainless steel well 4" BAPI stainless steel well 8" BAPI stainless steel well
PAGE 1279 1281 1277
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1215
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION The Kele KTO* OSA Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed to be cost-effective with accuracies of 0.5F (0.28C). Each uses metal enclosures and is constructed for easy installation with any building automation system (BAS). The thermistor is made of a very stable, pre-aged material that offers long-life reliability for HVAC control. The platinum RTD comes in 100 and 1000 versions. All sensors come with a three-year warranty. FEATURES Metal enclosures with plastic weather shield Three-year warranty 0.5F (0.28C) accuracy
OSA THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTO* SERIES
NEW!
KTO3
Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years 100% (no drift platinum) 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) Metal, weather resistant 3/4" conduit ttings 8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81 sensors have 18" leads CE 0.75 lb (0.3 kg) with no options 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
RTD Type 81 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 85 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient Positive temperature coefcient RTD
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 4.63 (11.75) 2.88 (7.30) 2.0 (5.08) Foam Gasket 6.13 (15.56) 1.5 (3.81) Stainless Sheathed Sensor
MOUNTING
Mounting KTO* Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used for outside mounting. For conduit connections, 3/4" NPT threads are available in the back and side.
3/4" NPT Side and rear Use AD-2 adaptor for 1/2" NPT applications
Do not mount sensor in vertical position with the weather shield pointing up.
TEMPERATURE
Shaded side of building Preferred mounting location for outdoor air sensor
KTO*
For best results, do not mount above doors, windows, air intakes, or exhausts.
MODEL KTO3 KTO21 KTO22 KTO24 KTO27 KTO42 KTO81 KTO85 KTO91 DESCRIPTION OSA temperature sensor, 10,000 thermistor Type III OSA temperature sensor, 2252 thermistor Type II OSA temperature sensor, 3,000 thermistor Type II OSA temperature sensor, 10,000 thermistor Type II OSA temperature sensor, 100,000 thermistor Type II OSA temperature sensor, 20,000 thermistor Type IV OSA temperature sensor, 100 RTD 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) OSA temperature sensor, 1,000 RTD 385 platinum curve (blue leads) OSA temperature sensor, 1,000 RTD 385 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable XD Dual sensors in one probe XG Greenfield fitting (factory installed) XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed) XMT Mounting tabs XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XTB Terminal block XZ Three wire RTD connections(optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, not available with XC25 & XCP25 options)
20
T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR AD-2
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277 Knock-out adapter -3/4in TO 1/2in
1216
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

TEMPERATURE
OUTSIDE AIR THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR ST-O* SERIES
TM
The PreCon Model ST-O* Outside Air Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing element is a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD. The temperature-sensitive element is sheathed in a stainless steel tube and mounted inside a ventilated, treated, white PVC shield to minimize radiant energy and weather related effects. The weather shield is mounted on a weather resistant outlet box for easy installation on an protected outdoor surface. This rugged enclosure will assure a long life, even under extreme weather conditions.
ST-O*
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Lifetime warranty Vented weather shield for quick temperature response Moistureproof with 8 ft (2.4m) lead Weather resistant enclosure Ultra high accuracy optional
4.63 (11.75) 2.88 (7.30)
5.5 (13.97) 1.5 (3.81) Stainless Sheathed Sensor
APPLICATION
The ST-O* Outside Air Sensor is ideal for measuring outdoor ambient air temperatures. It comes with a weather resistant enclosure that should be shielded from direct exposure to the elements on the shaded side of the building. For best results do not mount above doors, windows, air intakes, or exhausts.
2.0 (5.08)
Foam Gasket
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71, 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 1000 Nickel 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years RTD Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Metal, weather resistant Enclosure Mounting Directly to wall with screws or toggle bolts Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with prestripped ends, type 71 & 81 have 18" leads Approvals CE Weight 0.75 lb (0.3 kg) with no options Warranty Lifetime
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1217
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
OUTSIDE AIR THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR ST-O* SERIES
Mounting Toggle bolts or other direct wall mount screws can be used for outside mounting. For conduit connections, 3/4" NPT threads are available in the back and side. Wiring Terminate using the full 8' (2.44m) lead length provided to avoid moisture migration from the field connection. Solder the leads where possible or use crimp-type butt splice. Wire nuts are not recommended.
NEW!
3/4" NPT Side and Rear (Use AD-2 for 1/2" application)
Correct Position for Mounting Outdoor Air Sensor.
in vertical position with the sun shield pointing up.
Do not mount sensor
Shaded side of building
Preferred Mounting Location for Outdoor Air Sensor
For best results do not mount above doors, windows, air intakes, or exhausts.
MODEL ST-O3 ST-O21 ST-O22 ST-O24 ST-O27 ST-O42 ST-O63 ST-O71 ST-O81 ST-O85 ST-O91 DESCRIPTION OSA temperature sensor, 10,000 thermistor Type III OSA temperature sensor, 2250 thermistor Type II OSA temperature sensor, 3,000 thermistor Type II OSA temperature sensor, 10,000 thermistor Type II OSA temperature sensor, 100,000 thermistor Type II OSA temperature sensor, 20,000 thermistor Type IV 1000 nickel OSA RTD @ 70F (21C), (yellow leads) 100 ultra high accurate OSA RTD @ 32 (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 100 OSA temperature sensor RTD @ 32F (0C) 381 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 OSA temperature sensor RTD @ 32F (0C) 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 OSA temperature sensor RTD @ 32F (0C) 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable XD Dual sensors in one probe XG Greenfield fitting (factory installed) XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed) XMT Mounting tabs XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XTB Terminal block XZ Three wire RTD connections(optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, not available with XC25 & XCP25 options)
20
TEMPERATURE
T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR AD-2
RELATED PRODUCTS 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Knock-out adapter -3/4in TO 1/2in
PAGE 1281 1279 1277
1218
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Economical Proven mounting designs Three-year warranty NEMA 3R enclosure
TEMPERATURE
OSA THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTOSA* SERIES
The Kele KTOSA* Series OSA Temperature Thermistor and RTD Sensors are very economical and are specically designed for HVAC applications. The mounting styles are based on proven techniques for installation efciency and use stainless steel probes for durability. The sensors come with a three year warranty and are made with the highest quality material that offers the reliability needed in HVAC systems.
KTOSA* APPLICATION The KTOSA* Series Sensors are used for outside air temperature sensing. The design allows for two-point mounting. The weather shield protects the encapsulated sensor probe from the effects of rain, sleet, and snow.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 81 Type 85 Type 91 0.50F (0.28C) 0.60F (0.33C), 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years 100% (no drift platinum) 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) 2.252k, 3k, 10k Type II & III, 20k, 100k 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 PT 375 Curve Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Enclosure White plastic Mounting Directly to wall Wiring Terminations 8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81 sensors have 18" leads Probe Seamless 304 stainless steel tube with 1.5" (3.8 cm) diameter weather shield Approvals CE Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) w/o options Warranty 3 years
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) Removeable Sensor Cover 1.30 (3.30) 3.20 (8.12) 4.10 (10.4) 2.50 (6.35) 2.50 (6.35) Mounting Box Mounting Tabs (2)
20
Mounting Tabs (2) KTOSA* Outside Air Sensor
3.30 (8.38)
*Must face down to maintain water-tight integrity
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1219
TEMPERATURE
OSA THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTOSA* SERIES
MODEL KTOSA3 KTOSA21 KTOSA22 KTOSA24 KTOSA27 KTOSA42 KTOSA81 KTOSA85 KTOSA91
DESCRIPTION OSA temperature sensor, 10,000 thermistor Type III OSA temperature sensor, 2250 thermistor Type II OSA temperature sensor, 3,000 thermistor Type II OSA temperature sensor, 10,000 thermistor Type II OSA temperature sensor, 100,000 thermistor Type II OSA temperature sensor, 20,000 thermistor Type IV OSA temperature sensor, 100 RTD 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) OSA temperature sensor, 1,000 RTD 385 platinum curve (blue leads) OSA temperature sensor, 1,000 RTD 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS QD Nylon insulated quick disconnect " X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG jacketed cable XCP25 25' (7.6m) non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable XD Dual sensors XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XZ Three wire RTD connections (Type 81 only) (Not with XC25, XCP25)
NEW!
PAGE 1279 1281 1277
TEMPERATURE
RELATED PRODUCTS 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable
20
1220
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
0.36F (0.2C) accuracy Five-year warranty Wide selection of thermistor or RTD curves Stainless steel probes Weather tight Housing
TEMPERATURE
OSA THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ACI OSA SERIES
The ACI Series OSA Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specically for HVAC system temperature control. The OSA sensors come in thermistor and RTD sensor curves compatible with most BAS systems available today. OSA sensors mount in a NEMA 4 box with weather shield and easy-mount tabs. The ACI OSA Sensor should be located on an outside wall facing north in the northern hemisphere. Using the tabs on the box, mount to the exterior wall using screws appropriate for the wall construction.
A/AN-O
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Temperature Range Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty 0.36F(0.2C) 0.5F (0.4C) 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 100, 1000 385 curve -40 to 302F (-40 to 150C) 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.1C drift Thermistor, 3 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Plastic 10" of 22 AWG wire or terminal strip CE, RoHs 0.68 lb (0.31 Kg) 5 years
3.60 (9.14) 3.75 (9.52) 2.25 (5.71)
0.18 (0.46) O.D. Ref. (2) PG11 0.5 (1.27) NPT Knockouts (4) 5.00 (12.7)
TEMPERATURE
Top View
0.85 (2.16)
Side View
A/*-O Outside Air
MODEL A/AN-O A/CP-O A/20K-O A/100-2W-O A/1K-2W-O T81U-XR T85U-XR UR DESCRIPTION OSA Temperature sensor 10 k type III thermistor OSA Temperature sensor 10 k type II thermistor OSA Temperature sensor 20 k type IV thermistor OSA Temperature sensor 100 RTD 385 curve OSA Temperature sensor 1 k RTD 385 curve RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1221
TEMPERATURE
OSA TEMPERATURE SENSORS BA/ OSA SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Series OSA Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specically for HVAC systems to be mounted outdoors. The UV-resistant plastic shield keeps the sensor out of the sunlight and allows for excellent air circulation. They come in thermistor and RTD sensors and feature etched teflon leadwires to perform under real world conditions.
NEW!
BA/1K375-O-BB2
FEATURES
Quick Response sensor Well ventilated, light colored sensor guard three watertight enclosure styles Lifetime limited sensor warranty
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Temperature Range Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Thermistor RTD Enclosure WP BB BB2 Mounting Wiring Terminations Weight Approvals Warranty 0.36F (0.2C) 0.55F (0.30C) 10k Type II & III 100, 1000, 385 curve; 1000, 375 curve 32 to 158F (-0 to 70C) < 0.036 F (0.02C) per year 0.14C with 6,000 continuous hours at 400C 2.7 mW/C (power need to raise the temperature 1C) 0.4C/mW at 0C NEMA 3R metal enclosure BAPI-Box IP66 rated UV-resistant Plastic enclosure BAP-Box 2 IP66 rated UV-resistant Plastic enclosure Directly to wall 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg) CE, RoHS Lifetime
DIMENSIONS
in (mm)
1/2" NPT Typical 2.16 (54.9) 0.25 (6.4) Medical-grade Closed Cell Foam Insulating Pad
TEMPERATURE
4.50 (114.3)
2.75 (69.9) Vented Sensor Guard 5.0 (127.0)
20
(WP) OSA Probe
1222
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MODEL BA/
BA/ 10K3 O BB
TEMPERATURE
OSA TEMPERATURE SENSORS BA/ OSA SERIES
DESCRIPTION Probe temperature sensor REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE 10K2 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type 2 10K3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type 3 100 100 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K375 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 375 curve REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH O OSA probe 5" long REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts BB NEMA 4 weatherproof, UV resistant plastic BB2 BAPI-Box 2 enclosure - IP66 rated, UV resistant polycarbonate WP NEMA 3R weatherproof enclosure
Example: BA/10K3-O-BB BAPI 5" OSA 10,000 thermistor sensor with NEMA 4 weatherproof enclosure
PAGE 1279 1281 1277
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1223
TEMPERATURE
20
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTUS/KTOS Series of Duct, Immersion, OSA Thermistor and RTD Temperature Sensors are very economical and are accurate to within 0.5F (0.28C). The Kele KTUS/KTOS Series sensors are ideally suited for HVAC applications. The mounting designs are based on proven techniques for installation efciency with stainless steel probes for durability. These sensors come with a three-year warranty and are made of a very stable, pre-aged material which offers the reliability needed in HVAC systems.
DUCT, IMMERSION, OSA, THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTUS*, KTOS* SERIES
NEW!
KTUS* KTOS* Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Mounting Wiring Terminations Probe Approvals Weight Warranty 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years 100% (no drift platinum) 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) White plastic Directly to well, duct,or wall 8, 24 AWG wire leads, type 81 sensors have 18 leads Seamless 304 stainless steel tube, 14 OD, 4.87 long CE 0.2 lb (0.1 kg) w/o options 3 years
FEATURES
Economical Three-year warranty Flame retardant, plenum rated Adaptable with many mounting options 304 stainless steel waterproof probes Paintable plastic NEMA 3R, IP22
SPECIFICATIONS
TEMPERATURE
RTD Type 81 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 85 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient Positive temperature coefcient RTD
20
PROBE TYPES
The Model KTUS uses a proven universal style enclosure for use in duct and immersion applications. The direct-mount design incorporates a 2.5" x 2.5" (6.4 x 6.4 cm) termination box with a 4.87" (12.4 cm) stainless steel probe. The probe may be inserted into a duct with 0.4" (1 cm) hole or immersion using a WEL-B or a WEL-S. The Model KTOS is used for outside air temperature sensing. The design allows for two-point mounting and 1.5" (3.8 cm) wall separation for more accurate performance. The weather shield protects the stainless steel probe from the effects of rain, sleet, and snow.
1224
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.25 (8.26) 2.5 (6.35) 2.3 (5.84) 0.88 (2.24)
1/8" NPT
TEMPERATURE
DUCT, IMMERSION, OSA, THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTUS*, KTOS* SERIES
0.75 (1.91)
8.38 (21.28)
4.87 (12.38)
Mounting Tabs
1/2" Conduit Hole Gasket
4.75 (12.07) 5.5 (13.97)
0.25 (0.63)
KTUS* Multipurpose Duct and Immersion Sensor
KTOS* OSA Sensor
MODEL KTUS KTOS DESCRIPTION Universal-mount sensor, duct, and immersion (order wells separately) Universal-mount sensor, OSA THERMISTOR SENSOR TYPE 3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III 21 2252 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 22 3000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 24 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 27 100,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 42 20,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV 81 100 RTD@ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 85 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 91 1000 RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS
B QD S X25 XC25 XCP25 XD XG XL XL2 in XL9 XN XN1 XN2 XN3 XP Brass well included (WEL-B for US* only) Nylon insulated quick disconnect " 304 stainless steel well included (WEL-S for US* only) 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable 25' non-shielded plenum cable Dual sensors in one probe Greenfield fitting (factory installed) Custom length insertion probes 1" to 60" Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm)(Specify E without well) Custom length insertion probe, 9"(22.86 cm)(Specify E without well) NIST certificate of conformance NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors)
TEMPERATURE
20
KTUS
B Example: KTUS-3-B 10,000 Type III universal mount thermistor sensor with brass well
T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR TCC-111 TCC-12 UR
RELATED PRODUCTS 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1281 1279 1277 1298 1298 229
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1225
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Kele KTU* Series Universal-Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide remote temperature sensing in multiple applications such as duct, OSA, and immersion installations for building automation systems. The active sensing element is a highly stable thermistor material or platinum RTD. The sensing element is sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) long stainless steel probe and is attached to a 2.5" (6.35 cm) square enclosure. The tabs on the enclosure provide mounting ears for direct duct mounting and are easily removable if they are not needed. This multipurpose enclosure minimizes the number of stock parts required to handle multiple applications.
UNIVERSAL-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS KTU* SERIES
NEW!
WEL-B KTU* WEL-S OSAB
FEATURES
Three-year warranty Flame retardant, plenum rated Adaptable with many mounting options 304 stainless steel waterproof probes Paintable plastic NEMA 3R, IP22
Duct: Drill a 9/16" (1.43 cm) hole for insertion into the duct. Attach probe snug to the duct with self tapping screws. Well Insertion: Install the well into the customer-supplied 1/2" saddle (Thredolet), then thread the sensor into the well. For better heat transfer you may apply thermal compound to the tip of the sensor before insertion. Mounting tabs may be removed. OSA: Insert the shield into the bracket and thread the KT-U* through the gasket to the shield. Secure the assembly to the wall using the appropriate hardware for the wall surface. The ideal orientation of the sensor is horizontal with the knockout facing down and located on an outside wall with a shaded exposure. Mounting tabs may be removed. The sensor and shield may be painted to the architects specifications.
MOUNTING
PROBE APPLICATIONS
The Duct Temperature application is designed for direct mounting on sheet metal duct systems. The sensor is point sensitive and comes standard with a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) insertion depth. The XL option is available for custom lengths up to 36" (91.44 cm). The Immersion Temperature application is designed to be threaded directly into a 1/8" NPT well. The wells are available in brass or 304 stainless steel and are designed for pipe insertion using a 1/2" threaded saddle (Thredolet). The Outside Air Temperature application uses a wall bracket with a vented weather shield to minimize the effect of rain, snow, or other weather-related influences. This rugged enclosure and bracket will ensure long life even in severe weather conditions.
TEMPERATURE
Shaded Exposure
When choosing location for any outdoor air temperature sensors: 1. Do not mount above building openings (windows, doors) 2. Keep sensor out of direct sunlight
Do not mount sensor
in vertical position with the weather shield pointing up.
SPECIFICATIONS
20
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor
0.50F (0.28C) 0.60F (0.33C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k
RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Mounting Wiring Terminations Probe Approvals Weight Warranty
RTD Type 81 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 85 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years
100% (no drift platinum) 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) UL 94V-0, plenum-rated plastic NEMA 3R, IP22, UV protected with snap-off cover Directly to duct, immersion well, or OSA wall mount with appropriate bracket 8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81 sensors have 18" leads Seamless 304 stainless steel tube, 14" OD, 4.87" long CE 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) w/o options 3 years
1226
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.25 (8.26) 2.5 (6.35) 2.5 (6.35) 2.3 (5.83) 0.88 (2.24) 0.75 (1.91)
1/8 NPT
TEMPERATURE
1/8 NPT
4.87 UNIVERSAL-MOUNT THERMISTOR (12.38) AND RTD SENSORS5.13 (13.03) SERIES 1/2" KTU* NPT 3.25 0.25 (0.63) Well (8.26)
Mounting Tabs
ST-U* Duct/Multipurpose Sensor
ST-U*B and ST-U*S Well Sensor

8.38 (21.28)
0.75 (1.91)
4.87 (12.38)
Mounting Tabs
4.75 (12.07)
5.5 (13.97)
1/2" NPT
5.13 (13.03)
0.25 (0.63)
Well
3.25 (8.26)

8.38 (21.28)
ST-U*O Sensor for OSA
0.75 (1.91) MODEL DESCRIPTION KTU3 10,000 universal-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 4.75 KTU21 2252 universal-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) (12.07) 1/2" 5.5thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) KTU22 3000 universal-mount Conduit Hole (13.97) KTU24 10,000 universal-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 universal-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) Gasket KTU27 Correct position for mounting air sensor KTU42 20,000outdoor universal-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) ST-U*O KTU81 100 universal-mount RTD @32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) Sensor for OSA KTU85 1000 universal-mount RTD @32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) KTU91 1000 universal-mount RTD @32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS B WEL-B brass well included O OSAB outside weathershield, gasket, and bracket for wall mount included QD1/4 Nylon insulated quick disconnect 1/4" S WEL-S 304 stainless steel well included X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable XD Dual sensors in one probe XG Greenfield fitting (factory installed) XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108" XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm) XL9 Custom length insertion probe, 9"(22.86 cm) XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XZ Three wire RTD connections (Type 81 only) (Not with XC25, XCP25)
TEMPERATURE
20
KTU3
Example: KTU3B 10,000 Type III immersion sensor with brass well
F-1000-331 OSAB T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR TCC-111 TCC-12
RELATED PRODUCTS Nylon bushing for open wiring OSA weather shield, gasket, and bracket 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml
PAGE 1281 1279 1277 1298 1298
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1227
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The PreCon Model ST-U* Universal-Mount Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing in multiple applications such as Duct, OSA, and Immersion installations for building automation systems. The active sensing element is a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD. The sensing element is sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) long stainless steel probe and is attached to a 2.5" (6.35 cm) square enclosure. The tabs on the enclosure provide mounting ears for direct duct mounting and are easily removable if they are not needed. This multipurpose enclosure minimizes the number of stock parts required to handle multiple applications.
UNIVERSAL-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-U* SERIES
NEW!
WEL-B ST-U* WEL-S OSAB
TM
FEATURES
Lifetime warranty Flame retardant, plenum rated Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Adaptable with many mounting options 304 stainless steel probes Easy to mount to duct, well, or wall Waterproof probe Paintable plastic NEMA 3R, IP22 Brass or stainless well Outside air kit Custom lengths Matched sensor pairs Ultra high accuracy optional
PROBE APPLICATIONS
The Duct Temperature application is designed for direct mounting on sheet metal duct systems. The sensor is point sensitive and comes standard with a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) insertion depth. The XL option is available for custom lengths up to 36" (91.44 cm). The Immersion Temperature application is designed to be threaded directly into a 1/8" NPT well. The wells are available in brass or 304 stainless steel and are designed for pipe insertion using a 1/2" threaded saddle (Thredolet). The Outside Air Temperature application uses a wall bracket with a vented weather shield to minimize the effect of rain, snow, or other weather related influences. This rugged enclosure and bracket will ensure long life even in severe weather conditions.
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) UL 94V-0, plenum-rated plastic NEMA 3R, IP22 UV protected with snap-off cover Directly to duct, immersion well, or OSA wall mount with appropriate bracket 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with prestripped ends, type 71 & 81 have 18" leads CE 0.25 lb (0.1 kg) w/o options Lifetime
20
RTD Type 63 1000 Nickel Type 71, 81 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 85 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient
1228
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.25 (8.26) 2.5 (6.35) 2.5 (6.35) 2.3 (5.83) 0.88 (2.24) 0.75 (1.91)
1/8 NPT
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
Duct: Drill a 9/16" (1.43 cm) hole for insertion into the duct. Attach probe snug to the duct with self tapping screws. Well Insertion: Install the well into the customer-supplied 1/2" saddle (Thredolet), then thread the sensor into the well. For better heat transfer you may apply thermal compound to the tip of the sensor before insertion. Mounting tabs may be removed. OSA: Insert the shield into the bracket and thread the KT-U* through the gasket to the shield. Secure the assembly to the wall using the appropriate hardware for the wall surface. The ideal orientation of the sensor is horizontal with the knockout facing down and located on an outside wall with a shaded exposure. Mounting tabs may be removed. The sensor and shield may be painted to the architects specifications.
UNIVERSAL-MOUNT THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-U* SERIES
4.87 (12.38)
Mounting Tabs
1/2" NPT
5.13 (13.03)
0.25 (0.63)
Well
3.25 (8.26)

8.38 (21.28)
0.75 (1.91)
Shaded Exposure
4.75 (12.07) 5.5 (13.97)
When choosing location for any outdoor air temperature sensors: 1. Do not mount above building openings (windows, doors) 2. Keep sensor out of direct sunlight
Do not mount sensor
in vertical position with the weather shield pointing up.
ST-U*O Sensor for OSA
MODEL ST-U3 ST-U21 ST-U22 ST-U24 ST-U27 ST-U42 ST-U63 ST-U71 ST-U81 ST-U85 ST-U91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 universal-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 universal-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 universal-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 universal-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 universal-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 universal-mount thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 nickel universal-mount RTD @70F (21C), (yellow leads) 100 ultra high accurate universal-mount RTD @32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 100 universal-mount RTD @32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 universal-mount RTD @32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 universal-mount RTD @32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS B WEL-B brass well included O OSAB Outside weathershield, gasket, and bracket for wall mount included QD Nylon insulated quick disconnect 1/4" S WEL-S 304 stainless steel well included X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length jacketed cable XCP25 25' Non-shielded plenum cable XD Dual sensors in one probe XG Greenfield fitting (factory installed) XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 108" XL2 in Custom length insertion probe, 2"(5.08 cm) XL9 Custom length insertion probe, 9"(22.86 cm) XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XZ Three wire RTD connections(optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, not available with XC25 & XCP25 options) B
Example: ST-U3B 10,000 Type III immersion sensor with brass well
TEMPERATURE
20
ST-U3
F-1000-331 OSAB TCC-111 TCC-12 WEL-B WEL-S
RELATED PRODUCTS Nylon bushing for open wiring OSA weather shield, gasket, and bracket Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml Brass well 304 stainless steel well
PAGE 1298 1298 1294 1294
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1229
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-FZR* Series Rigid Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing elements are constructed of highly stable precision thermistor materials or platinum RTDs. The sensing elements are sealed in a 304 stainless steel probe attached to a standard handy box with mounting bracket attached. FEATURES Lifetime warranty 0.36F (0.2C) accuracy Wide selection of thermistor curves Four lengths to t to most duct sizes Easy to mount to duct wall Four sensing elements in a series-parallel arrangement Rigid sensor
RIGID AVERAGING THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR ST-FZR SERIES
NEW!
ST-FZR Rigid Averaging Sensor APPLICATION Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Enclosure Metal handy box Mounting Directly to duct with back box Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG prestripped pigtails, Type 81 sensor has 18" leads Approvals CE Weight 12" 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) 18" 0.6 lb (0.3 kg) 24" 0.7 lb (0.32 kg) 36" 0.8 lb (0.37 kg) Warranty Lifetime
TM
OPTIONS
Weather resistant handy box 25' lead length
The ST-FZR* Series is designed for direct mounting to sheet metal for average duct temperature sensing. The sensors contain four sensing elements. The thermistors are congured in a series/parallel method, which creates an end result of total average resistance, equal to the same span as a standard thermistor, with a temperature range of 32 to 160F (0 to 71C).
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 81, 85 Type 91 Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 81 Type 85 Type 91 0.36F (0.2C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve
20
1230
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MOUNTING
Supports typically not required
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
RIGID AVERAGING THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR ST-FZR SERIES
in (cm)
356-090 Swivel Flange Bracket for angle mounting as needed
3.88 (9.89) Mounting T-Bar Vinyl Grommet
4.0 (10.2) 1.70 (4.3) L
0.25 (0.64)
MODEL ST-FZR3 ST-FZR21 ST-FZR22 ST-FZR24 ST-FZR27 ST-FZR42 ST-FZR81 ST-FZR85 ST-FZR91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 averaging thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 averaging thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 averaging thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 averaging thermistor @ 77F (25C) Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 averaging thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 averaging thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 100 Room RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 Room RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 Room RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) INSERTION LENGTH 12 12'' length (30.48 cm) 18 18'' length (45.72 cm) 24 24'' length (60.96 cm) 36 36'' length (91.44 cm) QD Nylon insulated quick disconnect " X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG jacketed cable XCO " LB condulet fitting XCP25 25' (7.6m) non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed) XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XNB '' MNPT brass close nipple XNP '' MNPT plastic close nipple XW Weather resistant housing
12 Example: ST-FZR3-12 10,000 Type III averaging thermistor sensor with 12" (7.62m) probe and four sensing elements
TEMPERATURE
ST-FZR3
20
PAGE 1288 1281 1288 1279 1288 1277 229
356-090 T81PNR Series T81U Series T85PNR Series T85U Series T90PNR Series T91U Series UR
RELATED PRODUCTS Swivel flange bracket Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensor, track mounted Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1231
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Minco Continuous-resistance element ST-AV*R Platinum Curve Rigid Averaging Sensors provide accurate sensing of duct temperatures when a small, inaccessible area must be covered. They average temperatures over their entire length and terminate in a weather-resistant housing. They are available in 12", 18", 24", and 36" (30.5, 45.7, 61, and 91.4 cm) lengths. The sensor uses an element that closely matches platinum resistance/temperature characteristics over the specied range. It is available in 100 and 1000 385 curve and 1000 375 curve. The sensors have a brass case that is rigid for easy single-point mounting.
PLATINUM CURVE RIGID AVERAGING SENSORS ST-AV81R, ST-AV85R, ST-AV91R
NEW!
ST-AV91R-18
FEATURES
Continuous averaging Rigid sensor 12", 18", 24", 36" (30.5, 45.7, 61, and 91.4 cm) lengths 100 and 1000 385 curve Weather-resistant box
APPLICATION
Small ducts without access Mixed air chambers Hot/Cold deck discharge Face/Bypass discharge Unit vents
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy 0.27F (0.15C) Sensor Type 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 81 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 85 Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Range -50 to 275F (-45 to 135C) 12" (30.5 cm), 18" (45.7 cm), 24" (61 Sensor Length cm), 36" (91.4 cm) Sensitivity Type 81 0.21/F @ 32F (0C) Type 85, 91 2.1/F @ 32F (0C) Materials Of Construction 0.188" (4.8 mm) Brass Element Casing Enclosure Metal, weather-resistant Element diameter 0.188" (4.8 mm) Dimensions Wiring Terminations 22 AWG Teflon insulated, white/red Weight 12" 1.2 lb (0.54 Kg) 18" 1.4 lb (0.63 Kg) 24" 1.8 lb (0.82 Kg) 36" 2.1 lb (0.95 Kg) Warranty 3 years
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
20
in (cm)
2.0 (5.08)
4.5 (11.43)
1/2" NPT
4.5 (11.43)
0.25 (0.64)
0.188 (4.8 mm)
1.38 (3.49)
12 (30.5) 18 (45.7) 24 (61.0) 36 (91.4) 0.25 (0.635)
2.75 (6.99) 2.0 (5.08) Brass Averaging Probe
1232
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
PLATINUM CURVE RIGID AVERAGING SENSORS ST-AV81R, ST-AV85R, ST-AV91R
(white) (red)
356-090 Swivel Flange Bracket for angle mounting as needed
Supports typically not required
Transmitter can be mounted in the electrical box.
MODEL ST-AV81R ST-AV85R ST-AV91R
DESCRIPTION 100 385 rigid averaging duct probe 1000 385 rigid averaging duct probe 1000 375 rigid averaging duct probe INSERTION LENGTH 12 12" length 18 18" length 24 24" length 36 36" length WIRING OPTIONS XZ 3 wire (ST-AV81R only)
TEMPERATURE
356-090 T81PNR Series T81U Series T85PNR Series T85U Series T90PNR Series T91U Series
RELATED PRODUCTS Swivel flange bracket Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensor, track mounted
PAGE 1288 1281 1288 1279 1288 1277
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1233
TEMPERATURE
AVERAGING THERMISTOR SENSORS ST-FZ* SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-FZ Series Averaging Thermistor Sensor provides precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing elements are highly stable precision thermistor material accurate to within 0.36F (0.2C). The sensing elements are sealed in a 3/16" (0.48 cm) softdrawn copper coiled tube, attached to a standard handibox with mounting bracket attached.
NEW!
ST-FZ*
TM
FEATURES
Lifetime warranty 0.36F (0.2C) accuracy Wide selection of thermistor curves Adaptable to most duct sizes Easy to mount to duct wall 3/16" (0.48 cm) soft copper sensor Copper facilitates quick average temperature response
APPLICATION
The Model ST-FZ* is designed for direct mounting to sheet metal for average duct temperature sensing. The sensor is multi-point sensitive through the length of the temperature conductive tubing.The 8' (2.4 m) and 12.5' (3.8 m) models contain four sensing elements and the 25' (7.6 m) model has nine sensing elements. The thermistors are congured in a series/parallel method which creates an end result of total average resistance, equal to the same span as a standard thermistor, with a temperature range of 32 to 160F (0 to 71C).
OPTIONS
TEMPERATURE
8' (2.4m) long element for very small ducts 12.5' (3.8m) long element for small ducts 25' (7.6m) long element for larger ducts Weather resistant handy box
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Sensor Type 0.36F (0.2C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight 8' 12' 25' Warranty Directly to duct with back box, clips available for serpentine mounting 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG prestripped pigtails CE 1.25 lb (0.6 kg) 1.5 lb (0.7 kg) 2.3 lb (1.04 kg) Lifetime
20
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Stability 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Temperature Coefcient Negative temperature coefcient
1234
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MOUNTING
CC-1G-K Capillary Supports
MODEL ST-FZ3 ST-FZ21 ST-FZ22 ST-FZ24 ST-FZ27 ST-FZ42
ST-FZ3 25
TEMPERATURE
AVERAGING THERMISTOR SENSORS ST-FZ* SERIES
DIMENSIONS
Drill a 5/8" (1.6 cm) hole for probe insertion and serpentine the sensor across the duct, turning at each end using the Model M-648 end clip and Model M-633 mid-duct support. Avoid kinking the tube as this could cause a short circuit. Using the provided #6 screws, secure the box to the duct either with the mounting ears or through the box holes.
in (cm)
2.25 (5.72) 8, 12.5, or 25' (2.44, 3.81, or 7.62m)
5/8" (1.6 cm) hole
4.25 (10.80) 3/16" (0.47) Tubing
Front View
Side View
DESCRIPTION 10,000 averaging thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 averaging thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 averaging thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 averaging thermistor @ 77F (25C) Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 averaging thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 averaging thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) SENSING ELEMENT 8 8' (2.44m) probe length, four elements total 12 12.5' (3.81m) probe length, four elements total 25 25' (7.62m) probe length, nine elements total QD Nylon insulated quick disconnect " X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG jacketed cable XCO " LB condulet fitting XCP25 25' (7.6m) non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable XLT Liquid-tight fitting (factory installed) XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) XNB '' MNPT brass close nipple XNP '' MNPT plastic close nipple XW Weather resistant housing
Example: ST-FZ3-25 10,000 Type III averaging thermistor sensor with 25' (7.62m) probe and nine sensing elements
TEMPERATURE
20
CC-1G-K M-633 M-648-K UR
RELATED PRODUCTS Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip Copper-plated capillary mounting mid-duct support Copper-clad capillary mounting clip Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1391 908 1391 229
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1235
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION The Minco continuous-resistance element 100 and 1000 Platinum Curve Averaging RTD Sensors provide accurate sensing of duct temperatures when a large area must be covered. They average temperatures over their entire length and terminate in a weather resistant housing.The averaging sensors use elements that closely match platinum resistance/temperature characteristics over the specied range.The sensors have copper cases that are bendable to a radius of 4" (10.2 cm), and they can crisscross a duct or plenum to average out temperature stratication.
100 & 1000 OHM PLATINUM CURVE AVERAGING SENSORS ST-AV81H, ST-AV85H
NEW!
CC-1G-K ST-AV85H
FEATURES
Continuous averaging Flexible copper probe 12' (3.7m), 24' (7.3 m) or 50' (15.2 m) lengths Weather resistant box 100 or 1,000 ohm 385 sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Sensor Type Type 81 Type 85 Temperature Range Sensitivity Type 81 Type 85 Sensor Length/Weight Element Casing Enclosure Wiring Terminations Warranty 0.27F (0.15C) 100 0.25% @ 32F (0C) 1000 0.25% @ 32F (0C) -40 to 240F (-40 to 115C) 0.217/F @ 32F (0C) 2.17/F @ 32F (0C) 12 ft (3.7m); 1.3 lb (0.59 Kg) 24 ft (7.3m); 1.95 lb (0.88 Kg) 50 ft (15.24m); 3.6 lb (1.6 Kg) Copper 0.19" dia (0.48 cm) Weather resistant 22 AWG, Teflon insulated 3 years
TYPICAL APPLICATION
TEMPERATURE
CC-1G-K Capillary Mounting Clip
MODEL ST-AV81H ST-AV81H12 ST-AV81H50 ST-AV85H ST-AV85H12 ST-AV85H50 ST-AV81H DESCRIPTION 100 averaging duct sensor 24' (7.3m), 385 platinum curve 100 averaging duct sensor 12' (3.7m), 385 platinum curve 100 averaging duct sensor 50' (15.2m), 385 platinum curve 1000 averaging sensor 24' (7.3m), 385 platinum curve 1000 averaging sensor 12' (3.7m), 385 platinum curve 1000 averaging sensor 50' (15.2m), 385 platinum curve XZ Three-wire option (100 sensor only; Type 81) Example: ST-AV81H 100 385 platinum averaging duct sensor with 24' (7.3m) element
20
CC-1G-K M-648-K T81PNR Series T81U Series T85PNR Series T85U Series
RELATED PRODUCTS Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip Copper-clad capillary mounting clip Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted
PAGE 1391 1391 1288 1281 1288 1279
1236
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Continuous averaging Flexible copper probe 12' (3.7m), 24' (7.3 m) or 50' (15.2 m) lengths Weather resistant box 1,000 ohm 375 sensor
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM AVERAGING SENSORS ST-AV91H
The Minco continuous resistance element ST-AV91H 1000 375 Platinum Averaging RTD Sensors provide accurate sensing of duct temperatures when a large area must be covered. Temperatures are averaged over the entire length and terminate in a weather resistant housing. The ST-AV91H uses an element that closely matches platinum resistance/temperature characteristics over the specied range. The sensors have a copper case that is bendable to a radius of 4" (10.2 cm). They can crisscross a duct or plenum to average out temperature stratication.
CC-1G-K
ST-AV91H
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy 0.54F (0.30C) Sensor Type 1000 0.25% @ 32F (0C) Temperature Range -40 to 240F (-40 to 115C) Temperature Coefcient 0.00375//C platinum curve Sensitivity 2.1/F @ 32F (0C) Operating Temperature -40 to 240F (-40 to 115C) Element Casing Copper 0.19" dia. (0.48 cm) Sensor Length/Weight 24 ft (7.3m); 1.95 lb (0.88 Kg) 12 ft (3.7m); 1.31 lb (0.59 Kg) 50 ft (15.2m); 3.6 lb (1.63 Kg) Enclosure Metal, weather resistant Warranty 3 years
DIMENSIONS
TEMPERATURE
MODEL ST-AV91H-12 ST-AV91H50 ST-AV91H CC-1G-K M-648-K T90PNR Series T91U Series DESCRIPTION Platinum averaging duct sensor 12' (3.7m) Platinum averaging duct sensor 50' (15.2m) Platinum averaging duct sensor 24' (7.3m) RELATED PRODUCTS Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip Copper-clad capillary mounting clip Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensor, track mounted PAGE 1391 1391 1288 1277
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1237
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The ACI Series Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specically for HVAC system temperature control. The averaging sensors come in thermistor and RTD sensor curves compatible with most BAS systems available today. Averaging sensors come with a foambacked handy box and in 12' (3.7m) or 24' (7.3) lengths. The ACI Averaging Sensor should be mounted across a duct in a serpentine fashion with bends in a smooth ark using an M-648-K or CC-1G-K clip. The RTD probe is sensitive for the entire length, while the thermistor is sensitive at nine evenly spaced sensor locations. Use standard metal screws to secure to the duct. FEATURES Lengths of 12' (3.7 m) or 24' (7.3 m) Two-year warranty Bendable copper
AVERAGING TEMPERATURE SENSORS ACI AVERAGING SERIES
NEW!
A/AN-A-12-GD
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Temperature Range Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty 0.36F (0.2C) 0.5F (0.4C) 10 k, 20 k, 100 k 100, 1000 385 curve -40 to 275F (-40 to 135C) 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.1C drift Thermistor, 3 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Galvanized metal box, plastic and NEMA4X available 10" of 22 AWG wire or terminal strip CE 1.2 lb (0.54 kg) 5 years
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
D 8" (20.3 cm) A12 12' (3.6 m) A24 24' (7.3 m) 0.125 (0.3) Foam Insulation
1.70 (4.3) 0.90 (2.3)
TEMPERATURE
0.76 (1.9) (10.2)
4.0
A/*-A-X-60 Averaging
20
MODEL A/AN-A-12-GD A/CP-A-12-GD A/20K-A-12-GD A/100-2W-A-12-GD A/1K-2W-A-12-GD
DESCRIPTION Averaging sensor with 12' (3.6 m) length, 10 k thermistor, Type 3 (ACI/AN-A12) Averaging sensor with 12' (3.6 m) length, 10 k thermistor, Type 2 (ACI/CP-A12) Averaging sensor with 12' (3.6 m) length, 10 k thermistor, Type 42 (ACI/20K-A12) Averaging sensor with 12' (3.6 m) length, 1 k RTD 385 curve, two-wire (ACI/100-2-A12) Averaging sensor with 12" (3.6 m) length, 1 k RTD 385 curve, two-wire (ACI/1000-2-A12)
CC-1G-K T85PNR Series T85U Series UR
RELATED PRODUCTS Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensors, cover mounted Temperature transmitter for type 85, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1391 1288 1279 229
1238
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.55F (0.30C)
TEMPERATURE
AVERAGING THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS BA/ AVERAGING SERIES
The BAPI BA Series Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensors are availible in a variety of easy to mount installation types. They come in thermistor and RTD sensors and feature etched Teflon leadwires. Flexible probes are made of bendable aluminum while the rigid probes are made of stainless steel.
BA/10K2-A8-BB4
Flexible averaging lengths: 8' (2.4m), 12 (3.7m) and 24 (7.3m) Several enclosure styles with mounting tabs for easy installation Limited lifetime warranty
BA/10K2-A8-JB
BA/10K2-A8-NB
Enclosure NB JB BB
10 k Type II & III 100,1000, 385 curve; 1000, 375 curve Temperature Range 32 to 158F (-0 to 70C) Stability < 0.036F (0.02C) per year, 0.14C with 6,000 continuous hours at 400C Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power need to raise the temperature 1C), 0.4C/mW at 0C
No box with 18" leads 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts BAPI Box IP66 rated, NEMA 4 UV-resistant polycarbonate BB2 BAPI Box 2 IP66 rated, NEMA 4 UV-resistant polycarbonate BB4 BAPI Box 4 IP44 Nylon & Plastic WP NEMA 3R cast aluminum Mounting Directly to Duct, with clips to mount coil Wiring Terminations 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads Approvals CE, RoHS Weight 1 to 2 lbs (Varies with probe length) Warranty Lifetime
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
20
BA/10K2-A8-BB2
BA10K2-A8-BB4 BA/10K2-A8-BB
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1239
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
AVERAGING THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS BA/ AVERAGING SERIES
NEW!
BA/10K2-A8-WP
BA/10K2-A8-JB BA/10K2-A8-NB
MODEL BA/ DESCRIPTION Probe temperature sensor REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE 10K2 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type 2 10K3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type 3 100 100 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K375 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 375 curve REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH A8 Flexible averaging probe 8' long A12 Flexible averaging probe 12' long A24 Flexible averaging probe 24' long RA12 Rigid averaging probe 12" long RA2 Rigid averaging probe 24" long RA4 Rigid averaging probe 48" long REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE (JB is standard) NB No box with 18" leads JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts BB NEMA 4 weatherproof, UV resistant plastic BB2 IP66 UV resistant polycarbonate enclosure BB4 IP66 UV resistant polycarbonate enclosure WP NEMA 3R weatherproof enclosure
10K3 A8 JB Example: BA/10K3-A8-JB BAPI 8" averaging 10,000 thermistor sensor with JB box
20
TEMPERATURE
BA/
T85U-XR T81U-XR T91U-XR CC-1G-K M-648-K
RELATED PRODUCTS 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip Copper-clad capillary mounting clip
PAGE 1279 1281 1277 1391 1391
1240
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Plenum rated or Metallic Armored cable Weather proof box Variety of thermistors and RTDs 6' (1.8m), 12' (3.6m) and 24' (7.2m) lengths
TEMPERATURE
FLEXIBLE PLENUM AND ARMORED AVERAGING THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS TE707C SERIES
The Mamac Systems Model TE707C Flexible Plenum and Armored Averaging Temperature Sensors provides accurate temperature sensing for ducts when large areas must be covered in building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation.The flexible sensors are easy to install and are moisture sealed. The sensors can come in lengths of 6', 12' or 24'.
TE-707C
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Platinum Nickel/Balco Sensor Type Thermistor 0.36F (0.2C) 0.1% 0.5F (0.3C)
DIMENSIONS
2252, 3000, 10,000 Type II & III, 20,000, 100,000 100 Platinum 385 curve, 1,000 Platinum 385 curve RTD 100 Platinum 385 curve, 1,000 Platinum 385 curve, 1,000 Nickel, 1,000 Balco Element Casing Plenum rated cable or Metallic Armored cable Sensor Length/Weight Plenum 6 ft (1.8 m); 1.0 lb (0.45 Kg) 12 ft (3.6 m); 1.05 lb (0.48 Kg) 24 ft (7.2 m); 1.15 lb (0.51 Kg) Armored 6 ft (1.8 m); 1.23 lb (0.56 Kg) 12 ft (3.6 m); 1.45 lb (0.66 Kg) 24 ft (7.2 m); 1.91 lb (0.86 Kg) Operating Temperature -40 to 200F (-40 to 93C) Enclosure Metal, NEMA 4X Wiring Terminations 5" (15.2 cm) of 22 AWG pigtails Approvals CE, RoHs Warranty 5 years
TEMPERATURE
Sensor can be mounted in the electrical box.
MODEL TE707C DESCRIPTION Flexible averaging sensor with NEMA 4X enclosure OPTIONS 1 100 RTD @ 32F (0C); 385 Platinum curve (yellow leads) 3 1,000 RTD @ 32F (0C); 385 Platinum curve (red leads) 4 1,000 RTD @ 32F (0C); Nickel (voilet leads) 5 1,000 RTD @ 32F (0C); Balco (brown leads) 7 10,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); Type III (green leads) 10 3,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); (black leads) 12 10,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); Type II (green & red leads) 15 100,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); (orange & black leads) 17 20,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); (green & blue leads) 18 2,252 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); (red & yellow leads) A 6 foot (1.8 m) B 12 foot (3.6 m) C 24 foot (7.2 m) 1 Plenum rated cable 2 Armorer cable
20
TE707C
12
Example: TE707C-12-A-1 10,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); Type III (green leads), 6 foot (1.8 m), plenum rated cable.
T85U-XR T81U-XR CC-1G-K M-648-K
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391 Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1241
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Greystone Energy Systems TE200FDC Series Flexible Averaging Thermistor and RTD Sensor provides accurate temperature sensing for ducts when large areas must be covered in building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation.The flexible sensors are easy to install and are moisture sealed. The sensors can come in lengths of 6', 12', 20' or 24'.
FLEXIBLE AVERAGING THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS TE200FDC SERIES
NEW!
TE200FDC
FEATURES
Plenum rated cable Weather proof box Variety of thermistors and RTDs 6' (1.8m), 12' (3.6m), 20' (6.1m) and 24' (7.2m) lengths
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Platinum Nickel Sensor Type Thermistor 0.36F (0.2C) 0.54F (0.3C) 0.72F (0.4C)
DIMENSIONS
TEMPERATURE
2252, 3000, 10,000 Type II & III, 20,000 100 Platinum 385 curve, 1,000 Platinum 385 curve, 1,000 Nickel, 1,000 Balco Sensor Length/ Weight 6 ft (1.8 m); 0.5 lb (0.22 Kg) 12 ft (3.6 m); 0.61 lb (0.27 Kg) 20 ft (6.1 m); 0.71 lb (0.32 Kg) 24 ft (7.2 m); 0.81 lb (0.36 Kg) Operating Temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Enclosure Metal, NEMA 4X Approvals CE, RoHs Warranty 1 year
Sensor can be mounted in the electrical box.
MODEL DESCRIPTION TE200FDC Flexible averaging sensor with NEMA 3R enclosure OPTIONS 2 100 RTD @ 32F (0C); 385 Platinum curve (red, red, white leads) 12 1,000 RTD @ 32F (0C); 385 Platinum curve (gray leads) 13 1,000 RTD @ 32F (0C); Nickel (gray leads) 5 1,000 RTD @ 32F (0C); Balco (???? leads) 7 10,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); Type III (light gray leads) 6 3,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); (light blue leads) 24 10,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); Type II (yellow leads) 20 20,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); (green leads) 8 2,252 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); (gray leads) A 6 foot (1.8 m) B 12 foot (3.6 m) C 20 foot (6.1 m) D 24 foot (7.2 m)
20
TE200FDC
12
Example: TE200FDC-12-A 1,000 RTD @ 32F (0C); 385 platinum curve (gray leads), 6 foot (1.8 m).
T85U-XR T81U-XR CC-1G-K M-648-K
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip 1391 Copper-clad capillary mounting clip 1391
1242
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Averaging sensor and freeze stat in one sensor Solid state technology Mounts in any direction Ultra exible Power loss detection Field adjustable Digital alarms signal
TEMPERATURE
COMBINATION AVERAGING SENSOR/FREEZESTAT AS103759
The Minco AS103759 Chill Out combination sensor is a solid state low temperature cutout and duct averaging sensor all within one product. The AS103759 Series sensor provides a digital alarm contact and a 1000 385 platinum resistance curve for accurate monitoring of your duct conditions. The solid state design and the 3/8" tubing eliminate concerns of gas leaks or kinking the capillary during installation. The AS103759 Series Sensor features a ultra flexible plenumrated PVC coated galvanized steel armor sensor case. Switch points are factory set at 38F (3.3C) but are easliy eld adjustable. Upon a power loss the AS103759 Series Sensor reverts to its normal state.
AS103759
DIMENSIONS
2.5 REF Varies by model
0.375
- 14 NPSM (Z)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Accuracy Sensor Casing Sensor Type Sensor Length Alarm Contacts Alarm Relay Setpoint Maximum Output Impedance 24V VAC/VDC 0.9F (0.5C) PVC coated flexible galvanized steel 1000 RTD Pt 385 curve 10' (3.1 m), 24' (7.3 m), 50' (15.2 m) 0.3 A at 125 VAC, Max. Voltage 125 VAC, or 1A at 30 VDC, Max. Voltage 110 VDC 30 to 44F (-1.1 to 6.7C) 635 Optional Relay Output Rating Enclosure Wiring Terminations Warranty 25 A at 277 VAC 25 A at 120 VAC 1 HP at 120 VAC 2 HP at 277 VAC Metal handy box, 2" x 4", 4", x 4", or 2" x 4" weather resistant AWG 18 leadwires, 3/4-14 NPSM (Z) electrical connection 3 years
TEMPERATURE
WIRING
SET POINT ADJUSTMENT LED RESET SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
110 VAC OUTPUT (H)

SET POINT ADJUSTMENT 8 HOT 6 4 2 RESET SWITCH (OPTIONAL) LED
20
HOT
110 VAC
NEUTRAL
0
TEMPERATURE SENSOR [RED] TEMPERATURE SENSOR [RED] ALARM OUTPUT, NC [BLUE] ALARM OUTPUT, NO [ORANGE] 24VAC (N) [BLACK] 24VAC (H) [WHITE]
TEMPERATURE SENSOR [RED] TEMPERATURE SENSOR [RED] ALARM OUTPUT [BLUE] (NC CONTACT, OPENS WHEN POWER APPLIED) ALARM OUTPUT [ORANGE] (NO CONTACT, CLOSES WHEN POWER APPLIED) 24VAC (COM) [BLACK] 24VAC [WHITE]
CONTACT 1
110 VAC OUTPUT (N)

NEUTRAL
24 VAC or 24 VDC
HOT
CONTACT 2, 3
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1243
TEMPERATURE
COMBINATION AVERAGING SENSOR/FREEZESTAT AS103759

MODEL AS103759PF
DESCRIPTION Chill Out combination avearging sensor (1000 ohm 385 RTD) and freeze stat RELAY TYPE N Non-latching relay (auto reset) L Latching relay (manual reset) E Latching relay (remote reset) ELEMENT LENGTH 10 10 (3.1m) 24 24 (7.3m) 50 50 (15.2m) CONTACT RATING 1 0.3 A relay rating 2 25 A VAC powered controller/coil 3 25 A VDC powered controller/coil ENCLOSURE STYLE N No enclosure S Standard handy box (2" x 4") L Dougle gang handy box (4" x 4") W Weather resistant utility box (2" x 4")
NEW!
PAGE 994 979 995
20
TEMPERATURE
DCPA-1.2 691-K0A TE-6001-8 DCP-1.5-W
RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2 Duct temperature element holder without box Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT
1244
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Three-year warranty Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Adaptable miniature sensor High heat dissipation constant Easy to mount with clips Pre-aged, highly stable thermistor material
TEMPERATURE
ENCAPSULATED THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR KTM*, KTMR* SERIES
The Kele KTM, KTMR Series Thermistor and RTD encapsulated sensors provide remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing element is a highly stable thermistor material or platinum RTD. KTM*
The sensor is encapsulated with a low mass, high conductivity compound for good heat transfer characteristics. It is enclosed in a tough, miniature cylinder, 0.17" (0.43 cm) in diameter, which is small enough to be installed in most HVAC thermostat enclosures.
KTM*R
APPLICATION
KTM* The KTM* Series Encapsulated Sensor (white) is intended for indoor use only, in areas not subject to moisture or condensation. The sensor may be installed under the cover of an existing pneumatic thermostat. Caution should be exercised when applying the sensor to existing electric thermostats. Heat is often generated by anticipators or other electronics that will affect the sensor reading. The sensor operating range is 35 to 140F (2 to 60C). Do not use in conditions below 35F (2C) or where condensation could occur. KTM*R The KTM*R Series Rugged Encapsulated Sensor (red) is suitable for temperature extremes and is immune to the effects of moisture and condensation. Precon uses a threestage, rugged coating process to moistureproof any sensor which is to be used below ambient dewpoint. The sensor operating range is -30 to 230F (-34 to 110C). Vibration or wire stress below 32F (0C) can cause the rugged coating to crack.
OPTIONS
25' (7.6m) of 24 AWG zipcord Matched sensor pairs Rugged sensor coating
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor 0.50F (0.28C) 0.60F (0.33C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight KTM KTMR Warranty 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years 100% (no drift platinum) 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) Directly to wall or customer supplied enclosure using customer-supplied clips 8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81 sensors have 18" leads CE 0.01 lb (0.005 Kg) 0.05 lb (0.02 Kg) 3 years
20
RTD Type 81 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 85 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1245
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
ENCAPSULATED THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR KTM*, KTMR* SERIES
Mounting Secure to enclosure or wall using cable ties, clips, or brackets. To obtain optimum performance, the sensor enclosure/assembly must be highly conductive. Any sensor element surrounded by insulating media will not Vents perform properly at all temperatures or with the proper temperature response times. An accurate room sensor must have good ventilation and a high thermal-conducting metal which is in direct contact with the sensor. The enclosure must be insulated from the building mounting surface to limit wall temperature influence on the sensor.
NEW!
Customer-Supplied Enclosure Rear View
0.18 (0.46) 0.5 (1.27) 3.5 (8.89) R Option Rugged Coating
Aluminum Mounting Clip Accessory PN-46
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
24 AWG, 8' (2.4m) zipcord lead wire 0.17 (0.43) 0.5 (1.27)
24 AWG, 8' (2.4m) zipcord lead wire
KTM*
KTMR*
MODEL KTM3 KTM21 KTM22 KTM24 KTM27 KTM42 KTM81 KTM85 KTM91
20
KTM3
DESCRIPTION 10,000 encapsulated thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 encapsulated thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 encapsulated thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 encapsulated thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 encapsulated thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 encapsulated thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 100 encapsulated RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 encapsulated RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 encapsulated RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS R Rugged (3.5" moistureproof coating; adding a # following the R extends the coating in feet) QD Nylon insulated quick disconnect X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F (0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F (0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F (0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XZ Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71) R X25
Example: KTM3R-X25 10,000 Type III thermistor with 3.5" rugged coating and 25' (7.6m) cable length
TEMPERATURE
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
1246
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Lifetime warranty Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Adaptable miniature sensor High heat dissipation constant Easy to mount with clips Pre-aged, highly stable thermistor material
TEMPERATURE
ENCAPSULATED THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-R*, ST-R*R SERIES
TM
The PreCon ST-R*, ST-R*R Thermistor and RTD encapsulated Sensors provide precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing element is a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.
ST-R*
The sensor is encapsulated with a low mass, high conductivity compound for good heat transfer characteristics. It is enclosed in a tough, miniature cylinder, 0.17" in (0.43 cm) diameter, which is small enough to be installed in most HVAC thermostat enclosures.
ST-R*R
APPLICATION
ST-R* The Model ST-R* Encapsulated Thermistor Sensor (white) is intended for indoor use only, in areas not subject to moisture or condensation. The sensor may be installed under the cover of an existing pneumatic thermostat. Caution should be exercised when applying the sensor to existing electric thermostats. Heat is often generated by anticipators or other electronics that will affect the sensor reading. The sensor operating range is 35 to 140F (2 to 60C). Do not use in conditions below 35F (2C) or where condensation could occur. ST-R*R The Model ST-R*R Ruggedized Encapsulated Thermistor Sensor (red) is suitable for temperature extremes and is immune to the effects of moisture and condensation. PreCon uses a three-stage, ruggedized coating process to moisture proof any sensor which is to be used below ambient dewpoint. The sensor operating range is -30 to 230F (-34 to 110C).
OPTIONS
25' (7.6m) of 24 AWG zipcord Matched sensor pairs Rugged sensor coating
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor 0.36F (0.28C) RTD Type 63 0.72F (0.40C) Type 71 0.054F (0.03C) Type 81, 85 0.27F (0.15C) Type 91 0.54F (0.30C) Sensor Type Thermistor 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k RTD Type 63 Type 71, 81 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 85 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient March 2014 Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD 100% (no drift platinum) Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) Mounting Directly to wall or customer supplied enclosure using customer-supplied clips Wiring Terminations 8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads Approvals CE Weight ST-R* 0.01 lb (0.005 Kg) ST-R*R 0.05 lb (0.02 Kg) Warranty Lifetime
20
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1247
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
ENCAPSULATED THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-R*, ST-R*R SERIES
Mounting Secure to enclosure or wall using cable ties, clips, or brackets. To obtain optimum performance, the sensor enclosure/assembly must be highly conductive. Any sensor element surrounded by insulating media will not Vents perform properly at all temperatures or with the proper temperature response times. An accurate room sensor must have good ventilation and a high thermal-conducting metal which is in direct contact with the sensor. The enclosure must be insulated from the building mounting surface to limit wall temperature influence on the sensor.
NEW!
Customer-Supplied Enclosure Rear View
0.18 (0.46) 0.5 (1.27) 3.5 (8.89) R Option Rugged Coating
Aluminum Mounting Clip Accessory PN-46
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
24 AWG, 8' (2.4m) zipcord lead wire 0.17 (0.43) 0.5 (1.27)
24 AWG, 8' (2.4m) zipcord lead wire
KTM*
MODEL ST-R3 ST-R21 ST-R22 ST-R24 ST-R27 ST-R42 ST-R63 ST-R71 ST-R81 ST-R85 ST-R91
KTMR*
20
DESCRIPTION 10,000 encapsulated thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 encapsulated thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 encapsulated thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 encapsulated thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 encapsulated thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 encapsulated thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 nickel encapsulated RTD @ 70F (21C), (yellow leads) 100 ultra high accurate encapsulated RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 100 encapsulated RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 encapsulated RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 encapsulated RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS R Rugged (3.5" moistureproof coating; adding a # following the R extends the coating in feet) Nylon insulated quick disconnect " QD X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F (0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F (0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F (0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XZ Three wire RTD connections (Optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71) R X25
Example: ST-R3R-X25 10,000 Type III thermistor with 3.5" rugged coating and 25' (7.6m) cable length
TEMPERATURE
ST-R3
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277
1248
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 81,85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 81 Type 85 Type 91 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.27F (0.1C) 0.054F (0.03C) 1000 Nickel 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve
MODEL KTMP3 KTMP21 KTMP22 KTMP24 KTMP27 KTMP42 KTMP81 KTMP85 KTMP91 KT-MP3
TEMPERATURE
MINI PROBE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR KTMP* SERIES
The Kele KTMP* Series Thermistor and RTD temperature probe is designed for applications requiring a small sensor with a fast thermal response. Constructed with stainless steel housing, the probe is available with a choice of several thermistor and RTD sensor curves. FEATURES Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Fast response time 0.19" round x 0.50" long (0.48 x 1.27 cm) housing
KTMP*
2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k
Temperature Range -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Thermistor/RTD Temperature Coefcient Negative temperature coefcient Thermistor Positive temperature coefcient RTD Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years RTD 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise Heat Dissipation the temperature 1C) Directly to surface Mounting Wiring Terminations 8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81 sensors have 18" leads CE Approvals Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) 3 years Warranty
DESCRIPTION 10,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 mini probe thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (green leads) 3000 mini probe thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (blue leads) 10,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (yellow leads) 100,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (gray leads) 20,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (green leads) 100 mini probe RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 Platinum Curve (yellow leads) 1000 mini probe RTD @32F (0C), 385 Platinum Curve (blue leads) 1000 mini probe RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 Platinum Curve (green leads) OPTIONS R Rugged moistureproof coating 3.5" R# Rugged moistureproof coating. # equals number of feet of the coating X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F (0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F (0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F (0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XZ Three wire RTD connections (Type 81 only) XN1 Example: KT-MP3-XN1 10,000 mini probe sensor with NIST one reference point certificate
TEMPERATURE
20
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277 TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1249
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-MP* Series Thermistor and RTD temperature probe is designed for applications requiring a small sensor with a fast thermal response. Constructed with stainless steel housing, the probe is available with a choice of several thermistor and RTD sensor curves.
MINI PROBE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR ST-MP* SERIES
FEATURES
Lifetime warranty Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Fast response time 0.19" round x 0.50" long (0.48 x 1.27 cm) housing
NEW!
ST-MP*
Temperature Coefcient Thermistor RTD Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Mounting Wiring Terminations Negative temperature coefcient Positive temperature coefcient 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.09F (0.05C)over 5 years 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Directly to surface 24 AWG, UL low voltage to 105C Connections 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG prestripped pigtails, type 71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads CE 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Lifetime Approvals Weight Warranty
TM
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 81,85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.05F (0.03C) 2.252 k, 3, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 1000 Nickel 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C)
TEMPERATURE
MODEL ST-MP3 ST-MP21 ST-MP22 ST-MP24 ST-MP27 ST-MP42 ST-MP63 ST-MP71 ST-MP81 ST-MP85 ST-MP91 DESCRIPTION 10,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 mini probe thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (green leads) 3000 mini probe thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (blue leads) 10,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (yellow leads) 100,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (gray leads) 20,000 mini probe thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (green leads) 1000 nickel mini probe RTD @ 70F (26C), Type III (yellow leads) (not available in this style) 100 mini probe RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 Platinum Curve (yellow leads) 1000 mini probe RTD @32F (0C), 385 Platinum Curve (blue leads) 1000 mini probe RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 Platinum Curve (green leads) OPTIONS R Rugged moistureproof coating 3.5" R# Rugged moistureproof coating. # equals number of feet of the coating X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F (0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F (0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F (0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XZ Three wire RTD connections (Type 81 only) XN1 Example: ST-MP3-XN1 10,000 mini probe sensor with NIST one reference point certificate
20
ST-MP3
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE T81U-XR 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 T85U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 T91U-XR 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277 TCC-12 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
1250
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION APPLICATION SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor 0.50F (0.28C) 0.60F (0.33C)
TEMPERATURE
STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR KTM*S, KTM*SC SERIES
The Kele Stainless Steel Sheath Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation.
KTM*SC KTM*S
The active sensing element is a highly stable thermistor material or platinum RTD. The sensing element is rugged and sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a versatile 3" (7.6 cm)- long stainless steel tube. The probe is waterproof, and the sensor is ideal for use in refrigeration cases or as a strap-on sensor for pipes. KTM*S The KTM*S Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors are suitable for direct application to pipe surfaces for chilled or hot water measurement. They are also used for freezer cases where moisture protection is important. These rugged strap-on sensors come with 8' (2.4m), 24-gauge zipcord leads.
KTM*SC The KTM*SC Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors come with a rugged, 25' (7.6m) cable that allows for termination away from areas of condensation. It is an ideal choice for freezer case applications.
FEATURES
Three-year warranty Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Tip sensitive for precise temperature response Durable 304 stainless steel casing Easy to mount to wall, box, or pipe Waterproof probe
TEMPERATURE
Strap-on Applications: Where it is not practical to install immersion wells, the Stainless Steel Sheath Sensors may be strapped to the pipe. The -C option provides a 25' (7.6m) rugged cable that may be strapped on the outside of the pipe insulation. Pipe strap accessory (APB-28) provides a bracket under the insulation to hold the sensor securely in place.
Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight KTM*S KTM*SC Warranty
2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k
0.24F (0.13C) over ve years 100% (no drift platinum) 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature 1C) Directly to wall or customer supplied enclosure using customer-supplied clips 8', 24 AWG wire leads, type 81 sensors have 18" leads CE 0.15 lb (0.07 Kg) 0.45 lb (0.2 Kg) 3 years
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1251
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
Mounting Secure to wall or pipe using cable ties, clips, or brackets. Wiring Terminate with butt splices or solder connections. Wire nuts are not recommended.
Tie Rap or Adjustable Pipe Bracket
STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR KTM*S, KTM*SC SERIES
DIMENSIONS
NEW!
in (cm)
0.25 (0.64) 3.0 (7.62) Stainless Tube
Polyolefin Sheath
When used as a strap-on sensor, best results are obtained when conductive compound (TCC-12) is applied between the sensor and the pipe. In addition, the sensor should be inserted under insulation with at least 2' (0.61m) on each side of the sensor. Adjustable pipe bracket APB-28 is available for use with this sensor.
MODEL KTM3S KTM21S KTM22S KTM24S KTM27S KTM42S KTM81S KTM85S KTM91S DESCRIPTION 10,000 stainless steel thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 stainless steel thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 stainless steel thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 stainless steel thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 stainless steel thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 stainless steel thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 100 stainless steel RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 stainless steel RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 stainless steel RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS C 25'(7.6m) 22 AWG cable non-pleum (not available with XZ option) QD Nylon insulated quick disconnect " X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG (KTM*S only) XCP25 25' (7.6m) Non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable (not with c models) XD Dual sensors in one probe (Not with "C" models) XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 60" XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F (0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F (0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F (0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XZ Three wire RTD connections (optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71,
not available with XC25 and XCP25)
20
KTM3S
TEMPERATURE
Example: KTM3S-C 10,000 stainless steel sheath thermistor
with 25' (7.6m) cable
#20 APB-28 PN-46 T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR TCC-111 TCC-12 UR
RELATED PRODUCTS Self-vulcanizing stretch tape, 6' (1.83m) roll, 1" (2.54 cm) wide Adjustable pipe bracket 2"-8" diameter Aluminum sensor holder with adhesive backing 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1391 1391 1281 1279 1277 1298 1298 229
1252
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
APPLICATION
TEMPERATURE
STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-R*S, ST-R*SC SERIES
TM
The PreCon Stainless Steel Sheath Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide precision remote temperature sensing for building automation systems and mechanical equipment room instrumentation. The active sensing element is a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD.The sensing element is ruggedized and sealed with a thermally conductive compound in a versatile 3" (7.6 cm) long stainless steel tube. The probe is waterproof, and the sensor is ideal for use in refrigeration cases, or as a strap-on sensor for pipes. ST-R*S The Model ST-R*S Stainless Sheath Sensor is suitable for direct application to pipe surfaces for chilled or hot water measurement. It is also used for freezer cases where moisture protection is important. This rugged strap-on sensor comes with an 8-ft (2.4m), 24-gauge zipcord lead. ST-R*SC The Model ST-R*SC Stainless Steel Sheath Sensor comes with a rugged 25-ft (7.6m) cable when ordered with the "C" option. The 25-ft (7.6m) cable allows for termination away from areas of condensation. It is an ideal choice for freezer case applications.
ST-R*SC ST-R*S
FEATURES Lifetime warranty Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Tip sensitive for precise temperature response Durable 304 stainless steel casing Easy to mount to wall, box, or pipe Waterproof probe
Strap-on Applications: Where it is not practical to install immersion wells, the Stainless Sheath Thermistor Sensor may be strapped to the pipe. The "C" option provides a 25' (7.6m) rugged cable that may be strapped on the outside of the pipe insulation. Pipe strap accessory (APB-28) provides a bracket to hold the sensor securely in place.
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71, 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 1000 Nickel 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Thermistor Negative temperature coefcient RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Mounting Directly to wall or pipe using standard clips and brackets Wiring Terminations 8' (2.4m) of 24 AWG pigtails with prestripped ends, Type 71 & 81 sensors have 18" leads Approvals CE Weight ST-R*S 0.15 lb (0.07 Kg) with no options ST-R*SC 0.45 lb (0.2 Kg) with no options Warranty Lifetime
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1253
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
Mounting Secure to wall or pipe using cable ties, clips, or brackets. Wiring Terminate with butt splices or solder connections. Wire nuts are not recommended.
Tie Rap or Adjustable Pipe Bracket
STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-R*S, ST-R*SC SERIES
DIMENSIONS
NEW!
in (cm)
0.25 (0.64) Polyolefin Sheath 3.0 (7.62) Stainless Tube
When used as a strap-on sensor, best results are obtained when conductive compound (TCC-12) is applied between the sensor and the pipe. In addition, the sensor should be inserted under insulation with at least 2' (0.61m) on each side of the sensor. Adjustable pipe bracket APB-28 is available for use with this sensor.
MODEL ST-R3S ST-R21S ST-R22S ST-R24S ST-R27S ST-R42S ST-R63S ST-R71S ST-R81S ST-R85S ST-R91S DESCRIPTION 10,000 stainless steel thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 stainless steel thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (green leads) 3000 stainless steel thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 stainless steel thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 stainless steel thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 stainless steel thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 nickel stainless steel RTD @ 70F (21C), (yellow leads) 100 ultra high accurate stainless steel RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 100 stainless steel RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (yellow leads) 1000 stainless steel RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 platinum curve (blue leads) 1000 stainless steel RTD @ 32F (0C), 375 platinum curve (green leads) OPTIONS C 25 (7.6m) 22 AWG cable non-plenum (not available with XZ option) QD Nylon insulated quick disconnect " X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XCP25 25' (7.6m) Non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable (not with c models) XD Dual sensors in one probe (Not with "C" models) XL Custom length insertion probes 1" to 60" XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F (0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F (0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F (0C/25C/70C) XP Matched sensor pair, matched to 0.1F, 0.05C (must order two sensors) XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XZ Three wire RTD connections (optional only on Type 81, standard on Type 71, not available with XC25 and XCP25) C
Example: ST-R3S-C 10,000 stainless steel sheath thermistor with 25' (7.6m) cable
20
ST-R3S
TEMPERATURE
#20 APB-28 PN-46 T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR TCC-111 TCC-12 UR
RELATED PRODUCTS Self-vulcanizing stretch tape, 6' (1.83m) roll, 1" (2.54 cm) wide Adjustable pipe bracket 2"-8" diameter Aluminum sensor holder with adhesive backing 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice
PAGE 1391 1391 1281 1279 1277 1298 1298 229
1254
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) RTD Type 63 1000 Nickel Type 71, 81 100 Pt 385 Curve Type 85 1000 Pt 385 Curve Type 91 1000 Pt 375 Curve
MODEL ST-STP3 ST-STP21 ST-STP22 ST-STP24 ST-STP27 ST-STP42 ST-STP63 ST-STP71 ST-STP81 ST-STP85 ST-STP91 ST-STP3 XW
Example:
TEMPERATURE
STRAP-ON THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-STP* SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Precon ST-STP* Thermistor and RTD Series strap-on sensor provides precision monitoring of a pipe surface temperature. The unique design features the sensor attached to a flexible copper plate that will conform to the pipe surface. The rubber pad provides spring tension plus surrounds the copper plate to eliminate the effects of ambient air temperature. FEATURES Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Adjustable steel straps t multiple pipe sizes Fexible copper plate conforms to pipe surface Copper plate is insulated from ambient air Lifetime warranty Ultra high accuracy optional
TM
ST-STP*
APPLICATION Strap-on Applications: Where it is not practical to install immersion wells, the ST-STP* Strap on Sensor is a great substitute. The copper plate at the bottom of the flexible rubber base assures good thermal conductivity to the sensor. The sensor is positioned directly behind and attached to the copper conduction plate. Each ST-STP* utilizes a metal threaded ring clamp to secure it to the pipe and models 6" and under include a pair of high strength zip ties as an optional mounting method. A small amount of thermal conducting compound (TCC-12) helps to ensure maximum conductivity.
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 4.0 (10.2) 1.70 (4.3) 1.50 (3.81)
1.00 (2.54)
2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k
Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years Enclosure Metal handy box Mounting Directly to pipe using adjustable straps, 6" pipe standard, 10" with option Wiring Terminations 8' (2.44m), 24 AWG zipcord using crimp or solder connection, type 71 & 81 have 18" leads Approvals CE Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Warranty Lifetime
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION 10,000 strap-on thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 strap-on thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (green leads) 3000 strap-on thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 strap-on thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 strap-on thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 strap-on thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 nickel strap-on RTD @ 70F (21C) (yellow leads) 100 strap-on RTD @ 32F (0C) (blue leads) 100 strap-on RTD @ 32F (0C) (yellow leads) 1000 strap-on RTD @32F (0C) (blue leads) 1000 strap-on RTD @ 32F (0C) (green leads) OPTIONS XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) XW Weather resistant housing X10 10" (25.4 cm) maximum pipe size ST-STP3-XW 10,000 strap-on thermistor sensor with weather resistant housing
20
T81U-XR T85U-XR T91U-XR TCC-111 TCC-12 UR
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298 Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1255
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The ACI Strap On Series Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specically for HVAC system temperature control. The strap-on sensors come in thermistor and RTD sensor curves compatible with most BAS systems available today. Strap-on sensors come with a handy box and stainless steel strap for 5" (12.7 cm) pipes. The ACI Strap-On Sensor mounts directly to a 2" to 5" (5.1 to 12.7 cm) pipe. Clean off any insulation or rust to promote solid contact of the copper plate to the pipe. Wrap and tighten the strap around the pipe and compress the foam fully for a rm mount. Faster response can be achieved by using TCC12 thermal conductive compound. FEATURES Fits pipes 2" to 5" (5.1 to 12.7 cm) Five-year warranty Stainless steel strap
STRAP-ON THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ACI STRAP-ON SERIES
NEW!
A/AN-S-GD
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Temperature Range Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Enclosure Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty 0.36F (0.2C) 0.50F (0.4C) 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 100, 1000 385 curve -40 to 302F (-40 to 150C) 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.1C drift Thermistor, 3 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Galvanized metal box 10" of 22 AWG wire or terminal strip RoHS, CE 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg) 5 years
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
4.0 (10.2) 1.9 (4.8) 1.5 x 1.5 (3.8 x 3.8) Foam Pad 5.0 (12.7) Worm Gear
TEMPERATURE
A/*-S Strap-On
MODEL A/AN-S-GD A/CP-S-GD A/20K-S-GD A/100K-S-GD A/100-2W-S-GD A/1K-2W-S-GD DESCRIPTION Strap-on sensor with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter strap, 10 k thermistor, Type 3 Strap-on sensor with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter strap, 10 k thermistor, Type 2 Strap-on sensor with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter strap, 20 k thermistor, Type 42 Strap-on sensor with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter strap, 100 k thermistor, Type 27 Strap-on sensor with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter strap, 100 RTD, 385 curve Strap-on sensor with 5" (12.7 cm) diameter strap, 1000 RTD, 385 curve
20
T85U-XR T81U-XR TCC-111 TCC-12
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub 1298 Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml 1298
1256
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Strap-on or clamp-on models Lifetime limited sensor warranty Wide selection of mounting styles
TEMPERATURE
STRAP-ON THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS BA/ STRAP-ON SERIES
The BAPI BA Strap-On Temperature Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed specically for HVAC systems to monitor water temperature in retrot or lled pipe applications. They t around the outside of a pipe and measure the water temperature by sensing the surface temperature of the pipe. They come in thermistor and RTD sensors and feature etched teflon leadwires to perform under real world conditions. BA/10K-2-STP-BB4
BA/10K-2-SB4
BA/10K-2-STP-JB BA/10K-2-S-JB
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor 0.36F (0.2C) RTD 0.55F (0.30C) Sensor Type Thermistor 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k RTD 100, 1000, 385 curve; 1000, 375 curve Temperature Range 32 to 158F (-0 to 70C) Stability Thermistor < 0.036F (0.02C) per year RTD 0.14C with 6,000 continuous hours at 400C Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power need to raise the temperature 1C), 0.4C/mW at 0C Enclosure JB BB BB2 BB4 Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight JB, BB4 BB, BB2 Warranty 2x4 steel handy box BAPI Box IP66 rated UV-resistant plastic enclosure BAPI Box 2 IP66 rated UV-resistant plastic enclosure BAPI Box 4 IP44 nylon and plastic enclosure Straps or Clamps to pipe 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads CE, RoHS 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Lifetime
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
20
BA/10K2-J-BB4 March 2014
BA/10K-2-S-JB
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1257
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
STRAP-ON THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS BA/ STRAP-ON SERIES
NEW!
BA/10K2-S-BB
BA/10K2-S-BB2
20
TEMPERATURE
MODEL BA/
DESCRIPTION Probe temperature sensor REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE 10K2 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 10K3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III 100 100 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K375 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 375 curve REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH S Clamp-on for 2" to 4" dia. pipe and 1.25" copper plate pad STP Spring-loaded for 5" to 14.5" dia. pipe and 1.25" copper plate pad REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE JB 2" x 4" J-box with 1/2" knockouts BB BAPI-Box - IP66, NEMA 4 UV resistant polycarbonate (Not available for spring-loaded units) BB2 BAPI-Box 2 - IP66, NEMA 4 UV resistant polycarbonate BB4 BAPI-Box 4 - IP44, nylon and plastic
10K2 S JB
BA/
with JB box
Example: BA/10K-2-S-JB BAPI Clamp-on 10,000 RTD thermistor
PAGE 1279 1281 1277
1258
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71, 81 Type 85 Type 91 Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 1000 Nickel 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C)
MODEL ST-TS3 ST-TS21 ST-TS22 ST-TS24 ST-TS27 ST-TS42 ST-TS63 ST-TS71 ST-TS81 ST-TS85 ST-TS91
TEMPERATURE
SUBMERSIBLE THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-TS* SERIES
DESCRIPTION The Precon ST-TS* Series Tank Thermistor and RTD Sensors provide precision remote temperature sensing for cooling tower tanks for use in building automation systems. The active sensing element is a highly stable precision thermistor material or platinum RTD. The sensing element is rugged and sealed in a thermally conductive compound. The housing is a standard brass immersion well that has the weight to keep the sensor submersed and is compatable for all liquids suitable with brass. Water resistant cable is used.
TM
ST-TS*
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1/2" NPT
FEATURES Lifetime warranty Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Brass thermowell for quick temperature response Water resistant cable Ultra high accuracy optional One piece design
4.94 (12.54)
3.25 (8.26)
0.5 (1.27)
5.13 (13.03)
ST-TS*
Temperature Coefcient Thermistor RTD Temperature Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight Warranty
Negative temperature coefcient Positive temperature coefcient 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Lower sensor into cooling tower tank, support cable at wiring box, use water proof connectors 8' (2.44m) 2 conductor for SJO 18/2 water resistant cable CE 0.8 lb (0.36 kg) Lifetime
2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION 10,000 tank sensor thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 tank sensor thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (green leads) 3000 tank sensor thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 tank sensor thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 tank sensor thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 tank sensor thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 nickel tank sensor RTD @ 70F (21C) (yellow leads) 100 tank sensor RTD @ 32F (0C) (blue leads) 100 tank sensor RTD @ 32F (0C) (yellow leads) 1000 tank sensor RTD @32F (0C) (blue leads) 1000 tank sensor RTD @ 32F (0C) (green leads) OPTIONS XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length cable XD Dual sensors XN1 NIST Certificate, one reference point 32F (0C) XN2 NIST Certificate, two reference point 32F (0C) XN3 NIST Certificate, three reference point 32F (0C) XP Matched pair XPA Ultra high accuracy, thermistors only, 0.135F (0.075C) S Stainless steel thermowell XN1
Example: ST-TS3-XN1 10,000 tank sensor thermistor with NIST one reference
20
ST-TS3
point certificate
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 1000 ohm, Type 91 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1277 Moisture-resistant three-wire butt splice 229
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1259
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Precon ST-L* Series Thermistor and RTD Ring Lug Sensors provide precision equipment temperature sensing for building automation systems. The active sensing element is made of a highly stable, precision thermistor material or platinum RTD. The ring lug design allows the sensor to be mounted to a bolt or stud to monitor equipment temperature. A common use is to monitor motor winding temperature by mounting to the motor housing. It comes in sizes to accommodate 1/4", 5/16" and 3/8" studs or bolts.
RING LUG THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSOR ST-L* SERIES
NEW!
ST-L* Temperature Range Thermistor/RTD -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) Temperature Coefcient Negative temperature coefcient Thermistor RTD Positive temperature coefcient Temperature Stability Thermistor 0.24F (0.13C) over ve years RTD <0.09F (0.05C) over 5 years Heat Dissipation 2.7 mW/C (power needed to raise the temperature by 1C) Mounting Directly to stud or bolt Wiring Terminations 24 AWG, UL low voltage to 105C Connections 8 (2.4m) of 24 AWG prestripped pigtails, type 71 & 81 sensors have 18 leads Approvals CE Weight 0.1 lb (0.05 kg) w/o options Warranty Lifetime
TM
FEATURES
Lifetime warranty Wide selection of thermistor and RTD curves Ring lug mounting for equipment monitoring Three stud sizes available Ultra high accuracy optional
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71 Type 81, 85 Type 91 Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Type 63 Type 71, 81 Type 85 Type 91 0.36F (0.2C) 0.72F (0.40C) 0.054F (0.03C) 0.27F (0.15C) 0.54F (0.30C) 2.252 k, 3 k, 10 k Type II & III, 20 k, 100 k 1000 Nickel 100 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 385 Curve 1000 Pt 375 Curve
20
TEMPERATURE
1260
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MODEL ST-L3 ST-L21 ST-L22 ST-L24 ST-L27 ST-L42 ST-L63 ST-L71 ST-L81 ST-L85 ST-L91 ST-L3 25 XN1 Example:
TEMPERATURE
RING LUG THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS ST-L* SERIES
DESCRIPTION 10,000 lug thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type III (gray leads) 2252 lug thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (green leads) 3000 lug thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (blue leads) 10,000 lug thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (yellow leads) 100,000 lug thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type II (gray leads) 20,000 lug thermistor @ 77F (26C), Type IV (green leads) 1000 nickel lug RTD @ 70F (21C) (yellow leads) 100 lug RTD @ 32F (0C) 385 Platinum Curve (blue leads) 100 lug RTD @ 32F (0C) 385 Platinum Curve (yellow leads) 1000 lug RTD @32F (0C) 385 Platinum Curve (blue leads) 1000 lug RTD @ 32F (0C) 375 Platinum Curve (green leads) OPTIONS 25 1/4" Stud Size 31 5/16" Stud size 38 3/8" Stud size XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) QD Nylon insulated quick disconnect " X25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG XC25 25' (7.6m) lead length 24 AWG jacketed cable XCP25 25' (7.6m) non-shielded 22AWG plenum cable XN NIST certificate of conformance XN1 NIST certificate, one reference point 32F(0C) XN2 NIST certificate, two reference points 32F/158F(0C/70C) XN3 NIST certificate, three reference points 32F/77F/158F(0C/25C/70C) ST-L3-25-XN1 10,000 mini probe sensor with NIST one reference point certificate
TEMPERATURE
PAGE 1279 1281 1277
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1261
TEMPERATURE
EXTREME TEMPERATURE SENSORS BA/*RPFEP SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Series Extreme Temperature Thermistor and RTD Sensors are designed for use in applications from -200 to 600C. The parts come with stainless steel probe and packages to handle moisture and wide temperature ranges.
FEATURES
Three watertight enclosure Limited Lifetime warranty
NEW!
BA/10K2RPFEP5BB BA/10K2RPFEP5BB2 BA/10K2RPFEP5BB4 Heat Dissipation Enclosure BB BB2 BB4 WP Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Weight RPFEP5 RPFEP10 RPFEP15 Warranty 2.7 mW/C (power need to raise the temperature 1C), 0.4C/mW at 0C BAPI Box-IP66, UV-resistant, polycarbonate BAPI Box 2-IP66, UV-resistant, polycarbonate BAPI Box 4-IP44, Nylon & plastic NEMA 3R, cast aluminum Directly to wall or pipe 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads CE, RoHS 0.55 lb (0.25 Kg) 0.6 lb (0.27 Kg) 0.65 lb (0.29 Kg) Lifetime
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Temperature Range Thermistor RTD 1002 1k1 1K3 Stability 0.36F (0.20C) 0.55F (0.30C) 10k, Type II & III 100, 1000 385 curve, 1000 375 curve -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) 212 to 410F (100 to 210C) -328 to 32F (-200 to 0C) 392 to 1112F (200 to 600C) <0.036F (0.02C) per year, 0.14C with 6,000 continuous hours at 400C
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
20
BA/10K2RPFEP5BB
BA/10K2RPFEP5BB2
1262
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
BA/10K2RPFEP5BB4
BA 1K1 RPFEP10 BB
TEMPERATURE
EXTREME TEMPERATURE SENSORS BA/*RPFEP SERIES
BA/10K2RPFEP5WP
MODEL DESCRIPTION BA Remote probe sensor REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE 10K2 10K thermistor @77F (25C), Type 2, -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) 10K3 10K thermistor @77F (25C), Type 3, -40 to 221F (-40 to 105C) 1002 100 ohm RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 curve, range 212 to 410F (100 to 210C) 1K1 1000 ohm RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 curve, range -328 to 32F (-200 to 0C) 1K2 1000 ohm RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 curve, range 212 to 410F (100 to 210C) 1K3 1000 ohm RTD @ 32F (0C), 385 curve, range 392 to 1,112F (200 to 600C) REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH RPFEP5 Sensor with 5' wire leads, PTFE jacketed cable for 1K3, fiberglass insulated for 10K2,10K3, 1002, 1K1 & 1K2 RPFEP10 Sensor with 10' wire leads, PTFE jacketed cable for 1K3, fiberglass insulated for 10K2,10K3, 1002, 1K1 & 1K2 RPFEP15 Sensor with 15' wire leads, PTFE jacketed cable for 1K3, fiberglass insulated for 10K2,10K3, 1002, 1K1 & 1K2 REQUIRED MOUNTING ENCLOSURE BB IP66, UV resistant BB2 IP66, UV resistant, polycarbonate BB4 IP66, UV resistant, nylon & plastic WP NEMA 3R weatherproof UV resistant enclosure Example: BA1K1RPFEP10BB 1000 ohm 385 curve-328 to 32F, with 10' fiberglass insulated leads and BAPI-box
TEMPERATURE
20
PAGE 1279 1281 1277
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1263
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The BAPI BA Series Thermobuffer Sensors are designed specically for freezers and coolers to simulate the temperature of the contents and not the air temperature. The fluid-lled chamber allows for slower reaction to abrupt temperature changes from opening or closing the cooler door. The Thermobuffer helps eliminate spikes and short cycling of refrigeration equipment.
THERMOBUFFER TEMPERATURE SENSORS BA/*-TB SERIES
NEW!
BA/10K2TBM3042HB BA/10K2TBM3044BB BA/10K2TBM3044BB2 Enclosure/Weight HB BB Hanging Bracket with 30" jacketed cable; 0.55lb (0.25 Kg) BAPI Box- IP66, UV-resistant polycarbonate; 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg) BAPI Box 2- IP66, UV-resistant polycarbonate; 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg) Directly to wall or with hanging bracket 22 AWG wire, etched teflon leads CE, RoHS Lifetime
FEATURES Fluid-lled to mimic core temperatures Decreases false high limit alarms Stainless steel or aluminum
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Sensor Type Thermistor RTD Temperature Range Stability Thermistor RTD Heat Dissipation 0.36F (0.2C) 0.55F (0.30C) 10k, Type II & III 100, 1000 385 curve, 1000 375 curve 32 to 158F (-0 to 70C) <0.036F (0.02C) per year 0.14 C with 6,000 continuous hours at 400C 0.4C/mW at 0C, 2.7 mW/C (power need to raise the temperature 1C)
20
BB2 Mounting Wiring Terminations Approvals Warranty
1264
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
THERMAL-THERMOBUFFER
MODEL BA/
BA/ 10K3 TB-M3044
TEMPERATURE
THERMOBUFFER TEMPERATURE SENSORS BA/*-TB SERIES
BB-THERMOBUFFER
BB2-THERMOBUFFER
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION Probe temperature sensor REQUIRED SENSOR TYPE 10K2 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type II 10K3 10,000 thermistor @ 77F (25C), Type III 100 100 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve 1K 1000 RTD @32F (0C), 385 curve REQUIRED PROBE TYPE AND LENGTH TB-M3042 Thermobuffer probe 2" long, 304 stainless chamber TB-M3044 Thermobuffer probe 4" long, 304 stainless chamber TB-MAL2 Thermobuffer probe 2" long, aluminum chamber TB-MAL4 Thermobuffer probe 4" long, aluminum chamber HB Hanging bracket with jacketed cable BB BAPI box NEMA 4X BB2 BAPI box 2 NEMA 4X
HB
20
Example: BA/100TBM3044HB Thermobuffer probe 100 RTD 385 curve, with hanging bracket and jacketed cable.
PAGE 1279 1281 1277
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1265
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Minco S241HC High Temperature RTD Sensor is directly inserted to monitor the temperature of boiler stacks, steam lines, and other applications where the temperature may rise above the operating range of standard sensors. When used with the TT111H-0800 Transmitter, a 4-20 mA output is provided that is linear from 0 to 800F (-18 to 427C).
HIGH TEMPERATURE SENSOR & TRANSMITTER S241HC, TT111H-0800
FEATURES
All stainless steel probe 24" high temperature leads Small transmitter size Well available (WS-6) High temperature span, 0 to 800F (-18 to 427C)
NEW!
WS-6 TT111H GFF-50 S241HC TT111H-0800 Fixed Transmitter Supply Voltage 8.5-30 VDC unregulated Sensor Input 1000 platinum 0.00375 //C Measurement Range 0 to 800F (-18 to 427C) 4-20 mA Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance 750 0.1% @ 24 VDC min Accuracy Calibration accuracy 0.05% of span Operating Temperature -58 to 160F (-50 to 70C) Well Operating Pressure 3000 psig (20.7 mPa) max Well Material 304 Stainless steel Weight 0.35 lb (0.16 Kg) Warranty 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
S241HC Sensor Sensor Type 1000 0.1% @ 32F (0C) Temperature Coefcient 0.00375 //C Sensitivity 2.1/F @ 32F (0C) Measurement Range -58 to 932F (-50 to 500C) Probe Material 304 Stainless Wiring Terminations Two-wire nickel coated stranded copper, 24" long 22 AWG berglass insulated Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 Kg) Warranty 3 years
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
GFF-50 Accessory
DIMENSIONS
Signal
4-20 mA
in (cm)
0.25 (0.64) 5.5 (13.97)
1/2" Pipe Thread (typical both sides)
2.0 (5.10)
24.0 (60.94)
+
S241HC Sensor
S241HC Probe
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
24 VDC Power Supply
Mounting Hole 0.141" dia (0.36)
1.1 (2.79) 0.51 (1.30)
zer
span
0.91 (2.31) 0.14 (0.36)
20
TT111H-0800 Transmitter
1.53 (3.89)
TT111H-0800 Transmitter
MODEL TT111H-0800 S241HC DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 GFF-50 TCC-111 TCC-12 WS-6 DESCRIPTION High temperature transmitter 0 to 800F (-18 to 427C) High temperature probe, limited to 932F (500C) RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 1/2 galvanized mounting flange Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml Stainless steel well PAGE 995 994 1298 1298 1293 March 2014
1266
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Sensor and transmitter calibrated together Optional display Sealed vial eliminates leakage NIST certication include
TEMPERATURE
THERMAL VIAL TEMPERATURE SENSING SYSTEM AS10 SERIES
The Minco AS10 Thermal Vial Temperature Sensing System is ideal for freezers, coolers, and refrigeration units to monitor the temperature of the contents, rather than the air temperature. The vial is lled with fluid such as glycol or water which emulates the material being stored. The corresponding 4-20 mA output is matched calibrated to the RTD for improved system accuracy.
AS10
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 8.5 to 35 VDC loop powered 4-20 mA @ 400 Signal Output Accuracy 0.50% of span Measurement Range -148 to 32F (-100 to 0C) -58 to 122F (-50 to 50C) 32 to 212F (0 to 100C) Sensor Type PM Curve 100 platinum three-wire 0.00385 //C PF Curve 1000 platinum two-wire 0.00385 //C 3-1/2 digit LCD, updates 3 times Display per second Operating Temperature Probe -328 to 248F (-200 to 120C) Transmitter -13 to 185F (-25 to 85C) Materials Probe: material Stainless steel Thermal vial 6 oz (175 ml) polyethylene bottle with cap Delrin Thermowell Polycarbonate Enclosure Wiring Terminations 22 AWG Teflon insulated with TFE jacket overall Dimensions 4.5" L x 2.6" W x 2.2" D (11.5 x 6.5 x 5.6 cm) 0.97 lb (0.43 Kg) Weight Warranty 3 years
TEMPERATURE
MODEL DESCRIPTION AS103282 Thermal vial sensing system PM 100 0.00385 //C platinum curve PF 1000 0.00385 //C platinum curve LLL Cable length LLL in 1" increments F Display in F B No display Z Range -148 to 32F (-100 to 0C) M Range -58 to 122F (-50 to 50C) C Range 32 to 212F (0 to 100C) Sample order: AS103282PM72FZ: Thermal vial 100, 385 curve platinum RTD with 72" cable, display and Z temperature range
20
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W AC101540
RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Thermal Vial mounting bracket
PAGE 994 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1267
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Minco Model S101144 and S469 Self-adhesive, Flexible Ribbons RTD Sensors feature imbedded RTDs to sense temperature. The platinum 1000 RTD sensor is inserted and used with a transmitter or directly into a BAS system. The self-adhesive backing makes installation easy and it adheres to all types of surfaces. The fl exible thin ribbon maximizes contact to the measured surface which makes response time very fast. The accuracy is the same as immersion sensors. The Minco S665 & S667 Series RTD Sensors are 100 ohm flexible ribbon sensors that are easily adapatble to most any clean, flat surface. The S665 Series is a thin lm sensor with an elastomer cover. The S667 Series is a silicone rubber, elastomer covered thin lm sensor with a foil backing, capable of submersion applications.
THERMAL RIBBON RTD S101144, S469, S665PDY48BC, S667PDY40BC
NEW!
S469PW S101144PW Close-up of sensor tip #20 AC766
FEATURES
Small, exible, and thin Platinum stability and accuracy Fast response Easy mounting Self-adhesive backing Pliable
APPLICATION
Metal pipe Metal tanks Windows Glass displays Condensation control with dew point sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
MOUNTING
0.12% @ 0C <0.1C/year 1 sec -4 to 350F (-20 to 177C)
AC766 Strap Field Wires Wire Nuts Pipe Insulation Conduit Utility Box
TEMPERATURE
20
1000 platinum RTD TCR 0.00375 //C (385 available) Type PD 100 platinum RTD TCR 0.00385 //C Materials Of Construction Polyamide lm with elastomer cover, silicone rubber Mounting Adhesive backing (flat surface) AC766 pipe-mount kit with tape (conduit) #20 stretch tape (round surface) Wiring Terminations 26 AWG stranded copper Dimensions S665PDY48BC 0.472" W X 0.197"H, 48" leads (1.2 X 0.5 cm) S667PDY40BC 0.600" W X 0.197"H, 40" leads (1.5 X 0.5 cm) Weight 0.1 lb (0.05 Kg) Warranty 3 years
Accuracy Stability Time Constant Measurement Range Sensor Type Type PW
Buckle
T91U Transmitter Fill in with Insulation ThermalRibbon S469PW
#20 Stretch Tape
1268
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
TEMPERATURE
THERMAL RIBBON RTD S101144, S469, S665PDY48BC, S667PDY40BC
in (cm)
40 (101.6)
0.47 (1.10) 0.20 (0.51) 0.38 (0.95)
1.5 (3.81)
36 (91.44)
S101144PW
Thickness 0.08 (0.20) max
S469PW
MODEL S101144PW S469PW S665PDY48BC S667PDY40BC DESCRIPTION 1000, 375 thermal tab RTD with adhesive backing 1000, 375 rubber strip RTD with adhesive backing 100 Thermal tab thin lm adhesive back elastomer cover 100 Thermal tab thin lm adhesive back silicone rubber, waterproof RELATED PRODUCTS Self-vulcanizing stretch tape, 6 (1.83m) roll, 1 (2.54 cm) wide Pipe mount kit with #20 stretch tape and 5 (1.5m) nylon strap Temperature transmitter for type 81, 385 platinum curve sensor, track mounted Temperature transmitter for type 91, 375 platinum curve sensor, track mounted PAGE
#20 AC766 T81U Series T91U Series
1281 1277
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1269
TEMPERATURE
20
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Greystone Energy Systems Model TE200G Glass Thermistor and RTD Sensors feature imbedded sensors to sense temperature. The model TE200G is a single point glass temperature sensor encapsulated in an aluminum probe. Small in size and ideal for mounting on windows to provide fast response.
THERMAL GLASS THERMISTOR AND RTD SENSORS TE200G SERIES
FEATURES
Small and thin Fast response Easy mounting Pliable
NEW!
TE200G
APPLICATION
Metal pipe Metal tanks Windows Glass displays Condensation control with dew point sensor
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy Thermistor RTD Platinum Nickel Sensor Type Thermistor RTD 0.36F (0.2C) 0.54F (0.3C) 0.72F (0.4C)
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
5' (1.5)
1.3' (3.2) 0.4 (0.9)
TEMPERATURE
2,252, 3,000, 10,000 Type II & III, 20,000 100 Platinum 385 curve, 1,000 Platinum 385 curve, 1,000 Nickel, 1,000 Balco Measurement Range -4 to 221F (-20 to 105C) Materials Of Construction Aluminum Wiring Terminations 5' (1.5 m) of 22 AWG stranded copper Approvals CE, RoHs Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 Kg) Warranty 1 year
TE200G
MODEL TE200G DESCRIPTION Glass sensor OPTIONS 2 100 RTD @ 32F (0C); 385 Platinum curve (red, red, white leads) 12 1,000 RTD @ 32F (0C); 385 Platinum curve (gray leads) 13 1,000 RTD @ 32F (0C); Nickel (gray leads) 5 1,000 RTD @ 32F (0C); Balco (???? leads) 14 10,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); Type III (light gray leads) 6 3,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); (light blue leads) 24 10,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); Type II (yellow leads) 20 20,000 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); (green leads) 8 2,252 Thermistor @ 77F (25C); (gray leads)
20
TE200G
12
Example: TE200G-12 1,000 RTD @ 32F (0C); 385 platinum curve (gray leads).
T85U-XR T81U-XR #20
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1000 ohm, Type 85 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1279 100 ohm, Type 81 4-20 mA temperature transmitter, custom rangeable 1281 Self-vulcanizing stretch tape, 6' (1.83m) roll, 1" (2.54 cm) wide
1270
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD FIXED TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS ST-T90 SERIES
The Kele Model ST-T90 Series is a xed range 1000, 375 platinum room temperature transmitter that provides stable, accurate room sensing for temperature control of Building Automation Systems. The attractive white vented housing mounts easily and is constructed of durable plenum rated plastic with a white enameled aluminum faceplate. The ST-T910E is the Executive style room transmitter amd the ST-T90K is the Design style room transmitter.
Low cost High accuracy No drift platinum RTD sensors Panel mounting for duct, immersion, OSA, and room UL 94V-0 plenum rated housing Used with Type 91 sensor
ST-T90E
ST-T90K
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Minimum Output Impedance Accuracy 2.25 (5.72) Sensor Transmitter Rangeability
Height Snap Track
WIRING
10.5-45 VDC Loop Power 4-20 mA, loop-powered LED LOOPtwo-wire, UP Limit: 25 mA
1.8 (4.57)
MODEL ST-T90E
Loop Power LED
TEMPERATURE
675 @ 24 VDC
4-20 mA Signal
4-20 MA Signal
(sold separately) 1.0 Rangeability (2.54) Zero -30Transmitter to 210F (-34.4 to 98.9C) Universal Minimum Span 40F (4.4C) Usable Range -30 to 250 F (-34.4 to 121.1C) Sensor Type 1000 thin lm platinum TCR 0.00375//C Sensitivity 2.1/F @ 32F Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) Approvals CE (EN50081-1, EN500821) Optional CE (EN50081-2, EN50082-2) Industrial RF/EM hardened Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) either style "E" or "K" Warranty 18 months
LOOP 0.54F (0.30C) Power Supply LOOP 10.5-45 VDC 0.1F or 0.2% of span TEMP -30 toSENSOR 250F (34 toType 121C) 91 TEMP 375 Platinum SENSOR Min span of 40F1000 (22C) RTD Sensor
JP1 SENSOR
Power Supply 10.5-45 VDC
Room Transmitter
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1271
TEMPERATURE
APPLICATION
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD FIXED TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS ST-T90 SERIES
The Room Temperature application uses a vented room enclosure designed to minimize self-heating for accurate room measurement. The Duct Temperature application is designed for direct mounting on sheet metal duct systems. The sensor is point sensitive and comes standard with a 4-7/8" (12.38 cm) insertion depth. Averaging probes come in 24' (7.3m) lengths and mount in a weatherresistant metal box. The Immersion Temperature application is designed to be threaded directly into a 1/8" NPT well with a 3-1/4" (8.2 cm) insertion. The wells are available in brass or 304 stainless steel and are designed for pipe insertion using a 1/2" threaded saddle (Thredolet). The Outside Air Temperature application uses a wall bracket with a vented weather shield to minimize the effect of rain or snow and other weather related influences. This rugged enclosure and bracket will ensure long life even in severe weather conditions.
NEW!
PAGE 995 994 1390 1398 1398
TEMPERATURE
MODEL DESCRIPTION ST-T90E Room temperature transmitter ST-T90K Designer room temperature transmitter RANGE 0 40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.2C) Room transmitter only 1 20 to 120F (-6.7 to 48.8C) All mounting types 2 -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) OSA, duct, or immersion 3 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) All mounting types 4 30 to 240F (-1 to 116C) OSA, duct, or immersion 11 12 13 14 ST-T90E - 1 0 to 35C (32 to 97F) All mounting types -30 to 45C (-22 to 113F) OSA, duct, or immersion 0 to 100C (32 to 212F) OSA, duct, or immersion 0 to 50C (32 to 122F) All mounting types Example: ST-T90E-1 Room temperature transmitter with a range of 20 to 120F (-6.7 to 48.8C)
20
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 KT1 TCC-111 TCC-12
RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml
1272
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
High accuracy No-drift platinum Loop calibration test signal Low cost Decorative enclosure Loop power LED indication CE approved (commercial and industrial)
TEMPERATURE
RANGEABLE PLATINUM ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER ST-T91 SERIES
The Kele ST-T91 Rangeable Platinum Room Temperature Transmitter Series provides stable, accurate room sensing for temperature control and building automation systems, and it is CE approved for level-one applications. The attractive vented housing mounts easily and is constructed of a durable plastic with a tan enameled aluminum faceplate. The ST-T91E is the Executive style room transmitter and the ST-T91K is the Design style room transmitter. The ST-T91 Series has a loop-powered 4-20 mA output with a standard temperature range of 40 to 90F (4 to 32C), although other ranges can be eld calibrated between -30 to 250F (-34 to 121C). To adjust the ST-T91 Series, set the DIP switches to match the desired range, and use the zero and span pots to ne tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and decade box are required. The ST-T91 Series has a special 20 mA loop calibration test signal to provide easy system verication. Simply move the bottle plug jumper from norm to 20, and the transmitter will output a constant 20 mA. The loop up LED provides power indication for the 4-20 mA output.
ST-T91E
ST-T91K
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
TEMPERATURE
4.50 (11.43)
4.5 (11.43)
1.5 (3.8) 3.23 (8.20)
2.75 (6.98)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Sensor Element Accuracy Transmitter accuracy Rangeability 10.5-45 VDC 4-20 mA, two-wire, loop-powered 675 @ 24 VDC 1000 thin lm platinum TCR 0.00375//C Sensor accuracy: 0.2% of 1000 at 0C 0.1F or 0.2% of span -30 to 250F (34 to 121C) (Min span of 40F (22C)) Standard: 40 to 90F (4 to 32C) Rangeability Zero -30 to 210F (-34.4 to 98.9C) Minimum Span 40F (4.4C) Usable Range -30 to 250F (-34.4 to 121.1C) Sensitivity 2.1/F @ 32F Operating Temperature 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) Approvals CE (EN50081-1, EN50082-1); Optional CE (EN50081-2, EN500822) Industrial RF/EM hardened Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) either style "E" or "K" Warranty 18 months
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1273
TEMPERATURE
RANGEABLE PLATINUM ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER ST-T91 SERIES
MOUNTING WIRING
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where conduit is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical outlet boxes. The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the floor, on an interior wall, and away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
Optional CustomerSupplied Handy Box Wire Access Hole Plate Mounting Screws
Toggle bolts or other direct wall-mount screws can be used where back box is not required. Adapters are not required when mounting directly to electrical outlet boxes.
The sensor should be mounted approximately 5' (1.5m) above the floor, on an interior wall, out of the sun, and away from any heating or cooling generating devices.
Wire Access Hole Mounting Back Plate
NEW!
Loop Power LED
MODEL ST-T91E,K
5 4 3 2 1
NORM 20
Mounting Screws
Option Board Clip
ZERO
SENSOR
Tan Faceplate Standard
Self-Latching Cover
Cover Mounting 1/16" Allen Screws
Cover Locking 1/16" Allen Screws Installed as needed
Norm = Normal operation 20 = Forced 20 mA output Loop LED indicates proper loop and power connections
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, tan decorator faceplate, two #6-32 screws for handy-box mounting, and two #6 x 1 screws for direct wall mounting. Cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" Allen key head.
Basic model comes with screw terminal block, two #6-32 screws for handy-box mounting, and two #6 x 1" screws for direct wall mounting. Locking cover screws are #6-32 with a 1/16" Allen key head, installed as needed.
ST-T91E
ST-T91K
TEMPERATURE
MODEL ST-T91K ST-T91E DESCRIPTION Designer room temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA = 40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.2C) Executive room temperature transmitter, 4-20 mA = 40 to 90F (4.4 to 32.2C) CE CERTIFICATION To BAS Commercial CE (EN50081-1 and EN50082-1) Controller EMC Industrial CE, RF/EM hardened (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2) OPTIONS XR Custom range (specific range) XR1 Range option = 20 to 120F (-6.7 to 48.8C) XR2 Range option = 0 to 100F (-17.7 to 37.8C) XR3 Range option = 30 to 100F (-1.1 to 37.8C) XR11 Range option = 32 to 97F (0 to 35C) XR14 Range option = 32 to 122F (0 to 50C)
XR1 Example: ST-T91E-XR1 Rangeable platinum room temperature transmitter with calibration 20 to 120F
20
ST-T91E
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 KT1
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 995 Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT 994 Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key 1390
1274
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
1 2 3 4 5
O N
SPAN
4-20 mA Signal
Power Supply 10.5-45 VDC
JP1
March 2014
NEW!
Substitute for discontinued Hy-Cal transmitters 4-20mA signal Optimum ow-through ventilation Easy zero and span ranging (non-interacting) On-line calibration Non-polar connections
TEMPERATURE
PLATINUM 1000 OHM SPACE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER TT859 SERIES
The Minco TT859 Platinum 1000 Space Temperature Transmitter is DIP switch rangeable. Non-interacting multiturn controls provide a constant resolution adjustment. Goldplated DIP switches ensure stable overlapping incremental selections between -10 to 60F (-23 to 15C) for zero and 35 to 150F (2 to 66C) for span. The well ventilated housing allows quick and accurate temperature sensing and effective heat dissipation from the circuit. Repeatability is excellent because the TT859 uses a platinum RTD as the sensing element. Calibrated system accuracy of the TT859 is typically 0.25F (0.14C) with optional sensor matching. Once installed, it can be eld-calibrated or re-ranged through coarse switch adjustments and ne tune with multi-turn zero and span pots. The two-wire termination points are insensitive to power supply polarity. This prevents reversed hookups and simplies installation.
TT859PW
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Accuracy Linearity Stability Rangeability 9.4-35 VDC 4-20 mA, two-wire 730 @ 24 VDC (Supply voltage - 9.4 VDC)/0.02A 0.5F (0.3C) @ room temp or 0.8% of span operating @ 24 VDC transmitter Transmitter: 0.1% of span (negligible) Sensor: Better than 0.09F (0.05C) per year Zero: -10 to 60F (-23 to 15C) Span:35 to 150F (2 to 66C) Span Adjust Zero Adjustments Sensor Element Non-interacting Non-interacting 100 platinum RTD, 385 curve 1000 platinum RTD, 375 curve Operating Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Enclosure Enclosure Plastic housing with aluminum faceplate Wiring Terminations Screw terminals, non-polar, connect either way Dimensions 4.5"H x 2.75"W x 1.58"D (11.43 x 6.98 x 4.01 cm) Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) Warranty 3 years
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1275
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
Transmitter mounted in cover
PLATINUM 1000 OHM SPACE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER TT859 SERIES

WIRING
4.50 (11.43)
1 2 3 4
NEW!
24 VDC
+ +
1 2 3 4
SPAN ADJ.
ON
1 2
4-20mA Signal
7 8
ZERO ADJ.
2.75 (6.98)
1.58 (4.01)
RTD
Housing Top View
Housing Side View

TT859
TT859 Decorative Wall-Mount Temperature Transmitter
TEMPERATURE
20
MODEL DESCRIPTION TT859 Space temperature transmitter PW 1000 0.00375 //C platinum curve 1 4-20mA DC output S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/100F) (-18/38C) H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40/90F) (4/32C) 1 No calibration data, sensor or transmitter 2 Sensor/transmitter matched at 0C with NIST TT859 PW 1 S 1 Example: TT859PW1S1 Room transmitter, 375 curve platinum RTD, ranged for 0/100F
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
1276
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER T91H, T91L, T91U SERIES
The Kele T91U 1000 RTD rangeable transmitter is a range selectable, two-wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter used with Type 91 1000 platinum RTD sensors. The transmitter is available in six standard ranges, or it can be set for any range between -30 to 280F (-34 to 156C) with a minimum span of 40F (22C).
To adjust the T91U, set the DIP switches to match the desired range, and use the zero and span pots to ne tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and decade box are required. The T91U has a special 20 mA loop calibration test signal to provide easy system verication. Simply move the bottle plug jumper from norm to 20, and the transmitter will output a constant 20 mA. The loop-up LED provides power indication for the 4-20 mA output. The T91H and T91L are specialty units for very high temperature and very low temperatures respectively. Both units are rangeable within their specialty limits.
T91U
T91U-13-WE-XTD
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 1.8 (4.57)
MODEL T91U
LOOP UP
ZERO
2.25 (5.72)
NORMAL 20
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance 375 with display Sensor Element Accuracy Rangeability T91U Zero Minimum Span Usable range T91H Zero Minimum Span March 2014 10.5-45 VDC 4-20 mA, two-wire 675 @ 24 VDC 1000 platinum TCR 0.00375 //C 0.1F or 0.2% of span -30 to 210F (-34 to 98.9C) 40F (4.4C) -30 to 250F (-34.4 to 121.1C) 200 to 960F (93 to 515C) 40F (4.4C) Usable range T91L Zero Minimum Span Usable range Display 200 to 1000F (93.3 to 573.8C)
-300 to -8F (-184 to -22C) 40F (4.4C) -300 to 32F (-184.4 to 0C) Display option (XTD) 3-1/2 digit LCD, NEMA 4 (IP65) Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) Dimensions 1"H x 1.8"W x 2.25"L (2.5 x 4.6 x 5.7 cm) Approvals CE (EN50081-1, EN50082-1) Optional CE (EN50081-2, EN500822) Industrial RF/EM Hardened Weight 0.16 lb (0.07 kg) w/o options Warranty 18 months
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
O1 2 3 4 5 N
DIP switch rangeable Loop-calibration test signal Low cost Snap-track mounting Loop-powered LED indication Fits into card slot of ST-U91 housing Very high-range and low-range models availableCE approved (commercial and industrial) Conformal coated
SPAN
TEMPERATURE
LOOP LOOP TEMP SENSOR TEMP SENSOR
Height: 0.75 (1.9) including track
20
888-397-5353 USA
1277
TEMPERATURE
MOUNTING
MODEL T91U
LOOP UP
1000 OHM 375 PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER T91H, T91L, T91U SERIES
NORMAL 20
NEW!
Loop Power LED 4-20 mA Signal Power Supply 10.5-45 VDC 1000 375 Platinum RTD Sensor
(sold separately)
LOOP
ZERO
LOOP TEMP SENSOR TEMP SENSOR
MODEL T91U T91H T91L DESCRIPTION 4-20 mA RTD transmitter standard rangeability 4-20 mA RTD transmitter high temperature rangeability (XR range only) 4-20 mA RTD transmitter low temperature rangeability (XR range only) CE CERTIFICATION Commercial CE (EN50081-1 and EN50082-1) EMC Industrial CE, RF/EM hardened (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2) RANGE 2 -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) (T91U only) 3 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) (T91U only) 4 30 to 240F (-1 to 116C) (T91U only) 12 -22 to 113F (-30 to 45C) (T91U only) 13 32 to 212F (0 to 100C) (T91U only) 14 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) (T91U only) XR Special Range (See previous page for rangeability limits) SENSOR TYPE Transmitter only D ST-D91-XW duct sensor* O ST-O91 outside air sensor* W ST-W91-XW immersion sensor* with brass well WE ST-W91-E-XW immersion sensor* without well WS ST-W91-S-XW immersion sensor* with stainless steel well AV ST-AV91H averaging sensor* XTD Digital display option for (D) duct or (W) immersion sensors XWM Single gang weather resistant box (Mounted without sensor) 2 D Example: T91U-2-D Transmitter with range of -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) mounted and wired in duct sensor enclosure
Indicate at time of order
20
T91U
TEMPERATURE
* Includes sensor mounted and wired. Check temperature limits in the catalog for each probe
AS2PW055P000XX1 DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 S241HC
RELATED PRODUCTS Low temperature probe, limited to -50F (-46C) Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT High temperature probe, limited to 932F (500C)
SPAN
1278
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
O1 2 3 4 5 N
PAGE 995 994
March 2014
NEW!
Class A Sensors Dip switch rangeable Loop calibration test signal Low cost Snap-track mounting Loop-powered LED indication Fits into card slot of ST-U85 housing CE approved (commercial and industrial) Available as a complete assembly Conformal coated
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER T85U SERIES
The Kele T85U 1000 RTD rangeable transmitter is a range selectable, two-wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter used with Type 85 1000 platinum RTD sensors. The transmitter is available in six standard ranges, or it can be set for any range between -30 to 280F (-34 to 156C) with a minimum span of 40F (22C).
To adjust the T85U, set the DIP switches to match the desired range, and use the zero and span pots to ne tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and decade box are required. The T85U has a special 20 mA loop calibration test signal to provide easy system verication. Simply move the bottle plug jumper from norm to 20, and the transmitter will output a constant 20 mA. The loop-up LED provides power indication for the 4-20 mA output. T85U T85U-13-WE-XTD
DIMENSIONS
in (cm) 1.8 (4.57)
MODEL T85U
LOOP UP
TEMPERATURE
Duct OSA Immersion Averaging
ZERO
2.25 (5.72)
NORMAL 20
SPAN
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Sensor Accuracy Transmitter Accuracy Rangeability Rangeability Zero Minimum Span Usable Range March 2014 10.5-45 VDC 4-20 mA, two-wire, loop-powered, Limit 25 mA 675 @ 24 VDC DIN Class A, 0.27F (0.15C) 0.02F (0.01C) at 77F (25C) -30 to 250F (-34 to 121C) Minimum span of 40F (22C) -30 to 210F (-34.4 to 98.9C) 40F (4.4C) -30 to 250F (-34.4 to 121.1C) Loop Calibration Output 20 mA 0.2% Sensor Element 1000 platinum TCR 0.00385 //C Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) Wiring Terminations Terminals Approvals CE (EN50081-1, EN50082-1) Optional CE (EN50081-2, EN500822) Industrial RF/EM Hardened Weight 0.16 lb (0.07 kg) w/o options Warranty 18 months
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
O1 2 3 4 5 N
APPLICATIONS
Height: 0.75 (1.9) includes track
20
888-397-5353 USA
1279
TEMPERATURE
WIRING
MODEL T85U
LOOP UP
1000 OHM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER T85U SERIES
NORMAL 20
LOOP
ZERO
SPAN
NEW!
Loop Power LED 4-20 mA Signal Power Supply 10.5-45 VDC 1000 385 Platinum RTD Sensor
(sold separately)
MODEL T85U
20
DESCRIPTION 4-20 mA RTD transmitter standard rangeability CE CERTIFICATION Commercial CE (EN50081-1 and EN50082-1) EMC Industrial CE, RF/EM hardened (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2) RANGE 2 -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) 3 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) 4 30 to 240F (-1 to 116C) 12 -22 to 113F (-30 to 45C) 13 32 to 212F (0 to 100C) 14 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) XR Special Range (See previous page for rangeability limits) SENSOR TYPE Transmitter only D ST-D85-XW duct sensor* O ST-O85 outside air sensor* W ST-W85-XW immersion sensor* with brass well WE ST-W85-E-XW immersion sensor* without well WS ST-W85-S-XW immersion sensor* with stainless steel well AV ST-AV85H averaging sensor* XTD Digital display option for (D) duct or (W) immersion sensors XWM Single gang weather resistant box (Mounted without sensor) 2 D Example: T85U-2-D Transmitter with range of -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) mounted and wired in duct sensor enclosure
TEMPERATURE
T85U
* Includes sensor mounted and wired. Check temperature limits in the catalog for each probe.
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
1280
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
O1 2 3 4 5 N
LOOP TEMP SENSOR TEMP SENSOR

Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 994 995
March 2014
NEW!
DIP switch rangeable Loop calibration test signal Snap-track mounting Loop-powered LED indication Conformal coated
TEMPERATURE
100 OHM PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER T81U SERIES
The Kele T81U Platinum RTD Rangeable Transmitter is a two-wire, 4-20 mA transmitter designed for use with Type 81 100 platinum RTD sensors. The transmitter is available in three standard ranges, or it can be set for any range between -30 to 250F (-34 to 121C) with a minimum span of 40F (22C).
To adjust the T81U, set the DIP switches to match the desired range and use the zero and span pots to ne tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and decade box are required. The T81U has a special 20 mA loop calibration test signal to provide easy system verication. Simply move the bottle plug jumper from NORM to 20, and the transmitter will output a constant 20 mA. The Loop Up LED provides power indication for the 4-20 mA output. T81U
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
in (cm)
NORM 20
1.8 (4.58)
Height: 1.0 (2.54)
4-20 mA Signal
2.25 (5.72)
Power Supply 10.5-45 VDC 100 RTD Sensor (sold separately)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Sensor Element Accuracy Rangeability 10.5-45 VDC 4-20 mA, loop-powered 675 @ 24 VDC 100 platinum 0.1F or 0.2% of span TCR 0.00385 //C -30 to 250F (-34 to 121C) Minimum Span 40F (22C) Rangeability Zero -30 to 210F (-34.4 to 98.9C) Minimum Span 40F (4.4C) Usable Range -30 to 250F (-34.4 to 121.1C) Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) Dimensions 1.8"W x 2.25"L x 1"H (4.6 x 5.7 x 2.5 cm) Approvals CE Weight 0.16 lb (0.07 kg) w/o options Warranty 18 months
TEMPERATURE
MODEL T71U DESCRIPTION 4-20 mA RTD transmitter RANGE 2 -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) 3 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) 4 30 to 240F (-1 to 116C) XR Special Range SENSOR TYPE Transmitter only D ST-D71-XW duct sensor* O ST-O71 outside air sensor* W ST-W71-XW immersion sensor* with well AV ST-AV71H averaging sensor* XWM Single gang weather resistant box (mounted without sensor) 2 D Example: T71U-2-D transmitter with range of -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) mounted and wired in duct sensor enclosure
20
T71U
* Includes sensor mounted and wired
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1281
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Kele T71U Platinum RTD Rangeable Transmitter is a two-wire 4-20 mA transmitter designed for use with Type 71 100 platinum RTD sensors. The transmitter is available in three standard ranges, or it can be set for any range between 30 to 250F (-34 to 121C) with a minimum span of 40F (22C). To adjust the T71U, set the DIP switches to match the desired range and use the zero and span pots to ne tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and decade box are required. The T71U has a special 20 mA loop calibration test signal to provide easy system verication. Simply move the bottle plug jumper from NORM to 20, and the transmitter will output a constant 20 mA. The Loop Up LED provides power indication for the 4-20 mA output.
100 OHM PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER T71U SERIES
NEW!
T71U
FEATURES
DIP switch rangeable Loop calibration test signal Snap-track mounting Loop-powered LED indication Conformal coated
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
in (cm)
NORM 20
1.8 (4.58)
Height: 1.0 (2.54)

4-20 mA Signal
2.25 (5.72)
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Sensor Element Accuracy 10.5-45 VDC 4-20 mA, loop-powered 675 @ 24 VDC 100 platinum 0.1F or 0.2% of span TCR 0.00385 //C
MODEL T71U
DESCRIPTION 4-20 mA RTD transmitter CE Certification Commercial CE (EN50081-1 and EN50082-1) EMC Industrial CE, RF/EM hardened (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2) RANGE 2 -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) 3 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) 4 30 to 240F (-1 to 116C) XR Special Range SENSOR TYPE Transmitter only D ST-D71-XW duct sensor* O ST-O71 outside air sensor* W ST-W71-XW immersion sensor* with well XWM Single gang weather resistant box (mounted without sensor) NIST Calibration Certificate XN3 3 point NIST certificate for T71U and sensor combination (not available with the AV option) 2 D Example: T71U-2-D transmitter with range of -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) mounted and wired in duct sensor enclosure
20
Rangeability Zero -30 to 210F (-34.4 to 98.9C) 40F (4.4C) Minimum Span Usable Range -30 to 250F (-34.4 to 121.1C) Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing Operating Temperature 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) Dimensions 1.8"W x 2.25"L x 1"H (4.6 x 5.7 x 2.5 cm) Approvals CE Weight 0.16 lb (0.07 kg) w/o options Warranty 18 months
T71U
* Includes sensor mounted and wired
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
1282
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
TEMPERATURE
1000 OHM RTD RANGEABLE TRANSMITTER T5U, T63U SERIES
The Kele Models T5U and T63U Transmitters are eld rangeable, two-wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitters designed for use with Type 5 nickel-iron sensors, the Precon Type 63 sensors, or the JCI TE6300 Series. Each one delivers reilable and accurate performance for a wide variety of applcations. This transmitter can be combined with any Type 63 Precon sensors incorporating the optional XW weather resistant box for a one package application solution. To adjust the temperature transmitter, set the DIP switches to match the desired range, and use the zero and span pots to ne tune. A high accuracy digital ohmmeter and decade box are required.
FEATURES
Dip switch rangeable Loop calibration test signal Low cost Snap-track mounting Loop-powered LED indication Conformal coated T63U
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
in (cm)
NORM 20
1.8 (4.58)
Height: 1.0 (2.54)
APPLICATION
Transmitter for Invensys 1000 Nickel-Iron RTDs Transmitter for Johnson Controls 1000 Nickel RTDs Transmitter for Precons Type 63 RTDs
4-20 mA Signal
2.25 (5.72)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Sensor Element Accuracy 10.5-45 VDC 4-20 mA, loop-powered 675 @ 24 VDC 1000 RTD 0.2F or 0.4% of span Rangeability Zero -30 to 210F (-34.4 to 98.9C) Minimum Span 40 F(4.4C) Usable Range -30 to 250F (-34.4 to 121.1C) Operating Temperature 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) 1.8"W x 2.25"L x 1"H Dimensions (4.6 x 5.7 x 2.54 cm) Weight 0.16 lb (0.09 kg) Warranty 18 months
TEMPERATURE
MODEL T5U T63U DESCRIPTION 4-20 mA 1000 nickel-iron RTD transmitter 4-20 mA 1000 nickel RTD transmitter RANGE 2 -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) 3 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) 4 30 to 240F (-1 to 116C) XR Special range (see specifications for rangeability limits) 2
Example: T63U-2 transmitter for 1000 nickel RTD with range of -20 to 140F
20
T63U
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W

Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT 994 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1283
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Minco TT801 and TT807 two-wire 4-20 mA temperature transmitters connect to platinum 100 and 1000 RTDs. The TT800s are custom calibrated for those tough high and low temperature application ranges. These compact transmitters are extremely rugged and have excellent performance specications.The TT801 accepts a two-wire or three-wire 100 RTD input, and the TT807 accepts a two-wire 1000 input. The 4-20 mA signal is factory calibrated over the full range of the user-specied temperature span to provide excellent performance for either thin lm or wire-wound platinum RTDs.
PLATINUM RTD TEMPERATURE INDUSTRIAL TRANSMITTER TT801, TT807 SERIES
NEW!
TT801PD1BN
FEATURES
4-20 mA signal transmitter 1000/100 RTD input Wide, high and low calibration ranges Standard handy-box mounting Two and three-wire RTD wiring optional Factory calibrated Functional equivalent to HCT-801 and HCT-807 100% substitute for the discontinued Hycal transmitters
MOUNTING
-1F OFFSET FOR CABLE LENGTHS BELOW WIRE GAUGE 1000 100 (AWG) ft (m) ft (m) 12 1200 (365) 120 (36) 14 800 (244) 80 (24) 16 500 (152) 50 (15) 18 310 (94) 31 (9.4) 20 200 (60) 20 (6) 22 124 (38) 12 (3.8) Values provided are for two-wire stranded copper and are for reference only. Terminations may also affect the offset.
TEMPERATURE
Note: Three-wire transmitters have two white wires and one black wire. Connect the white wires to the two common sensor leads and black to the other lead. If the sensor has only two leads, short the two transmitter white wires together and connect to one side of the sensor. Connect the black to the other side. See Table 1 on previous page.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance Accuracy Linearity Sensor Type Calibration Range 8.5-35 VDC 4-20 mA 750 @ 24 VDC, (Supply voltage - 8.5) / 0.02A 0.1% of span 0.1% of span TT801 Three-wire, 100 385 platinum RTD (accepts two-wire input also) TT807 Two-wire, 1000 375 or 385 platinum RT Min span 35F (19C) Max span 1112F (600C) Zero Limited by the sensor used Span Adjustments 5% typical, factory-set, noninteracting Zero Adjustments 5% typical, factory-set, noninteracting RTD Current RTD current TT801 1 mA nominal TT807 0.2 mA nominal Polarity Diode protected Protection Operating Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Mounting Mounts inside a handy box Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) Warranty 3 years
20
1284
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
in (cm)
1/4" dia, two places (for #8 mtg screw) 3.75 (9.52)
TEMPERATURE
PLATINUM RTD TEMPERATURE INDUSTRIAL TRANSMITTER TT801, TT807 SERIES
Power Supply (red) (white) (black)
MI
NC
3.28 (8.33)
1000 Platinum RTD Sensor
TT807
(black)
4-20 mA Signal
2.5 (6.35)
1.75 (4.45) 0.7 (1.78) Optional CustomerSupplied Handy Box and Cover
Power Supply (red)
Optional Field Wiring (white) 100 Platinum RTD Sensor (white) (black)
TT801
(black)
4-20 mA Signal
Note: Three-wire transmitters have two white wires and one black wire. Connect the white wires to the two common sensor leads and black to the other lead. If the sensor has only two leads, short the two transmitter white wires together and connect to one side of the sensor. Connect the black to the other side. See Table 1 on previous page.
MODEL DESCRIPTION TT801 Transmitter for three-wire PT100 RTDs (must use a PD sensor curve) TT807 Transmitter for two-wire PT1000 RTDs (must use a PW, PF sensor curve) PD 100 0.00385 //C platinum curve, 6" leads PF 1000 0.00385 //C platinum curve, 6" leads PW 1000 0.00375 //C platinum curve, 6" leads 1 4-20 mA DC output EN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-20/140F) or (-29/60C), former B2 code S Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/100F) or (-18/38C) A Range codes per Minco letter ranges (20/120F) or (-7/49C) BI Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30/130F) or (-1/54C) KK Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30/180F) or (-1/82C) (not available with PF, PW models) BN Range codes per Minco letter ranges (30/240F) or (-1/116C), former B1 code N Range codes per Minco letter ranges (32/122F) or (0/50C), former B3 code H Range codes per Minco letter ranges (40/90F) or (4/32C) M Range codes per Minco letter ranges (-50/50C) C Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/100C) BW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/250C) (not available with PF, PW models) JW Range codes per Minco letter ranges (0/500C) (not available with PF, PW models) TT807 PW 1 A Example: TT807PW1A PT1000 transmitter for 1000, 375 curve platinum RTD, ranged for 20/120F
TEMPERATURE
20
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
PAGE 994 995
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1285
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Minco TT809 is a 1000 Platinum RTD UserRangeable Temperature Transmitter. Zero setting can be anywhere from -50 to 212F (-45 to 100C) and span from 30 to 320F (17 to 180C). The TT809 comes factory calibrated, and once installed, it can be eld calibrated with high precision DVM and decade box. The TT809 is easily calibrated by adjusting the zero pot to match the calibration reference. The gasketed cast-metal housing provides excellent weather resistance. The screw terminal connections on the transmitter circuit, 1/2" NPT threaded connection, and adjustable mounting brackets simplify installation. Several varieties of precision 1000 platinum RTD probes are easily mated with the transmitter housing.
1000 OHM PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER TT809 SERIES
NEW!
OSA (O) TT-809-A Wall-Mount (W) Duct (E) Averaging (V) Immersion (P) Mated Probe Selection WS-6 Averaging Sensor Probe Wiring Terminations Weight Duct AVG 12' 24' 50' OSA Immersion Wall Warranty Copper Stainless steel Screw terminals; non-polar, for connections either way; 4" (10 cm) 22 AWG leads 0.8 lb (0.36 Kg) 1.5 lb (0.68 Kg) 2 lb (0.91 Kg) 3.6 lb (1.63 Kg) 0.75 lb (0.34 Kg) 0.75 lb (0.34 Kg) 0.75 lb (0.34 Kg) 3 years
FEATURES
Switch-set rangeable with zero and span One-point eld calibration Non-polar loop connections Weatherproof sensor interface housing Non-interacting zero/span adjustment
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance 9.4-35 VDC 4-20 mA, two-wire
20
730 @ 24 VDC; (Supply voltage 9.4) / 0.02A Accuracy Transmitter accuracy 0.1% of span Transmitter linearity 0.1% of span Sensor accuracy 0.12% Rangeability Zero -50 to 212F (-45 to 100C) Span 30 to 320F (17 to 180C) Sensor Type 1000 platinum RTD, two-wire 0.00375 //C TCR 0.00385 //C TCR Operating Temperature -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Enclosure Cast aluminum moisture-resistant 1/2 FNPT and gasketed cover, suitable for outdoor use, UL #459L
1286
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
TEMPERATURE
WIRING
Power Connection Sensor Connection
1000 OHM PLATINUM RTD RANGEABLE TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER TT809 SERIES
in (cm)
4.5 (11.43)
2.0 (5.08)
1/2" NPT
2.75 (6.99) Span and Zero Adjustments
TT809PW000W Enclosure Only
4.5 (11.43)
5.5 (13.97)
0.25 (0.64)
2.0 (5.08)
6.5 (16.5)
4-20 mA Signal 1000 RTD 375 Platinum or 385 Platinum
TT809PW055P Immersion
Foam Gasket 8.0 (20.32) (E) or 24' (7.31m) Coiled Copper (V) 0.25 (0.635)
2.75 (6.99) 2.0 (5.08)
9.4 -35V Power Supply
Span Pot
1 2 3 4
Zero Pot
TT809PW080E Duct; TT809PW288V Averaging

4.63 (11.75) 1/2" FNPT 2.88 (7.30) 2.0 (5.08) 5.5 (13.97) 1.5 (3.81)
The TT809 has range switch adjustments and non-interacting zero and span pots. The weatherproof box is standard and provides easy accessibility for installation and service.
TT809PW040O Outdoor
TT809 Temperature Transmitter
TEMPERATURE
MODEL DESCRIPTION TT809 Assembly probe for two-wire RTDs PW 1000 0.0375 //C platinum curve, 6" leads LLL Length LLL in 0.1" increments 040 = 4.0", 120 = 12.0", 0.000 for W without sensors E Duct mount, weather-resistant box, LLL typically = 8.0" V Duct averaging, weather-resistant box, LLL must be = 144", 288", or 600" O Outside air, weather-resistant box with weather shield, LLL = 4.0" P Immersion, weather-resistant box, LLL typically = 5.5" for 6" well insertion W Wall mount, weather-resistant box, LLL typically 4.0" or 000 for no probe" 1 4-20 mA DC output BI Range codes 30/130F (-1/54C) S Range codes 0/100F (-18/38C) H Range codes 40/90F (4/32C) N Range codes 32/122F (0/50C) EN Range codes -20/140F (-29/60C) 1 No calibration data, sensor, or transmitter 2 Sensor/transmitter matched at 0C with NIST 3 Sensor/transmitter matched at 0, 100, and 260C with NIST Sample order: TT809PW080E1S1 Transmitter with 8" duct probe, 375 curve platinum RTD, ranged for 0/100F TT809PW055P1BI2 Transmitter with 5.5" immersion probe, 375 curve RTD, with NIST at 0C, ranged for 30/130F TT809PW000W1N1 Transmitter only for twowire 1000, 375 curve RTD, ranged for 32/122F
20
CC-1G-K DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 M-648-K TCC-111 WB-6 WS-6
RELATED PRODUCTS Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT Copper-clad capillary mounting clip Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Brass well Stainless steel well
PAGE 1391 995 994 1391 1298 1293 1293
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1287
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
The Kele T*PNR Series Temperature Transmitters are xed range, two-wire 4-20mA transmitters used with Type 81, 85 and 91 series sensors. The transmitters are available in six standard ranges for temperature control and building automation. The Kele T81PNR Series is used with the Type 81 100 platium RTD sensor.The Kele T815NR Series is used with the Type 85 1000 385 platium RTD sensor. The Kele T91PNR Series is used with the Type 91 1000 375 platium RTD sensor.
PLATINUM RTD TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER T81PNR, T85PNR, T90PNR SERIES
NEW!
T81PNR
WIRING FEATURES
Low cost Mounted on cover of handy box Easy to install Six precongured ranges Comes with 2" x 4" handibox (already installed) Conformal coated
Loop Power LED
4-20 MA Signal
LOOP LOOP TEMP SENSOR TEMP SENSOR Power Supply 10.5-45 VDC
RTD SENSOR (sold separately)
SPECIFICATIONS
TEMPERATURE
Supply Voltage Signal Output Maximum Output Impedance mA Accuracy Sensor Type
10.5 -45 VDC 4-20mA, loop-powered 675 @ 24VDC 0.1F or 0.2% span 1000 platinum 375 curve, 1000 platinum 385 curve, 100 platinum 385 curve
Operating Temperature 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) Operating Humidity 0% to 95% non-condensing Mounting Directly to wall or enclosure Dimensions 2.8 x 1.9 x 0.6 ( 7.1 x 4.8 x 1.4 cm) Weight 0.5 lb ( 0.2 Kg) Warranty 18 months
MODEL T81PNR T85PNR T90PNR DESCRIPTION Transmitter for type 81 100 385 platinum RTD Transmitter for type 85 1000 385 platinum RTD Transmitter for type 91 1000 375 platinum RTD RANGE 2 -20 to 140F (-29 to 60C) 3 0 to 100F (-18 to 38C) 4 30 to 240F (-1 to 116C) 12 -22 to 113F (-30 to 45C) 13 32 to 212F (0 to 100C) 14 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 3
Example: T90PNR-3 transmitter for 1000 platinum RTD with a 4-20mA output for 0 to 100F(-18 to 38C)
20
T90PNR
DCPA-1.2 DCP-1.5-W
PAGE 994 995 March 2014
1288
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Non-contact with 52 view angle 1 to 5 VDC signal, 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Ten-second response 344 swivel coverage Ceiling or wall mount Attractive white base and cover
TEMPERATURE
INFRARED ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER TY7321A1009
The Yamatake Model TY7321 is a non-contact infrared room radiant-temperature transmitter. Infrared energy is one of the main components of the perceived temperature in a space. The Model TY7321 has a wide 52 xed viewing angle which averages the heat energy of the ofce environment and offers a 1-5 VDC signal for temperature. It mounts conveniently to any ceiling or wall via back box or direct to ceiling tiles or plaster. The lens coverage is adjustable and points horizontally up to 344 and vertically up to 65.
TY7321A1009
APPLICATION
The TY7321A1009 is used when mounting a physical sensor is not possible in room applications. The thermopile senses the background heat radiation over an open-air environment and averages the energy into a 1-5V temperature signal. It is ideal in open ofce environments when the cubical walls prevent sensor mounting. Museums or marble entrance halls are also useful ceiling applications. When directed at a sun-drenched outdoor window, the unit measures the effects from the sun so that the supply air can be increased to compensate for thermal loading.
TEMPERATURE
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Signal Output Accuracy Sensor Coverage 24 VAC 15% (50/60 Hz), 0.3 VA 1-5 VDC, 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 3.6F (2C) Adjustable (344 degrees horizontal/65 degrees vertical) Unlimited (without obstructions) Sensing Distance View Angle 52 degrees, distance to sensing = 1:1 10 sec Response Time Emissivity 0.95 10% to 90% RH non-condensing Operating Humidity Operating Temperature 59 to 95F (15 to 35C) Enclosure Rating Fire-resistant plastic (white) Weight 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) Warranty 1 year
WIRING
+
24 VAC
+
2 1
4 3
Terminate to Base
6
5 4
20
1-5 VDC Signal
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1289
TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONS
INFRARED ROOM TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER TY7321A1009
in (cm)
Base Mounting Screw
Terminal Cover Spring Mounting Bracket 2.9 (7.37)
5.5 (13.97) 3.4 (8.64)

Washer
NEW!
2.2 (5.59) 0.35 (0.90) Sensing Window 3.5 1.8 (8.89)(4.57) Mounting Base to Back Box
2.6 (6.60)
9.0 (2.39)
Boxless Type
Box Type
MOUNTING
Spring Mounting Bracket Base Mounting Screw
Turn the base mounting screw two or three times to attach loosely.
2.25 (5.72)
Mounting Base
Align the small slot on the sensor with the triangle on the mounting base. Turn the sensor until it clicks.
Terminal Cover Wiring
TEMPERATURE
Square Hole
Mounting Base
Push the mounting base into hole. Turn the base mounting screw until spring brackets are firmly engaged above ceiling.
Sensor
Base Assembly
Base Installation
Sensor Installation
MOUNTING
20
65 Adjustable Vertical
344 Adjustable Horizontal 52 Fixed Optics D:S = 1:1
MODEL TY7321A1009 DESCRIPTION Infrared room temperature transmitter, ceiling mount
691-K0A
Control transformer, 120:24 VAC, 40 VA, Class 2
RELATED PRODUCTS
1290
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES Two, easy to use dual setup dials Solid state electronics Two PNP switching outputs No software needed Local LEDs for power and switching status
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE SWITCH TK SERIES
The IFM Efector TK Series Temperature Switch is a versatile temperature switch that is congured for set point and reset through two radial setting rings. These temperature switches are ideal for maximum and minimum temperature indication applications. The switch points can be set up out of the box without being installed and applied to the system. Once set, they can be locked by a third rotating ring. The TK Series is available with either set point and reset adjustment or two set points and a xed reset. Each TK Series Temperature Switch should be ordered with a separate cable assembly available in 6' (1.8 m), 15' (4.6 m), 30 ft (9.1 m) lengths. TK6330
WIRING - TK6330
1
V+
WIRING - TK7330
1
V+
4 Switched Output NO
Brown
TK6330
3 4
2 Switched Output NC 3
TK7330
3 4
Black
White
2: 4:
V-
2: 4:
TEMPERATURE
V-
1: V+ 2: Switched Output NC 3: V4: Switched Output NO
1: V+ 2: Switched Output NO 3: V4: Switched Output NO
Blue
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Media Temperature Range Setpoint Range TK6330 TK7330 Reset TK6330 TK7330 Contact Rating Contact Type TK6330 TK7330 Accuracy Repeatability Wetted Parts 9.6 to 32 VDC, 530 mA -13 to 284F (-25 to 140C) 3 to 284F (-16 to 140C) -4 to 284F (-20 to 140C) Adjustable: -4 to 277F (-20 to 136C) Fixed: 9F (5C) 0.5A DC PNP (sourcing) 1 NO, 1 NC, open collector transistor 2 NO, open collector transistor 5.4F (3.0C) 0.18F (0.1C) Stainless 316L/1.4404 Power Green LED Switching status Yellow LED (Energized = Switched) Shock 50g (11ms) Vibration Resistance 20g (10 to 2000 Hz) Operating Temperature -13 to 158F (-25 to 70C) Enclosure IP67; Material: PBT (Pocan); PC (Makrolon); FPM (Viton); stainless steel 316L Process Connection " NPT Wiring Terminations 4 pin M12 Electrical connector (order separately) Dimensions 1.06" diameter x 4.15"H (2.7 x 10.5 cm) Approvals UL File E179189, CE Weight 0.25 lb (0.11 Kg) Warranty 2 years Visual Indication
20
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1291
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE SWITCH TK SERIES
DIMENSIONS
TK6330 TK7330
SET
2 3
SWITCH 1
RESET
4 5
2 3
NEW!
in (cm)
1.06 (2.7) M12x1
4 5 6
SWITCH 2
1/4 -18 NPT

1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: Locking ring Setting rings (manually adustable after unlocking) LED green: supply voltage O.K. Setting marks LED yellow: value [SET] reached, OUT1 = ON / OUT2 = OFF Process connection 1/4'' NPT pin 4 = OUT1 / pin 2 = OUT2 Minimum distance between [SET] and [RESET] = 5.4F (TK6330) To obtain the setting accuracy: Set both rings to the minimum value, then set the requested values.
0.32 (0.82)
TEMPERATURE
MODEL TK6330 TK7330 DESCRIPTION TK Series temperature switch, adjustable reset, 3 to 284F (-16 to 140C), 1 NO 1 NC contacts TK Series temperature switch, xed reset, 9F (5C) -4 to 284F (-20 to 140C), 2 NO contacts
*Connector required, see below
20
DCP-1.5-W DCPA-1.2 E30094 EVC001 EVC002 EVC003 EVC004 EVC005 EVC006 EVC007 EVC008 EVC009
RELATED PRODUCTS Power supply, 24 VAC IN to 24 VDC OUT Power supply, 120 VAC IN to 24 VAC/24 VDC OUT VK/TK Series protective cover 6' (1.8 m) foot straight connector 15' (4.6 m) straight connector 30' (9.1 m) straight connector 6' (1.8 m) right-angled connector 15' (4.6 m) right-angled connector 30' (9.1 m) right-angled connector 6' (1.8 m) right angled connector with LED indication 15' (4.6 m) right angled connector with LED indication 30' (9.1 m) right angled connector with LED indication
1292
1.38 (3.5)
1.06 (2.7)
PAGE 995 994
1.89 (4.8)
3.78 (9.6)
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
4.15 (10.6)
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
WARRANTY 1 year
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR THERMOWELLS AND WELL ADAPTERS WB, WS
WB and WS Bulb Wells are used with standard or custom length PreCon immersion thermistors and Type 63, 71, 81, 85 and 91 RTD sensors by using the FB-3 (brass) or FS-3 (stainless steel) adapter. These wells are also used directly with Minco immersion sensors and are designed to be installed into a standard 1/2" saddle or Thredolet.
FB-3 Adapter FS-3 TCC-12
WB Brass Wells are compatible with noncorrosive liquids. They will withstand a maximum temperature of 400F (204C) at a static pressure of 1000 psi (6.9MPa). WS 304 Stainless Steel Wells are compatible with corrosive or noncorrosive liquids. These will withstand a maximum temperature of 1000F (538C) at a static pressure of 4500 psi (31 MPa).
TCC-111
WS-4
WB-6
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
0.5 (1.27)
D B C External Dimensions
1/2" NPT
MODEL
0.75 (1.91)
1.13 (2.86)
ELEMENT LENGTH A
INSERTION LENGTH B
SHANK DIA LENGTH C
OVERALL LENGTH D
1.75* (4.44)
1/2" NPT
1/8" NPSM
0.26 (0.66) 0.5 (1.27)
0.88 (2.22)
A Internal Dimensions
B A D
WB-2.5 WS-2.5 WB-4 WS-4 WB-6 WS-6 WB-9 WS-9 FB-3
2.5 (6.35) 2.5 (6.35) 4.0 (10.16) 4.0 (10.16) 6.0 (15.24) 6.0 (15.24) 9.0 (22.86) 9.0 (22.86) 0.44 (1.12)
1.4 (3.56) 1.4 (3.56) 2.5 (6.35) 2.5 (6.35) 4.5 (11.43) 4.5 (11.43) 7.5 (19.05) 7.5 (19.05) 0.31 (0.79)
N/A N/A N/A N/A 0.625 (1.59) 0.625 (1.59) 0.625 (1.59) 0.625 (1.59) 0.5 (1.27)
2.75 (6.99) 2.75 (6.99) 4.3 (10.92) 4.3 (10.92) 6.3 (16.00) 6.3 (16.00) 9.3 (23.62) 9.3 (23.62) 0.75 (1.91)
TEMPERATURE
FB-3 FS-3
*For WB-2.5 and WS-2.5 the head dimension is 1.5" long
NOTE: Inside threads are 1/2" NPSM; outside threads are 1/2" NPT.
MODEL WB WBF WS WSF FB-3 FS-3 DESCRIPTION Brass well Brass well with FB-3 1/2" to 1/8" well adapter 304 stainless steel well 304 stainless steel well with FS-3 1/2" to 1/8" well adapter 1/2" to 1/8" brass well adapter for use with Precon and T102 sensors 1/2" to 1/8" stainless steel well adapter for use with Precon and T102 sensors LENGTH DESIGNATION (well only) 2.5 4 6 9 XX WBF 9 2.5" element length 4.0" element length 6.0" element length 9.0" element length Specify custom length (12", 15", 18", or 24") Precon XL-probe length in (cm) 2.5 (6.35) 4 (10.16) 6 (15.24) 9 (22.86) 12-24 Minco probe length in (cm) 2 (5.08) 3.5 (8.89) 5.5 (13.97) 8.5 (20.40) XX - 0.5 = Probe length
20
Example: WBF-9 brass well with 9" element length and FB-3 adapter
TCC-111 TCC-12
RELATED PRODUCTS Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml
PAGE 1298 1298
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1293
TEMPERATURE
DESCRIPTION
WEL-B and WEL-S Sensor Wells are used with standard length Kele and Precon branded immersion thermistor and RTD sensors. These wells may be used with 5" (12.7 cm) Minco immersion sensors by using the "H" option adapter. The well is designed to be installed into a standard 1/2" saddle or Thredolet The WEL-B Brass Thermowell is the standard thermowell for inserting into noncorrosive liquid lines. It will withstand a maximum temperature of 400F (204C) and a maximum static pressure of 1000 psig (6.9 MPa).The WEL-S 304 Stainless Steel Thermowell is inserted into corrosive liquid pipe lines. It will withstand a maximum temperature of 1000F (538C) and a maximum static pressure of 4500 psig (31 MPa). The F2S-D Stainless Steel, F2N-D Nylon, or the F2B-D Brass Well Adapter allows a 1/4" (0.64 cm) diameter sensor probe with a 1/2" NTSM tting to be used with a standard WEL-B or WEL-S Thermowell. WARRANTY 1 year
SENSOR THERMOWELLS AND WELL ADAPTERS F2B-D, F2N-B, F2S-D, WEL-B, WEL-S
NEW!
F2S-D F2B-D F2N-D TCC-12 WEL-B WEL-S TCC-111
1/2" NPSM Female Thread 0.69 0.63 (1.75) (1.58) 1/2" NPSM Female Thread 1.31 (3.33) 1/8" NPSM Male Fitting 1/8" NPSM Male Fitting F2N-D Nylon F2B-D Brass F2S-D Stainless Steel
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1/8-27 NPSM Internal Thread 1/2" NPT
TEMPERATURE
4.94 (12.54)
3.25 (8.26)
0.5 (1.27)
5.13 (13.03)
WEL-B Brass Well or WEL-S Stainless Steel Well
(insertion length add 0.31" (0.97)) Well Adapters
MODEL WEL
20
WEL
F2B-D F2N-D F2S-D TCC-111 TCC-12
DESCRIPTION Bulb wells B Brass bulb well S 304 Stainless steel bulb well OPTIONAL ADAPTER F2B-D* brass adapter for use with WEL-B H F2S-D* stainless steel adapter for use with WEL-S B H Example: WEL-B brass bulb well with F2B-D brass adapter
* For use with Minco sensor probe length LLL=5.5"
RELATED PRODUCTS Brass adapter 1/2 NPT to 1/8 NPS adapter Nylon adapter 1/8 NPSM x 1/2 NPSM Stainless steel adapter 1/8 NPS x 1/2 NPSM Thermal conductive compound 111 ml tub Thermal conductive compound tube, 12 ml PAGE
1298 1298 March 2014
1294
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
XA XA XA
in (cm)
TEMPERATURE
OPTIONS SENSOR OPTIONS
GREENFIELD FITTING (factory installed) Option available with ST-D sensor
SETPOINT OPTION FOR FLUSH SENSOR (ST-S*) Two-wire with resistance from 0 to 10,000 (0 to 1500 optional XA1500), flush enclosure with pigtails for the connection
XG
SETPOINT OPTION FOR EXECUTIVE SENSOR (ST-S*E) Two-wire with resistance from 10,000 to 30,000, (1000 to 3000, opt. XA10K),(1000 to 1400, opt. XA2K)
HANDY-BOX HOUSING (factory installed) Equipped with eleven 1/2" knockouts, option available with ST-A, ST-D, and ST-W sensors
4"
2.13
1.88
XH
TEMPERATURE
SETPOINT OPTION FOR SPACE SENSOR (ST-S*P) Two-wire with resistance from 0 to 10,000 (0 to 1500 optional XA1500), space enclosure with pigtails for the connection
PLASTIC EUROPEAN-TYPE HANDY BOX Complete with four 3/4" cutouts, two open cable cutouts and snap-on cover, option available on all ST-A, ST-W, and ST-D sensors
in (cm)
2.95 (7.5)
2.95 (7.5)
1.65 (4.2)
XHP
20
1/2" STANDARD SERVICE CONDUIT (LB) FITTING Available for the ST-A all-purpose and ST-W immersion sensors
4.625 (11.75)
1/2" SEALTITE STRAIGHT FITTING Used for liquid-tight connection, available for the ST-W immersion sensors
2.0 (5.08)
1/2" NPT 4.0 (10.2)
1/2" NPT
XCO
XLT
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1295
TEMPERATURE
OPTIONS SENSOR OPTIONS
CUSTOM LOGO Any logo or wording added to the space or executive enclosure, minimum order and customer artwork required
NEW!
in (cm)
1.0 (2.5) 0.25 (0.63)
SECURITY SCREWS For use with ST-S* sensors, see SD-6 spanner screwdriver
XK MOMENTARY PUSH BUTTON Wired N.O. with pigtails, N.C. available upon request for flush and executive enclosures
XS
ANALOG BIMETAL THERMOMETER Measures 50 to 90F for ST-S*E sensors XTA Measures 13 to 29C for ST-S*E sensors XTAC
XTA
Space Executive XM Decorator XTA/XTAC
TEMPERATURE
MOMENTARY MEMBRANE PUSH BUTTON Wired N.O. with pigtails or to terminals when used with options requiring circuit cards, available with executive room enclosures only
XME
CLM-20 Limits the output of any 4-20 mA transmitter to a factory set 20 mA, wired in series, and adds 125 of effective load to the transmitter XME
20
DIGITAL THERMOMETER OPTION 3-1/2 digit display readout from 15 to 32C with one-year battery, 3/8" high, display updates every 10 seconds RED LED INDICATOR LAMP Powered externally with 24 VAC/ VDC and connected via a terminal block
in (cm)
Adjust Pot (18-22 mA) (red) 5.0 (12.70)
+
1.75 (4.44)
(black) 5.0 (12.70)
0.5 (1.27)
CLM-20
Red Indicator Lamp
XPL
1296
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
ADJUSTABLE PIPE BRACKET MODEL APB-28 ADAPTER BRACKET MODEL BKT-1 DRYWALL ADAPTER BRACKET MODEL BKT-2 ADAPTER PLATE MODEL ISPL-1, SSPL-1 SENSOR ADAPTER PLATE MODEL 10-531 SENSOR COVER REMOVER TOOL 1/16" MODEL KT-1
TEMPERATURE
ACCESSORIES FOR TEMPERATURE PRODUCTS TEMPERATURE SENSOR ACCESSORIES
The APB-28 is used with Model ST-R*SC, STR* S, KTM*SC, KTM*S sensors. The bracket can be used on pipe sizes from 2" to 8" (5.08 to 20.32 cm) outside diameter. Precon TCC-12 thermal conducting compound should be used with the bracket to improve heat transfer between the pipe and the temperature sensor. Insulate approximately 2' (61m) on each side of the probe for best results.
in (cm)
Adjustable for 2" to 8" pipe (5-20 cm)
APB-28
The BKT-1 can be used with Models WMB-1 or ST-S*P to mount directly on a standard electrical box. Mounting screws are provided.
4.25 (10.80)
BKT-1
in (cm)
2.5 (6.35)
The BKT-2 is used to mount wall sensors directly to drywall quickly and securely. Simply cut a hole and bend the ears over the back of the drywall. Then, secure with supplied drywall screws
4.25 (8.25)
BKT-2
TEMPERATURE
in (cm)
2.75 (6.99)
The ISPL-1 ivory model and the SSPL-1 stainless steel model are standard light switch plates that can be used with the BKT-1 as attractive mounting plates for installing a Model WMB-1 or ST-S*P on a standard electrical box. Mounting screws are provided.
4.25 (10.80)
SSPL-2
7"
32''
ISPL-1
C
4''
2''
A B
29
C
13/16'' 1''
The 10-531 plate is ideal for cover mounting holes from old sensors. For the KTR*, ST-S*EW, ST-T90EW, ST-T91K.
5.25"
D B
20
3''
3''
D B
C A
Rear View (not actual size)
10-531
The KT-1 tool ts Kele and most TAC, Johnson Controls, and Siemens covers. The tool has a 1/16" hex top and a reversible blade (flat and Philips).
in (cm) 2.25
(5.72)
1.0 (2.54) Insert
2.65 (6.73)
0.37 (0.95)
Exposed
KT-1
TM
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1297
TEMPERATURE

BRUSHED ALUMINUM FACEPLATE MODEL PN-10 The PN-10 is a blank Brushed Aluminum Faceplate for use with the WMB-1 enclosure. Customized logos are available.
in (cm)
NEW!
Shown with custom logo
1.63 (4.13) 2.63 (6.67)
PN-10
DECORATIVE FACEPLATE MODELS PN-26, PN-32 The gray PN-26 or tan PN-32 Decorative Faceplates are available for use with the WMB-2 enclosure. Customized logos are available.
in (cm)
Shown with custom logo
1.38 (3.49)
1.75 (4.45)
PN-26
RAW SENSOR CLIP MODEL PN-46 The PN-46 is used where an aluminum clip is desired to mount a raw sensor into an existing enclosure. The PN- 46 includes adhesive backing for easy installation.
in (cm)
0.31 (0.8)
0.63 (1.59)
PN-46
TEMPERATURE
SPANNER DRIVER MODEL SD-6 The SD-6 Spanner Driver is used to install the security screws (XS option) for the ST-S* sensor.
in (cm)
3.88 (9.84)
SD-6
XS Option Screw Head
THERMAL CONDUCTING COMPOUND MODEL TCC-12
20
The TCC-12 Thermal Conducting Compound is a metal oxidelled, dielectric, silicone-based compound that facilitates heat transfer by lling voids and gaps between mating surfaces. The operating temperature range is -65 to 400F (-54 to 204C). The compound is packaged in convenient, single-application, 0.13 fl oz (12 gram) tubes. THERMAL CONDUCTING COMPOUND MODEL TCC-111 The TCC-111 Thermal Conducting Compound consists of an aluminum powder in a barium grease-based compound. It facilitates heat transfer by lling voids and gaps between mating surfaces. The operating temperature limit is 300F (148C). The compound is packaged in a convenient 3.75 fl oz (111 mL) tub.
TCC-12
TCC-111 March 2014
1298
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
SOLAR COMPENSATOR MODEL M-2500 PRECISION RESISTORS MODEL 250R-3-1, 13F142, ZGR01, TR10K MODEL WMB NON-CFC FREEZE SPRAY MODEL ES-1051
TEMPERATURE
in (cm)
1.75 (4.45)
The Model M-2500 Solar Compensator is a non-directional device used to compensate for the solar effects on buildings. Mount outside in sunlight to measure the solar gain experienced by the building envelope. Any 1/4" probe may be inserted into the solar chamber. This device is ideal for tuning perimeter hot water reset to each building's requirements.
4.25 (10.8)
4.31 (10.95) 5.86 (14.88) 7.13 (18.11)
M-2500
Probe Insert
0.31 (0.79)
1/2 EMT Conduit Nut
3.75 (9.53)
The 250R-3-1 is a 250 3-watt 1% resistor used to convert a 4-20 mA signal to a 1-5 volt signal and is perfect for use in areas with limited access. The 13F142 is a 250, 3-watt, 1% resistor packaged with instructions to convert a 4-20 mA signal to a 1-5V signal. The ZGR01 is a 500, 1/2-watt, 1.2% resistor used to convert a 4-20mA signal to a 2-10V signal. The TR10K is a 10,000, 1/4-watt, 0.1% resistor with alligator clips for static testing of Type 3 or 24 thermistors at 77F. WALL SENSOR ENCLOSURE 13F142 TR10K
TEMPERATURE
The WMB is a vented, plastic wall enclosure. A raw sensor can be snapped directly in contact with the aluminum faceplate. The WMB can be mounted directly to sheet rock block walls using the screws provided. WMB-1 WMB-2 WMB-3 WMB-4
20
The ES-1051 is ideal for quick point-to-point sensor wiring verication and freezestat operability. Freeze each sensor in order, check the trend printout, and rework the terminations as needed. Each unit contains 8 fl oz (235 mL).
ES-1051 March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1299
TEMPERATURE
ROOM TEMPERATURE DISPLAY PLATE PAL SERIES
DESCRIPTION
EXTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS JACK MODEL XJ1 For use with handheld terminals, requires adapter cable CCRJ11AD
XJ1 External Jack (see pinout below)
OUT
POT
XJ1
Top View Pin Numbers
IN
SENSOR
NEW!
INTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS JACK Model XJ2 For use with handheld terminals
Top Down Pin Numbers
OUT IN
POT
1 2 3 4 X6 7 8
P S
COMP EXT SENS SENS
1 2 3 4 5 6
SENSOR
XJ2 (under cover)
XJ2 Internal RJ11 Jack
P S
COMP EXT SENS SENS
CABLE ACCESSORY FOR XJ1 MODEL CC-RJ11AD The CC-RJ11AD is used to interface to the XJ1 option on the ST-S*E sensor. The CC-RJ11AD is 6" (15.24 cm) long with an 8-pin (four pins used) connector for the XJ1 side and a female RJ11 connector on the other.
Inter-Sensor Communications
CustomerSupplied Handheld Terminal
XJ1 Pinout XJ2 Pinout 8-Pin Connector Termination RJ11 Connector 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUT + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IN + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Adapter Pinout, CC-RJ11AD 6 - RT2 5 - OUT + 4 - OUT 3 - IN 2 - IN+
Female RJ11
4 8 2 6 3
CC-RJ11AD XJ1 External Jack

OUT
POT
TEMPERATURE
not used
plug
Mounted under board
7 8 5 6 3 4 2
CustomerSupplied Telephone Extension XJ2 Internal Jack
IN
SENSOR
P S
COMP EXT SENS SENS
PLATE PAL ROOM TEMPERATURE INDICATOR 11000, 12000 SERIES The Plate Pal is a room temperature indicator, built into a switch plate, for either F or C and % RH. GPA 76 or LR44 battery included. Colors are available in white or ivory. MODEL 12201 11101 12100 12200 11100 12101 DESCRIPTION Single gang ivory toggle, F/C and % RH Single gang white rocker, F/C and % RH Single gang white toggle, F/C Single gang ivory toggle, F/C Single gang white paddle, F/C Single gang white toggle, F/C and % RH in (cm)
Two-digit, 0.5" LCD display 75F Standard toggle switch 2.4 (6.1) 5.44 (13.8) 3.81 (9.7)
20
APPLICATION
The Plate Pal is used for retrot of wall mounted lighting plates when a temperature or humidity display is needed. It ts over a standard toggal or paddle plate and mounts to a standard US handy box without adapters. The switch is still used to control the appliance under power. 11101 12100
Standard paddle switch
1.31 (3.3) 3.125 (7.9)
1300
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

SENSOR TYPE 3 21 22 24 27 42 51 81 85 91 5
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR LOCATION SCREENING/FEWER CALLBACKS
At some point in each building automation professionals career, there comes a rite of passage. Its when the boss hands off a set of floor plans with no space sensor locations marked, and orders him to get the job done. In some cases, the boss (or one of the old-timers) takes a few minutes to explain the rationale for sensor placement, the pitfalls to be avoided, and the subtle variations that have proven to reduce or eliminate complaints and callbacks over the years. Some companies even require formal training and a competency trial before conferring the coveted title of Sensor Spotter. Far too often, however, the get-it-done command comes in an e-mail message from BOB (Boss On Beach), and there is no opportunity for discussion. We sincerely hope that all of our customers who have been tossed into the deep end for such a swimming lesson know that they can call Kele (or pop over to www. kele.com) and tap into hundreds of man-years of engineering experience. Were here to make it easy for you its what we do. For example, here are some of the obvious and not-so obvious factors to consider when spotting and installing wall-mount temperature or humidity sensors: 1) The most obvious factor of all is making sure the sensor location is in the space served by the air handler (or other terminal unit) with which it is associated. If the ceiling is in place, its best to at least have a chat with the folks who installed the sheet metal make sure nobody decided to do some re-zoning without informing you. This has bitten more than just a few of us over the years (your humble author included). 2) Avoid locations in which the sun will shine on the sensor. In fact, its better to stay at least several feet away from any portion of wall that gets direct sunlight. Surface temperatures of sunlit walls can be as much as 20F (11C) higher than room air, and this heat can be conducted to a nearby sensor. 3) Avoid outside walls, unless the only other choice involves direct sunshine. 4) Avoid other sources of heat within the space. If not yet occupied, ask where electrical equipment will be placed. A temperature sensor on a wall above a copy machine can make a room mighty cold. If sensing humidity, an elevated temperature at the sensor location will cause it to report lower values than a sensor at actual room temperature. 5) Avoid the supply air stream. Note that this is not always as simple as it sounds. For those who havent been exposed to it before, the Coanda effect can cause grief. Coanda described the tendency of fluid streams above a certain velocity to cling to a surface. Its particularly signicant with linear slot diffusers, but it happens with all diffusers to a degree. The point is that even if the room supply air diffuser is a good distance away from the wall, its output may travel across the ceiling and down the wall, causing false readings at the sensor. Its best to line up with the corners of diffusers if they cant be avoided altogether. Weve seen cases in which shelves had to be built to shield a wall sensor from direct blasts of supply air. 6) Avoid leaks. Even in interior rooms, the air from the space within the wall can be warmer or cooler than the conditioned area. In some cases, the moisture content can be very different, too. Seal the holes, including the hole for the sensor cable. 7) Finally, insulate from the wall if needed. If the best choice for a sensor location is on an exterior wall, remember that the wall itself will heat up and cool down according to outdoor conditions. Also, when night setback is practiced, wall surface temperatures take many more hours to return to equilibrium on morning startup than the room air temperature does. An insulating pad such as the BA-FOAMBACK is a good solution, though weve seen cases in which standoffs were needed in order to totally eliminate the effects of a hot or cold wall. If followed, the tips outlined here will help keep the really troublesome locations out of the picture when spotting sensors. These tips are not the end-all, though. There will always be rooms in which sensor location is debatable, and those debates will always be fun to have. In fact, we hope youll call or e-mail our Kele Technical Sales staff when they arise. Wed love to be included!
TEMPERATURE SENSOR DESCRIPTION 10,000 thermistor @ 77F, Type III material 2252 thermistor @77F, Type II material 3000 thermistor @77F, Type II material 10,000 thermistor @77F, Type II material 100,000 thermistor @77F, Type II material 20,000 thermistor @77F, Type IV material 1800 thermistor @77F, Type V material 100 platinum RTD @ 32F, 385 curve 1000 platinum RTD @ 32F, 385 curve 1000 platinum RTD @ 32F, 375 curve 1000 Balco RTD @ 70F TYPICAL SENSOR USER AET, American Automatrix, Andover, Carrier, Delta, Invensys, Teletrol, York Anderson Cornelius, JCI (A319) Alerton, ASI, ATS, Snyder General Alerton, Automated Logic, TAC (INET), Triangle Microsystems, Trane Siemens (Landis and Staefa) Honeywell (XL) TAC (VISTA) Transmitter available for any user JCI, Siemens, Trane (transmitter available for any user) JCI, Siemens (transmitter available for any user) TAC (Siebe) (transmitter available for any user)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1301
TEMPERATURE
20
TEMPERATURE
PRECON THERMISTORQUALITY
History
In 1945, Bell Labs rened the process of making stable and reproducible thermistors. The telephone company then started to use this technology in large quantities. Precon, now Kele Precision Manufacturing (KPM), started producing thermistors in 1967 and has satised customers for over 36 years. Like Bell Labs, KPM controlled the complete manufacturing process in order to manufacture a superior product. Other manufacturers purchase prefabricated glass bead thermistors, which are usually procured from the lowest bidder.
Manufacturing Process
Precon brand sensors start with the highest quality chemical ingredients, using only the best raw materials to ensure precision and stability. The mixture is pre-aged to render the precise thermistor curve required, guaranteeing repeatability and long term stability, specied at 0.24F for ve years. The leads are then attached, and the sensor is trimmed and chemically cleaned. This step ensures interchangeability of 0.36F and eliminates impurities for long life. At this point, each sensor is tested before encapsulation. This produces a 100% product yield. The Precon sensors exclusive encapsulation, in a heat-conductive housing, makes the sensor complete. It protects the sensor from moisture and physical damage and provides a heat dissipation constant of 1.5 mW/F. Each sensor is then inserted into the appropriate mounting hardware for the HVAC application. This includes wall, duct, immersion, OSA, pipe, freezer, concealed, or custom housing. Each mounting design was specically developed to make mounting easy and durable for HVAC use.
NEW!
PRECON Encapsulated Bare Bead Competition
10K Thermistor Error Due to Self-Heating Effect @ 75F
9.00 8.00 7.00 6.00 Brand Y Self-Heating Error @ 0.28 mW/F
Comparisons
Manufacturing quality is obvious when comparing a Precon sensor side by side with a typical HVAC counterpart. It is easy to pick out the sensor that lasts! Heat dissipation is critical to good temperature measurement. As seen in the graph below, Precon sensors dissipate heat at three times the rate of glass bead-type sensors, so be sure to ask if the thermistor you buy is based on a glass bare bead sensor. The most common BAS thermistor voltage is 2-3 VDC. At the 2V level, the Precon sensor is within 0.3F of its zero-power point, while the competition is within 0.75 to 1.5F. Since power (heat) is proportional to the applied voltage squared, the error value grows rapidly as monitoring voltage increases. When this error is added to the basic accuracy of the thermistor, errors begin to accumulate and become unacceptably large. Large errors cause energy waste and signicant comfort problems if not corrected. Preconsensors take the risk out of temperature sensing by reducing the errors added by the BAS.
TEMPERATURE
Benets
All Precon sensors are equipped with a lifetime warranty. The process above is the best in the world and KPM backs it up. Mean time between sensor failure is over 117 years. This number is even more amazing considering it includes all failures of any kind, including customer damage or misapplication. The fact is, Precon thermistors grow more stable with time.
Error In F
20
The biggest benet is to your customer no warranty call backs. Long sensor life is typically far beyond the building life. Each warranty call back due to sensor failure costs not only a minimum of one hour of down time for your service technician but also incalculable damage to your reputation and perceived competence with your customer. Precon sensors are the most cost-effective when looking at the big picture of installation system performance, no call backs, and company reputation. Sensors are often the smallest cost on any project. Why short change your customer? Use a Precon sensor.
5.00 4.00 3.00 2.00 1.00 0.00 1.00
Brand X Self-Heating Error @ 0.56 mW/F
PreCon Self-Heating Error @ 1.50 mW/F 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00
Applied Voltage From BAS Input
1302
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
FAHRENHEIT
Element Code Base Resistance TCR F Type 78 Type Type 85 2000 71/81 1000 Nickel 100 Platinum Iron Platinum @ 32F @ 70F @ 32F 0.00385 Ohms 0.00385 Ohms 842.59 864.57 886.51 908.42 930.29 952.11 973.90 995.65 1017.36 1039.04 1060.67 1082.27 1103.83 1125.36 1146.84 1168.29 1189.71 1211.09 1232.43 1253.73 1275.00 1296.23 1317.42 1338.58 1359.70 1380.79 1401.84 1422.85 1443.83 1485.67 1506.54 1527.38 1548.17 1568.94 Ohms Type 91 1000 Platinum @ 32F 0.00375 846.58 868.01 889.41 910.76 932.07 953.34 974.57 995.77 1016.92 1038.04 1059.12 1080.17 1101.18 1122.15 1143.08 1163.98 1184.84 1205.66 1226.45 1247.19 1267.90 1288.58 1309.21 1329.81 1350.37 1370.90 1391.39 1411.84 1432.25 1472.97 1493.27 1513.53 1533.76 1553.95 0.00527 Ohms -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 260 270 280 290 300 84.26 86.46 88.65 90.84 93.03 95.21 97.39 99.57 101.74 103.90 106.07 108.23 110.38 112.54 114.68 116.83 118.97 121.11 123.24 125.37 127.50 129.62 131.74 133.86 135.97 138.08 140.18 142.29 144.38 148.57 150.65 152.74 154.82 156.89 1543.24 1585.02 1627.74 1671.38 1715.90 1761.28 1807.48 1854.46 1902.22 1950.74 2000.01 2050.02 2100.75 2152.21 2204.38 2257.24 2310.79 2365.02 2419.91 2475.46 2531.65 2588.47 2645.92 2703.98 2762.64 2821.89 2881.72 2942.13
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR RESISTANCE CHART RTD SENSORS
RTD SENSOR RESISTANCE

CENTIGRADE
Type 5 1000 Nickel Iron @ 32F Type 78 Type Element Type 85 2000 71/81 Code Base 1000 Nickel 100 Resistance Platinum Iron Platinum @ 21C @ 0C @ 0C @ 0C TCR C 779.00 797.50 894.70 835.40 854.80 874.60 894.70 915.10 935.90 956.90 978.30 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 260 1653.81 1735.31 1816.81 1903.45 1990.09 2081.54 2172.99 2269.00 2365.01 2465.34 2565.66 2670.05 2774.44 2882.64 2990.84 3102.61 3214.37 3329.46 3444.54 3562.69 3680.84 3801.81 3922.77 0.00527 Ohms 0.00385 Ohms 84.26 88.21 92.16 96.08 100.00 103.90 107.80 111.68 115.54 119.40 123.24 127.08 130.90 134.70 138.50 142.29 146.06 149.82 153.58 157.31 161.04 164.75 168.46 172.15 175.84 179.50 183.17 186.80 190.45 197.69 0.00385 Ohms 842.59 882.13 921.60 960.83 1000.00 1039.04 1077.95 1116.75 1155.45 1193.99 1232.43 1270.75 1308.95 1347.03 1385.00 1422.85 1460.60 1498.20 1535.80 1573.08 1610.40 1647.50 1684.60 1721.46 1758.40 1794.96 1831.70 1868.00 1904.50 1976.90 Type 63 Type 91 1000 1000 Nickel Platinum @ @ 0C 0C 0.00375 Ohms 846.58 885.13 923.55 961.84 1000.00 1038.04 1075.96 1113.76 1151.45 1189.01 1226.45 1263.76 1300.96 1338.04 1375.00 1411.84 1448.56 1485.15 1521.63 1557.99 1594.22 1630.34 1666.33 1702.21 1737.96 1773.60 1809.11 1844.50 1879.78 1949.96 Ohms 699.00 745.30 792.80 841.30 891.10 942.00 994.10 1047.50 1102.20 1158.20 1215.60 1274.30 1334.40 1396.00 1459.00 1523.50 1589.60 1657.20 1726.40 1797.20 1869.70 1943.80 2019.70 2097.30 2176.70 779.00 875.26 799.82 877.28 919.26 956.90 995.66 1035.44 1076.20 1113.89 1160.90 1204.64 1249.88 1287.32 1343.00 1391.00 1440.20 Type 5 1000 Nickel Iron @ 0C Type 63 1000 Nickel @ 32F
Ohms
699.00 724.72 753.22 777.96 806.66 831.40 859.98 885.91
913.72 942.00 970.94
1000.00 1000.00 1029.69 1022.00 1063.13 1044.40 1091.04 1067.00 1123.20 1090.00 1152.37 1113.30 1183.71 1137.00 1215.60 1160.90 1248.21 1185.20 1284.32 1209.50 1315.62 1234.70 1348.09 1260.00 1399.19 1285.60 1419.63 1311.40 1452.44 1337.70 1487.67 1364.20 1523.50 1391.00 1560.22 1418.20
TEMPERATURE
20
More detailed charts are available at www.kele.com in Technical Reference.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1303
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR RESISTANCE CHART PRECON THERMISTORS
The Precon sensor has a dissipation constant in still air at 25C of 2.7 mW/C. The heat dissipation constant is an expression in milliwatts of the power required to raise the temperature of a thermistor 1C above the ambient.
PRECON THERMISTOR SENSOR RESISTANCE

PRECON TYPE II
Model 21 2252 @ 77F 0.36F from 32 to 158F Resistance () 63.08K 52.72K 44.20K 37.19K 31.38K 26.57K 22.57K 19.22K 16.42K 14.07K 12.08K 10.41K 8988 7782 6755 5877 5126 4482 3927 3448 3035 2676 2365 2094 1858 1651 1471 1312 1173 1050 941.8 846.0 761.3 686.1 619.4 559.9 507.0 459.7 417.5 379.6 345.7 315.2 287.8 263.1 240.9 220.8 202.6 186.2 171.3 157.8 145.5 134.3 124.2 114.9 106.4 98.7 Model 22 3000 @ 77F 0.36F from 32 to 158F Resistance () 84.09K 70.27K 58.92K 49.56K 41.83K 35.41K 30.07K 25.61K 21.88K 18.74K 16.10K 13.87K 11.98K 10.37K 8999 7830 6830 5971 5231 4594 4043 3565 3150 2789 2475 2200 1959 1748 1562 1399 1254 1127 1014 913.9 825.0 745.9 675.4 612.4 556.2 505.8 460.7 420.1 383.7 350.8 321.2 294.5 270.3 248.4 228.5 210.5 194.1 179.2 165.6 153.2 141.9 131.5 Model 24 10,000 @ 77F 0.36F from 32 to 158F Resistance () 280.1K 234.1K 196.3K 165.1K 139.3K 118.0K 100.2K 85.35K 72.91K 62.48K 53.64K 46.23K 39.91K 34.56K 30.00K 26.10K 22.76K 19.90K 17.44K 15.31K 13.48K 11.88K 10.50K 9298 8250 7331 6532 5826 5209 4663 4182 3757 3381 3047 2750 2486 2251 2041 1854 1686 1535 1400 1278 1168 1070 980.5 899.6 826.8 760.7 700.7 646.1 596.4 551.5 510.2 472.5 438.3 Model 27 100,000 @ 77F 0.36F @ 77F 1.3F from 32 to 158F Resistance () 2801K 2341K 1963K 1651K 1393K 1180K 1002K 853.5K 729.1K 624.8K 536.4K 462.3K 399.1K 345.6K 300.0K 261.0K 227.6K 199.0K 174.4K 153.1K 134.8K 118.8K 105.0K 92.98K 82.50K 73.31K 65.32K 58.26K 52.09K 46.63K 41.82K 37.57K 33.81K 30.47K 27.50K 24.86K 22.51K 20.41K 18.54K 16.86K 15.35K 14.00K 12.78K 11.68K 10.70K 9805 8996 8268 7607 7007 6461 5964 5515 5102 4725 4383
20
TempF -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240
NEW!
PRECON TYPE III PRECON TYPE IV
Model 3 10,000 @ 77F 0.36F from 32 to 158F Resistance () 203.6K 173.6K 148.3K 127.1K 109.2K 94.07K 81.23K 70.32K 61.02K 53.07K 46.27K 40.42K 35.39K 31.06K 27.31K 24.06K 21.24K 18.79K 16.65K 14.78K 13.15K 11.72K 10.46K 9354 8378 7516 6754 6078 5479 4947 4472 4049 3671 3333 3031 2759 2515 2296 2098 1920 1759 1614 1482 1362 1254 1156 1066 984.0 909.8 841.9 779.8 723.0 671.0 623.3 579.5 539.4 Model 42 20,000 @ 77F 0.36F from 32 to 158F Resistance () 672.1K 557.2K 463.4K 386.7K 323.7K 271.9K 228.0K 192.6K 163.1K 138.7K 118.3K 101.0K 86.60K 74.40K 64.10K 55.30K 47.89K 41.40K 36.10K 31.44K 27.46K 24.02K 21.06K 18.50K 16.29K 14.37K 12.69K 11.24K 9.97K 8.86K 7.88K 7.03K 6.27K 5.61K 5.03K 4.51K 4.06K 3.65K 3.29K 2.97K 2.69K 2.43K 2.20K 2.00K 1.82K 1.65K 1.51K 1.38K 1.26K 1.15K 1.05K 967.5 888.4 818.4 753.0 693.6
TEMPERATURE
1304
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
Offering Mechanical, Digital, and Communicating Thermostats to Complete your Projects.

Prestige IAQ | p. 1305 Series VT7600 | p. 1327 Series
UT8001 | p. 1367
Thermostat | p. 1392 Guards
1F80 Series | p. 1338
PXR4 Series | p. 1359

MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Accessories Testing Devices and Tools Thermostat Tools and Change-Over Thermostats. . . . . . . 1390 Sensor Mounting Accessories Thermostat Remote Sensor Accessories.. . . . . . . . . . 1391 Thermostat Guards Thermostat Guards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393 Bulb/Aqua Stats A19, A28, A319, A419 Series Bulb Thermostats .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378 Communicating Thermostats Prestige IAQ Programmable/Wireless Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305 VT7200, VT7300 Communicating Zone and FCU Communicating Thermostats (BACnet, LON, N2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321 VT7600 Communicating AHU Communicating Thermostat Single and Multistage, Programmable and Non-programmable (BACnet, LON, N2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312 T7350, W7350 Series T7350 Series Programmable Commercial Thermostats and W7350 Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 Fan Coil Thermostats .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310 VT7200, VT7300 Series Zone Thermostats and FCU Thermostats TB7100A100 MultiPro Series MultiPro Multispeed and Multipurpose Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332 TB6575, TB8575 SuitePro Series Digital Fan Coil Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346 T158, T168 Series Floating and Proportional Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1370 T170 Series Fan Coil Thermostat with ADA-Compliant Digital Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372 T180 Series Programmable Fan Coil Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374 T155, T167 Series Line and Low Voltage Two-Position and Proportional Thermostats . 1376 Low/High Limit Thermostats A11 Series Low Temperature Limit Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A70 Series Low & High Temperature Limit Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L480 Series Low Limit Temperature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSA, TF142 Low-Limit Temperature Controls .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TC-105, TC-100 Duct High Temperature Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380 1381 1382 1384 1385 1367 1368 1386 1388 1389
A19/A28/ | p. 1378 A319/A419
T H E R M O S TAT S & CONTROLLERS
T170 Series | p. 1372
Mechanical Thermostats ET Series, UT8001 Two-Position Room Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T22, T25, T26, T46 Line-Voltage Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TF115, TH109, and TRF115 Series NEMA 4X Industiral Controls Thermostats . . . . . . . T631F/G, TW155/255 Series NEMA 4X Rated Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TC-1100 Series Two Position Room Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zip Economizer | p. 1354
Programmable/Non-Programmable Thermostats 1F95, 1F95EZ and 1F97 Series Thermostats Big Blue and Blue Universal and Single Stage Programmable/Non-programmable Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323 VT7600 Series Single and Multistage Programmable and Non-programmable Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327 T87, TH3000, and TH4000 Series Residential Thermostats, Programmable and Nonprogrammable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330 TH5000, TH6000, TB7000 Series FocusPro Residential and Light Commercial Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334 TH8000 Series, TB8220 Series VisionPro Programmable Thermostats. . . . . . . . . . . 1336 1F80 Series Residential and Light Commercial Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338 T4000, T8000, and T12000 Series Thermostats Digital Display Programmable Thermostats .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342 1F72, 1E78 and 1F78 Series Thermostats Residential LCD Display Programmable/NonProgrammable Thermostats .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1344 Proportional Room Thermostats (No Fan Control) TB6980 and TB7980 Series Floating and Proportional Zone Thermostats .. . . . . . . . . . 1348 RTC-2P Proportional Room Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365 Stand Alone Controllers and Temperature Switches T775 Series Single or Multi-Loop Standalone Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System 450 System 450 Modular Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZIP Economizer Series Economizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PXR4 Setpoint Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R820 Series SCR Power Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCM-420A Setpoint Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350 1352 1354 1359 1361 1363
kele.com
NEW!
Suppy Voltage System Type

PROGRAMMABLE/WIRELESS THERMOSTAT PRESTIGE IAQ
The Prestige High Denition (HD) Color Touchscreen Thermostat provides control of 24 VAC of heating and cooling systems. RedLINK enabled to work with compatible wireless accessories. These newly updated thermostats come in a variety of colors and can be accessed via the internet or through the mobile app available from Honeywell. The new Prestige is on the leading edge of design and remote access when it comes to thermostats for both residential and light commercial applications. Check out the entire line for one that ts your application.
60% smaller than Prestige 2.0 and available in 4 colors Delta T Alerts and Diagnostics inform customers when their system is not operating as expected Residential or light commercial use User Interaction Log provides a searchable history of setting changes Assignable outputs for indoor air quality and staging control Selectable staging options Customizable service reminders Up to 4H/2C heat pump or 3H/2C conventional systems
Prestige IAQ-EIM
24 VAC 4 heat/2 cool heat pump and up to 3 heat/2 cool conventional
Sensor Type Temperature Onboard 20k NTC Humidity Capacitive Communication RedLINK devices Baud Rate 900 MHz frequency range Analog Input EIM 2 Universal inputs, temperature or dry contact selectable (not available with single- piece thermostat) Output EIM 7 Standalone 6 (USB on some models) Contact Rating EIM terminals W-O/B, Y, W3-Aux2, A-L/A Maximum Current 1.0A, EIM terminals G, U1, U2, U3 Maximum Current 0.5A EIM terminals W2-Aux1, Y2 Maximum Current 0.6A Temperature Sensor Accuracy 1.5 at 70F (0.75 at 21C)
Temperature Setting Range Heating 40 to 90F (4.5 to 32C) Cooling 50 to 99F (10 to 37C) Operating Temperature Thermostat 32 to 120F (0 to 48.9C) EIM -40 to 165F (-40 to 73.8C) Operating Humidity Thermostat 5% to 90% condensing, EIM 5% to 95% non-condensing Dimensions Thermostat Prestige IAQ 4-1/2"W x 3-1/2"H x 7/8"D (11.5 x 8.9 x 2.2 cm) Prestige 2.0 6-13/16"W x 3-7/8"H x 1-7/16"D (17.3 x 9.9 x 3.6 cm) EIM 9.34"H X 4.83"W X 1.6"D (23.7 x 12.3 x 4.1 cm) Measurement Range Building material and content dependent Weight 2.0 lb (maximum item) This device complies with Part 15 Approvals of the FCC Rules. (15.19, 15.21, 15.105) Yes RoHS Statement Warranty 5 years (excludes batteries)
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1305

WIRING - THX9321& THX9421
Typical wiring of a 3-heat / 2-cool heat pump system with one transformer.
Transformer 120 VAC 24 VAC C R Thermostat C Rc R U1
O/B AUX/E Y Y2 G L/A
CHANGEOVER VALVE BACKUP HEAT COMPRESSOR STAGE 1 COMPRESSOR STAGE 2 FAN RELAY COMPRESSOR MONITOR OR ZONE PANEL
NEW!
Typical wiring of a 3-heat / 2-cool heat pump system with two transformers.
Air Handler Transformer O/B 120 VAC 24 VAC C R Thermostat CHANGEOVER VALVE C AUX/E Y Y2 G L/A COMPRESSOR STAGE 1 COMPRESSOR STAGE 2 FAN RELAY COMPRESSOR MONITOR OR ZONE PANEL
1 3
Rc R U1 U1 U2 U2 120 VAC 24 VAC BACKUP HEAT
1 2
U1 U2 U2
Prestige THX9321 and heat pump system with one transformer Typical wiring of a 2-heat / 2-cool conventional system with one transformer.
Transformer 120 VAC 24 VAC C R Thermostat C Rc
Backup Heat Transformer
R C
Prestige THX9321 and heat pump system with two transformers Typical wiring for geothermal radiant heat, geothermal forced-air and backup heat with one transformer.
Transformer 120 VAC 24 VAC C R Thermostat C Rc R
W W2 Y Y2 G A
HEAT STAGE 1 HEAT STAGE 2 COMPRESSOR STAGE 1 COMPRESSOR STAGE 2 FAN RELAY
R U1
O/B AUX/E Y Y2 G L/A
CHANGEOVER VALVE BACKUP HEAT COMPRESSOR STAGE 1 COMPRESSOR STAGE 2 FAN RELAY COMPRESSOR MONITOR OR ZONE PANEL
U1 U2 U2
4
GEOTHERMAL RADIANT HEAT STAGE 1
U1 U1 U2 U2
Prestige THX9321 and 2-heat / 2-cool conventional system with one transformer
Prestige THX9321 and geothermal radiant heat, geothermal forced-air and backup heat with one transformer
1 U1 and U2 terminals are dry contacts. 2 L/A terminal sends continuous output when thermostat is set to EM HEAT mode except when set up for Economizer or TOD. See Economizer Module Wiring Diagrams beginning on page 151. 3 U1 or U2 terminals must be used for geothermal radiant heat (ISU 2010). Thermostat allows 2 stages of radiant heatgeothermal (stage 1) and boiler (stage 2). 4 U terminals are normally open dry contacts when set up for geothermal radiant heat. You must install a field jumper if radiant heat is powered by system transformer. Do NOT install a field jumper if radiant heat has its own transformer. 5 Remove jumper if using separate transformers. 6 Connect the THP9045 Wiresaver Module to the K terminal in heating/cooling applications that do not have a common wire at the thermostat. The K terminal cannot be used in heat-only applications. See THP9045 installation instructions for more information.
21
NOTE: For additional set-up, wiring, and operation, see installation manual.
1306
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING - EIM
EIM
TO THERMOSTAT O/B HEAT PUMP O/B AUX1 AUX2 STATUS LEDS POWER HEAT COOL FAN U1 U2 U3 AUX1 AUX2

Typical wiring of a heat pump system with up to 4-stage heat and 2-stage cool with one transformer
Typical wiring of a conventional system with up to 3-stage heat and 2-stage cool with one transformer
EIM
POWER HEAT STATUS LEDs COOL FAN U1 U2 U3
TO THERMOSTAT
FURNACE TRANSFORMER 120 VAC
24 C VAC CONV
CHANGEOVER VALVE BACKUP HEAT STAGE 1 BACKUP HEAT STAGE 2

W W2 W3 HEAT STAGE 1 HEAT STAGE 2 HEAT STAGE 3
Y COMPRESSOR STAGE 1
L/A
Y2 COMPRESSOR STAGE 2 G FAN RELAY L/A COMPRESSOR 3 MONITOR OR ZONE PANEL
FAN
A 4
Y COMPRESSOR STAGE 1 Y2 COMPRESSOR STAGE 2
JUMPERS A B AIR HANDLER TRANSFORMER R 24 C VAC 120 VAC

A B C D
1
JUMPERS
C D
CONNECT OPTIONAL SENSORS TO S3 AND S4 TERMINALS
S4 S4 S3 S3
SENSORS
S4 S4 S3 S3
SENSORS
See installation instructions for additional wiring options.
NOTES
The RedLINK Internet Gateway requires a physical Ethernet connection to an open port on a user-supplied router. The router must be connected to the internet via a user's Internet Provider for access to the Honeywell server. There is no need for a static IP address. To date, there have been no reported issues with port blocking or rewalls preventing access. In order to guard against possible wireless signal overload, assure that all wireless RedLINK devices including the RedLINK Internet Gateway are spaced a minimum of 2 feet apart from each other for proper operation.
REDLINK WIRELESS GATEWAY (THM6000R1002) CONTRACTOR SETUP 1. Connect power to the RedLINK Internet Gateway using the supplied 120VAC power supply wall module. 2. Connect the supplied Ethernet cable from the RedLINK Internet Gateway to an available port on a designated Router (router supplied by others). 3. Using the Prestige Thermostat Contractor Installation Options Menu select Wireless Device Manager, then select Add Device. 4. Press and release the Connect button located on the bottom of the RedLINK Internet Gateway. The device will appear on the Thermostat. Exit the menu. 5. Note the Device MAC ID and Device CRC information on the bottom of the device (required for account assignment).
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1307

GATEWAY SETUP
Connect RedLINK Gateway to a router or modem with Ethernet cable (RJ45).
Supplied by Others
THM6000R1002
NEW!
Connect power cord to an electrical outlet not controlled by a wall switch
ACCOUNT SETUP 1. Visit www.mytotalconnectcomfort.com and click Create an Account. There is no charge for this service. 2. Enter required account information including email, password and security questions/answers. 3. Account verication email will be sent to account email - log into email and validate account to return to www.mytotalconnectcomfort.com 4. Enter New Location for RedLINK Internet Gateway including location type (commercial or residential) and alert email accounts 5. Assign RedLINK Internet Gateway to location by entering the unique device MAC ID and device CRC information (Found on bottom of THM6000R1002) Account is now active and may be accessed via any supported web browser or smart phone application.
21
1308
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
PRESTIGE KITS
Kit Part Number Prestige IAQ Kit YTHX9421R5101WW Prestige IAQ Kit YTHX9421R5101BB Prestige IAQ Kit YTHX9421R5101SG Prestige IAQ Kit YTHX9421R5101WG Prestige IAQ Kit YTHX9421R5085WW Prestige IAQ Kit YTHX9421R5085BB Prestige IAQ Kit YTHX9421R5085SG Prestige IAQ Kit YTHX9421R5085WG Prestige 2.0 Kit YTHX9321R5061 Prestige 2.0 Kit YTHX9321R5079 Note: Part numbers can be ordered separately.

Included in Kit Part Number Description Thermostat - White Front, White Side Equipment Interface Module Wireless Outdoor Sensor Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2) Thermostat - Black Front, Black Side Equipment Interface Module Wireless Outdoor Sensor Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2) Thermostat - Silver Front, Gray Side Equipment Interface Module Wireless Outdoor Sensor Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2) Thermostat - White Front, Gray Side Equipment Interface Module Wireless Outdoor Sensor Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2) Thermostat - White Front, White Side Equipment Interface Module Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2) Thermostat - Black Front, Black Side Equipment Interface Module Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2) Thermostat - Silver Front, Gray Side Equipment Interface Module Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2) Thermostat - White Front, Gray Side Equipment Interface Module Discharge/Return Sensors (Qty. 2) Thermostat Portable Comfort Control Thermostat Wireless Outdoor Sensor
THX9421R5021WW THM5421R1021 C7089R1013 50062329-001 THX9421R5021BB THM5421R1021 C7089R1013 50062329-001 THX9421R5021SG THM5421R1021 C7089R1013 50062329-001 THX9421R5021WG THM5421R1021 C7089R1013 50062329-001 THX9421R5021WW THM5421R1021 50062329-001 THX9421R5021BB THM5421R1021 50062329-001 THX9421R5021SG THM5421R1021 50062329-001 THX9421R5021WG THM5421R1021 50062329-001 THX9321R5030 REM5000R1001 THX9321R5030 C7089R1013
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1309
21

ZONE AND FCU COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT (BACNET, LON) VT7200, VT7300 COMMUNICATING
DESCRIPTION VT7200 Zone thermostats are digital-display, heating/cooling, with outputs for two-position, oating, and proportional terminal unit control. They are ideal for baseboard heat, unit heaters, radiant panels, reheat, or VAV box (pressure-dependent) control. VT7300 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) thermostats are digitaldisplay, heating / cooling, with outputs for two-position, oating, or proportional control. In addition, they include multi-speed fan relays for high, medium, and low fan speed control. Both thermostats offer remote temperature sensor and remote digital inputs congured for night setback, lter alarm, motion sensor, door/window switch, or service indication. All models offer standard BACnet or LON open-protocol communications. FEATURES BACnet or LON communication models Stand-alone operation on communication loss Two-position, oating, or proportional models Remote room sensor option Adjustable deadband Single setpoint adjustment Setpoint range limits (heating and cooling) Three congurable inputs for night setback, setback override, motion sensor, door or window switch, lter alarm, service advisory, heat/cool changeover F/C (congurable) Display offset Adjustable temporary occupied time
NEW!
VT7200C5031B BACnet Zone Thermostat VT7305C5031B BACnet FCU Thermostat
Heat, cool, and reheat time base outputs are congurable Direct or reverse acting (proportional models) Keypad lockout functions Dehumidication control models Three-speed fan control (FCU model) Selectable system control (FCU model) PIR cover sensor (Optional) Universal Input Dry contact or 10K Type 2 Model 24 thermistor Remote Sensor Thermistor, 10K Type 2 Model 24 Control Type Proportional plus integral (PI) Proportional Band Heating and cooling, 2F (1.1C) Floating Time Base Adjustable, 0.5 to 9 minutes Cycles Per Hour Adjustable 3 to 8 Override Timer 0 to 24 hours, 1-hour increments, pushbutton reset Sensor Offset Adjustable 5F (2.5C), 15% RH (humidity models) Deadband Adjustable 2 to 5F (1 to 2.5C) Setpoint Adjusted depending on heating or cooling mode, heating and cooling setpoints are changed simultaneously with respect to the deadband Cooling limits 54 to 100F (12C to 37.7C) Heating limits 40 to 90F (4.5 to 32C) Keypad Lockout Selectable system/fan/unoccupied System Setting O=off, H=heating, C=cooling, A=automatic changeover (FCU models) O/C, O/H, O/A/H/C, H/O/C Fan Setting L=low, M=medium, H=high, A=auto (FCU models) L/M/H, L/H, L/M/H/A, L/H/A, On/A Wiring 18 AWG maximum, 22 AWG recommended Enclosure UL FR1, ame retardant plastic Color White Mounting Standard vertical, 2" x 4" box Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 4.94"H x 3.38"W x 1.13"D (12.5 x 8.6 x 2.9 cm) Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) Approvals UL Listed File #E234137, cULus, CE, LonMark RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 19-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Supply VA 2 VA Display Two line backlit LCD, 0.2F (0.1C) Temperature, 0.9F (0.5C) Control Accuracy VT7350C50xx, VT7350F50x Dehumidication, 5% RH from 20% to 80% RH Zone (VT7200) or FCU (VT7300) Thermostat Type Cover Controls Zone Models Up/down/override buttons Heat/Cool on" LEDs FCU Models Up/down/C-or-F/fan/mode buttons Fan/Heat/Cool on" LEDs Control Outputs See terminal designation table VT7200C50xx 5 triacs (H/C, 2-position or oating control) VT7200F50xx 1 triac, 2 analog outputs (H/C proportional 0 to 10 VDC) VT7300C50xx, VT7350C50xx 3 relays (fan), 5 triacs (H/C, 2-position or oating control) VT7300F50xx, VT7350F50xx 3 relays (fan), 1 triac, 2 analog outputs (H/C proportional 0 to 10 VDC) Triacs and relays 30 VAC, 1A, 3A inrush Analog outputs 0-10 VDC, 2K minimum impedance, direct or reverse acting Auxiliary Inputs 2 digital inputs, 1 universal input, 1 remote sensor Congurable as Service/status reminders Door/window/motion sensor switch Filter alarm Central night setback clock Remote occupied override switch Heat/Cool changeover, contact or sensor Digital Inputs Dry contact
21
1310
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Relays FCU & ZONE electronics Fan H Fan H Fan M Fan M Fan L Fan L 24 VAC 24 V HOT 24 V COM BO-5 BO-5

ZONE AND FCU COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT (BACNET, LON) VT7200, VT7300 COMMUNICATING
TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS BY THERMOSTAT (FCU & ZONE) ZONE THERMOSTATS FAN COIL UNIT (FCU) THERMOSTATS VT7200F-E VT7300A-E VT7300C-E VT7350C-E VT7300F-E VT7200C-E VT7200F-B VT7300A-B VT7300C-B VT7350C-B VT7300F-B VT7200C-B 2-position/ Proportional 2-position 2 position/ 2 position/ Proportional floating floating floating/RH X X X X X X X
VT7350F-E VT7350F-B Proportional/ RH

X X X X X X X
** Terminals and function are not present on every thermostat < LON Thermostat Function** < BACnet Terminal** 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 High speed fan (FCU) Medium speed fan (FCU) Low speed fan (FCU) 24 VAC hot power for thermostat, fan and BO-(1,2,3,4) AO-(1,2) 24 VAC common for thermostat, fan and BO-(1,2,3,4) AO-(1,2) BO-5, aux output, configurable (reheat, occupied/un-occupied) BO-5, aux output, configurable (reheat, occupied/un-occupied) BO-3, open heating BO-4, close heating AO-2, heating BO-1, open cooling AO-1, cooling BO-2, close cooling BI-1, configurable (night set back clock, motion detector, window switch) RS, remote sensor, 10 K thermistor Scom, common for remote sensor, BI-(1,2), and UI-1 BI-2, configurable (door, filter, service, remote override) UI-3, configurable (change over contact or sensor, supply air sensor)
Network card
X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
9 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FCU & ZONE SERIES THERMOSTATS Internal device connection (TRIACs except as noted) BO-3 B A O O 4 2 A B O O 1 1 BO-2 BI-1 RS S COM BI-2 UI-3
**
Ref
AUX
O H C Prop Prop O C C H C
Type 2 Sensor Window D/N clock motion Remote room sensor Door filter service rem. override C/O or Supply air temp.
24 VAC 2-Pos Proportional 2-Pos or Fltg 0-10 VDC or Fltg
Type 2 sensor
To network BACnet Lon Talk
T-1
T-2 2-Pos, Fltg, Proportional depending on model
24 VAC Transformer (provided by others) Note: Terminals are Thermostat Dependent See Table 1. *One Transformer Wiring (Delete T2) Alternate Device Based on Set-up
** Common device reference on BACnet networks as needed.
MODEL VT7200 VT7300 VT7305 VT7350 VT7355 THERMOSTAT TYPE Zone controller Fancoil controller commercial (override occupancy) Fancoil controller hospitality (hotel/lodging with temp scale) Fancoil controller commercial (override occupancy) with humidity sensor Fancoil controller hospitality (hotel/lodging with temp scale) with humidity sensor OUTPUTS C 2 floating + 1 digital (for VT7200), 2 floating + 1 auxiliary (for VT73xx) F 2 analog + 1 digital (for VT7200), 2 analog + 1 auxiliary (for VT73xx) COVER 5000 Viconics logo 5031 Blank cover (no logo) 5500 PIR cover with Viconics logo 5531 PIR cover blank (no logo) COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL E Echelon/LONworks B BACnet P Wireless/Zigbee Pro W Wireless C 5031 W Example: VT7305C5031W Hospitality fancoil controller with 2 floating + 1 auxiliary outputs in a blank cover case with wireless communication protocol
21
VT7305
COV-PIR-FCU-C-5031 COV-PIR-ZN-5031 TG511A1000
ACCESSORIES PAGE PIR cover for FCU thermostat PIR cover for Zone thermostat Thermostat guard- clear-medium size 1392
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1311

AHU COMMUNICATING THERMOSTAT SINGLE AND MULTISTAGE, PROGRAMMABLE AND NON-PROGRAMMABLE, (BACNET, LON) VT7600 COMMUNICATING
DESCRIPTION The VT7600 Communicating Thermostats are digital display, single or multistage, seven-day programmable or nonprogrammable PI thermostats (F or C) for use with AHU controls and heat pumps for both heating and cooling applications. The VT7600 has both system and fan switching with internal sensor or remote sensor capabilities. Five buttons control a simplied menu for over 20 congurable parameters. A communication card is added for multiple protocols, including BACnet and LON. Other control features are listed below. FEATURES ALL MODELS No logo on thermostat cover 1H/1C, 2H/2C (3H/2C heat pump) models Fan switching (on/auto/smart) System switching (O/A/C/H) Two line 8 digit backlit LCD Display Three status LEDs (Fan, Clg, Htg) Five control keys Remote sensor and OSA sensor inputs Adjustable deadband
NEW!
VT7600A5031B BACnet Thermostat PROGRAMMABLE MODELS Two or four congurable events per day Progressive recovery or none 12 or 24 hour clock Six hour clock retention Occ/Unocc auxiliary contact out COMMUNICATION MODELS BACnet LON Wireless Wireless/ Zigbee Pro
Control Output 1A relays 30 VAC, 3A surge maximum Auxillary Contact Output 1A relay 30 VAC, N.O./N.C. follows occupied schedule Mixed Air Output Proportional 0-10V DC, 2 k minimum (economizer model) Control Type Proportional plus integral Deadband Adjustable 2 to 4F (1 to 2C) OSA Lockout Limits Heating 15 to 120F (26 to 49C), 5F increments Cooling -40 to 95F (-40 to 35C), 5F increments Low Limit Protection Enable/disable, heating @ 47F (5.5C) Power Up Delay 10 to 120 seconds Keypad Lockout Three levels (full, none, partial) Cycles Per Hour Adjustable, heating 3-8 CPH, cooling 3-4 CPH Display Offset Adjustable 5F (2.5C), 1F increments LED Indicators Three green on (fan, cooling, heating) Wiring 18 AWG max, 22 AWG recommended Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Enclosure ULFR1 ame-retardant plastic Color White Mounting Standard vertical 2" x 4" box Dimensions 4.94"H x 3.38"W x 1.13"D (12.5 x 8.6 x 2.9 cm) Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) Approvals UL Listed File #E234137, cUL, CE, LonMark RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
PIR cover available Permanent program retention Two congurable DI inputs Two line LCD display (F or C) Proportional + Integral control
ECONOMIZER MODELS Mixed-air (0-10V) control outputs Mixed-air sensor input Mixed-air setpoint (SP) Economizer changeover S.P. temperature OSA damper minimum position in %
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA Display Controls Thermostat Type Optimal Start Heat Pump High/Low Stages
21
Memory (schedule) Clock (12 or 24 hour) System Switching Fan Switching Control Accuracy Setpoint Range Heating 40 to 90F (4.5 to 32C) Cooling 54 to 100F (12 to 37.5C) Setpoint High/Low Limits Individually adjustable, H/C Remote Sensor Room Sensor Room sensor input auto-detected 10K Type 2 thermistors Outside Air Outside air input auto-detected 10K Type 2 thermistors Mixed Air Mixed air input auto-detected (economizer model only) 10K Type 2 thermistors Two dry contact digital inputs Auxiliary Inputs Four Types Service/status reminders Filter alarm Central night setback clock Remote occupied override timer
20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 2 VA Two-line backlit LCD Five menu-driven push buttons up, down, menu, no, yes/scroll Seven-day programmable models, nonprogrammable models Progressive recovery (enable/disable) OSA lockout (emer heating/comp. heating) (Dependent upon model) 1H/1C, 2H/2C, (3H/2C heat pump) 2H/2C + proportional mixed-air economizer Permanent EEPROM Six-hour power fail retention Off/Auto/Cool/Heat On-continuous Auto-on demand Smart-on/occupied, off/unoccupied 0.9F (0.5C) @ 70F (21C)
1312
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
THERMOSTAT MODEL VT7600 VT electronics Y1 Y2 G RC C RH W1 Cool 1 Cool 2 Fan

TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATION BY THERMOSTAT MODEL

Note: Terminals and functions are not present on every thermostat LON BACNET
VT7600A-E VT7600B-E VT7605B-E VT7600H-E VT7652A-E VT7652B-E VT7656B-E VT7652H-E VT7600A-B VT7600B-B VT7605B-B VT7600H-B VT7652A-B VT7652B-B VT7656B-B VT7652H-B
Function Energizes on a call for first stage cooling (first stage heating HP) Energizes on a call for second stage cooling (second stage heating HP) Energizes fan in accordance with the selected fan mode 24 VAC from equipment transformer 24 VAC (common) from equipment transformer RH24 VAC for heating stages (jumper to RC for single power systems) W1Energizes on a call for first stage heating (third stage heating HP) W2Energizes on a call for second stage heating O/BHP reversing valve configurable (O = on or B = on) AUXConfigurable auxiliary output (follows schedule) D1Configurable digital input D2Configurable digital input EC0 - 10 VDC economizer actuator output RSRemote room sensor ScomSensor common OSOutdoor air sensor MSMixed air sensor Internal relays and connections 0-10V Thermistor sensor inputs RS Scom OS MS Network card
VT7600 SERIES THERMOSTAT
W2
O/B
AUX
D1
D2
EC
Ref
**
Heat 1
Heat 2
Rev. valve
Aux
ACT. Type 2 To Network Type 2 Type 2 BACnet LonTalk
*
Note: All outputs are 24 VAC. Note: Terminals are thermostat-dependent. See Table 1. 24V T-2 T-1 24 VAC Thermostat Power (provided by installer)
24V
* If using the same power source for the thermostat and heating loads, delete transformer T-2 and install a jumper across RC and RH. Then wire W1 and W2 common to T1 ( ). ** Common device reference on BACnet.
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1313

MODEL VT7600 VT7605 VT7606 VT7607 VT7652 VT7656 VT7657
THERMOSTAT TYPE RTU controller, no local schedule RTU + economizer controller, no local schedule RTU + IAQ + economizer controller, no local schedule RTU + humidity controller, no local schedule RTU controller, local schedule RTU + economizer controller, local schedule RTU + humidity controller, local schedule OUTPUTS A 1H/1C (VT7600 and VT7652 only) B 2H/2C (Not available on VT7606) E 2H/2C + IAQ + economizer controller (VT7606 and VT7656 only) F 2C + Analog heat controller (VT7600 and VT7652 only) H 3H/3C Heatpump controller (VT7600 and VT7652 only) W 2H/2C + humidity +watersource heatpump controller (VT7600 and VT7652 only) COVER 5000 Viconics logo 5031 Blank cover (no logo) 5500 PIR cover w/ Viconics logo 5531 PIR cover blank (no logo) COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL E Echelon/LONworks B BACnet P Wireless/Zigbee Pro W Wireless B 5031 W Example: VT7605B5031W RTU + economizer with 2 heat/2 cool, blank cover, wireless
NEW!
VT7605
21
TG511A1000 COV-PIR-HPUMP-5031 COV-PIR-RTU-5032
ACCESSORIES PAGE Thermostat guard- clear-medium size 1392 PIR cover for HP thermostat PIR cover for RTU thermostat
1314
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
T7350 Models Mounting Means

T7350 SERIES PROGRAMMABLE COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS AND W7350 CONTROLLER T7350, W7350 SERIES
The T7350 Commercial Programmable Thermostat controls 24 VAC single zone heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) equipment. The T7350 consists of a thermostat and a subbase. The thermostat includes the keypad and display for 7-day programming and the subbase includes equipment control connections. T7350M models have 2 modulating outputs for heat and/or cool, and the T7350H models have LonWorks capability.
The W7350 WebStat is a web-based building manager that allows contractors and facility managers to view and command T7350H Commercial Programmable Thermostats. It communicates over the LonWorks network to perform building management control of the T7350H thermostats through a web browser. It runs building management applications such as trending, scheduling and alarming. The WebStat Bundle (W7350A1000) includes the WebStat controller, a LON card, and a power supply.
T7350 Series
7-day programming with two Occupied and two Not Occupied periods per day Individual heat and cool setpoints for Occupied and Not Occupied periods Advanced conguration using TStatSpec software or PDA PID control minimizes temperature uctuations Recovery ramp control automatically optimizes equipment start times based on building load Keypad multi-level lockout available with all models
Remote sensor capability for temperature (including outdoor air and discharge air) and humidity sensors T7350M provides 2 modulating heat and/or cool outputs T7350H provides networking capability on LonWorks bus using Free Topology Transceiver (FTT) T7350H conforms to LonMark Space Comfort Prole for rooftop applications W7530 web-based controller supports up to 20 W7350H thermostats
Mounts on subbase; subbase mounts on wall using two 5/8 long #6-32 screws (included). Throttling Range for Modulating Outputs Automatically adjusts based on heat/cool stages. Manually adjustable with TStatSpec software or PDA Clock Accuracy (at 77F [25C]) 1 min./month (30 days) Minimum Stage Operation Time (xed) Minimum On Heat: 1 minute; cool: 3 minutes Minimum Off (Cool and Heat Pump) 1 minute 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz.; 20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Power Hz Input Temperature 20K Humidity 0-10 VDC Outdoor 3000 PTC Discharge Air 20K Occupancy Sensor Dry contact switching 30 VDC at 1 mA
All Relay Outputs (at 30 Vac) Running 1.5A maximum Inrush 7.5A maximum Modulating Output 4 to 20 mA with 510 ohm maximum terminating resistance System Current Draw (without load) 5 VA maximum at 30 Vac, 50/60 Hz NOTE: Relays are N.O. Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST). Outdoor Sensor Wiring Requires 18 gauge wire 5% to 90% RH, noncondensing. Humidity Ratings Emergency Heat Indication Display indicates when Emergency Heat is activated (Em) Temperature Ratings Operating Ambient 30 to 110F (-1 to 43C) Shipping -30 to +150F (-34C to +66C) Display Accuracy 1F (1C) Setpoint Range Heating: 40 to 90F (4 to 32C) Cooling 45 to 99F (7 to 37C) Deadband 2F (1C) The thermostat maintains programmed Loss of Power times and temperatures for the life of the product. Clock and day information is retained for a minimum of 48 hours. NOTE: To achieve the 48-hour power-loss clock retention, the T7350 must be powered for at least 5 minutes.
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1315

SPECIFICATIONS (continued)
Communicating Model T7350H: Connection Terminals for the LonWorks Bus. Network jack for quick access by personal computer based tools. Communications service-pin pushbutton to simplify startup. LonMark Functional Prole 8500_20 Space Comfort Controller. LonMark SCC Object Type 8504 Rooftop See Fig. 2. LonMark Program Identier 80:00:0C:55:04:03:04:2E. LonMark Application Interoperability Version 3.3 Honeywell LonMark Plug-In le downloads: plugin.ge51.honeywell.de/index.htm# TStat Spec System Requirements Windows XP or Windows 7
NEW!
Features Auxiliary Relay Yes Yes Yes Isolated Normally Open Yes No No No Yes Yes No
PDA System Requirements Palm OS 3.5.x to 5.2.1 Dynamic Heap 256K bytes Free RAM Space 1000K bytes Serial Communications RS-232 Approvals European Community Mark (CE) Listed. UL 873 Recognized, NEC Class 2.FCC Part 15 subpart J Class A.cUL. Dimensions T7350 models 6-3/4"W x 4-1/2"H x 2-3/16"D (17.1 x 11.4 x 5.6 cm) W7350 model 6-23/32"W x 4"H x 2-3/16"D (17.1 x 10.2 x 5.6 cm) Weights T7350 models 1.25 lb (0.57 kg) W7350 model 1.25 lb (0.57 kg) Warranty 1 year Note: For more specication data on the W7350 please see manufacturers specication sheet. (www.kele.com)
T7350 THERMOSTAT FEATURES

Maximum Stagesa Model T7350A T7350B Applications Heat 1b 2b 3 (2)c Cool 1b 2b 3 (4)c LONWORKS Capability?
T7350D T7350H1009 T7350H1017
Conventional or Heat Pump
Outdoor, Discharge Air Capability Humidity, Occupancy, Outdoor, Discharge Air Capability Humidity, Occupancy, Outdoor, Discharge Air Capability, 4-20 mA output (2-10 VDC with 500 ohm resistor)
Modulating
2 modulating, 2b relay
T7350M a All models are down-selectable and can be congured to control fewer stages than the maximum allowed. b One extra stage (of either heat or cool) can be congured using the auxiliary relay. c Heat pump applications for these models have a maximum of two heat stages and two cool stages.
DEFAULT SETPOINTS
Control Heating Cooling Occupied 70F (21C) 75F (24C) Not Occupied 55F (13C) 85F (29C) Standby 67F (19C) 78F (26C)
21
1316
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
SUBBASE 1 L2 L1 (HOT) HEATING TRANSFORMER 1 2 SENSOR BYPASS TR23 REMOTE SENSOR SET PT GND LED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SUBBASE T5 T6 T7 T4 1 L2 L1 (HOT) HEATING TRANSFORMER 1 2 3

RH 2
RC
AUX
W1
Y1
HEAT RELAY 1
FAN RELAY
HEAT RELAY 2
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 1 L2 1 L1 (HOT) COOLING TRANSFORMER
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. WHEN INSTALLED ON A SYSTEM WITH TWO TRANSFORMERS, REMOVE THE FACTORY-INSTALLED JUMPER.
Typical hookup of T7350A in two-stage heat and one-stage cool conventional system with two transformers
OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 2 HEAT RELAY 2
T3
OS
OS
AS
AS
W2
Y2
RH 2
RC
AUX
W1
Y1
HEAT RELAY 1
FAN RELAY
ECONOMIZER
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. WHEN INSTALLED ON A SYSTEM WITH TWO TRANSFORMERS, REMOVE THE FACTORY-INSTALLED JUMPER. USE ECONOMIZER INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION DIRECTIONS.
21
Typical hookup of T7350B in two-stage heat and two-stage cool conventional system with two transformers
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1317

WIRING
BYPASS
TR23-H REMOTE SENSOR SENSOR SET PT GND LED
OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR
ECONOMIZER DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR
7 8 9 10 11 12
NEW!
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 2 HEAT RELAY 3 HEAT RELAY 2 AS AUX W3/Y4 Y3 W2 Y2 RH RC AUX W1 Y1 G COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 3 3 HEAT RELAY 1 FAN RELAY COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 1 4 ECONOMIZER DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 2 HEAT RELAY 2 HEAT RELAY 3 AS AS AUX W3/Y4 Y3 W2 Y2 X RH RC AUX W1 Y1 G COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 3 3 HEAT RELAY 1 FAN RELAY
SUBBASE T5 T6 T7 T4 T3 OS OS AS
HS
HC
HP
HUMIDITY SENSOR
MOTION SENSOR
L2 L1 (HOT)
1 2 3 4 5
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. ENSURE TRANSFORMER IS SIZED TO HANDLE THE LOAD. HEAT/COOL SYSTEMS WITH ONE TRANSFORMER REQUIRE THE FACTORY-INSTALLED JUMPER. USE ECONOMIZER INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION DIRECTIONS. NO NEED TO WIRE HC TERMINAL BECAUSE THE T3 TERMINAL IS INTERNALLY TIED TO HC, WHICH IS ALSO TIED TO TERMINAL 1 COMMON AT THE SENSOR.
Typical hookup of T7350D in three-stage heat and three-stage cool conventional system with one transformer.
TR23-H REMOTE SENSOR SENSOR BYPASS SET PT GND LED
OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR
7 8 9 10 11 12
SUBBASE T5 T6 T7 T4 T3 OS OS
EB
EB
HS
HC 5
HP
LONWORKS BUS LONWORKS BUS 1 2 L2 L1 (HOT) 1 2 3 4 5
HUMIDITY SENSOR
MOTION SENSOR
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 1
21
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. ENSURE TRANSFORMER IS SIZED TO HANDLE THE LOAD. HEAT/COOL SYSTEMS WITH ONE TRANSFORMER REQUIRE THE FACTORY-INSTALLED JUMPER. USE ECONOMIZER INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION DIRECTIONS. WHEN USING THE TR23-H FOR HUMIDITY SENSING THERE IS NO NEED TO WIRE HC TERMINAL BECAUSE THE T3 TERMINAL IS INTERNALLY TIED TO HC, WHICH IS ALSO TIED TO TERMINAL 1 COMMON AT THE SENSOR
Typical hookup of T7350H1009 in three-stage heat and three-stage cool conventional system with one transformer
1318
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
BYPASS
TR23-H REMOTE SENSOR

SENSOR
GND
SET PT
LED
OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR MODULATING HEAT + (4-20 mA) R X
MODULATING R COOL + (4-20 mA) X
7 8 9 10 11 12
SUBBASE
T5
T6
T7
T4
T3
OS
OS
AS
AS
MX
MH
MC
AUX
EB
EB
HS
HC
HP
RH 2
RC
AUX
W1
Y1
4 LONWORKS BUS LONWORKS BUS HUMIDITY SENSOR MOTION SENSOR
HEAT RELAY 1
FAN RELAY
3 1 L2 L1 (HOT) HEATING TRANSFORMER 1 2 3 4
ECONOMIZER
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. WHEN INSTALLED ON A SYSTEM WITH TWO TRANSFORMERS, REMOVE THE FACTORY-INSTALLED JUMPER. USE ECONOMIZER INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION DIRECTIONS. WHEN USING THE TR23-H FOR HUMIDITY SENSING THERE IS NO NEED TO WIRE HC TERMINAL BECAUSE THE T3 TERMINAL IS INTERNALLY TIED TO HC, WHICH IS ALSO TIED TO TERMINAL 1 COMMON AT THE SENSOR.
Typical hookup of T7350H1017 for system with two independent heat stages (one modulating), two independent cool stages (one modulating), and two transformers.
BYPASS TR23-H REMOTE SENSOR SENSOR GND LED 5 SET PT OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR MODULATING R HEAT + (4-20 mA) X MODULATING R COOL + (4-20 mA) X
7 8 9 10 11 12
SUBBASE T5 T6 T7 T4 T3 OS OS AS AS MX MH MC
HS
HC
HP
RH
RC
AUX
W1
Y1
HUMIDITY SENSOR
MOTION SENSOR
HEAT RELAY 1
FAN RELAY
L2 L1 (HOT)
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 1
ECONOMIZER
21
1 2 3 4 5
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. ENSURE TRANSFORMER IS SIZED TO HANDLE THE LOAD. HEAT/COOL SYSTEMS WITH ONE TRANSFORMER REQUIRE THE FACTORY-INSTALLED JUMPER. USE ECONOMIZER INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION DIRECTIONS. WHEN USING THE TR23-H FOR HUMIDITY SENSING THERE IS NO NEED TO WIRE HC TERMINAL BECAUSE THE T3 TERMINAL IS INTERNALLY TIED TO HC, WHICH IS ALSO TIED TO TERMINAL 1 COMMON AT THE SENSOR.
Typical hookup of T7350M for system with two independent heat stages (one modulating), two independent cool stages (one modulating), and one transformer.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1319

MODEL T7350A1004 T7350M1008 T7350B1002 T7350D1008 T7350H1009 T7350H1017 W7350A1000 MODEL 50014064-001 C7041B2005 C7041B2013 C7041C2003 C7041J2007 C7089R2013
DESCRIPTION Single stage heat pump compatible with auxiliary Modulating with 2 stage heat and 2 stage cool Multi-stage heat pump compatible with auxiliary Multi-stage heat pump compatible with occupancy and humidity feature and auxiliary Multi-stage heat pump compatible with occupancy and humidity feature communicating LonWorks Modulating with 2 stage heat and 2 stage cool with occupancy and humidity feature communicating LonWorks Webstat controller for T7350 series thermostats ACCESSORIES DESCRIPTION Infra-red thermostat module for T7350 Series Duct temperature sensor, 6 inch Duct temperature sensor, 12 inch Duct temperature sensor, 18 inch Duct temperature averaging sensor, 12 foot Wireless outdoor sensor
NEW!
21
1320
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

ZONE THERMOSTAT AND FCU THERMOSTAT VT7200, VT7300 SERIES
VT7200 Zone thermostats are digital-display, heating/cooling, with outputs for two-position, oating, and proportional terminal unit control. They are ideal for baseboard heat, unit heaters, radiant panels, reheat, or VAV box (pressuredependent) control. VT7300 Series Fan Coil Unit (FCU) thermostats are digital-display, heating / cooling, with outputs for two-position, oating, or proportional control. In addition, they include multispeed fan relays for high, medium, and low fan speed control. Both thermostats offer remote temperature sensor and remote digital inputs congured for night setback, lter alarm, motion sensor, door/window switch, or service indication. Zone or FCU control models Two-position, oating, or proportional models Remote room sensor option Adjustable deadband Setpoint range limits (heating and cooling) Three congurable inputs for any of: night setback, setback override, motion sensor, door or window switch, lter alarm, service advisory, heat/cool changeover
VT7305C50xx FCU Thermostat
VT7200C50xx Zone Thermostat
F/C (congurable) Display offset Adjustable temporary occupied time Heat, cool, and reheat time base outputs are congurable Direct or reverse acting (proportional models) Keypad lockout functions Dehumidication control models Three-speed fan control (FCU model) Selectable system control (FCU model)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 19-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 2 VA Supply Current Display Two-line backlit LCD, 0.2F (0.1C) Control Accuracy Temperature, 0.9F (0.5C) VT7355C50xx, VT7355F50xx Dehumidication, 5% RH from 20 to 80% Thermostat Type Zone (VT7200) or FCU (VT7300) Cover Controls Zone Models Up/down/override buttons Heat/Cool on LEDs FCU Models Up/down/C-or-F/fan/mode buttons Fan/Heat/Cool on LEDs Control Outputs See terminal designation table VT7200C50xx 5 triacs (H/C, 2-position or oating) VT7200F50xx 1 triac, 2 analog outputs (H/C proportional 0 to 10 VDC) VT73(05,55)C50xx 3 relays (fan), 5 triacs (H/C, 2-position or oating control) VT73(05, 55)F50xx 3 relays (fan), 1 triac, 2 analog outputs (H/C proportional 0 to 10 VDC) Triacs and Relays 30 VAC, 1A, 3A inrush Analog Outputs 0-10 VDC, 2K minimum impedance, direct or reverse acting Auxiliary Inputs 2 digital inputs, 1 universal input, 1 remote sensor Congurable as Service/status reminders Door/window/motion sensor switch Filter alarm Central night setback clock Remote occupied override switch Heat/Cool changeover, contact or sensor Digital Inputs Dry contact Universal Input Dry contact or 10K Type 2 Model 24 thermistor Remote Sensor Thermistor, 10K Type 2 Model 24 March 2014 Proportional plus integral (PI) Heating and cooling, 2F (1.1C) Adjustable, 0.5 to 9 minutes Adjustable 3 to 8 0 to 24 hours, 1-hour increments, pushbutton reset Sensor Offset Adjustable 5F (2.5C), 15% RH (humidity models) Deadband Setpoint Adjustable 2 to 5F (1 to 2.5C) Adjusted depending on heating or cooling mode, heating and cooling setpoints are changed simultaneously with respect to the deadband Cooling Limits 54 to 100F (12 to 37.7C) Heating Limits 40 to 90F (4.5 to 32C) Keypad Lockout Selectable system/fan/unoccupied System Setting O=off, H=heating, C=cooling, A=automatic changeover FCU Models O/C, O/H, O/A/H/C, H/O/C Fan Setting L=low, M=medium, H=high, A=auto FCU Models L/M/H, L/H, L/M/H/A, L/H/A, On/A Enclosure UL FR1, ame retardant plastic Mounting Standard vertical, 2" x 4" box Wiring 18 AWG maximum, 22 AWG recommended Color White Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (-30 to 50C) Operating Humidity 095% RH non-condensing Dimensions 4.94"H x 3.38"W x 1.13"D (12.5 x 8.6 x 2.9 cm) Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) UL, cUL, File #E234137, CE Approvals RoHS Statement Yes 1 year Warranty Control Type Proportional Band Floating Time Base Cycles Per Hour Override Timer
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1321
21

ZONE THERMOSTAT AND FCU THERMOSTAT VT7200, VT7300 SERIES
WIRING
TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS BY THERMOSTAT MODEL ZONE THERMOSTATS VT7200C5031 VT7200F5031 2-Position Proportional or Floating
FAN COIL UNIT (FCU) THERMOSTATS ** Terminals and functions are not present on every thermostat VT7305C5031 VT7355C5031 VT7305F5031 VT7355F5031 Terminal** Thermostat Function** 2-Position 2-Position or Proportional Proportional/RH or Floating Floating/RH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Relays VT7200/7300 Electronics
X X X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X X X
NEW!
X 1 High speed fan Low speed fan X 2 Medium speed fan X 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 X X 9 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 X X X X 24 VAC power for thermostat, fan and BO-(1, 2, 3, 4), AO-(1, 2) 24 VAC common for thermostat, fan and BO-(1, 2, 3, 4), AO-(1, 2) BO-5, auxiliary output, configurable (reheat, occupied, or unoccupied) BO-5, auxiliary output, configurable (reheat, occupied, or unoccupied) BO-3, open heating, (VT7200C5031, VT7355C5031) BO-4, close heating (VT7200C5031, VT7355C5031) AO-2, heating (VT7305F5031, VT7355F5031) BO-1, open cooling (VT7200C5031) AO-1, cooling (VT7305F5031, VT7355F5031) BO-2, close cooling, (VT7200C5031, VT7355C5031) BI-1, configurable (night setback clock, motion detector, window switch) RS, remote sensor, 10 k thermistor SCOM, common for remote sensor, BI-(1, 2) and UI-1 BI-2, configurable (door, filter, service, remote override) UI-3, configurable (changeover contact or sensor, supply air sensor)
Internal Device Connection (TRIACs except as noted) A B O O 1 1 BO-2 BI-1 RS S COM BI-2 UI-3 Type 2 Sensor Window Remote D/N Clock Room Motion Sensor Door Filter Service Rem. Override C/O or Supply Air Temp. Type 2 Sensor
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
VT7200/7300 SERIES THERMOSTATS
Fan H Fan H
Fan M Fan M
Fan L Fan L
24 V HOT
24 V COM
BO-5
BO-5
BO-3
B A O O 4 2
*
24 VAC
AUX
O H C Prop Prop O C C H C
24 VAC 2-Pos Proportional 2-Pos or Fltg 0-10 VDC or Fltg
Note: Terminals are Thermostat Dependent See Table 1. *One Transformer Wiring (Delete T2) Alternate Device Based on Set-up T-1 T-2
24 VAC Transformer (provided by others)
2-Pos, Fltg, Proportional Depending on Model
MODEL VT7200 VT7300 VT7305 VT7350 VT7355 THERMOSTAT TYPE Zone Controller Fancoil Controller Commercial (Override Occupancy) Fancoil Controller Hospitality (Hotel/Lodging w/ Temp Scale) Fancoil Controller Commercial (Override Occupancy) w/ Humidity Sensor Fancoil Controller Hospitality (Hotel/Lodging w/Temp Scale) w/ Humidity Sensor OUTPUTS C 2 oating + 1 digital (for VT7200), 2 oating + 1 auxiliary (for VT73xx) F 2 analog + 1 digital (for VT7200), 2 analog + 1 auxiliary (for VT73xx) COVER 5000 Viconics logo 5031 Blank Cover (no logo) 5500 PIR Cover w/ Viconics logo 5531 PIR Cover Blank (no logo) C 5031 Example: VT7305C5031 Hospitality fancoil controller with 2 floating and 1 auxiliary outputs with a blank cover
21
VT7305
680-243-6 COV-FCU-L COV-ZN KTR24 KTR24-LED-MB ST-D24 ST-R24SC
RELATED PRODUCTS Changeover thermostat with conduit fitting Blank cover for fan coil thermostats Blank cover for zone thermostats Remote room thermistor sensor Remote room sensor with override button and LED 10K Type 2 duct temperature themistor Strap-on pipe thermistor
PAGE
1169 1169 1197 1247
1322
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Input Current Temperature Range Setpoint Range Schedule Type
BIG BLUE AND BLUE UNIVERSAL AND SINGLE STAGE PROGRAMMABLE/ NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS 1F95, 1F95EZ AND 1F97 SERIES THERMOSTATS
The White Rodgers 1F95 Series universal model thermostats are quickly congured for single stage, multistage or heat pump and heat pump dual fuel systems. They can also be selected as programmable or nonprogrammable. The White Rodgers 1F97 Series universal model thermostats is for single stage use only, but comes with all of the other features mentioned above. The White Rodgers 1F97EZ Series universal model thermostat comes with a large Easy Reader display. These thermostats feature the largest display on a keypad operated thermostat, as well as simple and logical installer setup and programming, enhanced by audio conrmation of entries. Variable keypad security prevents tampering and there is also temporary and vacation overrides for added convenience. These thermostats offer power stealing assist for maximum battery life, remote sensing, as well as the exclusive Cool Savings feature which adjusts the setpoint after 20 minutes to compensate for humidity loss thus providing the ultimate in comfort control and energy savings.
1F95-1277-ST
Large 6 inch or 12 inch display Quick one button programming Congurable as manual heat/cool, auto changeover, heat only or cool only Exclusive battery power monitor Indoor remote sensing averaging option
Choice of programming options and time periods Intuitive menu-driven set-up, programming and operation, with audio prompt to conrm entries Choice of battery powered with optional power stealing assist or hardwired with battery backup
24 VAC 1.5A per terminal 32 to 105F (0 to 41C) 45 to 99F (7 to 37C) 4 (Morning, Day, Evening, Night), 2 (Day and Night), 2 (Day and Night) Materials Of Construction ABS plastic Mounting Any except upside down Accuracy 1 Program Options 7 day, 5+1+1 No Bulb and Capillary Control Type Low voltage thermostat Cycles Per Hour Cool 2.5 Cycles Per Hour Heat 5 Enclosure NEMA 1 Remote Sensor Select models only Sensor Type Thermistor System Type Universal - SS, MS or HP 1 Deadband
Differential 1 LCD Display Type Storage Temperature -40 to 150F (-40 to 65C) Operating Temperature 32 to 105F (0 to 41C) Dimensions 1F95-1277/1F97-1277/1F95-1280/1F95-1291 6-2/7"L x 5-1/8"Hx 1-3/4"D (16 x 13 x 4.4 cm) 1F95-0680/1F95-0671/1F95EZ-0671 6-2/5"L x 4-3/5"H x 1-3/4"D (16.26 x 11.7 x 4.4 cm) Weight 1F95-1277/1F97-1277/1F95-1280/1F95-1291 1.91 lb (0.87 kg) 1F95-0680/1F95-0671/1F95EZ-0671 1.05 lb (0.48 kg) 5 years Warranty
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1323

WIRING
To Remote Temperature Sensor
Jumper
B
System
RC
RH
C*
Single Stage (SS)
Energized in Heat or Off Mode
Energized in Cool Mode
Blower/ CirculaEnergized tor Fan Energizon call ed on for Cool call for (ComCool & pressor) for Heat (if ELE is selected)
NEW!
S W 6 L
Power Remote Remote Energized TempTemp- on call for erature erature Heat Sensor Sensor Third wire for 3-wire zone valve Diagnostic Indicator (See Note 1 ) NEUTRAL 24VAC 120VAC HOT CLASS II TRANSFORMER
{
24 Volt Common (optional) Power Temperature Sensor
24 Volt (Hot) Cool
24 Volt (Hot) Heat
* Common connection required for diagnostic or malfunction indication.
1F97-1277 Single Stage System with Single Transformer

NOTE:
For more wiring and installation information please go to www.kele.com and select the related documents for this family or call your Kele sales representative.
Jumper
L
System Single Stage 1 (SS1) MultiStage 2 (MS2)
O/B
Y2
W/E
W2
No Output
RH
RC
O Diagnostic Energized Constantly Indicator in Input Cool Mode Cool Mode or B 1st Stage System Malfunction Energized Constantly in Heat, Off, Switch Emergency Input Mode
Blower/ Circulator No Fan Energized Heat Output Mode on Call for Cool (and 1st Stage Cool Heat Mode Heat if Mode 2nd Stage configured for Electric 2nd Heat) Stage
24 Volt 24 Volt Optional* 24 Volt (Hot) (Hot) (ComHeat Cool mon)
Comfort Alert II Module or Similar System Diagnostic Module See Module Instructions for details
NEUTRAL 24VAC 120VAC HOT CLASS II TRANSFORMER 1F95EZ-0671 Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Single Transformer
Jumper
L
O/B O
Y2
W/E
W2
G
Blower/ Circulator Fan Energized on Call for Cool (and Heat if configured for Electric Heat)
RH
RC
A1
21
Diagnostic Energized Constantly Indicator in Input Cool Mode Cool Mode or B 1st Stage System Energized Constantly Malfunction in Heat, Off, Switch Emergency Input Mode
No Output No Heat Output Mode 1st Stage Cool Heat Mode Mode 2nd Stage 2nd Stage
24 Volt 24 Volt Optional* Pre-purge, 24 Volt Morning, (Hot) (Hot) Day, Eve, (ComHeat Cool Night mon)
1F95-0680 only
Energized
NEUTRAL 24VAC HOT 120VAC
1F95-0680 Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Single Transformer
CLASS II TRANSFORMER
1324
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING (continued)
L
O/B
Jumper
Y2
W/E
W2
RH
RC
System
Single Stage 1 (SS1)
MultiStage 2 (MS2)
Diagnostic Energized Constantly Indicator in Input Cool Mode Cool Mode or 1st Stage System B Malfunction Energized Constantly Switch in Heat, Off, Input Emergency Mode
Blower/ Circulator No Fan Energized Heat Output Mode on Call for Cool (and 1st Stage Cool Heat Mode Heat if Mode 2nd Stage configured for Electric 2nd Heat) Stage No Output
NEUTRAL 24VAC 120VAC HOT CLASS II TRANSFORMER
To Remote Temperature Sensor
Jumper
B
System Single Stage 1 (SS1)
Y2
RC
RH
W2
W/E
L
*24 VAC common connection optional for system operation.
MultiStage 2 (MS2)
Blower/ Circulator Fan Cool EnergizEnergizEnerMode 24 VAC 24 VAC ed in ed on gized 1st (Hot) (Hot) in Heat Cool & Cool Stage call for Heat Cool Mode Off mode (Com- Cool & Mode for Heat 2nd pressor) (if ELE Stage is sel(Comected) pressor) No Output
24 VAC Common (optional) *
Power remote Temperature Sensor
Remote Temperature Sensor signal
Power Remote Temperature Heat Sensor Mode 2nd Stage
No Output
Energized on call for Heat Heat Mode 1st Stage
Power Closed Connection for 3-wire zone valve
Fault Indicator or System Malfunction Switch
Required for fault or malfunction indication, remote temperature sensor, or for continuous backlight operation.
Comfort Alert II module or similar malfunction module NEUTRAL 24VAC HOT 120VAC
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1325

WIRING
System RC RH C Y Call for cool Single Stage 1 (SS1) 24 volt power for cooling 24 volt common (optional 24 volt for system power for operation, heating required Cool mode-1st for remote stage sensor) Y2 No Output W/E Call for heat
Multi Stage 2 (MS2)
Cool mode-2nd stage
Heat mode-1st stage
NEW!
W2 G O/B 6 L No output Heat mode-2nd stage Installer Configuration Menu selects O or B for Blower/Circulator fan changeover Power closed energized on a call function. Set connection for for cool or Fan On to O terminal SPDT 3-wire (also energized in energized in Cool zone valve heating if configured & Off mode. Set for Electric Heat) to B terminal energized in Heat & emergency mode
Call for Service (malfunction indicator) for Heat Pumps with L terminal connection. Original production 1F95-1291s do not have this connection
1F95-1280/1F95-1291 Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Single Transformer Remote Sensor Terminals
+ Supply voltage to remote temperature sensor S Remote temperature sensor signal Supply voltage to remote temperature sensor
1F95-1280 Damper Terminal

A1 Damper or Economizer Operation
(see configuration menu item 31)
1F95-1291 Humidication/De-humidication Terminals

HM Humidification Terminal, Energizes on call for heat if Humidity setpoint is above room humidity. Can also be used to provide humidification independent of a call for heat and/or in cooling mode if Automatic Humidification is selected in Configuration Menu item #34 DHM De-energizes on call for Dehumidification to lower the fan speed. The DHM terminal is only used on systems with a compatible dehumidification feature that have the required terminal connection on the contol module or have a relay installed to lower the fan speed
MODEL 1F95-1277 1F97-1277 1F95-1280 1F95-1291 1F95-0680 1F95-0671 1F95EZ-0671 DESCRIPTION Single or Multi-stage programmable or non-programmable thermostat with 12 inch touch screen Heat pump programmable thermostat with 12 inch touch screen Single or Multi-stage programmable or non-programmable thermostat with 12 inch touch screen Single or Multi-stage programmable or non-programmable thermostat with humidity control and 12 inch touch screen Single or Multi-stage heat pump compatible thermostat commercial style with 6 inch display Single or Multi-stage heat pump compatible thermostat universal style with 6 inch display Single or Multi-stage heat pump compatible thermostat universal style with EZ read 6 inch display
Note: All models available in a 6-pack. F145-1328 ATK63 F29-0198 ACCESSORIES Indoor remote sensor for 1F95
21
RELATED PRODUCTS Wire guard for duplex thermostats Thermostat guard - 8.125"H x 4.375"W x 3.375"D (20.6 x 11.1 x 8.6 cm) inside dim.
PAGE 1392 1392
1326
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES ALL MODELS Fan switching (on/auto/smart) System switching (off/auto/cooling/ heating) Two line 8 digit backlit LCD Display Three status LEDs (fan, cooling, heating) Five control keys Remote and outside air sensor inputs Two congurable digital inputs Fahrenheit or Celsius operation Permanent program retention Temporary setpoints Proportional plus integral control Cycles per hour for heating and cooling
SINGLE AND MULTISTAGE PROGRAMMABLE AND NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT VT7600 SERIES
The VT7600 Series is a digital display single or multistage 7-day programmable or non-programmable PI thermostat (F or C). It is used with AHU control and heat pump for both heating and cooling applications. The VT7600 has both system and fan switching with internal or remote sensor capabilities. Five buttons control a simple menu for setup of over 20 congurable parameters. Other control features are listed below.
VT7600
ALL MODELS Screen lockout (partial/total) Power fail start up delay H/C changeover (manual or auto) Adjustable deadband Individual setpoint range stops H/C Extended fan run time Extended occupancy time Frost low limit protection Outside air lockout H/C No logo on thermostat Room sensor calibration Outside air calibration
PROGRAMMABLE MODELS Two or four events per day Progressive recovery or none 12 or 24 hour clock Six-hour clock retention occupied/unoccupied output contact ECONOMICAL MODELS Mixed-air (0-10V) control output Mixed-air sensor input Mixed-air setpoint Economizer changeover temp Outside air damper minimum position (percent) HEAT PUMP MODELS Congurable heat pump O/B control OSA lockout for HP emergency/comp heating
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA Display Controls Thermostat Type Optimal Start Heat Pump High/Lo Stages Available 20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz 2 VA Two-line backlit LCD Five menu-driven buttons: up, down, menu, no, yes/scroll 7-day programmable and nonprogrammable models Progressive recovery enable/disable Outside air lockout (emergency heating/ compressor heating) 1H/1C, 2H/2C, (3H/2C heat pump) 2H/2C + proportional mixed air economizer Permanent, EEPROM Six-hour power-fail retention Off/Auto/Cool/Heat On-continuous Auto-on demand Smart-(on/occupied, off/unoccupied) 0.9F, ( 0.5C) at 70F (21C) Control Output Night setback clock Remote occupied override timer 1A relays, 30 VAC, SPST, 3A surge maximum Auxiliary Contact Output 1A relay, 30 VAC, SPDT, follows occupied schedule Proportional 0-10 VDC, 2K minimum Mixed Air Output impedance (economizer model only) Proportional plus integral Control Type Adjustable 2 to 4F (1 to 2C) Dead Band Outside Air Lockout Limits Heating 15 to 120F (26 to 49C), 5 increments Cooling -40 to 95F (-40 to 35C), 5 increments Low Limit Protection Enable/disable, heating on at 47F (5.5C) Adjustable 10 to 120 seconds Power-up Delay Keypad Lockout 3 levels, (full, none, partial) Adjustable, heating 3-8; cooling, 3-4 Cycles Per Hour Adjustable 5F, (2.5C), 1F increments Display Offset Three green on (fan, cooling, heating) LED Indicators Wiring 18 AWG maximum, 22 AWG recommended Standard vertical 2" x 4" box Mounting UL FR1 ame retardant plastic Enclosure Color White Operating Temperature 32F to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 4.94"H x 3.38"W x 1.13"D (12.5 x 8.6 x 2.9 cm) 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) Weight UL Listed File #E234137, cUL, CE Approvals RoHS Statement Yes 1 year Warranty
Memory (schedule) Clock System Switching Fan Switching Control Accuracy Setpoint Range Heating 40 to 90F (4.5 to 32C) Cooling 54 to 100F (12 to 37.5C) Setpoint High/Low Limits Individually-adjustable heating / cooling Remote Sensor Room Sensor Room sensor input auto-detected 10K Type 2 thermistors Outside Air Outside air input auto-detected 10K Type 2 thermistors Mixed Air Mixed air input auto-detected (economizer model only) 10K Type 2 thermistors Ancillary Inputs Two dry-contact digital inputs, applied for: Service/status reminders Filter alarm
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1327

WIRING
TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATION BY THERMOSTAT MODEL THERMOSTAT MODEL VT7600 VT7600A VT7600B VT7600H VT7652A VT7652B VT7656B VT7652H Terminal** Y1 Y2 G RC C H W1 W2 O/B AUX D1 D2 EC RS Scom OS MS
NEW!
**Terminals and functions are not present on every thermostat
Function** Energizes on a call for first stage cooling (first stage heating HP) Energizes on a call for second stage cooling (second stage heating HP) Energizes fan in accordance with the selected fan mode 24 VAC from equipment transformer 24 VAC (common) from equipment transformer 24 VAC for heating stages (jumper to RC for single power systems) Energizes on a call for first stage heating (third stage heating HP) Energizes on a call for second stage heating HP reversing valve configurable (O = on or B = on) Configurable auxiliary output (follows schedule) Configurable digital input Configurable digital input 0 - 10 VDC economizer actuator output Remote room sensor Sensor common Outdoor air sensor Mixed air sensor Internal relays and connections 0-10V Thermistor Sensor Inputs RS Scom OS MS
VT7600 SERIES THERMOSTAT VT Electronics Y1 Y2 G RC C RH W1 W2 O/B AUX D1 D2
EC
Cool 1
Cool 2
Fan
Heat 1
Heat 2
Rev. Vlv.
Aux
ACT.
Type 2 Model 24 Type 2 Type 2 Model 24 Model 24
*
Note:All outputs are 24 VAC. Note: Terminals are thermostat-dependent. See Table 1. 24V T-2 T-1 24 VAC Thermostat Power (provided by installer)
24V
* If using the same power source for the thermostat and heating loads, delete transformer T-2 and install a jumper across RC and RH, then wire W1 and W2 common to T1 ( ).
21
1328
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
MODEL VT7600 VT7605 VT7606 VT7607 VT7652 VT7656 VT7657 VT7605 B 5031

THERMOSTAT TYPE RTU controller, no local schedule RTU + economizer controller, no local schedule RTU + IAQ + economizer controller, no local schedule RTU + humidity controller, no local schedule RTU controller, local schedule RTU + economizer controller, local schedule RTU + humidity controller, local schedule OUTPUTS A 1H/1C (VT7600 and VT7652 only) B 2H/2C (not available on VT7606) E 2H/2C + IAQ + economizer controller (VT7606 and VT7656 only) F 2C + analog heat controller (VT7600 and VT7652 only) H 3H/3C heatpump controller (VT7600 and VT7652 only) W 2H/2C + humidity + watersource heatpump controller (VT7600 and VT7652 cover) COVER 5000 Viconics logo 5031 Blank cover (no logo) 5500 PIR cover w/ Viconics logo 5531 PIR cover blank (no logo) Example: VT7605B5031
KTR24 KTR24-LED-MB ST-D24 ST-FZ24-8 ST-O24 COV-HPUMP COV-MULTI COV-SEN-O TG511A1000
RELATED PRODUCTS Remote room thermistor sensor Remote room sensor with override button and LED 10K Type 2 duct temperature themistor Averaging duct thermistor sensor, Type 2, Model 24 OSA thermistor sensor, Type 2, model 24, 0.36F (0.20C)
PAGE 1169 1169 1197 1234 1217
ACCESSORIES PAGE Cover, heat pump, no logo Cover, conventional, no logo Cover, no logo, sensor with override Thermostat guard- clear-medium size 1392
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1329

DESCRIPTION
The T87 Series is the latest design of the most recognized thermostat in the world. The T87 is an analog- or digitaldisplay thermostat made for typical residential use on heating and cooling systems with either conventional heat or heat pump. The TH3000 Series is a digital thermostat for typical residential systems with either conventional heat or heat pump. The TH4000 Series is a ve-day-plustwo programmable digital thermostat. It is also for typical residential systems with either conventional heat or heat pump.
HONEYWELL RESIDENTIAL THERMOSTATS, PROGRAMMABLE AND NON-PROGRAMMABLE T87, TH3000, AND TH4000 SERIES
NEW!
T87N1000 Non-programmable T8775C1005 Non-programmable TH3110D1008 Non-programmable TH4110D1007 Programmable Proportional plus integral (PI) 12-hour, 1 minute/month, 10-year battery (TH4110) Compressor Cycle Adjustable cycles per hour (T8775, TH3110, TH4110) Minimum Compressor Off Time Five minutes, xed (T8775), adjustable (TH3110, TH4110) Wiring 18 to 22 AWG, no shield required Night Setback Program Times 5+2-day, 4 periods/day (TH4110) Night Setback Recovery Adaptive intelligent recovery White Color Operating Temperature TH3110, TH4110 32 to 120F (0 to 49C) T8775, T87N 40 to 110F (4 to 43C) Operating Humidity 5% to 90% RH (all models) Dimensions TH4110 3.8"H x 5.8"W x 1.25"D (9.6 x 14.7 x 3.2 cm) T87 Round 3.69" diameter x 1.75" deep (1.5 x 0.7 cm) Weight 0.75 lb, (0.34 kg) Warranty 5 years Control Type Clock
FEATURES
Five-year warranty Traditional look for existing systems Mercury-free design Power-stealing design (T87, T8775) 24 VAC power (TH3110, TH4110) F or C selectable (digital types only) Standard terminal designations
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VAC power-stealing (T87, T8775) 20 to 30 VAC or 750 mV 50/60 Hz, (TH3110, TH4110) Battery 2 AA alkaline, (TH3110, TH4110) System Compatibility Conventional gas/oil and electric (all models) Heat pump, (T8775, TH3110, TH4110) Adjustable F or C, backlit Digital Display T8775 LCD, 0.75 sq in TH3110 LCD, 1.32 sq in TH4110 LCD, 1.73 sq in Controls Fan, system, setpoint (programmable on TH4110) T87 Dial and slide switches TH3110, TH4110 2 to 5 soft keys and slide switches Accuracy 1F (0.5C), (T8775, TH3110, TH4110) 2F (1C), (T87N) Switch Type 1A relay, (T87N, TH3110, TH4110) Electronic, (T8775) 0.02A to 1.5A triac Stages 1 heat and 1 cool, manually switched System Switch Heat/Off/Cool Fan Switch Auto/On Set Point Range Heat and Cool 40 to 90F (4.5 to 32C) , (T87N) Heating Digital 40 to 90F (4.5 to 32C), (T8775, TH3110, TH4110) Cooling Digital 50 to 99F (10 to 37C), (T8775, TH3110, TH4110) Supply Voltage
21
1330
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
RESIDENTIAL ROUND T8775 1H/1C O RESIDENTIAL DIGITAL DISPLAY TH3110 1H/1C T87N1000 1H/1C O
HONEYWELL RESIDENTIAL THERMOSTATS, PROGRAMMABLE AND NON-PROGRAMMABLE T87, TH3000, AND TH4000 SERIES
TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS BY THERMOSTAT MODEL ** Terminals and functions are not present on every thermostat Thermostat Function** 24 VAC common (must come from cooling transformer), (TH3110, TH4110) Change-over heating valve, (energized when in heating) 24 VAC power for heating (typically jumpered with Rc for common powered systems) 24 VAC power for cooling and single transformer systems Changeover cooling valve, (energized when in cooling) Fan relay Cooling 1st stage conventional and 1st stage heating for heat pump (B terminal energized) Heating 1st stage (conventional heat)
TH4110 1H/1C, Programmable
Terminal**
C B R Rc O G Y W
O = Heat pump application only = Conventional heating application
T87 SERIES THERMOSTAT TERMINATION
TH SERIES THERMOSTAT TERMINATION
**
Thermostat Electronics
H O C
Rc
Rc
**
Heat Cool Fan HTG VLV HP CLG VLV HP
Conv.
Conv. HP
Heat
Cool Conv. HP
Fan
CLG VLV HP
Conv.
HTG VLV HP
24 VAC 24 VAC **Power Stealing CKT T1 T2 T1
24 VAC T2
24 VAC TRANSFORMER (provided by others) Internal thermostat connections Wiring if 2nd transformer needed (T2) *Install jumper if a single transformer is used (this is most of the time). Conv. Conventional application HP Heat pump application
24 VAC TRANSFORMER (provided by others)
MODEL T8775C1005 T87N1000 TH3110D1008 TH4110D1007 50000066-001 50002883-001 50010944-001 DESCRIPTION Round digital thermostat 1H/1C (conventional or heat pump), system (H/O/C), fan auto/on Round analog thermostat 1H/1C (conventional or heat pump), system (H/O/C), fan auto/on Digital thermostat 1H/1C (conventional or heat pump), system (H/O/C), fan auto/on Programmable (5+2 day) thermostat 1H/1C (conventional or heat pump), system (H/O/C), fan auto/on ACCESSORIES PAGE Round decorative cover plate, 5.5" diameter (T87) Cover goof plate, 6"H x 8.3"W (TH6000 Series, TH5000 Series) 1391 Range stops for T87 thermostats
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1331
COOLING RELAY
1 2 3
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.

1

HEAT RELAY
MEDIUM FAN RELAY
LOW FAN RELAY
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
2 REMOVE FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION 3 WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS 3 WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS IS OPTIONAL. OPTIONAL. 3 WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON OPTIONAL. CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. WHEN USED, THE COMMON MUST CONNECT Typical wiring of single transformer TO THE COOLING TRANSFORMER SECONDARY. Typical wiring of 2 pipe fan coil with reheat. Typical wiring of 4 pipe fan coil.
MULTIPRO MULTISPEED AND MULTIPURPOSE THERMOSTAT TB7100A100 MULTIPRO SERIES

2 FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD 1 POWER SUPPLY. PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. PROTECTION AS
DESCRIPTION
1H/1C system.
The TB7100A1000 MultiPRO Multispeed and Multipurpose Thermostat is an effortless, seven-day programmable or nonprogrammable thermostat that provides L (HOT) universal system compatibility, precise comfort control and is easy-to-program. 24 VAC
L2 1
C G Y
FEATURES 1
multiple days Programmable or non-programmable modes HEAT RELAY Remote setback input for occupancy sensors or INDOOR TEMPERATURE timeclocks COOLING RELAY SENSOR/REMOTE SETBACK failures and keeps Real-time clock LOW FAN RELAY time during power automatically updates to daylight savings
MEDIUM FAN RELAY
C W1 L1 G G2 (HOT) Large, clear backlit display with backlight Y G3 24 VAC O/B Menu-driven programming S1 L2 RC S2 need Speedy same-schedule programming, no 2 R
4 O/B RC R
NEW!
INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR/REMOTE 24 SETBACK
VAC
L2 HEATING HIGH TRANSFORMER FAN RELAY
HEAT RELAY
LOWTEMPERATURE FAN RELAY INDOOR SENSOR/REMOTE SETBACK MEDIUM FAN RELAY
SENSOR/REMOTE SETBACK/CHANGEOVER PIPE SENSOR
AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY
HIGH FAN RELAY
SUPPLY. DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD 1 POWER PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS ANDPROVIDE OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. REQUIRED. 2 FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
Typical hookup of dual transformer 1H/1C system.
1 2 3 4 5
L1 (HOT)
W1 G2 G3 S1 S2
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.
CHANGEOVER VALVE
to COMPRESSOR copy CONTACTOR

FAN RELAY
L2
INDOOR 24 TEMPERATURE VAC SENSOR/REMOTE 5 SETBACK AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY
C G Y O/B RC R
WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS 3OPTIONAL. "O/B" TERMINAL SET TO CONTROL AS EITHER "O" OR "B" IN THE INSTALLER SETUP. G2 OPTIONAL INDOOR REMOTE SENSOR OR REMOTE SETBACK. WIRES MUST HAVE A CABLES1 SEPARATE FROM THE THERMOSTAT CABLE.
W1 G3 S2
TWO PIPE HEAT/COOL RELAY LOW FAN RELAY TR21/TR21-A WIRING

SUBBASE S1 TR21
with auxiliary heat (2H/1C). TB7100A100

INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR/REMOTE SETBACK/CHANGEOVER PIPE SENSOR
Typical hookup of single-stage heat pump
MEDIUM FAN RELAY

S2
AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY HIGH FAN RELAY
APPLICATION 1 POWER SUPPLY.
HIGH FAN RELAY
1H/1C conventional 2 FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. Up to 2H/1C heat pump 3 WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS 4-pipe fan coil (three fan speeds) OPTIONAL. 2-pipe fan coil (three fan speeds) 2-pipe fan coil with Auxiliary Typical wiring of 4 pipe fan Heat coil. (3 fan speeds) PTAC (Hi, Lo fan speed)
PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
T3 DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD T4 PROVIDE 1T POWER T SUPPLY. PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
2 3
FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER.

1
TR21-A THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS WHEN USING BATTERIES, TR21 OPTIONAL. T T Typical wiring of 2 pipe fan coil with reheat. 1 THE TR21-A IS A 10K OHM SENSOR.
Wiring two TR21 (20K ohm) Sensors and one TR21-A (10K ohm) Sensor to provide a temperature averaging network
WIRING - HEAT PUMP WITH AUXILIARY HEAT

L (HOT) 24 VAC L2 1 C G Y 4 O/B RC R 3 1
W1 G2 G3 S1 S2
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. "O/B" TERMINAL SET TO CONTROL AS EITHER "O" OR "B" IN THE INSTALLER SETUP. OPTIONAL INDOOR REMOTE SENSOR OR REMOTE SETBACK. WIRES MUST HAVE A CABLE SEPARATE FROM THE THERMOSTAT CABLE.
2 3 4 5
CHANGEOVER VALVE COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR FAN RELAY
INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR/REMOTE 5 SETBACK AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY
Typical hookup of single-stage heat pump with auxiliary heat (2H/1C).
SPECIFICATIONS
21
Supply Voltage Battery Contact Ratings Memory Remote Sensor Accuracy Output Control Deadband Setpoint/Setback Heating Cooling
20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz SUBBASE Display Accuracy 1F (0.5C) Optional, 2-AA Changeover Manual or Auto changeover S1 S2 0.02- 1.0A, 0.60A maximum current selectable TR21 for fan terminals System Settings Heat-Off-Cool-Auto 10 year Fan Setting Auto-On T3 T4 T T Indoor/Setback/Changeover Fan Speeds Low, Medium, High 1F (0.5C), system dependent Dimensions 3.75"H x 6.0"W x 1.375"D SPST relays (9.5 x 15.2 x 3.5 cm) 1 TR21-A Weight Proportional plus Integral (PI) 1.0 lb (0.45kg) TR21 (1.5/5C) Adjustable, 2/9F, Warranty 2 years Adjustable with programmable limits 1 THE TR21-A IS A 10K OHM SENSOR. T T 40 to 90F (10 to 32C) 50 to 99F (10 to 37C) Wiring two TR21 (20K ohm) Sensors and one
1332
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
TR21-A (10K ohm) Sensor to provide a temperature averaging network
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING - CONVENTIONAL
1 L1 1 (HOT) L1 (HOT) L2 L2 24 VAC 24 VAC

MULTIPRO MULTISPEED AND MULTIPURPOSE THERMOSTAT TB7100A100 MULTIPRO SERIES
C C G G Y Y O/B O/B RC RC R R
3 3
2 2
W1 W1 G2 G2 G3 G3 S1 S1 S2 S2
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR FAN RELAY FAN RELAY 1 L1 1 (HOT) L1
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR FAN RELAY FAN RELAY
INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR/REMOTE INDOOR TEMPERATURE SETBACK SENSOR/REMOTE SETBACK
(HOT) 24 VAC 24 VAC L2 COOLING L2 TRANSFORMER COOLING TRANSFORMER L1 1 (HOT) L1 (HOT) 1 24 VAC 24 VAC
3 3
2 2
W1 W1 G2 G2 G3 G3 S1 S1 S2 S2
INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR/REMOTE INDOOR TEMPERATURE SETBACK SENSOR/REMOTE SETBACK
1 1 2 2 3 3
HEAT RELAY HEAT RELAY POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL.
Typical wiring of single transformer Typical wiring of single transformer 1H/1C system. 1H/1C system.
HEAT RELAY L2 HEAT RELAY HEATING L2 TRANSFORMER HEATING TRANSFORMER 1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD AS REQUIRED. POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD 1 PROTECTION PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. 2 REMOVE FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. 2 REMOVE FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. 3 WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION 3 IS OPTIONAL. WHEN USED, THE COMMON MUST CONNECT WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION TO THE COOLING TRANSFORMER SECONDARY. IS OPTIONAL. WHEN USED, THE COMMON MUST CONNECT TO THE COOLING TRANSFORMER SECONDARY.
Typical hookup of dual transformer Typical hookup of dual transformer 1H/1C system. 1H/1C system.
WIRING - FAN COIL
3 3
2 2
W1 W1 G2 G2 G3 G3 S1 S1 S2 S2
3 3
2 2
W1 W1 G2 G2 G3 G3 S1 S1 S2 S2
HEAT RELAY HEAT RELAY COOLING RELAY COOLING RELAY LOW FAN RELAY LOW FAN RELAY MEDIUM FAN RELAY MEDIUM FAN RELAY INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR/REMOTE INDOOR TEMPERATURE SETBACK SENSOR/REMOTE SETBACK
TWO PIPE HEAT/COOL RELAY TWO PIPE HEAT/COOL RELAY LOW FAN RELAY LOW FAN RELAY MEDIUM FAN RELAY MEDIUM FAN RELAY AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY
INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR/REMOTE INDOOR TEMPERATURE SETBACK/CHANGEOVER SENSOR/REMOTE PIPE SENSOR SETBACK/CHANGEOVER PIPE SENSOR
1 1 2 2 3 3
HIGH FAN RELAY HIGH FAN RELAY POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL.
1 1 2 2 3 3
HIGH FAN RELAY HIGH FAN RELAY POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL. WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION IS OPTIONAL.
Typical wiring of 4 pipe fan coil. Typical wiring of 4 pipe fan coil.
Typical wiring of 2 pipe fan coil with reheat. Typical wiring of 2 pipe fan coil with reheat.
L (HOT) L (HOT) L2 L2 1 1 24 VAC 24 VAC
21
MODEL TB7100A1000 Y C7189U1005 4 O/B 4 O/B RC TR21 RC 2 R TR21-A 2 R

C C G G Y 3 3
DESCRIPTION Multispeed and multipurpose thermostat 1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
W1 PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. W1 2 FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. G2 ACCESSORIES 2 FACTORY INSTALLED JUMPER. G2 G3 USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION 3 WHEN Remote indoor thermistor sensor: 10K ohm NTC (TB7220) G3 S1 OPTIONAL. WHEN USING BATTERIES, THE 24V COMMON CONNECTION 3 IS S1 IS OPTIONAL. Wall mount remote indoor sensor: 20K ohm NTC (Type 42) S2 4 "O/B" TERMINAL SET TO CONTROL AS EITHER "O" OR "B" S2 Wall mount remote indoor sensor: 10K ohm NTC (use for averaging only)
4 5 5 INDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR/REMOTE INDOOR TEMPERATURE 5 SETBACK SENSOR/REMOTE 5 SETBACK AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY AUXILIARY HEAT RELAY 1 PROTECTION AS PROVIDE REQUIRED. POWER SUPPLY. DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD
March 2014
CHANGEOVER VALVE CHANGEOVER VALVE COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR FAN RELAY FAN RELAY
WE MAKE IT EASY.
IN THE INSTALLER SETUP. "O/B" TERMINAL SET TO CONTROL AS EITHER "O" OR "B" IN THE INSTALLER SETUP. OPTIONAL INDOOR REMOTE SENSOR OR REMOTE SETBACK. WIRES MUST HAVE A CABLE SEPARATE FROM THE THERMOSTAT OPTIONAL INDOOR REMOTE SENSOR OR REMOTE SETBACK. CABLE.MUST HAVE A CABLE SEPARATE FROM THE THERMOSTAT WIRES CABLE.
Typical hookup of single-stage heat pump Typical hookup of single-stage heat pump with auxiliary heat (2H/1C).
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1333

FOCUSPRO RESIDENTIAL AND LIGHT COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS TH5000, TH6000, TB7000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The TH5000 Series is a single or multi-stage digital thermostat made for typical residential heating and cooling systems with either conventional heat or heat pump. The TH6000 Series is a ve-day-plus-two programmable thermostat. It is available in single- or multi-stage models for typical residential H/C systems with either conventional heat or heat pump. The TB7220 is a seven-day programmable thermostat made for light commercial applications. The TB7220 is multi-stage, for conventional heat or heat pump with additional algorithms to accommodate larger spaces and larger equipment in commercial applications. Algorithms include congurable recovery ramp and pre-occupancy purge cycle. It also has remote sensor capability. FEATURES Five-year warranty Large digital backlit display Auto or manual heat-cool operation Relay switch type F or C selectable Standard terminal designations
NEW!
TH5220D1029 Non-Programmable TH6220D1028 Programmable TB7220U1012 Commercial Programmable TH5110D1022 Non-Programmable 10K thermistor, TB7220 only 1 minute/month, 10-year battery TH6000, TB7220 only DST Auto Adjust Yes, TB7220 only Compressor Cycle Adjustable cycles per hour and minimum off time Purge Duration Adjustable, TB7220 only Heat Pump Lockout Adjustable, TB7220 only Remote Sensors Two, indoor and outdoor, TB7220 only Wiring 18 to 22 AWG, no shield required Night Setback Program Times TB7220 7-day, 2 or 4 periods/day TH6220 5+2- or 5+1+1-day, 4 periods/day Color White Operating Temperature 32 to 120F (0 to 49C) TB7220 0 to 120F (-18 to 49C) Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH non-condensing Dimensions TH5110 3.42"H x 4.5"W x 1.3"D (8.7 x 11.4 x 3.3 cm) TH6000, TH5220 3.56"H x 5.81"W x 1.5"D (9.0 x 14.7 x 3.8 cm) TB7220 3.75"H x 6.0"W x 1.4"D (9.5 x 15.2 x 3.6 cm) Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) Warranty 5 years, all except TB7220 (2 years) Remote Sensor Clock
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Battery System Compatibility Display Display Offset Controls Keypad Lockout Sensor Type Accuracy Switch Type Stages & Control Memory System Switch Fan Switch Setpoint Rrange Heating Cooling Setpoint Limits Control Type Deadband
20 to 30 VAC or 750 mV, 50/60 Hz Optional, 2-AA Conventional and heat pump 2.98 to 5.09 sq in, model dependent (F or C) -3 to +3F (-3 to +3C), TB7220 only 4 to 6 soft keys, model dependent Congurable, TB7220 only Thermistor 1F (0.5C) Y1,Y2,W,E: 1A relay W2,G,O/B,L,A: 0.5A relay See terminal designation table 10 years, then AA batteries required Selectable, Heat/Off/Cool/Auto, plus emergency heat on TH5220 and TH6220 Auto/On 40 to 90F (4.5 to 32C) 50 to 99F (10 to 37C) Full setpoint span (TH5220, TH6220, TB7220 only) Proportional plus integral (PI) TB7220 tuned for larger spaces/ equipment 3F (1.7C) xed (all except TB7220) Adjustable 2 to 9F (1.1 to 5C), TB7220 only
21
1334
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
TABLE 1. TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS BY THERMOSTAT MODEL RESIDENTIAL THERMOSTATS RESIDENTIAL PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS TH6110 1H/1C, programmable TH6220 2H/2C, programmable TH5110 1H/1C

FOCUSPRO RESIDENTIAL AND LIGHT COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS TH5000, TH6000, TB7000 SERIES
COMMERCIAL
** Terminals and functions are not present on every thermostat
TH5220 2H/2C
TB7220 3H/2C, programmable
Terminal** Rc R Y1 C W1 O/B G W2 Aux
Thermostat Function** 24 VAC power for cooling, for a split heating-cooling system 24 VAC power for heating (typically jumpered with Rc for common-powered systems) Cooling 1st stage 24 VAC common (must come from cooling transformer) Heating 1st stage Changeover valve (replaces W1 for heat pump) Fan relay Heating 2nd stage (TH5220, TH6220, TB7220) 2nd stage heat for heat pump application (TH5220, TH6220, replaces W2 for HP) Cooling 2nd stage (TH5220, TH6220, TB7220) Emergency heat relay (TH5220, TH6220, replaces Y2 for HP) Emergency heat enabled annunciate (TH5220, TH6220) Economizer or time-of-day output powered by the R terminal (TB7220) Remote sensor 1 set for room or OSA (TB7220) Remote sensor 2 set for room or OSA (TB7220)
Y2 E L A S1 S2
O = Heat pump application only = Conventional heating application
TH and TB SERIES THERMOSTAT TERMINATION
Internal Relays and Connections
S2
S1
Y E 2
A W U 2 X
O W B 1
Y1
Rc
ECON. TOD
EM. H. Enable
EM Heat
Cool Heat 2 2
Fan
Rev. Heat VLV 1
Cool 1 24 VAC
*
24 VAC
Remote Sensors
HP
Conv. Conv.
HP Conv. T1 T2
* Factory Jumper (remove if heating transformer is used).

Wiring if Separate Heating Transformer is Needed. Internal Thermostat Connections Conv. Conventional Heating HP Heat Pump Heating ECON/TOD Economizer Enable or Time of Day Output
MODEL TH5110D1022 TH5220D1029 TH6110D1021 TH6220D1028 TB7220U1012 32003796-001 50002883-001 C7089U1006 C7189U1005 March 2014 DESCRIPTION Digital thermostat 1H/1C (HP), system (H/O/C/A), fan auto/on Digital thermostat 2H/2C (HP), system (H/O/C/A/Em), fan auto/on Programmable (5-2 day) thermostat 1H/1C (HP), system (H/O/C/A), fan auto/on Programmable (5-2 day) thermostat 2H/2C (2H/1C HP), system (H/O/C/A/Em), fan auto/on Programmable (7-day) thermostat 3H/2C (HP), system (H/O/C/A), fan auto/on RELATED PRODUCTS Cover goof plate, 6"H x 8.3"W (TH7220) Cover goof plate, 6"H x 8.3"W (TH6000 Series, TH5000 Series) Outdoor sensor with mounting clip (TB7220) Remote indoor thermistor sensor: 10K ohm NTC (TB7220)
21
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1335

VISIONPRO PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT TH8000 SERIES, MODEL TB8220
DESCRIPTION The Vision Pro T_8000 is a 7-day programmable thermostat designed for universal system compatibility and is easy to program for precise comfort control. Programming is done using the large clear backlit display by just touching the screen and following the menu. The thermostat is congurable for system type (Conventional/Heat pump), system stages (1H/1C through 3H/2C), Fan control (electric/ gas), with some models offering humidity control features. The T_8000 is powered by 24VAC and/or 3 AAA batteries for time and program retention. APPLICATION Designed specically for low-voltage control requiring time scheduled occupied-unoccupied control. Ideal for roof top units (small business or retail), homes, condos, cottages, and any packaged AHU operation. FEATURES Five-year warranty Scheduling or non-scheduling Large backlit touch screen display Menu touch screen interaction Fan switching (touch screen) System switching (touch screen) Setpoint and conguration (touch screen) 1H/1C or 2H/2C or 3H/2C HP Heat pump O = on or B = on Emergency heat (electric/gas) De-humidication control models Fahrenheit or Celsius operation 24 VAC and/or 3-AAA batteries 10-year built-in memory retention Base included Remote sensor option (room or OSA) Seven-day schedule or manual 12- or 24-hour clock 2 or 4 occupied/unoccupied periods per day Adaptive intelligent recovery Proportional + Integral control Integral adjustment (Fast, Norm, Slow) Minimum compressor off timer Cycles/hour for cooling and heating OSA heat pump compressor lockout
NEW!
TH8110U1003 Screen lockout (partial/total) Auto daylight savings time Service reminders (TH) (lter, UV lamp, humidity pad) 30-day low battery indication Clean screen timer Change over (manual or auto) SP hold permanent or time out (TH) Holiday and override (TB) Individual setpoint range stops H/C Extended fan run time Temperature display offset 3 Installer test function Adjustable H/C deadband Economizer/scheduled contact (TB) Touch Screen Controls Setpoints Up/Down System Heat/Off/Cool/Auto Fan control On/Auto/Circ (TH), On/Auto (TB) Schedule 7 day, 2 or 4 periods Permanent or time out Hold (TH) Holiday (TB) Time out by days Clock 12-hour or 24-hour, 1 min./month Screen F/C, backlight Override Occupied time out Menu Service set up, over 40 parameters Enclosure White plastic, indoors only Premier white Color Wiring Terminals for 18 AWG wire Operating Temperature 0 to 120F (-18 to 49C) Operating Humidity 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing) Mounting Horizontal with base included 4.56"H x 6.0"W x 1.37"D, Dimensions (11.6 x 15.24 x 3.5 cm) Weight 1.1 lb (0.5 kg) Approvals UL, cUL, California Title 24 (TB), and ADA compliant 5 years Warranty March 2014
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Battery Supply Current Memory Sensor Type Remote Sensor Accuracy Outputs Control Dead-band Setpoint/Setback Heating Cooling RH Keypad Lockout Display 20-30 VAC, 50/60 Hz Optional, 3-AAA H/C - 1.0A, fan - 0.6A 10 years, then 3-AAA batteries required Built-in 10K thermistor Room or OSA (accessory required) 1F (0.5C), system dependent SPST relays Proportional plus Integral (PI) Adjustable, 2/9F, (1.5/5C) Adjustable with programmable limits 40 to 90F (10 to 32C) 50 to 99F (10 to 37C) 40 to 80%, (TH8321) Unlocked, locked completely, or locked except setpoint 3.5" x 2.5" backlit touch screen, temperature, humidity (TH8321), system, fan, time, day, setpoint, service reminders (TH), OSA temp if wired 3F (1.5C), in 1F (0.5C) increments
21
Display Offset
1336
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
WIRING
Heat Pump Conventional Y2 L E Y2 RC R Y W G C RC R Y (A) (A) W2 S1 S2 O/B G C (W1) AUX S1 S2 TB8220 only Screw Terminals for 18 AWG

VISIONPRO PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT TH8000 SERIES, MODEL TB8220
THERMOSTAT KEYS AND DISPLAY
Heating, cooling, or anti-cycle wait status Current inside temperature Current setpoint temperature SYSTEM DOWN ARROW Selects HEAT/OFF/COOL/AUTO Lowers temperature setting FAN UP ARROW Selects ON/AUTO/CIRC (TH) Raises temperature setting Selects ON/AUTO(TB) Touch screen function/status Day of week
TUE
FAN
Jumper Supplied (remove as needed)
LED lamp
Screen Locked Set To
Inside
AUTO
SYSTEM
TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS
Designator Typical connection AUX Auxiliary heat relay (heat pump TH) C Common connection E, (A) Emergency heat, (time-of-day or economizer) G Fan relay L 24 VAC LED light output (externally switched) O/B Changeover valve (heat pump) S1, S2 Indoor or outside air sensor termination R 24 VAC system or heat transformer RC 24 VAC cooling transformer W First stage heating W1 Second stage heating (heat pump TB) W2 Second stage heating Y First stage cooling Y2 Second stage cooling Note: Not all terminals shown are used on all models. Be sure to use the conventional OR heat pump terminals, NOT both.
Cool ON Following Schedule Outside Air
HEAT
AM
DONE
SCHED
HOLD or HOLIDAY
CLOCK
SCREEN
MORE
OVERRIDE (TB)
PROGRAM SCHED ENTER Enters Scheduling Mode
CLOCK Sets the time forward or back
MORE Shows additional accessory and maintenance options SCREEN Locks out the screen to allow for cleaning
HOLIDAY (TB) HOLD (TH) Sets Holiday Sets a Permanent Hold Un-Occ Time-Out and Activities Vacation Hold TIME Display current time of day, override hold time remaining, or number of vacation or holiday days remaining
FOLLOWING SCHEDULE Shows the thermostat is following the programmed schedule RECOVERY During occupied warm-up or cool-down
MODEL TB8220U1003 TH8110U1003 TH8320U1008 DESCRIPTION 24V commercial, seven-day programmable 2H/2C or 3H/2C HP w/system and fan switch 24V residential, 1H/1C or HP sevenday programmable thermostat w/ system and fan switch 24V residential, 2H/2C or 3H/2C HP seven-day programmable thermostat with system and fan switch 24V residential, 2H/2C or 3H/2C HP seven-day programmable thermostat with system and fan switch and humidity
The base plate is mounted directly to the wall or 2" x 4" horizontal or vertical back box. Use 18 AWG wire and terminals shown above. Position thermostat over the base plate and push onto pins. No leveling required.
GENERAL CONTROL SEQUENCE

The occupied status is time programmed to change the occupied and unoccupied setpoints. The thermostat control uses the setpoint as displayed using a PI control of single or multiple stages of heating and cooling equipment. The fan is controlled by demand in the AUTO mode for H/C, with delay fan off as programmed by the installer. In the ON mode the fan is continuous on and in the CIRC mode (TH only) the fan runs by demand plus an additional random circulation amount up to 35% of the scheduled occupied time. System control is selectable for Heat/Off/Cool/Auto. Automatic engages the H/C automatically with an adjustable deadband between the H/C setpoints with control status displayed on the LCD as Heating On or Cooling On, and a wait indicator during anti-cycle control.
March 2014 TH8321U1006
21
RELATED PRODUCTS PRODUCTS 209651A Wall adaptor plate 7.37 x 5.75 C7089U1006 Outdoor sensor with mounting clip (TB7220) C7189U1005 Remote indoor thermistor sensor: 10K NTC (TB7220)
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1337

RESIDENTIAL AND LIGHT COMMERCIAL THERMOSTATS 1F80 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The 1F80 Series thermostats come with a wide variety of options. These versatile thermostats can be used for residential and light commercial applications with both programmable and non-programmable options. There are also choices of displays including the White Rodgers Blue digital display as well as the classic green display. With universal, multi-stage, single stage, and heat pump options the right choice is easy to nd in this family of thermostats.
NEW!
1F80-0471 1F86-EZ-0251 1F86-344 Dimensions 1F87-361, 1F80-361, 1F86-344, 1F85-277 6.1"W x 3.8"H x 1.1"D (15.5 x 9.7 x 2.8 cm) 1F80-0471,1F80ST-0471, 1F86-0471, 1F86ST-0471, 1F86EZ-0251 4.4"W x 3.4"H x 1.2"D (11.2 x 8.6 x 3.04 cm) 1F82-0261,1F80-0261,1F80-0224, 1F89-0211, 1F86-0244, 1F82-261, 1F89-211, 1F89EZ-0251 4.8"W x 3.8"H x 1.5"D (12.2 x 9.7 x 3.8 cm) 1F85-0422, 1F83-0471, 1F83-0422, 1F85-0477, 1F85ST-0422 5.1"W x 3.9"H x 1.2"D (12.9 x 9.9 x 3.05 cm) Weight 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) approximate average Warranty 1 year
FEATURES
2" or 4" Blue or classic digital display (classic only available in 2") Choice of battery powered, dual power or hardwired models Fossil fuel or electric heat compatible Permanent Program retention during power loss Conguration menu allows keypad selection of options Selectable Celsius or Fahrenheit temperature display Air lter change indicator option Keypad lockout and setpoint temperature limit options
SPECIFICATIONS
0 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz or DC 0.05 to 1.5 Amps (load per terminal) 1.5 Amps maximum load (all terminals combined) Setpoint Temperature Range 45 to 90F (7 to 32C) Rated Differential 0.4 to 1.7F Standard Systems Gas, oil, electric, heat pump, millivolt systems, 2- or 3-wire hydronic zone valve Thermal Specications (dependent on model selected) Operating Ambient Temperature 32 to 105F (0 to 40C) Operating Humidity Range 90% non-condensing maximum Supply Voltage
21
1338
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
L
O/B

Jumper
Y2
W/E
W2
RH
RC
System
Single Stage 1 (SS1)
MultiStage 2 (MS2)
Blower/ O No Circulator No Output Energized Constantly Fault Output Fan Energized in Cool Mode Indicator Heat on Call for or Cool Mode Mode Cool (and System 1st Stage B 1st Stage Heat if Cool Heat Mode Malfunction Energized Constantly configured Mode 2nd Stage Switch in Heat, Off, for Electric 2nd Emergency Heat) Stage Mode
24 Volt 24 Volt (Hot) (Hot) Cool Heat
Optional*
24 Volt (Common)
* Common connection required for fault or malfunction indication.
Comfort Alert II Module or Similar System Malfunction Module
1F85-471 Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Two Transformers
Jumper
L
O/B
Y2
W/E
W2
RH
RC
Energized Constantly Fault in Indicator Cool Mode or Cool Mode System 1st Stage Malfunction B Switch Energized Constantly in Heat, Off, Emergency Mode
Blower/ Circulator No Fan Energized Heat Output Mode on Call for Cool (and 1st Stage Cool Heat Mode Heat if Mode 2nd Stage configured for Electric 2nd Heat) Stage No Output
Comfort Alert II Module or Similar System Malfunction Module
1F83-0422/1F85-0422 Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Single Transformer
Jumper
L
O/B
Y2
W/E
W2
RH
RC
Blower/ O No Circulator No Output Energized Constantly Fault Output Fan Energized in Cool Mode Indicator Heat on Call for or Cool Mode Mode Cool (and System 1st Stage B Heat if Cool 1st Stage Heat Mode Malfunction Energized Constantly configured Mode 2nd Stage Switch in Heat, Off, for Electric 2nd Emergency Heat) Stage Mode
24 Volt 24 Volt (Hot) (Hot) Cool Heat
Optional*
24 Volt (Common)
21
System Malfunction Module
1F85-0477 Single Stage or Multi-Stage System (No Heat Pump) with Single Transformer March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1339

WIRING (continued)
Optional Jumper for Single Stage Heat Pump
O/B
NEW!
THERMOSTAT SYSTEM
C R
Changeover Relay*
Compressor Contactor
Fan Relay
Heat Relay
Optional
Hot 24 VAC 120 VAC Neutral TRANSFORMER (Class II Current Limited)
* Changeover Relay is energized in COOL when O/B switch is in the O position Changeover Relay is energized in HEAT when O/B switch is in the B position
1F80-0224/1F86-0244, 1F80-0261/1F87-0261 Typical Wiring Diagram for Single Transformer Single Stage Systems
THERMOSTAT
O/B Y G W2 C SYSTEM MONITOR SWITCH Hot 24 VAC * Changeover Relay is energized in COOL when O/B switch is in the O position Changeover Relay is energized in HEAT when O/B switch is in the B position 120 VAC Neutral TRANSFORMER (Class II Current Limited) L R
SYSTEM
NOTE
If safety circuits are in only one of the systems, remove the transformer of the system with NO safety circuits.
Changeover Relay*
Fan Relay
Aux/Emergency Heat Relay (Stage 2)
Optional
1F82-0261/1F89-0211 Typical Wiring Diagram for Single Transformer Systems
O/B
W2 See Note **
C SYSTEM MONITOR SWITCH
SYSTEM
NOTE
21
Changeover Relay*
Fan Relay
Aux Relay (Stage 2)
Emergency Relay
Hot 24 VAC 120 VAC Neutral TRANSFORMER (Class II)
* Changeover Relay is energized in COOL when O/B switch is in the O position Changeover Relay is energized in HEAT when O/B switch is in the B position ** Jumper required to use a single Aux Heat for both Second Stage Heat and Emergency
1F82-261, 1F89-211 Single Transformer Systems
1340
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING (continued)
NOTE
RED jumper wire (provided with thermostat) must be connected between thermostat RH and RC terminals for proper thermostat operation with this system. C B O Y G W JUMPER WIRE RH RC

THERMOSTAT SYSTEM
Cooling System
Fan Relay
Heating System
Hot 120 VAC
24 VAC
Neutral TRANSFORMER
1F80-224, 1F80-361, 1F86-344 Heat/Cool, 4-wire, Single Transformer Systems
MODEL 1F80-0224 1F80-0261 1F80-0471 1F80-361 1F80ST-0471 1F82-0261 1F82-261 1F83-0422 1F83-0471 1F85-0422 1F85-0477 1F85-277 1F85ST-0422 DESCRIPTION Single stage dual power with 24 hour programmable option with 2 inch blue display Single stage dual power with 5-1-1 day programmable option with 2 inch blue display Single stage dual power with 5-1-1 day programmable option with 4 inch blue display Single stage dual power non-programmable with classic display Single stage dual power with 5-1-1 day programmable option with 4 inch blue display (spanish) Heat pump programmable dual power with 2 inch blue display Heat pump programmable dual power with classic display Multi stage or single stage with heat pump (2 stage heat)option non-programmable with 4 inch blue display Multi stage or single stage with heat pump (3 stage heat)option non-programmable with 4 inch blue display Multi-stage or single-stage heat pump (2 stage heat) compatible programmable or non-programmable with 4 inch blue display Multi-stage or single-stage heat pump (3 stage heat) compatible programmable or non-programmable with 4 inch blue display Multi-stage or single-stage heat pump compatible programmable or non-programmable with classic display Multi-stage or single-stage heat pump (2 stage heat) compatible programmable or non-programmable with 4 inch blue display (spanish) Single stage or heat pump non-programmable with 2 inch blue display Single stage or heat pump non-programmable with 4 inch blue display Single stage non-programmable with classic display Single stage or heat pump non-programmable with 2 inch blue display with home sleep and away options Single stage or heat pump non-programmable with 4 inch blue display (spanish) Single stage or heat pump with 7 day programmable option with classic display Heat pump non-programmable with 2 inch blue display Heat pump non-programmable with classic display Heat pump non-programmable with EZ read screen with home, sleep, and away options
1F86-0244 1F86-0471 1F86-344 1F86EZ-0251 1F86ST-0471 1F87-361 1F89-0211 1F89-211 1F89EZ-0251 Note: All models available in a 6-Pack. MODEL ATK63 F29-0198
21
RELATED PRODUCTS DESCRIPTION Thermostat guard (6.9"H x 4.7"W x 1.75"D - inside dim.) Thermostat guard (8.125"H x 4.375"W x 3.375"D - inside dim.)
PAGE 1392 1392
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1341

DIGITAL DISPLAY PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS T4000, T8000, AND T12000 SERIES THERMOSTATS
DESCRIPTION
Peco offers a wide range of programmable thermostats to meet your needs. The T4500 Series thermostats offer single or multistage heating and cooling. The T4900 Series offer up to 3 stages of heating and 2 cooling. Both series come with 24vac power or battery power options. The T8000 Series offer multistage heating and cooling with a large digital display. The T12000 Series can be used in single stage or multistage heating and cooling applications and it comes with a touchscreen display.
NEW!
T4000 Series T8000 Series T12000 Series Fan Fan Switching Cycling (Auto) or Continuous (On); 1 speed Off-Heat-Cool-Auto-Emergency (Emergency not available on T4000 models) Keypad with 3 digit code capability Yes Push button (selectable) Conventional or Heat Pump 4.3"H x 5.7"W x 1.3"D (10.92 x 14.48 x 3.3 cm) 1.1 lb (.49 kg) ASHRAE 90.1 AND CA Title 24 Building Code Compliant 2 years Lockout Remote Sensor Switch Type System Type Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty
FEATURES
7 day, 5/2 day, or non-programmable modes Keypad lockout feature Occupancy sensor input Holiday scheduling Remote sensor input Outdoor air sensor input for T8000 and T12000 SD Card programming option on T8000 and T12000 Blue backlit display 24 VAC or battery powered Terminal block wiring connections
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Output Voltage Output Current 24 VAC (20-30 VAC) 50/60Hz (10%) 20-30 VAC 0.02 - 1.0 A per terminal; W1 (B/O), W2 (AUX), G, A, E, Y1, Y2. NOTE: Total current draw must not exceed 2.5A. Temperature Range 50 to 90 F (10 to 32 C) Operating Temperature 0 to 120F (-17 to 48C Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH, Non-condensing Additional Specications AA Batteries can be used for power (recommended for back-up) Compatibility SD card: T8000 and T12000 Series Differential Display Type 1F (0.5C) Digital with blue backlight
21
1342
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Conventional Terminal Letters C Unswitched side, 24 VAC W1 Stage 1 Heat W2 Stage 2 Heat G Fan A E MODEL T12511-001 T12532-001 T12532-IAQ T4011-001 T4522-001 T4932SCH-001 T4932SCH-002 T8532-001 T8532-IAQ MODEL SP155-017 SB200-001

DIGITAL DISPLAY PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS T4000, T8000, AND T12000 SERIES THERMOSTATS
TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS & SYSTEM TYPES, T8000 & T12000 SERIES
Conventional Terminal Letters C Unswitched side, 24 VAC W1 Stage 1 Heat W2 Stage 2 Heat G Fan Economizer/Damper/ A Humidity E Stage 3 Heat Y1 Y2 RH RC SC S1 S2 S3 Stage 1 Cool Stage 2 Cool (or Dehumidify) Power for heating, switched side, 24 VAC Power for cooling, switched side, 24 VAC Sensor Common Indoor Remote Sensor Occupancy Setback Input* Outdoor Remote Sensor Heat Pump Terminal Letters C Unswitched side, 24 VAC B/O Reversing Valve AUX Auxiliary (Stage 3 Heat) G Fan A E Y1 Y2 RH RC SC S1 S2 S3 Economizer/Damper/Humidity Emergency Heat Compressor Stage 1, Heat / Cool 1 Compressor Stage 2, Heat / Cool 2 (or Dehumidify) Power for heating, switched side, 24 VAC Power for cooling, switched side, 24 VAC Sensor Common Indoor Remote Sensor Occupancy Setback Input* Outdoor Remote Sensor"
TERMINAL DESIGNATIONS AND SYSTEM TYPES, T4000 SERIES

Heat Pump Terminal Letters C Unswitched side, 24 VAC B/O Reversing Valve AUX Auxiliary (Stage 3 Heat) G Fan A E Compressor Stage 1, Y1 Stage 1 Cool Y1 Heat /Cool 1 Compressor Stage 2, Y2 Stage 2 Cool (or Dehumidify) Y2 Heat /Cool 2 (or Dehumidify) Power for heating, switched Power for heating, switched RH RH side, 24 VAC side, 24 VAC Power for cooling, switched Power for cooling, switched RC RC side, 24 VAC side, 24 VAC SC Sensor Common SC Sensor Common S1 Indoor Remote Sensor S1 Indoor Remote Sensor
DESCRIPTION Programmable 3 heat, 2 cool 24 VAC or battery powered large screen Non-programmable 1 heat, 1 cool 24 VAC or battery powered Programmable 3 heat, 2 cool 24 VAC or battery powered with scheduling Non-programmable 1 heat, 1 cool 24 VAC or battery powered Programmable 1 heat, 1 cool 24 VAC or battery powered Programmable 3 heat, 2 cool 24 VAC or battery powered large screen with humidity control Programmable 2 heat, 2 cool 24 VAC or battery powered Programmable 3 heat, 2 cool 24 VAC or battery powered with humidity control and scheduling Programmable 1 heat, 1 cool 24 VAC or battery powered DESCRIPTION Indoor remote sensor Occupancy sensor ACCESSORIES
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1343

RESIDENTIAL LCD DISPLAY PROGRAMMABLE/ NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS 1F72, 1E78 AND 1F78 SERIES THERMOSTATS
DESCRIPTION
The 1F72 Series thermostats are congured for heat pump systems and have a 5-2 day programming option. The 1F78 Series thermostat is available in programmable or non-programmable. The programmable option is a 5-2 day conguration with up to 4 period settings per day. The 1E78 model numbers are vertical versions with the same features as the 1F78 models. This series offers the perfect upgrade from mechanical thermostats at an affordable cost. The large dimensional design of these thermostats covers wall marks left by most mechanical thermostats without the need for a wall plate.
NEW!
1F72-151-ST 1F78-144 1F78-151 1E78-140 1E78-151 Reset Yes RoHS Statement No Yes Sensing Element Sensor Type Thermistor Temperature Range 32 to 105F (0 to 41C) Operating Temperature 32 to 105F (0 to 41C) Shipping Temperature -4 to 150F (-20 to 65C) 45 to 90F (7 to 32C) Setpoint Range Schedule Type 1F78-15,1F72-151, 1E78-151 4 (Morning, Day, Evening, Night), Materials Of Construction ABS Plastic Mounting Any except upside down Weight Warranty 0.58 lb (0.26 kg) 5 years
FEATURES
Large LCD with backlight Includes B/O terminals Fossil fuel or electric heat compatible Electronic accuracy Selectable Celsius or Fahrenheit temperature display
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 24VAC Display Yes LCD Display Type Accuracy 1 Additional Specications 1F78-151,1F72-151,1E78-151 Program option 5/2 Day 1F78-144,1E78-140,1F79-111 Non-programmable Control Type Low Voltage Thermostat Deadband 1 Differential 1 Rated Differentials - Single Stage Models: Fast Slow Heat (Single Stage) 0.8F 1.5F Cool (Single Stage) Fixed 1.2F Heat Pump 1.2F 1.5F Aux./Emer. Heat 0.8F 1.2F Dimensions 1F78-151,1F78-144,1F72-151,1F79-111 6.25"L x 4.25"H x 1.75"D (15.8 x 10.8 x 4.45 cm) 1E78-151,1E78-140 4.29"L x 6.2"Hx 6.2"D (10.9 x 15.75 x 15.75 cm) Nema 1 Enclosure Input Current 1F78-151,1F78-144,1F72-151,1F79-111, 1E78-151 0.05 to 1.0 Amp (load per terminal) 0.05 to 1.5 Amps (load per terminal) E78-140 Yes Fan Switching
21
System Type 1F78-151,1F78-144,1E78-140,1E78-151 Single Stage 1F79-111,1F72-151 Heat Pump Wiring Terminations 1F78-151,1F78-144,1E78-151 RC, RH, W, Y, G, O, B R, C, Y, W2, G, O/B, L, E, 1F72-151,1F79-111 R, C, Y, W/2, G, O/B, L 1E78-140
1344
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
NOTE
RED jumper wire (provided with thermostat) must be connected between thermostat RH and RC terminals for proper thermostat operation with this system. B O Y G W JUMPER WIRE RH RC

RESIDENTIAL LCD DISPLAY PROGRAMMABLE/ NON-PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS 1F72, 1E78 AND 1F78 SERIES THERMOSTATS
JUMPER WIRE B O Y G W RC RH
THERMOSTAT SYSTEM
THERMOSTAT SYSTEM
NOTE
RED jumper wire (provided with thermostat) must be connected between thermostat's RH and RC terminals for proper thermostat operation with this system.
Cooling System
Fan Relay
Heating System
24 VAC
Hot 120 VAC Neutral TRANSFORMER
Cooling System
Fan Relay
Heating System
Hot 120 VAC
24 VAC
Neutral
TRANSFORMER
Typical wiring diagram for heat/cool, 4-wire, single transformer systems
Heat/cool, 4-wire, single transformer systems
1E78-151
1F78-144, 1F78-151
THERMOSTAT
O/B Y G W2 See Note ** E C SYSTEM MONITOR SWITCH Hot 24 VAC * Changeover Relay is energized in COOL when O/B switch is in the O position Changeover Relay is energized in HEAT when O/B switch is in the B position ** Jumper required to use a single Aux Heat for both Second Stage Heat and Emergency 120 VAC Neutral TRANSFORMER (Class II) L R
SYSTEM
Changeover Relay*
Fan Relay
Aux Relay (Stage 2)
Emergency Relay
NOTE
Typical wiring diagram for single transformer systems
1F72-151, 1F79-111
MODEL 1F78-151 1F78-144 1F72-151 1E78-151 1E78-140 1F79-111 DESCRIPTION Thermostat; SS/programmable/classic display Thermostat; SS/non-programmable/classic display Thermostat; HP/programmable/classic display Thermostat; SS/programmable/vertical/classic display Thermostat; SS/non-programmable/vertical/classic display Thermostat; HP/non-programmable/classic display
21
Note: All models available in a 6-pack.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1345

DIGITAL FAN COIL THERMOSTAT TB6575, TB8575 SUITEPRO SERIES
DESCRIPTION The SuitePRO is a family of Digital Fan Coil thermostats for residential and commercial applications such as hotels, condominiums, school classrooms, etc. All three models are suitable for multiple applications. Changes in output wiring and external links between wiring terminals allow you to congure the thermostat for the appropriate application. Valves and auxiliary electric heaters can be controlled using a relay or contactor controlled by the system switch.
NEW!
TB6575A100
C US
FEATURES Simple, intuitive user interface. Pre-installed lead wires for fast installation (TB6575A and TB6575B models only) Backlit display permits easy viewing in any light. Proportional plus Integral (P+I) control algorithm for precision temperature regulation. Adjustable deadband for auto changeover using the Heat and Cool setpoint settings. Adjustable maximum heating and minimum cooling setpoint limits using range stops. EEPROM permanently retains user settings, including setpoints, during power loss (no batteries required). Selectable C or F display via Installer Setup. Optional remote indoor temperature sensor. Freeze protect algorithm turns on heat when needed.
APPLICATION TB6575A1000 2-pipe or 4-pipe with seasonal/manual/automatic heat/ cool changeover TB6575B1000 2-pipe with seasonal or manual heat/cool changeover TB8575A1000 2-pipe or 4-pipe with manual and seasonal heat/cool changeover
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage TB6575A1000 and TB6575B1000 120 VAC 10% at 50/60Hz 240 VAC 10% at 50/60Hz TB8575A1000 20 to 30 VAC at 50/60Hz (using 24 VAC Class 2 NEMA rated transformer) Component Ratings Fan Relay 24 VAC 1.0A 120 VAC 6.0A 240 VAC 3.0A Heat/Cool Relay 24 VAC 1.0A 120 VAC 1.0A 240 VAC 1.0A Onboard Temperature Sensor Type 10K NTC Working Range 0 to 120F (18 to 49C) Display Range 32 to 99F (0 to 37C) Accuracy 2.0F at 70F Remote Temperature Sensor (optional) (Type 42) Type 20K NTC Working Range 0 to 120F (18 to 49C) Display Range 32 to 99F (0 to 37C) Accuracy 2.0F at 70F Remote Pipe Sensor (optional) (Type 42) Type 20K NTC Working Range 32 to 199F (0 to 93C) Display Range 32 to 199F (0 to 93C) Accuracy 5.0F over the temperature sensing range Remote Setback Input TB6575 9 VDC, < 4 mA TB8575 16 VDC, < 5 mA TB6575/TB8575 Dry contact, maximum resistance of 100 Operating Temperature 0 to 120F (18 to 49C) Operating Humidity 5% to 90% RH, non-condensing Weight 1.0 lb (0.45kg) Approvals CSA Certied C/US for Canada and the U.S.A. Warranty 2 years
21
1346
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING - 24 VAC (TB8575)
R W/Y R Y/A VALVE VALVE W/Y GI Y/A Gm GI Gh Gm C Gh Rs C Sc Rs SB Sc Ps SB FAN FAN 24 VAC L1 (HOT) L2 L1 1 (HOT) 24 VAC REMOTE SENSOR L2 1 REMOTE SETBACK REMOTE SENSOR REMOTE SETBACK 1

DIGITAL FAN COIL THERMOSTAT TB6575, TB8575 SUITEPRO SERIES
R W/Y R Y/A W/Y GI Y/A Gm GI Gh Gm C Gh Rs C Sc Rs SB Sc Ps SB HEAT VALVE COOL VALVE HEAT VALVE COOL VALVE FAN FAN 24 VAC L1 (HOT)
L2 L1 1 (HOT) 24 VAC REMOTE SENSOR L2 1 REMOTE SETBACK REMOTE SENSOR REMOTE SETBACK
1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND Ps OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
1 POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND Ps OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED.
Two pipesPROTECTION (Heat or Cool) Manual Changeover OVERLOAD AS REQUIRED. wiring diagram (24 VAC shown). Two pipes (Heat or Cool) Manual Changeover wiring diagram (24 VAC shown).
1 L W/Y L Y/A W/Y GI Y/A Gm GI Gh Gm C Gh Rs C Sc Rs SB Sc Ps SB Ps HEAT VALVE COOL VALVE HEAT VALVE COOL VALVE FAN 6 6 FAN 3 24 VAC L1 5 (HOT) L2 L1 5 (HOT) L2 2 1 3 2 4 3 5 4 5 6 6
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND
Four pipes (Heat and Cool)AS Manual/Auto OVERLOAD PROTECTION REQUIRED. Changeover wiring diagram (24 VAC shown). Four pipes (Heat and Cool) Manual/Auto Changeover wiring diagram (24 VAC shown).
REMOVE PRE-WIRED WIRE FROM TERMINAL 5 (MID FAN SPEED). JUMPER TERMINALS 5 AND 6 (MID AND HIGH FAN SPEEDS). FAN MEDIUM SETTING WILL OPERATE HIGH SPEED. REMOVE PRE-WIRED WIRE FROM ON TERMINAL 5 (MID FAN SPEED). CONNECT TERMINAL 5 7 AND TO THE MID FANHIGH SPEED WIRE FROM FAN JUMPER TERMINALS 6 (MID AND FAN SPEEDS). PREVIOUS SYSTEM. MEDIUM SETTING WILL OPERATE ON HIGH SPEED. REWIRE THE PREVIOUS MID FAN SPEED WIRE TO THE NEUTRAL CONNECT TERMINAL 7 TO THE MID FAN SPEED WIRE FROM CIRCUIT IN SYSTEM. THE SYSTEM. PREVIOUS POWER PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND OVERLOAD REWIRE SUPPLY. THE PREVIOUS MID FAN SPEED WIRE TO THE NEUTRAL PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. CIRCUIT IN THE SYSTEM. POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS CHANGE INSTALLER SETUP IS CODE 9 TO 2 FOR AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION AS REQUIRED. 2 SPEED FAN CONTROL. CHANGE INSTALLER SETUP IS CODE 9 TO 2 FOR
POWER SUPPLY. PROVIDE DISCONNECT MEANS AND
1 2 1 2
4 3 24 VAC REMOTE SENSOR REMOTE SETBACK REMOTE SENSOR REMOTE SETBACK 4
WIRING - 120/240/277 VAC (TB6575A/B)

L W/Y L Y/A W/Y GI Y/A Gm GI Gh Gm N Gh Rs N Sc Rs SB Sc Ps SB Ps HEAT VALVE COOL VALVE HEAT VALVE COOL VALVE FAN FAN N REMOTE SENSOR N REMOTE SETBACK REMOTE SENSOR REMOTE SETBACK L (HOT) L (HOT)
Wiring diagram when missing a wire for 2 SPEED FAN CONTROL. electromechanical retrofit (24 VAC shown). Wiring diagram when missing a wire for electromechanical retrofit (24 VAC shown).
L W/Y L Y/A W/Y GI Y/A Gm GI Gh Gm N Gh Rs N Sc Rs SB Sc Ps SB Ps pipes VALVE
L (HOT) L (HOT) VALVE FAN FAN
N REMOTE SENSOR N REMOTE SETBACK REMOTE SENSOR REMOTE SETBACK
Four pipes (Heat and Cool) Manual/Auto changeover wiring diagram (120/240/277 VAC shown). Four pipes (Heat and Cool) Manual/Auto changeover wiring diagram (120/240/277 VAC shown).
Two (Heat or Cool) Manual Changeover wiring diagram (120/240/277 VAC shown). Two pipes (Heat or Cool) Manual Changeover wiring diagram (120/240/277 VAC shown).
21
MODEL TB6575A1000 TB6575B1000 TB8575A1000 DESCRIPTION Universal 120/240 VAC line voltage (2 or 4 pipe) 120/240 VAC line voltage (2 pipe only) Universal 24 VAC low voltage (2 or 4 pipe)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1347

FLOATING AND PROPORTIONAL ZONE THERMOSTAT TB6980 AND TB7980 SERIES
DESCRIPTION Model T6980 is a oating-control zone thermostat. Model T7980 is a proportional-control zone thermostat. Both have PI control algorithms and models with dual outputs are available. The digital display can be F or C, and will also display bar graphs and pushbuttons for setpoint and override functions. The microprocessor-based thermostat is dipswitch congurable for application, including night setback value and minimum / maximum setpoint limits.
NEW!
TB6980B1006
FEATURES
Floating control output (T6980) Proportional control outputs (T7980) Digital display (F or C and output bar graph) PI control algorithms Single or dual-output models Vertical mounting Night setback override (2-hour) Remote sensor capable Room or discharge air control Minimum and maximum setpoint limits Minimum damper open % 12-second backlighting Two-year warranty
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Configuration and status display Side view 2.7 (6.9)
Cooling mode
Heating mode Temperature display Output display mode
Temperature adjustment button Override button
4.6 (11.8)
Override
1 (2.54)
in (cm)
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VAC 25 mA Proportional + integral (PI) 1 x 1 LCD with 0.5 high temperature digits Readout Backlighting 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) with 1F (0.5C) resolution 12-second dwell, button-activated Outputs Triac, 24 VAC, 0-10 VDC, or 2-10 VDC TB6980A #1 Floating control, heating (reverse acting) or cooling (direct acting) TB6980B #1 Floating control, heating (reverse acting) or cooling (direct acting) #2 0 or 2-10 VDC or on/off, heating (reverse acting) #3 On/off, following output 1 TB7980A #1 0 or 2-10 VDC heating (reverse acting) or cooling (direct acting) TB7980B #1 0 or 2-10 VDC heating (reverse acting) or cooling (direct acting) #2 0 or 2-10 VDC or on/off, heating (reverse acting) #3 On/off, following output 1 Inputs Night setback, open = occupied Changeover, digital input or sensor Remote sensor, 500141xx-xxx Conguration Parameters Application Room, supply air, changeover Output 1 Cooling or heating Supply Voltage Supply Current Control Display Damper Minimum 0-50% Actuator Timing 80-160 seconds (Tx6980 only) Output 2 Heating, oating control, on/off, or proportional Output 3 Minimum on time (1 second, 10 minutes, 15 minutes) or signal percent of output 1 Setback Value 2 to 18F (1 to 9C), in 2F (1C) increments Setpoint Limits Minimum 50 to 94F (10 to 34C) Maximum 51 to 95F (11 to 35C) Internal Switch Settings (Switches 1, 2, and 6 only) SW1 F or C SW2 Normal or conguration mode SW6 Output 2 (proportional or triac control) Memory Protection Conguration and setpoint Range 50 to 90F (10 to 35C) Setpoint Buttons Override Button 2-hour night setback override (Pushing twice cancels override) Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Operating Humidity 0-95% RH, non-condensing Sensor Changeover Deadband = 9F (5C), or contact Wiring 22 to 18 AWG Mounting Direct or to 2 x 4 box Cover secured with set screw Dimensions 4.6H x 2.7W x 1.0D (11.8 x 6.9 x 2.7 cm) Weight 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) Warranty 2 years
21
1348
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
TRANSFORMER
24V

FLOATING AND PROPORTIONAL ZONE THERMOSTAT TB6980 AND TB7980 SERIES
ACTUATOR
TRI-STATE L C R
ACTUATOR
TRI-STATE L C R
ACTUATOR
PROP/ 2 POS
+ -
ACTUATOR
2-POS
REMOTE SENSOR
MAIN TRANSFORMER
RELAY OR ACTUATOR
PROP. (0, 2) - 10V
+ -
RELAY OR ACTUATOR
PROP/ 2 POS
+ -
RELAY OR TRANSFORMER REMOTE ACTUATOR * SENSOR

2-POS 24V
TB6980B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 24Vac COM
TB7980B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 24Vac COM AN 1 COM T2/ AN 2 T2/COM T3 T3 COM Sensor c/over NSB
24V
OPEN
CLOSED T2/ AN 2 T2/COM T3 T3
COM
10 11 12
Sensor c/over NSB
PIPE OR DUCT STAT (OPEN = H/C DEFAULT OUTPUT 1) TIME CLOCK (NSB=CLOSED)
PIPE OR DUCT STAT (OPEN = H/C DEFAULT OUTPUT 1)

TM
TM
TIME CLOCK (NSB=CLOSED)
Internally connected. T2/COM is internally connected if SW6=analog. Alternative 2 POS/Proportional hookup. Only terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12 are used on TB6980A thermostats.
Internally connected. T2/COM is internally connected if SW6=analog. *Can be a different power source or the same as main transformer. Only terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12 are used on TB7980A thermostats.
CONFIGURATION
TB7980B 88888888
Application 0 1 2 3 4 5 Internal sensor Room Return Supply Auto changeover Limited cooling 0 1 2 3
88888888
Output 1 type Cool / 0-10V Heat / 0-10 V Cool / 2-10 V Heat / 2-10 V 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
88888888
Output 2 typea (Htg only) Not used SSR 24 VAC N.C. Valve N.O. Valve Mech. relay SSR 3-32 V SCR 0-10 V Act. 0-10 V Act. / 2-10 V 0 1 2 3 4 5
88888888
Output 3 type (follows Output 1) Not used SSR 24 VAC N.C. Valve N.O. Valve Mech. relay Contact 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
88888888
Output 3 activation 100% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
88888888
NSB value 1C (2F) 2C (4F) 3C (6F) 4C (8F) 5C (10F) 6C (12F) 7C (14F) 8C (16F) 9C (18F)
88888888
Output 1 min. opening 0 1 2 3 4 5 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%
SP HI
Maximum setpoint
SP LO
Minimum setpoint
Can be set between 35C (95F) and minimum setpoint + 1 Default value is 35C (95F)
Can be set between 10C (50F) and maximum setpoint - 1 Default value is 10C (50F)
Shading = Factory Setting
a. If Output 2 type is set to 0-4, set the SW6 switch to Triac. If the output type is set to 5-8, set the switch to Analog.
TB6980B 88888888
Application 0 1 2 3 4 5 Internal sensor Room Return Supply Auto changeover Limited cooling
88888888
Output 1 type 0 Cool 1 Heat 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
88888888
Output 2 typea (Htg only) Not used SSR 24 VAC N.C. Valve N.O. Valve Mech. relay SSR 3-32 V SCR 0-10 V Act. 0-10 V Act. / 2-10 V 0 1 2 3 4 5
88888888
Output 3 type (follows Output 1) Not used SSR 24 VAC N.C. Valve N.O. Valve Mech. relay Contact 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
88888888
Output 3 activation 100% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
88888888
NSB value 1C (2F) 2C (4F) 3C (6F) 4C (8F) 5C (10F) 6C (12F) 7C (14F) 8C (16F) 9C (18F) 0 1 2 3 4 5
88888888
Output 1 min. opening 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%
88888888
Output 1 opening time 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
SP HI
Maximum setpoint
SP LO
Minimum setpoint
Can be set between 35C (95F) and minimum setpoint + 1 Default value is 35C (95F)
Can be set between 10C (50F) and maximum setpoint - 1 Default value is 10C (50F)
a. If Output 2 type is set to 0-4, set the SW6 switch to Triac. If the output type is set to 5-8, set the switch to Analog.
Model TB6980A1007 TB6980B1006 Description Floating (tri-state) Floating (tri-state) Output 1 Floating, heating and cooling Floating, heating and cooling Output 2 None Proportional or two-position, heating Output 3 None Two-position, heating or cooling, as determined by output 1 None Two-position, heating and cooling, as determined by output 1
21
TB7980A1006 TB7980B1005
Proportional (0 or 2-10 VDC) Proportional (0 or 2-10 VDC)
Proportional, heating None and cooling Proportional, heating Proportional or two-position, and cooling heating RELATED PRODUCTS Remote room temperature sensor Remote duct temperature sensor
50014156-002 50014157-001 March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1349

HONEYWELL SINGLE- OR MULTI-LOOP STANDALONE CONTROLLER T775 SERIES
DESCRIPTION Model T775 is a standalone multi-point and multi-loop controller designed for a wide range of applications. The I/O point mix is unit-specic with temperature, humidity, and pressure input models available. Relay or analog output models may be selected as well. Single-loop, two-loop, and reset controllers may be selected, all including a seven-day time clock for output disable or night setback. The relay output controllers have adjustable differential control algorithms. Analog output controllers have adjustable throttling range, proportional plus integral (PI), or proportional, integral, and derivative (PID) control. The backlit display is easy to read, and the menu-driven setup is simple. The T775 is available in NEMA 1 or NEMA 4X enclosures for the most demanding environments. FEATURES Standalone controller Multiple power input (24, 120, or 240 VAC) Single- or dual-loop models Throttling range, PI and PID tunable modulating models Adjustable differential two-position models Humidity, pressure, and universal input models Two-position 10A relay model Analog output 0 or 2 to 10 VDC, 4-20 mA, and 135 models
NEW!
T775M2048 closed door T775M2078 open door with wiring Integral seven-day time clock for night setback or shutdown Remote night setback or shutdown input F or C temperature display Daylight savings time compensation
Modulating 0 or 2-10 VDC, 2 k minimum impedance 4-20 mA, 600 maximum impedance Series 90, 135 Included in all T775-A,B,L,M,P,R Temperature Sensor versions Probe 50021579-001, 8" leads Range -60F to 270F (-51 to 132C) Accuracy 1F at 77F Control Type Model-specic (see I/O conguration table) Relay on/off Differential control, adjustable 1 to 150F Modulating PI or PID, with adjustable tuning Throttling range 1 to 150F Derivative and integral times 0 to 3600 seconds Multiple loops depending on model Wiring Terminal blocks separated by function Enclosure Plenum rated plastic, UL94V NEMA 1, NEMA 4X versions Hinged cover with LCD window Five (1/2") knockouts on four sides Color Two-tone gray Mounting Surface screw tabs or DIN rail Operating Temperature -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Operating Humidity Dimensions 8.2"H x 4.9"W x 3"D (20.7 x 12.5 x 7.4 cm) Door opens out 4" (10.2 cm) Weight 2.2 lb (1 kg) Approvals UL Listed File #E4436, File #XAPX. E4436 cULus, CE, C-tick, FCC Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
24, 120, or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 8 VA maximum at 60 Hz, 10 VA maximum at 50 Hz Backlit digital 2.5" x 1.5", Display congurable F or C Operation 6-key, menu-driven, with simple programming lock Program is non-volatile; time is retained Memory for 24 hours Clock 12 hour (AM/PM) for night setback/ shutdown, daylight savings time enable/disable Scheduling 7-day, two events per day Setpoint Model specic (see I/O conguration table) Temperature -40 to 248F (-40 to 120C) Humidity (T775U) 0-100% Pressure (T775U) -500 to 500 psi -30 to 30 inches W.C. -3000 to 3000 Pa or kPa Model-specic (see I/O conguration Signal Input table) Temperature RTD 1.1 k at 77F, PTC, 2.1 /F, Platinum 1 k at 32F, 385 curve Digital input Dry contact, all models (Used for system shutdown or night setback) Analog (T775U) 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA Input Calibration Temperature offset 10F Universal offset 10% of scale Signal Output Model-specic (see I/O conguration table) Relays/tri-state 10A at 24 VAC (resistive), 1/2 hp at 120 VAC 125 VA pilot duty
21
Supply Voltage Supply VA
1350
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
T775A200 2-Position 1 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 2 Temp 3 Temp 2 Temp 1 Temp,1 Univ N/A 2 Temp
Knockout A

HONEYWELL SINGLE- OR MULTI-LOOP STANDALONE CONTROLLER T775 SERIES
1 SPDT 2 SPDT 4 SPDT 4 SPDT
1 2 (1 if Floating) 2 2 2 2 2 1 with Reset 1 with Reset 1 with Reset 1 with Reset 1 with Reset 2, 1 with Reset 2, 1 with Reset 1 with Reset
Clock NSB Clock NSB Clock NSB Clock NSB Clock NSB Clock NSB Clock NSB Clock with Reset Clock with Reset Clock with Reset Clock with Reset Staging Multi-stage and Seq RH,PSI,in W.C. Clock with Reset
Knockout A
NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 4X NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 4X NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1 NEMA 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 None N/A 2
2-Pos Float Prop Temp Univ Reset BLR Seq ALM NSB
Two-position control Floating (tri-state) control Proportional control Temperature input, RTD Universal input OSA Reset control Boiler special Sequencer control Alarm relay SPDT Night setback function
T775B20 2 T775B20 0 T775B202 T775M20 T775M200
2-Position or Floating* 2-Position or Floating* 2-Position or Floating* Proportional Proportional Proportional
2 Analog
2 Analog, 2 SPDT 2 Analog, 2 SPDT 2 SPDT 2 Analog 4 SPDT 4 SPDT, 1 ALM 4 SPDT 2 Analog, 2 SPDT 2 Analog, 4SPDT
T775M2022 T775R20
T775R20 5 T775R2027 T775R200 T775P200 T775U20 T775R20
2-Position or Floating* Proportional, Reset
Proportional, 2-Position, Reset 2-Position or Floating* 2-Position, Reset, BLR 2-Position, Reset, Sequential 2-Position & Proportional** 2-Position Proportional, 2-Position, Reset
2 Analog, 2 SPDT
Staging Boiler or pump staging
T775L2007 T775S200
4 SPDT for sequence expansion on T775(L,P)

**Sensor B can only be used for reset.
*Each Floating (tri-state) output has two SPDT relays.

Knockout A
Mod 1 2 Mod 2 4
B R W+ B R W+
T T T T
Sensor A 1 Sensor B
T T T T + +
NO C NC
Sensor A 1 Sensor B Sensor C
Mod 1 2 Mod 2 4
B R W+ B R W+
CT S+T V T T
Sensor A 1 Sensor B
NOTES FOR ALL DIAGRAMS

1
T T
T775 Bus Digital Input + Digital Input Digital Output Alarm Knockout B 3 Power 24 VAC C+ Output Relay 3
NC C NO NO C NC NC C NO NO C NC
Digital Input
Knockout B
Knockout B
Power 24 VAC
C+ Output Relay 3
NC C NO NO C NC NC C NO NO C NC
Power 24 VAC
C+
120 COM 240
120 COM 240
Output Relay 1
Output Relay 2
Output Relay 1
Output Relay 2
120 COM 240
Output Relay 4
Power 120/240 VAC
Output Relay 4
Power 120/240 VAC
Power 120/240 VAC Output Relay 2
Output Relay 1
NO C NC
NO C NC
When used for temperature or 4-20 mA sensing, sensors A and B use the two TT connections and are polarity insensitive. For Mod 1 and Mod 2 current (mA) or voltage (VDC) output, use signal (+) and common (). For Mod 1 and Mod 2 Series 90 output, use W, R, and B. A separate earth ground is required for any power source (24, 120, or 240 VAC). For Series 90 connections, you must insert a 340 resistor across terminals R and W. The resistor is included with the controller. Relay 4 can be used for pump output. The pump output is always the last relay output.
Knockout C
Knockout D
Knockout C
Knockout D
Knockout C
Knockout D
Knockout E
Knockout E
Knockout E
T775A/B/M/R Series 2000 Controller
T775P Series 2000 Controller
T775U Series 2000 Controller
MODEL T775A2009 T775B2016 T775B2024 T775B2032 T775B2040 T775M2006 T775M2014 T775M2022 T775M2030 T775M2048 T775R2001 T775R2019 T775R2027 T775R2035 T775R2043 T775P2003 T775L2007 T775U2016 T775S2008 50021579-001 C7031D2003 C7031J2009 C7046D1008 C7130B1009 T775-SENS-WR T775-SENS-WT DESCRIPTION Single loop SPDT controller with one RTD Single loop oating or twin SPDT controller, NEMA 4 Two-output oating or four SPDT controller, NEMA 4, with one RTD Single loop oating or two SPDT controller, with one RTD Two-output oating or four SPDT controller, with one RTD Two-analog-output proportional controller, with one RTD Two-output proportional controller with 4 SPDT NEMA 4 Two-output proportional and two-output SPDT controller, NEMA 4, with one RTD Two-output proportional controller with 4 SPDT Two-analog-output proportional controller with two SPDT outputs and one RTD Two-output oating or four-output SPDT reset controller, with two RTDs Two-output proportional reset controller with four SPDT outputs and two RTDs Two-output proportional reset controller with two SPDT outputs and two RTDs One-output oating or two-output SPDT reset controller, with two RTDs Two-output proportional reset controller, with two RTDs Four on/off boiler control outputs with reset and three RTDs Dual loop, Four on/off sequence control outputs (1 loop with reset) and one RTD Dual loop, Universal input, two proportional outputs, and two SPDT outputs( 1 loop with reset) T775(P,L), four-relay expansion module RELATED PRODUCTS Replacement temperature sensor (typically supplied with T775) 5-inch immersion temperature sensor w/box 12-foot averaging temperature sensor with wiring box 8-inch duct temperature sensor w/box Room temperature sensor Temperature sensor with water-resistant 5-foot leads Temperature sensor with water-tight 6-foot leads
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1351

MODULAR ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM SYSTEM 450
DESCRIPTION The System 450 from Johnson Controls/PENN is a family of modular digital electronic controllers that is easily assembled and congured to provide reliable temperature, pressure, and humidity control for a wide variety of commercial HVAC and industrial process applications. The System 450 is designed to replace the System 350 and System 27, and provide many additional features and benets with a small number of model variations. All of the modules are eld congurable out-of-thebox and can monitor and control temperature, pressure and humidity simultaneously. FEATURES Plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wallmount capability Multi-purpose, eld-congurable, and designed for global use Backlit LCD and 4-button touch pad user interface
NEW!
Up to 3 inputs and up to 10 outputs allow exibility in conguring systems from simple to complex Versatile all-in-one stand-alone control modules provide for scalable digital and/or analog control for temperature, pressure, and humidity
Relay Outputs Mounting Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Dimensions Weight C450CPN-1C C450CQN-1C C450CBN-1C C450RBN-1C C450CCN-1C C450RCN-1C C450SPN-1C C450SQN-1C C450SBN-1C C450SCN-1C C450YNN-1C Approvals North America 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT AC Motor Ratings 120 VAC 208/240 VAC AC Full-load Amperes: 9.8A 4.9A AC Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8A 29.4A 10A AC Non-inductive at 24/240 VAC Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC Lexan 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct surface mount -40 to 150F (-40 to 66C) for 0-10 VDC outputs and relay outputs -40 to 104F (-40 to 40C) for 4-20 mA outputs 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing); Maximum Dew Point 29C (85F) 5.0H x 2.4W x 2.4D (12.7 x 6.1 x 6.1 cm) 0.43 lb (0.19 kg) 0.43 lb (0.19 kg) 0.46 lb (0.21kg) 0.46 lb (0.21kg) 0.49 lb (0.22kg) 0.49 lb (0.22kg) 0.33 lb (0.15 kg) 0.33 lb (0.15 kg) 0.38 lb (0.17 kg) 0.41 lb (0.18 kg) 0.86 lb (0.39 kg) cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits CE Compliant; Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC); EMC Directive (2004/108/ ED); RoHS Directive (2002/95/EC); WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC) Australia C-Tick Compliant (N1813) 3 years
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Power Module Control Modules 110/120 VAC or 220/240 VAC at 50/60 Hz (100 mA maximum) 24 VAC, 10 VA secondary C450YNN-1 Power Supply Module or 24 (20-30) VAC Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV)(Europe) or Class 2 (North America) 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum
21
Supply VA C450CPN-1C C450CQN-1C C450CBN-1C C450RBN-1C C450CCN-1C C450RCN-1C C450SPN-1C C450SQN-1C C450SBN-1C C450SCN-1C Input Signal
1.3 VA maximum using 0-10V out 1.5 VA maximum using 4-20 mA out 2.0 VA maximum using 0-10V out 2.4 VA maximum using 4-20 mA out 0.9 VA maximum 0.9 VA maximum 1.3 VA maximum 1.3 VA maximum 1.1 VA maximum using 0-10V out 1.3 VA maximum using 4-20 mA out 1.8 VA maximum using 0-10V out 2.2 VA maximum using 4-20 mA out 0.8 VA maximum 1.2 VA maximum 0-5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers; 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for pressure transducers;1,035 at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors Analog Output Voltage Mode (0-10 VDC) 10 VDC maximum output voltage, 10 mA maximum output current requires an external load of 1,000 or more. The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000. Devices that fall below 1,000 may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications. Current Mode (4-20 mA) Requires an external load between 0-300 The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedance less than 300. Devices that rise above 300 may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.
Europe
Warranty
1352
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Wht Red Blk
L1 L2 L1 L2 Jumper Settings

MODULAR ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM SYSTEM 450
WIRING - EXAMPLE FOR ROOM HEATING AND COOLING WITH CONDENSER FAN SPEED CONTROL (SEE JCI BULLETINS FOR OTHER EXAMPLES)
A99 Temperature Sensor Sn-2 Control Sensor in UI Display (F Sensor Type)
C450CCN-1C C450YNN-1C Relay Relay Power Output 1 Output 2 Module S2
C450SPN-1C Analog Output 3
S1 5V C
Sn-1 Sn-2 Sn-3
P499 Pressure Transducer Sn-1 Control Sensor in UI Display (P500 Sensor Type) Active/Passive Sensor Jumpers (See Jumper Settings)
0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA Analog Output Signal

COM AO1 AO2
240 VAC 120 VAC
LC2 LNO2 LNC2
LC1 LNO1 LNC1
Cooling Equipment Control Circuit (24 to 240 VAC) Heating Equipment Control Circuit (24 to 240 VAC)
L1 L2 240 VAC Supply Power to Power Module
Condenser Fan Speed Control Analog Input Circuit
Sn-1 Sn-2 Sn-3
Sensor 1: Jumper positioned on one pin (or removed) sets Sn-1 to Active (Pressure). Sensors 2 and 3: Jumper positioned across two pins sets Sn-2 and Sn-3 to Passive (Temperature).
MODEL C450CBN-1C C450CCN-1C C450CPN-1C C450CQN-1C C450RBN-1C C450RCN-1C C450SBN-1C C450SCN-1C C450SPN-1C C450SQN-1C C450YNN-1C Note: Sensor not included A99-CLP-1 A99BA-200C A99BB-200C A99BB-25C A99BB-600C A99BC-1500C A99BC-25C A99BC-300C BOX10A-600R DPT2650-0R5D-AB DPT2650-10D-AB HE-67S3-0N00P HE-67S3-0N0BT P499RCP-101K P499RCP-105K P499RCP-107K SHL10A-603R TE-6001-1 WEL11A-601R
DESCRIPTION Control module with LCD, 1xSPDT output Control module with LCD, 2xSPDT outputs Control module with LCD, 1 analog output Control module with LCD, 2 analog outputs Reset control module with LCD, 1xSPDT output Reset control module with LCD, 2xSPDT outputs Relay expansion module with 1xSPDT output Relay expansion module with 2xSPDT outputs Analog expansion module with 1 analog output Analog expansion module with 2 analog outputs Power module, 120 or 240 VAC input
ACCESSORIES PAGE Mounting clip for A99 temperature sensor PTC Sensor with 6.5 ft (2m) shielded cable PTC Sensor with 6.5 ft (2m) PVC cable PTC Sensor with 9.75 in (0.25m) PVC cable PTC Sensor with 19.5 ft (6m) PVC cable PTC Sensor with high temperature 49 ft (15m) sillcon cable PTC Sensor with high temperature 9.75 in (0.25m) sillcon cable PTC Sensor with high temperature 9.75 ft (3m) sillcon cable PVC enclosure for A99 temperature sensor for outdoors Low differential pressure transducer 0 to 0.5 in WC Differential pressure transducer 0 to 10 in WC Duct mount humidity sensor with A99B type temperature sensor Wall mount humidity sensor with A99B type temperature sensor Electronic pressure transducer 0-100 psi Electronic pressure transducer 0-500 psi Electronic pressure transducer 0-750 psi Sun shield for A99 sensor for outdoor sunny locations Duct temperature element holder with box 1391 Immersion well for A99 sensor for fluid temperature liquid sensing
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1353

ECONOMIZER ZIP ECONOMIZER SERIES
DESCRIPTION The ZIP Economizer saves energy in buildings by using cool outside air as a means of cooling the indoor space. This application can drastically reduce HVAC energy costs while also improving air quality. The ZIP has easy plug and play features and by adding the different modules available in the series you can conveniently control many aspects of the space including temperature and humidity as well as remote alarm indication.The ZIP base unit offers an extended temperature transective LCD display, with on board help, providing information throughout the entire set up. The base unit is designed to provide most common economizer functions such as two stages of mechanical cooling, intergrated cooling, four chage over strategies for free cooling and damper position feedback. One of the unique features on the ZIP Economizer is the patented ZIP code set up function which will automatically nd your location once entered to maximize energy savings for your location and also make you compliant with the local energy codes. FEATURES Plug and play self-conguring Patented zip code recognition Easy to read LCD display Alarm notication Expandable modules available Onboard help and troubleshooting TH module CE 2004/108/EC
NEW!
ECON-ZIP-BASE
Software Class ECON-ZIP-TH A Control Pollution Degree ECON-ZIP-TH 3 Temperature Sensor Type ECON-ZIP-TH NTC 10kOhm Humidity Sensor Type ECON-ZIP-TH 0-10 VDC (0 to 100% RH) max load 10kOhm, Class 2 limited energy Accuracy ECON-ZIP-TH 3% 35-65% rH @ 75F (23.9C) 5% 0-34%, 66-100% rH @ 75F (23.9C) Response Time: Less than 45 seconds @ 40 FPM, 75F (23.9C) Hysterisis: Less than 2.5% rH Long Term Stability: Less than 1% rH/year Approvals ECON-ZIP-TH Only UL60730-1, -2-9 and -2-13. UL2043 compliant, CE 2004/108/EC Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), EN60730-1, -2-9 and-2-13 All Other Models cULus acc. to UL873, CAN/CSA C22.2, No. 24-93 Suitable Actuators ECON-ZIP-BASE AFB24-SR, NFB24-SR, LF24-SR, TFB24SR NEMA 1 Housing Housing Material UL94-5VA Conformally coated RoHS Weight ECON-ZIP-BASE 1 lb (0.45 kg) All Others 8 oz (0.22 kg) 5 years Warranty *The power consumption is for the control only and does not include connected loads such as actuator, compressors, fans, and sensors. For transformer sizing, the power consumption of these attached components must be included.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Operating Temperature ECON-ZIP-TH Only -40 to 140F (-40 to 60C) All Other Models -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Operating Humidity ECON-ZIP-TH Only 0 to 100% RH All Other Models 5 to 95% RH non-condensing Connectors 1/4 male spade connectors Power Consumption Rating* ECON-ZIP-BASE Shown on next page with full technical specications ECON-ZIP-COM 2.5 VA (ECON-ZIP-COM), 6.5 VA (ECONZIP-BASE + ECON-ZIP-COM) ECON-ZIP-EM 1.5 VA (ECON-ZIP-EM), 5.5 VA (ECONZIP-BASE + ECON-ZIP-EM) Communication Interface ECON-ZIP-COM RS485 Interface, Optical Isolation max. 1k VDC (for max.1 min), Pin 4: RS485 Com Gnd, Pin 7: RS485 Com A, Pin 8: RS485 Com B Supported Remote Alarm ECON-ZIP-COM Normal Current: 0.5A, Inrush Current: 1A Indoor Fan Speed Selection ECON-ZIP-EM 100,000 cycles @ inrush current of 3A, normal current 1.5A Exhaust Fan Selection ECON-ZIP-EM 100,000 cycles @ inrush current of 3A, normal current 1.5A Supported CO2 Sensor ECON-ZIP-EM 0-10 VDC, Sensor auto-detection Auxiliary Input -Purge Contact ECON-ZIP-EM On/Off - 24 VAC, 50/60HZ - Current Load min 10mA Auxiliary Input -Remote Potentiometer ECON-ZIP-EM 2-10 VDC Current Consumption ECON-ZIP-TH Max. 5mA Rated Impulse Voltage ECON-ZIP-TH 800V 24 VAC 20%, 50/60Hz, Class 2 power source
21
1354
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS - ECON-ZIP-BASE
ZIP Economizer Base Unit

I/O SPECIFICATIONS - ECON-ZIP-BASE
Type Input Input Input Input Input Input Name Description R G C Y Y2 W Supply Hot Fan Signal (occupied) Supply Common Cooling requirement Stage 1 Cooling requirement Stage 2 Heating requirement Stage 1 Supply Air Temperature Sensor Outdoor Air Temperature Outdoor Air Humidity Electrical Specication 24 VAC, 20%, 50/60Hz On/Off, 24 VAC, 20%, 50/60Hz Common On/Off, 24 VAC, 20%, 50/60Hz On/Off, 24 VAC, 20%, 50/60Hz On/Off, 24 VAC, 20%, 50/60Hz
Input Input Input
SAT OAT OAH
Type: 10K NTC (Type II thermistor) Type: 10K NTC (Type II thermistor) 0-10 VDC Auto Detection: Sensor present if voltage 0.5V-10V Type: 10K NTC (Type II thermistor) 0-10 VDC Auto Detection: Sensor present if voltage 0.5V-10V 100,000 cycles @ inrush current of 3A, normal current 1.5A Impedance for Auto detection @ 24 V: <60O Ohm @ 60Hz <80O Ohm @ 50Hz 100,000 cycles @ inrush current of 3A, normal current 1.5A Impedance for Auto detection @ 24 V: <60O Ohm @ 60Hz <80O Ohm @ 50Hz Common 24 VAC, 50/60Hz 2-10 VDC 2-10 VDC
Input Input
RAT RAH
Return Air Temperature Return Air Humidity
Output
CC1
TECHNICAL DATA - ECON-ZIP-BASE

Power Supply 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz; Class 2 power source 4 VA Base Control (ECON-ZIP-BASE)" 5.5 VA Base Control with Energy Module (ECON-ZIP-BASE + ECON-ZIP-EM) Power Consumption Rating* 5 VA Base Control with Communication Module (ECON-ZIP-BASE + ECON-ZIP-COM)" 6.5 VA Base with Energy Module and Communication Module Rated Impulse Voltage Connectors Environmental Software Class Control Pollution Degree Temperature Input Signal Humidity Humidity Input Signal Housing Housing Material Ambient Temperature Range Storage Temperature Range Display Display Op. Range** Agency Listing Energy Code Compliant 330V 1/4" male spade connectozrs RoHS, Conformally Coated A 3 NTC 10kOhm 5 to 95% RH non-condensing 0-10 VDC; corresponds to 0 to 100% NEMA 1 UL94-5VA -40F to +158F (-40C to +70C) -40F to +176F (-40C to +80C) 2x16 character LCD; LED backlight; transective -22F to +176F (-30C to +80C) cULus acc. to UL873, CAN/CSA C22.2, No. 24-93 ASHRAE 90.1, CA Title 24, NECB Output Output Output Input Act 1 Act 2 Act 3 Act 5 Output CC2
Compressor 1 RTU Stage 1 Mechanical Cooling Circuitry Compressor 2 RTU Stage 2 Mechanical Cooling Circuitry Actuator supply common Actuator supply hot Actuator control output Actuator feedback signal
The power consumption is for the control only and does not include connected loads such as actuator, compressors, fans, and sensors. For transformer sizing, the power consumption of these attached components must be included. *At low temperature, the display has decreased response time, below -22F (-30C) it will not function."
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1355

WIRING - ECON-ZIP-BASE
R C G
Y1 Y2 W1 W2
4 3
NEW!
-SR Actuator Supply Air Temperature Return Air Temperature
Rooftop Unit Terminal
Thermostat
Occ Purge
2
Outdoor Air Temperature
CC1 1
RTU Stage 1 Mechanical Cooling Circuitry
5 1 2 3 4 5
When Temperature and Humidity sensors are used for enthalpy, respective temperature only sensors are not used and OAT and RAT and wiring shall terminate at ECON-ZIP-TH Return Air Temperature and Humidity sensors are only required when differential temperature or differential enthalpy high limit changeover strategy is used When the thermostat is not equipped with occupancy control, Fan On output G shall be wired to ECON-ZIP-BASE W1 must be wired to ECON-ZIP-BASE when unit is a Heat Pump, using 2 speed fan, and when it is desired to record operational hours in heating Existing refrigeration safety devices may exist, consult RTU wiring diagram
CC2
RTU Stage 2 Mechanical Cooling Circuitry ECON-ZIP-TH Return Enthalpy 2 ECON-ZIP-TH Outdoor Enthalpy
21
1356
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS - ECON-ZIP-EM
ZIP Economizer Communication Module

I/O SPECIFICATIONS - ECON-ZIP-EM
Type Input Name CO2 Description CO2 sensor input Electrical Specication 0-10 VDC (0-2000 ppm) Sensor auto-detection 100,000 cycles @ inrush current of 3A, normal current 1.5A Impedance for Auto detection @24 V: <600 Ohm @ 60Hz <800 Ohm @ 50Hz 100'000 cycles @ inrush current of 3A, normal current 1.5A Impedance for Auto detection @ 24 V: <600 Ohm @ 60Hz <800 Ohm @ 50Hz On/Off, 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz Current load min. 10mA 2-10 VDC
Output
IF
Indoor fan low speed enable
Output
EF
Exhaust fan enable
Input Input
AUX1 AUX2
Auxiliary input Purge contact input Auxiliary input Remote Potentiometer Input
WIRING - ECON-ZIP-EM
1
Purge Contact Thermostat 24Vac
24Vac Power
0-10Vdc Signal
EFC LSF
Indoor Fan Low Speed Relay / VFD Enable
CO2 Sensor
CO2 Sensor
ECON-ZIP-EM
EFC
Power Exhaust Fan Relay 24Vac Power
21
2-10Vdc Signal
1 2 3 4
Power Source should be same as ECON-ZIP-BASE Not Supplied by Belimo Sold Separately by Belimo If the RTU has a 2 speed fan (IF wired), then W1 on the ECON-ZIP-BASE needs to be wired as well, since the fan shall not run in part load when heating.
Remote Potentiometer
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1357

DIMENSIONS - ECON-ZIP-COM WIRING - ECON-ZIP-COM
NEW!
WIRING - ECON-ZIP-TH
ZIP Economizer Communication Module
DIMENSIONS - ECON-ZIP-TH

ZIP Economizer Temperature & Humidity Sensor
21
MODEL ECON-ZIP-BASE ECON-ZIP-COM ECON-ZIP-EM ECON-ZIP-10K ECON-ZIP-TH DESCRIPTION Economizer module Economizer communication module (plug-in) Economizer energy module (plug-in) Economizer temperature sensor (plug-in) Economizer temperature and humidity sensor module (plug-in)
1358
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

SETPOINT CONTROLLER PXR4
The new Model PXR4 Set Point Controller is one of the most technically advanced instruments in the industrial and commercial markets today. It is also one of the least expensive controllers of its kind. Through the use of a specially designed Fuji microprocessor, the Model PXR4 incorporates the latest technology for controlling applications. With simple, nger-tip programming from the front panel, the operator can tailor the operation of the controller quickly and easily. By automatically setting proportional band, integral (reset) time, and derivative (rate) time by means of the autotuning function, control parameter guesswork is eliminated. In addition, this controller employs Fuji's patented fuzzy logic algorithms. The Model PXR4 can learn processes, using the PID parameters as a starting point. This intelligence allows your process to reach its set point in the shortest time possible while virtually eliminating overshoot.
PXR4
PXR4 Controls
Any type single-loop control application Input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC; Output 4-20 mA PID control or fuzzy logic control Manual or autotuning Programmable control action, reverse or direct LED indication of the process variable and setpoint Output status indication Fault indication of input sensor
Selectable indication resolution Digital ltering to suppress electrical noise Easily programmed with two-level, menu-driven format Nonvolatile memory, no battery required 1/16 DIN package NEMA 4X faceplate
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA Input Current 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 10 VA at 120 VAC Noise Reduction Normal Mode Common Mode Termination Enclosure (50/60 Hz), 50 dB or more (50/60 Hz), 140 dB or more 8-pin socket ABS plastic, black, 1/16 DIN NEMA 4X front panel Mounting Flush panel or surface mount Operating Temperature 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing) Operating Humidity Dimensions SR2P-056 1.89" x 1.89" x 3.33" (4.8 4.8 8.47 cm) Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) Approvals UL Listed File #E131280, CE certied Warranty 1 year
4-20 mA DC, impedance: 250 with external resistor Voltage 1-5 VDC, impedance: 450 k minimum Input Scaling Range -1999 to 9999 Input Sampling Cycle 0.5 seconds Input Filter 0-900.0 seconds in 0.5 second step Output Current 4-20 mA DC, 600 maximum Control Type PID control or fuzzy logic control, manual or autotuning Proportional Band 0% to 999.9% in 0.1% steps 0-3200 seconds in 1-second steps Integral Time Derivative Time 0-999.9 seconds in 1-second steps Action Direct or reverse, programmable Indication Accuracy 0.5% full scale 1 digit at 73F Memory Nonvolatile, no battery required Monitored by watchdog timer Diagnostics
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1359

SETPOINT CONTROLLER PXR4
APPLICATION
INPUT Scalable 4-20 mA/1-5 VDC input allows monitoring of the following: Temperature Humidity Pressure Air ow Water ow Any 4-20 mA/1-5 VDC transmitter within a range of -1999 to 9999 OUTPUT 4-20 mA output allows control of the following: Valve actuators Damper actuators Variable speed drives Resistance transducers I/P transducers Step controllers
NEW!
WIRING
4-20 mA Control Output
24 VDC Power Supply
3 2
4 +
6 7
Terminals 2 and 5 are internally common
4-20 mA Transmitter
8
Power Supply 100-240 VAC 50/60 HZ
250 Resistor (included) Install for 4-20 mA transmitter; remove for 1-5 VDC transmitter.
INSTALLATION
The controller should be installed as far away as possible from any device generating high frequency noise. Input signal and power cables connected to the instrument should be wired away from power line and load line to minimize inductive noise. Preferably, the instrument power cable should be twisted to avoid noise. The following guidelines for location should also be observed: 1. Do not install in a location with corrosive gases (sulfuric gas, ammonia, etc.) 2. Do not install in a location subject to vibration, impact, water, or high temperatures.
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
1.89 (4.80)
3.66 (9.30) 0.28 (0.71)
2.8 (7.15)
Panel Cutout Dimensions 1.77" square (4.50)
1.89 (4.80)
1.76 (4.48)
Note: Bracket for flush panel mounting is included. Order socket separately.
21
MODEL PXR4 SR2P-06 ATXINS
DESCRIPTION Setpoint controller, 100 to 240 VAC power Relay socket, DPDT pin type, DIN/surface mount Hooded solder-type socket for ush panel mount
1360
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

SCR POWER CONTROLLER R820 SERIES
The R820 Series SCR (Silicon Control Rectier) controllers provide cost effective modulation of electric loads using industry standard proportional control signals from thermostats or building automation systems. The R820 Series incorporates a compact control board mounted to a multi-n, anodized heat sink with an exceptionally high heat dissipation rate. Models are available in single phase or 3-phase and can control loads up to 600V. Compact, microprocessor-based controller saves space in control panels Integrated, self-resetting thermostatic protection increases safety Multi-input control signal maximizes application and system exibility Integral heat sink minimizes installation time and wiring costs Status LED conrms proper operation
R820
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA Input Signal 24 VAC, +10%/-15%, 50/60 Hz; 2 VA Use Class 1 (properly fused) or Class 2, CSA or UL recognized transformer 0-10 VDC (2-10 VDC control range), 4-20 mA, 0-135 , dip switch selectable low signal = no heat high signal = full heat
DIMENSIONS
A R820 Single Phase 4.5 R820-211 4.5 R820-321 6.5 R820-341 4.5 R820-421 R820-441 6.5 10.0 R820-471 R820-621 4.5 R820-641 6.5 R820-671 10.0 Weight (LBS) 1.80 1.80 2.40 1.80 2.40 3.50 1.80 2.40 3.50
Input Impedance Voltage 10K Current 250 Thermostatic Protection Cuts off at rise to 180F (82C), selfresetting Operating Temperature 32 to 95F (0 to 35C), full rating, amperage de-rated up to 175F (80C) Operating Humidity 0 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Approvals CSA; UL, File #E191074 1 year Warranty
R820 Three Phase R820-213 R820-323 R820-343 R820-423 R820-443 R820-623 R820-643
A 6.5 10.0 10.0 6.5 10.0 6.5 10.0
Weight (LBS) 2.60 3.70 3.70 2.65 3.70 2.65 3.70
DIMENSIONS
SINGLE PHASE 5.25"
Amp Calculation Single Phase kW x 1000/E x PF Three Phase kW x 1000/1.73 x E x PF E = Voltage PF = Power factor
3.00"
21
5.25"
3.00"
Cutout template
A 3.75"
Cutout Template
5.75"
2.00"
2.00"
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1361

SCR POWER CONTROLLER R820 SERIES
WIRING
INPUT SIGNAL 0 to 10 VDC control signal (2 to 10 VDC control range) 4 to 20 mA control signal 0 to 135 control signal
SWITCH #1 Off Off On
NEW!
SWITCH #2 Off Off On SWITCH #3 Off On Off SWITCH #4 On Off Off
Common 24 VAC Input W R B 2nd SSR on 3 phase models only
0 VDC = 0% capacity 10 VDC = 100% capacity
2 VDC = 0% capacity 4 mA = 0% capacity 20 mA = 100% capacity 10 VDC = 100% capacity
To load (controlled leg)
0 Ohms = 0% capacity 135 Ohms = 100% capacity
Common 24 VAC 0 to 10 VDC output
0-10 VDC Thermostat Control
2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA from BAS
0-135 Thermostat Control
To load (controlled leg) To load (uncontrolled leg)
CAUTION: HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING - High voltages are present at the terminals of these devices; follow the installation instructions carefully. All wiring must conform with national and local electrical codes.
MODEL 021-0474 R820-211 R820-213 R820-321 R820-323 R820-341 R820-343 R820-421 R820-423 R820-441 R820-443 R820-471 R820-621 R820-623 R820-641 R820-643 R820-671 021-0474 DESCRIPTION Replacement circuit board SCR power controller 240V, 10A, single phase SCR power controller, 240V, 10A, 3 phase SCR power controller 347V, 25A, single phase SCR power controller 347V, 25A, 3 phase SCR power controller 347V, 45A, single phase SCR power controller 347V, 45A, 3 phase SCR power controller 480V, 25A, single phase SCR power controller 480V, 25A, 3 phase SCR power controller 480V, 45A, single phase SCR power controller 480V, 45A, 3 phase SCR power controller 480V, 75A, single phase SCR power controller 600V, 25A, single phase SCR power controller 600V, 25A, 3 phase SCR power controller 600V, 45A, single phase SCR power controller 600V, 45A, 3 phase SCR power controller 600V, 75A, single phase ACCESSORIES Replacement circuit board March 2014
21
1362
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!

SETPOINT CONTROLLER UCM-420A
The Model UCM-420A is a low cost microprocessorbased Proportional plus Integral (PI) controller that may be used for a wide variety of control applications. All setup and programming is done by DIP switches and bottle plug jumpers on the Model UCM-420A. Set points may be local and/or remote. The output may be direct- or reverse-acting.
PI control DIP switch/jumper programming Selectable throttling range Selectable integral reset rate Direct or reverse-acting Setpoint potentiometer on unit Optional DIN rail mounting Optional setpoint potentiometer with stainless steel wall plate (UCM-SPA)
UCM-420A
UCM-SPA-50-90F
MODES OF OPERATION
Setpoint Controller The UCM-420A input monitors the process being controlled. This input may be a 4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC signal from a pressure sensor, ow transmitter, temperature sensor, etc., or an input from a Precon Type III temperature thermistor. Then, the UCM420A provides a 4-20 mA PI output signal to control a valve, VFD, damper, etc., based on a setpoint as described below. ocal setpoint controller- The potentiometer mounted 1. L on the unit may be used to control the setpoint. The local setpoint may also be a UCM-SPA setpoint potentiometer, the setpoint option of a Precon Model ST-S3EXA temperature sensor, a 4-20 mA signal, or a 1-5 VDC signal. emote setpoint controller- In this mode, the setpoint 2. R signal may be a 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, or time-based pulsewidth signal from a BAS controller. 3. R emote setpoint controller with local adjustment- The UCM-420A accepts a remote setpoint signal as described above in #2. Then, a local setpoint signal, as described in #1, may be used to adjust the setpoint. The local setpoint will have authority to adjust the setpoint 12.5% of the input range. If the local setpoint is from a Precon ST-S3E-XA, it will have authority to adjust the setpoint 9.4% of the input range. Sample and Hold The UCM-420A may be used to monitor a 4-20 mA or 1-5V control signal. If the signal being monitored is lost, the UCM420A will hold the last valid value for the signal until the signal returns. Pulse Width to 4-20 mA Converter The UCM-420A may be used to convert a time-based pulsewidth AC or DC signal to a 4-20 mA output. 4-20 mA Signal Generator If the device to be controlled by the UCM-420A needs to be calibrated before the system is started up, the UCM-420A may be used to generate a 4-20 mA output in one mA increments.
SPECIFICATIONS
24 VAC/VDC 10% 130 mA maximum @ 24 VAC, 65 mA maximum @ 24 VDC Remote Setpoint Input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, PWM Local Setpoint Input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, three-wire potentiometer or PreCon two-wire potentiometer (ST-S3E-XA) PWM Time Base 0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or 0.592.93 sec Analog Output 4-20 mA sourcing Output Resolution 255 steps Output Burden 650 maximum Input 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC or PreCon Type III thermistor (thermistor range 50 to 90F) Input Impedance 250 (mA signal), 10 k (voltage signal) March 2014 Supply Voltage Supply Current LED Status Green Power Red PWM output Accuracy 1% Remote Setpoint Potentiometer UCM-SPA 0-10k Enclosure UL94V-0 Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% (non-condensing) Weight UCM-420A 1.3 lb (0.61 kg) UCM-SPA 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 18 months
21
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1363

SETPOINT CONTROLLER UCM-420A
WIRING
UCM-420A DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
MUX B3 B4 B5 ADDR 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TIME B6 B7 B8 BASE 0 0 0 2.65 0 0 1 5.2 0 1 0 12.85 0 1 1 25.6 1 X X .59-2.93 RESET A4 A5 PER MIN 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 OFF 0.5 1 2 PROP A6 A7 A8 T.R. 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 10% 20% 35% 50% 65% 80% REMOTE FEEDBACK LOCAL SETPOINT SETPOINT 90% STATUS LED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PWM INPUT PWM INPUT REM SPT INPUT LOC SPT POT + LOC SPT INPUT LOC SPT POT FEEDBK INPUT 24 PWR COMMON MA SIG OUTPUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 100%
NEW!
BAS Controller PWM Contacts
1 MEANS TURN SWITCH ON
0 MEANS TURN SWITCH OFF SWITCH ON DIRECT ACTING LOCAL SETPT ENABLE
SWITCH OFF
A3
REVERSE ACTING
A2 BOTH OFF >> REMOTE SETPT
SEE LOCAL SETPOINT WIRING BELOW
+ + + + +
24 VAC/VDC PWM signal from BAS (only if remote setpoint is PWM) 4-20 mA or 1-5V remote setpoint signal (only if remote setpoint is analog signal)
Remote Setpoint (if used)
A1 SAMPLE AND HOLD MODE REMOTE SETPT ENABLE B1 BOTH OFF >> ANALOG PWM REM SETPT SGLE UNIT B2 REMOTE SET POINT PWM REM SETPT MUX MODE
4-20 mA, 1-5V or Thermistor input signal 4-20 mA sourcing output signal to controlled device 24 VAC/VDC power
LOCAL SET POINT WIRING OPTIONS

LOCAL SETPOINT WIRING OPTIONS
Local setpoint potentiometer Local setpoint input Local setpoint potentiometer
DIMENSIONS
(black) (green) (red)
Increase setpoint
in (cm)
0.7 (1.78)
Three-wire potentiometer (5K to 50K MAX) local setpoint (10K factory installed)
Optional DIN rail adapter
3.4 (8.64) 4.0 (10.16)
Local setpoint potentiometer Local setpoint input Local setpoint potentiometer
Local setpoint (Factory setting) 4-20 MA or 1-5V
4.6 (11.68) 4.8 (12.19)
Common Local setpoint potentiometer Local setpoint input Local setpoint potentiometer
+
Increase setpoint Two-wire potentiometer local setpoint (XA option on Precon ST-S3E-XA thermistor)
Setpoint knob 2.0 (5.08)
Common
2.75 (6.99)
MODEL UCM-420A DESCRIPTION Setpoint controller with local setpoint potentiometer OPTIONS DIN rail mount (must be factory installed) 47 47 Example: UCM-420A-47 Setpoint controller with DIN rail mounting
RELATED PRODUCTS Setpoint potentiometer, 0-10 k , three-wire potentiometer on stainless steel plate for remote mounting, 0-100% setpoint Setpoint potentiometer for 50 to 90F Custom range setpoint potentiometer (specify at time of order, must match range of device wired to feedback input) March 2014
21
UCM-420A
UCM-SPA UCM-SPA-50-90F UCM-SPA-C
1364
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
Digital display for F or C Set point adjustment buttons Night setback manual button or clock input Remote sensor input Changeover input Two proportional outputs heating and cooling PI control algorithm 0-10V or 2-10V outputs

PROPORTIONAL ROOM THERMOSTAT RTC-2P
The Model RTC-2P Room Thermostat Proportional Controller features two proportional outputs (heating and cooling). The proportional plus Integral (PI) control is suitable for pressure dependent VAV box control, as well as fan coil, baseboard, or air handler applications. The occupant controls include a digital display and buttons for setpoint adjustment and night setback/setup override. The Model RTC-2P comes with a remote setback input for use with BAS systems and a changeover input for one-pipe system applications. Field setup is through push buttons with adjustments for setback temperatures, deadband, and F or C display.
RTC-2P
APPLICATION
The stand-alone Model RTC-2P is ideal for use when a central temperature control system may not be possible. Applications include any pressure-dependent VAV box control. The H/C output can also be used for modulating control of room-based discharge air, fan coil valves, or baseboard heat.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA Outputs Control Inputs Remote sensor Changeover Setback Shutdown Controls Range 24 VAC 20%, 50/60 Hz 3 VA Proportional, 2-10V standard, 0-10V congurable (install 42K resistor in R14/R15) PI algorithm 10K Type III thermistor Contact or thermistor, Type III Isolated 24V contact Isolated 24V contact Setpoint buttons up/down, Setbackenable button or 30 minute override 40 to 90F (4 to 32C) Display Proportional Band Cooling Heating Reset Integral Time Changeover Deadband Dimensions Weight RoHS Statement Warranty 0.35" (0.89 cm), two-digit LCD 1.8F (1.0C) 2.7F (1.5C) 15 minutes Contact or 80F (26.6C) with a Type III thermistor -1.8 to 9.0F (-1.0 to 5.0C) 4.0"H x 4.9"W x 1.2"D (12.45 x 10.16 x 3.05 cm) 0.45 lb (0.2 kg) Yes 1 year
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1365
Heating Actuator Night L1 Setback Contact C (open for NSB)
Yh

RTC-2P
8 9
13 12
Changeover Contact or Type III 10 k Thermistor (closed for heating)
PROPORTIONAL ROOM THERMOSTAT RTC-2P

WIRING
**
Separate transformer recommended **
120 VAC
24 VAC
TB1
Yc Yh
TB2
17 16 15 14 13 12
Cooling Actuator Heating Actuator
External Clock Input L1 assumes Night C
1 2 3 5 8 9
J2 closed setback contact (open for night setback)
Remote shut-down L1 contact Remote sensor assumes J4 open, type III J5 closed 10 k thermistor Changeover contact (closed for heating) or Type III thermistor above 80F heating below 65F cooling
C
NEW!
Resistor Sockets for R14, R15 (42.2K 1%)
R15 R14
S6
TB1-8 = Heating 0-10V* TB2-13 = Heat/Cool Changeover TB1-9 = Setback, remote TB2-12 = Heat/Cool Changeover
(TB1-1 and TB2-17 are connected internally.) * 0-10V or 2-10V selectable by 42.2K resistor installation; resistor provided
* 0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC selectable. Install 42 k resistor across R14/R15 for 0-10 VDC output. ** If one common transformer is used, the actuators must use 1/2 wave rectified power, and polarity must be observed.
TERMINALS TB1-1 = Common TB2-17 = Common TB1-2 = Hot 24 VAC** TB2-16 = Remote shut off TB1-3 = Cooling 0-10V* TB2-15 = Remote space sensor TB1-5 = N/C TB2-14 = Remote space sensor TB1-8 = Heating 0-10V* TB2-13 = Heat/Cool changeover TB1-9 = Setback, remote TB2-12 = Heat/Cool changeover (TB1-1 and TB2-17 are connected internally) (42 k Resistor provided)
BOARD LAYOUT
Q1
Vmax Vmin SETBACK

S1 S2 S3
VALUEVALUE UP DOWN
S4 S5
J1J2 J3 PRO F/C 1 ADJ EXT 2 DEADBD OVRD ADJ LED 3 S8 SETBACK GREEN 5 Vhtg J4J5
S9
TB1
TB2
17 16 15 14 13 12
SPACE T USER UP STBCK

S6
SPACE T DOWN
S10
8 J4/5 SELECT 9 INT/EXT SPACE SNSR
24 VAC COM FPM 0-10V Yc 0-10v
SPACE TEMP SENSOR
21
MODEL RTC-2P ST-R3S ST-S3E ST-U3
DESCRIPTION Room temperature controller, two-output H/C proportional thermostat RELATED PRODUCTS Pipe strap-on sensor 10K Type III thermistor Room sensor 10K Type III thermistor Universal duct and immersion sensor 10K Type III thermistor PAGE 1253 1171 1228
1366
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
SPECIFICATIONS
Model ET5-S-1S ETD5-S-1S UT8001 24-277 VAC 24-277 VAC 24 VAC 22A 22A 1A Setpoint range Anticipator Control type Mounting

TWO-POSITION ROOM THERMOSTATS ET SERIES, UT8001
DESCRIPTION The ET Series Two-Position Room Thermostat are designed for on/off control with set points from 50 to 90F. The ET5-S-1S Series is a heating-only thermostat and uses a snap-acting switch for line or low voltage applications. The ETD5-S-1S Series is a heating/cooling thermostat and uses a snap-acting switch for line or low voltage application. Model UT8001 Two-Position Room Thermostat are designed for low voltage on/off control of a manually selected heating or cooling applications. It operates with set points from 50 to 90F from a bi-metal and magnetic reed switch. Fan switching includes manual On/Auto control. FEATURES Line or low voltage ET5 heating Line or low voltage ETD5 heating/cooling Low voltage UT8001 with fan and system switch has single or dual transformer with adjustable anticipator or mV operation, thermometer, and vertical or horizontal mounting
ETD5-S-1S Two position Line or Low Voltage
UT8001 Conventional
Supply Voltage Supply Current Switch None None Fan and system
Contact Type SPST, snap acting SPDT, snap acting Magnetic reed Weight Approvals Warranty
Differential Heating 2F
Dimensions 4.75"H x 2.75"W x 2.75"D (12.1 x 7.0 x 7.0 cm) 4.75"H x 2.75"W x 2.75"D (12.1 x 7.0 x 7.0 cm) 4.75"H x 2.75"W x 1.5"D (12.1 x 7.0 x 3.8 cm)
50 to 90F (10 to 32C) UT8001 only (0.1A to 1A) Two-position, on/off 2" x 4" (5.1 x 10.2 cm) vertical switch box
Heating 2F, Cooling 4F Heating 3F, Cooling 3F 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) UL Listed File #E46315; CSA (ET5), cUL (UT8001) 2 years
WIRING
Fan control (set up J1) Cooling control Transformer (cool if used remove J2) Heat control NC NC NO C C J1 Transformer (heat) 4W G G/O E G/O = gas or oil (fan delay) E = electric (immediate fan) AUTO OFF ON Y RC W RH J2
Open on temperature rise ET5-S-1S
C-N.C. open on temperature rise C-N.O. close on temperature rise ETD5-S-1S
J2 off = two transformers J2 on = one transformer COOL OFF HEAT
UT8001
21
MODEL ET5-S-1S ETD5-S-1S UT8001 DESCRIPTION Line or low-voltage heating thermostat Line or low-voltage heating or cooling thermostat Low-voltage thermostat with fan and system switch
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1367

LINE-VOLTAGE THERMOSTAT T22, T25, T26, T46
DESCRIPTION
These thermostats are designed for line-voltage control of residential, commercial, or industrial heating or year-round air conditioning. A liquid-charged temperature sensing element, highly efcient diaphragm, and lever provide precise temperature control. Anticipators are not required. Model T26 is a line-voltage thermostat for heating or cooling and includes horizontal mounting faceplate kit. Model T25 is a line-voltage two-stage thermostat. Applications include two stages of heating or cooling or auto changeover control of heating and cooling. Model T22 is a line-voltage thermostat with a system selector switch for off/auto or heat/off/cool operation. Model T46 is a line-voltage, heating, cooling or heating/ cooling thermostat with integral system and fan switching. It is designed to control line-voltage fan coils or zone valves.
NEW!
T46 T26 T25 T22 Approvals Weight Warranty UL Listed File #E6688/XAPX 1.30 lb (0.59 kg) 1 year
FEATURES
Knob or concealed set point adjustment Line- or low-voltage control UL listing Mounts on standard single- or double-gang box Bimetal thermometer Ideal for fan coil applications
SPECIFICATIONS
Thermostat Range Mounting Sensing Element Thermometer 40 to 90F (5 to 30C) Separate mounting plate Liquid lled for positive trouble-free operation (anticipator not required) 50 to 90F (10 to 30C), bimetal type may be eld calibrated
ELECTRICAL RATINGS
T22, T25, T26, T46 Thermostats, (T26T-3, T22T) Heavy Duty Thermostat Pilot Duty and Motor Ratings AC full load amp AC locked rotor amp AC non-inductive amp 120V 6 (8) 36 (48) 6.5 (10) 208V 3.4 (8) 21 (48) 6.5 (10) 240V 3 (8) 18 (48) 6.5 (10) 277V T25-125 VA pilot duty 6.5 (10) not T46 or T25 277V 5.2 14.4
21
T46 System and Fan Swith Rating Only Switch Rating AC full load amp AC locked rotor amp 120V 12 34.8 208V 6.9 19.1 240V 6 17.4
1368
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
T22AAA Heating system
h AUTO

LINE-VOLTAGE THERMOSTAT T22, T25, T26, T46
Action on increase in temperature

High Stage Low Stage YH 3 YL
Action on increase in temperature

(red)
3 Cool
Manual or Automatic Changeover Switch DPDT
Cool
Heat
Relay or Switch
H C H C
(blue) (red)
OFF
To Heating
(violet)
T22JAA
BH
BL
To Cooling (blue) high (orange) med (yellow) To Fan low (brown)
(gray)
L1 (hot)
(gray)
(black) (lt blue)
(black) L 1 (hot)
To Heating To Cooling high (orange) med (yellow) To Fan low (brown)
h AUTO
Heat 1
Cooling system
OFF
RH
RL
Common
neutral
neutral
T22SFB T22TFB H/C system
OFF h
OFF
Comes with jumper (remove as needed) T25
T26
Heat/off/cool selector switch with fan speed control, heating and cooling T46SAA
Off/auto selector switch with fan speed control and manual or automatic changeover switch, heating and cooling
T46SDA
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.81 (7.14) 2.96 (7.52) 2.96 (7.52) 1.86 (4.72) 0.41 (1.0) 1.88 (4.8) 0.91 (2.3) 0.60 (1.52) 0.25 1.5 (0.64) (3.81) 1.16 (2.95) 0.60 (1.52)
1.2 (3.05) 5.21 (13.23) 4.71 (11.96) 4.71 (11.96)
1.2 (3.05)
T22, T25
T26
T46
4.84 (12.29)
2.34 (5.94)
3.27 (8.31)
2.34 (5.94)
3.27 (8.31)
T22
T25, T26, T46
Single-gang box
Double-gang box
Front View
Front View
Side View
MODEL T46SDA-1 T46SAA-1 T26S-18* T26T-3* T25A-1 T25A-16 T22AAA T22JAA T22SFB T22TFB ADJUSTMENT TYPE Knob Knob Knob Knob Knob Concealed Knob Knob Knob Knob APPLICATION Heating or cooling SPDT Heating and cooling SPDT Heating or cooling SPDT Heating or cooling SPDT, heavy-duty Two-stage 2 SPDT switches, two-stage heating, cooling, or onestage heating and one-stage cooling Heating Only SPST Cooling Only SPST Heating and cooling SPDT Heating and cooling SPDT SELECTOR SWITCH Off/Auto Low/Med/High Heat/Off/Cool Low/Med/High None None DIFFERENTIAL F (C) HEATING 0.7 (0.4) 0.7 (0.4) 1.75 (1.0) 3 (1.7) 1.75 (1.0) None 3 between stages (1.7) Off/Auto Off/Auto Heat/Off/Cool Heat/Off/Cool 0.7 (1) N/A 1.75 (1) 3 (1.7) N/A 2.25 (1.3) 2.25 (1.3) 3 to 4 (1.7 to 2.2) COOLING 0.7 (0.4) 0.7 (0.4) 2.25 (1.3) 3 to 4 (1.7 to 2.2) 2.25 (1.3) WEIGHT lb (kg) 1.3 (0.59) 1.3 (0.59) 1.0 (0.45) 1.0 (0.45) 1.5 (0.68) 1.5 (0.68) 1.3 (0.59) 1.3 (0.59) 1.3 (0.59) 1.3 (0.59)
21
*Includes faceplate for horizontal mounting. The plate is for on-the-job installation over a vertical plate. Field convert to other configurations.
PLT333-12R PLT333-3R PLT333-9R March 2014
ACCESSORIES T26 and T46 vertical plate with no adjust knob and no thermometer T26 and T46 vertical plate with thermometer and no adjust knob T26 and T46 horizontal plate with no adjust knob and no thermometer
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1369

PECO FLOATING AND PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATS T158, T168 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The T158 Series is a microprocessor-based oating or two-position low voltage thermostat. The T168 Series is a microprocessor-based proportional 4-20 mA or 0-10V thermostat. Both series are designed for fan coil and air handler applications for both two- and four-pipe systems. The processor provides control algorithms for precise stable control under varying capacity and load conditions without the need for eld calibration or tuning. These versatile thermostats have options for a variety of high voltage fan and system switching. Models are also available with an unoccupied setback input. Terminations are provided for remote sensors for both air and water temperature. FEATURES Electronic Proportional plus Integral (PI) control Two-position, oating, and proportional control models Remote sensor capability Optional unoccupied control inputs Fan and system switching models F or C digital display Built-in start up diagnostics Seasonal changeover models Four selection service menu
NEW!
TB-158-100
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Two Mounting Slots 0.16 x 0.36 (0.41 x 0.91)
1.0 (2.54)
2.75 (6.99)
Opening for Wiring
0.5 (1.27)
0.34 (0.86) 2.1 (5.33) 3.3 (8.38) 4.5 (11.43)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Control Type Output Capacity Stroke Time Temperature Offset Fan Demand Delay Cooling Minimum Off Fan Switching Setpoint With Setback Proportional Band Heat/Cool Deadband Material Of Construction Color Display Weight Approvals Warranty T158 20-28 VAC 25 mA @ 24 VAC Two-position or oating 10 VA @ 24 VAC (Triac) 30-300 sec (120 sec default) 5F (0 default) 0-10 min. (0 default) 30-600 sec (120 sec default) 24 VA @ 24 VAC , 125 VA @ 120 VAC 50 to 90F (10 to 32C) 2F (1C) 3F (1.6C) Flame-retardant PVC, UV stabilized Cool gray 0.36" (0.9) LCD (F or C) 0.28 lb (0.13 kg) UL-recognized component File# E50023, CE 5 year T168 20-28 VAC 25 mA @ 24 VAC Proportional 4-20 mA, 600 load, 0-10 VDC, 1000 min 10 VA @ 24 VAC (Triac) , (Heating/Damper/Demand) 30-300 sec (120 sec default) 5F (0 default) 2-10 min. (2 default) 30-600 sec (120 sec default) 24 VA @ 24 VAC, 125 VA @ 120 VAC 50 to 90F (10 to 32C) 2F (1C) 3F (1.6C) Flame-retardant PVC, UV stabilized Cool gray 0.36" (0.9) LCD (F or C) 0.28 lb (0.13 kg) UL-recognized component File# E50023, CE 5 year
T168 WIRING
Line Voltage Connections
21
1 2 3 4
L1 (hot) Lo Med Hi
TA168
Fan L2 or Neutral
T168 Program Jumpers and Switch Settings

Dip Switch #1: #2: #3: #4: #5: #6:
1 2 3
5 6 7 8 9 Low Voltage 10 Connections 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Setback Input Clg (DA) 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA Aux Heat
24 VAC Transformer Htg (RA) 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA Demand Output On/Off Damper
OFF ON
Off Switch Open Not used Electric heat (on at setpoint) C display 4-20 mA output Must be ON Setback Heating 60F (15C) Cooling 85F (29C)
On Switch Closed Not used Staged heat (on at maximum output plus 1F) F display 0-10 VDC output Normal operation Setback Heating 50F (10C) Cooling 90F (32C)
External Relay Remove JP1 for Remote Sensor
Notes: 1. Units have a three-minute warm up. 2. Cycle power after dip switches are changed.
4 5 6
Optional Remote Probe Optional Remote Changeover Probe
* If the changeover probe is used
Typical Wiring for Proportional Control
on a cold pipe, the control is as shown above on the outputs. If the changeover probe is on a hot pipe, it reverses the action of the cooling output above. Heating is disabled.
Jumpered Local sensor Two pipe Not used Cooling 0-10 VDC Heating 0-10 VDC
Jumpers
I.D. JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5
Unjumpered Remote sensor Four pipe Not used Cooling 4-20 mA Heating 4-20 mA
Notes: JP 4 and 5 must both be the same.
Two pipe disables terminal 11.
1370
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
T158 WIRING
Line-voltage connections

PECO FLOATING AND PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATS T158, T168 SERIES
1 2 3 4
L1 (hot) Lo Med Hi
TA158 (1H/1C)
L2 or Neutral
Fan
Low-voltage connections
Triac control
5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Triac All low voltage connections Triac control
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
N/C N/C Fan HI* Auto/ON
TH158 (Heat Pump)

Fan *HI fan speed required acc. cover C158FAOH Low voltage
Setback input
N/C N/C N/C
Heat output
Cool output
24 VAC transformer
Setback input B-Heating reversing vlv W1-2nd heat N/C output O-Cooling reversing vlv Y1-Cooling comp. output
External relay or spring return actuator Remove JP1 for remote sensor Type 24
24 VAC transformer
External relay
Optional remote probe
Optional remote changeover probe
*JP4 Installed = Two pipe

Uninstalled = Four pipe Type 24
Typical Wiring for On/Off Control
N/C
Remove JP1 for remote sensor Type 24

L1 (hot) Lo Med Hi
Line-voltage connections Low-voltage connections
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
L1 (hot) Lo Med Hi
TB158 (Floating)
Fan L2 or Neutral Line-voltage connections Low-voltage connections Cool ^ output Heat ^ output 24 VAC transformer
Triac control
Setback input Open Open Close Close On/Off damper
Optional remote probe Optional pipe changeover probe
^ Tri-state actuator External relay or spring return actuator Remove JP1 for remote sensor Type 24
Triac control
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
TB158 (Two-Position)
Fan L2 or Neutral
Setback input 1st heat output 2nd heat only output

On/Off damper
Cool output Demand output
24 VAC transformer External relay or spring return actuator Remove JP1 for remote sensor Type 24
Optional remote probe Optional remote changeover probe

Typical Wiring for Three-Wire Floating Control

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
N/C N/C Fan HI* Auto/ON
TC158 (2H/1C)
*HI fan speed required acc. cover C158FAOH Fan Low voltage
T158 Program Switch Settings

Control Dip Switch Function #1: Heating action #2: Cooling action #3: Temp display #4: Heating signal #5: Cooling signal OFF ON #6: Unocc setpoints
1 2 3 4 5 6
Triac All low voltage connections Triac control
Setback input 1st heat output 2nd heat N/C output 1st cool output Demand output
24 VAC transformer External relay or spring return actuator Remove JP1 for remote sensor Type 24
Off Switch Open DA (N.O.)** RA (N.O.)** C ON/OFF ON/OFF 60/85F (15/29C)
On Switch Closed RA (N.C.)** (only used when #4 is off) DA (N.C.)** (only used when #5 is off) F Modulating 3-Wire Modulating 3-Wire 50/90F (10/32C)
N/C
N/C = no connection
Notes: 1. Units have a three-minute warm up. * If the changeover probe is used 2. Cycle power after dip switches are on a cold pipe, the control is as changed. shown above on the outputs. If the changeover probe is on a hot pipe, it reverses the action of the cooling output above. Heating is disabled. ** Refers to valve or damper position
CONTROL OUTPUTS PART NUMBER 2 PIPE / 4 PIPE USER CONTROL OLD FAN^ NEW DEMAND SYSTEM MODE CHANGE OVER PROPORTIONAL FLOATING ON/OFF HEAT PUMP DAMPER MODEL MODEL OCC/UNOCC OUTPUT SWITCHING SWITCHING PROBE INPUT 4-20 mA/0-10V TRIAC TRIAC TRIAC ----1H/1C TA158-100^ O/H/M/L* Heating/Cooling/Auto/Off Yes, 2 or 4 pipe ---1H/1C [2H]/(1C)*** 1-Triac (1-Triac)*** O/H/M/L* Heating/Cooling/Auto/Off Yes, 2 or 4 pipe TB158-100^ ALL TB158 ----1-Triac 2H/1C TC158-100^ Auto/On** Heating/Cooling/Auto/Off No, 4 pipe only --1O/1B --1-Triac 1H/1C TH158-100^ Auto/On** Heating/Cooling/Auto/Off No, 4 pipe only ---1-Triac 1-Triac 2nd Heating TA168-100^ ALL TA168 O/H/M/L* Heating/Cooling/Auto/Off Yes, 2 or 4 pipe 1H/1C
^ Changing the cover on T158 and T168 thermostats may change or eliminate the fan switching (See accessories C158-_ _). (New models only) * O/H/M/L = Off/High/Medium/Low, 24-277V fan contacts, Off shuts down the thermostat with no display. ** Auto/On = Fan is automatically on during equipment demand or On always, 24 VAC low-voltage control. No O/H/M/L operation. *** Alternate outputs based on DIP switch [4 heating] and (5 cooling). Switches 4 and 5 are independent. See TB158 wiring diagrams above depending on switch settings. Note: All Triac outputs are 24 VAC with 24 VAC potential on disconnected terminals (open circuit condition).
65345 CA158 CA158-FFN CA168 CA168-FFN CB158 CB158-FFN CC158 CC158-FAOH CH158 CH158-FAO CH158-FHLA March 2014
RELATED PRODUCTS Thermostat base plate, 4.75 x 4.75 Thermostat cover for TA158-100 without fan switch Thermostat cover for TA158-100 with fan off/on switch Thermostat cover for TB168-100 with fan switch Thermostat cover for TB168-100 with fan off/on switch Thermostat cover for TB158-100 without fan switch Thermostat cover for TB158-100 with fan off/on switch Thermostat cover for TC158-100 with fan switch Thermostat cover for TC158-100 with fan auto/on/high switch Thermostat cover for TH158-100 without fan switch Thermostat cover for TH158-100 with fan auto/on switch Thermostat cover for TH158-100 with fan high/low/auto switch
21
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1371

FAN COIL THERMOSTAT WITH ADA-COMPLIANT DIGITAL DISPLAY T170
DESCRIPTION The T170 is specically designed for 1H, 1C, on/off vent damper and multi speed fan control applications. The large ADA compliant backlit display shows temperature F or C with a simple push of a button and indicates fan and system status. The T170 is powered from 24-277 volts with direct-wired manual fan or auto-staging fan models. Remote temperature sensor, pipe change over sensor, setback input and occupancy sensor inputs are all standard.
NEW!
T170-001 SE200-001 SA200-001 SB200-001 Keypad lockout 2-pipe auto purge cycle 2-pipe or 4-pipe operation Setback from occupancy or clock Temperature or continuous set point display Temperature offset display Setpoint limits, H and C Fan off delay H/C setback selection Easy occupant switched F or C display Display Display Offset Button Controls Up, Down Temperature select System Heat/Cool/Auto/Off Fan Control On/Off/Auto Fan Speed Hi/Medium/Low, hold for F/C Adjustments Service menu set up, 9 parameters Enclosure Vinyl plastic for indoor use only Switch Cycles 100,000 cycles Termination 6" ying leads 18-14 AWG Color White Mounting Horizontal on wall. Screw direct or 4" x 4" back box Operating Temperature 130F (54C) Maximum Operating Humidity 98% RH non-condensing Dimensions 4.4"H x 5.8"W x 1.4"D (11.2 x 14.7 x 3.5 cm) Weight 0.7 lb (0.32 kg) Approvals UL, ULC, File# E50023 and ADA compliant Warranty 5 years 1" x 1.5" backlit digital display room temp., setpoint, system and fan status 9F (5C), in 1F (0.5C) increments
APPLICATION
Designed specically for direct line-voltage or low voltage wiring of fan coils used for heating and cooling, with fan and damper controls. Ideal for hotels, dormitories, retirement centers, resorts, condos, cottages, schools, vestibule entrances, and so on.
FEATURES
1H/1C and On-Off vent damper H/C/A/O system switching Fan switch Auto/On/Off L/M/H manual fan speed or fan auto staging models 24-277 VAC power Large backlit ADA compliant display/buttons Occupancy motion detector inputs Door switch or setback input Remote sensor and service alert input Change over sensor input
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Sensor Type Remote Sensor Output Control Output Amps Voltage 120 VAC 24-277 VAC, 10%, 50/60 Hz 45 mA Built-in 10K thermistor Type II 10K thermistor Type II, acc. required 6-SPST relays H/C/Damper, Fan-L/M/H RES 6.0 5.0 4.2 LRA 34.8 17.4 14.4 FLA 5.8 2.9 2.4 HP 1/4 1/4 1/4
21
240 VAC 277 VAC
Note: Combined load not to exceed 20A Control Dead-band Setpoint Setback (H/C) Keypad Lockout Proportional plus Integral (PI) 3F (1.6C) 50 to 90F (10 to 32C), adjustable 55 to 90F (13 to 32C), adjustable 8F (4.4C) minimum separation All buttons disabled except setpoint
1372
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS / MOUNTING
5.8 (14.73)

FAN COIL THERMOSTAT WITH ADA-COMPLIANT DIGITAL DISPLAY T170
3.28 (8.33)
AUTO COOL FAN ON SETBACK HEAT AUTO LOWMEDHI OFF
F C
SETPOINT SYSTEM
4.4 (11.17)
Wire Way
1.50 (3.81)
1.25 (3.175)
SYSTEM
FAN
SPEED HOLD F/C
Note: The cover snaps into place firmly, making occupant tampering difficult. Be sure to install jumpers, select voltage, and wire properly before snapping cover into place.
INSTALLATION / JUMPERS
CAUTION:
HIGH VOLTAGE - REMOVE POWER BEFORE SERVICING
This jumper selects between 2-pipe (jumper ON) and 4-pipe (jumper OFF) operation. (Shipped OFF)
JP4 JUMPER SELECTION
2/4 PIPE SELECTION 2-PIPE JP4 ON
WATER TEMP Cold Hot Cold Hot
JP3 JUMPER SELECTION JP4 JP3 *

SWITCH 24V 110277V
This jumper is shipped normally open. Placement of a jumper allows for Occupancy Detection and Door Switch Only Operation. (Shipped OFF)
OUTPUT OPERATION MAIN SECONDARY OUTPUT OUTPUT Cooling Only - DA Disabled The fan will not cycle on
with a heat demand.
Heating Only - RA
The fan will not cycle on with a cool demand.
Disabled Heating - RA Disabled
JP1 JUMPER SELECTION JP1
Removal of this jumper allows the sensor to be located in a remote location, or N.C. service alarm. (Shipped ON)
Cooling - DA Heating Only - RA

4-PIPE JP4 OFF
CIRCUIT BOARD
In Cover
VOLTAGE SELECTION SWITCH*
This switch must be placed in the appropriate position prior to application of power. (Shipped at 110-277V)
*Switch selection is as follows: 24V = 24 VAC; 110-277 V = 120, 240, or 277 VAC
WIRING
T170
White/Black 18 AWG (6" pigtails) Low voltage T Setback Input, JP3 removed. Open = occupied, closed = unoccupied Door Switch, JP3 installed. Open when door is open. Remote sensor probe, JP1 removed. Service Alarm (Open = Normal), JP1 installed. Circuit common T Pipe sensor Occupancy detector (Open = Occupied) L2 / NEUTRAL
(Main output) (Secondary output)
ORDERING INFORMATIONT
MODEL TA170-001 TB170-001 DESCRIPTION 24-277V, H/C/Dpr thermostat with system, fan, and three-speed manual fan switch 24-277V, H/C/Dpr thermostat with system, and fan switch off/auto with three-speed auto staging fan on demand every 2 (2 differential)
THERMOSTAT CONNECTIONS
White/Yellow White/Violet White/Blue White/Gray Yellow Blue Red
Cool
Heat
14 AWG Line voltage
White/Brown White/Red White/Orange Brown Black,14 AWG
Fan low Fan medium Fan high Outside air damper
Note: Unused wires must have their ends taped, as they may have live voltage on them from the thermostat.
680-243-6 AQS00661 SA200-001 SB200-001
L1
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Changeover thermostat with conduit tting 24 VAC/VDC water sensor/switch 572 Ceiling 360-degree occupancy motion sensor, 24 VAC/VDC, form C contacts Wall occupancy/motion sensor, 110-degree view, 24 VAC/VDC, form C contacts SE200-001 Plunger style door switch SE200-002 Magnetic door/window switch, N.C.-SPST ST-R24S Changeover temperature sensor 1254 ST-S24E Remote room temperature sensor 1171
21
T - Type 24 thermistor sensor
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1373

PROGRAMMABLE FAN COIL THERMOSTAT T180 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The T180 Series is a 7-day, 4-event programmable FCU thermostat. The large ADA compliant backlit display shows temperature F or C with a simple push of a button and indicates fan and system status. The T180 is powered from 24-277 volts with direct-wired manual fan or auto-staging fan models. Remote temperature sensor, pipe changeover sensor, setback input and occupancy sensor inputs are all standard. APPLICATION Designed specically for direct high voltage or low voltage wiring of fan coils used for heating and cooling, with fan and damper controls. Ideal for hotels, dormitories, retirement centers, resorts, condos, cottages, schools, vestibule entrances, and so on. FEATURES 7-day, 4-event schedule 1H/1C and On-Off vent damper H/C/A/O system switching Fan switch Auto/On/Off L/M/H manual fan speed or fan staging models 24-277 VAC power Large backlit ADA compliant display/buttons Occupancy motion detector inputs Door switch or setback input Remote sensor and service alert input Change over sensor input SE200-001 SA200-001
NEW!
T180-001 SB200-001 Keypad lockout 2-pipe or 4-pipe operation Setback from occupancy or clock Temperature or continuous set point display Temperature offset display Setpoint limits, H and C Fan off delay H/C setback selection Easy occupant switched F or C display Button Controls Up, Down Temperature select System Heat/Cool/Auto/Off Fan Control On Hi-Med-Lo/Auto Hi-Med-Lo Program Clock-F/C-Set-Copy-Hold Adjustments Service menu set up, 9 parameters Enclosure Vinyl plastic for indoor use only 100,000 cycles Switch Cycles Termination 6" ying leads 18-14 AWG Color White Mounting Horizontal on wall. Screw direct or 4" x 4" back box Operating Temperature 130F (54C) Operating Humidity 98% RH non-condensing Dimensions 4.4"H x 5.8"W x 1.4"D (11.2 x 14.7 x 3.5 cm) Approvals UL Listed File #E50023, ULC, and ADA compliant Warranty 5 years
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Sensor Type Remote Sensor Output Control Output Loads Voltage 120 VAC 240 VAC RES 6.0 5.0 4.2 24-277 VAC, 10%, 50/60 Hz 45 mA Built-in 10K thermistor Type II 10K thermistor Type II, acc. required 6-SPST relays H/C/Damper, Fan-L/M/H LRA 34.8 17.4 14.4 FLA 5.8 2.9 2.4 HP 1/4 1/4 1/4
21
277 VAC
Note: Combined load not to exceed 20A Control Dead-band Setpoint Setback (H/C) Keypad Lockout Display Display Offset Proportional plus Integral (PI) 3F, (1.6C) 50 to 90F (10 to 32C), adjustable 55 to 90F (13 to 32C), adjustable 8F (4.4C) minimum separation All buttons disabled except setpoint 1" x 1.5" backlit digital display Room temp., setpoint, system and fan status 9F (5C), in 1F (0.5C) increments
1374
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
SYSTEM FAN PROGRAM

PROGRAMMABLE FAN COIL THERMOSTAT T180 SERIES
INSTALLATION / JUMPERS
CAUTION:
HIGH VOLTAGE - REMOVE POWER BEFORE SERVICING
This jumper selects between 2-pipe (jumper ON) and 4-pipe (jumper OFF) operation. (Shipped OFF)
JP4 JUMPER SELECTION
2/4 PIPE SELECTION 2-PIPE JP4 ON
WATER TEMP Cold Hot Cold Hot
JP3 JUMPER SELECTION JP4 JP3 *

SWITCH 24V 110277V
This jumper is shipped normally open. Placement of a jumper allows for Occupancy Detection and Door Switch Only Operation. (Shipped OFF)
OUTPUT OPERATION MAIN SECONDARY OUTPUT OUTPUT Cooling Only - DA Disabled The fan will not cycle on
with a heat demand.
Heating Only - RA
Disabled Heating - RA Disabled
JP1 JUMPER SELECTION JP1
Removal of this jumper allows the sensor to be located in a remote location, or N.C. service alarm. (Shipped ON)
Cooling - DA Heating Only - RA

4-PIPE JP4 OFF
CIRCUIT BOARD
In Cover
VOLTAGE SELECTION SWITCH*
This switch must be placed in the appropriate position prior to application of power. (Shipped at 110-277V)
*Switch selection is as follows: 24V = 24 VAC; 110-277 V = 120, 240, or 277 VAC
WIRING
T170
White/Black 18 AWG (6" pigtails) Low voltage T Setback Input, JP3 removed. Open = occupied, closed = unoccupied Door Switch, JP3 installed. Open when door is open. Remote sensor probe, JP1 removed. Service Alarm (Open = Normal), JP1 installed. Circuit common T Pipe sensor Occupancy detector (Open = Occupied) L2 / NEUTRAL
(Main output) (Secondary output)
MODEL TA180-001 TB180-001 DESCRIPTION 24-277V, H/C/Dpr thermostat with system, fan, and three-speed manual fan switch 24-277V, H/C/Dpr thermostat with system, and fan switch off/auto with three-speed auto staging fan on demand every 2 (2 differential)
THERMOSTAT CONNECTIONS
White/Yellow White/Violet White/Blue White/Gray Yellow Blue Red
Cool
Heat
14 AWG Line voltage
White/Brown White/Red White/Orange Brown Black,14 AWG
Fan low Fan medium Fan high Outside air damper
Note: Unused wires must have their ends taped, as they may have live voltage on them from the thermostat.
680-243-6 SA200-001 SB200-001 SE200-001 SE200-002 ST-R24S ST-S24E
L1
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Changeover thermostat with conduit fitting Ceiling 360-degree occupancy motion sensor, 24 VAC/VDC, form C contacts Wall occupancy/motion sensor, 110-degree view, 24 VAC/VDC, form C contacts Plunger style door switch Magnetic door/window switch, N.C.-SPST Changeover temperature sensor 1253 Remote room temperature sensor 1171
21
T - Type 24 thermistor sensor
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1375

DESCRIPTION The T155 Series is a general-purpose, electronic, twoposition line-voltage and low-voltage thermostat. The T167 Series is a 0 to 10 VDC proportional heating/cooling low voltage thermostat. Both are designed for a variety of twoand four-pipe, heating, and cooling applications. Both manual and automatic changeover models include a provision for a remote thermistor temperature sensor. FEATURES Electronic design performance Two-position and Proportional models Remote sensor capability Fan and system switching models F scale standard C or warmer/cooler dials available Setpoint stops available TB155-048 Two-position
Two Mounting Slots 0.16 x 0.36 (0.41 x 0.91)
PECO LINE AND LOW VOLTAGE TWO-POSITION AND PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATS T155 AND T167 SERIES
NEW!
TA167-007 Proportional
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
2.75 (6.99)
Opening for Wiring
1.0 (2.54)
0.5 (1.27)
SEQUENCE GRAPHS
Heat On Heating Inc { Temp Temp Dec 1F Cooling 1F Setpoint Heat Off
0.34 (0.86) 2.1 (5.33) 3.3 (8.38) 4.5 (11.43)
SPECIFICATIONS
T155 Supply Voltage Supply Current Output Capacity Control Type Differential Deadband T167 Supply Voltage Supply Current Control Type Proportional Band Control Output Deadband 0-10V actuator 2-10V actuator 24-277 VAC 25 mA @ 24 VAC 10 VA @ 24 VAC 20 VA @ 120-277 VAC Two position 1F (0.5C) 4F (2.2C) (TB155 only) 24 VAC 25 mA Proportional 2F (1C) 0-10 VDC, 1 k min 0F (possible H and C output ON) 0.8F (0.44C)
{ Temp Inc
Temp Dec Cool Off Cool On
Manual switchover
TA155-047
Setpoint Heat Off Temp Inc Temp Dec Heat On 4F Deadband Auto switchover 1F 2F 1F Cool On
Cool Off
21
TB155-048
10 VDC 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 VDC -3 -2 -1 0.8F 2 3
General Fan/System Switch Rating 24 VA @ 24 VAC 125 VA @ 120-277 VAC Setpoint 50 to 90F (10 to 32C) Operating Temperature 32 to 130F (0 to 55C) Construction Flame-retardant PVC Color Cool gray Weight 0.28 lb (0.13 kg) UL Listed File #E50023, CE Approvals 5 years Warranty
Setpoint
Heating TB3-1
Cooling TB3-2
0F
F Temperature Increase
TA167
March 2014
1376
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
T155 WIRING
All connections potentially High voltage
CONNECTIONS TB2 1 Stat & VLV L1 (Hot) 2 High 3 Med 4 Low 5 Fan L1 (Hot) CONNECTIONS TB3 1 Heat 2 Cool 3 System Switched Output CONNECTIONS TB1 4 L2 or Neutral (System and Fan) 3 No Connection 2 Remote Sensor 1 Remote Sensor

T167 WIRING
CONNECTIONS (Low voltage) TB1 4 24 VAC, Hot 3 24 VAC, Common 2 Remote Probe 1 Remote Probe CONNECTIONS (Low voltage) TB3 2 Cool 1 Heat
JP1*
PECO LINE AND LOW VOLTAGE TWO-POSITION AND PROPORTIONAL THERMOSTATS T155 AND T167 SERIES
TB3
TB1
CONNECTIONS (High voltage) TB2 1 High 2 Med 3 Low 4 L1
TB2
JP1
* Remove JP1
for remote sensor
* Remove JP1
for remote sensor
T155 Terminal Identification

1 2 3
HTG VLV
** Stat L1 voltage present on wiring
T167 Terminal Identification

24 VAC
TB1
4 3 2 1 0-10 VDC CLG VLV
** Remote * sensor
N.C. valves
CLG VLV
Shown sys. off
TB3 TB2
25' TB1 (7.6m) 4 max 3
System switch not off^

Stat and Valve L1 (24-277 VAC) Hi Fan L2 Med Low Fan L1
L2 or Neutral
*Remote
sensor
N.C. valves
HTG VLV
0-10 VDC
* Remove JP1
for remote sensor
2 1
JP1
1 2 3 4 5
25' (7.6m) max
TB2
TB3
2 1 JP1
^Connect TB3-3 to TB2-5 for fan on during system on
T155
680-243-6 Changeover stat (pipe mount)
1 2 3
* Remove JP1
for remote sensor
C H
1 2 3 4
Hi Med Low
Fan
L2 (24-277 VAC)
Fan L1 (24-277 VAC)
** Stat L1 voltage present on wiring
TA167-007, H or C TA167-006 w/o TB2, H and C

680-243-6 Changeover stat
TB1
4 3 2 1 0-10 VDC (C) 0-10 VDC (H) HTG/CLG VLV
** Remote sensor Htg Clg 25' (7.6m) max

4 3 2 1
Htg/Clg Vlv
24 VAC
Shown sys. off

TB1 JP1
TB3 N.C. valve TB2 System switch not off^

Stat and Valve L1(24-277 VAC) Hi L2 Med Low Fan L1 1 2 3 4 5
*Remote
sensor
N.C. valve
25' (7.6m) max
TB3
JP1
* Remove JP1
for remote sensor
L2 or Neutral ^Connect TB3-3 to TB2-5 for fan on during system on
* Remove JP1
for remote sensor
C 2 H 1
TB155 (changeover)
TA167-006 (changeover)
CONTROL OUTPUTS OPTIONAL SENSORS COVERS USER CONTROL PART NUMBER OLD KELE ON/OFF PROPORTIONAL FAN ^ NEW TWO PIPE SYSTEM MODE ^ TRIAC MODEL SWITCHING MODEL 0-10 VDC CHANGEOVER SWITCHING -horz. & vert. None, manual only TA155-047^ All TA155-043 1H or 1C H/M/L* Htg/Off/Clg** -Yes, requires C/O^^ stat horz. & vert. TB155-048^ All TB155-047 1H and 1C H/M/L* On/Off** -1H and 1C Yes, requires C/O^^ stat vertical TA167-006^ None None --1H or 1C None, manual only vertical TA167-007^ H/M/L* Htg/Off/Clg** -^ Changing the cover on T155 and T167 thermostats may eliminate the fan and system switching (See accessories C155-_ _). (New models only) ^^ Must use a changeover thermostat such as the 680-243-6. * H/M/L = High/Medium/Low, 24-277 VAC fan contacts, Off is wired through the system switch and shuts down the thermostat. ** Fan is off when system switch is Off, 24-277 VAC fan control. Note: All Triac outputs are 24-277 VAC with voltage potential in an open circuit.
65170 65345 65410 65860 680-243-6 68671 CA155 CA155-HOC CA167 CA167-HOC CB155 CB155-SNF KTR24 ST-U24 March 2014
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Warmer/cooler setpoint dial Thermostat base plate, 4.75" x 4.75" 10-34C setpoint dial Setpoint range stop tabs, 2F increments Changeover thermostat with conduit fitting Remote sensor for T155 Thermostat cover for TA155-047, without fan or system switch, vertical only Thermostat cover for TA155-047, with system H/O/C switch and no fan switch, vertical only Thermostat cover for TA167, without fan or system switch Thermostat cover for TA167-007, with system H/O/C switch and no fan switch Thermostat cover for TB155-048, without fan or system switch, vertical only Thermostat cover for TB155-048, with system On/Off switch and no fan switch, vertical only Remote room thermistor sensor 1169 10K Universal sensor with box 1228
21
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1377

BULB THERMOSTATS A19, A28, A319, A419 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The A19 Series is a single stage, heating or cooling, SPDT temperature control that uses a liquid-lled sensing element and capillary. The unit has an exposed or concealed set point dial with adjustable differential, and it will switch line voltages. The A28 Series is a two stage, heating or cooling, w/2-SPDT temperature control that uses a liquid-lled sensing element and capillary. The unit has an exposed or concealed set point dial with adjustable differential, and it will switch line voltages. The A319 Series is a single stage, heating or cooling, SPDT temperature control that uses a Type 21 thermistor sensor. The unit uses a set point dial and operates on 120 VAC or 240 VAC with a wide adjustable differential. A separate LED indicates relay operation.The A419 Series is a single stage, heating or cooling, SPDT temperature control that uses a PTC sensor. This unit features a digital display and buttons to adjust the set point differential, setback temperature, antishort cycle delay, and failsafe control. The unit operates on 120 or 240 VAC and a 3/8" (0.95 cm) display with H/C, F /C and setback indication. A separate LED indicates relay operation.
NEW!
A319 A19DAC-1 (with convertible knob) A19ABC-24 A419
A319 A419 120/208/240 VAC 50/60 Hz 1.8 VA 1.8 VA Dial Buttons and 3/8" display Thermistor PTC -30 to 140F (-34 to 60C) 1 to 30F (0.5 to 17C) 5.0"H x 2.4"W x 2.4"D (12.70 x 6.10 x 6.10 cm) UL Listed File #E27734, CSA 1.75 lb (0.75 kg) 1 year 1 year
Differential Potentiometer
A19BAC-1 (with convertible concealed plug)
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Power Setpoint Adjust Sensor Ambient Temp Differential Dimensions Approvals Weight Warranty A19/A28 None required None required Screwdriver slot or knob (concealed available) Liquid-filled bulb and capillary Typical 140F (60C), strap-on 290F (143C) x2, x3, x4 multiplier from min differential 4.5"H x 2.2"W x 2.0"D (11.43 x 5.59 x 5.08 cm) UL Listed File #E6688, CSA 1.2 lb (0.55 kg) 1 year
WIRING
2 Y heat 3 B 1 R
JUMPER POSITION * Cooling/ Cooling* Removed Heating Heating Installed Setpoint P4-Cut-out Cut-in* Removed Cut-out Installed Keypad Lock P5-Unlock Locked Removed Unlocked* Installed *Factory settings FUNCTION JUMPER LABEL P4-Heat SETTING
21
Action on increase of temperature Setpoint shaft with slot for knob or concealed with plug Differential adjustment multiplier (if min, diff = 3) (if X2, diff = 6)
Keypad Unlock
Heat/Cool Cut In/Out
P5 P4
Cutout adjust screw

3 2 1 Y B R
240 COM 120
Relay Energized LED Indicator
(+) BIN () COM (+) SEN (All other settings are through the keyboard)
1/2" Knockout
NC C NO
AC 240 COM 120 NC C NO
X4 X3 X2 Min
Probe included
Jumper Block Position Heating Cooling
1/2" Knockout
A28 has two sets of contacts
A319
A419
Probe included
1378
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Model Switch Range Action F (C) A19BAC-1C SPDT
30 to 110 (-1 to 43) 3.5 fixed (1.9)

BULB THERMOSTATS A19, A28, A319, A419 SERIES
Bulb Well # * Space Thermostat WEL14A-602R WEL14A-603R Range Adjuster Convertible Electrical Ranges Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 AC full load amp 16.0 9.2
SINGLE-STAGE SPACE AND REMOTE BULB THERMOSTAT Diff F (C) Bulb and Adjustable Capillary
1.4" x 2.25" coil 3/8" x 4" 6' cap 3/8" x 5" 8' cap 3/8" x 4" 8' cap 3/8" x 4" 20' cap
240 8.0
*A19ABA-40
SPST1
A19ABC-4C SPDT A19ABC-24 SPDT
-30 to 100 (-34 to 38) 50 to 130 (10 to 55) -30 to 100 (-34 to 38) (-34 to 38)
3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7) 3.5 to 14 (1.9 to 8.0) 3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7) 3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7)
Screwdriver AC locked rotor amp slot Knob Noninductive or resistance load amp (not lamp loads)
96.0 55.2 48.0
WEL14A-602R Convertible WEL14A-602R Convertible
22A 120-277 VAC
-30 to 100 A19ABC-36 SPDT
*A19ABA-40 contacts open on temperature decrease.

MANUAL RESET - REMOTE LIQUID BULB THERMOSTAT Model A19ACA-14 Switch Range Action F (C) SPST -30 to 100 Open (-34 to 38)
Low
Diff F (C) Bulb and Adjustable Capillary Manual reset Manual reset
Bulb Well # *
Range Adjuster
Electrical Ranges Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 AC full load amp 16.0 9.2
240 8.0
3/8" x 4" WEL14A-602R Screwdriver 6' cap slot AC locked rotor amp 3/8" x 3.5" WEL14A-602R 6' cap Knob AC full load amp AC locked rotor amp
96.0 55.2 48.0 10.0 60.0 6.0 36.0
A19ADB-1C
SPST 100 to 240 Open (38 to 116)

High
CHANGEOVER STRAP-ON LIQUID BULB THERMOSTAT (AQUASTAT) Model A19DAC-1 Switch Action Range F (C) Diff F (C) Fixed
10 (5.6)
Mounting to Coil Direct clamp-on strap
Range Adjuster Knob
Electrical Ranges Motor Ratings VAC 120 10.0 60.0 Pilot duty - 125 VA, 24-600 VAC AC full load amp AC locked rotor amp Electrical Ranges Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 AC full load amp 16.0 9.2
240 6.0 36.0
SPDT 100 to 240 (38 to 116)
Note: A19DAC-1 not for use as a limit control TWO-STAGE SPACE AND REMOTE BULB THERMOSTAT Model A28AA-4C Switch Action 2-SPDT Range F (C)
30 to 110 (-1 to 43) -30 to 100 40 to 120
Diff F (C) Bulb and Adjustable Capillary
Bulb Well # * Space 3.5 (1.9) 1.4" x 2.25" 3 interstage 2' coil Thermostat
5 (2.8) 2 to 7 adj interstage 5 (2.8) 8 interstage 1.5 (0.8) 2 to 7 adj interstage 3/8" x 4" 8' cap 3/8" x 4" 6' cap 3/8" x 5" 10' cap
Range Adjuster Convertible
240 8.0
A28AA-29C 2-SPDT (-34 to 38) A28MA-2C A28AJ18C 2-SPDT (4 to 49) 2-SPDT 20 to 80
WEL14A-602R Convertible AC locked rotor amp Noninductive or NEMA 3R Screwdriver resistance load amp slot WEL14A603R (not lamp loads) Noninductive or WEL14A-603R Convertible resistance load amp (not lamp loads)
96.0 55.2 48.0 22A 120-277 VAC 10.0 9.2 8.0
(-7 to 28)
SOLID STATE SENSOR THERMOSTAT Model Switch Action Range F (C) Diff F (C) Adjustable Bulb and Capillary Range Adjuster Knob Knob Buttons with digital display Electrical Ranges Motor Ratings VAC 120 208 AC full load amp AC locked rotor amp Noninductive Horsepower 16.0 9.2 240 8.0
1 to 30 -20 to 100 Type 21 thermistor included A319ABC24-1 SPST (-30 to 38) (0.5 to 17.0) 8' (2.4 m) Lead 1 to 30 A319ABC12-1 SPST 100 to 220 (0.5 to 17.0) Type 21 thermistor included (38 to 105) 8' (2.4 m) Lead 1 to 30 A419ABC-1C SPDT -30 to 212 (-34 to 100) (1.0 to 30.0)
96.0 55.0 48.0 15.0 10.0 10.0 1.0 1.0 0.5
PTC sensor included 6.6' (2m) Lead 0.25 diameter
21
* Bulb well not supplied
PLT344-1R SHL10A-603R TE-6001-1 TE-6001-2 WEL14A-602R WEL14A-603R
ACCESSORIES PAGE DIN rail end clips Sun shield for A99 sensor for outdoor sunny locations Holder for duct sensor 1391 Holder for OSA sensor 1391 4-15/16 COPPER BULB WELL 5-13/16 COPPER BULB WELL
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1379

JOHNSON CONTROLS LOW TEMPERATURE LIMIT CONTROL A11 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The A11 Series Low-Temperature Limit Controls incorporate a 20' (6 m), vapor-charged sensing element. The A11 Series reacts to the coldest 16" (40.6 cm) section of the control's sensing element. It is suitable for monitoring the trailing face of a coil for freeze protection. FEATURES Snap-acting contacts External temperature scale Easy set point adjustment Unaffected by ambient temperature at the control and 4' (1.2m) capillary
NEW!
A11A-1 R-134A vapor lled Sensor 0 to 140F (-18 to 60C) Operating Temperature Element 250F (121C) maximum 3"H x 5.4"W x 2.4"D Dimensions (7.6 x 13.7 x 6 cm) 1.75 lb (0.79 kg) Weight UL listed, File#SA516; CSA certied, Approvals File#LR948 1 year Warranty
APPLICATION Low temperature limit for coils and/or liquid pipes
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing Element Capillary Switch Action Switch Rating Pilot Duty Range (Cut Out) Setpoint Adjust Differential A11A A11B 20' (6 m) of 1/8" copper tube 4' (1.2 m) SPST, N.C. N.C. opens on decrease in temp 16A @ 120 VAC, 9.2A @ 208 VAC, 8A @ 240 VAC 125 VA @ 24-277 VAC 35 to 45F (2 to 7C) Slot screwdriver 12F (6.7C) manual reset 12F (6.7C) auto reset
WIRING
INSTALLATION
Top of Duct A11 Series
SPST - Normally closed opens on decrease in temperature
1 A11 Series
Mount sensing element horizontally for proper measurement. Typically mounted downstream of a coil with capillary exposed to all areas likely to encounter low temperatures
21
MODEL A11A-1 A11B-1 CC-1G-K ES1051 M-648K
DESCRIPTION Manual reset low-temperature limit control Auto reset low-temperature limit control RELATED PRODUCTS Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip Freeze spray, 8 fl oz Copper-clad capillary mounting clip PAGE 1391 1390 1391
1380
& CON
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES Automatic or manual reset models Long-life, snap-acting contacts Easy set point adjust One-year warranty M-648-K
Capillary Supports (order separately)

LOW & HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT CONTROLS A70 SERIES
The A70 Series heavy-duty temperature-limit controls incorporate a vapor charged sensing element. A70G, A70H, and A70K have a four-wire, two-circuit contact block that contains two isolated sets of contacts. The contacts are designed to transfer at set point so that when the main contact opens, the auxiliary contact closes simultaneously. Typical applications include shutdown of a ventilation system and BAS alarm indication upon low or high temperature.
A70HA-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Mount sensor horizontally for proper measurement.Typically SWITCH mounted downstream of a coil with capillary exposed to all TEMP ACTION BULB/ areas likely to encounter low or high temperatures as required.
MODEL
(Main contacts) LINE-M2 Open Low Open Low Open Low Open High
RANGE F (C)
RESET F (C)
CAPILLARY
MAX BULB TEMP F (C) 400 (260) 400 (260) 250 (121)
ELECTRICAL RATING RANGE ADJUSTER Screwdriver Slot Screwdriver Slot Screwdriver Slot MOTOR RATINGS (VAC) AC Full Load Amp LINE-M2 (Main) 120 16.0 208 9.2 9.2 240 8.0 8.0 277 7.2 LINE-M1 (Auxiliary) 120 6.0 6.0 208 3.3 6.0 240 3.0 6.0 277 6.0
A70GA-1* Low Limit A70HA-1* Low Limit A70HA-2 Low Limit A70KA-1 High Limit
20' of 1/8" Auto (6m of 0.32 cm) 15 to 55* (-10 to 13) 5 (2.8) OD tubing 15 to 55* Manual 20' of 1/8" (-10 to 13) Reset (6m of 0.32 cm) OD tubing 3/8" x 3" 35 to 80 Manual (0.95 x 7.6 cm) (1.7 to 27) Reset 6' (1.9m)cap
16.0 AC NonInductive Amp Pilot Duty
125 VA, 24-600 VAC 57.5 VA, 120-300 VDC
3/8" x 10" 240 Screwdriver 100 to 170 Manual UL Listed File #SA516 Approvals Slot (38 to 77) Reset (0.95 x 25.4 cm) (116) 6' (1.9m) cap *The low cut-out stop is set and sealed at 35F (1.6C). The control responds to the lowest temperature along any 1' (30.5 cm) section of the 20' (6m) element.
WIRING
Line Line
INSTALLATION
Control Circuit M2 M1
Auxiliary Contacts
M-648-K
Capillary Supports (order separately)
A70 Series
Low Limit - Action on temperature decrease High Limit - Action on temperature increase
Mount sensor horizontally for proper measurement.Typically mounted downstream of a coil with capillary exposed to all areas likely to encounter low or high temperatures as required.
MODEL A70GA-1 A70HA-1 A70HA-2 A70KA-1 CC-1G-K ES1051 M-648-K March 2014
Max Bulb Temp F (C)
21
DESCRIPTION Low-limit temperature control, automatic reset, 20' (6m) element Low-limit temperature control, manual reset, 20' (6m) element Low-limit temperature control, manual reset, 3" (7.6 cm) element, 6' (1.9m) capillary High-limit temperature control, manual reset, 10" (25.4 cm) element, 6' (1.9m) capillary RELATED PRODUCTS Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip Freeze spray, 8 fl oz Copper-clad capillary mounting clip PAGE 1391 1390 1391
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com Line 888-397-5353 USA Line
1381

LOW LIMIT TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS L480 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The L480 Series low limit controllers operate electric dampers, valves and compressor or fan motors to provide temperature or limit control of air conditioning systems and refrigeration units. The L480B has an SPDT switch and automatically resets; the L480G has an SPST switch that opens on a fall in temperature and requires manual reset. The L482A has two SPST switches and manual reset; the main switch opens, and the auxiliary switch closes, on a fall in temperature.
NEW!
L482A1004 L480B1239 APPLICATION Air handling unit coil freeze protection Freezer cabinets Display cases Beverage coolers Frost alarm for storehouses, orchards Operating Temperature L480B, G -20 to 125F (-11 to 52C) L482A 20 to 140F (-7 to 60C) Maximum Element Temperature L480B, G 225F (107C) L482A 250F (121C) Dimensions L480B, G 3.3"H x 3.7"W x 2.3"D (8.4 x 9.4 x 5.9 cm) L482A 4.7"H x 3.9"W x 2.1"D (11.9 x 10.1 x 5.3 cm) Weight L480B 1.5 lb (0.68 kg) L480G 1.6 lb (0.73 kg) L482A 2.3 lb (1.04 kg) Approvals UL Listed File #E49725, Vol. No. 2, dated 02-09-66; Guide No. SDFY2 CSA Certied Listing G, File No. LR1620; Guide No. 400-E-0 Warranty 1 year
FEATURES Dual temperature scale plate provides both Fahrenheit and Celsius readings No sensing bulb, the controller operates at the coldest point (1 foot section) of the 20 ft. element for complete coverage Dustproof and moisture proof enclosed switch for trouble-free operation Horizontal or vertical mounting for installation exibility
SPECIFICATIONS
Sensing Element Switch action L480B L480G L482A Switch Ratings Conduit Connection Setpoint Range L480B, G L482A Setpoint Adjustment Differential L480B, G L482A 20' (6m) element, 1/8" dia., no bulb, controller operates at coldest point SPDT, automatic reset, makes R-B, breaks R-W on temperature fall SPST, manual reset, breaks circuit on temperature fall 2 SPST, manual reset, main switch (M2) opens, aux. switch (M1) closes on temperature fall See Table 1 and Table 2 7/8" (22mm) hole for 1/2" conduit with 1-3/32" (28mm) knockout ring for 3/4" conduit 20 to 60F (-5 to 15C) 15 to 55F (-9.4 to 13C), with setpoint stops minimum 34F Slotted screwdriver Non-adjustable, additive, xed at 10F (6C) Non-adjustable, additive, xed at 5F (3C)
21
1382
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
L1 (HOT) L2
R

LOW LIMIT TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS L480 SERIES
LINE 2
LINE 1
Alarm Load
L1 (HOT)
M2
Load
M1
L2
L1 (HOT) L2
TO BAS INPUT OR ALARM DEVISE
Load
L480B
TABLE 1: AMPERE RATINGS L480B, G
L480G
L482A
120 VAC Full Load Locked Rotor 10.2 61.2 DC Rating: 0.2A @ 120 VDC, 0.1 A @ 240 VDC Pilot Duty: 125 VA
240 VAC 6.5 39.0
TABLE 2: AMPERE RATINGS L482A

120 VAC Full Load Locked Rotor Non-inductive Full Load Locked Rotor Non-inductive 208 VAC Switch M2 (Main) 16.0 96.0 16.0 9.2 55.2 9.2 Switch M1 (Auxillary) 6.0 36.0 6.0 3.3 19.8 6.0 3.0 18.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 48.0 8.0 7.2 240 VAC 277 VAC
Pilot Duty (both poles): 125 VA @ 24 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA @ 120 to 300 VDC
MODEL L480B1239 L480G1044 L482A1004 CC-1G-K ES1051 M-648-K DESCRIPTION Auto reset, SPDT, 20 ft Manual reset, SPST, 20 ft Manual reset, 2 SPST, 20 ft RELATED PRODUCTS Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip Freeze spray, 8 fl oz Copper-clad capillary mounting clip PAGE 1391 1390 1391
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1383

LOW-LIMIT TEMPERATURE CONTROL TSA, TF142
DESCRIPTION Models TSA and TF142 provide low-limit temperature control in operating dampers, valves, compressors, or fan motors in HVAC systems. Manual and automatic reset models are available with SPDT or DPDT switching action. Models TSA and TF142 respond to the lowest temperature sensed along any 1' (0.3m) section of the capillary element. FEATURES SPDT and DPDT models Manual and automatic reset models Easy set point adjustment Manual test lever One year warranty
NEW!
TF142 TSA
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Reset Setpoint Range Differential Switch Type Contact Rating Sensing Element Operating Temperature TSA-DOP TSA-COP TF142-SODP20/SODP06 TF142-SOAP20/SOAP06 Manual Automatic Manual Automatic 35 to 68F (2 to 20C) 34 to 70F (1 to 21C) 4.5F (2.5C) xed 4.5F (2.5C) xed SPDT, snap acting DPDT, snap acting Inductive 24 FLA, 144 LRA @ 120-240 VAC 2 hp @ 120 Inductive 14 FLA, 84 LRA @ 120 VAC; 12 FLA, 72 LRA @ 240 VAC 3/4 VAC; 3 hp @ 240 VAC Pilot duty 720 VA max @ 120-600 hp @ 120 VAC; 2 hp @ 240 VAC Pilot duty 720 VA max @ 120-600 VAC 144 VA max @ 24 VAC VAC 144 VA max @ 24 VAC Vapor-lled copper capillary, tin-plated 5/64 (0.2 cm) x 20 (609.6 cm), or 6 (182.9 cm) TF Models 3/32 (0.2cm) -60 to 160F (-51 to 71C) Sensing Element -60 to 160F (-51 to 71C) Sensing Element 300F (149C) max 300F (149C) max 2.94H x 3.34W x 1.56D (7.47 x 8.48 x 3.56 cm) 3.63H x 5.5W x 2.63D (9.21 x 13.97 x 6.67 cm) 1 lb (0.45 kg) 2.8 lb (1.3 kg) UL and ULC listed, CE, File # E85974, E300881 1 year M-648-K capillary mounting clip Mounting clips supplied with each control (order separately)
Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty Accessories
WIRING
2 4 22 24 12 14
INSTALLATION
Low Limit Capillary Duct
21
11
Switch action on decrease in temperature (Contact 1 to 4 Opens; Contact 1 to 2 Closes)
TSA
TF142
Switch action on decrease in temperature (Contacts 11-14 and 21-24 Open; Contacts 11-12 and 21-22 Close)
Install capillary element in a horizontal serpentine pattern across the duct on the downstream side of the coil so it is exposed to areas where low temperatures will occur. Do not kink or apply excessive force to the capillary element.
21
MODEL TSA-DOP TSA-COP TF142-SODP20 TF142-SODP06 TF142-SOAP20 TF142-SOAP06 CC-1G-K ES1051 M-648-K DESCRIPTION Low-limit temperature control, SPDT, manual reset Low-limit temperature control, SPDT, automatic reset Low-limit temperature control, DPDT, manual reset Low-limit temperature control, DPDT, manual reset, 6 ft cap Low-limit temperature control, DPDT, automatic reset Low-limit temperature control, DPDT, automatic reset, 6 ft cap RELATED PRODUCTS Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip Freeze spray, 8 fl oz Copper-clad capillary mounting clip PAGE 1391 1390 1391 March 2014
1384
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION

DUCT HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT TC-105, TC-100
Models TC-105 and TC-100 feature a helix bimetal element that senses rapid increases in duct temperature, such as in a re, and operate an SPST switch that opens with a rise in temperature. A manual reset button will reactivate the TC-105 and TC-100 after the high-temperature condition has cleared.
SPECIFICATIONS
Contacts Electrical Capacity
Element Length Manual Reset Button Setpoint Range
Differential Weight TC100 TC105 Approvals Warranty
SPST N.C. mechanical latching 9.8 full load amps @ 115 VAC 4.9 full load amps @ 230 VAC 5 (12.7 cm) or 11 (27.9 cm) External access 100 to 250F (38 to 122C) eld adjustable, factory set @125F (51.6C) 25F (13.8C) xed 1 lb (0.48 kg) 0.75 lb (0.36 kg) UL listed, File #MH7076 1 year
TC-105-1A-3C FEATURES Low-cost duct high-temperature limit control Adjustable set point Manual reset UL listed
WIRING
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
25 0
1.9 (4.83) 0.95 (2.42) 0.23 (0.58) Mounting hole 4.0 (10.16) 0.75 (1.91) Duct cut-out hole 2.19 (5.56)
Factory Set @ 125F
200
150
10 0
3.16 (8.03)
N.C. Contact Screw Terminals (opens on temp rise)
0.42 (1.07) 0.5 (1.27) 0.5 (1.27) Knockout Knockout 2.75 (6.99)
21
MODEL TC-100-1A-3C TC-105-1A-3C DESCRIPTION Duct high-temperature limit with 11" (27.9 cm) element and adjustable setpoint Duct high-temperature limit with 5" (12.7 cm) element and adjustable setpoint
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1385

NEMA 4X INDUSTRIAL CONTROL THERMOSTATS TF115, TH109, AND TRF115 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Pecos TF115-023, TH109-009, TRF115-005, and TRF115007 industrial control thermostats offer reliable control in industrial, agricultural, and commercial applications. The TH109-009 has 40-100F range with a molded plastic enclosure and stainless steel hardware. The TF115-023 has a low mass, high surface area stainless steel coiled sensor which provides rapid temperature response. Both the TRF115-005 and TRF115-007 both have remote bulbs with capillary tubes. All of these thermostats come with SPDT switches and are NEMA 4X, UL listed, and are suitable for use under NEC article 547.
NEW!
TH109-009 TF115 TRF115-005
Enclosure Rating NEMA 4X NEMA 4X NEMA 4X NEMA 4X NEMA 4X Warranty 2 Years 3 Years 4 Years 5 Years 6 Years Dimensions 3.1"W x 6.5"H x 2.5"D (7.9 x 16.5 x 6.4 cm) 3.1"W x 6.5"H x 2.5"D (7.9 x 16.5 x 6.4 cm) 3.1"W x 6.5"H x 2.5"D (7.9 x 16.5 x 6.4 cm) 3.1"W x 6.5"H x 2.5"D (7.9 x 16.5 x 6.4 cm) 3.5"W x 7.3"H x 4.9"D (8.9 x 18.5 x 12.4 cm) Weight, Standard 2.1 lb (.49 kg) 2.1 lb (0.49 kg) 2.1 lb (0.49 kg) 2.1 lb (0.49 kg) 2.1 lb (0.49 kg) Approvals UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA
FEATURES
Good for both heating and cooling Rugged, weather resistant NEMA 4X enclosure Tolerates moist conditions One SPDT switch on T115 models Two SPDT switches on TH109 models
RATINGS
Voltage Rating 120 VAC 208 VAC 240 VAC 277 VAC FLA 16.0 VA 13.2 VA 12.0 VA 10.0 VA LR 80.0 A 66.0 A 60.0 A 50.0 A Non-Inductive 25.0 A 25.0 A 25.0 A 22.0 A Pilot Duty 125 VA 125 VA 125 VA 125 VA
ORDERING INFORMATION AND SPECIFICATIONS

Model Number TF115-001 TF115-023 TRF115-005 TRF115-007 Temperature Differential Range 40 to 110F (4 to 43C) -30 to 100F (-34 to 38C) 0 to 120F (-17 to 49C) -30 to 100F (-34 to 38C) 40 to 100F (4 to 38C) Fixed 3F (-16C) Fixed 6F (-14C) Fixed 3F (-16C) Fixed 6F (-14C) 3F (-16C)/ Stage Switch Action Single pole/Double throw (SPDT) Single pole/Double throw (SPDT) Single pole/Double throw (SPDT) Single pole/Double throw (SPDT) Bulb Coiled AirStainless Steel Coiled AirStainless Steel 5 foot Stainless Remote 8 foot Copper Remote
21
TH109-009
2-Single pole/Double Coiled Airthrow (SPDT) Stainless Steel
1386
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING

NEMA 4X INDUSTRIAL CONTROL THERMOSTATS TF115, TH109, AND TRF115 SERIES
Wiring Connections
TF115-001 TF115-023 TRF115-005 TRF115-007
Two Speed Cooling

L1 BROWN CAN BE TIED TO A LOUVER OR CURTAIN CONTROL
BLACK
TEMP RISE
L2 OR NEUTRAL VIOLET PINK HIGH COOL RED BLUE LOW COOL
TH109-009
Double pole, double throw contacts operate sequentially with 3F (1.7C) nominal separation on temperature rise or fall.
Two Speed Heating

L1
BROWN
BLACK
TEMP RISE
L2 OR NEUTRAL
VIOLET RED BLUE PINK HIGH HE AT LOW HEAT
Two Stage Cooling

L1 BROWN L1 BLACK
Two Stage Heating

L1 BROWN
L2 OR NEUTRAL
Auto Changeover Control

1 Heat/1 Cool with 3F dead band
L1 BROWN L1 BLACK L2 OR NEUTRAL
L1 BLACK
TEMP RISE
TEMP RISE
L2 OR NEUTRAL
TEMP RISE
VIOLET PINK RED
PINK BLUE RED
VIOLET
PINK BLUE RED
VIOLET
BLUE
SECOND STAGE COOL
FIRST STAGE HEAT
COOLING LOAD
FIRST STAGE COOL
SECOND STAGE HEAT
HEATING LOAD
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1387

NEMA 4X RATED THERMOSTATS T631F/G, TW155/255 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The T631F/G Series and the TW155/255 Series thermostats have NEMA 4X enclosure ratings and provide line voltage control of heating, cooling and ventilation systems in areas that are subject to washdown such as barns, poultry and hog houses, pump buildings and crop storage areas.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range Differential F Model Setpoint F (C) (C) 40 to 110 TW155 External FIXED (4 to 43) 40 to 110 TW255 External FIXED (4 to 43) 35 to 100 FIXED 2 (1.1) T631F1068 Internal (2 to 38) 35 to 100 FIXED 2 (1.1) T631F1084 External (2 to 38) 35 to 100 FIXED 3.5 (1.9) T631F1092 External (2 to 38) 35 to 100 FIXED 2 (1.1) T631G1059 External (2 to 38) Interstage 0 to 7 (0 to 4) Ouput 1 SPDT DPDT 1 SPDT 1 SPDT 1 SPDT (1 HP) 2 SPDT (1 HP)
NEW!
T631F TW155
Dimensions in (cm) TW155/255 6.87"H x 3.125"W x 3.375"D (Not including knob) (17.4 x 7.9 x 8.6 cm) T631F/G 5"H x 6.5"W x 3"D (12.7 x 16.5 x 7.6 cm) Approvals TW155/255 ETL Canada/USA UL listed File No. E4436 Vol. 1 Sec T631F/G UL Guide XAPX; CSA Certied File No. LR1620 Guide No. 400-E-O; Meets NEC Article 547-4 Maximum Operating Temperature 110F (43C) TW155/255 145F (63C) T631F/G
T631G
R B W
Contact Rating (A) 120 240 277 24 VAC VAC VAC VAC 22 FLA 22 FLA 22 FLA (3/4 HP) (1.5HP) (1.5HP) 22 FLA 22 FLA 22 FLA (3/4 HP) (1.5 HP) (1.5HP) 7.4 FLA 3.7 FLA 3 FLA 2 FLA 44 LRA 22 LRA 18 LRA 7.4 FLA 3.7 FLA 3 FLA 2 FLA 44 LRA 22 LRA 18 LRA 16 FLA 8 FLA 96 LRA 48 LRA 16 FLA 8 FLA 96 LRA 48 LRA
WIRING
T631F
2
Fan Switch Cooling or Ventilating Load Speed Change Switch Heating Equipment
Add Jumper Wire

R B W
Power Supply
1 1 2
L1 (HOT) L2
Power Supply
Heating System Provide Disconnect Means And Overload Protection As Required. Switch Makes R To B On Temperature Fall.
L1 (HOT) L2
Provide Disconnect Means And Overload Protection As Required.
T631F Hookup For Heating Control
T631G Hookup For Heating And Cooling (Or Ventilating) Control.
TW155 Heating L1 Black L2 Blue Red
TW255 Heating L1 Black L2 Black
TW155 Cooling L1 Black L2
TW255 Cooling L2 L1 Black Black
Blue Red Red Blue
Red Blue
Red Blue
21
Load
Switch makes black to red on temperature fall.
Load
Switch makes black to red on temperature fall.
Load
Switch makes black to blue on temperature rise.
Load
Switch makes black to blue on temperature rise.
MODEL TW155 TW255 T631F1068 T631F1084 T631F1092 T631G1059 DESCRIPTION SPDT, NEMA 4 Thermostat, external setpoint, 120 to 277 VAC rating DPDT, NEMA 4 Thermostat, external setpoint, 120 to 277 VAC rating SPDT, NEMA 4 Thermostat, internal setpoint, 24 to 240 VAC rating SPDT, NEMA 4 Thermostat, external setpoint, 24 to 240 VAC rating SPDT, NEMA 4 Thermostat, external setpoint, 120 to 240 VAC rating SPDT (2), NEMA 4 Thermostat, external setpoint, 120 to 240 VAC rating
1388
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES High and low voltage Thumbwheel set point UL listing Plates with set point or blank cover Fits standard single-gang switch box

TWO POSITION ROOM THERMOSTATS TC-1100 SERIES
The TC-1100 Series two-position, single-pole double-throw room thermostat is for single-stage heating or single-stage cooling. The TC-1100 Series comes in three setpoint spans to cover most any application: 55 to 85F, 45 to 75F, and 75 to 105F. The TC-1100 Series comes standard with thermometer and set point as shown. It is also packaged with cover plates for set point only or for blank cover.
TC-1101
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Contacts Cooling Heating Pilot Duty Control Type Sensor Range Limits 24-240 VAC SPDT 3.0A @ 24/120V, 1.5A @ 240V SPDT 4.4A @ 24/120V, 2.2A @ 240V 40 VA @ 24V, 210 VA @ 120/240V Two-position, on/off Bimetal snap acting Dial stop pins Differential Connections Mounting Dimensions Weight Approvals Warranty 2F (1C) 6.0" (15.24 cm) leads, 14 AWG Vertical, 2" x 4" (5.1 x 10.2 cm) switch box 4.38"H x 2.86"W x 1.63"D (11.13 x 7.26 x 4.14 cm) 0.8 lb (0.36 kg) UL File #XAPX.E9429 2 years
WIRING
Orange-Brown makes on temperature drop

Red Brown
L1 Orange
Temp Drop
TC-1100 Series
MODEL TC-1101 TC-1102 TC-1103 TC-1101-116 DESCRIPTION Two-position SPDT H/C thermostat, setpoint 55 to 85F Two-position SPDT H/C thermostat, setpoint 45 to 75F Two-position SPDT H/C thermostat, setpoint 75 to 105F Two-position SPDT H/C thermostat, setpoint 13 to 29C
21
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1389

THERMOSTAT TOOLS AND CHANGE-OVER THERMOSTAT ZS002, KT-1, JC5309, ES-1051, 680243-6
DESCRIPTION Model ZS002 is a handheld thermostat substitution tool and an air conditioning system testing tool for up to two stages of heating and cooling in conventional or heat pump systems.
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Connections Red Blue White Gray Yellow Violet Orange Green Enclosure 24 VAC from the air conditioning system Eight 30" leads, 18 AWG, with alligator clips R - Power C - Common W1 Heat 1 W2 Heat 2 Y1 Cool 1 Y2 Cool 2 O/B Heat pump reversing valve G Fan control 5" x 8" plastic with hook (for hanging) and magnetic holding strip Mode Three modes, continuity/analyze/activate LED Indication 19 LEDs, Power/Mode/Control Switching Capability Six 2-position controls and one 3-position mode switch
NEW!
ZS002
MODEL ZS002 DESCRIPTION Air conditioning system testing tool
DESCRIPTION Thermostat Screwdrivers allow removal of sensor and thermostat covers for service.
MODEL KT1 JC-5309
DESCRIPTION Mounting screwdriver 1/16" allen key Flexible 1/16" Allen key pocket screwdriver
KT-1
JC5309
DESCRIPTION Freeze Spray is for testing sensors and thermostats. Cool down the elements to test thermostat operation or point-topoint wiring verication. This non-corrosive and contaminantfree aerosol has no CFCs and saves checkout time.
Ingredients: Chemical Name CAS# Wt.% Range Tetrauoroethane 811-97-2 94.0-99.0% Methanol 67-56-1 0.1-1.5
MODEL ES1051 DESCRIPTION Freeze spray, 8 oz ES-1051
21
DESCRIPTION Model 680243-6 changeover switch is snap-acting SPDT and made to strap onto water pipes. It is used for heating/cooling changeover inputs to room thermostats. It has a xed setpoint of 85F and a 20F lowside differential (off at 65F). The maximum uid temperature is 220F and maximum ambient is 125F.
MODEL 680243-6 DESCRIPTION Pipe-mounted thermostat change-over switch with conduit tting
Circuit Made White- Blue 680243-6 White-Black
Switch Makes (Cold) Below 60F (Hot) Above 88F March 2014
1390
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
NEW!
DESCRIPTION TE6001-1 Duct temperature element holder with box APB-28 Adjustable pipe bracket 2"-8" diameter

THERMOSTAT REMOTE SENSOR ACCESSORIES 356-90K, APB-28, CC-1G, M645K, M-2500, PN-46, TE6001
DESCRIPTION Wall adaptor plates (goof plates) offer concealment of plaster irregularities, and are ideal to cover up old thermostat mounting holes or paint ridges. Foam backing pads offer wall insulation for better temperature readings. Switch plate displays offer readouts for temperature at every light switch. 10-531 White adapter plate 7" x 5.25" (KTR, KHR) Hole Dimensions: 2" x 1.5"
Models TE6001, CG-1G, M645K, 356-90K, M-2500, APB-28, and PN-46 are all sensor mounting brackets for averaging, duct, and outside air probe applications. They have a 1/4" clip or guide to rmly hold a temperature sensor for the application.
TE6001-8 Duct temperature element holder without box
50002883-001 White wall plate 6" x 8.3" (TH5000, TH6000) Hole Dimensions: 2.25" x 2"
M-648K Copper-clad capillary and sensor holder mounting clip
65345 White wall plate 4" x 4" (PECO) Hole Diameter: 1.5"
CC-1G-K Plastic capillary and sensor holder mounting clip
BA/ADP-525-7-WMW Warm white adaptor plate 7" x 5.25" BA/ADP-525-7-OFW Off white adaptor plate 7" x 5.25" BA/ADP-525-7-CPW Copla white adaptor plate 7" x 5.25" BA/FOAMBACK White foam back insulator, 4.4" x 2.6" BA/FOAMBACK-GREY Grey foam back insulator, 4.4" x 2.6" Hole Diameter: 1.65"
21
PN-46 Aluminum sensor holder with adhesive backing
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1391

THERMOSTAT GUARDS ATK, BA, TG, TG500 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The TG, ATK and BAPI-Guard Thermostat Guards are used to enclose and protect wall thermostats and sensors against tampering, damage, and unauthorized adjustment of thermostat settings. FEATURES TG500 Series Vented Guards Patented, double-wall construction Available in various sizes Opaque plastic, clear plastic or painted steel Includes ring base, cover, lock and two keys BAPI-Guard Series Vented Guards Clear low prole design All mounting and hardware included Key lock for vertical or horizontal mounting Two sizes to t most applications Hammer tough ATK Series Available in wire and cast aluminum Vertical and horizontal mounting TG Series Vented Guards One piece U.V. stabilized high impact molded polycarbonate housing Ring base is 16 gauge steel with white nish and four mounting holes Stainless steel fastners secure housing to base Ventilation holes allow air to circulate freely
NEW!
BAPI-GUARD TG510A TG-1 ATK03 ATK04
Outside Dimensions Height Width Depth in (cm) in (cm) in (cm) 5.88 (14.94) 5.88 (14.94) 2.5 (6.35) 5.88 (14.94) 5.88 (14.94) 2.5 (6.35) 6.75 (17) 4.75 (12) 2.1 (5.4) 6.5 (16.51) 6.5 (16.51) 5.375 (13.7) 5.375 (13.7) 5.875 (14.9) 7.25 (18.42) 7.25 (18.42) 9.45 (24) 7.5 (19.05) 7.5 (19.05) 7.75 (19.7) 7.75 (19.7) 8.5 (21.6) 9.75 (24.77) 9.75 (24.77) 9.45 (24) 2.94 (7.47) 2.94 (7.47) 4.25 (10.8) 4.25 (10.8) 4.125 (10.5) 3.38 (8.59) 3.0 (7.6)
Model TG510A1001 TG510D1005 BA/BG2 ATK03 ATK04 F229-0225 TG511A1000 TG511D1004 F29-0227 TG-1 TG-2 TG-37 TG512A1009 TG512D1003 BA/BG ATK63 F29-0231 F29-0413 F29-0198 F29-0220 F29-0222 F29-0192 F29-0193 Solid Ring Wall Size Cover Base Plate Small Clear Clear Opaque Painted Steel (off-white) Opaque Clear Clear Wire Cast Aluminum Clear Medium Clear Clear Opaque Painted Steel (off-white) Opaque Clear Large Pearlescent White Clear White Prismatic White Clear Clear Opaque Painted Steel (off-white) Opaque Clear Clear Wire Clear Inside Dimensions Height Width Depth in (cm) in (cm) in (cm) 4.38 (11.13) 4.38 (11.13) 2.25 (5.72) 4.38 (11.13) 4.38 (11.13) 2.25 (5.72) 4.8 (12.3) 2.9 (7.4) 1.43 (3.65) 4.25 (10.80) 2.63 (6.66) 1.63 (4.12) 4.25 (10.80) 2.75 (6.98) 1.63 (4.12) 3.88 (9.86) 3.5 (8.89) 2.5 (6.35) 5.06 (12.85) 6.06 (15.39) 2.63 (6.68) 5.06 (12.85) 6.06 (15.39) 2.63 (6.68) 5.25 (13.34) 4.63 (11.76) 3.25 (8.26) 2.8 (7.1) 5.0 (12.7) 3.1 (7.9) 2.8 (7.1) 5.0 (12.7) 3.1 (7.9) 3.0 (7.6) 5.5 (14.0) 3.1 (7.9) 5.88 (14.94) 8.38 (21.29) 3.0 (7.62) 5.88 (14.94) 8.38 (21.29) 3.0 (7.62) 6.9 (17.5) 4.7 (11.8) 1.75 (4.43) 6.50 (16.51) 6.38 (16.21) 3.0 (7.62) 7.06 (17.93) 4.13 (10.49) 2.25 (5.72) 6.36 (16.15) 3.5 (8.89) 3.25 (8.26) 8.13 (20.65) 4.63 (11.76) 3.63 (9.22) 7.13 (18.11) 4.63 (11.76) 3.25 (8.26) 6.63 (16.84) 4.50 (11.43) 338 (8.58) 6.25 (15.88) 4.75 (12.07) 3.0 (7.62) 6.0 (15.24) 3.82 (9.7) 3.13 (7.95
21
Painted Steel (beige) Mounted Hinged Hinged
1392
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
HUMIDITY
Kele Provides Handheld Solutions for Verifying Your Installation Accuracy.
CVC | p. 1394
HM40A1AB | p. 1398
AMI300 Series | p. 1413

MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Data Loggers EL-USB Series Data Logger Lascar Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1395 Hand Held Devices TK100 Series Digital Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1396 TM99A Digital Handheld Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397 DT-1K Digital Temperature Probe.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397 HM40A1AB Vaisala RH / Temperature Meter.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398 BR200 Extech Video Borescope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1398 42540 Extech Handheld Infrared Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399 60101-0201 Infrared camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399 7001 Amphenol Advance Systems Handheld CO2 / Temperature Meter. . 1400 BLD7800 Amphenol Advance Systems Handheld Digital Hygrometer. . . .1400 AQ100, AQ200 Series Environmental IAQ Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1401 BTU1100 Series Combustion Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1402 PCA3 Series Hand-Held Combustion Analyzer Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403 CO10 Extech Carbon Monoxide Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405 HD400 Extech Light Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405 SL100, SL200 Series Portable Solarimeters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406 HD100 Series Thermo-hygrometers .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407 LV100, VT100, VT200 Series Thermo-Anemometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1408 CT100 Series Hand-Held Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409 MP100, MP200 Series Differential Pressure Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1410 475-FM Series Dwyer Handheld Digital Manometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411 490 Series Dwyer Wet/Wet Handheld Digital Manometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1412 AMI300 Series Multifunctional IAQ Analyzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413 Magenepull XP1000 SERIES Cable Retrieval System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1414 Signal Generators ASG Kele Handheld Portable Analog Signal Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393 CVC Kele Handheld Portable Digital Display Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . 1394
ASG | p. 1393
DT-1K | p. 1397
PCA3 Series| p. 1403
kele.com
NEW!

KELE HANDHELD PORTABLE ANALOG SIGNAL GENERATOR ASG
The Kele ASG is a handheld, battery- or plug-in power supply powered, pocket size analog signal generator. It generates a 0-10 VDC signal in increments of 1 volt or a 0-20 mA signal in increments of 2 mA. LED bar graph visually indicates analog signal level. The ASG can also continuously ramp to userdened minimum or maximum values with user-dened ramptime settings.
Powered by 9V battery or plug-in power supply Pocket size with carrying case Bar graph LED for signal display 0-20 mA (2 mA increments) 0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments) Ramp function to minimum and maximum values Variable ramp function timing Low battery indication User-dened auto shutoff times for battery conservation Separate milliamp and voltage output jacks 6' (1.83m) leads with alligator clips Perfect for loop-powered circuits and externally powered circuits
ASG with accessories
APPLICATION
Troubleshooting transmitters, transducers, and actuators Calibrating transducers, digital displays, and other analog signal devices
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 9V battery or 120 VAC plug-in power supply 30 hours
DIMENSIONS
Battery Life Output Impedance Voltage 1000 minimum Current 300 maximum 0-20 mA (2 mA increments) Output 0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments) Accuracy at 72F Current 0.5% FS or 0.1 mA 0.5% FS or 0.05 VDC Voltage Auto Shutoff Times 2-20 minute (2-minute increments) Ramping Time Intervals 2-20 second (2-second increments) Resolution Current 2 mA Voltage 1 VDC Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Accessories included 6' (1.83m) wire leads, carrying case Approvals RoHS Weight 0.66 lb (0.29 kg) with accessories Warranty 1 year
2.4 (6.1)
0.85 (2.2)
in (cm)
ASG Programming buttons External power mA source output mA two-wire transmitter output Voltage output
4.7 (11.9)
22
MODEL ASG ASG-CABLE DESCRIPTION mA/VDC handheld portable analog signal generator with accessories Replacement cable for ASG/CVC
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1393

DESCRIPTION
The Kele CVC is a handheld, battery or plug-in power supply powered, pocket size digital signal generator. It generates a 0-10 VDC signal in increments of 1 volt or a 0-20 mA signal in increments of 1 mA. A digital display visually indicates analog signal level. The CVC can also continuously ramp to user-dened minimum or maximum values with user-dened ramp-time settings.
KELE HANDHELD PORTABLE DIGITAL DISPLAY SIGNAL GENERATOR CVC
NEW!
CVC with accessories
FEATURES
Pocket size with carrying case Digital signal display 0-20 mA (2 mA increments) 0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments) Ramp function to minimum and maximum values Variable ramp function timing Low battery indication User-dened auto shutoff times for battery conservation Separate milliamp and voltage output jacks Perfect for loop-powered circuits and externally powered circuits
APPLICATION
Troubleshooting transmitters, transducers, and actuators Calibrating transducers, digital displays, and other Outline Text - have to go to client original image to get live text analog signal devices
for alterations
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 9V battery or 120 VAC plug-in power supply 30 hours
22
Battery Life Outpuy Impedance Voltage 1000 minimum Current 300 maximum Output 0-20 mA (1 mA increments) 0-10 VDC (1 VDC increments) Accuracy at 72F Current 0.5% FS 0.1 mA 0.05 VDC Voltage 0.5% FS or 0.05 VDC Ramping Time Intervals 2-20 second (1-second increments) Resolution Current 1 mA Voltage 1 VDC Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Display 0.5" (1.3 cm) blue backlit LCD Low Battery Alerts below 7 VDC 1-20 minute (1-minute increments) Auto Shutoff Times Additional Specications 6' (1.83m) wire leads, carrying case RoHS Approvals Weight 0.92 lb (0.42 kg) with accessories Warranty 1 year
DIMENSIONS
Front View Top View
1.4 (3.6)
in (cm)
Display backlight switch

5.5 (14.0)
2.5 (6.4)
All connection jacks on top of unit
Programming Buttons
Battery (9V) compartment in back
MODEL CVC ASG-CABLE DESCRIPTION mA/VDC handheld portable digital display signal generator with accessories Replacement cable for ASG/CVC
1394
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION

LASCAR DATA LOGGER EL-USB SERIES DATA LOGGER
The Lascar USB Data Loggers measure and record a variety of parameters such as temperature, humidity, voltage, current and carbon monoxide. Simply insert any of these loggers into your computer's USB port, name it, choose your required samplinge rate and set high and low alarms. Logged data is displayed using Lascar's FREE conguration and analysis software.
FEATURES
Compatible with Windows 2000, XP Vista 32-bit and Windows 7 64-bit Assign unique logger identity Set sample rate and alarm thresholds Choose delayed start time if required Download data in .txt format to be viewed as graph or exported to standard spreadsheet
APPLICATION
Food and pharmaceutical storage Temperature-controlled haulage Refrigerator or freezer monitoring HVAC monitoring Factory oors and warehousing Laboratory conditions Pressure monitoring EL Series Flow monitoring Level monitoring Power usage Gas detection pH level monitoring
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage EL-USB-RT Battery Life LED Indication 3.6 Volt lithium battery (except EL-USBRT) USB connection only 1 year (depending on sample rate, ambient temperature, and alarm LED use) Blinking for operation verication Dimensions 1 2, 3, 4 2-LCD, CO RT Weight Approvals 1.02" dia. x 3.86" (2.59 x 9.8 cm) 1.04" dia. x 4.06" (2.64 x 10.31 cm) 0.90" dia. x 4.90" (2.28 x 12.45 cm) 0.40" dia. x 3.03" (1.04 x 7.7 cm) 0.22 lb (0.1 kg) RoHS
Warranty
1 year
Model EL-USB-1 EL-USB-2 EL-USB-2-LCD EL-USB-RT EL-USB-3 EL-USB-4 EL-USB-CO BAT 3V6 1/2AA Type Temperature Temperature & humidity Temperature & humidity, 2-1/2 digit LCD display Real-time temperature and humidity Voltage input Current input Carbon monoxide Measurement Range -31 to 176F (-35 to 80C) -31 to 176F (-35 to 80C) 0 to 100% RH -31 to 176F (-35 to 80C) 0 to 100% RH -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C) 0 to 100% RH 0 to 30 VDC 4 to 20 mA 0 to 1000 ppm Reading Capacity 16,000 Samples 16,000 Samples/ channel 16,000 Samples/ channel 7 Days 32,000 Samples 32,000 Samples 32,000 Samples Sample Intervals 10 seconds to 12 hours 10 seconds to 12 hours 10 seconds to 12 hours 1 second only 1 second to 12 hours 1 second to 12 hours 10 seconds to 5 minutes Additional Features NEMA 4X, IP67 cap installed NEMA 4X, IP67 cap installed LCD status, latest log, no download required Email, sound and LED alarm, 7 days of data on HD Alligator clip leads Alligator clip leads Audible alarm in cap
22
RELATED PRODUCTS 3.6 Volt lithium battery
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1395

DIGITAL THERMOMETER TK100 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The E Instruments TK100 Digitial Thermometer is a single-channel, hand-held digital thermometer with large 2-line display. The TK102 has dual channels for measuring differential temperature. A variety of probes are available for
different temperature measurement applications. FEATURES

Selection of units for F or C display Hold function minimum and maximum values Adjustable automatic shut-off to save battery life Adjustable display for easy reading in varying light conditions Adjustable alarms for instant notication of extremes Delta T (TK102) for easy differential measurement
NEW!
TK100 Shown with Probe (sold seperately) Resolution 0.1F Operating Temperature 0 to122F (-18 to 50C) Storage Temperature -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) Cable Type Retractable, 18" to 95" (46 to 241 cm) Housing Type Shock-proof ABS, IP54 standard Keypad 5 metal-coated keys Dimensions Housing 5.8"H x 2.8"W x 1.4"D (14.8 x 7.1 x 3.5 cm) Case 18"H x 8.5"W x 3"D (46 x 22 x 7.6 cm) Language English, French Approvals CE Weight 1.1 lb (0.5 kg) Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Battery Life Measuring Element Accuracy Type K Type J Type T Auto Shutoff Times Display Measurement Range Type K Type J Type T 9V alkaline 6LR61 battery included 9 hours approximately Thermocouple type K, J or T class 1 Max either 1.1F or 0.4% of reading Max either 0.8F or 0.4% of reading Max either 0.5F or 0.4% of reading Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes 2 line LCD, 1.4"H x 2"W (3.5 x 5.0 cm) Units F or C -328 to 2372F (-200 to 1300C) -158 to 1382F (-105 to 750C) -328 to 752F (-200 to 400C)
22
MODEL TK100 TK102 FK-PFA-05-MM SKA150 SKC150 SKG150 SKV150 SKP150 DESCRIPTION Digital thermometer, 1-channel (Probe sold seperately) Digital thermometer, 2-channel (Probe sold seperately) Thermocouple K Wire Probe .5M Thermocouple K Ambient Probe with Handle Thermocouple K contact probe Thermocouple K general use probe 150mm Thermocouple K velcro pipe probe 1.5m cable Thermocouple K pricking probe
1396
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Fahrenheit/Centigrade switch selectable Large, illuminated LCD display Certied calibration Membrane keypad operation

DIGITAL HANDHELD THERMOMETER TM99A
This economical, all-purpose solid-state thermometer is perfect for eld/factory use in a variety of applications in which a fast response is required.
TM99A
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Battery Life Accuracy Display Units Probe Range Resolution Operating Humidity
(2) 1.5 V Alkaline AAA Battery included 1800 hours 0.3F (0.20C) or 0.5% of reading Four digits, one decimal point, F or C 10K thermistor, detachable (#1075) -40 to 302F (-40 to 151C) 0.1F or C Maximum 90% Non-condensing
Operating Temperature 0 to 130F max (-18 to 54F) Display Backlit 0.5" LCD Dimensions 7.5"H x 4.0"W x 2.5"D (19.05 x 10.16 x 6.35 cm) closed case 5 minutes Auto Shutoff Times CE, RoHS, Certicate of Calibration Approvals 0.63 lb (0.29 kg) Weight Warranty 1 year Probe 5 year Instrument
MODEL TM99A DESCRIPTION Digital probe thermometer
DESCRIPTION
The DT-1K Digital Thermometer Probe is easy to operate. Touch probe to the object and press the ON button to measure the temperature. FEATURES Multi-usage High accuracy Pen-style digital Battery included
DIGITAL TEMPERATURE PROBE DT-1K
DT-1K
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Accuracy Measurement Range Resolution Display Units Low Battery (1) 1.5V Button cell AG13 battery included 2F or 1C -58 to 572F (-50 to 300C) 0.1F or C F or C Yes Memory Auto Shutoff Times Probe Length Probe Material Approvals Weight Warranty Last measured temperature 45 minutes 6" pointed Stainless steel CE 0.10 lb (0.05 kg) 1 year
22
MODEL DT-1K DESCRIPTION Digital thermometer probe
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1397

VAISALA RH / TEMPERATURE METER HM40A1AB
DESCRIPTION
This handheld, pocket-sized Vaisala Model HM40A1AB RH/ Temperature Meter provides a fast and convenient way to accurately spot-check relative humidity and temperature.
FEATURES
Measurement of humidity, temperature, dewpoint, wet bulb and enthalpy Large graphical display Multiple languages 2 x AA 1.5 Volt Battery Belt clip
NEW!
HM40A1AB Temperature Accuracy 0.36F ( 0.22C) 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C) Temperature Range Display LCD Dimensions 9.4"L x 2.8"W x 1.7"D (23.8 x 7.2 x 4.4 cm) Approvals CE, NIST Traceable certicate included Weight 0.6 lb (0.3 kg) Warranty 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 2 x AA Alkaline 1.5 Volt Battery Sensor Response Time 17 seconds Sensor Type Humidity HUMICAP 180R Temperature PT 1000 RTD Humidity Accuracy 1.5% (0% to 90% RH) 2.5% (90% to 100% RH) Humidity Range 0% to 100% RH
MODEL HM40A1AB DESCRIPTION RH / Temperature meter with F/C reading
EXTECH VIDEO BORESCOPE BR200

DESCRIPTION The Extech BR200 Video Borescope Inspection Camera is ideal for inspecting hard to reach spaces. Battery-powered, light weight, and able to light up dark places. This easy-touse tool can capture images, date/time stamp them, and download to a PC. FEATURES Captured video with date/time stamp is played back on a monitor via wireless/ video input jack connection Transfer Video and images to your PC via the microSD card (with included SD adaptor) or USB cable (included) and viewed using Windows Media Player NTSC or PAL operation with menus in 10 languages: English, Chinese, German, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Japanese, Dutch, and Russian Mini water-proof (IP67) camera for high resolution viewing Two bright LED lamps with dimmer to illuminate viewed object Glare-free, close-up eld of view 39" (1m) exible gooseneck retains congured shape
22
BR200
Model BR200 BR200-EXT Description Flexible video borescope with 39" cable 38" Extension cable Dimensions 7.3" x 5.7" x 1.6" (18.6 x 14.5 x 4.1 cm) 38" (96.52 cm) x 0.5" (1.27 cm) Weight 3 lb (1.4 kg) 1 lb (0.5 kg)
1398
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION

EXTECH HANDHELD INFRARED THERMOMETER 42540
The Extech Model 42540 makes non-contact measurements of surface temperatures that are difcult or dangerous to reach. It features laser sighting, has an accuracy of 2% and
is powered by a 9V battery. FEATURES
Single-point laser sighting Maximum temperature display Backlit graphic display Carrying case
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 9 V Alkaline Battery Accuracy 2% + 2 <932F (500C) 2.5% + 5 >932F (500C) Distance To Spot Ratio 16:1 0.1 to 1.00 adjustable Emissivity Range -58 to 1400F (-50 to 760C) Operating Temperature 32-122F (0-50C) 3.9"H x 2.2"W x 9"D Dimensions (10 x 5.6 x 23 cm) Approvals CE Weight 0.63 lb (0.29 kg) Warranty 1 year 42540
MODEL 42540 DESCRIPTION Laser-sighted handheld infrared thermometer
DESCRIPTION The Extech 60101-0201 Infrared Camera is for identifying hot or cold spots in rooms, panels, and on equipment. Using high accuracy Infared Technology, the 60101-0201 is lightweight and compact, perfect for inspecting thermally sensitive targets. FEATURES High accuracy of 2% and thermal sensitivity of 0.1C -4F to 482F (-20C to 250C) measuring range Focus-free lenses for convenient viewing 2.8 (71mm) high resolution color LCD 10, 000 pixels >5 hour continuous operation on a single charge for uninterrupted inspections Complete with 2G miniSD Card, Li-Ion rechargeable battery with 100-240V AC adaptor/charger with EU, UK, US and Australian plugs, FLIR Tool reporting software with mini USB cable, built-in manual lens shutter, and hard case Type IP43 dust & splash proof housing Warranty: 2 years on camera, 5 years on battery, 10 years on detector
INFRARED CAMERA 60101-0201
60101-0201
22
MODEL 60101-0201 DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS WEIGHT Extech i5 thermal imaging camera 8.8" x 3.1" x 3.3" (22.3 x 7.9 x 8.3 cm) 0.81 lb (0.54 kg)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1399

DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advanced Sensors Model 7001 uses dual-beam infrared technology for accuracy and stability. Convienent battery operation offers mobility and temperature is displayed in F or C.
AMPHENOL ADVANCE SYSTEMS HANDHELD CO2 / TEMPERATURE METER 7001
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Battery Life Output (via RJ-45 jack) Accuracy CO2 Temperature Calibration Repeatability Pressure Dependence 120V/6V adapter (included) or Four AA alkaline batteries (not included) Up to 80 hours 0-4VDC = 100 min 0-4000 ppm 0-4VDC = 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) 50 ppm or 5% of reading 2F (1C) every 12 months 20 ppm 0.13% per mm Hg, user input for elevation correction
NEW!
7001 with AC Adapter
Response Time Operating Temperature Display Range CO2 Temperature Dimensions Weight Warranty <60 sec CO2 32 to 122F ( 0 to 50C), 0% to 95% RH Four-digit 1/2" LCD, CO2, and temperature From 0-10,000 ppm 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 6.5"H x 3.0"W x 1.5"D (16.5 x 7.6 x 3.8 cm) 2.1 lb (0.95 kg) 1 year
MODEL DESCRIPTION 7001 Handheld digital CO2/Temperature meter
AMPHENOL ADVANCE SYSTEMS HANDHELD DIGITAL HYGROMETER BLD7800

DESCRIPTION
The Amphenol Advanced Sensors BLD Psyclone is an inexpensive, accurate hand held digital hygrometer that displays %RH, dry bulb, and dew point temperature (in F and C).
FEATURES
Low cost handheld meter Displays RH, drybulb and dewpoint temperatures Carrying case
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage (2) 1.5V Alkaline AA Battery Battery Life 1 year approximately Accuracy 2% 10-90% RH @ 77F (25C) Measurement Range -4 to 185F (20 to 85C) Humidity Range 1.0 to 99.0% non condensing Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Dimensions 6.5"H x 2.5"W x 1.2"D (16.5 x 6.5 x 3.0 cm) Approvals CE, RoHS Weight 0.44 lb (0.2 Kg) Warranty 2 years limited
22
BLD7800 with Carrying Case
MODEL BLD7800 BLDCERT DESCRIPTION Handheld digital hygrometer and temperature meter with case Handheld digital hygrometer and temperature meter with case and NIST certicate
1400
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!


ENVIRONMENTAL IAQ METERS AQ100, AQ200 SERIES
The E Instruments AQ100 Series Environmental Meter is an economical, xed probe, hand-held air quality sensor for ambient temperature and CO2 measurement. It uses NDIR (non dispersive infrared) technology and comes with a soft carrying case. The AQ200 Series has interchangeable measurement modules, as opposed to a xed probe, and is available in popular "kits" with temperature/CO2/humidity or temperature/CO2/humidity/CO, for example. The AQ200 Series also comes standard with a voltage/current module (0-10V, 4-20 mA), two Pt100 channels, and a PC output with software. Selection of units Minimum/maximum and hold functions Automatic shutoff Adjustable backlight Calibration certicate available with some models AQ100S AQ200
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage AQ100 AQ200 Battery Life Accuracy AQ100 CO2 Temperature (1) 9V alkaline 6LR61 included (4) 1.5 V alkaline AA included 9 hours continuous 3% of reading or 50 ppm 0.4% of reading or 0.3F Storage Temperature Connection Type AQ100 AQ200 Keypads Housing Type Enclosure Rating Dimensions AQ100 AQ200 Auto Shutoff Times Language AQ100 AQ200 Approvals Weight AQ100 AQ200 Warranty -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) 18" (450 mm) to 8 (2.4m), retractable Top: 2 secured mini-DIN for SMARTplus probes Side: 1 USB port 5 keys, metal coated, (AQ200 Joystick) Shock-proof ABS Environmental IP54 Body only: 5.8"H x 2.8"W x 1.4"D (14.8 x 7.1 x 3.5 cm) Body only: 6.4"H x 3.2"W x 2.3"D (16.2 x 8.1 x 5.7 cm) Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes English, French English, French, Dutch, German, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Swedish, Norwegian, Finnish, Danish CE 0.42 lb (0.19 kg) 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) 1 year
Range AQ100 CO2 0 to 5000 ppm -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) Temperature Resolution AQ100 CO2 1 ppm Temperature 0.1F or C Sensor Type AQ100 CO2 Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) Temperature Pt100 Class A AQ200 CO2 Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) Temperature Pt100 Class A (AIQ probe) semiconductor (climatic probe) CO Electrochemical Humidity Capacitive Operating Temperature 0 to 122F (-17.7 to 50C)
22
MODEL AQ100S AQ200 AQ200CO AQ200P DESCRIPTION Air quality tester, CO2 & temperature, xed probe Air quality tester kit CO2, temperature Air quality tester kit CO, CO2, temperature, humidity Air quality tester kit CO2, temperature, humidity
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1401

COMBUSTION ANALYZER BTU1100 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The E Instruments BTU1100-1 combustion gas analyzer is the latest and most innovative all-in-one tool for complete boiler and burners set-ups, servicing and maintenance. The BTU1100-1 measures O2, CO, CO2, efciency, excess air, draft, pressure, and temperature. It has a large blue backlit digital display with zoom, heavy duty metal connections, a 10' dual hose with 12" probe, data memory, PC capabilities, and an integral non-thermal impact printer. Also included are a rechargeable battery and AC plug, vinyl case, calibration certicate, water trap and an extra roll of printer paper. The BTU1100-2 has all those features plus smoke pump, smoke lter papers and comparison chart.
NEW!
BTU1100 series Zoom function Immediate response time External condensation trap 600 test internal memory and PC capability Field replaceable sensors Tair 0.1F Tgas 0.1F Tdifferential 0.1F Pressure/Draft 0.001" WC Excess Air 0.01 Efciency 0.1 Sensor Type O2, CO electrochemical CO2, Tdifferential calculated Excess air, Efciency calculated Tair PT100 Tgas TcK Pressure/Draft semi-conductor Operating temperature 23 to 104F (-5 to 40C) Dimensions 12"H x 18"W x 10"D (30 x 46 x 25 cm) Type Fuels: Natural gas, #2 oil, #4 oil, heavy oil, propane, butane, biofuel 5%, coal, diesel, wood/pellets Weight Unit: 2.4 lb (1.1 kg), Kit: 10 lb (4.5 kg) Warranty 2 years
FEATURES
CO sensor with NOx lter Built-in non-thermal printer Draft and differential pressure meter Two-channel thermometer Ambient CO monitor One-button operation Rechargeable battery and AC charger
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage
Accuracy O2 CO Tair Tgas Pressure/Draft Range O2 CO CO2 Tair Tgas Tdifferential Pressure/Draft Excess Air Efciency Resolution O2 CO CO2
Rechargeable battery with AC charger (8-9 hours single charge) 0.2% of volume 10 ppm (400ppm), 5% range (400 to 2000ppm), 10 range (>2000ppm) 1F 2F 0.008"WC (up to 0.16" WC), 5% (>0.16"WC) 0-25% 0-8000ppm 0-99.9% -10 to 212 F (-23 to 100 C) -10 to 1830F (-23 to 1000C) -10 to 1830F (-23 to 1000C) 80" WC 0-850% 0-100% 0.1% 1ppm 0.1%
22
MODEL BTU1100-1 BTU1100-2 DESCRIPTION Combustion analyzer kit (O2, CO, CO2, draft, probes, case, printer) Combustion analyzer kit, includes smoke pump kit
1402
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!


HAND-HELD COMBUSTION ANALYZER KITS PCA3 SERIES
The Bacharach PCA3 Series Hand-Held Combustion Analyzer Kits are designed for on-demand sampling to determine combustion efciency, excess air, stack gas O2 and CO levels, stack temperature, draft, and differential pressure. The analyzer can measure up to four gases simultaneously with standard O2, CO, and optional NO, NO2, or SO2. The units perform combustion calculations for ten preprogrammed fuels. The large backlit graphic display shows eight different measurements and calculated values. The kits include factory calibrated and installed sensors, probe and hose assembly, protection boot, USB cable, software, printer, batteries, hard carrying case, and manual.
O2 and CO measurement standard Field replaceable pre-calibrated sensors Ten preprogrammed fuels Calculates combustion efciency Backlit graphic LCD with zoom capability Datalogging stores 500 combustion test records Auto zero function
PCPA3-275-KIT
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Accuracy Ambient Air Stack Temperatures O2 CO, SO2 NO NO2 Pressure / Draft Fuel Types Measurement Range Ambient Air Temperature March 2014 Four Alkaline AA batteries, optional 100-240 VAC adapter 2F, (32 to 212F), 1C, (0 to 100C) 4F, (32 to 255F), 2C, (0 to 124C); 8F, (482 to 752F), 4C, (250 to 400C) 0.3% on ue gas 5% of reading or 10 ppm between 0-2000 ppm 5% of reading or 5 ppm between 0-2000 ppm 5% of reading or 5 ppm between 0-500 ppm 2% of reading or 0.02" W.C. Natural gas, oil #2, oil #4, oil #6, propane, coal, wood, kerosene, bagasse, and digester gas Ambient air temp -4 to 999F (-20 to 537C) Stack Temperature O2 CO NO NO2 SO2 Pressure / Draft Display -4 to 2192F (-20 to 1200C) 0% to 20.9% 0-4000 ppm 0-3000 ppm 0-500 ppm 0-5000 ppm -72" to 72" W. C. Graphic LCD alpha-numeric with zoom function 60 seconds
Warm Up Time Calculated Range Combustion Efciency 0.1% to 100% Excess Air 1.0% to 250% CO2 0 to fuel dependent maximum NOx (NO + NO2) 0-3500 ppm Memory 500 combustion test records plus 500 complete logged combustion test records Dimensions 9.0"H x 3.0"W x 2.5"D (22.9 x 7.6 x 6.3 cm) Weight 2 lb (0.91 kg) Warranty 1 year
22
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1403

HAND-HELD COMBUSTION ANALYZER KITS PCA3 SERIES
FUNCTIONS
NEW!
F1/F2/F3 Soft menu buttons, functions defined by labels appearing above them on LCD USB Connector Arrrow buttons - Moves cursor up the display, or increments an alpha-numeric value - Moves cursor up the display, or increments an alpha-numeric value - Moves cursor left or moves to top of menu list - Moves cursor right or moves to bottom of menu list T-AIR Ambient air T/C connector
T-AIR
ENT: Selects a highlighted menu item or confirms data entry RUN/HOLD : Starts and stops combustion efficiency test Pressing during the 5 second turn-off period will keep the analyzer turned ON ESC: Displays previous menu or screen I/O : Turns unit ON/OFF Depress for 1-2 seconds Backlit ON/OFF
T-STACK Probes stack gas thermocouple connector POWER AC adapter connection
T-STACK
GAS Probes gas hose connector Delta P draft hose fitting
Delta P reference pressure hose fitting
22
MODEL PCA3-225-KIT PCA3-265-KIT PCA3-275-KIT 0024-1254
DESCRIPTION Handheld combustion analyzer kit with O2 and CO Handheld combustion analyzer kit with O2, CO, NO, and NO2 Handheld combustion analyzer kit with O2, CO, NO, and SO2 ACCESSORIES AC power adapter, 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
1404
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Model CO10 Description Carbon monoxide meter

EXTECH CARBON MONOXIDE METER CO10
The Extech CO10 Carbon Monoxide Meter is for performing localized safety checks for CO. Offering fast response time and portability, it is a perfect tool for targeting troubled ventilation areas in parking garages, motor pools, and storage facilities.
Ergonomic pocket size housing One button operation Easy to read 1999 count backlit displays CO levels from 0 to 1000ppm Audible alarm starting at 35 ppm with continuous beeping when above 200 ppm Backlight for low light conditions Max Hold and Data Hold buttons Auto power off Complete with 9V battery, protective rubber holster and carrying case
CO10
Dimensions 6.3 x 2.2 x 1.57 (16.0 x 5.6 x 4.0 cm) Weight 2 lb (0.9 kg)
DESCRIPTION
The Extech HD400 Heavy Duty Light Meter allows the user to take indoor and outdoor light level readings. It is ideal to make sure lighting requirements are being met, and to assist with ne tuning lighting control systems for optimum performance and efciency.
EXTECH LIGHT METER HD400
FEATURES
Wide range to 40,000Fc or 400,000 Lux Cosine and color corrected measurements Utilizes precision silicon photo diode and spectral response lter Peak mode (10S) captures highest reading Relative mode indicates change in light levels Min/Max and Data Hold Large backlit LCD display with 40-segment bar graph Heavy Duty rugged double molded housing Built-in USB port Includes light sensor with 3' (0.91m) cable and protective cover, Windows compatible software with USB cable, hard carrying case, and 9V battery
HD400
22
Model HD400 Description Heavy duty light meter Dimensions 6.7 x 3.1 x 1.6 (17.0 x 8.0 x 4.0 cm) Weight 2 lb (0.9 kg)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1405

PORTABLE SOLARIMETERS SL100, SL200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The E Instruments SL100 and SL200 Solar Meters are portable, easy to use hand-held solar energy meters that are perfect for verication of solar panel orientation or for spot checking solar energy where photovoltaic cells are being used to generate electricity. These tools measure instantaneous solar irradiance and irradiation over time, with the ability to average and record minimum/maximum values.The Model SL100 can measure continuous exposure for up to 3 days, the Model SL200 has memory to record and store data for up to 31 days, software for PC interface and calibration certicate. Both include an IP66 remote solar cell with 4.1 ft. (1.25m) cable and carrying case.
NEW!
SL100, SL200 Series 4.1ft (1.25m), plug-in at instrument Cable Length Housing Type Shock-proof ABS, IP40-SC200 Dimensions Instrument 4.7"H x 2.3"W x 1.3"D (12 x 5.8 x 3.3 cm) Solar Cell 1.2" diameter x 1.3"H (3.0 x 3.2 cm) Solar Cell Specications Sensor Photovoltaic Polycrystalline silicon Spectral Response 400 to 1100 nm Nominal Sensitivity 100 mv for 1000 W/m2 Response in Cosine Corrected up to 80 Temp Coefcient +0.1%/C Effective Area 1 cm2 Humidity 100% RH (IP66 housing) UV Performance Excellent (translucent PMMA lter) Approvals CE, RoHS Weight Meter with case 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) Solar cell 0.13 lb (0.06 kg) Warranty 1 year
FEATURES
Instantaneous, average, minimum/ maximum values and hold function Large adjustable graphic display for easy reading in varying light conditions Weatherproof (IP66) remote solar cell with plug-in cable Calibration Certicate - SL200 model USB port for trend data transfer to PC - SL 200 model
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Battery Accuracy Measurement Range Irradiance Irradiation
3 LR3 Alkaline AAA batteries (included) Life 72 hours minimum 5% of measurement
1 to 1300 W/m2 (instantaneous) 1 Wh/m2 to 500 kWh/m2 (cumulative) Measurement Frequency 2 measurements per second Calculation Frequency 1 calculation per minute (W/m2) Measurement Capacity Results are saved when unit is powered off SL100 3 days of cumulative data (Wh/m2) SL200 31 days of cumulative data (Wh/m2), 44,640 data points Operating Temperature Instrument 14 to 122F (-10 to 50C) Solar Cell -22 to 140F (-30 to 60C)
22
MODEL SL100 SL200 DESCRIPTION Portable solarimeter, up to 3 days continuous measurement Portable solarimeter, up to 31 days continuous measurement, PC interface
1406
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION

THERMO-HYGROMETERS HD100 SERIES
housing and a white case, making it acceptable for the food industry.
The E Instruments HD100S Thermo-Hygrometer is a portable digital thermo-hygrometer with integral probe for measurement of relative humidity, dew point, and ambient temperature. The HD150S comes with an IP65 protective
FEATURES
Selection of units for both temperature and humidity/ dew point Hold function and minimum/maximum values Adjustable automatic shut-off for maximum battery life Large adjustable backlit display for easy reading in varying light conditions HD100S
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Battery Life Accuracy RH 9V alkaline 6LR61 included 9 hours approximately Operating Temperature Instrument 0 to 122F (-18 to 50C) Probe -4 to 158F (-20 to 70C) Cable Type Retractable, 18 to 95 (46 to 241 cm) Keypads 5 metal-coated keys Housing Type Shock-proof ABS, IP54 standard (IP65 model HD150S) Dimensions Housing 5.8"H x 2.8"W x 1.4"D (14.8 x 7.1 x 3.5 cm) Case 18"H x 8.5"W x 3"D (46 x 22 x 7.6 cm) Language English, French Measuring Element Capacitive (CMOS) sensor Measuring units RH % Dew point F or C Ambient temperature F or C Approvals CE Weight 0.42 lb (0.19 kg) Warranty 1 year
1.8% RH from 59 to 77F (15C to 25C) drift <1% RH/year Dew point greater of 0.6F or 0.8% of reading Ambient Temperature greater of 0.3F or 0.4% of reading Auto Shutoff Times Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes Display 2 line LCD, 1.4H x 2W (3.5 x 5.0 cm) Measurement Range RH 5% to 95% RH Dew Point -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Ambient Temperature -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) Resolution RH 0.1% RH Dew Point 0.1F Ambient Temperature 0.1F
22
MODEL HD100S HD150S DESCRIPTION Portable digital thermo-hygrometer Portable digital thermo-hygrometer in white IP65 housing
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1407

THERMO-ANEMOMETER LV100, VT100, VT200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The E Instruments LV100 Series Portable ThermoAnemometers are available with either a 0.5" (14 mm), 2.7" (70 mm) or 4" (100 mm) xed vane probe for measurement of air ow velocity and a thermistor for ambient temperature. The VT100S Series has a 0.3" (8 mm) diameter, 12" (305 mm) long stainless steel hot-wire probe for measurement of air ow and ambient temperature. The VT200 Series has interchangeable temperature and air ow velocity measurement modules for maximum exibility; it is the ultimate meter for air ow/temperature needs. All are supplied with calibration certicate and soft carrying case. FEATURES Selection of units Hold function with min/max values Automatic average
NEW!
Automatic shutoff Adjustable backlit digital display
Current / Voltage Display LV100, VT100 VT200 Range LV101 VT100, VT200 Keypads Housing Type Enclosure Rating Dimensions LV100, VT100 VT200 Auto Shutoff Times Language LV100, VT100 VT200 Approvals LV100, VT100 VT200 Warranty Two stereo jacks 2 line LCD, 1.4"H x 2"W (3.5 x 5.0 cm) Color graphic, 320 x 240 pixels, 2.8"H x 2.0"W (5.4 x 5.0 cm), 6 different measurements (4 simultaneously) 157 to 591 FPM (0.8 to 3 m/s) 610 to 7874 FPM (3.1 to 44 m/s) 29.5 to 591 FPM (0.15 to 3 m/s) 610 to 5906 FPM (3.1 to 30 m/s) 5 keys, metal coated (optional joystick VT200) Shock-proof ABS IP54 Body only: 5.8"H x 2.7"W x 1.4"D (14.8 x 7.1 x 3.5 cm) Body only: 6.4"H x 3.2"W x 2.3"D (16.2 x 8.1 x 5.7 cm) Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes English, French English, French, Dutch, German, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Swedish, Norwegian, Finnish, Danish CE 0.42 lb (0.19 kg) 0.75 lb (0.34 kg) 1 year
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage LV100, VT100 LV200 Battery Life LV100, VT100 LV200 Sensor Type LV100 Vane Probes Temperature VT100 Hotwire, Air Velocity Temperature VT200 Hotwire, Air Velocity Temperature 70 mm, 100 mm Vane 14 mm Vane Thermocouple PT100 Smart-plus Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Cable Type LV100 VT100 Connection Type Instrument Connections Side Module Connections (1) 9V alkaline 6LR61included (4) 1.5V alkaline LR6 included Life Up to 9 hours continuous Life Up to 9 hours continuous 0.5" (1.4 cm), 2.8" (7.0 cm) 4.0" (10.0 cm), hall effect Pt100 class A NTC Thermistor Pt100 Class 1/3 DIN NTC Thermistor Pt100 Class 1/3 DIN Hall effect Proximity Type K, J and T Class 1 Pt100 Class 1/3 DIN 0 to 122F (-17.7 to 50C) -4 to 176F (-20 to 80C) 18" (450 mm) to 8' (2.4 m), retractable 6.5' (2 m) VT 200 ONLY Top 2 secured mini-DIN for SMART-plus probes 1 USB port for EIG cable only, 1 power supply plug Thermocouple 4 inputs for compensated miniature plug thermocouple
22
MODEL LV101S LV107S LV110S LV120S LV130S VT100S VT200 VT200F VT200H VT200L VT200P VT200TF VT200TP
DESCRIPTION Thermo-Anemometer 0.5 in. vane, xed Thermo-Anemometer 2.7 in. vane, xed Thermo-Anemometer 4.0 in. vane, xed Thermo-Anemometer 4.0 in. vane, integral Thermo-Anemometer 4.0 in. vane, integral, rotating Thermo-Anemometer 12 in. Hotwire, xed Thermo-Anemometer base unit, no probes Thermo-Anemometer includes Hotwire probe Thermo-Anemometer includes 2.7 in. vane probe Thermo-Anemometer includes 4.0 in. vane probe Thermo-Anemometer includes 0.5 in vane probe Thermo-Anemometer includes gooseneck hotwire probe Thermo-Anemometer includes telescopic 0.5 in. vane probe
1408
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION

HAND-HELD TACHOMETER CT100 SERIES
The E Instruments CT100OS Hand-Held Tachometer is a compact, hand-held tachometer with optical probe and reective tape, for measuring revolutions per minute (RPM) on motor shafts or any rotating device. The CT100CS adds a contact tip for direct physical rotation measurement.
FEATURES
Unit selection and English or French language selection Hold function and minimum, maximum values Optical or contact sensor to meet most applications
CT100 Probes with contact tip and with optical tip
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Battery Life Accuracy Optical Contact Measuring Elements Optical Contact Measurement Range Optical Contact 9V alkaline 6LR61 included Up to 25 hours continuous (0.3% rdg 1 RPM) (1% rdg 1 RPM) Phototransistor ETC type adapter 60-60,000 RPM (units Tr/min, RPM) 30-20,000 RPM (units m/min, ft/min, 1n/min) Cable Type Display Keypads Housing Type Dimensions Auto Shutoff Times Language Approvals Weight Warranty Retractable, 18" to 95" Retractable, 18" to 95" (46 to 241 cm) 2 lines, 12 characters 0.5"H x 1.5"W (1.3 x 3.8 cm) 5 elastomer keys Shock-proof ABS 5.7"H x 3"W x 1.3"D (14.5 x 7.6 x 3.3 cm) Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes English, French CE 0.42 lb (0.19 kg) 1 year
Resolution 1 RPM Optical Contact 1 RPM Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C)
22
MODEL CT100CS CT100OS DESCRIPTION Portable tachometer with optical and contact sensor Portable tachometer with optical sensor
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1409

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE METERS MP100, MP200 SERIES
DESCRIPTION The E Instruments MP100 Series Differential Pressure Meter portable digital manometers have a built-in pressure sensor and come with tubing and a carrying case. The MP200 Series thermo-anemo-manometer comes in different pressure range models and has interchangeable measurement modules for temperature (thermo), air velocity (anemo), and air ow with pitot tube. The MP200 Series also includes one Thermocouple K/J/T channel, calibration certicate, and a PC output.
NEW!
MP105 MP200 Keypads Housing Type Enclosure Rating Auto Shutoff Times Dimensions MP105, MP120 5 keys, metal coated,(MP200 Joystick) Shock-proof ABS IP54 Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes Body only: 6.1"H x 2.7"W x 1.4"D (15.6 x 7.1 x 3.5 cm) Body only: 6.6"H x 3.2"W x 2.3"D MP200 (16.9 x 8.1 x 5.7 cm) Operating Temperature 0 to 122F (-17.8 to 50C) Language MP105, MP120 English, French English, French, Dutch, German, MP200 Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Swedish, Norwegian, Finnish, Danish Approvals CE Weight 0.42 lb (0.19 kg) Warranty 1 year
FEATURES
Transport case included for protection Selection of units Automatic calibration Hold and min/max functions Adjustable automatic shutoff Adjustable backlit display
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage MP105, MP120 MP200 Battery Life MP105, MP120 MP200 Pressure Thermocouple Current / Voltage Connector MP105 MP120 MP200 (1) 9V alkaline 6LR61 included (4) 1.5V alkaline LR6 included Up to 9 hours continuous Up to 9 hours continuous Piezoresistive Type K, J, and T Class 1 2 stereo jacks for V, mA Pressure 0.18" (4.6mm) nickel-plated threads Pressure 0.24" (6.2mm) nickel-plated threads Pressure 0.24" (6.2mm) nickel plated barbs and 0.18" (4.6mm) nickel-plated barbs, and 1 input for compensated miniature plug thermocouple. 2 line LCD, 1.4"H x 2"W (3.5 x 5.0 cm) Color display, 128 x 128 pixels 2.2"H x 2.0"W (5.4 x 5.0 cm)
Display MP105, MP120 MP200
22
MODEL MP105 MP120 MP200G MP200H MP200HP MP200M MP200P
DESCRIPTION Differential pressure micro-manometer -200 to 200 in. H2O (0.5% accuracy) Differential pressure micro-manometer -4 to 4 in. H2O (0.5% accuracy) Differential pressure micro-manometer -40 to 40 in. H2O (0.2% accuracy) Differential pressure micro-manometer -200 to 200 in. H2O (0.3% accuracy) Differential pressure micro-manometer -29 to 29 in. H2O (0.3% accuracy) Differential pressure micro-manometer -10 to 10 in. H2O (0.2% accuracy) Differential pressure micro-manometer -2 to 2 in. H2O (0.2% accuracy)
1410
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Device Type Supply Voltage Battery Accuracy Pressure Range 475-000-FM MODEL 475-0-FM 475-0-FM-AV 475-00-FM 475-000-FM 475-000-FM-AV 475-1-FM

DWYER HANDHELD DIGITAL MANOMETER 475-FM SERIES
The Dwyer 475-FM Series Mark III handheld digital manometer is ideal for eld-calibrating, monitoring, or troubleshooting HVAC systems, clean rooms, and a wide range of other low-pressure applications. This handy instrument measures positive, negative, or differential pressures of air and natural gases. The 475-FM Series is approved and intrinsically safe for hazardous locations, Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, and T4.
Measures positive, negative or differential pressure Handheld and battery powered Intrinsically safe for hazardous locations
475-1-FM-1 AV Kit
FM
APPROVED
US
Service of Air and some combustible gases 9V alkaline battery Life Up to 100 hours 0.5% FS, 60 to 78F (15.6 to 25.6C); 1.5% FS from 32 to 60F (0 to 15.6C) and 78 to 104F (25.6 to 40C)
Display Dimensions Air Velocity Kit
0-1.00" W.C. (0-0.249 kPa)/ 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum 475-0-FM-AV 0-10.00" W.C. (0-2.49 kPa)/5 psig (35 kPa) maximum 475-00-FM-AV 0-4.00" W.C. (0-0.995 kPa)/5 psig (35 kPa) maximum 475-0-FM 0-10.00" W.C. (0-2.49 kPa)/5 psig (35 kPa) maximum 475-1-FM 0-19.99" W.C. (0-4.97 kPa)/10 psig (69 kPa) maximum Operating Temperature 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) Connection Type Two barbed for use with 1/8" (3.18 mm) or 3/16" (4.76 mm) ID tubing
Approvals Weight Unit Kit Warranty
0.5" liquid crystal, 3-1/2 digits 6.6" x 2.8" x 0.9" (16.8 x 7.1 x 2.3 cm) Air velocity kit includes the 475FM Manometer, (2) A303 Static Pressure tips, (2) 9' lengths of 3/16" ID rubber tubing, (1) 166-6-CF Pitot Tube, (1) A-397 Step Drill bit, A532 Air Velocity slide chart, Instructions, and a molded plastic Carrying Case, Air velocity kit includes the 475-FM manometer, (2) static pressure tips, (2) 9' lengths of 3/16" ID rubber tubing, (1) 166-6-CF pitot tube, (1) A-397 step drill bit, air velocity slide chart, instructions, and a molded plastic carrying case FM, CE 0.3 lb (0.14 kg) 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) 1 year
DESCRIPTION Handheld digital manometer, 0-10" W.C. Handheld digital manometer, 0-10" W.C. with air velocity kit Handheld digital manometer, 0-4" W.C. Handheld digital manometer, 0-1" W.C. Handheld digital manometer, 0-1" W.C. with air velocity kit Handheld digital manometer, 0-19.99" W.C.
22
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1411

DWYER WET/WET HANDHELD DIGITAL MANOMETER 490 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
The Dwyer 490 Series wet/wet digital manometers are versatile, handheld, and battery operated. Units are highly accurate (0.5% FS) for positive or positive-differential pressure measurement,and they can tolerate most liquid media compatible with 316L stainless steel. There are seven common English and metric pressure units (psi, "H2O, "Hg, mm Hg, kPa, Bar, or mBar), so conversions are not necessary.
NEW!
490 490-2 490-3 0-30 psid (0-207 kPa)/60 psig (413 kPa) maximum 0-50 psid (0-345 kPa)/100 psig (689 kPa) maximum Operating Temperature 32 to 104F (0 to 40C) 9"H x 4.7"W x 0.9"D Dimensions (27.9 x 11.9 x 2.3 cm) Connection Type Two 1/8" (3.18 mm) female NPT Display 0.42" (10.6 mm), 4-1/2 digit LCD Approvals CE 0.88 lbs (0.4 kg) Weight Warranty 1 year
FEATURES
Measures either positive or positive differential pressure High accuracy (0.5% FS) Tolerant of most liquid media compatible with 316L stainless steel Seven English and metric pressure units (psi,"H2O, "Hg, mm Hg, kPa, Bar, or mBar) Two 1/8" female NPT connections
SPECIFICATIONS
Device Type Supply Voltage Battery Life Accuracy Wetted Materials Pressure Range 490-1 Service of compatible, noncombustible gases and liquids 9V alkaline included Up to 100 hours 0.5% FS from 60 to 78F (15.6 to 25.6C) 1.5% FS from 32 to 60F (0 to 15.6), 78 to 104F (25.6 to 40C) Type 316L stainless steel 0-15 psid (0-103 kPa)/30 psig max (207 kPa)
22
MODEL 490-1 490-2 490-3 A-402A
DESCRIPTION Wet/Wet digital manometer, 0-15 psid Wet/Wet digital manometer, 0-30 psid Wet/Wet digital manometer, 0-50 psid Gray nylon carrying case
1412
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage Battery Life Measurement Range Sensor Type CO2 CO Temperature MODEL AMI300 ETC FC300 FC900 HE100 HE14 HE70 HET14 HR110 HRI300 MDP10000 MDP2000M MDP2500 MDP500 MDP500M RTO SCO2T SCO2TH SCOT SVTH TOP

MULTIFUNCTIONAL IAQ ANALYZER AMI300 SERIES
The E Instuments AMI300 Series Multifunctional IAQ Analyzer is an all-in-one tool for measurement and verication of air quality including temperature and differential temperature, humidity, dewpoint, wet bulb, enthalpy, air pressure and air velocity, CO2, CO, current and voltage. Includes PC software and USB cable allowing full datalogging, trend reporting, and data management. AMI300 Air quality probes for CO2, CO, temperature, and humidity Tachometry probes with optical only or optical plus contact sensor
FEATURES Backlit digital color display Calibration certicate and transport case included Manometer probes for pressure, air velocity, and air ow (using pitot tubes or other sensing elements) Vane probes for direct air velocity and air ow Thermo-hygrometer probes for dew point, wet bulb and enthalpy
(4) 1.5V alkaline LR6 AA batteries included 9 hours aproximately Refer to AMI300 brochure
Non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) Electrochemical Pt100 Class A (Semiconductive in Climatic module) Capacitive Hygrometry Piezoresistive Air Pressure Hotwire, Air Velocity NTC thermistor 70 mm, 100 mm Vane Hall effect 14 mm Vane Proximity Type K, J and T Class 1 Thermocouple Tachometry Optical sensor, ETC adapter for connect Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) 18" (450 mm) to 8 (2.4 m), Cable Type retractable Connection Type Instrument Connections Top: 2 secured mini-DIN for
Module Connections Thermocouple Pressure Current / Voltage Display Keypads Housing Type Enclosure Rating Dimensions Auto Shutoff Times Language Approvals Weight Warranty
SMARTplus probes Side: 1 USB port for EIG cable only 1 power supply plug 4 inputs for compensated mini plug thermocouple Two 1/4" (6.2 mm) diameter Two stereo jacks Color graphic, 320 x 240 pixels, 2.8"H x 2.0"W, 6 different measurements (4 simultaneously) 5 keys, metal-coated, 1 joystick Shock-proof ABS IP54 Analyzer only: 6.8"H x 3.4"W x 2.2"D (17.2 x 8.5 x 5.7 cm) Adjustable 0 to 120 minutes English, French, Dutch, German, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Swedish, Norwegian, Finnish, Danish CE 0.84 lb (0.38 kg) 1 year
DESCRIPTION Air quality analyzer, base unit, no probes, includes MDP500M pressure module Tachometry probe contact adapter, 30 to 20,000 RPM Hotwire probe for AMI300, 12" (30 cm) length, 5/16" (0.8 cm) diameter Hotwire gooseneck probe for AMI300, 36" (90 cm) length, 3/8" (1.0 cm) diameter Vane probe for AMI300, 4.0" (10.0 cm) vane diameter Vane probe for AMI300, 0.5" (1.4 cm) vane diameter Vane probe for AMI300, 2.7" (7.0 cm) vane diameter Vane probe for AMI300, telescopic, 0.5" (1.4 cm) vane diameter Hygrometry probe, plastic, 4.3" (11 cm) length, 1/2" (1.3 cm) diameter Hygrometry probe, stainless, 11.8" (30 cm) length, 1/2" (1.3 cm) diameter Pressure module -40 to 40" H2O Pressure module -29 to 29 psid Pressure module -10 to 10" H2O Pressure module -2 to 2" H2O Pressure module -200 to 200" H2O Tachometry probe optical tape , 3.3 ft (1m) tape IAQ probe for AMI300, CO2, temperature IAQ probe for AMI300, CO2, temperature, humidity IAQ probe for AMI300, CO, temperature IAQ probe for AMI300, telescopic, velocity, temperature, humidity Tachometry probe for AMI300, optical, 60 to 50,000 RPM, includes 3.3 ft (1m) tape
22
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1413

CABLE RETRIEVAL SYSTEM MAGNEPULL XP1000 SERIES
DESCRIPTION
Magnepull is the most advanced cable retrieval system on the market today. Using powerful rare earth magnets, Magnepull works through drywall, insulation, and carpet to pull wire more quickly and easily than the old sh-tape method. Magnepull is designed for commercial or residential installation of HVAC and building automation cable, satellite TV, home theater, security, thermostat or telecom wire and makes a wiring project a one-man job. The XP1000-3 bullet drop magnet with leader and drop chain comes with the XP1000-LC system. Other drop magnets such as the XP1000-3-1 (without leader, for conned spaces), XP1000-4 (with 8/32" threaded stud), and XP1000-6 (1/2" diameter bullet for smaller wires, also has the 8/32" threads) are also available. The MS800-1 Magnespot is used to locate a reference marker through sheetrock, ceilings or oorings.
NEW!
XP1000-LC MS800 XP1000-4 MS800-1
FEATURES
Revolutionary time-saving tool Smooth rolling design prevents wall damage Easy to use in tight places
XP1000-3-1
XP1000-3
XP1000-6
22
MODEL XP1000-LC-MS XP1000-LC XP1000-3 XP1000-3-1 XP1000-4 XP1000-6 MS800 MS800-1 DESCRIPTION Magnepull cable retrieval system w/ Magnespot Magnepull cable retrieval system w/o Magnespot Drop magnet with leader, 0.75 in. diameter Drop magnet with eye tting, 0.75 in. diameter Drop magnet with threaded bullet, 0.75 in. diameter Drop magnet with leader, 0.50 in. diameter Magnespot reference point locator with marker Magnespot reference marker
1414
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WHAT IS COMBUSTION?
BTU2200 series

COMBUSTION
Combustion takes place when fuel, most commonly a fossil fuel, reacts with the oxygen in air to produce heat. The heat created by the burning of a fossil fuel is used in the operation of equipment such as boilers, furnaces, kilns, and engines. Along with heat, CO2 (carbon dioxide) and H20 (water) are created as byproducts of the exothermic reaction.
CH4 + 2O2 CO2 + 2H2O + Heat C + O2 CO2 + Heat 2H2 + O2 2H2O + Heat
By monitoring and regulating some of the gases in the stack or exhaust, it is easy to improve combustion efciency, which conserves fuel and lowers expenses. Combustion efciency is the calculation of how effectively the combustion process runs. To achieve the highest levels of combustion efciency, complete combustion should take place. Complete combustion occurs when all of the energy in the fuel being burned is extracted and none of the Carbon and Hydrogen compounds are left unburned. Complete combustion will occur when the proper amounts of fuel and air (fuel/air ratio) are mixed for the correct amount of time under the appropriate conditions of turbulence and temperature.
Although theoretically stoichiometric combustion provides the perfect fuel to air ratio, which thus lowers losses and extracts all of the energy from the fuel; in reality, stoichiometric combustion is unattainable due to many varying factors. Heat losses are inevitable thus making 100% efciency impossible.
en
He
yg
at
Ox
Fuel
In practice, in order to achieve complete combustion, it is necessary to increase the amounts of air to the combustion process to ensure the burning of all of the fuel. The amount of air that must be added to make certain all energy is retrieved is known as excess air. In most combustion processes, some additional chemicals are formed during the combustion reactions. Some of the products created such as CO (carbon monoxide), NO (nitric oxide), NO2 (nitrogen dioxide), SO2 (sulfur dioxide), soot, and ash should be minimized and accurately measured. The EPA has set specic standards and regulations for emissions of some of these products, as they are harmful to the environment. Combustion analysis is a vital step to properly operate and control any combustion process in order to obtain the highest combustion efciency with the lowest emissions of pollutants.
22
BTU1100 series
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1415

PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS CONSUMPTION & CAPACITY
CONSUMPTION & CAPACITY
Selecting the proper E/P transducer for an application involves more than choosing the input signal and output pressure range. Air consumption and capacity are important specications when considering the best transducer for the job.
AIR CONSUMPTION
An E/P transducer is designed to vary air pressure to a pneumatic load like an actuator based on a varying electronic signal from some sort of controller. The source of air pressure used by E/P transducers originates at the air compressor and makes its way to pneumatic devices throughout the building via tubing. Different types of E/P transducers use different techniques to vary the air pressure to their output or branch line. Some transducers incorporate a design that is similar to pneumatic thermostats and controllers with a nozzle and apper, for example the UCP-242 and UCP-422. These transducers will allow a small amount of air to escape to the atmosphere (air consumption), measured in units of scfm (standard cubic feet per minute). Actual air consumption can be affected by the amount of main air pressure but is normally specied as an average value such as 0.008 scfm. Since there is a given amount of air available in the main air lines and the air compressors storage tank, the number of pneumatic devices that consume air will affect how often the air compressor runs as well as the size of its storage tank. If the available pneumatic air supply will not support numerous air consuming E/P transducers, there is another type of transducer design that uses two solenoid valves to increase and decrease pressure in the branch line and does not constantly bleed air, other than what is exhausted from the branch line during normal operation. The UCP-722 and UCP-822, for example, consume no air in steady state.
NEW!
AIR CAPACITY
A pneumatic transducers air capacity specication denes how much air volume can ow through the transducer in a given amount of time. Air capacity is usually specied in units of scim (standard cubic inches per minute) or scfm at a particular main air pressure with a minimal pressure drop across the transducer. A typical air capacity specication for a pneumatic transducer might be 500 scim at 20 psi with a 1 psi pressure drop. Calculating the exact time it would take an E/P transducer to completely ll an actuator to full pressure is more than dividing the total volume connected to the E/P transducers output (including the actuator and tubing) by the E/P transducers air capacity. You must also consider the force of the internal actuator spring and the load connected to the actuator. These act against the pressure building in the actuator as opposing forces and slow the rate at which pressure builds in the actuator. Depressurizing a given volume of air actually takes longer than it does to pressurize. When building up pressure, the transducer allows main air to ow into the branch line. When depressurizing, the E/P transducer opens the branch line to the atmosphere allowing air to escape from the actuator and tubing. Selecting the proper E/P transducer for an application is important. Kele stocks a complete selection of electronic to pneumatic transducers that will meet the requirements of most any application.
22
UCP-722 UCP-422
1416
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
TRANSDUCERS
HUMIDITY
Kele is the Top Provider of Transducer Control Devices, Connecting Sensors and Peripheral Devices.
ARM Series | p. 1454
UCP-422 | p. 1419
T-1000 | p. 1431
TRANSDUCERS
PWA-2A | p. 1437
EP311 | p. 1435
CP-8551 | p. 1433
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL/SERIES PAGE
Electronic Transducers EP-311/313 Series Electronic / Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWA Series Pulse / Tri-State-to-Analog Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UAT-1, UAT-2 Series Universal Analog Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VTI Series Voltage & Current Converter / Rescaler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DT13E Series Isolated DC to DC Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UMM-1, UMM-2 Series Universal Math Module.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RES-1E Series Universal Resistance Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTA Series Pulse Width Modulation to Current/Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PTA2 Series Pulse Width Modulation to Current/Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . ARM Series Current or Voltage Rescaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUD Series Floating Point to Analog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6N1-ISO Series Six Input to One Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIM 1 Series Analog Input to Optically Isolated Analog Output. . . . . . . . . AIM 2 Series Analog Adj. Input to Optically Isolated Analog Output . . . . . DRN3.1 Series Pulse Width Modulation/Analog/Floating Point to Isolated Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRN 4 Series Pulse Width Modulation/Analog/Floating Point to Resistance Output.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOB-4, MOB-8 Manual Override Boards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPD Series Universal Pulse Divider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiplexers ATL Series Current or Voltage to Four SPDT Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AAR Series Analog to Two Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AFP Series Analog to Floating Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCS-121 Series Sequencer Control Module - Single Stage . . . . . . . . . . . UCS-221E Sequencer Control Module - Two Stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCS-421E Sequencer Control Module - Four Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCS-621E Kele Sequencer Control Module - Six Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCS-821E Sequencer Control Module - Eight Stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UMX-4, UMX-8 Multi-Function Input / Output Expander .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pneumatic Transducers UCP-242 Current / Pneumatic Transducer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCP-422 Series Electronic / Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCP-422 Series M Option Options for UCP-422 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCP-422 Series F, V Options UCP-422 Series F, V Options.. . . . . . . . . UCO-44, UCO-44T Options Options for UCP-422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UCP-722 Series Universal Electronic / Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . UCP-822A Series Universal Electronic / Pneumatic Transducer. . . . . . . . DIN-L1 DIN Rail Adapter Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP300 Electronic/Pneumatic Transducer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T-1000 Current / Pneumatic Transducer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22/07-16 Current / Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CP-8500 Series Electronic/Pneumatic Transducer .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EFP Series Floating Point to Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EPW Series Pulse Width Modulation to Pneumatic Transducer .. . . . . . . . EPC Series Analog to Pneumatic Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435 1437 1441 1443 1445 1447 1449 1453 1453 1454 1454 1454 1455 1455 1455 1455 1470 1471
UPC-722 | p. 1417
EPC Series | p. 1471
1454 1454 1455 1456 1458 1460 1462 1464 1466
TRANSDUCERS
UMX-8 | p. 1466
kele.com
1417 1419 1421 1422 1423 1425 1427 1429 1430 1431 1432 1433 1453 1453 1453
NEW!
DESCRIPTION OPERATION FEATURES Inline lter provided Snap-track mounting 1/4" (0.64 cm) barbed tube connectors Quick-disconnect terminals Loop-powered control Excellent linearity Low hysteresis No calibration required
TRANSDUCERS
CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER UCP-242
The UCP-242 Current/Pneumatic Transducer provides low cost pneumatic control of valves, dampers, or other pneumatic devices. The UCP-242 comes with snap-track for easy mounting. Quick-disconnect terminals provide easy wiring removal for servicing. Barbed ttings for 1/4" plastic tubing and an in-line lter are provided.
The UCP-242 accepts a 4-20 mA signal and outputs 3-15 psig. The unit is loop-powered, requiring no power supply for controlling pneumatic devices. Upon a loss of signal, the UCP-242 will eventually bleed the pressure in the branch line. This transducer is well suited for the control of small to medium volume loads, such as small to medium pneumatic actuators. Large volume loads, such as large pneumatic actuators, or long tubing runs may also be controlled but will exhibit a slower response time.
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Air Connections Main (Supply): black Branch (Output): white or clear
3.25 (8.3) 4-20 mA Signal

+
COM SIG +
4.63 (11.75)
TRANSDUCERS
Depth: 2 (5.1)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Input Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Air Capacity Air Connections Air Consumption Maximum Pressure None, loop powered 4-20 mA 500 @ 4-20 mA Screw terminals 515 scim (135 cm3/s) @ 20 psig (138 kPa) supply 1/4" OD tubing with inline lter .008 scfm (3.8 cm3/s) @ 20 psig (138 kPa) supply 25 psig (172 kPa) Linearity 2% of span Hysteresis 1% of span Output 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Weight 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) Warranty 18 months
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1417
TRANSDUCERS
INSTALLATION
CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER UCP-242
Installation Mount the UCP-242 inside a NEMA 1 control panel in a clean, dry environment. Barbed ttings are provided for terminating 1/4" (0.64 cm) plastic tubing. The UCP-242 must be mounted in an upright position (refer to arrows on unit). For best results, the transducer should be mounted within ve degrees of upright position. Wire terminations are marked for 4-20 mA operation. Wiring Make all electrical connections in accordance with job wiring diagrams and in compliance with local and national electrical codes. Wiring terminations are made on screw terminals labeled SIG + and COM. Checkout Verify with a meter that a 4-20 mA DC signal is present and that polarity is correct. Verify that 20 psig (137.9 kPa) main air is present. Be sure the UCP-242 is mounted in an upright position. To check transducer operation: 1. Adjust the input signal to 20 mA. Branch pressure should be 15 psig (103.4 kPa). 2. Adjust the input signal to 4 mA. Branch pressure should be 3 psig (20.7 kPa). Note: This is a rough functional check only. The UCP-242 is a highly accurate device and laboratory quality meters and gauges are required to properly check calibration.
NEW!
CAUTION: The Model UCP-242 utilizes parts that can be damaged by supply air containing synthetic compressor oil vapor, acid fumes, or other corrosive vapors. Synthetic compressor oils must not be used. Standard control air ltering practices should be observed: Supply air must be dried, oil-separated, and ltered using a refrigerated air dryer, a particulate lter, and a coalescing type lter. The system must be properly maintained such that all particles larger than 0.03 microns are ltered out and that less than 0.1 ppm oil vapor exists. At the compressor, using an absorbent pre-lter followed by a coalescing oil removal lter, such as the K-337 or K-339, is recommended. Using an oil-indicating device prior to installing any UCP-242 is also recommended. This device will provide an indication of the amount of oil being discharged from the air compressor. At the UCP-242, installing the inline lter (Model FILN05 provided with the UCP-242) in the main air line is recommended.
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL UCP-242 DESCRIPTION Current/pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output
23
B-373-1 PG-05
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE Gauge tee with mounting tabs 903 Pressure gauge, 0-30 psig (10-200 kPa) 1111
1418
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION OPERATION
TRANSDUCERS
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER UCP-422 SERIES
The UCP-422 Series electronic/pneumatic transducer provides low-cost pneumatic control of valves, dampers, or other pneumatic devices. The UCP-422 consists of a totallyenclosed transducer with provisions for optional DIN rail or surface mounting in either of two planes. Externally-mounted pneumatic lters are not required. Quick-disconnect terminals provide easy wiring removal for servicing. When DIN rail mounting is used, this compact device requires only a 4"H x 2"W (10.2 x 5.1 cm) mounting area, providing efcient use of panel space.
The UCP-422 Series accepts a 4-20 mA signal and outputs 3-15 psig (20.7-103.4 kPa). Used in its base conguration, it requires no power supply for controlling pneumatic devices. Upon a loss of signal or power, the UCP-422 will eventually bleed the pressure in the branch line. This transducer is well suited for the control of small to medium volume loads, such as small to medium pneumatic actuators. Large volume loads, such as large pneumatic actuators or long tubing runs may also be controlled but will exhibit slower response time.
Shown with Optional Pressure Gauge
FEATURES
Slim-line mounting to save panel space Universal mounting tabs Totally enclosed 1/4" (0.64 cm) barbed tube connectors Quick-disconnect terminals Loop-powered control (base model) No external lter required Excellent linearity Low hysteresis No calibration required
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
Removable Mounting Tabs
0.7 (1.8)
Optional Gauge Assembly ( rotate 90 degrees for two-position display)
UCP-422
Optional DIN Rail Adapter
3.4 (8.6) 4.0 (10.1) 4.6 (11.7)
6.3 (16)
4-20 mA Signal
COM SIG IN +
B M
Branch Main
4.8 (12.2)
Removable Mounting Tabs
OPTIONS
DIN rail mounting Pressure gauge PWM input Tri-state input F eedback and span adjustment Failsafe Manual output adjustment
2.0 (5.0)
TRANSDUCERS
2.75 (6.9)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Without Options With Options Supply VA With F, M, V Options With UCO Options Input Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Air Capacity None, loop powered 24 VAC/VDC 180 mA maximum (half-wave) 100 mA maximum (half-wave) at 24 VAC, 50 mA at 24 VDC 4-20 mA, 2-10 VDC (V option) 500 @ 4-20 mA, 160 k (V option) Screw terminals 515 scim (135 cm3/s) @ 20 psig (138 kPa) supply Brass barbs for 1/4" OD tubing 0.008 scfm (3.8 cm3/s) @ 20 psig (138 kPa) supply Maximum Pressure 25 psig (172 kPa) Linearity 2% of span Hysteresis 1% of span Output 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing) Weight 1.4 lb (0.64 kg) Warranty 1 year Air Connections Air Consumption
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1419
TRANSDUCERS
INSTALLATION
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER UCP-422 SERIES
Installation Mount the UCP-422 inside a NEMA 1 control panel in a clean, dry environment. Barbed ttings are provided for terminating 1/4" (0.64 cm) plastic tubing. The UCP-422 must be mounted in an upright position (refer to arrow on unit). For best results, the transducer should be mounted within ve degrees of the upright position. Wiring Make all electrical connections in accordance with job wiring diagrams and in compliance with national and local electrical codes. Wiring terminations are made on screw terminals labeled SIG IN + and COM. Other terminals are provided where options are specied (see options for UCP-422 on the following pages). Checkout Verify with a meter that a 4-20 mA DC signal is present and that polarity is correct. Verify that 20 psig (138 kPa) main air is present. Be sure the UCP-422 is mounted in the upright position. Note: This is a rough functional check only. The UCP-422 is a highly accurate device, and laboratory quality meters and gauges are required to properly check calibration. To check transducer operation: 1. Adjust the input signal to 20 mA (or appropriate max DC voltage input). Branch pressure should be 15 psig (103 kPa). 2. Adjust the input signal to 4 mA (or appropriate min DC voltage input). Branch pressure should be 3 psig (21 kPa).
NEW!
CAUTION: The UCP-422 uses parts that can be damaged by supply air containing synthetic compressor oil vapor, acid fumes, or other corrosive vapors. Synthetic compressor oils must not be used. Standard control air ltering practices should be observed: Supply air must be dried, oil-separated, and ltered using a refrigerated air dryer, a particulate lter, and a coalescing type lter. The system must be properly maintained such that all particles larger than 0.03 microns are ltered out and that less than 0.1 ppm oil vapor exists. At the compressor, using an absorbent pre-lter followed by a coalescing oil removal lter, such as the K-337-1 or K-339, is recommended.
MODEL UCP-422 DESCRIPTION Electronic/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA / 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) OPTIONS (for more information on each option, see the following catalog pages) F M M2 V# Feedback loop control allows remote electronic readout of the output pressure. Units equipped with feedback loop control may be calibrated between 3 and 15 psig. Special input/output calibrations should be specified at time of order entry (i.e., 4-20 mA/8-13 psig). (Factory-installed option only.) Loop-powered manual adjust 24V-powered manual adjust Manual output adjust allows easy checkout and manual selection of the output pressure (factory-installed option only)
TRANSDUCERS
Voltage input V1: 1-5V, V2: 2-10V, V3: 3-15V (factory-installed option only) 43 44 44T UCO-43 Pressure gauge indication (0-30 psig/0-200 kPa) - allows for local pressure indication without giving up valuable panel space (factory-installed option only) UCO-44 Pulse-width modulation - features selectable pulse-width time bases of 0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or 0.59-2.93 sec (factory-installed option only) UCO-44T Tri-state input - allows variable pneumatic output control based on a selectable tri-state input time base (factory-installed option only) UCO-47 DIN rail mounting adapter - allows the UCP-422 to be mounted along with other devices on the same rail (factory-installed option only) 47 Example: UCP-422-M-43-47 Electronic/Pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA to 3-15 psig, manual output adjust, pressure gauge, DIN rail
23
UCP-422 M
47
43
EP3-24VAC
RELATED PRODUCTS 24 VAC three-way air valve
PAGE 895
1420
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
EN DIS For normal operation, place jumper plug over two posts next to DIS (disable). EN DIS For manual override, place jumper plug over two posts next to EN (enable). Turn manual pot to adjust output pressure.
TRANSDUCERS
UCP-422 SERIES M OPTION
The M Option Manual Output Adjust allows local adjustment of the UCP-422 output. This feature simplies checkout and troubleshooting and is available in both loop-powered and 24V-powered congurations. The 24V-powered conguration is provided standard when the M Option is ordered with the (F) Feedback, (V) Voltage, (44) Pulse Width, or (44T) Tri-state options for the UCP-422.
UCP-422-M LOOP-POWERED MANUAL ADJUST

Jumper (shown in normal position)
DIS EN
Manual Adjust Pot
M A N U A L
Input Signal
COM SIG IN +
B Branch M Main
The UCP-422 is loop-powered. For manual override operation, the input signal must be at 20 mA, or 24 VDC may be applied to the input terminals.
4-20 mA Loop-Powered UCP-422 only No 24V-Powered Options
UCP-422-M2 24V-POWERED MANUAL ADJUST

EN DIS For normal operation, place jumper plug over two posts next to DIS (disable). EN DIS For manual override, place jumper plug over two posts next to EN (enable). Turn manual pot to adjust output pressure. Jumper (shown in normal position)
DIS EN
Manual Adjust Pot
M A N U A L AUX 24 VDC FBK OUT SIG IN COM SIG IN +
TRANSDUCERS
24 VAC/VDC Power Supply Input Signal
B Branch M Main
For manual override operation, 24V power must be applied to the +24 VDC and COM terminals. 24V power is not required for normal transducer operation, unless options F, V, 44, or 44T are ordered.
UCP-422-M2 with or without 24V-Powered Options (F, V, 44, 44T)
MODEL UCP-422-M UCP-422-M2 DESCRIPTION Electronic/Pneumatic transducer with loop-powered manual output adjust option Electronic/Pneumatic transducer with 24V-powered manual output adjust option
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1421
TRANSDUCERS
UCP-422 SERIES F, V OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION F Option The Feedback Loop Control F Option outputs a current sourcing 4-20 mA signal representative of the branch output pressure. The standard range is 4-20 mA to 3-15 psig (20.7103.4 kPa). F Option also allows for custom ranging the output (i.e., 4-20 mA to 8-13 psig). Any range from 3-15 psig (with a minimum 5 psig span) can be eld-calibrated. This option requires 24 VAC/DC power. V Option The Voltage Input V Option allows the UCP-422 to be controlled by any voltage signal with a 5:1 ratio span. For example, the voltage signal span could be 1-5V, 2-10V, or 3-15V . This option requires 24 VAC/VDC power. RECALIBRATION
NEW!
UCP-422-F WIRING
CAL
Normal jumper position
CAL
CAL
GAIN ZERO SPAN
Calibrate jumper position
24 VAC or + 24 VDC Power Supply Feedback Load
AUX 24 VDC FBK OUT SIG IN COM SIG IN +
Input Signal +
UCP-422-F
TRANSDUCERS
F Option 1. Make all connections according to the wiring diagram, or as UCP-422-V WIRING shown on the job diagrams, in compliance with national and local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage. Field-Adjustable 2. Connect the highest quality gauge available to the branch line Voltage GAIN of the transducer. 3. Move the jumper to the CAL position (see Wiring). AUX Vary the input signal to the transducer until the gauge indicates 4. + 24 VDC FBK OUT 24 VAC/VDC Power LED the minimum branch pressure desired to output. If the transducer Power Supply SIG IN Signal LED COM is equipped with the manual output adjust option, set the SIG IN + minimum branch pressure by putting the manual output adjust Voltage Signal Input + UCP-422-V jumper in the ENABLE position and turning the manual pot. 5. Adjust ZERO pot for 4 mA output from the transducer feedback Voltage Signal Input Power Requirements Impedance: 160 k terminals. Voltage Option Only: 24 VAC @ 75 mA 24 VDC @ 35 mA 6. Repeat step 4 to set the maximum branch pressure. If Voltage and Feedback Options: maximum pressure cannot be reached, adjust GAIN pot. 24 VAC @180 mA 24 VDC @ 90 mA 7. Adjust the SPAN pot for 20 mA output from the transducer feedback terminals. 8. Since SPAN and ZERO pots are interactive, repeat steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 until results are accurate. 9. Move CAL jumper back to the normal position and move the manual output adjust jumper back to the disable position. 10. Input the maximum input signal and adjust the GAIN pot until the desired maximum pressure is indicated on the gauge. V Option 1. Make all connections according to the wiring diagram, or as shown on the job diagram, in compliance with national and local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage. 2. Connect the highest quality gauge available to the branch line of the transducer. 3. Apply the new input voltage desired for maximum pressure (limited to a range of 5-15 VDC). 4. Adjust the GAIN pot until the pressure gauge shows a slight change in pressure. 5. Now, adjust the GAIN pot until maximum pressure shows on the gauge. 6. The transducer is now recalibrated to the new voltage input span (max to min 5:1 ratio).
Power Requirements: 24 VAC @ 180 mA 24 VDC @ 90 mA Feedback Output: 4-20 mA, 800 max
23
MODEL UCP-422 DESCRIPTION Electronic/Pneumatic transducer OPTIONS Feedback loop control (4-20 mA/3-15 psig standard)* F Voltage input V1:1-5V, V2: 2-10V, V3: 3-15V V# * Special ranges must be specified at time of order entry. Important! Options cannot be field-installed.
UCP-422
1422
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION FEATURES OPERATION UCO-44 Option UCO-44T Option LED INDICATION PWR LED - On when 24V is present SIG LED - On only when an input signal is present
TRANSDUCERS
UCP-422 UCO-44, UCO-44T OPTIONS
The UCO-44 and UCO-44T Options are designed to be used with the Kele UCP-422 Series electronic/pneumatic transducer. The UCO-44 Option allows the UCP-422 to be controlled by a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signal. The UCO-44T Option allows the UCP-422 to be controlled by a tri-state input signal. These options are mounted in an expander ring attached to the UCP-422.
Selectable PWM time base 0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or 0.59-2.93 sec Selectable tri-state time base 2.55, 5.1, 12.75, 25.5, 59.9, 90.5, or 119.9 sec 255-step resolution Positive or negative input reference AC/DC voltage LED indication
Shown with Optional Pressure Gauge
The UCO-44 Option accepts a pulse-width modulated input and produces an internal 4-20 mA current signal that controls the UCP-422. The standard time base is 25.6 seconds but is switch-selectable for any of the other four ranges. The UCO44 Option responds to the elapsed time when the controlling computer closes the contacts wired in series with the signal SIG IN + or SIG IN - terminals. Each pulse received will produce a corresponding pressure output. The transducer will hold this signal until given a pulse with a different value. The UCO-44T Option is controlled from two discrete contact closures or one tri-state output from a controlling computer. Each signal given the transducer will ramp an internal 4-20 mA signal up or down to control the UCP-422. A contact closure wired in series with the SIG IN + terminal will increase the output in proportion to the length of the signal given. A contact closure wired in series with the SIG IN - terminal will decrease the output in proportion to the length of the signal given.
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
UCP-422 Enclosure
Side View
3.0 (7.6)
UCO-44/UCO-44T Option Expander Ring 4.8 (12.2)
UCP-422 Enclosure
AUX 24 VDC FBK OUT SIG COM SIG +
4.0 (10.1)
TRANSDUCERS
Power LED Signal LED
4.8 (12.2)
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Supply Voltage Supply VA Input Output
UCP-422-44 24 VAC/VDC UCP-422-44T 100 mA maximum (half-wave) at 24 VAC, 50 mA at 24 VDC
PWM; time base 0.1 to 2.65, 0.1 to 5.2, 0.1 to 12.85, 0.1 to 25.6 (factory setting), or 0.59 to 2.93 seconds (internally DIP switch selectable) 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) Tri-state; time base 2.55, 5.1, 12.75, 59.9, 90.5, 119.9, or factory-set 25.5 seconds (internally DIP switch selectable)
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1423
TRANSDUCERS
UCP-422 SERIES UCO-44, UCO-44T OPTIONS
WIRING
PWM board is located in UCO-44 expander ring housing attached to the UCP-422 enclosure.
U P
UCP-422 ENCLOSURE
AUX +24 VDC FBK OUT SIG IN COM SIG IN +
+
24 VAC/VDC Power
NEW!
Tri-state board is located in UCO-44T expander ring housing attached to the UCP-422 enclosure.
U P
U P
UCP-422 ENCLOSURE
+
24 VAC/VDC Power
AUX +24 VDC FBK OUT SIG IN COM SIG IN +
24 VAC/VDC Power for + Signal
24 VAC or + 24 VDC Power Supply
AUX +24 VDC FBK OUT SIG IN
UCP-422 ENCLOSURE
COM SIG IN
decrease increase
*
* Signal input is optoisolated & polarity insensitive. PWM computer contact can switch either PWM wire lead.
BAS controller Tri-state contacts
*
PWM Wiring Separate 24V Supplies for Power & Signal
Tri-State Wiring
PWM Wiring Common 24V Supply for Power & Signal
CALIBRATION
Important! To change the time base, the transducer must be disassembled. A time base other than the factory setting may be specied at the time of order entry. TABLE 1. TIME BASE SELECTION SWITCH PWM TIME TRI-STATE Time Base Selection BASE (sec) TIME BASE (sec) 3 5 4 1. Remove two screws from the bottom plate 0.1-2.65 2.55 Off Off of the enclosure. Off 2. Carefully remove the PWM/Tri-state board 0.1-5.2 5.1 Off On Off and locate time base select switches. 0.1-12.85 12.75 Off Off On 3. Set switches 3, 4 & 5 to desired time base 0.1-25.6 25.5 Off On On as shown in table. Switches #1,#2,#6,#7 (factory setting) (factory setting) & #8 are not used and should be in the off 0.59-2.93 59.9 On Off Off position. 90.5 On On Off 4. Carefully reassemble the transducer, 119.9 On Off On ensuring that socket and pins are properly aligned. 5. No other adjustment or calibration is required.
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL UCP-422-44 UCP-422-44T DESCRIPTION Electronic / pneumatic transducer PWM option (factory installed) Electronic / pneumatic transducer tri-state option (factory installed)
23
1424
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION OPERATION FEATURES
TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS UCP-722 SERIES
The UCP-722 Series microcontroller based electropneumatic transducer incorporates high performance poppet valve technology and low power coils with digital control to provide unmatched accuracy and proven reliability. In addition to providing reliable, stable operation, the poppet valves used in the UCP-722 consume no air. The UCP-722 features jumper-selectable pressure ranges and an LCD display. Field selectable analog inputs for 0-5V, 0-10V, or 4-20mA signals are standard.
The UCP-722 converts a jumper-selectable analog input to a 0-20 or 3-15 psig output. The transducer is powered with 24 VAC/VDC. Upon a loss in power, the UCP-722 air valves remain closed, so branch pressure will remain at the last value. The optional pressure loss alarm provides a contact closure if the UCP-722-PL is unable to achieve the desired output within a xed length of time.
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.26 (8.3)
Jumper-selectable control range (0-20 psig or 3-15 psig) Field-selectable inputs ( 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA) LCD display for local indication of readings No air consumption and quiet operation Easy mounting with snap track housing Optional pressure loss alarm
3.45 (8.8)
TRANSDUCERS
1.86 (4.6)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA Input Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Air Capacity Air Connections Air Consumption Maximum Pressure Media Compatibility March 2014 24 VAC/VDC 150 mA maximum (half-wave) 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA 10 k, VDC input; 250 , 4-20 mA input Screw terminals 333 scim (5456 cm3/min) @ 20 psig (138 kPa) supply; 523 scim (8570 cm3/min) @ 45 psig (310 kPa) supply Brass barbs for 1/4" OD tubing None in steady state 45 psig (310 kPa) Clean dry air Minimum Tubing Length 15 ft. (4.6 m) Repeatability <1% full scale Linearity <1% full scale <1% full scale Hysteresis Output 0-20 psig (0-140 kPa) or 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) Operating Temperature 25 to 140F (-4 to 60C) Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 3.5"H x 3.3"W x 1.9"D (8.5 x 8.3 x 4.6 cm) Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg) Approvals CE Warranty 5 years
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1425
TRANSDUCERS
WIRING
UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS UCP-722 SERIES
FROM CONTROL SYSTEM

GND/COMMON INPUT SIGNAL POWER
TO DIGITAL INPUT OPTIONAL PRESSURE LOSS ALARM
NEW!
MANUAL ADJUST
INPUT VOLTAGE MODE MODE
ALARM MODE PRESSURE RANGE MODE (option)
INPUT SIGNAL
INSTALLATION
JUMPER CONFIGURATION INPUT Select CURRENT (4-20 mA) or VOLTAGE (0-5V or 0-10V) VOLTAGE For voltage mode of operation, select 0-5V or 0-10V SCALING Select 0-20 psi or 3-15 psi scaling MODE Select AUTO for normal operation, or MANUAL to adjust pressure using pushbuttons POWER/SIGNAL OPTIONS ALARM MODE RELAY The alarm contacts will open if the unit cannot obtain 80% of commanded pressure within two (2) minutes Power supply ground and signal GND/COMMON common QUICK INSTALL CAUTION: Use electrostatic discharge precautions (e.g., use of wrist strips) during installation and wiring to prevent equipment damage. ount transducer using screws provided. Take care to avoid 1. M damaging electronic components. 2. Wire transducer as shown in wiring diagram. 3. Congure jumpers for desired operation as shown. 4. A ttach pressure tubing to hose barbs. Observe MAIN and BRANCH port labels. Use exible 1/4" O.D. poly tubing for main and branch pneumatic connections. CAUTION: Main supply pressure must not exceed 45 psig. PL OPTION PRESSURE LOSS ALARM OPTION Normally closed, solid-state contacts open if main supply pressure fails, or transducer is otherwise unable to produce correct branch pressure. Connect to digital input of control system for alarm status indication. If commanded pressure is not within 80% inside a two (2) minute window, alarm contacts will open. 0-20 psi alarm contact will not change state when commanded pressure is four (4) psi or less 3-15 psi alarm contact will not change state when commanded pressure is 5.4 psi or less
TRANSDUCERS
INPUT SIGNAL 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, or 0-5 VDC input from control system POWER 22-30 VDC, 20-30 VAC. From control system or external power supply or transformer NOTE: In 24 VAC transformer applications, one side of transformer secondary is connected to signal.
23
MODEL UCP-722 UCP-722-PL
DESCRIPTION Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig or 0-20 psig output Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig or 0-20 psig output, with pressure loss alarm RELATED PRODUCTS DIN rail adapter bracket for snap-track mounted devices PAGE 1429
DIN-L1
1426
PRESSURE LOSS ALARM (OPTIONAL)
GND/COM
POWER
ON
Voltage 0-5V
Current
0-10V
0-20 psi
3-15 psi
Auto
Manual
OFF
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
OPERATION FEATURES
TRANSDUCERS
KELE UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS UCP-822A SERIES
The Kele UCP-822A microcontroller based electronic/ pneumatic transducer incorporates high performance poppet valve technology and low-power coils with digital control to provide unmatched accuracy and proven reliability. In addition to providing reliable, stable operation, the poppet valves used in the UCP-822A consume no air. The UCP822A features programmable pressure ranges and an LCD display. This universal transducer has eld selectable analog inputs for 4-20mA, voltage, tri-state, or PWM.
The UCP-822A-PL converts a selectable analog, tri-state or PWM input to a programmable psig output (0-25 psig range). The transducer is powered with 24 VAC/VDC. Upon a loss in power, the UCP-822A-PL air valves remain closed, so branch pressure will remain at the last value. The pressure loss alarm provides a contact closure if the UCP-822A-PL is unable to achieve the desired output within a xed length of time. This alarm may be changed to alarm if the transducer is set for manual operation. The UCP-822A-AO-PL adds an analog output for feedback of the branch pressure.
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
3.73 (9.5)
Extended PWM and Tristate settings Programmable pressure output up to 25 psig Field-selectable signal inputs (4-20mA, voltage, tristate, PWM) LCD display for local indication of readings No air consumption and quiet operation Easy mounting with snap track housing Pressure loss or manual mode alarm Optional analog output 4-20mA or 0-10 VDC selectable
3.45 (8.8)
1.8 (4.6)
TRANSDUCERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA Input Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Air Capacity Air Connections Air Consumption Maximum Pressure Media Compatibility 24 VAC/VDC 350 mA maximum (half-wave) 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, tristate, PWM 10 k, VDC input; 250 , 4-20 mA input Screw terminals 333 scim (5456 cm3/min) @ 20 psig (138 kPa) supply; 523 scim (8570 cm3/min) @ 45 psig (310 kPa) supply Brass barbs for 1/4" OD tubing None in steady state 45 psig (310 kPa) Clean, dry air Minimum Tubing Length 15 ft. (4.6 m) Repeatability <1% full scale Linearity <1% full scale Hysteresis <1% full scale Output 0-25 psig (0-175 kPa) congurable Operating Temperature 41 to 140F (5 to 60C) Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 3.5"H x 3.3"W x 1.9"D (8.5 x 8.3 x 4.6 cm) Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg) Approvals CE Warranty 5 years
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1427
TRANSDUCERS
CONFIGURATION
INPUT VOLTAGE INPUT
4-20 mA Voltage Tristate PWM Network Control
KELE UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS UCP-822A SERIES
0-10V 0-5V TRI-PULL-UP ON OFF
OPERATION 4-20 mA 0-10V MODE
Manual
Auto
TRISTATE
WIRING
Current/Voltage Control, Voltage Output Example
GND INPUT +24V CH2 CH1/PWM ALARM 4-20 mA 0-10V
Subtract Pressure Add Pressure
GND INPUT +24V CH2 CH1/PWM
OUTPUT 4-20 mA / 0-10V
CH1/PWM
Current/Voltage Control, Current Output Example

4-20mA 0-10V ALARM
ALARM
GND
INPUT
CH2
24V
NEW!
ALARM SETTING P-LOSS MAN OUTPUT
Tristate Timing Network FS Point Zero RUN
4-20 mA PROCESS METER
+
0-10V PROCESS METER

+
Digital Input (Contact Closure) Analog Out Common
Digital Input (Contact Closure)
POWER SOURCE
Analog Output (0-5 or 0-10V or 4-20 mA Common
Input switch set to voltage (0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC) Input volt jumper set to either 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC Input switch set to 4-20 mA Output jumper set to 0-10 VDC
POWER SOURCE
Input switch settings same as example 1 Output jumper set to 4-20mA
Pwm Control Example

GND INPUT +24V CH2 CH1/PWM ALARM 4-20 mA 0-10V
Tri-state Control Example

GND INPUT +24V CH2 CH1/PWM 4-20 mA 0-10V Add Pressure ALARM
TRANSDUCERS
PWM CONTACT
TRI-STATE CONTACTS
MODEL UCP-822A-AO-PL UCP-822A-AO-PL-R DESCRIPTION Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer, VDC, mA, tri-state, or PWM input, 0-25 psig output, analog output Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer, VDC, mA, tri-state, or PWM input, 0-25 psig output, analog output, w/restrictor Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer, VDC, mA, tri-state, or PWM input, 0-25 psig output Universal electronic/pneumatic transducer, VDC, mA, tri-state, or PWM input, 0-25 psig output, w/restrictor
23
UCP-822A-PL UCP-822A-PL-R
DIN-L1
RELATED PRODUCTS DIN rail adapter bracket for snap-track mounted devices
Subtract Pressure
POWER SOURCE
Input switch set to "PWM" Tri-State jumper set to "ON"
CH2 CH1 OR OR
POWER SOURCE
Input switch set to TRI-STATE Tri-State jumper set to ON
PAGE 1429
1428
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
TRANSDUCERS
DIN RAIL ADAPTER BRACKET DIN-L1
The Kele DIN-L1 is designed to allow the vertical mounting of track-mounted components in an assembled panel. Flexibility is provided in mounting transducers and power supplies. The bracket comes with a DIN rail mounting adapter and (2) #8-32 machine screws for easily mounting Snap-Track. Holes are provided to line up with the slots in Snap-Track.
Vertical mounting saves space Holes provided for Snap-Track Convenient for transducers and power supplies DIN rail adapter and 2 mounting screws provided
DIN-L1
SPECIFICATIONS
Materials Of Construction Weight Warranty 0.090 aluminum with ASA61 gray paint 0.1 lb (0.045 kg) 18 months DIN-L1 with UCP-722 and DIN rail mounted (DIN rail not included)
DIMENSIONS in (cm)
0.063 (0.2) 1.35 (3.4) 0.80 (0.2) 0.48 (1.2) 0.102 (0.3)
TRANSDUCERS
0.33 (0.8) Slot thru 1.412 O.C. 0.67 (1.7)
0.67 (1.7)
0.67 (1.7)
0.33 (0.8) 0.67 (1.7) 3.0 (7.6)
0.063 (0.2)
0.67 (1.7) Holes drilled and tapped for #8-32 machine screw (typical for six shown)
Side View
1.04 (2.6)
Rear View
0.102 (0.3)
1.00 (2.5)
4.0 (10.2)
23
MODEL DIN-L1 DESCRIPTION DIN rail adapter bracket for snap-track mounted devices
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1429
TRANSDUCERS
DESCRIPTION
The KMC Controls IP300 Electronic / Pneumatic Transducer converts an analog voltage or current input signal into a linear pneumatic output signal of 3 to 15 psig. The pneumatic output provides accurate positioning of dampers and valve actuators used in HVAC systems. The IP300 features three selectable inputs of 1-5 VDC, 2-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA. The unit can be mounted in any orientation with the 3.25" snap track. The transducer is equipped with an internal lter and a gauge tap for pressure output indication.
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER IP300
NEW!
IP300
FEATURES
Three user-selectable inputs 24 VAC or VDC power supply Gauge tap for pressure output indication Zero and span adjustment Snap track mounting
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA Input Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Air Capacity Air Connections 24 VAC/VDC 1 VA @ 24 VAC; 50 mA @ 24 VDC 1-5 VDC, 2-10 VDC, or 4-20 mA 100 k @ 1-5 VDC; 200 k @ 2-10 VDC; 250 @ 4-20 mA Screw terminals 200 scim (55 mL/s) 3/16" diameter barbs for 1/4" OD tubing; 1/8" FNPT gauge port Air Consumption 28.8 scim (7.9 mL/s) @ 20 psig (138 kPa) supply Maximum Pressure 30 psig (207 kPa) 1% of full scale Linearity Hysteresis 0.75% full scale 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) Output Operating Temperature 40 to 120F (4 to 49C) Operating Humidity 10 to 90% RH (non-condensing) Weight 5.5 oz (155 g) Warranty 1 year
DIMENSIONS / WIRING
in (cm) 2.75 (6.9) 2.53 (6.4)
0.875 (2.2)
0.875 (2.2)
TRANSDUCERS
3.375 (8.6)
GND IN 24V
GND Out 1-5V
23
MODEL IP300 PG-05
DESCRIPTION Electronic/pneumatic transducer from KMC RELATED PRODUCTS Pressure gauge, 0-30 psig (10-200 kPa), 1.5" dial, 1/8" NPT center back mount PAGE 1111
1430
2-10V 1.5V 4-20 mA
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES High airow capacity Wide supply pressure range Direct or reverse acting Convenient external span and zero adjustments Bracket included for panel or wall mounting APPLICATION
TRANSDUCERS
CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER T-1000
The T-1000 Industrial-grade Current / Pneumatic Transducer reduces a supply pressure to a regulated output pressure that is directly proportional to a 4-20 mA input signal. An integral pneumatic volume booster is included in the design to provide high ow capacity up to 20,736 scim (20 m3/hr).
T-1000
The T-1000 is calibrated at the factory for direct-acting operation but may be used in the reverse-acting mode by reversing the polarity of the signal leads and recalibrating. When calibrated for reverse-acting applications, the T-1000 transducer provides a minimum of its full rated output pressure (i.e., 15 psig/103 kPa) upon input signal failure. The 4-20 mA input to 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output can be recalibrated using zero and span adjustments to provide 3-9 psig (21-62 kPa) or 9-15 psig (62-103 kPa) output for split ranging applications.
WIRING / PIPING
in (cm)
(black) (white) Zero Span
4-20 mA Signal
Alternate Output/ Gauge Port plugged Output Air 1/4'' FNPT
Supply Air 1/4'' FNPT
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Input Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Air Capacity Pressure Range Air Connections Air Consumption Repeatability None, loop powered 4-20 mA, 1-9 VDC (-1 model) 180 @ 4-20 mA, 985 @ 1-9 VDC Leads with 1/2" NPT conduit connection 7,776 scim (7.6 m3/hr) @ 25 psig (175 kPa) supply; 20,736 scim (20 m3/hr) @ 100 psig (700 kPa) supply 18 psig (124 kPa) minimum, 100 psig (690 kPa) maximum 1/4" FNPT with auxiliary gauge port 0.1 scfm (0.2 m3/hr) @ midrange <0.5% of span Linearity Hysteresis Output <1% of span <1% of span 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa); adjustable, can split range 3-9 or 9-15 psig Operating Temperature -20 to 160F (-30 to 70C) Dimensions 2.2"H x 4.2"W x 2.3"D (5.5 x 10.8 x 5.7 cm) Weight 2.1 lb (0.94 kg) Approvals CE 18 months Warranty
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL T-1000 T-1000-1 T-1000-C DESCRIPTION Current/pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output Current/pneumatic transducer, 1-9 VDC input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output Current/pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output, pre-calibrated
23
PAGE 1111
010115-000 M-111 PG-05
RELATED PRODUCTS DIN rail adapter for T-1000 current/pneumatic transducer 1/4" MNPT x 1/8" FNPT bushing Pressure gauge, 0-30 psig (10-200 kPa), 1.5" dial, 1/8" NPT center back mount
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1431
TRANSDUCERS
DESCRIPTION
The ABB 22/07-16 current/pneumatic transducer is a compact, high performance instrument providing many of the same characteristics that are found on industrial-grade transducers. This I/P transducer is designed for high air capacity HVAC applications where mounting space is limited and an industrial appearance is important.
CURRENT / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER 22/07-16
NEW!
DIMENSIONS / WIRING / PIPING
FEATURES Loop-powered control Small size Mounts in any position High air capacity High repeatability DIN rail mounting
in (cm)
OPERATION The 22/07-16 converts a 4-20 mA signal to a 3-15 psig (21103 kPa) pressure signal using a unique converting system with a stationary coil and low-mass moving magnet that gives this unit high repeatability and reliability. The unit is not sensitive to vibrations or shock and can be mounted in any position without recalibration. The 22/07-16 is supplied with screw-type terminals for electric connection and 1/8" FNPT ports for pneumatic connections. A clip-on base is provided for DIN rail mounting.
4-20 mA Signal
1.42 (3.61)
1.26 (3.2)
1.42 (3.61)
+ _ 4.17 (10.59)
Main Air 20 psig

M B
Output Air Signal 3-15 psig
NPT 1/8"
S/Zul
1/8" FNPT Pressure Connections
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Input Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Air Capacity Air Connections Air Consumption None, loop powered 4-20 mA 200 nominal Screw terminals 2764 scim (755 cm3/s) @ 20 psig (138 kPa) supply 1/8" FNPT 0.08 scfm (37.8 cm3/s) @ 20 psig (138 kPa) supply Maximum Pressure Linearity Hysteresis Output 40 psig (276 kPa) 3% 0.3% 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa), linear to input and direct acting Operating Temperature -40 to 180F (-40 to 82C) Weight 0.6 lb (0.3 kg) Approvals CE Warranty 1 year
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL 22/07-16 DESCRIPTION Current/pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output RELATED PRODUCTS 1/4" barb x 1/8" MNPT fitting Gauge tee with mounting tabs 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m) 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant Pressure gauge, 0-30 psig (10-200 kPa), 1.5" dial, 1/8" NPT center back mount PAGE 903 903 860 860 1111
23
B-132 B-373-1 BAM-1000 DIN-3F PG-05
1432
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
Supply Voltage CP-8551 CP-8552, -8511 Supply VA Supply Watts CP-8552 CP-8511 Input CP-8551 CP-8552 CP-8511 1.6 W maximum 3.8 W
TRANSDUCERS
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER CP-8500 SERIES
The Kele CP-8500 Series Electronic / Pneumatic Transducers handle a wide variety of pneumatic valve and damper applications that require a 3-15 psig control signal from an electronic controller output. The CP-8551 is a basic two-wire loop-powered unit with 4-20 mA input. The CP-8552 is a 3-wire unit with a jumper-selectable input for 4-20 mA, 6-9 VDC or 0-10 VDC. The CP-8511 has a variety of jumperselectable inputs, a pressure gauge, manual override, and 20 VDC power output for auxiliary components.
Panel or DIN-rail mount for quick snap-on installation High accuracy and low hysteresis for precise control Long-term, driftless operation with high repeatability for long life and high performance Low air consumption to save energy High airow capacity to handle large pneumatic components and long tubing runs Models with eld-selectable inputs Integral 20 VDC auxiliary power supply, pressure gauge and manual override on CP-8511
CP-8551
CP-8511-024
None, 4-20 mA loop-powered 20 to 30 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 24 to 30 VDC 3.9 VA (CP-8552)
Hysteresis Output Output Voltage Adjustments CP-8552
0.75% of span @ 75F (24C) 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) 20 VDC auxiliary output (CP-8511 only), 50 mA maximum
Input Impedance CP-8551 550 CP-8552 550 (current input); >10 k (voltage input) CP-8511 250 @ 4-20 mA; 1000 @ 1-5 mA; >10 k for voltage inputs Wiring Terminations Screw terminals for 16 to 22 AWG wire Action CP-8551, -8552 Direct acting CP-8511 Direct or reverse acting, jumper selectable Air Capacity 550 scim (150 ml/s) Air Connections Barbed ttings for 1/4" OD tubing Air Consumption 0.012 scfm (5.66 ml/s) @ 20 psig (138 kPa) supply Maximum Pressure 30 psig (207 kPa) maximum Media Compatibility Clean, dry air, 20 psig nominal supply pressure Linearity 1% of span @ 75F (24C) March 2014
4-20 mA 4-20 mA, 0-10 VDC, 6-9 VDC, jumper selectable 4-20 mA, 1-5 mA, 6-9 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 1-11 VDC, 2-10 VDC, jumper selectable
Adjustable start point and span potentiometers for voltage input CP-8511 Field adjustable zero potentiometer Manual Override Auto/manual switch enables output override using a manual output potentiometer, LED goes off when in Manual mode (CP-8511 only) Feedback Auto/manual feedback provided by isolated open collector output transistor (TP1, TP2) (CP-8511 only) Operating Temperature 32 to 140F (0 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing Mounting Vertical, within 5 Enclosure Rating NEMA 1 Dimensions CP-8551, -8552 4.6"H x 2.8"W x 2.6"D (11.8 x 7.1 x 6.8 cm) CP-8511 4.6"H x 5.0"W x 2.6"D (11.8 x 12.7 x 6.8 cm) Weight CP-8551, -8552 0.4 lb (0.2 kg) CP-8511 0.8 lb (0.4 kg) Approvals UL 873, le #E9429; CSA, C22.2 No. 24-93; CE, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, low voltage directive 72/23/EEC Warranty 1 year
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1433
TRANSDUCERS
23
TRANSDUCERS
WIRING
CP-8551 2-wire 4-20 mA loop powered
CP-8551
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER CP-8500 SERIES
M B
M 3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa to controlled device (direct acting)
+4 to 20 mA Current Input Signal Signal Common
NEW!
CP-8552 Wired for current input (loop-powered)
CP-8552 M M
1
Signal Common
COM
2 3
3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa to controlled device (direct acting)
+4 to 20 mA Current Input Signal
+IV1
CP-8552 Wired for voltage input (factory calibrated for 0-10 VDC range, if switched to 6-9 VDC range the zero and span must be re-calibrated)
24 Vac/dc Power Common Signal Common Voltage Input Signal 1
24H
CP-8511 Wiring
CP-8552
24 Vac 50/60 Hz
Typical Controller
CP-8511
24H 24G 2 +20
M B
M Branch
1 +20 V supply: 50 mA maximum current output to drive other devices. 2 COM terminal is internally connected to 24G. When multiple CP-8511s or other devices are powered by a common source, uniform wiring polarity must be maintained between all 24H and 24G terminals. Check to ensure that the controllers COM terminal is not connected to any other ground reference.
Optional Control Equipment (Not Provided)
M B
M 3 to 15 psig (21 to 103 kPa to controlled device (direct acting)
+IN COM 1
1 2
COM +IV1
Main and branch air connections "B" & "M" (output) Square post Jumper block Jumper
CP-8511
Transducer Zero adjust potentiometer
24H 24G +IN COM
Branch pressure gauge
TRANSDUCERS
Green LED
+20 OC OE
AUTO MANUAL
TP1 (+) & TP2 (-) connection
Auto/manual switch
Manual adjust potentiometer
MODEL CP-8551 CP-8552 CP-8511-024 BAM-1000 DIN-3F FILN05 T-101 DESCRIPTION Current/pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output Current or voltage/pneumatic transducer, 4-20 mA, 6-9 VDC or 0-10 VDC input, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output Current or voltage/pneumatic transducer, multiple eld selectable mA or VDC inputs, 3-15 psig (21-103 kPa) output RELATED PRODUCTS 35 mm aluminum DIN mounting rail 39.4" (1m) 35 mm DIN rail, steel, 39.4" (1m), RoHS compliant Inline disposable air filter, straight, with barbs for 1/4" OD tubing 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) PAGE 860 860 900 901
23
1434
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!

TRANSDUCERS
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER EP-311/313 SERIES
The Mamac Model EP-311/313 Series incorporates quiet low wattage poppet valves and a pressure sensor to measure and adjust the branch line pressure proportional to the input. This unit has no air consumption and is immune to supply line pressure uctuations. The Model EP-313 incorporates a manual override switch and, in the manual mode, the pressure can be increased or decreased with two push button switches. This feature is most desirable for check out/ commissioning and manual operation in case of controller failure. The Universal 24 VAC/24 VDC supply voltage and eldselectable 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, or 0-10 VDC inputs ensure single unit compatibility to most of the systems. Unique steel chassis design substantially reduces the overall size of the unit and, at the same time, provides for ease of installation in a control panel directly or with a snap track. A precision gauge is provided for the branch line pressure. Rugged aluminum manifold, brass barb ttings, oating poppet solenoid valves, silicon pressure sensor, high performance electronics and a liberal ve year warranty are some of the features which make the Model EP-311/313 Series the highest performing and the most reliable electropneumatic transducers in the industry.
EP-311/313
DIMENSIONS
100% solid state piezoresistive silicon pressure sensor High air ow capacity Field selectable 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC or 0-10 VDC input Smallest size in the industry Short circuit and reverse polarity protected inputs and outputs Conforms to EMC and RoHS standards
TRANSDUCERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 18-28 VAC/VDC Supply Current 150 mA Input Signal 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC Input Impedance 301 (4-20mA); 10K (0-5/0-10 VDC) Signal Output 3-15 psig or 0-20 psig Thermal Effect 0.025%/F(0.03%/C) Media Compatibility Clean dry air or any inert gas Accuracy 1% of FS Operating Temperature 25 to 150F (4 to 65C) Operating Humidity 10-90% RH Non-Condensing Weight 1.0 lb (0.45 kg) Approvals CE, RoHS Warranty 5 years Maximum Supply Pressure 40 psig
23
For Technical / Applicaton Assistance call your nearest office Shown in inches and mllimeteres (mm)
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1435
TRANSDUCERS
WIRING
ELECTRONIC / PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCER EP-311/313 SERIES
NEW!
Wiring Diagram for 24 VDC Supply Configuration
Wiring Diagram for 24 VAC Supply Configuration
MODEL EP311020 EP311315 EP313020 EP313315 DESCRIPTION Electropneumatic transducer without manual override, 0-20 psig Electropneumatic transducer without manual override, 3-15 psig Electropneumatic transducer with manual override, 0-20 psig Electropneumatic transducer with manual override, 3-15 psig
23
TRANSDUCERS
T-101
RELATED PRODUCTS PAGE 1/4" OD black poly tubing, 1 coil, 250 ft (76 m) 901
1436
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES 255-step resolution in any range Adjustable zero and span Positive or negative input reference 0-20 mA and 0-18 VDC outputs (eld adjustable) 4-20 mA and 1-5 VDC factory-set outputs User-selectable time base Jumper-selectable manual output
TRANSDUCERS
PULSE / TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG TRANSDUCERS PWA SERIES
The Kele PWA-1A Pulse-to-analog Transducer converts a DIP switch selectable pulse-width modulation (PWM) input to 0-18V and 0-20 mA outputs (factory set for 1-5V and 4-20 mA). The PWA-1A is furnished in a unique slim-line design housing, which saves panel space, and can be ordered with an optional DIN rail mounting adapter. The PWA-2A is a snap-track mounted version of the PWA-1A.
The PWA-1T tri-state-to-analog transducer converts two contact closure inputs (tri-state/oating control) to 0-18V and 0-20 mA outputs (factory set for 1-5V and 4-20 mA). It is mounted in a unique slim-line design housing, which saves panel space, and can be ordered with an optional DIN rail mounting adapter. The PWA-2T is the snap-track mounted version of the PWA-1T.
PWA-1A (PWA-1T)
On all models, the outputs are zero and span adjustable for a wide variety of ranges (factory set for 4-20 mA and 1-5 V). Current and voltage outputs are active simultaneously.
PWA-2A (PWA-2T)
TRANSDUCERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Input PWA-1A, -2A PWA-1T, -2T Input Signal PWA-1A, -2A PWA-1T, -2T Wiring Terminations Accuracy Output Output Burden 24 VAC 10% or 24 VDC 10% 120 mA half wave @ 24 VAC, or 50 mA @ 24 VDC Pulse-width-modulation (PWM) Tri-state/Floating, two dry contacts PWM: Time base 0.1-2.56, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6 or 0.59-2.93 seconds, DIP switch selectable Tri-state/oating: time base 2.55, 5.1, 12.75, 25.5, 59.9, 90.5, or 119.9 seconds, DIP switch selectable Screw terminals 1% of span Simultaneous current and voltage outputs 650 maximum (4-20 mA); 25 mA maximum combined current and voltage Factory set at 4-20 mA, adjustable 0-20 mA zero and span Output Resolution 255 steps Output Voltage Factory set 1-5 VDC, adjustable (18 VDC maximum) Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions PWA-1A, -1T 3.4"H x 2.0"W x 4.8"D (8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm) PWA-2A, -2T 3.3"H x 4.6"W x 1.5"D (8.3 x 11.8 x 3.8 cm) Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg) Warranty 18 months Output Current
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1437
TRANSDUCERS
PWA-1A / PWA-2A PWM AND MULTIPLEXED PWM-TO-ANALOG CONTROL
JUMPER SETTINGS MAN OVR Automatic Control MAN OVR Manual Control
MANUAL OUTPUT CONTROL
The 24V power supply must be connected and the override jumper moved to the MAN OVR position covering the center and inner jumper pins. The manual adjustment potentiometer can then be used to vary the output. AUTOMATIC OUTPUT CONTROL
NEW!
Switch 4
Off Off On On Off
Move the override jumper to cover the center and the outer jumper pins.
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS Switch 1 Always off Operating Mode

Single Unit PWM Control
Switch PWM Time Base (sec) 2

Off 0.1-2.65 0.1-5.2 0.1-12.85 0.1-25.6 0.59-2.93
3
Off Off Off Off On
5
Off On Off On Off
Operating Mode
Single Unit PWM Control
6
Off
Switch 7
Off
8
Off
PWA-1A / PWA-2A WIRING

VOLTS ADJ MA ZERO MA SPAN
PWA-1A
(enclosed) (track mounted) 1-5V and 4-20 mA outputs are simultaneously active + 1-5V Output 4-20 mA Output 24 VAC/VDC Power Supply
PWA-1A
(enclosed) (track mounted)
MODE TIME
MODE TIME
MUX BASE ADDR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
MUX BASE ADDR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1-5V and 4-20 mA outputs are simultaneously active
PWA-2A
PWA-2A
TRANSDUCERS
1-5V Output 4-20 mA Output 24 VAC/VDC Power Supply 24 VAC/VDC for Signal
+ + + +
MAN OVR
Manual Override Jumper (shown in manual position) Manual Override Potentiometer
+ +
MAN OVR
VOLTS OUT MA OUT COM 24V PWR SIG IN + SIG IN
STAT L2 SIG L1
See Table 1. LED Indication
BAS Controller PWM Contacts*
VOLTS OUT MA OUT COM 24V PWR SIG IN + SIG IN
STAT L2 SIG L1
See Table 1 LED Indication
BAS Controller PWM Contacts*
Separate 24V Supplies for Power and Signal
Common 24V Supply for Power and Signal
23
* PWM signal input terminals are optoisolated and polarity insensitive. PWM computer contacts can switch either positive or negative PWM wire lead.
1438
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
JUMPER SETTINGS MAN OVR Automatic Control MAN OVR Manual Control
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
TRANSDUCERS
PWA-1T / PWA-2T TRI-STATE-TO-ANALOG CONTROL

MANUAL OUTPUT CONTROL The 24V power supply must be connected and the override jumper moved to the "MAN OVR" position covering the center and inner jumper pins. The manual adjustment potentiometer can then be used to vary the output. AUTOMATIC OUTPUT CONTROL Move the override jumper to cover the center and the outer jumper pins.
Switch 1
Always off
Operating Mode
Tri-state control
Switch 2
Off
Tri-state Time Base

2.55 sec 5.1 sec 12.75 sec 25.5 sec 59.9 sec 90.5 sec 119.9 sec
3
Off Off Off Off On On On
Switch 4
Off Off On On Off Off On
5
Off On Off On Off On Off
Operating Mode
Tri-state Control
6
Off
Switch 7
Off
8
Off
PWA-1T / PWA-2T WIRING

1-5V and 4-20 mA outputs are simultaneously active

1-5V Output 4-20 mA Output
PWA-1T (enclosed) PWA-2T (track mounted)
+ +
MAN OVR

VOLTS OUT MA OUT COM 24 V PWR SIG IN SIG IN
TS POL
24 VAC/VDC Power Supply +
STAT L2 See Table 1. SIG LED Indication L1
The PWA-1T and PWA-2T provide a 4-20 mA current source and 1-5 VDC output proportional to the length of time an increase or decrease signal is held. A contact closure wired in series with the SIG IN + terminal will increase the output signal in proportion to the length of the signal given. A contact closure wired in series with the SIG IN terminal will decrease the output signal in proportion to the length of the signal given. Tri-state example: Using a standard PWA-1T or PWA-2T with a 25.5second time base and a 4-20 mA and 1-5V span with output currently at 4 mA and 1V, pulsing would operate as follows:
1. 5.1-sec increase pulse issued 2. Another 5.1-sec increase pulse issued 3. 5.1-sec decrease pulse issued Output increases 20% to 7.2 mA, 1.8V Output increases another 20% to 10.4 mA, 2.6V Output decreases 20% to 7.2 mA, 1.8V
TRANSDUCERS
BAS Controller Tri-state Contacts
Increase Decrease
TABLE 1. LED INDICATION

L2- STAT (green) Steady Green Power On Slow Green Blink Attention mode Rapid Green Blink Select mode L1- SIG (red) Steady Red PWM or tri-state signal present
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1439
TRANSDUCERS
CALIBRATION
Tools required: a multimeter and a signal generator.
The PWA-1A, PWA-2A, PWA-1T, and PWA-2T outputs are factory set at 4-20 mA and 1-5V. To change the calibration, see the instructions below. After calibration, alternate between minimum and maximum input pulses and ne tune the mA and voltage potentiometers for desired mA or volt outputs (typically just one more pass is necessary). FOR APPLICATIONS REQUIRING CURRENT (mA) ONLY OR CURRENT AND VOLTAGE OUTPUT 1. Using a signal generator: PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a minimum input pulse signal. PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the selected time base, such as 25.5 sec, to the SIG - terminal. 2. With a multimeter connected to mA output, set MA ZERO potentiometer at desired minimum mA output. 3. Using a signal generator: PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a maximum input pulse signal. PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the selected time base to the SIG + terminal. 4. Set MA SPAN potentiometer at desired maximum mA output. 5. Calibration of mA output is complete. If voltage output is also required, proceed to step 6. 6. With multimeter connected to voltage output, set maximum voltage output desired with the VOLT ADJ potentiometer. 7. Determine the ratio of maximum mA output to minimum mA output (i.e., 20 mA maximum output: 4 mA minimum output = 5:1). 8. The minimum voltage is automatically set according to the ratio of maximum-to-minimum mA output. Using the example from step 7 above for the mA range and using a 10V maximum voltage output, the ratio remains the same (i.e., 20 mA maximum: 4 mA minimum = 5:1 = 10V:2V). The minimum voltage output would be automatically set at 2V. Note: To change voltage output, repeat Steps 3, 6, 7, and 8. FOR APPLICATIONS REQUIRING VOLTAGE OUTPUT ONLY Determine the minimum and maximum voltage output required (0-18V total range). 1. 2. Using the following formula, determine the minimum mA output: minimum mA output = 20 mA x desired minimum volts desired maximum volts Using a signal generator: 3. PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a minimum input pulse signal. PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the selected time base, such as 25.5 sec, to the SIG - terminal. 4. With a multimeter connected to mA output, set MA ZERO potentiometer at calculated minimum mA output (from formula in step 2). 5. Using a signal generator: PWA-1A, -2A: Apply a maximum input pulse signal. PWA-1T, -2T: Apply a contact closure equal to the selected time base to the SIG + terminal. 6. Set MA SPAN potentiometer at 20 mA. 7. With multimeter connected to voltage output, set the VOLT ADJ potentiometer to desired maximum voltage. The minimum voltage is automatically set according to the ratio of maximum-to-minimum mA output.
NEW!
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL PWA-1A PWA-2A PWA-1T PWA-2T DESCRIPTION Pulse-to-analog enclosed transducer Pulse-to-analog snap-track mount transducer Tri-state-to-analog enclosed transducer Tri-state-to-analog snap-track mount transducer OPTIONS 47 DIN rail mounting adapter (For PWA-1A and PWA-1T only) C Factory calibrate for special output range (specify range when ordering) 47 Example: PWA-1A-47 Enclosed pulse-to-analog transducer with DIN rail mounting
23
PWA-1A
1440
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL ANALOG TRANSDUCERS UAT-1, UAT-2 SERIES
The Kele UAT-1 and UAT-2 Series Universal Analog Transducers are used for analog signal conversion or signal scaling. They will accept a DC voltage, current, or resistive input signal and output a non-isolated voltage or current output. These transducers can be direct or reverse acting and are easily eld calibrated to meet a wide variety of applications.The UAT-1 is furnished in a unique slimline design housing, which saves panel space, and can be ordered with an optional DIN rail mounting adapter. The UAT-2 is a snap-track mounted version, and its operation is identical to the UAT-1. UAT-1
DC voltage, current, or resistive input Inputs from 0-20 VDC, 0-40 mA or 0-10 k Input and output jumper selectable and easily eld calibrated Outputs from 0-18 VDC or 0-20 mA Direct or reverse acting, jumper selectable Reference voltage and current available to power an input device or sensor UAT-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Input 24 VAC 10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC 10% 50 mA maximum @ 24 VDC; 100 mA maximum @ 24 VAC Jumper selectable and adjustable; Voltage ranges from 0-1.09 VDC (w/minimum span 55 mV) to 0-20 VDC (w/minimum span 1V); Current ranges from 0-4 mA (minimum span 0.2 mA) to 0-40 mA (minimum span 2.2 mA); Three-wire potentiometer ranges from 0-100 to 0-10 k; Twowire variable resistance ranges from 0-100 to 0-5 k DC voltage, current, or resistance 250 @ 0-4 mA & 0-40 mA; 156 @ 0-1.09 VDC & 0-10.9 VDC; 293 @ 0-2 VDC & 0-20 VDC Screw terminals Direct or reverse acting <0.1% of span Jumper selectable and fully adjustable zero/span; 0-18 VDC @ 20 mA maximum load; 0-20 mA @ 650 maximum load For sensor excitation only, jumper selectable; 1.2 mA @ 5 k maximum, 5 mA @ 1.5 k maximum, 10 mA @ 750 k maximum Output Voltage For sensor excitation only, jumper selectable; 1.2 VDC @ 12 mA maximum (100 minimum), 5 VDC @ 12 mA maximum (417 minimum), 10 VDC @ 12 mA maximum (834 minimum) Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions UAT-1 3.4"H x 2.0"W x 4.8"D (8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm) UAT-2 3.3"H x 4.6"W x 1.0"D (8.3 x 11.8 x 2.5 cm) 0.8 lb (0.36 kg) Weight Warranty 18 months Output Current
TRANSDUCERS
Input Signal Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Action Linearity Output
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1441
TRANSDUCERS
WIRING
Z1 SPN Z2
0-18 VDC or 0-20 mA Output Jumper-Selectable, Adjustable
NRM NRM HI LO HI LO D R 1.2 5 10 MA V X1 10
UNIVERSAL ANALOG TRANSDUCERS UAT-1, UAT-2 SERIES
ZERO 1 ZERO 2 SPAN
ACT
REF
INPUT
24 VAC/VDC Power Supply
MA 10V 20V
NEW!
INPUT JUMPERS
INPUT SIGNAL RANGE INPUT JUMPER POSITIONS 10 x1 10V 10 x1 20V REF JUMPERS 0-1.09V, 55 mV min span 0-2V, 100 mV min span 0-20V, 1V min span 0-10.9V, 550 mV min span 10V mA 20V mA 0-4 mA, 0.22 mA min span 0-40 mA, 2.2 mA min span 10 x1 x1 x1 x1 V 10 Three-wire potentiometer 10V ref (834 min) Three-wire potentiometer (None) (None) V V mA mA mA 5 1.2 10 5 1.2 5V ref (417 min) Three-wire potentiometer 1.2V ref (100 min) (None) V 10 Two-wire variable resistance 10 mA ref (750 max) Two-wire variable resistance 5 mA ref (1.5 k max) Two-wire variable resistance 1.2 mA ref (5 k max) If (ref mA) x (max ) 1.09V x 1 (None) If (ref mA) x (max ) 1.09V 10 (None)
If REF output is required for external sensor excitation, jumper for appropriate voltage or current source.If not used, set jumpers to:
OUT
MA V
SIG OUT 24V PWR COM REF OUT SIG IN COM SIG REF IN OUT REF OUT SIG IN (VOLTS)
Power LED
UAT-1 UAT-2
COM SIG IN REF OUT (MA)
COM
SIG IN
COM
0-20 VDC or 0-40 mA Input Jumper-Selectable, Adjustable (no connection required to REF OUT terminal) Three-Wire Potentiometer 100 min to 10 k max element Two-Wire Variable Resistance 100 min to 5 k max element
CALIBRATION 1. Set output OUT jumper to V or MA as desired. 2. Set INPUT jumpers for type and range of input signal present. See Input Jumpers table above. 3. If using the reference output for sensor excitation, set the two REF jumpers for the proper output type and value. Choices are 1.2V, 5V, 10V, 1.2 mA, 5 mA, 10 mA. If not using the reference output, jumper as a voltage output. 4. Set action ACT jumper to direct D or reverse R as desired. 5. Set span jumper SPN to LO. Turn SPAN pot clockwise 25 turns. 6. Remove both Z1 jumpers. Trim ZERO 1 pot for minimum desired output value. Presence/absence of input signal has no effect on this adjustment. 7. Reinstall both Z1 jumpers. Set Z2 jumper to LO position. 8. Apply an input signal value that is to produce minimum output. Trim ZERO 2 pot for minimum output value (same value set in step 6). If desired value cannot be achieved, remove Z2 jumper and trim ZERO 2 pot again. If desired value is still not achieved, place Z2 jumper in HI position and trim ZERO 2 pot again. 9. Apply input signal value that is to produce maximum output. Trim SPAN pot for maximum output value. If SPAN pot does not go high enough, move the SPN jumper from LO position to HI position. 10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until both minimum and maximum output values are correct. Typically, just one more pass is sufcient. 11. Apply a midpoint input signal. Verify that output goes to center of output range.
TRANSDUCERS
23
MODEL DESCRIPTION UAT-1 Universal analog enclosed/field-calibrated transducer UAT-2 Universal analog snap-track mounted/field-calibrated transducer OPTIONS C Factory calibration (specify input and output when ordering) 47 DIN rail mounting adapter (UAT-1 only) UAT-1
UCM-SPA
Example: UAT-1C Universal analog transducer with factory calibration

RELATED PRODUCTS Setpoint potentiometer, 0-10 k, three-wire potentiometer on stainless steel plate for remote mounting, 0-100% setpoint PAGE 1363
1442
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
TRANSDUCERS
VOLTAGE & CURRENT CONVERTER / RESCALER VTI SERIES
The Kele VTI Series Voltage and Current Converter / Rescaler will convert voltage signals in the range of 1-19V or current signals in the range of 1.33-76 mA into a 4-20 mA non-isolated signal. This current source signal can be direct or reverse acting and can be used to drive grounded 4-20 mA loads utilizing a single power supply. The VTI also accepts an input from a resistive potentiometer. The VTI-1 is a singleinput, single-output device, and the VTI-2 accepts a single input and provides dual outputs. VTI-2-H VTI-1
APPLICATION Voltage to current conversion Resistance to current conversion Current to current scaling Setpoint adjustment using potentiometer Signal duplication (one input/two outputs) Averaging of 4-20 mA loops Signal reversal Signal sequencing
Converts voltage, current or potentiometer signal into 4-20 mA signal Direct or reverse acting 6 or 10 VDC output reference voltage available to power input device Loss of input signal results in 0 mA output LED indication of valid input signal (VTI-1) Dual output model Independently congurable outputs
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current VTI-1 VTI-2 Input Input Signal Input Impedance VTI-1 22-27 VDC, half-wave 50 mA 100 mA 1-19 VDC range (1V minimum span) or 4-40 mA range Loss threshold 0.7 VDC 301 k @ 1-19 VDC; 250 @ 4-40 mA with 4 mA minimum span; 500 @ 2-38 mA with 2 mA minimum span; 750 @ 1.3-25 mA with 1.33 mA minimum span 150 k @ 1-19 VDC; 250 @ 4-40 mA with 4 mA minimum span; 500 @ 2-38 mA with 2 mA minimum span; 750 @ 1.3-25 mA with 1.33 mA minimum span Screw terminals Direct or reverse acting <1% of span Output VTI-1 Single VTI-2 Dual Output Burden 850 maximum @ 24 VDC; Rmaximum=(Vsupply - 7)/20 mA Output Current 4-20 mA Reference voltage 10 VDC @ 15 mA Output Voltage maximum (1-19 VDC input), 6 VDC @ 10 mA maximum (1-11 VDC input) Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions VTI-1 1.8"H x 2.3"W x 0.8"D (4.5 x 5.7 x 2.2 cm) VTI-2 4.0"H x 2.3"W x 1.8"D (10.2 x 5.7 x 4.5 cm) Weight VTI-1 2 oz (69 g) VTI-2 6 oz (207 g) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 18 months
TRANSDUCERS
VTI-2
Wiring Terminations Action Linearity
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1443
TRANSDUCERS
WIRING
24 VDC Power Supply
VOLTAGE & CURRENT CONVERTER / RESCALER VTI SERIES
VTI
(blue) Voltage or Current Signal (white) (black) (purple) (no connection) (yellow) 4-20 mA 4-20 mA Output V SIG IN + 24V PWR COM REF V OUT MA SIG OUT
NEW!
24 VDC Power Supply Locate VTI close to potentiometer to minimize noise pickup. VTI with XR1 V SIG IN Increase (blue) (white) (black) + 24V PWR COM
UCM-SPA or Potentiometer Sensor - any end-to-end value from 100 to 10 k. Specify pot range when ordering.
(purple) (red) UAD-R1 (black) (yellow) 4-20 mA
REF V OUT MA SIG OUT
For signal reversal (20-4 mA OUT), specify reverse acting when ordering.
4-20 mA Output
Voltage to Current, Current to Current, and Signal Reversal
Using a Potentiometer to Vary a 4-20 mA Signal

24 VDC Power Supply
24 VDC Power Supply
VTI-2
VTI-2 (blue)
Voltage or Current Signal
V SIG IN + 24V PWR COM REF V OUT MA SIG OUT #1 MA SIG OUT #2
(white) (black) (purple) (no connection) (yellow) (brown)
Voltage or Current Signal
(blue) (white) (black) (purple) (no connection) (yellow) (brown)
V SIG IN + 24V PWR COM REF V OUT MA SIG OUT #1 MA SIG OUT #2
4-20 mA Output #1
4-20 mA Output #1
4-20 mA Output #2
4-20 mA Output #2
Example: One 4-20 mA input becomes two identical 4-20 mA outputs.
Example: Output #1 is 4-20 mA over a 4-12 mA (1-3V) input. Output #2 is 4-20 mA over a 12-20 mA (3-5V) input.
Signal Duplication
Signal Sequencing
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL DESCRIPTION VTI-1 Voltage and current converter/rescaler, single output* VTI-2 Voltage and current converter/rescaler, dual output* ENCLOSURE Leave blank for snap-track mounting (VTI-1 only) H 1/2'' Threaded hub mount P Panel mount D DIN rail mount OPTIONS -XR1 Potentiometer to current converter (includes UAD-R1, potentiometer not included) Example: VTI-1-XR1 Potentiometer to current converter, snap-track mounted
UCM-SPA RELATED PRODUCTS Setpoint potentiometer, 0-10 k, three-wire potentiometer on stainless steel plate for remote mounting, 0-100% setpoint PAGE 1363
* Important! The VTI is
not intended for field calibration and must be factory-calibrated. Please supply the following information at time of order: input, output, and direct or reverse acting.
23
1444
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
TRANSDUCERS
ISOLATED DC TO DC TRANSMITTER DT13E SERIES
The DT13E is a signal isolator that accepts a current or voltage input and provides a linearly transferred current or voltage output. The input and output are electrically isolated, making the DT13E useful for ground-loop elimination, common-mode signal rejection and noise pickup reduction. The DT13E is designed to function effectively in electrically noisy environments. The DT13E can interface with recorders, data loggers, personal computers, programmable controllers, HVAC controllers, building automation controllers, variable speed drives, and other process monitoring and control systems. Snap-track is included for easy mounting.
FEATURES
Eliminates ground loop wiring problems Multiple input/output ranges are jumper-selectable 24 and 120 VAC powered models Snap-track mounting for easy installation DT13E (0.5% linearity)
OPERATION The DT13E Series input-conditioning circuitry scales and lters the DC input and drives a precision isolator, which carries the signal across the isolation barrier. The output side of the isolator drives a circuit that reconverts the signal into a replica of the input, which is again scaled (if necessary) to meet the user's requirement.
SPECIFICATIONS
TRANSDUCERS
Supply Voltage DT13E-120 DT13E-24 Supply VA DT13E-120 DT13E-24 Input Input Signal Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Linearity Isolation
120 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz 24 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz 6 VA 12 VA Current or voltage, jumper selectable 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC, 0-15 VDC, or 3-15 VDC 20 k @ 5 VDC; 13.3 k @ 10 VDC; 12 k @ 15 VDC; 125 maximum @ 20 mA Screw terminals Better than 0.5% of span 1000 V (DC or AC peak) maximum
Current or voltage, jumper selectable, zero/span adjustable to 20% offset Output Current 0/4-20 mA, 650 maximum load Output Voltage 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC, 0-15 VDC, or 3-15 VDC; 6 mA maximum load 70 ms typical Response Time Operating Temperature 14 to 140F (-10 to 60C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 2.3"H x 5"W x 1.3"D (5.7 x 12.7 x 3.2 cm) 0.65 lb (0.3 kg) Weight RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
Output
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1445
TRANSDUCERS
ISOLATED DC TO DC TRANSMITTER DT13E SERIES
SETUP / CALIBRATION
Table 1 shows the input and output congurations available with the DT13E. Determine the signal requirements for the application, and set the input and output jumpers according to the table. The input jumpers are located on the DT13E near the SIG IN terminals. The output jumpers are located near the SIG OUT terminals. If CAL appears in the table for desired signals,the DT13E will also require eld calibration of the zero and span pots.
NEW!
OUTPUT SIGNAL 0-10V 2-10V 20 mA 20 mA V, V, 10V V, V, 10V, CAL 20 mA 20 mA V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 10V 5V 5V V, V, 10V V, V, 10V, CAL 5V 5V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 10V 10V 10V V, V, 10V V, V, 10V, CAL 10V 10V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 10V 15V 15V V, V, 10V V, V, 10V, CAL 15V 15V V, V, 10V, CAL V, V, 10V 0-15V 20 mA V, V, 15V 20 mA V, V, 15V, CAL 5V V, V, 15V 5V V, V, 15V, CAL 10V V, V, 15V 10V V, V, 15V, CAL 15V V, V, 15V 15V V, V, 15V, CAL
AC Power VAC IN
To eld calibrate the DT13E, apply the appropriate supply voltage to the AC power terminals. The red PWR LED will be on continuously. Apply the minimum input signal to the SIG IN terminals. Adjust the zero pot until desired minimum output is reached. Now apply the maximum input signal, and adjust the span pot until the desired maximum output is reached. Repeat this process as necessary until accurate results are achieved.
TABLE 1. INPUT AND OUTPUT CONFIGURATIONS

INPUT SIGNAL JUMPERS 0-20 mA 20 mA 0-20 mA INPUT OUTPUT mA, mA 20 mA 4-20 mA INPUT OUTPUT mA, mA, CAL INPUT 5V 0-5V OUTPUT mA, mA INPUT 5V 1-5V OUTPUT mA, mA, CAL INPUT 10V 0-10V OUTPUT mA, mA INPUT 10V 2-10V OUTPUT mA, mA, CAL INPUT 15V 0-15V OUTPUT mA, mA INPUT 15V 3-15V OUTPUT mA, mA, CAL 4-20 mA 20 mA mA, mA, CAL 20 mA mA, mA 5V mA, mA, CAL 5V mA, mA 10V mA, mA, CAL 10V mA, mA 15V mA, mA, CAL 15V mA, mA 0-5V 20 mA V, V, 5V 20 mA V, V, 5V, CAL 5V V, V, 5V 5V V, V, 5V, CAL 10V V, V, 5V 10V V, V, 5V, CAL 15V V, V, 5V 15V V, V, 5V, CAL 1-5V 20 mA V, V, 5V, CAL 20 mA V, V, 5V 5V V, V, 5V, CAL 5V V, V, 5V 10V V, V, 5V, CAL 10V V, V, 5V 15V V, V, 5V, CAL 15V V, V, 5V 3-15V 20 mA V, V, 15V, CAL 20 mA V, V, 15V 5V V, V, 15V, CAL 5V V, V, 15V 10V V, V, 15V, CAL 10V V, V, 15V 15V V, V, 15V, CAL 15V V, V, 15V
WIRING
TRANSDUCERS
Input signal mA or V
+
IN
Span pot Zero pot Power LED
Input jumpers Output jumpers Sourcing output signal mA or V

OUT
15V 15V 10V 10V 5V 5V Volt mA mA Volts mA
AC Power
Output jumpers
DT13E
23
MODEL DT13E-120 DT13E-120-C DT13E-24 DT13E-24-C
DESCRIPTION Isolated DC-to-DC transmitter, 120 VAC Isolated DC-to-DC transmitter, 120 VAC, pre-calibrated Isolated DC-to-DC transmitter, 24 VAC Isolated DC-to-DC transmitter, 24 VAC, pre-calibrated
1446
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION USER-SELECTABLE OPERATING MODES Highest or lowest signal selection Minimum or peak signal hold selection Multiple signal averaging High and low limit control Action reversal Square root extraction (SQ model) FEATURES
TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL MATH MODULE UMM-1, UMM-2 SERIES
The UMM Series universal math module is a unique multifunction micro-computer based interface that can be utilized to solve a variety of signal selection and manipulation applications. The UMM-1 is furnished in a unique slim-line design housing, which saves panel space, and can be ordered with an optional DIN rail-mounting adapter. The UMM-2 is a snap-track mounted version with operation identical to the UMM-1. The UMM models accept up to four analog inputs, providing a single analog output according to the operating mode selected. This versatile product allows the user to select from many operating modes.
UMM-1 UMM-1-SQ
DIP switch-selectable operating modes Accepts voltage or milliamp input signals LED status indication User-selectable direct or reverse acting Accepts 24 VAC/VDC power Slim-line design housing or snap-track mounted models Furnished with detailed setup instructions
UMM-2 UMM-2-SQ
TRANSDUCERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Input Input Signal Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Action Accuracy Standard SQ Model 24 VAC 10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC 10% 50 mA maximum @ 24 VDC; 100 mA maximum @ 24 VAC 4 analog inputs 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC, 0-20 mA, or 4-20 mA 70 k with voltage input; 250 with current input Screw terminals Direct or reverse, DIP switch selectable 1% of full scale 1% FS @ 25%-100% of range, 1.5% FS @ 10%-25% of range, 2% FS @ 5%-10% of range, 5% FS @ 0%-5% of range 1 analog output, voltage or current 500 minimum @ 5 VDC; 1000 minimum @ 10 VDC; 650 maximum @ 20 mA Output Current Selectable: 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA Output Voltage Selectable: 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC or 2-10 VDC Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions UMM-1 3.4"H x 2.0"W x 4.8"D (8.6 x 5.1 x 12.4 cm) UMM-2 3.3"H x 4.6"W x 1.0"D (8.3 x 11.8 x 2.5 cm) Weight UMM-1 0.88 lb (0.4 kg) UMM-2 0.44 lb (0.2 kg) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 18 months Output Burden
23
Output
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1447
TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL MATH MODULE UMM-1, UMM-2 SERIES
USER-SELECTABLE OPERATING MODES
High and Low Signal Selection The UMM congured for this mode will accept two, three, or four analog input signals and output the signal that is either the highest or lowest of the input signals. To increase the number of input signals, UMMs may be cascaded by wiring the output of one UMM to the input of another UMM. Two UMMs wired in this fashion would allow up to seven input signals. No calibration is required; however, high and low limits can be set on the output. Minimum and Peak Hold Signal Selection In the peak hold operating mode, up to three analog inputs are monitored. The highest (peak) input signal is remembered, passed to the output, and held until a higher input signal level occurs. In the minimum hold mode, up to three inputs are monitored. The lowest input signal is remembered, passed to the output, and held until a lower input signal level occurs. A contact closure will reset the output signal. Multiple Signal Averaging The UMM congured for this operating mode will accept two, three, or four analog input signals and output a signal that is the average of the input signals. To average up to seven inputs, the primary UMM accepts four inputs, and its output is wired to the rst input of the secondary UMM. The output of the secondary UMM is the average of up to seven inputs. The sum can be derived by multiplying the signal average by the number of inputs. High/Low Limit Control and Signal Reversal The UMM may be used as a single input limit control, allowing the output to be limited to an adjustable upper and/or lower limit. When the input signal reaches the upper or lower limit setting, the output will remain at that particular limit setting. The high/low limit function can also be combined with other operating modes such as high/low signal selection, peak/minimum hold selection, or signal averaging. The output of the UMM can be selected to increase as the input increases (direct action), or the output can be reversed to decrease as the input increases (reverse action). Square Root Extraction When the UMM is ordered with the optional square root function (SQ option), it may be used as a single input square root extractor, providing an output proportional to the square root of the input signal. The square root function can also be combined with other operating modes such as high/low signal selection, peak/minimum hold selection, or signal averaging.
NEW!
WIRING (TYPICAL)
Signal Out
M O D E
Mode DIP Switches
HI LIM LO LIM
IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1
Input Jumpers
24 VAC or VDC mA or V Signal mA or V Signal mA or V Signal mA or V Signal
+ + + + +
DIS MA V OUT
Output Jumper SIG OUT 24V PWR COM SIG IN4 SIG IN3 SIG IN2 SIG IN1
UMM
* In the minimum and peak hold operating modes, a normally open momentary switch is wired to SIG IN4 and 24V PWR to allow reset of the output. All input signals wired to the SIG IN terminals must be of the same type and range. The output signal from the SIG OUT terminal must be of the same type and range as the input signals. Always disable (jumper to DIS position) any input that is not to be used.
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL UMM-1 UMM-2 DESCRIPTION Universal math module enclosed in slim-line housing Universal math module snap-track mounted OPTIONS (factory installed only) Square root extractor SQ DIN rail mounting adapter (UMM-1 and UMM-1-SQ only) 47
23
Example: UMM-1-SQ-47 Universal math module with square root option and DIN rail mounting adapter
1448
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER RES-1E SERIES
The RES-1E Series universal resistance transducer provides a precision resistance output for DDC control of electric actuators or other electronic devices that operate from a variable resistive circuit. Various selectable analog and pulse-width modulated (PWM) inputs are available, and the transducer may be powered from 24 VAC or 24 VDC. The RES-1E is furnished with snap-track for easy mounting.
FEATURES
Ideal for controlling electric actuators Replaces potentiometer or temperature sensor in boiler/chiller reset circuits 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-10V, 2-10V, 0-15V, 3-15 VDC or PWM input signals, DIP switch selectable AC/DC powered Replaces motorized slide-wire potentiometer controller 0-135, 0-270, 0-500, and 0-1000 standard outputs, custom ranges available Snap-track mounting Failsafe mode and signal loss feature LED indication
OPERATION The RES-1E simulates a three-wire potentiometer output proportional to an analog or PWM input signal. The resistance between output terminals B and R increases (W and R decreases) as the input signal increases. The resistance between output terminals B and R decreases (W and R increases) as the input signal decreases. When 24V power is interrupted at the RES-1E power terminals, the failsafe mode internally connects the output terminals to the fallback pot terminals, allowing an alternate back-up controller or potentiometer to be used for control.
SPECIFICATIONS
TRANSDUCERS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Input Input Signal Pulse Rate Input Impedance Wiring Terminations
24 VAC 10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC 10% 220 mA @ 24 VAC, 100 mA @ 24 VDC Various selectable analog and pulse width modulated (PWM) 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC, 0-15 VDC, 3-15 VDC, or PWM PWM time base selections 0.1-2.65, 5.2, 12.85, 25.6, or 0.59-2.93 seconds 250 (current); 27.5 k (voltage) Screw terminals
1% of span 1% of span 0-135, 0-1000, 0-270, 0-500, Special range (specify upon ordering, min span = 30 , maximum span = 1 M) 255 steps Output Resolution Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions 3.3"H x 6.5"W x 1.3"D (8.3 x 16.5 x 3.2 cm) 0.7 lb (0.32 kg) Weight RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
Accuracy Linearity Output
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1449
TRANSDUCERS
CURRENT OR VOLTAGE ANALOG CONTROL
INPUT TYPE Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog SIGNAL RANGE 0-5V 0-10V 0-15V 0-20 mA 1-5V 2-10V 3-15V 4-20 mA 1-5V 2-10V 3-15V 4-20 mA 1-5V 2-10V 3-15V 4-20 mA
Option PLMEM = power loss memory, option SLH = signal loss hold OPTIONS * * * * No PLMEM, no SLH No PLMEM, no SLH No PLMEM, no SLH No PLMEM, no SLH No PLMEM, with SLH No PLMEM, with SLH No PLMEM, with SLH No PLMEM, with SLH With PLMEM, with SLH With PLMEM, with SLH With PLMEM, with SLH With PLMEM, with SLH
NEW!
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Optional Connection to back up thermostat or potentiometer
B R W Res Output B R W Fallback
* For analog inputs that are valid all the way to zero, there is no condition where power loss memory and signal loss hold apply. POWER LOSS MEMORY, ANALOG INPUT WITH NON-ZERO START VALUE: At powerup, if analog input is below normal start value, the resistance output will go to the value set by the last valid analog input before power was lost. If power loss memory is disabled and, at powerup, analog input is below normal start value, the resistance output will go to minimum until a valid analog input is received. SIGNAL LOSS HOLD, ANALOG INPUT WITH NON-ZERO START VALUE: If the analog input drops below the normal start value, the resistance output will stay at the value set by the last valid analog input. If signal loss hold is disabled and the analog input drops below the normal start value, the resistance output will go to minimum until a valid analog input is received.
ANALOG CONTROL WIRING

Resistance Output to controlled device
TRANSDUCERS
B-R Resistance increases with signal increase W-R Resistance decreases with signal increase
STAT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pulse Signal
I-V 24V COM COM Sig
23
24 VAC/VDC Power Notes: 1. If the RES-1E input signal is voltage, multiple RES-1Es may be powered from the same power supply or transformer. 2. If the RES-1E input signal is current from a current sourcing controller, multiple units may be powered from the same power supply or transformer. 3. If input signal is current from a current sinking controller, each RES-1E must have a separate power supply or transformer.
Analog Current or Voltage Input Signal
1450
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
PWM CONTROL
INPUT TYPE PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM PWM Option PLMEM = power loss memory SIGNAL RANGE 0.1-2.65 sec 0.1-2.65 sec 0.1-5.2 sec 0.1-5.2 sec 0.1-12.85 sec 0.1-12.85 sec 0.1-25.6 sec 0.1-25.6 sec 0.59-2.93 sec 0.59-2.93 sec
POWER LOSS MEMORY, PWM INPUT:
TRANSDUCERS
OPTIONS No PLMEM With PLMEM No PLMEM With PLMEM No PLMEM With PLMEM No PLMEM With PLMEM No PLMEM With PLMEM
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
At powerup, the resistance output will go to the value set by the last PWM pulse before power was lost. The output will remain at this value until a new PWM pulse is received. If power loss memory is disabled, the resistance output will go to minimum at powerup and remain there until a new PWM pulse is received.
PWM CONTROL WIRING

Optional Connection to back up thermostat or potentiometer Resistance Output to controlled device Resistance Output to controlled device Optional Connection to back up thermostat or potentiometer
TRANSDUCERS
B R W B R W Res Output Fallback

STAT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B R W B R W Res Output Fallback

STAT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
I-V Pulse Signal 24V COM COM Sig
I-V Pulse Signal 24V COM COM Sig
24 VAC/VDC Power for PVM Signal BAS Controller PWM Contacts**
+
24 VAC/VDC Power
BAS Controller PWM Contacts**
23
24 VAC/VDC Power
Separate 24V Supplies for Power and Signal
Common 24V Supply for Power and Signal
** PWM signal input terminals are optoisolated and polarity insensitive. PWM computer contacts can switch either PWM wire lead.
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1451
TRANSDUCERS
INSTALLATION AND CHECKOUT
INSTALLATION Mount the device inside an enclosure near the controlled equipment, avoiding areas of temperature extremes, corrosive vapors, or electromagnetic interference. Use track slots for screw attachment. Note: Protect circuit board from metal lings created during panel construction. Make all connections according to wiring diagram or as shown in the job diagram and in compliance with national and local codes. Use shielded #18 gauge cable for connections from the transducer to the controller. The unit comes precalibrated for easy application. CHECKOUT Tools required: Volt ohmmeter, signal analyzer or other signal source. 1. Verify that the input selector switches are in the correct position for the input signal to be used. 2. Verify that either 24 VAC or VDC is present at the power terminals. 3. With the controlled device disconnected, connect an ohmmeter to the B and R terminals on the RES-1E output. With no signal input, the resistance between B and R should be at minimum, and the resistance between W and R should be at maximum resistance. 4. Apply the minimum input signal for the range selected to the input terminals. The RES-1E should output less than 2% of full range, the minimum resistance of the RES-1E. 5. Slowly increase the input signal. The resistance reading will increase linearly toward full range. If the resistance does not vary with the input signal, check the polarity of the input wiring. LED INDICATION Steady green: power on and idle Slow green blink (three blinks/pause): Signal loss hold Rapid green blink: PWM pulse being received
NEW!
CAUTION: Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage.
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL RES-1E RES-1E-1000 RES-1E-270 RES-1E-500 RES-1E-S DESCRIPTION Universal resistance transducer, 0-135 output Universal resistance transducer, 0-1000 output Universal resistance transducer, 0-270 output Universal resistance transducer, 0-500 output Universal resistance transducer, special range output (specify range; min span = 30 , maximum span = 1 M, start can be above zero)
23
R-PAK
RELATED PRODUCTS Resistance board only for RES-1E (specify range, minimum span 3, maximum span 1 M)
1452
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
Input: PWM Output: Analog (voltage or current)
TRANSDUCERS
PNEUMATIC TRANSDUCERS EFP, EPW, EPC, PTA AND PTA2 SERIES
Floating Point to Pneumatic Output Input: Two Digital (relay, triac, transistor) 9-24 VAC/VDC. Output: Jumper selectable 0-10, 0-15, or 0-20 psig air pressure. Rate of Change: 45 sec., 90 sec., 1 min., and 2 min. Manual Override. Power: 24 VDC or 24 VAC @ 180 mA. Size: 4.0"L x 3.5"W x 1.9"H (10.2 x 8.9 x 4.8 cm). Input: Floating Point Output: Pneumatic (0-10 psig, 0-15 psig, 0-20 psig, & eld adjustable) EFP Series
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) to Pneumatic Output. Input: 0.1-10, 0.02-5, 0.1-25.5, 0.59 to 2.93, 0.023-6, or 0-10 sec. duty cycle, or 0-20 V phase cut. Trigger: 9-24 VAC/VDC. Output: 0-10, 0-15, 0-20 psig. Manual override. Feedback: 0-5 VDC = output. Power: 24 VDC or 24 VAC @ 200 mA. Valved exhaust & Fail-safe model, or bleed type of 14, 41, or 73 scim. Input: Analog Output: Pneumatic (0-10 psig, 0-15 psig, 0-20 psig, & eld adjustable) EPW Series
Analog to Pneumatic Output Input: 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, and 0-15 VDC @ Innity or 0-20 mA @ 250. Output: 0-20 psig. Feedback: 0-5 VDC = selected output. Power: 24 VDC or 24 VAC (50/60 Hz) @ 180 mA. Valved exhaust (EPC2), Fail-Safe model (EPC2FS), and bleed-type 41 scim (EPC). Anodized Aluminum manifold. Size: 3.25"L x 3.25"W x 1.88"H (8.26 x 8.26 x 4.78 cm). Input: Analog Output: Pneumatic (0-10 psig, 0-15 psig, 0-20 psig, & eld adjustable) EPC
TRANSDUCERS
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) to Analog Current or Voltage Output. Input: PWM (relay, transistor, or triac): 0.02-5, 0.023-6, 0.1-10, 0.1-25.5, or 0.59-2.93, 0-10 sec. 0-10 sec. duty cycle pulse. Flexible Output (Adjustable or Fixed): 0-20 VDC or 0-20 mA. Power: 24-35 VDC or 21.6 to 26.4 VAC 50/60 Hz @ 250 mA. PTA Series
DESCRIPTION
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) to Analog Current or Voltage Output. Input: PWM (relay, transistor, or triac) Ver 1: 0.02-5.0, 0.592.93, 0.1-10, or 0.1-25.5 sec. Ver 2: 0-10 seconds (continuous pulse sampled in 10 sec. window), 0.23-6, or 0-25.2 sec. Output range: 0-10 VDC. Power: 24 VDC or 24 VAC @ 135 mA. Size: 2.2"L x 2.25"W x 1.0"H (5.6 x 5.7 x 2.5 cm). Input: PWM Output: Analog (0-10 VDC) March 2014 PTA2 Series
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1453
TRANSDUCERS
DESCRIPTION
Analog to Two Relay Outputs. Input ranges and impedance: 0-12 VDC @ 1M, 0-24 VDC @ 20K, 0-20 mA @ 499. Output: Two (2) Form C relays, rated 10 amps @ 120 VAC. Power: 24 VAC or 24 VDC @ 45 mA max. Size: 3.25"L x 2.41"W x 1.00"H (8.26 x 6.12 x 2.54 cm). Input: Analog Output: Two Relays (high and low trip level & adjustable deadband)
ELECTRONIC TRANSDUCERS AAR, ARM, ATL, AUD AND 6N1-ISO SERIES
NEW!
AAR ARM ATL Series AUD Series
DESCRIPTION
Analog Current or Voltage Rescaling Module. Re-scales/reverses analog signal. Input: 0-35 VDC @ 1M, 0-44 mA @ 250. Output: 0-20 VDC @ 5K, 0-44 mA @ 750. Power: 24 VDC or 22-26 VAC @ 200 mA. Size: 3.69"L x 2.17"W x 1.00"H (9.37 x 5.51 x 2.54 cm). Input: Analog Output: Analog (rescale & reverse)
DESCRIPTION
Analog Current or Voltage to Four Adjustable SPDT Relays. Input ranges and impedance: 0-12 VDC @ 10M, 0-24 VDC @ 20K and 0-20 mA @ 500. Output: Four (4) form C relays. Fixed deadband 3% standard (1% and 10% optional). Power: 24 VAC or 24 VDC @ 180 mA max. Size: 3.25"L x 2.75"W x 1.5"H (8.26 x 6.99 x 3.81 cm). Input: Analog Output: Four relays (trip level adjustable & xed deadband)
DESCRIPTION
TRANSDUCERS
Floating Point to Analog Output. Two Digital Inputs: Contact closure, transistor, or Triac. Trigger Level: 5-26.4 VDC or 24-26.4 VAC (50/60 Hz). Output: 10 presets from 0-1 VDC to 0-20 VDC and 0-20 mA. Rate of Change: 5 to 360 seconds. Power: 24-35 VDC or 24 VAC (50/60 Hz) @ 208 mA. Size: 3.75"L x 2.25"W x 1.15"H (9.53 x 5.72 x 2.92 cm). Input: Floating Point Output: Analog (voltage or current)
DESCRIPTION
23
Six Analog or Digital Inputs (Binary) to One Analog Output. Input ranges and impedance: 0-5 V @ 1M, 0-10 V @ 20K, 0-20 V @ 10K, 0-20 mA @ 249, and digital inputs of 15, 24 VDC or 24 VAC. Output ranges: 0-5, 0-10, 0-20 VDC or 0-20 mA. Power: 24 VAC @ 255 mA max. Size: 4.0"L x 4.6"W x 1.0"H (10.2 x 11.7 x 2.5 cm). Input: Analog Output: Analog (average, high, or lowest of 6, difference of 2 signals) 6N1-ISO
1454
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
Input: Analog Output: Analog (optically isolated)
TRANSDUCERS
ANALOG/PWM/FLOATING POINT TRI-STATE TRANSDUCERS DRN3.1, AIM1, AIM2, AFP AND DRN4 SERIES
Pulse Width Modulation / Analog / Floating Point to Optically Isolated Resistance Output. Input: 0.1-10, 0-10 sec. duty cycle, 0.023-6, 0.02-5, 0.59-2.93, and 0.1-25.5 sec. Rates of change: available from 30-240 sec., Analog: 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 2-10, 0-15, 3-15 VDC, 0-20 and 4-20 mA. Output: 12 ranges, 0-135 to 0-40 k and Custom. 256 Step Resolution. Power: 24 VDC/VAC @ 250 mA. Size: 4.75"L x 3.25"W x 1.0"H (12.1 x 8.3 x 2.5 cm). Input: Analog, PWM, Floating Point Output: Resistance (0-135 to 0-40k & custom ranges) DRN3.1
Analog Input to Optically Isolated Analog Output (1:1 Ratio) Input ranges and impedance: 0-5, 0-10 VDC @ 20k, and 0-20 mA @ 250. Output ranges and impedance: 0-5, 0-10 VDC @ 5k, and 0-20 mA (source or sink) @ 500. Power: 24 VAC @ 100 mA max. Size: 3.3"L x 3.4"W x 1.5"H (8.4 x 8.6 x 3.8 cm). AIM1
DESCRIPTION
Analog Adjustable Input to Optically Isolated Analog Output (Rescales & Limits Output). Input ranges and impedance: 0-1, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, and 2-10 VDC @ 9.5k, 0-1, 0-20 & 4-20 mA @ 250. Output: Same except for 0-1 VDC @ 5k, & 0-20 mA @ 500. Power: 24 VAC @ 200 mA max. Source or sink inputs & outputs. Size: 4.6"L x 3.3"W x 1.2"H (11.7 x 8.4 x 3.1 cm). Input: Analog Output: Analog (isolated, rescale, & limit) AIM2
DESCRIPTION
Analog to Floating Point. Selectable inputs: 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 2-10, 0-15, 3-15 VDC, 0-20 & 4-20 mA. Output: Floating point (digital UP/DOWN). Selectable rates of change: Standard- 30, 60 or 90 sec., Ver. 2- 120, 150 or 180 sec., Ver.3 -14, 16.5 or 19 sec., Ver.4Same as Standard Version but relays do not turn off at min. and max. Ver5: 90, 135, or 180 sec. Ver6: 18, 75, 360 sec. Power: 24 VAC/ 24 VDC @ 190 mA max. Size: 4.0"W x 3.5"L x 1.2"H (10.2 x 8.9 x 3.1 cm). Input: Analog Output: Floating Point (isolated)
TRANSDUCERS
AFP
DESCRIPTION
Pulse Width Modulation/Analog/Floating Point/Tri-State to Resistance Output. Actuator mounted. Inputs-Pulse: 0.02-5, 0.59-2.93, 0.0236 and 0.1-25.5 sec. Digital Floating Point: 55 sec. rate of change, Analog: 0-5, 1-5, 0-10, 2-10 VDC, & 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA. Output: 0-135, 32 step resolution. Power 24 VDC or 24 VAC @ 130 mA. Size: 2.3"L x 3.5"W x 1.5"H (5.8 x 8.9 x 3.8 cm). Input: Analog, PWM, Floating Point Output: Resistance (0-135) March 2014 DRN4
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1455
TRANSDUCERS
DESCRIPTION
The UCS-121 Series is a solid-state device used to control on/off type loads in HVAC and lighting systems from an analog current or voltage signal. The UCS-121 can be used to convert an analog current or voltage signal from a BAS controller or sensor/transmitter into a SPDT digital output. The UCS-121 is provided with a mounting track or in a hub-mount enclosure for easy installation.
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SINGLE STAGE UCS-121 SERIES
NEW!
UCS-121
FEATURES
One stage of relay control, SPDT Voltage or current input LED indication of relay status Adjustable relay setpoint Adjustable relay differential Snap-track or hub enclosure Jumper-enabled time constant
WIRING
S P T
TRANSDUCERS
OPERATION The UCS-121 accepts a 0.5-20 mA or 0.75-15V input signal to produce a single-stage relay output. The relay has a singleturn potentiometer adjustment to set the trip point. The relay differential is factory set to 0.5 mA or 0.375V but can be easily adjusted in the eld using the single-turn differential adjustment potentiometer on the UCS-121. With the action jumper in the direct DIR position, the relay will energize when the input signal increases to the setting of the setpoint pot SPT and will de-energize when the input signal decreases below the setting of the differential pot DIF. With the action jumper in the reverse REV position, the relay will de-energize when the input signal increases to the setting of the SPT and will energize when the input signal decreases below the setting of the DIF. To enable a 30-second time constant, place the T.C. jumper in the DLY position. The NODLY position removes the time constant.
D I F
Action Jumper T.C. Jumper Input Jumper mA V Relay N.O. RLY NO RLY COM RLY NC 24 V PWR COM SIG IN DIR REV DLY NODLY
To Controlled Load
Relay Common Relay N.C.
24 VAC/VDC
+ _ + _
Relay ON LED
Signal mA or V
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Input 24 VAC 10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC 10% 50 mA @ 24 VAC; 25 mA maximum @ 24 VDC 0.5-20 mA or 0.75-15 VDC, jumper selectable 250 (mA input); 10 k (VDC input) Screw terminals 1% 30 seconds, jumper enabled One SPDT relay, factory set at 12 mA, 9 VDC; adjustable via setpoint potentiometer Factory set at 0.5 mA or 0.375V, adjustable 0.2-2V or 0.25-3 mA Relay Output Rating 5A @ 120 VAC Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions UCS-121 3.3"H x 1.5"W x 1.3"D (8.2 x 3.8 x 3.2 cm) UCS-121-H 4.0"H x 2.3"W x 1.8"D (10.2 x 5.7 x 4.4 cm) Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 18 months Relay Differential
23
Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Accuracy Time Constant Output
1456
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
CALIBRATION
MODEL UCS-121 UCS-121-C UCS-121-H UCS-121-H-C
TRANSDUCERS
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SINGLE STAGE UCS-121 SERIES
The UCS-121 can be ordered preset to the application to save time during installation. Specify the -C option for factory setup and calibration. The UCS-121 can also be set up and calibrated in the eld. Input Jumpers Set the input jumper for the type of input signal, mA or V, to be used. Set the action jumper for either direct DIR or reverse REV action. See Operation for a description of direct and reverse action. Setpoint Adjustment 1. When making adjustments, the load being controlled should be disconnected from the UCS-121 and the T.C. jumper placed in the NODLY position. 2. Connect a meter in series with the SIG IN terminal and the 0.5-20 mA signal to read a current signal. To read a voltage input, 0.75-15 VDC, connect the meter across the COM and SIG IN terminals. 3. Turn the setpoint pot SPT fully counterclockwise to its minimum position. 4. Adjust the input signal to the desired relay trip point. 5. Turn the setpoint pot clockwise until the RELAY ON LED turns off (or turns on if the action jumper is in the REV reverse position). 6. Adjust the relay trip point by slowly turning the setpoint pot SPT counterclockwise until the RELAY ON LED turns on (or turns off if the action jumper is in the REV reverse position). 7. The relay trip point is now set. Verify setting by varying the input signal up and down and observing the RELAY ON LED. 8. Set the jumper to the DLY position to add a 30-second time constant or to the NODLY position for no time constant. Differential Adjustment The relay differential is factory set for 0.5 mA or 0.375V, which should be suitable for most applications without requiring any adjustment. If the relay differential must be adjusted, follow these steps: 1. When making adjustments, the load being controlled should be disconnected from the UCS-121 and the T.C. jumper placed in the NODLY position. 2. The relay setpoint should be set prior to adjusting the relay differential. See instructions above. 3. Connect a meter in series with the SIG IN terminal and the 0.5-20 mA signal to read a current signal. To read a voltage input, 0.75-15 VDC, connect the meter across the COM and SIG IN terminals. 4. Adjust the input signal to any value greater than the relay trip point setting so that the RELAY ON LED turns on (or turns off if the action jumper is in the REV reverse position). 5. Turn the differential pot DIF fully clockwise to its maximum position. 6. Adjust the input signal to the desired relay differential value. The relay differential value should be equal to the setpoint value minus the required relay differential. For example, if the relay setpoint is adjusted for 10V and a 1V differential is required, the input signal should be adjusted for a input value of 9V (10V - 1V = 9V). 7. Turn the differential pot very slowly counterclockwise until the RELAY ON LED turns off (or turns on if the action jumper is in the REV reverse position). 8. The relay differential is now set. Verify settings by varying the input signal up and down and observing the RELAY ON LED. 9. Set the jumper to the DLY position to add a 30-second time constant or to the NODLY position for no time constant.
TRANSDUCERS
DESCRIPTION Sequencer control module, single stage Sequencer control module, single stage, pre-calibrated Sequencer control module, single stage, hub enclosure Sequencer control module, single stage, hub enclosure, pre-calibrated
23
TR-3 RELATED PRODUCTS Extra long 3-1/4"W x 4'L snap track
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1457
TRANSDUCERS
DESCRIPTION The UCS-221E is a solid-state device used for multistage control in HVAC systems, sequencing boilers or chillers, or oating/tri-state control of VAV boxes from a single analog signal. The UCS-221E can be used to obtain a digital output from a voltage or current producing sensor. Units may be daisy chained to provide additional stages of control, and a mounting track is supplied for easy installation.
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - TWO STAGE UCS-221E
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
FEATURES Two stages of relay control Voltage or current input LED indication of relay status Adjustable relay setpoints Adjustable relay differentials Snap-track mounted
OPERATION The UCS-221E accepts a 0-20 mA or 0-15V input signal to produce a two-stage relay output. Each relay has a multiturn potentiometer adjustment to set the pull-in point. Relay 1 can be jumper-selected to pull in on either a rise or fall in signal. Relay 2 always pulls in on a signal rise. Individual relay differential is easily adjusted by using different value plugin differential resistors. Multiple UCS models can be daisy chained to operate additional stages from one input signal. A maximum of eight slave units can be daisy chained.
in (cm)
FLT SEQ 1 2
Depth: 1.19 (3.02)
CH V MA
2.25 (5.72)
TRANSDUCERS
2.25 (5.72)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Input Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Accuracy Output 24 VAC 10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC 10% 100 mA @ 24 VAC; 50 mA @ 24 VDC maximum 0-20 mA or 0-15 VDC, jumper selectable 250 (mA input); 49.7 k (VDC input) Screw terminals 1% Two SPDT relays, adjustable via setpoint potentiometers Relay Differential Factory set at 0.5 mA or 0.375V, adjustable using plug-in resistors Relay Output Rating 10A @ 120 VAC Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Weight 0.4 lb (0.18 kg) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
23
1458
COMMON SIGNAL INPUT CHAIN OUTPUT
24 V POWER
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
TABLE 1. OTHER DIFFERENTIALS
Other Differential Resistors can be used (customer supplied) 9.1 k = 0.25 mA or 0.1875V 36.5 k = 1.0 mA or 0.75V 54.9 k = 1.5 mA or 1.125V 73.2 k = 2.0 mA or 1.5V
TRANSDUCERS
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - TWO STAGE UCS-221E
Make all connections according to the diagram below or as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with national and local codes. Make all connections with power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage. Use shielded #18-gauge cable for connections from the UCS-221E to the controller, shield grounded at the controller.
Plug-in Differential Resistors (1/4W, 1%) 18.2 k = 0.5 mA or 0.375V (factory supplied) See Table 1 for other differentials.
Jumper should be in chain (CH) position when using UCS-221E as a slave unit.
FLT SEQ 1
CH V MA
FLT SEQ 1
CH V MA
CW CCW COM Relay Contact Wiring for Floating/Tri-state Control (set mode Jumper in FLT position) Note: Chain out is used to connect the master unit to the first slave. Additional slaves are connected from signal input to signal input.
24V Power Terminal Common Terminal Signal Input Terminal
24 V POWER
24 V POWER
+ 24 VAC/VDC
Signal (mA or V)
Connections to UCS slave units (Max eight units)
Factory Relay Settings Relay 1: 5.3 mA, 4V Relay 2: 6.6 mA, 5V
SETUP / CALIBRATION
1. Set jumpers to desired position as follows: Mode jumper - In FLT position, Relay 1 energizes on a decrease in signal. In the SEQ position, Relay 1 energizes on an increase in signal. Relay 2 always energizes on an increase in signal. Input jumpers - Select mA position for a 0-20 mA input, or V position for a 0-15 VDC input. If the UCS-221E is used as a slave control, place the bottle-plug jumper in the chain position. 2. Connect a meter in series with the SIGNAL INPUT terminal and the 0-20 mA (+) signal to read a current signal. To read a voltage input, connect across the COMMON (-) and SIGNAL INPUT (+) terminals. 3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for Relay 1. 4. If Relay 1 LED is on, turn setpoint adjustment potentiometer clockwise (counterclockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT position) until it de-energizes; otherwise, proceed to step 5. 5. Adjust Relay 1 pull-in point by turning the setpoint adjustment potentiometer counterclockwise (clockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT position) until the relay energizes. (The potentiometers are 25-turn potentiometers.) 6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for Relay 2 using setpoint adjustment potentiometer. 7. When using a 0-20 mA input, the CHAIN OUTPUT produces a 0 to 12 VDC signal, which is proportional to the input signal. Connections should be made between CHAIN OUTPUT and COMMON. If a voltage input is used, the CHAIN OUTPUT is directly proportional to the input.
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL UCS-221E UCS-221E-C DESCRIPTION Sequencer control module, two relay outputs, eld calibrated Sequencer control module, two relay outputs, pre-calibrated (specify settings when ordering)
23
PAGE 269
B-5
RELATED PRODUCTS 5"x4"x3" two-piece aluminum box with two 1/2" conduit knockouts
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1459
TRANSDUCERS
DESCRIPTION The UCS-421E is a solid-state device used for multistage control in HVAC systems, sequencing boilers or chillers, or oating/tri-state control of VAV boxes from a single analog signal. The UCS-421E can be used to obtain a digital output from a voltage or current producing sensor. Units may be daisy chained to provide additional stages of control, and a mounting track for easy installation.
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - FOUR STAGE UCS-421E
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
FEATURES Four stages of relay control Voltage or current input LED indication of relay status Adjustable relay setpoints Adjustable relay differentials Loss of signal feature Snap-track mounted
OPERATION The UCS-421E accepts a 0-20 mA or 0-15V input signal to produce a four-stage relay output. Each relay has a multi-turn potentiometer adjustment to set the pull-in point. Relays 1 and 4 can be jumper-selected to pull in on either a rise or fall in signal. Relays 2 and 3 always pull in on a signal rise. The UCS-421E considers an input signal below 1 mA or 0.75V to be a loss of signal, and all relays will de-energize if the SLD jumper is removed. If the SLD jumper is installed, the signal loss feature is disabled and the relays in the FLT mode will stay energized. Individual relay differential is easily adjusted by using different value plug-in differential resistors. Multiple UCS models can be daisy chained to operate additional stages from one input signal. A maximum of eight slave units can be daisy chained.
in (cm)
FLT SEQ
Depth: 1.19 (3.02)

FLT SEQ CH V mA
SLD
2.25 (5.72)
TRANSDUCERS
3.66 (9.30)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Input Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Accuracy 24 VAC 10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC 10% 160 mA @ 24 VAC; 80 mA @ 24 VDC maximum 0-20 mA or 0-15 VDC, jumper selectable 250 (mA input); 49.7 k (VDC input) Screw terminals 1% Output Four SPDT relays, adjustable via setpoint potentiometers Relay Differential Factory set at 0.5 mA or 0.375V, adjustable using plug-in resistors Relay Output Rating 10A @ 120 VAC Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Weight 0.6 lb (0.25 kg) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
23
1460
COMMON
SIGNAL INPUT CHAIN OUTPUT
24V POWER
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Other Differential Resistors can be used (customer-supplied): 9.1 k = 0.25 mA or 0.1875V 36.5 k = 1.0 mA or 0.75V 54.9 k = 1.5 mA or 1.125V 73.2 k = 2.0 mA or 1.5V
TRANSDUCERS
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - FOUR STAGE UCS-421E
Plug-in Differential Resistors (1/4W, 1%) 18.2 k = 0.5 mA or 0.375V (factory supplied) See Table 1 for other differentials. Remove jumper to enable signal loss feature.
CH V mA
Factory Relay Settings Relay 1: 5.3 mA, 4V Relay 2: 6.6 mA, 5V Relay 3: 8.0 mA, 6V Relay 4: 9.3 mA, 7V
FLT SEQ
FLT SEQ
SLD
Jumper should be in chain position (CH) when using UCS-421E as a slave unit.
CW CCW COM
Relay Contact Wiring for Floating/Tri-state Control (set #1 mode Jumper in FLT position)
24 VAC/VDC
+ Signal mA or V +
COMMON
24V POWER
1 (3)
2 (4)
Chain Output is used to connect the master unit to the first slave. Additional slaves are connected from signal input to signal input.
Connections to UCS slave units (max eight units)
SETUP / CALIBRATION
1. Set jumpers to desired position as follows: Mode jumpers - In FLT position, Relays 1 and 4 energize on a decrease in signal. In the SEQ position, Relays 1 and 4 energize on an increase in signal. Relays 2 and 3 always energize on an increase in signal. Input jumpers - Select mA position for a 0-20 mA input or V position for a 0-15 VDC input. If the UCS-421E is used as a slave unit, place the bottle plug jumper in the chain position. 2. Connect a meter in series with the SIGNAL INPUT terminal and the 0-20 mA (+) signal to read a current signal. To read a voltage input, connect across the COMMON (-) and SIGNAL INPUT(+) terminals. 3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for Relay 1. 4. If Relay 1 LED is on, turn its setpoint adjustment clockwise (counterclockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT position) until it de-energizes; otherwise, proceed to step 5. 5. Adjust Relay 1 pull-in point by turning its setpoint adjustment counterclockwise (clockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT position) until the relay energizes. (The potentiometers are 25-turn potentiometers.) 6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for Relays 2, 3, and 4 using corresponding setpoint adjustments. 7. When using a 0-20 mA input, the CHAIN OUTPUT produces a 0-12 VDC signal, which is proportional to the input signal. Connections should be made between CHAIN OUTPUT and COMMON. If a voltage input is used, the CHAIN OUTPUT is directly proportional to the input.
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL UCS-421E UCS-421E-C DESCRIPTION Sequencer control module, four relay outputs, eld calibrated Sequencer control module, four relay outputs, pre-calibrated (specify settings when ordering)
23
PAGE 269
B-7
RELATED PRODUCTS 7"x5"x3" two-piece aluminum box with two 1/2" conduit knockouts
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1461
TRANSDUCERS
DESCRIPTION
The UCS-621E is a solid-state device used for multistage control in HVAC systems, sequencing boilers or chillers, or oating/tri-state control of VAV boxes from a single analog signal. The UCS-621E can be used to obtain a digital output from a voltage or current producing sensor. Units may be daisy chained to provide additional stages of control, and a mounting track is supplied for easy installation.
KELE SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SIX STAGE UCS-621E
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
SEQ FLT SEQ FLT
FEATURES Six stages of relay control Voltage or current input 24 VAC/VDC power LED indication of relay status Adjustable relay setpoints Adjustable relay differentials Snap-track mounted
OPERATION The UCS-621E accepts a 0-20 mA or 0-15V input signal to produce a six-stage relay output. Each relay has a multi-turn potentiometer adjustment to set the pull-in point. Each of the six relays is jumper-selectable to pull in on either a rise or fall in signal. Individual relay differential is easily adjusted by using different value plug-in differential resistors. Multiple UCS models can be daisy chained to operate additional stages from one input signal. A maximum of eight slave units can be daisy chained.
Depth: 1.19 (3.02)

SEQ FLT
FLT CH V mA
SEQ
2.25 (5.72)
TRANSDUCERS
5.25 (13.34)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Input 24 VAC 10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC 10% 220 mA @ 24 VAC; 110 mA @ 24 VDC maximum 0-20 mA or 0-15 VDC, jumper selectable 250 (mA input); 49.7 k (VDC input) Screw terminals 1% Six SPDT relays, adjustable via setpoint potentiometers Relay Differential Factory set at 0.5 mA or 0.375V, adjustable using plug-in resistors Relay Output Rating 10A @ 120 VAC Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Weight 0.7 lb (0.32 kg) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year Output
23
Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Accuracy
1462
COMMON
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
24V POWER
March 2014
SEQ FLT
SEQ FLT
SEQ FLT
NEW!
WIRING
Other differential resistors can be used (customer-supplied): 9.1 k = 0.25 mA or 0.1875V 36.5 k = 1.0 mA or 0.75V 54.9 k = 1.5 mA or 1.125V 73.2 k = 2.0 mA or 1.5V
FLT
TRANSDUCERS
KELE SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - SIX STAGE UCS-621E
Plug-in Differential Resistors (1/4W, 1%) 18.2 k = 0.5 mA or 0.375V (factory supplied) See Table 1 for other differentials. Jumper should be in chain position (CH) when using UCS-621E as a slave unit. Factory Relay Settings Relay 1: 5.3 mA, 4V Relay 2: 6.6 mA, 5V Relay 3: 8.0 mA, 6V Relay 4: 9.3 mA, 7V Relay 5: 10.7 mA, 8V Relay 6: 12.0 mA, 9V
1 2
SEQ
CH V mA
CW CCW COM
24 VAC/VDC
+ Signal mA or V +
COMMON
24V POWER
SETUP / CALIBRATION
1. Set jumpers to desired position as follows: Mode jumpers - In FLT position, the relays energize on a decrease in signal. In the SEQ position, the relays energize on an increase in signal. Input jumpers - Select mA position for a 0-20 mA input or V position for a 0-15 VDC input. If the UCS-621E is used as a slave unit, place the bottle plug jumper in the chain position. 2. Connect a meter in series with the SIGNAL INPUT terminal and the 0-20 mA (+) signal to read a current signal. To read a voltage input, connect across the COMMON (-) and SIGNAL INPUT(+) terminals. 3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for relay 1. 4. If Relay 1 LED is on, turn its setpoint adjustment clockwise (counterclockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT position) until it deenergizes; otherwise, proceed to step 5. 5. Adjust Relay 1 pull-in point by turning its setpoint adjustment counterclockwise (clockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT position) until the relay energizes. (The potentiometers are 25-turn potentiometers.) 6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for relays 2 through 6 using setpoint adjustments. 7. When using a 0-20 mA input, the CHAIN OUTPUT produces a 0-12 VDC signal, which is proportional to the input signal. Connections should be made between CHAIN OUTPUT and COMMON. If a voltage input is used, the CHAIN OUTPUT is directly proportional to the input.
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL UCS-621E UCS-621E-C DESCRIPTION Sequencer control module, six relay outputs, eld calibrated Sequencer control module, six relay outputs, pre-calibrated (specify settings when ordering)
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1463
TRANSDUCERS
DESCRIPTION The UCS-821E is a solid-state device used for multistage control in HVAC systems, sequencing boilers or chillers, or oating/tri-state control of VAV boxes from a single analog signal. The UCS-821E can be used to obtain a digital output from a voltage or current producing sensor. Units may be daisy chained to provide additional stages of control, and a mounting track is supplied for easy installation.
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - EIGHT STAGE UCS-821E
NEW!
DIMENSIONS
in (cm)
SEQ FLT SEQ FLT
FEATURES Eight stages of relay control Voltage or current input 24 VAC/VDC power LED indication of relay status Adjustable relay setpoints Adjustable relay differentials Snap-track mounted
OPERATION
The UCS-821E accepts a 0-20 mA or 0-15V input signal to produce an eight-stage relay output. Each relay has a multiturn potentiometer adjustment to set the pull-in point. Each of the eight relays is jumper selectable to pull in on either a rise or fall in signal. Individual relay differential is easily adjusted by using different value plug-in differential resistors. Multiple UCS models can be daisy chained to operate additional stages from one input signal. A maximum of eight slave units can be daisy chained.
Depth: 1.19 (3.02)

SEQ FLT SEQ FLT
FLT CH V mA
SEQ
2.25 (5.72)
6.82 (17.32)
TRANSDUCERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current Input Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Accuracy 24 VAC 10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC 10% 280 mA @ 24 VAC; 140 mA @ 24 VDC maximum 0-20 mA or 0-15 VDC, jumper selectable 250 (mA input); 49.7 k (VDC input) Screw terminals 1% Eight SPDT relays, adjustable via setpoint potentiometers Relay Differential Factory set at 0.5 mA or 0.375V, adjustable using plug-in resistors Relay Output Rating 10A @ 120 VAC Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Weight 0.8 lb (0.36 kg) RoHS Statement Yes 1 year Warranty Output
23
1464
COMMON
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
24V POWER
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
Other differential resistors can be used (customer-supplied): 9.1 k = 0.25 mA or 0.1875V 36.5 k = 1.0 mA or 0.75V 54.9 k = 1.5 mA or 1.125V 73.2 k = 2.0 mA or 1.5V
SEQ FLT SEQ FLT SEQ FLT SEQ FLT
TRANSDUCERS
SEQUENCER CONTROL MODULE - EIGHT STAGE UCS-821E
Plug-in Differential Resistors (1/4W, 1%) 18.2 k = 0.5 mA or 0.375V (factory supplied) See Table 1 for other differentials.
Jumper should be in chain position (CH) when using UCS-821E as a slave unit.
FLT CH V mA
SEQ
Factory Relay Settings Relay 1: 5.3 mA, 4V Relay 2: 6.6 mA, 5V Relay 3: 8.0 mA, 6V Relay 4: 9.3 mA, 7V Relay 5: 10.7 mA, 8V Relay 6: 12.0 mA, 9V Relay 7: 13.3 mA, 10V Relay 8: 14.7 mA, 11V
24 VAC/VDC Signal mA or V
CW CCW COM
+ +
COMMON
24V POWER
SETUP / CALIBRATION
1. Set jumpers to desired position as follows: Mode jumpers - In FLT position, the relays energize on a decrease in signal. In the SEQ position, the relays energize on an increase in signal. Input jumpers - Select mA position for a 0-20 mA input or V position for a 0-15 VDC input. If the UCS-821E is used as a slave unit, place the bottle plug jumper in the chain position. 2. Connect a meter in series with the SIGNAL INPUT terminal and the 0-20 mA (+) signal to read a current signal. To read a voltage input, connect across the COMMON (-) and SIGNAL INPUT(+) terminals. 3. Adjust the input signal to the desired pull-in current or voltage for Relay 1. 4. If Relay 1 LED is on, turn its setpoint adjustment clockwise (counterclockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT position) until it de-energizes; otherwise, proceed to step 5. 5. Adjust Relay 1 pull-in point by turning its setpoint adjustment counterclockwise (clockwise if Relay 1 has mode jumper in FLT position) until the relay energizes. (The potentiometers are 25-turn potentiometers.) 6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for relays 2 through 8 using setpoint adjustments. 7. When using a 0-20 mA input, the CHAIN OUTPUT produces a 0-12 VDC signal, which is proportional to the input signal. Connections should be made between CHAIN OUTPUT and COMMON. If a voltage input is used, the CHAIN OUTPUT is directly proportional to the input.
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL UCS-821E UCS-821E-C DESCRIPTION Sequencer control module, eight relay outputs, eld calibrated Sequencer control module, eight relay outputs, pre-calibrated (specify settings when ordering)
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1465
TRANSDUCERS
DESCRIPTION The UMX-8 is a unique microcomputer-based multifunction interface that expands the input or output capability of building automation controllers. It has eight SPDT output relays that provide on/off control from a jumper-selectable PWM, current or voltage input signal. The sequence of operation can be easily selected by DIP switches. A dual mode allows two UMX-8s to be controlled in sequence from a single input signal. HOA switches allow for manual override of each relay output. Feedback and LEDs provide status indication of the UMX-8.The UMX-4 provides four SPDT output relays. All jumper positions and DIP switch settings are identical to the UMX-8. The operation of the UMX-4 is identical to relays 1-4 on the UMX-8. Feedback and LEDs provide status indication of the UMX-4. STANDARD CONTROL SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS Multiplexed Relay Output Expander - Provides up to 16 relay outputs expansion from one BAS output Multiplexed Input Expander - Provides up to 16 inputs expansion from one BAS output and one BAS input RTU or AHU Controller - Provides multistage heating and cooling sequences with economizer Sequencer - Up to 16 stages of sequential control Custom Sequences - Consult Kele for details
MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT / OUTPUT EXPANDER UMX-4, UMX-8
NEW!
APPLICATION The UMX is recommended for use only with BAS controllers programmable to issue discrete PWM, current, or voltage signal commands. For sequential relay control from a varying analog current or voltage signal, use a UCS sequencer module. One output, 1-5V (3 mA) for relays 1-4 Two outputs, 1-5V (3 mA) for relays 1 - 4 and for relays 5 - 8 Relay Output Rating 5A @ 24 VAC/VDC Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Operating Humidity Dimensions 3.3"H x 7.0"W x 1.6"D (8.3 x 17.8 x 4.0 cm) Weight 1.1 lb (0.5 kg) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 18 months Feedback UMX-4 UMX-8
FEATURES
Four or eight SPDT relay outputs HOA switches LED status indication Field-selectable functions Output status feedback Override indication Field-selectable PWM, current, or voltage inputs Pull-apart terminal blocks
TRANSDUCERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current UMX-4 UMX-8 Input Input Impedance Wiring Terminations Override Output UMX-4 UMX-8 24 VAC 10%, half-wave; or 24 VDC 10% 210 mA @ 24 VAC; 90 mA @24 VDC maximum 350 mA @ 24 VAC; 150 mA @ 24 VDC maximum PWM, 0-20 mA, 0-5V, 0-10V, 0-15V, jumper selectable 250 (mA input) maximum; 46.4 k minimum (VDC input) Screw terminals Transistor switch, 30 VDC @ 100 mA maximum Four SPDT relays Eight SPDT relays
23
1466
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
OPERATION
TABLE 2. SINGLE UNIT UMX CONTROL
TRANSDUCERS
Single and Dual UMX Control The UMX can be operated in both a single and dual operating mode. In the single mode, one UMX is controlled from a single current/voltage or PWM signal. In the dual mode, two UMXs are controlled in sequence, providing up to 16 relay outputs from a single current/voltage or PWM input. This dual UMX control is not available with all control sequences. Refer to the control sequences in Tables 2 and 3 for availability. If single UMX control is used, refer to Table 2 for DIP switch settings. For dual UMX control, refer to Table 3.
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) To control the UMX from a PWM signal, put the input selection jumper on the UMX in the PW position. Set the operating mode DIP switches (Tables 2 or 3) as required. Refer to the control sequence in Tables 4 through 7 for time base and control sequence information. Current/Voltage Input (ANA) The UMX can be controlled from a current or voltage input. To operate in this mode, set the input selection jumpers on the UMX as shown in Table 1. Set the operating mode DIP switches (See Tables 2 or 3) as required. Refer to the Control Sequence Tables 4 through 7 for time base and control sequence information.
TABLE 1. CURRENT/VOLTAGE INPUT JUMPERS Current/Voltage input 0-20 mA 0-5V 0-10V 0-15V AN MA 5V 10V 15V
OPERATING MODE (DIP SWITCHES 1, 2, 3, AND 4)

TABLE 3. DUAL UMX CONTROL PWM ANA L1 L2 HSL CSL SVT LVT X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X DIP SWITCHES 1 2 3 4 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
DIP SWITCHES PWM ANA L1 L2 HSL CSL SVT LVT 1 2 3 4 X 0 0 0 1 X X X 0 1 0 0 X X X 0 1 0 1 X X X 0 1 1 0 X X X 0 1 1 1
PWM ANA L1 L2 HSL CSL SVT LVT
Pulse-Width-Modulated Input Signal Current/Voltage Input Signal Level 1 UMX (Dual UMX Mode) Level 2 UMX (Dual UMX Mode) Hold Outputs on Signal Loss (Current/Voltage) Clear Outputs on Signal Loss (Current/Voltage) DIP Switches Short Signal Validation Time (Current/Voltage) 0 Off Long Signal Validation Time (Current/Voltage) 1 On
TRANSDUCERS
L1, L2 - UMX Levels - Dual UMX Mode Only In the Dual UMX mode, two UMXs respond in sequence to a single input signal. Using the DIP switch settings shown in Table 3, assign the rst UMX to Level 1 (L1) and the second UMX to Level 2 (L2). Dual UMX control is available in most current/voltage and PWM modes. PWM time base doubles in Dual UMX mode. HSL, CSL - Signal Loss Hold - Current/Voltage Input Mode Only When using a current/voltage input, the UMX can be programmed to either hold all relays in their current state (HSL) or turn all relays off (CSL) upon a loss of the input signal. Use DIP switch settings shown in Table 2 or Table 3 to program this feature. SVT, LVT - Signal Validation Time - Current/Voltage Input Mode Only When varying a current/voltage input signal to the UMX it is necessary for the input to remain at the desired value for a set length of time. This prevents other relays on the UMX from energizing while the input signal is changing values. This set length of time, or validation time, can be selected for either one (1) second (SVT) or three (3) seconds (LVT). Use the DIP switch settings in Table 2 or 3 to select the validation time. March 2014
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1467
TRANSDUCERS

CONTROL SEQUENCES (DIP SWITCHES 5, 6, 7, AND 8)
Relay status 0 = Command OFF 1 = Command ON X = No change of state
DISCRETE CURRENT AND VOLTAGE COMMANDS mA 5V 10V 15V

Note: Each input command may vary to approximately 50% of the change to the next highest or lowest command and still be considered valid.
TABLE 4. OUTPUT EXPANDER

(each relay independently controllable)
For current/voltage signal, DIP switches 5, 6, 7, and 8 are OFF, OFF, ON, OFF. For PWM signal, use OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF.
3.5 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 20.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0
0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75 5.00 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00
1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00
NEW!
PWM (SEC) 200 mSec Minimum Delay Between Pulses 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 2.25 3.00 3.75 4.50 5.25 6.00 6.75 7.50 8.25 9.00 9.75 10.50 11.25 12.00 12.75 13.50 14.25 15.00 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 X X X X X X X X 1 0 X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 X X X X X X 1 0 X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 X X X X 1 0 X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 X X 1 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 9.00 10.50 12.00 13.50 15.00 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 9.00 10.50 12.00 13.50 15.00 -1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 9.00 10.50 12.00 13.50 15.00 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SINGLE* UMX RELAYS UMX-8 UMX-4 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
*Dual UMX control available in PWM mode only. PWM time base doubles in Dual UMX mode.
TABLE 5. 4 or 8 INPUT EXPANDER

For current/voltage signal, DIP switches 5, 6, 7, and 8 are OFF, ON, OFF, ON . For PWM signal, use OFF, OFF, ON, ON.
*Dual UMX control available in both current/voltage and PWM modes. PWM time base doubles in Dual UMX mode.
TABLE 6. 4 or 8 STAGE SEQUENCER
TRANSDUCERS
For current/voltage signal, DIP switches 5, 6, 7, and 8 are OFF, ON, OFF, OFF. For PWM signal, use OFF, OFF, ON, OFF. Note: for adjustable thresholds, use UCS Series
TABLE 7. RTU CONTROLLER 3 HEAT, 3 COOL, FAN, ECONOMIZER

For current/voltage signal, DIP switches 5, 6, 7, and 8 are OFF, ON, ON, OFF For PWM signal, use OFF, ON, OFF, OFF.
23
4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0
1.00 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00
2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00
1468
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
WIRING
8 8 7 7
Override Switches: Apply 24V to the UMX for the override switches to function in the HAND position.
TRANSDUCERS
24V R
8 7
V39ZA1 Varistor Note: Any outputs driving an external relay or an inductive load should have a varistor installed at the relay as shown.
2 1
2 1
3
LED Indication: Relay LEDs (red): on when relay is energized in AUTO or HAND position
Input jumpers shown jumpered for 0-10V input
HAND
OVERRIDE
OFF
PWM
AUTO
POWER
Feedback Status (1-5 VDC) for Relays 5-8
UMX-8
PW AN 15V 10V 5V MA
FBK2 FBK1 24V PWR COM PWM PWM ANA OVERRIDE
Feedback Status (1-5 VDC) for Relays 1-4 24 VAC/VDC Power Supply
PWM BAS Controller Contacts (if PWM is used) PWM terminals are optoisolated and polarity insensitive. Contacts may be wired in series to either PWM terminal. Any 24V source can be used to power the PWM signal.
LED Indication: Power (green): PWM (yellow): Override (red):
Current or Voltage Signal (if used) On when power is present On when PWM signal is present On when any override switch is out of the Auto position Override Output, Transistor Switch 30 VDC @ 100 mA max switch closes to common when any override switch is out of the Auto position. Note: If driving a DC relay, a reverse connection diode is recommended across the relay coil (such as 1N4004).
FEEDBACK
The UMX-8 has two feedback voltage output circuits labeled FBK1 (relay outputs 1-4) and FBK2 (relay outputs 5-8). The UMX-4 has one feedback voltage output circuit labeled FBK1 (releay outputs 1-4). When a relay output is energized, the following voltage is added to the feedback output: FBK1 - Feedback Circuit #1 FBK2 - Feedback Circuit #2 Relays 1,2,3,4 Off 1.0V Relays 5,6,7,8 Off 1.0V Relay 1 On Add 0.27V Relay 5 On Add 0.27V Relay 2 On Add 0.53V Relay 6 On Add 0.53V Relay 3 On Add 1.07V Relay 7 On Add 1.07V Relay 4 On Add 2.13V Relay 8 On Add 2.13V Example: If outputs 1 and 3 are energized and 2 and 4 are de-energized, the voltage output on FBK1 will be 2.34V (1V + 0.27V +1.07V = 2.34V). The same would be true for FBK2 if relay outputs 5 and 7 were energized, and 6 and 8 were de-energized.
TRANSDUCERS
MODEL UMX-4 UMX-8 DESCRIPTION Four stage multifunction expander with HOA switches Eight-stage multifunction expander with HOA switches
23
March 2014
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1469
TRANSDUCERS
MANUAL OVERRIDE BOARDS MOB-4, MOB-8
DESCRIPTION The MOB Series manual override boards are designed to add hand/off/automatic operation to on/off controller outputs. They may also be used as stand-alone override switch banks. FEATURES AC or DC operation Ability to convert four or eight outputs to hand/off/auto operation Wire-captive screw termination LED indication Feedback monitoring of switch positions Snap-track mounted
NEW!
WIRING
MOB-4
STATUS
OPERATION
Hand/Off/Auto mode can be selected individually for each channel (1-8 or 1-4) with a three-position toggle switch. Each channel LED will light any time that output is commanded on from the hand or auto mode. 24 VAC or VDC must be applied to the HOT and RETURN terminals for the hand position to operate. The hand voltage source (hot terminal) and each auto IN voltage source can be separate sources as long as they all share a common return connection. The status contact is closed when all channel switches are in the auto position. Moving any switch to the off or hand position will cause the status contact to open.
HAND OFF AUTO
RETURN HOT
24 VAC / VDC
OUT AUTO IN OUT AUTO IN OUT AUTO IN OUT AUTO IN
Normally Closed to input of monitoring computer Contact opens if any switch is not in AUTO position. Pilot Relay 24V
Digital Output from BAS, PLC, or Other Controller
R * See Operation for power supply considerations
120 VAC typical Power Supply* 24VAC/VDC L
Motor or Motor Starter Coil
Safeties
MS
TRANSDUCERS
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply Current MOB-4 MOB-8 Input Wiring Terminations Output 24 VAC/VDC 65 mA maximum @ 24 VAC/VDC (half wave) 130 mA maximum @ 24 VAC/VDC (half wave) Voltage input to hand-off-auto toggle switches Wire-captive screw terminals Voltage output based on hand-offauto toggle switch position 1A @ 24 VAC/VDC Operating Temperature -10 to 140F (-23 to 60C) Operating Humidity 10% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions MOB-4 3.3"H x 3.8"W x 1.6"D (8.3 x 9.5 x 4.1 cm) MOB-8 3.3"H x 7.5"W x 1.6"D (8.3 x 19.1 x 4.1 cm) Weight MOB-4 0.4 lb (0.2 kg) MOB-8 0.8 lb (0.4 kg) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 1 year
23
Switching Capability
MODEL MOB-4 MOB-8 DESCRIPTION Manual override board, 4-channel hand-off-auto control Manual override board, 8-channel hand-off-auto control
1470
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
NEW!
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES APPLICATION
TRANSDUCERS
UNIVERSAL PULSE DIVIDER UPD SERIES
The UPD Series universal pulse divider accepts pulse signals from devices such as electric meters and ow sensors, rescales these pulses, and provides an isolated pulse output. This allows the receiving devices to monitor higher frequencies than they are able to accept directly. The UPD-2 provides two separate channels and the UPD-4 provides four channels. The output pulse signal is optically isolated from the input signal and each channel is isolated from the others. Two or four channels Optically-isolated signals 24 VAC power Snap-track mounted User-adjustable pulse divider ratio Operates with mechanical switch or open-collector transistor devices
WIRING
Make all connections according to the diagram below or as shown on the job diagrams and in compliance with national and local codes. Make all connections with the power removed. Failure to do so could result in circuit board damage.
The function of the UPD Series is to count input pulses and produce one output pulse for a specied number of input pulses. The pulse ratio from the UPD is user-adjustable through an eight-position DIP switch and may represent from one to 255 input pulses. An input pulse is dened as a contact opening, then closing, and then re-opening. The duty cycle or contact open/close ratio does not need to be exactly 50%. The input pulse rate may not exceed 50 pulses per second. The minimum open or closed time, whichever is shorter, must not be less than 10 milliseconds.
O F F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Out1 + Out1 In2 +
O F F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Out2 + Out2 To Pulse Counter Circuitry
In1 +
In1
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage Supply VA UPD-2 UPD-4 Input 24 VAC 10%
24 VAC
24 VAC Power Contacts at Monitored Device
Wiring Typical
In2
2.5 VA 5.0 VA Mechanical switch contact or opencollector transistor Input Signal Factory set scale 10:1; DIP switch adjustable range 1:1 to 255:1 Input Pulse Time Contact minimum open or close time 10 ms, maximum frequency 50 Hz Wiring Terminations Screw terminals Output 30 VDC, 6 mA maximum contact rating (observe polarity) Operating Temperature 32 to 158F (0 to 70C) Operating Humidity 0% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Dimensions UPD-2 3.3"H x 4.1"W x 1.0"D (8.3 x 10.5 x 2.5 cm) UPD-4 3.3"H x 8.3"W x 1.0"D (8.3 x 21.0 x 2.5 cm) Weight 0.5 lb (0.23 kg) RoHS Statement Yes Warranty 18 months March 2014
TRANSDUCERS
Pulse Ratio Rescaling Instructions The UPD is factory set to provide one output pulse for 10 input pulses. This ratio is easily changed in the eld. Each switch is assigned a pulse value shown in the table below. Simply turn ON the combination of switches that adds up to the number of input pulses you would like each output pulse to represent. For example, if you would like each output pulse to represent 100 input pulses, turn on the following: Switch 3 Switch 6 Switch 7 Total 4 32 64 100 Switch 1 2 3 4 ON Value 1 2 4 8 Switch 5 6 7 8 ON Value 16 32 64 128
output pulse period (seconds) =
DIP Switch Divider Input Frequency (pulse/second)
Note: Make divider even number for equal time high and low pulse.
MODEL UPD-2 UPD-4 DESCRIPTION Universal pulse divider, two channel Universal pulse divider, four-channel
23
WE MAKE IT EASY.
kele.com
888-397-5353 USA
1471
TRANSDUCERS
TRANSDUCER SELECTION CHART TRANSDUCER SELECTION CHART
TRANSDUCER SELECTION
INPUTS TO TRANSDUCERS OUTPUTS FROM TRANSDUCERS PNEUMATIC STANDARD CAPACITY MILLIAMP
IP-300 UCP-722 UCP-822 EPC UCP-242 UCP-422 CP-8551 CP-8552 CP-8511 T-1000 22/07-16
VOLTAGE
IP-300 UCP-722 UCP-822 EPC UCP-422-V CP-8552 CP-8511 EP-311/313 T-1000
TRI-STATE (FLOATING)
UCP-822 EFP
NEW!
PULSEWIDTH PNEUMATIC
UCP-822 EPW PWA-1T PWA-2T AUD RES-1E DRN3.1/4 PWA-1A PWA-2A PTA/2 PVI-1 PVI-2 VTI-1-XR1 VTI-2-XR1 UAT UMX-4 UMX-4 UMX-4 UMX-8 UMX-8
RESISTANCE
UCP-422-44T UCP-422-44
PNEUMATIC HIGH CAPACITY PNEUMATIC INDUSTRIAL CAPACITY RESISTANCE ANALOG (MILLIAMP OR VOLTAGE) ISOLATED ANALOG (MILLIAMP OR VOLTAGE) DIGITAL 1-STAGE DIGITAL 2-STAGE DIGITAL 4-STAGE DIGITAL 6-STAGE DIGITAL 8-STAGE
RES-1E RES-1E DRN3.1/4 DRN3.1/4 VTI-1 VTI-2 VTI-1 VTI-2 UMM UAT UMM UAT ARM 6N1-ISO ARM 6N1-ISO DT-13E AIM-1/2 UCS-121 UMX-4 UCS-221E AAR UMX-4 UCS-421E ATL UMX-8 UCS-621E UMX-8 UCS-821E UCS-221E UCS-421E UCS-621E UCS-821E AFP DT-13E AIM-1/2 UCS-121 UMX-4 UCS-221E AAR UMX-4 UCS-421E ATL UMX-8 UCS-621E UMX-8 UCS-821E UCS-221E UCS-421E UCS-621E UCS-821E AFP
TRANSDUCERS
TRI-STATE (FLOATING)
23
1472
888-397-5353 USA
kele.com
March 2014
KELE.COM
Check us out online! Our selection continues to grow after this catalog is printed. Visit kele.com or call us at 888-397-KELE (5353) .
T30 SERIES PG 10 3 4
VT7600 PG 1312
U G V L S E R IE S PG 170
S T- S * E W PG 1171
TM
For a secure way of life
BlueRidge
Technologies
CUSTOM
APPROVED
PANEL
ASSEMBLY
HEADQUARTERS
PG A2
VALVE ASSEMBLY
PG A3
TAGGING
& LABELING
PG A3
CUSTOM
CALIBRATION
PG A23
SINGAPORE OFFICE
(65) 6282.9120 | 48 MACTAGGART RD #11-01, SINGAPORE, 368088
888.397.KELE (5353) | 3300 BROTHER BLVD, MEMPHIS, TN 38133

Kele Building Automation Catalog 2014-2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Kele Building Automation Catalog 2014-2015

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kele Building Automation Catalog 2014-2015

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

30

450 SERIES PG 1352

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

NETWORK & WIRELESS

ALARMS & INDICATION

PNEUMATICS & FITTINGS

ELECTRICAL WIRING MATERIALS

POWER MONITORING & PROTECTION

GAS & SPECIALTY SENSORS

RELAYS & CONTACTORS

THERMOSTATS & CONTROLLERS

LEVEL & LEAK DETECTION

TOOLS & TEST EQUIPMENT

Listed & Assembled in the USA

WE BELIEVE in the POWER OF ONE

CALL PURCHASE ORDER SHIPMENT

MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX

MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX

MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX

MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX

MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX

MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX

MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX

MODEL / SERIES NUMBER INDEX

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

LMB, NMB, AMB, | p. 11 GMB Series

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

Products that are new to the catalog

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

*Maximum damper area assuming 7 in-lb/sq. ft damper torque March 2014

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

*Maximum damper area assuming 7 in-lb/sq. ft damper torque

WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

WHISKER SWITCH LS45M91B11

5.12 (130) 7.87 (200)

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

Cord 3' (91.4) 1/2 1.0 (2.54) 1 1.75 (4.45)

WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

Cable 30" (76) TT-470 1.0 (2.5) TT1-470 1.75 (4.4)

9-40 VDC Power Supply

WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ZG-DC1-K ZG-DC2-K DMPR-KC054

DMPR-KC008 DMPR-KC003 (shaft only)

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS

SGA24 March 2014

WHEN YOU NEED IT RIGHT, RIGHT NOW, CALL KELE.

ACTUATORS & DAMPERS